This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at|http : //books . google . com/
SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
Bulletin 30
HANDBOOK
OF
AMERICAN INDIANS
NORTH OF MEXICO
KDITEI) BY
FREDEIMCK W K lU^ HODdE
IN TWO PARTS
PART 1
WASHINGTON
GOVERNMENT PRINTINCJ OFFICE
Xh±s One
RUH5-6UC-PL1U
II
±257
LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL
Smithsonian Institution,
Bureau of American Ethnology,
Washimjtou, D. C, July 1, 1905.
Sir: I have the honor to submit herewith the manuscript of Bulletin
30 of the Bureau of American Ethnology, entitled ''Handbook of
American Indians,'" which has been in preparation for a number of
years and has been completed for publication under the editorship
of Mr F. W. Hodge. The Handbook contains a descriptiv^e list of
the stocks, confederacies, tribes, tribal divisions, and settlements north
of Mexico, accompanied with the various names by which these have
been known, together with biographies of Indians of note, sketches of
their history, archeology, manners, arts, customs, and institutions, and
the aboriginal words incorporated into the English language.
Respectfully,
W. H. Holmes, Chief,
The Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution,
W<it<liin(jton^ I), 0.
P R E F A C E
During the earl}' exploration and settlement of North America, a
multitude of Indian tribes were encountered, having diverse rustoms
and languages. Lack of knowledge of the aborigines and of their lan-
guages led to many curious errors on the part of the early explorers and
settlei's: names were applied to the Indians that had no relation what-
ever to their aboriginal names; sometimes nicknames were bestowed,
owing perhaps to personal characteristics, fancied or real; sometimes
tribes came to be known by names given by other tribes, which were
often opprobrious; frequently the designation !)y which a tribal group
was known to itself was employed, and as such names are oftentimes
unpronounceable b}- alien tongues and unrepresenta!)le bv civilized
alphabets, the result was a sorry corruption, varying according as the
sounds were impressed on Spanish, English, French, Dutch, German,
Russian, or Swedish ears. Sometimes, again, !)ands of a single tribe
were given distinctive tribal names, while clans and gentes were often
regarded as independent autonomous groups to which separate tribal
designations likewise were applied. Consequenth\ in the literature
relating to the American Indians, which is practicall}^ coextensive with
the literature of the first three centuries of the New World, thousands
of such names are recorded, the significance and application of which
are to be understood only after much study.
The need of a comprehensive work on the subject has been felt ever
since scientific interest in the Indians was first aroused. Many lists of
tribes have been published, but the scientific student, as well as the
general reader, until the present time has })een pi-acticall}- without the
means of knowing any more about a given confederacy, tribe, clan, or
settlement of Indians than was to be gleaned from casual references
to it.
The work of which this Handbook is an outgrowth had its inception
as early as 1873, when Prof. Otis T. Mason, now of the United States
National Museum, began the preparation of a list of the tribal names
mentioned in the vast literature pertaining to the Indians, and in due
time several thousand names were recorded, with references to the
works in which they appear. The work was continued by him until
after the establishment of the Bureau, when other duties compelled its
suspension. Later the task was assigned to Col. Garrick Mallery, who,
however, soon abandoned it for investigations in a field which proved
VI PREFACE
to be his life work, namely, the pictography and sign language
of the American Indians. Meanwhile Mr James Mooney was engaged
in compiling a similar list of tribes, with their synonymy, classified
chiefly on a geogmphic basis and covering the entire Western Hemi-
sphere—a work begun in 1873 and continued for twelve years before
either he or the members of the Bureau of American Ethnology knew
of the labors of each other in this field.
Soon after the organization of the Bureau in 1879, the work of record-
ing a tribal synonymy was formally assigned to Mr Henry W. Henshaw.
Up to this time a complete linguistic classification of the tribes north
of Mexico, particularh' in the West and Northwest, was not possible,
since suflScient data had not been gathered for determining their lin-
guistic affinities. Mr Henshaw spon perceived that a linguistic classi-
fication of the Indian tribes, a work long contemplated by Major
Powell, must precede and form the basis for a tribal synonymy, and to
him, therefore, as a necessary preliminary, was intrusted the supervision
of such a linguistic classification. By 1885 the Bureau's researches in
this direction had reached a stage that warranted the grouping of prac-
tically all the known tribes by linguistic stocks. This classification ,
is published in the Seventh Annual Report of the Bureau, and on it is
based, with few exceptions, the present Handbook.
Immediatel}^ on the completion of the linguistic classification, the
entire force of the Bureau, under Mr Henshaw's immediate direction,
was assigned to the work that had now grown into a Dictionary and
Synonymy of the Indian Tribes North of Mexico. As his special field
Mr Henshaw devoted attention to several of the Californian stocks,
and to those of the North Pacific coast, north of Oregon, including
the Eskimo. To Mr Mooney were given the great and historically
important Algonquian and Iroquoian families, and through his wide
general knowledge of Indian history and customs he rendered aid in
many other directions. A list of Linguistic Families of the Indian
Tribes North of Mexico, with Provisional List of the Principal Tribal
Names and Synonyms (55 pp., octavo), was at once printed for use by
the collaborators of the Bureau m connection with the complete com-
pilation, and although the list does not include the Californian tribes,
it proved of great service in the earlier stages of the work. The
2,500 tribal names and synonyms appearing in this list were taken
chiefl}' from Mr Mooney 's manuscript; the linguistic classification was
the result of the work that the Bureau had been conducting under
Mr Henshaw's supervision.
Kev. J. Owen Dorsey assumed charge of the work on the Siouan,
Caddoan, and Athapascan stocks; Dr W. J. Hoffman, under the per-
sonal direction of Major Powell, devoted his energies to the Shoshonean
family, and Mr Jeremiah Curtin, by reason of his familiarity with a
number of the Californian tribes, rendered direct aid to Mr Henshaw
PREFACE VII
in that field. Dr Albert S. Gatschet employed his time and long
experience in the preparation of the material pertaining to the Musk-
hogean tribes of southeastern United States, the Yuman tribes of the
lower Colorado drainage and of Lower California, and various smaller
linguistic groups. To Col. Garrick Mallerv were assigned the French
authors bearing on the general subject. With such aid the work
received a pronounced impetus, and before the close of 1885 a large
body of additional material had been recorded. Four years later the
elaboration of the material pertaining to the Yuman, Piman, Keresan,
Tanoan, and Zunian stocks of the extreme Southwest was placed in
charge of Mr F. W. Hodge, who brought it to completion.
The work was continued under Mr Henshaw's supervision until, in
1893, ill health compelled his abandonment of the task. This is the
more to be regretted as Mr Henshaw had in course of preparation a
classification and nomenclature of the minor divisions of the linguistic
stocks, which is essential to a proper presentation and a clear under-
standing of the subject. After Mr Henshaw's relinquishment of the
work, Mr Hodge was given entire charge of it. But other official
duties of members of the staff prevented the Handbook as a whole
from making marked progress until 1899, when Dr Cyrus Thomas
was intrusted with the task of revising the recorded material !)earing
on the Algonquian, Siouan, and Muskhogean families.
In 1902 the work on the Handbook was again S3'stematically taken
up, at the instance of Secretary Langley, who detailed Mr Hodge, at
that time connected immediately with the Smithsonian Institution, to
undertake its general editorial supervision. The scope of the subject-
matter was enlarged to include the relations between the aborigines and
the Government; their archeology, manners, customs, arts, and indus-
tries; brief biographies of Indians of note; and words of aboriginal
origin that have found their way into the English language. It was
proposed also to include Indian names that are purely geogniphic, but
by reason of the vast number of these it was subsequently deemed advis-
able to embod}^ them eventually in an independent work. Moreover, it
was provided that the work should be illustrated as adequatelvas time
and the illustrative material available would admit, a feature not orig-
inally contemplated. To fully cover this vast field at the present time
is impossible, by reason of the fact that research among the native
tribes, notwithstanding the extensive and important work that has
been accomplished in recent years, has not advanced far beyond the
first stage, even when is taken into account the sum of knowledge
derived from the researches of the Bureau and of other institutions,
as well as of individuals.
The lack of completeness of our present knowledge of the tribes was,
perhaps, never better shown than when an attempt was made to carry
out the enlarged plan of the Handbook. With its limited force the
VIII PREFACE
Bureau could scarcely hope to cover the entire range of the subject
within a reasonable time; consequently various specialists not directly
connected with the Bureau were invited to assist — an invitation that was
accepted in a manner most gratifying. It is owing to the generous
aid of these students that a work so complete as the Handbook is
intended to be was made possible, and to them the Bureau owes its deep
appreciation. That the Handbook has many imperfections there is no
doubt, but it is hoped that in future editions the weak points may be
strengthened and the gaps filled, until, as researches among the tribes
are continued, the compilation will eventually represent a complete
summary of existing knowledge respecting the aborigines of northern
America.
The scope of the Handbook is as comprehensive as its function neces-
sitates. It treats of all the tribes north of Mexico, including the Eskimo,
and those tribes south of the boundary more or less affiliated with those
in the United States. It has been the aim to give a brief description of
every linguistic stock, confedei*acy, tribe, subtribe or tribal division,
and settlement known to history or even to tradition, as well as the origin
and derivation of every name treated, whenever such is known, and to
record under each ever}^ form of the name and every other appellation
that could be learned. These synonyms, in alphabetic order, are assem-
bled as cross references in Part 2.
Under the tribal descriptions a brief account of the ethnic relations
of the tribe, its history, its location at various periods, statistics of
population, etc., are included. Accompanying each synonym (the
earliest known date always being given) a reference to the authority
is noted, and these references form practically a bibliography of the
tribe for those who desire to pursue the subject further. It is not
claimed that ever}' spelling of every tribal name that occurs in print is
given, but it is believed that a sufficient number of forms is recorded
to enable the student to identify practically every name by which any
group of Indians has been known, as well as to trace the origin of
many of the terms that have been incorporated into our geographic
nomenclature.
In many instances the treatises are satisfactoril}- illustrated; in
others, much necessarily has been left to a future edition in order
that the present publication may not be further delayed. The work
of illustration was intrusted largely to Mr De Lancey Gill.
The contributors to Part 1, in addition to those who have rendered
valued assistance by affording information, correcting proofs, and in
other ways, are as follows, the names being arranged in the alphabet-
ical order of the initials attached to the signed articles:
A.. C. F. Alice C. Fletcher of Washington.
A. F. C. Alexander F. Chamberlain of Clark University.
A. H. A. Hrdlicka of the United States National Museum.
PREFACE IX
A. L. D. Anna L. Dawes of Pittsfield, Mass.
A. L. K. A. L. Kroeber of the University of California.
A. S. G. Albert S. Gatschet, formerly of tlie Bureau of .^merican Ethnology.
C. M. F. Cora M. Folsoni of the Hampton Normal and Agricultural Institute,
Hampton, Va.
C. T. Cyrus Thomas of the Bureau of American Ethnology.
E. G. E. Elaine Goodale Eastman of Amherst, Mass.
E. L. H. Edgar L. Hewett of Washington.
F. B. Franz Boas of Columbia rniver^^ity.
F. H. Frank Huntington, formerly of the Bureau of American Ethnology.
F. H. C. The late Frank Hamilton Cushingof the Bureau of American Ethnology^
F. V. C. F. V. Coville of the United States Department of Agriculture.
F. W. H. F. W. Hodge of the Bureau of American Ethnology.
G. A. D. George A. Dorsey of the Field Museum of Natural History.
G. B. G. George Bird Grinnell of New York.
G. F. Gerard Fowke of Saint Louis.
G. P. M. George P. Merrill of the United States National Museum.
H. E. B. Herbert E. Bolton of the University of Texas.
H. W. H. Henry W. Henshaw, formerly of the Bureau of American Ethnology.
J. C. The late Jeremiah Curtin of the Bureau of American Ethnology.
J. D. M. Joseph D. McGuire of Washington.
J. H. D. Josiah H. Dortch of the Office of Indian Affairs.
J. M. James Mooney of the Bureau of American Ethnology.
J. McL. James McLaughlin of the Office of Indian Affaii-s.
J. N. B. H. J. N. B. Hewitt of the Bureau of American Ethnology.
J. O. D. The late J. Owen Dorsey of the Bureau of American Ethnology.
J. R. S. John R. Swanton of the Bureau of American Ethnology.
J. W. F. J. Walter Fewkes of the Bureau of American Ethnology.
L. F. Livingston Farrand of Columbia University.
M. E. G. Merrill E. Gates of the Board of Indian Con^ni^?sioner8.
M. K. S. M. K. Sniffen of the Indian Rights Association.
O. T. M. Otis T. Mason of the United States National Museum.
P. E. B. Paul Edmond Beckwith of the United States National Museum.
P. E. G. P. E. G«iddard of the Univei-sity of California.
R. B. D. Roland B. Dixon of Harvard University.
R. H. L. Robert H. Lowie of New York.
S. A. B. S. A. Barrett of the University of California.
S. C. Stewart Culin of the Brooklyn Institute Museum.
S. M. B. S. M. Brosius of the Indian Rights Association.
W. E. Wilberforce Eames of the New York Public Library.
W. H. Walter Hough of the United States National ^luseum.
W. H. H. William H. Holmes of the Bureau of American Ethnology.
W. J. William Jones of the Field Museum of Natural History.
W. M. The late Washington Matthews, Unite<l States Army.
F. W. Hodge.
Bureau of American pyrHNOLOOY,
Uecemher, 1906.
HANDBOOK OF THE INDIANS
AANETTTK. An extinct village of the
Tututni, a Pacific Athapascan group
formerly living on the Oregon coast.
' A'4-ne'-tibi.— Dorsev in Journ. Am. Folk-lore, iii,
236.1890.
Aatsosni (* narrow gorge ') • A Navaho
clan.
Aati6sm.— Matthews. Navaho Legends, 30. 1897.
Ababco. An eastern Algonquian tribe
or subtribe. Althougli mentioned in the
original records of 1741 (Bacon, Laws of
Maryland, 1765) in connection with the
Hutsawaps and Tequassimoes as a dis-
tinct tribe, they were probably only a
division of the fchoptank. This name is
not mentioned in John Smith's narrative
of his exploration of Chesapeake bay.
The band lived on Choptank r., Md., and
in 1741 the Colonial government con-
firmed them in the possession of their
lands on the s. side of that stream, in Dor-
chester CO., near Secretary cr. By 1837
the entire tribe to which they belonged
ha<l dwindled to a few individuals of
mixed Indian and African blood. ( j. m. )
Ababevei.— Bozman, Hist. Mainland, i, 115, 1837.
Abascal. A Diegueiio rancheria near
San Diego, s. Cal.— Ortega (1795) quoted
by Bancroft, Hist. Cal., i, 253, 1886.
AbuAoal.— Ibid. Agusoal.— Ibid.
Abayoa. A Tequesta village at the s.
extremity of Florida pen., mentioned in
connection with the expedition of Ponce
de lieon (1512).— Barcia, Ensayo, 2, 1723.
Abbatotine ( * bighorn people ' ) . A Na-
hane tribe living in upper Pelly, Mac-
millan, and Stewart r. valleys, Yukon T.
Abbito-teni'.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. i, 32,
1877. Abba-to-tcnah.— Dall in Proo. A. A. A. S..
271, 1870. Abbato-tinneh.— Bancroft, Nat. Races.
Ill, 587, 1882. AiFats-tena.— Ibid., i, 149 (misprint).
Ah-bab-to din-ne.— Hardisty in Smithson. Rep.
1866, 311. 1872. Ambahtawoot.— Prichard, Phys.
Hist., V, 377, 1847. Ambah-Uwut-dinni.— Latham in
Trans. Philol. Soc. Lend., 69, 1856 (trans. ' moun-
tain sheep men'). Amba-ta-ut' tine.— Richard-
son. Arct. Exped., ii, 7, 1851. Am-ba-U-ut' tine.—
Petitot, Diet. D^nd Dindji<^. xx, 1876. Ambataw-
woot.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, II.28, 1852. Am-
bawtamoot.— Ibid., iii, 525, 1853. AmbawUwhoot-
dianeh.— Franklin, Narr., ii. 84, 1824. Ambawta-
whoot Tinneh.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, v, 640, 1882.
Ambawtawoot.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq.
Soc, II, 19, 1836. Ambawtowhoot— Balbi. Atlas
Ethnog., 821. 1826 Kountain Sheep Ken.— Latham
in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 69, 1856. Sheep In-
dians.—Franklin, Narr.. ii, 84, 1824. Sheep Peo-
ple.—Richardson, op. cit.
Abbigadasset. An Abnaki sachem whose
residence was on the coast of Maine near
the mouth of Kennebec r. He conveyed
tracts of land to Englishmen conjointly
Bull. 30—05 1
with Kennebis. In 1667 he deeded Swans
id. to Humphrey Daw. — Drake, Bk.
Inds., bk. 3, 101, 1837.
Abechin (a Tewa onomatope represent-
ing the screech of an owl. — E. L. Hew-
ett). A prehistoric Tewa pueblo at a
place called La Puente, on a bluff close to
the s. bank of Rio Chama, 3 m. s. e. of the
present town of Abiquiu, Rio Arriba co.,
N. Mex. — Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
IV, 56, 58, 1892.
Abe-chiu.— Bandelier, op. cit., 39 (aboriginal
name). Oj-po-re-ge.— Ibid., 58 (Santa Clara name:
'place where metatcs are made rough.')
Abercronk. A former (Potawatomi?)
village on L. Michigan, in n. e. Porter
CO., Ind.— Hough, map in Indiana Geol.
Rep. for 1882-3, 1883.
Aberginian. A collective term used
by the early settlers on Massachusetts
bav for the tribes to the northward.
Johnson, in 1654, says they consisted of
the **Massachuset," **Wippanap," and
"Tarratines." The name may be a cor-
ruption of Abnaki, or a misspelling for
"aborigines." The Wippanap are evi-
dently the Abnaki, while the Tarratines
are the same Indians, or a part of them.
(J. M.)
Abarglnny.— Johnson (16*28) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 2d 8.. II, 66, 1814. Abergeny.— Williams
(1643), ibid., 1st s., in, 204, 1794. Aberginian*.-
Wood (1634) quoted by Schoolcraft. Pers. Mem.,
644, 1851. Aberieney.— Levett (1628) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 3d s., vill, 174. 1843. Aborginny.—
Humphrey's Acc't, 281. 1730 (incorrectly quoting
Johnson, 1628).
Abihka. One of the oldest of the Upper
Creek towns; exact location unknown,
but it was near upper Coosa r., Ala.
Abacoee.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 462. 1885.
Abchas.- McKenney and Hall. Ind. Tribes, in,
79. 1864 (probably a misprint of Abekas). Abe-
oaea.— Coxe, Carblana. 25. 1741. Abeoas.- Ibid.,
map. Abecka.— Romans, Florida, 309, 1775. Abei-
oas.— Alcedo. Dice. GeogrAfica. i. 3. 1786. Abei-
ka».— P^^nicaut (1708) in French. Hist. Coll. La.,
n. 8., 1, 101, 1869. Abekas.— Bossu (1769), Travels in
Louisiana, i, 229, 1771. Abicas.- La Harpe (1703)
in French. Hist. Coll. La., ili, 29. ia51. Abi'hka.—
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg.. l, 124, 1884. Abikas.-
La Harpe (1707) in French, Hist. Coll. La., in,
36, 1851. Abikaws.— Rivers, Early Hist. So. Car.,
94, 1874. Albikas.- La Harpe (1714) in French.
Hist. Coll. La., in, 43, 1851. Apiecas. —Williams,
Florida, 76. 1837 (same?). Au-be-cuh.— Hawkins
(1799), Sketch of Creek Country, 42, 1848.
Aubocoei. —Macomb (1802) in Am. State Papers,
Ind. Aff., I, 680, 1832. Becaei.— Coxe. Carolana,
25. 1741. Beica».— Gat««chet. Creek Migr. Leg., i,
125. 1884. Obekawi.- Von der Reck in Urlsperger,
Ausfuhrliche Nachricht von den Saltzburgi.scnen
Emigranten. 871, 173.^. Obika.— (iatschet. Creek
Migr. Leg., i, 125, 1884. Sak'hutka.— Gatschet, in-
1
ABIHKA ABNAKI
[B. A. B.
formation (symbolic name, sig. 'door,' as the
town was situated at the n. limits of the Creek
country, and thus defended it against hostile
inroads).
Abihka. A town of the Creek Nation
on the 8. side of North fork of Canadian
r., Tp. 11 N., R. 8e., Ind. T.
Abfhka.— (Jatschet, Creek Migr. Leg.,ii,185,18H8.
Arbeka.— r. S. P. (). Guide. 366. 1904.
Abikudshi ( * Little Abihka* ) . A former
Upper Creek town in n. Talladega co.,
Ala., on the right bank of Tallahatchee
cr., 5 in. E. of Coosa r. It was settled
by Abihka Indians and some of the
Natchez. Bartram (1775) states that
the inhabitants spoke a dialect of Chick-
asaw, which could have been true of
only a part.
Abaooochet.— Bartram, Travels, 461, 1791. Aba-
ooucheei.— U. S. Ind. Treaties (1797), 68, 1837.
Abbaoooobees. — Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, v, 262, 1855. Abecoobe.— Jeffer>'8, Am.
Atlas, 5, 1776. Abeoocbi.— Alcedo, Dice. Geog., i,
.3. 1786. Abecooehee.— r. 8. Ind. Treaties (1814),
162. 1837. Abecotbee.— I>attr^, Carte des Etats-
Unis, 1784. Abtoou^chii.— Baudry de Lozi^res,
• Vov. Louisiane, 241. 1802. Abuoboebu.— H. R. Ex.
Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 1st sess.. 315, 1836. Arbic-
oooohee.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 425, 24th Cong., 1st sess.,
301,1836. Au-ba-coo-obe.— Hawkins (1814) in Am.
State Papers, Ind. Aff., i. 837, 1832. Au-be-ooo-
che.— Hawkins (1798-99), Sketch, 41, 1848.
Abikndshi. A town of the Creek Nation
on Deep fork of Canadian r. , above Ocmul-
gee, Ind. T.
Abi'bkudahi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 185,
1888.
Abiqniii ( from AhecfnUj q. v. ) . A pueblo
founded by the Spaniards prior to 1747
at the site of the prehistoric Tewa pueblo
of Fejiu, on the Rio Chama, Rio Arriba
CO., N. Mex. In Aug., 1747, it was raided
by the Ute, who killed a number of the
inhabitants and compelled its abandon-
ment. It was resettled soon afterward,
and in 1748 contained 20 families, but,
owing to further depredations by the Ute
and Navaho, was £^in abandoned, and
in 1754 reoccupied. In 1765 the settle-
ment (the mission name of which was
Santa Rosa, later changed to Santo
Tomas) containeil 166 persons, and in the
vicinity were 612 others. In 1779 the
pueblo had 851 inhabitants, and at least
as early as 1794 it was peopled in part by
Genizaros, or Indian captives and fugi-
tives, chiefly Hopi, whom the Spaniards
had rescued or purchased. In 1808 Abi-
quiu contained 122 Indians and 1,816
whites and mestizos. The town was
thoroughly Mexicanized by 1854. See
Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 280, 1889;
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 54,
1892. (F. w. H.)
Abequin.— Keni in Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, iv, 39,
1854. Abicu.— Arrowsmith, Map of N. A., 1795,
ed. 1814. Abioui.— Humboldt. Atlas Nouv. Es-
pagne, carte 1, 1811. Abi«iin.— Ward in Ind.
Aff. Rep. 1867, 210, 1868. Abiquioo.— Lane (1854)
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 689, 1856. Abi-
Suieu.— Escudero, Noticias Nuevo-M6x., 14, 1849.
Lbiquin.— Hezio (1797-98) in Meline, Two Thou-
sand Miles, 260, 1867. Abiqiuri.— Miihlenpfordt,
MeUco, II. 633, 1844. Abiquiu.— Ms. of 1750 cited
by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iii, 174, 1890.
Abriou.— Pike, Ezped., map, 1810. Abuquin.—
Johnston in Emory, Recon., 569, 1848. AIM-
quin.— Simpson, Rep., 2, 1850. Aluquia.— Busch-
mann, N. Mex., 245, 1858. Jo-so-ge.— Bandelier
in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 54, 1892 (Tewa name;
from Jo-8o, their name for the Hopi, becau^
most of the inhabitants were of that tribe).
Santa Rota de Abiquiu.— Dominguez y Escalante
(1776) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 2d s., i, 378, 1864. Baa
Tomat de Abiquiu.— Ward in Ind. AfT. Rep. 1867,
213, 1868. Santo TonUU de Abioui. — Orozco y Berra
in Anales Minis. Fom., vi, 255, 1882. Santo Tomaa
de Abiquiu.— Alencaster (1805) in Meline, Two
Thousand Miles, 212, 1867. Sta Rom Abiqui^.—
Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 252, 1889.
Abittibi (abVia, 'half,' * middle/ * in-
termediate' ; 6?*, a secondary stem refer-
ring to a state or condition, here alludins
to water; -g, a locative suffix: hence *half
way-across water,' referring to the situa-
tion of Abittibi lake. — W . Jones ) . A little
known Algonkin band whose habitat has
been the shores of Abittibi lake, Ont.
The first recorded notice of them is in th^
Jesuit Relation for 1640. It is said in the
Relation of 1660. that the Iroquois had
warred upon them and two other tribes
of the same locality. Du Lhut (1684)
includes them in the list of nations of the
region n. of L. Superior whose trade it
was desirable should be turned from the
English of Hudson bay to the French.
Chauvignerie (1786) seems to connect
this tribe, estimated at 140 warriors, with
the Tetes de Boule. He mentions as
totems the partridge and the eagle. They
were reported by the Canadian Indian
Office to number 450 in 1878, after which
date they are not officially mentioned,
(j. M. c. T.)
Abbetikii. —Chauvignerie ( 1 736 ) quoted by School-
craft, Ind.Tribes, iii,556, 1863. Abbitibbet.— Keane
in Stanford, Compendium, 498, 1878. Abitibii.—
Harris, Voy. and Trav.. i, map, 1705. Abittibbes.—
Walch.map, 1805. Abittibii.— Chauvignerie (1736)
in N. Y. Doc. Hist., ix, 1054, 1855. OuUbitibek.—
Jesuit Rel. 1660. in, 12, 1858. Outabytibu Bac-
gueville de la Potherie, ii, 49, 1753. OuUtibes.—
Harris, Voy. and Trav., i, map, 1705. Tabitibis.—
Du Lhut (1684) in Margry, D^Tc, Vl, 51. 1886. Ta-
bittibii.— Chauvignerie (1736) in N. Y. Doc. Hist.,
IX, 1053, 1855. Tabittikii. —Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, in, 555, 1853. Tibitibia. —Hennepin, New
Disc., map, 1698.
Abmoctac. A former Costanoan village
connected with Dolores mission, San Fran-
cisco, Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct.
18, 1861.
Abnaki. ( Wdhi'inahi, from wdbtin^ a
term associated with Might,' * white,* and
refers to the morning and the east; dki
*.earth,* 'land*; hence Withiiiidki is an
inanimate singular term signifying * east-
land,' or * morning-land,* tlje elements
referring to animate dwellers of the east
being wanting. — Jones). A name used
by the English and French of the colonial
period to designate an Algonquian con-
federacy centering in the present state of
Maine, and by the Algonquian trib^ to
include all those of their own stock resi-
dent on the Atlantic seaboard, more par-
ticularly the "Abnaki** in the Nand the
Dela wares in the s. More recently it has
been applied also to the emigrant Oneida,
BULL. 30]
ABNAKI
Stockbridges, and Munsee alwut Green
bay, Wis. By the Puritans they were
generally called Tarrateens, a t(»rm appar-
ently obtained from the southern New
England tribes; and though that is tlie
general conclusion of modern authorities,
there is some doubt as to the aboriginal
origin of this term. In later times, after
the main body of the Abnaki had re-
moved to Canada, the name was applied
more especially to the Penobscot tribe.
The Iroquois called them Owenunga,
which seems to be merely a modification
of Abnaki, or Abnaqui, the name applied
by the French and used by most mcldern
writers. The form Openango has been
used more especially to designate the
eastern tribes. Maurault (Hist, des
Aben.,2, 1866) says: **So!ue Knglish au-
thors have called these savages Waba-
noaks, 'those of the east'; this is the
reason they are called *Abenakis' by some
among us. This name was given them
because they were toward the east with
reference to the Narragansetts. "
Ethnic relations. — In his tt^ntative ar-
rangement Brinton (l^n. Leg., 11, 1885)
brings into one group the Nascai)ee, Mic-
mac, Malecite, Ktchimin, and Abnaki,
but this is more of a geographic than a
linguistic grouping. Vetromile (Abnakis,
20, 1866), following other authors, says
that we should "embrace under this term
all the trilx?s of the Algic [Algoncpiian]
family, who occupy or have occupied the
K. or N. E. shore of* North America; thus,
all the Indians of the seashores, from
V^irginia to Nova Scotia, were Abnaki."
Maurault gives the following as the prin-
cipal tril)es of the Abnaki confeileracy :
Kanil^esinnoaks ( Norridgewock in part;
see Kenneltec and XorridgeK'ock); Pat-
suikets (Sokoki in part); Sokouakiaks
(Sokoki) ;Nurhantsuak8( Norridgewock ) ;
Pentagoets ( Penobscot ) ; Etemankiaks
(Etchimin); Ouarastegouiaks ( Malecite),
the name Abnaki being applied in the
restricted sense to the Indians of Kenne-
bec r. All these tribes spoke substantially
the same language, the chief dialectal
differences l)eing between the Etchimin
and the other tribes of the group. The
Etchimin, who formed a subgroup of the
Abnaki confeileracy, included the Passa-
maquoddy and Malecite. Linguistically
the Abnaki do not appear to be more
closely related to the Micmac than to the
Delaware group, and Dr William Jones
finds the Abnaki closely related- to the
central Algonquian languages. In cus-
toms and beliefs they are more nearly
related to the Micmac, and their ethnic
relations appear to be with the tribes n.
of the St Lawrence.
History^ — The history of the Abnaki
may be said to b^nwith Verrazano's
visit in 1524. The mythical accounts of
Noruml)ega ((j. v.) of the early writers
and navigators finally dwindled to a
village of a few bark-covered huts under
the name Agguncia, situated near the
mouth of Penobscot r., in the country of
the Abnaki. In 1604 Champlain ascended
the Penobscot to the vicinity of the pres-
ent Bangor, and met the "lord" of No-
ruml)ega, doubtless an Abnaki chief.
From that time the Abnaki formed an
important factor in the history of the
region now em braced in thestate of Miane.
From the time of their disco verv until
their partial withdrawal to Canada they
occupie<l the general region from the St
Johns to the Saco; but the earliest English
accounts indicate that about 1605-20 the
s. w. part of the coast of Maine was oiru-
pied by other Indians, whose chief seat
was near Pema<iuid, and who were at war
with the Abnaki, or Tarrateen, as the
English termed them, who were more to
the n; but these other tril)es were finally
conquered by the Abnaki and probably
GROUP OF ABNAKI (pASSAMAQUOOOy)
absorbed by them. Who these Indians
were is unknown. The Abnaki forme<l
an early attachment for the French,
chiefiy through the infiuence of their
missionaries, and carried on an almost
constant war with the English until the
fall of the French power in America.
The accounts of these struggles during
the settlement of Maine are familiar
episodes in American history. As the
whites encroached on them the Abnaki
gradually withdrew to Canada and settle<l
chiefly at B^cancour and Sillery, the
latter being afterward abandoned by
them for St Francis, near Pierreville,
Quebec. The Penobscot, Passama(][Uoddy,
and Malecite, however, remained in their
ancient homes, and in 1749 the Penobscot,
as the leading tribe, made peace with the
English, accepting fixed bounds. Since
that period the different tribes have
gradually dwindled into insignificance.
The descendants of those who emigrated
ABNAKI
[b. a. b.
from Maine, together with remnants of
other New England tribes, are now at
St Francis and B^eancour, in Quebec,
where, under the name of Abnaki, they
numbered 395 in 1903. At the same
time the Malecite, or Amalicite, were
numbered at 801 in several villages in
New Brunswick and Quebec, with about
625 Penobscot and Passamaquoddy in
Maine. The present Penobscot say they
number between 300 and 400, while the
Pa^8ama<iuoddy claim as many as 800
souls.
Ca>toin8 and beliefs. — According to the
writers on early Maine, the Abnaki were
more gentle in manners and more docile
than their western congeners. Yet they
were implacableenemies and, as Maurauft
states, watched for opportunities of re-
venge, as did other Indians. Notwith-
standing Vetromile's statement to the
contrary, if Maurault's assertion (Hist.
Abenakis, 25, 1866) applies to this tribe,
as seems evident, they, like most other
tribes, were guihy of torturing their pris-
oners, except in the case of females, who
were kindly treated. Although relying
for subsistence to a large extent on hunt-
ing, and still more on fishing, maize was
an important article of diet, especially in
winter. Sagard states that in his day
they cniltivated the soil in the manner of
the Huron. They used the rejected and
superfluous fish to fertilize their fields,
one or two fish lx?ing placed near the roots
of the plant. Their houses or wigwams
were conical in form and covered with
birch-bark or with woven mats, and sev-
eral families occupied a single dwelling.
Their villages were, in some cases at least,
inclosed with palisades. Each village had
its council house of considerable size,
obloujET in form and roofed with bark;
and similar structures were used by the
males of the village who preferred to
club together in social fellowship. Po-
Ivgamy was practised but little, and
tlie marriage ceremony was of the sim-
plest character; presents were offered,
and on their acceptance marriage was
consummated. Each tribe had a war
chief, and also a civil chief whose duty it
was to preserve order, though this was
accomplisheil through advice rather than
by command. They had two councils,
the grand and the general. The folmer,
consisting of the chiefs and two men from
each family, determined matters that
were of great importance to the tribe,
and pronounced sentence of death on
those deserving that punishment. The
general council, composed of all the tril)e,
including males and females, decided
questions relating to war. The Abnaki
believed in the immortality of the soul.
Their chief deities were Kechi Niwaskw
and Machi Niwaskw, representing, re-
spectively, the good and the evil; the for-
mer, they believed, resided on an island
in the Atlantic; Machi Niwaskw was the
more. powerful. According to Maurault
they believed that the first man and
woman were created out of a stone, but
that Kechi Niwaskw, not being satisfied
with these, destroyed them and created
two more out of wood, from whom the
Indians are descended. They buried
their dead in graves excavated in the soil.
Tribal dirisi'.ns. — The tribes included
in the confederacy as noted bv Maurault
have already been given. In a letter
sent by the Abnaki in 1721 to the gov-
ernor of New England their divi^ons are
given as follows: Narantsouuk (Norridge-
wock), Pentugouet (Penobscot), Nara-
kamigou (Kocameca), Anmissoukanti
( Amaseconti ) , Muanbissek, Pegouakki
(Pequawket, N. H.),Medoktek (Medoc-
tec), Kwupahag, Pesmokanti (Passama-
quoddy), Arsikantegou (Arosagunta-
cook), Ouanwinak (Wewenoc, s. eSge of
N. H.). The following is a full list of
Abnaki tribes: Accominta, Amaseconti,
Arosaguntacook, Etchimin, Malecite,
Missiassik, Norridgewock (the Abnaki
in the most limited sense), Passama-
quoddy, Penobscot, Pequawket, Roca-
meca, Sokoki, and Wewenoc. The bands
residing on St Croix and St Johns rs.
spoke a different dialect from those to
the southward, and were known collect-
ively as Etchimin. They are now known
as Passamaquoddy and Malecite. Al-
though really a part of the Abnaki, they
were frequently classed as a distinct body,
while on the other hand the Pennacook
tribes, although distinct from the Abnaki,
were often classed with them on account
of their connection during the Indian
wars and after their removal to Canada.
According to Morgan they had fourteen
gentes: 1, Mals^-sGm, Wolf; 2, Pis-suh',
Black Wildcat; 3, Ah-weh^-soos, Bear;
4, Skooke, Snake: 5, Ah-lunk-soo, Spotted
Animal; 6, Ta-ma''-kwa, Beaver; 7, Ma-
guh-le-loo^. Caribou; 8, Kti-bah'-seh, Stur-
geon; 9, Moos-kwil-suh^, Muskrat; 10,
K'-che-gii-gong^-go, Pigeon Hawk; 11,
Meh-ko-ft^, Scjuirrel; 12, Che-gwa^-lis,
Spotted Frog; 13, Koos-koo', Crane; 14,
Mii-dii^-weh-soos, Porcupine. According
to Chauvignerie their principal totems
were the pigeon and the bear, while they
also had the partridge, beaver, and otter
totems.
The Abnaki villages, so far as their
names have been recorded, were Amase-
conti, Ammoncongan, Aquadocta (?),
Arosaguntacook, Asnela, Aucocisco, Bag-
aduce, B^cancour, Calais (Passama-
quoddy) Gunasquamekook (Passama-
quoddy), Imnarkuan (Passamaquoddy),
Kennebec, Ketangheanycke, Lincoln
Island, Masherosqueck, Mattawamkeag
v^XH-
BDLL. 30]
ABNAKI
(Penobscot), Mattinacook (Penobscot),
Mecadacut, Medoctec (Malecite), Mee-
combe, Missiassik (Missiassik), Moratig-
fon (?), Moshoquen, Muanbissek (?),
luscongus, Negas, Negusset (?), Nor-
ridgewock, gorumbega, Okpaak (Male-
cite), Olamon (Penobscot), Old Town
( Penobscot ) , Ossagh rage, Ou werage,
Pasharanack, Passadunikeag (Penob-
scot), Passamaquoddy (village?), Pau-
hontanuc, Pemaquid, Penobscot, Pequaw-
ket, Pocopassum, Precante, Rocameca,
Sabino, Sagadahoc, Sainte Anne (Male-
cite) , St Francis, Satquin, Sebaik ( Passa-
maquoddy), Segocket, Segotago, Sillery,
Sokoki (village?), Taconnet, Tobique
( Malecite), Unyjaware, Viger (Malecite),
Wabigganus, Waccogo, Wewenoc (vil-
lage?), (j. M. c. T. )
Abanakeet.— Ross. Fur Hunters, i, 98, 1855. Aban-
akis.— Doc. of 1755 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x,
342, 1868. Abanaquii.— Report of 1821. Mass. Hist.
See. Coll . , 2d 8. , X , 127. 1823. Abanaquois. — Vetro-
mlle in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 214, 1859 (old
form). Abenaguii.— La Potherie. Hist. Am., i, 199,
1753. Abenaka.— Ibid. Abena'kei.— Boyd, Ind.
Local Names, 1, 1885. Abenakias.— Boudinot,
Star in the West, 125, 1816. Abenakii.— Du Lhut
(1679) in Margry, U6couvertes, vi, 22, 1886 (men-
tioned as distinct from the Openagos). Aben-
a'kiai.— Boyd, Ind. Local Names, 1, 1885. Aben-
akkis.— JefFerys, French Dominions, pt. i. map,
118,1761. Abenaque*.— Buchanan, N. Am. Inds.,
I, 139, 1824. Abenaqoioiets.— Champlain (1(>32),
CEuvres, v, pt. 2, 214, 1870. Abenaquioia. — Cham-
plain (1632), CEuvres, v, pt. 2, '233, 1870. Abena-
quioue.— Sagard (1636), Canada, iv, 889, 1866.
Abenaquw.— French document (1651) in N. Y.
Doc. Ck)l. Hist., IX, 5, 1855 (the same form is used
for the Delawares bv Maximilian. Travels. 35,
1843). Abenati.— Hennepin, Cont. of New Disc,
96, 1698. Abenequas.— Ho>t, Antiquarian Re-
searches, 90, 1824. AbenquoU.— Hind, Labrador
Pen., I, 5, 1863. Abernaquii.— Perkins and Peck,
Annals of the West, 680, 1850. Abinaqui.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 174, 1857. Abinohkic— Dalton
il783) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st 8., X. 123, 1809.
Lbnaldi.— Vetromile in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll.,
VI, 208. 1859. Abnaquiea.— Willis in Maine Hist.
Soc. Coll., IV, 95, 1856. Abnaquiois. -Jesuit Rela-
tion, 1639, 25, 1858. Abnaquii.— Historical Mag.,
2d s., I, 61, 1867. Abnaquoli.— Vetromile in Maine
Hist. Soc. Coll.. VI. 214. ia^>9. Abnaquotii.— Uu
Creux, map (1660) in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., vi,
210, 1859. Abnasque.— Vetromile. Abnakis, 26,
1866 (possible French form). Abnekaii.— Albany
conference (1754) in N. Y. D(K'. Col. Hist., vi,
886, 1855. Abonakiei.— Croghan (1765) in Monthly
Am. Jour. Geol., 272. 1831. Abonnekee.— Allen
in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 515, 1831. Agua-
noxji.— Gatschet, Cherokee MS.. B. A. E., 1881
(Cherokee name for one Delaware; plural, An&-
guanoxgi). AkoUakannha. — Cuog in Brinton,
Lenape Leg.. 255, 1885 (Iroquois name: * for-
eigner'). AkSanake.— Le Jeune (1641) in Jes.
Rel., I, 72, 1858 (Huron pronunciation of Waba-
naki or Abanaki, 'east land'). Albenaquioue.—
Sagard (1636), Canada, iv, 889, 1866. Albenaquis.—
Du Pratz in Drake, Book of Inds., bk. iv, 40, 1848.
Alninbai.— Vassal in Can. Ind. Aflf. 1884. 27. 1885
(own name: 'Indians' or 'men'). Anagonges.—
Bayard (1689)inN. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 621, 1853.
Anafoanoxsi'— Oatschet, Cherokee MS., B. A. E.,
1881 (Cherokee name for the Delawares: see
Aguanoxgi above). Annogongei.— Bayard (1689)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iii, 611, 1853. Anogon-
faa».— Uvingston (1730) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hi.st.,
v, 912, 1865. A-pa-nax'-ke.— ten Kate, Synonymic,
11, 1884 (given as Choctaw name for the Pawnee,
but really for the Delawares). Aquannaque.—
Sagard (1626), Voyage du Hurons. pt. 2, Diet.,
"nations," 1866 (Huron pronunciation; qu=bo{
'Abnaki' or ' Wabanaki,'and applied by them to
the ' Algoumequin ' or Algonkin). Aubinaukee.—
Jones, Ojebwav Inds., 178, 1861. Bashabas.—
Gorges (1658) in' Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., ii, 62, 1847
(plural form of the name or title of the ruling
cnief about Pemaquid; used by Gorges as the
name of his tribe) . Beoaquia— Gatschet. Caugh-
nawaga MS., B. A. E., 1882 (name used by
French Canadians). Oannon-gageh-roimonB. -
Lamberville (1684) in Doc. Hist. N. Y., i, 142,
1849 (Mohawk name). Eastlander*.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, iii. ;y>;i, 1853 (given as mean-
ing of • Wabanakis' ). Moassonei.— Popham (1607)
in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., v, ^^7, 1857 (Latin
form, from Moa.s.son. Mawooshen, or Moasham,
used bv earlv English writers for the Abnaki
country. Ballard. V. S. Coast Survey Rep. 252,
1871, thinks it is the Penobscot word Maweshe-
nook. berrv place'). Moaisona.— Willis (?) in
Maine Hist.* Soc. Coll., v, 359, 1857 (from Pop-
ham's form, Moassones). Karankamigdok epitaik
arenanbak.— Vetromile, Abnakis, 23, 1866 ('men
living on the high shores of the river': given
as collective term used by Abnaki to designate
all their villages; real meaning 'villages of the
Narankamigdog'). Natio Euponun.— Du Creux,
map (1660) in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 211,
1859 (misprint of the following). Natio Lu-
porum.— Same in Vetromile, Abnakis, 21, 18()6
('wolf nation'). Natsajana.— Gatschet. Caugh-
nawagaMS.. B. A. E., 1H82 (Caughnawaga name;
singular, RutsAgana). 0-ben-aki.— O. T. Mason,
oral information, 1903 (name as pn)nounced by
a native). Obenaquiouoit.— Champlain (16*29).
CEuvres, v, pt. 2. 196, 1870. Obinacka.— Clinton
(1745) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.. VI, 276. 1855.
Obunegoa.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v. 196. 1855
( = Delawares). Olinacki.— Clinton (1745) in N.
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 281, 1855 (misprint). Ona-
fongues.— Bellomont (1701) in N. V. Doc. Col.
Hist., IV. 834, 18.54. Onagonque.— Schuyler (1693),
ibid., 64. Onagunga.— Colcfen (1727) quoted by
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 174, 1857. Ona-
gungees.— Johnson (1750) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., VI, 592, 1855. Onconntehocks.— La Montague
(1664). ibid., xiii. 378, 1881 <same?). Ondiakei.—
Albanv treaty (1664), ibid., iii, 68, 1853. One-
jagea.— Document of 1664, ibid., xiil, 389, 1881
(same?). Onnagongea.— Bayard (1689), ibid., in.
621, 1853. Onnagonguea.— Document of 1688,
ibid., 565. 185;^. Onnagongwe.— Bellomont (1700),
ibid., IV. 758, 18M (used as the Iroquois name
ol one of the Abnaki villages). Onnagonquei.—
Schuvler (1687). ibid., in, 482, 1853. Onnogonges.—
Ft Orange conference (1664), ibid., xiii. 379,
1881. (hinogongwaea.— Schuyler (1701), ibid., iv,
836, 1854. Onnongongca.— Bayard (1689), ibid., in,
611, 1853. Onoconcquchagaa.— Schelluyne (1663),
ibid., xiii, 309, 1881. Onogangea.— Dareth (1664),
ibid., 381. Onogongoea.— Si'huyler (1724) in Hist.
Mag., 1st s., X. 116, 18(i6. Onogonguaa.— Stoddert
(1753) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hi.st., vi, 780. 1855.
Onogungoa. — Governor of Canada (1695), ibid.,
IV, 120, 18.'>4. Onokonquehaga.— Ft Orange con-
ference (16«V3), ibid., xni,298, 1881. Onongonguea.—
Bavard (1689), ibid., ni, 621, 1853. Opcnadyo.—
Wiiliam.son in MaKs. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., ix. 92.
1846. Openagi.— Sanford. V. S., cxxiv, 1819.
Openagoa.— Du Lhut (1679) in Margry, D^c,
VI, 22, 1886. Openangoa.— La Hontan, New Voy.,
1, 230, 170:^ (sometimes used specifically for the
Pa.s.samaquoddy). 0-po-nagh-ke.— H. R. Rep. 299,
44th Cong.. 1st sess.. 1, 1876 (Delawares). ' Oppen-
ago.— Cadillac (1703) in Margry, D^c, v, 304,
1883 ('Oppenago ou Loups,' near Detroit, prob-
ably the Delawares). o-puh-nar'-ke.— Morgan,
Consanguinity and Affinity, '289, 1871 ('people
of the east': the Delawares). Ouabenakiouek.—
Champlain (1629). (Euvres, v, pt. 2, note, 196.
1870. Sabenakia.— Lu.signan (1749) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., VI, 519, 18.55, Ouabenaquia.— La Salle
(168:?) in Margry, D^'c. n. 363, 1877. Ouabna-
quia.— Ibid., li, 157, 1877 (used in collective
sense). Oubenakia.— Chauvignerie (1736) in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 553, 1853. Sbena-
kia.— Chauvignerie (1736) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., IX, ia52, 1855. Owenaguneaa.— Colden (17*27),
Five Nat., 95. 1747 (so called bv Iroquois).
Owenagungea.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 99,
1816. Owenagangiea.— Macauley. N. Y., n, 174,
ABO ABRADING IMPLEMENTS
[b. A.B.
1829. Owenungas.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, lu,
513, 1853 (Iroquois name for the Abnaki, Mic-
mac, etc.). Panaxki. — Gatschet, Tonkawe and
Caddo MS. vocab.. B. A. E., 1884 (Caddo name
for Delawares). Pin'ikis.— Hewitt, oral infor-
mation, 1886 (TiLscarora name for Abnaki
living with the Tuscarora). Skaoewanilom.—
Vassal in Can. Ind. Aff., 28, 1885 (so called by
Iroquois). Taranteens.— Shea, Mississippi Val.,
165,1852. Tarateens.— Barstow, Hist. New Hamp.,
13, 1853. Tarenteens.— Godfrey, in Maine Hist. Soc.
Coll., VII, 99, 1876. Tarentines.— Mourt (1622) in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,2ds., 1x157, 1822. Tarentias.—
Bradford (1650?) in Ma.ss. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4 th s., in,
104, 1856. Tarranteeria.— Hist. Mag., 1st s., x, 116,
1866 (misprint). Tarrantens.— Levett (1628) in
Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., ii, 93, 1847. Tarrantinea.—
Smith (1616) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., vi, 117,
1837. Tarrateem.— Smith ( 1631 ) in Maine Hist. Soc.
Coll., vii, 101, 1876. Tarratinei.— Wonder-working
Providence (1654) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d 8., ii,
66, 1814. Tarratiiu.— Keane in Stanford, Compen.,
537, 1878. Tarrenteene*.— Wood (1639) in Barton,
New Views, xix, 1798. Tarrenteena.— Richardson,
Arctic Exp., ii, 38, 1851. Tarrentena.— Levett
(1628) in Mas.s. HLst. Soc. Coll., 3d s., viii, 175, 1843.
Tarrentinea.— Smith (1629) Virginia, ii, 192, reprint
1819. Terentinea.— Smith (1631) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll.. 3d s.. Ill, 22, 1833. Terentynea.— Smith
(1616), ibid., vi. 131, 1837. TXnagoungaa.— Sali.s-
bury (1678) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiii, 519, 1881.
Vnnagoungoa.— Brockhols (1678) in Maine Hist.
Sw. Coll., v, 31, 18.57 (old style). Wabanackiea. -
McKennev, Memoirs and Travels, i, 81. 1846.
Wabanake'ea.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 3(M, 1853
(used collectively). Wabanakia.— Ibid., in, 353,
note, 18.53. Wabanika. — Dorsey, MS. (pegiha Diet. ,
B. A. E., 1878 (Omaha and Ponka name for Dela-
wares). Wabanike.— Dorsey, MS. Kansas vocab.,
B. A. E., 1882 (Kansa name for Delawares).
Wabanoaka.— Maurault, Hist, des Aben., 2, 1866
(English form). Wabanocky.— McKenney (1827)
in McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 134, 1854
(used for emigrant Oneida, Mun.see, and Stock-
bridges at Green bay. Wis.) . Wabenakiea.— Ken-
dall, Travels, in, 61. 1809. WabSnaki aenobe.— Gat-
schet, Penobscot MS., B. A. E., 1887 (Penobscot
name). Wabenauki.— McKenney and Hall, Ind.
Tribes, in, 97, 1854 (applied by other Indians to
those of Hudson rj. wab-na-ki.— Hist. Mag., Ist
8., IV, 180, 1860. "wampum-makera.— Gale, Upper
MLss., 166, 1867 (said to be the French name for
the Delawares in 1666; evidently a corruption of
Wapanachki). Wanbanaghi.— Vetromile, Abna-
kis, 19. 1866 (proper form). Wanbanaghi.— Ibid.,
27 (pmper form, the first «« being strongly nasal).
Wanbanaki.— Vetromile. Abnakis, 27-42, 1866
(proper form; un in first syllable strongly nasal).
wanbanakkie.— Kidder in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll.,
VI, 231, 1859 (given as a correct form). Wanb-na-
ghi.— Vetromile in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 214,
18.'>9. Wapanachk.— Heckewelder quoted by Vet-
romile, Aonakis, 23, 1866 (given by Heckewelder
forDelawares). Wapanachki.— Barton, New Views,
xxvii,1798(name given to Delawares by western
tribes). Wapanaki.— Vetromile, Abnakis. 27-42,
1866 ( Delaware form ) . Wapa'na'ki*.— Wm. Jones,
infn, 19a5 (sing. anim. form of the name in Sauk.
Fox, and Kickapoo: Wdpqnakihqgi, pi. anim.
form). Wapanakihak.— Gatschet, Sac and Fox
MS., B: a. E., 1882 (Fox name for DeUwares; sin-
gular, Wftpan&ki). Wapanayki ha-akon. — Gat-
schet, Tonkawe and Caddo MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1884 (Tonkawa name for Delaware man ). Wapa-
nencUu— Rafinesque, Am. Nations, i, 147, 1836.
Wapaaiq^kyu.— Dorsey, MS. Osage vocab.. B. A.
E., 1883 (Osage name for Delawares). Wapen-
acki.— Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 51, 1872
(applied to all the eastern tribes). Wappen-
aokie.— Ibid., 355 (used either for Delawares or
for Wappingers). Wappenoa.— Ibid., 51 (applied
to all eastern tribes). Wa-pu-nah-kl'.— Grayson,
MS. (^reek vocab.. B. A. E., 1885 (Creek name ap-
plied to the Delawares). Wau-ba-na-keea.— Wis.
Hi.st. Soc. Coll., v, 182. 1868 (Stockbridges and
Oneidas at Green bav. Wis.), waub-un-uk-eeg.—
Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 32
1885 (Chippewa name for Delawares). Waw-,
bttnukkeeg.— Tanner, Narrative, 315, 1830 (Ottawa
name for Stockbridge Indians in Wisconsin).
W'Banankee.— Kidder in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll.,
VI, 244, 1859 (name used by themselves, as nearly
as can be represented in English, accenting last
syllable), whippanapa.— Humphrey, Acct., 281,
1730 (after Johnson), wippanapa.— Johnson (1654)
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., n, 66,. 1814 (men-
tioned as part of the "Abarginny men" and
distinct from the "Tarratines"). Wo-a-pa-
nach-ki.— Macauley.N.Y., n. 164, 1829 (used as
synonymous with Lenni Lenape for tribes of
eastern Pennsylvania, New Jersey, New York,
Delaware, and Connecticut). Wobaaaki.— Kid-
der in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 243, 1859 (title of
spelling book of 1830).
Abo {A-b(/). A former pueblo of the
Tompiros division of the Piros, on the Ar-
royo del Empedradillo, about 25 m. e. of
the Rio Grande and 20 m. s. of Manzano,
in Valencia co., N. Mex. Whether the
pueblo was built on both sides of the
arroyo, or whether there were two pue-
blos successively occupied, has not been
determined. It was first mentioned in
1598 bv Juan de Oilate; it became the
seat of the mission of San Gregorio,
founded in 1629 by Fray Francisco de
Acevedo, who erecte<l a large church and
monastery, the walls of which are still
standing, and died there Aug. 1, 1644.
Tenabo and Tabira were the visitas of
Abo mission. Considering the ruins now
on both banks of the arroyo as those of
a single pueblo, the population during
the early mission periotl was probably
2,000. Owing to Apache depredations
many of the inhabitants fled to El Paso
as early as 1671, and prior to the Pueblo
insurrection of 1680 the village was en-
tirely abandoned for the same cause. The
Piros of Senecu del Sur claim to be the
last descendants of the Abo {people. See
Vetancurt ( 1697 ) , Cronicii, 325, repr. 1871 ;
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 270,
1892; Abert in Emory, Recon., 488,
1848. (f. w. h. )
Abbo.— Oi^ate (1598) in Doc. Iniid., xvi, 114, 1871.
Abio.— Abert in Emory, Reconnoissance, 490, 1848.
Abo. — Onate, op. cit., 1*2;?. Ako. — Simpson in
Sraithson, Rep. 1869, map. 1872 (misprint). Ave-
Wislizenus, Memoir, 24, 1848. SanChregorio Abbo.—
Vetancurt, Cr6nica, 325, repr. 1871. S. Oregoio de
Abo.— Senex, map, 1710 (misprint) . S. Oreeorla.—
Giissefeld, Charte America, 1797 (wrongly located
on Rio Grande). S. Ghrefforio de Abo.— De I'lsle,
Carte Mexique et Floride, 1703. Sf Gregory.—
Kitchin, Map N. A., 1787.
Abon. See Pone.
Aboreachic. A small Tarahumare pueblo
not far from Norogachic, in Chihuahua,
Mexico. The name is apparently a cor-
ruption of aoreachir * where there is moun-
tain cedar,' but should not be con-
founded with that of the village of
Aoreachic. — Lumholtz, infn, 1894.
Abrading Implements. In shaping their
numerous implements, utensils, and orna-
ments of stone, wood, bone, shell, and
metal, the native tribes were largely de-
pendent on abrading implements, of
which there are many varieties. Of first
importance are grinding stones and whet-
stones of more or less gritty rock, while
BULL. SO]
ABKAfiAM — ACCOMAC
less effectusa are potsherds and rasp-like
suiiaces, such as that of the skin of the
dogfish. Of the same general class are all
sawing, drilling, and scraping tools and
devices, which are described under sepa-
rate heads. The smoothing and polish-
ing implements into which the grinding
stones imperceptibly grade are also sepa-
^^^ rateiy treated. Thesmall-
j^f^XSb^ ^^ grinding stones were
w^jjBB^ held in the hand, and were
C^MHHf usually unshaped frag-
^'fm^^^ ments, the arrowshaft rub-
AsRADiNa 8T0HE, NEW ber aud the slender ne-
'/,TL^,o "' Phrite whetstone of the
a 1"€ iNCHE8« / «^i* i* a *
Eskimo being exceptions.
The larger ones were slabs, bowlders, or
fragments, which rested on the ground or
were held in the lap
while in use. In many
localities exposeil sur- ^______
faces of rock in place arrowshaft rubber,
were utilized, and these 'l'';-;i^ll') ^'-"'°'""
as well as the movable
varieties are often covered with the
grooves produced by the grinding work.
These markings range from narrow, shal-
ORiNOiNO STONE, Tennessee
(lenoth, >i inches)
WHETSTONE OF NEPHRITE, ESKIMO. (lENQTH, 5 INCHES. )
low lines, produced by shaping pointed
objects, to broad channels made in shap-
ing large imple-
""P^iv ments and uten-
sils. Reference
to the various
forms of abrad-
ing implements
is made in nu-
merous works
and articles
treating of the
technology of the native tribes. The
more important of these are cited under
Archeologyy Boneworky Stoneicorkj Shell-
work, (w. H. H.)
Abraham, also called Little Abraham.
A Mohawk chief of considerable orator-
ical power who succeeded the so-called
King Hendrick after the battle of L.
George in 1755, in which the latter was
killed. He espoused the English cause
in the American Revolution, but was of a
pacific character. He was present at the
last meeting of the Mohawk with the
American commissioners at Albany in
Sept., 1775, after which he drops from no-
tice. He was succeeded by Brant, (c. t. )
Absayrnc. A Costanoan village men-
tioned as formerly connected with the
mission of San Juan Bautista, Cal. —
Engelhardt, Franciscans in Cal., 398,
1897.
Absentee. A division of the Shawnee
who about 1845 left the rest of the tribe,
then in Kansas, and removed to Ind. T.
In 1904 they numbered 459, under the
Shawnee school superintendent in Okla-
homa, (j. M.)
Ginetewi Sawanogi.— Gatschet, Shawnee MS.,
B. A. E., 1879 (so called sometimes by the other
Shawnee; Ginet^^wi is derived fmm the name
of Canadian r., on which they live). P^pua-
hapitski Sawanogi.— Ibid. ( * Away - from - here
Shawnee,' commonly so called by the other
Shawnee).
Acacafni. Mentioned by Juan de Ofiate
(Doc. In^d., XVI, 115, 1871), in connec-
tion with Puaray, apparently as a pueblo
of the Tigua of New Mexico in 1598.
Acacagna. An unidentified pueblo of
Xew Mexico in 1598.— Ofiate (1598) in
Doc. In^d., XVI, 108, 1871.
Acacbin. A Papago rancheria in s.
Arizona; pop. 47 in 18(65. — Ind. Aff. Rep.,
135, 1865.
Acadialite. A reddish chabazite ( Dana,
Text-book of Mineral., 458, 1898), socalleil
from Acadia, an early and still a literary
name of Nova Scotia and New Brunswick :
a latinization, helped out by analogy with
the classical Arcadia, of a word formed
l)y the early French explorers on the
basis of a siittix of manj^ place names,
which in the Micmac dialect of Algon-
(juian signifies 'where a thing is plenti-
ful.' The Ute represents the Greek A/O05,
stone, (a. f. c.)
Acapachiqai. An unidentified town in
s. Georgia, visited by De Soto in March,
1540. — Biedma in French. Hist. Coll. 1^.,
II, 99, 1850.
Capachiqui.— Gentleman of El va«? (1557) in French,
op. cit., 137.
Accohanoc. A tribe of the Powhatan
confederacy that formerly lived on the
river of the same name, in Accomac and
Northampton cos., Va. They had 40
warriors in 1608. Their principal village
lx>re the name of the tribe. They be-
came mixed with negroes in later times,
and the remnant was driven off at the
time of the Nat Turner insurrection,
about 1833. (j. m.)
Aocahanook.— Herrman, map (1670) in Maps to
Accompany the Rep't of the Com'rs on the
B'nd'ry Line bet. Va. and Md., 1873. Acco-
hanock.— Strachey (ca. 1612), Virginia. 41, 1849.
Aoootronacks.— Boudinot. Star in the West, 125.
1816. Aoohanook.— Smith (1629), Virginia, i, 120,
repr. 1819. Aquohanock.— Ibid., 11, 61. Ocoa-
hanook.— Beverly, Virginia, 199, 1722. Ochahan-
nanke.— Strachey (,ca. 1612), Virginia, 62, 1849.
Accomac. (According to Trumbull the
word means *the other-side place,' or
* on-the-other-side-of- water place.* In
the Massachuset language oqkom^ or
akawinS means 'beyond'; and aCj akij
or ahki in various Algonquian dialects
means 'land.' According to Dr Wm.
Jones (inf'n, 1905) the term is probably
akin to the Chippewa iigaming, *the other
A CCOMINT A — ACHILIGOU AN
[b. a. e.
shore,' and to the Sauk, Fox, and Kicka-
poo iigdmdh^g «, ing in the one case and -gi
in the other being variations of the same
suffix expressing 'place where' ) . A tribe
of the Powhatan confederacy of V^irginia
that formerly lived in Accomac and
Northampton cos., e, of Chesapeake bay,
and according to Jefferson their principal
village, which bore the tribal name, was
about Cheriton, on Cherrystone inlet,
Northampton co. In 1608 they had 80
warriors. As they declined in numbers
and importance they lost their tribal
identity, and the name became applied to
all the Indians e. of Chesapeake bay. Up
to 1812 they held their lands in common
and were known under the names of Ac-
comacs, living chiefly in upper Accomac
co.,andGinga8kin8 (see Gangasco) y living
near Eastville, Northampton co. They
had become much mixed with negroes,
and in the Nat Turner insurrection, about
1838, were treated as such and driven off.
(j. M. )
Aooawmacke.^Smith (1629), Va., i, 133, repr.
1819. Aooomaok.— Ibid., 120. Acoowmack.— Ibid.,
map. Aoomaok.— Ibid., II, 61. Acomak. — Drake,
Book of Indians, v, 1848.
Accominta ( possibly relate<l to the Chip-
pewa akukilmigaky a locative expression
referring to the place where land and
water meet, hence, specifically, 'shore,'
'shore-line.' — Wm. Jones. The name
was given by the Indians to York r. ).
A small tribe or band of the Pennacook
confederacy, commonly called Agamen-
ticus or Accominticus, that occupied a
village of the same name at or near the
site of the present York, York co.. Me.,
to which the name "Boston" was given
on some early maps. Capt. John Smith
(Virginia, ii, 183, repr. 1819) says that
the people of this place were allied to
those immediately n. of them, and were
subject to the bashabees of Penobscot,
which would seem to place them in the
Abnaki confederacy, though they are
now generally and apparently correctly
included in the Pennacook confederacy.
Schoolcraft (Ind. Tribes, v, 222, 1856)
includes this area in the Pennacook do-
minion. Under what name the Acco-
minta people were subsequently recog-
nized is not known, (j. M. c. T.)
Aeoomentas.— Hoyt, Antiquarian Res., 90, 1824.
Aooomintas.— Gookin (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., l8t s, I, 149, 1806. Aooomintioua.— Smith
(1616), ibid.r 3d s., vi, 97, 1837. Aoeomintyoui.—
Smith (1629), Virginia, ii, 195, repr. 1819. Ac-
oomyntious. — Ibid., 183. Agamentioua— Ballard in
Coast Surv. Rep., 246, 1871. An-ghem-ak-ti-koos.—
Ibid, (given as proper name).
Acconoc. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy in 1608, situated between
Chickahominy and Pamunkey rs.. New
Kent CO., Va.— Smith (1629), Virginia,
I, map, repr. 1819.
Accoqneck < probably cognate with Chip-
pewa akukwdgy * whirlpool,* or Hum in
the bend' of a river or road. — Wm.
Jones). A Powhatan village, situate in
1608 on Rappahannock r., above Seco-
bec, Caroline co., Va.— Smith (1629),
Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819.
Accossawinck (possibly cognate with
the Chippewa dkosowingy *p>oint where
the tail and body meet'; or with a /fccwinib,
*as far up as the place rises.' — Wm. Jones).
A Powhatan village, existing in 1608 on
Pamunkey r., King William co., Va. —
Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819.
Acela. A small village in w. central
Florida, visited by De Soto in 1539.
Ocilla r. derives its name from the place.
See Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., ii, 129, 1850.
Achasta. A former village of the Rum-
sen division of the Costanoan family, on
the spot now occupied by the town
of Monterey, Cal. The Rumsen were
sometimes called Achastliens from the
name of this settlement. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860.
Achieate.— Taylor, ibid.
Acheha. A Timucua phratry which in-
cluded the Hiyaraba, Cayahasomi, Efaca,
Hobatinequasi, and Chehelu clans. —
Pareja (1612-14) quoted byGatschetin
Am. Philos. Soc. Proc, xvii, 492, 1878.
Achepabecha ( * prairie dog ' ) . A Crow
band.
Aohe-pa-be'-cha.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877.
Rich Prairie Dog.— Culb
1850, 144. 1851.
I Dog.— Culbertson in Smithson. Rep.
Achigan ( fi^shigtiriy sing. anim. noun. —
Wm. Jones). A French-Canadian name
of the small-mouthed black bass (Mi-
cropterus dolomieu)^ occasionally found in
English writings. The word is old in
French, Hennepin using it in 1688. Ashi-
gan is the name of this fish in Chippewa
and closely related Algonquian dialects.
(a. f. c.)
Achiligonan. A tribe or band living be-
tween 1640 and 1670 on the n. shore of L.
Huron, about the mouth of French r.
and westward nearly to Sault Ste Marie.
In 1670 they were attached to the mission
at the Sault. In the Jesuit Relation of
1640 their position is given on the n. shore
of L. Huron, at the mouth of French r.
The Amikwa are mentioned in the same
connection as residing on this stream.
In the Relation of 1658 they appear to be
placed farther n. on the river, and it is
stated that they traded with the Cree.
In the Relation of 1 670 they are said to -
have been attached to the mission of
Sault Ste Marie, but only as going there
to fish. It is probable that they were a/
Chippewa or a Nipissing band. (.i. m. ]
c. T.)
Achiligouani.— Heriot, Travels, 194, 1807. Achili-
goiiiane.— Jesuit Rel., 1670, 79, 1858. Aohiri-
gouaat.— Ibid., 1646, 81. Archirigouan.— Ibid.,
1643, 61, 1858. AtohiUgoiiaii.— Ibid., 1640, 34, 1858.
BULL. 3d]
ACHILLA — ACOLAPISSA
Achilla. A Costanoan village of Santa
Cruz mission, Santa Cruz co., Cal., in
1819.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 1 860.
Aehillimo. A Chumashan village for-
merly existing near Santa Inez nnnsion,
Santa Barbara co., Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Aohois. A native plai'e in Encina val-
ley, 8. Cal., at which the mission of San
Fernando was established, Sept. 8, 1797.
Aohoio Comilutyit.— Cones, Careers Diary, 266. 1900.
AohoU.— Ibid.
Aohomawi (from adzumOj or achdma,
*river.* — Dixon). A division of the
ghnatiin family formerly occupying the
Ht r. country of n. e. Cal., except Burney,
Dixie, and Hat cr. valleys, which were
inhabited by the Atsugewi. A principal
village was near Fall river Mills, Shasta
CO. The lanpiages of the Achomawi and
the Atsugewi, while unquestionably re-
lated, are strikingly unlike. The term
Achomawi was also employed by Powers
to denote all the Indians of the Falaihni-
han family of Powell, popularly known
as Pit River Indians. See Shastan Faw Uy.
AohomAwes.— Powers in Overland Mo., xii. 412,
1874. A-cho-m4'-wi.— Powers in " Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., HI, 267, 1877. Adzumim.— Curtin, Ilmawi
vocab., B. A. E., 1889. Ko'm-nuudiim.— Dixon,
Inf'n, 1904 ('snow people': Maidu name).
ShftWMh.— Kroeber, inf'n, 1903 (Yuki name for
the Achomawi taken to Round Valley res,).
Achongoula (probably *pipe people,'
from Choctaw a/</rMw^a, *pipe'). One of
the 9 villages constituting the Nati'hez
confederacy in 1699. — Iberville in Mar-
gry, D^c, IV, 179, 1880.
Achpoan. See Pone.
Aehiinnink (cognate with the Chip-
pewa akustning^ *at the place of rough
rock,* meaning a pla'e where many
bowlders lie scattered about, or a rocky
J lace hard to travel through. — Wm.
ones). A village of the Unalachtigo
Delawares existing about 1770 on Hock-
ing r., Ohio.— Hecke welder in Trans. Am.
Philos. Soc., IV, 390, 1834.
Aohnsi. The port on the n. coast of
the Gulf of Mexico, within the Muskho-
gean area, in which the fleet of De Soto
wintered in 1539-40. It took its name
from a neighboring town and is com-
monly identified with Pensacola bav.
Aohusi. — GarcilasHO de la Vei ""■ * '
AehuflM.— Shipp, De Soto and J
Aohusi.— GarcilasHO de la Vega. Fla., 299* 1723.
AehuflM.— Shipp, De Soto and Fla., 682, note, 1881.
AohuMi.— Ibid., 334. Acuiy.— Margry, Dec, iv,
810. 1880. ChiMC— Biedma (1540) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., II, 102, 1850. Oohui.— Gentleman of
Elvas (1&57), ibid., 136. Oeui.— Ibid., 145.
Achyaraehki (Ach-yd-rach^'ki; ' where
there is an old man,' in allusion to a
stone pinnacle resembling a human
form). A Tarahumare rancheria 16 m.
s. of Rekorichic, Chihuahua, Mexico,
about lat. 27° 5^ long. 106° 45^— Lum-
holtz, inf n, 1894.
Ackia. A Chickasaw village in n. Mis-
sissippi, attacked by the French and
Choctaw in 1 736. — Gavarrc, Louisiana
I, 480, 1851.
Adutoy. A village supposed to l>e of the
Patwin division of the Copehan family
which formerly lived in Napa and Yolo
COS., Cal. Its inhabitants concluded a
treat V with Gov. Vallejo in 1836.— Ban-
croft, Hist. Cal., IV, 71, 1886.
Acnagis. A former village, presumably
(yostanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Tavlor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Acochis (evidently from the Wi(!hita
Itd-kid-rliis, 'metal,' interpreted 'gold'
by the Spaniards). Given by an Indian
nicknamed "Turk," <}. v., as the name
for gold in the language of the people of
Quivira or llarahey, identi6e<l as the
Wichita and Pawnee, respectively. By
misinterpretation the name has been
given to C^uivira itself. See Castafieda
and Jaramillo in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 493,
510, 1896; Davis, Span. (Vmq. N. Mex.,
226, 1869; Hodge in Brower, Harahev,
70, 1899. (F. w. H.)
Acolapissa. An indefinite group, of
Choctaw lineage, formerly living on L.
Ponchartrain, about the coast lagoons,
and on the Mississippi, in Louisiana.
Early French writers derived the name
from the Choctaw haklopim, 'those who
listt^n and see.' Allen Wright, governor
of the Choctaw nation, suggest^ okla pi^ij
' those who look out for j>eople' ; that is,
watchmen, guardians, spies, which prob-
ably refers to their position, where they
couhl observe entrance into or departure
from the lake and river. The name
ap|>ears to have been made by early
authors to include several trilies, the
Bayogoula, Mugulasha, and others. Ac-
cording to Il)erville the Acolapissa had 7
towns; but one of their villages was occu-
pied by the Tangiboa, who appear to have
l)een a different tribe. The Acolapissa
are said to have suffered severely from an
epidemic about 1700, and Iberville says
they unite<l with the Mueulasha; if so,
they nuist have been included in those
massa<*re<l by the Bayogoula, but this is
rendered doubtful by the statement of
P^nicaut (French, Hist. (\)I1. I^., n. s., i,
144, 1869) that in 1718 the Colapissa, who
inhabited the n. shore of L. Ponchartrain,
removed to the Mississippi and settled 13
leagues above New Orleans, (c. t. )
AqueloapisMLs.— .TefTerys, French Dom. Am., i, 162,
1761. Aquelon Piwas.— Bos.su (17.51). Travels, 1, 34.
1771. Aquelou piMat.— Dii Pratz, Hi.st. La., ii,
219, 1768. CalopiMM.— P^nicaut (1713) in Mar-
gry, D^c. V, 507, 1883. Cenepita.— La Salle, ibid.,
I. 564, 187.">. OolapeMM.— Gravier in Shea, Early
Voy.. 159. 1861. Colapissas.— IVnicaut (1699) in
French. Hist. Coll. La., n. s., i, 38. 1869. Coli-
pasa.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. ColIapiMas.—
Bosun (1751), Travel*, i, 34, 1771. CoulapiMat.-
Sauvole (1700) in Margn-, D6c.. iv. 462, 1880.
Eqtuiiipiohas.—Sauvole in French. Hist. Coll. La.,
HI, 225, 1851. Ooulapissaa.— B. des Lozi^res, Voy.
-^
10
ACOLt — ACOMA
tB.A.1.
& la Le., 242, 1802. KinipiflMU— Tonti in Margrv,
D4c., I, 604, 1876. ZolapisMW.— Gravier(1700) in
French, Hist. Coll. La., il, 88, 1876. MlpisMu—
Iberville in Margry, D4c., iv, 101, 1880. Piaii-
oas.— Sauvole (1700) in French, Hist Ck>ll. La.,
III. 236, 1861 (probably the same). Qutnipiia.— La
Salle in Margry, D^., 1,564,1876. Quinipisas.—
French, Hiflt. Coll. La., ii, 23, 1876. Qninipiiaa.—
TonU (1682)»ibid.,i,63,1846. aoiaiquiMa.— Hen-
nepin (1680), ibid.. 206. auinnipiaMa.— La Me-
lairie (I682j, ibid., ii, 50, 1876.
Aooli. Mentioned by Ofiate ( Doc. Ined. ,
XVI, 114, 1871) as a pueblo of New Mexico
in 1598. Probably situated in the Salinas,
in the vicinity of Abo, and in all proba-
bility a Tigua or Piros village.
Acoma (from the native name Akdme^
* people of the white rock,' now com-
monly pronounced .V-ko-ma. Their
name for their town is A^ko). A tribe
and pueblo of the Keresan family, the
latter situate on a rock mesa, or peHol,
357 ft. in height, about 60 m. w. of the
Rio (irande, in Valencia co., N. Mex.
Acoma is mentioned as early as 15.39 by
Fray Marcos de Niza, under the name
Acus, a corruption of Hakukia, the Zui^i
name of the pueblo; but it was first
visited the following year by members
of Coronado's army, who recorded the
name as Acuco. The strength of the po-
sition of the village, which has the dis-
tinction of being the oldest inhabited
settlement in the United States, is re-
marked by the early Spanish chroniclers,
who estimated its nouses at 200 and its
warriors at the same number. Antonio
de Espejo also visited Acoma in 1583,
designating it by the name under which
it is now known, attributing to it the ex-
aggerated population of 6,(KK), and men-
tioning its dizzy trail cut in the rock and
its cultivated fields **two leagues away,"
probably those still tilled at Acomita
(Tichuna) and Pueblito (Titsiap), their
two summer, or farming, villages, 15 m.
distant. Juan de Ofiate, the colonizer of
New Mexico, visited Acoma in 1598,
when, during his governorship, Fray
Andres Corchado was assigned a mission
field which included that imeblo, but no
mission was actually established there at
so early a date. The Acoma hatl been
hostile to the surrounding village tribes
during this period, and as early as 1540
are mentioned as ** feared by the whole
countrv round about." Juan de Zaldi-
var, of Ofiate' 8 force, visited Acoma in
Dec., 1598, with 30 men; they were sur-
prised by the Indians, who killed 14 of
the Spaniards outright, including 2jal-
divar and 2 other captains, and caused
4 others to leap over the cliff, 3 of whom
were miraculously saved. In Jan., 1599,
an avenging party of 70 Spaniards were
dispatched under Zaldivars brother Vi-
cente, who, after a battle which lasted
3 days, succeeded in killing half the tribe
of about 3,000 and in partly burning the
town. The first mb<sionary labor )>er-
f ormed at Acoma was by Fray Ger6ninM>
deZarate-Salmeron, prior to 1629; butFray
Juan Ramirez, who went to Acoma in the
spring of 1629, and remained there many
years, was its first permanent missionarv
and the builder of the first church, which
was replaced in or after 1699 by the pres-
ent great structure of adobe. The Aco-
ma participated in the general Pueblo
revolt against the Spaniards in 1680 (see
Pueblos) f killing their missionary. Fray
Lucas Maldonado; but, largely on account
of their isolation and the inaccessibility
of their village site, they were not so se-
verely dealt with by the Spaniards as
were most of the more easterly pueblos.
An attempt was n»ade to reconquer the
village by Gov. Vargas in Aug., 1696, but
he succeeded only in destroying their
crops and in capturing 5 warriors. The
villagersheld out until July 6, 1699, when
they submitted to Gov. Cubero, who
changeil the name of the pueblo from San
Elstevan de Acoma to San Pedro; but the
former name was subsequently restored
and is still retained. The population of
Acoma dwindled from about 1,500 at the
beginning of the revolt to 1,052 in 1760.
In 1782 the mission was reduced to a
visita of Laguna, and by the close of the
century its population was only a few
more than 800. The present (1902)
number is 566. The Acoma are agricul-
BULL. 3U]
ACOBflTA — ACOOMEMECK
11
turists, cultivating by irrigation corn,
wheat, melons, calabashes, etc., and rais-
ing sheep, goats, horses, and donkeys.
In prehistoric and early historic times
they had flocks of domesticated turkeys.
They are expert potters, but now do lit-
tle or no weaving. The villages which
they traditionally occupied after leaving
Shipapu, their mythical place of origin
in the n., were Kashkachuti, Washpa-
shuka, Kuchtya, Tsiama, Tapitsiama, and
Kpt^imn (q. v. ), or the Fnrhanted mesa.
Heashko wa and Ko wina were also pueblos
occupied by Acoma clans in prehistoric
times. The following are the clans of the
tribe, those marked by an asterisk be-
ing extinct: Tsits (Water), Kochinish
(Yellow corn), Kukanish (Red corn),
♦Kuishkosh (Blue corn), *Kuiahtiti
(Brown corn), Kusesh (White corn),
Tyami (Eagle), Shawiti (Parrot), Osach
(Sun), Shask (Road-runner), Hapanyi
(Oak), Shquwi (Rattlesnake), Kuwhaia
(Bear), Tsma (Turkey), Tanyi (Cala-
bash), Kurts (Antelope), Huwaka(8ky),
*Mo8haich (Buffalo), *Haka (Fire), Sii
( Ant ) . The land grant of the tribe, made
by Spain and confirmed by the United
States, comprises 95,792 acres. See Win-
ship, Coronatlo Ex ped., 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
1896; Espejo (1583) in Doc. Ined. de In-
dias, XV, 100, 151, 1871; Villagran, Hist.
Nueva Mexico, 1610, repr. 1900; Vetan-
curt, Cronica, and Menologia, repr. 1871 ;
Bandelier, (1) Hist. Introd., 1881, (2)
Contributions, 1890, (3) Final Report,
1890-92; Bancroft, Hist. Ariz, and N.
Mex., 1889; Lummis, Land of Poco
Tiempo, 1893; Hodge, (1) Katzimo the
Enchanted, 1898, (2) Ascent of the En-
chanted Mesa, 1898. (f. w. h.)
Aaoui.— Barcia. Ensavo, 21 . 1 723. Abucioi. —Duro,
Don Diego do Peftalosa, 23, 1882 (the Aciis of Niza).
Acmaat.— Evans (1888) in Compte Rendu Cong.
Int. Am., vn, 229, 1»90. A-co.— Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Papers, iii, pt. 1, 132, 1890 (or Aeo-
ma). Awwiya.— Oflate (1598) in Doe. Indd., xvi,
102, 1871 (from Zuili name Hakukia). Acoma.—
Espejo (158S), ibid., xv, 116. 1871. Acoma.— Ofiate
(1698), ibid.. XVI, 127, 1871. Acoman.— Hakluyt,
Voy., 469, 1600 (or Acoma; citing Espejo, 1583).
Aoomai.- Alcedo, Die. Geog., il, 523, 549. 1787
( " pueblo de Acoraas " ) . Acome.— MS. of 1764 in
Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribe.s, in, 304. 1853. Acomen-
•6i.— Bancroft. Ariz, and N. Mex., 145, 1889.
Acomesea. —Villagran. Hist. Nueva Mexico. 158,
1610. Aoomo.— Mota-Padilla. Hist, de la Con-
quista, 169, 1742. Acona.— Emory, Recon., 133.
1848. Aoonia.— Ward in Ind. AIT. Rep. 1864, 191.
1865. Aoquia.— Benavidea (1630) misquoted in
Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th ser., xxvii, 307, 1851.
Aou.— Ogilbv, America, 392, 1671. Acuoa.— Ramu-
sio, Nav. et Viaggi, in, 1, 1565. Acucani.— Whip-
ple in Pac. R. R. Rep. , in, pt. 3, 90, 1856. Acuoo.—
Castafieda (1540) in Winship, Coronado Exped.,
619, 1896. Aouou.— Coronado (1540), ibid., 560.
Aoui.— Nica (1539) in Hakluyt, Voy., iii, 440.
1600. Aoux.— Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la Conq.,
Ill, 1742. Ago.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
I, 14, 1881 (proper (Dueres name). Ah-co.— Lum-
mis, Land of Poco Tiempo. 63. 1893. Ah-ko.— Lum-
mis, Man Who Married the Moon, 207, 1894.
A'ikoka.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 30. 1891
(Hopi name of pueblo). Aioma.— Linschoten.
Descrip. de I'Am^rique, 336. map. 1638. Aiomo.—
Ogilby, America, map, 1671. Ako.— Loew (1875)
in Wheeler Surv. Rep., vii, 339, 345, 1879.
Akokovi.— Voth, Traditions of the Hopi, 145, 1905
(Hopi name of pueblo). Ako-ma.— Bandelier
in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 173, 1890 (tribal name).
Akome.— Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1896 (own
name: 'people of the white rock'). Alouco.—
Barcia, Ensavo. 21,1723. Alomas.— Mota-Padilla,
Hi.st. de la Conq., 515, 1742 (probably the same).
A-qo.— Bandelier in Mag. West. Hist.. 668. Sept.,
1886 (native name of pueblo). Aquia.— Jefferys,
Am. Atla.s, map 5, 1776 (doubtless the stime, but
he locates also San Estevan de Acoma). Atla-
ohaco.— Mota-Padilla (1742), op. cit.. 159. Coco.—
Alvarado (1540) in Winship, Coronado Exped.,
594. 1896. Hab-koo-kee-ah.— Domenech. Des. N.
A., II, 53, 1860. Hacu.— Bandelier in Mag. West.
Hist., 668, Sept., 1886 (Navaho name of pueblo).
Hacuqua.— Bandelier, Gilded Man. 149, 1893 (given
as Zuni name of pueblo: should be Hakukia).
Ha-ou-quiit— Bandelier in Mag. West. Hist., 668,
Sept., 1886 (Zufii name of pueblo). Hacu».— Niva
(1539) cited by Coronado (1540) in Doc. In^d., xiv,
322, 1870 ( same as N i^a' s A cus ) . Hah-koo-kee-ah. —
t:aton quoted by Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, iv, 220,
1854 (Zui\i name of pueblo). Hak-koo-ke«-ah.—
Simpson in Smithst>n. Rep. 1869, 333. 1871. Ha-
ku.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, v. 173. 1890
(given as Zufii name of pueblo). Ha-kuKue.—
Ibid., III. pt. 1. V.U, 1890 (improperly given as
Zufii name of pueblo). Ha-ku«.— Ibid., v, 173,
1890 (Navaho name of pueblo; see 7/arw. above).
Penol.— Alcedo, Die. Geog., iv. 149, 1788 (so named
from the mesa). Penoles.- Perea, Verdadera
Rel., 3, 1632. Quebec of the Southwest.- Lummis,
Land of PocoTiempo, 57, 1893. Queres Gibraltar.—
Ibid.. 57. San Esteban de Acoma. — Vetancurt.
Teatro Mex.. iii, 319. 1871 (mission name). San
Esteban de A«oma.— Orozco y Berra in Anales
Minis. Fom.. vi. 255. 1882 (misprint 8 for <•).
San Pedro. — Bancroft. Ari/.. and N. Mex.,
221. 1889 (mission name after July, 1699).
S. Estevan de Acoma.— JefTerys, Am. Atlas, map 5,
1776 S. Estevau de Acama.-^Brion de la Tour,
map I'Am^T.. 1779 (misprint). St Estevan.-
Kitchin, map N. A. (1785) in Raynal, Indies, vi.
1788. S* Estevan Acoma.— De I'lsle, Carte Mex. et
Floride, 1703. St Estevan Queres.- Ibid., Atlas
Nouveau, map 60,' 1733. Suco.— Galvano (1563) in
Hakluyt Soc. Pub., xxx, 227, 1862 (misquoting Ac-
uco, of Coronado; also applied to Cicuic = Pecos).
Ti'lawehuide.— Gatschet. I.sletaMS. vocab.,B. A. E.,
1885 (Isleta name of the people; pi. Ti'lawehun).
Ti'lawei.— Ibid. ( Isleta name: compare Tuthla-
huay). Tu'hlawai.— Hodge, field-notes. B. A. E.,
1895 (Sandia name; probably refers to a tree or
plant). Tu'*hl»wc.— Ibid. (Lsleta name). Tiila-
w«. — Gatschet. Isleta MS. vo<'«b.. B. A. E..
1885 (another Isletiu name). Tuthea-uay.— Ban-
delier, (iilded Man, 211. 1893 (Tigua name of
pueblo). Tuthla-huay.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst.
Papers, iv. 235. 1892 (Tigua name). Tuth-lanay.—
Bandelier, Gilded Man, 149. 1893 (misprint n for
w). Vacua.- Niva, Relation, in Ramu.sio, Nav.
et Viaggi, in. :^7. 15<>5. Vsacus.- Ibid. Yacoo.—
Onate (1598) in Doc. In^'d., xvi. 115, 1871 (Span-
ish y Arro = *and Acco'). Yaco. — Columbus
Memorial Vol., 15.5. 1893 (misprint of Of^ate's
'* Yacco").
Acomita. An Acoma summer village
about 15 m. n. of the pueblo of Acoma,
near McCartys station on the Santa F^
Pacific railroad, Valencia co., N. Mex.
AconisU.- Pullen in Harper's Weekly, 594. Aug.
2. 1890. Tiohuna.— Hodge, field notes, B. A. E.,
1895 (native name).
Aconchi. An Opata pueblo on the e.
bank of Rio Sonora, about lat. 29° 45^
N. w. Mexico. It was the seat of the Snan-
ish mission of San Pedro, foundeu in
1639. Pop. 580 in 1678, 285 in 171^.
(Orozco y Berra, Geog., 344, 1864.)
San Pedro Aconchi.— Zapata (1678) quoted by
Bancroft. No. Mex. States, i, 246, 1884.
Acoomemeck. A town, perhaps Nip-
muc, in e. Massachusetts in the 17th cen-
12
ACOTI — ADAI
[b. a. ■.
tiiry. — Winthrop (1638) in Drake, Book
of Inds., bk. ii, 27, 1848.
Acoti. A l()cality, apparently Indian,
on a w. branch of the Rio Grande, w. of
Taos, in N. N. Mex., and indicated as the
** birth place of Montezuma' ' on an Indian
map reproducer! in Whipple, Pac. R. R.
Rep., Ill, pt. 3, 10, 1856. See Shipapu-
lima.
AcoU.— Meline, Two Thousaiul Miles, 202, 1867.
Aobti.— Whipple, op. eit.
Aeons. The principal village of the
Chaicclesaht, situate on Battle bay,
Ououkinish inlet, \v. coast of Vancouver
id.— Can. Ind. Aff , 264, 1902.
Acpactaniche. A town, probably Musk-
hogean, located on De T Isle's map of
1703 on the headwaters of Coosa r., Ala.
Acqaack (pot^sibly related to the Chip-
pewa iVkwa kwayag^ a locative term ex-
prassing the line l^etween cover and open;
Its particular sense is ' at the edge of the
woods,* the |x)int of view being from the
open; the idea of woods is expressed by
the secondary stem -ak-. — Wm. Jones).
A village of the Powhatan confederacy
of Virginia in 1608, on the x. bank of
Rappahannock r., Richmond co.— Smith
(1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819.
Atquacke.— Ibid., ii, 91.
Aeqnaskac. A village situated in 1608
on the w. bank of Patuxent r., St Marys
CO., Md. The word may be related to
Aquascogoc and Weckquaesgoek.
AoqoaMaok.— Bozman. Hist. Md., i, 141, 1837.
Aoquaakack. — Smith (1620). Virginia, i, map, repr.
1819.
Acqnera. An Utina tribe or band in n.
Florida. — Laudonni^re (1564) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., n. s., i, 243, 1869.
Acuera.—Garci lasso de la Vega. Florida, 47, 1723.
Aequeya.— Barcia, Ensayo, 48, 1723 (given as the
cacique's name) .
Acqaintanacsiiak. A tribe or subtribe
which Capt. John Smith (Virginia, i,
118, 1629; Arber ed., 53, 1884) locates
on the w. bank of Patuxent r., St Mary's
CO., "Md. They were near to and in
friendship witli the Patuxent and Mat-
tapanient, the 3 tribes numbering 200
warriors. The principal village bore the
tribal name and is supposed by Bozman
to have been situated at the mouth of
a small creek al)out 2J m. above Cole's
inspection house. Smith describes them
as **the most civ ill to give entertaine-
ment." Although this wople had their
werowance, or chief, it is doubtful whether
they formed a distinct tribe; it is not
impossible that they were a band or divi-
sion of the Patuxent. A number of local
names mentioned by early writers as
those of Indian tribes of Maryland sub-
seiiuently dropped from notice without
indication of the extinction of the peo-
ple, very likely because subseijuent and
more correct information showed that
these referred merely to divisions of well-
known tribes, (j. m. c. t. )
Ac-quin-a-naek-iu-aokif Macauley, N. Y., ii, 168,
1829. Aoquintanackittah. —Bozman , Hist. Md., i,
140, 1837. Aoouintanaektnak.— Smith (1629), Va.,
I, 118, repr. 1819. Aoquintanaosuok.— Ibid., map.
AoquiBtunachiuah.— Bozman, Hist. Md., ii, 4o7,
1837. AoquitaaaMt.— De Laet, Hist, du Nouv.
Monde, 85, 1640.
Actinolite. A variety of amphibolite
much used for implements by the ancient
Pueblos of A rizona and New Mexico. It
occurs in small bodies in connection with
various crystalline formations, especially
serpentine, and is much diversified in
color, the mottlings of various hues of
red, yellow, green, and gray giving very
pleasing effects. Analysis shows silica,
60; magnesia, 21; lime, 14; specific grav-
itv, 3 to 3.1. Illustrations are given by
Nbrdenskiold, Cliff Dwellers, 1893; Put-
nam in Surv. W. 100th Merid., vii, 1879;
Wilson in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1896, 1898.
(W. H. H.)
Acnbadaos. A tribe known to Cabeza
de Vaca (Smith transl., 84, 1851) during
his sojourn in Texas, 1527-34, as living
** in the rear'] of or more inland than the
Atayos (Adai). The region indicated
would seem to be Caddoan country.
Acuragna. A former Gabrielefto vil-
lage in Los Angeles co., Cal., at a place
later called I a Presa.— Ried ( 1852)quoted
by Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860.
Acnshnet. A village of Prayine In-
dians in 1698, probably about Acusbnet,
Bristol CO., Mass. "Acchusnutt" is said
to have been the Indian name of New
Bedford.— Rawson and Danforth (1698)
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ists., x, 129-
134, 1809.
Acyam. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Adac. A Cochimi rancheria belonging
to Santa Gertrudis mission, e. side oi
Lower California, about lat. 27° 58^—
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Jan. 17, 1862.
Adai. A tribe of the Caddo confed-
eracy, speaking a dialect closelj^ related
to that of the kadohadacho, Hainai, and
Anadarko. The tribe was first encoun-
tered in 1529 by Cabeza de Vaca, who
s()eaks of them, under the name Ataj^oe,
as living inland from the Gulf of Mexico.
When Iberville ascended Red r. of Ix)uis-
iana in 1699 he heard of the people and
called them Natao, stating that their vil-
lage was on the river near that of the
Yatasi. According to La Harpe (1719)
the tribe was very useful to the French
traders and explorers, particularly when
making portages. At that time the vil-
lages of the Adai extended from Red r.
southward beyond the Sabine, in Texas,
known in the 18th century as Rio de los
Adiais. The trail which from ancient
times had connected the Adai villages
became the noted ** contraband trail"
BULL. 30]
ADARIO — ADIRONDACK
13
over which traders and travelers jour-
neyed between the Frencli and Spanish
provinces, and one of the villages was a
station on the road between the French
fort at Natt'hitoches and the Spanish fort
at San Antonio. As the villages of the
tribe were scattered over a territory one
portion of which was under the control
of the French and the other under that of
the Spaniards, the Indians were subjected
to all the adverse influences of the white
race and suffered from their wars and
from the new diseases and intoxicants
which they introduced, so that by 1778
they were reported by MeziOres (Ban-
croft, No. Mex. States, i, 661, 1886) as al-
most exterminated. About 1792, 14 fami-
lies of the tribe, together with a number
of Mexicans, emigrated to a region s. of
San Antonio de Bejar, but they soon
melted away and were lost among other
Indians. Those who remained numbered
about 100. In 1805 Sibley reported a
small settlement of these Indians on Lac
Macdon, near an affluent of Red r.; it
contained only 20 men, but a larger num-
ber of women. This Adai remnant
had never left their ancient locality, but
thev had not escaped the vicissitudes of
their kindred. In 1715 Domingo Ramon,
with a company of Franciscans, traversed
the Adai territory and started settle-
ments. In 1716 the mission of San Miguel
de Linares was founded among them, and
there were Adai also in the mission of San
Francisco de losTejas, established in 1690.
About 1735 a military post called Nuestra
Seilora del Pilar was added, and 5
years later this garrison l)ecame the Pre-
sidio de los Adayes. Later, when the
country was districted for the jurisdic-
tion of Indians, the Adai tribe was placed
under the division having its official head-
quarters at Nacogdoches. I nail essentials
of living and ceremony they resembled
the other Caddo, by whom the remnant
was finally absorbed. ( a. c. f. )
Adaet.~Rivera, Diario, leg. 2,602, 1736. Adm:—
Bollaert in J. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., ii, 2r>5. 1850.
Adife.— Tanner, Nar., 327, 1830. Adahi.— I^tham.
Elem. Comp. Phllol., 467, 1862. Ada'-i.— Mooney,
Caddo MS., B. A. E.. 1891. Adaicei.— Ann. de la
Prop, de la Foi. in, 508, 1828. Adaios.— Bond i not.
Star in the West, 1*25, 1816. Adaies.— P^^nicnut-
rnoi) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s. i, 73, 1869.
Adaihe.— LAtham, Elem. Comp. Philol., 469, 1862.
Adaia.— Mota-Padilla (1742), Hist, de la Conq.,
177, 1870. Adaiwei.— Bollaert in J. Ethnol. Soo.
T>ond., n, 280, 1850. Adai«e.— Sibley. Hist.
Sk3tche8, 67, 1806. Adayet.— La Harpe (1719) in
Margry, D^., vi, 303, 1886. Adays.— La Harpe in
French. Hist. CoH. La., in, 47. 1851. Addaite.—
Schermerhom (1812) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., ii,
24, 1814. Addai«e.— Brackenridge, Views of La.,
81, 1814. Addees.— U. S. Ind. Treaties, 465, 1826.
Addiet.— Clark and Cass (1829) quoted by School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, ni, 596, 1853. Adee».— Keane
in Stanford, Compend., 499, 1878. Adeyohei.—
Martin, Hiat. La., i, 202, 1827. Adiait.— JefTerys,
Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Adoiei.— Villa-Sefior,
Theatre Am., n, 329, 1748. Adyes.— Pike, Exped.,
277, 1810. Andaye*.— Baudry dea Lozii^ros. Voy.
Louisiane, 241. 1802. AUyoi.-Cabe^'a (ie Vaca
(1529), Smith transl., 121, 1871. Atoyoi.— Davis.
Span. Conq.. N. Mex., 82, 1869. Azadyze.— Wood-
wanl, Remmis.. 78. IS.'ig. Hadai.— Gatst'het, Creek
Migr. Leg., i. 43, 18H4. Hadaies.— Doc. of 18th
centurv quoted bv Smith, Cabeva de Vaca, 127,
note, 1871. NaUo.— Iberville (1699) in Margry,
DC'c, IV, 17S, IHSO.
Adario. A Tionontate chief, known also
as Kondiaronk, Sastaretsi, and The Rat.
He ha<l a high repntation for bravery and
sagacity, and was courted by the French,
who made a treaty with him in 1688 by
which he agreed to lead an expedition
against the Iroipiois, his hereditary ene-
mies. Starting out for the war with a
I)icked band, he was surprised to hear, on
reaching C^ataracouy, that the French
were negotiating i)eace with the Iroquois,
who were about to send envoys to Mont-
real with hostages from each tril)e. (Con-
cealing his surprise and chagrin, he
secretly determined to intercept the em-
bassy. Departing as though to return
to his own country in compliance with
the admonition of the French comman-
dant, he placed his men in ambush and
made prisoners of the members of the
Iro«iuois mission, telling the (;hief of the
embassy that the French had commis-
sioned him to surprise and destroy the
party. Keeping only one prisoner to
answer for the death of a Huron who
was killed in the tight, he set the others
free, saying that he hoped they would
repay the French for their treachery.
Taking his captive to Michilimackinac,
he delivered him over to the French com-
mander, who put him to death, having
no knowledge of the arrangement of
peace. He then released a captive Iro-
(juois whom he had long held at his village
that he might return to inform his people
of the act of the French (Oinmander.
An expedition of 1,200 Iroquois fell upon
Montreal Aug. 25, 1B89, when the French
felt secure in the anti ipation of peace,
slew hundreds of tlie settlers and burned
and sacked the place. Other posts were
abandoned by the French, and only the
excellent fortifications of others saved
them from being driven out of the country.
Adario led a delegation of Huron chiefs
who went to Montreal to conclude a
peace, and while there he died, Aug. 1,
1701, and was buried by the French with
military honors. (f. h.)
Adiiondack (Mohawk: HaiiroTi'tfiks^
*they eat trees', a name given in allusion
to the eating of the l)ark of trees in time
of famine. — Hewitt). The Algonquian 1
tribes n. of the St Lawrence with which \
the Iroquois were acquainted, particu-
larly those along Ottawa and St Maurice
rs., who were afterward settled at Three
Rivers and Oka, (Quebec. Jefferys in
1761 seems to apply the term to the fchip-
pewa. (.1. M. )
Adirondaos.— Burton, New Views, xxxviii, 1798.
Adirondacks.— <iaranguhi (1684) qnoted by Wil-
liams, Vermont, i. fiOt. 1809. Adirondaki.— Ho-
mann heirs map, 1756. Adirondax.— Livingston
14
ADJUIT8UPPA ADOBE
[B. A. E.
(1701} in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv. 899, 1864. Adi-
rontak.— Vetromile, Abnaki8,61, 1866. Adisonkas.
—Martin, North Carolina, i, 76, 1829. Adnon-
deokt.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, iii, 79,
1854. Arundac*.— Johnson (1763) in N. Y. Doo.
Col. Hist., VII, 582, 1856. Arundax.— Ft Johnson
conference (1756), ibid., 233. Honanduk.— Coxe,
Carolana, map, 1741 (on e. shore of L. Hu-
ron; same?), troondocks.— Carver, Travels, 120,
1778. L&tiaentasks.— King, Jour, to Arctic Ocean,
I, 11, 1836 (at Oka). Orendaket.— Martin, North
Carolina, ii, 65, 1829. Orondacks.— Johnson (1751)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 729, 1865. Orondookt.—
Sloddart (1750), ibid., 582 (at Oka). Orondoes.—
Imlay, Western Ter.. 292,1797. Oroondoki.— Stod-
dart (1753) in N. V. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 780, 1855.
Oroonduoks.— Lindesay (1749), ibid., 538. Onm-
dacka.— Dinwiddle (1754), ibid., 827. Raron-
daks.— Vater, Mithridates, pt. 3. sec. 3, 309. 1816.
Ratiruntaka.— Gatschet.Caughnawaga MS., B. A.
E., 1882 (Mohawk name; sing. Ranintaks).
Rondax.— Glen (1699) in N. Y.Doc. Col, Hist., iv,
559, 1854. Rondaxe.— Von der Donck (1656) in
N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., i, 209, 1841.
Adjuitsuppa. An Eskimo settlement
and Danish trading station in s. w. Green-
land, lat. 60° 27^— Meddelelser om
(TFonland, xvi, map, 1896.
Siidprbven.— Koldewey. (icrman Arct. Exped.,
182, 1874. Sydproven.— Meddelelserom GrOnland,
xvi, map. 1896.
Adlet. A fabuloiiK people that the
Eskimo l>elieve to be dascended from a
dog. A woman married a reil dogand
bore five dogs, which she cast adrift
in a boat, and also five children of mon-
strous shape. The dogs reached the other
side of the ocean and begot the white
people. The monsters engenderetl the
Adlet, terrible beings, identified by the
Labrador Eskimo with the Indians, of
whom they formerly lived in dread, also
by the Eskimo of the western shores of
Hudson bay, who, however, called this
misbegotten and bloodthirsty race Er-
qigdlit. The Eskimo of Greenland and
Baffin land, having no Indian neighbors,
pictured the tribe of monsters with hu-
man heads, arms, and trunks joined to the
hind legs of dogs. See Boas ( 1 ) in Trans.
Roy. Soc. Can., v., sec. 2, 35, 1888; (2) in
6th Rep. B. A. E., 640, 1888.
Adla.— Boas in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., op. cit.
(sing, form of Adlat). Adlihsuin.— Stein in Peter-
manns Mitt., no. 9. map, 1902. Adlat— Boas, op.
cit. Adlet— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 640, 1888.
Erqiglit — Ibid.
Adobe (a word traceable to an Egyptian
hieroglyph signifying 'brick,' thence to
Arabic at'toby al-toh, whence the Spanish
adobavj * to daub,' *to plaster'; adopted
in the United States from Mexico),
l^rge sun-dried bricks, much used by the
Pueblo Indians of New Mexico in build-
ing houses and garden walls. The pro-
cess of molding adobes in a wooden frame
was not employed by the aborigines of
the United States before the advent of
the Spaniards in the 16th century. In
1540 the Pueblo method of preparing
the material and of erecting masonry,
when stone was not available, is thus de-
scribed by Castafleda (14th Rep. B. A. E.,
520, 1896): "They gather a great pile of
twigs of thyme [sagebrush] and sedge
grass and set it afire, and when it is half
coals and ashes they throw a quantity of
dirt and water on it and mix it all
together. They make round balls of
this, which they use instead of stones
after they are dry, fixing them with the
same mixture, which comes to be like a
stiff clay." After the introduction of
wheat by the Spaniards the straw crushed
by the hoofs of horses in stamping out
the grain on a threshing floor was sub-
stituted by the Indians for the charred
brush. The character of much of the
soil of the arid region is such that no for-
eign admixture, excepting the straw, is
required. A requisite of adoV)e-making
is a good supply of water; conse-
sequently the industry is conducted gen-
erally on the banks of streams, near
which pueblos are usually built. When
molded, the adobes are set on edsje to
dry, slanted slightly to shed rain. Adobes
vary in size, but are generally about 18
in. long, 8 to 10 in. wide, and 4 to 6 in.
thick. In setting them in walls mortar
of the same material is used, as is the
case with stone masonry. In the S. W.,
where the average precipitation is not
^reat, structures built of adobes last
mdefinitely with reasonable repair, the
greatest amount of disintegration being
at the base of the walls during seasons of
rain, although prolonged sand storms
also erode the surfaces. For the sake of
appearancre, as well as to aid in protect-
ing it against weathering, adobe masonry
is usually plastered (the Indian women
using their hands as trowels), when it
presents a pleasing appearance, varying
m color from gray to a rich reddish
brown, according to the color of the
earth of which the plaster is made.
The interior walls and sometimes also the
borders of the windows and doors are
sometimes whitewashed with gypsum.
Away from streams, as at Acoma, stone
is usually employed for house masonry;
but a noteworthy exception is the im-
mense adobe church at this pueblo, built
by the Indians about 1699, under the
direction of the Spanish fathers, of mate-
rial carried from the plain below, the
'summit of the Acoma mesa being bare
rock. Another kind of earth-masonry in
the arid region is that known as pis^.
This was ms^e by erecting a double frame-
work of poles, w^attled with reeds or
grass, forming two parallel surfaces as
far apart as the desired thickness of the
wall, and into the enclosed space adobe
grout waa rammed. In the celebrated
ruin of Casa Grande (q. v.) the frame-
work was evidently built about 5 ft. long
and 3 or 4 ft. wide, and when the grout
became dry the frame was moved side-
ways or upward to receive the next
course (see Mindeleff in 13th Rep. B.
BULL. 30]
ADOEETTE ADOPTION
15
A. E. 309, 1896; Gushing, ibid., 360).
Houses constructed of adobes are very
comfortable, being warm in winter and
cool in summer. For this reason, and
owing to the availability and cheapness
of the material, adobe forms an impor-
tant factor in the domestic economy of
both white and Indian inhabitants of the
S. W. (F. W. H.)
Adoeette {ado 'tree/ e-et 'great,' tf per-
sonal suffix: * Big Tree'). A Kiowa
chief, bom about 1845. In consequence
of Custer's vigorous campaign on the
Washita in the fall of 1868 the Kiowa
and confederated tribes had been com-
pelled to come in upon their reservation,
m what is now h. w. Oklahoma, but still
kept up frequent raids into Texa.^ not-
withstanding the establishment of Ft
ADOEETTE ( KIOWA )
Sill in their midst. In May, 1871, a
large party of warriors led by Satan ta
( properly Set-t'aiiVte, White Bear), q.v.,
and accompanied by Satank (properly
Set-angyii, Sitting Bear), q. v., ana Big
Tree, attacked a wagon train, killing 7
men and taking 41 mules. For their
part in this deed, which they openly
avowed, the three chiefs named were
arrested at Ft Sill to stand trial in Texas.
Setangya made resistance and was killed
by the guard. The other two were
con^ned in the Texas penitentiary
until Oct., 1873, when they were released
on promise of good behavior of their tribe.
Satanta was subsequently rearrested
and committed suicide in prison. Dur-
ing the latter part of the outbreak of
1874-75 Big Tree, with other chiefs be-
lieved to l^ secretly hostile, were con-
fined as prisoners at Ft Sill. Since that
time the tribe has remained at peace.
Big Tree is still living upon his allotment
on the former reservation and is now a
professed Christian. See Mooney, Cal-
endar Hist. Kiowa Inds., 17th Rep. B.
A. E., 1898.
Adoption. An almost universal politi-
cal and social institution which originally
dealt only with persons but later with
families, clans or gentes, bands, and
tribes. It had its Ix^innings far back in
the history of primitive society and, after
passing through many forms and losins;
much ceremonial garb, appears to-day in
the civilized institution of naturalization.
In the primitive mind the fundamental
motive underlying adoption was to defeat
the evil purpose of death to remove a
member of the kinship group by actually
replacing in jwrson the lost or dead mem-
ber. In primitive philosophy, birth and
death are the resAlts of magic power;
birth increases and death decreases the
orenda ((}. v. ) of the clan or family of the
group affected. In order to preserve that
magic power intact, society, by the exer-
cise of con struct iveor€//(/fT, resuscitates the
dead in the person of another in whom is
embodied the blood and person of the
dead. As the diminution of the number of
the kindred was n»garded as having been
caused by magic power — by the orenda of
some hostile agency — so the prevention
or reparation of that loss must he accom-
plished by a like power, manifested in
ritualisticliturgy and ceremonial. From
the view pointof the primitive minda<iop-
tion serves to change, by a fiction of law,
the iH»rsonality as well as the political
status of the adopted person. For ex-
ample, there were captured two white
persons (sisters) by the Seneca, and in-
stead of both being adopted into one clan,
one was adopted by the Deer and the
other bv the Heron clan, and thus the
blood of the two sisters was changed by
the rite of adoption in such wise that
their children could intermarry. Fur-
thermore, to satisfy the underlying con-
cept of the rite, the adopted person must
be brought into one of the strains of
kinship in order to define the standing
of sucn person in the community, and
the kinship name which the person re-
ceives declares his relation to all other
persons in the family group; that is to
say, should the adopted person be named
son rather than unc;le by the adopter, his
status in the community would differ ac-
cordingly. From the political adoption
of the Tuscarora by the Five Nations,
about 1726, it is evident that tribes, fam-
ilies, clans, and groups of people could
be adopted like persons. A fictitious age
might be conferred upon the person
adopted, since age largely governed the
rights, duties, and position of persons in
16
ADORNMENT
[B. A. E.
the community. In this wise, by the ac-
tion of the constituted authorities, the age
of an adopted group was fixed and its
social and political importance thereby
determined. Owing to the peculiar cir-
cumstances of the expulsion of the Tus-
carora from North Carolina it was deemed
best by the Five Nations, in view of their
relation to the Colonies at that time, to
give an asylum to the Tuscarora simply
by means of the institution of adoption
rather than by the political recognition
of the Tuscarora as a member of the
I.,ea^ue. Therefore the Oneida made a
motion in the federal council of the Five
Nations that they adopt the Tuscarora as
a nursling still swathed to the cradle-
board. This having prevailed, the Five
Nations, by the spokesman of the Oneida,
said: "We have- set up for ourselves a
cradle-board in the extended house,*'
that is, in the dominions of the League.
After due probation the Tuscarora, by
separate resolutions of the council, on
separate motions of the Oneida, were
made successively a boy, a young man,
a man, an assistant to the official woman
cooks, a warrior, and lastlj^ a peer, hav-
ing the right of chiefship m the council
on an eijual footing with the chiefs of the
other tribes. From this it is seen that a
tribe or other group of people may be
adopted upon any one of several planes
of political growth, corresponding to the
various ages of human growth. This
seems to explain the problem of the al-
leged subjugation and degradation of the
Dela wares by the Iroquois, which is said
to have l>een enacted in open council.
When it is understood that the Five Na-
tions adopted the Delaware tribe as men
assistants to the official cooks of the
I.«ague it becomes clear that no taint of
slavery^'and degradation was designed to
be given by the act. It merely made the
Delawares pro))ationary heirs to citizen-
ship in the League, and citizenship would
be conferred upon them after suitable
tutelage. In this they were treated with
much greater consideration than were
the Tuscarora, who are of the language
and lineage of the Five Nations. The
Delawares were not adopted as warriors
or chiefs, but as assistant cooks; neither
were they adopted, like the Tuscarora, as
infants, liut as men whose duty it was to
assist the women whose official function
was to cook for the people at public as-
semblies. Their office was hence well
exemplified by the possession of a corn
pestle, a hoe, and petticoats. This fact,
misunderstood, perhaps intentionally
misrepresented, seems to explain the
mystery concerning the "making women"
of the Delawares. This kind of adoption
was virtually a state of probation, which
could be made long or short.
The adoption of a chiefs son by a fel-
low chief, customary in some of the
tribes of the N. W. coast, differs in mo-
tive and effect from that defined above,
which concerns persons alien to the
tribe, upon whom it confers citizen-
ship in the clan, ^ens, and tribe, as this
deals only with mtratribal persons for
the purpose of conferring some degree of
honor upon them rather than citizenship
and political authority.
The Iroquois, in order to recruit the
great losses incurred in their many wars,
put into systematic practice the adoption
not only of individuals but also of entire
clans and tribes. The Tutelo, the Saponi,
the Nanticoke, and other tribes and por-
tions of tribes were forced to incorporate
with the several tribes of the Iroquois
confederation by formal adoption.
After the Pequot war the Narragan-
set adopted a large body of the Pequot.
The Chickasaw adopted a section of the
Natchez, and the Uchee were incorpo-
rated with the Creeks. In the various
accounts of the American Indian tribes
references to formal adoption and incor-
poration of one people dv another are
abundant. It is natural that formal
adoption as a definite institution was
most in vogue wherever the clan and
gentile systems were more or less fully
developed. ( j. n. b. h. )
Adornment. The motive of personal
adornment, aside from the desire to
appear attractive, seems to have been to
mark individual, tribal, or ceremonial
distinction. The use of paint on the face,
hair, and body, both in color and design,
generally had reference to individual or
clan beliefs, or it indicated relationship
or personal bereavement, or wad an act
of courtesy. It was always employed in
ceremonies, religious and secular, and
was an accompaniment of gala dress
donned to honor a guest or to celebrate
an occasion. The face of the dead was
frequently painted in accordance with
tribal or religious symbolism. The prac-
tice of painting was widespread and was
observed by both sexes. Paint was also
put on the faces of adults and children
as a protection against wind and sun.
Plucking the hair from the face and body
was generally practised. Deformation,
as head flattening, and tattooing, accord-
ing to some writers, were personal embel-
lishments. Fats were used to beautify
the hair and to ceremonially anoint the
face and body. Sweet grass and seeds,
as those of the columbine, served as per-
fume.
Ear ornaments were a mark of family
thrift, wealth, or distinction, and indi-
cated honor shown to the wearer by his
kindred. Ceremonies, occasionally re-
ligious in character, some of which seem
BULL. 30]
ADORNMENT
17
SEMINOLE Ear
OMNAMENTS
to relate to sacrificial rites, usually at-
tended the boring of the ear. Each per-
foration cost the parent of
the child or the kindred of the
adult gifts of a
standard value,
and sometimes
these perfora-
tions extended
round the entire
rim of the ear.
The pendants
were of haliotis
or other valued
shell, or were made of metal
or bone, or were long woven
bands of dentalium which
reached nearly to the waist.
Labrets were used by the
Eskimo, the x. Pacific coa.«t
tribes, and some of the
Gulf coast Indians. Among
some the labret was worn
only* by men, in some by
women, and where worn bv
both sexes it was of two dif-
ferent styles. At puberty an
incision was made in the
lip or at the corner of the
mouth, and a slender pin
was inserted, which was re-
placed by larger ones until
the opening could admit a
stud of the size desired.
The Eskimo, when travel-
ing, removed his labret to prevent freez-
ing of the lip, but inserted it when en-
Penoant of Denta-
lium anoAbalone
Shell
tering a village. Among some of the
northern and southern tribes the septum
of the nose was pierced, and feathers,
bark, or rings were inserted.
ESKIMO GIRL WITH NOSE-RING
EIa))orate ornamentation of garments
was reserved for the gala dress. The
Eskimo combined bits of fur of different
colors and quality in a pleasing pattern
for trimming their garments, and fishskin
dyed in brilliant colors and the plumage
of birds were also used for the same pur-
pose. Outer garments were made of
the breasts of sea birds skilfully joined
together. AuKmg the inland tril)es the
earlier designs for porcupine and feather
quillwork were reproduced later in l)eads
of P^uropean manufacture. Feathers were
widely used to decorate the robes and
garments of warriors and other distin-
guished persons, and were woven into
mantles by the cliff-dwellers and by
tribes formerly living near the (iulf of
Mexico. Among the Plains Indians the
milk teeth of the elk were the most
costly of adornments. They were fast-
ened in rows on a woman's tunic, giving
the garment a value of several hundred
dollars.
Headbands, armlets, bracelets, belts,
necklaces, and garters, of metal, seeds.
9Jfk
LABRETS, WESTERN ESKIMO. (nELSOn)
Bull. 30—05 2
SILVER BRACELETS, HAIDA. (nIBLACk)
embroidered buckskin, peculiar pelts, or
woven fiber, had their j)ractical use, but
18
ADORNMENT
[B. A. B.
were made decorative, and often were
symbolic. Archeological testimony shows
that sea-shell beads, worn as necklaces or
woven into belts, were widely used, and
they probably found their way into the
CROW WOMAN WITH ELK-TOOTH DRESS
interior throiijrh barter or as ceremonial ,
or friendly gifts. Wampum belts ligured
largely in the otlicial transactions be-
tween the early settlers and the eastern
tribes. Disks cut from the conch shell
were worn as ornaments and were also
offered in certain religious rites; they
ranked among the northern tribes as did
the tunpioise among the ])eople of tlie
8. W. With the Plains Indians a neck-
lace of l)ear's claws marked the man of
distinction. The headdress varied in dif-
ferent parts of the country and was gen-
erally significant of a man's kinship,
ceremonial office, rank, or totem ic de-
cn«l«at cfr :
pendence, as was also tlie ornamentation
upon his weapons and his shield.
In the S. W. blankets bordered with
a design woven in colors were used on
ceremonial occasions, and with the broad
belt**, white robes, and fringed sashes v/orn
at marriage are interesting specimens of
weaving and color treatment. The bril-
liant Navaho blankets with their cosmic
symbols are well known. The most re-
markable example of the native weaver^s
skill is the ceremonial blanket and apron
of the Chilkat tribe of Alaska; it is made
of the wool of the mountain goat, dyed
black, yellow, and green with native
dyes over a warp of cedar-bark strings.
A design of elaborate totemic forms cov-
ered the entire space within the border
lines, and the ends and lower edge were
heavily fringed. According to Boas these
garments probably originated among the
Tsimshian. In the buffalo country
women seldom ornamented their own
robes, but embroidered those worn by
men. Sometimes a man painted his
rol)e in accordance with a dream, or pic-
tured upon it a yearly record of his own
SIHASAPA (bLACKFOOT SIOUX ) COSTUME
deeds or of the ]>ronn'nent events of the
tribe. Women wore the buffalo robe
differently from the men, who gathered
BULL. 30]
ADORNMENT
19
it about the person in a way that empha-
sized their action or the expression of
emotion.
It was common for a tribe to have its
peculiar cut and decoration of the moc-
casin, so that a man's tribe was pro-
claimed by his foot ^ear. The war shirt
was frequently painted to represent the
wearer's prayer, having the design on
the back for protection and one on the
breast for victory. The shirt was occa-
sionally decorated with a fringe of human
hair, locks being generally contri])uted
by female relatives; it rarely displayed
war trophies. The most imposing article
of the warrior's regalia was the bonnet
with its crown of golden-eagle feathers.
Before the introduction of tlie horse the
flap at the back rarely extended below
the waist, but when the warriors got to
be mounted ^*the spine," with its ruff of
feathers, was so lengthened as to equal or
exceed the height of the man. Song and
ceremony accompanied the making of a
war bonnet by warriors of the tril^e, and
a war honor was recounted upon each
feather before it was i)laced in position.
A bonnet could not be made without the
consent of warriors, and it stood as a
HOPI MAIDEN.
(jAMEs)
record of tribal valor as well as a distinc-
tion granted to a man by his fellow
tribesmen.
The gala and ceremonial dress of the
Pueblo tribes of the S. W., of those for-
merly dwelling on the plains, and of those
of the Pacific coast, was replete with
ornamentation which, either in design or
material, suggested rites or past experi-
ences and thus kept alive beliefs and his-
toric memories among the iKH)ple. Such
YUROK GIRL IN GALA DRESS. (gODOARd)
were the woman's dress of the Yurok of
California; the fringe of the skirt was
wrapped with the same vegetal materials
as she used in her basketry, and her
apron was an elaborate network of the
same on which depended strands of shells
with pendants cut from theabalone. In
the same connection may be mentioned
the manner of dressing the hair of a Hopi
maiden; the whorl on each side of her
head symbolizes the flower of the squash,
a sacred emblem of the tribe. The horses
of warriors were often painted to indicate
the dreams or the war experiences of
their riders. Accouterments were some-
times elaborately ornamented.
Consult Abbott, Prim. Indus., 1881;
Beauchamp (1) in Bull. N. Y. State Mus.,
no. 41, 1901, (2) ibid., no. 73, 1903; Boas
20
ADSHUSHEER AGAIHTIKARA
[B. A. ]
(1) in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 1897, (2) in
Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist, Anthr. i, pt.
I, 1898; Dall in 8d Rep. B. A. E., 1884;
Fewkesin 19th Rep. B. A. E., 1900; Fletch-
er in Pubs. Peabody Mus. ; Matthews (1 )
in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., vi, 1903, (2)
in8d Rep. B. A. K., 1884; Mooney in 19th
Rep. B. A. E., 1900; Moorehead, Prehist.
Impls., 1900; Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A.
E., 1899; Putnam in Peabody Mus. Rep.,
Ill, no. 2, 1882; Voth in Am. Anthrop.,
II, 1900; Wissler in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist., XVIII, pt. 3, 1904. See Art, Artificial
Head Deformation^ Beaduork^ Clothing^
Dyes and Pi(jments^ Featherwork, Ifairdress-
iug^ fxihretSy Painting^ Ornament^ Quill-
work J Shelhrorky Tattooing, (a. c. f. )
Adshnsheer. A tribe associated with
the Eno and Shakori in North Carolina
in 1701. Mooney (Bull. 22, B. A. E., 1894)
says: ** It is doubtful if they, at least the
Eno and Shoccoree, were of Siouan stock,
as they seem to have differed in physique
and habit from their neighbors; but as
nothintj is left of their language, and as
their alliances were all with Siouan tribes,
they can not well be discriminated."
There is but a single mention of the
Adshusheer. Lawson (1701) tells of
"the Shoccorie Indians, mixed with the
Enoe and those of the nation of the
Adshusheer, ruled by Enoe Will, a Sho-
corrie," the latter residing at Adshusheer,
14 m. from Achonechy, and ruling as
far Av. as Haw, or Reatkin, r. (Hist.
Carolina, 96, 97, 1860). The village of
the 3 tribes was called Adshusheer,
which ^loonev locates near the present
town of Hillsboro, Durham co., N. C.
Nothing is known of their subsequent
history. The Adshusheer were probably
absorbed by one of the tribes with which
they were associated, (r. t. )
Adzes. Cuttirig, scraping, or gouging
implements in prehistoric and early his-
toric times, made usually of stone, but
not infrequently of shell,* Ixjne, or cop-
per. Iron and steel are much used by
STONE ADZ WITH WOODEN HAFT, HAIDA. (nELSOn)
the tribes at the present day. The blade
resembles that of a celt, although often
somewhat curved by chipping or b}[ grind-
ing at the proper angle to make it niost
effectual. Some are grooved for hafting,
after the manner of the grooved ax, but
the groove does not extend over the fiat
face against which the handle is fastened.
The hafting takes various forms accord-
ing to the shape and size of the blade.
The adz is primarily a wood-working
tool, but it serves also for scraping, as in
the dressing of skins and in other arts,
and, no doubt also on occasion, for digging.
The edge of the primitive adz was prob-
ably not sharp enough to make it effec-
tual in working wocS save in connection
with the process of charring. The dis-
tribution of this implement was very gen-
eral over the area' north of Mexico, but it
probably reached its highest develop-
ment and specialization among the wood-
IRON ADZ WITH IVORY HAFT, ESKIMO. (MURDOCH )
working tribes of the x. Pacific coast.
The scraiHir and the gouge have many
uses in common with the adz.
For various examples of the adz, an-
cient and modern, consult Beauchamp
in Bull. N. Y. State Mus., no. 18, 1897;
Fowke in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896;
Moorehead, Prehist. Impls., 1900; Mur-
doch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 1892; Nelson
in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 1899; Niblack in
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1888, 1890; Rau in Smith-
son. Cont, XXII, 1876. (w. h. h. cj. p.)
Aegakotcheising ( A egakdtch'eising ) . — An
Ottawa village in Michigan in 1851. —
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 478, 1851.
Aepjin (Dutch for * little ape'). A
Mahican village, known as Aepjin's
castle, from the name of the resident
chief, situated in the 17th century at or
near Schodac, Rensselaer co., N. Y. —
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 86, 1872.
Aestaca. A Costanoan rancheria con-
nected with Santa Cruz mission, Cal., in
1819.— Olbez quoted by Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860.
Afegna ( ' bird island ' ). An island off
the w. coast of Lower California, about
lat. 31°, on which was once a Cochimi
rancheria. — Venegas, Hist. Cal., ii, 436,
1757.
Afognak. A Kaniagmiut settlement
consisting of 3 villages on Afognak id., s.
of Cook inlet, Alaska (Bruce, Alaska,
map, 1895). Pop. 339 in 1880, 409 in
1890, .307 in 1900.
Agacay. A former Timuquanan town
on St Johns r., Florida, about 150 m.
from the mouth. — Fontaneda (1565) in
French, Hist. Coll. La., 2d s., 264, 1875.
Agaihtikara ('fish-eaters'). A divi-
sion of the Paviotso living in 1866 in the
vicinity of Walker r. and lake and Car-
hULL. aoi
AGAIVANUNA AGENCY SYSTEM
21
son r. and lake, Nev. They were under
Chief Oderie and numbered about 1,500.
A-gai-du-ka.— Powell. PaviotsoMS.,B. A. E.,1881.
Aga'ih-Uka'ra.— Mooney In 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1051.
1896. A'-gai-ti-kut-teh.— Powers, Inds. W.. Nov..
MS., B. A. E., 1876. Ahgy-tecitteh.— Powers in
Smithaon. Rep. 1876, 452. 1877. Ahgyweit.— Ibid.
Ooki Pah-Utes.— Campbell in Ind. Aff. Rep., 113,
1870. Ocki-Pi-TTtes.— Ibid., 119, 18t>6. Octi.— Ibid.
Walker River Pi-TTtes.— Ibid.
Agaivannna ( A-gai-va-nu^-na ) . A Pavi-
otso division formerly livinj; at Summit
lake, w. Nevada. — Powell, Paviotso MS.,
B. A. E., 1881.
Agamagas. See Moxus.
Agannstata. See Oronostota.
Agate. See Chalcedotnf.
Agawam (' fish-curing [place] '. — Hew-
itt). A name of frequent occurrence in
s. New England and on Ix>ng Island, and
by which was designated at leai^t 3 Indian
villages or tribes in Massachusetts.
The most important was at Ipswich,
P>sex CO. , Mass. The site was sold by the
chief in 1638. Its jurisdiction included the
land on Newbury r., and the tribe was a
part of the Pennacook confederacy. It
was almost extinct in 1658, but as late as
1726 there were still 3 families living near
Wigwam hill.
The second tribe or band of that name
had its chief town on Long hill, near
Springfield, Hampden co., Mass. Spring-
field was sold in 163o and the Indian town
was in existence in 1675. This tribe was
conunonly classed with the Pacomtuc.
The third was about Wareham, Ply-
mouth CO., Mass., the site of which was
sold in 1655. It was probably subject to
the Wampanoag, but joined in the plot
against the English in 1621. (.r. m.)
i^awaam.— Records (1672) in Mass. Hist. Soe.
Ck)ll.. 2d s., IV. 86, 1816. Agawam.— Pynehon (1663)
in N. Y. Doe. Col. Hist., xiii, 308, 1881. Agawom.—
Smith (1629), Virginia, ii, 174, repr. 1819. Aga-
womes.— Gookin (1674) in Mas.s. Hist. Soe. Coll.,
iBt 8., I, 149. 1806. Aggawam.— Smith (1616). ibid.,
3d 8., VI, 97, 1837. Aggawom.— Smith (1629), Vir-
ginia, II, 177, repr. 1819, Agissawamg.— Johnson
(1654) in Mass. Hist. Soe. Coll., 2d s.. ii, 66, 1814.
Agowaun.— Williams (^1638), ibid.. 4th »., vi. 248,
1863. Agowaywam.— Mount (1622), ibid.. 1st s.,
vm, 262, 1802. Aguwom.— Underhill (1638), ibid.,
8a 8., VI. 1, 1837. Angawom.— New Eng. Mem.
quoted by Drake. Ind. Wars, 95, note. 1825. An-
goum.— Mourt (1622) in Mass. Hist. Soe. Coll.,
2d 8., IX, 37, 1822. Anguum.— Ibid. Augawam.—
Dee in Smith (1629), Virginia, ii, 235. repr, 1819.
Augawoam.— Smith ( 1631) in Mass. Hi.Mt. Soe. Coll.,
3d s.. Ill, 22. 1833. Augoam.— Smith (1616), ibid.,
VI, 97, 1837. Augoan.— Smith (1629), Virginia, ii,
193, repr. 1819. Auguan.— Smith (1631) in Mass.
Hist, Soe. Coll.. 3d s.. in, 37, 1833.
/ Agawano (A-ga^-wa-no). A prehistoric
pueblo of the Nambe, situated in the
mountains about 7 m. e. of the Rio
Grande, on Rio Santa Cruz, lat. 36°, New
Mexico. — Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
IV, 84, 1892.
A-ga TTo-no. — Bandelier, op. cit.
Agawesh. A Modoc settlement and
camping place on Lower Klamath lake,
N. Cal., and on Hot cr. The name is
primarily that of Lower Klamath lake,
and the people of the settlement were
called Agaweshkni. (l. f. )
Agawesh.— GatsehetinCont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt.
I. xxxii, 1890. Agaweshkni.— Ibid., 19 ("people of
AgAwesh'). Agawethni.— Ibid. Aka-ush.— Ibid.,
16. Aka-uskni.— Ibid., 19, Hot creek Indians.—
Meaeham, Wigwam and Warpath. 577. 1875. Ok-
kowish.- Steele in Ind, Aff. Kep.. 121, 1864 (.said
erroneously to be the Modoe name for them-
selves).
Agdluitsok. An Eskimo village and
Danish post in s, w. Greenland, lat. 60°
3K. — MeddelelseromGronland, xvi, map,
1896.
Lichtenau.— Koldewev. German Arct. Exped.,
182, 1874.
Agency System. Indian affairs are con-
ducted under the administrative bureau
in Washington by local Indian agents.
This agency system was gradually devel-
oped to meet the various exigencies aris-
ing from the rapid displacement of Indian
tribes by white settlers.
///.9/or//.— During the colonial period
the spread of trade brought a large num-
ber of tribes in contact with the French
and the English, and each nation strove
to make allies among the natives. Their
rivalry led to the French and Indian war,
and its effects were felt as late as the first
half of the 19th century. When the Rev-
olution began the attitude of the Indians
l)ecame a matter of importance, and plans
were speedily -devised to secure their
friendship for the colonists and to thwart
English influence. One of the means
employed was the appointment of
agents to reside among the tribes liv-
ing near the settlements. These men
were charged to watch the movements of
the Indians and through the mainte-
nance of trade to secure their good will
toward the colonists. As the war went
on the western trading j)osts of the Brit-
ish became military crimps, which drew
the colonial troops into a hitherto un-
known country. Conditions arose which
necessitated new methods for the control
of Indians, and in 1786 Congress, to
which the Articles of Confederation gave
exclusive right and power to manage
Indian affairs, established two districts —
a northern district, to include all tribes
N. of Ohio r. and w. of Hudson r., and a
southern district, to include all tribes s.
of Ohio r. A bonded superintendent
was placed over each, and p<iwer was
given to him to appoint two bonded depu-
ties. Every tribe within these districts
laid claim to a definite tract as its own
territory, and these tribal districts came
to be recognized as tribal lands. The
old trading posts became in time indus-
trial centers, and the Indians were
called on to cede the adjoining lands.
The right of way from one post to an-
other was next acquired. As settlers
advanced more land was secured, and so
rapidly were the tribes constrained to
move westward that it l)ecame necessary
to recast the districts established in 1786.
The plan of districting the country under
bonded officers was continued, but on a
22
AGENCY SYSTEM
[b. a. b.
new basis — that of tribal holdings, or, as
the^ came to be called, reservations,
which we're grouped geographically into
superintendencies, each presided over hy
a bonded superintendent, who was di-
rectly responsible to the Commissioner
of Indian Affairs at Washington. The
reservations were in charge of bonded
agents, who reported to the district su-
perintendents. This plan continued in
force until about the middle of the 19th
century, when the office of superintend-
ent was abolished and agents became
directly responsible to the Commissioner.
For more than 80 years the office of agent
had been almost exclusively filled by ci-
vilians. The powers of the agents had ex-
panded until Doth life and property were
subject to their dictum. While many
men filled the difficult position with
honor and labored unselnshly for the
welfare of the Indians, others abused
their trust and brought discredit upon the
service. President Grant, in 1868-69,
sought to remedy this evil by the appoint-
ment of army officers as Indian agents,
but Congress, in 1870, prohibited **the
employment of army officers in any civil
capacity. ' ' The President then appealed
to the religious denominations to suggest
candidates for Indian agencies, and to
facilitate this arrangement the reserva-
tions were apportioned among the vari-
ous denominations. The plan led to the
amelioration of the service through the
concentration of the attention of religious
bodies upon particular tribes, thus awak-
ening an intelligent interest in their wel-
fare. About this time commissioners
were appointed to visit and report on the
various tribes, and in this way many
facts and conditions hitherto unknown
were brought to the knowledge of the
Government authorities and the public.
As a result new forces were evoked in
l)ehalf of the natives. Industrial schools
were multiplied both on and off the res-
ervations; Indians became agency em-
ployees; lands were allotted in severalty;
and through citizenship legal rights were
secured. These radical changes, brought
about within the two decades following
1873, led up to the act of Mar. 3, 1893,
which permits the abolishment of agen-
cies, where conditions are suitable, giv-
ing to the bonded superintendent of the
reservation school the power to act as
agent in the transaction of business be-
tween the United States Government and
the tribe.
AdminiMrative department, — The adop-
tion of the Constitution in 1789 brought
about changes in the administration of
Indian affairs at Washington. On the
organization of the War Department the
management of the Indians passed from
a standing committee of Congress to the
Secretary of War. By the act of Mar. 1,
1793, the President was authorized to
appoint ** temporary agents to reside
among the Indians. ' ' The act of Apr. 16,
1818, inaugurated the present policy: the
President nominates and the Senate ap-
proves the appointment of all Indian
agents. The office of Indian Commis-
sioner was created by the act of Congress
of July 9, 1832, and by an act of June 30,
1834, the office of Indian Affairs was
created. On the institution of the De-
partment of the Interior, in accordance
with the act of Mar. 3, 1849, the office
of Indian Affairs was transferred from the
War Department to the Interior Depart-
ment, where it still remains.
Congress established the office of in-
spector by the act of Feb. 14, 1873.
There are 5 inspectors, nominated by the
President and confirmed by the Senate.
They hold their office for 4 years and
report directly to the Secretary of the
Interior. They are charged with the
duty of visiting and reporting on agen-
cies, and have power to suspend an agent
or employee and to enforce laws with the
aid of the Ignited States district attor-
ney. The salary is $2,500, with neces-
sary traveling expenses. In 1879 Con-
gress provided for special agents. These
are appointed by the Secretary of the
Interior. Their duties are similar to
those of the inspectors, but they may be
required to take charge of agencies, and
are bonded sufficiently for that purpose.
They report direct to the Commissioner
of Indian Affairs. The salary is $2,000.
Special agents are also detailed by the
Indian Bureau to investigate special mat-
ters or to transact special business. Spe-
cial allotting agents, whose duties are to
allot, on specified reservations, the land
in severalty to the Indians, are appointed
by the President. The inspectors and
special agents are the intermediaries
between the Indian Bureau at Washing-
ton and its field organization.
Field organization. — The Indian agent
holds his office for 4 years or until his
successor is appointed and qualified. He
must give a bond with not fewer than two
sureties, and the several sums in w-hich
the sureties justify must aggregate at least
double the penalty of the bond. If re-
quired, an agent shall perform thedutiesof
two agencies for one salary, and he shall
not depart from the limits of his agency
without permission (see U. S. Stat. L.,
XXII, 87; xviii, 147; iv, 736). Cessions
of lands by the tribes to the United States
were always made for a consideration, to
be paid to the Indians in money or mer-
chandise. Most of these payments ex-
tended over a series of years, and the dis-
bursing of them devolved on the agent.
He was also charged with the preservation
BULL. 30]
AGENCY 8YSTEM
23
of order on the reservation, the removal
from the Indian country of all persons
found therein contrary to law, the over-
sight of employees, the protection of the
rights of the Indians in the matter of
trade, the suppression of the traffic in in-
toxicating liquors, the investigation of
depredation claims, the protection of
the Indians on their land held in sever-
alty, the care of all (government prop-
erty, the care of agency stock, the proper
receipt and distribution of all supplies
received, the disbursement of money re-
ceived, and the sujiervision of schools
(see U. S. Stat. L., iv, 564, 782, 7.S<5,
738; X, 701; xi, 80, 169; xn, 427; xiii,
29; XVIII, 449; xix, 244, 298; xxiii, 94).
In addition to the ('orrespondeiice and
other clerical work incident to the cur-
rent business of his otiice, each agent is
required to keep a lMK)k of itemized
expenditures of every kind, with a re<'ord
of all contracts, together with receipts of
money from all sources, of which a true
transcript is to Ix' forwarded cpiarterly to
the Commissioner of Indian Affairs (see
U. S. Stat. L., XVIII, 451 ). The salaries
of Indian agents range from $1,()()() to
$3,000 per annum. The employees un-
der the agent are clerks, inter pretei-s,
police, fanners, carpenters, blacksmiths,
millers, butchers, teamsters, herders, la-
borers, watchmen, engineers, and physi-
cians, besides the school employees. A
large proportion of these employees are
f)rovided in accordance with treaty sti])u-
ations. The salaries range from $200 to
$1,200 per annum.
Interpreter.^. — This class of employees
stood between the Indian and the white
race, between the tribe and the<iovern-
ment,and have exercised a far-reaching in-
flueiiceon Indianaffairs. Thetranslations
of tliese men were thesole means by which
the two races understooil or misunder-
stood each other. Until recently most
interpreters picked up collo(piial English
from tnippers, traders, and other adven-
turers in the Indian country. They were
generally mixed-blomls whose knowledjje
of the language and the culture of l>oth the
white and the Indian races was necessarily
limite<l. It was iujpossible for them, with
the best intentions, to render the dignified
and thoughtful speech of the Indian into
adequate English, and thus they gravely
prejudiced the reputation of the native's
mental capacity. The agency interpre-
ter received his salary from the (tov-
ernment through the agent, and, as was
natural, he generally strove to make him-
self act^eptable to that officer. His posi-
tion was a responsible and trying one,
since questions frtHpiently arose between
the Indians and the agent which de-
mandeil courage, prudence, and unswerv-
ing honesty on the part of tlie interpreter.
who was the mouthpiece of both py.rties.
Of late yeai-s the spread of P^nglish among
the younger ])eople through the medium
of the schools, while it has not done
away with the official interpreter, has
lessened his difficulties and, at the same
time, diminished the power he once held.
Ind'uin jKtlicc. — This force was author-
ized l)y act of Congress of May 27, 1878.
Its duties are to preserve order on tlie res-
ervation, to prevent illegal licjuor traffic
and arrest offenders in this matter, to act
as guards when rations are issued and an-
nuities ])aid, to take charge of and pro-
tect at all times (iovernment proj>erty, to
restore lost or stolen pro])erty to its right-
ful owners, to drivi' out tindn'r thieves
an<l other trespassers, to return truant
pupils to school, and to make arrests for
(lisonlerly conduct and other offenses.
Such a force is orjranized at all the agen-
cies, and the faithfulness of the Indian
j>olice in the discharge of their duties is
well atteste<l. The pay is from $10 to $15
a month, usually also with a small house
and extra rations.
AiDinU'icii. — Although the right of emi-
nent domain over all territories of the
Tnited States is vested in the (tovern-
ment, still the In<lians' ''right of occu-
pancy" has always been recognizeil.
The indemnity ])aid by the l^nite<l
States to the Indians when these made
cessions of land was intended to extin-
guish this right. These payments were
made in money or merchamiise, or both.
The entire amount to be paid to a trilx*
was placed to its credit in the Ihiited
States Treasury. In some instiuicesonly
the interest on this sum. was paid an-
nually to the tril)e; in other cases the
priiu'ipal was extinguisluHl by a stated
animal payment. These annuities (an-
nual ]>ayment.s under treaty obligations)
had to Ir* voted each year by ('ongress
and were distinct from the sums appro-
priated as si)ecial gratuities to be usetl for
cases of |H'culiar need. During the early
j)art of the 19th century ciish annuities
were handed over by the agents to the
chief, who receipted for the money an<l
distributed it among the tribe, but for the
last fifty years or more an enrolment of
the trilH' has l)een made by the agent
prior to each pavment, and the money
lias been divided pro rata and receipted
for individually.
A large i)roportion of the payments
made to Indians was originally in mer-
chandise. This mode of pavment was
abuse<l, and inured to the advantage of
white manufacturers and traders, but was
injurious to the tril)e, as it tended to kill
all native industries and hel|)ed toward
the general demoralization of the Indian.
Payments in goods are now made only in
ca.ses where an isolated situation or other
24
AGGAVACAAMANC — AGRICULTURE
[b. a. m
conditions make this method suited to
the interests of the Indians.
Rations. — These were a part of the mer-
chandise payments. They were at first
urged upon the tribes in order to keep
them confined within the reservations
instead of wandering in the pursuit of
^me. After the destruction of the buf-
falo herds the beef ration became a neces-
sity to the Plains Indians until they were
able to raise their own stock. Except in
a few instances, where treaties still re-
quire this method of payment, rations
are not now issued unless great poverty
or some disaster makes it necessary.
A movement is now on foot for the
division of all tribal money held in the
United States Treasury, an arrangement
that would do away with many disad-
vantages that are connected with pay-
ments in annuities and rations.
See ( ioienimental Policy^ Reservations,
Treaties. (a. c. f. )
Aggavacaamanc ('arroyo of the
gulls' (?)). A rancheria, probably Co-
chimi, connected with Purfsiraa (Cade-
gomo) mission, w. Ix)wer California, in
the 18th century.— Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th
s., v, 189, 1857. '
A.ffgey. Mentioned by Ofiate (Doc.
InM., XVI, 118, 1871) as a pueblo of New^
Mexico in 1598. Doubtless situated in
the Salinas, in the vicdnity of Abo, e. of
the Rio Grande, and in all probability
occupied at that time by the Tigua or the
Piros.
Aginkchnk. A Kaialigamiut village
opj>osite the s. shore of Nelson id., Alas-
ka; pop. 85 in 1880, 81 in 1891).
Agiukohugumut.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E.,
map, 1H99. Ighiakchaghamiat.— 11th Census,
Alaska, 110, 1893.
Agivavik. A Nushagagmiut village on
Nushagak r., Alaska; pop. 52 in 1880,
30 in 1890.
Agivarik.— Post route map, 1903. Agivavik.—
Petroff, 10th Census, Ala.ska, map, 1884.
Aglemint. An P'iskiino tribe inhabit-
ing the N. w. coast of Alaska from the
mouth of Nushagak r. s. w. to the valley
of the Ugashik, extending e. to the high-
lands (Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 19,
1877). They numbered only 767 in 1890.
They dwell on the coast, hunting the
walrus and occasionally putting out to
sea in pursuit of whales. Although
Christians, they retain their native ho-
liefs and customs, resembling their neigh-
bors in dress, except that they use rein-
deer skins for winter garments. They
carve ivory as skilfully as the northern
tribes. Subdivisions are the Kiatagmiut,
Ugagogmiiit, and Ugashigmiut. The vil-
lages are Igagik, Ikak, Kingiak, Paug-
wik, Ugashik, and Unangashik.
Aehkugmjuten.— Holmberg. Ethnol. Skizz., 4, 1855
(applied to Aglemiut and Kaniagmiut bv the
people of Norton sd.) AglahmutM.— Elliott,
Cond. Aff. in Alaska. 29, 1874. Aflaxtana.— Doros-
chin in Radloff, Worterb. d. Kinai-Spr., 29, 1874
(Knaiakhotana name). Aglecmguten.— Holm-
berg, Ethnol. Skizz., 4. 18.55. Agltemiut. — Wor-
man quoted by Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 19,
1877. Aglemiit.— Radloff, Worterb. d. Kinal-Spr.,
29, 1874. AgolSgmittt.— Turner quoted by Dall,
op. cit., 19. Agolegmutes.— Latham (1845) in J.
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i, 183, 1848. Afolemutea.—
Wrangell, Ethnog. Nachr., 121. 1839. Agool-
mutes.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. In Alaska, 29, 1874.
Agu\jmjaten.— Holmberg. Ethnol. Skizz., 5, 1855.
Agulmuten.— Wrangell, Ethnog. Nachr., 122, 1839.
Dog-driver«.— Petroff. 10th Census Alaska, 164,
1884. Oglemut— Dall, op. eit., 19. Oglemutet.—
Dall in Proc. A. A. A. S., 267, 1869. O'gainiut —
Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., r, 19, 1877. Bewer-
nowskije.— Radloff, Worterb. d. Kinai-Spr., 29,
1874 ('northerner': Russian name) . BvemoflUi.—
Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 1. 19, 1877. Tohouktohi
americani.— Balbi quoted by Dall, ibid. Tiiid|
iuxtana.— Dawydof quoted by Radloff. Worterb.
d. Kinai-Spr., 29, 1874 (Kinai name). Tuntu iux-
tana.—Doroschin quoted, ibid. Tyndytiukhtana.—
Petroff, Alaska, 164, 1884.
Aglntok. .An Eskimo settlement in
H. w. Greenland. Ruins found there are
supposed to be those of former Norse set-
tlers.— Crantz, Hist. Greenland, i, 18,
1767.
Agomekelenanak. An Eskimo village
in the Kuskokwim district, Alaska. Pop.
15 in 1890.
Ahgomekhelanaghamittt.— 11th Census, Alaska,
164, 1893.
Agomint ( 'people of the weather side* ).
A tribe of Eskimo inhabiting a region of
N. Baffin land bordering on Lancaster
sd., consisting of two subtribes — the
Tununirusirmiut in the w., about Admi-
ralty inlet, and the Tununirmiut in the
E., about Eclipse sd. Thev hunt the
narwhal and the white whale in Eclipse
sd., and in search of seals sometimes
cross the ice on sledges to North Devon,
there coming in contact with the natives
of Ellesmere land.
Agreements. See Governmental Policg,
Reservations, Treaties.
Agriculture. A n opinion long prevailed
in the minds of the people that the In-
dians N. of Mexico were, previous to and
at the time Europeans began to settle
that part of the continent, virtually
nomads, having no fixed abodes, and
hence practising agriculture to a very
limited extent. Wny this opinion has
been entertained by the masses, who
have learned it from tales and traditions
of Indian life and warfare as they have
been since the establishment of European
colonies, can be readily understood, but
why writers who have had access to the
older records should thus speak of them
is not easily explained, when these rec-
ords, speaking of the temperate regions,
almost without exception notice the fact
that the Indians were generally found,
from the border of the western plains to
the Atlantic, dwelling in settled villages
and cultivating the soil. De Soto found all
the tribes that he visited, from the Florida
peninsula to the western part of Arkan-
sas, cultivating maize and various other
food plants. The early voyagers found
the same thing true along the Atlantic
BULL. 301
AGRICULTURE
25
from Florida to MassachuBette. Capt.
John Smith and his Jamestown colony,
indeed all the earlv colonies, depended
at first very largely for subsistence on the
products of Indian cultivation. Jaciiues
Cartier, the first Kuropean who ascended
the St I^wrence, found the Indians of
Hochelaga (Montreal id.) cultivating the
soil. "They have," he remarks, "pood
and large nelds of corn." Champlain
and other early French explorers testify
to the large reliance of the Iro(|Uois on
the cultivation of the soil for subsisten(;e.
La Salle and his companions observed
the Indians of Illinois, and thence south-
ward along the Mississippi, cultivating
and to a large extent 8ul)8isting on maize.
Sagard, an eyewitness of what he rt»-
ports, savs, in st)eaking of the agriculture
of the rturons m 1628-2«, that they dug
a round place at every 2 feet or less, where
they plante<l in the month of May in each
hole nine or ten grains of corn which
they had previously 8electe<l, culled, and
soaked for severaldays in water. And
every year they thus planted their corn
in the same places and spot**, which they
renovated with their small wooden shov-
els. He indicates the height of the corn
by the statement that he lost his way
quicker in these fields than in the prairies
or forests (Hist, du Canada, i, 265-2HH,
1636, repr. 1866).
Indian corn, the great American cereal,
** was found in cultivation from the south-
ern extremity of Chile to the 50th parallel
of N. latitude" (Brinton, Mythsoftlie New-
World, 22, 1868). '^All the nations who
inhabit from the sea as far as the Illinois,
and even farther, carefully cultivate the
maize com, which they make their prin-
cipal subsistence" (Du Pratz, Hist. La.,
II, 239, 1763). ''The whole of the tril)es
situated in the Mississippi valley, in
Ohio, and the lakes reaching on both
sides of the Alleghenies, quite to Massa-
chusetts and other parts of New England,
cultivated Indian corn. It was the staple
product" (Schoolcraft, Ind. Tril)es, i, 80,
1851).
The great length of the period previous
to the discoverj^ during which maize had
been in cultivation is proved by its differ-
entiation into varieties, of which there
were four in Virginia; by the fact that
charred corn and impressions of corn on
burnt clay have been found in the mounds
and in the ruins of prehistoric pueblos in
the S. W. ; by the Delaware tradition (see
Wcdam Olum); and by the fact that the
builders of the oldest mounds nmst have
been tillers of the soil.
Some idea of the extent of the cultiva-
tion of maize by some of the tribes may
be gained from the following estiniates:
The amount of corn (probably in the ear)
of the Iroijuois destroyed by Denonville
in 1687 Avas estimated at 1,000,000 bushels
(Charlevoix, Hist. Nouv. Fr,, ii,;^5, 1744;
also Doc. Hist. N. Y., i, 238, 1849). Ac-
cording to Tonti, who accomj)anied the
expedition, they were engaged seven days
in cutting up the corn of 4 villages. Gen.
Sullivan, in his expedition into the Iro-
quois country, destroyed H>0,000 bushels
of corn and cut down the Indian orchards;
in one orchard alone 1,500 apple trees
were destroved ( Hist. N. Y. During the
Revolutionary War, ii, 334, 1879). (len.
Wayne, writing from (irand Glaize in
1794, says: "The margins of these beauti-
ful rivers— the Miami of the I^keand the
An (ilaize— appear like one continuous
village for a number of niiU's, both above
and below this place; nor have I ever
before l)eheld sui-h immense tields of
kf^
PUEBLO CORN PLANTING
corn in any part of Americ^i from Canada
to Florida" (Manviwunv, Ind. Wards,
84, 1880).
If we are indebted to the Indians for
maize, without which the i>eopling of
America would probably have been de-
layed for a century, it is also from them
that the whites learned the methods of
planting, storing, and using it. The ordi-
nary corncribs, set on posts, are copies
of those in use among the Indians, which
Lawson described in 1701 (Hist. Car., 35,
repr. 1860).
Beans, squashes, pumpkins, sweet pota-
toes, tobacco, gourds, and the sunflower
were also cultivated to some extent, espe-
(rially in what are now the southern states.
According to Beverly (Hist. Va., 125-128,
1722), the Indians had two varieties of
sweet potatoes. Marquette, speaking of
the Illinois Indians, savs that in addi-
26
AGRICULTURE
Tb. a. 8.
tion to maize, **they also sow beans and
melons, which are excellent, especially
those with a red seed. Their squashes
are not of the best; they dry them in
the sun to eat in the winter and spring"
( Voy. and Discov., in French, Hist. Coll.
La., IV, :V.l 1852).
The foregoing applies chiefly to the
region e. of the Rocky nits., but the
native population of the section now em-
braced in New Mexico and Arizona not
only cultivated the soil, but relied on
agriculture to a larjre extent for subsist-
ence. No corn was raisi'd or agriculture
practised anywhere on the Pacific slope
N. of the lower Rio Colorado, but fre<iuent
mention is made by the chroniclers of
Coronado's expedition to New Mexico of
the general cultivation of maize by the In-
dians of that section, and also of the cul-
tivation of cotton. It is stated in the
Relacion del Suceso (Winship in 14tli
Rep. B. A. K., 575, 1896) that those who
lived near the Rio (irande raij»ed cotton,
Init the others did not. The writer,
speaking of the Rio ( Jrande valley, adds:
"There is much corn here."
** From the earliest information we have
of these nations [the Pueblo Indians]
they are known to have been tillers of
the' soil, and though the implements
used and their meth<Hls of cultivation
were l)oth Himple and priiiiitive, cotton,
corn, wheat [after its introduction],
l>eans, with manv varieties of fruits were
raise<l in abumlance" (Bancroft, Nat.
Rac, I, 588, 1882). Chile and onions are
extensively cultivated by the Pueblo
tribes, as also are graj^es and i)eaches, but
these latter, like wheat, were introduced
by the Spaniards.
The Indians of New Mexico and Ari-
zona had learned the art of irrigating
their fields before the appi^arance of the
white man on the continent. This is
shown not only by the statements of early
explorers, but by the still existing re-
mains of their ditches. ''In the valleys
of the Salado and (iila, in s. Arizona,
however, casual observation is sutticient
to demonstrate that the ancient inhabi-
tants engaged in iigriculture by artificial
irrigation to a vast extent. . . . Judg-
ing from the remains of extensive ancient
works of irrigation, many of which may
still be seen passing through tracrts culti-
vated to-day as well as across densely
woode<i stretches considerably beyond
the present nonirrigated area, it is safe
tosay that the principal canals constructed
and used by the ancient inhabitants of
the Salado valley controlled the irriga-
tion of at least 250,000 acres" (Hodge
in Am. Anthrop., July, 1893). Remains
of ancient irrigating ditches and canals
are also found elsewhere in these terri-
tories.
The sunflower was cultivated to a limi-
ted extent both by the Indians of the
Atlantic slope and those of the Pueblo
region for its seeds, which were eaten
after being parched and ground into
meal between two stones. The limits of
the cultivation of tobacco at the time of
the discovery has not yet been well de-
fined. That it was cultivated to some
extent on the Atlantic side is known;
it was used aboriginally all over Cali-
fornia, and indeed a plant called tobacco
by the natives was cultivated as far n. as
Yakutat bay, Alaska.
Although it has been stated that the
Indians did not use fertilizers, there is
evidence that they did. The Plymouth
colonists were told by the Indians to add
fish to the old grounds (Bradford, Hist.
Plym. Plant, Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th
s., in, 100, 1856). It is also stated that the
Ir(M|uois manured their land. Lescarbot
says the Armouchiquois, Virginia Indians,
and others "enrich their fields with shells
and fish." The implements thev used
in cultivating
the ground
are described
as ** wooden
howes" and
"spades made
of hard wood."
** Florida In-
dians dig their ground with an instru-
ment of wood fashioned like a broad
mattock," "use hoes made of shoulder
blades of animals fixed on staves," "use
the shoulder blade of a deer or a tortoise
shell,sharp-
ene<l upon
a stone and
fastened to
a stick, in-
stead of a
hoe;" "a
piece of wood, 8 inches broad, bent at
one end and fastened to a long handle
sufiiced them t^) free the land from weeds
and turn it up lightly." Mention is also
HOE, FROM AN ENORAVINO m DE BRV,
Sixteenth Century
IMPLEMENT OF SHELL, FLORIDA
Flint Spade, Middle Mis-
sissippi VALLEY
Flint Hoc, Middle Mis-'
SISSIPPt VALLEY
made of shells used as digging imple-
ments, and Moore and Cushing have
found in Florida many large concha that
had served this purpose.
BULL. 30]
AGRICULTURAL IMPLEMENTS — AGUA FRESCA
27
Such are some of the earlier statements
in regard to the agricultural implement
used by the Indians; however,' certain
stone implements have been found in vast
numbers which are geYierally conceded to
have been used in breaking the soil. Of
these the most characteristic are the hoes
and spades of the middle Mississippi
valley.
Formerly the field work was generally
done by the women. Hariot (Hakluyt,
Voy., Ill, 329,1810) says, ''The women,
with short pickers or parers (because they
use them sitting) of a foot long, and about
5 inches in breadth, do only break the
upper part of the ground to raise up the
weeds, grass, and old stubs or cornstalks
with their roots.*' It was a general- cus-
tom to burn over the ground before platit-
inff in order to free it from weeds and
rubbish. In the forest region patches
were cleared by girdling the trees, thus
causing them to die, and afterward burn-
ing them down.
Though the Indians a«i a rule have been
somewhat slow in adopting the plants
and methods introduced by the whites,
this has not been wholly because of their
dislike of labor, but in some cases has
been due largely to their removals by the
Government and to the unproductiveness
of the soil of many of the reservations
assigned them. Where tribes or portions
of tribes, as parts of the Cherokee and
Iroquois, were allowed to remain in their
origmal territory, they were not slow in
bringing into use the introduced plants
and farming methods of the whites, the
fruit trees, livestock, plows, etc.
According to the Report of the Com-
missioner of Indian Affairs for 1904 the
following isa sunmiary of the agricultural
industries of the Indians, exclusive of the
Five Civilized Tribes, during that year:
Land cultivated acres 36o, 469
Land broken •* 30,644
Land under fence ( 1903) * * 1 , 880, 245
Fencing built rods 269, 578
Families living on and cultivating
lands in severalty 10, h46
Crops raised:
Wheat bushels 750, 788
Oats and barley " 1. 246, 960
Com... " 949,815
Vegetables • 606,a23
Flax " 26.290
Hay tons 405,627
Miscellaneous products of Indian
labor:
Butter made pounds 167, 057
Lumbersawed feet 5,563,000
Timber marketed •* 107,032,000
Wood cut cords 118, 493
Stock owned by Indians:
Horses, mules, and burros 295, 466
Cattle 497,611
Swine 40,898
Sheep 792,6*20
Goats 135,417
Domestic fowls 267.574
Freight transported by Indians with
their own teams pounds 23, 717, 000
Amount earned by such freighting . . $113, 641
Value of products of Indian labor sold
by Indians:
To Government $456, 026
Otherwise $1 , 878. 462
Roads made miles 570
Roads repair.'d " 3, 045
Days' labor expende*! on roads 125,813
Much additional information regarding
agriculture among the Indians may 1h»
found in the Annual Keportsof the Bureau
of American Ethnology. See also Foo<f,
(iourds, frngaiiony Maize, TohacrOj Wilfi
Ixice, etc., and for agricultural imple-
ments ave I foes, Implementn aiid Vteui<UH,
Spades, (c. t. )
Agtism. Mentioned as a Costanoan
village near Santa Cruz mission, Cal., in
1819.-()lbi^z (luoted by Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860.
Agaa Caliente (Sj)an.: 'warm water').
A small Shoshonean division on the head-
waters of San Luis Rev r., s. Cal., form-
ing one linguistic group with the Kawia,
Lui.^efio, and Juanefio. Villages: (iupa
and Wilakal. The |)eople of Wilakal are
included in Los ('oyotes res. (see Pacha-
iral). By decision of the C S. Supreme
Court the title of the Indians in the other
village and in several small Dieguefio
rancherias, collectively l)etter known as
** \V?^r"<'r's Ranrh TntlianH,'* was dis-
proved, and iHider act of Conirress of
May 27, 1902, a tract was added to Pala
res., and these and neighboring Indians
were removed thereto in 1903 (Ind. Aff.
Reps., UH)2, 1908). At that time they
aggregated aK>ut 300.
Agua Caliente.— KroelH*r. inf'n. 1905. Hekwaoh.—
Ibid, (so called by Diegueflos of San Felipe).
Warner** Ranch Indian*. — Popular name for in-
habitants of (iupa and some Diejfuefto rancherias
in the neighl)orhoo<l. Xagua'to. — Boas in Proc.
Am. Asso. Adv. Sci.. XLiv. 261.1895 (so oalle<l by
Dieguenos (»f Tektniiak).
Aguacay. A large village, probably l)e-
longing to a division of a southern Cad-
doan trilH', formerly in the vicinity of
Washita r.. Ark., where salt was man-
ufactured lK)th for home consumption
and for trade. It was visited by the De-
Soto expedition in 1542. See (ientl. of
Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. Coll. La.,
II, 194, 1850; Hakluvt Soc. Pub., 197,
1851: Harris, Vov. and Trav., i, 810,
1705. (A. r. F.)
Agaachaclia. The Yavapai name of a
tribe, evidently Yuman, living on the
lower Colorado in Arizona or California
in the 18th centurv. — Garc^s (1776),
Diary, 404, 1900.
Aquachaoha.— Jos^ CJortez (1799) quoted in Par.
R. R. Rep.. Ill, pt. 3. 126. 1856.
Agna Escondida (Span.: 'hidden wa-
ter'). Apparently a Pima or Papago
rancheria s. w. of Tubac, s. Arizona, in
1774. — Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 389,
1889.
Agna Fresca ( Span . : ' fresh water ' ) . A
Timuquanan district in n. Florida about
the year 1600.— Pareja (1614), Arte Tim.,
xxi, 1886.
28
AQUA FRtA AHAPOPKA
[b. a. fe.
Agna Fria (Span.: 'cold water'). A
village, probably Piman, on Gila River
res., 8. Arizona; pop. 5"27 in 1863. Bailey
makes the pop. J70 in 1858, and Browne
gives it a^ 5.33 in 1869.
Agua Rias.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 19, 1863
(misprint). Aqua Baiz.—Bmwne, Apache Coun-
try. 290. 1869. Arizo del Aqua.— Bailey in Ind. Aflf .
Rep., 208, 1858.
Agnama. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Inez mission, Santa Barbara
CO., Cal. — Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, Oct.
18, 1861.
Agaa Nueva (Span. : ' new water' ). A
former pueblo, doubtless of the Piros, on
the Kio Grande between Socorro and
Sevilleta, N. Mex. It was apparently
abandoned shortly before Gov. Otermin's
second visit in 1681, during the Pueblo
revolt. — Davis, Span. Conq. N. Mex.,
313, 1869.
Agaaqniri. An Indian village, prob-
ably in central N. Car. or n. e. Ga., visited
by Juan Pardo in 1565. — Vandera (1567)
in Smith, Coll. Docs. Fla., i, 17, 1857.
Agua Salada (Span.: 'saltwater'). A
Navaho division in 1799, mentioned as a
village bv Cortez (Pac. R. R. Rep., in,
pt. 3, 1 19; 1856). As the Navaho are not
villagers, the Thodhokongzhl (Saline
water, or Bitter water) clan was prob-
ably intended.
Agna Salada. A district in Florida
where one of the various Timuquanan
dialects was spoken. — Pareja ( 1614), Arte
Tim., 88, 1886.
AgnasCalientes ( Span. : ' warm waters' ) ,
A province with 3 towns visited by Coro-
nado in 1541; identified by J. H. Simp-
son with the Jemez ruins at Jemez Hot
Springs, near the head of Jemez r., San-
doval CO., N. Mex.
Aguas Calientes.— Ca.stafleda (1596) in 14th Ren.
B. A. E., 525. 1896. Aquas-Calientes.— Castafleda
(1596) misquoted bv Ternaux-Compans, Voy.,ix,
182. 1838. Oji Caliente.— Bell in ,J. Ethnol. Soo.
Lond., N. 8., I, 262, 1869 (misprint).
Agnastayas. A tribe, possibly Coahuil-
tecan, mentioned by Rivera (Diario, leg.
1,994, 2,602, 1736) in connection with the
Mesquites and Payayas, as residing s.s.e.
of San Antonio presidio, Tex. The three
tribes mentioned numbered 250 i>eople.
Agnile. A town in n. Florida, visited
by DeSoto in 1539, ])ossibly in the neigh-
borhood of Ocilla r, — Biedma in Smith,
Coll. Docs. Fla., 1,48,1857.
Again. A Chumashan village av. of the
Shuku village at Ventura, Ventura co.,
Cal., in 1542; placed by Taylor (Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 17, 1863) on the beach of
Las Llagas.
Agnlakpak. An Eskimo village near
Kuskokwim r., Alaska. Pop. 19 in 1890.
Ahgulakhpaghamiut.— nth Census, Alaska, 164,
1893.
Agnliak. A Kuskwogmiut village on
the E. shore of Kuskokwim bav, Alaska.
Pop. 120 in 1880, 94 in 1890.
Aguliagamiut.— nth Census. Alaska, 164, 1893.
Aguliaf^amute.— Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, map, 1884.
Aguligamute.— Petrolf. ibid., 17.
Agalok. A former Aleut village on Un-
alaska id., Alaska. — Coxe, Russ. Discov.,
159, 1787.
Agnlakpnk. An Eskimo village in the
Nushagak district, Alaska; pop. 22 in
1890.
Agulukpukmiut.— nth Census, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Agumak. A Kuskwogmiut village in
Alaska; poj). 41 in 1890.— 11th Census,
Alaska, 164, 1893.
Ahachik (' moving lodges'). A Crow
band.
Ah-fia-chiok.— Morgan, Anc. .Soe., 159, 1877.
Lodges charged upon. — Culbertson in Smithson.
Rep. 1850. 144, 1851.
Ahadzooas. The principal village of the
Oiaht, on Diana id., w. coast of Vancou-
ver id.— Can. Ind. Aff., 263, 1902.
Ahaharopimopa. A division or band of
the Crows.
Ahah-ar-ro'-pir-no-pah.— Lewis and Clark, Disc.,
41, 1806.
Ahahpitape (aah^-ptin 'blood,* tiXj^pe
* people ' : * bloody band ' ) . A division
of the Piegan tribe of the Siksika.
Ah-ah'-pi-ta-pe.— Morgan. Ane. Soc., 171, 1877.
Ah'-pai-tup-iks.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge
Tales. 209, 1892. A'-pe-tup-i.— Hayden, Ethnog.
and Philol. Mo. Val., 264^ 1862. BloodyPiedgana.—
(Julbertson in Smithson. Rep. la^O, 144. 1851.
Ahahswinnis. The principal village of
the Opitchesaht, on the e. bank of So-
mass r., Vancouver id. — Can. Ind. Aff.,
263, 1902.
Ahahweh (d^hdwe, *a swan.' — Wm.
Jones). A phratry of the Chippewa.
According to Morgan it is the Duck gens
of the tribe.
A-auh-wauh.— Ramsev in Ind. Aff. Rep., 83, 1850.
Ah-ah-wai.— Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, i, 304, 1853.
Ah-ah-wauk.— Warren in Minn. Hist, Soc. CoH.,
V, 44, 1885. Ah-ah'-weh.— Morgan. Anc. Soo., 166,
1877. Ah-auh-wauh.— Ramsey in Ind Aflf. Rep.,
91. 1850. Ah-auh-wauh-ug.— Warren in Minn.
Hist. Soc. Coll.. V, 87, 1885 (plural). Ahawh-
wauk. -Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 142, 1852.
Ahalakalgi (from dha 'sweet potato',
al(/i 'people'). One of the -20 Creek
clans.
Ah'-ah.— Morgan. Anc. Soc, 161, 1877. Ahala-
xalgi.— Gatschet. Creek Migr. Leg., i, 166, 1884.
Ahantchuyuk. A division of the Kala-
pooian family on and about Pudding r.,
an E. tributary of the Willamette, empty-
ing into it about 10 m. s. of Oregon City,
Oreg.
Ahandshiyuk. — Gatschet, Calapooya MS. vocab.,
B. A. E. (own name). Ahandsnuvuk amim.—
Gatschet. Lakmiut MS., B. A. E., 1877(Lakmiut
name). Ahantohuyuk amim.— Gatschet, Atf&latl
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1877 (.so called by the Cala-
rya proper ) . French Prairie Indians. —So called
early settlers. Pudding Kiver Indians. — So
called by various authors.
Ahapchingas. A former Gabrieleilo
rancheria in Los Angeles co., Cal., be-
tween Los Angeles and San Juan Capis-
trano. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 11,
1860.
Ahapopka ('eating the «Ai,' or bog
potato) . A former Seminole town, prob-
BULL. 3Ul
AHASIMUS AHOUERHOPIHEIM
29
ably on or n«ar the lake of the same
name and near the head of Ocklawaha r.,
N. central Florida.
Ahapapka.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th Cong.,
1st, 8688., 27. 1826. Ahapopka.— Bell in Morse,
Rep. to Sec. War, 80H, 1H22. Hapapka.— Jesnn
(1837) ki H. R. Doc. 78. 25th Cong., 2d8e.»«., 65,
1838.
AhasimiiB (possiblv related to the Chip-
pewa ammwWi, *dog*; the Sauk, Fox, and
Kickapoo word for dog is nvemb'i, and for
a puppy, unhnohaffj but when the word
b^omes the name of a boy of the Wolf
fens, it assumes another form of the
iminutive, linimoad. — W. Jones). A
village in n. New Jersey in 1655, probably
of the Unami Delawares (N. Y. I)oc'. Col.
Hist., XIII, 55, 1881). As the name of a
later white settlement the word occurs in
a number of forms.
Ahchawat. A summer village of the
Makah at C. Flattery, Wash. — Swan in
Smithson. Cont., xvij 6, 1870.
Hatob-£h-Wat.— Gibbs, MS.24S, B. A. E.
Ahdik {tictl^kj 'caribou' — W. Jones).
A genspf the Chipptm-a, often translated
* reindeer.'
Addiok.— Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 44.
1885. Ad-dik.— Tanner. Narrative, 814, 1830. Ad-
dik'. —Morgan. Ane. Soo.. 1(>6, 1877. Atik'.—
Qatachet^fdc Tomazin. Indian informant.
Ahealt. A Koluschan division in the
neighborhood of Pt Stewart, Alaska.
The name can not be identified, but a
clan called Hehlqoan, q. v., now living
at Wrangell, formerly occupied this
region, (.i. r. s.)
A-fie-alt.— Kane. Wand, in N. A., a pp.. 1H.'>9. Ahi-
alt.— Petroflf in Tenth Census, Alaska, ',M\, ISH4
(quoted from a Hud.son Bay Co. eens«is taken in
. 1839). Port Stuart Indian*.— Kane. op. eit.
Ahehonen. A former village or trilnj
between Matagorda bay and Maligne
(Colorado) r., Tex. The name was told
to Joutel in 1(>87 by the Ebahamo In-
dians, who lived in that region, and prob-
ably applied to a tribe or division closely
affiliated to the Karankawa. Tribes be-
longing to the Tonkawan family also
•roamed in this vicinity, and those of the
Caddoan family sometimes visited the
country. See (Jatschet in Peabody Mu-
seum Papers, i, 35, 4H, 1891. (a. (\ f. )
Ahehoen.-^outel (16*^7) in French, Hist. CoW.
La., I. 137, 1846. Ahehoenes.— Bareia, Ensavo,
271, 1?23. Ahehouen.— Joutel (1687) in Mar^rv,
D6c., HI, 28S. 1878. Ahekouen.— .loutel (ItW?) In
French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 152, 1846.
Ahkaiksnmiks. A subtribe or gens of
the Kainah.
Ah*kaik'-sum-iks. — Grinnell. Blackfoot Lodge
Tales. 209. 1892.
Ahkaipokaks {ah-kaiAm^ * many', wo-lvi^
* child*: * many children.' — Grinnell). A
subtribe or gens of the Kainah.
Ah-kai'-po-kaks.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge
Tales. 209, 1892.
Ahkaisrikokakiniks ( ' white breasts ' ) .
A band or gens of the Piegan.
Ah*kai-p-ko-ka'-kin-iks. —Grinnell , Bla c k f oo t
Lodge Tales, 209. 1892. Kai'-it-ko-ki'-ki-nak«. —
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 264. 1S62.
Ahkotashiks (*many beasts [horses]').
A subtribe or gens of the Kainah.
AhkV-tath-iks.—(irinnell, Blackfoot LodgeTales,
209, 1892.
Ahkwonistsists ('many lodge poles').
A subtribe or gens of the Kainah.
Ah-kwo'-nis-tsi8t«.— (rrinnell, Blackfoot I.K)dge
Tales, 209. 1H92.
Ahlanksoo ( * spotted animal ' ) . A gens
of the Abnaki.
Ah-lunk'-«oo.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 174, 1877.
^ Ahmeekkwan - eninnewng ( Chi ppewa :
rmVkuirVriinlwng, 'beaver people'). A
tribe living, according to Tanner (Narr.,
81rt, 1830), among the Fall Indians, by
which name beseems to mean the Atsina
or, possibly, the Amikwa.
Ahmik ('beaver'). A gens of the Chip-
pewa.
Ah-meek.— Tanner, Narrative. 314. 18:^0. Ah-
mik'.—Morgan, Anc. Soc. \m, 1K77. Amik.— War-
ren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll.. v. 45, 188.5. t^mi'k.—
.loncs. inf'n, 190') (correct form).
Ahnahanamete (supposed to indicate
some animal). A llidatsa band, regardeil
by Matthews as jK)ssibly the same a^ the
Amahanii.
AK-nafi-ha-na'-me-te. — Morgan. Anc. Soc, 159,
1H77.
Ahome. (Huelna says the aboriginal
name is Jaomeme, 'where the man ran.'
In Cahita, lio-me means 't<j inhabit,'
'to live,* and in Nahuatl ahome might
l)e derived from all water, omc two, 'two
waters,' referring to the ocean tide which
ascends the river to this |>oint; but after
all the word may be of Vacoregue origin. )
A subdivision of the Cahita, 8|)eaking
the Vacoregue dialect, and the nan)e of
its pueblo, situated 4 leagues above the
mouth of Rio del Fuerte, n. w. Sinaloa,
Mexico. The tradition exists among
them that they came from the n.; in
that country they fixed paradise and the
dwelling place of the souls of their dead.
They were of agreeable disjKJsition and of
larger size than the other inhabitants of
the river valley. They are said to have
uttere<l cries and lamentations for their
dead (luring one entire year, for an hour
at sunrise and another at sunset. Al-
though s])eaking the same language as
the inhabitants of a number of neighl)or-
ing pueblos, the Ahome formed a dis-
tinct organization. The pueblo of Ahome
became the center of the Batucari settle-
ment under the .Jesuit missionaries.
(f. w. n.)
Ahome.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein. Neue
Welt-Bott. 172t>. Hoomi.— Doc. Hist. Mex.. quoted
bv Bnelna. Peregr. Aztecas. 123, 1892. Jaomeme.—
Buelna, ibid. Omi.— Hardy. Trav. in Mex., 438,
1829.
Ahosalga. A former Seminole town 5
m. s. of New Mickasukv town, probably
in Lafayette co., Fla.-^H. R. Ex. Doc.
74 (1823), 19th Cong., 27, 1826.
Ahonerhopihein (probably a combina-
tion of Ahouergomahe and Kemahopi-
hein of Joutel's list; see Margry, D^c,
III, 288, 2S9, 1878) . A village or ix)ssibly
two villages in Texas. The pople are
mentioned by.Tontel as living in 1687 be-
30
AHOUSAHT — AHTENA
[b. a. e.
tween Matajrorda bay and Maligne (Colo-
rado) r., Tex. The region was inhabited
by Karankawan tribes, and the naine was
given by the Ebahamo, who were probably
closely affiliated to that group. See Gat-
schet, Karankawa Indians, 1^, 46, 1891.
(a. c. f.)
Abonerhopiheim.— Joutel (1687) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., I, 152. 1846. Abonerhopiheim.— Ibid.,
137. Ahouerhopiheim. — Shea, note m Charlevoix,
New France, iv, 78. 1870.
Ahoasaht. A Nootka tribe about Clay-
oquotsd., w. coast of Vancouver id.; pop.
273 in 1902. Their principal village is
Mahktosis. ( J. h. s. )
AhhouBaht— Can. Iiid. AfT., 188, 1883. Ahosett.—
Swan in Smithson. Cont.. xvi, 56. 1870. Ahou-
••ht— Sproat. Sav. Life. 308, 1868. Ahous^t.—
Mayne, Brit. Col.. 251. 1862. Ahowartz.— Arm-
strong. Orel?., 136, 1857. AhowMht.— Powell in
7th Rep. B. A. E.. 130, 1891. Ah-owE-art«.— .lewitt.
Narr.. 36. 1849. Arhoeett.— Swan, MS., B. A. E.
Asoiuaht.— Can. Tnd. AfT., 7. 1872.
Ahoyabe. A small town, possibly Musk-
hogean, subject to the Hoya, and lying be-
tween them and the Coona, on the coast
of s. S. (\, in 15()7. — Vandera in Smith,
Coll. Docs. P'la., I, 16, 1857.
Ahpakosea ( ' buzzard ') . A gens of the
Miami.
Ah-p4'-ko8c-e-i.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 168, 1877.
Ahseponna ( ' raccoon ' ). A gens of the
Miami.
Ah-ge-pon'-na.— Morgan. .\nc. S«k'., 16h. ls77,
A'gepfin*.— Wm. Jones, inf'n.. lya^i (Sauk, Fo.x,
and Kickrtp(K) form).
Ahtena ( * ice people ' ) . An Athapascan
tril>e occupying the ba,*jin of Copper r.,
Alaska. Their permanent villages are
situated 100 m. or more from the sea, on
Copper r., the mouth of which Nagaieff
iliscovered in 1781. An expedition in
1796 under Samoylof failed on account
of the hostility of the natives, as did a
second under Uistoi'hkin in 1798, and
one under Klimoffsky in 1819. (Tregorief
in 1844 renewed the attempt with like
result. In 1848 Serebrdnnikof ventured
up the river, but his disregard for the
natives cost the lives of himself an<l 3 of
his party (Dall, Alaska, 343, 1877). Dall
met a trading party of Ahtena in 1874 at
Port Etches, and in 1882 a trader named
Holt ascended the river as far as Taral,
but on a subsecpient visit was murdered
by the natives. Lieut. Abercrombie in
1884 explored a |)art of the river, and in
the following year Lieut. Allen made an
extended exj>loration, visiting the Ahtena
villages on Copper r. and its chief tribu-
taries. The natives strongly resemble
the Koyukukhotana in appearance, the
men being tall, straight, of good phy-
sique, with clear olive complexion, arched
eyebrows, beardless faces, and lon^,
straight, black hair, worn loose or in a sin-
gle scalp-lock. Petroff ( 10th Census, Alas-
ka, 164, 1884) states that prior to 1880 the
women had never l)een seen by any white
man who lived to descriln? them. On
account of the hostile nature of these
people but little is known of their cus-
toms and beliefs. Their clothing ordi-
narily consists of two garments, trousers
and boots forming one, a parka the
other. The clothing is decorated with
beads or, more commonly, with fringe
and porcupine quills, since beads are used
in trade with the tribes on Tanana r.
They have a cap of skin detached from
the parka. The chief occupation of the
men is hunting and fishing, supplemented
by a yearly trading trip as middlemen
between the coast trills and those of the
interior. In visiting the coast they travel
in large skin-covered boats purchased
from traders or from the coast tribes.
The chief articles of trade are beads,
cotton prints, and tobacco, which are
exchanged for furs and copper. Their
chief weapon is the bow and arrow,
although a few old-fashioned guns are
occasionally found. The men have both
nose and ears pierced, the women the
latter only. The houses are of two kinds,
permanent, for use in winter, and tem-
porary, used only as shelters during hunt-
ing trips. To the permanent dwellings
are attached subterranean bath-rooms, in
which steam is created by pouring water
on red-hot stones. They live in small
villages, of one "or two houses; the head-
man is called a tytmej and his near rela-
tives, the next in rank, are called skillies.
There is usually a shaman in every vil-
lage, and slaves of varving degrees of
servitude are kept. Polygamy is prac-
tised to a limited extent; it is said that
the women are treated with very littie
consideration and valued in proportion
to their ability to work (Allen, Rep. on
Alaska, 266, 1887). According to Allen
(ibid., 259) the Ahtena are divided into
two branches: those on Copper r., from
its mouth to Tazlina r., and on Chitina
r. and its branches he calls theMidnusky;
those above the Tazlina, Tatlatan. Pe-
troff in 1880 stated that the Ahtena did-
not number more than 300. Allen in
1885 gave the entire number of natives on
the river and its branches as 366, of whom
128 were men, 98 women, and 140 chil-
dren, distributed as follows: On Chitina
r. and its branches, 30; on Tazlina r. and
lake, 20; on Copper r., between Taral
and the Tazlina, 209; Tatlatans, 117.
According to Hoffman (MS. vocab., B.
A. E., 1882) the tribe consists of six divi-
sions: Ikherkhamut, Kangikhlukhmut,
Kulushut, Shukhtutakhlit, Vikhit, and
he includes also the Kulchana. The
census of 1890 makes the total number of
Ahtena 142, consisting of 89 males and 53
females. Their villages are: Alaganik,
Batzulnetas, Liebestag, Miduuski, Ska-
tali8,Skolai,Slana,Titlogat, Toral. (f.h.)
Ah-tena.— Dall, Alaska. 429, 1870 (own name).
Ahtna-khotana.— Petroff. 10th Census. Alaska, 164.
1884. Artez-kutohi.— Richardson, Arct. Exped.,
BULL. 30]
AHUAMHOUE — AIS
31
1,397, 1851. Artex-kuUhi.— Latham, Nat. Races
Ru88. Emp., 293, 18&4. Artes-Kuttchin.— Petitot,
Diet. D^n6-Dindii«, xx, 1876. AtakhUnt.— Erman
quoted by Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 34, 1877.
Ate&M.— Harmon. Joum., 190, 1820. Athnaer.—
HolmberK, Ethnol. Skizz.. 7, 1855; Atnaohtjaner.—
Erman, Archiv, vii, 128, 1849. Atnier.— Klchanl-
wm, Arct. ExiKjd... i, 402, 1851. Atnaht.— Pinart
in Rev. de Philol. et d 'Ethnol., no. 2, 1, 1875.
AtnanB. — Petitot, Autour du lac (\cs Esclaves, 362,
1891. Atna«,— Scouler in Joum. (ieoK- S^oc. Lond.,
I. 218. 1841. Atnatana.— Allen, Rep.. 62. 1H87.
Atnatena.— 11th Census. Alaska. 67, 1893. Atnax-
thyna^.— Pinart, Sur les Atnahs, 1, 1875. Copper
Indiana.— Mahoney in Ind. AflF. Rep. for 1869, 575,
1870. Copper Eiver Indiana.— Col ver, ibid.. 535.
Intsi Din^ioh.— Petitot, Autour du lac des Es-
clavea, 165, 1891 ('men of iron': Kutchin name).
Kettchetnier.— >\rangell, <iuoted by Baer and
Helmersen, Beitrage, i. 98, 1839 ( ' ice people ' : Rus-
Kian name). Kolthlna.— Dall, Ala-ska. 429, 1870 (so
called by Ru-ssians). Madnusaky.— Ma honey in
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 575, 1870 (corruption of Rus.sian
Miednovski, from miednaia, 'copi>er.' the name
given to the river). Haidnorskie.— Elliott. Cond.
AfT. Alaska, 29, 1874. Mednoftoi.— Hoffman , MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 18H2 ('Copper r. people': Russian
name). Mednovtze.— 11th Census, Alaska. 156, 189:^.
Midnooskies.— Allen, Rep., 22. 1HS7 ( Russian name).
Midnovtai.- Ibid., 128 (Rus^inn name). Mied-
nofBricoi.— Worman ((uoted bv Dall in ('out. N.
A. Ethnol., 1, :M, 1877. Miednoftkie.— IMnart in
Rev. de Philol. et d'Ethnol., no. 2. 1 . 1M7.5. Minoo-
•ky.— Allen, Rep., 128, 1887. MiniUky.— Ibid.
Nenannet. — Keane in Stanford, Compend., 52.'S.
1878. Nehaunee.— Dall. Ala.ska, 429, ISTO. Nehau-
nee Indians.— Ross, MS. map quote<l bv Dall in
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 34, 1877 ( Yellowknife or).
Heine Katlene.—Doroschin in RadlotT, Worterbneh
d. Kinai-8pr.. 29, 1874 (own name). Onotsky.—
Mahonv in Sen. Ex. Doc. «>8. 41st Couj?.. 2d sess.,
19. 1870. Otno-khotana.— Petroff in 10th Census,
Ala.*<ka, 164, 1884 (soK-alled by KnaiMkhotana).
Otnoz tana.— Dawydow quoted bv Radloff, Wor-
terbuch d. Kinai-Snr., 29, 1874. U'tunx tana.— Do-
rtMichin, ibid. Yellowknife Indian*.— Ross. MS.
map cited by Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i. 34,
1877 ( Nehauneeor; socalledby English). Yullit.—
Petroflf in 10th Census, Alaska, 16.5, 18H4 (rgalak-
miut name).
Ahaamhoae. A former ChuDiashaii
village near Santa Inez mission, 8anta
Barbara cc, Cal. — TavlorinCal. Farmer,
Oct. 18, 1861.
Ahuanga. A Luisefio settlement, con-
sisting of 2 villages, alx)ut .SO m. from
the coast, lat. 88°, 25^, in San Diego i-o.,
Cal. — Hayes {ca. 1850) ciuoted bv Ban-
croft, Nat. Races, i, 460, 1882.
Ahnlka (A-hnl-qa). A village of the
Ntlakyapamuk, on Fraser r., British Co-
lumbia, just below 8iska; pop. 5 in 1897,
the last time the name appears.
Ahulqa.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can...\
1899. Halaha.— Can. Ind. AflF. for 188.\ 1% (prob-
ably the same).
Ahwaste. A division of the Coetanoan
family formerly living near San Francisco
bay, Cal., ana connected with Dolores
mission.
Aguaaajnohium.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18,
1861 (Aguasa and Juchium [Uchiuml com-
bined). Aguasto.- Ibid. Ah-waah-tee.— School- '
craft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 506, 1852. Ahwastes.-
Latham in Proc. Philol. Soc. Lond., vi, 79, 1854.
Apuaato.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct.. 18, 1861.
Habasto.— Ibid.
AhwehBooB ( * bear * ) . A gens of the Ab-
naki.
Ah-weK'-aoot.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 174, 1877.
Awasoa.— J. D. Prince, infn, 1905 (modern St
Francis Abnaki form).
Aiachagiuk. A Chnagmiut village on
the right bank of the Yukon, near the
head gf the delta.
Aiachagiuk.— Bilker, (leog. Diet. Ala.ska, 1901.
Ayachaghayuk.— Coa.»;t Surv. map, 1898.
Aiacheruk. A Kaviagmiiit P^skimo vil-
lage near (\ Nome, Alaska; i)Op. 60 in
1880.
Ahyoksekawik.— llth CensuN. Ala.ska, 162, 1893.
Aiacheruk. — Jackson. Reindeer in Alaska, map,
1H94. Ayacheruk.— Petroflf, Rep. on Alaska, .'>9,
1880.
Aiaktalik. A Kaniagmiut village on
one of the (ioose ids. near Kodiak, Alas-
ka; pop. 101 in 1880, 106 in 1890.
Aiakhatalik.— Petroflf, 10th ("ensu.s, Ala.ska, map,
1884. Aiaktalik.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska,
1901. Anayachtalik.— Saner, Exped.. 1802. Ayak-
taUk.— llth Census, Alaska, 163, 1893. AyaUiU-
lik.— Petroff, op. eit,, 29.
Aiapai. Alentione<l by Powers (Cont.
N. A. Kthnol., Ill, .S70, 1877) as a division
of the Yokiits at Soda Spring, on Tnle r.,
Cal., but it is merely the name of a local-
ity at which the Yaudanchi or i)erhap8
other divisions once lived. (.\. l. k.)
Aicatnm. A Maricopa rancheriaon the
Kio(fila, Ariz.,in 174-k — Sedelmair(1774)
(inoted bv Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex.,
866, 1889."^
Aigspaluma ( Shaha| >tian : ' pi>ople of the
chipnnniks' ). The Klamath, Modoc,
Shoshoni, an<l Paiiite living on Klamath
res. and its vicinity in Oregon. — (iatschet
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. i, xxxiii,
18<H).
Aigspalo. -(iatschet, ibid. (abbreviate<l formi.
Aikspalu. — Ibid. I-uke-tpi-ule. — Huntington in
Intl. Aff. Rep.. \m. 1S(>5.
Aika. A former Sha.sta village near
Hamburg Bar, on Klamath r., Siskiyou
CO., Cal. (h. h. I). )
Ika.— Steele in Ind. ,\ff. Hep. \H'A, 120, \m\
Aimgna. A former Chnagmiut village
near the mouth of Yukon r., Alaska. —
Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s.,
XXI, map, 1850.
Aingshi ( ' bear ' ). A Zuni clan.
Ain'shi-kwe.— CushiuK in 13th Kep. B. A. E., 368,
\ms (A/«r —• people'). Aiij»hi-kwe.— Ibid., :v<6.
An-shi-i-que.— Stevenson in nth Rep. B. A. E.,
Ml, 1S87.
Ainslie Creek. A band of Ntlakyapa-
muk on Fraser r., above Spuzzum, Brit.
Col.— (^an. Ind. Aff., 79, 1878.
Aiodju8 {hii^^'odjm, 'all fat [meat]').
A Skittagetan town on the w. side of the
mouth of Mas.«et inlet, Queen Charlotte
ids. It was occupied l)y the Aokeawai
before thev moved to Alaska. — Swanton,
Cont. Haida, 281, 1905.
Ais. A rude tribe of unknown affinity
formerly occupying the e. coast of Florida,
from about Cape Canaveral s. to about
Santa Lucia inlet, or about the present
Brevard co. They planted nothing, but
subsisted entirely on fish and wild fruits,
and were more or less subject to the
Caloosa. (j. m.)
Ait.- Dc Canzo Rep. (1600) in Brooks Coll. MS.,
Lib. Cong. Aia.— Gatsehet, Creek Migr. Leg., i,
12. 1884. Aiaa.— Romans, Florida, i, 281, 1775 (the
32
AI8IK8TUKIKS — AKANEKUNIK
[B. A. B.
lagoon). Ays.— Mexia Report (1586) in Brooks
Coll. MS., Lib. Cong. Chaas.— Peni6re (1821) as
a noted by Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 311, 1822.
hiaas.— Peni^re, ibid., 150. Chias.— Peni^re,
ibid., 149. Is.— Barcia, Ensavo, 95, 1723. Jeoe.—
Dickenson (1699), Narr.,47, 1803. Ys.— Fairbanks,
Florida, 175, 1871.
Aisikstukiks ( * biters ' ) . A band of the
Siksika.
Ai-tik'-stiik-iks. — Grinnell. Blackfoot Lodge
Tales, 209, 1892.
Aitacomanes. Mentioned with the Oto-
comanes as a people occupying a province
that had been visited by the Dutch
and "where the abundance of gold and
silver is such that all the vessels for their
use are of silver, and in some cases of
gold." The locality is not given, and
the province is probably as imaginary as
the expedition in connection with which
it is mentioned. See Freytas, Exped. of
Peilalosa (lH(i2), Shea transl., 67, 1882.
Aivilik ( ' having walrus ' ) . An Kskimo
village on Repulse bay, Franklin dist.,
Brit, (^ol., the principal wintt^r settle-
ment of the Aivilirmiut. — Boas in 6th
Rep. B. A. K., 449, 1888.
A'-wee-lik.— McClintock, Voy. of Fox, 163, 1881.
Ay-wee-lik.— Lvons, Priv. Journ.. 161, 1S25.
Eiwili.—Klutschak.Unterd. Eskimo, map, 48, 1881
Iwillichs.— (iilder, Sclnvatka's Search. 294, 1881.
IwilUe.— Ibid., 304. Iwillik.— Ibid., 181.
Aivilirmiut ('people of the walrus
place' ). A Central Eskimo tribe on the x.
shores of Hudson bay from Chesterfield
inlet to Fox channel, among whom Rae so-
journed in 1846-47, C. F. Hall in 1864-69,
and Schwatka in 1877-79. They kill
deer, muskoxen, seal, walrus, trout, and
salmon, caching a part of the meat and
blubber, which V)efore winter they bring
to one of their central settlements. Their
chief villages are Akudlit, Avilik, Iglulik,
Maluksilak, Nuvung, Pikuliak, Ugluriak,
Ukusiksalik; summer villages are Inugsu-
lik, Kariak, Naujan, Pitiktaujang. — Boas
in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 445, 1888.
Ahaknanglet.— Petitot in Bib. Ling, et Ethnol.
Am., Ill, xi, 1876 (so called by the Chiglit of
Liverpool bay : sig. * women' ). A-hak-nan-helet. —
Richardson, *Arct. Exped., i, 'S6'2, 1851. Ahaknan-
helik.— Richardson, Polar Regions, 300. 1861.
Ahwhacknanhelett.— Franklin, Journey to Polar
Sea. ir, 42, 1824. Aivillirmiut.— Boas in 6th Rep.
B. A. E.. 445, 1S88. Eivillinmiut.— Boas in Trans.
Anthrop. Soc. Wash., ni. 102, 188,5. Eiwillik.—
Boa.s in Zeitschr. Ges. f. Erdk.. 226, 1883.
Aivino. A division of the Nevome in
a pueblo of the same name on the w.
tributary of the Rio Yaqui, lat. 29°, s.
central Sonora, Mexico. The inhabi-
tants spoke a dialect differing somewhat
from the Nevome proper, and their cus-
toms were similar to those of the Sisibo-
tari.
Aibina.— Balbi quoted bv Orozco y Berra, Geog.,
3.V2. 1864. Aibinos.— Kino et al. (1694) in Doc.
Hist. Mex., 4th s.. i, 399, 1856. Aivino.— Hi bas,
Hist. Trium. Sa. Fee, 370, 1645. Aybino.— Kino
etal., op. cit.
Aiwanat (Aiwdnatj pi. oiAhvan). The
Chukchi name for the Yuit Eskimo re-
siding at and near the vicinity of Indian
point, N. E. Siberia, as distinguished from
those who speak the dialect of the vil-
lage of Nabukak on East cape and that
of CherinaknearC. Ulakhpen. — Bogoras,
Chukchee, 20, 1904.
Aiyaho (a red-topped plant). A Zufli
clan, by tradition onginally a part of the
Asa people who afterward became Hopi.
Aiwahokwe.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. £., 606,
1900. Aiyaho-kwe.— Gushing in 13th Rep. B. A.
E., 368, 1896 (Infc = 'people.'). Aiyahokwi.—
Stephen and Mindeleff in 8th Rep.B. A. E., 80-31,
1891. OUa-jooue.— Gushing misquoted by Don-
aldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 88, 1893 (incorrectly
given as "Blue seed grass " people). Pet&a-
kwe.— Ibid., 386 (former name).
Aiyansh ('eternal bloom.' — Dorsey).
A mission village on the lower course
of Nass r., British Columbia, founded in
1871, its inhabitants being drawn from
Niska villages. Pop. 133 in 1901.
Aiyansh.— Can. Ind. Aff.. 271, 1889. Aiyauah.—
Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 281, 1897 (misprint).
Akachamas. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Santa Inez mission, Santa Bar-
bara CO., Cal. — Gatschet in Chief Eng.
Rep., pt. Ill, 553, 1876.
Akachwa(* pine grove*). ATarahumare
rancheria near Palanquo, Chihuahua,
Mexico. — Lumholtz, inrn, 1894.
Akaitchis. A tribe said to have resided
on Columbia r. not far from the mouth
of the Umatilla, in Oregon (Nouv. Ann.
des Voy., x, 78, 1821). Their location
would indicate a Shahaptian division,
but they can not be identified.
Akaitsnk. A former Chumashan vil-
lage about Santa Inez mission, Santa Bar-
bara CO., Cal.
A-kai't-8lik.— Henshaw, Santa Inez MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 1884.
Akak. An Eskimo settlement in the
Nushagak district, Alaska, of only 9 peo-
ple in 1890.
Akakhpuk.— nth Census, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Akamnik. A tribe of the Upper Kutenai
living around Ft Steele and the mission
of St Eugene on upper Kootenai r., Brit.
Col.
Aqk'amnik.— Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
10, 1889. Aqk'a'mnik.— Chamberlain in 8th Rep.
N. W. Tribes Can., 6, 1892.
Akanaqnint ( * green river * ) . A Ute divi-
sion formerly living on Green r., Utah,
belonging probably to the Yampa.
Akanaquint.— Beckwit*h in Pae. R. R. Rep., II, 61,
1856. Cnaguaguanos.— P^scudero, Not. NuevoM6x.,
83, 1849. Chim^aguanet.— Orozco y Berra, Geog.,
59, 1864 (given as Faraon Apache). Oreen river
band.— Cummings in Ind. Aff. Rep., 153, 1866.
Oreen river Utaht.— Beekwith in Pac. R. R. Rep.,
II, 61, 1855. Sabaguanas. — Dominguez and Esca-
lante (1776) in Doc. Hist. Mex.. 2a s., I. 537, 1854.
Sabuagana Gutaa.— Escalante (1776) mi.squoted by
Harrv in Simpson, Rep. of Explor. across Utah
in 1859, 494, 1876. Sabuaganat.— Dominguez and
Escalante, op. cit., 421. Sagut^uana.— Escudero,
Not. R«4tad. de Chihuahua. 231. 1834. Yutas
sabuaganas.— Dominguez and Escalante (1776) in
Doc. Hist. Mex., 2a s., i, 415, 1854. Zaguaganat.—
Cortez (1799) in Pac. R. R. Rep., in. pt. 3. 120,
1856. Zaguaguas.— Villa Senor, Theatro Am., ii,
413. 1748.
Akanekunik ( ' Indians on a river ' ) . A
tribe of the Upper Kntenai on Kootenai
r. at the Tobacco plains, Brit. Col.
Aqk'anequnik.— Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes
c:an.. 10, 1889. Aqk'aneqd'nik.— Chamberlain in
8th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 6, 1892. TobMCO
r.ULL. 30]
A K ATLIK A KP A LIUT
33
Plains Kootanie.— Tolmie and Dawaon, Comp.
Vocabs.. 124b, 1884. Tobaooo Plaint Kootenar.—
Chamberlain, op. cit.. table opp. 41. Yaket-ahno-
klatak-makanay.— Tolmie and Dawson, op. cit.
Ta'k'et aqkinuqtle'et aqkto'ma'kinik.— Chamber-
lain, op. rit., 6 ('Indians of the Tobacco plains,'
from yd'k'H tobacco, dqkinuqUe'et plain,
dqktfs'ma'kinik Indians).
Akatlik. A Yuit village on Plover bay,
Siberia.
tkatlak.—Krause in Deutsche Geogr. Blatter, v.
80, map, 1882. Akatlik.— Nelson in 18th Rep.
B. A. £., map, 1899.
Akasqny. An extinct tribe, probably
Caddoan, visited by La Salle in Jan.,
1687, when its people resided between
the Palaquesson and the Penoy in the
vicinity of Brazos r., Tex. They made
cloth of buffalo wool and mantles deco-
rated with bird feathers and the ** hair
of animals of every color." See Cavelier
in Shea, Early Vov., 39, 1861.^ (a.c. f.)
Akawenchaka (Onondaga: A'ka-wP'»ch'
hd-kd). A small band that formerly
lived in North Carolina, now numl)ering
/ about 20 individuals, incorporated with
! the Tuscarora in New York. They are
1 not regarded as true Tuscarora. — Hewitt,
I Onondaga MS., B. A. E., 1888.
KanweUaka.— Cusick (1825) quoted bvMacauley,
N. Y., II, 178, 1829 (mentioned as a settlement in
N.C.). KauwetMka. -Cusick, Sketches Six Na-
tions, 84, 1828.
Akawirncliic ( ^ place of much fungus ' ).
A Tarahumare rancheria near Palanquo,
Mexico. — Lumholtz, inf'n, 1894.
Akchadak-kockkond. A coast village
of the Malemiut in Alaska. — Zagoskin
in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map,
1850.
Akerninak. A settlement of East Green-
land Eskimo on Sermilik fiord; pop. 12
in 1884.— Holm, Ethnol. Skizze af Ang-
magsalikerne, 14, 1887.
Akgnlnrigiglak. An Eskimo village in
the Nushagak district, Alaska; pop. 61 in
1890.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164,
1893.
Akhiok. A Kaniagmiut village on Ali-
tak bay, Kodiak id., Alaska; pop. 114 in
1880, slightly more than 100 in 1900.
Aehiok.— Holraberg. Ethnol. Skizz.. map. 142, 1855.
Akhiok.— Petroff, 10th Census. Alaska. 29, 1884.
Alitak.— 11th Census, Alaska, 5, 1893. KaM^juk-
wagmjut.— Holmber^, op. cit. Kashukvarmiut—
Russ. Am. Co.. map, 1849. Oohaiaok.— Lfeianski,
Voy. (1806), quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska.
1931. Uhaiak.— Baker, ibid.
Akiachak. A Kuskwogmiut village on
Kuskokwim r., Alaska; pop. 43 in 1890,
165 in 1900.
Akiakohagmiut.— 11th Census, Alaska. 164, 1893.
Akiatihiigamut.— Spurr and Post quoted by Baker,
Geog. Diet. Alaska. 1901.
Akiak. A Kuskwogmiut village on
Kuskokwim r., 30 ra. above Bethel; pop.
175 in 1880, 97 in 1890.
Addagmute.— Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, map, 1884.
Akiagamiut —11th Censu.«, Alaska, 1 04, 1893. Aki-
acamnte.-Hallock in Nat. Greoif. Mag., ix, 1898.
Akiagmat.— Spurr and Post quoted by Baker.
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Akkiagamute.— Petroff,
op. cit., 53. Akkiagmute.— Ibid., 17.
Akiskennkinik (* people of the two
lakes'). A tribe of the Upper Kutenai
Bull. 30—05 3
living on the Columbia lakes, having
their chief settlement at Windermere,
Brit. Col. They numbered 72 in 1902.
Akiskinookaniki.— Wilson in Trans. Ethnol. Soc.
Lond.. 304. 1866. AqkiskaaukEnik.— Boas in 5th
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 10, 1889. Aqki'sk-Enu'-
kinik.— Chamberlain in 8th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can.. 6, 1892. Columbia Lakes.— Ibid., 7.
Akiyenik (Aqkiye^niky * people of the
leggings'). A tribe of the Upper Kutenai
living on L. Pend d'Oreille, Idaho. —
Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 10,
1889.
Aklnt ( * provisions ') . A Kuskwogmiut
Wllage on Kuskokwim r. at the mouth
of the Eek, Alaska; pop. 162 in 1880, 106
in 1890.
Ahffuliagamut.— llth Census. Alaska, 164. 1893.
AkTukwagamut.— Spurrand Post quoted by Baker,
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Akooligamute.— Petroff.
Rep. on Alaska, 17, 1884: Nelson (1878) quoted by
Baker, op. cit.
Akmint. A Kuskwogmiut village on
Kuskokwim r., 10 m. above Kolmakof,
Alaska.
Akmute.— petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, map, 1884.
Akol (^''A:o/). An organization among
the Pima, apparently gentile, belonging
to the Suwuki Ohimal, or Red Ants,
ghratral group. — Russell, Pima MS.,
1. A. E., 313, 1903.
Akonapi (possibly related to the Chip-
pewa akunabdwMy * he is good at getting
game ' ; -nap- is a secondary stem refer-
ring to a human person. Another form
iaa'knwlnln^; Irilni refers to *man.* —
Wm. Jones). A neople mentioned in the
ancient Waiam Ohnn record of the Dela-
wares (Brinton, Lenftpe Legends, 190,
231, 1885), with whom they fought dur-
ing their migrations. Brinton, who iden-
tifies them with the Akowini of the same
tradition, thinks it probable that they
lived immediately n. of Ohio r. in Ohio or
Indiana. He regards Akowini as ** corre-
spondent" with Sinako, and Towakon.
with Towako; the latter he identifies
with the Ottawa, called by the Delawares
Taway. If this identification be correct, it
is likely that the Akonapi were the Sinago
branch of the Ottawa, (c. t. )
Ahkonapi.— Walara Olum (1833) in Brinton. Len-
ftpe Leg.. 190, 1885. Akhonapi.— Ibid. Akowini.—
Ibid., 198.
Akonye (* people of the canyon'). An
Apache band at San Carlos agency and
Ft Apache, Ariz., in 1881; probably' coor-
dinate with the Khonagani clan 'of the
Navaho. — Bourke in Journ. Am. Folk-
Lore, HI, 111, 1890.
Nar-go'-des-gis'-sen.— White, Apache Names of
Ind. Tribes, MS., B. A. E.
Akomiiianniat. A village of the south-
ern group of East Greenland Eskimo, be-
tween lat. 63® and 64°; pop., with three
other villages, 135.— Rink in Geog. Blat-
ter, VIII, 346, 1886.
Akpalint. A Kaviagmiut village w. of
Golofnin bay, on Norton sd., Alaska; pos-
sibly the same as Chiukak.
AcpalUut.— W. U. Tel. map, 1867, cited by Baker,
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901.
34
AKPAN ALA0RANE8
[B. A. E.
Akpan (^auks*). An Ita Eskimo se^
tlement on Saunders id., n. Greenland.
The name is applied to many bird cliffs
in E. Arctic America.
AklMtt.— Hayes. Arct. Boat Journ., 241. 1854. Akpa-
ni.— Peary, My Arct. Jour., 80, 1893.
AkUyatsalgi. One of the 20 Creek
clans. — Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i,
155, 1884.
Aktese. A village of the Kyuquot on
Village id., Kyuquot sd., w. coast of
Vancouver id.— Can. Ind. Aff., 264, 1902.
Aknch. The extinct Ivy clan of the
Sia.
A'kiioh-hano.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351,
1896 (^^wo=* people').
Aknchiny. A former Pima village s. w.
of Maricopa station, s. Arizona. — Rus-
sell, Hma MS., B. A. E., 16, 1902. Cf.
AquitUJI.
Akndninniat ( * people of the interven-
ing country'). An Eskimo tribe of e.
Baffin land, on the shore of Home bay
and northward. They migrate between
their various stations, in winter as well
as in summer, in search of deer, bear,
seal, walrus, and salmon, having ceased
to capture whales from the floe edge
since the advent of whaling ships; pop.
m in 1883 (Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E.,
440, 1888) . Their winter settlements are
not permanent. Their villages and camp-
ing places are: Arbaktung, Avaudjelling,
Ekalualuin, Ijelirtung, Idiutelling, Idni-
teling, Karmakdjuin, Kaudiukdjuak, Ki-
vitung, Niakonaujang, Nudlung, Sirmil-
ing.
Akngdlit. A village of the Aivilirmiut
at the s. end of the Gulf of Boothia, on
Committee bay. — Boas in 6th Rep. B. A.
E., 445, 1888.
Aknli. An Iglulirmiut village on the
isthmus of Melville peninsula; pop. 50.
Ao-cool-le.— Ross. Sec. Voy., 316, 1835. Aooulee.—
4 bid., map facing P- 262. Aokoolee.— Ibid., 254.
Akkoolee.— Parry, Sec. Voy., 449, 1824.
Aknliak. An Akuliarmiut winter vil-
lage on the N. shore of Hudson str., where
there was an American whaling station;
pop. 200.
Akttliaq.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map. 1888.
Akaliarmint ( ' people of the point be-
tween two large bays' ) . An Eskimo tribe
settled on the n. shore of Hudson strait
(Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. PI, 421, 1888).
They go to Amakdjuak through White
Bear sd. to hunt, where they meet the
Nugumiut.
Akkolear.— Gilder. Schwatka's Search, 181, 1881.
Akudliarmiut. — Boas in Trans. Anthrop. Soc.
Wash., HI, 96, 1885. AkuUak-Etkiinos.— Boas in
Fetermanns Mitt., 68, 1885.
Aknlinkpak (*many provisions'). A
Nushagagmiut Eskimo settlement on Pa-
miek lake, Alaska; pop. 83 in 1880.
Akuliakhpuk.— PetroflF. Rep. on Alaska, 17. 1884.
Aknlivikcliak. A Nushagagmiut village
on Nushagak r., Alaska; pop. 72 in 18^.
Aknlvikohuk.— Petroff, Rep. on Alaska. 17, 1884.
Aknn ( * distant ' ) . A former Aleut vil-
lage on a small island of the same name
between Unalaska and Unimak, Aleutian
group, Alaska; pop. 55 in 1880. The
inhabitants have deserted it for Akatan.
Akoon.— ^chwatka, Mil. Recon. in Alaska, 360,
1885.
AkumiktLk(d*kuni *bone,' -naw^ *tow^n,*
* country,* -k ^ * place-where' : *at the bone
place ' ) .' A group of Sauk and Foxes who
lived together in a village near where
some huge bones, probably of a mastodon,
lay imbcKided in the ground. — Wm. Jones,
inf'n, 1905.
Ah-kuk'-ne-niik.— Morgan, Ane. Soc., 170, 1877
(given as the Bone gens).
Akatan. An Aleut village on a small
island of the same name adjacent to Un-
alaska, Alaska; pop. 65 in 1880, 80 in
1890.
Akutaaskoe.—Veniaminoff, Zapiski, n, 203, 1840.
Akvetskoe (Make town'). A summer
\illage of the Huna division of the Kolu-
schan family, on Lituya bay, Alaska;
pop. 200 in 1835. — Veniaminon, Zapiski,
II, pt. 3, 29, 1840.
AkkvavBtkie.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 227,
1875 (from Veniaminoff). Akwetz.— Holmbeig,
Ethnol. Skizz.. map. 1855.
Akwech. A Wichita subtribe. — J. O.
Dorsey, infn, 1892.
Ala (*horn'). A phratry of the Hopi,
consisting of the Horn, Deer, Antelope,
Elk, and probably other clans. They
claim to have come from a place in s.
Utah called Tokonabi, and after their
arrival in Tusayan joined the Lengya
(Flute) phratry, forming the Ala-Lengya
group. — Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
583, 587, 1901.
Ala. The Horn clan of the Hopi.—
Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 583, 1901.
lalttt.— Voth, Trad, of the Hopi, 38, 1905.— AU
winwu.— Fewkes, op. cit. {winiim=c\a,n).
Alabaster. See Gypmm.
Alachua. A former Seminole town in
what is now Alachua co., Fla. It was
settled by Creeks from Oconee, on Oco-
nee r., Ga., about 1710. The name was
subsequently extended so as to cover other
small villages in the district, which col-
lectively are frequently mentioned as a
tribe, whose principal town was Cus-
cowilla. The Alachua Indians offered
lively resistance to the encroachments of
the white colonists in 1812-18 and took a
prominent part in the Seminole war of
1835-42. (A. 8. G. H. w. H.)
Alaohees.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, n, 32, 1862.
A-lack-a-way-talofa.— Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec.
War, 306, 1822. Alacua.— Romans, Florida, l, 280,
1775. Anlookawan Indiana.— Hawkins (1812) in
Am. State Papers, Ind. AfT.. i. 813, 1832. Au-lot-
cke-wau.— Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 25, 1848. Laeb-
awayi. — Seagrove (1793) in Am. State Pap., Ind.
Aflf., 1, 378, 1832. Laokaway.— Brown (1793), ibid.,
374. Latckione.-Brinton, Florida Penin., 146,
1859. LatchiVue.— Penidre in Morse, Rep. to Sec.
War, 311, 1822. Lotcbnoay.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, vi, 360. 1857. Lotcbway towns.— Flint, Ind.
Wars, 173, 1833. Sotckaway.— Seagrove, op. cit.,
380.
Alacranei ( Span. : * scorpions ' ) . A part
of the Apache formerly livinj^ in Sonora,
Mexico, but according to Taylor (Cal.
BULL. 301
ALACUPUSYUEN ALAWAHKU
35
Farmer, June 18, 1862) roaming, with
other bands from Texas, to the Rio Colo-
rado and N. of (fila r. in Ariz, and N.
Mex. Thev were apparently a part of
the Chiricahua.
Alaenpasyuen. A^ former Cliumashan
village near Purfsima mission, Santa
Barbara co., Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Oct. 18, 1861.
Alafiers ( nla = * buckeye tree ' ) . A 8em i -
nole town near Alafia r., an affluent of
Tampa bay, Fla. Its inhabitants, few in
number, appear to have been le<l by Chief
Alligator, and the ** Alligators" may
have been the same people. They took
part in the Seminoie war of 1835-42.
(h. w. n.)
AUfia Drake. Ind. Chron.. 209, 183f.. Alafiers.—
Drake, Bk. of IndH., bk. 4, 77, 1H48.
Alaganik. An Ahtenaand ITgalakmiut
village near the mouth of Copper r.,
Alaska. Pop. in 1880, with Eyak, 117;
in 1890, 48. Serebrenikof visited the vil-
lage in 184S, but Allen in 1885 foun<l it
on what he supposetl to l)e a new site.
Alaganik.— Pall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. i, map,
1877. AUganuk.— Pctroff, lOtli Census. Alaska, 29.
1884. Alagnak.— Serebreuiktif quoted by Baker.
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Anahanuk.— Alien, ibid.
LookU-ek.— 11th Census. Alaska, 161, 1893.
Alaho-atenna (* those of the southern-
most*) . A phratry embracing the Tona-
shi (Badger) andAiyaho (Red-topped-
shruo) clans of the Zufii.—Cushing, mf n,
1891.
Alahnlapas. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Santa Inez mission, Santa Bar-
bara CO., Cal. — (Tat*<chet in Chief Eng.
Rep., pt. 3, 553, 1876.
Ala-Lengya ('horn-flute'). A ])hra-
tral group of the Hopi, consisting of the
Ala (Horn) and I^ngva (Flute) dans.
Ala-Lenya.— Fewkesin 19tH Rep. B. A. E.,iV83, 1901.
Alali. A former Chumashan village on
Santa Cruz id., off the coast of California.
A-la'-li. — Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., iwq.
Alameda (Span. : * cotton wood grove ' ).
A ruined pueblo on the e. side of the
Rio Grande, alxmt 10 m. alwve Albu-
querque, Bernalillo co., N. Mex. It was
occupied by the Tigua until 1681 , and was
formerly on the bank of the river, but is
now a mile from it, owing to changes in
the course of the stream (Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 88, 1884). It was the
seat of a Spanish mission, with 300 inhal)-
itants about 1660-68, and a church ded-
icated to Santa Ana which was doubt-
less destroved in the Pueblo revolt of 1680-
96(Vetancurt (1697), Teat ro Mex., in,
311 , 1871 ) . The settlement was afterward
reestablished as a mission visita of Albu-
2uerque. (p. w. h.)
lamada.-Abert in Emory. Recon.. map. 1848.
Alameda de Mora.— Villa Sefior, Theatre Am., pt.
2, 415, 1748. Alemada.— Abert in Emory Recon.,
464, 1848. Alemeda.— Gallegas (1844) misquoted,
ibid., 479.
Alamillo. (Span.: * little cottonwood*).
A former pueblo of the Piros on the Rio
Grande about 12 m. x. of Socorro, N. Mex.,
the seat of a Franciscan mission, estab-
lished early in the 17th century, which
contained a church dedicated to Santa
Ana. The inhabitants did not participate
in the Pueblo revolt of 1680, and most of
them joined the Spaniards in their flight
to El Paso, Chihuahua. In the following
year, howevef, on the return of (lov.
btermin, the remaining inhabitants of
the pueblo fled, whereufwn the village
was destroyed by the Spaniards. The
population in 1680 was 300. See Vetan-
curt (1697), Teatro Mex., iii, 310, repr.
1871 ; Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv,
239, 1892. (F. w. n.)
Alamingo. A village of hostile Dela-
ware8(?) in 1754, probably on Suscjue-
hanna r.. Pa.; possibly the people of Al-
lemoebi, the "king "Of the Delawares,
who lived at Shamokin alxmt 1750
(Drake Trag. \Vil<l., 153, 1841 ).
Alamo. See S(m Antonio de Valtra.
Alamo Bonito (Span.: 'beautiful cot-
tonwood'). A small settlement of Mis-
sion Indians on Torres res., 75 m. from
Mission Tule River agency, s. Cal.
Alimo BoniU.— Ind. Aff. Rep.. 170. 1904. Alimo
Bonito.— Ibid.. 175, 1902.
Alamos (Span.: *cottonwoods'). A
pueblo of the Eudeve division of the
Opata, the seat of a Spanish mission estal)-
lished in 1629; situated on a small tribu-
tary of the Rio Sonora, in Sonora, Mex-
ico. Pop. 165 in 1678, 45 in 1730 ( Rivera
(pioted bv Bancroft, Mex. No. States, i,
513, 1884).
Asuncion Alamos.— Zapata (167M) quoted by Ban-
croft, op. cit., 24G. Los Alamos.— Orozeo y Berra,
Geosr., 314, 1864.
Alamos. A former rancheria, probably
of the Sobaipuri, on Rio Santa Cruz, s.
Ariz.; visited and so named bv Fatlier
Kino about 1697.— Bernal (1697) qnoU^d
by Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 356, 1889.
Alamacha. A former Choctaw town in
Kemper co.. Miss., 10 m. from Succar-
nooche cr., an affluent of Tombigbee r.
AUamutcha Old Town.— Gatschet, Creek Mi|?r
Leg., I. 109, 1884.
Alapaha. A former Seminole town in
Hamilton co., Fla., on Allapaha r. It
was once under ('hief Okmulgee, who
died before 1820. (h. w. ii.)
A-la-pa-ha-tolafa.— Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec.
War, 306, 1822.
Alaskaite. A mineral, according to
Dana (Text-book Mineral., 420, 1888), so
called from having l)een found in the
Alaska mine, Poughkeepsie gulch, Colo.;
primarily from Alaska^ the name of the
territory of the United States, and the
English suffix -iie. Alaska, according to
Dall, is deriveil from Aidkshak, or AiA-
yekm, signifying * mainland,* the term by
which the Eskimo of Unalaska id. desig-
nated the continental land of n. w. Amer-
ica, (a. f. c. )
Alawahkn. The Elk clan of the Pecos
tribe of New Mexico. — Hewett in Am,
Anthrop., vi, 431, 1904,
36
ALBERDOZIA ALEUT
[b. a. e.
Alberdoiia. A province of Florida, prob-
ably Timuquanan.— Linschoten, Descr.
del' Am., 6, 1688.
Albivi. Given by Hervan in 1785 (Va-
ter, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 347, 1816) as a
division of the Illinois, but that is doubt-
ful.
Alcalde (Span. : a mayor of a town who
also administers justice). A Papago vil-
lage, probablv in Pima co., s. Ariz.; pop.
250 in I860. — Poston in Ind. Aff. Rep.
1863, 385, 1864.
Alcash. A former Chumashan village
at La Goleta, or, as stated by a Santa
Barbara Indian, on Moore's ranch, near
Santa Barbara, Cal.
Aloax.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer. Apr. 24, 1863.
Al-k4-i'o.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 1884.
Alchedoma. A former Yuman tribe
which, according to Father (larcc^'s, spoke
the same language as the Yuma proper,
and hence lx?longed to the same closely
related Yuman division as the Yuma,
Maricopa, and Mohave. As early as
1604-05 Juan de Onate found them in 8
rancherias (the northernmost with 2,000
people in 160 houses) below the mouth
of tbe Gila on the Rio Colorado, but by
1762 (Rudo Ensayo, 130, 1894) they occu-
pied the left bank of the Colorado be-
tween the Gila and Bill Williams fork,
and by Garc^s' time (1776) their ran-
cherias were scattered alonj? the Colorado
in Arizona and California, beginning
about 38 m. below Bill Williams fork and
extending the same distance downstream
(Garc^^s, Diary, 423-428, 450, 1900). At
the latter date they were said to number
2,500, and while well disposed toward
other surrounding tribes, regarded the
Yuma and Mohave as enemies, (larc^s
says of them: ^' These Jalchedun [Alche-
doma] Indians are the least dressed, not
only in such goods as they themselves
possess, but also in such at* they trade
with the Jamajabs [Mohave], Genigue-
ches [Serranosj, Cocomaricopas [Mari-
copa], Yabipais [Yavapai], and Mo(iuis
[Hopi], obtaining from these last mantas,
girdles, and a coarse kind of cloth («f///a/),
in exchange for cotton." This statement
is doubtless an error, as the Alchedoma
raised no cotton, while the Hopi were
the chief cultivators of this plant in the
entire S. W. According to Kroeber the
Alchedoma were absorbed by the Mari-
copa, whom they joined ])efore fleeing
from the Rio Colorado before the Mohave.
Asumpcion, Lagrimas de San Pedro, San
Antonio, and Santa Coleta have been
mentioned as rancherias. .(f. w. n.)
Achedomas.— Venegas, Hist. Cal., ii, 185. 1759.
Alohedomes.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Dee. 6. 1861.
Alchedum.— Garc^^s (1775-6), Diary, 488, 1900.
Alohedumas.— Consag (1746) quoted by Bancroft,
Nat. Races, i, 588. 1882. Alohidomas.— Alcedo. Die.
Geog., I, 48, 1786. Alirodomes.— Heintzelman
(1858) in H. R., Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong.. 42, 1857
(seems to be local name here). Algodones. —
Blake in Pac. R. R. Rep., v, 112, 1866. Al^on-
net.— Derby. Colorado R., map, 1852. OhidaaiAS.—
Garc68_(after Ei-calante, 1775) , Diar>' (1775-76), 474,
1900. Halohedoma.— Zarate Salmeron (ca. 1629),
Rel., in Land of Sunshine, 106, Jan., 1900. Hiu>
ohedumas.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 156, 348,
1889. Halohidhonut.— A. L. Kroeber, infn, 1905
(Mohave name). Hudooadamas. — Rudo Ensayo
(1762). 24, 1863 (probably the same). Hudcoadan.—
Rudo En.sayo (1762), Guiteras transl., 130, 1894.
Hudooadanet.— Orozco y Berra, Geog.. 59, 353. 18(M.
Jakeohedunes.— Hinton, Handbook to Ariz., 28,
1878. Jalohedon.— Arricivita (1792) quoted by
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 100, 1890.
Jalohedum.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 38, 1864, (mis-
quoting (Jare^^s). Jalohedunet.— Garc^s (1775-76),
Diary. 3J8. 1900. Talohedon.— Forbes. Hist. Cal.,
162. 1H39 (misprint). Talohedums.— Domenech,
Deserts, i. 444, 1860. Yalohedunea.— Pac. R. R.
Rep.. Ill, pt. 3, 124. 1856.
Alcoz. A former village of the Kalin-
daruk division of the Costanoan family
in California. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Apr. 20, 1860.
Aleksaihkina. A former Kania^miut
Eskimo settlement on Wood id. in St.
Paul harbor, Kodiak id., Alaska.
Aleksashkina.— Tebenkof quoted bv Baker, Geog.
Diet. Alaska, 1901 (called a Chinia'k settlement).
Tanigna«-miut.— Russ. Am. Co. map quoted by
Baker, ibid, (called an Aleut settlement).
Aleta. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Aleytac.— Ibid.
Aleut. A branch of the Esquimauan
family inhabiting the Aleutian ids. and
the N.'side of Alaska pen., w. of Ugashik r.
The origin of the term is obscure. A
reasonable supposition is given by Engel
(quoted by Dall in Smithson. Contrib.,
XXII, 1878) that Aliut is identical with
the Chukchi word aliatj 'island.* The
early Russian explorers of Kamchatka
heard from the Chukchi of islanders,
aliuit, beyond the main Asian shore, by
which the Chukchi meant the Diomede
islanders; but when the Russians found
people on the Aleutian ids. they supposed
them to be those referred to by the
Chukchi and called them by the Chukchi
name, and the Chukchi often adopt the
Russian name, Aleut, for themselves,
though asserting that it is not their own.
According to Dall, Unang^tiUy 'people,* is
the generic term which the Aleut apply
to themselves, it being probably a form
of the Eskimo Innuin, plural of Inung^
Inuk.
It is stated by various authorities that
the Aleut differ markedly from the Es-
kimo in character and mental ability as
well as in many practices. According to
Dall the Aleut possess greater intellect-
ual capacity than the Eskimo, but are far
inferior in personal independence, and
while the Aleuts' physiognomy differs
somewhat from that of the typical Es-
kimo, individuals are often seen who
can not be distinguished from ordinary
Innuit. Notwithstanding the differences,
there is no doubt that the Aleut are
an aberrant offshoot from the great
Esquimauan stock, and that however
BULL. 30]
ALEXANDROVSK ALGIC
37
great their distinguishing traits these
have resulted in the lapse of time from
their insular position and peculiar en-
vironment. Dall considers the evidence
from the shell heaps conclusive as to
the identity with the continental Es-
kimo of the early inhabitants of the
islands as regards implements and weaj)-
ons. The testimonv afforded by language
seems to be equally conclusive, though
perhaps lass evident. The Aleut lan-
guage, though differing greatly from the
dialects of the mainland, possesses many
words whose roots are common to the
Eskimo tongues. The Aleut are divided,
chiefly on dialectal grounds, into Un-
alaskans, who inhabit the Fox ids., the
w. part of Alaska pen., and the 8hu-
magin ids., and Atkans who inhabit the
Andreanof, Rat, and Near ids. When
first visited by the Russians the Aleutian
ids. had a n;uch larger population than
at present. As compared with the main-
land Eskimo and the Indians the Aleut
are now unwarlike and docile, though
they fought well when first discovered,
but had only darts against the Russian
firearms ana were consequently soon
overpowered, and they speedily came
under the absolute power of the Russian
traders, who treated them with great
cruelty and brutality. This treatment
had the effect of reducing them, it is said,
to 10 per cent of their original number,
and the survivors were held in a condition
of slavery. Later, in 1794-1818, the Rus-
sian Government interfered to regulate
the relations between traders and natives
with the result of somewhat ameliorat-
ing their condition. In 1824 the mis-
sionary Veniaminoff began his labors, and
to hm is largely due most of the im-
provement, moral and mental. Through
his exertions and those of his colabor-
ers of the Greek church all the Aleut
were Christianized and to some extent
educated.
The population of the Aleutian ids.,
which before the arrival of the Russians
was by their own tradition 25,000 (which
estimate, judging by the great number of
their village sites, Dall does not think
excessive), in 1834, according to Veniami-
noff, was 2,247, of whom 1,497 belonged
to the E. or Unalaskan division and 750
to the w. or Atkan division. Ac(!ord-
ing to Father Shaiesnekov there were
about 1,400 on the Aleutian ids. in 1848.
After the epidemic of smallpox in that
year some 900 were left. In 1874 Dall
estimated the population at 2,005, includ-
ing mixed bloods. According to the cen-
sus of 1890 there were 968 Aleut and 734
mixed-bloods, total 1,702; in 1900 the
statistics of the previous decade were
repeated.
The following are Aleut villages: Aku-
tan, Attn, Avatanak, Belkofski, Biorka,
Chernofski, Eider, lliuliuk, Kasheega,
Korovinski, Makushin, Mashik, Mor-
zhovoi, Nateekin, Nazan, Nikolaief, Nik-
olski, Pavlof, Pogromni, Popof, St George,
St Paul, Sannak, Unga, Vossnessenski.
The following villages no longer exist:
Agulok, Akun, Alitak, Artelnof, Beaver,
Chaliuknak, Ikolga, Imagnee, Itchadak,
Kalekhta, Kutchlok, Riechesni, Seredka,
Sisaguk, Takamitka, Tigalda, Totchikala,
Tulik, Ugamitzi, Uknodok, Unalga, Ve-
selofski. The following ruined places
have been discovered on a single island,
Agattu, now uninhabited: Agonakagna,
Atkulik, Atkigyin, Hachimuk, Hamnu-
Hk, Hanilik, Hapk^ig, Higtiguk, Hilk-
suk, Ibin, Imik, Iptugik, Isituchi, Ka-
kuguk, Kamuksusik, Kaslukug, Kig-
sitatok, Kikchik, Kikun, Kimituk, Ki-
tak, Kuptagok, Magtok, Mukugnuk,
Navisok, Siksatok, Sunik, Ugiatok, Ugti-
kun, Ugtunmk, Ukashik.
Aleouteans.— Drake, Bk. of Inds., bk. i, 16, 1848.
Aleuten.— Holm berg, Ethnol. Skizz,, 7, 1855.
Aleuts.— Dall in Proc. Cal. Acad. Sci., iv, 35,
1873. Aleyut.— Coxe, Russ. Disc., 219, 1787. Alla-
yume.— Powell in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 553, 1877
(Olamentkename). Cagatsky.— Mahoney (1869)
in Senate Ex. Doc. 68, 4l8t Cong., 2d sess., 19,
1870 ('easterners': Russianized form of Aleut
name). Kagataya-Koung*ns.— Humboldt, New
Spain, 11, 346, 1822 (own name: * men of the east':
refers only to the Aleut living e. of I'mnak
str. in contradistinctioti to the tribes w. of it.—
Dall. inf'n, 1905). Kataghayekiki. -Coxe, Russ.
Disc., I, 219, 1787. Khagan'-aya-khun'-khin.—
Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. i, 22. 1877 (sig. ' east-
ern people'). KxagantaiaEoimiEin. — Pinart in
Mem. Soc. Ethnol. Paris, xi, 157, 1872 (name of
natives of Shumagin ids. and of Aleut of Alaska
pen: 'men of the east'). Oonangan. — Veniami-
noff (juoted by Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 146,
1884. Taiahoxinhins.— Pinart in M6m. Soc. Ethnol.
Paris, XI, 158, 1872 (own name: 'men'). TiJcha-
yuna. — IVtroff, 10th Cen.sus, Alaska, 146, 1884
(Knaiakhotana name). Taxeju-na.— Davidof in
RadlofT. Worterb., d. Kinai-Spr., 29. 1874. Tax-
emna. — Doroschin in RadloflF, Worterb., d. Kinai-
Spr., 29, 1874 (Knaiakhotana name). Tiyakh'u-
nin. — Pinart, op. cit. Unangan^:— Applegate in
11th Census, Alaska. 8.5, 1893. TJ-niing'iin.— Dall
in Cont. N. .\. Ethnol., i, 22, 1877 {own national
name).
Alezandrovsk. A Kaniagmiut village
and trading post on Graham harbor,
Alaska; pop. 88 in 1880, 107 in 1890.
Alexandrousk. — Post route map, 1903. Alezan-
drovsk.— PetrofT. 10th Census, Alaska, 29, 1884.
English Bay.— nth Cen.sus, Alaska, 163, 1893. Port
Graham.— Ibid., 6S.
Alexeief. A Chnagmiut village in the
Yukon delta, Alaska; pop. 16 in 1880.
Alexeieft Odinotchka.— Petroff, 10th Census,
Alaska, 12, 1884 ('Alexeief's trading post').
Algic. A term applied by H. R. School-
crat't to the Algoncjuian tribes and lan-
guages, and used occasionally by other
writers since his time. Algique is em-
ployed by some Canadian French essay-
ists*. Schoolcraft himself (Ind. Tribes, v,
536, 1855) includes the term in his list of
words of Indian origin. The word seems
to be formed arbitrarily from Alg, a part
of Algonkin, and the English adjectival
termination ?c. (a. f. c. )
38
ALGONKIAN — ALOONQUIAN FAMILY
[b. a. E.
Algonkian. A geological term used to
designate an important series of rocks
lying between the Archean and the Pale-
ozoic systems. These rocks are most
prominent in the region of L. Superior, a
characteristic territory of the Indians of
the Algonquian family, whence the name.
Geologists speak of the **Algonkian pe-
riod.*' (a. p. c.)
Algonkin (a name hitherto variously
and erroneously interpreted, but Hewitt
suggests that it is probably from ( Micmac)
aJgooineakmgy or algoomaking, *at the
place of spearing fish and eels [from the
bow of a canoe] ' ). A term applied origi-
nally to the Weskarini, a small Algon-
quian tribe fonnerlylivingonthe present
(xatineau r., a tributary of Ottawa r., e.
of the present city of Ottawa, in Quebec.
Later the name was used to include also
the Amikwa, Kichesipirini, Kinonche,
Kisakon, Maskasinik, Matawachkirini,
Miasisauga, Michacondibi, Nikikouek,
Ononchataronon, Oskemanitigou, Ouaso-
uarini, Outaouakamigouk, Outchougai,
Powating, Sagahiganirini, and Sagnitao-
unigama. French writers sometimes
called the Montagnais encountered along
the lower St Lawrence the Lower Algon-
quins, because they spoke the same lan-
guage; and the ethnic stock and family of
languages has been named from the Algon-
kin, who formed a close alliance with the
French at the first settlement of Canada
and received their help against the
Iroquois. The latter, however, afterward
procured firearms and soon forced the
Algonkin to abandon the St Lawrence
region. Some of the bands on Ottawa r.
fled w. to Mackinaw and into Michigan,
where they couFolidated and became
known under the modern name of Ot-
tawa. The others tied to the n. and e.,
beyond reach of the Iroquois, but gradu-
ally found their way back and reoccupied
the country. Their chief gathering place
and mission station was at Three Rivers
in Quel^ec. Nothing is known of their
social organization. The bands now rec-
ognized as Algonkin, with their population
in 1900, are as follows. In Ottawa: Golden
Lake, 86; North Renfrew, 286; Gib-
son (Iroquois in part), 123. In Quebec:
River Desert, 393; Temiscaming, 203;
Lake of Two Mountains (Iroquois in
part), 447; total, 1,536. As late as 1894
the Canadian Indian Office included as
Algonkin also 1,679 ''stragglers" in Pon-
tiac, Ottawa co., Champlain, and St Mau-
rice, in Quebec, but these are omitted
from subsequent reports. In 1884 there
were 3,874 Algonkin in Quebec province
and in e. Ontario, including the Temis-
caming. Following are the Algonkin vil-
lages, so far as they are known to have
b^n recorded: Cape Magdalen, Egan,
Hartwell, Isleaux Tourtes (Kichesipirini
and Nipissing), Rouge River, Tangouaen
(Algonkin and Huron). .(J* m. c. t.)
Abnaki.— For forms of this word as applied to the
Algonkin, see Abnaki. Akwanake.— Breboeuf
a noted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 207, 1864.
Alagonkiiu. — Croghan (1765) in Monthly Am.
Jour. Geol., 272, 1831. Algokin.— Mckenzie
quoted by Tanner, Narr., 332, 1830: Algomeequin.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 306, 1^1. Alffome-
qainft.— Ibid., v, 38, 1855. Algommequin.— Cnam-
plain (1632), (Euv., v, pt. 2, 193, 1870. Algom-
quini.— Sagard (1636), Canada, i, 247, 1866. Al-
gonoains.— Hennepin, New Disc, 95, 1698. Algon-
gin».— Tracy (1667) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in,
153, 1853. Algongmn.— Morse, N. Am., 238, 1776.
Algonio Indian*.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 38,
1851. AlKonkina.— Hennepin (1683) in Harris,
Voy. and Trav., li, 916, 1705. Algonmequin.—
Martin in Bressani, Rel. Abr4g4e, 319, 1653. Algo-
novina.— Alcedo, Die. Geog., v, 120, 1789. Algon-
quaint.— Jes. Rel. 1653, 3, 1858. Algonquens.—
Sch • •• -■
shoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 358, 1862. Algon-
qain.— Jes. Rel. 1632, 14, 1858. Algoomenquim.—
Keane in Stanford, Coinpend., 500, 1878. Al«o-
quins.— Lewis and Clark, Trav., i, map, 1817. Al-
ffoquois.— Audouard, Far West, 207, 1869. Algon-
inquina.— Gorges (1658) in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
II, 67, 1847. Algoumekins.— Gallatin in Trans. Am.
Antiq. Soc., ii, 24, 1836. Algoumequini.— De Laet
(1633) quoted by Vater, Mithridates, pt. 3, sec.
3, 4(M, 1816. Algouxnequina.— Champlain (1603),
(Euv., II, 8, 1870. Algumenquinl.— Kingslev,
Standard Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 147, 1883. Al&oon-
guint.— Nicolls (^1666) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i.l,
147,1853. Alkonkint.— Hutchins (1778) quoted by
Jefferson, Notes, 141,1825. Alquequin.— Lloyd ia
Jour. Anthrop. Inst. G. B., iv, 44, 1875. Alten-
kins.— Clinton (1745) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VI,
281, 1855 (mispnnt). Attenkins.— Clinton (1746),
ibid., 276.
Algonquian Family (adapted from the
name of the Algonkin tribe). A lin-
guistic stock which formerly occupied a
more extended area than any other in
North America. Their territory reached
from the e. shore of Newfoundland to
the Rocky mts. and from Churchill r. to
Pamlico sd. The e. parts of this territory
were separated by an area occupied by Iro-
quoian tribes. On the e. Algonquian
tribes skirted the Atlantic coast from
Newfoundland to Neuse r. ; on the s. they
touched on the territories of the eastern
Siouan, southern Iroquoian, and the
Muskhogean families; on thew. they bor-
dered on the Siouan area; on the n. w. on
the Kitunahan and Athapascan; in I^bra-
dor they came into contact with the Es-
kimo; in Newfoundland they surrounded
on three sides the Beothuk.* The Chey-
enne and Arapaho moved from the mam
body and drifted out into the plains.
Although there is a general agreement as
to the peoples which should be included
in this family, information in regard to the
numerous dialects is too limited to justify
an attempt to give a strict linguistic clas-
sification; the data are in fact so mea-
ger in many instances as to leave it
doubtful whether certain bodies were
confederacies, tribes, bands, or clans, es-
pecially bodies which have l)ecoine ex-
tinct or can not be identified, since early
writers have frequently designated set-
tlements or bands of tKe same tribe as
distinct tribes. As in the ca«!e of all In-
dians, travelers, observing part of a tribe
BULL. 30]
ALGONQUIAN FAMILY
39
settled at one place and part at another,
have frequently taken them for different
peoples, and nave dignified sinfle vil-
lages, settlements, or bands with the title
**tribe" or ** nation,*' named from the
localitv or the chief. It is generally im-
possible to discriminate between tribes
and villages throughout the greater part
of New England and along the Atlantic
coast, for the Indians there seem to have
been grouped into small communities,
each taking its name from the principal
village of the group or from a neighboring
stream or other natural feature. W hether
these were subordinate to some real tribal
authority or of equal rank and interde-
pendent, although still allied, it is im-
possible in many instances to deter-
mine. Since true' tribal organization is
found among the better known branches
and can be traced in several instances in
the eastern division, it is presumed that
it was general. A geographic classifica-
tion of the Algonquian tribes follows:
Western division, comprising three
groups dwelling along the e. slope of the
Rocky mts: Blackfoot confederacy, com-
posed of theSiksika, Kainah, and Piegan;
Arapaho and Cheyenne.
Northern division, the most extensive
one, stretching from the extreme n. w.
of the Algonquian area to the extreme
E., chiefly n. of the St I^wrence and the
great lakes, including several groups
which, on account of insufficient knowl-
edge of their linguistic relations, can only
partially be outlined: Chippewa group,
embracmg the Cree (?), Ottawa, Chip-
pewa, and Missisauga; Algonkin group,
comprising the Nipissing, Temiscaming,
Abittibi, and Algonkin.
Northeastern division, embracing th'e
tribes inhabiting e. Quebec, the Mari-
time Provinces, and e. Maine: the Mon-
tagnais group, composed of the Nascapee,
Montagnais, Mistassin, Bersiamite, and
Papinachois; Abnaki group, comprising
the Micmac, Malecite, Passamaquoddy,
Aroeaguntacook, Sokoki, Penobscot, an(l
Norridgewoi'k.
Central division, including groups that
resided in Wisconsin, Illinois, Indiana,
Michigan, and Ohio: Menominee; the
Sauk group, includingthe Sauk, Fox, and
Kickapoo; Mascouten; Potawatomi; Illi-
nois branch of the Miami ^roup, com-
prising the Peoria, Kaskaskia, Cahokia,
Tamaroa,and Michigamea; Miami branch,
composed of the Miami, Piankashaw, and
Wea.
Eastern division, embracing all the
Algon()uian tribes that 'lived along the
Atlantic coast s. of the Abnaki and in-
cluding several confederacies and groups,
as the Pennacook, Massachuset, Wam-
panoag, Narraganset, Nipmuc, Montauk,
Mohegan, Mahican, Wappinger, Dela-
wares, Shawnee, Nanticoke, Conoy, Pow-
hatan, and Pamlico.
As the early settlements of the French,
Dutch, and English were all within the
territory of the eastern members of the
family, they were the first aborigines
X. of the Gulf of Mexico to feel the
blighting effect of contact with a superior
race. As a rule the relations of the
French with the Algonquian trilies were
friendly, the Foxes being the only tril)e
against whom they waged war. The
English settlements were often engageil
in border wars with their Algonquian
neighbors, who, continually pressed far-
ther toward the interior by the advancing
white immigration, kept up for a time a
futile struggle for the possc^ssion of their
territory. The eastern tribes, from
Maine to Carolina, were defeateil and
their tribal organization was broken up.
Some withdrew to Canada, others crossed
the mountains into the Ohio valley, while
a few bands were locate<l on reservations
by the whites only to dwindle and ulti-
niately l)econ)e extinct. Of many of the
smaller tribes of New England, Virginia,
and other eastern states there are no liv-
ing representatives. Even the languages
of some are known only by a few words
mentioned by early historians, while
some tribes are known only bv name.
The Abnaki and others who fied into
Canada settled along the St Lawrence
under the protection of the French,
whose active allies they l)ecame in all the
subsetjuent wars with the English down
to the fall of the French power in Canada.
Those who crossed the Allegheny mts.
into the Ohio valley, together with the
Wyandot and the native Algonquian
tribes of that region, formed themselves
into a loose confederacy, allied first with
the French and afterward with the Eng-
lish against the advancing settlements
with the declared puri)ose of preserving
the Ohio r. as the Indian boundary.
Wayne's victory in 1794 put an end to tlie
struggle, and at the treaty of Greenville in
1795 the Indians acknowledged their de-
feat and made the first (session of land w.
of the Ohio. Tecumseh and his brother,
Ellskwatawa, instigated by British in-
triguers, again aroused the western tribes
against the United States a few years later,
but the disastrous defeat at Tippecanoe in
1811 and the death of their leader broke
the spirit of the Indians. In 1815 those
who had taken part against the United
States during the War of 1812 made peace
with the Government; then l)egan the
series of treaties by which, within thirty
years, most of the Indians of this region
ceded their lands and removed w. of the
Mississippi.
A factor which contributed greatly to
the decline of the Algonquian ascendency
40
ALGONQUIAN FAMILY
[B. A. E.
was the power of the Irocjuoian confed-
eracy, which by the beginning of the
17th century had developed a power
destined to make them the scourge of
the other Indian population from the
Atlantic to the Mississippi and from
Ottawa r. in Canada to tne Tennessee.
After destroying the Huron and the Erie,
they turned their power chiefly against
the Algonquian tribes, and ere long Ohio
and Indiana were nearly deserted, only
a few villages of Miami remaining here
and there in the northern portion. The
region s. and w. they made a desert,
clearing of native inhabitants the whole
country within 500 m. of their seats.
The Algonquian tribes fled before them
to the region of the upper lakes and the
banks of the Mississippi, and only when
the French had guaranteed them protec-
tion against their deadly foes did they
venture to turn back toward the e.
The central Algonquians are tall, aver-
aging about 173 cm.; they have the typ-
ical Indian nose, heavy and prominent,
somewhat hooked in men, flatter in
women; their cheek bones are heavy;
the head among the tribes of the great
lakes is very large and almost brachyce-
phalic, but showing considerable varia-
tion ; the face is very large. The type of
the Atlantic coast Algonquians can hardly
be determined from living individuals, as
no full-bloods survive, but skulls found
in old burial grounds show that thev
were tall, their faces not quite so broad,
the heads much more elongate and re-
markably high, resembling in this respect
the Eskimo and suggesting the possibility
that on the New England coast there may
have been some mixture with that type.
The Cheyenne and Arapaho are even
taller than the central Algonquians; their
faces are larger, their heads more elon-
gate. It is worthy of remark that in the
region in which the mound builders' re-
mains are found, rounded heads pre-
vailed, and the present population of the
region are also more round-headed, per-
haps suggesting fusion of blood (Boas,
inf n, 1905). See Anatomy, Physiology.
The religious beliefs of the eastern' Al-
gonquian tribes were similar in their lead-
ing features. Their myths are numerous.
Their deities, or manitus, including objects
animate and inanimate, were many, but
the chief culture hero, he to whom the
creation and control of the world, were
ascribed, was substantially the same in
character, although known by various
names, among different tribes. As Man-
ibozho, or Michabo, among the Chippewa
and other lake tribes, he was usually
identified as a fabulous great rabbit,
bearing some relation to the sun; and
this identification with the great rabbit
appears to have prevailed among other
tribes, being found as far s. as Maryland.
Brinton (Hero Myths, 1882) believes
this mythological animal to have been
merely a symbol of light, adopted be-
cause of the similarity between the
Algonquian words for rabbit and light.
Among the Siksika this chief beneficent
deity was known as Napiw, among the
Abnaki as Ketchiniwesk, among the
New England tribes as Kiehtan, Woo-
nand, Cautant<)wit, etc. He it was who
created the world by magic power, peo-
pled it with ^me and the other ani-
mals, taught his favorite people the arts
of the chase, and gave them corn and
beans. But this deity was distinguished
more for his magical powers and his
ability to overcome opposition bv trick-
ery, deception, and falsehood than for
benevolent Qualities. The objects of
nature were deities to them, as the sun,
the moon, fire, trees, lakes, and the va-
rious animals. Respect was also paid to
the four cardinal points. There was a
general belief in a soul, shade, or immor-
tal spiritual nature not only in man but
in animals and all other things, and in
a spiritual abode to which this soul went
after the death of the body, and in which
the occupations and enjoyments were
supposed to be similar to those of this
life. Priests, or conjurers, called by the
whites medicine-men, played an impor-
tant part in their social, political, and
religious systems. They were supposed
to possess infiuence with spirits or other
agencies, which they could bring to their
aid in prying into the future, inflicting
or curing disease, etc.
Among the tribes from s. New England
to Carolina, including especially the Mo-
hegan, Delawares, the people of the
Powhatan confederacy, and the Chippe-
wa, descent was reckoned in the female
line; among the Potawatomi, Abnaki,
Blackfeet, and probably most of the
northern tribes, in the male line. Within
recent times descent has been paternal
also among the Menominee, Sauk and
Fox, Illinois, Kickapoo, and Shawnee,
and, although it has been stated that it
was anciently maternal, there is no satis-
factory proof of this. The Cree, Arapaho,
and Cheyenne are without clans or gent^.
The gens or clan was usually governed by
a chief, who in some cases was installed
by the heads of other clans or gentes.
The tribe also had its chief, usually se-
lected from a particular clan or gens,
though the manner of choosing a chief
and the authority vested in him varied
somewhat in the different tribes. This
was the peace chief, whose authority was
not absolute, and who had no part in
the declaration of war or in carrying it
on, the leader in the campaign being one
who had acquired a right to the posi-
BULL. 30]
ALGONQUIAN FAMILY
41
tion by noted deeds and skill. In some
tribes the title of chief was hereditary,
and the distinction between a peace chief
and a war chief was not observed. The
chiefs powers among some tribes, as the
Miami, were greater than in others. The
government was directed in weighty mat-
ters by a council, consisting of the chiefs
of the clans or gentes of the tribe. It
was by their authority that tribal war
was undertaken, peace concluded, terri-
tory sold, etc.
The Algonquian tribes were mainly
sedentary and agricultural, probably the
only exceptions being those of the cold
r^ions of Canada and the Siksika of the
plains. The Chippewa did not fonnerly
cultivate the soil. Maize was the staple
Indian food product, but the tribes of
the region of the great lakes, particularly
the Menominee, made extensive use of
wild rice. The Powhatan tribes raised
enough maize to supply not only their
own wants but those of the Virginia
colonists for some years after the found-
ing of Jamestown, and the New England
colonists were more than once relieved
from hunger by corn raised by the na-
tives. In 1792 Wayne's army found a
continuous plantation along the entire
length of the Maumee from Ft Wayne
to L. Erie. Although depending chiefly
on hunting and fishing for subsistence,
the New England tribes cultivated large
quantities of maize, beans, pumpkins,
and tobacco. It is said they under-
stood the advantage of fertilizing, using
fish, shells, and ashes for this purjxjse.
The tools they used in prei>aring the
ground and in cultivation were usually
wooden spades or hoes, the latter being
made by fastening to a stick, as a handle,
a shell, the shoulder blade of an animal, or
a tortoise shell. It was from the Algon-
quian tribes that the whites first learned
to make hominy, succotash, samp, maple
sugar, johnnycake, etc. Gookin,in 1674,
thus descriljes the method of preparing
food among the Indians of Massachusetts:
** Their foo<l is generally boiled maize,
or Indian corn, mixed with kidney beans,
or sometimes without. AKo, they fre-
quently boil in this pottage fish and flesh
of all sorts, either new taken or dried,
as shad, eels, alewives, or a kind of her-
ring, or any other sort of fish. But they
dry mostly those sorts before mentioned.
These thev cut in pieces, bones and all,
and boil ttem in the aforesaid pottage.
I have' wondered many times that they
were not in danger of being choked with
fish bones; but they are so dexterous in
separating the bones from the fish in
their eating thereof that they are in no
hazard. Also, they boil in this frumenty
all sorts of flesh they take in hunting,
as venison, beaver, bear's flesh, moose.
otters, raccoons, etc., cutting this flesh
in small pieces and boiling it as afore-
said. Also, they mix with the said pot-
tage several sorts of roots, as Jerusalem
artichokes, and groundnut^-, and other
roots, and ponipions, and squashes, and
also several sort«! of nub* or masts, as oak
acorns, chestnuts, and walnuts; these
husked and dried and powdered, they
thicken their pottage therewith. Also,
sometimes, they beat their maize into
meal and sift it through a basket made for
that purpose. With this meal they make
bread, baking it in the ashes, covering the
dough with leaves. Sometimes they make
of their meal a small sort of cakes and boil
them. They make also a certain sort of
meal of parched maize. This meal they
call *nokake."' Their pots were made
of clay, somewhat egg-shaped; their
dishes, spoons, and ladles of wood; their
water pails of birch bark, doubled up
so as to make them four-cornered, with
a handle. They also had baskets of va-
rious sizes in which they placed their
provisions; these were made of rushes,
stalks, corn husks, grass, and bark, often
ornamented with colored figures of ani-
mals. Mats woven of bark and rushes,
dressed deerskins, feather garments, and
utensils of wood, stone, and horn are
mentioned by explorers. Fish were taken
with hooks,* spears, and nets, in canoes
and along the shore, on the sea and in
the ponds and rivers. They captured
without much trouble all the smaller
kinds of fish, and, in their canoes, often
dragged sturgeon with nets stoutly made
of Canada hemp (De Forest, Hist. Inds.
Conn., 1853). Canoes used for fishing
were of two kinds — one of birch bark,
very light, but liable to overset; the other
made from the trunk of a large tree.
Their clothing was composed chiefly of
the skins of animals, tanned until soft
and pliable, and was sometimes orna-
mented with paint and beads made from
shells. Occasionally they decked them-
selves with mantles made of feathers
overlapping each other as on the back of
the fowl. The dress of the women con-
sisted usually of two articles, a leather
shirt, or undergarment, ornamented with
fringe, and a skirt of the same material
fastened round the waist with a belt and
reaching nearly to the feet. The legs
were protected, espeidally in the winter,
with leggings, and the feet with mocca-
sins of soft dressed leather, often embroid-
ered with wampum. The men usually
covered the lower part of the body with
a breech-cloth, and often wore a skin
mantle thrown over one shoulder. The
women dressed their hair in a thick
heavy plait which fell down the neck,
and sometimes ornamented their heads
with bands decorated witli wampum
42
ALGONQITIAK FAMILY
[b. a. b.
or with a small cap. Higginson (New
England^s Plantation, 1629)8ay8: "Their
hair is usuallv cut before, leaving one
lock longer than the rest.*' The men
went bareheaded, with their hair fan-
tastically trimmed, each according to
his own fancy. One would shave it
on one side and leave it long on the
other; another left an unshaved strip,
2 or 3 in. wide, running from the fore-
head to the nape of the neck.
The typical Algonquian lodge of the
woods and lakes was oval, and the conical
lodge, made of sheets of birch-bark, also
occurred. The Mohegan, and to some ex-
tent the Virginia Indians, constructed long
communal houses which accommodated a
number of families. The dwellings in the
N. were sometimes built of logs, while those
in the S. and parts of the W. were con-
structed of saplings fixed in the ground,
bent over at the top, and covered with
movable matting, thus forming a long,
round-roofed house. The Dela wares and
some other eastern tribes, preferring to
live separately, built smaller dwellings.
The manner of construction among the
Delawares is thus described by Zeisber-
ger: **They peel trees, abounding with
sap, such as lime trees, etc., then cutting
the bark into pieces of 2 or 3 yards in
length, they lay heavy stones up)on
them, that they may become flat and
even in drying. The frame of the hut is
made by ariving poles into the ground
and strengthening them by cross beams.
This framework is covered, both within
and without, with the above-mentioned
Cieces of bark, fastened very tight with
ast or twigs of hickory, which are re-
markably tough. The roof runs up to a
ridge, and is covered in the same manner.
These huts have one opening in the roof
to let out the smoke and one in the side
for an entrance. The door is made of a
large piece of bark without either bolt or
lock, a stick leaning against the outside
being a sign that nobody is at home.
The light enters by small openings fur-
nished with sliding shutters." The cov-
ering was sometimes rushes or long reed
grass. The houses of the Illinois are de-
scribed by Hennepin as being **made
like long arbors" and covered with
double mats of flat flags. Those of the
Chippewa and the Plains tribes were cir-
cular or conical, a framework covered with
bark among the former, a frame of mov-
able poles covered with dressed skins
among the latter. The villages, especially
along the Atlantic coast, were freouently
surrounded with stockades of tall, stout
stakes firmly set in the ground. A num-
ber of the western Algonquian towns are
described by early explorers as fortified
or as surrounded with palisades.
In no other tribes n. of Mexico was
picture writing developed to the advanced
stage that it reached among the Delawares
and the Chippewa. The figures were
scratched or pamted on pieces of bark or on
slabs of wood. Some of the tribes, especi-
ally the Ottawa, were great traders, acting
as chief middlemen between the more dis-
tant Indians and the early French settle-
ments. Some of the interior tribes of
Illinois and Wisconsin made but little use
of thecanoe,travelingalmostalway8 afoot;
while others who lived along the upper
lakes and the Atlantic coast were expert
canoemen. The canoes of the upper lakes
were of birch-bark, strengthened on the
inside with ribs or knees. The more
solid and substantial boat of Virginia and
the western rivers was the dugout, made
from the trunk of a large tree. The man-
ufacture of pottery, though the product
was small, except in one or two tribes,
was widespread. Judged by the number
of vessels found in the graves of the re-
gions occupied by the Shawnee, this tribe
carried on the manufacture to a .greater
extent than any other. The usual method
of burial was in graves, each clan or gens
having its own cemetery. The mortuary
ceremonies among the eastern and central
tribes were substantially as described by
Zeisberger. Immediately after death the
corpse w^as arrayed in the deceased's best
clothing and decked with the chief orna-
ments worn in life, sometimes having the
face and shirt painted red, then laid on
a mat or skin in the middle of the hut,
and the arms and personal effects were
placed about it. After sunset, and also
before daybreak, the female relations and
friends assembled around the body to
mourn over it. The grave was dug gen-
erally bv old women; inside it was
lined with bark, and when the corpse was
placed in it 4 sticks were laid across,
and a covering of bark was placed over
these ; then the grave was filled with earth.
An earlier custom was to place in the
grave the personal effects or those indic-
ative of the character and occupation of
the deceased, as well asfooil, cooking uten-
sils, etc. Usually the body was placed
horizontally, though among some of the
western tribes, as the Foxes, it was some-
times buried in a sitting pyosture. It was
the custom of probably most of the tribes
to light fires on the grave for four nights
after burial. The Illinois, Chippewa, and
some of the extreme western tribes fre-
quently practised tree or scaffold burial.
The bodies of the chiefs of the Powhatan
confederacy were stripped of the flesh
and the skeletons were placed on scaf-
folds in a charnel house. The Ottawa
usually placed the body for a short time
on a scaffold near the grave previous to
burial. The Shawnee, and possibly one
or more of the southern Illinois tribes,
were accustomed to bury their dead in
box-shaped sepulchers made of undressed
BOLL. 301 ALOONQHIKS OP 'PORTAGE DE PRAIRIE — ALIBAMC.
43
stone slabs. The Nanticoke, and some of
the western tribes, after temporary burial
in the eround or exposure on scaffolds,
removed the flesh and reinterred the
skeletons.
The eastern Algonquian tribes probably'
equaled the Iroquois in bravery, intelli-
gence, and physical powers, but lacked
their constancy, solidit}[ of character,
and capability of organization, and do
not appear to have appreciated the power
and mfluence they might have wielded
by combination. The alliances between
tribes were generally temporary and
without real cohesion. There seems, in-
deed, to have been some element in their
character which rendered them incapa-
ble of combining in large bmlies, even
against a common enemy. Some of their
great chieftains, as Philip, Pontiac, and
Tecumseh, attempted at different periods
to unite the kino red tribes in an effort
to resist the advance of the white race;
but each in turn found that a single great
defeat disheartened his followers and
rendered all his efforts fruitless, and the
former two fell by the hands of deserters
from their own ranks. The Virginia
tribes, under the able guidance of Pow-
hatan and Opechancanough, formed an
exception to the general rule. They
presented a united front to the whites,
and resisted for years every step of their
advance until the Indians were practically
exterminated. From the close of the
Revolution to the treaty of Greenville
(1795) the tribes of the Ohio valley also
made a desperate stand against the Amer-
icans, but m this they had the encour-
agement, if not the more active support,
of the British in Canada as wel 1 as of other
Indians. In individual character many
of the Algonquian chiefs rank high, and
Tecumseh stands out prominently as one
of the noblest figures in Indian history.
The present number of the Algonquian
family is about 90,000, of whom alxjut
40,000 are in the United States and 50,000
in Canada. The largest tribes are the
Chippewa and theCree. (j. m. c. t. )
>Algonkixi-Leiuipe.—Qal latin in Trans. Am.
Antiq. Soc.. ll, 23. 305, 1836. Berghaiis (1845),
Physik. Atla.««, map 17. 1848. Ibid.. 1852. >Al«)n-
quia.- Bancroft. Hist. U. S., in, 237, 1840. Pilch-
ard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 381, 1847 (follows
GallatinK >AlgoBkixit.— Gallatin in Trans. Am.
Ethnol. Soc., II. pt. 1, xcix, 77, 1848. Gallatin in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 401, 1853. >Al|^ii-
kin.— Turner in Pae. R. R. Rep., ni, pt. 3, 65,
1856. Hayden. Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.. 232,
1862 (treats only of Crees, Blackfeet, Shyennes).
Hale in Am. Antiq., 112, April, 1883 (treated with
reference to migration). <Algonkiii.— Latham
in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 1856 (adds to Galla-
tin's list of 1836 the Bethuck, Shyenne, Blackfoot,
and Arrapaho). Latham, Opuscula, 327, 1860 (as
in preceding). Latham, Elem. Comp. Philol.,
447, 1862. <Algonqttin.~Keane in Stanford.
Compend., Cent, and S. Am., 460, 465, 1878 (list in-
cludes the Maquas, an Iroquois tribe). >SaBkat-
■ohwainer.— Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848
(probably designates the Arapaho). >Arapa-
noes.— Berghaus, Physik. Atlas, map 17, 185i.
X Algonkin und Beothuk. —Berghaus, Physik. Atlas,
map 72, 1887.
Algonqains of Portage de Prairie. A
Chippewa band formerly living near L.
of the Woods and e. of it in Manitoba.
They removed before 1804 to the Red r.
country through persuasions of the trad-
ers.— Lewis and Clark, Disc, 55, 1806.
Alibamn (said to be" from the Choctaw
alba ayamule, 4 0|)en or clear the thick-
et'). A Muskho^ean tribe of the Creek
confederacy that formerly dwelt in s. Ala-
bama. It is clear that the Alibamn and
Koasati were closely related, the language
of the two being practically identical.
When tirst found by the whites the
home of the tribe was on Alabama r. a
short distance below the junction of the
Coosa and Tallapoosa. Their early his-
tory, owing to confusion in the use of the
name, is uncertain, but according to tra-
dition they had migrated from a westerly
locality. In the Creek legend, as given
by Gatschet, they are mentioned, under
the name Atilamas, as one of 4 tribes con-
tending for the honor of l)eing considered
the most ancient and valorous. The
chroniclers of De Soto's expetlition in
1541 locate* the "province" or "town"
of Alibamo a short distance n. w. of the
Chicasa, in n. w. or central Mississippi.
According to the Gentleman of Elvas tney
found a strongly fortified town, named
Ullibahali, tm Alabama or lower Coosa r.
Coxe (French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 235,
18.50) says that l>elow theCoza, or Coussa,
on the same river, are the Ullibalies,
or Olibahalies, according to the French
the Allibamons. The identification with
the Unibahali would be complete if this
statement could l)e accepted, butGatschet
is inclined to doubt its correctness. The
history of the tril)e recommences with the
appearance of the French in Mobile bay in
1701-02. Bienville found "on the banks
and many adjacent islands, places aban-
doned by the savages on account of war
with the Conchatjues [Ccmshac] and Ali-
banions" (llamiltim, Colon. Mobile, 41,
1 897 ) . The Fren(!h soon ])ecame involved
in war with the tribe, who, joining the
Cherokee, Abihka, and Catawba in 1708,
descended Ala])ama r. to attack Ft I^mis
and the Mobile Indians in that vicinity,
but retired after burning some villages.
In 1713 the French established Ft Tou-
louse in their country to hold them in
check and to protect French traders.
The site of the fort was occu{>ied in 1812 by
Ft Jac^kson. After the cession in 1763 by
France to Great Britain the fort was
abandoned, and at that time a i)art of the
tril)e removed to the banks of the Mis-
sissippi and established a village 60 m.
above New Orleans. This band num-
bered al)out 120, including 30 warriors.
Su])seiiuently the tribe removed to w.
Louisiana, and in 1890 some were still
-T'
44
ALIBAMU — ALLAKAWEAH
[b. a. 1.
living in Calcasieu parish, others in the
. ? i%5 Creek Nation in Indian T., and a party
{\^^' J of al>out 200 in Polk co. , Tex.
La- ''^
Little has been recorded in regard to
the character and customs of the Ali-
bamu, but that they were warlike in dis-
position is evident from tbeir early his-
tory. One singular custom mentioned
by P^nicaut seems to apply to the Ali-
bamu as well as to the Mobile Indians.
They caused their children, both boys
and girls, to pass in array at a certain
festival and receive a flogginjj: of such
severity as to draw blood, after which
they were lectured by one or more of the
elders. Hawkins states: **They did not
conform to the customs of tlie Creeks,
and the Creek law for the punishment of
adultery was not known among them.
They cultivated the soil to some extent
and had some hogs, horses, and cattle.
Though hospitable, it was their custom
when a white person visited them, as
soon as he had eaten, what was left was
thrown away and everything which had
been used [by the white ]>erson] was
washed. ' ' The 4 Alibamu towns situated
on Alabama r. are given by Hawkins
(Sketch of Creek country, 1799) as Kan-
chati, Tawosa, Pawokti, and Atagi.
Others give Nitahauritz as one of the
four. (a. s. «. c. T.)
Aib»mo».— Barcia, Ensayo, 313, 1723. AUu— H. R.
Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 310, 1836 (probably an
abbreviation.) Alabama.— Bartram, Travels, 463,
1791. Ala Bamer.— Weatherford (1793) in Am.
State Pap., Ind. Aff., i, 38o, 1832. Albamas.— N. C.
Col. Records (1721), ii, 422. 1886. Alebamah.—
Charlevoix, New France,vi. 25, 1872. Alebamoni.—
Boudinot, Star in West, 125, 1816. AUbam.—
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, iii, 80, 1854.
Alibamas.— Nuttall.Journal.2H7,1821. AlibamieB.—
Schermerhom (1812) in Ma.Hs. HLst. Coll.,2d s.,
152, 1814. Alibamo.— French, Hist. Coll. La., ii,
104, 1850. Alibamont.— Dumont. La., i, 134, 1753.
Alibamous.— Smyth. Tour in U. 8., I, 348, 1784.
Alibamus.— Brae ken ridge, Views of La., 82, 1814.
Alibanio.— Smith, Coll. Docs. Hist. Florida, i, 56,
1857. AUbanona.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 156,
1858. Alimamu.— Gentleman of Elvas (1539) in
Hakluyt Soc. Pubs., ix, 87, 1&51. AlUbama.—
Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. AUibamis.— Sibley.
Hist. Sketches, 81, 1806. AUibamont.— Bossu (1758),
Travels La., i, 219, 1771. Allibamous.— Coxe, Caro-
lana, 24, 1741. Atilamas.— Gatschet, Creek Migr.
Leg., II, 13, 1888 (Creek name). Aybamos.—
Barcia, Ensavo, 33:^, 1723. Ewemalas.— Coxe, Caro-
lana, 25, 1741. Habbamalas.— Spotswood (1720) in
N. C. Col. Records, ii, 383. 1886. Halbama.— Vau-
gondy, map of America. Nancv, 1778. Holbamas. —
Rivers, Early Hist. So. Car., 97, 1874. Limanu.—
Ranjel (1541) in Bourne, Narr. De Soto. ii. 136,
1904. Ma'-mo a^-ya-di.— Dorsey, Biloxi MS. Diet.,
B. A. E., 1892 (Biloxi name). Ma'-mo ha^-va.
Ibid, (another Biloxi name). Ha'-mo ha-yai'-di' —
Ibid, (another Biloxi name). Oke-ohoy-atte.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 266, 1851. OUbahaUes.—
Coxe, Carolana, 24, 1741. (See UUibahali.)
Alibamu. A town of the Creek Nation,
on the N. fork of Canadian r., Ind. T.—
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 185, 1888.
Alican. A former Chumashan village
at Caflada Maria Ignacio, near Santa
Barbara, Cal.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Apr. 24, 1863.
Alimacani. A Timuquanan village on
the Florida coast, n. of St Johns r. , in 1566.
Alimaoani.— Fontaneda in Temauz-Compans,
Voy., XX, 24, 1863. Alimaoany.— French, Hist.
Coll. La., 2d s., 264, 1875. Allioamany.— Bassanler,
Histoire Notable, 57, 1586. Allimaoany. — Laudon-
ni^re in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 257, 1869.
Halianaoani.— Oourgues quoted in French, Hist.
Coll. La., 2d 8., 275, 1875. Halmaoanir.— Laudon-
ni^re, ibid., n. s., 849, 1869.
Alimibegonek^ (probably cognate with
the Chippewa tJrAniihigog, * they that live
by the river ' . — Wm. Jones) . Mentioned
as one of the four divisions of the
Cree, living on L. Alimibeg (Nipigon?),
which discharges into L. Superior, Onta-
rio. Creuxius places them immediately
N. of the lake, near the s. end of Hudson
bay. What part of the Cree of modern
times these include is not determinable,
(j. M. c. T. )
Alimibegoneci.— Creuxius, map New France, 1664.
Kiliatinoiis Aliinibesoaek.-Jes. Rel. 1658, 21, 1858.
Alipconk (* place of elms'). A village
of the Wecquaesgeeks on the site of Tar-
ry town, Westchester co., N. Y. It was
burned by the Dutch in 1644.
Alipoonok.— RuUenber, Tribes Hudson R., 78,
1872 ('place of elms'). Alipkonok.— Von der
Donck (1656) quoted, ibid., 72.
Alipoti. Apparently a pueblo of the
Queres in New Mexico in 1508. — Oilate
(1598) in Doc. Ined., xvi, 114, 1871.
Allzway. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Santa Inez mission, Santa Bar-
bara CO., Cal.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Oct. 18, 1861.
Alkali Lake. A Shuswap village or
band near Fraser r. and opposite the mouth
of Chilcotm r., Brit Col. ; pop. 158 in 1902.
Alkakalilkea.— Brit. Col. Map, Ind. Aff., Victoria,
1872 (probably identical). AlkaU Lake.— Can.
Ind. Aff., 269, 1902.
Alkehatchee. A former Upper Creek
town on Tallapoosa r., Ala.
Alkehatchee.— Brahm (18th cent.) quoted by Gat-
schet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 214, 1888. Elkatcha.—
Robin, Voy., ii, map, 1888.
Alki. The motto on the official seal of
the State of Washington, taken from cdki
in the Chinook jargon, which signifies * by-
and-by ' , * in the future' , *80on' . The word
came into the jargon from the Chinook
proper, a dialect of the Chinookan stock,
m which it has a like meaning. ( a. f. c. )
Alknnwea (A^WunweK^ "lower cor-
ner*). A subclivision of the Laalaksen-
taio, a Kwakiutl gens. — Boas in Rep.
Nat. Mus. 1895, 332, 1897.
Allagasomeda. A Chimmesyan village
on upper Skeena r., British Columbia.—
Downie in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., xxxi,
253, 1861.
Allakaweah (Al-la-kd^-we-dh, * Paunch
Indians ' ) . The name applied by a tribe
which Lewis and Clark (Trav., 25, Lond.,
1807) located on Yellowstone and Big-
horn rs., Mont, with 800 warriors and
2,300 souls. This is exactly the country
occupied at the same time by the Crows,
and although these latter are mentioned
BULL. 30]
ALLAPATA ALTAMAHA
45
as distinct, it is probable that they were
meant, or perhaps a Crow band, more par-
ticularly as the Crows are known to their
cousins, the Uidatsa, q. v., as the ** i)eople
who refused the paunch." The name
seems not to have reference to the Gros-
ventres, q. v. (j. m.)
Al-U-k&-we-&li.— Lewis (1805) quoted by Coues.
LettriB and Clark Exped., i, 199. 1893. Gens de
Pame.— Ibid, (given as their French name).
Panneh.— Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. x, 1848 (misprint
for Paunch). Paimoh (Indians).— Lewis quote<l
by Cones, op. cit., l. 199, 1893. Ponch Indians.—
Ptescott quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii,
261, 1863.
Allapata. An unidentified town for-
merly on Hillsboro r., e. Fla. — Brion de
la Tour, War map, 1782.
Allaqnippa. A Delaware woman sachem
of this name lived in 1755 near tlie
mouth of Youghioj?henv r., Allegheny
CO., Pa., and there may have been there
a small Delaware settlement known by
her name. (j. m. )
AUaquippas.— La Tour, map, 1779. Alleguipes.—
Esnautsand Rapilly, map, 1777. Allequippe.—
Lattr^, U. S. map, 1784.
Alle. A pueblo of New Mexico in 1 598,
doubtless situated in the Salinas in the
vicinity of Abo, and evidently occupied
by the Tigua or the Piros.— Onate ( 1598)
in Doc. In^d., xvi, 114, 1871.
Alleghany Indians. A geographical
group, comprising Delawares and Shaw-
nee, residing on Alleghany r. in the
18th century. — Rupp (1756)* Northamp-
ton, etc., 106, 1845.
Allegany Indians.— Post (1758), Jonrn., 147, repr.
1867. Allefheny.- Lotter, map, about 1770. Alli-
Eny.— Homann Heira, map, 1756. Attegheny.—
narutsand Rapilly, map, 1777 (misprint).
Allh. A body of Sali.sh e. of Che-
manis lake, Vancouver id. — Brit. Col.
map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872.
Alligator. A former Seminole town in
Suwannee CO., Fla.
Alligator Hole.— Bai tram, Voy., i, map, 1799. Al-
ligator Indiana.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi. 360.
1857.
Alloc. A Chumashan village w. of
Pueblo de las Canoas (San Buenaven-
tura), Ventura co., Cal., in 1542 (Cabri-
Uo, Narr., 1542, in Smith, Coll. Doc,
181, 1857). Placed by Taylor on the
rancho Orteaga, near the beach.
Alloonloanshaw. A town on the head-
waters of Pearl r., Neosho co., Miss.,
occupied by the Oklafalaya Choctaw. —
West Fla. map, ca. 1772.
Alln. The Antelope clan of the Pecos
tribe of New Mexico. — Hewett in Am.
Anthrop., vi, 431, 1904.
Almota. A Paloos \illage on the n.
bank of Snake r., about 30 m. above the
mouth of Palouse r.. Wash.— Mooney in
14th Rep. B. A. E., 735, 1896.
Alonko. A former Seminole town on
the E. side of St Marks r., 20 in. n.
of St Marks, Wakulla co., Fla.— H. R.
Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th Cong., 27, 1826.
Alpincha. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near the center of the present town
of Santa Barbara, Cal.
Al-pin-tca.— Hensiiaw, Santa Barbara MS. vocab.,
B. A. E . 18K4.
Alpowna. A former Nez Perce village
at the mouth of a creek that flows into
Snake r. from the n., IhjIow Lewiston,
Idaho. At this iK)int the people mixed
with the Paloos, hence more than one
language was spoken in the village.
(a. C. F.)
Alpawa.— (Jrttschct. Nez Perct' MS., B. A. E., 1878
(given as the village name, bnt really the name
of the creek). Elpawawe.— ^bid.
Alaea (corrupticm of Aln^y the aborigi-
nal name). A Yakonan tribe formerly
occupying a small territory at and about
the month of Alsca r., w. Greg. Little is
known of the early history of the tribe,
of which there are now onfy a dozen sur-
vivors on the Siletz res., Oreg. Ac-
cording to Dorse V (Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 229, 1890) the following are the former
Alsea villages: Kutauwa, Kyamaisu,
Tachuwit, Kaukhwan, Yukhais, Kakhts-
hanwaish, Shiuwauk, Khlokhwaivutslu,
Mekumtk, n. of Alsea r.; Yahach, Chi-
ink, Kauhuk, Kwulisit, Kwamk, Skha-
khwaiyntslu, Khlimkwaish, Kalbusht,
Panit, Thlekushauk, and Thlekuhweyuk,
on the s. side of the river. Milhau (in
letter to Gibbs)gave Neahumtuk as an
Alsea village at the mouth of Alsea r.,
which has not been identified. See Far-
rand in Am. Anthrop., in, 246, 1901.
(L. F.)
Alcea.— Sikes in Ind. Aflf. Rep.. 215, 1860. Aleya.—
(Jairdner (18:i5) in ,Ionr. Geog. Soe. I^md., xi,
'Hh^. 1841. Alsea.— Dorse V in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 229. 1890. Al»eya.— Duflot de Mofras, Explor.,
II. 104, 1844. Al-Bi'.-Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore. III. 229, 1890 (own name). AUiia*.— Duflot
de Mofra.»<. Explor.. ii. :i:J.\ 1844. Alsi'-me^ibini.—
Dorsey. MS. Naltftnne tftnnO vocab., B. A. E., 1884
(Naltunne name). Alsiya.— Ind. Aflf. Rep., 253,
1877. Ku-ni»' ^unni.— Dorsey, MS. Cha.sta Costa
V(H*ab., B. A. E.. 1884 (Chti.staoosta name). Pa-
ifan amim.— Gatschet, Lakmiut MS.. B. A. E.. 105
(Lakmiut name). 8ini'-tg-l! tiiimJ.— Dorney, MS.
Naltftnne tftnnO vocab., B. A. E.. 1884 ('flatheads':
Naltunne name). Toha yaxo amin.— Gatschet,
op. cit. (Lakmiut name). TShayesatiu.— Gatschet,
MS. Nestucca vocab., B. A. E. (Nestueca name).
Xn»eah.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., il, 118, 1814.
Altahmos. A division of the Costanoan
family formerly living on San Francisco
hay, Cal., and connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco.
Al-tah-mo8.— Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, n, 506, 1852.
Altaiuxni.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Altajumo.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 452, 1874.
Altatmos.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lend.,
82. 1856.
Altamaha. A * * province ' ' in e. Georgia
in 1540, mentioned in the narratives of
De Soto's expedition. The name is pre-
served in Altamaha r. The word seems
to be of Timucua origin, the last part,
-paha^ signifving * town,' * home.' ( J. m. )
Alatamahas.— 6audry de.s Lozit^res, Voy. La., 241,
1802. Altamaca.— Gentleman of El vas in Hakluyt
Soc. Pubs.,ix, 49,1851. Altamaha.— La Harpe(1707)
in French, Hist. Coll. La., hi, 36, 1851. AlUpaha.—
\%iO
-.uS-^'f
46
ALTAR
[B. A. ]
Biedma (1540) in Smith. Coll. Doc. Fla.. 50, 1857.
Attopaha.— Biedma (1M4) in French, Hist. CoU.
La.. II, 100. 1850. natamaa.— De I'lsle. map (1707)
in Winsor, Hist. America, ii, 2W, 1886.
Altar. Using the term in its broadest
sense, an altar, on which sacrifices were
made or offerings laid or around which
some other act of worship was performed,
was a feature of the performance of every
ceremony of the American Indians. Some
of these altars are so simple that their
nature is not easily apprehended: an ex-
cavation in the earth, a pile of rocks, a
<^i^--%.;^
8IA ALTAR. (m. C. STEVENSOn)
fire, a buffalo skull serving the purpose.
Others, presenting a complex assemblage
of parts, are definitely recognizable as
altars and in some cases resemble in form
the altars of civilized people, for exam-
ple, those of the Hopi and the Sia. The
altar, on account of its universal distribu-
tion, thus renders important aid to the
comparative study of religions. The ef-
fect of the altar is to localize the worship
and to furnish a place where the wor-
shiper ca,n convey to the deity his offer-
ing and prayers. Altar-shrines are often
placed by springs, rivers, caves, rocks,
or trees on mountains and near spots
which certain deities are supposed to
inhabit, in the belief that the roads of
these deities extend from these localities.
In pursuance of a like idea the Haida de-
posit certain offerings in the sea, and
many tribes throw offerings into springs,
lakes, and rivers. Some of the tempo-
rary altars of the eastern and southern
Indians, so far as may be learned from
the illustrations of early writers, consisted
of an oval or circular palisade of carved
stakes surrounding an are^ in the center
of which was a fire or a mat on which
were.laid various symbolic cult apparatus.
Lafitau (Mo'urs des Sauvages, ii, 327, 1724)
regards as a fire altar the pipe in the calu-
met ceremony of the Illinois described by
Marquette. Such altars are more primi-
tive than the temporary altars erected for
the celebration of a ritual or a portion
of a ritual, and the distinction should
be noted. In this connection the cloud-
blowing tubes and pipes of the ancient
and modem Pueblos may also be men-
tioneii. The widespread connection of
fire with the altar is an important fact.
The disposition of logs in cruciform pat-
tern for the kindling of new fire by the
Creeks suggests an altar. Interesting ex-
amples of the use of fire in ceremony 'are
the Iroquois white-dog rite and the ni^ht
chant of the Navaho. Among the Sik-
sika every tent contains an altar — a small
excavation in the earth — where sweet
gum is burned daily (Wissler). Prehis-
toric altars consisting of blocks of fire-
hardened clay or, in rare cases, lx)xes of
stone form the essential characteristic of
many mounds and belong to the class of
fire altars (Thomas, Putnam, Moorehead,
Mills, Fowke). Among the altars that
survive in the ceremonies of tribes of the
United l^tates may be cited the fire
altar of the Kwakiutl cannibal ceremony
(Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895); the
holv place of the Pawnee Hako ceremony
(Fleteher in 22d Rep. B. A. E.,36, 1904);
the altars of the Sioux (Fletcher in
16th Rep. PeabodyMus., 1883); the sun-
dance altar of the Arapaho (Dorsey in
Field Columb. Mus. Pub., no. 75, pi. Ixi,
1903); and altars of various ceremonies
of the Navaho (Matthews in 5th Rep. B.
A. E., 1887; Stevenson in 8th Rep. B. A.
E., 1891), the Zufli (Stevenson in 23d
Rep. B. A. E., 1905), and the Hopi
(Fewkes in recent reports B. A. E., and
articles in Am. Anthrop. and Jour. Am.
Folk-lore; Dorsey and Voth in Field Col.
Mus. Pubs. ) . Temporary altars are char-
acteristic of the Pueblos and consist, as in
the flute ceremony, for example, of a rere-
dos formed of one horizontal and two ver-
tical slats painted with symbols of rain
and clouds, lightning, com, cult figures,
HOPI ALTAR. (fewkes)
animals, etc. In front of the reredos stand
figurines, sticks representing com, the
tiponi, or palladium bundle, flower
mounds, netted gourds, ears of com, fig-
ures of birds, and a row of eagle feathers.
Connected with the altar are bowls, bas-
kets, rattles, prayer-sticks, pipes, stone
implements, and other paraphernalia,
ana a characteristic feature of some of
them is the dry-painting. During the
progress of some ceremonies a direction
altar, or cloud altar, consisting of a medi-
BULL. 30]
ALTININ AMALAHTA
47
cine bowl surrounded with ears of corn
pointed toward the cardinal points, is
temporarily used. The construction of
the altar, the rites performed before it, and
its destruction form interesting features
of Hopi ceremonies and date back to an-
cient times. Numerous shrine altars are
mentioned, some near, others distant
from, the present pueblos, and many have
been observed which were the worship-
ing places of inhabitants of the ancient
puetE)lo8. (w. II.)
Altinin (from Altaii, the native name
of a place in their territory). A Yokuta
tribe formerly living near the upp^r end
of the Tulare basin, Cal. They are said
to have ranged as far s. as Kern r. A
few survivors now reside on Tule River
res. They may be the same as the Paleu-
yami. (a. l. k.)
Aluenohi. A former village, presuma-
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission j San Francisco, Cal.— Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Aluik. A former Eskimo village on
the E. coast of (Greenland, about lat. 64°
15^; pop. 180 in 1829.— Graah, Exi>ed.,
map, 1837.
iJuk. An Eskimo settlement in s. e.
Greenland, lat. 60° W.— Meddelelserom
Gronland, xxv, map, 1902.
Alwathalama. A former Clmmashan
village at the marsh of (loleta, near Santa
Barbara, Cal. — Tavlor in Cal. Farmer,
Apr. 24, 1863.
Allvatalama.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 459. 1S74.
Alwaththalam.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 4, 18(i0.
Aiwalthatans.— Gatschet in Chief Eng. Rep., jtl.
3, 553, 1876.
Alyenpkig^a. A former Gabrieleno
rancheria in Los Angeles co., Cal., at a
£lace later called Santa Anita,
leupkigna.— Ried (1852) (juoted by Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Jan. 11. 1861. Almpquig-na.— Ried
misquoted bv Hoffman in Bull, ^ex Inst.,
XVII, 2, 1885.
Amacahnri. Mentioned as a clan of
the Apohola phratry of the Timucua. —
Pareja {ca. 1612) quoted by Gatschet in
Am. Philos. Soc. Proc, xvii, 492, 1878.
^ Amahami (ama *land,* khami 'broken':
* mountainous country*). A former dis-
tinct Siouan tribe, long since incorporated
with the Hidatsa; also the name of their
village. Alciij? with the Hidasta they
claimed to have formerly constituted one
tribe with the Crows. Their language,
however, indicated closest aflfinity with
the Hidatsa, differing but slightly from
it, although they occupied a separate vil-
lage and long maintained separate tribal
organization. They were recognized as a
distinct tribe by Lewis and Clark in 1804,
but had practically lost their identity 30
years later. In Lewis and Clark's time
their village was at the mouth of Knife r.,
N. Dak., and was one of three, the other
two being Hidatsa, which for many years
stood on the banks of that stream. Their
strength was estimated at 50 warriors.
After the epidemic of 1837 all or the
greater j)art of the survivors joined the
Hidatsa and were merged with that tribe.
Lewis and Clark state that they had been
a numerous and prosperous agricultural
tribe which once divided the upper Mis-
souri valley, w. of the Dakota group, with
the Arikara, Mandan, and Hidatsa, the
remains of the old towns of these four
tribes being visible on every prairie ter-
race along the river for 600 miles. The
remnants of all four were found by Mat-
thews (Ethnog. Hidatsa, 13, 1877) at Fort
Berthold, numbering fewer than 2,500.
Ahahawa.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 522, 1853.
Ahahaway. —Ibid . . 250. Ah'-e-o-war'. —Lewis and
Clark, Disc, 28, 1806 (own name). Ahnahawayi.—
Lewis and Clark. Exped., i, 11.5, 1814. Ahwaha-
waa.— Brown, West. Gaz., 212, 1817. Ahwaha-
ways.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., Ii, 452, 1814.
Ah-wah-ha-way.— Lewis and Clark, Disc., 25, 1806.
Amahami.— Matthews, Ethnog. Hidatsa, 15, 1877.
Amasi. — Ibid., 36 ('earthen lodges': Crow name).
A-ma'-te-wat-ae'.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol.
Mo. Val., 402, 1862. A ma tilia mi.— Matthews,
Ethnog. Hidatsa, 133. 1877. Anhawaa.— McKen-
ney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, iii, 80, J854. Anna-
hawas.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc.,
II, 125, 1836. Arwacahwas.— Lewis and Clark,
Exped., I. 120, 1814. Arwachaon.— Ibid., map.
A wach a wi.— Maximilian, Travels, 178, 1843.
A-wa-ha-was.— Schermerhorn in Mass. Hist. Coll.,
2d s., II, 35. 1814. A-waha-waya.- Brackenridge,
Views of La., 85, 1815. Oorneille.— Balbi, Atlas
Ethnog., 56, 1826. Oens des Soulier.- Lewis and
Clark, Disc, 25, 1806. Lea Souliera. —Maximilian,
Travels, 3'23, 1843. Mahaha.— Lewis and Clark,
Exped., I, 130, 1814. Maharhar.— Lewis and
Clark, Cones ed., I, 183, 1893. Kahawha. —Max-
imilian, Travels, 335. 1843. Kattasoons.— Keane
in Stanford, Compend., 521, 1878. Sauliert.—
Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s.,
II, 35, 1814 (misprint). Shoe Indians.- Lewis and
Clark, Exped., i, 130, 1814. SouUer Noir.— Ibid.
(French: 'black shoe'). Watasoon8.—Gas8, Jour-
nal. 59, 1807. Wattasoons.- Lewis and Clark,
Exped.. 1, 130. 1814 (so called by the Mandan).
Weteraoon. — Lewis and Clark Exped.. Coues ed.,
I. 204, note. 1893.
Amaikiara. A former Karok village on
the w. bank of Klamath r., at the rapids
a mile or two below the mouth of Salmon
r., N. w. Cal. Though nota large village,
it was of importance because an annual
salmon ceremony and the jumping dance
\Vere held here. Together with most of
the villages near the mouth of the Salmon
it was burned by the whites in the sum-
mer of 1852. (a. l. k.)
A-mi-ke-ar-rum.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23,
1860. Eh-nek.— qibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, in. 151, 1853. Enek.— Kroeber. inf n, 1903
( Yurok name of the lower part of the village),
thnek.— Meyer, Nach dem ^cramento, 236, 1855.
In-neok.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d
Cong., spec, sess., 164, 1853. Mik-iara.— Gibbs,
MS. Misc., B. A. E., 1852. Tumitl.— Kroeber, inf'n,
1903 (Yurok name for the upper part of the vil-
lage).
Amakalli. A former Lower Creek town
established by Indians from Chiaha town
on Amakalli cr., the main branch of
Kitchofuni or., an affluent of Flint r.,
Ga. It had 60 warriors in 1799. (a. s. g. )
Au-muc-cul-le.- Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 64, 1848.
Amalahta. A Chickasaw town in n.
Mississippi, which, according to Adair
48
AMALGUA AMERICAN HORSE
[b. a. b.
(Hist. lods., 354, 1775), stood at some dis-
tance from the other Chickasaw towns.
They met the French there in a sanguin-
ary battle during the first Chickasaw war
of 1736. (a. 8. G.)
MelatUw.— Romans, East and West Fla., 63, 1776.
Amalgna ( 'island of the mists*). An
island off the w. coast of Lower California,
about lat. 30°, on which was a Cochimi
rancheria. — Venegas, Hist. Cal., ii, 437,
1757.
Huamaljfua.— Clavigero quoted by Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Jan. 17. 1862.
Amani-ini ( * mescal corner' ) . A ranch-
eria, probably Cochimi, connected with
Purfsima mission. Lower California, in
the 18th century.
Amani ini.— Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 189, 1857.
Amaseconti ( ' abundance of small fish '
[herring] ). A small division of the Ab-
naki formerly residing in part at Farm-
ington falls, on Sandy r., Franklin co..
Me., and partly near the present New
Sharon, a few miles distant. They took
part with the other Abnaki in the early
Indian wars against the English and
joined in the treaty made at Portsmouth,
IN. H., in 1713. Some of them lingered
in their old homes until about 1797, when
the last family removed to St Francis,
lower Canada, where they retained their
distinctive name until 1809. (j. m. )
AmaBaoonticook.— Ballard in U. S. Coast Surv.
Rep., 251, 1871 (given as the correct name of Sandy
r). AmasaoontooR. — Portsmouth treaty (1713) in
Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 250, 1859. Amataguanteg.—
Gyles (1726), ibid., iii. 357, ia53. Amaaconly.—
Niles (1761?) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s.. vi, 247,
1837. Amatcontie.— Niles (1761?), ibid., 4th s., v,
335, 1861. Amatoonty.— Penhallow (1726) in N. H.
Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 21, 1824. Amasecontee.— Ibid.,
82. Amatsacanty.— Niles (1761?) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., M s., VI, 246, 1837. Aina»»aoonty.— Pen-
hallow, op. cit. Amosequonty.— Map of 1719 cited
by Ballard in U. S. Coast Survey Rep.. 251, 1871.
Anmesoukkanti.— Rasles quoted by Ballard, ibid.
AnmoMukkantti.— Rasles (17*22) quoted by Vetro-
mile, Abnakis. 23-27, 1866. AnxnissSkanti.—
Abnakiletter (1721) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d
8., VIII, 262-3, 1819. Aumesoukkanttd.— Rasles in
Me. Hist. Soc. Coll.. iv. 102, 1856. Keesee Contee.—
Allen, ibid.. 31 (trans, 'herring plrce'). Keesu-
oontu.-Willis, ibid., 105.
Amatidatahi. A former Hidatsa village
on or near Knife r., N. Dak.
A mati data hi.— Matthews, Ethnog. Hidatsa, 133,
1877. Ama.tinatalii.— Ibid.
Amatiha. A former Hidatsa village on
the s. bank of Knife r., half a mile above
its mouth, in N. Dak.
Amatilia.— Matthews, Ethnog. and Philol., 35, 38,
1877. Awatiohai-Echpou.— Maximilian, Voy. dans
rint. de I'Am., iii. 2. 1843. Awatichay.— Maxi-
milian, Trav., 178, 1843.
Amatpan. A former Chitimacha vil-
lage on Bayou Gris, in St Marys parish.
La., 3 m. E. of Charenton, on the shore of
Grand lake.
Amatpan namu.— Gatschet in Trans. Anthrop.
Soc. Wash*., II, 151,1883 (n<tmM=' village ').
Amaxa. A pueblo of New Mexico in
1598, doubtless situated in the Salinas in
the vicinity of Abo, and evidently occu-
Eied by Tigua or Piros. — Ofiate (1598) in
>oc. In^d., XVI, 114, 1871.
Amber' Beads, Alaska
Amaye. A town and province visited
by the De Soto expedition in 1542; situ-
ated probably in extreme s. w. Arkan-
sas.— Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French,
Hist. Colh La., ii, 195, 1850.
Amay.— Harris, Voy. and Trav., i, 810, 1706.
Amber. A fossilized vegetable resin
occurring in small quantities in the more
recent geological formations in many
parts of the continent. So far as known
it was little used by the aborigines, ex-
cepting the ;&kimo of
Alaska, who valued it
for beads and other
small ornaments.
These people obtained
it from the alluvium of
the Yukon delta and
from the Tertiary for-
mations of the Fox ids. Murdoch (9th
Rep. B. A. E., 1892) illustrates a string of
four small amber beads obtained from the
Pt Barrow Eskimo. See also Kunz, Gems
and Precious Stones, 1890. (w. h. h.)
Amdowapnskiyapi ( ' those who lay meat
on their shoulders to dry it during the
hunt ' ). A Sisseton band or subtribe. —
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 1897.
Amediche. A tribe, probably Caddoan,
that lived about 68 leagues w. of Natchi-
toches, in E. Texas.^ La Harpe stated that
in 1714-16 they were at war with the
Natchitoches, and that the Spaniards had
established a settlement among them a
few years previously, but soon aban-
doned it. (a. c. f. )
Amedichez.— La Harpe (1719) in Margry, D6c., vi,
266, 1886.
Amen ( A * men ) . A village or a group of
3 adjacent villages of the Yurok on the
coast 6 m. N. of the mouth of Klamath
r., Cal., their northernmost habitation.
(A.L. K.)
Amerdlok (*the smaller one,* referring
generally to a bay near a larger one). An
Eskimo village in w. Greenland, lat. 67°. —
Nansen, Firet Crossing, map, 1890.
American Horse. An Oglala Sioux chief,
known in his tribe as Wasechun-tashunka.
He was probably the son or nephew of
the American Horse who went out with
Sitting Bull in the Sioux war and was
killed at Slim buttes, S. Dak., Sept. 29,
€875. As speaker for the tribe he signed
the treaty secured by the Crook commis-
sion in 1887, by which the Sioux reserva-
tion in Dakota was reduced by one-half.
Nearly half the tribe objected to the ces-
sion, alleging that the promises of the
commissioners could not be depended on,
and the malcontents, excited by the mes-
sianic craze that had recently reached the
Sioux and by the killing of Sitting Bull,
its chief exponent among them, in 1890,
withdrew from the council and prepared
to fight the Government. The expected
benefits of the treaty proved illusory.
BULL. 30]
AMERIND — AMINOY A
49
While the tribe were gathered at the
agency to treat with the commissioners,
their great herds of cattle destroyed their
growing crops and were subsequently
stolen. The signers expected that the
rations of beef that had been cut off by
the Government would be restored, and
the agent began to issue the extra rations.
In the following year, when drought had
ruined the new crop, authority to increase
the rations having been withheld, they
were reduced at the most unseasonable
time. The Sioux were actually starving
when the malcontent^ took their arms
and went out to the bad-lands to dance
themselves into the exalted state neces-
sary for the final struggle with the whites.
American Horse and other friendlies in-
duced them to submit, and the episode
would have been concluded \fithout fur-
ther bloodshed hadnotacoUision occurred
between some raw troojis and Big Foot's
band after its surrender. In 1891 Ameri-
can Horse headed the delegation from
Pine Ridge to Washington, composed of
leaders of both the friendly and the lately
hostile party, and the conferences resulted
in the issue of living rations and in fairer
treatment of the Sioux, (f. h.)
Amerind. A word compose<l of the
first syllables of "American Indian,"
suggeste^l in 1899 by an Amerii^an lexi-
cographer as a substitute for the inap-
propriate terms used to designate the
race of man inhabiting the New World
before its occupancy by Europeans.
The convenience of such derivatives as
Amerindic, Amerindize, Amerindian,
proto-Amerind, pre-Amerindic, pseudo-
Amerind, etc., argues in favor of the new
word. The introduction of "Amerind"
was ureed by the late Maj. J. W. Powell,
and it has tlie support of several anthro-
pologists. A plea by Dr W J McGee for
its general adoption appeared in 1900 in
the Journal of the Anthropological In-
stitute of Great Britain. The use of
** Amerind" at the International Con-
gress of Americanists in New York, Oct.,
1902, occasioned a discussion (Science,
n. 8., XVI, 892, 1902) in which it was sup-
ported by some and attacked by others.
The name, nevertheless, has found ita
way into both scientific and popular litera-
ture, (a. f. c.)
Ametsilhacaamanc ( ^ mouth of the sandy
arroyo'). A rancheria, probably Coch-
imi, connected with Purfsima mission.
Lower California, in the 18th century. —
Doc. Hist Mex., 4th b., v, 190, 1857.
Amiooa. Mentioned by Coxe ( Carol ana,
14, 1741) as a tribe on the Honabanou,
an imaginary river entering the Missis-
sippi from the w., 15 leagues above the
mouth of the Ohio. It is probably an
imaginary tribe.
Bull. 30—05 1
Amikwa (from amik, 'beaver'). An
Algonquian tribe found by the French on
the N. shore of L. Huron, opposite Mani-
toulin id., where they were located in the
Jesuit Relations at various dates up to
1672. Bacqueville de la Potherie (Hist.
Am. Sept., 1753) says that they and the
Nipissing once inhabited the shores of
L. Nipissing, and that they rendered
themselves masters of all the other na-
tions in those quarters until disease made
great havoc among them and the Iroquois
compelled the remainder of the tribe to
betake themselves, some to the French
settlements, others to L. Superior and to
Green bay of L. Michigan. In 1740 a
remnant had retired to Manitoulin id.
Chauvignerie, writing in 1736, says of the
Nipissing: "The armorial bearings of this
nation are, the heron for the Acnagu6 or
Heron tril)e, the beaver for the Ame-
ko8es [Amikwa], the birch for the Bark
tribe. ' ' The reference may possi bly l)e to
a gens only of the Nipissing and not to the
Amikwa tribe, yet the evidently close re-
lation between the latter and the Nipis-
sing justifies the belief that the writer
alluded to the Amikwa as known to his-
tory. They claimed in 1673 to be allies
of the Nipissing. (.i. m. c. t. )
Amehouest— Heriot. Travels, 197, 1H07. Ame-
ko8ea.— Chauvignerie (1736) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., ix.ia'S.i, lSiV5. Anuoawaes.— Boyd, Ind. Local
Names, 3, 1885. Amioois.— Doc. of 1693 in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hi.st., IX, 566, 1855. Amiooues.— Jes. Rel. 1671,
25, ia58. Amicoure*.— Jes. Rel. 1670, 79, 1858. Ami-
coun.—Heriot.Trav.. 194.1807. Amio-wayi.^Bovd,
Ind. Local Names. 3. 1885. Amihouis.— Colden
(1727) . Five Nations, 86. 1747. Amikois. — N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., IX. 722, 18.5,5. Ainikone8.^McKennevand
Hall, Ind. Tribes, iii, 81. 1854. Amikoiiai.^Jes.
Rel. 1640, 34, 18.58. Amikoiiaa.— Perrot (ra. 1700),
Mt^m.. 20. 1864. Amikouek.— Jes. Rel. 1648, 62, 1858.
Amikoues.— (tall i nee (166^70) in Maivry, D6c., i,
162, 1875. k Mikoueat.— La Potherie. Hist. 1' Am^r.,
II, 48, 1753 (misprint). Amikouest— Ibid., 58.
AmikoueU.— Neill in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 403,
1885. Amikouis.— Jefferys, Fr. Doms., pt. 1, 47,1761.
Amikouya.— Charievoix (1743), Voy.. Ii, 47, 1761.
Beaver (Indiana).— Shea, Catholic Mission.^, 366,
1855. Oaator.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes,
III, 81, 1854. Nais Percea.— Je.s. Rel. 1636, 92, 18S8.
Nation du Oaator. — Ibid. Nation of the Beaver. —
Jeflferys. French Dom.s. Am., pt, 1, 47, 1761. Neda-
pcrccs.— Jes. Rel. 1657, 11. 1858. HfiSsEAZCfta.—
Charievoix. Hi.st. New France, Shea ed., iii, 130,
1872. Nez Percez.— Ibid., 119. Omikouea.— Rasles
{ca. 172:^) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., vili, 251,
1819. Ounikanes.— Chauvignerie (1736) quoted by
Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, in, 554. 1863 (misprint.)
Amilcon. Mentioned by Iberville in
connection with the Biloxi, Moctobi,
Huma, Paskagula, etc., as a small tribe
E. of the lower Mississippi in 1699 (Mar-
gry, D^c, IV, 155, 1880) ; not identified.
Aminoya. A province or village, possi-
bly Siouan, situated in 1542 on the w.
bank of the Mississippi, probablv a short
distance below the mouth of Arkansas r.
It was here the remnant of De Soto*s fol-
lowers, under the leadership of Moscoso,
embarke<l for Mexico ((larcilasso de la
Vega, Florida, 222, 1723). The people
50
AMITOK AMUSEMENTS
[B. A. B.
were probably related to the Qnapaw; if
not, they may have been Caddoan.
Aminoia.— La Salle (1679) in Margry, D^c, ii, 41,
1877. Daminoia.— Hennepin (168:1), Shea trans.,
163. 1880. Minoia.— Coxe, Carolana, 22, 1741. Mi-
noya.— Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist.
Ck)ll. La., II, 206. 1850.
Amitok ( ^narrow' ) . A winter settlement
of the Amitormiut on the e. coast of Mel-
ville peninsula.
Amitiffttke.— Gilder. Schwatka'.s Search, 181,1881.
Amitioke.— I»arry, Second Voy.. 206, 1824. Amit-
tioke.— Ibid., map. 197. Amitoq.— Boan in 6th
Rep. B. A. K., map. 1888. Amityook.— Lyon, Pri-
vate Jonr., 406, 1825.
Amitormint (* inhabitants of the nar-
row place.' — Boa«). An Eskimo tribe on
the E. (joast of Melville penin. Their
principal village is Amitok, from which
they take their name. — Gilder, Schwat-
ka's Search, 181, 1881.
Amivik. An Angmagsalingmiut settle-
ment on Angmagsalik fiord, e. Green-
land.— Holm, Kthnol. Skizze af Angmag-
salikerne, 14, 1887.
Ammoncongan. A village, probably be-
longing to the Abnaki, on the n. k. side of
Presumpscot r., at Saccarappa falls, Cum-
berland CO., Me. — Deed of 1657 in Me.
Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 118, 1865.
Aumoughoawgen.— Smith (1616) in Ma^s. Hist. Soc.
("oil., 3d 8., VI, 97, 18.S7. Aumuokoawgen.— Ibid.,
117. Aumughcawgcn.— Smith (1631). ibid., in, 22,
1833.
Amo. A imeblo of the province of
Atripuy in the region of the lower part
of the' Rio (irande, N. Mex., in 1598.—
Onate (1598) in Doc. Iiu'd., xvi, 115, 1871.
Amolomol ( .1 md'lom6l ) . A former Chu-
mashan village at the old wharf at Santa
Barbara, Cal. — Henshaw, Buenaventura
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
Amonces. A tribe or division, presum-
ably of the Yokuts, said to have lived on
San JoaM^ii" r-> ^'^1., in 1854. — Henlevin
Ind. Aff. Rep., 512, 1854.
Amonokoa. A ])and of the Illinois
about 1680. — Hennepin, New Disc, 810,
1698.
Amanakoa.— I^ Salle (lf>sO) <iuoted in Hist. Majf..
ms.,V, 197. 1861.
Amoqne. A former Maricopa rancheria
on (lila r., s. Ariz, — Sedelmair (1744)
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex.,
366, 1889.
Amoskeag (namoi< 'small fish,' kkuj 'to
take': 'one takes small fish'). A small
tribe or band of the Pennacook confed-
eracy, living about 1675 in a village of
the same name at Amoskeag falls, on Mer-
rimac r., in Hillsboro co., N. H. This
village was the residence of Wannalanset,
head chief of the Pennacook confederacy,
son of Passaconnawav.
Amoskeag.— Hubbard (1680) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 2d 8., v, 32, 1815. Naamhok.— Gookin (1677)
in Trans. Am. Antiq, Soc., ii, 462, 1836. Naam-
keeka.— Gookin (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st
s., I, 149. 1806. Namao«keag».— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, v, 221, la^o. Namaaohaug.— Owaneco (1700)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 614, 1854. Namaske.—
Eliot (m. 1650) in Mas.s. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s.,
IV, 123,1834. Namekeake.— Gookin (1677) quoted
by Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 2, 115, 1848 (near Chelms-
ford, Mass.; same?). Namkeake— Gookin (1677) in
Trans. Am. Antiq. Smr., ii, 518, 1836 (same?).
Ampalamnyn. A Lakmiut band near
Luckiamute r., Greg. — Gatschet, Lakmiut
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1877.
Ampishtna. The' Lakmiut name of a
band of the Calapooya proper, resid-
ing E. of upper Willamette r., Oreg. —
Gatschet, Lakmiut MS., B. A. E., 1877.
Amn (ArrnV). The Ant clan of the
Pecos tribe of New Mexico. — Hodge, field
notes, B. A. E., 1895.
Amulet. See Fetish.
Amasaya. Mentioned as a Timucua
clan of the Apohola phratry.— Pareja
{ca. 1612) quoted bv Gatschet in Am.
Philos. Soc. Proc, xvii, 492, 1878.
Amusements. When not bound down
by stern necessity, the Indian at home
was occupied much of the time with
dancing, feasting, gaming, and story-tell-
ing. Though most of the dances were
religious or otherwise ceremonial in
character, there were some which had
no other purpose than that of social
pleasure. They might take place in the
day or the night, l)e general or confined
to particular societies, and usually were
accompanied with the drum or other
musical instrument to • accentuate the
song. The rattle was perhaps invariably
use<l only in ceremonial dances. Many
dances were of pantomimic or dramatic
character, and the Eskimo had regular
pantomime plays, though evidently due
to Indian influence. The giving of pres-
ents was often a feature of the dance, as
wa.s betting of all athletic contests and
ordinary games. The amusements of the
Eskimo and extreme northern tribes were
chiefly athletic, such as racing, wrestling,
throwing of heavy stones, and tossing in a
blanket. From Hudson bay to the Gulf
of Mexico, and from the Atlantic to the
lK)rder of the plains, the great athletic
game was the ball play, now adopted
among civilized games under the name
of Idcrosse. In the N. it was played with
one racket, and in the S. with two. Ath-
letes were regularly trained for this game,
and competitions were frequently' in-
tertribal. The wheel-and-stick game in
one form or another was well-nigh uni-
versal. As played in the E. one gamester
rolled forward a stone disk, or wheel,
while his opponent slid after it a stick
curved at one end in such a way that the
wheel, when it fell to the ground, rested
within the crook of the stick. On the
plains and in the S. W. a wooden wheel,
frequently netted, took the place of the
stone disk. Like most Indian institu-
tions, the game often had a symbolic sig-
nificance in connection with a sun myth.
A sacred variant of the game was played
by the priests for divinatory purposes, or
even as a sort of votive ceremony to pro-
cure the recovery of a patient. Target
BULL. 30]
AMU8HUNGKWA ANADARKO
51
practice with arrows, knives, or hatchets^
thrown from the hand, as well as with the
bow or rifle, was also universal anDong
the warriors and boys of the various
tribes. The gaming arrows were of
special design and ornamentation, and
the game iteelf had often a svmbolic
purpose. Horse races, frequently inter-
trilMil, were prominent amusements,
especially on the plains, during the warm
season, and foot races, often elaborately
ceremonial in character, were common
among the sedentary agricultural tribes,
particularly the Pueblos and the Wichita.
Games resembling dice and hunt-t he-
button were found everywhere and were
played by both sexes alike, particularly
m the tipi or the wigwam dunng the long
winter nights. The dice, or their equiva-
lents, were of stone, bone, fruit seeds,
shell, wood, or reed, variously shaped and
marked. They were thrown from the
hand or from a small basket or wooden
bowl. One form, the awl game, confined
to the women, was played around a
blanket, which had various tally marks
along the border for marking the prog-
ress of the game. The hunt-the-button
games were usually accompanied with
songs and rhythmic movements of the
hands and boiiy, intended to confuse the
pjarties whose task was to guess the loca-
tion of the button. Investigations by
Culin show a close correspondence be-
tween these Indian games and those of
China, Japan, Korea, and northern Asia.
Special women's games were shinny,
football, and the deer-foot game, be-
sides the awl game already noted. In
football the main object was to keep the
ball in the air as long as possible by kick-
ing it upward. The deer-foot game was
played, sometimes also by men, with a
number of perforated bones from a deer's
foot, strung upon a beaded cord, having a
needle at one end. The purpose was to
toss the bones in such a way as to catch
a particular one upon the end of the
needle.
Among the children there were target
shooting, stilts, slings, and tops for the
boys, and buckskin dolls and playing-
house for the girls, with "wolf" or
"catcher," and various forfeit plays, in-
cluding a bi:eath-holding test. Uats'-cra-
dles, or string figures, as well as shuttle-
cocks and buzzes, were common. As
among civilized nations, the children
found the greatest delight in imitating
the occupations of the elaers. Numerous
references to amusements among the va-
rious tribes may be found throughout the
annual reports of the Bureau of American
Ethnology. Consult especially Games of
the American Indians, by Stewart CuHn,
24th Rep. B. A. E., 1905. See BaU play,
Dance, Games, (j. m.)
Amushungkwa. A former pueblo of the
Jemez on a mesa w. of the Hot Springs,
about 12 m. n. of Jemez pueblo, N.
Mex. It was abandoned prior to the
revolt of 1680. See Patoqua,
Amo-thium-qua.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
III, pt. 1, 127, 1890. Amo-xium-qua.— Bandelier
(1888) in Proe. Intemat. Cong. Am-., vn, 452, 1890.
Amoxunqua.— Z&rate-Salmeron (m. 1629) in Land
of Sunshine, 183, Feb., 1900. Amozunque.— Ban-
delier in Arch. Inst. Papers, ni, pt. 1, 127, 1890.
Amuahungkwa.— Hodge, field-notes, B. A. E., 1895.
Amntaja. A former village, presuma-
bljr Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Ana. The Tobacco clan of the Zufli.
Ana-kwe.— Gushing in 13th Rep. B. A. E.. 368, 1896
(A:M;e=' people').
Ana. A village of 70 Papago in 1865,
probably in Pima co., s. Ariz. — Ind.
Aff. Rep., 135, 1865.
Anacbnc. A Chumashan village w. of
Pueblo de las Canoas (San Buenaven-
tura), Ventura co., Cal., in 1542.— Ca-
brillo (1542) in Smith, Coll. Doc. Fla.,
181, 1857.
Anaoarok.— Cabrillo (juoted by Taylor in ('al.
Farmer, Apr. 17, 1863. Anacbue.— Ibid.
Anacharaqna. A village in Florida,
subject to Utina, chief of the Timucua, in
1564. The De Bry map places it e. of
lower St Johns r.
bcharaqua.— Laudonni^re (1564) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 243, 1869. Anachatagua.—
Barcia, Ensayo, 48, 1723. Onachaquara.— De Bry,
map (1591) in Le Moyne, Narr., Appleton trans.,
1875 (transposed?).
Anachorema. A village visited by La
Salle in 1687. According to Douay ( Shea,
Discov. Miss., 210, 1852) it was on the.
"first Cane r." n. e. of LaSalle's Ft St
Louis on St Bernard (Matagorda) bay,
Texas. Thwaites (Hennepin, New Dis-
cov., II, 420, 1903) regards the stream as
probably the Rio Colorado of Texas.
Anacoac. A Chumashan villi^e be-
tween Goletaand Pt Conception, Cal., in
1542.— Cabrillo (1542) inSmith, Coll. Doc.
Fla., 189, 1857.
Almaooac.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 17, 1863.—
Anaooat— Cabrillo, op. cit., 183.
Anacot. A Chumashan village between
Goleta and Pt Conception, Cal., in 1542
(Cabrillo (1542) in Smith, Coll. Doc, 183,
1857) ; evidently distinct from Anacoat.
Anadarko (from Nddd'ko, their own
name ) . A tribe of the Caddo confederacy
whose dialect was spoken by the Kado-
hadacho, Hainai, and Adai. The earliest
mention of the people is in the relation of
Biedma(1544), who writes that Moscoeo in
1542 led his men during their southward
march through a province that lay e. of
the Anadarko. The territory occupied
by the tribe was s. w. of the Kadohadacho.
Their villages were scattered along Trin-
ity and Brazos rs., Tex., higher up than
those of the Hainai, and do not seem to
have been visited so early as theirs by the
French. A Spanish mission was ^tab-
52
ANAGNAK ANALOG
[b. a. e.
lished among the Anadarko early in the
18th century, but was soon abandoned.
La Harpe reached an Anadarko village in
1719, and was kindly received. The peo-
ple shared in the general friendliness for
the French. During the contentions of the
latter with the Spaniards and later with
the English, throughout the 18th century,
the Anadarko suffered greatly. They be-
came embroiled in tribal wars; their vil-
lages were abandoned; and those who
survived the havoc of war and the new
diseases brought into the country by the
white lieople were forced to seek shelter
and safetv with their kindred toward the
N. E. In 1812 a village of 40 men and 200
souls was reported on Sabine r. The Ana-
darko lived in villages, having fixed habi-
tations similar to those of the other tribes
of the Caddo confederacy, to whom they
were evidently also similar in customs,
beliefs, and clan organization. Nothing
is known definitely of the subdivisions
of the tribe, but that such existeil is prob-
able from the fact that the people were
scattered over a considerable territory and
lived in a number of villages. They are
now incorporated with the Caddo on the
allotted Wichita res. in Oklahoma. The
town of Anadarko perpetuates the tribal
name. (a. c. f. )
Ah maudah kas.— Parker (1855) quoted bv
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 682. 1855. Ah-nan-
dah-kas.— Parker, Texas, 213, 185G. Ahnaudahkas.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 712, 1855. Ahnauda-
ka».— Keane in Stanford, Comp., 499, 1878. Aman-
daiooes.— Neighbors in H. R. Doc. 100, 29th Cong..
2d sess., 3. 1847. Ana-da-ca.~Sen., Ex. Conf. Doc.
13, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 1, 1846. Anadaghooes.—
Alvord in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18, 40th Cong.. 3d sess.,
7, 1869. Anadahcoe.— Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1^56, 184, 1857.
An-a-dah-ha».— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 518,
1851. An-a-dah-kas.— Ind. Aflf. Rep., 28. 1848.
Anadahkoes.— Ibid.. 177. Anadahkos.— Ibid., 1856,
14, 1857. Anadakai.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi,
686, 1857. An-a-dak-has.— Marey quoted by
Schoolcraft, ibid., v, 712, 1855. Anadakkas.—
Ibid. Anadako.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 43,
1884. Anadako'8.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am.,
460, 1885 (name of agency). Anadaku.— Gatschet,
Caddo and Yatassi MS. , 42, B. A. E. Anadaroos.—
BoUaert in Ethnol. Soc. Lond. Joum., ii, 283, 1850.
Anadarko. —Dorsey, Caddo MS., B. A. E., 1882.
Anadarko*8.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 460.
1885. Anadogheos.— Alvord in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18,
40th Cong., 3d sess., 6, 1869. Anadorkoes.— H. R.
Rep. 82. 44th Cong., 2d sess., 2, 1877. An-ah-dah-
koes.— Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1859, 267, 1860. An-ah-dah-
kos.— Ibid., 310. Anahdakas.-*Marcy, Army Life,
171, 1866. Anandarkocs.— Smithson. Misc. Coll.,
II, 49. 1862. Andaico*.— Ind. Aflf. Rep., 261. 1851.
Andaroos.— Latham, Es.«iays, 401, 1860. And-dai-
cow.— Ind. Aflf. Rep., 263. 1851. Anduioo.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 403, 1853. Annadahkoes.—
Ind. Aflf. Rep. ia54, 367, 1855. Anna-darcoes.—
Ibid., 1849, 33, 1850. Anndggho'*.— Alvord (1868)
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18, 40th Cong., 3d sess., 9, 1869.
An-no-dar-ooes. - Butler and Lewis (1846) in H.
R. Doc. 76, 29th Cong.. 2d sess., 7, 1847. Madaha.—
Schoolcraft., Ind. Tribes, vi, 686, 1857. Mon-
daque.— Philippeaux, Map of Eng. Col., 1781
(misprint). Madaoo.— Joutel (1687) in Margry,
D6c., II, 410, 1878. Nadacoc.— Jefferys (1763),
Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Hadaooe.— De PIsle,
map in Winsor, Hist. Am., ii, 294, 1886. Nada-
cogt.— Mezi^res (1778) quoted by Bancroft,
No. Mex. States, i, 661, 1886. Nadaho.-Joutel
(1687) in Margry, D^c, ill, 409, 1878. KidaTco.—
Mooney, MS. Caddo notes, B. A. E., 1891.
Nadako*s.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 374,
1885. Nadaku.— Gatschet, Caddo and Yatassi
MS., 65, B. A. E. Nadaku hayanu.— Gatschet,
Caddo MS., B. A. E. (Caddo name). Ha-
datcho.— Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c., in, 409,
1878 (probably the Anadarko). xfadooogs.— Morfi
quoted by Charlevoix, New Fr., iv, 80, 1870.
Nandacaho.— Biedma in Hakluyt Soc. Pubs., ix,
197, 1851. Nandako.— Latham, Essays, 402, 1860.
Nandakoes.— P^nieaut (1701) in French, Hirt.
Coll. La., n. s., i, 73, 1869. Handaquees.— Scher-
merhom (1812)ln Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., ii, 24, 1814.
Nandaquies.— Brown, W. Gaz., 214, 1817. Hando-
quies.— Ibid., 215. Narako*8.— ten Kate, Reizen
in N. Am.. 374. 1885. Naudacho.— Biedma ( 1544) in
French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 108. 1850. Nau-do-quet.—
Brackenridge, Views of La.. 81, 1815. Nondacao.—
Gentl.of Elvas (1539) in Hakluvt Soc. Pubs., ix,
135, 1851. Nondaoo.— Joutel (1687) in Margry,
D<5c., III. 409. 1878. Kondaque.— Jeflferys (1763),
Am. Atlas, map 5. 1776. Onadahkos.— Ind. Aff.
Rep.. 903, 1846. Onadaioas.— Butler and Lewis
01W.— Le Branche (1839) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 14, 82d
Cong., 2d sess., 27, 1853. TTnataqnas.— Bonnell,
Texas, 140, 1840.
Anagnak. An Eskimo village of the
Nushegagmiut on Wood r., Alaska; pop.
87 in 1880.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E.,
map, 1899.
Anaknak.— Petroflf, Rep. on Alaska, 47, 1884.
Anagok. An Eskimo village of the
Kuskwogmiut tribe, Alaska, on the coast
near C. Avinof; pop. 75 in 1880.
Anogogmute.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map,
1899. Anogokmute.— Petroflf, Rep. on Alaska, 54,
1884.
Anaham. A band of the Tsilkotin,
numbering 216 in 1901, occupying a val-
ley near Chih^otin r., 60 m. from its
mouth in British Columbia. — Can. Ind.
Aff., 162, 1902.
Amahim.— Can. Ind. Aflf., 271. 1889. Anahem.—
Ibid., 415, 1898. Anahim.— Ibid., 314, 1892. Ana-
him'* tribe.— Ibid., 190, 1884.
Anakwaikona. An outcast element for-
merly existing among the Zufii who were
the servants, if not in many cases the
slaves, of the intramural or city popula-
tion.— Cushing in Proc. Intemat. Cong.
Am., VII, 176, 1890.
A-wa-na-kwai-k*7a-ko-na.— Cu.shing, ibid.
Analao. A tribe, possibly Caddoan,
formerly residing* on Washita r., Ark.
Deputies from the Analao and Tanicp
(Tonica) came to the village of Cahayno-
houa in 1687, when Joutel and the other
survivors of La Salle's party were there
while on their way from the Red r. of
Louisiana to the Mississippi. See Joutel
in French, Hist. Coll. I^., i, 172, 1846;
Douav quoted by Shea, Discov. Miss.
Val.,*223, 1903. (a. c. f.)
Analao.— Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741.
Analco. A prehistoric pueblo of the
Tewa at the place where there is now
the so-called •* oldest house,** adjacent to
San Miguel chapel, in Santa F^, N. Mex.
According to Bandelier this name was
first applied in the 18th century. Ritch
(N. Mex., 153, 196, 1885) asserts that
the house referred to formed part of the
old pueblo, and that two of the old wom-
en then living therein claimed to be
BULL. 301
ANAMAS — ANATOMY
53
lineal descendants of the original occu-
pants (p. 113). Bandelier, however, in-
clines to the opinion (Arch. Inst. Papers,
I, 19, 1881; IV, 89, 1892) that the struc-
ture dates from Spanish times, a belief
substantiated by E. L. Hewett, in 1902,
when the building was partly dismantled
and found to be of Spanish construction,
excepting about 18 inches of the founda-
tion walls which were of Pueblo work.
Anamas. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.'
Anamic. A former rancheria, probably
Papago, visited by Father Kino in 1701 ;
situated in n. w. Sonora, Mexico, between
Busanic and Sonoita. See Bibi/ina.
Bta Ana Anamio.— Kino (1701) quoted bv Ban-
croft, No. Mex. States, i, 497, 1884.
Anamiewatigong ( ' at the tree of prayer, '
i. e., the cross, from a large wooden cross
planted by one of the early missionaries
on the bluff where the* village now
stands. — Kelton). An Ottawa village in
Emmet co., lower Michigan. It is called
La Croix by the French, and Cross Village
by the Americans, both conveying the
same idea as the Indian name.
OroM Villafe.— Detroit treaty (1855) in U. S.
Ind. Treaties. 614. 1873. La CroU.— Kelton, Ft.
Mackinac, 146, 1884.
Anamis. A village visite<l by La Salle
in 1686 on his first journey from Ft St
Louis, on Matagorda bay, Tex., to search
overland for the Mississippi, and again in
1687 on his last journey north wani. The
people seem to have lived in the vicinity
of tne Caddoan tribes, but their ethnic
relationship is uncertain. See Cavelier
in Shea, Ilarly Voy., 40, 1861. Cf. .Ira-
nama. (a. c. f. )
Anames.— Rivera, Diario, leg. 2,602, 1736.
Anamon. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Tavlor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Anamifok (*having smell [of walrus
dung]*; old dialei't). A former Eskimo
village in e. Greenland, about lat. 63°
10^; pop. 20 in 1829.— Graah, Exped.,
map, 1837.
A2uimitiing ('having smell [of walrus
dung] ' ). A winter village of tne Kingua
branch of Okomiut in Baffin land at the
head of Cumberland sd. (Boas in 6th
Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888); pop. 43 in
1883.
Annanatook.— Howgate, CruLse of Florence, 33,
1877. AnnaBetoote.— Wareham in Jour.Geog. Soc.
I^nd., XII, 24, 1842.
Anasitoh. A Kusan village or tribe on
the s. side of Coos bay, coast of Oregon.—
Milhau, MS. Coos Bay vocab., B. A. E.
Haa-]iayMtoh.~Milhau, MS. Letter to Gibbs, B.
A. £. (Haunaysetch and Melukitz are names
given to Coos bay).
Anaskenoans. A village of the Powha-
tan confederacy of Virginia, situated in
1608 on Rappanannock r., in the present
Caroline co. — Smith (1629), Virginia,
map, repr. 1819.
Anatichapko (AnAti-ch&pko 'long thick-
et*). A former Creek village on a x. trib-
utary of Hillabee cr., a branch of Talla-
jMiosa r., Ala. A battle occurred there
during the Creek or Red Stick war, Jan.
24, 1814.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i,
126, 1884.
Anati tchapko.— Gatschet, op. cit., i. 126. 1884.
Au-net-te cbap-co.— Hawkins (17W), Sketch, 43,
1848. Enitachopko.— Pickett. Hist Ala., ii. 330,
1851. Enotochopco.— Seh(H)lcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi,
371. 1857. Enotoohopko.— Drake, Bk. Inds., bk.
4, 59, 1848. Long Swamp.— Gatschet, op. cit.
Anatomy. While the American Indians
show many minor and even some im-
portant physical variations, and can be
separated into several physical types,
they present throughout the continent so
many features in common that they may
properly be regarded as one great race,
admitting of a general anatomical de-
scription. The Eskimo form a distinct
sulvrace of the Mongolo-Malay and must
be treated separately.
The Indian, in many of his anatomical
characters, stands between the white and
tlie negro. His skin is of various shades
of brown, tinge<l in youth, particularly
in the cheeks, with the red of the circu-
lating blood. The term "red Indian"
is a misnomer. Very dark individualsol
a hue approaching chocolate or even the
color or some negroes are found in more
primitive tribes, especially in the iS. and
among the old men, who often went
nearly naked. Most women and school
children or others who wear clothing and
live a more civilize<l life are lighter in
color. Prolonged exposure to the ele-
ments tends, as with whites, to darken
the skin. The darkest parts of the skin
are ordinarily the back of the hands,
wrists, and neck, the axillae, nipples,
peritoneal regions, and the exposed parts
of the feet. A newlx)rn infant is of vary-
ing degrees of dusky red.
The color of the hair is generally black,
with the luster and slight bluish or
brownish tinge that occurs among whites,
not the dull grayish black of the Afri-
can negro. With many individuals of
all ages above early childhood who go
much with bare head the hair becomes
partly bleached, especially superficially,
turning to a rusty hue.
The color of the eyes varies from hazel-
brown to dark brown. The conjunctiva
in the young is bluish; in adults, espe-
cial Iv the old, dirty-yellowish. The iris
is often surrounded with a narrow but
clearly marked ring.
The skin appears to be slightly thicker
than that of the whites. The nonnal
corrugations on the back of the hand and
wrist are from childhood decidedly more
pronounced in Indians of both sexes.
54
ANATOMY
[B. A. I.
The hair of the head is straight, almost
circular in cross-section, slightly coarser
than in the average white, rather abun-
dant and long. The range of variation
in natural length is from 40 to 100 cm., or
18 in. to 36 in. Most male Indians would
have a slight to moderate mustache and
some beard on the chin if they allowed
the hair to grow; but side whiskers in
many are absent, or nearly so. Both
mustache and chin beard are scarcer and
coarser than with the whites, straight,
of the same black as the hair, and in
length 4 to 7 cm., or IJ in. to 2i in.
The hair in the axillae and on the pubis
is moderate in quantity, in some instances
nearly absent, and on the rest of the body
hairs are shorter and less abundant than
with the average white person. The
nails are dull bluish in hue and moder-
ately tough.
The face is well rounded and agreeable
in childhood, interesting and occasionally
handsome during adolescence and earlier
adult life, and agreeable but much
wrinkled in old age. The forehead in
adults with undeformed skulls is some-
what low and in males slopes slightly
backward. The eyebrows, where not
plucked, are frequently connected by
sparser hair above the nose. The eye-
lashes are moderately thick and long. ^
The apertures of the eyes are slightly
oblique, the outer canthi, especially the
right one, being the higher. In children
the fold called Mongolic is general, but
not excessive. The root of the nose is
usually depressed, as in most whites.
The size and shape of the nose vary
much, but it is commonly slightly
shorter at the base and relatively wider
than in whites, with an aquiline bridge
predominating in men. In many men
the point of tne nose is lower than the
base of the septum, the distal length
exceeding the proximal. This peculiarity
is especialljf frequent in some tribes. In
women the' nasal depression is wider and
oftener shallower, and the bridge lower.
Thin noses are not found. The lips are
well formed and, barring individual
exceptions, about as thick as in average
whites. Prognathism is greater than in
whites. The malars are in both sexes
somewhat large and prominent; this
becomes especially apparent in old age
when much of the adipose tissue below
them is gone. The cnin often appears
less prominent than in whites, but this
effect is due to the greater alveolar pro-
trusion. The ears are well formed and
of good size, occasionally somewhat thick.
The neck is of fair dimensions, never
very long or thin.
The body as a rule is of good propor-
tions, symmetrical, and, except in old age,
straight and well nourished. The chest
is of ample size, especially in men. The
abdomen, which in children is often
rather large, retains but slight fulness
in later life. The pelvis, on account of
the ample chest, appears somewhat small,
but is not so by actual measurement.
The spinal curves are only moderate, as
are the size and prominence of the but-
tocks. The thighs are rather shapely;
the calves are usually smaller than m
whites. The upper limbs are of good
shape and medium musculature. The
feet and hands are well molded and in
many tribes smaller than they ordi-
narily are in whites. The toes are rather
short, and, where the people walk much
barefoot or in sandals, show more or less
separation. The proximal parts of the
second and third toes are often confluent.
In the more sedentary tribes the women,
and occasionally also the men, are in-
clined to corpulence. The breasts of
women are of medium size; in the child-
less the conical form predominates; the
nipple and areola are more pronounced
than in whites; in later life the breasts
become small and flaccid. The genital
organs do not differ essentially from those
of the whites.
The Indian skull is, on the average,
slightly smaller than that of whites of
equal height. Cranial capacity in men
ranges from 1,300 to 1,500c. c; in women
from about 1,150 to 1,350 c. c. The
frontal region in men is often low and
sloping, the sagittal region elevated, the
occipital region marked with moderate
ridges and, in the dolichocephalic, pro-
truding. . Sutures are mostly less serrated
than in whites; metopism, except in some
localities, is rare, and occipital division is
uncommon, while malar division is very
rare and parietal division extremely so.
Intercalated bones are few in undeformed
crania; in deformed crania they are more
numerous. The glabella, supraorbital
ridges, and mastoids in male skulls are
weH-developed and sometimes heavy; in
women they are small or of medium size.
The nasal bridge is occasionally low, the
nasal spine smaller than in whites; the.
lower borders of the nasal aperture are
not often sharp, but nasal gutters are
rare; subnasal loss* are rather common.
Orbits are of fair volume, approaching
the quadrilateral, with angles rounded.
Malars are often large, submalar depres-
sions medium or shallow. The upper
alveolar process, and occasionally also the
lower, snows in both sexes a degree of
prognathism greater than the average in
whites, but less than in the negro. The
protrusion on the whole is somewhat
greater in the females. The face is meso-
or ortho-gnathic. The lower jaw varies
greatly. The chin is of moderate promi-
nence, occasionally high, sometimes
BULL, i
ANATOMY
55
square in form. The prominence of the
angles in full-grown males is not infre-
quently pronounced.
As to base structures, the foramen mag-
num is seldom large, and its ixjsition and
inclination are very nearly the same as
in whites; the styloid process is mostly
smaller than in whites and not infre-
quently rudimentary; petrous portions
on the average are less depressed l)elow
the level of neighboring parts than in
whites; anterior lacerate<l foramina are
smaller; the palate is well formed and
fairly spacious, mostly parabolic, occa-
sionally U-shape<l.
The teeth are of moderate size; upper
incisors are ventrally concave, shovel-
shaped; canines not excessive; molars
much as in whites; third molars rarely
absent when adult life is reached. The
usual cuspidory formula, though varia-
tions are numerous, is 4, 4, 8, alnjve;
5, 5, irregular, l)el()w. A supernumerary
conical dental element appears with some
frequency in the upper jaw between, in
front of, or l)e"hind the middle jHjrmanent
incisors.
The bones of the vertebral column, the
ribs, sternum, clavicles, and the smaller
bones of the upper and lower limbs pre-
sent many m rks of minor importance.
The pelvis is well formed, moderately
spacious, approaching the Euroi>ean in
shape. The humerus is rather flat, at
times very much so; the fossa in 31
per cent is perforated; but vestiges of
a supracondyloid process are nmch rarer
than in whites. The humero-radial in-
dex of maximum freijuency in adult males
is 77 to 80 (in whites 71 to 75) ; humero-
femoral iudex, 71 to 75 (in whit4\s 70 to
74). The femur is quite flat lx*low the
tuberosities; the tibia, often flat (platyc-
nemic| .
Of the brain and other soft organs but
little is known. Two adult male A{)ache
brains, collected by Dr W. Matthews
and now preserved m the I J. »^. National
Museum, weighed after removal 1,1U1
and 1,304 grams, respectively. Both
show good gyration.
The Eskimo differs anatomically from
the Indian in many important features.
His hair and eyes are similar in shade,
though the eyes are more obliquely set;
but his skin color on the whole is lighter,
being yellowish or light brown, with a
pronounced redness of the face. The
Eskimo skull is high, normally scaphoid,
and usually spacious. The face is large
and fiat, and the nasal bones are narrower
than in any other people. The bones of
the body are usual Iv strong. There is
less flattening of the shaft of the humerus,
of the upper part of the shaft of the femur,
and of the tibia. The superior border of
the scapula shows often an angular in-
stead of a curved outline.
In anthropometric differentiation the
native tril)es n. of Mexico are primarily
separable into Indiansand Eskimo. Some
of the adjacent Indian tribes show Es-
kimo admixture.
The Indians among themselves vary
considerably in stature, in form of the
head and face, and of the orbite, the
nose, and the nasal ai)erture. I^)W
stature, from KJO to 1()5 cm. in males,
is found among some of the Califor-
nian tribes (as the Yuki of Kound
Valley agency), many of the Pueblos,
and some of' the tribc^s of the N. W.
coast, as the Salish of Harrison lake
and Thompson r., and others. Among
the Tigua, Tewa, Apache, Navaho, Co-
manche, northern Ute, Paiute, and Sho-
shoni, among the majority of Califor-
nia, "Washington, and Oregon tribes, and
among the eastern Cherokee, Chick-
asaw, Kiowa, and Iowa the height in
male adults ranges between 1()5 and 170
cm., while anumg the Yuma, Mohave,
Maricopa, Pima, Xez Percys, Sioux,
Crows, Winnebago, Cheyenne, Arapaho,
Iroquois, Osage, Chippewa, and eastern
Algon<|uians the prevalent stature of
adult men is from 170 to 175 cm. The
range of variation in the majority of
tril^es and in both sexes is within 30
cm. The stature does not regularly
follow the geographic! or (dimatic fea-
tures, nor does it agree wholly with
the distribution of the other j)rin(npal
physical characteristics. The women are
on' the average about 12.5 cm. shorter
than the men; the difference is greater
among the tall than among the short
tril>es.
The distribution of the Indians accord-
ing to cephalic inde*x is of much interest.
Excluding triU^s that are known to be
much mixed, there are found in the
territorv x. of Mexico all the three j)rin-
cipal cfa'^ses of cranial form, namely,
dolicho-, brachy-, and meso-cephalic.
Among the extremely dolichocephalic
were the Delawares and the southern
Utah cliff-dwellers. Moderate dolicho-
cephaly, with occasional extreme forms,
was an(l is very prevalent, l)eing fouml
in the Algon<|uian and the majority of
the Siouan and Plains tribes nnd among
the Siksika, Shoshoni, some Pueblos
(e. g., Taos), and the Pima. Pure bra-
chycephaly existed in Florida, and pre-
vailed in the mound region and among
the ancient Pueblos. It is best repre-
sented to-day among the Apache, Wala-
pai, llavasupai, Nez Perces, Ilarrison lake
Salish, Osage, and Wichita, and in a less
degree among the Ilopi, Zufii, most of the
Rio Grande Pueblo.s, Navaho, Mohave,
Yuma, California Mission Indians, Co-
manche, Winnebago, many of the north-
western tril>es,and Seminole. Mesoceph-
alv existed principallv among the Cali-
56
AllATOMY ANCHOR STONES
tB. A. t.
fornia Indians, the Cherokee, and some of
the Sioux and Iroquois. There are numer-
ous tribes in North America about whose
cephalic form there is still much uncer-
tainty on account of the prevailing head
deformation. As to the height of the
head, which must naturally be considered
in connection with the cephalic index,
fair uniformity is found. In the Apache
the head is rather low, among most other
tril)es it is moderate.
The form of the face is generally allied,
as among other peoples, to the form of
the head, l)eing relatively narrow in nar-
row heads and broad in the brachy ce-
phalic. Orbits show variations, but'the
prevalent form is mesoseme. The nose
and the nasal aperture are generally
mesorhinic; the principal exception to
this is found on the w. coast, especially
in California, where a relatively narrow
nose (leptorhinic) was common. The
projection of the upper alveolar region
is almost uniformly mesognathic.
The Eskimo range in height from short
to medium, with long and high head, rela-
tively broad flat face, high orbits, and
narrow nose, showing alveolar progna-
thism like the Indians.
Consult Morton, ( 1 ) Crania Americana,
18:^9, (2) Distin(!tive characteristics, 1844;
Retzius, Om foramen af hufvudets ben-
stomme, 1847; Meigs, Observations, 1866;
Gould, Investigations, 1869; Wyman, (1)
Observations on crania, 1871, (2) Fresh
water shell mounds, 1875; Verneau, Le
bassin suivant les sexes, 1875; Eleventh
and Twelfth Reps. Peabody Museum,
1878; Quatrefages and Hamy, Crania eth-
nica, 1878-79; Flower, Catalogue of speci-
mens, 1879; Carr, (IjObservatiOnscm cra-
nia from Tennessee,* 1878, (2) Measure-
ments of crania from California, 1880, (3)
Observations on crania from Santa Barbara
Ids., 1879, (4) Notes on crania of New
England Indians, 1880; Otis, List of speci-
mens, 1880; I^ngdon, Madisonville pre-
historic cemetery, 1881 ; Chudzinsky, Sur
les trois encophales des Esquimaux, 1881;
Virchow (1) in Beitriige zur Craniologie
der Insulaner von der Westkiiste Norda-
merikas, 1889, (2) Crania Ethnica Amer-
icana, 1892; ten Kate, Somatological
Observations, 1892; Matthews and Wort-
man, Human bones of Hemenway collec-
tion, 1891; Boas, (1) Zur anthropologic
der nordamerikanischen Indianer, 1895,
(2) A. J. Stone's measurements of natives
of the N. W., 1901, (3) Anthrojiometri-
cal observations on Mission Indians, 1896;
Boas and Farrand, Physical characteris-
tics of tribes of British Columbia, 1899;
Allen, Crania from mounds of St. John's
r., Fla., 1896; Sergi, Crani esquimesi,
1901 ; Duckworth, Contribution to Eskimo
craniologv, 1900; Hrdlicka, (1) An Es-
kimo brain, 1901, (2) The crania of Tren-
ton, N. J., 1902, (3) The Lansing skeleton,
1903, (4) Notes on the Indians of Sonora,
1904, (5) Contributions to physical anthro-
pology of Cal., 1905; Spitzka, Contribu-
tions to encephalic anatomy of races, 1902;
Tocher, Note on measurements of Eskimo,
1902; Matiegka, Schiidel und Skelette
von Santa Rosa, 1904. See Artificial
head deformation^ Physiology. (a. h.)
Anawan. See Annawan.
AnQalagresses. A small tribe mentioned
by Milfort (M^mofre, 106, 1802) as resid-
ing w. of Mississippi r. and near the Ka-
kias (Cahokia) in 1782.
AncavistiB. A division of the Faraon
Apache. — Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59, 1864.
Ancestor worship. See Mythology^ Reli-
gion.
Anohgnililsn ('town they abandoned').
The chief town of the Auk, situated op-
gosite the n. end of Douglas id., Alaska. —
wanton, field notes, 1904.
Ak! an. ^S wan ton, op. cit.( 'lake town'). Ak'ftn.—
Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 116, 1885. AntocEHsu.—
Swan ton, op. cit.
Anchin. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Anchor stones. The native tribes n. of
Mexico used bark and skin boats, dug-
outs, and, in the extreme S. W. and on the
California coast, balsas; and in the use
of these frail craft for purposes of travel,
transportation, fishing, hunting, and war-
fare, the necessity for some means of
anchorage was felt. In shallow waters
with soft bottoms poles were often used;
but of most general availability were
stones that could be secured with a line
and dropped from the vessel at any point.
Commonly the stones thus use<l were
simply bowlders or
fragments of rock of
proper weight, but
m some cases the
fonn was modified
to facilitate attach-
ment of the cord.
A simple encir-
cling groove, mere
notches in the mar-
gins, or a rude per-
Foration, sufficed
for the purpose; the
former treatment gave to the utensil the
appearance of a grooveil hammer. In-
deed, it probably often happened that
these anchor stones were useti as hammers
or as mauls or sledges for heavy work when
occasion required. It is observed also
that some specimens have served as mor-
tars or anvil stones, and no doubt also for
frindingand shaping implements of stone,
tones of all available varieties were used,
and the weight, so far as observed, rarely
exceeds 40 or 50 jKJunds. The grooves
ANCHOR STONE, ILUNOI6 RIVER
(diameter 12 m.)
BtTLL. 30]
ANCHU — ANGMALORTUK
57
ANCHOR STONE IN USE
BY CHIPPEWA (i2 1-2
IN. long)
or marginal notches were usually rudely
pecked or chipped; but some show care-
ful treatment, and in a number of cases a
part or the whole of the surface of the
stone has been worke<l
down, probably for safety
and convenience in lian-
diing, and in some cases
as a result of the habit of
reducing articles in com-
mon use to symmetrical
and somewhat artistic
shapes. Snyder reconls one case of the
discovery of an anchor stone in an Indian
grave. These stones are still used by In-
dians as well as by white people. Consult
Snyder in Smithson. Ue\h 1887, 1889; Ran
in Smithson. Cont., xxv, 1884. (w. h. h. )
Anohn. A Cochimi rancheria of San
Juan de I-.ondo mission, Ix)wer Califor-
nia.— Picolo in Stt')cklein, Neue Welt-
Bott, no. 72, 36, 1792.
Andacaminos (Span.: 'wanderers,'
probably referring to their roving char-
acter). One of the tribes of w. Texas,
some at least of whose people were neo-
phytes of the mission of San Jose y San
Miguel de Aguayo. — Texas State Ar-
chives, Nov., 1790.
Andegnale. A Niska town inhabited
by two Chimmesyan families, the I^k-
seel of the Raven clan and the Gitgigenih
of the Wolf clan.— Boas in 10th Rep. N.
W. Tribes, 48-49, 1895.
Anderson Lake. A band of r))per Lil-
looet on a lake of the same name in
British Columbia ((^an. Ind. Aff., 415,
1898); pop. 66 in 1902.
Anderson's Town. A former Delaware
village on the s. side of White r., about
the present Anderson, Madivson co., Ind.
(Hough, map in Ind. (ieol. Rep., 1883).
Named from the principal chief of the
Dela wares of Indiana about 1810-20.
Andesite. An eruptive rock, varying
from li^ht gray of several hues to black,
belonging to the Tertiary and post-Ter-
tiary lavas, and much used by the Indians
for implements and utensils. It wa*^
shaped mainly by the pecking and grind-
ing processes. Its distribution is very
wide, esi>ecially in the W. (w. n. n.)
Andiata. A former Huron village in
Ontario.— Jes. Rel. of 1636, in, 1858.
AadUtae — Jes. Rel. of 1637, 134, 18.t8.
Andreafski. A Chnagmiut village on
the N. bank of the Yukon, Alaska, 5 m.
above the former redoubt of that name,
for the murder of whose inmates in 1855
the Russians wreaked such vengeance
that the river natives never again molest^nl
the whites. Pop. 14 in 1880; 10 in 1890.
Andr^afhky.— Dall, Alaska, 119, 1870. Andreaf-
•ky.— Baker. Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Andreiev-
•ky.— Petroflf, 10th Census, Alaska, map, 1884. An-
dreivtky.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899.
Andshanknalth. The I^kmiut name of
a Yamel band on a w. tributary of the
Willamette, in Oregon. — Gatschet, Cala-
pooyaMS., B. A. K, 1877.
Andshimmampak. The l^kmiut name
of a Yamel band on Yamhill cr., Ore-
gon.— (iats('het,Calapoova MS., B. A. K.,
1877.
Anegado (Span, 'overflowed,' referring
to the country ). A tribe of which Cal)eza
de Vaca ht^ard while in Texas in 1529-34.
They lived not far from the Ygua^es.
Anagados.— ('UtH'/a <le Vaca, Smith tnins,, 66. 1851.
Anegados.— Ibid.. 114, t*d. 1871. Lanegados.—
Ibid., 112.
Anejne. A former Chunia'^han village
near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Tavlor in (^al.
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1868.
Anijuc— BaiUToft, Nat. Kaees, i. 459, 1874.
Anektettim [AnExU'^Vthn, 'stony little
hollow'). A village of tlie Lytton band
of Ntiakyapamuk, situate on the e. side
of Fraser r., 8 m. alM)ve Lytton, British
Columbia. — Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist., II, 172, 19(X).
Anelo. A Kaviagmiut Eskimo settle-
ment at Port Clarence, Alaska. — 11th
(^ensus, Alaska, 162, 1898.
Anemnk. An Unaligmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on Anvik r., Alaska. — Sen. Ex. Doc.
12, 42d Cong., 1st sess., 25, 1871.
Anepo ('buffalo rising up.' — llayden).
A division of the Kainah tribe of the
Sik.^ika.
A-ne'-po.— Morpm. Aiic. S<x'.. 171. 1878 (stiid to lx»
tbe name of an oxtinct animal). I-ni'-po-i.—
Hayden, Ethnopr. and I'bilol. Mo. Val.. 264. 1862.
Angakok. A magician or conjurer
among the Eskimo, the word for shaman
in the eastern Eskimo dialects, now much
used especially in American anthropo-
logical literature, (a. k. c.)
Angmagsalingmint ( ' with-capelins peo-
ple.'— Boa'^). A tril)e of Eskimo on the
E. coast of Cirt^enland, l)etween lat. ()5*'
and 68°, inhabiting the fiords of Ang-
magsalik, Sermilik, and Sermiligak.
According to Rink the total population
was 418 in 1886. A Danish mission and
commercial station on Angmagsalic fiord
is the most northerly inhabited place on
the E. coast. Each Angmagsalingmint
village consists of a single house, which
has room for 8 or 10 families. Holm
(Ethnol. Skizz. af Anmagsalikerne, 1887)
names 8 villages (m the fiord, with a total
population of 225. Notwithstanding their
isolation the people, according to Nansen
(First Crossing of (ireenland, 1, 211, 1890),
are among the most vigorous of the Es-
kimo.
Angmagsalink.— Rink in (JeoK. Blatt.. viii, ;«(),
1886.
Angmalook (P>kimo name). A species
of salmon {Salmo niti(iiii<) found in the
lakes of Boothia. — Kep. U. S. Fish Com.,
122, 1872-78.
Angmalortnk ('the round one'). A
Netchilirmiut winter village on the w.
coast of Boothia bay, Canada.
Angmalortoq. — Boas in 6tli Kep. H. A. K., inap, 1888.
58
ANGNOVCHAK— ANNA WAN
[B. A. B.
Angnovehak. An Eskimo village in the
Nushagak district, Alaska; pop. 16 in 1890.
AngnoTcluuiuut.— 11th Census, Alaska. 164, 1893.
Angontenc. A former Huron village
situated between Wenrio and Ossossane,
al)out 2 m. from the latter place, in On-
tario.
Atafouteno.— Jc8. Kel. for 1638, 34, 1858. AngSieni —
Ibid., 1636. 116 (misprint). A]if8tenc.--Ibid., 35.
Angnn. A Hutsnuwu village n. of
Hood bay, Admiralty id., Alaska; pop.
420 in 1880. The greater part of the peo-
ple have since removed to KiUisnoo,atish-
ing villa&:e established by the whites.
Angoon. — KmnionM in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.,
III. pi. vii. 1903. Anfun.— Kranse. Tlinkit Ind.,
la^ 1885. Au^wn.— Petroff. Tenth Census.
Ala.ska, 32, 1884.
Angwassag. A Chippewa village near
St Charles, Saginaw co., Mich., with per-
haps 50 inhabitants in 1894.
g. — Smith quoted by Mawn in Nat. Mus.
Rep. 1902, 385, 1904. Angwasiig.— Wm. Jones, inf'n,
19a5 (sig. '.snafus floating in tne water').
Ang^wQsi. The Raven clan of the Ka-
china phratry of the Hopi.
Ang-wu»h-a.— Dorsey and Voth, Mishon^ovi
('eremonies, 175, 1902 (Crow elan). Anwuoi
wiawii.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E.. 584, 1900
( win uui = ' elan ' ) . An-wu'-ti wun-wii. — Fewlces in
Am. Anthrop., Vli, 404, 1894 {trufl-trii^'clan').
Un-wu'-ti.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891.
Anibiminanisibiwininiwak. ( ^ Pembina
(cranberry) river men,* from nlhimina
* high-bush cranberry,' »ibiw 'river,' ini-
nhrak 'men'). A Chippewa band liv-
ing on Pembina r. in extreme n. Min-
nesota and the adjacent part of Manitoba.
Thev removeil from Sandy lake, Minn.,
to that region alx)Ut 1807, at the solici-
tation of the Northwest Fur Company. —
Gatschet, Ojibwa MS., B. A. E.
Chippewas of Pembena River. — Lewis. Travels,
178, 1809. Pembina band —Events in Ind. Hist.,
siippl., C13. 1841.
Anicam. A Papago rancheria, probably
in Pima co., s. Ariz.; pop. 96 in 1858. —
Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208, 1858.
Anilco. A village, probably Quapaw,
presumably on the s. side of Arkansas r.,
and said to contain 5,000 people when
visited by I)e Soto's army in 1542.
Anioovanque.— Biedraa (1544) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., n, 107, 1850. Anilco.— Gareilasso de la
Vega, Florida, 201. 1723. Anileot.— Rafinesque,
introd. Marshall, Ky., I, 34, 1824. lUoos.— Ibid.,
:^6. Nilco.— Gentleman of Eivafi (1557) quoted by
French, Hist. Coll. La., ii. 184, 1850.
Anilukhtakpak. A Kaivuhkhotana vil-
lage on Innoko r., Alaska; i)op. 170 in
1844.
Anilukhtakkak.— Zagowkin, Desc. Rus.«<. I»o.s.s. Am.,
map, 1844.
Animas (Span, 'souls'). An Apache
settlement, apparently near (iilar., Ariz.,
in 1769.— Anzain Dw. Hist. Mex., 4th s.,
II, 114, 1856.
Animikite. An impure massive mineral,
according to Dana (Text-l)ook Mineral.,
420, 1888) supposetl to l>e a silver anti-
monide, found at Silver islet, L. Superior;
derived from Animikiy a local place name
which in the Chippewa and closely re-
lated Algonquian dialects signifies * thun-
der.* (a. f. c.)
Animism. See Religion.
Animpayamo. A former village of the
Kalindaruk, a division of the Coetanoan
Indians, connected with San Carlos mis-
sion, Cal.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr.
20, 1860.
Aniyak. A village of the Nunatogmiut
Eskimo on the Arctic coast just n. of
Kotzebue sd., Alaska; pop. 25 in 1880.
Aniyak.— Baker. Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Ani-
yakk.— Petroflf, Rep. on Alaska, 4, 1884.
Ankachagmint A local subdivision of
the Chnagmiut Eskimo living on Yukon
r. above Andreafski, Alaska.
Anfecha^emut.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i,
17, 1877.
Ankaohak. A Chnagmiut village, the
home of the Ankachagmiut, on the right
bank of the lower Yukon, Alaska; per-
haps identical with Kenunimik.
Ankaehagamiak.— Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12,
42d Cong., Ist sess., 25. 1871. Ankatohag-mioiit.—
ZagoHkin in Nouv. Ann. Vov., 5th ser., xxi,
map, 1850. Ankatsonagmittt— Holmberg. Ethnol.
Skizz., map, 1855. Ankoohagawnik. — Post route
. map, 1903.
Ankakekittan (^people of the house in
the middle of the valley'). A Kolusch-
an division at Killisnoo, Alaska, belonging
to the Raven clan; they are said to have
separated from the Deshitan on account
of some domestic trouble.
Am-khark-hit-ton.— Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus.
Nat. Hist., Ill, pi. vii, 1903. AnqlaOu hlttin.—
Swanton, field notes. B. A. £.. 1904. Vaneh-
agetan.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind.. 118, 1885. QlaHie-
tan.— Swanton, op. eit.
Anlik. A Kaviagmiut village on Go-
lofnin bay, Alaska.
Anlygmjuten.— Holmberg. Ethnol. Skizz., 6, 1855.
Annaooka. A Tuscarora town in North
Carolina at the beginning of the 18th cen-
tury.
Anna Ooka.— Lawson (ra. 1701) , Hist. Car., 383,1860.
Annapolis. One of the 7 districts of the
territory of the Micmac, as recognized
by themselves. It includes the s. w.
part of Nova Scotia.— Rand, First Mic-
mac Reading Book, 81, 1875.
Annas. An unidentified tribe men-
tioned by Rivera (Diario y Derrotero,
leg. 2,602, 1736) as living in s. Tex.
Annawan. A Wampanoag sachem, the
chief captain and counselor of Philip,
who under that chief's father had won a
reputation for prowess in wars with many
different tribes. When King Philip fell
Annawan rallie<l the warriors and safely
extricateti them from the swamp where
they were surrounded. Afterward he
ranged through the woods, harrying the
settlers of Swansea and Plymouth, until
Cant. Benjamin Church raised a new ex-
pedition to hunt the Indians as long as
there was one of them in the woods. Some
were captured by Capt. Church's Indian
scouts, but Annawan eluded pursuit, never
camping twice in the same spot. Havine
learned from a captive where the old
BULL. 30]
ANNE — ANTIQUITY
59
chief was, Church went with his Indian
soldiers and only one white companion to
capture him. When he reached the re-
treat, a rocky hill in the middle of a
swamp, he sent the captives forward to
divert the attention of Annawan's peo-
ple. Church and his scouts then stole
up, the noise they made being .drowned
by the sound of a pestle with which a
woman was pounding corn, and jumped
to the place where the arms were stackeil.
Annawan and his chief counselors, thus
surprised and ignorant of the fewness
of their assailants, gave themselves up
and were bound. The lighting men, who
were encamped near by, surrendered
when they were told that the place was
gurrounded by English soldiers. Anna-
wan brought the wampum belts and
other re^ia of King Philip, which he
gave to Capt. Church as his conqueror,
who had now overcome the last company
that stood out against the English. An-
nawan's captor interceded to have his
life spared, but the authorities at Ply-
mouth, extracting from him a confession
that he had put to death several English
prisoners, some of them with torture,
beheaded him in 1676 while Capt. Church
was absent, (f. h.)
Anne. See Queen Anne.
Annngamok. A Nushagagmiut village
on an e. tributary of Nushagak r., Alaska;
pop. 214 in 1880.
Anaogaimok.— PetrofF, 10th Census, Alaska, 17,
1884. Annucanok.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E.,
map, 1899. Anoogamok.— Petroflf, Rep. on Ala.ska,
49, 1884.
Annuities. See Agency System.
Anoatok ( * windy * ) . An Ita settlement
ate. Inglefield, n. Greenland, the north-
ernmost human habitation, lat. 78° 31 ^.
An&toak.— Mark ham inTrans. Ethnol. Soc. Lond.,
129, 1866. Anoretd'.— Stein in Petermann's Mit-
theil.. IX, map, 1902. Aunatok.— Kane, Arctfc Ex-
plor., II, 107, 1856. Renaielaer Harbor. —Ibid., i, 12.
Anoginajin . (ano^ *on both sides,* i-
prefix, na- *with feet,' zing *to stand
erect': *he stands on both sides'). A
band of the Wakpaatonwedan division
of the Mdewakanton, named from its
chief.
A-nof-i-na jin.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 144, note, 1858.
He-standa-both-tides. —Ibid .
Anoixi. A village or division, probably
of a southern Caddoan tribe, formerly
situated near the Hot Spring country of
Arkansas. Through this region De Soto* s
troops passed in the winter of 1541 on
their way toward the place where De
Soto later met his death. See Gentleman
of Elvaa (1557) in French, Hist. Coll.
La., 11, 182, 1850. Cf. Annoochy, a syn-
onym of BUoxi. (a. c. f.)
Anonatea. A Huron village situated a
lei^e from Ihonatiria, in Ontario in
1637.— Jesuit Relation for 1637, 143, 1858.
Aneiiatea.~Ibid., 141. Anonatra.—Ibid., 166 (mis-
print).
Anoritok ('without wind*). An Es-
kimo settlement in e. (ireenland, lat. 61°
45'. — Meddelelser omGri'mland, xxv, 23,
1902.
Aneretek.— Aw^land, 162, 1886.
Anonala. According to Le Moyne (De
Bry, map, 1591 ) a village in 1564 on a w.
branch of St Johns r. , Fla. , in the territory
occupied generally by tribes of the Timu-
quanan family,
liovola.— Jeffreys, Am. Atlas, 24, 1776.
Anovok. A Magemiut Eskimo village
on a small river n. of Kuskokwim bav,
Alaska; pop. 15 in 1890.
Annovokhamiut.— 11th Census, Alaska, 109, 1893.
Anpanenikashika ('those who l)ecame
human beings by the aid of the elk ' ) . A
Quapaw division.
An'pa" c'nikaci'^a.— Dorse V in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
230.1897. Elkgen*.- Ibid,229. Onphil'' enikadna.—
Ibid.
Ansactoy. A village, probably of a
part of the Pat win division of the Cope-
han family which formerly lived in Napa
and Yolo cos. , Cal. It concluded a treaty
of peace with Gov. Vallejo in 1836.— Ban-
croft, Hist. Cal., iv, 71, 1886.
Ansaimes. A village, said to have been
Costanoan, in California; situated in the
mountains 25 m. e. of the Mut*»un, whom
the inhabitants of this village attacked in
1799-1800.— Engelhardt, Franciscans in
Cal., 397, 1897.
Absayme.- Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Nov. 23, 18150.
Ansaimas. — I bid .
Anskowinis ( Anskdii^nUj * narrow nose-
bridge*)- A local band of the Chey-
enne, taking its name from a former
chief, (j. M.)
Antap. A former Chumashan village
at the mill near San Pedro, Ventura co.,
Cal. — Hcnt^haw, Buenaventura MS. vo-
cab., B. A. P:., 1884.
Antigonishe. Mentioned as an Indian
settlement on a river of the same name
which rises in a lake near the coast of the
Strait of Canso, in ** the province and col-
ony -of New Scotland . ' * It was probably
on or near the site of the present Antigo-
nishe, in Antigonishe co.. Nova Scotia,
and perhaps l>elonged to the Micmac.
Artigoniche.— Alcedo, Die. Geog., l, 161, 1786.
Antiquity. The antiquity of man on
the American continent is a subject of
interest to the student of the aborigines
as well as to the historian of the human
race, and the various problems that arise
with respect to it in the region n. of Mex-
ico are receiving much scientific atten-
tion. As the tribes were without a sys-
tem of writing available to scholars,
knowledge of events that transpired be-
fore the Columbian discovery is limited
to the rather indefinite testimony fur-
nished by tradition, by the more defi-
nite but as yet fragmentary evidences of
archeology, and by the internal evidence
of general ethnological phenomena. The
fact that the American Indians have ac-
60
ANTIQUITY
[b. a. b.
quired such marked physical characteris-
tics as to be repanle<l as a separate race
of very considerable homogeneity from
Alaska' to Patagonia, is regarded as indi-
cating a long and complete separation
from their parental peoples. Similarly,
the existence in America of numerous cul-
ture groups, measurably distinct one from
another in language, social customs, reli-
gion, technology, and esthetics, is thought
to indicate a long and more or less exclu-
sive occupancy of independent areas.
But as a criterion of age the testimony
thus furnished lacks definiteness, since to
one mind it may signify a short time,
while to another it may suggest a very
long period. Native historical records of
even the most advanced tribes are hardly
more to be relied on than tradition, and
they prove of little service in determin-
ing the duration of occupancy of the con-
tinent by the race, or even in tracing the
more recent (course of events connected
with the historic peoples. No one can
speak with assurance, on the authority of
either tradition or history, of events dat-
ing farther back than a few hundred years.
Archeology, however, can furnish definite
data with respect to antiquity; and, aided
by geology and biology, this science is
furnishing results of great value, although
some of the greater problems encountered
remain still unsolved, and must so remain
indefinitely. During the first centuries
of European occupancy of the continent,
belief in the derivation of the native
tribes from some Old World people in
comparatively recent times was very gen-
eral, and indeed the fallacv has not yet
l)een entirely extinguished. This view-
was based on the apparently solid foun-
dation of the Mosaic record and chronol-
ogy as determined by Usher, and many
works have been written in the attempt
to determine the particular people from
which the American tribes sprang. .(See
Popular Fnllaries, and for various refer-
ences consult Bancroft, Native Races,
V, 1886; Winsor, Narrative and Critical
History, i, 1884). The results of re-
searches into the ])rehistoric archeology
of the eastern continent during the last
century, however, have cleared away
the Usherian interpretation of events
and established the fact of the great an-
tiquity of man in the world. Later, in-
vestigations in America were taken up,
and the conclusion was reached that the
course of primitive history had been
about the same on both continents. Ob-
serv^ations tlmt seemed to substantiate
this conclusion were soon forthcoming
and were readily accepted; but a more
critical examination of the testimony
shows its shortcomings and tends to hold
final determinations in abeyance. It is
clear that traces of early man are not so
plentiful in America as in Europe, and
investigations have proceeded with pain-
ful slowness and much halting along the
various lines of research. Attempts have
been made to establish a chronology of
events in various ways, but witliout defi-
nite result. The magnitude of the work
accomplished in the building of mounds
and other earthworks has been empha-
sized, the time requisite for the growth and
decay upon these works of a succession of
forests has been computed (see Mounds).
The vast accumulations of midden depos-
its and the fact that the strata composing
them seem to indicate a succession of oc-
cupancies by tril)es of gradually advanc-
ing culture,* beginning in savagery and
ending in well-advanced barbarism, have
impressed themselves on chronologists
(see Shell-heaps). Striking physiographic
mutations, such as changes oi level and
the conse(}uent retreat or advance of the
seaan<l changes in river courses since man
began to dwell along their shores, have
been carefully considered. Modifications
of particular species of mollusks between
the time of their first use on the shell-
heap sites and the present time, and the
development in one or more cases of new
varieties, suggest very considerable antiq-
uity. But the highest estimate of elapsed
time based on these evidences does not
exceed a few thousand years. Dall, after
carefully weighing the evidence collected
by himself in Ala«ka, reached the conclu-
sion that the earliest midden deposits of
the Aleutian ids. are probably as much
as 8,000 years old. Going beyond this
limit, the geological chronology must be
appealed to, and we find no criteria by
means of which calculations can be made
in years until we reach the close of the
Glacial epoch, which, according to those
who venture to make estimates based on
the erosion of river channels, was, m the
states that lx)rder the St Lawrence basin,
not more than 8,000 or 10,000 years ago
(Winchell). Within this period, which
in middle North America may properly
be designated post-Glacial, there have
been reported numerous traces of man so
associated with the deposits of that time
as to make them measurably valuable in
chronological studies; but these evidences
come within the province of the geologist
rather than of the archeologist, and find-
ings not subjected to critical examination
by geologists having special training in
the particular field may well be placed
in the doubtful category.
Post-Glacial rivers, in cutting their
channels through the various deposits
to their present level, have in some
cases left a succession of flood-plain ter-
races in which remains of man and his
works are embedded. These terraces af-
ford rather imperfect means of subdivid-
ULLL. 301
ANTIQUITY
61
ing post-Glacial time, but under discrimi-
nating observation may l)e expected to
furnish valuable data to the chronologist.
The river terraces at Trenton, N. J. , for ex-
ample, formed largely of gravel accumu-
lated at the period when the southern
margin of the ice sheet was retreating
nortliward beyond the Delaware valley,
have been the subject of ciireful and pro-
longed investigation. At the points where
traces of man have been reported the sec-
tion of these deposits shows generally be-
neath the soil a few feet of superficial
sands of uncertain age, passing down
rather abruptly into a more or less uni-
form deposit of coarse gravel that reaches
in places a depth of 80 feet or more.
On and near the surface are found vil-
lage sites and other traces of occupancy
by the Indian tril)es. Beneath the. soil,
extending throughout the sand layers,
stone implements and the refuse of
implement-making occur; ])ut the testi-
mony of these fiiuls can have little value
in chronology, since the age of the de-
posits inclosing them remains in doubt.
From the Glacial gravels ])roper then*
has been recovered a single object to
which weight as evidence of human pres-
ence during their accunmlation is at-
tached; this is a tubular bone, regarded
as part of a human femur and said to
show glacial stria* and traces of human
workmanship, found at a depth of 21 feet.
On this object the claim for the Glacial
antiquity of man in the Delaware valley
and on the Atlantic slope practically rests
(Putnam, Mercer, Wright, Abbott, llrd-
licka. Holmes). Other finds e. of the
AUe^henies lacking scientific verification
furnish no reliable index of time. In
a ]X)8t-CTilacial terrace on the s. shore
of Lake Ontario the remains of a hearth
were <liscovered at a depth of 22 feet
by Mr Tomlinson in digging a well, ap-
parently indicating early aboriginal oc-
cupancy of the St Lawrence basin ((Jil-
bert). From the Cilacial or immediately
post-Glacial dejwsits of Ohio a number
of articles of human workmanship have
been reported: A grooved ax from a
well 22 feet beneath the surface, near
New London (Claypole); a chipped ob-
ject of waster type at Newcomerstown,
at a depth of 16 feet in Glacial gravels
(Wrieht, Holmes); chipped stones in
gravels, one at Madison vi lie at a depth of
8 feet, and another at Loveland at a depth
of 30 feet (Metz, Putnam, Wright,
Holmes). At Little Falls, Minn., flood-
plain deposits of sand and gravel are
found to contain many artificial objects of
quartz. This flood plain is believeil by
some to have been nnally abandoned by
the Mississippi well back toward the close
of the Glacial period in the valley
(Brower, Winchell, Upham), but that
these fin(is warrant definite conclusions
as t<j time is seriously questioned by
(yhamberlin. In a Missouri r. I)ench near
Lansing, Kans., portions of a human
skeleton were recentlv found at a depth
of 20 feet, but geolo<rists are not agretnl
as to the age of the formation (see hni-
slng M(tn). At Clayton, Mo., in a de-
posit believed to belong to the loess, at a
depth of 14 feet, a well-finished grooved
ax was found (Peterson). In the Basin
Range region between the Rocky mts. and
the Sierras, two discoveries that seem to
bear on the antiquity of human occupancy
have been reported: In a silt deposit in
Walker r. valley, Nev., believed to be of
Glacial age, an obsidian implement was
obtained at a depth of 25 feet (McGee);
at Namj)a, Idaho, a clay image is reported
to have been brought up by a sand pump
from a depth of 820 feet in alternating
beds of clay and (|uicksand underlying a
lava fiow of late Tertiary or early Glacial
age (Wright, Emmons; see yainpa Im-
age) . (Questions are raised by a numl)er
of geologists respecting the value of these
finds (McGee). The most extraordinary
discoveries of human remains in connec-
tion with geological formations are those
from the auriferous gravels of California
( Whitney, 1 lolmes) . These finds are nu-
merous and are reported from many local-
ities and from deposits covering a wide
range of time. So convincing did the evi-
dence appear to Whitnev, state geologist
of California from IHfiO'to 1874, that he
accepted without hesitation the conclu-
sion that man had occupied the auriferous
gravel region during pre-Glacial time, and
other students of the su})ject still regard
the testimony as convincing; but consid-
eration of the extraordinary nature of the
conclusiims dependent on this evidence
should cause even the most sanguine ad-
vocate of great human antiquity in Amer-
ica to hesitate ( see t ala reran Mau ) . ( leolo-
gists are practically agreed that the grav-
els from which someat least of the relics of
man are said to come are of Tertiary age.
These relics represent a polished-stone
culture corresponding closely to that of
the modern tribes of the Pacific slope.
Thus, man in America must have i>aK«ed
through the savage and well into the
barbarous stage while the hypothetical
earliest representative of the human race
in the Old World, Pithecanthropus erectun
of Dubois, was still running wild in the
forests of Java, a half- regenerate Simian.
Furthermore, the acceptance of the aurif-
erous-gravel testimony makes it necessary
to place tbe presence of man in America
far back toward the beginning of the Ter-
tiary age, a period to be reckoned not in
tens but in hundreds of thousands of
years. -(See Smithson. Rep. for 1899.)
These and other equally striking consid-
62
ANTIQUITY — ANVIK
[B. A. B.
erations suggest the wisdom of formulating
conclusions with the utmost caution.
Caves and rock shelters representing
various periods and offering dwelling
places to the tribes that have come and
gone, may reasonably l)e expected to con-
tain traces of the peoples of all periods of
occupancy; but the deposits forming their
floors, with few exceptions, have not
l)een very fully examined, and up to the
present time have furnished no very
tangible evidence of the presence of men
beyond the limited period of the Ameri-
can Indian as known to us. The Uni-
versity of California has conducted exca-
vations in a cave in the n. part of the
state, and the discovery of Dones that
appear to have been shaped by human
hands, associated with fossil fauna that
probably represent early Glacial times,
has l)een reported (Sinclair); but the re-
sult is not decisive. The apparent ab-
sence or dearth of ancient human remains
in the caves of the country furnishes one
of the strongest reasons for critically ex-
amining all testimony bearing on antiq-
uity alx>ut which reasonable doubt can
be raised. It is incredible that primitive
man should have inhabited a country of
caverns for ages without resorting at
some period to their hospitable shelter;
but research in this field is hardly begun,
and evidence of a more conclusive nature
may yet be forthcoming.
In view of the extent of the researches
carried on in various fields with the object
of adducing evidence on which to base a
scheme of human chronology in America,
decisive results are surprisingly meager,
and the finds so far made, reputed to
represent a vast period of time stretching
forward from the middle Tertiary to the
present, are characterized by so many de-
fects of observation and record and so
many apparent incongruities, biological,
geological, and cultural, that the task of
the chronologist is still largely before him.
For archeological investigations and
scientific discussion relating to the an-
tiquity of man within the limits of the
United States, see Abbott (1) in Proc.
Boston Soc. Nat. Hist.,xxiii, 1888, (2) in
Proc. A. A. A. S., xxxvii, 1888; Allen,
Prehist. World, 1885; Bancroft, Native
Races, iv, 1882; Becker in Bull. Geol.
Soc. Am., II, 1891; Blake in Jour. Geol.,
VII, no. 7, 1899; Brower, Memoirs, v,
1902; Chamberlin (1) in Jour. Geol., x,
no. 7, 1902, (2) in The Dial, 1892; Clay-
pole in Am. Geol., xviii, 1896; Dall (1) m
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1899, (2) in
Cont. N. Am. Ethnol., i, 1877; Emmons
in Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., xxiv,
1889; Farrand, Basis of Am. Hist, 1904;
Foster, Prehist. Races, 1878; Fowke,
Archeol. Hist. Ohio, 1902; Gilbert in Am.
Anthrop., ii, 1889; Haynea in Winsor,
Narr. and Crit. Hist. Am., i, 1889;
Holmes (1) in Rep. Smithson. Inst. 1899,
1901, (2) ibid. 1902, 1903, (3) in Jour.
Geol., I, nos. 1, 2, 1893, (4) in Am. Geol.,
XI, no. 4, 1893, (5) in Science, Nov. 25,
1892, and Jan. 25, 1893; Hrdlicka (1) in
Am. Anthrop., n. s., v, no. 2, 1903, (2) in
Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist, xvi, 1902;
Kummel in Proc. A. A. A. S., xlvi, 1897;
Lapham in Smithson. Cont., vii, 1855;
Lewis, ibid., xxix, 1880; McGee (1) in
Am. Anthrop., ii, no. 4, 1889; v, no. 4,
1892; VI, no. 1, 1893, (2) in Pop. Sci.
Mo., Nov., 1888, (3) m Am. Antiq.,
XIII, no. 7, 1891; Mercer (1) in Proc. A.
A. A. S., XLvi, 1897, (2) in Am. Nat,
xxvii, 1893, (3) in Pubs. Univ. of Pa.,
VI, 1897; Morse in Proc. A. A. A. S.,
xxxiii, 1884; Munro, Archseol. and False
Antiq., 1905; Nadaillac, Prehist. America,
1884; Peterson in Records of Past, ii, pt.
1, 1903; Powell in The Forum, 1890; Put-
nam (1) in Proc. Boston Soc. Nat Hist,
XXI, 1881-83; xxiii, 1885-88, (2) m Pea-
body Mus. Reps., ix-xxxvii, 187^1904,
(3) in Proc. A. A. A. S., xlvi, 1897, (4)
in Rep. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist 1899, 1900;
Salisbury (1) in Proc. A. A. A. S., xlvi,
1897, (2) in Science, Dec. 31,1897; Shaler
in Peabody iMus. Rep., ii, no. 1, 1877;
Sinclair in Pub. Univ. Cal., ii, no. 1,
1904; Skertchley in Jour. Anthrop. Inst,
XVII, 1888; Squier and Davis, Smithson.
Cont, I, 1848; Thomas (1) Hist N. Am.,
II, 1904, (2) in 12th Rep. B. A. E., 1894,
(3) Introd. Study of N. Am. Arch., 1903;
Upham in Science, Aug., 1902; Whitney,
Auriferous Gravels of the Sierra Nevada,
1879; Williston in Science, Aug., 1902;
Winchell (1) in Am. Geol., Sept, 1902,
(2) in Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., xiv, 1903;
Wright, (1) Man and the Glacial Period,
1895, (2) Ice Age, 1889, (3) in Pop. Bci.
Mo., May, 1893, (4) in Proc. Boston Soc.
Nat Hist, XXIII, 1888, (5) in Rec. of the
Past, II, 1903; iv, 1905; Wyman in Mem.
Peabody Acad. Sci., i, no. 4, 1875.
The progress of opinion and research
relating to the origin, antiquity, and early
history of the American tribes is recorded
in a vast body of literature fully cited,
until within recent years, by Bancroft in
Native Races, iv, 1882, and Haynes in
Winsor's Narrative and Critical History,
I, 1884. (w. H. H.)
Antler. See Bone-work. '
Ann. The Red -ant clan of the Ala
(Horn) phratry of the Hopi.
iLn-namu.— Voth, Traditions of the Hopi, 37, 1905.
A'-nti wiin-wii.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii,
401 , 1894 ( wiifl-ivU = * clan ' ) .
Annenes (Anue^nes). A gens of the
Nanaimo. — Boas in 5th Rep. N. W.
Tribes, 32, 1889.
Anvik. A Kaiyuhkhotcma village at
the junction of Anvik and Yukon rs.,
Alaska. Pop. in 1844, 120; in 1880, 95;
BULL. 30]
ANVILS APACHE
63
in 1890, 100 natives and 91 whites; in
1900, 166. An Episcopal mission and
school were established there in 1887.
Anvio.— Whymper, Alaska, 265, IK69. Anvig.—
Zagoekin quoted by PetrofT, 10th Census, Alaska,
37, 1884. Anvik.— Petroflf, ibid., 12.
Anyilf. Primitive w^orkers in metal
were dependent on anvil stones in shap-
ing their implements, utensils, and orna-
ments. Anvils were probably not esi>e-
cially shaped for the purpose, but con-
sisted of bowlders or other natural masses
of stone, fixed or movable, selected ac-
cording to their fitness for the particular
purpose for which they were employed.
Few of these utensils have been identi-
fied, however, and the types most utilized
by the tribes are left to conjecture. The
worker in stone also sometimes used a
solid rock body on which to break and
roughly shape masses of flint and other
stone. These are found on many sites
where stone was quarried and wholly or
partially worke<l into shape, the upjier
surface showing the marks of rough usage,
while fragmente of stone left by the work-
men are scattered about. ( w. n. ii. )
Anyukwinn. A ruined pueblo of the
Jemez, situated n. of the present Jemez
pueblo, N. central N. Mex.
Anu-qml^i-foi.— Bandelier in Arch. In.st. Papers,
IV, pt. 2, 207, 1892. Aay^iwinu.— HodRC, field
notes, B. A. E., 1895.
Aogitunai (^Ao-gitAnd^-i, 'Masset inlet
gituns*). A Masset subdivision residing
in the town of Yaku, opposite North id.,
and deriving their name from 3Iasset in-
let, Queen Charlotte ids., British Colum-
bia.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 275, 19a5.
Aogni. A former Chumashan village in
Ventura CO., Oal.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
July 24, 1863.
Aokeawai {^Ao-ae^avm-iy 'those born in
the inlet*). A division of the Raven
clan of the Skittagetan family which re-
ceived its name from Masset inlet. Queen
Charlotte ids., British Columbia, where
these people formerly lived. Part of
them, at least, were settled for a time at
Dadens, whence all finally- went to Alaska.
There were two subdivisions: Hling-
wainaashadai andTaolnaashadai. — Swan-
ton, Cont. Haida, 272, 1905.
Kko-ke'-owai.— Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes. 22,
1896. Keo Hiad0.~Harrison in TrauH. Roy. Sue.
Can., see. ii, 125, 1896.
■^ Aondironon. A branch of the Neutrals
whose territory bordered on that of the
Huron in w. Ontario. In 1648, owing to
an alleged breach of neutrality, the chief
town of this tribe was sacked by 300 Iro-
quois, mainly Seneca, who killed a lai^e
number of its inhabitants and carried
away many others in captivity.— Jes.
Rel. for 1640, 35, 1858.
Ahondibroimoiii.— Jes. Rel . for 1656, 34, 1858: Aon-
dironaoiu.— Jes. Rel. for 1648, 49, 1858. Ondi-
roBon.—Ibid., ni, index, 1858.
Aopomne. A former Maricopa ranche-
ria on Rio Gila, s. w. Arizona.— Sedel-
mair (1744) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz,
and N. Mex., 366, 1889.
Aoreachic ('where there is mountain
cedar * ). A small rancheria of the Tara-
humare, not far from Norogachic, Chi-
huahua, Mexico. Also called Agorichic;
distinct from Aboreachic— Lumholtz,
inf n, 1894.
AoBtlanlnagai (^Ao i^Uan Inagd^i, * Mas-
set inlet rear-town people'). A local
HUl>division of the Haven clan of the
Skittagetan family. Masset inlet gave
them the separate name. — Swanton, Cont.
Haida, 271, 1905.
Stl*EngE la' nas.— Boa8, 12th Kep. N. W Tribes,
22, 1898.
Aoyaknlnagai (^Ao yd^ ku Ina^d^i, 'mid-
dle town people of Masset inlet'). A
branch of the Yakulanas division of the
Raven clan of the Skittagetan family,
which received the name from Masset'
inlet, where its town stood. — Swanton,
Cont. Haida, 271, 1905.
0-anyakoilnajai.— Boas. 12tii Rep. N. W. Tribes,
2;^ 1898 (probably a misprint for Gauyakollnagai,
its name in the Skidegate dialect). Ou jflkii
Ilnige.— Harrison in Trans. Roy. Soe. Can., 125,
I89r>.
Apache (probably from dpachu^ 'en-
emy,' the Zufii name for the Navaho,
who were designated "Apaches de Na-
baju" by the early Spaniards in New
Mexico). A numl)er of tribes forming
the most southerly group of the Athapas-
can family. The name has been applied
also to some unrelated Yuman tribes, as
the Apache Mohave (Yavapai) and
Apache Yuma. The Apache call them-
selves A" r/r, Dhie^ T^ndfj or Inde J *|)eople.'
(See AtfiajMtscttn. )
They were evidently not so numerous
al)out the l)e^inning of the 17th century
as in recent times, their nund)ers appar-
ently having been increased by captives
from other tril)es, particularly the Pue-
blos, Pima, Papago, and other |)eaceful
Indians, as well as from the settle-
ments of northern Mexico that were
gradually established within the territory
raided by them, although recent meas-
urements by Hrdlicka seem to indicate
unusual freedom from foreign admix-
ture. They were first mentioned as
Apaches by Ofiate in 1598, although CV)r-
onado, in 1541, met the Querechos (the
Vaqueros of Benavides, and probably the
Jicarillas and Mescaleros of modern
times) on the plains of e. N. Mex. and w.
Tex.; but there is no evidence that the
Apache reached so far w. as Arizona until
after the middle of the 16th century.
From the time of the Spanish colonization
of New Mexico imtil within twenty years
they have been noted for their warlike
disposition, raiding white and Indian
settlements alike, extending their dep-
redations as far southward as Jalisco,
Mexico. No group of tribes has caused
^
64
APACHE
[ B. A. E.
greater confusion to writers, from the fact
that the iMjpular names of the tribes are
derived from some local or temporary hab-
itat, owing to their shifting propensities,
or were given by the Spaniards on ac-
count of some tribal characteristic; hence
some of the common names of apparently
different Apache tribes or bands are syn-
onymous, or practically so; again, as em-
ployed by some writers, a name may
mclude much more or much less than
when employed by others. Although
most of the A])ac!ie have been hostile
since they have been known to history,
the most serious modern outbreaks have
l)een attributed to mismanagement on the
part of civil authorities. The most im-
portant recent hostilities were those of the
Chiricahua under Cochise, and later Vic-
^torio, Avho, together with 500 Mimbrefios,
Mogollones, and Mescaleros, were as-
signed, about 1870, to the Ojo Caliente
reserve in \v. N. Mex. Cochise, who had
repeatedly refused to be couline<l within
reservation limits, fled with his band, but
returned in 1871, at which time 1,200 to
1,900 Apache were on the reservation.
Complaints from neighboring settlers
caused their removal to Tularosa, 60 m.
to the N. w., but 1,(XX) fled to the Mesca-
iero reserve on Pecos r., while Cochise
went out on another raid. Efforts of the
military agent in 1878 to compel the res-
toration of some stolen cattle caused the
rest, numbering 700, again to decamp,
but they were soon captured. In com-
pliance with the wishes of the Indians,
they were returned to Ojo Caliente in
1874. Soon afterward Cochise died, and
the Indians began to show such interest
in agriculture that by 1875 there were
1,700 Apache at Ojo Caliente, and no
depredations were reported. In the fol-
lowing year the Chiricahua res. in Arizona
was abolished, and 325 of the Indians
were removed to the San Carlos agency;
others joined their kindred at Ojo
Caliente, while some either remained
on the mountains of their old reserva-
tion or fled a(*ro.ss the Mexican border.
This removal of Indians from their an-
cestral homes was in pursuance of a
|X)licy of concentration, which was tested
in theChiricahua removal in Arizona. In
April, 1877, Geronimo and other chiefs,
with the remnant of the band left on the
old reservation, and evidently the Mexi-
can refugees, began depredations in s.
Arizona and n. Chihuahua, but in May
433 were captured and returned to San
Carlos. At the same time the policy was
applied to the Ojo Caliente Apache of
New Mexico, who were making good
progress in civilized pursuits; but when
the plan was put in action only 450 of
2,000 Indians were found, the remainder
forming into predatory bands under Vic-
torio. In September 300 Chiricahua,
mainly of the Ojo Caliente band, escaped
from San Carlos, but surrendered after
many engi^ements. These were returned
to Ojo Caliente, but they soon ran off
again. In February, 1878, Victorio sur-
rendered in the hope that he and his
people might remam on their former
reservation, but another attempt was
made to force the Indians to go to San
Carlos, with the same result. In June
the fugitives again appeared at the Mes-
calero agency, and arrangements were at
last made for them to settle there; but, as
the local authorities found indictments
against Victorio and others, charging
them with murder and robberv, this
chief, with his few immediate followers
and some Mescaleros, fled from the reser-
vation and resumed marauding. A call
was made for an increased force of mili-
tary, but in the skirmishes in which thev
were engaged the Chiricahua met with
remarkable success, while 70 settlers were
murdered during a single raid. Victorio
was joined l)efore April, 1880, by 350
Mescaleros and Chiricahua refugees from
Mexico, and the repeated raids which
follow^ed struck terror to the inhabitants
of New Mexico, Arizona, and Chihuahua.
On April 13 1,000 troops arrived, and
their number was later greatly aug-
mented. Victorio' s band was frequently
encountered by superior forces, and
although supported during most of the
time by only 250 or 300 fighting men,
this warrior usually inflicted severer
punishment than he suffered. In these
raids 200 citizens of New Mexico, and as
many more of Mexico, were killed. At
one time the band was virtually sur-
rounded by a force of more than 2,000
cavalry and several hundred Indian
scouts, but Victorio eluded capture and
fled across the Mexican border, where
he continued his bloody campaign.
Pressed on both sides of the international
boundary, and at times harassed by
United States and Mexican troops com-
bined, Victorio finally suffered severe
losses and his band became divided. In
October, 1880, Mexican troops encoun-
tered Victorious party, comprising 100
warriors, with 400 women and children,
at Tres Castillos; the Indians were sur-
rounded and attacked in the evening, the
fight continuing throughout the night;
in the morning the ammunition of the
Indiana became exhausted, but although
rapidly losing strength, the remnant re-
fused to surrender until Victorio, who
had been wounded several times, finally
fell dead. This disaster to the Indians
did not quell their hostility. Victorio
was succeeded by Nana, who collected
the divided force, received reenforce-
ments from the Mescaleros and the San
BCrLL.30]
APACHE
65
Carlos Chiricahua, and between July,
1881, and April, 1882, continued the raids
across the border until he was again
driven back in Chihuahua. While these
hostiliti^ were in progress in New Mex-
ico and Chihuahua the Chiricahua of San
Carlos were striking terror to the settle-
ments of Arizona. In 1880 Juh and Ge-
ronimo with 108 followers were captured
and returned to San Carlos. In 1881
trouble arose amon^ the Wliite Moun-
tain Coyoteros on Cibicu cr. , owing to a
medicine-mannamedNakaidoklini(a.v.),
who pretended power to revive the aead.
After paying him liberally for his services,
his adherents awaiteil the resurrection
until Au^st, when Nakaidoklini avowed
that his incantations failed because of the
presence of whites. Since affairs were as-
suming a serious aspect, the arrest of the
prophet was ordered; he surrendered
quietly, but as the troops were making
camp the scouts and other Indians opened
fire on them. After a sharp light Nakai-
doklini was killed and hisaaherents were
repulsed. Skirmishes continued the next
day, but the troops were reenforced, and
the Indians soon surrendered in small
bands. Two chiefs, known as George
and Bonito, who had not been engaged
in the White Mountain troubles, surren-
dered to Gen. Wilcox on Sept. 25 at
Camp Thomas, but were paroled. On
Sept. 30 Col. Riddle was sent to bring
these chiefs and their bands back to
Camp Thomas, but they became alarmed
and fled to the Chiricahua, 74 of whom
left the reserve, and, crossing the Mexi-
can border, took refuse with the late
Victorious band in Chihuahua. In the
same year Nana made one of his bloody
raids across the hne, and in September
Juh and Nahchi, with a party of Chirica-
hua, again fled from the reservation, and
were forced by the troops into Mexico,
where, in April, 1882, they were joined
by Geronimo and the rest of tjie hostile
Chiricahua of San Carlos, with Loco and
his Ojo Caliente band. The depreciations
committed in n. Chihuahua under Geron-
imo and other leaders were perhaps even
more serious than those within the limits
of the United States. In March, 1883,
Chato with 26 followers made a dash into
New Mexico, murdering a dozen persons.
Meanwhile the white settlers on the
upper Gila consumed so much of the
water of that stream as to threaten the
Indian crops; then coal was discovered
on the reservation, which brought an in-
flux of miners, and an investigation by
the Federal grand jury of Arizona on Oct.
24, 1882, charged the mismanagement of
Indian affairs on San Carlos res. to local
civil authorities.
Gen. G. H. Crook having been reassigned
to the command, in 1882 induced about
Bull. 30—05 5
1,500 of the hostiles to return to the reser-
vation and subsist by their own exertions.
The others, about three-fourths of the
tribe, refused to settle down to reservation
life and repeatedly went on the warpath;
when promptly followed by Crook they
would surrender and agree to peace, but
would soon break their promises. To this
ofiicer had been assigned the task of bring-
ing the raiding Apache to terms in co-
operating with the Mexican troops of
Sonora and Chihuahua. In May, 1883,
Crook crossed the boundary to the head-
waters of the Rio Yaqui with 50 troops
and 163 Apache scouts; on the 13th the
camp of Chato and Bonito was discovered
and attacked with some loss to the Indians.
Through two captives employed as emis-
saries, communication was soon had with
the others, and bv May 29 354 Chiri-
cahua had surrendered. On July 7 the
War Department assumed police control
of the San Carlos res., and on Sept. 1
the Apache were placed under the sole
charge of Crook, who began to train them
in the ways of civilization, with such suc-
cess that in 1884 over 4,000 tons of grain,
vegetables, and fruits were harvested.
In Feb., 1885, Crook^s powers were cur-
tailed, an act that led to conflict of au-
thority between the civil and military oflS-
cers, and before matters could be adjusted
half the Chiricahua left the reservation in
May and fled to their favorite haunts.
Troops and Apache scouts were again sent
forward, and many skirmishes t(X)k place,
but the Indians were wary, and again
Arizona and New Mexico were thrown
into a state of excitement and dread by
raids across the American border, re-
sulting in the murder of 73 white people
and many friendly Apache. In Jan.,
1886, the American camp under Capt.
Crawford was attacked through misun-
derstanding by Mexican irregular Indian
troops, resulting in Crawford's death.
By the following March the Apache
became tired of the war and asked for a
parley, which Crook granted as formerly,
but before the time for the actual sur-
render of the entire force arrived the
wilv Geronimo changed his mind and
witli his immediate Imnd again fled be-
yond reach. His escape led to censure of
Crook's policy; he was consequently re-*
lieved at his own request in April, and
to Gen. Nelson A. Miles was assi^ed
the completion of the task. Greronimo
and his band flnally surrendered Sept. 4,
1886, and with numerous friendly Apache
were sent to Florida as prisoners. They
were later taken to Mt Vernon, Ala.,
thence to Ft Sill, Okla., where they have
made progress toward civilization. Some
of the hostiles were never captured, but
remained in the mountains, and as late
as Nov., 1900, manifested their hostile
66
APACHE
[b. a. e.
character by an attack on Mormon set-
tlers in Chihuahua. Apache hostility in
Arizona and New Mexico, however, has
entirely ceased. (See Hodge in Encvc.
Brit., *• Indians," 1902.)
Being a nomadic people, the Apache
practised agriculture only to a limited ex-
tent before their permanent establishment
on reservations. They sul)8isted chiefly
on the products of the chase and on roots
(especially that of the maguey) and ber-
ries. Although fish and bear were found
in abundance in their country they were
not eaten, being tabued as food. They
had few art«, but the women attained
high skill in making baskets. Their
dwellings were shelters of brush, which
were easily erected by the women and
were well adapted to their arid environ-
ment and constant shifting. In phys-
ical api>earance the Apache vary greatly,
but are rather al)ove the medium
height. They are good talkers, are not
readily deceived, and are honest in pro-
tecting property placed in their care,
although they formerly obtained their
chief support from plunder seized in
their forays.
The Apache are divided into a num-
ber of tribal groups which have been so
differently named and defined that it
is sometimes difficult to determine to
which branch writers refer. The most
commonly accepted divisions are the
Querechos or Vacjueros, consisting of the
Mescaleros, Jic^rillas, Faraones, Llaneros,
and probably the Li pan; the Chiricahua;
the Pinalefios; the Coyoteros, comprising
the White Mountain and Pinal divi-
sions; the Arivaipa; the Gila Apache,
including the Gileilos, Mimbrefios, and
MogoUones; andtheTontos. The present
official designation of the divisions, with
their population in 1903, is as follows:
White Mountain Apache (comprising the
Arivaipa, Tsiltaden or Chilion, Chirica-
hua, Coyoteros, Mimbrefios, MogoUones,
Pinals, **San Carlos,'* andTontos), under
Ft Apache agency, 2,058; Apache con-
sisting of the same divisions as above,
under San Carlos agency, 2,275; Apache
at Angora, Ariz., 38; Jicarillas under
school superintendent in New Mexico,
782; Mescaleros under Mescalero agency,
N. Mex., 464; Chiricahua at Ft Sill,
Ok la., 298; Kiowa Apache, under Kiowa
agency, Okla., 156. Besides these there
were 19 Lipan in n. w. Chihuahua, some
of the survivors of a tribe which, owing
to their hostility, was almost destroyed,
chiefly by Mexican KickapKX) cooperating
with Mexican troops. This remnant was
removed from Zaragoza, Coahuila, to
Chihuahua in Oct., 1^3, and a year later
were brought to the U. 8. and placed
under the Mescalero agency in New Mex-
ico. Until 1904 there lived with the
Apache of Arizona a number of Indians
of Yuman stock, particularly "Mohave
Apache,*' or Yavapai, but these are now
mostly established at old Camp McDow-
ell. The forays and conquests of the
Apache resulted in the absorption of a
large foreign element, Piman, Yuman,
and Spanish, although captives were
treated with disrespect and marriages
with them broke clan ties. The Pinal
Coyoteros, and evidently also the Jica-
rillas, had some admixture of Pueblo
blood. The Tontos (q. v.) were largely
of mixed blood according to Corbusier,
but Hrdlicka's observations show them
to be pure Apache. Tribes or bands
known or supposed to be Apache, but
not otherwise identifiable, are the follow-
ing: Alacranes, Animas, Bissarhar, Cha-
falote, Cocoyes, Colina, Doestoe, Goolkiz-
zen, Janos, Jocomes, Tejua, Tremblers,
Zillgaw.
The Apache are divided into many
clans which, however, are not totemic
ai\d they usually take their names from
the natural features of localities, never
from animals. Like clans of different
Apache tril)es recognize their affiliation.
The Juniper clan found by Bourke among
the White Mountain Apache at San Carlos
agency and Ft Apache (Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, III, 112, 1890), called by them Yogo-
yekayden, reappears as Chokonni among
the Chiricahua and as Yagoyecayn among
the Pinal Coyoteros. The White Moun-
tain Apache have a clan called Destchin
(Red Paint), which is correlated to the
Chie clan of the Chiricahua and appears
to have separated from the Satchin (Red
Rock ) clan, both being represented amons
the Navaho by the Dhestshini (Red
Streak). The Carrbo clan, Klokada-
kaydn, of San Carms agency and Ft
Apache is the Klugaducayn (Arrow
Reed) of the Pinal Coyoteros. Tutzose,
the VVater clan of the Pinal Coyoteros,
is found . also among the White Moun-
tain Apache, who have a Walnut clan,
called Ohiltneyadnaye, as the Pinal Co-
yotero have one called Chisnedinadi-
naye. Natootzuzn ( Point of Mountain) , a
clan at San Carlos agency, corresponds to
Nagosugn, a Pinal Coyotero clan. Tizses-
sinaye (Little Cottonwood Jungle of the
former) seems to have divided into the
clans Titsessinaye of the Pinal Coyotero,
of the same signification, and Destcheti-
naye (Tree in a Spring of Water). Kay-
hatin is the name of the Willow clan
among both, and the Navaho have one,
called Kai. Tzisequittzillan (Twin Peaks)
of the White Mountain Apache, Tziltadin
(Mountain Slope) of the Pinal Coyotero,
and Navaho Dsilanothilni (Encircled
Mountain), and Tsayiskidhni (Sage-brush
Hill), are supposed by Bourke to have
had a common origin. And there are
BULL. 30]
APACHES DEL PERRILLO APALACHEE
67
many others traceable in the various
Apache divisions and in the Navaho.
Ai-a'-U.— Henshaw, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883
(Panamint name). Apaod.— Clavijero, Storia
della Cal., i, 29, 1789. Apaohaa.— Hardy. Trav. in
Mex., 438, 1829. Apaohe.— Benavides, Memorial,
60, 1630. Apacherian.— Bi^elow in Pae. R. R. Rep. ,
IV, 7, 1866. Apaches.— Ofiate (1598) in Doc. In6d.,
XVI, 114, 1871. Apachia.— Humboldt, Kingd. N.
Sp., II, 271, 1811. Apachu.— N. Y. Nation, xui,
397, May 13, 1886. Apaci.— Clavigero, Storia della
Cal., map, 1789. Apade*.— Ofiate (1598) in Dm*.
In6d., XVI, 114, 303, 1871 (misprint). Apache.—
Beck with in Pae. R. R. Rep., ii, 28, 1855 (mis-
print). A-pa-huaohe.— Thoma.s, Yuma vocab.,
B. A. K, 1868 (Yuma name). Apatch.— Latham
(1853) in Proc. Ethnol. Soc. Loud., vi, 74. 1854.
Apatohet.— Derbanne (1717) in Margry, Dt^c.. vi,
206, 1886. ApaU.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Seri
name). Apataoheee.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, v,
641, 1882. Apatsh.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc.
Lond., 105, 1856. Apedee.— Columbu.s Mem. Vol.,
155, 1893 (misprint). Apiohee.— Ofiate (1599) in
Doc. In6d., XVI, 308, 1871 (misprint). Amchi.—
Espejo misquoted by Bourke, On the Border
with Crook, 122, 1891. Apoohee.— Perea, Segunda
Rel., 4, 1633. Appacheee.- Ind. Aff. Rep., 593,
1837. Appadiee.— Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 110. 1806.
Appechee.— Schermerhom in Mass. Hi.^t. Coll., ii,
29, 1814. A-pwa'-toi.— Dorsey, MS. Kansa vocab.,
B. A. E., 1883 (Kansa form). Atokuwe.— ten Kate,
Synonymic, 10, 1884 (Kiowa name). Awatch.—
Ibid., 8 (Ute name}. Awatche.— Ibid. Awp.—
Grossman, Pima and Papago vocab., B. A. E., 1871
(Pima name). Ohah'-shm.— Whipple, Pae. R. R.
Rep., Ill, pt. 3, 89, 1856 (Santo Domingo Keres
name). OMehye'.— Hodge, field notes, B. A. E.,
1895 ( Laguna name ) . Ha-ma-kaba-mitc kwa-dig. —
Corbusier, MS. Mojave vocab., B. A. E., 1885
(Mohave name: • faraway Mohaves'). H'iwana.—
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E.,1895(Taos name: 'filthy
people' ). Ijihua'-a.— Gatschet, Yuma-Spr.,iii, 86,
1886 (Havasupai name). Inde.— Bourke in Jour.
Am. Folk-lore, li, 181. 1889 (own name). Jaro-
•oma.— Kino (1700) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th ser., i,
346, 1866 (Pima name). Mountain Comanche.-
Yoakum, Hist. Texas, l, map, 1855. Kuxtsuhin-
tan.— Gatschet, MS. Cheyenne vocab., B. A. E.
(Cheyenne name). H'day.— Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, in, 175, 1890 (original tritml name).
'Hde.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 196, 1885 ^a
form of Tinneh: • people'). ITDe. —Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 259, 1890. Oop.— ten Kate,
Reizen in N. Am., 26, 1885 (Papago name). Op.—
Gatschet, Yuma-Spr., ili, 86, 1886 (Pima name).
Orp.— Whipple, Pae. R. R. Rep., iii. pt. 3, 94, 1856
(Pima name). Paches.- Parker, Jour., 32, 1840.
PatchUagi.— Gatschet, Shawnee MS., B. A. E.
(Shawnee name). Petchieagi. — Ibid, (alterna-
tive Shawnee form) . Poanin. — Hodge, field
notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Sandia and Isleta name).
P'onin. — Gatschet. MS. Isleta vocab. (Isleta
name). Red Apache*. —Vargas (1692) transliter-
ated by Davis, Span. Conq. N. Mex., 371, 1S69.
Shis-Inday. — Cremony, Life among Apaches. 243.
1868 ('men of the woods': so called by them-
selves because their winter quarters are always
located amidst forests). Ta-ashi.— Gatschet, Co-
manche MS., B. A. E. (Comanche name for
Apache in general: ' turned up,' referring to their
mocca.sins). Tagui.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A.
E., 1081, 1896 (old Kiowa name). Tagukeresh.—
Hodge, Pueblo MS. notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Pecos
name; see Querecho). TashXn.- Mooney in 17th
Rep., B. A. E., 245, 1898 (Comanche name).
Taxkihe.— Gatschet, MS. Arapaho vocab. (Arap-
aho name; cf. Tha'kahinS'na, 'saw-fiddle men,'
under Kiowa Apache). ThaH-a-i-nin'.— Hayden,
Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 326, 1862 ('people
who play on bone instruments,' that is, a pair
of bufifalo ribs, one notched, over which the
other is rubbed: Arapaho name). Tinde. — Bourke
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ii. 181, 1889 ('people':
own name). Tinna'-ash.— Gatschet, MS. Wichita
vocab., B. A. E., (Wichita name: cf. Gind's under
Kiawa Apache). Tokawe.— ten Kate, Synonymic,
10,1884 ( Kiowa name ) . Tihiahe.— Ibid. , 7 ( Laguna
name). Utce-ci-nyu-mfih. — Fewkes in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, v, 33, 1892 (Hopi name), tttaaamu—
Voth, Traditions of the Hopi, 59, 1905 (Hopi
name). Xa-he'-to-no'.— Gatschet, inf'n, 1891
(Cheyenne name: 'those who tie their hair
back'). Yapachee. —Robin, Voy. A la Louisiane,
III, 14, 1807. Yostg feme. —ten Kate, Reizen in N.
Am., 259, 1885 (Hopi name). Yotche-eme.— ten
Kate, Synonvmie, 7, 1884 (Hopi name). Yu-
ittcemo.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 35, 1891
(Hopi name). Yute-ehay. —Bourke, Moquis of
Ariz., IIH, 1884 (Hopi name).
Apaches del Perrillo (Span.: 'Apaches
of the little dog'). A band of Apache
occupying, in the 16th and 17th centuries,
the region of the Jornada del Muerto,
near the Rio Grande, in s. N. Mex., where
a spring was found by a dog, thus saving
the Spaniards much suffering from thirst.
They were probably a part of the Mesca-
leros or of the Mimbrefios of later date.
(f. w. n.)
Apaches del perillo.— De I'lsle, map Am. Sept.,
1700. Apachee del Perrillo.— Benavides, Memo-
rial, 14, 1630. Apaches de Peryllo.— Linschoten,
Desc. de I'Am., map 1, 1638.
Apaches del Qnartelejo. A band of
Jicarillas which in the 17th and l^th cen-
turies resided in the valley of Beaver cr.,
Scott CO., Kans. The district was called
Quartelejo by Juan Uribarri, who on tak-
ing possession in 1706 named it the prov-
ince of San Luis, giving the name Santo
Domingo to the Indian rancheria. See
Quartelejo. (f. w. h.)
Apaches del Cuartelejo.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst.
Papers, in, 181, 1890. Apaches del Quartelejo.—
Rivera (1736) , quoted by Bandelier, op. cit, v, 184.
1890. Apaches of Cuartelejo.— Bancroft, Ariz, and
N. Mex., 236. 1889.
Apaches l[aii808( Span. : 'tame Apaches' ).
An Apache band of Arizona consisting of
100 persons (Browne, Apache Country,
291, 1869). Apparently so called by the
Mexicans in contradistinction to the more
warlike Apache.
Apahiachak. An Eskimo village in the
Kuskokwim district, Alaska; pop. 91 in
1890.
Apahiachamiut.— 11th Census, Alaslca, 164. 1893
(here referring to the inhabitants).
Apalachee. One of the principal native
tribes of Florida, fonnerly holding the
region n. of the bay now called by the
name, from about the neighborhood of
Pensacola e. to Ocilla r. The chief towns
were about the present Tallahassee and
St Marks. They were of Muskhogean
stock, and linguisticallv more nearly re-
lated to the Choctaw than to the Creeks.
The name is of uncertain etymology, but
is believed by Gatschet to be from the
Choctaw A'palachiy signifying '(people)
on the other side.* The Apalachee were
visited bv the expeditions under Narvaez
in 1528 and DeSoto in 1539, and the lat-
ter made their country his winter head-
quarters on account of its abundant re-
sources for subsistence. The people were
agricultural, industrious and prosperous,
and noted above all the surrounding
68
APALACHICOLA
[B. A. B.
tribes for their fighting qualities, of which
the Spanish adventurers had good proof.
They continued resistance to the Spanish
occupancy until after the year 1600, but
were finally subdued and Christianized,
their country becoming }he most import-
ant center of missionary effort in Florida
next to the St Augustine (Timucua) dis-
trict. In 1655 they had 8 considerable
towns, each with a Franciscan mission,
besides smaller settlements, and a total
population of 6,000 to 8,000. Their pros-
perity continued until about the year
1700, when they began to Buffer from the
raids by the wild Creek tril)es to the n.,
instigated by the English government of
Carolina, the Apalachee themselves being
strongly in the Spanish interest. These
attacks culminated in the year 1703, when
a powerful expedition under Gov. Moore
of Carolina, consisting of a company of
white troops with a thousand armed sav-
age allies of various tribes, invaded the
Apalachee country, destroyed the towns
and missions, with their fields and orange
groves, killed the Spanish garrison com-
mander and more than 20<) Apalachee
warriors, and carried off 1,400 of the tribe
into slavery. Another expedition about
a year later ravaged the neighl)oring ter-
ritory and completed the destruction.
The remnants oi the Apalachee became
fugitives among the friendly tribes or fled
for protection to the Fren(;h at Mobile,
and although an effort was made by one
of the Christian chiefs in 1718 to gather
some of them into new mission villages
(Soledad and San Luis) near Pensacola,
the result was only temporarily success-
ful. A part of the deported Apalachee
were colonized by the Carolina govern-
ment on Savannah r., at a settlement
known as Palachoocla (Palachi-okla), or
Apalachicola, but were finally merged
into the Creeks. Those who settled under
French protec^tion near Mobile crossed
the Mississippi into Louisiana after the
cession of Florida to England in 1 763, and
continued to preserve their name and
identity as late, at least, as 1804, when 14
families were still living on Bayou Rapide.
Among the principal Apalachee towns or
mission settlements of certain identifica-
tion are Apalachee (1528-39 and later,
believed to have been near the present
Tallahassee), Ayavalla, Ivitachuco, San
Marcos, San Juan, Santa Cruz, San Luis
(1718), and Soledad (1718). Consult
Barcia, Ensayo, 1723; Sibley, Hist.
Sketches, 1806; Shea, Catholic Missions,
1855; Gatschet, Creek Migr. Legend, i,
1884. (j. M.)
Aljalache.— Fontaneda (ca. 1559) in Doc. In6d., v,
537, 1866. Abalaohi.— Fontaneda in Ternaux Corn-
pans. XX, 19, 1841. Abolachi.— French, Hist. Coll.,
II, 256, 187.5. Apahlahohe.— Brinton, Florida, 92,
1859. Apalaccium.— Morelli. Fasti Novi Orbis, 20,
1776. Apalaoha.— Quesada (1792) in Am. State
Pap., Ind. Aff., i, 303, 1832. Apalache.— Biedma
(1544) in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., 47, 1857. Apa-
lachen.— Cabeza de Vaca (1528), Smith trans., 35,
1871. Apalaohia.— Linschoten, Description de
l'Am6r., 6, 1638. Apalachians.— Harris, Voy. and
Trav., II, 275, 1706. Apalaohiaf.— McKenney and
Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 80. 1854. ApaUchioM.— Bar-
cia, Ensayo, 329, 1723. ApaUohins.— Jefferys, Fr.
Doms. Am., pt. 1, 161. 1761. Apalachi».~Rafin-
esQue, in trod, to Marshall, Ky.,i, 23, 1824. Apa-
lacnita.— Hervas, Idea dell' Uni verso xvii, 90,
1784 (name of language). Apalaohitet.— Old-
mixon, Brit. Em p.. ii, 229, 1708. Apalana Rafin-
esque, introd. to Marshall, Ky., i, 23, 1824 (gen-
eral term, used for several unrelated trioes).
Apalatchce*.— Rivers, Hist. S. C, 94, 1856. Apa-
latchU.— Carroll, Hist. Coll. S. C, ii, 575, 1836.
Apalatchy. — Coxe, Carolana,22, 1741. Apalatci. —
De Bry, Brev. Narr., ii, map, 1591. Apalohen.—
Mercator,raap (1569), quoted in Maine Hist. Coll.,
I, 392, 1869. Apalehen.— Ratinesque in introd. to
Marshall. Ky., i, 23, 1824: Apallachian Indians.—
Mills, S. C, 222, 1826. Apclash.— Woodward,
Reminiscences, 79, 1859. Apeolatei.— Brinton,
Florida, 92, 1859. Apilaches.— Woodward, op. cit.,
25. Apilaahs.— Ibid., 39. Apolacka.— Holden
(1707) in N. C. Col. Records, i, 664, 1886. Apo-
lashe.-^Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 585, 1853.
Appaladhes.— Dumont, La., i, 134, 1753. Appala-
chians.—Mills, S. C, 107, 1826. Appalaohites.—
Schoolcraft in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 79, 1844.
Appalachos.— Boudiuot, Star in West, 125, 1816.
Appallatcy.— French, Hist. Coll., ii, 256, 1875. Ap-
pallatta.— Brinton. Florida, 92, 1859. Appela-
thas.— Moll,mapin Humphreys, Hist. Acct., 1730.
Appellachcc— Humphreys, Hist. Acct., 98, 1730.
Asphalashe.— Clarke and Cass in H. R. Ex. Doc. 117,
20th Cong., 100. 1829. Palache.— Cabeza de Vaca
(1527), Smith trans.. 25, 1871. Palachees.— Coxe,
Carolana, 22, map, 1741. Palatcy.— French, Hist.
Coll.. II, 256, 187.'>. Palaxy.— Brinton, Florida, 92,
1859. Peluches.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, vil, 641,
1856. Tlapans.- Rafinesque, introd. to Marshall,
Ky,, I. 23. 1824 (given as an " Apalahan" prov-
ince). Valachi.— Fontaneda in Doc. In6d., v,
538, 1866.
Apalachicola (possibly 'people on the
other side'). A Hitchiti town formerly
situate on the w. bank of lower Chatta-
hoochee r., Ala., a short distance below
Chiaha, nearly opposite the present Co-
lumbus, Ga. Formerly one of the most
important Hitchiti settlements, it had lost
its importance by 1799. It was a peace
town and received the name Talua-hlako,
'great town.' Bartram states that about
1750 it was moved up the river, and that
the people spoke the Hitchiti dialect. In
the abbreviated form Palatchukla the
name is applied to part of Chattahoo-
chee r. below the junction with Flint r.
Hodgson (introd. to Haw^kins, Sketch)
states that " Palachookla," the capital of .
the confederacy, was a very ancient Uchee
town, but this statement may be due to
confusion with the later Apalachicola
(q. V.) on Savannah r., S. C. The name
Apalachicola was also frequently used by
both Spaniards and French in the 18tn
century to include all the Lower Creeks
then settled on Chattahoochee r. (.i. m.)
Apalacheoolo.— Barcia (1718). En.««ayo Cron.. 336,
1723. Apalachiooloes.— Archdale in Carroll, Hist.
Coll. S. C, n, 107, 1707. Apalachicoly.— Iberville
(1701) in Marprrv, D^c, iv, 594, 1880. Aralaohi-
ooulsrs.— Ibid.. 551. Apalaohooola.— U.S. Ind. Treat.
( 1814) . 162. 1837. Apalaohuola. —Bartram, Travels,
387. 1791. Apalatchukla.— GatHchet, Creek Migr.
Leg. . 1, 08. 1884. Apalatchy-Cola. —Coxe, Carolana,
29, 1741 . Appalaohicolas.— Gallatin, Arch. Am., 96,
BOLL. 30]
APALACHICOLA APOHOLA
69
1836. OonohMues.— Iberville in Mar^ry, Deo..
IV, 594, 1880. Engliah Indians.— Archdale in Car-
roll, Hist. Coll. S. C, II, 107, 1707. Italua 'lako.—
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i. 145, 1881 ('great
town': popular Creek name). Pahlaohooolo.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854. Pah-lo-
oho-k6-lo8.— Drake, Bk. Inds., iv, 94, 1848. Pala-
chioolaa.— Jefferys, French Dom., map, 134, 1761.
Palaohooalas.— Steven.s, Hist. Ga., 117, 1847. Pala-
ohoooUu— Hodgson in Hawkins, Sketch (1799),
17, 1848. Pa-li-chooc-le.— Hawkins, ibid., 65.
Palaohuokolat.— McCall, Hist. Georgia, i, 363, 1811.
PalaohuQ^a.— Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, v, •262, 18.%. Parachuctoxis.— Boudinot,
Star in West, 128, 1816. Paracpoocla.— Hodgson
in Hawkins, Sketch, 17, 1848. Polaohuoolaa.—
Drake, Bk. of Inds., 29, 1848. Poollachuchlaw.—
Mol^ map in Humphreys, Hist. Acet., 1730.
Tallawa XMucoo.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1827). 420,
1837. Tal-lo-wauthlucoo.— Hawkins. Sketch (1799),
65, 1848. Tflua 'lako.— Gatschet. Creek Migr.
Leg., I, 145, 1884. Tolowaroh. -H. R. Ex. Dot'. 276,
24th Cong. 308, 1836. Tolowar thlocoo.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854.
Apalachicola. A town on Savannah r.,
in what is now Hampton co., S. C.-, where
was settled a remnant of the Apalachee
from the towns about Apalachee bay,
which were carried thither as captives
when the tribe was destroyed by Gov.
Moore in 1703. (a. s. g.)
Apalon. An unidentified village near
the mouth of St Johns r., Fla., in 1564. —
Laudonni^re in French, Hist. Coll. La.,
n. s., 315, 1869.
Appalou.— De Bry, Brev. Nar.. map, 1591.
Apangasi. A former Mi wok village on
Tuolumne r., Tuolumne co., C'al.
Apanffape.— McKee et al. (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc.
4, 32a Cong., spec, sess., 74, isr>;i (misprint).
Apaneasi.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soe. Lond.,
81, 1856. Apangaue.— Barbour et al. ^851) in Sen.
Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 70. 18.53.
A-panff-aasi.— Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc.
61, 32a Cong., 1st sess.. 22, 1852. Apoung-o-Me.—
Ind. AIT. Rep., 222, 1851. Ap-yang-ape.— Barbour
(1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4. 32d Cong., spec. sess..
262, 1853 (misprint).
Apannow. See Epanoir.
Apap ( A ^pap) . A social division of the
Pima, belonging to the Stoamohimal,
or White Ants, phratral group. — Russell,
Pima MS., B. A. E., 313, 1903.
Apaqssos ('deer'). A subphratry or
gens of the Menominee. — Hoffman in
14th Rep. B. A. K., pt. 1, 42, 1896.
Apatai (*a covering,' from apatayas,
* I cover' ). A former subordinate village
of the Lower Creek town Kasihta, on a
creek 2(tm. e. of Chattahoochee r., Ga.,
probably on the site of the present town
of IJpatoie, on a creek of the same name
in Muscogee co., Ga.
Au-put-tou-e.— Hawkins, Sketch (1799), 59. 1848.
Apatsiltlishihi ( ' black [tlizhi] Apache' ).
A division of the Jicarilla Apache who
claim the district of Mora, N. Mex., as
their former home. (.i. m. )
Apa'Uil-tU-rixi'hi.— Mooney, field notes, B. A. E..
1897.
Apeche. A Luiseno village w. of San
Luis Rey mission, San Diego co., Cal. —
Jackson and Kinnev, Rep. Miss. Inds.,
29, 1883.
Apena. A pueblo of New Mexico in
1598; doubtless situated in the Salinas,
in the vicinity of Abo, and occupied by
the Tigua or the Piros.— Ofiate (1598J in
Doc. Incd., XVI, 114, 1871.
Aperger. The Yurok name of a Karok
village on the w. bank of Klamath r., sev-
eral miles l)elow Orleans Bar, said to con-
sist of 10 houses in 1852. (a. l. k. )
Sogorem.— Kroeber, infn, 1903 (said to Ihj the
Karok name).
Apewantanka {ape 'leaf,' 'fin,* apehin
'mane,' tangkn 'large': 'large manes
[of horses]'). A division of the Brule
Sioux.
Apewan tanka. —Dorse v in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218,
1897. Apewa^-tanka.— Ibid.
Apichi. A "family" or division of the
Cuyuhasomi phratry of the Timucua. —
Pareja {ca. 1612) quoted by Gatschet in
Am. Philos. Soc. Proc, xvn, 492, 1878.
Apikaiyiks '( ' skunks ' ) . A division of
the Kainah and of the Piegan.
Ah-pe-ki'.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 171, 1877 (Kainah).
Ah-pe-ki'-e.— Ibid. (IMegan). Ap'-i-kai-yikt.—
Grinnell, Blackfout Lodge Tales, 209, 1892 (Kai-
nah and Piegan). A-pi-kai'-yiks. — Hayden, Eth-
nog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 264, 1862 (Piegan).
Apil. A Costanoan village, containing
neophytes in 1^19 according to Friar
Olbez; situated near the mission of Santa
Cruz, Cal. — Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, Apr.
5, 18(>0.
Apish, Apisha. See Pishaug.
Apishamore. A saddle blanket, made
of buffalo-calf skins, used on the great
prairies (Bartlett, Diet. Americanisms,
15, 1877). An impossible derivation of
this word from the French emp^chemmt
has Ix'en suggested. Meaning and form
make it evi(leiit that the term is a cor-
ruption of apishimorij which in the Chip-
pewa and closely related dialects of
Algonquian signifies * anything to lie
down upon.' (a. f. c. )
Apishaug. See Pinhaug.
Apistonga. An unidentified tribe ap-
parently in N. Ala.; marked on Mar-
(juette's map of 1673 (Shea, Discov., 268,
1852).
Aplache. Given as the name of a band
and its village on uj)per Tuolumnie r.,
Tuolumne co., Cal., in 1850. According
to Adam Johnson (Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, iv, 407, 1854) the people could
not speak the Miwok language; neverthe-
less, judging by their location and the
bands with which they are mentioned, it
is probable that they belonged to the
Mocjuelumnan family.
Ap-la-che.— Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc.4,32d
Cong., spec. ses.s., 252, 1853.
Apohola (* buzzard'). A Timucua
phratry which included the Nuculaha,
Nuculahacius, Nuculaharuqui, Chorofa,
Tsinaca, Ayahanisino, Napoya, Amaca-
huri, Hauenayo, and Amusaya clans.
They were prohibited from marrying
among themselves. — Pareja {ca. 1612)
quoted by Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philos.
Soc, XVII, 492, 1878.
70
APOHOL YTH AS AQUA DOCTA
[b. a. s.
Apoholythas. A Creek town in Indian
Ten, 10 ni. from the n. fork of Canadian
r.— Raines (1838) in H. R. Doc. 219,
27th Cong., :M sess., 110, 1843.
Apokak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil-
Xnear the mouth of Kuskokwim r.,
ka; pop. 94 in 1880, 210 in 1890.
Ahpokagamiut— 11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Apokaoliamuta.— Hal lock in Nat. Geog. Max., 88,
1898. Apokacmuta.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska,
153, 1884.
Aponitre. A pueblo of the province of
Atripuy in the region of the lower Rio
Grande, N. Mex., in 1598.— Ofiate (1598)
in Doc. In6d., xvi, 115, 1871.
Apontigonmy. An Ottawa village, at-
tacked by the Seneca in 1670.— <]Jourcelles
(1670) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, V88,
1855.
Apoon. A Chnagmiut village on Apoon
pass, the n. mouth of Yukon r., Alaska.
Aphoon.— Post-route map, 1903.
Aposon. See Opossum.
Apoya. The extinct Sky clan of the
Zufli.
Apoya-kwe.— Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 368,
1896 ()l'ti;c=' people' ).
Aposolco. A former pueblo of the Col-
otlan division of the Cora and the seat of
a mission, situated on the Rio Colotlan,
a tributary of the Rio Grajide de Santiago,
Jalisco, Mexico. — Orozco y Berra, Geog.,
280, 1864.
Appeelatat. A Montagnais village on
the s. coast of Labrador. — Stearns, Cabra-
dor, 271, 1884.
Appoans. See P(m€,
Appocant. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy in 1608 on the n. bank of
Chickahominv r.. New Kent co., Va. —
Smith (1629),' Virginia, map, repr. 1819.
Appomattoc. A tribe of the Powhatan
conf^eracy formerly living on lower Ap-
pomattox f., Va. they had 60 warriors
m 1608, and were of some importance as
late as 1671, but were extinct by 1722.
Their principal village, which bore the
same name and was on the site of Ber-
muda Hundred, Prince George co., was
burned by the English in 1611. Appo-
matox was also one of the terms applied
to the Matchotic, a later combination of
remnants of the same confederacy.
(j. M.)
Apamatioa.— Percy n Purchas. Pilgrimes, iv, 1.688,
1626. Apamatioki. — La wson ( 1 701 ) , Hist. Carolina,
163, 1860. Apamatuok.— Smith quoted by Drake,
Bk.Ind8.,bk.4,10,1818. Apamatok.— Smith (1629),
Virj^nia, ii. 12, repr. 1819. Apomatook.— Batts
(1671) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ni. 193, 1853. Ap-
pamatox.— Beverly, Virginia, 199, 1722. Appamat-
toos.— Jefferson, Notes, 179, 1801. Appamattttoks.—
Strachey (1612 ?). Virginia, vi, 35, 1849. Appa-
matuoke. —Smith (1629), Virginia, i, 116, repr. 1819.
Appomatoekt.— Maeauley, N. Y., ii, 166^ 1829.
Appomattake.— Doc. of 1643 in N. C. Col..Rec., i,
it; 1886. Appomatuok.— Doc. of 1728, ibid., II. 784,
1886. Appomotaoki.— Boudiuot, Star in the West,
125, 1816.
Apnkasatoelia ( apoka = * settlement *). A
former Seminole town of which Enehe-
mathlochee was chief in 1823, situated 20
m. w. of the head of St Johns r., central
Fla.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 74, 19th Cong., 27,
1826.
Apnki (.Vp&M'j. A social divison of
the Pima, belonging to the Stoamohimal,
or White Ants,phratral group. — Russell,
Pima MS., B. A. E., 313, 1903.
Apntitek. A ruined Eskimo village in
E. Greenland, lat. 67° 47'.— Meddelelser
om Gronland, xxvii, map, 1902.
Apntosikainah ( ' northern Bloods ' ) . A
band of the Kainah division of the Sik-
sika.
Ap-ut'-o-u-kai-nah. — Grinnell, Blackfoot L6dge
Tales, 209, 1892.
Apyn. The Yurok name of the north-
ern part of the important Karok village
of Katimin, on Klamath r., Gal., a mile
above the mouth of the Salmon. ( a. l. k. )
Aqbiriiarbiiig ( * a lookout for whales*).
A winter settlement of Nu^umiut at C.
True, Baffin land.— Boas in 6th Rep.
B. A. E., 422, 1888.
Aqnacalecnen. A Tiniuquanan village
near Suwannee r., n. w. Fla., visited by
De Soto in 1539.— Biedma (1544) in
French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 98, 1850.
Oaliqu«B.— Gentl. of Elvas (1567) in French, op.
cit.. 131.
Ainackanonk (from ach-quoa-k-kan-
nonky *a place in a rapid stream where
fishing is aone with a bush-net.* — Nelson).
A division of the Unami Delawares
which occupied lands on Passaic r., N. J.,
and a considerable territory in the in-
terior, including the tract known as Dun-
dee, in Passaic, just below the Dundee
dam, in 1678. In 1679 the name was used
to describe a tract in Saddle River town-
ship, Bergen co., as well as to designate
"the old territory, which included all of
Paterson s. of the Passaic r., and the city
of Paterson." The Aquackanonk sold
lands in 1676 and 1679. See Nelson and
Ruttenber, below.
Aohquecenonck.— Doc. of 1714 quoted by Nelson,
Inds. N. J., 122, 1894. Aohqaiokenoansh.— Doc. of
1696, ibid. Aohqoiokenunok.— Doc. of 1698, ibid.
Achquiokenunk.— Doc. of 1696, ibid. Adiqnika-
nunoque.— Doc. of 1698, ibid. Aokquekeaoa.— Doc.
of 1679, ibid. Aoquackanonk.— Ruttenber, Tribes
Hudson R., 91, 1872. Aoquioanunok. — Doc. of
1692 quoted by Nelson, op. cit. Aoqninr^nonok. —
Doc. of 1693. ibid. Acquikanong.— D^. of 1706,
ibid. Amakaraongky.— De Laet {ca. 1633) in N. Y.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d 8., i, 315, 1841 (same?). Aquach-
onongue.— Doc. of 1696 quoted by Nelson, op. cit.
Aquaokanonks. — De Laet, op. cit. Aquaninonoke. —
Doc. of 1683 quoted by Nelson, op. cit. Aquaqua-
nunoke.— Doc. of 1684, ibid. Aqueckenonce.— Doc.
of 1696, ibid. Aqueekkonunaue.— Doc. of 1698, ibid.
Aquagnonke.— I)oc. of 1679, ibid. Aquevquiiraiike —
Doc. of 1682, ibid. Aquiokanuoke.— Doc. of 1678,
ibid. Aquiokanunke.— Doc. of 1685, ibid. Aquoe-
ohononque.— Doc. of 1698, ibid. Haokqaiekanoa. —
Doc. of 1694, ibid. Eaoquiokenunk.— Doc. of 1696,
ibid. Haghauagenonok.— Doc. of 1736, ibid.
Haauequenunok. — De Laet. op. cit. Haouiooaee-
nook. -Doc. of 1678, ibid. Hookquaokaaonk.— Doc.
of 1707, ibid. Hookquaokonong. — Ibid. Hoek-
iueoanung.— Doc. of 1683, ibid, fiookquekanung.—
)oc. of 1680, ibid. Hookquiokanon. — Doc. of
1693. ibid.
Aqnadoota. The dwelling place of ''a
tribe of Indians'* in 1690, living westward
BULL. 30]
AQUASC()G()(^ ARAHASOMI
71
from Casco and Saco, Me., and stt'iningly
allied with the Abnaki. — Niles (r«. 17H1 )
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,3d s., vi, 217, 18:^7.
Aquasoogoc. An Algon(}uiaii village on
the coast of Hyde cc, N. C, at the time
of the first visit of the English. It was
burned by them in 1585.
Agmweoga.— Martin, N. C. i, :^, 1829. Aguasco-
•ack. — Bozman, Maryland, i, 60, 1837. Aquasco-
goc.— Lane (1586) in Smith (1629), Virginia, i. 86.
repr. 1819. Aquatoogoke.— Stmehey (m. ir»i2),
Vfnrtnia, 145, 1849. Aquoscojos.— Schoolcraft, Iiid.
Tribes, VI. 93, 1857. Aqusoogock.— Dutch map
(1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i, 1856.
Aquebogne (the word suggests the Chip-
pewa i'lkupiyiWy a locative term referring
to the place where land and water meet;
it has the meaning * shore,' but tlie spe-
cific useis for ' the edge of the water,' the
point of view l)eing from the land; i'lkii
refers to the 'end,' 'edge,' pi to 'wa-
ter.*— Wm. Jones). A village, i)robably
of the Corchaug, alx)ut tlie year KioO, on
a creek entering the x. side of (ireat
Peconic bay. Long Island (Ruttenber;
Thompson). In 1905 K. N. Pennv (in
Rec. of Past, iv, 228, 1905) discovered the
remains of an ancient village " of 12-wig-
wam size" in a thick wood near A(|ue-
bogne, inland from Peconic bay, w. of the
vf. branch of Steeple Church cr. and be-
tween that stream and a large tributary
of Peconic r. These may be the remains
gf the ancient Aquebogue.
Accopogue.— Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R.. 'MV\
1872. Aquebogue. — Th< >in pson . Long 1 d . , is 1 , 1 .s;j*>.
Aqnetnet (aqiietn-ef, 'at an island.' —
Trumbull). A village in 1655 at Skau-
ton neck, Sandwich tp., Barnstable co.,
Mass., under chief Ackanootus, in the
territory of the Nauset. The word
seems to be the same a.^ Aquidneck
(Quidnick) , R I., which Trumbullthinks
means 'place at the end of the hill,' com-
pKJunded from ukque-adene-tmle; or pos-
sibly 'place beyond the hill,' ogiiup-cuhuv-
auke. Mentioned bv a writer of 1815 in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., iv, 298,
1816. (j. M.)
Aqni. A former Maricopa rancheria on
the Rio (iila, s. w. Ariz. — Sedelmair
(1744) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz, and N.
Mex., 366, 1889.
Aquicabo. A pueblo of the province of
Atripuv in the region of the lower Kio
Grande, N. Mex., in 1598.— Oilate (1598)
in Doc. In^^d., xvi, 115, 1871.
Aquicato. — Ofiatc misquoted by Bancroft. Ariz,
and N. Mex., 13,% 1889.
Aqnile. A village in n. w. Fla. on the
border of the Apalachee territory, visited
by De Soto in 1539.-Biedma (1544) in
French, Hist. Coll., ii, 98, 1850.
Aqnimnndnreoh. A former Maricopa
rancheria on the Rio Gila, s. w. Ariz. —
Sedelmair (1744) cjuoted by Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 366, 1889.
Aqnimuri ( probably from Viina nkimfiH,
* river*). A rancheria of one of the
Piman tribes, probably Papago, visited
by Father Kino about 1700; situated in
Sonora, on the headwaters of the Rio
Altar, just s. of the Arizona boundary.
It was later a visita of the mission of
(iuevavi. Consult Rudo Ensayo (1763),
150, 1868; Kino, map (1701) in Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 360, 1889.
Akimuri. — Kino, map (1701) in Stocklein, Neue
Welt-Bott. 74, 1726. Aquimuricuca.— Cancio (1768)
in DcK-. Hist. Mex., 4th s., ii, 270, 1856. 8. Ber-
nardo Aquimuri.— Kino quoted by Bancroft, No.
Mex. States, i, .501, 1884.
Aquinsa. Mentioned by Ofiate in 1598
as one of 6 villages occupied by the
Zuiii in New Mexico. In the opinion of
Bandelier (Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 338,
1892) it is identical with Pinawan, a
now ruined pueblo IJ m. s. w. of Zufli
pueblo. Cushing (in Millstone, ix, 55,
1884) regarded Ketchina, 15 m. s. w. of
Zufii, as the probable Aquinsa of the
Spaniards, and in 1888 (Internat. Cong.
Amer., vii, 156, 1890) the same authority
gave Kwakina in connection with Pina-
wan as the pueblo to whichOfiate referred.
Aqnitnn (Akitchini/, 'creek mouth* —
Ku.«sell). A former Pima rancheria 5
m. w. of Picacho, on the border of the
sink of Kio Santa Cruz, s. Ariz., visited
by Father Garces in 1775. It was aban-
doncil about the l)eginning of the 19th
century. A few Mexican families have
occupied its vicinity for many years.
The present Pima claiu) that it was a vil-
lage of their forefathers. See Akuchinif.
Akutciny.— Russell. Pima MS., B. A. E., 16, 1902
(Pima name: tr -ch). Aquitun.— Arricivita,Cr6n.
Serdf., II, 4ir>, Msyi. Bajio de Aquituno.— Anza and
Font (1780) quoted »)y Bancroft. Ariz, and N.
Mex., 392. 1SS9. Equituni.— Garc<5s (1776), Dlarv,
(v5. 1900.
Aquixo. A town visited by De Soto's
army in 1541, situated on the w. bank of
the Mississippi, not far from the mouth
of St Francis r., Ark., and perhaps be-
longing to the Quapaw. (Gentl. of Elvas,
1557, quoted in French, Hist. Coll. La.,
II, 169, 1850.)
Aqnonena. An unidentified town w. of
upper St Johns r., Fla., in 1565. — De Bry,
Brev. Nar., ii, map, 1591.
Aracnchi. An unidentified village ap-
parently in N. w. S. C, visited by Juan
Pardoin 1565. — Vandera (1567) in Smith,
Colec. Docs. Fla., i, 17, 1857.
Arauchi.— Vandera, op. cit.
Aragaritka. The name given by the
Iro<|uoistothe tribes, including the Huron
and Tionontati, which they drove out
from the peninsula between L. Huron
and L. Erie and from lower Michigan. —
Iroquois deed (1701) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., IV, 908, 1854.
Arahasomi ( ' bear gens,' from ara * black
bear, ' hasomi ' family ' ) . A Timucua clan
of the Chulufichi phratry. — Pareja (ca.
1612) quoted bv Gatschet in Proc. Am.
Philos. Soc, XVII, 492, 1878.
72
ABAMAY ABAPAHO
[B. A. B.
Aramay. A former village, presuma-
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
^Aranama. A small agricultural tribe
formerly living on and near the s. coast
of Texas; later they were settled for a
time at the mission of Espiritu Santo de
Zdfiiga, opposite the present Goliad,
where some Karankawa Indians were
also neophytes. It is reported that they
had previously suffered from an attack
by the Karankawa. Morse located them
in 1822 on San Antonio r. and estimated
them at 125 souls. In 1834 Escudero
(Not. Estad. de Chihuahua, 231) spoke
of them as follows: **The same coast
and its islands are inhabited by the
Curancahuases and Jaranames Indians,
fugitives from the missions. The larger
portion have lately settled in the new
mission of Nuestra Sefiora del Refugio, .
and to-day very few rebellious families re-
main, so that the injuries caused by these
cowardly but cruel Indians have ceased.**
I As a tribe the Aranama were extinct by
1 1843. (a. c. F.)
».— Rivera, Diario y Derrot., leg. 2,602, 1736.
u».— Thrall, Hist. Texas, 446, 1879. Ara-
(.— Rivera, op. cit. ArrenamuMt. — Morse,
Rep. to Sec. War, 374, 1822. Aurananeans.—Bou-
dinot, Star in the West, 125, 1816. Hasanames.—
Robin, Voy. d. la Loulsiane, in, 14, 1807. Jara-
name*. —Escudero, Not. Estad. de Chihuahua, 231,
1834. Jnranamea.— Morfi quoted by Bancroft, No.
Mex. StateH, i, 631, 1886. XanunenM.— Bollaert
in Ethnol. Soc. Lond. Jour., ii, 265. 280, 1850.
XaranamM.— Texas State Archives, MS. no. 83,
1791 92.
Aranca. The name of two Pima vil-
lages in 8. Ariz., one with 208 inhabi-
tants in 1858, the other with 991.— Bailey
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208, 1858.
Aranimokw. The Yurok name of a
Karok village near Red Cap cr., an
affluent of Klamath r., Cal. (a. l. k.)
■ Arapaho. An important Plains tribe of
the great Algonquian family, clasel v asso-
ciated with the Cheyenne for at least a
century past. They call themselves Inu-
flainoy about equivalent to *our people.*
The name by which they are commonly
known is of uncertain derivation, but it
may possibly be, as Dunbar suggests,
from the Pawnee tirapihu or larapihu,
* trader.* By the Sioux and Cheyenne
they are called ** Blue-sky men** or
"Cloud men," the reason for which is
unknown.
According to the tradition of the Arap-
aho they were, once a sedentary, agricul-
tural people, living far to the n. e. of their
more recent habitat, apparently about
the Red r. valley of n. Minn. From
this point they moved s. w. across the
Missouri, apparently about* the same
time that the Cheyenne (q. v.) moved
out from Minnesota, although the date
of the formation of the permanent alli-
ance between the two tribes is uncertain.
The Atsina fq. v.), afterward associated
with the Siksika, appear to have sepa-
rated from the parent tribe and moved
off toward the n. after their emergence
into the plains. The division into North-
em and Southern Arapaho is largely
geographic, originating within the last
century, and made permanent by the
placing of the two bands on different res-
ervations. The Northern Arapaho, in
Wyoming, are considered the nucleus or
mother tribe and retain the sacred tribal
articles, viz, a tubular pii)e, one ear of
com, and a turtle figurine, all of stone.
Since they crossed the Missouri the drift
of the Arapaho, as of the Cheyenne and
Sioux, has been w. and s., the Northern
Arapaho making lodges on the edge of
SCABBY BULL— ARAPAHO
the mountains about the head of the
North Platte, while the Southern Arap-
aho continued down toward the Arkan-
sas. About the year 1840 they made
peace with the Sioux, Kiowa, and Co-
manche, but were always at war with the
Shoshoni, Ute, and Pawnee until they
were confined upon reservations, while
generally maintaining a friendly attitude
toward the whites. By the treaty of
Medicine Lodge in 1867 the Southern
Arapaho, together with the Southern
Cheyenne, were placed upon a reserva- .
tion in Oklahoma, which was thrown
open to white settlement in 1892, the
Indians at the same time receiving allot-
ments in severalty, with the rights of
American citizenship. The Northern
Arapaho were assigned to their present
BULL. 30]
ARAPAHO
73
reservation on Wind r. in Wyoming in
1876, after having made peace 'with their
hereditary enemies, the Shoshoni, living
upon the same reservation. The Atsina
division, usually regarded as a distinct
tribe, is associated with the Assiniboin on
Ft Belknap res. in Montana. They
numbered, respectively, 889, 859, and 535
m 1904, a total of 2,283, as against a total
of 2,638 ten vears earlier.
As a people the Arapaho are brave, but
kindly ana accommodating, and much
given to ceremonial observances. The
annual sun dance is their greatest tribal
ceremony, and they were active propa-
gators of the ghost-dance religion (q. v. )
a few years ago. In arts and home life,
until within a few years past, they were
a typical Plains tribe. They bury their
dead in the ground, unlike the Cheyenne
and Sioux, who deposit them upon scaf-
folds or on the surface of the ground in
boxes. They have the military organiza- .
tion common to most of the Plains tribes
(see Military societies) ^ and have no trace
of the clan system.
They recognize among themselves five
main divisions, each speaking a different
dialect and apparently representing as
many originally distinct but cognate
tribes, viz:
( 1 ) Ndkasinfi^'na, Bdachin^na, or North-
em Arapaho. NakasinSna, 'sagebrush
men,' is the name used by themselves.
Baachin^na, *red wHIqw men (?),' is
the name by which they were com-
monly known to the rest of the tribe.
The Kiowa distinguished them as Ta-
gyako, * sagebrush people,' a translation
of their proper name. They keep the
sacred tribal articles, and are considered
the nucleus or mother tribe of the Arap-
aho, being indicated in the sign language
(q. V.) by the sign for '* mother people."
(2) N^wunCna, * southern men,' or
Soutnern Arapaho, called NawathfnSha,
^* southerners,' by the Northern Arapaho.
The Kiowa know them as Ahayadal, the
(plural) name given to the wild plum.
The sign for them is made by rubbing the
index finger against the side of the nose.
(3) Aa^'ninSna, Hitiin^na, Atsina, or
Gros Ventres of the Prairie. The first
name, said to mean 'white clay people,'
is that by which they call themselves.
HitunSna, or Hitun^nina, * begging men,*
* beggars,' or more exactly * spongers,' is
the name by which they are called by the
other Arapaho. The same idea is in-
tended to be conveyed by the tribal sign,
which has commonly been interpreted as
* big bellies,* whence the name Gros Ven-
tres applied to them by the French Cana-
dians. In this way tney have been by
some writers confused with the Hidatsa,
the Gros Ventres of the Missouri. See
Atsina,
(4) BasawunSna, 'wood-lodge people,'
or, possibly, * big lodge people.' These,
according to tradition, were formerly a
distinct tribe and at war with the Arap-
aho, but have been incorporated for at
least 150 years. Their dialect is said to
have differed considerably from the other
Arapaho dialects. There are still about
50 of this lineage among the Northern
Arapaho, and perhaps a few with the
other two main divisions.
(5) Hilnahawun^na ('rock men' —
Kroeber) or Aanu^'nhawll. These, like
the BilsawunSna, lived with the Northern
Arapaho, but are now practically extinct.
The two main divisions, Northern and
Southern, are subdivided into several
local bands, as follows: (a) Forks of
the River Men, (b) Bad Pipes, and (c)
Greasy Faces, among the Northern Arap-
aho; (d) Wdquithi, bad faces, (e) Aqji-
thin^^'na, pleasant men, (f) Gawunfna,
Blackfeet, said to be of Siksika admix-
ture; (g) Hilqihana, wolves, (h) Siisa-
biiithi, looking up, or looking around,
i. e., watchers.
Consult Mooney, Ghost Dance Religion,
in 14th Rep. B. a'. E., ii, 1896; Clark, Ind.
Sign Language, 1885; Havden, Ethnog.
and Philol. Mo. Val., 1862;' Kroeber, The
Arapaho, Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.,
XVIII, 1900; Dorsey and Kroeber, Tradi-
tions of the Arapaho, Field Columb. Mus.
Pubs., Anthrop. ser., v, 1903; Dorsey,
Arapaho Sun Dance, ibid., iv, 1903.
(j. M.)
Aarapahoes.— Blackmore, quoting Whitfleld (1855)
in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond.. i, 315, 1869. Ihya'to.—
Mooneyin 14th Rep. B. A. E., 953, 1896 (Kiowa
name). Anapaho.— Garrard, Wahtoyah, 119, 1850
(given as Cheyenne form ). A'nipahu. — Gat.schet,
Kaw vwab., B. A. E., 1878 (Kansa name).
AnoVanyotakano.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A.E.,
953. 1896 (Kichai name). Arapahaa.— Drake, Bk.
Inds.. vi, 1848. Arapahays.— Ross, Adventures,
232,1849. Arapaho.— Ruxton, Adventures, 220,
1848. Arapahoos.— Mitchell in Ind. Aff. Rep., 59.
1842. Arapakito.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
953, 1896 (Crow name, from 'Arapaho'). Arapha-
ho€.— Wyeth in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 219,
1851. Arapha*.— Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc.
Lond., II, 279, 1850. Araphoes.— Ibid. Arapohaes.—
Audouard, Far West, 182, 1869. Arapoho.— Hay-
den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 321, 1862. Ar-
apohose.— Ibid., 402 (Crow name). Arbapaoes. —
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 40, 1864. Arepahaa. — Cass
(1834) in Schtx)lcraft. Ind. Tribes, in. 609, 1853.
Aripahoes.— Hildreth, Dragoon Campaigns, 153,
1836. Aripoho«8.— Ind. Aff. Rep., app., 241, 1846.
Ar-rah-pa-hoo.— Lewis and Clark, Travels, 15, 1807
(wrongly applied by them to a body of Pawnee).
Arrapahas. —Ind . Aff. Rep. , 694, 1837. Arrapaho. —
Long, Exp. Rocky Mts., li, 192, 1823. Arrapahoet.—
Doughertv (1837) in H. R. Doc. 276, 25th Cong.,
2d sess., 1*6, 1838. Arrapaoes.— Gallatin in Trans.
Am. Ethnol. Soc, ii, cix, 1W8. Arraphas.— Am.
Pioneer, i, 257, 1842, Arraphoes.— Bollaert in Jour.
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., ii, 266, 1850. ArrapohoM.—
Cumming in H. R. Ex. Doc. 65, 34th Cfong., Ist
8«ss., 13, 1856. Arrepahai.— Porter (1829) in School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 596, 1853. Arripahoefc— Fitz-
patrick in Ind. Aff. Rep., 74, 1851. Anpahaa.— Ind.
Aff. Rep., 425, 1842. A'-ya-to.— ten Kate, Synon-
vmie. 10. 1884 (Kiowa name). B«tid««.— Mooney
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 953, 1896 (Kiowa Apache
name). Big Bead.— Bradbury, Travels, 124, 1817.
74
ARASTE— ARCHEOLOGY
[b. a. b.
OhmritioM.— Doe. of 1828 in Soc. Geogr. Mex., 265.
1870 ( see Sarftika, below ) . Detseka'yaa. — Mooney
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 953, 1896 (Caddo name:
• dog eaters^) . Dog-eaters.— Kingsley. Stand. Nat.
Lib., pt. 6, 153, 1883. Eirichtih-Arttohpahga.— Maxi-
milian, op. cit., II, 213 (Hidatsa name, German
form). B-tah-leh.— Long, Exp. Rocky Mt*i., ii,
192, 1823 (Hidatsa name: ' bison path Indians'
fcf. adt, path; mite, bison— Mattnews] ). Gent
aea vach.— Clark (1804) in Lewis and Clark Jour-
nals, 1, 190,1904 (given as synonymous with " Kun
na-nar-wesh " ; the name is the French for ' buflFalo
people'). Hitaniwo'Iv.— Mooney in 14th Rep.
B. A. E., 953, 1896 (Cheyenne name: * cloud men ' or
•sky men'). Hi-tin-ng-wo'-i-c.— ten Kate, Syn-
onymic, 8, 1884 (Cheyenne name: 'people with
teats,' peuple aux tetons, mistaking tne 'mother'
sign; the name means ' cloud men ' ). Iniina-ina.—
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.. 953, 1896 (tribal
name: *our people'). Ita-Iddi. — Maximilian,
Travels, ii. 284, 1839-lWl (Hidatsa najne). I-tun-
i-wo.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.. 290,
1860 (Cheyenne name: ' shy-men ', for * sky men ' ).
Kaninahoio.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 953.
1896 (Chippewa name). Kaninahoioh.— Senate
Ex. Doc. no. 72, 20th Cong., 104. 1829. EaninA'-
vi»h.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 953. 1896.
Komseka-Ki'nahyup. — Ibid.. 954 ('men of the
worn-out leggings': former Kiowa name}. Kun
na-nar-wesh. — Clark (1804) in Lewis and Clark
Journals, i. 190, 1904 (given as synonymous with
"Gens des vach"). Lapah6gi.— Gatschet, MS.
Shawnee vocab.. B. A. E., 1879-80 (Shawnee name:
singular, I>apaho). Kafipiyato.- Riggs, Dakota
Diet., 2d ed.. 305. 1890 (Sioux namq). MaQhpi-
yato.— Cook. MS. Yankton vocab., B. A. E.. 1882
(Yankton name). Maqpi'ito.— Mooney in 14th
Rep. B. A. E.. 954, 1896(* blue cloud': Sioux name).
Wii'rhari's-kurikiwi'shuski. — Ibid. (Wichita
name). Rapahos.— De Smet, Missions, 263, 1848
(Garrard, Wahtoyah, 1*20, 1850. gives this as the
Spanish name for them). Sappaho. — Long, Exp.
Rocky Mts., ii, 192, 1823. SanFti'ka.— Mooney in
14th Rep. B. A. E., 954, 1896 (Pawnee name, from
the Comanche name). StkrStiQca.- Ibid, ('dog
eaters': Comanche and Shoshoni name). Sari-
tika.— Ibid. (Wichitii name, from the Comanche
name). 8antch-ka-e.— ten Kate, Synonymic. 8,
1884 (Southern Tte name). 8a-ritc'-ka-e.— Ibid.
(Ute name). Sa-ri-te'-ka.— Ibid., 9 (Comanche
and Caddo name). Sarritehoa. — Rejon quoted in
Pimentel, Cuadro Descr.. ii. 347. 1865 (given as
Comanche division). Sohaha'.— Maximilian,
Travels. ii,247. 1841 ( Arikara name. German form;
seeminglv an error for Cheyenne). Seratioks.—
Burnet (1847) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 239.
1853. Seratics.— BoUaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc.
Lond., II. 265. 1850. Sharetikeh.— Burton, City of
the Saints, 176. 1861 (Shashoni name). Tocani-
nambiohes.— Perrin du Lac, Voy. Louisianes, 260.
1806 (seemingly the Arapaho).
Araste. An Iroquoian village in 1535 on
or near St Lawrence r. , below the site of
Quebec.— Cartier (1545), Bref Rc'^cit, 82,
1863.
Arathooon. See Raccoon.
Arawakan Colony. In addition to the
many proofs of constant communication
between the tril)e8 of Florida and those
of the West Indian ids. from the earliest
period, it is definitely known that a colony
of Indians from Cuba, in quest of the
same mythic fountain of youth for which
Ponce de Leon afterward searched, landed
on the 8. w. coast of Florida, within the
territory of the Calusa (q. v.), about the
period of the discovery of America, and
that they were held as prisoners by th«
chief of that tribe and formed into a set-
tlement whose people kept their separate
identity as late at least as 1570. This tra-
dition of a wonderful spring or stream
u!X)n the mainland of Florida or on one
of the adjacent Bahama ids. was common
to all the tril)es of the larger islands as far
south as Porto Rico, and it is probable
that more than one party of islanders made
a similar attempt. According to Brinton
and other investigators the Indians of
Cuba, as well as oi the Bahamas and the
larger islands, were of the great Arawakan
stock, which extends in South America
as far as s. Brazil and Bolivia. For the
Cuban settlement in Florida see Fonta-
neda. Memoir, Smith trans, 1854; Barcia,
Ensayo, in trod., 1723; Herrera, Hist,
(ien., I, 1720. (j. m.)
ArbadaoB. A tribe that Cabeza de Vaea
(Smith trans., 76, 1851) met during his
sojourn in Texas (1527-34) in the vicinity
of the Avavares. He describes the people
as "lank and weak," owing to scarcity
of food; and although they seem to have
lived in a fertile country they did not
cultivate the soil. Their ethnic relations
are not known.
Aoubadaos.— Cabeza de Vaca, Smith trans., 84, 1851.
Arbadao*.— Ibid., 76. Arbadoe*.— Harris, Voy. and
Trav.. 1, 803, 1706.
Arbaktung. A subdivision of the Akud-
nirmiut; they winter generally on C.
Bisson, Home bav, BaflSn land. — Boas in
Deutsche Geog. Bliitt., viii, 34, 1885.
Archeology. Archeological researches ,
are applied to the elucidation of three :
principal departments of inquiry : (1 ) The
history of the race and the sub-races; (2)
the history of the separate families, tribes,
and inferior social groups; (3) the history
of culture in its multifarious forms. Ques-
tions of origin and antiquity are necessa-
rily considered in connection with inves-
tigations in each of these departments. In
the present article all that can be included
is a brief review of the salient features of
the archeology of northern America.
In no part of America are there re-
mains of man or his works clearly in-
dicating the presence of peoples distinct
from the Indian and the Eskimo, or hav-
ing culture markedly different in kind
and degree from those characterizing the
aborigines of historic times. Archeolog-
ical researches serve to carry the story of
the tribes and their culture back indefi-
nitely into the past, although the record
furnished by the various classes of remains
grows rapidly less legible as we pass be-
yond the few well-illumined pages of the
historic |>eriod. It is now Known that
the sedentary condition prevailed among
the aborigines to a much larger extent
than ha^ been generally supposed. The
more advanced nations of Middle and
S(iUth America have been practically sta-
tionary for long periods, as indicated by
the magnitude of their architectural
achievements, and even such primitive
groups as the Iroquois, Algonquians, and
tftlLL. 30]
ARCHEOLOGY
75
others of northern America have occupied
their general historic habitat for unnum-
bered generations. The prehistoric re-
mains of the various regions thus pertain
in large measure to the ancestors of the
historic occupants, and the record is thus
much more simple than that of prehis-
toric Europe.
Within the area of the United States
^pre-Columbian progress was greatest in
'two principal regions: (1) The Mississippi
valley, including portions of the South-
ern Slates farther eastward, and (2) the
Pueblo country, comprising New Mexico,
Arizona, and parts of Colorado, Utah,
and Texas. The first-mentioned area is
characterized by remains of extensive
fixed works, such as mounds and fortifi-
cations; the second by its ruined pueblos
of stone and adobe. In the remainder of
the area, as on the Atlantic and Pacific
slopes and in the regions of the (ireat
Lakes, the n. Rocky mts., and the Great
Basin, there is comparatively little save
minor movable relics and kitchen deposits
to mark earlier occupancy. The fixed
works which occur in the first-mentioned
region are very numerous, and are ex-
tremely important to the student of na-
tive history. In the Mississippi valley
and the Southern states these works con-
sist of mounds of diversified shapes, built
mainly of earth and devoted to a variety
of purposes, such as dwelling, observation,
defense, burial, and ceremony. Some of
these are of ^reat size, as the Cahokia
mound fq. v. ) m Illinois, and the Etowah
mound (q. v. ) in Georgia, which compare
well in bulk with the great pyramids of
middle America. There are also fortifica-
tions and inclosures of extremely varied
form and, in many instances, of great ex-
tent. These are well illustrated by Ft
Ancient (q. v. ), Adams co., Ohio, and the
earthworks at Newark, Ohio (q. v. ). The
animal-shaped mounds, occurring princi-
pally in the Ohio and upper Mississippi
valleys, are a striking variety of the,se re-
mains. • Well-known examples ar^ the
Serpent mound (q. v.), Adams co., Ohio,
and the so-called Elephant mound (q. v.) ,
Grant co.. Wis. The materials used in
these structures include earth, clay, sand,
and, along the coast, shells. Stone en-
tered into the construction where it was
readily available, but rarely as well-
built walls or as masonry. These works
indicate the former presence in the region
of a numerous sedentary population rely-
ing mainly on agriculture for subsistence.
It 18 now Known, as a result of the more
recent archeological investigations, that
these people, often called the "Mound-
builders," were no other than Indians,
and in some cases at least the ancestors
of tribes occupying the general region
withi n h istoric times. ( See Fortifications,
Mounds, )
In the Pueblo region the fixed works
consist of villages and dwellings of stone,
and, in the southern Pueblo area, of adobe.
Of unusual interest are the cliff -dwellings,
built of stone in rifts and shelters in the
canyon walls and along the faces of the
table-lands or excavated in friable cliffs.
The advanced condition of the earlier
occupants of the region is indicated not
only bv these remains but by the pres-
ence of traces of extensive irrigating
ditches. A careful study of these various
remains, including the skeletal parts,
demonstrates the fact that they pertain
in large measure to the ancestors of the
present occupants of the Pueblo towns
and that no antecedent distinct people or
culture can be differentiate<i. (See Casa
Grande, Cliff-dwellings, Irrigation, Pueblos. )
In the districts lying outside of the areas
referred to above are encountered occa-
sional burial mounds and earthworks, as
well as countless refuse deposits marking
occupied sites. The most notable of the
latter are the shell mounds of the Atlantic
and Pacific shore lines, which offer a rich
reward for the labors of the archeologist.
(See Shell-heaps. )
Among fixed works of somewhat wide
distribution are the quarries where flint,
soapstone, mica, quartzite, obsidian, and
other varieties of stone were obtained
for the manufacture of implements and
utensils. Such are the extensive work-
ings at Flint Ridge, Ohio; Hot Springs,
Ark.; and Mill Creek, III., the sites
being marked by numerous pittings sur-
rounded with the refuse of manufacture.
Their lesson is a most instructive one,
demonstrating especially the great enter-
prise and perseverance of the tribes.
There are also numerous copper mines in
the L. Superior region, marked by excava-
tions of no great depth but of surprising
extent, indicating the fulness of the
native awakening to the advantages of
metal in the arts. (See .yfiiies and Quar-
rien. ) Caverns formerly occupied by the
tribes also contain deposits of refuse, and
their walls display numerous examples of
pictography. In connection with fixed
works may also be mentioned the petro-
glyphs, or rock inscriptions, found in
nearlv every part of the country. These
give little aid, however, to the study of
aboriginal history, since they can not be
interpreteil, save in rare cases where
tradition has kept the significance alive.
(See Pictograplis. )
Knowledge of native history in post-
Columbian as well as in pre-Columbian
times is greatly enhanced by a study of
the minor remains and relics — the im-
plements, utensils, ornaments, ceremonial
and diversional objects and appliances —
great numbers of which are now pre-
served in our museums. (See Arts and
Industries, Stone-work, Bone-work, Shell-
76
AUCHEOLOOy^
[b. a. t.
workj Wood-work, Metal-work, Pottery,
Problematical Objects, Weaiying. )
A study of the archeological remains
containecl in the area n. of the Rio Grande
as a whole supplements the knowledge
gaine<l by investigations among the living
tri'bes in such a way as to enable us not
only to prolong the vista of many tribal
histories but to outline, tentatively at least,
the native general history somewhat as
follows: An occupancy of the various re-
gions in very early times by tribes of low
culture; a gradual advance in arts and in-
dustries, especially in favorable localities,
resulting in many cases in fully se<lentary
habits, an artificial basis of subsistence,
and the successful practice of many arts
and industries, such as agriculture, archi-
tecture, sculpture, pottery, weaving, and
metallurgy— accomplishments character-
izing a well-advanced stage of barbarism,
as defined by Morgan; while in the less
favored regions, comprising perhaps
three-fourths of the area of the United
States and a larger proportion of the
British possessions, the more primitive
hunter-fisher stage mainly persisted down
to historic times. (See Agriculture, Arts
and Industries, Fishing, Hunting, )
Efforts have been made to distinguish
definite stages of culture progress in
America corresponding to those estab-
lished in Europe, but there appears to be
no very close correspondence. The use
of stone was universal among the tribes,
and chippe<l and polished implements
appear to have been employed at all
periods and by peoples of every stage of
culture, although the polishing processes
seem to have grown relatively more im-
portant with advancing culture, being
capable of producing art works of the
higher grades, while flaking processes are
not. Some of the more advanced tribes
of the S. were making marked headway
in the use of metals, but the culture was
everywhere essentially that of polished
stone. {^Q Slime-n'ork, Metal-uxyrk.)
The antiquity of man in America has
been much discussed in recent years, but
as yet it is not fully agreed that any great
antiquity is established, (leological for-
mations in the United States, reaching
well back toward the close of the Glacial
period, possibly ten thousand years, are
found to include remains of man and his
arts; but beyond this time the traces are
so meager and elements of doubt so
numerous that conservative students hesi-
tate to accept the evidence as satisfactory.
(See Antiquiti/, Calaveras Man, Lansing
Man, Carea and Rock-shelters.)
The literature of the northern arche-
ology is very extensive and can not be
cited here save in outline. Worthy of
particular mention are publications b;
(1) GOVEBNMKNT DkPABTMENTS. U.
t
Interior Dept.: Reps. Survey of Terri-
tories, with papers by Bessefs, Holmes,
Jackson; Contnbutions to N. Am. Eth-
nology, papers by Dall, Powers, Rau,
and others. U. S. War Dept.: Reps, of
Surveys, papers by Abbott, Ewbank,
Loew, Putnam, Schumacher, Yarrow, and
others. Education Department, Toronto,
Canada: Reps, of Minister of Education,
papers by Boyle, Hunter, T^aidlaw, and ,
others. (2) Institutions: Smithsonian
Institution Annual Report^, Contribu-
tions to Knowledge, Mis<'ellaneous Col-
lections, containing articles by Abbott,
Dall, Fewkes, Holmes, Jones, Lapham,
Rau, Squier and Davis, Whittlesey, Wil-
son, and others (see published list);
National Museum Reports, Proceedings,
Bulletins, containing papers by Holmes,
Hough, Mason, McGuire, Wilson, and
others (see published list); Bureau of
American Ethnology Reports, Bulletins,
containing articles by Cushing, Dall,
Fewkes, Fowke, Henshaw, Holmes,
Mindeleff, Thomas, and others (see
list under article Bureau of American
Ethnology); Peabody Museum Reports,
Memoirs, Archeol. and Ethnol. Papers,
containing articles by Abbott, Putnam,
Willoughby, Wyman,and others; Ameri-
can Museum of Natural History, Mem-
oirs, Bulletins, containing articles by
Hrdlicka, Smith, and others (see pul>.
lished list); Museum of Arts and Science
University of Pennsylvania, Publications,
containing articles by Abbott, Culin,
Mercer, and others; Field Columbian
Museum, Publications, containing papers
by Dorsey, Phillips, and others; N. Y.
State Museum Reports; University of
the State of New York, Bulletins, con-
containing papers by Beauchamp; Uni-
versity of California, Publications, con-
taining papers by Sinclair and others.
(3) Academies, Societies, and Associa-
tions: Academy of Natural Sciences of
Phila., Journal, with numerous mem-
oirs by Moore; American Ethnological
Society, Transactions, with papers by
Schoolcraft, Troost, and others; Daven-
port Academy of Science, Proceedings,
with papers by Farquharson, Holmes,
and others; American Association for
the Advancement of Science, Proceed-
ings, with numerous papers; Archseolog-
ical Institute of America, Papers, con-
taining articles by Bandelier and others;
National History Society of New Bruns-
wick, Bulletins; International Congress of
Americanists; Washington Anthropolog-
ical Society; Wyoming Historical and
Geological Society; Ohio Archaeological
and Historical Society; Canadian Insti-
tute; American Antiquarian Society; Bos-
ton Society of Natural History. (4) Peri-
odicals: American Geologist; American
Journal of Science and Art; American An-
BULL. 30]
AKCHITECTURE
77
thropologist; American Antiquarian; The
Archeologist; Popular Science Monthly;
Science; American Journal of Science;
American Naturalist; Journal of Geology.
(b) Separate individual publicationh:
Abbott, Primitive Industry, 1881; Allen,
Prehist. World, 1885; Bancroft, Native
Races, 1882; Brower, Memoirs of Explora-
tions, 1898-1903; Clark, Prehist. Remains,
1876; Dellenbaugh, North Americans of
Yestenlay, 1901; Fewkes^ Journal of
American Ethnology and Archeology,
i-iv, 1891-94; Foster, Prehist. Races, 1878;
Fowke, Archeol. Hist. Ohio, 1902; Jones,
(1) Monumental Remains of (ieorgia,
1861, (2) Antiquities of the Southern
Indians, 1873; McLean, Mound Builders,
1879; Moorehead, (1) Prehistoric Imple-
ments, 1900, (2) Fort Ancient, 181K), (3)
Primitive Man in Ohio, 1892; Morgan,
League of Inxjuois, 1854, 1904; Munro,
Archeology and False Antiquities, 1905;
Nadaillac, Prehist. Am., 1884; Nordens-
kiold. Cliff Dwellers of the Mesa Verde,
1893; Read and Whittlesey in Ohio Cen-
tennial Rep., 1877; Schoolcraft, Indian
Tribes, vols., i-iv, 1851-57; Short, North
Americans of Antiquity, 1880; Starr, First
Steps in Human Progress, 1895; Squier,
Antiquities of New York and the West,
1851; Terry, Sculp. Anthr. Ape Heads,
1891; Thruston, Antiq. of Tenn., 1897;
Warden, Recherches sur les antiquites
de PAmc^r. Sept., 1827. Wilson, l*rehis-
toric Man, 1862; Winsor, Narrative and
Critical History of America, i, 1884;
Wright, Man and the (Glacial Period,
1895. For archeological bibliography of
Ontario, Canada, see 9th ArcheoK>gical
Report of Minister of Education, Ontario,
1897. (w. H. H.)
ArohiteotTire. The simple constructions
of the tribes n. of Mexico, although al-
most exclusively practical in their pur-
pose, serve to illustrate many of the ini-
tial steps in the evolution of architecture;
they are hen(»e worthy of careful consider-
ation by the student of culture history.
Various branches of the building arts are
treated separately under appropriate
heads (see Adobe j Cliff-du'elling.% Earth-
lodge^ fhrtificationSj Grains-lodge, Ifabita-
tionSy KivaSf Mouudsy Pile-direlHyigf*^ Pue-
blosy Ttpis), but as these topics are there
considered mainly in their ethnologic as-
pects, they will here be briefly treated as
products of environment and as illustra-
tions of the manner in which l)e^nnings
are made and the higher architectural
forms are evolved. The kind and char-
acter of the buildings in a given district
or region depend on a number of condi-
tions, namely: {o) The capacity, habits,
and characteristics of the people; (6) the
cultural and especially the social status of
the particular i)eoi)le'B; (r) the influence
of neighboring cultures; (d) the physi-
ography of the district occupied; (e) the
resources, animal, vegetal, and mineral,
and especially the building materials
available within the area; (/) climate.
These in the main are the determining
factors in the art development of all peo-
ples in all times, and may be referred to
somewhat at length.
( 1 ) In these studies it is necessary that
the man himself and especially his* men-
tal capacities and characteristics should
be considered as essential elements of the
environment, since he is not only the
product, as is his culture, of present and
past environments, but is the primary
dynamic factor in all culture develop-
ment.
(2) The culture status of the [people —
the particular stage of their religious, so-
cial, technical, and estheticdevelopment —
goes far toward determining the charac-
ter of their buildings. The manner in
which social status (letermines the char-
acter of habitations is dwelt on bv Mor-
gan (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iv, 1881 )] to the
apparent exclusion of other criteria.
Within the area n. of Mexico the various
j)hases characterizing the culture of nu-
merous tril)es and grou})s of tribes are
marked by more or less distinctive habi-
tations. People of the lowest social
grade are content with nature's cano-
f)ies — the sky, the forest, and the over-
langing rocks — or construct simple
shelters of brush or bark for protec-
tion against sun, wind, and rain. Some
build lodges of skins and mats, so
light that they may lx» (arried from
place to place as the food quest or the
pressure of foes re(]uires; while others,
higher in the scale, construct strong
houses of timber or build fortress-like
pueblos of hewn stone or adobe. Along
with the succession of steps in culture
progress there goes progressive differen-
tiation of use. The less advanced tribes
have only the dwelling, while the more
cultured have, in addition, fortifications,
temples, civic structures, tombs, storage
houses, observation towers, dams, canals,
reservoirs, shelters for domestic animals,
and various constructions employed in
transportation. Social customs and re-
ligion play each a part in the results ac-
complished, the one acting on the habi-
tation and the other giving rise to a sepa--
rate and most important branch of the
building arts. .
(3) The building arts of the tribes n.
of Mexico have l^n little affected by
outside influence. In the N. there is
only a limited contact with the Siberian
tribes, which have little to give; and in the
S. nearly a thousand miles separate the
tribes of our s. border from the semicivil-
ized Indians of central Mexico. Soslowly
did intertribal influence act within the
78
ARCHITECT L-KK
|B. A. K.
area here included, and so fully does en-
vironment control culture, that in many
cases where the conditions have remained
reasonably stable distinct stvles of build-
ing exist almost side by sicle, and have
so existed from time immemorial.
(4) It is apparent at a glance that the
physiographic characters of a country ex-
ercise strong influence on aboriginal
building arts, and at the same time have
much to <lo with the trend of culture in
general ami with results finally achieved
in civilization. Dwellings on the open
plains nece^ssarily differ from th(3se in the
mountains, those of a country of forests
from those of an arid region, and those
of rich alluvial ])ottomsfrom those of the
land of plateaus and cliffs. Even the
characteristics of the particular site im-
press themselves strongly on the build-
ings and the building group.
(5) In any area the natural resources
have much \o do with determining the
economic status of the people and, ac-
cording as they are favorable or unfa-
vorable, foster or discourage pn^gress in
the arts. The building materials availa-
ble to a i)eople exercise a profound influ-
ence on the building arts. The presence
of plentiful, easily quarried stone, well
adapted to building purposes, permits and
encourages rapid development of these
arts, while its absence may seriously re-
tard their development, and in fact mav
be accountable for the backward condi-
tion of a people not only in this activity
but in the whole range of its activities.
The highest development is not possible
without stone, which alone of the mate-
rials available to uncivilized man for
building purposes is sufiiciently perma-
nent to permit the cumulative growth
necessary to the evolution of the higher
forms of the art of architecture.
(6) Climate is an element of the high-
est significance in the history of building.
In warm, arid districts shelter is not often
a necessitv, and a primitive people may
have no buildings worthy of the name;
but in the far N. carefully constructed
dwellings are essential to life. The hab-
itations of an arid region naturally differ
from those of a region where moisture
prevails.
The conditions thus outlined have op-
erated in the various culture areas n. of
the Rio Grande to produce the diversi-
fied results observed; and these results
may now l)e passed briefly in review.
Among the most clearly defined and char-
acteristic of these environments are (1)
the Arctic area, (2) the North Pacific
area,X3) the middle Pacific area, (4) the
arid region of the S. W., (5) the Basin
range and Rock v mtn. highlands, (6) the
Mississippi lowlands and the middle S.,
(7) the woodlands of the N. and E.. and
( S ) the G u If coast and Fl orit k . Wit hiir
HOiiic of these the conditions are practi-
caMy uniform over vast areas*, inn I the re-
stiltw are uniform in prDportiou» while in
others conditions are greatly diversified,
numerouB more or ]em distinct styles of
hiiusc emiJ*tnK'tif>ii lia\ in^ developed al-
most Fiiie by side. As with the larger
areuf^, each inferior division displays re-
£Afl:TH-COVti!LD nr-u-L, 'AiESTCnN ESKIMO.
Hiilts due \i* tln^ lorjii I ikn<litions. It luay
lx^'i>hpervtHl ihui r»i ih<* various ('■»! id it ion-
ing agencicj^ of environment one may
doininate in one district and anoiher iii
nntiHier distriot, but with our jtrc^ent
imperfect kinfwledgeof thelai'ta In a ma-
jorily (vf cadres the lull analysis of (iusili-
tions aii<l rffi^rts U ntit yet poswihle.
It iss not to ]k* i^xjH'cted tiiat the build-
SECTION OF HOUSE, WESTERN ESKIMO. ( MURDOCH)
ing arts can flourish within the Arctic
circle. Along the many thousands of
miles of n. shore line agriculture is out
of the question. Wood is known only
as it drifts from the s. along the icy
shores, and save for the presence of
oil-producing animals of the sea primi-
tive man could not exist. Snow, ice,
stone, bones of animals, and driftwood
PLAN OF HOUSE, WESTERN ESKIMO. ( MURDOCH)
are the materials available for building,
and these are utilized for dwellings and
storage places according to the require-
ments and capacities of the tribes. The
house is depressed beneath the surface of
the ground, partly, perhaps, better to
withstand the cold, and partly, no doubt,
because of the lack of necessary timbers
to build walls and span the space re-
BULL. 30]
ARCHITECTrRE
79
quired above ground. The large winter
nouses are entered by a long underground
passage, the low walls of which are
constructed of whale hones, stones, or
timbers, while the hoiLse has a frame-
work of timbers or whale-ribs covered
with earth. The ground-plan and inte-
rior arrangement are simj)le, but well per-
fected, and remarkably uniform over tlic
vast extent of the Arctic shore line. The
snow house is i^ai-ticularly a product of
the N. Snow and ice, available for the
greater part of the year, are utilized in
the construction of dwellin<js unicjue on
the face of the earth. These are built
of blocks of compacted snow held in po-
sition, not by utilizing any of the ordinary
principles of construction, but by i)erinit-
ting the blocks to crystallize by freezing
into a solid dome of ice — so solid that the
key block may be omitted for a win<lnw
or for the pa^^sage of smoke without dan-
ger to the structure. This house lasts
during the winter, and in the summer
8NOW-HOU8E, HUDSON BAY ESKIMO. ( TURNER)
melts away. The summer houses are
mere shelters of driftwood or bones cov-
ered with skins. There is no opportunity
for esthetic display in such houses as
these, and clever as the P^kimo are in
their minor art work, it is not likely that
esthetic effect in their buildings, interior
or exterior, ever received serious consid-
eration. The people do not lack in al )ility
and industry, but the environment re-
stricts constructive effort to the barest
necessities of existence and effectually
blocks the way to higher development.
Their place in the culture ladder is by no
means at the lowest nmg, but it is far
from the highest.
The houses of the N. W. coast derive
their character largely from the vast for-
ests of yellow ceilarj which the enter-
prising people were strong enough to
master and utilize. They are substantial
and roomy structures, and indicate on
the part of the builders decided ability
in planning and remarkable enterprise
in execution. They mark the highest
achievement of the native tribes in wood
construction that has been observed.
The genius of this people applied to
building with stone in a stone environ-
ment might well have placed them
among the foremost builders in America.
Vast labor was expended in getting out
the huge trunks, in hewing the planks,
posts, and beams, in carving the house
and totem poles, and in erecting the
HOUSES OF NORTHWEST COAST TRIBES. HKJMEST EXAMPLES OF
WOOD Construction. (niblack)
massive structures. The facade, with its
mythological paintings and huge her-
aldic columns, is distinctly impressive.
In early days the fortified towns, de-
scribed by Vancouver and other pioneer
explorers, were striking and important
CLIFF HOUSE, MESA VERDE, COLORADO. HIGHEST TvPC OF
Stone construction
constructions. It is indeed a matter of
regret that the genius of such a people
should be expended upon a material of
which no trace is left, save in museums,
after the lapse of a few generations.
The contrast, due to differences in en-
80
ABOHITEOTUBE
[B. A. B.
CAHOKIA MOUND, ILLINOIS.
vironment, between the buildings of the
N. W. coast and those of the Pueblo re-
gion is most striking. With greater abil-
ity, perhaps, than the Pueblos, the north-
em peoples labored under the disadvan-
tage of employing materials that rapidly
decay, while
with the Pueblos
the results of the
skill and effort
of one genera-
tion were sup-
plemented by
those of the
next, and the
cumulative re-
sult was the
great pueblo.
The lot of the
Pueblo tribes
fell in the midst
of a vast region
of cliffs and plateaus, where the means of
subsistenceadmitted of thegrowth of large
communities and where the ready-quar-
ried stone, with scarcitv of wood, led inevi-
tably to the building oi houses of masonry.
The defensive motive being present, it di-
rected the geniusof the people toward con-
tinued and united effort, and the dwelling
group became a great stronghold. Cumu-
lative results encouraged cumulative
effort; stronger and. stronger walls were
built, and story grew on story. The art of
the stone mason was mastered, the stones
were hewn and laid in diversified courses
for effect, door and window openings
were accurately and symmetrically
framed with cut stone and spanned witn
lintels of stone and wood, and towers of
picturesque outline in picturesque situa-
tions, now often in ruins, offer suggestions
of the feudal castles of the Old World.
(See Cliff-dwellings, Pueblos.)
Standing quite alone among the build-
ing achievements of the tribes n. of Mex-
ico are the works of the ancient mound-
building Indians of the Mississippi valley
and the Southern states. Earthworks,
grand in proportions and varied in char-
acter, remain as a partial and imperfect
index of the extent and nature of the
architecture of these peo|)le. The great
embankments probably inclosed thriv-
ing villages, ana the truncated pyramids
must have supported temples or other
important structures. But these, built no
doubt of wood or bark, have wholly dis-
appeared. The nearest approach to per-
manent house construction observed in e.
United States is found in the clay-covered
wattle-work walls of the more southerly
tribes ( Thomas ; Adair) . The people had
acquired only partial mastery of the build-
ing materials within their environment.
E^arth, sand, and clay, indestructible and
always at hand, were utilized for the sub-
structures and embankments, and the
cumulative growth gave massive and en-
during results, but the superstructures
were of materials difficult to utilize in an
effective manner by a stone-age people
and, being subject to rapid decay, were
not cumulative.
Had the envi-
ronment fur-
nished to this
group of vigor-
ous and talented
tribes the mate-
rials for adobe
cement or plen-
tiful deposits of
readily quarried
stone, the re-
sults might have
been very differ-
ent: the mound-
builders' culture
the mound-building people might
TERRACED Pyramid
HIGH. Restored
and
have been no mean factor m the Ameri-
can nation to-day.
The primitive habitations of the Pa-
cific slope from the Straits of Fuca to the
Gulf of California afford a most instruct-
ive lesson. In the N. the vigorous tribes
had risen to the task of utilizing the vast
forests, but in the S. the improvident and
enervated natives were little short of
homeless wanderers. In the N. the
roomy communal dwellings of the Co-
lumbia valley, described by Lewis and
Clark, were found, while to the S. one
passes through varied environments
where timber and earth, rocks and caves,
rushes, bark, grass, and brush in turn
FE RY.)
played their part in the very primitive
house-making achievements of the
strangely diversified tribesmen.
In the highlands of the Great Divide
and in the vast inland basins of the N.
the building arts did not flourish, and
houses of bark, grass, reeds, the skins of
animals, and rough timbers covered with
earth gave only necessary shelter from
winter blasts. In the whole expanse of
the forest-covered E. the palisaded for-
BULL. 30]
ARCHITECTURE
81
tress and the long-house of the Iroquois,
in use at the l)egrinning of the historical
Eeriod, mark the highest limit in the
uilding arts. On the Gulf coast the
tural details are utilized freely for pur-
poses of embellishment. A people that
could carve woo<l and stone and could
decorate }M>ttery and weave baskets of
admirable pattern could not mold the
unwieldy elements of the building into
esthetic form. But enthetic suggestions
and features did not pass entirely unap-
preciated. Some of the lower types of
structures, such as the grass lo(ige and
the mat house, partiiking of textile tech-
nicjue, were characterized ])y elements of
svmmetry, jjrace, and rhythmic repeti-
tion of details. The woo<len house of
simple pile dwellings set in the shallow
waters were all that the conditions of
existence in a mild climate re(iuired.
BARK HOUSE. METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION OF THE iROOUOiS
LONO-HOUSE
It is probably useless to speculate on
what^might have l)een in store for the
native builders had thev been permitted
to continue unmolested throughout the
ages. The stone-
builders had the
most promising
outlook, but they
were still in
the elementary
stages of the arts
of constniction.
They had not
made the one
essential step to-
ward great build-
ing— the discov-
ery of the means
of covering large
spaces without
tneuseof wood.
Although they
were acquainteci
with many essential elements of construc-
tion, they had deviseil neither the offset
span of stone nor the keystone arch.
In none of these areas had the tribes
reached the stage in the building arts
where constructive features or architec-
Bull. 30-05 6
QRA88 LODGE, WICHITA. Emwllished Construction.
MAT HOUSE, CAROLINA INDIANS. (aftER JOHN WHITE,
OF THE ROANOKE Colony, isss)
the N. W. had massiveness of form and
boldness of outline, and the sculptured
and painted details lent much esthetic
interest; while in the arid region the
stone- builders had introduced a number
of feature's to relieve the monotony of
walls and to add to the pleasing effect of
the interiors. In these things tlie native
mind certainly took some pleasure, but
probably little thought was given to ar-
chitectural effect as this is known to the
more civilized
tribes, such as
the Maya of Yu-
catan, who spent
a va«t amount of
time and energy
on the purely
decorative fea-
tures of their
stone buildings.
Numerous au-
thorsdwell more
or less on the
buildings of the
tribes n. of Mex-
ico, but only the
more important
publications will
nere be cited.
See Boas, Dorsey, Fewkes, Hoffman,
the Mindeleffs, Nelson, Mrs Stevenson,
Thomas, and Turner in various Reports,
B. A. E.; Adair, Hist. Amer. Inds., 1775;
Bandelier, various reports in Papers Arch.
Inst. Am., 1881-92; Beauchamp, Iroquois
82
ARDECO — -ABENDAHRONON
[B.A.B.
Trail, 1892; Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus.
1895, 1897; Catlin, N. Am. Inds., 1841,
1866; Dawson in Prot;. and Trans. Royal
Soc. Can., ix, 1891; De Bry, Collectiones
Peremnationum, 1590-1628; Dellen-
baugh, North Americans of Yesterday,
1901; Du Pratz, Hist. Loiiisiane, iii, 1758;
Eells in Smithson. Rep. 1887, 1889; Fos-
ter, Prehist. Races, 1878; Goddard in
Univ. Cal. Pubs., i, no. 1, 1903; Hariot,
Narr. First Plant. Virginia, repr. 1893;
Hrdlicka in Am. Anthrop., vii, no. 3,
1905; Jackson in Metropol. Mag., xxii,
no. 3, 1905; Lewis and Clark, Exped.
(1804-06), Coues ed., 1893; MacLean
Mound Builders, 1879; Moore, various
memoirs in Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.,
1894-1905; Morgan in Cont. N. Am.
Ethnol., IV, 1881; Morice in Trans. Can.
Inst., IV, 1895; Niblack in Nat. Mus.
N. w. of them. The women are supposed
to be of ordinary stature. They hunt in
kaiaks and provide for their husbands,
who are covered with hair and are so tiny
that they carry them about in their
hoods.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 640,
1888.
Areitorae. A Papa^o village s. of So-
norita, Sonora, M!exico. — Box, Adven-
tures, 262, 1869.
Arekw. A Yurok village on the coast
at the mouth of Redwood cr., n. w. Cal.
The town of Orick, 2 m. up the stream,
takes its name therefrom. ( a. l. k. )
Oruk.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, m, 139,
1853.
Arenal (Span.: 'sandy ground,' 'des-
ert'). A village, presumably Piman, on
the Pima and Maricopa res. , Gila r. , Ariz. ;
pop. 557 in 1860 (Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
MASONRY WALL, ANCIENT PUEBLO, NEW MEXICa ELEMENTARY EM8£ULI«HMENT
Rep. 1888, 1890; Nordenskiold, Cliff
Dwellers of the Mesa Verde, 1893; Pow-
ers in Cont. N. Am. Ethnol., in, 1877;
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i-vi, 1851-57;
Smith, Hist. Va., repr. 1819; Squier,
Antiq. N. Y. and West, 1851; Squier and
Davis in Smithson. Cont., i, 1848; Starr,
First Steps in Human Progress, 1895;
Swan in Smithson. Cont., xxi, 1874;
Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., ii,
1900; Thruston, Antiq. of Tenn., 1897.
See Habitations, (w. h. h.)
Ardeco. A small tribe or village, prob-
ably Caddoan, indefinitely described as
on a s. w. branch of Arkansas r. in the
18th century.— La Harpe (1719) in Mar-
Sy, D^c, VI, 299, 1886.
ero.— La Harpe, op. cit. Ardeco.— Beaurain in
Margry. op. cit. (mentioned with the Touacaro=
Tawakoni).
Ardnaixiiq. A mythical people believed
by the Central Eskimo to live far to the
June 19, 1863), and 616 in 1869 (Browne,
Apache Country, 290, 1869).
Arendahronon ( ' rock people * ) . One of
the four chief tribes of tne Huron, having
the most easterly situation and claiming
to be the first allies of the French, who
founded among them the missions of St
Jean Baptiste, St Joachim, and Ste Elisa-
beth. In 1639 they were said to have
been resident of the Huron country for
about 50 years. In 1649, on the political
destruction and expulsion of the Huron
tribes by the Iroquois, the inhabitants of
St Jean Baptiste submitted in a body to
the Seneca, who adopted them. They
constituted the Stone, or Rock, tribe of
the Huron. See Jesuit Relation for 1639,
40, 1858. (J. N. B. H. )
Ahrenda.— Shea. Cath. MLss.. 182, 1855. Ahrendfth-
ronont.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 622, 1853.
Ahrendarononi.— Jes. Rel. for 1640. 61, 1858. Area-
da.— Charlevoix (1636), New France, n, 72, 1872.
BULL. 30]
ARENDAONATIA ARIKARA
83
ArendMronoBft.— Jes. Rel. for 1641, 67, 1858. Aren-
daehroBoni.— Ibid., 83. Arendaenhrononi.— TeR.
Rel. for 1642, 82, 1858. Arendarhononons.— .Tes.
Rel. for 1635, 24, 1858. Arendaronnona.— Jes. Rel.
for 1644, 99. 1 858. Arendarononi. ^I es. Rel. for 1640,
90, 1858. Arendarrhonoiu.— Jes. Rel. for 1637, 109,
1858. ArendoroBBOB.— Jes. Rel. for 1636, 123. 1K5K.
ATeBdahs.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hl»t., pt. 6, 154,
1883. EaarhoBOB.— Sagard, Gr. Voy., I, 79, 1S65.
Hationd' Atironta.— Ibid. Natioa de la Boohe.—
Jes. Rel., Ill, index, 1858. Nation du Rooher.—
Jes. Rel. for 1657, 23, 1858. Eenarhonon.— Sagard,
Hist, du Can., i, 234, 1865.
Arendaonatia. A Huron village in ( )n-
tario about 1640.— Jes. Rel. for 1637, 159,
1868.
AaeBdaoBaotia.— Ibid., 165.
Arente. A Huron village in Ontario
about 1640. —Jes. Rel. for 1637, 150, 1858.
Argillite (slate). This material, w hit-h
is much diversified in character, was in
very general use by the tribes n. of
Mexico for the manufacture of utensils,
implements, and ornaments, and for
carvings in general. The typical slates,
characterized by their decided foliate
structure, were used to some extent
for implements; but the more massive
varieties, such as the greenish striped
slates of the Eastern states, the argillite
of New Jersey, Pennsylvania, and the
states to the s., and the black slate of
the N. W. coast were usually preferred
for polished implements and carvings.
Argillite was much used by the tribes of
the Delaware and Susquehanna valleys,
and an ancient quarry of this material,
situated at Point Pleasant, Pa., has lx»en
described by Mercer (see Mines ami Quar-
ries). Material from this and other quar-
ries in the Appalachian region was useil
mainly for flaked implements, Including
leaf-shaped blades, knives, and arrow and
spear heads, and these are widely dis-
tributed over the Middle Atlantic states.
The fine-grained greenish and stri|jed
slates of the Eastern and Middle states
and Canada were extensively used in the
manufacture of several varieties of ob-
jects of somewhat problematic use, in-
cluding so-called banner-stones, bird-
stones, and perforated tablets. It is
probable that, like the green agates and
jadeites of Mexico, some varieties of this
stone had special significance with the
native tribes. The tril)es of the N. \V.
coast employ a fine-grained slate in their
very artistic carvings, which the Haida
obtain chiefly from deposits on Slate
cr., Queen Charlotte ids. This slate has
the desirable qualities of l)eing soft and
easily carved when freshly quarried, and
of growing harder witfi time. It is
black and takes an excellent polish
(Niblack). See Sculpture and Carving,
Totent'jwlea.
References to the use of argillite and
slate occur in many works relating to eth-
nologic and archeologic subjects, but are
not sufl&ciently important to be given in
full. Worthy of special mention are Al)-
bott. Prim. Industry, 1881; Holmes in
15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897; Mercer in Pubs.
Univ. Penn., vi, 1897; Niblack in Rep.
Nat. Mus. 1888, 1890; Rau in Smithson.
Rep. 1872, 1873; S(juier and Davis in
Smithson. Cont., i, 1848. (w. n. n. )
Arhan. A village or tribe formerly
between Matagorda bay and Colorado r,,
Texas; mentione<l to Joutel irt 1687 by
the El)ahanio Indians. The region was
the domain of the Karankawan tribes,
with whom the Arhau people were possi-
bly affiliatt^l. See Gatschet, Karankawa
Inds., Peabody Mus. Papers, i, 35, 46,
1891. (A. t\ F.)
Arhan.— Joutel (1G«7) in French, Hist. Coll. I^.,
I, 137. iwri. Arhau.— Joutel ( 1687) in Marpry, D6v.
Ill, *JSS, 187H.
Aribaiba. A former rancheria of the
Sobaipuri, on the Rio San Pedro, not far
from its junction with the (iila, in s. Ari-
zona. It was visited by Father Kino
about 1697. See Ariraipa.
Aribabia.— De I'Isle, Map Am., 1703. 8. Pantaleon
Aribaiba.— Kino (ir)97) quoted by Bancroft, No.
Mex. States, i, 2f>5. 1S84.
Aridian. A term applied to the early
occupants of the desert region of the
S. W., particularly of s. Arizona, whose
culture, as exemplified by their art and
other remains, was similar to that of the
Zuni. — Cushing in Proc. Int. Cong. Am.,
VII, 157, 1890. See PuehloH.
Original Pueblo.— Ibid. Shiwian.— Ibid, (so called
from the similarity in the "Aridian" and the
Shiwi or Zufii eultiires).
Arikara (Skidi: ariki 'horn,' referring
to the former custom of wearing the hair
with two pieces of Inme standing up like
horns on each side of the crest; ra, pi.
ending). A .tribe forming the northern
group of the Caddoan linguistic family.
In language they differ only dialectically
from the Pawnee.
When the Arikara left the IxKiy of
their kindred in the S. W. they were asso-
ciated with the Skidi, one of the tribes
of the Pa\. .lee confederacy. Tradition
and history indicate that at some point
in the broad Missouri valley the Skidi
and Arikara parted, the former settling
on Louj) r.. Neb., the latter continuing
X.E., building on the bluffs of the Missouri
the villages of which traces have l)een
noted ntarly as far s. as ( )maha. In their
northward movement they encountered
members of the Siouan family making
their way westward. Wars ensued, with
intervals of peace and even of alliance
between the tribes. When the white
race reached the Missouri they found the
region inhabited by Siouan tribes, who
said that the old village sites had once
been occupied by the Arikara. In 1770
French traders established relations with
the Arikara, below Cheyenne r., on the
Missouri. Ixnvis and Clark met the
tribe 35 years later, reduced in num-
84
ARIKARA
[B. A. E.
bers and living in three villages between
Grand and Cannonball rs. , DaK. By 185 1
they had moved up to the vicinity of
Heart r. It is not probable that this
rapid rate of movement obtained during
migrations prior to the settlement of the
Atlantic coast by the English. The
steady westward pressure of the colonists,
together with their policy of fomenting
intertribal warn, cauj^ed the continual dis-
placement of many native communities,
a condition that bore heavily on the
semiseilentary tribes, like the Arikara,
who live<l in villages and cultivated the
soil. Almost continuous warfare with ag-
gressive tribes, together with the ravages
of smallpox during the latter half of the
RUSHING BEAR— ARIKARA
18th and the beginning of the 19th cen-
turies, nearlv exterminated some of their
villages. The weakened survivors con-
solidated to form new, necessarily com-
posite villages, so that much of their an-
cient organization was greatly modified or
ceased to exist. It was during this period
of stress that the Arikara became close
neighbors and, finally, allies of the Man-
dan and Hidatsa. In 1804, when Lewis
and Clark visited the Arikara, they were
disposed to be friendly to the tJnited
States, but, owing to intrigues incident
to the rivalry between trading companies,
which brought suffering to the Indians,
they became hostile. In 1823 the Arikara
attackeil an American trader's boats, kill-
ing 13 men and wounding others. This
lea to a conflict with the United States,
but peace was finally concluded. In con-
sequence of these troubles and the fail-
ure of crops for 2 successive years the
tribe abandoned their villages on the
Missouri and joined the Skidi on I^up
r.. Neb., where they remained 2 years;
but the animosity which the'Arikara dis-
played toward the white race made them
dangerous and unwelcome neighbors, so
that they were requested to go back to
the Missouri. They did so, and there
they have remained ever since. Under
their first treaty, in 1825, they acknowl-
edged the supremacy of the National
(Trovernment over the land and the people,
agreed to trade only with American citi-
zens, whose life and property they w^ere
pledged to protect, and to refer all diflB-
culties for final settlement to the United
States. After the close of the Mexican
war a commission was sent by the Gov-
ernment to define the territories claimed
by the tribes living n. of Mexico, between
the Missouri and the Rocky mts. In the
treaty made at Ft Laramie, in 1851, with
the Arikara, Mandan, and Hidatsa, the
land claimed by these tribes is described
as lying w, of the Missouri, from Heart
r., N. Dak., to the Yellowstone, and up the
latter to the mouth of Powder r., Mont.;
thence s. e. to the headwaters of the
Little Missouri in Wyoming, and skirt-
ing the Black hills to the head of Heart
r. and down that stream 1o its junction
with the Missouri. Owing to the non-
ratification of this treaty, the landed rights
of the Arikara remained unsettled until
1880, when, by P^xecutive order, their
present reservation was set apart; this in-
cludes the trad ingpost, established in 1845,
and named for Bartholomew Berthold, a
Tyrolese, one of the founders of the Amer-
ican Fur Company. The Arikara, Man-
dan, and Hidatsa together share this land,
and are frequently s|K)ken of, from the
name of their reservation, as Ft Berthold
Indians. In acc^ordance with the act of
Feb. 8, 1887, the Arikara received allot-
ments of land in severalty, and, on ap-
proval of the allotments by the Secretary
of the Interior, July 10, 1900, they became
citizens of the United States and subject
to the laws of North Dakota. An indus-
trial boarding school and 3 day schools
are maintained by the Government on
Ft Berthold res. A mission board-
ing school and a church are supported
by the Congregational Board of Mis-
sions. In 1804 Lewis and Clark gave
the population of the Arikara as 2,600,
of whom more than 600 were warriors.
In 1871 the tribe numbered 1,650; by
1888 they were reduced to 500, and the
census of 1904 gives the population as 380.
As far back as their traditions go the An-
BULL. 30]
ARIKARA
85
kara have cultivated the soil, depending
for their staple food supply on crops of
com, beans, squashes, and pumpkins.
In the sign language the Arikara are des-
ignated as "corn eaters," the movement
•of the hand simulating the act of gnawing
the kernels of corn from the cob. They
preserved the seed of a peculiar kind of
small-eared com, said to be very nutri-
tious and much liked. It is also said that
the seed corn was kept tied in a skin and
hung up in the lodge near the fireplace,
and when the time for planting came
only those kernels showing signs of ger-
mination were used. The Arikara bar-
tered corn with the Cheyenne and other
tribes for buffalo robes, skins, and meat,
and exchanged these with the traders for
cloth, cooking utensils, guns, etc. Early
dealings with the traders were carried on
by the women. The Arikara hunted the
buffalo in winter, returning to their village
in the early spring, where they spent the
time before planting in dressing the pelt«.
Their fish supply was obtained by means
of basket traps. They were expert swim-
mers, and ventured to capture buffaloes
that were disable<l in tbe water as the
herd was crossing the river. Their wood
supply was obtained from the river; when
the ice broke up in the spring the Indians
leaped on the cakes, attached cords to
the trees that were whirling down the
rapid current, and hauled them ashore.
Men, women, and the older children en-
gaged in this exciting work, and although
they sometimes fell and were swept down-
stream, their dexterity and courage gen-
erally prevented serious accident. Their
boats were made of a single buffalo skin
stretched, hair side in, over a frame of
willows l^ent round like a ba**ket and
tied to a hoop 3 or 4 feet in diameter.
The boat could easily be transported by
a woman and, according to Hay den,
"would carry 3 men across the Mis-
souri with tolerable safety." Before the
coming of traders the Arikara made their
cooking utensils of pottery; mortars for
pounding corn were made with much lab<jr
from stone; hoes were fashioned from the
shoulder-blades of the bufialoand theelk;
spoons were shaped from the horns of the
buffalo and the mountain sheep; brooms
and brushes were made of stiff, coarse
grass; knives were chipped from flint, and
spearsandarrowheadsfromhornand flint;
for splitting wood, wedges of horn were
used. Whistles were constructed to imi-
tate the bleat of the antelope or the call
of the ell^, and served as decoys; pop-
guns and other toys were contrived for
the children and flageolets for the amuse-
ment of young men. Garments were
embroidered with dyed porcupine quills;
dentalium shells from the Pacific were
prized as ornaments. Matthews and
others mention the skill of the Arikara
in melting glass and pouring it into molds
to form ornaments; they disposed of the
highly colored beads furnished by the
traders in this manner. They have pre-
served in their basketry a weave that has
been identitied with one practised by for-
mer trilx^s in lyouisiana — a probable sur-
vival of the method learned when with
their kindred in the far S. W. The Ari-
kara were ecjually tenacious of their lan-
guage, although next-door neighbors of
Siouan tribes for more than a century,
living on terms of intimacy and inter-
marrying to a great extent. Matthews
says that almost every member of each
tril)e understands the language of the
other tribes, yet sjn^aks his own most
fluently, hence it is not uncommon to hear
a dialogue carried on in two tongues.
Until recentlv the Arikara adhered to
their ancient form of dwellings, erecting,
at the cost of great labor, earth lodges that
were generally grouped about an open
space in the center of the village, often
quite close together, and usually occupie<l
by 2 or 3 families. Each village gener-
ally contained a lodge of unusual size,
in which ceremonies, dances, and other
festivities took place. The religious cere-
monies, in which each subtribe or village
had its special part, bound the people
together ny common beliefs, traditions,
teachings, and supplications that centered
aroun<l the <lesire for long life, food, an<l
safety. In 18;i5 Maximilian of Wie<l
noticed that the hunters did not load on
their horses the meat obtained by the
(rhase. but carried it on their heads and
backs, often so transporting it from a
great distance. The man who could
carry the heaviest burden sometimes gave
his nieat to the poor, in deference to their
traditional teaching that "the Lord of
life told the Arikara that if they gave to
the |x>or in this manner, and laid burdens
on themselves, they would l)e successful
in ajl their undertakings." In the series
of rites, which began in the early spring
when the thunder first sounded, corn
held a prominent place. The ear was
used as an emblem and was addressed as
"Mother." Some of these ceremonial
ears of corn had been preserved for gen-
erations and were treasured with rever-
ent care. Offerings were made, rituals
sung, and feasts held when the ceremo-
nies took place. Rites were observed when
the maize was planted, at certain stages
of its growth, and when it was harvested.
Ceremonially associated with maize were
other sacred objects, which were kept in
a si)ecial case or shrine. Among these
were the skins of certain birds of cosmic
significance, also 7 gourd rattles that
marked the movements of the seasons.
Elaborate rituals and ceremonies attended
86
ARIKARA AltlTUTOC
[b. a. e.
the opening of this shrine and the exhi-
bition of its contents, which were sym-
bolic of the forces that make and keep
all things alive and fruitful. Aside from
these ceremonies there were other quasi-
religious gatherings in which feats of
jugglery were performed, for the An-
kara, like their kindred the Pawnee,
were noted for their skill in legerdemain.
The dead were placed in a sitting posture,
wrapped in skins, and buried in mound
graves. The property, except such per-
sonal belongings as were interred with
the body, was distributed among the
kindred,' the family tracing descent
through the mother. A collection of
Arikara traditions, bv G. A. Dorsey, has
been published by the Carnegie Institu-
tion (1903).
The Arikara were a loosely organized
confederacy of subtribes, each of which
had its separate village and (listinctive
name. Few of these names have been
preserved. I^wis and Clark (Exped., i,
97, 1814) mention I^ahoocat, a village
occupied in 1797, but abandoned about
1800. How many subtribes were includ-
ed in the confederacy can not now be de-
termined. Lewis and Clark speak of the
Arikara as the remnant of 10 powerful
Pawnee tribes, living in 1804 in 3 villagies.
The inroads of disease and war have so re-
<luced the tribe that little now remains
of their former divisions. The following
names were noted during the middle
of the last century: Hachepiriinu ('young
dogs'), Hia ('band of Cree'), Hosuk-
baunu ( ' foolish dogs* ), Hosukhaunukare-
rihu ('little foolish dogs'), Sukhutit
( 'black mouths ' ) , Kaka ( 'band of Crows' ) ,
Okos ( 'band of bulls'), Paushuk ('band
of cut-throats') . Some of these may re-
fer to military and other societies; others
seem to be nicknames, as "Cut-throats."
(a. c. f.)
A da ka' da ho.— Matthews, Ethnog. Hidatsa, 125,
1877 ^Hidat«;a name). Ah-pen-ope-«ay.— Anon. MS.
Crow vocab. , B. A . E. ( Crow name ) . Ai-dik'-fi-da-
hu.— HoflFman in Proe. Am. Philos, So<^., 2M, 1886
(='people, of the flowing hair'). Ankora. — Ind.
A ff. Rep.. 63, 1851. A-pan-to'-pse.—Hayden, Ethnog.
and Philol. Mo. Val., 402, 1862 (Crow name). Ara-
caris.— Gass, Voy., 400, 1810. A raka 'da ho. —Mat-
thews, Ethnog. Hidatsa, 125, 1877 (Hidatsa name).
Archareet.— Morgan in No. Am. Rev., 493, 1869.
Aricaraa.- Beaurain (m. 1720) in Margry, D4c.,
VI, 289, 1886. Aricaree*.— Saxton quoted by
Stevens, Rep. on Pae. R. R., 239, 1854. Aricarie.—
Schennerhoni in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., ii, 34, 1814.
Aricaris. — Gass, Jour.. 48, 1807. Aricas. — Carte
des Poss. Ang., 1777. Ariocarees. — Culbertson in
Smithson. Rep. 1850, 115, 1851. Aricharay.— Sen.
Doc. 47, 16th Cong., 1st sess., 4, 1820. Arichard.—
Sen. Ex. Doc. 90, 22d Con^., 1st ses.^., 63, 1832.
Arickara.— Clark and Ca.ss m H. R. Ex. Doc. 117,
20th Cong., 2d sess., 99, 1829. A-rick-a-ra-ono.—
Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., Ii, Ixxxiv, 1823
(Hidatsa name). Ariokaraws.— Sen. Ex. Doc.
94, 34th Cong., 1st sess., 13, 1856. Arickare.—
Ind. Aflf. Rep., 297. 1835. Arickarees.- Ind. AflF.
Rep.. 403, 1836. Arickora.- Ind. Aflf. Rep. 246,
1846. A-rik'-a-hii.— Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos.
Soc., 294, 1886 (Hidatsa form). Arikara.—
Matthews, Ethnog. Hidatsa, 13, 1877 (Mandan
name). A'-ri-k&'-ri.— Hoffman in Proc. Am.
Philos. Soc., 294. 1886 (abbreviation of the Man-
dan Ai-dlk'-a-da-hu). Axikare.— Ind. Aff. Rep.,
247, 1877. Arik'-ar«.— Hoffman in Proc. Am.
Philos. Soc., 294. WB6 (name of HMatm oti-
gin ) . Arikarees. — Keane in Stanford, Compend. ,
533, 1878. Arikari.— Burton, City of Saints, 119, .
1861. Arikera.— Sen.Ex.Doc.90.22dCong.,l8t8e8B..
29, 1832. Arikkaraa.— Maximilian, Trav., 143,
1843. Arrekaraa.- McCoy, Ann. Reg., 52, 1836.
Arricara.— La Harpe (1719) in Margry. l)6c.,vi, 298,
1886. Arricaroes.— Warren (1855), Nebr.andDak.,
50, 1875. Arrickaraw*.— Dougherty (1837) in H. R.
Doc. 276. 25th Cong., 2d sess., 16, 1838. Arriokaree.—
Ind. Aff. Rep, 1856, 67. 1857. Arrickora.— Webb, AI-
towan, I, 83, 1846. Arriekarit.- Domenech, t>e8.
N.Am., I, map, 1860. Auricara.— U. S. Ind. Treaties,
447, 1837. Aurickarees.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
I, 523, 1851. Biooarees.— Domenech, Des. N. Am.,
1, 431, 1860. Black Pawnee.— Prichard. Phys. Hist.
Mankind, v, 408, 1847 (applying properlv to the
Wichita, the Black-bear Pawnee of the Omaha).
Com Eaters.— Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1860,
130, 1851 (given as their own name). Eokoros.—
Lahontan, New Voy., i, 110, 1703. JBakoroa.— La-
hontan, misquoted by Schoolcraft,Tniv.,viii, 1821.
Ka'-nan-in.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val., 326, 1862(Arapaho name: 'people whosejawa
break in pieces ' ). Kee».— Terry in Rep. Sec.War,
pt 1. 35, 1869 (misprint). Xicaras.— Lewis, Trav.,
15, 1809 (misprint), la Bee.— Lewis and Clark,
Disc., 22. 1806. Okoro.— Lahontan, New Voy., i,
120, 1703. O-no'-ni-o.— Hayden, Ethnog. and
Philol. Mo. Val., 290, 1862 (Cheyenne name).
Padani.— For forms of this name as applied to the
Arikara, see Paivnee. Pa'^«»-d£«a.— Dorsey, MS.
(pegiha Diet., B. A'. E., 1878 (Omaha and Ponka
name: 'Sand Pawnee'). Panis rioaras.— Jefferys,
Fr. Dom. Am., pt. 1, 143, 1761. Panyi pilda.— Dor-
sey. MS. Tci were vocab., B. A. E., 1879 (Iowa, Oto,
and Missouri name: 'Sand Pawnee'). Pawnee-
Bikaaree.— Nuttall, Jour., 81. 1821. Pucaras.—
Alegre, Hist. Comp. Jesus, i, 336, 1841. Baeres.—
Lewi.s, Trav., 15, 1809. Becara.— Ibid. Bee.— Pow-
ell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 60, 1891. Be-ka-raa.— Bon-
ner, Life of Beckwourth. 255, 1856. Be-ke-raha.—
Ibid., 162. Bhea.— Hallam in Beach, Ind. Misc..
134, 1877. Bio'-araa.— Perrin du Lac, Vox. Louisi-
ane, 257, 1850. Bioaree.— Snelling. Tales of Trav.,
35, 1830. Bicaries.— Domenech. Des. N. Am., i,
443,1860. Bicaris.— Gass, Jour., 82, 1810. Bioars.—
Lewis and Clark, Disc., 24, 1806. Bie-ca-raa.— Hun-
ter, Captivity, 87, 1823. Biccaree.— Boiler, Among
Inds. in the Far West. 210, 1868. Bicoarreet.—
Catlin, O-kee-pa. 40, 1867. Biohara.— Sen. Ex. Doc.
90, 22d Cong. , 1st sess. , 12, 1832. Bickaras.— Lewis
and Clark, Discov.. 30, 1806. Biokarees.— Gass,
Jour., 48, 1807. Bickerees.- Ibid., 53. Biokreea.—
Ibid., 48. Bioora.— Boudinot, Star in West. 128,
1816. Bikaraa.— Irving, Astoria, 199, 1849. Bik-
kari.- Maximilian. Trav., 167, 1843. Bia.- Ibid.
(so called by the Canadians). Sa-niah'. — Hay-
den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val,. 356. 1862,
Satrahe.— Balbi, Atl. Ethnog.. 54, 1826. S'qftiea'-
tshi.— Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 371,
1886 (Salish name) . Btarrahe.— Bradbury, Trav.,
iii, 1817. Star-r&h-he'.— Lewis and Clark, Discov.,
22, 1806 (own name). Ta-niah'.— Hayden, Ethnog.
and Philol. Mo. Val., 356, 1862 ('the people': own
name) . Taa'-niah.— Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos.
Soc., 294, 1886. Wakinaa.— Hildreth, Dragoon Cam-
paigns. 164. 1836 (probably the same). Wa-«i'-
ya-ta Pa-da'-nig.— Cook, MS. Yankton vocab.,
B. A. E., 184, 1882 ('northern Pawnee': Yank-
ton name).
Ariswaniski. A Chnagmiut village on
the right bank of the lower Yukon,
Alaska.— Coast Surv. map, 1899.
Aritntoc. A former Maricopa rancheria
on the N. side of Rio Gila at or near the
present Oatman fiat and the great bend of
the river, in s. Arizona. It was visited by
Father Sedelmair in 1744, and by Anza,
Font, and Garc^s in 1775.
Aritoac.— Carets, Diarj', 117. 1900. Aritatoe.—
Sedelmair cited by Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mez.,
BOLL. 30]
ARIVACA — ARKOKISA
87
366, 1889. KinomiAdA.— Ansa and Font (1780).
ibid., 892.
AriTEoa. A former Piman village w. of
Tubac, 8. Ariz., dating from prior to 1733.
It wag abandoned during the Pima revolt
of 1751, before which time it was a visita
of the mission of Guevavi. (Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 385-6, 1889.)
Aribao.— Anon. rep. (1777) in Bancroft, Ariz, and
N. Mex., 385. 1889. Aribaoa. — Rudo Ensayo ( 176.3 ) .
161. 1868.
.AriTaipa (Nevome Pima: cuirivapa^
? girls,' possibly applied to these people
on account of some unmanly act). An
Apache tribe that formerly made its
home in the canyon of Arivaipa cr., a
tributary of the Rio San Pedro, s. Ariz.,
although like the Chiricahua and other
Apache of Arizona they raided far south-
ward and were reputed to have laid
waste every town in n. Mexico as far as
the Gila prior to the Gadsden purchase in
.1853, ana with having exterminated the
Sobaipuri, a Piman tribe, in the latter
part of the 18th century. In 1863 a com-
pany of California volunteers, aided by
some friendly Apache, at Old Camp Grant,
on the San Pedro, attacked an Arivaipa
rancheria at the head of the canyon, kill-
ing 58 of the 70 inhabitants, men, women,
and children — the women and children
being slain by the friendly Indians, the
men Dy the Califomians— in revenge for
their atrocities. After this Iohs they sued
for peace, and their depredations practical-
ly ceased. About 1872 they were removed
to San Carlos agency, where, with the
PinaleHos, apparently their nearest kin-
dred, they numbere<l 1,051 in 1874. Of
this number, however, the Arivaipa
formed a very small part. The remnant
of the tribe is now under San Carlos and
Ft Apache agencies on the White Moun-
tain res., but its population is not sep-
arately enumerated, (f. w. h.)
Apaohi Arivapah.— Hofifman in 10th Rep. Hayden
Supv., 461, 1878. Araivapa.— White, MS. Hist.
'Apaches, B. A. E., 1875. Aravaipa.— Ind. Aflf.
Rep. 1873, 342, 1874. Aravapa.— Ind. Aflf. Rep.
1871. 54, 1872. Aravapai.— Ind. Aff. Rep. , 246, 1877.
Aravapa Piaala.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1871, 54, 1872.
Aravipait.— Keane in Stanford.Compend.. 501, 1878.
Aribafpa.— Ind. Aff. Rep.. 306, 1877. Aribapais.—
iMipa.— ma. ah. Kep.. 30t>, 1877. Aribapai
Ind. Aff. Rep., 175, 1875. Arivapa.— Ind. Aff.
Rep., 292, 1886. Arivapa Apaches.— Ind. Aff. Rep.,
141. 1868. Artvapait.— Haines. Am. Ind.. 135. 1888.
Arivaypa Apaohei.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1871, 3, 1872.
ArrivapU.— Golyer (1871) quoted in Ind. Aff. Rep..
299.188i6. Avipa Apache.— Palmer, Pinella and
ATipa MS. vocab., B. A. E.
AriTechi. A pueblo of the Jova and the
seat of a Spanish mission founded in 1627;
situated in e. Sonora, Mexico, about lat.
29^ 10^ Pop. 466 in 1678, 118 in 1730.
It is no longer an Indian settlement.
Aribeehi.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 56.
1890, Arivetsi.— Orozco v Berra. Geog., 345, 1864.
Ban TranoiMO Javier Arivechi.— Zapata (1678)
quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 245, 1884.
Ariiioohic. A Tarahumare settlement
on the E. bank of one of the upper tribu-
taries of Rio Yaqui, lat. 28° 25^ long. 107°,
Chihuahua, Mexico. — Orozco v Berra,
Geog., 323, 1864.
Ariionao (prob. 'small springs' or 'few
springs'). Evidently a former Papago
rancheria situated between Guevavi and
Saric, in Sonora, Mexico, just below the
present s. boundarv of Arizona, not far
from the site of JJogales. In 1736-41
the finding in its vicinity of some balls of
native silver of fabulous size caused a
lar^ influx of treasure seekers, and
through the fame that the place thus
temporarily acquired, its name, in the
form Arizona, was later applied to the
entire country thereabout, and, when
New Mexico was divided, was adopted
a.s the name of the new Territory. In
1764-67 A ri zonae was a visita of the mis-
sion of Saric, on the upper waters of
Kio Altar, Sonora. See Bancroft, Ariz.
and N. Mex., 362, 371, 1889. (f. w. h.)
Arizpe (according to Bandelier a cor-
rupted a])breviation of Iluc-aritz-paj the
native name, while Hardy says it is from
the Opata nripa, 'the great congrega-
tion of ants'). A former Opata pueblo
on Rio Sonora, about lat. 30° 2y, Sonora,
Mexico. It became the seat of a Spanish
misnion in 1648, and was afterward the
capital of the state, but its importance as
a town decreased after the removal of the
capital to Ures, in 1832, and sul)8equent
Apache depredations. Arizpe is identical
with the Arispa of Castafieda an<i the
Ispa of Jaramillo, visited by Coronado in
1540. The population of the mission was
416 in 1678, 316 in 1730, and 359 in 1777
(Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th ser., i, 469, 1856,
and authors (juoted ])elow). It is no
longer an Indian town. There are ruins
N. w. of the village, (f. w. h. )
Aripa.— Hardy, Trav. in Mex., 442. 1829 (Opata
name: * the great congrejration of ants'). Antpa.—
Castafieda (1540) in 14th Rep. B. A. E. 515, 1896.
ArUpe.— Kino (1696) in Doc. HLst. Mex,. 4th ser..
1, 265, 18.56. Asuncion Arizpe.— Zapata ( 1678) quoted
by Bancroft. No. Mex. States, i. 246, 1884. Ouaga-
rispa.— Ca.sUifieda (1540) in Ternaux-Compans,
Voy.. IX. 158. 1838. Huo-aritz-pa.— Bandelier,
(iilded Man. 17,5. 1893 (Opata name). lapa.—
Jaramillo (1540) in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 585, 1896.
ITuestra Senora de la Asuncion Arizpe.— Orozco y
Berra, Geog., 343, 1864 (mission name).
Arkansite. A variety of the mineral
brookite, so called from havinjr Ix^en dis-
covered at Magnet Cove, Ark. (Dana,
Text-hook Mineralogy, 278, 1888) ; from
the place and ethnic name Arkansas and
the English suffix -He. (a. f. c. )
Arkokisa. A people formerly living in
villages chiefly along lower Trinitv r.,
Tex. The Spanish presidio of San Agus-
tin de Ahumada was founded among
them in 1756, and 50 TIascaltec families
from s. Mexico were settled there, but
the post was abandoned in 1772. They
were allied with the Aranama and the
Attacapa, and were on friendly terms also
with the Bidai, but their linguistic affin-
ity is not known. According to Sibley
88
ARKSUTITE — ARMOR
[b. a. b.
they numbered about 80 men in 1760-70
and subsisted principally on shellfish and
fruits, and in 1805 their principal town
was on the w. side of Colorado r. of Texas,
about 200 m. s. w. of Nacogdoches. They
had another village n. of this, between
the Neches and the Sabine, nearer the
coast than the villages of the Adai.
Sibley speaks of the Arkokisa as migra-
tory, out they could not always have been
entitled to that characterization. It is
probable that, owing to the conditions
incident to the intrusion of the white
race, the people became demoralized;
their tribal relations were broken up,
their numbers decimated by disease, and
the remnant of them was finally scat-
tered and disorganized. Of their habits
very little is known; their language seems
to have been distinct from that of their
neighbors, with whom they conversed by
signs, (a. c. f.)
AoeooeMtwi.— Lewis, Travels. 191. 1809. Acoooke-
•aw».— Fisher, Int. Ace.. 201. 1812. Accokesaus.—
Brackenridge, View8 of La., 81, 1814. Aocoke-
Miws.— Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 71, 1806. Aeo-ke-
sas. — Brackenridfce, op. cit., 87. Acoasesaws. —
Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 103, 1856.
ArkokiML— Yoakum, Hist. Tex., map, 1855. En-
qaisaeoes.— Clarke in Tex. Hist. Assn. Quar., ix,
53, 1905. Horoaquisaot.— MS. of, 1770 quoted by
Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 656, 1886. Horcon-
oitoi.— Bancroft, ibid., 643. Horoo^uiaa.— Tex.
State archives. Auk. 26, 1756. Horooqmaaet.— Doe.
" " es. jfa
B quoted by Shea, Early . ^, .. ^.^,
1861 (same?). Ocosaus.— Soo. Geog. Mex., Bui.,
of 1798 in Tex. State archives, jfaquizooza.—
Gentl. of Elvas quoted by Shea, Early Voy.. 149,
266, 1870. Orcoquiaa.— Doc. of Ifm in Tex. State
archives. Orcoquiiaoi.— Mezi^res (1778) quoted by
Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 661, 1886. Oroo-
quisas.— Doc. of 1791 in Tex. State archives.
OrqoiMUK).— Yoakum, HLst. Tex., i. 49, 1855. Ox-
qnoqairaa.— Hobin, Voy. k la LouLsiane, in, 14,
1807.
Arksutite. According to Dana (Text-
book Mineralogy, 265, 1888) a fluorine
mineral whose exact nature is not yet
known, named from the Eskimo Arksut,
a fiord in Greenland where it was discov-
ered, (a. f. c.)
Arlagnuk. An IgluUrmiut Eskimo vil-
lage near Melville pen., on Iglulik id.,
lat. 69° 11^ 3,r^— Parry, Second Voy.,
355, 1824.
Arliaktimg. An Et^kimo village of the
Akudnirmiut, n. of Home bay, e. BaflSn
land. — Boas in Deutsch. Geog. Bljitt., viii,
34, 1885.
Armor. Shields and bedy armor appear
to have been in more or less general use
among the Indian tril)es n. of Mexico.
The Eskimo are said not to employ the
shield, but it was in use among tne tribes
of the plains, the S. W. , and British Colum-
bia, and occasionally among the Iroauois
and other eastern Indians. The Plains
Indians made their shields of buffalo hide,
covered with buckskin or elk skin; others
used basketry (Pueblo) , cedar rods (Nav-
aho), osiers or bark (Virginia Indians,
Iroquois). With the exception of a sort
of oblong armor-shield 4 to 5 ft. long, made
of elk hide by the Ntlakyapamuk (Teit in
Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., Anthrop. ser.,
1, 1900), the Indian shield is circular. The
decoration of the shield, the ceremonies
connected with its acquisition, its use in
ritual, etc., constitute important chapters
in the art and religion of the aborigines.
The shield ceremony of the Hopi and the
heraldry of the shield among tne Kiowa
have respectively been specially studied
by Dr J. Walter Fewkes and Mr James
Mooney of the Bureau of American Eth-
nology. Helmets and head defenses are
found among some of the tribM of the
North Pacific coast, and are often orna-
mented with the crest of theowner. North
of Mexico body armor presents at least
five types: Rows of overlapping plates of
ivory, bone, and, since contact with the
whites, iron (Eskimo, Chukchi) ; twined
wooden slats (N. W. coast, Shasta, Iro-
quois, Virginia Indians); twined wooden
rods (Aleut, N. W. coast, Columbia r.
tribes, Klamath, Hupa, Iroquois, Pow-
hatan, etc.); bands oi skin arranged in
telescoping fashion
(Chukchi); coats,
etc. , of hardened hide
(Tlingit, Haida, Chi-
nook, Hupa, Sho-
shoni, Navaho, Paw-
nee, Mohawk, etc.).
The ivory plate ar-
mor is believed by
Boas to be an imita-
tion of the iron armor
of the Chukchi, and
the other plate armor
ma^ also be of n. e.
Asiatic (Japanese)
origin. The presence
of the buffalo in the Mississippi region,
and of the elk, moose, etc., in other parts
of the country, had much to do with the
nature of armor. The data concerning
armor among the Indians are summarizecl
bv Hough (Primitive American Armor,,
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1893, 625-651) . One sort
of nefensive armor did the early English
adventurers in Virginia good service on
one occasion. At the suggestion of Mosco
and the friendly Indians, Capt. John
hmith, when fighting a tribe on the Ches-
apeake, made use of the "Massawomek
targets," or shields (Smith, Va., i. 185,
1819; Holmes in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 18,
1896) . These the English set " about the
forepart of our Boat, like a forecastle,
from whence we securely beat back the
Salvages from off the plaine without any
hurt. " And so, protected by * ' these light
Targets (which are made of little small
sticks woven betwixt strings of their
hempe, but so firmly that no arrow can
possibly pierce them ) , " the English drove
back the enemy. In general, it may be
said that the shield and lance were used
Body armor of wood; Tlingit
BULL. 80]
ARMOUCHIQUOIS — AKOSAQUNTACOOK
89
chiefly by the equeetrian tribes of the
open country, while body armor, with the
knife and tomahawk, were more in favor
with those of the timber and coast region.
See ShielcUt. (a. f. c.)
ArmoacMqaois ( apparently a French cor-
corruptionof ^/^moM*/«^-j, 'land of the lit-
tle dog,' from allum *dbg,' ouhis diminu-
tive, ac or auk 'land,' ** for there were
many little dogs in the prairiesof this terri-
tory.*'— Maurault). The name given by
the Abnaki to the country of the Indians
of the New England coants. of Saco r., Me.
Williamson (Hist. Maine, i, 477, 1S82)
says they were the Marechites (Malecite)
of St Johns r., but Champlain, who vis-
ited the Armouchiquois country, says that
it lies beyond, that is, s. of, Choiiacoet
(Sokoki), and that the language differed
Irom that of the Souriquois ( Micniac) and
the Etchimin. Laverdiere athrms that
"the French called Almouchi(iuois sev-
eral peoples or tribes that the English
included under the term Massachusetts."
According to Parkman ( Jesuita in N. Am.,
xxi, 1867) the term included the Algon-
quian tribes of New England — Mohegan,
Pequot, Massachuset. Narraganset, and
others **in a chronic state of war with the
tribes of New Brunswick and Nova Sco-
tia." (r. T.)
Allemouehieois.— Champlain (m. 1635),(£uvres. v,
pt., 2, 83, IK70. Almauohioois.— Vt'tromile, Abna-
kis, 50. 18t)6. Almonohiguois.— Champlain (1610),
(En vres, l v, 73, 1870. Almouohicoisen. — Duton map
of 1616 in N. Y. Col. Poc. 1. 18.')6. Almouohiquois.—
Maurault, Hist. Abcnakis, 4, lK6«i. Almouohi-
quoue.— Cliamplain (1605), (Kuvres, in, 6*2. 1870.
Armouohicois.— Champlain (ir>08). ibid., ii. 5.s,
1870. Armoaohiqaois.— Jes. Kt>l. for 1611, 33, l.sr>s.
Armnoiceset.— AlctHlo. Die. (Jeog., i. 158, 1786.
Arocoum. See Rnccooii.
Arontaen ('it is a lying log.* — Hewitt).
A Huron villajre situated near Pt. Cock-
bom, on the X. shore of Nattawasaga bay,
Ontario, in 1636. — Jesuit Relation for 1686,
133, 1858.
Arosagnntacook. A tril>e of tht» Abnaki
confederacry, formerly livingin Androscofj-
ginco., Me. Their village, which bore the
same name, was on Androscoggin r., prob-
ably near Lewiston. The various names
used indiscriminately for the trilx* and the
river may be resolved into the forms Am-
mqpcoggin and Arosaguntacook, which
have received different interpretations, all
seeming to refer to the presence of fish in
the stream. The name seems to have been
used only for the part of the river in An-
droscoggin CO. between the falls near Jay
and those near Lewiston. The present
name was obtained by changing the first
part of the word to Andros in compliment
to Gov. Andros. The Arosiiguntacook
lived on the edge of the first English settle-
mentsin Maine, and consetiuently suffered
much in the various Indian wars, hi which
they took a prominent part from 1 675 until
their removal to Canada. Their town was
burned by the English in 1690. As the
settlements pushed into the interior the
Wawenoc, at the mouth of the river,
moved up and joined the Arosaguntacook,
and at a later period the combined tril)es
moved still farther up and joined the
Rocameca. These movements led to
much confusion in the statements of
writers, as the united tribes were com-
monly known by the name of the lead-
ing one, the Arosaguntacook or Andros-
coggin. These trii)es, together with the
Pigwackct, removed to St Francis, Canada,
soon after the defeat of the Pequawket by
Lovewell in 1725. Here the Arosagun-
tacook were still the princii>al tribe and
their dialect (Abnaki) was adopte<l by
all the inhabitants of the village, who
were frequently known collectively as
Arosaguntacook. (.i. m.)
Adgecantehook.-Doc. of 1709 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., v, 86, 185.5. AUigantttffwi. — ( Jatschet, Penob-
scot MS., B. A. E., 1887 (Penobs<'ot name for the
St Francis Indians; pi. Al8igant<>f?wiak). Anut-
rascoggin.— Stoughton (1695) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., IX, 613,-1865. Amarasoogin.— La Potheric,
Hist. Am., IV, 40, 1753. AmafeMoggin.— Trum-
bull. Conn., II, 77, 1818. Amariscogguit.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, v, ^JS, 1^55. Amarotcoggen.—
Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 3, 108, 1848. Amasagunti-
cook.— True in N. Y. Hist. Mag., 238. 1864. Amer-
ascogen.— Pike (1690) in Drake, Ind. Wars, 152,
1825. Ameresoogin. — Douglass. Suniniary, i, 185,
1755. Ameriscoggint.— Gallatin in Trans. Am.
Antiq. Soi'., II, 32, 18,%. AmeiriMoggin.— Maine
Hist. Soc. Coll.. in, 'iiu. 185:i. Amircankanne. —
Vaudreuil (1721) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 904,
1855. Amireaneau.— Doc. of 1693 in N. Y. D(m\
Col. Hist., IX, 571, 1855 (misprint). Ammarascog-
gin. — Georgetown treaty (1717) in Maine Hist..^kK'.
(\>11.,VI,261,1H59. AmmarcMoggin.— SiuneinN.H.
Hist. Soc. Coll., II, 242. 1827. Ammasooggen.—
Church (1690) in Ma.«s. Hist. S(K'. (?o11., 4th a., v,
271, 18(>1. Amonoscoggan. — Drake. Bk. Inds., bk.
3, 104, 1848. AmonoMoggin.— Mather, Magnalia
(1702) quoted by Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 3, 150,1848.
Amoscongen. — Sagadahoc treaty (1G90) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., 1, 113, 18*25. Amreisooggin.—
Casco conference (1?27) in N. H. Hist. S«k>. Coll.,
11, 261, 1827. Anasaguntaoooks.— Sullivan in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st 8., IX, 210. 1804. Anasagunta-
kook.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1^^8. Anasagunti-
oooks.— Williamson in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix,
475, 1855. Anasugimtakook.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, in, .527, 1853. Andro»coggin».— Sullivan in
Mas.*^. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., ix, 210. 1804. An-
moughcawgen.— vSmith (1629). Virginia, ii, 177,
repr. 1819. Annirkakan.— Ui Potheric. Hist. Am.,
Ill, 189, 1753. Aretaguntacooks.— Colnian (1726)
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., vi. 115, 1800.
Arisagujitaoookt. — Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 3, 152,
1848. Arosagantakuk.— Keane in Stanford, Com-
pend., 500, 1878. Arosaguntacook.— Drake, Trag.
Wild., 144> 1R41. Arosagantakuk.— Vater, Mith-
ridates, pt. 3, sec. 3. 390. 1816. Arouseeuntecook.—
Douglass, Summary, i, 185. 1755. Arraaagunta-
oook.— Falmouth conf. (1727) in Maine Hist. Soc.
Coll., Ill, 438, 18.53. Arreaguntecookt.— Falmouth
treaty report (1726) , ibid ., 386. Arreguntenocks.—
Penhallow(1726) in N. H. Hist. S<k». Coll., i, 129,
1824. Arreraguntecook.— Falmouth treaty report,
op. cit. Arreruguntenocks. — Xiles {ca. 1761) in
>Iass. Hist.Soc.Coll., 4th s.. v,:^i5. 1861. Arresagon-
tacook.— Ca.scocoiif.(1727)in N.H. Hist. S(m*. Coll.,
11, 261, 1827. Arretaguntaoooks. Falmouth conf.
repKirt (1727) in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., iii, 413,
18.53. Arresaguntecook. — Falmouth treaty report
(1726). ibid., ast>-390. Arreseguntecook.- Ibid.
Arreseguntoocook.— Falmouth treaty journal
(1749), ibid., IV, 157, 1856. Arresuguntoocooks.-
Ibid., 155. Arseguntecokes. — Document of 1764 in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 641, 1856. ArdkantegS
90
AROUGHCOKD — ABBOWHEADS
[B. A.fl.
French letter (1721) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Ck)ll., 2d
8., Yiii, 262, 1S19. Anuuefuntakooks.— La Tour,
map, 1779. Amsefuatakooks.— JeflFerys, French
Dom., pt. 1. map. 1761. Aaaaguntioook.— Record
(1765) in " ' '- "-- " " —
Maine Hist. Soc. Coll., yii, 186, 1876.
itefof.— Gyles (1726), ibid., iii, 357, 1863.
Ifft.— Purchas (1626), ibid., v, 156. 1857.
Arongheond, Arongheiin. See Raccoon.
Arpik. An Eskimo village in w. Green-
land, lat. 73°. — Meddeleleer om Gron-
land, VIII, map, 1889.
Arrohftttoe (cf. Delaware oUcilmUeky
*empty,' 'all gone.' — Heckewelder). A
tribe of the Powhatan confederacv, form-
erly living in Henrico co. , Va. They had
30 warriors in 1608. Their chief village,
of the same name, was on James r., 12 m.
below the falls at Richmond, on the spot
where Henrico was built in 1611. (j. m. )
Arrohataek.— Smith (1629), Virgrinia, i. 142, repr.
1819. Arrohattook.— Drake. Bk. Inds., bk. 4, 7,
1848. Arrowhatooki.— Smith, on. cit., 1, 116. Ar-
rowhatoet.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 125, 1816.
Arsahattoek.— Smith, op. cit., ii, 10. Irrohatook.—
Ibid., 1, 117.
Arrowheads. The separate tips or points
of arrow-shafts. Among the Indian tribes
STONE ARROWHEADS, EASTERN FORMS. (aBOUT I-2)
many were made of flint and other varie-
ties of stone, as well as lx)ne, horn, antler,
shell, wood, and copper. Copper was
much used by such tribes as were able to
obtain a supply from theL. Superior region
and to some extent by those of British
Columbia and Alaska.' Iron has lar^ly
taken the place of these materials smce
the coming of the whites. In stone im-
plements of this class the only line of dis-
tinction between arrowheads and spear-
heads is that of size. Very few flint
arrowheads are as much as 2 mcnes long,
and these are quite slender; thick or
strong ones are much shorter. Solid
flesh, being almost as resistant as soft
rubber, could not be penetrated by a
large pro- ..---^^
jeotile un-
less it
were pro-
pelled by
greater
power
than can
be ob-
tained
from a
bow with- A**"^^****^ EMMOOCO in a 8KULU
out artifi- '" "■'■"^^
cial aid which is not at the command of a
savage. The shape of the stone arrowhead
among the Indian tribes is usually trianga-
lar or pointed-oval, though some have
very slender blades with expanding base.
Many of them are notched. These wereset
in a slot in the end of the shaft and ti^
with sinew, rawhide, or cord, which passed
through the notches. Those without
notches were secured by the cord passing
over and under the angle at the base in a
figure-8 fashion. It is said that war ar-
rows often had the head loosely attached,
so that it would
remain in the -^
wound when the
shaft was with-
drawn, while
the hunting
point was firmly
secured in order
that the arrow
might be recov-
ered entire.
Glue, gum, and
cement were
U8e<l in some sec-
tions for fixing
the point or for
rendering the
fastening more
secure. The ac-
companying dia-
gram will ex-
plain the differ-
ent terms used with reference to the
completed arrowhead. A specimen which
has the end rounded or squared instead
of flattened is known as a '*bunt." As
a rule both faces are worked off equally
so as to bring the edge opposite the middle
plane of the blade, though it is sometimes
a little on one side. For the greater
part these seem to be redressed ordinary
spearheads, knives, or arrowheads whose
points have been broken off, though some
appear to have been originally made in
ARROWHEAD NOMENCLATURE, (ot POINT;
6, Edge; c, Face; d. Bevel; e.
Blade; /, Tanq; g, Stem; h, Bi(8E;
/, Notch: k, neck; m, Barb or
Shoulder)
BULL. 30]
ARROWS, BOWS, AND QITIVERS
91
this form. A few are smooth or polished
at the endfl, as if used for knives or scrap-
ow; bat most ol them have no marks of
use except occasionally such as would re-
sult from being shot or struck against a
hard substance. It is probable that their
purpose was to stun birds or small game,
m order to secure the j^elt or plumage free
from cuts or bloo<l stain. They are rela-
tively few in number, though widely dis-
tributed in area. The Eskimo employ
arrowheads of stone of usual forms.
Consult Abbott (1) Prim. Indus., 1881,
(2) in Surv. W. 100th Merid., vii, 1879;
Beauchamp in Bull. N. Y. State Mus.,
no. 16, 1897, and no. 50, 1902; Fowke in
13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Moorehead, Pre-
hist. Impls., 1900; Morgan, League of the
Iroquois, 1904; Nordenskiold, Chff Dwell-
ers of Mesa Verde, 1893; Rau in Smithson.
Cont., XXII, 1876; Wilson in Rep. Nat.
Mus. 1897, 1899; the Reports of the Smith-
sonian Inst. ; the Am. Anthropologist; the
Am. Antiquarian; the Archaeologist; the
Antiquarian, (o. f. w. h. h. )
Arrows, Bows, and Quivers. The l>ow
and arrow was the most useful and \mi-
TYPicAL quiver; navaho
versal weapon and implement of the
chase possessed by the Indians x. of
Mexico for striking or piercing distant
objects.
Arrows. — A complete Indian arrow is
made up of six parts: Head, shaft, foreshaft,
shaftment, feathering, and nock. These
differ in material, wrm, measurement.
decoration, and assemblage, according to
individuals, locality, and tribe. Arrow-
heads have three parts: Body, tang, and
barbs. There are two kinds of arrow-
heads, ttie blunt and the sharp. Blunt
heads are for stunning, being top-shape<l.
The Ute, Paiute, and others tied short
sticks crosswise on the en<l of the shafts
of boys' arrows for killing birds. Sharp
(J
A
TYPES OF ARROWHEADS
arrowheads are of two classes, the lance-
olate, which can be withdrawn, and the
sagittate, intended for holding game or
for rankling in the wound. The former
are use<l im hunting, the latter on war or
retrieving arrows. In the S. W. a sharp-
ene<l foreshaft of hard wood serves for the
head. Arctic and N. W. coast arrows
have heads of ivory, l)one, wood, or cop-
per, as well as of stone; elsewhere they are
more generally of stone, chip|)e<l or*i)ol-
ished. Many of the arrowheads from
those two areas are either two-pronged,
three-pronged, or harpoon-sha|)ed. The
head is attached to the shaft or foreshaft by
lashing with sinew, by riveting, or with
gum. Among the Eskimo the barbed
head of bone is stuck loosely into a socket
on the shaft, so that this will come out
and the head rankle in the woun<l. The
barl)s of the ordinary chip|)ed hea<l are
usually alike on )M)th sides, but in the
long examples from ivory, bime, or Wood
the ))arbing is either bilateral or uni-
lateral, one-barbe<l or many-barl)e<l, alike
on the two sides or different. In addition
to their use in hunting and in war, arrows
are commoidy used in games and cere-
monies. Among certain Hopi priesthoo<ls
arrowheads are tied to bandoleers as or-
naments, and among the Zuili they are
freijuently attached to fetishes.
Arrowshafts of the simplest kind are
reeds, canes, or stems of wood. In the
Arctic region they are made of driftwood
or are bits of bone lashed together, and
are rather short, owing to the scarcity of
material. The foreshaft is a piece of
ivorv, bone, or heavy wood. Among the
Eskimo foreshafts are of lx)ne or ivorv on
wooden shafts; in California, of hard
wood on shafts of pithy or other light
wood; from California across the conti-
nent to Florida, of hanl woo<l on cane
92
ARROWS, BOWS, AND QUIVERS
[B. A. fl.
shafts. The shaftments in most arrows
are plain; but on the W. coast they are
Ivory Anrowshaft straight-
ener; Eskimo. (length,
sm.)
USE OF ARROWSHAFT STRAIGHTEN ER; SHOSHONI (eLUOTt)
painted with stripes for i<lentification.
The Plains Indians and the Uicarillas cut
shallow grooves lengthwise down their
arrowshafts, called ''lightning marks,"
or ** blood grooves," and also are said by
Indians to keep the shaft from warping
(Fletcher) or to direct the flight. The
feathering is an important feature in the
Indian arrow, differing in the species of
birds, the kind and number of feathers
and in their form,
length, and manner
of setting. As to the
number of feathers,
arrows are either
without feathering,
two-fe&th^red, or
three-feathered. As to form, feathers are
whole, as among most of the Eskimo and
some 8. W. tri])es, or halved or notched
on the edges. In length they vary from
the very short feathering on S. W. arrows,
with long reed shafts and heavy fore-
shafts, to the long feath-
ering on Plains arrows,
with their short shafts of
hard wood. The feath-
ers are set on the shaft-
ment either flat or radi-
ating; the ends are lashed
with sinew, straight or
doubled under, and the
middles are either free or glued down. In
some arrows there is a slight rifling, due
perhaps to the twist needed to make a tight
fit, though it is not said that this feature is
intentional. The nocks of arrows, the
part containing the notch for the string,
are, in the Arctic, flat; in the S., where
reed shafts were employed, cvlindrical;
and in localities where the shafts were
cut, bulbous. Besides its use as a piercing
Stone Arrowshaft Rub-
ber; HASSACHUSErTS.
(length, 4 1-2 IN.)
Sandstone Arrowshaft Ru»-
BER; Indian Grave, British
Columbia.
(h. I. smith)
or striking projectile, special forms of the
arrow^ere employed as a toy, in gaming,
in divining, in rain-
making, in ceremony,
in symbolism, and m
miniature forms with
prayer -sticks. The
modulus in arrow-
making was each
man*s arm. The
manufacture of ar-
rows was usually at-
tended with much
ceremony.
The utmost flight,
the certainty of aim,
and the piercing pow-
er of Indian arrows
ai-e not known, and stories about them
are greatly exaggerated. The hunter or
warrior got as near to his victim as possi-
ble. In shooting he drew his right nand
to his ear. His bow register scarcely ex-
ceeded 60 pounds, yet arrows are said
to have gone quite through the
body of a buffalo (Wilson in Rep.
Nat. Mus. for 1897, 811-988).
Bows.— The bows of the
North Americans are quite
as interesting as their ar-
rows. The varied envi-
ronments quickened the
inventive faculty and pro-
duced several varieties.
They are distinguishecl by
the • materials and the
parts, which are known as
back, belly, wings, grip,
nocks, and string. The
varieties are as follow:
(1) Self- bow, made of one
piece; (2) compound bow,
of several piec^es of wood,
bone, or horn lashed to-
gether; (3) sinew-backed
bow, a bow of driftwood or
other brittle wood, rein-
forced with cord of sinew
wrapped many times
about it lengthwise, from
wing to wing; (4) sinew-
lined bow, a self-bow, the
back of which is further
strengthened with sinew
glued on. In some cases
bows were decorated in
colors.
The varieties character-
izing the culture areas are
distinguished as follow:
1. Jrc^c— Compound
bows in the E., very
clumsy, owing to scarcity of material;
the grip may be of wood, the wings
of whale's ribs or bits of wood from
whalers. In the W. excellent sinew-
Types of bows, a.
Compound Bow,
Eastern Eskimo
(boas) ; b, Sinew-
lined Bow, Navaho
(mason)
BULL. 30]
ARROWS, BOWS, AND QUIVERS
93
backed bows were made on bodies of
driftwood. Asiatic influence is apparent
in them. (See Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E.,
399-669, 1884; Murdoch in 9th Rep.
B. A. E., 13:^^17, 1887, and Rep. Nat.
Mus. for 1884, 307-316.)
2. Northern A thapascan. — Long, straight
bows of willow or birch, with wooden
wrist-guards projecting from the belly.
3. & iMurence and Eastern United
States. — Self-bows of ash, second-growth
hickory, osage orange (bois d*arc), oak,
or other hard wood.
4. Gulf States. — Long l)ows, rectangu-
lar in section, of walnut or other hard
wood.
5. Rochj intK — (1) Self-l)<>w of osage
orange or other hard wood; (2) a coni-
p>und bow of several strips of buffalo
horn lashed together and strengthened.
6. Xortli Pacific cooyt. — Bows with
rounded grij) and flat wings, usually
made of yew or cedar.
7. Fraser-Colnmbia regicm. — Similar to
No. 6, but with wings nmch shorter and
the nocks curved sharply outward.
8. Interior baMn. — A long slender stick
of rude form; many are strengthened by
means of a sinew lining on the back and
cross wrappings.
9. California. — Like No. 7, but neatly
lined with sinew and olUm prettily deco-
rated.
10. Stnithtrest. — Like No. 8, but seldom
sinew-lined (Navaho). Small painted
bows are used much in (!eremony, esyye-
cially by the Pueblos, whc^ deposit them
in shrines. In the s. part of this area
long Cottonwood bows with cross lashing
are employed by Yuman and Piman
tribes. The Jicarillas make a cupid's
bow, strengthened with bands of sinew
wrapping.
Tne bows e. of the Rockied have little
distinction of parts, but the w. P^skimo
and Pacific slope varieties have flat wings,
and the former shows connection with
Asia. The nocks are in some tril)es alike,
but among the Plains Indians the lower
nock is cut in at one side only. Bow-
strings are of sinew cord tied at one end
and looped at the other.
Wrist-guard. — When the Ixjwman's
left arm was exposed he wore a wrist-
guard of hide or other suitable material
to break the blow of the released string.
Wrist-guards were also decorated for cere-
monial purposes.
Arrow release. — Arrow release is the
way of holding the nock and letting loose
the arrow in shooting. Mf)rse describes
four methods among the tril)es n. of Mex-
ico, the first three being Indian: (1) Pri-
mary release, in which the nock is held
l)etween the thumb ami the first joint of
the forefinger; (2) secondary release, in
which the middle and the ring fingers
are laid inside of the string; (3) tertiary
release, in which the nock is held be-
tween the ends of the forefinger and the
middle finger, while the first three fin-
gers are hooked on the string; (4) the
Mediterranean method, confined to the
Eskimo, whose arrows have a flat no(;k,
in which the string is drawn with the
tips of the first, second, and third fingers,
the nock l)eing lightly held l)etween the
first and the second fingers. Morse finds
TERTIARY Arrow Release Eskimo Arrow Release
METHODS OF ARROW RELEASE
that among the North American tribes,
the Navaho, Chippewa, Micmac, and Pe-
nobscot used the primary release; the
Ottawa, Chippewa, and Zufii the second-
ary; the Omaha, Arapaho, Cheyenne,
Assiniboin, Comanche, Crows, Siksika,
and some Navaho, the tertiary.
Quivers. — The form of the (juiver de-
pended on the size of the bow and ar-
rows; the materials, determined by the
region, are skin or wood. Sealskin quiv-
ers are used in the Arctic region; beauti-
fully decorated examples of deerskin are
common in Canada, also e. of the Rock-
ies and in the Interior basin. On the
Pacific coast cedar quivers are employed
by the canoe-using tribes, and others
make them of skins of the otter, moun-
tain lion, or coyote.
In addition to the works cited under
the subject Arroivheads, consult Cushing
(1) in Proc. A. A. A. S., XLfv, 1896, (2)
in Am. Anthrop., viii, 1895; Culin, Am.
Indian Games, 24th Rep. B. A. E., 1905;
Mason, N. Am. Bows, Arrows, and Quiv-
94
AKROYO GRANDE ART
[B.i
era, in Rep. Smithson. Inst. 1893, 1894;
Murdoch, Study of Eskimo Bows, Rep.
Nat. Mus. 1884, 1885; Moree, Arrow Re-
lease, in Bull. Essex Inst., 1885; Arrows
and Arrow-makers, in Am. Anthrop., 45-
74, 1891 ; also various Reports of the Bu-
reau of American Ethnology, (o. t. m.)
Arroyo Grande. A Pima settlement in
s. Arizona with 110 inhabitants in 1858.
Del Amnro Grande.— Bailey in Ind. AfT. Rep., 208,
Arseek. A tribe living in 1608 in the
vicinity of the Sarapiiiagh, Nause, and
Nanticoke (Smith, Hist. Va., i, 175,
repr. 1819). They are not noted on
Smithes map, but the Nause and Nanti-
coke are, by which their location is in-
dicated as on Nanticoke r., in Dorches-
ter or Wicomico co., Md. (j. m. )
Aroeck.— Bozman, Maryland, 1,12,1837 (misprint).
Anek.— Purehas (1625), IMlgrimes, iv, 1713.
Arsnk. An Eskimo village in s. Green-
land, w. of Caj)e Farewell, lat. 61°. —
Nansen, F'irst Crossing of Greenland,
map, 1890.
Art The term " art " is sometimes ap-
plied to the whole range of man's cultural
activities, but as here employed it is in-
tendeil to refer only to those elements of
the arts which in the higher stages of cul-
ture come fully within the realm of taste
and culminate in the ornamental and
fine arts (see Ornament). Among primi-
tive peoples many of these esthetic ele-
ments originate in religious symbolism.
Among the tribes n. of Mexico such
elements are exceedingly varied and im-
portant, and extend in some degree to
all branches of the arts in which plastic,
graphic, sculptural, constructional, and
associative processes are applicable, as
well as to the embellishment of the hu-
man person. These symbolic elements
consist very largely of natural forms, es-
pecially of men and beasts, and of such
natural phenomena as the sun, stars,
lightning, and rain; and their introduc-
tion is probably due largely to the general
belief that symbols carry with them some-
thing of the essence, something of the
mystic influence of the beings and poten-
cies which they are assumed to represent.
In their introduction into art, however,
these symlxj's are subject to esthetic in-
fluence and supervision, and are thus
properly classed as embellishments. In
use they are modified in form by the va-
rious conventionalizing agencies of tech-
nique, and a multitude of variants arise
which connect with and shade into the
great body of purely conventional deco-
ration. Not infrequently, it is believed,
the purely conventional designs originat-
ing in the esthetic impulse receive sym-
bolic interpretations, giving rise to still
greater complexity. Entering into the
arts and subject to similar influences are
also many ideographic signs and repre-
sentations which contribute to embellish-
ment and to the development of purely
esthetic ]^hase8 of art. These elements,
largely pictographic, contribute not only
to the growth of the fine art, painting,
but e(^ually to the development of the
recordmg art, writing. The place occu-
pied by the religious, ideographic, and
simply esthetic elements in the various
arts of the northern tribes may be briefly
reviewed :
(1) The building arts, employed in
constructing dwellings, places of worship,
etc., as practised n. of Mexico, although
generally primitive, embodj[ various re-
ligious and esthetic elements in their non-
essential elaborations. As a rule, these
are not evolved from the constructive fea-
tures of the art, nor are they expressed
in terms of construction. The primitive
builder of houses depends mainl;^ on
the arts of the sculptor and the painter
for his embellishments. Among Pueblo
tribes, for example, conventional figures
and animals are painted on the walls of
the kivas, and on their floors elaborate
symbolic figures and religious personages
are represented in dry-painting (q. v. ) ; at
the same time nonsignificant pictorial sub-
jects, as well as purely decorative designs,
occur now and then on the interior walls,
and the latter are worked out in crude pat-
terns in the stonework of the exterior.
Though the buildings themselves present
many interesting features of form and pro-
portion, construction has not been brought
toanyconsiderabledegreeunderthesuper-
vision of taste. The d wellingsof primitive
tribes in various parts of the country, con-
structed of reeds, grass, sod, bark, mats,
and the like, are bv no means devoid of
that comeliness which results from care-
ful construction, but they show few defi-
nite traces of the infiuence of either sym-
bolism or the esthetic idea. The skin tipis
of the Plains tribes present tempting sur-
faces to the artist, and are frecjuently taste-
fully a<iorned with heraldic and reli^ous
symbols and with graphic designs painted
in brilliant colors, while the grass lodge
is embellished by emphasizing certain
constructive features in rhythmic order,
after the manner of basketry. The
houses of the N. W. coast tritJes, built
wholly of wood, are furnished within
with carved and painted pillars, whose
main function is practical, since they
serve to support the roof, while the to-
tem-poles and mortuary columns outside,
still more elaborately embellished, are
essentially emblematic. The walls both
within and without are often covered
with brilliantly colored designs embody-
ing mythologic conceptions. Although
these structures dei)end for their effect
largely on the work of the sculptor and
the painter, they show dedded archi«
BULL. 80]
ART
95
tectural promise, and suggest the poesibil-
ities of higher development and final es-
thetic control, as in the great architectu-
ral styles of the Old World. (See Archi-
tedurej Dry-painting, Habitations, )
(2) The art of sculpture, which includes
also carvinjj, had its birth, no doubt, in
the fashioning of implements, uteiisiln,
ornaments, and sacred objects; and em-
bellishments, 8ymlx)lic and esthetic,
which were at nrst entirely sulwrdinate,
were gradually introduced as culture ad-
vanced, and among some of the north-
em tribes acquired great prominence.
The sculpture elaborations consist of life
elements, such as men and l)easts, exe-
cuted in relief and in the round, and hav-
ing an esthetic as well as a religious func-
tion. This strong sculptural tendency is •
well illustrated by the stone pipes, orna-
ments, and images of the mouna-builders
of the Mississippi valley, the carvings of
the pile-dwellers of Florida, the masks,
utensils, and totem poles of the N. W.
coast tribes, and the spiriteil ivory carv-
ings of the P^skimo. Sculpture, the fine
art, is but a higher phase of these ele-
mentary manifestations of the esthetic.
{See Sculpture and Carving,)
(3) The plastic art was practised with
mucn skill by all the mon^ advanced
American tribes. North of Mexico the
potter's art had made exceptional progress
m two great specialization areas — the
Pueblo country of the S. W. and the
Mississippi valley — and symbolic ele-
ments, derived mainly from the animal
kingdom, were freely intrcMluced, not
only as modifications of the fundamental
shapes of vases, but as eml)ellishnients
variously and tastefully applied. The
supervision of taste extended also to the
simple forms of vases, the outlines being
in many cases highly pleasing even to
persons of culture. (See Pottery. )
(4) Closely allied with the plastic art is
the metallurgic art, which had made
sufficient prop-ess among the tri])es x. of
Mexico to display traces of the strong
aboriginal bent for the esthetic. From
the mounds of Ohio, especially from the
Chillicothe district, many implements,
ornaments, and svmbolic objects of cop-
per have been obtained, certain highly
conventional ornamental figures in sheet-
copper being especially noteworthy.
From mounds of the Etowah group, m
Georcia, numerous repouss6 images exe-
cuted in sheet-copper have been recovered
which, as illustrations of artistic as well
as of mechanical achievement, take prece-
dence over most other aboriginal works
N. of Mexico. (See Coppery Metal-work.)
(5) The textile art, which for present
purposes may be regarded as including,
besides weaving proper, the arts of bas-
ketry, needlework, bead work, quill work,
featherwork, etc., as practiseci by the
northern tril)es, abounds in both sym-
bolic and purely decorative elements of
embellishment. ' The former have their
origin, as in the other arts, in mythology,
and the latter arise mainly from the tech-
nical featiires of the art itself. No branch
of art practised bv the primitive tribes
calls so constantly for the exercise of taste
as does this, and probably none has con-
tributed so greatly to the development of
the purely geometric phases of decorative
art. Illustrations may be found jn the
weaving of the Pueblo and Navaho tril)es
of the arid region and the Chilkat of the
N. W., in the basketry of numerous tribes
of the far W. and S. W., and in the bead-
work, (juilhvork, embroidery, and feather-
work of tribes of the great plains, the up-
per Mississippi valley, and the region of
the great lakes. ( See Basketry, Beadwork,
Feather work y Needlework, Quiltwork, Weav-
ing.)
( 6 ) Primitive phases of the art of paint-
ing and other related branches, such as
engraving and tattooing, appear in the
handiwork of all of the northern tribes.
Colors were employed iii dei^orating the
human Ixxly, in embellishing mamifac-
tured articles of all kinds, and in ideo-
graphic delineations on bark, skins, rock
surfaces, etc. A branch of much imiM)r-
tance was, and is, the decoration of earth-
enware, as aiHong the Pueblo tribes; and
allied to this was the paintingof masks and
other carvings, as among the Haida and
Kwakiiitlof the N. W., and the painting of
skins, as among the Plains tribes. In only
a few cases had considerable progress l)een
made i n pictorial art ; perspective, light and
shade, and jwrtraiture were unknown.
Engraving and stamping were favorite
means of decorating potterv among the
ancient tribes of e. United States, and
tattooing was coiiimon among many
tribes. [See Adornment, Dry-jxiinting, En-
graving, Painting, Pictography, Pottery,
Tattooing. )
Besides those branches of art in which
ta.«te manifests itself in ela])orations of
color, form, proportion, and arrangement
there are other arts coming less within
the range of the [)ractical and having a cor-
respondingly greater proi)ortion of the
symbolic and esthetic elements, namely,
music, poi»try, and drama. All of these
have their root deep down in the substrata
of human culture, and they take a promi-
nent place in the ceremonial and esthetic
life of the primitive tribesmen. ( See Dra-
matic representations. Music, Poetry. )
For pai)ers dealing with the primitive
art of the northern tribes, see various re-
ports of the Bureau of American Ethnol-
ogy, the V. S. National Museum, and the
Sniiths<mian Institution; publicaticms of
the Peabody Museum, the American Mu-
96
ARTELNOF ARTIFICIAL HEAD DEFORMATION
[B. A. S.
seum of Natural History, the Field Colum-
bian Museum, the University of California,
and the Annual Archeological Reports of
Ontario. Consult also the American An-
thropologist; the American Antiquarian;
the Journal of American Folk-lore; Bal-
four, Evolution of Decorative Art, 1893;
Boas in Pop. S<-i. Month., Oct., 1903;
Haddon, p:volution of Art, 1895; Dellen-
baugh, North Americans of Yesterday,
1901 ; and the various works cited under
the articles above refcrretl to. (w. h, h.)
Artelnof. A former Aleut village and
Russian jx^st on Akun id., Alaska; pop.
32 in 1834.
Artaylnovskoi.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 225,
1875. Arteljnowtkoje.— HolmberK, Ethnol.Sklzz.,
mai>, 142, 1855. Artelnovtkoe. — W'niaminoflf, Zap-
iski, II, 202, 1840.
Arthur, Mark. A full-blood Nez Perc^,
born in 1873. His mother being captured
with Chief Joseph's band in 1877, Mark
became a wanderer among strange tribes
until alxmt 1880, when he found his way
back to the Nez Perec res., Idaho, where
he entered the mission school of Miss
McBcth and soon began to prepare for
the ministry. When the Nez Perc6 cap-
tives sent to the Indian Territory were
returned to their northern home, Mark
found his mother among them and cared
for her until her death. Aboutl9(X)hewa8
ordained by the Walla Walla presbytery
and ])ecame pastor, at I^pwai, Idaho, of
the oldest Presbyterian church w. of the
Ro<*ky mts., in which charge he has met
with excellent success. In 1905 he was
elected delegate to represent both whites
and fndians at the general assem))ly of the
Presbyterian church, (a. c. v.)
Artificial Head Deformation. Deforma-
tions of the human head have l)een
known since the
writings of He-
rodotus. They
are divisi])le into
two main classes,
those of patho-
logical and those
of mechanical or
artificial origin.
The latter, with
which this ar-
ticle is alone con-
cerned, are again
divisible into un-
intentional and intentional deformations.
One or the other of these varieties of
mechanical <leformation has l)een found
among numerous primitive i)eople8, as the
ancient Avars and Krimeans, some Tur-
komans, Malays, Africans, et<'., as well
as among some civilized |>eoples, as the
French and Wends, in different parts of the
Old World, and ])oth varieties existed from
prehistoric through historic time to the
present among a numl)er i>f Indian tril>es
throughout the Western hemisphere. Un-
intentional mechanical deformations of
the head present but one important, widely
distributed form, that of occipital compres-
sion, Avhich results from prolonged con-
tact of the occiput of the infant with a re-
sistant head support in the cradleboard.
Chinook woman with Child in Hcad-
DEFORMINO CRADLE. ( CATLIN )
CHINOOK CRADLE WITH WICKER HEAD-BOARD. (cATLIn)
Intentional deformations, in all parts of
the world and in all periods, present
two important forms only. In the first of
these, the fiat-head form, the forehead is
flattened by means of a board or a variety
of cushion, while the parietes of the head
undergo compensatory expansion. In
the second form, known as macrocepha-
lous, conical, Aymara, Toulousian, etc.,
the j)ressure of bandages, or of a series
of small cushions, applied about the
head, passing over the frontal region
and under the occiput, produces a more
or less conical, truncated, bag-like, or
irregular deformity, characterized by low
forehead, narrow parietes, often with a
depression just behind the frontal Imne,
and a protruding occiput. All of these
forms present numerous individual varia-
tions, some of which are sometimes im-
properly described as separate types of
deformation.
Among the Indians x. of Mexico there
are numerous tribes in which no hea<i
deformation exists and apparently has
never existed. Among these are included
many of the Athapascan and Californian
peoples, all of the Algonquian, Shosho-
nean (except the Hopi), and Eskimo
tribes, and most of the Indians of the
great plains. Unintentional occipital
lomprt^ssion is observable among nearly
all the southwestern tribes, and it once
extended over most of the IJnited States
BULL. 30)
ARTS AND INDUSTRIES
97
(excepting Florida] s. of the range of the
tribes above mentioned. It hIbo exists
in ancient skulls found in noiiie parts of
the N. W. coast.
Both forms of intentional deformation
are found in North America. Their geo-
graphical distribution is well define I and
limited, suggesting a comparatively late
introduction from more noutherly peo-
ples. The flat-head variety existed in
two widely separated foci, one among the
Natchez and in a few other localities along
the northeast coast of the Gulf of Mexico,
and the other on the N. W. coast from s.
Oregon as far n. as s. Vancouver id., hut
chiefly w. of the Cascades, along Colum-
bia r. The Aymara variety existed, and
still exists, only on and near the n. w.
extremity of Vancouver id.
The motives of intentional deformation
among the Indians, so far as known, are
the same as those that lead to similar
practices elsewhere; the custom has be-
come fixed through long practice, hence
is considered one of propriety and duty,
and the result is regarded as a mark of
distinction and superiority.
The effects of the various defonnations
on brain function and growth, as well as
on the health of the individual, are ap-
parently insignificant. The tribes that
practise it show no indication of greater
mortality at any age than those among
which it does not exist, nor do they show
a larger percentage of imbeciles, or of in-
sane or neuropathic individuals. The
deformation, once acquired, persists
throughout life, the skull and bram com-
pensating for the compression by aug-
mented extension in directions of least
resistance. No hereditary effect is per-
ceptible. The custom of head deforma-
tion among the Indians, on the whole, is
gradually decreasing, and the indications
^re that in a few generations it will have
ceased to exist.
Consult Morton, Crania Americana,
•1839; Gosse, Essai sur les deformations
artificielles du crdne, 1855; Lunier, De-
formations artificielles du crAne, Diet, de
M^ic. et de Chirurg., x, 1869; Broca,
Sur la deformation Toulousaine du crAne,
1872; Lenhossek, Die kiinstlichen Schii-
delverbildungen, 1881; Topinard, tA6m.
d'anthrop. g^ner., 739, 18a5; Briiss, Bei-
trage z. Kenntniss d. kiinstlichen Schiidel-
verbildungen, 1887; Porter, Notes on
Artificial Deformation of Children, Rep.
Nat. Mus., 1889; Bancroft, Native Races,
I, 180, 226, et seq., 1874; Hrdlick^, Head
deformation among the Klamath, Am.
Anthrop, vii, no. 2, 360, 1905; Catlin,
North American Indians, i-ii, 1841. See
Flatheads. (a. h. )
JLrts and Industries. The arts and in-
dustries of the North American aborig-
ines, including all artificial methods of
Bull. 30—05 7
making things or of doing work, were nu-
merous and diversified, since they were
not limited in purjwse to the material con*
ditions of life; a technic was developed to
gratify the esthetic sense, and art was an-
cillary to social and ceremonial institutions
and was employed in inscribing speei'h on
hide, bark, or stone, in records of tribal
lore, and in the service of religion.
Many activities too, existed, not so much
in the service of these for their own sake
as for others. After the conning of the
whites, arts and industries in places were
greatly improved, multiplied in number,
and rendered more complex by theintro-
duition of metallurgy, domestic animals,
mechanical devices, and more etticient
engineering. ( ireat difficulties embarrass
the student in deciding whether some of
the early crude inventions were al)original
or introduced.
The arts and industries of the Indiam
were called forth and developeil for utiliz-
ing the mineral, vegetal, and animal prod-
ucts of nature, and they were modified
by the environmental wants and re-
sources of every place. Gravity, buoy-
ancy, and elasticity were employe<l me-
chanically, and the pHMluction of fire
with the drill and by j)ercussion waj^
also practised. The preservation of fire
and its utilization in many ways were
also known. Dogs were made beasts of
burden and of traction, })ut neither beast
nor wind nor water turned a wheel n. oI
Mexico in j)re-Columbian times. The
savages were just on the borders of ma-
chinery, having the reciprocating two-
hand drill, the bow and strap drills, and
the continuous-motion spindle.
Industrial activities were of five kinds:
(1) Going to nature for her bounty, the
primary or exploiting arts and industries:
(2) working up materials for use, the sec-
ondary or intermediary arts and indus-
tries, called also shaping arts or manufac-
tures; (.S) transportmg or traveling de-
vices; (4) the met^hanism of exchange;
(5) the using up or enjoyment of finished
products, the ultimate arts and industries,
or consumption. The products of one art
or industry were often the material or
apparatus of another, and many tools
could l)e emploved in more than one; for
example, the flint arrowhead or blade
could be used for lx)th killing and skin-
ning a buffalo. Some arts or industries
were practised by men, some bv women,
others by both sexes. They had their
seasons and their etiquette, their cere-
monies and their tabus.
Sfone (raft.— This embraces all the op-
erations, tools, and apparatus employed
in gathering and (piarrying minerals and
working them into paints, tools, imple-
ments, and utensils, or into ornaments and
sculptures, from the rudest to such as ex-
98
ARTS AND INDUSTRIES
[b. a. ■.
hibit the best expressions in fine art.
Another branch is the gathering of stone
for building.
Water indiistry. — This includes activi-
ties and inventions concerned in finding,
carrying, storing, and heating water, and
in irrigation, also, far more important
than any of these, the making of vessels
for plying on the water, which was the
mot her of many arts. The absence of the
larger beasts of Imrden and the accom-
UKHlating waterways together stimulated
the perfecting of various lx)ats to suit
particular regions.
JCiirth trork. — To this belong gathering,
carrying, and using the soil for construc-
tion purposes, excavating cellars, build-
ing sod and snow houses, and digging
ditches. The Arctic i)ermanent houses
were made of earth and sod, the tem-
porary ones of snow cut in blocks, which
were laid in spiral courses to form low
domes. The Kskimo were especially in-
genious in solving the mechanical prob-
lems presented by their environment of
ice. The 8t . Lawrence, Atlantic, and
Canadian tril)es undertook no earth-build-
ing that recjui red skill; but those of the
Mississippi valley, the Gulf states, and
the far 8. W., in their mounds and earth-
works develoi)ed engineering and cooper-
ative ability of no mean order. In some
cases millions of cubic feet of earth were
built up into geometric forms, the mate-
rial often having been borne long dis-
tances by men and women. The tribes
of the Pacific coa.«t lived in partly subter-
ranean houses. The Pueblo tril^es were
skilful in laying out and digging irrigat-
ing dit^rhes and in the builder's art, erect-
ing houses and walls of stones, pis^, or
adobe. Some remains of stone structures
show much taste in arrangement.
Ceramic art. — This industry includes all
operations in nlastic materials. The Arc-
tic tribes in the extreme W., which lack
{)roper stone, kneaded with their fingers
umps of clay mixed with blood and hair
into rude lamps and cooking vessels, but
in the zone of intense cold besides the
ruder form there was no pottery. The
tribes of Canada and of the n. tier of states
w. of L. Superior and those of the Pacific
slope worked little in clay; but the Indi-
ans of the Atlantic sloj)e, of the Missis-
sippi valley, and especially of the S. W.
knew how to gather and mix clay and
form it into pottery, much of which has
great artistic merit. This industrv was
quite generally woman's work, and each
region shows separate types of form and
decoration.
Metal craft, — This included mining,
grinding of ores and paint, rubbing, cold-
hannnering, engraving, embossing, and
overlaying with plates. The metals were
copper, hematite and meteoric iron, lead
in the form of galena, and nugget gold
and mica. No smelting was done.
Wood craft. — Here belongs the felling of
trees with stone axes and lire. The soft-
est woods, such as pine, cedar, poplar, and
cypress, were chosen for canoes, house
frames, totem poles, and other large ob-
jects. The stems of smaller trees were
used also for many purposes. Driftwood
was wrought into bows by the Eskimo.
As there were no saws, trunks were split
and hewn into single planks on the N.
Pacific coast. Immense communal dwell-
ings of cedar were there erected, the tim-
bers being moved by rude mechanical ap-
pliances and set in place with ropes and
skids. The carving on houseV>sts, totem
poles, and household furniture was often
admirable. Jn the S. W. underground
stems were carved into objects of use and
ceremony.
Root craft. — Practised for food, basketry,
textiles, dyes, fish-poisoning, medicine,
etc. Serving the purposes of wood, the
roots of plants developed a number of
special arts and industries.
Fiher craft. — Far more important than
roots for textile purposes, the stems,,
leaves, and inner and outer bark of
plants and the tissues of animals, having
each its special qualities, engendered a
whole series of arts. Some of these mate-
rials were used for siding and roofing
houses; others yielded shredded fiber,
yarn, string, and rope; and some were
employed in furniture, clothing, food re-
ceptacles, and utensils. Cotton was ex-
tensively cultivated in the ^. W.
tSeed craft. — The harvesting of berries,
acorns and other nuts, and grain and oth-
er seeds developed primitive methods of
gathering, carrying, milling, storing, cook-
mg, and serving, with innumeraole ob-
servances of days and seasons, and multi-
farious ceremony and lore.
Not content with merely taking from .
the hand of nature, the Indians were
primitive agriculturists. In ^thenng*
roots they first unconsciously stirred the
soil and stimulated better growth. They
planted gourds in favored places, and re-
turned in autumn to harvest the crops.
Maize was regularly planted on ground
cleared with the help of fire and was
cultivated with sharpened sticks and hoes
of bone, shell, and stone. Tobacco was
cultivated by many tribes, some of which
planted nothing else.
Animal industries. — Arts and industries
depending on the animal kingdom in-
clude primarily hunting, fishing, trap-
ping, and domestication. (See Hunting. )
The secondary arts involve cooking and
otherwise preparing food ; the butchering
and skinning of animals, skin-dressing in
all its forms; cutting garments, tents,
boats, and hundreds of smaller articles
BULL. 30]
ARTS AND INDUSTRIES ASA
99
and sewing them with sinew and other
thread; working claws, horn, bone, teeth,
and shell into things of une, ornaments,
and money; and work in feathers, quills,
and hair. These industrieH went far be-
yond the daily routine and drudgery
connected with dress, costume, recepta-
cles, and apparatus of travel and trans-
portation. Pictographs were drawn on
specially prepared hides; drums and other
musical instruments were made of skins
and membranes; for gorgeous headdresses
and robes of ceremony the rarest and finest
products of animals were requisite; em-
Droiderers everywhere most skilfully use<l
quills and feathers, and sometimes grass
and roots.
Evolution of arts. — ^Much was gathered
from nature for immediati* u>»e or con-
sumption, but the North Americans were
skilful in secondary arts, becoming man-
ufacturers when nature did not supply
their demands. They built a different
kind of house in each environment— in
one place snow domes and underground
dwellings, in another houses of pun-
cheons hewn from the giant cedar, and
in other regions conical tents made of
hides of animals, pole arbors covered
with matting or with cane, and houses of
sods or grass laid on a framework of logs.
The invention of house furniture and uten-
sils, such as cooking vessels of stone, pot-
tery, or vegetal material, vessels of clay,
basketry i worked bark or hi(le for serv-
ing food, and l)edding, develo|K'd the
tanner, the seamstress, the potter, the
wood-worker, the painter, the dyer, and
the stonecutter. The need of clothing tht*
body also offered employment to some of
these and gave rise to other industries.
The methoas of preparing food were bak-
ing in pits, roastmg, and T)oiling; little in-
vention was necessary therein, but utensils
and apparatus for getting and tran8j)ort-
ing food materials had to l)e devised.
These demands developed the canm*-
maker and the sled-builder, the fabricator
of weapons, the stone-worker, tlie wotul-
worker, the carvers of bone and ivory,
the skilful basket-maker, the weaver,
the netter, and the makers of rope an<l
babiche. These arts were not finely
specialized; one iwrson would l)e skilful
in several. The workshop was under
the open sky, and the pattt»rns of the
industrial workers were carried in their
minds.
The arts and industries associiated with
the use and consumption of industrial
Products were not sjiecially differentiated,
'ools, utensils, and implements were
worn out in the using. There was also
some going about, traffic, and luxury,
and these developed demaniis for higher
gmdes of industry. The h^kimo had fur
suite that they would not wear in hunting;
all the deer-chasing tribes had their gala
dress for festal occasions, ceremony, and
worship, upon which much time and skill
were expended; the southern and western
tril)es wove marvelously fine and elegant
robes of hemp, goat's hair, rabbit skin
in strips, and skins of birds. The artisans
of both sexes were instinct with the es-
thetic impulse; in one rt»gion they were
devote<l to quillwork, those of the next
area to carving wood and slate; the ones
living across the mountains produced
whole costumes adorned with" bead work;
the trilx»s of the central area erecteil elab-
orate earthworks; workers on the Pacific
coast ntade matchless basketry; those of
the S. W. modeled and decorated pottery
in an endless variety of shapes and colored
designs. The Indians x. of Mexico were
generally well advanced in the simpler
handicraft^, but had nowhere attempted
massive stone architecture.
Consult the Annual Reports and Bulle-
tins of the Bureau of American Ethnology,
which are replete with information re-
garding Indian arts and industries. See
also Bancroft, Native Races, i-v, 1886;
Boas in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xv,
1901; Dellenbaugh, North Americans of
Yesterday, 1901; Goddard, Life and Cul-
ture of the Hupa, 1903; Hoffman in Nat.
Mus. Rep. 1895, 739, 1897; Holmes (1) in
Smithson. Rep. 1901, 501, 1903; (2) in
Am. Anthrop., in, 684, 1901; Hough (1)
in Nat. Mus. Rep. 1888, 531, lvS90; (2)
ibid., 1889, 395, 1891; McGuirt% ibid.,
1894, 623, 1896; Mason, (1) i])id., 1889,
553, 1891; (2) ibid., 18^), 411, 1891; (3)
ibid., 1894, 237, 1896; (4) ibid., 1897, 725,
HK)1; (5) ibid., 1902, 171, HKM; .(6) in
Am. Anthrop., i, 45, 1899; Moore, Mc-
Guire, Willoughbv, Moorehead, et al.,
ibid., V, 27, 1 903 ;* Ni black in Nat. Mus.
Rep. 1888, 1890; Powers in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., Ill, 1877; Ran (1) in Smithson.
Rep. 1863; (2) in Smithson. Cont. Knowl.,
XXV, 1885; \/illoughby in Am. Anthrop.,
vir, now. 3, 4, 1905; Wilson in Nat. Mus.
Iit»p.l897,1899;Schoolcraft,IndianTribe8,
i-vi, 1851-57; also the Memoirs and Bul-
letins of the American Museum of Nat-
ural History, and the Memoirs and Papers
of the Peabody Museum. See also the
articles on the subjects of the various in-
dividual arts and industries and the
works thereunder cited, (o. t. m. )
Arnkhwa ( * co w buffalo ' ) . A gens of the
Oto and of the Iowa. The subgentes of
the latter are Chedtokhanye, Chedtoyine,
Cheposhkeyine, Cheyinye.
Ah'-ro-whk— Moixan, Ano. Soc., 166, 1877 (Oto).
A-r6-qwA.— DoFNcy in IMh Rep. B. A. E., 240, 1897
;0to). A'-ru-qwA.— Ibid.. 239, (Iowa). Oow Buf-
:a1o.— Morgnn, op. cit. (Oto).
Ala ('tansy mustiird*). A phratral
organization of the Ilopi. comprising the
Chakwaina (Black Earth kacnina), Asa
}i
100
ASA A8HIVAK
[B.
(Tansy mustard), Kwingyap (Oak), Hos-
boa (Chapparal cock) , Posiwu (Magpie) ,
Chisro (Snow bunting), Puchkohu
i Boomerang hunting-stick), and Pisha
Field-mouse) clans. In early days this
people lived near Abiquiu, in the Chama
r. region of New Mexico, at a village called
Kaekibi, and stopped successively at the
pueblos of Santo Domingo, Lagima,
Acoma, and Zufii before reaching Tusa-
yan, some of their families remaining at
each of these pueblos, except Acoma.
At Zuili their descendants form the
Aiyaho clan. On reaching Tusayan the
Posiwu, Puchkohu, and IHsha clans set-
tled with the Hopi Badger clan at
Awatobi, the remainder of the group
continuing to and settling first at Coyote
spring near the e. side of Walpi mesa,
under the gap, and afterward on the mesa
at the site of the modern Hano. This
village the A^sa afterward abandoned, on
account of drought and disease, and went
to Canyon de Chelly, about 70 m. n. e.
of Walpi, in the territorv of the Navaho,
to which tribe many of their women were
given, whose descendants constitute a
numerous clan known among the Navaho
as Kinaani (High-standing house). Here
the Asa lost their language, and here they
planted peach trees m the lowlands; but
a quarrel with the Navaho caused their
return to Hano, at which pueblo the
Tewa, from the Rio Grande, in the mean-
time had settled. This was probably be-
tween 1700 and 1710. The Asa were
taken to Walpi and given a strip of
ground on the e. edge of the mesa, where
they constructed their dwellings, but
a number of them afterward removed
with some of the Lizard and Bear people
to Sichumovi. See the works cited be-
low, also Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
610, 1900; Mindeleff, ibid. , 639. ( f. w. h. )
A«a.— Stephen and Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E:,
30-31,1891. Aaanyoma.— Ibid. (ni^u-mu= 'phra-
try').— Toa'-kwai-na nyii-infl.— Fewkes in Am.
Anthrop., vn, 404, 1894 (nv<l-in<l='phratry'; like-
wise called A'-sa-nytl-mfl).
Asa. The Tansy Mustard clan of the
Asa phratry of the Hopi.
A'-ML— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891.
Ai-wun-wii.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 404,
1894 {vmfl-wii = ' clan ').
Asahani. One of the 7 clans of the
Cherokee. The name can not be inter-
preted, but it may have archaic connec-
tion with m*kani, m'kanigeit *blue.' It
does not refer to cutting of the ears, as
has been asserted. ( j. m. )
A-B&-h&'-Bl.— Mooney, Cherokee MS. vocab.,
B. A.E., 1885 (Cherokee form; pi., A'-ni'-eft-hA'-nl).
Vetonee.— Haywood, Tenn., 276, 1823.
Asao. An unidentified town formerly
on Amelia id., Nassau co., n. e. Fla. A
mission was established there about 1592
by Spanish Franciscans, but it was de-
gtroyed by the natives in their revolt
against the missionaries in 1597. — Shea,
Cath. Miss., 66, 1855.
Asapalaga. A former Seminole village
locate^i on some maps on the e. bank of
St Marks r., Fla., below Yapalaga. Tay-
lor's war map places it, probably cor-
rectly, on thcE. bank of Apalachicola r.,
in Gadsden co., where Appalaga now is.
Asapalaga.— JefTerys, French Dom. Am., i, map,
185, 1761. Aipalaga.— Roberts, Fla.. 14, 1763.
Aseahentoiier. Mentioned by Balbi
(Atlas Ethnog., 33, 1826) as a tribe be-
longing to his Sioux-Osage family, appa-
rently associating them with the Teton.
Not identified. The final part of the
term suggests Kutenai.
Aseaknm. A Samish village in n. w.
Washington. — Gibbs,MS. Clallam vocab.,
no. 38, B. A. E.
Aseik (Ase^ix). One of the three
Bellacoola towns of the Talio division at
the head of South Bentinck arm, British
Columbia. — Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist, II, 49, 1898.
A'ieQ.— Boas in 7th Rep. N. W. Tribes, 3, 1891.
Asenane {AsE^nane). A former Bella-
coola town on Bellacoola r., British
Columbia.— Boas in 7th Rep. N. W.
Tribes, 3. 1891.
Ashamomnck. Probably a Corchaug vil-
lage whose name was later attached to a
white settlement on its site in Suffolk co.,
Long id., N. Y. — Thompson, Long Id.,
181, 1839.
Ashboohia. A band or division of the
Crows.
Aih-bot-ohee-ah.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877.
Treacherous lodget.— Culbertson in Smithson.
Rep. 1850, 144, 1851.
Ashegen. A Yurok village on the coast
of California, 5 or 6 m. s. of the mouth
of Klamath r. (a, l. k.)
Osse-gon.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii,
133, 1859.
^ Ashihi ( * salt ' ) . A Navaho clan.
Acihi.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
104, 1890. Aoihiifine.— Ibid.. Asihi. —Matthews.
Navaho Legends, 30, 1897. AsihieOne*.— Ibid.
Ashimnit (from aahim, *a spring,' in
the Nauset dialect). A village in 1674
at a large spring in Barnstable co., Mass.,
near the junction of Falmouth, Mashpee,
and Sandwich townships. It probably
belonged to the Nauset. ( J. m. )
Aahimuit.— Bourne (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Ck>ll.,
1st ser., I, 197, 1806. Shumuit.— Ibid.
Ashinadea ( ' lost lodges ' ) . A band or
division of the Crows.
Ah-shin'-na-de'-ah.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877.
Athipak (^in the basket'). A Karok
village on Klamath r., a few miles above
the mouth of Salmon r., in Siskiyou co.,
N. w. Cal.
Eakh-kutMr.— Kroeber, inf n, 1904 (Yurok name).
Ashipoo. An unidentified village on a
stream between Edistoand Combaheer.,
S. C, about 12 m. from the coast. — Brion
de la Tour, map U. S., 1784.
Ashivak. • A Kaniagmiut village near
C. Douglas, Alaska; pop. 46 in 1880.—
Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 28, 1884.
BULL. 30]
A8HKANENA — A8PINET
101
Ashkanena ('Blackfoot lodges'). A
band of the Crows.
Aflh-kaae'-iuk.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877.
Aslikimi. A Potawatomi village, named
from its chief, on the n. side of Eel r.,
about Denver, Miami co., Ind. The res-
ervation, including the village, was sold in
1836. (j. M.)
Ashnola. A body of Okinagan in s. w.
British Columbia; pop. 54 in 1901. — Can.
Ind. Aff. for 1901, pt. 2, 166.
A8hiikhtima(* red grass'). A Chickasaw
town mentioned by Romans (P^t and
West Fla., 63, 1775) . It was probably in
Pontotoc or Dallas co. , Miss.
Asidaheeh. A Wichita subtribe.— J. O.
Dorsey, inf'n, 1881; Mooney, inf'n, 1902.
Oi-da'-hetc.— Dorsey, op. cit. ^pron. Shi-da'-hetch,
or She-dar'haitch).
Asilao. A Helatl town on lower Eraser
r., above Yale, British Columbia.
Atil&'o.— Boas in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 454, 1894.
Asimina. The American papaw {Asim-
hm triloba). In Louisianian and Canadian
French the word assim inter or asiminierj
papaw tree, first occurs in the latter part
of the 17th century, and it is through this
source that the term has entered English.
The origin is from the Illinois or some
closely related dialect of Algonquian.
Trumbull (Am. Philol. Assoc, 25, 1872)
considers that the ** older form, "rar/Twma,
used in 1712 by Father Marest, is etymo-
l<»ically more* correct, representing the
Illinois ramminay from rassif 'divided
lengthwise in equal parts'; mina, plural
of mm, *seed,' 'fruit,' 'berry.' (a. f. c.)
Asimn. A Chumashan village w. of
Pueblo de las Canoas (San Buenaventura ) ,
Ventura CO., Cal., in 1542.— Cabrillo (1542)
in Smith, Colec. Doc., 181, 1857.
AsiBnfnnnak. A Karok village on Kla-
math r. at Happy Camp, at the mouth of
Indian cr., n. w. Cal. (a. l. k.)
Ai-sif-soof-tiiih-e-rain.— Taylor in Cal. Fanner,
Mar. 28, 1860.
Asialmil. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Santa Inez mission, Santa Bar-
bara CO., Cal. — Tavlor in Cal. Farmer,
Oct. 18, 1861.
Askakep. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy in 1608, near Pamunkey r.,
in New Kentco.,Va.— Smith (1629), Va.,
I, map, repr. 1819.
Askimimkansen. A village, perhi(ps con-
nected with the Nanticoke, formerly on
an upper e. branch of Pocomoke r. , prob-
ably in Worcester co., Md. — Herrman,
map (1670) in Rep. on Boundary Line
between Va. and Md., 1873.
Askmnk. A Kaialigmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on Hooper bav, near C. Romanzoff,
Alaska; pop. 175 in 1880, 138 in 1890.
AlkaeBM.— Hooper, Cniise of Corwin, 6, 1880.
Agkinaghimint.— nth Census Rep. on Alaska, 164,
1893. Aakinak.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 54,
1884. Aakiauk.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. £., map,
1899.
Asko. An Ikogmiut village on the
right bank of the Yukon, below Anvik,
Alaska; pop. 30 in 1880.
Askhomute.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. £., map,
1899 (the people).
Asnela. A small island in Penobscot
r.. Me., occupied by the Penobscot. The
name is derived from that of an Indian
called Assen or Ossen. — Gatschet, Pe-
nobscot MS., B. A. E., 1887.
Aiomoehei. A division of the New
Jersey Delawares formerly living on the e.
bank of Delaware r., between &lem and
Camden. In 1648 they were estimated
at 100 warriors.
Asomoohet.— Evelin (1648) in Proud, Pa., 1, 113,
1797. Aroomache*.— Sanford, U. S., cxlvl, 1819.
Asopo. A former village, perhaps on
Amelia id., n. e. Florida, the site of a
Spanish Franciscan mission destroyed in
the Indian revolt of 1597.
Aspasniagan. A former village of the
Chalones, of the Costanoan family, near
Soledad mission, Monterey co., Cal.
Aspasniaga.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860.
Atpasniafl^an.— Ibid. Aipaudaquan.— Ibid. Aipai-
niaque*.— Qallano, Relae. del Sutil y Mexicana,
164, 1802.
Aspenqnid. An Abnaki of Agamenti-
cus, ile., forming a curious figure in New
England tradition. He is said to have
been born toward the end of the 16th
century and converted to Christianity, to
have preached it to the Indians, traveled
much, and died among his own people
at the age of about 100 years. Up to
1775-76 Aspenquid's day was celebrated
in Halifax, Nova Scotia, by a clam din-
ner. He is said to be buried on
the slojie of Mt Agamenticus, where he
is reported to have appeared in 1682.
He is tiiought by some to be identical
with Passaconaway. In Drake*8 New
England Legends there is a poem, **St
Aspenquid," by John Albee. See Am.
Notes and Queries, ii, 1889. (a. f. c.)
Asphaltnm. See Cement
Aspinet. A sachem of Nauset on C. Cod,
Mass. He was known to the Plymouth
colonists as early as 1621, and is noted
chiefly for his unwavering friendship for
the P'nglish. He kindly treated and re-
turned to his parents a white boy who
had lost his way in the woods and was
found by some of Aspinet's people. In
the winter of 1622, when Thomas Wes-
ton's men saw famine staring them in the
face, and the Plymouth people were but
little better off, Aspinet and his people
came to their relief with com and beans.
It was his firm stand in favor of peace
with the colonists, and his self-restraint
when provoked almost beyond forbear-
ance by Standish's hastv temper, that pre-
served the friendly relations of the sur-
rounding Indians with the Plymouth
colony during its early jrears. fie was,
however, finally driven mto the swamps
102
A8SABA0CH A8SINIB0TN
[B. A. B.
by threats of attacks by the English, and
died in his unhealthful hiding place
probably in 1623. (c. t.)
AMabaoch. A band, probably of the
Assiniboin or Chippewa, in the vicinity of
Rainy lake, Ontario, in 1874; pop. 152. —
Can. Ind. Rep., 85, 1875.
Aisacomoco. A village about 1610,
probably near Patuxent r., Md. (Pory
m Smith (1629), Virginia, ii, 63, repr.
1819). The name is Algonquian and con-
tains the word comoco, * house,' common
in names of Virginia settlements.
Aiiacnmbnit. An Abnaki ("Tarra-
tine'*) chief who appeared in history
about 1696. He was a faithful adherent
of the French rfnd rendered important
aid to Iberville and Montigny in the re-
duction of Ft St Johns, N. B., Nov. 30,
1696. With two other chiefs and a few
French soldiers Assacumbuit attacked the
fort at Casco, Me., in 1703, then defended
by Capt. March, which was saved by the
timely arrival of an English vessel. He
assisted the French in 1704-5 in their
attempt to drive out the English who
had established themselves in Newfound-
land, and in 1706 visited France, where
he became known to Charlevoix and was
received by Louis XIV, who knighted
him and presented him anele^nt sword,
after boasting that he had slain with his
own hand 1& of the King's enemies in
New England (Penhallow, Ind. Wars, i,
40, 1824). Assacumbuit returned from
France in 1707 and in the following year
was present with the French in their at-
tack on Haverhill, Mass. From that time
until his death in 1727 nothing further m
regard to him is recorded. He is some-
times mentioned under the name Nes-
cambiouit, and in one instance as Old
Escambuit. (c. t. )
Asiameekg. A village in 1698, proba-
bly near Dartmouth, Bristol co., Mass., in
Warapanoag territory. Mentioned in
connection with Acushnet and Assa-
wompset by Rawson and Dan forth (1698)
in Mass-Hist. Soc. Colk, 1st s., x, 129-134,
1809.
Assaomeek. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, in 1608, situated about Al-
exandria, Va. — Smith (1629), Virginia,
I, map, repr. 1819.
Assapan. A dictionary name for the
flying squirrel (Sciuropterus mlucella)^
spelt also assaphauy evidently cognate with
Chippewa d^sipHrif Sauk and Fox d^se-
pd,n<^, * raccoon.' (a. f. c. w. j.)
Assawompset. A village existing as late
as 1674 in Middleborough tp., Ply-
mouth CO., Mass, probably withm Wam-
panoag territory.
AMawamptit.— Rawson and Danforth (1698) in
Mass. Hist. Soc. CoU.. 1st s., x, 129-134, 1809. Assa-
wannpftit.— Ibid. AMoowamsoo. — Bourne (1674),
ibid., I, 198, 1806. AMowamsett.— Records (1671)
quoted by Drake, Bk. Ind8.,bk. 3, 20, 1848.
Assegiin (probably from Chippewa
^ys^igrftn 'black bass.' — W. J.). A tradi-
tional tribe said to have occupied the
region about Mackinaw and Sault Ste Ma-
rie on the first coming of the Ottawa and
Chippewa, and to have been driven by
them southward through lowerMichigan.
They are said, and apparently correctly,
to have been either connectea with the
Mascoutin or identical with that tribe,
and to have made the bone deposits in
N. Michigan. See Mascoutin. (j. m. )
AsM^unt.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 202-4, 1857.
Aiaiyiinyck.— Brinton, Lenape Legend. 228, 1885.
AMignnaigs.— Schoolcraft, op. cit., i, 191, 1851.
Bone Indians.— Ibid., 307.
Asseheholar, Asseola. S^ Osceola.
AsBilanapi ( * vello w or green leaf tree ' ) .
A former Creek town, probably on Yel-
lowleaf cr., a tributary of Coosa r., Ala.
There is a township of the same name in
the Creek Nation, Indian Ter. — Oatschet,
Creek Migr. Leg., i, 128, 1884.
Anelamaby.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Ck>ng.,250,
1836. Ossalonida.— Ibid., 325.
AsBi-lnputski. See Black drink.
Assiminehkon. 6v the treaty of Prai-
rie du Chien in 1829 the Ottawa, Pota-
watomi, and Chippewa reserved **one
section at the village of the As-sim-in-eh-
Kon, or Paw-paw Grove." Probably a
Potawatomi village in Leeco., 111. — Prai-
rie du Chien treaty (1829) m U. S. Ind.
Treaties, 163, 1873.
Assiminier. See Asimina,
Asiinapi (Chippewa: iisi^ndpdy 'stone
person.' — W. J.). A people, mentioned
in the Walam O/wm (Bnn ton, Lenape, 190,
1885), with whom the Dela wares fought
during their migration toward the e.
AMinipi.— Rafinesque, Am. Nations, i, 146, 1836.
Attiniboin (Chippewa: H^sin^ * stone,* ^
ayumv^i *he cooks by roasting': *one ^
who cooks by the use oi stones.' — W. J. ).
A large Siouan tribe, originally constitut-
ing a part of the Yanktonai. Their sepa-
ration from the parent stem, to judge by
the slight dialectal difference in the lan-
guage, could not have greatly preceded the
appearance of the whites, out it must
have taken place before 1640, as the Jesuit
Relation for that year mentions the As-
siniboin as distinct. The Relation of
1658 places them in the vicinity of L. .
Alimibeg, between L. Superior and Hud-
son bay. On Jefferys' map of 1762 this
name is applied to L. Nipigon, and on
De r Isle's map of 1703 to Rainy lake.
From a tradition found in the widely
scattered bodies of the tribe and heard
by the first Europeans who visited the
Dakota, the Assiniboin appear to have
separated from their ancestral stem while
the latter resided somewherein the region
about the headwaters of the Mississippi,
whence they moved northward and joined
the Cree. It is probable that they first
settled about Lake of the Woods, then
BULL. 30]
ASSINIBOIN
103
drifted northwestward to the rejrioii
about L. Winnipeg, where they were liv-
ing as early as 1(570, and were thus lo-
cated on'I^hontan's map of 1691. Chau-
vignerie (1786) place theui in the same
thence n. w. along the Coteau de Prairie,
or divide, as far as the beginning of the
(/vpress nits., on the n. fork of Milk r.,
down that river to its junction with the
^lissouri, thence down the Missouri to
White Earth r., the starting point. Until
the vear 1838 the tribe still numbered
from* 1,000 to 1,200 lodges, trading on the
Missouri, when the smallpox reduced
them to less than 400 lodges. They were
also surroun<led by large and hostile
tribes, who continually made war upon
them, and in this way their number was
diminished, though at the present time
they are slowly on the increase."
From the time they separated from the
parent stem and joined the Cree until
brought under control of the whites, they
were almost constantly at war with the
Dakota. As they have lived since the
appearance of the whites in the N. W.
almost wholly on the plains, without per-
manent villages, moving from place to
place in search of food, tlieir history has
l)een one of conflict with surrounding
tribes.
Physically the Assiniboin do not differ
materially from the other Sioux. The
men dress their hair in various forms; it
is seldom cut, but as it grows is twisted
into small locks or tails, and frequently
false hair is added to lengthen the twist.
It sometimes reaches the ground, but is
region. Dobbs (Hudson Bay, 1744) lo-
cated one division of the Assiniboin some
distance n. w. of L. Winnipeg and the
other immediately w. of an unidentified
lake placed n. of L. Winnipeg. These
divisions he distinguishes as Assiniboin
of the Meadows and Assiniboin of the
Woods. In 1775 Henry found the tri])e
scattered along Saskatchewan and Assini-
boine rs., from the forest limit well up to
the headwaters of the former, and this
region, between the Sioux on the s. and
the Siksika on the w., was the country
over which they continued to range
until gathere<l on reservations. Ilavden
(Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 1862)
limits their range at that time as fol-
lows: **The Northern Assiniboins roam
over the country from the w. ])anks of
the Saskatchewan and Assiniboin rs., in
a w. direcrtion to the Woody mts., n. and
w. amongst some of the small outliers of
the Rocky mts. e. of the Missouri, and on
the banks of the small lakes frequently
met with on the plains in that district.
They consist of 250 or 300 lodges. The
remainder of the tribe, now [1856] re-
duced to 250 lodges, occupy the dis-
trict defined as follows: Commencing at
the mouth oi the White Earth r. on the
B., extending up that river to and as far
beyond its source as the Grand Coulee
and the head of La Riviere aux Souris,
ASSINIBOIN WOMAN
generally wound in a coil on top of the
head. Their dress, tents, and customs
generally are similar to those of the Plains
Cree, but they observe more decorum in
camp and are more cleanly, and their
104
A88INIBOIN
[b. a. e.
hospitality is noted by most traders who
have visited them. Polygamy is com-
mon. While the buffalo abounded their
principal occupation consisted in making
pemmican, which they bartered to the
whites for liquor, tobacco, powder, balls,
knives, etc. Dogs are said to have l)een
sacrificed to their deities. According to
Alexander Henry, if death hanpened in
winter at a distance from the burial
ground of the family, the body was car-
ried along during their journeying and
placed on a scaffold, out of reach of dogs
and l)east8 of prey, at their stopping
places. Arrived at the })urial place, the
corpse was deposited in a sitting posture
in a circular grave about 5 feet deep,
lined with bark or skins; it was then
covered with bark, over which logs were
placed, and these in turn were covered
with earth.
The names of their bands or divisions,
as given by different writers, vary con-
siderably, owing to the loose organiza-
tion and wandering habit of the tribe.
Lewis and Clark mention as divisions in
1805: (1 ) Menatopa (Otaopabine of Max-
imilian), Gens de Feiiilles [for filles]
(Itscheabine), Big Devils (Wato'pach-
nato), Oseegah, and another the name
of which is not stated. The whole peo-
ple were divided into the northern and
southern and into the forest and prairie
bands. Maximilian (Trav., 194, 1843)
names their genti's as follows: ( I ) Itsche-
abinti (gens des lilies); (2) Jatonabine
(gens des roches); (3) Otopachgnato
(gens du large ) ; ( 4 ) Otaopabine (gens des
canot,s ) ; ( 5 ) Tschantoga ( gens des bois ) ;
(6) Watopachnato (gens de I'age); (7)
Tanintauei (gens des osayes); (8) Chabin
(gens des montagnes). A band men-
tioned by Hayden (op. cit., 387), the
Minishinakato, has not l>een identified
with anyname<l bv Maximilian. Henry
(Jour., II, 522-523* 1897) enumerated 11
bands in 1808, of which tUe Red River,
Rabbit, E^agle llills, Saskatchewan, Foot,
an I Swampy Ground Assiniboin, and
Those -who -have -water- for- themselves-
onlycan not l)e positively identified. This
last may be Hayden 's Minishinakato.
Other divisions mentioned, chiefly geo-
graphical, are: Assiniboin of the Mead-
ows, Turtle Mountain Sioux, Wavvaseeas-
son, and Assabaoch (?). The only Assin-
iboin village mentioned in print is Pas-
quayah.
Porter (1829) estimated the Assiniboin
population at 8,000; Drdke at 10,000 be-
fore the smallpox epidenuc of 1836, dur-
ing which 4,000 of them perished. Galla-
tin(1836) placed the numl>er at 6,000; the
U. S. Indian Report of 1843, at 7,000. In
1890 they numbered 3,008; in 1904, 2,600.
The Assiniboin now (1904) living in
the United States are in Montana, 699
under Ft Belknap agency and 535 under
Ft Peck age cy; total, 1,234. In Can-
ada there were in 1902 the Mosquito
and Bears Heads' and Lean Man's b^nds
at Battleford agency, 78; Joseph's band
of 147, Paul's of 147, and 5 orphans at Ed-
monton agency; Carry-the-Kettle liand
under Assiniboin agency, 210; Pheasant
Rump's band, originally 69, and Ocean
Man's, 68 in number, at Moose mtn.;
antl the bands on Stony res.. Alberta,
661 ; total, 1,371. See Powell in 7th Rep.
B. A. K., Ill, 1891; McGee, Siouan In-
dians, 15th Rep. B. A. E., 157, 1897;
Dorsey, Siouan Sociology, ibid., 213;
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.,
1862. (j. M. c. T.)
Apinulboinet.— Lloyd in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., v,
246, 1876 (misprint). Anenipoitit. — Barcia, £n-
8a vo, 238, 1723. Anenipoits.— McKenney and
Hall, Ind. Tribes, ni. 80. 1854. Atinbols.— Trum-
bull, Ind. Wars, 185, 1^51. AainiboeU.— Anville,
Am. Sept. map, 1756. AainiboiaM. — MorsTAQ iu
N. Am. Rev., 44, Jan., 1870. Ati'-ni-bwa-.— Am.
Natur., 829, Oct., 1882 (wrongly given as Dorsey 'a*
si>elllng). Asinibwanak.— Ouoq, Lex. de la Lan-
§ue Algonquine, 77, 1886. A-u-ni-poi'-tnk. — Hay-
en, Ethnog. and Philol., 381, 1862 (Cree and
Chippewa name). Asinipovalet.— Barcia, Ensayo,
176, 1723. Ai-ne-boinet.— Bonner, Life of Beck-
wourth. 158, 1856. AMeenaboine.— Franklin, Journ.
Polar Sea, 168, 1824. AMeeneepoytuok.— Ibid., 55
(Cree name). AMeliboi*.— Doc. of 1683 in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 798, 1855. AasenepoUt.— Henne-
pin, New Discov., map, 1698. AMoniboinet.— Per-
rin, Vov. dans les Louisianes, 263, 1805. Aiseni-
boualak.— Du Lhut (1678) in Margry. D6c., vi, 21,
1886. AsscnipoeU.— Chauvignerie (1736) in N. Y^
Doc. Col. Hist., IX, ia55, 1855. Auenipoilt.—
Hennepin, New Discov., map, 1698. AMonipoua-
lacs.— Hennepin quoted by Shea, Disc., 131,
1852 (trans, 'stone warriors'). AMonipoualak. —
Shea, ibid., note. AsMnipoualt.— Kadout (1710)
in Margry, DC'C, Vi, 14, 1886. AaaempoueL—Ibid.,
11. AMenipoulaos. — Hennepin misquoted by
Neill, Hist. Minn., 134, 1858. AsaempoulaM.—
Hennepin (1680) in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 212,
1M6. Aisenipoulak*.— Du Lhut (1678) in Maigry,
I)<k*., VI, 22, 1886. Assenipouvals.— Coxe, Carolana,
43, 1741. AisenipovaU.— Alcedo,Dict.Geog.,iv,657,
1788. AsMnniboint.— Schoolcraft, Trav., 245, 1821.
Assenpoels.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., index, 289, 1861.
AsaiUboueU.— Iberville (1702) in Margry, Ddc.,
IV, 600. 1880. AsumpouaU.— Lahontan.NewVoN'.,
I, 231, 170;{. Aflsinaboet.— Smith, Bouquet's Ex-
ped., 69. 1766. AstinaboiL— Boudinot, Star in the
West, 125, 1816. AMinaboine.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 498,
1839. AMinaboint.— Ibid., 297, 1835. AMina-
bwoine*.— Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, v, 99. 1855. At-
•ineboes.—Hutchins (1765), ibid., ni, 556, 1853. At-
•ineboin. — Bracken ridge. Views of La., 79, 1815.
Astineboinet.— Richardson, Arct. Exped., i, map,
1851. Aisinebwannuk.— Jones, Oiebway Inds.,
178. 1861 . Assinepoel. — Chau vignerie ( 1736) quoted
by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ni, 5.t6, 1853. Astine-
poil«.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Valley,
380. 1862. Aaainepoint.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep.
1849, 70. 1850. Assinepotuc— Balbi, Atlas Ethnog.,
55, 1826. Asainepoualaot. — Coxe, Carolana, 43,
1741. AMiniboelle.— Beauhamois and Hocquart
(1731) in Margry, D<^c., vi, 568, 1886. Aatiai-
boels.^Frontenac (1695) , ibid., v, 63, 188S. Aitiai-
boeti.— Capellini, Ricordi, ia5, 1867. AMiaiboUe.—
Vaudreuil and B^gon (1716) in Maiwry, D4o.,vi,
496, 1886. AiainiboiU, —Carver, Travels, map, 1778.
Astiniboines. —West, Jour. , 86, 1824. AMinlboiiUk—
Gass, Jour., 69, 1807. AuiniboU.^DenonviUe
(1685) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 886, 1855. Ai-
•inibolese*.— Alcedo, Dice. Geog., i, 165, 1786. A»-
siniboualas.- Perrot in Minn. Hist. Coll., n, pt. 2,
24, 1864. AMinibouane.^Paobot (1722) in Margry
BULL. 30]
A88INIBOIN OF THK PLAINS ASTAKIWI
105
D6c., VI, 517, 1886. AMiniboueU.— Vaudreuil
(1720), ibid., 510. A»«iaiboueU.— Du Chesneau
(1681)^ln N. Y. Doc. -Col. Hist., ix, 153, 1855. A«-
■iniboiilas.— Perrot, M6m.,91,1864. AstinibVans. —
Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 77, 1850. Assini-
poaU.— Proc. verb. (1671) in Margry, D6e., i, 97,
1876. AwinipooU.— Du Lhut (1678), ibid., vi, 19,
1886. AMinipoile.— Vaudreuil and B6gon (1716),
ibid., 500. Aasinipoileu.— Balbi, Atlas Kthnog..
65,1826. AsaiaipoiU.— Le Sueur (1700) in Mar-
gry, D6c., VI, 82, 1886. AMiniponieU.— Gallatin in
Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc, ii, 123, 1836. Aaainipo-
tuo.— Keane in Stanford, Compend.. 501, 1878. As-
■inipoual.— Lahontan, New Vov., i, 207, 1703. As-
■inipotUlao.— Jes. Rel., 1667, in, 23, 1858. Assini-
poualaks.— Ibid., 21, 1658. AMinipouan.— Ibid.,
1670, 92, AMinipottlac— Du Lhut ( 1684) in Margrv,
D^., VI, 61, 1886. AMinipour.— Le Jeune in Je*s.
Rel., 1640, III, 35, 1858. AwinipovaU.— Harris. Coll.
Voy. and Trav.,*ii, map, 17a5. Assini-poytiik.—
Richardson, Arct. Exped., 51, 1851. ABunipwa-
aak.— Qatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Chippewa name).
Auiimaboin.— Drake, Bk. Inds.. vi. 1848. Assinna-
boines.— Ibid. AMinneboin.— Tanner, Nar., 50,
1830. AMinnee-Poetuo.— Me.HLst.Soc.CoU., vi,270,
1859. AMinnibaiiu.— Lewis and Clark, Disc., 23,
1806. AMinniboan.— Cones, Lewis and Clark Ex-
ped., 1, 193, note, 1893 (Chippewa name). Astinni-
boine.— Hind, Labr. Pen., ii, 148, 1863. AMinniboinc
8ioux.~Can. Ind. Rep., 77, 1880. AMinniboins.—
Lewis and Clark, Disc. , 30. 1806. Auinopoils.— La
Harpe (1700) in French, Hist. Coll. La., in. 27. 1851.
Astinpouele. — Anon. Carte de I'Am. S<5pt., Paris,
n. d. AMinpoulao.— Bowles, map of Am., after
1750. Astinpottls. — Lahontan, quoted bv Ram-
sey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 72, 1849. Auginab'waun.—
Parker, Minn. Handb., 13. 1857. Ohiripinons.—
Perrot (1721) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., ii, pt. 2, 24,
1864. BMinaboin.— Ex. Doc. 90, 22d Cong., 1st
sess., 64, 1832. E-taiu-ke-pa-M-qua.— Long, Exped.
Rocky Mts., II, Ixxxiv, 1823 (Hidatsa name, from
i-ta-ha-tski, 'long arrows'). Fish-eater*.— Havden,
Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 3S1, 1862 (Hohe or;
Dakota name). Ouerriers de la Roche.— Perrot,
M^m., 232, 1864. Ouerriers de pierre.- Jes. Rel.,
1658, III, 21, 1858. Haba.—Coues, Pike's Exped.. i,
348, 1895. Ho-ha.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq.
Soc., II, 123, 1836 ('rebel': sometimes applied bv
other Sioux tribes). Hohays.- Snelling, Tales o'f
N. W., 21, 1830. Hohe.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B.
A. E.,222, 1897 (Dakota name: 'rebels'). Ho'-he.—
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 381, 1862
(trans, 'fish-eaters'). Hoheh.— Williamson in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 296, 1872. Ho-heM-o.—
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 290, 1862
(Cheyenne name). Hoh-hays.- Ramsey in Minn.
HLst. Soc. Coll., I. 48. 1872. Lidiens-Pierre.- Balbi,
Atlas Ethnog., 55, 1826. L»ati.— Henry, Travels,
286, 1809 (erroneous identification for Santee).
Left hand.— Culbertson in Smithson. Rep, 1850,
143, 1851 (translation of the French name of their
chief), mantopanatos.— Keane in Stanford, Com-
pend., 470, 1878. Faoota.— Maximilian. Tra v., 193,
1843 (own name, same as Dakota: 'our people ').
Hation of the ereatWater.- Dobbs. Hudson Bav.
20, 1744. Osinipoillee.- Henry. Trav., '273, 1809.
Oasineboine.— Coue.s, Lewis and Clark Exped., i.
178, note 58, 1893. OMiniboine.— Ibid., 59. Ossno-
bians.— Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., in, '24, 1794. Sioux
of the Rocks.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 77, 1H.50.
Stone. —Keane in Stanford, Compend., 53<), 1878.
Stone Indians.— Fisher, New Trav., 172, 1812.
Stone Koastem.— Tanner, Nar., 51, 1830. Stone
Sioux.— Lewis and Clark, Disc, 46, 1806. Stoney.—
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 536, 1878. Stoney
Indiana.— Can. Ind. Rep., 80, 1880. Stonies.- Infn
of Chas. N. Bell, of Winnipeg, Manitoba, 1886
(the common name used by English in Canada >.
Thiokwood.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 536.
1878 (applied to the Assiniboin of the Rocky
mts.^. Tlu^lama'Eka.— Chamberlain, infn, 1903
(' cutthroats ' : K utenai name ) . TJssinebwoinug. —
Tanner, Nar., 316, 1830 (Chippewa name) . Weep-
ers—Henry, Trav., 286, 1809.
Assiniboin of the Plains. A division of
the Assiniboin described by Dobbs ( Hud-
eon Bay, 35, 1744) as distinguished from
that portion of the tribe living in the
wooded country. On his map they are
located w. of L. Winnipeg. De Smet
(Miss, de TOregon, 104, 106, 1848) esti-
mated them at 300 lodges, and in the
English edition of his work (Oregon
Miss., 156, 1847) the number given is 600
lodges. He says thev hunt over the
great plains between the Saskatchewan,
Red, Missouri, and Yellowstone rs., and
as compareii with the Assiniboin of the
woods "are more expert in thieving,
greater topers, and are i)erpetually at
war," but that in general the men are
more robust and of (;ommanding stature.
They include the Itscheabine, Wato-
pachnato, Otaopabine, and Jatonabine.
AssiniboeU of the South.— Jefferys, Fren(;h Dom.
in Am., pt. i, mitp. 1741. Atsiniboins des Plainee.—
Smet. Mi.ss. de r Oregon, 104, 1848. AMiniboueU
of the Meadows.— Dobbs, Hudson Bav, 35, 1741.
Plain Assineboins.— Hind, Red River Exped.. ii.
152. 1860.
Assonet. A river and village in Bristol
CO., Mass., and probably the name of a
former Indian village in the vicinity.
Schoolcraft (Ind. Tribes, i, 117, 1851)
uses the name " Assonets" to denote the
probable Indian authors of the inscrip-
tions on Dighton rock. ( j. m, )
Assnapmnshan. A Montagnais mission
founded by the Jesuits in 1661 about 300
m. up Saguenay r., Quebec, probablv at
the entrance of Ashuapmouchouan r. into
L. St John. A trading post of the same
name was on iliat river in 1832.— Hind,
Labrador, ii, 25, 26, 38, 1863.
Assumption. A mission established in
1728 at the Wyandot village near the
present city of Detroit, Mich., and re-
moved soon afterward to the opposite
shore. It continued until 1781. — Shea,
Cath. Miss., 202, 1855.
Assunpink ( 'at the stone stream ' ). A
division of the Dela wares formerly on
Stony cr., on the Delaware, near Trenton.
Probably from the Indian name of Stonv
cr. (j. M. )
As»anpinks.— Bond i not, Star in the West, 125,
1816. Asseinpink*.— Sanford, U. S., cxlvii, 1819.
Assunpink.— Proud, Pa., ii, 294, 1798. Stony Creek
Indians.— Ibid.
Assnnta. A former village, presuma-
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Assuti. A small Nez Perc^ band for-
merly living on Assuti cr., Idaho. They
joined Chief Joseph in the Nez Perc^
war of 1877.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E.,
1877.
Assuweska. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy in 1608 on the n. bank of
the Rappahannock, in King George co.,
Va.— Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr.
1819.
Astakiwi (es-ta-ke^, *hot spring.* —
Powers ) . A Shastan village near Canby,
in Warm Springs valley, Modoc co., Cal.,
whose people were described by Pow-
106
ASTIALAKWA ATANUS
[B. A. S.
ere (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 267, 1877)
as most miserable and squalid, having
been brutalized not only by their scanty
and inferior diet, but also by the loss of
their eomeliest maidens and best voung
men, who were carried off into slavery
by the Modoc.
AstakAywM.— Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 412,
1874. Astakywieh.— Ibid. Astaqkewa.— Curtin,
MS. Ilmawi vocab., B. A. E., 1889. Es-U-ke'-
wach.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., .in, 267,
1877. Hot Spring Valley Indians.— Ibid, (includes
also the Hantewa) .
Astialakwa. A former pueblo of the
Jemez, on the summit of a mesa that
separates San Diego and Guadelupe can-
yons at their mouths. It was probably
the seat of the Franciscan mission of San
Juan, established early in the 17th cen-
tury. Distinct from Ostyalakwa.
Aaht-ia-la-qua.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papersi
III, 126, 1890. Aah-tyal-a-qua.— Ibid., iv, 206, 1892.
Aaht-ya-laqua.— Bandelier in Proc. Cong. Intemat.
Am.. VII, 452, 1890. Astialakwl— Hodge, field
note.M. B. A. E., 1895. Ateyala-keokv£.— Loew in
Wheeler Suney Rep., vii, 343, 1879.
Astiiia. A village in n. Florida in 1564,
subject to Utina, head chief of the Tim-
ucua (Laudoimiere in French, Hist. Coll.
La., n. s., 298, 1869). De Bry's map
(1590) places it w. of St Johns r.
Astoaregamigoakh. Mentioned as one
of the small tribes n. of St Lawrence r.
(Jes. Rel. 1643, in, 38, 1858). Probably
a Montagnais band or settlement about
the headwaters of Sajjuenay or St Mau-
rit 6 r.
Asumpcion. A group of Alchedoma
rancherias on or near the Rio Colorado,
in California, more than 50 m. below the
mouth of Bill Williams fork. They were
visited and so named bv F^ray Francisco
Carets in 1776.— Garces,* Diary, 426, 1900.
Asystarca. A former Costanoan village
of central California attached to the mis-
sion of San Juan Bautista. — Engelhardt,
Franciscans in Cal., 398, 1897.
Ataakat. A village of the Tolowa for-
merly situated on the coast of n. Cal. —
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 236,
1890.
A'-ta-i-kut'.— Dorsev in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii,
23fi. 1890 (Tutu name). A'-U-a-kut'-ti.— Ibid.
(Tutu name). A-U-ke-te tun'-nfi.— Dorsey, MS.
Chetco vocab.. B. A. E.. 1884. Hi-jrank'-U-kc'-to
te'-ne.— Dorsey, MS. Smith R. vocab., B. A. E.,
1884. Yah-nih-kah«.— Hamilton, MS. Hay-narg-
ger vo(;ab., B. A. E. YantuokeU.— Bancn)ft, Nat.
Races, i, 445. 1874. Yatuoketa— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, June 8. 1860. Yau-tuok-eU.— Ibid., Apr.
12,1861. Yon-tocketts.— Hamilton, MS. Hay-narg-
ger vocab., B A. E.
Ataakwe (*8eed people*). A people
encountered by the Zuni before reaching
their final residing place at Zufii, N. Mex.
They joined the Seed clan of the Zuili,
whose descendants constitute the present
Taakwe, or Corn clan, of that tribe. —
Cushing in The Millstone, ix, 2, 23, 1884.
A'-ta-a.— Cushing, ibid.
Ata-cnlcnlla. See AttakullakuUa.
Atagi. One of the 4 Alibamu towns for-
merly situated in what is now Autauga co. ,
Ala., extending 2 m. alon^ the w. bank
of Alabama r., a short distance w. of
the present Montgomery. Autaugaville,
Autauga cr. , and Autauga co. are named
after it. Hawkins (1798) speaks of it as
a small village 4 m. below Pawokti, and
says that the people have little inter-
course with the whites but are hospitable.
Schooler (Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv,
578, 1854) states that it contained 54
families in 1832. (a. s. g. )
At-Uu-gee.— Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 36, 1848.
Autallga.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 42iS, •24th Cong., 1st sess.,
331, 1836. AuUuga.— Campbell (1836) in H. R.
Doc. 274. 25th Cong., 2d sess., 20, 1838. AutoluM.—
Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 262,
1855. Dumplin Town.— Wood Vvard, Reminis-
cences, 12, 1859. ■ '
Atalans. An imaginary prehistoric
civilized race of North America (Rafin-
esque, introd. to Marshall, Ky., i, 23,
1824); probably based on the Atlantis
fable.
Atamasco lily. The name of a plant
{Amaryllis atamasco), defined by Bart-
lett (Diet, of Americanisms, 20, 1877)
** as a small one-flowered lily, held in like
esteem, in Virginia and North Carolina,
with the daisy in England." Parkinson
(Paradisua, 87, 1629) savs that *nhe In-
dians in Virginia do call it Attamusco.**
Gerard (Sun, N. Y., July 80, 1895) states
that the word means * stained with red,*
in reference to the color of the flowers.
In this case the chief component would
be the Algonquian radical miskf signi-
fying *red.* (a. f. c.)
Atana (Atd^na). A Haida town on
House, or Atana, id., e. coast of Moresby
id.. Queen Charlotte group, British Colum-
bia. Accord mg to Skidegate legend,
House id. was the second to appear above
the waters of the flood. At that time
there was sitting upon it a woman who
became the ancestress of the Tadjilanas.
The Kagialskegawai also considered her
as their ''grandmother,'* although saying
that they were not descende<l directly
from her but from some people who
drifted ashore at the same place in a
cockleshell. The town was occupied by
the Tadjilanas. As the name does n6t
occur in John Work's list, it would seem
to have been abandoned prior to 1836-
41.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 277, 1905.
Atanekerdlok. An Eskimo settlement
on Nugsuak pen., w. (irt^nland. — Peary,
My Arct. Jour., 208, 1893.
Atangime. A settlement of Eskimo in
E. (ireenland. — Meddelelser om Gron-
land, XXV, 24, 1902.
Atanumlema. A small Shahaptian tribe
living on Yakima res., On Atanum cr.,
Wash. They are said to speak a dia-
lect closely related to the Yakima and
Klikitat— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
738, 1896.
Atanas (tatd^nASy 'bilge- water'). A
Skittagetan town, occupied by the Do-
BULL. 30]
ATARONCHRONON — ATEPUA
107
g'tunai, on the n. e. coast of Hippa id.,
ritish Columbia — Swan ton, Cont. Haida,
281, 1905.
Ataronohronon. One of the minor
tribes of the Huron confederation, among
whom the Jesuit mission of Sainte Marie
was established. —Jes. Rel. for 1640, 61,
1858.
Andoouanohronon.— Jes. Rel. for 1640, 35, 1858.
Andowanohronon.— Jes. Rel., index, 1858. Ataoon-
ohrononB.— Jes. Rel. for 1637, 114, 1858. Ataronoh.—
. Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 154, 1883.
Atarpe. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal.
Atarpe.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Oturbe.— Ibid. Uturpe.— Ibid.
Atasi (Creek: H^tdssa, *warclub.* — Gat-
schet ) . An ancient Upper Creek town on
the s. side of Tallapoosa r., in Macon co.,
Ala., adjoining Calibee cr., 5 m. above
Huthliwathli town. In 1766 it contained
about 43 warriors, and when seen by
Hawkins, about 1799, it was a poor,
miserable-looking place. On Nov. 29,
1813, a battle was fought there between
the Creeks and Jackson's troops. The
name was later applied to a town in the
Creek Nation, Indian Ter., the people of
which are called Atasdlgi. See Jefferys,
French Dom. Am., 135, map, 1761; Bar-
tram, Trav,, 454, 1791; Gatschet, Creek
Migr. Leg., i, 128, 1884; ii, 185, 1888.
Allasii.— Bartram, Voy., i, mdp, 1799 (errone-
ously placed on the cHattahoocnec). AltaMe.—
Boudinot, Star in the West. 260, 1816. Atases.^
Jefferys. French Dom., i, 134, map. 1761. Atasi.—
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Legend, i, 128, 1884.
Ataasi.— Ibid. At&i.— Ibid. . (in Indian Ter.).
Attaaea.— Roberts, Florida, 13, 1763. Attaais.—
Phelipeau, Carte G6n6rale, 1783. Attaaae.— Bar-
tram, Travels, 448, 1791. AutUeea.— Woodward,
Reminiscences, 24, 1859. Autossee.— Drake, Ind.
Chron., 198, 1836. Aut-tos-ae.— Hawkins (1799),
Sketch, 31, 1848. Auttotsee.— Hawkins (1813) in
Am. State Pap., Ind. Aflf., i, 849, 1832. CiU»ee».—
Romans, Florida, i, 280. 1775. Giteaea.— Jeflferys,
French Dom. Am., i, 134, map, 1761 (mislocated,
but probably the sjime). Olasse.— Bartram, Voy.,
I, map, 1799. Otaaee.— Thomas (1793) in Am.
State Pap., Ind. Aff., i, 407, 1832. Otaase.— Bar-
tram, Travels, 394. 461. 1791. Otisee.— Carle V {\^VS)
in H. R.Doc. 452, 25th Cong.. 2d se.ss., 75. 1838.
Otiaaee.— Ibid., 31. Otoaeen.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 276,
24th Cong.. Istscss.. 131, 1836. Ottaaees.— U. S. Ind.
Treat. (1797), 70, 1837. Otteraea.— Sen. Ex. Doc.
425, 24th Cong., 1st .sess., 152, 1836. Otteaa.—
Campbell (1836) in H. R. Doc. 274. 2.5th Cong.. 2d
sess., 20, 1838. Otteaaa.— Crawford (1836). ibid .24.
Ottiaae.— Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, iv, 578. 1854.
Ottiaaee.— Wvse (1836) in H. R. Doc. 63, 25th
Cong. , 2d 8e.s.s., 63, 1838.
Atastagoniefl. An unidentified tribe
mentioned by Rivera (I)iario y Derro-
tero, leg. 2,602, 1736) as tormerly living in
8. Texas.
Atohalnk. An Eskimo village in the
Kuskokwim district, Alaska; pop. 39 in
1890.
Atohalugumiut— 11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1890
(the inhabitants).
Atchatchakangonen (from aichitchal\
*crarie'). The principal division of the
Miami. On account of the hostility of the
Illinois they removed w. of the Missis-
sippi, where they were attacked by the
Sioux, and they afterward 8ettle<l near the
Jesuit niission at Green Bay, and moved*
thence into Illinois and Indiana with the
rest of the tribe. In 1736 Chauvignerie
gave the crane as one of the two leading
Miami totems. ( j. m. )
Atchatchakangouen.— Perrot (ca. 1721) M6moire,
222, 1864. AtohatoliaKangouen.-^es. Rel., LViii,
40. 1899. Ohacakengua.— 0)xe, Carolana, map,
1741. Chachakingua.— Ibid., 12. La Orue.— La
Salle (1680) in Margry, D6c., n,216, 1877. Kiamia
de la Griie.— Perrot, op. cit., 154. Outiohaoook.—
Coxe, Carolana. map, 1741. Outitohakouk.— Jesuit
Rel., 1658, 21. 1858. Tohatohakigoa.— La Salle
(1680) in Margry. D6c., II, 21671877. Tohatoha-
king.— Ibid. (1683), 320. Toiiiduakouingouea.—
Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am., ii, 261,
1753. Tohiduakouonguea.— Baqueville de la Poth-
erie misquoted by Shea in Wis. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
Ill, 134, 1856.
Atchaterakangoaen. An Algonquian
tribe or band living in the interior of
Wisconsin in 1672, near the Mascouten
and Kickapoo.
AtchateraKangouen.— Jes. Rel., LVIII, 40, 1899.
Atchialgl (atchi 'maize,' dlgi 'people').
One of the twenty Creek clans.
Atchialgi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 1. 155.1884.
Atciiinaalgi ('cedar grove people'). A
former small village of the Upper Creeks,
on a tributary of Tallapoosa r. , probably in
Tallapoosa cb., Ala. It was their north-
ernmost settlement in the 18th century,
and was destroyed by Gen. White, Nov.
13, 1813. (a. 8. G.)
Atchina-algi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 128,
1884. Au-ohe- * " " "
of Creek co _ ,
Hist. Ala., II, 299, 1851.
nau-ul-gau.— Hawkins (1799). Sketch
- Genalga.— Pickett,
Atchlnahatchi ( ' cedar creek ' ). A for-
mer branch settlement of the Upper
Creek village of Kailaidshi, on a small
stream of the same name, a tributary of
the Tallapoosa, probably in Coosa co.,
Ala. (a. 8. G. )
Ahcharalar.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 1st
.sess.. 322. 1836 (a doubtful svnonym). Atchioa
Hatchi.— Gatschet. Creek Migr. Leg., i. 128. 1884.
Au-che-nau-hat-ohe.— Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 49,
1848.
Atchitchiken {Atci^tcik'Eny sig. doubtful,
or Xkaitu^sni<y ' reaches the top of the brow
or low steep,' because the trail here passes
on top of a bench and enters Spapiam
valley). A village of the Spences Bridge
band of the Ntlakyapanmk on the n. side
of Thompson r., 3 m. back in the moun-
tains from Spences Bridge, British Cohim-
bia, — Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.,
II, 173, 1900.
Ateacari. A branch of the Cora divi-
sion of the Piman family on the Rio de
Nayarit, or Rio de San Pedro, in Jalisco,
Mexico.
Ateacari.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59, 1864. Atea-
kari.— Pimentel, Lenguas de Mex., ii, 83, 1865.
Ateanaoa.— Orozco y Berra, op. cit. (name of lan-
guage).
Atepaa. A pueblo of the province of
Atripuy, in the region of the lower Rio
Grande, N. Mex., in 1598.— Ornate (1598)
in Doc. InM., xvi, 115, 1871.
Atepira.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N Mex., 135, 1889
(misprint).
108
ATFALATI ATHAPASCAN FAMILY
[B. A. E.
Atfalati (Atfdlati). A division of the
Kalapooian family whose earliest seats,
so far as can be ascertained, were the
plains of the same name, the hills about
Forest Grove, and the shores and vicin-
ity of VVappato lake, Oreg. ; and they are
said to have extended as far as the site
of Portland. They are now on Grande
Ronde res. and number about 20. The
Atfalati have long given up their native
customs and little is known of their
mode of life. Their language, however,
has been studied by Gatschet, and our
chief knowledge of the Kalapooian
tongue is from this dialect. The follow-
ing were the Atfalati bands as ascer-
tained by Gatschet in 1877: Chacham-
bitmanchal, Chachanim, Chachemewa,
Chachif, Chachimahiyuk, Chachimewa,
Chachokwith, Chagindueftei, Chahelim,
Chakeipi, Chakutpaliu, Chalal, Chalawai,
Chamampit, Chapanaghtin, Chapokele,
Chapungathpi Chatagithl, Chata^shish,
Chatakuin, Chatamnei, Chatilkuei, Cha-
wayed. (l. f. )
Atfalati.— Gatschet in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, xii,
212, 1899. Fallatahs.—S locum in H. R. Rep. 101,
25th Cong., 3d sesa., 42, 1839. Fallatrah*.— Slocum
in Sen. Doc, 24, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 15, 1838.
Follaties.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 569,
1846. Jualati.— Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., viir,
256. 1882. Snalatine.— Lane (1849) in Sen. Ex.
Doc. 52, 31st Cong., 1st sess. , 172, 1850. Sualatine.—
Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 160, 1850. Tualatii— Gat-
schet in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, xii. 212, 1899. Tua-
latim*.— Taylor in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 40th Cong.,
spec, sess., 27, 1867. Tualatin.— Palmer in Ind.
Aff. Rep., 260, 18M. Tuality.— Tolmie in Trans.
Oreg. Pion. Assn., 32, 1884. Tuhwalati.— Hale in
V. 8. Expl. Exped., vi, 569, 1846. Turlitan.—
Huntington in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867, 62, 1868. Twala-
ties.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 221, 1861. Twalaty.— Pres.
mess., Ex. Doc. 39, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 2, 1862.
TwaUtes.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 503, 1865. Twal-
lalty.— Ibid., 205. ia51. TwalUtine*.- Meek in
H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., 1st sess., 10, 1848.
Wapato Lake.— McClane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 184,
1887. Wapatu.— Gatschet in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
IV, 143, 1891. Wapatu Lake.— Gatschet in Cont. N.
A. Ethnol., II. pt. 1, xlvi, 1890. Wapeto.— Ind. Aff.
Rep., 492, 1897. Wapoto Lake.— McClane in Ind.
» Aff. Rep., 269. 1889. Wappato.— Smith in Ind. Aff.
Rep., 56, 1875. Wappatoo.— Victor in Overland
Mo., VII, 346. 1871. Wapto.— Meacham, Wigwam
and Warpath, 117, 1875.
Athabasca (Forest Cree: athap * in suc-
cession,' -askaw 'grass,* 'reeds'; hence
' grass or reeds here and there. ' — Hewitt ) .
A northern Athapascan tribe, from which
the stock name is derived, residing around
Athabasca lake. Northwest Ter., Canada.
Ross (MS., B. A. E. ) regards them as a
part oi the Chipewyan proper. They do
not differ essentially from neighboring
Athapascan tribes. In 1902 (Can. Ind.
Aff., 84, 1902) 326 were enumerated at
Ft Chipewyan.
Arabaakaw.— Lacombe, Diet, des Cris, 1874
("Athabasca" Cree name). Athabaskan*.- Peti-
tot. Diet. D^n^Dindji^. xx. 1876. Athapawow.-
Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Athapuaoow.— Hearne,
Joum. N. Ocean, 177, 1795. Ayabaakau. —Gatschet,
MS., B. A. E. (Cree name). Kkpav-tpele-Ottine.-
Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 363, 1891
(•people of the willow floor,' 1. e., of Ft Chipe-
wyan). Kkpest'ayle-kke ottine.— Petitot, Diet.
Ddn^Dindjie, xx, 1876 ('people of the poplar
floor'). Y^U-Ottine.— Petitot, Autour, op. cit.
('people from above').
Athapascan Family. The most widely 1
distributed of all the Indian linguistic
families of North America, formerly ex-
tending over parts of the continent from
the Arctic coast far into n. Mexico, from
the Pacific to Hudson bay at the n., and
from the Rio Colorado to the mouth of
the Rio Grande a#the s. — a territory ex-
tending for more than 40° of latitude and
75° of longitude.
The languages which compose the Atha-
pascan family are plainly related to each
other and, because of certain peculiari-
ties, stand out from the other American
languages with considerable distinctness.
Phonetically they are rendered harsh and
diflScult for European ears because of
series of guttural sounds, many continu-
ants, and frequent checks and aspirations.
Morphologically they are marked by a
sentence verb of considerable complexity,
due largely to many decayed prefixes and
to various changes of the root to indicate
the number ancl character of the subject
and object. Between the various lan-
guages much regular phonetic change,
especially of vowels, appears, and while
certain words are foun(i to be common,
each language, independently of the
others, has formed many nouns by com-
position and transformed the structure
of its verbs. The wide differences in
physical type and culture and the differ-
ences in language point to a long separa-
tion of the family, certainly covering
many centuries. Geographically it con-
sists of three divisions: Northern, Pacific,
and Southern.
The Northern division, known as the
Tinneh, or D6n^, the name they apply to
themselves, consists of three groups: The
eastern, the northwestern, the southwest-
ern. The eastern group occupies a vast
extent of continuous territory, bounded
on the E. by the Rocky mts. and lower
Mackenzie r., on the s.'by the watershed
between the Athabasca and lower Peace
rs., Athabasca lake, and Churchill r. To
the E. and n. a narrow but continuous
strip of Eskimo territory bars them from
Hudson bay and the Arctic ocean. Their
neighbors on the s. are members of the
Algonquian family. This group seems to
constitute a culture area of its own,
rather uniform and somewhat limited on
its material side. Very little is known
of the folklore and religion of the people
of this region. The principal tribes are
the Tatsanottine or Yellowknives, e. of
Yellowknife r., the Thlingchadinne or
Dogribs, l)etween Great Slave and Great
Bear lakes; on Mackenzie r., beginning
BULL. 30]
ATI ATLANTIS
111
In Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. i. pt.1,26. 1H77 (misprint).
KenaUiu,— Halleck (1868) quoted by Petroff, 10th
Census, Alaska. 40, 1884. Kenaizer.— Holmberg
quoted by Dall, Ala.ska, 428, 1870. Northern.—
Schouler m Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Iy?nd., xi,
218, 1841 (partial synonym). Tanai.— Zagoskin
quoted by Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
I, 25, 1877. Tannai,— Corbusier in Am. Anti(i.,
276, 1886. Tede.— Dorsey, MS. Applegate Cr.
vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (used by Dakiibetede).
Ttoe.— Dorsey, MS. Smith R. vocab., B. A. E..
1884 (u.sed by Tolowa). Tennai.— Corbusier in
Am. Antiq., 276, tmi. Thnaina.— Holraberj?
quoted by Dall, Alaska, 428, 1870. Thynne.— Pin-
art in Rev. de Philol. et d' Ethnol.. no. 2, 1,
1875. Tinai.— Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Vov.. 5th
8., XXI, 22«), 1850. Tinnittc.— Wilson in Rep.
on N. W. Tribes Can., 11, 1888 (u.Mod by Sarsi).
Tinni.— Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii, 1. 1851. Tin-
neh.— Hardisty in Smithson. Rep. mMl, 308, 1872.
Tinney.— Keane in Stanford, Compend.. .5o9, 1878.
ToBne.— Morice in Proc. Can. Inst., 3d s., vii,
113, 1889 (used by Takulli ). Toeni.— Ibid, (used by
Tsilkotin). Ttynai.—ZaKoskin, quoted by Schott
in Erman, Archiv., vil, 4S0, 1H49. Ttynai-chota-
na.— Zagoskin quoted by Bancroft, Nut. Races.
Ill, .589, 1882. Ttynnai.— Zugoskin (1842) quoted
by Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 37, 1884. Tudc—
Dorsev, MS. Galice (^reek vo<ab., B. A. E.. 1884
(used bvTaltu.Mhtuntude). Tumeh.— Butler, Wild
N. Land, 127, 1873. Tiling.— Dorsev, MS. Tutu
vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (used bvTututunne). Wa-
baica.— Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog. S<m' , 641, 1883.
Ati. A former Papago rancheria, vis-
ited 1)3^ Kino alK)iit 1697-lM), and the seat
of a mission established al)out that date;
situated on the w. bank of Rio Altar, be-
tween Uquitoa and Tiibiitama, just s. of
the Arizona boundary. Pop. 50 in 1730.
The mission was evi«lently abandoned
within the following 40 years, as Garces
(Diarv, 1775-76, 455, 1900) speaks of Ati
as a favorable site for one. Not to be
confounded with San Francisco Ati.
(f. w. h.)
Addi.— Venesras, Hist. Cal., I, map, 1759. At.—
Font, map (1777), in Cones, Garc<^s Diar>', i, 1900.
Ati.— Font, map fl777), in Bancroft, Ariz, and N.
Mex., 393, 1889. Atic— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 347,
1864. Axi.— Venegas Hist. Cal., i, 303, 1759.
Siete Prindpes Ati.— Rivera (1730) quoted by Ban-
croft, No. Mex. States, i, 514, 1884.
Atiahigai. A former Maricopa ranche-
ria on the Rio Gila, s. w. Ariz.— Sedel-
mair (1744) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz,
and N. Mex., 366, 1889.
Atica. An unidentified pueblo of New
Mexico in 1598.— Oilate (1598) in 1)(k\
In^d., XVI, 103, 1871.
Atiga. A village formerly on the w.
bank of Allegheny r., below French cr.,
according to Bellin's map, 1755. It may
have belonge<l to the Delawart»s or the
Mingo. Marked distinct from Attigua,
q. v. ( J. M. )
Atisawai&n. See Sitroyan,
Atka (native name of the largest of the
Andreanof ids., called Ati^hu by Coxe,
Atchka by Cook in 1778, and by various
writers Atchgi, Atchka, and Alcha, ac-
cording to Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska,
1901 ). One of the two dialectic divisions
of the Aleut, occupying Andreanof, Rat,
andNearids. (Holml)erg, Kthnol. Skizz.,
1855). The Atka are great hunters of
the sea otter, and the furs they sold dur-
ing the Russian occupancy liiade them
wealthy. About half of them learned to
read and write their own language, of
which Russian missionaries ma(ie a gram-
mar. With Christianity and civilization
the Russians introduced alcohol, for
which the natives develope<l an inordi-
nate craving, making their own liquor,
after the im|)ortation of spirits was for-
bidden, by fermenting sugar and flour.
Their diet of fish and occasional water-
fowl is supplemented by bread, tea, and
other imported articles that have l)ecome
indispensable. The native dress, consist-
ing of a long tight-sleeved coat of fur or
bird skins, overlapping boots that reached
above the knee, has been generally dis-
carded for Kuropeaii clothing, though
they still wear in wet weather a water-
proof shirt of intestines ol)taine<l from
the sea-lion. All are now Christianized,
and nearly all live in houses furnished
with ordinary things of civilization. —
Schwatka, Mil. Recon., Compil. of Ex-
plor. in Alaska, 358, 1900.
Andrejanousohen Aleuten.— Holmberg, Ethnol.
Skizz., 8, ia^5. Atchaer.— Ibid. Atkan.— Dall,
Alaska, ;^>, 1870. Atkhaa.— Keane in Stanford,
Compend., ri02. 1878. Kiffhigufi.— Coxe, Ru.ssian
Disc, 219. 1787. KigikhUiun.— Dall in Cont. N.
A. Ethnol., I, 22, 1877 (sipr. ' northern western
people'). Namikh'-hun*.— Ibid. (sig. 'western
people'). Nihouhins.— Pinart in M<5m. Soe. Eth-
nol. Paris, XI, 157, 1872. Nikhu-khnin.— Dall in
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., op. cit.
Atkigyin. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Atkulik. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Atlalko. A Ilahuamis village at the
head of Wakeman sd., British Columbia.
A- tl-al-ko.— Dawson in Can. Geolog. Surv., map,
1888.
Atlantis. The theory of the lost island
of Atlantis can l)e trace<l l)ack to the
Tinueus of Plato. It was mentioned by
many subsecpient ancient historians, some
of whom considered it a myth while
others believed it to be true. The dis-
covery of America revivetl interest in the
subject, and by many theorists the con-
tinent itself was U'lievecl to he the lost
island, while others, as the Abbe Brasseur
de Bourbourg ((^uatre hettres sur le
Mexi(]ue, 18H8; Manuscrit Troano, i,
1869) held that Atlantis was the exten-
sion of America which stretched from
Central America and Mexico far into the
Atlantic, the Canaries, Madeiras, and
Azores l)eing the only remnants which
were not submerged. Rafinesque ( Ameri-
can Nations. 1836) devotes a chapter to
the subject of the Atlantes. He finds
three routes by which the ancient nations
of the Eastern and Western hemispheres
could comnuinicate, namely, the north-
ern, tropical, and southern paths, ** with-
out taking into account the probable con-
nection of North America with Asia and
112
ATLATL ATR AK W A Y E
[B. A. B.
many islands in the Atlantic." His ar-
gument, if such it can be called, is inco-
herent and fantastic in the extreme. The
theory is probably better known to
Americans tnrough the writings of Don-
nelly (Atlantis, the Antediluvian World) ,
who undertakes to prove the case by
modern scientific methods, and locates
the Atlantis of Plato as an island opposite
the mouth of the Mediterranean, a rem-
nant of the lost continent. The mere
statement of a few of the postulates which
Donnelly endeavors to prove is a suffi-
cient characterization, if not refutation,
of his theory:
( 1 ) That Atlantis was the region where
man first rose from a state of barbarism
to civilization. (2) That its inhabi-
tants became, in the course of ages,
a populous and mighty nation, from
whose overflowings the shores of the Gulf
of Mexico, the Mississippi r., the Amazon,
the Pacific coast of South America, the
Mediterranean, the w. coast of Europe
and Africa, the Baltic, the Black sea, and
the Caspian were populated by ci vi lized na-
tions. (3) That it was the true antediluvian
world ; the Garden of Eden ; the Gardens
of the Hesperides; the Elysian Fields;
the Gardens of Alcinous; the Mesam-
phalos; the Olympos; the Asgard of the
traditions of the ancient nations, repre-
senting a universal memory of a great
land where early mankind dwelt for
ages in peace and happiness. (4) That
the oldest colony formed by the At-
lanteans was probably in Ej]jypt, whose
civilization was a reproduction of that
of the Atlantic island. (5) That the
Phenician alphabet, parentof all European
alphabets, was derived from an Atlantis
alphabet, which was also conveyed from
Atlantis to the Mayas of Central America.
(6) That Atlantis was the original seat
of the Aryan or Indo-European family of
nations, as well as of the Semitic peoples,
and possibly also of the Turanian races.
(7) That Atlantis perished in a terrible
convulsion of nature, in which the whole
island sank into the ocean with nearly
all its inhabitants. (8) That a few per-
sons escaped in ships and on rafts, and
carried to the nations e. and w. the
tidings of the appalling catastrophe,
which has survived to our own time in
the Flood and Deluge legends of the dif-
erent nations of the old and new worlds.
Among modem scholars there are very
few who regard Atlantis in any other
light than as a myth. See Winsor, Nar-
rative and Critical History of America, i,
141, 1884, for an excellent summary of the
subject and for many references to the
literature. The term Atlantic (ocean) is
not derived from Atlantis, but from the
Atlas mts. in n. Africa. (h, w. h.)
Atlatl. See Throwing stick.
Atlklaktl (Alqla'xL). A Bellacoola vil-
lage where the present mission is situ-
ated, on the N. side of Bellacoola r., near
its mouth, British Columbia. It was one
of the 8 villages called Nuhalk. — Boas in
Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., ii, 48, 1898.
Atlknma ( A-tl-kuma ) . A Tlauitsis village
on the N. side of Cracroft id., Brit. Col. —
Dawson in Can. Geol. Surv., map, 188?.
Atnik. A village of the Siaarumiut
Eskimo near Pt Belcher, Alaska; pop.
M in 1890.
Ataniek.— Tikhmcnief (1861^ quoted by Baker,
Oeog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Atinikq.— Za«:o6kiii,
DestT. Rush. Poss. Am., pt. 1, 74, 1847. Atnik.—
Baker, op. cit. Attanak.-llth Census, Alaska,
map. 1893. A'tilnS.— Murdoch in 9th Rep. B.
A. £., 44, 1892. Kttik.— Zagoskin, op. cit.
Atnak. An Eskimo village of the
Kaviagmiut tribe at Darby cape, Alaska;
pop. 20 in 1880, 34 in 1890.
Atnikmioute.— Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th
8., XXI. map, 1850. Atnikmut.— Zagoskin, Descr.
Russ. Poss. Am., pt. 1, 73, 1847. Atnok.— Nelson in
18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899.
Atoko. The extinct Crane clan of the
Chua (Snake) phratry of the Hopi.
A-t6-oo.— Bourke, Snake Dance, 117, 1884. Atoko
winwii.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 583, 1901
{wifl-wu = * clan ').— A'-to-ko wun-wii.— Fewkes in
Am. Anthrop., vii, 403, 1894 {ycufi-wu = clan).
Atotarho. See Wathatotarlio.
Atotonilco (from Nahuatl: ail * water,'
totoniUi *warm.* — Buelna). A former
Tepehuane pueblo in lat. 25° 30^, long.
107°, E. Sinaloa, Mexico. It was the seat
of the mission of San Juan.
San Juan Atotonilco. — Orozco y Berra, Geog., 324,
1864.
Atotonilco. A former Tepehuane pueblo
in lat. 24° 35^ long. 104° 10^ s, e. Du-
rango, Mexico. It was the seat of the
mission of San Andres.
San Andres Atotoniloo.— Orozco y Berra, Geog.,
318, 1864.
Atqaanachnke. A tribe or band residing
early in the 17th century in s. or cen-
tral New Jersey. All references to them
are indefinite. Smith, who did not visit
them, savs they were on the seacoast
beyond t)ie mountains northward from
Chesapeake bay, and spoke a language
different from that of the Powhatan,
Conestoga, Tocwogh, and Cuscarawaoc.
Most of the early authorities put them in
the same general locality, but Shea, evi-
dently misled by the order in which Smith
associates this name with names of e. shore
tribes, says they lived in 1633 on the e.
shore of Maryland and were allies of the
Conestoga. (j. m. )
Aquaauehuqueo.— Keane in Stanford. Compend.,
501, 1878. Aquamaohukeo.— Map ca. 1614 in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., 1, 1856. Aquamaohuaueo.— De Laet,
Novus Orbis. 72, 1633. Aquanaenoko*.— Dutch
map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i, 1856.
Atquanaohuek.— Simons in Smith (1629), Virginia,
1, 183. repr. 1819. Atquanachukea.— Ibid.,120. At-
qnanaohnkt. — Ibid ., 183. Atquanahuoko*. -De Laet,
Hist. Nouv. Monde, 93, 1640. Atqninaohnnkt.—
Shea, Cath. Miss., 486, 1855.
Atrakwaye (probably *at the place of
the sun, * or * south ' ) • A i)alisaded town
of the Conestoga, situated in 1608 on the
BULL. 30]
ATRIPUY ATSUGEWI
113
E. side of Susquehanna r., below the forks
at Northumberland, in Northumberland
CO., Pa. Probably identical with the
Quadroque of Smith's map of Virginia,
whereon it is placed from in format ion
derived by Smith directly from the Sus-
quehanna (Conestoga). The Journal of
tne Jesuits for 1651-4>2 states that during
the winter of 1652 this Un\n was taken
by 1,000 Iroquois warriors who, with a
I loss of 130 men, carried away 50() or 600
captives, chiefly men. Atrakwaye was '
the seat of the Akhrakouaeronon, a <li vi-
sion of the Conestoga. (.i. n. h. ii. )
AkrakwM.-Je8. Rel., Thwaites' ed., xxxvi. 248,
note, 49, 1899. Atr»'K8*e.— Ibid.. .Jour, for 1650-
61,140. Atra'kwae.— Ibid., 141. Atra'K8a,e.— Ibid.,
xxxvil, 110, 1899. Atra'kwa.e.— Ibid..in. Quad-
roque.—Smith {ca. 1608), Va., map.repr. 1884.
Atripfiy. Mentione<l by Ofiate (Doc.
In^., XVI, 114-116, 1871) in 1598 as a
province containing 42 pueblos in the
region of the lower Rio (rrande, N. Mex.
Tbe name was probably ilerived from
that of a village of the x. bninch of
the Jumano. The first pueblo of this
province, journeying northward, wa.s
Trenaquel; the second Qualacu, l)oth of
which Bandelier identifies as villages of
the Piros who occupied the Rio (irande
vallev from below Isleta to San Marcial,
N. Mex. It may therefore l)e inferreil
that Atripuv was the name applie<l to the
country inhabited at that time by the
Piros. (p. w. H.)
Atripay. A large pueblo of the Jumano
of New Mexico in 1598.— Dilate (1598)
in Doc. Iu6d., xvi, 114, 1871. >
Atselits. An insignificant Chilliwack
settlement in s. British Columbia, with
only 2 adults in 1902.
Aitohelioh. —Can . Ind. AfT. , 357, 1895. Aitchelitz. —
Ibid., 418, 1898. AMyletch.— Ibid.. 78. 1878. Aaay-
Uteh.— Ibid., 316, 1880. AMyUtlh.— Brit. Col. Map.
Ind. Aflf., Victoria, 1872. AtcheUty.— Can. Ind.
Aff., 276, 1894. A'UeUU.— Hill -Tout in Ethnol.
Surv. Can., 4, 1902.
Atsep. A Yun)k village on lower Kla-
math r., 5 m. below the mouth of Trinity
r., N. Cal.
Atse^ar. The uppermost village of the
Yurok on Klamath r., C'al., situated at
the mouth of Bluff cr., 6 m. above the
junction of Trinity r.
Atshnk. A Yaquina village on the s.
side of Yaquina r., Greg.
A'-tottk«— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, x, 229. 1890.
Atsina (Blackfoot: iit-»e/-na, said to
mean * gut people.* — Grinnell. Cf. Aii^ni-
n^na, under Arapiiho). A detached
branch of the Arapaho (q. v.), at one
time associated with the Blackfeet, but
now with the Assiniboin under Ft Belk-
nap agency, Mont., where in 1904 they
numbered 535, steadily decreasing. They
called themselves Aa''nini^na, said to mean
* white clay ^>eople,' but arc known to
the other Arapaho as Ilitiincna, M)eg-
gars,' or * spongers,* whence the tribal
sign, commonly but incorrectly rendered
Bull. 30—05 8
'belly people,' or 'big l)el lies,' the Gros
Ventres of the French Canadians and now
their popular name. The Atsina are not
prominent in history, and in most re-
spects are regarded ))y the Arapaho proper
a.s inferior to them. They have been con-
stantly confused with the Hidatsa, or
( jros Ventres of the Missouri, (.i. m. )
Aa'ninena.— Moonev in 14th Rep. B. A. K.. 955,
\m\. Acapatos.— Duflot de Mofras. Explor.. ii.
:i41. 1H44 (a similar name is also applied to
the Arapaho), Aohena.— De Sniet, Mijwions, 25:?.
note. 1H4H. Ahahnelins.— Moi^an. Sy.steni.»J of
Consang., 220. 1871. Ahnenin.— Latham, Etways.
276, IWO. Ahni-ninn.— Maximilian. Travels,* i,
530.1.s;?9. A-lan-tar.- Lewis and Clark. Travels, 56,
180<>. Alesar.— Keane in Stanford, Compend.. 470.
187H. A-ri-teJtr-A-pln-gi.— Lonj?. Exped. Roeky
Mts., II. Ixxxiv. 1H28 ( Hidatsa name). At-«e'-na.—
GriniH'U. inf'n. l'M)'^ (Rlaekf(M)t name, said to
mean 'gnt people). Ataina.— Uitham in Vtkh'.
Philol. Soe. Ixmd.. vi. 86, 1854. Azana.— Maxi-
milian. Travels, i. 530. 18:J9 (Siksika name,
German form). Bahwet^o-weninnewug.— Tan-
ner. Narr.. 6:i. 18;U) cfall people': Chippewa
name). Bahwetig. — Ibid.. 64. Bot-Tt'm'tLgo. —
Mooney in 14lh Rep. B. A. E.. 955. WJd (• belly
men'). Bowwetegoweninnewug. — Tanner, op,
cit., 315 (Ottawa name). Bowwetig.— Ibid..
83. E-ta-ni-o.— Hayden. Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val.. 290. 18«)2 ('people:' one Cheyenne name
for them, the other and more common l)eing
HistuiUmio). Fall Indian*.— I'mfreville (1790)
in Maine Hist. S(H'. Coll.. vi. 270. 1^59. Gro»
ventre of the Fort prairie.— Lonjf, Exped. Rcx-ky
Mt.s., n. Ixxxiv, 18-23. Ores Ventres.— See under
that name. Oros Ventre* des Plaines. — De Smet.
Missions, 25;i note. 1848. Gros Ventres des Prai-
ries.— Sehermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Soe.
Coll., 2d s.. II. 36. 1814 (French name). Gros
Ventres of the Falls.— Latham in Trans. Philol.
Soe. I^md.. 62. 1856. Gros Ventres of the Prairie.—
BnickenridKe, Views of La.. 79, 1815. Grosventres
of the Prairie.— ^leCoy, Ann. Reg. Ind. Aff.,
47. 18:^6. Hahtz-nai koon.— Henry. MS. vocab.,
1808 (Siksika name). His-tu-i'-ta-ni-c— Havden.
Ethnog.and Philol. Mo. Val., 290, 18(52 (Cheyenne
name: da /j /V>= * people'). Eitu'nSna. — Mooney
in 14th Rep. B. A. E.. 955, 1896 (begRinjf men':
Arapaho name). HitunSoina. — Ibid. Minetares of
the Prairie.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soe,
II. 21. 1848 (by confusion with "Gros Ventres").
Minitares of the Prairie.— I^atham in PrcK*. Philol.
Soe. Lond.. vi. 8.'>, 18.54. Hinnetarees of Fort
de Prairie.— Lewis and Clark. Trav.. i. 131. 1814.
Kinnetarees of the Plains. — Ibid. Minnetarees of
the Prairie. — Havden. Ethnojf. and Philol. Mo.
Val.. .344. 1862. MinniUrees of Fort de Prairie.—
I^wis and v lark, quoted by Hayden, ibid..
422, Pawaustic-eythin-yoowuo. — Franklin, Jouni.
Polar Sea. 169. 1824. Paw-is- tick I-e-ne-wuck.-
Harmon. Jour., 78, 18*20. Pawistucienemuk.—
Drake, Bk. Inds., x, 1848. Pawistuck-Ienewuck.—
Morse. Rep. to See. War. 332. 1822. Prairie
Grossventres. — (ra-ss. Jour., 245, 1807. Rapid In-
dians.—Harmon. Jour., 78, 1820. Ba'pani.—
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.. 9.5.5, 1896 (• bellies':
Shoshoni name). Sku'tani.^Ibid. (Sioux name).
To-i-nin'-a.— Hayden. Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val., 326, 1862 (people that t>eg': Arapaho
name for Hitrtn^na).
Atslna-Algo. An adjective invented by
Schoolcraft (Ind. Tribes, i, 198, 1853) to
describe the confederate At«ina and Sik-
sika.
Atsmitl (Chi halls name for Shoal water
bay). Chinookan divisions living around
Shoalwaterbav, Wash. —Boas, field notes.
Arts-milsh.— Swa'n. N. \V. Coast, 210. 18.57. Kar-
wee- wee.— Ibid. Shoalwater Bay Indians. — Ford
ill Ind. AfT. K.-p. 18.57. 341. 18.5s.
Atsngewi. A Sha.*<tan tril>e formerly re-
siding in Hat Creek, Burney, and Dixie
114
attaoapa
[B. A. E.
^i^
x%
valleys, Cal. Their language is quite di-
vergent from that of the Achomawi, from
whom they regard themselves as distinct.
Very few of them survive, (r. b. d.)
Adwanuqdji.— Curtin, MS. Umawi vocab., B. A.
E., 1889 (Ilmawi name). Atsugei.— Powell in 6th
Rep. B. A. E., xxxvii, 1888. Atsuge'wi.— Dixon,
infn, 1905. Chenoya.— Curtin, MS. vocab., B. A.
E., 1885 (Yana name). Chenoyana.— Ibid. Chu-
noiyana.— Dixon, infn, 1903 (Yana name). JBLat.
Greek Indiana.— Hanson in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1862,
311, 1863. Tcunoiyana.— Dixon, infn, 1903 (Yana
name; <c=ch).
Attacapa (Choctaw: hntak 'man,' apa
*eats/ hence 'canniV)ar: a name applied
by the Choctaw and their congeners to
different tribes inhabiting s. w. La. and s.
and s. E. Tex. ; see Cannibalism). A tribe
forming the Attacapan linguistic family,
a remnant of which early in the 19th
century occupied as its chief habitat the
Middle or Prien lake in Calcasieu parish,
La. It is learned from Hutchins (Geog.
U. S., 1784) that '*the village de Skun-
nemoke or Tuckapas" stood on Vermil-
ion r. , and that their church was on the
w. side of the Tage (Bayou Teche). The
Attacapa country extended formerly to
the coast in s. w. Louisiana, ' and their
primitive domain was outlined in the
popular name of the Old Attacapa or
Tuckapa country, still in use, which com-
prised St Landry, St Mary, Iberia, St
Martin, Fayette, Vermilion, and, later,
Calcasieu and Vernon parishes; in fact
all the country between Ked, Sabine, and
Vermilion rs. and the Gulf (Dennett,
Louisiana, 1876) . Charlevoix states that
in 1731 some Attacapa with some Hasi
nai and Spaniards aided the French com-
mander. Saint Denys, against the Nat-
chez. P^nicaut (Margry, Dec, v, 440)
says that at the close of 1703 two of the
three Frenchmen whom Bienville sent by
way of the Madeline r. to discover what
nations dw^lt in that region, returned and
reported that they had been more than
100 leagues inland and had found 7 dif-
ferent nations, and that among the last,
one of their comrades had been killed and
eaten by the savages, who were anthropo-
phagous. This nation was called Attacapa.
in notes accompanying his Attacapa vo-
cabulary Duralde says that they speak
of a deluge which engulfed men, ani-
mals, and the land, when only those
who dwelt on a highland escaped;
he also says that according to their law
a man ceases to bear his own name as
soon as his wife bears a child to him,
after which he is called the father of such
and such a child, but that if the child
dies the father again assumes his own
name. Duralde also asserts that the
women alone were charged with the la-
bors of the field and of the household,
and that the mounds were erected by the
women under the supervision of the
chiefs for the purpose of giving their
lodges a higher situation than those of
other chiefs. Milfort (M^m., 92, 1802),
who visited St Bernard bay in 1784, be-
lieved that the tribe came originally from
Mexico. He was hospitably received by
a band which he found bucanning meat
beside a lake, 4 days' march w. of the
bay; and from the chief, who was not an
Attacapa, but a Jesuit, speaking French, he
learned that 180, nearly half the Attacapa
tribe, were there, thus indicating that at
that time the tribe numbered more than
360 persons; that they had a custom of
dividing themselves into two or three
bodies for the purpose of hunting buf-
falo, which in the spring went to the w.
and in the autumn descended into these
latitudes; that they killed them with
bows and arrows, their youth being very
skilful in this hunt; that these animals
were in great numbers and as tame as
domestic cattle, for **we have great care
not to frighten them;" that when the
buffaloes were on the prairie or in the
forest the Attacapa camped near them
"to accustom them to seeing us." Sib-
ley (Hist. Sketches, 82, 1806) described
their village as situated ** about 20 m. w.
of the Attakapa church, toward Quelque-
shoe;" their men numbered about 50,
but some Tonica and Huma who/had in-
termarried with the Attacapa made them
altogether about 80. Sibley adds : ' * They
are peaceable and friendly to everybody;
labor, occasionally for the white inhabit-
ants; raise their own corn; have cattle
and hogs. They were at or near where
they now live, when that part of the coun-
try was first discovered by the French."
In 1885 Gatschet visited the section for-
merly inhabited by the Attacapa, and
after much search discovered one man
and two women at Lake Charles, Calca-
sieu parish, La., and another woman
living 10 m. to the s. ; he also heard of 5
other women then scattered in w. Texas;
these are thought to be the only survivors
of the tribe, (j. n. b. h.)
Atacapaa.— Berquin-Duvallon, Trav. in La. and
Fla., 97, 1806. Atao-Apaa.— Le Page du Pratz,
Hist. Louisiane, ii, 231, 1758. Ataoapaz.— Mez-
idres (1778) quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States,
I, 661, 1886. Atac-assas. - JefTerys, French Dom.,
I. 163, 1761. Atakapas.— Robin, Voy., map. 1807.
Attacapaoas.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 502,
1878. Attaoapas.— Brown in West. Gazetteer,
152. 1817. Attecappa.— Hutchins. Hist. Nar., 43,
1784. Attakapas.— P^nicaut (1703) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 87, 1869. Attakapo.— Lewis,
Trav., 193, 1809. Attaquapa*. — Butel-Dumont,
M6m. sur la Louisiane, i, 134, 1753. Attenoapas.—
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc, ii, 76. 1848.
Attuckapaa.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 35, 1867.
HatUhappas.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes,
III, 81, 1854. Hattakappaa.— Romans, Hist. Fla., I,
101, 1775. Man eatera.— P6nicaut (1703) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., n. s,, 87, 1869. Skunnemoke.—
Hutchins (1784) in Imlay, West. Ter., 421, 1797.
Takapo iahak.— Gatschet, Attakapa MS., B. A. £.,
(adopted from whites; with ishak 'people').
Tuokapaa.— Hutchins (1784) in Imlay, West. Ter.,
421,1797. Tuckapaua.—Ker, Trav., 300, 1816. TAk-
pa'-han-ya-di.— Dorsey, Biloxi MS. Diet., B. A. E.,
BULL. 30]
ATTACAPAN FAMILY ATTIGNAWANTAN
115
1892 (Biloxi name). Yuk' hiti uhak.— Gatschet,
MS., B. A. E. (own name: 'our people').
)(: Attaoapan Family. A linguistic family
consisting solely of the Attacapa tribe,
although there is linguistic evidence of
at least two dialects. Under this name
were formerly comprised several bands
settled in s. La. and n. e. Tex. Although
this designation was given them by their
Choctaw neighbors on the e. , these oands,
with one or two exceptions, do not appear
in history under any other general name.
Formerly the Karankawa and several
other tribes were included with the Atta-
capa, but the vocabularies of Martin Du-
ralde and of Gatschet show* that the At-
tacapa language is distinct from all oth-
ers. Investigations by Gatechet in Cal-
casieu parish, La., in 1885, show that
there were at least two dialects of this
family spoken at the beginning of the
19th century— an eastern dialect, repre-
sented in the vocabulary of Duralde, re-
corded in 1802, and a western dialect,
spoken on the 3 lakes forming the outlet
of Calcasieu r. See Powell in 7th Rep.
B. A. E., 56, 1891.
Attaknllaculla {AuV-ffntkaiii', from dtd'
*wood,' gdtk&W a verb implying that
something long is leaning, without suffi-
cient support, against some other ob-
ject; hence *Leaningwood.' — Mooney).
A noted Cherokee chief, born about 1700,
known to the whites as Little Carpenter
(Little Cornplanter, by mistake, in Hay-
wood). The first notice of him is as one
of the delegation taken to England by Sir
Alexander Gumming in 1730. It is stated
that he was made second in authority un-
der Oconostota in 1738. He was present
at the conference with Gov. Glenn, of
South Carolina, in July, 1753, where he
was the chief speaker in behalf of the In-
dians, but asserted that he had not su-
preme authority, the consent of Oconos-
tota, the war chief, l3eing necessary for
final action. Through his influence a
treaty of peace was arranged with Gov.
Glenn in 1755, by which a large cession
of territory was made to the King of Eng-
land; and it was also through his instru-
mentality that Ft Dobl>8 was built, in the
year following, about 20 m. w. of the pres-
ent Salisbury, N. C. When Ft Loudon,
on Little Tennessee r., Tenn., was cap-
tured by the Indians in 1760, and most of
the garrison and refugees were massacred,
Capt. Stuart, who had escaped the toma-
hawk, was escorted safely to Virginia by
AttakuUacuUa, who [purchased him from
his Indian captor, giving to the latter,
as ransom, his rifle, clothes, and every-
thing he had with him. It was again
through the influence of Attakullaculla
that the treaty of Charleston was signed
in 1761, and that Stuart, after peace had
been restored, was received by the Chero-
kee as the British agent for the southern
tribes; yet notwithstanding his friend-
ship for Stuart, who remained a steadfast
loyalist in the Revolution, and the fact
that a large majority of the Cherokee es-
poused the British cause, Attakullaculla
raised a force of 500 native warriors which
he offered to the Americans. He is de-
scribed by William Bartram (Travels, 482,
1792 ) , who visited him in 1776, as * *a man of
remarkably small stature, slender and of a
delicate frame, the only instance I saw in
the nation, but he is a man of superior
abilities." Although he had become
sedate, dignified, and somewhat taciturn
in maturer years, Logan (Hist. Upper
So. Car., I, 490, 515, 1859) says that in
his younger days he was fond of the bot-
tle and often inebriaU*. The date of his
death has not lx»en recorded, but it was
probably about 1780. See Moonev in 19th
Rep. B.'A, E., 1900.
Attamtack. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, in 1608, situated between the
Chickahominv and Pamunkey rs., in New
Kent CO., Va.— Smith (1629), Virginia,
I, map, repr. 1819.
Attamasco. See AtamcLSco.
Attaock. A Conestoga village existing
in 1608 w. of Susquehanna r., probably in
what is now York co., Pa.— Smith (1608),
Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819.
Attapalgas (Creek: atap'halgi, 'dog-
wood grove ' ). A former Seminole town
on a branch of Oklokonee or Yellow-
water r., Fla. A town of the name is
now in Decatur co., (la.
Taphulgee.— Roberts, Florida, 1763. Top-hulga.—
-11 in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 307. 1822. Top-
kegalga.— Ibid., 306. Topkdake.— Penidre. ibid.
Be
Tuphulga.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th Cong.,
27, 1826.
Attenmiut. A division of the Malemiut
Eskimo whose chief village is Atten, near
the source of Buckland r., Alaska.
Attenmut.— Dall, Alaska, 284, 1870. At'tenmut.—
Dall in Cent. N. A. Ethnol., i, 16, 1877.
Attenok. A Sidarumiut Eskimo village
on Seahorse ids., Alaska.
Attenokamiut.— nth Census, Alaska, 162, 1893.
Attignawantan (Huron: hati *they,'
annioflni^n ' bear' : * |>pAr p^oph^ ' ). One
of the largest tribes of the Huron confed-
eracy, comprising about half the Huron
population, formerly living on Nottawas-
aga bay, Ontario. In 1638 they were set-
tled in 14 towns and villages (Jes. Rel.
1638, 38, 1858). The Jesuit missions of
St Joseph and La Conception were es-
tablished among them. (j. n. b. h. )
Atiniaouantan.— Jes. Rel. for 1642, 61,18&8. Atm-
mhoinUn.— Sa^ard (1632). Hist. Can., iv, 1866.
Ating]r&hoidan.—Coxe,CaroIana, map, 1741. Atin-
niaoSnten.— Jes. Rel. for 1649, 12, 1858. Atin-
niaSenten Jes. Rel. for 1644, 77. 1858. Atinouaen-
tan«.— Champlain (1618). CEuvres, iv, 140, 1870.
Attignaoouentan.— Kingslev, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt.
(>, 154. 1883. AttignaSantan;— Jes. Rel. for 1639, 50,
116
ATTIGNEENONGNAHAC ATUAMI
[B. A. E.
1858. Attignaonentan.— Jesi Rel. for 1640, 61, 1858.
Atlignawantan.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 204,
1854. Attignouaatitaiu.— Champlain (1616), CEu-
vres, IV, 58, 1870. Attigouantan.— Ibid. (1632),
Y, pt. 1, 247, 1870. Attigouantines.— Alcedo, Die.
Geog., II, 174, 1786. Attigouaatan.— Champlain
(1615), op. cit., IV, 23, 1870. Bear nation.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 544, 1853. Nation del'Oun.—
Jes. Rel. for 1632, 14, 1858. Nation des Oiir>.-Jes.
Rel. for 1636, 81, 1858.
Attigneenoiig^ahac. One of the four
tribes of the Huron confederation, living
on L. Simcoe, Ontario, s. e. of the others.
In 1624 they were said to have 3 villages.
The Jesuit mission of St Joseph was estab-
lished among them.
Altignenonghac.— Jes. Rel. for 1636, 123, 1858.
Atif^ignongueha.— Sagard (1632), Hist. Can., iv,
234, 1866 (Huron name). Atignenongaoh.— Jes.
Rel. for 1637, 127, 1858. Atignenonghac.— Ibid., 109.
Atingueennonmhak.— Jes. Rel. for 1644, 87, 1858.
Attigneenongnahao.— Je.< Rel. for 1639, 50, 1858.
Attigneenonguahac.— Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, iv,
204, 1854. Attigneenongnahao.— Jen. Rel. for 1638,
42, 1858. Attignenongha.— Jes. Rel. for 1635, 28,
1858. Attingneenongnahac.-Jes. Rel. for 1640, 73,
1858. Attingueenongnahao.— Jes. Rel. for 1641, 67,
1858. Attinquenongnahao.— Jes. Rel. for 1640, 61,
1858. Attiquenongnah.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat.
Hist., pt. 6, 154, 1883. Attiquenoncnahai.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, in. 544,1853. Nation d'EnUua-
que.— Sagard, Gr. Voy., 79, 1865.
Attikamegae (Chippewa: Mik * cari-
bou,' mag *fish': *whitefish.'— W. J.).
A band of the ftlfijolagliaia. residing, when
first known, in Quebec province, n. of the
St Maurice basin (Jes. Rel. 1636, 37, 1858),
and accustomed to ascend the St Lawrence
to trade with the French. Charlevoix
says their chief residence was on a lake
connected with the St Maurice. They
were so harassed by the attacks of the
Iroquois that a part at least fled to the
vicinity of Tadoussac. Thej^ were so
nearly destroyed by smallpox in 1670 that
they became extinct as a tribe. They
were esteemed by the missionaries as a
quiet, inoffensive people, readily disposed
to receive religious instruction, (j. m. )
Altihamagucz.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes,
III, 81, 1854. Altikamek.— Hervas quoted by
Vater, Mithridates, pt. 3, sec. 3, 347, 1816. Altika-
meque*.— Charlevoix (1743), Voy., i, 152, 1766.
AtikMnegues.— Jes. Rel. for 1643, 8, 1858. Atte-
kamek.— Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii. 39, 1851.
Attibamegues.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 125,
1816. Attioameoeta.— La Tour, map, 1779. Atti-
oameoueos. — Bellln, map, 1755. Attioamiques. —
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 502, 1878. Attica-
moett. —La Tour, map, 1784. Attikamegouek.— Jes.
Rel. for 1643, 38, 1858. Attikamegs.— La Tour,
map, 1784. Attikameguekhi.— Jes. Rel. 1636, 37,
1858. Attikamegues.— Jes. Rel. 1637, 82, 1858.
Attikamek.— Lahontan, New Voy, i, 230, 1703.
Attikameques.— Drake, Ind. Chron., 161, 1836.
Attikamigues.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Atti-
koueti,— Jefferys, French Doms., pt. i, map, 1761.
Outakouamiouek.— Jes. Rel. 1640, 12, 1858. OuU-
konamiwek.— Jes. Rel., iii, index, 1858. PoiMons
blanos.— Jes. Rel. 1639, 19, 1858. White Fish In-
dians.—Winsor, Cartier to Frontenac, 171, 1894.
Attikirinioaetoh {iXdikwininiwiXg * cari-
bou people.* — W. J.). A Montagnais
^be formerly living northward from
Manicouagan lake, Quebec.
Attiklrinioiieteha.— Bellin, map, 1755. Attikoulri-
niouets.— La Tour, map, 1779. Gena du Oaribon.—
LaTour,map, 1784 (misprint). *Hni flu flii'-^**^" —
Bellin, map, 1755. Les Caribou,— Lotter, map, ca.
1770.
Attiqne. A village, probably of the
Seneca, that stood in 1749 on the present
site of Kittanning, Pa.
Attigne.— C^loron (1749) in Margry, D6c., vi, 685,
1886. Attigna.— Bellin, map, 1755. Attiqu^—
C61oron in Margry, op. cit.. 693.
Attonghcomoco ( Algonquian: aClk Meer/
komoko * house,* hence * deer enclosure').
An unidentified village of one of the Al-
gonquian tribes, situated, about 1608,
probably near Patuxent r., Md. Not
given by Capt. John Smith nor marked
on his map. Mentioned by Pory in Smith
(1629), Virginia, ii, 62, repr. 1819.
Attn (native name, variously written
At, Atako, * Ataka, Attak, Attou, and
Otma by explorers). An Atka Aleut
settlement at Chichagof harbor, Attu id.,
the westernmost of the Aleutians, 173®
E. from Greenwich. Pop. 107 in 1880;
101 in 1890. Once very prosperous, the
settlement has decayed owing to the
gradual disappearance of the sea otter.
Attoo.— Elliott, Our Arct. Prov., 179, 1886. Ohi-
ohagov.— Schwatka, Mil. Recon. Alaska, 359, 1900.
Attucks, Crispus. An Indian-negro half-
blood of Framingham, Mass., near Bos-
ton, noted as the leader and first person
slain in the Boston massacre of Mar.
5, 1770, the first hostile encounter be-
tween the Americans and the British
troops, and therefore regarded by histo-
rians as the opening fight of the great
Revolutionary struggle. In consequence
of the resistance of the people of Boston
to the enforcement of the recent tax laws
a detachment of British troops had been
stationed in the town, to the great irrita-
tion of the citizens. On Mar. 5 this feel-
ing culminated in an attack on the troops,
in front of the old State House, by a crowd
made up largely of sailors, and said to have
been led by Attucks, although this asser-
tion has been denied by some. The
troops retaliated by firing into the party,
killing four men, of whom Attucks was
the first to fall. A monument to his mem-
ory was erected in Boston Common by the
commonwealth of Massachusetts in 1888.
Although the facts in regard to his per-
sonality are disputed, the evidence goes
to show that Attucks was a sailor, almost a
giant in stature, the son of a negro father
and an Indian mother of Framingham,
or the neighboring village of Natick,
formerly the principal Indian mission
settlement of Massachusetts. The name
Attucks, derived from his mother, ap-
pears to be the Natick (Massachuset)
ahtukf or attuks, * small deer.* See G.
Bancroft, Hist. U. S.; Appleton's Ency-
clop. Am. Biog.; Am. Hist. Rec, i, Nov.,
1872. (j. M.)
Atnami. A Shastan tribe formerly liv-
ing in Big valley, I^assen co., Cal.
A-tu-a'-mih.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in,
267, 1877. Hamefoutellies.— Powers in Overland
Mo., xn, 412, 1874. Ha-mef-kut'-tel-li.— Powers in
BtJLL. 30]
ATUYAMA AVAK
117
CJont. N. A. Ethnol., lii, 267, 1877. Tuqteumi.— Cur-
tin, MS. Ilmawl vocab., B. A. E., 1889 (Ilmawi
name).
Atnyama. A pueblo of New Mexico in
1598; doubtless situated in the Salinas,
in the vicinity of Abo, and evidently oc-
cupied by the Tigua or the Piros. — Ofiate
(1598) in Doc. In^d., xvi, 114, 1871.
Auarkat A settlement of East Green-
land Eskimo, lat, 59®.— Meddelelser om
Gronland, xxv, map, 1902,
Anbbeenaabbee ( Wdbdndbd, ' morning
person, * a mythic being. — W, J . ) . A Pot-
awatomi chief of this name occupied a
village, commonly known as Aubbee-
naubbee's village, on a reservation in the
present Aubbeenaubbee tp., in Fulton co.,
Ind. The tract was sold by the treaty of
Tippecanoe r. in 1 836. Other forms of the
name are Aubbanaubba, Aubbanaubbee,
Aubeenaubee, Aubinaubee. (j. m.)
Aabomesk (probably 'white beaver').
A village of the Powhatan confederacy,
in 1608, on the N. bank of the Rappa-
hannock, in Richmond co., Va. — Smith
(1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819.
Ancheucaala. A former Creek town
situated on the e. bank of Coosa r., in the
extreme n. w. comer of Coosa co., Ala. —
Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., Ala. map,
1900.
Aneocisoo. The name of the territory
about Casco bay and Presumpscot r. , in the
area now included in Cumberland co. , Me.
It was also sometimes applied to those
Abnaki Indians by whom it was occu-
pied. Since the section was settled at an
early date by the whites, the name soon
dropped out of use as applied to the In-
dians, or rather it was (! hanged to
** Casco," but this was a mere local desig-
nation, not a tribal distinction, as the In-
dians referred to were Abnaki. The proper
form of the word is given by Willis as
Uh-kos-is-co, * crane' or * heron,' the first
syllable being guttural. These birds still
frequent the bav. It is said by Willis to
have been the Indian name of Falmouth
(Portland), Me.
Anoooisoo.— Smith (1629), Virginia, ii, 177, repr.
1819 (misprint). AuoAsisoo.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, in. 545, 1853. Aucocitco.— Smith (1629),
Viieinia, ii, 193, repr. 1819. Aucositco.— Drake,
Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Ca«)o.— Sullivan in Mass. Hist.
Soc. CJoU., 1st 8., IX, 210, 1804 ("Casco Indians"),
duaok.— Levett (1628) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d
s., vin, 168, 1843 (same?) . TJh-kos-is-oo.— Willis in
Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 31, 1831, repr. 1858.
An Glaize. Mentioned by Drake (Bk.
Inds., bk. 5, 63, 1848) as if a Delaware vil-
lage on the s. w. [s. e.] branch of the
Miami of the Lake (Maumee r. ), Ohio.
Angpalartok ( * the red one,' designating
a clin. — Boas). An Eskimo village in w.
Greenland, lat 72° 53^.— Meddelelser om
Gronland, viii, map, 1889.
Angnstiiie. A rancheria and reserva-
tion of 615 acres of desert land occupied
by Mission Indians; situated 75 m. from
the Mission Tule River agency, h. Cal. —
Rep. Ind. Aff., 175, 1902.
Auk. A Koluschan tribe on Stephens
passage, Douglas and Admiralty ids.,
Alaska; pop. 640 in 1880-81, 279 in 1890.
Their chief town was called Anchguhlsu.
The other settlements mentioned by
Petroff were probably summer camps.
One such camp was Tsantikihin, now
called Juneau. The social divisions are
Tlenedi and Wushketan. (j. r. s. )
Ahkootskie.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 227, 1875
(transliterated from Veniaminoff). Alc-k6n. —
Krause. Tlinkit Ind., 116, 1885. AkuUkoe.— Ve-
niaminoff, Zapiski, ii, pt. 3, 30, 1840. Armot.—
Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 309, 1868 (nrobably misprint
for Awks}. Auke.— Kane, Wana. in N. Am., app.,
1859. Auke-qwan.— Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus.
Nat. Hist., Ill, 233, 1903. Awk».— Halleck in Rep.
Sec.War,pt. 1,38,1868.
Aukardneling. A village of the Talir-
pingmiut division of the Okomiut Eskimo
on the w. side of Cumberland sd.
Auqardneling.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map,1888.
Aukpatuk ('red'). A Suhinimiut Es-
kimo village on Ungava bay, Labrador. —
Hind, Lab. Pen., ii, map, 1863.
Aukumbumsk. A Pequot village in the
center of their country and the residence
of their chief before the coming of the
Englit^h, in 1636; probably in New Lon-
don CO., Conn.
Aukumbumsk.— Trumbull. Ind. Names C!onn., 7,
1881 (Mohegan form). Awcombuoks.— Ibid. (Nar-
ragansetform).
Aalintac. A Costanoan village at Santa
Cruz mission, Cal. The name has been
taken for a dialectic division of the Costa-
noan family.
Aurenapeagh. A village of the Pow-
hatan confederacy, in 1608, on Rappahan-
nock r.,in Essex'co., Va.— Smith (1629),
Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819.
Auriferoas gravel man. See Calaveras
Man.
Ausion. A former Chumashan village
near Purfsima mission, Santa Barbara
CO., Cal. — Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, Oct.
18, 1861.
Ante. An Apalachee (?) town on the
coa«!t of Apalachee bay, Fla., first visited
by Xarvaez in 1528. It has been identi-
fied in location with St Marks.
Ante.— French, Hist. Coll. La., li. 246. 1876 (mis-
print). Autc.— Cabeza de Vaca, Smith trans., 38,
1871 (Smith identifies it with Ochete). Autia.—
Linschoten.Desc.de I'AmiSr., 6, 1638. Haute.— Gal-
latin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc, n, Ivi, 1848.
Aatiamqae. The town, possibly Cad-
doan, where De Soto's troops went into
winter quarters in 1541-42. It had an
abundance of maize and provisions, and
lay on the same river as Cayas, appar-
entlv Arkansas r.
Autiamque.— Gentl. of Elvas(1557) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., II. 181, 1860. TJtian^e.— Rafinesque,
introd. Marshall, Ky., i, 36, 1824. TJtianque.—
Shipp, De Soto and Fla., 683, 1881. Vioanque.—
Bled ma in French, op. cit., 107. Viranque.—
Biedma in Smith, Collec. Docs. Fla., 61, 1867.
Vtiangue.— Garcilasso de la Vega. Fla.. 193, 1723.
Avak. A Yuit Eskimo village near Cape
Chukotsky, n. e. Siberia; pop. 101 in 16
118
AVATANAK AWANI
[B. A. B.
houses about 1895; 98 in 12 houses in
1901. The people are of the Aiwan di-
vision.
Affvan.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. £., map, 1899.
A'vak.— Bogoras, Chukchee, 29. 1904 (Eskimo
name) . Awan.— Krai^^in DeutscheGeog. Blatter,
V, 80, map, 1882 (Chukchi name for Eskimo about
Indian pt) . Eu'nmun. — Bogoras, op. cit. ( Chukchi
name).
Ayatanak. An Aleut village on a small
island of the same name, l^tween Una-
laska and Unimak ids., Alaska; pop. 19
in 1880.
Aiaialffutak.— Krenitzin and Levashef (1768),
quotea by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901 . Avata-
nak.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 22, 1884. AvaU-
nakskoi.— Elliott, Cond. .Aff. Alaska, 225, 1875.
Avatanovsko«.— VeniaminofT, Zapiski, ii, 203, 1840.
Awatanak.— Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., map, 152,
1855.
Avaadjelling. A summer settlement of
Akudnirmiut Eskimo at the n. end of
Homfe bay, BaflBn land. — Boas in 6th
Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888.
AvavareB. A former tribe of Texas,
possibly Caddoan, which lived ** behind *'
the Quintoles toward the interior, and to
which Cabeza de Vaca, in 1527-34, fled
from the Mariames. .Their language was
different from that of the Mariames,
although they understood the latter.
They bartered bones, which the Mariames
^ound and used for food, and also traded
in bows. While staying with the Ava-
vares Cabeza de Vaca and his companion
became noted for their successful treat-
ment of the sick. The people seem to
have been kindly disposed and different
in habits from the coast tribes, (a. c. p. )
Ananare*.— Harris, Voy. and Trav., I, 803, 1705.
Anavare*.— Linschoten, Desc. de I'Am^rique, 6,
1638. Avarae*.— Cabeza de Vaca (1534) quoted by
Barcia, Ensayo, 13, 1723. Avare*.— Herrera, Hist.
Gen.j dec. v, 94, 1725. Avavare*.— Cabeza de Vaca,
Smith trans., 58, 84, 1851. Chavavares.— Cabeza de
Vaca, Smith trans., 137, 1871.
Avendaughboagh. A former village,
probably of the Sewee, in South Carolina
in 1701.— Lawson, Hist. Car., 24, 1860.
Avnalik. A Chnagmiut village in the
Yukon district, Alaska; pop. 30 in 1890.
Avnuligmiut.— 11th Census. Alaska, 165^1893.
Avolabao. A rancheria, probably Co-
chimi, connected with Purfsima mission,
Lower California, about lat. 26° 20^.—
Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 189, 1857.
AvoyelleB (Fr. dim. of avoie, * small
vipers' ). A tribe spoken of in the 18th
century as one of the nations of the Red
r., having their villages near the mouth
of that stream, within what is now
Avoyelles parish, La. They probably
belonged to the Caddoan family, the tribe
representing a group that had remained
near the ancient hsmitat of its kindred.
The country occupied by the Avoyelles
was fertile and intersected by lakes and
bayous, one of the latter being still called
by their name. The tribe lived in vil-
lages, cultivated maize and vegetables,
and practised the arts common to the
tribes of the Gulf region. Nothing defi-
nite is known of their beliefisand cere-
monies. Like their neighbors, they had
come into possession of horses, which
they bred, and later they obtained cattle,
for Du Ptatz mentions that they sold
horses, cows, and oxen to the French
settlers of Louisiana. During the general
displacement of the tribes throughout the
Gulf states, which began in the 18th cen-
tury, the Avoyelles country proved to be
attractive. The Biloxi settled there and
other tribes entered and took possession.
Under the influences incident to the
advent of the white race the Avoyelles
mingled with the newcomers, but through
the ravages of wars and new diseases the
tribe was soon reduced in numbers.
Before the close of the century their vil-
lages and their tribal organization melted
away, their language became extinct, and
the few survivors were lost in the float-
ing Indian population. In 1805, accord-
ing to Sibley, the tribe had become re-
duced to two or three women, (a. c. f.)
s., II, 26, 1812. Avovelles.— JefTerys, Am. Atlas, 5,
1776. Avoyall.—Brackenridge, Views of La., 83,
1814. Avovellat.— Dumont, La., i, 134, 1753. Avo-
yelles.—Si Bley (1805) in Am. State Papers, iv, 725,
1832. Avoyels.— Jefferys, French Dom. Am., i,
165, 1761.
Awaitlala ( * those inside the inlet * ) . A
Kwakiutl tribe on Knight inlet, Brit. Col.
Their town is called Kwatsi.
A'wa-iLala.— Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 332, 1S97.
A'wae'LEla.— Boas in Mem. Am. Mns. Nat. Hist.,
V, pt. 1, 122, 1902. Oughtella.— Brit. Col. map,
Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872 (given as name of town).
AwalokaksakBi ('at the little island').
A Klamath settlement on Williamson r.,
8. w. Oreg. — Gatschet in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., II, pt. 1, xxix, 1890.
Awani. A division of the Miwok living
in Yosemite valley, Mariposa co., Cal.
Powers states that the name Yosemite is a
distorted form of the Miwok uzumaitiy
* grizzly bear,' a tenn never used by the
Indians to designate the valley itself or any
part of it. Awani, the name applied by
the natives of the valley, was the principal
village, which by extension was given to
the whole valley and its inhabitants, who
occupied it when snow permitted. The
Awani had 9 villages, containing 450 peo-
ple, when the whites first came, and they
seem to have had a larger number at an
earlier period. At present the population
is unknown, but small. The 9 villages
were Awani, Hokokwito, Kumaini, Les-
amaiti, Macheto, Notomidula, Sakaya,
and Wahaka. (h. w. h.)
Ahwahnaohee.— Hittell. Yosemite, 42, 1868. Ah-
wahneohee.— Ibid.,35. Awalaohe.— Johnston (1851 )
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 22, 1852.
Awallaohe.— McKee et al. (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc.
4, 32d CJong., spec, sess., 74, 1853. Awaaee.— Pow-
ers in Overland Monthly, x, 333, 1874. OoMmite.—
Hittell, Yosemite, 35, 1868. Ootoomite.— Ibid.. 36.
fiULL. 30]
AWASH — AWATOBT
119
Bosemiteiz.— Lewis in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 399,
1858. SoMmity.— Ibid., 252, 1856. Ya-seem-ne.—
Barbour in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4. 32d Cong., spec.sess.,
266, 1853. Yoamity.— Hittell, Yosemite, 42, 186H.
Yohamite.— Ibid. Yosahmittis.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, June 8, 1860. Yo-sem-a-te.— Wessells
(1858) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 1st se.ss.,
80, 1857. Yo»emeto».— Barbour (1851) in Sen. Ex.
Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec. scss.. 61, 1853. Yo-»em-
ety.— Johnston in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv,
Zu, 1854. Yotemite*.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Dec, 7, 1860. Yonmitie*,— Ind. Com'rs (1851) in
Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec. ses.s., 88, IHoa.
YoMomite.— Hittell, Yosemite, SC). 1868.
Awash ( * buffalo * ) . A Tonkawa clan or
gene.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E., 1884.
Awaahlaark. A former Chiimashan
village near Santa Inez mission, Santa
Barbara co., Cal.
A-wao-la'-firk. — Henshaw, Santa Inez MS. voeub.,
B. A. E., 1884.
Awashonks. The woman chief of Se-
conet, R. I., whose fanje obscured that
of Tolony, her husband (Drake, Inds. of
N. Am., 249, 1880). Her name is signed
until 1680, when, in the Pueblo rebellion,
which began in August, the Awatobi
missionary, Father Figueroa, was mur-
dered. At this time the Awatobi people
numbered 800. Henceforward no Span-
ish priests were established among the
Hopi, although in 1700 Father (laray-
coechea visited Awatobi, where he bap-
tized 78 natives, but was unsuccessful m
his attempt to reestablish missions among
them. In November of the same year,
owing to the friendly feeling whicli the
Awatobi are said to have had for the
Spanish friars, their kindred, especially
of Walpi and Mashongnovi, joined in
an attack on Awatobi at night, setting fire
to the pueblo, killing many of its inhabi-
tants, including all the men, and carrying
off women and children to the other
pueblos, chietiy to Mashongnovi, Walpi,
and Oraibi. Awatobi was never again in-
RUINS OF AWATOBI AND ITS MISSION. (v. MINDELEFf)
to the Plymouth agreement of 1671 . She
was drawn into King Philip's war in sup-
Eort of that chief, but afterward made
er peace with the English. One of her
sons is said to have studied Latin in prep-
aration for college, but 8uccuml)ed to the
palsy, (a. f. c. )
Awata. The Bow clan of the Hopi.
Aoat. — Voth, Oraibi Summer Snake Ceremony,
283, 1903. A-wa'-ta.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop.,
Vll, 367, 1894. Awata winwu.— Fewkes in 19th
Rep. B. A.E. . 584, 1900 ( wiilwij, = ' clan ' ) . A-wata
wun-wu.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 404, 1894.
Awatobi ('high place of the bow,* re-
ferring to the^ow people). A former
pueblo of the Hopi on a mesa about 9 m.
s. E. of Walpi, N. E. Ariz. It was one of
the original villages of the province of
Tusayan of the early Spaniards, being
visited by Tobar and Cardenas of Coro-
nado's expedition in 1540, by Espejo in
1583, and by Ofiate in 1598. It became
the seat of the Franciscan mission of San
Bernardino in 1629, under Father Porras,
who was poisoned by the Hopi in 1633;
but the endeavor to Christianize the Hopi
at this and other pueblos was continued
habited. The walls of the old Spanish
church are still partly standing. See
Mindeleff in 8th Kep.'B. A. E., 1891;
Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., Oct., 1893;
Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 592 et
seq., 1898. (f. w. h.)
Aguato.— Rspojo {\tK^) in Doc. InM., XV, 120, 182.
1871. Aguatobi.— Doc. of 1584 cited by Bande-
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, i, 15, 1881; Vetan-
curt (1(193), Menolog. Fran., 275, 1871. Agua-
tubi.— Avetu (1680) cjiioted by Bandolier in
Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 3G9, 1892. Aguatuby. — Jef-
ferys. Am. Atlas, map 6, 1776. Agttatuvi. — Busch-
niann, Neu-Mcxico, 231, 1858. Asuatuya. — Ban-
delier in Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch., Ill, 85, 1892
(misquoting Ofiate following). Aguatuybi.—
Ofiate (1598) in Doc. In«5d., xvi, 137, 1871 (erro-
neou.slv given as name of chief). Aguitobi. —
Bandeiier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 115, 1890.
Ahuato.— Hakluyt (1600), Voy., 470, 1810. Ahu-
atu.— Bandeiier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 115,
135, 1890. Ahuatuyba.— Ibid., 109, and iv, 368, 1892.
Ahuzto.— Hakluyt (1600), Voy., repr. 1891. Ah-
wat-tenna.— Bourke. Moquis of Ariz., 195, 1884.
Aoatovi.— Voth, Traditions of the Hopi, 47, 1905.
Aquatasi.— Walch, <:harte America, 1805. Aqua-
tubi.— Davis, Span. Conq. N. Mex., 368, 1869.
Atabi-hogandi.— Bourke, Moquis of Ariz., 84, 1884
(Navaho name). Aua-tu-ui. -^Bandeiier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, iv, 368, 1892. A-wa-te-u.— Gushing
in Atl. Monthly. 367. Sept.. 1882. A-wa'-to-bi.—
Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., v, 10, 1892. Awatubi.—
120
AWAUSEE — AWLUHL
[B. A. a.
Bourke, op. cit., 91. k wat u i.— Cushing in 4th
Rep. B. A. £.. 493, 18K6. k wat u ians.— Ibid., 494.
SanBemahdino de Ahuatobi.— Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, iv, 369, 1892 (mi.«<print). San Bernardi-
no.—Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., Vl, 394, 1894. Ban
Bernardino de Aguatuvi.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N.
Mex. . 349. 1889. San Bernardino de Ahuatobi. — Ve-
tancurt (1693) , Teatro Mex., in, 321, 1871. S. Ber-
nardo de Aguatuvi.— Vargas (1692) quoted bv Ban-
croft, Ariz. and N. Mex., 201. 1889. Talla-Hogan.—
Mindeleff, quoted by Powell, 4th Rep. B. A. E..
xxxix, 1886 ('singing house*: Navaho name).
Talla-hogandi.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
, IV, 368, 1892. Tally-hogan.— Powell, Sd- Rep. B.
A. E., xxi, 1884. Tolli-Hogandi. —Bourke, Moquis
of Ariz.. 84, 1884. Zagnato.— Brackenridge, Early
Span. Discov., 19, 1857. Zaguatc.— Prince, N.
Mex., 34, 1883. Zaguato.— Espeio (1.583) in Hak-
luyt. Vov., 463, 470, 1810. Zuguato.— Hinton,
Handbook to Ariz., 388, 1878.
Awansee {mvasixij ' bullhead, ' a fish ) . A
Chippewa phratry or ^ens. According to
Warren a phratry including all the fish
gentes of the Chippewa. According to
Morgan and Tomazin it is a gens in it-
self. Cf. Guam.
Ah-wah-sis'-wt.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166, 1877.
Ah-wa-»i«-ie.— Tanner, Narr., 315, 1830(*small cat-
fish'; given by Tanner as a gens: headds: "some-
times they call the people of this totem 'those
who carry their young,' from the habits of the
small cratfish"). 'AwaMisain.— Gatschet, Ojibwa
MS., B. A. E., 1882. A-wau«-e.— Warren in Minn.
Hist. Sor. Coll., v, 44, 1885. A-waus-e-wng.—
Ibid., 87. A-waua-is-ee. -Ramsey in Ind. Aflf. Rep.,
91, 18.50.
Awenanish. See Onananiche.
Awhawhilashmn. A former Chuma-
shan village on the coast between Ft
Conception and Santa Barbara, Cal., in
the locality now called Punta Capitan.
A-wha-whi-lac'-mu.— Henshaw, Buenaventura
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
Awhnt. A Diegueno rancher ia in n.
Lower Cal. whose inhabitants spoke the
Hataam dialect. — (Jatschet, Yuma Spr.,
107, 1886.
AwighBaghroone. A tribe, probably
Algonquian, that lived about the upper
great lakes and which sent a friendly
message to the Seneca in 1715. Perhaps
identical with the Assisagigroone, orMis-
sisauga.
Awighaaghroene.— Livingston (1715) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., V, 446, 1855. Awighaa^hroone.— Ibid.
Awigna. A former Gabrieleiio ranche-
ria in Los Angeles co., Cal., at a place
later called I^ Puenta.
Awigna.— Ried (1852) Quoted by Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, June 8, 1860. Awi«-na.— Ried quoted by
Hoffman in Bull. Essex Inst.xvii, 2, 1885.
AwIb. The aboriginal American awl is
a sharpened stick, bone, stone, or piece
of metal, used as a perforator in sewing.
It was universal among Indians from the
earliest times, and is one of the familiar
archeologic ol3Jects recovered from exca-
vations in prehistoric sites. For tempo-
rary use awls were improvised from
splinters of flint, wood, and bone, cac-
tus spines, agave needles, thorns, etc.
Before the introduction of iron, bone was
the most serviceable material. Rude
awls, formed by grinding to a point a
long-bone or sliver of bone, are frequently
encountered in graves and on the sites of
early habitations, and with them may be
found others that are elaborately finished
and decorated with carving and etching.
Perhaps most Indians preferred deer bone
as a material for awls, but bear and tur-
key bones and antler were also exten-
sively employed, those of turkey bone
being especially common in New Mex-
ico. The fibula of the deer merely
needed sharpening to produce the tool,
while the articular extremity formed a
convenient and ornamental handld.
Ivory from the walrus, narwhal, and fos-
sil elephant was valued for making awls
in regions where it could be procured.
Awls of chipped or ground stone, shell,
hard wood, and copper have been found
on ancient sites. Awlsof boneorof wood
were not usually hafted, but stone and
copper awls were often mounted and per-
haps served also for drills (q. v.). The
modern awl of iron is always hafted with
wood, bone, dried tendon or gristle,
or horn, and the hafts are often carved,
painted, or otherwise decorated.
The awl was used to make perforations
through which thread of sinew or other
sewing material was passed when skins
for moccasins, clothing, tents, etc., were
sewed, and in quillwork, beadwork, and
basketwork. Other uses for awls were for
making holes for pees in woodwork, as a
gauge in canoe-making, for shredding
sinew, for graving, etc. V^arious awl-like
implements that were used by the In-
dians in weaving and making pottery, as
pins for robes, as head-scratcners, pipe-
picks, blood pins for closing wounds in
game to save the blood, marrow-extract-
ors, forks, corn-huskers, etc., have some-
times been classed as awls. The Alaskan
Eskimo have an awl with a small barb
near the end which was used like a cro-
chet hook.
The awl was so indispensable in every-
day work that it was usually carried on
the person, and many kinds of sheaths
and cases were made for holding it.
These were formed from joints of cane
or hollow bones, or wrought out of bone,
wood, metal, or leather, and were orna-
mented by etching, carving, or painting,
or with beadwork, quillwork, or other
decorative devices. See Drills and DrUl-
ingj Needles.
Consult Stephen, The Navajo Shoe-
maker, Proc. Nat. Mus., xi, 131, 1888; pa-
pers in Reps. B. A. E. by Nelson, Mur-
doch, Boas, Turner, Hoffman, and
Fewkes; and Mason, Basketry, Rep. Nat.
Mus., 1902. (w. H.)
Awlnhl ( d' hi 'hi), A clan of Taos pueblo.
New Mexico. The meaning of the name
is indefinite, but it is said to bear some
reference to transformation from human
beings into animals. — Hodge, field notes,
B. A. E., 1899.
BULL. 30]
AXACAN AXES
121
A place in Virginia, some-
where w. from Cliesapeake bay, at 37°
or 37° 30^, in which the Spaniards at-
tempted to establish a Jesuit mission in
1570. Through the treachery of their
Indian guide, brother of the chief of the
tribe, the entire party of missionaries, 7
in number, was massacred and the tem-
porary mission building destroyed. Two
years later Menendez revenged their
death by hanging 8 of the principal mur-
derers, (j. M.)
Aizaoan.— Shipp, De Soto and Fla., 560, 1881.
Azaoan.— Barcia, Ensayo, 142, 1723.
Axanti. A pueblo of New Mexico in
1598; doubtless situated in the Salinas, in
the vicinity of Abo, and evidently occu-
E* ' ' by the Tigua or the Piros.— Oilate
8) in Doc. In^d., xvi, 114, 1871.
ti.— Columbus Memorial Vol., 155, 1893 (mis-
print).
Axes. The grooved ax takes a promi-
nent place among the stone implements
used by the northern tribes. The normal
form is that of a thick wedge, with rounded
angles and an encircling
groove near the top for
securing the handle; but
there is great variation
from the average. Usu-
ally the implement is
madeof some hard, tough
stone, as trap, granite,
syenite, greenstone, or
hematite, where such can
be procured; but when
these are not available
softer material is utilized,
as sandstone or slat^.
Copper axes are of rare
occurrence. Among the
stone specimens there is
a very wide range in
size, the largest weigh-
ing upward of 30 pounds
and the smallest scarcely an ounce. As
these extreme sizes could serve no eco-
nomic purpose, they were probably for
ceremonial use; the smaller may have been
amulets or talismans. The majority range
from 1 pound to 6 pounds, which mark
close to the limits of utility>^ As a rule the
groove is at a right angle to the longer
axis, though sometimes it is oblique, and
it may extend entirelv or only partially
around the ax. In the latter case it is
always one of the narrow sides that is left
without a groove, and this is frequently
flattened or hollowed to accommodate the
handle better. Ordinarily the complete
or entire groove is pecked in a ridge encir-
cling the ax, leaving a protuberance
above and below, while the partial groove
is sunken in the body of the implement.
Axes with two or more grooves are rare
excepting in the Pueblo country, where
multiple grooves are common. The haft
was plac^ parallel with the blade and
Ax WITH Simple Groove ;
District of Columbia
(length, 7 IN.)
Ax WITH Diagonal Qroovc
And Lateral Ridges;
tennessee
was usuallv a withe doubled around the
groove and fastened securely with cords
or rawhide, but heavier T-shape sticks
were sometimes used, the top of the T
being set against the
flattened or hollow side
of the implement and
firmly lasned. Axes
with holes drilled for
the insertion of a jiandle
are common in Euroj>e,
but this method of haft-
ing was of very rare
occurrence among the
American aborigines.
When not made from
bowlders closely ap-
proximating in shape
the desired implement,
the ax was roughed out by chipping and
was reduced to the desired shape by peck-
ing with a hard stone and by grinding.
Axes of rude shape, made by flaking a
flattish bowlder alon^ one end and break-
ing notches in the sides for hafting, are
found in some sections. Axes are well
distributed over the country wherever
good material is readily available, ex-
cepting in the Pacific states, British Co-
lumbia, and Alaska, where specimens are
exceedingly rare. Few are found in
Florida, and although plentiful in the
mound re^on are seldom found in
mounds. The shapes vary with the
different regions, examples from the
Atlantic slope, for example, being quite
unlike those of the Pueblo country.
It is probable that the ax served vari-
ous purposes in the art^, and especially in
war ana in the chase. Numerous badly
fractured specimens are foun<l in the soap-
stone quarries of e. United States, where
they were used for cutting out masses of
this rock. The grooved ax is said to have
been used in felling trees and in cutting
them up, but it is manifestly not well
suited for such work; it would serve,
however, to assist in cutting wood in
conjunction with charring. The hafted
stone ax passed immediately out of use
on the introduction by Europeans of
the iron ax, which was the first and
most obviously useful tool that the
Indians saw in the hands of the white
man.
See Abbott, Prim. Indust, 1881; Fowke
(1) in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896, (2) Arch.
Hist. Ohio, 1902; Holmes in 15th Rep. B.
A. E., 1897; Jones, Antiq. So. Inds., 1873;
Jones in Smithson. Cont., xxii, 1876;
Moorehead, Prehist. Impls., 1900; Put-
nam in Surv. W. 100th Merid., vii, 1879;
Squier and Davis in Smithson. Cont., i,
1848; Stevenson in 2d Rep. B. A. E., 1883;
Thruston, Antiq. Tenn., 1897; Wilson in
Smithson. Reps. 1887 and 1888.
(g. f. w. h. h.)
122
AXILLE AZQUELTAK
[b. a. h.
Azille. A fonner fortified village of 50
houses in n. w. Florida. , visited by De Soto
in 1539. It was on a river, doubtless the
one which still retains the name Oeilla.
The same root may appear in the name
of the province, ITzachil. It was on the
frontier of the territory of the Apalachee
tribe.
AmUu— French, Hist. Coll. La., 2d s., 255, 1875.
AxiUe.— Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., II, 134, 1850. Oohile.— Garcilasso de la
Vega, Florida, 51, 1723.
Azion ( 'the muddy place,' from asmcu
*mud*). A division of the New Jersey
Dela wares, formerly living on the e. bank
of Delaware r. , between Rancocas cr. and
the present Trenton. In 1648 they were
one of the largest tribes on the river,
being estimated at 200 warriors. Brinton
thinks the name may be a corruption of
Assiscunk, the name of a creek above
Burlington. See Evelin (1648) in Proud,
Pa., I, 113, 1797.
Axol. A Tewa pueblo in New Mexico
in 1598.— Onate (1598) in Doc. InM.,
XVI, 116, 1871.
Axoytre.— Ofiate, ibid., 102 (probably the same).
Ayabaskawininiwng. A division of the
Cree ( q. v.), commonly known as Wood
Cree.
Ayahanisino. A clan of the Apohola
phratry of the Timucua. — Pareja {ca.
1612) quoted by Gatschet in Am. Philos.
Soc. Proc, XVII, 492, 1878.
Ayak. A Kaviagmiut Eskimo village
on Sledge id., Alaska.
Ahyak.— 11th Census, Alaska, 162, 1893.
Ayanabi ( * iron wood * ) . A fonner Choc-
taw village on Yannubbee cr., 2 m. above
its confluence with Petickfa, about 8 m.
8. w. of Dekalb, Kemper co.. Miss. Ac-
cording to tradition it was the scene of a
(conflict between the Creeks and the
Choctaw in the 18th century, and being
a neutral town was selected as the place
for negotiating peace. In 1811 the town
was visited by Ellskwatawa, the Shawnee
Prophet, in the interest of Tecumtha, and
2 years later a band of about 30 of its
warriors joined the Creeks in the British
cause.
Aianabe.— Alcedo, Die. Geog., i, 36, 1786. Aya-
nabe.— D'Anville, map (1732), in Miss. Hist. Soc.
Piib., Ill, 367, 1900. Ayanabi.— West Fla. map, ca.
1772. lyanabi.— Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Pub.,
op. cit., 368 (given as proper Choctaw form).
Yanabi. — Ibid, (alternative form). Yannubbee
Town.— Halbert in Ala. Hist. Soc. Pub., 77, 1899.
Yanubbee.— Ibid.
Ayanamon. A village formerly situated,
according to old maps, on a lake about
the sources of Tuscarawas r., Ohio.
Ayanamon. — Lattrd, map, 1784. Ayououtou. —
Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777.
Ayanemo. See Ninigret.
Ay a valla. An i m portant Apalachee ( or
Timacua?) town and mission about 1700.
It was destroyed by the English and their
Indian allies under Gov. Moore in 1704,
or, according to Shea, in the later inva-
sion of 1706. Fairbanks locates it "near
the St Mark^s r.,'* w. Fla., while Shea in-
correctly makes it a town of the Atimucas
(Timucua) on Apalachicola r. (j. m. )
Ayavala.— Jefferys, French Dom. Am., map, 135,
1761. Ayavalla.—Shea, Cath. Miss., 74, 1855. Aya-
viUe.— Carroll. Hist. Coll. S. C, ii, 574, 1836.
• Aycate. A former Maricopa rancheria
on the Rio Gila, s. w. Ariz. — Sedelmair
(1744) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz, and N.
Mex., 366, 1889.
Aychini. An unidentified pueblo in
New Mexico in 1598.— Ofiate (1598) in
Doc. InM., XVI, 103, 1871.
A3rmay. A village in e. Georgia, visited
by De Soto in 1540 and called by the Span-
iards Socorro, * Relief.' — Gentl. of Elvas
(1557), Hakluyt trans., 54, 1851.
Ayotl. A Yurok village 1 m. above •
the mouth of Blue cr., on Klamath r., n.
Cal.
Oiyotl.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 138,
1853.
Ayqai. A pueblo of the province of
Atripuy, in the region of the lower Rio
Grande, N. Mex., in 1598 (Ofiate, 1598,
in Doc. InM., xvr, 115, 1871). Proba-
bly the same as the pueblo at Ayquiyn,
attributed by the same authority (p. 102)
to the* 'Trios."
Ay^uiyu.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 136, 1889
(misprint).
Azavay. A former Timuquanan village
on St Johns r., Fla., 50 or 60 leagues
upstream. — Fontaneda (ca. 1570) in Ter-
naux-Compans, Voy., xx, 35, 1841.
Azcapotzalco (Nahuatl name). Proba-
bly an ancient settlement of the Tepe-
cano or of a related tribe, but occupied
since the early part of the 18th century
by Tlax cal tecs originally introduced by
the Spaniards for defense against the
Chichimei^; situated about 10, m. e. of
Bolanos, in Jalisco, Mexico.— Hrdlicka
in Am. Anthrop., v, 425, 1903.
Aziagmiat. The inhabitants of Sledge
or Aziak id., Alaska,*a subdivision of the
Kaviagmiut, numbering 67 in 1890. —
11th Census, Alaska, 154, 1893.
Aziagmut. — Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. Poss. Am., pt. i,
73, 1847.
Aziak. The village of the Aziagmiut
on Sledge id., near C. Nome, Alaska;
pop. 50 in 1880.— Petroff, 10th Census,
Alaska, 11, 1884.
Aziavik. A town of the Chingigmiut
Eskimo near C. Peirce, Alaska; pop. 90
in 1890.
Aaavimunut.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map,
1899. Aziavigamute.— PetrofF, 10th Census, Alaska,
vni, map, 1884. Aziavigiokhamiut.— Schanz in
11th Census, Alaska, 93, 1893.
Azqueltan (Nahuatl: 'where there are
small ants,* referring to the former num-
erous population). The most important
Tepecano settlement, consisting of about
40 dwellings, situated on the Rio de
Bolanos, about lat. 22° 12^ long. 104?,
Jalisco, Mexico. In 1902 a Mexican
trader was permitted to settle among
them for the first time.
BULL. 30]
AZUC8AGNA BACADEGUACHI
123
Alqueston.— Lumholtz, Unknown Mex., ii, 16,
map, 123, 1902 (xwpular name, properly pro-
nounced Asqueltan). Askeltan.— Hrdlicka in
Am. Anthrop., v, 387, 1903. Ki-dagh-ra.— Ibid.,
420 (Tepecano name). San Lorenzo.— Ibid., 410
(early Spanish name). Totonaltam.— Lumholtz,
op. cit. (Tepecano name: same meaning).
Azuosagna. A former Gabrielefio ranch -
eria in Los Angeles co. , Cal. , at the locality
now called Azusa. — Hoffman in Bull.
Essex Inst., xvii, 2, 1885.
Asucsagna.— Ried (1852) quoted by Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, June 8, 1860. Axucsagna.— Ried quoted
by Hoffman in Bull. Essex Inst., xvii, 2, 1886.
Baada. A former Makah village on
Neah bay, Wash. According to Swan it
was abandoned in 1863, its inhabitants
moving to Neah.
Baada.— Swan in Smithson. Cont., xvi, 2, 1870.
Behda.— Gibbs, MS. no. 248, B. A. E.
Babacomero. A former rancheria, prob-
ably of the Papago, on the w. branch of
Rio San Pedro, between Tombstone and
Camp Huachuca, s. Ariz. — Box, Adven-
tures, 322, 1869.
Babasaqai. A ruined village, probably
of the Papago, 3 m. above Imuris, be-
tween Cocospera and Magdalena, Sonora,
Mexico.
BalMwaqui.— Kino (1706) quoted by Bancroft, No.
Mex. States, i, 501, 1884. Babesagui.— Box, Adven-
tures, 278, 1869.
Babbydnclone. See Nakaidoklini.
Babesakandiba, Babesigaandibay. See
Carly Head.
Babiacora. A pueblo of the Teguima
Opata and the seat of a Spanish mission
established in 1639; situated on the Rio
Sonora, Sonora, Mexico, HO m. s. of the
Arizona boundary; pop. 445 in 1678, 294
in 1730.
Babiacora.— Kino, map (1702), in Stocklein, Neue
Welt-Bott, 74, 1?26. Babioori.— Orozco y Berra,
Geog., 343, 1864. Batacora.— Escudero Noticias
Sonora y Sinaloa, 101, 1849 (probably the same).
Batacota.— Cancio (1767) in Doc. Hist. Max., 4th s.,
II, 224, 1856 (probably the same). Baviaoora.—
Davila, Sonora Hist., 317,1894. Conoepcion Babia-
cora.— Zapata (1678) quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex.
States, I, 246, 1884. Goncepcion Babicora. — Rivera
( 1730) , ibid. , 514. Purisima de Babicora. —Orozco y
Berra, Geog., 343, 1864.
Babiche. A thong of skin, particularlv
of eel skin. The word is derived through
Canadian French, in which the term is
old, occurring in Hennepin (1688), from
one of the eastern dialects of Algonquian.
The original source is probably the old
Micmac ababichj 'cord,' 'thread' (Lescar-
bot, Hist. Nouv. France, 666, 1612). A
cognate word is the Chippewa assababishy
* thread.* For the manufacture and use
of babiche, see Rawhide, (a. f. c.)
Babine (*big lips'). A branch of the
Takulli comprising, according to Morice
(Trans. Can. Inst., 27, 1893),- the Natao-
tin, the Babine proper, and the Hwotso-
tenne tribes living about Babine lake,
British Columbia, with a total population
of 610 in 7 villages. The name was given
to them by French Canadians from the
custom of wearing labrets, copied from
the Chimmesyan ; and indeed their entire
culture was greatly affected by that of the
coast tribes.
Babisi. A former rancheria, probably
of the Sobaipuri, at the s. boundary of
Arizona, near Suamca, of which it was a
visita.
Sta Cruz Babisi.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 371,
1889.
Babispe (from babipa^ 'the point where
the river takes a new course.' — Hardy).
An Opata pueblo and the seat of a Spanish
mission founded in 1645; situated on an
E. branch of Rio de Babispe, in n. e.
Sonora, Mexico, near the Chihuahua
boundary. Pop. 402 in 1678, 566 in 1730.
The town was destroyed by an earthquake
in May, 1887. (f. w. h. )
Babispe. —Orozco y Berra , Geog. , 343> 1864. Bapis-
pes.— Ribas (1645) quoted in Arch. Inst. Papers,
III, 58, 1890 (referring to the inhabitants). S.
Miguel Babispe.— Zapata (1678) quoted by Ban-
croft, No. Mex. States, i, 246, 1884. S. Hi^el de
Vavispe.— Rivera, Diario, leg. 1,444, 1736.
Baborigame. A former Tepehuane pue-
blo, situated in a plain 1 J m. in diameter,
in lat. 26° 40^ long. 107°, s. w. Chihuahua,
Mexico. The settlement is now Mexican-
ized, but it is surrounded by Tepehuane
rancherias.
Baborigame.— Orozco y Berra. Geog., 324, 1864.
Baborigami. — Lumholtz in Scribner's Mag., xvi,
303, Sept., 1894. Vawulile.— Lumholtz, Unknown
Mex., 1,420,1902 (• where there is a large fig tree' :
native name).
Babnyagni. A pueblo founded in 1670
by Father Alvaro Flores de la Sierra with
some converted Varohio of Yecarome;
situated on or near the headwaters of the
upper Rio Fuerte, in n. Sinaloa, Mexico.
It was given a resident priest in 1673, but
on the death of Sierra in that year it soon
became a mere visita of the mission of
Taro (Tara), whence many of the con-
verts removed 3 years later. — Bancroft,
No. Mex. States, 247, 1886.
Baca (abbr. of bacapa^ *reed grass.' —
Buelna). A Mayo settlement near the
E. bank of Rio del Fuerte, about lat. 26°
50^, in the northernmost comer of Sina-
loa, Mexico.
Baca.— Uardy (1829) quoted by Bancroft, Nat.
Races, i, 608, 1882. Bacabachi.— Hrdlicka in Am.
Anthrop. , VI, 59, 1904(probablvthesamc). Vaca.—
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 332, 1864.
Bacaburiacbic^ A Tarahumare settle-
ment of Chihuahua, Mexico; definite lo-
cality unknown. — Orozco y Berra, Geog.,
323, 1864.
Bacadegnachi. A Coguinachi Opata
pueblo and the seat of a Spanish mission
founded in 1645; situated on the Rio de
Batepito, or Babispe, in e. Sonora^ Mexico;
pop. 370 in 1678, 272 in 1730. In 1884,
when visited by Bandelier, it contained
about 500 Mexicans and Mexicanized In-
dians, but the town was much neglected
and dilapidated on account of Apache
depredations.
Baoadeguaohi.— Rivera, Diario, leg. 1.444, 1736.
Baoadeffuatzi.— Ribas (1764) quoted by Bandelier
in Arcn. Inst. Papers, iv, 508, 1892. Baoa de
Huachi.— Hamilton, Mexican Handbook, 47, 1883.
124
BAOANORA — BAGADUCE
[b. a. b.
Baoattt de Ouaohi. — Mange (ca, 1700) quoted by
Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 233. 1884. San Luis
Baoadeguaohi.— Rivera (1730), ibid., 514. San Luis
Oonzaga de Baoadeguatzi.— Doc. of 1764 quoted bv
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iii, 56. 1890. S.
Luis Gtonzaga Baoadeguaohi.— Zapata (1678), ibid.,
246.
Bacanora. A pueblo of the Eudeve di-
vision of the Opata and the seat of a
Spanish mission founded in 1627; situated
in E. Sonora, Mexico, on Rio Batepito,
lat. 29° 10^ long. 109°. Pop. 253 in 1678,
116 in 1730.
^Baoanora.— Rivera (1730) quoted by Bancroft, No.
Mex. States, i, 513, 1884. Basacora.— Allegre
quoted by Bancroft, ibid., 523 (probably the same).
S. Ignaoio Bacanora.— Zapata (1678). ibid., 245.
Bacannchi. A rancheria, apparently of
the Opata, on the e. bank of the Rio
Sonora, Sunora, Mexico, in lat. 30° W.
It was visited by Father Kino in Oct.,
1706, and was the seat of a mission with
266 inhabitants in 1777 (Doc. Hist. Mex.,
4th 8., I, app., 1856). Distinct from Ba-
cuachi.
Baoanaohi.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue
Welt-Botr, 74, 1726. Real de Bacanuchi.— Kino
quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 501, 1884.
Bacapa (said by Buelna to signify 'reed
grass' (carrizo)j but the terra baCf or rac,
m Pima signifies ' house, ' * ruined house ' ) .
A Papago rancheria in n. w. Sonora, Mex-
ico, located sHghtly s. e. of Carrizal on
the map of Father Kino ( 1701 ) , by whom
it was visited in 1700, and by Anza and
Font in 1 776. Not to be confounded with
Matape in any of its various forms, but
identical with the later Quitobac in lat.
31° 40^ long. 112° 45^ (f. w. h.)
Quitobac.— Font, map (1777) in Bancroft, Ariz, and
N. M., 393, 1889. San Louis de Bacapa. -Venegas,
Hist. Cal., II, 176, 1759. San Luis Bacupa.— Ban-
croft, op. cit., 359. San Luis Beltran de Bacapa. —
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 123, 1890.
S. Ludlov de Bacapa.— Kino, map (1702) in Stock-
lein. Neue Welt-Bott, 74. 1726. S. Luis Bacapa.—
Kino, map (1701) in Bancroft, op. cit., 360.— S.
Luis de Bacapa.— Venegas, Hist. Cal., i, map,
1759. S. Luis Quitobac- Anza and Font (1774)
quoted by Bancroft, op. cit., 393. St. Ludlovio de
vacapa.— Bandelier, op. cit., 122.
Bachipkwasi (a species of lizard). A
clan of the Lizard (Earth or Sand) phra-
try of the Hopi.
Ba-tci'p-kwa-si.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E.,
39, 1891.
Backhook. One of the small tribes for-
merly living on lower Pedee r. and its
branches in South Carolina. Almost
nothing is known of it. AVith the Hook
tribe they are mentioned by Lawson as
foes of the San tee and as living in 1701
about the mouth of Winyah bay, S. C.
(J. M.)
Backbook.— Lawson (1714), Hist. Car., 45, 1860.
Back Hook.— Rivers, Hist. S. C, 35, 1856. Black
Hook.— Ibid., 36.
Bacobnrito. A rancheria, apparently
occupied by one of the Cahita tribes of
the Piman family, situated on the Rio
Petatlan, or Rio Sinaloa, in lat. 26°, n. w.
Sinaloa, Mexico. Christianized early in
17th century, the natives rebelled about
1604 and burned their church, but the up-
rising was soon quelled by Gov. Hurtaide
who put the leading rebels to death and
compelled the others to rebuild the
edifice. — Bancroft, No. Mex. States, *i,
213, 1886.
, Bacnachi. A former pueblo of the T^ui-
m'a Opata and the seat of a Spanish mission
founded in 1650; situated on the head-
waters of the Rio Sonora, in Sonora, Mex-
ico, below latitude 31°. It still existed as
a mission in 1777 (Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s.,
I, app., 1856). Pop. 195 in 1678, and 51
in 1730, but Bartlett (Personal Narr., i,
278, 1854) found it almost depopulated in
1851.
Bacatzi.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv,530,
1892 (misprint). Bacoachi. — Orozcoy Berra, Geog.,
343, 1864. Bacoaiz.— Ibid. Baooatzi.-Rudo £n-
sayo (1763), 160, 1863. Bacouiz.— Rivera (1730)
quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, 514, 1884.
Bacuachi.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue
Welt-Bott, 74, 1726. Biquache.— Hrdlicka in Am.
Authrop., VI, 72, 1904. S. Miguel Bacuachi.— Za-
pata (1678) quoted by Bancroft, op. cit., 246.
Bacuancos. A Pima rancheria visited
by Father Kino about 1697; situated 7
leagues s. of the mission of Guevavi in
Pimeria Alta, n. w. Sonora, Mexico.
Probably the later Buenavista. See Qui-
quihorica.
Bacuancos.— Bemal (1697) quoted by Bancroft, •
Ariz, and N M., 356, 1889. Bacuanos.— Mange,
ibid., 356. S. Antonio (?).— Ibid. S. Luis Bacuan-
cos.—Ibid., 358.
Bacnm. A Yaqui settlement on the s.
bank of the lower Rio Yaqui, s. w. So-
nora, Mexico, with an estimated popula-
tion of 4,000 in 1849.
Bacum.— Velasco, Noticias de Sonora, 84, 1850.
Bahium. — Orozco y Berra, Geog., 355, 1864. Santa
Cruz Bacum. — Ibid.
Bacuvia. Mentioned as an early settle-
ment apparently within the province of
Apalachee, Fla.
Bacutia— Barcia, Ensayo, 339, 1723. Bacuvia. —
Ibid., 336.
Bad Arms. A Brule band. — Culbertson
in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 141, 1851.*
Badeuachi. A former Opata village,
now in ruins, a short distance w. of Rio
Sonora, about lat. 30°, near Huepaca and
Aconchi, n. central Sonora, Mexico. —
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 71,
1890.
Badwisha. A Mariposan tribe on Ka-
weah r., Cal., said to have lived near the
Wikchamni. Mentioned by Hoffman in
1886 as formerly on Kaweah r., but then
at Tule agency.
Badwis'ha.— Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philo.s. Soc,
XXIII, 301, 1886. Balwisha.— Kroeber, infn, 1905.
Pal-wish-a.- Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d
Cong., spec, sess., 255. 1853. Pat-wish-a.— Johnston
(1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 23,
1852. Pol-we-sha.— Wessells (1853) in H. R. Ex.
Doc. 76, 34th C&ng., 3d sess., 32, 1857.
Bagaduce.. The name of the peninsula
in Hancock co., Me., on which Castine
is situated. Purchas mentions Chebegna-
dose {n should probably be w) as a town
in 1602-1609 on Penobscot r. in Abnaki
territory, with 30 houses and 90 men,
which may be connected with the more
BULL. 30]
BAGIOPA BAGS AND POUCHES
125
modem name. It is also, according to
Willis(Coll. Me. Hist. Soc., iv, 103, 1856),
under the form Abagadusset (from a
sachem of that name), the name of a
tributary of the Kennebec. It is intro-
duced here for the reason that Sullivan
(Hist. Me., 95, 1795) applies the name,
under the plural form Abagadusets, to
a body of Indians which, in 1649, resided
in this immediate section. Vetromile,
however, says: **AVe are sure there was
no Indian village at Castine, called at
present Bagaduce, a corruption for
matchibignadusekj * water bad to drink.' "
Ballard (Rep. U. S. Coast Surv., 1868,
248) gives as the full form matche-he-gua-
toos, *bad bay,' referring to a part of Cas-
tine harbor, and this is the meaning
commonly given. Rasles gives hagadas-
sek as meaning *to shine.' Dr AVilliam
Jones suggests that the ( hippewa paguda-
sinky * windward side,' may be a related
term.
Abagadusets.— Sullivan, Hist. Maine, 95, 1795.
Chebegnadose. — Purchas (1625) quoted in Maine
Hist. Soc. Coll., V, 156, 1857.
Bagiopa. A tribe of whom Fray Fran-
cisco Garc^s (Diary, 1900) heard in 1776,
at which time they lived n. of the Rio
Colorado, where they are located on
Font's map of 1777. The fact that Padre
Eusebio Kino, while near the mouth of
the Rio Colorado in 1701, heard of them
from other Indians and placed them on the
gulf coast of Lower California on his map
of that date, has created the impression
that the Bagiopa wbre one of the Lower
Colorado Yuman tribes; but because they
were never actually seen in this locality
by the Jesuit and Franciscan missionaries
of the period, they are regarded as prob-
ablj[ having belonged to the Shoshonean
family. The name is apparently of Pi-
man origin (opa, 'people'), (f. w. n. )
Aoquiora.— Garcds (1775-6), Diary, 489, 1900 (ap-
parently a misprint of Baquiova). Bagiopas.—
Venegas, Hist. Cal., i, map, 1759. Bagopas.—
GOssefeld, map, 1797. Bajiopas.— Venegas, Hist.
Cal., II. 171, 1759. Baquioba.— Garc<^s(^776). Diarv,
405-6, 1900. Baquiova.— Ibid., 444. Raguapuis.—
Mayer, Mexico, ii, 38, 1853 (possibly intended for
Baguiopas).
Bagoache. Given by La Chesnaye in
1697 (Margry, Dec, vi, 6, 1886) as the
name of a country about the n. shore of
L. Superior, with a people of the same
name numbering from 200 to 300 men.
Bags and Poaches. Many varieties of
bags and pouches were made by the Indi-
ans of the United States and were used for
a great number of purposes. The costume
of the aborigines was universally desti-
tute of pockets, and various pouches
served in their stead. On occasion arti-
cles were tucked away in the clothing or
were tied up in bita of dotii or skin.
The blanket also served at times for a
bag, and among the Eskimo the woman's
coat was enlarged over the shoulders and
at the back to form a pouch for carrying
the baby. The pouch was a receptacle
of fiexiole material for containing vari-
ous objects and sul^stances of personal
use or ceremony, and was generally an
adjunct of costume. The bag, larger and
simpler, was used for the gathering, trans-
portation, and storage of game and other
food. The material was tawed leather of
various kinds, tanned leather, i-awhide,
fur skins, skins of birds; the bladder,
stomach or pericardium of animals; cord
of babiche, buckskin or wool, hair, bark,
fiber, grass, and the like; basketry, cloth,
beadwork, etc. Rec^tangular or oval
pouches were made with a flap or a gath-
ering-string and with a thong, cord, or
strap for attaching them at the shoulder
or to the belt. The Eskimo had pouches
with a flap that could be wrapped many
times around and secured by means of
a string and an ivory fastener. The
Zufii use, among others, crescent-shaped
pouches into the horns of which objects
are thrust through a central opening.
Bags showed less variety of form. They
were square or oblong, deep or shallow,
flat or cylindrical. Many of these were
provided with a shoulder band, many
with a carrying-strap and a forehead
band. The Eskimo bag was provided
with an ivory handle, which was fre-
quently decorated with etching. Small
pouches were used for holding toilet arti-
cles, paint, medicine, tol)acco, pipes, am-
munition, trinkets, sewing tools, fetishes,
sacred uieal, etc. Large pouches or bags,
such as the bandoleer pouch of the Chip-
])ewa, held smaller pouches and articles
for personal use.
Bags were made for containing articles
to be packed on hordes, frequently joined
together like saddlebags. The tribes, of
the far N. made use of large sleeping bags
of fur. Most bags and pouches were orna-
mented, and in very few other belong-
ings of the Indian were displayed such
fertility of invention and such skill in
. the execution of the decorative and sym-
bolic designs. Skin pouches, elaborately
ornamented with beadwork, quillwork,
pigments, and dyes, were made by various
tribes. Decorated bags and wallets of
skin are characteristic of the Aleut, Salish,
Nez Perc(f's, the northern Athapascan and
Algonquian tribes, and the Plains Indi-
ans. Bags of textiles and basketry are
similarly diversified. Especially note-
worthy are the muskemoots of the
Thlingchadinne, made of babiche, the
bags of the Nez Perc(^s, made of apocynum
fiber and corn-husks, the woven hunting
bags of northern woodland tribes, and the
])ainte(l rawhide pouches and ])agsof the
tribes of the great plains.
Consult Mason (1) Aboriginal Ameri-
can Basketry, Rep. Nat. Mus., 1902, 1904,
126
BAGUACAT BAKING STONES
[B. A. ]
(2) Primitive Travel and Transportation,
ibid., 1894, 1896; Boas, Holmes, Hoff-
man, Nelson, and Turner, in Reports of
the B. A. E. ; Kroeber, The Arapaho, Bull.
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xviii, 1902; Boas in
Jour. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., iv, no. 3,
suppl., 1904; Willoughby in Am. An-
throp., VII, nos. 1, 4, 1905; Teit in Mem.
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., i, no. 4, 1900; Lum-
holtz. Unknown Mexico, 1902. (w. h.)
Baguacat. An unidentified pueblo of
New Mexico in 1598.— Ofiate (1598) in
Doc. Ined., xvi, 103, 1871.
Baguibnrisac. A rancheria, probably
Maricopa, visited by Kino and Mange in
1699; apparently near the Rio Gila in
8. w. Ariz. — Mange (1699) quoted by
Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 358, 1889.
Bagwanageshig. See Hole-in-the-day.
Bahacecha. A tribe visited by Oiiate in
1604, at which time it resided on the
Rio Colorado in Arizona, between Bill
Williams fork and the Gila. Their lan-
guage was described as being almost the
same as that of the Mohave, whose ter-
ritory adjoined theirs on the n. and with
whom they were friendly. Their houses
were low, of wood covered with earth.
They are not identifiable with any pres-
ent Yuman tribe, although they occupied
in Onate's time that part of the Rio Col-
orado valley inhabited by the Alche-
doma in 1776. See Zarate - Salmeron
{ca. 1629) in Land of Sunshine, 105,
Jan., 1900; Garces (1775-76), Diary, 1900;
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 110,
1890. (f. w. H.)
Bahekhube. A village occupied by the
Kansa after they left the mouth of Big
Blue r., near a mountain s. of Kansas r.,
Kans.
BaWqube.— Dorse V. MS. Kansas vocab., B. A. E.,
1882.
Bahohata (* lodge'). A Hidatsa band.
Matthews says it may be Maohati.
Ba-ho-Ha'-ta.— Morgan, Anc. Soc, 159, 1877.
Baicadeat. A former rancheria, evi-
dently of the Sobaipuri, on Rio San Pedro,
s. Ariz. ; it was visited by Father Kino
about 1697, and became a visita of the
mission of Suamca about 1760-67.
Baioadeat.— Mange (16)7) quoted by Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex.. 35*1, 1889. 8. Pablo Baibcat.—
Bancroft, ibid., 371.
Baidarka. The sealskin boat of the
Alaskan Eskimo. The Russian adapta-
tion of paithaky or paithalik, in the Kaniag-
miut dialect, apphed to a three-paddle
boat of this kind. (a. f. c. )
Baimena ( possibly from Haldme^ pi. of
hahij *a species of locust,' la 'continu-
ance,' 'habit,' hence* a place where locusts
habitually live.' — Buelna). A former
small tribe and pueblo, evidently Piman,
6 leagues s. e. of San Jos^ del Toro, Sina-
loa, Mexico. According to Zapata the
people spoke a dialect related to that of
the Zoe, who lived next to them on the
N. in 1678. These two tribes traditionally
came with the Ahome from the n. They
are now extinct.
BafmmHi.— Orozco y Berra, Geog. , 336, 1864. Santa
Oatalina Baimtif ,— Ibid., 333. Santo OatoUna de
Baitrena.— Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th
s., in, 396, 1867.
Baipia. A former settlement of either
the Soba or the Papago proper, situated
slightly N. w. of Caborca, probably on the
Rio Altar, n. w. Sonora, Mexico.
Aribaipia.— AnzH (1774) quoted by Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 389, 1889. Aribayopia.— Font,
map (1777), ibid., 393. Arivac.— Orozco y Berra,
Geog., 347, 1864 (probably the same). Baipia.—
Kino, map (1701), in Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex.,
360, 1889. San Edvardo de Baipia.— Venegas, Hist.
Cal., II, 176, 1759. S. Eduard de Baipia.— Kino,
map (1702) in Stockiein, Neue Welt-Bott, 74,
1726. S. Eduardo.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N. M., 369,
1889. S. Eduardo Baipia.— Kino (1701) quoted by
Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 495, 1884. S.
Eduardo de Aribaopuu- Anza and Font (1776)
Quoted by Bancroft, Ariz, and N. M., 398, 1889.
8. Edward.— Venegas, Hist. Cal., i, map, 1759.
Bajio ( Span. : * shoal, ' * sand-bank * ) . A
Papago settlement with 150 inhabitants
in 1858.
Del Bejic— Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208, 1858.
Bakihon ('gash themselves with
knives'). A band of the Upper Yank-
tonai Sioux.
Bakiho".— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218, 1897.
BakihoQ.— Ibid.
Baking stones. A name applied to a
numerous class of prehistoric stone relics
found principally on
inhabited sites in s..
California. They
are fiattish, often
rudely rectangular
or somewhat oval
plates, sometimes
convex beneath and
slightly concave
above, and rare spec-
imens have obscure
rims. Usually they
are made of soapstone, and often show
traces of use over fire. They rarely ex-
ceed a foot in length, are somewhat less
in width, and perhaps an inch in average
thickness. The characteristic feature of
these plates is a roughly made perforation
at the middle of one end, giving the ap-
pearance of a huge pendant ornament.
This perforation served, no doubt, to aid
in handling the plate while hot. Some
of these objects may have been boiling
stones to be heated in the fire and sus-
pended in a pot or basket of water for
cooking purposes. This utensil passes
imperceptibly into certain ladle-like
forms, and these again into dippers, cups,
bowls, and globular ollas in turn, tne
whole group forming part of the culinary .
outfit. A remarkable ladle-like object of
gray diorite was obtained from the aurif-
erous gravels 16 feet below the surface in
Placer co., Cal. It is superior in make to
other kindred objects. The baking stones
Prehistoric Baking Plate;
California (i-io)
BULL. 30]
BALCONY HOUSE BAMOA
127
of the Pueblo Indians, employed in mak-
ing the wafer bread, are smooth, oblong
slabs set over the fireplace. See Abbott
in S.urvey8 West of the 100th Merid., vii.
HOPI BAKING STONE. (mINDELEFf)
* 1879; Gushing, Zuili Breadstuff, in Mill-
stone, Nov. 1884; Holmes in Smithson.
Rep. 1899, 1901; Mindeleff in 8th Rep.
B. A. E., 1891. (w. H. H.)
Balcony Hoase. A cliff house, compris-
ing about 25 rooms, situated in Ruin can-
yon. Mesa Verde, s. Colo. It deriveH its
name from a shelf or balcony which ex-
tends along the front of two of the houses,
resting on the projecting floor beams.
See H. R. Rep. 3703, 58th Cong., 3d sess.,
1905.
Bald Eagle»8 Nest. A Delaware (?) vil-
lage, taking its name from the chief, Bald
Eagle, formerly on the right bank of Bald
Eagle cr., near the present Milesburg,
Center co. , Pa. It is marked on I^ Tour's
map of 1784 and described by Dav, Penn-
sylvania, 201, 1843.
Ballokai Porno (*Oat vallev people.' —
Powers). A subtril)e or division of the
Pomo, formerly living in Potter valley,
Mendocino co., Cal.
Bal-lo' KaiPo-mo.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
111,156,1877. PoamPomo.— Ibid.,156. Pomapoma.—
Kroeber, infn, 1903. Poma pomo.— Ibid. Po-
mas.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d
Cong., spec, sess., 144. 1853. Pome Pomos.— Pow-
ers in Overland Mo., ix, 504, 1872. Pone
Pomo*.— Hittell, Hist. Cal., i, 730, 1885.
Ball play. The common designation of
a man's game, formerly the favorite ath-
letic game of all the eastern tribes from
Hudson bay to the Gulf. It was found
also in California and perhaps elsewhere
on the Pacific coast, but was generally
superseded in the W. by some form of
shinny. It was played with a small ball
of deerskin stuffed with hair or moss, or
a spherical block of wood, and with 1 or
2 netted rackets, somewliat resembling
tennis rackets. Two goals were set up at
a distance of several hundred yards from
each other, and the object of each party
was to drive the ball under the goal of the
opposing partv by means of the racket
without touching it with the hand. After
picking up the ball with the racket, how-
ever, the player might run with it in his
hand until he could throw it again. In
the N. the ball was manipulated ^vith a
single racket, but in the S. the player
used a pair, catching the ball between
them. Two settlements or two tribes
generally played against each other, the
players numl)ering from 8 or 10 up to
hundreds on a side, and high stakes were
wagered on the result. Preceding and
accompanying the game there was much
ceremonial of dancing, fasting, bleeding,
anointing, and prayer under the direction
of the medicine-men. The allied tribes
used this game as a stratagem to obtain
entrance to Ft Mackinaw in 1764. Numer-
ous places bearing the name of Ball Play
give evidence of its old popularity among
the former tri])es of
the Gulf states, who
have carried it with
them to their pres-
ent homes in In-
dian Ter., where it
is still kept up with
the old ceremonial
and enthusiasm.
Shorn of its cere-
monial accompani-
ments it has been
adopted by the Ca-
nadians as their na-
tional game under
the name of la
crosse, and by the
Louisiana French
Creoles as raquette.
The Indians of
many tribes played
other games of ball, noteworthy among
which is the kicl^ed ball of the Tarahu-
mare, which, it is said, gave the name to
the tribe. Consult Adair, Hist. Am.
Inds., 1775; Bartram, Trav., 1792; CatUn,
N. A. Inds., 1841; Mooney, Cherokee
Ball Play, Am. Anthrop., iii, 1890; Culin,
Games of N. Am. Inds., in 24th Rep.
B. A. E., 1905. Lumholtz, Unknown
Mexico, 1902. See Games, (.i. m.)
Balsa. See Boats.
Baxnoa {ha 'water,' moa 'ear' or 'spike'
( of corn ) : ' spike in the water ' ; or prefer-
ably />«, and maioa ' bank ' : 'on the bank
of the river.' — Buelna). According to
Orozco y Berra, a pueblo "founded by
the Pima who came with Cabeza de Vaca
and his companions on that famous ex-
pedition which gave rise to the stor}r of
the Queen of Quiviraand the Seven Cities.
Settled on the shore of the river [Sina-
loa], they received in after times a goodly
numlxir of their compatriots who, drawn
by the fame of the missionaries before
the latter reached their country, placed
themselves in the way of receiving Chris-
tianity. They si)eak the Pima and gen-
erally the Mexican, being also well ac-
customeil to the Castilian tongue."
Rackets, etc., Used in Ball Play.
a, Iroquois; h, Passamaouoodv ;
<•, CHippewA; f/, Cherokee
128
BAMOM BANNER STONES
[B. A.'B.
Bamo«.~Oabeza de Vaca, Rel. (1529), Smith
trans., 226, 1871. Baymoa.— Alegre, Hist. Ck>mp.
Jesus, I, 340, 1841. La Conoepoion Bamoa.— Orozco
y Berra, Qeog., 333, 1864.
Bamom ( * sal t water ' ) . A former Maidu
village at the site of the present Shingle,
Eldorado co., Cal. (r. b. d.)
Banamiohi. A pueblo of the Teguima
Opata and the seat of a Spanish mission
in 1639; situated below Arizpe, on the
Rio Sonora, Sonora, Mexico; pop. 338
in 1678, 127 in 1730. Not to be con-
founded with Remedios, q. v.
Banamiohe. — Hrdlic^ka in Am. Anthrop., vi, 72,
1904. Banamiohi.— Rivera (1730) quotea by Ban-
croft, No. Mex. States, i, 514, 1884. Banamita.—
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 343, 1864. Nuestra Senora
de lo8 BemedioB de JBeramitzi. — Ibid. Bemedios
Banamiohi.— Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th
8., Ill, 372, 1857.
Band that Don*t Cook. A band of Yank-
ton Sioux under Smutty Bear (Matosa-
hitchiay). — Culbertson in Smithson.
Rep. 1850, 141, 1851.
Band that Eats no Oeese. A band of
Yankton Sioux under Padaniapapi. —
Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 141,
1851.
Band that Wishes the Life. A band of
Yaiiktonai Sioux of which Black Catfish
was the principal chief in 1856. — H. R.
Ex. Doc. 130, 34th Cong., Ist sess., 7, 1856.
Bankalachi (Yokuts name). A small
Shoshonean tribe on upper Deer cr.,
which drains into Tulare lake, s. Cal.
With the Tubatnlabal they
form one of the four major
linguistic divisions of the
family. Their own name is
unknown, (a. l. k.)
Bongalaatshi.— Hoffman in Proc.
Am. Philos. Soc., xxiil, 301, 1886.
Banner stones. A name
applied to a group of pre-
historic objects of polished
stone, which, for lack of defi-
nite infonnation ae to their
use, are assigned to the prob-
lematical class ( see Problem-
atical objects) . Their form is
exceedingly varied, but cer-
tain fundamental features of
their shape are practically
unvarying, and are of such a
nature as to suggest the use
of the term** banner stones" •
in classifying them. These
features are the axial perfo-
rations and the extension of
the body or midrib into two
WAHo, siKjQESTiMG wiug-Hke projectloHS. Of
MANNER OF usrNG ^^i^ varlous foHHS the most
BANNER STONES. . • I • xU a 1 • L i
(mooney) typical is that which suggests
a two-bladed ax, the blades
passing on the one hand from the type in to
pick- like points, and on the other into
broad wings, suggesting those of the bird or
butterfly. The name ** butterfly stones'*
is sometimes auplied to the latter variety.
In some of their features these stones are
Sioux ceremonial
related to pierced tablets, and in others,
respectively, to boat stones, bird stones,
spade stones, tubes (see articles on these
several topics), and plat-
form pipes, and there
can be little doubt that
all of these classes of ob-
jects were related to one
another in symbolism
or use. Nothing is defi-
nitely known, however,
of the particular signifi- ^^^^<^' 'o*'* ('-)
cance attached to them, or of the manner
of their use, save by inference from their
form and the known customs of the
tribes. It appears probable, from the
presence of the perforations, that they
Quartzite; Illinois '
(1-6)
Syenite; DiSTfiicT of Columbia
(1-)
were mounted for use on a staff, on a
handle as a ceremonial weapon, or on the
stem of a calumet, but the appearance of
similar winged forms as parts of the head-
BANDED SLATE; Canada; i-«.
(boyls)
Banded Slate; Ohio (i-«)
BANDED SLATE; OHIO
dress in sheet-copper figures from Georgia
mounds (see Copper) suggests connection
with the headdress.
These objects are usually made of varie-
ties of stone selected for their fine
grain and pleasing color, and are
carefully shaped and finished. In
Florida, and perhaps elsewhere,
examples made of shell are found.
The perforation is cylindrical,
and is bored with great precision
longitudinally through the thick
portion or midrib, which may
symbolically represent the body
of a bird. Numerous unfinished
specimens are found, some of which, partly
bored, show the depressed ring and ele-
vated core that result from the use of the
tubular drill. They are found in burial
mounds and on formerly inhabited sites"
generally, and were probably as a class
the outgrowth of the remarkable culture
development which accompanied and
resulted in the construction of the great
earthworks of the Mississippi valley.
BULL. 30]
BANNOCK
129
For record of discovery and illustra-
tions of banner stones see especially Boyle,
Prim. Man in Ontario, 1895;
Fowke(l) in 13th Rep. B.
A. E., 1896, (2) Archfeol.
Hist. Ohio, 1902; Moore,
various memoirs in Jour.
Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.,1894-
1905; Moorehead, Prehist.
Implp., 1900; Rau in Smith-
son. Cont., XII, 1876; Read,
Rep. Ohio Centen. Man-
agers, 1877; Squier and
Davis in Smithson. Cont., i, 1848; Thomas
in 12th Rep. B. A. K., 1894. (w. ii. h.)
Bannock ( from PanuiCi, their own name) .
A Shoshonean tril)e whose habitat pre-
vious to beinj? gathered on reservations
can not be definitely outlined. There
were two j^eographic divisions, ])ut refer-
Related Form with
Single Wing and
Oval PERFORATION.
Banded Slate ;
Michigan (i-«)
WA8TAWANA— 8AN NOCK
ences to the Bannock do not always
note this distinction. The home of the
chief division appears to have been s. e.
Idaho, whence they ranged into w. Wyo-
ming. The country actually claimed
by the chief of this southern division,
which seems to have been recognized by
the treaty of Ft Brideer, July 3, 1868, lay
between lat. 42° and 45°, and between
long. 113° and the main chain of the
Rocky mts. It separated the Wihinasht
Shoshoni of w. Idaho from the so-called
Washaki band of Shoshoni of w. Wyoming.
They were found in this region in 1859,
and they asserted that this had been
their home in the past. Bridger (Ind.
Aff. Rep., 363, 1859) had known them in
this region as early as 1829. Bonneville
Bull. 30—05 ^9
found them in 1833 on Portneuf r., imme-
diately N. of the present Ft Hall res.
Many of this division affiliated with
the Washaki Shoshoni, and by 1859 had
extensively intermarried with them. Ft
Hall res. was set apart by Executive
order in 1869, and 600 Bannock, in addi-
tion to a large number of Shoshoni, con-
sented to remain u]>on it. Most of them
soon wandered away, however, and as late
as 1874 an appropriation was made to en-
able the Bannock and Shoshoni scattered
in 8. E. Idaho to l>e moved to the reserva-
tion. The Bannock at Ft Hall were said
to number 422 in 1885. The northern
division was found by Gov. Stevens in
1853 (Pac. K. K. Rep., i, 329, 1855) living
on Salmon r. in e. Idaho. I^ewis and
Clarly, who passed through the country
of this N. division in 1805, may have in-
cUided them under the generaf term Sho-
shoni, unless, as is most likely, these are
the Broken Moccasin Indians thev men-
tion (Expd., Cones ed., ii, 523, 1893). In
all probability these Salmon River Ban-
nock had recently crossed the mountains
from the eastward owing to pressure of
the Siksika, since they claimed as their
territory s. w. Montana, including the
rich areas in which are situated Virginia
Citv, Bozeman, and other towns (Ind.
Aff'. Rep., 289, 1869). Stevens (1853)
states that they had been more than deci-
mated by the ravages of smallpox and
the inroads of the Siksika. It is proba-
ble that at no distant time in the past,
perhaps before thev ha<l acquired horses,
the various groups of the entire Bannock
tril)e were united in one locality in s. e.
Idaho, where they were neighbors of the
Shoshoni proper, but their language is
divergent from the latter. The Bannock
were a widely roving tribe, a character-
istic which favored their dispersal and
separation into groups. Both the men
and the women are well developed; and
although Shoshonean in language, in
physical characters the Bannock resem-
ole more closely the Shahaptian Nez
Perces than other Shoshonean Indians.
Kroeber reports that the language of the
Fort Hall Bannock connects them closer
with the I'te than with any other Sho-
shonean trilje. At the same time Powell
and Mooney report that the tribes of w.
Nevada consi<lerthe Bannock very nearly
related to themselves.
The loss of hunting lands, the diminu-
tion of the bison herds, and the failure of
the Government to render timely relief
led to a Bannock outbreak in 18*78, the
trouble having been of long standing.
During theexciting times of the Nez Perc^
war the Bannock were forced to remain on
their inhospitable reservation, to face the
continued encroachment of the whites,
and to subsist on goods provided from an
130
BANTAM BARK
[B. A. E.
appropriation amounting to 2J cents per
capita per diem. During the summer a
drunken Indian of the tribe shot and
wounded two teamsters; the excitement
andbitterfeelingcausedbyhisarrest, Nov.
23, 1877, resulted in the killing of an
agency employee. Troops were called for,
and the murderer was pursued, captured,
tried, and executed. This episode so in-
creased the excitement of the Indians
that, fearing what was assumed to be
threatening demonstrations, the troops
surrounded and captured two Bannock
camps in Jan., 1878; but most of the In-
dians were afterward released. On ac-
count of insufficient food the Bannock
left the reservation in the spring and went
to Camas prairie, where they killed sev-
eral settlers. A vigorous campaign under
Gen. Howard resulted in the capture of
about 1,000 of them in August, and the
outbreak came to an end after a fight on
Sept. 5, at Clark's ford, where 20 Bannock
lodges were attacked and all the women
and children killed.
Bridger states that when he first knew
them (about 1829) the southern Bannock
numbered 1,200 lodges, indicating a popu-
lation of about 8,000. In 1869 they were
estimated as not exceeding 500, and this
number was probably an overestimate as
their lodges numbered but 50, indicating a
population of about 350. In 1901 the tribe
numbered 513, so intermixed, however,
with the Shoshoni that no attempt is made
to enumerate them separately. All the
Bannock except 92 under Lemhi agency
are gathered on Ft Hall res. , Idaho. Prac-
tically nothing is known of the former
organization of the Bannock or of their
divisions. The names of four divisions
were obtained by Hoffman, and a fifth is
given by Schoolcraft. These are Kut-
shundika, or Buffalo -eaters; Penointi-
kara, or Honey-eaters; Shohopanaiti, or
Cottonwood Bannock; Yambadika, or
Root -eaters; Waradika, or Rye- grass-
seed-eaters, (h. w. h. c. t.)
Banrnc— Smet, Letters, 129, 1843. Ban-ack».— For-
ney in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 213, 1858. Banai'ti.— Hoff-
man in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc, xxiii, 298, 1886
(Shoshoni name). Banini.— Gatschet, Chippewa
MS., B. A. E. (Chippewa name). Ban-at-tee*.—
Ross, Fur Hunters, i, 249, 1855. Banax.— Mullan
in Pae. R. R. Rep., i, 329, 1855. Bannach Snakes.—
Wallen in H. R. Ex. Doc. 65, 36th Cong., Ist sess.,
223, 1860. Bannacks.— Irving, Rocky Mts., i, 71,
1837. Banneck.— Ibid., 159. Ban'-ni-ta.— Stuart,
• Montana, 25, 1866. Bonaoka.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, vi, 697, 1857. Bonak.— Faraham, Travels,
76, 1843. Bonaroh Digjera.— Meek in H. R. Ex.
Doc. 76, 30th Cong., Ist sess., 10, 1848. Bonarcbs.—
Ibid. Bonarka.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 1, 31st Cong., 2d
sess., 198, 1850. Bonnaoks. -Dennison in Ind. Aff.
Rep., 371, 1857. Bonnaka.— Hale, Ethnog. and Phi-
lol. , 218, 1846. Boimax. —Parker, Jour. , map, 1842.
Bonooha.— Prichard, Phys. Hist., v, 430, 1847. Boo-
naeka.— Irving, Astoria^ map, 1849. Broken-Moc-
caain.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., 1, 330, 1842 (prob-
ably the Bannock). Diggers.— Many authors.
Moooaain-with-Holas.— Lewis and Clark, op. cit.
Ogoiae.— Oiorda, Calispel Diet., i, 439, 1877 (Calis-
pelname). Panack.— Townsend, Nar., 75, 1839.
Paaai'tit. —Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc.,
xxni, 299 1886 (own name). Fanak.— Oebow,
Snake Vocab., B. A. E. (Shoshoni name). Tin-
aaht— Hale, op. cit. Pannaoks. —Lander in Sen.
Ex.Doc. 42,36th Cong.,l8tsess.,121,1860. Pannah.—
Ibid. Pannakeea. — Ibid. Paonaques. — Wyeth
(1848) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 206, 1851.
Pohaa.— Robertson (1846) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,30th
Cong., Ist sess., 9, 1848. Ponaoka.— Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, vi, 697, 1857. Ponadiita.— Ibid., i, 521,
1863. Ponaahta.— Lane (1849) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52,
31st Cong. , Ist sess. , 169. 1850. Pcttiahta B«naeka. —
Schoolcraft, op. cit., vi, 701, 1857. P&nt&rii.—
Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., ii, Ixxix, 1823 (Sho-
shoni name). Punashly.— Fremont, Geog. Mem.
Upper Cal., map, 1848. Pun-naks.— Bonner, Life
of Beckwourth, 93, 1856. Bobber Indians.— Ross,
Fur Hunters, i, 249, 1855. Tannockes. — Audouard,
Far West, 182. 1869. TTth-ke-we-ah.— Crow MS.
vocab., B. A. E. (Crow name).
Bantam. According to Trumbull , a for-
mer village at Litchfield, Litchfield co.,
Conn. Part of the Indians there were
converted by the Mora\nan missionaries
about 1742-45, and followed them to Beth-
lehem, Pa., where many died, and the
remnant returned to Scaticook, in Kent
CO., Conn.
Bantom.— Trumbull, Conn., ii, 82, 1818.
Bantas. A village of the Cholovone
E. of the San Joaquin and n. of the Tuol-
umne r., Cal. — Knart, Cholovone MS.,
B. A. E.. 1880.
Baqaeachic (hdkd 'bamboo reed,' chik
'place of.'— Lumholtz). A Tarahumare
settlement on or near the Rio Conchos,
lat. 27° 4(K, long. 106° 50^, Chihuahua,
Mexico.
Baqaeachic. — Lumholtz, Unknown Mex., i, 320,
1902. Baquiachic— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 323, 1864.
Baqniariohio. A Tarahumare settle-
ment on or near a branch of the s. tribu-
tary of the Rio Conchos, lat. 26° 55^, long..
106° 30^, Chihuahua, Mexico. —Orozco y
Berra, Geog., 322, 1864.
Baqaigopa ( baqui-go * cane ' ; Buelnasays
the name means 'plain of the canes').
A former Opata village on the upper
Yaqui, locally known as the Rio Babispe,
E. of Guachinera, n. e. Sonora, Mexico.
Its abandonment was the result of attacks
by . Indians of w. Chihuahua, the inhab-
itants finally settling at Guachinera.
See Bdtesopa. ( f. w. h. )
Bacayopa.— Buelna. Pereg. Aztecas, 123, 1892.
Baqmgopa.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pap., iii, 59,
64, 1890; IV, 518, 1892.
Bar-du-de-cleimy. See Xakaidoklini.
Bark. Among the resources of nature
utilized by the tribes of North America
bark was' of prime importance. It was
stripped from trees at the right season by
hackmg all around and taking it off in
sheets of desired length . The inner bark
of cedar, elm, and other trees was in some
localities torn into strips, shredded,
twisted, and spun or woven. The bark of
wild flax (Apocynum) and the Asclepias
were made into soft textiles. Bark had
a multitude of functions. In connection
with the most important of wants, the
necessity for food, it supplied many tribes
with an article of diet in the spring, their
BULL. 30]
BARK
131
Eskimo Bark Basket with Buckskin top
AND Draw-string, (turner)
period of greatest need. The name Adi-
rondack, signifying *they eat trees,' was
applied by the Mohawk to t^rtain Al-
gonquian tribes of Canada in allusion to
their custom of
eating bark.
The N. Pacific
and pome S. W.
tribes made
cakes of the soft
inner bark of
thehemlockand
spruce; those
living about the
great lakes
chewed that of
.the slippery
ehn, while many
Indians chewe<l
thegum that ex-
uded from trees.
Drink was made from bark by the Arap-
aho, Winnebago, and Mescaleros. Wil-
low bark and other kinds were smoked
in pipes with or in-
steaa of tobacco,
and the juices of
barks were em-
ployeil in medi-
cine.
For gathering,
carrying, garner-
ing, preparing,
and serving food,
l)ark of birch, elm,
pine, and other
trtH^s was so handy
as todiscouragethe
potter's art among nonsedentary tril)es.
It was wrought into yarn, twine, rope,
wallets, baskets, mats, canoes, cookmg
pots for hot stones, dishes for serving, ves-
sels for storing, and many textile utensils
connected with
the consumption
of food in ordi-
nary and in so-
cial life. Both
men and women
were food gath-
erers, and thus
both sexes were
refined through
this material;
but preparing
and serving were
women's arts,
and here bark
aided in devel-
oping their skill
and intelligence.
'Habitations in Canada, e. U'lited States,
and 8. E. Alaska often had roofs and sides
of bark, whole or prepared. The conical
house, near kin of the tipi, was fre-
(^uently covered with this material. Mat-
ting was made use of for floors, beds, and
partitions. Trays and boxes, receptacles
of myriad shapes, could be formed by
merely bending large sheets and sewing or
MCNOMiNEE Bark Bucket.
( Hoffman)
CHIPPEWA BIRCH-BARK WINNOWING TRAY. (jENKs)
pimply tying the joints. Bast could be
pounded and woven into robes and blan-
kets. The Canadian and Alaskan tribes
ceremonial Use of Bark
collar; Kwakiutl.
(boas)
CHIPPEWA BARK HOUSE.
CHIPPEWA FETISH CASE OF BARK. ( HOFFMAN )
carried their children in cradles of birch
bark, while on the Pacific coast infants
were borne in wooden cradles or baskets
of woven bark on beds of the bast shredded,
their foreheads being of-
ten flattened by means of
pads of the same material.
In the S. W. the baby-
!)oard had a cover of mat-
ting. Among the Iro-
(|UoiH the dead were
buried in coflins of bark.
Clothing of bark was
made chiefly from the in-
ner portion, which was
Htrip]>ed into ribl)ons, as
for ix»tticoats in the S. W. ,
shredded and fringed, as
in the cellar- bark coun-
try, where it was also woven intogannents,
or twisted for the warp in weaving articles
of dress, with woof from other materials.
Dyes were derived from bark and certain
kinds alpo lent
themselves to
embroidery with
quills and over-
laying in bas-
ketry. Bark was
also the mat<*rial
of slow-matches
and torches,
serve<l as pad-
ding for the car-
rier's head and
back and as his
wrapping mate-
rial, and fur-
nished strings,
(GILF.LLAN) J^P^^ ^^^ bagS
for his wooden
canoes. The hunter made all sorts of
apparatus from bark, even his bow-
string. The fisher wrought implements
out of it and poisoned fish with its
juices. The beginnings of writing in somei
localities were favored by bark, and car-
132
BARNARD BASKETRY
[b. a. e.
topraphv, winter counts, medical formu-
la**, and tribal history were inscribed
thereon. Finally it comes into the service
of ceremony and' religion. Such a series
of masks an<l dance regalia as Boas and
others foun<l
among the ^j*%^;.
K wak iut 1 il 1 us- "^ ^ ■ "^
t rates how
obligingly
bark len<ls
itself to c(k">I)-
erative activi-
ties, whether
inainusenient.
social func-
tions, or adora-
tion of the
spirit world.
There are also
rites connectcfl
withgathering
and working
bark. See
Boas in Nat.
^I u s . Rep.
1895, 1897; in
Hoffman in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896;
Holmesin;idand 18th Reps.B.A.E., 1884,
1896; Jenks in 19th
Rep. B. A. K., 1900;
Jones in Smithson.
Rep. 1867, 1872; Ma-
CEREMONIAL COLLAR OF BARK; KWAKIUTL.
(boas)
CEREMONIAL HEAD RINGS OF BARK ; KWAKIUTL. (bOAS)
son (1) in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1887, 1889, (2)
ibid., 1894, 1896, (8) ibid., 1902, 1904;
Niblack, ibid, 1888, 1890; Turner in 11th
Rep. B. A. E., 1894. (o. t. m.)
Barnard. See Timjwoclwe Bamaril.
Barrancas ( Ijih J^drmnnts, Span. : * the
ravines ' ). Formerly a small village, ap-
parently of the }*iros, on the Rio Grande,
near Socorro, N. Mex; evidently aban-
doned during the Pueblo revolt of 1680.
La Barrancas.— Kilchin, map N. A., 1787. Las
Baranoas.— D'Anvillc, map N. A.. Bolton's ed.,
1752. Las Barrancas.— Davis, Span. Conq. New
Mex., 314, 18r>9.
Basalt. A widely variable class of lavas
of a prevailing dark color and, in the com-
pact varieties, with a dull conchoidal frac-
ture. The rock is often more or less pu-
miceous and scoriaceous. The larger su-
perficial flows of the W. are often known
as ' ' the lava be<ls. ' ' The basalts occur in
large IxKlies in many jmrts of the coun-
try, especially in the far W., and were
i extensively used by the aborigines for im-
plements and utensils, (w. h. h.)
Basaseaohic. A Tarahu mare settlement
of Chihuahua, Mexico; definite locality
unknown. — Orozco y Berra, Geog., 323,
1864.
Basawanena (Bd^satmn^^na^ * wood-
lodge men ' ) . Formerly a distinct though
cognate tribe that made war on the Arap-
aho (q. v.), but with whom they have
been incorporated for 150 years. About
100 are still recognized in' the northern
and a few in tne southern group. —
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E,, 955, 1896.
Basdecheshni ( ' those who do not split
the buffalo ' ). A band or division of the
Sisseton Sioux.
Basdeie-sni.— Dorsev in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217,
1897. Basdetoe-cni.— Ibid.
Baserac ('place where the water is
seen,' because up to this point the river
is so deep among the mountains that in
most places it is invisible. — Rudo Ensa-
yo). An Opata pueblo, and the seat of
a Spanish mission founded in 1645, on an
E. branch of Rio de Batepito, a tributary
of the Yaqui, in n. e. Sonora, Mexico.
Population 399 in 1678, 839 in 1730.
There are many descendants of the Opata
in the modern town, but only a few of
them speak their native tongue. ( f. w. h. )
Baoerac.— Orozco y Berra. Geoj?.. 343, 1864. Base-
rac.—Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 527, 1892.
Baseraca.— Mange (ca. 1700) quoted by Bancroft,
No. Mex. States, i. 238. 1884. Santo Maria Baoe-
raca.— Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s.,in,
366, 1857. Santa Karia Vaseraoa.— Rud<» Ensayo
(1762). Guiteras transl., 217, 1894. Sto Maria de
tJasaraca.— Rivera, Dinrio, le^. 1,444, 1736. Vaoe-
raoa.— Kino et al. in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., i,
401, 1856.
Basigochic ( * sand bank, ' * flat ' ) . A
Tarahumare rancheria near Achyarachki,
Chihuahua, Mexico.— Cubas, Mexico, 74,
1876.
Basiroa. A Nevome division, doubtless
in s. central Sonora, Mexico; definite lo-
cality unknown. The name is probably
that of their settlement. — Orozco y Berra,
Geog., 58, 1864.
Basketry. Basketry, including wat-
tling, matting, and bagging, may be de-
fined as the primi-
tive textile art. Its
materials include
nearly the whole
series of North
American textile
plants, and the In-
dian women ex-
plored the tribal
nabitat for the best.
Constant digging in
the same favorite
spot for roots and
the clearing away of useless plants about
the chosen stems constituted a species of
I>rimitive agriculture. Thev knew the
time and seasons for gathering, how to
harvest, dry, preserve, and prepare the
tough and pliable parts for use and to re-
ject the brittle, and in what way to com-
iROQUOtS WOMAN WEAVING A BAS-
KET, (from lapitau)
BULL. 30]
BASKETRY
133
bine different plants with a view to the
union of beauty ami strength in the prod-
uct. The tools and apparatus of the bas-
ket maker, who
7.
was nearl y al ways
a woman, were
most skilful fin-
gers, aided by fin-
ger nails for gauge,
teeth for a third
hand or for nip-
]»tr.'?,a8tone knife,
a bone awl, and
polishers of shell
or gritty stone.
She knew a multitude of dyes, and in some
instances the bark was chewetl and the
splint drawn between the lips. In later
'" i/B
Three-Strano Braiding
g h i
CR068-SECTI0N6 OF VARIETIES OF COILED BASKETRY. a,
COILED, WITHOUT FOUNDATION : b, SIMPLE INTERLOCKING
coils; C, SINGLE-ROD FOUNDATION; rf, TWO-ROD FOUNDA-
TION; e, ROD-AND-8PUNT FOUNDATION; /, TWO-ROO-ANO-
SPLINT foundation; g, THREE-ROD FOUNDATION; h, SPLINT
foundation; /, grass-coil* foundation
times knives, awls, scissors, and other
utensils and tools of steel were added.
In its technic basketry is divided into two
species — woven and coiled. Woven bas-
HuPA Food tray ( i-i»
ketry has warp and weft, and lemls up to
loom work in softer materials. Of this
species there are the following varietic^s:
Checker-
work, i u
which the
warp and
weft pass
over and
under < me
another
singly and are indistinguishable; twilled
work, in which each element of the weft
passes over and then un<ler two or more
warp ch^ment^J, ]>roducing by varying
width and
colorant'iid-
less varietv
of effects;
wickiTwork,
in which the
warj) of one
larger nr I wo
or more
smaller ele-
ments is in-
flexible,an(l
the luMiding
is done in „op, w...owtrav (,. .
t h e w (M t ;
wrapped work, wherein the warp is not
fiexe<l, ami the weft in pa.s«ing a war])
element is wrapped once arounil it, varied
by (Irawing botli war]) and weft tight so
as to form half of
a s<juare knot;
twined work, in
which the warp is
not bent and the
weft is nmde uj) of
two or mon* ele-
ments, one of them
})assing behind each
war]) element as the
weaving progresses.
Of this last variety
there are niany styles — i>lain twined,
twilled twined, crossed or divided warj)
with twined work, wra]>])e<l, or bird-cage
weaving, three-strand twining after sev-
eral methods,
and three-stran(l . j
braid. Coiled
basketry is not
weaving, but sew- ^-^ff^
ing, and leads up
to point lace. The
work is done by
eewing or whip-
ping together, m
a flat or ascending coil, a continuous
foundation of rod, s|)lint, shrtHide<l fil)er,
or grass, and it receives various names
from the kinds of foundation em])loyed
and the manner of a])plying the stitches;
or the sewing may form genuine lace
work of interlocking stitches without
HUPA STORAGE BASKET <
HuPA CARRYING Basket
(,-ao)
134
BASKETRY
[b. a.
foundation. In coiled work in which a
foundation is used the interlocking stitch-
es pass either above, through, or quite
under the foundation. Of coiled basketry
there are the following
varieties: Coiled work
without foundation;
simple interlocking
coils with foundation;
single-rod foundation;
two-rod foundation;
rod-and-splint founda-
tion; two-rod-and-
splint foundation;
three-rod foundation;
splint foundation;
grass-coil foundation; hop* gathering basket, u
and Fuegian stitches, 'nche.h«h
identical with the buttonhole stitch. Bv
using choice materials, or by adding pitch
or other resinous substance, baskets were
FORMS or BASKETRY WEAVINO. a, CHECKER; b TWILLED; o,
wicker; rf, wrapped; e, twined; /, cross-warp twined,
g, WRAPPED TWINED; fc, IMBRICATE
made water-tight for holding or carrying
water for cooking.
The chief use of baskets is as recep-
tacles, hence everv activity of the In-
dians was associated with this art. Basket
work was employed, moreover, in fences,
game drives, weirs, houses, shields, cloth-
ing, cradles, for harvesting, and for the
disposal of the dead. This art is inter-
esUng, not only on account of the tech-
nical processes' em ployed, the great deli-
cacy of technic, and the infinite number
of purposes that it serves, but on account
of the ornamentation, which is effected
by dyeing, using materials of different
colors, overlaying, beading, and plaiting,
besides great variety in fonn and technic.
This is always added in connection with
the weaving or
sewing, and is fur-
ther increased
with decorative
beads, shells, and
feathers. In
fonns basketry
varies from flat
wattling, as in
gambling and
bread plaques,
through trays,
Ik) wis, pots, cones,
jars, and cylin-
ders, to the ex-
quisite California
art work. The
geometric forms
^^'
Paiute Qatherino Basket (i-ib)
of decussations and
stitches gave a mosaic or conventional ap-
pearance to all decoration. The motives
m ornamentation were various. No doubt
a sense for beauty in articles of use and a
desire to awaken admiration and envy in
others were uppermost. Imitation of
pretty objects in nature, such as snake
skins, and designs used by other tribes,
were naturally suggested. Such designs
pass over into the realms of symbolism
and religion. This is now alive and in
full vigor among
the Hopi of Ari-
zona. The Indian
women have left
the best witness of
what they could
do in handiwork
and expression in
their basketry.
In E. United States
almost all of the
old-fashioned
methods of basket
making have
passed away, but
by taking impressions of pottery Holmes
has l)een able to reconstruct the ancient
processes, showing that they did not
differ in the least from those now extant
in the tribes w. of the Rocky mts. In
the southern states the existence of plia-
ble cane made possible twilled weaving,
which may still be found among the
Cherokee and the tribes of Louisiana.
The Athapascan tribes in the interior of
Alaska made coiled basketry from the
roots of evergreen trees. The Eskimo
Arikara Carrying basket (i-'
BULL. 30]
BA80N0PA BATISTA
135
TwiNEo Basket with Deer-
skin Top and Draw-string
about Bering str. manufactured lK>th
woven mattings and wallets and coiled
basketry of pliable grass. The Aleutian
islanders are now among the most refined
artisans in twined work. South of them
the Tlingit and the llaida also prac-
tise twinSi work only.
From British Colum-
bia, beginning with the
Salishan tribes, south-
ward to the borders of
Mexico, the greatest
variety of basket mak-
ing in every style of
weaving is practised.
Consult Mason, Abo-
riginal American Bas-
ketry, Rep. Nat. Mus.
1902, 1904, and the bil)-
liography therein; also
Barrett in Am. Anthrop., vii, no. 4, 1905;
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvii,
pt. 1, 1902; Kroeber in Tniv. Cal. Publ., ii,
1905; Goddard, ibid; Willoughby in Am.
Anthrop., vii, no. 1, 1905. See Art, Arts
and Industries, ]Ve(iring. (o. t. m. )
Basonopa. A Tepehuane pueblo in the
SierraMadre, <m the headwaters of the Rio
del Fuerte, s. w. Chihuahua, Mexico. —
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 324, 1864.
Basosnma. A rancheria, seemingly of
the Sobaipuri, 12 Sp. leagues e. of the mis-
sion of Suamca, probably in the vicinity
of the 8. l)oun(lary of Arizona, s. of Ft
Huachu(«; visited bv Kino and Mange in
1697.
San Joaquin de Basosuma. — Kino (1697) in Doc.
Hist. Mex..4th s., i. 270, 18.%. 8. Joaquin.— Bor
nal (1697) quoted bv Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex.,
856, 1889.
Basotntoan. Apparently a former ran-
cheria of the Papago, visited by Kino in
1701; situated on the Rio Salado, 28 m.
below Sonoita, x. w. Sonora, Mexico.
Basotuoaa.— Kino (1701) quoted by Bancroft, No.
Mex. State;*, i, 495. 1886. J. Jose Ramos Ayodsu-
dao.— Ibid.
Basque influence. The Basque fisher-
men who frequented the fishing grounds
of the N. E. Atlantic in the 16th and
17th centuries influenced to some ex-
tent the Indians of New P'rance and
Acadia. But such influence was onlv of
a temporary character, and the relations
of the Indians with the Bastjues were
only such as naturally came from the
industry pursued by the latter. Les-
carbot (Hist. Nouv. France, 695, 1612)
states that a sort of jargon had arisen
between the French and Basque fisher-
men and traders and the Indians, in
which * * a good deal of Basque was mixed, ' '
but does not give examples of it. (See
Reade, The Baajues in North America, in
Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, 1888, sec. ii, pp.
21-39.) Attempts have l)een made to
detect pre-Columbian influences through
allegeil lexical and other resemblances
between Basque and Indian languages,
but without success. ( a. 'f. c. )
Bastita. A Huichol rancheria and re-
ligious place, containing a temple; situ-
ated alx>ut 12 m. s. w. of San Andres
Coamiata, q. v. — Lumholtz, Unknown
Mex., Ill, 16, 72, map, 1902.
Baston. La Salle in 1681 speaks of the
Indians of Baston, by which he means
those adjacent to Boston and that part of
New P:ngland.— La Salle (1681) in Mar-
gry, Wc, II, 148, 1877.
Batacosa. A Mayo settlement on a
small independent stream w. of the Rio
<le los Ce<lro8, an arm of the Rio Mayo,
8. w. Scmora, Mexico.
San Bartolome Batacosa. — Orozco v Berra, GeofC-.
:«6, 1864.
Batawat. A division of the Wishosk
formerlv living a])out the lower course of
^lad r.,* N. w. Cal. In 1851 McKee said
of them: '' Tliis band has been permitted
to live at their ])resent rancheria only
upon condition that they confine them-
selves to the innnediate neighborhood of
the mouth of the river, and not come
into the town."
Mad river Indians.— McKee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,
32d Cong., spec, se&s., 155. 1853. Pat-a-wat.—
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ni, 96, 1877.
Batepito ( * where the water turns' (Rudo
Ensayo) , <loubtless in allusion to the bend
of the river). An Opata pueblo in n. w.
vSonora, Mexico, about lat. 81°, on the
upper waters of the Rio Babispe, a tribu-
tary of the Rio Yaqui.
Batepito.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 343, 1864. Vate-
pito.— Rudo Ensayo (1762), Guiteras trans.. 219,
1894.
Bateqai ('a well.'— Buelna). Appar-
ently a rancheria of the Soba or the Papago
proper; plact^d e. of the Rio Altar in n. w.
Sonora, Mexico, on early Spanish maps,
as that of Kino (1701) in Bancroft, No.
Mex. States, i, 499, 1884. Not to be con-
founded with the Tadeo Baqui of the
Maricopa, which l)ears also a similar
name. (f. w. h.)
Batesopa. A former Opata village cm
the Rio Babispe, k. of Guachinera, in
N. E. Sonora, Mexico. Rei)eate<lly at-
tacked by Indians from Chihuahua, it
was abandoneil, it^ inhabitants finally
settling at Guachinera. — Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Pap., in, 59, 1890; iv, 519,
1892. See Baqidgopa,
Bat House. A ruined pueblo of the
Hopi, probably so named from its hav-
ing been built and occupied by the
Bat clan; situated on the n. w. side of
Jeditoh valley, n. e. Xriz., on part of
the mesa occupied by the Horn House.
See 8th Rep. B. A. E., 52, 1891.
Batista (Span. : Bautista'f) Mentioned
as one of the former two principal vil-
lages of the Koasati, on lower Trinity r.,
Tex. — Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc.
Ix)nd., II, 282, 1850.
136
BATNI BATZA
[b. a. b.
Batni (a gourd vessel in which sacred
water is carried; also the name of a
spring where sacrificial offerings are de-
posit^.—Fewkes). According to Ste-
phen the site of the first pueblo built by
the Snake people of the Hopi; situated
in Tusayan, n. e. Ariz., but the exact
location is known only to the Indians.
It is held as a place of votive offerings
during the ceremonv of the Snake dance.
Batni.— Stephen in 8th *kep. B. A. E., 18, 1891.
Baton Roage ( French transl. of Choctaw
Uu-uma 'red pole.' — Gatschet). A point
on the high banks of the Mississippi, in
Louisiana, at which the natives planted
a painted pole to mark the boundary be-
tween the Bayogoula below and the Hu-
ma who extended for 30 leagues above.
See P^nicaut in Margry, D^c, v, 395, 1883.
The place is now occupied by the capital
of Louisiana. See Red Stick.
Batons. As emblems of authority or
rank, batons were in common use among
L r'1 —^ l—Jl.^l- .i.-...L^
HAIDA BATON REPRESENTINO EAGLE AND BEAVER. (nIBLACk)
the more advanced northern tribes, and
probably the most conspicuous modem
Cal., I, no. I, 1903; Niblack in Rep. Nat.
Mus. 1888, 1890; Powers in Cont. N. A,
BATON or DEERHORN, from an OHIO mound; 1-7. (cROMER
AND MACLEAN COLL. )
representatives are the carved wooden
batons of the Haida and other northwest-
ern tribes. Here they are
carried in the hands of chiefs,
shamans, and sung leaders on
state occasions, and are per-
mitted only to such person-
ages. Weapons of various
kinds were snnilarly used and
probably had kindred signifi-
cance. In prehistoric times
long knives of stone, master-
pieces of the chipping art,
seem to have been a favorite
form of ceremonial weapon,
and their use still continues
among some of the Pacific
slope tribes, especially in Cali-
fornia. Batons used m mark-
ing time are probably without
particular significance as em-
blems. Among tlieKwakiutl
and other tribes the club-
shaped batons, carved to rep-
resent various animals, are baton of flint,
used by the leaders in cere- irHRXoN) *
monial dances and serve for
beating time. Consult Boas in Rep. Nat.
Mus. 1895, 1897; Goddard in Publ. Univ.
KWAKIUTL BATON REPRESENTING A 8EA-LION.
(boas)
Ethnol., Ill, 1877; Rust and Kroeber in
Am. Anthrop. , vii, no. 4, 1905. See ClubSj
Knives, (w. n. h.)
ivory baton for beating time on a stick; eskimo.
(nelson)
Battnre aux Fifevres (French: * Malarial
flat'). One of four Dakota (probably
Mdewakantonwan) villages near St Pe-
ters, Minn., in 1826.— Minn. Hist. Soc.
Coll., I, 442, 1872.
Batncari (batuhue 'river,' cari 'house':
* houses in the river ' ; or bcUui 'dove,' and
cari: 'dove houses.' — Buelna). A sub-
division of the Cahita, speaking the Va-
coregue dialect and formerly subsisting
by hunting in the vicinity of a large la-
goon 3 leagues from A home, n. Sinaloa,
Mexico. They afterward united with
the A home people under the Jesuit mis-
sionaries ana abandoned their wandering
life— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 58, 322, 1864.
Batuearis. — Century Cyclopedia, 1894 (misprint).
Batuco ('shallow water.'— Och). A
former pueblo of the Eudeve division of
the Opata, on the Rio Oposura, a w.
branch of the Rio Yaqui, a league n. of
Santa Marfa Batuco, about lat. 29°
30^, Sonora, Mexico. It became the seat
of the Jesuit mission of San Javier
about 1629. Pop. 480 in 1678, 188 in
1730.
San Javier de Batuco.— Zapata (1678) in Doe.
Hist. Alex., 4th s., in. 357, 18.^7. S. FranoiMO
Javier Batuco.— Bancroft. No. Mex. States, i, 246,
1886. Vatuco.— Och { l756).Nachriehten. i, 72, 1809.
Batuco. A former pueblo of the Opata
on the Rio Oposura, a w. tributary of the
Yaqui, 8 leagues e. of San Jos^ Matape,
in Sonora, Mexico. It was apparently
the Batuco that was visited by Coronado's
army in 1540-42, and was the seat of the
Jesuit mission of Santa Marfa founded
in 1629. Population 428 in 1678, 212 in
1730.
Asuncion Batuco.- Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i,
246, 1884. Batuco.— Castafieda (1M6) in 14th Rep.
B. A. £., 537, 1896. Santa Maria Batuco.— Zapata
(1678) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., Ill, 356, 1857.
Sta Maria Tepuspe.— Doc. of 1730 cited by Ban-
croft, op. cit., 613 (same?).
Batza. A Koyukukhotana village on
Batzar., Alaska, long. 154°.
Batsakakat— Allen, Rep. on Alaska, 123, 1877.
BULL. 30]
BATZULNETAS BE AD WORK
137
BatzulnetaB. An Ahtena village near
upper Copper r., where the trail starts
forTanana r., Alaska; lat. 62° 58^ long.
145° 22' (post route map, 1903). Pop. 81
men, 10 women, and 15 children in 1885.
Batsttlneta't villaffe.— .\llen, Rep. on Alaska, 121,
1887.
Bauka. A former Maidu village on the
right bank of Feather r., near (iridley,
Butte CO., Cal. (r. b. d.)
Bogas.— Ind. Aflf. Rep., 124, 1850. Boka.— Powers
in Cent. N. A. Kthnol..ni,2«2,1877.Booku.— (^urtin,
MS. vocab.. B. A. E. 1885.
Bawiranaokiki ( ' red water place ' ) . A
Tarahumare rancheria in Chihuahua,
Mexico. — Lumholtz, inf'n, 1894.
Bayberry wax. A product of the bay-
berry, or wax myrtle (Myrica cerifera),
the method of extracting which was
learne<l from the Indians bv the New
England colonists whose* (descendants
probably still use it. It was esteemed
for the inanufacture of candles and tal-
low on account of its fragrance. See
Kasles in Coll. Mass. Hist. Soc, 2d ser.,
VIII, 252, 1819; Alice Morse P'arle, Customs
and Fashions of Old New England, 126,
1893. (A. F. c.)
Bay dn Noc. A Chippewa (?) ])and
mentione<l in the Detroit treatv of 1855
(U. S. Ind. Tn»atie.s, 614, 1873). They
probably live<l on Noquet bay of L.
Michigan, in upper Michigan.
^^Y9yoiila((/hoctaw : Bdynk-ukld 'bayou
people*). A Muskhogean tribe which in
1700 lived with the Mugulasha in a village
on the w. ])Rnk of the Mississippi, a])out64
leagues above its mouth and 30 leagues
below the Huma town. Lemovned' Iber-
ville (Margry, Dec, iv, 170^172, 1880)
gives a brief description of their village,
which he says contained 2 temples and 107
cabins; that a lire was kept constantly
burning in the temples, and near the
door were kept many figures of animals,
as the bear, wolf, birds, and in particular
the chouroiUwhi, or opossum, which ap-
peare<l to be a chief deity or image to
which offerings were made. At this time
they numl)ered 200 to 250 men, probably
including the Mugulasha. Not long after
the Hayogoula almost exterminated the
Mugulasha as the result of a dispute Ix'-
tween the chiefs of the two tribes, but
the former soon fell victims to a similar
act of treachery, since having received the
Tonica into their village in 1706, they
were surprised and almost all massacred
by their perfidious guests (I^ llarpe.
Jour. Hist. La., 98, 1831). Smallpox
destroyed most of the remainder, so
that by 1721 not a family was known to
exist (a s (» ('. T )
Bal>ayottla«.-Baucirvde8Lozi6re8. Vov., 241, 1802.
Baiagottla*.— de Saiivole (1700) in French. Hist.
Coll. La.. Ill, 224-240, 1851. Baiougonla.— Gravier
(1701) in Shea, Early Voyages, 150, 159, 1861. Baya-
gola.— Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. Bayaroubat.—
Jefferys, French Dom. Am., i, 147. 1761. Baya-.
goula«.—d' Iberville in French, Hist. Coll. La..
ir, 67. 1875. Baya-Ogoulaa.— Pt^nicaut (1703), ibid.,
n. s.. I, 85, note, 1869. Bayo^la.— Coxo, Caro-
lana, 7, 1741. Bayogoulaa.—d^ Iberville in Margry,
I)<5c., IV, 169. 1><80. Bayonne Ogoulaa.— Jefferys,
French, Dom. Am., i, 164, 1761. BayouoAgonlat.—
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, ni, 80, 1854. Bay-
ouc Ogoulaa.— Le Page du Pratz., La., i, 271, 1774.
Bayuglas.— N. V. Doc. Col. Hist.. Vli. 641, 18,56.
Bayou. A sluggish stream forming the
inlet or outlet of a lake or bay, or con-
necting two Ixxiies of water or a branch
of a river flowing through a delta. The
generally accepted etymology from the
French hoyaa 'gut', is' wrong (Chamber-
lain in Nation, lix, 381, 1894). Accord-
ing to Gatschet (Creek Migr., Leg., i, 113,
1884) the Choctaw word for a smaller
river, or a river forming part of a < elta,
is hdynk, and the word comes into Eng-
lish through the French, from this or a
closely related Muskhogean dialect. The
same word appears in another form in the
ho(jHe of such Louisiana and Mississippi
place-names as Boguechito, Boguefalala,
Hoguelusa, representing in a French form
the contracted hok, from hdyuk. ( a. f. r. )
Bayon Chicot (Creole French: chiroty
'snag, ' 'tree-stump' ). A former Choctaw
village s. of Cheneyvillc, St I^ndry par-
ish, 1^.
Bayacchito.— d'Iberville (1699) in Margry. DtV.,
IV. 155. 18K0. Bayou Chioo.— Claiborne (1808) in
Am. State Pap.. Ind. Aff.. i. 755, 1832.
Bayn. A former Maidu villageatSandy
gulch, Butte CO., Cal. It was located by
Powers on Feather r., an<l there may
possibly have been a second village of
the same name at that place, (r. b. d. )
Bai'-yu.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iir, 282,
1877. Bayu.— Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 100. 1891.
Biyous.— Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 420. 1874.
Bazhi. An Ikogmiut village on the
Yukon at the upper mouth of Innoko r.,
Alaska.
Bazhigagat.— Tikhmeiiief (1861) quoted by Baker,
(Jeog. Diet. Ala«<ka. 1901.
Beadwork. Attractive and precious
objects, i)erforatiMl usually through the
n'liddle and .strung for various purposes,
constitute a class of ornaments univer-
sally esteemed, which the Indians of
North America did not fail to develon.
Akin to l)eads, and scarcely separable
from them, were objects from the same
materials called |)i»ndant,**. They were
I)erforate<l near the end or edge ami hung,
on the person or on garments. All wen^
made from mineral, vegetal, or animal
substances, and after the discovery the
introduction of l)eads of glass and porce-
lain, as well as that of metal tools for mak-
ing the old varieties, greatly multiplied
their employment. Mineral substances
showing pretty colored or brilliant sur-
faces, from which beads were made, were
copper, hematite, all kinds of quartz, ser-
pentine, magnetite, slate, soapstone, tur-
quoise, encrinite sections, pottery, and, in
later times, silver and other metals, porce-
lain, and glass. They were of many sizes
and shapes. Among vegetal substances
138
BEADWORK
[B. A. S.
seeds and, especially along the southern
tier of states from Florida to California,
nuts were widely used for beads, and here
and there stems and roots of pretty or
scented plants were cut into sections for
the same purpose. But far the largest
share of beads were made from animal
materials — shell, bone, horn, teeth, claws,
and ivory. Beads of marine or fresh-
water shells were made by grinding off the
apex, as in the case of (lentalium, or the
unchanged shells of ])ivalves were merely
perforated near the hinge. Pearls were
bored through the middle, and shells
were cut into disks, cylinders, spheres,
spindles, etc. In places the columellae of
large conchs were removed and pierced
through the long diameter for stringing.
Bone l)eads were usually cylinders pro-*
duced by cutting sections of various
lengths from the thigh or other parts of
■
il^^^^if
i
^I^^Bilp
4
^^^Bi
MENOMINEE BEADWORK. ( HOFFMAN )
vertebrate skeletons. When the wall of
the bone was thiik the ends were ground
to give a spherical form. The milk teeth
of the elk, the eanine teeth of the bear,
and the incisors of rodents were highly
valued, and in later times the incisors of
the horse were worn. The l)eak8 of the
putfin, the talons of rapacious birds, and
.i)ears' claws were wrought into ceremonial
dress and paraphernalia. A great deal of
taste and manual skill were developed in
selecting the materials, and in cutting,
grinding, and rolling them into shape and
uniform size, as well as in polishing and
Kerforating su])stances, some of them very
ard, as jasper. Many of the cvlinders are
several inches long. The tribes of n. w.
California wrap dentalia with snake skin
glued on in strips, while the Pomo and
their neighbors make large cylinders of a
baked mineral (Kroeber).
The general usee to which beads were
put are legion. They were tied in the
hair, worn singly or in strings from the
ears, on the neck, arms, wrist, waist, and
lower limbs, or were attached to bark and
wooden vessels, matting, basketry, and
other textiles. They were woven into
fabrics or wrought into network, their
varied and bright colors not only enhanc-
ing beauty but lending themselves to her-
aldry. Glass beads tnus woven produce
effects like those of cathedral glass. Again,
they were embroidered on every part of
ceremonial costume, sometimes entirely
covering headdress, coat, regalia, leggings,
or moccasins, and on all sorts of recep-
tacles. The old-time technic and de-
signs of quillwork are closely imitated.
They were largely employed as gifts and
as money, also as tokens and in records
of hunts or of important events, such as
treaties. They were conspicuous acces-
sories in the councils of war and peace, in
the conventional expression of tribal
symbolism, and in traditional story-tell-
ing, and were offered in worship. They
were regarded as insignia of functions,
and were buried, often in vast quantities,
with the dead.
In each of the ethnic areas of North
America nature provided tractable and
attractive material to the bead-maker.
In the Arctic region it was walrus ivory
and the glossy teeth of mammals. They
served not only for personal adornment,
but were hung to all sorts of skin recep-
tacles and inlaid upon the surfac^es of
those made of wood and soft stone. The
Danes brought glass to the eastern Eski-
mo, the whalers to the central, and the
Russians to the western tribes. In the St
Lawrence- Atlantic area whole shells were
strung, and cylinders, disks, and spindles
were cut from the valves of the clam ( Ve-
nus mercenaria) . In Virginia a cheap kind,
called roanoke, were made from oyster
shells. In the N. small white and pur-
ple cylinders, called wampum, servea for
ornament and were used in elaborate
treaty belts and as a money standard, also
fiat disks an inch or more in width being
l)ored through their long diameters. The
Cherokee name for beads and money is
the same. Subsequently imitated by the
colonists, these beads received a fixed
value. The mound-builders and other
tribes of the Mississippi valley and the
Gulf states used pearls and beads of shell,
seeds, and rolled copper. Canine teeth
of the elk were most highly esteemed,
recently being worth 50 cents to $1 each.
They were carefully saved, and a garment
covered with them was valued at as much
as $600 or 1800. The modern tribes also
used the teeth of rodents, the claws of bears
and carnivores, and the dewclaws of rumi-
nants. Nuts and berries were univer-
BULL. 30]
BEAR RIVER BEJUITUUY
189
sally strong and worn, and the Mandan
and other Missouri r. tribes pounded and
melted gla^ and molded it into beads.
After the colonization cradles and articles
of skin were profusely covered with bead-
work replete with symbolism. The Yu-
kon-Mackenzie tribes were most skilful
in quillwork, but later decked their gar-
ments and other useful things with glajss
beads. All along the Pacific slope den-
talium, abalone, and clam shells fur-
nish the most valuable materials. The
length of the wrought bead represented a
certein amount of work and established
the money value. The price of deutalium
shells increase<l rapidly after a certain
length was exceeded. These beads were
decorated with grass, skin, and feathers
to enhance their worth. The California
coast tril)e8 and the ancient peoples of
Santa Barbara ids. were rich in the little
flat-shell disks as well as the stone drill,
and they knew how to reduce them to
uniform diameter by rolling long strings
of them between slabs or through grooves
in sandstone. The tribes of the n. part
of the interior Iwisin were not well sup-
plied with bt^ad material, but early
made the acquaintance of the trader. A
series of Ute costumes made before the
advent of glass shows much ])retty deco-
ration in dewclaws, ])its of goat and sheej)
horn, and |>erforated seeds. The Pueblo
Indians stnng the yellow capsuh's of Sola-
num, sections of woody stems of })lants,
seashells, turquoise and other varieties
of bright-colored stones, of which they
have great store. The Hyde Expeditioii
found more than .SO, 000 turquoise Ix'ads in
a single room at Pueblo Bonito, N. Mex.
The Huichol, with colore<l l)eads of glass,
using wax as an adhesive, make pretty
mosaic figures on gourds, carved images
of wood, etc.
Consult Beauchamj) in Bull. N. Y. State
Mus., no. 73, 1903; Catlin, N. A. Inds.,
1841; Hoffman in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
1896; Mason in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1899, 485-
510, 1901 ; Matthews, Ethnog. and Philol.
Hidataa, 18, 1877; Nelson in 18th Rep.
B. A. E., 1899; Holmes, Annals, i, 271,
1829; Sunmer, Hist. Am. Currencv, 4, 8,
1874; Powers in Cont. N. A. Pithnol., iii,
1877; Lumholtz, Unknown Mexico, 1902;
Pepper in Am. Anthrop., vii, no. 2, 1905.
See Adornment^ Artj Arta and IndnMrieSj
Basketry, Coppery QuUIwork, Shellw(trky
Turquoise, Wampum, and articles on the
various raw materials mentioned above
as having been used for l)eads. (o. t. m. )
Bear Biver. A tribe mentione<l by
Lawson (N. C, 383, 1860) as living in
North Carolina in 1701, and having then
a single village, Raudaucpiaquank, with
50 warriors. According to Hawks (Hist.
N. C, 1858-59) they lived in Craven co.,
probably on a branch of the Neuse.
Beanbassin. A (Micmac?) mission es-
tablished by the French in the 17th cen-
tury.—Shea, Discov. Miss. V£l., 86, 1852.
Beanport. A village established in 1650
in (Juehec co., (Canada, by fugitive Huron,
who removed in the next year to the
island of Orleans.— Shea, Cath. Miss.,
196, 1H55.
Beaver. A former Aleut village on
Unalaska, Aleutian ids.; pop. 41 in 1834.
Bobrovo.— Sarichef (1792) quoted bv Baker, Geog.
Diet. Alaska. 1901 {-^ *sea otter'). Bobrovtkoe.—
Veniaminoff, Zapiski, ii,202, 1K40. Bobrovskoi.—
Elliott. Cond. AfT. Alaska, 2*26. 18?6. Xlguiug.—
Baker, op. cit. (native name).
Beaver Island Indians. A Chippewa
band formerly residing on the Beaver
ids. of Michigan, at the outlet of L.
Michigan. — Washington treatv (1836) in
r. S. Ind. Treaties, 607, 1873.*
Beaversville. A Delaware settlement
in 1856 near the junction of Boggy cr.
and Canadian r. in Indian Territorv.—
Whipi)le, Pac. R. H. Rep., in, 18, 1856.
Beavertown. A village, probably be-
longing to the Delawares, situated in
17()6 on the k. side of the extreme e.
head l)ranch of Hocking r., at or near
the present Beavertown, in Morgan co.,
Ohio. Beaver, or King Beaver, wks at I
that time chief of the rnami tribe of
Delawares. (.i. m.)
BeaverTown.— Hutchinsmapin Bouquet, ExiK'd.,
17(i«i. King Beaver's Town.— Bou«i net, ibid., 67.
B^canconr. A village on St I^wrence
r., in (Quebec province, settle«l l)y Ab-
naki who removed from Maine in 1713
when that state was ceded to Kngland
by the treaty of Ttrecht. In 1736 they
were estimated at about 300; in 1858
they numbered 172, with French admix-
ture, and in 1884 they were reduced t(»
.39, but in 1902 nund)ered 51. They are
members of the Roman (^atholic church.
(.I.M.)
B&candee.— Kin^. .lour, to Arctic Ocean, i, 11, 1830
(incorrectly iriven as an Iroquois village at I^ke
of Two Mountains, but distinct from " Kflnf'sfttar-
kee"). Beauancourt.— Vaudreuil (1710) in N. Y.
I)t)C. Col. Hist.. IX, 849. 18.'>5. Becanoour.— Vau-
dreuil (17*21) in Maine Hist. Soc.Coll.. vi, 240. 1859.
Becancourians.— Rasles (1724) tmns. in Mass.
Hist. Soc. (\)11.. 2d s., vni, 246, 1819. Becancourt.—
Vaudreuil (1721) in N. Y.Doc. Ool. Hist.. i.\, 904.
18,%. Becquancourt. — La Tour, map, 17H4. Bec-
quencourt. — Ibid., 1782. Becuncourt. — (Minton
(j745) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 281, la'Sft.
Bekancourt.— l)eLnnccy (1754) in Ruttcnber.
Tribes Hudson R., 21(5, 1872. Beianpon.— Cbau-
viKuerie (1730) quoted by Schoolcraft. Ind.
Tribes. HI, .553, 18.53.
Bece. An abandoned village of the
Koskimo, 6 m. e. of Koprino harbor, in
N. Quatsinosd., Vancouver id.
Bece.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., 7, 1888.
Beds. See Fuimiinre.
Beech Creek. A former 8eminole town
on Beech cr., Fla., settled by Chiaha In-
dians from lower Chattahoochee r., (ra.;
exact location unknown. — Bell in Morse,
Rep. to Sec. War, 808, 1822.
Bejnitnny ('villajre of the rainbow').
A former jnieblo of the Tigua near the s.
140
BEK U BELLA BELLA
[b. a. e.
limit of their habitat, on the Rio (rrande,
at thepre8e|it Los Lunas, N. Mex.
Be-jui Tu-uy.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
III, 130, 1890. Be-juij Tu-aij.— Bandelier in Jour.
Am. Eth. and Arch., iii. 61, 1892. Be-Jui Tu-ay.—
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 218, 1892.
Be-juy Tu-ay.— Bandelier in Jour. Am. Eth. and
Arch., op. cit. San Clemente.— Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, iv, 219. 1892. Village of the Rain-
bow.— Bandelier in Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch.,
op. cit.
Bekn {Be/-ku) . Given by Powers ( Cont.
N. A.Ethnol., iii, 398, 1877) as the name of
a tribe related to the Paiute, but identified
by Kroe>)er (inf'n, 1903) as a form of
Biekiu, the Yokuts name of a locality on
Poso cr., Cal., within the territory of the
Paleuyanii Yokuts.
Beldom. A Missisauga village in On-
tario in 1855. — Jones, Ojebway Inds.,
229, 1861.
Belen. A village on the w. bank of the
Rio Grande in Valencia co., N. Mex.,
and the seat of the Spanish mission of
Nues'ra Sefiora, with 107 inhabitants in
1805 and 133 in 1809. Like Abiquiu and
Tome it was apparently e><tabli8hed as a
refuge for(ienizaros, or redeemed captive
Indians, of whom a few were at Belen in
1766. It is now a '* Mexican" settlement.
The ruins of the old Spanish church may
still be traced, (f. w. h.)
Belem.— Alcncaster (1805) quoted by Princp, N.
Mex., 231, 1883. Belen.— Moise in Kan. Cy. Rev.,
481, Dec. 1H81. Neustra Benora de Belem.— Alen-
caster (1805) (juoted by Meline, Two Thousand
Miles, 212. IHTi? (misprint). N. 8, de Belem.— Ban-
croft, Nat. Races, i, 599, 1882 (after Meline). N.
S. de Belen. —Alencaster (1805) quoted by Prince,
N. Mex., 37, 1883. Kuestra Benora de la Belen.—
Ward in Ind. Aflf. Rep. for 1867. 213, 1868. Belue.—
Ibid., 210 (mi.sprint).
Belen. A settlement of the Yaqui, in-
cluding some members of the 8eri and
Guayma tribes, on the x. bank of Yaqui
r., about 20 m. above its mouth, in s.
Sonora, Mexico. It was the seat of an
important mission founded about 1678,
and in 1849 its population was estimated
at 3,000.
Belem. — Velasco in Bol. Soc. Mex. Geog. Estad.,
VHI, 226, 1860. Belen.— Velasco, Noticia.s de 8o-
nora, 84, 1850. Nuestra Benora de Belem. — Orozco
V Berra. Geog., 355, 1864. Nuestra Benora de
Belen.— Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s.,
Ill, 379, 1857.
Belkofski (Russian: Bielkovskoie^ 'squir-
rel village' ). An Aleut village near the
end of Alaska pen.; jwDp. 102 in 1833, 268
in 1880, 185 in 1890, 147 in 1900.
Bailkovskoe.— Veniaminof. Zapiski, ii. 203, 1840.
Belkovsky.— Schuatka, Mil. Recon. Ala.vka, 116,
1885. Bellkovskoi. —Elliott, Cond. Aflf., Alaska,
225. 1875. Bjelkowskoje.— Holmberg, Ethnol.
Skizz., liiap, 142, 185.5.
Bellabella ( an Indian corruption of Mil-
bank taken back into English) . The pop-
ular name of an important Kwakiutl
tribe living on Milbank sd.,. Brit. Col.
Their septs or subtribes are Kokaitk,
Oetlitk, and Oealitk. The following clans
are given: Wikoktenok (Eagle), Koete-
nok (Raven), Halhaiktenok (Killer-
whale). Pop. 330 in 1901.
The language spoken by this tribe and
shared also by the Kitamat, Kitlope,
China Hat, and Wikeno Indians is a pe-
culiar dialect of Kwakiutl, called Heil-
tsuk from the native name of the Bella-
BELLABELLA MAN. (Am. MuS. Nat, HiST. )
bella. These trilms resemble each other
furthennore in having a system of clans
with descent through the mother — de-
rived probablj' from their northern neigh-
BELLABELLA WOMAN. (am. MuS. NAT HiST. )
bors — while the Bellacoola and Kwakiutl
to the s. have paternal descent. An-
ciently the Bellabella were very warlike,
a character largely attributable to the
fact that thev were flanked on one side
BULL. 30]
BELLACOOLA BEOTHUKAN FAMILY
141
by the Tsimshian of Kittizoo and on the
other by the Bellacoola, while war par-
ties of Haida from the (^ueen Charlotte
ids. were constantly raidinir their coast?.
For this reason, pi'rhtips, the peculiar se-
cret societies of the n. w. coast, the most
important of which evidently had their
origin in war customs, first arose among
them. When voyagers first began fre-
quenting the N. Pacific coast, Milbank id.,
which offers one of the few good open-
ings into the inner ship channel to
Alaska, was often visited, and its inhab-
itants were therefore among the first to
be modifie<l bv European contact. To-
gether with the other Heiltsuk tribes
they have now been Christianized by
Protestant missionaries, and most of their
ancient culture and ritual have l)een
abandoned, (.i. k. s. )
Belbellah*.— Dunn. Oregon Ter.. is;j. ih45. Bella-
Bella.— Can. Ind. A IT.. 31)1. 1897. Elk'la'sumH.—
Boas in 5th Rep. N. \V. Tribes Can.. 9. 1SS9 ( Bel-
lac<M>la name). Haeeltruk,— Scoulor in Jour.
Geog. Soc. Lond., i, 224, 1H41. Haeeltsuk.—
Scouler in Jour. Kthnol. So<*. Loud., i, 233.
1848. Haeelts.-Lat!)am,ibid., I(i4. Haeeltzuk.—
Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc. I^nd.. i, 223, 1841.
Haeetsuk. — I^tham in Tninn. Philol. S<h'. Lond.,
64, 1856. Haeltsuk.— Latham in Jour. Ethnol.
Soc. Lond., 1, 155, 1^48. HailUa.— Hale in V. S.
Expl. Expd.. vr,221, 1816. 'Hailtzuk.— Tolmie and
Dawson, Vocahs. Brit. Col., 117b, 1884. Ha-ilt-
TOkh.-Glbbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. i, 145, 1877.
He'iltsuk.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5. 130,
1887. Hte'iltsuq.— Boas in Rep. Nut. Mus. for 1895,
328 (own name). Hiletsuck.— Can. Ind. AfT.. 252,
1891. Hileteuk.— Ibid., 191. 188;i. IleUuck.— Powell,
ibid., 1*22,1880. Ilet Suck.— Ibid., 315. Millbank
Indians.- Dunn, Hist. Oreg., 271, 1844. Killbank
Sound Indians.— Ibid., 358. Witsta.- Tolmie and
Dawson, op. cit. (Chimmesvan name). Wut-
sU'.— Boas in 5tb Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 9. 1889.
Bellacoola (Bi^Lvida). A coast 8alish
"tribe, or rather aggregation of tribes, on x.
and s. Bentinck arm. Dean inlet, and Bel-
lacoola r., Brit. Col. This name is that
given them bv the Kwakiutl, there being
no native designation for the entire peo-
ple. They form the northernmost divi-
sion of the Salishan stock, from the re-
maining tribes of which they are st»pa-
rated by the Tsilkotin and the Kwakiutl.
In the Canadian reports on Indian af-
fairs the name is restricted by the separa-
tion of the Tallion (see Talio) and the
Kinisquit (people of Dean inlet), the
whole being called the Tallion nation.
The population in im)2 was 811. The
chief divisions mentioned are the Kinis-
quit, Noothlakimish, and Nuhalk. The
gentes of the Bellacoola without reference
to the tribal divisions are: Hamtsit, lalos-
timot, Kor)kotlane, Smoen, Spatsatlt,
Tlakaumoot, Tumkoaakyas. The follow-
ing are mentioned as gentes of the Nuhalk
division: Keltakkaua, Potlas, Siatlhelaak,
Spukpukolemk, and Tokoais. The Bel-
lacoola villages (chiefly after Boas) are:
Aseik, Asenane, Atlklaktl, Koapk, Koatl-
na, Komkutis, Noutchaoff, Xuiku, Nuka-
akmats, Nukite, Nusatsem, Nuskek, Nus-
kelst, Nutltleik, Osmakmiketlp, Peisela,
Sakta, Sati^k, Selkuta, Senktl, Setlia,
Slaaktl, Snutele, Snutlelatl, Sotstl,
Stskeitl, Stuik, Talio, Tkeiktskune,
Tskoakkane, Tsomootl. (.i. r. s. )
Belhoola.— (JibbsinCont. N. A. Ethnol.. 1.267.1877.
Bellacoola.— Can. Ind. AfT.. 315, 1H80. Bellaeh-
choolas.— Dunn. Hist. Orejfon. 2^)7, 1844. BeUa-
hoola.— .Schoolcraft. Ind. Trilies. v, 488, 1855.
Bell-houla.— Mayne. Brit. Col., 146. 1862. Belli-
ohodla.— Scouler in Jour. Etlinol. S(H'. Lond., i,
234, 1848. Bilhoola.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs.
Brit. Col., 122B. 1884. Billechoola. —Scouler in
Jour. Roy. (ieog. Soc, i. 224, 1841. BilUkiUa.—
Gibbs quoted by Dall in Cont. N. A. Kthnol., i,
241, 1877. Bilqula.— 7th Rep. N. W. Tribes of
Can.. 2. 1891. Bi'lxula. — Boa.s in Rep. Nat. Mus.
for 1895, 320. Ilghi'mL— Tolmie and Dawson,
Vocabs. Brit. Col., 1*22b, 1884. Tallion Nation.-
Can. Ind. AIT.. 417, 1898.
Bells. Metal l)ell8 were in common use
in micl<lle America in pre-Colnmhian
times, but they are rarely found x. of the
Rio (Tran<le, either in possession of the
tril>es or on ancient sites; but bells were
certainly known to the Pueblos and pos-
sibly to the mound-builders before the
arrival of the whites. The
rattle made of shells of vari-
ous kinds or modeled in clav
passe<l naturally into the l)ell
as soon as metal or other par-
ticularly resonant materials
wereavailable for their manu-
facture. Occasionally copper
bells with stone tinklers are
found on ancient sites in New
Mexico and Arizona, where
examples in bake<i clay are also found;
these are usually (juite small andareof the
hawk-bell or sleigh-bell type, and doubt-
less served as i>endant ornaments. Rare
examples of copper bells have been col-
lected in the southern stiites, but it is not
certain that they were of local origin, since
many specimens must have reached Flor-
ida from Mexico and Central America in
early Columbian times; and it is well
known that bells of cop|)er or bronze
were emploveil in trade with the tril)es
by the P^nglish colonists, numerous ex-
amples of which have been obtained from
mounds and burial places.
Consult Fewkes (1) in 17th Rep. B. A.
E., 1898, (2) in 22d Rep. R A. R, 1908;
Hough in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1901, 1903;
Moore in Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phi la.,
1894-1905; Thomas in 12th Rep. B. A. E.,
1894. See Copper, (w. n. h.)
Beothnkan Family (from the tribal or
group name Beothukj which probably
signifies *man,' or 'human being,* but
was employed by Europeans to mean * In-
dian,' or * Red Indian' ; in the latter c^ase
because the Beothuk colored themselves
and tinted their utensils and arms with
redocher). Sofarasknownonlyasingle
tribe, called Beothuk, which inhabited
the island of Newfoundland when first dis-
covered, constituted this family, although
COPPCR BELL FROM
A TENNESSEE
MouNo: 1-a.
(thomas)
142
BEOTHITKAN FAMILY BERLIN TABLET
[b. a. b.
existing? vocabularies indicate marked dia-
lectic differences. At first the Beothuk
were classified either as Eskimauan or as
Algonquian, but now, lai]?ely through the
researches of Gatschet, it is deemed best
to regard them as constituting a distinct
linguistic fetock. Itis probable that in 1497
Beothukan people were met by Sebastian
Cabot when he discovered Newfoundland,
as he states that he met people ** painted
with red ocher," which is a marked char-
acteristic of the Beothuk of later observ-
ers. Whitbourne (Chappell, Voy. to New-
foundland, 1818), who visited Newfound-
land in 1622, stated that thedwelling places
of these Indians were in the x. and w. parts
of the island, adding that ' * in war they use
l)ows and arrows, spears, darts, clubs, and
slings." The extinction of the Beothuk
was due chiefly to the bitter hostility of
the French and to Micmac invasion from
Nova Scotia at the l)eginning of the
18th century, the Micmac settling in
w. Newfoundland as hunters and fish-
ermen. For a time these dwelt in am-
ity with the Beothuk, but in 1770, quar-
rels having arisen, a destructive bat-
tle was fought between the two peoples
at the N. end of (irand Pond. The Beo-
thuk, however, lived oq friendly terms
with the Naskapi, or Labrador Montag-
nais, and the two ]>eoples visited and
traded with each other. Exasperated by
the petty depredations of these tribes, the
French, in the middle of the 18th cen-
tury, offered a reward for every head of
a Beothuk Indian. To gain this reward
and to obtain the valuable furs they
possessed, the more numeroiLs Micmac
nun ted and gradually exterminated them
as an independent people. The English
treated the Beothuk with much less
rigor; indeed, in 1810 Sir Thomas Duck-
worth issued a proclamation for their pro-
tection. The banks of the River of Ex-
f)loit8 and its tributuaries appear to have
)een their last inhabited territory.
De Laet ( No vus Orbis, 34, 1633 ) describes
these Newfoundland Indians as follows:
" The height of the Ixnly is medium, the
hair blat^k, the face broad, the nose flat,
and the eyes large; all the males are
l^eardless, and both sexes tint not only
their skin but also their garments with a
kind of re<l color. And they dwell in
certain conical lodges and low huts of
sticks set in a circle and joined together
in the roof. Being nomadic, they fre-
(juently change their habitations. They
had a kind of cake made with eggs and
baked in the sun, and a sort of pudding,
stuffed in gut, and composed of seal's fat,
livers, eggs, and other ingredients." He
describes also their peculiar crescent-
shaped birch-bark canoes, which had
sharp keels, refjuiring much ballast to
keep them from overturning; these were
not more than 20 feet in length and they
could bear at most 5 persons. Remains
of their lodges, 30 to 40 feet in circumfer-
ence and constructed by forming a slender
frame of poles overspread with birch bark,
are still traceable. They had both sum-
mer and winter dwellings, the latter often
accommodating about 20 people each.
Jukes (Excursions, 1842) describes their
deer fences or deer stockades of trees,
which often extended for 30 miles along
a river. They employed pits or caches
for storing food, and used the steam bath
in huts covered with skins and heated
with hot stones. Some of the charac-
teristics in which the Beothuk differed
from most other Indians were a marked
lightness of skin color, the use of trenches
in their lodges for sleeping berths, the
peculiar form of their canoes, the non-
domestication of the dog, and the dearth
of evidence of pottery making. Bonny-
castle (Newfoundland in 1842) states that
the Beothuk used the inner bark of Pinus
hitlsamifera as food, while Lloyd (Jour.
Anthrop. Inst., iv, 1875) mentions the fact
that they obtained fire by igniting the
down of the bluejay from sparks produced
by striking together two pieces of iron
pyrites. Peyton, cited by Lloyd, declares
that the sun was the chief object of their
worship. Car mack's expedition, conduct-
ed in behalf of the Beothic Society for the
Civilization of the Native Savages, in 1827,
failed to find a single individual of this
once prominent tribe, although the island
was crossed centrally in the search. As
they were on good terms with the Nas-
ka[)i of I>abrador, they perhaps crossed
the strait of Belle Isle and became incor-
porated with them. (.i. n. b. h. a. s. g.)
Beathook. — I^igh quoted by Llovd in Jour.
Anthrop. Inst., i v, 3«, 1875. Behathook.— Gatschet
in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 410, 1885 (quoting older
form) . Beothios.— Lloyd in Jour. Anthrop. Inst.,
IV, 33, 1875. Beothik.— Gatschet, op. cit. (quoting
old form). Beothi.— Vetromile, Abnakis, 47, 1866.
Beothuos.— Lloyd in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., iv, 21,
1875. Beothuet. — Jour. Anthrop. Inst., iv, pi. facing
p. 26, 1875. Beothugft.— Ibid., v, pi. facing p. 228,
1876. Beothuk.— Gatschet in Proc. Am. Phiro8.Soc.,
408, 1885. Bethuck.— Latham in Trans. Philol.
Soc. Lond., 58, 1856. Boeothiok. — Mac Dougall in
Trans. Canad. Inst., il, 98, 1890-91. Boeotnuk.—
Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc, 410, 1886 (quot-
ing older form). Oood-night Indians. — Lioyd ,
following blunder of Latham, in Jour. Anthrop.
Inst. . V, 229, 1876. Kaoquaejeet.— Gatschet in Proc.
Am. Philos. Soc.. 410, Oct.. 1885 (Micmac name:
•red man,' evidently a transl. of the European
*Red Indian'). Red Indiana of Kewfoundland. —
Cartwright (1768) quoted bv Lloyd in Jour.
Anthrop. Inst., iv. 22, 1875. Bhawatharott.— King
quoted oy Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., 410,
1885 ( = * Red I ndian man ' ) . Shawdtharut. —Ibid.
Xnnobah.— Latham quoted by Gatschet, ibid., 411
(Abnaki name). XJind mequaegit.— Ibid, (said to
be the Micmac name, sig. 'red man,' but evidently
a trader's or fisherman's rendering of the Euro-
pean ' Red Indians').
Beowawa. Incorrectly given as the
name of a Hopi village; it seems to be
the name of a man.
Beowawa.— Beadle, Western Wilds, 227, 1878.
Beowawe.— Beadle, Undeveloped West, 676, 1873.
Berlin tablet. See Xotched plates.
BULL. 30]
BER8IAMITE BIBLE TRANSLATIONS
143
Bertiamite. One of the small Algon-
quian tribes composine the eastern group
of the Montagnais, inhabiting the banks
of Bersimis r., which enters St Lawrence
r. near the gulf. These Indians became
known to the French at an early date,
and being of a peaceable and tractable
disposition, were soon brought under the
influence of the missionaries. They were
accustomed to assemble once a year with
cognate tribes at Tadoossac for the pur-
pose of trade, but these have melted away
ander the influence of civilization. A
trading post called Bersimis, at the mouth
of Bersimis r., had in 1902 some 465 In-
dians attached to it, but whether any of
them were Bersiamite is not stated. (J. m. )
BaisimetM.— McKenney and Hall. Ind. Tribes,
III, 79, 1854. BenamU.— Stearns, Labrador, 263,
1884. BeniamitM.— Jefl. Rel. for 1640, 34, 1858.
Beniamito.->Hind, Labrador Penin., i, 125, 1863.
Beniamitte.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. TribeH,
III, 81, 1854. BertiamistM.— Iroquois treaty (1665)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iil, 122, 1853. Bertiam-
itet.— Memoir of 1706, ibid., ix, 786, 1855. Beth-
■iamita.— Can. Ind. Aff. Rep., 38, 1880. Betaiam-
itM.— Le Clercq quoted by Champlain (1632),
(Euvres, rv, 105, 1870. Betsiamiti.— Can. Ind. Aff.
Rep. 1884, pt 1, 185, 1885. BaaMiimeus.->McKen-
ney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 81, 1854. NotreDame
de Betaiamito.— Boucher in Can. Ind. Aff. Rep.
for 1884, pt. 1, 36, 1885 (mission name). Oubestami-
onek,— Jes. Rel. for 1643, 38, 1858. Gumamiois.—
Albanel (1670) quoted by Hind, Labrador Penin..
1, 126, 1863. Oumamioaeka.— McKenney and Hall,
Ind. Tribes, in, 79, 1854. (hunamiwek,— Hind,
Labrador Penin.. i, 224, 1863.
Beshea {bIflM *lynx*). A gens of the
Chippewa.
Be-sbeu.— Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 44,
1885. Pe-shew.— Tanner. Narrative, 315, 1830
(trans, 'wild cat'). Pithin.— (iatschet, Ojibwa
MS., B. A. E., 1882.
Beshow. The black candle-fish (Ano-
plopoma fimbria) of the Puget sd. region;
from bishow^i in the Makah dialect of the
Wakashan stock. (a. p. v.)
Bethel. An Eskimo mission, founded
in 1886 by Moravian brethren from Penn-
sylvania, on Kuskokwim r., close to
Mumtrelek, Alaska. Pop. 20 in 1890.
Bethlehem. A Moravian settlement es-
tablished in 1740 at the present Bethle-
hem, Northampton co.. Pa. Although a
white settlement, the Moravians drew to-
ward it many of the Indians, and in 1746
the Mahican converts from Shecomeco
resided there for a short time before set-
tling at Friedenshuetten. (j. m.)
Betonakeengainnbejig ( Pi^tona^kingkairi'
Uplchlgf *they who live in the neighbor-
hood of [L. Superior on the s.].* — W. J.).
An important division of the Chippewa
living m n. Wisconsin, between L. Su-
perior and Mississippi r. The Munom-
inikasheenhug, Wahsnahgunewininewug,
and Lac Court Oreilles Chippewa are
incorporated with them. Their principal
villages were at Desert lake (Vieux Des-
ert), Flambeau lake, Pelican lake, Lac
Court Oreilles, Lac Chetec, Pukwaawun,
and Mononimikau lake. (j. m.)
Be-ton-auk-an-ub-yig.— Ramscv in Ind. Aff. Rep.,
85, 1850. Be-ton-uk-eeng-ain-ub-e-jig.— Warren in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 38 188,5. Pi'tdna'king-
kainapitcig.— W. Jones, inf'n, 1905 (correcrt form).
Betty's Neck. A place in ^liddleboro,
Plymouth co., Ma.«8., where 8 Indian
families lived in 179.S, and took itn name
from an Indian woman ( Drake, Bk. Inds.,
bk. 3, 10, 1848). The jHJijple seem to have
been Nemasket and subject to the Warn-
panoag. (.i. m.)
Biara. A sulHlivi.^^ion or settlement of
the Tehueeo, formerly on the lower Rio
Fuerte or the Fuerte-Mayo divide, n. w.
Sinaloa, Mexico. — Orozco v Berra, (toog.,
58, 1864.
Bianswah (pai/asua^ 'dried,' a« when
meat is hun^ over fire until smoked and
dried; it may also refer to meat hung on
a pole to dry HI the sun. — W. J.). A Chip-
pewa chief, also known as Byianswa, son
of Biausvvah, a leadiujj: man of the Loon
gens which resided on the s. shore of L.
Superior, 40 m. w. of I^ Pointe, x. w. Wis.
He was taken prisoner by the Fox In-
dians when a l)ov, but was saved from
torture and deatli by his father, who
became a voluntary substitute. Aftt»r the
death of his father he moved with his
people to Fond du l^c. Being made
chief he led the warriors of various bands
in an exi)e<lition against the Sioux of
Sandy lake and succeeded in driving the
latter from their village, and later the
Sioux were forced to abandon their vil-
lages on Cass and Winnipeg lakes and
their stronghold on l^eech lake, whence
they move<l westward to the headwaters
of Minnesota r. The ('hippewa under
Biauswah were those who settled in the
country of the upper Mississippi about
1768 (Minn. Hist. Coll., v, 222, 1885).
The date of his death is not recorded, but
it probably occurred not long after the
date name<l. (c. t. )
Bibiana. A former rancheria, proba]>ly
of the Pa|)ago, in n. w. Sonora, Mexico,
l>etween Busanic and Sonoita, near (or
possibly identical with) Anamic. It was
visited by Kino in 1702.
BU Bibiana.— Kino (1706) qiiotod l.v BaiH-roft, No.
Mex. States, i, .')02, 1SS6.
Bible translations. The Bible has been
{)rinted in part or in whole in 82 Indian
anguages n. of Mexico. In 18 one or
more portions have.l)een printed; in 9
others the New Testament or more has
appeared; and in 5 languages, namely, the
Massachuset, Cree, Lahra(lor Eskimo,
Santee Dakota, and Tukkuthkutchin, the
whole Bible is in print
The Norwegian missionaries, Hans and
Paul F]gede, were the first to translate
any part of the Bible into (Treenland
Eskimo, their version of the New Testa-
ment being printed in part in 1744, and
as a whole in 1766. A revision of this
•144
BIBLE TRANSLATIONS
[B. A. E.
translation, by Otto Fabricius, was twice
printecl lt)efore the close of the 18th cen-
tury4 and in 1822 the Moravian Brethren
brought out a new translation, w^hich ran
through several editions. Nearly three-
quarters of the Old Testament was printed
in the same langua:ge between 1822 and
1836, when the work was discontinued.
In 1-Abrador Eskimo the earliest printed
Bible text was the Harmony of the Gos-
pels, which appeared in 1800. This was
followed by the Gospel of St John in
1810, the complete New Testament in
1840, and all of the Old Testament be-
tween 1834 and 1867. In other Eskimo
languages there were printed : In Labrador
Eskimo some New Testament extracts in
1878 and the Four Gospels in 1897, trans-
lated by E. J. Peck; in the Aleutian
Unalaska dialect, with adaptation also to
the Atka dialect, John Veniaminoff's
translation of St Matthew's Gospel in
1848; and in Kaniagmiut, EliasTishnoff's
translation of the same Gospel, also in 1 848.
Four languages of the Athapascan fam-
ily have been provided with Bible trans-
lations. The (lospels were translated by
Robert McDonald and printed in the
Tukkuthkutchin language of Mackenzie
r. in 1874, and the whole Bible in 1898.
In the Chipewyan Archdeacon Kirkby's
translation of the (iospels appeared in
1878 and the whole New Testament in
1881 ; in the Etchareottine, Kirkby's trans-
lation of St John's Gospel in 1870, and
Bishop Bompas's of the New Testament
between 1883 and 1891; and in the Tsat-
tine, A. C. Garrioch's version of St Mark's
Gospel in 1886.
Translations have been made into 13
languages of the Algonquian family. In
the Cree, William Mason's work com-
prises several editions of the Gospel of
St John made l)etween 1851 and 1857,
the complete New Testament in 1859,
and the whole Bible in 1861-62. Arch-
deacon Hunter's version of three of the
Gospels in the same language appeared
in 1853-55 (reprinted in 1876-77). Bishop
Horden's Four Gospels in Cree was
printed in 1859, and his complete New-
Testament in 1876. In the Abnaki, St
Mark's Gospel, translated bv Wzokhi-
lain, was printed in 1844; in the Micmac,
beginning with the printing of St Mat-
thew's Gospel in 1853, Mr Rand con-
tinue<i at work until the whole New
Testament was published in 1871-75,
besides the books of Genesis, Exodus,
and the Psalms; and in the Malecite, St
John's Gospel, also translated by Rand,
came out in 1870. The Massachuset lan-
guage, which comes next in geographical
order, was the first North American In-
dian language into which any Bible trans-
lation was made; John Eliot began his
Natick version in 1653 and finished it
in 1661-63, with a revised edition in
1680-85. In 1709 Experience Mayhevv
published his translation, in the Wampa-
noag dialect of Martha's Vineyard, of
the Psalms and St John's Gospel. In
the Delaware, Dencke's translation of the
Epistles of St John was printed in 1818,
Zeisberger's Harmony of the Gospels in
1821, and Luckenbach's Scripture Narra-
tives in 1838. In Chippewa, the earliest
translations were those of the (iospels of
St Matthew and St John, by Peter and
John Jones, printed in 1829-31. There
are three complete translations of the
New Testament in this language: One
by Edwin James in 1833, another by
Henry Blatchford in 1844 (reprinted in
1856 and 1875), and a third by F. A.
O'Meara in 1854 (reprinted in 1874).
O'Mearaalso translated the Psalms (1856)
and the Pentateuch (1861 ), and McDonald
translated the Twelve Minor Prophets
(1874). In the Shawnee language, St
Matthew's Gospel, by Johnston Lykins,
wa^ printed in 1836 and a revision in
1842, and St John's Gospel, by Francis
Barker, in 1846. In the Ottawa, Meeker's
translation of St Matthew and St John
api)eared in 1841-44; in the Potawatomi,
St Matthew and the Acts, by Lykins, in
1844; in the Siksika, St Matthew, by
Tims, in 1890; in the Arapaho, St Luke,
by Roberts, in 1903; and in the Cheyenne,
the Gospels of St Luke and St John by
Petter, who has published also some other
portions of the Bible.
Three languages of tlielroquoian feimily
possess parts of the Bible. In Mohawk,
extracts from the Bible were printed as
early as 1715; the Gospel of St Mark,
bv Brant, in 1787; and St John, by Nor-
ton, in 1805, Between 1827 and 1836
the rest of the New Testament was trans-
lated by H. A. Hill, W. Hess, and J. A.
Wilkes, and the whole was printed in
successive parts. A new version of the
Gospels, by Chief Onasakenrat, was
printed in 1880. The only part of the
Old Testament in Mohawk is Isaiah,
printed in 1839. In the Seneca language,
St Luke, by Harris, was printed in 1829,
and the Four Gospels, bv Asher Wright,
in 1874. In the Cherokee language St
Matthew's Gospel was translated by
S. A. Worcester and printed in 1829, the
other Gospels and the Epistles following,
until the complete New Testament was
issued in 1860. Genesis and Exodus,
also by Worcester, were printed in 1856
and 1853, respectively, besides some por-
tions of the Psalms, Proverbs, and Isaiah.
The two languages of the Muskhogean
family that come into our reconi are the
Choctaw and the Creek. In Choctaw,
three of the Gospels, translated by Al-
BULL. 30]
BICAM BIDAI
145
fred Wright, were printed as early as
1831, and the complete New Testament,
by Wright and Bymgton, in 1848. The
Pentateuch, the historical books of theOld
Testament, and the Psalms, by Wright,
Byington, and Edwards, came out between
1852 and 1886. In Creek, St John's Gos-
pel, translated by Davis and Lykins, was
printed in 1835; another version, by
Buckner, in 1860; and the whole New
Testament, by Mrs Robertson and others,
between 1875 and 1887; and Genesis and
the Psalms, by the same, in 1893-96.
Only two languages of the Siouan fam-
ily, the San tee Dakota and the Mandan,
are represented in scriptural translations.
Portions of the Bible were translated into
the former by Renville and printed as
early as 1839; the whole New Testament,
bv Riggs and others, was j>ublished in
1865; the Old Testament, by Williamson
and Riggs, was finished in 1877; and a re-
vised ^ition of the complete Bible was
issued in 1880. A small volume of
hymns and scriptural selections, trans-
lated into Mandan by Rev. C. F. Hall,
was published in 1905.
The Caddoan language is represented
by a small volume of Bible translations
and hymns in Arikara, by Rev. C. F.
Hall (1900; 2ded., enlarged, 1905).
In the Nez Perce language, of the Sha-
haptian family, St Matthew's (iospel, by
Spalding, was' twice printed (in 1845 and
1871); and St John, by Ainslie, appeared
in 1876. In the Kwakiutl language, of
the Wakashan family, A. J. Hall's trans-
lation of the Gospels of St Matthew and
St John came out in 1882-84 and the Acts
in 1897. In the Tsimshian language, of
the Chimmesyan family, the Four Gos-
pels, translated by William Duncan, were
printed in 1885-89; and in the Niska lan-
guage J. B. McCullagh began work on "
the Gospels in 1894. In the Haida lan-
guage, of the Skittagetan family, trans-
lations of three of the Gosi^els and of the
Acts, by Charles Harrison and J. H. Keen,
were printed in 1891-97.
Consult the various bibliographies of
Indian languages, by J. C. Pilling, pub-
lished as bulletins by the Bureau oi Amer-
ican Ethnology. See Books in Indian
languages^ Dictionaries^ Eliot BiblCy Peri-
odicals, (w. E. )
Bicam. A Yaqui settlement on the s.
bank of the lower Rio Yaqui, s. w. Sono-
ra, Mexico, with an estimated population
of 9,000 in 1849.
Bioun.— Velasco, Noticiajf de Sonora, 84, 1850.
Biean.— Miihlenpfordt quoted by Bancroft, Nat.
Races, I, 608, 1882. Santftima Trinidad Vioam.—
Orbzeo y Berra, Geog., 355, 1864 (or Bicam).
Bioheohlc. A Tarahumare settlement
on the headwaters of the Rio Concha*?,
fat. 28° 10^, long. 107° 10^ Chihuahua,
Mexico. — Orozco y Berra, Geog., 328,
1864.
Bull. 30—05 10
Bidai (Caddo for 'brushwood,* proba-
bly referring to the peculiar growth char-
acteristic of the region). An extinct tribe,
supposed to have belonged to the Caddoan
stock, whose villages were scattered over
a wide territory, but principally al)out
Trinity r., Texas, while some were as far x.
as the Neches or beyond. A creek empty-
ing into Trinity r. between Walker and
Madison cos., Tex., l)ears the name of
the tribe, as did also, according to La
Harpe, a small bay on the coast .\. of
Matagorda ])ay. A number of geographic
names deriveil from this tribe survive in
the region. The tribal tradition of the
Bidai is that they were the oldest inhabi-
tants of the country where they dwelt.
This belief may have strengthened
tribal pride, for although the Bidai
were surrounded by tribes belonging
to the Caddo confederacy, the people
long kept their independence. They
were neighbors of the Arkokisa, who
lived on lower Trinity r. and may have
l)een their allies, foraccordingtoI^Harpe
(1721) they were on friendly terms with
that tribe while they were at war with the
people dwelling on ^latagorda bay. Dur-
ing the latter })art of the 18th century
the Bidai were reported to \ye the chief
intermediaries ])etween the French and
the Apache in the trade in firearms; later
they suffered from the political disturb-
ances incident to the controversy between
the Si)aniards and the French, as well as
from intertribal wars and the introduc-
tion of new diseases. As a result rem-
nants of different villages combined, and
the olden tribal organization was broken
up. Little is known of their customs and
beliefs, which were probably similar to
those of the surrounding tril)es of the
Caddo confederacy. They lived in fixed
hal)itations, cultivated the soil, hunted
the buffalo, which ranged through their
territory, and were said ])y Sibley in 1805
to have ha<l " an excellent character for
honesty and punctuality." At that time
they nuinl)ered about 100, but in 1776-7
an epidemic carried off nearly half their
number. About the middle of the 19th
century a remnant of the Bidai were living
in a small village 12 m. from Montgom-
ery, Tex., cultivating maize, serving as
cotton pickers, and bearing faithful alle-
giance to the Texans. The women were
still skilled in basketry of "curious de-
signs and great variety." The few sur-
vivors were probably incorporated by the
Caddo. (A. c. F. )
Badies.— Ker, Travels. 122, 1816. Beadeyes.— Ed-
ward, Hist. Tex., 92, 1836. Bedais. —French, Hist.
Coll. La., II, 11, 1875. Beddiet.— Braekenridge,
Viewsof La.,81,1815. Bedee*.— Ibid.,87. Bediea.—
Sibley (1805), Hist. Sketches, 71. 1806. Bidais.— Rob-
in, Vov. Louisiane. Iii, 14, 1807. Bidaises. — Soc.
Mex. Geojf.. 266, 1870. Biday.— Doc. of 1719-21 in
Margry, DtV., vi, 341, 1H86. Bidayei.— La Harpe
{ca. 1721), ibid., 341. Bidias.— Latham in Trans.
146
BIDAMAREK BIG KETTLE
[B A. E.
Philol. Soc. Lond., 108, 1856. Quasmi^o.— Ker,
Trav., 122, 1816 (given as their own name).
S«dait.—Foote,Texa8, 1,299,1841. Bprinc Greeks.—
Ibid. Vidaes.— Mezi^res (1778) quoted by Ban-
croft, No. Mex. States, i, 661, 1886. Vidais.—
French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 11,1875. Vidayi.— Doc.
503 (1791-92) in Texas State archive.'^, vivais.—
Doc. of Aug. 26, 1756, ibid.
Bidamarek. An indefinite division of
the Porno of California, the name being
applied by the Ponio of upper Clear lake
to the inhabitants of the r^on w. of them
on Russian r., as distinguished from the
Danomarek, or hill people, of the same
region. Gibbs, in 1851, mentioned the
B^ahmarek as living with the Shanel-
kayain a valley apparently at the sourceof
the E. fork of Russian r. ; and McKee, in
the same year, gave the Medamarec, said
to number 150, as inhabiting with the
Chanetkai the hills dividing the waters
of Clear lake from Eel (sic) r. (a. l. k. )
Bedah-marek.— Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, ill, 109, 1853. Ke-dama-reo.— McKee (1851)
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 136, 1853.
Big Bill. A Paiute chief. He led the
Indians who aided the notorious Mormon
John D. Lee in the Mountain Meadow
massacre in s. w. Utah on 8ept. 11, 1857.
Bi^ Canoe. A Kalispel war chief who
acquired considerable notoriety as a
leader in battle. He was lx)rn in 1799
and died in 1882 at the Flathead agency,
Mont. (c. T.)
Big Chief. An Osage village 4 m. from
the Mission in Ind. T. in 1850; pop. 300.
Big-chief.— Smet, West. Missions, 355, 1863.
Big Cypress Swamp. A Seminole set-
tlement, with 73 inhabitants in 1880, sit-
uated in the "Devil's Garden" on the n.
eilge of Big Cypress swamp, 15 to 20 m.
8. w. of L. Okeechobee, Monroe co.,
Fla.— MacCauley in 5th Rep. B. A. E.,
478, 1887.
Big Foot (Si-tanka). A Hunkpapa
Sioux chief, of the Cheyenne River res.,
S. Dak., leader of the band of about 300
men, women, and children who fled from
the reservation after the killing of Sitting
Bull in the autumn of 1890, intending to
join the hostiles in the Bad-lands. They
were intercepted by troops on Wounded
Knee cr. and surrendered, but in at-
tempting to disarm the Indians a conflict
was precipitated, resulting in an engage-
ment in which almost the entire band,
including Big Foot, was exterminated,
Dec. 29, 1890. See Moonev in 14th Rep.
B. A. E., 1896.
"Bif Hammock. The most populous
Seminole settlement in central Florida in
1821; situated n. of Tampa bay, probably
in Hillsboro co. — Bell in Morse, Rep. to
Sec. War, 307, 1822.
Big-iiland (translation of the native
name AmAye'l-e^gim) . A former Chero-
kee settlement on Little Tennessee r., at
Big island, a short distance below the
mouth of the Tellico, in Monroe co..
Tenn. ; not to be confounded with Long-
island town below Chattanooga. — Mooney
in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 508, 1900.
Amiye'l-e'gwa.— Mooney, op. cit. Big Island. —
Royce in 6th Rep. B. ^. E., map, 1887. Hiala-
quo.— Timberlalfe, Memoir, map, 1762. Kila-
que.— Bartram, Travels, 372, 1792.
Big Jim. The popular name of a noted
full-blood Shawnee leader, known among
his people as Wapameepto, * Gives light
as he walks.' His English name was
originally Dick Jim, corrupted into Big
.Tim. He was born on the Sabine res.,
Texas, in 1834, and in 1872 became chief
of the Kispicothaband, commonly known
as Big Jim's band of Absentee Shawnee.
Big Jim was of illustrious lineage, his
grandfather being Tecumseh and his
father one of the signers of the **Sam
JIM (shawkEE)
Houston treaty^' Iwtweerv the Cherokee
and affiiiate^l trilje? and the Republic of
Texasi, Feb. 23, ]S3(l He waa probabl/
the rnoat i-onservative meml>er of his
trilie. In the full ahHjriginal l>elief that
thu earth was hi*^ mother and that nhe
m 115*1 not hftf winintUMi In' tillhig *jf the
f*oil, he refuHeil until tht^ laj^t t.f> receive
thr aUotnient^ of laml that had been
frirt'ed uptm bin band m Oklahoma^ and
ufi€*d every nieatij* to overcome the en-
iToflchnients of civilissatjon. For the
purix)ae of iimiitij: fi placi.^ whrre hi^ peo-
ple would Ite frft^ from iii'^lestHtl<*ru he
went to Mexico in UM\ and whiU^ there
wa*s stricken with smallpox in Au^'ustj
an d ill eii . H e w aw s ucceeiJ ed Vjy h i a o n 1 y
^m, Tononio, who is now (I9tli>) about
3(> years of age.
B"ig KstU©. t^ee Soiiajitiivmga^
BULL. 30]
BIG MOUTH BILOXI
147
Big Month. A chief of the Brulo Sioux,
though an Oglala bv descent. A contem-
porary of Spotted Tail, and bs highly re-
garded by his tribe for his manly and
warlike qualities as the latttT, though of
less historical note. He is spoken of
(Ind. Aff. Rep., 316, 1869) as one of the
princi{)al chiefs at Whetstone agency on
the Missouri, where most of the Brule
and Oglala bands had gathered. The
stand taken by Big Mouth in reference to
the relations of the Sioux with the whites
caused him to gain steadily in influence
and power. Spotted Tail, having vi.sited
Washington and other' cities, where he
was much f^ted, returned with chanjyred
views as to the Indian policy, a fact
seized upon by Big Mouth to disparage his
rival. Realizing that the tide was turn-
ing against him, Spotted Tail, in 1873 or
1874, called at the lodge of Big Mouth, who
on appearing at the entrance wa.M seized
by two warriors and hel<l by them while
Spotted Tail shot him dea<l. ( c. t. )
Big-mash. A note<l western Cherokee,
known to the whites also as Hard-mush
and among his people as (Tatrifl''wa*li
('bread m^einto balls or lumps'), killed
by the Texans in 1889.— Mooney in 19th
.Rep. B. A. E., 1900. See Bon I.
Big Keck. See Moiinahonga.
Big Bock. A point on Shiawassee r.,
in lower Michigan, at which in 1820 the
Chippewa had a reservation. — Saginaw
treaty (1820) in U. S. Ind. Treaties, 142,
1873.
Big Swamp Indians. A name applie<l
to Seminole, principally of the Mikasuki
division, near Miccosukee lake, Leon co.,
Fla. — McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes,
II, 157, 1854.
Long Swamp Indians.— Ibid.
Big Tree. See Adoeette.
Bihi Konlo. One of the 5 hamlets com-
posing the Choctaw town of Imongal-
asha. — Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ.,
VI, 432, 1902.
Biktasatetnse (*very bad lodges': a
Crow name) . A subtribe or band of the
Crows or of some neighboring tribe; ap-
parently the same as Ashiapkawi.
A-shi-ap'-ka-wi.— Hayden, EthnoR. and Philol.
Mo. Val., 402, 1H62. Bik-U'-Mi-te-tu'-se.— Ibid.
^ Biloxi. A name of uncertain meaning,
apparenHy from the Choctaw language.
They call themselves Taneks haya, 'first
people.' A small Siouan tribe formerly
living in s. Mississippi, now nearly or quite
extinct. The Biloxi were supix^sed to
belong to the Muskhog^ean stock until
Gatscnet visited the survivors of the tribe
in Louisiana in 1886 and found that many
of the words bore strong resemblance to
those in Siouan languages, a determination
folly substantiated in 1 892 by J. Owen Dor-
sey. To whatparticulargroupof theSiou-
an family the tribe is to be assigned has not
l)een determined; but it is probable that
the closest athnity is withDorsey'sDhegi-
ha group, so called. The first direct notice
of the Biloxi is that by Iberville, who
found them in U>V)9 about Biloxi bay, on
the ^iilf coast of Mississippi, in connection
with two other small tribes, the Paska-
gula and Moctobi, the three together
numbering only alxmt 20 cabins (Margrv,
Dec, IV, 195, 1S80). The Biloxi removed
to the w. shore of Mobile bay in 1702.
In 1761 .Jefferys spoke of them as having
been n. e. of ('at id., and of their subse-
quent removal to the n. w. of Pearl r.
llutcbiiis, in 1784, mentions a Biloxi vil-
lajre on the w. side of tlie Mississippi, a
little below the Paskagula, containing
.SO warriors. According to Sibley (1805)
a part of the Biloxi came with some
French, from near Pensacola, about 1763,
and settled first in Avoyelles parish. La.,
on Red r., whence they "moved higher
up to Ixapide Bayou, and from thence to
the mouth of Ri'gula de Bondieu, a divi-
sion of Red r., about 40 m. l)elow Natchi-
toch, where they now live, and are reduced
to about 30 in numl>er." Berguin-Duval-
lon (1806) mentions them as in two vil-
lages, one on Re<l r., 19 leagues from the
Mississippi, the other on a lake called
Avoyelles. He also refers to some as being
wanderers on Crocodile bayou. School-
craft said they numl)ere<l 55 in 1825. In
1828 (Hul. Soc. Mex. Geog., 1870) there
were 20 families of the tribe on the e. bank
of Neches r., Tex. Porter, in 1829 (School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 596), gave the num-
ber as 65 living with the Caddo, Paska-
gula, and other small tribes on Red r.,
near the Texas frontier, and in 1846 But-
ler and I^ewis found a Biloxi camp on
Little r., a tributary of the Brazos in
Texas, al>out two days' journey from the
latter stream. After this little was heard
of them until 1886. According to Gat-
schet there were in that year a few Biloxi
among the Choctaw and (^addo, but he
visited only those in Avoyelles parish,
La. In 1892 Dorsey found about a dozen
of the trilH^ near Lecompte, Rapides
parish. La., but none remained at Avo-
yelles. From the terms they used and
information obtained Dorsey concluded
that prior to the coming of the whites the
men wore the breechcloth, a belt, leggings,
moccasins, and garters, and wrapped
around the body a skin robe. Featner
headdresses and necklaces of bone, and
of the bills of a long-legged redbird (fla-
mingo?) were worn, as also were nose-
rings and earrings. The dwellings of the
people resembled those found among the
northern tribes of the same family, one
kind similar to the low tent of the Osage
and Winnebago, the other like the high
tent of the Dakota, Omaha, and others.
It is said they formerly made pottery.
us
BIORKA BIRD-STONE8
[b.*a. e.
They made wooden bowls, horn and bone
implements, and baskets. Tattooing was
practised to a limited extent. Descent
was through the female line, and there
was an elaborate system of kinship. The
charge of cannibalism was made against
them by one or two other tribes; this,
however, is probably incorrect. Dor-
sey recorded the following clan names:
Itaanyadi, Ontianyadi, and Nakhotod-
hanyadi. See Dorsey in Proc. A. A. A. S.,
XLii, 267, 1893; Mooney, Siouan Tribes of
the East, Bull. 22, B. A. E., 1894; McGee
in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897, and the au-
thorities cited ])elow.
Ananis.— Doc of 1699 in French, Hist. Coll., ii, 99,
1875. Anaxis.— Margry, D<^c., IV, 113, 1880. An-
nocchy.— Iberville (1699) in Margry, D6q., iv, 172.
1880. Baliuuu— Brown, West. Gazett., 133, 1817,
Baluxie.— Woodward. Remin., 25, 1859. Belochy.—
Neill, Hist. Minn.. 173, 1858. BelocM.— Bull. Soc.
Mex. Geog., 207, 1870. Beloxi.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 72,
20th Cong., 1(>4, 1829. Beluxii.— Doc. of 1764 in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 641, 1856. Beluxy.—
Biog. and Hist. Mem. N. W. La., 526, 1890.
Bilcxcs.— Beniuin-Duvallon, Trav. in La., 97,
1806. Billoxie.— Ex. Doc. 21, 18th Cong., 2d
sess., 5, 1825. Billoxis.— Butel-Diimont, Louisi-
ane, i, 134, 1753. Bilocohi.— Gravier (1701) in
French, Hist. Coll., ii, 88, 1875. Bilocohy.— Iber-
ville (1699) in Margry, D^c, iv, 172, 1880. Bil-
ooci.— Ibid..473. Biloccis.— Ibid. BUochy.— Ibid.
IM. Bilocohi.— Coxe, Carolana, 31, 1741. Bilo-
cohy.—Ibid., 30. Biloui.— Berquin-D u v a 1 1 on ,
Trav. in La.. 91, 1806. Biloxi — Sauvole (1700) in
MarKrv. IK'C, iv, 451, 1880. Biloxit.— Penicaut
(1699) in French, Hi.st. Coll., n. s., 38, 1869. Bil-
oxy.— Iberville(1700) in Margry. D^c.,iv, 425,1880.
BiluM.— Miehler in Rep. Sec. War, 32. 1850. Bil-
uxi.— Michler (1849) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 67, 31st
Cong., Istsess.. 5, 1850. Binuxth.— Gatschet, Caddo
and Yatassi MS., B. A. E., 66 (Caddo name).
Binu'x«hi.— Ibid., 73. Blu'-kci.— Dorsey, inf'n,
1881 (Caddo name). B'loku.— Oatschet, MS.,
B. A. E., 1886 (Choctaw name). Bolixes. —Parker
(1854 ) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 702, 1855. Bo-
liJdes.— Schoolcraft, ibid., iv, 561, 1854. Boluzas.-
Siblev. Hist. Sketches, 80, 1806. Boluxes.— Keane
in Stanford, Compend., 503, 1878. Boluxie.— But-
ler and Lewis (1846) in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th Cong.,
2d sess., 3, 1847. Boluxies.— Bonnell, Texas, 140,
1840. Paluxiei.- Parker (18.54) in Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, v, 702, 18.55. Paluxuet.- Parker, Un-
explored Texas, 221, 18.56. PolukMOgi.— Gatschet.
('reek MS., B. A. E. (('reek name). Poutouosis.—
Berquin-Duvallon, Trav. in La., 94, 1806 (mis-
print). Tangkaay^a.- 1 orseyinProc. A. A. A. S.,
XLII, 267, 1893 (own name; varients are Tanfks
anjfadi, Tanfks hanyadi, 'first people').
Biorka (Swed.: ^jorA; 6. = Birch id.).
An Aleut village on Biorka id. near IJna-
laska, Alaska. Pop. 44 in 1831, 140 in
1880, 57 in 1890.
Borka.- Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 20, 1884.
Saydankoodcoi.— Elliott, Ck)nd. Aff. Alaska, 225,
1875 (from Siginak. written "Slthanak" bySauer,
quoted by Biiker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901; Aleut
name of the island, sig. 'curled'). Bedankor-
■ko«.— Veniaminof, Zaplski, il, 203, 1840. Bida-
nak.— Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., map, 1855. Bi-
dankin.— Sauer quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet.
Ala.ska, 1901. TJgifi-ug.— Veniaminof quoted by
Baker, ibid, (own name).
Birch Biver. A local name applied to
the Maskegon (Swampy Cree) res., near
lower Saskatchewan r., Saskatchewan,
Canada, and to the Indians gathered on
it. — Can. Ind. Aff., passim.
Bird-8tone8. A name given to a class of
prehistoric stone objects of undetermined
purpose, usually resembling or remotely
suggesting the form of a bird. In many
cases the resemblance is so slight that
without the aid of a series of specimens,
grading downward from the more real-
istic bird representations through succes-
sive simplifications, the life form would
not be suggested. In ita simplest form
the body is an almost featureless bar
of polished stone. Again, the ends are
curved upward, giving a saddle shape; but
usually the head, tail, and eyes are differ-
entiated, and in
the more graphic
forms the tail is
expanded and
turned upward
to balance the
head. The most
remarkable fea-
ture is the pair of
projecting knobs,
often on rather
slender stems,
representing the
eyes, giving some-
what the effect of
a horned animal.
These objects are
most plentiful in
the Ohio valley
and around the
great lakes, and
occur sparingly in
the S. and to the
westward beyond
the Mississippi.
Although many
kinds of stone
were used in their
manufacture, the
favorite material
was a banded
slate which oc-
curs over a wide
areain the North-
ern states and in
Canada. They
are shaped with
much care, being
symmetrical and
highly polished.
The under side is flat or slightly concave,
and there are two perforations at the ex-
tremities of the base intended to serve in
attaching the figure to the surface of some
object, as a tablet, a pipe stem, a flute, or a
staff or baton, or to some part of the cos-
tume, or to the hair. There is good reason
to believe that these and the various re-
lated objects — banner stones, boat-stones,
etc. — had kindred uses in religious cere-
mony or magic (see Problematical objects),
Gillman (Smithson Rep. 1873, 1874) waa
informed by an aged Chippewa ** that in
olden time these ornaments were worn on
the heads of Indian women, but only after
BIRD-SMAPEO STONES. O, EPIOOTE;
Ohio (i-s). b, Bandco Slate;
NEW YORK (1-4). c, BANOEO
Slate; Pennsylvania, d, Aroil-
lite; Ohio (1-4). e, BANDED
Slate; Ontario (i-s). /, Bar-
like form; Bandeo Slate; Ohio
(1-6)
BULL. 30]
BIRDWOMAN BLACKBIRD
149
marriage," and sugjijests that the bird-
Btones may have symbolized the brooding
bird. Abbott (Primitive Industry, 370)
published a statement originating with Dr
E. Stirling, of Cleveland, Ohio, that ' ' such
bird effigies, made of wood, have been no-
ticed among the Ottawa of Grand Trav-
erse bay, Mich., fastened to the top of
the heads of women as an indication that
they are pregnant." The probability,
however, is that these bird-stones were
used or worn by the men rather than by
the women, and Gushing' s theory that
they w ere attached to a plate and fixed to
thehair is plausible.
See Abbott, Primitive Industry, 1881;
Beauchainp in Bull. N. Y. State Mus.,
18V)7; Bovle in Rep. Minister of Educa-
tion, Ontario, 1895; Fowke (I) in 18th
Rep. B. A. E., 1896, (2) Archa-ol Hist.
Ohio, 1902; Gillman in Rep. Sniithson.
Inst. 1878, 1874; Moorehead, (1) Bird-
stone Ceremonial, 1899; (2) Prehist.
Impls., 1900, (8) in Am. -Anthrop., ii,
1900; Rau in Smithson. Cont., xxii,*187G;
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribt^s, i-vi, ' 1851-5();
Squier and Davis in Smithson. Cont., i,
1848. (w. H. H.)
Bird woman. See Sacagawea,
Bis. A Chumashan village w. of Pue-
blo de las Canoas (San Buenaventura),
Ventura co., Cal., in 1542. — Cabrillo
(1542) in Smith, Col. Docs. Fla., 181, 1857.
Bisani. A Pima settlement 8 leagues s.
\v. of Caborca, in the present Sonora,
Mexico, of which it was a visita in Span-
ish colonial times. Pop. 178 in 1730.
Biiani.— Rudo Ensayo (1762) , 152, 1H63. Jesus Karia
Basani,— Doc. of 1730 quoted bv Bancroft, No Mex.
States, I, 514, 1886.
Bishkon. One of the towns forming
tl>e noted ^'Sixtowns" of the Choctaw,
situated a few miles from the present
Garlandsville, in the x. part of Jasjier
CO., Miss.
Bishkon.— Gatschet. Creek Migr. Lep.. i. 109.18H4.
Bishkun Tamaha.— Halbert in Ala. Hist. .<oc. Publ.,
1,382,1901.
Bissarhar ('Indians with many bri-
dles*). A division of the Apache under
chiefs Goodegoya and Santos in 1873-
75. — White, Apache Names of Indian
Tribes, MS., B. A. E.
Bissasha ( Blssa-dsha^ ' black Inrries are
ripe there). A former Choctaw town on
the w. side of Little Rock cr., Newton
CO., Ga. Judging from the stone imple-
ments and other debris lying scattered
over its site, the town covered an area of
about 10 acres, making it a rather small
town as Choctaw towns were generally
built. — Brown in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ.,
VI, 442, 1902.
Bishapa.— Romans, Florida, map, 1772 (probably
Identical).
Bifltchonigottine. A division of the
Etchaottine on Bistcho lake, Mackenzie
Ter., Canada.
Bes-tchonhi-Gottine.— Petitot. Aiitour du Lac des
Flsclaves, 339, 1891.
Bithahotshi (Navaho: 'red place on
top,' referring to the color of the sand-
stone rocks; the second // = German rh.)
The name of a mesa, and, bv extension,
of a valley in which a trading store is
situated, about half-way ])etween Hol-
brook and the Hopi village.^ in x. e. Ari-
zona. The name is sometimes employed
to designate a group of ancient pueblo
ruins in and near the valley.
Biddahoochee.— Hough in Rep. 'Nat. Mus. 1901.
326. 1903. BItahotsi.— Matthews. Navaho Le-
gends. 153, 1897 (correct Navaho name: / -- th.
h :^tTermanch.8 = sh).
Bithani ('folded arms'). A Navaho
clan.
Bi9a'm. — Matthews in .Tour. Am. Folk-lore. in.
103. 1890(f=th ^. Bita'ni.— Matthews.. Navaho Leg-
ends, 30, 1897 (/-th).
Bitnmen. See Bo<iti<, (^emeiit.
Black Beaver. A Delaware guide, born
at the ])re.«ent site of Belleville, 111., in
1806; died at Anadarko, Okla., May 8,
1880. He was present as interj)reter at
BLACK BEAVER (DELAWARE
the earliest coiiference with the Co-
manche, Kiowa, an«l Wichita tribes, held
by Col. Richard Dodge on upper Red r. in
1834, and from then until the close of his
days his services were constantly required
by the Government and were invaluable
to militarv and scientific explorers of the
j)lains and the Rocky mts. In nearlv ev-
ery one of the early transcontinental ex-
peditions he was the most intelligent and
most trusted guide and .scout.
Blackbird. A Chippewa village, com-
monly known as Black Bird's town from
#
150
BLACKBIRD BLACK HAWK
[B. A. B.
a chief of that name, which formerly
existed on Tittibawassee r., Saginaw co.,
lower Michigan, on a reservation sold in
1837. (.1. M.)
Blackbird (Mukatapenaise). A Pota-
watomi chief who lived in the early part
of the 19th century. He was conspicuous
at the masj^acre of the garrison at Ft
Dearborn, Chicago, in Aug., 1812.
Black Bob. Tlie chief of a Shawnee
band, originally a part of the Hatha-
wekela division of the Shawnee, q. v.
About the year 1826 they separated from
their kindred, then living in e. Missouri
on land granted to them about 1793 by
3aron Carondelet, near Cape Girardeau,
then in Spanish territory, and removed
to Kansas, where, by treaty with their
chief, Black Bob, jn 1854, they were given
rights on the Shawnee res. in that state.
Under Black Bob's leadership they re-
fused to remove with the rest of the tribe
to Indian Ter. in 1868, but are now
incorporated with them, either in the
Cherokee Nation or with the Absentee
Shawnee. See Shawneey and consult
Halbert in Gulf States Hist. Mag., i, no.
6, 1903. (.1. M.)
Black Dopf. An Osage village, named
from its chief, 60 m. from the Mission, in
Indian Ter., in 1850; pop. 400.— Smet,
West. Miss, and Missionaries, :i55, 1863.
Black drink ("Carolina tea" ; Catawba
yaupon; Creek a sm-l up utskiy *8mall leaves,'
commonly abbreviated d^m). A decoc-
tion, so named by British traders from
its color, made by boiling leaves of
the Ilex casshie in water. It was em-
ployed by the
tribes of the
Gulf states and
adjacent re-
gion as "medi-
cine" for cere-
monial purifi-
fication. It
was a- power-
ful agent for
the produc-
tion of the
nervous state
and disordered imagination necessary to
"spiritual" power. Hall (Rep. Nat. Mus.,
218, 1885) says that among the Creeks
the li(juid was prepared and drank before
councils in order, as they believed, to in-
vigorate the mind and body and prepare
for thought and debate. It was also used
in the great " busk " or annual green-corn
thanksgiving. The action of the drink in
strong infusion is purgative, vomitive, and
diuretic, and it was long thought that this
was the only effect, but recent investiga-
tion has shown that the plant contains
caffeine, the leaves yielding a beverage
with stimulating qualities like tea and
coffee, and that excessive indulgence
Preparing Black Drink.
produces similar nervous disturbance.
The plant was held in great esteem by the
southern Indians, and the leaves were
collected with care and formed an article
of trade among the tribes (Griffith, Med.
Bot. , 1 847 ) . The leaves and tender shoots
were gathered, dried, roasted, and stored
in baskets until needed. According to
Gatschet the Creeks made three potions
from cassine of differing strength for
different uses. In its preparation the
leaves, having been roasted m a pot, were
added* to water and boiled. Before
drinking, the Indians agitated the tea to
make it frothy. Tea made from the Ilej:
casswe is still sometimes used by white
people in localities where the shrub
grows. Personal names referring to the
black-drink ceremony were very com-
mon, especially among the Creeks and
Seminole. The name of Osceola (q. v.),
tlie noted Seminole chief, is properly
Asi-yahdla^ * Black-drink Singer.' The
drink was called dssi-lupiitski by the
Creeks. C. C. Jones (Tomochichi, 118,
1868) calls the drink "foskey." See
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 56, 1888,
and works therein cited; Hale, Ilex Cas-
sine, Bull. 14, Div. Botany, U. S. Dept.
Agriculture, 1891. ' (w. h.)
Blackfoot, Middle, North, and South. Di-
visions of the Siksika proper, q. v.
Black Fox (In&U). A principal chief
of the Cherokee who, under the treaty
of Jan. 7, 1806, by which the Cherokee
ceded nearly 7,000 sq. m. of their lands
in Tennessee and Alabama, was given a
life annuity of $100. He was then an old
man. In 1810, as a member of the na-
tional council of his tribe, he signed an
enactment formally abolishing the cus-
tom of clan revenge hitherto universal
among the tribes, thus taking an impor-
tant step toward civilization. — Mooney
in 19th Kep. B. A. E., 87, 1900.
Black Hawk (Ma'kat(twxmeshekd^ka<^,
from ma'katdwl *it is black, mishi *big,*
kd'kd<^ 'chest,' the name referring to the
description of a bird, or sparrow hawk. —
W. J. ). A subordinate chief of the Sauk
and Fox Indians and leader in the Black
Hawk war of 1832. He was bom at the
Sauk village at the mouth of Rock r.. 111.,
in 1767, and belonged to the Thunder
gens of the Sauk tribe. When only 15
years of age he distinguished himself in
war; and before he was 17, at the head
of a war party of voung men, he attacked
an Osage camp of 100 persons and came
away safely with the scalp of a warrior.
The next party that he led out, however,
he brought to a deserted village, on ac-
count of which all except 5 of his party
left him; but with these he kept on and
brought away 2 scalps with which to
efface his disgrace. At the age of 19 he
led 200 Sauk and Foxes in a desperate
BULL. 30]
BLACK HAWK
151
engagement with an eiiual number of
Osage, destroying half or his opponents,
kilhng 5 men and a woman with his own
hands. In a subsequent raid on the
Cherokee his party killed 28, with a loss
of but 7; but among the latter wa« his own
father, who was guardian of the tribal
medi(!ine, hence Black Hawk refrained
from war during the 5 years following
and endeavored to acquire greater super-
natural power. At the end of that time
he went against the Osage, destroyed a
camp of 40 lodges, with the exception of
2 women, and himself slew 9 persons.
On a subsetjuent expedition against the
Cherokee in revenge for his father's
death he found only 5 enemies, 4 men
and a woman. The latter he carried off,
but the men he released, deeming it no
honor to kill so few.
On the outbreak of the war of 1812
Black Hawk, with most of his people,
joined the British and fought for them
throughout, committing many depreda-
tions on the l)order settlements. After-
ward, in opposition to the head chief,
Keokuk, who cultivated American friend-
ship, he was leader of the British sympa-
thizers who traded at Maiden in f3refer-
ence to St Ix>uis.
By treaty of Nov. 8, 1804, concluded at
St Louis, the Sauk and F'oxes had agreed
to surrender all their lands on the e. side
of the Mississij>pi, but had lx»en left un-
disturbed until the (country should be
thrown open to settlement. After the
conclusion of the war of 1812, however,
the stream of settlers pushe<l westwanl
once more and began to pour into the
old Sauk and Fox territory. Keokuk
-and the majority of his people, bowing
to the inevitable, soon moved across the
Mississippi into the present Iowa, l)ut
Black Hawk declined to leave, maintain-
ing that when he had signed the treaty
of St Jjonis he had l)een deceived re-
garding its terms. At the same time he
entered into negotiations with the Win-
nebago, Potawatomi, and Kickapoo to
enlist them in concerted opposition to the
aggressions of the whites.
By the spring of 1831 so much friction
had taken place between the settlers and
Indians that Gov. Reynolds, of Illinois,
was induced to call out the militia. Gen.
Gaines, desiring to avoid the expense of
a demonstration, summoned Black Hawk
and his friends to a convention at Ft
Armstrong, but a violent scene followed
and the convention came to nothing.
On June 15 the militia left their camp at
Rushville and marched upon Black
Hawk's village. Finding that Black
Hawk and his people had effected their
escape shortly before, they burned the
lodges. Immediately afterward Gaines
demanded that all the hostile warriors
should present themselves for a peace
talk, and on June 30 Black Hawk and 27
of his followers signed a treaty with Gov.
Reynolds by which they agreed to abstain
from further hostilities and retire to the
farther side of the Mississippi.
During the following winter Black
Hawk, like his great Shawnee predeces-
sor, Tecumseh, sent emissaries in all
directions to win various tribes to his
interest, and is said to have endeavored,
though unsuccessfully, to destroy the au-
thority of his own head chief, Keokuk,
or commit him to a war against the
whites. On Apr. 1, 1832, Gen. Atkinson
received orders to demand from the Sauk
and Foxes the chief members of a band
who had massacred some Menominee the
■
^ m
& W
1
¥%. m
^i
1
M
F
kJ
S^,
LM
atf^
BLACK HAWK- (aFTER CATUn)
year l)efore. Arriving at the rapids of
bes Moines r. on the 10th, he found that
Black Hawk had recro8se<l the Missis-
sippi 4 days previously at the head of a
band estimated at 2,000, of whom more
than 500 were warriors. Again the mili-
tia were called out, while Atkinson sent
word to warn the settlers, and collected
all the regular troops available.
Meantime Black Hawk proceeded up
Rock r., expecting that he would be
joined by the Winnebago and Potawat-
omi, but only a few small bands re-
sponded. Regiments of militia were by
this time pushing up in pursuit of him,
but they were poorly disciplined and
unused to Indian warmre, while jealousy
existed among the commanders. Two
brigades under Isaiah Stillman, which
had pushed on in close pursuit, were met
by 3 Indians bearing a nag of truce; but,
other Indians showing themselves near
by, treachery was feared, and in the con-
152
BLACK HAWK BLACK KETTLE
[b. a. e.
fusion one of the bearers of the flag was
shot down. A general but disorderly
pursuit of the remainder ensued, when
the pursuers were suddenly fallen upon
by Black Hawk at the head of 40 warriors
and driven from the field (May 14, 1832)
in a disgraceful rout. Black Hawk now
let loose his followers against the frontier
settlements, many of which were burned
and their occupants slain, but although
able to cut off small bands of Indians the
militia and regulars were for some time
able to do little in retaliation. On June
24 Black Hawk made an attack on Ap-
ple River fort, but was repulsed, and
on the day following defeated Maj. De-
ment's battalion, though with heavy loss
to his own side. On July 21, however,
while trying to cross to the w. side of
Wisconsin r. he was overtaken by volun-
teers under Gen. James D. Henry and
crushingly defeated with a loss of 68
killed and many more wounded. With
the remainder of his force he retreated
to the Mississippi, which he reached at
the mouth of Bad Axe r., and was about
to cross when intercepted by the steamer
Warrior^ which shelled his camp. The
following day, Aug. 3, the pursuing
troops under Atkinson came up with his
bana and after a desperate struggle
killed or drove into the river more than
150, while 40 were captured. Most of
those who reached the other side were
subsequently cut off by the Sioux.
Black Hawk and his principal warrior,
Nahpope, escaped, however, to the north-
ward, whither they were followed and
captured by some Winnebago. Black
Hawk was then sent E. and confined
for more than a month at Fortress Mon-
roe, Va., when he was taken on tour
through the principal E. cities, every-
where proving an object of the greatest
interest. In 1837 he accompanied Keo-
kuk on a second trip to the E., after
which he settled on Des Moines r. near
lowaville, dying there Oct. 3, 1838. His
remains, which had been placed upon the
surface of the ground dressed in a mili-
tary uniform presented by Gen. Jackson,
accompanied by a sword also presented
by Jackson, a cane given by Henry Clay,
and medals from Jackson, John Quincy
Adams, and the city of Boston, were stolen
in July, 1839, and carried away to St
Louis, where the body was cleaned and
the bones sent to Quincy, 111., for articu-
lation. On protest being made by Gov.
Lucas of the territory of Iowa, the bones
were restored, but the sons of Black
Hawk, being satisfied to let them stay in
the go vernor*s office, they remained there
for some time and were later removed to
the collections of the Burlington Geolog-
ical and Historical Society, where they
were destroyed in 1855 when the building
containing them was burned. See Auto-
biography of Ma-ka-tai-me-she-kia-kiak,
edited by J. B. Patterson, 1882, a life by
Snelling, and The Black Hawk War, by
Frank E. Stevens. (j. r. s.)
Black Hawk. A village marked on
Royce's map (First Rep. B. A. E., 1881)
about Mount Auburn, Shelby co., Ind.,
on land sold in 1818. Probably a Del-
aware settlement. (j. m.)
Black Hoof. See Catahecassa.
Black Indians. Mentioned by Bonte-
mantel and Van Baerlein 1656 ( N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist, 1, 588, 1856). They and
**the Southern Indians, called Minquas,**
are spoken of as bringing furs to trade
with the Dutch on Schuylkill r. Pos-
sibly the Nanticoke, who were said to be
darker than their neighbors. ( j. m. )
Black Kettle. An Onondaga chief,
called by the French Chaudihre Noire.
When in the first French war the gov-
ernor in Montreal sent one of his officers
with 300 men to attack the Iroquois at
Niagara, Black Kettle, with 80 warriors,
gave the invaders a long running fight,
from which the latter were the chief suf-
ferers, although his force was in the end
wiped out. In the following season he laid
waste the French settlements in w. Can-
ada. In 1691 the Iroquois planned the
destruction of the French settlements and
trading posts w. of Montreal. Their
plans were revealed to the French com-
mander by captive Indian women who
escaped, and after the defeat of the ex-
peditions the French destroyed parties
that were encamped in their hered-
itary hunting grounds between the
Ottawa and St Lawrence rs. Black
Kettle retaliated by killing Indians who
traded with Montreal and the French
escort sent to guard them. On July 15,
1692, he attacked Montreal and carried off
many prisoners, who were retaken by a
pursuing party; and in the same season he
attacked the party of de Lusignan and
killed the leader. In 1697 he arranged a
peace with the French, but before it was
concluded he was murdered by some
Algonkin while hunting near Cattarau-
gus, although he had notified the French
commander at the fort of the peace ne-
gotiations.
Black Kettle. A Cheyenne chief and
famous warrior whose village on Sand
cr., Colo., was attacked by a force of
Colorado militia under Col. Chivington
in 1864 and a large number of innocent
men, women, and children massacred
and their bodies mutilated. Black Kettle
had come in by direction of Gov. Evans,
of Colorado, and surrendered to Maj.
Wynkoop, U. S. A., who had promised
him protection (Ind. Aff. Rep., 1865, and
Conaition of Indian Tribes, Rep. Jomt
Spec. Com., 1865). On Nov. 27, 1868,
BULL. 30]
BLACK LEG S VILLAGE BLANKETS
153
United States troops under command of
Gen. P. H. Sheridan attacked Black Ket-
tle's village on the Washita, and de-
stroyed it, Black Kettle being killed in
the fight. He was a brother of Gentle
Horse. (o. b. «.)
Black Leg's Village. A former Iroquois
settlement, situated on the n. bank of
Cbnemaugh r., in s. e. Armstrong co.,
Pa.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. K., pi.
clx, 1900.
Black Lodges. According to Grinnell
(Sec. Ot^. Cheyennes, 144, 1905), a local
designation for a part of the Northern
Cheyenne.
Black Mnsoogees. A term applied to 40
to 60 Indians at Parras, Coahuila, Mexico,
^ at the close of 1861. To what particular
N- branch of the Creeks these refugees be-
longed is not known. — Rep. Mex. Bndv.
Comm., 410, 1878.
Blacksnake ( Thaonawyvihe^ * needle or
awl breaker'). A chief, about the close
of the 18th century, of the Seneca Indians,
who lived on their reservation along the
Alleghany r. in Cattaraugus co., N. Y.
His residence was a mile above the vil-
lage of Cold Spring. The date of his
birth is not known, but is supposed to
have been about 1760, as it is stated that
iin 1856 he had reached the age of 96 years.
He was present on the English side at the
battle of Oriskany, N. Y., in 1777, and it
is said that he participated in the Wyo-
ming massacre of 1778, but he fought on
the American side in the battle of Ft
George, N. Y., Aug. 17, 1813. He died
in 1859. (c. T.)
Black-tailed Deers. A Hidatsa band or
secret order. — Culbertson in Smithson.
Rep. 1850, 143, 1851.
Black Thunder (also called Makatanan-
amaki, from ma'katd 'black,' neuemekV^
'thunder.'— W. J.). A Fox chief. He
was the patriarch of the tribe when, at a
council held at Portage, Wis., in July,
1815, he replied to charges of breach of
treaties and of hostile intentions, made by
the American commissioners, with a burst
of indignant eloquence, claiming the pro-
tection of the Government for his tril)e,
that, having smoked the peace pipe, had
remained faithful throughout the war,
and respect also for their title to ancestral
lands. He signed the treaty at St Louis
on Sept. 14, 1815.— Drake, Bk. Inds., 631,
1880.
Black Tiger. A Dakota band of 22
lodges, named from its chief; one of the
bands not brought into Ft Peck agency
in 1872.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 96, 4?d Cong.,
3d sess., 15, 1873.
Black Tortoise. A mythical tribe alleged
to have lived in the Mississippi valley and
to have been conquered and driven away
by the Elk Indians.— Pidgeon, Traditions
of Decoodah, 162, 1858.
Blaesedael (Danish: 'windy valley').
An Eskimo village and Danish post on
Disko bay, w. Greenland, containing 120
people.— Mrs Peary, Joum., 14, 1893.
Blanchard' s Fork. By the treaty of Mau-
mee Rapids, in 1819, a part of the Ottawa
living in Ohio were given a reservation on
Blanchard's fork of the Auglaize, in Ohio,
and became known officially as the Ottawa
of Blanchard's Fork. They sold their
land in 1831 and removed to Kansas, and
later to Indian Territory, where, with
some others of the same tribe, they num-
bered 179 in 1904.
Ottawas of Blanohard'i Creek.— Greenville treaty
(1795) in IT. S. Ind. Treat.. 1033, 1873. Ottawas of
Blanchard*! Fork.— Present official name.
Blankets. In. the popular mind the
North American Indian is everywhere
associated with the robe or the blanket.
The former was the whole hide of a large
mammal made soft and pliable by much
dressing; or pelts of foxes, wolves, and
such creatures were sewed together; or
bird, rabbit, or other tender skins were
cut into ribboufi, which were twisted or
woven. The latter were manufactured
by basketry processes from wool, hair, fur,
feathers, down, bark, cotton, etc., and
had many and various functions. They
were worn like a toga as protection from
the weather, and, in the best examples,
were conspicuous in wedding and other
ceremonies; in the night they were both
bed and covering; for the home they
served for hangings, partitions, doors,
awnings, or sunshades; the women dried
fruit on them, made vehicles and cradles
of them for their babies, and receptacles
for a thousand things and burdens; they
even then exhausted their patience and
skill upon them, producing their finest
art work in weaving and. embroidery;
finallv, the blanket became a standard
of value and a primitive mechanism of
commerce.
In s. E. Alaska originated what is popu-
larly called the Chilkat blanket— a mar-
vel of spinning, weaving, fringing, and
mythic designs. The apparatus for this
seems inadtniuate. The woman hangs
her warp of mountain goat's wool mixed
with shredded cedar bast from a horizon-
tal bar. The long ends are made into
balls and covered with membrane to keep
them clean. Weft is not even wound on
a stick for shuttle, nor is there even the
rudest harness or batten. The details of
the great mythic design are carefully
wrought in by the woman in twined
weaving at the same time that a dainty
lace work is produced on the selvage.
The process ends with a long heavy fringe
from the unused warp. Farther south-
ward on the N. W. coast cedar bast finely
shredded served for the weaving of sort
blankets, which were neatly trimmed
with fur.
154
BLANKETS
[b. i
The Nez Percys and other tribes in the
Fraser-Coluinbia area were extremely
skillful in producing a heavy and taste-
fully decorated blanket in twined weav-
ing from mountain goat's hair with warp
of vegetal fiber, and among the Atlan-
tic and Pacific coast tribes generally
soft barks, wild hemp, rabbit skins, the
down of birds, and the plumes of feathers
were put to the name use. Blankets of
cords wound with feathers were pro-
duced, not only by the Pueblos and cliff-
dwellers but (juite extensively in the E.
as well as in the N. W. These were all
woven with the simplest |)08sible appa-
ratus and by purely aboriginal technical
processei^. They were the groundwork
of great skill and taste and much my-
thology, and were decorated with strips
of fur, fringes, tassels, pendants, bead-
work, featherwork, ana native money.
After the advent of the whites the blan-
ket leaped into sudden prominence with
tribes that had no weaving and had
previously worn rol)es, the preparation
of which was most exhausting. The
European was not slow in observing a
widespread want and in supplying the
demand. When furs became scarcer blan-
kets were in greater demand everywhere
as articles of trade and standards of value.
Indeed, in 1831 a home plant was estab-
lished in Buffalo for the manufacture of
what was called the Mackinaw blanket.
The delegations visiting Washin^on dur-
ing the 19th century wore this article
conspicuously, and in our system of edu-
cating them, those tribes that were un-
willing to adopt modern dress were called
** blanket Indians." In art the drapery
and colors have had a fascination for
portrait painters, while in citizen's gar-
ments the red man ceases to be pictur-
esque.
In the S. W. the coming of Spaniards
had a still more romantic association with
the blanket. Perhaps as early as the
16th century the Navaho, in affiliation
with certain Pueblo tribes, received sheep
and looms from the conauerors. These
were the promise of all that is wrapped
in the words "Xavaho blanket." The
yarn for the finest was procured by un-
raveling the Spanish bayeta, a sort of
baize, and the specimens from this ma-
terial now command high prices. For
coarser work the Navaho sheared their
own sheep, washed the wool, colored it
with their native dyes, and spun it on
rude spindles (consisting of a straight
stick with a flat disk of wood for a fly-
wheel. This coarse and uneven yam
was set up in their regular but primitive
loom, with harness for shifting tne warp,
a straight rod for shuttle, a fork of wood
for adjusting the weft, and a separate
batten of the same material for beating it
home. Only the hands of the weavei
managed all the parts of the operation
with phenomenal patience and skill, pro*
ducing those marvelous creations which
are guarded among the most precious
treasures of aboriginal workmanship.
The popularity of this work proved its
worst enemy. Throujgh the influence of
traders and greatly increased demands
for blankets the art has deteriorated.
Native products were imitated by ma-
chinery. To the Indians were brought
modern dyes, cotton warp, factory yams
and worsted, and utterly depraved pat-
terns, in place of native wool, bayeta,
and their own designs so full of pathos
and beauty. At present a reformation in
such matters is being encouraged, both
by the Government and by benevolent
organizations, for the purpose of restoring
the old art. In this connection should
be mentioned the interesting variety of
effects produced in the Indian blankets
by simple native contrivances. There
are all the technical styles of native hand-
work superadded to the machine work
of the loom, including coiled, twined, and
braided technic. Two-faced fabrics are
produced, having intricate patterns en-
tirely different on the two sides. Differ-
ent Pueblos had their fancies in blankets.
Among these must not be overlooked the
white cotton wedding blanket of the Hopi,
ceremonially woven by the groom for his
bride, afterward embroidered with 8)rm-
bolic desi^s, and at death wrapped about
her body in preparation for the last rites.
In the same tribe large embroidered
cotton blankets are worn by woman im-
personators in several ceremonies; also a
small shoulder blanket in white, dark
blue, and red, forming part of woman* s
**full dress" as well as a ceremonial gar-
ment. From this list should not be
omitted the great variety of Navaho prod-
ucts, commencing with the cheap and
ubiquitous saddle paddings, personal
wrappings, house furnishings, ana ending
in competitions with the world* s. artistry.
There were also the dark embroidered
and white embroidered blanket of Na-
vaho legend. They also wove blankets
with broad bars of white and black
called "chiefs pattern," to be worn by
the head-men. The Zufii, too, wove a
blanket for their priest-chiefs. But they,
as well as the Hopi, had plenty of the
serviceable kinds, of cotton and of wool,
which they made into skirts and tunics;
coarse kinds likewise for domestic use,
robes of rabbit skin, and finer work for
ceremony. The Pima and Maricopa have
abandoned the art lately, but* their con-
geners— the Yaqui, Tarahumare, Mayo,
and Opata — weave characteristic styles.
Consult Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895,
1897; Hodge in Am. Anthrop., viii, no.
BULL. 30]
BLEWMOUIHS BOALKEA
155
3, 1895; Holmes in 13th Rep. B. A. E.,
1896; Matthews (1) in 3d Rep. B. A. E.,
1884, (2) Navaho Legends, 1897; Pepper
in Even' body *s Ma^., Jan. 1902; Stephen
in Am.'Anthrop., vi, no. 4, 1893; Voth
in Am. Anthrop., ii, no. 2, 1900. See
Adommeiitj Clothing^ Dyes and Pigments^
Receptacles^ Weanng. (o. t. m. w. h. )
Blewmonths. Mentioned in a Georgia
tract of 1740 (Force Tracts, i, 3, 1836) ap-
parently as a tribe w. of the Choctaw.
**Accoraingto the French Indians [Choc-
taw] there is a large city where a blue-
lipped people live, of whom they have
often heard it said that if any one tries to
kill them he becomes insane" (Brinton,
Nat. Leg. Chahta-Muskokee Tribes. 10,
1870). Nothing further is known of them.
Bloodv Knife. A famous Arikara war-
rior and chief, who was long in the (Gov-
ernment service. H is father was a H unk-
papa Sioux and his mother an Arikara.
He was bom on the Hunkpapa res.,
N. Dak., but as- he approached manhood
his mother determined to return to her
people and he accompanied her. Prior
to the building of the Northern Pacific
R. R. the mail for Ft Stevenson, N. Dak.,
and other Missouri r. points, was carried
overland from Ft Totten. The high
country e. of the Missouri was at that time
a huntmg ground for hostile Sioux who
had been driven w. from Minnesota
after the massacre of 1862, and so often
were the mail carriers on this route kille<l
that it became difficult to find anyone to
carry the mails. Bloody Knife under-
took the task, and traversing the country
with Indian caution almost always got
the mail through on time. Soon aftt»r
the establishment of Ft Abraham Lin-
coln, N. Dak., a number of Arikara scouts
were engaged for service at the post, and
of these Bloody Knife was the chief. He
was with Gen. Stanley on the Yellow-
stone expedition of 18*73 and took part
in the fighting of that trip; he also accom-
panied Custer to the Black-hills in 1874,
and was one of the scouts with Custer and
Terry's expedition in 1876. On the day
of the Custer fight he was with the other
scouts with Reno's command, took part
in the effort made by them to check the
Indians who were charging Reno's force
while crossing Renocr., and was killed
there, fighting bravely. (o. b. g.)
Blount Indians. A Seminole band, num-
bering 43, under John Blunt, or Blount,
for whom a reserve, 2 by 4 m. on Apa-
lachicola r., Fla., was established in 1823
by the Moultrie Creek treatv ( U. S. Ind.
Treaties, 307, 1837). They went to lower
Chattahoochee r., Ala., before the Semi-
nole war of 1835-42, and after it removed
with the Alibamu to Polk co. , Tex. , where
28 of them survived in 1870 (Ind. Aff.
Rep., 327, 1870).
Blunt Indiani.— Ibid.
Blowgnn. A dart-shooting weapon, con-
si^*ting of a long tube of cane or wood from
which little darts are discharged by blow-
ing with the mouth. The darts are slen-
der splints or weed stems, pointed at one
end and wrapped at the butt with cotton,
thistle down, or other soft material. This
implement was common in the more
southerly parts of the United States, the
habitat of the fishing cane of which it
was made. The Cherokee, Iroquois, and
Muskhogean tribes made use of it. In
1.
;^as;
J
PORTION OF CANE BLOWGUN AND THISTLE-DOWN DART;
CHEROKEE
the National Museum is an example from
ix)uisiana made of four cane stems lashed
together side by side. The Cherokee,
who call the little darts by the same
name as that of the thistle, gather the
heads of thistles at the proper season and
pack them together in the form of a wheel
which they hang in their houses to l)e
made into dartw (Mooney). The north-
ern Ir(K|uois substituted elder stalks for
cane (Hewitt). The Hopi, in certain
ceremonies, blow feathers to the cardinal
jx)ints through tubes of cane (Fewkes).
(O. T. M. )
Bluejacket ( Wei/apierseinrah). An in-
fluential Shawnee chief, lK)rn probably
al)out the middle of the 18th century.
He was noted chiefly as the principal
leader of the Indian forces in tne battle
with (ien. Wayne of Aug. 20, 1794, at
Presque Isle, Ohio. In the nght with Gen.
Harmer in 1790 he was associated in
command with Little Turtle, but in the
battle with Wayne Bluejacket assumed
chief control, as Little Turtle was opi>osed
to further warring and urged the accept-
ance of the offers of peace, but was over-
ruled by Bluejacket. After the defeat of
the Indians, Bluejacket was present at
the conference at Greenville, Ohio, and
signe<l the treaty of 1 795 made with Wayne
at that place. He also signed the treatv
of Ft Industry, Ohio, July 4, 1805. It is
probable that he died soon after this
date, as there is no further notice of him.
I^ter descendants of the same name con-
tinue to l)e influential leaders in the tribe
in the W. (c. t.)
Boalkea. A Pomo village, speaking the
northern dialect, in Scott valley, w. of up-
per Clear lake, Cal. Gibbs, in 1851, gave
them, under the name Moalkai, as one
of the Clear lake groups, w. of the lake,
with a population of 45. (a. l. k.)
Mdal-kai.— Gibb« (1851) in Schoolcraft. Ind.
Tribes, m. 109. 185:^.
156
BOARD OF INDIAN COMMISSIONERS BOATS
[b. a. e.
Board of Indian Commissioners. See
United States Board of Indian Commission'
ers.
Boat Harbor. A Micmac village near
Pictou, Nova Scotia. — Can. Ind. Aff.
R^p. 1880, 46,1881.
Boats. Under this general term are
included various kinds of >vater craft used
throughout North America wherever
waters favored. The P^skirao have two
forms — the man's boat {k'aiak\ Russian
baidarka) and the woman's boat {umink,
Russian baidarra) — made by stretching
a covering of seal hide over a framework
of whale ribs or of driftwood. The
ESKIMO KAIAK. ( MURDOCH)
umiak, or woman's boat, is an open scow
with little modification of bow and stern,
propelled with large oars and a sail made
of intestines; but the man's boat is one
of the most effective devices for water
travel in the world. The man sits in a
small hatch, and, in the lighter forms,
when his water-tight jacket is lashed to
the gunwale he is practically shut in, so
that though the water may pass entirely
over him, scarcely a drop enters the craft.
He moves himself through the water by
ESKIMO UMIAK. (tURNER)
means of a paddle, in most cases a double
one.
Immediately in touch with the skin-
boat countries all around the Arctic, from
Labrador to Kodiak in Alaska and south-
ward to the line of the white birch, east-
ward of the Rocky mts., and including the
country of the great lakes, existed the
birch-bark canoe. With framework of
light spruce wood, the covering or sheath-
ing of bits of tough bark sewed together
HUDSON BAY BIRCH-BARK CANOE. ( TURNER )
and made water-tight by means of melted
pitch, these boats are interesting subjects
of study, as the exigencies of travel and
portage, the quality of the material, and
traditional ideas produce different forms
in different areas. Near the mouth of the
Yukon, where the water is sometimes tur-
bulent, the canoe is pointed at both ends
and partly decked over. On the e. side of
CHIPPEWA DUGOUT. (hOFFMAn)
Canada the bow and the stern of the
canoe are greatly rounded up. A curious
form has been reported by travelers
among the Beothuk of Newfoundland.
On the Kootenai, and all over the pla-
teaus of British Columbia and n. Wash-
ington, the Asiatic form, monitor-shaped,
pointed at either end under the water, is
made from pine bark instead of birch
bark.
From the n. boundary of the United
States, at least from the streams empty-
TLINOIT DUGOUT WITH PAINTED DESIGNS.
(swan)
ing into the St I^wrence southward
along the Atlantic slope, dugout canoes,
or pirogues, were the instruments of navi-
gation. On the Missouri r. iCnd elsewhere
a small tub-shai)ed craft of willow frame
covered with rawhide, with no division
of bow or stern, locally known a:-j the bull-
boat, was used by Sioux, Mandan, An-
kara, and Hidatsa women for carrying
their goods down or across the rivers. It
was so light that when one was emptied a
BALSA OF TULE GRASS, PYRAMID LAKE, NEVADA. (pOWERs)
woman could take it on her back and make
her way across the land. On the w. coast,
from MtSt Elias southward to Eel r., Cal.,
excellent dugout canoes were made from
giant cedar and other light woods, some
of them near I V 100 ft. long. The multi-
tude of islands off the n. coast rendered
it possible for the natives to pass from
one to the other, and thus they were in-
duced to invent seagoing canoes of fine
quality. Here also from tribe to tribe
the forms differ somewhat as to the shape
of the bow and st^rn and the ornamenta-
tion. On the California coast and navi-
BULL. 30]
BOAT-STONES BCEUF
157
gable streams n. of C. Mendocino, well-
made wooden dugout canoes were used ;
wooden canoes, made chiefly of planks
lashed together and calked, were ut-ed
in the Santa Barbara id. region; both
were hnportant elements in influencing
the culture of the people of these sections.
Everywhere else in California, barring
the occasional use of corracles and rafts
of logs, transportation by water was con-
ducted by means of balsas, consisting of
rushes tied in bundles, generally, if not
always, with more or less approximation
to a boat of cigar shape. In certain spots
in California, as on Clear lake among the
Porno and Tulare lake among the Yokuts,
these tule balsas were important factors
in native life; elsewhere in the state
much less so (Kroeber). On the lower
Rio Colorado and in s. central California
the Indians made immense corracle-like
baskets, called by the Spaniards coritas^
which were coated with bitumen or other
waterproofing and used for fording the
streams, laden with both passengers and
merchandise.
Consult Boas, The Central Eskimo, 6th
Rep. B. A. E., 1888; Coues, Garc^s Diary,
1900; Hoffman, The Menomini Indians,
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Murdoch, Eth-
nological Results of the Point Barrow Ex-
pedition, 9th Rep. B. A. E., 1892; Nel-
son, The Eskimo about Bering Strait,
18th Rep. B. A. E., 1899; Niblack, The
Coast Indians of Southern Alaska and
Northern British Columbia, Rep. Nat.
Mus., 1888; Powers in Cont. N. A. EthnoL,
III, 1877; Simms in Am. Anthrop., vi,
191, 1904; Winship in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
407, 1896. See Commerce, Fur trade. Trails
and Trade routes, Travel. (o. t. m. )
Boat-stones. Prehistoric objects of pol-
ished stone having somewhat the shape
of a canoe, the use of which is unknown.
Some have straight
parallel sides and
square ends; moth-
ers the sides con-
verge to a blunt
point. A vertical
section cut length-
wise of either is
approximately tri-
angular, the long
face is more or less
hollow, and there is
usually a perfora-
tion near each end;
some have a groove
on the outer or convex side, apparently to
receive a cord passed through the holes.
Sometimes there is a keel-like projection
in which this groove is cut. It is sur-
mised that they were employed as charms
or talismans and carried about the person.
They are found sparingly in most of the
states E. of the Mississippi r. as well as
Boat-stone of Chlorite; Ten-
nessee (1-3). a, Side; b,
Bottom
Boat-stone of Slate
(1-6)
in Canada. Those in the Northern
states are made principally of slate, in
the S. and W. steatite is most common,
but other varieties of stone were used.
In for 111 yonie of these
object^ approach the
plummets (q.v. ) and are
perforated at one end
for suspension; others
ap})roximate the cones
and hemispheres ((|. v.). Analogous
objects are found on the Pacific coast,
some of which are manifestly modeled
after the native canoe while others resem-
ble the boat-stones of the E., although
often perforated at one end for suspen-
sion. See Problematical ohjerts.
Consult Fowke ( 1 ) in 13th Rep. B. A. E.,
1896, (2) Archa?ol. Hist. Ohio, 1902;
Moorehead (1) Prehist. Impls., 1902,
(2) The Bird-stone Ceremonial, 1899;
Moore, various memoirs in Jour. Acad.
Nat. Sci. Phila., 1894-1905; Rau in Smith-
scm. Cont, XXII, 1876. (a. f. w. h. h.)
Bobbydoklinny. See Nakaidoklini.
Bocachee. See Tomochichi.
Boca del Arroyo (Span. : 'mouth of the
gulch ' )• A Papago village, prol)ably in
Pima CO., s. Ariz., with 70 inhabitants in
1858.
La Boco del Arroyo.— Bai lev in Iiul. Aff. Rep.. 208,
1S5M.
Bocherete. The name of a village given
to Joutel in 1687 by an Ebahamo Indian
and described as being n. or n. w. of the
Maligne (Colorado) r., Tex. The re-
gion designated was at that time occupied
chiefly by Caddoan tribes. The village
can not be definitely classified. See Gat-
schet, Karankawa Inds. ,46, 1891. ( a. c. p. )
Bocrettes.— .loutel (1687) in French, Hist. Coll.
La., I. 138, 1H46. Tserabocherete.— Joutel (1687) in
Margry, Doc, iii. 2S9, 1878 (.- Tsera and Boch-
erete combined). Tierabocretei. — Joutel (1687)
in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 152, 1846.
Bocootawwonauke ('fire people'?). A
tribe mentioned by Powhatan in 1607 as
living N. w. of the falls of James r. at
Richmond, Va., in the highland country,
and as being workers of copper and other
metals (Strachey, Hist. Va., 27, 1849).
Bocootawwanaukes. — Strachey. op. cit., 27. Boooo-
tawwonaukes. — I bid . Booootawwonough. —I bid . , 49.
Bocootowwonocks. — Ibid., 27. Poooughtaonaok. —
Smith,\Vorks, 25, 1884. Pocoughtronaok Ibid., 20.
Bocoyna (oco *pine,' iiia * drips,* hence
'turpentine.' — Lumholtz). A pueblo of
civilized Tarahumare on the e. slope of
the Sierra Madre, in lat. 28° 25^ long.
107° 15'', w. Chil)«ahua, Mexico. .
Bocoyna.— Lumholtz in Seribner'a Mag., xvi, 32,
1894. Oooina.— Lumholtz, Unknown Mex., 1, 134,
1902 (aboriginal name).
Bodkins. See Awls, Needles.
BoBuf, Nation dn. Mentioned in the
Jesuit Relation of 1662 as a tribe against
which the Iroquois that year sent out an
expedition. The name signifies 'Buf-
falo Nation,' but to what people it refers
is unknown; it may have designated
158
BOG AN BOM AZEEN
[B. A. E.
either the Buffalo clan or gens of some
tribe or one of the buffalo-hunting tribes
of the W. (J. M.)
Bogan. A marshy cove by a stream;
called also bogan hole (Ganong in Proc.
and trans. Roy. Soc. Can., 209, 1896).
In a letter (Apr. 8, 1903) Ganong says
further: "A word very much used by
guides and others who go into the New
Brunswick woods is bogmi, a still creek
or bay branching from a stream. Ex-
actly the same thing the Indians call a
pokoloqan. ' ' He thin ks bogan, like logan,
probably the common name in Maine
for the same thing, a corruption of poko-
lognn. Both words, Ganong notes, are
in good local use and occur in articles
on sporting, etc. It is possible that
"bogan hole '* may be a folk etymologiz-
ing of pokologan. In the Chippewa lan-
guage a marsh or bog is tdHogiin.
(A. F. C.)
Boguechito ( ' big bayou ' ) . A Choctaw
band formerly residing in Neshoba co.,
Miss., in a district known by the same
name. — Gatschet, Creek Migr. I^g., i, lOS,
1884.
Bogue Chittoi.— Claiborne (1^13) in Sen. D(k;. U'>8,
28th Cong., 1st sess., 91, 1844.
Bogue Toocolo Chitto {Bok tuklo chitto
*two big bayous'). A former Choctaw
town, which derived its name from its
location at the confluence of Running
Tiger and Sukenatcha crs.,. about 4 m.
N. w. of De Kalb, Kemper co.. Miss. —
Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., vi, 424,
1902.
Bohnapobatin. (Bohnapo-hatin, * western
many houses'). The name applied by
the Pomo living in the region of Clear
lake, Cal., to those living along the upper
course of Russian r.— Gibbs (1851) in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 110, 1853.
Bokea. A former Pomo village situ-
ated in what is known as Rancheria val-
ley, on the headwaters of Navarro r.,
Mendocino co., Cal. (a. l. k. s. a. b. )
Booh-heaf.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
III, 112, 1853.
Bokninuwad ( in part from bok^ ' to find ' ) .
A Yokuts tribe formerly living on Deer
cr. , Tulare co. , Cal. They ceded lands to
the United States by treaty of May 30,
1851, and went on a reservation on Kings
r. (a. l. k.)
Go-ke-nim-noni.— Wessells (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc.
76, 34th Cong., 32, 1857. Po-ken-well.— Royce in
18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 1900. Po-ken-welle.— Bar-
bour in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess.,
265, 1853. Pokonino*.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i,
456, 1874. Po-kon-wel-lo.— Johnston in Sen. Ex.
Doc. 61, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 23, 1852.
Bokongehelas. See Buckongahelas.
Bolas (Span.: 'balls'). A hunting
weapon consisting of two or more balls
of heavy material attached to the end of
a cord by means of shorter cords. The
type weapon is that used by the tribes
of the pampas of South America to en-
tangle the legs of animals. The onlv
weapon of this character found in North
America is that used by the western Es-
kimo for hunting birds^ especially water-
fowl. It consists of from 4 to 10 blocks,
or shaped pieces of bone or ivory, about
the size of a walnut, each attached to a
sinew or rawhide cord 24 to 30 in. long,
and gathered and secured to a short
handle made of grass stems or feathers,
forming a ^rip. In throwing
the bolas it is swung around
the head once or twice, then
released like a sling. During
the first part of their course
the balls remain bunched, but
when they lose speed or come
in contact with an object they
diverge and entangle. In the
hands of the Eskimo the
weapon is effectual at 40 to 50
yds. The bolas is analogous
to the slungshot, to the casse-
t^te of the Plains Indians,
and to the cast-net of s. e. Asia. Zufii
children have a toy which resembles the
bolas. Consult Murdoch in 9th Rep.
B. A. E., 245, 1892; Nelson in 18th Rep.
B. A. E., 184, 1899. (w. h.)
Bolbone. A subdivision of theCholovone,
the northernmost group of the Mariposan
family, residing e. of San Joaquin r. and
N. of Tuolumne r., Cal. (a. l. k.)
Bolbon.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Bolbones.— Chamisso in Kotzebue, Voy., in, 61,
1821. Bulbonei. —Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 453,
1874 (misquoted from Chamisso). Pnlpenet. —
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 30, 1860. Pulponei.—
Ibid. Volvon.— Ibid., Oct. 18, 1861.
Boleck. — See Bowlegs.
Bolinas. A name formerly applied to
the people living in the region of Bolinas
bay, s. of Pt Reyes, Marin co., Cal. Tay-
lor (Cal. Farmer, Mar. 30, 1860) ^ves
Bollanos, an incorrect spelling of Bolinas,
as the name of a small division of the
Olamentke (Moquelumnan stock) for-
merly '*near Bollenos bay, Tamales bay,
Punto de los Reyes, and probably as far
up as Bodega bay." (s. a. b. )
Bolshoigor. A Koyukukhotana village
on Yukon r., 25 m. above the mouth of
Koyulsuk r., Alaska.— Pet roff (1880),
10th Census, Alaska, map, 1884.
Bolshoiger.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901
(after Petroff).
Bomazeen. A chief or sachem of the
Kennebec tribe whose residence was at
Norridgewock, Kennebec r., Me., the an-
cient capital or principal village of the
tribe. He is mentioned as early as 1693
and is known to have died in 1724.
He made a treaty with Gov. Phips in
1693 ; wen t to the fort at Pemaquid, Me. , in
1694 under a flag of truce, and was treacher-
ously seized and cast into prison in Bos-
ton. After his release he waged war for
a time on the settlements, attacking
BULL. aOJ
BONES — BONE-WORK
159
Chelmsford, Sudbury, and other towns in
Massachusetts in '1706, and Saco, Me.,
in 1710. A treaty of peace to which
his name was signed was made at Ports-
mouth, N. H., July 18, 1713. He was
killed by a party under Capt. Moulton
near Taconnet, Me., in 1724; about the
same time his family at Norridgewock
was tired upon, his daughter being killed
and his mother taken prisoner, (c. t. )
Bonei. See Anatomy.
Bone-work. The use of bone and re-
lated, materials, including antler, ivory,
horn, whalebone, turtle-shell, and the
teeth, hoofs, beaks, and claws of many crea-
tures, was almost universal among Indian
tribes. The hardness and toughness of
these materials made them desirable for
many kinds of implements and utensils,
and their pleasing color and capacity for
high polish caused them to be valuei for
personal ornaments. Since both man
and beasts of various kmds have an im-
portant place in aboriginal mythology, it
18 to be expected that in numerous in-
stances their bones had a special sacred
signiticanceand use, as when, for example,
the skulls and paws of small animals were
used for mixing medicine.
Not uncommonly the small bones,
teeth, and claws of various animals, the
beaks of birds, etc., were strung as beads,
were perforated or grooved to be hung as
pendant ornaments or rattles, or were
sewed on garments or other objects of
use. These uses are illustrated in the
necklaces of crab claws and the puffin
beak ceremonial armlets of the Eskimo,
by the bear-tooth necklaces of manv of
the tribes, by the elk tusk embellish-
ments of the buckskin costumes of the
women among the Plains Indians, and
by the small carved bone pendants at-
tached to the edge of the garments of
the ancient Beothuk (see Adornment).
Teeth and small bones, such as the meta-
carpals of the deer, as wel 1 as worked bone
disks and lozenges, were used as dice in
plaving games of chance, and gaming
sticks of many varieties were made of
bone. In precolonial times bone had to
be cut, carve<l, and engraved with imple-
ments of stone, such as knives, scrapers,
saws, gravers, drills, and grinding stones,
and with some of the tril^ the primitive
methods still prevail. Although indis-
pensable to primitive tribes evervwhere,
this material occupies a place o{ excep-
tional importance in the far N. beyond
the limits of forest growth, where the only
available wood is brought oversea from
distant shores by winds and currents.
The Eskimo have the bones of the whale,
seal, walrus, bear, wolf, moose, reindeer,
muskox, and a wild sheep, and the antlers
of the moose and deer, the horns of the
sheep and ox, the teeth of the bear, wolf,
and reindeer, the ivory of the walrus
and narwhal, fossil ivory, the whalelxme
of the right-whale, and the bones of the
smaller quadrupeds and various birds,
and their skill in shaping them and adapt-
ing them to their needs in the rigorous
arctic environment is. truly remarkable.
The larger bones, an the ribs of the whale,
are employee! in constructing houses,
caches, and shelters; for ribs of boats,
runners for sleds, and plates for armor
(Nels(m). B(me, ivory, and antler were
utilized for l)ows, arrows, spears, har-
p)on8, knives, 8cra|)ers, picks, flint-fiak-
ing implements, clubs, boxes, and a
great variety of appliances and tackle
employed in rigging l)oats, in fishing,-
in hunting, in transportation, in pre-
paring the product of the chase for
consumption; for weaving, netting, and
sewing implements, household utensils,
tobacco pipes, gaining iniplenit'iits, toys,
dolls, fetishes, amulets, and artistic
carvings of many kinds. Personal orna-
ments and toilet articles of bone and
kindre<l materials are more numerous in
Alaska, where heads, pendants, hair-
pins, combs, labrets, In^lt clasps, belt
ornaments of reindeer teeth, etc., are
largely made and ingeniously applied.
The artistic work of tlu^e northern
peoples is shown in their extremely
clever carvings in ivory and their engrav-
ings of various ornamental and- pictorial
designs upon objects of use and ornament,
but there seems to \ye sufficient ground
for the opinion that these particular
phases of their art are largely of recent
development and are due to association
with white men and as a result of the
acquisition of metal tools and perhaps
also to some extent to(n:)ntact with Indian
tribes which in their turn have l)een
influenced by the whites. The wide
range and vast numbers of the objects of
art shaped from these materials by the
arctic peoples of the present period will
be more fully aj^preciated by reference
to the- works of Boas, Murdoch, Nelson,
and Turner, in the annual reports of the
Bureau of American Ethnology, and by
a visit to the ethnologic museums.
Bone and the allied substances have
been and are favorite materials with the
tribes of the Pac tic coast. The uten-
sils, implements, ornaments, and to-
temic and symbolic carvings of the N. W.
coast tribes* are often admirable and dis-
play esthetic appreciation of a hi^h order
(Niblack, Boas). Their carvings in bone,
ivory, and antler, often inlaid with aba-
lone, and the graceful and elaborately
carved cups, ladles, and spoons of horn,
are especially noteworthy. The art of
the tribes of the Frazer basin and the
Pacific slope s. of Puget sd. is much
more primitive, though bone was in
160
BONFOUOA BOOKS IN INDIAN LANGUAGES
[B. A. B.
jjeneral use for implements, utensils,
musical instruments, gaming articles,
and ornaments (Abbott, (ioddard. Pow-
ers, Smith), great numbers being pre-
served in our museums. Many of the
tribes of the arid region, the great divide,
the Mississippi valley, and the E. still
employ bone, horn, antler, and turtle-
shell to a large extent, but metal has
largely usurped their place, especially for
implements, hence finds from village sites,
cemeteries, and burial mounds must be
depended on largely for knowledge of the
aboriginal bone-work of these regions.
The ancient Pueblos inlaid some of their
implements and ornaments of bone with
bits of turquoise and other bright stones
(Fewkes, Pepper). Among the tribes of
many sections bones of deer and the
larger birds were used for flutes and
whistles, and shells of turtles for rattles,
and the latter were often made also of
beaks of birds and hoofs and dewclaws
of deer and other animals, or by attach-
ing these articles to parts of the costume,
or to bands for the wrists and ankles.
Champlain illustrates a game drive in
which the drivers appear to be beating
with bones upon clavicles of some large
animal, and among the Plains tribes and
the Pueblos a sort of saw-fiddle in which
sometimes a scapula is drawn over a
nf)tched stick, or over another scapula,
for keeping time in ceremonial dances, is
employed. The mounds of the Missis-
sippi and Ohio valleys and the Southern
states have yielded a wide range of ob-
jects, both useful and ornamental. Of the
former class, awls, fish-hooks, pins, arrow-
points, cutting tools made of beaver
teeth, and scraping tools are the most
important. Of the latter class, beads,
pendants, gorgets, pins, wristlets, etc.,
are worthy of note. There are also bone
whistles and flutes, engraved batons, and
various carvings that would seem rather
to be totem ic and symlx)lic than simplv
useful or ornamental; horns of the buf-
falo and mountain sheep were made into
dippers and cups, and were also, as were
the antlers of deer, utilized in head-
dresses by the ancient as well as by the
present peoples. The scapulae of large
animals formed (convenient hoe blades
and as such were probably universally
employed by the native agriculturists.
A novel use of bones is that of plating
them with copper, illustrated by the
plate<i jawbone of a wolf obtained by
Moore from a Florida mound. In the
wonderful collection of objects from the
Hopewell mound, near Chillicothe, Ohio,
is a human femur engraved with intri-
cate and finely executed symbolic figures
(Putnam and Willoughby).
The literature of this topic is volumi-
nous, though much scattered, and is em-
bodied mainlj^ in reports on field re-
searches published by the Smithsonian
Institution, the National Museum, the
Bureau of American Ethnology, the
Reports of the Minister of Education,
Ontario, the leading museums and acade-
mies, and in works of a more general
nature, such as Moorehead's Prehistoric
Implements and Fowke's Archaeological
History of Ohio. (w. h. h.)
Bonfonca. A former Muskhogean set-
tlement, a short distance n. of L. Pont-
chartrain. La.
Bonifouoat.— Baudry des Lozi^res, Voy. Louisiane,
241,1802.
Bonne Esp^rance. A Montagnais settle-
ment on the islands and mainland at the
mouth of Esquimaux r., on the s. coast of
Labrador. Some Nascapee are probably
there also. — Steams, Labrador, 264, 293,
1884.
Bonostac. Mentioned as a Pima settle-
ment on the upper Rio Santa Cruz, below
Tucson, Ariz., in 1764; but from the loca-
tion it would seem more likely that it was
a Papago rancheria.
BonosUo. — Orozco y Berra. GtHJg., 347, 1864.
Bonostao.— Bandelicr in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv,
472. 1892.
Booadasha ( ' fish-catchers ' ) . A band of
the Crows.
Boo-a-di'-sha.— Morgan. Ant'. Soc, 159, 1877.
Booctolooee. A former Choctaw village
pertaining to the "Sixtowns," situated
on Boguetulukusi cr., a w. affluent of
Chicasawhay r., probably in Jasper co.,
Miss.— W. Fla. map, ca. 1775.
Books in Indian languages. In addi-
tion to dictionaries, versions of the Bible
and the Prayer Book, whole and in part,
Bible stories complete and summarized,
catechisms, and cognate works, the litera-
ture translated into Indian languages
embraces some interesting volumes. In
Greenlandic Eskimo there is an abridged
version of Stoud-Platon's Geography, by
E. A. Wandall (1848); a translation of
Thomas d Kempis' Imitation of Christ,
b>^ Paul Egede (1787, revised 1824); a
History of the World, by C. E. Janssen
(1861), and another by S. P. Klein-
schmidt (1859). Peter Kragh's transla-
tions of Ingemann's V^oices in the Wilder-
ness, and The High Game, Krumma-
cher's Parables and Feast Book, the Life
of Hans Egede, and other books circu-
lated in manuscript. In the Labrador
dialect a geography, by A. F. Eisner, was
published in 1880. Underthe title J/a/<ji>i^a
ekta oicimani ya^ *Sky to traveling he
went,' Rev. S. R. Riggs published in 1857 a
translation of Banyan's Pilgrim's Progress
into the Dakota language of the Siouan
stock. This same lK)ok was translated
into Cree by Archbishop Vincent (1886),
and into Cheyenne by Rev. R. Petter
( 1904). In 1879 Rev. D. W. Hemans pub-
lished a Santee version of Rev. R. Wew-
BULL. 301
BOOMERANGS BOSOMWORTH
161
ton's The King's Highway. Into the Mas-
sachuset dialect of the Algonquian stock
Rev. John Eliot translated in 16(34 Baxter' s
Call to the Unconverted, in 1665 Bayly's
Practice of Piety, about 1687 the Rev. \V.
Perkins' Six Principles of Religion, and
in 1689 Shepard's Sincere Convert. A
Geography for Beginners was published
in Chippewa in 1840, and in Santee Da-
kota in 1876. In 1889 the Rev. C. A.
Goodrich's Child's Book of the Creation
was translated into Choctaw by the Rev.
L. S. Williams. The civilized tribes of
Indian Territory, with the aid of the
Cherokee and adapted alphabets, have
published many laws, text-books, etc., in
the native languages.
Exclusive of occasional text^, more or
less brief, in native languages, to be found
in the periodical literature of anthropol-
ogy, in ethnological and linguistic mono-
graphs, books of travel and description,
etc., there is accumulating a considerable
literature of text« by accrtniited men of
science and other com|)etent observers.
The Chiramesyan stock is represented by
Boas' Tsimshian Texts (Bull. 27, B. A. K.,
1902); the Chinookan by Boas' Chinook
Texts (Bull. 20, B. A. E., 1904), and Kath-
lamet Texts ( Bull. 26, 1901 ) : the Salishan
by Teit and Boas' Traditions of the
Thompson River Indians (1898); the
Wakashan (Kwakiutl-Nootka) by Boas
and Hunt's Kwakiutl Texts (Mem. Am.
Mus. Nat. Hist., 1902-05) ; the Skittagetan
by Swanton's Haida Texts (Bull. 2*^ B.
A. E., 1905); the Athapascan bv God-
dard's Hupa Texts (Publ. Univ. Cal., Am.
Archjeol. and Ethnol., i, 1904), and his
Morphology of the Hupa language (1905)
perhaps belongs here also, likewise Mat-
thews' Navaho Legends (1897) and The
Night Chant (1902); theSiouan by Riggs'
Dakota Grammar, Texts, and Ethnogra-
phy (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ix, 1898),
Dorsey's (pegiha Language (Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., VI, 1890), Omaha and Ponka
Letters (Bull. 11, B. A. E., 1891), and
Osage Traditions (6th Rep. B. A. E.,
1888) ; the Iroquoian by Mooney's Sacred
Formulas of the Cherokee (7th Rep. B.
A. E., 1891), Hewitt's Iroquoian Cosmol-
ogy (2l8t Rep. B. A. E., 1908), and Hale's
Iroquois Book of Rites ( 1883) — the second
records cosmologic mvths, the last the
great national ritual of the northern Iro-
quois. The Algonquian is represented
by scattered texts rather than by books,
although there are to be mentione(i
Brinton's Lenape and Their Legends
(1885), which contains the text of the
Walum Oluniy and the Cree and Siksika
Legends in Petitot's Traditions Indiennes
du Canada Nord-ouest (1887), the scat-
tered texts in the works of Schoolcraft,
Hoffman, etc.; the t^kimo best by the
texts in Boas' Eskimo of Baffin Land and
Bull. 30—05 11
Hudson Bay (Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.,
XV, 1901), and other writings on the
Eskimo, Thalbitzer's Phonetical Study of
the Eskimo Language (1904), and Bar-
num's (iranimatieal Fundamentals of the
Innuit Language (1901 ), the last relating
to the Tununa dialect of Alaska. The
monographs of Miss Alice (\ Fletcher on
the ceremonies of the Pawnee (22d Rep.
B. A. E., 1908), of James Moonev on the
(Jhost Dance Religion (14th Rep. B. A.
E., 1896), the numerous monographs of
Dr Franz Boas on the Bellacoola, the
Kwakiutl, etc., contain much textual
material. The manu.script collection of
the Bureau of American Ethnology is
rich in texts of uiyths, legends, etc. As
a whole, the body of linguistic material,
here brietly noticed, is of increasing mag-
nitude and value. The literature in the
Chinook jargon also furnishes some
titles, e. g., the stenographic |)ericKiical
K(unl(Kff)s Waira, by Father I^ Jeune,
who is also the author of several pamph-
let.**. Worthy of mention is Rev. Myron
Eells' Hymns in the Chinook Jargon
Languajre (lvS78-89), which is not merely
a translation of English verse. See Jiihle
tra}islationt<, DictlondrieK, JVriodicah.
(A. F. c.)
Boomerangs. See Rahhit atich.
Boothroyd. A body of Ntlakyapamuk
Indians of Salishan stock on Eraser r.,
Brit. Col. The name seems to have been
employed to include the towns of Spaim,
Kimus, Tzaumuk, Suk, and Nkattsim.
Pop. 159 in 1902 (Can. Ind. Aff. for
1902, 288).
Boreg-o ('sheep'). An ancient settle-
ment of the Tepecano, now in ruins, situ-
ated on the E. bank of the Rio de
Bolailos, approachable from Monte Es-
cobedo, in Jalisco, Mexico. There is a
native tradition that its people warred
against those of Az(|ueltan after the first
coming of the Spaniards. — Hrdlicka in
Am. Anthrop., v. 409, 1908.
Boring. See Drills and Drilling ^ Shell-
irork', SUme-nork.
Borrados (Span.: ' painted in stripes or
blotches'). A tribe which, according to
Orozco y Berra ((ieo-r., 800, 808, 1864),
formerly re.*<ided in Tainauli]>as, Nuevo
Leon, and Coahuila, x. Mexico. There
is evidence that the tril)e or a portion of
it live<l at one time in Texa.**, as the same
authority ( p. 882) says that the country of
the lower Li pan Indians joined on the e.
that of the Karankawa and Borrados in
the province of Texas. The relationship
of this tribe to the Coahuiltecan group is
expressly affirmed by Bartolome Garcia.
Bosomworth, Mary. A noted Creek
Indian woman, also known as Mary
Mathews and Mary Musgrove, who cre-
ated nuich trouble lor the (ieorgia colonial
government about 1752, nearly rousing
162 BOSTON INDIAN CITIZENSHIP COMMITTEE BOUDINOT [b. a. b.
the Creek confederacy to war against the
English. She seems to have been of high
standing among her own people, being
closely related to leading chiefs both of
the Upper and Lower Creeks, possessetl
of unusual intelligence and knowledge of
English, for which reason, and to secure
her good will, Oglethorpe, the founder of
the colony, made her his interpreter and
negotiator with the Indians at a salary
of $500 per year. About 1749 she mar-
ried her third white husband, the Rev.
Thomas Bosom worth, who, by reason of
his Indian marriage, was given a com-
mission from the colony of South Caro-
lina as agent among the Creeks, and
within a few months had nearly pre-
cipitated civil war among the Indians
and rebellion among the licensed traders.
Being deeply in debt, he instigated his
wife to assume the title of '* Empress of
the Creek Nation," and to make personal
claim, first to the islands of Ossabaw, St
Catharine, and Sapelo, on the Georgia
coast, and afterward to a large territory
on the mainland. Notifying Gov. Ogle-
thorpe that she was coming to claim her
own, she raiseti a large body of armed
Creeks and marched against Savannah.
The town was put in position for defense
and a troop of cavalry met the Indians
outside anct obliged them to lay down
their arms before entering. The proces-
sion was headed by Bosomworth in full
canonical robes, with his "queen" by his
side, followed by the chiefs in order of
rank, with their warriors. They were
received with a military salute and a
council followed, lasting several days,
during which the Indians managed to
regain possession of their arms, and a
ma.ssacre seemed imminent, which was
averted by the seizure of Mary and her
husband, who were held in prison until
they naade suitable apologies and promises
of good behavior, the troops and citizens
remaining under arms until the danger
was over, when the Indians were dis-
n^issed with presents. Nothing is re-
(^orded of her later career. See A ppleton' s
Cyclopjedia of Am. Biog. ; various histo-
ries of Georgia; Bosom worth's MS. Jour.,
1752, in archives B. A. E. (i. m. )
Boston Indian Citizenship Committee.
An association for the protection of the
rights of Indians; organized in 1879 on
the occasion of the forcible removal of
the Ponca. The triV)e returned to their
old home in South Dakota from the"
reservation in Indian Territory. Chief
Standing Bear, released on a writ of ha-
beas corpus, went to Boston, and, on
the plea that most of the signatures in
favor of removal were fraudulent, enlisted
the sympathy of Hon. John D. Long, then
governor of Massachusetts, and other or-
ganizers of this committee, who finally
secured the rescission of the edict and the
restoration of the Dakota reservation. The
committee undertook next to secure citi-
zenship for Indians on the basis of the
payment of taxes, a principle that was
finally denied by the United States Su-
preme Court. When the Dawes bill
granting land in severalty and citizenship
was enacted, the committee devoted its
attention to securing honest allotment.
Since the organization of the Indian
Rights Association in Philadelphia the
Boston committee has confined itself to
securing fair allotments of fertile lands,
with adequate water supply, protecting
homesteads, and especially to defending
and generally promoting the interests of
the more progressive bands of tribes that
were backward in taking allotments. To
safeguard the rights of such and prevent
the sale or lease of the best Indian lands
to whites at nominal prices, the com-
mittee has sought to obtain the dismissal
of corrupt Government agents and in-
spectors whenever such were detected.
Joshua W. Davis is chairman and J. S.
Lock wood secretary (48 Federal st.,
Boston, Mass.).
Bottles. See Pottenj, Receptacles.
Boucfouca. A former Choctaw town
on the headwaters of Pearl r.. Miss.
Bouc-fouca.— Jefferys, French Dom. Am., i, 135,
map, 1761. Bouo-fuoa.— Lattrd, map U. S., 1784.
Bottk-fuka.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 562, 1854.
' Boudinot, Ellas (native name (i&Ui'
gVuGy * male deer ' or * turkey ' ) . A Cher-
okee Indian, educated in the foreign mis-
sion school at Cornwall, Conn., founded
by the American Board of Commissioners
for Foreign Missions, which he entered
with two other Cherokee youths in 1818
at the instance of the philanthropist
whose name he was allowed to adopt.
In 1827 the Cherokee council formally
resolved to establish a national paper, and
the following year the Cherokee Phcenix
appeared under Boudinot' s editorship.
After a precarious existence of 6 years,
however, the paper was discontinued, and
not resumed until after the removal of
the Cherokee to Indian Ter„ when its
place was finallv taken by the Cherokee
Advorntey established in 1844. In 1833
Boudinot wrote "Poor Sarah; or, the
Indian Woman," in Cherokee characters,
published at New Px-hota by the United
Brethren's Missionary Society, another
edition of which was printed at Park
Hill in 1843; and from 1823 to the time
of his death he was joint translator with
Rev. S. A. Worcester of a number of the
Gospels, some of which passed through
several editions. Boudinot joined an
insignificant minority of his people in
support of the Ridge treaty and the sub-
sequent treaty of New Echota, by the
terms of which the Cherokee Nation sur-
BULL. 30]
BOUSCOUTTON BOWLEGS.
163
rendered its lands and removed to Indian
Ter. This attitude made him so unpopu-
lar that on June 22, 1839, he was set upon
and murdered, although not with the
knowledge or connivance of the tribal
oflBcers. See Moonev in 19th Rep. B. A.
E., 1900; Pilling, Bibliography of the
Iroquoian Languages, Bull. B. A. E., 1888.
Bonsooutton. The northernmost divi-
sion of the Cree, living in 1(>58-71 about
the s. shores of Hudson bay. According
to Dr William Jones the Chippewa refer
to the northernmost dwelling place of the
Cree as Ininiwitdskwtining, * at the man's
elbow,* and Antawat-otoskwtining, 'they
dwell at the elbow.' This antdwdt is
probably the term usually prefixed, in
one form or another, to the name Bous-
coutton.
AUouabouBoatouek.— Jes.Rel.,1658, 21,1858. OuUo-
iaoUbouaeottouft.— Tailhan. Perrot. 293. note. 1HI'>4.
Otttaouoii, Bouaeouttoui.— Prise de possess^ion
(1671) in Marerv, Dt^c, i. 97. 1875 (comma evi-
aently inserted by mistake).
Bontt^ Station. A village in St Charles
parish, La., at which lived a camp of
Choctaw who manufactured cane bas-
ketry and gathered the okra which was
ground into gumbo fil^. — Harris, La.
Products, 203, 1881.
Bowl, The (a translation of his native
name, Dum^^tl)^ also called Col. Bowles.
A noted Cherokee chief and leader of one
of the first bands to establish themselves
pjermanently on the w. side of the Misr
sissippi. At the head of some hostile
Cherokee from the Chickamauga towns
he massacred all of the male members of
a party of emigrants at Muscle shoals in
Tennessee r. in 1794, after which he re-
tired up St. Francis r. on the w. side of
the Mississippi, and, his act being dis-
owned by the Cherokee council, who
offered to assist in his arrest, he remained
in that region until after the cession of
liOuisiana Territory to the United States.
About 1824 so much dissatisfaction was
caused by delay in adjusting the boun-
daries of the territory of the Western
Cherokee in Arkansas and the withhold-
ing of their annuities that a party headed
by Bowl crossed Sabine r. into Texas,
where they were joined by bodies of
refugees from a number of other eastern
tribes and began negotiations with the
Mexican government for a tract of land
on Angelina, Neches, and Trinity rs., but
were interrupted by the outbreak of the
Texan war for independence in 1835.
Houston, who had long been a friend of
the Cherokee, entered into a treaty to
assign them certain lands along Angelina
r., but it was rejected by the Texas senate
in 1837, and Houston's successor, Lamar,
declared his intention to drive all the
Indians from Texas. On the plea that
they were entering into a conspiracv with
the Mexican inhabitants, a commission.
'/ A )
Bowlder Outline Repremntim
A Quadruped; South Dakota;
LEMGTM 15 Ft. ( Thomas)
supported by several regiments of troops,
was sent to the Cherokee town on Ange-
lina r. to demand that they remove at
once across the border. On their refusal
they were attacked, July 15-16, 1839, and
defeated in two engagements. Bowl and his
assistant chief. Hard-mush, being among
the many killed. See Mooney in 19th
Rep. B. A. E., 1900. (j. r. s.)
Bowlder outlines. Certain outline sur-
face figures, probably of Siouan origin,
usually formed of bowlders a foot or less in
diameter, though a few consisted of buffalo
bones. The name '* bowlder mosaics"
was first applied to
them by Todd. Ac-
cording to Lewis,
structures of this
type have been found
from w. Iowa and Ne-
braska to Manitoba,
and from w. Minne-
sota through North
and South Dakota to
Montana; but they
appear to be, or rather
to have been, more
frequent in South
Dakota than in any
other section. These remains consist of
animal, human, and other figur^ out-
lined upon the surface of the ground,
usually on elevated sites, the human,
turtle, and serpent figures being by far
the most numerous. In Dakota the out-
lines are generally accompanied with
small stone circles, known to be old
tipi sites. In some instances long lines
of bowlders or buffalo bones and small
stone cairns have been found associated
with them or occurring in their immedi-
ate neigh bo rhooil. Like the bowlder
circles tnese are more or less embedded
in the ground, but this does not necessa-
rily indicate great antiquity; indeed,
their frequent association with tipi cir-
cles seems to denote that they are com-
paratively recent. The accompanying
turtle figure illustrates the type. Among
the Crows of Montana a bowlder outline
figure is made in the form of a woman to
commemorate the unfaithfulnessof a wife.
Consult Lewis in Am. Anthrop., ii,
Apr., 1889, III, Julv, 1890; Simms, ibid.,
n. s., v,374, 1903; Thomas in 12th Rep.
B. A. E., 534, 1894; Todd in Am. Natural-
ist, Jan., 1884. (c. t.)
Bowlegs ( probably corrupted from Bo-
lek). An inferior Seminole chief who
was brought temporarily into notice in
1812 during the Indian war on the Greor-
gia frontier. When early in that year
King Paine, also a Seminole chief, at the
head of sundrv bands of Seminole and
negroes, started on a mission of blood and
plunder, Bowlegs joined him. A small
force under Capt. Williams was met and
164
BOWLEGS TOWN BOXES AND CHESTS
r B. A. E.
defeated Sept. 11. Their force being
considerably increased, they soon there-
after marched from the Alachua towns
to attack Gen. Neuman, who had been
sent against them with orders to destroy
their towns. After 4 severe charges in
which King Paine was killed and Bow-
legs wounded, the Indians were driven
back. With this occurrence Bowlegs
drops from history, though he probably
lived several years longer. In a docu-
ment exhibited in the trial of Arbuthnott
and Ambrister his name is signed Bo-
leck. (t\T.)
Bowlegs Town. A former Seminole
town on Suwannee r., w. Fla. ; named
after an influential Seminole chief early
in the 19th century. — Woodward, Rem-
iniscences, 153, 1859.
Bowles, Colonel, see Boui, The.
Bowls. With the Indian the bowl
serves a multitude of purposes: it is as-
sociated with the supplv of his simplest
needs as well as with ^ his religion. The
materials employed in making bowls are
stone, especially soapstone, horn, bone,
shell, skin, wood, and bark. BowIh are
often adapted natural forms, as shells,
gourds, and concretions, either unmodi-
fied or more or less fully remodeled; and
basket bowls are used by many tril)es.
The use of bowls in the preparation and
serving of food is treated under Dishes
(q. V. ). Bowls are also used in primitive
agriculture for gathering, winnowing,
drying, and roasting seeds, and in con-
nection with milling. With many tribes
bow Is are made from large knots, bemg hol-
lowed out with fireand the knife. InTexas
and Indian Territory plate-like bowls
were made from the wood of the pecan
tree, while poplar, oak, and other woods
furnished others. Some bowls designed
for practical use are no larger than drink-
ing cups, while others, made by or for
children as toys, are not much larger than
a thimble. Some of the smaller ones,
used for mixing medicine, had a small
projection from the edge which served as
a handle, while the typical Pueblo medi-
cine bowl has terraced edges symbolizing
rain clouds, a basket-like handle, and
painted figures of sacred water animals,
such as the tadpole and the frog. The
most ancient permanent cooking utensil
of the Plains tribes was a bowl made by
hollowing out a stone. The Blackfeet
and Cheyenne say that in very early
times they boiled their meat in bowls
made of some kind of soft stone. The
Omaha and others had excellent wooden
bowls, the standard of beauty being sym-
metry of outline and the grain of the
gnarled roots from whit^h they were made.
Among many Indians bowls were used
in games of chance and divination,
in certain ceremonies of the Wahpeton
and Sisseton Sioux and of other tribes a
game was played with plum-stone dice
thrown from a wooden bowl, in the mak-
ing of which great skill and care were
exercised. In some cases the kind of
wood was prescribed. Bowls that had
been long in use for these games acquired
a polish and color unattainable by art,
and were prized as tribal possessions.
The Micmac accorded supernatural pow-
ers to certain of their bowls, and thought
that water standing over night in gammg
bowls would reveal by its appearance
past, present, and future events. Some
bowls were supposed to have mysterious
powers which would affect the person
eating or drinking from them. Bowls
and trays of basketry were used by the
Sioux, Cheyenne, Arapaho, and other
Plains tribes, though not by the Siksika,
in the familiar seed game. These appear
to l)e the only baskets made by these
tribes (Grinnell).
Among the Pueblo tribes the pottery
bowl, like the basket- lx)wl drum of the
Navaho and the Panamint, is frequently
a cult vessel employed in religious cere-
monies, the medicine bowl with its nature
symbols and the sacred meal bowl fur-
nishing familiar examples. Such vessels
are sacrificed to springs or are deposited
in shrines and caves. The ancient Hopi
evidently regarded the concave of the
bowl as the vault of the sky, and pictured
on it stars, birds, and celestial beings.
The food bowls in animal forms, like
those of the N. W. coast, were apparently
associated primarily with the nourish-
ment derived from animals. Wooden
bowls used for religious purposes were
often decorated by the Plams tribes with
incised figures of sacred animals, whose
supposed spiritual power had relation
to the uses of the vessel ; and like expla-
nation may be made of the life-form
decorations sculptured and modeled in
relief and engraved and painted on bowls
of many tribes, ancient and modern. See
Basketrij, Dishes, Food, Games, Pottery,
Receptacles.
Bows. See Arrows.
Boxelder Indians. A branch of the
Shoshoni formerly in n. w. Utah. — Lynde
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 42, 36th Cong., Ist sess.,
38, 1860.
Boxes and Chests. The distribution of
tribes using boxes and chests illustrates
in a striking manner the effect of environ-
ment on arts and customs. Thus wood-
land tribes made boxes of suitable tim-
ber, and the culmination of their manu-
facture is found among the tribes of the
N. W. coast. The Eskimo had a great
variety of small boxes of bone, wood,
whalebone, and ivory, and displayed
extraordinary skill and inventiveness in
their manufacture. This was in large
BULL. 30]
BRAIN BRIGHT EYES
165
measure due to their damp and freezing
environment, in which, though wood was
scarce, boxes were better than pouches
for keeping the contents dry. It ap-
pears that to the introduction of tobacc'o,
percussion caps, and powder is (hie the
great number
of small boxes
manufactured
bv the Eskimo,
although they
had previously
many boxes for
trinkets, lance-
heads, tinder,
etc. Eskimo
boxes are pro-
V i d e d with
cords for fasten-
ing them to the
person to pre-
vent loss in the
snow. Boxes and chests
IVORY BOX FOR Small Articles; Eskimo;
1-3. (Murdoch)
; -- v..^..., being difficult
of transportation even on water, nuist be
looked for chiefly among sedentary tri))es
living in a wooded country. Tribes that
moved freely about stored and transported
their goods in bags, rawhide cases, and
basket wallets. Boxes and chests of wood
are practically
u n known
•among the
Plains tribes,
which had
abundant
skins of large
animals out of
which to make
receptacles for wooden box for whaling amulet; Eskimo;
their posses- ''■ ^"*"'"'°^»)
sions, and the horse and the dog as pack
and draft animals. Some of the Plains
tribes, however, made box-like cases or
trunks of rawhide similar in shape to the
birch-bark boxes of the eastern tribes,
HOUSEHOLD CHESTS WITH CARVED AND PAINTED DESIGNS;
HAIDA; 1-18. (nIBLACk)
and the Sioux made plume boxes of
wood. Objects and materials that could
be injured by crushing or by damp-
ness usually required a box, the most
widespread use of which was for the stor-
ing of feathers. The Plains tribes and
some others made parfleches, or cases of
rawhide, almost as rigid as a wooden box,
for headdresses, arrows, etc.; the Pima,
Papago, and Mohave made basket cases
for feathers; and the Pueblos employed a
])ox, usually excavated from a single piece
of Cottonwood, solely for holdmg the
feathers used in ceremonies. The Yurok
of California made a cylindrical wooden
box in two sections for storing valuables.
The eastern woodland tril)es made l)oxes
of birch bark. The X. W. coast tribes as
far s. as Washington made large chests
of wood for storing
food, clothing, etc. ;
for cooking, for rip-
ening salmon eggs,
for the interment
of the dead, for
drums and other
WOODEN BOX FOR FEATHERS; HOPI;
1-15. (j. Stevenson)
uses, and these were usually decorated
with carving or painting, or both. These
tribes also made l(nig boxes as (juivers for
arrows, but smaller boxes were not so
common among them as among the Es-
kimo.
Consult Boas, Decorative Art of the
Indians of the North Pacific Coast, Bull.
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., ix, no. 10, 1897;
Kroe])er in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.,
xviii, pt 1, 1902; Nelson, Eskimo about
Bering Strait, ISth Kep. B. A. E., 1899;
Ni black, Coast Indians, Rep. Nat. Mus.
1888, 1890; Stevenson in 2d Rep. B. A.
E., 188.S; Swan, Indians of Cape Flattery,
Smithson. Cont., xvi, 1870; Swanton in
Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., v, pt. 1, 1905.
See Bdt/s and ponoliea, Basketnj, Parfieche^
Jxcceptnrles, Wi tod-work , et(;. (w. ii.)
Brain. See Anatomtf.
Brant, Joseph. See Thtiiiendanegea.
Breastworks. See Fortificafiotia.
Br^che-dent. See Broken Tooth.
Breech-cloth. See CA/Zf/ ///>', Clothing.
Bridge Kiver Indians. A band of Upper
Lillooet occupying the village of Kanlax,
on Bridge r., which flows into the upiHjr
Eraser above Lillooet, Brit. Col.; pop.
108 in 1902.— Can. Ind. Aff., pt. ii, 72,
1902.
Briertown. A former Cherokee settle-
ment on Nantahala r., about the mouth
of Briertown cr., in Macon co., N. C. —
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 524, 1900.
Kinu'gu'layi.— Mooney, ibid, ('brier place').
Kinu'gu'lun'yi.— Ibid." See yautahala.
Bright Eyes. True name, Susette La
Elesche. The eldest child of Eshtamaza,
or Joseph La Elesche, a former head-chief
of the Omaha. She was born in Nebraska
al)out 1850 and attended the Presbyterian
mission school on the Omaha res.
Through the interest of one of her teach-
ers, Susette was sent to a private school
in Elizabeth, N. J., where she made rapid
Erogress in her studies. After her return
ome she taught in a Government day
school on the Omaha res. and exercised a
stimulating influence on the young people
of the tribe. In 1877-78 the Ponca were
forcibly removed to Indian Territory from
166
BRITISH BAND BRULE
[b. a.
their home on Niobrara r., S. Dak. Not
long afterward Susette accompanied her
father to Indian Territory, where he went
to render such help as he could to his sick
and dying relatives among the Ponca.
The heroic determination of the Ponca
chief, Standing Bear, to lead his band back
to their northern home; their sufferings
during their march of more than 600 m. ;
his arrest and imprisonment; and, after
a sharp legal struggle, his release by
habeas corpus, in accordance with Judge
Dundy's decision that "an Indian is a
person" (U. S. r. Crook, 5 Dillon, 453),
led to steps being taken by a committee of
citizens to bring the matter of Indian re-
movals before the public. Arrangements
were made to have Standing Bear, accom-
panied by Susette La Flesche and her
brother, visit the principal cities of the
United States under the direction of Mr
T. H. Tibbies, and tell the story of the
Ponca removal. The name "Bright
Eyes*' was given Susette, and under that
cognomen she entered upon her public
work. Her clear exposition of the case,
her eloquent apj)eal8 for humanity toward
her race, her grace and dignity of diction
and bearing aroused the interest of the
thousands who listened to her. As a re-
sult, a request was urged on the Govern-
ment that there be no more removals
of' tribes, and this request has been re-
spected when practicable. In 1881 Bright
Eyes married Mr T. H.- Tibbies. Later
she and her husband visited England
and Scotland, where she made a number
of addresses. After her return to this
country she lived in Lincoln, Neb., and
maintained activity with her i^en until
her death in 1902. (a. c. f.)
British Band. A former band of the
Sauk and Foxes. See Sauk.
Broken Arrows. A hunting band of
Sioux found on the Platte by Sage (Scenes
in Rocky Mts., 68, 1846); possibly the
Cazazhita.
Broken Tooth. The son of Biauswah
and chief of the Sandy Lake Chippewa,
also referred to as Kadewabedas and Cat-
awatabpta (strictly Ma'kadewAbidis, from
makade * black,' wdbidis * tooth'), and by
the French Breche-dent. He is spoken of
as a little boy in 1768, and is mentioned
in 1805 by Lieut. Z. M. Pike, who be-
stowed on him a medal and a flag, and
according to whom his band at that time
number^ but 45 men. Broken Tooth
was one of the signers of the treaty of
Prairie du Chien, Aug. 19, 1825; his
death occurred in 1828. His daughter
was the wife of Ermatinger, a British
trader. (c. t.)
Brotherton. The name of two distinct
bonds, each formed of remnants of various
Algonquian tribes. The best-known band
was composed of individuals of the Ma-
hican, Wappinger, Mohegan, Pequot,
Narraganset, etc., of Connecticut and
Rhode Island, and of the Montauk and
others from Long Island, who settled in
1788 on land given them by the Oneida
at the present Marshall, Oneidaco., N. Y.,
near the settlement then occupied by the
Stockbridges. Those of New England
were mainly from Farmington, Stonin^-
ton, Groton, Mohegan, and Niantic
( Lyme ) , in Connecticut, and from Charles-
town in Rhode Island. They all went
under the leadership of Samson Occum,
the Indian minister, and on arriving in
Oneida co. called their settlement Broth-
erton. As their dialects were different
they adopted the English language. They
numbered 250 in 1791. In 1833 they re-
moved to Wisconsin with the Oneida and
Stockbridges and settled on the e. side of
Winnebago lake, in Calumet co., where
they soon after abandoned their tribal rela-
tions and became citizens, together with
the other emigrant tribes settled near
Green Bay. They are called Wapanachki,
"eastern people," by the neigh Iwring
Algonquian tnbes.
The other band of that name was com-
posed of Raritan and other divisions of the
Dela wares who, according to Ruttenber
(Tribes Hudson River, 293, 1872), occu-
pied a reservation called Brotherton, in
Burlington co., N. J., until 1802, when
they accepted an invitation to unite with
the Stockbridges and Broth ertons then
living in Oneidaco., N. Y. In 1832 they
sold their last rights in New Jersey. They
were then reduced to about 40 souls ana
were official I y recognized as Dela wares
and claimed territory s. of the Raritan as
their ancient home. Their descendants
are probably to be found among the
Stockbridges in Wisconsin. (j. m.)
Brotherton.— Ft Schuyler treaty (1788) quoted by
Hall, N. W. States, 66, 1849. Brothertown.— Kirk-
land (1795) in Mass. Hi.st. Soo. Coll., 1st s., IV,
67-93, 1795. Kign'tkfa.— J. N. B. Hewitt, inf'n,
1886 ('they two are brothers': Tascarora name).
Wapanaohki.— See Abnaki.
Brownstown. A former Wyandot vil-
lage in Wayne co., Mich., included in a
reservation of about 2,000 acres granted to
the Wyandot, Feb. 28, 1809, and ceded
to the United States by treatv of Sept. 20,
1818.
Brul^ ( * burned,' the French translation
of Sichdiigxu, * burnt thighs,' their own
name, of indefinite origin). A subtribe
of the Teton division of the great Dakota
tribe. They are mentioned by Lewis
and Clark (1804) as the Tetons of the
Burnt Woods, numbering about 300 men,
** who rove on both sides of the Missouri,
White, and Teton rs." In 1806 they
were on the e. side of the Missouri from
the mouth of the White to Teton r.
Hayden (Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val-
ley, 372, 1862) describes the country
BULL. 30]
BRULK
167
inhabited by them in 1856 as on the
headwaters of the White and Niobrara,
extending down these rivers al)Out hah*
their length, Teton r. forming the n.
limit. He ali-o savs tliey were for a num-
ber of years headed by a chief named
TWO STRIKES— BRUL^ SIOUX
Makatozaza, verv friendly to the whites,
who by uniformly good management and
just government kept his people in order,
regulated their hunts, and usually avoided
placing them in the starving situations
incident to bands led by less judicious
chiefs. They were go<xl hunters, usually
well clothed and sui)plied with meat, and
had comfortable lodges and a large num-
ber of horses. They varied their occupa-
tions by hunting buffalo, catching wild
horses, and making war expeditions
against the Arikara, then stationed on the
Platte, or the Pawnee, lower down on that
river.. Every summer excursions were
made by the young men into the Platti^
and Arkansas country in quest of wild
horses, which abounded there at that
time. After emigrants to California and
Oregon began to pass through the Dakota
country, the Bruits suffered more from
diseases introduced by them than any
other division of the tril)e, being nearest
10 the trail. The treaty of Apr. 29, 1868,
between the Sioux bands and the Gov-
ernment was in a large degree brought
about through th(» exertions of Swift
Bear, a Brule chief. Nevertheless, it
was about this time or shortlv after that
a band of Brules took part in the attack on
Maj. Forsyth on Republican r. Hayden
gives 150 as the nund)er of their lodges in
1 856. In 1 890 the U pper Brul(:»s on Rose-
bud res., S. Dak., numbered 3,245; the
Lower Bruit's at Crowxreek and Lower
Brule agency, S. Dak., 1 ,026. Their pres-
ent number as distinct from the other
Teton is not given.
The group is divided geographically
into the Kheyatawichasha or Upper
Bruk's, the Kutawichasha or Lower
Bruk'S, and the Brnles of the Platte.
WIFE OF SPOTTED TAIL— BRUL^ SIOUX
The subilivisions are given by different
authorities as follows:
Lewis and Clark (Discov., 84, 1806): 1
Esahateaketarpar (Isanyati?), 2 War-
chinktarhe, 3 Choketartowomb (Choka-
towela), 4 0zash (see Wazhazha), 5Mene-
sharne (see Mhiisah).
In 1 880 Tatankawakan, a BruM, gave to
J. O. Dorsey the names of 13 bands of the
Brules, Upper and Lower: 1 lyakoza, 2
168
BRULES OF THE PLATTE BUENA VISTA
[b. a. ]
Chokatowela, 3 Shiyotanka, 4 Homna,
5 Shiyosubula, 6Kanghiyulia,7 Pispizawi-
chaaha, 8 Waleghaunwohan, 9 VVach-
eunpa, 10 Shawala, 11 Ihanktonwan, 12
Naklipakhpa, 13 Apewantanka.
Rev. W. J. Cleveland (MS. list, 1884)
enumerates the modern divisions as: 1
Sichanghu, 2 Kakegha, 3 (a) Hinhan-
shunwapa, {h) Shunkahanapin, 4 Hihak-
anhanhanwin, 5 Ilunkuwanicha, 6 Minis-
kuyakichun, 7 (a) Kiyuksa, (h) Tiglabu,
8 Wacheunpa, 9 Waglukhe, 10 Isanyati,
11 Wagineziiyuha, 12 (a) Waleghaonwo-
han, [b) Wakhna, 13 0glalaichichagha, 14
Tiyochesli, 15 Wazhazha, 16 leskachin-
cha, 17 Olienonpa, 18 Okaghawiehasha.
The Bruk's of the Platte, not included
in the above lisfe', area part of the Bruk's
(Stanley in Poole, Among the Sioux, 232,
18S1 ) formerly connected with Whetstone
agency, S. Dak. (j. o. d. c. t. )
Babarole. — Gtiss, Jour., 49, 1807. Bois brulc'. —
Lewis and Chirk, Discov., 21, 1806 (name applied
by the French and eonimonl\ used by the whites;
si'g. 'burnt wood'), bois Ruley. — Clark, MS. co-
dex, quoted by Coues. Lewis and Clark Exped., i,
101. note, 1893. Broule Sioux.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, v. 494, 1855, Brucellares.— Ind. Aflf. Rep.,
29(>, 18t6 (i>robably the Brules). Brule Dakotas.—
Havden, Kthnog.and Philol. Mo. Val., map, 1862.
Brulees.— Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1854.295, 1855. Brule-
Sioux.— Sniithson. Misc. Ct>l., XIV, 19, 1878. Brul-
ies.— Hoffman (1854) in II. R. Doc. 36, 33d Cong.,
2d sess., 3. 1855. Burned.— Smet, Letters, 37, 1843.
Burnt Hip Brule.— Robinson, Letter to Dorsev,
B. A. E., 1879. Burnt Thighs.— Havden, Ethnog.
and Philol. Mo. Val., 290. 1862. Burnt- woods.—
Ruxton, Life in Far West, 111, 1849. Ceet-
shongos.— Corliss, Dak. vocab., 106, 1874. Checher
Kee.— Clark, MS. codex, quoted bv Coues, Lewis
and Clark Exped., i. 101, note. 1893. Ishango.—
Bmckelt in Smithson. Rep., 466. 1876. Se-iang"-
Cos.— Hayden, Ethnog. ana Philol. Mo. Val.. 371,
1862. Si6an^.— Riggs, Dakota Gram, and Diet.,
xvi. 18,V2 ( 'burnt thighs': own name). Sicaugu.—
Hind, Red River Expe<l., ii. 1.54, 1860. Siohan-
f us.— Warren, Dacota Countrv, 16, 18.t6. Si-chan-
00. —.Jackson (1877) quoted by Donaldson in
Nat. Mus. Rep. 1885, 62, 1886. Sitcan-xu.— Coues,
Lewis and Clark Exped., i, 130, 1893. Tetans
of the Burnt Woods.— Ramsey in Ind. AtT. Rep.
1849. 85. 1850. Teton (Bois briile). —Lewis and
Clark, Discov.,34, 1806. Teton (Bois rule).— Amer.
St. Paps., IV, 714, 1832. Tetoni ( Bois brule').— Lewis
and Clark, Discov., 21, 1806. Tetons Brules. —Fam-
ham, Trav., 32, 1843. Tetons of the Boise Brule.—
Lewis and Clark, Exped., l, 146, 1814. Tetons of
the Bumedwood.— M'Vickar, Hist. Exped. Lewis
and Clark. 1. 148. 1842. Tetons of the Burnt- Wood.—
Lewis and ('lark, Exped., i, map, 1814. Wo-ni-to'-
na-his.— Havden, Etnnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.,
290. 1862 (Cheyenne name). Yankton.— Clark,
MS. codex, quoted bv Coues, Lewis and Clark
Exped., 1, 101, note, 1893.
Brnl^s of the Platte. A part of the Brul^
Sioux formerly connected with Whet-
stone agency, 8. Dak. Stanley in Poole,
Among the Sioux, app., 232, 1881.
Brnnean Shoshoni. A band of Wihi-
nasht Shoshoni formerly living on Bru-
neau cr., s. e. Idaho; pop. 300 in 1868. —
Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep., 201, 1868.
Bruno's Village. A former village in San
Diego CO., Cal., said to be Luiseilo, but
possibly Diegueflo or Agua Caliente. —
Haves quoted bv Bancroft, Nat. Races,
I, 460, 1882.
BruBhes. See Painting.
Buckaloon. A former Iroquois village
on the N. side of Allegheny r., Warren
CO., Pa., above the mouth of Oil cr., near
the site of the present town of Irvine. It
was destroyed by Col. Brodhead of the
Continental troops in 1779.
Baeoalooni.— Gtisflefeld, map, 1784. Baoeatoons.—
Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777. Baoeatous.—
Lattrd, U. 8. map, 1784. Buckaloon.- Day, Penn.,
6.53, 1^3. Buokaloons.— Butterficld, Washington-
Irvine Corr., 43, 1882. BufFaloons.— Lotter, map,
ra.l770. Buffler'sTown.- Homann Heirs' map,1756.
Oachimantiagon.— Bellin, map, 1755. Kaonuida-
gon.— Marshall in Mag. Am. Hist., ii, 139 (= 'cut
or broken reed'). Kaohiriodagon. — Joncaire
(1749) in Margry, D<:'C., vi, 675, 1886. PaUle Cou-
pee.—Ibid.
Backer Woman's Town. A former Semi-
nole settlement e. of Big Hammock town,
near Long swamp, central Fla. — Bell in
Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 307, 1822.
Bnckongakelas ( * breaker in pieces ' ) . A
Delaware chief who lived during the Rev-
olutionary period; born in the first half of
the 18th century. He was the son of We-
wandochwalend, apparently a chief of a
Delaware band in Ohio. Buckongahelas
became the head warrior of all the Dela-
ware Indians then residing on Miami and
White rs. Although he took part with
the English against the colonists, he does
not appear to have been cruel to non-
combatants; and Drake (Biog. and Hist.
Inds., ^3, 1837) says he was not only a
great, but a noble warrior, who took
no delight in shedding blood. The
conduct of the English at the battle of
Prestjue Isle, Ohio, in 1794, so disgusted
him that his sympathies were diverted to
the United States. He was present at Ft
Mcintosh, where Beaver, Pa., now stands,
when the treaty of 1785 was made, but
his name is not among the signers. He
was a signer, however, of the treaty of
(jreenville, Ohio, Aug. 3, 1795; of Ft.
Wayne, Ind., June 7, 1803, and of Vin-
cennes, Ind., Aug. 18, 1804. Soon after
signing the last his death occurred, proba-
bly in the same year. His name appears
in* print in various forms. (c. t. )
Buckskin. See Skhi'dressing.
Bnckstown. A Delaware (?) village
marke<l on Royce's map ( 1st Rep. B. A. E.,
1881 ) as on the s. e. side of White r., about
3 m. E. of Anderson, Madison co., Ind.,
on land sold in 1818.
Bnena Vista (Span. : * pleasant view ' ).
A descriptive name applied to one or more
Shoshonean or Mariposan tribes living on
Buena Vista lake, in the lower Kem r.
drainage, California. By treaty of June 10,
1851 , these tribes reserved a tract between
Tejon pa^ and Kem r. and ceded the re-
mainder of their land to the United
States. See Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex.
Doc. 4, 32d Ck)ng., spec, sess., 256, 1853.
Bnena Vista. A prehistoric pueblo ruin
on a high bluff near Solomonsville, on
Gila r., a few miles n. e. of San Jos^, Gra-
BULL. 30]
BUENA VISTA BUFFALO
169
ham CO., s. e. Ariz. It is probably the ruin
which gave the name Pueblo Viejo {q. v. )
to this part of Gila valley. — Fewkes in
22d Rep. B. A. E., 172, 1904.
Pueblo Viejo. — Bandelier <|iiote<i in Art-h. Inst.
Rep., V, 44, 1H81.
Buena Vista. A pueblo of the Xevonie
on the Rio Yaqui, al)out lat. 28°, in So-
nora, Mexico. — Orozco v Berra, Cieog.,
351, 1864.
Baesanet. Mentioned in connection
with Choinoc (Choinok) as a rancheria
N. of Kern r., Cal., in 1775-7(). It evi-
dently bt^longed to the Mariposan family
and lav in the vicinity of Visalia, Tulare
CO. See (Jarces, Diary, 289, 1900.
Baffalo. Remains of the early species
of the bison are found from Alaska to
Georgia, but the ranoje of the j)resent type
(Bison any vi cairns) was chieiiy between
the Rocky and Allejjheny mt.<. While
traces of the buffalo have been found as
far E. as Cavetown, Md., and there is doc-
umentary evi-
dence that the
animal ranged
almost if not
quite to the
Georgia coast,
the lack of re-
mains in the
shell-heaps of
the Atlantic
shore seems to
indicat-eits ab-
sence gener-
ally from that
region , al-
though it was
not unknown
to some of the
tribes living [ _\\^
on the rivers.
The lirst au-
thentic knowle<lge of the bison or buf-
falo by a European was that gained
al)OUt 1530 by Alvar Nufiez C'abeza de
Vaca, who described the animal living
in freedom on the plains of Texas. At
that time the herds ranged from l)elow
the Rio Grande in Mexico n. w. through
what is now e. New Mexico, Utah, Ore-
gon, Washington, an<l British Cohnnbia;
thence crossing the mountains to (ireat
Slave lake they roamed the valleys
of Saskatchewan and Red rs., keeping
to the w. of L. Winnipeg and L. Sffperior
and 8. of L. Michigan and L. Erie to the
vicinity of Niagara; there turning south-
ward to w. Pennsylvania and cross-
ing the Alleghenies they spread over the
w. portion of Maryland, Virginia, North
Carolina, South Carolina, Georgia, and
N. Mississippi and Louisiana. All the
tribes withmthis range depended largely
on the buffalo for food and clothing, and
this depeAdence, with the* influence of
THE BUFFALO OF GOMARA, 1554
the habit« of the animal, profoundly af-
fected tribal customs and religious rites.
This is more clearly seen in the trilx*s w. of
the Mississippi, where the people were in
constant contact with the buffalo during
the summer and winter migrations of the
great northern and southern herds. These
great herds were composed of innumera-
ble snialU rones of a few thousand each,
for the buffalo was never solitary except
by accident. This habit affected the
manner of hunting and led to the organ-
ization of hunting parties under a leader
and to the establishment of rules to insure
an e<iual chance to every member of the
party.
Early writers say that among the tribes
E. of the ^lissou'ri the hunting party,
dividing into four parts, closed the se-
lected herd in a sijuare, then, tiring the
l)rairie grass, pres.^ed in upon the herd,
which, Innng hedged by flame, was
slaughtered. The accuracy of this state-
ment is (jues-
1 tioned bylndi-
1 ans, for, they
say, the only
time the grass
would burn
well was in the
autumn, and at
that time the
animal was
hunted for the
])elt as much
as for food, and
Are would in-
jure the fur.
Fire was some-
times used in
the autumn to
drive the deer
fromtheprairie
into the woods.
In the N. pens were built of tree
trunks lashed together and braced on the
outside, into which the herds were driven
and there killed. Sometimes, as on the
upper Missis.'^ippi, a hunter disguised in a
buffalo skin acted as a decoy, leading the
herd to a precipice where many were
killed by- the headlong plunge. Upon
the plains of Kansas and Nebraska the
hunters formed a circle around the herd
and then, rushing in, shot the animals
with arrows.
The annual summer hunting party gen-
erally consisted of the entire tribe. As the
main supply of meat and pelts was to be
obtainea, religious rites were observed
throughout the time. '* Still hunting"
was forbidden under penalty of flogging,
and if a man slipped away to hunt for
himself, thereby scattering a herd and
causing loss to the tribe, he was punished,
sometimes even to death. These severe
regulations were in force during the tribal
170
BUKONGEHELAS BULLROARER
[B. A. B.
or ceremonial hunt. This hunt occurred
in June, July, and August, when the ani-
mals were fat and the hair thin, the flesh
being then in the best condition for food
and the pelts easiest to dress on both sides
for the making of clothing, shields, packs,
bags, ropes, snowshoes, tent ancl boat
covers. The meat was cut into thin sheets
and strips and hung upon a framework of
j)oles to dry in the sun. When fully
"jerked" it was folded up and put into
parfleche packs to keep for winter use.
A cow was estimated to yield about 45
pounds of dried meat and 50 pounds of
pemmican, besides the marrow, which
was preserved in bladder skins, and the
tallow, which was poured into skin bags.
The sinew of the animal furnished bow-
strings, thread for sewing, and fiber for
ropes. The horns were made into spoons
and drinking vessels, and the tips were
used for cupping purposes; the buffalo
horn was alno worn as insignia of office.
The hair of the buffalo was woven into
reatas, Ix'lt^, and ])ersonal ornaments.
The dried droppings of the animal, known
among plainsmen as * 'buffalo chips,"
were valuable as fuel.
Tribal regulations controlled the cut-
ting up of the animal and the distribution
of the parts. The skin and certain parts
of the carcass belonged to the man who
had slain the buffalo; the remainder was
divided according to fixed rules among
the helpers, whic^ afforded an opportu-
nity to the poor and disabled to procure
food. Butchering was generally done by
men on the field, each man's portion be-
ing taken to his tent and given to the
women as their property.
The buffalo was hunted in the winter
by small, independent but organized par-
ties, not subject to the ceremonial exac-
tions of the tribal hunt. The pelts se-
cured at this time were for bed (ling and
for garments of extra weight and warmth.
The texture of the buffalo hide did not
admit of fine dressing, hence was used for
coarse clothing, moccasins, tent covers,
partieche cases, and other articles. The
hide of the heifer killed in the fall or
early winter made the finest robe.
The buffalo was supposed to he the
instructor of doctors who dealt with
the treatment of wounds, teaching them
in dreams where to find healing plants
and the manner of their use. The mul-
tifarious benefits derived from the animal
brought the buffalo into close touch with
the people: It figured as a gentile totem,
its appearance and movements were re-
ferred to in gentile names, its habits gave
designations to the months, and it be-
came the symbol of the leader and the
type of long life and plenty; ceremonies
were held in its honor, myths recounted its
creation, and its folktales delighted old and
voung. The practical extinction of the
buffalo with the last quarter of the 19th
century gave a deathblow to the ancient
culture of the tribes living within its range.
Consult Allen in Mem. Geol. Survey of
Kentucky, i, pt. ii, 1876; Chittenden, Fur
Trade, 1902; Hornaday in Rep. Nat. Mus.
1887, 1889; Relation of Alvar Nufiez Ca-
beyade Vaca, B. Smith trans., 1871; Win-
ship, Coronado Expedition, 14th Rep. B.
A. E., 1896. (a. c. p.)
Bakongehelas. See Btickongahelas.
Bnldam. A former Pomo village on
the N. bank of Big r. and e. of Mendocino,
Mendocino co., Cal. (s. a. b. )
Bul'-dam Po'-mo.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
Ill, 155. 1877.
BnU. The Butterfly clan of the Hopi.
Bdli.— Bourke. Snake Dance, 117, 1884. Buli win-
wii.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,58», 1900 (tDiti-
ioii.='cl&n'). BuMi wun-wii.— Fewkes in Am.
Anthrop., vn, 4a5, 1894. PovoU.— Voth, Hopi
Proper Names, 102, 1905.
Bull. The Butterfly phratry of the Hopi.
Bu-li'-nya-mii.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vi,367,
1893 ( nya-mti =■ ' people ' ) .
BaliBo. The Evening Primrose clan of
the Honani (Badger) phratry of the
Hopi.
Bu-li'-80.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891.
Balitzeqna. A former pueblo of the
Jemez, in New Mexico, the exact site of
which is not known. — Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, iv, 207, 1892.
Ball Dog Sioux. A Teton Dakota divi-
sion on Rosebud res., S. Dak. — Donaldson
in Nat. Mus. Rep. 1885, 63, 1886.
Ballets Town. Marked on Hutchin's
map in Bouquet's Exped., 1766, as in
Coshocton CO., Ohio, on both sides of
Muskingum r., about half way between
Walhondingr. and Tomstown. Probably
a Delaware village.
Ballroarer. An instrument for pro-
ducing rhythmic sound, consisting of a
narrow, usually rectangular slat of wood,
from about 6 in. to 2 ft. long and \ in. to 2
in. wide, suspended by one end to a cord,
the latter ohen being provided with a
wooden handle. The bullroarer, which
is often painted with symbolic designs, is
whirled rapidly with a uniform motion
about the head, and the pulsation of the
air against the slat gives a characteristic
whizzing or roaring sound. The instru-
ment has also been called whizzer, whiz-
zing stick, lightning stick, and rhombus,
and its use was quite general. In North
America it has been found among the
Eskimo, Kwakiutl, Arapaho, and most
western tribes, including the Navaho,
Apache, Ute, the central Califomian
tnbes (where, among the Pomo, it is
nearly 2 ft. long). Pueblos, and in the an-
cient cliff-dwellings. The Hopi, who re-
gard the bullroarer as a prayer-stick of
the thunder and its whizzing noise as
representing the wind that accompanies
thunderstomas, make the tablet portion
BULL. 30]
BULLS BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
171
from a piece of lightning-riven wood and
measure the length of the string from the
heart to the tips of the fingers of the out-
stretched right hand (Fewkes). The
Navaho make the bullroarer of the same
material, but regard
it as representing the
voice of the thunder-
bird, whose figure
they often paint u j)on
it, the eyes being in-
dicated by inset
pieces of turquoii«e
( Culin ) . Bourke was
led to believe that
the rhombus of the
Apache was made by
the medicine men
from the wood of pine
or fir that had been
struck by lightning
on the mountain tops.
Apache, Hopi, and
Zufii bullroarers bear
lightning ^symbols,
^j i_ • 1 "^ • At APACHE Bullroarer; length
and while m the inches (bourke)
semi-arid region the
implement is used to invoke clouds,
lightning, and rain, and to warn the initi-
ated that rites are being performed, in
the humid area it is used to implore the
wdnd to bring fair weather. The bull-
roarer is a sacred implement, associated
with rain, wind, and lightning, and among
the Kwakiutl, according to Boas, with
ghosts. By some tribes it retains this
sacred character, but among others it has
degenerated into a child's toy, for which
use its European antitype also survives
among civilized nations.
Consult Bourke, Medicine-men of the
Apache, 9th Rep. B. A.E., 1892; Fewkes,
Tusayan Snake Ceremonies, 16th Rep.
B. A. E., 1897; Haddon, Studv of Man,
219, 1898; Lang, Custom and Myth, 39,
1886; Mooney, GhostDance Religion, 14th
Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Murdoch in 9th Rep.
B. A. E., 1892; Schmeltz in Verb. d. Ve-
reins f. naturw. Unterhaltung zu Ham-
burg, IX, 92, 1896. (w. H.)
Bulls. A Hidatsa band or society;
mentioned by Culbertson ( Smithson. Rep.
1850, 143, 1851) as a clan. For a similar
society among the Piegan, see Stumiks.
Balltown. A Shawnee or Mingo vil-
lage of 5 families on Little Kanawha r.,
W. Va.; destroved by whites in 1772. —
Kaufmann, W.'Penn., 180, 1851.
Baokongahelas. See Buckongahelas.
Baqaibava. A former Pima rancheria
of Sonora, Mexico, visited by Kino about
1697-99; situated on San Ignacio r., below
San Ignacio (of which mission it was sub-
sequently a visita), at the site of the
present town of Magdalena. Pop. 63 in
1730, probably including some Tepoca.
(f. w. h.)
Magdalena.— Doc. of 1730 quoted by Bancroft, No.
Mex. States, i, 494, 514, 1884. Magdalena de BuvuiU-
va.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N. M., 358, 1889 (quoting
Mange. 1699). Santa Madalena.— Hardy, Travels,
422, 1829. Santa Magdalena de Buquibava.— Kino
(1694) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th ser., i, 248, 1856.
S[anta] M [aria] Magdalen.— Yen egas. Hist. Cal.,
I, map, 1759. S. Magdalena.— Kino, map (1701)
in Bancroft, Ariz, and N. M., 360, 1889.
Barean of American Ethnology. Tbe
Bureau of (American) Ethnology was
organized in 1879 and was placed by Con-
gress under the suj)ervision of the Smith-
sonian Institution. It was directed that
all the archives, records, and materials
relating to the Indian tribes collected by
the Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region
under the auspices of the Interior Depart-
ment should be transferred to the Insti-
tution for use by the Bureau. Prof.
Spencer F. Baird, Secretary of the Insti- "
tution, recognizing the great value of Maj.
J. W. Powell's services in initiating re-
searches among the western tribes,
selectetl him as the person best qualified
to organize and conduct the work.
The National Government had already
recognized the importance of researches
among the tribes. As earlv as 1795 the
Secretary of War appointed I^onard S.
Shaw deputy agent to the Cherokee with
instructions to study their language and
home life and to collect materials for
an Indian history. President Jefferson,
who planned the Lewis and Clark expedi-
tion of 1804-06, "for the purpose of ex-
tending the internal commerce of the
United States," especially stipulated, in
his instructions to Lewis, the observa-
tions on the native tribes that should be
iiiade by the expedition for the use of
the Government. These were to include
their names and numbers; theextentand
limits of their possessions; their relations
with other tribes or nations; their lan-
guage, traditions, and monuments; their
ordinary occupations in agriculture, fish-
ing, hunting, war, arts, and the imj)le-
ments for these; their food, clothing, and
domestic accommodations; the diseases
prevalent among them and the remedies
they use; moral and physical circum-
stances which distinguish them from
known tribes; peculiarities in their laws,
customs, and dispositions; and articles of
commerce they may need or furnish, and
to what extent; **and considering the in-
terest which every nation has in extend-
ing and strengthening the authority of
reason and justice among the people
around them, it will be useful to acqmre
what knowledge you can of the state of
morality, religion, and information
among them, as it may better enable
those who endeavor to civilize and in-
struct them to adapt their measures to
the existing notions and practices of those
on whom they are to operate." During
much of his life Jefferson, like Albert
172
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGr
[b. a. e.
Gallatin later on, manifested his deep in-
terest in the ethnology of the American
tribes by publishing accounts of his ob-
servations that are of extreme value
to-day. In 1820 Rev. Jedidiah Morse
was commissioned by the President to
make a tour for the purpose of "ascer-
taining, for the use of the Government,
the actual state of the Indian tribes
of our country." The (government also
aided the publication of Schoolcraft's
voluminous work on the Indians. The
various War Department expeditions
and surveys had reported on the tribes
and monuments
encountered in
the W.; the
Hay den Survey
of the Territo-
ries had exam-
ined and de-
scril^ed many of
the cliff-dwell-
ings and pue-
blos, and had
published i>a-
pei'sonthetrihes
of the Missis-
sippi valley, and
Maj. Powell, as
chief of the Sur-
vey of the Rocky
Mountain Re-
gion, had ac-
<'om])lished im-
portant work
amongthetril)es
of the Rio Colo-
ra<lo drainage in
connection with
his geologic il
and geographic-
al researches,
and had com-
mence<l a series
of publications
known as Con-
tributions to
North American
Ethnology. The
Smithsonian In-
stitution had al-
so taken an ac-
tive part in the publication of the results
of researches undertaken by private stu-
dents. The first volume of its Contribu-
tions to Knowledge is The Ancient Monu-
ments of the Mississippi Valley, by Squier
and Davis, and up to the founding of the
Bureau of Ethnology the Institution had
issued upward of 600 papers on ethnology
and archeology. These early researches
had taken a wide range, but in a some-
what unsystematic way, and Maj. Powell,
on taking charge of the Bureau, began
the task of classifying the subject-matter
of tlie entire aboriginal field and the
selection of those subjects that seemed to
require immediate attention. There were
numerous problems of a practical nature
to be dealt with, and at the same time
many less strictly practical but none the
less important problems to be considered.
Some of the practical questions were
readily approached, but in the main they
were so involved with the more strictly
scientific questions that the two could not
be considered separately.
From its inception the Government has
had l)efore it problems arising from the
presence within its domain, as dependent
wards, of more
than 300,000 ab-
origines. In the
main the diffi-
culties encoun-
tered in solving
these problems
arose from a lack
of knowledge of
the distribution,
numbers, rela-
tionshipa, and
languages of the
tribes, and a real
appreciation of
their character,
culture status,
neetls, and possi-
bilities. It w^as
recognized that
a knowledge of
these elements
lies at the very
foundation of in-
telligent admin-
istration, and
thus one of the
important ob-
jects in organiz-
mg the Bureau of
Ethnology was
that of obtaining
such knowledge
of the tribes as
would enable
the several
branches of the
Government to
know and ap-
preciate the aboriginal population, and
that at the same time w'buld enable the
people generally to give intelligent ad-
ministration sympathetic support. An
essential step in this great work was that
of locating the tri})es and classifying them
in such manner as to make it possible to
assemble them in harmonious groups,
based on relationship of blood, language,
customs, beliefs, and grades of culture. It
was found that within the area with which
the nation has to deal there are spoken
some 500 1 ndian languages, as d istinct from
one anotheras French is from English, and
POWELL, FOUNDER AND DIRECTOR OF THE BUREAU OF AMERICAN
ETHNOLOGY
BULL. 30]
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
173
that these languages are grouped in more
than 50 linguistic families. It was found,
further, that in connection with the dif-
ferences in language there are many other
distinctions requiring attention. Tribes
allied in language are often allied alno in
capacity, habits, tastes, social organiza-
tion, religion, arts, and industries, and it
was plain that a satisfactory investigation
of the tribes required a systematic study
of all of these conditions. It was not
attempted, however, to cover the whole
field in detail. When sufficient progress
had been made in the classification of the
tribes, certain groups were selected as
types, and investigations among them
were so pursued as to yield results appli-
cable in large measure' to all. Up to the
present time much progress has l)een
made and a deeper insight has been gained
into the inner life and character of the
native people, and thus, in a large sense,
of prinntive peoples generally, tlian had
been reached before in the world's his-
tory. Many of the results of these re-
searches have already l)een published
and are in the hands of all civilized
nations.
Some of the more directly practical re-
sults accomplished may be briefly men-
tioned: (1) A study of the relations,
location, and numl)ers of the tribes, an(l
their classification into groups or families,
based on affinity in language — a necessary
basis for dealing with the trii)es practi-
cally or scientifically; (2) a study of the
numerous sociologic, religious, and in-
dustrial problems involved, an acquaint-
ance with whi(;h is essential to the
intelligent management of the tribes in
adjusting them to the reijuirements of
civilization; (3) a history of the relations
of the Indian and white races embodied
in a volume on land cessions; (4) investi-
gations into the physiology, medical
practices, and sanitation of a people who
suffer keenly from imperfect adaptation
to the new conditions imposed on them;
(5) the preparation of bibliographies em-
bodying all works relating to the tribes;
(6) a study of their industrial and eco-
nomic resources; (7) a study of the an-
tiquities of the (country with a view to
their record and preservation; and (8) a
handbook of the tribes, embodying, in
condensed form, the accumulated infor-
mation of many years.
The more strictly scientific results re-
late to every department of anthropologic .
research — physical, pychological, lin-
guistic, sociologic, religious, technic, and
esthetic — and are embodied in numerous
papers published in the reportii, contribu-
tions, and bulletins; and the general re-
sults in each of these departments, com-
piled and collated by the highest available
authorities, have now begun to appear in
the form of handbooks.
Maj. Powell, director, died Sept. 23,
1902, and on Oct. 11 W. 11. Holmes was
appointed to succeed him, with the title
of chief. In addition to the chief the
scientific staff of the Bureau comprises
(1000) 7 ethnologists, an illustrator, an
editor, a librarian, and 7 other employees.
Besides the regular scientific members
of the Bureau there are numerous asso-
ciates or collal)orators, including many
of the best-known ethnologists of the
country, who contril)ute papers or who
engage at intervals in research work
under the Bureau's ausjiices. The li-
brary contains al)out 12,000 volumes
and 7,(X)0 pamphlets, accumulated largely
through exchange of pul)lications. There
are about 1,000 linguistic manuscripts,
and 15,000 j)hotographic negatives illus-
trating the aborigines and their activities.
The publications consist of Contribu-
tions to North American Ethnology, An-
nual Reports, Bulletins, Introductions,
and Miscellaneous Publications. The
series of contributions was begun by the
Survey of the Rocky Mountain Region
before the organization of the Bureau, 3
volumes having been completed, and
was discontinued after 8 volumes had
been issued. Twenty-three annual re-
ports, comprising 28 volumes, 30 bulle-
tins (including the present Ilandl)ook), 4
introductions, and 6 miscellaneous pub-
lications have appeared. The present
edition of the annual reports and bulle-
tins is 9,850 copies, of which the Senate
receives 1,500, the House of Representa-
tives 3,000, and the Bureau 3,500 copies.
Of the Bureau edition 500 are distributed
by the Smithsonian Institution. From
the remaining 1,850 copies are drawn the
personal copies of members of Congress,
and 500 for distributicm to (Jovernment
libraries and other libraries throughout
the country, as designated by Congress;
the remainder are sold by the SujHirin-
tendentof Documents, (lovernment Print-
ing ( )ffice. With the excej)tion of the few
disposed of by the Superintendent of
Documents, the publications are distrib-
uted free of charge; the pojmlar demand
for them is so great, however, that the
editions are soon exhausted. The quota
allowed the Bureau is distributed to
libraries, to institutions of learning, and
to collal)orators and others engaged in
anthropologic research or in teaching.
The publications are as follows:
CONTRIBITIONS TO NORTH AMERICAN ETH-
nol(m;v.— Published in part under the auspices
of the Department of the Interior, r. S. Geo-
graphical and Geological Survey of the Rocky
Mountain Region, J. W. Powell in charge. Vols,
i-vn and ix.
174
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
[B. A. B.
Vol. I, 1877:
Part I.— Tribes of the extreme Northwest, by
W. H. Dall.
On the distribution and nomenclature of
the native tribes of Alaska and the adja-
cent territory.
On succession in the shell-heaps of the
Aleutian islands.
On the origin of the Innuit
Aopendix to part i. Linfruistlcs.
Notes on the natives of Alaska, by J. Furu-
helm.
Terms of relationship used by the Innuit: a
series obtained from natives of Cumber-
land inlet, by W. H. Dall.
Vocabularies, by George Gibbs and W. H.
Dall.
Note on the use of numerals among the
T'.Mim si-an', by George Gibbs.
Part II. Tribes of western Washington and
north w&stem Oregon, by George Gibbs.
Appendix to pari ii. Linguistics.
Vocabularies, by George Gibbs, Wm. F.
Tolmie, and G. Mengarini.
Dictionary of the Niskwalli, by George
Gibbs.
Vol. II, 1890:
The Klamath Indians of southwestern Oregon,
by Albert Samuel Gatschet. Two parts.
Vol. Ill, 1877:
Tribes of California, by Stephen Powers. .
Appendix. Linguistics, edited by J. W.
Powell.
Vol. IV, 1881:
Houses and house-life of the American aborig-
ines, by Lewis H. Morgan.
Vol. v,1882:
Observations on cup-shaped and other lapida-
rian sculptures in the Old World and in
America, by Charles Rau.
On prehistoric trephining and cranial amulets,
by Robert Fletcher.
A study of the manuscript Troano, by Cyrus
Thomas, with an introduction by D. G.
Brinton.
Vol. VI, 1890:
The (pegiha language, by J. Owen Dorsey.
Vol. VII, 1890:
A Dakota- English dictionary, by Stephen R.
Riggs, edited by J.Owen Dorsey.
Vol. viii:
[Not issued].
Vol. IX. 1893:
Dakota grammar, texts, and ethnography, by
Stephen R. Riggs, edited by J. Owen Dorsey.
Annual Reports of the Bureau of (Ameri-
can) Ethnology to the Secretary of the
Smithsonian Institution. 23 vols. roy. 8°.
Tint Report (1879-80) , 1881.
Report of the Director.
On the evolution of language, as exhibited
in the specialization of the grammatic processes;
the differentiation of the parts of speech, and
the integration of the sentence; from a study of
Indian languages, by J. W. Powell.
Sketch of the mythology of the North American
Indians, by J. W. Powell.
Wyandot government: A short study of tribal
societv, by J. W. Powell.
On limitations to the use of some anthropologic
data, by J. W. Powell.
A lurther contribution to the study of the mor-
tuary customs of the North American Indians, by
H. C. Yarrow.
Studies in Central American picture-writing,
by Edward S. Holden.
Cessions of land by Indian tribes to the United
States: Illustrated by those in the State of In-
diana, by C. C. Royce.
Sign language among North American Indians,
compared with that among other peoples and
deaf-mutes, by Garrick Mallery.
Catalogue of linguistic manuscripts in the
library of the Bureau of Ethnology, by J. C.
Pilling.
Illustration of the method of recording Indian
languages. From the manuscripts of J. Owen
Dorsey, A. S. Gatschet, and S. R. lliggs.
SMond Report (1880-81 ) , 1883.
Report of the Director.
Zufli fetiches, by F. H. Cushing.
Myths of the Iroquois, by Erminnie A. Smith.
Animal carvings from mounds of the Mississippi
valley, by H. W. Henshaw.
Navajo silversmiths, by Washington Matthews.
Art in shell of the ancient Americans, by W.
H. Holmes.
Illustrated catalogue of the collections obtained
from the Indians of New Mexico and Arizona in
1879, by James Stevenson.
Illustrated catalogue of the collections obtained
from the Indians of New Mexico in 1880, by James
Stevenson.
Third Report ( 1881-82 ) , 1884.
Report of the Director (including On activital
similarities).
Notes on certain Maya and Mexican manu-
scripts, by Cyrus Thoma.s.
On masks, labrets, and ceriain aborigiiuLl cus-
toms, by W. H. Dall.
Omaha sociology, by J. Owen Dorsey.
Navajo weavers, by Washington Matthews.
Prehistoric textile fabrics of the United States,
derived from impressions on pottery, by W. H.
Holmes.
Illustrated catalogue of a portion of the collec-
tions made by the Bureau of Ethnology during
the field season of 1881, by W. H. Holmes.
Illustrated catalogrue of the collections obtained
from the pueblos of Zufii, N. Mex., and Wolpi,
Ariz., in 1881, by James Stevenson.
Fourth Report (1882-83), 1886.
Report of the Director.
Pictographs of the North American Indians.
A preliminary paper, by Garrick Mallery.
Pottery of the ancient Pueblos, by W. H.
Holmes.
Ancient pottery of the Mississippi valley, by
W. H. Holmes.
Origin and development of form and ornament
in ceramic art, by W . H. Holmes.
A study of Pueblo pottery as illustrative of Zufli
culture growth, by F. H. Cushing.
Fifth Report (1883-84), 1887.
Report of the Director.
Burial mounds of the northern sections of the
United States, by Cyrus Thomas.
The Cherokee Nation of Indians: A narrative
of their official relations with the Colonial and
Federal Governments, by C. C. Royce.
The mountain chant: A Navajo ceremony, by
Washington Matthews.
The Seminole Indians of Florida, by Clay
MacCauley.
The religious life of the Zufii child, by Matilda
C. Stevenson.
Sixth Report (1884-85), 1888.
Report of the Director.
Ancient art of the province of Chiriqui, Colom-
bia, by W. H. Holmes.
A study of the textile art in its relation to the
development of form and ornament, by W. H.
Holmes.
Aids to the study of the Maya codices, by Cyrus
Thomas.
Osage traditions^ by J. Owen Dorsey.
The central Eskimo, by Franz Boas.
Seventh Report (1885-86), 1891.
Report of the Director.
Indian linguistic families of America north of
Mexico, by J. W. Powell.
The Midg'wiwin or "grand medicine society "
of the Ojibwa, by W. J. Hoffman.
The sacred formulas of the Cherokees, by James
Mooney.
Eighth Report (1886-87), 1891.
Report of the Director.
A study of Pueblo architecture: Tusayan and
Cibola, by Victor Mindeleff.
Ceremonial of Hasjelti Dailjis and mythical
sand painting of the Navajo Indians, by James
Stevenson.
Ninth Report (1887-^) 1892.
Report of the Director.
Ethnological results of the Point Barrow expe-
dition, by John Murdoch.
DULL. 30]
BUBEAC OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY
175
The medicine-men of the Apache, by John G.
BourJ^e.
Tenth Eeport ( 1888-89) , 1893.
Report of the Director.
Picture writing of the American Indians, by
Garrick Mallery.
Eleventh Eeport (1889-90), 1894.
Report of the Director.
The Sia, by Matilda C. Stevenson.
Ethnology of the Ungava district, Hudson bay
territory, by Lucien M. Turner.
A study of Siouan cults, by J. Owen Dorsey.
Twelfth Report (1890-91), 1894.
Report of the Director.
Reporton themound explorations of the Bureau
of Etnnology, by Cyrus Tnomas.
Thirteenth Report (1891-92), 1896.
Report of the Director.
Prehistoric textile art of eastern United States,
by W. H. Holmes.
Stone art, by Gerard Fowke.
Aboriginal remains in Verde valley, Arizona,
by Cosmos Mindeleff.
Omaha dwellings, furniture, and implements,
by J. Owen Dorsey.
Casa Grande ruin, by Ciwmos Mindeleff.
Outlines of Zufli creation myths, by F. H.
Cushing.
Fourteenth Report (1892-93), 1896.
Report of the Director.
The Menomini Indians, by Walter J. Hoffman.
The Coronado expedition, 1540-42, by G. P.
Winship.
The Ghost-dance religion and the Sioux out-
break of 1890, by James Mooney.
Fifteenth Report (1893-94). 1897.
Report of the Director (including On regimen-
tation).
Stone implements of the Potomac-Chesapeake
tidewater province, by W. H. Holmes.
The Siouan Indians: A preliminary sketch, by
W J McGee.
Siouan sociology: A posthumous paper, l)y
J. Owen Dorsey.
Tusayan katcinas, by J. Walter Fewkes.
The repair of Casa Grande ruin, Arizona, in
1891, by Cosmos Mindeleff.
Sixteenth Report (1894-95). 1897.
Report of the Director, and list of publications
of the Bureau of American Ethnology.
Primitive trephining in Peru, by M. A. Mui\iz
and W J McGee.
The cliff ruins of Canyon de Chelly, Arizona,
by Cosmos Mindeleff.
Day symbols of the Maya year, by Cyrus
Thomas.
Tusayan snake ceremonies, by J. Walter Fewkes.
Seventeenth Report (1895-96}. 1898.
Report of the Director, and list of publications
of the Bureau of American Ethnology.
The Seri Indians, by W J McGee, with Com-
parative lexicology, by J. N. B. Hewitt.
Calendar history of the Kiowa Indians, liy
James Mooney.
Navaho houses, by Cosmos Mindeleff.
Archeological expedition to Arizona in 1895. ])v
J. Walter Fewkes.
Eighteenth Report (1896-97), 1899.
Report of the Director.
The Eskimo about Bering strait, by E. W.
Nelson.
Indian land cessions in tlie United States, com-
piled by C. C. Royce, with an introduction by
Cyrus Thomas.
Nineteenth Report (1897-98). 1900.
Report of the Director (including Esthetolo^y,
or the science of activities designed to give
pleasure) .
Myths of the Cherokee, bv James Mooney.
Tusayan migration traditions, by J. Walter
Fewkes.
Localization of Tusayan clans, by Cosmos
Mindeleff.
Mounds in northern Honduras, by Thomas
Mayan calendar svstems, by Cyrus Thomas.
Primitive numbers, by W J McGee.
Numeral systems of Mexico and Central Amer-
ica, by Cyrus Thomas.
Tu.sayan flute and snake ceremonies, by J.
Walter' Fewkes.
The wild-rice gatherers of the upper lakes, a
study in American primitive economics, by A. E.
Jenks.
Twentieth Report ( 189S-99) 1903.
Report »>f the Director (inclu<iing Technology,
or the science of industries; Sociology, or the
science of institutions; Philology, or the science
of activities designed for expression; Sophiology,
or the science of activities designed to give in-
struction; List of publications of the Bureau of
American Ethnology),
Aboriginal pottery of the eastern United States,
bv W. H. Holmes.
Twcnty-flret Report (1899-1900). 190?.
Report of the Director.
Hopi katcinas, drawn by native artists, by
J. Walter Fewkes.
Iroquois cosmogonv. bv J. N. B. Hewitt.
Twenty-second Report (1900-01 ), 1903.
Report of the Acting Director.
Two summers' work in piu'blo ruins, by J.
Walter Fewkes.
Mayan calendar systems— II. by UynisThoma.*?.
The Hako, a Pawnee cerenionv, bv Alice C.
Fletcher.
Twenty-third Report (1901-02), 1904.
Report of the Acting Director.
The Zufli Indians, by Matilda C. Stevenson.
Twenty-fourth Report (1902-0,3), 19a5.
Report of the Chief.
American Indian games, by Stewart Culin.
BULLKTINS.— Thirty volumt»s. 8°.
(1) Bibliography of the Eskimo language, by
J. C. Pilling-, 18M7.
(2) Perforated stones from California, by H. W.
Henshaw. 1887.
(3) The u.se of gold and other metals among
the ancient inhabitants of Chiriqui, Isthmus of
Darien, !)y W. H. Holmes, 1887.
(4) Work in mound exploration of the Bureau
of Ethnology.by Cyrus Thomas, 1887.
(5) Bibliography' of the Siouan languages, by
J. C. PiiliuK. 1«87.
(6) Bibliography of the Iroquoian languages,
by J. C. Pilling. IS88.
(7) Textile fabrics of ancient Peru, bv W. H.
Holmes. 1889.
(8) The problem of the Ohio mounds, bv Cyrus
Thomas. 1889.
(9) Bibliography of the Muskhogean languaKcs,
by J, C. Pilling, 1889,
(10) The circular, square, and octagonal earth-
works of Ohio, by Cyrus Thomas. 1889.
(11) Omaha and Ponka letters, bv J. Owen
Dorsey. 1891.
(12) Catalogue of prehistoric works ea.st of the
Rocky mountains, by Cyrus Thomas, 1891.
(13) Bibliographv of the Algonquian languages,
by J. C. Pilling. 1891.
(14) Bibliography of the Athafiascan languages,
by J. C. Pilling, 1892.
(15) Bibliography of the ('hinookan languages
(including the rhi*no<ik jarjron). bv J. C. Pilling.
1893.
(16) Bibliographv (»f the Salishaii lan^fua^es,
by J. C. Pilling. 1893.
(17) The Pamunkev Indians of Virginia, bv
J. G. Pollard, 1894.
(18) The Maya vear, by Cyrus Thoma.s, 1894.
(19) Bibliography of the Wakashan languages,
by J.C. Pilling. 1894.
(20) Chinook texts, by Franz Boas, 1894.
(21) An ancient quarry in Indian Territory, by
W. H. Holmes. 1894.
(22) The Siouan tribes of the East, by James
Mooney, 1894.
(23) Archeologic investigations in James and
Potomac valleys, by Gerard Fowke, 1894.
(24) List of the publications of the Bureau of
Etnnology with index to authors and subjects,
bv F. W. Hodge, 1894.
(26) Natick dictionary, by J. H. Trumbull,
1903.
(26) Kathlamet texts, by Franz Boas, 1901.
(27) Tsimshian texts, by Franz Boas. 1902.
(28) Mexican and Central American antiquities
and calendar systems, twenty-nine papers, by
176
BUREAU OF INDIAN AFFAIRS BUSK
[ B. A. E.
Ediiaixl Seler, E. Forstemann. Paul Schellhas,
Carl Sapper, and E. P. Dieseldorff, translated
from the German under the supervision of Charles
P. Bowditch.
(29) Haida texts and myths, Skidegate dialect,
by J. R. Swan ton.
(30) Handljook of the Indians north of Mexico,
Parts I and ii.
Introductions.— Four volumes, 4°.
(1) IntHKluction to the study of Indian lan-
guages, by J, W. Powell. 1877.
(2) Introduction to the studv of Indian lan-
guages, 2d edition, by J. W. Pow'ell, 1880.
(3) Introduction to the study of sign language
among the North American Indians, by Garrick
Mallery. 1880.
(4) Introduction to the study of mortuary cus-
toms among the North American Indians, by
H. C. Yarrow. 1880.
Miscellaneous Publications:
(1) A collection of gesture-signs and signals
of the North American Indians, by Garrick Mal-
lery, 1880.
(2) Proof-sheets of a bibliography of the lan-
guages of the North American Indians, by J. C.
Pilling. 1885.
(3) Linguistic families of the Indian tribes
north of Mexico [by James Mo<mey, 1885J.
(4) Map of linguistic stocks of American In-
dians north of Mexico, by J. W. Powell, 1891.
(5) Tribes of North America, with synonomy:
Skittagetan family [by Henry W. Henshaw,
1890].
(6) Di('ti(mary of American Indians north of
Mexico [advance pages], 1903.
(W. H. H.)
Bureau of Indian Affairs.— See Oj(fi<'€ of
Indian Affairs.
Bnrges' Town. A Seminole town, the
exa<'t location of which is unknown, but
it was probably on or near Flint or St
Marys r., s. w.' Ga. — Connell (1793) in
Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., i, 384, 1832.
Burial. See Mortuary ciislomSy Urn
burial.
Burnt Woods Chippewa. A former Chip-
pewa band on Bois Brule r., near the w.
end of L. Superior, x. Wis.
Ohippeways of the Burnt Woods.— Schoolcraft,
Trayels, 321, 1821.
Burrard Inlet No. 3 Beserve. The name
given l)y the Canadian Department of
Indian Affairs to one of 6 divisions of
the Squawmish, c\. v. ; pop. 30 in 1902.
Burrard Saw Hills Indians. The lo<'al
name for a body of Squawmish of Fraser
River agency, Brit. Col.; noted only in
1884, when their number was given as
232.— Can. Ind. Aff., 187, 1884.
Busac. A former rancheria, probably
of the Sobaipuri, visited by Kino about
1697; situated, apparently, on Arivaipa
cr., a tributary of the San Pedro, e. of
old Camp Grant, s. Ariz., although Bemal
(Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 356, 1889)
states that the settlement was on a creek
flowing E.
Busanic. A Pima settlement s. w. of
Guevavi, nearthe Arizona-Sonora bound-
ary, in lat. 31° 10^ long. 111° 10^ visited
by Kino in 1694 and by Kino and Mange
in 1699. It was made a visita of Guevavi
mission at an early date; pop. 253 in 1730,
41 in 1764. See Kino (1694) in Doc.
Hist. Mex., 4th s., i, 252, 1856; Rudo
Ensayo (1763), 150, 1863; Mange quoted
by Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 358,
1889.
Bitanig.— Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 524, 1884.
Busani.— Vllla-Sefior.Theatro Am., pt. 2, 408, 1748.
Busanic— Kino. op. clt. Busnio.— VVnegas. Hist.
Cal., I, map, 1759. Busona.— Box, Adventures,
270, 1869. BuMani.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 347,
1864. Cinoo Senores Busanic. —Sonora materiales
(1780) quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 514,
1884. Ruzany.— Land Office map, U. S., 1881. 8.
Ambrosio Busanic— Kino (1699) quoted by Ban-
croft. No. Mex. States, i, 270, 1884. San Ambrosio
de Busanic— Venegas, Hist. Cal., i, 300, 1759.
Susanna.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue
Welt-Bolt, 74, 1726 (misprint).
Bashamul. A Nishinani village for-
merly existing in the vallev of Bear r.,
Cal. '
Bashonees.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860.
Booshamool. — Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 22,
1874. Bu'-sha-mul. - Powers in Cont. N. A. Eth-
nol.. Ill, 316, 1877. Bushones.— Bancroft, Nat.
Races, i, 450, 1874. Bushumnes.- Hale, Ethnog.
and Philol., 631, 1846.
Bashy Head. See Unadnti.
BaBinauBee ('echo maker,' from hfimjoa-
wag^ 'echo,' referring to the achichdky
crane). A phratry of the Chippewa.
Bus-in-as-see.— Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
V. 46, 1885. Bus-in-aus-e.- Ibid., 44. Bus-in-aus-e-
wug.— Ibid., 88 (plural).
Bask (Creek: ptUkita, 'a fast'). A fes-
tival of the Creeks, by nome early writers
termed the green-corn dance. According
to Gatschet (Creek ^ligr. Leg., i, 177,
1884) the solemn annual festival held by
the Creek people of ancient and modern
days. As this authority points out, the
celebration of the piUkita was an occasion
of anmesty, forgiveness, and absolution
of crime, injury, and hatred, a season of
change of mind, symbolized in various
ways.
The day of l)eginning of the celebra-
tion of the picskitay which took place
chiefly in the **town square," was de-
termined by the niiko, or chief, and his
council; and the ceremony itself, which
had local variations, lasted' for 4 days in
the towns of leas note and for 8 days in
the more important. Hawkins (Sketch,
75, 1848) has left a description of the
busk, or ** boos-ke-tau," as it was carried
out in the white or peace town of Kasihta
in 1798-99. The chief points are as
follows:
First day: The yard of the square is
cleaned in* the morning and sprinkled
with white sand, while the black drink
is being prepared. The fire maker, spe-
cially appointed, kindles new fire by
friction, the 4 logs for the fire being ar-
ranged crosswise with reference to the i
cardinal points. The women of the Tur- ■
key clan dance the turkey dance, while
the very strong emetic called passa is
being brewed; this is drunk from about
noon to the middle of the afternoon.
Then comes the tadpole dance, performed
by 4 men and 4 women known as "tad-
poles." From evening until dawn the
dance of the hiniha is performed by the
BULL. 30]
BUSK
177
men. The "old men's tobacco" is also
prepared on the first day.
Second day: At about 10 o'clock the
women perform the gim dance, so caUe<l
from the men firing guns during its con-
tinuance. At noon the men approach
the new fire, rub some of its ashes on the
chin, neck, and belly, and jump liead-
foremost into the river, and then return
to the square. Meantime the women
busy themselves with the preparation of
new maize for the feast. Before the
feast begins, the men as they arrive rub
some of the maize between their hands
and then on the face and chest.
Third day: The men sit in the square.
Fourth day: The women, who have
risen early for this purpose, obtain some
of the new fire, with which they kindle
a similarlv con.structed pile of logs on
their own hearths, which have previously
been cleaned and sprinkled with sand'.
A ceremony of ash rubbing, plunging
into water, etc., is then performed by
them, after which they taste some salt
and dance the *Mong dance."
Fifth day: The 4 logs of the fire, which
last only 4 days, having been consumed,
4 other lo^ are similarly arranged, and
the fire kmdled as before, after which
the men drink the black drink.
Sixth and seventh days: During this
period the men remain in the town square.
Eighth day: In the s(iuare and outside
•of it impressive ceremonies are carried
on. A medical mixture concocted by
stirring and beating in water 14 kinds ni
plants (the modern Creeks use 15), sup-
posed to have virtue as physic, is used by
the men to drink, to rub over their joints,
etc., after the priests have blown into it
through a small reed. Another curious
mixture, comiwsed chiefly of the ashes
of old corncobs and pine boughs, mixed
with water, and stirred by 4 girls wlio
have not reached puberty, is i)repared
in a pot, and 2 pans of a mixture of white
clay and water are likewise prei)ared after-
ward by the men. The chief and the
warriors rub themselves with some of
both these mixtures. After this 2 men,
who are specially appointed, bring flow-
ers of old men's tobacco to the chief's
house, and each person present receives
a portion. Then the chief and his coun-
selors walk 4 times around the burning
l«gs, throwing some of the old men's
tobacco into the fire each time they face
the E, and then stop while facing the w.
When this is concluded the warriors do
the same. The next ceremony is as
follows:
At the miko's cabin a cane having 2
white feathers on its end is stuck out.
At the moment when the sun sets a
man of the Fish clan takes it down and
walks, followed by all spectators, toward
Bull. 30—05 12
the river. Having gone half way, he
utters the death-whoop, and repeats it 4
times l)efore reaching the water's edge.
After the crowd has thickly congregated
at the bank each person places a grain
of old men's tobacco on tne head and
others in each ear. Then at a signal re-
pt^Ated four times they throw some of it
into the river, and every man at a like
signal plunges into the water to pick up
4 stones from the bottom. With these
they cross themselves on their breasts
4 times, each time throwing 1 of the stones
back into the river and uttering the death
whoop. They then wash themselves,
take up the cane with the feathers, return
to the square, where tliey stick it up,
then walk through the town visiting.
After nightfall conies the mad dance,
which concludes the pu.'<kit(i.
The 4 days' busk, as i>erformed at ()d-
shiapofa (Little Talasse), as witnessed
by Swan, whose account seems to have
l^een reallv made up bv McGillivray
(Gatschet, Creek Migr. Ug., i, 181, 1884),
adds some details concerning the dress of
the fire maker, the throwing of maize and
the black drink into the fire, the prepa-
ration and use of the ])lack drink, and the
interesting addition that any provisions
left over are given to the fire maker.
Other travelers and historians, as Adair,
Bartram, and Milfort, furnish other items
concerningthe ceremony. Bartram says:
** When a town cele})rates the busk, hav-
ing previously provided themselves with
new clothes, new pot*^. pans, and other
household utensils and furniture, they
collect all fheir worn-out clothes and
other despicable things, sweepand cleanse
their houses, squares, and the whole town,
of their filth, which with all the remain-
ing grain and other old provL-ions, they
cast together into one common heap and
consume it with fire. After having taken
medicine, and fasted for 3 days, all the
fire in the town is extinguished. Dur-
ing this fast they abstain from the grati-
fication of every appetite and passion
whatever. A general amnesty is pro-
claimed, all malefactors may return to
their town, and they are absolved from
their crimes, which are now forgotten,
and they are restored to favor." Ac-
cording to Gatschet (op. cit., 182) it
appears that the busk is not a solstitial
celebration, but a rejoicing over the first
fruits of the year. The new year l^egins
with the busk, which is celebrated in
August, or late in July. Every town cel-
ebrated its busk at a period independent
from that of the other towns, whenever
their crops had come to maturity. In
connection with the busk the women
broke to pieces all the household utensils
of the previous year and replaced them
with new ones; the men refitted all their
/
178
BUTTERFLY-STONES CACHE DISKS AND BLADES
[B. A. a.
property so as to look new. Indeed the
new fire meant the new life, physical and
moral, which had to begin with the new
year. Everything had to be new or re-
newed— even the garments hitherto worn.
Taken altogether, the busk was one of the
most remarkable ceremonial institutions
of the American Indians. (a. f. c. )
Batterfly-BtonoB. See Banner stones.
Bauard BooBt. A Creek town ^' where
Tom^s path crosses Flint r.," Ga,; exact
locality not known. There was another
Creek town of this name on upper Chat-
tahoo(!hee r., w. of Atlanta. See Ur-
quhart (1793) in Am. State Papers, Ind.
Aff., II, 370, 1832.
Byainswa. See Biaustvah.
Byengeahtein. A Nanticoke village in
1707, probably in Dauphin or Lancaster
CO., Pa.— Evans (1707) in Day, Penn.,
361, 1843.
Caacat. A Chumashan village between
Galeta^and Pt Concepcion, Cal., in 1542.
Caacac.— Cabrillo, Narr., in Smith, Coll. Doc., 189,
1857. Caacat.— Ibid. Cacat.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 17, 1863. Cuncaae.— Ibid.
Caamancijap ('narrows of the arro-
yos'). A rancheria, probably Cochimi,
connected with Purfsima (Cadegomo)
mission, Lower California, in the 18th cen-
tury.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th 8., V, 189, 1857.
Cabbasaganti. A small body of Indians
dwelling in 1807 in the village of **Saint-
Francain," on St Francis r., Quebec, in
which they were named Cabbassaguntiac,
i. e., 'people of Caba.ssaguntiquoke,' signi-
fying * the place where sturgeon abound.*
The form Cobbisseconteag has been re-
placed by the mo<lern Cobbosseecontee
as the name of what formerly was Win-
throp pond and outlet whicK flows into
Kennebec r. , in Kennebec co. , Me. These
Indians, it is reported by Kendall, re-
garded themselves not only as inhab-
itants of Cabbassaguntiquoke, but also as
true caftassasy or stui]geons, because one of
their ancestors, having declared that he
was a sturgeon, leaped into this stream
and never returned in human form. They
related a tale that below the falls of
Cobbosseecontee r. the rock was hewn by
the ax of a mightv manito. ( J. n. b. h. )
CabbaMaguntiao.— Kendall, Travels, in, 124, 1809.
Cabbaaaagimtiquoke.— Ibid, (their former place of
settlement).
Cabea Hoola. Given by Romans as a
former Choctaw village on the headwaters
of Chickasawhay cr., probably in I^au-
derdale co., Miss.
Oabea Hoala.— West Florida map., ca 1775. Cabea
Hoola.— Romans, Florida, 1772.
Caborca. A rancheria of the Soba divi-
sion of the Papagoand the seat of amission
established by Kino about 1687; situated
on the s. bank of the Rio Asuncion, lat.
30° 3(K, lone. 112°, Sonora, Mexico. It
had 4 suborainate villages in 1721 (Ven-
^as, II, 177, 285, 1759) and a population of
223 in 1730, but it was totally destroyed in
the Pima rebellion of 1751. It is now a
white Mexican village. (f. w. h.)
Oabetka.— Kino, map (1702) iu St5cklein, NeUe
Welt-Bott, 76, 1726. Cabona.— Box, Ad ventures, 267,
1869. Caboroa.— Kino (1696) in Doc. Hist Mex., 4th
8., I, 267, 1856. Calorea.— Hardy, Travels, 422, 1829.
Oonc«poioii Caboroa.— Rivera (1730) quoted by Ban-
croft, No. Mex. States, i, 514, 1884. Oonoepdon de Ca-
boroa.—Venegas, Hist. Cal., 1, 286. 1759. Conoepeioa
del Cabetea.— Kino, map (1701) in Bancroft, Ariz,
and N. Mex., 360, 1889 (misprint). Conoepeioii del
Caboroa.— Kino (1694) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s.,
I, 248, 1856. Conoepoion del Oabotea.— Writer of
1702?. ibid., V, 139, 1857.
Caborh. A former Maricopa rancheria
on the Rio Gila, s. Ariz. (Sedelmair, 1744,
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex.,
366, 1 889 ) . Mentioned as distinct from the
following.
Caborica. A former Maricopa rancheria
on the Rio Gila, s. Ariz. — Sedelmair
(1744) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz, and N.
Mex., 366, 1889.
CabaBto (possibly from oka * water,' ish-
to * great. *—H albert). A town, probably
of the Chickasaw, in n. e. Mississippi, vis-
ited by De Soto in 1540; situated between
Talienatava and Chica^a, and 5 days*
march from the latter, near a great river,
possibly the Tombigbee. — Gentleman of
Elvas ( 1557) in French, Hist. Coll. La., ii,
160, 1850; Halbert in Trans. Ala. Hist.
Soc, III, 67, 1899.
Caoa Chimir. A Papa^ village, probably
in Pima co., s. Ariz., with a population of
70 in 1858, and 90 in 1865.
Caca Chimir.— Davidson in Ind. Aff. Rep., 186,*
1865. Del Caoa. —Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208, 1868.
Cacaria. A former Tepehuane pueblo
on the upper waters of the Rio San Pedro,
central Durango, Mexico. ^)rozco y
Berra, Geog., 319, 1864.
Cachanegtac. A former village, pre-
sumably Costanoan, connected with Dolo-
res mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor
in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Cacbanila. A village, probably Pima,
on the Pima and Maricopa res., Gila r.,
Ariz.; pop. 503 in 1860 (Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, June 19, 1863), 438 in 1869
Jaohunilla.— Browne, Apache Country, 290, 1869.
Cacbaymon. A village or tribe, possibly
Caddoan, mentioned by Iberville (Mar-
gry, D^»c., IV, 178, 1880), in the account of
his voyage up the Mississippi in 1699, as
being on or near Red r. of Louisiana.
Possibly identical with Cahinnio.
Caobe diskB and blades. The term cache
is applied to certain forms of storage of
property (see Storage) ^ and in archeol-
ogy it IS employed to desi^ate fnore
especially certain deposits of implements
and other objects, mainly of stone and
metal, the most noteworthy consisting
of flake<l flint blades and disks. These
caches occur in the mound region of the
Mississippi valley and generally through-
out the Atlantic states. Very often they
BULL. 30]
CACHES CADDO
179
are associated with burials in mounds, but
in some cases they seem merely to have
been buried in the ground or hidden
among rocks. The largest deposit re-
corded contained upward of 8,000 flint
disks (Moorehead) , a few exceed 5,000,
while those containing
a smaller number are
very numerous. It is
probable that many of
these caches of flaked
stones are accumula-
tions of incipient im-
plements roughed out
at the quarries and car-
ried away for further
specialization and use.
But their occurrence
with burials, the uni-
formity of their shape, and the absence of
more than the most meager traces of their
uti lization as i m plements or f or the maki ug
of implements, give rise to the conjecture
thatthey were assembled and deposited for
reasons dictated by superstition, that they
were intended as memorials of important
events, as monuments to departed chief-
tains, as provision for re(]|uirementti in the
future world, or as offerings to the mys-
terious powers or gods requiring this par-
ticular kind of sacrifice. If in the nature
of a sacrifice they certainly fulfilled all re-
DiscoiDAi. Flint Blade From
A Cache of ho Specimens;
Illinois. (i-e)
CACHE OF LANCEOLATE FLINT BLADES
quirements, for only those familiar with
such work can know the vast labor in-
volved in quarrying the stone from the
massive strata, m shaping the refractory
material, and in transporting the procl-
uct to far distant points. In the Hope-
well mound in Ohio large numbers
of beautiful blades of obsidian, ob-
tained probably from Mexico, had been
cast upon a sacrificial altar and partially
destroyed by the ^reat heat; usually,
however, the deposits do not seem to
have been subjected to the altar fires.
See Mines and Quarries^ Problematical ob-
jects, Stone-work.
Consult Holmes in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
1897; Moorehead (1) Primitive Man in
Ohio, pp. 190, 192, 1892, (2) in The Anti-
quarian, I, 158, 1897; Seever, ibid., 142;
Smith, ibid., 30; Snvder (1) in Smithson.
Rep 1876, 1877, (2)' in Proc. A. A. A. S.,
XLii, 1894, (3) in The Archaeologist, i, no.
10, 1893, (4) ibid., iii, pp. 109-113, 1895;
Squier and Davis in Smithson. Cont., i,
1848; Wilson in Nat. Mus. Rep. 1897,
1899; and various brief notices in the
archeological journals. (w. h. h. )
Caches.— See Receptacles^ Storage and
Caches.
Gachopostales. Mentioned by Orozco y
Berra (Geog., 304, 1864), from a manu-
script source, as a tribe living near the
Pampopa who resided on Nueces r., Tex.
They were possibly Coahuiltecan.
Cachapostate.— Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 69, 1891.
Gaddehi ('head of the reedy place').
A rancheria, probably Cochimi, connected
with Purfsima (Cadegomo) mission,
Lower California, in the 18th centurv. —
Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 190, 1857.
Caddo (contracted from Kd^dohcidii^rho,
'Caddo proper,' 'real Caddo,' a leading
tribe in the Caddo confederacy, extended
by the whites to include the confederacy ) .
A* confederacy of tribes belonging to the
southern group of the Caddoan linguistic
family. Their own name is Hasfnai,
'our own folk.' See Kadohadacho.
History. — According to tribal traditions
the lower Red r. of Louisiana was the
early home of the Caddo, from which
they spread to the n., w., and s. Several
of the lakes and streams connected with
this river bear Caddo names, as do
Home of the counties and some of the
towns which cover ancient village sites.
Cabeza de Vaca and his companions in
1535-36 traversed a portion of the terri-
tory occupied by the Caddo, and De
Soto's expedition encountered some of
the tribes of the confederacy in 1540-41,
but the people did not become known
until they were met by La Salle and his
followers in 1687. At that time the
Caddo villages were scattered along Red
r. and its tributaries in what are now
Louisiana and Arkansas, and also on the
banks of the Sabine, Neches, Trinity,
Brazos, and Colorado rs. in e. Texas.
The Caddo were not the only occupants
of this wide territory ; other confederacies
belonging to the same linguistic family
also resided there. There were also frag-
ments of still older confederacies of the
same familv, some of which still main-
tained their separate existence, while
others had joined the then powerful
Hasinai. These various tribes and con-
federacies were alternately allies and
enemies of the Caddo. The native pop-
ulation was so divided that at no time
could it successfully resist the intruding
white race. At an early date the Caddo
obtained horses from the Spaniards
through intermediate tribes; they learned
to rear these animals, and tracled with
them as far n. as Illinois r. (Shea, Oath.
Ch. in Col. Days, 559, 1855).
180
CADDO
[B. ▲. B.
During the 18th century wars in Europe
led to contention between the Spaniards
and the French for the territory occupied
by the Caddo. The brunt of these con-
tentions fell upon the Indians; the trails
between their villages became routes for
armed forces, while the villages were
transformed into garrisoned posts. The
Caddo were friendly to the French and
rendered valuable service, but they suf-
fered greatly from contact with the white
race. Tribal wars were fomented, villages
were abandoned, new diseases spread
havoc among the people, and by the close
of the century the welcoming attitude of
the Indians during its early years had
changed to one of defense ana distrust.
Several tribes were practically extinct,
others seriously reduced in numbers, and
ANTELOPE, A CADDO
a once thrifty and numerous people had
become demoralized and were more or
less wanderers in their native land.
Franciscan missions had been established
among some of the tribes early in the
century, those designed for the Caddo,
or Asinais, as they were called by the
Spaniards, being Purisima Concepcion de
los Asinais and (for the Hainai) San
Francisco de los Tejas ( q. v. ) . The segre-
gation policy of the missionaries tended
to weaken tribal relations and unfitted
the people to cope with the new difficul-
ties which confronted them. These
missions were transferred to the Rio San
Antonio in 1731. With the acquisition of
Louisiana by the United States immigra-
tion increased and the Caddo were pushed
from their old haunts. Under their first
treaty, in 1835, they ceded all their land
and agreed to move at their own expense
beyond the boundaries of the Unit€xi
States, never to return and settle as a tribe.
The tribes living in Louisiana, being thus
forced to leave their old home, moved
s. w. toward their kindred living in Texas.
At that time the people of Texas were
contending for independence, and no
tribe could live at peace with both op-
posing forces. Public opinion was di-
vided as to the treatment of the Indians;
one party demanded a policy of extermina-
tion, the other advocated conciliatory
methods. In 1843 the governor of the
Republic of Texas sent a commission to
the tribes of its n. part to fix a line be-
tween them and the white settlers and
to establish, three trading posts; but, as
the land laws of the republic did not
recognize the Indian's richt of occupancy,
there was no power which could prevent a
settler from taking land that had been cul-
tivated by an Indian. This condition led
to continual diflSculties, and these did not
diminish after the annexation of Texas
to the United States, as Texas retained
control and jurisdiction over all its public
domain. Much suffering ensued; the
fields of peaceable Indians were taken and
the natives were hunted down. The more
warlike tribes made reprisals, and bitter
feelings were engendered. Immigration
increased, and the inroads on the buffalo
herds by the newcomers made scarce the
food of the Indians. Appeals were sent
to the Federal Government, and in 1855
a tract near Brazos r. was secured and a
number of Caddo and other Indians
were induced to colonize under the
supervision of Agent Robert S. Neigh-
bours. The Indians built houses, tilled
fields, raised cattle, sent their chil-
dren to school — lived quiet and orderly
lives. The Comanche to the w. con-
tinued to raid upon the settlers, some of
whom turned indiscriminately upon all
Indians. The Caddo were the chief suf-
ferers, although they helped the state
troops to bring the raiders to justice. In
1859 a company of white settlers fixed a
date for the massacre of all the reserva-
tion Indians. The Federal Government
was again appealed to, and through the
strenuous efforts of Neighbours the Caddo
made a forced march for 15 days in the
heat of July; men, women, and children,
with the loss of more than half of their
stock and possessions, reached safely the
banks of Washita r. in Oklahoma, where
a reservation was set apart for them.
Neighbours, their friend and agent, was
killed shortly afterward as a penalty for
his unswerving friendship to tne Indians
(Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 333, 1860). Dur-
ing the civil war the Caddo remained
loyal to the Government, taking refuge
BULL. 30]
CADDO
181
in Kansas, while some went even as far
w. as Colorado. In 1872 the boundaries of
their reservation were defined, and in
1902 every man, woman, and child re-
ceived an allotment of land under the
provisions of the severalty act of 1887, by
which they became citizens of the Unitei
States and subject to the laws of Okla-
homa. In 1904 they numl)ered 5:^.
Missions were started by the Baptists
soon after the reservation was established,
and are still maintained. Thomas C.
Battey, a Quaker, performed missionary
work among them m 1872. The Episco-
^lians openeil a mission in 1881, the
Roman Catholics in 1894.
Customs andheliefi. — In the legend which
recounts the coming of the Caddo from
the underworld it is related: **Firs<t an
old man climbed up, carrying in one hand
fire and a pipe, and in the other a drum;
next came his wife with corn and pump-
kin seeds. ' ' The traditions of the people
do not go back to a time when they were
not cultivators of the soil; their fields
surrounded their villages and furnished
their staple food ; they were semisedentary
in their nabits and lived in fixed habita-
tions. Their dwellings were conical in
shape, made of a framework of poles
covered with a thatch of grass, and were
grouped about an o|)en space which
served for social and ceremonial gather-
ings. Couches covered with mats were
ranged around the walls inside the house
to serve as seats by day and beds by
night. The fire was built in the center.
Food was cooked in vessels of j)ottery, and
baskets of varying sizes were skilfully
made. Vegetal fibers were woven, and
the cloth was made into garments; their
mantles, when adome<l with feathers,
were very attractive to the early French
visitors. Living in the country ot the buf-
falo, that animal and others were hunted
and the pelts dressed and made into
clothing for winter use. Besides having
the usual ornaments for the arms, neck,
and ears, the Caddo bored the nasal septum
and inserted a ring as a face decoration —
a custom noted in the name, meaning
"pierced nose," given the Caddo by the
Kiowa and other unrelated tribes, and
designateil in the sign language of the
plains. Tattooing was practised. De-
scent was traced through the mother.
Chieftainship was hereditary, as was the
custody of certain sacred articles used in
religious ceremonies. These ceremonies
were connected with the cultivation of
maize, the seeking of game, and the de-
sire for long life, health, peace, and pros-
perity, ana were conducted by priests
who were versed in the rites and who led
the accompanying rituals and songs.
According to Caddo l)elief all natural
forms were animate and capable of ren-
dering assistance to man. Fasting,
prayer, and occasional sacrifices were ob-
served; life was thought to continue after
death, and kinship groups w^ere supposed
to be reunited in the spirit world. Truth-
fulness, honesty, and hospitality were
inculcated, and just dealing was esteemed
a virtue. There is evidence that canni-
balism was ceremonially practised in con-
nection with captives.
DivlMous and totems. — How many tribes
were formerly included in the Caddo
confederacy can not now l)e determined.
Owing to the vicissitudes of the last 3
centuries only a remnant of the Caddo
survive, and the memory of much of their
organization is lost. In 1699 Il)erville
obtained from his Taensa Indian guide a
list of 8 divisions; Linares in 1716gavethe
names of 11; (iatschet (Creek Migr. I>eg.,
I, 43, 1884) procured from a Caddo Indian
in 1882 the names of 12 divisions, and the
list was revised in 1896, by Mooney, as
follows: (1) Kadohadacho, (2) Hainai,
(3) Anadarko, (4) Nabedache, (5) Nacog-
doche.^ (6) Natchitoches, (7) Yatasi, (8)
Adai, (9) Eyeish, (10) Nakanawan, (11)
Imaha, a smaH band of Kwapa, (12)
Yowani, a band of Choctaw (Mooney in
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1092, 1896). Of these
names the first 9 are found under varying
forms in the lists (»f 1699 and 1716. The
native name of the confederacy, Hasinai,
is said to belong more properly to the first
3 divisions, which may be significant of
their prominenceat the time when the con-
federacy was overlapping and absorbing
members of older organizations, and as
these divisions speak similar dialects, the
name may be that which designated a
still older organization. The following
tribes, now extinct, probably belonge<l to
the Caddo confederacy: Doustionis, Na-
caniche, Nanatsoho, and Nasoni (?). The
villages of Campti, (^hoye, and Natasi were
probably occupied by subdivisions of the
confederate<l tribes.
Each division of the confederacy was
subdivided, and each of these subtribes
had its totem, its village, its hereditary
chieftain, its priests and ceremonies, and
its part in the ceremonies common to the
confederacy. The present clans, accord-
ing to Mooney, are recognized as belong-
ingequally to the whole Caddo people and
in old times were probably the chief bond
that held the confederacy together. See
Nasoni, (a. c. f. )
Acinay.— Tex. St. Arch., Nov. 17. 1763. Atoanis.—
La Harpe (1719) in Mai^grv, D6c., vi, 289, 1886.
Asenyt.— Iberville (1699), ibid., iv, 316, 1880.
A-Simae*.— French, Hist. Coll., ii, 11, note, 1876.
Aaimais.— Kennedy, Rcpub. Texas, i, 217, 1841.
A-Simai*,— Yoakum, Hist. Texas, i, 28, note, 1855.
Aunaes.— Kennedy, Repub. Texas, i, 217, 1841.
Aainais.— Mezi^res (1778) quoted by Bancroft, No.
Mex. Slates, i, 661, 1886. Asinay.— Teran (1691),
ibid., 391. Aioni.— Barcia. Enaayo. 278. 1723. Ai-
•eni.— Charlevoix, New France, iv, 78, 1870. Awi-
182
CADDOAN FAMILY
[B. A. B.
iud«.— P6nicaut (1712) in Margry, D^c.v, 499,
1883. Aasiaay.—La Harpe (ca. 1717) in French,
Hist. Ck)ll. La., in, 48. 1S51. Assine.— Gatschet,
Creek Migr. Leg., i, 43, 1884. Assinnit.— Boudinot,
Star in the West, 125, 1816. Assoni Joutel (1687)
in Margry, D6c., lil, 311, 1878. A»»ony. ^Joutel,
ibid., I, 147, 1846. A««nud».— P^nicaut (1716) in
Margry, D6c.,v, 539, 1883. Oeneseant.— Boudinot,
Star m the Weflt, 126, 1816. Oenesians.~Hennepin,
New DiHcov.. pt.2, 25, 1698. Cem«.^Joutel (1687)
in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 148, 1851. Oenys.— Jou-
tel (1687) in Margry, D6c., in, 266. 1878. Oerie*
A»»ony».— French, Hist. Coll. La., n. 11, note,
1875. Onei».— Drake»Bk.IndH..vii,1848. Coeni.-
Hennepin. New Discov., map, 1698. Ooenis.—
De risle. map, 1700. Oouis. — Morse, N. Am., map,
1776 (misprint). Haiinai.— ten Kate, Reizen in
N. Am., 374, 1S85 (own name). iBcanis.— Bull.
Soc. Geog. Mex., 501, 1869. Nasoni.— For fi)rms of
this name, see yasoni. Seni*. — Cavelier (1687)
quoted by Shea, Early Voy., 31, 1861. Tiddoes.—
Keane in Stanford, Compend., Cent, and So. Am.,
539, 1878 (same?). Yicane*.— Tex. State Arch.,
Nov. 15. 1785. Ytoanis. — Census of Nacogdoches
urisdiction, ibid., 1790.
Caddoan Tamily. A linguistic family,
first classified by Gallatin (Trans, and
Coll. Am. Antiq. Soc, ii, 116, 1836), who
regarded the Caddo and Pawnee lan-
guages as distinct, hence both names ap-
pear in his treatise a« family designations.
Although now regarded as belonging to
the same linguistic stock, there is a j>os-
sibility that future investigation may
prove their distinctness. The Caddoans
may be treated in three geograph ic groups :
The Northern, represented by the Ankara
in North Dakota; the Middle, comprising
the Pawnee confederacy formerly living
on Platte r.. Neb., and to the w. and s. w.
thereof; and the Southern group, includ-
ing among others the Caddo, Kichai, and
Wichita (Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E.,58,
1891 ) . The tribes included in the Southern
group were scattered throughout the re-
gion of the Red r. of Louisiana and its trib-
utaries, in Arkansas and s. Oklahoma,
where their names survive in the Washita
r., the Wichita mountains and river,
Waco city, Kichai hills, etc.; thej^ also
spread along the Sabine, Neches, Trinity,
and Brazos rs. of Texas, and in part con-
trolled the territory as far as the Colorado
r. of Texas and the Gulf of Mexico.
From cultural and other evidence the
Caddoan tribes seem to have moved
eastward from the S. W. The advance
guard was probably the Caddo proper,
who, when first met by the white race,
had dwelt so long in the region of the Red
r. of Louisiana as to regard it as their
original home or birthplace. Other
branches of the Caddoan family followed,
settling along the rivers of n. e. Texas.
Whether they drove earlier occupants of
the region to the Gulf or at a later day
were forced back from the coast by intru-
sive tribes is not clear, but that some dis-
placement had occurred seems probable,
as early Spanish and French travelers
found tribes of different families on the
Gulf <'oast, while the Caddoans held the
rivers but were acquainted with the coast
and visited the bays of Galveston and
Matagorda. The last group to migrate
was probably the Pawnee, who kept to
the N. and n. e. and settled in a part of
what is now Kansas and Nebraska.
The tribes of N. e. Texas being in the
territory over which the Spaniards,
French, and English contended for su-
premacy, were tne first to succumb to
contact with the white race and the in-
roads of wars and new diseases. Those
dwelling farther inland escaped for a
time, but all suffered great diminution
in numbers; the thousands of 2 centuries
ago are now represented by only a few
hundreds. The survivors to-day live on
allotted lands in Oklahoma and North
Dakota, as citizens of the United States,
and their children are being educated in
the language and the industries of the
country.
From the earliest records and from tra-
ditions the Caddoan tribes seem to have
been cultivators of the soil as well as
hunters, and practised the arts of pottery
making, weaving, skin dressing, etc.
Tattooing the face and body was common
among those of the Southern group.
Two distinct types of dwellings were
used — the conical straw house among
the Southern group and the earth lod^
among the Pawnee and Arikara. Their
elaborate religious ceremonies pertained
to the quest of long life, health, and
food supply, and embodied a recogni-
tion of cosmic forces and the heavenly
bodies. By their supernatural and social
power these ceremonies bound the people
together. The tribes were generally
loosely confederated; a few stood alone.
The tribe was subdivided, and each one
of these subdivisions had its own village,
bearing a distinctive name and sometimes
occupying a definite relative position to
each of the other villages of the tribe. A
village could be spoken of in three ways:
( 1 ) By its proper name, which was gen-
erally mythic in its significance or re-
ferred to the share or part taken by it in
the religious rites, wherein all the vil-
lages of the tribe had a place; (2) by its
secular name, which was often descrip-
tive of its locality; (3) by the name of
its chief. The people sometimes spoke
of themselves by one of the names of
their village, or by that of their tribe, or
by the name of the confederacy to which
they belonged. This custom led to the
recording, by the early travelers, of a mul-
tiplicity of names, several of which mi^ht
represent one community. This confusion
was augmented when not all the tribes of
a conf^eracy spoke the same language;
in such cases a mispronunciation or a
translation caused a new name to be record-
ed. For instance, the native name of the
Caddo confederacy, Hasinai, *our own
BULL. 30]
OADECHA — CAGNAGUET
183
people/ was translated by the Yatasi, and
"Texas" is a modification of the word
they gave. Owing to the fact that a large
proportion of the tribes mentioned by the
writers of the last 3 centuries, together
with their languagejs, are now extinct,
a correct classification of the recorded
names is no longer possible. The fol-
lowing list of confederacies, tribes, and vil-
lages 18 divided into 4 groups: (1) Those
undoubtedly Caddoan; (2) those proba-
blv so; (3) those possibly so; (4) those
which appear to nave been within the
Caddoan country.
(1) Ankara, Bidai, Caddo, Campti,
Choye, Kichai, Nacaniche, Nacisi, Nana-
tsoho, Nasoni (=Asinai= Caddo?), Na-
tasi, Pawnee, Wichita.
(2) Aguacay, Akasquy, Amediche,
Anoixi, Ardeco, Avovell^, Cahinnio,
Capiche, Chacacants, Chaguate, Chaquan-
tie, Chavite, Chilano, Coligoa, Colima,
Doustioni, Dulchioni, Harahey, Pala-
quesson, Penoy, Tareque.
(3) Analao, Autiamque, Avavares,
Cachaymon, Guaycones, Haqui, Irru-
piens, Kannehouan, Naansi, Nabiri, Toxo.
r4) Acubadoas, Anamis, Andacaniinos,
Arkokisa, Bocherete, Coyabegux, Judosa,
Kuasse, Mallopeme, Mulatos, Onapieni,
Orcan, Palomas, Panequo, Peinhoum,
Peissaquo, Petao, Piechar, Pehir, Sala-
paque, Serecoutcha, Taraha, Teao, To-
naka, Tohau, Tsepcoen, Tsera, Tutel-
pinco, Tyacappan. (a. c. f. )
>Caddoet. — Galiatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii,
116, 306, 18S6 (based on Caddo alone); Prichard,
Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 406, 1S47; Gallatin in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 402, 1853 [gives a.s
languages Caddo, Red River (Nandakoes.Tachies,
Nabedaches)]. >Caddokiet.— Gallatin in Trans.
Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 116, 1836 (si me as his Cad-
does); Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 406. 1847.
>Oaddo.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., n,
81, 1846 (indicntesaffinity with Iroquois, Muskoge,
Catawba, Pawnee); Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol.
Soc., II, pt 1, xcix, 77, 1848 (Caddo onl v ) ; Berghaus
(1846), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848 (Caddo, etc.);
ibid., 1892; Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 33«, 1850 (be-
tween the Mississippi and Sabine): Latham in
Trans. Philol. Soc., Lond., 101, 1856; Turner in Pac.
R. R. Rep., Ill, pt. 3, 55, 70, 1856 (finds resemblances
• to Pawnee.but keeps them separate) ; Buschmann,
Spuren deraztek. Sprache, 426, 448, 1859: Latham,
Opuscula, 290. 366. 1860. >Oaddo.— Latham, Elem.
Comp. Philol., 470, 1862 (includes Pawni and Ric-
cari). >Pftwnee«.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq.
Soc., II, 128, 306, 1836 (two nations: Pawnees proper
and Ricarasor Black Pawnees); Prichard, Phvs.
Hist. Mankind, v, 408, 1847 (follows Gallatin); Gal-
latin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc, ii, pt. 1, xcix,
1848; Latham. Nat. Hist. Man, 344. 1850 (or Panis;
includes Loup and Republican Pawnees); Galla-
tin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 402, 1853 (gives
as languages: Pawnees, RicaMs, Tawakeroes,
Towekas, Wachos?); Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol.
Mo. Val., 232, »45, 1862 (Includes Pawnee and Ari-
kara). >Pa]ui.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq.
Soc.. II, 117, 128, 1836 (of Red river of Texas; men-
tion of villages; doubtfully indicated as of Pawnee
family); Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 407,
1847 (supposed from name to be of same race with
Pawneeof the Arkansa); Latham, Nat. Hist. Man,
844. 1»)0 (Pawnees or); Gallatin in Schoolcraft.
Ind. Tribes, III, 402, 1853 (here kept separate
from Pawnee famif^*). >Pawnie«.— Gallatin in
Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., II, pt. 1, 77, 1848 (see
Pawnee above). >Pahiiiet.— Berghaus (1845),
Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848; ibid., 1852. >Pftw-
nee(1).— Turner in Pac. R.R.Rep.,iii,pt.3,55,65,
1856 (Kichai and Hueco vocabularies). -Paw-
nee.—Kcane in Stanford. Ck)mpend., Cent, and So.
Am., 478, 1878 (gives four groups: Pawnees proper;
Arickarees; Wichitas; Caddoes). =Paiii. — Gat-
schet. Creek Migr. Leg,, i, 42, 1884; Berghaus,
Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887. >Towiaches.— Galla-
tin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., li, 116, 128, 1836
(same as Panis above ) ; Prichard, Phys. Hist. Man-
kind, v, 407, 1H47. >Towiaoha.— Latham, Nat.
Hist. Man, 349,1850 (includes Towiach, Tawake-
noes, Towecas?. Wacos). >Towiacks. — Gallatin in
Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, in, 402, 1853. >Nfttchito-
ches. — Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., Ii, 116.
1836 (stated by Sibley to speak a language differ-
ent from any other); Latham, Nat. Hist. Man.
a42. 1S,tO; Prichard, Phvs. Hist. Mankind, v, 406,
1H47 (after Gallatin); Gallatin in Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, in, 402. 1853 (a single tribe onlv).
>AUche.— Latham, Nat. Hist. Man. 349, 1850 (near
Nacogdoches; not classified). >Yatasseea. — Gal-
latin in Trans. Am. Antiq. S<H'.. ii. 116,18:^6 (the
single tribe; said by Sibley to be different from
any other; referre<l to iis a familv). >Riccarees. —
Latham. Nat. Hist. Man, 344. l'850 (kept distinct
from Pawnee family). >Wa«hita.— Latham in
Trans. Philol. SiX". Lond., 103. IH.16; Buschmann,
Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 441, 1859 (revokes pre-
vious opinion of its distinctness and refers it to
Pawnee family). >Witohitas.— Buschmann. ibid,
(same as his Washita). = Caddoan. —Powell in 7th
Rep. B. A. E.. 58, 1891.
Cadecha. A former Tinui({iianan tribe
in the Utina confederacy of middle Flor-
ida.— Laudonnicre (1564) in French,
Hist. (\)11. La., n. s., 243, 1869.
Cadica. — De Bry, Brev. Nar., 11. map. 1591. Car-
decha. — Fontaneda in French, op. cit.. 2d ser..
2CA, 1875. Chadeca.— Barcia, Ensayo. 48, 1723.
Cadecnijtnipa ('over the lava mesas').
A rancheria, probably Cochimi, con-
nected with Purfsima (Cadegomo) mis-
sion, I^wer California, in the 18th cen-
tury.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 188,
1857.
Cadegomo ('reedy arroyo'). A Co-
chimi settlement in lat. 26° 10', not far
from the Pacific coast of Ix)wer California,
at which the Jesuit mission of I^ Pu-
rfsima Concepcion was established by
Father Tamaral in 1718. It contained
180 neophytes in 1767, and in 1745 had
6 de])endent villajres within 8 leagues.
From a statement bv Venegas ( Hist. Cal.,
II, 23, 1759) that he "hoped at I^ Pu-
risima to find greater conveniences ])oth
for corn and pasture than at Cadigomo,"
it would seem that the Indian village and
the mission did not occupy the same
site.
Cadegomo.— Clavigero (1789). Hist. Baja Cal., 63,
1852. Cadigomo.— Venegas. Hist. Cal., 1, 420: 11, 23,
1759. La Porissima Conception.— Ibid.. 11. 23. 198.
Purisima Concepcion. —Clavigero, op. cit., 109.
Cadendebet ( * reeds, or the reedy coun-
try, ends here ' ). A rancheria, prolmbly
of the (Cochimi, under Purfsima (Cade-
gomo) mission, from which it lay about
10 leagiies distant, in central I^wer Cali-
fornia, in the 18th century. — Doc. Hist.
Mex., 4th s., V, 188, 1857.
Cadeudobet. — Doc, Hist. Mex.. op. cit.
Cagnagnet. A Laimoii tribe which.
184
CAHAWBA OLD TOWNS CAHITA
[B. A. B.
with the Adac and Kadakaman, formerly
lived between San Fernando and Muleje,
near San Francisco Borja, w. side of
Lower California, lat. 29®.
Oagnafuet— Taylor in Browne, Res. Pac. Slope,
app. , M, 1869. OagMJuet. —Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Jan. 17, 1862.
Cahawba Old Towns. A former group
of Choctaw settlements in Perry co., Ala.,
probably on Cahawba r. — Pickett, Ala.,
II, 326, 1851; Halbert in Ala. Hist. Soc.
Trans., in, 66, 1899.
Cahelca ('deep pool'). A rancheria,
probably Cochimi, connected with Pu-
risima ^Cadegomo) mission, Lower Cali-
fornia, in the 18th century. — Doc. Hist.
Mex., 4th s., V, 189, 1857.*
Cahelejyii ('brackish water'). A ran-
cheria, probably Cochimi, connected with
Purfsima (Cadegomo) mission, Lower
California, in the 18th century. — Doc.
Hist. Mex., 4th s., y, 189, 1857.
OaheUjyu.— Ibid., 190. Oahelixyu.— Ibid., 186.
Cahelembil ('junction of waters'). A
rancheria, probably Cochimi, connected
with Purisima (Cadegomo) mis.sion,
Lower California, in the 18th century; it
lay a league from the Pacific coast. — Doc.
Hist. Mex., 4th s., y, 189, 1857.
Cahelmet ( * water and earth ') . A ran-
cheria, probably Cochimi, connected with
Purisima (Cadegomo) mission, Lower
California, in the 18th century. — Doc.
Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 189, 1857.
Cahiagne. A Huron yillage in Ontario,
where the Jesuits had the mission of St
John the Baptist in 1640.
Cahiague.— Champlain (1615), (Euvres, iv. 29, 1870.
8. lean Baptiste.— Jes. Rel. for 1640,90,1858.
Cahinnio. A tribe yisited by Cayelier
de la Salle on his return from Texas in
1687, at which time they ])robably re-
sided in s. w. Arkansas, near Red r. They
were possibly more closely allied to the
northern tribes of the Caddo confed-
eracy (the Kadohadacho, Natchitoches,
Yatasi, etc. ) than to the southern tribes,
with whom, according to Joutel, they
were at enmity. During the yicissitudes
of the 18th century the tribe moyed n. w.,
and in 1763 were on upper Arkansas r.,
near their old allies, the Mento. By
the close of the 18th century they were
extinct as a tribe. (a. c. f. )
Cabinoiot.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in,
81, 1854. Oahainihoua.— Joutel (1687) in French,
Hist. Ck)ll. La., i, 169,1846. Oahainohoua.— Joutel
(1687) in Margry, D^., iii, 413, 1878. Cahayno-
houa.— Joutel in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 172,
1846. Cahinnio.— Le Clercq (1691), First Estab.
Faith, II, 265, 1881. Cahinoa.— Carver, Trav.,
map, 1778. Oahirmois. — Boudinot, Star in the
West, 126, 1816. Cakainikova.— Barcia, Ensayo,
279, 1723. Ohixiinoas.— McKenney and Hall, Ind.
Tribes, in, 81, 1854. Oohainihoua.— Joutel in
French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 169, 1846. Oohainotoas.—
Barcia, Ensayo, 279, 1723. Xahinoa.— Jefferys
(1763), Am. Atlas, map, 5, 1776.
Cahita. A group of tribes of the Pi man
family, consisting chiefly of the Yaqui
and the Mayo, dwelling in s. w. Sonera
and N. w. Sinaloa, Mexico, principally
in the middle and lower portions oi the
valleys of the Rio Yaqui, Rio Mayo,
MAYO ( CAHITA ) MAN. (hROUCKa)
and Rio Fuerte, and extending from the
Gulf of California to the Sierra Madre.
Physically the men are usually large and
MAYO (cAHITa) woman AND CHILD. (hRDUCKa)
well formed; their complexion is of me-
dium brown, and their features, though
somewhat coarse, are not unpleasant
The dress of both sexes is coarse and sim-
BULL. 30]
CAHLAHTEL CAHOKIA
185
pie, that of the men consisting of a short
cotton shirt, trousers, straw hat, and
leather sandals, the women wearing the
typical cotton camisa and gown. The
native blanket and sash are now rarely
seen. The Yaqui formerly tattooed the
chin and arms. Owing to the semitrop-
ical climate their typical dwellings were
of canes and boughs, covered with palm
leaves, but these have been largely super-
seded by huts of brush and adobe. Al-
though belonging to the same division of
the Hman stock and showing no marked
difference in culture, the Mayo and Yaqui
tribes have not been friendly; indeed the
former waged war against the Yaqui until
they themselves were finally conquered,
when the Yaqui compelled them to pay
tribute and to furnish warriors to aid
the Yaqui in their almost incessant hos-
tility first toward Spain, afterward against
Mexico. They now hold aloof from each
other, and while the Yaqui are habitually
on the warpath, the Mayo are entirely
pacific. In the fertile valleys along the
streams resjiectively occupied by the
tribes of this group, they engage in
raising corn, cotton, calabashes, foms,
and tobacco, and also in cultivating the
mezcal-producing agave. They hunted
in the neighboring Sierra Mad re and fished
in the streams that supplied the water to
irrigate their fields, as well as on the
coast, where the Yaqui still obtain salt for
sale, principally in Guaymas. It has been
said that neither the Mayo nor the Yaqui
had a tribal chief, each tribe being set-
tled in a number of autonomous villages
which combined only in case of warfare;
but there appears to have been a village
ruler or kina of cacique. In the first half
of the 17th century the Mayo and Yaqui
together probably numbered between
50,000 and 60,000. There are now about
40,000, equally divided between the
tribes, but like most of the southern
tribes of the Piman family, these have
largely become Hispanized, except in
language. The Yaqui particularly are
naturally industrious and are employed
as cattlemen, teamsters, farmers, and sail-
ors; they are also good miners, are ex-
pert in pearl diving, and are employed
tor all manual labor in preference to any
others. They exhibit an unusual talent
for music and adhere more or less to the
performance of their primitive dances
(now somewhat varied by civilization),
engaged in principally on feast days, par-
ticularly during the harvest festival of
San Juan and at the celebration of the
Passover. The chief vices of the Yaqui,
it is said, are an immoderate indulgence
in intoxicants, gambling, and stealing,
while conjugal fidelity is scarcely known
to them. Tnere is some uncertain tv in
regard to the tribal divisions of the Caliita
group. Pimentel (Lenguas, i, 453) and
Buelna (Arte Lengua Cahita, x) divide it
into three dialects, the Yaqui, Mayo, and
Tehueco, but the latter, in his Peregrina-
cion de los Aztecas (21, 1892), mentions
the Sinaloa, Tehueco, and Zuaque as dis-
tinct groups. Orozco y Berra ( Geog. , 58 )
gives Yaqui, Mayo, Tehueco, and vaco-
regue. It appears that there was in fact
a Sinaloa tribe which later lost its iden-
tity through absorption by the Tehueco,
while the Zuaque were apparently iden-
tical with the latter. For the present
condition of the Yaqui and the Mayo see
Hrdlicka in Am. Anthrop., n. s., vi, 51,
1904. (f. w. H.)
Cahita.— Orozco y Berra, Geogr., 58, 1864. Oaita.—
Doc. of 1678 quoted by Bandfelier in Arch. Inst.
Papers, iii. 53, 1890. Oinaloa.— Orozco y Berra, op.
cit. Sinaloa.— Ibid.
Cahlahtel Pomo. An unidentifiable
band of Pomo, said to have lived in Men-
docino CO., Cal. — Wiley in Ind. Aff. Rep.
1864, 119, 1865.
Cahokia. A tribe of the Illinois con-
federacy, usually noted as associated with
the kindred Tamaroa. Like all the con-
federate Illinois tribes they were of roving
habit until they and the Tamaroa were
gathered into a mb«sion settlement about
the year 1698 by the Jesuit Pinet. This
mission, first known as Tamaroa, but
later as Cahokia, was about the site of
the present Cahokia, 111., on the e. bank
of the Mississippi, nearly opposite the
present St Louis. In 1721 it was the
second town among the Illinois in impor-
tance. On the withdraw^al of the Jesuits
the tribe declined rapidly, chiefiy from
the demoralizing influence of the neigh-
boring French garrison, and was nearly
extinct by 1800. With the other remnant
tribes of the confederacy they removed,
about 1820, to the W., where the name was
kept up until very recently, but the whole
body is now officially consolidated under
the name Peoria, q. v. (.i. m.)
Caeuqiiias.- De I'lsle, map {ca, 1705) in Neill,
Hist. Minn., 1868. Cahakics.— Carver, Travels,
map, 1778. Cahau.— Marain (1753) in Margry, D^c,
VI, 654, 1886. Cahoki.— Gale, Upper Miss., 174,
1867. Cahokia.— Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. Oa-
hokiamt.— Keane in Stanford. Compend., 504, 1878.
Cahokies.— EsnautsandRapilly, map, 1777. Oaho-
qui.— Alcedo, Die. Geog., i, 302, 1786. Oahoquias.—
Keane in Stanford, Compend. , 504. 1878. Oankia.—
Hennepin, New Discov., 310, 1698 (same? The
*'Caokia" are named as another Illinois band).
Oaokia.— Allouez(1680)in Margry, D6c., ii, 96, 1877.
Caoquias. —Perkins and Peck, Annals of the We.Ht,
680, 1850. Caouquias.— Du Pratz, La., II, 227, 1758.
Oarrechiai.- StCosme (1699) in Shea, Early Voy.,
62, 1861. Oaskoukia.— Moll, map, in Salmon,
Modem Hist., 3d ed., in, 602, 1746. Oatiokia.—
Morse, N. Am., 255 1776. Oatokiah.— Nourse (1820)
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 588, 1852. Oayauch-
kiag.— Stone, Life of Brant, ii, 566, 1864. CoEa-
kiag.— Schermerhom (1812) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 2d 8. ji. 8. 1814. Oohakiet.— Am. Pioneer, i,
408, 1842. Kahokiaa.— Homann Heirs' map, 1756.
Kahoquias.— Nuttall, Journal, 250, 1821. Kakiaa.—
Milfort, M^moire, 106, 1802 (same?). Kaookhia.—
La Salle (1682) in Margry, D^c. ii. 201, 1877.
Kaokia.— Gravier (1701?) in Perrot, M6moire, 221,
1864. riokies.— Lattr6, map, 1784. Kaoquias.—
BULL. 30]
OAJATS OALAPOOYA
187
or tribe mentioned to Joutel in 1687
(Margry, D^c, iii, 409, 1878), while he
was staying with the Kadohadacho on
Red r. of Louisiana, by the chief of that
tribe as being among his enemies.
CajatB. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863.
Oojata.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 459, 1874 (mis-
quoted from Taylor) .
Cajon (Span.: 'box' canyon). A Die-
gueAo settlement about 1850, so called
after a mountain pass about 10 m. n. e.
of San Diego harbor, s. Cal. — Hayes M8.
cited by Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 458, 1882.
C^jpilili. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863.
Cajuenche. A Yuman tribe speaking
the Cocopa dialect and residing in 1775-76
on the E. bank of the Rio Colorado below
the mouth of the Gila, next to the Quig-
yuma, their rancherias extending s. to
about lat. 32° 33^ and into central s. Cali-
fornia, about lat. 33° 08^, where they met
the Comeya. At the date named the Ca-
juenche are said to have numbered 3,000
and to have been enemies of the Cocopa
(Garc^s, Diary, 443, 1900). Of the disap-
pearance of the tribe practically nothing
18 known, but if they are identical with
the Cawina, or Quo-kim, as they seem to
be, they had become reduced to a mere
remnant bv 1851, owing: to constant
wars with the Yuma. At this date Bart-
lett reported only 10 survivors living with
the Pima and Maricopa, only one of
whom understood his native language,
which was said to differ from the Pima
and Maricopa. Merced, San Jacome, and
San Sebastian have been mentioned as
Cajuenche rancherias. (f. w. n.)
Oaroenchi.— Escudero, Noticias EstadiHticas de
Chihuahua, 228, 1834. Cajuenche.— Garros (1776),
Diary, 434, 1900. Oamienohe.— Forbes, Hist. Cal..
162, 1839. Cawina.— Bartlett, Pera. Narr., ii, 251,
1854. Oojuenchii.— Pike, Expeditions, 3d map,
1810. Kakhiiana.- Kroeber, inf n, 1905 (Mohave
name). Kokhuene.— Ibid. Oajuenchea.- Hinton,
Handbook to Arizona, 28, 1878 (misprint), ftuo-
kim.— Thomas, MS. Yuma vocab., B. A. E., 1868.
Cajnrachic. A Tarahumare settlement
in Chihuahua, Mexico; definite locality
unknown. — Orozco y Berra, Geog., 323,
1864.
Calabashes. See Gounh.
Calabazas (Span.: 'calabashes*). For-
merly a Sobaipuri (?) rancheria, dating
from the early part of the 18th century;
situated on the Kio Santa Cruz, below Tu-
bac,ins. Arizona. It wasa visitaofGuevavi
until that mission was abandoned prior to
1784. A church and a house for the priest
were erected in 1797, before which date
Calabazas was probably a visita of Tubac.
It had 116 neophytes m 1760-64, and 64
in 1772, but it was described as being
only a rancho in 1828. When visited by
Bartlett (Pers. Narr., i, 391, 1854), in
1851, it was in ruins, and seemed to
have l>een abandoned many years be-
fore, (f. w. h. ) ,
Colabazai.— Font, map (1777) in Bancroft, Ariz,
and N. Mex.. 393, 1889 (misprint). San Oaye-
tano de Calabazas.— Bancroft, ibid., 369.385. 8.
Cajctanus.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue
Welt-Bott, 74, 1726. 8. Gaetan Kino, map (1701)
in Bancroft, op. cit., 360.
Calagntijnet. — A place in n. Lower Cali-
fornia, 8m. above Borja, at which a Jasuit
mifesion was established in Oct., 1766, but
owing to the barrenness of the soil and
the alkaline water it was moved in May,
1767, to a site 50 m. away, where new
buildings were erected and where, under
the name Santa Marfa, it soon became
somewhat prosperous. It was the last of
the mission establishments of the Jesuits
in Ix)wer California, as they were ex-
pelled in the vear last named. See Ban-
croft, No. Mex. States, i, 473, 1886.
Calahnasa. The mission of Santa Inez,
or perhaps a Chumashan village formerly
at or near it«j site. — Tavlor in Cal. Farmer,
Apr. 24, 1863.
Calla Wawa.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 459, 1874.
Calany. A former Timuquanan tribe or
settlement of the Utina confederacy in
middleorx. Florida. — Laiidonnitire( 1564)
in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 243, 1869.
Calanay.— De Br>', Brev. Nar., ii, map, 1591 (town
on an e. tributary of middle St Jotins r.) Cal-
anio.— Barcia, Ensayo, 48, 1723.
Calaobe. A Calusa village on the s. w.
coast of Florida, about 157]). — Fontaneda
Mem. {en. 1575), Smith trans., 19, 1854.
Calaboe.— F(mtane(ia as (juoted in Doc. In^d.. v.
539, 1866.
Calapooya. The name, properly speak-
ing, of a division of the Kalapooian family
formerly occupying the watershed be-
tween Willamette and Umpqua rs., Greg.
•The term as usually employed, however,
. includes all the bands speaking dialects
of the Kalapooian languas^e and is made
synonymous with the family name. This
double use of the term, cou])led with the
scanty information regarding the division,
has wrought confusion in the classifica-
tion of the bands which can not be
rectified. The following were ascertained
by Gatschet to have been bands of this
division: Ampishtna, Tsanchifin, Tsank-
lightemifa, Tsankupi, and Tsawokot.
(L. P.)
Calahpoewah.— Lewis and Clark, Exped.. ii, 227,
1814. Calapooa.— Parker, .lournal, 415, 1846. Cal-
apooah.— Ibid.. 173. 1840. Calapoogas.— Lea in Ind.
Aflf. Rep., 270, 18.51. CalapooW— U. S. Stat, at
Large, x, 674, 1854. Calapoolia.— Lyman in Oreg.
Hist. Soc. Quar., i, 325, 1900. Calapoo»a«.— Miller
in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 430, 1860. Calapooyas.— Lee
and Frost, Oregon , 90, 1844. Calapuaya. — McClane
in Ind. AfT. Rep. 203, 1888. Calapuyas.— Hale in
U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 198, 1846. Calipoa.— Lane
(1849) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 31st Cong., Ist seas.,
172, 1850. Calipooiaa.— Palmer in Ind. Aff. Rep.,
260, 18,54. Calipooya.— Bissell, Umpkwa MS.
vocab., B. A. E. Calipoyas.— Gallatin in Trans.
Am. Antiq. Soc, ii, map, 1836. Calipuyowc*.—
Henry-Thompson .Tour., Coues ed., 814, 1897.
Cal-lah-po-e-ouah.~Nouv. Ann. Voy., 1« s., xii.
188
CALAVERAS MAN CALCIATI
[B.i
map, 1821. Cail«hpoewali.->KelIev, Oregon, 68,
1830. Oal-Uh-po-e-wah.— LewisandClark.Exped.,
I, map, 1814. OalUpipas.— McKenney and Hall,
led. Tribes, iil, 80, 1854. Oallapooans.— Parker,
Journal, 239, 1840. OaUapoohat.— Robertson ( 1846)
in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., Ist sess., 8. 1848.
OaUapooialet.~Howl8on in H. R. Misc. Doc. 29,
30th Cong., 1st sess., 26, 1848. Oallapooias.— Tay-
lor in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 40th Cong., spec, sess., 25,
1867. OaUapootoi.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist.,
VI, 141, 1883. Callapooya.— Pres, Mess., Ex. Doc.
39, 32d Cong., Ist sess., 2, 1852. Callapooyahs.—
Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped.. vi, 217, 1846. 04la
puya«.— Wilkes, ibid., IV, 368. 1845. Callapuyef.—
Medill in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., Ist sess.,
6, 1848. Call-law-poh-yea-as.— Ross, Fur Hunters,
108, 1855. Oathlapooya.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vi,
1848. Oathlapouyeas.— Stuart in Nouv. Ann. Voy.,
X, 117. 1821. Ool-lap-poh-yea-aas.— Ross, Adven-
tures, 235, 1847. Kait-ka.— Bissell, Umpkwa MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1881 (Umpkwa name). Kala-
Booiah.— Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi,
225, 1841. Kalapooya.— Tolmieaiid Dawson, Comp.
Vocab., 11,1884. Kalapoeyaha.— Townsend, Narr.,
175. 1839. XaUpouyaa.— De 8met, Letters, 230,
1843. Kalapaa7a.~Ind. Aff. Rep., 232, 1883.
Kalapuya.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., vi. 217,
1846. KalUpooeaa — Meek in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,
30th Cong., 1st sess., 10, 1848. Xallapooyah.—
Slocum (1S35) in H. R. Rep. 101, 25th Cong., 3d
sess., 42, 1839. Xallapugas.— Farnham, Travels,
112, 1843. Kallapuia.— Gibbs in Cont. N.A.Ethnol.,
I, 212, 1877. Kallapuiah.— Ludewig, Am. Aborig.
Lang., 202, 1858. Tsanh-alokual amim.— Gatschet,
Lakmiut MS., B. A. E., 1877 (Lakmiut name).
Vule Pum«.— Warre and Vavasour in Martin,
Hudson Bay Terr., 80. 1819.
Calaveras Man. During the early days
of gold inininjj in California many relics
of man and hi.s implements and utensils
were found embedded in the ancient river
gravels from which the gold was washed.
These remains were
especially plentiful
in Calaveras co.,
whence the name
**Calaveras man,"
here employed. The
gold-l>earing gravels
are largely of Tertiary
age, although the
conditions have been
such that in places frontal view of the fragmen-
accumulations uni- tary calaveras skull
form in character with the older deposits
have continued to the present time. Ow-
ing to this fact expert geologic discrim-
ination is necessary in considering ques-
tions of age. The evidences* of great
antiquity, in many cases apparently al-
most conclusive, were accepted as satis-
factory by J. D. Whitney, formerly state
geologist of California; but the lack of
expert observation or of actual record of
the various finds reported makes extreme
caution advisable, especially since the
acceptance of the evidence necessitates
conclusions widely at variance with the
usual conception of the history of man,
not only in America but throughout the
world. * The need of conservatism in
dealing with this evidence is further em-
phasi:^ by the fact that the human
crania of the auriferous gravels are
practically identical with the crania
of the present California Indians, and
it is also observed that the artifacts —
the mortars and pestles, the implements
and ornaments — found in the same con-
nection correspond closely with those of
the historic inhabitants of the Pacific
slope. It is held by many students of
human history that man already existed
in some parts of the world in the late
Tertiary — a period l)elieved by conserva-
tive geologists to have closed hundreds
of thousands of years ago. But few are
ready to accept the conclusion, made
necessary if the California testimony is
fully sustained, that man had then reached
the stage of culture characterized by the
use of implements and ornaments of
polished stone. In view of the somewhat
defective nature of the testimony fur-
nished, as well as the vast importance of
the deductions depending on it, it is per-
haps wise to suspend jud^ent until
more systematic investigations can be
made. The "Calaveras skull,'* which
has had exceptional prominence in the
discussion of this subject, is preserved in
the Peabody Museum of Archselogy and
Ethnology, at Cambridge, Mass. Not-
withstanding the well-fortified statements
of early writers to the effect that this
relic came from the gravels of Bald mtn.
at a depth of about 130 feet, there are
good reasons for suspecting that it may
have been derived from one of the lime-
stone caves so numerous in the Calaveras
region. It thus appears that the impor-
tance of this specimen, as a feature of the
evidence, has probably been greatly over-
estimated.
For details relating to the auriferous-
gravel testimony consult Becker in Bull.
Geol. Soc. Am., ii, 1891; Blake in Jour,
of Geol., Oct. -Nov., 1899; Dall in Proc.
Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1899; Foster, Pre-
hist. Races, 1878; Hanks, Deep Lying
Gravels of Table Mtn., 1901; Holmes in
Smithson. Rep. 1899, 1901 ; Lindgren and
Knowlton in Jour, of Geol., iv, 1896;
Putnam in University of Cal. Publ.,
Dept. of Anthrop., 1905; Skertchley in
Jour. Anthrop. Inst., May, 1888; Whitr
ney in Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard,
VI, no. 1, 1879; Wright, Man and the
Glacial Period, 1895. See Antiquity^ Arch-
eology, (w. H. H.)
Calcefar. A division of the New Jersey
Dela wares formerly living in the interior
between Rancocas cr. and the present
Trenton. In 1648 they were estimated at
150 men.
Calafars.— Sanford, U. S., 1819. Caloefar.— Evelin
(1648) quoted by Proud, Penn., i, 113, 1797.
Calchufiiies. A band of Jicarilla Apache
living in 1719 on Arkansas r., in the pres-
ent s. E. Colorado.— Villa-Sefior y fcJan-
chez, Theatro Am., pt. 2, 412, 1748.
Apaohes Oalohuflnes.— Valverde y Costo (1719)
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Hex., 236. 1889.
Caloiati. A pueblo of the province of
BULL. 30]
OALCITE — CALENDAR
189
Atripuy in the region of the lower Rio
Grande, N. Mex., in 1598.--Onate (1598)
in Doc. In^d., xvi, 115, 1871.
Calcite. — Carbonate of calcium, the
essential constitutent of chalk and lime-
stone, when pure, colorless, and trans-
parent, thouen sometimes yellow and
red and even black. The crystals, which
are so soft as to be readily shaped with
primitive knives and scrapers, are of
general occurrence and were employed
by the Indians in the manufacture of
ornaments and minor sculptures. See
Stone-work. (w. ii. h.)
CaldroiM. See Receptacles.
Caldwell, Billy. See Sagaunash.
Calendar. Although the methods of
computing time had l)een carried to an
advanced stage among the cultured tril)es
of Mexico and Central America, the In-
dians N. of Mexico hati not brought them
beyond the simplest stage. The alterna-
tion of day and night and the changes of
the moon and the seasons formed the
ba^es of their systems. The budding,
blooming, leafing, and fruiting of vegeta-
tion, the springing forth, growth, and
decay of annuals, and the molting, mi-
gration, pairing, etc., of animals and birds
were used to denote the progress of the
seasons. The divisions of the day dif-
ered, many tribes recognizing 4 diur-
nal periods — the rising and setting of the
sun, nocm, and midnight — while full days
were usually counted as so many nights
or sleeps. The years were generally
reckoned, especially in the far n., as
so many winters or so many snows; but
in the Gulf states, where snow is rare and
the heat of summer the dominant feature,
the term for year had some reference to
this season or to the heat of the sun. As
a rule the four seasons — spring, summer,
autumn, and winter — were recognized
and specific names applied to them, but
the natural phenomena by which they
were determmed, and from which their
names were derived, varied according to
latitude and environment, and as to
whether the tribe was in the agricultural
or the hunter state. Some authorities
state that the Indians of Virginia divided
the year into five seasons: (1) The bud-
ding of spring; (2) the earing of corn, or
roasting-ear time ; ( 3 ) summer, or highest
sun; (4) corn-gathering, or fall of the leaf;
and (5) winter (cohonk). According to
Mooney the Cherokee and most of the
southeastern tribes also divided the year
into five seasons. Swanton and Boas
state that some of the tribes of the N. W.
coast divided the vear into two equal
parts, with 6 months or moons to each
part, the summer period extending from
April to September, the winter period
from October to March. Many tribes
began the year wiih the vernal equinox;
others began it in the fall, the Kiowa
about Oct. 1, the Hopi with the *'new
fire" in Noveml)er, the TakuUi in Janu-
ary, etc. The most important time di-
vision to the Indians n. of Mexico was
the moon, or month, their count of this
period l)eginning with the new moon.
So far as can be ascertained, it was not
universal in the past to correlate the
moons with the year; where correlation
was attempted, in order that the moons
should bear a fixed relation to the sea-
sons, 12 was the number usually reckoned;
but some of the tribes, as those of New
England, the Cree, and some others
counted 13. The Kiowa system, although
counting 12 moons to the year, presents
the peculiarity of half a moon in one of
the unequal four seasons, and the other
half in the following season, thus begin-
ning the year with the last half of a moon.
Among the Zuni half the months are
"nameless," the other half "named."
The year iscalled a "passage of time," the
seasons the "steps" of the year, and the
months "crescents," probably because
each begins with anew moon. The new
year is termed "mid-journey of the sun,"
1. e., the middle of the solar trip between
one sunmier solstice and another, and
occurring about the 19th of December
usually initiates a short season of great
religious activity. The first six months
have definite and a])i)ropriate names,
the others, while callecf the "nameless"
months, are designated, in ritualistic
speech. Yellow, Blue, Red, White, Varie-
gated, and Black, after the colors of the
prayer-sticks sacrificed in rotation at
the full of each moon to the gods of the
north, west, south, east, zenith, and nadir,
respectively represented by those colors
(Cushing in Millstcme, *ix, 58, Apr.
1884). There appears to have been an
attempt on the part of some tribes to coni-
I)ensate for the surplus days in the solar
year. Carver ( Trav. , 160, i 796) , speaking
of the Sioux or the Chippewa, says that
when thirty moons have waned they add
a supernumerary one, which they tenn
the lost moon. The Ilaida formerly in-
tercalated what they called a "between
month," because l)etween the two pe-
riods into which they divided the year,
and it is likely that this was sometimes
omitted to correct the calendar (Swanton
in Am. Anthrop., v, 331, 1903). The
Creeks counted 12} moons to the year,
adding a moon at the end of every second
year, half counted in the preceding and
half in the following year, somewhat
as did the Kiowa. The Indians gen-
erally calculated their ages by some re-
markable event or phenomenon which
had taken place within their remem-
brance; but few Indians of mature years
could possibly tell their age before learn-
190
CALIFORNIA INDIANS
[b. a. 1L~
ing the white man's way of counting time.
Sticks were sometimes notched bv the In-
dians as an aid in time counts. The oldest
of these among the Pima (Russell in Am.
Anthrop., v, 76, 1903) dates from the
meteoric shower of 1833, a notable tally
date in Indian time reckoning. Some of
the northern tribes kept recoSs of events
by means of symbolic figures or picto-
graphs. One of these is an extended cal-
endar history, called the ** Lone-dog
Those along the coast s. of San Francisco
were brought under Spanish missionary
influence m the latter part of the 18th
and the beginning of the 19th centuries.
Some tribes, however, were not known
even by name until after the discovery
of gold and the settlement of the country
in 1849 and subsequently. The Califor-
nians were among the least warlike tribes
of the continent and offered but little re-
sistance, and that always ineffectual, to
LINGUISTIC FAMILIES OF CALIFORNIA
winter count," said to have been painted
originally on a buffalo robe, found among
the Dakota, the figures of which cover a
period of 71 years from 1800 (Mallery in
10th Rep. B. A. E.). Another series is
the calendar history of the Kiowa, de-
cribed by Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E.
See Measures^ Numeral systems, (c. t.)
California, Indians of. The Indians of
California are among the least known
groups of natives of North America.
the seizure of their territory by the
whites. Comparatively few of them are
now on reservations. The majority live
as squatters on the land of white owners
or of the Government, or in some cases
on land allotted them by the Govern-
ment or even bought by themselves from
white owners. Their number has de-
creased very rapidly and is now probably
about 15,000, as compared with perhaps
150,000 before the arrival of the whitels.
BULL. 30]
CALOUCHA CALUMET
191
Physically, the California Indians, like
other tribes of the Pacific coast, are rather
shorter than the majority of those in east-
ern North America. In many cases they
incline to be stout. Along the coast, and
especially in the s., they are unusually
dark. The most southern tribes approxi-
mate thoee of the Colorado r. in physical
type and are tall and short-headed. The
native population of California was broken
up into a great number of small groups.
Tnese were often somewhat unsettled in
habitation, but always within very lim-
ited territories, and were never nomadic.
The dialects of almost all of these groups
were different and belonged to as many
as 21 distinct linguistic families, being a
fourth of the total number found in all
North America, and, as compared with
the area of the state, so large that Cali-
fornia must probably be regarded as the
region of the greatest aboriginal linguistic
diversity in the world. Three larger
stocks have found their way into Califor-
nia: the Athapascan in the x. and the
Shoshonean and Yuman in the s. The
remainder are all small and purely Cali-
fomian.
This diversity is accompanied by a
corresponding stability of population.
While there have undoubtedly been shift-
ings of tribes within the state, they do
not appear to have extended very far ter-
ritorially. The Indians themselves in no
gart of the state except the extreme s.
ave any tradition of migrations and
uniformly believe themselves to have
originated at the si)ot where they live.
The groups in which they live are very
loose, being defined and held together by
language and the topography of the coun-
try much more than by any political or
social organization; distinct tribes, as
they occur in many other parts of America,
do not really exist. The small village i«
the most common unit of organization
among these people.
Culturally, the California Indians are
probably as simple and rude as any large
group of Indians in North America.
Their arts (excepting that of basket mak-
ing, which they possessed in a high form )
were undeveloped; pottery was practi-
cally unknown, and in the greater part
of the state the carving or working of
wood was carried on only to a limited
extent. Houses were often of grass,
tule, or brush, or of bark, sometimes
covered with earth. Only in the n. w.
part of the state were small houses of
planks in use. In this re^on, as well
as .on the Santa Barbara ids., wooden
canoes were also made, but over the
greater part of the state a raft of tules
was the only means of navigation. Agri-
culture was nowhere practised. Deer and
small game were hunted, and there was
considerable fishing; but the bulk of the
food was vegetable. The main reliance
was placed on numerous varieties of
acorns, and next to these, on seeds, espe-
cially of grasses and herbs. Roots and
bernes were less ustni.
Both totemism and a true gentile or-
ganization were totally lacking in all parts
of the stat4\ The mythology of the Cali-
fornians was characterized by unusually
well -developed and consistent creation
myths, and by the complete lack not only
of migration but of ancestor traditions.
Their ceremonies were numerous and
elalx)rate as compared with the pre-
vailing simplicity of life, but they lacked
almost totally the rigid ritualism and ex-
tensive syml)olism that p<*rvade the cere-
monies of most of America. One set
of ceremonies wa.** usually connected with
a secret religious society; another, often
spectacular, was held in remembrance of
the dead.
With constant differences from group
to group, these characteristics held with
a general underlying uniformity over
the greater part of California. In the
extreme x. w. portion of the state,
however, a somewhat more highly de-
veloped and specialized culture existed,
which showed in several respects simi-
larities to that of the x. Pacific coast, as
is indicated by a greater advance in
technology, a social organization largely
upon a ])r()perty basis, and a system of
mythology that is suggestive of those
farther x. The Santa Barbara islanders,
now extinct, appear also to have l)een
considerably specialized from the great
body of Cafifornian tribes, both in their
arts and th(^ir mode of life. The Indians
of s. California, finally, especially those
of the interior, living under geographic
conditions very different from those of
the main portion of the state, resemble
in certain respects of culture the Indians
of Arizona and New Mexico. See ^f^s-
sion Tndiand and the articles (m the indi-
vidual linguistic families noted on the
accompanying map. (a. l. k.)
Caloncha. A tnhe on a river fiowing
into the Atlantic n. of St Augustine, Fla.
(De Isle, map, 1707) ; possibly an erro-
neous location of Calusa, otherwise uni-
dentifiable.
Calninet (Norman-French form of lit-
erary French chalumety a parallel of
chahimeau for chalemeaUy Old French
chnleinelj Proven(,*al caramel^ a tul)e,
pipe, reed, flute, especially a shepherd's
pipe; Spanish caramilloy a flute; English,
shairm; Low Latin, calamelltis, diminu-
tive of I^tin calamus, reed). Either one
of 2 highly symbolic shafts of reed or
wood about 2 in. broad, J in. thick, and 18
in. to 4 ft. long, the one representing the
male, the other the female shaft, usually
192
CALUMET
[b. a. b.
perforated for a pathway for the breath
or spirit, painted with diverse symbolic
colors and adorned with various sym-
bolic objects, and which may or may
not have a pipe bowl to contain tobacco
for making a sacred offering of its benev-
olent smoke to the gods. In modern usage
the term usually includes the pipe. Its
coloring and degree of adornment varied
somewhat from tribe to tribe and were
largely governed by the occasion for
which the calumet was used. From the
meager descriptions of the calumet and
its uses it would seem that it has a cere-
monially symbolic history independent
of that of the pipe; and that when the
pipe became an altar, by its employment
for burning sacrificial tobacco to the gods,
convenience and convention united the
already highly symbolic calumet shafts
and the sacrificial tobacco altar, the pipe-
bowl ; hence it became one of the most
profoundly sacred objects known to the
Indians of northern America. As the
colors and the other adornments on the
shaft represent symbolically various
dominant gods of the Indian polvtheon,
it follows that the symbolism of the calu-
met and i)ipe represented a veritable ex-
ecutive council of the gods. Moreover,
in some of the elaborate ceremonies in
which it was necessary to portray this
symbolism the employment of the two
shafts became necessary, because the
one with its colors and accessory adorn-
ments represented the procreative male
power and his aids, and was denominated
the male, the fatherhood of nature; and
the other with its colors and necessary
adornments represented the reproduc-
tive female power and her aids, and was
denominated the female, the motherhood
of nature.
The calumet was employed by ambas-
sadors and travelers as a passport: it was
used in ceremonies designed to conciliate
foreign and hostile nations and to con-
clude lasting peace; to ratify the alliance
of friendly tribes; to secure favorable
weather for journeys; to bring needed
rain; and to attest contracts and treaties
which could not be violated without in-
curring the wrath of the gods. The use
of the calumet was inculcated by reli-
gious precept and example. A chant and
a dance have become known as the chant
and the dance of the calumet; together
they were employed as an invocation to
one or more of the gods. By naming in
the chant the souls of those against
whom war must be waged, such persons
were doomed to die at the hands of the
I)er8on so naming them. The dance and
the chant were rather in honor of the
calumet than with the calumet. To
smoke it was prohibited to a man whose
wife was with child, lest he perish and she
die in childbirth. The calumet was em-
ployed also in banishing evil and for ob-
taining good. Some, in order to obtain
favor of the gods, sacrificed some animals
in spirit to them, and, as the visible food
was not consumed visibly by the gods,
they ate the food and chanted and danced
for the calumet.
J. O. Dorsey asserts that the Omaha and
cognate names for this dance and chant
signify ** to make a sacred kinship,*' but
not **to dance." This is a key to the
esoteric significance of the use of the cal-
umet. The one for whom the dance for
the calumet was performe<l became there-
by the adopted son of the performer.
One might ask another to dance the cal-
umet dance for him, or one might offer
to perform this dance for another, but in
either case the offer or invitation could
be declined. The dancing party con-
sisted of 2 leaders and sometimes as many
as 20 or 30 adherents. In the lodge
wherein the dance for the calumet was
to be held the 2 ninibn weawan, or cal-
umet pipes, were placed on a forked sup-
port driven into the virgin soil in the
rear part of the lodge. Each weawan has,
instead of a pipe-bowl, the head and neck
of a green-neck duck. Next on the staff
are the yellowish feathers of the great
owl, extending about 6 in.; next are
the long wing-ieathers of the war eagle,
riven and stuck on lengthwise in 3 places;
at the end a bit of horsehair, tinted red,
is wrapped around the staff an(i bound on
with sinew, and over this is fastened some
fur of the white rabbit, strips of which
dangle about 6 in.; below the rabbit
fur the horsehair extends fully 6 in.
The horsehair is wrapped around the staff
in 2 other places and secured in a sim-
ilar manner; the 3 tufts are equidistant,
about 6 in. apart. Close to the last
tuft is the head of the wajifl^aada (?)
woodcock, having the bill faced toward
the mouthpiece. There may be, accord-
ing to La Flesche, as many as 6 heads on
1 pipe. No part of the' neck appears,
and the lower mandible is removed. The
head, or the heads, in case of a plurality,
was secured to the shaft by means of a
deer or antelope skin. Next to this are
suspended 2 eagle plumes, symbolizing
2 eggs, typifying that the adopted {per-
son is still an immature child, and serving
as a thinly veiled symbol suggestive of
the source of life. Next are a number
of eagle feathers secured to the shaft by
means of 2 cords or thongs of deer or
antelope skin. On one i^haft the eagle
feathers are white, being those of a male
eagle, and the shaft is dark green. On
the other shaft the feathers are spotted
black and white, being those of the fe-
BULL. 30]
CALUMET
193
male eagle, and the shaft is dark blue.
Two symbolically painted gourd rattles
are also employed, 1 for each calumet.
When these shafts are set against the 2
forked sticks the heads of the ducks arc
placed next to the ground. Close to these
shafts are 2 sticks connected with a sacred
ear of corn, which must be in perfect con-
dition; ears containing rough or shriveled
or otherwise imperfect grains are re-
jected. All the people use corn for food,
hence it is regarded as a mother. Thesis
sticks are tinted with Indian red. The
longer stick, which stands nearer the calu-
met shafts, is driven about 4 in. into the
earth and projects several inches above
the ear of corn, the top end of it being
on a level with that of the ear of corn,
while the lower end hangs a short dis-
tance below the lower end of the ear of
corn, but does not reach the ground.
The ear of corn is fastened to the sticks
by wrapping around the 3 a l)and braided
from hair from the head of a buffalo.
To the top of the smaller stick an eagle
plume is secured with sinew. The lower
part of the ear of corn is wdiite; the upper
part is painted green.
In this dance, lasting an hour, the
movements of the war eagle are closely
imitated, accompanied by a constant
waving of the calumets. After the de-
livery of pra^ents, the 2 calumets are
given to the family to which the adopted
child belongs. Such are, according to
Dorsey, the Omaha calumets with their
use in a ceremony for making a sacred
kinship in the adoption of a child, who
for this purpose must be less than 10
years of age. The Ponka use only 1 cal-
umet, although they are well acquainted
with the Omaha use of 2, and it may be
a higher development of the intention of
the symbolism.
From Dorsey *s account of the Omaha
calumets it is evident that they are to-
sether the most highly organized em-
blems known to religious observances
anywhere, and it is further in evidence
that the pipe is an accessorv rather than
the donunant or chief object in this
highly complex synthetic symbol of the
source, reproduction, and conservation
of life.
For the purpose of comparison, the fol-
lowing description of the calumet bv
Hennepin may be given: "The quill,
which IS commonly two foot and a half
long, is made of a pretty strong reed or
cane, adorned with feathers of all colors,
interlaced with locks of women's hair.
They tie to it two wings of the most
curious birds they find, which makes
their calumet not much unlike Mercury's
wand, or that staff ambassadors did for-
merly carry when they went to treat of
peace. They sheath that reed into the
Bull. 30—05 13
neck of birds they call huars [loons],
which are as big as our geese and spotted
with })lack and white; or else of a sort of
ducks who make their nests upon trees,
though water be their natural element,
and whose feathers are of many different
colours. However, every nation adorns
the calumet as they think fit, according to
their own genius and the binls they have
in their own country."
In her description of the Hako cere-
monial of the Pawnee, Miss Fletcher has
set forth these conceptions with great
sympathy and detail. Among this people
two ash saplings are cut and brought with
due ceremony; they are then warmed
and straightened over a newly kindled
sacred lire, and are cut the required
length, "four spans from the thumb to
tlie third tinger." They are then i)eeled
and the pith removed to permit the pas-
sage of tli(^ breath. A stniight groove is
cut the entire length of each shaft, ami
after the litter thus made is cast into the
fire, the shafts are passed through the
flames, "the word of the fire." Thereupon
one of the shafts, with the exception of
the groove, is painted blue with cere-
monially i)repare(l color to symbolize the
sky, and while this is ])eing done there is
intoned a song in which a prayer is made
that life be given to this symlx)l of the
dwelling place of the chief deity. Then
tlie shaft is jdaced in the hands of the
chief shaman, whose function it is to
paint the groove red, typifying the path-
way of the spirits, represented by the
objects place<l later upon this ashen shaft,
for their going forth to aid man in this
ceremony; and, furthermore, the red color
here eniploye<l tyi)ifies the passageways
of the body, through which the breath of
man — his life — comes and departs, and the
sun is red, and also straight — like unto
this — is the pathway on which the sun
shines. In similar fasliion is the other
shaft painted green and its groove red,
the latter color having the same signifi-
cance it has on the other shaft, and the
green color is employed to symbolize
vegetation, the living covering of mother
earth. In the ac('ompanying song a
prayer is made that life be breathed into
the symlx>l to make it efficient in the ap-
proaching ceremonies and that living
power may abide where this symbol
shall be placed. Then the shaman, after
anointing his hands with a sacred oint-
ment, consisting of red clay and the fat
of a deer or buffalo that has been con-
secrated to the chief deity, binds the
symbolic objects separately on the two
shafts. Splitting long feathers from the
wings of an eagle, he glues them with
pine pitch on the shaft, as in feathering
an arrow. These feathers signify that
the eagle soars near the abode of the
194
CALUMKT
[b. a. e.
chief deity. About the mouthpiece of
the shaft soft blue feathers are fastened,
symbolizing the sky wherein the powers
abide. Then a woodpecker's head, with
the mandible turned back upon the red
crest, is bound to the shaft near the
mouthpiece, indicating that the bird may
not be angry ; the inner side of the man-
dible thus exposed is painted blue, show-
ing that the chief deity is lookiqg down
on it as the bird's spint moves along the
groove to reach the people; then about
the middle of the shaft feathers from the
owl are bound and the undecorated end
of the shaft is thrust through the breast,
throat, and mouth of the duck, the breast
reaching the feathers of the owl. The
end of the shaft projects a little from the
duck's mouth, that a pipe may be fitted
to the shaft. The duck's head, therefore,
always faces downward toward the earth
and water. Then 10 tail-feathers of the
brown eagle, made sacred by sacrifice to
the chief deity, are prepared for binding
on one of the stems; a buckskin thong is
threaded through a hole made in the
quill midway of its length and another
thong is passed through a hole near the
end of the quill in such manner that the
feathers may be expanded like a fan on
these two thongs. The two little balls of
white down from inside the thigh of the
white male eagle, representing repro-
ductive power, are secured to the ends of
these thongs and this fan-like wing is se-
cured to the side of the blue-coloreS shaft
in such way that it may swing when the
shaft is waved to simulate the movements
of an eajjle. Such is the female shaft,
rc'presentmg the night, the moon, the
north, as well as kindness and gentleness;
it cares for the people; it is the mother.
Every bird represented on these shafts is
a leader, a cnief, a god; the eagle, the
owl, the woodpecker, and the duck are
chiefs, respectively, of the day, the night,
the trees, and the water. Then 7 tail-
feathers from the white eagle, pre-
pared in similar fashion, are secti^red to
the green-colored shaft; but while these
are being prepared no song is sung, be-
cause the white eagle is not sacred, never
being a sacrificial victim, and having Jess
f)ower than the brown eagle, for it is war-
ike and inclined to injure, and so can
not lead, but must follow. Hence the
green-colored shaft, the male, is prepared,
painted, and decorated after the otner.
From Charlevoi x ( 1 721 ) it is learned that
the calumet is strictly the stem or shaft of
what is commonly called the calumet pipe;
that in those designed for pjiblic cere-
monial purposes this shaft is very long,
and "is of light wood, painted with dif-
ferent colors, and adorned with the heads,
tails, wings, and feathers of the most
beautiful birds," which he believed were
**only for ornament" rather than for
symbolic expression; that among those
nations among which the calumet is in
use it is as sacred as are the wampum
belts and strands among the nations
among whom these things are in use; that
Pawnee tradition asserts that the calumet
is a gift from the sun; that the calumet
is in use more among the southern and
western nations than among the eastern
and northern, and it is more frequently
employed for peace than for war. He
says that if the calumet is offered and
accepted it is the custom to smoke in the
calumet, and the engagements contracted
are held sacred and inviolable, in just so far
assuch human things are inviolable. Per-
rot also says that the Indians believe that
the sun gave the calumet to the Pawnee.
The Indians profess that the violation of
such an engagement never escapes lust
punishment. In the heat of battle, it an
adversary offer the calumet to his oppo-
nent and he accept it, the weapons on
both sides are at once laid down; but to
accept or to refuse the offer of the calu-
met is optional. There are calumets for
various kinds of public engagements, and
when such bargains are made an ex-
change of calumets is usual, in this man-
ner rendering the contract or bargain
sacred.
When war is contemplated, not only
the shaft but the feathers with which it
is dressed are colored red, but the feath-
ers only on one side may be red, and it is
claimed that from the disposition of the
feathers in some instances it is possible to
know to what nation the calumet is to be
presented. By smoking together in the
calumet the contracting parties intend to
invoke the sun and the other gods as wit-
nesses to the mutual obligations assumed
by the parties, and as a guaranty the one
to the other that they shall be fulfilled.
This is accomplished by blowing the
smoke toward the sky, the four world-
quarters, and the earth, with a suitable
invocation. The size and ornaments of
the calumets which are presented to per-
sons of distinction on occasions of moment
are suited to the requirements of the case.
When the calumet is designed to be em-
ployed in a treaty of alliance a^inst a
third tribe, a serpent may be painted on
the shaft, and perhaps some other device
indicating the motive of the alliance.
There were calumets for commerce and
trade and for other social and political
purposes; but the most important were
those designed for war and those for
peace and brotherhood. It was vitally
necessary, however, that they should be
distinguishable at once, lest through
ignorance and inattention one shomd
become the victim of treachery. The
Indians in general chose not or dared not
BULL. 30]
CALUMET CALUSA
195
to violate openly the faith attested by
the calumet, and sought to deceive an
intended victim by the use of a false
calumet of peace in an endeavor to make
the victim m some measure responsible
for the consequences. On one occasion
a band of Sioux, seeking to destroy some
Indians and their protectors, a French
officer and his men, presented, in the
guise of friendship, 12 calumets, appar-
ently of peace; but the officer, who was
versed in such matters and whose suspi-
cion was aroused by the number offered,
consulted an astute Indian attached to
his force, who caused him to see that
among the 12 one of the calumet shafts
was not matted with hair like the others,
and that on the shaft was graven the
figure of a viper, coiled around it. The
officer was made to understand that this
was the sign of covert treachery, thus
frustrating the intended Sioux plot.
The use of the calumet, sometimes called
* * peace-pipe ' ' and * ' war pipe, * ' was wide-
spread in the Mississippi valley gener-
ally. It has been founa amon^ the Pota-
watomi, Cheyenne, Shoshoni, Pawnee
Loups, Piegan, Santee, Yanktonais, Siha-
8ai)a, Kansa, Siksika, Crows, Cree, Skit-
swish, Nez Percys, Illinois, Chickasaw,
Choctaw, Chitimacha, Chippewa, Winne-
bago, and Natchez. In the Ohio and St
lAwrence valleys and southward its use
is not so definitely shown.
For more detailed information consult
Charlevoix, Journal, 1761; Dorsey in 3d
Rep. B. A. E., 1885; Fletcher in 22d
Rep. B. A. E., 1904; Jesuit Relations
and Allied Documents, Thwaites ed.,
i-Lxxiii, 1896-1901; Lafitau, Moeurs
des Sauvages, 1724; Le Page du Pratz,
Hist, de la Louisiane, 1758; Lesueur, La
Danse du Calumet, in Les Soirt^es Cana-
diennes, iv, 1864; ^IcGuire in Rep. Nat.
Mus. 1897, 1899; Perrot, Mdmoire, 1864;
Relations des Jesuites, i-iii, 1858. See
CcUlinite, Ceremony y Dance^ PipeSy To-
bacco, (j. N. B. H.)
Calumet A former Menominee village
on the E. shore of L. Winnebago, Wis.,
with 150 inhabitants in 1817. — Starrow in
Wis. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 171, 1872; Royce
in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. clxxi, 1899.
Calofa. An important tribe of Florida,
formerly holding the s. w. coast from
about Tampa bay to C. Sable and C.
Florida, together with all the outlying
keys, and extending inland to L. Okee-
chobee. They claimed more or less au-
thority also over the tribes of the e. coast,
N. to about C. Caflaveral. The name,
which can not be interpreted, appears as
Calos or Carlos (province) in the early
Spanish and French records, Caloosaand
Coloosa in later English authors, and
survives in Caloosa village, Caloosa-
hatchee r., and Charlotte (for Carlos)
harbor within their old territory. They
cultivated the ground to a limited extent,
but were better noted as expert fishers,
daring seamen, and fierce and determined
fighters, keeping up their resistance to
the Spanish arms and missionary ad-
vances after all the rest of Florida had
submitted. Their men went nearly
naked. They seem to have practised
human sacrifice of captives upon a whole-"
sale scale, scalped and dismembered their
slain enemies, and have repeatedly been
accused of being cannibals. Although
this charge is denied by Adair (1775),
who was in position to know, the evi-
dence of the mounds indicates that it
was true in the earlier period.
Their history begins in 1513 when, with
a fleet of 80 canoes they boldly attacked
Ponce de Leon, who was about to land on
their coast, and after an all-day fight com-
pelled him to withdraw. Even at this
early date they were already noted among
the tribes for the golden wealth which
they had accumulatetl from the numerous
Spanish wrecks cast away upon the keys
in passage from the s., and two cen-
turies later they were regarded as ver-
itable pirates, plundering and killing
without mercy the crews of all vessels,
excepting Spanish, so unfortunate as to be
stranded in their neighborhood. In 1567
the Spaniards established a mission and
fortified post among them, but both seem
to 'have been discontinued soon after,
although the tribe came later under Span-
ish influence. About this time, accord-
ing to Fontaneda, a captive among them,
they numbered nearly 50 villages, includ-
ing one occupied by the descendants of an
A rawakan colon v ( q • v. ) from Cuba. From
one of these villages the modem Tampa
takes its name. Another, Muspa, existed
up to about 1750. About the year 1600
thev carried on a regular trade, by canoe,
with Havana in fish, skins, and amber.
By the constant invasions of the Creeks
and other Indian allies of the English in
the 18th centurv they were at last driven
from the mainland and forced to take
refuge on the keys, particularly Key
West, Key Vaccas, ana the Matacumbe
keys. One of their latest recorded ex-
ploits was the massacre of an entire
French crew wrecked upon the islands.
Romans states that in 1 763, on the trans-
fer of Florida from Spain to England,
the last remnant of the tribe, numbering
then 80 families, or perhaps 350 souls,
was removed to Havana. This, however,
is only partially correct, as a considera-
ble band under the name of Muspa In-
dians, or simply Spanish Indians, main-
tained their distinct existence and lan-
guage in their ancient territory up to the
close of the second Seminole war.
Nothing is known of the linguistic af-
196
CALUSAHATCHEE CAMITRIA
[b. a. e.
finity of the Calusa or their immediate
neignbors, as no vocabulary or other speci-
men of the language is known to exist
beyond the town names and one or two
other words given by Fontaneda, none of
which affords basis for serious interpreta-
tion. Gatschet, the l)est authority on the
Florida languages, says: **The languages
spoken by the Calusa and by the people
next in order, the Tequesta, are unknown
to us. ... They were regarded as peo-
ple distinct from the Timucua and the
tribes of Maskoki origin" (Creek Migr.
Leg., I, 13, 1884). There is a possibiHty
that some fragments of the language may
yet come to light, as boys of this tribe
were among the pupils at the mission
school in Havana in the 16th century,
and the Jesuit Rogel and an assistant
spent a winter in studying the language
and recording it in vocabulary form.
Fontaneda names the following among
about 50 Calusa villages existing about
1570: Calaobe, Ca-sitoa, Cayovea, Coma-
chica, Cuchiyaga, Cutespa, Enempa,
Estame, Guarungunve, Guevu, Jutun,
Metamapo, Muspa, So (explained as
meaning 'town beloved'), Quisiyove,
Sacaspada, Sinaesta, Sinapa, Soco, Tampa
(distinguished as 'a large town ' ), Tatesta,
Tavaguemue, Tequemapo, Tomo, Tom-
sobe, Tuchi, Yagua. Of these, Cuchi-
yaga and (tuarungunve were upon the
keys. (j. M.)
Callooias.— Bartram, Trav., 378, 1792. Callos.—
Brinton, Floridian Peniii., 112, 1859 (given as one
of the French forms). Caloosa.— Romans, Fla.,
291, 1775. Caloa.— De Bry, Brevis Narratio, ii,
Le Moyne map. 1591 ("province" and "chief":
early French form as nsed by Le Moyne and
Laudonnii^re). OaluBas. — Rafinesoue, introd.
Marshall, Ky., i, 25, 1824. Cape Florida Indian*.—
Adair. Hist. Am. Inds., 152, 17/5. Carlin.— Davies,
Caribby Ids., 332, 1666 ( * chief"). Carlos.— Barcia,
Ensayo, 95. 1723 (" province" and "chief "; oldest
Spanish form as nsed in Le6n narrative, 1513, Fon-
taneda, 1575, etc). Coloosas.- Romans, Fla., app.,
xxxiv, 1775. Kaloosas.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War,
364, 1822. Kaluga.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg.,
I, map, 1884.
Calnsahatchee. A former Seminole town
on Calnsahatchee r., s. w. Ela.
Oalootahatohe.- Bartram. Travels, 462, 1791. Co-
looihatchie.— Drake, Bk. Inds., iv, 149, 1R48. Cull-
oo-uiu hat-ohe.— Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 25, 1848.
Calnsi. An unidentified province ap-
parently in E. Ark., N. of Arkansas r. and
w. of the St Francis, visited bv De Soto in
1541.
Oalu9.—Biedma in Smith, Coll. Doc. Fla., 1,60,1857.
Oaluoa.- Gentl. of Elvas (15.57) in French. Hi.st.
Coll. La., n, 175, 1850. Caluti.— Biedma. ibid., 106.
Camajal. A Diegueflo rancheria repre-
sented in the treaty of 1852 at Santa Isa-
bel, Cal.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,34th Cong.,
132, 1857.
Camanc-nac-cooya (probably 'round
field of cactus'). A rancheria, probably
Cochimi, connected with Purfsima (Cade-
gomo) mission. Lower California, in the
18th century.— Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v,
189, 1857.
Camani. A rancheria, probably of the
Sobaipuri, on the Rio Gila not far from
Casa Grande, s. Ariz.; visited by Anza
and Font in 1775. — Bancroft, Ariz, and
N. Mex., 392, 1889.
Laguna del Hospital.- Ibid. La Lagona. — Ibid.
Camano-ca-caamano ( probably ' arroyo of
the great cord ' ). A rancheria, probably
Cochimi, connected with Purfsima mis-
sion, Lower California, in the 18th cen-
tury.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 188, 1857.
Camas. Any species of plant belonging
to the genus (}uamasia ( Camassia of some
later authors), especially Quamasia qua-
mash; also the edible bulb of these plants.
Camas is usually blue-flowered and in
other respects also much resembles the
hyacinth, to which it is botanically re-
lated. It is sometimes called wild hya-
cinth, and in Canadian French, but im-
properly, pomme blanche and pomme
des prairies. The bull)8, which were a
staple food of several N. VV. coast tribes,
and are still much used, are prepared for
food by prolonged steaming. Camas is
found from w. Washington and Oregon
to N. California and British Columbia, and
eastward to the northern Rocky mts. It
was most extensively utilized in the val-
leys of the upper Columbia r. watershed.
The word, spelled also camasSj qaamashj
kamasSy quamiah.Rnd in other ways, came
into English through the Chinook jargon.
lis ultimate source is rhamas^ signifying
' sweet ' in the Nootka language of Van-
couver id. The camas prairies of the
w. sloi)ea of the Rocky mts. were long fa-
mous. From its habit of feeding on this
root the camas rat received its name.
From camas have aKso been named vil-
lages in Fremont co., Idaho; Missoula
CO., Mont; and Clarke co., Wash.; like-
wise a Camas valley in Douglas co.,
Greg., and a town, Kamas, in Summit co.,
Utah. The l^tin name of the plant also
preserves the Indian appellation. See
Roots, (a. f. c\ f. v. c. )
Cambujos. An imaginary Indian "prov-
ince" E. of Quivira, which the abbess
Marfa de Jes^us, of Agreda, Spain, claimed
to have miraculously visited in the 17th
century.
Aburcoa. — Zamte-Salmeron (rd. 1629), Relacion,
in Land of Sun.shine, 187, Feb.. 1900. Oaburcos.—
Maria de Jesus (1631 ) in Palou, Relacion Hist., 337,
1787. Cambujos.- Benavides (lasi) in Palou, op.
cit., .^36. Jambujo*.- Vetancurt (1693), Teatro
Am., Ill, 303, 1H71.
Camiltpaw ( ' people of Kamilt ' ; so
named from their chief). A band of the
Pis(]uows, formerly living on the e. side
of Columbia r. One of the original treaty
tribes of 1855, classed with the Yakima
but really Salishan. They are now on
Yakima res.. Wash.
Kah-milt-pah.— Treaty of 1855 in U. S. Stat., 951,
1S63. Kainilt-pah.—Ind.Aff. Rep., 302, 1877. OamXl-
'I«ma.— Mooneyin 14th Rep. B. A. E., 736, 1896.
Camitria. A ruined pueblo of the Tewa,
BULL. 30]
CAMOA — CAMPING AND CAMP CIRCLES
197
situated in Rio Arriba co., N. Mex.
(Bandelier in Ritch, N.Mex., 201, 1885).
Fii-st mentioned by Ofmte in 1598 (Doc.
In^d., XVI, 102, 116, 1871) as an inhab-
ited village and assigned both to the Tewa
and the *'Chiguas" (Tigua).
Camitre.— Oflate, op. eit., 102. Comitria.— Bande-
lierin Arch. Inst. Papers, i, 19, 1881 (misprint).
Camoa. A Mayo settlement on tlie Rio
Mayo, 70 m. from the coast, in s. 8o-
nora, Mexico.
Oamoa.— Hardy, Travels, 390, 1829. Canamoo.—
Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein. Nene Welt-Bott,
1726. Santa Catalina Cayamoa.— Orozco y Berra,
Geog., 356, 1864.
Camoles. A tribe formerly living on the
Texas coast "in front" of the Conio;
mentioned by Cabeza de Vaca (Smith
transl., 137, 1871) in the account of his
sojourn in Texas, 1527-34. They cannot
be identified with any later historical
tribe.
Camones.— Cabeza de Vaea, op. cit.,113.
Camping and Camp circles. Kach North
American tribe claimed a certain locality
^s its habitat and dwelt in communities
or villages about which stretched its hunt-
ing grounds. As all the inland people
depended for food largely on the gath-
ering of acorns, seeds, and roots, the
catching of salmon when ascending the
streams, or on 'hunting for meat and
skin clothing, they camped in makeshift
shelters or porta])le dwellings during a
considerable i)art of th(^ year. These
dwellings were brush shelters, the mat
house and birch-bark lodge of tlie
forest tribes, and the skin tent of the
plains. The rush mats of different sizes,
woven by the women, were rolled into a
long bundle, when a party was traveling.
The oblong frame was made of saplings
tied together with bark fiber. Tlie long-
est and widest mats were fastened out-
side the frame to form the walls, and
smaller ones were overlapped to make a
rain-proof roof, an opening being left in
the middle for the escape of the smoke
from the central fire. For the skin tent,
10 to 20 j)oles were cut and trimmed by
the men and preserved from year to year.
To tan, cut, tit, and sew the skin cover
and to set up the tent was the special work
of women. Dogs formerly transported
the long tent jx)les by means of travois,
but in later years they were dragged by
pomes.
Hunting, visiting, or war parties were
more or less organizeii. The leader was
generally the head of a family or of a
Kindred group, or he was appointed to his
office with certain ceremonies. He de-
cided the length of a day's journey and
where the camp should be made at night.
As all property, save a man's personal
clothing, weapons, and riding horses, be-
longed to the woman, its care during a
journey fell upon her. On the tribal
hunt the old men, the women and chil-
dren, and the laden ponies formed the
body of the slowly moving procession,
protected on either side by the warriors,
who walked or rode, encuililx'red only by
their weapons. The details of the camp
were controlled by the women, except
with war j)arties, when men did the work.
When a camping place was reached the
mat houses were erected as most conven-
ient for the family group, but the skin
tents were set up in a circle, near of kin
I )ei ng neigh bors. I f danger from enem ies
was Apprehended, the ponies and other
valuable i)ossessions were kept within the
space inclosed by the circle of tents.
Long journeys were freijuently under-
taken for friendly visits or for intertribal
ceremonies. When traveling and camp-
ing the jK'ople kept well together under
their leader, but when near their desti-
nation, the party halted and dispatched
one or two young men in gala dress with
the little i)acket of tobacco to apprise the
leading men of the village of their aj)-
proach. While the messengers were gone
the i)rairie became a va»st dressing room,
and men, women, and children shook off
the dust of travel, painted their faces, and
donned their best garments to be ready to
receive the escort which was always sent
to welcome the guests.
When the triln'S of the buffalo country
w^ent on their annual hunt, ceremonies at-
tended every stage, from the initial rites,
when the leader was chosen, through-
out the journeyings, to the thanksgiving
ceremony which closed the expedition.
The long procession was escorted by
warriors selected by the leader and the
chiefs for tiieir trustiness and valor.
They acted as a jiolice guard to prevent
any straggling that might result in per-
sonal or tribal danger, and they prevented
any private hunting, as it might stam-
pede a herd that might be in the vicinity.
When on the annual hunt the tribe
cami>ed in a circle and preserved its po-
litical divisions, and the circle wasoften a
quarter of a mile or more in diameter.
Sometimes the camp was in concentric cir-
cles, each circle representing a political
group of kindred. The Dakota call them-
selves the "seven council fires,'' and say
that they formerly camped in two divisions
or groups, one composed of 4 and the other
of 3 concentric circles. The Omaha and
close cognates, when on the annual buf-
falo hunt and during the great tribal cer-
mimies camped in a circle. Each of the
10 Omaha gentes had its unchangeable
place in the line. The women of each
gens knew where their tent^ belonged,
and when a camping ground was reached
each drove her ])onies to the proper
place, so that when the tents of the tril)e
198
CAMPO CANADA8AGA
[B. A. B.
were all up each gens was in the position
to which it was entitled by the regulations
that were connected with ancient beliefs
and customs. For particular ceremonies,
especially the great annual sun dance
(q. V. ), the Kiowa, Cheyenne, and others
camped in a circle made up of the differ-
ent political divisions in fixed and regular
order.
The tribal circle, each segment oom-
poseclofa clan, gens, or band, madealiving
picture of tribal organization and respon-
sibilities. It impressed upon the beholder
the relative position of kinship groups
and their interdependence, both for the
maintenance of order and government
within and for defense against enemies
from without, while the opening to the e.
and the position of the ceremonial tents
recalled the religious rites and obligations
by which the many parts were held to-
gether in a compact whole.
See Dorsey in 3(1 and 15th Rep. B. A.
E.; Fletcher in Publ. Peabody Mus. ;
Matthews in 5th Rep. B, A. E. ; Mooney in
14th and 17th Reps. B. A. E. (a. c. f.)
Campo (Span.: *camp'). A settlement
and reservation of 18 Diegueilos, 170 m.
from Mission Tule River agency, Cal.
The land, comprising 280 acres, is a water-
less, unproductive tract for which a pat-
ent has been issued. — Ind. Aff. Rep., 175,
1902.
Campti. A village, probably of the
Natchitoches, formerly on Red r. of Louis-
iana, about 20 m. above Natchitoches.
In his report to President Jefferson in
1805, Sibley (Hist. Sketches, 1806) says
the town was inhabited by the French,
the Indians having left it on account of
sickness in 1792. (a. c. f.)
Canaake. Mentioned as the name of
an ancient Florida tribe, of which a rem-
nant still existed in 1821. The general
context of the reference indicates that the
form is a bad misprint for Calusa, q. v.
OanMck^.— Penidre (1821) in Morse, Rep. to Sec.
War, app., 311, 1822. Cana ake.— Ibid., 149.
Canada. (Huron: kanddtty * village,'
* settlement. ' — Cartier ) . A term used to
designate all the Indians of Canada, and
also by early writers in a more restricted
sense. Cartier designates the chief of
Stadacon6 (Quebec) as the king of Can-
ada, and applies the name Canada to the
country immediately adjacent. His vo-
cabularies indicate an Iroqnoian (Huron)
people living there. The early French
writers used the term Canadiens to des-
ignate the Algonquian tribes on or near
the St Lawrence, especially the Nascapee
and the Montagnais tribes l>elo w the Sague-
nay, as distinguished from the Algonkin
and Micmac. The New England writers
sometimes designated as Canada Indians
those Abnaki who had removed from'
Maine to St Francis and B^cancour.
(j. M.)
Canada.— Cartier, Brief Recit, title, 1545. Cana-
daooa.— Lescarbot (1609) Quoted by Charlevoix,
New France, ii, 237, 1866. Oanadenaea.— Lescarbot
auoted by Tanner, Nar. , 1830 ( Latin form ) . Oana-
ese. — 'Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 26, 1744. Canadiaini.—
Dutch map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i, 1856
i located north of Chaleur bay ) . Canadiens. --Jesr
le\. 1632, 14. 1858. Canide Indianes.— Gardne*
(1662) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xni. 225, 1881.
Canadasaga (Gd-nd-dd-fte^^-gey* at the
new town * ) . A former Seneca town near
the present Geneva, N. Y. On account of
its size it was for a time considered one
of the chief towns of the tribe. In 1700
it was situated IJ m. s. e. of Geneva, but
in 1732, on account of the ravages of
smallpox, the inhabitants removed 2 or 3
m. s. w., to the s. bank of BurrelFs (Slate
Rock) cr. At the breaking out of the
French and Indian war this site was also
abandoned, and the inhabitants moved to
Canadasaga brook, or Castle brook, s. w. of
Geneva. Here, in 1756, a stockade was
built for their protection by Sir William
Johnson. The town became known as
New Caatle, and was destroyed by Sullivan
in 1779. (j. M. J. N. B. H. )
Canadaasago. — Conover, Kanadasaga and Geneva
MS., B. A. E. Canada-saga.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
11,1191,1849. Canadasager.— Ibid. Canadasaggo.'—
Johnson (1763), ibid., vii, 550,^866. Canadasago.—
Conover. op. cit. Canadateago.— Ibid. Canada-
sege.— Ibid. Canadasegy.— Ibid. Canadayager.—
Ibid. Oanadesago. —Pickering (1790) in Am. St.
Pap., IV, 214, 1832. Canadesaque.— Conover, op.
cit. Oanadesego.— Ibid. Oanadiiega.— Conf. of
1763 in N. Y.Doc.Col. Hist., vii, 656, 18.%. Oanade-
sago.— Conover, op. cit Canandesaga.— NukercJc
(1779)quoted by Conover, ibid. Caaasadauqne.—
Ibid. Canasadego.— Evans, map (1756) quoted by
Conover, ibid. Canatataga.— Ibid. Canedeiaga.—
Ibid. Canesadage.— Ibid. Canidetego.— Ibid.
Caniditego.— Jones (1780) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
VIII, 786, 1857. Oannadaaago.— Conover, op. cit.
Oannadesago.— Ibid. Oannadisago. — Ibid. Can-
ni»dag«a. — Ibid. Canniadaque.— Ibid. Cannis-
dque.— Ibid. Cannondesaga.- McKendry (1779)
Quoted by Conover, ibid. Canodasega.— Ibid.
Oaaodosago.— Ibid. Canotedagui.— Doc. of 1726
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v7797, 1855. CanoM-
dogui.— Bancker (1727) quoted by Conover, op. cit.
Canundasaca.— Ibid. CaondaiBauaue.- Ibid. Gaun-
dasaqae.— Ibid. Conadasan.— Ibid. ConadasMm. —
Ibid. Connadasaga.- Ibid. Connadasego.— Ibid.
Connadetago.— Ibid. Connagasago.— Ibid. Ck>no-
dotago. — I Did. Cunnesedago.— Barton (1779)
quoted by Conover, ibid. Oi-ni-da-ta-ga.— Mor-
gan, League Iroq., 424, 1851 (Cayuga and Onon-
daga form). Oa-na-da-sage.— Ibid. (Oneida and
Mohawk form). Oi-ni-da-se"-ge.— Hewitt, inf n
(Seneca form). Oanadesaga.— Conover. op. cit.
wtneohMt£ge. — Ibid. Oaneohati^ge.— Zeisoerger
(1750) quoted by Conover, ibid. Ckt-nunHia-
M-ga.— Morgan, League Iroq., 424, 1851 (Seneca
form). Kaentatague.- Pouchot, map (1758) in N.
Y. Doc. Col. Hist^ X, 694, 1858. Saiuidagaco.—
Conover. op. cit. itanadaoeaga.- Ibid. TCanadaoe-
sey. — Ibid. Kanadaragea.— Ibid. Kanadaaaen. —
Ibid. Kanadaaagea.— Ibid. Xanadaaeagea. — Ibid.
Kanadaaeago.— Drake, Bk. Inds., v. 111, 1848.
Kaaadaaee^.— Johnson (1763) in K. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist. ^11, 576, 1856. Kaaadaaegoa.— Conover, op.
cit. Kanadaaero.— Johnson ( 1763) quoted by Con-
over, ibid. Kanadaaigea. —Conover, ibid. Kana-
deaaga.— Ibid. KanaoeaMo. — Ibid. Kanadeaero. —
Ibid. X£nideaa^7.-J^nson(1763)inN.Y.Doc.
Col . Hist. , VII, 550, 1856. Kaaadaiaigy. —Convert op.
cit. Kaaadoaega.- Ibid. Xanagago.— Livermore
(1779) In N. H. Hist See. Coll.. VlTlae, 1850. San-
BOLL. 30]
CANAJOHARIK CANA8ATEGO
199
aadaaage*. — Nukerck (1779) quoted by Conover,
op. cit. Kanaaadagea. — I bid . &ana»edaga. — Ibid.
Kanedaaaga.— Ibid. Kanedeaago.— Machiii (1779)
quoted by Ck>nover, ibid. Kaneaadago.— €on-
over, ibia. Kaneaadakeh.— Ibid. Kaneaedaga.—
Ibid. Kannadaaaga.— Grant (1779) quoted by Con-
over, ibid. Kannadeaa^a.— Ibid. Kannadeaeys.—
Pemberton in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s.. ii, 176,
1816. Kanodoaegea.— Conover, op. cit. Kaunau-
daaag«.— Ibid. Kennedaaeage.— Ibid. Kenneae-
daga.— Ibid. Konaaadagea.— Ibid. Konaaoa.— Jef-
ferys, Fr. Dom., pt. 1, map, 1761. Konaasa.— Ho-
mann Heirs' map, 1756. Old Castle.— Conover, op.
cit. (so called after removal to Castle brook,
subsequent to 1756). Ota-na-aa-ga.— Morgan.
Leainie Iroq., 424, 1851 (Tuscarora form). Seneca
Caatle.— Machin (1779) quoted by Conover,
op. cit.
Caxiajoharie(A'(t-?Kt-'rf/V-7ia-r<'', Mt, the
kettle, is fixed on the end of it ' ) . An im-
portant Mohawk village, known as Upper
Mohawk Castle, formerly sitnated on the
K. bank of Otsqiiago er., nearly opposite
Ft Plain, Montgomery co., Nl Y. The
community of this name occupied l)oth
banks of Mohawk r. for some distance
above and below the village. It was
also once known as Middle Mohawk
Castle. (.1. N. B. H.)
Oanadaiohare.— Hansen (1713) in N. Y. Doe. Col.
Hist., v, 372, ia%. Canaedaiahore.— Hansen (1700),
ibid., IV, 802, 1854. Oaadgoha.— Morgan, LeaKne
Iroq., cbart, 1851 (Seneca form). Ca-na-jo'-ha-e.—
Ibid., 416, 1851. Oanajoha'ga,— Ibid., chart (On-
ondaga form). Can-ajoHiar.— Ibid. (Tuscarora
form). Oaniyohariea.— Conference of 1754 in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., v, 36, 1836. Canajoherie.—
Albany conf. (1745) in N. Y. Doe. Col. Hist., vi. 302,
1855. Oaniyora.— Parkman, Frontenac, 93, 1883.
Canajorha.— Greenbalgh (1677) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., in, 250,1853. Canijoharie.— Han.sen (1700),
ibid., IV, 802, 1854. Cannatchocary.— Dix-.of 1758(?) ,
ibid., X, 676, 1858. Oannojoharys.— .\lbanv conf.
(1764), ibid., vi, 877, 1855 (the band). Canojo-
harrie.— Schuyler (1711). ibid;, v, 2-15. 1865.
Oaunauiohhaury.— Edwards (1751) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 1st s., X, 143, 1809. Chonoghoheere.—
Wraxall (1764) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 857,
1855. Conagohiary.— Murr^v (1782) in Vermont
Hist. Soc. Coll., II, 357, 1871. Conajohareea.—
Albany conf. (1747) in N. Y. Doc. Col. HLst., vi,
383, 1866. Oonajohary.— Colden (1727), Five Na-
tions, 164, 1747. Oonajorha.— Greenhalgh (1677) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 250, 1853. Conijoharre.—
Johnson (1775), ibid., viii, 661, 1857. Oonna-
johary.— Albany conf. (1754), ibid., vi, 868, 1855.
'Oonnejoiiea.— Goldthwait ( 1766) in Mass. Hist. Soe.
Coll., Ists., X, 121, 1809 (the band). Connojohary.—
Albany conf. (1754) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, vi,
877, 1856. Oonoiahary.— N. Y. conf. (1753), ibid.,
VI, 7»4, 1855. Oonojoliarie.— Johnson (1749), ibid.,
VI, 512, 1855. Oanigohala'-que.— Morgan, League
Iroq., cbart, 1861 (Oneida form). Oin^oha'rla.—
Ibid. (Mohawk form). Oanajohhore.— Bover
(1710) quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson *R.,
188, 1872. 6a-na-jo-hi'-e.— Morgan, op. fit., 474,
1851 (Mohawk name). Ki-n4-*djo'-*h4-re'.— Hew-
itt, infn, 1886 (Mohawk name). Kanajoharry.—
Hawley (1794) m Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ists., iv.
61, 1796. Ki-n4'-tctt-h»re' Hewitt, infn., 1886
(Tuscarora name). Middle Hohawk Oaatle.—
Morgan, League Iroq., 474, 1861 (common name).
Upper Castle — Colden (1727), Five Nations, 164,
Canandaigna {Gd-nd-dd-d^-gwd^^nj *a vil-
lage was formerly there'). An important
Seneea town near the site of the present
Canandaigua, N.Y., destroyed by Sullivan
in 1779. There was another settlement
not far distant, called New Canandaigua,
which also was probably destroyed the
same year. (j. n. k h.)
Anandaque.— Grant (1779) quoted by Conover,
Kanadaga and Geneva MS., B. A. K. Oanada-
qua.— Doc. Hist. N. Y., II, 1191, 1849. Oa-na-da'-
qua.— Doc. of 1792 in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st
ser., I, 285, 1806 (Onondaga form). Oanadauge.—
Onondaga conf. (1774) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
VIII, 526, 1857. Oanadqua.— Deed of 1789 in Am.
St. Pap., IV, 211, 1832. Canandaigua.— Livermore
(l779) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 327, 1850.
Canandaqua.— Barton, New Views, xiii, 1798. Oa-
nandarqua.— Doc. Hist. N. Y., Il, 1191. 1849. Ca-
nandauqua.— Chapin (1792) in Am. St. Pap., iv,
241,1832. Canandeugue.— Dearborn (1779) quoted
by Conover, Kanadaga and Geneva MS.. B. A. K.
Cannandaquah.— Norris (1779) quoted by Conover,
ibid. Ca'-ta-na-ra'-qua. — Morgan, League Inxi.,
map, 1851 (Tuscarora name). Oonnondaguah.—
Fellows (1779) quoted by Conover, op. cit. Oi-
ni-di-i'-gwann. — Hewitt, infn, 1886 (Seneca
name). Oa-na-da-gwa. — Morgan, op. cit. (Cayuga
name). Ga-na-da-lo'-qua. — Ibid . map, 1851
(Oneida name). Oa-na-ta-la'-qua.— Ibia. (Mo-
hawk name). Oanataqueh.— Zeisberger, MS. (1750)
quoted by Conover, op. cit. Ga'nundi'gwa.— Mor-
gan, League Iroq., 469, 1851 (Senecaname). Kana-
daque. — (Jrant (1779) quoted by Conover, op. cit.
Kanandagua.— Nukerck (1779) quoted by Conover,
ibid. Kanandaigua. — Burrows (1779) quoted by
Conover. ibid. Kanandalanfua.— Hubley (1779)
quoted by Conover, ibid. Eanandamie.— Machin
(1779) quoted by Conover, ibid. Eanentage.—
Pouchot, niaj> (1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ::.
694, 1858. Konnaudaugua.— Pickering (1791) in
Am. St. Pap., IV, 212, 1832. Konondaigua.— Treat v
of 1794 quoted by Hall, N. W. States, 71, 1H49.
Ono-dauger. — Blanchard (1779) quoted by Con-
over, op. eit. Shannondaque.— Camileld ' (1779)
quoted by ('onover,ibid.
Canarsee. Formerly one of the leafling -
tribes on I^)ng Island, N. Y., occuj)ying
most of what is now Kings co. and the
shores of Jamaica bay, with their centt^r
near Flatlands. According to Ruttenl>er •
they were subject to or connected wi h
the Mcmtauk; this, however, is doiil t-
ful, as the Indians of the w. end of the
island appear to have been paying tribute,
at the time of the Dutch settlement of
New York, to the Iroquois. Their prin-
cipal village, of the same name, was prob-
ably at Canarsee, near Flatlands, in addi-
tion to which they had others at Masj>eth
and apparently at Hempstead. They
are important chiefly from the fact4hat
the site of the city of Brooklyn was ob-
tained from them. Having asserted their
independence of the Mohawk, aftt»r the
appearance of the Dutch, they were at-
tacked by that tribe and nearly extermi-
nated. They also suffered considerably
during the war of the Long Island tribes \
with the Dutch. The last one of them (
died about 1800. (j. m. c. t.) ^
Canaresae.— Document of 1656 in N.Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., XIV, 340, 1883. Oanariae.— Stuyvesant deed
(1656) in Thompson, Lonfr Id., 383, 1839. Cana-
riaac.— Doc. of 1663 in N. Y. Doc. Col. HLst., XIV,
524,1883. Oanarae.— Wood quoted by Macaulev,
N. W, II, 263,1829. Canaraeea. —Macaulev, ibicf..
164. Oanaraie.— Nicolls (1666) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., XIV, 586, 1883. Oannarae.— Document of
1650, ibid., i, 449, 1856. Oanoriae.— Dutch treaty
(1656) in Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson River, 125,
1872. Conarie See.— Petition of 1656 in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., XIV, 339, 1883 (misprint). Oonariae.—
Map of 1666, ibid. Conaraie.— Ibid, (applied to
river) .
Canasate^o. An Onondaga chief who
played an important role in the proceed-
ings of the council af Philadelphia in
200
C AN A8TIG AONE C ANNIB A LISM
[B.i
1742. A dispute arose between tlie Dela-
ware Indians and the government of
Pennsylvania concerning a tract of land
in the forks of Delaware r. It was on
this occa.^ion, evidently in accordance
with a preconcerted arrangement between
the governor of Pennsylvania and the
Iroquois chief, that the fatter, addressing
the Delawares, made the memorable
statement : ** How came you to take upon
you t<) sell land at all? We conquered
you; we made women of you; you know
J'ou are women, and can no more sell
and than women. We charge you to
remove instantly; we don't give you
liberty to think' of it." The choice of
Wyoming and Shamokin was granted,
and the Delawares yielded. Little more is
recorded regarding this chief. He died at
Onondaga in 1 750. H is son, Hans Jacob,
resided on the Ohio in 1758. (c. t. )
Canastigaone. A former Mohawk vil-
lage on the N. side of Mohawk r., just
above Cohoes Falls, N. Y.
Oanastigaone.— Tyrun, map of Prov. N. Y., 1779.
Oanasti^one.— Doe. Hist. N. Y., ii, index, 1M9.
Oonnesti^^es. — Macaiiley, N. Y., ii, 295, 1829.
NUtigione.— Doc. Hist. N. Y.,li,235,lH49.
Canatlan [hm-dl-lm/). A former Te-
pehuane pueblo on the upper waters of
the Rio San Pedro, central Durango, Mex-
ico.— Orozco y Berra, (leog., 819, 1864.
Candelaria ( Span. : * Candlemas ' ) . One
of three Spanish Franciscan missions, the
others being San Ildefonso and San Ja-
vier, founded in 1744 on San Xavier r.,
perhaps a branch of the Rio Colorado, in
Texa«, among the Li pan Apache and
other wild tril)es. When it was proposed
to tran.^fer it to San Antonio the Indians
ran away, and in 175H the niission was
abandoned. There had been 144 bap-
tisms in the three missions during this
period. In 1761-^2 another mission called
Candelaria, together with one called San
Lorenzo, was founded among 400 Lipan,
and perhaps other Indians, on the upi^er
Nueces r., but these were abandoned
by order of the viceroy of Mexico in 1767.
See Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 1886;
Garrison, Texas, 1903. (f. w. h.)
Oandeleraa.— Villa-Sefior, Teatro Am., 411-422.
1748. Nueatra Senora de la Candelaria.— .XrricivitH
cited by BuHchmann.Spuren der Azt.Spr.,308.
Caneadea ((fa-o"*-/</a'-o?/-o''*, *it (sky)
impinges on it'). A former Seneca vil-
lage on the site of Caneadea, Allegany
CO., N. Y. Being the most distant south-
erly from the lower Genesee r. towns,
and protected by mountains, it escapee!
destruction by Sullivan in 1779, as he
turned northward from Dayoitgao. Ca-
neadea, which was a ** castle" and for
many years had a council lodge, was
the point of departure of the Seneca on
their war expeditions to the w. and s. w.
(.1. N. B. H.)
Oanaseder.— Procter (1791) in Am. St. Papers, iv,
151, 1«3l». Caneadea.— Morgan, League Iroq., 467,
1851 (so called by whites). Oaneadia.— Day.Penn.,
248, 1843. Oarrahadeep.— Procter (1791) in Am. St.
Papers, iv, 158, 1832. Oao'yadeo.— Morgan, League
Iroq., 467,1851. Kaounadeau.— Morris deed (1797)
in Am. St. Papers, iv, 627, 1832. Karaffhiyadirha.—
Johnson map {ca. 1770) cited in N. Y. Doc. CJol.
Hist., vn, 723. 1856. Karathyadin. -Johnson Hall
conf. (1765), ibid.
Canienga (*at the place of the flint*).'
A former Mohawk castle situate<l at the
distance of a bow-shot from the n. side of
Mohawk r., N. Y. The Mohawk name
for themselves is derived from this place.
In 1677 it had a double palisade with 4
ports inclosing 24 lodges, (j. n. b. h.)
Agnie.— For forms of this name, see Mohawk.
Agniec.— Jes. Rel. for 1656, 3, 1858. Agniegue.— Jes.
Rel. for 1658, 3, 1858. Aniegue.— Ibid., 11. An-
niene.— Jes. Rel. for 1652, 9, 1858. Oahaniaga.—
Greenhalgh (1677) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ni,
250, 1853. Deoaaohoge.— Hansen (1700), ibid., iv,
802, 18M. Dekanage.— Livingston (1700), ibid., 655.
Upper Hohawk Oastle.— Morgan, League Iroq.,
474, 1851 (common English name).
Canjanda. Mentioned as a former Creek
town in Cherokee co., Ala. — Sen. Doc. 67,
26th Cong., 2d sess., 1, 1841.
Cannel coal. See Jet.
Cannetquot. Described by Thompson
(Ix>ng Id., 293, 1839) as a semi-tribe or
family occupying in 1683 the e. side of
Connetquot r., about Patchogue, in Suf-
folk CO., Long Island, N. Y. In another
place he includes this territory as part of
that belonging to the Patchoag. The
name seems to be a dialectal form of Con-
necticut, (j. M.)
Cannibaliflm. In one form or another
cannibalism has been practised among
probably all peoples at some period of
their tribal life. In America there are
numerous recorded references to its occur-
rence within hist<^»ric times among the
Brazilians, Carib of northern South
America, the Aztec and other Mexican
tribes, and among manv of the Indians
N. of Mexico. The word itself, now more
commonly used than the older term
anthropophagy, is derived from Carib
through Spanish corruption. Restricting"
treatment of the subject to the tribes n.
of Mexico, many evidences of cannibal-
ism in some form are found — from the
ingestion, perhaps obligatory, of small
quantities of human tlesh, blood, brain, or
marrow, as a matter of ceremony, to the
consumption of such parts for food under
stress of hunger, or even as a matter of
taste. Among the. tribes which practised
it, in one or another of these forms, may
be mentioned the Montagnais, and some
of the tribes of Maine; the Algonkin,
Armouchiquois, Micmac, and Jroquois;
farther w. the Assiniboin, Cree, Foxes,
Miami, Ottawa, Chippewa, Illinois, Kick-
apoo, Sioux, and Winnebago; in thes. the
people who built the mounds in Florida
(see Ccdusa), and the Tonka wa, Attacapa,
Karankawa, Kiowa, Caddo, and Coman-
che(?); in the n. w. and w. parts of the
continent, the Thlmgchadinnehand other
BULL. 30]
CANOA CANONICU8
201
Athapascan tribes, the THngit, Heiltsuk,
Kwakiutl, Tsimshian, Nootka, Siksika,
some of 'the Californiah tribes, and tlie
Ute. There is also a tradition of the
practice among the Hopi, and allusionn
to the custom among other tribes of Ari-
zona and New Mexico. The Mohawk,
and the Attacapa, Tonkawa, and other
Texas tribes were known to their neigh-
bors as " man-eaters."
Taking all the evidence into considera-
tion, it appears that cannibalism N. of the
Mexic^an boundary existed in two chief
forms. One of these was accidental, from
necessity as a result of famine, and has
been witnessed among the Huron, Mic-
mac, Chippewa, Etchareottine, and others.
In most of such instances recourse was had
to the bodies of those who had recently
died, but cases are recorded in which in-
dividuals were killed to satisfy hunger.
The second and prevalent form of canni-
balism was a part of war custom and wa.^
based principally on the belief that l)rav-
ery and other desirable qualities of an
enemy would pass, through actual inges-
tion of a part of his body, into that of the
consumer. Such qualities were supposed
to have their special seat in the heart,
hence this organ was chiefly sought,
though blood, brain, marrow, and flesh
were in many instances also swallowed.
The parts were eaten either raw or cooked.
The neart belonged usually to the war-
riors, but other parts were occasionally
consumed by boys or even by women and
children. In some cases a small portion
of the heart or of some other part of an
enemy might be eaten in order to free the
eater from some tabu ((frinnell). The
idea of eating any other human being
than a brave enemy was to most Indians
repulsive. One of the means of torture
among the Indians of Canada and New
York was the forcing of a prisoner to
swallow pieces of his own flesh.
Among the Iroquois, according to one
of the Jesuit fathers, the eating of cap-
tives was considered a religious duty.
Among the Heiltsuk, and recently among
the Tsimshian and Kwakiutl, cannibalism
formed a part of one of their ceremonies.
Several instances are recorded in which
cannibalism was indulged in by individ-
uals while in a frenzied state. Finally,
it seems that among a few tribes, as the
Tonkawa, Iroquois, and others, man-
eating, though still with captives as the
victims, was practised on a larger scale,
and with the acquired taste for human
flesh as one, if not the chief, incentive;
vet the Tonkawa, as well as some men
long associated with them, declared that
the eating of human flesh by them was
only ceremonial.
Indian mythology and beliefs are re-
plete with references to man-eating giants,
monsters, and deities, which point to the
possibility that anthropophagy in some
form was a practice with which the abo-
rigines have long been acquainted.
Consult Bancroft, Native Races; Boas
(1) in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, i, 58, 1888, (2)
Rep. Nat. Mus., 1895; Gat^chet, Karanka-
wa Inds., 1891 ; Jesuit Relations, Thwaites
ed.; Kohl, Kitchigami, 355, 1860; Letour-
neau in Bull. Soc. d'Anthrop. de Paris, x,
777, 1887, and xi, 27, 72, 123, 1888; Meg-
apolensis (1644), Sketch of the Mohawk
Inds., 1857; Mooney, Our I>ast Cannibal
Tribe, 1901; Penicaut (1712) in Margry,
Decouvertes, v. 504, 1883; Schaafhausen,
Anthrop. Stud., 515, 1885; Somers in
Pop. Sci. .Mo., XLii, 203, 1892; Wyman
(1) Human Remains in the Shell Heaps
of St Johns r., (2) Fresh-water Shell
Mounds, 1875. (a. n.)
Canoa (Sj)an.; here doubtless referring
to a trough or flume in which an irriga-
tion ditch is conducted over broken
ground). A former Papago rancheria
l)etween Tubac and San Xavier del Bac,
on Rio Santa Cruz, s. Ariz. — (iarces
(1775), Diary, 63, 74, 1900.
La Canoa.— Aiiza quoted bv Bancroft, Ariz, and
N. Mex., 392, 1SM9.
Canoas, Pueblo de las (Span. : 'village of
the canoes'). A former Indian settle-
ment on the California coast, about lat.
34° 27^, in what is within theChumashan
area. Its situation is regarded as having
been at or near the present Ventura. See
Heylyn, Cosmography, 969, 1703.
Canocan. A pueblo of the province of
Atripuy in the region of the lower Rio
(Jrande, N. Mex., in 1598.— Onate (1598)
in Doc. Ined., xvi, 115, 1871.
Canoe Creek. A Shuswap village and
band near upper Fraser r., Brit. Col.,
about 300 m. from its mouth; pop. 157 in
1902.— Can. Ind. Aff., 271, 1902.
Canoe Lake Indians. The local name
for a body of Shuswap of Kamloops-
Okanagan agency, Brit. Col.; pop. 129 in
1902,includingtheChuckchuc]ualk,(i,v. —
Can. Ind. Aff. for 1879, 309.
Canoes. See liodts.
Canogacola ( 'm^ople' ). An unidentifled
ancient tribe of x. w. Florida, mentioned
by Fontaneda about 1575.
Canegacola.— Ternaux-Compans, Voy., xx. 2-1,
1841. Canogacola.— Fontaneda (cii. 1576). Mem.,
Smith trans., 20, IS-M. Canogaoole.— Fontaneda
in Doc. In6d., v, MO, inm.
Canonchet. See Nanuntenoo.
Canonicns. A chief of the Narraganset,
who died in 1647, aged perhaps 80 years.
Although in 1622 he sent to the people of
Plymouth the customary Indian challenge
to war, he earlv sought the friendship of
the English, ft was into the country of
Canonicus that Roger Williams went, and
from him he received the title to the land
he afterward held. Canonicus was at war
against the Wampanoag until in 16Ii5,
202
CANOPUS CAPE FEAR INDIANS
[b. a. b.
when the dispute was settled through the
efforts of Wilhams. H e never fully trusted
the English, nor they him. Durfee, in his
poem **What cheer?" calls Canonicus
** cautious, wise, and old," and Roger
Williams styles him a ** prudent and
peaceable prince." He is highly praised
HI John Lathrop's poem "The Speech of
Canonicus," published at Boston in 1802.
His name, which is spelled in a variety
of ways, appears to have been changed,
perhaps by contagion with the I^tin
canojiicuSj irom Qunnoune (Drake, In<l8.
of N. Am., 118, 1880). He is not to l)e
confused with Canonchet, a later Narra-
ganset sachem. (a. f. c.)
Canopus. The principal village of the
Nochpeem, taking its name from their
chief. It was situated in Canopus Hol-
low, Putnam co., N. Y. — Ruttenber,
Tribes Hudson R., 80, 1872.
Cant. A former rancheria, probably of
the Maricopa, not far below the mouth of
Salt r., 8. Ariz.; visited and so named
by Kino and Mange in 1699.
San Mateo Cant.— Mange quoted by Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 357, 1889. S. Mateo Caut.—
Mange quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 268,
1884 (misprint).
Cantannkack. A village of the Powhatan
confederacv in 1608, on York r. , (iloucester
CO., Va. (Smith (1629), Va., i, map,
repr. 1819). It apparently belonged to
the Werowacomaco, although Strachey
uses the name as that of a tribe having
more than 100 warriors about the same
time. . ( J. M. )
Oantaunkank.— strachey {ca. 1612), Va., map, 1849.
Canteens. See Pottenjy Receptacles.
Cantensapu^. A pueblo of the province
of Atripuv, in the region of the lower Rio
Grande, N. Mex., in 1598.— Onate (1598)
in Doc. Ined., xvi, 115, 1871.
Cantico. This word, spelled also cantica,
canticoy, kantico, kanticoy, kintacoy,
kintecaw, kintecoy, kintekaye, kinticka,
was in great use among the Dutch and
English colonists in the region between
New York and Virginia from the latter
part of the 17th to the 19th century, nor
18 it yet entirely extinct in American
English. In the literature of the 18th
centurv it appears frequently, with the
following meanings: (1 ) Dance, ordancing
party. (2) Social gathering of a lively
sort. (3) Jollification. The last signifi-
cation still survives, in literature at least.
In 1644 kintekaye was said to be a * death
dance,' but van der Donck (1653) wrote
of the kintecaw as 'singing and danc-
ing' of the young Later on kintekay
and kiniicoy meant a noisy and demon-
strative dance, with shouting and uproar.
Dankers in 1679 defined kintekay as
* conjuring the devil,' and Denton (1670)
called the canticoy *a dancing match, a
festival time.' l^ev. Andrew Hesselius
(Nelson, Inds. of N. J., 79, 1894), who
witnessed the first-fruits sacrifice of the
New Jersey Indians, said: **This and
other sacrifices of the Americans they
call, from a native word of their own,
kintickay i. e., a festive gathering or a
wedding." A word of the Delaware dia-
lect of Algonquian is the source of cantico
and its variants, namely, gintkaauy signi-
fying 'to dance,' cognate with the Vir-
ginian kantikantiy ' to dance and sing.'
The phrase *to cut a cantico* was for-
merly in use. An absurd etymology from
the i^tin canticare^ * to sing,' was once
f)roposed. According to Boas, New Eng-
and whalers who visit Hudson bay use
the term anticoy or anticooty to designate
the performance of the angekut of the
Eskimo, this form of the word probably
being influenced by the Eskimo name.
(a. f. c.)
Cannga {kdnu^gay 'scratcher,' a sort of
bone-toothed comb with which ball-play-
ers are ceremonially scratched). The
name of two former Cherokee towns,
one, a Lower Cherokee settlement, ap-
parently on the waters of Keowee r., S. C,
destroyed in 1761; the other a traditional
settlement on Pigeon r., probably near
the present Waynesville, Haywood co.,
N. C— Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
479, 524, 1900.
Canyon Butte. The local name for a
group of interesting prehistoric pueblo
ruins near the n. escarpment of the chief
basin of the Petrified forest, at the source
of a wash that enters Little Colorado r.
from the n. e. at Woodruff, near the
Apache-Navajo co. boundary, Arizona.
The remains seem to indicate Zufii
origin. — Hough in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1901,
:^09, 1903.
Capahnakes. Possibly a misprint in-
tended for the inhabitants of Capawac, or
Marthas Vineyard, off the s. coast of
Massachusetts. The form occurs in Bou-
dinot. Star in the West, 129, 1816.
Capahowasic. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy in 1608, about Cappahosic,
Gloucester co., Va.
Oapahowasiok.— Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr.
1819. Capahowosiok.— Simons, ibid., 163. Oapa-
howsiok.— Dral^e, Bk. Inds., bk. 4, 10, 1848.
Capasi. A former village on the n.
frontier of Florida and probably belong-
ing to the Apalachee, visited by De Soto
in 1539. — Garcilasso de la Vega," Fla., 74,
1723.
Cape Breton. One of the seven districts
of the country of the Micmac, on Cape
Breton id., n. of Nova Scotia. The chief
of this district was the head chief of the
tribe ( Rand, First Micmac Reading Book,
1875). The name occurs in a list of 1760
as the location of a Micmac**village or
band. (j. m.)
Cape Pear Indians. A small tribe, pos-
sibly Siouan, formerly living near the
mouth of Cape Fear r. , N. C. The proper
HULL. 30]
CAPE MAGDALEN CAPTIVES
203
name of the tribe is unknown, this local
term being applied to them by the early
colonists. They were first known to the
English in 1661, when a colony from New
England made a settlement near the
mouth of the river, and soon incurred the
ill will of the Indians by seizing their chil-
dren and sending them away under pre-
tense of instructing them in the ways of
civilization, resulting in the colonista be-
ing finally driven from the country. In
1663 another party from Barbadoes pur-
chased lands of Wat Coosa, head chief of
the tribe, and made a settlement, which
was abandoned a few years later. Necoes
and other villages then existed on the
lower part of the river. In 1665 another
colony settled at the mouth of Oldtown
cr. in Brunswick co., on the s. side of the
river, on land bought of the Indians, but
soon abandoned it, though the Indians
were friendly. The next mention of
them is by tne colonial governor. Col.
Johnson, m a letter of Jan. 12, 1719
(Rivers, Early Hist. So. Car., 94, 1874),
which gives a table of Indian tribes in
Carolina in 1715, when their population
is given as 206 in 5 villages. They prob-
ablv took part in the Yamasi war of that
and the following year, and suffered pro-
portionatelv in consequence. They are
last noticed, in 1751 in the record of the
Albany Conference (N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
VI, 721, 1855) as one of the small friendly
tribes with which the South Carolina
government desired the Iroquois to be at
peace. See Moonev, Siouan Tribes of the
East, Bull. B. A. E", 1894.
Oape Fean.— Rivers, Early Hist. S. C, 94, 1874.
Cape Magdalen. An Algonkm mission
established on the St Lawrence in 1670,
3 leagues below Three Rivers, Quebec,
bv Indians who removed from the latter
place on account of smallpox. It was
abandoned before 1760. — Jeffervs, Fr.
Dom. Am., pt. i, 10, 110, 1761.
Cape Sable Indians. A name applied by
early New England writers to those Mic-
mac living near C. Sable, in s. Nova
Scotia. Tne term is used by Hubbard
as early as 1680. They were especially
active m the wars on the New England
settlements. (j. m.)
Capiche. A village, probably of one of
the southern Caddoan tribes, near Red r.
of Louisiana, ** 20 leagues inland from the
Mississippi," visited by Tonti in 1690.
Oaidch^— Tonti (1690) in French, Hist. Coll. La.,
I. 72, 1846. Oapiohii.— Ooxe, Carolana, map, 1741.
Oapiga.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, iii, 79,
Capinans. A small tribe or band noted
by Iberville, in 1699, together with the Bi-
loxi and Pascagoula, in Mississippi. The
three tribes then numbered 100 families.
Judging by the association of names, the
Cai>inans may be identical with the Moc-
tobi, q. V.
Capina.— De I'lsle, map,
iUe (1699) in Margry, D^.,
1703. Oapinant.— Iber-
IV, 602, 1880. Cap-
inas. — De I'lsle, map, 1707.
Capitan Grande (Span. : 'great captain or
chier ) . A Dieguefio village in a canyon
of upper San Diego r., s. Cal. The tract,
comprising 10,253 acres, now forms a
reservation of patented land, largely
desert. Pop. about 60 in 1883, 118 in
1902. The occupants, classed as Mission
Indians, are under the Mission Tule
River agency, 130 m. away. — ^Jackson
and Kinney, Rep. Miss. Ind., 27, 1883;
Ind. Aff. Rep., 175, 1902.
Capola. A former Seminole village e.
of St Marks r., in Jefferson co., Fla. —
Bartrara, Travels, 223, 1791.
Capote(* mountain people.* — Hrdlicka).
A division of the Ute, formerly living in
the Tierra Amarilla and Rfo Chama
country, n. w. N. Mex. They are now
under the jurisdiction of the Southern
Ute school in s. w. Colo., and numbered
180 in 1904.
Capatei.— Collins in Ind. AfT. Rep., 125, 1861 (mis-
print). Capotea.— Graves, ibid., 386. 1854. Capu-
chlet.— Duro, Pefialosa, 67, 1882. Kapoti.— Ind.
Aff. Rep., 246, 1877.
Capoatoucha. Marked on De T Isle's
map of 1707 as an Indian settlement on
St Johns r., Fla.
Capeutoucha.— Pe I'lsle map (1707) in Winsor,
Hist. Am., II, 294, 1886.
Caprap. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Captain Jack. See Kintpuash,
Captives. The treatment accorded cap-
tives was governed by those limited ethical
concepts which went hand in hand with
clan, gentile, and other consanguineal
organizations of Indian society. From
the members of his own consanguineal
group, or what was considered such, cer-
tain ethical duties were exacted of an In-
dian which could not be neglected with-
out destroying the fabric of society or
outlawing the transgressor. Toward other
clans, gentes, or bands of the same tribe
his actions were also governed by well
recognized customs and usages which had
grown up during ages of intercourse, but
with remote bsmdg or tribes good rela-
tions were assure^l only by some formal
peace-making ceremony. A peace of this
kind was verv tenuous, however, espe-
ciallv where there had been a long-stand-
ing feud, and might be broken in an in-
stant. Toward a person belonging to
some tribe with which there was neither
war nor peace, the attitude was governed
largely by the interest of the moment.
In such cases the virtues of the clan or
gentile organizations as peace-making fac-
tors made themselves evident, for if the
stranger belonged to a clan or gens repre-
sented in the tribe he was among, the
members of that clan or gens usually
204
CAPTIVES
[b. a. e.
greeted him as a brother and extended
their protection over him. Another de-
fense for tlie stranger was — what with
civilized people is one of the best guaran-
ties against war — the fear of disturbing or
deflecting trade. If lie brought among
them certain nmch-desired commodities,
the first impulse might be to take these
from him bv force and seize or destroy
his person, \)ut it would quickly be seen
by wiser heads that the source of further
supplies of this kind might thereby be
imperiled, if not entirely cut off. If noth-
ing were to be had from the stranger, he
might be entirely ignored. And finally,
the existence of a higher ethical feeling
toward strangers, even when there was
apparently no self-interest to be served
in extending hospitality, is often in
evidence. There are not wanting stories
of great misfortune overtiiking one who
refused hospitality to a i>erson in distress,
and of great goo<l fortune accruing to him
who offereil succor.
At the same time the attitude assumed
toward a person thrown among Indians
too far from his own people to he pro-
tected by any ulterior hopes or fears on
the part of his captors was usually that
of master to slave. This was particu-
larly the cast; on the x. Pacific coast,
where slavery was an institution. Thus
John Jewitt, at the beginning of the 19th
century, was preserved as a slave by the
Nootka chief Maquinna, because he was
an ironworker and would be valuable
property. Most of the other whites who
fell into the hands of Indians on this
coast were treated in a similar manner.
The majority of captives, liowever, were
those taken in war. These were consid-
ered to have forfeite<l tlieir lives and to
have been actually dead as to their pre-
vious existence. It was often thought
tliat the captive's sui)ernatural helper had
been destroyed or made to submit to that
of the captor, though where not put to
death with torture to satisfy the victor's
desire for revenge and to give the cap-
tive an opportunity to show his fortitude,
he might in a way be reborn by under-
going a form of adoption.
It is learned from the numerous ac-
counts of white persons who had been
taken by Indians that the principal im-
mediate hardships they endured were due
to the rapid movements of their captors
in order to escape pursuers, and the con-
tinual threats to which they were sub-
jected. These threats were not usually
carried out, however, unless they at-
tempted escape or were unable to keep
up with the band, or unless the band
was pursued too hotly. Each person
taken was considered the property of the
one who first laid hands on him, and the
character of this individual had much to
do in determining the extent of his hard-
ships. When two or more claimed a
prisoner he was sometimes kept by all
conjointly, but sometimes they settled
the controversy by torturing him to death
on the spot. The rapid retreat of a war
party bore particularly hard upon women
and children, yet a certain amount of
consideration was often shown them.
Sometimes the male captives were al-
lowed to help them along, sometimes
they were drawn on an improvised sled^^e
or travois, and, if there were horses m
the party these might be placed at their
disposal, while one instance is recorded
in which the child of a female captive
was carried by her master for several
days. It is worthy of remark that the
honor of a white woman was almost al-
ways respected by her captors among the
tribes e. of the Mississippi; but w. of
that limit, on the plains, in the Columbia
r. region, and in the S. W., the contrary
was often the case.
Among the eastern tribes, on arriving
at the village a dance was held, at which
the captives were expected to play a con-
spicuous part. They were often placed in
the center of a circle of dancers, were
sometimes compelled to sing and dance
also, and a few were usually subjected to
revolting tortures and finally burned at
the stake. Instances of cannibalism are
recorded in connection with these dances
after the return from war, and among
some of the Texas and Louisiana tribes
this disposition of the bodies of captives
apj>ears to have been something more
than occasional. The Iroquois, some Al-
goncpiians, and several western tribes
forced prisoners to run between two
lines of |>eople armed with clubs, toma-
hawks, and other weapons, and spared,
at least temporarily, those who reached
the chief's house, a certain j)ost, or some
other goal. Among many other tribes an
escaped captive who reached the chief s
house was regarded as safe, while the
Creek peace towns also secured immunity
from pursuit to the persons who entered
them. Offering food to a visitor was usu-
ally equivalent to extending the host's
protection over him.
From the experiences of the Spaniard
Juan Ortiz, taken prisoner by the Flor-
ida chief Ucita, in 1528, as well as
those of other whites, it would appear
that captives were sometimes hela in
a sort of bondage elsewhere than on
the N. Pacific coast, but usually where
their lives were spared they were held
for ransom or adopted into the tribe. J.
O. Dorsey says of some Siouan tribes,
however, that their captives were allowed
either to go home or settle among them-
selves, but were neither tortured nor regu-
larly adopted. Although the custom
BULL. 30]
CAPTIVES
205
among the eastern Indians of holding
white prisoners for ransom dates from
early times, it is questiondble whether it
was founded on aboriginal usage. The
ransoming or sale of captives, howevtT,
was common among the Plains and S. W.
tribes, wliile the custom of ransoming
slaves on the n. Pacific coast was cer-
tainly pre-Columbian. In most of Nortli
America, however, it was probably a rare
procedure, especfally since many tribes
are said to have disowned any person who
once had been taken prisoner. Doubt-
less it became common in dealing with
white captives owing to the difficulty of
reconciling adult whites to Indian life
and customs, while captives taken from
another tribe no doubt settled down into
their new relationships and surroundings
very contentedly.
The usual object in thus adopting a
prisoner was that he might till the place
of someone who had dieii, and it is af-
firmed by one writer that, whatever his
own character, he was treated exactly as
if he possessed the character of his pre-
decessor. John Gyles, who was cap-
tured })y the Abnaki in 1689, informs us
that a prisoner was brought out to be
b(*aten and tortured during the war
dances unless his master paid over a cer-
tain amount of property. Women and
children were generally preserved and
adopted, though there are instances in
which white women were tortured to
death, and it is said of the Ute that fe-
male captives from other Indian tribes
were given over to the women to be tor-
tured, while male prisoners who had dis-
tinguished themselves were sometimes
dismissed unhurt. Among tribes pos-
sessing clans the adoption of captured
women was of si^ecial importance, as it
often resulted in the formation of a new
clan from their descendants. Such, no
doubt, was the origin of the Zuni and
Mexican clans of the Navaho. The Ute
clan of the latter was recruited by a sys-
tematic capture and purchase of Ute girls
undertaken with the object of supply-
ing the tribe with good basket makers
(Culin). Among the Plains tribes cap-
tives, especially children, were sometimes
taken for the express purpose of being
trained to the performance of certain
ceremonial duties. Besides the num-
bers of white persons carried away by
Indians and subsequently ransomed, it
is evident from all the accounts that
have reached us that many of P^nglish,
French, and Spanish descent were taken
into the tribe of their captors and, either
because carried off when very young or be-
cause they developed a taste for their new
life, never returned. Some of these even
rose to high positions, as in the case of a
Frenchman who became chief of the
Attacaj)a, of a Mexican who is recorded
as the most prominent and successful war
chief of the Comanche in 1855, and of
another Mexican still a man of influence
among the Zufii. Tlu; ])resent chief of
the Comaiu'lie, C^uanah Parker (q. v.), is
the son of a aiptive American woman.
The confederated tribes of Comanche,
Kiowa, and Kiowa Apache still hold at
least 50 adopted white captives, and it is
probable that fully one-third of the whole
population have a traceable percentage
(jf cai)tive blood. The same is probably
true in nearly equal measure of the Apache
of Arizona.
From Oregon to s. Alaska a different
treatment oi captives was brought about
by the existence of a slave cla.<s. Since
slaves wcie the most valuable property a
man could have, the lives of those taken
in war were always spared unless such
ca}>tives had conunitted some great injury
to the victorious tribe that prompte<l im-
mediate revenge. After this they might
l)e kifkMl atany moment by their nuisters;
but such a fate seldom overtook them
until they grew too old U) work, unless
their nuu^^ters ])e(ame involved in a prop-
erty c()ntest, or the i)eoi)le of the town
from which they had been taken had com-
mitted depre«lations. Among the Tlingit,
however, slaves were killed during mor-
tuary feasts, and bodies of slaves were
thrown into the h(>les dug for the jMJsts
of a new house. Slave women, especially
if they were known to be of noble descent,
sometimes married their captors and be-
came free. Four i)rominent ilaida clans
and one clan anumg the Tsimshian are
said to have originated from marriages of
thiskin<l, while another prominent iiaida
clan was called "the Slaves," though it
is impossible to say whether they were
descended from slaves or whether the
term isa})plie<l ironically. Whether male
slaves ever rose to a high position is doubt-
ful, owing to the strong caste system that
here prevailed. lnstea<l of receiving com-
mendation, a slave who had escaped suf-
fered a certain opnrobrium which could
l)e remove*! only by the expenditure of
a great amount of property. At the same
time it is related of the greatest Skide-
gate chief that he had been enslaved in
his youth.
Consult Baker, True Stories of New
England Captives, 1897; Drake, Indian
Captivities, 1851; Eastman, Seven and
Nine Years among the Camanches and
Apaches, 1874; Gentl. of Elvas. in Hak-
luyt Soc. Publ., IX, 1851; Harris, Life" of
Horatio Jones, 1903; Herrick, Indian
Narr., 1854; Hunter, Captivity among the
Indians, 1823; Johnston, Incidents attend-
ing the Capture, etc., of Charles John-
ston, 1827; Kelly, Narr. of Captivity
among the Sioux, 1880; Larimer, Cap-
206
C ARANTOU A N C A RISES
[b. a. e.
tare and £scape, or Life among the Sioux,
1870; Lee, Three Years among the Ca-
manches, 1859; Mooney in 17th Rep. B.
A. E., 1898; Relacion of Alvar ISfuilez
Cabega de Vaca, B. Smith transl., 1871;
Severance (ed.), Captivity of Benj. Gil-
bert, 1904; Spears (ed.), Dangers and
Sufferings of Robert Eastbum, 1904;
Spencer, Indian Captivity, 1834; Strat-
ton, Captivity of the the Oatman Girls,
1857; Tanner, Narr. of Captivity, 1830.
See Adoption J Cannibalism^ GenizaroSy
OrdealSj Slavery^ War and War discipline.
(j. R. 8.)
Carantonan ('it is a large tree'). One
of the chief palisaded towns of the Cones-
toga, which in 1615 was situated 3 short
days* journey from the fort of the Iro-
quois attackeaby Chamj)lain in that year.
It was probably on the site of the present
Waverly, N. Y., and the palisade attacked
was perhaps near the present Liverpool,
on the E. side of Onondaga lake. ( j. n. b. h. )
Carapoa ( possibly a contraction of. cara-
pohoiuiy from carami *raft,' po *in,' houa
* house' = * house on rafts'; or carapohueye
' to go into rafts. '^—Buelna). An ancient
settlement, apparently of the Tehueco or
the Cahita, situated near El Fuerte,
which is on the e. bank of the Rio Fuerte,
N. Sinaloa, Mexico. — Orozco y Berra,
Geog., 332, 1864.
Carascan. A former village, presum-
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal.— Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Carcajou. The Canadian French form
of the Algonquian (Montagnais kar-korjoo)
name for the wolverene ( Qulo luscus) . The
Chippewa awingwaage (Baraga), gwin-
gwaw-ah-ga (Tanner) , the Cree quiquakatch
(Mackenzie), kikkwdhdkSs (Lacombe),
queequehatch f Dobbs) , the Algonkin qtoin-
gimage{Cuoq) , and quickhaichj quiqaiKaJLch,
etc. , of various authors, are parallels. By
a freak of popular etymology this animal
received the name of * * glutton. ' ' Its Fin-
nish name is fisel-frassy * dweller among
rocks,' corrupted by the Germans into
vielfrasSf 'glutton.' The name carcajou
has been incorrectly applied to several
animals. For instance, Charlevoix, in
describing one of the enemies of the deer,
says the most cniel is " the carcajou or
quincajou, a kind of cat, with a tail so
long that it twists it several times around
his body," a description taken evidently
not from nature, but from the Algonquian
myth of the fire-dragon. Among the
Canadian French diabU des bois is also a
name of this little beast. ( j. n. b. h. )
Cardinal points. See Color symbolism^
Cross, Orientation,
Carfaray. An ancient pueblo of the
Tigua, reference to which is made in the
folk-tales of that people. Supposed to
have been situated e. of the Rio Grande
in New Mexico, beyond the saline
lakes. — Bandelier (after Lummis) in
Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 255, 1892.
Oar-far-ay. —Ibid .
Carhagonha (*in the forest.' — Hewitt).
A Huron village in Tiny tp., about 2 m.
N. w. of La Fontaine, Ontario, about 1640.
Oarhagooa.— Champlain ( 1615), (Euvres, iv,28, 1870.
Oarraffouha.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 166, 1856. Carta-
fooa.— Doc. of 1637 in Margry, D6c., I, 3, 1878.
Caribou. The common name of the
American reindeer, of which there are
two chief species, the Woodland caribou
(Rangifer caribou) and the barren-ground
caribou (R. arcticiis). The word came
into English from the French of Canada,
in which it is old, Sagard-Ih^odat using
it in 1632. Josselyn has the Quinnipiac
form maccarib and the synonym poHano.
The origin of the word is seen in the cog-
nate Micmac x^^l^^ and the Passama-
(juoddy megaVipf the name of this animal
in these eastern Algonquian dialects.
According to Gatschet (Bull. Free Mus.
Sci. and Art, Phila., ii, 191, 1900) these
words signify 'pawer* or *scratcher,' the
animal being so called from its habit of
shoveling the snow with its forelegs to
find the food covered by snow. In
Micmac xalibu* mul-xodiget means * the
caribou is scratching or shoveling.'
Formerly the word was often spelled
cariboo, which gave name to the Cariboo
district in British Columbia, famous for
its gold mines, and other places in Canada
and the United States. (a. p. c.)
Caribous. Wood, in 1769 (Hawkins,
Missions, 361, 1845), speaks of the **Mic-
macs, Marashites [Malecite], and Carri-
bous, the three tribes of New Bruns-
wick,*' as all understanding the Micmac
language. Probably the Abnaki or a
part of them, as one of their gentes is
the Magu°leboo, or Caribou.
Carichic (garichic, * where there are
houses.' — Lumholtz). A former Tara-
humare settlement e. of Rio Nonoava,
the upper fork of Rio Conchos, lat. 27°
50^, long. 107°, about 72 m. s. of Chihua-
hua, Mexico. Although often visited by
the Tarahumare, the place is now thor-
oughly Mexicanized. In the neighbor-
hood are numerous Tarahumare Durial
caves. (a. H.)
Oariohio.— Orozco y Berra, Geog.2328, 1864. Chiani-
oariohio.— Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist Mex., 4th s.,
III. 329. 1857. Jesus Cariohic— Ibid., 824.
Carises (probably Span, carrizo, *reed
grass*). One of a number of tribes for-
merly occupying the country from Buena
Vista and C^larises lakes and Kern r. to
the Sierra Nevada and Coast range, Cal.
By treaty of June 10, 1851, they reserved
a tract between Tejon pass and Kera r.,
and ceded the remainder of their lands
to the United States. Native name un-
known. Judging by locality and associa-
BULL. 30]
CARLANES CARLISLE SC^HOOL
207
tions they were probably Mariposan,
though possibly Shoshonean. See Bar-
bour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong.,
spec, sess., 256, 1853; RoyeeinlSth Rep.
B. A. E., 782, 1899.
Carlanes (so called from Carlana, their
chief). A band of Jicarilla who in 1719-
24 were on Arkansas r., n. e. of Santa Fe,
N. Mex. (Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa-
pers, V, 191, 197, note, 1890; Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 236, 1889). Orozco y
Berra (Geog., 59, 1864) classes them as a
part of the Faraon Apache.
Apaohei OarUnes.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa-
pers, V, 197, note, 1890.
Carlisle SchooL The first nonreserva-
tion school established by the Govern-
ment was that of Carlisle, Pa., which had
its inception in the efforts of Gen. R. H.
Pratt, U. S. A., when a lieutenant in
charge of Indian prisoners of war at St
Augustine, Fla., from May 11, 1875, to
Apr. 14, 1878. When the release of these
prisoners was ordered, 22 of the young
men were led to ask for further educa-
tion, agreeing to remain in the E. 3
years longer if they could attend school.
These were placed m school at Hampton,
Va., and several other places. On Sept.
6, 1879, an order was issued transferring
the Carlisle Barracks, Pa., comprising 27
acres, from the War Department to the
Department of the Interior for Indian
school purposes, pending action by Con-
gress on a bill to establish such an institu-
tion. The bill became a law July 31, 1882.
On Sept. 6, 1879, having been ordered
to report to the Secretary of the Interior,
Lieut. Pratt was directed to establish a
school at Carlisle and also to proceed to
Dakota and Indian Ter. for the purpose
of obtaining pupils. By the end of Octo-
ber he had gathered 136 Indians from the
Rosebud, Pine Ridge, and other agencies,
and, with 11 of the former Florida prison-
ers from Hampton, the school was for-
mally opened Nov. 1, 1879.
Year after year since this modest l)e-
ginnin^ the school has steadily progressed,
until Its present (1905) enrollment is
1,000 pupils. Since the foundation of the
school nearly every tribe in the United
States has had representatives on its rolls,
and at the present time pupils from the
following tribes are in attendance:
Apache, Arapaho, Arikara, Assiniboin,
Bannock, Caddo, Catawba, Cayuga, Cher-
okee, Cayuse, Cheyenne, Chinook, Chip-
pewa, Choctaw, Clallam, Comanche,
Crow, Dalles, Delaware, "Digger,**
**Gro8ventre," Iroquois, Kickapoo, Kla-
math, Mandan, Mashpee, Menominee,
Mission, Mohawk, Miami, Nez Perc^,
Okinagan, Omaha, Oneida, Onondaga,
Osage, Ottawa, Paiute, Papago, Pawnee,
Penobscot, Piegan, Peoria, Pit River,*
Pima, Potawatomi, Pueblo, Sauk and
Fox, San poll, Heneca, Shawnee, Shivwits,
Shoshoni, Siletz, Sioux, Stockbridge, St
Regis, Tonawanda, Tuscarora, Ump{iua,
Ute, Walla walla, Wichita, Winnebago,
Wyandot, Wailaki, Yokaia Porno, Yuma,
and Zuni. There are also in attendance
68 Alaskans of various triljes.
In the words of (Jen. Pratt, the aim of
the school **has been to teach English
and give a primary education and a
knowledge of some common and practical
industry and means of self-support among
civilized people. To this end regular
shops and farms were provided, where
the principal mechanical arts and farm-
ing are taught the boys, and the girls
taught cooking, sewing, laundry, and
housework." In pursuance of this policy
every inducement was offered to retain
pupils, to prevent their return t(j reserva-
tion life, and to aid them to make for
themt^elves a place among the people of
the E. In his first annual report on
the conduct of the school, Lieut. Pratt
announced that 2 boys and 1 girl had
been placed in the families of prosperous
citizens of Massachusetts, and subse-
quently that 5 girls and 16 boys had
found homes with white families in the
vicinity of Carlisle during the summer
months, thus enabling them by direct
example and association to learn the
ways of civilization. This was the com-
mencement of the ''outing system** that
has come to be a distinctive civilizing
feature not only of the Carlisle school
but of the Indian school service gener-
ally. While thus employed the pupils
attend the public schools whenever pos-
sible, and by association with white pupils
in classes alid games also acquire an ac-
quaintance with civilized ways. In addi-
tion to these advantages the outing pupil
is paid a stipulated sum for his labor,
which tends to make him self-reliant and
impresses on him the value of time and
work. Of the thousand pupils at Car-
lisle at least half are placed at *' outing**
during different periods and for varying
terms. An outing agent is employed,
who visits the pupils at intervals m their
temporary homes, observes their conduct
and progrei-s, and looks after their wel-
fare. Frequent reports are required by
the school management from both em-
ployer and pupil, thus keeping each in
close touch with the school. The extent
and success of the ** outing system ** since
its inception is shown in the following
table;
Admitted during 25 years 5, 170
Discharged during 25 years 4,210
On rolls during fiscal year 1904 1,087
Outings, fiscal year 1901: Girls, 426; boys,
498 924
Outings during 21 years: Girls, 3,214;
boys. 5.118 8,332
Students' earnings, 1904 S34,970
Students' earnings during last 15 yeara. . $352, 961
208
CARLISLE SCHOOL
[b. a. e.
Supplementing the outing system, the
school conducts a bank, with which each
student has an account that may be drawn
upon under proper supervision. By this
means practical instruction in finance is
given.
Notwithstanding the efforts of the
school to induce its graduates to remain
in the E. instead of returning to their
reservation homes, tlie plan has not been
successful and has therefore necessitated
a change in harmony with the condi-
tions. Training suited to mechanical
pursuits is given all male pupils who
give promise of l)ecomingefficient workers
at the different trades, and a plan is in
progress to train girls as professional
nurses, several graduates havmg already
adopted this occupation as a means of
livelihood.
From its organization the aim of the
school has l)een to give Indian youth a
practical productive training. Farm
work for the boys and housework for the
girls under the outing system are the
l>est types, but the school goes farther,
and its curriculum is based on the plan
of giving that pHnluctive training which
is best adapted to the abilities of the indi-
vidual pupils. At the school itself there
are two large farms, and well-equipped
shops in which regular trades are taught
by com|Hjtent instructors. All the cloth-
ing of the school is manufactured by the
boys in the tailor shop, while in its ad-
junct, the stowing room, the girls are
taught needlework. The carpenter shop
furnishes the opiX)rtunity to learn the use
of tools, which is practically demonstrated
in the erection of buildings and in making
repairs by the boys assigned to this trade.
The blacksmith and wagon-making shops
not only do the school work, but manu-
facture suix^rior wagons, etc., which are
furnished to other schools and agencies,
while the harness shop is engaged in
similar work and production. The shoe
shop, tin shop, paint shop, and engineer-
ing department attend to the needs of
the school in their respective branches.
While the productive labors of the stu-
dents are mainly for the school, yet all
surplus finds a ready market outside, in-
cluding other schools and agencies. The
work of these branches is systematized
into a department under the control of a
superintendent of industries.
The literary curriculum of Carlisle
stops at that point where the student
may enter the higher grades of the pub-
lic schools. The policy is to give a broad
common school education, leaving to the
indi\idual and his own resources any
further development of his intellectual
faculties. The literary and industrial
curricula are so correlated that when
graduated the average student is as fully
equipped as the average white boy to
take up the struggle for a livelihood.
During the 26 years of its existence the
Carlisle School has graduated a large
number of pupils, many of whom are
filling resixjnsible positions in the busi-
ness world and especially in the Indian
service, in which, during the fiscal year
1903, 101 were employed in various
capacities from teachers to laborers,
drawing a total of $46,300 in salaries.
Others who have returned to their homes
retain a fair portion of the civilization
acquired at the school.
Physical training indoor and out for
boys and girls is part of the life of the
school, and a large gymnasium furnishes
ample facilities for both sexes. In ath-
letics and sports the Indian possesses de-
cided capacity, and baseball, basketball,
and football teams are regularlv oi^gan-
ized, the last of which has held its own
in many warmly contested ^mes with
representative teams of the principal col-
leges and universities. The Carlisle foot-
ball team now has a national reputation
for its successes and for clean, skillful
playing.
The Carlisle School band is an interest-
ing feature of the school. Its members
are selected from the various tribes in
attendance, and under the leadership of
Dennison and James Wheelock, Oneida
Indians, was considered among the best.
The former was not only a leaiier but a
composer, and his compositions Were
rendered by his Indian musicians in a
manner that has delighted lar^ audiences
in the principal American cities.
The Carlisle School produced the first
pai)er printed by Indian boys. The print-
ery was early established and became a
potent factor in the industrial develop-
ment of the students. The Indian IIel})er^
a small leaflet, was first published, and
afterward a larger journal. The Red Man,
was issued. These were later consolidated
under the title Red Man and Helper, and
reflected the life and policies of the
school. The new management has con-
tinued the publication as a weekly under
the name of The Arrow. The school
printery is well equipped with presses
and materials, and under competent su-
pervision the boys produce a lar^ amount
of job and pamphlet work that is a credit
to their taste and industry.
The buildings of the plant, although
consisting of portions of the* old military
barracks, have furnished adequate ac-
commodations for the thousands of pu-
pils who have been enrolled. Besides
the superintendent, the school has 75 in-
structors, clerks, and other employees.
General Pratt remained in charge (A
the school from its organization untO his
retirement from the superintendency.
BULL. 30 j
CARMANAH — CASA GRANDP:
209
June 30, 1904, when he was succeeded
by Maj. (then Capt.) William A. Mercer,
-U. S. A. See Education. (j. h. d.)
Carmanah. A Nitinat village near Bo-
nilla pt., 8. w. coast of Vancouver id.;
pop. 46 in 1902.— Can. Ind. Aff., 264,
1902.
Carmel. A Moravian mission at the
mouth of Nushajjak r., Alaska (Bruce,
Alaska, map, 1885); pop. 189 in 1890,
381 in 1900.
Carolina tea. See Black drink.
Caromanie ( * walking turtle * ) . A n un-
identified Wmnebago gens. — McKenney
and Hall, Ind. Tribes, i, 315; ii, 289, 1854.
Carriso (Span.: *reed grass,' Phrag-
mites communis) . A small band of A pache,
probably the clan Klokadakaydn, * Car-
rizo or Arrow-reed people,' q. v. The
name is also applied to a Navaho locality
and to those Indians living about Car-
rizo mts., n. e. Ariz. (Cortez, 1799, in
Pac. R. R. Rep., iii, pt. 3, 119, 1856).
In the latter case it has no ethnic signifi-
cance.
Oariso.— BoUaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., ir,
265, 1850 (misprint). OarrizallenoB.— Hamilton,
Mexican Handbook, 48, 1883 (probably the same).
Carriio. The Coahuiltecan Indians be-
tween Camar^oand Matamoras and along
the.Gulf coast in n. e. Tamaulipas, Mexico,
including the remnants of theComecrudo,
Pinto or Pakawa, Tejqn, Cotonam, and
Casas Chiquitas tribes or bands, gathered
about Charco Escondido; so called com-
prehensively by the white Mexicans in
later years. Previous to 1886, according to
Gatfichet, who visited the region in that
year, they used the Comecrudo and Mexi-
can-Spanish languages, and he found that
of the 30 or 35 then living scarcely 10
remembered anything of their native
tongue. They repudiated the name
Carrizo, calling themselves Comecrudo.
It is probable that the Comecrudo was
the ruling tribe represented in the group.
The last chief elected by them was Mar-
celino, who died before 1856. This ex-
plains the later use of the name, but
Orozco y Berra (Geog., 294, 308, 1864)
and Mota Padilla (Hist, de la Conq.,
1742, Ixix, 1870) mention them as a
distinct tribe, the former stating that they
were common to Coahuila and Tamauli-
Ms. It appears, however, that the name
Carrizo was applied to the Comecrudo
(q. V. ) at this earlier date, and that it has
generally been used as synonymous there-
with. The Carrizos are known to the
Kiowa and the Tonka wa as the * shoe-
less people,* because they wore sandals
instead of moccasins. Some Carrizo cap-
tives still live among the Kiowa.
Gomeorudok.— Ubde, Die Lander, 120, 185, 1861.
Dohe'nko.— Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 400,
1898 ('shoeless people': Kiowa name). Kaeso.—
Gatschet, Tonkawa MS., B. A. E., 18H4 (Tonkawa
name). Ki'nhe'nko.— Mooney, op. cil. (another
Kiowa name, same meaning). Napuat.— Pimen-
BuU. 30—05 14
tel, Ciiadro Descr., ii, 347, 1865 (given as a Co-
manche division, but really the Comanche name
for the Carrizo: 'shoeless people.'— j. m.). ftue-
tahtore.— Ibid. Yi'ata'tehenko.— Mooney, op. cit.
(another Kiowa name, same meaning) .
Caruana. A tribe of 96 individuals,
mentioned as on Ft Tejon res., s. central
Cal., in 1862. They were probably Sho-
shonean or ^lariposan. — Wentworth in
Ind. Aff. Rep., 324, 1862.
Sierra.— Wentworth, ibid.
Carving. See .1 r/, Sculplu re, Wood-work.
Casa Blanca (Span.: * white house').
Formerly a summer village of the I.a^ma
tribe, but now permanently inhabited;
situated 4 J m. w. of Laguna pueblo, Val-
encia CO., N. Mex.
Casa Blanco.— Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds.,
123, 1898 (misprint). Pur-tyi-tyi-ya.— Hodge, field
notes, B. A. K., 1«95 (proper name: *edge of the
hill on the west'). Pu-sit-yit-cho.— Hodge (fide
Pradt) in Am. Anthrop., iv, 346, 1891.
Casa Blanca ( so called on account of a
pueblo ruin in the vicinity; see Coi^a
Montezuma) . A Pima village consisting of
about 50 scattered houses on (Jila r., s.
Ariz. It contained 535 inhabitants in
1858 and 315 in 1869.
Casa Blanca.— Bailev in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208, 18.tS.
Va'-aki.— Russell, Pima MS.. B. A. E.. 18, 190'2
( Pima name: ' ancient house ' ). Va Vak.— Stout
in Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1871, 59, 1872 (probably the
same).
Casa Blanca. A ruined cliff pueblo in
Canyon do Chelly, in the present Navaho
country, x. e. Ariz. — ^\ heeler Survev
Rep., VII, 373, 1879.
Casa Chiquita (Span.: 'small house').
A small ruined pueblo 1 J m. w. of Pueblo
Bonito, on the x. side of the arroyo,
against the mesa wall, in Chaco canyon,
N. w. N. Mex. It is in the form of a solid
parallelogram, 78 by 63 ft. A consider-
able part of the building was occupied
by 2 large circular kivas. The rooms on
the ground floor were mostly about 5 by 8
ft. in dimension. The pueblo was origi-
nally 4 stories high, but is now in a very
ruinous conditicm, although such walls
as remain standing display excellent
workmanship, a well-preserved corner
l)eing found true to the square and plum-
met, (e. l. h.)
Casa del Eco (Span.: 'house of the
echo ' ). A large cliff village in San Juan
canyon, s. Utah, 12 m. below the mouth
of Montezuma can von. Described by
Gannett in Pop. Sci.'Mo., 671, Mar., 1880;
Hardacre in Scribner's Mag., 274, Dec,
1878; Jackson in 10th Rep. Hayden Sur-
vey, 420, 1879.
Casa Grande (Span.: * great house*).
The principal structure of an extensive
prehistoric ruined pueblo i m. s. of Gila r.,
9 m. 8. w. from Florence, Pinal co., Ariz.
It was first mentioned by the Jesuit
Father Eusebio Kino, or Kuehne, who
said mass within its walls in Nov., 1694,
and who again visited it in 1697 and 1699.
In Kino's time the great house was of 4
stories but roofless, and its condition
210
CASA GRANDE
[b. a. e.
was much the same about 1 762, when seen
by the author of the anonymous Rudo
Ensayo. Its construction is of the pise
type, i. e., the walls, 3 to 5 ft. thick, con-
sist of huge blocks of adobe mortar and
eravel molded in place and allowed to
dry hard, then smoothed on the inner
surface. The present height of the outer
walls is 20 to 25 ft., accommodating 2
stories, while the central part or tower,
forming an additional story, is 28 to 30
ft. above the ground. The house meas-
ures 43 by 59ft.,
with 5 rooms in
its ground plan.
Casa Grande
was also visited
Oct. 31, 1775, by
Father Pedro
Font, who wrote
an excellent de-
scription of its
appearance and
mentions the
outlying struc-
tures, then fairl y
preserved. Font
remarksthatthe
Casa Grande it-
self measured 50
by 70 ft., and in-
fers that its beams (4 or 5 in. thick), ap-
parently of pine, must have been carried
20 m., while the water supply for the set-
tlement was conveyed from the river by
means of a canal. At this date the buila-
ing was of 3 stories, though the neighbor-
ing Pima informed Font that there had
l)een 4. The celebrated ruins were visited
77 years later (July 12, 1852) by J. R.
Bartlett, whose description indicates little
change in the main structure since the time
of Font, although all but 2 of
the outlying buildings had
been reduced to mounds. By
act of Congress of Mar. 2,
1889, $2,000 waa appropri-
ated for the repair of the
building, and the work was
performed under the dii-ec-
tion of the Secretary of the ground plan of
Interior. By Executive or- ca»a gramoe
der of June 22, 1892, under ^;;;;^) ^**"*''^-
the provisions of the same
act, a tract of about } sq. m., surround-
ing- the ruin, was reserved from sale or
settlement, and a custodian appointed.
The origin of this and of other prehis-
toric pueblo groups in s. Arizona and
N. Chihuahua is unknown. It has long
been reputed to have been one of the
places of sojourn of the Nahua or Aztec
m their migration from the n. to the val-
ley of Mexico (whence the name *Casa
de Montezuma'), and it has been mis-
takenly regarded by some writers as the
Chichilticalli, or *Ked House,' of the
CASA GRANDE RUIN, ARIZONA. (miNDELEFf)
chroniclers of Coronado's expedition in
1540-42. The Pima, who have occupied
the region from time immemorial, pre-
serve a leeend that it was constructed by
one of their chiefs or deities named
Civano, hence the name Civanoki,
'house of Civano,' which they apply to
it. This has led to the general oelief
that these structures are the work of the
ancestors of the Pima tribe, notwithstand-
ing their historical habitations are of an
entirely different character, being circu-
lar huts of grass
or reeds, while
their pottery is
far inferior in
quality and dec-
oration to that
found in the
Casa Grande re-
gion. It would
seem more prob-
able that these
remains are due
to some of the
clans of the pres-
ent Hopi or Zufii
f)ueblos, one at
east of the for-
mer tribe trac-
ing its origin to
the "land of the giant cactus"— a plant
characteristic of the Gila valley. Before
its woodwork was taken away by relic
hunters, Casa Grande showed evidences
of having been burned.
Consult Apostolicos Afanes, 252etseq.,
1754; Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Rep., v,
66, 1890, and Arch. Inst. Papers, iv,
439, 1892; Bartlett, Pers. Narr., ii,
272-280, 1854; Cones, Garc^s Diary, i,
89-101, 1900; Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., i,
274-291, ia56; Emory, Recon., 83, 1848;
Fewkes in Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch., ii,
177-193, 1892; Mindeleff in 13th Rep. B.
A. E., 289, 1896, and 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
321, 1897; Rudo Ensayo (1762) , 1863, also
Guiteras transl., 124, 1894; Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, in, 301, 1853; Temaux-Com-
pans, Voy., ix, 383, 1838. (r. w. h.)
Oara de Hontesunuu— Johnston in Emory, Recon-
noissance, 596, 1848 (misprint). Oua Oraada.—
Browne, Apache Country, 116. 1869. Casa
Orande.— Bernal (1697) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz,
and N. Mex., 356, 1889. Gaaagrande.— Jeflferys,
Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. OatM Orandas.— Hard-
acre in Scribner's Monthly, 270, Dec., 1878.
Oasaa Chrandes.— Mange (1697) quoted by Ck)ue8,
Garcia Diary, i, 92, 19(X). Case graadi.— Claviflrero,
Storia della Cal., map, 1789. Ohivano-ki.— Ban-
delier in Mag. West. Hist., 667, Sept., 1886
( 'house of Civano' : Pima name). Oivano Ki.—
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 255, 1890
(Pima name). Ci-vano-Qi.— Bandelier in Revue
d'Elhnog., 129, 1886. Ci-v»-ii»-qi.— Bandelier
in Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 80, 1884 (='Civftn6'8
house'). Ghrande Kitilon Dite de Hoeteoosoma. —
Temaux-Compans, Voy., ix, 383, 1838. Great
HooMt. —Bartlett, Pers. Narr. , n, 272, 1854. Hall of
Hontesuma.— Hughes, Doniphan's Exped., 219,
1848. Hull Tan Honteiuma.— ten Kate, Reizen
in N. A., 162, 1885 (Dutch form: ' House of MQnt^
LULL. 30]
CASA GRANDE CASHWAH
211
zuma'). Haison Hooteemonut.— Temaux-Com-
pans, Voy., ix, 383, 1838 (French form). Haison
Moteosnma.— Font (1775), ibid., 383 (French
torm). Hootesuma.— Rudo Ensayo (1762), B.
Smith's transl., 18, 1863. Kiuion Hontesuma.—
Fewkes in Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch.. 180 (lo-
cally so called). Siwannoki.— ten Kate quoted
in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 132, 1890 (from Siwanki,
'house of Si wan no'). V&t-qi.— Bandelierin Arch.
Inst. Rep^ V, 80, 1884 (=*ruin.' another Pima
name), wak.— ten Rate, Reizen in N. A., 160,
1885 (also Wakh and Wahki = ' ruin ' : Pima
name).
Casa Oraxide. A ruined pueblo, meas-
uring 68 by 220 ft., situated a little below
the junction of the Verde and Salt rs.,
Mancopaco., s. Ariz. — Bell, New Tracks,
I, 199, 1869.
Casalic. A Chumashan village given
in Cabrillo's narrative as near Pueblo de
las Canoas (San Buenaventura), Cal., in
1542. It was placed by Taylor at Refugio,
near Santa Barbara, and was also so lo-
cated by the San Buenaventura Indians
in 1884. Cf. CasceL
Casalic— Cabrillo, Narr., in Smith, Col. Doc., 181,
1857. Oasaliu.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 17,
1868. Oascile.— Ibid., Apr. 24, 1863. Kasil.—
Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1884.
Casa Monteinma (Span.: 'Montezuma
house,* also called Casa Blanca, 'white
house*). A prehistoric ruin near the
Pima villages on the Gila, s. Ariz. Not
to l)e confounded with Casa (irande nor
with any other ruin, although the same
name has been indiscriminately applied
to various cliff-dwellings, ancient pueblos,
etc., in 8. w. United States and n. w.
Mexico, because of their supposed an-
cient occupancy by the Aztec. ( f. w. h. )
A-vuo-hoo-mar-liin.— Pac. R. R. Rep., ni, pt. 3,
100, 1856 (Maricopa name). Casa Blaaoa.— Bell in
Jour. Ethnol. 8oc. Lond., n. 8., i, 250, 1869. Casa
Hontesuma.— Ibid. Eo-ho-qdm.— Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 80, 1884 (Pima name). Euch-
oo-la-ohook-vaoh^.— Pac. R. R. Rep., op. cit., 94
(Pima name). Vi-pi-sit.— Bandeller, op. cit.
( 'great grandparents' : another Pima name).
Casa Morena (Span.: * brown house').
An ancient pueblo ruin of considerable
importance, situated near the top of the
continental divide in n. w. New Mexico.
It is usually assigned to the Chaco canyon
group, but this is assumed without e\:i-
dence except as to outward appearance.
No excavations have been made and the
ruin has not been described. It is built
of sandstone after the manner of the
Chaco canyon pueblos. It is in the midst
of the desert, far from water, and not
near any of the main trails, (e. l. h.)
Kiwahsin.— Hewett, infn, 1905 (Nayaho name).
Casa Binconada (Span. : * corner house * ) .
A small pueblo ruin 500 yds. s. k. of Pueblo
Bonito, 8. of the arroyo, at the foot of the
wall of Chaco canyon, n. w. N. Mex. The
building did not contain more than 50
rooms. Its most interesting feature is an
enormous double- wallM kiva, the largest
in the Chaco canyon group, measuring 72
ft. in diameter, the rooms oi the pueblo be-
ing built partially around it. The 2 walls
were about 30 in. thick, and portions still
stand from 10 to 12 ft. above the sur-
rounding debris. Probably three-fourths
of the kiva wall are still standing, being of
tine, well-selected sandstone, smoothly
laid. Thirty-two niches, 16 bv 22 in., 14
in. deep, smoothly finished and. plastered,
extend around the interior of the kiva wall
at regular intervals. The outer wall of the
kiva is 8 ft. from the inner, the space be-
tween being divided into rooms. The in-
dications are that the bui Iding was de vote<l
to ceremonial rather than to domiciliary
use. (e. l. II.)
Casas Chiqnitas (Span.: 'small houses' ).
A tribe supposed to nave been once affili-
ated with the Carrizo, a Coahuiltecan
tribe, but which in 1887 was said to be
extinct. (a.s. «.)
Casas Grandes. A name applied to the
ruins of the Franciscan mission of Con-
cepcion, founded in 1780 by Fray Fran-
cisco Gara^^s, near Yuma, Ariz.— -Hard v.
Travels in Mex., 355, 1829.
Casca (prob. Span. cascOy 'potsherd').
A Papago village, probably in Pima co.,
s. Ariz., with 80 families in 1865. — David-
s(m in Ind. Aff. Rep., 135, 1865.
Cascarba (trans, 'white man'). An un-
identified Dakota tril)e that lived :^5
leagues up St. Peters r. in 1804. — Grig.
Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 133, 1904.
Cascel. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Inez mission, .Saiita_Bax^l^
CO., Cal. Cf. Ccisdlk:
Cascel.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1»«1.
Caacellis.— Gatschet in Chief Eng. Rep., pt. ni,
5.'>3. 1876. Ca»cen.— Tavlor in Cal. Farmer. Slay I,
1860. Ca»cil.— Ibid. iuwl. -Ibid., Oct. 18,1861.
Cases. See Iioxf,% Receptacles.
Cashaw. A name of the crook-neck
squash, a species of pumpkin. Bartlett
(Diet. Americiinisms, 104, 1877) has
*^ca8hau\ sometimes spelt kershow (Al-
gonkin), a pumpkin." The word occurs
in Hariot (1590) »» fcushnv; in Beverley
(1705) as cashav'j cia<hau'y etc. The latter
uses it as synonymous with macock. The
untruncated form, ecushaw, represents
esciishavj from a Virginian dialect of
Algonquian corresponding to the Cree
asknsiwand the Delaware askasquen, which
signify ' it is raw or green. ' According to
Dr William Jones kasha is an old Cliip-
pewa term for 'hard shell.' (a. f. c. )
Cashiehtnnk. A village, probably l)e-
longing to the Munsee, situated in* 1738
on Delaware r., near the junction of
the N. New Jersey state line. — Colden
(1738) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, vi, 124,
1855.
Cashong. A small Seneca village situ-
ated in 1779 about 7 m. s. of the present
site of Geneva, N. Y. — Clark in Sullivan
(1779), Ind. Exped., 130, note, 1887.
Cashwah. A former Chumashan village
at La Sinaguita (Cieneguita), about 3 m.
212
C ASITO A CATAHOULA
[B. A. E.
N. E. of Santa Barbara mission, Cal. It
was still inhabited in 1876, according to
Grinnell (infn, 1905).
OMhwah.— Father Timeno (1856) quoted by Tay-
lor in Cal. Farmer, May 4, 1860. Gienenita.—
Gatscbet in Cbief Eng. Rep., 560, 1876. Kktoa.—
Ibid.
Casitoa. A Calusa village on the s. w.
coast of Florida, about 1570. — Fontaneda
Memoir (ca. 1575), Smith trans., 19, 1854.
Casnahaomo. A former Chumashan vil-
lage at Santa Clara rancho, Ventura co.,
Cal.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 4, 1860.
. Casqni. An unidentified province and
town, probably on lower Bt Francis r.,
E. Ark., visited by De Soto's army im-
mediately after crossing the Mississippi in
1541. It is possibly cognate with Aka°ze,
a name for the Quapaw.
Ouoia.— La Salle (1680), from De Soto Narr., in
Margrry, D6c., ii, 96, 1877. Oasoin.— Hennepin,
New Diseov., 311, 1698. Casque. ^Scboolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, lii, 48, 1853. Oasqui.— Gentl. of £lva8
(1657) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 169, 1850. Oaa-
quia.— Margry, D6c., i, 470, 1875. Oasquin.— Gar-
cilasso de la Vega, Fla., 179, 1723. Icasque.— Bied-
ma in Smitb, Col. Doc. Fla., i, 59, 1857. Ycas-
qui.— Biedma in Hakluyt Soc. Publ., ix, 190, 1851.
CaBsapecock. Mentioned by Strachey
( Va., 62, 1849) as a Powhatan tribe living
on York or Pamunkey r., about 1612, and
having 1(X) warriors. Not mentioned by
Smith under this name, but probably one
of the tribes alluded to by him under
another designation. (j. m.)
Casse-tete. See Clubs.
Cassio berry. The fruit of Viburnum
obomtuMy a plant of the honeysuckle fam-
ily. The first part of this name is said to
be of Indian origin. ( a. p. c. )
CaBsotis. A *' nation "living with the
Kakinonba in 1701 on an island in Ten-
nessee r. (Sauvole, 1701, in French, Hist.
Coll. La., Ill, 238, 1851 ). Possibly a part
of the Koasati.
Castahana. A hunting tribe of 5,000
souls in 5(X) lodges, mentioned by Clark
as a Snake band, and by I^wis and Clark
also as speaking the Minitari (Atsina)
language. They lived on Yellowstone
and Loup rs., and roamed also on the
1 Bighorn. Called also Gens des Vache, a
name given to the Arapaho, with whom
they are seeminely identical.
Oastabanas.— M'Vickar, Hist. Exped. Lewis and
Clark, I, map, 1842. Castahamas.— Warden, Ace.
U. S. A., Ill, 562, 1819. Cas-U-ha'-na.— Lewis and
Clark. Diseov., 23, 40. 1806. OasUpanas.— Ibid., 36.
Pastannownas.— Sanford, U. S.,clxvi, 1819. Pasta-
now-na,— Bracken ridge. Views of La., 86, 1814.
Castake. One of several tribes formerly
occupying "the country from Buena Vista
and Carises [Kern] lakes and Kern r. to
the Sierra Nevada and Coast range,'* Cal.
By treaty of June 10, 1851, these tribes
reserved a tract between Tejon pass and
Kern r. and ceded the remainder of their
lands to the United States. In 1862 they
were reported to number 162 on Ft Tejon
res. Probably Shoshonean, though pos-
sibly Mariposan or Chumashan. Castac
lake, in the Tejon pass r^ion, derives its
name from this tribe and affords a further
clue to its former habitat.
Oartaka.— Wentworth in Ind. Aff. Rep., 325, 1862.
Oat-take.— Barbour (1852) in Sen. Kx. Doc. 4, 32d
Cong., spec, sess., 256, 1853. Oatagoa.— Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, June 26, 1862 (mentioned as in E. Ne-
vada; same?). Ourtakas.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
May 8, 1863. Surrilloa.— Wentworth in Ind. Aff.
Rep., 325, 1862.
Casti. A former Timuquanan settle-
ment on the w. bank of St Johns r., Fla.,
not far from the mouth. — Laudonniere
(1564) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 306,
1869.
Castildavid. An unidentified pueblo on
the Rio Grande in New Mexico in 1582;
situated s. of Sia (?), but definite locality
unknown. — Bustamente and Gallegos
(1582) in Doc. In^d., xv, 85, 1871.
Casunalmo. A former Chumashan vil-
lage at Rafael Gonzales rancho, Ventura
CO., Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 4,
1860.
Catahecassa (Black Hoof, probably from
ma ka'tdwikashd — W. J.). A principal
chief of the Shawnee, born about 1740.
He was one of the greatest captains of this
warlike tribe throughout the period when
they were dreaded as inveterate and mer-
ciless foes of the whites. He was present
at Braddock*s great defeat in 1755, and
in the desperate battle with the Virginian
militia under Gen. Andrew Lewis at Point
Pleasant in 1 774 he bore a prominent part.
He was an active leader of the Shawnee
in their resistance to the advance of the
white settlements w. of the Allegheny
mt'8., and fought the troops of Harmar
and St Clair. When the victory of Gen.
Anthony Wayne broke the power of the
Indian confederation and peace was
signed on Aug. 3, 1795, Catahecassa*s
fighting days came to an end, but not his
career as an orator and counselor. When
finally convinced of the hopelessness of
struggling against the encroachment of
the whit^, he used his great influence to
preserve peace. He was a persuasive and
convincing speaker and was thoroughly
versed in the traditions of the tribe as
well as in the history of their relations
with the whites, in which he had himself
borne a conspicuous part. As head chief
of the Shawnee he kept the majority of
the tribe in restraint wnen British agents
endeavored to stir them into rebellion
against the American government and
succeeded in seducing Tecumseh and
some of the younger warriors. He died
at Wapakoneta, Ohio, in 1831.
Catahoala (*lake village,* from Choc-
taw ak^hdtax * lake,* ougoula, French form
oidkla 'village'). A tribe of unknown
aflinity formerly living on Catahoula cr.
in Catahoula parish. La.; mentioned in
1805 by Sibley (Hist. Sketches, 121, 1806)
as extinct. Whether this tribe was a rem-
nant of the Taensa village of Couthaou-
goula is uncertain. (a. s. g. )
BULL. 30]
CATALPA 0 ATA WB A
213
Oataoolou.— Raflnesque, introd. Marshall, Ky., i.
43, 1824.
Catalpa. Any tree of the genus Catalpa
belonging to the •family Bignoniacese.
The two species native in the United
States are the common catalpa, bean-
tree, Indian bean, or candle-tree (Ca-
talpa catalpa); and the western catalpa,
larger Indian bean, or Shawnee wood
(C. speciosa). Both species are exten-
sively planted as ornamental and shade
trees. The second species is alho calle<l
catawba tree, which name was applied
earlier to the first. Britton and Brown
(Flora of North. IT. S., 201, 1896) say that
catalpa is the American Indian name of
the first spe(!ies. In Chambers' Ency-
clopeilia (ii, 826, 1888) it is stated that
** the genus was named by C'atesby, prob-
ably from the Catawba r., where* he first
found them in 1726." It is generally
thought to be identical with the tribal and
river name Catawba, but W. R. Gerard
(Gard. and For., ix, 262, 1896) says that
catalpa is derived from kutuldpay signi-
fying * winged head,/ in reference to its
flowers, in the Creek lan^age. ( a. f. c.)
Catalte. The first provmce reached by
Moscoso after the death of De Soto in
1542. It lay w. of the Mississippi, prob-
ably in E. Arkansas, s. of Arkansas r. —
Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., II, 193,1850.
Catamaya. A town w. of the Mississippi
r., visited by the De Soto expedition in
1542 and mentioned as two days' journey
from Anoixi, perhaps ins. w. Arkansas. —
Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., II, 182, 1850.
Catatog^a (corruption of Gati/gitse^yl,
* new settlement place * ) . A former Cher-
okee settlement on Cartoogaja cr., to
which it gave its name, a tributary of
Little Tennessee r., above Franklin, in
Macon co., N. C. — Mooney in 19th Rep.
B. A. E., 519, 1900.
Oartoog^a.— Mooney, ibid. Gatu'giUe'.— Ibid,
(abbreviation of Indian term).
Cataamnt. A village formerly in Fal-
mouth township, Barnstable co., Mass.,
probably near Canaumut neck. In 1674
there were some Praying Indians in it,
and there were still a few mixed bloods
there in 1792. It was in the territory of
the Nauset. (j. m. )
Oataumat— Freeman (1792) in Mass. Hist. Soo.
Ck>ll., Ist 8., I, 230, 1806. Oodtanmat— Boarne
(1674), ibid., 197.
Catawatabeta. See Broken Tooth.
Catawaweshink. A former village,
probably of the Delawares, on or near
Susquehanna r., near Big Island, Pa. —
Post ( 1768) in Kauffman, West. Pa., app.,
96, 1851.
Catawba (probably from Choctaw ka-
tdptty 'divided,' 'separated,' 'a divi-
sion.*— Gatschet). The most impKjrtant
of the eastern Siouan tribes. It is said
that Lynche cr., S. C, e. of the Catawba
territory, was anciently known as Kada-
pau; and from the fact that Lawson ap-
plies this name to a small band met by
him 8. E. of the main body, which he
calls Esaw, it is possible that it was
originally given to this people by some
tribe living in e. South Carolina, from
whom the first colonists obtained it.
The Cherokee, having no b in their lan-
guage, changed the name to Atakwa,
j)hiral Anitakwa. The Shawnee and
other tribes of the Ohio valley made the
word Cuttawa. From the earliest period
the Catawba have also been known as
D. A. HARRIS, A CATAWBA
E^aw, or Issa (Catawba wwd^y * river'),
from their residence on the princii)al
stream of the region, Iswa biding their
only name for tne Catawba and Wa-
teree rs. They were fre<|uently included
by the Iroquois under the general term
Totiri, or Toderichroone, another form of
which is Tutelo, ajmlied to all the south-
ern Siouan tribes collectively. They were
classed by Gallatin (1836) as a distinct
stock, anS were so regarded until Gat-
schet visited them in 1881 and obtained
a large vocabulary showing numerous
Siouan correspondences. Further inves-
tigations by Hale, Gatschet, Mooney,
and Dorsev proved that several other
tribes of tne same region were also of
Siouan stock, while the linguistic forms
and traditional evidence all point to this
E. region as the original home of the
Siouan tribes. The jiUeged tradition
which brings the Catawba from the N.,
as refugees from the French and their
214
CATAWBA
[b. a. e.
Indian allies about the year 1660, doe«
not agree in any of its main points with
the known facte of history, and, if genu-
ine at all, refers rather to some local in-
cident than to a tribal movement. It is
well known that the Catawba were in a
chronic state of warfare with the northern
tribes, whose raiding parties they some-
times followed, even across the Ohio.
The first notice of the Catawba seems
to be that of Vandera in 1579, who calls
BENJAMIN P. HARRIS, A CATAWBA
them lasa in his narrative of Pardo's
exi^edition. Nearly a century later, in
1670, they are mentioned as Ushery by
Ijcderer, who claims to have visited them,
but this is doubtful.
Lawson, who passed through their ter-
ritory in 1701, speaks of them as a "pow-
erful nation" and states that their vil-
lages were very thick. He caHs the two
divisions, which were living a short dis-
tance apart, by different names, one the
Kadapau and* the other the Esaw, un-
aware of the fact that the. two were syno-
nyms. From all accounte they were for-
merly the most populous and most im-
portant tribe in the Carolinas, excepting
the Cherokee. Virginia traders were
already among them at the time of
Lawson' s visit. Adair, 75 years later,
says that one of the ancient cleared fields
of the tribe extended 7 m. , besides which
thev had several smaller village sites. In
1728 they still had 6 villages, all on Ca-
tawba r., within a stretch of 20 m., the
most N. being named Nauvasa. Their
principal village was formerly on the w. *
side of the river, in what is now York
CO., S. C, opposite the mouth of Sugar
cr. The known history of the tribe till
about 1760 is chiefly a record of petty
warfare between themselves and the Iro-
quois and other northern tribes, through-
out which the colonial government tned
to induce the Indians to stop killing one
another and go to killing the French.
With the single exception of their alli-
ance with the hostile Yamasi, in 1715,
they were uniformly friendly toward the •
English, and afterward kept peace with
the United States, but were constantly at
war with the Iroquois, Shawnee, Dela-
wares, and other tribes of the Ohio valley,
as well as with the Cherokee. The Iro-
quois and the Lake tribes made long
journeys into South Carolina, and the
Catawba retaliated by sending small scalp-
ing parties into Ohio and Pennsylvania.
Their losses from ceaseless attacks of their
enemies reduced their numbers steadily,
while disease and debauchery introduced
by the whites, especially several epi-
demics of smallpox, accelerated their ae-
struction, so that before the close of the
18th century the great nation was reduced
to a pitiful remnant. They sent a large
force to help the colonists m the Tusca-
rora war of 1711-13, and also aided in
expeditions against the French and their
Indian allies at Ft Du Quesne and else-
where during the French and Indian
war. Later it was proposed to use them
and the Cherokee against the Lake tribes
under Pontiac in 1763. They assisted
the Americans also during the Revolution
in the defense of South Carolina against
the British, as well as in Williamson's
expedition against the Cherokee. In
1738 smallpox raged in South Carolina
and worked great destruction, not only
among the whites, but also among the
Catawba and smaller tribes. In 1759 it
appeared again, and this time destroyed
nearly half the tribe. At a conference at
Albany, attended by delegates from the
Six Nations and the Catawba, under the
auspices of the colonial governments, a
treaty of peace was made between these
two tribes. This peace was probably final
as regards the Iroquois, but the western
BULL. 30]
CATAWBA
215
tribes continued their warfare against the
Catawba, who were now so reduced that
they could make little effectual resist-
ance. In 1762 a small party of Shawnee
killed the noted chief of the tribe, King
Haiglar, near his own village. From thin
time the Catawba ceased to be of impor-
tance except in conjunction with the
whites. In 1763 they had confirmed to
them a reservation, assigned a few years
before, of 15 m. square, on both sides of
Catawba r., within the present York and
lAncaster cos., S. C. On the approach
of the British troops in 1780 the Catawba
withdrew temporarily into Virginia, but
returned after the battle of Guilford
Court House, and established themselves
in 2 villages on the reservation, known
respectively as Newton, the principal vil-
lage, and Turkey Head, on opposite sides
of Catawba r. In 1826 nearly the whole
of their reservation was leased to whites
for a few thousand dollars, on which the
few survivors chiefly depended. About
1841 they sold to the state all but a single
square mile, on which they now reside.
Aoout the same time a number of the Ca-
tawba, dissatisfied with their condition
among the whites, removed to the eastern
Cherokee in w. North Carolina, but find-
ing their position among their old ene-
mies equally unpleasant, all but one
or two soon went back again. An old
woman, the last survivor of this emigra-
tion, died among the Cherokee in 1889.
A few other Cherokee are now in-
termarried with that tribe. At a later
period some Catawba removed to the
Choctaw Nation in Indian Ter. and
settled near Scully yille, but are said
to be now extinct. About 1884 several
became converts of Mormon missionaries
in South Carolina and went with them to
Salt Lake City, Utah.
The CatawDa were sedentary agricul-
turists, and seem to have differed but
little in general customs f ^;om their neigh-
bors. Their men were respected, brave,
and honest, but lacking in energy. They
I were good hunters, while their women
were noted makers of pottery and baskets,
I arts which they still preserve. They
seem to have practised the custom of
head-flattening to a limited extent, as did
several of the neighboring tribes. By
reason of their dominant position they
gradually absorbed the broken tribes of
South Carolina, to the number, according
to Adair, of perhaps 20.
In the early settlement of South Caro-
lina, about 1682, they were estimated at
1 ,500 warriors, or about 4, 600 souls ; in 1 728
at 400 warriors, or about 1 ,400 persons. In
1738 they suffered from smallpox; and in
1743, after incorporating several small
tribes, numbered less than 400 warriors.
In 1759 they again suffered from small-
pox, and in 1761 had some 300 warriors,
or about 1,000 people. The number was re-
duced in 1775 to 400 souls; in 1780 it was
490; and in 1784 only 250 were reported.
The number given in 1822 ia 450, and
Mills gives the population in 1826 as
only 110. In 1881 (Jatschet found 85 on
the reservation, which, including 35 em-
ployed on neighboring farms, made a
total of 120. The present number is given
as 60, but as this apparently refers only
to those attached to the reser\'ation, the
total may be about 100.
See Lawson, History of Carolina, 1714
and 1860; Gatschet, Creek Migration Le-
gend, i-ii, 1884-88; Mooney (1) Siouan
Tribes of the East, Bull. 22, B. A. R,
1894, (2) in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 1900; H.
Lewis Scaife, History and Condition of
the Catawba Indians, 1896. (.i. m.)
Ani'U'grui.— Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 609,
1900 (Cherokee name, pi). Atakwa.— Mooney,
Siouan Tribes, 67, 1894 (Cherokee form, sing.).
Cadapouoes.— Pi'nicaut (1708) in Margry, Di'c., v,
477, 1883. Calabawa.— Humphreys, Aect., 98, 17;iO
(misprint). Oalipoas. — Census of 1857 in School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 686, 1857. Canapouoea.—
P^nicaut (1708) in Margry, D6c., v, 547, ISKt.
Catabans.— Rafinesque, int. Marshall, Ky., i, 24,
1824. Catabas. —George Washington ( 1770 ) quoted
by Kauflfmann, Wast Penn.. 396, 1851. Catabaw.—
Doc. of 1738 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 137. 1855.
CaUbaws.— Niles (1760) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 4th
s., V, M9. 1861. Oatapaw.— Map of N. Am. and W.
Ind., 1720. Catapaws. — Gov. Johnson quoted by
Rivers, Early Hist. So. Car.. 94, 1874. OaUuba.—
FiLson. Hist, of Kv.. 84, 1793. CaUubos.— War
map, 1711-15, in Winsor. Hi.st. Am., v, 346, 1887.
CaUupa.— Potter (1768) In Ma-ss. Hist. Soc. Coll..
1st s., X, 120, 1809. CaUwba.— Albany conf. (1717)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 490, 1855. CaUwbau.—
Hist. Coll. So. Car., ii, 199, 1836. OaUwbaw.— Man-
drillon, Spectateur Am<iricain, 1785. Cattabat. —
Doc. of 1715 in N. C. Records, ii, •262, 1886. Catta-
baws.— Alban V conf. (1717 ) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist..
V, 490, 1855. 6atUwbaa.— Clarke (1741), ibid., vi,
208, 1855. Oattowayi.— Stobo (1754) in The Olden
Time, i, 72. 1846 (incorrectly named as distinct
from Catawbas). Oautawba.— Clinton (1751) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 716, 1855. ChaUbaa.—
Buchhanan, N. Am. Inds., 155, 1824. Contaubas.—
Oglethorpe (1743) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi. 243, .
1&=)5. Cotappoi.— Doc. of 1776 in Hist. Mag.. 2d s..
II, 216, 1867. CoUwpecs.— Rogers, N.Am., 136. 176.\
Cotobera.— Doc. of 17'28 in Va. St. Pap., i, 215.
1875. Outtambaa.— German map of British colon v.
ra. 1750. Cuttawa.— Vaugondy, map Partie de
I'Am. Sept., 1755. CutUwaa.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, in, 292, 1853. £a-Uu-bau.— Hawkins
(1799), Sketch, 62, 1848 (misprint). Elaws.— Cra-
ven (1712) in N. C. Records, i, 898, 1886 (mi.sprint).
Esau.— Martin, Hist. N. C, l, 194, 1829. Esaws.—
Lawson (1714), Hist. Carolina, 73, 1860. Flat-
heads.— Albany conf. (1715) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., V, 437, 1855. Issa.— Juan de la Vandera
(1569) in French, Hist. Coll., Ii, 291, 1875. Kada-
pau Lawson (1714), Hist. Carolina, 76, 1860.
Kadapaw.— Mills, Stat, of S. C, 109, 1826. Bjtd-
depaw.— Ibid., 770. Kaddipeaw.— Ibid., 638. Kat-
abas.— Jour. (1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x,
843, 1858. Katidiba.— Adair, Hist. Am. Inds., 223,
1775. KatoubiOis.— Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 4, 25,
1848. Kattarbe.— Ibid., 27. Kattaupa.— De I'Isle,
map, in Winsor, Hist. Am., ii, 295, 1886. Ker-
shaws.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii. 344, 1853.
(^adiMroohroelme.— Albany conf. (1720) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., V, 567, 1855. Oyadacahroenes.- Doc.
of 1713, ibid., note, 386. Tadirigfirones.— Albany
conf. (1722), ibid., 660. Tafui.— Mooney in 19th
Rep. B. A. E., 509, 1900 (Cherokee form, sing.;
also Ata'givd). Toderiohroone. — Albany conf.
(1717) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 491, 1851 Toti-
216
CATAWBA — OATHLAMET
[b. a. e.
ris.— Chaiivignerie (1736), ibid., ix, 1057, 1855.
Ushcree.— Byrd (1728), Hist, of Dividing Line, i,
181, 1866. Utherie.— Lederer (1670), Disco v., 27, 1672
(from iswahere, 'river down here'). Usherys.—
Ibid., 17.
Catawba. — A grape, or the wine pro-
duced from it, made famous by Long-
fellow in one of his poems. This grape
is a cultivated variety of the northern fox-
grape ( Vitii^ labrusca) and is said to have
been named by Maj. Adlum, in 1825, after
the Catawba tribe and r. of North Caro-
lina, (a. f. c. )
CatawiBsa. — Probably a Conoy village, as
Conyngham (Day, Perm., 243, 1843) says
the Conoy "had a wigwam on the Cata-
wese at Catawese, now Catawissa,*' in
Columbia co. , Pa. The name is probably
derived from Piscatawese, a later desig-
nation for the Conoy.
Catawese. — Conyngham* op. cit.
Catfish Lake. A Seminole settlement,
with 28 inhabitants in 1880, on a small
lake in Polk co., Fla., nearly midway
between L. JMerce and L. Rosalie, toward
the headwaters of Kissimmee r. — Mac-
Cauley in 5th Kep. B. A. E., 478, 1887.
Catfish Village. A former settlement,
probably of the Delawares, on Catfish
run, a short distance n. of the site of
Washington, Washington co.. Pa.; so
called, according to Day (Penn., 666,
1843), from a half-blood who settled there
about the middle of the 18th century.
See Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. clx.,
1900.
Catherine's Town. A former Seneca
village situated about the site of the
present Catherine, N. Y., or, according
to Conover, at Havana Glen. It took its
name from Catherine Montour, a Cana-
dian woman who was taken by the Iro-
quois and afterward became the chief
matron in her clan. It was destroyed by
Sullivan in 1779. (j. n. b. h. )
Catharine Town.— Jones (1780) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., VIII, 785. 1857. Catherine Town.— Pember-
ton (ra. 1792) in Ma&s. Hist. Soc. Coll.. Ist s., ii.
177, 1810. French Catharineatown.— Machin (1779)
quoted by Conover, Kanesadagaand Geneva MS.,
B. A. £. French Catherines to^cTn.— Livermore
(1779) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 325, 1850.
Cathlacomatnp. A Chinookan tribe re-
siding in 1806, according to I^wis and
Clark (Exped., II, 226, 1814), on the s.
side of Sauvies id., in the present Mult-
nomah CO., Oreg., on a slough of Willa-
mette r. Their estimated number was
170.
Oathlaeommatupa.— Lewis and Clark, op. cit., 473.
Cath-lah-com-mah-tup.— Lewis and Clark Exped.,
Coues ed., 931, note, 1893.
Cathlacumup. A Chinookan tribe for-
merly living on the w. bank of the lower
mouth of Willamette r., near the Co-
lumbia, claiming as their territory the
bank of the latter stream from this point
to Deer id., Oreg. Lewis and Clark esti-
mated their number at 450 in 1806. They
are mentioned in 1850 by Lane as being
associated with the Namoit and Katla-
minimim. (l. f.)
Oathlaoumupt. —Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii, 212,
1814. Oathiahcumupa.— Coues, Lewis and Clark
Exped., 915, 1893. Oathlakamapa. —Drake, Bk.
Inos., vi, 1848. Wacamuc— Farrand, communica-
tion (nameof their chief village, used to designate
the tribe ) . Wa-oome-app. —Ross. Advent. , 236, 1849.
Wakamaas. — Framboise quoted by Gairdner .in
Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 255, 1841. Waka-
mucka.— Lane in Ind. Aflf. Rep.. 161, 1850. Willa-
mette tribe.— Coues, Henry and Thompson Jour.,
797, 1897.
Cathlakaheckit. A Chinookan tribe liv-
ing at the cascades of Columbia r. in 1812,
when their number was estimated at 900.
Oath-lak-a-heckita.— Stuart in Nouv. Ann. Voy.,
XII, 23, 1821. OathlakahikiU.— Morse, Rep. to
Sec. War, 368. 1822. Cathlayackty.— Coues, Jour.
Henry and Thompson, 803, 1897 (in 3 villages just
above cascades; probably identical).
Cathlamet. A Chinookan tribe formerly
residing on the s. bank of Columbia r.
near its mouth, in Oregon. Thev ad-
joined the Clatsop and claimed the
CATHLAMET WOMAN.
MUS. NAT. HIST J
territory from Tongue pt. to the neigh-
borhooa of Puget id. In 180^ I^wis and
Clark estimated their number at 300.
In 1849 Lane reported 58 still living, but
they are now extinct. They seem to
have had but one village, also known as
Cathlamet. As a dialect, Cathlamet was
spoken by a numljer of Chinookan tribes
on both sides of the Columbia, extending
up the river as far as Rainier. It is re-
garded as belonging to the upper Chinook
division of the family. See Boas, Kath-
lamet Texts, Bull. 26, B. A. E., 1901.'
(L.P.)
Oatelamet.— Lane in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 31st Cong.,
1st sess.. 172, 1850. Cath Oamettea.— Raymond in
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857. 354, 1858. Oathelametta.—
Minto in Oregon Hist. Soc. Quar., i, 311, 1900.
BULL. 30 J
CATHL ANAHQUIA H — CATLINITE
217
Oathlamah . —Lewis and Clark, Exped., i, map:
II, 473, 1814. Oathlamak*.— Domenech, Deserts
N. Am., II, 16, 1860. Oath-la-mas.— Gass, Jour.,
189, 1807. OathlamaU.— Stuart in Nouv. Ann. Voy.,
X, 23, 1821. Cathlamet.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Ex-
ped., Yi, 215, 1846. OathlamuU.— Scouler in Jour.
Ethnol. Soc. Lond.. i. 237, 1848. Oathlamuz.— Rosh.
Adventures, 87, 1849. Oathlawah. — Lewis and
Clark, Exped., n, 109. 1817. Oathlumet.— Medill
in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., 1st sess., 7, 1848.
Oatlahmaa.— Snellinj?, Tales of Travel. 78, 1830.
Outhlamuhs.— Robert»)n, Oregon, 129. 1846. Outh-
lamuka.— Robertson in H. R. Kx. Doc. 76, 30th
Cong., Ist .sess., 9, 1848. Chiaadunas. — Gatschet,
MS., B. A. E. (Clackama name). Ouithlamethi.—
Ibid. Kathlamet.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i. 521,
1853. Kat-hlamet.— Gibbs. Chinook vocab., 4, 1863.
Kathlamit— Lane in Ind. AfT. Rep., 162, 1850.
Kathlamut.— Latham, Nat. Hist. Man., 317, 1850.
Kathlemit— Lane in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 31st Cong..
1st sess., 174, 1850. Katiamak.— Framboise quoted
bv Gairdner (1835) in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi,
255, 1841. Katlamat.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped.,
VI, 215, 1846. KatiammcU.— Townsend. Narr., 175.
1839. Kwillu'chinl.— Gibbs, MS., B. A. E. (Chinook
name)!
Cathlanahquiah ('people of the r. Na-
qoaix'). A Chinookan tribe living in
180(), according to I^wis and Clark, on
the 8. w. side of Wappatoo, now Sauvies
id., Multnomah co., Oreg., and nunnl)er-
ing 400 souls.
Oath-lah-nah-quiah.— Lewis and Clark Exped.,
Coues ed. , 931 , 1893. Cathlanahquiah. —Lewis and
Clark, Exped., ii, 226, 1814. Cathlanaquiah.—
Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. OaLa'naqoa-ix.— Boa.s,
Infn, 1904. Oatlanakoa-iq.— Lewis and Clark
Exped., Coues ed., 931, note. 1893 (Cathlamet
name}. Hekuaix.— Gatschet MS.. B. A. E., 1877
(Clackama name).
Cathlapotle ( *people of Lewis INd^pIdLx']
r.'). A Chinookan tril^e formerly living
on the lower part of Lewis r. ana on the
s. w. side of Columbia r., in Clarke co..
Wash. In 1806 Lewis and Clark esti-
mated their number at 900 in 14 large
wooden houses. Their main village was
Nahpooitle. (l. f. )
Oath-lah-poh-tle.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, iv,
214, 1905. Oathlapootle.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War,
368, 1822. Oathlapoutles.— Stuart in Nouv. Ann.
Voy., X, 115,1821. Cathlapouttcs.— Ibid.,29. Cat-
lipoh. — Coues. Jour. Henry and Thompson, 821,
1^. OatUpoks.— Ibid., 798. Oattleputles.— Ross,
Advent., 87, 1849. Oa'Lap!oLx.— Boas, infn, 1904.
Ga'ilap'otlh.— Lewis ana Clark Exped., Coues
ed., 914, note, 1893 (Cathlamet name). Guathla'-
payak.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E., 1877 (Clackama
name). Kathlapootle.— Franchdre. Narr., Ill, 1854.
Kailaportl.— Framboise quoted by Gairdner in
Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 255. 1841. Hah-poo-
itie.— Lyman in Oreg. Hist. Soc. Ouar., i, 322. 1900.
Quathlahpohtle.— Ong. Jour. Lewis and Clark, iv,
212, 1905. Quathlahpothle.— Kelly, Oreg., 68, 1830.
Quathlahpotle.— Lewis and Clark. Exped., ii, 469,
1814. Quathlapohtle.— Oreg. Jour. Lewisand Clark,
VI, 68, 1905.
Cathlathlalas. A Chinookan tribe liv-
ing on both sides of Columbia r., just be-
low the cascades, in 1812. Their number
was placed at 500.
Oath-lath-la-lat.— Stuart in Nouv. Ann. Voy., xii,
23, 1821. Oathlathlaly.— Coues. Jour. Henry and
Thompson, 801, 1897. Cathlathlas.— Morse, Rep.
to Sec. War, 368, 1822.
Catlinite ( red pipestone ) . Smoking was
a custom oi great moment among the ab-
origines of northern America, and much
time and labor were expended in the
manufacture and decoration of the tobacco
pipe, which is often referred to as **the
sacred calumet," because of its important
place in the ceremonial affairs of the
people. A favorite material for these
pipes was the red claystone called catlin-
ite, obtained from a (juarry in k. w. Minne-
sota, and so named because it was first
brought to the attention of mineralogists
by George Catlin, the noted traveler and
painter of Indians. Stone of closely analo-
gous characters, save in the matter of
color, is found in many lociilities and has
been used by the Indians for the manu-
facture of pipes and other articles, but so
far as known to us it has not been (juar-
ried to any ctmsiderable extent. Catlin-
ite is a very handsome stone, the color
varying from a pale grayish-red to a dark
red, the tints being sometimes so broken
and distributed as to give a mottled ef-
fect. It is a fine-grained, argillaceous
sediment, and when freshly (juarried is
so soft as to be readily carved with stone
knives and drilled with primitive hand
drills. The analysis made by I)r Charles
F. Jackson, of Boston, who gave the min-
eral its name, is as follows: Silica, 48.20;
alumina, 28.20; ferric oxide, 5; carbon-
ate of lime, 2.60; manganous oxide, 0.60;
magnesia, 6; water, 8.40; loss, 1.
The deposit of catlinite occurs in a
broad, shallow, prairie valley, on the mar-
gin of which is situated the town of Pipe-
stone, county seat of Pipestone co. The
outcrop was probably discovered by the
natives where it had been slightly ex-
posed in the bed of the small stream now
called Pipestone cr., which descends into
the valley on the e. in a fall 18 ft. in
height, and traverses the basin, passing
out to the N. w. So far as exposed, the
stratum of pipestone varies from 10 to
20 in. in thickness, the band of pure,
fine-grained stone available for the manu-
facture of pipes rarely measuring more
than 3 or 4 in. in thickness. This stra-
tum is embedded between massive
layers of compact quartzite which dip
slightly to the eastward, so that in work-
ing it the overlying quartzite had to be
broken up and removed, the difficulty
of this task increasing with every fc^ot of
advance. With the stone implements in
use in early times the process was a very
tedious one, and the excavations were
consequently quite shallow. The ledge «
which crosses the stream approximately
at right angles had been followed to the
right and left by the quarrymen until the
line of pittings, rather conventionally
shown in Catlin's plate 151, was nearly a
mile in length. These ancient diggings
have been almost obliterated by the more
recent operations, which since the advent
of the whites have been greatly acceler-
ated by the introduction of steel sledges,
picks, shovels, and crowbars. It is said
218
CATLINITE
[b. a. e.
that with the aid of the whites blasting
has been occasionally resorted to. Some
of the present excavations are as much as
10 ft. m depth, and have advanced 20
ft. or more along the dip of the strata
to the E. The usual section now ex-
posed in the deeper excavations, begin-
ning above, sliows from 2 to 4 ft. of
soil and from 5 to 8. ft. of quartzite rest-
ing on the thin stratum of pipestone,
beneath which, again forming the bed of
the quarry, are compact quartzites. Nu-
merous hammers of hard stone, some
roughly grooved to facilitate hafting,
have been found about the older pits, and
the prairie in the vicinity is dotted with
camp sites and tent ringsabout which are
strewn bits of pipestone and other refuse
of marmfacture (see Mines and Quarries).
There is a general impression among
those who have
written on the
subject that the
discovery and
use of the red
pipestone by the
tribes is of com-
paratively recent
date, and this is
no dou bt correct ;
but it is equally
certain that it
was in use before
the arrival of the
whites in the N.
W. This is made
ctearnotonly by
history and tra-
dition but by
the appearance
of the ancient
quarry excava-
tions, and espe-
cially b\^ the oc-
currence of pipes
and other objects
made of it by
aboriginal methods iu mounds in various
sections of the country. (See Pipes.)
This quarry is usually referred to as the
sacred pipestone quarry. According to
statements by Catlin and others, the site
was held in much superstitious regard by
the aborieines. Traditions of very gen-
eral distribution lead to the belief that it
was, in the words of Catlin, **held and
owned in common, and as neutral ground
amongst the different tribes who met here
to renew their pipes, under some super-
stition which stayed the tomahawk of
natural foes always raised in deadly hate
and vengeance in other places" (N. Am.
Indians, ii, 201, 1844). Nicollet states
(1838) that Indians of the surrounding
nations made an annual pilgrimage to the
quarry unless prevented by wars or dis-
sensions. Since the earliest visits of the
INDIAN QUARRYMAN OF TO-DAY. THE
BASE OF THE WALL.
white man to the Coteau des Prairies,
however, the site has been occupied ex-
clusively by the Sioux, and Catlin met
with strong opposition from theni when
he attempted to visit the quarry about
1837.
The following facts regarding the his-
toric occupancy and ownership of the
Pipestone quarry are extracted from a
statement furnished by Mr Charles H.
Bennett, of Pipestone: " On Apr. 30, 1803,
the region was acquired by the United
States through the Louisiana purchase.
On July 23, 1851, the lands, including
the quarry, were relinquished to the
United States by the Sisseton and Wah-
peton Sioux, and on August 5 they were
relinquished by the Maewakanton and
Wahpekute Sioux, and 64 chiefs and
head warriors who ha<i also a claim. A
treaty with the
Yankton Sioux,
ratified Apr. 19,
1858, specifies
that **tne said
Yancton Indians
shall he secured
in the free and
unrestricted use
of the red pipe-
stone quarry, or
so much thereof
as they have
been accustomed
to frequent and
use for the pur-
pose of procuring
stone for pipes;
and the United
States hereby
stipulate and
agree to bie
caused to be
surveyed and
marked so much
PIPESTONE LEDGE APPEARS AT THE thcrCOf aS Shall
(BENNETT, COLL. ) ' \^ necessary and
proper for that purpose, and retain the
same and keep it open and free to the In-
dians to visit and procure stone for pipes,
so long as they shall desire." In 1859, 1
sq. m., including the quarry, was surveyed
as a reservation, and in 1892 Congress ap-
propriated $25,000 for the establishment
of an industrial school, which is now
(1905) being successfully conducted, with
several stone building and soipe 200
pupils. It is situated on the highland
overlooking the pipestone quarries on the
E. The Sioux have no other legal claim
upon the quarry site than that of quarry-
ing the pipestone, a privilege of which
they yearly take advantage to a limited
extent. The Yankton Sioux, sometimes
accompanied by their friends, the Flan-
dreau Sioux, continue to visit the ouarry
and dig pipestone, coming usually in
BULL. 30]
CATOKING — CAUCUS
219
June or July. They establish their tents
on the reservation near the excavations,
and stay from 1 to 2 weeks, procur-
ing the pipestone which they manufac-
ture into pipes and trinkets of great
variety.
The Indians sell much of the stone
to the whites, who have taken up the
manufacture of pipes and various trin-
kets, using lathes to aid in the work,
and in a letter written by Mr Bennett in
1892 it is stated that not 1 percent of
the pipes then made and disposed of were
of Indian manufacture. White traders
began the manufacture of pipes from the
pipestone many years ago, and according
to Hayden these were used by the fur
companies in trade with the Indians of
the N. W. At a meeting of the Ameri-
can Philosophical Society in 1868 Hay-
den stated that in the two years just
passed the Northwestern Fur Company
had manufactured nearly 2,000 pipes and
traded them with the tribes of the upper
Missouri. An important feature of the
quarry site is a group of large granite
bowlders, brought from the far N. by
glacial ice, about the base of which, en-
graved on the glaciated floor of red quartz-
ite, were formerly a number of petro-
glyphs no doubt representing mytholog-
ical beings associated with the locality.
These have been taken up and are now in
possession of Mr Bennett. Additional
interest attaches to the locality on account
(A an inscription left by the Nicollet ex-
f)loring party in 1838. The name of Nicol-
et and the initials of 5 other persons, in-
cluding those of John C. Fremont [C. F.
only], are cut in the flinty quartzite rock
face near the "leaping rock" at the falls.
According to a letter written to Mr Ben-
nett by Gen. Fn^mont several years ago,
he at that time named the two small lakes
adjoining the quarry, one after his wife,
the other after his son.
The following publications will afford
additional details: Barber in Am; Nat.,
XVII, 1883; Carver, Trav. Through N.
Am., 1778; Catlin (1) in Am. Jour. Sci.
and Arts, Ists., xxxviii, 1840, (2) No. Am.
Inds., 11, 1844; Donaldson in Rep. Nat.
Mus. 1885, 1886; Hayden (1) in Am.
Jour. Sci. and Arts, 2d s., xliii, 1867, (2)
in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc, x, 1865-68;
Hoffman in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896;
Holmes in Proc. A. A. A. S., xli, 1892;
Nicollet in Sen. Doc. 237, 26th Cong.,
2d sees., 1841; Norris, Calumet of the Co-
teau, 18^; Rau in Rep. Smithson. Inst.
1872, 1873; White in Am. Nat, ii, 1868;
Wmchell in Geol. Surv. Minn., i, 1884.
(w. H. H.)
Catokingj A village, probably belong-
ing to the Chowanoc, situated about
Gatesville, Gates co., N. C, in 1585. —
Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr. 1819.
CatouinayoB. An unidentified village or
tribe mentioned to Joutel in 1687 (Mar-
gry, D6c., Ill, 409, 1878), while he was
staying with the Kadohadacho on Red r.
of Louisiana, by the chief of that triln* as
being among his enemies.
Catrdo. Mentioned in 1598 as a pueblo
of the Jemez (q.v.) Not identified with
the present native name of any of the
ruined pueblos in the vicinitv of Jemez.
Oaatri.— Ofiate (1598) in Doc. In^^d., xvi, 102, 1871.
Catroo.— Ibid., 114.
Catsklll. A division of the Munsee v/ i/
formerly living on Catskill cr., w. of the
Hudson, in Greene co., N. Y. They
were one of the Esopus tribes, and were
known to the Frencn as Mahingans (or
Loups) of Taracton, but this name may
have included other bands in that region.
The name Catskill is Dutch, and was first
applied to the stream as descriptive of the
totem of the band, which was really the
wolf.
Catkils.— Salisbury (1678) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
XIII, 524, 1881. Catskil.— Document of 1659(?),
ibid., 119. OaUkilU.— Smith (1660), ibid., 161.
Cattakill.— Cregier (1663), ibid., 325. Katakil.—
Lease of 1650, ibid., 26. Katskill.— Schuyler (1691),
ibid., Ill, 801, 1853. Taracton.— Frontenac (1674),
ibid., IX, 117, 1856. Taractou.— Ibid., 793. Tarak-
toiis.-Bruya9 (1678), ibid., xiii, 623, 1881. Tar-
raktons.— Brock hoist (1678), ibid., 527.
Cattachiptico. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy on Pamunkey r., in King
William co., Va., in 1608.— Smith (1629),
Va., I, map, repr. 1819.
Cattahecassa. See CataJiecassa.
Cattaraugus ( Gd,^-dd-gdf'8^-geon\* where
oozed mud roils.' — Hewitt). A Seneca
settlement on a branch of Cattaraugus cr.,
Cattaraugus co., N. Y. In 1903 there
were 1,272 Seneca and 182 Cayuga and
Onondaga on the reserve, which contains
21,680 acres, 14,800 of which are under
cultivation.
Oataraugoa.— Genesee treaty (1797) in Hall, N. W.
States, 74, 1849. Cattaragua.— Procter (1791) in
Am. St. Pap. , IV, 155, 1832. Oattaraugua.— Buffalo
Creek treaty (1802) in Hall.N. W. States, 76, 1849.
Catteranga.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 535,
1878. Gi'-da-ga-s'-geo"'.— Hewitt, infn, 1886
(Seneca form). Gadi'geggao.— Morgan, League
Iroq., 466, 1851. Ki-'ti-rtT'-kri^.— Hewitt, inf'n,
1886 (Tuscarora form).
Caucus. This word, defined by Bart-
lett (Diet, of Americanisms, 106, 1877) as
**a private meeting of the leading politi-
cians of a partv, to agree upon the plans
to be pursued in an approaching elec-
tion," and by Norton (Polit. American-
isms, 28, 1890) as ** a meeting of partisans,
congressional or otherwise, to decide upon
the action to be taken by the party," nas
now a legal signification. In Massachu-
setts it is defined as ** any public meeting
of the voters of a ward of a city, or of a
town, or of a representative district, held
for the nomination of a candidate for elec-
tion, for the election of a political commit-
tee, or of delegates to a political conven-
tion. ' * The origin of the word is not clear.
Trumbull (Trans. Am. Philol. Assoc,
220
OAUGHNAWAGA
[b. a. e.
30, 1872) suggested a derivation from caw-
cawacissoughy a word in the Virginian dia-
lect of A Igonquian, perhaps identical with
cockarouse. It signifies ' one who advises,
urges, encourages, pushes on/ Related
words in other A Igonquian dialects are the
Abnaki kakesomariy * to encourage, incite,
arouse, speak to,' and the Chippewa
gagamoma. From caucus^ which is used
Doth as a noun and a verb, are derived
caiicuseTj caucusing j etc. (a. f. c. )
Caughnawaga (GH-hnd-wdi'^-ge^ ' at the
rapids ' ). An Iroquois settlement on the
Sault St Louis on St Lawrence r., Quebec.
When the hostility of the pagan Iroquois
to the missions established in their terri-
tory frustrated the object of the French
to attach the former to their interests, the
Jesuits determined to draw their converts
from the confederacy and to establish
them in a new mission village near the
French settlements on the St Lawrence,
in accordance with which plan these
Indians were finally induced to settle at
I^ Prairie, near Montreal, in 1668. These
converts were usually called *' French
Praying Indians "or * * French Mohawks ' '
by the English settlers, in contradistinc-
tion to the Iroquois who adhered to their
own customs and to the English interests.
In 1676 they were removed from this place
to Sault St Louis, where Caughnawaga and
the Jesuit mission of St Frangois du Sault
were founded. The village has been re-
moved several times within a limited
» area. The majoritv of • the emigrants
^ came from the Oneiaa and Mohawk, and
the Mohawk tongue, somewhat modified,
became the speech of the whole body of
this village. The Iroquois made several
unsuccessful efforts to induce the converts
to return to the confederacy, and finally
renounced them in 1684, from which time
Caughnawaga became an important aux-
iliary of the French in their wars with
the English and the Iroquois. After the
peace of Paris, in 1763, manv of them left
their village on the Sault St Louis and
took up their residence in the valley of
Ohio r., principally about Sandusky and
Scioto rs., where they numbered 200 at
the outbreak of the American Revolution.
From their contact with the wilder tribes
of that region many of them relapsed into
paganism, although they still retained
their French allegiance and maintained
connection with their brethren on the St
Lawrence. About 1755 a colony from
Caughnawaga formed a new settlement at
St Regis, some distance farther up the St
/ Lawrence. As the fur traders pushed
their way westward from the great lakes
they were accompanied by Caughnawaga
hunters. As early as 1820 a considerable
number of this tribe was incorporated
with the Salish, while others found their
way about the same period down to
the mouth of Columbia r. in Oregon, and
N. even as far as Peace r. in Athabasca.
In the W. they are commonly known as
Iro<][uois. Some of the Indians from St
Re^is also undertook these distant wan-
denngs. In 1884 Caughnawaga had a
population of 1,485, wnile St Regis (in
Canada and New York) had about 2,075,
and there were besides a considerable
number from the 2 towns who were scat-
tered throughout the W. In 1902 there
were 2,017 on the Caughnawaga res. and
1,386 at St Regis, besides 1,208 on the St
Regis reserve, N. Y. (j. n. b. h.)
Cagnawage.— Doc. of 1695 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
IV, 120, 1854. Cagnawagees.— JohnsoH (1750), ibid.,
VI, 592, 1855. Oagnawauga. — Hawley ( 1794) in Mass.
Hist. See. Coll.. 1st 8., IV, 51, 1795. Oagnawaugen.—
Stevens (1749) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 204, 1837.
Oagnawaugon.— Stevens (1749), ibid., 200. Cagne-
wage.— Doc. of 1695 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv.
120. 1854. Oagnowages.— Schuyler (1724) quoted
in Hist. Mag., 1st s., x, 115, 1866. Oagnuagas.—
Oneida letter (1776) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., viii,
689, 1857. Oahgnawaga.— N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., in,
104, 1832. Oahnawaaa.— Colden (1727),' Five Nat.,
55, 1747. Oahnawaga.— Hoyt, Ant. Res., 194, 1824.
Oahnnaga.— Barton, New Views, xl, 1798. Oakna-
wager--LydiU8 (1750) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi,
569, 1855. Oanawahrunas.— French trader (1764)
auoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 553, 1853.
aughnawaga.— Johnson Hallconf. (1763) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 553, 1856. Oaughnawagera.—
Doc. of 1763, ibid., 544. Oaughnawanga.— Lloyd
in Jour. Anthrop. Inst, G. B., IV, 44, 1875. Oaugh-
newaga.— Schuyler (1689) quoted by Drake, Bk.
Inds., I, 32, 1848. Caughnewago.-^mith (1799)
quoted by Drake, Trag. Wild., 186, 1841. Oay-
nawagaa.— Knox (1792) in Am. St. Pap., iv, 235,
1832. Ooohenawagoea. — Keane in Stanford, Com-
pend., 509, 1878. Ooohnawagah.— Stoddert (1760)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 582, 1855. GkMhne-
wagot.— Bouquet (1764) quoted by Kauffman,
W. Penn., app., 156, 1851. Oocbnewakee.— Bar-
ton, New Views, 8, app., 1798. Oocbnowagoea. —
Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 319. 1816. Oocknawa-
gaa.— Lindesay (1749) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi,
538. 1855. Oooknawagees Johnson (1749), ibid.,
525. Oooknewagea.— Clarke (1741), ibid., 207.
Coehnawaghas.— Doc. of 1747, ibid., 620. Ooghnawa-
Keea.— Johnson (1747), ibid., 359. Ooehnawagea.—
Johnson (1755), ibid., 94C. Ck>ghnawagoe«.—
Johnson (1747), ibid., 362. Ooghnawayeea.— John-
son (1747), ibid., 359. Coghnewagoes.— Croghan
(1765) quoted in Am. Jour. Geol., 272, 1831. Oof-
nahwariiah.— Doc. of 1798 in Williams, Vt.,n, 1»8,
1809. Oognawagees. -Johnson (1747) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., VI, 359, 1855. Oognawage.— Peters (1760)
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix, 270, 1871. (Johna-
waga.— Washington (1796) in Am. St. Pap., iv, 585,
1832. Oohnawagey.— Johnson (1763) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., VII, 542, 1856. Gk>hnawah«ui8.— Car-
ver, Trav., 173, 1778. Oohnewago.— Eastbum (1758)
quoted by Drake, Trag. Wild., 272. 1841. (Johime-
wagus.~lmlay, W. Ter., 291, 1797. Oohimnaw-
goes.— Macauley, N. Y., ii, 187, 1829. Cohunne-
gagoet.— Thompson quoted by Jefferson, Notes,
^, 1825. Oohunnewagoea. —Bouquet (1764)
quoted, ibid., 141. Conawaghmnas. —French
trader quoted by Smith, Bouquet's Exped., 69,
1766. Oonaway Crunas«— Buchanan, N. Am. Inds.,
156, 1824. Oonwahago.— Mercer (1769) quoted by
Kauffman, W. Penn., 129, 1851. Oouglmawagai.—
Goldthwait (1766) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s.,
x, 121, 1809. Cuimiwagoea.— Croghan (1767) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vil, 286, 1^. French Ko-
hawka.— Penhallow (1726) in N. H. Hist Soc.
Coll., 1, 67, 1824. Iroquoia du Sault— Bacqueville
de la Potherie, m, 67, 1753. Iroquois of the Sault—
La Barre (1684) in N. Y. Doc. Cpl. Hist, ix,
241. 1856. Jemaistea.— Doc. of 1694, ibid., iv, 92,
1854. Kaohanuage.— Schuyler (1700), ibid., 747.
BULL. 30]
OAUGHNAWAGA CAVES AND ROCK SHELTERS
221
nuge.— Livingston (1700), ibid., 695. Kach-
B.— Schuyler (1700), ibid., 747. Kaoh-
nurnge. — Livingston (1700), ibid., 696. Kagna-
wage.— Freerman (1704), ibid., 1163. Ka'hnra-
wagtt Iniiiiak.— Gatschet, Penobscot MS., B. A.
E., 1887 (Penobscot name). Kahnuages.— Doug-
lass, Summ., 1, 186, 1765. Kanatakwenke.— Cuoq,
Lex., 163, 1882. Kftn&warklL— King, Arct. Ocean, i,
9, 1836. Kannaogau.— Bleeker (1701) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., IV, 920, 1854. Kannawagogh.— Mercer
(1759) quoted by Kauffman, W. Penn., 129, la^l.
Kanu]ige-ono.—Gatschet, Seneca MS., B. A. E.,
1882 (Seneca name). Kaughnawaugas.— Picker-
ing (1794) in Am. St. Pap., iv, 546, 1832. Konuaga.--
Colden (1724) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 732, 1855.
OMolt 8t Louis.— Stoddert (1750), ibid., vi, 582,
1855 ( for au Sault St Louis, ' at St Louis fall ' ) . St
Fran^ Xavier da Sault.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 304,
1855. Saint Peter's. —Ibid . , 270. Sault Indians. —
Doc. of 1695 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix,629, 1855.
Baat Indiana.— Doc. of 1698, ibid., 686.
Caughnawaga. The ancient capital of
the Mohawk tribe, situated in 1667 on
Mohawk r., near the present site of
Anriesville, N. Y. The Jesuits main-
tained there for a time the mission of St
Pierre. The town was destroyed bv the
French in 1693.
Asterue.— Megapolensis (1644) quoted by Park-
man, Jes., 222, note, 1883. Oachanuage.— Liv-
ingston (1691) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 782, 1853.
Oachenuage.— Hansen (1700\ ibid., iv, 803, 1854.
Oaohnawage.— Doc. of 1709, ibid., v. 85, 1855.
Oaehnewagat.— Bouquet (1764) quoted by Kauff-
man, W. Penn., 165, 1861. Oaobnewago.— Bouquet,
ibid. Oachnuagat.— Pownall (1754)in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., Yi, 896. 1855. Oacknawages. —Clinton
(1745), ibid., 276. Oaonawagees.— Fox (1756), ibid.,
Yii, 77, 1856. Oaghnawagt£.— Butler (1750), ibid.,
VI, 591, 1855. Oaghnawagoe.— Croghan (1756)
quoted by Kauffman, W. Penn, 116, 1851. Cagh-
nenewaga. — Morse quoted by Barton, New Views,
app., 8, 1798. Oaghnewagos.— Thompson quoted
by Jefferson, Notes, 282, 1826. Caghnuage.—
Bleeker (1701) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 895, 18M.
Oagnawaga.— De Lancey (1754), ibid., vi, 909, 1855.
Oanoomakera.— Dutch map (1616), ibid., i, 1856
(i»«w). Ca-'lin*.w»"-ge.— Hewitt, inf'n, 1886
(Mohawk form). Oandaoiaagne.— Jes. Rel. for
1670, 23, 1858. Oandaouaque.— Bacqueville de la
Potherie, Hist, de I'Am. S6pt., i, 853, 1753.
OandaoQgue.— Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 97,
1872. Gandawague.— Shea. Cath. Miss., 216, 1855.
Oanegaaaga. — Morgan (1851) quoted by Parkman,
Jesuits, 222, note, 1888. Oannaouague.— De I'Isle
(1718) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ni, 250, 1853.
Oa-no-wau-ga.— Morgan, League Iroq., 419, 1855.
Kaghenewag^— Conf. of 1674 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., n, 712, 1858. Kaghnawage.— Burnet (1726),
ibid., V, 813, 1855. JKaghnewage.— Ruttenber
Tribes Hudson R., 283, 1872 (Dutch form).
Zaghnuwage.- N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 250,1853.
Lower Kohawk cattle.— Ruttenber, Tribes Hud-
son R., 97, 1872. Onengioure.— Ruttenber, Tribes
Hudson R., 283, 1872. OneugiSre.— Jes. Rel. for
1646, 15, 1858. OnewTiore.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 215,
1855. Oesemenon.— Jogues (1643) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., XIII, 680, 1881 (misprint). Osserrion.—
Jes. Rel. for 1646, 16, 1858. Osaeruenon.— Park-
man, Jesuits, 222, note, 1883.
CaiiBao. A former rancheria of the
Sobaipuri, on the Rio San Pedro, s. Ariz.,
visited by Father Kino about 1697. — Doc.
Hist. Mex., 4th s., i, 279, 1856.
Cayate dwellingi. See Cliff-dwellings.
Cayes and Book shelten. The native
tribes n. of Mexico have been cave-
dwellers to a less extent, apparently, than
were the primitive peoples of Europe,
and there is no period in American pre-
history which can be referred to as a
* * Cave period. ' * Vast areas of limestone
rocks of varying age occur in the middle
E. sections of the United States, in which
there are countless caves, the great
caverns of Virginia, Kentucky, Indiana,
and Missouri being well-known examples;
and caves also occur in many parts of the
far W., especially in Arizona and Cali-
fornia. It is observed that in general
these caverns have existed for a long
period, extending back well beyond the
time when man is assumed to have ap-
peared on the continent. Few of the
caverns have been explored, save in a
most superficial manner, and as a rule
where serious work has been undertaken
the finds have been such as to discourage
investigation l)y archeologista — not that
meager traces of man are encountered,
but because the osseous remains and
works of art found represent the Indian
tribes merely. The substrata of the cav-
ern floors, which would naturally con-
tain traces of very early occupants, are
apparently barren of human remains, a
condition that is difficult to understand
if, as some suppose, the continent was
occupied by man throughout all post-
Tertiary time. Human remains occur
along with the fossil fauna of the present
period, but are not with certainty asso-
ciated as original deposits with the older
forms. Very considerable age is indi-
cated, however, by the condition of the
human bones, some of which, found in
California caves, seem to be completely
fossilized, the animal matter having dis-
appeared, while in Arkansas and else-
where the bones are deeply embedded in
deposits of stalagmite. The length of
time required for fos.silization is not well
known, however, and calcareous accu-
mulations may be slow or rapid, so that
these phenomena have no very definite
value in determining age.
The American CAves were occupied by
the aborigines for a number of purposes,
including bur-
ial, ceremony,
and refuge. In
a few cases
chert, outcrop-
ping in the
walls, was
quarried for
the manufac-
ture of imple-
ments. Gener- section of cavern
ally only the outer and more accessible
chambers of deep caverns were occupied
as dwelling places, and in these evidence
of occupancy is often abundant. The
floors are covered with deposits of ashes,
in which are embedded various imple-
ments and utensils and the refuse of feast-
ing, very much as with ordinary dwelling
sites. The deeper chambers were some-
times used as temporary retreats in time
222
CAWA8UM8EUCK CAY008H CREEK
[B. A. E.
SECTION OF ROCK SHELTER
of danger and for the performance of re-
ligious rites. In numerous cases deposits
of sacrificial offering are found, and the
walls are covered with symbolic or other
paintings or engravings. The Zuiii em-
ploy caverns as shrines and as depositories
for images of their gods and the painted
bones ofanimals, and caves have an impor-
tant place in the genesis myths of many
tribes. Burial in caves was common, and
chambers of various depths from the sur-
face were used. Pits and crevices in the
rocks were also repositories for the dead.
Far better adapted to man's use as
dwellings tlian the deep caves are the
rock recesses or shelters which owe their
origin not to the action of underground
waters, but to undercutting by the
waters of the sea or lakes and ordinary
streams or to disintegration of portions of
steep rock faces aided by wind action.
These recesses often have somewhat level
floors and arched
roofs, formed by
hard layers of
rock, which ex-
pand toward the
front, thus form-
ing roomy and
w e 1 1 - 1 i g h t e d
dwelling places.
They are no-
where so numer-
<4|b as in the plateau region of the Colo-
rado and Rio Grande valleys, where the
well-exposed rock faces in a multitude of
cases are deeply undercut by the gnaw-
ing agencies of disintegration aided by
the winds. In this region man was not
content with the natural shelters so
abundantly furnished, but the recesses
were enlarged, and in places where the
rock was massive and easily worked great
numbers of chambers were excavated
for dwellings. See Archeology, Antiquity,
Cliff-dwellings.
Consult Andrews in 11th Rep. Pea-
body Mus., 1878; Dall (1) in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., I, 1877, (2) in Smithson. Cont,
XXII, 1878; Haywood, Nat. and Aborig.
Hist. Tenn., 1823; Holmes in Am. An-
throp.. Ill, no. 3, 1890; Jones in Smith-
son. Cont., XXII, 1876; Mercer (1) in
Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., xi, pt 2,
1896; (2) in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc,
XXXIV, no. 149, 1895; (3) in Pubs. Univ.
Pa., VI, 1897; Mitchell in Trans. Am.
Antiq. Soc., i, 1820; Palmer in Uth Rep.
Peabody Mus., 1878; Peabody in Am.
Anthrop., vii, no. 3, 1905; Peabody and
Moorehead, Bull. 1, Dept. Archseol.,
Phillips Acad., 1904; Putnam in Peabody
Mus. Kepe.; Sinclair in Univ. Cal. Publ.,
Am. Archseol. and Ethnol., ii, no. 1,
1904; Stevenson in 23d Rep. B. A. E.,
1905; Yarrow in 1st Rep. B. A. E., 1881.
(w. H. H.)
Cawasamseuck. Given by Williams in
1643 as the name by which some tribe,
settlement, or band of New England In-
dians called themselves (Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 1st s.. Ill, 205, 1794). To what
Indians he refers is unknown, but it is
possibly to some then living on Cawsum-
sett Neck, near Pawtucket r., R. I.
Cawrauoc. A village in 1585, perhaps
belonging to the Neusiok, and seemingly
situated on the n. side of Neuse r., in the
present Craven co., N. C.
Cawruuoc— Smiih (1629), Va., i. map, repr. 1819.
Cwarenuock.— Dutcn map (1621) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., I, 1856.
CawwontoU. — A village of the Powhatan
confederacy in 1608, on the n. bank of
the Rappahannock, in Richmond co.,
Va.— Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr.
1819.
Cayahasomi. The Partridge clan of the
Acheha phratry of the ancient Timucua
tribe of Florida. — Pareja (ca, 1612)
quoted by Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philos.
Soc, XVII, 492, 1878.
Cayahoga (Kayaha*ge% *the fork of the
stream.'— Hewitt). A village, perhaps
belonging to the Wyandot, formerly sit-
uated on the N. E. side of Cuyahoga r.,
near Akron, Ohio.
Oajocka.— Stoddart (1753) in N. Y.Doc. Col. Hist.,
VI, 779, 1855. Oajuhaja.— Clinton (1750) , ibid., 548.
Caniahaga. ••-Albany conf . ( 1751 ) , ibid. , 720. Oaua-
hogue.— Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777. Oaya-
hagah.— Lindeaay (1761) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
VI, 706, 1855. OayahoML— Hutching, map (1764)
in Smith, Boquet Exped., 1766. Owahago.—
Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777. Chxrahago.—
Lotter, map, ca. 1770. Kaya'ha'ce*.— Hewitt,
infn. 1903. Kichaga.— Doc. of 1747 in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., VI, 391, 1855. Kyahagah.— Lindesay
(1751), ibid.. 706.
Cayas. A tribe visited by the De Soto
expedition in 1542, apparently in w. Ar-
kansas. Schoolcraft's identification of
the name with Kansa is of very doubtful
value.
Cayaa.— Ranjel (1543) in Smith. Col. Doc. Fla.,
I, 60, 1&'>7. Cayase.— Ranjel (1548) quoted by
Bourne, Narr. De Soto, ii, 147, 1904.
Cayegnas. A former Chumashan vil-
lage on the Cayeguas ranch, Ventura co.,
Cal.
Cayeruaa.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, July 24, 1863.
Oayuguia.— Ibid., May 4, 1860 (located at Punta
Alamo). Ka-yo'-wbc.— Henshaw, Buenaventura
vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (c=sh).
Caymiis. A former Yukian Wappo
village on the site of the present Yount-
ville, in Napa valley, Cal. (s. a. b.)
Caymas.— Bartlett, Pere. Narr.. ii, 20-21, 1854.
Oaymua.— Revere, Tour of Duty, 91-93, 1849.
Cayomnlgi. An ancient Upper Creek
town on a stream which joins Coosa r. at
Coussa(Kusa) town, Ala. Possibly for
Okmulgee, an ancient Creek town in k.
Georgia.
Oayomugi.— Bartram, Voy., i, map, 1799. Oayo-
mulgi.— PhiUppeaux, map of Engl. Col., 1781.
CayooBh Creek. A local name for two
bodies of Upper Lillooet Indians of Sali-
shan stock near the junction of Bridge
and Fraser rs., Brit. Col. Population of .
BULL. 30]
CAYOVEA CAYUGA
223
one of the bodies in 1902, 34; of the
other, also called Pashilqua, 15.-— Can.
Ind. Aff. for 1901, pt. ii, 72.
Oftyoush.— Survey map, Hydr. Office, U. S. N.,
1882. KayoM Creek.— Can. Ind. Aff. for 1878, 74.
PaahilquU.— Can. Ind. Aff. for 1891, 251. Paahil-
qua.— Ibid., 1884, 190.
CayoYea. A Calusa village on tlie s. w.
coast of Florida, about 1570. — Fontaneda
Memoir (m. 1575), Smith trans., 19, 1854.
Cayuga (Kw(^i(/gw^"\ *the place where
locusts were taken out.' — Hewitt). A
tribe of the Iroquoian confederation,
formerly occupying the shores of Cayuga
lake, N. Y. Its local council was com-
posed of 4 clan phratries, and this form
became the pattern, tradition says, of
that of the confederation of the Five
CAYUGA. (hOJIAGEDE, FI8H-CARRIEr)
Nations of the Iroquois, in which the
Cayuga had 10 delegates. In 1660 they
were estimated to number 1,500, and in
1778, 1,100. At the beginning of the
American Revolution a large part of the
tribe removed to Canada ana never re-
turned, while the rest were scattered
among the other tribes of the confederacy.
Soon after the Revolution these latter
sold their lands in New York; some went
to Ohio, where they joined other Iro-
quois and became known as the Seneca
' of the Sandusky. These are now in In-
dian Ter. ; others are with the Oneida in
Wisconsin; 175 are with the Iroquois still
in New York, while the majority, num-
bering 700 or 800, are on the Grand River
res., Ontario. In 1670 they had three
villages — Goiogouen, Kiohero, and On-
nontare. Goiogouen was the principal
village; Gayagaanha, given by Morgan,
was their chief village in modem times.
Their other villages of the modern period,
according to Morgan, were Ganogeh, Ge-
wauga, and Neodakheat Others were
Chouodote, Gandaseteiagon, Kawauka,
Kente, Oneniote, and Onugareclury.
Their clans were those common to the
Iroquois. (j. m. j. n. b. h.)
Caeiijcs.— Andros (1690) in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ni,
722, 1853. G&hiigi«.— Marshe (1744) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 1st 8., VII, 189, 1801. Caijouns.— Ft
Johnson conf. (1756) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vn,
55, 1856. Caijouges.— Wessels (1693), ibid., iv, 60,
1854. Caiouga.— Green halgh (1677) quoted by
Conover, Kanadaga and Geneva MS., B. A. E.
Caiougues.— Livingston (1698) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., IV, 342, 1854. Oaiougos.— Green halgh (1677),
ibid.. Ill, 251, 1853. Oaiuges.- Andros (1690) in R. 1.
Col. Rec, III, 281, 1858. Caiyougas.— Ft Johnson
eonf. (1756) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 67,
1856. Cagoegers.— Dellius (1697), ibid., iv, 279,
la'W. Cajouga*.- Wessels (1698), ibid., 372. Oa-
jouges.— Maryland treaty (1682), ibid., Iii, 323,
1853. Oajuga*.— Weiser (1748) quoted by Kauff-
man, W. Penn., app., 22, 1851. Oajuger.— Schuy-
ler (1699) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 563,
1854. Oajugcs. — Ibid. Oajugu. — Barton, New
Views, app., 7, 1798. Cajuka«.— Weiser (1748)
quoted by Kauffman, W. Penn., app., 22, 1851.
Cajyougas.— Johnson Hall conf. (1765) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., VII. 724, 1866. Cajyugas.— Ibid.,
719. Caiyuokos.— Weiser (1736) quoted by School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 339, ' 1854. Oavagas.-
Crepy, map, ca. 1755. Cayagoei.— Bellomont
(^1698) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 370, -1854.
Cayauga.— Ft Johnson conf. (1756), ibid., vu,
186. iaT6. Cayauge.— Livingston (1700), ibid., X,
650, 18^. Caycuges.— Albany conf. (1737), ibid.,
vr, 99, 1855. Oayeuges.— Albany conf. (1744),
ibid., 262. Cayeugoes.— Ingoldsby (1691), ibid..
III. 797, 1853. Cayhttga.— Guy Park conf. (1775),
ibid., VIII, 534, 1857. Oaynga.— La Tour, map,
1779 (misprint). Oayoga*. —Phelps deed (1788)
in Am. St. Pap., iv, 210, 1832. Oayonges.—
Penhallow (1726) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., i,
41. 1824. Cayoogoer— Conestoga treaty (1721) in
Proud, Penn., ii, 132, 1798. Oayougas.— Hun-
ter (1714) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, V, 384, 1855.
Cayougea.- Doc. of 1684, ibid., in, 347, 1858. Cay-
ouguea.— Doc. of 1688, ibid., 548. Oayounges.— Tel-
ler (1698), ibid., iv, 352, 1854. Cayowgea.- Bello-
mont (1698). ibid., 369. Cayuaga.- Doc. of 1792 in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ist s., i, 285, 1806. Oayugas.—
Doc. of 1676 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiii, 500,
1881. Cayiiges.- Albany conf. (1737), ibid., vi,
103, 1855. Oayuker*. —Barton, New Views, app.,
7. 1798. Cayunga«.— Vetch (1719) in N. Y. Dofc.
Col. Hist., V, 531, 1855. Chingaa.— Albany conf.
(1751), ibid., vi, 719, 1855 (misprint). Ohiugaa.—
Dwight and Partridge (1754) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 1st 8., V, 120, 1816. Ohuijugen.— Dongan
(1688) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 532, 1853. Chyu-
gaa.— Vaillant (1688), ibid., 527. Ooiejues.— Leis-
ler (1690), ibid., 732. Cojage*. —Maryland treaty
(1682), ibid., 321. Cojogea.— Goldthwait (1766) in
Mass. HLst. Soc. Coll., Ist s., X, 121, 1809. Oouiou-
ga«.— Albany conf. (1746) in N. Y. Doc. Col. ffist.,
VI, 317, 1855. Ooyougera.— Jamison (1697), ibid.,
IV, 294, 1854. Ooyouges.— Doc. ca. 1700 in Hist.
Mag., 2d s.. I, 300, 1867. Ouiukguos.— Drake, Bk.
Inds. , V, 4, 1848. Ouyahuga.— Iroquois deed ( 1789)
in Am. St. Pap., iv, 211, 1832. Gaoheoi.— Proud,
Penn., ii, 295, 1798. Oaohoi.— Map of 1616 In
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., I, 1856. Oaohoot.— Map,
m. 1614, ibid. Gachpa*.— Loskiel, Miss. Unft.
Breth., pt. 3, 16, 1794. Gaiuckera.— Weiser (1736)
quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 332, 1854.
Gajxika.— Zeisberger (1750) quoted by Conover,
Kanadaga -and Geneva MS., B. A. E. (German
form). Giguquas. — Barton, New Views, app., 7,
1798. Gakaoi.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 126,
224
CAYUSE
[ B. A. E.
1816. Ga-u'-gweh.— Morgan, League Iroq., 159,
1851. Gayuga.— Pyrlaeus {ca. 1750) quoted m Am.
Antiq., IV, 75, 1881. Gogouina.— Chauvignerie
(1736) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii 555,
1853. Goiogouens.— Jes. Rel. for 1670, 75, 1858.
Goiogouioronons.— Courcelles {ca. 1670) in Margry,
D^c, I, 178, 1875. Gojogoiien.— Jes. Rel. for 1671,
3, 1858. Gooiogouen.— Lotter, map, ca. 1770. Go-
yagouins.— Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am.,
Ill, 3, 1753. Goyogant.— La Hontan (1703) quoted
by Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 313, 1816. Goyogo-
ant.— La Hontan, New Voy., i, map, 1703. Ooyo-
goin.— Pouehot (1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x,
694. 1858. Goyogouans.— La Hontan, New Voy.,
I, 39, 1703. Goyogoucns.— Louis XIV (1699) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hiat., IX, 698, 1855. Goyogoiiin.—
Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am., in, 27,
1753. Goyoguans.— I^ Hontan, New Voy., i, 231,
1703. Goyoguen.— Bellin.map, 1755. Goyoguin.—
Jes. Rel., Ill, index, 1858. Goyoguoain.— Denon-
ville (16X5) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 282, 1855.
Go-yo-gwS"''.— Hewitt, MS. Mohawk vocab.,'
B. A. E.. 1882 (Mohawk name). Guigouina.—
Jefiferys, Fr. Dom., pt. 1, 117, 1761. Gwaugueh.—
Morgan, I^eague Iroq., map, 1851. Gwe-u-gweh-o-
no'.— Ibid., 51 ('people of the mucky land':
own name). Hono8ugaaxtu-w£ne.— Gatschet,
Seneca MS., B. A. E., 1882 ('big pipes': Seneca
ceremonial name). Kan^wa. — Gatschet, Shaw-
nee MS., B. A. E., 1879 (Shawnee name). ^Ka-
yowgaws.— Homann Heirs' map, 1756. Kayugue-
onon.— Gatschet, Seneca MS., B. A. E., 1882 (Sen-
eca name). Kei-u-gue».— Dudley (1721) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., viil, 244, 1819. Ko-'se-a-
^c'-nyon.— Hewitt, Cayuga MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1884 (another Cayuga name). Ko-yo-konk-
ha-ka.— Hewitt, Mohawk MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1882 (a Mohawk name). Kuenyugu-haka.— Gat-
schet, Tuscarora MS., B. A. E., 1882 (Tuscarora
name). Kuyuku-haga.— Gatschet, Mohawk MS.,
B. A. E., 1879 (Monawk name). Oiogoen.— Jes.
Rel. for 1656, 20, 1858. Oiogoenhronnons.— Ibid., 29.
Oiogouan.— Jes. Rel. for 1657, 15, 1858. Oiogou-
anroxmon. — Ibid. Oiogouen. — La Salle (1679) in
Margry, D6c., i, 504, 1875. Oiogouenronnon.— -Jes.
Rel. for 1657, 18, 1858. Oiogouin.— La Barre (1683)
in Margrv, D6c., ii, 330, 1877. Oiougovenea.— Bar-
cia, Ensayo, 225, 1723. Oiongoveres.— Ibid., 220.
Onionenhroxmons.— Jes. Rel. for 1653 (misprint).
Oniouenhronon.— Jes. Rel. for 1640, 35, 1858 (mis-
Erint). Orongouena.— Hennepin, Cont. of New
iLsc., 93, 1698. Ouioenrhonona.— Jes. Rel. for 1635,
34, 1858. Ouioucnronnons.— Jes. Rel. for 1647, 46,
1858. Oyogouins.— LaBarre (1683) in Margry, D6c.,
II, 332, 1877. Petuneurt.— Greenhalgh (1677) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iii, 252, 1853 (French name).
Queyugwe.— Macauley, N. Y., ii, 176, 1829.
Queyugwehaughga.— Ibid., 185. Quingoes.— Cour-
sey (1682) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.j xiii, 658, 1881
(misprint), auiquoga*.— Stone, Life of Brant, I,
401, 1864. ftuiuquuh*.— Edwards (1751) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., X, 146, 1809. Sanonawanto-
wane.— Gatschet in Am. Antiq., iv, 75, 1881.
Bhoneanawetowah.— Macauley, N. Y.,ii, 186, 1829.
Bhononowendot.— Ibid. B'ho-ti-non-ni-wan-td'-ni.—
Hewitt, from Tuscarora informant, 1886 ('they
are great pipes * : council name ) . So-nus'-ho-gwa-
to-war.— Morgan, League Iroq., 423, 1851 ('great
pipe': council name). Boon-noo-daugh-we-no-
wenda.— Macauley. N. Y., ii, 185, 1829.
CayuBe. A Waiilatpuan tribe formerly
occupying the territory about the heads,
of Waliawalla, Umatilla, and Grande
Ronde rs. and from the Blue mts. to Des-
chutes r. in Washington and Oregon.
The tribe has always been closely asso-
ciated with the neighboring Nez Percys
and Waliawalla, and waa regarded by the
early explorers and writers as belonging
to the same stock. So far as the avail-
able evidence ^oes, however, they must
be considered linguistically independent.
The Cayuse have always been noted for
their bravery, and owing largely to their
constant struggles with the Snake and
other tribes, have been numerically weak.
According to Gibbs there were few pure-
blood Cayuse left in 1851, intermar-
riage, particularly with the Nez Percys,
having been so prevalent that even the
language was falling into disuse. In 1855
the Cayuse joined in the treaty by which
the Umatilla res. was formed, and since
that time have resided within its limits.
Their number is officially reported as
404 in 1904; but this figure is misleading,
fpAUU ^HQ^EWAV^ ChUFF'i
as careful inquiry in 1902 failed to dis-
cover asingle one of pure blood on the res-
ervation and the language is practically ex-
tinct. The tribe acquired wide notoriety
in the earlv days of the white settlement
of the territory. In 1838 a mission was
established among the Cayuse by Marcus
Whitman at the site of the present town
of Whitman, Waliawalla co.. Wash. In
1847 smallpox carried off a large part of
the tribe. The Cayuse, believing the
missionaries to be the cause, attacked
them, murdered Whitman and a num-
ber of others, and destroyed the mission.
Owing to the confusion in the early ac-
counts it is difficult to differentiate the
Cayuse from the Nez Percys and Walia-
walla, but there is no reason to suppose
that in habits and customs they differed
markedly from those tribes. (l. f.)
Oaaguas.— Palmer, Trav. Rocky Mta., 53, 1852.
OiOUoux.— Hale, Ethnog. and Philol., 214, 1846.
Oiyoiiiwa.— Roes, Advent., 127, 1849. OayooM.—
BULL. 30]
CAYUSE — CELTS
225
Scouler in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Loud., i, 237,
1848. Oayouies.— Wyeth (1848) in Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, i, 221, 1851. Oayoux.— Grant in Jour.
Roy. Geojf. Soc., 211, 1861. Oayu».— Latham
in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 74, 1856. Cayuie.—
Parker, Jour., 131, 1840. Oonguses.— Cain in Ind.
Aff. Rep. 18.=V5, 193, 1856. OuyuM.— Stevens, Life of
1. 1. Stevens, ii, 36, 1901. Oyu«e.— Brown in Proc.
Roy. Geog. Soc, 90, 1867. Hai'luntchi.— Gatscliet,
Mollalla MS., 27, B. A. E. (Molalla name).
Haini. — Whitman in Mowrv, Marcus Whitman,
272, 1901. Kagoute.— Dunn, Oregon. 218, 1845. Kai-
jou».—Smet, Letters, 230, 1843. Kayouse.— Town-
send, Narr., 246, 1839. Kayul.— Coke, Ride over
Rocky Mts., 3a5, 1^52. Kayuaes.— Smet, Letters,
220, 1843. KayuxM.— Coke, op. cit., 282. Key-
utet.— White in Ind. Aff. Rep., 450, 1843. Kieoux.—
Meek in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76. 30th Cong. 1st .sess.. 10.
1848. Kinse.— Lee and Frost, Oregon. 163. 1844.
XiooM.— Palmer, Trav. Rocky Mt**.. 53, note. 1852.
Kiuses.— Wilkes, Hist. Oregon, 92, 1845. Kiwaw. —
Palmer, Trav. Rocky Mts., 53, note, ia'>2. Ki-
yuaa.— Wilkes, Hist. Oregon, 44, 1>^5. Kye-use.—
Kane, Wand, of an Artist, 280, 1859. Kyoose.—
Lord, Natur. in Brit. Col., 246, 1866. Hes Perce
Kayuaes.— Smet, Oregon Miss., 104, 1847. Rav-
ouse.— Gairdner (1835) in Jour. Geog. Soc. Loud..
XI, 257. 1841 (misprint). Bkiuies.— Wyeth. Cor-
resp. and Jour., 142, 1899. Skynses.— Irving,
Bonneville's Advent., 300, 1850. Bkyuse.— Farn-
. ham, Trav. W. Prairies, 81. 1843. Waiilatpu.—
Hale, Ethnog.and Philol.. 214, 1H46. Wailatpu.—
Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 416. 1855. Wai'lit-
ma.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 744, 18%
(Yakima name.) WaiWtpu.— Ibid, (own name),
waillatpua.— Armstrong, Oregon, 112, 1857. Wait-
Ut-pu.— Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 252, 1854. Wau-
lapta.— Dart in Ind. Aff. Rep., 476, 1851. Wau-
latpaa.— Ibid.. 216. Waulatpua.— Lane (18.50) in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii. 632, 1853. Wi'alit-
pfim. -Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.. 744. 1896
[another Yakima name). WiUetpos. — Lewis and
Clark, Exped., ii, 309. 1814. Wy-eilat— Lord,
Natur. in Brit. Col.. 245. 1866. Yeletpo.— Lewis
and Clark, Exped., ii,47l, 1814.
Caynse. An Indian pony ; from the name
of a Waiilatpuan tribe. The horses, after
the Indians had come into contact with
the whites, were bred by the Cayuse, and
from a merely local use the word has
attained an extended currency in the
N. w. Pacific states. (a. f. c.)
Casazhita (said to mean 'bad arrow-
points/ and so, perhaps, from kaza 'to
pick to pieces,' shicha M)ad'; but arrow-
point is wW^hin ) . A Dakota division, under
chief Shonka, or Dog; probably a part of
the Teton, or perhaps the same as Broken
Arrows and Wannawega.
Oa-sa-ahe«-U.--Catlin, N. A. Inds., i, 233, 1844.
Casopo. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected witn Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Gal.— Tavlor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
CeboUeta (Span.: 'tender onion'). A
place on Pojuate r., in the n. e. comer
of Valencia co., N. Mex., at which, in
1746, a temporary settlement of 400 or
500 Navahowas made by Father Juan M.
Menchero. A mission was established
there in 1749, but in the following year
the Navaho grew tired of sedentary life,
and Cebolleta, together with Encinal,
which was established at the same time,
was abandoned. In 1804 a request from
the Navaho to resettle at Cel)olleta was
refused by the Spanish authorities. It is
now a white Mexican town. Cebolleta
mtn. and the Cel)olleta land grant take
their name from the settlement.
(f. w. h. )
Oeballeta.— Hughes, Doniphan's Exped., 126, 1848.
Cebellitita.— Parke, map New Mexico, 1851. Oe-
boleta.— Hughe-s Doniphan's Exped., map, 1848.
CebolleU.— Ibid., 146. Cebolletta.— Buschmann,
Neu-Mexico, 247, 1868 (misquoting Abert). Oevol-
leU,— Brevoort, New Mexico, 22, 1874. Cevolleto.—
Domenech, Deserts of N. A., ii, 7, 1860. Oibaleta.—
Buschmann, Neu-Mexico, 247, 18&8. Gibaletta.—
Ibid., 247. Oiboletta.— Am. Ethnol. Soc. Trans.,
I I, map, 1848. Oibolleta.— Abert iif^mory, Recon-
noissance, 468,1848. OilfoUetta.— Ibid., 465; John-
ston, ibid., .'V89. BeboyeU.— U. 8. Land Off. map,
1903. SevolleU.— Cortez (1799) in Pac. R. R. Rep.,
III, pt. 3, 119, 1K56. Sibolletta.— Folsom, Mexico,
map, 1842.
Ceca. Mentioned by Oilate (Doc. In^d.,
XVI, 114, 1871) as a pueblo of the Jemez in
New Mexico in 1598. The name can not
be identified with the present native name
of any ruined settlement in the vicinity.
Leeca. — Ofiate, op. cit., 102.
Celts. Ungrooveil axes or hatchets of
stone, metal, or other hard material.
It is uncertain whether the name is de-
HEMATiTE Celt; w. va.
(about i-s)
Shout, Thick Celt; Ala.
(1-4)
rived from the Latin celtis, * chisel,' to
which the implement bears some resem-
blance, or from the Welsh celli, *a flint
stone.' The celts range in weight from
less than half an ounce to more than 20
IK)und8, while the diversity of form is
very great. Their distribution is more
general than that of the grooved ax. The
BuU. 31
15
226
CEMENTS CEREMONY
[b. a. e.
Erimary purjwse was probably that of a
atchet, but in one shape or another they
gerved as adzes, .chisels, scrapers, skin-
ning knives, meat cutters, and weapons.
Many have the surface roughened 'by
pecking at the top, which was inserted in
a cavity cut in a wooden-club and secured
with gum or glue; in others, this rough-
ening was around the middle, to give a
firmer grip to a withe handle; still others,
wrapped p^hai>s in a piece of buckskin
or some such substance to prevent slij)-
ping, were held in the hand. Some sj)eci-
mens were set in the end of a short piece
of bone or antler, wliich, in turn, acting
as a buffer, was attached to a handle of
wood in the fashion of a hatchet, an adz,
or a plane. The smallest specimens, es-
pecially those made of hematite, which
usually have the scraper- form edge, were
similarly set in the end of a longer piece
of bone or antler, and used as knives or
scrapers. Celts, in their various patterns,
were among the most imix)rtant imple-
ments known to primitive man.
Celts made of flint, jasper, and other
brittle stone are 8hape<l mainly by fiak-
ing. In most, the edge is more or less
sharpened by grinding, and sometimes the
entire implement is partially smoothed
in the same way. They are common
along the Atlantic coast, where argillite
and rh^olite are easily procured; and the
same is true of the Kanawha valley,
where the black flint outcrops so abun-
dantly. Along the Mississippi r., in Ar-
kansas and Mississippi, are found numer-
ous si>ecimens which have been chipped
from yellow jasper and then ground until
the angles formed by the facets are nearly
obliterated and the lower part of the
blade attains a high degree of polish.
These are mostly small, and approach
more closely the European celts with
rectangular section than any others found
in America. They are sometimes classed
with chisels. See Adzes^ AreSy Chisels,
Copper, Hatchets, Stoiie'imrk, Tomahatrks.
Celts are described or briefly referred
to and illustrated in numerous* works on
archeologic subjects. Among these are
Abbott, Prim. Indus., 1881; Fowke (1)
Archwol. Hist. Ohio, 1902, (2) in 18th
Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Holmes in 15th Rep.
B. A. E., 1897; Jones, Antiq. So. Inds.,
1873; Moore, various memoirs in Jour.
Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1894-1905; Moore-
head, Prehist. Impls., 1900; Rau in Smith-
son. Cont., XXII, 1876; Thruston, Antiq.
Tenn., 1897. («. f. w. h. h.)
Cements. — ^The Indians used cements of
animal, vegetal, and mineral origin, and
sometimes combined two of these or added
mineral substances for coloring. Animal
cement w^as obtained by the Yokuts of
California by boiling the joints of various
animals and combining the product with
pitch (Powers, Tribes of CaL, 373, 1877).
The Hupa boiled the gland of the lower
jaw and nose of the sturgeon and dried
the products in balls (Ray in Smithson.
Rep., 229, 1886). Capt. John Smith states
that with sinew of deer and the tops
of deer horns boiled to a jelly the Vir-
ginia Indians made glue that would
not dissolve in cold water. The Plains
tribes boiled the skin of the head of ani-
mals until it was softened into glue,
which they dried in masses on sticks.
Such glue-sticks formed a part of the
equipment of the bow-and-arrow maker,
and the horn arrow-straighteners of the
S. W. tril)es are often filled with resin.
Sometimes one end of the hearth of the
fire-drill bears a mass of resin, as a con-
venient wav to carry this sutetance, which
may readily be melted at the fire and
applied to various uses. Wax and albu-
men from eggs had a limited use, and the
Eskimo used blood mixed with soot.
The chief use of animal cement was in the
manufacture of bows and arrows, and,
among the Plains tribes, in joining the
stems of certain kinds of pipes. The
only mineral cement known to the tribes
was bitumen, which was used by the In-
dians of 8. Arizona and California. V^-
etal cements were numerous, and chief
among these was the exudation from con-
iferous trees, employed by northern tribes
for pitching the seams of bark canoes,
baskets, etc. ; by S. W. tribes for render-
ing basketry, water vessels, and the like
water tight; by the Hopi for varnishing
pottery, and by many tribes for mending,
joining, inlaying, eU\ The tribes of the
S. W. made a strong cement of the gum
resin of the mesquite and the gum of the
greasewood, which was used to set the
heads of arrows and for many other pur-
poses. The Pima made a strong cement
from a gum of parasitic origin on the
Conllea tridentata. The Indians of Men-
docino CO., Cal., made a glue from the
bulb of the soap plant ( ChlorogcUum pom-
eridianum) for fastening feathers on ar-
rows, (w. H.)
Cenyowpreskel. A former vills^ of
either the Diegueilos or Luiseilos in the
neighborhood of San Luis Rey mission, s.
Cal.— TaylorinCal. Farmer, May 11, 1860.
Cepowig. A village in 1608, perhaps be-
longing to the Conestoga, located by Guss
in or near York co.. Pa. — Smith (1629),
Va., I, map, 1819.
Ceremonials. See Problematical objects.
Ceremony. A ceremony is the perform-
ance in a prescribed oraer of a series of
formal acts often constituting a drama
which has an ultimate object. Ceremo-
nies spring from many diverse tenden-
cies, which are the expression of some
phase of religious emotion. Many fea-
tures of the culture of the North American
BOLL. 30 J
CEREMONY
227
Indians are resarded as ceremonies, such
as the rites which pertain to birth, pu-
berty, marriage, death, war, etc., but in
the arbitrarily restricted sense in which
the term is here used a ceremony is un-
derstood to be a rehgious performance
of at least one day's duration. These
ceremonies generally refer to one or
the other of the solstices, to the germi-
nation or ripening of a crop, or to the
most important food supply. There are
ceremonies of less importance that are
connected with the practices of medicine-
men or are the property of cult societies.
Ceremonies may be divided into those in
which the whole tribe participates and
those which are the exclusive property of
a society, generally a secret one, or of a
group of men of special rank, such &n
chiefs or medicine-men, or of an individ-
ual. Practically all ceremonies of ex-
tended duration contain many rites in
common. An examination of these rites,
as they are successively performed, reveals
the fact that they follow one another in
prescribed order, as do the events or epi-
sodes of the ritual.
The ritual, or that part of the cere-
mony which is spoken or sung, predom-
inates among some tribes, as the rawnee;
amonff others, as the Hopi, it is greatly
subordinated to the drama.
In enumerating the rites of the cere-
monies it may be noted, first, that they
may be divided into secret and public,
the secret rites being proprietary, and, a.s
a rule, occupying the major part of the
time of the ceremony. The rites of the
public performance may be considered as
the actual play or drama. The secret
rites are almost invariablv performed
in a specially constructed lodge, room,
or chamber, into which none but the
priests or initiated may enter, and which
IS generally indicatecl in such a man-
ner that the public may not mistake
it. Early in point of time in the secret
rites is the procession of the priests for
objects or raw material to be used in
the preparation of an altar, which may
be either secret or public, or to be
used for paraphernalia or otherwise in
the public performance. This proces-
sion of priests is generally symbolic,
and the uninitiated may not accompany
them. The remaining' secret perform-
ances include such rites as smoking,
which may be either fraternal ordirect
offerings in the nature of a sacrifice to the
gods; thurification, similar in origin to
the rite of smoking, in which the smoke
of some sweet-smelling herb is offered
direi!t to the deity, or the priest bathes
his body, or some object of a special cere-
monial nature, in the smoke of the in-
cense; sweat-lodge purification; a cere-
monial feast, preceded or followed by a
sacrifice of food; the offering of prayers'
which may he in the form of a direct
appeal to the gods or through the instru-
mentality of material prayer offerings,
upon which, or into which, the prayer
has Ix^en breathed; and the manufacture
or redecoration of ceremonial masks and
garments to l)e worn during the publi(!
performance, either by the priests exclu-
sively or by all those taking part in the
ceremony.
Occupying in point of time a perio<i
l)etween the exclusively secret perform-
ances and the public presentation of the
drama may Ix^ certain semi-public per-
formances, which take place m the open
but which are undertaken by priests ex-
clusively. Such is the preparation of
the site of the public performance, or the
erection of a l)ower or lodge within which
it is to take place. Either within this
inclosnre, or lodge, or within the secret
lodge of preparation, an altar may he
erected. This is especially the case with
the ceremonies of the Pueblos and of the
Plains tribes (see Altar^t), among which
it is always symbolic, and its explana-
tion must generally be sought in the
ritual. It often symbolizes, as a whole,
the earth or the heavens, or some god or
the home of a god or the gods. The
most i)rominent feature of the altar is a
l)alladium, which may consist of a buffalo
skull, an ear of corn, a fiint knife, or some
other object of sup|K)sed efficacious na-
ture, within which is supposed to reside
or which is typical or symbolic of the
spirit or deity. On the altar, also, is gen-
erally found a recognition in one form
or another of the gods of the four or six
world -(|uarters, of the rainbow, of the
lightning, of vegetation, etc. Falling
within this semi-public period is often a
contest, generally a foot race, the winner
being favored by the gods or receiving
some tangible object which i>ossesses
magic j)otency.
The public performance is usually
ushered in by a stately procession of
priests, the singing of traditional songs,
rites of smoking, sacrifice of food, an(l
offerings of prayer. The most prominent
feature is the dance, which, as a rule, is of
a dignified and stately nature, the dancers
being appropriately costumed and other-
wise adorned. The costume worn in pub-
lic is often supplemented with paint upon
the body or by masks over the face. The
dancer, thus arrayed, generally represents
a minor deity, or he places himself, by
virtue of the character of his costume, in
an attitude of defiance to the deity and
thus opposes his magic jK)wer to that of
the supernatural. Following the dance,
which may vary in duration from a few
minutes to several days, is generally a
ceremonial removal of the costume,
228
CEREMONY
[ B. A. E.
whereuiwn the dancers undergo a purifi-
cation rite, often in the form of a power-
ful emetic. This may be followed by an
act of self-inflicted torture, which, how-
ever, often forms an intrinsic part' of the
public x)erformance. During the entire
ceremony, as a rule, certain tabus are en-
forced, tne most common l^eing a prohi-
bition of the presence of women during
menstruation.
The time of the performance of cere-
monies varies. 8ome are held annually,
or biennial! V, at stated j>eriode; such are
the solstitial or seasonal ceremonies, for
which no special provision is necessarily
made. Some are held during certain sea-
sons within the year, but are dependent
on the will of an individual who may have
pledged or taken a vow to perform the
ceremony. Others are held at any season,
whenever occasion may demand; such
are the ceremonies of the medicine-men.
Inasnuich as ceremonies form intrinsic
features and may l)e regarded as only
phases of culture, their special character
depends on the state of culture of the
people by which they are performed;
hence there are at least as many kinds of
ceremonies as there are phases of cul-
ture in North America. A few charac-
teristic ceremonies may be considered
for some of the better-defined areas:
Among the Plains tril>e8 the most spec-
tacular ceremony is the Sun dance, q. v.
This varied from an annual performance,
as among the Ponca and some other
8iouan tribes, to a presentation only as
the direct result of a vow, as among the
Cheyenne, Arapaho, and Siksika. In
the Sun dance of all tribes are found
certain common features, such as the
secret tipi or tipis of preparation; the
manufacture of objects to be used on the
public altar; the procession of priests in
search of an object generally symbolic of
spying out the world; the ceremonial
erection of the great lodge, of which the
center pole is the most prominent feature;
the erection of the altar; and the charac-
teristic dance lasting from 1 to 4 days.
During the public performance the
dancers are symbolically painted and
otherwise so adorned that their evolu-
tions are supposed to lead to a distinct
result — the production of rain. While
the Sun dance varies from tribe to tribe,
not only in its symbolism but also in
many important details, itseems primarily
to have been a rain ceremony, and its
ritual generally recounts the origin or the
rebirth of mankind. The second group
of ceremonies are those performed by
cult societies, generally four or more in
number. Each society has its special
esoteric songs, its ow^n paraphernalia,
and often distinct gradations in rank.
The membership is generally exclusively
male, although a limited number of
maidens are admitted into the societies
of the Cheyenne, while the Arapaho
have a society which belongs exclusively
to the women, of which there are several
gradations of rank. The third group
comprises the performances of cult socie-
ties in which the warrior element does
not predominate; these are often spoken
of as dances, although they are, strictly
speaking, ceremonies. Among the best
known of these are the Buffalo, the
Bear, and the Elk. The basis is usu-
ally the acquisition and perpetuation
of ma^ic power which, primarily,
was derived from the animal after which
the society takes its name and from
which it is supposed to have originated.
A fourth group comprises those of the
medicine-men, and are either cere-
monies in which one or more medicfne-
men perform for the benefit of the sick,
or, more often, in which all the medicine-
men of the tribe join in a performance
to make public demonstration of magic
power through sleight-of-hand. The
last group of Plains ceremonies includes
those connected with the planting and
reaping of the maize, or the first killing
of game in the hunting season, or the
first coming of the fish — all, it may he
noted, connected with the gift of food
for the sustenance of life.
The Pueblo tribes of the S. W. are
especially noted for their extended cere-
monies, which among the Hopi number
no fewer than 13, each of 9 days' dura-
tion. The secret rites are almost always
held in an underground chamber called
a kiva (q. v.), or estufa, in which, in ad-
dition to the performances, an elaborate
ailtar is erected. During the initiation of
candidates into the brotherhood of these
societies, dry-paintings (q. v. ) are laid on
the floor of tlie kiva in front of the altar.
The symbolism both of these and of the
altar itself is generally very elaborate,
but with a strong predominance of sym-
bols in which reference is made to rain
clouds. During certain of these ceremo-
nies masked dancers appear, the symbol-
ism of the mask being distinctive. The
most notable of the Hopi are: The Soyal,
a winter solstice ceremony; the Powamu,
a February bean-planting ceremony; a
New Fire ceremony, in early spring; the
Niman, or the departure of the masked
personages, a ceremony of early summer;
the Snake- Antelope, of the summer, alter-
nating each year with that of the Flute
ceremonies; those of the women in the
autumn comprising the La^on, the Oaqol,
and the Marau. In addition to these
the Hopi have a large number of minor
ones, generally of one day's duration.
Such are the liatcina or masked dances,
and various others of a social nocture
BDLL. 30]
OEUOOAHUI CERHO CABEZON
229
Among the non-Pueblo tribes of the
S. W., especially among the Navaho
and Apache, the extended ceremonies
are almost entirely the property of the
medicine-men, ani nmst be regarded as
medicine dances. Many of these are of
an elaborate and complicated nature, but
all are designed for the restoration of the
sick. In these ceremonies masks are
often worn and complicated and elab-
orate dry-pictures are made, both these
features probably having been borrowed
from the Pueblo tribes.
In California ceremonies of extended
duration are not found; they partake
rather of the nature of tribal mourning,
• sometimesspoken of as dances of the dead,
or initiation rites into cult societies.
These, generally lasting- but a single day,
are marked by the lack of symbolism,
by the almost total want of fetishes
such as abound on the altars of the
Pueblos, and by the marked absence
of rituals such as are found among cer-
tain Plains tribes. The costume of the
dancers is generally restricted to profuse
feather ornaments. In nearly all cere-
monies of this region there is afforded
an opportunity for the display of individ-
ual wealth.
Of the ceremonies of the tribes of the
Great Basin, but little is known. The
eastern Shoshonean tribes, such as the
Shoshoni and the Ute, perform the Sun
dance, presumably borrowed from the
tribes of the Plains.
On the N. Pacific coast, extending from
Columbia r. to s. Alaska, ceremonies of
from 1 to 4 days' duration abound. These
are performances of cult societies, gen-
erally secret, or of chiefs or lesser individ-
uals who make it an opportunity to display
personal wealth. In the ceremonies of
the cult societies masks are worn. Those
of the Kwakiutl of this region are held
in winter, at which time the cult socie-
ties replac»e the gentile organization
which prevails in summer. Membership
into tlie society is acquired by marriage
or through war. The object of the winter
ceremony is '*to bring back the youth
who is supposed to stay with the sui)er-
natural being who is the protector of his
society, and then, when he has returned
in a state of ecstasy, to exorcise the
spirit which possesses him and to re-
store him from his holy madness. These
objects are attained by songs and dances. ' '
During the performance of these cere-
monies special paraphernalia are worn in
which the mask, substantially made of
wood, predominates, the remainder con-
sisting lar^ly of rings of cedar bark (see
Bark) which constitute the badges of
the ceremony. The tribes to the n. have
societies and winter ceremonies similar
to those of the Kwakiutl, from whom
they are probably mainly derived.
Among the Eskimo extended ceremo-
nies, such as prevail over a large part of
North America, are not found. They
are rather to be characterized as dances
or festivals. These are generally held in
winter and are of short duration. The
most important of these are the Feasts
to the Dead; others among the Alaskan
Eskimo are the Asking festival, the Blad-
der feast, and the performances of the
medicine-men. In some of the festivals
wooden masks, representing supernatural
or superhuman beings, are worn.
As stated at the outset the root of cere-
monies may be discovered only by taking
into consideration universal human tend-
encies which develop along certain lines
according to historic or geographic en-
vironment. It may therefore be noted
that the need for them among the
Indians of North America varied in
accordance with the character of their
life. Thus it is found that in those tribes
or in those areas extende<i forms alM)und
where there exists a sessile population or
a strong form of tribal government.
Hence the greatest number of extt^ided
and complicated ceremonies are formeil
among the Pueblt) people of the S. W.
and in the village communities of the
N. Pacific coast. Second only in im-
portance to the ceremonies of these
two areas are those which are found
among the tribes of the Plains among
whicth ceremonies abound, in which the
strongest system of government is found.
As a ceremony of any extended duration
makes great demands upon the tribe, and
presupposes law and order, highly de-
veloped and extended ones are not |H>ssi-
ble among the Eskimo or the tribes of
California. See Dance^ Religion. («. a. d.)
Cerocahni. A settlement of the Temoris
branch of the Guazapar in lat. 27° 25'',
long. 108° 2.V, w. (^hihuahua, Mexico. —
0roz(!O y Berra, Geog., 824, map, 18(>4.
Cerrito (Span.: 'little mountain'). A
settlement, probably of the Pima, on the
Pima and Maricopa res., Gila r., s. Ariz.;
pop. 258 in 1860. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
June 19, 18«8.
Cerritos. Apparently a former Yuma
rancheria on the s. bank of Gila r.,
about lOj m. above it^ mouth; visited by
Anza and Font in 1 775.
Los Cerritos.— Anza and Font (juoted by Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mcx., 3iy2, 1889.
Cerro Cabezon (Span.: 'big-head hill,'
so named from its shape; also El Cabe-
zon, or Cavezon). A prominent butte
about 40 m. n. e. of the summit of Mt
Taylor, or Mt San Mateo, N. Mex.,
which figures in Navaho tradrtion (Mat-
230
CEBRO CHATO CHACHOKWITH
[B. A. B.
thews, Navaho Leg., 116, 1897). From
some points the rock is visible 50 m.
away. Cortez (Pac. R. R. Rep., in, pt.
3, 119, 1856) mentioned it as a Navano
settlement in 1799. (p. w. h.)
Cerro Chato (Span.: 'flat-topped hill').
Mentioned by Cortez in 1799 (Pac. R. R.
Rep., Ill, pt. 3, 119, 1856) as a Navaho
settlement, but it is probably only a geo-
graphic name.
Cerro Chiqnito (Span.: 'little moun-
tain ' ) . A village, probably of the Pima,
on the Pima and Maricopa res., Gila r., s.
Ariz.; pop. 232 in I860.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, June 19, 1863.
Cexeninnth. A tribe or division about
Queen Charlotte sd., Brit. Col.; possibly
a Gyeksem gens of the Kwakiutl.
Cex-e-ni-nuth.— Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app..
1859. Ex e ni nuth.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v,
488, 1856 (mlsHpelt).
Chaahl ( Tdd^al ) . A former Haida town
on the N. w. coast of Moresby id.. Queen
Charlotte id.«i., Brit. Col. This seems to
have been the Kow-welth of John Work,
who assigned to it 35 houses with 561
inhabitants in 1836-41. Old people re-
call the names of 28 houses, but many
more are said to have existed before a
great fire which destroyed a large part
of the town. In later times the people
moved to New Gold Harbor, on the e. end
of Maude id., and thence into Skide-
gate.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 280, 1905.
Cha-atl.— Dawson, Q. Charlotte Ids., 168b, 1880.
Kaw-welth.— Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859
(probably the same: misprint from Work, 1836-41 ).
Kow-welth.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 489, 1855
(probably the same; from Work's table).
Chaahl (Tdd'al). A former Haida
town on the e. coa.«t of North id., Queen
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It was occu-
pied by a family of the same name who
afterward moved to Alaska and settled
at Howkan. — Swanton, Cont. Haida, 281,
1905.
Chaahl-lanas (Tdd^al Wnas, *Chaahl
town people'). A Haida family of the
Eagle clan, one of those which moved
to Alaska and constituted the Kaigani.
They are said to have branched off from
the Kaiahl-lanas, but derived their name
from the place on North id. where
their town stood before they moved to
Alaska. In the latter country they
owned the town of Howkan. There
are said to have been 4 subdivisions:
Stulnaas-hadai, I^nagukunhlin-hadai,
Skahene-hadai, and Hotagastlas-hadai. —
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 276, 1905.
Ts'iU U'na».— Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
26,1889.
Chabanakongkomiixi ('boundary fishing
place.' — Trumbull). A village of Pray-
ing Indians established about 1672 near
Dudley, Worcester co., Mass. In 1674 it
contained about 45 inhabitants. In later
times the Indians about Dudley were
known as the Pegan tribe and continued
to live there after the settlement of the
town. Ten of them were still on a reser-
vation in Dudley in 1793. They were
classed as Nipmuc. (j. mJ
Chabanakongkomoii.— <}ookin (1674) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll.. 1st 8., 1, 189-190, 1806. Ohaaagongum.—
Trumbull, Conn., i, 346, 1818. Ohaabonakoncko-
mok.— Eliot (1668) quoted by Trumbull, Ind.
Names Conn., 9, 1881. Ohobonakonkon.— Oookin
(1677) in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 467, 1836.
Chobone-Konhonom. — Ibid., 477. Chobonokono-
mum.— Ibid., 443. Pegans.— Drake, Bk. Inds., x,
1848.
Chabin (from (^e, 'mountain'). A
division of the Assmiboin. — Maximilian,
Trav., 194, 1843.
Oens det Montagnet.— Ibid.
Chacacants. A village, possibly Cad-
doan, formerly on Red r., at the mouth of
a N. affluent, in what is now Oklahoma. —
De risle, map (1707) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., Ill, 1851.
Ohacacantea. — Baudry des Lozi^res. Voyage 4 la
La., 242, 1802. Chaoakante.— De risle, map of La.
(1701?) in Winsor, Hist. Am., ii, 294, 1886.
Chacat Mentioned by Pike (Exped.,
3d map, 1810) as a Navaho settlement.
It is probably identical in name with that
of Chaco canyon, n. w; N. Mex.
Chachambitmanchal. An Atfalati band
formerly living 3 J m. n. of Forest Grove,
Washington co., Oreg.
Toha tohambit mantohal.— Gatechet, Atfalati MS.,
B. A. E., 1877.
Chaohanim. An Atfalati band formerly
living on Wapatoo I^ke prairie, Washing-
ton CO., Oreg.
Toha tohannim.— Oatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. £.,
1877.
Chaohat. A former village connected
with San Carlos mission, Cal., and said
to have been Esselen. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860.
Chaohaabnnkkakowok. A village of
Christian Indians in e. Massachusetts in
1684.— Eliot (1684) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., Ists., Ill, 185, 1794.
Ckackemewa. An Atfalati band for-
merly residing at Forest Grove, 6 m. from
Wapatoo lake, Yamhill co., Or^.
Toha-tohfai^a.— Gatschet, Atfalati M3.,B. A. E.,
1877.
Chaohif. An Atfalati band formerly
living on Wapatoo lake, Yamhill co., Oreg.
Tch'atohif.— Gatscbet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E.,1877.
Chaohimahiyiik (refers to a swamp
grass) . An Atfalati band formerlv living
between Wapatoo lake and Willamette
r., in Washington co., Oreg.
Toha tohiminahfnik.— Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B.
A. E., 1877.
Chaohimewa. A n Atfalati band formerlv
living on or near Wapatoo lake, Yamhill
CO., Oreg.
Toha tehmewa.— Oatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E.,
1877.
Chaohokwith (refers to a small shell).
An Atfalati band formerly living at a
place of the same name n. of Forest
Grove, in Washington co., Or^.
Toha tohokuith.— Oatachet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E..
1877.
BULL. 30]
CHACTOO CHAKCHTUMA
231
CliaGtoo. A body of Indianp, possibly
related to the Attacapa, mentioned in
1753 as living in Louisiana. In 18C)o they
were on Bayou Boeuf, about 10 ni. s. of
Bayou Rapide, toward Opelousa**, and
numbered 30 men. They were not
Choctaw, and in addition to their own
tongue they spoke the Mobil ian trade
language. (a. s. ci.)
Ohaoohoux.— Dumont, La., i, 134, 1753. Chactoos.—
Sibley, Hist. Sketches. 84, 1806. Chaetoos.— Scher-
merhorn in Mass. Hist. Sm-. Coll., 2d s., ii, 27,
1814. Chattoos.— Lewis and Clurk, Jour, 156, 1840.
Chafalote. An Apache tribe or band of
Sonora, Mexico, mentioned in connection
with the (Jileiios and Faraones by Orozco
y Berra (Geog., 59, 1864) and by Malte-
brun (Congr^'s Amer., ii, 37* 1877);
otherwise unknown.
Chagee. A former Cherokee settlement
near the mouth of Chatooga cr., a tribu-
tary of Tugaloo r., at or near the site of
the present Ft Madison, 'in the s. w. part
of Oconee co., n. w. S. C. It was destrf)yed
during the Revolutionary war. (.f. m. )
Chagindiieftei. An Atfalati band for-
merly living between Hillsboro and
Sauvies id., Washington co., Greg.
Tohagi'nduefte-i.— Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E.,
1877.
Chagu (* lungs'). A division of the
Yankton Sioux.
Band of the lights. — Culbertson in Smitlison.
Rep. 1850, 141, 1851. Ca^.— Dorsey in 15th Rep.
B. A. E., 217, 1897. Tcaxu.— Ibid.
Cliagiiate. A villajfe, probably belong-
ing to a division of a southern Caddoan
tribe, formerly situated in the region of
Washita r.. Ark. ; visited by Moscoso and
his troops in the summer of 1542. See
Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., ii, 193, 1850.
Chagunte. A former village, presum-
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Chaffyagohat A Kaiyuhkhotana village
near the headwaters of Anvik r., Alaska.
Tohagvagtohatohachat— Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann.
Voy., 6tn s., xxi, map, 1850.
Chahelim (helim = ' outdoors ' ) . A n A t-
falati band formerly settled in Chchelini
valley, 5 m. s. of Wapatoo lake, Yamhill
CO., Oreg.
Ohehalim.— Lyman in Orep. Hist. Soo. Qnar.. i.
.S23, 1900. Tcha helim.— Gat.«»chet, Atfalati MS..
B. A. E., 1877.
Chahiohic (che-cheuy a variety of mos-
quito; chiky or chikiy 'place of). A
Tarahumare rancheria near Palanquo,
Chihuahua, Mexico. — Lundioltz, inf*n,
1894.
Chahthulelpil. A body of Salish of the
old Victoria superintendencv, Brit. Col.;
pop. 104in 1881.— Can. Ind. Aff., 258, 1882.
Chaioolesaht (To'e^ktlisath, 'large-cut-
in-bay people'). A Nootka tribe on
Ououkinsh and Nasparte inlets, w. coast
of Vancouver id., numl)ering 105 in 1902.
Aeons is their princi|)al town.
Chaic-cles-aht—Can. Ind. Aff., 357, 1897. Chay-
kisaht— vSprout, Sav. Life, 308, 1868. Checklesit.—
Can. Ind. AtT., 158, 1901. Naapati.^Jacob in Jour.
Anthrop. Sot-. Ix>nd., xi. Feb., 1864. Kaapatle.—
Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 301, 1850. Kaspatta.—
Seonler (1.H46) in Jonr. Kthnol. Soo. Lond., i, 234,
1848, Nespods.— Grant in Jour. Rov. Geog. Soo..
293, 18'>7. To'e'k'Uisath.— Boas, 6th Rep. N. \V.
Tribes Can., 1890.
Chalk. A Kaviagmiut village on the x.
shore of Norton sd., Alaska.
Chaimut— Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. Po&s. in Ara., pt.
I, 73, 1847. Tohaimuth.— Zagoskin in Nonv. Ann.
Voy., ftth s., XXI, map, 1850.
Chaikikarachada ( ' those who call them-
selves the deer ' ). A Winnebagogens.
Cha'-ra.— Morgan. Anc. Soc. 157, 1877. Toa'i-ki'-
ka-ra'-tca-da.— Dorst'V in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 241,
1S97.
Chailkntkaitnh. A former Hupa village
on or near Trinitv r., Cal.
Chair-kut-kal-tuh.— f'owers in Cont. N. A.Ethnol,,
III. 73. 1H77.
Chainiki. A Karok village on the s.
bank of Klamath r. , N. Cal. , about midway
between the Trinitv and the Salmon.
Tshei-nik-kee.— (iibbs MS., B. A. E., 1852.
Chainrnk. A Kaviagmiut village at Pt
Clarence, Alaska. — 11th Census, Alaska,
162, 1893.
Chaizra. The Elk clan of the Ala-I^ng-
ya phratral group of the Hopi.
Tcaizra winwu.— Fe\vke.M in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
583, 1901 (/r^rh; irin»rM = *clan'). Tcai'-m-sa
wiin-wii.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 401, 1894.
Chak ( ' eagle * ). A name given by the
northern Tlingit to one of the two phra-
tries into which thev are divided.
Chethl'.— Dall. Alaska. 414, 1870. Teak!.— Swan-
ton, tield notes, B. A. E., 1904.
Ckakankni. A Molala band formerly
settled in the Cascade range, n. w. of
upper Klamath, lake, on the headwaters
of Rogue r., Oreg. In 1881 they were
rapidly becoming absorbed by the neigh-
boring tril>(»s and had practically given
up their own language for that of the
Klamath. (l. f. )
Tchakankni.— Gatsehet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii,
426, 1890. Tchakenikni.— Ibid. (Modoc name).
Chakawech. A Modoc camping place
near Yaneks, on Sprague r., Klamath
res., s. w. Oreg.
Tchakawetch.— (iatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii,
xxxi, IHW.
Chakckinma (Choctaw: saktchi 'craw-
fish,' hinmt 'red,' probably referring to a
elan totem). A tribe si>eaking a Choc-
taw-Chifkasaw dialect, formerly livinjj:
on Yazoo r, Miss., and, according to
Iberville (Margry, Dec, jv, 180, 1880),
between the Taposa ^>elow them and the
Outapoorlbitoiipaabove, in 1699. At that
time they were probably the most popu-
lous of the Yazoo tril)es, and spoke the
Chicka.^w language. They were an im-
portant tribe at the time' of De Soto's
expedition ( 1540-41 )and lived in a walle<l
town. During the 18th century they
were included in the Chickasaw confeder-
aev, and had the reputation of being war-
like. Adair (Hist. Am. Inds., 66, 352,
1775) mentions a tradition that they came
232
CHAKEIPI CHALAWAI
[b. a.]
to the E. side of the Mississippi with the
Choctaw and Chickasaw and settled on
the Tallahatchie, the lower part of which
was called by their name. Jefferys
(French Dom., i, 163, 1761) states that m
his time they occupied 50 huts on the
Yazoo r. (a. s. o. c. t.)
Caoohuinas.— Jefferys, Am. Atlas, 5, 1776. Ohac-
ohooma.— Romans, Fla., 315, 1775. Ohacohoumas.—
La Harpe (1721) in French, Hist. Coll. La., iii,
106, 1851. Chacchuxna*.— Lattr6, map of U. S.,
1784. Chaoci Cumas.— Boudinot, Star in the
West, 126, 1816. Chaooi Oumas.— McKenney and
Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 80, 1854. Chacehoumas.—
Jefferys, Am. Atlas, 7, 1776. Ohachachouxna.—
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 81, 1854.
Chaohoumaa.— La Harpe (1721) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., Ill, 110, 1851. Chachiunaa.— Hervas,
Idea dell' Universo, xvii. 90, 1784. Ohackchi-
oomaa.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 506, 1878.
Ohaoksihoomaa.— Ibid. Chaooumaa.— Tonti (1688)
in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 72, 1846. Chacoume.—
Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. Chacnhomaa.— Haw-
kins (1799), Sketch, 15, 1848. Chacaihoomaa.— Ro-
mans, Fla., 90, 1775. Ohaotohi-Oumas.— Du Pratz,
La., II, 226, 1758. Ohactiouinaa.— Jefferys, French
Dom., I, 163, 1761. Chaoxoumaa.— P6nicaut (1722)
in Margry, D6c., v, 575, 1883. Chaquesauma.— Iber-
ville (1699), ibid., iv, 180,1880. Ohiaohi-Oumos.—
Schermerhorn in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s. ii, 15,
1814. Ohocohuma.— Durant (1843) in Sen. Doc. 168,
28th Cong., 1st sess., 135, 1844. Choccomaws.—
Pickett, Hist. Ala., i, 134, 1851. Chokohoomah.—
Adair, Hist. Am. Ind., 66, 362, 1775. Choquiohou-
mans.— Iberville (1700) in Margry, D<5c., iv, 430,
1880. Chouchoumaa.— Tonti (1684), ibid., 1,604, 1875.
Craw-flah band.— Catlin, N. A. Inds., 589, 1860.
Ecrevisses rouges.— Du Pratz. La., n, 226, 1758.
Bed orayilah. -boudinot, Star in the West, 126, 1816.
Bed lobsters.- Jefferys, French Dom. Am., 163,
1761. Saqueohuma.— Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in
French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 162, 1850. Tchaoumas.-^
Martin, Hist. La., i. 280, 1827. Tohouchoumas.—
La Salle {ca. 1680) in Margry, D6c., ii, 198, 1877.
Chakeipi (TclCakeipi, *at the beaver
place'). An Atfalati band that lived
about 10 m. w. of Oregon City, Oreg., be-
fore the treaty of 1855.— Gatechet, Atfalati
MS., B. A. K, 1877.
Chakeletsiwish ( Klamath : ' running
with blood'). A small Shoshonean set-
tlement in Sprague River valley, Oreg.;
so named from a spring of reddish water.
TchaOtfle Tsiwish.— Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Eth-
nol., II, pt. II, xxxi, 1890.
Chakihlako. A Creek town near the
junction of Deep and Nortli forks of Ca-
nadian r., Ind. Ter.
Tchaxki'lako.— GaU»chet, Creek Migr. Leg., n, 186,
1888.
Chakkai. A Squawinish village com-
munity on the E. side of Howe sd., Brit.
Col.
Tcakqai.— Hill-Tont in Rep. Brit. A. A. S.. 474, 1900.
Ckakpahn (Hopi: 'speaker spring,' or
* speaking spring' ). A ruined pueblo on
the rim of Antelope mesa, overlooking
Jeditoh valley, in the Tusayan country,
N. E. Arizona.* It is regarded by the Hopi
as one of three "Kawaika" pueblos — the
others being Kawaika and Kokopki (?)-^
from which it may be assumed that it
was built and occupied by Keresan
people from New Mexico, the name
Kawaika being the Hopi designation of
the present Keresan pueblo of Laguna.
The ruin was first described and surveyed
in 1885 by V. Mindeleff, of the Bureau of
American Ethnology, and in 1893 James
Mooney of that Bureau was present dur-
ing the excavation by some Nayaho of its
main spring in which a sacrificial deposit
of pottery vessels was uncovered. In
f round-plan the ruin recalls those of the
Wo Grande pueblos, well represented in
the Payupki and Sikyatki ruins of Tusa-
yan, but the Chakpahu pottery, noted
for its excellence of texture and decora-
tion, has little in common with that of
Payupki, which was occupied within his-
toric time, while it resembles closely the
Sikyatki ware. This, coupled with the
fact that one of the neighboring ruined
Kawaika pueblos w as traditionally occu-
pied by Kokop clans, who lived also in
Sikyatki, would indicate a connection
between the Sikyatki and the Kawaika
people, although the former are reputed
to have come from Jemez. (j. w. f. )
Bat House.— Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 62,
1891. Chak-pahii.— Mooney in Am. Anthrop., vi,
284, 1893 (given as name of springs; transl. 'little
water'). Chapkaku.— Hough in Rep. Nat. Mus.
1901, 336,1903 (misprint). Kawaika,— Fewkes in
17th Rep. B. A. E., 590, 1898 (name of spring and
ruin; see Kawaika). To-alchin'di.— Mooney, op.
cit. (given as Navaho name of springs; same
meaning; mistake).
Chakatpaliii. An A tfalati band formerly
settled N. E. of Hillsboro, Washington
CO., Oreg.
Toha kutpaliu.— Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E.,
1877.
Chakwaina. The Black Earth Kachma
clan of the Hopi.
Tca'-kwai-na.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39,
1891. Toakwaina winwu.— Fewkes in 19th Rep.
B. A. E.,584, 1900 {ivimmt=' clan '). Toa'-kwai-na
^^iin-wii. —Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., Yll, 404, 1894.
Chakwayalham ('summer town'). A
former Wahkiakum town near I*iHar
rock, Columbia r. , Oreg.
Tcakwaya'l^am.- Boas, inf'n, 1905.
Chala. A tribe mentioned by H utchins
in 1764 as living on the St Lawrence in
connection with the Abnaki, Micmac,
and Malecite, and having 130 warriors.
Ohalaa.— Hutch ins (1764) quoted by Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, in, 553, 1853. Chataa.— Smith (1785),
ibid.
Ckalalmme. A Creek town of the 16th
century, 3 days* journey westward from
Chiaha, about the present Columbus, Ga.,
and 2 leagues from Satapo, probably
within the present limits of Alabama
( Vandera, 1567, in Smith, Col. Doc. Fla.,
I, 18, 1857). The termination hume may
be the Choctaw hiimay * red.' (a. s. g. )
Chalal. An Atfalati band formerly
settled near the outlet of Wapatoo lake,
Yamhill co., Oreg.
Toha lal.— Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E.. 1877.
Ckalawai. An Atfalati band that lived
s. E. of Wapatoo lake, Yamhill co., Oreg.
They became extinct probably about
1830.
BULL. 30]
CH A LCEDON Y CH ALUMU
283
Toh« lawai.— GatMchet, Atfalati MS., B. A. K.,
1877.
Chalcedony. Under this head may be
grouped a number of varieties of silica
(see Quartz) y including flint, chert, horn-
stone, jasper, agate, novaculite in part,
onyx, carnelian, etc., most of which were
used by the aborigines in the manufac-
ture of flaked implements. The distinc-
tions between these rocks have not Ijeen
sharply drawn by mineralogists, and the
archeologist must be content with group-
ing them according to their resemblance
to recognized types. The term flint has
come into somewhat general use among
archeologists for the whole group, but
this is not sanctioned by mineralogists.
Chalcedony is a translucent and variously
tinted indistinctly crystalline variety of
silica. It is formed by infiltration in
cavities in the older rocks, as a secondary
product during decomposition of manv
rocks, and as accumulations of the sili-
ceous residue from various organisnis.
It occurs as nodules distributed through
sedimentary strata, as in the middle
Mississippi valley; as thin, more or lass
interrupted layers, aa in Wyandot cave,
Indiana, and at Millcreek, 111.; or as
massive strata, as in Flint ridge, Ohio,
and on the Peoria res., Ind. Ter. Flint
(true flint), q. v., is formed as nodular
segregations in chalky limestone, and is
composed mainly of nearly amorphous
silica and partially dissolved radiolaria
and spicules of sponges. The colors are
dark gray and brownish to nearly black,
and somewhat translucent on thin edges.
It occurs extensively in England, France,
and N. w. Euro|)e, and has recently been
found in Arkansas and Texas, where it
w^as used by the alx)rigines in making
implements, ('herty as commonly recog-
nized, differs from true flint in being
lighter in color, a.s a rule, although vari-
ously tinted and less translucent. It oc-
curs in the limestones of a wide range of
geological formations. The best-known
deposits utilized by the Indians are on
the Peoria res., near Seneca, Mo., and at
Millcreek, 111. IIornMoue is the term
usually applied to varieties of chalcedony
displaying peculiar horn-like charac-
tenstics of toughness and translucency.
Much of the nodular chalcedony of the
Ohio valley, extensively employed by the
aborigines in the manufacture of imple-
ments and the blades and disks deposited
in caches, has been known under this
name. Jasper (q. v.) is a ferruginous
variety of chalcedony, of red, yellow, and
brownish tints. The greenish varieties
are known as prnsCf and these when
marked with red are called bloodstone.
Numerous aboriginal quarries of jasper
occur in e. Pennsylvania. Ay ate is a
banded variety of chak^eilony found
mainly in cavities in igneous rocks. The
natural colors are white to gray, passing
into various delicate tints. Onyx is a
banded variety of agate, but owing to
fancied similarities the name has beeu
applied to certain calcareous deposits, as
the so-called Mexican onyx.
Consult Dana, System of Mineralogy,
1892; Merrill, Rocks, Rock- weathering
and Soils, 1897. See Mines and Quarries^
SUnie-work. (w. n. ii. G. P. m.)
Chalichiki (chaVi 'blue corn', chiki
'place of : 'field of blue corn'). A
Tarahumare rancheria near Palanquo,
Chihuahua, Mexico. — Lumholtz, inf'n,
1894.
Chalit. A ^lagemiut Eskimo village
near Kuguklik r., Alaska; pop. 60 in
1880, 358 in 1890.
Chalitmiut— Nelson in 18lh Kep. B. A. E.. roup.
1899. Chalitmute.— IVtroflf, Kep. on Alaska, M,
1.H84.
Chalinknak. A former Aleut village
on Beaver bav, Unalaska id., Alaska. —
Baker, (ieog. Diet. Alaska, 1901.
Chalknnts. A Squawmish village com-
munitv on Gambier id., Brit. Col.
Tca'lkunU.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474,
1900.
Chalone. A division of the Costanoan
family of California which resided k. of
Soledad mission, with which they were
connected. Chalone villages are .men-
tioned as follows: Aspasniagan, Chulare,
Ekgiagan, P^lanagan, Goatcharones, Ich-
enta, and Yumanagan. Eslanagan, how-
ever, may be Esselen; the GoatcharoiK»s
are undoubtedly the AV^acharones of San
Juan Bautista, and the Yumanagan are
j)robably the Yimmacam of San Carlos
mission, who are also ascril)iHl to the
Kalindaruk division, so that the ccmsti-
tution and limits of the Chalone are un-
certain. Chalone peak and creek are
named from them. (ii. w. h.)
Chalones. — Th ylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, IHK).
Chalosas. A former Chumashan village
on Santa Cruz id., Cal. — Tavlor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863.
Tca-la-cuc. — Henshaw, Bnenaventnra MS. voeab.,
B. A. E., 1.SK4.
Chalowe. A former pueblo of the Zuni,
1 J m. N. w. of llawikuh. The ruins form
a widely scattered series of dwelling
clusters, 'which traditionally belonged to
one people, known by the general name
of Chalowe. It is said to have been in-
habited at the time of the first arrival of
the Spaniards. The general character
and arrangement of the pueblo, however,
are so different from the prevailing type
in this region that it seems hardly prob-
able that it belonged to the same people
and to the same age as the other ruins. —
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 83, 1891.
Chall-o-wha.— Fewkes in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and
Archfpol., I, 101, 1891.
Chalnmn. A Ct)stanoan village for-
merlv situated a mile n. w. of Santa Cruz
234
CHAMADA CHANSHUSHKA
[ B. A. K.
iniBsion, C'al. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Apr. 5, 1860.
Chamada. A former rancheria of the
Jova division of the Opata, near the
Sonora-Chihuahua boundary, about lat.
29°, Mexico. It appears to have been
abandoned after 1690, the inhabitants
finally moving to Sahuaripa. — Doc. of
18th centurv quoted by Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 511, 1892.
Chamampit. An Atfalati band which
lived on Wapatoo ct., at the e. end of
Wapatoo lake, Yamhill co., Oreg.
Tcha mimpit.— (latschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E.,
1H77.
Chamblee. See Shahonee.
Chamhallach. A former village on
French prairie, Marion co., Oreg., prob-
ably belonging to the Ahantchuyuk. —
Lyman in Oreg. Hist. Sck!. Quar., i, 323,
1900.
Chamifn. The Lakmiut name of a San-
tiam band on Yamhill cr., a w. tributary
of Willamette r., Oreg.
Tch'ammlfu.— <^iat.srhet, Calapo<jya MS., B. A. E.,
Chamifn. A Yamel band formerly liv-
ing l)etween the forks of Yamhill r., Yam-
hill CO., Oreg.
Tcha mifu amim.— Gat.schet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E.,
1H77.
Chamisso. A village of the Malemiut
Eskimo on Chamisso id., in Eschscholtz
bav, Alaska. — Nelson in 18th Rep. B.
A.*K., map, 1899.
E-ow-iok.— Beechev (1827) quoted bv Baker, Geog.
Diet. Ala.ska. 1901 (native name).
Chamiwi. The Lakmiut name of a
Yamel band on Yamhill cr., a w. tribu-
tary of Willamette r., and near Inde-
pendence, Oreg.
Toh'ammiwi.— (iatschet, Calapoova MS., B. A. E.,
1877.
Chamkhai. The name, in the upper Clear
lake dialect, of a Pomo band or village
f )n the E. fork of Russian r. , Cal . ( a . l. k. )
Champikle. A Yamel band on Dallas
(I>a Creole) cr., a w. tributary of Willa-
mette r. , Oreg.
Toh*ampiklS ami'm. — Gatschet, Lakmiut MS., B.
A. E., 1877.
Champoeg. A Kalapooian village be-
tween Chemeketa and Willamette falls,
Oreg. It is not known to which division
of the family it belonged.
Champoeg.— Rees in Trans. Oreg. Pion. Assn., 25,
1879. Champoicho.— Slocum (1837) in Sen. Doe.
•24, 25th Cong., 2d seas., 15, 1838 (misprint). Cham-
poicks.— Sloeum (1836) in H. Rep. 101, 25th Cong.,
3dsess.,42. 1839.
Chananagi (* ridge of land,' or 'hill
ridge'). A former Upper Creek town e.
of the site of Montgomery, Ala.
Chanahunie^.— OQs.sefe]d, map of U. S., 1784.
Ohanahunrege.— Jefferys, Freneh Dom. Am., i,
134, map, 1761. Cheurkany.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 27(5,
24th Cong., 310, 1836.
Chanatya. The extinct **Pegwood''
(?) clan of the Keresan pueblo of Sia,
N. Mex.
Chanatya hano.— Hodge in .\ni. .\nthrop., ix,3.51,
18% (//fi;io=' people').
Chanchampenan. The Lakmiut name of
a Santiam band formerly living e. of Wil-
lamette r., Oreg.
Tohantohamp^nau amun. — Gatschet, Lakmiut MS.,
B.A.E.,1877.
Chanohantii. The Lakmiut name of a
former Santiam band in Oregon.
Tohan-tohantu amim.— Gatschet, Lakmiut MS., B.
A. E., 1877.
Chanco. A Powhatan Indian of Vir-
ginia who gave timely warning to the
English of the intended massacre by
Opechancanough, in Mar., 1622, thus pre-
serving a number of lives. — Drake, Bk.
Inds., 361, 1880.
Chanech. A Costanoan village for-
merly situated near the mission of Santa
Cruz, Cal., as stated by Friar Olbez in
1819. — Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5,
1860.
Chaneleghatohee. Probably a former
Creek town in Alabama, between Talla-
poosa and Chattahoochee rs. (Robin,
Voy., II, map, 1807.) Not identinable.
(Hianigtac. A former village, presuma-
bly' Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Tavlor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Chankaghaotina ('dwellersinlogs* [i. e.,
)g hut
Sioux.
caghi
log huts?] ). A division of the Wahpeton
dan-ka^a-otina.— Dorsey (after Ashley) in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 216, 1897. Tca«»-kaxa-otina.— Ibid.
Chankaokhan ('sore back/ referring U)
horses). A Hunkpapa division of the
Teton Sioux.
6ai)-ho-ham'-pa.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol.
Mo. Val., 376, 1862. 6ai)kA ©Han.— Dorsey in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 221, 1897. Sore baoka.— Culbertoon
in Smithson. Rep. 1850, l4l, 1861. Tcaaka-oqa".—
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 221, 1897.
Chanknte (* shoot in the woods among
the deciduous trees ' ; a name of derision).
A division of the Sisseton Sioux.
Cag kute.— Dorsey in 15th Hep. B. A. E., 217,
1897. Toan-kute.— Dorst»v in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
IV, 260. 1891.
Chanknte. A division of the Yankton
Sioux.
Barbarole.— Gass, Journal, 49, 1807. Can kute.—
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 1897.— Jonkta.—
Gass, op. cit. (told by an Indian that he belonged
to the Jonkta or Barbarole people). Toa«»-kute.—
Dorsey, op. cit.
Chanona ( * shoot at trees ' ) . A division
of the Upper Yanktonai Sioux, from
which sprang the Hohe or Assiniboin.
6an ona.— Dorse V in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218,
1897. Toan-ona.— Ibid. Wazi-kute.— Ibid, ('shoot-
ers among the pines').
Chansdachikana (from the name of
the chief, otherwise known as Istahba,
Sleepy Eyes ) . A d i vision of t he Sisseton
Sioux, bne of the Dakota bands below
L. Traverse, Minn., formerly considered
a part of the Kahmiatonwan.
iaDidacikana.— S. R. Riggs, letter to Dorsey,
1882. Sleepy Eyes band.— Ind. AflF. Rep. 1859, 60,
102, 1860.
Chanshnshka ('box elder*). An uni-
dentified division of the Dakota.
HULL. 30]
CHANTAPETA 8 BAND CHARTIERSTOWN
235
Ohan-thu'-Bhka.— Boyd, Iiid. Local Names, 1885.
Chantopeta's Band. A Dakota division,
probably a part or all of the Hunkpapa,
so callea from their chief, commonly
known as Fire Heart. — H. R. Ex. Doc.
117, 19th Cong., Ist sess., 6, 1826.
ArrapapM.— Sen. Kx. Doc. 90, 22d C
63, 1SS2. Fire Heart's band.— Ibid.
, Doc. 90, 22d Cong., 1st sess..
Chantkaip. The Lakmiut name of_a
Santiam band formerly living below the
4* unction of the Santiam forks, Oreg.
Ichan tkaip.— Gatschet, Lakmint MS., B. A K.,
1877.
Chants. A Sciuawmish village commu-
nity on Burrard inlet, Brit. Col.
Teanto.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 475, 1900.
Chaolgakhasdi. One of the stopping
places of the Tsejinkini and Tsehtlam
clans of the Navalio, where, acc^ording to
their genesis myth, they lived long and
cultivated com. *
Tca'olffaqasdi. — Mutthows in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
111,91,1890.
Chaonacha. A small tril)e living, when
first known, on the e. bank of the Missis-
sippi, a short distance below the present
New Orleans, I^. Although they had
aided the French in their Indian wars,
they fell under suspicion after the Natchez
war, and in consequence were attacked
and a number of the people massacred, in
1730, by negro slaves acting under orders
from tfie French governor, who had in
view the double purpose of weakening
the power of the Indians and of over-
coming any projected combination be-
tween them and the negroes. Subse-
quently they seem to have removed to
the w. side of the Mississippi, a little
above their former position. ( j. m. )
Ohaouaohas.— P^nicaut (1708) in French, Hist.
Ck>ll. La., n. s., l, S5, 1869. Ohaouohas.— Boudinot,
Star in the West, 126, 1816. Ohawachas.— Jefferys,
French Dom. Am., i, 150, 1761. Chorouaohas. —
P^nicaut (1713) in Margry, D<^c., v, 506, 1883.
Ohouaoat.~B. des Lozi^res, Voy. &la La., 242, 1802.
Chooaohas. — Dumont in French, Hist. Coll. La.,
v, 101, 1853. Tohaouachas.— P^nicaut (1703) in
French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., i, 85, 1869. Tehaooa-
ehas.— I^tti^, map U. S., 1784.
Chaonoonla. One of the 7 villages or
tribes formerly constituting the Taensa
confederacy. — Iberville in Margry, D^c,
IV, 179, 1880.
Chapana. A former village of Costa-
noan Indians of central California,
connected with the mission San Juan
Bautista. — Engelhardt, Franciscans in
California, 398, 1897.
Chapanaghtin. An Atfalati band for-
merly living N. of Hillsboro, Washington
CO., Oreg.
Tcha panavtin.— OatMchet, Atfalati MS.. B. A. £.,
1877.
Chapokele. An Atfalati band formerly
residing 4 m. w. of Wapatoo lake, Yam-
hill CO., Oreg.
Teapokele.— Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E.,1877.
Chaptioon. A tribe fonnerly living in St
Mary or Charles co., Md., probaDly on
Chaptico r. Thev were displaced in 1652
by the whites and with other tribes were
assigned a tract at the head of Wico-
mico r. (j. M.)
Chaptioons.— Bozman, Maryland, ii, 421. 1837.
Choptico.— Ibid., 468 (incorrectly (?) made syn-
onymous with Porto-Back [Potapaco]). Chop-
ticons.— Davis, Daystar, 196, 1855.
Chapngtac. A former village, presuma-
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Tavlor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Ckapnngatlipi. An Atfalati band for-
merly residing at Forest (Jrove, Wash-
ington CO., Oreg., an<l on Wapatoo hike.
Tchapungathpi.— Gatst^het, Atfalati MS., B. A. K.,
1877.
Chaqnantie. A tribe in 1700, described
by Bienville (Margry, Dt''c. iv, 442,
1880), on Indian information, as living
on Red r. of Louisiana 4 days' travel
above the Kadohadacho, which would
place them apparently in the x. k. corner
of Texas. They have not been identified,
but may have X^een of Cadtlo affinity and
alliance.
Charac. A Tehueco settlement on the
Rio del Fuerte, about lat. 26° 15^, x. vv.
Sinaloa, Mexico. Hardy mentions it as
a Mayo pueblo, which is improbable,
although it mav have contained some
people of that tribe.
Charac.— Hardy, Travels in Mexico, 438, 1829.
Charai.— Ibid.,* map. CharMr.— Orozco y Bcrni,
Geog., map, 1864. San Jose Charay.— Ibid., '.VS'2.
Tscharai.— Kino, map (1702), in Stockloiii, Noiio
Welt-Bott. 1726.
Ckarco (Span. : * pool ' ). A Papago vil-
lage in s. Arizona with 50 inhabitants in
1858; probablv identical with Chioro.
Del Charco.— Baifey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208, IHW.
Charco Escondido ('hidden pool*). A
locality about 9 leagues s. w. of Rey-
nosa, between Matamoros and Victoria, in
Tamaulipas, Mexico, one of the sections
occupied by the Carrizo.
Ckarcowa. A band, probably of the
Chinookan tribe of Clowwewalla, found
in 1806 on the w. bank of Willamette r.,
Oreg., just above the falls. Their num-
ber was estimated at 200.
Chahcowahs.— Lewis and Clark Exped., Cones ed..
932, 1893. Charcawah.— Kelley, Oregon, 68, 1S30.
Cjiarcowah.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii, 474,
1814.
Charity. See Jlospitality.
Charlestown. A township in Washing-
ton CO., R. 1., where a few mixed bloods,
the remnants of the Narraganset and
Nehantic, still live. (j. m.)
Charms. See FetiaheSy Prohleiuatind
objects.
Chamrokrnit. A Sidanim\jit Eskimo
village on Seahorse ids., Arctic coast,
Alaska.— 11th Census, Alaska, 162, 1893.
Chartierstown. An Iroquois village, l)e-
fore 1748, on the Ohio r., about 60 m. by
water above Logstown, probably near
Kittanning, Armstrong co.. Pa.* Peter
Chartier was an influential Shawnee half-
breed about thatjperiod. (j. m.)
Charretier*8 band.— Vaudrenil (1760) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hi.st., X, 1092, 1858. Chartiers.— Alccdo,
23(5
CHASKPE CHATAG8HI8H
[b. a. b.
\»%^
^^-^
Die Geog., I, 476, 1786. Ohartiers Old-Town.—
Wei8er(1748) in Kauffman, W. Penn., app., 14,
1851. Chartien - Town.— Ibid. Old Showonese
Town.— Ibid.
Chaskpe. A tribe or people mentioned
by I^ Salle in 1683 (Margry, Dec, ii, 314,
1877) as having come in company with
the Shawnee and Ouabano at his solici-
tation to Ft StL(3ui.s, 111., his desire being
to draw them away from trade with the
Spaniards. It is not known to what In-
dians the name refers, but from the fact
that I^ Salle si>eaks of them as allies
of the Chickasaw, it is probable that
their home was s. of the present Illinois.
(j. M. C. T. )
Chasmnna ( * sandy ' ) . An unidentified
Dakota division.
Chasmu'na. — Boyd,, Loral Ind. Names, 7, 1885.
Chasta. A tribe, probably Athapascan,
residing on Siletz res., Oreg., in 1867,
with the Skoton and Umpqua, of which
latter they were then said to have formed
a part. The Chasta, Skoton, and Umpqua
were distinct tribes which concluded a
treaty Nov. 18, 1854. The Chasta were
divided into the Kwilsieton and Nahelta,
both residing on Rogue r. J. 0. Dorsey
thought these may have been identical
with Kushetunne and Nakatkhetunne of
the Tututunne. Kane, in 1859, located
them near Umpqua r. In 1867 the
Chasta, the Scoton, and the Umpqua
together, at Siletz agency, numbered 49
males and 74 females, total 123. They
may be identical with the Chastacosta
or form a part of the Takilma. They
do not seem to have any connection with
the Shasta, who did not extend down
Rogue r. below Table Rock, and who
were generally bitterly at war with their
Athapascan neighbors.
Chasta.— Parker, Jour. 257, 1840. Chasta band of
Bogue Rivers.— Palmer In Kep. Ind. Aff., 464,
ISM. Chastay.— Kane, Wand, in N. Ara., 182, 1859.
Haw-quo-e-hov-took.— Palmer in Rep. Ind. AfT.,
464,1854. Illinois Creek bands.— Ibid.
Chastacosta (Shiski kwiistay their name
for themselves, meaning unknown). A
group of Athapascan villages formerly
situated along Rogue r. , Oreg. , mo.stly on
its N. bank from its junction with Illinois
r. nearly to the mouth of Applegate or.
The Tututunne, who did not differ from
them in customs or language, were to
the w. of them; the Coquille, differing
slightly in language, were n. of them; and
the Gallice (Tattushtuntude), with the
same customs but a quite different dia-
lect, to the E. The Takilma, an inde-
pendent stock, were their s. neighbors,
living on the s. bank of Rogue r. and on
its s. tributaries. In the summer of 1856,
after a few months of severe fighting with
the whites, 153 of them, consisting of 53
men, 61 women, 23 boys, 16 girls (Par-
rish in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 357, 1858)
were taken to Siletz res., Oreg., where
now there are but a few individuals left.
It is practically certain that nearly all
the inhabitants of these villages were re-
moved at this time. Considering the
number of the villages — 33 according to
Dorsey (Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 234,
1890), 19 according to an aged Gallice
informant — this number is surprisingly
small. The names of the villages, as
given by Dorsey, usually referring to
the people (-iurij -tunne) thereof, are
Chetuttunne, Chunarghuttunne, Chun-
setunneta, Chunsetunnetun, Chushtar-
ghasuttun, Chusterghutmunnetun,
Chuttushshunche, Khloshlekhwuche,
Khotltacheche, Khtalutlitunne, Kthelut-
litunne, Kushletata, Mekichuntun, Mus-
me, Natkhwunche, Nishtuwekulsushtun,
Sechukhtun, Seethltunne, Senestun, Se-
taaye, Setsurgheake, Silkhkemechetatun,
Sinarghutlitun, Skurghut, Sukechune-
tunne, Surghustesthitun, Tachikhwutme,
Takasichekhwut, Talsunme, Tatsunye,
Thethlkhuttunne, Tisattunne, Tsetaame,
Tsetutkhlalenitun, Tukulitlatun, Tukwil-
isitunne, Tuslatunne. The following vil-
lages may be synonymous with ones in
the list: Klotbchetunne, Sekhatsatunne,
Tasunmatunne. ( p. e. g. )
Atchashti ame'nmei. — Gatschet, Kalapuya MS.,
B. A. £., 31 ( Atfalati name). Atohashti anunim.—
Ibid. (Kalapuya name). Cas-ta-k'o'-sta Umi, —
Everette, MS. Tutu vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (trans.:
'people by the hills'). Chasta Costa. — Newcomb
in Ind. AflF. Rep., 162, 1861. Ci'-stft kqw1is'-ti.—
Dorsey, Chasta Costa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884
(own name). Ci'-st& qwns'-ta )i!bui£. — Dorsey,
Chetco MS. v6cab., B. A. £., 1884. Cistooootet.—
Palmer in Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1856, 216, 1857. Ka-
tuku.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Shasta name).
Shastacosta.— Metcalfe in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 357,
1858. Shasta Costa.— Abbott, MS. Coquille cen-
sus, B. A. E., 1858. Shis-tah-cos-tahs.— Kautz, MS.
Toutouten census, B. A. E., 18.55. Shis-tah-koas-
tah.— Ibid. Shis-ta-koos-tee.— Parrish in Ind.
Aff. Rep. 1854, 495, 1855. Shis-ta-ku-sta.— Schu-
macher in Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv., in, 31,
1877. Sisticoosta.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes. VI,
702, 1857. Walamskni.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E.
(Klamath name). W^lamswash.— Gatschet, MS.,
B. A. £. (Modoc name).
Chasta-Skoton. A tribe or two tribes
(Chasta and Skoton) formerly living on
or near Rogue r., Oreg., perhaps the
Chastacosta or (Dorsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, iii, 235, 1890) the Sestikustun.
There were 36 on Grande Ronde res. and
166 on Siletz res., Oreg., in 1875.
Chasta-Sootans.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 62,1872. Chasta
Scoten.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 12, 1863.
Chasta Scoton.— U. S. Stat, at Large, x, 675, 1854.
Shasta Scoton.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 495, 1854. Sko-
ton-Shasta.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 253, 1877.
Chatagihl (atdgihl=^ ^^rewood bark').
An Atfalati settlement at the upper end
of Wapatoo lake, Yamhill co., Oreg.
Teh atagi'l.— Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 1877.
Chatagithl. An Atfalati band formerly
settled a mile s. w. of Wapatoo lake,
Yamhill co., Oreg. Its last chief lived
on Grande Ronde res. in 1878.
Teh tagithl.— Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 1877.
Chatagshish. A small Atfalati band
formerly living in Washington co., Oreg.
BULL. 30]
CHATAKUIN CHATUGA
237
Teh* tagshish.— Gatschet, AtfalatI MS., B. A. E.,
1877.
Ghataknin (atakuin refers to a tree).
A former Attalati settlement 7 m. n. of
Hillsboro, Washington co., Orejr.
Toh' atakuin.— Oatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. K.,
1877.
Chatamnei. An Atfalati band, long ex-
tinct, that lived 10 m. n. of Wapatoo
lake, in Washington co., Oreg.
Toha tamnei.— Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E.,
1877.
Chatohini. A camping place not far from
the Haida town of Kasaan, s. w. Alaska.
As John Work gives it as the name of a
town, the people of Kasaan may have had
a permanent settlement there atone time.
In 1836-41 it contained 249 inhabitants
and 18 houses. — Swanton, field notes,
1900-01.
Ohal-chu-nie.— Kane, Wand. N.'A., app., 1859 (after
Work, 1836-41). Chaainakoe.— VeniaminolT. Za-
piski, II, pt. 3, 30, 1840. Chatcheeni.— Dawson,
Queen Charlotte Ids., 173b, 1880 (simplified from
Work). Chat-chee-nie.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
v, 489, 1855 (after Work). Ohatounic— Can. Ind.
AfT., 8, 1872. Ohatainaha.— Scott in Ind. Aflf. Kcp.,
312, 1868. Toatoi'ni.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 282,
1905.
Chatelaw (said to mean * copper town* ).
A former Chickasaw town in n. Missis-
sippi.— Romans, Fla., 63, 1775.
Chatelech ( * outside water ' ) . The pres-
ent town of the Seechelt Indians on Trail
bay, at the neck of Seechelt penin., Hrit.
Col. As a permanent settlement it dates
only from Bishop Durien's time (ra.
1890), not having been occupied before
for fear of the Lekwiltok.
ToatEleto.— Hill-Tout in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., 21,
1904.
Chatilknei. An Atfalati band formerly
residing 5 m. w. of Wapatoo lake, in
Yamhill co., Oreg.
Toha tilkuei.— Gatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E.,
1877.
Chatixiak. A Chnagmiut Eskimo village
near the mouth of Yukon r., Alaska;
pop. 40 in 1880. Petroff, 10th Census,
Alaska, 12, 1884'.
Oatmakh.— Elliot, Our Arct. Prov., map, 1886.
Chatinak.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 12, 1884.
Chatinakh.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map,
1899.
Chatoksofki ( Chdt aksufki, ' rock bluff ' ) .
A former Upper Creek town in Talladega
CO., Ala., with 143 families in 1833.
Chatoksofki, Abikudshi, Niuyaka, and
Oakfuskee were anciently considered
one town whose people met at one place
for their annual ousk, q. v. In former
times these were the greatest ball play-
ers of the Creeks. The few survivors are
consolidated with the Eufaula in the
Creek Nation, Ind. Ter., where a modern
town known as Chatoksofki now exists.
(a. s. g.)
Ohattoesofkar.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 140,
1836. Okattofsofker. —Crawford (1836) in H. R. Doc.
274, 25th Cong., 2d sesa. , 24, 1838. Ohat-tok-sof-ke. —
Wyse, ibid., 61. Ohattoksofker.— Jones et al., ibid.,
101. GhattoMofkins.— Campbell, ibid. ,-20. Chotok-
■aufk. — Taylor, ibid., 71. Old Merrawnaytown.—
H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 333, 1836.
Chatot. A tribe or band which the
French settled s. of Ft St Louis, on
Mobile bay, Ala., in 1709. Bienville,
wishing to change his settlement, ** se-
lected a place where the nation of the
(^hatots were residing, and gave them in
exchange for it a piece of territory front-
ing on Dog r., 2 leagues farther down"
( Penicaut, 1709, in French, Hist. Coll. La.,
1, 103, 1869). According to Baudry des
Lozieres (Voy., 1794) the Chatot and
Tohome tribes were related to the Choc-
taw and spoke the French and Choctaw
languages.
Chactots.— JefTerys. French, Dom. Am., 162, 1761.
Chats-hadai ( Tcdta .rd^da-i^ 'Teats river
people'). A subdivision of the Koetas,
a Haida family belonging to the Kaigani
group. They were probably so named
from a camping place. — Swanton, Cont.
Haida, 272, 1905.
Chattahoochee (Creek: chdtu *rock,* lint-
chas 'mark, design': 'pictured rocks').
A former Lower C-reek town on the upper
waters of Chattahoochee r., to which it
gave its name; seemingly in the present
Harris co., Ga. So called from some pic-
tured rocks found at that point. The
town was above iluthlitaiga, or War-ford,
and it had probably been abandoned prior
to Hawkins' time ( 1798-99), as he alludes
to it as the "old town Chattohoche," not
as an occujued village. (a. s. g.)
Catahouche. — (Jii.ssefeld, map of IT. S., 1784. Cato-
hoohe. — .Teflferys, French Dom. Am., 134, map, 1761.
Cattagochee.— Ljxttr(^, map U. S., 1784. Chatahoo-
chas.— Romans, Florida, i, 280,1775. Ohatahoosie.—
Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 262,
1855. Chatahouchi.— Alcedo, Die. Geog., I, 477,
1786. Chata TIche.— Bartram, Travels, 462, 1792.
Chat-to-ho-che.— Hawkins (1798-99), Sketch, 52,
1848. Katahooche.— Jeflfcrys, Am. Atlas, 5, 1776.
Tchattaouchi.— De I'lsle, map, in Winsor, Hist.
Am., 11.295, 1886.
Chattanooga (Cherokee: TsaUinu^gi^
meaning unknown. ) The Cherokee name
for a point on the creek entering Tennes-
see r. at the city of Chattanooga, Tenn.
The ancient name for Ihe site of the pres-
ent city of Chattanooga was A'tia^nuwft,
from tl(Vmur(X '(hawk) hole.' So far as
is known there was no Cherokee settle-
ment at the place, although some promi-
nent men of the tribe lived in the vicin-
ity.—Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 412,
418, 1900.
Chattooka. A village of the Neuse In-
dians, formerly on the site of Newbern,
N. C. Graffenried bought the tract from
the owners in 1710 and planted a German
colony on it, the Indians withdrawing
probably to the Tuscarora, with whom
they were on intimate terms, (j. m.)
Chatoueka.— Graflfenried (1711) in N. C. Rec, 1,978,
1886. Ohattauqua.— Du Four (1885), ibid. Ohat-
tawka.— Graffenreid (1711), Ibid., 910. Chattoka.—
Lawson, map (1710) in Hawks, N. C, ii, 1858.
Chattoocka.— GraflFenried,op.cit.,933. Chattooka.—
Lawson (1710), Hist. N.C., 3^, 1860.
Chatnga (alno Chattooga, a corruption
of the Cherokee Tsatu^g\ possibly mean-
288
CHATUKGHTTFAdLA CHAUNI8 TEMOATAN
[b. a. e.
ing * he drank by sips,' or * he has crossed
the stream and come out upon the other
side,' but more likely of foreign origin).
The name of three Cherokee settlements:
(1) An ancient village on Chattoc^a r., a
headstream of Savannah r., on the boun-
dary between South Carolina and Georgia;
(2) probably situated on upper Tellico r.,
in Monroe co., Tenn.; (3) perhaps on
Chattooga r., a tributary ot the Coosa, in
X. w. Georgia. — Mooney in 19th Rep. B.
A. K, 536, 1900.
Chatuga.—Bartram, Travels, 371, 1792. Cluitugee.—
Doc. of 1755 cited by Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E.,
142, 1^7.
Chatnkclinfanla. An Upper Creek town
on Tallapoosa r., Ala., probably in Cham-
bers CO., settled apparently by the Talasse.
Ohalaacpaoley.— Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, v, '262, 1855. Chattukohufaule.— Hawkins
(1813) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., I, 852, 1832.
Ohetoochefaula.— Woodward, Reminis., 35, 1859 (a
branch of the Talasse).
Chaabaqaedack. A former village on
Martha's Vineyard, Mass., or on Chappa-
quiddick id., just e. of it. In 1698 it had
about 138 inhabitants. Boyd derives the
word from chippi-aqaidne^ * separated
island.*
Chappaquidnok.— Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., i,
2(M, 1806. Chaubaqueduok.— Report of 1698, ibid.,
X, 131, 1809.
Chanbatiok. A village of the Narragan-
set orNehantic in 1651, probably within a
few miles of Providence, R. 1. — Williams
(1651) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll. 3d s., ix,
2^)2, 1846.
Chaadi^re Noire. See Black Kettle.
Chani (*in the middle.* — Grinnell). A
tribe of the Pawnee confederacy, spoken
of by the French as Grand Pawnee. In
the positions maintained by the 4 tribes
of the Pawnee confederacy the villages of
the Chaui were always between those of
the Pitahauerat on the E. and Kitkehahki
on the w. In the council of the confed-
eracy the Chaui held a prominent place,
their head chiets outranking all others,
and being accepted as representative of the
Pawnee, although without power to domi-
nate all the tribes. Little that is distinc-
tive is known of this tribe. In 1833 they
ceded to the United States their lands s.
of Platte r., Nebr., and in 1857 all lands
on the N. side of that stream, when the
Pawnee res. on Loup r. was established.
This land was ceded in 1876 and their
reservation in Oklahoma set apart. Here
they now live. Having taken their lands
in severalty, in 1892 they became citi-
zens of the United States. Thev were
included in the missions established
among the Pawnee. In customs and
l>eliefs the Chaui did not differ from
their congeners. They possessed many
interesting ceremonies, of which that con-
nected with the calumet (q. v.) has been
preserved entire and gives evidence of
their well-defined cosmogony and relig-
ious system. The divisions* and totems
are not known. See Dunbar in Mag.
Am. Hist., IV, V, viii, 1880-82; Fletcher,
The Hako, 22d Rep. B. A. E., ii, 1904;
Grinnell, Pawnee Hero Stories, 1889.
(a. c. f.)
Oha'-ne.— Morgan in Smithson. Cont., xvii, 196,
1871 (misprint. ) Chau-i.— Grinnell, Pawnee Hero
Stories, 216, 1839. Cha'-we.— Moigan, op. cit, 286.
Ohoweea.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 213, 1861. Oraad Pans.—
Gregg, Com. of Prairies, ii, 301, 1850 (so called by
Canadians). Ghrand Par.— Lewis and Clark, Dis-
GOV., 17, 1806. Grand Paonee.— H. R. Ex. Doc.
117, 19th Cong., Ist sess., 7, 1826. Ghrand Pawnee.—
Pike, Exped., 143, 1810. Grands.— Ind. Aff. Rep.,
213, 1861. Grands Panis.-^Du Lac, Voy. Louis-
ianes, vij , 1805. Great Pawnee.— Lewis and Clark,
Exped., I, map, 1814. Panai Proper. — Lewis and
Clark.Trav. inAmer.,38, 1807. P&nee.— Lewis and
Clark, Discov., 17, 1806. Pania Proper.— Ibid., 62.
Panias proper.— Ibid., 19. Panias propres.— Gass,
Voyage, 417, 1810. Payi-'qici.— Dorsey, KansaMS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (Kansa name). Payi«qt«i.—
Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (Osage
name). Teami'.— Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B.
A. E., 1882 (another Kansa name). Toawi.— Dor-
sey, (pegiba MS. Diet., B. A. E., 1878-«) (own
name and Omaha name). Tehi-w^.— Long,
Exped. Rocky Mts., ii, Ixxxv, 1823. Tsa'-n-i.-
Gatschet, Pawnee MS. vocab., B. A. E. (own
name). TilCwi.— Ibid, x*"'-*-— Dunbar in Mag.
Am. Hist., IV, 251, 1880.
Chaunis Temoatan (Chaun-islem-oatan,
* salt-making village.' — Tooker). A
country situated, in 1586, indefinitely
westward from the English settlement
on Roanoke id., N. C. iSilph Lane, from
misinterpreted Indian information, be-
lieved it to have been a copper-producing
region, and that it was situated ** vp that
riuer Moratoc [Roanoke],*' 20 days'
journey overland from the Mangoaks
(Nottowav), who then dwelt about
160 m. above the Roanoke settlement.
Lane's version of the Indian report shows
that the Indians referred to salt making
rather than copper mining. By Bozman,
Bancroft, and others, this Indian report,
as given by Lane, has been r^rded as a
fiction devised by a crafty Indian to lure
the English to destruction; but Reynolds
says that n. Georgia "corresponds as
nearly as possible to the province of
Chaunis Temoatan, described by distance
and direction in Lane's account," while
Tooker places it in the vicinity of Shaw-
neetown, Gallatin co.. 111. In view of
what Lane said of the Moratoc r. itself,
the Indians probably referred to salt
springs of the Kanawha and Little Kana-
wha valleys of West Virginia, or in the
slopes and foothills of the Blue Ridge
ana Cumberland mts. **And for that
not only Menatonon," says Lane, '*but
also the sauages of Moratoc themselves
doe report strange things of the head of
that riuer, and that from Moratoc itself,
which is a principal towne upon that
River, it is thirtie dayes as some of them
say, and some say fourtie dayes voyage
to the head thereof, which head they say
springeth. out of a maine rocke in that
abundance; that forthwith it maketh a
most violent stream; and further, that
BULL. .'iOJ
CHAUSHILA CHKB(Hi
239
this huge rock standeth so neere unto a
sea, that many times in stormes (the
winds coming outwardly from the sea)
the wanes thereof are beaten into tlie
said fresh streame, so that the fresh water
for a certaine space, groweth salt and
brackish." From this it would appear
that even the sources of the Roanoke
were reputed to be 30 or 40 days' journey
from Moratoc town.
Consult Lane in Hakluyt, Voy., in,
1810. Reynolds in Am. Anthrop. , i, Oct. ,
1888; Tooker in Am. Antiq., Jan., 1895.
(.T. N. B. H.)
Chanshila. A Yokuts (Mariposan ) tribe
in central California, n. of Fresno r. , proba-
bly on lower Chowchilla r., in the plains
and lowest foothills, their neighbors on
the N. being of Moquelumnan stoctk. As
a tribe they are now extinct. They are
confused with, but are distinct from, the
Chowchilla, under which name the syn-
onymy of both is given.
OhauthiU.— A. L. Kroeber, iiifn, 19a5 (so pro-
nounced by the Indians).
Chantaaqna. (Seneca: T khlchiatd^^kw^^j
*one has taken out fish there,* referring
to L. Chautauqua. — Hewitt). A sys-
tem of popular education by means of
lectures, reading circles, etc.; so called
from Chautauqua, a village and lake in
w. New York, where the Chautauqua
Assembly (1874) and the Chautauqua
Literary and Scientific Circle (1878) were
founded umler the auspices of Bishop
Vincent of the ^lethodist Episcopal
Church, by whom also a history of '*The
Chautauqua Movement" has been j)ub-
lished. (a. f. c.)
Cliayite. A province w. of the Missis-
sippi and near Washita r.. Ark., which
probably took its name from a tribe of
the southern Caddoan group. De Soto's
troojie passed through this country
during the summer of 1542, and found
the people making salt. See Biedma
(1544) m French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 107,
1850.
Chawagis-stastae .{Tcawd^gh stAstd^-i,
*the Stustas from Low-tide r.'). A sub-
division of the Stustas, a great Ilaida
family of the Eagle clan. The creek
where they camped and which gave
them the name is on the coast a short
distance s. of Naikun or Rose spit, Gra-
ham id., Brit. Col. — Swan ton, Cont. Haida,
276, 1905.
TsiQQ&'gU »ta»ta«i'.— Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 23, 1898.
Chawakli. An ancient Lower Creek town
on Apalachicola r., 12 m. below Ocheese
Bluff, probably in Calhoun co., Fla.
Its people were merged with the Eu-
faula.
Shawho-ka-les.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 364, 1822.
Chawakoni. A former Karok village on
Klamath r., x. Cal.; exact location un-
known.
Cha-ma-ko-nec. — McKec (1851) in Sen. Kx. IHk*.
4, 32(1 Cong., .spec, .ses.**., 161, 1853. Oha-ma-ko-
nees.— Ibid., 215 (given a.s a Hupa division).
Cham-ma-ko-neo.— Ibid., IW. Tsoha-wa-oo-nihs.—
Meyer, Naeli dem Sacramento, 282, 1855.
Chawayed. An Atfalati band formerly
living w. of Forest Grove, in Washington
CO., Oreg.
Tcha waye'd.— Gatschet, Atfalati MS.. B. A. K.,
1877.
Ghawopo. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, in 1608, at the mouth of
Chipoak cr. . Surrv co. , Va.
Chawopo.— Smith (16^9), Va., i. map, repr. 1819.
Cluiwopoweanook.~Pot.s in Smith, ibid.. 204 (in-
correct combination of Chawopo and Weanock).
Chawnlktit. The Lakmiut name of a
camping place of the Calapooya on the
forks of Yamhill r., a w. affluent of Wil-
lamette r., Oreg.
Tcha wulktit.— Gatschet, Lakmiut MS., B. A. K.,
1877.
Chayen. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connectcni with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Tavlor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Ghayopin. One of the tribes named
by Garcia (Manual, title, 1760) as living
at the missions a))out Rio San Antonio
and Rio Grande in Texas, and identified
by Mooney as a division of the Tonkawa.
In 1785 there was a rancheria called
Chayopin, with 8 inhabitants, near the
presidio of La Bahfa (ttie present Goliad)
and the mission of Espfritu Santo de
Ziifiiga, on the lower San Antonio (Ban-
croft, No. Mex. States, i, 659, 1886).
Chapopines.— Taylor in Ca.\. Farmer, Apr. 17, l^hi
(misprint).
Cheilo. A province of New Mexico in
1598, supposed t() have been situated k.
of the Rio Grande in the vicinitv of the
Salinas (Oiiate, 1598, in Doc. Ined., xvi,
1 1 8, 1 871 ) . It evidently pertained to the
Tigua or the Piros. See Salineros.
Cheam. A town said to belong to the
Pilalt, a Cowichan tribe of lower Chilli-
wack r., Brit. Col., but evidently con-
taining representatives of other tnl)es as
well; pop. l(X)in 1902.
Che-ahm.— Brit. Col. map, Victoria, 1872. Cheam.—
Can. Ind. Aff., pt. ii, 15«, 1901. Toe'iam.— Boas in
Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 454, 1894.
Ghebacco. A sort of boat, thus defined
by Bartlett (Diet, of Americanisms, 111,
1877) : ** Chebacco boat. A description of
fishing vessel employed in the Newfound-
land fisheries. So called from Chebacco
parish, Ipswich, Mass., where many were
fitted out. They are also called pink-
stems, and sometimes tobacco-boats."
The last name is probably a corruption
of the first. Dr Murray, in the Oxford
Dictionary, inclines to believe that the
place may have been named from the
boat, in which case CI\£hacco would l)e
related to XebeCy etc. But it is probably
from the Massachuset dialect of Algon-
quian. {a. f. c. )
'Ckebog. A name of the menhaden,
from one of the eastern dialects of the
240
CHEBONTE8 CHEGWALIS
[B. A. E.
Aljsonquian stock, probably Narraganset
or Massachuset. (a. f. c. )
Chebontes. A tril^e mentioned in 1853
(Wessells in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th
Cong., 3d sess., 32, 1857) as living s. e.
of Tulare lake, Cal. Supposed from the
location and association to be Mariposan,
though possibly Shoshonean..
Cheboygan ( Kichihwagan^ *a large
pipe.' — Hewitt). An Ottawa band for-
merly living on Chel)oygan r., Cheboy-
gan CO., Mich.' By treaty of July 31, 1855,
they were granted 2 townships about
Burts lake; subsequently lands were al-
lotted to them in severalty and the surplus
restored to the public domain by acts of
Congressof JunelO, 1872, andMay23, 1876.
Cheboiffan band.— Sfhoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 478,
185:?. Cheboygan. -Detroit treaty (1865) in U.S.
Ind. Treat., 615, 1873. Cibaiifan.~W. Jones, inf n,
1905.
Chechawkose. A Potawatomi chief of
this name formerly lived at a village
conmionly called ^'Chechawkose's vil-
lage," on the H. side of Tippecanoe r.,
alxjut Harrison tp., Kosciusko co., Ind.
The reserve was sold in 1836. The name
is also spelled Cheechawkose and Chit-
chakos. (j. M.)
Chechelmen. A Squawmish village
community on Burrard inlet, Brit. Col.
Toetoe'lmen.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474,
1900.
Cbechilkok. A Squawmish village com-
nuinity at Sevmour cr., Burrard inlet,
Brit. Col.: pop. 44 in 1902.
Creek.— Sevmour in Can. Ind. AflF.,pt.ii, 160, 1900.
TcetoUqok.'— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 475,
1900.
Chechinqnamin. See Chinqnajnn.
Checopissowo. A village of the Pow-
hatan confederacy, in 1608, on Rappa-
hannock r. , above Tobacco cr. , in Caroline
CO., Va. — Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map,
repr. 1819.
Checoat. See Chirkuit.
Chedtokkanye ('big buffalo bulP). A
subgens of the Arukhwa, the Buffalo gens
of the Iowa.
Tce-^o' qan'-ye.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 239,
1897.
Chedtoyine ( * young buffalo bull ' ). A
suteens of the Arukhwa, the Buffalo gens
of the Iowa.
Toe-)o yiii'-e.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 239,
1897.
Chednnga (* buffalo bull,* or * buffalo
with dark hair ' ). A Kansagens, the 6th
on the Yata side of the tribal circle. Its
subgentes are Chedunga and Yukhe.
Buffido.— Morgan. Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. BnfEalo
bull.— Dorsey in Am. Natural., 671, July, 1885.
Che-dong-ga. — Stubbs, Kaw MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1877. Mo-e-kwe-ah-ha.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156,
1877. Si-tanga.— Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab.,
B. A. E. , 1882 (sig. ' big foot ' ) . Toedttnga.— Dorsey
in Am. Natural., 671, July, 1885. Wadiuta tanga.—
Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (sig.
•big quadruped').
Chedunga. A subgens of the Chedunga
gens of the Kansa.
Toediinga.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 232, 1897.
Cheechawkose. See C/iechawkose.
Chee-Chinook. See Chinook jargon.
Cheemo. A lx)dy of Songish at Beecher
bay, 8. E. end of Vancouver id. It per-
haps includes the Kekayaken gens. Pop.
48 in 1902.
Cheerno.— Can. Ind. AfT., 66, 1902. Tohe-a-nook.—
Can. Ind. Aflf., 308, 1879 (probably the same).
Cheeshateamnnck. The only New Eng-
land Indian who completed his studies
at Harvard College, taking his degree in
1666. He died of consumption. ( a. f. c. )
Cheesoheha. A former Cherokee settle-
ment on a branch of Savannah r. , in upper
South Carolina; destroyed during the
Revolutionary war. (j. m. )
Cheewack. A body of Sal ish under Wil-
liams Lake agency,' Brit. Col.; pop. 9 in
1891, when the name last appears.
Ohawaok.— Can. Ind. Aff. 78, 1878. Cheewack.—
Ibid., 251, 1891.
Chefixico's Old Town. A Seminole set-
tlement formerly on the s. side of Old
Tallahassee lake, 5 ni. e. of Tallahassee,
Fla.—Roberts, Florida, 1763.
Chefoklak. A Chnagmiut village near
the head of the Yukon delta, Alaska;
pop. 26 in 1880.
Chefokhlagamute.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska,
54, 1884.
Cheghita ('eagle'). A Missouri gens
with the Wakanta, Khra, Kretan, and
Momi subgentes. — Dorsey in 15th Rep.
B. A. E., 240, 1897.
Eagle people. — Dorsey. Tciwero MS. vocab., B. A.
E., 1879. Tce'xi-ta.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
240, 1897. Tkonder-bird.— Dorsey, Tciwere MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1879. Wakanta.— Ibid.
Cheghita. An Oto gens.
Eagle.— Morgan, Anc. Soc. 156, 1877. KMa'-».—
Ibid. ( = ' eagle '[?] ; cf. Khra). Tce'-xi-ta.— Dor-
sey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 240, 1897.
Cheghita. An Iowa gens. Its sub-
gentes are Nachiche, Khrahune, Khra-
kreye, and Khrapathan.
Oheh'-he-ta.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. Ea-
gle.— Ibid. Tce'-xi-ta.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B.
A. E., 238, 1897.
Cheghnlin (tillage on the open
prairie') . A former Kansa village on the
8. side of Kansas r., Kans.
TcexuU".— Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1882.
Cheghnlin. A Kansa village, evidently
named after the earlier settlement of that
name; situated on a tributary of Kansas
r., on the n. side, e. of Blue r., Kans.
Toexuli».— Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E.,1882.
Che^n^Akeokisela (*half breechcloth').
A division of the Hunkpapa Teton Sioux.
Bom in the middle. — Culbertson in Smithson. Rep.
1850, 141, 1851. degnake-okiseU.- Dorsey in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 221. 1897. 6e'-fia-na-ka'.— Hayden,
Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Valley, 376, 1862 ('three-
cornered cloth ' ). Half breech clout people. —Cul-
bertson, op. cit. Tcegnake-okisela.— Dorsey, op. cit.
Chegoli. A former town on the e. bank
of Tallapoosa r., Ala. (Bartram, Trav.,
I, map, 1799). Not identified, but prob-
ably Creek.
Chegwalis ( * spotted frog ') . A gens of
the Abnaki.
BULL. ;iO]
CHKHALIS CHEKILLI
241
Cheha^is. A collective name for several
Salishan tribes on Chehalis r. and its
affluents, and on Grays harl)or, Wash.
Gibbs states that it })elong8 strictly to a
village at the entrance of Grays harbor,
and signifies * sand . ' There were 5 princi-
pal villages on the river, and 7 on the n.
and 8 on the s. side of the bay; there were
also a few villages on the n. end of Shoal-
water bay. By many writers they are
divided into Upper Chehalis or Kwaiailk
(q. v.), dwelling above Satsop r., and the
Lower Chehalis from that point down.
The following subdivisions are men-
tioned, some ofwhich were single villages,
while others probably embraced people
living in several: Chiklisilkh, Cloqual-
lum, Hoquiam, liooshkal, Humptulips,
Kishkallen, Klimmim, Klumaitumsh,
Nickomin, Nooachhummilh, Noohoo-
ultch, Nookalthu, Noosiatsks, Nooskoh,
Satsop, W^nooche, Whiskah. TheSatsop
speak a dialect distinct from the others.
In 1806 Lewis and Clark assigned to them
L a population of 700 in 38 lodges. In 1904
there were 147 Chehalis and 21 Hump-
tulips under the Puyallup school super-
intendent, Wash. (h. w. n. j. r. s.)
AtohixeOish.— Gatschet, Calapoqya MS. vocab., 31,
B. A. E. (Calapooya name). Cfhachelis.— Fram-
boise quoted by Gairdner in Jour. Geog. Soc.
Lond., XI, 255. 1841. Chealis.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, June 12.1863. ChelMiylis.— I^nc in Ind.
Aff. Rep., 162, 1850. Cheoaldith.— Lee and Frost,
Ten Years in Oregon, 99, 1844. Cheoaliah.— Ibid.,
103. Oheohili.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc.
Lend., 71, 1856. Cheehales.— Dartin Ind. Aflf. Rep.,
215, 1851. Oheenoles.— vSchooloraft, Ind. Tribe.**, iii,
map, 200, 1863. ChehaUs.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B.
A. E., pi. Ixxxviii, 1896. Ohehaylis.— I^ne (1849)
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 81st Cong., Istscss., 174, 1850.
Ohekalit. — Townsend , Narr. , 175, 1839. Chekilis. —
Duflot de Mofras, Expl. de rOr<?g.. ii, 335, 1844.
Ohiok-a-lees.— Starling in Ind. Aff. Rep., 172, 1852.
Ohiokeelet.— Wilkes, West. Am.. 88, 1849. Chio-
kelis.— Ross, Adventures, 87, 1849. Chihales.—
• Starling in Ind. Aff. Rep., 447, 1854. Ohihali*.—
Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 435. 1855. Chihee-
laes.— Scouler (1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond.,
I, 249, 1848. Ckiheeleeah— Drake, Book Inds.,
vii, 1848. Ohihelirii.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War,
868, 1822. OhikaiUth.— Hale in IT. S. Expl. Exped.,
VI, 211, 1846. ChikaUth,— Gallatin in Trans. Am.
Ethnol. See.. II, 20, 1848. Chikeelis. — Scouler ( 1846)
in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i, 23.\ 1848. Chike-
lis.— Faraham, Travels, 112, 1843. ChikiliBhes.—
Domenech, Deserts, ii, 56, 1860. Ohikoilith.— Hale
in U. 8. Expl. Exped., vi, 198. 1846. OhiUates.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 571, 1H53. Ohilts.—
Lewis and Clark. Exped.. i. map, 1814. Ghiltz. —
Gass, Jour., 189. 1807. Ehihalit.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, V, 490, 1853. Ilgat.— Gatschet, MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 1877 (Nestueca name). Staq-tiibc.—
McCaw, Puyallup MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1885 (Pu-
yallup name: 'inland people'). Tcheheles.— De
Smet, Letters, 231, 1843. TohUceylis.— Franchdre.
Narr., 124, 1854. Tclts-heto.— Eells in letter of
Feb., 1886 (own name). Tsehalish.— Gray. Letter
to Gibbfi, B. A. E., 1869. Tsheheilis.— Tolmle and
Dawson, Vocabs.. B. C, 121b, 1884. Tsihaili-
Beliah.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 211, 1846.
Tsihailiih.— Ibid. TaihaliB.— Gibbs in Cont. N.
A. Ethnol., 1, 171, 1877. Tti-he-Us.— Eells in letter
of Feb., 1886.
Chehalis (StsEe^lis). A Cowichan tribe
living along the middle course of Harri-
Bon r., Brit. Col. Chehalis and Koalekt
were their villages. Pop. (of tribe or vil-
lage) 112 in 1902.
Chehales.— Can. Ind. Aff. for 1880,317. Chehalis.—
Ibid., 1901, pt. II, 158. Saelis.— Brit. Col. map,
Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872. SUEe'lis.— Boas in Rep.
Brit. A. A. S., 454, 1899 (the village).
Cheheln. A flan of the Acheha phratry
of the ancient Timucua in Florida. —
Pareja {ca. 1612) quoted by Gatschet
in Am. Philos. Soc. Proc, 492, 1878.
Cheikikarachada ( * they call themselves
.after a buffalo'). A Wmnebago gens.
Buffalo.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 157,' 1877. Oha'-riL—
Ibid. Toe i-ki'-k»-ra'-to»-da.— Dorsey in 15th Rep.
B. A. E. 240, 1897.
Chein. Mentioned by Oilate (Doc.
InM., XVI, 114, 1871) as a pueblo of New
Mexico in 1598; doubtless situated in the
Salinas, in the vicinity of Abo, and in all
probability occupied by the Tigua or the
Piros.
Cheindekhotding ( ' place where he was
dug up'). A Hupa village on Trinity
r., Cal.
Chan-ta-ko-da.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
Ill, 73, 1877. Tceindeqotdin. — (iiKldard, Hnpa, 13,
1903.
Chekase's Yillage. A former Potawatomi
village on the w. side of Tippecanoe r., be-
tween Warsaw and Mono<|uet, Kosciusko
CO., Ind. The reserve on which it was sit-
uated was sold in 1886. The name, which is
also sjx^lled Checose and Chicase {chakosi,
* short of stature* ), is that of a chief who
formerly residcni there. (j. M.)
Chekhnhaton ('kettle with legs'). A
band of the Oglala Teton Sioux.
6efi-huha-tog.— Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th
Rep. B. A. E. , 220, 1897. Tceq-huha-to". —Ibid.
Chekilli (from achikilldnj * making a
short step backward.' — Gatschet). The
principal chief of the Creek confederacy
at the |>eriod of the settlement of the
Georgia colony in 1733, having succeeded
the '* Emperor Bream" on the death of
the latter. He appears to have been
one of the Creeks who visited England
with Tomochichi in that year. In 1735,
as ** Emperor of the Upner and Lower
Creeks," he heade<l a delegation in a
council with the English at Savannah,
on which occasion he recited the na-
tional legend of the Creeks, as recorded
in picto^raphs upon a buffalo skin, which
was delivered to the commissioners and
afterward hung up in the London office
of the colony. It is now lost^ but the
translation ha« lx?en preserved, and has
been ma<le the subject of a brief paper
by Brinti^m and an extended notice by
Gatschet. In 1752 Chekilli was residing
at Coweta, and although still regarded as
principal ruler of the confederacy had
delegated his active authority to Mafatche,
the war chief, a younger man. The name
appears also as Chiggilli and TchikilP.
See Bosom worth, MS. Jour., 1752, copy
in B. A. E. ; Brinton, Nat. Leg, Chahta-
Bull. 30—06-
-16
242
OHEKOALCH CHEMEHUEVl
[B. A. E.
Muskokee Tribes, in Hist. Mag., Feb.,
1870; Gatschet, Creek Migr. L«g., i, ii,
1884, 1888. (j. M.)
Chekoalch. A Squawmish village coni-
munity on Burrard inlet, Brit. Col.
Toeko'altc.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474,
1900.
Chekwa ( prob. from chiiig^nd, 'thunder
rolls'). Given by Morgan (Anc. Soe.,
167, 1878) as the Thunder gens of the
Potawatonii.
Chelamela. A nniall division of the
Kalapooian family formerly living on
Long Tom cr., a w. tributary of Willa-
mette r., Greg. They were included in
the Dayton treaty of 1855. Nothing in
known of their customs, and they are
now extinct.
CaielameU.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1855^, 19, 1873.
La-malle. — Ross, Adventures, 236, 1849. Long
Tom.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1865), 19,1873.
Cheli. The Spruce clan of the Tewa
pueblo of Hano, Ariz.
Oa'-la-bi.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. K., 39, 1891
iHopi name). Tce'-li.— Ibid, (own name).
V-co.— Ibid. (Navahoname).
Gkelly (pron. shay-ee, frequently shai/j
Spanish corruption of Navaho Tse'gi, or
Tset/iy * among the cliffs. ' — Matthews ) . A
canyon on the Navaho res., n. e. Ariz., in
which are numerous ancient cliff-dwell-
ings. Cortez in 1799 (Pac. R. R. Rep., iii,
pt. 3, 119, 1856) gave the name (Chell4)
to a Navaho settlement, but this is true
only in so far as the canyon contains
numerous scattered hogans or huts.
Chemanis. A Cowichan settlement on
the E. coast of Vancouver id., i)re8umably
on the bay of the same name.
Chemainis. — Can. Ind. AfT. for 1891, map. Che-
manis.— Brit. Col, map, Victoria, 1872.
Chemapho. Mentioned in the Dayton
treaty of 1855 as a Kalapooiaii band.
Chem-a-pho.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1855), 19, 1S73.
Maddy Band. —Ibid.
Chemelmeyi. A Shoshonean tribe, ap-
parently an offshoot of the Paiute, for-
merly inhabiting the e. bank of the Rio
Colorado from Bill Williams fork to the
Needles and extending westward as far as
Providence mts., Cal., their chief seat
being Chemehuevi valley, which stretches
for 5 m. along the Colorado and nearly
as far on either side. When or how
they acquired possession of what appears
to nave been Yuman territory is not
known. They may possibly have been
seen by Alarcon, who navigated the Rio
Colorado in 1540; but if so, they are not
mentioned by pame. Probably the first
definite reference to the Chemehuevi is
that by Fray Francisco Garc^s, who
passed through their country in journey-
mg from the Yuma to the Mohave, and
again from lower Kern r. to the latter
tribe on his way to the pueblo of Oraibi
in N. E. Arizona in 1775-76. Among the
Indians whom Garc^^s saw, or of whom
he heard, are the Chemegu6, Chemegu^
Cuajdla, Chemegu^ Sevinta, and Che-
meguaba, the first and last mentioned
being apparently the Chemehuevi, while
the others are the Virgin River Paiute
and Shi V wits, respectively, **Chem^u^"
here being used somewhat in the sense
of denoting Shoshonean aflSnity. In
passing down the Colorado from the Mo-
liave rancherias Garc^s does not mention
any Chemehuevi or other Indians in
Chemehuevi valley or elsewhere on the
river until the Yuman Alchedoma
('Malchedunes " ), some distance below,
were reached. He found the Cheme-
huevi in the desert immediately s. w.,
w., and N. w. of the Mohave. The same
observer remarks that they wore Apache
moccasins, antelope-skin shirts, and a
white headdress like a cap, ornamented
with the crest feathers of a bird, prol)a-
bly the roadrunner. They were very
swift of foot, were friends of the Ute
(Paiute?), Yavapai Tejua, and Mohave,
and when the latter ** break theif weap-
ons ' * ( keep the peace ) , so do they also. It
is said that they occupied at this time the
country between the BeAem^ (Panamint
and Serrano) and the Colorado ** on the N.
side" as far as the Ute, and extending
to another river, n. of the Colorado, where
they had their fields. They made bas-
kets, and those whom Garc^s saw **all
carried a crook besides their weapons,*'
which was used for pulling gophers, rab-
bits, etc. , from their burrows. Their lan-
guage was noted as distinct from that of
the other Rio Colorado tribes, as in fact
it is, these being Yutnan (see Garc^s,
Diary, Coues ed., op.cit., 1900; Heintzel-
man (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th
Cong., 3d sess., 1857; Pacific R. R. Rep.,
Ill, pt. 3, 1856). Physically the Cheme-
huevi api>ear to have been inferior to the ,
Yuma and Mohave. Ives properly cred-
its them with being a wandering people,
traveling ** great distances on hunting
and predatory excursions, ' ' and although
they did live mainly on the natural
products of the desert, they farmed on a
small scale where possible. Like the
other Colorado r. tribes, they had no
canoes, but used rafts made of bundles
of reeds. Their number was estimated by
Leroux about 1853 at 1,500, probablj^ an
excessive estimate for the whole tribe;
in 1866 Thomas estimated their popula-
tion at 750. In 1903 there were 300 on
the Colorado River res. and probably a
few under the Moapa agency. It is also
likely that a few are not under any
agent but roam as Paiute. Of the organ-
ization of the Chemehuevi nothing posi-
tive is known. Palonies is mentioned
by Hoffman (Bull. Essex Inst., xvii, 28,
1 885 ) as a subdivision . ( h. w. h. a. l. k. )
Ah'alakit.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 160, 1886
(•small bows': Pima name). Ohe-ma-hua-vas.—
Thomas, Yuma MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1868.
Che-ma-wa-was.— Heintzelman (185S) in H. R.
BULL. 30]
CHEMEKETAS — ^CHEXTANSITZAN
243
Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d seas., 1857. Ohexnohtte-
▼it.— Shipp, De Soto and Florida, 131, 1881 (mis-
print). Chomebet— Garc^ (1775-76), Diary, 219,
1900. OhemegerabM.— Simpflon in Rep. Sec. War,
57,1850(mi8quotedfromRuxton). Ghemeguaba.—
Garcia (1775-76), Diary, 353, 1900. GhemeguaTa.—
Escudero, Not. Estad. de Chihuahua, 228, 1834.
Ohexnegue.— Garcds (1775-76), Diary, 444, 1900
(mentioned separatelyfrom " Chemeguaba," but
aoubtless the same), uhemehnevis.— Haines, Am.
Ind., 189, 1888 (minprint). Ohemehuevas.— Cush-
ing In Atl. Mo., 544, Oct., 1882.— Chexn-e-hue-vis.—
Whipple, Pac. R. R. Rep., iii, pt. 3, 16, 1856.
OhexnehueTis.— Ives, Col. Riv., 54, 1861 (mis-
print). Ohem-e-htte-Titz.— Ibid. Chemehuewas.—
Jones in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 215. 1870. Ohexneona-
haa.— Mayer, Mexico, ii, 38, 1854. Ohemequaba.—
Gortez (1799) quoted in Pac. R. R. Rep., in. pt. 3,
126, 1856. Ohemeqtte.— Ibid, (see Chemegue above).
Ohemigaabos.— Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc.
Lond., II, 276. 1850 (misquoting Ruxton). Che-
miheavis.— Ind. AiT. Rep., 578, 1865. Ohemihua-
hua.— Gibbs, MS. letter to Higgins, B. A. £., 1866.
Ohamihoaras.— Maltby in Ind. AfF. Rep., 94, 1866.
OhemihuaTes.— Gibbs, MS., B. A. £., 1866. Ohemi-
hiwvaa.— Antisell in Pac. R. R. Rep., vii, pt. 4. 1(M,
1854. Ohemihuevia, — ^Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June
12, 1863. Oheminarea.— Maltby in Ind. AfT. Rep.,
94, 1866. OhimawaTa.— Adams in H. R. Mi.sc. Doc.
12, 41st Cong., 8d sess., 12, 1870. Ohimohinves.—
Maltby in Ind. AiT. Rep., 102, 1866. Ohimehuevas.—
Bhrenberg in Ind. AfT. Rep., 139, 1865. Chime-
hueTe.— KingHley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 189,
1883. Ohimenwhttebet.— Mollhausen, Pacific, ii,
274, 1858. OhioMwawas of Arixona.— Ingalls in H.
R. Ex. Doc. 66, 42d Cong., 3d sess., 2, 1873. Chim-
huevas.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 175, 1875. Chi-mi-hua-
hua.— Heintzelman in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th
Cong.. 3d sess., 44, 1857. Ohimohueois.— Bourke,
Moquis of Ariz., 228, 1884. Ohim-ue-htte-vas.—
Hodge, Arizona, 159, 1877. Ohim-woy-oa.— Whip-
ple, Exped., 17, 1851. Eche-xno-hua-vas .—Thomas,
Yuma MS. vocab, B. A. E., 1868. Eohi-mo-hua-
Ta».— Ibid. Itchi-xnchuevea.— (Jatschet.MS., B. A.E.
(Mohave and Walapai name). Kemahwivi.- Ind.
Aflf. Rep., 246, 1877. Kat-hat-e-vatoh.— Whipple,
Pac. R. R. Rep., in, pt. 3, 16, map, 1856 (Yuma
name [' northerners j). Kat-jus.— Heintzelman
in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 44,
1857. Simoiuevei.- Froebel, Seven Years' Trav.,
511, 1859. TanUwait— Ind. AfT. Rep., 251, 1877.
Ta'n-U'wato.— Powell, MS., B. A. E Csoutheni
men ': own name). Tontewaits.— ten Kate, Reizen
in N. Am., 122, 1885.
OhemeketaB. Supposed to have been
one of the Kalapooian bands formerly
near Salem, Greg. — Ingersoll in Harper's
Mag., 769, Oct., 1882.
cEemetunne ('people on the ocean
coast M. A Tututunne village or group
of villages formerly at the mouth of
Rogue r., Greg. The people were taken
to Siletz res. , Greg. , in June, 1 856. A few
individuals are still to l)e found on that
reservation, where they are officially
known as Joshuas, a corruption of Fa''-«/jT/,
their Alsea name; and a few others still
live near their old home.
I-i'oa-we t&ie.— Everette, MS. Tutu vocab., B. A.
E., 1883 (trans.: 'people by the mossy swamp').
Joahua.— Kewcomb in Ind. AfT. Rep., 162, 1861.
Joahuta.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 22, 1861.
Joahuts.— Palmer in Ind. AfT. Rep. 1856,219,1857.
To«'-ni«.— Dorsey, MS. Tutu vocab., B. A. E., 1884
(*on the coast of the ocean*: Tututunne game).
Toe-me' tfo^.— Everette, MS. Tutu vocab., B. .\. E.,
1888 (trans. : * people by the mossy water' ) . Toe-me'
^ibmC— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 233,
1890. To^xnS'^tflim*.- Dorsey, Coquille MS. vo-
cab., B. A. E., 1884 (Coquille name). Ta'-ou.—
Dorsey, Alsea MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884
(pron. Ya'-shu, Alsea name, the term from which
"Joflhua" is derived). Ya'-ou-me'^ibmS.— Dor-
sey, Chetco MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Chetco
name). Tah-thoots.— Gibbs, MS. on coast tribes
Oregon, B. A. E., 1856. Yahthute^— Ind. Aff.
Rep. 1854, 496, 1855. Yadi-ue.— Abbott, MS. Co-
quille census, B. A. E., 1858. Ya-stt-chah.— Pres.
Mess., Ex. Doc. 39, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 2, 1862.
Yasuchaha. — I>omencch, Deserts N. Am., i, map,
1860. Ya«uohan.— Sch(X)lcraft, Ind. Tribes, in,
maps, 96, 200, 1853. Ya-sut.— Schumacher in Bull.
G. and G. Surv., in, 31, 1877. Yoshuway.- Ever-
ette, MS. Tutu vocab., B. A. E., 1883.
Ghemisez (apparently from Spanish
chamizoy a species of small cane). A
Pima village on the Rio Gila in Arizona;
pop. 312 in 1858.— Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep.,
208, 1858.
Chemung. An Iroijuois village, prob-
ably of the Seneca, formerly on or near
the site of the present Chemung, N. Y.
It was destroyed by Sullivan in 1779.
An older village of the name stood about
8 m. farther down Chemung r. (j. m.)
Chcmcney.— Pemberton {ca. 1792) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 1st sess., ii, 176, 1810. Ohemong. clones
(17^0) in N. Y. Doc. (^ol. Hist., viii, 785, 1857.
Chemung.— Livermore (1779) in X. H. Hist. Soc.
Coll., VI, 321, 1850.
Cheiiachaath( Tc'e^imtc\iath ) . A division
of the Toipiart, a Nootka tribe. — Boas in
6th Rt^p. N. \V. Tribes Can., 32, 1890.
Chenango (Seneca: Ochenango, 'large bull
thistles.' — Hewitt). A former village on
the river of the same name, about Bing-
hamtoii, Broome co., N. Y. It was set-
tled in 1748 by the Nanticoke from Mary-
land, under Iroquois protection. Soon
thereafter they were joined by a part of
the Shawnee, together with remnants of
the Mahican and Wappinger tribes. The
whole lx)dy moved w. about the l)egin-
ning of the French and Indian war in
1754, and were mostly incc^rporated with
the Dela wares. ( j. m. )
Chenango.— Guy Park conf. 11775) in N. Y, Doc.
Col. Hist., VIII, 560, 1857. Ohenengo.— Brown in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., i.x, 120, 1804. Oche-
nang. — Morpun, League Iroq., 473, 1851 (Oneida
name of Chenango r. and Binghamton). Om-
wingo. — Homann Heirs' map, 1756. Oswingo. —
Mandrillon, Spectateur Amdricain. map 1786.
Otfteningo.— Ft Johnson conf. (1756) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., VII, 67, 1856. Otiiningo.— Johnson (1756),
ibid., 141. Otsininko.- Ft Johnson conf. (1767).
ibid., 2.53. Sohenenk. — Pyrlaeus (rn. 1760) quoted
by Barton, New Views, app. 4, 1798. Shenengo.—
Ibid. Utsanango.— Croghan (1765) in Monthly
Am. Jour. Cieol.. 271, 1831.
Chenco, Chenko. See dtnnkey.
Chenlin. A former settlement of mixed
Yuit Eskimo and Chukchi, between
Aeon and Wuteen, n. e. Siberia. The
greater part of its inhabitants perished by
famine in 1880; the remainder turned
to reindeer breeding or emigrated to
Cherinak and St Lawrence id.
ee'nlin.— Bogoras, Chukcbee, 29, 19W.
ChenpoBol ( * dwelling below ' ) . A tribe
of the Patwin division of the Copehan
family, formerly living on lower Cache
cr., "V olo CO., Cal. — Powers in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., Ill, 219, 1877.
Cheiitansitzan. — A Yukonikhotana vil-
lage on the N. bank of Yukon r., 30 m.
below the mouth of Melozi r., Alaska.
244
CHENTSITHALA— OHERAW
[B. A.!].
Ohentsithala. A Naskotin village on
Fraser r., Brit. Col., at the mouth of
Quesnelle r.
Ohichula.— Brit. Col. map, Victoria, 1872. dues-
neL—Morice, Notes on W. D6n6s, 24. 1893. Ques-
nelle Mouth.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit.
Col., map, 1884. Toantsithal'a.— Morice in Trans.
Roy. Soc.Can., x, sec, 2, 109,1892.
Ghenughivata (Odjino^*hia^dd,\ * it is a
sinew.* — Hewitt). An Onondaga village
in New York in 1774. — Johnstown conf.
(1774) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., viii, 506,
1857.
Gheokhba ( * sleepv' kettle ' ) . A division
of the Hunkpapa Teton Sioux.
6e-oMba.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 221, 1897.
Oi-o-ho'-pa.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val. , 376, 1862. Sleepy kettle band.— Culbertson in
Smithson. Rep. 1850, 141, 1861 (under White Feet,
O^jah-ska-ska). Tce-oqba. — Dorsey in 15th Rep.
B.A.E., 221, 1897.
Ghepanoo. A village of the Weapome-
ioc in 1586 on Albemarle sd., in Perqui-
mans CO., N. C.
Ohapanun.— Dutch map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., I. 1856. Ghepanoo.— Lane (1586) in Smith
(1629), Virginia, i,8/, repr. 1819. Ohepanu.— Smith,
ibid., I, map. 112. Ohepanuu.— De Bry, map (ca.
1590). in Hawks, N. C, I, 1859. Chepawy.— Mar-
tin, N. C, I. 13, 1829. Chippanum.— Lane (1586)
in Smith, op. cit, i, 90.
Ghepenafa. A Kalapooian tril)e, some-
times regarded as a subdivision of the
Lakmiut, formerly residing at the forks
of St Marys cr., near Corvallis, Oreg.
They are now on Grande Ronde res.,
being officially known as Marys River
Indians, and number about 25. (l. f.)
Api'nefu.— Gtitschet, Calapooya MS., B. A. E., 1877
(so called bv the other Calapooya). CHiep-en-a-
hid. Treat., 19, 1873. Mt— "- —
pho.— U. S. Ind. Treat., 19, 18
lu.
River. —
Smith in Ind. AflF. Rep.. 56, 1875. KarVt River.—
Victor in Ovcriand Month., vii, 346, 1871. Maryi-
viUe.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 12, 1863.
Fineifu.— Gatschet in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, xii,
213, 1899. Tsa mpl'nefa ami'm.— Oatschet, Cala-
pooya MS., B. A. E., 1877 (Calapooya name).
Gheponta'B Village. A former Choctaw
village on the w. bank of Tombigbee
r., in extremes, e. Choctaw co., Ala. —
Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., Ala. map,
1900.
GhepoBhkeyine ('swelled young buffalo
buir). A subgens of the Arukhwa, the
Buffalo gens of the Iowa.
Tee p*o-oke yin'-e.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
239, 1897.
OheponBBa. A name applied by La Salle
and Allouez to a band of Illinois Indians,
probably from a chief or leader of a por-
tion of those collected at Kaskaskia by
La Salle's invitation; on the other hand
it may have been gfven to those Indians
from 'a river (apparently Kaskaskia r.),
in 8. w. Illinois, to which the name Che-
poussa was sometimes applied by early
explorers. These people were probably
connected with the Michigamea.
GheponMea.— La Salle (1680) in Hist. Mag., Ists.,
V, 197, 1861. OhepontU.— ProciJs Verbal [1682) in
Margry, D6c., ii, 189, 1877. Ohepouioa.— La Salle
(1681), ibid., 134. Ohepoussa. —Allouez (1680),
ibid., 96. Chepouwea.— La Salle (1682), ibid., 201.
OhipousMi.— Tonti {ca. 1680) in French, Hist. Coll.
La., I, 82, 1^6. OhoponMa,— Hennepin, New
Discov., 310, 1698.
Cheqaet, Ghequit See Chicktvil.
Oheraw. An important tribe, very prob-
ably of Siouan stock, formerly ranging in
central Carolina, e. of the Blue ridge, from
about the present Danville, Va., south-
ward to the neighborhood of Cheraw,
S. C, which takes its name from them.
In numbers they may have stood next to
the Tuscarora among the North Carolina
tribes, but are less prominent in history
by reason of their almost complete de-
struction before the white settlements
had reached their territory. They are
mentioned first in the De Soto narrative
for 1540, under the name Xuala, a corrup-
tion of Suali, the name by which they
are traditionally known to the Cherokee,
who remember them as having anciently
lived beyond the Blue ridge &om Ashe-
ville. In the earlier Carolina and Vir-
ginia records they are commonly known
as Saraw, and at a later period as Cheraw.
We first hear of ** Xuala province'* in
1540, apparently in the mountain country
southward from Asheville. In 1672,
Lederer, from Indian information, located
them in the same general region, or possi-
bly somewhat farther n. e., *' where the
mountains bend to the west,*' and says
that this portion of the main ridge was
called "Sualy mountain" from the tribe.
This agrees with Cherokee tradition.
Some years later, but previous to 1700,
they settled on Dan r. near the s. line of
Vii^nia, where the marks of their fields
were found extending for several miles
alon^ the river by Byrd, in 1728, when
running the dividing line between the 2
colonies. There seem to have been 2 vil-
lages, as on a map of 1760 we find this
place designated as * * I^wer Saura Town, ' '
while about 30 m. above, on the s. side
of the Dan and between it and Town fork,
is another place marked ** Upper Saura
Town." They are also alluded to by
J. F. D. Smyth (Tour in U. S., 1784), who
says the upper town was insignificant.
About the year 1710, being haras^d by the
Iroquois, they abandoned their home on
the Dan and moving s. e. joined the Key-
auwee. The colonists of North Carolina
being dissatisfied at the proximity of these
and other tribes. Gov. Eden declared war
against the Cheraw, and applied to Vir*
ginia for assistance. This Gov. Spots-
wood refused, as he believed the people
of Carolina were the aggressors; neverthe-
less the war was earned on against them
and their allies by the Carolinas until the
defeat and expulsion of the Yamasi in
1716. During this period complaint was
made against the Cheraw, who were de-
clared to be responsible for most of the
mischief done n. of Santee r., and of en-
deavoring to draw into their alliance the
smaller coast tribes. It was asserted
by the Carolinians that arms were sup-
BULL. 30]
CHERINAK CHEROKEE
245
plied them from Virginia. At the close
of the Yamasi war the Cheraw were dwell-
ing on the upper Pedee near the line
between the Carolinas, where their name
is perpetuated in the town of Clieraw,
S. C. Their number in 1715, according
to Rivers, was 510, but this estimate prob-
ably included the Ke van wee. Being still
subject to attack by the Iro(|Uoi8, they
finally — between 1726 and 1739 — became
incorporatcni with the Catawba, with
whom at an earlier date they had been at
enmity. They are mentioned as with the
Catawba but speaking their own distinct
dialect as late as 1743 (Adair). In 1759
a party of 45 ** Charraws, ' ' some of whom
were under their chief, **King Johnny,'*
joined the Englisli in the exi>eiiition
against Ft Du Quesne. Tlie last notice of
them is in 17(58, when their remnant,
reduced b^ war and disease to 50 or 60,
were still living witli the Catawba, (.i. m. )
Am'-SuwaO!.— Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. K., 509,
1900 f Cherokee name: also Ani'-Suwd'ht).
Ohanutlu.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v. 793, 1855. Cha-
rah.— Adair, Hist. Inda., 24, 1775. Charraws.—
Gregg, Hist. Old Cheraws, 12. 1867. Oharrow*.—
Ibid., 1. Ohawraw.— Smyth, Tour in U. S., i. 207,
1784. Cherawa.— jj. C. Gazette (1739) quoted by
Gregg, Hi8t. Old Cheraws, 9, 1867. Ohouala.— De
PIsle.map, ca. 1700. Chovala.— Shipp. DeSoto and
Florida, 366, 1881 (misprint). Joara.— Vandera
(1567) ill Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., 15, 18,57. Lower
Saoratown.— Gusaefeld,map U. S., 1784. Saras.—
Lederer, Discoveries, 2, 1672. Baraui.— War map
of 1711-15 in Winsor, Hist. America, v, 846, 1887.
Sarau town.— Jeff er>'8, Fr. Dom. Am., i, map. 134,
1761. Sarawt.— Virginia Council (1716) in N. C.
Records, n, 247, 1886. Saraw Town.— Lattrc, map
of U. S., 1784. Sarrawt.— Doc. of 1715, ibid., 251.
Basa.— Lederer, Discoveries, 2, 1672. Saura,—
Vaugondy, map Partie de TAm^^rique Sept., 1755.
Bauro.— Byrd (1728), Hist. Dividing Line,i,20,rei)r.
1866. Bawara.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq.
Soc., II, 86, 1836. Sawras.— Doc. of 1716 in N.C.
Records, ii, 246, 1S8«). Sawraw.— Ibid., 243.
Sawro.— Bynl. Hist. Dividing Line. I, 113. 1866.
Sawro's,- Ibid. Sharawas.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
V, 793. 1855. Suali.— Moonoy, Siouan Tribes of the
East, 57, 1894 (Chert)lcee form). Sualy.— Lederer,
Discoveries, 2, 1672. Swali.— Moonev, Siouan
Tribes of the East, 57, 1894 (Cherolcee form).
Upper Banratown.— Smyth, Tour in U. 8.. 253-259,
17S4. Xoala.— Garcila.s8o de la Vega (1540), Fla.,
135, 1723. Xualla.— Gentl. of Elvas (1540) quoted
by Shipp, De Soto and Fla., 366, 1881.
Oherinak. An Eskimo village near C.
Ulakhpen, n. e. Siberia; pop. 77 in 14
houses about 1895; 58 in 8 houses in 1901.
Thev are regarded aa so seamanlike and
hardy that they might easily have come
from the Alaskan shores.
6e|i'nak.— Bogoras, Chukchee, 29, 1904. Wute'-
elit.— Ibid., 20 (Chukchi name of people).
Wute'cn.— Ibid., 29. Wu'turen.— Ibid.
Cherkhu. The westernmost Chilula vil-
lage on Redwood or., n. w. Cal.
Oherr'h-quuh.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
III, 139, 1853 (Yurok name).
OhemofBki. An Aleut village on Uiia-
laaka, Aleutian ids., Alaska; pop. 44 in
1833 according t^) Veniaminoff; 70 in
1874 according to Shiesnekov; in 1880,
101; in 1890, 78.
Ohemofski.— Sarichef (1792) quoted by Baker.
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Chexaovskoe.— Veniam-
inoff, Zapiski, ii, 202, 1840. Chcmovtkoi.— Elliott,
Cond. Aff. Alaska, 225, 1875.— Chemovtky.— I'e-
troff, 10th Census, Alaska, 23, 18S4. Tschemows-
koje.— Holmberg. Ethnol. 8kizz., map, 1855.
Cherokee. A jx)werful detached tribe
of the Iroquoian family, formerly holding
the whole mountain region of the s. Alle-
ghenies, in s. w. Virginia, w. North Car-
CHEROKEE MAN. ( BALL Player)
olina and South Carolina, n. (Jeorgia, e.
Tennessee, and n. k. Alabama, and claim-
ing even to the Ohio r. The tribal name
is a corruption of Tsalftgt or Tsaragl, the
name by which they conmionly calleil
themselves, and which may be derived
from ihi* ChoctsLW chiltik-kff 'cave people'.
246
CHEROKEE
[b. a. s.
in allusion to the numerous caves in
their mountain country. The>^ some-
times also call themselves Amf-Y'dn^-
wiyd\ *real people,* or AnV-KUu^hwagty
•people of Kituhwa/ one of their most
important ancient settlements. Their
northern kinsmen, the Irocjuois, called
them Oyatagero7io7l\ * inhabitants of the
cave country' (Hewitt), and the Dela-
wares and connected tribes called them
Kittuwaf from the settlement alreadv
noted. They seem to be identical with
the Rickohockans, who invaded central
Virginia in 1658, and with the ancient
Talligewi, of Delaware tradition, who
were represented to have been driven
southward from the upper Ohio r. region
by the combined forces of the Iroquois
and Delawares.
The language has three principal dia-
lects: (1) mattj or Lower, spoken on the
CHEROKEE GIRL
heads of Savannah r., in South Carolina
and Georgia; (2) Middle, spoken chiefly
on the waters of Tuckasegee r., in w.
North Carolina, and now the prevail-
ing djalect on the East Cherokee res.;
(3) A^tdliy Mountain or Upper, spoken
throughout most of upper Georgia, e.
Tennessee, and extreme w. North Caro-
lina. The lower dialect was the only
one which had the r sound, and is now
extinct. The upper dialect is that which
has been exclusively used in the native
literature of the tritle.
Traditional, linguistic, and archeolo^ic
evidence shows that the Cherokee orig-
inated in the N., but they were found
in possession of the s. Allegheny region
when first encountered by De Soto in
1540. Their relations with the Carolina
colonies began 150 years later. In 1736
the Jesuit (?) Pribef started the first mis-
sion among them, and attempted to or-
ganize their government on a civilized
basis. In 1759, under the leadership of
A^gansta'ta (Oconostota), they b^an
war with the English of Carolina. In the
Revolution they took sides against the
Americans, ancl continued the struggle
almost without interval until 1794. Dur-
ing this period parties of the Cherokee
pushed down Tennessee r. and formed new
settlements at Chickamauga and other
points about the Tennessee- Alabama line.
Shortly after 1800, missionary and educa-
tional work was established among them,
and in 1820 they adopted a regular form
of government modeled on that of the
United States. In the meantime large
numbers of the more conservative Chero-
kee, wearied by the encroachments of
the whites, had crossed the Mississippi
and made new homes in the wilderness
in what is now Arkansas. A year or two
later Sequoya (q. v.), a mixed-blood, in-
vented the alphabet, which at once raised
them to the rank of a literary people.
At the height of their prosperity gold
was discovered near the present Dablone-
ga, Ga., within the limits of the Cherokee
Nation, and at once a powerful agitation
was begun for the removal of the Indiani^.
After years of hopeless struggle under the
leadership of their great chief, John
Ross, they were compelled to submit to
the inevitable, and by the treaty of New
Echota, Dec. 29, 181^5, the Cherokee sold
their entire remaining territory and
agreed to remove l)eyond the Mississippi
to a country there to be set apart for
them — the present (1905) Cherokee Na-
tion in Indian Ter. The removal was
accomplished in the winter of 1838-39,
after considerable hardship and the loss
of nearly one-fourth of their number, the-
unwilling Indians being driven out by
military force and making the long jour-
ney on foot. On reaching their destina-
tion they reorganized their national gov-
ernment, with their capital at Tahlequah,
admitting to equal privil^es the earlier
emigrants, known as "old settlers.*' A
part of the Arkansas Cherokee had pre-
viously gone down into Texas, where they
had oDteined a grant of land in the e.
part of the state from the Mexican gov-
ernment. The later Texan revolutionists
refused to recognize their rights, and in
spite of the efforts of Gen. Sam Hous-
ton, who defended the Indian claim, a
conflict was precipitated, resulting, in
1839, in the killing of the Cherokee chief.
Bowl (q. v.), with a large number of his
men, by the Texan troops, and the expul-
sion of the Cherokee from Texas.
BULL. 301
CHEROKEE
247
When the main body of the inlm was
removed to the W., several hundred fugi-
tives escaped -to the mountains, where
they lived as refugees for a time, until, in
1842, through the efforts of Wm. H.
Thomas, an influential trader, thev re-
ceived permission to remain on lands set
apart for their use in w. North Carolina.
They constitute the present eastern band
of Cherokee, residmg chiefly on the
Qualla res. in Swain and Jackson cos.,
with several outlying settlements.
The Cherokee in the Cherokee Nation
were- for years divided into two hostile
factions, those who had favored and
those who had opposed the treaty of re-
moval. Hardly nad these differences
been adjusted when the civil war burst
upon them . Being slave owners and sur-
roundeil })y southern influences, a large
part of each of the Five Civilized Trilx^s
of the territory enlisted in the service of
the Confederacy, while others adhere<l to
the National (iovernment. The territory
of the Cherokee was overrun in turn by
both armies, and the close of the war
found them prostrated. By treaty in
1866 thev were readmitted to the protec-
tion of the United States, but obliged to
liberate their negro slaves and admit
them to equal citizenship. In 1867 and
I 1870 the Delawarea and Shawnee, re-
I spectively, numbering together alx)nt
• 1,750, were admitted from Kansas and
incorporated with the Nation. In 1889
the Cherokee Commission (see (binmia-
sion) was created for the purpose of
abolishing the tribal governments and
opening the territories to white settle-
ment, with the result that after 15 years
of negotiation an agreement was made
bv which the government of the Cher-
okee Nation came to a final en<l Mar.
3, 1906: the Indian lands were divided,
and the Cherokee Indians, native and
adopted, became citizens of the rnite<l
States.
The Cherokee have 7 clans, viz: Ani^-
wa^ya (Wolf), Ani'-Kawl^ (Deer), Ani^-
Tsi^skwa (Bird), Ani^vaMT (Paint),
Ani'-Sahd'ni, Ani^-Ga'tag^wT, Ani^-CJi-
Wht. The names of the last 3 can not 1h»
translated with certainty. There is evi-
dence that there were anciently 14, which
by extinction or absorption have l)een
reduced to their present number. The
Wolf clan is the largest and most im-
portant. The *' seven clans'' are fre-
quently mentioned in the ritual prayers
and even in the printed laws of the tribe.
They seem to have had a connection with
the " seven mother towns '' of the Chero-
kee, described by Cuming in 1730 as
having each a chief, whose office was
hereditary in the female line.
The Cherokee are probably about a^
numerous now as at any period in their
history. With the exception of an esti-
mate in 17150, which placed them at about
20,000, most of those up to a recent
period gave them 12,000 or 14,000, and in
1758 they were computed at only 7,500.
The majority of the earlier estimates are
probably too low, as the Cherokee occu-
pied HO extensive a territory that only a
part of them came in contact with the
whites. In 1708 (iov. Johnson estimated
them at 60 villages and "at least 500
men" (Rivers, So. Car., 238, 1^56). In
1715 they were officially reported to num-
ber 11,210 (Upper, 2,760; Middle, 6,:«0;
Lower, 2,100), including 4,000 warriors,
and living in 60 villages (Upper, 19;
Middle, 30; I^)wer, 11). In 1720 they
were estimated to have been reduced to
about 10,0(X), and again in the same vear
reporteil at about 1 1,500, including af)out
3,800 warriors ((Iov. Johnson's Ilep. in
Kivers, op. cit., 93, 94, 103, 1874). In
1729 they were estimated at 20,000, with
at least 6,(KX) warriors and 64 towns and
villages (Stevens, Hist. (Ja., i, 48, 1847).
They are said to have lost 1,000 warriors
in 1739 from smallpox and rum, and they
suffered a steady decrease during their
wars with the whites, extending from
1760 until after the close of the Revolu-
tion. Those in their original homes had
again increased to 16,542 at the time of
their forced removal to the W. in 1838,
but lost nearly one-fourth on the journey,
311 perishing in a steamboat accident on
the Mississippi. Those already in the
\\\, before the removal, were (estimated
at about 6,000. The civil war in 1861-65
again checked their progress, but they
recovered from its effects in a remark-
a])lv short time, and in 1885 numbere<l
abo*nt 19,000, of whom alM>ut 17,000 were
in Indian Ter., together with al)OUt 6,000
adopted whites, negroes, Dela wares, and
Shawnee, while the remaining 2,000 were
still in their ancient homes in the E. Of
this eastern band, 1,376 were on Qualla
res., in Swain and Jackson cos., N. C;
about 300 are on Cheowah r., in Graham
CO., N. C, ^vhile the remainder, all of
mixed blood, are scattered over e. Ten-
nessee, N. Georgia, and Alabama. The
eastern band lost about 300 by smallpox
at the (!lose of the civil war. In 1902
there were officially reported 28,016 per-
sons of Cherokee blood, including all
degrees of admixture, in the Cherokee
Nation in the Territory, but this includes
several thousand individuals formerly re-
pudiated by the tribal courts. There
were also living in the nation about 3,000
adopted negro freedmen, more than 2,000
adopted whites, and about 1,700 adopted
Delaware, Shawnee, and other Indians.
The tribe has a larger proportion of white
admixturethan any other of the Five Civ-
ilized Tribes. See Mooney, Myths of
CHEROKEE
the Cherokee, 19th Rep. B. A. E., 1902;
Royce, Cherokee Nation, 5th Rep. B. A.
E., 1887.
The following were Cherokee settle-
ments: Aguaciuiri (?), Amahyaski, Ama-
kalali, Amohi, Anisgavayi, Anuyi, Aquo-
hee, Aracuchi, Ateiniyi, Aumuchee, Ayah-
liyi, Big-island, Briertown, Broomtown,
Brown's Village, Buffalo Fish, Canuga,
Catatoga, Chagee, Chattanooga, Chatuga,
Cheesoheha, Chewase, Chicherohe,Chick-
amauga, Chilhowee, Conisca, Conontoroy,
Conoross, Cooweescoowee (district), Co-
tocanahut, Cowee, Coweeshee, Coyatee,
Crayfish Town, Creek Path, Crowmocker,
Crow Town, Cuclon, Cusawatee, Dulas-
tunyi, Dustayalunyi, Echota, Ecochee,
Elakulsi, Ellijay, Estatoee, ICtowah,
Fightingtown, Frogtown, Gualaniyi,
Gusti, (jwalgahi. Halfway Town, Hemp-
town, Hickory Log, High Tower Forks,
Hiwassee, Ikatikunahita, Itseyi, Ivy
Log, Johnstown, Jore, Kalanunyi, Kan-
astunyi^ Kansaki, Kanutaluhi. Kawa-
nuyi, Keowee, Kituhwa, Kuhlani, Kula-
hiyi, Kulsetsiyi, Leatherwood, Ix)ng Is-
land, Lookout' Mountain, Naguchee, Nan-
atlugunyi, Nantahala, Natunli, Nayuhi,
Nickajack, Niowe, Noewe, Nowe, Nucas-
see, Nununyi, Ocoee,0conaluftee, Oconee,
Olagatano, Ooltewah, Oothcaloga, Paint
Town, Pine Log, Quacoshatchee, Qualat-
chee, Qualla, Quanusee, Quinahaqni, Rab-
bit Trap, Red Bank, Red Clay, Running
Water, Saguahi, Sanderstown, Helikwayi,
Seneca, Setsi, Sitiku, Skeinah, Soquee,
Spike Bucktown, Spring Place, Standing
Peach Tree, Stikayi, Sutali, Suwanee, Tag-
wahi, Tahla«i, Takwashnaw, Talahi, Tala-
niyi, Talking Rock, Tallulah, Taniahli,
Tanasqui (?), Tasetsi, Taskigi, Tau«tu,
Tawsee, Tekanitli, Tellico, Tennessee, Tes-
8untee,Tikaleya.*<uni,Tikwalitsi,Tlanusiyi,
Tocax, Tomassee, Toquo, Torsalla, Toxa-
way, Tricentee, Tsilaluhi, Tsiskwahi,
Tsi'stetsiyi, Tsistuyi, Tsiyahi, Tsudinun-
tiyi, Tucliarechee, Tuckaseegee, Tugaloo,
Turkeytown, Turniptown, Turtletown,
Tusquittah, Two Runs, Ustanali, Ustisti,
Valleylown, Wahyahi^ Wa.sasa, Watauga,
Willstown, and Yunsawi. (j. m.)
HohaUque. — GarcilaKso de la Vega, Florida, in,
1723. AUeg«ns.— Colden, map (1727) quoted by
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ni, 525, 1853. AUegewc—
Hind, Labrador Penin., ii. 7, 1863. Allcgcwi.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 133. 1855. Allegcwy.—
Ibid., n, 37, 1852. AlleghaM.— Hall, N. W. States,
29, 1849. Alleghanya.— Rafinesque, introd. to
Marshall, Ky., i, ai, 1824. Alle«wi.— Squier in
Beach, Ind. Misc., 26, 1877. AUi«ewi.— Hecke-
welder (1819) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
HI, 525, 1853. Allighewis.— Keane in Stanford,
Compend., 500, 1878. Baniatho.— Qatschet, Arap-
ahoMS.,B. A.E.,1880 (Arapahoname). Oaai[i.—
Doreey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (Osage
name). Callagchcalu.— McKenney and Hall, Ind.
Tribes, 1, 186, 1854. Cayaki.— Doreey, Kan.sa MS.
vocab., B. A. E.,1882 (Kansa name). Ohalakee.—
Nuttall, Jour., 124,1821. Ghalaque.— Gentleman
of Elvas (1640) in Halcluyt Soc, Florida, 60, 1851.
Chalaquies.— Barcia, Ensayo, 335, 1723 (Spanish
name). Oharakeet.— Homann Heirs* map, 1766.
Oharakevs.— Homann Heirs' map, m. 1730. Ohar-
ikees.— Doc. of 1718 quoted by Rivers, So. Car^
55. 1856. Charokeet. -Johnson (1720) quoted,
ibid., 93. 1874. Cheelake.— Barton, New Views,
xliv, 1798 (Upper Cherokee form). Oheerake.—
Adair, Am. Inds., 226, 1775. Oheerakee.— Ibid.,
137. Cheeraquc— Moore (1704) quoted by Carroll,
Hist. Coll. S. C, II, 576, 1836. Che«roke«.— Ross
{ca. 1776) quoted in Hist. Mag., 2d s., ii, 218, 1867.
Chll-l-kA.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., ii, Ixx, 1823.
ChelakMS. — Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc.,
II, 90, 1836. Chelaque*.— Nuttall, Jour., 247, 1821.
Chelekee.— Kcaiic in Stanford, Compend., 506,
1878. Chellokec— Schoohjraft, Ind. Tribes, il,
204, 1852. Chcloculffcc— White, Stat. Ga., 28, 1849
(Creek name; singular,Che-lo-kee). Ghelokees.—
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc, ii, 1(M, 1836.
Oheokect,— Johnson (1772) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
viii, 314, 1857 (misprint). Cheraguees.— Coxe,
Carolana. 11, 1741. Chcrahet,— Brlckell (1737)
quoted by Haywood, Tenn., 224, 1823. Ohera-
kees. — Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. Oherakis. —
Chauvignerie (1736) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, III, 555, 1853. Cheraquees.— Coxe, Caro-
lana, 13, 1741. Oheraquis.— Nnicaut (1699) in
Margry, D6c., v, 404, 1883. Ohcrickeei,— Clarke
(1739) in N. Y., Doc. Col. Hist, Vl, 148, 1850. Oher-
ikee.— Albany conf. (1742), ibid., 218. Cherokee.—
Johnson (1708) quoted by Rivers, So. Car., 238, 1856.
Gherokia.— Rafinesque, Am. Nat., I, 140, 1886.
Cherookee*.— Croghan (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Cf>l 1 . , 4th 8. , I X , 372, 1871. Cheroqtteet. — Campbel 1
(1761), ibid., 416. Cherraokeea.— Evans (1755)
quoted by Gregg, Old Cheraws, 15, 1867. Cher-
rokeea— Treaty of 1722 in Drake, Bk. Inds., iv,
32, 1848. Cherrykeea.— Weiser (1748) quoted by
Kauffman, W. Penn., app., 18, 1851. Chilukki.—
Hewitt in Am. Anthrop., ii, 592, 1900 (original
ChocUiw form). Chirakues.— Randolph (1699) in
Rivers, So. Car., 449, ia56. Chirokya.— Doc. {ca.
1825) in Ann. de la Prop, de la Foi, ii, 384, 1841.
Ohorakia.— Doc. of 1748 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x,
143, 1858. Chreokeea.— Pike, Trav., 173, 1811 (mis-
gTint). Ohulukki. — Hewitt in Am. Anthrop., ii,
92, 1900 (alternative Choctaw form). Dogtnbe.—
Vaudreuil (1760) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, lOiM,
1858. Entari ronnon.— Potier, Huron MS. Gram.,
1751 (a Wyandot name: * mountain people').
Gatohu£.— Barton quoted by Gatschet, (^reek
Migr. Leg., i, 28, 18H4. Gatt6chwa.—Hecke welder
quoted by Bart«»n, New Views, app., 8, 1798 (Del-
aware name, German form). laallanio race. —
Schoolcraft in Ind. Aff. Rep. 73. 1850. Katowi,—
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 28, 1884 (Shawnee
form). Ketawaugaa.— Haywo(Kl, Nat. and Abo-
rig. Tenn.. 234, ISZi. Kittuwa.— Brinton, Lenape
Leg., 16, 1885. KItuhwagI'.— Mooney in 19th Rep.
B. A. E., pt. I, 15, 1902 (originally the name of a
Cherokee band, but used by Algonquian tribes
to designate the whole tribe). Kuttoowauw. —
Apaumut (1791) quoted by Brinton, Lenape Leg.,
16,1885 (Mahican name). Kaot^ra'".— Gatschet,
Catawba MS., B. A. E., 1881 (Catawba name:
• com ing out of t he groun d ' ) . Nation du Ohien. —
Picquet (1752) quoted bv Parkman, Montcalm and
Wolfe, II, 417. 1884. Ochie'tari-ronnoii.— Potier.
Huron MS. Gram., 1751 (one of the Wyandot
names). Qjadagoohroene.— Livingston (1720) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., V, 567, 18.55. Ondadeonwaa.—
Bleeker(1701), ibid., iv, 918, 1854. Oyadaokuoh-
raono.— Weiser (1753), ibid., vi, 795, ia55. Oyadar-
ahroenea.— Letter of 1713. ibid., v, 386, 1855.
Oyadage'-ono.— Gatschet, Seneca MS., B. A. £.,
1^ (Seneca name: 'cave people,* tromoyanduga-i
'cave,* ono 'people'). O-ya-da'-go-o-no. — Mor-
gan, League Iron., 337, 1861 (Iroquois name).
(W»ta*ge'ron6n*.— Hewitt, inf'n (Iroquois name:
'inhabitants of the cave country*). Oyaudah.—
Schoolcraft, Notes on Iroq., 448. 1847 (Seneca
name). Keohahecriana.— Drake, Bk. Inds., bk.
IV, 22, 1848 (name given by the Virginians in
1656 to an invading mountain tribe; probably
the Cherokee). ' Reeheheoriaaa.— Rafinesque in
Marshall, Ky., i, 36, 1824. Riokohookana.— Led-
erer (1669) quoted by Hawks, No. Car., ii, 48,
la58 (probably the Cherokee, as called by the
Powhatan tribes; Hewitt gives the meaning as
BULL. 30]
CHERT CHETLESOHANTUNNE
249
•cavelanders'). Shanaki.— Gatschet, Caddo MS.
vocab., B. A. E,. 1882 (Caddo name). Shan-
nack.— Marcy, Red R., 273, 1854 (Wichita form).
Shannakiak.— Gatschet, Fox MS., B. A. E., 1882
(Fox name; sing. Shannaki). Sh^Tftge.— Gat-
schet. Kaw MS., B. A. £., 1878 (Kansa name). Sul-
lugsoes.— Coxe, Carolana, 22, 1741. Talagans.—
Rannesque in Marshall, Ky., i, 28, 1824. Tale-
gant.— lDid.,34. Talegawes.— Ibid. Talla^wy.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 36, 1852. Tallegr«^i.—
Rafinesqne (m. 1824) quoted by Mercer, Lenape
Stone, 90, 1885. TaUigeii.— Heckewelder (1819).
ibid., 40. Talligewi.— Walam Olum ( 1^33) in Brin-
ton, Lenape Leg., 200, 1885. Tallike.— Brinton,
ibid., 230 (given as singular form of Talligewi;
Zeisberger translates talegdn, plural talegd-
wak^ as 'crane' in the Delaware language).
Toalke.— Gatschet, Tonka wa MS., B. A. E , 1882
(Tonka wa name) . Tccrokieco.— Gatschet. Wich-
ita MS., B.A.E., 1882 (Wichita name). Tchata-
kfa.— La Salle (1682) in Maigry, D4c., ii, 197, 1877.
Taalagi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 25, 1884.
Ts£UgI'.— Mooney in 19th Rep., B. A. E., i. 15,
1902 (Upper Cherokee form; plural. Ani-Tsdlagl',
abbreviated to Anl-Ts&lflk). Tsalakies.— Gallatin
in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc, ii, 90. 1836. Tsa-lo-
kee. Morgan, Anc. Soc, 113, 1877. Tiariigi'.—
Mooney in 19th Rep., B. A.E., i, 15. 1902 (LA>wer
Cherokee form; plural, Ani-TsAnlgl'). Tachiro-
keien.— Wrangell, Ethnol. Nachr., xxlii, 1839.
Taiilakkl.— Grayson, MS. Creek vocab., B. A. E.,
1885 (Creek name). Tzuluki*.— Rafinesqne, Am.
Nations, l, 123, 1836. XTwatayo-rono.— Gatschet,
Creek Migr. Leg., i, 28, 1884 ( ' cave people ' : Wyan-
dot name). Uyada.— Ibid. (Seneca name). Zolu-
oana.— -Rannesque in Marshall, Ky., i, 23, 1824.
Zulooans.— Ibio.
Chert See Cluilcedony.
CheBakawon. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, in 1608, about the mouth of
Corotoinan r., Lancaster co., Va. — Smith
(1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819.
Ohesapeake. (Algonquian: K^che-sepi-
ackf 'country on a great river.' — Tooker).
Little more is known in regard to the name
than that it designated also a small Pow-
hatan tribe residing in Princess Anne or
Norfolk CO., Va., in 1608, and also their
principal village, situated, according to
Jefferson ( Not^, 188, 1809), onLinnhaven
r., in Princess Anne co., a small stream,
according to his map, flowing n. into
Chesapeake bay. Stith says tney were
seated on the river now called Eliza-
beth, whieh falls into Chesapeake bay
below Norfolk. Linnhaven, on Jeffer-
son's map, is distinct from and is located
B of Elizabeth r. White's map (Hariot,
Narr., Quaritch repr., 1893), drawn in
1585, locates them under the name
Ehesepiooc, apparently on the stream in-
dicated by Jefferson. ' In 1607 they were
estimated at 100 warriors, equivalent to
perhaps 350 inhabitants; by 1669 they had
entirely disappeared as a distinct people.
On the application of the name Chesa-
peake see Tooker, Algonquian Series, iii,
1901. (j. M.)
Oheaapeaoka.— Lane (1586) in Smith (1629), Vir-
S'nia. I, 87, repr. 1819. Chesapeake*. —Bozman,
arvland, L, 61, 1837. Ohesapeians.— Strachey
(CO. 1612). Virsrinia, 35, 1849. Oheaepians.— Harris,
Voy. and Trav., i, 815, 1705. Oheaepioook.— Dutch
map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i, 1856. Chisa-
peaok.^Smith(ie29), Va., i, map, repr. 1819. Ohiaa-
peani — Lane (1586) in Smith, ibid., i,91. Ohi-sapi-
aok— Tyndall, chart (1608) in Brown, Genesis
U. S., IW, 1H90. Ehesepiooo.— White's map in
Hariot, Narrative. Quaritch repr., 1893 (misprint?).
Cheshish. The principal village of the
Muchalat, situatcHl back of Bligh id.,
Nootka sd., Vancouver id. — Can. Ind.
Aff., 264, 1902.
Chesthltishtnn. A gens or village of
the Tolowa, formerly on the coast of n.
California, s. of Smith r.
To'S«-9lt'ic'-tun. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 236. 1890.
Chests. See Boxen and Chests, Receptacles.
Chetac Lake. A Chippewa village,
named from the lake on which it is sitn-
ated, in Sawyer co., n. w. Wis.
Lac Shatac.— Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc.
Coll., V, 191, 1885.
Ghetawe. A village of the IStlakyapa-
muk, on the e. side of Fraser r., about
16i m. above Yale, Brit. Col. Pop. 16
in 1897, the la.st time it was separately
enumerated.
Chataway.— Can. Ind. Aff. for 18H4, 230. Chatowe.—
Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff.. Victoria, 1872. Tca'tiia.—
Hill-Tout in Rep. on Ethnol. Siirv. Can. for Brit.
A. A. S.,5. 1899. Tce'tawe.— Teitin Mem. Am.Mu.s.
Nat. Hist., II. 169. 1900.
Chetco ( from < 'heti, ' close to the mouth
of the stream': own name. — J. O. Dor-
sey). A group of former Athapascan
villages situated on each side of the
moutli of and alM)ut 14 m. up Chetco r.,
Oreg. There were 9 villages; those at the
mouth of the river containing 42 houses,
which were destroyed by the whites in
1853, after which the Chetco were re-
mo ve<l to Siletz res., Tillamook co., Oreg.
In 1854 they numbered 117 men, 88
women, and 41 children; total, 241. In
18()1 they numbered 62 men, 96 women,
104 children; total, 262. In 1877 only
68 resided on Siletz res. These villagers
were closely allied to the Tolowa of Cali- ^
fornia, from whom they differed but i*^^^-^*
slightly in language and customs. Tlie
villages as recorded by Dorsey were
Chettanne, Chettannene, Khuniliikhwut,
Nakwutthume, Nukhwuchutun, Settha-
tun, Siskhaslitun, Tachuk hash tun, and
Thlcharghilitun.
Cha-ta.— Abbott, MS. Coquille census, B. A. E.,
1858. Cheahtoc.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June
8, 1860. Chc-at-tee.— Parrish in Ind. Aff. Rep.
for IHM, 495, 1855. Chetcas.— Palmer, ibid., 46/.
Chetooe.— Newcomb, ibid., 162, 1861. Ohetcoes.—
Victor in Overland Mo., vii, 347, 1871. Chet-
0008.— Palmer in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 217, 1857.
Chetkoe.— Wells in Harper's Mag., xiii, 588, 1856.
Chit-co.— Abbott, MS. Coquille census, B. A. E.,
1858. Chitcoes.— Buchanan in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856,
•222, 1856. Chitko.— Gibbs MS. on coast tribes, B. A.
E., 1856. Tced'i'-t«-ne'.— Everette, MS. Tututene
vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (tran.s.: 'people by the
Mouse r.'J. Tee'-ti.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore. Ill, 236, 1890 (own name: 'close to the mouth
of the stream'). Tcl'-^i »iln-ng'.— Ibid, (own
name: 'people close to the mouth of the stream ' )
Tci'-i-tf.— Dorsey, Smith R. vocab., B. A. E., 1888
(Khaamotene name).
Ghetleschantnnne (^people among the
big rocks ' ) . A division of the Tututunne
formerly living on Pistol r., Oreg., and
the coast from the headlands 6 m. s. of
250
OHETLESIYETUNNE CHEYENNE
[b. a. e/
Rogue r. Their villages were at Macks
Arch, the great rock from which they
took their name, at Crooks pt. at the
eddy of Pistol r., and on the n. side of the
mouth of that stream. In 1854 they
numbered 51. The survivors, if there
are any, are on the Siletz res., Or^.
Ch«tl-«-ihIn.— Schumacher in Bull. G. and G.
Surv., ni, 31, 1877. Chctlcssentan.— Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, vi, 702, 1857. Chetleisenten.— Taylor
in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860. Chet-lcM-cn-tun.—
Parrish in Ind. Aff. Rep. for 1854, 495, 1855.
Chet-less-in-gen.— Gibbs, MS. on coast tribes of
Oregon, B. A. E., 18.%. Chit-let-scn-ten.— Abbott,
MS. Coquille census, B. A. E., 1858. Pistol Riv-
ers.—Buchanan in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 222, 1857.
ToSt-I^s'-toan ^un'ng.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, III, 236, 1890. Tciit-l«s-tciin' t«ne'.— Everette,
MS. Tutu vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (trans.: 'people
by the flat rocks'). To'ut-Ks'-toim-t^un.— Dorsey,
Naltftnneiftnne MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Nal-
tunnename).
OhetXeBiyetnnne (^people of the bursted
rock'). A village of the Tututunne,
located bv Dorsey (Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 233, 1890) on the n. side of Rogue r.,
Greg.
T'a-rxi'-li-i' ^unng.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, III. 233, 1890 ('people distant from the
forks': Naltunne name). TcSt-Ws'-i-ye' ^flxinS'. —
Ibid, (own name). To'ut'-les-ye' ^onng'. — Ibid.
(Naltunne name).
Chets (Tcet}<). A Haida town, for-
merly occupied by the Chets-gitunai
and bjushade, on an island at the mouth
of Tsooskahli, Masset inlet, Brit. Col. —
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 281, 1905.
Chetsgitnnai {TceU-gUAna^Ay *Gituns
of Chets id.*). A Haida family of the
Eagle clan, so named from an island
in the upper e.xpansion of Masset inlet,
Brit. Col., at the mouth of Tsooskahli,
where they once lived. Afterward they
moved to the mouth of Masset inlet.
They formed one group with the Widja-
gitunai, Tohlka-gitunai, and Djushade. —
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 275, 1905.
Chiohkitone.— Harrison in Proc. Rov. Soc. Can.,
sec. II, 124, 1895. Tsets gyit'inai'.— Boas, 12th Rep.
N. W. Tribes Can., 23, 1898.
Ghettanne. A former village of the
Chetcoon the s. side of Chetco r., Oreg.,
at its mouth.
TcSt-tan'-ng.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii,
236, 1890.
Chettannene. A former village of the
Chetco on the n. side of Chetco r. , Oreg. ,
at it« mouth.
ToJft-tan' ne'-ne.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 23f.. 1890.
Ghettrokettle ('Rain pueblo* in one of
the New Mexican Indian languages).
One of the most important ruins of the
Chaco canyon group in n. w. New Mexico.
It is less than J m. e. of Pueblo Bonito, on
the N. side of the arroyo near the base of
the canyon wall. Its exterior dimensions
are 440 by 250 ft. It incloses 3 sides of a
parallelogram, the extremities of the
wings bems; connected by a semicircular
double wall, the space between being
divided into apartments. There are 9
kivas within the space inclosed by the
wings of the structure, 2 being in the
court and 7 wholly or in part embraced
within the walls. The walls still stand
in places to a height of 30 ft. The build-
ing was not less than 4 stories high, prob-
ably 5. Many timbers are yet in place
and well preserved. The masonry,
which is exceptionally good, is of fine-
grained grayish-yellow sandstone, broken
into small tabular pieces and laid in thin
mortar; in places courses of heavier stone
are laid in parallel at intervals, giving an
ornamental effect and probably adding
to the stability of the walls. The walls
are finished alike on both sides. Jack-
son estimated that there were originally
in the building not less than 315,000 cu.
ft. of masonry. See Jackson (1875) in
10th Rep. Hayden Surv., 438, 1879, and
the authors cited below. (e. l. h. )
Chetho Zette.— Bell in Jour. Etbnol. Soc. Lond.,
n. 8., I, 247, 1869. Chetro Ketle.— Domenecb,
Deserts N. Am., i, 200, 1860. Chetro Kettle.—
Lummis in Land of Sunshine, xv, 426, 1901.
Chettro-Zettlc.— Simpson, Exped. Navajo Coiin-
try, 79, 1850. Rain Pueblo.— Ibid.
Ghetnckota. A former Seminole village
on the w. bank of Pease cr., below Pease
lake, w. central Fla.— H. R. Doc. 78, 25th
Cong., 2d sess., map, 768-769, 1838.
Chetnttunne (* people where the road
crosses a stream'). A former village of
the Chastacosta on the n. side of Rogue
r., Oreg.
Toe-tut' ^unnc'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 234, 1890.
Cheaonnsene. See Dragging-canoe.
Ghenek. A village of the Ntlakyapa-
muk on Fraser r. , above Ly tton, Brit. Col.
TcEue'q.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can.
for Brit. A. A. A. S., 4, 1899.
Ghewagh. A name of the Pacific red-
spotted salmon trout, or Dolly Varden
trout {S<ilmo campheUi), from cMwakh, in
the Nisqualli and closely related dialects
of the Salishan stock, signifying * salmon
trout.' * (a. f. c.)
GhewaB. A Squawmish village on the
w. side of Howe sd., Brit. Col.
To«'wa«.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S.. 474, 1900.
Ghewase. One of the 5 " in land ' ' towns
of the Cherokee on a branch of Tennessee
r., in E. Tennessee, in the latter part of
the 18th century. — Bartram, Travels, 371,
1792.
Chewing-gnm. See Food.
Gheyenne (from the Sioux name Sha^
hVyena, Shai-enn, or (Teton) Shai-eUif
'people of alien speech,' from sha^ia, *to
speak a strange language' ) . An important
Plains tribe of the great Algonquian fam-
ily. They call themselves Dzl^tslfsttis, ap-
parently nearly equivalent to * people
alike,' i. e. *our people,' from ^t^ffMau,
* alike ' or * like this ' ( animate ) ; ( ehistd,
* he is from, or of, the same kind ' — Pet-
ter) ; by a slight change of accent it
might also mean 'gashed ones', from
^kStMy *he is gashed' (Petter), or pos-
sibly *tall people.' The tribal form as
here given is in the third person plural.
BULL. SO]
CHEYKKNK
251
The popular name has no connection with
the French chierif *dog/ as has some-
times erroneously been sui)po8ed . I n the
sign language they are indicated by a
gesture which has often been interpreted
to mean *cut arms' or *cut fingers' —
being made by drawing the right index
finger several times rapidly across the
left— but which appears really to indi-
cate * striped arrows/ by wnich name
they are known to the Hiaatsa, Shoshoni,
Comanche, Caddo, and probably other
tribes, in allusion to their old-time pref-
erence for turkey feathers for winging
arrows.
The earliest authenticated habitat of
the Cheyenne, before the year 1700,
seems to have been that part of Minnesota
bounded roughly by the Mississippi, Min-
nesota, and upper Red rs. The Sioux,
living at that period more immediately
on the Mississippi, to the e. and s. e. , came
in contact with the French as early as
1667, but the Cheyenne are first mentioned
in 1680, nnder the name of Chaa, when a
party of that tribe, described as living on
the n^ of the great river, i. e., the Mis-
sissippi, visited La Salle's fort on Illi-
nois r. to invite the French to come to
their country, which they represented as
abounding in beaver ana other fur ani-
mals. The veteran Sioux missionary,
Williamson, says that according to con-
current and reliable Sioux tradition tlie
Cheyenne preceded the Sioux in the oc-
cupancy 01 the upper Mississippi region,
and were found by them already estab-
lished on the Minnesota. At a later
period they moved over to the Cheyenne
branch of Red r., N. Dak., which thus
acquired its name, being known to the
Sioux as **the place where the Cheyenne
plant," showing that the lattt^r were still
an agricultural people (Williamson).
This westward movement was due to
pressure from the Sioux, who were them-
selves retiring before the Chippewa,
then aliseady in possession of guns from
the E. Driven out by the Sioux, the
Cheyenne moved w. toward Missouri r.,
where their further progress wasopposeti
by the Sutaio — the Staitan of Lewis and
Clark — a people speaking a closely cog-
nate dialect, who had preceded them to
the w. and were then apparently living;
between the river and the Black-hills.
After a period of hostility the two
tribes made an alliance, some time after
which the Cheyenne crossed the Mis-
souri below the entrance of the Can-
nonball, and later took refuge in the
Black-hills about the heads of Cheyenne
r. of South Dakota, where Lewis and
Clark found them in 1804, since which
time their drift was constantly w. and s.
until confined to reservations. Up to the
time of Lewis and Clark they carried on
desultory war with the Mandan and
Hidatsa, who probably helped to drive
them from Missouri r. They seem, how-
ever, to have kept on good terms with
the Arikara. According to their own
story, the Cheyenne, while living in
Minnesota and on Missouri r., occupied
fixed villages, practised agriculture, and
made pottery, but lost these arts on being
driven out into the plains to become rov-
ing buffalo hunters. On the Missouri,
and perhaps also farther e., they occu-
pied earth-covered log houses. Grinnell
states that some Cheyenne had culti-
vated fields on Little Missouri r. as late
as 1850. This was probably a recent set-
tlement, as they are not mentioned in
YELLOW BEAR -CHEYENNE MAN
that locality by Lewis and Clark. At
least one man among them still under-
stands the art of making beads and figur-
ines from pounded glass, as formerly
practised by the Mandan. In a sacred
tradition recited only by the priestly
keeper, they still tell how they **lost the
corn" after leaving the eastern countrv.
One of the starting ix)ints in this tradi-
tion is a great fall, apparently St An-
thony's falls on the Mississippi, and a .
stream known as the ** river of turtles,"
Si:)
252
CHEYENNE
[b. a. £.
which may be the Turtle r. tributary of
Red r., or possibly the St Croix, entering
the Mississippi below the mouth of the
Minnesota, and anciently known by a
similar riaine. Consult for early habitat
and migrations: Carver, Travels, 1796;
Clark, Ind. Sign Lang., 1885; Comfort in
Smithson. Rep. for 1871; La Salle in
Marery, D^couvertes, ii, 1877; Lewis and
Clark, Travels, i, ed. 1842; Mooney in
14th Rep. B. A. K., 1896; Williamson in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 1872.
Although the alliance between the
Siitaio and the Cheyenne dates from the
crossing of the Missouri r. by the latter.
CHEYENNE WOMAN AND CHILD
the actual incorporation of the Sutaio into
the Cheyenne camp-circle probably oc-
curred within the last hundred years, as
the two tribes were regarded as distinct
by Lewis and Clark. There is no good
reason for supposing the Sutaio to have
been a detached band of Siksika drifted
down directly from the n., as has been
suggested, as the Cheyenne expressly
state that the Sutaio spoke "a Cheyenne
language,'' i. e. a dialect fairly intelligible
to the Cheyenne, and that they lived s. w.
of the original Cheyenne country. The
linguistic researches of Rev. Rudolph
Fetter, our best authority on the Chey-
enne language, confirm the statement
that the difference was only dialectic,
which probably helps to account for the
complete assimilation of the two tribes.
The Cheyenne say also that they obtained
the Sun aance and the Buffalo-head medi-
cine from the Sutaio, but claim the Medi-
cine-arrow ceremony as their own from
the beginning. Up te 1835, and probably
until reducea by the cholera of 1849, the
Sutaio retained their distinctive dialect,
dress, and ceremonies, and camped apart
from the Cheyenne. In 1851 they were
still to some extent a distinct people, but
exist now only as one of the component
divisions of the (Southern) Cheyenne
tribe, in no respect different from the
others. Under the name Staitan (a con-
traction of SiUai-hUdUf pi. StUai-hitanioy
*Stitai men') they are mentioned by
Lewis and Clark in 1804 as a small and
savage tribe roving w. of the Black-hills.
There is some doubt as to when or where
the Chevenne first met the Arapaho, with
whom tliey have long been confederated;
neither do they appear to have any clear
idea as to the date of the alliance between
the two tribes, which continues unbroken
to the present day. Their connection
with the Arapaho is a simple alliance,
without assimilation, while the Sutaio
have been incorporated bodily.
Their modern history may be said to
be^ ' 1 with the expedition of Lewis and
C'ukinl804. Constantly pressed farther .
into the plains by the hostile Sioux in
their rear they established themselves
next on the upper branches of the Platte,
driving the Kiowa in their turn farther to
the 8. They made their first treaty with
the Government in 1825 at the mouth of
Teton (Bad) r., on the Missouri, about
the present Pierre, S. Dak. In conse-
quence of the building of Bent's Fort on
the upper Arkansas, in Colorado, in 1832,
a large part of the tribe decided to move
down and make permanent headquarters
on the Arkansas, while the rest continued
to rove about the headwaters of North
Platte and Yellowstone rs. This separa-
tion was made permanent by the treaty of
Ft Laramie in 1851, the two sections being
now known respectively as Southern and
Northern Cheyenne, but the distinction
is purely geographic, although it has
served to hasten the destruction of their
former compact tribal organization. The
Southern Cheyenne are known in the
tribe as S6wonfil, * southerners,' while
the Northern Cheyenne are commonly
designated as O 'miosis t eaters,' from the
division most numerously represented
among them. Their advent upon the
Arkansas brought them into constant
collision with the Kiowa, who, with the
Comanche, claimed the tertitorj'' to the
BULL. 301
CHEYENNE
253
southward. The old men of both tril)e8
tell of nuiwBrous encounters during the
next few years, chief among these being
a battle on an upper branch of Red r. in
1837, in which the Kiowa massacred an
entire party of 48 Cheyenne warriors of
the Bowstrmg society after a stout defense,
and a notable battle in the following
summer of 1838, in which the Cheyenne
and Arapaho attacked the Kiowa and
Comanche on Wolf cr., n. w. Okla., with
considerable loss on both sides. About
1840 the Cheyenne made peace with the
Kiowa in the s., having already made
peace with the Sioux in the n., since
which time all these tribes, together with
the Arapaho, Kiowa, Kiowa Apache,
and Comanche have usually acted as
allies in the wars with other tril)e8
and with the whites. For a long time
the Cheyenne have mingled much with
the western Sioux, from whom they
have patterned in many details of dress
and ceremony. They seem not to have
suffered greatly from the small-pox
of 1837-39, having been warned in
time to escape to the mountains, but
in common with other prairie tril)es
they suffered terribly from the cholera in
1849, several of their bands being nearly
exterminated. Culbertson, writing a
year later, states that they had lost about
200 lodges, estimated at 2,000 souls, or
about two-thirds of their whole number
before the epidemic. Their jx^ace with
the Kiowa enabled them to extend their
incursions farther to the s , and in 1853
they made their first raid into Mexico,
but with disastrous result, losing all ))ut
3 men in a fight with Mexican lan-
cers. From 1860 to 1878 they were
prominent in border warfare, acting with
the Sioux in the n. and with the Kiowa
and Comanche in the s., and have prob-
ably lost more in conflict with the whites
than any other tribe of the plains, in pro-
portion to their number. In 1864 the
southern band suffered a severe blow by
the notorious Chivington massacre in Col-
orado, and again in 1868 at the hands of
Custer in the battle of the Washita.
They took a leading part in the general
outljreak of the southern tribes in 1874-75.
The Northern Cheyenne joined with the
Sioux in the Sittinj^ Bull war in 1876 and
were active participants in the Custer
massacre. Later in the year they received
such a severe blow from Mackenzie as
to compel their surrender. In the winter
of 1878-79 a band of Northern Chey-
enne under Dull Knife, Wild Hog, arid
Little Wolf, who had been brought down
as prisoners to Fort Reno to be colonized
with the southern portion of the tribe in
the present Oklahoma, made a desperate
attempt at escape. Of an estimated 89 men
and 146 women and children who broke
away on the night of Sept. 9, about 75,
including Dull Knife and most of the war-
riors, were killed in the pursuit which
continued to the Dakota lx)rder, in the
course of which about 50 whites lost their
lives*. Thirty-two of the Cheyenne slain
were killed in a second break" for lil>erty
from Ft Robinson, Nebr., where the cap-
tured fugitives had been confined. Little
Wolf, with about 60 followers, got throueh
in safety to the n. At a later period the
Northern Cheyenne were assigned to the
prest^nt reservation in Montana. The
Southern Cheyenne were assigned to a
reservation in w. Oklahoma by treaty of
1867, but refused to remain upon it until
after the surrender of 1875, when a num-
l)er of the most prominent hostileswere
deported to Flori<la for a term of 3 years.
In 1891-92 the lands of the Southern
Cheyenne were allott<^>d in severalty and
the Indians are now American citi-
zens. Those in the n. seem to hold their
own in population, while those of the s.
are steadily decreasing. They numl>ereil
in 1904-^Southern Cheyenne, 1,903;
Northern Cheyenne, 1,409, a total of
3,312. Although originally an agricul-
tural people of the timl)er country, the
Cheyenne for generations have l)een a
typical prairie tril)e, living in skin tipis,
following the buffalo over great areas,
traveling and fighting on horsel>ack.
They commonly buried their dead in
trees or on scaffolds, but occasionally in
caves or in the ground. In character
they are proud, contentious, and brave to
desperation, with an exceptionally high
standard for woman. Polygamy was
permitted, as usual with the prairie 'tril)es.
Under their old svstem, before the divi-
sion of the tribe, they had a council of 44
elective chiefs, of whom 4 constituted
a higher lx>dy, with power to elect one
of their own numl)er as head t^hief of the
tribe. In all councils that concerned
the relations of the Cheyenne with other
tribes, one member of the council was ap-
pointed to argue as the proxy or *' devil's
advocate" for the alien pi^ople. This
council of 44 is still symbolized by a bun-
dle of 44 invitation sticks, kept with the
sacred medicine-arrows, and formerly
sent around when occasion arose to con-
vene the assembly.
This set of 4 medicine-arrows, each
of different color, constitutes the tribal
palladium which they claim to have had
from the beginning of the world, and is
exposed with appropriate rites once a
year if previously *' pledged," and on
those rare occasions when a Cheyenne
has been killed by one of his own tribe,
the puri)ose of the ceremony being to wipe
away from the murderer the stain of a
brother's blood. The rite did not die
with the final separation of the two sec-
254
CHEYENNE
[B. A. B.
tions of the tribe in 1851, as has been
stated, but the bundle is still religiously
preserved by the Southern Cheyenne,
by whom the public ceremony was per-
formed as late as 1904. Besides the pub-
lic tribal ceremony there is also a rite
spoken of as ** fixing" the arrows, at
snorter intervals, which concerns the
arrow priests alone. The public cere-
mony is always attended by delegates
from the northern body. No woman,
white man, or even mixed blood of the
tribe has ever l)eeu allowed to come near
the sacred arrows.
Their great tribal ceremony for genera-
tions has been the Sun dance ( q. v. ) , which
they themselves say came to them from
the Sutaio, after enaerging from the tim-
ber region into the oi>en plains. So far as
known, this ceremony l)elongs exclusively
to the tribes of the plains or to those in
close contact with them. The Buffalo-
head ceremony, which was formerly con-
nected with the Sun dance but has been
obsolete for many years, also came from
the Sutaio. The modern Ghost-dance
religion (q. v. ) was enthusiastically taken
up by the tribe at its first appearance,
al)out 1890, and the Peyote rite (q. v. ) is
now becoming popular with the younger
men. They also had until lately a Fire
dance, something Uke that credited to the
Navaho, in which the initiated perform-
ers danced over a fire of blazing coals
until they extinguished it with their bare
feet. In priestly dignity the keepers of
the Medicine-arrow (Cheyenne) and Sun
dance (Sutaio) rites stood first and equal.
At the Sun dance, and on other occa-
sions where the whole tribe was assem-
bled, they formed their camp circle in
11 (?) sections, occupied bv as many rec-
ognized tribal divisions. As one of these
was really an incorporated tribe, and sev-
eral others have originated bv segrega-
tion within the memory of old men still
living (1905), the ancient number did not
exceed 7. One authority claims these di-
visions as true clans, but the testimony
is not conclusive. The wandering habit—-
each band commonly apart from the
others, with only one regular tribal re-
union in the year — would make it almost
impossible to keep up an exogamic sys-
tem. While it is quite probable that the
Cheyenne may have had the clan system
in ancient times while still a sedentary
people, it is almost as certain that it dis-
appeared so long ago as to be no longer
even a memory. The present divisions
seem to have nad an entirely different
genesis, and may represent original vil-
lage settlements' in their old homes, a
surmise rendered more probable by sur-
vivals of marked dialectic differences.
As it is now some 70 years since the whole
tribe camped together, the social struc-
ture having become further demoralized
in the meantime by cholera, wars, and
intermixture with the Sioux, the exact
number and order of these divisions is a
matter of dispute, even among their own
old men, although all agree on t^e prin-
cipal names.
The list given below, although subject
to correction, is based on the best con-
sensus of opinion of the southern chiefs
in 1904 as to the names and order of the
divisions in the circle, from the e. entrance
around by s., w., and n. to the starting
point. The name forms vdry consider-
ably as given by different individuals,
probably in accordance with former dia-
lectic differences. It is evident that in
some instances the divisions are older
than their existing names:
(1) Het^s^-nV^pahU (sing., HevXqs''-
nl'pa), * aortas closed, by burning.' All
authorities a^ree that this was an im-
portant division and came first in the
circle. The name is said to have origi-
nated from several of the band in an
emergency, having once made the aorta
of a buffalo do duty as a pipe. Grinnell
gives this story, and also an alternative
one, which renders it * small windpip^,'
from a choking sickness sent as a punish-
ment for offending a medicine beaver.
The name, however, in its etymology,
indicates something closed or shriveled
by burning, although it is also true that
the band has a beaver tabu. The name
is sometimes contracte<l to Hei^^gsin, for
which Wee hee skeu of Lewis and Clark's
Journals (Clark, 1804, ibid.,i, 190, 1904)
seems to be a bad misprint.
(2) MdisSyu (sing., M6ls), * flint peo-
ple,' from m&l8o * flint', apparently having
reference to an arrowpoint (Petter), pos-
sibly to the sacred meaicine-arrows. For-
merly a large division said to have been
the nucleus of the Cheyenne tribe, and
hence the Dzltslstas proper. The Arrow-
men of G. A . Dorsev. Now nearly extinct.
(3) Wn^apiu (sing., Wii^tap), a Sioux
word (wStaf)) meaning 'eaters,' or 'eat*.
A small division, perhaps of Sioux admix-
ture (cf. O^-mVsts), Some authorities
claim this division as an offshoot from the
H^vhaita^nio.
(4) Hhhaiia/nio (sing., H^vhaitan),
*hair men,' i. e. *tur men'; so called
because in early days they ranged farth-
est to the 8. w., remote from the traders
on the Missouri, and continued to wear
fur robes for e very-day use after the other
bands had adopted stroudingand calicoes.
A probable explanation, advanced by
Grinnell, is that the name refers to ropes
which they twisted from the long hair of
the buffalo for use in capturing ponies
from the tribes farther s. They formed
the advance of the emigration to the
Arkansas about 1835, hence the name is
BULL. 30]
CHEYENNE
255
frequently used as synonymous with
Southern Cheyenne.
(5) OVvimdna ( sing., O^vimdn ),
*8cabbv people'; oX^t^ * scabby/ mayia
•band/ 'people' (Petter); according to
another authority, * hive people. * An off-
shoot of the Ilevhaitd'nio (no. 4). The
name originated about 1840, when a band
of the Hovliaitii''nio,undera chief known
as Blue Horse, became infect e<l from hav-
ing used a mangy buffalo hide for a saddle
blanket. They became later an important
division. According to Grinnell (Social
Organization, 1905) the name is also ap-
plied as a nickname to a part of the North-
ern Cheyenne on lower Tongue r., ** be-
cause, it is said, Badger, a principal man
among them, had a skm disease.'*
( 6) IllsiomeUVn io ( sing. , H!sf ometii^n ) ,
* ridge men,' referring to the ridge or
long slope of a hill. Another offshoot
from the Hcvhaitii^nio. The name is
said to have originated from their prefer-
ence for camping upon ridges, but more
probably from havmg formerly ranged
chiefly n. of tlie upper Arkansas, in that
portion of Colorado known to the Chey-
enne as the *' ridge country," or, accord-
ing to another authority, from habituall^^
ranging upon the Staked plain, in associ-
ation with the Comanche. They were
said to have originated from .s)me ll^v-
haitii^nio who interraarrie<l with the
Sutaio before the regular incorporation
of that tribe.
(7) (?) Stitdio (sing., Sii^tai), mean-
ing unknown. Formerly a distinct tribe,
but incorporate<^l. According to their
own statement the jieople of tliis division
occupied the w. of the Cheyenne circle,
but others put tliem s., n. w., or n., the
discrepancv probably arising from the
fact that they had originally no place in
the circle at all and were not admitted
until the old system had fallen into decay.
The w. side of the Cheyenne circle, as of
the interior of the tipi, being the place of
honor, they would naturally claim it for
themselves, although it is extremely un-
likely that the Cheyenne would grant it.
Their true position seems to have been
in the n. w. part of the circle.
► (8) OqtugUiid (sing., Oqtogon), *bare
shms' (?).
(9) Hd^nmcd (sin^., H6*now), *poor
people.' A small division, an offshoot
irom the Oqt6gtina.
(10) MdsV'kotd (sing., Masl'kot), of
doubtful meaning, interpreted by Grin-
nell as * corpse from a scaffold,' or pos-
sibly 'ghost head,' i. e. gray hair, but
more probably (Mooney) from a root de-
noting 'wrinkled' or 'drawn up,* as
applied to old tipi skins or old buckskin
dresses; from this root comes ma»iskot,
'cricket,' referring to the doubling up of
the legs; the same idea of ' skin drawn
up* mav underlie the interpretation
' corpse from a scaffold.* For some rea-
son, apparently between 70 and 80 years
ago, all the men of this division joined in
a body the Ilotamitii^nio warrior society,
so that the two names became practically
Hvnonymous until the society name sup-
planted the division name, which is now
obsolete, the HoUunitii^nio, with their
families, being considered owners of that
part of the circle originally occupied by
the Mftsl^'kota, viz, next to the last sec-
tion, adjoining the O'm^sls (no. 11), who
camped immediately n. of the entrance.
(11) O'mVHU (sing., O'mrsXsts), 'eat-
ers'; the meaning of the name is plain,
but its origin is disputed, some authori-
ties claiming it as the name of an early
chief of the division. Cf. Wu^tapiu, no.
3. This was the largest and most im-
I)ortant division in the tribe and now con-
stitutes the majority of the Northern
Cheyenne, for which portion the name is
therefore frequently used as a synonym.
Before the tribe was divided they occu-
pied that portion of the tribal circle
nnmediately x. of the e. entrance, thus
completing the circle. After the separa-
tion their next neighbors in the circle,
the Masl^'kotil, alias Hotainitii^nio, were
considered as the last division in order.
Other names, not commonly recog-
nized as divisional names, are:
(a) M()(jt(ivhaitd^nl% M)lack men,* i. e.
'Ute' (sing., Moqtavhaitiin). To the
Cheyenne and most other Plains tribes
the Ute are known as ' Black men ' or
'Black pt»ople.' A small band, api>ar-
ently not a recognized division, of the
same name is still represented among the
Southern Cheyenne, and, according to
Grinnell, also among the Northern Chey-
enne. They may be descended from Ute
captives and perhaps constituted a regu-
lar tribal division.
( b ) N(Vk'u imdnay ' bear jxM)ple * ; a small
band among the Southern Cheyenne,
taking its name from a former chief and
not recognized as proi)erly constituting a
division.
(c) Aiu<k6wt7it% 'narrow nose-bridge,'
a band of Sioux admixture and of recent
origin, taking its liame from a chief,
properly named Broken Dish, but nick-
named Anskowlnls. They separated
from the O' miosis on account of a quarrel,
probably, as Grinnell states, a dispute as
to the guardianship of the sacred buffalo-
head cap, a stolen horn from which is now
in possession of one of the band in the
S. They are represented among both the
Northern and the Southern Cheyenne.
(d) Pl'nfUgCi' 'Pe^njit^'ka' (Coman-
che). This is not properly a divisional
or even a l>an<l name, but was the con-
temptuous name given by the hostile
Cheyenne in 1874-75 to the "friendlies,"
256
CHEYENNE
[B. A. E.
under Whirlwind, who remained passive
near the agency at Darlington, in allusion
to the well-known readiness of the Pena-
teka Ckjmanche to sell their services as
scouts against their own tribesmen on the
plains.
(e) Mahay urn J *red tipi'; this name,
in the form Miayuma, * red lodges,* is
erroneously given in the Clarke MS., in
possession of Grinnell, as the name of a
oand or division, but is really only the
name of a heraldic tipi belonging b^
heredity to a family of the HtVnowa di-
vision, now living with the Southern
Cheyenne.
(f ) WoojTotsVt ( \V6hkpotsit, Grinnell) ,
* white wolf (?) A numerous family
group taking its name from a noted com-
mon ancestor, in the southern branch of
the tribe, who died about 1845. The
name literally implies something haying
a white and frosty appearance, as hide-
scrapings or a leaf covered with frost.
(g) To/o/ma/za (Tutoimamih, Grinnell),
'backward or shy clan,* a modern nick-
name applie<l by the Northern Cheyenne
to a band on Tongue r., ** because they
prefer to camp by themselves'* (Grin-
nell). From the same root comes toto,
* crawfish,* referring to its going back-
ward (Petter).
(h) Black Lodges. A local designation
or nickname for those Northern Cheyenne
living in the neighborhood of Lame Deer
** because they are on friendly terms with
the band of Crows known as Black
Lo<lges** (Grinnell, ibid.).
(i) liee band. A local designation or
nickname for those Northern Cheyenne
livingabout Rosebud cr., '* l)ecause among
them there are several men who are re-
lated to the Rees'* (Grinnell, ibid.).
(j) Yellow Wolf band (Culbertson,
Jour., 1850). From another reference
this is seen to be only a temporary band
designation from a chief of that name.
( k ) Half-breed band ( Cul bertson. Jour. ,
1850). Probably only a temporary local
designation, perhaps from a cnief of that
name (Mooney).
The Warrior Organization (Nfi/tqiu,
* warriors,* * soldiers*; sing., Niltaq) of
the Cheyenne is practically the same as
found among the Arapaho, Kiowa, and
most other Plains tribes (see Military So-
cieties), and consists of the following 6
societies, with possibly one or more
extinct: (1) Hotkmita^nio, *dog men*;
(2) Woksihitanio, *(kit) fox men,*
alias M6t86nitanio, * flint men*; (3)
Hrmoiy6qIs * pointed-lance men* (Pet-
ter) or Oomi-ntttqiu, * coyote warriors*;
(4) MdhohXvds, *red shield,* alias Ho-
t6antt^tqiu, 'buffalo bull warriors'; (5)
Himdtan6hi8, * bowstring • (men) * ; (6)
Hotam-Imsdw*, * crazy dogs.' This last
society is of modem origin. Besides
these the members of the council of
44 chiefs were sometimes considered
to constitute in themselves another soci-
ety, the VX^hiyo, 'chiefs. * The equivalent
list given by Clark (Ind. Sign Lang.),
omitting No. 6, is Dog, Fox, Medicine
Lance, Bujl, Bowstring, and Chief. There
seems to have been no fixed rule of
precedence, but the Hot4mita^niu, or
"Dog soldiers'* as they came to be known
to the whites, acquired most prominence
and distinctive character from the fact
that by the accession of the entire warrior
force of the Mast^*kota division, as already
noted, they, with their families, took on
the character of a regular tribal division
with a place in the tribal circle. From
subsequent incorporation by intermar-
riage of numerous Sioux, Arapaho, and
other alien elements their connection
with their own tribe was correspondingly
weakened, and they formed the habit of
camping apart from the others and acting
with the Sioux or as an independent body.
They were known as the most aggressive
of the hostiles until defeated, with the
loss of their chief. Tall Bull, by Gen.
Carr's forces in 1869.
Consult Clark, Ind. Sign Lang, (arti-
cles, Cheyenne and Soldier), 1885; Cul-
bertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 1851;
Dorsey, The Cheyenne, Field Columb.
Mus. Publ., Anthrop. sen, ix, nos. 1 and 2,
1905; Grinnell, various letters and pub-
lished papers, notably Social Org. of the
Cheyennes, in Proc. Intemat. Cong.
Americanists for 1902, 1905; Hayden,
Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 1862; In-
dian Treaties, eds. 1837, 1873; Lewis
and Clark, Exped., various editions; Mar-
gry, D^couvertes, ii, 1877; Maximilian,
Travels, 1843; Mooney (1) Ghost Dance
Religion, 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896,
(2) Calendar Hist, of the Kiowa, 17th
Rep. B. A. E., 1898, (3) Cheyenne MS.,
B. A. E.; Reports of the Commissioner
of Indian Affairs; War Dept. Rec. of
Engagements with Hostile Inds., 1882;
Williamson in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll.
I, 1872. (j. M.)
i-w&s-shi-tliii-qdl. — Long, Exped. Rocky Mts.,
n, Ixxxiv, 1823 (Hidatsa name). Bahakoain.—
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1023, 1896 ('striped ^
arrows': Caddo name). Blaok-amu.— Long, op.
cit., I, 46.^ 1823 (evidently an error for •cut-
arms/ one of the renedrings of the tribal r' — '
Ca^ani.— Dorsey, Osage MS., vocab., B. A. E., 1883
(Osage name. c=sh, /=dh, i. e. ShadhAni).
Oahie^— Dorsey, (pegiha MS. Diet.. B. A. E.
i Omaha and Ponka name; pron. Sh&hiddha).
layani. — Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1882 (Kansa name; pron. Shay&nl). Ghaa.—
La Salle (1680) in Margry, D6c., ii, 54, 1877.
Ghaguyennet.— Perrin du Lac, Voy., 307, 1805.
GhJenne.— Williamson in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
1, 296, 1872 (given as a French form ) . Ohao«nne.~
Lewis, Travels, 16, 1809. Ohawaa.— Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, i, 198, 1851. Chayenne.— Clark (1804) in
Lewis and Clark Jour., i, 175,1904. Oheyennet.—
Cass (1834) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ni,609, 1868.
Chiana.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 90, 22d Cong., Ist sess., 81,
1832. Ohien.— Lewis and Clark, Travels, 35, 1806
BULL. 30] CHEYENNE, NORTHERN CHEYKNNK, SOUTHERN
257
(French name). Ohiennes. — Brackenridgc. Views
of La., 77, 1815. Ohoaenne.— Fisher, New Travels,
26, 1812. Ohyannes.— Lewis and Clark, Jour., 135,
1840. Ohyan*.— Dougherty (1837) in H. R. Doc.
276, 25th Cong., 2d seas., 20, 1838. Chyennet.—
Lewis and Clark, Travels, 35, 1806. OhynneB.—
Am. St. Papers, iv, 710, la^. Cien.— Clark (1804)
in Lewis and Clark Jour., i, 230, 1904. Cut
wrifte.— Burton, City of Saints, 151, 1861 (in-
tended as an interpretation of the tribal sign).
Dog Indians.— Clark (1801) in Lewis and Clark
Jour., 1, 175, 1904 (on p. 189 he speaks of "the
Chien (Cheyenne) or Dog Inds.," from confusion
with the French chien, *dog'). Dog nation.—-
Gass, Jour., 63, 1807. Ddtsrstas. — Mooney in
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1023, 1896 (proper tribal name).
Gatsalgni.— Ibid. (Kiowa Apacne name). HXt-
Mi'na.— Ibid, ('scarred people': Arapaho name,
sing., Hl'taai). I-sonah'-pu-she.— Hayden.Ethnog.
and Philol. Mo. Val., 402, 1862 (Crow name).
Itah-lMhipai^i.— Maximilian, Travels, ii, 234,
1839-^1 (Hidatsa name), k-ins^p^tji.— Long.
Exped. Rocky Mts., ii. Ixxxiv, 1823 (Hidatsa
name). iU8i'n&.— Mooney, Cheyenne MS., B. A.
E., 1904 ( * scarred people ' ; also JPltdsi'na, A rapaho
name; sing., Itftsi')- I-UC-su-pu-zi.— Matthews,
Ethnog. and Philol. Hidatsa, 160, 1877 ('spotted
arrow quills': from t/cwM, arrow quills; pusi, spot-
ted: Hidatsa name; «=.sh). It-u»-ihi'-na,— Hay-
den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 326, 1862
('scarred people': Arapaho name). Ka'neahei-
wasWOc.— /rrinncU quoted by Mooney in 14th Rep.
B. A. E. , 1023, 1896 (• people with a langxiage some-
what like Crec': Cree name; of. Kaninavish, the
Arapaho). Hanonl'ki-khro'nlki.— Mooney, ibid.
(Kichai name). Viero'rikwats-kibii'kj.— Ibid.
(Wichita name). Pacarabo.— Pimentel, Lenguas,
II, 347, 1865 (given as a Comanche division, but
evidently intended for Pagftnavo). Paf&navo.—
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1023, 1896 (Shoshoni
and Comanche name: 'striped arrows,' from
pdga * arrow , ' ndvo ' stri ped ' ) . Pah-kah-nah-vo. —
Geoow, Snake or Shoshonay Vocab., 9, 1868
(Shoshoni name). Paikanavoa.— Burton, City of
Saints, 151, 1861 (erroneously interpreted from
the tribal sign as 'cut wrists'). Paikandoot. —
Blackmore in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i,307, 1869
(for Pagftnavo, and erroneously interpreted from
the tribal sign as 'cut wrists'), Pii ka na vo.— ten
Kate, Synonymic, 9, 1884 ('fishes peintes,' so
called by the Comanche, who know tnem also as
Si'-a-na-vo). Pi£-ka-na-wa.— Ibid., 8 (Ute name).
8a-hi'-ye-na.— Rigvs-Dorseyin Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
VII, 440, 1890 (Yankton Sioux name, indicating a
'people speaking an alien language,' from M-i-a^
kiitoaa. * to speak a strange language,' id-i-a-pi^
*a foreign or unknown language'; «=sh; na is a
diminutive suffix, which becomes to in the Teton
and dafl in the Santee dialect). 8a+k'o-f-t.— ten
Kate, op. cit., 10 (Kiowa name). Sak'o'ta.—
Moonty in 14th Rep. B. A. E., im, 1896 (Kiowa
name; sing., Sak'6dftl-). Saoynt.— De Smet, Mis-
sions, 264, 1848. 8a-8is-«-tas.— Clark, Ind. Sign
Lang., 99. 1885 (given as their own name, prop-
erly Dzltsl'stas). Saytnagi.— Gatschet, Shawnee
MS., B. A.E., 1879 (Shawnee name; 8ing.,Sftyen).
Soarred-Arms.— Sage, Scenes in Rocky Mts., 92,
1846 (from misinterpretation of the tnbal sign).
Boheyenne.— Domenech, Deserts, ii, 355, 1860.
SohianMO.— Carver, Trav., 50, 1796 (improperly
noted as a Sioux band and distinct from the
** Schians"). Schiannesse.— Williamson in Minn,
fflst Soc. Coll., I, 297, 1872 (misquoting Carver).
I.— Carver, op. cit. (improperly noted as a
Sioux band and distinct from the " Schianese '*) .
BhiK-en.— Gatschet, Kaw MS. vocab., B. A. £.,
1878 (one Kansa name). Shacen.— Culbertson
in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 96, 1851 (misprint for
Shayen). 8ha-ho.— Grinnell, inf'n, 1904 (Paw-
nee name). Bha-i-a-pi. — Williamson, op. cit.,
299 (Santee Sioux name denoting a * people
speaking an alien language,' especially the
Chevenne, and equivalent to Sha-i-e-na, the
Yanxton Sioux form; pi »pl. suffix ) . Shai-e'-la.—
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 274,1862 (so
called by some Sioux; this is the Teton Sioux
form). Sha-i-e-na.— Williamson, op. cit., 299,
Bull. 30— Oo 17
1872 (Yankton Sioux name, applied to pe<.>ple
speaking an alien language, particularly the
Cneyenne. Hayden, op. cit., 274, has Shui-en-a;
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., htis Shtiiona for their
Taos I'ueblo name). Sharas.— Hayden, on. fit.,
274. 8har'-ha.— Lewis and Clark, Travels, 35,
1806 (incorrectly given as their own name, but
pr(»perly from the Sioux form, ('lark, IHOl, ha.s
"Sharha (ehien), the village on the other side;
We heeskeu (chien) the villagers on this side,"
as though there were then two principal bands. —
Lewis and Clark Journals, i, 190, 1904). Shar-
•haa.— Hayden, op. cit., 274. Shaway*.— De Smet,
Letters, 33, 1S43. ShMirhays.— Brackenridge,
Views of -La.. 299, 1815. 'Shayen.— Gatschet, Fox
MS., B. A. E., 1H82 (Fox name). Shayenna.—
Gatschet, Kaw MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1878 (another
Kansa name). Sheyen.— Gatschet, Tonka we MS.,
B. A. E., 1HH4 (Tonka wa name). Sheyennes.— De
Smet, Letters, 13, 1843. Shian.— Irving, Ind.
Sketches, ii, 146, 1835. Shia'navo.— Mooney in 14th
Rep. B. A. E., 1023, 1896 (another Comanche name
for the (Cheyenne, prooably a derivation Irom
their common name). Shiannec—Snelling, Tales
of Travel, 100. 1830. Shiarieh.— Gatschet, Wichita
MS., B. A. K., 1879 (Wichita name). ShiI'da.—
M(M)neyop. cit. (anotncr Wichita name, probably
a derivation from Cheyenne). Shiene. — Wil-
liamson in Minn. Hist. S(X'. Coll., i. 296, 1S72.
Shiennes. — Maximilian, Travels. 389, 1843.
Shiens.— Williamson, op. cit. 8hi-ya.— Morgan
in N. Am. Rev., 50. Jan., 1870 (given as Siou.x
name). Shiyant.— Ibid, (given as Sioux name).
Showays. — Domenech, Deserts, ii, 60, 1860 (for
Shawav. etc.). Shyennes. — Ciallatin in Trans.
Am. Ethnol. Soc, li, 104, 1848. Sianabone. —
Garcia Rejon in Pimentel, Lenguas, ii, 347, 1865
(for Shiiinavo). 8i'-a-na-vo.— ten Kate, Syn-
onymic, 9, 1884 (one of the names by which the
Comanche know them, given as meaning ' plumes
peintes,' but evidently another form of their
popular name). T«e-tu-ta»'.— Ibid., 8 ( = 'nous,
nousautres': their own name).
Cheyenne, Northern. The popular des-
ignation for that part of the Cheyenne
which continued to range along the upi)er
Platte after the rest of the tribe (Southern
Cheyenne) had permanently moved down
to Arkansas r. , about 1835. They are now
settled on a reservation in Montana. From
the fact that the Oinisis division (q. v. )
is most numerous among them, the term
is frequently used by the Southern Chey-
enne as synonymous, (j. M.)
XTpper Cheyenne*.— Custer, Life on the Plains, 88,
1874.
Cheyenne Sioux. Possibly a loose ex-
pression for Cheyenne River Sioux, i. e.,
the Sioux on Cheyenne Riverres., S. Dak. ;
but more probably, considering the date,
intended to designate those Sioux, chiefly
of the Oglala division, who were accus-
tomed to associate and intennarry with
the Cheyenne. The term occurs in Ind.
Aff. Rep. 41, 1856. (j. .m.)
Cheyenne, Southern. That part of the
Cheyenne which ranged in the s. portion
of the tribal territory after 1835, now per-
manently settled in Oklahoma. They
are commonly known as Sowonfft, * south-
erners' (from sowdn^ 'south*), by the
Northern Cheyenne, and sometimes as
Hevhaitanio, from their most numerous
division. (j. m.)
Po-no-i-ta-ni-o.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val., 290, 1862 (evidently a misprint forSowon'-
itfi'niu, ' southern men ' ). So'wftnii.— Mooney in
14th Rep.B.A. E., 1026, 1896.
258
CHEYINYE CHICAGO
Tb. A. ■.
Cheyinye (* buffalo calf). A sabgens
of the Anikhwa, the Buffalo gens of the
Iowa.
Tee yin'-ye.— Doreey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 239, 1897.
Chiaha (Chehaw). A common Creek
town name. The earliest on record,
Chiaha, visited by the De Soto expedi-
tion in 1540, has been identified as on
the lower Chattahoochee, in the imme-
diate vicinity of the later important
town known commonly as Chehaw, about
the year 1800, near the present Columbus,
Ga. A third town of the name was lower
down, on Flint r., and was considered a
Seminole settlement. Still another of
the name, belonging to the Upper Creeks,
may have been on Upper Coosa r. in n.
Georgia. (j. m.)
Achiha.— JefTerys, Am. Atl&s. 7, 1776. Arohieoo. —
U. S. Ind. Treat. (1827), 420, 1837. Big Chehaos.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 263, 1855. BigOht-
hawi.— Barnard (1793) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff.,
I, 391, 1«}2 (on the Chattahoochee). Ohah&h.—
Adair, Am. Ind., 257, 1775. Che-anhun.—U. S. Ind.
Treat. (1827), 420, 1837. Chearhau.— H. R. Ex.
Doc. 276, 24th Cong.. 327, 1836. Che-ar-haw.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854. Che-au-
hau.—Hawkins(1799), Sketch, 63, 1848. Oheoaws.—
Harris, Coll. of Voyages, ii, 335, 1705. Oheechaws.—
Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. iv, 29, 1848 (on Flint
r.; a small tribe destroyed in 1817 by Georgia
militia). Cheehaws. — Morse, Rep. to Sec. War,
308.1822. Ohehau.— Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, v, 256, 1855. Ohehawah.— Schoolcraft,
ibid., IV, 578, 1854. Chehaws.— Barnard (1793) in
Am. State Pap., Ind. AfT., i, 382, 1832. Chehawu-
seohe.— Ibid., 309 (evident misprint for "Che-
haw, Useche ") . Chehew.— Crawford (1836) in H.
R. Doc. 274, 25th Cong., 2d seas., 24, 1836. Chiaha.—
(Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. Coll.
La., II, 145, 1850. Ghiha.— Philippeaux, map of
Engl. Col. . 1781. Ghiaa.— Biedma (1544 ) , Hakluyt
Boc. transl., 182,1851. lehiaha.— Garci lasso de la
Vega, Fla., 139, 1723. loiaha.— Shipp, DeSoto and
Florida, 370. 1881. Solameco.— Vandera (1569) in
French, Hist. Coll. La.. Ii, 247, 1875. Thiaha.— De
Soto map (1543) in Harrisse, Diseov. N. A., 644,
1892. Tipper Ohe«haws.— U. S. Ind. Treat. ( 1797), 69.
1837. Yohiaha.— Garci lasso de la Vega, Fla., 138,
1723.
Chiaha. A town of the Creek Nation,
Ind. T., on Verdigris r., n. e. of Wea-
laka. — Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii,
186, 1888.
Tchiaha.— Gat*«chet, ibid.
Chiahudshi ( Chiahu^dshi, * little Chia-
ha') . A former dependent settlement of
the Chiaha, about 2 m. w. of Hitchiti
town, E. Ala.
Ohe-au-hoo-ohe.— Hawkins (1799). Sketch, 64, 1848.
Ohiahtt'dthi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 129,
1884. Little Chehaua.— Swan (1791) in School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, v, 263, 1865. little Chiaha.—
Gatschet, op. cit.
Chiakamish. A Squawmish village com-
munity on a creek of the same name, a
tributary of Squawmisht r., Brit Col.
Tcia'kainic.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474,
1900. Toia'qamio.— Boas MS., B. A. £., 1887.
Chiakanesson. Mentioned by a French
trader as a tribe of 350 warriors, associated
with the Alibamu, Caouikas (Kawita),
Machecous (Creeks), and Souikilas (Sa-
wokli). Possibly the Creeks of Chiaha,
the ending being the misspelt Creek igti^
* people * ; or, less likely, the Chickasaw.
On the De I'lsle map of 1707 **Chiacante-
sou,'* which is probably the same, is
located much farther n. w., within the
Caddoan country. See Bouquet, Exped.,
Smith's ed., 70, 1766. (a. s. g.)
Ohenakisses.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes,
III, 79, 1854. Chiaoantefous.— B. des lx)zi6res. Voy-
age a la La., 242, 1802. ChiahneMon.— Boudinot-
Star in the West, 126, 1816. ChiokanoMoua.— School,
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 657, 1853.
Chiaktel. A Chilliwack village in s.
Brit. Col.; pop. 43 in 1904.
TcU'ktEa.— mil-Tout in Ethnol.Surv. Can.,4,1902.
Tyeaohten.— Can. Ind. AfT., pt. ii, 160, 1901.
Tieaohten.— Ibid., 224, 1902.
Cliiataina. {ChVd-tal^na^ ^ knife peo-
ple'). The Knife clan of the pueblo of
Taos, N. Mex. (f. w. h.)
Ghibaoainani (Shlbd'u'naningj 'passage-
way.— W. J.). A former Missisauga vil-
lage, also known as La Cloche, on Cloche
id., in L. Huron, n. of Manitoulin id.
Ohibaouinani.— La Galissonidre (1748) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., X, 183, 1858. La Cloche.— Ibid.
Chibukak. A Yuit Eskimo village at
Northwest cape, St Lawrence id., Bering
sea. — Nelson m 18th Rep. B. A. E., map,
1899.
Chica^a. A chief town of the Chickasaw,
situated, according to Halbert (Miss.
Hist. Soc. Publ., VI, 452, 1902), 1 m. n. w.
of Redland, in Pontotoc co.. Miss., in the
1 6th century. This settlement was visited
by the army of De Soto, who made it his
headquarters during the winter of 1540-41,
and whose chroniclers describe it as situ-
ated on a hill and consisting of thatch-
roofed houses. In- the following spring
the Indians, after repeated attacks, suc-
ceeded in setting fire to the town, and, al-
though finally repulsed, killed a number
of Spaniards and horses. The day fol-
lowing this disaster the Spaniards moved
to a spot a league away, where they built
a temporary village which they called
Chicacilla, i. e., * Little Chica^a .
Chioafa.— Ranjel (1546) quoted by Oviedo, Hist.
Gen.. I, 571, 1851. Ghreat Village of the Ohieka-
•awe.— Jeff erys. Am. Atlas, map 26, 1776.
Sicacha.— Hennepin (1697), cited by Thwaites,
Hennepin, ii, 442, 1903.
Chicago (Sauk, Fox, and Kickapoo:
shH'agim, *skunk', SLndshekakohig^f 'place
of the skunk*, an ancient name for the
8. part of L. Michigan, due, it is said,
to a large skimk that once lived along
the 8. shores and was killed in the
lake by a party of fox hunters. — ^^W. J.;.
A Miami village on the site of Chicago,
111., at the period of the earliest explo-
rations in that region, 1670-1700. A
French document of 1695 makes it a
Wea village at that time (N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., IX, 619, 1855). Situated on
one of the routes to the Mississippi, it
was a place of importance from an
early date. Marquette and Joliet passed
by it on their return from their ex-
ploration of the Mississippi, and Mar-
quette subsequently spent a winter
tnere. Allouez took the same route
in 1677, as did La Salle on his sec-
BULL. 30]
CHICHEROHE CHICK AHOMIN Y
259
ond journe;yr, and Joutel and Cavelier
• were at Chicago in 1687-88, followed by
La Hontan the following year. Chicago
was also the name of a chief of the Illinois
about 1725. See Hoffman in 14th Rep.
B. A. E., 238.
Apkaw.— St Cosme (1699) in Shea, Earlv Vov., 52,
1861 (apparently intended for Chicasro). 6heoa-
gou.— Membr6 (1681) in Shea, Diseov. Miss. R.,
166, 1852. Chega^u.--I>oc. of 1695 in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., IX, 619, 1865. Chegakou.— La Hontan
(1703), New Voy., i, 231, 1735. Chekakou.— Ibid.,
I, 136, 1703. Chicago.— Iberville (1702) in Minn.
Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 341, 1872. Chicagou.— Docu-
ment of 1695 in N. Y. Doc. Col. H^t., ix, 627
1865. OhicagS.— St Cosme (1699) in Shea, Early
Voy., 56, 1861. Ohicags.— Croghan (1765) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 785, 1866. Ohicagu.— St Cosme,
op. cit., 61. Chicagw.— Ibid., 59. Ohicaqw.—
Ibid., 54. Chigagou.— Ibid.,68. Chikago.— LaTour,
map, 1784. Chikagons. —La Potheric. Hist. Am6r. ,
n, 346, 1753. Chikagou.— St Cosme (1699) in Shea,
Early Voy., 55, 1861. Ohikagoua.— Gravier (1700),
ibid., llfr-117. Ohikagu.— St Cosme, op. cit.,
51. Ohikagw.— Shea, Rel. Mission de Miss., 22.
1861.
Chicherohe. A former Cherokee settle-
ment on War Woman cr., in n. w. Rabun
CO., Ga.; destroyed in the Revolutionary
war. (j. M.)
Chiohigoae (seemingly cognate with
Chippewa shishikwe, 'rattlesnake'. —
W. J. ). A tribe mentioned by La Ches-
naye as living n. of L. Superior in 1697,
and generally trading with the English on
Hudson bay. They can not be identified
with any known tribe, but they were evi-
dently Algonquian. (j. m.)
Ohichigoue.— La Chesnaye (1697) in Margrv, D^c.
VI, 7, 1886. Ohiohigoneks.— La Potherie, Hist, de
r Am6r., II, 49, 1753.
Chichilek. A Squawmish village com-
munity on Burrard inlet, Brit. Col.
Tdtcile'Ek. -Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 475,
Chichilticalli (Nahuatl: chichiliic 'red,'
calli 'house': 'red house'). A ruined
pueblo visited by Coronado's army on its
journey to Cibola (Zuni) in 1540; appar-
entlv situated on the Gila, e. of the mouth
of the San Pedro, s. Ariz., probably not
far from Solomonsville. Owing to the
glowing account of the place given by
Fray Marcos de Niza in the preceding
year, Coronado and his followers were
" njuch affecte<i by seeing that the fame
of Chichilticalli was summed up in one
tumble-down house without anv roof, al-
though it appeared to have been a strong
place at some former time when it was in-
habited, and it was very plain that it had
been built by a civilized and warlike race
of strangers who had come from a dis-
tance" (Castafleda). Thesamewriteralso
states that it '* was formerly inhabited by
people who had separated from Cibola."
Many writers have wrongly identified it
with the present Casa Grande. See Ban-
delier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 178,
1890; Hodge, Coronado's March, 1899;
Winship, Coronado Exped., 14th Rep.
B,A. E., 1896. (F. w. u.)
Ohichicticale.— Castafleda (1596) in Ternaux-
Compans, Voy., ix. 12, 1838. Chichillicale.— Kern,
map in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 38, 1854. Chi-
chilte Calli.— Jaramillo in Ternaux-Compans,
Voy.. IX, 365, 1838. Chichilti.— Gallatin in Trans.
Am. Ethnol. Soc. ii, Ixxviii, 1848. Chichilticah.—
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, i, 117, 1881 (mis-
print). Chiohilti-oal.— Gallatin, op. cit., Ixix.
Chichilticala.— Ogilby, America, 299, 1671. Chi-
chiiticale.— Coronado (1540) in Hakluyt. Voy., 448^
1600. Chiohilticalen.— De Hsle, map Am. Sept.,
1700. ChichilticaU.— Mota-Padilla, Hist, dela Con-
quista, 113, 1742. Chiohilti-calli.— Gallatin, op.
cit., Ix. Ohichiltic-Oalli.— Jaramillo in Ternaux-
Compans, Voy., IX, 368, 1838. Ohiohiltie Jara-
millo in Dw. In<Jd., xiv. 307, 1870. Ohiohiltie
Alli.— Jaramillo qiioted by Bancroft, Ariz, and
N. Mex., 40, 1889. Ohiohiticala.— Heylyn, Cosmog-
raphy, 968, 1703. Ohiohitioale.— Coronado (1540)
in Ramusio, Nav. et Viaggi, in, 362(F), 1565. Chi-
chitte Calli.— Jaramillo in Doc. In^., xiv, 304,
1870. Chilticale.— Beadle, Undeveloped West, 468,
1873. Red House.— Wallace in Atl. Slonthlv, 219,
Aug., 1880 (or Chichiticale). Bed Town.— Dome-
nech, Deserts N. A., 1. 175. 1860 (or Chichilticale).
Roode Huis.- ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 161, 1885
(Dutch form).
Chichinak. A Kaialigmiut Rskimo vil-
lage on a small river fiowing into Etolin
str., Alaska; pop. 6 in 1880, 84 in 1890.
Chechinamiut.— llth Census, Alaska, 164. 1893.
Chichinagamute.— PetroflF, Rep. on Alaska, 54. 1880.
Chichip^ Ontip^ (Chippewa has Titl-
pe'ii'iitlpe, *curly-head.' — W. J. ). A large
Potawatomi village in 1888 near South
Bend, St Joseph co.*, Ind. (j. m.)
Chichiveachic (probably from the na-
tive term signifying 'peaks' -f chw 'place
of). A Tarahumare vtancheria in Chi-
huahua, Mexico.— Ltftiiholtz, inf n, 1894.
CHICKAHOMINY MAN
Chickahominy ( from K'rhh'k-nham-min^-
nough, ' coarse- i)Oun< led corn people,'
'hominy people'— Tooker; or from Tshi-
k^hdmSn, a ]>lace name, meaning ^ swept,'
260
CHICKAMAUGA — CHICKASAW
[B. A. E.
* cleared/ and implying a clearing —
Gerard). A tribe of the Powhatan con-
federacy, formerly living on Chicka-
hominy r., Va. It was one of the most
important tribes in Virginia, numbering
250 warriors, or perhaps 900 souls, in
1608, and was not so directly under the
control of Powhatan as the other tribes
over which he ruled. In 1613 they en-
tered into an alliance with the English
and assumed the name of Tassautessus
(«ic), or ** Englishmen." In 1669 they
were still estimated at 60 warriors, possi-
bly 220 souls, but in 1722 were reported
to number only about 80. Their last
public notice occurs in this same year,
when, in connection with the Pamunkey,
they were named in the Albany confer-
ence with the Iroquois as among the Vir-
ginia tribes not to be molested by the
CHICKAHOMINY WOMAN. (mOONEy)
latter. A mixed-blood band numbering
about 220 still keeps up the name, but
without regular tnbal or^nization, on
both sides of Chickahominy r. in New
Kent and Charles City cos., Va., with
Wm. H. Adkins as chief in 1905. They
are on close terms of association with the
neighboring bands of Pamunkey and
Mattapony. On the origin and applica-
tion of the name consult Tooker, Algonq.
Ser., IX, 1900; Gerard in Am. Anthrop.,
¥11,224,1905. (J. M.)
Oheohohomynies.— Smith, Works, Arber ed.,lxxv,
1884. Oheokahonuuiie*.— Harris, Voy. and Trav., i,
839,1705. Ghekahomanies.— Ibid. Ohioahamanias.—
Smith (1629), Virginia, ii, 16, repr. 1819. Ohicho-
minyi.— Albany conference (1722) in N. Y. Doc.
Ck)l. Hist., V, 673, 1866. Ohickahamanias.— Smith
(1629), Virginia, ii, 27, repr. 1819. Ohickaha-
iiinea.— Strachey (ca. 1612), Virginia, 51, 1849.
Chiokahomines.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 126,
1816. Chiokahominyi.— Spotswood (1712) in Va.
Hist. Soc. Coll., n. s., i, 167, 1882. Chiokahomones.—
Jefferson (1781) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 36,
1855. Ohickahomonie.— Beverly, Virginia, 199,
1722. Ohikahominy.— Martin, N. C, l, 78, 1829.
TaMauteMua.— Smith (1624), Works, Arber ed.,
515, 1884 ('strangers,' •Englishmen,' an adopted
name). Yttaaantaaough.— Simmonds (1612-24),
ibid., 430.
Chickamanga [Tstkdma^gij a word ap-
parently of Foreign origin and probably
Shawnee, Creek, or Chickasaw). The
name given to a band of Cherokee who
espoused the English cause in the war of
the Revolution and moved far down on
Tennessee r., establishing new settle-
ments on Chickamauga cr., in the neigh-
borhood of the present Chattanooga.
Under this name they soon became noted
for their uncompromising and never-
ceasing hostility. In 1782 their towns
were destroyed dv Sevier and Campbell,
and they moved farther down the river,
establishing what were afterward known
as the **five lower towns," Running
Water, Nickajack, Long Island, Crow
Town, and Lookout Mountain Town.
Here they were continually recruited by
Creeks, Shawnee, and white Tories, until
they were estimated to number a thou-
sand warriors. They continued hostili-
ties against the Tennessee settlements
until 1794, when their towns were de-
stroyed.— Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
54, 413, 537, 1900.
Chickasaw. A n important Muskhogean
tribe, closely related to the Choctaw in
language an<i customs, although the two
tri^s were mutually hostile. Aside
from tradition, the earliest habitat trace-
able for the Chickasaw is n. Mississippi.
Their villages in the 18th century cen-
tered about Pontotoc and Union cos.,
where the headwaters of the Tombigbee
meet those of Yazoo r. and its affluent, the
Tallahatchie, about where the De Soto
narratives place them in 1540, under
the name Chicaza. Their main landing
place on the Mississippi was at Chick-
asaw Bluffs, now the site of Memphis,
Tenn., whence a trail more than 160 m.
long led to their villages. They had two
other landing places farther up the Mis-
sissippi. Adair, who for many years was
a trader among the Chickasaw and gives
a full and circumstantial account of
them (Hist. Am. Inds., 352-373, 1775),
states that in 1720 they had four contigu-
ous settlements, and that the towns of
one of these were Shatara, Chook'heereso,
Hykehah, Tuskawillao, and Phalacheho.
Two of the Qther settlements of which he
gives the names were Yaneka, 6 m. long,
and Chookka Phardah (ChukafalayaJ,
4 m. long. Romans (Florida, 63, 1775),
describing their country and villages, says
that they ** live nearly in the center of an
uneven and large nitrous savannah ; have
in it 1 town, 1 J m. long, very narrow and
|«|td ^ H^UT
BULL. 30]
CHICKASAW
261
irregular; this they divide into 7 [towns!
by the names oi Anialahta 'hat and
feather/ Chatelaw * copper town,' Chuka-
^aya Mong town,* Hikkihaw * stand
still,* Chucalissa * great town,* Tuckahaw
'a cert*n weed,* Ashukhuma 'red grass.*
Formerly the whole was inclosed in pali-
sadoes.**
The warlike Chickasaw claimed other
territory fer beyond the narrow limits of
their villages, and extending on the n. to
the confluence of the Ohio with the Ten-
nessee. They also claimed a large area
N. of the Tennessee to the ridge be-
tween Duck r. and the Cumberland to
the headwaters of Duck r. and s. to Chick-
asaw Old Fields on the Tennessee, thence
alon^ an indeterminate s. e. line to the
Mississippi. This claim was admitted by
the Cherokee. According to Haywood
and other authorities an outlying colony of
Chickasaw formerly dwelt oh Savannah r.
nearly opposite Augusta, Ga. , but trouble
with the Creeks drove them westward
again. In 1795 the Chickasaw claimed
payment from the United States for the
land on the Savannah thus occupied.
The Chickasaw were noted from remote
times for their bravery, independence,
and warlike disposition. They were con-
stantly fighting with the neighboring
tribes'; sometimes with the Choctaw and
Creeks, then with the Cherokee, Illinois,
Kickapoo, Shawnee, Mobilians, Osage,
and Quapaw. In 1732 they cut to pieces
a war party of IroquQifg who had invaded
their country. They were constant ene-
mies of the French — a feeling intensified
by the intrigues of British tneders and
their hatred of the Choctaw who had
entered into friendly relations with the
French colonists. The Chickasaw urged
the Natchez to resist the French encroach-
ments, and gave shelter to them when
driven from their home. They defeated
the French at Amalahta in 1736, at the
Long House and other points, and baffled
their attempts at conquest in the war of
1739-40. They combined with the Cher-
okee about 17i5 and drove the Shawnee
from their home on the Cumberland, and
in 1769 utterly routed, at Chickasaw Old
Fields, these former Cherokee allies.
Their relations with the United States
began with the Hopewell treaty in 1786,
when their boundary on the n. was fixed
at the Ohio r. They began to emigrate
w. of the Mississippi as early as 1822,
and treaties for the removal of those who
remained in their old seats were made in
1832 and 1834. By the treaty of 1855
their lands in Indian Ter. were definitely
separated from those of the Choctaw, with
which they had before been included.
In manners and customs they differed
little from their congeners, the Choctaw,
the principal difference being the more
sedentary habits and greater devotion to
agricultural pursuits by the Choctaw on
the one hand, and the more turbulent,
restless, and warlike disposition of the
Chickasaw on the other. Their tradi-
tional origin is the same as that of the
Creeks and Choctaw (q. v. ), and is given
in the so-called "Creek migration leg-
end*' (see Creeks). The Chickasaw ap-
pear to have sheltered and ultimately
mcorporated into their organization the
small tribes along Yazoo r., who spoke
substantially the same language. The
Chickasaw language served as a medium
of commercial and tribal intercourse for
all the tribes along the lower Mississippi.
Early estimates of population vary widely,
those of the 18th century rangmg from
2,000 to nearly 6,000. According to
Adair (op. cit., 353) they had been much
CHICKASAW
more numerous than during his time
(1744), one of the two divisions, the
"Long House,*' numl)ering not more
than 450 warriors, indicating a population
of 1,600 to 1,800 persons. He gives no
estimate of the other division, but assum-
ing it to have been about the same, the
population of the entire tribe was between
3,000 and 4,000. Morse (Rep. to Sec.
War, 364, 1822), though estimating the
Choctaw at 25,000, gives the Chickasaw
population as 3,625. In 1865 the esti-
mated population was 4,500; in 1904 the
official number was given as 4,826, in-
cluding mixed bloods.
According to Morgan (Anc. Society,
163, 1878) the Chickasaw were divided
into 12 gentes, arranged in 2 phratries, as
follows:
I. — Koi, Panther: (1) Koinchush,
262
CHICKASAW — CHICKWIT
[B. A. B.
Wild cat; (2) Hatakfushi, .Bird; (3)
Nunni, Fish; (4) Issi, Deer. Il.—Ish-
panee, Spanish: (1) Shauee, Raccoon;
(2) Ishpanee, Spanish; (3) Mingko,
Royal; (4) Hushkoni, Skunk; (5) Tunni,
Squirrel; (6) Hochonchabba, Alligator;
(7) Nashola, Wolf; (8) Chuhhla, Black-
bird.
The list given bv Gibbs (Gatschet,
Creek Migr. I^g., i, 96, 1884) follows:
I. — Panther phratrv, Koa: (1) Koin-
tchush, Wild cat; (2) Fnshi, Bird; (3)
Nanni, Fish; (4) Issi, Deer. II. — Span-
ish phratrv, Ish^ani: (1) Shawi, Rac-
coon; (2) Ishpani, Spanish; (3) Mingo,
Royal; (4) Huskoni; (5) Tunni, Squir-
rel; (6) Hotchon tchapa, Alligator; (7)
Nashoba, Wolf; (8) Tchu'hla, Black-
bird.
Mingos or chiefs could be chosen only
from the "Spanish'' gens, and were he-
reditary in the female line. The name
must formerly have been different or this
rule must have been established after
the coming of the Spaniards.
The following are the old Chickasaw
towns so far as recorded: Ackia, Ama-
lahta, Ashukhuma, Chatelaw, Chuca-
lissa, Chukafalaya, Chula, Hykehah,
Latcha Hoa, Palacheho, Pontotoc,
Shatara, Taposa, Tuckahaw, Tuskawillas,
Yaneka. (a. s. o. c. t. )
Relat. Miss, on Miss. R., 28, 1861. Ohekuawt.— Im-
lay , West. Terr. , 290, 1 797. Chiaoasas. — Ofissef eld ,
Map of U.S., 17^. Ohica^a.— Gentl. of Elvas (1567)
in Hakluvt Soc. Works, ix, 81, 1851. Ohioachas.—
La Salle (1682) in Margry, D4c., i, 553, 1875. Chi-
caches. —Ohauvignerie (1736) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, in, 555, 1853. Chicaktaws.— Schoolcraft,
ibid., 45. Chicasan.— Morse, Hist. Am., map,
1798. OhicaM«.— Croghan (1759) in Proud, Penn.,
II, 297, 1798. Ohicasauus.— Alcedo, Die. Geog.,
I, 497, 1786. Chioasaws.— Barton, New Views,
xlvii, 1798. Ohicasou.— Mandril Ion, Spect. Am.,
map, 17a5. ChiciMaa.— French, Hist. Coll. La.,
111,237, 1851. Chicawchawa.— Perrin du Lac.Voy.,
368, 1805. Ohicasa.— Biedma (1545) in Smith, Col.
Doc. Fla.. 1. 55. 1^57. Chichacaa.— Robin. Voy. k la
Louisiane, i. 54, 1807. Ohiohaaan.— Mollhausen,
Reisen, i, 343, 1858. Ohichaaaws.— Imlay, West.
Terr., 13, 1797. CMohaahaa.— Gamelin (1790) in
Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., i. 93, 1832. Ohioka-
•aws.— Niles (1760) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 4th s.. v,
549, 1861. Chickaaaaa. — Domencch, Deserts, l. 440.
1860. Ohickesaw.— Frink (1764) in Hawkins,
MisBns., 101, 1845. OhickeUws.— Rogers, North
America. 201, 1765. Chiokisaw. — Bollaert in
Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., ii, 280, 1850. Ohickka-
aah.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 109, 1816. Ohick-
•aa.— Croghan (1759) in Kauffman, West. Pa., 146,
1851. Ohickaaws.— Bossu (1751 ), Travels La., i, 92,
1771. Ohickaha.— Penhallow (1726) in N. H. Hist.
Coll., 1st 8., 79. 1824. Chickahau.— Niles (1760) in
Mass. Hist. Coll., 4th s., v, 333, 1861. Chinsawa.—
Catesbv, Nat. Hist. Car., ii, x, 1743. Ohikacliaa.—
Vater, Mith., in, 245, 1816. Ohikakas.— Shea,
Relat. Miss, on Miss. R.. 34, 1861. Ohikaaaha.-^
Prichard, Phvs. Hist., v. 401. 1847. Obikaaaws.—
Drake, Ind. Chron., 215. 1836. Ohikaaha.— ten
Kate, Reizen in N. A., 402, 1885. OhikiUwa.—
Rogers, North America, 149, 1765. Ghikkaaah.—
Barton, New Views, xlvii, 1798. Ohikkeaah.—
Boudinot, Star in the West. 231, 1816. Ohikaah.—
Tanner, Narr., 327, 1830. Ohiquacha.— Hennepin
(1680) in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 206, 1846.
Ohizaxia.>-French \\Titer (1761) in Mass. Hist.
Coll., 4th 8., IX, 428, 1861. Chukeaws.— Buchanan,
N. Am. Inds., 155. 1824. Cicaca.--La Salle (1679)
in Margry, D^., ii, 41, 1877. Cikaga.— Hennepin,
New Discov., 141, 1698. KtMhi un{\«».— Gatschet.
inf'n (Yuchi name; abbreviated from Chikagahd
Uniin). Ohikkaaaw.— Latham. Opuscula, 278, 1860.
Sicacaa.— La Salle (1680) in Margry, D6c., i, 487,
1875. Bioaoha. —Hennepin, New Discov. , 152, 1698.
Bioaohia.— Ibid., 311. Sikacha.— Ibid., 152.
TohaktchdEn.— Gatschet, infn (Arapaho name).
Tchicachas. — Bossu, Travels La., i, 92, 1771.
Tchikaaa.— Gatschet. Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 126, 1888
(Creek name, pi. Tchicasalgi). Tci'-ka-sa'.—
Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (Kansa
name). Techiohaa.— Duquesne (1754) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., X, 263, 1858. Ti-ka'-ji. —Dorsey,
Kwapa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1891 (Kwapaname).
Tai'-ka-c*. —Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab.. B. A. E.,
1883 (Osage name). TriOcafi.— Mooney in 19th
Rep. B. A. E., 509, 1900 (Cherokee name, pi. Ani'-
Tsl'ksti). Ttlk-fi-t^— Grayson, Creek MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 1885 (Creek name).
Chickasaw Half Town. Mentioned as a
Choctaw town in the report of the Ft
Adams conference in 1801. — Macomb in
Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., i, 661, 1832.
Chickasawhay. A former Choctaw town
which stood, according to tradition, on the
E. side of Chickasawhay r. about 3 m.
below the present town of Enterprise,
Clarke co., (Ja. It also gave its name to
a subdivision between Chickasawhay and
Buckatunna rs. — Halbert in Rep. Ala.
Hist. Soc, Misc. Coll., i, 379, 1901.
Am., 135. map. 176;L. Tohikachaj.— D'Anville,
map (ca. 1732) discussed by Halbert in Miss. Hist.
Soc. Publ., in, 867, 870, 1902.
Chickasaw Old Fields. A place on the
N. side of Tennessee r., opposite Chicka-
saw id., about 4 m. below Flint r., in
8. E. Madison co., Ala.; claimed by the
Chickasaw as one of their ancient village
sites.— Treaty of 1805 in U. S. Ind. Treat.,
116, 1837.
Chickatanbat ( * house afire * ) . A Massa-
chuset sachem of the region about Wey-
mouth, Mass., whose enmity against the
English was early aroused by their dep-
redations on the tribal cornfields and
desecration of his mother^s grave (Drake,
Inds. N. Am., 107, 1880). In 1621, with
several other chiefs, he submitted to
the English authority, and in 1631 vis-
ited Gov. Winthrop at Boston, behaving
**like an Englishman." In 1632 he
served against the Pequot and died the
next year of smallpox. He was a man
of note and influence. (a. f. c.)
Chickwit. A name of the weakfish
(Lahrm squefmgue) still used, according
to Bartlett (Diet, of Americanisms, 112,
1877), in parts of Connecticut and Rhode
Island. This word, spelled also chick-
imckj chequety etc., is generally thought
to be a further corruption of squeteaoue^
another name of this fish. Trumbull
(Natick Diet., 21, 1903) cites the forms
ch^quit and checouty and suggests a deri-
vation from chohkiy signifying, * spotted,'
in the Massachuset dialect of Algon-
qnian. (a. f. c.)
Bl'LL. nOl
OHICOLI — OHIKFSi
263
Chieoli. Mentioned as a Navaho set-
tlement in 1799 (Cortez in Pae. R. R.
Rep., Ill, pt. 3, 119, 1856); but as the
Navaho are not villagers, it is probably
only a geographical name.
Chioonessez (from chicones'mkj 'place
of small turkeys.* — Hewitt). A village
of the Powhatan confederacy, formerly
about Wiseville, Accomac co., Va. It
was nearly extinct in 1722. (j. m. )
OhioonesMZ.— Beverly, Virginia, 199, 1722. Ohii-
lenoMiok.— Herrman map (1670) in Maps to Ac-
company the Rept. of tne Comrs. on the Bdy.
bet. Va. andMd., 1873.
Chioora. The name given by the Span-
iards at the time of AyUon's visit in 1521
to the coast region of South Carolina, s.
of Edisto r., and to the Indians inhabit-
ing it. The name Cusalx), subsequently
applied, included most of the tril>es of
the same r^ion. Gatschet suggests that
the name Chicora is derived from the
Catawba Yuchi-khre, *Yuchi are thert',
or over there,' but the connection is not
very obvious. The French form of al)out
the same period, Chigoula, has more the
appearance of a Muskhogean word. Fon-
taneda, about 1570, makes Chicora and
Crista (Edisto) equivalent. The tril)es
of this region were practically extermi-
nated by Spanish ana English slave hunt-
ers before the close of the 17th century.
(j. M.)*
Ohioonu— Fontaneda (m. 1570) in Ternaux-Coni-
pans, Voy., xx, 16, 1841. Ohicoria.— Garcilassode
la Vega, Fla., 4, 1723. Chicorie.— Ayllon {ca. 1521 )
quoted by Shipp, De Soto and Florida, 240, 1881.
Chi«ouU.— Laudonniere (1562) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., n. a., 190, 1869. Chiquola.— Syms, Hist.
S. C, 10, 1860.
Chioontixni. The name of a locality,
the end of smooth navigation of Sague-
nav r., Quel)ec, by which the Lake St
John band of Montagnais was sometimes
referred to (Jes. Rel. 1661, 13, 1858).
The French formerly had a mission of
the same name on the right bank of the
Saguenay. In 1898 the Montagnais of L.
St John num leered 404 and resided on a
reservation at Pointe Bleue. ( j. m. )
Cheootitimi— Jefferj's, French Dom. Am., i, 18,
1761. Oheooutimiens.— Ibid. Ohegoutimii.— Je.s.
Rel. 1661, 14, 1858. Chekoutimiens.— Bellin, map,
1755. Chekotttiinis.— La Tour, map, 1784. Chioon-
tami.-Johnson (1764) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
VII, 658, 1856 (misprint). Ohicoutme.— Lord.s of
Trade (1764), ibid., 635. Ohiooutimi.— Jes. Rel.
1661, 13, 1858. Ohixoutimi Johnson (1764) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 664, 1856. Kontagnau
of Lake St John.— Can. Ind. Aff. Rep. 1884, pt. i,
185. 1885.
Chicucliatti (probably Creek chuka chali,
* red houses,' referring to the custom of
daubing the houses with red clay). A
former Seminole town n. of Tampa bay,
in the so-called Chocochatee savanna,
Hernando co., Fla. According to Brinton
it was one of the 7 bands into which the
Seminole became divided after their sepa-
• ration from the Creeks.
Ohiokuchatty.— Lindsaj' (1836) in H. R. Doc. 78.
25th Cong., 2d sess., 149, im. Chiouchatty.—
Drake, Ind. Chron., 209, 1836. Chockechiatte.—
Peni^re in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 311, 1822. Oho-
oocharttee.— Cowperwaite, Atlas, 1850. Choke-
chatti.— Brinton, Florida Penin., 145, 1859. Chu-
ku-chatta.— Morse, op. cit, 307.
Chicutae. A former village, presum-
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Tavlor in
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860.
Chie. One of the two principal clans
of the Chiricahua Apacne, coordinate
with the Destchin clan of San Carlos
acency, Ariz.
CEi-e'.— Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 115,
1890.
Chief Joseph. See Joseph.
Chiefs. Among the North American
Indians a chief may be generally defined
as a political officer whose distinctive
functions are to execute the ascertained
will of a definite group of persons united
by the possession of a common territory
or range and of certain exclusive rights,
immunities, and obligations, and to con-
serve their ciLstoms, traditions, and re-
ligion, lie exercises legislative, judica-
tive, and executive powers delegated to
him in accordance with custom for the
conservation and promotion of the com-
mon weal.
The wandering band of men with their
women and children contains the sim-
plest ty|K» of chieftaincy found among the
American Indians, for such a ^roup has
no permanently fixed territorial limits,
and no definite socrial and political rela-
tions exist between it and any other
body of i)ersons. The clan or gens, the
tribe, and the confederation present more
complex forms of social and political or-
ganization. The clan or gens embraces
several such chieftaincies, and has a
more highly developed internal political
structure with definite land boundaria**.
The tribe is constituted of several clans
or gentes and the confederation of sev-
eral tribes. Among the different In-
dian communities the social and politi-
cal structure varied greatly. Many stages
of social progress lay between the small
band under a single chief and the intri-
cate i)ermanent confederation of highly
organized tribes, with several kinds of
officers and varying grades of councils of
diverse but interrelated jurisdictions.
With the advance in political organiza-
tion political powers and functions were
multiplied and diversified, and the nml-
tiplicity and diversity of duties and func-
tions required different grades of officers
to perform them ; hence various kinds and
grades of chiefs are found. There were in
certain communities, as the Iroquois and
Creeks, civil chiefs and subchiefs, chosen
for personal merit, and permanent and
tempo rarv war chiefs. These several
grades of chiefs bear distinctive titles,
indicative of their diverse jurisdiction.
The title to the <lignity l)elongs t<» the
^64
CHIFUKLUK — CHlHL AKON INI
[b. \. E.
community, usually to its women, not to
the chief, who usually owes his nomina-
tion to the suffrages of his female constit-
uents, but in most communities he is
installed by some authority higher than
that of his chieftaincy. Both in the low-
est and the highest form of government
the chiefs are the creatures of law, ex-
pressed in well-defined customs, rites,
and traditions. Only where agriculture
is wholly absent may the simplest type
of chieftaincy be found.
Where the civil structure is permanent
there exist permanent military chieftain-
ships, as among the Iroquois. To reward
personal merit and statesmanship the
Iroquois instituted a class of chiefs whose
oflSce, upon the death of the holder, re-
mained vacant. This latter provision
wa« made to obviate a large representa-
tion and avoid a change in the established
roll of chiefs. They were called "the
solitary pine trees," and were installed
in the same manner as the others. They
could not be deposed, but merely ostra-
cized, if they committed crimes rendering
them unworthy' of givinjf counsel.
Where the civil organization was of the
simplest character the authority of the
chiefs was most nearly despotic; even in
some instances where the civil structure
was complex, as among the Natchez, the
rule of the chiefs at times became in a
measure tyrannical, but this was due
largely to the recognition of social castes
and the domination of certain religious
beliefs and considerations.
The chieftainship) was usually heredi-
tary in certain families of the community,
although in some communities anv person
by virtue of the acquisition oi wealth
could proclaim himself a chief. Descent
of blood, property, and official titles were
generally traced through the mother.
Pearly writers usually called the chief who
acted as the chairman of the federal coun-
cil the "head chief" and sometimes,
when the tribe or confederation was pow-
erful and imjmrtant, "king" or "em-
peror," as in the case of Powhatan. In
the Creek confederation and in that of
the Iroquois, the most complex abo-
riginal* government N. of Mexico, there
was, in fact, no head chief. The first
chief of the Onondaga federal roll acted
as the chairman of the federal council,
and by virtue of his office he called the
federal council together. With this all
preeminence over the other chiefs ended,
for the governing power of the confedera-
tion was lodged in the federal council.
The federal council waa composed of the
federal chiefs of the several component
tribes; the tribal council consisted of the
federal chiefs and subchiefs of the tribe.
Communities are formeil on the hssis
of a union of interests and obligations.
By the union of several rudimentary
communities for mutual aid and protec-
tion, in which each retained part of its
original freedom and delegated certain
social and political powers and jurisdic-
tion to the united community, was
evolved an assembly of representatives of
the united bands in a tribal council hav-
ing a definite jurisdiction. To these
chiefs were sometimes added subchiefs,
whose jurisdiction, though subordinate,
was concurrent with that of the chiefs.
The enlarged community constitutes a
tribe. From tribes were organi'^d con-
federations. There were therefore sev-
eral grades of councils constituted. In
the council of the Iroquois confederation
the subchiefs had no voice or recognition.
Among the Plains tribes the chieftaincy
seems to have been usually non-heredi-
tary. Any ambitious and courageous
warrior could apparently, in strict accord-
ance with custom, make himself a chief
by the acquisition of suitable property
and through his own force of character.
See Social organization. (j. n. b. h. )
Chifnklak. A Magemiut Eskimo vil-
lage on the left bank at the head of the
Yukon delta, Alaska.
Ohifukhluguxnut.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. K.,
map, 18^.
Chigg^Uli. See Chekilli.
Chig^iloTisa (Choctaw: lusa * black,'
chigi * houses '). A former tribe on the
lower Mississippi, probably the same as
the Chitimacha, w. of that river (La Tour,
map, 1783); but possibly they were of
Choctaw affinity.
Chig^mint. A subtribe of the Chu-
gachugmiut Eskimo inhabiting Montague
id.. Prince William sd., Alaska.
Chigmut. — Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., I, map,
1877.
Chignecto (from sigimikty * foot cloth*).
A Micmac village in Nova Scotia in 1760. —
Frye (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ist
s., X, 115, 1809.
Chigaau. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Chihlakonini (chi^lAko-nini, * horse-
trail' ). A former Lower Creek town on
the upper waters of Chattahoochee r.,
seemingly in the present Harris Co., Gra.
It was burned by the whites in Sept.,
1793, at which date it consisted of 10
houses, but by 1799 the people had
formed a new town on the left bank of
Tallapoosa r., opposite Oakfuskee, Ala.
The upper trail or war path crossed the
latter stream by a horse ford at this
flace, about 60 m. above Kasihta town,
t was probably identical with Okfus-
kinini. ' (a. s. g.)
GheoluooA-ninne.— Bartram, Travels, 462, 1792.*
Che'lako Kiiii.-Gatschet, Creek Misrr. Leg., i, 129,
1884. Che-ltto-oo ne-ne.— Hawkins (1799), Sketch,
45, 1848. Ohelucconinny.— Swan (1791) in School-
BULL. 30]
CHIHUCCHIHUI — CHILD LIFK
265
craft, Ind. Tribes, v, 262, 1855. Horw-Trail.—
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 129, 1884. Little
Oakftukee.— Knox (1793) in Am. State Pap., Ind.
Aff., I, 362, 1832.
GhihucohihTii. A former Chumashan
village in Ventura co., Cal. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, July 24, 1863.
Chihnpa ( * jawbone band ' ) . A former
Dakota band under Sishhola, or Barefoot.
6i>ha'-pa.~Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val.. 870, 1862.
Chiink. An Alsea village on the s. side
of Alsea r., Orec.
Td'-ink.— Doreey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iir,
230,1890.
Ohikak. An Aglemiut villa^ on lli-
amna lake, Alaska; pop. 51 in 1880.—
Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 1884.
Chikataubnt See Chickataubut.
Ckikauaeh. A Songish band at McNeill
bay, 8. end of Vancouver id., Brit. Col.
Teik'au'ato.~Boa8 in 6th Rep. on N. W. Tribes
Can.. 17, 1890.
Chikligilkh. A Lower Chehalis settle-
ment at Pt Leadbetter, the n. ond of the
land tongue at Shoal water bay. Wash. —
Gibbs, Chinook vocab., B. A. E., 23.
Chikohoki(from Chikelaki; chlkeno * tur-
key,' aki MandM. The former principal
seat of the Unalachtigo Delawares, situ-
ated on the w. bank of Delaware r., near
the present Wilmington, Del.
Ohiehohooki.— Bozman, Maryland, i, 130, 1837.
Ohiekahokin.— Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, repr.
1819. Ohihohocki.— Thompwn quoted by Jeffer-
son, Notes. 278, 1825. Ohikahokin.— Brinton.
Lenape Leg., 37, 1885. Chikelaki.— Ibid. Chiko-
hooki.— Schermerhom (1812) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 2d 8., II, 6, 1814. Ohikolaoki.— Brinton, op.
cit.
Chikokoki. A former village, said to
be of the Manta division of the Dela-
wares, on the site of Burlington, Burling-
ton CO. , N. J. According to Heckewelder
it was the oldest village on Delaware r.
(.1. M.)
Chikonapi (the Canadian Chippewa use
the term chikondpd for * carpenter.' —
W. J.). Mentioned in the Walam Olum
of the Delawares as a people conquered
or destroyed by the latter tribe (Brinton,
Lenape Legends, 190, 1885). They can
not be located with certainty.
Chilano. A village or tnbe, probably
Oaddoan, visited by De Soto's troops un-
der Moecoso toward the close of 1542, and
at that time situated in n. e. Texas, near
upper Sabine r. See Gen tl. of Elvas (1557 )
in French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 201, 1850.
Ckilchadilklog^e (* grassy-hill people').
An Apache bfmd or clan at San Carlos
agency and Ft Apache, Ariz., in 1881.
Omlohadilkloffue.— Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-
Lore, III, 112, 1890.
Child life. The subject of Indian child
life has been but very lightly treated by
ethnologists, althougli the child is in fact
the strongest bond of family life under a
system which allowed polygamy and easy
separation. Both parents alike were en-
tirely devoted to their children, and be-
stowed upon them the fullest expression
of affection and solicitude. The relation
of parent to child brings out all the high-
est traits of Indian character.
Among some tribes, notably those of the
plains, in anticipation of the new arrival
the father prepares the wooden f rameof the
cradle which is to he its portable bed until
it is able to walk. The body of the cradle,
with its ornamentation of bead or quill
design, fringes and bangles, is made either
by the grandmother or by some woman
noted in the tribe for her superior ex-
pertness. There were many well-marked
varieties of cradle, differing with the
tribe. Among the Choctaw, Catawba,
and other former tribes of the Southern
states, and among the Chinookan and
Salishan tribes of the Columbia, there
was used a special attachment which, by.
continued pressure upon the foreheaJi
w^hile the bones were still soft, produced
the so-called "flat head," esteemed with
these tribes a point of beauty (see Arti-
ficial Head*Deformation). One cradle was
used for successive infants in the same
family.
The newborn infant is commonly treated
at once to a cold bath, and tumea over to
another matron to nurse until the mother's
health is restored. AmongtheHopi, ashes
or sacred meal are rubbed on the newborn
babe. Lactation is long continued, even
for 2 years or more, and in rare cases much
longer. With all the affection of the
mother, the women are almost completely
ignorant of ordinary sanitary rules as to
feeding, exposure, etc., consequently
the rate of infant mortality is very high
in almost every tribe, many children
being born, but only a small proi>ortion
coming to maturity, so that even in for-
mer times the tribal population remained
almost stationary. The child sisters or
cousins of the baby are its attendants,
while the mother is occupied with other
duties, and perform their work with the
instinct of little mothers. The child is
kept in its cradle usually only during a
journey or while \mns carried alxmt,
and not, as is commonly supposed, dur-
ing most of the time. At home it rolls
alx)ut upon the grass or on the bed
without restraint. Formerly, except in
extreme weather, no clothing was worn
during waking hours up to the age of
from 5 to 10 years, according to the
tribe and climate, and in some tribes this
practice still prevails. The child may be
named soon after birth, or not for a year
or more after, this child name, like the
first teeth, being discarded as the boy or
girl grows up for another of more impor-
tant significance ( see Names and Namiiig).
The child name is often bestowed by the
grandparent. Among the Hopi the in-
fant, when 20 days old, is given a name
and is dedicated •to the sun with much
266
CHILD LIFE
[B. A. E.
ceremony. With some tribes, as the
Omaha, the hair is cut in a pattern to
indicate the gens or band of the parent,
and in some, as the Kiowa, to indicate
the particular protecting medicine of the
father.
Twins are usually regarded as uncanny,
and are rather feared, as possessing oc-
cult power. With some Oregon and
other coast tribes they were formerly re-
fdLTded as abnormal and one or both were
illed. There are well-authenticated in-
stances of deformed children being put
to death at birth. On the other hand
children crippled by accident are treated
by parents and companions with the
greatest tenderness.
Among the Plains tribes the ceremo-
nial boring of the ears for the insertion
of pendants is often made the occasion of
a more or less public celebration, while
the investment of the boy with the
breechcloth at the a^e of 9 or 10 years is
observed with a quiet family rejoicing.
The first tattooing and the first insertion
of the labret are also celebrated among
the tribes practising such customs. In
many or most tril^ the boys passed
through an initiation ordeal at an early
age, sometimes, as with the Zuili, as youn^
as 5 years (see Ordeals). With the Hopi
and Zuilithe child is lightly whipped with
yucca switches when initiated mto the
Kachina priesthood. AVith the Powhatan
of Virginia,if we can believe theold chron-
iclers, the boys, who may have been about
10 years of age at the time, were actually
rendered unconscious, the declared pur-
pose being to take away the memory of
childish things so that they should wake
up as men (see Huskanaw). On the
plains the boys at about the same age were
formally enrolled into the first degree of
the warrior society and put under regular
instruction for their later responsibilities.
Children of both sexes have toys and
games, the girls inclining to dolls and
** playing house," while the boys turn to
bows, riding, and marksmanship. Tops,
skates of rib-bones, darts, hummers, balls,
shinny, and hunt-the-button games are
all favorites, and wherever it is possible
nearly half the time in warm weather is
spent in the water. They are very fond
of pets, particularly puppies, which the
little girls frequently dress and carry
upon their backs like babies, in imita-
tion of their mothers. Among the Zuili
and Hopi wooden figurines of the princi-
pal mytnologic characters are distributed
as dolls to the children at ceremonial per-
formances, thus impressing the sacred
traditions in tangible form (see Amuse-
mentSf Dolhj Games).
Girls are their mothers' companions
and are initiated at an early period into
all the arts of home life?— sewing, cooking,
weaving, and whatever else may pertain
to their later duties. The boys'as natur-
ally pattern from their fathers in hunting,
riding, or boating. Boys and girls alike
are carefully instructed by their elders,
not only in household arts and hunting
methods, but also in the code of ethics,
the traditions, and the religious ideas
pertaining to the tribe. The special cere-
monial observances are in the keeping of
the various societies. The prevalent idea
that the Indian child grows up without
instruction is entirely wrong, although it
may be said that he grows up practically
without restraint, as instruction and
obedience are enforced by moral suasion
alone, physical punishment very rarely
going beyond a mere slap in a moment of
anger. As aggressiveness and the idea of
individual ownership are less strong with
the Indian than with his white brother,
so quarrels are less frequent among the
children, and fighting is almost unknown.
Everything is shared alike in the circle of
playmates. The Indian child has to learn
his language as other children learn theirs,
lisping his words and confusing the gram-
matic distinctions at first; but with the
precocity incident to a wild, free life, he
usually acquires correct expression at an
earlier age than the average white child.
At about 15 years of age in the old days,
throughout the eastern and central re-
gion, the boy made solitary fast and vigil
to obtain communication with the medi-
cine spirit which was to be his protector
through life; then, after the initiatory
ordeal to which, in some tribes, he was
subjected, the youth was competent to
take his place as a man among the war-
riors. For a vear or more before his ad-
mission to full manhood responsibilities
the young man cultivated a uegree of re-
serve amounting even to bashiulness in
the presence of strangers. At about the
same time, or perhaps a year or two ear-
lier, his sister's friends gathered to cele-
brate her puberty dance, and thenceforth
child life for both was at an end.
Consult Chamberlain, Child and Child-
hood in Folk Thought, 1896; Dorsey in
3d Rep. B. A. E., 1884; Eastman, Indian
Boyhood (autobiographic), 1902; Fewkes
(1) in Am. Anthrop., iv, 1902, (2) in 2l8t
Rep. B. A. E., 1903; Fletcher in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, 1888; Gatschet, Creek Migr.
Leg., I, 1884; Ia Flesche, The Middle
Five, 1901 (autobiographic); Mason in
Rep. Nat. Mus., 1887; Owens, Natal Cere-
monies of the Hopi, 1892; Powers in Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., iii, 1877; Spencer, Educa-
tion of the Pueblo Child, 1899; Stevenson
in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 1887; and especially
Jenks, Childhood of Jishib, the Ojibwa,
1900, a sympathetic sketch of the career
of an Indian boy from birth to manhood.
(J. M.)
BULL. 30]
CHI LHO WEE — OHILLIOOTHE
267
Chilliowee ( 2>ii7l//T we'l, abbr. T^uhW-
wef or TsCila^wif possibly connecte<l with
tetf /A * kingfisher' ). A former important
Cherokee settlement on Tellico r., a
branch of Tennessee r., in Monroe co.,
Tenn., near the North Carolina boundary.
(j. M.)'
Chelowe.— Bartram.Travels, 371. 1792. Chilhowee.—
Royce in 6th Rep. B. A. E. , map, 1887. Chilhowey. —
Timberlake. Memoirs, 76, 1760. Ohillhoway.— Ton-
sils of 1765 cited by Royce, op. eit., 144.
ChUiU (Chi'li'W), A former Tigua
pueblo on the w. side of the Arroyo deChi-
lili, about 80 m. s. e. of Albuquerque, X.
Mex. It is inadvertently mentioned as a
** captain'* of a pueblo by Oilate in 1598,
and 18 next referred to in 1630 as a mis-
sion with a church dedicated to Nnestra
Sefiora de Navidad. In this church were
interred the remains of Fray Alonzo
Peinado, who went to New Mexico about
1608, and to whom was attributed the
conversion of the inhabitants and the
erection of the chapel. The village wa.«
abandoned, according to Bandelier, be-
tween 1669 and 1676 on account of the
persistent hostility of the Apache, the
inhabitants retiring mostly to the Tigua
villages on the Rio Grande, but some
join^ the Mansos at El Paso. According
to Vetancurt the pueblo contained 500
Piros in 1680, and Benavides referred to
it as a Tompiros pueblo 50 years earlier;
but Bandelier believes these statements to
be in error, since the northern pueblos
of the Salinas belonged to the Tigua.
See the latter authority in Arch. Inst.
Rep., V, 34, 1884; Arch. Inst. Papers, in,
128-131, 1890; iv, 255-257, 1892.
(f. w. h.)
Aeoloou.— Ofiate (1598) in Doc. In(^d.. xvi, 118, 1871
(believed by Bandelier, Arch. Inst. Piipers, iv,
113,1892, to be probablyChilili). OhiohiUi.— Soiiier
in Am. Rev., ii, 622, 1848. Chichiti.— Loew in Rep.
Wheeler Surv.,app. LL. 175, 1875. Chili.— Galle-
ga8(1844)in Emory, Reconnoissance, 478, 1848. Chi-
mi.— Bandelier, Gilded Man, 2r>4, 1893 (misprint).
Ohilili.— Benavides, Memorial, 21, 1630. Chilili'.—
Pac. R. R. Rep., HI, pt. 3. map 10, 1856. Chilily.-
Jeflerys, .\m. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Ohillili.— Sqnic
in Am. Rev., n, 522, 1848. Ohititi.— Gallatin in
Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc, li, xciv, 1848. Navidad
de KuMtra Senora.— Vetancurt (1693), Teatro
Mex., Ill, 324, repr. 1871. Old Chilili.— Abert in
Emory, Reeonnoissance, 483, 1848.
Chilili. A former tribe or village of the
, Utina confederacy in n. Florida. On the
De Bry map it is located e. of St Johns r.
GhiliU.— Laudonni^re (1565), Hist. Not. de la Flor-
ide, 90, 1853. Ohililo.— Barcia, Ensayo, 48. 1723
(cacique's name). Ohilily.— Laudonni^re (1565)
quoted by Shipp, De Soto and Fla., 5*25, 1881.
Chilkat (said to be from tdil-xai^ * store-
houses for salmon'). A Tlingit tribe
about the head of Lynn canal, Alaska;
noted for the manufacture of the famous
blankets to which they have given their
name (see^rfomm^n/, Blankets); pop. 988
in 1880, and 812 in 1890. Winter towns:
Chilkoot, Katkwaahltu, Klukwan, Yen-
destake. Smaller towns: Deshu, Dyea,
Skagway. Social divisions: Daktlawedi,
Ganahadi, Hlukahadi, Kagwantan, Nus-
hekaayi, Takej^tina.
Oheelcat.— Anderson auoted by Gibbs in Hist.
Mag., VII, 75, 1862. Ohcclhaat*.— Scouler in Jt)ur.
Ethnol. Soe. Lend., i,242, 1848. CheelkaaU.— Ibid.,
232. Chelkattkie.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 227,
1875. Chilcahi.— Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 314, 1868.
Chilcaks.— Ibid.. 309. ChUcales.— Halleck in Rep.
Sec. War, pt. 1. 38, 1868. Ohilcat.— Kane, Wand, in
N.A.,app.,1859. Chilcates.— Hal leek in Ind Aff.
Rep. 1869, 562, 1870. Ohilkaht-Kwan.— Dall in Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., i, 37, 1877. OhilkahU.— Halleck in
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 562, 1870. Chilkaste.— Dunn,
Hist. Oreg. , 288, 1844. Ohilkat-qwan. —Emmons in
Mem.Am.Mus.Nat.Hi8t.,iir,232.1903. Ohilkate.—
Halleck in Rep. Sec. War, pt. 1, 38, 1868. Ohilkat-
nkoe.— Veniaminoff, Zapiski, ii, pt. 3, 30. laiO.
Ohilkhat.— I'etroff in lOth Cen.sus, Ala.ska,31, 18W.
Ohitl-kawt.— Jackson, Ala.ska, 242, 1880 (native
pronunciation of name of Chilcat r. ). Tohiloat.—
Beardslee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 105, 46th Cong., 2d ses.s.,
31, 1880. Tschilkat— Wransrell, EthncH. Nachr..
102, 1839. T8chnkat-k6n.— Kranse, Tlinkit Ind..
116, 1885. Tschisohlkhathkhoan.— Kingsley, Stand.
Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 132, 1883. Tschishlkhath.— Holm-
berg, Ethnol. Skizz., map. 142. 18,55. TscMihl-
khathkhoan.— Ibid., 11-12.
Chilkat. According to Petroff (Comp.
10th Census, pt. 2, 1427, 1883) a Tlingit
town, or aggregation of towns, on Comj)-
troller bay, e. of the mouth of Cop|)er
r., Alaska'. It belonged to the Yakutat
and had 170 inhabitants in 1880. Prob-
ably it was only a summer village.
(Hiilkoot. A Tlingit town on the x. k.
arm ' of I^vnn canal, Alaska. Pop. at
Chilkoot mi.^sion in 18iK), 106. These
people are often reganleil as a separate
division of Koluschan, but are practically
the same as the Chilkat.
Chilcoot.— IVtroff in 10th (\'nsus, Alaska, 31, 1884.
Chilkoot.— nth Census, Alaska, 3. 1893. Tschil-
kut.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 100, 1885.
CliillescaB. An Indian province, e. of
Quivira, which the abl)ess Marfa de Jesus,
of Agreda, Spain, claimed to have mirac-
ulously visited in the 17th century. —
Benavides (K),*^) in Palou, Relacion
Hist., 386, 1787.
Chillicolhe (from C/it-la-kn^-fha). One
of the four tribal divisions of theShawnee.
The division is still recognized in thetrilje,
but the meaning of the word is lost. The
Chillicothe always occupied a village of
the same name, and this village was re-
garded as the chief town of the tribe.
As the Shawnee retreated w. before the
whites, several villages of this name were
successively occupied and abandoned.
The old Lo'wertown, or Ix>wer Shawnee
Town, at the mouth of the Scioto, in
Ohio, was probably called Chillicothe.
Besides this, there were three other vil-
lages of that name in Ohio, viz:
(1) On Paint cr., on the site of Old-
town, near Chillicothe, in Ross co. This
village may have been occupied by the
Shawnee after removing from Lower-
town. It was there as early as 1774, and
was <lestroyed by the Kentuckians in
1787.
(2) On the Little Miami, about the site
of Oldtown, in Greene co. The Shawnee
268 CHILLIWACK CHILOCCO INDIAN INDUSTRIAL SCHOOL tB.A.B.
are said to have removed from Lower-
town to this village, but it seems more
probable that they went to the village on
Paint cr. This village near Oldtown •
was frequently called Old Chillicothe, and
Boone was a prisoner there in 1778. It
was destroyed by Clark in 1780. "
(3) On the (Great) Miami, at the pres-
ent Piqua, in Miami co. ; destroyed by
Clark in 1782. (j. m.)
Chellicothee.— Perrin du Lac, Voy. des Deux
Louisiancs, 146, 1805. Chilaooffee.— Brodhead
(1779) in Penn. Archives, xil, 179. 1856. Chi-lah-
cah-tha.— W. H. Shawnee in Gulf States Hist.
Mag., 1, 415, 1903 (name of division). Ohilicothe.—
Harmar (1790) inKauflfman, West Penn., app., 226,
1851. Chilikoffi.— Brodhead, op. clt., 181. Chilla-
oothe.— Harmar, op. cit., app., 227. Chilliooffl. —
Brodhead, op. cit., 258. ChilUoothe.— Clark (1782)
in Butterfield, Washington-Irvine Cor., 401, 1882.
Chilooathe.— Lang and Taylor, Rep., 22, 1843.
Paint Creek town.— Flint, Ind. Wars, 69. 1833 (in
Ro8s CO. , on Pai nt cr. ) . Shillioofly. — Brodhead, op .
clt., 258. TMaaxgaugi.—Gatschet, Shawnee MS.,
B. A. E., 1879 (correct plural form).
Chilliwack. A Salish tribe on a river of
-iire"8&me name in British Columbia, now-
speaking the Cowichan dialect, though
anciently Nooksak according to Boas.
Pop. 313 in 1902. Their villages, mainly
on the authority of Hill-Tout, are Atse-
lits, Chiaktei, Kokaia, Shlalki, Skaialo,
Skaukel, Skway, Skwealets, Stlep, Thal-
telich, Tsoowahlie, and Yukweakwioose.
The Can. Ind. Aff. Reports give Koqua-
pilt and Skwah (distinct from Skway),
and Boas gives Keles, which are not iden-
tifiable with any of the above.
Ghillwayhook.— Mavne, Brit. Col., 295, 1861. Ohi-
loweyuk.— Gibbs, MS. vocab. 281, B. A. E. Chi-
lukweyuk. — Wilson in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i,
278, 1866. SquahaUtoh.— Ibid. Tc'ileQue^uk-.—
Boas in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., LXiv, 454, 1894. Tcil*-
Qe'uk.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can., 3.
1902. Tshithwyook.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs.
Brit. Col., 120b, 1884.
Chillnckitteqnaw ( ChM^kikwa ) . A Chi-
nookan tribe formerly living on the n. side
of Columbia r. in Klickitat and Skamania
COS., Wash., from about 10 m. below the
Dalles to the neighborhood of the Cas-
cades. In 1806 Lewis and Clark estimated
their number at 2,4(X). According to
Mooney a remnant of the tribe lived near
the mouth of White Salmon r. until 1880,
when they removed to the Cascades,
where a few still resided in 1895. The
' Sma^ikshop were a subtribe. ( l. f. )
Ohee-luok-kit-le-quaw. — Orig. Jour. Lewis and
Clark. IV, 262, 1905. Ohe-luc-it-te-quaw.— Ibid., ni,
164. Che-luck-kit-ti-quar.— Ibid., IV, 288. Chillo-
kittequawR.— Wilkes, Hist. Greg., 44, 1845. Ohillo
Kittequaws. —Robertson, Oreg. , 129, 1846. Chilluo-
kittequaw.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., n, 45, 1814.
Ohillttokkitequaws.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark,
op. cit., IV, 285. GhiUuokkittaquaws.— Ibid., 296.
Cnll-luok-kit-tequaw.— Lewis and Clark, £xp)ed.,
I, map, 1817. Ohillukittequas.— Am. Pioneer, I,
408, 1842. Clullukittequaw.— Drake. Bk. Inds., vli,
1845. Chilluk-kit-e-quaw.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R.
Rep., I, 417, 1855. Ohil-luk-kit-te-qnaw.— Lewis
ana Clark, Exped.. i, map, 1814. Ohilfi'ktkwa.—
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 741, 1896.
Chillychandize. Mentioned as a small
Kalapooian tribe on Willamette r., Oreg.
Otherwise not identifiable. — Ross, Ad
ventures, 236, 1847.
Cliilocoo Indian Industrial School. A
Government school for Indian children,
conducted under the direction of the
Commissioner of Indian Affairs; situated
on a reserve of 13 sections of land (8,320
acres) along the Kansas boundary in
Kay CO., Okla., set aside by executive
order of July 12, 1884. The school was
opened Jan. 15, 1884, with 186 {)upil8.
At that time only Indians living in In-
dian Ter. were permitted to enter; but
through subsequent action by Congress
all Indian children save those belonging
to the Five Civilized Tribes are now ad-
mitted, although pupils are recruited
chiefly from contiguous states and terri-
tories! The equipment of the school has
increased from a single large building in
1884 to 35 buildings, principally of stcne,
with modem improvements for the health
and convenience of the children and em-
ployees. The pupils now (1905) number
more than 700. The corps consists of a
superintendent, 51 principal employees,
and 20 minor Indian assistants. The
primary object of the Government in
establishing the Chilocco school on such
a large tract was to enable the allotment
of small farms to Indian youth who had
acquired knowledge of the theory of
agriculture at the school, thus enabling
them to learn farming in a practical and
intelligent manner and to return to their
homes and kindred well equipped for the
struggle for a livelihood. In pursuance
of this plan every department of the
Chilocco school is now organized with
the view of making it preeminently an
institution for agriculture and the attend-
ant industries, with the result that it has
become the best-equipped institution in
the Indian service for agricultural in-
struction. In 1904 800 acres of wheat
and oats were harvested and threshed
by the school force; there were also 60
acres in potatoes, 50 acres in garden
truck, 350 acres in corn, 100 acres in cane,
80 acres in Kaflir corn, and 200 acres in
meadow. In addition there have been
planted 5,000 forest trees, more than
3,500 fruit trees, 4,000 grapevines, 6,000
strawberry plants, and a proportionately
large number of other small fruits and
vegetables. In addition to produce al-
most sufficient to supply the needs of the
school, the nursery is largely drawn on
to establish gardens and orchards at
other Indian schools, and a surplus of
hay, grain, garden and other seeas, and
cattle, hogs, and poultry is annually sold
for the school's benefit. Particular at-
tention is paid to instruction of boys in
the trades, especially those useful to the
farmer, and include blacksmithing, horse-
BULL. 30]
CHILOHOCKI CHIMALAKWE
269
shoeing, wagon making, shoe and har-
ness making, carpentry, painting and
paper hanging, tailoring, broom making,
stonecutting, stone and brick laying, en-
gineering, plumbing and steam fitting,
and printing; while special instruction
in sewing, badi^ing, cooking, housekeep-
ing, dairying, and along kindred lines is
given the girls, who number about half
the pupils enrolled. In addition to the
industrial education every pupil is given
a grammar-school training; religious in-
struction of a non-sectarian character also
forms part of the school work, and the
pupils are encouraged to form associa-
tions promotive of mutual strength and
character. A printing office is in opera-
tion, the product, including a perioaical,
The Indian School.Joumal, l^ing the work
of Indian boys. ( j. ii. d. )
Cliilbhocki. A village on Miami r., Ohio,
in 1779 (Brodhead in Penn. Archives, xii,
177, 1856). Probably a Delaware village;
the name seems to be connected with
Chikohoki, q. v. (j. m. )
Chiltneyadnaye ( * walnut* ). An Apache
clan or band at San Carlos agency and Ft
Apache, Ariz., in 1881; coordinate with
the Chisnedinadinaye of the Pinal Coyo-
teros. — Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 112, 1890.
Ghilnla (Tm-lu^-la, from Tsulay the
Yurok name for the Bald hills. A small
Athapascan division which occupied the
lower (n. w.) portion of the valley of
Redwood cr., n. Cal., and Bald hills,
dividing it from Klamath valley. They
were shut off from the immediate coast
by the Yurok, who inhabited villages at
the mouth of Redwood cr. The name of
the Chilula for themselves is not known;
it is probable that like most of the Indians
of the region they had none, other than
the word for "people.** Above them
on Redwood cr. was the related Atha-
pascan group known as Whilkut, or
Aoilkut. The Yurok names of some of
their villages are Cherkhu, Ona, Opa,
Otshpeth. and Roktsho. (a. l. k.)
Bald ^aiL— Glbbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, m, 139, 1863. Bald HiU Indians.— Me Kee
(1861) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess.,
160, 1863. Ohalnla.— Parker. Jour., 262, 1842.
Ohil-M-la.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 87,
1877. Ohillulaha.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, map,
' X)l-
822, 1882. Toho-lo-lah.— Gibbs 0851) in School-
craft, Ind. bribes, HI. 139, 1853 CBald hill people':
Yupok name) . Tes'>wan. —Powers in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., in, 87, 1877 (Hupa name) .
OhimaL A Squawmish village com-
munity on the left bank of Squawmisht
r., Brit. Col.
Tdmai'.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474. 1900.
• Chimakuan Family. A linguistic family
of the N. W. coast, now represented by one
small tribe, the Quileute (q. v.), on the
coastof Washington. There was formerly
an eastern division of the family, the Chi-
makum, occupying the territory between
Hood's canal and Port Townsend, which
is now probably extinct. The situation
of these two tribes, as well as certain
traditions, indicate that in former times
the family may have been more powerful
and occupied the entire region to the
a. of the strait of Juan de Fuca from which
they were driven out by the Clallam and
Makah. This, however, is uncertain.
Within historic times the stoc^k has con-
sisted solely of the two small branches
mentioned above. They have borne a
high reputation among their Indian neigh-
bors for warlike qualities, but for the
greater part have always been on friendly
terms with the whites. In customs the
Quileute, or eastern Chimakuan, resem-
bled the Makah and Nootka; all were
whalers. The Chimakum, on the other
hand, resembled the Clallam in customs.
The Chimakuan dialects have not been
thoroughly studied, but the material col-
lected shows the language to be quite in-
dependent, though with certain phonetic
and morphologic relations to the Salish
and Wakashan. ( l. f. )
=Cheinakum.— Eells in Am. Antiq., 52, Oct., 1880
(considers language different from any of its
neighbors). = Chimakuan. —Powell in 7th Rep.
B. A. E., 62. 1891. =Ohimakum.— Gibbs in Pac. R.
R. Rep.. 1, 431, 1855 (family doubtful). <Nootka.--
Bancroft, Native Races, in, 664, 1882 (contains
Chimakum). <Puget Sound Oroup. — Keanc in
Stanford, Compend., Cent, and So. Am., 474, 187S
(Chinakum included in this group).
Chimakam. A Chimakuan tribe, now — -^
probably extinct, formerly occupying the
peninsula between Hood's canal and Port
Townsend, Wash. Little is known of
their history except that they were at
constant war with the Clallam and other
Salish neighbors, and by reason of their
inferiority in numbers suffered extremely
at their hands. In 1855, according to
Gibbs, they were reduced to 90 indi-
viduals. The Chimakum were included
in the Point no Point treaty of 1855 and
placed upon the Skokomish res., since
which time they have gradually dimin-
ished in numbers. In 1890 Boas was able ^ . ^ -j
to learn of only three individuals who "
spoke the language, and even those but
imperfectly. He obtained a small vocab-
ulary and a few grammatical notes, pub-
lished in part in Am. Anthrop., v, 37-44,
1892. (l. f.)
i-hwa-ki-ln.— Eells in Smithson. Rep. 1887, 606, 1889
(native name). AqoipUo. — Boas in Am. Anthrop.,
v, 37, 1892 (native name ) . Ohema-keem. —Ross in
Ind. Aff. Rep., 135, 1870. Ohemakeum.— Eells in
Am. Antiq.. ix, 100, 1887. Ohemakum.— Swan, N.
W. Coast, 344, 1857. Chemionm.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, June 12, 1863. Ghim-a-kim.— Jones in
H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 6, 1857.
Ohima-kum.— Gibbs in Pac.R.R. Rep., i, 431, 1855.
Ohimieum.— Simmons in Ind. At!. Rep. 1859, 398,
1860. Ghin-a-kum.— Starling, ibid., 170, 1852.
Ohine-a-kumi. —Ibid .', 1 72. Ohninakuxns. —Morrow,
ibid., 179, 1861. Clamakum.— Simmons, ibid., 1857,
333, 1858. Port Townsend.- Wilkes in Stevens'
Rep. N. P. R. R., 463, 1864. Tsemakum.— Gibbs in
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 1. 177, 1877.
Chimalakwe. Mentioned by Powers as
an extinct tribe that once lived on New r.,
270^
CHIMALTITLAN CHIMMESYAN FAMILY
[B. A. B.
Wi
N. Cal., and included in his map, as by
Powell (7th Rep. B. A. E., 63, 1891), with
the Chimariko. The name Chimalakwe
is undoubtedly only a variant of Chi-
mariko, often pronounced Chimaliko.
The Chimariko, however, did not occupy
upper New r., which region, together
with the adjacent territory about the
headwaters of Salmon r., was held by a
j?roup of people belonginjj to the Shastan
familv, though markedly divergent from
the Shasta proper in dialect. This Shas-
tan group, the proper name of which is
unknown, has been described by Dixon
(Am. Anthrop., vii, 213, 1905) under the
name of New River Shasta. In 1902 two
aged women appeared to ha the only
survivors of this people. (a. l. k.)
Chi-mal'-a-kwe.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
Ill, 91, 1877, ChimaUqiutyB.— Powers in Overland
Mo., IX, 156, 1872. Chiiiudqiutys.~Powers quoted
by Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 446, 1882. Kew Eiver.—
Dixon in Am. Anthrop., vii, 216, 1905.
Chimaltitian (Nahuatl: * where prayer-
sticks are placed ' ) . A former settlement
of the Tepecanoor of a related tribe, about
8 m. 8. of Bolanos, in the valley of the Rio
de Bolaflos, Jalisco, Mexico. — Hrdlicka,
inf n, 1905.
Chimarikan Family. Established as a
linguistic family on the language of the
Chimariko, which was found to be distinct
from that of any known tribe. All that is
known in relation to the family, which is
now nearly extinct, will be found under
the tribal* name Chimariko.
=Chimarikan.--Powellin7th Rep. B. A. E., 63.1891.
=Cliim-a-ri'-ko.— Powell in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
Ill, 474, 1877; Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 255,
Apr., 1882 (stated to be a distinct family).
Chimariko (from Ljimalikoj the name
tliey apply to themselves; derived from
djimar 'man'). A small tribe, com-
prising the Chimarikan family, formerly
on Trinity r., near the mouth of New r.,
N. Cal., extending from Hawkins Bar
to about Big Bar, and probably along
lower New r. ; they adjoined the Hupa
downstream and the Wintun upstream.
The Chimariko first Ijccame known to the
whites on the influx of miners about 1850.
. They were then a small tribe, friendly
""^ with the Hupa and the neighboring Shas-
tan tribes, but at war with the Wintun of
Hay fork of Trinity r. In 1903 they num-
bered only 9 individuals, including mixed
bloods, who lived scattered from Hupa up
Trinity r., and on New r., among Indians
of other tribes, and among the whites
(Goddard, MS., Univ. Cal.). In general
culture the Chimariko were much like
their neighbors to the n. w., the Hupa,
though they are said to have lacked
canoes, and did not practise the deerskin
dance of the Hupa and Yurok. They ap-
pear to have lived largely on salmon and
eels caught in Trinity r., and on vegetal
foods, especially acorns. Like the other
trib^ of N. w. Califomia, they had no po-
litical organization or divisions other than
villages, one of which was at or near Haw-
kins Bar, others at Burnt Ranch, Taylor's
Flat, and Big Bar, and probably at other
places, though their names for these set-
tlements are not known with certainty.
See Chimalakwe. - (a. l. k.)
Djimaliko.— A. L. Kroeber, infn, 1903 (own
name). Kwoshonipu.— Kroeber, infn, 1903 (name
Srobably given them by the Shasta of Salmon r.).
Ce-em-ma.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4. 32d
Cong., spec, sess., 194. 1853. Keyemma.— Gibbsin
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, Iii, 139, 1853. Xi-em-
ma.— Meyer in Nach dem Sacramento, 282, 1855.
Chimbnilia. A former settlement of the
Molala on the headwaters of San tiara r.,
in the Cascade mts., Oreg. (a. s. g.)
Ghimiak. A Kuskwogmiut village on
Kuskokwim r., Alaska; pop. 71 in 1880,
40 in 1890.
Ohim-e-kliag-a-mut.— Spurr and Poet quoted by
Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. GhimeUiak.—
Baker, ibid. Ohiaiagamute.— Petroff, 10th Census,
Alaska, 17, 1884. OhiBuagyaiigamiut.— 11th Cen-
sus, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Chimmesyaii Family (from Tsimshian,
* people of Skeena r. * ) . A small linguistic
family on Nass and Skeena rs., n. Brit.
Col., and the neighboring coast as far s.
as Milbank sd. The 3 main divisions
are the Tsimshianof lower Skeena r., the
Kitksan of upper Skeena r. , and the Niska
of Nass r. The closest cultural affinities
of these people are with the Haida of
Queen Charlotte ids. and the Tlingit of
the Alaskan coast, though their language
is strikingly different and must be placed
in a class by itself among the tongues of
the N. W. According to their own tra-
ditions and those of neighboring tribes
they have descended Nass and Skeena
i*s. in comparatively recent times to the
coaft, displacing the Tlingit.
In physical characters and social organ-
ization the Chimmesyan resemble the
Haida and Tlingit, but the Kitksan, living
farther inland, seem to have mixed with
the Athapascan tribes, and more nearly
approach their type. The Chimmesyan
language is characterized by a very exten-
sive use of adverbial prefixes principally
signifying local relations, by an extreme
use of reduplication, a great abundance of
plural forms, and numerous temporal
and modal particles (Boas) . Like other
coast tribes they obtain the largest part
of their food from the sea and the rivers.
The annual runs of salmon on the Skeena
and of eulachon into the Nass* furnish
them with an abundance of provisions at
certain seasons. Eulachon are a great
source of revenue to the Niska, the oil
being in great demand all along the coast,
and indispensable for the great winter pot-
latches. Bear, mountain goats, and other
wild animals are hunted, particularly by
the interior tribes. The horns of moun-
tain goats are carved into handles for
spoons used at feasts and potlatches, and
are sold to other tribes for the same pur-
BULL. 30]
CHIMNAPUM CHINATU
271
pose. Although good carvers and canoe
Duildere, the Chimmesyan are surpassed
by the Haida, from whom they still pur-
chase canoes. Their houses were often
huge structures made of immense cedar
beams and planks, and accommodating
from 20 to 30 people. Each was presided
over by a house chief, while every family
and every town had a superior chief; under
him were the members of his household,
his more distant clan relations, and the
servants and slaves.
There were four clans or i)hratries:
Kanhada or Raven, Lakvebo ('On the
Wolf ' ), Lakskiyek ( 'On the P:agle' ), and
Gyispawaduweda or Grizzly Bear. Each
clan comprised a great numl>er of sub-
divisions, concerning which the informa-
tion is conflicting, some regarding them
simply as names for the i)eople of certain
towns, while others treat them as family
groups, not necessarily confined to one
place. If their organization was anything
like that of the Haida, the subdivisions
were at one time local groups; but it is
probable that many of Uiem have been
displaced from their ancient seats or have
settled in more than one place. This
view is corroborated by the account of
the Niska tribes given by Boas ( 10th Kep.
N. \V. Tribes Can. , 48, 49 ) . Their names,
as far as obtainable, will be found under
the separate divisional headings. De-
scent 18 reckoned in the female line.
While the present culture of the Chim-
mesyan tribes is similar to that of the
neighboring coast peoples, there is some
eviaence of their recent assimilation. In
most of the Tsimshian myths they ap-
pear primarily as an inland tribe that
lived by hunting, and their ancestral
home is described as on a prairie at the
headwaters of Skeena r. This suggests
an inland origin of the tribe, and the
historical value of the traditional evidence
is increased by the peculiar divergence
of their mythological tales from those of
neighboring tribes; the most characti^r-
istic tales of the Tsimshian being more
like the animal tales of the w. plateaus
and of the plains than like the tales of
the N. coast tribes in which the human
element plays an important part. The
Chimmesyan tribes have also adopted cus-
toms of their s. neighbors on the coast,
more particularly the winter ceremonial
with its cannibal ceremonies, which they
obtained from the Bellabella. In 1902
there were reported 3,389 Chimmesyan
in British Columbia; and with the 952
enumerated as forming Mr Duncan's col-
ony in Alaska in 1890, the total is about
4,341. (j. R. s.)
zsOhemmetyan.— Scouler (1846) in Jour. Ethnol.
Soc. Lond., 1, 233, 1848. =Chiminesyan.— Schouler
in Jour.Geosr.8oc.Lond., 1,219.1841. =0him«7a]ii.—
Schoiblcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 487, 1855. -^ChTiniey-
aiis.— Kane, Wand, in N. A.,app.,1859. xEaidah.—
Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog Soc. Lond., XI, 220,
1841, >Hydah8.— Keane in Stanford, Compend.,
473, 1878 (includes other tribes) . >Naas.— Gallatin
in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc, n, pt. 1, c, 1848 (in-
cludes other tribes). >Naa«s.— lDid.,77. >Kau. —
Bancroft, Nat. Races, in, 564, 1882 (includes other
tribes). =Na8«e.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i,
36, 1877. X Northern. —Scouler in Jour. Roy. GeoR.
Soc., xr. 220, 1841 (includes many other tribes).
=T8hi]naian.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. B. C,
114b, 1884. =Tiimpii-an'.— Dall in Proc. A. A. A.
S., 379, 1885.
Chimnapam. A small Shahaptian tribe
located by Lewis and Clark in 1805 on the
N. w. side of Columbia r. near the mouth
of the Snftkc, and on lower Yakima r.,
Wash. They speak a dialect closely
allied to the Paloos. By Lewis and Clark
their population was estimated at 1.860, in
42 lodges. A remnant of the tribe is still
living on the w. side of Columbia r., op-
posite Pasco, Wash. (l. f. )
Chamna'pum.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.. 739,
1896. Ohim-nah-pan. — Stevens in Ind. AfT. Rep.,
252, 1854. Chiin-nah-pum.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and
Clark, VI. 115, 1905. Ghim-nah-pun.— Lewis and
Clark, Exped.. i, map, 1814. Chimnapoos. — Ibid.,
II 257, 1814. Chimnapom.— Ibid., ii, 12. Chim-
na-pum. — Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, in,
123, 1905. Chimnapuns.— Wilkes, Hist. Oregon,
44, 1845. Chinnahpum.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Trib>es,
III, 570, 1853. Chiii-na-pum.~Orig. Jour., op. cit..
Ill, 184, 1905. Chunnapun*.— Nicolay. Oregon, 143,
1846. Chym-nah'-pos.— Lewis and Clark, Exped.,
Coues ea., 973, note, 1893. Chymnapoms.— Orig.
Jour., op. cit.. IV, 339. 1905. Chymnapumt.— Ibid.,
73. Ouimnapuni.— Lewis and Clark, £xped., ii, 17,
1814.
Chimuksaich. A Siuslaw village on
Siuslaw r., Greg.
Tclm'-miik-saitc'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 230, 1890.
China Hat (seemingly a corruption of
Xd^exaeSy their own name). A Kwakiutl
tribe speaking the Heiltsuk dialect and
residing on Tolmie channel and Mussel
inlet, Brit. Col.; pop. 114 in 1901, 77 in
1904.
Haihaish.— Tolmie and Dawson. Votmbr*. B. C.,
117b, 1884. Oe'qaes.— Boas, 6th Rep. N. W.Triljes
Can., 52, 1890. Xa'exaes.— Botis in Rep. Nat. Mus.
1895, 328 (own name).
Chinakbi. A former Choctaw town on
the site of the present (iarlandsville, Jas-
per CO., Miss. It was one of the villages
constituting the so-called Sixtowns, and
gave its name to a small district along
the X. side of Sooenlovie cr., partly in
Newton co. and partly in Jasper co. —
Halbert in Publ. Ala. Hist. Soc, Misc.
Coll., I, 381-882, 1901.
Chinokabi.— Gatschct, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 109,
1884.
Chinapa. An Opata pueblo, and the
seat of a Spanish mission founded in
1648, on the Rio Sonora, lat. 30° 30^
Sonora, Mexico; pop. 393 in 1678, and
204 in 1730. It was burned by the
Apache in 1836.
Clunapa.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue
Welt-Bott, 74, 1726. Chinapi.— Bartlett, Personal
Narr.. i, 279. 1854. San Jose Ohinapa.— Zapata
(1678) In Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., iii, 370, 1857.
Climata ( Chi-na-tu^y^ the hidden back of
a mountain.* — Lumholtz). A pueblo, in-
habited by both Tepehuane and Tara-
272
OHINOAPIN CHINOOK
[B. A. XL
hiimare, in tlie Sierra Madre, w. Chi-
huahua, Mexico.
Chinatu.— On)zeo y Berra, Geog., 322, 1864. Ohi»-
mal.-Ibid.,324.
Chincapin. See Chinquapin.
Ghinclial. A Yamel band that formerly
lived on Dallas or., a w. tributary of Wil-
lamette r., Greg.
Toh'intchia.— Gatschet, Lakmiut MS., B. A. E., 1877.
Ghincomen. See Chinquapin.
Chincotea^ue ( Chingua-tegwCy * large
stream,' 'inlet.* — Hewitt). A village,
probably belonging to the Accohanoc
trii)e of the Powhatan confederacy,
formerly about Chincoteague inlet in Ac-
comack CO., Va. In 1722 the few re-
maining inhabitants had joined a Mary-
land tribe. Cf. Cinquaeteckj Cinquoteck.
Ohin^teaoq.— Herrman, map (1670) in Maps to
Accompany Rept. of Comre. on the Bdy. bet. Va.
and Ma., 1873. Chingo-teagues.— Bozman, Md., i,
102, 1837 (the villagers). Oingo-teque.— Beverly,
Virginia, 199, 1722.
Ching^iginiat. An Eskimo tribe inhab-
iting the region of C. Newenham and
C. Peirce, Alaska. Their women wear
birdskin parkas; the kaiakshaveno hole
through the bow like those of the Kusk-
wogmiut. The villages are Aziavik and
Tzavahak.
Chinmgmut.— Nelson in 18th Rep., B. A. E., map,
1899. Tschiinagmjut.— Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz.,
map, 142, 1855.
Ghiniak. A Kaniagmiut village at the
E. end of Kodiak id., Alaska; pop. 24 in
1880. — Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, map,
1884.
Chinik. A Kaviagmiut village and mis-
sion on Golofnin bay, Alaska; pop. 38
in 1890, 140 in 1900.
Oheenik. -Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Chilli-
miut— nth Census, Alaska, 162, 1893. Chinigmut—
Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. Toss, in Am., pt. i, 73,
1847. Dexter.— Baker, op. cit. Xkaliflrvigmiut.—
Tikhmenief quoted by Baker, op. cit. Ikalig-
wigmiut.— Holmberg, Ethnol. Skizz., map, 1856.
Tcnimmuth. —Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s.,
XXI, map, 1850.
Chinik. A Kaiyuhkhotana village on
the E. bank of Yukon r., at the junction
of Talbiksok.
Tohinik.— Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s.,
XXI, map, 1850.
Chinila. A Knaiakhotana village of 15
persons in 1880, on the e. side of Cook
inlet, Alaska, near the mouth of Kaknu r.
Ohernila.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 29, 1884.
Ohernilof.— Ibid., map. Ohinila.— Ibid., 29.
Chinipa. A term used in different
sen&es by early Spanish authors; by
some, as Ribas, the Chinipa are men-
tioned as a nation distinct from the Var-
ohio, and by others it is applied to a group
of villages. It is also used to designate a
particular village on an upper affluent of
the Rio del Fuerte, in Varohio territory,
lat. 27° 30^, long. 108° 30^, in w. Chihua-
hua, Mexico, and by Hervas as that of a
dialect of the Tarahumare. Curepo was
a Chinipa rancheria in 1601.
Chinipa.— Hervas, Cat., i, 319, 1800. Chinipas.—
Ribas, Hist. Triumphos, 266, 1646. Ban Andres
Ohinipat.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 324, 1864 (the
settlement).
Chinits. A Karok village on the s. bank
of Klamath r., just below Tsofkara, Hum-
boldt CO., Cal.
Chee-nitch.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23,
1860. T'cheh-nite.— Gibbs, MS. Misc., B. A, E.,
1852.
Chinkapin. See Chinquapin.
Cliinklaoamoose (possibly Delaware C/im-
gua-klakamo(tSy * large laughing moose.* —
Hewitt ) . A former vil lage of the I roquois
on the site of Clearfield, Clearfield co.,
Pa., before 1805. It probably took its
name from a chief. The Seneca of Corn-
planter's village also frequented the neigh-
borhood.
Ohingleolamottohe.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. £., '
pi. clx, 1900. ChingleolamoUk.— La Tour, map,
1784. Ohingleolamuk.-— Giissefeld, map, 1784.
Ohinklaoamoose.— Day, Hist. Coll. Pa., 231, 1843.
Chinklacamoose's Oldtown.^Ibid.
Chinko. A former division of the Illi-
nois tribe.
Chinko.— AUouez (1680) in Margry, D4c., ii, 96,
1877. Ohinkoa.— La Salle (1681 ) , ibid., 134.
Chinkopin. See Chinquapin.
Chinlak. A former village of the Tan-
otenne at the confluence of Nechaco and
Stuart rs., Brit. Col., which had a flour-
ishing population that the Tsilkotin
practically annihilated in one night.
Tcinlak.— Morice, Notes on W. D6n68, 25, 1893.
Chinnaby's Fort. In 1813, at the time
of the Creek rebellion, Chinnaby, a Creek
chief friendly to the United States, had a
"kind of fort'' at Ten ids, on Coosa
r., Ala.
Chinnaby't Fort.— Drake, Bk. Inds. IV, 65, 1848.
F« Ohinnabie.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. £., Ala.
map, 1900.
Chinook (from Tsinuk^ their Chehalis
name) . The best-known tribe of the Chi-
nookan family. They claimed the territory
on the N. side of Columbia r., Wash., from
the mouth to Grays bay, a distance of
about 15 m., and n. along the seacoast as
far as the n. part of Shoalwater bay, where
they were met by the Chehalis, a Salish
tribe. The Chinook were first described
by Lewis and Clark, who visited them
in 1805, though they had been known to
traders for at least 12 years previously.
Lewis and Clark estimated their number
at 400, but referred only to those living
on Columbia r. Swan placed their num-
ber at 112 in 1855, at which time thev
were much mixed with the Chehalis, with
whom they have since completely fused,
their language being now extinct. From
their proximity to Astoria and their in-
timate relations with the early traders,
the Chinook soon became well known,
and their language formed the basis for
the widely spread Chinook jargon, which
was first used as a trade languap:e and is
now a medium of communication from
California to Alaska. The portion of the
tribe living around Shoalwater bay was
called Atsmitl. The following divisiona
BULL. 30]
CHINOOK — CHINOOKAN FAMILY
273
and villages have been recorded: Chinook,
Gitlapshoi, Nakoik, Nemah, Nisal, Pa-
lux, Wharhoots. (l. f.)
Ala'dahuah.— Gatscbet, Nestucca MS. vocab., B.
A. £. (Nestucca namej. Oheeaook.— Scouler in
Jour. £tbnol.Soc.Lona.,l,286,1848. Oheenooks.—
Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., i. 224, 1841.
Ohenookt.— Parker, Jour.. 142, 1842. Ohenoux.—
Meek in H.R. Ex. Doc. 76.30th Cong., 1st sess.,
10, 1848. OhenukM.— Hastings, Emigr. Guide to
Oregon, 69. 1845. Chimook.— Emmons in Scbool-
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 224, 1853. Chin-hook.— Gass,
Jour., 238, 1808. Ohia-nookt.— Lewis and Clark,
Exped., Coues ed., 755. 1893. Chinook.— Fitzpat-
rick in Ind. AfF. Rep., app., 245, 1847. Chin ook.—
Gass, Jour., 176, 1807. Ohinoukt.— Smet, Oregon
Miss., 33, 1847. Ohinuot.— Rafinesque, introd.
Marshall, Ky., i, 82, 1824. Chin^Uu.— Latham. Nat.
Hist. Man., 817, 1860. Ohonuket.— Hastings, Emigr.
Guide to Oregon, 69, 1845. Flatheads.— Parker,
Jour., 142, 1842. Kex Perc&.— Ibid. Schinouki.—
Smet, Letters, 220. 1843. Tchinook8.—Smet, Ore-
gon Miss., 72, 1847. Tchinouks.— Duflot de Mofras,
Explor. de I'Oregon, ii, 126, 1844. Tohinoux.—
Smet, Letters, 230, 1843. T^^.— Hale in U. S.
Expl. Exped., VI, 662, 1846. Tehenooks.— Smet,
Letters, 152, 1843. Tetet-PUtes.— Duflot de Mo-
fras, Explor. del'Oregon, n, 108, 1844. Thlila'h.—
Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Clackama name). Tschi-
nuk.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 73,
1856. Tihinuk.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped vi,
214,1846. Tsinuk.— Latham in Trans. PhUol. Soc.
Lond., 67, 1856. T'tinuk.— Gibbs in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol.,1, 241,1877. Tsnluk.— Wickersham in Am.
Antiq., xxi, 374, 1899.
CHINOOK MAN. \Au. MuS. NAT. H.8T. )
Chinook. The principal village of the
Chinook, situated on Baker bay, Pacific
CO. , Wash. , near the mouth of Columbia r.
Chinookan Family. An important lin-
guistic family, including those tribes for-
merly living on Columbia r., from The
Dalles to its mouth (except a small strip
occupied by the Athapascan Tlatskanai),
and on the lower Willamette as far as the
present site of Oregon City, Oree. The
family also extended a snort distance
along the coast on each side of the mouth
of the Columbia, from Shoalwater bay on
Bull. 30—05 18
the N. to Tillamook Head on the s. The
family is named from t)ie Chinook, the
most important tribe. With the excep-
tion of a few traders near the mouth of
the Columbia, Lewis and Clark were the
first whites to visit these tribes, and their
description still constitutes the main au-
thority as to their early condition. The
Chinookan villages were situated along
the banks of the Columbia, near the
mouths of its tributaries, and for the
greater part on the n. side. The houses
were of wood and very lai^, being occu-
pied on the communal pnnciple by 3 or
4 families and often containing 20 or more
individuals. Their villages were thus
fairly permanent, though there was much
moving about in summer, owin^ to the
nature of the food supply, which con-
sisted chiefly of salmon, with the roots
and berries indigenous to the region.
The falls and Ca^ades of the Columbia
and the falls of the Willamette were the
chief points of gathering in the salmon
season. The people were also noted
traders, not only among themselves, but
with the surrounding tribes of other
stocks, and trips from the mouth of the
Columbia to the Cascades for the purpose
of barter were of freouent occurrence.
They were extremely stilful in handling
their canoes, which were well made,
hollowed out of single logs, and often of
great size. In disposition they are de-
scribed as treacherous and deceitful, es-
pecially when their cupidity was aroused,
and the making of portages at the Cas-
cades and The Dalles by the earljr traders
and settlers was always accompanie<l with
much trouble and clanger. Slaves were
common among them and were usually
obtained by Imrter from surrounding
tribes, though occasionally in successful
raids made for that purpose. Little is
known of their particular social customs
and l)elief8, but there was no clan or
gentile organization, and the villa^ was
the chief social unit. These villages
varied greatly in size, but often consisted
of only a few houses. There was always
a headman or chief, who, by reason of
personal qualities, might extend his influ-
ence over several neighboring villages,
but in general each settlement was inde-
pendent. Their most not-eworthy histor-
ical character was Comcomly, q. v.
Physically the Chinookan people dif-
fered somewhat from the other coast
tribes. They were taller, their faces
wider and characterized by narrow and
high noses; in this respect they resembled
the Kwakiutl of Vancouver ia. The cus-
tom of artificially deforming the head by
fronto-occipital pressure was universal
among them, a skull of natural fonn being
regarded as a disgrace and permitted only
274
CHINOOK JARGON
[B. A.S.
to slaves. This custom later lost its force
to some extent among the tribes of the
upper Columbia.
Linguistically they were divided into
2 groups: (1) Lower Chinook, comprising
two slight! y different dialects, the Chinook
proper and the Clatsop; (2) Upper Chi-
nooK, which include all the rest of the
tribes, though with numerous slight dia-
lectic differences. As a stock language
the Chinookan is Hharply differentiated
from that of surrounding families. Its
most striking feature is the high degree
of pronominal incoriwration, the pho-
netic slightnesK of verbal and pronominal
stems, the occurrence of 8 genders, and
the predominance of onomatopoetic proc-
esses. The dialects of Lower Chinook are
now practically extinct. Upper Chinook
is still spoken by considerable numbers.
The region occupied by Chinookan
tribes seems to have been well populated
in early times, Lewis and Ciark estimat-
ing the total number at somewhat more
than 16,000. In 1829, however, there
occurred an epidemic of what was calle<l
ague fever, of unknown nature, which in
a single summer swept away four-fifths
of the entire native population. Whole
villages disapj>eared, an<l others were so
reduced that in some instances several
were consolidated. The epidemic wa«
most disastrous below the Cascades. In
1846 Hale estimated the number below
the Cascades at 500, and between the Cas-
cades and The Dalles at 800. In 1854
Gibbs gave the population of the former
region as 120 and of the latter as 236.
These were scattered along the river in
several bands, all more or less mixed with
neighlx)ring stocks. In 1885 Powell esti-
mated the total number at from 500 to
600, for the greater part on Warm Springs,
Yakima, and (irande Ronde reservations,
Or^. The fusion on the reservations ban
been so great that no atH'urate estimate is
now possible, but it is probable that 800
would cover all those who could properly,
be assigned to this family.
Most of the original Chinookan 1)ands
and divisions had no six?cial tribal names,
being designated simplj^ as *' those living
at such a place." This fact, especially
after the general disturbance (caused by
the epidemic of 1829, makes it impossible
to identify all the tribes and villages
mentionea by writers. The following list
includes the different tribes, divisions,
and the villages not listed under the
separate tribes: Cathlacomatup, Cathla-
cumup, Cathlakaheckit, Cathlamet,
Cathlanahquiah, Cathlapotle, Cathlath-
lalas, Chakwayalham, Charcowa, Chil-
luckittequaw, Chinook, Chippanchick-
chick(?), Clackama, Clahclellah, Clahna-
uuah, Claninnatas, Clatacut, Clatsop,
Clowwewalla, Cooniac, Cushook, Dalles
Indians, Ithkyemamits, Kasenos, Katla-
gulak, Katlaminimin, Killaxthokle, Kle-
miaksac, Knowilamowan, Ktlaeshatlkik,
Lower Chinook, Multnomah, Namoit,
Nayakaukaue, Nechacokee, Necooti-
meigh, Neerchokioon, Nemalquinner,
Nenoothlect, Scaltalpe, Shahala, Shoto,
Skilloot, Smackshop, Teiakhochoe, Thlak-
alama, Tlakatlala, Tlakluit, Tlakstak,
Tlalegak, Tlashgenemaki, Tlegulak, Up-
per Chinook, Wahe, Wahkiacum, Waka^
nasisi, Wappatoo, Wasco, AVatlala, Will-
opah, Wiltkwilluk, Yehuh. (l. f.)
>Cheenook.— Ijatham in Jour. Ethnol. 8oc. Lond.,
I, 286, 1848. = Chinook. —GatMchet in Mag. Am.
Hist.. 167, 1877 (names and gives habitat of
tribes). > Chinook.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, in,
565, 626-628. 1882 (enumerates Chinook, Wakia-
kum, Cithlamet. Clatsop, Multnomah. Skilloot,
Watlala\ = Chinookan. —Powell in 7th Rep. B.
A. E.. 6i\ 1891. > Chinook!. —Gallatin in Trans.
Am. Antiq. Soc., ii. 134, 306. 1836 (a single tribe at
mouth of Columbia). =:Chinook8.— Hale in U. S.
Expl. Exped.. vr, 198, 1846. <Chinook8.— Keane
in Stanford. Compend., Cent, and So. Am., 474,
1878 (Includes Skilloots, Watlalas, Lower Chi-
nooks. Wakiakums, Cathlamets, Clatsops. Cala-
pooyas, Clackamas, Killamooks, Yamkally, Chi-
muok Jargon; of these Calapcjoyas and Yam-
kally are Xalapooian, Killamooks are Salishan).
>Chinuk.— Latham, Nat Hist» Man, 317, 1850
(same as TshinUk: includes Chinilks proper,
Klatsops, Kathlamut. Wakfiikam. Watlala, Niha-
loitih). X Nootka-Columbian.— Seoul er in Jour.
Roy. Geog. S<K\ Lond., xi, 224, 1841 (includes
Cheenooks and Calhlascons of present family).
X Southern.— Scouler, ibid., 224 (same as Ills
Nootka-Columbian family above). =Tsohinuk.—
Berghaus (la'il). Physik. Atlas, map 17. 1852.
=»Tahinook.— Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
III, 402, 1853 (Chinooks, Clatsops, and Watlala).
^Tshinuk.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped.. vi, 662,
569, 1846 (contains Watlala or Upper Chinook,
including Watlala, Nihaloitih, or Echeloots; and
Tshinuk, including Tshinuk, Tlatsap, Wakai-
kam). > Tshinuk. — Buschmann, Spuren der
aztek. Sprache. 616, 1859 (same as his Chinuk).
=Tsinuk.— (Jallatin, after Hale, in Trans. Am.
Ethnol. Soc, ir. pt. 1, 15, 1W8. ^^Tuniik.— Dall,
after Gibbs. in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 241, 1877
(mere mention of family).
Chinook jargon. The Indian trade lan-
guage of the Columbia r. region and the
adjacent Pacific coai»t from California
far up into Alaska. It was first brought
to public notice' in the early days of the
Oregon fur tnuie, about 18*10. In addi-
tion to the Indian elements it has now
incorporate<l numerous words from va-
rious European languages, but there can
l)e no doubt that the jargon existed as an
intertribal medium of communication long
before the advent of the whites, having
its parallel in the so-called '*Mobilian
language" of the Chilf tribes and the sign
language of the plains, all three being the
outgrowth of an extensive al)originar sys-
tem of intertribal trade and travel. The
Indian foundation of the jargon is the
Chinook proper, with Nootka, Salish, and
other languages, to which were added,
after contact with the fur companies, cor-
rupted English, French, and possibly
Russian terms. Hale, in 1841, estimated
the number of words in the jargon at 250;
Gibbs, in 1863, recorded about 500; Eells,
BULL. 30]
CHINOOK OLIVES CHIPEWYAN
275
in 1894, counted 740 words actually in
use, although his dictionary cites 1,402,
662 bein^ obsolete, and 1*552 phrases,
combinations of mamook (*do' ), yieldinjj
209. The following table shows the
share of certain languages in the jargon
as recorded at various perio<ls of its ex-
istence, although there are great differ-
ences in the constituent elements of the
jargon as spoken in different parts of the
country:
Words contributed
Nootka
Chinook : 111
English
French..'
Other lansruHfres
\^\
1^^
1894
IH
24
23
111
•►n
19«
41 1
67 ,
570
34
94 '
IW
4S
79
13K
There is much local variation in the
way Chinook is spoken on the Pacific
coast. While it tends to disappear in the
country of its origin, it is taking on new
life farther x., where it is evidently des-
tine<l to live for many years; but in s. e.
Alaska it is little used, being displaced ])y
English or Tlingit. This jargon has been
of great service to both the Indian and
^he white man, and its nMe in the <level-
opment of intertribal and interracial rela-
tions on the X. Pacific coast has been
important. For works bearing on the
subject see Pilling, Bibliography of the
Chinookan Languages, Bull. B. A. E.,
1893. (a. F. c.)
Ohoe«0hiiieok.— Bulmer. MS., cited by lulling, op.
cit. Ohineok Jargon. —Cox, Columbia R., ii. 134.
1831. Oregon jargon.— McKee (18ftl) in Sen. Ex.
Doc. 4, 32d Cong., Kpec. sew., 169, 1853. Oregon
Trade language.— Hale, Manual of Oregon Trade
Lang., 189^.
Ohinook olives. The name given bv
whites to an article of fcMxl of the Chinoolc
in earlier days (Kane, Wanderings, 187,
1859), consisting of acorns ripened in a
urine-soaked pit. ( a. p. c. )
Chinook lalmon. A name of the Colum-
bia r. salmon (Oncorhynchus chouicha)^
more commonly known as the (juinnat,
and also called the tyee salmon . f a. f. c. )
Ohinook wind. A name applied to cer-
tain winds of N. w. United States and
British Columbia. According to Bur-
rows (Yearbook Dept. Agric, 555, 1901)
there are three different winds, each es-
sentially a warm wind whose effeitt is
most noticeable in winter, that are called
chinooks. There is a wet chinook, a
dry chinook, and a third wind of an in-
termediate sort. The term was first ap-
plied to a warm s. w. wind which blew
from over the Chinook camp to the trad-
ing post established by the Hudson Bay
Company at Astoria, Oreg. Under the in-
fluence of these chinook winds snow is
melted with astonishing rapidity, and the
weather soon becomes balmy and spring-
like. The name is derived from Chinook ,
the apj)ellation of one of the Indian
tribt^s ot this region. (a. f. c.)
Chinoshahgeh ('at the bower* [?]). A
Seneca village near Victor, N. Y., on or
near the site of the earlier settlement
called Kanagaro, that was broken up
by the Denonville expedition. — Shea in
Charlevoix, New Fr., iii, 289, note, 1864.
Oa-o-ea-eh-ga-aah.— Marshall <i noted by Conover,
Knnadega and Geneva MS., B. A. E.( = 'the baiw-
w(H)d bark lies there'). Oaoflfigao.— Morgan,
Leagne Iroq.. 19. 18.'>lX = *in the banswood coun-
try). Oi-o-6s-i-g^oB.— Hewitt, infn (Seneca
form).
Chinquapin. A species of chestnut
( Castaneti purnila ) connnon in the Middle
an<l Southern states; spelled also chinka-
pin, chincapin, chinquepin, chinkopin.
('«istnnopsin chrymphyUa is called western
chin(iuapin,an(l in California and Oregon
chincpiapl... Two species of oak ( Qmrnis
(wnminnta and (^. priuoides) are named
('hin(|iiapin oak and dwarf chinquapin
oak, respectively. A species of i^erch
( Pitmoxiis annuhns) , known also as crap-
pie, is called chinquapin or chinkapm
perch. Such forms as chincomen and
chechinquamin, found in early writings,
make plausible the supposition that a p
was later substitute*! for an m in the
last syllable of the word, which would
then represent the widespread Algon-
quian radical mhi, 'fruit,* 'seed.* The
hrst comi)onentof the word, according to
Hewitt, is probably cognate with the Dela-
ware c/j//*7j/«, * large,' 'great.' (a. f. c. )
Chintagottine ( * people of the woods' ).
A division of the Kawch(Kiinneh, dwell-
ing (m Mackenzie r., Mackenzie Ter.,
Canada, x. of Ft(Jood Hope and between
the river and (Jreat Bear lake. Petitot
often uses the tenn synonymously with
Kawchodinneh.
Oah-tau'-go ten'-ni.— Ross, MS. note.s on Tinne. B.
A. E. Oan-tdw-go tm'-ni.— Kennicott, Hare Ind.
MS. voe^ib.. B. A. E. Oent du Poil.— Petitot, Expl.
du grand lac des Ours. 349, 1898. Ta-laottine.—
Petitot, MS., B. A. E., 18(W> ('dwellersat the end
of the pine trees'). Tohin-t*a-gottini.— Petitot
in Bull. Soe. G<^og. Pari.s. chart, 1875. Tehin-tpa-
gottine.— Petitot. Autour du lac des Esclaves,
362, 1891. Tcln-Ut' t«ne'.— Everette, MS. Tutu
vocab., B.A. E.,1883.
Chinnnga. The extinct Thistle clan of
the Chua( Snake) phratry of the Hopi.
Tci-nima wun-wii.— FewkeM in Am. Anthmp , vii,
ms, 1894 ( wun-wii r- ' clan ' ).
Chioro. A village of 35 Papago, prol)-
ably in Pima co., s. Ariz., in 1865 ( David-
son in Ind. Aff. Rep., 135, 1865). Possi-
bly identical with Charco.
Chipewyan (*jK)inted skins,' Cree Chip-
xcayanawokj from chipwa 'pointea,'
weyanaw * skin,' ok plural sign: Cree name
for the parkas, or shirts, of many north-
ern Athapascan tribes, pointed aiid orna-
mented with tails before and behind;
hence, the people who wear them). An
Athapascan linguistic group, embracing
the Desnedekenade and Athabasca, called
the Chipewyan proper, the Thilanottine,
276
CHIPIINTJINGE
r B. A. B.
Etheneldeli, and Tatsanottine. The terni
was originally applied to the Chipewyan
who assailed the Cree about L. Atha-
basca; subsequently the Cree and, follow-
ing their example, the whites, extended
it to include all Athapascan tribes known
to them, the whites using it as a syn-
onym of Tinneh, but it is now confined
to the linguistic group alx)ve referred to,
although the Tatsanottine, or Yellow-
knives, are generally separated in pop-
ular usage. The deerskin shirts worn by
these i)eople sometimes had the queue
behina only, like a poncho, and the tales
told by the early travelers of a race of
I>eople* living in the far N., having a tail
an<i being in a transition stage between
animal and man, had their foundation in
the misrepresentation of the descriptions
given by other Indians of these people
with the pointed shirt«. Petitot ( La Mer
Glaciale, 303,. 1887) characterized these
people as innocent and natural in their
lives and manners, imbued with a sense of
justice, endowed with sound sense and
judgment, and not devoid of originality.
Ross (Notes on the llnn^, MS., B. A. E. )
^^ve the habitat of the Chipewyan as
Churchill r., and Athabasca and Great
81ave lakes. Kennicot(MS., B. A. E. )8aid
their territory extended as far n. as Ft
Resolution on the s. shore of Great Slave
lake, Brit. Col., and Drake (Bk. Ind8.,vii,
1848) noted that they claimed from lat.
60° to a5° and from long, 100° to 110°, and
numbered 7,500 in 1812. In 1718, accord-
ing to Petitot, the Chipewyan were living
on Peace r., which they called Tsades, the
river of beavers, the shores of L. Atha-
basca and the forests between it and Great
Slave lake being then the domain of the
Etchareottine. The Cree, after they had
obtained guns from the French, attacked
these latter and drove them from their
hunting grounds, but were forced back
again by the Chipewyan tribes. As a
result of this contest the Thilanottine
obtained for themselves the upper waters
of Churchill r. about La Crosse lake, the
Chi|)ewyan proper the former domain of
the Etchareottine, while a part went to
live in the neighborhood of the English
post of Ft Prince of Wales, newly estab-
lished on Hudson bay at the mouth of
Churchill r. for trade with the Eskimo,
Maskegon, and Cree. These last be-
came known as the Etheneldeli, * eaters
of reindeer meat,^ or Theveottine, * stone-
house people,' the latter "being the name
that tney gave their protectors, the
English. In 1779 the French Canadians
brought smallpox to the shores of La
Crosse and Athabasca lakes. Cree and
Chipewyan were decimated by the mal-
ady, and the former, already driven back
to the 8. shore of L. Athabasca by the
martial attitude of the Chipewyan, were
now willing to conclude a lasting peace
(Petitot, La Mer Glaciale, 297, 1887).
There were 230 Cree at La Crosse lake in
1873, and 600 Thilanottine Chipewyan,
many of whom were half-breeds bearing
French names. The rejx)rt of Canadian
Indian Affairs for 1904 enumerates nearly
1,800 Indians as Chipewyan, including
219 Yellowknives (Tatsanottine).
AthabaMa.— Bancroft. Nat. Races, i, 114, 1874.
Athapasca.— Gallatin in Drake,Tecum8eh, 20, 1852.
Ohe-pa-wy-an.— Macauley, Hist. N. Y., ii, 244, 1829.
Ohepayan.— Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., bS. 1826. Ohepe-
ouyan.— Ibid. Chepewayan.— Ross, MS. Notes on
Tinne, B. A. E. Ohepewyaa.— Lewis, Travels, 143,
1809. Ohepeyan.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vii, 1848.
Oheppewyan.— Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., 58, 1826.
Cheppeyans. — Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol.Soc.,
II, 18, 1836. Chipeouaian.— Dnflot de Mofras, Ore-
gon, II, 337, 1844. Ghipewan.— Keane in Stanford,
Compend., 508, 1878. Onipeway. — Harmon, Journal,
264, 1820. Ohipewayan.— Kennieott, MS. vocab.,
B. A. E. Ghipewyan.— Morse, System of Mod.
Geog.. I, 55, 1814. Chipewyan Tinneys.— Petitot in
Can. Rec. Sci., i, 47, 1884. Ohipiouaa.— Balbi, Atlas
Ethnog.. 58, 1826. Chippewasran.— Howe, Hist.
Coll., 380, 1851. Ohippc^avanawok.— Ibid. (Cree
name). OQiippewayeen.— Kane, Wanderingis in
N. A., 180, 1859. Chippeweyan.— McLean, Hud-
son's Bay, I, 224, 1849. Ohip-pe-wi-yan.— Tanner,
Nar., 890, 1830. Chippewyan.— Schermerhom
(1812) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., ii, 42, 1814. Ohip-
powyen. — Mackenzie misquoted by Bracken-
ridge, Mexican Letters, 85, 1850. Ctnipwayan.—
Can. Ind. Rep., 171, 1877. Ohipwayanawok.—
Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 143. 1883. Chip-^
weyan.— Latham, Essays, 275, 1860. Ghip-wyan.—
Anderson, MS., B. A. E. Ohyppewan.— Snelling,
Tales of N. W., 195, 1830. Dene Tchippewayant.--
Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 289, 1891.
Oena des Xontagnes.' — McLean, Hudson's Bay, ii,
243, 1849. Highlander. ^Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog.
Soc, 649, 18^. Kontagnaia.— Petitot, Diet. D^n^
Dindji^, xx. 1876. Kontagnees.— Smet, Oreffon
Miss., 193, 1847. Kontanies.— Belcourt in Mbin.
Hist. Coll., 1, 227, 1872. Montagnez.— Henry, Trav.
in Can., 173, note, 1809. Kountaina.— Hooper, Tents
of Tuski, 403, 1853. Kountaineen.— Ross, MS.
notes on Tinne, B. A. E. Kountaia Indians. —
Franklin, 2d Exped. Polar Sea, 152, 1828. Ooehe-
oayyan.— McKeevor, Hudson's Biay, 73, 1819.
Oiaaohipuanea^efferys, French Dom. Am.. Can.
map, 1741. Shepeweyan.— Engl, writer (1786) in
Mass.Hist. Coll., 1st s.. 111,24, 1794. Tekippewayan.—
Petitot, Expl. Grand lac des Ours, 363, 1893.
Tohipwayanawok.— Petitot, Diet. D6p^-Dind1i6,
xix, 1876. Waohipuanet.— Jefferys, Am. Atlas,
map 2, 1 776. Wetshipweyanah. — Belcourt in Minn.
Hist. Coll., I, 226, 1872. Yatohe^thinyoowuo.—
Franklin, Jour. Polar Sea, i, 169, 1824 (• strangers':
Cree name).
Chipiinninge (Tewa: 'house at the
pointed peak*). A great ruined pueblo
and cliff village occupying a small but
high detached mesa between the Cafiones
and Polvadera cr., 4 m. s. of Rio Chama
and about 14 ni. s. w. of Abiquiu, Rio
Arriba co., N. Mex. The site was doubt-
less selected on account of its defensible
character, the pueblo being situated at
least 800 ft. above the level of the creek
and its walls built continuous with the
edge of the precipice. The great Pedernal
peak, from which the village takes its
name, rises on the other side of the can-
yon about 2 m. to the s. w. The pueblo
IS inaccessible except by a single trail
which winds up from the Polvadera and
reaches the summit of the mesa at its s.
end, passing thence through two strongly
BULL. 30]
rHIPISCLIN CHIPPEWA
277
fortified gaps before the pueblo is reached.
The site was impregnable to any form of
attack possible to savage warfare. The
commanding position was at the gateway
to the Tewa comitry k. of the mountain.*^,
and, according to tradition, it was the
function of Chipiiniiinge to withstand
as far as possible the fierce Navaho and
Apache raids from the x. w. The pueblo
was built entirely of stone and wa.s of 'A
stories, in places possibly 4. l^ortions of
second-story walls are still standing and
many cedar timl)ers are well preserved.
The remains of 15 kivas, mostly circular, a
few rectangular, are still traceable in and
about the ruins; these were all mo.<tly if
not wholly subterranean, having been
excavated in the rock surface on which
the pueblo stands. The cliff -dwellings
in the k. face of the mesa are all of the
excavated type, and appear to have l)een
used for mortuary quite as much as for
domiciliary purposes. (e. l. h.)
Chipisclin. A former village, ])resuma-
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Tavlor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
CMpletac. A former village, ])resuma-
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Tavlor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Chipmunk. The common name of the
striped ground squirrel ( TamiaH driatui*),
of which the variants chipmonk, chip-
muck, chitmunk, and others occur. The
word has l-^een usually deriviMl from the
"chipping** of theanimal, but(Chaml)er-
lain in Am. Notes and Queries, in, 155,
1889) it is clearly of Algonijuian origin.
The word chipmunk is really identical with
the adjidanmo ( 'tail -in-air' ) of Ix)ngfel-
low*s Hiawatha, the Chippewa atchitamo'%
the name of the ordinary re<l squirrel {Scl-
wrtw fnidsonirtui ) . The Chi])i)ewa vocabu-
lary of Long (1791) gives for squirrel
chdamoTiy and Mrs Traill, in her Canadian
Crusoes, 1854, writes the English wonl
as chitmunk. By folk etymology, there-
fore, the Algon(|uian word represente<l
by the Chippewa atchitamo'^ hasl)ecomc,
by way of chitinnnky our familiar rhip-
vmnk. The Chippewa word signifies
*head first', from atchit * headlong,' am
* mouth,' from the animal's habit of de-
scending trees. The Indian word applied
originally to the common red squirrel
and not to the chipmunk. ( a. f. c. )
Chippanchickchick. A tribe or band of
doubtful linguistic aflinity, either Chi-
nookan or Shahaptian, living in 1812 on
Columbia r., in Klickitat co.. Wash.,
nearly opposite The Dalles. Their num-
ber was estimated at 600.
OhippanehiokohiokB.— Morse in Rep. to Sec. War. SG»,
1822. Tchipan-Tohick-Tohiok.— Stuart in Nonv.
Chippekawkay. A Piankishaw village,
in 1712, on the site of Vincennes, Knox
CO., Ind. Hough translates the wonl
'brushwood,' and it may l>e identical
with Pepicokia. (.i. m.)
Brushwood. — Ba.skin, Forxtor & Co.'s Ilist. Atlas
rnd., 249, ]876. Ohih-kah-we-kay.— Honsrh in Ind.
(Jeol. Rep., map, 1S83. Ohipcoke.— Baskin, Fors-
ler & Co., op. c'it.. 249, 1H7«. Chipkawkay.— Ibid.
Chip-pe-coke.— Hough, op. cit. Ohippekawkay.—
Ibid.
Chippewa (i>opular adaptation of 0//6-
tmtf, 'to roast till puckered up,' reifer-
ring to the puckered seam on their moc-
casins; from ojih 'to pucker uj),' ulMvny
'to roast'). One of the large^it tribes n.
of Mexico, whose mnge was formerly
CHIPPEWA MAN
Ann. Voy.. xn, 26,1821.
Chipped implements.
See tStotie-UHjrk.
along l)oth shores of L. Huron and L.
Superior, extending acro.ss Minnesota to
Turtle mts., N. Dak. Althougli strong
in numbers and occupying an extensive
territory, the ChipjKjwa were never
prominent in history, owing to their re-
moteness from the frontier during the
period of the colonial wars. According to
tradition they are part of an Algonquian
body, includmg the Ottawa and Pota-
watomi, which separated into divisions
when it reached Mackinaw in its west-
ward movement, having come from some
jK)int N. or N. E. of Mackinaw. Warren
(Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 1885) aaserts
that they were settled in a large village
278
CHIPPEWA
[ B. A. B.
at La Puinte, VVIm., about the time uf the
discovery of America, and Verwyst (Mis-
sionary Labors, 1886) says that about
1612 they suddenly abandoned this local-
ity, many of theiii going back to the Sault,
while others settled at the w. end of L.
Superior, where Father Allouez found
them in 1665-67. There is nothing
found to sustain the statement of War-
ren and Verwyst in regard to the
early residence of the tribe at La Pointe.
They were first notice<l in the Jesuit
Relation of 1640 under the name Baouich-
tigouin (probably Bawa*tigowininiwiig,
'people of the Sault'), as residing at
the Sault, and it is possible that Ni-
collet met them in 1634 or 1639. In
1642 they were visited by Raymbaut
and Jogues, who found them at the
Sault and at war with a i)eople to the w.,
<loubtless the Sioux. A remnant or off-
shoot of the tribe resided n. of L. Superior
after the main body moved s. to Sault
Ste Marie, or when* it had reached the
vicinity of the Sault. The MRmmftg, a
tril)e closely related to if not an actual
division of the Chippewa, who dwelt
along the n. shore of the lake, were ap-
parently incorporated with the latter
while thev were at the Sault, or at anv
rate prior' to 1670 (Jesuit Rel., 1670).
On the N. the Chippewa are so closely
connected with the Cree and Mask^gon
that the three can be distinguished only
by those intimately acquainted with their
dialects and customs, while on the s. the
Chippewa, Ottawa, and Potawatomi have
always formed a sort of loose confederacy,
fre<juently designateil in the last century
the Three Fires. It seems to be well
establishe<l that some of the Chippewa
have resided x. of L. Superior from time
immemorial. These and the Marameg
claimed the n. side of the lake as their
country. According to Perrot some of
the Chippewa living s. of L. Superior in
1670-99, although relying chiefly on the
chase, cultivated some maize, and were
then Ht peace with the neighl)oring
Sioux. It is singular that this author
omits to mention wild rice (Zizama
Offiatira) among their food supplies, since
the possession of wild-rice fields was one
of tlie chief causes of their wars with
the .Dakota, Foxes, and other nations,
and according ht Jenks (19th Rep. B.
A. E., 1900) 10,000 Chippewa in the
Unite<l States use it at the present time.
About this period they first came into
possession of firearms, and were pushing
their way westward, alternately at peace
and at war with the Sioux and in almost
constant conflict with the Foxes. The
French, in 1692, reestablished a trading
post at Shaugawaumikong, now La Pointe,
Ashland co., W's., which became an im-
portant Chippewa settlement. In the
l)eginning of the 18th century the Chi|>-
pewa succeeded in driving the Foxes,
alrea<ly reduced by a war with the French,
from N. Wisconsin, compelling them to
take refuge w^ith the Sauk. They then
turne<i against the Sioux, driving them
across the Mississippi and s. to Minnesota
r., and continued their westward march
across Minnesota and North Dakota until
they occupied the headwaters of Red r.,
and establishe<l their westernmost band
in the Turtle mts. It was not until after
17'^ that they obtained a foothold w. of
L. SujDerior. " While the main divisions
of the tril)e were tlius extending their
possessions in the w., others overran the .
peninsula l>etween L. Huron and L. Erie,
which had long been claimed by the
Iroquois through conquest. The Iroquois
were forced to withdraw, and the whole
region was occupie<l by the Chip{)ewa /
bands, most of wnom are now known as
Missisanipi, although they still call them-
selves Ojibwa. The Chippewa took part
with the other tribes of the N. AV. in
all the wars against the frontier settle-
ments to the close of the war of 1812.
Those living within the United States
made a treaty with the Government in
1815, and have since remaineil i)eaceful,
all residing on reservations or allotted
lands within their original territory in
Michigan, Wisconsin, Minnesota, and
North Dakota, with the exception of the
small band of Swan Creek and Black River
Chippewa, who sold their lands in s.
Michigan in 1836 and are now with the
Munsee in Franklin co., Kans.
Schoolcraft, who was personally ac-
(juainted with the Chippewa and married
a woman of the tril)e, describes the Chip-
|»ewa warriors as equaling in physical
appearance the best formed of the N. W.
Indians, with the possible exception of
the Foxes. Their long and successful
contest with the Sioux and Foxes exhib-
ited their bravery and determination, yet
they were uniformly friendly in their rela-
tions with the French. The Chippewa
are a timber people. Although they nave
long l>een in fnendly relations with the
whites, Christianity has had but little
effect on them, owing largely to the con-
servatism of the native medicine-men.
It is affirmed by Warren, who is not dis-
posed to accept any statement that tends
to disparage the cnaracter of his people,
that, acconling to tradition, the division
of the tribe residing at La Pointe prac-
tised cannibalism, while Father Belcourt
afiirms that, although the Chippewa of
Canada treated the vanquished with most
horrible barbarity and at these times ate
human flesh, they looked upon cannibal-
ism, except under such conditions, with
horror. According to Dr William Jones
(inf n, 19a'>), the Pillagers of Bear id. |
BULL. 30]
CHIPPEWA
279
assert that cannibalism was occasionally
practised ceremoniallv by the Chipinnva
of Leech lake, and that since 1902 the
eating of human flesh occurred on Rainy
r. during stress of hunger. It was thV
custom of the Pillager oand to allow a
warrior who scalpe<l an enemy to wear
on his head two eagle feathers, and the
act of capturing a wounded prisoner on
the battlefield earned the distinction of
wearing five. Like the Ottawa, they were
expert in the use of the canoe, and in
their early history depende<l largely on
fish for food. There is abundant evi-
dence that polygamy was common, and
indeed it still occurs among the more
wandering bands (Jones). Their wig-
wams were made of birch bark or of
grass mats; poles were first planted in
the ground in a circle, the tops bent
together and tied, and the ];ark or mats
thrown over thehi, leaving a smoke hole
at the top. They imagined that the 8ha<le,
after the death of the body, followe<l a
wide beaten path, leading toward the
w., finally arriving in a country abound-
ing in everything the Indian desires. It
"is a general belief among the northern
Chippewa that the spirit often returns to
visit the grave, so long as the l)ody is not
reduce<l to dui«t. Their creation myth is
that common among the northern Algon-
(]|uian8. Like most other tril)es they be-
lieve that a mysterious power dwells in
all objects, animate and inanimate. Such
objects are hHmitmt, which are ever
wakeful and quick to hear evervthing in
the summer but in winter, after snow
falls, are in a torpid state. The (Chippewa
re^rd dreams as revelations, and some
object which appears therein is often
chosen as a tutelary deity. The Mede-
wiwin, or grand medicine societv (see
Hoffman, 7th Rep. B. A. E., 189l'), wa^
formerly a powerful organization of the
Chippewa, which controlled the move-
ments of the tribe ami was a formidable
obstacle to the intro<luction of (Christian-
ity. AVhen a Chippewa died it was cus-
tomary to place tne body in u grave
facing w., often in a sitting posture, or
to scoop a shallow cavity in the earth
and deposit the body therein on its back
or side, covering it with earth so as to
form a small mound, over which boards,
poles, or birch bark were placed. Ac-
cording to McXenney (Tourtothe Lakes,
1627 ), the Chippewa of Fond du Lac,
Wis., practised scaffold burial in winter,
the corpse being wrapped in birch bark.
Mourning for a lost relative continued for
a year, unless shortened by the meda or by
certain exploits in war.
Authors differ as to the names and
number of the Chippewa gentes, which
range all the way from 1 1 to 23. Warren
gives 21 gentes, of which the following are
not includeil among those named by Mor-
gan: Manamaig (Catfish), Nebaimaub-
ay (Merman), Besheu (Lynx), Mous
(Moose), Nekah (Goose), Udekumaig
(Whiti^fish), Gyaushk (Gull). Some of
them, Warren says, have but few mem-
bers and are not known to the tribe at
lar^e. The Maskegon sprang from the
Reindeer, Lynx, and Pike (Pickerel)
gentes, which went to the n. of L. Su-
perior when the tribe moved w. from
Sault Ste Marie. Among some of the
Chippewa these gentes are associated in
5 phratries: the Awausee, Businausee,
Ahahweh, Noka, and Mousonee. The
Awausee phratry includes the Catfish,
Merman, Sturgt^on, Pike (Pickerel),
Whitefish, and Sucker gentes — all the
Fish gentes. The Businausee phratry
includes the Crane and Vjag\e gentes,
businausee, 'echo-maker,* l)eing a name
for the crane. The Ahahweh phratry
includes the Ix)on, Goose*, and Cormorant
gentes, ahahweh being a name for the
loon, though the Loon gens is called
Mong. Morgan makes Ahahweh distinct
and called them the *Duck* gens. The
Noka (No-*ke, Bear) phratry included
the Bear gentes, of which there were for-
merly several named from different parts
of the l)ear's Ixniy; but these are now
consolidated and no <lifferences are recog-
nizviX excepting l)etween the common and
the grizzl V l)ears. The Mousonee phratry
includes tlie Marten, Moose, and Reindeer
gentes. Mousonee seems to be the proper
name of the phratry, though it is also
calle<l Waubishashe, from the important
Marten gens which is siiid to have sprung
from the incorporated remnant of the
Mundua. Morgan ( Anc. Soc., 166, 1877)
names the following 28 gentes: Myeengun
( Wolf), Makwa ( Bear), Ahmik (Beaver),
Mesheka (Mud turtle), Mikonoh (Snap-
ping turtle), Meskwadare, (Little tur-
tle), Ahdik (Reindeer), Chueskweskewa
(Snii)e), Ojeejok (Crane), Kakake (IMg-
eon hawk) [=Kagagi, Raven], Omegee-
ze (Bald eagle), Mong (Loon), Ahahweh
(Duck), [=Wii«wa«, Swan], She8hel>e
(Duck), Kenabig (Snake), AVazhush
(Muskrat ) , Wabezhaze ( Marten ) , Moosh-
kaooze (Heron), Ah wahsissa (Bullhead),
Namabin (Carp [Catfish]), Nama (Stur-
geon), Kenozhe(Pike) r=Kinozha°, Pick-
erel]. Tanner gives also the Pepegewiz-
zains (Sparrow-hawk), Mussundummo
(Water snake), and the forked tree as
totems among the Ottawa and Chip-
pewa.
It is impossible to determine the past or
present numbers of the Chippewa, as in
former times only a small part of the
tribe came in contact with the whites at
any period, and they are now so mixed
with other tribes in many quarters that
no separate returns are given. The prin-
Wit Hil^
280
fvt.t <^t CHIPPEWA
[ B. A. B.
cipal estimates are as follow: In 1764,
about 25,000; 1783 and 1794, about 15,000;
1843, about 30,000; 1851, about 28,000.
It is probable that most of these estimates
take no account of more remote bands.
In 1884 there were in Dakota 914; in
Minnesota, 5,885; in Wisconsin, 3,656; in
Michigan^ 3,500 returned separately, and
6,000 Chippewa and Ottawa, of whom
perhaps one-third are Chippewa; in Kan-
sas, 76 Chipj)ewa and Munsee. The en-
tire number in the United States at this
time was therefore about 16,000. In
British America those of Ontario, includ-
ing the Nipissing, numbered at the same
time about 9,000, while in Manitoba and
the Northwest Territories there were
17,129 Chippewa and Cree on reserva-
tions under the same agencies. The Chip-
pewa now (1905) probably number 30,000
to 32,000—15,000 in British America and
14,144 in the United States, exclusive of
about 3,000 in^Michigau.
As the Chippewa were scattered over a
region extending 1,000 m. from e. to w.,
they had a large number of villages,
bands, and local divisions. Some of the
bands bore the name of the village, lake,
or river near which they resided, but
these were grouped under larger divi-
sions or subtribes which occupied certain
fixed limits and were distinguished by
marked differences. According^ to War-
ren there were 10 of these principal divi-
sions: Kechegummewininewug, on the s.
shore of L. Superior; Betonukeengainube-
jig, in N. Wisconsin; Munominikasheen-
hug, on the headwaters of St Croix r.
in Wisconsin and Minnesota; Wahsuah-
gjinewininewug, at the head of Wiscon-
sin r. ; Ottawa Lake Men, on Lac Courte
Oreilles, Wis.; Kechesebewininewug, on
the upper Mississippi in Minnesota; Muk-
meduawininewug, or Pillagers, on Leech
lake, Minn.; Sugwaundugahwininewug,
N. of L. Superior; Kojejewininewug, on
Rainy lake and r. about the n. boundary
of Minnesota; and Omushkasug, on the
N. w. side of L. Superior at the Canadian
border. Besides these general divisions
the following collective or local names
are recognized as belon^ng to various
settlements, bands, or divisions of the
tribe: Angwassag, Big Rock, Little Forks,
Menitegow, Blackbird, Menoquet^s Vil-
lage, Ketchewaundai^nink, Kawkawl-
ing, Kishkawbawee, fip^naw ^bnP^p'''
B^> Nagonabe, Ommunise, Shabwasing,
B^hXfiiiJslands, Nabobish, nhphnygftn^
Otusson, Reaum's Village, and Wapisiwi-
sibiwininiwak, in Iftw^T Mi^^^'f?^"; Red
Cedar Lake, Sukaauguning, Knife Lake,
Kechepukwaiwah, Lon^ Lake, Chetac
Lake, Turtle Portage, Rice Lake, Yellow
Lake, Trout Lake, Pawating, Ontonagon,
Wauswagiming, Lac Courte Oreilles,
Shaugwaumikong, Burnt Woods, Gata-
get^i^uning. Bay du Noc, Wequadong,
Mekadewagamitigweyawininiwak, Mich.-
ilinrifl/^kinap.^ St Francis Xavier, and Wia-
quahheche^meeng, in Wisconsin and
upper Michigan: Grand Portage, Pok^-
ma. Fond du Lac, Red Cliff, Crow Wing
River, Gull Lake, Onei)owesepewenene-
wak,Miskwagamiwisagaigan, Wabasemo-
wenenewak(?), Wanamakewajenenik,
Mikinakwadshiwininiwak, Misisagaikan-
iwininiwak, Gasakaskuatchimmekak, Os-
chekkamegawenenewak, Winnebegosh-
ishiwininiwak, Gamiskwakokawinini-
wak, Gawababiganikak, Anibiminanisi-
biwininiwak, Kahmetahwungaguma, and
Rabbit Lake, in Minnesota and the Dako-
tas;i Oueschekgagamioulimy, Walpole Is-
land, Obidgewong, Michipicoten, Doki's
Band, Baeoache, Epinette (1744), Ouas-
ouarini, Mishtawayawininiwak, Nope-
ming, and Nameuilni, in Ontario,APortage
de Prairie, Mattawan, and Pic Kiver in
Manitoba; and Nibowisibiwininiwak in
Saskatchewan. ( j. m. c. t. )
AehipoM.— Prise de Possession (1671) in Perrot,
M4m., 293, 1864. Aohipou^.— Neill in Minn. Hist.
Soc. Coll., V, 398, 1885. Anohipawah.— Boudinot,
Star in the West, 126, 1816. An-ish-in-aub-ag.—
Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 45, 1885
('spontaneous men*). A-wish-in-aub-ay. — Ibid.,
37. Ax»hi«»ay^runu.— Gatschet, Wyandot MS., B.
A . E. . 1881 ( Wyandot name ) . Baouiohtigottin. — Jes.
Rel. I&IO, 34, 1858. Bawiohtigouek.— Ibid., index.
Bawiohtigottin. — Ibid. Bedzaqetdia. — Petitot,
Montagnais MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1869 ('long
ears' : Tsattine name ) . Bedxietoho. — Peti tot, Hare
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1869 (Kawchodinne name).
Bungeei.— Henry, MS. vocab. (Bell copy, B. A.
E.), 1812 (so called by Hudson Bay traders).
Cabellot realxados.— Duro, Don Diego de Pefialosa,
43, 1882 (the Raised-hair tribe of Shea's Pefialosa;
Cheveux-relev^s of the French). Ohebois.—
Gass, Jour., 47,. note, 1807. Ohepawaa.— Croghan
(1759) quoted by Kauflfman.West. Penu., 132, app.,
1851. Ohepewayt.— Croghan (1760) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 4th s., IX, 287, 1871. Ohepowaa.— Croghan
(1759) quoted by Proud, Penn., n, 296, 1798. Chep-
pewea.— Shirley (1755) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist. , vi,
1027, 1855. Ohiappawawi.— Loudon, Coll. Int. Nar.,
1, 34, 1808. OhiboU.— BouQuet ( 1760) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 4th 8., IX, 295. 1871. Ohipawawa*.— Gold-
thwait (1766) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ist s., x, 122,
1809. Chipawayt.— Croghan (1760). ibid., 4th s., ix,
250,1871. Chipaweight.— German Flatsconf. (1770)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., viii, 229, 1857. Ohipewaa.—
Lattr6, map U. S., 1784. Chipawayt.— Carver (1766)
Trav., 19, 1778. Chipew^ha. -Johnson (1763) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,vii, 526, 1866. Ghipaweigha.—
Johnson (1763) , ibid., 583, 1856. Chipiwa.— Treaty
of 1820, U. S. Ind. Treat. . 369, 1873. Chipoea.— Prise
de Possession (1671) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 803,
1855. Ohippawas.— Croghan (1759) quoted by Jef-
ferson, Notes. 143, 1825. Chippawees.— Writer of
1756 in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., l8t8.,vii, 123, 1801.
Ohippeouayi.— Toussaint, map of Am. , 1839. Ghip-
pewaea.— Johnson (1763) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
VII, 525, 1856. Chippewais.— Perrot (ca. 1721) in
Minn. Hist. Soc.CoU.,ii,pt. 2,24,1864. Ghippewaa.—
Washington (1754) quoted by Kauffman, West.
Penn., 67, 1851. Ohippewaua.— Edwards (1788) in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., ix, 92, 1804. Ohippe-
waya.— Chauvignerie (1736) quoted by School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 556, 1853. Ohippeweigha.—
Johnson (1767) inN.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 969.
1856. Ghippewyae.— Ft Johnson conf . (1755), ibid.,
VI. 975, 1855. Ghippowaya.— Washington (1754)
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ist s., vi, 140, 1800.
Ohippuwaa.—Hecke welder quoted by Barton, New'
Views, app. 1, 1798. Ohipwaea.— Croghan (1765)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 782, 1856. Ohipwaa.—
Bouquet (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s.,
BULL. 30]
CHIPPEWA OF LAKE NIPEGON
281
IX, 321, 1871. Chipwayt.— Croghan (1765), op. cit.
Oypoway*.— Beltrami quoted by Neill, Minn., 350,
im. De-wi-U-nhi'.— Hewitt, Mohawk MS.
vocab., B. A. E. (Mohawk name). Dewofanna's.—
Bellomont (1698) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv,
407,1854. Douaganhas.— Cortland (1687), ibid.,
ni, 434, 1853. Douwanmhas.— Ibid. Dovaganhaet.—
Livingston (1691), ibid., 778. Dowaganaha.— Doc.
of 1700, ibid., iv, 701, 1854. Dowaganhas.— Cort-
land (1687), ibid, iii, 434, 1855. Dowanganhaet.—
Doc. of 1691, ibid., 776. Dshipowe-hMa.— Gat-
scbet, Caughnawaga MS., B. A. E., 1882 (Oaughna-
waga name). Dw&-k&-n<". — Hewitt, Onondaga
MS. vocab., B. A. E. (Onondaga name). Swi-UL-
nhi'.— Hewitt, Seneca and Onondaga vocab.,
B. A. E., 1880 (Seneca and Onondaga name).
Sakiaeroimon.— Jes. Rel. 1649. 27, 1858 (Huron
name; Hewitt says it signifies 'people of
the falls'). Estiaghes.— Albany conf. (1726) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 791. 1855. Ettiaghicks.—
Golden (1727), ibid., iv, 737, note, 1854.
Eattagc.— Livingston (1701), ibid., 899, 18M.
StohipoiM.— Prise de possession (1671) . ibid., ix, 808,
1856. Gibbawayt.— Imlay, West Ter., 363, 1797.
Hahatona.— Featherstonhaugh, Canoe Voy., i,
300, 1847. llaKatonwan.— lapi Oaye, xiii, no.
2, 6, Feb., 1884 (Sioux name). Hafiatogwag.—
Riggs, Dakota Diet., 72, 1852 (Sioux name).
Itahatonway.— Matthews, Hidatsa Inds., 150, 1877
(Sioux name). HA-hat-ting.— Long, Exped.
Rocky Mts., ii, Ixxxiv, 1823 (Hidatsa name, in-
correctly rendered ' leapers ' ) . Ha-ha-tu-a.— Mat-
thews, Hidatsa Inds., 150, 1877 (Hidatsa name; h
guttural). Ha-ha-twawns.— Neill, Minn., 113, 18.')8.
Hah-hah-ton-wah.— Qale, Upper Miss., 265, 1867.
Hrah-hrah-twaunB.— Ramsey (ca. 1852) in Minn.
Hist. Soc. Coll., I, 50, 1872. Icbewaa.— Boudinot,
etar in the West. 126, 1816 (misprint). Jibewas.—
Smith (1799) quoted by Drake, Trag. Wild.. 213,
1841. Jumper*. —Neill, Minn., 36. 1858 (incorrect
translation of Saulteurs). Khahkhahtons. —
Snelling, Tales of the Northwest, 137, 1830 (Sioux
name). Ehakhatons.— Ibid., 144. Khakhaton-
wan.— Williamson, Minn. Geol. Rep. for 1884, 107.
Ktttaki.— Gatschet, Fox MS., B. A. E., 1882 (Fox
name). Leapers. — Hennepin, New Discov., 86,
1698 (incorrect rendering of Saulteurs). Na-
tion du Sault.— Jogues and Raymbaut in Jes. Rel.
1642, II, 95. 1858. Ne-a-ya-og'.— Hayden, Ethnog.
and Philol. Mo. Val., 235, 1862 ( ' those speaking the
same language ' ; Cree name ) . Ne-ga-tc8.— St Cyr,
oral inf'n, 1886 (Winnebago name; plural,
Ne-gfttc-hi-j6n). Ninniwaa.— Rafinesque, Am.
Nations, i. 123, 1836. Nwi'-ki,— Hewitt, Tusca-
rora MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1880 (Tusearora name).
Objibwaya.— Kinffsley, Stand. Nat Hist., pt 6, 143,
1883. O'chipi'wig.— Long, Exped. St. Peter's
R., II, 151, 1824. Oohipawa,— Umfreville (1790) in
Me. Hist Soc. Coll., vi, 270, 1859. Ochipewa.— Rich-
ardson, Arct. Exped., 71, 1851. Ocnipoy.— York
(1700) inN. Y. Doc. Col. HLst., iv, 749, 1854. Oohip-
pewau.— Foster in Sen. Misc. Doc. 39, 42d Cong.,
8d sess., 6, 1873. Odchipewa.— Hutchins (1770)
quoted by Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii, 38, 1851.
Odgiboweke.— Perrot, M4m., 193. 1864. Odjibewais.—
Ibid. Od-jib-wag. — Schoolcraft quoted in Minn.
Hist Soc. Coll., v, 35,-1885. Odiibwaa.— School-
craft. Ind. Tribes, i, 307, 1851. Ochibwe.— Kelton,
Ft Mackinac, 153, 1884. O^jibwek.— Belcourt
(1850?) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 227, 1872. Ogi-
boia.— M'Lean Hudson Bay, ii, 323, 1849. 0-Je-
bway. —Jones, Ojebway Inds., 164, 1861. Oieebois. —
Henrj', MS. vocab. (Bell copy, B. A. E.), 1812.
Ojibaway.— Lewis and Clark, Trav.. 53, 1806.
^ibbewaig.— Tanner, Narr., 315, 1830 (Ottawa
name). Ojibbewaya.— Ibid., 36. (Mibboai.— Hoff-
man, Winter in the Far West, ii, 15, 1821. Oiibe-
waya.— Perkins and Peck, Annals of the West,
1850. Ojiboia.— Gunn in Smithson. Rep., 400, 1868.
Ojibua.— Maximilian, Trav., 135, note, 1843.
0-jib-wage.— Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 287,
1871. Qjibwaig,— Hale, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val., 224, 1846. Ojibwaa.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 454, 1838.
0-jib-wa-uk',— Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 287,
1871. Ojibwaya.— Am. Pioneer, ii, 190, 1843.
Ojibway-ugt.— Foster in Sen. Misc. Doc. 39, 42d
Cong., 3d sess., 6, 1873. Ojibwe.— Burton, City of
the Saints, 117, 1861. Ontehibouae.— Raymbaut
(1641) quoted in Ind. Aff. Rep, 1849, 70, 1850 (prob-
ably a misprint) . Oshibwek.— Belcourt ( 1850?) in
Minn. Hist Soc. Coll., i, 227, 1872. Oatiagaghroon-
ea.— Canajoharie conf. (1759) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., vii, 384, 1856. Oatiagahoroones.— Neill in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 397, 1885 (Iroquois
name). Otchepose.— Proces verbal (1682) in
French, Hist Coll. La., ii, 19, 1875. Otohi-
poeaea.— La Salle (1682) in Margry, D^., il, 187,
1877. Otchipoia.— La Salle (1682) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., I, 46, 1846. Otohipoises.— Hildreth,
Pioneer Hist., 9,lM8.0tchipwe.—Baraga,Otchipwe
Gram., title, 1878. O^ibwek.— Perrot, M6m., 193,
1864. OtUpoaa.— Buchanan, N.Am. Inds., 156, 1824.
Ouoahipouea.— La Hontan (1703). New Voy., II, 87,
1735. Ouchiboia.— Writer of 1761 in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 4th s., IX, 428, 1871. Ouchipawah.— Pike
(1806) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 563,
1853. Ouohipbe.— La Chesnaye (1697) in Margry,
D^., VI, 6, 1886. Ouohipovea.— Coxe, Carolana,
map, 1741. Outaohepaa.— McKenney and Hall,
Ind. Tribes, iii, 79, 1854. Outohibouec— Jes. Rel.
1667, 24. 1858. Outchiboua.— Ibid., 1670, 79, 1858.
Outchipoue.— Gallin^e (1669) in Margry, D^c.,i,163,
1875. Outchipwaia.— Bell in Can. Med. and Surg.
Jour., Mar. and Apr., 1886. Outehipouea. — La
Hontan, New Voy., i, 230, 1703. Paouichtigottin.—
Jes. Rel., Ill, index, 1858. Paouitagoung.— Ibid.
Paouitigoueietthak. — Ibid. Paouitiiigouaofi-irizii. —
Ibid. Qa-qa-to"-wan.— Dorsey, oral infn, 1886
(Sioux name). Ra-ra-to-oaxia.— Warren (18.52) in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v. 96, 1885. Ra-ra-rwana.—
Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 72, 1850 (Sioux
name). Salteur.- Bacqueville de la Potherie, ii,
48, 1753. Santeaux.— Brown, West. Gaz.. 265,
1817 (misprint). Santena. — Gunn in Smithson.
Rep. 1867, 400, 1868 (misprint). Santeura.— Dobbs,
Hudson Bay, 26, 1744 (misprint). Saulteaux.—
Beauhamois (1745) in Minn. HLst. Soc. Coll., v,
432, 1886. Saulteura.— Jes. Rel. 1670, 79, 1858.
Baulteuae.— Belcourt (ca. 1850) in Minn. Hist. Soc.
Coll., I, 228. 1872. Saulteux.— Gallin^e (1669) in
Margry, Dt^c, i, 163, 1875. Sault Indiana.— Vau-
dreuil (1710) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 843, 1855.
Sauteaux.— Gamelin (1790) in Am. St. Papers,
IV, 94, 1832. Sautera.- Schermerhorn (1812) in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., ii, 6, 1814. Sauteura.—
Jes. Rel. 1607, 24, 1858. Sauteua.— Cox. Columbia
R., II, 270, 1831. Bauteux.— Vaudreuil (1719) in
N. Y. Doc. Cx)l. Hist. IX, 893, 1855. Sautor.— Carver
(1766), Trav., 97, 1778. Sautoua.— King, Journ. to
Arct, Ocean, i, 32, 1836. Sautoux.— Ibid. Sohip-
uwe. — Heckewelder quoted by Barton, New
Views, app., 1, 1798 (German form). Shepa-
weca.— Lindesay (1749) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.
VI. 538, 1855. Shepewaa.— Bradstreet (ca. 1766),
ibid., vii, 694, 1866. Shepuway.— Heckewelder
quoted by Barton, New Views, app., 1, 1798.
Sothuze.— Dalton (1783) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,lst
8., X, 123, 1890. Sotoea.— Cox, Columbia R., ii, 270,
1831. Botooa.— Franklin, Journ. Polar Sea, 96, 1824.
Botto.— Kane, Wanderings in N. A., 438, 1859. Boul-
teaux.— Henry, M-^. vocab. (Bell copy, B. A. E.),
1812. Souteua.— Chauvignerie (1736) quoted by
Schoolcraft Ind. Tribe.s, iii, 556, 1853. Soutiea.—
Am. Pioneer, ii, 192, 1843. Stiaggeghroano.— Post
(1758) quoted by Proud, Penn., ii, app., 113, 1798.
Stiagigroone.— Livin^ton (1700) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist, IV, 737. 1854. Tcipu'.— Dorsey, Kansas MS.
vocab., B. A. E..1882(Kansa name). Xachipeway. —
Wrangell, Ethnol. Nachr., 100, 1839. Taohippi-
weer.- Walch, map, 1805 (German form ). Taipa'. —
Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 ((Jsage
name). Twi-'k4'-nhi'.— Smith, Cayuga and
Oneida MS. vocabs., B. A. E., 1884 (Cayuga and
Oneida name). Xlohipweya.— Dalton (1783) in
Mass. Hist Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 123, 1809. Wah-
kah-towah.— Tanner, Narr., 150, 1830 (Assiniboin
name).
Chippewa of Lake Kipegon. A Chippewa
band officially known by this name re-
siding in the vicinity of L. Nipegon, n.
of L. Superior, in Ontario. The ** Chris-
tians," composing nearly one-half the en-
tire band, occupy a village at the head of
the lake near the Hudson Bay Company^s
post; the remainder live a])out 100 ni.
282
CHIPPOY OHIRIOAHITA
[b. a. e.
farther inland. The aggregate minil)er in
1884 waa 426, and in 1901, 518. They are
connecte<l with the band at Red Rock on
Nipegon bay. (.i. m.)
Allenemipigons.— Denonville (1687), in Margro',
D^., VI,52, 1886.
Chippoy. A former Potawatonii vil-
lage on Big Shawnee cr., in Fountain
CO., Ind. It was settled after 1795, and
the site was included in a tract sold in
1818 by the Miami. (j. m. )
Ohipaille.— St Marv's treatv with Miamis (1818) in
U. S. Ind. Treat., 493, 1873. Chippoy.— Harrison
(1814) qnoted by Drake, Tecumseli. 161, 1852.
CMpntca. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connecteil with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Tavlor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 18()1.
Chiricfthna ( Apache : ' great mountain ' ) .
An important division of the Apache,
BE0A2-I8HU— CHIRICAHUA APACHE
so called from their former mountain
home in s. e. Arizona. Their own
name is Aiiiha. The Chiricahua were
the most, warlike of the Arizona In-
dians, their raids extending into New
Mexico, 8. Arizona, and n. Sonora, among
their most noted leaders being Cochise,
Victorio, Loco, Chato, Nachi, Bonito
and Geronimo. Physically they do not
differ materially from the other Apache.
The men are well built, nmscular, with
well-developed chests, sound and regular
teeth, and abundant hair. The women
are even more vigorous and strongly
built, with broad shoulders and hips
and a tendency to corpulency in old
age. They habitually wear a pleasant
open expression of countenance, exhibit-
ing uniform gofKl nature, save when in
anger their face takes on a savage cast.
White thought their manner of life, gen-
eral physique, and mental disposition
seemed conducive to long life. Their
characteristic long-legged moccasins of
deerskin have a stout sole turning
up at the toes, and the legs of the moc-
casins, long enough to reach the thigh,
are folded back oelow the knee, form-
ing a iK)cket in which are carried paints
and a knife. The women wore short
skirts of buckskin, and the men used to
display surplus skins folded alxjut the
waist. Their arrows were made of
reed tipped with obsidian or iron, the
shaft winged wnth three strips of feathers.
They used in battle a long spear and a
' slung-shot made by inserting a stone into
the green hide of a cow's tail, leaving a
portion of the hair attached. They pos-
sessed no knowledge of w^eaving blankets.
White (MS., B. A. E.) supposed that
they had immigrated into Arizona from
New Mexico three or four generations
back. Their camps were located on the
highlands in winter that they might catch
the warm rays of the sun, and in summer
near the water among stunted trees that
sheltereil them from its scorching glare.^
Their bands or clans were named from the
nature of the ground about their chosen
territory. Both men and women were
fond of wearing necklaces and ear pend-
ants of l)ead8. The hair was worn long
and flowing, with a turban, to which was
attacheii a flap hanging down behind;
thev plucked out the hairs of the beard
with tweezers of tin, and wore suspended
from their necks a small round mirror
which they useil in painting their faces
with stripes of brilliant colors. Strings of
pieces of shell were highly prized. Their
customary dwelling was a rude brush hut,
circular or oval, with the earth scooped
out to enlarge its capacity. In winter
they huddled together for warmth and,
if the hut was large, built a fire in the
center. When they changed camp they
burned their huts, which were always
built close together. They subsisted on
berries, nuts, and the fruit of various trees,
inesquite beans, and acorns, of which
they were particularly fond, and they
ground the seeds of different grasses on
a large flat stone and made a paste with
water, drying it afterward in the sun.
They relished the fruit of cacti and of
the yucca, and made mescal from the
root of the agave. Fish they would not
eat, nor pork, but an unborn calf and the
entrails of animals they regarded as deli-
cacies, and horse and mule flesh was con-
sidered the best meat. Though selfish in
most things, they were hospitable with
food, which was free to anyone who
was hungry. They were scrupulous in
keeping accounts and paying debts.
BHLL. 301
rHIRirAHUA
283
Like many other Indians they would
never speak their own names nor
on any account speak of a dead meml)er
of the tribe. They tille<i the jjround a
i'<lL.Ai.i..A CHIEF
little with wooden implement^, obtaining
corn and melon seeds from the Mexicans.
In their clans all were equal. Bands,
according (6 AVhite, were formed oif
clans, and chiefs were chosen for their
ability and courage, although there is
evidence that chiefship was sometimes
hereditary, as in the case of Cochise, son
and successor of Nachi. Chiefs and old
men were usually deferred to in council.
They used the brain of the deer in dress-
ing buckskin. It is said that they charged
their arrows with a quick deadly poison,
obtained b); irritating a rattlesnake with
a forked stick, causing it to bite into a
deer's liver, which, when saturated. with
the venom, was allowed to putrefy. They
stalked the deer and the antelope by
coverinj^ their heads with the skull of
the animal and imitating with their
crouching bo<ly the movements of one
grazing; and it was their custom to ap-
proach an enemy's camp at night in a
similar manner, covering their heads with
brush. They signaled war, or peace by
a great blaze or smoke made by burning
c^ar boughs or the inflammable spines
on the giant cactus. Of their social or-
ganization very little is definitely known,
and the statements of the two chief au-
thorities are widely at variance. Accord-
ing to White, the children belong to the
gens of the father, while Bourke as-
serts that the true clan system prevails.
They married usually outside of the gens,
lU'cording to White, and never relatives
nearer than a second cousin. A young
warrior seeking a wife would first bargain
with her parents and then take a horse
to her dwelling. If she viewed his suit
with favor she would feed and water the
animal, and, seeing that, he would come
and fetch his bride, and after going on a
hunt for the honeymoon they woiud re-
turn to his people. When he took two
horses to the camp of the bride and killed
one of them it signified that her parents
had given her over to him without re-
gard to her consent. Youth was the
(piality most desired in a bride. After
she becanie a mother the husband might
take a second wife, and some had as many
as five, two or more of them often l)eing
sisters. Married women were usually
faithful and terribly jealous, so that sin-
gle girls did not care to incur their rage.
A woman in confinement went off to a
hut by herself, attended by her women
relatives. Children received their earli-
est names from something particularly
noticeable at the time of their birth. As
among the Navaho, a man never spoke to
his mother-in-law, and treated his wife's
fatherwith distant respect; and his broth-
ers were never familiar with his wife
nor he with her sisters and brothersi
Faithless wives were punished by whii>-
ping and cutting off a jwrtion of the nose,
after which thev were cast off. Little
TSHAI-KLOGE— CHIRICAHUA WOMAN
girls were often purchased or adopted by
men who kept them until they were old
enough for them to marry. Often girls
were married when only 10 or 11 years of
age. Children of both sexes had perfect
freedom, were not required to obey, and
284
CHIRICAHUA
[b. a. e.
never were punished. The men engaged
in pastimes every day, and boys in mock
combats, hurling stones at each other
with slinM. Young wives and maidens
did only Tight work, the heavy tasks be-
ing performed by the older women.
People met and parted without any form
of salute. Kissmg was unknown. Ex-
cept mineral vermilion,- the colors with
which they painted their faces and dyed
grasses for baskets were of vegetal ori-
gin— yellow from beech and willow bark,
red from the cactus. They would not
kill the golden eagle, but would pluck
its feathers, which they prized, and for
the hawk and the l)ear they had a super-
stitious regard in a lesser degree. They
made tizwin, an intoxicating drink, from
com, burying it until it sprouted, grind-
ing it, and then allowmg the mash
diluted with water to ferment. The
women carried heavy burdens on their
backs, held by a strap pa.*«8ed over the
forehead. Their basket work was imper-
vious to water and ornamented with
designs similar to those of the Pima,
except that human figures frequently
entered into the decorative motive.
Baskets 2h ft. in length and 18 in.
wide at the .mouth were used in collect-
ing food, which was frequently brought
from a great distance. When one of
the tribe died, men carried the corpse,
wrapped in the blankets of the deceased,
with other trifling personal effects, to an
obscure place in low ground and there
buried it at once, piling stones over the
grave to protect it from coyotes or other
prowling l)easts. No women were al-
lowed to follow, and no Apache ever
revisited the spot. Female relatives kept
up their lamentations for a month, utter-
ing loud wails at sunset. The hut in
which a person die<l was always burned
and often the camp was removed.
AVidows used to cut off their hair and
paint their faces black for a year, during
which time the mourner lived in the fam-
ily of the husband's brother, whose wife
she became at the expiry of the mourn-
ing. They had a number of dances,
notably the "devil dance,'* with clowns,
masks, headdresses, etc., in which the
participants jumped over fire, and a
spiritea war dance, with weapons and
shooting in time to a song. When any-
body fell sick several fires were built m
the camp, and while the rest lay around
on the ground with solemn visages, the
young men, their faces covert with
paint, seized firebrands and ran around
and through the fires and about the lodge
of the sick person, whooping continually
and flourishing the brands to drive away
the evil spirit. They had a custom, when
a girl arrived at puberty, of having the
other young girls licrhtly tread on her
back as she lay face downward, the cere-
mony being followed by a dance.
In 1872 the Chiricahua were visited by
a special commissioner, who concluded
an agreement with Cochise, their chief,
to cease hostilities and to use his influendS
with the other Apache to this end. By
the autumn of this year more than 1,000
of the tribe were settled on the newly
established Chiricahua res., s. e. Ariz.
Cochise died in 1874, and was succeeded
as chief by his son Taza, who remained
friendly to the Goverhment; but the
killing of some settlers who had sold
whisky to the Indians caused an inter-
tribal broil, which, in connection with
the proximity of the Chiricahua to the
international boundary, resulted in the
abolishment of the reserN^ation against
their will. Camp Apache agency was es-
tablished in 1872, and in the year follow-
ing 1,675 Indiians were placed thereunder:
but in 1875 this agency was discontinued
and the Indians, much to their discontent,
were transferred to San Carlos, where
their enemies, the Yavapai, had also been
removed. For further information re-
garding the dealings of the Chiricahua
with the Government, see Apache.
The members of Geronimo's baii^,
which was captured in 1886 and sent by
the War Department in turn to Florida,
Alabama, and Oklahoma, are now at Ft
Sill, Okla., where they number 298.
The remaining Chiricahua are included
among the Apache under Ft Apache and
San Carlos agencies, Ariz. The Pinalefio
are that part of the Chiricahua formerly
residing in the Pinal mts.
Ai-aha.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 197, 1885.
Aiha.— Ibid. Apaches Broncos.— Steck in Cal.
Farmer, June 6, 1863 (Span.: 'wild ApacliesM.
Apaches Chirioaguis.— Mayer, Mexico, n, 38, 1858.
Broncos.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Feb. 14, 1862.
Oherecaquis.— Simpson in Rep. Sec. War, 57. 1860.
Oherioahui.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 94, 1870. Ohioa-
raguis.- Bonnycastle,Span. Am., 68, 1819. Chigni-
oagui.— Anza (1769) in Doc. Hist. Mex.. 4th s.,
II, 114, 1856. OhUcow.— Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1871, 3. 1872.
Ohileoago. - Ind. Aff. Rep., 122,1861. Chile Gowes.—
Ibid. , 506, 1865. ChiUeagua.— Ibid. . 1859, 836, 1860.
Chirioaguis. —Garcia (1769) in Doc. Hist. Mex.. 4th
8., II, 375, 1856. Chiricahni.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869,
223, 1870. Chiricahua.- White, MS. Hist, of Apa-
ches, B. A. E., 1875. Chir-i-ca-huans.— Hodge,
Arizona. 163, 1877. Ohirioahues.— Escudero, Not.
Estad. de Chihuahua, 212, 1834. Ohi-ri-ca-hui.—
Cremony, Life Among Apaches, 33,1868. Chirioa-
quis.— Ruxton, Adventures, 194, 1848. Chiri-
ouagi.— Stone in Hist. Mag., v, 166, 1861. Chiri-
guais.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 180. 1888.
Ohirikahwa.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 246, 1877. Chiri-
Siana.— Smet, Letters, 135, 1843. Chirooahue.—
arcia in Soc. Mex. Geog. Boletin, v, 314. 1861.
Cohila Apache.— Graves in Ind. Aff. Rep., 439, 1853.
Hava-a.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. Hay^ha.— Ibid.
(' live in the east *: so called by the White Moun-
tain Apache, because they formerly lived at Hot
Springs, N. Mex.). Heya.— Gatschet, Yuma-Spr.,
I, 370, 1883 (Apache name: 'below'). Hi-ar.—
White, M8. Hist, of Apaches, B. A. £., 1875 (so
called by other Apache: trans., ' lived away off*).
Pa *ltien ab p^nin.— Gatschet, MS. Isleta vocab.,
B. A. E., 1885 ( Isleta name) . Segatigenne.— Orozco
v Berra, Geog., 59, 1864. Bagetaen-n^— Escudero,
Not. Estad. de Chihuahua, 212, 1834. Southern
BULL. 30]
CTII8CA CHISKELIKBATCHA
285
Chirioahua.— Ind. Aff. Rep.. 175, 1875. Tehithi
dinne.— Gatschet, Apache MS., B. A. E., 1883 (Nav-
aho name) .
Chisca (possibly from Cherokee tsi^skwa
* bird,' i8i8kniSfhl * bird place. ^ — Mooney ).
The mountainous northern region of the
Cherokee in n. w. Georgia or n. e. Ala-
bama, in search of which men were sent
by De Soto in 1541 from the province of
Chiaha to look for copper and gold. It
seemingly received its name from a village
of the same name on an island in the
river of St Esprit (Coosa r.?), the inhab-
itants of which made a great deal of oil
from nuts. De Soto's troops remained
here 26 or 27 days. The Chisca of Gar-
cilasso de la V^ (Florida, 175, 1723) is
the Quizquiz of the other chroniclers of
De Soto's exj)edition, situated in n. w.
Mississippi, on Mississippi r. See Garci-
lasso de la Vega, Florida, 175, 1723;
Biedma in French, Hist. Coll. La., pt. ii,
101, 1850; Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
1900; Bourne, Narr. De Soto, i, 79, ii,
110, 1904.
Oheesoa.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 47, 1853.
Chiaea.— Bourne, Narr. of De Soto, i, 79, 117; ii,
110, 1904. Cisca.— La Salle Ira. 1680) in Margrv,
D<5c., II, 196 et seq., 1877.
Chiaadftt^j A Montagnais tribe, band,
or settlement about the Bay of Seven
Islands on the n. shoi-e of St Lawrence r.
where it enters the gulf. The name
appears to have been applied to a locality
and the people of that locality, as it is
stated in the Jesuit Relation of 1645 that
certain savages boasted of their ^^arlike
actions "at Chichedek, country of the
Bersiamites, where they had killed 7 sav-
ages, ' * probably Eskimo. In the Relation
of 1640 it is stated that in ascending the St
Lawrence, after passing the Eskimo, *'we
meet with the people of Chisedech and the
Bersiamites, two small nations of which
we have but slight knowledge. * ' Lescar-
botsays that in his time (1609) the name
of the river which enters into or near
the Bay of Seven Islands was changed
to Chi-sche-dec, an Indian appellation
(Hind). A Dutch map of 1621 names
the bay or locality Chichedec. It is pos-
sible, therefore, that the name applied
to the Indians, who seem to have been
closely connected with and possibly were
a part of the Bersiamite tribe, was that
of the river and referred only to a settle-
nient. The name Ouakouiechidek, used
in 1660 as that of a tribe in connection
with the Outabitibek (Abittibi), if in-
tended for the Chisedec would indicate a
locality in the distant n. As the designa-
tion or a people the name dropped from
history at an early date. (c. t. )
Ohiohedeo.— Dutch map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. CJoI.
Hist., 1, 1856. Chichedek.— Jes. Rel. 1646,37,1868.
Ohi8edeoh.— Ibid., 1640,34, 1868. OuakSieohidek.—
Ibid., 1660, 12. 1858, (same?). Wakouieohiwek.—
Ibid., Ill, index, 1858.
Chisels. Long, slender, celt-like imple-
ments of stone or hard varieties of bone,
with narrow cutting edge, and round,
rectangular, elliptical, or half -elliptical
in section. Those of stone, mainly pre-
historic, are rarely more than a few
inches in length. Some specimens are
largest at the top, gradually tapering to
the edge, but most of them decrease in
size in each direction from near the mid-
dle. Some have hammer marks on the
blunt end, others are polished at the top,
while a few are sharp at both ends. It is
probable that their primary intent was
for woodworking, though they are nu-
merous wherever steatite vessels were
made, and the marks of their
use are seen on the unfinished
product and on the worked sur-
faces of the q uarry face. These
soapstone cutting tools have
usually been flaked into the
desired form, the edge ojily
being carefully ground. In the
lower Ohio valley and in the
Southern states chisels are gen- stone chisel;
erally made of chert; toward a>^('-*)
the N., where glacial material is easily
procured, they are of diorite, syenite,
or other tough rock. Chisels of stone
were in common use among the wood-
working tribes of the N. W. coast, but
thes-e are now almost wholly superseded
by chisels of metal. While not so abun-
dant as celts (q. v.), from which they
can not always be distinguished, they
have practically the same distribution.
See Fowke in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896;
Holmes in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897;
Ran in Smithson. Cont., xxii, 1876.
(w. H. H. a. F. )
Chiserhonon. A former Canadian tribe
subordinate to theOttawa.—Sagard ( 1632),
Canada, iv, 1866.
Chishafoka ( *among the post oaks' ). A
former Choctaw town on the site of the
present citv of Jackson, Miss. — Brown in
Miss. Hist'Soc. Publ., iv, 445, 1902.
ChishnckB. One of the 8 Tillamook vil-
lages at the mouth of Tillamook r.,Oreg.,
in 1805.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii,
117,1814.
Chisi. A town in 1540 on a small river,
between Toalli and Altamaca, in e. Geor-
gia. The name seems to be intended for
Ochisi, but not the town of that name on
Chattahoochee r. It was entered by De
Soto's army in Mar., 1540.
Achese.— Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., ii, 138. 1850. Ohisi.— Biedma (1544)
m French, op. cit., 100.
Chiskatalofa (cJmki 'post oak,' talo/a
• town ' ) . A former Creek town on the w.
side of Chattahoochee r., 4 m. below
Wikaihlako, in Henry co., Ala.
Cheskitalowas.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 364, 1822.
Chuskee Tallafau.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1814), 163.
1837.
Chlskelikbatcha. A former Choctaw
town belonging to the Sixtowns dis-
trict, near Chicasawhay r., probably in
286
CHISKIA<' CHITSA
[ B. A. E.
Jasper co., Miss. (West Fla. map, at.
1775).
jl^ ^ Chiskiac. A tribe of the Powhatan
confederacy formerly living in York co.,
Va. They numbered about 200 in 1608.
At that time their principal village, of the
same name, was on the s. side of York
r., about 10 m. below the junction of the
Mattapony and Pamunkey. (j. m. )
ChiekiAM.— Boudinot. Star in the West, 126, 181('>.
Ohiakaet.— Smith (1629), Virginia, ii, 77, repr. 1819.
OhiakUok.— Ibid., i, 117. Kitkiaok.— Ibid., i, map.
Kiakiak.— Strachey (ro. 1612), Virginia, 36, 1849.
ChUnedinadinaye ( ' walnut' ) A clan or
band of the Pinal Covoteros ( Bourke in
Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi, 112, 1890), coor-
dinate with the Chiltneyadnaye clan of
the White Mountain Apache.
Cliisro. The Snow-bunting clan of the
Hopi of Arizona.
Toiaro winwti.— Fewkes in 19th Rt ^). B. A. E., 584,
1900 ( wiilivii = ♦ elan ' ). Toi'-aro wiin-wu.— Fewkes
in Am. Anthropr; vii, 406, 1894.
Ohitchakot. See Chechawkose.
Chithnt. Mentioned as a band associ-
ated with the Squaksin and Puyallup bf
Puget wl.. Wash.; not to Ik* confounded
with Chitwout, a synonym of Similka-
meen.
Chit-hut.— Simmons in Ind. Aff. Rop., '226, 1868.
Chitimachaj Choctaw : chuti^cooliing jx)t, '
mdshn * they possess ' : *they have cook-
ing vessels'). A tribe, forming the Chit-
imachan linguistic family, whose earliest
known habitat was the shores of Grand
lake, formerly Lakeof theShetima8ha,and
^ _ I ey the banks of Grand r. , La. Some 16 or 18
of the tribe were livingon Grand r. in 1881,
but the majority, about 35, lived at Charen-
ton, on the s. side of Bayou T^che, in St
Mary*8 parish, about 10 m. from the gulf.
The remnant resides in the same district,
but the present population is not known.
The name of these Indians for themselves
is Piintch-pinunkansh, *men altogether
red,' a designation apparently applieil
after the advent of the whites. The
Chitiniacha came into notice soon after
the French settled Louisiana, through
the murder by one of their men of the
missionary St Cosme on the Mississippi
in 1 706. This was followed by protracted
war with the French, who compelled them
to sue for peace, which was granted by
Bienville on condition that tne head of
the murderer be brought to him; this
done, peace was concluded. The tribe
then must have been reduced to a small
number of warriors, though Le Pa^e du
Pratz, who was present at the final cere-
mony, says they arrived at the meeting
place in many pirogues. Little is known
m regard to their customs. Fish and the
roots of native plants constituted their
foo<l, but later tney planted maize and
sweet potatoes. They were strict monoga-
mists, and though the women appear to
have had considerable authority in their
government, there were no indications of
totems or the gentile system among them.
The men wore their hair long, with a piece
of lead at the end of the queue, and tat-
tooed their arms, legs, and faces. The
noonday sun is said to have l>een their
principal deity. The dead were buried
m graves, and'after the flesh had decayed
the bones were taken up and reinterred.
Their villages or former settlements so far
as known were: Amatpan, Grosse Tete
Tchetin, Ilipinimtch, Kamenakshtchat,
Kushuh, Namukatsup, Nekunsisnis, Net-
pinunsh, Shoktangihanehetchinsh, Tcha-
tikutingi, Tchatkasitunshki, Tsakhtsin-
shup. Chitimacha villages were situated
also on the site of Donaldsonville, As-
cension parish, on the w. bank of the
Mississippi (here St Cosme was nnirdere<l
in 1706), and at the mouth of Bayou Lsi-
fourche. See Trans. Anthrop. Soc.Wash.,
II, 148, 1883. (a. 8. G.)
Ohetemaohaa. — Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol.
Soc., II. pt. 1, 77, 1848. Ohetimaohaa.— Gallatin in
Trans.Am.Antiq.S<)c.. 11,306. 1836. Ohitimachaa.—
Ibid., 114. Pa'nteh pinunkanah.— Gatschet in
Trans. Anthrop. Soc. Wash., ii, 150, 1883. Sheti-
maaha.— Ibid., 148. Shyoutemaoha.— Ibid., 150
(early French form). TohiklmahtL— Ibid. (Ali-
bamu name). Tchitiinachaa. -Le Page du Pratz,
Hist, de la Louisiane, i, 83, 1758. Tehoutymaoha.—
Gatschet, op. cit., 150 (early Frencn form).
Taehimiohaa.— Martin. Hist. La., i, 167, 1827 (men-
tioned wilh Chitimacha. but probably the same).
Ghitimachan Family. A linguistic fam-
ily consisting solely of the Chitimacha
tribe (q. v. ), from which it takes its name.
See Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 66, 1891.
Chititiknewas (Yokuts name). A for-
mer division of the Bankalachi that lived
on upper Deer cr., s. e. of Tulare lake,
Cal. (.\. L. K.)
Ohetienewaah.— Wessclls (18.'v3) in H.R Ex. Doc.
76. 34th Cong., 3d sess., 32. 1857.
Ohitklin's Yillage. A summer c>amp of
one of the Taku chiefs ( Koluschan familv )
named TcIitLen ( * big /<•///,' a bird ). 1*18
jxjople were there in 1880.— Petroff in
10th Census, Alaska, 82, 1884.
Chitlatamus. A Kuitsh village on lower
Umpqua r., Oreg.
Tci'-tla-ta'-moa. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
m, 231. 1890. "
Chitmonk. See Chipmunk.
Chitnak. A Yuit Eskimo village on the
s. shore of St I^wrence id., Bering sea.
Shetnak.— Elliott, Our Arct. Prov., map, 1886.
Shitnak.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899.
Chito (Marge' [people]). A Chot^taw
gens of the Watakihulata phratry. — Mor-
gan, Anc. Soc, 162, 1878.
Chitola. The nearly extinct Rattle-
snake clan of the Zufii.
Ohitola-kwe.— CiiahinfiT in 13th Kep. B. A. E.,
368, 1896 (llrMr=' people').
Chitsa ( refers to anything of a pale color;
specifically, *fair people'). One of the
three classes or castes into which the
Kutchakutchin are divided, the others
l^ing the Natesa and the Tangesatsa,
faintly representing, resi)ectively, "the
aristocracv, the middle classes, and the
poorer orders of civilized nations. * ' Mar-
BULL. 30]
CHITTO-FANNA-CHULA CHOCORUA
287
riage was not allowed within the class or
caste, however, and descent was in the
female line. — Kirbv in Smithson. Hep.
1864, 418. 1866; Hafdistv, ibid., 1866, 315,
1872.
Ohit-ohe-ah.— Joucs in Smithson. Rep. 1866, 326,
1872. Ohit-iA.— Kirby in Smithson. Rep. 1864.
418. 1865. Ghitaah.— Hardisty in Smithson. Rep.
1866, 315, 18?2. Ohit-Muifh.— Ibid. 'Etchisn-Kpet.—
Petitot, Trad. Ind. du Can. Nord-ouest, 14, 1ft, 1886.
Tohit-ehe«ah. — Jone.«*, ibid . . 826.
Chitto-Fanna^Cliala. See yeamathla.
Chiuchin. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Tavlor in
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 186:S.
Chiukak (*pike village'). A Kaviag-
mint village on the peninsula inclosing;
Golofnin bay, Alaska; pop. 15 in 1880.
Ohiokok.— Jackson. Reindeer in Alaska, map. 14n.
1894. Ohiookuk.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska.
11, 1884. Knecktakimut.— W. U. Tel. Exp., 1867,
quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901 (appa-
rently the same). Boooknk. — (^»ast Siirv. cnart
cited by Baker, ibid. Tohioukakmioute.— ZagOs-
kin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, IKftO.
Chintaiina {Chiu-taiimi). The Eagle
elan of Taos pueblo, N. Mex. ( f. w. h. )
Chiwere (* belonging to this place,' the
home people). A term employed by J.
0. Dorsey to designate a group of Siouan
tribes, including the Oto, Iowa, and Mis-
souri, for information regarding which,
see under their respective names. Con-
sult also Dorsey in I5th Rep. B. A. E.,
1897; McGee, ibid., and the writings by
Dorsey cited below.
•Oe'kiwere.— Dorsey in Bull. Philos. Soc. Wash.,
128, 1880. 'Oiwerc.— Ibid. Ookiwere.- Dorse v in
Am. Antiq., 313, 18«3 (misprint). Olwere.— Ibid,
(misprint). Teekiwere.— Dorsey in Am. Natur.,
H29, 1882. T09TAwtn.—Doney hi 3d Rep. B. A.
E., 211.188T. Tdwere.— Am. Natur., 829, 1882.
Ti-re'-wi.— Dorsey in Am. Antiq.. 168, 1879.
CMiha. The Ist Ponka half-tribe, com-
posed of 4 gentes.
Tei«^u.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,'228, 1897.
Ckishnwaslitage ( 'chizhu peacemaker' ).
The 15th Kansa gens, the 7th on the
Yata side of the tribal circle.
Peacemaker.— Dorsey in Am. Natur., 671,. Julv,
1885. Tc^u Wactage.— Ibid.
Chkungen. A Songish band at McNeill
bay, 8. end of Vancouver id.
Tek'ttngi'n.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
17, 1890.
Chlachaik. (iiven by Krause as a Ko-
luschan town occupied by the Tukden-
tan. Actually a summer camp on an
island called tii^xa, near Chichagof id.,
A-Iaskfl.
Ohlachi-ik.— Krause. Tlinkit Ind., 118, 1885.
Chlorite.— A soft, greenish, often black-
ish, mineral, related to the micas, nmch
used by the aborigines for ornaments,
ceremonial objects, and pipes. When
polished it is in many cases not readily
distinguished from steatite or soapstone
save by its somewhat greater hardness.
It occurs as a secondary mineral result-
ing from alteration of other species, as
biotite, pyroxene, amphil)olite, etc. Soc
Stone-fwrh (w. h. h.)
Ghnagmint ( ' coast |)eople ' ) . An Alas-
kan Eskimo tribe occupying the shore of
Pastol bav, the Yukon delta, and both
banks of Yukon r. as far as Razboinski,
Alaska. They hunt the seal and l)elnga,
trap mink and muskrat, have lish in
abundance, eggs, and berries, and no lack
of driftwood; vet they often suffer priva-
tions, and their carelessly built villages
are sometimes demolished by freshets.
Subtribes are Ankachagmiut, Chukchage-
miut, Koshkogemiut, Teletagmiut, and
Ukagemiut. Their villages are Aiachag-
iuk, Aimgua, Alexief, Andreafski, Anka-
chak, Apoon, Ariswaniski, Avnulik,Chat-
inak, Chefoklak, Chukchuk, Claikehak,
Fetkina, Ikuak, Ingichuk, Kanig, Kashu-
tuk, Khaik, Kochkok, Komarof, Kotlik,
Kusilvak, Kwiahok, Kwikak, Nigiklik,
Ninvok, Nokrot, Nunapithlugak, Onu-
ganuk, Pastol iak, Pastolik, I&zlK)inski,
Ribnaia, Staria Selenie, Stank, Takshak,
Tiatiuk, Tlatek, and Uglovia. The trilw
numbered (^21 in 1890.
Agulmiut.—Worman quoted by Dall in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol,. 1. 17. 1877. Kancjulit,— Erman uuute<l bv
Dall, ibid. Kaniulit.— ZagoHkin quotea by Dall.
ibid. Premortka.— Dall in Pn)c. A. A. A. S., 267,
1869 (Russian: ' i»eonle by the sea'). Premoniki.—
Dall in Cont. X. A. Ethnol.. i, 17, 1877. Primoeke.—
WhymptT, Trav. in Ala.ska, 235,1868. Prinotki.—
Raymond in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 693, 187(>.
Tsohnagmeuten.— Richardson. Art't. Expt»d., i,
370, is.'il. Taohnagi^juten.— Holniberg, Ethnol.
Skizz., 5. 188.'>. Tsohnagmiiten.— Wraugell. Ethnol.
Naeh.. 122. 1839. Tsnagmyut.— Turner. MS. Tnalit
vooab., B. A. E. (= 'people of the outer edge,
dwelling farthest seawanr ).
Cliobaabish. A small band of Salish,
subordinate to Skagit, on Swinomish res..
Wash. ; mentioned 1 in Pt Elliott treat v of
1855; pop. 88 in 1870.
Che-baah-ah-bi»h.— Ross in Ind. Aff. Rep., 17, 1870.
Cho-ba-abish.— Mallet in ibid., 198, 1877. Oho-
bah-ah-bi»h.— U. S. Ind. Treat., 378, 1873.
Chockrelatan ( ThHutn/hitii-tmnie^ * peo-
ple away from the forks' ot the stream).
A former village of the Mishikhwutme-
tunne near the forks of Cociuille r., Oreg.
Their lan<ls were drained t)y the wat<»rs
of that 8tn»am, and the villagers were
separated by mountain ])arriers from all
neighl)ors except the Kusan, living on
the coast.
Chak-re-le-a-ton.— Kautz, MS. Toutouten census,
B. A. E., 1855. Ohookrelatan.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, June 8, 1860. Ohockreletan.— Hchoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, vi. 702, 1857. Choo-re-le-a-tan.— Par-
rish in Ind. AflF. Rep. I8.>1, 49.S 1855. gitc'a-rxi'-
li-i' ^unnj'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
232. 1890 (= ' people away from the forks * ). Okre-
letan.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribe.s vi, 702, 1857.
Choconikla. A Seminole town, of about
60 warriors in 1820, on the w. side of
Apala<'hicola r., contiguous to Ataphulga,
on Little r. , Decatur co. , Ga. ( a. s. (i. )
Oho-oo-niokla.— Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War.
307, 1822.
Chocorna. The legendary last survivor
of a small tril)e of Indians who, previous
to 17<><), inhabited the region about the
town of Barton, N. 11. He was pur-
288
CHOCTAW
[B. A. IL
sued by a white hunter to the mountain
which bears his name and driven over
the cliffs or shot to death. Before dying
he is reported to have cursed the English
and their cattle, and to this is attributed
the fact that none of these animals thrive
in Burton (Drake, Aboriginal Races, 285,
1880). It is possible that the chief has
been conjured up to account for the name
of the mountain. ( a. f. c. )
Choctaw (possibly a corruption of the
Spanish rfuUOy *flat' or * flattened,' al-
luding to the custom of these Indians of
flattening the head). An important tribe
of the Muskhogean stock, formerly occu-
pying middle and 8. Mississippi, their ter-
ritory extending, in their most flourishing
days, for some distance E. of Tombigbee
r., probably as far as Dallas co., Ga.
ALLEN WRIGHT — CHOCTAW
Ethnically they belong to the Choctaw
branch of the Muskhogean family, which
included the Choctaw, Chickasaw, Huma,
and their allies, and some small tribes
which formerly lived along Yazoo r.
The dialects of the members of this
branch are so closely related that they
may be considered as practically identical
(GatBchet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 53, 1884).
The earliest notice of these Indians is
found in the De Soto narratives for 1540.
The giant Tascalusa, whom he met in his
march down Coosa valley and carried to
Mauvila, was a Choctaw chieftain; and
the natives who fought the Spaniards so
fiercely at this town oelonged to a closely
related tribe. When the French, about
the beginning of the 18th century, began
to settle colonies at Mobile, Biloxi, and
New Orleans, the Choctaw came early into
friendly relations with them and were
their allies in their wars against other
Indian tribes. In the French war on the
Natchez, in 1730, a large body of Choctaw
warriors served under a French oflScer.
They continued this friendship until the
English traders succeeded in drawing over
to the English interest some of the e.
Choctaw towns. This brought on a war
between them and the main body, who
still adhered to the French, which contin-
ued until 1763. The tribe was constantly
at war with the Creeks and Chickasaw.
After the French had surrendered their
American possessions to Great Britain,
in 1763, and to some extent previously
thereto, members of the tribe began to
move across the Mississippi, where, in
1780, Milfort (M^moire, 95, 1802) met
some of their bands who were then
at war with the Caddo. About 1809 a
Chocrtaw village existed on Wichita r.,
and another on Bayou Chicot, Opelousas
parish, La. Morse (1820) says there were
1,200 of them on the Sabine and Neches
rs., and about 140 on Red r., near Pecan
point (Rep. to Sec. War, 373, 1822). It
IS stated by some historians that this
tribe, or parties of it, participated in the
Creek war; this, however, is emphatic-
all v denied by Halbert (Creek War of
1813 and 1814, 124, 1895), who was
informed in 1877 by some of the oldest
members of the tribe that the Choc-
taw manifested no hostility toward the
Americans during this conflict. A small
band of perhaps 30 were probably the
only Choctaw with the Creeks. The
larger part of those in Mississippi began
to migrate to Indian Ter. in 1832, hav-
ing ceded most of their lands to the
United States in various treaties (Royce,
Indian Land Cessions, 18th Rep. B. A. E.,
The Choctaw were preeminently the
agriculturists of the southern Indians.
Though brave, their wars in most in-
stances were defensive. No mention is
made of the ** great house,*' or "the
square,*' in Choctaw towns, as they ex-
isted in the Creek communities, nor of
the busk (q. v.). The game of chunkey
(q. v. ), as well as the ball play (q. v. ), was
extensively practised by them. It was
their custom to clean the bones of the
dead before depositing them in boxes or
baskets in the bone-houses, the work be-
ing performed by ** certain old gentle-
men with very long nails," who allowed
their nails to grow long for this purpose.
The people of this tribe also followed the
custom of setting up poles around the
new graves, on wnich they hung hoops,
wreauis, etc. , to aid the spint in ite ascent.
As their name seems to imply, they
practised artificial head flattening.
BULL. aOl
CHOCTAW CAPITALE
289
The population of the tribe when it
first came into relations with the French,
about the year 1700, has been estimated
at from 15,000 to 20,000. Their number
in 1904 was 17,805, exclusive of 4,722
Choctaw freed men ( negroes ) . These are
all under the Union agency, Ind. Ter.
To these must be added a small number
in Mississippi and I^ouisiana.
There are, or at least were formerly,
several dialects sjioken in different sec-
tions; these, however, differed so little
that they have not been considered
worthy of special mention. The small
Muskhogean tribes known as Mobilian,
Tohome or Tomez, Tawasa, Mugidasha,
Acolapissa, Huma, and Conshac (a. v.),
on the gulf coast of Mississippi ana Ala-
bama, are sometimes called Choctaw, but
the Choctaw proper had their villages
inland, on the upper courses of theChicka-
sawhay. Pearl, and Big Black rs. and the
w. affluents of the Tombigbee. At least
in later times they were distinguishetl
into three sections, each under its mingo
or chief. The western division was called
Oklafalava, *the long people,' and con-
sisted CI small, scattered villages; the
northeastern, Ahepatokla (Oypatukla),
* potato-eating people,' and the'southeast-
ern district came to be called Oklahannali,
*Sixtowns,' from the name of the domi-
nant subdivision. The people of these
two latter districts lived in large towns for
mutual defense against their constant
enemies the Creeks, (iatschet gives Cobb
Indians as the name of those Choctaw
settled w. of Pearl r.
According to Morgan (Ancient Society,
99, 162, 1877) the Choctaw were divided
into two phratries, each including 4
gentes, as follows: A, Kushapokla (Di-
vided people): 1, Kushiksa (Reed); 2,
I^wokla; 3, Lulakiksa; 4, Linoklusha;
B, Watakihulata (Beloved people): 1,
Chufaniksa (Beloved people); 2, Isku-
lani (Small i)eople); 3, Chito (^ Large i>eo-
ple); 4, Shakchukla (Crayfisn people).
Besides these, mention is made of a gens
name<i Urihesahe (Wright in Ind. Aff.
Rep. 1843, 348), which has not been
identified. Morgan's list is probably far
from complete.
Following are names of Choctaw vil-
lages: Alamucha, Alloou Loanshaw, Ava-
nabi. Bayou Chicot, Bishkon, Bissasha,
Bogue Toocola Chitto, Booctolooee, Bouc-
fouca, Boutte Station, Cabea Hoola, Ca-
hawba Old Towns, Cheponta's Village,
Chicasawhay , Chinakbi, Chishafoka, Chis-
kelikbatcha, ("homontokali, Chooca Hoo-
la, Chunkey, Chunkey Chitto, Coatraw,
Coila, Concha, Conchachitou, Concha
Consapa, Conchatikpi, Coosha, Coue-
chitou, Cushtusha, Cutha Aimethaw,
Cuthi Uckehaca, East Abeika, Ebita Poo-
colo Chitto, Ebita Poocolo Skatane, Es-
cooba, Ktuck Chukke, Faluktabunnee,
Fuketcheepoonta, Haanka UUah, Heito-
towa, Hoola-tassa, Hyukkeni, Ikatchi-
ocata, Imongalasha, Imongalasha Ska-
tane, InkillisTamaha, Kaffetalaya, Lukfa,
Lushapa, ^lahewala, Nashwaiya, Okaal-
takala, Okachippo, Okacoopoly , OkahuUo,
Okakapassa, Okalusa, Oka|K)olo, Oka-
talaya, Okhatatalaya, Olitassa, Cony,
Oskelagna, Osuktalaya, Otakshanabe,
Pant he, Pineshuk, Pooscoostekale, Poosh-
apukanuk, Sapa Chitto, Sapeesea, Sche-
kaha, Shanhaw, Shukhata, Shuqualak,
Skanapa, Sukinatchi, Tala, Taliepataua,
Talpahoka, Teeakhaily Ekutapa, Tombig-
bee, Tonicahaw, West Abeika, Wia Ta-
kali, Yagna Shoogawa, Yanatoe, Yazoo,
Yazoo Skatane, Yowani. ( j. r. s. c. t. )
Ani'-Tsa'ta. Mooney in 19th Rep, B. A. K., 509,
19U0 (Cherokee name; sing. Tsa'ta). Qa'-ti.— Dor-
sey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (Osage name).
Chacatos.— Bareia, Eiistivo, 313, 1723. Chaoktawt.—
Jefferson (1781), Notes, 144, 1825. Chaotah.—
Ratinesque, >ni. Nations, i. 241, 1836. Chao-
tanys.— Ann. Propagation de la Foi, li, 380, 1841.
Chactos.— Parraud, Hist. Kentucke, 111, 1785.
Chactows.— Jefferys, French Dom., i, 153, 1761.
Cha'hta. — CJatsehet in American Antiq., IV, 76,
1881-82. Chaktaws.— N. Y. Stat, at Large, Treaty
of 1808, VII, 98, 1846. Chaltas.— Coxe, Caro-
lana, map, 1741 (misprint). Chaqueta.— Iberville
(1700) in Margrv. Dec, iv, 463, 1880. Cha-
quitas. — Ibid., 419. Chataw. — Rogers, North
America, 204, 1765. Chat-Kas.— Du Pratz, Hist.
Ui., II, 216, 1758. Chatkawt. — Jeflfery.s, French
Dom., I. 165, 1761. Chattaes. — Coxe, Carolana,
map, 1741. Chattas.— Ibid., 25. Chattoes.— Ibid.,
22. Chawetas.— Perrin dii Lac, Voy., 368. 1805.
Chectaws.— Morse, N. Am., 218, 1776. Chicktaws.—
Rogers, North America, 203,1765. Chiotaws.— Ibid.,
238. Chocataus.— Disturnell, map M^jico. 1846.
Chocktawt.— Kllicott. Jour., 35, 1797. Chocta.—
Latham (1844) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond.. i,
160, 1848. Choctaughs.— Catesby, Nat. Hist. Car.,
II, xi, 1743. Choctaw.— French writer (ca. 1727)
in Shea, Cath. Missions. 429, 1855. Chootot.—
Domenech, Deserts, n, 193, 1860. Choktah. —Bar-
ton, New Views, 1, 1798. Choktaut.— Am. Pioneer,
I. 408. 1842. Choktow.— Boudinot, Star in the
West, 184. 1816. Chouaotas.— Martin, Hist, of La.,
I, 249, 1827. Chukawt.— Boudinot, op. eit., 126.
Flat Heads.— Jeflfervs. French Dom., 135, map,
1761. riate.— Bart ram. Travels, 515, 1791. Hen-
ne'sh.— Gatschet, inf'n ( Arapaho name). Nabug-
eindebaig.— Tanner, Narrative, 316, 1830, ('flat
heads': the name given by the Ottawa to a tribe
♦*said to have livtni below the Illinois r."; proba-
bly Choctaw). Sanakiwa.— Gatschet, inf n (Chey-
enne name: 'feathers sticking up above the
ears'). ShaokUut.— Pen hallow (1726) in N. H.
Hist. Coll., Ists., 79, 1824. Shocktaus.— Niles (1760)
in Mass. Hist. Coll., 4th s., 332, 1861. Ta-qta.—
Dorsey. Kwapa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1891 (Kwana
name). Toa-qta a^-ya-di.- Dorsey, Biloxi MS.
Diet., B. A. E., 1892 (one of the Biloxi names).
Tca-qta ha^-ya.— Ibid, (another Biloxi name).
Tca-ta.— Ibid., Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882
(Kansa name). Tchaotas.— Charlevoix, Voy. to
N. A.. II. 210, 1766. Tchataket.- Margr>', D^c, H,
197, 1877. Tohiactas.— Bienville (1708J in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist , IX, 925, 1855. Tetca Platea.— Pic-
quet letter (1752) in Parkman, Montcalm and
Wolfe, II. 417, 1884. T»ah-tii.— Grayson, Creek MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1885 (Creek name). Tsaxta.--
Miiller, Grundriss der Sprachwisaenschaft, ii, pt.
1, 232, 1882. Tsohaktaer.— Ally (1712), Historic der
Reisen, xvi, 1758. Tubbies. — Am. Notes and
Queries, viii, 281, Apr. 16, 1892.
Choctaw Capitale. On a French map of
1777 this name appears on an affluent of
Pascagoula r.. Miss., e. of Yowani and
Chicasawhay. On Philippeaux's map
Bull. 3(
19
290
CHOGSET CHOMAATH
[ B. A. E.
of the English colonies in 1781 it is loca-
ted w. of Yowani. Possibly identifiable
with Inkillis, q. v.
Ghaetaw Gapitaleo.— Btirtrum, Voy., i, map, 1799
(misprint).
Chogset. A New England name of the
cunner, blue perch, or burgall (CtenoUi'
brvLs csprvUeus) . Gerard (Sun, N. Y., July
30, 1895 J says the word means *it is
flabby*, in Chippewa shagim. Trumbull
(Natick Diet, 30, 1903) derives chogset,
in Petjuot cachatixet, from chohchohkesit
in the Massachuset dialect, signifying
* spotted' or * striped,* which is a much
preferable etymology. (v. f. c. )
Chohalaboohhulka. A former Seminole
town on the w. side of Suwanee r., al)Ove
its junction with the Alapaha, in Hamil-
ton co., Fla.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823),
19th Cong., 27, 1826.
Choinimni (pi. Chuyenmani). A Mari-
posan tribe on Kings r., at or near the
mouth of Mill cr., Cal. Powers calls
.% them Chainimaini and says thev lived
^^ "yX downstream from the Tisechu and above
the Iticha. Only a few families are left.
Chai-nim'-ai-ni.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
Ill, 370, 1877. Chewenee.— Gatschet in Mag. Am.
Hist, 158, 1877. Choemimneet.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, June 8, 1860. Gho-e-aem-nee. — Royce in
18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 1899. Ohoe-nim-ne. -Mer-
riam in Science, xix, 915, June 17, 1904. Oho-e-
aim-nees.— Ind. AiT. Rep., 223, 1851. Ghoe-wem-
net.— Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d
Cong., Ist seas., 23, 1852. Ghoo-aeiiuies.~Ibid., 22.
Ghow-«-niin-ne.— We8sell8(1858) in H. R. Ex. Doc.
76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 31, 1857. Ghunemmet.—
Henley in Ind. Aff. Rep., 511, 1854.
Choinok. A small Mariposan tiibe,
nearly extinct, which formerly inhabited
the locaHty just s. of where the town of
Visalia now stands, in Tulare co., Cal.
Gho-e-ne«a.— Barbour (1852) in Sen, Ex. Doc. 4,
32d Ccmg., spec, sess., 253, 1853. Gho-e-nuoo.—
Ibid., 254. Ghoinoc.— (}arc6s (1775-76), Diary, 289,
1900. Ghoinook.— WcssellH (1853) in H. R. Ex.
Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess , 32. 1857. Ghoi-nuek.—
Rovce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 1899. Ghoi-
nuck». -Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61,32d
Cong., Ist sess.. 22, 1852.
Chokatowela (* blue spot in the middle ' ) .
A band of the Brul^ Teton Sioux.
Ghoke-tar-to-womb.— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 34,
1806 ( probably synonvmous) . 6oka-towela.— Dor-
sey in 15th Rep. B. A. fe., 218,1897. Tcoka-towela.—
Ibid.
Chokishgna. A former Gabrielefio ran-
cheria in Los Angeles co., Cal., at a local-
ity later called Jaboneria.
Ghokiana.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860.
Ohokiahgna.— Ibid.. June 11, 1861.
Chokoukla. A former Seminole town
on the w. side of Apalachicola r., 4 m.
below the forks, in Florida. Mulatto
King was chief in 1823.— H. R. Ex. Doc.
74, 19th Cong., 27, 1826.
Chokuyem. The name probably applied
originally to a single village somewhere
in Petaluma valley, Sonoma co., Cal. It
gained a wider significanct>, l)eingused by
(iibbs to designate all the Indians in the
region from San Rafael mission x. to
Santa Rosa and e. to Suscol, and by others
in a still broader sense as the name of a
division of what they termed the 01a-
mentke, and comprising all the Indians
in Petaluma and Sonoma valleys. This
latter broad si^ificance is probably due
to the association at Sonoma mission of
the original Chokuyem people with those
from various other villages, (s. a. b.)
Ghooouyem.— Latham (1853) in Proc. Philol. Soc.
Lond. , VI, 83, 1864. Gho-kn-yen.— Powers in Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., iii, 195, 1877. Petaluma.— Taylor
in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. Fetlenum.— Ibid.
Toho-ko-yem. — Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
III, 421, 1853. Tshokoyem.— Latham in Trans.
Philol. Soc. Lond., 1866.
Cholious. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Inez mission, Cal. — Taylor m
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Cholocco Litabixee (Chu-'ldko ili-tapiksi
'horse's flat foot.' — A. S. G.). A former
Upper Creek village on a bend of Talla-
poosa r., Ala., in the river bottom, where,
on Mar. 27, 1814, the defeat of the Red-
stick party took place at the battle of the
Horseshoe. — Pickett, Hist. Ala., ii, 341,
1851.
Gholosoc. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863.
Gholovone. A tribe or group of tribes
constituting a portion of the Mariposan
family, inhabiting San Joaquin valley,
Cal., and occupying a strip of territory
along the e. bank of San Joaquin r. in the
vicinity of Stockton, from the Tuolumne
to about Calaveras r. They were thus
separated by Moquelumnan tribes from
the main body of the family farthers.
Little is known about them, and they are
probably extinct. A Yokuts vocabulary
(Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 571,
1877), from Takin or Dents Ferry on
Stanislaus r., at the foot of the Sierra,
may l)e from Cholovone territory. The
following divisions or subtribes of the
Cholovone are mentioned: Chupcan, Sa-
wani, Yachikamni, Yachimese, and
Yukolumni. The following are men-
tioned as Cholovone villages: Bantas,
Heluta, Hosmite, Khulpuni, Mitutra,
Pashashe, Takin, Tammakan, and Tawi.
Somewhat doubtful are Lakisumne and
Tuolumne, which may have been Mo-
quelumnan.
Cholobone.— Pinart, Yokuta MS., B. A. E., 1880.
Gholovone.— Ibid. Tohalabones.— Chamisso in
Kotzebue Voy., iii, 51, 1821. Toholoones.— Ban-
croft, Nat. Races, i, 453, 1874 (misquoted from
Chamisso). Toholovonet.— Chamisso, op. cit.
Cholapaka. A Timuquanan town in n.
Florida, visited by De Soto's troops in
Aug. , 1539, before reaching Aquacalecuen.
They spoke of it as a lilla fartOj a town of
plenty, because they foun^ an abundance
of Indian com there. — Gentl. of Elvas
(1557) in French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 131,
1850.
Chomaath (Tci/nidath), A sept of the
Toquart, a Nootka tribe. — Boas in 6th
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 32, 1890.
BULL. 30]
CHOMCHADILA CHORRUCO
291
Ghomohadila ( * pitch-pine ' — Powers; or
* white-pine ridge * — Kroeber ) . A former
Pomo village on the mesa s. w. of Calpella,
Mendocino co. , Cal.
Olu»am43hft-dl'-l« rimo.—PowerH in Coiit. N. A.
Ethnol., Ill, 155, 1877.
Chomonohonaniste. A name given on
several maps as that of a tribe formerly
living N. w. of L. St John, Quebec. Prob-
ably a Montagnais band or settlement.
QhcmonchoTaiiiitot. — Esnaata and Rapilly map,
1777. ^omonehonanistet.— Bellin map, 1755.
OhoaKmoouaaistes. — Lotter map, ca. 1755. Ohomo-
Behonanistos.— Lattr^ map, 1784.
Chomontokali (shomo-takalij ' hanging
moss ' ) . A former town of the Oy patukla
or northeastern division of the Choctaw,
consisting of 8 hamlets, with garden
patches intervening, extending k. and
w. about 2 m. and about i m. in width;
situated between two head-streams of
Black Water cr., in Kemper co., Miss.
In 1830 the residence of Nita Homma,
* Red Bear,* was in the third hamlet from
the w.. and al)out 1,200 yds. s. of the site
of his nouse is a mound al>out 12 ft. high.
The town was on the trail that extended
B. and w. from Imongolasha to Haan-
kaulla. — Ilalbert in Miss. Hist. Soc.
Publ., VI, 418, 1902.
Ohomontakali.— Romans, Fla. , map, 1775. Ohomon-
tokali.— West Fla. map, ca. 1775. Bhomo Takali.—
Halbert, op. cit.
Chonaoate. — A Huichol settlement at the
K. border of their territorv, in the Sierra
de los Huicholes, Jalisco, Mexico. — Lum-
holtz, Unknown Mex., ii, 16, map, 1902.
Chonakera. The Black Bear gens of
the Winnebago.
Bear.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 157, 1877. Black bear.—
Doney, MS. Winnebago vocab., B. A. E., 1878.
Hone'-cha'-da. —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 157. 1877.
Ho>tc' i-ki'-ka-ra'-toa-da.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B.
A. E., 240, 1897 ('they who call themselves after
the black bear^). Teo'-na-ke-rft. — Ibid, (archaic
name).
Ghongaiketon. A division of the Sisse-
ton Sioux, identified bv Riggs as the Lac
Ttaverse band; possibly the same as the
Sisseton proper of Pike; applied by early
writers to the whole tribe and interpreted
Wolf or Dog nation, though now recog-
nized as a form of the wora Sisseton.
Ohoncaskabet.— Barcia, Ensayo, 288, 1723. Ghon-
nakaUon.— Hennepin quoted by Neill in Minn.
Hist. Coll. , 1, 257, 1872. Ohoagaskethoa.- Hennepin
quoted by Shea, Early Voy. Mim., Ill, 1861 . Ohon-
nudtetoB.— Hennepin, New Discov., 185, 16d8.
Ohwigonaceton. — Neill. op. cit., 260 (misprint).
OhoafOQMetoa.— Oarver, Trav., 80, 1778. Ohonkat-
katoawan.— Williamson quoted by Neill. op. cit,
260 (interpreted 'dwellers in a fort' ana applied
to the Sisseton of L. Traverse). Ohonacaakaby.-
Hennepin, New Discov^ map, 1698. Ohoufaaka-
beaa.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 80,
1854. ObonffaaketoB. —La Salle ( 1679-81 ) in Margry ,
D4c., I. 481, 1876. Oaonfaafaba.— Coxe, Carolana,
map, 1741 (misprint}. Oonkaaketonwaii.— Riggs,
Dakota Gram, and Diet., introd., ix, 1852.
Chongyo. The Pipe clan of the Piba
(Tobacco) phratry of the Hopi.
looa-o.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1S91.
TooA wun-wii.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii,
406, 1894 {wUn-vm = * clan ' ).
Chonodote (perhaps <.vo/iHodo<<', ' 'where
a spring issues.* — Hewitt). A former
Cayuga settlement located on Machines
map of Sullivan^s expedition (Conover,
M8., B. A. E. ) on the e. side of Cayuga
lake, a few miles s. of the present Cayuga,
N. Y. It was prolmbly destroyed by
Sullivan in 1779.
Chonque. Probably a Choctaw band on
Yazoo r.. Miss., below the Tioux, in the
17th eenturv. See Chunkey.
Ghenkua.- Mckenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, iii.
80, 1854. Ghongue.— Coxe, Carolana, 12, 1741.
Chonque.— Ton ti (1690) in French, Hist. Coll. La.,
82, 1846.
Ghooahlitsh. A former Samish settle-
ment in the canoe passage e. of Hidalgo
id., N. w. Wash.
Ohoo-ah-Utah.— Gibbs, MS. no. 248, B. A. £.
Ghooca Hoola {chuka * house,* * lodge,*
hullo * beloved ' ) . A former Choi'taw set-
tlement on the N. side of Sukenatcha cr.,
l^etween the mouths of Running Tiger
and Straight crs. , in the n. part of Kemper
Co., Miss. — Halbert in Miss. Hist. ^oq. ^
l^lbl., VI, 425, 1902.
Chooca Eoola.— Romans, Florida, map, 1775.
Ghooka-hoola.— Ibid, 310.
Choppatee's Village. A former Miami
village on the w. bank of St Joseph r., a
few miles from Ft Wayne, Allen co., Ind.
Named after a chief who resided there.
The tract was granted to J. B. Boure, an
interpreter, by treaty of Oct. 23, 1826.
Ghoptank. Apparently a tribe consist-
ing of 3 subtribes — the Ababco, Hutsa-
wap, and Tequassimo — fonnerly living
on Choptank r. in Maryland. In 1741
they were given a reserve near Secretary
cr., on the s. side of Choptank r., in Dor-
chester CO. , on the Eastern shore, where
a few of mixed Indian and negro blood
still remained in 1837. See Bozman,
Maryland, i, 115, 1837.
Chorofa (*bird'). A clan of the Apo-
hola phratry of the ancient Timucua of
Florida.— Pareja (1614) quoted by Gat-
schetinProc. Am. Philos. Soc., xvii, 492,
1878.
Ghoromi. A Costanoan village formerly
situated near Santa Cruz mission, Cal. —
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860.
Chorruco. A tribe, formerly on the
Texas coast, to whom Cabeza' de Vaca
fled from the Coaque with whom he had
lived nearlv a year after shipwreck on
Malhado id. in 1528. The people, he
said, took their name from the woods in
which they lived. He stayed with this
tribe about 6 years, traveling and trading
with others in the vicinity and inland.
The region was probably the home of the
Karankawan family at that time. The
Chorruco are now extinct. See Gatschet,
Karankawa Indians, Peabody Museum
Pai>ers, i,'46, 1891. (a. c. f.)
Carruoo.— Harris, Voy. and Trav., i, 802, 170.\
Oharruoo. — Cabeza de Vaca, Smith trans., 53, 1851.
2^)2
OHOSRO CHOWCHILLA
[b. a. e.
Chorruco. — Ibid. .84. Chorucoo. — Smith, Cabezadc
Vaca, index, 1871. Ohoruioo.— Latham, Elem.
Com p. Philol., 466, 1862.
Chosho. A Chunia^han village formerly
on Santa Cruz i<l., Cal., probably e. of
Prisoner's harbor.
Too>o6. — Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab.,B.
A. E., 1884.
Ghosro. The Bluebird clan of the Hopi.
Choro. — Dorsey and Voth, MishonKUovi Ceremo-
nies, 175, 1902, Chorzh.— Voth, Omibi Summer
Sna ke Ceremon y, 283, l\m. Chorzh-namu. —Voth ,
Trad, of the Hopi, 37, 1905. Tco'-ro wiin-wu.—
Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 404, 1894 {wiin-ivii
= 'clan*). Tcosro winWa.— Fewkes in 19th Rep.
B. A. E., 584, 1900. Tco'-zir.— Stephen in 8th Rep.
B. A. E., 38, 1891 (given as the Jay elan).
Ghotanksofkee {tchat aksofka * preci-
pice'). A town situated 1 m. s. \v. of
Eufaula, in the Creek Nation, Ind. Ter.
(H.R. Doc. 80, 27th Cong., 3d sess., 8,
1843). In the old Creek country there
waa formerly a settlement of the same
name, probably near Abikudshi, e. of
upper Coona r., Ala. (a. s. g. )
Ghoupetoulas. A village formerly on
the left bank of the Mississippi, 2 or 3
leagues above New Orleans; spoken of
by Penicaut in 1 718 as old and apparently
abandoned. The name of the people,
who were j)OKsibly of Choctaw affinity, is
perpetuated in that of a street in New
Orleans. (a. s. «.)
Chapitoulas.— Dumont. La., i, 13, 1753. Choupi-
toulas.— P<:'nicaut (1718) in Freneh, Hist. C.41.
La., 141, 1869. Tchoupitoulas.— French, Hist. Coll.
La., 111,59, note, 1851.
Ghoutikwnchik (Pima: Tcdmk Wu^tctk,
'charcoal laying'). A former village of
the Maricopa, in s. Arizona, which was
abandoned by its inhabitants on their
removal down the Gila to their j)re8ent
location below Gila crossing. It was
then occupied by the Pima, who in turn
abandoned it.— Russell, MS., H. A. E.,
16, 1902.
Ghowanoc ( Algonquian : HhauHn'^ 'south' ;
HhairumK)'^ 'they of the south,* 'southern-
ers.*— W. J. ). A tribe formerly living on
Chowan r.,N. e. N. C, about the junc-
tion of Meherrin and Nottoway rs. In
1584-85, when first known, they were the
leading tribe in that region. Two of
their villages at that time were Ohanoak
and Maraton, and they j>robably occupied
also Catoking and Metocaum. Ohanoak
alone was said to have 700 warriors. They
gradually dwindled away l)efore the
whites, and in 1701 were reduced to a sin-
gle vdlage on Bennetts cr. They joined in
the Tuscarora war against the whites in
1711-12, and at its close the remnant, esti-
mated at about 240, were assigned a small
reservation on Bennetts and Catherine
crs. In 1820 they were supposed to be
extinct. In addition to the settlements
named, the Chowanoc also occupied Ra-
inushonok. . (J. m.)
Chawanock.— Barlow (1584) in Smith (1629), Vir-
ginia, I, 84, repr. 1819. Chawanook.— Oreenville
(1585) in Hawks, N. C, i, 112, 1859. Chawoa-
ack».— Mass. Hist. Soe. Coll., 4th s., IX, 15, 1871.
Chawonette.— Lane (1586) in Smith (1629), Vir-
ginia, I, 88, repr. 1819. Chawonoaek.— Ibid., 87,
90. Chawonock.— Ibid. Chawonoks.— Ibid. Oha-
woM.— Dutch map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
1, 1856. Chawoon.— Home, map (1666) in Hawks,
N. C, II, 1858. Ohawwonock*.— Smith (1629), qp.
eit., I, 75, repr. 1819. Chawwonoke.— Pots, ibid.,
230. Ohoan.— Doe of 1653 in N. C. Rec, 1, 17, 1886.
Choanitts.— Liine (1586) in Hakluyt, Voy., iii, 314,
repr.1810. Chowah.— Latham, Elem.Comp.Philol.,
466, 1862. Chowan.— Doc. of 1663 in N. C. Kec, 1, 54.
1886. Chowane.— Ibid., 55. Chowanoake.— Doc. of
1707, ibid., 657. Chowanoct.— Jefferson, Notes,
129, 18*25. Chowanok.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vii, 1848.
Chowanooke.— Strachey (m. 1612), Virginia, 148,
a849. Chowou.— Lawson (1710), Hist. Car.. 863,
repr. 1860(misprintforChuwon). Chuwon. — Ibid.,
383. Shawan. — Lederer ( 1 670) i n Ha w k s, N . C. , 1 1 ,
45, 1858 (used as a synonym for Roanoke r.)
Chowchilla. A name applied in various
forms to two distinct divisions of Cali-
fornia, one belonging to the Miwok (Mo-
quelumnan family), the other to the
Yokuts ( Mariposan family ). The former
lived on the upper waters of Fresno and
Chowchilla rs., and the latter, properly
called Chaushi la (q.v. ), probably on lower
Chowchilla r., in the plains and lowest
foothills. Recorded under many forms
of the same name from the time of the
gold excitement, the two divisions have
been inextricably confused. A treaty was
made with them and numerous other
tribes Apr. 29, 1851, by which a tract be-
tween Chowchilla and Kaweah rs. was
reserveii for their use. At this time the
Yokuts Chowchilla, or Chaushila, to-
gether with the Howeches, Chukchansi,
Pohoniche, and Nukchu were said to be
under a single chief calle^l Naiyakqua.
The Miwok division, apparently, were
considered the most powerful and warlike
people of that region, and to them was
attributed the greater part of the hos-
tilities, murders, and robberies that had
occurred, although this arraignment is
probably due to nothing more than the
defense by the Indians of themselves and
their homes against the depredations of
lawless whites. These numbered only 85
in 1857. The reservation was abandoned
by 1859, and a smaller one, w. of Madera,
was set aside; this, however, was seem-
ingly never confirmed. There are some
survivors of the Miwok Chowchilla living
along the upper waters of the stream that
bears theirname.
Chau-ohir-la.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in,
349. 1877. Chouohillas.— Barbour et al. (1851) in
Sen. Ex . Doc. 4, 32d Cong.. spec. sess., 61, 1853. Gnou-
ohille.— Johnston ( 1851). ibid., 65. Chou-chiUiet.—
McKee et al. (1851 ), ibid., 74. Chow-chi-la.— Wes-
sells (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d
sess., 30, 1857. Ohow-chi-lien.— Johnston in Sen.
Ex. Doc. 61. 32d Cong., 1st sess., 22, 1852. Ghow-
chillas.— Lewis in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 399. 1858.
Chowchille.-Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,
32d Cong., spec, sess., 64, 1853. Chow-chiU-iei.—
McKee et al. in Ind. Aff. Rep., 223, 1851. Ghow-
clas.— Henlev in Ind. Aff. Rep., 512, 1854. Cow-
chillas.— Beale (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong.,
spec, sess., 378, 1853.
BULL, ao]
CHOWiaNA OHITrHUNAYHA
293
Chowigna. A Gabrielenu raiu;heria for-
merly at Palos Verdes, Los AngeleH co.,
Cal.— Ried (1852) quoted l)v Tavlor in
Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860.
TTiutunfiuu — Kroeber, inf'n, 1905 (Luisefio iminc).
Choye. A village, mentioned l)y Tonti
(French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 72, 1846) in
1690, as near the settlements of th(^ Yatasi
on Red r., in the n. w. part of what is
now Louisiana. The people were said to
be hostile to the Kadohadacho, j^erhaps
some passing quarrel. From its associa-
tion with the Yatasi and Natasi, the vil-
lage was probably inhabited by a sub?
division of one of the Caddo tribes. The
subsequent history of the settlement is not
known; its inhabitants were probably
scattered among their kindred during the
contentions of the 18th century, later
becoming extinct. ( a. c. f. )
Ohaye.— Margry, DOc, in. 409. 187K. Choye.—
Tontl (1690) in Frenoh, Hist. Coll. La., i, 72,
1846.
Choyopan (* moving the eyelids or eye-
brows*). A Tonka wa clan.'
Toh6yopan.— Gatsrhet, Tonkawo voeab., B. A. F^.,
1884.
Chosetta. Mentioned in 1699 by Iber-
ville (Margry, Dec, iv, 154, 193, 195, 311,
1880), vyho, after speaking of the ** nation
of the Annocchy and Moctobi'* (q. v.),
says: "They tolii me of a village of their
neighbors, the Chozettas; they are on a
river whose entrance is 9 leagues to the
E., which the^^ call Pascoboulas. " In
Gatschet*s opinion the people of this vil-
lage were Choctaw.
Christanna Indians. A group of Siouan
tribes of Virginia, which wore collected
for a time in the early years of the 18tli
century at Ft Christanna, on Meherrin
r., near the present Gholsonville, Va.
Gov. Spots wood settled these tribes there
about 1700 in the belief that they would
form a barrier on that side against hos-
tile Indians. The tribes were the Mei-
pontsky, Occaneechi, Saponi, Stegaraki,
and Tutelo. See Moonev, Siouan Tril)es
of the Ea^t, Bull. B. A. E., 1894.
Ohristanna Indians.— N. Y. Council minutes cited
in N. Y. Doc. Ctol. Hist., v. 671, note, 18r>5.
Oliriitian Indians.— Albany cont. (1722), ibid., r>71.
Todiriohroones.- Ibid., 673 (Iroquois name).
Christianshaab. A Moravian miasionary
station among the Eskimo near Spring
bay, w. Greenland. — Crantz; Hist. Green-
land, I, 1.3, 1820.
Chua. The Snake phratry of the Hopi,
comprising the following clans: Chua
(Snake), Tohouh (Puma), Huwi (Dove),
Ushu (Columnar cactus). Puna (Cactus
fruit), Yungyu ( Opuntia), Nabowu { Opun-
tiafrutescens), Pivwani ( Marmot) , Pihcha
(Skunk), Kalashiauu (Raccoon). The
Tubish ( Sorrow ),Patung( Squash), Atoko
(Crane), Kele ( Pigeonhawk ) , and Chi-
nunga (Thistle) clans also belonged to this
phratry, but are now extinct. According
to traaition this people came from a
l)lace called Tokonabi, about the junction
of San Juan and Colorado rs., and were
the second migratory body to reach
Tusavan. See Fewkcs in Am. Anthrop.,
VII, 402, 1894, and in 19th Rep. B. A. K.,
582, 1901.
Tcu'-a nyu-mu. — Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii,
402. 1894 (wv«-wi"«"' phratry' )• Tcuin nyumu. —
Stephen in Hth Rep. B. A. E., 35. 1891.
Chua. The Rattlesnake clan of the
Chua (Rattlesnake) phratry of the Hqin.
Chia.— Bourke, Snake Dance, 117, 1884. Toil.—
Voth, Oraibi Summer Snake Ceremonv, 282, 1903.
Tcu'-a.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 38, 1891.
Tciia.— Dorsey and Voth, Mishongnovi Ceremo-
nies, 174, 1902. Tciia winwfi.— Fewkes in 19th Rep.
B. A. E., 582, 1901 (tW;'lM»<l='clan'). Tcu'-a-wun-
wii.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 402, 1894
( w'm;7-m'm=' clan ').
Ghuah. A former Chumashan village
at La Goleta, 6 m. from Santa Barbara
mission, Cal. — Tavlor in Cal. Farmer,
May 4, 1860.
Gliuarlitilik. A deserted Kuskwogmiut
Eskimo village on Kanektok r., Alaska. —
Spurr and Post (juoted bv Baker, Geog.
Diet. Alaska, 1901.
Ghuba. A Papago village ins. Arizona;
pop. about 250 in 186:1— Ind. Aff. Rep.,
885, 1863.
Chubio. The Antelope clan of the Ala
(Horn) phratry of the Hopi.
Tc'ib-io.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E.. 38. 1891.
Toiibio winw^.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
583, 1901. Tciib'-i-yo wiin-wii. — FewKes in Am.
Anthrop., vii, 401, 1894 (jm7M-wu=*elan').
Chubkwichalobi (Hopi: * antelope notch
place'). A group of ruined pueblos on
the hills above Chaves pass, 20 m. s, w.
of Winslow, Ariz., claimed by the Hopi
to have been built and occupied bv some
of their clans. Excavations by tfie Bu-
reau of American Ethnology in 1897 re-
vealed mortuary objects practically iden-
tical in character with those found' in the
valleys of the Verde and the Gila to the
southward, thus indicating a common
origin. See Fewkes in 22d Rep. B. A. E.,
32, 1904.
Chaves Pass ruin. — Fewkes, ibid. Jettipehika.—
Ibid. (^Navaho name, with same meanin^^.
Toiibkwitcalobi. — Ibid. (Hopi name).
Chucalissa ( * great town ' ). One of the
former Chickasaw settlements in n. Mis-
.sisaippi, probably in Pontx)tocor Dalla«co.
Chiokalina. — West Fla. map. m. 177.'>. Chook'heer-
eso. — Adair, Am. Inds,, SM, 177.5. Ohucaliaaa. —
Romans, Florida, i, r>3, 177'>.
Ghuchictac. A former village, presum-
ably Costanoan, connected with I)olores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — ^Tavlor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Ghuchtononeda. A Mohawk division
formerly occupying the s. side of Mohawk
r., N. Y., from Schenectady almost to
Schoharie cr. (Macauley, N.Y., ii, 295,
1829). Their principal village probably
bore the same name.
Chuchunayha. A body of Okinagan, of
the Similkameen group, in s. w. British
Columbia; pop. 52 in 1901.
294
CHUCKCHUQUALK CHUKAI
[b. a. b.
Cheh-ohewe-hem.— Can. Ind. AfT. for 1K83. 191.
Ghuohuiutylui.— Ibid., 1901, pt. ii, im. Chuohu-
wayha.— Ibid., 1894, 278.
Chuckchuqualk ( * red place ' ) . A ShuH-
wap village on North Thompson r., Brit.
CoL; pop. 129 in 1902.
Ghakohuqaalk.-<:;an. Ind. Aff. 1894, 277, 1895.
Ohuchuqoalk.— Ibid., 244, 1902. Chnkchukualk.—
Ibid., 1892, 312, 1893. Chuk-ohu-quaeh-u.— Ibid.,
1885, 196, 1886. Ghukchuqaalk.— Ibid., 1886, 280,
1887. Forth Elver.— Ibid., 78, 1878. Forth Thomp-
•on.— Ibid., 74, 1878. Tsuk-tsuk-kwalk'.— Dawson
in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. ii, 44, 1891.
Chucktin. The southernmost Tilla-
mook village on a creek emptying into
Tillamook bay, n. w. Oreg., in 1805.
Ohucklin.— Lewis and Clark. Exped., II, 148, 1817.
Chuck-tint.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 71,
1905.
Chueaohiki (* snouts ' ) . A Tarahumare
rancheria in Chihuahua, Mexico. — Lum-
holtz, inf n, 1894.
Chuemdu. A Nishinam village formerly
existing in the valley of Bear r., Cal.
Che'-em-duh.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in,
316, 1877.
Chueskweskewa (* snipe'). A gens of
the Chippewa. (j. m.)
Chufaniksa ( Chu-fan-ik^-m, * beloved
people ' ) . A Choctaw clan of the Wataki-
hulata phratry.— Morgan, Anc. Soc, 162,
1878.
Chuga (Tc/u^uga, * to go for cedar
planks ' ) . A Haida town of the Gunghet-
gitunai, near Houston Stewart channel
and the abandoned town of Ninstints,
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.— Swan-
ton, Cont. Haida, 277, 1905.
Chugachigmiut An Eskimo tribe occu-
pying the territory extending from the w.
extremity of Kenai penin. to the delta of
Copper r., Alaska, and lying between the
Kaniagmiut and Ugalakniiut. The U«i-
lakmiut have l)een almost absorbed by
the Tlingit, who are encroaching on
the Chugacrhigniiut also, who are now-
poor, although blubber, salmon, cod, hali-
but, ptarmigan, marmot, and bear are
obtained in abundance, and occasion-
ally a mountain sheep. The sea otter
has become scarce, but silver fox and
other fur-bearing animals are hunted and
trapped, and the fish canneries afford em-
ployment. The hair seal is abundant,
furnishing covers for the kaiaks as well
as meat, blubber, and oil. The tribe
numbered 433 in 1890. Their villa^s
are Ingamatsha, Kanikluk, Kiniklik,
Nuchek, and Tatitlek.
Ohoogaks.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 29, 1874.
ChuM.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, map, 1877.
Chugaoh.— Petrofl in Am. Nat., xvi, 568, 1882.
Chngaohigmiut.— 11th Census, Al^ka, 66, 1893.
Ohugioh'ig-mut. — Dall , op. cit. , 20. Ohugachimute. —
Petrofl, 10th Census, Alaska, 164, 1884. Chugacki-
mute. —Ibid. ; map. Chugatch. — Petroff in Intemat.
Rev., XII, 113, 1882. Tatliakhtana. —Petroff. 10th
Censas, Alaska, 164, 1884 (so called by Kinai).
TsohogatMhi.— Humboldt, New Spain, ii, 393, 1811.
TsohuganeB.- Rink in Jour. Antnrop. Inst., xv,
240,1885. Tiohugarri.- Prichard, Phys. Hist , v,
371, 1847. Tthugaxxi.— Gallatin in Trans. Am.
Antiq. Soc., II. 14, 1836.
Chugita (*edge of a precipice'). A
Tarahumare rancheria of about 30 fami-
lies, not far from Norogachic, Chihuahua,
Mexico. — Lumholtz, infn, 1894.
Chugnut. A small tril^e living, about
1755, under Iroquois protection in a vil-
lage of the same name on the s. side of
Susquehanna r., opposite Bingham ton,
Broome co., N. Y. In 1758 they were
on the Susquehanna with the Nanticoke,
Conoy, and Tutelo. Choconut or. takes
its name from the tribe. Conoy, Ma-
hican, Nanticoke, Shawnee, and probably
Munsee bands also resided there, and the
name may have been a local, not a tribal,
designation. (j. m.)
Chaghnutt.— Ft Johnson conf. (1756) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., VII, 50, 1856. Ohamiet.— Imlay, W. Ter.,
291 , 1797. Ohucknutt*.- Ft Johnson conf., op. cit,
172. Ghugants.- Doc. of 1759 quoted by Kupp,
Northampton Co., 50, 1845. Ghughaot.— German
Flats conf. (1770) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vill. 24a,
1857. Chugnue».— Macauley, N. Y., II, 166, 1829.
Chugnutt.— Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 201, 1872.
Chnhhla ( * blackbird' ). A Chickasaw
clan of the Ishpanee phratry.
Ghoh-hliu— Morgran, Anc. Soc., 163, 1877. Tohu'-
hla, -^atschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i,96, 1884.
Chuhuirari ( Chu-hw'/ -ra-ri, from a term
meaning * the dead ones * ) . A rancheria,
with a cave dwelling containing a single
Tarahumare family, not far from I^oro-
gachic, Chihuahua, Mexico. — Lumholtz,
inf n, 1894.
Ghuitna. A Knaiakhotana village on
Cook inlet, Alaska, at the mouth of
Chuit r.
Ghuitna.- Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaslca, 1901. Bhu-
it&a.— Ibid.
ChnkAfalaya (C%tiA»/dWi/a, *longtown' ).
A former Chickasaw settlement, covering
a district 4 m. long and a mile wide, in
1720, and forming one of the geographic
divisions of the tribe. Adair states that
it had more ])eople in 1775 than the whole
Chickasaw Nation in 1740. Several vil-
lages composed this settlement, which
probablv was in Pontotoc or Dallas co.,
Miss. * (a. s. g).
Chattafallai.— Hearrt in Trans. Am. Philos. Soc.,
Ill, 217, 1793. Ohookka Pharaah.— Adair, Am.
Ind., 363, 1775. Ohukafalaya.— Romans, Fla., 63,
1776. long House Town.— Adair, Am. Ind., 354,
1775. long Town.— Blount (1792) in Am. State
Pap., Ind. Aflf., i, 288, 1832.
Chukahlako (* great house M. (I) A for-
mer Lower Creek town on Chattahoochee
r., Ala. In 1799 the inhabitants had aban-
doned the place and moved to Oakfuskee,
on the opposite side of Tallapoosa r.
There is a Choccolocco post-office in Ala-
bama on Choccolocco cr. (2) Mentioned
in a census of 1832 as an Upper Creek
town with 109 families. —Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, iv, 578, 1854. (a. s. g.)
Ohau-kethluo-co.— Hawkins (1799) .Sketch, 45, 1848.
Choekalocha.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 276. 24th Cong., Ist
sess., 315, 1836. Chockalock.— Ibid., 312. Ohocke-
olucoa.— Bartram, Travels, 463, 1791. Ohooko-
locko.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 425, 24th Cong., 1st sess.,
220, 1836. Tohuka *lako.-Oat8chet, Creek Migr.
Leg., I, 146, 1884. Thlooootcho.— Oallatin in Ar-
chseol. Am., 112, 1836.
Chukai. The Mud clan of the Lizard
CEarth or Sand) phratrv of the Hopi.
Tcu'-kai.— Stephen in 8th Re'p. B. A. E., 39. 1891..
«IJLL. 30]
CHUKAIMINA (^HULUFTCHI
295
Ghukaimina. A Marii>osaii tribe for-
merly near Kings r., Cat. Acconlinj? to
Powers (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, :{7(),
1877) they were in Squaw valley, Fresno
CO., and here Merriam found a few fami-
lies in 1903.
Oho-oo-meii-as.— Johnston in Sen. Ex. hoc. Gl. 32d
Cong., Istsess., 23, 1852. Cho-ke-me-net.— Burbour
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sews., 2ry2, 1853.
Gho-ke-min-aah.— Wessell8(1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc.
76, 34th Cong., 3d Hess., 31, 1^57. Cho-kem-niet.—
Lewis in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 399, 1858. Chokia-
niAuvM. — Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 456, 1874 (mis-
quoted from Taylor). Chokimauves.— Taylor in
Cal. Faimer, June 8, 1860. Oho-ki-me-nas.— Ind.
Aff. Rep., 223, 1851. Cho-ki'-min-ah.— Merriam in
Science, xix, 915, 1904. Chu-kai'-mi-na.— Powers
in Cont N. A. Ethnol., ni, 370, 1877.
Chnkanedi ( * bush or fpniSH people ' ) . A
clan among the Huna division of the Tlin-
git, belonging to the Wolf phratry. An-
ciently they are said to have stooci low in
the social scale. Their principal emblem
was the porpoise.
Tou'kAnedi.— Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904.
Tiohukane'di.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 118,1885.
Chnkeliagemiut. A subdivision of the
Chnagmiut Eskimo whose chief village is
Ghukchuk, on the Yukon delta, Alaska.
OhttkoWg'einttt— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 1. 17,
1877 (the people) . Ghukohnk.— Baker, Geog. Diet.
Alaska, 1901 (the village).
ChukelianBi. A Mariposan tribe, form-
ing one of the northern divisions of the
family, the remnants of which now oc-
cupy the foothill country between Fresno
cr. on the n. and San Joaquin r. on the ».,
from a little above Fresno Flat down to
the site of old Millerton, Cal. (Merriam
in Science, xix, 915, June 17, 1904). In
1861 they were on Fresno reserve and
numbered 240. Naiakawe, a noted
prophet about 1854, was a member of this
tribe, and Sloknich was chief about the
same time. ^1 1 5 ^ tv^ ^4 (.^. l. k. )
Choooehanoeyt.— Lewis in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 256,
1857. Ohook-chan-oie.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A.
£., 822, 1899. Ghook-chancy. ^Johnston (1851) in
Sen. Ex. Doc. 4. 32d Cong., spec, sess., 64, 1853.
Chook-oha-aees.— Barbour (1852 ) , ibid. , 252. Ghook-
ehau-oM.— McKee et al. (ia51). ibid., 74. Ghook-
ehaw-oea.— McKee et al. in Ind. Aff. Rep., 223,
1851. Ohook-ohunoy.— Savage (1861) in Sen. Ex.
Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 231, 1853. Choot-
ohaaoert.— Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc*. 61,
32d Cong., Ist sess., 22, 1852. Chuckehalint.— Bar-
bour et al. (1861) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong.,
. spec, sess., 61, 1853. Ohnk-ohan'-oy.— Merriam in
Science, xix. 915, June 17, 1904. Chuk'-chan-si.—
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 370, 1877.
Ghtt-ke-ohan-ie.— Wessells (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doe.
76, 34th Cong., 8d sess., 30, 1857. Gookchaneya.—
Henley in Ind. Aff. Rep., 612, 1854. GoTe-ehan-
oea.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 219, 1861. Bukwmohi.— Kroe-
ber, inf n, 1903 (Yaudanchi name).
Chukeliakts. A Squawmish village
commnnity on the left bank of Squaw-
misht r., Brit. Col.
Teuk'tcuk'tt.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474
1900.
Chnkela. A Yuit Eskimo village in
Siberia, w. of C. Chukoshki. — Jackson,
Reindeer in Alaska, map, 145, 1894.
Chuken {Tniq/e-u^, 'mouth of the
tide*). A Haida town on the s. w. coast
of Moresby id., x. av. Brit. Col., said
to have been so mimed from an inlet in
and out of which the tide rushes with
great force. .It was occupied by the
Sakikegawai, a family of Ninsti'nts. —
Swanton, Cont. Hai<la, 277, 1905.
Chukhuiyathl. A Kuitsh village on
lower Ump<]ua r., Oret^.
Tc'il-qu'-i-yi^l'. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 231, 1890.
Cbukkilissa. One of five hamlets com-
posing the former Choctaw town of
Imongalasha, in the present Neshoba co.,
Miss. — llalbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ.,
VI, 432, 1902.
Chukotalgi ( ' toad ' ) . An extinct C'reek
clan, closely affiliated with the Toad or
Sopaktalgi clan.
Tohttkotalgi. — Gatscht't, ('reek Migr. I>eg., i, 155,
1884. Ttuxodi.— Ibid.
Chukubi. A traditional settlement situ-
ated a mile x. e. of Shipaulovi, x. e. Ari-
zona. It was occupied by the Sciuash,
Sand, and other clans of the Hopi, who
were afterward joined by the Spider clan.
Being harassed by enemies, among them
the Ute and the Apache, it was aban-
doned, its inhabitants joining those of
old Mashongnovi in building the present
Mashongnovi pueblo.
Chukubi.— Stephen and Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B.
A. E.. 25, 58, 1891; Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E.,
538, 1898. Chukuvi.— Voth, Traditions of the Hopi,
40, 1905.
Chukukh. A Kuitsh village on lower
Umpqua r., Greg.
To'n-kukq'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am, Folk-lore, in,
231,' 1890.
Chnla (*fox'). A former Yazoo tribe,
confederated with the Chickasaw, on or
near the headwaters of Yazoo r., Miss.
A village called Tchula is now in Holmes
CO., Miss.
Chola.— (Jatechct, Creek Migr. Lee., i. 99, 18M.
Ghoula.— La Harpe (1721) in French, Hist. CaAk
La., Ill, 106, 1851. Foxes. — Gatschet, op. cit.
Tchula.— Ibid.
Ghulare. A former village of the Cha-
lone division of the Costanoan family,
situated in the vicinity of the present
Guadalupe rancho, near Soledad mission,
Cal. Chualar, a post-office in Salinas
valley, is probably the same name.
Achulares.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 18«J().
Ghulares.— Ibid.
Chnlik. A fishing station of the Nuni-
vagmiut on Nunivak id., Alaska. Pop.
62 in 1890, comprising two villages called
Chuligmiut and Upper Chuligmiut (11th
Census, Alaska, 114).
ClmlitlLltiTii. A Yaquina village on the
s. side of Yaquina r., Greg.
Tcul-li9l'-ti-3ru.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
ni, 229, 1890.
Chulnfichi. A phratry of the ancient
Timucua of Florida. Its clans were
Arahasomi, Habachaca, and several oth-
ers not recorded. — Pareja (1614) quoted
by Gaschet in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc.,
XVII, 492, 1878.
296
CHITMASH — CHUMASHAN FAMILY
t U. A. E.
Chumash. The Santa Rosaislanders, of
the Chumashan family ofTJalifornia. —
Bowers in Smithson. Itep., 316, 1877.
Toumao. — Henshaw, Santa Rosa MS. vocab., B.
A. E., 1884.
Ghnmashan Family. A linguistic family
on the coast of s. California, known also as
Santa Barbara Indians. LiJce most Cali-
fornian aborigines, they appear to have
lacked an apj^ellation of general signifi-
cance, and the term Chumash, the name
of the Santa Rosa islanders, is arbitrarily
chosen for convenience to designate the
linguistic stock. Seven dialects of this
family are known, those of San Luis
Obispo, Purfsima, Santa Inez, Santa
Barliara, and San Buenaventura mis-
sions, and of Santa Rosa and Santa
Cruz ids. These are fairly similar ex-
cept the San Luis Obispo, which standB
apart. It is probable that there were
other dialects. The Chumashan lan-
guages show certain morphologic re-
semolances to the adjacent Shoshonean
and Salinan, especially tlie latter, but
constitute an independent family, as their
stock of words is confined to themselves.
The territorial limits of the Chumashan
Indians are not accurately known. The
area shown on Powell's map (7th Rep.
B. A. E., 1891) includes the entire Santa
Maria r. drainage, Santa Inez r., the
lower half of the Santa Clara r. drain-
age, and Somis cr., the e. boundary line
on the coast lying l)etween Pt Dume
and Santa Monica. Since the language
of San Luis Obispo was Chumashan, this
region n. of the Santa Maria and s. of
the Salinas drainage nmst be added (see
the linguistic maps accompanying the
articles California Indians and Linguistic
Families). The northern of the Santa
Barbara ids. (Santa Cruz, Santa Rosa, and
San Miguel) were inhabited by the Chu-
mash, but the 3 southern islands of the
group belonged to Shoshonean people.
The Chumashan Indians, both of the
islands and of the coast, were visited by
Europeans as early as 1542, when Ca-
brillo spent some time in their territory,
meeting with an exceedingly friendly re-
ception. Vizcayno in 1602 and Porto la
in 1769 also came in contact with them,
and have left accounts of their visits.
Five missions were established by the
Franciscans among the Chumash; those
of San Luis Obispo, San Buenaventura,
Santa Barbara, Purfsima, and Santa Inez,
founded respectively in 1771, 1782, 1786,
1787, and 1804, the missionaries meeting
with little opposition and no forcible re-
sistance. The early friendship for the
Spaniards soon changed to a sullen hatred
under their rule, for in 1810 it was re-
ported by a missionary that nearlv all
the Indian women at Purfsima had for
a time persistently practised abortion,
and in 1824 the Indians at Santa Bar-
bara, Santa Inez, and Purfsima revolted
against the mission authority, which they
succeeded in shaking off for a time,
though the Spaniards apparently suffered
no loss of life at their hands. Even dur-
ing mission times the Chumash de-
creased greatly in numbers, and in 1884
Henshaw found only about 40 individ-
uals. This number has been reduced to
less than half, the few survivors being
largely **Mexicanized,'* and the race is
extinct on the islands.
In character and habits the Chumash
differed considerably from the other In-
dians of California. All the early voy-
agers note their friendliness and hos-
pitality, and their greater affluence and
abundance of food as compared with
their neighbors. They appear to have
had a plentiful supply of sea food and to
have depended on it rather than on the
vegetal products which usually formed
the subsistence of California Indians.
With the islanders this was no doubt a
necessity. Their houses were of grass or
tule, dome-shapeil, and often 50 ft. or
more in diameter, accommodating as
many as 50 people. Each was inhabited
by several families, and they were grouped
in villages. The Chumash were noted
for their canoes, which were not dug out
of a single log, but made of planks lashed
together and calked. Most were built for
only 2 or 3 men, but some carried 10 and
even 13 persons. As nocanoes were found
anywhere else on the coast from C. San
Lucas to C. Mendocino, even where suit-
able wood is abundant, rafts or tule
balsas taking their place, the well-built
canoes of the Chumash are evidence of
some ethnographic specialization. The
same may be said of their carved wooden
dishes and of the figures painted on posts,
described as erected over graves and at
places of worship. On the Santa Barbara
ids. stone killer-whale figurines have been
found, though almost nowhere else in
California are there traces of even at-
tempted sculpture. An unusual variety
of shell ornaments and of work in
shell inlaid by means of asphaltum also
characterize the archeologic discoveries
made in Chumashan territory. Large
stone jars similar to those in use among
the neighboring Shoshoneans, and coiled
baskets somewhat similar' to those of
their southern neighbors, were made
by the Chumash. Their general culture
has been extensively treated by Putnam
(Wheeler, Survey Rep., vii, 1879). Of their
religion very little is known, and nothing
of their mythology. The gentile system
was not recognized bv them, marriage
between individuals of the same village
being allowed. On Santa Catalina id.
birds which were called large crows by
BULL, 301
THUMASHAN FAMILY
297
the Sjianiarda were kej)t and wornhiped,
agreeing with what Bowana tells of the
Snoshonean condor cult of the adjacent
coagt. The medicine-men of one of the
islands are »aid to have used stone pipes
for smoking, sucking, and hlowing to
remove disease, dressing in a hair wig,
with a helt of deer hoofs. This practice
was similar to that which prevailed
through Lower California. The dead
among the Chumash were buried, not
burned as in many other parts of Cali-
fornia; property was hung on poles over
their graves, and for chiefs painted
planks were erected. The Franciscan
missionaries, however, rightly declare that
these Indians, like all others m California,
were not idolaters.
True tribal divisions were unknown to
the Chumash as to most other Indians of
California, the only basis of social organ-
ization being the family, and of political,
the village settlement. " Thenamesof vil-
lage sites are given in gn»at number trom
the time of the earliest voyage in the 16th
century, but the majoritv can neither be
located nor identified, ^he following is
a list of the villages, most of the names
being taken from the mission archives:
Satiia Inez Mmion: Achillimo, Aguama,
Ahuamhoue, Akachumas, Akaitsuk, Ala-
hulapas, AHzway, Asiuhuil, Awashlaurk,
Calahnana, Cascel, Cholicus, ('humuchu,
Coloc, G^^uep, Guaislac, Iluhunata,
Hunawurp, lalamne, lonata, Jonatas,
Kalawashuk, Katahuac, Kolok, Kula-
huasa, Kuyam, Matiliha, Mekewe, Mish-
tapawa, Nipoma, Nutonto, Saj^elek, Sap-
tuui, Sauchu, Shopeshno, Sikitipuc,
Sisu«hi, Situchi, Sotonoemu, Souscoc,
Stucu, Suiesia, Suktanakamu, Tahijuas,
Takuyumam, Talaxano, Tapaniasilac,
Tarkepsi, Tekep, Temesathi, Tequepis,
Tinachi, Tsamaia, Tujanisuissilac.
San Miguel Island: Nimoyoyo, Zaco.
Santa Rosa Island: Kshiwukciwu, Lili-
beque, Muoc, Ninumu, Niquesesquelua,
Niquipos, Patiquilid, Patiquiu, Pilidquay,
Pisqueno. Poele, Siliwihi.
Santa Cniz Maud: Alali, Chalosas,
Chosho, Covcoy , I^^tocoloco, Hahas, Hits-
chowon, Klakaamu. Lacayamu, Livam,
Macamo, Maschal, Mishumac, I^ana-
huani, Miakla, Nichochi, Nilalhuyu,
Nimatlala, NinMtapal, Nitel, Nomkolkol,
Sasoagel, Xngua.
San Buenaventura Mission: Aguin, Alloc,
Anacbuc, Chihucchihui, Chumpache,
Eshulup, Kachyayakuch, Kanwaia-
kaku, Elinapuke, Lacayamu, Liam,
Lisichi, Lojos, Luupch, Mahow, Mala-
hue, Malico, Matillija, Miguihui, Misca-
naka, Piiru, Se8i)e, Shishalap, Simi, Sisa,
Sisjulcioy, Sissabanonase, Somo, Tapo,
Ypuc, Yxaulo.
Purigima Mission: Alacupusyuen, Aus-
ion, Esmischue, Esnispele, Kspiiluima,
Estait, Fax, Guaslaique, Iluasna, Huene-
jel, Huenepel, Ilusistaic, lalamma, Jlaacp,
Kachisupal, Lajuchu, Lipook, Lisahuato,
Lorapoc, Nahuey, Naila, Ninyuelgual,
Nocto, Omaxtux, Pacsiol, Paxpili, Sac-
siol, Sacspili, Salachi, Sihimi, Silimastus,
Silimi, Silino, Silisne, Sipuca, Sisolop,
Sitolo, Stipu, Suntaho, Tutachro.
Santa Barbara Mission: Alcax, Alican,
Alpincha, Alwathalama, Amolomol, Ane-
jue^ Awhawhilashmu, Cajats, Cajpilili,
Casalic, Cashwah, Chinchin, Cholosoc,
Chnah,Cinihuay, Cuyamus, Eleunaxeiay,
Eljman, Eluaxcu, Estuc, Geliac, Gleuax-
cuqu, Guainonost, Guima, Hanaya, Hello,
Huelemin, Huililoc, Huixapapa, Humal-
ija, Hunxapa, Inajalaihu, Inojey, Ipec,
Ituc, I^agcay, I^ycayanui, Lintja, Lisu-
chu, Lugups, Majalayghua, Mishtapalwa,
Mistaughchewaugh, Numguelgar, Oten-
ashmoo, 8alpilel, Sayokinck, Sihuicom,
Silpoponemew, Sinicon, Sisahiahut,
Sisucli, Snihuax, Sopone, Taxlipu, Tex-
maw, Xalanaj, Xalou.
Mittrellaneons: Anacoat, Anacot, Antap,
Aogni, Asimu, Bis, Caacat, Casnahacmo,
Casunalmo, Cayeguas, Chwaiyok, Cic^i-
cut, Ciucut, Ciyuktun, Elquis, Escuma-
wash, Garomiso[)ona, Gua, Helapoonuch,
Honmoyaushu, Hueneme, Humkak, Im-
mahal, Isha, Ishgua, Kamulas, Kasakti-
kat, Kashiwe, Kashtok, Kashtu, Kaso,
Katstayot, Kaughii, Kesmali, Koiyo,
Kuiyamu, Lohastahni,Mahahal, Malhok-
she, Malito, Malulowimi, Maquinanoa,
Masewuk, Mershom, Michiyu, Micoma,
Misesopano, Mishpapsna, Misinagua,
Mismatuk, Mispu, Mugu, Mupu, Nacbuc,
Nipomo, Nocos, Ojai, Olesino, Onkot,
Onomio, Opia, Opistopia, Paltatre, Par-
tocac, Potoltuc, Pualnacatup, Quanmu^rua,
Quelqueme, Quiman, Salnahakaisiku,
Sapaquonil, Saticoy, Satwiwa, Shalawa,
Shalkahaan, Shishlaman, Sholikuwe-
wich, 8huku, Shup, Shushuchi, 8huwa-
lashu, Simomo, Sisichii, Sitaptapa, Siuk-
tun, Skonon, Spookow, Sulanin, Susu-
quey, Sweteti, Swine ), Tallapoolina,
Temeteti, Tocane, Topotopow, Tukach-
kach, Tushunm, Upop, Walektre, Wihat-
set, Xabaagua, Xagua, Xocotoc, Yutum.
dr. W. H. A. L, K.)
>8anta Barbara.— Latham in Trans. Philol. S<m«.
Lond.,85,1856(inelude8SantA Barbara.Santii Inez,
San Luis Obispo languages); Buschmann, Spuren
der aztelc. Sprache, 531, 536, 538, 602, 1859; Latham,
Opuscula, 351,1800; Powell inCont.N. A.Ethnol.,
HI, 550, 567, 1877 (KasuA, Santa Inez, id. ol Santa
Cruz. Santa Barbara) ; Gatschet in U. S.Qeog. Surv.
W. 100th Mer., vii, 419, 1879 (cites La Puri.sima,
Santa Inez, Santa Barbara, Kasuft. Mugu, Santa
Cruz id.). X Santa Barbara. —Gatschet in Maer. Am.
Hist., 156, 1877 (Santa Inez, Santa Barbara, Santa
Cruz id., San Luis Obispo, San Antonio). =Ohu-
mashan.— Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 67, 1891.
Chumawi. A fonner Shastan band or
village in Big valley, Modoc co, Cal.
Chu-mi'-wa.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Kthnol., ui.
267, 1877.
Ghnmidok. A term useil by Powers as
a tribal name similar to C'hnmteya, q. v.
298
CHUMPACHE OHITPCAN
[b- a. b.
Ghimedoct.— Powers in Overland Mo., x, 324, 1873.
Ohim'-i-dok.— PowefH in Ctont. N. A. Etlmol., in,
349, 1877. Ghoomedoct.— Powers in Overland Mo.,
X, 324, 1873. Chu'-mi-dok.— Powers in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., Ill, 349, 1877.
Chumpache. A former Chumashan vil-
lage in Ventura co., Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, July 24, 1863.
Chumteya. A name meaning 'southern-
ers,* and applied with dialectic variations
by most Mi wok (Moquelumnan) divi-
sions to the divisions s. of them. In some
cases the name or a form of it may have
been the proper appellation of particular
divisions, but on the whole it remained
geographical rather than national or
tribal; as explained by the Indians
themselves, divisions called Chumteva
by those n. of themselves appHed the
same term in turn to their southern
neighbors, and so on. See also Chumidok,
Chwnuchf ChumwiL (a. l. k.)
Ohimteya.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 353,
1877. Ohoomt^yas.— Powers in Overland Mo., x,
324, 1873. Ohumito.— Gatschet in Am. Antiq.,
V, 71, 1883. Chum-te'-ya.— Powers in Ctont. N. A.
Ethnol., in, 349, 1877.
Chamuch. A term used by Powers as a
tribal name similar to Chumteya, q. v.
Ohoomuoh.— Powers in Overland Mo., x, 324, 1873.
Ohu'-much.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in,
349, 1877.
Chamiiohii. Apparently 2 distinct Chu-
mashan villages formerly near Santa Inez
mission, Santa Barbara co., Cal. — Taylor
in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Chumwit. A term used by Powers as a
tribal name -similar to Chumteya, q. v.
Ohoomwitt.— Powers in Overland Mo., x, 324, 1873.
Ohum'-wit.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 349,
1877.
Chunacansti. Mentioned by Alcedo
(Die. (ieog., I, 565, 1786) as a pueblo of
the province of South Carolina, on a swift
river of the same name which flows s. e.
to the sea. Unidentified.
Chnnaneets. A Tuscarora village in
North Carolina in 1701.— Lawson (1709),
N. C, 383, 1860.
Chuxiarghnttiixme. A former village of
the Chastacosta on the n. side of Rogue
r., E. of its junction with Applegate cr.,
Oreg.
To*ii-na'-rxut ^un'n*.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, III, 234, 1890.
Ghiinkey. The name commonly used
by the early traders to designate a man's
game formerly popular among the Gulf
tribes and probably general in the S. , e. of
the Mississippi. It was played with a stone
disk and a pole which had a crook at one
end. The disk was rolled ahead, and the
object was to slide the ix)le after it in
such a way that the disk would rest in
the curve of the crook when both came
to a stop. It was usually played in the
larger towns upon a piece of ground r^u-
larly prepared for the purpose, called
by the traders the "chunkey yard,"
or ** chunk yard,'* adjoining the town
square, or central plaza, in which the most
important public ceremonies were per-
formed. In the W. a somewhat similai
game was played with a netted wheel and
a pair of throwing sticks. The name aj)-
pears to come from the Catawba or some
other language of Carolina, where Lawson,
in 1701, mentions it under the name
chenco. For diagrams of the Creek town
square, with chunkey yard, see Gatschet,
Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 186, 1888, and Swan
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 264, 1855.
Bee GameSj Discoidal stones, (j. m.)
Chunkey. A former Choctaw town on
the site of the modem village of Union,
Newton co.. Miss.— Brown in Miss. Hist.
Soc. Publ., VI, 443, 1902.
Ghanki.— Romans, Florida, map, 1775. Ghunky.—
Brown, op. cit.
Chnnkey Oiitto ('big Chunkey,' so
called to distinguish it from Chunkey).
A former Choctaw town on the w. bank
of Chunky cr. , about J m. below its con-
fluence with Talasha cr., in Newton co.,
Miss. It was the southernmost town
visited by Tecumseh in the fall of 1811.—
Brown in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., vi, 443-
444, 1902; Haibert and Ball, Creek War,
46, 1895.
Chunky.— Brown, op. cit.
Chonaetiiimeta. A former village of the
Chastacosta on the n. side of fi)gue r.,
Oreg.
ToAn-se'-tdn-ne'-ta. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, ni, 284, 1890.
Chnnsetiuinetnii. A former village of the
Chastacosta on the n. side of Rogae r.,
Oreg.
To^bi-M'-tim-ne'-tibL. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, III, 234, 1890.
Ghuntshataatnime ( * people of the laive
fallen tree'). A former village of the
Mishikhwutmetunneon Coquille r., Oreg.
To^-toa'-ti-a' ^dnnS.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, III, 232, 1890.
Chunut (pi. Chunotachi). A former
important Yokuts tribe in the plains e.
of Tulare lake, Cal. They were enemies
of the Tadji at the n. end of the lake^ but
on friendly terms with the hill tnbes.
They lived in long communal houses of
tule. Their dialect formed a group with
the Tadji and Choinok. (a. l. k.)
Gho-ho-nuta.— Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,
32d Ck>ng., spec. seas.. 256, 1853. Choo-noot— We»-
sells (1853] in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34thCk>ng., 3d sess.,
32, 1857. Ohtt'-nut— Powers In Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
Ill, 370, 1877. Ohunute.— Royc^in 18th Rep. B. A.
E., 782, 1899. Ohu-su-te.— Barbour, op. cit. (men-
tioned as on Paint cr.).
Chupatak (Tcupatdk^ * mortar stone*).
A former Pima village in s. Arizona. —
Russell, Pima MS., B. A. E., 16, 1902.
Ghupcan. Mentioned as a village of the
Cholovone on the e. bank of San Joaquin
r., N. of the Tuolumne, Cal. The name
may be another form of Chapposan, ap-
parentl V a tribe on the San Joaquin, and
also of the otherwise unidentifiable
Chopee mentioned as on Fresno res. in
1861. (a. l. k.)
BULL. 30]
CHUPICHNUSHKITCH OIENEOA
2t)9
OhM-Mh-Miiu.— Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Dm-.
61, 82a Cong., 1st sess., 20, 1852. Ghap-po-Muis.—
Ryer (1861)7 ibid., 21. Ohopees.— Ind. Aff. Rep..
219, 1861. COiupeui.— Taylor in Cal. Fanner, Oct.
18, 1861. lehuwJtaaet.— Kotzebue, New Voy., ii,
146, 1880.
ChapiohmuhknelL. A former Kuitsh vil-
lage near lower Umpqua r., Orej?.
Te*ft'-plte n*u' ckuto.--Dor8ey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, III, 231, 1890.
Chupamni. A former Mi wok village
not far s. of Cosuranes r., Cal.
OhiimuiiBet.— Hale, Ethnog. and Philol., vi, 630,
1846.
Chnrsmnk. A former village of the Iro-
quois on the E. side of Susquehanna r.,
18 m. above Oswego, N. Y.; destroyed by
Sullivan in 1779.— Livermore (1779) in
N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 322, 1850.
Charan ( * red-eye people * ) . One of the
two divisions or fraternities of Isleta pueb-
lo, N. Mex. See Shifunin.
Ohu-ran'.—Hodge, field* notes. B. A. E., 1895.
Sli^btii.— Gatsehet, Isleta MS. vooab., B. A. E..
1885 (given as a clan).
Charohoates. — A small unidentified tril)e
mentioned by (lov. Archdale, of South
Carolina, in the latter part of the 18th
century, in a complaint that the Appa-
lachicoloes, or English Indians, had at-
tacked and killed 3 of them.-— Carroll,
Hist. Coll. S. C, II, 107, 1836.
Chnrohert. A body of Indians living
K. and N. E. of the white settlements in
New England in 1634 (Wood, 1^34,
quoted by Barton, New Views, xviii,
1798). Not the Praying Indians, as the
period is too early.
Churehu. The Mole clan of Isleta
pueblo, N. Mex.
Gliimlia-t'aiiim.— Lummis quoted by Hodge in
Am. Anthrop., ix, S-M, 1896 (rafnYn=* people').
Oknnniitoe. A former village, presum-
ably CoBtanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Tavlor in
Cal. Fanner, Oct. 18, 1861.
Chnmptoy. A tribe of the Patwin di-
vision of the Copehan family, formerly
living in Yolo and perhaps in Napa co.,
Cal. It was one of the 7 whi(*h made
peace with Gov. Vallejo in 1836. — Ban-
croft, Hist. Cal., IV, 71, 1886.
Chusea. The name (Tsus-kal, Tso-Ih-
kai) given by the Navaho to a promi-
nent nill on the Navaho res., n. w. N.
Mex. Geographers extend the name
(Choiska) to the whole mountain mass
from which the knoll rises. Cortez in
1779 (Pac. R. R. Rep., in, pt. 3, 119,
1856) recorded it, with doubtful pro-
priety, as the name of a Navaho settle-
ment. In these mountains are the re-
mains of breastworks and other evidences
of a disastrous fight that took place before
1850, according to Navaho informants, be-
tween their warriors and Mexican troops.
(W. M.)
Chaioan. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connei'ted with Dolores mis-
sion, San Fmncisco, Cal. — Tavlor in Cal.
Fanner, Oct. 18, 1861.
Chushtarghasuttun. A former village
of the Chastacosta on the x. side of Rogue
r., Oreg.
Tc'uc'-ta-rxA-»ut'-tfin.— Horsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, in. 234. 1890.
* Chnsterghntmuxmetun. A former -vil-
lage of the Chastacosta, the highest on
Rogue r., Greg.
Tc'4»-t^'-rxut-inuii-ne'-t4ii. — I)<»rsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, in, 234, 1890.
Chutchin. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Chutil (named from a slough on which
it was situated). A former village or
camp of the Pilalt, a Cowichan tribe of
lower Chilliwack r., Brit. Col.
Tcutia.— Hill-Tout in Ethnol. Surv. Can.. 48.
1902.
Chuttusgelis. The reputed site of Sole-
dad mission, Cal. — Kngelhardt, Francis-
cans in Cal., 380, 1897.
Chnttushshanche. A former village of
the Chaatacosta on the x. side of Rogue
r., Oreg.
Tcilt'-tiio-cun-toi.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 234, 1890.
Chuwntukawntuk ( Tcu^vrutiikmniifikf
'earth hill'). A former Pima village in
s. Arizona. — Russell, Pima MS., B. A. E.,
16, 1902.
Ghuyachic ( * the point of a ridge * ) . A
small rancheria of the Tarahumare, not
far from Norogachic, Chihuahua, Mex-
ico.— Lumholtz, infn, 1894.
Ghwaiyok. A former Chumashan vil-
lage E. of San Buenaventura, Ventura CO.,
Cal., a locality now called Los l*itos.
Te'-wai-3r6k.— Hennhaw, Buenaventtim MS. vo-
cab., B. A. E.. 1884.
Ckynan. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Tavlor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Gibolas (Mexican Span.: 'buffaloes').
A term applied by early Spanish writers
to any buffalo-hunting Indians. The
name Vat^ueros (see Quererho) was simi-
larly applied to the Apacrhe of the Texas
plains in the 16th century.
Cicacut A Chumashan village at (io-
leta, w. of Santa Barbara, Cal., in 1542. —
Cabrillo in Smith, Cole<-. Doc., 181, 1857.
Oicauit.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 17, 18f>:i.
Pueblo de las Bardinas. — Cabrillo. op. cit.
Cienega (Span.: * marsh,' *moor,' an<l
in s. w. IT. S., * meadow'; Tewa name,
Tzxffuma, *lone cottonwood tree'). A
pueblo formerly occupied by the Tano,
out apparently containing also some
Queres, situated in the valley of Rio
Santa Fe, 12 m. s. w. of Santa Fe, N.
Mex. In the 17th century it was a
visita of San Marcos mission. Of this
pueblo Bandelier says: **It was aban-
done<l at a time when the Pueblos were
300
CIENEGA CITIZEN POTAWATOMI
[b. a. b.
indei^endent [between 1680 and 1692],
and an effort to repeople it \va« made by
Diego de Vargas after the pacification of
New Mexico in 1695, l)ut with little suc-
cess. Tziguma was therefore a historic
pueblo. Nevertheless, I am in doubt as
to which stock its inhabitants belonged.
They are mentioned as l)eingQueres, . * .
but the people of Cochiti do not regard
them as having been of their own stock,
but as belonging to the Puya-tye or Ta-
nos. Until the question is decided by
further researches among the Tanos of
Santo Domingo, I shall hold that the
pueblo was a Tanos village." It con-
tained no Indians in 1782, and at no time
did its population reach 1,000. — Arch.
Inst. Papers, iii, 125, 1890; iv, 91-92,
1892.
Alamo Solo.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv,
pt. 2', 92, 1892 (Spanish name of present village:
' Lone Cottonwood tree ' ). Chi-mu-a.— Bandeher
in Ritch, N. Mex., 201, 1885. Chiu-ma.— Ritch,
ibid., 166. Oienega de Carabajal.— Ofiate (1598) in
Doc. InC'd., XVI, 114. 1871. Cieneguilla.— Davis,
Span.Conq^N. Mex.. 333, 1869. Cinejpa.— D'Anville,
mapN. A.,Bolton'sed.,1752. La Cienega.— Bande-
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 91, 1892. La Ciene-
ria.— Davis, Span. Conq. N. Mex., 333, 1869. La
Ciengiulla.— Ibid., 350. Sienaguilla.— Ibid., map.
Sienega. — Gallegas (1844) in Ii:mory, Recon., 478,
1848. Tzi-ju-ma.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
III, 125, 1890 (aboriginal name). Tzi-gu-may.
Ibid., IV, 91. 1892. 2iguma.— Ladd
1891.
Tzi-ffu-ma
, N. Mex.,
199,
Cieneffa. A large Cora rancheria in the
Sierra de Nayarit, in the n. part of the
territory of Tepic, Mexico.
Gieaega. — Lumholtz, Unknown Mex., ii, map, 16,
1902. La Cienega.— Ibid., i, 498.
Cieneguilla (Span. : * little marsh ' ) . A
former village on the Potrero Viejo, above
the present Cochiti pueblo, N. Mex., oc-
cupied almost continuously by the Cochiti
between 1681 and 1694. It was burned in
the latter year by Gov. Vargas during his
reconquest of the countrv. — Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 169, 1892.
Cienegui.— Escalante (1693?) quoted bv Bandelier,
ibid., 173, 1892. Cieneguilla.— Mendoza (1681),
ibid., 169.
Cincinnati Tablet. See XokJied plates.
Cinco Llagas (Span.: * five wounds,* re-
ferring to the wounds of Christ). A
Tepehuane village near the Cerro de
Muinora, in the Sierra Madre, on the head-
waters of the Rio del Fuerte, in the ex-
treme 8. w. part of Chihuahua, Mexico,
the inhabitants of which are of pure blood,
but speak Spanish.— Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th
8., IV, 9.S, 1857; Lumholtz, Unknown
Mexico, 1, 429, 1902.
Cinihnay. A former Chumashan vil-
lage at Los Gatos, near Santa Barbara,
Cal.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24,
1863.
Cinnabar. The sulphide of mercury,
which supplies a brilliant red pigment
used to a considerable extent by the na-
tive tribes. It is somewhat more bril-
liant in hue than the hematites, being
the basis of the vermilion of commerce.
It occurs in pulvenilent earthy forms and
as a compact ore largely in connection
with serpentines. It is found in Cali-
fornia and Texas, and to a limited ex-
tent in Idaho, Utah, and Nevada. Yar-
row found it associated with burials in
s. California, and remarks that, used as
a paint for the person, it might be ex-
pected to cause ** constitutional derange-
ments of a serious nature** (Surv. W.
100th Merid., vii, 1879), and Meredith
(Moorehead, Prehist. Impls., 1900) even
attributes the diseased bones so often ob-
tained from native graves to the excessive
use of this pigment. (w. h.h.)
Ginqnack. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy near Smiths Pt on the Poto-
mac, in Northumberland co., Va., in 1608.
Chinquaok.— Doc. of 1638 in Bozman, Md., n, 73,
1837. Cinquaok.— Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map,
repr. 1819.
Ginqnaeteck. A village on the Poto-
mac, in the present Prince George co.,
Md., in 1608.— Smith (1629), Virgihia, i,
map, repr. 1819. Cf. Chincoteagiiey Cinquo-
feck,
Cinqnoteck. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, probably of the Pamunkey
tribe, in the fork of Mattapony and
Pamunkev rs.. King William co., Va., in
1608. —Smith ( 1629 ), Virginia, I, map, repr.
1819. Cf. Chincoteague^ Cinquaeteck. '
Cisco. A name applied to various spe-
cies of fish found in the region of the
great lakes, particularly the lake herring
(Coregonus artedi) and the lake noon-eye
( C. hoyi). The word is said to be taken
from one of the A Igonquian dialects of
the region, but its origin is not clear.
Perhaps it is a reduction of ciscoette or
mkowit. (a. f. c.)
Cisco (SVskay 'uncle'). A village of
the Lytton band of Ntlakyapamuk on
Fraser r., 8 m. below Lytton, Brit. Col.;
pop. 32 in 1902.
Si'ska.— Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., il, 171,
1900. Sitka Plat.— Ctfn. Ind. Aflf. for 1880,317.
Ciscoette. A name of the lake herring
{Coregonus artedi), seemingly a French
diminutive in ette from cisco^ but proba-
bly a French corruption of mkonnt, q. v.
(a. F. c.)
Gisooqnett, Ciscowet. See Siskomit.
Citisans. One of the five tribes of which
Badin, in 1830 (Ann. de la Prop, de la
Foi, IV, 536, 1843), believed the Sioux na-
tion to be composed. Possibly intended
for Sisseton.
Citizen Potawatomi. A part of the
Potawatomi who, while living in Kansas,
withdrew from the rest of the tribe about
1861, took lands in severalty and became
citizens, but afterward removed to In-
dian Ter. (now Oklahoma). They num-
bered 1,036 in 1890, but by 1900 had in-
BULL. :u)]
CIU( UT CIVILIZATION
301
creased to 1,722, and in 1904 the number
was given as 1,686.
Ciuout A Chumashan village between
Goletaand Pt Conception, Cal., in 1542.
Oiuout.— Cabrillo, Narr. (1542), in Smith, Col(;c.
Doc. Fla., 183, 1867. Ouiout —Taylor in Cal . Farmer,
Apr. n,jm.
Civilisation. To the aboriginal inhab-
itant of this continent civilization entails
the overturning of his ancient form of
government, the abolition of many of his
social usages, the readjustment of his
ideas of property and ])ersonal rights, and
change of occupation. No community
of natives was devoid of asocial organiza-
tion and a form of government. These
varied, some tribes being much more
highly organized than others (see Clan
and Geyig). but all possessed rules of con-
duct which must be obeyed, else punish-
ment would follow. Native organization
was based on kinship, which carried with
it the obligation of nmtual protection.
The tribe, wherever it chanced to be,
whether resting at home in the village,
wandering on the plains in pursuit of
game, or scattered in quest of nsh on the
rivers or sea, always f)reservedhs organ-
ization and authority intact, wfiereas the
organization which civilization imposes
on the native is based on locality, those
living within certain limits being, regard-
less of relationship, subject to common
laws and having equal responsibilities;
mere kinship warrants no claim, and the
family is differently constituted. In the
' tribal family husband and wife very often
must belong to different units. According
to the custom of the particular tribe the
children trace descent through their
father and belong to his gens, or through
their mother and are members of her clan.
Modern civilization demands the abroga-
tion of the clan or gens, and children
must inherit from both parents and be
subject to their authority, not that of a
clan or gens.
Most of the conmiou occupations of
tribal life are wii>ed out by civilization.
Intertribal wars have ceased, and war
honors are no longer possible; the herds
of buffalo and other animals are gone,
and with them the hunter, and the makers
of bows, arrows, spears, and other im-
plements of the chase. The results of
generations of training are of little avail
to the civilized male Indian.
Under tribal conditions woman held,
in many cases, a place in the management
of tribal affairs. Upon her devolved
partly the cultivation of the fields, the
dressing of skins, the making of clothing,
the production of pottery and baskets,
the preparing of food, and all that went
to conserve the home. Civilization puts
an end to her outdoor work and consigns
her to the kitchen and the washtub,
while the white man's factories supply
cloth, clothing, pots, i)ans, and baskets,
for none of the native industries can sur-
vive in competition with machinery.
Woman, moreover, loses her importance
in public affairs and the independent
ownership of property that was her right
by tribal law. No group of peoples on
the continent were destitute of religious
beliefs or of rites and ceremonies express-
ive of them. These beliefs were based
on the idea that man, in common with
all created things, was endowed with life
by some power that pervaded the uni-
verse. The methods of appealing to this
j)()wer varied with the environment of
the i)eoples, but the incentive was the
de>iire for food, healtli, and long life,
while the rites and ceremonies inculcated
certain ethical relations between man
and man. As among all races, priest-
craft overlaid many of the higher
thoughts and teachings of native religion
and led to unworthy practices. Never-
theless the breaking down of the ancient
forms of worship through the many
changes and restrictions incident to the
settlement of the country has caused the
natives nnich distress and mental confu-
sion. It is not surprising that it has
been a slow and difficult process for the
a])origines to accept and conform to such
radical changes of organization, customs,
and beliefs as are required by civilization.
Yet many have done so, showing a grasp
of mind, a power to apprehend the value
of new ideals, and a willingness to accept
the inevitable, and evincing a degree of
courage, self-restraint, and strength of
character that can not fail to win the ad-
miration of thinking men. The younger
generation, born under the new condi-
tions, are spared the abrupt change
through which their fathers had to
stnig^le. Wherever the environment
permits, the employments of the white
race are now those of the Indian. In one
branch of the Eskimo change has come
through the introduction of the reindeer.
Already the Indian is to be found tilling
his farm, plying the trades, employed
on the railroads, working in mines and
logging camps, and holdmg positions of
trust in banks and mercantile houses.
Indians, of pure race or of mixed blood,
are practising as lawyers, physicians, and
clergymen; they have made their way in
literature and art, and are serving the pub-
lic in national and state offices, from that
of road master to that of legislator. The
school, the missionary, and the altered
conditions of life are slowly but surely
changing the Indian's mode of thought as
well as his mode of living, and the old life
of his tribe and race is becoming more
302
CI YUKTUN CLALLAM
[B. A.
and more a memory and a tradition. See
Agency system, Education^ Government pol-
iaj, ^tissUms. (a. c. f.)
Ciynkton. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, May 4, 1860.
Cisentetpi. Mentioned by Ofiate (Doc.
In6d., XVI, 114, 1871) as a pueblo of New
Mexico in 1598. Doubtless situated in the
Salinas, in the vicinity of Abo, e. of the
Rio (irande, and in all probability for-
merly occupicni by the Tigua or the Piros.
Clackama. A Cfhinookan tribe formerly
occupying several villages on Clackamas
r., in Clackamas co., Oreg. In 1806
Lewis and Clark estimated their num-
ber at 1,800; in 1851 their number was
placed at 88, and at that time they claimed
the country on the e. side of Willamette
r. from a few miles above its mouth
nearly to Oregon City an<l e. as far as the
. Cascade mts. This territory they ceded
«!»©- 'to to the United States by the Dayton treaty
*^ " of 1855, and later they were removed to
the Grande Ronde res., Oreg., where they
are said to number about 60. (l. p. )
A'kimmath.— Gatschet, Kalapuya MS., B. A. E.
(Atfalatl name.) Glaokuiuts. — Dart in Ind. Aff.
Rep., 214, 1851. Glaokamis.— Palmer, Trav. Rocky
Mti4., 81, 1845. Claokamot.— Lewis and Clark. Ex-
ped., II, 219, 1814. Claokamun.— WUkes, Hist.
Oregon, 44, 1845. Claok-a-mos. — Lewis and Clark,
Exped., I, map, 1814. Glackanun.— Robertson,
Oregon, 129. 1846. Olackamers.— Robertson in H.
R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., Ist sess., 9, 1848.
01a]uunut.—Warre and Vavasour (1885) in Martin,
Hudson Bay Ter., 80, 1849. Olakemat.— Duflot de
Mof ras, Explor. de I'Oregon, ii, 335, 1844. Olarka-
mees.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 372, 1822. Olark-
amei.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vii, 1848. OlarkamM.—
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1806), iv, 255, 1905.
Olarkamus.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., ir, 474, 1814.
Clukemus.— Coues, Henry-Thompson Jour., 811,
1807. aita'q;ema».— Boas, Kathlamet Texts, 237,
1901 (Clatsop name). OmthlaOdinas.— Gatschet,
MS., B. A. E. (own name). TClaolrainaa. — Hines,
Oregon, 144, 1850. KUokamos.— Wilkes in U. S.
Expl. Exped., IV, 368, 1845. Klackamuss.— Kane,
Wand, in N. A., 196, 1859. Klakamat.— Oatschet
in Beach, Ind. Miscel.. 443, 1877. KUki'mawi.—
Gairdner (1835) in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi,
256, 1841. Nsekau's.— Gatschet, Nestucca MS.
vocab., B. A. E. (Nestucca name). Ks tiwat. —
Ibid. (Nestucca name). SshaUtak.— Framboise
quoted by Gairdner (1836) in Jour. Geoe. Soc.
Lond., XI, 256, 1841. Thlakeimas.— Tolmie and
Dawson, Comp. Vocabs. Brit. Col., 11, 1884. Tli-
kXmXah.— Mooney, inf n, 1904 (own name). TUkX-
mith-pibii.— Ibid. Taliil tane.— Gatschet, Umpqua
MS. vocab., B. A. £., 1877 (Umpqua name).
Clahclellah (probably a variation of
Watlala). A Chinookan tribe living in
a single village of 7 houses near the loot
of the Cascades of Columbia r., Greg.,
in 1806.
GlahelalUh.~Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, iv,
275,1905. Glaholellah.— Ibid., 273. Olaholellan.—
Ibid., 258.
Clahnaqnah. A Chinookan tribe or di-
vision living in 1806 on Sauvies id., Mult-
nomah CO., Oreg., on Columbia r. below
the upper mouth of the Willamette.
Their estimated numlx^r was 130, in 4
housen.
Clahnahauah.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., il, 268,
1817. Clan-nali-quah.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and
Clark. IV, 218, 1905. Olan-nah-queh's Tribe of
Moltnomah't.— Ibid., vi, 116, 1906.
Clahoose. A Salish tribe on Toba inlet,
Brit Col., speaking the Comox dialect;
pop. 73 in 1904.
OlahooM.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 243, 1862. Olay-
hoooh.— Whymper. Alaska, 49, 1869. Ole-Hnr*.—
Kane, Wand, in N. A., app.. 1869. Ole-Hiiae.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 488, 1866. XlahooM.—
Can. Ind. Aff. for 1874, 142. XlahoMr— Ibid.,
1891, map. KUhooi.— Downie in Mayne, Brit.
Col., app„ 449, 1862 (name of inlet). KUahooM.—
Can. Ind. Aff. for 1874, 144. Tlahooa.— Tolmie and
Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 119b, 1884. Tlahii's.—
Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887.
Claikahak. A Chnagmiut village on
the right bank of Yukon r., near Ukak,
Alaska; perhaps identical with Khaik.
Claikahakamut.— Post-route map, 1903.
Claikehak. A Chnagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on the N. bank of Yukon r., above
Tlatek, Alaska.
Olaikehakamut— Post route map, 1903.
Clallam ('strong people'). A Salish
tribe living on the s. side of Paget sd.,
Wash., formerly extending from Port
Discovery to Hoko r., being bounded at
each end by the Chimakum and Makah.
Subsequently thev occupied Chimakum
territory and established a village at Port
Townsend. A comparatively small num-
ber found their way across to the s. end of
Vancouver id., and, according to Kane,
there was a large village on Victoria har-
bor. They are said to be more closely re-
lated to the Songish than to any other
tribe. Their villages were : £1 wha, Hoko,
Huiauulch, Hunnint, Kahtai, Kaquaith,
Klatlawas (extinct), Pistchin (extinct),
Sequim, Stehtlum, Tsako, Tsewhitzen,
Tsitsukwich, and Yennis. Eleven villages
were enumerated by Eells in 1886, but
only 3 — Elwha, Pistchin, and Sequim —
are spoken of under their native names.
Pop. 800 in 1854, according to Gibbs. •^
There were 336 on Puyallup res., Wash.,
in 1904—248 at Jamestown and 88 at Port
Gamble. ( J. b. s. )
Ohalam.— Famham, Travels, 111. 1843. COalaBU.—
Nicolay, Oregon, 143, 1846. OlallaBis.— Stevens in
Ind. Aff. Rep.. 450. 1854. Olallems.— Oallatin in
Tians. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, 19, 1848. GUl-lnmi
Indians.— Kane, Wand, in N. A., 209, 1859 (refer-
ring to their village in Victoria harbor). Hue-
yaag-uh.— Mackav quoted by Dawson in Trans.
Roy. Soc. Can. lor 1891, sec. ii, 7 (own name:
* the people ' ). Khalama.— Smet, Letters, 231, 1848.
Klalams.— Smet, Oregon Miss.. 58, 1847. Kla-
lanes.— Ibid., 56. KfiOlam.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 254,
1877. Hoosdaliun.— Scouler in Jour. Qeog. Soc.
Lond., 1, 224, 1841 ( Noos is a preftxum genimeium),
Hooselalum.— Lane (1849) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 62. Slst
Cong., 1st sess., 173, 1860. Hoostlalmns.— Scnool-
craft, Ind. Tribes, v. 700. 1866. Hostlalalm.— Tol-
mie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 120b, 1884.
y wsdalntn . —Latham in Trans., Philol. Soc. Ix>nd.,
71. 1856. Hu-sklaiBL— Eells in letter. Feb., 1886
(own name: 'strong people '). Nns-kl&i-jSBi.—
Gibbs, Clallum and Lummi, v, 1868. B'MuaaB.—
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 534, 1878. 8«1«1-
Inm.— Jones (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76. 84th Cong.,
3d sess., 6, 1857. Skal-lum.— Schoolciaft, Ind.
Tribes, IT, 698, 1864. S'KUllams.— U. S. Ind.
Treat., 800, 1873. 8'Klallan.— Stevens in Ind. Aff.
Rep., 450, 1864. 8Klal-liim.— Starling, ibid., 170,
1852. Thwspi'-ldb.- McCaw, Puyallup MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 1886. Tlalama.— Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes,
III, 96, map, 1863. TlaOBm.— Boas in 6th Rep.
N. W. Tribes Can. , 10, 1889. Tlalum. —Tolmie and
Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col.. 120b, 1884. TseUl-
BULL. 30]
CLAN AND GENS
303
J.— Grant in Jour. Roy. Ge(^. Soc., 293, 1S57.
WooMlalim.— Lane in Ind. AiT. Rep., 162, 1850.
Clan and Oeni. An American Indian
clan or gens is an intratribal exogamic
group of persons either actually or theo-
retically consanguine, or^nizeil to pro-
mote tHeir social and political welfare, the
members being usually denoted bv a (com-
mon class name derive<l generally from
some fact relating to the habitat of the
group orto its usual tutelary being. In the
clan lineal descent, inheritance of per-
sonal and common property, and the
hereditary right to puolic office and trust
are traced through the female line, while
in the gens they devolve through the
male line. Clan and gentile organizations
are by no means universal among the
North Ameri(*an tribes; and totemisni,
the possession or even the worship of per-
sonal or communal totems by individuals
or groups of persons, is not an essential
feature of clan and gentile organizations.
The terms clan and gens as defined and
employed bjr Powell denote useful dis-
criminations in social and political organi-
zation, and, no better names having been
proposed, they are used here practically
as aefined by Powell.
Consanguine kinship among the
Iroquoian and Muskhogean tribes is traced
through the blood of the woman only,
and membership in a clan constitutes
citizenship in the tribe, conferring certain
social, political, and religious privileges,
duties, and rights that are denied to aliens.
Bv the legal fiction of adoption the blood
of the alien might be changed into one of
the strains of Iroquoian blood, and thus
citizenship in the tribe could be conferred
on a person of alien lineage. The primary
unit of the social and political organiza-
tion of Iroquoian and Muskhogean tribes
is the ohwarhiraj a Mohawk term signify-
ing the family, comprising all the male
and female progeny of a woman and of
all her female descendants in the female
line and of such other persons as may l>e
adopted into the ohwacMra. An ohwachira
never bears the name of a tutelary or other
deity. Its head is usually the eldest
woman in it. It may be composed of one
or more firesides, and one or more ohira-
rhiras may constitute a clan. The mem-
bers of an ohwachira have ( 1 ) the right to
the name of the clan of whicn their.o/ztiYi-
c^tra is a member; (2) the right of inherit-
ing property from deceased meml)ers; and
(3) the right to take part in councils of the
ohwachira. The titles of chief and sub-
chief were the heritage of imrticular
ohwachiraa. In the development of a
clan by the coalescence of two or more
actually or theoretically related oh imrh iratt
only certain ohwachiras obtained the in-
heritance and custody of the titles of and
consequently the right to choose chief
and subchief. Very rarely were the off-
spring of an adopted alien constitute an
ohwachira having chiefship or subchief-
ship titles. The married women of child-
bearing ajfe of such an ohwachira had the
right to hold a council for the purpose of
choosing candidates for chief and sub-
chief of the clan, the chief matron of one
of the ohwachiran l)eing the trustee of the
titles, and the initial step in the deposition
of a chief or 8ul)chief was taken by the
women's council of the ohwacfiira to
whom the title belongs. There were
clans in which several ohuxichiras pos-
sessed titles to chiefships. The Mohawk
and Oneida tribes have only 3 clans, each
of which, however, has 8 chiefships and
3 subchiefships. Every ohwachira of the
Iroquois possessed and worshij)ed, in ad-
dition to thone owned by individuals, one
or more tutelary deities, called oiaron or
ochiiuKjenda, which were customarily the
charge of wise women. An alien could
be taken into the clan and into the tribe
only through adoption into one of the
ohwachirna. All the land of an ohwachira
was the exclusive property of its women.
The ohwachira was bound to purchase
the life of a meml)er who had forfeited
it by the killing of a member of the
tril)e or of an allied tribe, and it pos-
sessed the right to spare or to take the
life of prisoners made in its behalf or
offered to it for adontion.
The clan among tne Iroquoian and the
Muskhogean peoples is generally consti-
tuted of one or more ohwachiras. It was
developed apparently through the coa-
lescence of two or more ohwachiras hav-
inga common alxxle. Amalgamation natu-
rally resulted in a higher organization and
an enlargement and multiplication of
rights, privileges, and obligations. Where
a single ohwachira represents a clan it was
almost always due to the extinction of
sister ohwachiras. In the event of the
extinction of an ohwachira through death,
one of the fundamental niles of the con-
stitution of the League of the Iroquois
provides for the preservation of the titles
of chief and subchief of the ohwachira^ by
placing these titles in trust with a sister
ohwachira of the same clan, if there be
such, during the pleasure of the League
council. The following are some of the
characteristic rights and privileges of the
approximately identical Iroquoian and
Muskhogean clans: (1) The right to a
common clan name, which is usually that
of an animal, bird, reptile, or natural ob-
ject that may fonnerly havel>een regarded
as a guardian deitv. (2) Representation
in the council of the triU*. (3) Its share
in the comnninal ])roi)erty of the tril)e.
(4) The right to have iti^ elected chief
and sulH'hicf of the clan confirmed and
installed by the tribal council, among the
304
CLAN AND GENS
[ n. A. B.
Iroquois in later times by the League
council. (5) The right to the protection
of the tribe. (6) The right to the titles
of thechiefshipsand subchief ships heredi-
tary in its ohuxichiras. (7) The right to
certain songs, chants, and religious ob-
servances. (8) The right of its men or
women, or both together, to hold councils.
(9) The right to certain personal names,
to l)e bestowed upon its members.
(10) The right to adopt aliens through
the action of a constituent ohwachira.
(11) The right to a common burial
ground. (12) The right of the child-
bearing women of the ohwachiras in
which such titles are hereditary to elect
the chief and subchief. (13) The right
of such women to impeach and thus in-
stitute proceedinjjs for the deposition of
chiefs and subchiefs. (14) The right to
share in the religious rites, ceremonies,
and public festivals of the tribe. The
duties incident to clan membership were
the following: (1) The obligation not to
marry within the clan, formerly not even
within the phratry t(j which the clan be-
longed; the phratry being a brotherhood
of clans, the male members of it mutu-
ally regarded themselves as brothers and
the female meml)ers as sisters. (2) The
joint obligation to purchase the life of a
member of the clan which has been for-
feited by the homicide of a member of
the tribe or of an allied tribe. (3) The
obligation to aid and defend fellow-
members by supplying their needs, re-
dressing their wrongs and injuries, and
avenging their death. (4) Thejointobli-
gation to obtain prisoners or other persons
to replace memljers lost or killed of any
ohwachira of a clan to which they are
related as father's clansmen, the matron
of such ohwachira having the right to ask
that this obligation be fulfilled. All these
rights and obligations, however, are not
always found together.
The clan or gentile name is not usually
the common name of the animal or ob-
ject after which the clan may be called,
but denotes some salient feature or char-
acteristic or the favorite haunt of it, or
may be an archaic name of it. One of the
Seneca clans is named from the deer,
commonly called neogl^^, * cloven foot',
while the clan name is hadinioflgwaiiu* ,
* those whose nostrils are large and fine-
looking.' Another Seneca clan is named
from tne sandpiper, which has the ono-
matoi>oetic name dow\sdoui\ but the clan
name is hodVnmio\ 'those who come
from the clean sand,' referring to the
sandpiper's habit of running along the
water's edge where the sand is washed
by the waves. Still another clan is called
after the turtle, commonly named ha'u-
owa from its carapace, but the clan desig-
nation is hadiniadefl\ *they have upright
necks.' The number of clans in the dif-
ferent Iroquois tribes varies. The small-
est number is 3, found in the Mohawk
and Oneida, while the Seneca have 9, the
Onondaga 8, and the Wyandot 12.
Clans and gentesare generally organized
into phratries and phratries into tribes.
Usually only 2 phratries are found in
the modern organization of tribes. The
Huron and the Cayuga appear formerly
to have had 4, but the Cayuga to-day
assemble in 2 phratries. One or more
clans may compose a phratry. The clans
of the phratries are regarded as brothers
one to another and cousins to the mem-
bers of the other phratry, and are so
addressed. The phratry has a certain
allotted place in every assembly, usually
the side of the fire opposite to that held
by the oth<^ phratry. A clansman in
speaking of a person of the opposite
phratry may also say **He is my father's
clansman," or **He is a child whom I
have made," hence the obligation resting
on members of a phratry to "find the
word" of the dream of a child of the
other phratry. The phratry is the unit
of organization of the people for ceremo-
nial and other assemblages and festivals,
but as a phratry it has no officers; the
chiefs and elders of the clans composing
it serve as its directors.
The government of a clan or gens,
when analytically studied, is seemingly a
development from that of the ohivaaiira.
The government of a tribe is developed
from that of the clan or gens, and a con-
federation, such as the League of the
Iroquois, is governed on the same prin-
ciple.
The simpler unit of organization sur-
rendered some of its autonomy to the
higher unit so that the whole was closely
interdependent and cohesive. The estab-
lishment of each higher unit necessarily
produced new duties, rights, and privi-
leges.
According to Boas the tribes of the
N. AV. coast, as the Tlingit, Haida, Tsim-
shian, Heiltsuk, and Kitamat, have ani-
mal totems, and a *' maternal organiza-
tion" in which the totem groups are
exogamic. The Kwakiutl, however, al-
though belonging to the same stock as
the last two, do not have animal totems,
because they are in **a peculiar transi-
tional stage." The Kwakiutl is exoga-
mic. In the N. part of this coast area a
woman's rank and privileges always de-
scend to her children. As the <!rest, or
totemic emblem, descends in the female
line through marriage among the Kwa-
kiutl, a somewhat similar result has been
brought about among them. Among the
Haida and the Tlingit there are respec-
tively 2 phratries; the Tsimshian have 4,
the Heiltsuk 3, and the Kitamat 6. The
BULL. 30]
OLANINNATA— CLIFF-DWELLINGS
305
tril)e8 of the s. part of the coast, acicord-
inj? to the same authority, are "piurely
paternally organized." Natives do not
always consider themselves descendants
of the totem, but rather of some ancestor
of the flan who obtained the totem. An
adopted remnant of a tribe may some-
times constitute a clan. See Social ortjan-
izitiion, (j. N. B. H. )
Claniimata. A Chinookan tribe living
in 1806 on the s. w. side of Sauviei^ id.,
Multnomah co., Greg. Their estimated
population was 200, in 5 houses.
OUh-in^iuita. — Lewisand C^ark Exped., Cones e<l.,
1249, note, 1893. OlAh-in-na-Uu— Orig. Jour. Lewis
and Clark, iv, 213 et neq., 1905. Clanimatas.—
Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 371, 1822. Clan-in-na-
U'l.— Orig. Jour., op. cit., vi, 116, 1905.
Clatacnt. A former Chinookan village
on the N. side of Columbia r., 10 m. below
The Dalles, Greg. — Lee and Frost, Gregon,
176, 1844.
Clatchotin. A division of the Tenan-
kutchin on Tanana r., Alat>ka.
Bear Indiaiu. — Dawson in Rep. Geol. Surv. Can.
1888, 208b, 1889. Clatoohin.— Allen, Rep. on
Alaska, 137, 1887. Sa-tahi-o-tia'.— Ibid
. Cttataop. (l^^'^V^/ait, * dried salmon.' —
Boas). A Chinookan tribe formerly
alx>ut C. Adams on the s. side of the
Columbia r. and extending up the river
as far as Tongue pt and s. along the coast
to Tillamook Head, Greg. In 1806 their
number, according to liwis and Clark,
was 200, in 14 houses. In 1875 a few
Clatsop were found living near Salmon r.
and were removed to Grande Ronde res.
in Gregon. The language is now prao
tically extinct, and the remnant or the
A,^ tribe has been almost wholly absorbed by
neighboring groups. The villages of the
Clatsop, so far as known, were Konope,
Neacoxy, Neahkeluk, Niakewankih, Ne-
ahkstowt, and Necotat. (l. f. )
Oalt-iOM.— Hunter, Captivity, 71, 1823. Chat-
•opft.— Dart in Ind. AIT. Rep., 214, 1851. Oladiaps.—
Scouler (1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i,
286, 1818. Olap-Mtt— Clark (1805) in Orig. Jour.
Lewis and Clark, m, 238, 19a5. Olasaps.— Stihool-
eraft, Ind. Tribes, iii, map, 96, 1853. Glassops.—
Smet, Letters, 220, 1843. Clastops.— Keane in
Stanford, Compend., 509, 1878. ClaUap*.— Belch-
er, Voy., I, 307, 1843. OUtsopV.— Orig. Jour.
Lewis and Clark (1806), vi, U7, 1905. Clatsqps.—
Ibid. (1805), III, 241, 19a5. Clatstops.— Famham,
Travels, 111, 1843. Olatsap.— Nesmlth in Ind. AtT.
Rep. 1867, 821, 1858. Clot oop.—Orig. Jour. Lewis
and Clark (1805), ni, 244, 19a5. Klaat-sop.— Gibbs,
MS., B. A. £. Klatrapt.— Smet, Letters, 231,
1848. Klatsaps.— Townsend, Narr., 175. 1839.
XUtsops.— Scboolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 201, 1853.
L&lcluak.— Boa.s, Chinook TextM, 277, 1894 (own
name). Li'klelaq.—Boaa, field notes, (Upper
Chinook name: ' dry salmon ' ). Latsop.— Ford in
Ind. Aff. Rep., 250, 1858. Batohap.— Buschmann,
Spuren der azt.-Spr., 632, 1859. Tlatsap.— Hale in
U. 8. Expl. Exped., vi, 215, 1846. TseMahtsop-
tidia.— Trans. Oregon Pion. Assn., 85, 887.
Clansliaven. A former Eski mo mission-
ary station on Disko bay, w. Greenland.
OUoaliaveii. — Crantz, Hist. Greenland, i, 15, pi. 1.
1787. Olaushavn. — Meddelelscr om Oroniand,
XXY, map, 1902.
lOlsy, Clay-work. See Adobe , Pottery,
Olay-eatiiig. See Food.
Bull. 30— 05 20
Clayoqnot. A Nootka tribe livinj? on
Meares id. and Tortino inlet, Clay(M|uot
sd., Vancouver id.; pop. 241 in 1904,
having become rt^uced from about 1,100
in 60 vears.
Claiakwat.— Swan, MS., B. A. K. Clao-qu-aht.—
Can. Ind. Aff. Rep., 357, 1897. Claucuad.— Galiano,
Relation, 19, 1802. Clavoquot.— May ne, Brit. Col..
251, 1862. Clayoquotocn.— Grant in Jour. Rov.
Geog. Soc., 211, 1861. Clyoquot.—Bul finch in H. R.
Doc. 43, 26th Cong., 1st sess.. 1, 1840. Clyquot*.—
EcllH in Am. Antiq.. 146, 1883. Ilaoquatah.—
Jacob in Jour. Anthrop. Soc. Lond., ii, Feb.,
1864. Klah-oh-quaht.— Sproat, Sav. Life, 308, 1868.
Klahoquaht.— Ibid., 189. Kla-oo-qua-ahts.— Can.
Ind. Aff.. 52, 1875. Kla-oo-quatea.— Jewitt, Narr.,
37, 76, 1H49. Klay quoit.— Find lay quoted by Tay-
lor in Crtl. Farmer, July 19, 1862. Tlao'kwiath.—
Bojis in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 31, 1890.
Tlaoquatch.— Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc. L<md.,
I, 224, 18«. Tlaoquatsh.— Liitham, Elem. Comp.
Philol., 403, 1862.
Clear Lake Indians. A colUn'tive name
loose^v applied to the Indians on Clear
lake, N. Cat. The shores of this lake were
occui)ied entirely by the Ponio except at
the southernmost extremity of the south-
ern arm, known as I^wer lake, which for
a few miles was controlled by Indians of
the Moqueluuman family. See Ltujinid.
(s. A. B.)
Clear Lake Indians.— Wessells (1853) in H. R. Ex.
Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 60, 1857. Lak.— Tav-
lor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 30, 1860. Lakamellos.—
Ibid. LocollomiUos.— Ibid. Lopillamillos.— Ibid.
Lu-pa-yu-ma.— Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft. Ind.
Tribes, in, 110, 1853 jso called by the Wintun
Kope of Puta cr.). iupilomis.— Taylor, op. cit.
Xu-pi-yu-ma. — Wessells, op. cit. CkMollomillos.—
Bancroft, Nat. Races, I, 8^, 1874.
Clecksclocntsee. A former village 12m.
inland from Clayoquot town, on the w.
coast of Vancouver id. — Bulfinch in II.
K. Doc. 48, 26th Cong., Ist sess., 2, 1840.
Clelikitte. An unidentifie<l (Wakash-
an) tril)e al)out Queen Charlotte sd. , Brit.
Col.
Cle-li-kit-te.— Kane, Wand, in X. Am., app., 1H51).
Clemclemalats. A Salish tribe si)eakin^
the Cowichan dialect and residing in
Cowichan valley, Vancouver id.; pop.
140 in 1904.
Clem-olem-a-lato.— Can. Ind. Aff. 1898, 417, 1S»J9.
Olem-olemalets.— Ibid., 1901, pt. ii, 164. Clem-clem-
a-UU.— Ibid., 308, 1879. ClymclymalaU.— Brit.
C</1. Map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872. Tlemtle'me-
leU.— Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887. " " "
^ Clickass. Said to have Ihhmi a former
Kaigani village on Prince of Wales i<l.
See KUnkwan.
Cliok-a«B.— Work (1836) quoted bv Dawson, Queen
Charlotte Ids., 173b. 1^80. CUot-ars.— W(»rk (1«3<;)
quoted by Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 18.¥J.
Clict-ass.— Work (1836) quoted by Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, v, 489, 1855.
Cliff-dwellings. A term applied to desig-
nate the houses in the cliffs of the arid
region, the former occupants of which
belonged, at least in the main, to the
group of tribes now known as the Pue-
blos. The plateau countrv of Arizona,
New Mexico, Colorado, and Utah abounds
in natural recesses and shallow caverns
weathered in the faces of the cliffs; prim-
itive tribes, on taking possession of the
region, although by preference, no doubt.
306
CLIFF-DWELLINGS
[b. a. e.
settling ill the valleys along the running
streams, in many cases naturally occu-
pied the ready-made shelters for resi-
dence, storage, and burial, and for hiding
and defense in time of danger. This
occupancy led in time to the building ot
marginal walls for protection and houses
within for dwelling, to the enlargement
of the rooms by excavation when the
formations j)ermitte(l, and, probably later
on, to the excavation of commodious
dwelHngs, such as arc now found in
many sections of the arid region. Arche-
ologista thus find it convenient to dis-
tinguish two general classes of cliff-dwell-
ings, the cliff-liouse proper, constructed
of masonry, and the cavate house, exca-
vated in the cliffs.
It is commonly believed that the agri-
cultural tribes of j>re-Spanish times, who
built large towns and develoi)ed an ex-
tensive irrigation system, resorted to the
cliffs, not from choice, but because of the
encroachment of warlike tribes,\vho were
probably nonagricultural, having no well
established place of abode. This must be
true to some extent, for no people, unless
urged by dire necessity, would resort to
fastnesses in remote canyon walls or to
the margins of barren and almost inac-
cessible plateaus and there establish their
dwellings at enormous cost of time and
labor; and it is equally certain thata peo-
ple once forced to these retreats would,
when the stress was removed, descend to
the lowlands to reestablish their houses
where water is convenient and in the
immediate vicinity of arable lands. Al-
though these motives of hiding and de-
fense should not be overlooked, it appears
that many of the cliff sites were near
streams and fields, an<l were occupied be-
cause thev afforded shelter and were nat-
ural dwelling places. It is important to
note also that many of the cliff-houses,
both built and excavated, are mere stor-
age places for corn and other property,
while many others are outlooks from
which the fields below could be watched
and the approach of strangers observed.
1 u some districts evidence of post-Spanish
occupancy of some sites exists — walls of
houses are built on deposits accumulated
since sheep were introduced, and adobe
bricks, which were not used in prehistoric
times, appear in some cases. A well au-
thenticated tradition exists among the
Hopi that, about the middle of the 18th
century a group of their clans, the Asa
l^eople, deserted their village on account
of an epidemic and removed to the Can-
yon de Chelly, where they occupied the
cliff-shelters for a considerable period,
intermarrying with the Navaho.
The area in which the cliff-dwellings
occur is practically coextensive with that
in which are now found traces of town
building and relics attributable to the
Pueblo trilx^s. The most noteworthy of
these groups of built dwellings are found
in the canyons of the Mesa Verde in
Colorado, in Hovenweep, McP^lmo, and
SQUARE. TOWER W CUff RUIN GROUP, WCEilftU CREEK,
CGLDRAIJO
^MoiiteKunui t^anyons? in Cokirado ami
tvtah, in Canyon do Clielly anil its
Imiin'hcH in M. E* Arizona^ and, of the
ravate variety, in tht^ cliffs of the Jemea
plateau filer ng the Hio Grande in New
BULL. 30]
CLIFF-DWELLINGS
307
Mexico, and in the Verde valley of Ari-
zona. Although there are local differ-
ences in style of building, construction,
plan, and finish, the chief characteristics
are much the same everywhere. Corre-
sponding difference's with general likeness
are observed in implements, utensils, and
ornaments associated with the ruins —
facts which go to show that in early
periods, as now, numerous trilial groups
were representeil in the region, and that
then, as now, there was a general cominu-
nity of culture, if not kinship in blood.
Owing to differences in tlie composi-
tion of the rocky strata, the natural shel-
ters occupied by the cliff-dwellings are
greatly varied in character. While many
are mere horizontal crevices or isolateil
niches, large enough onlv for men to
crawl into and build small stone lodges.
two, or more stories in height, or to the
rocky roof, where this is low and over-
hanging. I n the larger shelters the build-
ings are much diversified in plan and
elevation, owing to irregularities in the
conformation of the floor and walls. The
first floor was the rock surface, or if that
was uneven, of clay or flagstones, and
upper floors were constructed of poles set
in the masonry, often projecting through
the walls and overlaid with smaller poles
and willows, finished above with adobe
cement. Some of the rooms in the larger
buildings were round, corresponding in
appt^arance and no doubt in purpose to
the kivas, or ceremonial chambers, of the
ordinary pueblos. The masonry is ex-
cellent, the rather small stones, gathered
in many cases from distant sites, being
lai<l in mortar. Th(» stones were rarely
CUFF VILLAGE (cUFF PALACE), MESA VERDE, COLORADO. iSANTA FE RAILWAY)
there are extensive chand)ers, w ith com-
paratively level floors, and with roofs
opening outward in great swei»ps of solid
rock surface, more imposing than any
stnicture built by human hands. These
latter are capable of accommtxlating not
merely single households, but communi-
ties of considerable size. The niches
occur at all levels in cliffs rising to the
height of nearly a thousand feet, and are
often approached with great difficulty
from below or, in rare cases, from above.
Where the way is very steep, niche stair-
ways were cut in the rock face, making
approach possible. I^ders of notched
logs were also used. In the typical cliff-
dwelling of this class, the entire floor of
the niche is occupied, the doorway giv-
ing entrance through the outer wall,
which is built up vertically from the
brink of the rocky shelf anS rises one.
dressed, but were carefully stMected, so
that the wall surface was even, and in
sQuie cases a decorative effect was given
by alternating layers of smaller and lar^r
pieces and by chinking the crevices with
spalls. The walls were sometimes plas-
tered inside and out and finished with
clay paint. The doorways were small
and squarish, and often did not extend
to the floor, except an opening or square
notch in the center for the passage of the
feet. The lintels were stone slabs or con-
sisted of a number of sticks or small tim-
bers. Windows, or outlook apertures,
were numerous and generally small.
Cliff-dwel lings to which the tenn cavate
is applied are not built but dug in the
cliffs. Where the formations are friable
or chalky, natural recesses or openings
were enlarged by digging, and this \ed
to the excavation of chambers and groups
308
CLIFF-DWELLINGS
[B. A.B.
of chambers at points where no openings
previously existed. In eases where the
front opening was large, either originally
or through the effects of weathering, it
TYPICAL CLIFF-HOUSE, MANC08 CANYON, COLORADO.
(holmes, JACKSON )
was walled up a.s in the ordinary cliff-
dwelliny;, the doors and openings being
of usual type; but the typical cavate
dwelling is entered through a small hewn
opening or doorway and consists of one
EXCAVATED DWELUN08 IN CLIFFS OF VERDE VALLEY, ARIZONA.
(c. mindeleff)
or more (!hambers, approximately rectan-
gular or roundish in outline, adapted to
the needs of the occupants. The floor is
often below the level of the threshold,
and both floors and walls are sometimies
plastered, and, in cases, a simple orna-
mental dado in one or more colors is car-
ried around some of the principal rooms.
Frequently crude fireplaces occur near
the entrance, sometimes provided with
smoke vents; and numerous niches, al-
coves, and storage places are excavated
at convenient pomts. In front of the ex-
cavated rooms, porches were sometimes
built of poles, brush, and stones, holes
cut in the cliff wall furnishing the pos-
terior support for roof and floor beams.
These cavate dwellin|2:s are most numer-
ous on the E. side of the Jemez plateau,
facing the Rio Grande, where almost
every northern escarpment of the mesas
l)etween the mountains and the river
is honeycomlxHl with them (Bandelier,
Hewett, Mindeleff). They are also nu-
merous along the Rio San Juan and its n.
SCCnON TMROU6N A B
GROUND-PLAN AND SECTION OF EXCAVATED DWELLING, VERDE
VALLEY, ARIZONA. (c. MINDELEFF )
tributaries in New Mexico and Colorado
(Holmes), and in the valley of the Rio
Verde in Arizona (Fewkes, 5lindeleff).
Belonging to the cavate class, yet meas-
urably distinct from the dwellings last
described, are certain rude habitations
excavated in the slopes of cinder cones
and in the steep faces of scoriaceous de-
posits in the vicinity of Flagstaff, Ariz.
These are entered by doorways excavated
in the steep slopes of cliffs, or by shafts
descending obliquely or vertically where
the slopes are gentle. The rooms are of
moderate or small size and generally of
rather irregular outline. The walls have
been plastered in some cases, and not in-
frequently exterior chambers have been
built of the rough scoriaceous rocks. The
correspondence of these habitations and ,
their accompanying artifacts with the
architectui^l and minor remains of the
BPLL. .30]
CLIFF PALACE
309
general region make it clear that the
occupants of these strange dwellings were
a part of the great Puehlo family (Powell,
Fewkes).
The minor works of art asj^o<"iated with
the cliff-dwellings are in general closely
analogous to similar remains from the
ancient plateau and village sites of the
same section. This applies to hasketry,
pottery, textile products, stone imple-
ments and utensils, and various kinds of
weapons and ornaments. The presence
of agricultural implements and of de-
posite of charred corn in many places
indicates that the people depended largely
on agriculture.
The antiquity of the cliff-dwellings can
only be surmised. That many of them
were occupied in comparatively recent
times is apparent from their excellent
state of preservation, Init their great
numbers and the extent of the work ac-
complished suggest very considerable
antiquity. Just when the occupancy of
the cliffa l)egan, whether 500 or 5,000
years ago, must for the present remain a
Question. Some travelers have reimrted
tne occurrence of ancient stone nouses
overwhelmed and destroyed by flows of
lava, and have inferred great age from
this; but verification of these reports is
wanting. Striking differences in the
crania of earlier and later occupants of
the cliff-dwellings are cited to prove early
occupancy by a distinct race, but crani-
ologists observe that e<iually striking dif-
ferences exist between tribes living side
by side at the present day. It may be
safely said that to the present time no
evidence of the former general occupancy
of the region by peoples other than those
now classe<l as Pueblo Indians or their
neighbors to-day has been furnished.
Amon^ the more important examples of
the cliff ruins are the so-callea Cliff
Palace in Walnut canyon and the Spruce
Tree House in Navaho canvon. Mesa
Verde, Colo. (Chapin, Nordenskiold) ;
Casa Blanca in Canyon de Chelly (Min-
deleff); and the so-called Montezuma
Castle on Beaver cr., Ariz. (Mearns).
Intimately associated with these cliff-
dwellings, and situated on the plateaus
immediately above or at the base of the
cliffs below, are ruins of pueblos in every
way identical with the pueblos in the
open country. See Pueblos.
In the canyons of the Piedras Verdes
r., Chihuahua, Mexico, are cliff-dwell-
ings corresponding in many respects with
those of the Pueblo region. These are in
ruins, but in other sections of the same
state there are similar dwellings occupied
to-day by the Tarahumare (Lumholtz).
The most southerly cliff-dwellings thus
far observed are in the state of Jalisco,
central Mexico (Hrdlicka).
Quite distinct in type from the cliff-
dwellings of the arid region are the pic-
turesque and remarkable dwellings of the
I^^kimo fishermen of King id., near the
X. margin of Bering sea. Here there are
some 40 dwellings partly excavated in
the side of the precipitous cliffs and
partly built of stone and wood. The
exterior portions are constnicted of drift-
wood poles and covere<l with hides and
earth. A low-covered passage, 10 to 15 ft.
in lengtli, leads under the center of the
dwelling, which is entere<l by a small
opening in the floor. In summer these
ciives sometimes become too damp for
comfortable occupancy, and the people
erect summer houses over them, which
consist of a framework of wood covered
with walrus hides, forming rooms from
10 to 15 ft. s(iuare. These houses are
anchored to the rocks with ropes of raw-
hi<le which prevent their being blown
into the sea (Jackson, Nelson). See Pile-
(hrellings.
Amongworks treating of the cliff-dwell-
ings of the arid region are: Bandelier in
Papt^rs Arch. Inst. Am., in, 1890; iv,
1892; Birdsall in Bull. Am. (ieog. Soc,
xxiii, 1891; Chapin, I^nd of the Cliff
Dwellers, 1892; Fewkes in 17th and 22d
Reps. B. A. E., 1898, 1904; Hewett in
Smithson. Rep. 1904, 1905; Holmes in
Rep. r. S. (ieol. Surv. of Terr, for 1876,
1879; Jackson, ibid., 1874, 1876; Lum-
mis (1) Strange Corners, 1892, (2) Land
of Poco Tiempo, 1893; .Mearns in Pop.
Sci. Mo., xxxvii, 1890; Mindeleff (V.) m
8th Rep. B. A. E., 1891; Mindeleff (C.)
in 13th Ren. B. A. E., 1896; Nordens-
kiold, C'liff Dwellings of the Mesa Verde,
1893; Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., xviii,
1901; Prudden in Am. Anthrop., v, no.
2, 1903; Simpson, Exped. into Navajo
Country, 1850; Stevenson in Bull. Am.
(leog. Soc., XVIII, 1886. The Mexican
cliff-houses are described by Lumholtz
in Unknown Mexico, i, 1902, and by
Hrdlicka in Am. Anthrop., v, 1903; and
those of Alaska bv Nelson in 18th Rep.
B. A. E., 1899, *and by Jackson in
Metropol. Mag., Jan., 1905. See Archi-
terture, Ifabitations, Popular Fallacies,
Pueblos. (w. H. H.)
Cliff Palace. A celebrated ruined cliff-
dwelling in Cliff canyon, Mesa Verde,
8. Colo., 2 m. across the mesa, s. e. of
the Spruce Tree House. It consists of a
group of houses in a fair state of preser-
vation, all coimecting and opening one
into another, the whole forming a cres-
cent about 100 yds. from end to end. It
contains ruins of 146 rooms, some of which
are on a secondary ledge. The village
containe<l 5 kivas or estufas. See H. K.
Rep. 3703, 58th Cong., 3d sess.,1905, and
consult Chapin and Nordenskiold cited
above under CHff-dwell'mgn.
310
CLISTOWACKA CLOTHING
[B. A. B.
CliBtowacka. A Delaware village for-
merly near Bethlehem, Pa.— Loskiel
(1742) in Day, Penn., 517, 1843.
Clocktoot. A bodv of Shuswap of Kam-
loops agency, Brit. Col. ; pop. 194 in 1884.
Olook-toot— Can. Ind. Afif.. pt. i, 188, 1884.
Clo-oose. A Nitinat village at the
mouth of Suwany r., s. w. coast of Van-
couver id.; pop. 80 in 1902.— Can. Ind.
Aff., 264, 1902.
Cloqnailam. A former subdivision and
village of the Upper C^ehalis on a river
of the same name in w. Washington.
Oliokquamish — Ford in Ind. Aff. Rep., 341, 1857
(called Lower Chehalis, but probably the same
as the above.) Kla-kwiil-lum.— Boas, inf n, 1904.
LoqiulEm.— Ibid.
Clothing. The tribes of northern Amer-
ica belong in general to the wholly
clothed peoples, the exceptions being
those inhabiting the warmer regions of s.
United States and the Pacific coast, who
FLORIDA WAR CHIEF,* SIXTEENTH CENTURY. (OE BRY )
BOY'S COSTUME; WESTERN
Eskimo. (Murdoch)
were semiclothed. Tanned skin of the
deer family was generally the material for
clothing throughout the greater part of
the country, and dressed fur skins and
pelts of birds sewed together were invari-
ably used by the Eskimo. The hide of the
buffalo was worn for robes by tribes of
the plains, and even for dresses and leg-
gings by older people, but the leather
was too harsh for clothing generally,
while elk or moose skin, although soft,
was too thick. Fabrics of bark, hair,
fur, mountain-sheep wool, and feathers
were made in the n Panfic, Pneblo,
and southern regions,
and cotton has been
woven by the Hopi
from ancient times.
Climate, environ-
ment, elevation, and
oceanic currents de-
termined the materi-
als used for clothing
as well as the demand
for clothing. Sinew
from the tendons of
thelargeranimals was
the usual sewing ma-
terial, but fibers of
plants, especially the
agave, were also em-
ployed. Bone awls
were used in sewing;
bone needles were
rarely employed and
were too large for fine work. The older
needlework is of exceptionally good char-
acter and shows great skill with the awl.
Unlike manv other arts, sewing was prac-
tised by both sexes, and each sex usually
made its own clothing. The typical and
more familiar costume of the Indian man
was of tanned buckskin and consisted
of a shirt, a breechcloth, leggings tied
to a belt or waist-strap, and low mocca-
sins. The shirt, which hung free over
the hips, was provided with sleeves and
was designed to be drawn over the head.
The woman's costume differed from that
of the man in the
length of the shirt,
which had short
sleeves hanging
loosely over the
upper arm, and in
the absence of
the breechcloth.
Women also wore
the belt to confine
the garment at the
waist. Robes of
skin, woven fabrics,
or of feathers were
also worn, but
blankets(q.v.)were
substituted for these
later. The costume
presented tribal dif-
ferences in cut, color, and ornamentation.
The free edges were generally fringed, and
quill embroidery and beadwork, paint-
ing, scalp-locks, tails of animals, feathers,
claws, hoofs, shells, etc., were applied
MAN'S costume; western Eskimo.
(Murdoch)
\
BDLL. aO]
CLOTHING
311
Boots o^ Hudson Bay Eskimo,
(turner)
as ornaments or channH (see Adornment).
The typicjil dress of the Pueblo Indians is
generally similar to that of the Plains
trilx's, except
that it is made
larji:ely of woven
fa))rics.
The Alaskan
Rskimo costume
also is quite siin-
ilar, but the
woman's coat is
provided with a
hood, and legging
and mocciisin are
made into one
garment, while
the men wear
breeches and
boots. Besides the heavy fur outer cloth-
ing, under-coat, under-trousv^rs, and stock-
ings (the latter in s. Alaska of twined
grass) are found neces-
sary by the Eskimo as a
protection from the cold.
They also make water-
proof coats of the intes-
tines of seal and walrus,
which are worn on hunt-
ing trips in the kaiak.
In s. Alaska a long outer
dress without hood, made
of Riuirrel pelts, is worn,
a costume indicating Rus-
In general the Eskimo
costume was more complete than that of
any tribes within
the United States.
TheBritishColum-
bia tribes made
twined robes of
frayed cedar bark
and sagebrush
bark, and bordered
them with otter
fur. The Chilkat
of s. E. Alaska Still
weave remarkable
ceremonial blan-
kets of mountain-
goat wool over a
warp of twisted
wool and bark.
Among the Pa-
cific coast tribes,
and those along
the Mexican bor-
der, the (iulf, and
the Atlantic coast,
the customary gar-
ment of women
was a fringe-like
skirt of bark, cord,
,^ strung seeds, or
peltry, worn around the loins. In certain
e^ons or during special occupations onl v
the lorn band was worn. For occasional
WOMAN'S HOOD; WESTERN
ESKIMO. (Murdoch)
sian influence.
use in cooler weather a skin robe or cape
was thrown about the shoulders, or, under
exceptional conditions, a large robe woven
CHIEF'S Costume; haioa.
(niblack)
HUPA WOMAN'S CINCTURE. ( MASON )
of strips of rabbit skin. Ceremonial cos-
tume was much more elaborate than that
for ordinary wear. Moccasins and leg-
gings were worn throughout much of this
area, but in the warmer parts and in Cali-
ANCIENT CLIFF-DWELLER'S SANDAL. ( MASON )
fornia their use was unusual. Some
tribes near the Mexican boundarv wear
sandals, and sandal -wearing tribes once
ranged widely in the S. W. Those have
also l)cen found in Kentucky caverns.
ANCIENT SANDAL FROM A KENTUCKY CAVE. ( HOLMES )
Hats, usually of basketrv, were worn by
many Pacific coast tribes. Mittens were
used by the Eskimo and other tribes
of the far N. Belts of various materials
and ornamentation not only confineil the
clothing but supporte<l pouches, trinket
312
CLOTHING
[b. a. e.
bags, paint bags, etc. larger poiU!!ies
and pipe bags of fur or deernkin, beaded
or ornamented with (juillwork, and of
plain skin, nettigg, or woven stuff, were
slung from the
shoulder. Neck-
laces, earrings,
charms, and brace-
lets in infinite va-
riety formed a part
()ftheclothing,and
BASKETRY hat; HA.oA. (n.black) thc wrist-guard to
protect the arm from the recoil of tlie
tx)w-string was general.
Shortly after the advent of whites In-
dian costume was profoundly modified
over a vast area of
America by the
copying of Euro-
pean dreas and the
use of traders' stuffs.
Knowledge of pre-
historic and early
historic primitive
textile fabrics has
been derived from impressions of fabrics
on pottery an<l from fabrics themselves
that have l>een preserved by charring in
Basketry Hat; Hupa.
MODERN BUCKSKIN COSTUMES; WOMAN AND CHILD; KIOWA.
( Russell, Photo)
fire, contact with copper, or protection
from the elements in caves.
A synopsis of the costumes worn
by tribes living in the 11 geographical
regions of northern America follows.
The list is necessarily incomplete, for
on account of the abandonment of
tribal costumes the data are chiefly his-
torical.
(1) Eskimo (Xiprthem). Men: Shirt-
coat with hood, trousers, half or full
lx)ots, stockings, mittens. Women:
Shirt-coat with large hood, trousers or
legging-moccasins, belt and mittens, nee-
dle-case, workbag, etc. ( Southern. ) Men :
Robe, gown, trousers, boots, hood on
gown or cap.
(2) Athapascan (J/rtrA-mzi> and Yukon).
Men: Shirt-coat, legging-moccasins,
breechcloth, hat, and hood. Women:
Ix)ng shirt-coat, legging-moccasins, belt.
(8) A ixJONQUi AN- Iroquois (Northern).
Men: Robe, shirt-coat, long coat, trousers,
leggings, moccasins, breechcloth, turban.
(Virginia.) Men and women: Cloak,
waist garment, moccasins, sandals(?),
breechcloth (?). ( Western.) Men: Robe,
long dress-shirt, long leggings, moccasins,
bandoleer bag. Women: Ix)ng dress-
shirt, short leggings, moccasins, l)elt.
( A rvtic. ) Men : Long coat, open in front,
short bree(thes, leggings, moccasins,
gloves or mittens, cap or headdress.
Women: Robe, shirt-dress, leggings, moc-
casins, belt, cap, and sometimes a shoul-
der mantle.
(4) Southern or Musk hog ean (Semi-
nole). Men: Shirt, over-shirt, leggings,
moccasins, breechcloth, belt, turban.
Formerly the Gulf tribes wore robe,
waist garment, and occasionally mocca-
sins.
(5) Plains. Men: Buffalo robe, shirt
to knees or longer, breechcloth, thigh-
leggings, moccasins, headdress. Women:
Ix)ng shirt-dress with short ample cape
sleeves, belt, leggings to the knees,
moccasins.
(6) North Pacific (Chilkat). Men:
Blanket or bark mat robe, shirt-coat
(rare), legging-moccasins, basket hat.
Women: Tanned skin shoulder- robe,
shirt-dress with sleeves, fringed apron,
leggings(?), moccasins, breechcloth (?).
(7) Washington-Columbia (Sali8h),
Men: Robe, headband, and, rarely, shirt-
coat, leggings, moccasins, breechcloth.
Women: Long shirt-dress, apron, and,
rarely, leggings, breechcloth, moccasins.
(8) Shoshonean, Same as the Plains
tribes.
( 9 ) California-Oregon ( Hupo ) . Men :
Robe and waist garment on occasion,
moccasins (rarely); men frequently and
old men generally went entirely naked.
Women: Waist garment and narrow
aprons; occasionally rol>e-cape, like Pu-
e])lo, over shoulders or under arms, over
breast; basket cap; sometimes mocca-
sins. (Central California). Men: Usually
naked; robe, network cap, moccasins
and breechcloth occasionally. Women:
Waist-skirt of vegetal fiber or buck-
skin, and basketry cap; robe and mocca-
sins on occasion.
(10) Southwestern (Pueblo). Men:
Blanket or rabbit or feather robe, shirt
with sleeves, short breeches partly open
on outer sides, breechcloth, leggings to
knees, moccasins, hair-tajie, and head-
band. Women: Blanket fastened over
one shoulder, extending to knees; small
calico shawl over blanket thrown over
shoulders; legging-moccasins, belt. San-
dals formerlv worn in this area. Snow
RITLL. 301
CLOWWEWALLA ChVB9>
313
nioc'i^iiH of fur 8onietinu\s worn in win-
ter. (Apache.) Men: Same as on plains.
Women: Same, except legging moccasins
with shield toe. Naraho, now like Pueb-
lo; formerly like Plains tril)es.
(11) GiLA-SoNORA (Cocopd and JAo-
hare). Men: Breechdoth, sandals, some-
times headband. Women: Waist gar-
ment, usually of fringed bark, front and
rear. (Pima.) Same as Plains, formerly
cotton robe, waist cloth, and sandals.
Consult the annual reports of the Bu-
reau of American Ethnology; Bancroft,
Native Races; Carr in Proc. Am. Anti(|.
Soc., 1897; Catlin, Manners and Customs
N. Am. Inds., 1841; Dellenbaugh, North
Americans of Yesterday, 1901 ; (xoddard.
The Hupa, Publ. Univ. of Cal., 1904;
Hariot, Virginia, 1590, repr. 1871; Mason,
Primitive Travel and Transportation,
Rep. Nat. Mus., 1894; Schoolcraft, In-
dian Tribes, i-vi, 1851-57; Willoughby
in Am. Anthrop., vii, nos. 1, 8, 4, 1905.
(w.n.)
Clowwewalla. A branch of the Chi-
nookan family formerly residing at the
falls of Willametti^ r., Oreg. They are
said to have been originally a large and
important tribe, but after the epidemic of
1829 were greatly reduced in numbers.
In 1851 they numl)ered 18 and lived on
the w. bank*opi)osite Oregon City. They
joined in the Dayton treaty of 1855, and
later the remnant was removed to Grande
Ronderes., Oreg. (l. f. )
Olaugh-e-wall-hah.— Parker. Jour., 175, 1H40.
Olough-e-wal-lah.— Ibid.. 178. 1846. Clough-e-
wall-hah.— Ibid., 171, 1840. Clowewallat.— Coues.
Henry-Thompson Jour., 811. 1897. Clow-we-wal-
U.— U. 8. Ind. Treat. (1855), 19, 1873. FaU In-
dians.—Meek quoted by Medill in H. R. Ex. Doe.
76. 30th Cong.. Ut sess.. 10. 1848. Giii'wewa-
lamt.— Boa.<i, field notes. Oitla'we-walamt.— Boas.
MS., B. A. £. Katlawewalla.— Framboise quoted
by Gairdner (1835) in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond.,
XI, 256, 1841. Keowewallahs.— Sloeum (1835) in
H. R. Rep. 101. 25th Cong., 3d sess.. 42. 1839.
ThlowiwaUa— Tolmle and Dawson, Comp. Vocal).
Brit. Col., 11, 1884. Tla-we-wul-lo.— Ljinan in
Oregon Hist. Soc. Quar., i. 323, 1900. Tummewa-
taa.— Sloeum (1836) in H. R. Rep. 101. 26th Cong.,
3d sess.. 42. 1839. Tumwater.— Dart in Ind. A IT.
Rep., 214, 1851. Wallamettes.— Sloeum (1835) in
H. R. Rep. 101, 25th Cong., 3d se-ss., 42. 1839.
'"^M^*rrV^ T^HP ^piiiaw^^Qtiinl^y JH Smith.SOl).
Misc. Con., II, 61, imz. Willammette Indiana.—
Lane in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 3l8t Cong., Ist ses.s.,
171, 1850. Willamette Turn-water band.— U. S. Ind.
Treat. (1855), 19, 1873. WiUhamett*.— Sloeum
(1837) in Sen. Doc. 24, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 15, 1838.
Clubs. Every tribe in America used
clubs, but after the adoption of more ef-
fectual weapons, as the bow and the lance,
clubs became in many cases merely a part
of the costume, or were relegated to cere-
monial, domestic, and special functionn.
There was great variety in the forms of
this weapon or implement. Most clubs
were designed for warfare. Startm^ from
the simple knobstick, the elaboration of
the war-club may be followed in one line
through the straight-shafted maul -headed
club of the Zufii, Pima, Mohave, Paiute,
Kickapoo, Kiowa, and Oto, to the slung-
shot club of other Pueblos, the Apache,
Navaho, Tte, Oto, and Sioux, to the club
with a fixtMi stone head of tlu» Tte, Sho-
shoni, Comanche, Kiowa, and
the Siouan
tril)eH. Another
line Ix^gins with
the carved, of ten
flattened, club
of the typical
pueblos, theZu-
iliand Ho])i(see
Rabbit stirhx)^
and includes the
musket-shaped
club of the
northern Sioux,
and the Sauk
and Fox and
other Algon-
< I uian tribes, and
the Hat, curved
club with a
knobbed head
(Alg. pogamo(j-
gaUf Fr. rasse-
if/^/<') belonging to
someSioucc, and
to the Chippe-
wa, Menominee, and other timl^er Algon-
(piians. Clubs of this type are often set
with spikes, lance-heads*, knife-blades, or
the like, and the elk horn with sharpened
prongs l)elongs to this class.
The Plains tribes and those of the
N. forest country furnish many exam-
AnciIi
Stone
Club; Oregon.
(1-9)
Ancient Copper
Club; Brit-
ish Columbia,
(smith)
cm?^
STONE-HEADED CLUBS OF THE PLAINS TRIBES
pies of dangerous-looking ceremonial
(rlubs of this character. There is, how-
ever, archeologic evidence that rows of
flint splinters or horn points were set in
314
(OAHUILTKCAN
I H. A. E.
clubs by the Iroquois and the Indians of
North Carolina, forininjj a weapon like
the Aztec maquahuitl (Morgan, League of
Iroquois, 359, 1851).
A series of interesting paddle-shaped
clubs, ancient and modern, often with
carved handles, are found in the culture
area of the Salishan tribes. They are
from 18 to 24 in. long, made of bone, stone,
wood,and, rarely, copi)er. Shorter clubs,
that could be concealed about the person,
were also used . I^ Moy ne figures paddle-
shaped clubs that were employed by Flo-
rid ian tribes which in structure and
function suggest a transition toward the
sword.
Outsi<le the Pueblos few missile clubs
are found. Most Indian clubs are fur-
nished with a thong for the wrist, and
others have i>endant8, often a cow*8 tail, a
bunch of hawk or owl feathers, or a single
eagle feather.
The stone-headed clubs were usually
made by paring thin the upper end of a
wooden staff, bending it round the stone
^^ in the groove, and covering
^^^ the withe part and the rest
^^P of the etan with wet raw-
^^ hide, which shrank in drying
^K and held all fast. In many
^B cases, especially on the plains,
^^^^ the handle was
^^^0 inserted in a
^^p^ socket bore<l in
^H the stone head,
^H but this, it
^H would seem, is
^H a modern pro(s
^W ess. The head
^^ of the sliuig-
^f shot club was a
^K round or oval
K^ . stone, entirely
^K inclosed in
^^ rawhide, and
T8IMSH.AH WAR- the handle was
CLOBOFWooo: so attached as tungit war-club or
Iac!() '*" to leave a pi ia- stone; i-?. (nib-
ble neck, 2 or '■**^'*^
3 in. long, between the head and the up-
per end of the handle, also inclosed in
rawhide.
The heads of the rigid clubs were of
hard stone, grooved and otherwise worked
into shape, in modern times often double-
I)ointed and polished, catlinite being
sometimes the material. The pemmican
maul had only one working face, the
other end of the stone being capped with
rawhide. The hide-working maul fol-
lowed the form of the typical club, but
was usually much smaller.
The tril)es of British Columbia and s.
E. Alaska made a variety of clubs for
killing slaves, enemies, salmon, seal, etc.,
and for ceremony. These clubs were
usually handsomely carved, inlaid, and
painted. The. Eskimo did not make clubs
for war, but a few club-like mallets of
ivory and deer-horn in their domestic arts.
Mauls resembling clubs, and which
could be used as such on occasion, were
found among most tribes, the common
form being a stone set on a short handle
by means of rawhide, employed by women
for driving stakes, beating bark and hide,
and pounaing pemmican.
Ceremonial clubs and batons (q. v.)
were used, though few specimens of these
now exist. The chief man of the Mohave
carried a potato-masher-shaped club in
battle, and clubs of similar shape have
been found in caves in s. Arizona. The
Zufii employ in certain ceremonies huge
batons made of agave flower stalks,
as well as some of their ordinary club
weapons, and in the New-fire ceremony
of the Hopi a
priest carries an
agave-stalk club
in the form of a
plumed serpent
(Fewkes). Bat-
ons were often
carried as badges
of office by cer-
tain officers of
the Plains tribes
and those of the
N. W. coast.
Captain John
Smith describes
clubs 3 ells long.
The coup stick
was often a cere-
monial club. It
is noteworthy
that the parry-
ing club was not
known in America. See Batons^ Ham-
mers, Rabbit-sticks^ Tomahawks,
Consult Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895,
1897; Knight, Savage Weapons at the
Centennial, Smithson. Rep. 1879, 1880;
Moorehead, Prehist. Impls., 1900; Mor-
gan, Leagueof the Iroquois, 1904; Niblack
in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1888, 1890; Nelson in
18th Rep. B. A. E., 1899; Smith in Mem.
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist, 1903. (w. h.)
Coahailtecan. A name adopted by
Powell from the tribal name Coahuilteco
used by Pimentel and Orozco y Berra to
include a group of small, supposedly cog-
nate tribes on both sides of the lower
Rio Grande in Texas and Coahuila. \ The
family is founded on a slender basis, and
the name is geographic rather than ethnic,
as it is not applied to any tribe of the
grouf), while most of the tribes included
therein are extinct, only meager remnants
of some two or three aialects being pre-
served. Pimentel ( Lenguas, ii, 409, 1865 )
Tlinqit Club for Killing Slaves;
1-11. (niblack)
BULL. 30]
COAMA (OAQLTK
315
says: "I call this language Tejano or
Coahuilteco, because, according to the
missionaries, it was the one most in use
in the provinces of Coahuila and Texas,
being spoken from La Candela to the
Rio San Antonio.*' The tribes speaking
this language were known under the
names of Pajalates, Orejones, Pacaos,
Pacoas, Tilijayos, Alasapas, Pausanes,
PacuacheSjMescales, Pampopas, Tacames,
Venados, Pamaques, Pihuiques, Borrados,
Sanipaos, and Manos de Perro. The only
book known to treat of their language is
the Manual para atlministrar los santoa
saeramentos, by Fray Bartholom^ Garcfa,
Mexico, 1760. Other names have been
mentioned as possibly those of tribes
belonging to the same family group,
chiefly because they resided in the same
general r^on: Aguastayas, Cachopos-
toles, Carrizos (generic), Oasas Chiquitas,
CJomecrudo, Cotonam, Pacaruja, Pakawa,
Pastancoya, Patacal, Payaya, Pihuique,
Tejones, and Tilijaes. In addition to
these the following may possibly belong
to the family, as the names where men-
tioned are given in connection with those
of some of the preceding tribes: Mesqui-
tes, Parchinas, Pastias, Pelones, and Sali-
nas. How many of the names given are
applicable to distinct tribes and how many
are synonyms is not known on account of
the insuflSciency of data. See Gatschet,
Karankawa Inds. , 1891 . ( a. s. o. c. t. )
»Coahnilteoaii.— Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 68,
1891. =Ooahuilteco.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., map,
1864. =Tejano.-Pimentel, I^nguas, il, 409, 1865
(or Coahuilteco).
Coama. An Indian settlement of which
Alarcon learned from natives of the Gulf
of California region, and described as l)e-
ing in the vicinity of Cibola (Zuili), but
whicli was afterward found by him on
his voyage up the Rio Colorado,* or Buena
Quia. See Alarcon (1540) in Ilakluyt,
Voy., Ill, 514, 1600; Ternaux-Compans,
Voy., IX, 326, 18:^.
Ck>ana, — ^Ternaux-Compans, op. cit.
Ck>anopa. A tribe, apparently Yuman,
residing probably on or in the vicinity of
the lower Rio Colorado early in the 18th
century. They visited Father Kino while
he was among the tiuigyuma and are
mentioned by him in connection with the
Cuchan (Yuma) and other tribes ( Vene-
gas, Hist. Cal., i, 308, 1759; Coues, Garcc's
Diary, 551, 1900). Possibly the Cocopa.
Coapites. An unidentified tribe or band
formerly living in the coast region of the
present State of Texas. — Rivera, Diario y
Derrotero, leg. 2602, 1736.
Ck>aqiie. A tril^ formerly living on
Malhado id., off the coast of Texas, where
CabezadeVaca suffered shipwreck in 1528.
This was almost certainly Galveston id.
Cabeza de Vaca found two tribes, .each
with its own language, living there — one
the Han, the other the Coaque. The peo-
ple subsisted from November to Febru-
ary on a root taken from the shoal water
and on fish which they caught in weirs;
they visited the mainland for berries and
oysters. They displayed much affection
toward theirchildren and greatly mourned
their death. For a j^ear after the loss of
a son the parents wailed each day before
sunrise, at noon, and at sunset. As soon
as this cry was heard it was echoed bvall
the people of the tribe. At the end of the
year a ceremony for the dead was held,
after which ** they wash and purify them-
selves from the stain of smoke.** They
did not lament for the aged. The dead
were buried, all but those who had ** prac-
tise<l medicine," who were burned. At
the cremation a ceremonial dance was
held, l)eginning when the fire was kin-
dled and continuing until the bones were
calcined. The ashes were preserved, and
. at the expiration of a year they were
mixed with water and given to the relatives
to drink. During the period of mourn-
ing the immediate family of a deceased
person did not go after foo<l, but had to
depend on their kindred for means to
live. When a marriage had been agreed
on, custom forbade the man to address
his future mother-in-law, nor could he do
so after the marriage. According to Ca-
beza de Vaca this custom obtained among
tribes "living 50 leagues inland." The
houses of the Coaquet were of mats and
were set up on a ** mass of oyster shells."
The men wore a piece of cane, half a
finger thick, inserted in the lower lip,
and another niece two palms and a half
long thrust through one or both nipples.
Owing to the starvation which faced the
• Spaniards after their shipwreck, they were
forced to eat their dead; this action gave
the natives such great concern that
" they thought to kill " the strangers, but
were dissuaded by the Indian who had
Cabeza de Vaca in charge.
(iatschet ( Karankawa Inds., i, 34, 1891)
is correct in identifying these Indians
with the Cokes of feollaert, but he is
probably wrong in supposing the Cujanos
are also the same. That the Coaques and
the Cujanos or Cohani (q. v.) were dis-
tinct seems to be indicated by the state-
ment of an early Texan settler (Texas
Hist. Quar., vi, 1903) that "the Cokes
and Cohannies" were "but fragments of
the Carancawa tril)e." Probably the
latter are Cabeza de Vaca's Quevenes.
That the Coaque spoke a dialect of Karan-
kawa is indicated as well by Hollaert
(Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Ix>nd., n, 265, 1850),
since he refers to them as a branch of the
"Koronks," a variant of Karankawa.
In 1778, according to Mezi^res, about 20
families of Mayeyes and Cocos lived be-
316
CO A SSITT GOCHIMI
[b. a. e.
tweeii the Colorado and the Brazos, op-
posite the island of La Culebra. The
mounds and j?raves found on the coast of
Texas prol)ably belonged to the Coaque
and kindred tril)es, which are now ex-
tinct, (a. c. p. )
Biscatronges. — Barcia (juoted by (Jatschet, Ka-
rankawa Inds., 34. 1H9I ( = * weepers'). Biska-
tronce. — Bareia, Ensavo, 2(i3. 1723. Cadoques. —
Davis, Span. Coiki. N. Slex., S2. 1H<'>9. Cahoques.—
Cabe^-a de Vaea (l-VJUi. Smith transl., 137, 1S71.
Caoques.— Ibid., 139. Capoques.— Ibid., 82. Ca-
yoques. — Davis. op. cit. Coaquis. — Barcia, Ensayo.
259, 17*23. Cocos.— Rivera, Diario, le^. 2rt02, ITM.
Cok^. — Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., ii,
276, 1H6U. Planidores.— Barcia, Ensayo, 2(V4, 172:i.
Pleureura.— Martin, Hist. I^., i. 116. Quoaquis.—
Donay {^*'>^ quoted by Shea, Di.seov. Miss. Val.,
207, 1852. weepers.— (Jatsehet, Karankawa Inds.,
34, 1891.
Coassitt ('at the pines.' — Hewitt). An
Indian rendezvous (hiring King Philip's
war of 1675; situated about 56 m. above
Hadley, Ma.ss. ( Appleton, 1675, in Barber,
Mass. Hist. Coll., 2<H, 1889). Possibly
Coosuc (q. v.).
Coat. A rancheria, probably of the
Maricopa, visited by Kino and Mange in
1699. — Mange (|U(>ted bv Bancroft, Ariz,
and N. Mex., :{58, 18S9.'
Coatraw. A former Choctaw town
which probably stood about 4 ni. w. of
Newton, Newton co.. Miss., where are
several broad low mounds. The name is
evidently prcatly corrupted and can not
be interpreted. See Romans, Florida,
map, 1775; Brown in Miss. Hist. Soc.
Publ., VI, 444, 1902.
Ck>atuit. A village of Praying Indians,
probably belonging to the Nauset, near
Osterville, Barn.stableco., Ma8s.,in 1674. —
Bourne (1674) in Mass. Hist. 8oc. Coll.,
Ists., I, 197, 1806.
Coaxet. A village of Praying Indians
formerly near Little Compton, Newport
CO., R. I., subject to the Wampanoag.'
As late as 1685 it contained about 100
adults. Acoakset r. preserves the name.
Coak»ett.— Records (16(^1?) quoted by Drake, Bk.
Indy.. bk. 3, 10, 184b. Coaxet.— Dm ke, ibid., 14.
Cokesit— Riiwson and Danforth (1G98) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., X, 130, 1«09. Cooxet.— Hinck-
ley (irrf<.'>), ibid.. 4th s.. v, 133, 1861. Cooxitt.— Ibid.
Coquitt.— Cotton (ltJ74). ibid., 1st s., i, 200, 1806.
Ooxit.— Ibid.
Coayos. An unidentified tribe that
lived near the Cutalchiches, Malicones,
and SiLsolas, of whom Cal)eza de Vaca
(Smith trans., 72, 1851) heard during his
stay with the Avavares in Texas in 1527-34.
Cobardes. Civen by Dominguez and
Escalante (Doc. Hist. Mex., 2d s., i, 537,
1854) as one of 5 divisions of the Ute in
1776, and subdivided into the Huascari,
Parusi, Yubuincariri, Ytimpabichi, and
Pagampache. Some of these appear to
be Ute and some Paiute.
Cobora. An Opata village, now in niins,
near (iuachinera, e. Sonora, Mexico. —
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 517,
1892.
Coca. A former Papago village in s.
Arizona. — Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, June
19, 1863.
Cocash. A naoie of the red-stalk or
purple-stem aster (Aster punieeus)^ known
also as swan-weed, early purple aster,
etc. ; from one of the eastern aialects of
the Algonquian language, signifying *it is
rough to the touch,* in reference to the
stem of the plant. (a. p. c.)
Cochali. Given by Coxe in 1741 as the
name of one of 4 small islands in Tennes-
see r , 40 leagues above the Chickasaw,
each occupied by a ** nation" of the same
name. The others were Kakick, Taho-
gale, and Tali (Little Talasse). The lo-
cation was in N. Alabama, and the names
may perhaps be Creek. Thev do not
seem to be Cherokee, although Cochali
may possibly be kdisHW, implying 'some-
thing in a sheath/ (j. m. )
Ooohali.— Coxe, Carolana, 14, 1741 (after Sauvole,
1701). Oooh*ly.— Ibid., map.
Cochlmi ( ko-chi-mi^ ) . A term originally
used to designate a Yuman dialect sup-
j)08ed to have l)een spoken from about lat.
26° to the N. limit of Ix)wer California. It
is doubtful, however, if any single dialect
was spoken over such an extended area.
It is here employed as a collective or di-
visional name embracing many former
tribes of the Californian peninsula from
lat. 31° southward to al30ut lat. 26°, in-
cluding the settlements around Loreto.
The tribes of this division were the most
populous in the peninsula, though it
would be difficult now to define their
limits to the n. and s. in a strictly ethno-
logic or linguistic sense. According to
Hervas (Idea dell' Universo, xxi, 79-80,
1787) there existed in 1767 the following
missions at which Cochimi dialects were
spoken: San Xavier de Biaundo (pop.
485); San Jos^ Comondu (pop. 360);
Santa Borja (1,500 neophytes); Santa
Maria Magdalena (300 neophytes and
30 catechumens); La Purfsima Concep-
cion (130 neophytes); Santa Rosalia ae
Mulege or Muleje (pop. 300); N. S. de
Guadalupe (530 neophytes); San Ignacio
(pop. 750), and Saiita Gertrudis (pop.
1,0(X)). A few of these Indians are said
to survive. Duflot de Mofras (ExpL,
I, 227, 1844) states that in his time
(about 1842) the Cora, Edu, Pericu, and
Cochimi were no longer distinct from
one another, but Buschmann regards this
as doubtful.
The following are classed as Cochimi
tribes or rancherias: Adac, Afegua, Ag-
gavacaamanc, Amalgua, Amaniini, Am-
etzilhacaamanc, Anchu, Avolabac, Ca-
amancijup, Caddehi, Cadecuijtnipa, Cade-
gomo, Cadeudebet, Cahelca, Cahelejyu,
Cahelembil, Cahelmet, Camancnaccooya,
Camanocacaamano, Cunitcacahel, £gui-
BULL. 30]
COCHISE COCHITI
817
aniiacabel, Gabacamanini,Gaiuacaamaiic,
Gamacaamancxa, Hualimea, Idelabuu,
Idelibinaga, Ika, Jetti, Laimon, Liggi^e,
Menchu, Mokaskel, Paviye, Paya, Pia-
caamanc, Piagadme, San Athanasio, San
Benito de Amy, San Francisco Borja, San
Ignacio, San Jos6 de Comondu, San Juan,
^ai Miguel, San Sabas, Santa Aguida,
Santa Lucia, Santa Maria, Santa Marta,
Santa Monica, Santa Nynfa, San Pedro y
San Pablo, Santisima Trinidad, Tahiia-
sabacabel, Temedegua, Uacazil, Vaba,
Valmc^el, Vajademin, Vazacahel, Vina-
tacot. (h. w. h.)
Ooohiemes.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 18, 1H60.
Ooehinuui.— Mayer, Mexico, n, 38, la'SS. Cochime.—
Venegas, Hist. Cal., ii, 340, 1759. Cochimi.— Her-
vas, Idea dell' Universo, XVII, 1784. Oochimies.—
Clavijero. Hist. Cal., 22, 1789, repr. 1852. Co-
ehimy.— Venega.s, Hist. Cal.. ii, 324, 1759. Ooohini.—
Ibid, 200. OolimieB.— Humboldt, Atlas, carte 2,
1811. Ootihimi.— Baegert in Smithson. Rep.. 1864,
393, 1865. Ouohimiei.— Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s.. v.
53,1857. Ouohinu.— Ibid., 80.
Cochise. A Chiricahua Apache ihief,
father and predecessor of Nachi. Al-
though constantly at feud with the Mexi-
cans, he gave no trouble to the Americans
until after he went, in 1861, under a flag of
truce, to the camp of a party of soldiers
to deny that his tribe nad abducted a
white child. The commanding oflirer
was angered by this and ordenMl the visit-
ing chiefs seized and bound l)ecause they
would not confess. One was killed and
four were caught, but Cochise, cutting
through the side of a tent, made his esca|)e
with three bullets in his body and imme-
diately began hostilities to avenge his
companions, who were hanged bv the
Federal troops. The troops were forced
to retreat, and white settlements in Ari-
zona were laid waste. Soon afterward
the military post^ were abandoned, the
troops being recalled to take part in the
Civil war. This convinced the Apache
that they need only to fight to prevent
Americans from settling in their country.
Cochise and Mangas Coloradas defendiMl
Apache pass in s. k. Arizona against the
Califomians, who marched under (ien.
Carleton to reopen communication l)e-
tween the Pacific coast and the E. The
howitzers of the California volunteers put
the Apache to flight. When United States
troop returned to resume the occupancy
of the country after the close of the
Civil war. a war of extermination was
carried on against the Apache. Cochise
did not surrender till Sept., 1871. When
orders came to transfer his people from
Cafiada Alamosa to the new Tularosa
res., in New Mexico, he escaped with a
band of 200 in the spring of 1872, and
his example was followed by 600 others.
After the Chiricahua res. was established
in Arizona, in the summer of 1872, he
came in, and there died in peace June 8,
1874. He was succeeded iia chief by his
son Taza. The southeastern most county
of Arizona bears Cochise's name. See
Apache^ 1 1i iricah ua.
Cochise Apache. — A fonner band of Chi-
ricahua Apache, named from their leailer.
Cachees's band.— Boll in Jour. Ethnol. Soc.Lond., i,
242, 1869. Cachise Apaches.— White. MS. Hist.
.Vpaches, B. A. E., IS/.'). Cachise Indians.— Ibid.
Cochees.— Ind. Aff. Kop.. 141, 1868. Cochise.—
Ind. AtT. Kt'p.. 209, 1875. Northern Chiricahua
Apaches. —Ibid.
Cochiti {Ko-rlil-tl^). A Keresan tribe
and its puel)loon the w. bank of the Rio
(irande, 27 m. s. w. of Santa Fe, X. Mex.
Before moving to their present location
the inhabitants occupied the Tyuonyi, or
Rito de los Frijoles, the Potrero <le las
Vaca-s the inieblo of Haatze on Potrero
San Mijruel or Potrero <lel Capulin, and
FRANCISCO ARESO, A HEADMAN OE. COCHITI
the pueblo of Kunpa in the C'afuula de
Cochiti. rp to this time, which was still
l)efore the earliest Spanish explorations,
the ancestors of the present San Felipe
inhabitants and tho.«e of Cochiti formed
one tribe speakinjr a si n«;le dialect, but on
account of th(» persistent hostility of their
N. neighbors, the Tewa (to whom is at-
tributed this gradual southerly movement
and through whom they were compelled
to abandon Kuapa), the tribe wasdivided,
one branch going southward, where they
built the pueblo of Katishtya (later called
San Felij>e), while the other took refuge
on the Potrero Viejo, where they estab-
lished at least a temporary pueblo known
as Hanut Cochiti. On the abandonment
of this village they retired <> or 7 m. s. e.
to the site of the present Cochiti, on the
318
CO0KAROU8E — COCKEROUSE
[b. a. e.
Rio Grande, where they were found by
Ofiate in 1598. The Cochiti took an
active part in the Pueblo revolt of 1680,
but remained in their pueblo for 15
months after the outbreak, when, learn-
ing of the return of Gov. Otermin to recon-
quer New Mexico, they retreated with the
Keresan tribes of San Felipe and Santo
Domingo, reenforced by some Tewa from
San Marcos and by Tigua from Taos and
Picuris, to the Potrero Viejo, where they
remained until about 1683, when it was
reported that all the villages from San
^ Felipe northward were inhabited. Be-
x^ » tween 1683 and 1692 the Cochiti, with
i^^^ their San Felipe and San Marcos allies,
again took refuge on the Potrero Viejo.
In the fall of the latter year they were
visited in their fortified abode (known to
the Spaniards as Cieneguilla) by Vargas,
the reconqueror of New Mexico, who in-
duced them to promise to return to their
g^rmanent villages on the Rio Grande,
ut only San Felipe proved sincere, for
in 1692 the Cochiti returned to the
Potrero, where they remained until earlv
in the following vear, when Vargas, with
70 soldiers, 20 colonists, and 100 warriors
from the friendly villagers of San Felipe,
Santa Ana, and Sia, assaulted the pueblo
at midnight and forced the Cochiti
to flee, the Indian allies leaving for the
protection of their own homes. The
force of Vargas being thus weakened, the
Cochiti returned, surprised the Span-
iards, and succeeded in liberating most
of the Indian captives. Vargas remained
a short time, then burned the pueblo and
evacuated the Potrero, taking with him
to Santa Fe a large quantity of com and
other booty and nearly* 200 » captive
women. Cochiti was the seat of the
Spanish mission of San Buenaventura,
with 300 inhabitants in 1680, but it was
reduced to a visita of Santo Domingo
after 1782. These villagers recognize the
following clans, those marked with an
asterisk being extinct: Oshach (Sun),
Tsits (Water), Itra (Cottonwood), Shu-
whami (Tunjuoise), Mohkach (Mountain
Lion), Kuhaia (Bear), Tanyi (Calabash),
Shrutsuna (Coyote), Hapanyi (Oak),
Yaka (Com), Hakanyi (Fire), *Dyami
(Eagle), *Tsin (Turkey), *Kut8 (Ante-
lope), *Shruhwi (Rattlesnake), * Wash pa
( Dance-kilt ) , *Kishqra ( Reindeer ? ) . In
addition, Bandelier notes an Ivy and a
Mexican Sage clan. Present population
300. The Cochiti people occupy a grant
of 24,256 acres, allotted to them by the
Spanish government- and confirmed by
United States patent in 1864. Consult
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 139,
1892. See also Keresan^ Pueblos.
(p. W. H.)
CMhiti.— Bandelier, Gilded Man. 216, 1893 (mis-
print). Choohit^.— -Barreiro.OjeadaSobre N.M6x.,
15, 1832. Chochiti.— Ofiate (1698) in Doc. In6d..
XVI, 114, 1871. Oocheli.— Vaugondy, map, Am6r-
ique, 1778. Oooheti.— Ind. Aflf. Rep., 263, 1889.
Oocheto.— Ibid. , 264. Cochilit.— Meriwether (1856)
in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37, 34th Cong., 3d fiess., 146, 1867.
Oochit.— Prince, N.Mex. ,217, 1883. Coohite.—Zarate-
Salmeron {ca. 1629) quoted by Bancroft, Nat.
Races, i, 600, 1882. Oo-ohi-te-mi'.— Pac. R. R. Rep.,
ni, pt. 3, 90, 1856 (given as own name). Coohite-
nM.— Lummis in Scribner's Mag., 92, 1893. Cochi-
teumi.— Cubas, Repub. of Mexico, 66, 1876. Co-
chiti.—Oftate (1598) in Doc. In6d., xvi, 102, 1871.
Coohitinot.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Bui., i, 26,
1883. Ooohito.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex.,
map, 1889. Oochitti. -Vargas (1694) quoted by
Bandelier in Arch. lust. Papers, iv, 168, 1892.
Oochity.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 194, 1865. Oocluti.—
Curtis, Children of the Sun, 121, 1883. CotohiU.—
Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist.,vi, 183,1886. Ootohiti.—
Powell in Am. Nat., xiv, 604, Aug., 1880. Ou-
ohili.— Simpson, Report Sec. War, map 4, 1850.
Cuohin. — Abert, Report, map, 1848. JCo-oke.—
Simpson, op. cit., 143 (proper name). Kotite.—
'Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 37, 1891 (Tewa
name). Kot-ji-ti.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa-
pers, in, 260, 1890 (native name of pueblo).
Kota'ti.— Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 ( Acoma
name). Kotyft'.— Ibid. Ko-tyi-ti.— Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Papers, iii, 126, 1890 (native name of
pueblo) . Od^-ti.— Bandelier, Gilded Man,21 6, 1893
(0=Q). Pa'hlaL— Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895
^Isleta and Sandia name; prob. sig. 'soapweed
place'). Pa'l-ab.— Gatschet, Isleta MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 1885 (*soapweed town': Isleta name).
Pa'lahuide.— Ibid. (Isleta name for a Cochiti
man), aui'-me.— Pac. R. R. Rep., iii, pt. 3, 90,
1856 (incorrectly given as Spanish name of the
Cochitemi). St. Bartholomew.— Pike, Trav., 273,
1811 (evidently Cochiti; intended for San Bue-
naventura). San Bartolomeo.— MHhlenpfordt,
Meiico, li, 533, 1844 (mistake). San Buena Ventura
de Coohita.— Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 91,
1893. San Buenaventura de Cochiti.— Ind. Aff.
Ren. 1867. 213, 1868. San Buena Ventura de
Coohiti.— Alencaster (1805) in Meline, Two Thou-
sand Miles. 212, 1867. S. Buenaventura.— Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 281, 1889.
Cockaroase. A word, derived from the
Algonquian dialect of Virginia, used by
early writers in the sense of a person of
distinction. In the 17th century the term,
written also cockerouse, was applied to a
member of the Provincial Council. Bev-
erly, in 1705, stated that "a cockarouse
is one that has the honor to be of the king*s
or queen^s council." Capt. John Smith
(Hist. Va., 88, 1624) couples the word
with w^o?fjanc6 as synonymous with "cap-
tain ' ' . Trumbull derives cockarouse from
the Virginian caivcawaassough, * adviser,*
' urger,* from which may be derived also
caucus. '{\. p. r.)
Cockenoe (Algonq. : 'interpreter*). A
Montauk, made captive in the Pequotwar
of 1637, who afterward became the inter-
preter of John Eliot, the missionary and
Bible translator, and probably his first
teacher in the Massachuset language. He
died about the close of the 17th century,
having rendered great service not only to
individual settlers, but also to the authori-
tiesof New EnglandandNew York. With-
out him the Eliot Bible, in all probability,
would never have been prepared. See
Tooker, John Eliot's First Indian Teacher
and Interpreter: Cockenoe de Long
Island, 1896. (a.f.c.)
Cockeroase. See Cockarouse,
BULL. 30]
COCOIGUI COCOPA
319
Coooijrai* A former Maricopa rancheria
on the Rio Gila, s. Ariz., visited by Father
Sedelmair in 1744. — Bancroft, Ariz, and
N. Mex., 366, 1889.
Cooomoraohic. A Tarahumare settle-
ment on the headwaters of the Rio Yaqui,
lat. 28*» 40^ long. 107*» 40^ Chihuahua,
Mexico. — Orozco v Berra, Geog., 323,
1864.
Coconoon. A Yokuts tribe of Califor-
nia, said bv Johnston in 1851 (School-
craft, Ind. 'rril)es, iv, 413, 1854) to "live
on the Merced r., with other bands, under
their chief Nuella. There are the rem-
nants of 3 distinct bands residing together,
each ori^nally speaking a different lan-
guage. The aged of the people have
difficulty in understanding each other."
The vocabulary given by Johnston is
Yokuts. Merced r. is, however, otherwise
known to have been inhabited only by
Moquelumnan tribes. The Coconoon are
also mentioned by Rovce ( 18th Rep. B. A.
E., 780), together witfi 5 other tribes fr<;ni
Tuolumne and Merced rs. (all of which
were undoubtedly Moquelumnan), as
ceding all their lands, by treaty of Mar.
19, 1851, excepting a tract between the
Tuolumne and the Merced. If these state-
ments about the Coconoon are correct,
they constitute<l a small detached division
of the Mariposan family situated among
Moquelunman groups midway between
the main Inxly of the stock to the s. and
the Cholovone to the n. w.
Gk>HM>-no<m.— Johnston (1851) in Son. Ex. 1)(M'. (il.
32d Cong., Ist sees., 23, 1862.
Cocopa (ko^'ko-p<i). A division of the
Yuman family which in l()04-05 lived in 9
rancherias on the Rio Colorado, 5 leagues
above its mouth. At a later period they
alsoextended into the mountains of Ix)wer
California, hence were confined almost ex-
clusively to Mexico. According to Heint-
zeiman, in 1856, the tribe was formerly
strong in numbers and could muster 300
warriors; their total number was estimated
by Fray Francisco Garc^s in 1775-76 at
3,000, but there are now only 800 in n.
Lower California, in the valley of the Rio
Colorado. Th e Cocopa were repu t-ed to be
less hostile than the Yuma or the Mohave,
who frequently raided their villages;
nevertheless they were sufficiently war-
like to retaliate when necessary, Garc6s
said of them in 1776 that they had always
been enemies of the Papago, Jalliquamai
(Quigyuma), and Cajuenche, but friendly
toward the CufSeil. Although spoken of
as bein^ physically inferior to the cog-
nate tnbes, the males are fully up to
and in some cases rather above normal
stature, and are well proportioned, while
the females appear also to be of at least
ordinary size and are also well developed.
Heintzelman (H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th
Cong. 3d sess. , 43, 1857 ) says *' they so much
resemble the Cuchan ( Yuma) in arms,
<lress, manners, and customs it is difficult
to distinguish one from another." They
depended for subsistence chiefly on corn,
melons, pumpkins, and beans, which they
cultivated, adding native grass seeds,
roots, mescjuite beans, etc. The ('ocopa
houses of recent time range in character
from the brush arbor for summer use to
COCOPA MAN. (mcGEE)
the wattled hut, i)lastered outside and in-
side with mud, for winter occupancy.
Polygamy was formerly practised to some
extent. They universally cremate their
dead. The Cuculato are mentioned as a
Cocopa division and Llagas as the name
applied by the Spaniards to a former
group of Cocopa rancherias. ( p. w. h. )
Oacopas.— Ind. AfF. Rep., 390. 1H«;8. Oacupas.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, %, 1H53. Cooap*.—
320
OOOORI — COFA
[B. A. B.
I lid. Aff. Rep., 361, 1859. Cocapat.— Z&rate-Sal-
meron {ca. 1629) in Land of Sunshine, 106, Jan.,
1900. Coohopas.— Stratton, Oatman Captivity, 175,
1857. Co-oo-pah.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 116,
1852. Co-co-pai.—Derby, Colorado River, 16, 1862.
Oucapa.— Garcia (1776), Diary, 434, 1900. Cuoa-
pachaa.— Mayer, Mexico, ii, 88, 1853. Ouoassus.—
Hinton, Handbook to Ariz., 28, 1878. Cuoopa.—
Forbes, Hist. Cal., 162, 1839. Ou-cu-pahs.— Kern
in Sehoolcnift. Ind. Tribes, iv, 38, 1854. Cuhanas.—
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59, 1864 (Cucap^ or; but
Cuhana^Cuchan = Yuma). Oupachas.— Mayer,
COCOPA WOMAN
Me.xieo.
r, 300, 1«53. Kokopa.— Ind. Aff. Rep.,
246. 1877. Kukapa.— A. L. Kroeber, infn., 1905
(Mohave name). Kwikapa.— Ibid. (Mohave
name, alternative form).
Cocori. A former Yaqui settlement s. e.
of the lower Rio Yaqui, Sonora, Mexico,
with an estimated population of 4,000 in
1849. It is now a white Mexican town,
the only Yaqui living there being those
employed as laborers. See Escudero,
Not. Son. y Sin., 100, 1849; Velaaco,
Noticias de Sonora. 84, 1850.
Cocori.— Hardy, Trav. in Mexico, 488, 1829. Coco-
run.— Miihlenpfordt, Mejico, II, pt. 2, 419, 1844.
Esptritu Santo de Cooorin. — Orozco y Berra, Geog.,
355, 1864.
CocoBpera ( ' place of the dogs ' ) . A for-
mer Pima Settlement on the headwatersof
Rio San Ignacio,lat. 31°, Sonora, Mexico;
pop. 74 in 1730, 133 in 1760. The Apache
com-pelled the abandonment of the vil-
lage in 1845. See Bartlett, Pers. Narr.,
I, 417, 1854; Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i,
563, 1884.
Cocospara.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue
Welt-Bott, 74, 1726. Cocospera.— Kino (1696) in
Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., i, 267, 1866. Cocapan.—
Rudo Ensayo (1762), 148, 1863. Coscospera.-
Pineda (1769) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., ii, 10,
1856. Santiagro. —Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 563.
1884 (after early doc). Santiago Cocospera. —
Rivera (1730), ibid., 514.
Gocoaeahra. Indians who took part in
the Santa Isabel treaty with the Diegue-
fios of 8. California in 1852. They may
have l)een Yuman or Shoshonean, as
some of the latter entered into the treaty.
Co-oon-oah-ras.— Wozencraft (1852) in Sen. Ex.
Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, ses-s., 289. 1853. Oo-oou-
eah-ra.— Wozencraft (1852) in H. R. Ex. Doc 76,
34th (Jong., 3d sess., 131, 1857.
Cocoyes. Mentioned in 1598 bv Oilate
(Doc. Incd., XVI, 114, 303, 1871),* in con-
nection with the Apache, as a wild tribe of
the New Mexican region. Judging from
the name, it is possible that one of the
Yuman tribes far to the w. was intended.
CocoyomoB. A mythical people, said to
be regarded by some of the Tarahumare
as their ancient enemies^, by others as
their ancestors; they are also spoken of
as having been the first people. They
were short of stature, lived m caves in
the high cliffs, and subsisted chiefiy on
herbs, especially a small agave, and were
also cannibals. According to one version,
once when they were very bad the sun
came down anci burned most of them to
death; the survivors escaped to .4 large
caves at Zapuri, in which they built adobe
houses, but the Tarahumare finally be-
sieged the place for 8 days, when the
Coc'oyomes perished from hunger. An-
cient ruins near Morelos, s. of Batopilas,
in s. w. Chihuahua, Mexico, are also at-
tributed to them by the Tarahumare,
although according to Hrdlicka these are
of Tepehuane origin. See Lumholtz,
Unknown Mexico, i. 193, 441, 1902.
Goe HadjoB Town. A former settlement
of negro slaves affiliated with or belonging
to the Seminole, w. of Oclawaha r., in
Marion co., Fla. Perhaps identical with
Oclawaha town (q. v. ).
Coe Ha4jo8 Town.— Taylor, War map of Fla., 1839.
King Heijaji's.— Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War,
307, 1822.
Cofa. A ** province" or tribe, proba-
bly of Muskhogean stock, visited by the
De Soto expedition in 1540; situated in
BULL. 30]
COF AQUI COIKA COENTANON
321
N. Georgia and bordering on the CUiero-
kee. — Garcilasso de la Vega, Florida, 112,
1723.
Cofaqai. A (Mnskhogean?) settlement
in E. Georgia, through which De Soto
passed in Apr., 1540.
Oafaqiy.— Map of 1597 in 5th Rep. B. A. E.. 128,
1887. Oofaohis.— Ratincsque, introd. to Marshall,
Ky., I, 80, 1824. (Jofaqui.— Garcilasso do la Vega,
Florida, 113. 1723. Cofoque.— Biedma in French.
Hist. Coll. La., ll, 100, 1850. Cofoqui.— Biedma in
Hakluyt Soc. Publ., ix, 179, 1851.
Gofitachiqai. A town and province of
the Yuchi(?), situated on Savannah r.;
visited by De Soto in 1540. According
to Pickett (Inv. of Ala., 41, 1849) there
was a tradition among the Indians about
1735 that the town stood on the e. bank
at Silver Bluff, Barnwell co., S. C, and
this view is taken by Jones (De Soto in
Ga., 1880). On the other hand, the
name of Vandera's Canos (Smith, Col.
Doc. Fla., I, 16, 1857), identified with
this place, is preserved in Cannouchee,
a N. w. affluent of Ogechee r., Ga., while
another place called C^annouchee is in
Emanuel co., Ga. The province was
governed at the time of De Soto's visit
by a woman who was at war with the
people of Ocute and Cofaqui. She gave
the Spaniards a friendly rece[)tion and
entertained them for several days. This
friendship was ill requited by the Spanish
leader, wno carried her away with him a
prisoner, but she managed to escai)e in
the mountainous region of n. e. Georgia,
returning to her village with a negro
slave who had deserted the army. Her
dominion extended along the river to
about the present Habersliam co., Ga.,
and westward probably across a third or
more of the state. (c. t. )
Oafltachyque.— Biedma in Ternaux-Compans,
Voy., XX, 63, 1841. Canos.— Vandera (^1569) in
French, Hist. Coll. La., il, 290, 1875. Canosi.—
Ibid. Oofachiqui.— Garcilasso de la Vega, Florida,
la*), 1723. Cofaciqui.— wShipp, De Soto and Florida.
337, 1881. Oofeta^que.— Vandera (1569) in French,
op. cit. Cofitaohvque.— Biedma in Hakluyt Soc,
Publ., IX, 180. 1851. Outifaohiqui.— Gentl. of Elvas
(1557) in French, op. cit.. ii, 143. 1H.tO. Outifiaohi-
qua.— Stevens, Hist. Ga., 22, 1847.
Cogoacoala (prob. 'swan people,' from
Choctaw 6koky * swan ' ). One of the nine
villages constituting the Natchez confed-
eracy in 1699. — Iberville in Margry, D^c,
IV, 179, 1880.
Cogainachi. Given by Velasco (Bol.
Soc. Mex. Geog. Estad., 1* s., x, 705,
1863) as one of the 4 divisions of the
Opata, inhabiting principally the valley
of the Rio Babispe, a tributary of the
Yaqui, and adjacent small streams in e.
Sonora, Mexico. Their villages, so far
as known, were: Bacadeguachi, Guazavas,
Matape (in part), Mochopa, Nacori,
Oposura, Oputo, and Tonichi. As the di-
vision was baseii on neither linguistic nor
ethnic characters, Ooguinachi, Teguima,
and Tegui were soon dropped as classifi-
catory names.
Bull. 30—05 21
Caguinachi.— Davila, .Sonora Hi.st., 317. 1894.
Opatas cogiiinachis. — Orozco v Berra, Geog., 344,
1864.
Cohannet (probably from qnaneaet^ or
qauiunetj 'long'). .\ former Wampa-
noag village about Fowling Pond, near
Taunton, Bristol co., Ma.ss. King Philip
often made it a hunting station. VVhen
John Eliot and others began their mis-
sionary work among the Indians, a part
of those at Cohannet went to Natick, but
the majority removed to Ponkapog about
1654. (.1. M.)
Cohanat.— Forbes (1793) in Mius.s. HL*Jt. Soc. Coll.,
1st s.. Ill, 1(">6, 1794. Cohannet.— May hew (1653 j,
ibid.,:5(ls.,iv, 234, 1834.
Cohas. A tribe mentioned with the
Chickasaw in 1748 as having been at-
tacked l)v the Huron (X. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., X, i38, 1858). Possibly the Creeks.
Cohatchie. A former Upper Creek
town on the left bank of Coosa r., in s. w.
Talladega co., Ala. — Royce in 18th Rep.
B. A. E., pi. cviii, 1899.
Cohate. A former Maricopa rancheria
on the Rio (fila, s. Ariz., visited by Father
Sedelmair in 1744 (Bancroft, Ariz, and
N. Mex., 366, 1889). It was apparentlji
distinct from (iohate.
Cohes. A division of Maidu in Sutter
CO., Cal., numerous in 1851.
Cohes.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 244, 1851. Cohias.— Wozen-
craft (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec.
.Mes.s., 206, 1N53.
Cohog. See Quaho(j.
Cohosh. The common name of several
plants; written also cohush. Black co-
hosh is black snakeroot, or bugbane
(Ctmicifnga racemosa); blue cohosh is
squawroot ( ( 'aidophi/llnm thalictroides) ;
white cohosh is white baneberry (AcLra
alba); red cohosh is red baneberry (A.
rubra ) . The word comes from one of the
K. dialects of Algonquian, probably de-
rived from the root represented by the
Massachuset kushki ' rough '. ( a. f. c. )
Gohoth. A i)rovince of the s. coast of
South Carolina, mentioned by Ay Hon in
1520.— Barcia, Ensayo, 5, 1728.
Gohowofooche. A former Seminole town,
of which Neamathla was chief, situated
28 ni. N. w. of St Marks, Wakulla co.,
Fla.— II. R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823)^ 19th
Cong., 27, 1826.
Cohush. See ('(thosh.
Coila. {Koi-ai-rta, 'panther comes
there'). A former Indian town on a
creek of the same name in Carroll co.,
Miss. This region may originally have
been oc(^u[>ied by some of the Yazoo r.
tribes, but in 1830, when Coila is referred
to, it was probably occupied by Choctaw.
See Halbert in Trans. Ala. Hist. Soc, iii,
72, 1899.
Qoiilla. — Records qnoted by Halbert, op. cit.
Goiracoentanon. Mentioned by La Salle
as a tribe or band of the Illinois living
on a branch of Illinois r. about 1680.
No Illinois tribe of this name is known.
322
COIRACOITAGA COLLECTING
[b. a. e.
Caraoontauon.— Ooxe, Carolana, 17, 1741. Caraco-
tanon.— Ibid., map. Coiraooentanon.— La Salle
(m. 1680) in Margry, D6c., 11,201,1877. Ko«raeoe-
netanon. — Ibid., 42. Koracoonitonon.— Hennepin,
New Discov. , 310, 1698. Korakoenitanon. —La Salle,
op. cit., 96. Kottivakooiiitanouas. — Gravier (ca.
1700) in Tail ban, Perrot, 221, 1864.
Coiracoitaga. A tribe mentioned by La
Salle (Margry, D^c, ii, 149, 1877) in con-
nection with the Mahican, Manhattan,
Minnisink, and others in 1681.
Gojate. A Papago village of 103 fami-
lies in 1865, in s. w. Pinal co., Ariz., near
the present town of the same name.
OoajaU.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 135, 1865. CoboU.—
Browne, Apache Country, 291, 1869 (misprint from
Poston). Cojate.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June
19, 1863. CoioU.— Poston in Ind. Aflf. Rep., 385,
1863. Del Cojate.— Bailey, ibid., 208. 1858.
Gojoya. An unidentified people, de-
scribed by Fray Geronimo de Zarate-Sal-
meron, about 1629 (Land of Sunshine,
183, Feb., 1900), as living in a fertile and
well- watered country "80 leagues before
reaching New Mexico from the w. side,
separated by 2 days of travel from the
Rio del Norte [Rio Grande] and the
King's highway." They raised cotton,
com, and other vegetables, and wove
very fine, thin mantas. Their neighbors
to the E. were the Gorretas (Mansos),
and on the s. were their enemies, the
Conchas, or Conchos, who lived about
the junction of the Rio Conchas and the
Rio Grande, in Chihuahua, Mexico. Za-
rate-Salmeron adds that the Cojoya had
hitherto been believed to be the Guagua-
tu(q. V. ). As here given their habitat
coincides somewhat with that of the Jum-
ano (q. v.), as given b^ Espejo in 1582.
Cojuat. A former Diegueflo rancheria
near San Diego, s. Cal. — Ortega quoted
by Bancroft, Hist. Cal., i, 254, 1884.
Gokah ^*eyes open'). A Cree band of
100 skin lodges on Lac Qu'apelle, Assini-
boia, Canada, in 1856; named from their
chief. — Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val., 237, 1862.
Colbert, William. A Chickasaw chief.
During the Revolutionary war he aided
the Americans, and in the army of Gen.
Arthur St Clair led the Chickasaw allies
against the hostile tribes and was known
as the great war-chief of his nation. In
the war of 1812 he served 9 months in
the regjular infantry, then returned to
lead his w^arriors against the hostile
Creeks, whom he pursued from Pensa-
cola almost to Apalachicola, killing many
and bringing back 85 prisoners to Mont-
gomery, Ala. He was styled a general
when he visited Washington at the head
of a Chickasaw del^eation in 1816. In
the treaties ceding Chickasaw lands to
the United States the name of Gen. Col-
bert appears, except in the ones to which
was signed the name Piomingo, which
also was lx>rne by a captain of the Chicka-
saw in the St Clair expedition, and was
the pseudonym under which John Rob-
ertson, **a headman and warrior of the
Muscogulgee nation," wrote The Savage
(Phila., 1810).
Colcene. One of the 3 bands into which
the Twana of n. w. Washington are divided.
Goleene.— Eells in Smithson. Rep. 1887, 606, 1889
(namegiven by the whites). Colcins.— Ibid. Ool-
seed.— Ibid. KoUids.— Ibid, (own name). Kol-
sins.— Ibid. Kwulseet.— Gibbs in CJont. N. A.
Ethnol., I, 178, 1877. auiloene.— Eells, op. cit.
(name given by the whites).
Colchopa. A body of Salish of Wil-
liams Lake agency, Brit. Col. ; pop. 40 in
1889, the last time the name appears. —
Can. Ind. Aff. for 1889, 271.
Cold Conntry. About 1756 some Indian
allies of the French "of the tribe called
the Cold Country," and armed with
bows, attacked the English near Ft Ed-
ward, N. Y. They were recent allies of
the French and sucked the blood of the
slain. Mentioned by Niles (about 1761)
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., v, 436,
1861 . Probably some remote tribe toward
Hudson bay.
Colete. One of the two principal vil-
lages of the Koasatl on lower Trinity r.,
Tex.— Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc.
Lond., II, 282, 1850.
Goligoa. A village visited by the De
Soto expedition in 1542 and described as
in a very fertile country, in which the
troops made salt, "toward the moim-
tains," and by a river at the foot of a
hill; possibly in w. Arkansas or on the
border of the Ozark mts.
Coligoa.--Gentl. of Elvas in Hakluyt Soc. Publ.,
IX, 105, 1851. CoUgua.— Biedma (1544) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., n, 106, 1850. Oolima.— Garci lasso de
la Vega, La Florida, 188, 1723. Province de Sel.—
ShippL De Soto and Florida, 420, 1881. ProTincia
de la Sal. — Garcilasso de la Vega, op. cit., 189.
Colina (* small hill'). A wild tribe of
New Mexico in the 18th century ( Villa-
Sefior, Theatro Am., ii, 412, 1748); not
identified, but probably an Apache band.
Collecting. Trained observers, whose
task is to bring together material and
data on which accurate generalization
may be based, play an important part in
the development of the science of anthro-
pology, in which minute detail and exact
differentiation have increasing weight.
The scientific value of an ethnologic col-
lection depends particularly on the knowl-
edge and skill of the collector.
Arcfieolopy. — In this branch there are
for examination caves, rock -shelters,
mounds, village and camp sites, shell-
heaps, refuse-heaps, mines and quarries,
workshops, pueblos, cliff-ruins, cavate
lodges, garden beds, irrigation works,
forts, altars, shrines, springs, towers,
stone mounds, cemeteries, cam]^ sites, etc.
While each of these requires individual
treatment, depending on the conditions,
and the judgment of the explorer may
modify the methods, modern science re-
quires that all data be reduced to meas-
urement and graphic delineation. Thus
BULL. 30]
COLLECTING
323
the following points are essential: (1)
Accurate location of the site on a map;
(2) photographs of site; (3) plan, with
measurement of areas to be worked; (4)
stakes or datum marks placed; (5) re-
moval of debris and location of specimens
with reference to datum marks with the
aid of camera and pencil; (6) field num-
bers on specimens and references to these
numbers in the notebook; (7) care of
specimens after collection.
Mounds are explored by means of
trenches and then stripped of the upper
part, which rarely contains anything of
importance, but the contour of the mound
is noted and one or more sections plotted.
When the zone of deposits is reached a
layer of earth is removed. The aspect of
skeletons and other objects expoped is
recorded and photographed and their po-
sition marked . Village sites near mounds
are prolific in material illustrating the
life of the former occupants. In the
alluvial soil of the prairie states, wherever
mounds abound such sites may l)e located
by sounding the earth with an iron rod.
The earth is then stripped off a.s in a
mound, or it may be found preferable
to excavate by *M)enching."
The top soil of a cave should be
searched, calcareous deposits, if there l)e
any, broken up and removed, and the
underlying soil l)enche<l and thrown
back, as in a mound. Specimens from
different levels below the datum stakes
or marks are kept separate. A prelimi-
nary exploration of the cave floor is some-
times made by means of test i)its. It will
be found usually that the front of a cave
in the zone of illumination yields most
material, and it is essential to examine
the talus outside the mouth of a cave if
any exists.
The site of an ancient pueblo is first
searched for surface relics, and the ceme-
tery is located. It is customary to ascer-
tain the limits of the cemetery by test
excavations and to work it by trenches,
throwing the earth back and carefully
examining it for small artifacts as the ex-
cavation progresses. On account of the
unproductiveness of excavation in rooms
and the great labor and expense required
to remove the debris, no pueblos have
been thoroughly explored. Generally a
few living rooms and kivas only have
been investigated.
No indication or object is insignificant.
In turning up the soil around ancient
habitations a decayed fragment of cloth,
a wooden implement, or any relic of or-
ganic material mav extend knowledge.
The various offal of debris heaps, such as
bones of animals, shells, and seeds, are
secured, and an endeavor is made to ob-
serve, collect, and record everything that
is brought to light. Every site under
examination demands attention, not
merely for what it may yield in tangible
results; the environment, with its biolog-
ical and geological resources, topography,
and meteorology, requires to be stuoied.
Notes and collections relating to this
subject add much to the clearness of an
appreciation of the conditions which
aided or hampered the development of
culture in a given locality. The relation
of sites one to another, and the grouping
or separation of sites in a locality, are
necessary subjects of inquiry, as are the
presence or absence in a neighborhood of
s{)rings, trails, shrines, detached houses,
canals and reservoirs, and pictographs.
Somatologif. — Human remains are fre-
(juently encountere<l in archeologic work,
and such material is carefully collected,
every bone l>eing saved if possible. The
surface of hard groifnd may be broken
with a pick and the excavation continued
with a shovel. As soon as any part of
the human skeleton is reached, a short
METHOD OF EXHUMING A HUMAN SKELETON, (w. C. MILLs)
stick, a trowel, and a stiff brush are
useil for exposing the l)ones. Often the
bones are fragile and should not be lifted
out until the earth has been loosened
arou nd t hem . Ex posure to sunl igh t and
dry air usually hardens them. The bones
of each skeleton should be marked with
serial numbers, preferably with an ani-
line pencil, and packed in some light,
elastic material. It is better to pack
skulls anart from the rest of the bones.
The collection of somatological data on
the living requires familiarity with the
use of instruments, a knowledge of anat-
omy and physiology, and some training
in laboratory work.
Ethnology. — In this wide field it is
necessary to specialize in order to produce
effective results. Social organization,
customs, language, arts, folklore, and re-
ligion each demands adequate time and
the closest attention for its study. With
the aid of a manual, like *' Notes and
Queries," used by the Anthropological
Institute of Great Britain, the important
324
COLOC COLOR A DAS
r B. A. E.
data concerning a tribe may be sketched,
giving material of value for comparative
study as well as indicating subjects to be
taken up by specialists. Ethnographic
objects form the bulk of collections. In-
numerable collectors gather material of
this kind for various purposes, wittingly
or unwittingly l)ecoming contributors to
the advance of anthropology. As a rule,
however, striking objects only are ac-
quired in desultory collecting. Common
tools, appliances, and products do not
attract the attention they merit.
The most obvious materials for collec-
tions among alK)riginal tribes may be
clas8e<i under the following headings:
Aliment, habitations and appurtenances,
vessels and utensils, clothing, adornment,
implements, transportation, measuring
and valuing, writing, games and jmstimes,
music, art, language,' domestic life, social
life, government, and religion. Physical
man and his surroundings are prime ob-
jects of study. Collections will comprise
specimens of implements, clothing, etc.,
actually or formerly in use, models care-
fully ma<le, photograi)h8 and drawings,
and" descriptions of objects, customs, in-
stitutions of society, laws, beliefs, and
forms of worship. A thorough investiga-
tion of a single tribe re<iuires time and
patience, but the result of painstaking
work in one tribe renders easier the ex-
amination of other tribes. Wherever
possible, photographs of Indians, front
and profile views, should be taken. Casts
of faces are desirable, and with a little
instruction a collector can easily make
them.
The field collector's outfit varies so
much with circumstances and the work
to l>e carried on that it is not possible to
enumerate all the articles needed, yet a
few desiderata of general utility may be
indicated: String and stick ta^, twine,
glue, tissue paper, coarse muslin, cotton
batting, small boxes, pencils, notebooks,
quadrille paper, envelopes, and tape meas-
ure are essential. A 5 by 7 camera with
glass plates is the most useful kind,
though smaller film cameras are more
convenient. The panorama camera is
very useful for extended views or scenery.
It is advantageous to take a film-develop-
ing machine, since by its means one may
be sure of results.
For excavation, lon^-handled shovels,
picks for rough work m hard soil, trow-
els, a long-bladed knife, and a whisk
broom are suflScient. These tools, except
trowels and brush, can nearly always be
procured in the locality where the work
is to be carried on. For work in dry,
dusty caves, cheesecloth or sponge aspira-
tors may be improvised, and acetylene
lanterns or pocket electric lights used to
furnish smokeless light, though the dif-
fused light of candles sometimes gives
more satisfactory results.
For work in somatology numerous ac-
curate instruments are needed, which,
with the methods, render essential a course
of instruction in an anthropological lab-
oratory. The instruments required are
sliding calij^ers, open calipers, a wooden
compass, a wooden standard graduated
meter, a measuring rod, and a tape meas-
ure. A notel)ook ruled for recording
data should be provided.
For casting, dental plaster, vaseline or
other grease, soap, and cheesecloth are
necessary.
Collections in ethno-lx)tany are readily
carried on in connection with other field
work. For this purpose one may take 30
driers, with newspapers for inner sheets.
The driers may l^ strapped to a board
or l)etween two boards of suitable dimen-
sions; in camp, stones or other heavy ob-
jects placed on the package famish the
necessary pressure.
Consult Holmes and Mason, Instructions
to Collectors of Historical and Anthro-
pological Specimens, 1902; Hrdlicka, Di-
rections for Collecting Information and
Specimens for Physical Anthropology,
1904; Mason (I) Directions for Collect-
ing Basketry, 1902, (2) Ethnological Di-
rections Relative to the Indian Tribes of
the United States, 1875; Mills, Explora-
tions of the Gartner Mound and Village
Site, 1904; Niblack, Instructions for tak-
ing Paper Molds of Inscriptions in Stone,
Wood, Bronze, etc., 1883; Notes and
Queries on Anthropology, 1899; Peabody
and Moorehead, Explorations of Jacom
Cavern, 1904; Putnam, On Methods of
Archaeological Research in America, 1886;
Thomas (1) Directions for Mound Ex-
plorations, 1884, (2) Mound Explora-
tions, 1894; Willoughby, Prehistoric Bur-
ial Places in Maine, 1898. See Preserva-
tion of CoUedimis. (w. h.)
Coloc. Apparently two Chumashan vil-
lages, one formerly near the Rincon or at
Ortegas, near Santa Barbara, Cal., the
other near Santa Inez mission.
Ooloc.— Cabrillo (1642) in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla.,
181, 1857. Kolok.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 4,
1860.
Colomino. (1 ) A town placed by Jef-
ferys (French Dom. Am., pt. i, map, 134,
1761) on one of the head streams of Oc-
mulgee r., Ga. (2) A town on the w.
bank of upper Altamaha or St George
r., Ga. (Gussefeld, Map of U. S., 1784).
Both places were within Muskhogean ter-
ritory.
Color. See Anatomy.
Coloradas. A Tepehuane (?) villa^,
apparently situated s. e. of Morelos, in
the Sierra Madre, s. w. Chihuahua, Mex-
ico.— Lumholtz, Unknown Mexico, i, 439,
1902.
BULL. 30]
COLORADO COLOR SYMBOLISM
325
Colorado. A White River Ute chief,
leader in the outbreak of 1879. The
Ute agent, N. C. Meeker, an enthusiast
who telieved that he could readilv inure
the Indians to labor, interested himself
in the internal quarrels of the tril)e and
thus incurred the resentment of Colo-
rado's faction. He removed the agency
to their favorite pasture lands, but when
he attempted to make a beginning of agri-
cultural operations they stopped the plow-
ing by force. They were hunters and did
not care to learn farming. Troops under
Mai. T. T. Thornburgh were dispatched
at the request of Meeker, but after a parley
the Indians understood that they would
not enter the reservation. When they
nevertheless advanced, Colorado, or Colo-
row*, as he was popularly called, led one
of the parties that ambushed the com-
mand and killed Thornburgh and many
of his men on Sept. 29, 1879. Others
then massacred employees of the agency
and made captives of some of the wohien.
The Ute head chief, Ouray, induced the
Indians to cease hostilities before the
arrival of reinforcements.
Color Bymbolism. The American Indi-
ans had extensive and elalK)rate systems
of symbolism which was sometimes ex-
pressed by means of color. Perhaps the
European and Asiatic races have systems
as elaborate, but they are not generally
employed, and knowledge of them is
not so well diffused. The aborigines
throughout the western continent either
painted or tattooed their persons. In
details they may have been governed to
some extent by individual caprice, but
there is good evidence that they usually
followed established and rigid laws of sym-
bolism, particularly in ceremonial decora-
tion. There are records of such symbolic
decoration among savage and barbarous
peoples in all parts of the world, and the
custom of tattooing, not always devoid of
symbolism, remains among the most civ-
ilized. The four cardinal i)oints are sym-
bolized bv color among many American
tribes, and it is probable that at some time
all had such a synilK)iism. In addition to
the four horizontal points or regions of the
universe, three others were sometimes
recognized, which may l)e termed the ver-
tical i>oints or regions, namely, the upper,
middle, and lower worlds. It is probable
that the symbolism of the vertical regions
was very extensive, but knowledge of it
is meager. The following table shows a
few of these svstems of symbolism. The
order in whicli the regions are placed is
that of the Navaho:
Tribe.
Authority.
Apache Gatscliet .
Cherokee Mooney . .
Chippewa 1 Hoffman .
Chippewa '2 ...:. Hoffman .
Creek Gat.s<"het.
Hopi 1 Fewkes . .
Isleta Gatachet .
Navaho 1 Matthews.
Ka8t.
Black.
Red...
White.
I Ro<l...
White.
1 White.
White.
I Green.
I (ireen.
' Blue ..
White... RtHl.
N«>rth. Ijower. Middle. I'pper.*
White.
White.
Navaho 2 Matthews
Omaha
Sioux M iss Fletcher.
Znfiil MrsStevenwm
Ziifii2 CushiuK
Black .
Red...
Red...
White.
White.
Red..
Blue .
Blue..
Black .
Black .
Red...
Red . . .
Yellow . Blue
Black... Blue....
Red Black ; '
White. . . Black : \
Black ... Red and
yellow. ,
Blue.... Yellow. Black All col-
, ors.
Blue.... Black
Yellow . Black... White Blue.
and
black.
Yellow . White
Yellow . Blue
Yellow . Blue
Blue.... Yellow. Black All col-
I I ors.
Blue... Yellow . Black... All col- M a n y
ors. colors.
There are accounts of such symbolism
among the Winnebago, Osage, and other
tribes which do not give the orientation
of the different colors.
Of the two schemes of color recorded
for the Navaho the first is applied in all
son^, ceremonies, prayers, and legends
which pertain to the surface of the earth
or to celestial regions, places of life and •
happiness; the second to songs, etc.,
which refer to the underground world, to
the regions of danger, death, and witch-
craft, where the goddess of witches and
wizards dwells. In regard to other tribes
where more than one system has been
recorde<l there is a tendency among stu-
dents to attribute this to an error on the
part of narrator or recorder, but the Na-
vaho afford evidence that more than one
system may i)roperly exist in the same
tribe and cult. When the Hopi make
dry-paintings the yellow (north) is first
drawn, followed by green or blue (west),
red (south), and white (east), in order,
and the same sequence is observed in
all cases where colors are employed
(Fewkes).
The colors of the cardinal points have
been used to convey something more than
ideas of locality, but which may often
have some connection in the mind with
localitv. J. Owen Doi-sev tells us that the
326
COLOTLAN— COLVILLK
[ B. A. B.
elements as conceived in Indian philoso-
phy, viz, fire, wind, water, ana earth,
are among Siouan iribed symbolized by
the colors of the cardinal points; and
Gushing relates the same of the Zufii.
Mooney says that among the Cherokee
red signifies success, triumph; blue, de-
feat, trouble; black, death; white, peace,
happiness. In another connection he
says: ** Red is a sacred color with all In-
dians and is usually symbolic of strength
and success, and for this reason is a fa-
vorite color in painting the face and body
for the dance or warpath and for paint-
ing the war pony, the lance, etc." Like-
wise black was a si^n of mourning and
white of peace, while red was usually a
sign of war.
There is a symbolism of sex among the
Navaho that is based on that of the car-
dinal points. Where two things some-
what resemble each other but one is
larger, more violent, noisy, or robust than
the other, it is spoken of as the male, while
the smaller, finer, or gentler is spoken of
as female. Thus the supposedly turbu-
lent San Juan r. is called **male water"
and the placid Rio Grande '* female wa-
ter"; an electric storm is called "male
rain," agentleshower** female rain." So
the land n. of the Navaho country, with
giant snow peaks and violent wmds, is
r^arded as the **male land," while the
country to the s., devoid of very high
mountains and sending forth warm, gentle
breezes, is considered the "female land."
For this reason, among the Navaho,
black, the color of the n., belongs to the
male in all things, and blue, the color of
the 8. to the female. Among the Arap-
aho white and yellow are the ceremonial
colors for male and female respectively
(Kroeber), while the Hopi associate red
and yellow with the male, and white and
blue or green with the female (Fewkes).
Many Indian personal names contain
words denoting colors, often in relations
which seem incongruous to us. It is
probable that they generally have mystic
meanings.
Implements used in sames usually have
different significant colors. Where there
are two opposing sides the colors are often
red and black, as they are in many of our
Ces. Thus in the game of nanzozy or
p-and-pole, among the Navaho, one of
the two long sticks is marked black at the
base and the other red. In their game
of hanlse the chip tossed up to determine
which party shall first hide the stone in
the moccasin is blackened on one side
and left unpainted on the other. They
say that this symbolizes night and day,
and the game itself is based on amvth of
the contest of night with day. liay is
commonly symbolized by red and night
by black among the Indians. The Hopi
I
paint their i)rayer-sticks in prescribed
colors; those for rain are green, for war
red. Every kachina has a prayer-sick
painted yellow, green, red, white, and
black, indicative of the cardinal points
(see the table). Hopi gods are also
assigned special colors — the Sun god red,
the Underworld god black, and the Fire
;od all colors (Fewkes). Many tribes
not distinguish by name between
green and light blue, black and dark
blue, or white and unpainted. (w. m.)
Golotlan. Classed by Orozco y Berra as
a branch of the Cora division of the Pi-
man stock inhabiting a n. tributary of the
Rio Grande de Santiago (Rio Colotlan),
between long. 104° and 105° and about
lat. 22°, Jalisco, Mexico. The language
was almost extinct by 1864. Among
their towns were Comatlan and Apo-
zolco, at which missions were estab-
lished by the Spaniards. ( p. w. h. )
Goloolan.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., map, 1864.
Colotian.— Ibid., 59, 280, 282.
Golambians. Applied by Bancroft ( Nat.
Races, i, 150, 1882) to the Indians of n.
w. America dwelling between lat. 42° and
55°, and stated by him to be synonymous
with the Nootka-Columbians of Scouler
and others. The term Columbians, how-
ever, is evidently broader in its scope, as
it includes all the tribes w. of the Rock-
ies from the Skittagetan group, in the n.,
to the 8. boundary of Oregon, while Scou-
ler'S term comprises a group of languages
extending from the mouth of Salmon r.
to the s. of Columbia r., now known to
belong to several linguistic stocks.
Cft\^<^^ A division of Salish between
Kettle falls and Spokane r., e. Wash.;
said by Gibbs to have been one of the
largest of the Salish tribes. Lewis and
Clark estimated their number at 2,500,
in 130 houses, in 1806. There were 321
under the Colville agency in 1904.
Basket People.— Hale in U. S. Expl. £xped., iv,
444, 1845. OauldroM.— Smet, Letters. 37, 1843.
Chaudiere. -Ck>x, Ck)lumbia R., 1. 189, 1831. Ohual-
pays.— Kane, Wand, in N. Am., 309. 1859. Ck>ll-
viUe.— Dart (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
III, 632, 1863. ColviUe.— Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep.,
159, 1850. Oovillet.— Stevens (1855) in H. R. Doc.
48, 34th Cong., Ist ses8., 3, 1856. Oens des
Ohaudi^ret.— Duflot de Mofras, Oregon, ii, 335,
1844. Hualpait.— Petitot, Autour du Lac des Es-
claves, 362, 1898. Kettle Falls.— Parker. Journal,
293, 1840. Kettle Indians.— Cox, Columbia R.,
II, 155, 1831. KQoptle'nik.— Chamberlain. 8th Rep.
on N. W. Tribes of Can., 8, 1892 (• people of the
falls': Kutenai name). Las Ohaudieree. — Cox, op.
cit., I, 358. Qoarlpi.— Keane in Stanford, Com-
pend.. 532, 1878. ftuiarlpi.— Hale f " ~ - •
Exped., IV, 444. 1845. SfOax
in U. S. Expl.
lYuyflp.— Gatflchet, MS.,
B. A. E. (Okinagan name). Schroo-yel-pi.— Ste-
vens in Ind. Afl. Rep., 428, 185' " " *
Ibid., 445. Schwoyelpi. —Gibbs
vans in Ind. Afl. Rep., 428, 1854.
'bid., 445. Schwoyelpi.— Gibbs in
, 413, 1855. Shuyelpees.— Smet (1869)
4. Bchwo-gel-pi.—
in Pac. R. R. Rep.,
t (1869) in H. R.
Ex. Doc. 65, 36th Cong., 1st sess., 141, 1860. Shuy-
elphi.— Smet, Oregon Miss., 106. 1874. Shuy-
elpi.— Smet, Letters, 213, 1843. Shwoi-el-ni. -Ste-
vens, Rep. on Pac. R. R., 94, 1854. Sin-who-yelp-
pe-took.— Ross, Adventures, 290, 1849. SiyHpa.—
Wilson in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 2&, 1866.
Skoiel-poi.— Mayne, Brit. Col.. 296. 1861. Bkuy-
elpi.— Gatschet. MS., B. A. E. (so called by other
BILL. .101
COMAC 0OMAN(HK
827
Salish tribes). Soay^pi.— Hale in U. 8. Expl.
Exped., VI, 205, 1846. Sqtt»w-a-toth.— Suckley in
Pac. R. R. Rep., I. 300, 1855. 8queer-yer-pe.— Il>id.
Bwdelp*.- Wilson in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond.. 292.
,-pree.— Ro«8 in Ind
Lewis and Clark,
UML-
1866. 8wi-el;pree.— Ro>«8 in Ind. Aff. Rep., 22. 1H70.
Whe-el-po. — Lewis and Clark, Exped., i, map.
1814. whe-«l-poo.— McVickar, Exped. Lewis and
Clark, ft, 385, 1842.
Comao. A former l*inia rancheria, vi.<-
ited by Kino and Mange in 1699; situated
on the Rio Gila, 8 leagues (miles?) Inflow
the mouth of Salt r., s. Ariz.
8. Bartolome Gomac.— Man^e in Doc. Hist. Mex.,
4th 8., I, 306, 1856.
Comaohioa. A Cahisa village on the s.
w. coast of Florida, about 1570. — Fonta-
neda Memoir (en. 1575), Smith transl.,
19, 1854.
Comanche. One of the southemtri l)es of
the Shoshonean stock, and the only one of
that group living entirely on the plains.
Their language and traditions show that
they are a comparatively recent offshoot
from the Shoslioni • of Wyoming, both
tribes streaking practically the same dia-
lect and, until very rwently, keeping uj)
constant and friendly communication.
Within the traditionary period the 2 tribes
lived adjacent to each other in s. Wyom-
ing, since which time the Shoshoni have
bwn l)eaten back into the mountains bv
A8AHABIT— PENATEKA COMMANCHE
the Sioux ana other prairie tribes, while
the Comanche have oeen driven steadily
southward by the same pressure. In
this southerly migration the Penateku
seem to have preceded the rest of the
tribe, priie Kiowa say that when they
themselves moved southward from the
Black-hills region, the Arkansas was the
N. Ixmndarv of the Comanche.
In 1719 the Comanche are menti(me<l
under their Siouan name of Padouca as
living in what now is w. Kansa><. It must
l)e remend)ered that from 500 to 800 m.
was an ordinary range for a prairie tribe
and that the Comanche were equallv at
home on the Platte and in the Bolson
de Mai)imi of Chihuahua. As late as
1805 the North Platte was still known as
COMANCHE WOMAN
Padouca fork. At that time they roame<l
over the country al)out the heads of the
Arkansas, Red, Trinity, and Brazos rs.,
in Colorado, Kansas, Oklahoma, and Tex-
as. For nearly 2 centuries they were at
war with the Spaniards of Mexico and
extended their raids far down into l)u-
rango. They were friendly to the Amer-
icans generally, but l)ecame bitter ene-
mies of the Texans, by whom they were
dispossessed of their best bun tinggrounds,
and carried on a relentless war against
them for nearly 40 years. They have
l)een close confederates of the Kiowa
since almut 1795. In 181^5 they made
their tirst treaty with the (iovefnment,
and by the treaty of Medicine Lodgt^ in
1867 agreed to go on their assigned
reservation l)etween Washita and Red
rs., 8. w. Okla.; but it was not until
after the last outbreak of the southern
prairie tribes in 1874-75 that they and
their allies, the Kiowa and Apache, finally
settled on it. They were probably never
a large tribe, although supposed to l)e pop-
ulous on account of their wide range.
Within the last 50 years they have been
terriblv wasted by war and disease. Thev
numl)ere<i 1,400 in 1904, attached to the
Kiowa agency, C)kla.
328
COMANCHE
[b. a. b.
The Comanche were nomad buffalo
hunters, constantly on the move, cultiva-
ting little from (he ground, and living
in skin tipis. Thev were long noted as the
finest horsemen of the plains and bore a
reputation for dash and courage. They
have a high sense of honor and holcl
themselves superior to the other tribes
with which they are associate<l. In per-
son they are well built and rather corpu-
lent. Their language is the trade lan-
guage of the region and is more or less
understooil by all the neighboring tribes.
It is sonorous and flowing, its chief char-
acteristic being a rolling r. The lan-
guage has several dialects.
The gentile system seems to l)e uuKnown
among the Comanche. They have, or still
remember, 12recognizeddivi8ionsorbands
and may have had others in former times.
Of these all but 5 are practically extinct.
The Kwahari and Penat*»ka are the most
important. Following, in alphabetic or-
der, is the complete list as given by their
heading chiefs: Detsanayuka or Nokoni;
Dit^akana, Widyu, Yapa, or Yaniparika;
Kewatsana; Kotsai; Kot^ott^ka; Kwahari
or Kwahadi; Motsai; Pagatsu; Penateka
or Penande; Pohoi (adopte<l Shoshoni);
Tanima; Tenawa or Tenahwit; Waaih.
In addition to these the following have
also been mentioned by writers as divi-
sions of the Comanche: (tuagejohe, Mu-
vinabore, Nauniem, Parkeenaum. See
Dotame. (j. m. )
AUebome.— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 39, 1806 (so
calU'cl by the French; see Ne'-mo-sin, below).
Bald Heads.— Long, Kxped. Rocky Mis., i, 155,
1.H23. Bo'dilk'inago.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A.
E., 1W3. 1896 (Kiowa name: 'reptile people",
'snake men'). Oadouca.—Domenech, Deserts N.
Am., II, 100, 1800 (misprint of Padouca). Caman-
che.— I'ike. Trav., xiv, 214, note, 1811. Caxnan-
chees,— Pileher in Sen. IXx;. 198, 25th Cong., 2d
sess., 23, 1838. Camanches.— Morse, Rep, to Sec.
War, 367, 1822. 6a'-tha.— Hayden, Ethnog. and
Philol. Mo. Val., 326. 18ii2 ('having many horses':
Arapaho name). Caumuohes.— La Harpe (1719) in
Margry, Dec, vi, 289, 1886. Caunouohe.— Beau-
rahi, ibid. Caw-mainsh.— Gebow, Shoshonay
Voeab., 8, 1868 (Shoshoni name). Cemanlos. —
Escalante (1776) misquoted by Harry in Simpson,
Explor. across Utah, 495, 1876. Cintu-aluka. —
Corliss, Dacotah MS. vocab., B. A. E., 106, 1874
(Teton name). (Jomances.— Schoolcraft, Pers.
Mem., 620, 1851. Oomanoha. — Barrel ro, Ojeada,
app.. 9, 1832. Comanohees.— Abert in Emory,
Recon.. 470, 1848. (Jomanchero.— Gregg, Coram .
l*rairies, II, 56, 1844 (Spanish form ). Comanohet. —
Sanchez (1757) in Doc. Hist. Mex.. 4th s., i, 88,
1856. Oomanohos.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr.
10, 1863. Comandes.— Maximilian, Trav., 510, 1843.
Comandus.— Alegre, Hist. Comn. Jesus, i, 336,
IWl. CJomaiuhiina.— Bourke, Moquis of Ariz.,
118, 18M (Hopi name). Comantz.— Gregg, Comm.
Prairies, ii, 34, 1844 (Comanche pronunciation).
Oomauch.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 374, 1822
(misprint). Cumanche.— Doc. of 1720 quoted by
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pap., v, 183, 1890. Cuman-
cia«.— Long, Exped. to Rocky Mts.. l, 478, 1823.
Oumeches.— iSchermerhorn in Mass. Hist. Coll., ii,
29,1812. Da't»«-an.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Ki-
owa Apache name). Gyai'-ko.— Mooney in 14th
Rep. B. A. E., 1043, 1896 ('enemies': Kiowa name).
Idahi.— Ibid. (Kiowa Apache name). Inda. —
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Jicarilla name).
K4-man'-toi.— Dorsey, MS. Biloxi Diet., B. A. E.,
1892 (Biloxi name). Kaoxnainsh.— Burton, City
of Saints, 75, note, 1861. Kelamouohes.— JefTerys,
Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776 (probably the same):
KomanUu.— Iiid. Aff. Rep., '248, 1877. Komats.—
ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 3*26, 1885 (Ute form).
Ku-man-i-a-kwe.— Crushing, infn, 1891 (Zufti
form). La Faddo.— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 64,
1806 (French name; cf. La Playes, below). la
Plais.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mta., l. 155, 1823
(French traders' name: perhaps corrupted from
Tete Peli'e ) . La Play.— Lewis and Clark, Discov.,
17. 1806. La Playes.— Lewis and Clark, Trav., 177,
1809. La'ri'hU.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Pawnee
name). Le Plays.— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 17,
1806. LosMeoos.— Bollaert in Jour. Ethnol. See.
Lond., 11, 265, 18.50 (Mexican name). Mahan.—
Hodge, field notes. B. A. E.. 1895 (Isleta name).
Mahana. — Ibid. (Taos name). Memesoon. — I^wis
and Clark, Discov., 39, 1806 (see Ne'-mo-sin, be- ,
low). Ha^'lani.— M(X)ney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
1043, 189() (Navaho name: 'many aliens,' or 'many
enemies'; collective term for plains tribes).
Ha'nita.— Ibid. (Kichai name). Kar-a-tah.—
Neighbors in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 1'26, 1852
(Waco name). Ha'tia'.— Mooney in 14th Rep.
B. A. E., 1043, 1896 (Wichita name: 'snakes,' i. e.
'enemies' or 'dandies)'. Haiine.— Schoolcmft,
Ind. Tribes, ii. ix, 18.52. Ka-u-ni.— Ibid., i, 518,
1851. Nazanne.— ten Kate, Reizen N. Am., 6, 1885
(Navaho name: 'rich ones'). Kemaosin.- Scher-
meriiorn in Ma.ss. Hist. Coll., 2d s., ii, 38, 1812
(.see Me'-inihftin, below). Heme* ne. — Gatschel,
MS., B. A. E. (own namei. Hemiieau.- Brown,
West. <Taz., 213. 1817. Nemonsin.— Am. State
Papers, iv, 716. 1832. Hemosen.— Lewis and Clark,
Discov., '23. 1806. Ne'-mo-sin.— Ibid., 39 (given as
their own name; rove with Kiowa, Kiowa
Apache, and others at heads of Platte and Chey-
enne rs.; ai»parently a misprint of N^*me'ne or
Nimi^nim, the Comanche name for themselves).
Nemouftin.- Orig. Joiir. Lewis and Clark, vi, lQr2,
1905. Heuxn.— Ind. AflF. Rep., 166, 1859 (own
name). Ne'-uma.— Bu.schmann (1859) (luoted by
Gatschet, Kaninkawa Inds., 33, 1891. Nfi'-ume.-
Ibid. Kimenim.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am..
382, 1885 (own name: 'people of people'). Ki-
mi-ou-tin. — Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi. 102,
1905. Hi'-am.- Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos.
Soc., xxiii, 300, 1886(own name). Niunas.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 34. 1^57. KoU-osh.— Gat-
schet, MS., B. A. E. (Wichita name: 'snakes,'
'enemies'). Ho-taw.— Marcy. Explor. Red R.,
273, 18.i4 (Wichita name). Ifiuna.— Mooney in
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1043, 1896 (own name:
' people ' ). Padaous.— Lewis and Clark, Trav., 39,
1807 (misprint), jadanka.— Dorsey, MS., B. A.
E., 1878 (Omaha and Ponka name). Padaws.—
Perrin du Lac, Voy. La., '261, 1805. Padducas.—
Pike, Trav., 347, 1811. Padokas.— Fabry (1741) in
Margry, Dt«c., Vi. 475, 1886. Padoncas.— Bracken-
ridge, Views of I^., 80, 1815. Padonees. —Morse,
N. Am., map, 1776. Padoo.— Orig. Jour. Lewis
and Clark, vi, 108, 1905 (Canadian French "nick-
name"). Padoucahs.— Hutchins (1764) quoted by
Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, in, 557, 1853. Padoucat.—
De I'lsle, map, 1712 (Siomin name; perhaps a
contraction of Penateka.— Mooney). PadoucM.—
McKeniipy and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 82. 1854.
Padoucies.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 108,
1905. Paduoa.— Clarke in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., iv,
152, 1875. Paducahs.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist.,
pt. 6, 186. 1883. Paduca«.— Jeflfery.1, Fr. Dom. Am.,
pt. 1, map. 1761. Paduka.— Dorsey, MS., B. A. E.,
1882 ( Kansa name). Padiika.— Herva.s, Idea dell'
Univ., xvii, 90, 1784. Pah-to-cahs. —Butler in H.
R. Ex. Doc. 76. 29th Cong., 2d sess.. 6, 1847. Pan-
aloga.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 81,
1858. Pandoga.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 128,
1816. Pandouoa. —Cass in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
III, 596, 1853. Paneloga.— Douay (1687) in Shea,
Miss. Valley. 2'2'2, 18.'v2 (probably the same; there
are many misprints ana derivatives of this word,
all probably being traceable to this source).
Panelogro.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.,
460, 1862. Paneloza. —Ibid., 346 ( from Douay, 1687:
misprint). Panetoca.— Harris, Coll. Voy. and
BULL. 301
COMAQUIDAM — COMEYA
329
Trav., I, uiap, 685, 170). Fanetonka.— Lii HonUm.
New Voy., i, 130, 1703. Panoucas.— Perkins and
Peck, Ann. of West, 669, ISiiO. Paoducas.— Alcedo,
Dice. Geog., ii, 630, 1787. Par-too-ku.— Neighbors
in SchoolcraCt, Ind. Tribes, ii, 126, 1852. Pa-too'-
K,— David St Cyr, inf'n (Winuebago name).
•too'-^i-ji.— Ibid. Patonoa.— Bareia, Ensayo,
298, 1723. Pa-ttth-kii.— Grayson. MS. v<x'ab., B. A.
E., 1885 (Creek name). Pa'-tu-ki.— Dorse y.
Kwapa MS. voeab., B. A. E., 1891 (Quapaw
name). Pa^uki— Dorsey, MS., B. A. E., IHXi
(Osaee name). Pa^uake.— Ibid., 1881 (Iowa, Oto.
and MisROUri name). Peducas.— Perrin du I^c,
Voy., 225, 1805. Pen loca.— Shea. Pei^alosa, 21,
note, 1882, Sank©.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
1043, 1896 (obsolete Kiowa name). Sau'hto.—
Ibid. (Caddo name). Sau'-tux.— ten Kate, Syno-
nymic, 10, 1884 (Caddo name). Selakampom.—
GatAchet, Comecnido MS., B. A. E. (Comecmdo
name for all warlike tribes, especially the Coman-
che). Shithiniwottitan — ten Kate, Reizen in
N. Am., 361, 1885 (Cheyenne name: 'snake peo-
ple'). Shlahino'wita-Itaniuw'.— Mooney in 14th
Rep. B. A. E., 1043, 1896 (Cheyenne name: snake
people'). ShX'shlnowiktz-luta'neo.— Mooney, inf'n.
1906 (correct Chevenne name) . Snake Indians.—
Brackenridge, Views of La., 80, 1815 (see also
under letan). 8cw-a-to.— Neighbors in Sch(x>l-
craft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 126, IH-Vi ((%iddo name).
T«te Pelae.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 104S.
1896 (French traders' name. *' The identification
is doubtful, as the Comanche ent their hair only
when mourning" ). T^tea pelves.— i'errln du Lac,
Voy., 261, 1806. Tampah.— Stuart, Montana, 25,
1865 (Shoehoni name). Ya'mpaini.— Mooney in
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1045, 1896 (Shoshoni name:
*yampa people,' or 'yampa eaters'; of. Caw-
mainsh, above). Yampurl'kani.— Ibid.
Comaqaidam. A former Papago ranche-
ria visited by Kino and Mange in 1701;
situated in n. w. Sonora, Mexico, on the
Rio Salado, 10 ni. below Sonoita.
AnunoiaU.— Bancroft No. M ex. States, 1.495,1884.
Oomaquidam.— Kino (1701) in Doe. Hist. Mex.. 4th
8., 1,328,1856.
Comarohdut. A former Maricopa ran-
cheria on the Rio Gila, 8. Ariz.; visited
by Father »Sedelniair in 1744. — Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 366, 1889.
Comarsata. A former Sobaipuri ran-
cheria visited by Father Kino about 1697;
situated on the Rio San Pedro, s. Ariz.,
between its mouth and the junction of
Aravaipa cr. — Bernal (1697) quoted bv
Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., :^ 1889.
Comatlan. A former pueblo of the Co-
lotlan division of the Cora and the seat
of a mission; situated on the Rio Colo-
tlan, lat. 21° 50^ long. 104° W, Jalisco,
Mexico. — Orozco y Berra, (^eog., 280,
1864. ^
Combahee. A small tribe formerly liv-
ing on Combahee r. , S. C. Little is known
of its history, as it early became extinct.
See Rivers, Hist. S. C, 94, 1874.
Comoomly. A Chinook chief. He re-
ceived the Lewis and Clark expedition
hospitably when it emerged at the mouth
of Columbia r. in 1805, and when the
Astor expedition arrived to take posses-
sion of the country for the United States
he cultivated close friendship with the
pioneers, giving his daughter as wife to
Duncan M*Dougal, the Canadian who
was at their head. Yet he was probably
an accomplice in a plot to massacre the
^rriyon and seize the stores. When a
British ship arrived in 1812 to capture the
fort at Astoria, he offered to light the
enemy, with 8(X) warriors at his back.
The American agents, however, had al-
ready madea i>eaceful trdusfer by bargain
and sale, and gifts, and promises from the
new owners immediately ma<le him their
friend (Bancroft, N. \V. Coast; Irving,
Astoria). Writing in Aug., 1844, Father
De Smet (Chittenden and Richardson,
De Smet, ii, 443, 1905) states that in the
days of his glory Comcomly on his visits
to Vancouver would be preceded by 300
slaves, **and he used to carpet the groinid
that he had to traverse, from the main
entrance of the fort to the governor's
door, several hundred feet, with l)eaver
and otter skins."
Comecmdo ( ' eaters of raw meat ' ) . One
of the few triU^sof theC'oahuiltecan fam-
ily that have l)een identified. The sur-
viving remnant wa« visited in 1886 by
(iatschet, who found only 8 or 10 old per-
sons who could sj)eak the dialect, living
on the s. side of the Rio (irande, 2 of
them at Las Prietas, Coahuila. (/rozco
y Berra (Geog., 293, map, 1864) placed
them in Tamaulipas, Mexico, in the
vicinity of the Tedexeilos. They appear
to have been known in later times as
Carrizos, q. v.
Estok pakai pevap.— Gatschet, Comecrudo M8.,
B. A. E. (-=*Inaians eaters raw'), yaima aran-
guas. — Ibid. ( = ' Indians of this locality ': (^»to-
nam name).
Comeya. Apparently a collective name
indefinitely applied to the Yuman tril>es
from San Diego eastward to the lower Rio
(yolorado. By many authors it has been
assumed to be synonymous with Diegueilo,
which doubtless it was in jmrt. Just what
tribes it include<i can not now be told, but
the term is here applied only to interior ,
tribes, the Dieguefio about San Diego be-
ing excluded. {Hee Cnfleil,) When vis-
ited by Anza, (larc^s, and Font, in 1775,
the ** Quemayd " wore sandals of maguey
fiber an<l descended from their own ter-
ritorv (which began at the mountains, in
lat. 33° 08^, some 100 m. to the n. w. of
the mouth of New r. in n. e. Lower Cali-
fornia, and extended as far as San Diego)
to eat calabashes and other fruits of the
river. They were descrilKMl as *'very
dirty, on account of the much mezcal
they eat; their idiom is foreign to those
of the river" (Carets, Diary, 1775, 165,
197, et seq., 1900). They were also vis-
ited in 1826 by Lieut. Hardy (Trav. in
Mex., 368-372, 1829), who found them on
the Colorado just above the mouth of the
Gila, and who descril^ed them, under the
name Axua ( which, he says, is their tribal
name), as being very numerous and filthy
in their habits; to overcome vermin they
coated their hair with mud, with which
they also painted their Indies, and "on
330
COMIAKIN — COMMERCE
[b. a. r.
a hot day it is by no means uiiconiuion
to see them weltering in the mud like
pigs. " Thev were of medium stature, and
were regarded by Hardy as exc^essively
poor, having no animals except foxes, of
which they had a few skins. The dress
of the women in suipmer was a short
bark skirt; the men appear to have been
practically without clothing during this
season. Both sexes practis^ facial paint-
ing, from which they were likened to the
cobra de capello. The practice of selling
children seemed to have been common.
Their subsistence was fish, fruits, vege-
tables, and the seeds of grass, and many
of the tribe were said to have been
dreadfully scorbutic. Their weapons
were bows, arrows, a few lances, and a
short club like a round mallet. Whipple
descril>ed the Comeya in 1849 (School-
craft, Ind. Trib«?, ii, 116, 1852) as occupy-
ing the banks of New r. , near Salt ( Salton )
lake, and as distinguishable from the
Cuchan (Yuma) ** by an oval contour of
the face.'* The names of but few Co-
meya bands or rancherias are known.
These are Hamechuwa, Hatawa, Hepow-
woo, Itaywiy, Quathlmetha.
(h. w. h. f. w. h. )
Axua.— Hardy, Trav. in Mexico, 368, 1829 (also
Axiia). Oamilya.— Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, II, 176, 1889 (probably the same). Co-m£i-
yJOi.— Whipple in Pac. R. R. Rep., iii, pt. 3, 16, 1856.
0«mad£».— Froebel, Seven Years' Travel8,611, 1859.
Oomeya.— Bartlett, Pers. Narr., ii. 7, 1854. Co-mo-
yah.— Whipple (1849) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
II, 116, 1852. Oomoykts. —Whipple, Pac. R. R. Rep.,
III, pt. 3, 16, map, 1856. Oomoyei.— Whipple,
Exped. San Dieeo to the Colorado, 28, 1851. 0»-
mo-yei.— Whipple (1849) in Schoolcraft, op. cit.
r-um O'-otam. — Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., 86, 1886
(Pima name of Comeya and Diegnefio). Kamia-
akhwe.— Kroeber, infn. 19a5 ( = • foreign Kamia,'
i. e., foreign Diegiiefios; Mohave name for
Yuman Inds. near head of gulf, who are not
Diegiiefios; cf. Axua, above). New River In-
diana.—Heintzelman in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th
Cong., 3d seas., 53, 1857 (Yum, or). Quathl-
met-ha.— Thomas, Yuma MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1868
(on New r.). Quemayi.— Oarers (1775-76) , Diary,
166. 450. 1900. Serranos.- Ibid., 196. Yum. —
Heintzelman, op. cit., 42 (or New River Indians;
cf. I'-um O'-otam, above).
Comiakin {Qumie^qEn). A Salish tribe
speaking the Cowichan dialect and in-
habiting part of Cowichan valley, s. e.
Vancouver id. ; pop. 67 in 1904.
Oomea-kin. —Can. Ind. AfT. , 269, 1889. Comiaken. —
Whymper, Alaska, 62, 1869. Gomiakin.— Can. Ind.
Aff., 417, 1898. Ko-ne-a kun.— Ibid., 1880, 816.
Xume'zen.- Boa.s, MS.. B.A.E., 1887.
ComitFe. Mentioned with San Felipe
by Oflate in 1598 (Doc. In^., xvi, 114,
1871) aa a pueblo of the "Castixes,"
which is identified with Katishtya, the
aboriginal name of the inhabitants of San
Felipe (q. v.), and, evidently through
misunderstanding, given also as a * ^ Trios* '
village. The name, according to Bande-
lier (Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 189, 1892), is
a corruption or misprint of Tamita, the
name of the mesa at the base of which
San Felipe 8too<l, and not of the settle-
ment itself.
Commerce. Evidences of widespread
commerce and rude media of excniuige
in North America are found in ancient
shell-heaps, mounds, and graves, the ob-
jects having passed from hand to hand
often many times. Overland, this trade
was done on foot, the only domestic ani-
mal for long-distance transportation being
the dog, used as a pack beast and for the
travois and the slea. In this respect the
north temperate zone of America was in
marvelous contrast with the same lati-
tudes of the Old World, where most of
the C!ommercial animals originated.
The deficiency in the means of land
commerce was made up by the waters.
Natural conditions in tne section of the
New World along the Arctic circle and
on Hudson bay, continuously inhabited
bv the homogeneous Eskimo, in the inlets
of the Atlantic coast, in the neighboring
Caribbean area, and in the archipelagoes
of British Columbia and s. b. Alaska, en-
couraged and developed excellent water
craft for commerce. Better still by far
for the trader were the fresh-water rivers,
navigable for canoes, of the Yukon-Mac-
kenzie, St Lawrence, Atlantic, Mississippi,
and Columbia systems, in which neigh-
boring waters are connected for traffic
b^ easy port^es, a condition contrasting
with that of Siberia, whose great rivers all
end in frozen tundras and arctic wastes.
The North American continent is
divided into culture areas in a way con-
ducive to primitive commerce. Certain
resources of particular areas were in uni-
versal demand, such as copper, jade,
soapstone, obsidian, mica, paint stones,
and shells for decoration and money, as
dentalium, abalone, conus, olivella, and
clam shells.
The Eskimo, to whom the Arctic area
belonged, carried on extensive commerce
among themselves and with the western
Athapascan tribes and the Algonquian
tribes to the e. They knew where soap-
stone for lamps, jade for blades, and drift-
wood for sleds and harpoons could be
found, and used them for traffic. They
lived beyond the timber line; hence the
Athapascans brought vessels of wood aiid
baskets to trade with them for oil and
other arctic products.
The Mackenzie-Yukon tribes were in
the lands of the reindeer and of soft fur-
bearing animals. These they traded in
every direction for supplies to satisfy
their needs (see Fur trade). The Rus-
sians in Alaska and the Hudson's Bay
Co. stimulated them to the utmost and
taught them new means of capture, in-
cluding the use of firearms. Kemnants
of Iroquois bands that were emploved in
the fur trade have been found on "kainy
lake, on Red and Saskatchewan rs.,
even as far n. as the Polar sea and as
BULL. 301
COMMKRCK
331
far w. as the Siksika of the plains and the
Takulli of British Columbia (Havard in
Smithson. Rep., 318, 1879; Chamberlain
in Am. Anthrop., vi,459, 1904; Morice, N.
Int. Brit. Col., 1904.) See Cmighnmva^ja.
The Atlantic slope from Labrador to
Georgia was the special home of Algon-
quian and Iroquoian tril)e8. Inland were
round deer, bears, foxes, and turkeys.
The salt-water bays and inlets not only
supplied moUusks, cnistaceans, fish, and
aquatic binls in vast numbers, but stimu-
lated easy transportation and commerce.
The great lakes and the St Lawrence,
moreover, placed the tribes about them
in touch with the copper mines of L. Su-
perior. Through this enlarging influence
the Iroc^uois were ennobled and became
the leading family of thisarea. A medium
of exchange was invented in the shape of
wampum, made from clam shells. The
mounds of the s. portion of this slope
reveal artifacts of copper, obsidian, and
shell, which must have been trans-
ported commercially from afar along the
water highways in birch-bark canoes and
dusouts.
The Mississippi area was a vast receiv-
ing depot of commerce, having easy touch
with other areas al)out it by means of
portages between the headwaters of in-
numerable streams; with the Chesapeake
bay, the great lakes, and the Mackenzie
basins through the Ohio and the main
stream;, with the e. Rockies and Co-
lumbia r. through the Missouri and other
great branches of the Mississippi in the
w. Buffalo skins and horns were de-
manded by the Pueblon, while pemmican
and beads enlivened trade. The mounds
reveal dentalium shells from the Pacific,
obsidian from the Rockies, copper from
L. Superior, pipes of catlinite, and black
steatite from Minnesota and Canada, and
objects from the Atlantic.
TheGulfarea includes the ancient home
of the Muskhogean, the Caddoan, and a
few smaller families. C'ommerce here was
inland. Their coast was almost without
islands and came in commercial touch
with an outside world only through
Mexico. The discoveries of Cushing in
8. Florida reveal a colony in the southern
Mexican or West Indian culture status.
The shorter rivers of this area put its
N. border in trade touch with Tennessee
and the Carolinas, and its w. with Arkan-
sas and Texas. The Mississippi lured its
traders almost to the Canaaian border.
The Rio Grande was the commercial
artery connecting the e. areas with the
intenor basin. The Rio Grande Pueblos
still trade their paper-bread with the
Kiowa and Comanche of Oklahoma.
Coronado speaks of Pawnee and Wich-
ita visitors among the Pueblos of the Rio
Grande in 1540 (Winship in 14th Rep.
B. A. E., '
The Pacific coast tribes occupied two
areas that present quite opposite condi-
tions in regard to commercial activity.
From Mt St Elias s. to California trade
was active, transportation })eing effected
in excellent dugout canoes; the waters
and the lands offered natural products
easy of access that stimulated barter.
Copper, horn for spoons, eulachon, and
Chilkat blankets were exchangeti for
abalone and dentalium shells, and baskets
were bartered for other ])askets and the
teeth of a large southern shark, also for
the furs of the interior Indians. The
Haida regularly visited their Tsimshian
neighbors to exchange canoes for eula-
chon oil, wood suitable for boxes, and
mountain-goat horn, while the Tlinglt
were intermediaries in diffusing the cop-
per that came from the n. On the Co-
lumbia r. camass and moose were articles
of commerce. Farther s., in Oregon and
California, whether from the islandless
coast or the genius of the peoples, the
spirit of commence was less prominent.
Among the n. w. California tribes, the
Hupa and others, dentalia served for local
money. In central California (Yuki,
Pomo, Sacramento, and San Joaquin val-
leys, etc. ) wampum of pierced disks al-
most exclusively served as a medium of
exchange and standard of value. In s.
California the inhabitants of the islands
carried on a commerce in basketry,
feathered wearing apparel, nets, vessels
of steatite and serpentine, various imple-
ments of stone and bone, wampum, sea-
shells and shell ornaments, and cured
fish, which they bartered with the trib^
of the mainland for basket materials,
skins, nuts, prepared meats, and other
articles which they did not have on the
islands. The Indians of the mountains
and the interior valleys of California
constantly traveled to and fro for the
purpose of barter, and the trails over the
range to the coast are yet plainly visible,
especially from the lower Tulare valley
(A. L. Kroeber and C. P. Wilcomb, inf n,
1905; Stearns in Nat. Mus. Rep., 297,
1 887 ) . From the early mariners we learn
that the island Indians had canoes made
of skins, some being very large and hold-
ing 20 persons. Vizcaino, the Spanish nav-
igator, who made his voyage in 1602-3,
mentions large boats of planks at Santa
Catalina, Cal., and states that its natives
engaged in trade, though not extensive,
with those on the mainland (Hittell,
Hist. Cal., 1, 139, 1885). Hittell does not
think that there were any voyages be-
tween the Santa Barbara ids. and Puget
sd., though canoes may have drifted or
have been carried by stress of weather
over considerable distances.
The Interior basin, especially in the
Pueblo country, had a lively home and
distant commerce, the duration and ex-
332
COMMISSION TO THE FIVE CIVILIZED TRIBES
[ B. A. £.
tent of which are witnessed by the trails
measuring in all many hundre<l8 of miles
in length. Pacific coast shells and copper
bells of Mexican origin are encountered
in the ancient ruins. The inland com-
merce was fostered by the two kinds of
social life, pueblo and castral. After the
advent of the Spaniards, this traffic was
greatly (juickened. The Hopi traded in
cotton of their own cultivation with out-
side tribes, and are still the chief weavers
and traders of ceremonial cotton blankets,
sashes, and kilts in the S. W. The Zufii
and some of the Rio (Jrande pueblos use
shell beads and turquoise, trading largely
with the Navaho. The latter have a w^ide
and varied commerce, trafficking with the
Havasupait HOpi, and Walapai for baskets
and using their blankets and siWer work
as an exchange medium with neighboring
tril)es and with the whites.
Commerce was greatly stimulated
through the coming of the whites by the
introduction of domestic animals, espe-
cially horses, mules, donkeys, cattle,
sheep, goats, poultry; by the vastly en-
larged demand for skins of animals, ivory,
fish, and native manufactures; by offering
in exchange iron tools and implements,
woven goods, and other European prod-
ucts desired by the Indians. The effects
of this stimulated trade were profound,
both for good and evil. Indians were
drawn far from home. The Iroquois, for
example, traveled with the fur traders
into N. w. Canada.
Manv kinds of Indian handiwork have
entered into world commerce. Money
is lavished on fine basketry, beadwork,
wampum l)elts, ivory carvings, horn
spoons, wooden dishes, silver work, cos-
tumes, feather and quill work, and espe-
cially Navaho blankets and Hopi and
Zuni textiles. In ancient times there
were intertribal laws of commerce, and
to its agents were guaranteed freedom and
safety. See B(mt», Fur trade, Exchange,
Horse, TraiU and Trade-routes, Travel,
Travois, and the bibliographies thereun-
der; consult also Ran in Smithson. Rep.,
27!, 1872. (o. T. M.)
GommisBion to the Five Civilized Tribes.
A commission appointed by President
Cleveland, under act of Congress of Mar.
3, 1893, and consisting of Henry L. Dawes
of Massachusetts, chairman (1893-1903),
Archibald S. McKennon of Arkansas
(1893-98), and Meredith H. Kidd of
Indiana (1893-95). It was increased to
5 members in 1895 and reduced to 4 in
1898. In addition to those named, it has
included Frank C. Armstrong of the
District of Columbia (189t>-98), Thomas
B. Cabaniss of Georgia (1895-97), Alex-
ander B. Montgomerv of Kentucky ( 1895-
97), Tams Bixbv of Minnesota (1897-
19a5), Thomas B. Needles of Illinois
(1897-1905), Clifton R. Breckenridge of
Arkansas (1898-1905), and William £.
Standley of Kansas (1903-04). On the
death of Mr Dawes, in Feb., 1903, Mr
Bixby was appointed chairman. The
work of the Commission being finished,
it expired by law July 1, 1905. As the
Indian governments did not dissolve until
Mar. 4, 1906, all the remaining powers of
the Commission were vested in the Secre-
tary of the Interior during the interim.
The headquarters of the Commission
were at Muscogee, Ind. Ter., except for
short periods in 1895 and 1896 at South
McAlester and Vinita, Ind. Ter., and at
Fort Smith, * Ark. Special headquarters
have also been established temporarily
when necessary in various towns of the
Territory.
The Commission was instructed to nego-
tiate with the Five Civilized Tribes for
the extinguishment of the national or
communal title to the land and its allot-
ment in severalty, and for the dissolution
of the tribal governments, looking toward
their ultimate absorption into the United
States as a territory or state. The Com-
mission had no authority, but was directed
to induce the Indians to consent to these
changes on terms which should be just
and equitable to all, and binding after
due ratification both by the Indians and
the United States.
The work of the Commission was re-
quired on account of conditions peculiar
to the Indian Territory. When these
tribes were removed from the E., they
were given special titles to the land,
in the form of patents, and their govern-
ments (modeled closely after those of the
states) were recognized and -established
by treaties, under which they were re-
quired to hold the land in common for the
use of the whole tribe and to secure its
exclusive use to the Indians. To this end
the United States guaranteed the title and
the exclusive use of the land by the In-
dians. Their already advanced civiliza-
tion was still further developed, but in
time the Indians disregarded the treaties
and invited white settlement, both by
intermarriage and through commerce.
A dominant class of mixed-bloods appro-
priated to their own benefit large tracts
of land and other exclusive privileges
through manipulation of the govern-
ments. The peculiar legal conditions en-
couraged great lawlessness. More than
250,000 white settlers had no control or
protection of law whatever, as the United
States courts had very littie jurisdiction
over the Indians and the Indian courts
had no jurisdiction over the whites.
Civilization was further obstructed in that
30,000 white children had no schools and
no possibility thereof.
Immediately on its appointment the
BULL, ao]
COMMUNIPAW
333
Commission proceeded to request a hear-
ing from each nation in turn, asking it to
tr^t with the United States, and after-
ward made the same offer to a joint con-
vention. The proposal was received with
some favor, but persistent misinterpreta-
tion of the purpose and proposals of the
United States by the favored class created
prejudice among the ignorant Indians,
and the overtures were refused. Private
and public conferences were held and
further proposals made. Whenever the
Supposes of the United States were un-
erstood a desire appeared for a friendly
agreement, but adverse pressure of many
kmds was constantly and successful Iv
brought to bear. As the internal con<li-
tions grew worse the situation l)ecame a
menace to the surrounding country. Ac-
cordingly the United States was com-
pelled to resume its right of protection
and control, hitherto held in abeyance.
In June, 1898, Congress passed a law,
generallv known as the Curtis act, pro-
viding that in case no agreements could
be reached the Indian courts should be
abolished or curtailed in jurisdiction, and
giving the Commission authority to allot
the land and otherwise to proceed with
the work for which it was creates!.
Agreements were made with the tribes
at various times, but none of them was
completed until after the jpassage of this
act. As the land titles differed with each
tribe, separate agreements were neces-
sary. In the case of the Choctaw and
Chickasaw the land was held in common,
but agreements were necessary with each
government. Two agreements were made
with the Creeks in 1897, but failed of
ratification. Many other vain attempts
were made, but on Mar. 8, 1900, an
agreement passed the Creek council which
was ratifieKl by Congress. Agreements
with the Cherokee were made in 1899
and in 1900, but failed either in Congress
or in the Cherokee council. Another
agreement was sought by the Cherokee
in Apr., 1901, but too late, and allotment
proceeded under the Curtis act. An
aj]^reement made .with the Choctaw and
Chickasaw in Feb., 1901, failed to \ye
ratified by the Chickasaw. Another in
Mar., 1902, was ratified by both nations
and by Congress. An agreement with
the Seminole was made in Oct., 1899, and
ratified by Congress. Several other agree-
ments were made from time to time re-
garding the enrollment of citizens, or
otherwise suppletnentary to the main
agreements.
Allotment b^an among the Creeks in
1899, the Seminole in 1^1, and in the
other nations in 1903. Congress also pro-
vided that the Commission should make
citizenship rolls for each tril)e, containing
lists of such Indians as were justly en-
titled to share in the division of the land.
Of the 200,000 claims i)resented, about
90,000 were allowed. These decisions
included the question of the rights of the
Mississippi Choctaw, the care of the f reed-
men who had ))cen owned as slaves by
these Indians and after the Civil war
granted citizenship, and several other
difficult (juestions.
The Commission was n»iiuired to allot
tlie land according to. its value. This
differed greatly on account of the coal,
a.sphalt, and other minerals, of the valu- '
a))letim)M'r, of its great agricultural jmssi-
bilities, and of its large towns with flour-
ishing business interest.**. It was there-
fore necessary to determine the value of
each quarter section. The Commission
surveyed the country, appraised these
values, decided and carried out plans for
the Ciiuitiible and possible adjustment of
the town sitt\s, and made triplicate records
of all these matters. This occupie<l a
large cleric?^ force, at one time amounting
to 5(X), from 1898 to 1905.
In 1908 charges were made by the In-
dian Rights Association that the mem))ers
and officers of the Commission had used
their i>ositions to advance their private
interests. Presitlent Roosevelt appointed
Hon. Charles J. Bonaparte and Mr Clinton
R. Wo(Mlruff to investigate these charges.
Their renort, while advising circumspec-
tion in these particulars, exonerated the
Commission from all malfeasance.
By the processes described, and by a
large amount of other detailed work,
20,000,000 acres of land were justly dis-
tributed among iK),000 heirs; the interests
of 600,000 other inhabitants were con-
served, and an enormous amount of labor
connecte<l therewith was successfully
carried on under difficult conditions of
many kinds. The work of allotment occu-
pied about 7 years and was accomplishe<l
at a cost tHpiivalent to 10 cents an acre
for the land allotted. Thus by the work
of the Commission from 1898 to 1905 five
governments with their executive, legis-
lative, and judicial machinery were suc-
cessfully transfonned into a con.'^tituent
part of the United States by transactions
which secured all their just rights and
promoted their highest welfare, as well
as contributed to the best interests of the
whole country.
See the Reports of the C-ommissioner of
Indian Affairs, 1898-1905: Reports of the
Commission to the Five Civilized Tribes,
1894-1905. (a. L. D.)
Commaiiipaw ('good fishing.' — Jones,
Ind. Bui., 1^, 1867). The principal vil-
lage of the Hackensack, about 1630, at
the present Communipaw, Hudson co.,
N.J. (.1. M.)
Oommunipau.— Ruttenber, Tril>es Hudson R., 90.
1872. OMDoenapa.— Ibid. (Dutch form). Oamo-
334
COMO CONCHACHITOU
[B. A. V.
eatpft.— Docof 1665 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ii,
468, 1858 (probably a Dutch settlement). CNk-
monepa.— loid., 466. OemoenepaM.— Deed of 1654,
ibid., XIII, 86, 1881. Oemoeaepaw.— Deed of 1647,
ibid., 22 (name of creek).
Como. An unidentified tribe that lived
near the Susola, of whom Cabeza de
Vaca (Smith trans., 84, 1851) heard while
in Texas in 1527-34. The people seem
to have been nearer the coast than the
Susola, who, at the time Cabeza de Vaca
heard of them, .were at war with the
Atayos (Adai).
Gomohnabi. A Papa^ village in s.
Ariz., on the border of Sonora; pop. 80
families in 1871.— Wilbur in Ind. Aff.
Rep. 1871, 365, 1872.
Comopori. A warlike tribe of the Cahita
ffroup formerly inhabiting a peninsula 7
leagues from Ahome, n. w. Sinaloa,
Mexico. They subsisted bv fishine, and
appear to have been related to the Vaco-
regue, speaking the same language. —
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 58, 332, 1864.
Gomox. An important coast Salish
tribe on both sides of Discovery pas-
sage, between Chancellor channel ana C.
Mudge, Brit. Col. Their proper name,
Catlo^'ltx, has been taken bv Boas as the
aesignation of one dialect of coast Salish,
including, besides this, the Clahoose,
Eeksen, Kakekt, Kaake, Tatpoos, Ho-
malko, and 81iammon. Pop. of the tribe
58 in 1904; of those speaking the dialect,
about 300. ( J. R. s. )
Gataatq.— Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes of Can.,
10, 1889. Oomauifsheak.— Scouler (1846) in Jour.
EthnoI.Soc. Lond., i,234, 1848. Oo-moux.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, v, 488, 1856. Gomoz.— Majme,
Brit. Col., 181, 1861. Gomuxet.~Grant in Jour.
Roy. Geog. Soc., 293, 1857. K'o'moks.— Boas in 5th
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 10, 1889. Ko-mookhs.—
Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 269, 1877. Komuz.—
Sproat, Savage Life. 311, 1868. Kowmook.— Tol-
mie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 120b, 1884.
8'komook.-<}ibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 269.
1877 (Uguultas name). S'tlaht-tohtlt-hu.— Ibid,
(own name). Xomoks.— Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887
(Lekwiltok name).
Gomosa. A former Potawatomi vil-
lage on Tippecanoe r., in Fulton co.,
Ind. The reserve on which it was situa-
ted was sold in 1834. The name was
that of a chief. Also spelled Camoza.
Gomnpatrieo. An Opata pueblo visited
by Coronado in 1540. It was situated in
the valley of the Rio Sonora, n. w.
Mexico, doubtless in the vicinity of
Arizpe. Possibly identical with a pueblo
later known by another name.
Gomnpatrioo.— Castaiieda (1596) in 14th Rep. B. A.
E., 515, 1896. Upatrioo.— Castafkeda in Ternaux-
Compans, Voy., ix, 158, 1838.
Gona. A settlement of a semisedentary
tribe called Teyas by the Spaniards, re-
garded as prolwiDly the Hainai, a Caddoan
tribe. The place was visited by Coro-
nado and his army in 1541, and de-
scribed as situated 250 leagues (ca, 660
m. ) from the Pueblo settlements of the
Rio Grande and 40 days' journey s. of
Quivira in s. central Kansas. See Casta-
ileda (1596) in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 507,
1896.
Gonaliga. A former Upper Creek band
or settlement, probably near Tukabatchi,
on Tallapoosa r., perhaps in Randolph
CO., Ala. — Woodward, Reminiscences, 37,
1859.
Gonanhkare. A Tuscarora village in
North Carolina in 1701.— Lawson (1709),
N. C, 383, 1860.
Goncepoion ( Spanish ) . A Tubar pueblo
on the 8. tributary of the Rio Fuerte,
8. w. Chihuahua, Mexico. — Orozco y
Berra, Geog., 323, 1864.
Goncepoion. A mission established
among the Yuma by Fray Francisco
Garc^s, in 1780, on the w. bank of the
Rio Colorado, in s. e. Cal., near the
Arizona boundary, at the site of modem
Ft Yuma. The mission was destroyed
by the natives July 17-19, 1781, and al>out
50 Spaniards, including Garc^s, 3 other
friars, and Capt. Rivera yMoncada, were
killed. See S(m Pedro y San Pablo,
Conoepoion.— Taylor in Cal" Farmer, June 13,
1862: Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 397, 1889. Im-
maoulate Conoeption.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 101, 1855*
Puerta de la Punaima Conoepoion. — Cones, Qarc4s
Diary, 19, 1900.
Conoepoion de Hnestra Senora. A visita-
tion town of (Cochimi?) Indians in 1745,
situated 6 leagues s. of the parent mission,
Nuestra Seilora de Guadalupe, in lat. 27°,
Lower California. Thirty-two ranche-
rias were dependent on it.
Conoepoion de Kuettra Senora.— Vene&ras, Hist.
Cal., II, 198, 1759. Porisima OonoepMon.— Doc.
Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 186, 1857.
Concha (shortened from Kunshak-holukta^
* round reed-brake*). A former impor-
tant Choctaw town, named from its situ-
ation on the side of a circular reed-brake
in the s. w. corner of Kemper co.. Miss.
It was at the junction of the lines which
separated the three primary Cho<*taw
divisions, although belonging itself to
the N. E. division. — Halbert in Ala, Hist.
Soc. Publ., I, 376, 1901; Miss. Hist. Soc.
Publ., Ill, 370, 1900.
Concha.— Danville, map (1732) in Hamilton, Co-
lonial Mobile, 158, 1897; Jefferys, French Dom.
Am.. 13.5, map, 1761. Conahaques.— LaHarpe
(1715) in French, Hist. Coll. U., in, 44, 1851.
Oooaak Baloagtaw.— Romans, Florida, 311, 1775.
Couohaa.— Vaudreuil (1709) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., X, 951, 1858.
Conohaehiton (Ku^shak-chitio, ' big reed-
brake*). A former Choctaw town in
Neshoba co.. Miss., which extended from
about 2 m. w. of Yazoo town almost to
the vicinity of Schekaha. Often called
West Congeto and West Cooncheto to dis-
tinguish it from another town of the same
or a similar name. See CouechUou^ and
consult Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ.,
VI, 427, 1902.
Conohaohitou.— Philippeaux, Map of Engl. Col.,
1781. ConehiUdiitonu.— Alcedo. Dice. Geog., i. 638,
1786. Ooanaheto.— Adair, Am. Inds., 296, 1775.
Weat Congeto.— Romans, Florida. 313, 1775. Weet
Congeto. 'Halbert, op. cit. West Ooonoheto.— Ibid.
BULL. 30]
CONCHANTY — CONESTOGA
335
Conehanty. A town of the Creek Nation
about the junction of Conchanti cr. with
Arkansas r., Ind. Ter.
OonduuitiL-^Jatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 185,
18KR. Duui'-telUUi.— Ibid. K«iiiihftdi.— Ibid.
Conehartimicoo's Town. A former town
on Apalachicola r., Fla., evidently named
from a chief called Conchart, orConcharti,
and probably belonging to the Lower
Creeks.
ConohaptiBiiooo't town.—Jesup (1837) in H. R.
Doc. 78, 25thCk)ng.,2d seas., 95, 1838. Conoharti-
miMO*t town*— Jesup (1837) in H. R. Doc. 225, 25th
Cong., 8d sess., 65, 1839.
Conohatikpi (Kv^ahak'tikpi, 'reed-brake
knob'). A former Choctaw town on a
creek of the same name, popularly called
Coonshark, in the s. part of Neshoba
CO., Miss. It derived its name from the
creek, which in turn was called after a
prominent bluff near a reed-brake. —
Haibert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., vi,
430, 1902.
Conohayon. One of the 7 villages or
tribes formins: the Taensa confederacy in
1699.— Iberville in Margry, D^., iv, 179,
1880.
Conehi. Mentioned by (xarcia (Origen
Inds., 293, 1729) as an Indian province
of New Mexico, but more likely identi-
fiable with the Conchas, or Conchoe, a
little-known tribe formerly living on a
river of the same name in Chihuahua,
Mexico. (f. w. h.)
Conoho ( Span. : * conch ' ) . The inhab-
itants of Concho bay, e. coast of Lower
California, on which Loreto mission was
established in 1697. The people spoke
the Cochimi dialect. — Picolo (1702) in
Lettres Fxiif., ii, 63, 1841.
Condawhaw. A Seneca settlement, in
1779, on the site of the present North
Hector, N. Y.— Doc. of 1779 quoted by
Conover, Kanadesaga and Geneva MS.,
B. A. E.
Conejeros (Span.: * rabbit men*). An
unidentified Apache band, mentioned
by Barcia (Ensayo Cronologico, 169,
1723) : ** In 1596 the Apaches called Cone-
jeros destroyed a people they described
as red and white who had come from
Florida. The Spaniards could not ascer-
tain of what nation they were nor find
traces of their journey."
Confljoholo ( ' a kettle on a long upright
object.* — Hewitt). A Conoy village,
identical with the Dekanoagah* of Evans,
which Day locates on the e. bank of the
Susquehanna, on or near the site of Bain-
bridfge, Lancaster co., Pa. The Conoy
removed to Conejoholo from their former
home on the Potomac about 1700 and
again removed farther up the Susque-
hanna before 1743. ( j. m. )
Ooa^a^ara.— Doc. of 1705 in Day, Penn., 390,
1848. Omejoholo.— Doc. of 1743 in Brinton, Lenape
Leg.. 26, 1885. DekanM^ah.— Evans ( 1707) in Day,
op. cit., 8S9, 1848.
Conejos (Span.: * rabbits'). A small
Dieguefio band on or near Capitan Grande
res., at least 9 m. from San Diego, Cal.;
pop. 80 in 1883.
Conemaugh. There seeniH formerly to
have l)een an Iroquois village of this name
about the present Conemaugh, on Kis-
kiminetati r., Cambria co., Pa.
Conemaok Old T.— La Tour, map. 1784.
Cones. Small prehistoric objects of
polished stone, the use of which is unde-
termined, and they are therefore classed
with problematical objects ( q . v. ) . They
are usually made of hematite or other
hard material, and occur most plentifully
in the states e. of the Mississippi. The
base often varies somewhat from a circle,
and the ai)ex is sometimes quite low.
Occasionally the specimens are truncated
or abruptly nloped above or grade into
hemispheres (q. v.), and there are
doubly conical and egg forms which grade
into the typical plummets (q. v.), the
top in cases })einff truncated or slightly
hollowed out, as if to accommodate some
kind of fastening. Some of the cones
approximate in form the more conical
boat-stones (q. v.). It is surmised that
they were carried as charms or served as a
part of the **meclicine" kit of the shaman.
It is possible, however, that they were
employeil in playing some
game. It is observed that
kindred objects of hematite
of more or less irregular
shape show facets, such as
would result from rubbing
them down for the red color
which they somewhat readily yield. Sim-
ilar conical objects of hematite are used
by the Pueblos of to-day and were used by
the ancient tribes in making sacred paint;
a tablet of sandstone or shale served as
the grinding plate, and the cone, which
was the muTler, also yielded the paint.
See Hemispheres.
Cones are described and illustrated
among others bv Fowke ( 1) in 13th Rep.
B. A. P:., 1896, (2) Archieol. Hist. Ohio,
1902; Jones, Antiq. So. Inds., 1873;
Moorehead, Prehist. Impls., 1900; Ran in
Smithson. Cont., xxii, 6, 1872.
(w. H. H. o. F.)
Conestoga ( Kanast6ge^ *at the place of
the immersed pole ' ) . An important Iro-
quoian tribe that formerly lived on Sus-
quehanna r. and its branches. When
first met by Capt. John Smith, in 1608,
and until their conquest by the Iroquois
confederation in 1675, they were in alli-
ance with the Algomiuian tril)esof the e.
shore of Chesapeake bay and at war with
those on the w. shore. They were de-
scribed as warlike and as possessed of a
physique far superior to that of all the
other neighboring tribes. By conquest
CONC OF HEMATITI;
Kektucky. (1-3)
336
CONESTOGA
[ B. A. E.
they claimed the lands on both sides of
Chesapeake bay, from the Choptank and
Patuxent n. to the territory of the Iro-
quois. In 1675, after their defeat, they
established themselves on the e. bank of
the Potomac, in Maryland, immediately
N. of Piscataway cr., below which the
Doag (Nanticoke) were then living.
They formed a close alliance with the
Dutch and Swedes, and with the English
of Maryland. The Iroquois had carried
on relentless war against them, with vary-
ing success, which finallv reduced them
from3,000(?) warriors in 1608 to about 550
in 1648, while their allies brought the ag-
gregate to about 1,250. Champlain says
that in 1615 they had more than 20 vil-
lages, of which only 3 were at that time
engaged in war with the Iroquois, and
that their town of Carantouan alone could
muster more than 800 warriors. The Iro-
quois of the N. drove the Conestoga down
on the tribes to the s. and w., wno were
allies of the English, a movement involv-
ing the Conestoga in a war with Maryland
and Virginia in 1675. Finding them-
selves surrounded by enemies on all
. sides, a portion of them abandoned their
country and took refuge with the Occa-
neechi on Roanoke r., while the rest
remained in Pennsylvania. A quarrel oc-
curred soon with the Occaneechi, who
made common cause with the whites
against the fugitive Conestoga, who were
compelled to return to Susquehanna r. and
submit to the Iroquois. According to
Colden they were all finally removiS to
the country of the Oneida, where they re-
mained until they lost their language,
when they were allowed to return to
Conestoga, their ancient town. Here
they rapidly wasted, until, at the close
of the year 1763, the remnant, number-
ing only 20, were massacred by a party of
rioters inflamed by the accounts of the
Indian war then raging along the Penn-
sylvania frontier. About 1675 their
stockade, where they were defeated by
the Maryland forces, was on the e. side
of Susquehanna r., 3 m. below Columbia,
Pa. Herrman's map of 1676 located it
at nearly the same pomt on the river, but
on the w. bank. The Swedes and Dutch
called them Minqua, from the Delaware
name applied to all tribes of Iroquoian
stock; the Powhatan tribes called them
Susquehannock, a name signifying * roily
river,* which was adopted by the English
of Virginia and Maryland.' The names
of their villages are Attaock, Carantouan,
Cepowig, Quadroque, Sas<mesahanou^h^
Testnigh , and Utchowig. \ The Mehernn ,^
the river of that name in s. e. Virginia, '
e officially reported to be a band of
Conestoga driven s. by the Virginians
ing BacOn*s rebellion in 1675-76. ^
(j. N. B. H.)
AkhrakooMhronon.— Jes. Rel., in, index, 2, 1868.
AkhrakyMTonon.— Jes. Rel. 1640, 35, 1858. Amdiu-
tes.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 125, 1816.
Andaslaka.— Ibid. Andastaehronon.— Jes. Rel. for
1640, 35, 1858. Andaataeronnona. —Jes. Rel. for
1657, 11. 1858. Andastaea.— Treaty of 1666 in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 45, 1855. Andaatagueua.—
Coxe, Carolana, map. 1741. Andaatagnes.— Park-
man, Jes. in N.Am., xlvi, note, 1883. Andaatakaa.—
Proud, Penn., ii, 294, 1798. Aadastea.— Raffeix
(1672) quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R.,
52-53, 1872. Andaatla.— Alcedo, Dice. Geoff., i, 97,
1786 ( misprint ) . Andaatigues. —Parkman, Conspir-
acy of Pontiac, i, 22, 1883. Andastiqnei.— Keane
in Stanford, Com pend., 500, 1878. Andastoa.— Jes.
Rel. for 1647, 58, 1858. Andasto<e*r Jes. Rel.,
Thwaitesed., xxxvii,104, 1899. Andastoerhonon.—
Jes. Rel. for 1637, 159, 1858. Andastoeronnon.— Jes.
Rel. for 1646, 76, 1858. Andasto'e'ronnoiia.— Jes.
Rel.. Thwaites ed.. xxxvii. 104, 1899. Andasto-
errhonona.— Jes. Rel. for 1635, 33, 1858. Andasto-
mi&.— Gale, Upper Miss., 49, 1867. Andaatogu^—
Jes. Rel. for 1663, 10, 1858. Andastoguehronnoiu.—
Jes. Rel. for 1664, 35, 1858. Andastogueronnons.—
Jes. Rel. for 1663, 10, 1858. Andastoguez—nJes. Rel.
for 1672, 24, 1858. Andastoh^.— Jes. Rel. for 1647,
8, 1858. Andastones.— McKenney and Hall, Ind.
Tribes, in, 81. 1854. Andastoui.— Parkman, Jes.
in N. Am., xlvi, note, 1883. Andastracronnoaa.—
Ibid. Andosagu^— Memoir of 1681 in Margery,
D4c.-, II, 270, 1877. Andoataguei.— Frontenac (1673)
in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 110, 1855. Andoatoues.—
Galline6 (1669) in Margry, D^c, i, 130,1875. An-
tastoex.— Ibid., 138. Antastogu^— Ibid., 124. An-
taatoSi.— Courcelles (1671) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
IX, 84. 1855. Antastouaia.— Galline^ (1669) in Mar-
gry, V^c, I, 124, 1875. Antaatoues.— Courcelles
(1670), ibid.. 1, 189, 1875. Atra'KSae'r.— Jes. Rel.,
Thwaites ed., xxxvii, 104, 1899. Atra<kwae«ron-
nona.— Ibid., 105. Atrakwer. -Doc. of 1652 quoted
by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 137, 1867. Oan-
aatoga.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in,
79, 1«>4. Oanaatoge.— Zeii^berger (1750) quoted by
Conover, Kanadaga and Geneva MS., B. A. E.
Canaatogues.— Doc. of 1699 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist,
iv, 679, 1854. Oanestogaa.— Barton, New Views,
97, 1798. Oameatogo.— Colden (1727), Five Nations,
app., 58, 1747. Oaniatage. — Livingston (1717)
in N. Y. Doc.Col. Hist.,y, 486,1855. Oaniatoge.— Liv-
ingston (1717), ibid., 486. Canoatogaa.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 136, 1857. OaraBtouaaia.—-
Champlain, (Euvres, y, pt. 2, 8, 1870. Oaranton-
annaia. — Ibib., IV, chart. 32, 1870. Oaraatonaaa. —
Parkman, Pion. Fr., 837, 1883. Oiaelaa.— Pey-
ton, Hist. Augusta Co., Va., 6, 1882. Gonaatagoe.—
Peters (1764) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., x,
508, 1871. Oonaatoga.— Ft Johnson conf. (1756)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. HT8t.,vii, 110, 1856. Conaatogy.—
Johnson (1747), ibid., vi, 390, 1855. Ooneatego.—
Weyman {ca. 1719) quoted by Hawkins, Mis-
sions, 117, 1845. Ooneatoga.— Keith (1722) quot-
ed by Day, Penn., 390, 1843. Coneatogo.— Doc. of
1701, ibid. Coneatogue.— Smith (ca. 1810) quoted
by Day, ibid., 279. Coniatogaa.— Rupp, Nortli-
ampton Co., 5, 1845. Connaatago.— Peters (1764) in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., x, 508, 1871. Cono-
atogaa.— Ft Stanwix treaty (1768) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., viii, 133, 1857. Endaatea.--Denonville
(1865), ibid., IX, 283,1855. Oandaatogu^.— Jes. Rel.
1672, 26, 1858. Oandoatogega.— La Salle (1682) in
Margry,D6c.,ii,237,1877. Oanoaaetage.— Doc.ofl756
in Rupp, Northampton Co., 106. 1845. Ouandaato-
guea. -Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., 103,1848.
Ouandoataguea.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 290,
1853. Ouyandota.— Gallatin quoted in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., Ill, 125, note, 1853. Huakohanoea.— Carr
(1664), ibid., 74. Xanneaatoka-roneah. — Macauley,
N. Y., II, 174, 1829. Machoeretini.— De Laet, Nov.
Orb.,76.1633. Minokua.— Holm (1702)inMem.,Hi8t.
Soc. Pa.. Ill, pt. 1, 157. 1834. Minquaaa.— Dutch
map (1616) in N.Y. Doe. Col. Hist., i, 1856. Kin-
quaea.— Hendricksen (1616), ibid., 14. Kiaqnaoa.—
Yong (1634) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix. 119,
1871 . kinqaaa.— Dutch rec. ( 1649) quoted by Win-
field, Hudson Co., 49, 1874. Minquaae.— Hudde
(1645) in N. Y. D(m\ Col. Hist., xii, 30, 1877. Min-
quaya.—Penn's treaty (1701) fn Proud, Penn., i, 428,
1797. Kinquea.— Holm (1702) in Mem. Hist. Soc.
Pa. Ill, pt. 1, 157, 1884. Kinquinoa.— Mitchell, map
BULL. 30]
CONESTOGA HORSK-
:"()NFEDERAT1()N
337
(1755), quoted in Am. Antiq., i, 96, 1K7M. Kinquo-
•y.— be Laet, Nov. Orb., 76, 1633. Mynoli
Vater. Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 317, 1816. Kynoqueser.—
Ibid., 317. NatiopHBrtioarum. — Du Creux quoted by
Schoolcraft, Ind.Tribes, Vl, 137, 1857 (Lat.: 'Nation
of the poles'). Ogehage.— Dutch map (1616) in
N. Y.Doc. Col.HiHt., i, 1856 (Mohawk name). On-
tastoei.— Galllne^ (1684) in Fernow, OhioVal., 219,
ld90. Saakwihananr. — Rafinesque, Am. Nations,
1,138,1836. Sasquahana.— Herrman, man (1670)
in Rep. on Boundary between Va.and M<1., 1873.
Baaquahannahi.— Doc. of 1726 in N. C. Rec, ii,
643. 1886. Sasquehaxmoolu.— Doc. ca. 1646 in Force,
Hist. Tracts, ii, 19, 1838. Saaquesahanooks.— Smith
(1629), Va., 1, 118, 1819. Saaquesahanoughs.— Ibid..
74. SaaquesahanougB.— Strachey {at. 1612), Vu.,
39,1849. Saaqqiaahanoughea.— Md. Rec. quoted in
TheNation,343,Apr.'22, 1886. Saaaquahana.— Herr-
man, map (1670) in Rep. on Boundary between
Va. and Md., 1873. Seaquehanooka.— Harris, Voy.
and Trav., i, 843, 1705. Seaqtiihanowea.— Bozman,
Md.,l,128,1837. SouthemKinquaa.— Doo.of 1649 in
N.Y. Doc.(V)l. Hist., XIII, 25, 1H81. Suaoahannaea.—
Andro<i (1676), ibid., xii, 557, 1877. Suaoohamiea.—
Andros, ibid., 556. Saaqnahaniia.— Penn's treaty
(1701) in Proud, Penn., i, 428, 1797. Suaqua-
hannooka.— Doc. of 1648, ibid., 114. Suaqnehanaa.—
Doc. of 1671 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., Xli, 488. 1877.
Soaquehannagh.— Penn. Rec. (1701) in Day, Penn.,
390, 1843. Duaquehannah Hinquaya. — Ibid. Sua-
fnehanna' a.— Andros (1676) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
list., XII, 513, 1877. Suaquehaxmooka.— Doc. of
1648 in Proud, Penn.,' i, 114. 1797. Suaquehaa-
Boea.— Doc. of 1642 quoted by White. Rel. Itin., 82,
1874. Suaquehannoa.— Doc. of 1677 in N. Y. Doc.
Col . Hist. , IX , 227, 1866. Suaquehanooka.— Bozman ,
Md., 1, 128, 1837. 8uaqnehano«a.— White {ca. 1634).
Rel. Itin., 37, 1874. Suaqohannok.— Drake, Bk.
Inds., xi, 1848. Suaqtiihanougha.— Doc. of 1638 in
Bozman, Md., ii, 62, 1837. Takoulguehronnona.—
Jes. Rel., Thwaites ed., xxxvii, 104, 1899. Tra-
koaaehronnona.— Jes. Rel., iii. index. 1858. Tra-
kSaehroanona.— Ibid, 1660, 7, 1858.
Conestoga horse. A heavy draft horse,
said to have originated in Pennsylvania
toward the close of the 18th tentury,
from a cross of the Flemit^h cart horse
with some Enjflish breed (Bartlett, Diet.
Americanisms, 137, 1877). This horse
was much in use })efon» the era of rail-
roads, (a. f. (\)
Conestoga wagon. A lar^ white-topped
wagon, to which 6 or more Conestoga
horses were attached (Bartlett, Di<'t.
Americanisms, 137, 1877). These horses
and wagons "were a marked feature of
the landscape of this state.'* The horse
and the w^on were named from Con-
estoga, a village in Lancaster co., Pa.,
called after one of the Iroquoian i)eoples
inhabiting this region in the 18th cen-
tury, (a. f. c.)
Confederation. A political league for
offense and defense was sometimes formed
by two or more tribes, who entered into
a compact or formal statement of princi-
ples to govern their separate and collect-
ive action. A looser, less formal, and less
cohesive alliance of tribes was sometimes
formed to meet some grave temporary
emergency. The unit of a confederation is
the organized tribe, just as the clan or gens
is the unit of the tribe. The confederation
has a supreme council composed of rep-
resentatives from the several contracting
tribes of which it is compo8e<l. The
tribes forming a confederation surren-
dered to the league certain powers and
Bull. 30—05 22
rights which they ha<l exerciweil indi-
vidually. The executive, legislative, and
judicial functions of the confederation
were exercise<l by the supreme council
through instruments apiwinted in the
compact or afterward devised. Every
tribe of the confederation was generally
entitle<l to representation in the suj>reme
federal council. The chiefs of the federal
council and the subchiefs of each tril)e
constituted the local council of the tribe.
The confirmation of officials and their
installation were functions delegate<i to
the officers of the confederation. The
supreme federal council had practically
the same officers as a tribal council,
namely, a sj)eaker, tire-keei)er, door-
keeper, and wampum-keeper or annalist.
In the Iro<iuoian confederation the origi-
nal 5 tribes severally had a supreme war-
chief, the name and the title of whom
Were hereditary in certain specified clans.
The supreme federal council, sitting as a
court vvi thouta jury, heard anddetermineil
causes in accordance with established
princi])les and rules. The representation
m the council of the Irotjuois confedera-
tion was not based on the clan as its unit,
for many clans had no representative in
the federal council, while others had sev-
eral. The suj)reme federal council of
this confederation was organized on the
ba.«is of tribal phratries or brotherhooiis •
of tribes, of which one i)hratry acted as
do the presiding judges of a court sitting
without a jury, having i)ower to c<mfinn,
or on constitutional or other grounds to
reject, the votes or conclusions of tlie two
other phratries acting individually, but
having no right to discuss any (piestitm
l)eyond suggesting means to the other
phratries for reaching an agn»ement or
compromise, in the event that they offer
differing votes or opinions, and at all
times l>eing jealously can»ful of the cus-
toms, rules, principles, and prece<ients of
the council, recpiiring j)rocedure stri<*tly
to conform to these where possible. The
constituent tribes of the Iroiiuois con-
federation, the Mohawk, Oneiaa, ()n( n-
daga, Cayuga, and Seneca, constitutini
three tri)>al phratries, of which the Mo-
hawk and Seneca formtnl the first, the
Oneida and Cayu^ the second, and the
Onondaga the "third; but in ceremonial
and festal aasemblies the last tril)e affi-
liated with the Mohawk-Seneca phratry.
Among the looser confederations, proj)-
erly alliances, may be mentioned that of
the Chippewa, Ottawa, and Potawatomi ;
the 7 council fires of the Dakota; and the
alliance of the tribes of Virginiaand Mary-
land called the Powhatan confederacv.
To these may l)e adde<l the loose Caddo
t;onfederacy, which, like the others, was
held together largely by religious affilia-
tion. The records are insufficient to de-
338
CONOAREE CONOHA88ET
[b. a. b.
fine with accuracy the i)ohtical oi'ganiza-
tion of these groups. See Clan and GenSf
Government^ Social Organizationy Tribe.
(j. X. B. H.)
,-^Congaree. A small tril>e, supposed to
be Siouan, formerly living in South Caro-
lina. The grounds for including this
tril)e in the Siouan family are its location
and its intimate relation with known
Siouan trihen, esi)ecially the Catawba,
with which it was ultimately incorpo-
rated; but according to Adair and I^w-
son the Congaree siK)ke a dialect differ-
ent from that of the Catawba, which they
f reserved even after their incorporation,
n 1(593 the Cherokee complained that the
Shawnee, Catawba, and Congaree took
prisoners from among them and sold
them as slaves in Charleston. They were
visiteii in 1701 by Lawson, who found
them on the x. e. bank of Santee r. below
the jumttion of theWateree. Their town
consistcnl of not more than 12 houses,
with plantations up and down the coun-
try. On a map of 1715 the village of
the Congaree is placed on the s. bank of
Congaree r., aln^ut opiK>site the site of
Columbia. A fort bearing the tribal
name was established near the village in
1718. They were a small tribe, having
lost many by tribal feuds but more bv
smallpox. Lawson states that, although
the several tril)ea visited by him were
generally small and lived closely adjoin-
ing one another, they differed in features,
disposition, and language, a fact which
renders the assignment of these small
tril)es to the Siouan family conjectural.
The Congaree, like their neighl)or8, took
part in the Yamasi war in 1715, as a re-
sult of which they were so reductMl that
they were comi>elled to move up the
country and join the Catawba, with
whom they were still living in 1743.
Moll's map of 1730 (Salmon, Mo<lem
History, in, 5()2, 174()) nlac^es tlieir town
or station on the x. ))ank of Congaree r.,
opposite which ran the trail to the Chero-
kee count rv. It was s. of lat. 34°, prob-
ably in Richland CO. They were a friendly
I)eople, handsome and well built, the
women being especially beautiful com-
Sared with those of other tribes. See
loonev, Siouan Tribes of the East, 1894.
Ani'-Oiir.— Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 508,
1900 (' Icmg-hain-d people,' a Cherokee clan, pos-
sibly originally Congaree). Oanggaree.— Adair,
Hist. Am. Inds., 225, 1775. Congaree*.— Mills, Hist.
S. C, 108, 1826. Congaree.— Doc. of 1719 in Rivers,
Hist. S. C, 93, 1874. Congereei.— Lawson. Hist.
Carolina. 25, 1860. Congeres.— Moll, map of Caro-
lina, 1720. Congree.— La Tour, map of U. S., 1784.
Conqerees. — Warmapof 1715 in Winsor, Hist. Am.,
V, 346, 1887.
Conge wichaoha ( wichacha = ' man ' ) . A
Dakota division, possibly of the Teton.
Cf. Kanghii/tiha.
Oonge-wee-oha-cha.— Corliss, MS. Lacotah vocab.,
B. A. E., 106, 1874 (Teton name).
Conicari (Nahuatl :con^ *crow, ' * raven *,
cari * house': 'house of the raven.* —
Bueina). A settlement of the Mayo,
probably of the Tepahue division, on
the Rio Mayo, 30 m. n. of Alamos, in
lat. 27° 6^ s. E. Sonora, Mexico. It con-
tained 200 families in 1645, and is still
one of the most important Mayo settle-
ments. For discussion as to its linguistic
relations see Bandelier in Arch. Inst.
Papers, in, 53, 1890.
Canicari— Excudero, Noticias de Son. y Sin., 101,
1849. Coneo^re.— Hardy, Travels in Mexico, 438,
1829. Conicare.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein,
Neue Welt-Bott, 1726. Conicari.— Rivera, Diario
y Derrot., leg. 1179, 173(). San Andres Conicari.—
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 356, 1864.
Gonisca (seemingly from kane^sht,
* grass * ) . One of 4 Cherokee settlements
mentioned by Bartram (Travels, 371,
1792) as situated on a branch of Ten-
nessee r. about 1776.
Conkhandeexurhonon. An Iroquoian tribe
living 8. of St Lawrence r. in 16:^.
Conkhandeenrhonons.— Brcbenf in JcH. Rel. for 1635,
33, 18r)8. Konkhandeenhronon.— Jes. Rel. for 1640,
35, 185H.
Goxmeaut. A village composed of Onon-
da^ and Missisauga and other Algon-
qman immigrants, situated on Conneaut
lake. Pa., in the 18th century.
Coneyat.— Procter (1791) in Am. St. Pap., Ind. Aff.,
I, 163, 1832. Conyat— EUicot (17W), ibid., 516.
Conneoticiit (from the Mahican auinni-
tukq-utj * at the long tidal river*). Tribes
living on Connecticut r., including the
Scantie, Nawaas, and Podunk.
Conittekooka.— Van der Donck (1656) quoted by
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 82, 18?2. Conneoto-
oute.— Wood (1639) quoted by Barton, New Views;
xix, 1798. Connecticuto.— Russell (1682) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4tn s., vili, 85, 1868. Quintiooock.—
Williams (1643), ibid., 1st s., ni,205, 1794.
Gonnewango (*at the falls'). (1) A
Seneca village that stood on the site of
Warren, Fa., and was destroyed by Col.
Brod head in 1779. (2) A former Seneca
village on the left bank of Alleghany r.,
above the site of Tionesta, Forest co. , Pa.
Both villages l)elonged to the division of
the Seneca known as Cornplanter's band.
Cananouagan. — La Tour, map, 1779. Canaouagon. —
Vaudreufl ( 1759) in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x,949,1858.
Canawagon.— Guy Park conf. (1775), ibid., vin,
563, 1857. Canawagow.— Johnson Hall conf. (1774),
ibid. Canawako. — Onondaga conf., ibid., 426.
Canwagan.— Guy Park conf. (1774), ibid., 519.
Cayantha. —Procter in Am. St. Pap., IV, 154. 1882.
* Conawago.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. £., pi.
clx, 1899. Conewango.— Butterfield, Washington-
map, 1805. Connewangoet.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, in, 288, 1853. Cornplanter'e Town.— V. L.
Thomas, letter, 1885. Kanaouagan.— Joncaire
(1749) in Margry,D6c., vi, 675, 1886. Kanauagon.—
Butterfield, op. cit. Kanoagoa.— Pouchot, map
(1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 694, 1858. Kuno-
agon.— Doc. of 1759, ibid., 984.
Gonohasset. A Massachuset village for-
merly about Cohasset, Norfolk co., Mass.
The site was sold bv the Indians in 1635.
Conohasset.— Flint (1821) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
3d s., II, 84-85, 1830. auonahasit— Smith (1629).
Virginia, Ii, 194, repr. 1819. Qnonahassit— Smith
(1616) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3ds., vi, 106, 1887.
BILL. 30 1
CONONTOROY CONOY
339
Conontoroy. Given as one of the ** out
towns" among the Cherokee in a docu-
ment of 1755 (Rovcein 5th Rep. B. A. E.,
143, 1887). Not 'identified.
Conop. A former village, presumahly
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Tavlor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Conoross (ct)rruption of KtiydtZ-unV'
sMyly or KiiwdiZ-inyrd^-suili/l, 'where the
duck fell off*). The Hupjv»sed name of
a Cherokee settlement on Conoross cr.,
which enters Keowee or Seneca r. from
the w., in Anderson co., S. C. — Moonev
in 19th Rep. B. A. K., 412, 1900.
ConneroM. —Ibid.
— Conoy. An Algon(|uian triln^ related
to the Delawares, from wliose ancestral
stem thev ai)parently sprang, but their
closest relations were with the Nanticoke,
with whom it is probable they were in
late prehistoric tnnt^s united, the two
fonning a single tril)e, while their Ian
guage is supposed to have been somewliat
closely allied to that sj)oken in Virginia
by the Powhatan. Heckewelder believed
tliem to l)e identical with the Kanawha,
who gave the name to the chief river of
West Virginia. Although Brinton c^lls
this *'a h>ose guess," the names Conoy,
(ianawese, etc., si»em to be forms of Kana-
wha. The application of the same name
to the Piscataway triln? of Maryland, and
to the river, is ditticult to explain by
any other theory than that the former
once lived on the banks of the Kanawha.
In 1()60 (Vtoc. dnm., 168(>-67, Md. Ar-
chives, 40,S, 1885) the Piscataway applied
to the governor of the colony to confirm
their choice of an **em|)eror," and to his
inquiry in regard to their custom in this
resiwct, replied : * * Ix)ng a goe there came a
King from the P^^a.'^terne Shoare who Co-
manded over all the Jndians now inhab-
iting within the Ixmnds of tliis Province
(nameing every towne sevendly) and
also over the Pat<)winecks and Sas<|ue-
hannoughs, whome for that he Did as it
were imbrace an<l cover them all tliey
called Vttapoingassinem this man dye-
ing without i.Msue made his brother Qiio-
konassaum King after him, after whome
Succeeded his other brothers, after whose
death they tooke a Sister's Sonn, and soe
from Brother to Brother, and for want of
such to a Sisters Sonne, the (iovernm'
descended for thirteene Generatx^ns with-
out Jnterrup<H'>n vntill Kittamaquunds
tyme who dyed without brother or Sister
and apoynted his daughter to be Queene
but that the Jndians withstood itt as
being Contrary to their Custome, where-
vpon they cliost* Weghucasso for their
King w^ho was descended from one of
Vttapoingassinem brothers ( But which
of them they knowe not ) and Weghucasso
at his death apoynted this other Vttapo-
ingassinem to be Kin^ Injing descended
from one of the first Kings this man they
sayd was Jan Jan Wizous which in their
language signifyes a true King. An<l
would not suffer vs to call him Tawzin
which is the Style they give to the sons
of their Kings, who by their Custome are
not to succeeile in Rule, but hia Broth-
ers, or the Sons of his Sisters."
The onler of <U^cent in this extract
gives it an impress of truth. It indicates
close relation Ix'tween the Nanticoke
and the (\)noy, though the inclusion of
the Susquehanna (C(mestoga) among the
emperor's subjects must Ih» rejected. ( )ne
of the tril)es of the e. shore from which
tliis chief could have come was the
Nanticoke. Thirteen generations would
carrv back the date of this first em i>eror
to the l)eginning of the Kith centurv.
Lord Baltimore's colonists in 1634 estal)-
lished a missicm amongst them, ami
tlie "em|)eror" C/hitomaclien, otherwise
known as Tayac, said to be ruler over a
dominion extending l.'iO m. k. and w.,
was ccmverted, with his familv. They
were, however, so harassed by the Coneg-
toga that a few years later they aban-
doned their country and move<l farther
up the Potomac. They, then rapidly
decreai*ing, were in 1078 assigned a tract
on that stn'am, which Streeter (Hist.
Mag., 1st s., I, ()7, 1857) thinks may have
been near the site of Washington, D. C.
The Conestoga, when driven fn:>m their
own country by the InMjuois in 1675,
again invaded the territory of the Conoy
and force<l that triln.^ to retin* up the,
I'otomac and into Pennsylvania. This
was a gradual migration, unleiis it took
place at a- much later iH»riod, for Baron
(iraffenried, while searching for a re-
ported silver mine in 1711, found them
on the Maryland side of the Potomac
alx)ut 50 m. above Washington, and made
a treaty of friendship with them. He
calls them Canawest. About this time
the Inxpiois assigntnl them lands at Cone-
joholo on the Suscpiehanna, near the pres-
ent Bainbridge, Pa., in the vicinity of the
Nanticoke and Conestoga. Here they
first began to l)e known as Conoy. Some
of them were living with these tril)es at
Conestoga in 1 742. They gradually made
their way up the Susquehanna, stopping
at Harrisburg, Shamokin, Catawissa, and
Wyoming, and in 1765 were living in s.
New York, at Owego, Chugnut, and Che-
nango, on the E. branch of the Susipie-
hanna. At that time they numbered
only about 150, and, with their associates,
the Nanticoke and Mahican, were de-
I)endent on the Iro(|Uois. They moved
w. with the IVIahican and Delawares, and
soon became known only as a part of
340
CONOY
[B. A. B.
thds»e tribes. In 1793 they attended a
council near Detroit and used the turkey
as their signature.
The customs and Ixiliefs of the Conoy
may Iwst be piven by the following quota-
tion from White's RelatioItineris,ca. 1635,
althoujjjh the author's interpretations of
customs often go far astray: "The natives
are very tail and well proportioned; their
skin is naturally rather dark, and they
make it uglier by staining it, generally
with red paint mixed with oil, to keep
off the mos(iuitoes, thinking more of their
own comfort than of appearances. They
disfigure their countenances with other
colors, too, painting them in various and
truly hideous and frightful ways, either
a dark blue above the nose and red below,
or the reverse. And as they live almost
to extreme old age without having beards,
they counterfeit them with paint, by
drawing lines of various colors from the
extremities of the lips to the ears. They
generally have black hair, which they
carry round in a knot to the left ear,
and fasten with a band, adding some
ornament which is in estimation among
them. Some of them wear on their fore-
heads the figure of a fish njade of copper.
They adorn their necks with glass beads
strung on a thread like necklaces, though
these iH'ads are getting to l)e less valued
among them and less useful for trade.
They are clothed for the most part in
deerskins or some similar kind of cov-
ering, which hangs down l)ehind like a
cloak. They wear aprons round the mid-
dle, and leave the rest of the bo<ly naked.
The young boys and girls go ab<jut with
nothing on them. The soles of their feet
are as hard as horn, and they tread on
thorns and briers without being hurt.
Their arms are bows, and arrows 8 ft.
long, tipi^ed with stag's horn, or a white
flint sharpened at the end. They shoot
these with such skill that they can stand
off and hit a sparrow in the middle; and,
in order to l)ecome expert by practice,
they throw a spear up in the air and
then send an arrow from the bow string
and drive it into the sjK'ar before it falls.
But since they do not string the bow very
tight, they can not hit a mark at a great
distimce. They live by means of these
weapons, and go out every day through
the fields and woods to hunt scpiirrels,
partridges, turkeys, and wild animals.
For there is an abundance of all these,
though we ourselves do not yet venture
to procure food by hunting, for fear of
ambushes. They live in houses built in
an oblong, oval shape. Light is adniitte<l
into these through the roof, by a window
a foot and a half long; this also serves
to carry off the smoke, for they kindle the
fire in the middle of the floor, and sleep
around the fire. Their kings, however,
and chief men have private apartments,
as it were, of their own, and beos, made by
driving 4 posts into the ground, and ar-
ranging poles above them horizontally.**
According to the same authority they
acknowledged one god of heaven, yet
paid him no outward worship, but strove
m every way to appease a certain imagin-
ary spirit, which tney called Ochre, that
he might not hurt them. They also wor-
shiped corn and fire. The missionary
probably alludes by this last statement
to the use of corn and fire in certain reli-
gious ceremonies. The villages of the
Conoy were Catawissa, Conejoholo,
Conoytown, and Kittamaquindi.
(J. M. c. T.)
Arogitti.— Golden (1727), Five Nations, 40, 1747
(given as the English name of the Cahnowas in
1679). Oachnawaye*.— Mar>iand treaty (1682) In
N. Y. Doc. Ck)l. Hist., in, 323, 1853. Oahnowaa.—
Golden, op. cit. Oanagetse.— Ibid., 38. Oanait.—
Heckewelder (1819) in Bozman, Md., i, 169, 1887
(given R8 the proper form). Canavett— Graffen-
ried (1711 ) in N. G. Rec., i. 958, 1886. Oanawayi.—
Heckewelder. op. cit. Canawese.— Ibid. Cana-
west.— GrafTenried, op. cit. Canhaways.— Drake,
Bk. Ind^, viii, 1848. Canoiie.— Penn. Records
(1707) in Day, Penn., 391, 1843. Caaowet.— Mary-
land treaty (1682) in N. Y. Doc. Gol. Hist., in. 322,
18o3. Oaaoyeas.— McKenneyand Hall.Ind.Tribes,
ni, 80, 1854. Oanoyias.— Golden (1727), Five Na-
tions, app., 58, 107, 1747. Canoys.— Doc. of 1764
in N. Y. Doc. (V>1. Hist., vii, 641, 1856. Oooh-
newwaaroonaw.— McKenney and Hall, Ind.
Tribes, in, 80, 1854. Connayt.— Groghan (1767)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 268, 1866. Oon-
noye.— Johnson (1757), ibid., 329. Connoyi.—
Lincoln (1793) in Am. St. Papers, iv, 352,
1832. Oonoiea.— Imlay, West Terr., 291, 1797.
Oonois.— Heckewelder (1819) in Bozman, Md., i,
169-171, 1837. Conoy.— Golden (1727), Five Na-
tions, app., 148, 1747. Conoy-aeh-«nch. — Douglass,
Summary, ii, 315. 1755 (same?). Coaoyucksueh-
roona.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 80,
18.'>4 (same?). Oaonnawaa-haga.— Gatschet in Am.
Antiq., IV, t5, 1881-82 (Mohawk name, according
to Pyrlaeus). Oanaway.— Day, Penn., 398. 1843
( form ii.«»ed i n treaties be fore 1744 ) . Ouiawenae. —
Ibid., 389. Ganawese.— Penn's treaty (1701) in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi. 140, 1857. Oana-
woose.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 126, 1816.
Gaaawset.— Domenech, Deserts, i, 441, 1860.
Oangawese.— Conynghara in Day. Penn.. 243. 1843.
Oannaottena.— D'lieu (1708) inN. Y. Doc. Gol. Hist.,
IX, 815, 1855. Oannieuinga.— Hennepin, New Die-
cov., 59, 1698. Ouananesses.— Domenech, Deserts,
I. 441, 1860 (same?). Kanaa.— Worsley, View Am.
Inds., 92. 1828. Xanaai.— Boudinot, Star in the
West. 1*26, 1816. Kanai.— Worsley, op. cit. Ka-
nawhat.— Brinton. Lenape Legends, 213. 1886
(Johnston, on Shawnee authority, renders this
word, 'having whirlpools,' but Brinton thinks
it but another form of Ganal or Gonoy). Kan-
ha was.— Heckewelder (1819) in Bozman, Md., i,
169-171. 1837. Kanhawayt.- Drake. Bk. Inds., vili,
1848. Kenhawaa.— Day, Penn., 243, 1843. Keno-
wiki.— Squler in Beach. Ind. Miscel., 34. 1877.
Konowiki.— Rafinesque^Am. Nations, i, 139,1836
(Delaware name). Kuhnauwantheew.— Aupau-
raut (1791) quoted by Brinton, Lenape Leg.,
20.1885 (Mahican name). Pascatawaye.— White
(1634?), Relatio lUnens. 33. 1874. PaMatoe.— Ibid..
63. Paicatowa3r«.— Brinton. I>enape Leg., 15. 18»5.
Paacattawaye.— Herrman. map (1670) in Maps to
Accompany the Rep. of theGomrs. on the Bndry.
Line bet. Va. and Md., 1873 (village about
Piscataway cr., 8. side). PaMotioons.---^pilman
(ra. 1623) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Goli , 4th s.. ix. 28,
note. 1871. PiscataweM.— Gonvngham in Day,
Penn., 243. 1843. Piicatoway.— Maryland treaty
(1682) in N. Y. Doc. Gol. Hist., in. 3*22. 1853.
Pitoatowayes. —I bid. , 323. PisoatUwayet. —Brock-
BULL. 30]
CONOYTOWN COOS
341
holls (1682), iWa., xm, 561, 1881. Piscatiut.— Doc.
of 1743 quoted by Brinton, Lenape Leg., 2r>. 1S85.
Piiaoattaways.— Brockholls, op. cit.
Gonoytown. A Conoy village formerly
on Susquehanna r. in Pennnylvania, be-
tween Oonejoholo (l^inbridge) and Sha-
mokin (Sunbury). In 1744 the Conoy
abandoned it after but a short stay there
and renioveil to the la.st-imme(l place. —
Brinton, I^napeLeg., 2^\ 1S85.
Conshao ('cane*, *re*'d', 'reed-brake').
A name applied in three principal ways:
(1) to the inhabitants of certain Choc-
taw towns (see Concluiy (bnchachitoUy
Omchatikpiy Comtharonsapu^ (^oonha); (2)
to the Koasati, q. v. ; (3) to a people living
somewhere on Coosa r. , not far from the.
Alibamu. Most of the later statements
regarding these i)eople seem to have been
derived from Iberville (Margry, Dec,
IV, 594-95, (502, 1880), who, in 1702, speaks
of two distinct Imnds under tnis name,
the one living with the Alibamu, the other
some distance e. n. e. of them. The former
were probably the Koasati, although it is
possible that they were the people of Old
kusa, which was close by. The Conshac
living higher up, 20 to 30 leagues beyond,
Iber\nlle states to have been called *'Apa-
lachicolys*' by the Spaniards and to have
moved into the district they then occupied
from Apalachicola r. in order to trade with
the English. Such a migration does not
seem to have been noted by anyone else,
however, and it is highly probable that
these Conshac were the j>eopleof Kusa, the
UpperC'reek "capital." Thisisrt^ndered
more likely by the analogous case of the
Choctaw Coosha, called Coosa by Romans,
the name of which has been comipttKl
from the same word, and from the fur-
ther consideration that Omshac and
Kusa rarely occur on the same map.
That the Conshac were an important trilx*
is attestetl by all early narratives and by
the fact that Alabama r. was often called
after them. If not identical with the i)eo-
ple of Kusa specifically, the entire Musko-
gee tribe may he intended. (j. r. s. )
ConehAct. — Dii 'Pratz, Hist, de la LouiHiane. ii,
208, 1758. Oonohaes.— Boudinot, Star in the West,
126, 1816. Oonehakus.— McKenney and Hall, Ind.
Tribes, in, 79, 1854. Oonohaquet.— Pi^nicant
(1708) in French, Hist. Coll. La., i. 101, 1869.
Gonehas. — French, ibid., in, 235, 1851. Gonoh«tex.—
De risle, map (m. 1710) in Winsor, Hist. Am., ii,
294, 1886. OoBohet.— Keane in Stanford, (Tom-
rnd., 510, 1878. Coashadu.— Carroll, Hist. Coll.
C. 1, 190, 1836 (Coosasare also mentioned, but
this is probably a duplication made in quoting
earlier authorities). Oonshakis.— Bossu (1759),
Travels La., i, 229, 1771.
Conshaeonsapa (corruption of Kushak'
osapa, *reed-Drake field*). A former
Choctaw towns, of Imongalasha, Nesholm
CO., Miss.; exact location not known. —
Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., vi,
431, 1902.
Contahiiah( 'a pine in thewater.' — Hew-
itt). A Tuscamra village near the mouth
of Neuser., N. C, in 1701.
O»u-ta-noh.— Cusic (1826) quoted by Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribi's, v, 636, 1H55. Contahnah.— Lawtum
(1709), N.C..:Ki, 1860. Kau-U-noh.— Cusic, op. cit.
Zautanohakau.— Cusic, Six Nations, 24, 182H.
Contarea. One of the principal Huron
villiiges iu Ontario in the 17th century;
situaUMl near the j)resent I^nnigan's lake.
Tiny township. See Kimtareuhrouon,
Carmaron. — (humplain (1615),(Euvn's. IV, 27. 1H70.
Oontareia.— .Jc«<. Rcl. for 16.V), 10, 1H68. Contar-
rea.— Jes. Rcl. for 16:W. 94, 1K58. Kontarea.— Jcs.
Rcl. for lfi42, 74. 1>C»8.
CoxLtla. A branch of the Opata inhab-
iting the pueblo of Santa Cruz, Sonora,
Mexico ( Orozco y Berra, ( Jeog. , .'U4, 18(>4 ) .
The name is probably that applied by
the natives to their town.
Cooking. See Food.
Cook* 8 Ferry. A body of Ntlakyapa-
muk, probably l)elonging to the Xicola
band, under the Frast^r suiH»rintendencv,
Brit. Col.; pop. 282 in 1882, 204 in UH)4.--
Can. Ind. Aff. Kei>s.
Goon. See Ram urn.
Goongale^s. ( Ji ven bv Sauvole ( French,
Hist. Coll. Ui., 1st s.,*iii, 238, 1851) as a
village on AVabash (i. e. Ohio) r., above
a Chickasaw village that was 140 leagues
from the Mississipju in 1701. As it is
represented as on the route to Carolina,
Tennessee r. may have Ihh^u intende<l.
Perhaps a C-herokee town.
Tahogale.— Coxc in French, Hist. ('oil. I^.. n. -JIU),
1850.
Coonlac. A village of the Skilloot triln*
of the Chinookan family at Oak )>oint
(from which the village wa« named), on
the s. side of Columbia r., l)elow the
mouth of the Cowlitz, in Columbia co.,
Oreg. After 1880 the Cooniac people
seem to have been the only survivmg
remnant of the Skilloot. (i- k. )
Cooniacs.— (iibbs, Chinook Vocab., iv, 1863. Xahn-
yak. —Ibid. Ketiakaniaka. — Framboise (1835)
quoted l)v (Jairdncr in Jour.cJeoir. So<'. L<md.. xi,
255, 1S41. Konick.— Ume (1S49) in Sen. Ex. I)<m'.
52. 31st Cong., 1st scs.s.. 174. 1H50. Konnaack.—
Prcs. Mess., Ex. Doc. ,S9. 32d Cong., Ist sess., 2,
1852. Kukhn-yak.— (Jibbs, Chinook Vocab., iv,
l.sd3. Ne-co-ni-ac.— Lee and Frost, Oregon, 194,
•1H44. Ne Ooniacka.— Ibid., IIM. (la'niak.— Boas.
field notes (name for Ouk iK)int). Whill Wete.—
Ross, Adventures. 104, 1849.
Coonti. A cycadaceoiLS plant {Zaniia
hitegrifolia), or the breadstuff ol)taine<l
from it by the Seminole of Florida;
siH'lled also hoodie, rootit'uty etc. Kiinti
is the name of the "flour" in the Seminole
dialect. (a. f. c.)
Gooptee. A Nootka winU»r village near
the head of Nootka sd., w. coast of Van-
couver id.
Ooopte.— Can. Ind. Aff. Rep. 1902, app., 83. Coop-
tee.— Jewitt. Narr., 104. 1849.
Coos. The term usually employed to
denote the villages or tril)e8 of the Kusan
famil V formerly on C\x)8 bay, Oreg. I^wis
and Clark estimated their population at
1,500 in 1805. The name is often used
as synonymous with the family name.
Properly speaking there are 2 villages
included under the tenn, Melukitz and
Anasitch. (l. f.)
342
COOSA OOOWEESCOOWEE
[b. a. b.
Cookkoooose.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii, 118,
1814. Oookkoo-oosee.— Drake, Bk. Inds., xi, 1848.
Oookoose.— Bancroft, Nut. Races, i, 307, 1874.
Ooos.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 231, 1890.
OooiMit.— Ind. Aflf. Rep., 62, 1872. Oooa Bay.— Dor-
sey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 231, 1890. Oo-om.—
Parrish in Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1854. 495, 1856. Ooose
Bay.— Palmer in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 218, 1857.
Oooset.— Taylor in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 40th Cook.,
spec, sess., 5, 1867. Goose Taylors.— Dole in Ind.
AflT. Rep., 220, 1861. Oowes.— Doraey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, iii, 231. 1890. Ha't«ne.— Everette, Tu-
tut<^ne MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (Tututunne
name). Ha'^finni.- Dorsey, Chasta Ck)sta MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Chastacosta name).
Kaons.— Framboise (1835) quoted by Gairdner
in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 256, 1841. Kaus.—
Hale, Ethnog. and Philol., 221, 1846. Ko'-i-yak'.-
Bissell, Umpkwa MS. vocab., B.A. E. (Umpqua
name). Ko-k'oo'.— Dorsey, Alsea MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 1884 (Alsea name). Kook-koo-oose.—
Drake, Bk. Inds., viii, 1848. Kouse.- Armstrong,
Oregon, 116, 1857. Kowea.— Drew (1855) in H. R.
Ex. Doc. 93, 34th Ck>ng., 1st sess., 94. 1856. Kowes
Bay.— Ind. AflT. Rep. 1857, 359, 1858. K'qlo-qweo
)iiwi& — Dorsey, Chasta Costa MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1884 (Chastacosta name). Kus.— Dorsey in Jour.
Am. Folk-lore, iii, 231, 1890. Kusa.- Ind. Aflf.
Rep., 253, 1877. Kus-me' »unii».— Dorsey, Chetco
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Chetco name). Kwok-
wbos.— Hale, Ethnog. and Philol., 221, 1846.
Kii-cln'-t'i ;unn8.— Dorsey, Coquille MS. vocab..
B. A. E., 1884 (Coquille (Athapascan) name).
8ai-yu'-cle-me' ^unni.- Dorsey, Tutu MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 1884 (Tututunne name). Tce'^unnS.-
Dorsey, Naltftnne 5ftnn(^' MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1884 (Xaltunne name).
Coosa. A sniall tribe, now extinct,
which lived about the month of Edisto
or Combahee r., South Carolina. Its
name is preserveil in Coosaw and Coosaw-
hatchee rs. According to Rivers (Hist.
S. C, 94, 1874) they lived n. e. of Com-
bahee r., which separated them from the
Combahee tribe. They appear to be
identical with the Couexi of the Huguenot
colonists (1562) and with the Coc^ao of
Juan de la Vandera's narrative of 1569.
They were hostile to the P^nglish in 1671;
in 1675 the "great and lesser Casor'*
sold to the colonists a tract lying on
Kiawah, Stono, and Edisto rs.; there is
also record of a sale by the chief of **Kis-
sah'* in 1684. They are mentioned a%
Knssoes in the South Carolina trade reg-
ulation.s of 1707, and lastappt^ar in 1743,
under the name Coosah, as one of the
tribes incorporated with the Catawba but
still preserving their own language. It
is possible that, like their neighbors the
Yamasi, they were of Muskhogean stock.
If not, they may have been Uchean rather
than cognate with Catawba. (j. m.)
Oa«)r.— Deed of 1G75 in Mills, 8. C, app. 1, 182C.
Cocao.— Vandera (1567) quoted by French, Hist.
Coll. La., 11,290, 1875. Coosah.- Adair, Am. Inds.,
225, 1775. Coosaw.- Rivers, Hist. S. C, 38, 1856.
Cotah.- Mills,8tat. S.C, 107, 1826. Couexi.— Doc.
cited by Mooney, Siouan Tribes of the East. 84,
1894. CoMU).— Vandera, op. cit. Kissah.- Mills,
op. cit., 107, app. 1. KuMoe.— Doc. of 1671 quoted
by Rivers, Hist. S. C, 372, 1866.
Coosa. Given as a Cherokee town in a
document of 1799 (Royce in 5th Rep.
B. A. E., 144, 1887). Unidentified, but
perhaps on upper Coosa r., Ala. See
Ansa.
Goosada. A former small mixed settle-
ment of Creeks and Cherokee, established
about 1784 on the left bank of Tennessee
r. at what is now Larkin^s Landing, Jack-
son CO., Ala. From this village to the
site of the present Guntersville there was
an Indian trail. — Street in Ala. Hist. Soc.
Publ., I, 417, 1901; Royce in 18th Rep.
B. A. E., pi. cviii, 1899.
Coosadi Hychoy. A former Koasati set-
tlement on Tombigbee r., in Chootaw and
Marengo cos., Ala., about lat. 32° 35''.
Coosadi Hychoy.- West Fla. map, ca. 1775. Oo-
ohoy.— Romans, Florida, 327, 1775.
Goosahatchi. An Upper Creek town on
Tallapoosa r., Ala., with .S6 families in
1832.
Coosahatohes.— Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, v, 262. 1855. Cubahatchee.— Hopoethle
Yoholo (1836) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 80, 27th Cong., 8d
sess., 36, 1843. Cube hatcha.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, iv^78, 1854.
Coosak-hattak-falaya (Choctaw: Mong
white cane*). Noted on Robin's map
as an Indian town in 1807. Romans
(Fla., 305, 1775) mentions it apparently
as a settlement w. of lower Tombigbee
r., Ala., in Muskhogean territory.
Cootakhattak.— Robin, Voy., i, map, 1807.
Goosha {kmhak, or ku^iha, 'reed,* or
'* reed-brake*). A former important
Choctaw town on the x. side of a w.
branch of Jjost Horse cr., an affluent of
Ponta cr., in Lauderdale co.. Miss. (Hal-
bert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., vi, 416,
1902) . Romans has transposed the loca-
tion of this town and Pan the, q. v.
Cooaa.— Romans, Florida, map, 1775 (misapplied).
Coosaha. -Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I, 108, 1884.
Cutha. — Ibid. Konshaws. — Byington, Choctaw
MS. Diet., B. A. E., ca. 1834.
Goosuc ( from koash * pine, * ak * at :' * at the
?ine*). A small band, probably of the
ennacook, formerly living about the
junction of the Upper and Lower Am-
monoosuc with the Connecticut, in Cobs
and Grafton cos., N. H. t'heir village,
called Coos or Coosuc, seems to have
been near the mouth of the Lower Am-
monoosuc. They were driven off by the
English in 1704 and joined the St Francis
Indians, where they still kept up the
name about 1809. * (j. m.)
Coh&Miac.— Kendall, Travels, in, 191, 1809 (name
still used for themselves by those at St Francis).
Coo*.- Macauley. N. Y., n, 162, 1829. Cootucka.-
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 222, 1855. Cowa-
»aok«.— Kidder in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 236,
1859. CowaMuok.— Penhallow ( 1726) quoted by Ly
man in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll.. 1, 86, 1824.
Coot. A Costanoan village situated in
1819 within 10 m. of Santa Cmz mission,
Cal.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5,
1860.
Coowee8coowee( GWwlsguwl'/^ anonoma-
tope for a large bird said to have been
seen formerly at frequent intervals in
the old Cherokee country, accompanying
the migratory wild geese, and described
as resembling a large snipe, with yellow
legs and unwebbed feet) . A district of
BHLL. 30 J
OOOXTSSETT COPPER
343
the Cherokee Nation, Indian Ter., named
in honor of the noted Cherokee chief so-
called, better known aH John Rons. —
Moonev in 19th Rep. B. A. K., 285, 521,
1900.
Cooxissett A village, i)robably in Ply-
mouth CO., MasH., having: about IBO inhab-
itants in 1(185. Mentioned by Hinckley
(1685) in Ma^H. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s.,
V, 13:^, 1861.
Gopala. A mythical i)rovince, al)out
which the "Turk," api)arently a Paw-
nee Indian, while amonj^ the l*iie))los of
the Rio Grande in New Mexico in 1540,
endeavored to deceive Coronado and hiw
army. It was said to have lxH»n situated
in the direction of Florida and to have
contained great wealth. See Winship
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 491, 1896. Cf. Eij-
isfiy Iziiy Qnirirtt.
Copalis. A tlivisiion of Sali.**h on Che-
pahs r., 18 m. N. of (frays harbor,
Wash. Lewis and Clark estii'nated their
number at 200, in 10 houses, in 1805.
CopalU.— Swan, N. W. Coast, 210, 1857. PaiOUlia.—
Doniencch, Deserts, i. 44:i. IHOC). PaiUh.— Lewis
and Clark, Expe<l., ii, 474,1814. PaUsk.— Ibi<l., 119.
Copeh (from kajnti^ 'stream,' in the lo-
cal dialect). A trilx* of the Patwin di-
vision of the Coj)ehan family formerly
living on lower Puta cr., Yolo co., C'al. '
Cop-«h.— Gibbsin Sehoolcmft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 428,
1853. Ko-pe.— Powell inCont. N. A. Ethiiol., in,
619,1877. Putoi.— Powers in Overland Mo., xni,
543, 1874 (so calknl by the Spanianls *• on account
of their gross licentiousness ").
Copehan Family. A linguistic stock for-
merly occupying a large territory in Cali-
fornia, from Suisun and San Pablo bays on
the 8. to Mt Shasta and the country of the
Shastan family on the x. Starting from
the N., the e. boundary ran a few miles
E. of McCloud r. to its junction with the
Sacramento and thenc^e to Redding, a
large triangle e. of Sacramento r. belong-
ing to the CoiH»han; and from liedding
down the l)Oundary was al)out 10 m. e.
of Sactrauiento r., but s. of Chico it was
confined to the w. bank. ( )n the w. the
summit of the Coast range forme<l the
boundary, but from the headwaters of
Cott<mwood cr. northward it nearly
reacluMi the s. fork of the upi)er Trinity.
The |HM)pleof this family were among the
'most intert»sting of the California Indians,
with a harmonious language and an iuter-
t»8ting mythology. Their scx'ial and i)olit-
ical system was like that of all California
tril)e8: their largest unit was the village,
more extensive combinations I wing for
temporary puri>ose8 only. The people
comprising tn is family havel)een divided
by Powers (Ccmt. N. A. Ethnol., iii,
1877) into 2 branches, the Patwin and
the Wintun, differing considerably jn
language and customs. Following* is a
list of their villages:
Patwin subfamily: Aclutoy, Ansactoy,
CheniK)8el, Churuptoy, Copeh, (Juilitoy,
Korusi, Liwaito, Lolsel, Malaka, Napa,
Noyuki,01posel, Olulato, Suisun, Topai-
disel, Tuluka, Waikosel, Wailaksel,
Yodetabi, Yolo.
Wintun subfamily: Daupom, Noam-
laki, Normuk, Nuimok, Nununuk, Pat-
win, Puimem, Puiniuk, Tien-Tien, Waik-
enniuk, AVininiem.
Copper. Copper ha<l come into very
general u^?e among the tribes n. of Mexico
Wore the arrival of the white rdce in the
Mississippi valley and the region of the
great lakes. The reign of stone, which
in early times had lK»en undisputtni, was
beginning to give way to the dominion of
metal. It is j)robable that copi)er came
into use in the n. as a result of the di««-
covery of nuggets or small masses of the
native metal among the debris deposited
over a large area s. of the lakes by the
sluHits of glacial ice that swept from
the N. across the fully exposed surface of
the <!opiH'r-l)earing rocks of the L. Suik»-
rior region (see ^fin^'i( and Qiutrrien).
These pieces of c(>pj)er were at first doubt-
less treattnl and u.**(h1 as were stones of
similar size and shape, but the jH.M'uliar
(pialities of the metal must in time have
impressed themselves upcm the acute
native mind, and implements were shape<i
by hannnering instead of by pecking.
At first the forms pnMluced* would Iw
nmch the siime as those of the stone im-
plements of the same people, but after a
while the celts, hati'hets, awls, knives,
drills, siK'arheads, et<\, wouM take on
new forms, suggested bv the ])eculiar
proj)erties of the materiaf, and other va-
rieties of implements would be evolved.
The metal wjis too soft to wholly suiH»r-
sede stcme as a material for the manufac-
ture of implements, but its pleasing color
and its c^ipacity for tiiking a high jNilish
must have led at an early date to its use
for |H»rsonal ornaments, and <m the ar-
rival of the whites it was in great <lemand
for this piirpose over nearly the entire
country.
A knowle<lge of the discovery of <le-
jH>sits of copiHT in the lake region passed
in course of time l)eyond the local
trilxjs, and it is not unlikely that it ex-
tended to ^lexico, where the metallurgic
arts had made remarkable headway and
where the rtni metal was in great demand.
That any extensive trade sprang u\> be-
tween tlie N. and the far S., however,
seems improbable, since such communica-
tion would have le<Unevitably totheintro-
duction of southern methods of manipula-
tion among the more advanced tribes of
the Mississippi valley and the (iulf coast
and to the freiiuent i)resence of jHiculiarly
Mexican artifacts in the burial mounds.
ThertM'anl^ no (juestionthatthe supply
of copper used by the tribes of e. Cnited
Stat€»s came mainly from the L. Su|H»rior
344
COPPER
[B. A. E.
region, althou^i^h native copper in small
(quantities is found in Virginia, North Caro-
lina, Tennessee, Arizona, riew Mexico, and
Nova Scotia. It is not at all certain, how-
ever, that the natives utilized these latter
sources of supnly to any considerable ex-
tent iK^fore the coming of the whites.
There seems to be little doubt that cop-
per was somewhat extensively used in
Alaska before the arrival of Europeans.
It is possible that a small i)ercentage of the
copper found in mounds in the Southern
states came from Cuba and Mexico, but
there is no way of satisfactorily determin-
ing this point. The L. Superior copper
can often \>e distingui8he<l from other cop-
per by the dissemination through it of
minute particles of silver.
The processes employed in shaping coj)-
per (see Metal-wurk) were at first prob-
ably confined to cold hammering and
grinding, but heat was employed to facil-
itate hammering and in annealing, and
possi))Iy nidc forms of swedging in molds
and even of ca^^ting were known, although
little evidence to this effect has yet been
obtained. It anjH'ars that in dealing with
thin sheets of the metal, which were
readily made by hammering with stone
implementjj and by grinding, pressure
with suitable tools was employed to pro-
duce repouss*' effects, the sheet lK»ing laid
for treatment on a mold of stone or wood,
or on a pliable pad or a plastit; surface.
Certain objects of sheet copper with re-
pousse designs obtained from Indian
mounds in Illinois, Ohio, Georgia, and
Florida have attracted much attention
on account of the very skilful treatment
shown. That primitive methods of ma-
nipulation well within the reach of the
alxirigines are adeipiate to accomplish
similar results is shown, however, by ex-
periments conducted by Cushing.
The very considerable progress of the
native metallurgist in copper working is
well shown by examples of plating re-
covered from the mounds in Ohio and
elsewhere. A headdress belonging to a
personage of importance buried in one of
the Ho|>ewell mounds, near Chillicothe,
Ohio, found by Moorehead, consists of a
high frontal piece made of sheets of cop-
per covered with indented figures, out
of which rises a pair of antlers imitating
those of a deer. The antlers are formed
of wood and neatly covered or plated with
sheet copper (Putnam). Otlier exam-
ples from the same source are spool-like
objects, probably ear ornaments, formed
of thin sheets of copper over a wood base,
and most skilfully executed. Willoughby
has very effectively imitated this work,
using a bit of native copper with bowl-
ders and pebbles from the beach as tools.
Of the same kind of workmanship are
numerous specimens obtained by Moore
from mounds on St Johns r., Fla., the
most interesting being jaw-bones of wolves
plated with thin sheets of copper. Other
objects similarly treated are disks of lime-
stone and beads of shell, bone, wood, and
possibly other materials.
A popular belief exists that the Egyp-
tians and other ancient nations, including
the Mexicans and Peruvians, had a proc-
ess for hardening copptT, but there is no
real foundation for this l>elief. The re-
puted hardened product is always an
alloy. No specimen of pure copper has
been found which has a greater degree of
hardness than can be produced by ham-
mering.
Although copper probably came into
use among the northern tribes in com-
paratively recent times, considering the
whole period of aboriginal occupancy,
there can l)e no doubt pf its extensive and
widespread utilization l)efore the coming
of the whites. That the ancient mines
of the L. Superior region are purely ab-
original is amply shown by their char-
acter an<l bv the implements left on the
ground; and the vast extent of the work
warrants the conclusion that they had
been operated hundreds of years before
the white man set foot on American
shores. It is true that the influence ot
French and English explorers and colo-
nists was soon felt in the copper-producing
districts, and led in time to modifications
in the methods of shaping the metal and
in the forms of the articles made from it,
and that later foreign copper became an
important article of trade, so that as a
result it is now difficult to draw a very
definite line between the aboriginal and /
the accultural phases ot the art; but that
most of the articles recovered from ab-
original sites are aBonginal and made of
native metal can not be seriously ques-
tioned.
Considerable discussion has arisen re-
garding the origin and antiquity ot certain
objects of sheet copper, the most con-
spicuous of which are several human
figures in elaborate repouss^ work, from
one of the Etowah mounds in (ieorgia,
and a large number of objects ot stieet
copix?r cut in conventional patterns, found
in a mound on Hopewell farm, Ross co.,
Ohio. Analysis of the metal m this and
similar cases gives no encouragement to
the theory of foreign origin (Moore).
The evident antiquity of the mounds in
which these objects were found and the
absence in them of other objects open to
the suspicion of foreign ( European ) origin
or influence tend to confirm the belief in
their American origin and pre-Columbian
age.
The state of preservation ol the imple-
ments, utensils, and ornaments found in
mounds and other places ot burial varies
BULL. 301
COPPER
345
greatly, but many specimenfi are in per-
fect condition, some having retained the
high surface polish acquired in long use.
It happens that the presence of copper
objects in association with more perish-
able objects of wood, bone, shell, and
textile materials, has, through the action
of the co|)j)er carbonates, resulted in the
preservation of many i)reciou8 things
which otherwise would have entirely
disapi)eared.
Of the various implements of copper, the
celt, or chisel-like hatchet, has the widest
distribution. The
forms are greatly diver-
sified, and the 'weight
ranges from a few
ounces to several
pounds. The imple-
ment is never })erfo-
rated for hafting, al-
though hafts were un-
doubtedly used, por-
tions of these having /. ^^
, 1 • r Celt; Wisconsin. KX-B)
been preserved m a few >*>
cases. As with our own axes, the blade
is sometimes widened toward the cutting
edge, which is convex in outline. Many
specimens, however, are
nearly straiglit on tlie
sides, while others are
long and somewhat nar-
rower toward the point.
They could l)e hafte<l to
serve as axes, adzt^, or
gouges. Some have one
face flat and the other
slightly ridged, suaoresting
the adz or gouge. The celt
forms grade into other
cetTiNtwYOHK. (i-6) more slender shapes which
have chisel edges, and these into drillsand
graver-like tools, while following in turn
are needles and poniards, the latter being
generally cylindrical,
with long, tajx^ring
OKOOVtO Ax;
1-4. (long Col-
lection)
ONOOveo Ax; NEW MEXICO;
1-4. (long collec-
tion)
points, the largest examples being 2 or 3
ft in length and weighing several pounds.
The grooved ax is of rare occurrence, and
where found appears to repeat the stone
forms of the particular district. Squier
and Davis illustrate a two-edged specimen
with a hole through the middle of the
blade from face to mce, supposed to have
been intended to aid in fixing the haft
SPUD; Michigan.
(1-5)
Related in general shape to the ax is
another tyi)e of implement sometimes
called a spud. Its distribution is lim-
ited to the district lying immediately s.
of the great lakes. The socket is usually
forme<l by hammer-
ing out lateral wings
at the upiH'r end of
the implement and
bending them in-
ward. The purpose
of this implement is
notfuUydetermined.
With a long and
straight handle it
would serve as a
spadeor digging tool ;
with thehandlesharplylH'nt near the ix)int
of insertion it would l)ecome a hatchet or
an adz, ac(!ording to the relative jMDsition
of the blade and handle. The natives had
already come to appreciate the value of
copper for knives, and blades of various
forms were in use; usually these are drawn
out into a long point at the haft end
for insertion into a wood or lK)ne
handle. Arrowheads of various or-
dinary shapes are coinmcm, as are
also lance and sjumr hea<ls, the lat-
ter being sometimes
shaped forinsertioninto
the end of the wooilen
shaft, but more fre-
M^ (juentlyhavingasocket,
■^ made as in the spud, for
theinserti<m of the han-
dle. Drills, needles,
pins, tishliooks, etc.,
(K'cur in considerable
numbers, esi)ecially in
the Northern statt*s.
Personal ornaments
are of great variety,
including In^ads, j)en-
dants, pins, eardisks,
earrings, l)racelets, gorgets, etc. The most
interesting objects of coi)ix»r do not come
within either of the ordinary classes of or-
naments, although they doubtless served
in some way as adornnients for the i>er-
son, i)r()babry in connection with the cer-
emonial headdress. These are made of
sheet copier, and certain of their fea-
tures are suggestive of
exotic, though not of
European, influence.
, Knife Blade , Wiscon-
sin (l-e); h, Spear-
head OR Knife, Wiscon-
sin (1-6^; r. Spear-
head, Wisconsin (i-6)
BMACCLrr PROM A
(1-3)
Pierced Tablet; Ohio,
(i-e)
The best examples are from one of the
Etowah mounds in Cieorgia. Other re-
346
COPPER
[b. a. e.
inarkable objects found in mounds at
Hopewell farm, Ross co., Ohio, app^r
to nave been intended for some special
symbolic use rather than for
personal adornment, as usual
means of attachment are not
provided. The early voyagers,
especially along the Atlantic
coast, mention the use of to-
bacco pipes of copper. There
is much evidence that imple-
ments as well as ornaments and
other objects of copper were regarded as
having exceptional virtues and magical
powers, and certain early writers aver that
jHirs " and of their peculiar form and use
is not known. The largest are about 3
ft. in length. The upper, wider portion,
Ornament-Symbols; Ohio mound;
4 TO 12 Inches in Greatest
Dimension, (moorehead)
some of the
tribes of the
great lakes held
all copper as sa-
cred, making no
practical use of
it whatever.
Copper was
not extensively
used within the
area of the Pacific
states, but was em-
ployed for various
purposes by the
tribes of the N. W.,
who are skilful
metal workers, em-
ploying to some ex-
tent methods intro-
duce<l bv the whites.
Formerly the na-
tives obtained copper from the valley of
Copi>er r. and elsewhere, but the market
is now well sup-
plied with the im-
ported metal. Itis
used very largely
for ornaments, for
utensi Is, especially
knives, and whis-
tles, rattles, and
masks are some-
times made of it.
Perhaps the most
noteworthy prod-
uct is the unique,
shield-like "cop-
pers** made of
sheet metal and
highly esteemed as symbols of wealth or
distinction. The origin of these "cop-
I
Sheet-copper EAatE; Illinois
MOUND; 1-6 (thomas)
Sheet-copper Figure; Etowah Mouno, Ga. (about I-s)
and in cases the lower part, or stem, are
ornamented with designs representing
mythic creatures (Niblack, Boas).
The literature of copper is extensive;
the principal works, especially those
contributing original material,
are: Beauchamp in Bull. N. Y.
State Mus., no. 73, 1903; Boas
in Nat. Mus. Ren. 1895, 1897;
Butler in Wis. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
VII, 1876; Cushing (1) in The
Archaeologist, II, no. 5, 1894, (2)
in Am. Anthrop., vii, no. 1,
1894; Davis in Smithson. Rep.
1874, 1875; Farquharson m
Proc. Davenport Acad., i, 1876;
Foster, Prehist. Races, 1878;
Foster and Whitney, Rep. on
Geol. and Topog. L. Superior
Land District (H. R. Doc. 69, copper knife;
3l8t Cong., Ist sess., 1850);
Fowke, Archajol. Hist. Ohio,
1902; Gillman in Smithson.*
Rep. 1873, 1874; Hamilton in Wis. Ar-
chaeol., i, no. 3, 1902; Hearne, Journey
1796; Holmes in Am. Anthrop., iii, 1901
Hoy in Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., iv, 1878
Lapham, Antiq. of Wis., 1855; Lewis in
Am. Antiq. , xi,no. 5,1889; McLean, Mound
Builders, 1879; Mason in Proc. Nat. Mus.,
XVII, 1895; Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., viii, 1843;
Moore, various memoirs in Jour. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Phila., 1894-1905; Moore, McGuire, et
al. in Am. Anthrop., n. s., v, no. 1, 1903;
Moorehead (1) Prehist. Impl., 1900, (2) in
Haioa; lcnqth
9 1-2 Inches.
( Niblack)
BULL. 80]
COPS CORA
347
The Antiquarian, i, 1897; Nadaillac, Pre-
hist. Amer., 1884; Niblack in Nat. Mus.
Rep. 1888, 1890; Packard in Am. Antiq.,
XV, no. 2, 1893; Patterson in Nova Scotia
Inst, of Sci., VII, 1888-89; Putnam (1) in
Peabody Mus. Reps.,
XVI, 1884, (2) in Proc.
A. A. A. S., XLiv, 1896;
Rau(l) Archseol. Coll.
Nat. Mus., 1876, (2) in
Smithson. Rep. 1872,
1873; Reynolds in Am.
Anthrop., i, no. 4, 1888;
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
1, 1851; Short, N.Am, of
Antiquity, 1880; Slaf-
ter, Prehist. Copper
Impl.,1879; Squier, An-
tiq. of N. Y. and the
West, 1851; Squier and kwakiutlceremon.au
Davis, Ancient Monu- ^nVs" (bo^)^ "
ments, 1848; Starr, First
Steps in Human Progress, 1895; Stnichev
(1585), Hist. Va., Hakluyt See. Publ.*,
VIII, 1843; Thomas in 12th Rep. B. A. E.,
1894; Whittlesey, Ancient Mining on Lake
Superior, Smithson. Cont., xiii, 1863;
WiUoujrhby in Am. Anthrop., v, no. 1,
1903; Wilson, Prehist. Man, 1862; Win-
chell in Engin. and Min. Jour., xxxii,
Sept. 17, 1881. (w. H. n.)
Cops. A former Papago rancheria vis-
ited by Kino and Mange m 1699; situated
w. of the Rio San I*edro, probably in the
vicinity of the present town of Arivaca,
8. w. of Tubac, 8. Ariz.
Cops. — Mange (1701) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz,
and N. Mex., 358, 1889. Homo. —Mange, ibid.
Copway, Qeorge (Kagigegaho^ *he who
stands forever. ' — W. J.) . A y oimg Chip-
pewa chief, bom near the mouth of Trent
r., Ontario, in the fall of 1818. His pa-
rents were Chippewa, and his father, until
his conversion, was a medicine-man.
George was e<lucated in Illinois, and
after acquiring considerable knowledge
in English books returned to his people
as a Wesleyan missionary. For many
years he was connecteti with the press of
New York city and lectured extensively
in Europe ana the United States, but he
is noted chiefly as one of the few Indian
authors. Among his publishe<l writings
are: The Life, Historv, and Travels of
Kah-ge-ga-gah-bowh (George Copway),
Albany, 1847, and Philadelphia, 1847;
The Life, Letters, and Speeches of Kah-
ge-ga-^h-bowh, New York, 1850; The
Traditional History and Characteristic
Sketches of the Ojibway Nation, London
and Dublin, 1850, and Boston, 1851;
Recollections of a Forest Life, London,
Edinburgh, and Dublin, 1851, and Lon-
don, 1855; Indian Life and Indian His-
tory, Boston, 1858; The Ojibway Con-
quest, a Tale of the Northwest, New York,
1850; Organization of a New Indian Ter-
ritory East of the Missouri River, New
York, 1850; Running Sketches of Men and
Places in England, France, Germany, Bel-
gium and Scotland, New York, 1851.
Copway also wrote a hymn in the Chip-
pewa language (London, 1851) and co-
operateii with the Rev. Sherman Hall in
the translation of the Gospel of St Luke
r Boston, 1837) and the Acta of the
Apostles (Boston, 1838). He died at
Eonliac^-MidL, al)out 1863.
Goquilt. One of the Diegueiio ranche-
rias represented in the treaty of 1852 at
Santa Isabel, s. Cal. — H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,
34th Cong., 3d sess., 133, 1857.
Coquite. Mentioned by Mota Padilla
(Historia, 164, 1742, re[)r. 1870) in con-
nection with Jimena ((iralisteo) and Zitos
(Sitos) as a pueblo which lay between
Pecos and the Keresan villages of the Rio
(irande in New Mexico when visited by
Coronado in 1540-42. It was seemingly
a Tano pueblo.
Coquitlam. A coast Salish tril)e speak-
ing the Cowichan dialect and inhabiting
Eraser valley just al)ove the delta, in Brit-
ish Columbia. They owned no land,
being practically slaves of the Kwantlen.
Pop. 25 in 1904.
Ooquet-lane.— Can. Ind. Aflf., pt. I, 268, 1889. Oo-
quetlum.— Ibid., 309, 1879. Coquilain.— Trutch,
Map Brit. Col., 1870. Coquitlam.— Can. Ind. Aff.,
413, 1898. Coquitiaa.— Ibid., 74, 79, 1878. Coquit-
lane.— Ibid.. 276, 1894. Ooquitiuxn.— Ibid., 316,
1880. Koquitan.— Brit. Col. Map, Victoria, 1872
(named as a town^. Ewikof/em. — Boas, MS., B.
A. E.. 1H87. Kwi'kwitlEm.— Hill-Tout in Ethnol.
Surv. Can., 54, 1902.
Cora. A tribe or group of tribes be-
longing to the Piman family and occupy-
ing several villages and rancherias in the
Sierra de Nayarit and on the Rio de
Jesus Marfa, Jalisco, Mexico. They were
a brave and warlike people, living inde-
pendently in the mountain glens and
ravines until 1721-22 when they were
subjugated by the Si)aniards and mis-
sions established among them. Accord-
ing to Jose de Ortega (Vocab. Leng. Cas-
til. y Cora, 1732, 7, repr. 1888) the Cora
language consisted of 3 dialects: the
Muutzizti, spoken in the middle of the
sierra; the Teacuacueitzisti, spoken in
the lower part of the sierra toward the
w., and the Ateacari, spoken on the
banks of the Rio Nayarit (Jesus Marfa).
Orozco y Berra(Geog., 69, 281, 1864) fol-
lows the same grouping and adds Colo-
tlan as a dialect, while he quotes Alegre
to the effect that the Cora are divided
into the Cora (proper), the Nayarit, and
the Tecualme or Gecualme. These are
probably identical with Ortega's divi-
sions. Nayari, or Nayariti, is the name
by which the Cora are known among
tnemselves. They still use their native
language, which is guttural although
348
CORAPA CORCHAtJG
[B. A. S.
quite musical, but all the men and most
of the women alio understand Spanish to
some extent. They are proud of their
Indian blood, and although they have
largely adopted the clothing of the white
Mexicans there is very little intermar-
riage betw^een the two. The native cos-
tume of the men consists of buckskin
troust^rs and a very short tunic of home-
woven woolen material dyed <lark blue.
The Cora, esi)ecially thoee of the high
sierra, possess an air of indej)endence and
manliness. In speei'h, religion, and cus-
toms they are akin to the Huichol, and
while tliey trade with them for red paint,
wax, and feathers, and the services of
Huichol shamans are highly regarded by
the Cora, there is no strong alliance be-
tween the two tribes. Most of the Cora
men are slightly bearded, especially on
the chin. The women weave belts and
bags of cotton and wool, and the men
manufa<'ture fish-nets which are used in
dragging the streams. Their houses are
of stone with thatcheil roofs, with little
ventilation. Their country, notwith-
standing its altitude, is malarial, yet the
(yora are sai<l to attain remarkable lon-
gevity and their women are well pre-
served. In the valley a disease of the
eyes prevails in summer. The waters of a
crater lake e. of Santa Teresa are regarded
as sacred, and necessary to the perform-
ance of every ceremony. An afternoon
wind which prevails daily in the hot
country is believed to be beneficial to the
com, and a tamal of ashes, 2 ft. long, is
sacrificeil to it. Easter is celebrated by a
feast and a dance — a survival of mission-
ary training — and the mitote is also danced
for weeks in succession to bring needed
rain. Connected with their puberty cere-
monies is the drinking of home-made
nK»scal. Fasting, sometimes conducted
by shamans alone, is a ceremonial feature
and is thought to l)e necessary to insure
good crops. Tlie morning star is the
principal god and protecting genius, being
(characterized as a brother, a youth armed
with bow and arrow who once shot the
j)owerful sun at noontime on account of
his intense heat. The moon is also a
god — l)oth man and woman — ^and there
are many others, as everything is be-
lieved to be animate and powerful. In
their sacred songs the musical bow, at-
tached to a gourd, is played. At 15 years
the Cora reach the marriageable age.
Marriages are arranged by the parents of
the boy, who on five occasions, every
eighth day, go to ask for the bride they
have select^. A new-bom child was
named after an uncle or an aunt, and at
certain inten'als during childhood feasts
were prepared in its honor. It is said
that on the spot where the relative of a
Cora was killed in a fight a piece of
cloth was dipped in blood and kept as
a remembrance until his death was
avenged by killing the slayer or one of
the males of his family. Some of the
Cora still deposit the bodies of the dead
in caves. The population is estimated at
2,500. The settlements pertaining to the
various divisions of the Cora group are:
Apozolco, Cienega, Comatlan, Corapa,
(iruasamota, Guaynamota, Ixtacan, Jesos
Marfa, Mesa del Nayarit, Nuestra Seilora
del Riosario, Peyotan, San Diego, San
Francisco, San Juan Bautista, San Lucas,
Santa F(^% Santa Rosa, Santa Teresa, and
Tonati. See Lumholtz, Unknown Mexico,
1,1902. (f. w. H.)
Chora.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59, 1864. Ghota.—
Ibid. Hathi.— Lumholtz, Unknown Mex., i, 492,
1902 ( ' crocodilen ' : Huichol name) . Kavaerita.—
Orozco y Berra, op. oit. Nayari.— Lumnoltz, op.
cit. (own name). Navarita. — Orozco y Berra, op.
cit. Nayaritl.— Lumnoltz,
form of their own name).
holtz, op. cit. (alternative
Corapa. A pueblo pertaining to the
Cora division of the Fiman stock and a
visita of the mission of Nuestra Seflora del
Rosario. Probably situated on the Rio
San Pedro, Jalisco, Mexico.
8. Juan Corapa.— On)zoo y Berra, Geog., 280, 1864.
Corazones ( Span. : * hearts ' ) . A pueblo
of the Opata, determined by Hodge (Coro-
nado's March, 35, 1899) to have been situ-
ated at or near the site of the present
Ures, on the Rio Sonora, Sonora, Mexico.
It was so named by Cabeza de Vaca in
1536 because the inhabitants presented to
him more than 600 deer hearts. It was
visited also by Coronado and his army in
1540, called by his chroniclers San Hier-
onimo de los Corazones, and described
as being situatecl midway between Culia-
can and Cibola ( Zufii ) . The houses were
built of mats; Ihe natives raised corn,
l^eans, and melons, dressed in deerskins,
and used poisoned arrows, (f. w. n. )
Corazones.— Barcia, Hifltoriadores, i, 36, 1749. Cora-
zonet.— Cabeza da Vaca (1536), Smith trans., 172,
1871. San Hieronimo.— Castaneda (1596) in l<lth
Rep. B. A. E., 501, 1896. San Hieronimo de los Cor-
aionet.— Ibid., 484. Villa de lot Coraponet,— Ovie-
do, HiHtoria, in, 610, 1853.
Corbitant A Massachuset sachem.
He was a determined foe of the English,
and when Massasoit entered into an alli-
ance with them he strove to wrest the
chieftaincy from the latter and form a
league with the Narraganset to expel the
intruders. He caught and tried to kill
Squanto, whom he callect the tongue of
the English, and Hobomok, their Spy
and guide. With other hostile chiefs he
signed a treaty of _peace with the English
in 1621.— Drake, Bk. Inds., 93, 1880.
Corchang. A tribe or band formerly
occupying Riverhead and Southold town-
ships on Long id., N. Y., n. of Peconic
bay, and extending w. to Wading r.
Cutchogue, Mattituck, Ashamomuck, and
Aquebogue were probably sites of their
villages. The Yannococ Indians, n. of
BULL. 301
COREK CORNPLANTER
349
Peconic r., must have beeu identical with
tbeCorchaugtribeorapartofit. (j. m.)
Ohorohake.— Deed of 1648 in Thompson, Long Id.,
181, 1839. Oordukuf .— Wood quoted by Maeauley,
N. v., II, 252, 1829. Oorohonfs.— Thompson, Long
Id., I, 886, 1843 (mLnprint). Gorohouga.— Ibid., 238.
k.— Doc. of 1667 in N. Y. Doc. Col. HIhI.,
XIV, 601, 1883. TAiuiooook.~Ibid. Yeanneoock.—
Ibid.. 602.
Coree. A tribe, i)08Bibly Algoiujuiaii,
formerly occupying the peninsula s. of
Neuse r., in Carteret ana Craven cos.,
N. C. They had been greatly re<luce<l
in a war with another tril)e before 1696,
and were described by Archdale as having
been a bloo<ly and' barbarous |)eople.
Lawson refers to them as Coranine In-
dians, but in another place calls them
Connamox, and givt^ them two villages in
1701— Coranine and Raruta— with alK>ut
125 souls. They engaged in the Tusca-
rora war of 1711, and in 1715 the rem-
nants of the Coree and Machapunga were
assigned a tract on Mattamuskeet lake,
Hyde CO., N. C, where they live<l in one
village, probably until they became ex-
tinct. ' (j. M.)
Oarmnine.— Oldmixon (1708) in Carroll, Hist. Coll.
B.C., II, 459,1836. Gonnamox.— Lawson (17U9),N.C..
383, 1860. Ooramine.— Archdale (m. 1696) in
Humphreys, Ac<'Oiint, 282, 1730. Coranine.— Arch-
dale (1707) in Carroll, Hist. Coll. 8. C.,n,89,l«36
(used by Lawson a.s the name both of the tribe
and of one of its villages). Oorees. — Drake, Ind.
Chron., 175, 1836. Cores.— Will iam.Hon, N. C, i, 203,
1812.
Coreorgonel. The chief Tutelo town
in New York, settled in 1753; situated in
1779 on the w. wde of Cayuga lake inlet
and on the border of the great swamp, 8
m. from the s. end of Cayuga lake. When
destroyeil by Dearborn in 1779 it con-
tained 25 "elegantly built" houses. Sir
Wm. Johnson, in a conference with the
Six Nations in July, 1758, said to the
Cayuga: ** It is agreeable news that you
are about to strengthen your Castle by-
taking in the Tedarighroones [Tutelo],
and shall give a pass to those of that
Nation here among you that they and the
rest of them may come and join vour
Castle unmolested" (N. Y. Doc. 'Col.
Hist., VI, 811, 1855). Three of thest^
Tutelo were present at this meeting ** to
partake in the name of their Nation of
the intended present." (j. n. b. h.)
Corcargonell.— Norris in Jour. Mil. Exped. Maj.
Gen. John Sullivan in 1779. 237, 18S7. Coreor^-
nel.— Dearborn, ibid., 77. Be Ho Riu Kanadia.—
Grant, ibid., 118 (corruption of the Mohawk
Tehoterigh-kanndfi, ' Tutelo town ' ). Xayef htala-
gealat— Map of in9 cited t)y Hale, ibid. Tode-
▼ifh-rono.— <]ruy Johnson, map of 1771, cited by
Hale, ibid.
Cores. Small blocks of Hint, obsidian,
or other brittle stone from which flakes
have been struck in such a manner as to
leave them roughly cylindrical or conical
in shape and with fluted sides. There
has b^n some discussion as to whether
cores are really the wasters of flake mak-
ing or were intended for some practical
use. The sharp angle at the base in
many of them would make an excellent
edge for working a hard or tough sub-
stimce, such as horn or bone; but few
show the slightest marks of wear. Wher-
ever flint, obsidian, or other stone suitiihle
for making flakes was worked, the cores
also occur. On Flint Kidge
inOhiotheyaremoreabun-
<lant than at any other J^§
known locality, many thou-
sands of them'lying around
the flaking shop sites. Al- core or chert: ino.
though all are small, none "^^''- ^^■*^
l)eing capable of yielding flakes more than
8 in. in length, there seems to l>e no rea-
son for (juestioning the ccmclusion that
they are the mere refuse of flake making.
The use to which the flakes derived from
them were applieil is problematic^al, but
they would have served as knives or
scrai)ers or for the making of small arrow-
points. See SUme-irork. Consult Fowke
in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Holmes (1)
in Bull. 21, B. A. E., 1894, (2) in 15th
Rep. B. A. P:., 1897, (3) in Memoirs In-
ternat. Cong. Anthrop., 1894; Rau in
Smithson. Cont., xxii, 1876. (o. f.)
Com. See Maize.
Corn Band. A band at SpotUnl Tail
(later Rosebud) agency, S. Dak.; prob-
ablv a part of the Tet(m.— Cleveland in
Our Church Work, Dec. 4, 1875. Cf.
Wafjnieznffuha.
Qomplsiiiter (KdiiofiUra'^kof'j *by what
one plants' — Hewitt; variously written
(Targanwaligah, Koeentwahka, etc. ). A
Seneca chief, known also as John O'Bail,
supposed to have been l)orn between 1732
and 1740 at Conewaugus, on (.tenesee r.,
N. Y. Drake (Biog. and Hist. Ind., 7th
^k1., Ill, 1837) says he was a warrior at
Braddoi^k's defeat in 1755, which is evi-
dently a mistake, though he may have
l)een ])resent as a boy of 12 or 15 years.
His father was a white trader named' John
()'Bail,or(VBeel,saidbysometohavelwen
an Englishman, although Harris ( Buffalo
Hist. Soc. Pub., VI, 416, 1903) says he
was a Dutchman, nauKMl Al)eel, and Rut-
tenber (Tribes Hudson R., 317, 1872) also
says he was a Dutch trader. His mother
was a full-blood Sene<!a. All that is
known of Cornplanter's early days is
contained in a letter to the governor
of Pennsvlvania, in which he says he
played with In<lian lx)V8 who remarke<l
the difference l)etween the color of his
skin and theirs; his mother informed
him that his father residtni at Albany.
He visited his father, who, it appears,
treated him kindly but gave him nothing
to carry back; ** nor did he tell me,'* he
adds, '* that the United States were alx)ut
to rebel against the Government of Eng-
land." He states that he was married
before this visit. He was one of the p&r-
350
CORNSTALK — CORRAL
[b. a. n.
ties to the treaty of Ft Stanwix in 1784,
when a large cession of land was made
by the Indians; he also took part in the
treaty of Ft Harmar in 1789, in which an
extensive territory was conveyed to the
United States (although his name is not
among the signers); and he was a signer
of the treaties of Sept. 15, 1797, and July
30, 1802. These acts rendered him so
uiiiwpular with his triln^ that for a time
his life was in danger. In 1790 he, to-
gether with Halftown, visited Philadel-
phia to lay l)efore Gen. Washington the
grievances complained of by their peo-
ple. In 181B he reside<l just within
the limits of Pennsylvania <m his grant
7 m. l)elow the junction of the Conne-
wango with the Alleghenv, on the banks
of the latter. He then owned 1,:^00
CORNPLANTER. (mcKENNEY AND Hall)
acres, of which 640 formed a tract granted
to him by Pennsylvania, Mar. 16, 1796,
'*for his many valuable services to the
whites." It is said that in his old age he
declared that the * '(treat Spirit*' told him
not to have anything more to do with the
whites, nor even to preserve any memen-
tos or relics they had given him. Im-
presse<l with this idea, he burneti the l)elt
and broke the elegant sword that had
l)een given him. A favorite son (Henrv
Ol^eal), who had l)een carefully educated,
l)ecame a drunkard, thus adding to the
troubles of Cornplanter's last years. He
received from the United States, for a
time, a pension or grant of $250 per year.
He was i>erhaps more than 90 years of age
at the time of his death, Feb. 18, 1836.
A monument erected to his memory on
his reservation by the state of Pennsyl-
vania in 1866 bears the inscription '^aged
about 100 years.'* (c. t.)
Cornstalk. A celebrated Shawnee chief
(bom about 1720, died in 1777) who held
authority over those of the tribe then set-
tled on the Scioto, in Ohio. He was
brought most prominently into notice by
his leadership of the Indians in the bat-
tle of Point Pleasant, at the month of
Great Kanawha r., W. Va., Oct. 10, 1774.
Although defeated in a battle lasting
throughout the day, his prowess and gen-
eralship on this occasion — where his force,
mostly Shawnee, numbering probably
1,0(X), was opposed to 1,100 Virginia vol-
unteers— won the praise of the whites.
After this battle he entere<i into a treaty
of peace with Lord Dunmore in Nov.,
1774, at Chillicothe, Ohio, although stren-
uouslv opposed by a part of his tribe, and
faithfully kept it until 1777. In the lat-
ter year the Shawnee, being incited to re-
new hostilities, he went to Point Pleasant
and notified the settlers that he might be
forced into the war. The settlers detained
him and his son as hostages, and they
were soon after murdered by some in-
furiated soldiers in retaliation for the
killing of a white settler by some roving
Indians, thus arousing the vindictive
spirit of the Shawnee, which was not
broken until 1794. Cornstalk was not
only a brave and energetic warrior, but
a skilful ^neral and an orator of consid-
erable ability. A monument was erected
to his memory in the court-house yard at
Point Pleasant in 1896.
Cornstalk's Town. A Shawnee village
on Scippo (T., opposite Squaw Town,
Pickawav co., Ohio, nearlv due s. from
Circleville, in 1774.— Howe, Hist. Coll.
Ohio, 402, 1896.
Com Village. A former Natchez si^ttle-
ment.
Corn Village.— Gayarre, La., i, 411, 1861. Flour
Village.— Dumont in French, Hist. Coll. L&., v,
48, 1853.
Corodegnaohi. A former Opata pueblo
on the headwaters of the Rio Sonora, n.
E. Sonora, Mexico, about 25 m. below the
lx)undary of Arizona. It was the seat of
the Spanish mission of Santa Rosa,
founded in 1653, and of the presidio of
Fronteras, established in 1690. In 1689
the mission was abandoned on account of
the hostilities of the Jocome, Suma,
Jano, and Apache; and owing to Apache
depredations in more recent years the
settlement was deserted by its inhabitants
on several occasions, once as late as about
1847. (f. w. H.)
Oorodefuaohi— Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 354,
1889. Santa Kota Corodegoatsi.— Doc. of 18th cent,
quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv,
529, 1892. Santa Bosa de Coradeguatzi.— Orozco y
Berra, Geog., 343, 1834.
Corral. A rancheria of gentile Diegue-
ilos near San Diego, s. Cal., in 1776.
BULL. 30]
OORUANO COSTE
351
El Corral. —Ortega (1775) quoted by Bancroft,
HiBt. Cal., I, 251. 1884.
Cornano. One of 4 unidentified tribes,
probably Shoshonean, formerly living e.
of Tejon pass, s. Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, May 8, 1863.
Cosaqne ( probably from ko"shak, ' reed ' ) .
An unidentified town in n. e. Alabama, in
the same region as Cossa (Kusa), visited
by Juan Pardo in 1565. — Vandera ( 1567)
in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., i, 18, 1857.
Gosattuck. A Pequot village in 1667,
probably near Stonmgton, New London
CO., Conn.
Ganaattuok.— Noyes (1667) in MasH. Hist. See. Coll.,
Sd 8., X, 67-68, 1849. Cosattuok.— Denison (1666),
ibid.. 64.
Coshocton (Heckewelder derives a sim-
ilar name, Coshecton, from gich'uchton
(German form), ^finished,* * completed').
Formerly the chief town of the Turtle
tril>e of the Dela wares, on the site of Co-
shocton, Coshocton CO., Ohio. Destroyed
by the whites in 1781. Cf. Goshgoshunk.
Gadiictan.— Peters (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
4th 8., IX, 300, 1871. Ooochocking.— Buttertield,
Washington-Irvine Cor., 9, 1882. Cooshaoking.—
Ibid. Gothookton.— Rupp, We.<«t Penn.. 201, 1846.
Ooshooton.— Heckewelder (1781) quottMi by But-
terfleld. op. cit., 51. Ooiohaohguenk.— Drake, Bk.
Inds., bk. 6, 69, 1W8. Ooschaohing.— Writer of
1784 in Harris, Tour, 214, 1805. GoMhachking.—
Heckewelder in Trans. Am. Philoa. Soc, iv, 391,
1834. OoMhoohking.— Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 5, 61,
1848. Ooshachking.— He<^kewel<ler, op. cit. Go-
ahoohkiiig.— Ibid. Euahaoton.— Pentecost (1782)
in Butterfleld, op. cit., 242. Kushocton.— Ibid., 241.
Cosoy. A Diegueflo rancheria at which
the mission of San Diego (i\. v.) was es-
tablished in 1769; situated at the pres-
ent Old Town, on San Diego bay, s. Cal.
CoBsarl. Marked by Jefferys ( French
Dom. Am., i, map, \M, 1761) as a native
town on the extreme head of Yadkin r.,
in the mountains of n. w. North Carolina.
Unidentified.
CostanoaiL Family. A linguistic family
on the coast of central California. In 1877
Powell (Cont.N. A. Ethnol., in, 535) es-
tablishedafamilywhichhecalledMutsun,
extending from San Francisco to Soledad
and from the sea inland to the Sierras,
and including an area in the Marin co.
penin., n. of San Francisco bay, and gave
vocabularies from various parts of this
territory. In 1891 (7th Rep. B. A. E.,
70, 92, map) Powell divided this area be-
tween two families, Moquehimnan and
Costanoan. The Moquelumnan family
occupied the portion of the old Mutsun
territory e. of San Joaquin r. and n. of
San Francisco bay.
The territory of the Costanoan family
extended from the Pacific ocean to San
Joaquin r., and from the Golden Gate
and Suisun bay on the n. to Pt Sur on the
coast and a point a short distance s. of
Soledad in the Salinas valley on the s.
Farther inland the s. boundary is uncer-
tain, though it was probably near Bij;
Panoche cr. The Costanoan Indians lived
mainly on vegetal products, especially
acorns and seeds, though they also ootained
fish and mussels, and captured deer and
smaller game. Their clothing was si'ant,
the men going naked. Their houses were
tule or grass huts, their boats balsas or rafts
of tule.«. They made basket.^, but no pot-
tery, and appear to have been as j)nmi-
tive as most of the tribes of California.
They burned the <lead. The Rumsen of
Monterey looked upon the eagle, the
humming l)ird, and the coyote as the
original inhabitants of the world, and
they venerated the redwood. Their
languages were simple and harmonious.
Seven missions — San Carlos, Soledad, San
Juan Bautista, Santa Cruz, Santa Clara,
San Jos('', and Dolores (San Francisco) —
were established in Costanoan territory
by the Franciscans suliseiiuent to 1770,
and continued until their confiscation by
the Mexican government in 1884, when
the Indians were scattered. The surviv- (
ing individuals of Costanoan blood may
numlKjr to-day 25 or 80, most of them \
"Mexican" in life and manners rather '
than Indian.
True tribes did not exist in Costanoan
territory, the groups mentioned l)elow
being small and ])robably little more
than village communities, without politi-
cal connection or even a name other than
that of the locality they inhabite<l.
The following divisions or settlements
have been recognized: Ah waste, Altah-
mo, Ansaime, Aulintac, Chalone, Casta-
nos, Juichun, Kalindaruk, Karkin, Mut-
sun, Olhon, Romonan, Rumsen, Saklan,
Thamien, Tulomo, and Wacharon (?).
=3 Oostano.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond.,
82, 1856 (includes the Ahwastes, Olhones or Co«-
tanos, Ronionans. Tulomos, Altatmos); Latham,
Opuscula, 34«, 1860. <Mut8un.— Gatschet in Mag.
Am. Hist., 157, 1877 (includes Ahwastes, Olhones,
Altahmos, Romonans. Tulomos); Powell in C<mt.
N. A. Ethnol., ni, 535. 1877 (includes under this
family vocabs. of Costano, MutsOn, Santa Clara,
Santa Cruz). Costanoan. — Powell in 7th Rep.
B, A. E., 70, map, 1891.
Costanos ( Span. : ' coastmen * ) . Certain
tribes or groups belonging to the Costa-
noan family on San Francisco penin.,
connected with Dolores mission, Cal.
The term has been applied to the 01-
hone, Ahwaste, Altahmo, Romonan, and
Tulomo collectively; also to the Olhone
and Ahwaijte taken together; and to the
Olhone alone. The term was chosen by
Powell for the name of the Costanoan
familv, q.v. (a. l. k.)
Coast Indians.— Ind. Af!. Rep., 124, 1850. Coast-
men. — Latham in Proc. Philol. Soc. Lond., vi,
79, 1854. Costanoes.— Ind. Aflf. Rep., op. cit.
Costanos.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 506, 1852.
Costeno. — Simeon, Diet. Nahuatl, xviii, 1885.
GoBte. A province and town, apparently
in Alabama, visited by De Soto in 1540.
Biedma says the towns were built on
islands in the river.
Aoosta.— Shipn, De Soto and Florida, 373, 1881.
Acoste.— Garcilasso de la Vega, La Florida, 141,
352
0O8UMNI COTTON
[B.i
1723. OosU.— French, Hist. Ck)Il. La., n. s.. ii. 247,
1875. Gotte.— Gentleman of Elvas (1667), ibid., ii,
149, 1850. Gottehe.— Biedma (1544). ibid., 102.
CoBimiiii. A tribe, probably Moquel-
umnan, formerly residing on or near Co-
sumnes r. , San Joaquin co. , Cal. Accord-
ing to Rice (quoted by Mooney in Am.
Anthrop., in, 259, 1890) these Indians
went almost naked; their houses were
of bark, sometimes thatched with grass
and covered with earth: the bark was
loo^'ened from the trees by repeated blows
with stcme hatchets, the latter having
the head fastened to the handle with
deer sinew. Their ordinary weapons
were bows and stone-tipped arrows. The
women made finely woven conical bas-
kets of gra«8, the smaller ones of which
held water. Their anmsements were
chiefly dancing and football; the dances,
however, were in some degree ceremo-
nial. Their principal deity was the sun,
and the women had a ceremony which
resembled the sun dance of the tribes of
the upper Missouri. Their dead were
buried in graves in the earth. The tribe
is now practically extinct.
Gosemenes.— Beerhev, Narr., I, 366, 1831. Gotmn-
nes.— Hale in U. S.'Expl. Exped., vi, 631, 1846.
Gosumnies. — Taylor in ('al. Farmer, June 8, 1860.
Kosunmcs.— Duflot de Mofra.s, Expl., n, 376, 1844.
Cotan. An Algoncmian village in 1585
about Ransom ville, Beaufort co., N. C.
Gotam.— DuU'h map (1621) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
I, 18r)6. Gotan.— Map in Smith (1629), Virgrinia, i,
repr. 1819.
Cotechney. A town and palisade of the
Tuscarora in North Carolina, which be-
came noted in their war of 1711-18;
situated, according to Hawks, on the site
of Ft Barnwell, but according to Graffen-
ried the town lay aljout 3 in. from the
palisade, evidently on the opposite side
of the Neuse, about the mouth of Con-
tentnea cr., the name of which is prob-
al)ly a form of Cotechney. It was a large
town, the residence of Hancock, one of
the principal Tuscarora chiefs. Here
Lawson and Graffenried were prisoners in
1711, and it was the scene of the execu-
tion of the former. On the outbreak of
the Tuscarora war the inhabitants aban-
doned the town and intrenched them-
selves in the palisade, which was attacked
by Barnwell, Jan. 28, 1712, when 400 of
its defenders were killed or taken. In-
stead of completing his work, Barnwell,
to save the lives of white prisoners held
in the fort, made a worthless treaty with
the remainder, who at once joined the
other hostiles. (j. n. b. h.)
Gfttchne.— Pollock (1717) in N. C. Rec., n, 288,
1886. Gatechna. —Graffenried (1711), ibid., I, 923,
1886. Gfttechne.— Pollock (1712). ibid., 882. Oat-
echnce.— Pollock (1713), ibid., ii, 39. Gateohneyi.—
Pollock (1713), ibid., 88. Gontah-nah.— Lawson
(1710), Hist. N. C, 883, 1860. Goteohing. —Pollock
(1713) in N. C. Rec. n, 24, 1886. Gotechneea.—
Pollock (1713). ibid.. 62. Goteohneyi.— Hawks, N.
C, II, 547, 1858. Hanoook Fort.— Hyde (1712) in
N. C. Rec, I. 900, 1886. Henoookt-Towne.— Graf-
fenried (1711), ibid., 927.
Coteijen. A Costanoan village formerly
near San Francisco bay, Cal. — Mission
book (1784) quoted by Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Cotooanahnt. Given as one of the Cher-
okee ** valley towns" in a document of
1755 (Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 142,
1887). Not identified.
Cotohantnstexmnggee. A former Lower
Creek town on the right bank of Upatoie
cr., in Muscogee co., Ga.— Rovce in 18th
Rep. B. A. E., pi. cxxii, 1900."
Cotonam. A tribe affiliated with the
Carrizos of the Coahuiltecan family and
living in their vicinity, though their dia-
lect differs largely from the Comecrudo
language. The last of this tribe were at
La Noria rancheria, in s. Hidalgo co.,
Tex., in 1886, and one man at Las Prietas
was slightly acquainted with the native
dialect. They call an Indian ;t«^w«, and
are the Xaimame or Haname of the Texan
tribes farther n. The Tonkawa say that
the Cotonam were not cannibals and
that they wore sandals instead of moc-
casins, (a. s. g.)
GotoplanemiB. Probably a division of
the Moquelumnan family, living on a
reserve between Stanislaus and Tuo-
lumne rs., Cal., in 1851; but it is possible
that they may have l)een a band of the
Cholovone division of the Mariposan
family.
Co-ta-plane-mis. — Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc.
61 , 32d Cong., 1st sess., 20, 1852. Co-to-plane-mia.—
Ibid.
Cotsjewaminck. A former village on
Long Island, N. Y., probably near the
w. end.— Doc. of 1645 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., XIV, 60, 1883.
Cotton. Judging from the lack of men-
tion of it by early writers on the s. por-
tion of the United States, cotton was not
cultivated by the tribes of this 8e(!tion,
notwithstanding the favorable soil and
climate. The cotton blankets seen by
De Soto's troops on the lower Mississippi
were said to have been brought from the
W., possibly from the far-off Pueblo
country of New Mexico an<l Arizona.
Although the latter section seems hfss
favorable to its cultivation, cotton has
been raised to a considerable extent by
the Pueblos, especially the Hopi, from
time immemorial, and cloth, cord, thread,
and seed are commonly found in ancient
deposits in caves, cliff-dwellings, and
ruined pueblos throughout that region.
The Hopi are now the only cultivators
and weavers of cotton, their products,
consisting chiefly of ceremonial robes,
kilts, and scarfs, finding their way
through trade to many other tribes who,
like the Hopi, employ them in their re-
ligious performances. In the time of
Coronado (1540-42) and of Espejo (1583)
cotton was raised also by the people of
buLh. :{o]
COUECHITOU COUNTING
353
Aconia and the Rio (Traiide villages in
New Mexico, and the Pima of s. Arizona
also raised the plant until alnrnt 1850;
but the introduction of cheap fabrics by
traders has practically brought the in-
dustry to an end everywhere among the
Indians, the Hopi alone adhering to the
old custom of cultivating and weaving it,
and that chiefly for ceremonial gannents.
In ancient Hopi and Zuni mortuary rites
raw cotton was placed over the face of the
dead, and cotton see<l was often deposited
with food vessels and other accompani-
ments in the grave. Consult Bancielier
in Arch. Inst. Pa])ers, iii, iv, 1890-92;
Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. K., 1898;
Holmesin LSth Rep. B. A. K. , 1S9<>; I lough
in Rep. Nat. Mus., 1901; Winship in 14th
Rep. B. A. K.,1896. (w. h.)
Coneohiton. A former imi)ortant Choc-
taw town destroyed in the ("hoctaw civil
war of 1764. Its location is in doubt,
but it was traditionally place<l in the
neigh borhoo<l of Mos<*ow, Kemper co.,
Miss. (Halbert in Miss. Hist. 8oc. Publ.,
VI, 424, 1902). This name appears on
Danville's map, at. 1782, in which it
seems to l)e translated ** village of the
great chief.'* In later times it was known
by the same name as Conchachitou
(q. V. ), usually in the contracted fonn
Coneeto, or Cooncheto, and to distin-
guisli it it was called F.ast Congeto.
Halbert assumes that the original name
was Conchachitou and interprets it as
'big retHi-brake,' like the other; but if
sucli wert^ indeed the ca.«e it in surprising
that Danville, who locates and trans-
lates Conchachitou correctly, should have
erred regarding this. ( j. r. s. )
Oonaohitow.— LHttri\ map of V. S., 17H1. Oouet-
ehiou.— Gilssefold, map of V. S., 1784. Coue-tohi-
tou.— Danville map (1732) in Hamilton, Colonial
Mobile, 158, 1897. Cowachitow. — I*hilippeau.\,
map, 1781. OuMrohitou. — Bartram. Voy.. i. map,
1799. East OoagMta.— Romans, Florida, 310, 1775.
East Oongeeto.— West Fla. map, ca. 1775. East
CkMmfMto. — Romans, op. eit., 73.
Coima. Mentioned by Onate (Doc.
In^., XVI, 114, 1S71 ) as a pueblo of New
Mexico in 1598. Doubtless situated in
the Salinas, in the vicinity of Al)o, e. of
the Rio Grande, and in all i)robability a
Tigua or Piros village.
Coimting. Two systems of counting
were formerly in use among the Indians
of North America, the decimal and the vi-
^imal. The latter, which was use<l
in Mexico and Central America, was also
in general use n. of Columbia r., on the
Pacific slope, while between that area and
the l)orderof Mexico it was em])loved by
only a few tril)es, as the Pomo, Tuolumne,
Kofikau, Nishinam, and Achomawi. On
the Atlantic side the decimal system was
used by all except the P^skimo tribes.
Both systems, based apparently on the
finger and hand count, were as a rule
fundamentally (juinary. There are some
Bull. 30—05 28
indications, however, of a more primitive
count, with minor tril>al differences. In
Siouan and Algonquian the word for 2
ia generally related to that for arms or
hands, anS in Athapascan dialects to
the term f( >r feet. In a few languages, the
Siksika, Catawba, Gabrieleno, and some
others, 8 is expressed by joining the
words for 2 and 1 . In many others the
name for 4 signifies 2 and 2, or 2 times 2,
as in most of the Shoshonean dialects,
and in Catawba, Haida, Tlingit, and ap-
parently Kiowa; the Pawnee formerly
applied a name signifying *all the fin-
gers,' or *the fingers ()f the hand,' thus
excluding the thumb. Five has usually
a distinct name, which in most cases
refers to one hand or fist. The numbers
from 6 to 9 are generally based on 5, thus,
6=5 r 1, 7=5- 2, etc.; or the names refer
to the fingers of the second hand as used
in counting; thus, among the l^kimo of
Pt Barrow 6 is *to the other hand 1',
7 'to the other hand 2', and in many
dialects 6= * 1 an the other hand.' There
are exceptions to this rule, however; for
example, 6 is 8 and 3 in Haida and some
other dialects; in Bellacoola the name
signifies 'second 1', and in Montagnais
(Algonquian), *8 on each side.' Al-
though 7 is usually *the second finger
on the second hand', in some cases it is
ba*<e<l on 4, as amcmg the Montagnais,
who say '4 and 8.' Plight is generally
expressed bv 'the third finger on the
second hand'; but the Montagnais say
' 4 on each si<le ' , and the I laida ' 4 and 4 ' ;
in Karankawait signifies '2 fathers', and
in the Kwakiutl and some other languages
it is '2 from 10.' In a numl)er of lan-
guages the name for 9 signifies 1 from 10,
as with the Kwakiutl, the Eskimo of n. w.
Alaska, the Pawnee, and the Ileiltsuk.
The numl)ers from 11 to 19 are usually
formed in both systems by adding 1, 2,
8, 4, etc., to 10; but in the Vigesimal the
(juinary count is carried out, Ifi l)eing
15 - 1, 17=1. => * 2, etc., or, in some dialects,
17=10 : 5 : 2. Manyof the Indians could
count to 1,000, some by a regular system,
while in a numl)er of languages, as Tlingit,
C/herokee, etc., its signification is 'great
UK).' In Ottawa the meaning was 'one
l)ody'; in Abnaki, 'one l)0x'; in Iroquois
dialects, 'ten hand-claps,' that is, ten
hundreds; in Kiowa, 'the whole band
hundre<l.' Baraga and Cuoq give terms
for figures up to a million or more, but it
is doubtful if such were actually in use
before contact with P^uropeans.
The connnon Indian method of count-
ing on the hands, as perhaps is usual with
most savage or uncivilized peoples, was
to "tell off" the fingers of the left hand,
beginning with the little finger, the
thumb iKMng the fifth or 5; while in
counting the right hand the onler was
354
COUI
-cow GB££E
[b. a. b.
usually reversed, the thumb being coun-
ted 6, the forefin|5er 7, and so on to the
little finger, which would be 10. The
movement was therefore sinistral. Al-
though the order in counting the first
5 on the left hand was in most cases as
given above, the order of counting the
second 5 was subject to greater variation.
It was a common habit to bend the fin-
gers inward as counted, but there were
several western trilx^s whose custom was
to bc«:in with the clenched hand, opening
the fingers as the count proceecied, as
among the Zuni. Among the tribes using
the vigesimal system, the count of the
second 10 was practicallv or theoretically
performed on the feet, the 20 making the
"complete man,'* and often, as among
the Eskimo and Tlingit, receiving names
having reference to the feet. The Zuiii,
however, counted the second 10 back on
the knuckles.
Indians often made use of numeral
classifiers in counting, that is, the num-
ber name was modified according to the
articles counted; thus, in the Takulli dia-
lect of Athapascan tha means 3 thin^;
thiwCj 3 persons; thaty 3 times; thatsen, in
3 places; thauhj in 3 ways; tha'dtohy all 3
things, etc. Such classifiers are found in
many diale(;ts, and in some are quite
numerous.
Certain numl)ers have beiai held as
sacred by most tribes; thus 4, i)robably
owing t(> the frequent reference to the
cardinal points in ceremonies and reli-
gious acts, has l)ecome sacred or cere-
monial. Among the Creeks, Cherokee,
Zuili, and most of the Plains tribes, 7 is
also considered a sacrwl numl)er. For
the Zuni, Cushing says it refers to the 4
cardinal jwints plus the zenith, nadir,
and center or ego. Some of the Pacific
coast Indians regard 5 as their sacred
nunil)er. Although 13 appears in most of
the calendar and ceremonial counts of the
cultured nations of Mexico and Central
America, its use as a sacred or ceremonial
number among the Indians n. of Mexico
was rare, the Pawnee, Hopi, and Zufii
being notable exceptions.
Consult Brinton, Origin of Sacred Num-
bers, Am. Anthrop., 1894; Conant, Num-
ber Concept, 1896; Cushing, Manual Con-
cepts, Am. Anthrop., 1892; Hayden, Eth-
nc^. and Philol. Mo. Val., 1862; McGee,
Primitive Numl)ers, 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
1900; Thomas, Numeral Systems of Mex-
ico and Central America, if)id. ; Trumbull,
Numerals in American Indian Languages,
Trans. Am. Philol. Ass'n, 1874; Wilson,
Indian Numerals, Canad. Ind., i, 272,
1891. (c. T.)
Conp ('blow,* 'stroke'). The French-
Canadian term adopted to designate
the formal token or signal of victory in
battle, as used among the Plains tribes.
Coups are usually ''counted/' as it was
termed — that is, credit of victory was
taken, for three brave deeds, viz, killing an
enem^, scalping an enemy, or being Brst
to stnke an enemy either alive or dead.
Each one of these entitled a man to rank
as a warrior and to recount the exploit in
public; but to be first to touch the enemv
was regarded as the bravest deed of all,
as it implied close approach during battle.
Among the Cheyenne it was even a point
of bravado for a single warrior to rush in
among the enemy and strike one with
quirt or gun before attempting to fire,
thus doubly risking his own life. Three
different coups might thus be counted by
as many different persons upon the body
of the same enemy, and in a few tribes 4
were allowed. The stealing of a liorse
from a hostile camp also earned the right
to count coup. The stroke (coup) might
be made with whatever was most conven-
ient, even with the naked hand, the
simple touch scoring the victory. In
ceremonial parades and functions an orna-
mented quirt or rod was sometimes car-
ried and used as a coup stick. The war-
rior who could strike a tipi of the enemy
in a charge upon a home camp thus
counte<l coup upon it and was entitled
to reproduce its particular design upon
the next new tipi which he made for his
own use and to perpetuate the pattern in
his family. In this way he was said to
"capture** the tipi. Warriors who had
made coups of distinguished bravery, such
as striking an enemy within his own tipi
or l)ehin(ra breastwork, were selected to
preside over the dedication of a new tipi.
The noted Sioux chief Red Cloud stated
in 1891 that he had counted coup 80
times. See War and }yar discipline.
(J.M.)
Coups de Filches. An unidentified tribe
mentioned as on the Texas l)order in con-
nection with Tawakoni, Anadarko, Hai-
nai, Tonkawa, etc., early in the 19th
century. — Robin, Voy. Louisiana, iii, 5,
1807.
Cons. See Kouse.
Couth. A Karok rani^heriaon Klamath
r., Cal., in 1866.— Taylor in Cal. Fanner,
Mar. 23, 1860.
Conthaongonla ( ' lake people * ) . One of
the 7 villages or tribes forming the Taensa
con federally in 1699. — Iberville in Margry,
D^c, IV, 179, 1880.
Cowate. A ^411age of Praying Indians,
in 1677, at the falls of Charles r., Middle-
sex CO., Mass. — Gookin (1677) in Drake,
Bk. inds., bk. 2, 115, 1848.
Cow Creek. A Seminole settlement of
12 inhabitants in 1880, on a stream run^
ning southward, at a point about 15 m.'
N. E. of the entrance of Kissimmee r. into
L. Okeechobee, Brevard co., Fla. — Mao-
Cauley in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 478, 1887.
BULL. 30]
CO WEE COWLITZ
855
Cowee (from Kavri^f abbreviated form
of KawVyiy which is possibly a contrac-
tion of Ani^'kavn/yX, * place of the Deer
clan'). A former important Cherokee
settlement about the mouth of Cowee cr.
of Little Tennessee r., about 10 m. below
Franklin, Macon co., N. C. — Mooney in
19th Rep. B. A. E., 525, 1900.
Oowe.— Bartram, Travels, 371, 1792.
Coweeshee. Given as a Cherokee town
in the Keowee district, n. w. S. C. ; exact
locality uncertain. — Doc. of 1755 quoted
by Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 143, 1887.
Coweset ('place of small pine trees.'—
Trumbull). A small tribe or band for-
merly livinjf in n. Rhode Island, w. of
Blackstone r. In 1637 they were subject
to the Narraganset, but had thrown off
the connection by 1660. (j. m. )
OawMitt— Gookin (1674) in Mass. Hlat. See. Coll.,
let 8., I, 147. 1806. CorvoMte.— Williams (1682),
ibid., 2d s., vii, 76. 1818 (misprint). Cowesete.—
Williams (1660) in R. I. Col. Rec. i, 460, 1856.
CowweMts.— Williams and Olney (1660), ibid., i,
»M1. Cowweseuok.— Williams (1643) in Mas.s.
Hist. 8oc. Coll., Ist s., Ill, 205. 1794 (name used by
the tribe). Oowweait.— Williams (1675), ibid., 4th
8., VI, 300, 1863.
Cowichan. A group of Salish tribes
speaking a single dialect and occupying
the 8. E. coast of Vancouver id. between
Nonoos bay and Sanitch inlet, and the
COWICHAN MAN. (am. MU8. NAT. HIST.)
valley of lower Fraser r. nearly to Spuz-
zum, Brit. Col. The various bands and
tribes belonging to this group asgregated
2,991 in 1902. The following list of Co-
wichui tribes is based on information
obtained from Boas: On Vancouver id. —
Clemclemalats, Comiakin, Hellelt, Ken-
ipsim, Kilpanlus, Koksilah, Kulleet^, Lil-
malche, Malakut, Nanaimo, Penelakut,
Quamichan, Sicc^meen, Snonowas. So-
menos, Tateke, and Yekolaos. On lower
Fraser r.^Dhehalis, Chilli wack, Coquit-
lam, Ewawoos, Katsey, Kelatl, Kwantlen,
Mat8<iui, Musqueam, Nicomen» Ohamil,
Pilalt, Popkum, Scowlitz, Siyita, Sewa-
then, Snonkweametl, Skawawalooks,
Squawtits, Sumass, Tait, Tsakuam, and
Tsenes. (j. r. s.)
C»w-»-chim. -Jones (1863) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,
34th Cong., 5, 1857. Oa-witohans.— Anderson
a noted by Gibbs in Hist. Maj?., vii, 74, 1863.
owegans.— Fitzhue in Ind. A£f. Rep. 1857, 829,
1858. Cowe-wa-ohin.— Starling, ibid.. 170. 1852.
Cowiohin. —Douglas in Jour. Roy. Gcog. Soo.,
246, 18M. Cowitohent.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 247,
1862. Oowitohint.— Kane, Wand, in N. Am.. 220,
1859. HalkomeaBm Hill-Tout in Ethnol. Surv.
Can., 54, 1902 (name of Fraser R. Cowichan
for thenu^elves). Eue-la-muh. — Mackay quoted
by Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1891,
sec. II, 7 ('the pt^ople*: own name). Hum-a-luh. —
Ibid. (* the people': name by which the Cowichair
of Yale anil Hope call themselves). Kauitohin.—
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, July 19. 1862. K-au'itoin.—
Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.. 10, 1889.
Kawatikint.— Shea, Cath. Mbw., 475, 1855. Kawi-
chen.— Scouler (1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond.,
I, 234, 1848. Kawitohen.— Scouler in Jour. Geog.
Soc. Lond., I, 224, 1841. Kawit»hin.— Hale in U.
S. Ex pi. Exped., vi, 221, 1846. Kawittkina.— Smet,
Oregon Miss., 59, \M1. Kowailchew.— Gibbs in
Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 433, 1855. Kow-ait-chen.—
Stevens in Intl. Aff. Rep., 455, 1854. Kowitoh-
ans.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 578, 1878.
Kowittin.— Gibks in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 181,
1877. Qaiiitcin.— Boas. MS.. B. A. E., 1887. Qui-
mitchan.— Can. Ind. Af!. Rep., Ix, 1877.
Cowichan Lake. A local name for
Nootka Indians who in summer live on a
reservation at the n. end of Cowichan
lake, H. Vancouver id. There were only
2there in 1904.— Can. Ind. Aff., 1902,1904.
Cowish. See Konse.
Cowlita. A Salish tribe formerly on the
river of the same name in s. w. W ashing-
ton. Once numerous and powerful, they
were said by Gibbs in 1858 to be insigmifi-
t!ant, numl)ering with the Upper Che-
halis, with whom they were mmgled, not
more than 165. About 1887 there were
127 on Puyallup res.. Wash. They are
no longer known bv this name, being
evidently officially classed as Chehalis.
(j. R. 8.)
Cawalitz.— Lee and Frost. Oregon, 99, 1844. Co-
neliskes.— Domeneoh, Deserts of N. A., 401, 1860.
Cowelits.— Hale in U.S. Expl. Exped., vi. 211. 1846.
CoweUtz.-Famham, Travels, 112, 1H43. Cow-e-
na-ohino.— Starling in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 171, 1852.
CowUtch.— v^ouler (1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc.
Lond., I, 235. 1848. Cowlita.— Meek in H. R. Ex.
Doc. 76, 30th Cong., Ist sess., 10, 1848. Cowlit-
tick.— Drake, Book of Inds., vii, 1M8. OowUtsk.—
Proe. Bo«ton Soc. Nat. Hist., 84. 1851-54. Cow-
litz.—Smet, Letters, 230, 1*18. Kaoulis.— Duflot
de Mofras, Oregon, ii. 96, 1844. Kau'-lIU.— Mc-
Caw, Puyallup MS, vocab., B. A. E., 1885 (l»uyallup
name). Kawelitsk.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped.,
VI, 211, 1»46. Kowalitska.— Townsend. Narr., 175,
1839. KoweliU —Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc.
Lond., 71. 1856. Xowelitak.— Gallatin in Trans.
Am. Ethnol. Soc., n, 119, 1848. Kowlits.— Gibbs in
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, IW, 1877. Nu-M-lupah.—
Ibid., 172 (name given by Indians not on sound
to Upper Cowlitz and Upper Chehalis; refers to
rapids).
356
CO WNANTICO COY YO
[b. a. b.
Cownantieo. A former division of the
Skoton, living, according to the treaty of
Nov. 18, 1854, on Rogue r., Greg.
Cow-nan-ti-oo.— U. S. Ind. Treaties, 23, 1873.
Cowpens. Given in a distribution roll
of Cherokee annuities paid in 1799 as a
Cherokee town. It may have been situ-
ated near the note<l place of that name
in Spartanburg co., S. C. — Royce in 5th
Rep. B. A. E., 144, 1887.
Cowsampsit. Mentioned in 1664 &s if a
village subject to the chief of the Wam-
panoag, in Rhode Island. — Deed of 1664
m Drake, Bk. Ind^., bk. 8, 14, 1848.
Cow Towns. Mentioned with 9 other
Upj>er Creek towns on Tallapoosa r.,
Ala. — Finnelson in Am. State Papers,
Ind. Aff., I, 289, 18:^2.
Coya. A former village on or near mid-
dle 8t Johns r., Ha.
Ohoya.— I>e Bry. Brev. Nar., ii, map, 1591. Coya.—
Laudonnit^re (1564) in French, Hist. Coll. La.,
287, 1869.
Coyabegnz. A village or tril)e, now ex-
tinct, mentioned by Joutel as being n. or
X. w. of Maligne (Colorado) r., Tex., in
1687. This region was controlled chiefly
by Caddoan tribes. The name seems to
have been given Joutel by Ebahamo In-
dians, who were closely affiliated with
the Karankawa. See Gatschet, Karanka-
wa Indians, .35, 1891; Charlevoix, New-
France, IV, 78, 1870.
Cftfabegux.— Joutel (1687) in French, HlKt. Coll.
La., I. 15*2, 1846. Coiaheguxes.— Barcia, Ensayo,
271, 1723. Coyabegux.— Joutel, op. cit., 136.
Coyftchic. A Tarahumare settlement n.
of the headwaters of the central arm of
the Rio San Pedro, lat. 28° 20^ long. 106°
48^, Chihuahua, Mexico. — Orozco y Berra,
Geog., 323, 1864.
Coyatee. A former Cherokee settle-
ment on Little Tennessee r., al>out 10 m.
below the Tellico, about the present Coy-
tee, Loudon Co.,Tenn. It was the scene
of the treaty of Coyatee in 1786 between
commissioners representing the state of
Franklin, as Tennessee was then called,
and the chiefs of the Overhill towns. —
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 63, 513,
1900.
Cawatie. — Moonev, op. cit. Coiatee. — Ibid. Coy-
tec.— Ibid. Coytoy.— Ibid. Kai-a-te«.— Ibid.
Coycoy. A Chumashan village on one of
the N. Santa Barbara ids., Cal., in 1542, —
Cabrillo ( 1542) in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla.,
186, 1857.
Coyoteros (Span. : * wolf-men * ; so called
in consequence, it is said, of their sub-
sisting partly on coyotes or prairie wolves
(Gr^g, Com. Prairies, i, 290, 1844); but
it seems more probable that the name
was applied on account of their roving
habit, living on the natural i)roducts of
the desert rather than by agriculture or
hunting). A division of the Apache,
geographically divided jnto the Pinal
Coyoteros and the White Mountain Co-
yoteros, whose principal home was the
w. or s. w. part of the present White
Mountain res., e. Ariz., between San
Carlos cr. and Gila r., although they
ranged almost throughout the limits of
Arizona and w. New Mexico. The name
has evidently been indiscriminate! 3r ap
plied to various Apache bands, especially
to the Pinal Coyoteros, who are but a
part of the Coyoteros. They were said
COYOTERO APACHE
to have numl)ered 310 under the San
Carlos Agency in 1886, 647 in 1900, and
489 in 19<)4, but whether these figures in-
clude other Apache is not known. See
ApachCt Toiito. (f. w. h. )
Oayote*.— Emory, Recoii., 70, 1H48. Colloteros.—
Bajtlett, Pere. Narr., ii, 601, 18M. Coyaheros.—
H. R. Rep. 98, 42d Ck>nar., 3d sess., AWJ, 1873. Coya-
tero.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 203, ISiVS. Coye-
tero. — Cooke in Emory, Recon.,map, 1848, Coyo-
leno.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 122, 1861. Cojrotaro.— Emory,
Recon.. 96, 1848. Coyote.— Mayer, Mex., n, 122,
1853. Coyotens.— Lane (1854) in Schoolcraft. Ind.
Tribes, v, 689, 1855. Coyotero Apaohet.— Ind. Aff.
Rep.. 141, 1868. Coyoteros.— Hardy, Trav. in
Mexico, 430, 1829. Coystero.— Simpson in Rep.
Sec. War, 118, 1850 (misprint). Cyotlero.— Abert
in Emory, Recon., 507, 1848. Eiotaro.— Pattie.
Pers. Narr., 66, 1833 (misprint). Oilands John-
ston in Emory, Recon., 587, 1848. Hilend's Gila
Indians. — Ibid, ("or Kiataws, prairie wolves").
Kiataro.— Ibid. KiaUw.— Ibid. Kiateros.— Ibid.,
591. Koiotero — Ind. Aff. Rep., 246, 1877. PaWtwi.—
Gatschet, Yuma-Spr., i, 371, 1883 (Tonto name:
• they play cards'). PawiUma.— Ibid., 411 (Tonto
name), (laietaroes.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 506, 1865.
Silka.— ten Kate, Synonymie, 6. 1884 (*on the
mountain': Navaho name). Tslrj-gUu — Ibid.
WilaUtt'kwe.— Ibid., 7 (Zufll name: 'liffhtning-
shell people'). Wolf-Eaters. — Ruxton in Jour.
Ethnol. Sec. Lond., ii, 95, 1850 (Coyoteros or).
Coyyo. A village connected with the
former San Carlos mission, Cal., and said
to have been of the Esselen tribe. — ^Tay-
lor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860.
BULL. .'101
CKADLEJ^
357
Cradles. In Nortli American ethnology,
the device in which the infant was bouiicl
during the first months of Hfe. It served
ACOMA WOMAN WITH CRADLE. (vROMAN. PmOTO.)
for l)oth cra<l]e and baby's carriage, mure
especially the latter. In the arctic region,
where the extreme cold would have been
fatal, cradles were not ustnl, the infant
being carried about in the hood of the
mother's fur parka; the Mackenzie r. tril)es
put the ])aby in a bag of moss. In the
warmer regions also, from the lM)undary
of Mexico south wanl, frames were not
universal, but the chihl, wearing little
clothing, was in some way attac^lieii to
the mother and borne on her hip, where
it jmrtly rode and ])artly clung, or rested
in hammock-like swings. The territory
l^etween these extremes was the home of
the cradle, which is found in great vari-
ety. The parts of a cradle are the Ixxly,
the lx»d and covering, the pillow ami
other appliances for the head, including
those for head flattening, the lashing,
the foot rest, the bow, the awning, the
devices for suspension, and the trinkets
an<l amulets, such as dewclaws, serving
for rattles and moving attractions as well
as for keeping away evil spirits. Cradles
differ in form, technic, and decoration.
Materials and designs were often selected
with great care and much ceremony, the
former l)eing those best adapte<l for the
purpose that nature provided in each
culture area, and they, quite as nnich as
the wish of the maker, decided the form
and decoration.
Bark cradles. — These were use*! in the
interior of Alaska and in the Mackenzie
drainage basin. They were made of a
single piece of birch or other bark, })ent
into the form of a trough,, with a hood, and
tastefully adorned with quill-
work, the bed was of soft fur,
the lashing of babiche. They
were carried <>n the nK)ther's
back by means of a forehea<l
band.
Skin rrn<H('i<. — Adopted in the
area of the buffalo and other
great mammals. The hide with
the hair on was rolle<l up, in-
stead of bark, and in much the
same way, to hold the infant;
when com}K)sed of hide oidv
they were seldom <lecorated.
IJittircrradles. — ( )n the j)lains,
cradles made of drt»ssed skins were lashed
to a lattice of flat sticks, espe<'ially among
Sioux Cradle
KIOWA CRADLE. IRUSSELL. PhOTO. )
the Kiowa, Comanche, and others; but all
the tribes now borrow from one another.
In these are to be seen the perfection of
358
CBADLES
[b. a. b.
this device. The infant, wrapped in furs,
was entirely encased. Over the face was
bent a flat bow adorned with pendants
or amulets and covered, in the b^t ex-
amples, with a costly hood. The whole
upper surface of the hide was a field of
bead work, quill work, or other decora-
tion, in which symbolic and heraldic de-
vices were wrought. The frame was
supported and carried on the mother's
back or swung from the pommel of a
Raddle'by means of bands attached to the
lattice frame in the rear. Among some
tribes the upper ends of the frame pro-
jected upward and were decorated.
Board cradles. — Nearly akin to the last
named is the form seen among the Iro-
(juoian and Algonquian tribes of the E.,
in which a thin, rectangular board takes
the place of the lattice. It was frequently
carved and gorgeously painted, and had
a projecting foot rest. The bow was also
bent to a right angle and decorated. The
infant, after sw^dling, was laid upon
the board and lashed fast by means of a
long band. The tree for the Pawnee
cradle-board was carefully
selected, and the middle
taken out so that the heart
or life should be preserved,
else the child would die.
Equal care was taken that
the head of the cradle should
follow the grain. The spots
on the wildcat skin used for
a cover symbolized the stars,
the bow the sky, and the
crooked furrow out thereon
signified thelightning, whose
power was typified by the
arrows tied to the bow (Fletcher). All
the parts were symbolic.
Dugout cradles. — On the x. Pacific coast
the infant was placed in a little box of
cedar. The region furnished material,
and the adz habit, acquired in canoe ex-
cavation, made the manufacture easy.
Interesting peculiarities of these cradles
are the method of suspending them hori-
zontally, as in Siberia, the p^ds of
shredded bark for head flattening, 'and
the relaxation of the child's body in
place of straight lacing. Decorative fea-
tures are almost wanting.
Mattina cradles, — Closely allied to dug-
out cradles and similar in the arrange-
ment of parts are those found in contigu-
ous areas made from the bast of cedar.
Basket cradles, — On the Pacific slope
and throughout the interior basin tne
basket cradle predominates and exists in
great variety. Form, structure, and dec-
oration are borrowed from contiguous
regions. In British Columbia the dugout
cradle is beautifully copied in coiled work
and decorated with imbrications. The
Salish have developed such variety in bas-
HuPA Cradle or
WICKER
ketry technic that mixed types of cradles
are not surprising. In the coast region of N.
Califomiaand Oregon cradles are more like
littlechairs; the child's feet are free, and it
sits in the basket as if getting ready for
emancipation from restraint. The woman
lavishes her skill upon this vehicle for the
object of her affection. Trinkets, &ce
protectors, and soft beds complete the
outfit. Elsewhere in California the baby
lies flat. In the interior basin the use
of basketry in cradles is characteristic of
the Shoshonean tribes. In certain pue-
blos of New Mexico wicker coverings are
placed over them.
Hurdle cradles. — ^These consist of a
number of rods or small canes or sticks
arranged in a plane on an oblong hoop
and held in place by lashing with splints
or cords. The Yuman tribes ana the
Wichita so made them. The bed is of
Cottonwood bast, shredded, and the child
is held in place in some examples by an
artistic wrapping of colored woven bielts.
The Apache, Navaho, and Pueblo tribes
combine the basket, the hurdle, and the
board cradles, the Navaho covering the
framework with drapery of the softest
buckskin and loading it with ornaments.
The ancient cliff-dwellers used both the
board and the hurdle forms.
Hammock cradles. — Hereand there were
tribes that placed their infants in net-
work or wooden hammocks suspended
bv the ends. In these the true function
of the cradle as a sleeping place is better
fulfilled, other varieties serving rather for
carrying.
Among the San Carlos Apache at least
the cradle is made after the baby is bom,
to fit the body; later on a larger one is
prepared. The infant was not placed
at once after birth into the cradle after
the washing; a certain number of days
elapsed before the act was performed
with appropriate ceremonies. When the
mother was working about the home the
infant was not kept in the cradle, but was
laid on a robe or mat and allowed free
play of body and limbs. The final escape
was gradual, the process taking a year
or more. The cradle distorted the head
by flattening the occiput as a natural con-
sequence of contact between the resistant
pillow and the immature bone, and amone
certain tribes this action was enhanced
by pressure of pads. The Navaho are said
to adjust the padding under the shoulders
also. Hrdlicka finds skull deformations
more pronounced and common in males
than in females (see Artificial Jiead de-
formcUion ) . In many tribes scented herbn
were placed in the bedding. Among the
Yuma difference was sometimes made
in adorning boys' and girls' cradles, the
former being much more costly. Some
tribes make a new cradle for each child,
BULL. 30]
CRANETOWN OREE
359
but among the Pueblo tribes, particu-
larly, the cradle was a sacred object, hand-
ed down in the family, and the number
of children it had carried was frequently
shown by notches on the frame. Itn sale
would, it is thought, result in the death
of the child. If the infant died while in
the helpless age, the cradle was either
thrown away ( Walapai and Tonto ) , broken
up, burned, or placed on the grave (Nav-
aho and Apacne), or buried with the
corpse, lacea up inside as in life (cliff-
dwellers, Kiowa). The grief of the
mother on the death of an infant is in-
tensely pathetic. The doll and the cradle
were everywhere playthings of Indian
girls. See Child life, Moss-Utg.
Consult Fewkes in 15th Rep. B. A. p:.,
1897; Hrdlickain Am. Anthrop., vii, nos.
2, 3, 1905; Mason in Rep. Nat. Mus.,
161-212, 1887; Porter, ibid., 2i:^235.
(O. T. M.)
Cranetown. A former Wyandot village
on the site of the present Royalton, Fair-
field CO., Ohio. It was known to the
Indians as Tarhe, from the name of a
chief in 1790, at which time it contained
about 500 inhabitants in 100 wigwams
built of bark. — Howe, Hist. Coll. Ohio,
I. 588, 1898.
TarhetowB. — Ibid.
Cranetown. A former Wyandot village
in Crawford co., Ohio, 8 or 10 m. n. e. of
the present Upper Sandusky. — Royce in
18th Rep. B. A. E., pi. clvi, 1899.
Cranio logy. See Anatomy, Artificial
head deformation, Physiology.
CrayfiBh Town ( probably translated from
Cherokee JUMiind^yij * crawfish place').
A former Cherokee settlement in upper
Georgia about 1800. (j. m. )
Craiy Hone. An Oglala Sioux chief.
He is said to have receive<l this name
because a wild pony dashed through the
village when he was born. His bold, ad-
venturous disposition ma^le him a leader
of the southern Sioux, who S(X)rned res-
ervation life and delighted to engage in
raiding expeditions against the Crows or
the Mandan, or to wreak vengeance on
whites wherever they could saftly attack
them. When the Sioux went on the war-
path in 1875, on account of the occupancy
of the Black-hills and other grievances.
Crazy Horse and Sitting Bull were the
leaders of the hostiles. Gen. Reynolds,
commanding a column of the SLrmy of
Gen. Crook, m the winter of 1875 surprised
Crazy Horse's camp and captured his
horses, but the Indians succeeded in stam-
peding the herd in a blinding snowstorm.
When Gen. Crook first encountered Crazy
Horse's band on Rosebud r., Mont., the
former was compelled to fall back after a
sharp fight. The band at that time con-
sistea of about fiOO Minneconjou Sioux
and Cheyenne. Later Crazy Horse was
joined on Powder r. by warlike Sioux of .
various tribes on the reservation, others
going to swell the band of Sitting Bull in
Dakota. Both bands united and anni-
hilated the column of (Jen. George A.
Custer on Little Bighorn r., Mont., June
25, 1876. When Gen. Nelson A. Miles
pursued the Sioux in the following wintt^r
the two camps sejxarated again s. of Yel-
lowstone r., Crazy Horse taking his Chey-
enne and Oglala and going back to Rosi^-
bud r. Gen. Mackenzie destroyed his
camp on a stream that flows into Tongue
r. , losing several men in the engagement.
Gen. Miles followed the band towanl
Bighorn mts. and had a sharp engagement
in which the trooi)s could scarcely have
withsto(Kl the repeated assaults of ilouble
their numlx^r without their artillery,
which exploded shells among the Indians
with great effect. Crazv Horse surren-
(lere<l in the spring with over 2,000 fol-
lowers. He was suspecte<l of stirring up
another war and was placed under arrt»st
on Sept. 7, 1877, but broke from the
guard and was shot. See Miles, l*ers.
RecoL, 193, 244, 1896.
Creation myths. See Mylliology, Religion .
Credit Indians. A 5lissisauga band
formerly living on Credit r., at the w. end
of L. Ontario. Al)Out 1850 they removed
to Tuscarora, on Grand r., Ontario, by
invitation of the Iroquois. — Jones, Ojel*)-
way Inds., 211, 1861.
Cree (contracted from Kristinaux,
French form of Kenistenoag, given as one
of their own names). An im|)ortant Al-
Kon<]uian tribe of British America whose
former habitat was in Manitoba and
Assinilx)ia, between Red and Saskatch-
ewan rs. They ranged northeastward
down Nelson r.' to the vicinity of Hudson
bay, and northwestward almost to Atha-
basca lake. When they first l)ecame
known to the Jesuit missionaries a part of
them resided in the region of James bay,
as it is stated as early as 1640 that **they
dwell on the rivers of the north sc^awheiv
Nipissings go to trade with them"; but
the Jesuit Relations of \&M and 1667 in-
dicate a rc^gion farther to the N. w. as the
home of the larger part of the trilx*. A
portion of the Cree, as appears from the
tradition given by Lacoml)e (Diet. Lang.
Cris), inhabited for a time the region
about Red r., intermingled w^ith the
Chippewa and Maskegon, but were
attracted to the plains ])y the buffalo, the
Cree like the Chippewa being essimtially
a forest people. Many bands of Cree
were virtually nomads, their movements
being governed largely by the food supply.
The Cree are closely related, linguist-
ically and otherwise, to the Chippewa.
Hayden regarded them as an offshoot of
the latter, and the Maskegon another
division of the same ethnic group.
360
GBEE
[B. A. B.
At some comparatively recent time the
Assiniboin, a branch of the Sioux, in
consequence of a quarrel, broke away
from their brethren and sought alli-
ance with the Cree. The latter received
them cordially and granted them a home
in their territory, thereby forming
friendly relations that have continued to
the present day. The united trilx^s at-
tacked and drove southwewtward the Sik-
sika and allied tribes who formerly dwelt
along the Saskatchewan. The enmity
between these tribes and both the Siksika
and the Sioux has ever since continued.
After the Cree obtiiined tirearms they
made raids into the Athapascan country,
even to the Rocky mts. and as far n.
as Mackenzie r., but Churchill r. was
accounted the extreme n. limit of their
territory, and in their cessions of land to
Canada they claimed nothing beyond this
line. Mackenzie, speaking of the region
of Churchill r., says the original people of
this area, probaBly Slaves, were driven
out by the Cree.
As the people of this tribe have been
friend Iv from their first intercourse with
both the English and the French, and
until quite recently were left compara-
tively undisturbe<l in the enjoyment of
their territory, there has been but little
recorded in regard to their history. This
consists almost wholly of their contests
with neighboring tril)e8 and their re-
lations with the Hudson Bay Co. In
1786, a(!cording to Hind, these Indians,
as well as those of surrounding tribes,
were reduced to less than half their
former numbers by smallpox. The same
disease a^ain swei)t off at lea.st half the
prairie tnbes in 1838. They were thus
reduced, according to Hind, to one-sixth
or one-eighth of their fonuer |)opulation. *
In more re(!ent years, since game has
l)e<*ome scarce, they have lived chiefly
in scattered bands, de|>ending largely
on trade with the agents of the Hudson
Bay Co. At present they are gathered
chiefly in bands on various reserves in
Manitoba, mostly with the Chippewa.
Their dispersion into bands subject to
different conditions with regard to the
supply and character of their food has re-
salted in varying physical characteristics;
hence the varying aescriptions given by
explorers. Mackenzie, who describes the
Cree comprehensively, says they are of
moderate stature, well proportioned, and
of great activity. Their complexion is
copper-colored and their hair -black,
as IS common among Indians. Their
eyes are black, keen, and i>enetrating;
their countenance open an<i agreeable.
In regard to the women he says: **0f all
the nations which I have seen on this
continent, the Knisteneaux women are
the most comely. Their figure is gener-
ally well proportioned, and the regularity
of tifeir features would be acknowledgea
by the more civilized people of Europe.
Their complexion has less of that dark
tinge which is common to those savages
who have less cleanly habits." Umfre-
ville, from whom Mackenzie appears to
have copied in part what is here state<l,
says that they are more inclined to be
lean of body than otherwise, a corpulent
Indian being **a much greater curiosity
than a sober one." Clark (Sign Lan-
guage, 1885) describes the Cree seen by
him as wretchedly ])oor and mentally and
physically inferior to the Plains Indians;
and Harmon says that those of the tribe
who inhabit the plains are fairer and more
cleanly than the others.
Their hair was cut in various fashions,
according to the tribal divisions, and by
some left in its natural state. Henry
says the young men shaved off the hair
except a small spot on the cro>*Ti of the
head. Their dress consistt»d of tight leg-
gings, reaching nearly to the hip, a strip
of cloth or leather al)out 1 ft. wide and
5 ft. long passing between the legs and
under a oelt around the waist, the ends
])eing allowed to hang down in front and
behind; a vest or shirt reaching to the
hips; sometimes a cap for the head made
of a piece of fur or a small skin, and
sometimes a robe thrown over the dress.
These articles, with moccasins and mit-
tens, constituted their apparel. The dress
of the women consisteci of the same mate-
rials, but the shirt extended to the knees,
being fastened over the shoulders with
cords and at the waist with a belt, and
having a flap at the shoulders; the arms
were covered to the wrist with detached
sleeves. Umfreville says that in trading,
fraud, cunning, Indian finesse, and every
concomitant vice was practised by them
from the boy of 12 years to the o<;togena-
rian, but where trade was not concerned
they were scrupulously honest. Mac^ken-
zie says that they were naturally mild and
affable, as well as just in their dealings
amongthemselvesand with strangers; that
any deviation from these traits is to be
attributed to the influence of the white
traders. He also describes them as gen-
erous, hospitable, and excreedingly good
natured except when under the influence
of spirituous liquor. Chastity was not
considered a virtue among them, though
infidelity of a wife was sometimes severely
punished. Polygamy was common; and
when a man's wife died it was considered
his duty to marry her sister, if she had one.
The arms and utensils used before trade
articles were introduced by the whites
were \tota of stone, arrow-points, spear-
heads, hatchets, and other edged tools of
flint, knives of buffalo rib, fishhooks made
out of sturgeon bones, and awls from
BULL. 301
CREE
361
bones of the moose. The fibrous roots of
the white pine were used as twine for sew-
ing their bark canoes, and a kind of thread
from a weed for making nets. Spoons
and pans were fashioned from the iiornH
of the moose (Hayden). They sometimes
made fishhooks by inserting a piece of
bone obliquely into a stick and pliari)en-
ing the points Their lines wen> either
thongs fasteneil together or l)raido<l wil-
low l)ark. Their sskin tipis, like those of
the N. Athapascans, were raised on poles
set up in conical form, but were usually
more commodious. Thev occasionally
erect a lai^jer structure of lattice work,
covered with birch bark, in which 40
men or mon» can assemble for council,
feasting, or religious rites.
The (lead were usually buried in shal-
low graves, the Inxly btMng covere<l with a
pile of stones and earth to i)rotect it from
wasts of prey. The grave was lined with
branches, some of the articles bt^longing
to the deceased being placed in it, and in
some sections a sort of canopy was erected
over it. Where the deceastnl had distin-
guished himself in war his Ixxiy was laid,
according to Mackenzie, on a kind of scaf-
folding; but at a latt»r date Hayden says
they did not ])racti8e tree or scaffold burial.
Tattooing was almost universal among the
Cree before it was al)andone<l through the
influence of the whites. The women were
content with having a line or two drawn
from the comers of the mouth towanl the
angles of the lower jaw; but some of the
men covered their Ixxiies with lines and
figures. The Cree of the Wooils are ex-
pert canoemen and the women lighten
(H>n8iderably their lalx>rs by the use of the
(ranoe, especiallv where lakes and rivers
abound. A double-head drum and a rattle
are used in all religious ceremonies except
those which take place in the sweat house.
Their religious l)eliefs are generally sim-
ilar to those of the Chip|K»wa.
The gentile fonn of scK'ial organization
appears to W wanting. On account of
the um^ertain appli(*ation of the divisional
namcis given by the Jesuit missionaries
and other early writers it is inii)ossible
to identify them with those more mod-
emly recoguiztnl. Richanlson says: '*lt
would, however, l)e an endless task to
attempt to determine the precise people
designated by the early French writers.
Every small f)and, naming itself from its
huntmg grounds, was descril>e<l as a dif-
ferent nation." The first notice of the
Cret> divisions is given in the Jesuit Rela-
tion of 1658, which states that they are
composed of four nations or jjeoples, as
follows: Alimil)egouek, Kilistinons of the
bay of Ataouabouscjatouek, Kilistinons
of the Nipisiriniens, and Nisilwurounik.
At least 3 of these divisions are erro-
neously located on the Creuxius map of
IGGl), ami it is evident from the Relatitm
that at least '.i of them were supposed by
the writt»r to have biH^'u situated somc»-
where s. or s. w. of James bay. Nothing
additional is heard of them in the subse-
(juent noti<'es of the tribe, which is other-
wise divided into the Paskwawininiwug
an<l Sakawininiwug (people of the plains
and of the woods), the former sulnli-
vided into Sipiwininiwug and Mamiki-
niniwug (river and lowland i)eoi)le), the
latter into Sakittawawininiwug and Aya-
baskawininiwng (those of (Yoss lake and
those of Athabasca). In 18o() the Cree
were <livided, according to Hayden, into
the following bands, all or nearly all tak-
ing their names froni their chiefs: Apis-
tekaihe, Cokah, Kiaskusis, Mataitaikeok,
Muskwoikakenut, Muskwoikauc]>awit,
Peisiekan, Piskakauakis, Shemaukau,
and Wikyuwamkamusenaikata, besides
several smaller bands and a considerable
nundK*r around Cross lake, in the i)rest»nt
Athabasca, who were not attached to any
band. So far as now known the ethnic
divisions, a.«ide from the ('ree pro|HT, are
the Maskegon and the Monsoni. Al-
though these are treated a.s <listinct tribes,
they form, beyond doubt, intt*gral parts
of the Cree. It was to the Maskegon,
according to Richardson, that the name
Kilistenaux, in its many forms, was
ancientlya])plied, a ccmclusion with which
Henry ai)parently agrees.
In 1776, Iwfore smalli)ox had grt^ally
rt^luced them, the iK)pulation of the Cree
proper was estimated at al>out 15,(XK).
Most of the estimates during the last cen-
tury give them from 2,500 to 8,000.
There are now alnait 10,()(H) in Manitoba
(7,000 under agencies) and about r),(MM)
roving in Northwest Territory; total,
15,000. (j. M. * c. T.)
Ana.— IVtitot. Kutohin MS. V(m'ji]>., B. A. K., 1SC9
('f(K's': Kutchiii iiAnu>). Annah.— Mackenzio,
Voy., 291, 1S02 ('foe?*': ('hii)e\vyan iiunu'). Ayis-
ijriniwok.— IVtitot in .lour. Koy. (iv(\g. Soc, 649,
1S8:S (name us*m1 by themselves). Cattanoe. —
Stunwlx conf. (1759) in Rupp, West. Peiiii.,
app., 140, 1H4(;. Ohahis.— Maximilian, Trav.,
II, '2:U, 1H41 (llidatsa name). Christaneauz. —
Buchanan, N. Am. Inds.. l.Vi, 1824. Ohristenaux.—
Writer of 1719 in Minn. Hist. S<m'. Coll.. v. 424, l^S.').
Christencaux.— Hntehins (1764) <|Uoted bv School-
craft. Ind. Tribes, iii. fWV). \Hh:\. Chris'-te-no
I^ewis and Clark, Trav.. 55. 1«06. Christenois.—
Ibid., 80. Christianaux.— Lu HariH> (1700), in
French. Hist. ('oil. I^.. in, 27, iSrtl. Christian-
eaux. — (iale, rp|)er Miss., map, 1867. Chris*
tiannx.— Hntehins ( 1770) <|noted by Richards<m,
Arct. Kxped., n. 37, 1H.")1. ChrisUnaux.— Dobbs,
Hudson hav, 20, 1744. Christineanx.— French
writer (1716) in Minn. Hi.st. S(X'. Coll., v, 422,
1885. Christinos.— Pr(M>eR verlial ( 1671 ) in Man? r>',
Dec. I. 97, 1875. Christinou.— Hervas {ra. 1785)
nuoted by Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 348, 1816.
Ohritenoes.— Fisher, Interesting Acet., 190, 1812.
Cithinistinee.— Writer of 1786 in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 1st s.. III. 21. 1794. Clintinos.— Ramsey in
Ind. Aff. Rep., 72, 18,50 (misprint). CUstenos.—
Raflnesqne. introd. to Marshall, Kv., i, 32, 1824.
Clistinos.— I^ Hontan. New Vov.. I, 231, 1703.
Cnistineaux.— Neill, Minn., 111. 18,58. Crees.—
Harmon. .I<mr., 313, urn]*, 1820. Cries.— Smet,
362
CREEK PATH — CREEKS
[b. a. e.
Missions, 109, 1848. Oriqs.— Henry, Trav. in Can.,
214, 1809. Crique*.— Charlevoix (1667), New
France, in, 107, 1868 (so called by Canadians).
Cm. — Dobbs, Hudson Bay, map, 1744. GrUte-
neauz. — Chauvignerie (1736) quoted by School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, lii, 556, 1853. CrUtiiUkUX.—
Montreal treaty (1701) in N. Y. Doc. Ck)l. Hist.,
IX, 722, 1855. Cristiaeftux.— Petitot in Jour.
Roy. Geosr. Soi\, 649, 1883. Cmtinos.— La Ches-
naye (1697) in Margry, D6c., vi, 7, 1SS6. CrUU.—
Vaudreuil (1716), ibid., 496. Crus.— Gunn in
Smithson. Rep., 399, 1867. Cyininook.— Kingsley,
Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6. 148, 1883. Eithinyook.—
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 23, 1836.
Eithinyoowuo.— Franklin, Jour. Polar Sea, 96,
1824 ('men': their own name). Ennaa.— Petitoi
in Can. Rec. Sci., i, 49, 1884 ('strangers', 'ene-
mies': Athapascan name). Eta.— Petitot, Hare
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1869 ('foe': Kawchodinne
name). Ethinu. — Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii, 1,
1851. Ethinyu.— Ibid., 34. Eythinyuwuk.— Ibid.,
1 (own name) . Ouilistiiioiu.— Jes. Rel. 1670, 79,
1858. CHi'Ukii'we.— Chamberlain, infn, 1903
('liars': Kutenai name). HiUini-Lle'ni.— Petitot
in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 650, 1883. Ininyu-
we-u.— Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii, 33, 1851. In-
ninyu-wuk.— Ibid., 70 (name used by themselves),
lyiniwok.— Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 649,
1883 ('men': name used bytheiiLselves). Ka^lis-
te-no.— Lewis and Clark quoted by Vater, Mith.,
pt.3, sec. 3, 408, 1816. Keisoatch-ewan.— Hutchins
(1770) quoted by Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii, 37,
1851 (* people of Saskatchewan r.'). Keiakatohe-
wan.— Ibid., 38. Kelittenos.— Schoolcraft. Ind.
Tribes, vi, 33, 1857. Ke-nish-te-no-wuk.— Morgan,
Consang. and Affin., 287, 1871. Ee-nis-te-noag. —
Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 33, 1885
i Chippewa name). Kenistenoo.— Ind. Aff. Rep.,
54, 1838. Kenistenot. —Burton, City of the Sainta,
117,1861. Kilisteno.— Prichard, Phys. Hist. Man-
kind. V, 410, 1817. KiU8tiiiaux.-Jes. Rel. 1670, 92,
1858. KiUstinon.— Jes. Rel. 1658, 20, 1858. Kilisti-
not.— Du Lhut (16H4) in Margry, D6c., vi, 51, 1886.
Kilistiaous.— Charlevoix quoted by Vater, Mith.,
pt. 3, sec. 3, 407, 1816. Killestinoes.— Boudinot, Star
in the West, 107, 1816. KiUini.— Petitot in Jour.
Roy. Geog. Soc, 650, 1883. KilUsteneaux.— Army
officer (1812) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
III, 556, 1853. Killistenoes.— Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
2d 8., X, 99, 1823. KilUstiaaux.— Henry, Trav. in
Can., '247, 1H09. Killistini.— Duponceau quoted by
Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 649, 1883. Killiati-
noer.— Vater, Mith., pt.3, sec. 3, 257, 1816 (German
form). Killi8tinoe8.—Edwards( 1788) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 1st s., IX. 92, 1804. KilUstinons.— Henry,
Trav. in Can., 247, 1809. KillUtiaous.— Jeflferys,
Fr. Doms., i, 44, 1760. Killistins.— Ibid., map.
Kiniahtlnak.— Belcourt (before 1853) in Minn. Hist.
Soc. Coll., I, 227, 1872 (trans.: 'being held by the
winds'). Kiniihtiiio.— Baraga, Eng.-Otch. Diet., 63,
1878 (Chippewa name) . Kmisteneaux. — Macken-
zie (1801) quoted by Kendall, Trav., il, 289, 1809.
Zinistinaux.— Henr>', Trav. in Can., 214, 1809.
Kinistineaux. — Ibid., 247. Kinistinoes.— Harmon,
Jour., 67, 1820. Kinittinoiu.— Jes. Rel. 1672, 54,
1858. Kinistinttwok. —Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog.
Soc., 649, 1883 (Chippewa name). Kinatenauz.—
I^wis and Clark, Trav., 105, 1840. Kinatiaauz.—
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., II, 104,1848.
Xiriatinon.— Jes. Rel. 1640, 34. 1858. KiaUatinoiia.—
Du Chesneau (1681) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 161,
1855. Kiateneauz.— Ram.sey in Ind. AfT. Rep., 71,
1850. Kliatinaux.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq.
Soc., II, 23, 1836. Kliati]ioiia.-Jes. Rel. (1671)
quoted by Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 71, 1850.
Kliatiiioa.— PetitotinJour.Roy.Geog.Soc.,&19,1883.
Kneeatenoag.— Tanner, Narr., 315, 1830 (Ottawa
name). Kniateaux.— Howe, Hist. Coll., .%7, 1861.
Knistenaua.— Lewis and Clark, Trav., 45, 1806.
Kniatenaux.— Schermerhom (1812) in Mass. Hist.
Soc.Coll.,2ds.,ii,ll,1814. Kniateneau.- Famham,
Trav., 32, 1843. Knisteneaux.— Gass, Jour., 42,
note, 1807. Kniateneux.— Harmon, Jour., 313, 1820.
Kniateno.— Wrangell, Ethnol. Nachr., 100, 1839.
Kniatenooa.— Brackenridge, Views of La., 86,1815.
Kni8tinattx.—(tal latin in Trans. Am. Antiq., Soc.,
II, 23, 1836. Kniatlneaux.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 141,
1855. Kniatinoa.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6,
148, 1883. Kreea.— Henrv, MS. vocab. (1812), Bell
copy, B. A. E. Xrioqa.- Bacqueville de la Poth-
ene. Hist. Am., i, 170, 1763. Kri^— Baudry des
Xx>zi^res, Voy. a la Le., 242, 1802. Kriqa.— Lettres
£dif., 1, 645, 1695. Kria.— Jefferys, Fr. Doms, i,map,
1760. KrUtenaux.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist.,
?t. 6, 148, 1883. Kriateneaux.— Franklin, Jour, to
olar Sea, 96, 18*24. Kriatinaux.— Gallatin in
Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 23, 1836. Kriatino.—
Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 34, 1822. KyriatinSiia.—
Jes. Rel. 1641,59,1858. Mehethawaa.— Keane in
Stanford, Compend., 521, 1878. Kiniateneaux.—
Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816 (misprint).
Kaehiaok.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist.,pt. 6, 148,
1883. Hahathaway.— West, Jour., 19, 1824. Ha-
heawak.— Long, Exped. St Peter's R., i, 376, 1824.
Hahhahwuk.— Tanner Narr., 315, 1830 (said to be
their own name). Kahiawah.— Prichard, Phys.
Hist. Mankind, v, 410, 1847. Kahioak.— Maxi-
milian, Trav., 1, 454, 1839. Nakawawa.— Hutchins
(1770) quoted by Richardson, Arct. Exped., il, 38,
1851. Kaka-we-wuk.— Ibid. Kathehwy-within-
yoowuc— Franklin, Joum. to Polar Sea, 96, 1824
('southern men'). Nathe'-wywithin-yu. — Ibid.,
71. Nation du Orand-Kat— La Chesnaye (1697) in
Margry, D^c. vi, 7, 1886. N<-a-ya-^.— Hayden,
Ethnol. and Philol. Mo. Val., 235, 1862 (' those who
speak the same tongue': own name). Ne-heth-
a-wa.— Umfreville (1790) in Maine Hist. Soc. Coll.,
VI, 270. 1859. Keheth^wuk.— Richardson, Arct.
Exped., II, 36, 1851 ('exact men': own name).
Nehethowuck. — Shea, note in Charlevoix, New
Fr„ III, 107, 1868. Hehethwa.— Umfreville (1790)
quoted by Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 418, 1816.
Kehiyaw.— Baraga, Ojibwa Diet., 1878 (Chippewa
name). Kehiyawok.— Lacombe, Diet, aes Cris, x,
1874 (own name; from iyinitook,* those of the first
race'). Nenawehka.— Keane in Stanford, Com-
pend., 625, 1878. Henawewhk.— Walch, map, 1805.
Nen% Wewhok. — Harmon, Jour., map, 1820. Hi-
the-wuk.— Hind, Lab. Penin., ii, 10, 1863. Korthem
TJttawawa.— Hutchins (1770) quoted by Richard-
son, Arct. Exped., Ii, 38, 1851. O'pimmltiah Inini-
wuc— Franklin, Joum. Polar Sea, 66, 1824 ('men
of the woods'). Queniatiaoa. —Iberville (1702) in
Minn.Hist.Soc.Coll.,1, 342,1872. Uueriatinoa.— Iber-
ville in Maigry, D^.. iv, 600, 1880. Sa-nia-te-nos.—
Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1860, 122, 1861.
ia^'.— Matthews, Hidatsa Inds.,200. 1877(Hidat8a
name). Baie'kaftii.— Tims, Blackfoot Gram, and
Diet., 124, 1889 (Siksika name; sing.). Sehahi.—
Maximilian, Trav., ii, 234, 1841 (Hidatsa name).
aha-i-y<.— Matthews, Hidatsa Inds,, 200, 1877 (A8-
siniboin name). 8hi-e-£-la.— Hayden, Ethnog.
and Philol. Mo. Val.. 235, 1862 (Sioux name).
Shi-^ya.— Ibid. (Assiniboin name: 'enemies,'
* strangers' ) . Soutnem Indiana.— Dobbs, Hudson
Bay, 95, 1744 (so called by the Hudson bay
traders) .
Creek Path (transl. of Ku^sd-niXflnd^hl).
A former important Cherokee settlement,
including also a number of Creeks and
Shawnee, where the trail from the Ohio
region to the Creek country crossed Ten-
nessee r., at the present Guntersville,
Marshall co., Ala. It was later known
as Gunter's Landing, from a Cherokee
mixed-blood named Gunter. — Mooney in
19th Rep. B. A. E., 526, 1900.
Creeks. A confederacy forming the
largest division of the Muskhogean fam-
ily. They received their name from the
English on account of the numerous
streams in their country. During early
historic times the Creeks occupied the
greater portion of Alabama and Geor-
gia, residing chiefly on Coosa and Talla-
poosa rs., the two largest tributaries of
Alabama r., and on Flint and Chatta-
hoochee rs. They claimed the territory
on the E. from the Savannah to St Johns r.
and all the islands, thence to Apalache
BULL. 30]
CREEKS
363
bay, and from this line northward to the
mountains. The s. portion of this terri-
tory was held by dispossession of the
earlier Florida tribes. They sold to Great
Britain at an early date their territory be-
tween Savannah and Ogeechee rs., all the
coast to St Johns r., and all the islands
up to tidewater, reserving for themselves
St Catherine, Sapelo, and Ossabaw ids.,
and from Pipemakers bluff to Savannah
(Morse, N. Am., 218, 1776). Thus oc-
cupying a leading position among the
Muskhogean tribes the Creeks were suffi-
ciently numerous and powerful to resist
attacks from the northern tribes, as the
Catawba, Iroquois, Shawnee, and Chero-
kee, after they had united in a confed-
eracy, which they did at an early day.
The dominating tribes at the time of
the confederation seem to have been the
Abihka(orKusa), Kasihta, Kawita,Oak-
fuskee, and some other tribe or tribes at
the junction of Coosa and Tallapoosa rs.
Nothing certain can be said of their pre-
vious condition, or of the time when the
confederacy was established, but it ap-
pears from the narratives of De Soto's
expedition that leagues among several of
these towns existed in 1540, over which
head chiefs presided.
For more than a century before their
removal to the W., between 1836 and
1840, the people of the Creek confederacy
occupied some 50 towns, in which were
spoken 6 distinct languages, viz, Musco-
gee, Hitchiti, Koasati, Yuchi, Natchez,
and Shawnee. The first three were of
Muskho^an stock, the others were en-
tirely alien incorporations. About half
the confederacy spoke the Muscogee lan-
guage, which thus constituted the ruling
language and gave name to the confed-
eracy. The meaning of the word is un-
known. Although an attempt has been
made to connect it with the Algonquian
maskegy 'swamp,* the probabilities seem
to favor a southern origin. The people
speaking the cognate Hitchiti and Koa-
sati were contemptuously designated as
**Stincard8'* by the dominant Muscogee.
The Koasati seem to have included the
ancient Alibamu of central Alabama,
while the Hitchiti, on lower Chattahoo-
chee r., appear to have been the remnant
of the ancient people of s. e. Georgia, and
claimed to be of more ancient occupancy
than the Muscogee. Geographically the
towns were grouped as Upper Creek, on
Coosa and Tallapoosa rs., Ala., and Lower
Creek, on middle or lower Chattahoochee
r., on the Alabama-Georgia border.
While the Seminole (q. v. ) were still a
small body confined to the extreme n. of
Florida, they were frequently spoken of
as Lower Creeks. To the Cherokee the
Upper Creeks were known as Ani-Kusaj
from their ancient town of Kusa, or
Coosa, while the Lower Creeks were
called Ani-Kamtdj from their principal
town Kawita, or Coweta. The earlier
Seminole emigrants were chiefly from the
Ix)wer Creek towns.
The history of the Creeks begins with
the appearance of De Soto's army in their
country in 1540. Tristan de Luna came
in contact with part of the group in 1559,
but the only important fa(!t that can he
drawn from the record is the deplorable
condition into which the i)eople of the
sections |)enetrated by the Spaniards had
been brought by their visit. Juan <lel
Pardo passed through their country in
1567, but Juan de la Vandera, the chron-
icler of hisexpe<lition, has left little more
than a list of unidentifiable names. The
CREEK MAN
Creeks came prominently into history as
allies of the English in the Apalachee
wars of 1703-08, and from that period
continue almost uniformly as treaty allies
of the South Carolina an<l Georgia colo-
nies, while hostile to the Spaniards, of
Florida. The only serious revolt of the
Creeks against the Americans took j)lace
in 1813-14 — the well-known Creek war,
in which Gen. Jackson took a prominent
part. This en<led in the complete defeat
of the Indians and the submission of
Weatherford, their leader, followed by
the cession of the greater part of their
lands to the United States. The extended
and bloody contest in Florida, which
lasted from 1835 to 1843 and is known as
the Seminole war, secured permanent
peace with the southern tribes. The re-
364
CREEKS
[ B. A. E.
moval of the larger part of the Creek
and Seminole j>eople and their negro
slaves to the lands assigned them in In-
dian Ter. took place between 1836 and
1840.
The Creek woman was short in stature
but well formed, while the warrior, ac-
cording to l*ickett (Hist. Ala., 87, ed.
1896), was "larger than the ordinary
ra<'e of Kuropeans, often alx)ve 6 ft. in
height, but was invariably well formed,
erect in his carriage, and graceful in every
movement. They were proud, haughty,
and arrogant; brave and valiant in war."
As a people they were more than usually
devoted to decoration and ornament;,
they were fond of nmsic, and ball play
WiW their most important game. Exog-
amy, or marriage outside the clan, was
the rule; adultery by the wife was pun-
ished by the relatives of the husband;
descent was in the female line. In gov-
ernment it was a general rule that where
one or more clans occupied a town they
constituted a tribe under an elected chief,
or mikoy who was advised by the council
of the town in all important matters,
while the council appointed the "great
warrior" ov trntenuggi-hUiko. They usu-
ally burie<l their dead in a square pit
under the IhmI where the decease<l lay in
his house. Certain towns were conse-
crated to peace ceremonies and were
known as "white towns," while others
set apart for war ceremonials were des-
ignated as "red towns." They had
several orders of chiefly rank. Their
great religious ceremony was the annual
pmkita (see Bunk), of which the lighting
of the new fire and the drinking of the
black drink (q. v. ) were important accom-
paniments.
The early statistics of Creek popu-
lation are based on mere estimates. It is
not known what numerical relation the
mixed bloods hold tct the full bloods and
their former negro slaves, nor the num-
iK'r of their towns (having a s<iuare for
annual festivities) and villages (having
no s(|uare). In the last quarter of the
18th century the Creek population may
have l)een about 20,000, occupying from
40 to (K) towns. Knox in 1789 (Am. State
Pap., 1, 18.S2) estimates them at 6,000 war-
riors, or a total of 24,000 inhabitants in
100 towns; but these evidently included
the Seminole of Florida. Bartram, al)out
1775, credits the whole confe<leracy, ex-
clusive of the Seminole, with 11,000 in 55
t4jwns. Hawkins, in 1785, gave them
5,400 men, representing a total of about
19,000. Estimates maSe after the re-
moval to Indian Ter. place the popula-
tion between 15,000 and 20,000. In 1904
the "Creeks by blood" living in the
Creek Nation, numl)ered 9,905, while
Creek free<lmen aggregateil 5,473. The
numl)er of acres in their reserve in 1885
was 3,215,395, of which only a portion
was tillable, and 90,000 were actually
cultivated.
Some of the more important earlier
treaties of the United States with the
Creek Indians are: Hopewell, S. C, Nov.
28, 1785; New York, Aug. 7, 1790; Cole-
raine, Ga., June 29, 1796; Ft Jackson,
Ala., Aug. 9, 1814; Creek agency on Flint
r., Jan. 22, 1818; Indian Spring, Creek
Nation, Jan. 8, 1821; Washington, D. C,
Jan. 24, 1826, and Mar. 24, 1832; Ft Gib-
son, Ind. T., Nov. 23, 1838.
At present the Creek Nation in In-
dian Ter. is divided into 49 townships
("towns"), of which 3 are inhabited
solely by negroes. The capital is Okmul-
gee. Their legislature consists of a House
of Kings (correspomling to the Senate)
and a House of Warriors (similar to the
National House of Representatives), with
a head chief as executive. Several vol-
umes of their laws have been published.
The Creek clans follow, those marked
with an asterisk being extinct; the final
(dgi means * people ' : Ahalakal^ ( Bo^ po-
tato), Aktayatsalgi, Atchialgi (Maize),
*Chukotalgi, Fusualgi(Bird), Halpadalgi
(Alligator), Hlahloalgi (Fish), Hutalgalgi
(Wind), *Isfanalgi, Itamalgi, It<?hha8U-
algi (Beaver), Itchualgi (Deer), Katsalgi
(Panther), Koakotsalgi (Wild-cat), Ku-
nipalgi (Skunk), *Muklasalgi, Nokosalgi
(Bear),*Odshisalgi ( Hickory -nut), *Oki-
lisa, *Oktchunualgi (Salt), Osanalgi (Ot-
ter) ,*Pahosalgi, Sopaktalgi (Toad ),Takus-
algi ( Mol^ ) , Tsulalgi ( Fox ) , * Wahlakalgi,
Wotkalgi (Raccoon), Yahalgi (Wolf).
Below is a list of the Creek towns and
villages. The smaller contained 20 to 30
cabins and the larger as many as 200.
Tukabatchi, the largest, is said to have
had 386 families in 1832. The towns
were composed of irregular clusters of 4
to 8 houses, each cluster being occupied
by the representatives of a clan.
Upper Creek Unni». — Abihka, Abikud-
shi, Alkehatchee, Anatichapko, Assi-
lanapi, Atasi, Atchinaalgi, Atchinahat-
chi, Aucheucaula, Canjauda, Cayomulgi,
Chakihlako, Chananagi, Chatoksofki,
Chatukchufaula, Chiaha, Cholocco Lita-
bixee, Conaliga, Coosahatchi, Cow Towns,
Eufaula, Fusihatchi, Ghuaclahatche,
Hatchichapa, Hillabi, Hlanudshiapala,
Hlaphlako, Hlahlokalka, Huhliwahli,
Ikanachaka, Ikanhatki, Imukfa, Ipisogi,
Istapoga, Istudshilaika, Kailaidshi, Ker-
off, Kitchopataki, Kohamutkikatska,
Kulumi, Kusa, Littefutchi, Lutchapoga,
Muklassa, New Eufaula, Ninnipaskulgee,
Niuyaka, Oakfuskee, Oakfuskudshi, Ok-
chayi, Okchayudshi, Ooeasa, Opilhlako,
Osonee (?), Oiituchina, Pakan Tallahas-
see, Pinhoti, Potchushatchi, Sakapatayi,
Satapo, Saui^hatchi, Sukaispoka, Tala-
dega, Talasi, Talasihatchi, Talapoosa,
Taliposehogy, Tukabatchi, Tukarmtchi
BULL. 30]
CREMATION CROSS
365
Tallahassets Tukpafka, Tukhtukagi, Tui?-
kegee, Uktahasasi, UUibahali.Wakokayi,
Weogufka, Wetumpka, Wewoka, Wok-
soy udshi . ( See also A lUm mu . )
Lower Creek ayid Hitch iti toini.'i. — Ania-
kalli, Apalachicola, Af)atai, Chatta-
hoochee, Chiaha, Chiahudshi, Chi-
hlakonini, Chiskatalofa, Chukahlako,
Cotohautustennuggee, Donally's Town,
Ematlochee, Finhalui, Ilatchicliapa,
Hihagee, Hlekatska, Hogologes, Hota-
lihuyana, Huhlitaiga, Itahasiwaki, Kasih-
ta, Kawaiki, Kawita, Nipky, Ocheese,
Ocmul^ee, Ocon, Oconee, Okitiyakni,
Osotchi, Sawokli, Sawokliudshi, Sechar-
lecha, Snolanocha, Tamali, Telmocresses,
Wikaihlako.
Ani'-Ou'O.— Mooney in 19th Rep. A. B. E.. 509.
1900 (Cherokee name, from Kusti, their principal
ancient town). Anikdessa.— ten Kate, Reizen in
N. A., 422, 1«85 (Cherokee name). Ani'-Ku'si.—
Mooney, op. eit. (alternative form of Cherokee
name). Oopaa. — Carver, Trav., map, 1778 (possibly
the same; see Kopa, the Ynchi name, below).
Creek Indians.— Craven (1712) in N. C. Col, Rec. i,
H9H, 1886. Greek nation.— H. R. Rep. 8r>4, 27th
Cong., 2d sess.. 12, 1842 (misprint). Humaako.-
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 60, 188^1 (Shawnee
name, singular). Humaskogi.— Ibid. (pi. form).
K6pa.— (Jatsehet, Ynehi MS., B. A. K., 1885 ( Yuchi
name, from ko 'man,' pa 'tobnrn,* referring to
their cnstom of burning in-isoners at the stake).
Kreekfl. — Mandrillon, Spec^tateur Am<^ricain,
map, 1785. Kriohos. — Hervas, Idea dell' Uni verso,
XVii, 90, 1784. Krihk.— Gatschet, Inf'n ((xerman
formof several writers). Kosa.— Gatsehet, inf'n
i Cherokee name, pi. Aniktim; so called after
Lusa, their earliest center). Ku-iL'-sha — Gat-
schet. Creek Migr. Leg., i, 59, 1884 (Wyandot
name, after Cherokee name). Kaohecous.—
Smith, Bouquet's Exped.. 69, 1766 (nrobably mis-
spelled ioT Mashcouqui; mis.»<pelling nanded down
by Hutchins, Jefferson, and Schoolcraft). Mao-
k6v-— I>or8ey, Kansiis MS. vocab., B. A. E.. 1882
(Kan.sa name). Macku'i[e.— Dorsey, Osage MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (()sage name). Maskogi.—
Gatschet, Creek Migr. I^g., i, 59, 1884. Kaako-
kalgi. — Ibid, (own name, plural). Haakoki. —
Ibid. Maakokulki.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. A.,
411, 1885 (t?/A:e trans. •i>eople'). Kasquaohki.—
Heckeweldcr in Barton, New Views, app., 9, 1798
(Delaware name: 'swampy land', 'Swampy-
landers'). Mobilian.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 22, 18.^5.
Mo-cko'-i[i.— Dorsey, Kwapa MS. V(H'ab., B. A. V..,
1891 (Quapaw name), moskoky.— Morse, Rei).
to Sec. War, 311. 1822. Muoogulgee.— Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, iii, 511, 1853. Musaogulge.- Ker, Trav-
els,337,1816(misprint ). Muscagec.— N. Y.Doc. Col.
Hist., VI, 709, 18.T.5. Muscogee.- Ind. AfT. Rep., 7:^,
1849. Kuscogeh.— Brinton, Floridian Penin.. 141,
1859. MuMOgulges.— Bartram. Travels, 149, 1791.
Kuscolgees.— Rafine-sque, introd. to Marshall, Kv..
1,30, 1824. Musoows.— Brinton. Floridian Penin.,
144, 1859. MuMogees.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
I. 134, 1851. IRudcogee.— Pike, Travels, 159, 1811.
Muskogolgees.— Nuttall, Jour., 277, 1821. Kus-
kohge.— Adair, Am. Ind., 257, 1775. Koskoh-
gee.— Worsley, View of Am. Inds., 95, 1828. Mus-
koke«,— Smith, Cabe^a de Vaca, 164, note, 1871.
Mui-koo-gee. — Bollaertin Jour. Ethnol. S(k\ Ix>nd.,
II, 265, 1850. Musqua.— Woodward, Reminis-
cences, 13, 1859. Bko'-ki han-ya'.— Dorsey, Bi-
loxi MS. Diet., B. A. E., 1892 ( Biloxi name). Xfmash-
ffohak.— Gatschet, infn (Fox name). Western
Indians.— Brinton, Floridian Penin., 144, 1859.
Cremation. See Mortuary customs.
CreBoentB. See Banner stones.
Crifltone. A ruined pueblo on Gallinas
cr., s. of Tierra Aniarilla, n. w. N. Mex. —
Cope in Wheeler Survey Rep., vii, 355,
1879.
Croatan. A village in 1585 on an inland
then called by the wanie name, which
appears to have l)een that on which C.
Lookout is situated, on the coast of Car-
1eret co., N. V. The inhabitants seem
to have been independent of the chiefs
of Secotan. It is thoujrht that the lost
colony of I^ne, on Roanoke id., jointMl
them and that traces of the mixture
were discernible in the later Ilatteras In-
dians, (j. M.)
Croatan.— Lane (158(>) in Smith (lfi'29), Virginia,
I. 92, repr. 1819. Croatoan.— Straehey (vn. 1C12),
Virginia, 43, 145, 1849. Crooton.— Lane, op. cit., 86.
Croatan Indians. The le^I designa-
tion in North Carolina for a people evi-
dently of mixed Indian and white
blood, found in various e. sections of the
state, but chiefly in Robeson co., and
numi)ering api)roximately 5,0(K). For
many years they were classed with the
free negroes, but steadily refused to ac-
cept such classification or to attend the
negro schools or churches, claiming to be
the descendants of the earlv native tribes
and of white settlers who liad intermar-
ried with them. About 20 years ago
their claim was officially recognized and
they were given a separate legal existence
under the title of ** Croatan Indians,'* on
the theory of de.'^cent from Raleigh's lost
colony ot Croatan ((j. v.). Under this
name they now have separate school
provision and are admitted to some j)rivi-
leges not accorded to the negnx^s. The
theory of descent from the lost colony
may be regarde<l as baseless, but the
name itself serves as a convenient lal>el for
a j>eople who combine in themselves the
blood of the wasted native tribes, the
early colonists or forest rovers, the run-
away slaves or otlier negroes, an<l prob-
ably also of stray seamen of the I^tin
races from coasting vessels in the West
Indian or Brazilian trade.
Across the line in South Carolina are
found a people, evidently of similar
origin, designate(l "Redbones." \\\ por-
tions of w. X. Vj. and e. Tenn. are found
the so-called "Melungeons" (probably
fronj French melaii(/<\ 'mixed') or ** Por-
tuguese," apparently an offshoot from
the Croatan proper, and in Delaware are
found the "Moors." All of these are
local designations for peoples of mixed
race with an Indian nucleus differing in
no way from the present mixed-bloo<i
renmants known as Pamunkey, Chicka-
hominy, and Nansemond Indians in Vir-
ginia, excepting in the more coniplete
loss of their identity. In general, the
physical features and complexion of the
})ersons of this mixed stock incline more
to the Indian than to the white or negro.
See Mt'tis, Mixed bloods. (.i. m. )
Cross. This symbol or device, which
in some of ita familiar forms is known as
366
CBOSS
[B. A. E.
NAVAHO Altar-floor Symbol of the Fouh
WORLCK)UARTEft8. (j. STEVENaON)
the swastika, was in common use all over
America in pre-Columbian times. N. of
the Rio (irande it assumed many forms,
had varied significance and use, and
doubtless originated in many different
ways. Some of these ways may be briefly
_ ' su^ested: (1)
Primitive man
adjusts him-
self to his
environ incnt,
real and imagi-
nary, by keep-
ing in mind
the cardinal
points as he
understands
them. When
the Indian
considers the
world about
him he thinks of it as divided into the
four quarters, and when be comnmni-
cates with the mysterious l)eings and
powers with which his imagination peo-
ples it — the rulers of the winds and
rains — he turns his face to the four <lirec-
tions in stipulated
order and addresses
them to make his ap-
peals an<l his offer-
m^. Thus his wor-
ship, his ceremonies,
his games, and even
his more ordinary oc-
cupations in many
castas are arrange<l to
conform to the cardi-
nal i)oints,and the va-
rious sy mbol i c repre-
sentations a.ssociated with them assume
the form of the cross (see Color symbolism^
Orientation ) . Th is was and is true of many
peoples and is well illustrated in the won-
derful altar paintings of the tribes of the
arid region (see I)ry'painting). 8uch
crosses, although an
essential part of
svmlx)lismand reli-
gious ceremony, ex-
ist only for the pur-
r^ ^ -^ — - poses of the occasion
>\*^^v ^^. / ^"d are brushed
Av '/ --T ' ,^7 / away when the cer-
emony is ended, but
nevertheless they
pass in to permanent
form as decorations
of ceremonial ob-
jects — as pottery,
basketry, and costumes — retaining their
significance indefinitely. (2) Distinct
from the crosses thus derived in form and
significance are those having a pictorial
origin; such are the conventional delinea-
tions of animal ami vegetal forms or their
markings, or those representing the cos-
shell Gorget with Figure of
Spider and Conventional-
ized Cross Marking.. (2-5)
I^S%
NAVAHO Basket Tray with
CROSSES REPRESENTING THE
FOUR WORLD-OUARTERS AND
STARS OR Clouds. (i-is)
CROSS FORMED
BY THE ORNA-
mic bodies, as the sun and the stars, par,
ticularly the morning and evening stars-
as among the tribes of the S. \V . These fig-
ures, generally very simple in form, may
^m^ be symools of mythic powers
JUQ^ andpersonages; and when used
^flZ* in non-symbolic art they may
- ^^ in time lose the symbolic char-
acter and remain m art as mere
formal de(!orative patterns. (3)
Distinct from these again are a
large class of crosses and cross-
like forms which have an ad-
ventitious origin, l)eiug the re-
sult of the combined mechan-
ical and esthetic requirements
of embellishment. In nearly
all branches of art in which
MENTAL AR- surfacc ornament is an impjor-
ranqementof tant factor the spaces availa-
u^'s^o'^i'^i'l^ ble for decorative designs are
ARAPAHoiEDH squares, rectangles, circles, and
ciNE-cABE uiD. ovals, Or are borders or zones
(kroeber) which are divided into squares
or parallelograms for ready treatment.
When simple figures, symbolic or non-
symbolic, are filled into these spaces, they
are introduced, not singly, since the result
would be unsatisfac-
tory from the point
of view of the deco-
rator; not in pairs,
as that would be lit-
tle better, but in
fours, thus filling
the spaces evenly
and symmetrically.
This quadruple ar-
rangement in amul-
tltude of cases pro-
duces the cross
which, although a
pseudo cross, is not always to be distin-
guished from the cross symbol. The sep-
arate elements in such trosses may be
figures of men, insects, mountains, clouds,
frets, and scrolls, or what
not, and of themselves
symbolic, but the cross
thus produced is an acci-
dent and as a cross is
withoutsignificance. (4)
In very many cases de-
signs are invented by the
primitive decorator who
fills the available spaces
to beautify articles man-
ufactured, and the ar-
rangement in fours is of-
ten the most natural and
effective that can be de-
vised. These designs,
primarilynonsignificant,
may have meanings read into them by the
woman as she works the stitches of her
Ixasketry or beadwork, or by others sub-*
sequently, and these ideas may be wholly
Pima Basket with Pseuoo Cross
(swastika) Formed Adventi-
tiously OF THE Interspaces of
Four SCROLL-FRET UNITS. (t-i«)
Silver Cross ( Roman
catholic) from a
Mound in Wisconsin;
i-«. ( Thomas)
BULL. 30 J
CROSSWEEKSUNG CROWS
367
distinct from those associated with the
cross through any other means.
It is thus seen that the cross naturally
and freely finds its way into the art of
primitive peoples, and that it may have
great variety of form and diversity of
meaning. There seems no reason what-
ever for supposing that the cross of the
American aborigines, in any of its phases,
is derived from the cross of the 01(1
World, or that the ideas associated with
it are at all analogous with those that
cluster about the Christian cross. It is
well known, however, that the Christian
cross was intro<luced everywhere among
the American tribes by the conquerors
and colonists as a symbol of the religion
which they sought to introduce, ancl be-
ing adopteil by the tribes it is embodied
to some extent in the post-Columbian
native art. Crosses of silver, such as
were commonly w^orn as pendants on
rosaries, are frequently recovered from
mounds and burial plac^es of the abo-
rigines.
Consult Barrett in Am. Anthrop., vii,
no 4, 1905; Beauchamp in Bull. 78, N. Y.
State Mus., 1903; Blake, The Cross. An-
cient and Modern, 1888; Brinton in Proc.
Am. Philos.Soc.,xxvi, 1889; J.O. Dorsey
(1) in nth Rep. B. A. E., 1894, (2) in The
Archaeologist, 1894; Fletcher in Rep. Pea-
body Mus., Ill, 1884; Holmes (I) in 20th
Rep. B. A. E., 1903, (2) in Am. Anthrop.,
II, 1889; Jones in Smithson. Rep. 1881,
1883; Kroel^r in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist., XVIII, 1902; McAdams, Records of
Ancient Races, 58, 1887; Stevenson in 8th
Rep.B. A. E., 1891; Tookerin Am. Antiq.,
XX, no. 6, 1898; Wilson in Rep. Nat. Mus.
1894,1896. (w. H. H.)
/ CrosBweekBimg ( ' the house of separa-
tion* (?). — Boudinot). A former Dela-
ware village in Burlington co., N. J.,
probably about the present Crosswicks.
A mission was established there })y
Brainerd in 1745. (j. m. )
OroMweeokes.— Doc. of 1674 in N. Y^Doc. Col. Hist.,
II. 682, 1858. CroMWMksiuig.—Boudinot, Star in
the West, 278, 1816. Oro«we«k.— Ibid., 117.
Croton-bug. The water cockroach
( BlaUa germanica)y fromCroton, the name
of a river in Westchester co., N. Y.,
which has been applied also to the metro-
I>olitan reservoir system. Tooker con-
siders the word a personal name and de-
rives it from kloltin^ in the Delaware
dialect of Algonquian, signifying * he
contends.' (a. f. c. )
Crow Bog (Kangisunka). An Oglala
Sioux chief. He took no prominent part
in the Sioux war of 1876, but in 1881 he
shot Spotted Tail in a brawl, and for
this was tried before a jury and sentenced
to be hanged, but the United States Su-
preme Court ordered his release on habeas
corpus, ruling that the Federal courts had
no jurisdiction over crimes committed on
reservations secured to Indian tribes by
treaty. Other deeds attested his fearless
nature, and when the Ghost-dance craze
emboldened the Oglala to go ujk)!! the
warpath, angered by a new treaty cutting
<lown their reservation and rations. Crow
Dog was one of the leaders of the desper-
ate Imnd that fled from Rosebud agency
to the Bad-lands and defied CJen. J. A.
Brooke's brigade. He was inclined to
yield when friendlies came to persuade
them, and when the irreconcilables
caught up their riflen to shoot the waver-
ers he drew his blanket over his head,
not wishing, as he said, to know who
would l)e guilty of slaying a brother
Dakota. When the troops still refrained
from attacking, and the most violent of
his companions saw the hopelessness of
their plight, he led his followers back to
the agency toward the cloi<e of Dec.,
1890. (F. n.)
Crowmocker (transl. of Kdg^-ahifelii/kP, a
chief's name). A former Cherokee set-
tlement (m Battle cr., which falls into
Tennessee r. bt4ow Chattanooga, Tenn.
(.I.M.)
Crow Mockers Old Place. — Koyce in 5th Kep. B.
A. E., map, 1SS7.
Crow People. A ili vision of the Crows,
distinguished from the Minesetperi. —
Culbertson in Smithson. Rt»p. 1850, 144,
1851.
Crows (trans., through French genu dcs >C >C
I'orbcanx, of their own name, Ahmroke,
crow, sparrowhawk, or bird people). A
Siouan tribe forming part of the Hidatsa
group, their separation from the Hidatsa
having taken place, as Matthews (1894)
l)elieved, within the last 200 years.
Hayden, following their tradition, placed
it a))out 177t>. According to this story
it was the result of a factional dispute
))etween two chiefs who were <lesi)er-
ate men and nejirly equal in the num-
l)er of their followers. They were then
residing on Missouri r.,and one of the two
bands which afterward l)ecame the Crows
withdrew and migrated to the vicinity of
the Rocky mts., through which region
they continued to rove until gathered on
reservations. Since their separation from
the Hidatsa their history has l)een similar
to that of most tribes of the plains, one
of i)erpt»tual war with the surrounding
tribes, their chief enemies being the
Siksika and the Dakota. At the time of
the I^wis and Clark expeilition (1804)
they dwelt chiefly on Bighorn r.;
Brown (1817) located them on the Yel-
lowstone and the e. side of the Rocky
mts.; Drake (1834) on the s. branch of
the Yellowstone, in lat. 46°, long. 105°.
Hayden (1862) wrote: '* The country
usuallv inhabited by the Crows is in and
near the Rocky mts., along the sources of
368
CROWS
[B. A. ]
Powder, Wind, and Bighorn rs., on the
8. side of the Yellowstone, as far as Lara-
mie fork on the Platte r. They are also
often found on the w. and n. side of that
river, a.s far an the Hijurce of the Mussel-
shell and as low down a.s the mouth of
the Yellow8t<me."
Accordinp to Maximilian (1843) the
tipis of the Crows were exactly like those
of the Sioux, set up without any regular
order, and on the |X)les, instead of scalps
were small pieces of colore<l cloth, chiefly
red, floating like streamers in the wind.
The camp he visited swarmed with wolf-
like dogs. They were a wandering triV)e
of hunters, making no plantations except
a few small patches of tobacco. They
lived at that time in some 400 tents and
are sai<l to have i)Ossessed l)etween 9,000
and 10,000 horses. Maximilian consid-
ered them the proudest of Indians, de-
spising the whites; "they do not, how-
ever, kill them, but often plunder them."
In stature and dress they corresponded
with the Hidatsa, and were proud of their
long hair. The women have been de-
scribed as skilful in various kinds of
work, and their shirts and dresses of big-
horn leather, as well as ther buffalo robes,
embroidered and ornamented with dyed
porcupine quills, as particularly hand-
some. The men made their weapons
very well and with much taste, especially
their large bows, covered with horn of
the elk or bighorn and often with rattle-
snake skin. The Crows have been de-
scribed as extremely superstitious, very
dissolute, and much given to unnatural
practices; they are skilful horsemen,
throwing themselves on one side in their
attacks, as is done by many Asiatic tribes.
Their dead were usually placed on stages
elevated on poles in the prairie.
The i)opulation was estimated by Lewis
and Clark (1804) at 350 lodges and 3,500
individuals; in 1829 and 1834, at 4,500;
Maximilian (1843) counted 400 tipis;
Hayden (1862) said there were formerly
about 800 lodges or families, in 1862 re-
duced to 460 lodges. Their number in
1890 was 2,287; in 1904, 1,826. Lewis
(Stat. View, 1807) said they were divided
into four bands, called by themselves
Ahaharopirnopa, Ehartsar, Noota, and
Pareescar. Culbertson (Smithson. Rep.
1850, 144, 1851 ) divides the tribe into (1)
Crow People, and (2) Minesetperi, or
Sapsuckers. These two divisions he sub-
divides into 12 bands, giving as the names
only the English e(|uivalent8. Morgan
(Anc. Soc., 159, 1877) gives the following
bands: Achepabecha, Ahachik, Ashina-
dea, Ashbochiah, Ashkanena, Booadasha,
Esachkabuk, Esekepkabuk, Hokarutcha,
Ohotdusha, Oosabotsee, Petchaleruhpaka,
and Shiptetza.
The Crows have been officially classified
as Mountain Crows and River Crows, the
former so called because of their custom
CROW WOMAN
of hunting and roaming near the moun-
tains away from Missouri r., the latter
from the fact that they left the mountain
section about 1859 and occupied the
BULL. 301
CROW TOWN CUBERO
369
country alon^ the river. There was no
ethnic, linguistic, or other difference be-
tween them. The Mountain Crows num-
bered 2,700 in 1871 and the River Crows
1,400 (Pease in Ind. Aff. Kep., 420, 1871).
Present aggregate population, 1 ,826. See
Havden, Ethnog. and Philol, Mo. Vallev,
1862; Maximihan, Trav., 1843; Dorsey
in 11th and 15th Reps. B. A. E., 1894,
1897; McGee in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897;
Simms, Traditions of the Crow^ 190^
Absaraka.— Brackett, Absaraka Ms;~ vocab.,
B. A. E., 1879. Absarakot.— Warren, Nebr. and
Ariz., 60, 1875. Abaaroka.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, 1, 259, 1861. Ab-sar'-o-kas.— Morgan in N.
Am. Rev., 47, 1870. Absarokes.— Schoolcraft. Ind.
Tribes, I, 623, 1851. Absaroki.— Am. Natur.,829,
1882. Absoroka.— Drake. Bk. Inds., x, 1848. A-i-
nun'.— Havden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Valley,
826, 1862 ('Crow people': Arapaho name). Ap-
sah-ro-kee.— Bonner, Life of Beckwourth, 298,
1856(tran8. :*sparrowhawk people'). Apsarraki.—
Everette in Pilling, Proof Sheets, 942, 1885. Apsa-
ruka.— Maximilian, Trav., 174,1843. Ap-sha-roo-
ke«. — Orig. Jour. l/cwis and (^lark, vi, 267. 1905.
Ataharoke.— Smet, Letters. 51, 1843 (trans, * crow ',
attributed to their robberies). Aub-sa'-ro-kc—
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Valley, 402,
1862 (own name: 'anything that flies'). Cor
beauB.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 103, 1905.
Oorbeaux.— Perrin du Lac, Vov. dans les Louis-
ianes, 337, 18a5. Crow Indians.— Orig. Jour. Lc^vis
and Clark, i, 189, 1904. De Oorbcau.— Clark (1804)
in Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 130, 1904. de
Ourbo.— Ibid. Gens des Oorbeau.— Lewis and Clark,
Discov.. 41, 1806 (French name), Hahderuka.—
Maximilian, Trav., 174, 1843 (Mandan name).
Haideroka.— Ibid. (Hidatsa name). Eapsa-ro-
kay.— Gebow, Sho-sho-nay Vwab., 8, 1868 (Sho-
shoni name). Hapsaroke.— Burton, City of Saints,
151, 1861. Hounena.— A. L. Kroeber, inf'n, 1905
(Arapaho name: ' crow men ' ). I-sa-po'-a.— Hay-
den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Valley, 264, 18(;2 (Sik-
sika name). Issippo'.— Tims, Blackfoot Gram,
and Diet., 125, 1889 (Siksika name: sing. IssflpfK)'-
ekulin). Kanlfitoka.— lapi Oaye, xiii, no. 9, 33,
1884 {\ ankton name: ' raven foes'). Kag-gi'-wi-
oa-*a.— Cook, MS. Yankton vocab., B. A. E., 184,
1882. Ka'-xi.— Dorsey, Winnebago MS., B.A.E.,
1886 (Winnebago name). See'-h&t-a&.— Orig. Jour.
Lewis and Clark, vi. 103, 1905. Keeheet-tas.—
M'Vickar, Hist. Exped. Lewis and Clark, i, map,
1842. Kee'-kit'-«4.— Lewis and Clark, Discov.. 41.
1806. KifinaUa.— Matthews, Hidatsa Inds., 39, 1877
(Hidatsa name: ' they who refused the paunch').
Kikartat.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 518,
1878. Kiaatsa.— Am. Naturalist, 829, Oct., 1882.
Kite.— Oiig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 130, 1904
(DoCorbeauor). Kokokiwak.— Gatschet, Fox MS.,
B. A. E., 1882 (Fox name) . Long Haired Indiana.—
Sanford, U. S., clxvii, 1819. O-e'-tun'-i-o.— Hav-
den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Valley, 290, 1862
(Cheyenne name). 0-tun-nee.— Bonner, Life of
Beckwourth, 452, 1856 (Cheyenne name: * crow').
Pir-ia-ci-ih-pin-gi.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mts.,
ii,lxxxiv, 1823 (Hidatsa name: 'crow people').
Ravin Indians.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i,
220, 1904. SU&mtahi.— HofTman in Proc. Am.
Phllos. Soc., 371, 1886 (Salish name). Sttmohi.—
Qiorda, Kalispelm Diet., pt. 2, 81, 1879 (Kalispel
name). Btemtohi.— Gatschet, Salish MS., B. A. E. ,
1884 (Salish name). Btimk.— Gatschet, Okinagin
MS.,B.A.E.,1884(Okinaganname). UpOrattkaa.—
Browne in Beach, Ind. Miscel.,83,1877. ITpsaro-
Mt.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 470, 1878.
up-Bi-ri-ki.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., ii,lxxix,
1823 (own name ) . Vp-shar-look-kar.— Orig. Jour.
Lewis and Clark (1806), v, 21, 1905 (Chopunnish
name). ITpMok.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv,
181, 1854. up-sor-ah-kay.— Anon. Crow MS. vocab..
B. A. E. Yax-ka'-a.— Gatschet, Wandot MS., B.
A. E., 1881 (Wyandot name: ' crow ' ).
Crow Town (trans, of Kdg(iny\ 'crow
place,* from M^gti 'crow,' yl locative).
Bull. 30—05 24
A former Cherokee town on the left
bank of Tennessee r., near the mouth of
Raccoon cr., Cherokee co., n. e. Ala.
It was one of the so-called **five lower
towns" built by those Cherokee, called
Chickamauga, who were hostile to the
American cause during the Revolutionary
period, and whose settlements farther up
the river had been destroyed by Sevier
and Campbell in 1782. The population
of Crow Town and the other lower set-
tlements was augmente<l by Creeks, Shaw-
nee, and w^hite Tories until it reached a
thousand warriors. The towns were de-
stroyed in 1794. See Mooney in 19th
Rep. B. A. E., 54, 1900.
Crow-wing. Mentioned by Neill (Hist.
Minn., 386, 1858) as one of the Chippewa
bands that took part in the treaty of
1826. There was a village of the same
name at the mouth of Crow Wing r., in
X. central Minnesota, which was the
home of Hole-in-the-Day in 1838.
Cnabnridnrch. A former Maricopa
rancheria on the Rio Gila, Ariz. ; visited
by Father Sedelmair in 1744.— Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 366, 1889.
Cnactatangh. A village, probably be-
longing to the Patuxent, on the e. bank
of Patuxent r., in Anne Arundel co., Md.,
in 1608.— Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map,
repr. 1819.
Cnampis. Mentioned as a division of
the Faraon Apache.
Cuampes. — Orozco y Berra, (leog.. 59, 1864. Cuam-
pis.— Villa Sefior y Sanchez, Theatro Am., ii,
413. 1748.
Gnanrabi. (riven as the name of a Hopi
village in 1598 in connection with Naybi
(Orai))e), Xumupamf (8humoi)ovi), and
Esperiez (Onate, 1598, in Doc. In^d., xvi,
137, 1871). Not identified.
Cnbac. A former rancheria, probably
of the Papago, visited by Father CJanros
in 1771; situated in the neighborhood of
San Francisco Atf, w. from the present
Tucson, s. Ariz. Distinct from Tubac.
Cubac.— Arricivita (1791) (juoted by Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 387, 1H89. Cubic— Orozco y
Berra, Geog., 348, 1864.
Cnbero (from Pedro Rodriguez Cul)ero,
governor of New Mexico, 1697-1703).
Formerly a pueblo, established in 1697
by rebel Queres from Santo Domingo,
Cieneguilla, and Cochiti, 14 m. n. of Aco-
ma, at the site of the present town of that
name in New Mexico. It was probably
abandoned in the early part of the 18tn
century (Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex.,
221, 1889). According to Lagima tradi-
tion Cubero was formerly a pueblo of the
Lacuna and Acoma people, who were
driven out by the Mexican colonists a
century ago. ( f. w. h. )
Oovera.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., ^81, 1889
(or Cubero). Cover©.— Emory, Recon., 133, 1848.
Oubcro.— Bancroft, op. cit. Ouvarro.— Hughes,
Doniphan's Exped,. 149, 1848. Govero.— Eastman,
map in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 24-25, 1854.
Punyeestye.— Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 83,1891.
370
CUBO GUA8IBAVIA CUEVA PINTADA
[b. a. e.
Pttnyitsiama.— Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895
(Lagunaname).
Cubo Ouasibavia. A former rancheria,
appaiently Papago, visited by Kino and
Mange in 1701; situated in a volcanic
desert in n. w. Sonora, Mexico, between
the Rio Salado and the Gulf of California,
2 m. from the shore.
Oubo Ouasibavia. —Kino (1701) quoted by Bancroft,
No. Mex. States, i, 495, 18»4. Duburoopota.— Ibid.
Cuchendado. A Texan tribe, the last
that Cabeza de Vaca met before he left the
Gulf coast to continue inland. — Cabeza
de Vaca, Nar. (1542), Smith trans., 137,
1871.
Cuchillones (Span: *knifers,' 'knife
people'). A former Costanoan division
or village e. of San Francisco bay, Cal.
In 1795, according to Engelhard t (Fran-
ciscans in Cal., 1897), they became in-
volved in a quarrel with the neophytes of
San Francisco mission, whereupon their
rancheria was attacked by the Spaniards.
Cuohian.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Cuchiyag'a ( ' place where there has l)een
suffering*). A former Calusa village on
one of the keys on the s. w. coast of Flor-
ida, about 1570.
Ouohiaga.— Fontaneda (m. 1575) in French, Hist.
Ck)ll. La., 2d s., II, 256, 1875. Ouchiyaga.— Fonta-
neda, Mem., Smith trans., 19, 1854.
Cucho. An Indian province or settle-
ment of New Mexico, noted, with Cibola
(Zufli), Cicuich (Pecos), and others, in
Ramusio, Nav. et Viaggi, in, 455, map,
1565. Probably only another form of
Cicuich or Cicuy^, duplication being com-
mon in early maps of the region.
Cuchuta. A former Opata pueblo and
the seat of a Sjianish mission founded in
1658; situated in x. e. Sonora, Mexico,
near Fronteras; pop. 227 in 1678, 58 in
1730. It was abandoned on account of
depreilations by the Suma and Jano, war-
like Mexican tribes.
Chu-ui-ohu-pa.— Bandelierin Arch. Inst. Papers,
IV, 59, 1890 (same?). Ouohute.— Doc. of 1730 cited
by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 514, 1884. BanFran-
oiaco Javier Ouohuta.— Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist.
Mex., 4th 8., Ill, 369, 1857.
Cuchuveratzi (* valley or torrent of the
fish called matalote [the Gila trout].'—
Bandelier). A former Opata settlement
a few miles n. e. of Fronteras, on the
headwaters of the Rio Bavispe, in the
N. E. corner of Sonora, Mexico. — Bande-
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 520, 1892.
Cuolon. Given as a Cherokee town in a
document of 1799 (Royce in 5th Rep.
B. A. E., 144, 1887). Not identified.
Cuoomogna. A former Gabrieleflo ran-
cheria in Los Angeles co. , Cal. , now called
Cucamonga.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
June 8, 1860.
Ooco Kongo.— Pac. R. R. Rep., iii, pt. 3, 34, 1856.
Ottoamunfabit.— Oaballeria, Hist. San Bernardino
Val., 19^. Cuoomogna.— Ried (1852) quoted by
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860.
CucoompherB. Mentioned as a tribe liv-
ing in the mountains near Mohave r., s. e.
Cal., not speaking the same language as
the Mohave or the Paiute (Antisell in
Pac. R. R. Rep., vii, 104, 1854). They
were perhaps Serranos.
Guoompnert.— Taylor in Cal. Fanner, Jan. 31, 1862
(misprint).
Cnoulato. A Yuman tribe living w. of
lower Rio Colorado in 1701, when they
were visited by Father Kino. Consag
(1746) classes them with the gulf or
southern divisions of the Cocopa.
Guculato. — Venegas, Hist. Cal., i, 58, 1769. Ouou-
lute«.— Taylor in Browne, Res. Pac. Slope, app.,
54, 1869.
Cucurpe. A Eudeve pueblo, contain-
ing also some Tegui Opata, and the seat
of a Spanish mission subordinate to Ari-
vechi, founded in 1647; situated on the
headwaters of the Rio San Miguel de
Horcasitas, the w. branch of the Rio
Sonora, Mexico, about 25 m. s. e. of Mag-
dalena. Pop. 329 in 1678, 179 in 1730.
It is still inhabited by Opata. (f. w. h. )
Ouourpe.— Doc. of 1730 cited by Bancroft, No.
Mex. States, i, 513, 1884. Ouourpo.— Kino, map
(1702) in Stocklein, Neue Welt-Bott, 74, 1T26.
Reyes de Ouourpe.— Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist.
Mex., 4tb 8., Ill, 344, 1857. Santos BoTea Ouourpe.—
Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 245, 1884.
Cudurimnitac. A former Maricopa ran-
cheria on the Rio Gila, s. Ariz., visited
by Father Sedelmair in 1744. — Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 366, 1889.
Cuercomaclie. Apparently a division or
rancheria of the Yavapai on one of the
heads of Diamond cr., near the Grand
Canyon of the Colorado, Ariz., in the
18th century. They lived n. e. of the
Mohave, of whom they were enemies,
and are said to have spoken the same
language as the Havasupai. (p. w. h. )
Yabipait Oueroomaohet.— Garc^ (1776), Diary, 281,
410, 1900. Yavipai oueroomache.— Orozco y Berra,
Geog., 41, 1864 (after Oarers).
Cuemo Verde (Span.: 'green horn*).
A celebrated Comanche warrior who led
various raids against the Spanish settle-
ments along the Rio Grande in New
Mexico in the latter part of the 18th cen-
tury. A force of 645 men, including 85
soldiers and 259 Indians, was led against
him by Juan de Anza, governor of New
Mexico, in 1778, and in a fight that took
place 95 leagues n. e. of Santa Fe, Cuemo
Verde was killed, together with 4. of his
subchiefs, his "high priest," his eldest
son, and 32 of his warriors. His name
is commemorated in Greenhorn r. and
mt., Colo. (f. w. h.)
Cueva Pintada (Span.: * painted cave,*
on account of numerous pictographs on
its walls). A natural cave in the s. wall
of the Potrero de las Vacas, about 25 m.
w. of Santa Fe, N. Mex., anciently used
for ceremonial purposes and still one of
the points to which ceremonial pilgrim-
ages are made by the Queres. A few
cliff-dwellings of the excavated type occur
near by in the face of the cliff overlook-
ing the Caiiada de la Cuesta Colorada.
The small excavated rooms within and
BULL. 30]
CUIAPAIPA CUMUMBAH
371
about the rim of the cave were probably
not used for places of abode, but rather
as ebrines where idols and other ceremon-
ial objects were deposited. ( k. l. ii. )
T«^ki-a-ttui-yi.— Liimmis in Scribner's Mag.. %,
1893. Tiikyititani*.— Hodge, field notes, B. A. E.,
1895. Tiek-Ut-a-tanyi.— Bandelier, in Arch. Inst.
Papers, iv, 156, 1892 (Queres name).
Cniapaipa. A rancheria and reservation
of 36 Mission Indians in s. California.
Their land, consisting of 880 acres, is an
unproductive waterless tract 125 m. from
Mission Tule River agency.
Ottiapaipa.— Lummis in Out West, xxi, 578, 1904.
Ouyapipa.— Ind. Afl. Rep., 175, 1902. Ouyapipe.—
Lummis, op. clt. (given as common but incorrect
form). Ouaypipa.— Ind. Afl. Rep.. 146, 1903.
Cairimpo. A Mayo settlement on the
Rio Mayo, between Navajoa and Echojoa,
s. w. Sonora, Mexico.
Oonoepeion Ouuimpo.— Orozeo y Berra, Geog., 356.
1864. Oorimpo.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein,
Neue Welt-Bott, 1726. Oouiximpo,— Orozco v Berra,
op. cit., map. Onriaghoa.— Hardy, Travels, 438,
Cuitciabaqui. A former rancheria of the
P&pago, visited by Father Kino in 1697;
situated on the w. bank of the Rio Santa
Cruz, in the vicinity of the present Tuc-
son, s. Ariz. According to Father Och a
mission was established at the Papago set-
tlement of **Santa Catharina'* in 1756 by
Father Mittendorf, but he was forced to
abandon it, evidentlv shortly afterward,
on account of cruel treatment by the
natives. This is doubtless the same.
(p. W. H.)
8. Oathari]ia,~Och (1756). Nachrichten, i. 71, 1809.
Sta. Oatalina.— Kino, map (1701) in Bancroft, Ariz,
and N.Mex.. 360. 1889. BtaCatalinaCuitoiabaqui.—
-aemal (1697) quoted by Bancroft, ibid.. 356. Bto.
Oatarina.— Mange, ibid. , 358. Sto Oatarina Oaitua-
gaba.— Ibid.
Cuitoas. A tribe mentioned in connec-
tion with the Escanjaques (Kansa).
Their habitat and identity are unknown. —
Duro, Don Diego de Peilalosa, 57, 1882.
Cnitoat A former settlement, evi-
dently of the Papago, between San Xavier
del Bac and Gila r., s. Ariz; visited bv
Father Garc^s in 1775. The name has
been confused with Aquitun.
Coitoa.— Font (1776) quoted by Coues, Garc^s Diarv,
1, 84, 1900. Ouitoat.— Arricivita, Cr6nica Seraf . , ii ,
416,1792. Ouytoa.— Font, op cit. Quitcac.— Coues,
op cit. Qaitoa.-<3arc48 (1775), Diarv, 65, 1900.
Ouitoac-Ibid., 64. • '
Cnjant. Apparently a former Papago
rancheria in n. w. Sonora, Mexico, between
the mouth of the Gila and the settlement
of Sonoita in 1771.— Ctoues, Garc^s Diarv,
37, 1900.
Oultns-ood. A name of the blue, or
bufialo, cod {Ophiodon donqaius), an im-
portant food fish of the Pacific coast from
Santa Barbara to Alaska; so called from
cufttw, signifying 'worthless,' in the Chi-
nook jai^gon, a word ultimately derived
from the Chinook dialect of the Chinook-
an stock and in frequent use on the Pacific
coast. (a. F. c.)
Cumaro. A Papago village in s. Arizona,
neartheSonoraborder,having200familie8
in 1871.
Camaro.— Ind. Aff. Rep.. 135, 1865. Ouxnaro.— Tay-
lor in Cal. Farmer, June 19, 1863. Oumera.—
Browne, Apache Country, 291, 1869 (misquoting
Poston) . Cumero.— Poston in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1863.
385, 1864. Del Cumero.— Bailey, ibid., 208, 1858.
Cummaquid. A village subject to the
Wampanoag, formerly at Cummaquid
harbor, Barnstable co., Mass. Qvan-
nougli, from whom Hyannis takes its
name, was chief in 1621-23. Hyanaes
village still existed in 1755. ( j. m. )
Oummaauid.— Mourt (1622) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll.. 2(1 8., IX, 53, 1822. Hyanaes. -Douglaas, Sum-
mary, 1, 188, 1755. Wayanaes,— Ibid.
Gumpa. Located as a Navaho settle-
ment by Pike (Exped., 8(1 map, 1810).
It is more likely either the name of a lo-
cality or a ccmfounding of the Kwiuni-
pus division of the Paiute of .s. w. Utah.
Cumptis. A Teguima ( )pata pueblo and
the seat of a Spanish mission founded
in 1544; situated on the Rio Soyopa (or
Moctezuma), n. of Oposura, lat. 30° 20^,
N. E. Sonora, Mexico. Pop. 887 in 1678,
146 in 1780.
Asuncion Amipaa.—Doc. of 1730 quoted by Ban-
croft, No. Mex. States, 246, 1884 (or Comupas).
Comupas.— Ibid. Cumpas.— Hardy, Travels. 437,
18'29. Oumupaa.— Ribas (1645) quoted by Bandelier
in Arch. Inst. Papers, iii, 58, 1890.
Cumshewa (corrupteil from GiYimheicay
or Gd^msewa, the name of its chief). A
former Haida town at the n. entrance of
Cumshewa inlet, Queen Charlotte ids.,
Brit. Col. By the natives it was known
as H Ikenul. It was almost entirely occu-
pied by the Stawas-haidagai, q. v. Accord-
ing to John Work's estimate, 1836-41,
there were then 20 houses in the place
and 286 people. This agrees closely with
that still given by Cumshewa people as
the former number. Cumshewa was one
of the last towns abandoned when all the
Indians of this region went to Skidegate. —
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905.
Casawer.— Do\^'nie in Jour. Rov. Geog. Poc., xxxr,
251. 1861. Oom*hewar».— Dunn, Hist. Oreg., 281,
1844. Crouwer. — Downie, op. cit. Oumshawaa. —
Scouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc, xi, 219, 1841.
Cum8hewa.~Dawson. Q. Charlotte Ids., 168b, 1880.
Cumshewes.— Scouler in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond.,
1, 233, 1848. Oumshuwaw.— Can. Ind. Aff., 128, 1879.
Oumshewa.— Deans, Tales from Hiderv, 82, 1899.
Kit-ta-was.— Dawson, Q. Charlotte Ids., 168, 1880
(Tsimshlan name). Koumohaouaa.— Duflot de
Mofras, Oreg., i, 337, 1844. Kumthaliaa.—Latham
in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856. Kumshe-
wa.— Dawson, op. cit., 168. Kumahiwa.— Tolmie
and Dawson, Yocabs. Brit. Col., 26, 1884.
lk«'nAl.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905 (Haida
name). TUdnool.— Dawson, op. cit., 168 (Haida
name).
Camambah. A division of the Ute,
formerly living in Salt Lake, Weber, and
Ogden valleys, Utah. They are said to
have been a mixture of Ute and Shoshoni,
the Ute element largely predominating
in their language; pop. 800 in 1885. They
are not now separately enumerated.
Oawaupugoa.— Collins in Ind. Aff. Rep., 125. 1861.
372
CUMUBIPA OUQUIAR A.CHI
[b. a. b.
Oum-i-um-hu.— Hurt, ibid., 1856. 230, 1857. Omn-
min-tahi.— Head, ibid.. 149, 1868. Onmpet.—
Pino, Noticias Hist. N. Mex., 88, 1849. Onmum-
bfth.— West (1858) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 29. 37th Cong..
2d sess., 113, 1862. Oum-ttin-pahB.— Simpson (1859) ,
Exped. Across Utah,34, 460, 1876. Oun-i-i " "
Hurt in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 228, 1857. Komumbar.—
- " - " -Rep. : ■ *
w«M.— mi.v j» Axid. An. Rep. xuv^^«.,^^^^ v^^-^
print for Weber). Weber River Tutat.— Burton,
Doty in Ind. AIT. Hep. 1864. 176, 1865. Treaber
UtM.— Hurt in Ind.^ff. Rep. 1855,197,1856 (mis-
print 10.
City of Saints, 578. 1861. Weber-UtM.— Cooley in
Ind. Aff. Rep., 17, 1865.
Cnmuripa. A Nevome pueblo and the
seat of a Spanish mission f()unded in 1619;
situattMl on the w. tri})utary of the Rio
Yaqiii, about 12 ni. x. x. e. of Buena VMs-
ta, and about 20 m. x. of Cocori, in So-
nora, Mexico; i>op. 450 in 1678 and 165
in 1730, l)ut the village contained only 4
families in 1849. It is now practically a
white Me^cican town. The inhabitants,
also callecl Cumuripa, probably spoke a
dialect slightly different from the Ne-
vome proper, (f. w. h. )
Comoripa.— kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue
Wolt-Bott, 74, 1726. Comurip*.— Rivera (1730)
(luoted by Bancroft. No. Mex. States, 1,513, 1884.
(Cumuripa. — Kscudero, Noticias Son. y Sin., 99,
1849. S. Pablo Comuripa.— Zapata (1678) quoted
bv Bancroft, op. cit., 246. B. redro,— Sonora Cat-
alogo (juoted by Bancroft, ibid,
Cuneil. A tribe, evidently Yuman, de-
scribed by Garc<^*8 in 1775-76 (Diary, 444,
450, 1900) as inhabiting the territory be-
tween San Diego, s. Cal, and the mouth
of the Rio Colorado. They were friendly
with the Cocopa. From their habitat
and the similarity in their names they
would seem to l)e identical with the Com-
eya, but Garc(''8 mentions the latter, under
the name Quemayit, as if distinct. On
the map of Father Pedro Font (1777),
who was a companion of Father CJarces,
the Cuneil are located in x. Lower Califor-
nia, ))etween lat. 31° and 32°. According
to (iatschet the name Kunyilf or Kuyieyily
in the Comeya dialect, signifies *all men,'
* people.' (f. w. h.)
Ounai.— Orozoo y Berra, Geog., 353, 1864, Oun-
ye«l. —Fon t ( 1777 ), map in Cones, Garc<^s Diary , 1 900.
Ctmitoacahel ('water of the great
rocks'). A rancheria, probably Cochimi,
connected with Purfsima mission, which
was near the w. coast of Lower California,
about lat. 26° 20^.— Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th
8., V, 188, 1857.
Cnnquilipinoy. Mentioned as a pueblo
of the province of Atripuy, in the region
of the lower Rio Grande, N. Mex., in
1598.— Oilate (1598) in Doc. In^d., xvi,
115, 1871.
Cnpheag ('a place shut in,' from kuppiy
'closed'). The Algonquian name of
Stratford, Fairfield co.. Conn. There
was probably a village of the same name
there before the English settlement in
1639.— Benj. Trumbull, Hist. Conn. , i, 109,
1818; J. H. Trumbull, Ind, Names Conn.,
13, 1881.
Cnppanaugnimit. Mentioned as if a
Pequot village in 1637, probably in New
London co.. Conn.
Gappmiaiifaimit.— Williams (1637) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 4th s., VI, 201. 1852. Ouppmrnaoffaiuiit.—
Ibid.
Cups. See Receptacles. .
CnpBtonoB. Blocks of stone unworked
except for small cavities made in them.
These cups vary from a rough pecking,
probably the initial stage, to smooth,
nemispherical depressions 2 in. in diam-
eter; at the bottom of many of the
latter is a secondary pit as though made
with a flint drill or gouge. They range
in numl)er from 1 to 20, though rarely
one stone may contain 50 or 100. In a
majority of cases they are of sandstone.
On irregular blocks the pits are on one
side only, extending over less than half
the surface; on flat slabs they are always
on both sides. Many theories have been
advanced to account for these cupstones;
but while any suggestion mav apply to
a few specimens, it will not nt the ma-
jority. There is a prevalent idea that
they were used for cracking nuts in, for
which reason the blocks are sometimes
called nutstones; but only
casual inspection is neces-
sary to prove this belief in-
correct. The holes are not
often on the same level, and
in any case it would be nec-
essary to pick the
stone up and turn it
overeachtime itwas
used. Theyarealso
supposed to be for
grinding paint, or to
steady drills, spin-
dles, or firesticks;
but it is evident that
only one pit could cupstonm; oh.o. (i-io)
be use<l at a time for any of these pur-
poses. Undou})tedly the real explana-
tion awaits determination. Cupstones
are the most al>undant and widespread
of the larger relics. They not only occur
on many village sites but are scattered at
random over the country, often in places
where diligent search fails to disclose ab-
original relics of any other form. See
Problematical objects. Consult Fowke in
13th Rep. B. A.E., 1896; Ran inCont. N.
A. Ethnol., V, 1882. (g. f.)
Caquiarachi. A former pueblo of the
Teguima Opata and the seat of a Spanish
mission founded in 1653; situated about
6 m. southward from Fronteras, n. e.
Sonora, Mexico. Pop. 380 in 1678; 76 in
1730. When visited by Bartlett in 1850
it was deserted, apparently on account of
the Apache. ( f. w. h. )
Oocaiaraohi.~Bartlett, Personal Narrative, ij^TS,
1854. Oaquiaraohi.~Bandelier in Arch. Hist.
Papers, iv, 529, 1892 (wrongly identified vriih
Fronteras) . Ouquiaratsi. — Orozcp y Berra, Geog. ,
343. 1864. Gaquiariohi.~Mange (ca.l700) quoted
by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 233. 1884. Ou-
qnioraohi.— Hamilton, Mexican Handbook, 47,
1883. Ban Ignacio Ouqiuaraohi.— Zapata (1678)
quoted by Bancroft, op. cit., 246.
BULL. 30 1
CUEEPO — CUSIHUlRIACfllC
373
Cnrepo. — A Chinipa rancheria in Chi-
huahua, Mexico, in 1601. — Bancroft, No.
Mex. States, i, 211. 1886.
Curly Head (BabiMgandlbe). A chief
of the Mississippi (or Sandy lake) Chip-
pewa, born about the middle of the 18th
century, on the s. shore of L. Superior.
He removed to the upper Mississim)! about
1800 with a number of the Crane ( Businau-
see) gens, of which he was a member, and
settlSi near the site of the present Crow
Wing, Minn. Here his band was aug-
mented by the bravest warriors and har-
diest hunters of the eastern Chippewa
until it became a bulwark against the
Sioux raiders who hitherto had harried
the Chippewa as far as the shores of L.
Michigan. The white traders lavished
gifts upon him, which he freely shared
with his followers. His lodge was always
well supphed with meat, and the hungry
were welcomed. Tlie peace and friend-
ship that generally prevailed between the
white pioneers and the Chippewa were
due chiefly to Curly Head's restraining
influence. He was visited in 1805 by
Lieut. Z. M. Hke, who passed the winter
in his neighborhood. He died while re-
turning from the conference, known as
the treat)^ of Prairie du Chien, held Aug.
19, 1825, in which his name appears as
**Babaseeke(Midase, Curling Hair." Ac-
cording to Warren (Hist. Ojibway, 47,
1885) he was both civil and war chief of
his people.
Casabo. A collective term used to
designate the Combahee, Coosa, Edisto,
Etiwaw, Kiawaw, St Helena, Stono,
Wapoo, and Westo Indians, fonnerly
living between Charleston, S. C, and
Savannah r. Their territory was the
Chicora of Ayllon and other early Span-
ish adventurers, and it is probatle that
some, if not most of the tribes mentioned,
belonged to the Uchean stock. They
early became reduced through the raids
of Spanish slavers and the connivance
of the colonists. In Jan., 1715, they
were reported to number 295 inhabitant
in 4 villages, but during the Yamasi war
in that vear they and other tril)es were
expelle<i or exterminated. See Mooney,
Siouan Tribes of the East, Bull. B. A. pl,
86, 1894.
OoMaboyt.— Doc. of 1719 in Rivera, Hist. S. C, 93,
1874. OuMibeet.— Rivera, Hist. 8. C, 38, 1856.
GuaMbM.~Simras, Hist. S. C, 5C, 1860.
Cusarare (corruption of IMrarCy from
usdkaj *eagle' ). A small Tarahumare ran-
cheria situated a short distance s. of
Bocoyna, on the e. slope of the Sierra
Madre, in lat. 28°, w. Chihuahua, Mex.
— Lumholtz (1) in Scribner's Mag., xvi,
40, 1894; (2) Unknown Mex., i, 136, 1902.
Cnsawatee (Kusdu'etiyl, *old Creek
place*). A former important Cherokee
settlement on lower Coosawatee r., in
Gordon co., Ga.
Coosawatee.— Mooney, in 19th Rep. B. A.£.,526,
1900, Coosawaytee.— Doc. of 1799 quoted by Rovce
in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 144. 1887. Kuaiwetiyl.—
Mooney, op. cit. (proper Cherokee name). Ten-
Miwattee.— Doe. quoted by Mooney, ibid.
Cnscarawaoc ('place of making white
beads. ' — Tooker ) . A division of the Nan-
ticoke; mentioned by Capt. John Smith
as a tribe or iHM>ple living at the head
of Nanticoke r., in Maryland and Del-
aware, and numbering perhaps 800 in
1608. Their language was different from
that of the Powhatan, Conestoga, and
At<iuanachuke. Ileckewelder believed
them to be a division of the Nanticoke,
the correctness of which Bozman ( Marv-
land, I, 112-121, 1837) has clearly dem-
onstrated. For a discussion of the name
see Tooker, Algoncjuian Series, ix, 65,
1901. (J. M.)
Cascarawaoke.— Simons in Smith ( 1629) ,Virginia,i,
178, repr. 1819. OuBkarawaooka.— Bozman, Mary-
land, I, 110, 1837. Huokarawaocka.— Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, vi, 131,1857. Kuscarawaoka.— Smith
(1629), op. cit,, 74. Kuacarawocks.— Brinton, Le-
nape Le^., 23, 1885. Suskaranaooke.— I*rier in
Purchas, Pilgrimes, iv, 1713, 1626, Kuakarawack.—
Smith's map (1615) in Purchas, ibid., p. 1692. Nus-
karawaoka.— Strachey (m, 1612), Virginia, 41, 1849.
Cnsoatomia. See Kiskitomas.
CuBCowilla. The principal Seminole
town onCuscowilla lake, Alachua co., Fla.
It was established by Creeks from Oconee,
Ga. , who first settleil at AlachuaOld Town
but aban<loned it on account of its un-
healthfulne»*. — Bartram (Travels, 1791)
found 80 houses there in 1775.
Cushaw. See ('ashaw.
Cnshna. A division of the Maiduon the
upper waters of the k. fork of Yuba
r., Sierra co., Cal.; y>op. about (KX) in
1850.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 124, 1850; Taylor
in Cal. Farmer, Mav 31, 1801.
Cnshook. A band residing in 1806 on
the E. bank of Willamette r., Greg., just
below the falls, their numlx»restimate<l at
650. Probably a branch of theC^hinookan
tril)e of Clowwewalla.
Caahhooks.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, iv,233,
1905. Oaahook.— Lewis and ('lark, Exped., ii, 216,
1814. CUahhooka.— Cass (1834) quoted by School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, ni, 609, 1853. Cuahhooka.— Lewis
and (Hark. Exped., ii, 474, 1814. Ouahhouka.—
Nouv. Ann. Voy., xii, map, 1821.
GnshtiiBha ( A'Vix//////-a^/m, 'fleas are
there' ). A former Choctaw town on the
s. side of Cushtiuiha cr., about 3 m. s. w.
of the old town of Yazoo, Neshoba co.,
Miss. — Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ.,
VI, 431, 1902.
Oaatachaa.— Charlevoix, Hist. Nouv. France. Shea
ed., VI, 104, 1872. Ouotaohaa.— Romans, Florida,
map, 1775. Ouataohaa.— West Fla. map. ca. 1775.
Guatuaha.~Halbert in Ala. Hist. Soc. Trans., 73,
1899.
CuBihiiiriachio (* where the upright pole
is'). A former Tarahumare settlement,
now a white Mexican town, on the head-
waters of the Rio San Pe<lro, lat. 28° 12^
long. 106° 50', w. central Chihuahua,
Mexico.
Ouaihuirachio. — Orozco y Berra, Geog., map, 1864.
Ouaihuiriaohic— Lumholtz in Scribner's Mag.,
XVI, 32, July, 1894.
374
OUSSEWAGO CUYAMUS
tB. A. B.
CnBBewago. A village of the Seneca
and of remnants of other wanderine
tribes, situated in 1750 where Ft T^ Boeul
was afterward built, on the site of the
present Waterford, Erie co., Pa.
Oaiewago.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist. , x, 259, 1858. Cub-
sewaso.— Gist (1753) in Mans. Hist. Soc. Coll.. 3d s.,
V, 104, 1836.
GuBtaloga's Town. The Delawares had
two villages, each known as Custaloga's
Town, from the name of its chief, prob-
ably one and the same person. The first
village was near French cr., opposite
Franklin, Venango co.. Pa., in 1760; the
other was on Walhonding r., near Kill-
bucks cr., in Coshocton co., Ohio, in 1766.
The chief of this second village was chief
of the Unalachtigo Delawares, and had
probably removed from the first village
about 1763. The name is also written Cos-
teloga, Custalaga, Custologa, Custologo,
Kustaloga. (j. m.)
Catalohich. A tribe or subtribe that
visited the Avavare, in whose country
Cabeza de Vaca (Smith trans., 72-74,
84, 1851) stayed during the latter part
of his sojourn in Texas in 1528-34. They
spoke a language different from that •
of the Avavare, and lived inland near
the Maliacon and the Susola. Learn-
ing of Cabeza de Vaca's success in treat-
ing the sick, the CiitaUrhich applied to
him for help, and in return for his serv-
ices gave ** flints a palm and a half in
length, with which they cut,*' and which
** were of higti value among them.'' They
showed their gratitude also by leaving
with him, as they departed, their supply
of prickly pears, one of their staple foods.
Although the Cutalchich dwelt in the
region occupied in part by agricultural
Caddoan tribes, they seem not to have
cultivated the soil, but to have subsisted
on roots and fruit«s, a.'^ did the tribes
nearer the coast. Their ethnic relations
are not determined. (a. c. f. )
Ooltaloholohes.— Cabeza de Vaca (1529), Smith
trans., 137, 1871. Cutalohes.— Ibid., note, 127.
Outalohiohes.— Ibid., note, 139. Outiialchuohes.—
Ibid., 121.
Gatans. A name used by Rafinesque
(introd. to Marshall, Ky., i, 23, 1824) for
the people of an imaginary prehistoric
empire of North America.
Catchogue. The present Cutchogue in
Suffolk CO., Long id., N. Y., occupies the
site of a former Indian village, probably
of the same name, which was in the
Corchaug territory. — Thompson, Long
Island, I, 392, 1843.
Catsjajock.— Stuyvesant (1647) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hwt., XIV, 79, 1883. Oat»jeyick.--Doc. of 1645,
ibid., 60.
Cnteoo. A former division of the Va-
rohio in w. Chihuahua, Mexico, probably
in Chinipas valley. — Orozco y Berra,
Geog., 58, 1864.
Cntespa. A Calusa village on the s. w.
coast of Florida, about 1570. — ^Fontaneda
Memoir {ca. 1575), Smith trans., 19, 1864.
Gatha Aimethaw. A former Choctaw
village placed by Romans (Florida, map,
1775) in the present Kemper co.. Miss.,
on the headwaters of an affluent of Suki-
natcha cr.
Cnthi Uokehaca (possibly a corruption
of Kaii Oka-hikiay * thorn-bush standing
in water'). A former Choctaw town
which seems to have been near the mouth
of Parker cr., which flows into Petickfa
cr., Kemper co.. Miss. — Halbert in Miss.
Hist. Soc. Publ., VI, 426, 1902.
Ottthi ITskehaoa. — Romans, Florida, map, 1775.
Cnts. An unidentified band of the
Sihasapa. — Culbertson in Smithson. Rep.
1850, 141, 1851.
Dm Coupes.— Culbertson, ibid.
Cuttatawomen. According to Capt.
John Smith, the name of 2 tribes of tne
Powhatan confederacy in Virginia in
1608, each having a principal village of
the same name. One vilU^ was on the
Rappahannock, at Corotoman r., in Lan-
caster CO., and the tribe numberiBd about
120. The other was about Lamb cr., on
the Rappahannock, in King George co.,
and the tribe numbered about 80. (j. m. )
Outtatawoman.— Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map,
repr. 1819. Outtatewomen.— Smith, ibid., 117.
Guttawomans.— Jefferson, Notes, 139, 1801.
Cnyamaoa. A former Dieguefio village
about 50 m. e. n. e. from San Diego mis-
sion, s. Cal.— Hayes (1850) quoted by
Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 458, 1882.
Cuyamunqne. A former Tewa pueblo
on Tesuque cr., between Tesuque and
Pojoaque, about 15 m. n. w. of Santa F^,
N. Mex. With Nambe and Jacona the
population was about 600 in 1680, when
the Pueblo rebellion, which continued
with interruptions until 1696, resulted in
the abandonment of the villa^ in the
latter year and the settlement of its surviv-
ing inhabitants in the neighboring Tewa
pueblos. In 1699 the site of Cuyamunque
was granted to Alonzo Rael de Aguilar, and
regranted in 1731 to Bernardino de Sena,
who had married the widow of Jean
I'Arch^v^ue, the murderer of Ia Salle.
It is now a '* Mexican** hmnlet See
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, rv, 85,
1892; Meline, Two Thousand Miles, 231,
1867. (f. w. H.)
Ooyamanque.— Ck>pe in Ann. Rep. Wheeler Surv.,
app. LL, 76, 1876. Ouya Kangue.— Vetancurt, Tea-
tro Mex. , in, 317, 1871. Ouyamanque. — Domenecb,
Deserts, i, 443, 1860. Ouvammique.— Vargas (1602)
a noted by Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 199, 1889.
ayamonfe. — Pullen in Harper's Weekly, 771, Oct.
4, 1890. Cuya-mun-gre.— Bandelier in Ritch. New
Mexico, 201, 1885. Ouyamungu^. — Buschmann,
Neu-Mexico, 230, 1858. Ouyamunaue.— Bandelier
in Arcb. Inst. Papers, i, 23, 1881. uuyo, Monque.—
Davis, El Gringo, 88, 1857. Ku Ya-mung-ge.— .
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 85, 1892.
GayamuB. A Chumashan village for-
merly on the mesa near Santa Barbara,
Cal.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863.
BULL. 30]
CUYUHA80MI DAIYUAHL-LANAS
375
Cnynliasomi ('fish people,' from cuyu
•fish,' hcuomi *peopleM. A phratry of
the ancient Timucua of Florida. — Pareja
(1617) quoted by Gatschet in Proc. Am.
Fhilos. Soc., XVII, 492, 1878.
Cnyi^asoiniaroqiii. A clan of the Cuyu-
hasomi phratry of the Timucua of Flor-
ida.— Pareja (1617) quoted by Gatschet
in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc, xvii, 492, 1878.
Cnyuhasomiele. A clan of the Cuyuha-
somi phratry of the Timucua of Florida. —
Pareja (1617) quoted by Gatschet in Proc.
Am. Philos. Soc., xvii, 492, 1878.
Baahl. The Earth or Sand clan of
Jemez pueblo, N. Mex. A correspond-
ing clan existed also at the former related
Sueblo of Pecos.
a£hl.— Hodfi^e in Am. Anthrop., ix, 350, 18%
(Pecofl form). D&'&t'hl.— Ibid, rjemez form).
P&h-kah-tah.— Hewett in Am. Anthrop., n. s., vi,
431, 1904 (PecoB form).
Baohizhoslun (* renegades'). A divi-
sion of the Jicarillas whose original home
was around the present Jicarilla res., n.
N. Mex.
Diohish-6-«hX'n.— Mooney, field notes, B. A. E.,
1897. Naohish-6-shI'n.— Ibid.
Dadens (Ih/dens), A Haida town on
the s. coast of North id., fronting Parry
passage, Queen Charlotte ids., British
Columbia. It was the chief town of the
Yaku-lanas previous to their migration to
Prince of Wales id. ; afterward the site
was used as a camp, but, it is said, was
not reoccupied as a town. It figures
prominently in accounts of early voy-
agers, from which it would appear either
that it was still occupied in their time
or that it had only recently ])een aban-
doned, (j. R. s.)
Da'dent Inagi'-i.— Swanton, Cent. Haida, 281, 1905
( Inag&M = • town ' ) . Tartane«. —Douglas quoted
by Dawflon, Queen Charlotte Ids., 162, 1880.
Da^ingits (Dadjyfigiis^ * common-hat
village'). A Haida town on the n.
shore of Bearskin bay, Skidesrate
inlet. Queen Charlotte ids., Brit.
Col. It was occupied for a brief
time by part of the Gitins of
Skidegate, afterward known as
Nasagas-haidagai, during a tem-
porary difference with the other
branch of the group. — Swan ton,
Cont. Haida, 279, 1905.
DagaxLga8elB(I>a^a/7a«^/x, ^com-
mon food-steamers'). A subdi-
vision of the Kona-kegawai of the
Haida« They were of low social
rank, and the name was used prob-
ably in contempt. — Swanton,
Cont. Haida, 273, 1905.
Baggers. Sharp-pointed, edged
implements, intended to thrust
and stab. Daggers of stone do not
take a prominent place amon^ the
weapons of the northern tribes,
and they are not readily distinguished from
knives, poniards, lance-heads, and projec-
tile points, save in rare cases where the
Stone Daggers, a, Of
CHALCEtX)NY; iLLINOrS;
LENGTH 10 IN. b, Of
Daqqer of
Steel;
Tlinoit.
(niblack)
handle was worked in a single piece with
the blade. Bone was well suited for the
making of stabbing implements and the
long 2-pointed copper poniard of the re-
gion of the great lakes was a formi-
dable weapon. The exact use of
this group of objects as employed
in prehistoric times must remain
largely a matter of con-
jecture. The introduc-
tion of iron soon led to
the making of keen-
pointed knives, as the
dirk, and among the
N. W. coast tribes the
manufacture of broad-
bladed daggers of cop-
per and iron or steel,
modeled after European
and Asiatic patterns, he-
came an important in-
dustry.
For daggers of stone
consult Moorehead, Pre-
hist. Impls., 1900; Ran
inSmithson. Cont., xxii, 1870; Thniston,
Antiq. of Tenn., 1897; for metal daggers,
seeMblack in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1888, 1890.
(w. H. n. )
Dahet (DaxP^t, 'fallen stunned'). A
former Tlingit village in the Sitka coun-
try, Alaska. (j. r. s.)
Bahnohabe ( ' stone mountain * ) . A Po-
mo village said to have been on the w.
side of Clear lake. Lake co.-, Cal., with
70 inhabitants in 1851.
Bah-no-habe.— Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, iii, 109, 1853. Do-no-ha-be.— McKee (1«51)
in Sen. Ex. Doe. 4,32dCk)ng.. speo.sess., 136, 1853.
Baboon. An American holly, JUj: da-
hoon . The term was first applied by Cates-
by (1722-26), probably from one of the
Indian languages of the s. Atlantic states,
though nothing definitt^ seems to l)e
known about the w^ord. (a. f. c.)
Bahua {IWjcua), A Haida town n.
of Lawn hill, at the mouth of Skide-
gate inlet, Queen Charlotte id., Brit. Col.
It belonged to the Djahui-skwahladagai,
and was noted in legend as the place
where arose the troubles which resulted
in separating the later w. coast Indians
from those of Skidegate inlet. It was
also the scene of a great battle between
the inlet i)eopleand those of the w. coast,
in which the latter were defeated. — Swan-
ton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905.
Baiyu {Daiyu\ * giving-food-to-others
town*). A 'Haida town on Shingle
bay, E. oi Welcome point, Moresby id., w.
Brit. Col. It was owned by a small band,
the Daiyuahl-lanas or Kasta-kegawai,
which received one of its names from that
of the town. — Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279,
1905.
Baiynahl-lanas {])aiyu al Wnaa^^ * peo-
ple of the town where they always give
away foo<l'). A divisi(m of the Raven
376
DAKANMANYIN — DAKOTA
[b. a. b.
clan of the Haida, named from one of its
towns. A second name for the band was
Ka8ta-kegawai(Q!a^staqe^gawa-i), *those
bom at Skidegate cr.* It formerly occu-
gied the coast between AUiford bay and
^umshewa point, but is now nearly ex-
tinct—Swan ton, Cont. Haida, 269, 1905.
K-itUke'rauii.— Boas, Fifth Rep. N. W. Tribes
Canada, 26, 1889. Q'.a'sta qe'nwa-i.—S wanton,
op.cit. Tai'otl la'nM.—Boas,^ Twelfth Rep. N.
W. Tribes Canada, 24, 1898.
Bakamnanyin (^ walks shining'). A
subgens of the Han gens of the Kansa.
Dakan ma-yin.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 231,
1897.
k.( * allies' ). The largest division
of the Siouan family, known commonly as
Sioux, according to Hewitt a French-
Canadian abbreviation of the Chippewa
Nadmve-is-iWj a diminutive of nadmmt *an
adder,' hence *an enemy.* Nadowemw-eg
is the diminutive plural. The diminutive
sin^lar and plural were applied by the
Chippewa to the Dakota, and to the Huron
to distinguish them from the Iroquois
proper, the true * adders' or 'enemies.'
According to Chippewa tradition the name
was first applied to a body of Indians liv-
ing on an island somewhere e. of Detroit
(W. Jones).
Dakota, Nakota, Lakota are the names
used by themselves, in the San tee, Yank-
ton, and Teton dialects respectively. J.
O. Dorsey, in his classification of the Siou-
an languages, divides the Dakota group
into 4 dialects: San tee, Yankton, i&im-
boin, and Teton. The Assiniboin, how-
ever, constitute a separate tribe. The close
linguistic relation of the divisions — the
differences being lai^gely dialectic — indi-
cates that they are branches of an original
group, the development probably bising
augmented by incorporations. At the
time of Long^s expedition (1825), when
the bands were still near their respective
localities, the country inhabited by the
group was, according to him, bounded by
a curved line extending e. of n. from
Prairie du Chien on the Mississippi, so as
to include all the e. tributaries of the
Mississippi, to the first branch of Chip-
pewa r. ; thence by a line running w. of n.
to Spirit lake; thence westward ly to Crow
Wing r., Minn., and up that stream to its
head; thence westwardly to Red r., and
down that stream to Pembina; thence
south westwardly to the e. bank of the Mis-
souri near the Mandan villages; thence
down the Missouri to a point probAbly
not far from Soldiers r. ; thence e. of n. to
Prairie du Chien, Wis. This tract in-
cludes the territory between lat. 42° to
49°, and long. 90° 3(y to 99° 30^ but omits
entirely the vast region occupied by the
various bands of the Teton Sioux w. of
the Missouri from the Yellowstone south-
ward to the Platte.
The first jjositive historical mention of
this people is found in the Jesuit Rela-
tion for 1640, where it is said that in the
vicinity of the "Nation des Puans"
(Winnebago) are the "Nadvesiv*' (Na-
dowessioux), **Assinipour" (Assiniboin),
etc. In the Jesuit Relation for 1642 it is
stated that the Nadouessis are situated
some 18 days* journey n. w. or w. of Sault
Ste Marie, **18 days farther away." Ac-
cording to their tradition, the Chippewa
first encountered the Dakota at Sault Ste
Marie. Dr Thomas S. Williamson, who
spent several years among the Dakota of
the Mississippi, says (Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, i, 247, 1851) that they claimed to
have resided near the confluence of the
Mississippi and Minnesota rs. for several
generations; that before they came to the
Mississippi they lived at Mille lac, which
they call Isanta-mde, * knife lake,' from
which is probably derived the name
Isanyati, *awel ling at the knife, * by which
the Dakota of the Missouri call those who
lived on Mississippi and Minnesota rs.
Rev. A. L. Riggs asserts that Isanyati, from
which Santee is derived, was properly
applied only to the Mdewakanton, which
would seem to identify this tribe with
Hennepin's Issati. He also remarks that
most of these Indians with whom he con-
versed could trace their history no further
back than to Mille lac, but that some
could tell of wars they had with the
Chippewa before they went thither and
trace their history back to Lake of the
Woods. He adds that all their traditions
show that they came from the n. e. and
have been moving toward the s. w. , which
would imply that they came from some
g)int N. of the lakes. Du Luth (1678) and
ennepin ( 1680) found some of the Da-
kota at and in the region of Mille lac,
named by the latter in his text L. Issati,
and in his autograph map L. Buade.
These included the Mdewakanton, part of
the Sisseton, part if not all of the Wahpe-*
ton, and probably the Wahpekute. Hen-
nepin's map places the Issati ( Mdewakan-
ton ) close to L. Buade, the Oua de Battons
( Wahpeton ) a little to the n. e. of the lake,
the Hanctons (Yankton or Yanktonai)
some distance to the n. , and the Tinthonha
or Gens des Prairies (Teton) to the w., on
the upper Mississippi. If this may be
considered even approximately correct, it
indicates that parts at least of some of the
western tribes still lingered in the re^on
of the upper Mississippi, and indeed it is
well known that very few of the Sioux
crossed the Missouri before 1750. Mal-
lery's winter count (10th Rep. B. A. E.,
266, 1894) places their entrance into the
Black-hills, from which they dispossessed
the Cheyenne and the Kiowa, at about
1765. Referring to their location in the
BULL. 30]
DAKOTA
377
latter part of the 17th century, Hennepin
(Descr. La., Shea trans., 201, 1880) sayp:
" Eight leagues above St. Anthony of
Padua's falls on the right, you find the
river of the Issati or Nadoussion [Rum
r.], with a very narrow mouth, which
}rou can ascend to the n. for about 70
eagues to L. Buade [Mille lac] or of the
Issati where it rises. ... In the
neighborhood of L. Buade are many other
li^es, whence issue several rivers, on the
banks of which live the Issati, Nadoues-
sans, Tinthonha (which means * prairie-
men'), Ouadebathon River People,
Chongaskethon Dog, or Wolf tribe (for
chonga among these nations means dog
or wolf), and other tribes, all which we
comprise under the name Jsadonessiou."
Here the Issati are distinguished from the
Tinthonha (Teton), Ouadebathon (Wah-
peton), Chongaskethon (Sisseton), and
Nadouessans (perhaps the Wahpekute).
From the time of Le Sueur's visit (1700)
the Dakota became an important fac^tor
in the history of the N. W. Their grad-
ual movement westward waff due chiefly
to the persistent attacks of the Chippewa,
who received firearms from the French,
while thev themselves were forced to rely
almost wholly on bows and arrows.
Lieut. Gorrell, an English officer, men-
tions their condition in this respect as late
as 1763 ( Wis. Hist Soc. Coll., i, 36, 1855) :
" This day, 12 warriors of the Sous came
here [Green Bay, Wis.]. It is certainly
the greatest nation of Indians ever yet
found. Not above 2,000 of them were
ever armed with fire-arms, the rest de-
pending en tirelv on bows and arrows and
darts, which they use with more skill
than any other Indian nation in North
America. They can shoot the wildest
and largest beasts in the woods at 70 or
100 yds. distance. They are remarkable
for tneir dancing; the other nations take
the fashion from them." He mentions
that they were always at war with the
Chippewa. On the fall of the French
dominion the Dakota at once entered into
friendly relations with the English. It is
probable that the erection of trading posts
on L. Pepin enticed them from their old
residence on Rum r. and Mille lac, for it
was in this section that Carver (1766)
found those of the eastern group. He
says (Travels, 37, 1796) : "Near the river
St. Croix reside three bands of the Nau-
dowessie Indians, called the River bands.
This nation is composed, at present, of 11
bands. They were originally 12, but the
Assinipoils [AssiniboinJ some years ago,
revolting, and separating themselves from
the others, there remain only at this time
11. Those I met here are termed the
River bands, because they chiefly dwell
near the banks of this river: the other 8
are generally distinguished by the title,
Naudowessies of the Plains, and inhabit
a country that lies more to the westward.
The names of the former are Nehogata-
wonahs, the Mawtawbauntowahs, and
Shahs weentowahs." During an investi-
gation by Congress in 1824 of the claim
by Carver's heirs to a supposed grant of
land, including the site of St Paul, made
to Carver by the Sioux, Gen. Leaven-
worth stated that the Dakota informed
him that the Sioux of the Plains never
owned any land e. of the Mississippi.
During Ihe Revolution and the War of
1812 the Dakota adhered to the English.
There wa^, however, one chief who sided
with the United States in 1812; this was
Tohami, known to the English as Rising
Moose, a chief of the Mdewakanton who
joined the Americans at St Louis, where
he was comniissitmed by Gen. Clark.
By the treaty of July, 1815, peace l)etween
the Dakota and the United States was
established, and by that of Aug., 1825,
the boundary lines l)etween them and the
United States and between them and the
various tril)es in the N. W. were defined.
The boundaries of the Sioux and other
northwestern tril^es were again defined
by the treaty of Sept. 17, 185L Their
most serious outbreak against the whites
occurreil in Minnesota under Little Crow
in 1862, when about 700 white settlers
and 100 soldiers lost their lives and some
of the most horrible cruelties known to
history were committed by the Indians;
but the entire Dakota group never par-
ticipated unitedly in any of the moaern
wars or outbreaks. The bands engaged
in the uprising mentioned were the Mde-
wakanton, Wahpekute, Wahpeton, and
Sisseton. Although this revolt was quelle<l
and the Sioux were compelle<l for a time
to submit to the terms offered them, a spirit
of unrest continued to prevail. By the
treaty of 1867 they agreed to relinquish
to the United States all their territory s.
of Niobrara r., w. of long. 104°, and n. of
lat. 46°, and promised to retire to a large
reservation in s. w. Dakota before Jan. 1,
1876. On the discovery of gold in the
Black-hills the rush oi miners thither be-
came the occasion of anf)ther outbreak.
This war was participated in by such well-
known chiefs as Sittmg Bull, Crazy Horse,
Spotted Tail, Rain-in-the-face, Red Cloud,
American Horse, Gall, and Crow King,
and was rendered famous by the cuttine
off of Maj. Gen. George A. Custer and
five companies of cavalry on the Little
Bighorn, June 25, 1876. A final rising
during the Ghost-dance excitement of
1890-91 was subdued hy Gen N. A. Miles.
The Dakota are universally conceded
to be of the highest type, physically,
mentally, and probably morally, of any
of the western tribes. Their bravery has
never been questioned by white or Indian,
378
DAKOTA
[B. A.]].
and they conquered or drove out every
rival except the Chippewa. They are
educated m their own language, and
through the agency of missionaries of the
type of Riggs, Williamson, Cleveland,
and Cook, many books in the Dakota
language have been printed, and papers
in Dakota are issued regularly. (See
Pilling, Bibliog. Siouan Lang.y Bull. B.
A. E., 1887.)
Socially, the Dakota originally consisted
of a large number of local groups or bands,
and, although there was a certain ten-
dency to encourage marriage outside the
band, these divisions were not true gentes,
remembered blood relationship, accord-
ing to Clark, being the only bar to mar-
riage. Personal fitness and popularity
determined chieftainship more than he-
redity, but where descent played any part
it was usually from father to son. The
tipi might tfelong to either parent and
was obtained by that parent through some
ancestor who had had its character re-
vealed in a dream or who had captured
it in war. The authority of the chief was
limited by the band council, without whose
approbation little or nothing could be ac-
complished. War parties were recruited
by individuals who had acquired reputa-
tion as successful leaders, while the sha-
mans formulated ceremonial dances and
farewells for them. Polygamv was com-
mon, the wives occupying different sides
of the tipi. Remains of the dead werg
usually, though not invariably, placed on
scaffolds.
Early explorers usually distinguished
these people into an Eastern or Forest
and a Western or Prairie division. A
more complete and accurate classification,
one which is also recognized by the peo-
ple themselves, is the following:
1. Mdewakanton; 2. Wahpeton; 3. Wah-
pekute;4. Sisseton; S.Yankton; 6.Yank-
tonai; 7. Teton, each of which is again
subdivided into bands and subbands.
These seven main divisions are often
known as **the seven council fires.**
The first four named together constitute
the Isanyati, Santee, or eastern division,
of which the Mdewakanton appear to be
the original nucleus, and speak one dia-
lect. Their home was in Minnesota prior
to the outbreak of 1862. The Yankton
and Yanktonai — the latter subdivided
into (a) Upper and (b) Hunkpatina or
Ijower — held the middle territory be-
tween L. Traverse and Missouri r. in e.
Dakota, and together spoke one dialect,
from which the Assiniboin was an off-
shoot. The great Teton division, with
its subdivisions. Upper and Lower Brul6,
Oglala, Sans Arcs, Sihasapa or Blackfoot,
Miniconjou, Oohenonpa.or Two Kettle,
llunkpapa, etc., and comprising together
more than half the nation, held the whole
tribal territory w. of the Missouri and
spoke one dialect.
The following are names of divisions,
groups, or bands that are spoken of as per-
taining to the Dakota. Some of these have
not been identified; others are mere tem-
porary geographical or local bands: Black
Tiger, Broken Arrows, Cascarba, Cazazh-
ita, Chanshushka, Chasmuna, Cheokhba,
Cheyenne Sioux, Congewichacha, Farm-
er's band. Fire Lodge, Flandreau Indians,
Gens du Large, Grand Saux, Grey Eagle,
Late Comedu, Lean Bear, Long Sioux,
Menostamenton, Micacoupsiba, Minisha,
Neecoweegee, Nehogatawonahs, New-
astarton. Northern Sioux, Ocatameneton,
Ohankanska, Oughetgeodatons, Oujatea-
pouitons, Peshlaptechela, Pineshow, Psin-
chaton, Psinoumanitons, Painoutanhin-
hintons, Rattling Moccasin, Red Leg's
band. Redwood, Sioux of the Broad Leaf,
Sioux of the Des Moyan, Sioux of the
Easty Sioux of the Meadows, Sioux of
the West, Sioux of the Woods, Sioux of
the Lakes, Sioux of the River St Peter's,
Souon, Star band, Talonapi, Tashunkee-
ota, Tateibombu's band, Tatkannai, Ti-
cicitan, Touchouasintons, Traverse de
Sioux, Upper Sioux, Waktonila, White
Cap Indians, White Eagle band, Wiat-
tachechah.
In 1904 the Dakota were distributed
among the following agencies and school
superintendencies: Cheyenne River ( Min-
iconjou, Sans Arcs, and Two Kettle),
2,477; Crow Creek (Lower Yanktonai),
1,025; Ft Totten school (Sisseton, Wah-
peton, and Pabaksa), 1,013; Riggs Insti-
tute (Santee), 279; Ft Peck (Yankton),
1,116; Lower Brul6 (Lower Brul^), 470;
Pine Ridge (Oglala), 6,690; Rosebud
(Brul^, Waglukhe, Lower Brul^, North-
em, Two Kettle, and Wazhazha), 4,977;
Santee (Santee), 1,075; Sisseton (Sisseton
and Wahpeton), 1,908; Standing Rock
(Sihasapa, Hunkpapa, and Yanktonai),
3,514; Yankton (Yankton), 1,702; under
no agency (Mdewakanton in Minnesota) ,
929; total, 26, 175. Includmg the Assini-
boin the total for those speaking the
Dakota language is 28, 780. A comparison
of these figures with those taken in pre-
vious years indicates a gradual decline in
numbers, but not so rapid a decrease as
among most North American tribes.
Ab-boin-ee Bioux.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 88,
1850. Ab-boin-ug.— Warren in Minn. Hist. Ctoll., v,
36, 1885 (Chippewa name: 'roasters,' from their
custom of torturing foes). Abbwoi-nug.— Tan-
ner, Narr., 67, 1830. Ab-oin.— Warren in Minn.
Hist. Coll., y, 162, 1885. Aboinug.— Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, n, 141, 1852. Abwoinug.-^hool-
craft, Ind. Tribes, v, 89, 1855. Ba-aknah'.— Oat-
schet, Caddo and Yatassi MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
82 (Caddo name). Ba-ra-shflp'-gi-o.— Hayden,
Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 402, 1862 (Crow
name). Bevaa-aes.— Ramsey in Ind. AfF. Rep., 70,
BULL. 30]
DAKOTA
379
Rep., 70, 1849 (Frencb notation of Bwanacs).
Boiiiat.— Long, Exped. St Peter's R., i, 389, 1824.
Bwa*.— Trumbull, MS. letter to Dorsey, Aug. 25,
1876. Bwaa-aM.~Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 74,
1849. BwoiBOff.— Tanner, Narr., 316, 1830. Bwoir-
avf.— Ioid.,144. 0»»»'.— Don»ey in Cont. N. A.
Etnnol., VI, pt. 1, 339, 1890 (Omaha and Ponca,
and Pawnee name). Oaa^'qti,— Dorsey, Dhegiha
MS. Diet., B. A. £., 1878 (Omaha name: 'real
Dakota'). Oa'haB.— Dorsey, Tciwere MS. vocab.,
B. A. E.. 1879 (so called by Iowa, Oto, Mis-
souri, Kansa, and Osage). Oao-haB. — David St
Cyr in Dorsey, Winn. Mfif., B. A. E.. 1886 (Win-
nebago name). Ohah'-ra-rat.— Orinnell, Pawnee
Hero Tales, 92, 1889 (Pawnee name). OhiS.—
Charlevoix, New France, ed. Shea, iii, 31, 1868.
Cttou.— Doc. of 1695 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 611,
1&%. Cttoux.— Doc. of 1693, ibid., 570. Ooup«-
gorge. — Blackmore in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond.,
1,801, 1869 ('cutthroats': so called by the French
from their gesture). Ooupet-gorges.— Burton, City
of Saints, %, 1862. Ornel.— Shea. Cath. Miss., 348.
1855. Oaou«x.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., i, 70,
note, 1893. Outthroats.— Marcy, Army Life on
Border, 33, 1866 (given erroneously as the trans-
lation of Dakota). Daoorta. — Lewis and Clark,
Exped., I, 61, 1814. Daoota.— Long, Exped. St
Peter's R.. ii. 245, 1824. Daootah.— Howe, Hist
Coll., 357, 1861 (translated 'allied tribes'). Dah-
eotah.— Tanner, Narr., 18, 1830. Dahootat.— Gal-
latin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 121, 1836.
Dahkoto.— Parker, Minn. Handbk^ 13. 1857. Dah-
ko-tah.— Tanner, Narr. . 146, 1830. Dakoias.— Shea,
Early Voy., 120, note, 1861 (misprint for Dakotas).
Dakotah.-Neill, Hist. Minn., xliv, note, 1858.
Dakotas.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 69, 1849.
Dakotha.— Smet, Mission de 1' Oreeon, 264, 1848.
Darooto.~Lewis and Clark, Exped., l, 183, 1817.
Darootar.— Lewis and Clark, DLscov., 30, 1806.
Dareotas.— Rafinesque in Marshall, Hist. Ky., i,
28. 1824. Dawta.— Domenech, Deserts of N.
Am., II, 28, 1860. DoooU.— Drake. Bk. Inds., vii.
1848. Ouerrien.—Jes. Rel. 1658, 21, 1858. Eadove-
savM.— Alcedo, Diet. Qeog.. iii, 213, 1788 (mis-
print). Hadovessiaiu. — Harris, Coll. Voy. and
Trav., II. 919, 1705 (misprinted from Lahontan).
Hand Outten.— Burton, City of Saints, 124, 1862
(Ute name). I to h£ taki.— Matthews, Ethnog.
Hidatsa, 159, 1877 (Hidatsa name: 'long ar-
rows'). it-2iis-k^.~Long, Exped. Rocky Mts.,
n, Ixxxiv, 1823. Kaiipa.— Wilson in Rep. N. W.
Tribes Can., 11, 1888 (Sarsi name). Kious.— La
Metairie (1682) in French, Hist. Coll. La., ii. 25,
1875. X'odalpa-X'iaago.— Mooney in 14th Rep.
B. A. E., 1057, 1896 ( 'necklace people* : Kiowa
name). Laoota.— Morgan in Beach, Ind. Misc., 220,
1877. La-ootahs.— Ruxton, Life in Far West. 112,
1849. La-ko'-ta.— Riggs, Dakota Gram . and Diet.,
135, 1851. La Saes.-Croghan (1765), Jour.. 38,
1831. Madowsaians.— Lewis and Clark, Exped.,
I, 61, 1814. Ha-ko'-ta.— Hayden. Ethnog. and
Philol. Mo. Val., 402, 1862 (Crow name).
mtr-ta-ski-blih-ki.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mts.,
u, Ixxix, 1823 (Crow name: 'cutthroats'),
luittongwesaawacks.— Sproat, Scenes Sav. Life.
188. 1868. HaudowMsiet.— Mcintosh, Orig. N. Am.
Inds., 103, 1853. Minish^ptko.— Col. H. L. Scott,
inf'n, 1906 (Crow name, of opprobrious mean-
ing). Kaootah. — Featherstonhaugh, Canoe Voy.,
I, 168, 1847. NadaweMi.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff.
Rep., 71, 1849. Ha-da-weiiy.— Ibid., 70. Had-
donwesdooz.— Brackenridge, Views of La., 77,
1815. KadMis.— GQssefeld, Charte von Nord Am.,
1797. Kadiouaiottx.— Long, Exped. St Peter's R.,
n, 323, 1824. NadiMiooz.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
index, 804, 1861. Kadoeias.— Barcia, Ensayo, 291,
1723. ifadoessi.— Cones and Kingsley, Stand. Nat.
Hist., pt. 6, 167, 1883. Kado«ssiaiit.— Sal verte. Hist.
Men, Nat., and Places, I. 66, 1864. Kadoeuioui.—
La Chesnaye (1697) in Margry, D^., vi, 6, 1886.
Kadonaiai— Burton, City of Saints, 96, 1862 (Chip-
pewa name: 'enemies'). Nadonaiaioug.— Dome-
nech, Deserts N. Am., ii, 26. 1860. Kadoaeohiook.—
Ibid. Kadoneaaioux.— Blackmore in Jour. Eth nol.
Soc. Lond., I, 301. 1869 (misprint). Nadonessia.—
Lahontan, New Voy.. i, 115, 1703. Kadooeaaia.—
Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 8. 1776. Nadooaga.—
Bacqueville de la Potnerie, Hist. Am., n.
49. 1753. Kadooagaaioux.— Ibid., 147. Kadouaia-
aioua.— Ibid., 179. Nadooaiaaioux.— Ibid.. 62.
Nadouayaaioux.— Ibid., 56. NadSaohiSee.— Charle-
voix, New France, in, 31, 1868. Nadoueohioaec.—
Rel. of 1660 in Margry, D^., l, 54, 1876. Nadoae-
okiouek.— Jes. Rel. 1658, '21. 1858. NadouechioSee.—
Ibid.. 1660, 27. Kadoiieoioua.— Ibid., 1670, 9H.
Kadoiiecia.— Ibid.. 1670, 97. Kad8a8ia.— Shea.
Disoov. Miss. Val.. xxi, 1852. Nadoueaana.— Hen-
nepin, New Discov., map, 1698. Kadoueaoious. —
Domenech. Deserts N. Am., ii, 26, 1860. Nadoue-
aiouaok.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 102, 1858. Nadoue-
aiouek.— Jes. Rel. 1656, 39, 1858. Nadoueaioux.—
Perrot (1689) in Margry, D6c., v, 33, 1883. Kadoue-
aiouz.— Williamson in Minn. Hist. Coll., i, 297, 1872.
Nadoueaaana.— La Balle'H Exped. (1679-81), in Mar-
gry, D4c., I, 481, 1876. Nadoaeaae.— French map
(1710) in Minn. Hist. Coll., ll, 256,1872. Hadouea-
aiana.— Niles (1760) in MaaM.-Hist. Col., 4th s., v.
541, 1861. Kadoaeaaiea.— Hayden, Ethnog. and
Philol. Mo. Val., 380, 1862. Nadoueaaiona — La
Metairie (1682) in French. Hist. Coll. La., ii. 25,
1875. Nadouesaiou. — Hennepin (1683) quotcHl by
Shea, Discov., 131. 1852. Nadouesaioiiak.— Jes. Rel.
1665, 7, 1858. Kadoueaaiouek.— Ibid. 1667,23. Na-
doiiesaioua.— Ibid. 1670, 99. Kadoneaaioux.— Doc.
of 1681 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 161, 1855. Ha-
doiieaaia.— Jes. Rel. 1642, 97, 1858. Nadoueaaona.—
Coxe, Carolana, 42, 1741. Nadoueaaoueronona.—
Sanson, map of Can. (1657) in Am. Antiu., i, 233,
1879. Nadouaaiana.— Hennepin. New Discov., i,
178, 1698 (made equivalent to Issati). Nadoua-
aieux.— Du Chesneau ( 1681 ) in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
IX, 153, 1855. Hadouaaioux.— Doc. (1679), ibid, 795.
Nadouweaia.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val., 380, 1862. Nadoveaavea.— Barcia. Ensavo, 238,
1723. Nadoveaaiana.— Hennepin (1680) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., I, 211. 1846. Na-do-wa-aee-wug.—
Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 53, 1870. Kadowaaia.—
Mackenzie, Voy., Ix, 1802. Nadowaaaia.— Maxi-
milian, Trav., 148, 1843. Nadowayaioux.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribe-s, in, 51, 18^. Nadoweaee.—
Schiller quoted by Neill, Hist. Minn., 89, 1858.
Nadoweai.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1057,
1896 ('little snakes.' or ' little enemies' : common
Algonquian name). Nadoweaioux. — Kingsley,
Stand. Nat. Hist., vi, 167, 1885. Nadoweaai.— Rafl-
nesque in Marshall, IILst. Ky., I, 28, 1824. Kado-
weaaiern.— Adelung, Mithridates, III, 244, 1816.
Kadoweaaiea.— Henry, Trav., 46, 1809. Nado-wea-
aiouex.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 348, 1855. Kadowea-
aioux.— Henry. Trav., 197, 1809. Nadoweateaua.—
McKenney and Hall. Ind. Tribes, in, 80, 1854,
Nadaneaaiouck.— Domenech. Deserts N. Am., n. 26,
1860. Naduaaiana.— Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5. 1776.
Kaduweaai.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 70, 1849.
Kadveaiv.— IvC Jeune in Jes. Rel. 1640, 35, 1858.
Nahcotah.— Featherstonhaugh, Canoe Voy., i,
223, 1817. Nahdaweaay.— Ramsey in Minn. Hist.
Coll., I, 45, 1872. Nahdowaaeh.— Jones, Oiibway
Inds., 1*29, 1861. Kahtooeaaiea.— Snelling, Tales of
Northwest, 137, 1830. Kakoto.— Burton. City of
Saints, 95, 1862. Kandawiaaeea.— Umf reville ( 1790)
in Me. Hist. Coll.. 6th s., 270. 1859. Naadoeai.—
Maximilian, Trav., 148. 1843. Nandoeaaiea.—
Lahontan quoted by Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep..
72, 1849. Kandoweae.— Drake, Ind. Chron., 186,
1836. Kandoweaaiea.— Prichard, Pbys. Hist. Man-
kind, V, 410, 1847. Naadaweaaeia.— Harmon, Jour.,
165, 1820 (misprint). Naoudooueaaia.— B. de Lozi-
^res. Voy. a la Louisiane, 848, 1802. Narootah.—
Schoolcraft, Trav., ^1, 1821. Natendiima.— Mal-
lery in Proc. A. A. A. S., xxvi, 352, note, 1877. Kat-
e-ne'-hin-a.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val., 326, 1862 (Arapaho name: 'cutthroats').
Hatni.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.. 1057,
1896 (Arapaho name). Natni^na.— Ibid. Na'-to-
wo-na.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.,
290. 1862 ^Cheyenne name, applied to Mde-
wakanton, Sisseton, Wahpekute, and Wah-
peton). Hatueaao.— Gatschet. MS., B. A. E., 1878
(Potawatomi name: 'small snake,' btH-ause
farther w., therefore less to be dreaded) . N£tuea-
auag.— Gatschet in Am. Antio., ii, 78, 1879 (Pota-
watomi name). Naudawiaaeea.— Umfreville
quoted by Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.,
380, 1862. Kaudeweaaioux.— Trumbull in Johnson
Cyclop., II. 1156,1877. Kaudoeaai.— Ramsey in Ind.
Aff. Rep., 72, 1849. Kaudoueaoioux.— Morgan in N.
380
DAKOTA TUBNIP — DALLE8 INDIANS
[b. a. b.
Am. Rev., 53, 1870. KaudoiiMsi.— Ramsey in Ind.
AfT. Rep., 69, 1^9. Kaudouisioux.— Raymbault
(1642) quoted by Brackett in Smithson. Rep. 1876,
466, 1877. Naudouisses.— Ibid. Kaudouweiftiet. —
Brown, West. Gaz., 360, 1817. Haud-o-wa-M.—War-
ren in Minn. Hist. Coll., v, 280, 1885. Kaud-o-wa-ie-
wug. — Ibid., 72. (Chippewa name: ' like unto ad-
ders') . HaudowasM*.— Schuyler et al. (1702) in N.
Y. Doe. Col. Hist., iv, 979, 1854. Haudowetiet.—
Carver, Trav., ix, 1778. Kaudowetae. — Lewis,
Trav., 233, 1809. NaudoweMeeg.— Tanner, Narr.,
316, 1830 (Ottawa name: Toasters'). Naudowea-
•iet.— Carver, Trav., 56, 1778. Kaudowisaiet.—
Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 53. 1870. Kaudutti.— Jef-
ferys. Am. Atlas, map, 2. 1776. Kauduwasiiea. —
Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s.,
II, 12, 1814. Kawdowesaie.— Carver, Trav., 59, 1778.
KawdowiMnee*.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 34,
1857 (Algonquian nickname: 'our enemies').
Vdakotaht.— Nicollet, Rep. on Upper Mississippi.
10, 1843. Kedouessaus.— Hennepin quoted by Nelll
in Minn. Hist. Coll., i, 256, 1872. Koddouwe»«>c«.—
Brackenridge, Views of La., 77, 1815. Hod-o-way-
•e-wug.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 139, 1862.
Kodoweisa.— Linn (1839) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 204, 26th
Cong., Ist sess., i, 1840. Nodowesaiet.— Bradbury.
Trav., 41, 1817. Hord oiietU.— Bradford quoted
by Ramsey in Ind. Aflf. Rep., 70, 1849 (evident cor-
ruption of NadouessUm ) . K ottawetaie. — Adelung,
Mithridates, iii.264.1816. Kottoweaiaei.— Croghan
(1759), Hist. West. Penn.. 146, note, 1851. Kuktn-
»&n.— Oatschet. MS.. 1884 (Salish name: 'cut-
throats ' ) . Kflqtu'.— Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos.
Soc.,371. 1886 (Stilish name). Kxtuaum.— Gatschet
MS.. B. A. E., 1884 (Okinagan name). 0-bwah-
nug.— Schoolcraft Ind. Tribes, v, 193, 1855 (Chip-
pewa name). Oceti aakowii).— Riggs, Dakota
Gram, and Diet., xv, 18.51 (own name: 'seven
council fires'). Ochente Bhakoan. — Long, Exped.
St Petvrs R.. l. 377. 1824. Ochente Shakona.—
Coues and Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 169,
1883. Ooheti Shaowni.— Warren, Dacota Countrv,
15, 1855. Oho-homo.— ten Kate, Svnonymie, 8, 1884
( ' those on the outside ' ). Ohb-omo-yo. — Mallery in
Proc. A. A. A. S., xxvi, 352, note, 1877. O-o'-ho-
mo-i'-o. — Hayden. Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val., 290, 1862 (Chevenne name), dshahak.—
Gatjwhet. MS., 1883 (Fox name). Otheti Sha-
kowin.— Burton. City of Saints. 95, 1862. Otohenti-
Ohakoang.— Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., 55, 1826. Pain-
pe-tse-menay. — Gebow, Sho-sho-nay Vocab.. 18.
1868 (Shoshoni name). PakoU.— U. S. Stat., x, 71,
1853 (misprint). Painbiziimna.— Moonev In 14th
Rep. B. A. E.. 1057, 1896 ('beheaders': Shoshoni
name). Pampe Ohyimina.— Burton. City of Saints,
124, 1862 (Ute name: 'hand-cutters'). Pani.—
Schuyler et al (1702) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
IV, 979, 18.>4 (given as French name; confused
with Pawnee). Papitsinima.— Mooney in 14th
Rep. B. A. E., 1057, 1896 ('beheaders': Co-
manche name). Pishakulk. — Mooney, infn, 1892
(Yakima name: 'beheaders'). Ponarak.— Jes.
Rel. 1656. 39, 1858 (misprint). Poualac.— Mallery
in Proc. A. A. A. S., xxvi, 352, note, 1877. Poua-
lak.— Jes. Rel. 1658, 21, la'W (Chippewa name;
incorrectly transl. 'warriors'). Pooalakei.— Mc-
Kenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 81, 1^54. Poua-
laka.— Boucher (1660) in Margry, D6c., I, 55, 1875.
Pouanak.— Tailhan, Perrot M6m., 232, note. 1864.
aoaatera.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 83, 1850
(Ab-boin-ee Sioux, or). Sahagi.— Gatschet. MS.,
B. A. E., 1879 (Shawnee name). Saoux— Scher-
merhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., Ii, 12,
1814. Saux.— Hurlbert in Jones, Ojebway Inds.,
178, 1861. Soeouex.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., i,
70, note. 1893. Sceoux.— Clark, MS., Codex B,
quoted in Lewis and Clark Exp>ed., 1. 101, note,
1893. Scieux. — Henry (1801) auoted by Neill
in Minn. Hist. Coll., v, 453, 1886. Sciou.— Neill,
Hist. Minn., 149, 1858. Bcioux.— Doc. (1693) in N.
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 570, 1855. Scouex.— Lewis
and Clark, Exped., i, 70, note. 1893. Seauex.—
Clark. Codex B, quoted in Lewis and Clark
Exped.. I, 128, note, 1893. Beaux.— -Lewis and
Clark, Exped., I. 70, note, 1893. Shahan.— Dorsey
quoted by Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1057, 1896
(Osage, Kansa, and Oto name). Bhinana.— Gat-
schet, MS., B. A. E., 1884 (Kiowa Apache name).
Sioouei.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., i,70, note, 1893.
Sieouex.— Ibid. Sieux.— Coxe, Carolana, 20, 1741.
Sioos.— Jeflferys, Am. Atlas, map 8. 1776. BIm.—
Alegre, Hist. Comp. Jesus, i, 336, 1841. Siou.— La-
mothe Cadillac (1703) in Margry, D6c., v, 829,
1883. Biouae.— Perrot, M6m.- 232, 1864. Siouat.—
Doc. (1767) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., Vil, 989, 1856.
Sioux.— Morel (1687) in Margry, D^., v, 32, 1883.
Biouxea.— Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am.,
IV, 33, 1753. Biouxi.— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 7,
1806. Bioxes.— Poole, Among the Sioux, 153, 1881.
Biroux.— Perrot, M6m., 55, 1864. Bivux.— Boudi-
not, Star in the West, 1*28, 1816 (misprint).
Biwer.— Balbi, Atlas Ethnog.. 55, 1826. Boo.—
Lewis and Clark, Discov. , 30. 1806. Bouea.— Lewis
and Clark. Exped., i, 70, note, 1893. Bouex.—
Ibid. Souix.— Ibid. Bout.— Gorrell (1761) in Wis.
Hist. Soc. Coll., I. 26, 1855. Boux.— Lewis and
Clark, Exped., i, 70. note, 1893. Bu.— Gatschet,
Kaw vocab.. B. A. E., 27, 1878 ( Kansa form). Bue.—
Croghan (1765), Jour., 38. 1831. Bml.— Ibid., 37.
Bun-nun'-at.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val., 357, 1862 (Ankara name). Buouex.— Lewis
and Clark, Exped., i. 70, note, 1893. Taaba'koah.—
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1057, 1896 ('cut-
throats': Caddo name). Tuyj(tchlak<.— ten Kate,
Synonymic, 9, 1884 (Comanche name: 'cut-
throats'). WadoiiisaiaiiB.- Hennepin quoted by
Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 72, 1849. Waaak.— Bel-
court (1850-«)) in Minn. Hist. Coll., i, 235, 1872
(Chippewa name). Wa-ia-sa-o-no.-M organ in
N. Am. Rev., 52. note. 1870 (Iroquois name) . Wa-
■a'-seh-o-no.— Morgan, League of Iroquois, 268,
1861 (Seneca name). Yuossaha.— Gatschet, Wyan-
dot MS., B. A. E., 1879 (Wyandot name: 'birds').
Zue.— Croghan (1759), Hi.st. West. Penn., 146, note,
1851 (given as French form).
Dakota turnip. See Tipsinah.
Daktlawedi. ATlin^it clan belonging
to the Wolf phratrv. It ia found at Ton-
gas, Killisnoo, and among the Chilkat,
while the Tsaguedi of Kake is a branch.
Dttl£-weti. — Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 118, 1885.
Daq! lawe'dl.— Swan ton, field notes, B. A. E.,1904.
TiJda-uedi.— Krause, op. cit., 116. TaktU-uSdi.—
Ibid., 120.
Daknbetede. A group of Athapascan
villages formerly on Applegate cr., Ore^.
The inhabitants spoke a dialect practi-
cally identical with that employed by the
Taltushtuntede who lived on Grallice cr.
not far from them. They were inter-
married with the Shasta, who, with the
Takilman, were their neighbors. With
other insurgent bands they were removed
to the Siletz res. in 1856.
Applegate Creek.— Palmer in Ind. Aff. Rep.,
4M, 1854. Da'-ku-be t«'-de.— Dorsey in Jour.
Am. Folk-lore, in, 235. 1890 (own name).
Do-dah-ho.— Gibbs, letter to Hazen, B. A. E., 1856.
Etoh-kah-Uw-wah.— Palmer in Ind. AfT. Hep., 464,
1854. Ki'ckito hitolibi.— Dorsey, Alsea MS. vo-
cab., B. A. E., 1884 (Alsea name: 'people far up
the stream'). Spena.— Gibbs, letter to Hazen,
1856, B. A. E. Tt'fi-qiia-li'-qwiit-me' ^^bbS —
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 235, 1890
(Naltdnnetdnne name) .
Dalles Indians. The Chinookan tribes
formerly living at The Dalles, Greg., and
on the opposite side of Columbia r.
While tribes of other stocks, notably
Shahaptian, frequently visited The Dalles
during the summer, they were not per-
manent residents. Of the Chinookan
tribes the Wasco were imix)rtant, and
the term is sometimes limited to that
tribe. (l. f.)
BULL. 30]
DANCE
381
D»lle».-U. S. Ind. Treat. (1855), 622, 1873. Dalle.
Indians.— \Vhite in lud. Aff. Rep., 2(M, 1844. DaUt
iBdiana. — Lee and Frost, Oregon, 96, 1844. La
Dalle Indiana.— M'Vickar, Hist. Expcd. Lewis
and Clark, ii, 386, note, 1842. La Dallea Indians.—
Parker, Jour.. 140, 1846.
Dance. Nature is prodi^l of life and
energy. The dance is universal and in-
stinctive. Primarily the dance expresst^s
the joy of hiotic exaltation, the exuber-
ance of life and energy; it is the ready
physical means of manifesting the emo-
tions of joy and of expressing the exulta-
tion of conscious strength and the ecstasy
of successful achievement — the fruitage
of well-directed energy. Like modern
music, through long development and
divergent growth the dance has been
adapted to the environment of many and
diverse planes of culture and thought;
hence it is found among both savage and
enlightened peoples in many com})lex
and differing forms and kinds. But the
dance of the older time was fraught with
symbolism and mystic meaning which it
Has lost in civilization and enlightenment.
It is confined to no one country of the
world, to no period of ancient or modem
time, and to no plane of human culture.
Strictly interpreted, therefore, the dance
seems to constitute an important adjunct
rather than the basis of the social, miU-
tary, religious, and other activities de-
signed to avoid evil and to secure welfare.
A contrary view renders a general defini-
tion and interpretation of the dance com-
§lex and difiicult, apparently rcH]uiring a
etailed description of the various activi-
ties of which it Ijecame a part. For if the
danc*e is to be regarded as the })aKi8 of
these activities, then these ceremonies
and observances must l)e defined strictly
as normal developments of the dance, a
procedure which is plainly erroneous.
The truth appears to be that the dance is
only an element, not the basis, of the
several festivals, rites, and ceremonies
performed in accordance with well-defined
rules and usages, of which it has become
a part. The dance was a }X)werful im-
, pulse to their i)erformance, not the mo-
tive of their observance.
Among the. Indians n. of Mexico the
dance usually consists of rhythmic and
not always graceful gestures, attitudes,
and movements of the body and limbs,
accompanied by steps usually made to
accord with the time of some form of
music, produced either by the dancer or
dancers or by one or more attendant
singers. Drums, rattles, and sometimes
bone or reed flutes are used to aid the
singers. Every kind and class of dance
has its own peculiar steps, attitudes,
rhythm, figures, song or son^ with
words and accompanying music, and
coetumes.
The word or logos of the song or chant
in savage and barbaric planes o1 thought
and culture -expressed the action of the
orenda, or esoteric magic power, regarded
as immanent in the rite or ceremony of
which the dance was a dominant a<ljunct
and impulse. In the lower planes of
thought the dance was inseparable from
the song or chant, which not only started
and accompaniiHl but also emlxxiied it.
Some dances are peculiar to men and
others to women. Some dances are i)er-
formed by a single dancer, others lielong
respectively to individuals, like those ot
the Onihonrontha ('one chants*) among
the Iroquois; other dances are for all wJio
may wish to take part, the number then
being limit^Hl only by the space available;
still others are for si>eci lied classes of \)er-
sons, meml)ers of certain orders, societies,
or fraternities. There are, therefore, per-
sonal, fraternal clan or gentile, tribal, and
inter-tribal dances; there arti also social,
erotic, comic, mimic, patriotic, military or
warlike, invocative, offertory, and mourn-
ing dances, as well as those expressive of
gratitude and thanksgiving. Moi^j^an
(League of the Iroquois, i, 278, 1904) gives
a list of 32 leading dances of the Seneca
Iroquois, of which 6 are costume dances,
14 are for both men and women, 1 1 for
men only, and 7 for women only. Three
of the costume dances occur in those
exclusively for men, and the other 3 in
those for both men and women.
In general among the American Indians
the heel and the ball of the foot are lifted
and then brought down with great force
and swiftness in such wise as to produce
a resounding concussion. Usually the
changes of ])osition of the dancer are slow,
but the changes of attitude are sometimes
rapid and violent. The women employ
several steps, sometimes employtnl also
by the men, am<mg which are the shuffle,
the glide, and the hop or leap. Holding
both feet together and usually facing the
song altar, the women generally take a
leap or hop sidewise in advance and then
a snorter one in recoil, so that after every
two hops the i)osition is slightly ad vanctKi.
They do not employ the violent steps and
forceful attitudes in vogue among the
men. They keep the body quite erect,
alternately advancing either shoulder
slightly, which gives them a peculiar
swayingorrockingmotion,resemblingthe
waving of a wind-rocked stalk of corn.
Indeed, among the Onondaga, Cayuga,
and other Iroquois tribes, one of the
names for ** woman'* (wathmwisas, 'she
sways or rocks') is a term taken from
this rocking or swaying motion.
Among some tribes, when the warriors
were absent on a hunting or war expe-
dition, the women performed appropriate
382
DANOKHA DAVIS
[B. ▲.■.
dances to insure their safety and success.
Among the same people in the dances in
which women may take part, these,
under the conduct of a leader with one
or more aids, form a circle around the
song altar (the mat or bench provided
for the Ringer or singers), maintaining an
interval of from 2 to 5 feet. Then, out-
side of this circle the men, under like
leadership, form another circle at a suit-
able distance from that of the women.
Then the two circles, which are usually
not closed l)etween the leaders and the
ends of the circles, move around the song
altar from the right to the left in such
manner that at all times the heads of the
circles of dancers move along a course
meeting the advancing sun (their elder
brother), whose apparent motion is con-
versely from the left to the right of the
observer. In the Santee Dakota dance a
similar movement around the center of
the circle from right to left is also ob-
served. Among the Muskhog^ean tribes,
however, the two circles move in opposite
directions, the men with the course of the
sun and the women contrary to it (Bar-
tram ) . A mong the Santee the women may
dance only at the meeting of the ** medi-
cine'' society of which they are members;
they alone dance the scalp dance while
the warriors sing. Rev. John Eastman
says that in dancing the Santee form 3 cir-
cles, the innermost composed of men, the
middle of ichildren, and the outermost of
women. According to Le Page Du Pratz,
these circles, among the Natchez, moved
in opposite directions, the women turn-
ing from left to right, and the men from
right to left. This movement of the cir-
cles from right to left seems designed to
prevent the dancer in the entire course
around the song altar from turning his
back to the sun.
The Mandan and other Siouan tribes
dance in an elaborate ceremony, called
the Buffalo dance, to bring game when
food is scarce, in accordance with a well-
defineil ritual. In like manner the In-
dians of the arid re^on of the S. W. per-
form long and intricate ceremonies with
the accompaniment of the dance ceremo-
nies which, in the main, are invocations
or prayers for rain and bountiful harvests
and the creation of life. Among the
Iroquois, in the so-called green-corn
dancej the shamans urge the people to
participate in order to show gratitude for
bountiful harvests, the preservation of
their lives, and appreciation of the
blessings of the expiring year. The ghost
dimce, the snake dance, the sun dance,
the scalp dance, and the calumet dance
(q. v.), each performed for one or more
purposes, are not developments from the
dance, but rather the dance has become
only a part of the ritual of each of these
important observances, which by me-
tonymy have been called by the name of
only a small but conspicuous part or ele-
ment of the entire ceremony.
Consult Bartram, Travels, 1792; Jescdt
Relations, Thwaites ed., i-lxxiii, 1896-
1901; Margry, D^., i-vi, 1875-86; Mor-
gan, League of the Iroquois, 1857, 1904;
Lafitau, Moeurs des Sauvages, 1724; Le
Page Du Pratz, Hist, de la Louisiane, 1758.
(j. N. B. H.)
Danokha {Danoxo). A former Pomo
village on the n. shore of Clear lake, Cal.
(s. A. B.)
Dapishnl {DA-pi-shidy *high sun*). A
former Pomo village in Redwood valley,
Mendocino co., Cal. — Powers in Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., iii, 155, 1877.
Daqninatiimo (Caddo: atino 'red'). A
tribe of n. e. Texas in 1687, said to be
allies of the Caddo, and probably related
to them. — Joutel (1687) m Margry, D6c,
III, 410, 1878. Cf. Daquio, Daycao,
Daqnio. One of the bands, mostly
Caddoan, who were allies of the Caddo
in Texas in 1687 (Margry, D4c., in, 410,
1878). Possibly the same as the Daycao
of the narratives of Pe Soto's expedition
of 1542 (Gentl. of Elvaa (1557) in Bourne,
Narr. De Soto, i, 182, 1904).
Darby's Village. A former Huron vil-
lage on upper Darby cr., about midway
between tne present Columbus and
Marysville, Ohio. — Royce in 18th Rep. B.
A. K, pi. clvi, 1899.
Dart sling. See Throunna-stick,
Dasamonqaepenc. An Algonquian vil-
lage on the coast of Dare co., N. C, op-
posite Roanoke id., in 1587.
baMmumqttepeio.— Strachey {ca. 1612), Virsdnia,
147, 1849. Dasanuunquepeuk.— Ibid., 152. Saaa-
monpeaok.— Lane (1586) in Smith (1629), Virginia,
1, 91, repr. 1819. Daaamonquepeio.— HAkluyt(1600),
Voy., Ill, 344-345, repr. 1810. Daaamonquepeok.—
Strachey, op. oil. , 151. Daaamoquepeuk.— -Ibid. , 150.
Daaamotiqaepero. — Dutch map (1621) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., I, 1856 (misprint). Daaaamoa-
-Lane, op. cit., 92. Daasamopoqne.— Smith
vl629), Vii^nia, i, map, repr. 1819. Deaaamon-
peaka.— Morse, N. Am., 159, 1776. Beaaamopaak.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 93, 1857.
Dasoak (^flying'). A clan of the
Huron.
Datcho. An unidentified Texan tribe or
division hostile to the Caddo in 1687. —
Joutel (1687) in Margry, D^., iii, 409,
1878. Cf. Kadohadacho.
Danpom Wintnn (* sloping-ground Win-
tun*). A Wintun tribe formerly living
in Cottonwood valley, Shasta co., Cal.
Oottonwooda.— -Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in,
230, 1877. Dao^pum Wintun.— Ibid. YaUey In-
diana.—Ibid. WaikemL— Kroeber, infn, 1903
(Yuki name of Cottonwood Creek Wintun; prob-
ably the same) .
Davis, Jolm. A full-blood Creek, bom
in the **01d Nation.'' In the War of
1812, when a boy, he was taken prisoner,
and was reared by a white man. He
emigrated from Alabama in 1829, and
was educated at the Union Mission after
BULL. 30]
DAWES COMMISSION DEKANAWIDA
383
reaching Indian Territory. He had good
talents, and in early manhood became a
valuable helper to the missionaries as in-
terpreter and si)eaker in public meetings.
He was an active worker in 18.%, and
died about 10 years later. Two daugh-
ters survive him, who were educated in
the Presbyterian boarding school, one of
whom, Susan, wife of John Mcintosh,
rendered important service to Mrs A. E.
W. Robertson in her Creek translations.
Davis was joint author with J. Lykens in
translating the Gospel of John into Creek,
published at the Shawanoe Baptist Mis-
sion, Ind. Ter., in 1835, and was also a
collaborator with R. M. Lough ridge, D.
Winslett, and W. S. Robertson in the
translation into Creek of two volumes of
hymns. — Pilling, • Bibliog. Muskhogean
Lang., Bull. B. A. E., 1889.
Dawes Ck>mmi88ion. See Commission to
the. Five Civilized Tribes,
Dayoao. A territory that lay 10 days'
journey beyond the extreme westerly
point reache<l by Moscoso, of De Soto's
expedition, in 1542. The name was
stnctly that of a stream, possibly Trinity
r., Texas, and is spoken of also as if desig-
nating an Indian "province." See
Gentl. of Elvas in Hakluyt Soc. Publ., ix,
138-140, 1851.
Dayoitgao ( * there where it issues ' ) . A
former Seneca village situated at Squakie
hill, on Genesee r., near Mt Morris, N. Y.
It received the name Squaw kiehah from
the fact that 700 Fox (Muskwaki) cap-
tives were settled there by the Iroijuois
in 1681-83. The site was sold by the
Seneca in 1825 and relinquished by them
in 1827. (j. N. B. H.)
Da-yo-it-gi-o.— Morgan, League Iroq., 435, 1861.
Squakie HiU village.— Ibid.. 468. Squawkie HiU.—
Conover, Kanadesaga and Geneva MS., B. A. E.
( » Squawkiehah Ganadahab, * Squawkiehah
village lying high'). Squawkihowt.— Cusick,
Sketches Six Nations, 20, 1828. Squawky HiU.—
Morris treaty (1797) in U. S. Ind. Treat, 820,
1873.
De. The Coyote clans of the Tewa
pueblos of San Juan, Tesuque, and San
Ildefonso, N. Mex. Those of Tesuque
and San Ildefonso are extinct.
D^td6a.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 350, 1896
(<ddas-* people').
Deadoses. A small Texan tribe which
in the 18th century lived witii other
tribes on San Xavier r., probably the
San Miguel, which joins little r. and
flows into the Brazos about 150 m. from
the gulf. In 1767-08 they were said to
reside between Navasota and Trinity rs.,
and in 1771 were mentioned with the
Tonkawa, Comanche, To wash (Wichita),
and others as northern Texas tribes in
contradistinction to the Cocos (Coaque),
Karankawa, and others of the coast re-
gion. If the Mayeyes were really related
to the Tonkawa,'as has been asserted, the
fact that this tribe is mentioned with
them may indicate that the language of
the Deadoses resembled that of tne Ton-
kawa. They may have been swept
away by the epideniic that raged among
the Indians of Texas in 1777-78.
(h. E. B. .1. R. s.)
Decoration. See Adornment ^ Art, Cloth-
ing, Ornament.
Deep Creek Spokan. A former Spokan
colony that lived 17 m. s. w. of Spokane
falls, now Spokane, Wash. The colony
was established for farming purposes;
pop. about 30 in 1880. — Warner in Ind.
Aff. Rep., 67, 1880.
Deer Skins. Apparently a division of
the northern Athapascans, as they are
mentioned as belonging to a group in-
cluding the Beaver Hunters, Flatside
Dogs (Thlingchadinne), and Slaves. —
Smet, Oregon Missions, 164, 1847.
Defense. See Fortification.
Deformation. See Artificial head defor-
mation.
Degataga. See Stand Watie.
Dekanawida (*two river-currents flow-
ing together.' — Hewitt). An Iroquois
prophet, statesman, and lawgiver, who
lived probably during the second and
third quarters of the 15th century, and
who, conjointly with Hiawatha, planned
and founded the historical confederation
of the live Iroquois tribes. According to
a circumstantial tradition, he was born in
the vicinity of Kingston, Ontario, Canada,
in what then was probably Huron terri-
tory. He was reputed to have l)een one
of 7 brothers. Definite tradition gives
him rank with the demigods, owing to the
masterful orenda or magic i)Ower with
which he worked tirelessly to overcome
the obstacles and difficulties of his task,
the astuteness he displayed in negotia-
tion, and the wisdom he exhibit^ in
framing the laws and in establishing the
fundamental principles on which they
were based and on which rested the en-
tire structure of the Iroquois confedera-
tion. Omens foreshadowed his birth,
and portents accompanying this event
revealed the fact to his virgin mother
that Dekanawida would be the source
of evil to her people, referring to the
destruction of the Huron conf^eration
by that of the Iroquois. Hence at his
birth his mother and grandmother, with
true womanly patriotism, sought to
spare their country woes by attempting
to drown the new-bom infant by thrust-
ing it through a hole made in the ice
covering a neighboring river. Three at-
tempts were made, but in the morning
after each attempt the young Dekanawida
was found unharmed in the arms of the
astonished mother. Thereupon the two
women decided that it was aecreed that
384
DEKANI80BA DEKAURY
[B. A. B.
he should live, and so resolved to rear
him. Rapidly he grew to man's estate,
and then, sa^in^ that he must take up
his fort^onlained work, departed south-
ward, first assuring his mother that in
the event of his death by violence or
sorcery, the otter skin flayed entire,
which, with the head downward, he had
hung in a comer of the lodge, would
vomit blood. Dekanawida was probably
a Huron by blood, but perhaps an Iro-
(|Uois by adoption. In the long and
tedious negotiations proccniing the final
establishment of the historical confed-
eration of the five Iroquois tribes, he
endeavored to i)ersuade the Erie and the
Neuter tribes also to join the confedera-
tion; these tribes, so mr as known, were
always friendly with the Huron i)eople,
and their representatives probably knew
of Dekanawida's Huron extraction.
Many of the constitutional princi-
ples, laws, and regrulations of the con-
federation are attributed to him. His
chiefship did not belong to the hereditary
class, but to the merit class, qommonly
styleil the * pine-tree chiefs.' Hence, he
could forbid the appointment of a suc-
cessor to bin office, and could exclaim,
** To others let there be successors, for
like them they can advise you. I have
established your commonwealth, and
none has done what I have." But it is
probable that prohibition was attributed
to iiim in later times when the true nature
of the merit chiefs had become obs(*ured.
Hence it is the peculiar honor of the
merit chiefs of to-day not to l)e condoled
officially after death, nor to have suc-
cessors to their chieftaincies. For these
reasons the title Dekanawida does not
belong to the roll of 50 federal league
chiefsTiips. (j. n. b. h.)
Dekanisora. An Onondaga chief who
came into prominence in the latter part
of the 17tn century, chiefly through
his oratorical powers and his efforts to
maintain peace with both the French and
the English. He was first mentioned by
Charlevoix in 1682 as a member of an
embassy from the Iroquois to the ^French
at Montreal. He was also one of the em-
bassy to the French in 1688, which was
captured by Adario (Le Rat), and then
released by the wily captor under the
plea that there had hJeen a mistake, blam-
mg the French for the purpose of widen-
ing the breach between them and the
Iroquois. C'olden ( Hist. Five Nat. , i, 165,
1755) says Dekanisora was tall and well
made, arid that he ** had for many years
the greatest reputation among the Five
Nations for speaking, and was generally
employed as their speaker in their nego-
tiations with both French and English."
His death is supposed to have occurred
about 1730, as he was a very old man
when he was a member of an embassy at
Albany in 1726. (c.t.)
Dekanoagah f* between the rapids.' —
Hewitt ) . A vi llage, inhabited by Seneca,
Nanticoke, Conoy, and remnants of other
tribes, placed by Gov. Evans (Day, Penn.,
391, 1843) in 1707 on Susquehanna r.,
about 9 m. from Pequehan, the Shawnee
village on the £. side of the Susquehanna,
just below Conestoga cr., in Lancaster
CO., Pa.
Dekanry, Chookeka. A chief of the
Winnebago tribe, bom about 1730. He
was the son of Sabrevoir De Carrie, an
oflacer of the French army in 1699, and
Hopoekaw, daughter of a principal Win-
nebago chief, whom he married in 1729,
spoken of by Carver (Travels, 20, 1796)
as the queen of the Winnebago. Their
son, Choukeka (* Spoon'), was known
to the whites as Spoon Dekaury. After
having been made chief he became the
leader of attacks on the Chippewa during
a war with the Winnebago, but he main-
tained friendly relations with the whites.
It was principally through his influence
that the treaty of June 3, 1816, at St
Louis, Mo. , was brought al)out. His wife
was a daughter of Nawkaw. He died at
Portage, Wis., in 1816, leaving 6 sons and
5 daughters.
Dekaury, Konoka. The eldest son and
successor of Choukeka Dekaury, bom in
1747. He was named Konoka ('Eldest')
Dekaury, and is often mentioned as "Ola
Dekaurj," but is equally well known as
Schachipkaka. Before his father's death,
in 1816, Konoka had joined a band of
Winnebago who took part, in 1813, in
the attack led by Proctor on Ft Stephen-
son, on lower Sandusky r., Ohio, which
was gallantly defended by Mai. George
Croghan. He fought also in the battle
of the Thames, in Canada. He was held
for a time, in 1827, as a hostage at Prairie
du Chien for the delivery of Red Bird.
His band usually encamped at the port-
age of Wisconsin r., the site of the present
Portage, Wis. Mrs Kinzie (Wan-Bun,
89, 1856) describes him as '*the most
noble, dignified, and venerable of his
own or indeed of any other tribe," hav-
ing a fine Roman countenance, his head
bald except for a solitary tuft of long,
silvery hair neatly tied and falling back
on his shoulders, and exhibiting a de-
meanor always courteous, while his
dress was always neat and unosten-
tatious. He signed the treaty of Prairie
du Chien Aug. 19, 1825, on behalf of the
Winnebago, and died on Wisconsin r.
Apr. 20, 1836.
Other members of the family, whose
name has been variously written UeKaury,
DeKauray, DayKauray, Day Korah, Da-
corah, and DeCorrah, were noted. From
Chookeka'sdanghters, who married white
BULL. SOI
DELAWARE
385
men, are descended several well-known
families of Wisconsin and Minnesota.
(C. T.)
Dal^yar^, A confederacy, formerly the
most important of the Al^on<|uian stock,
occupying the entire basin of Delaware
r. in E. Pennsylvania and s. e. New
York, together with most of New Jersey
and Delaware. They called themselves
Lemli>eorLeni-lenaj)e, equivalent to *real
men,* or * native, genuine men ' ; the Eng-
lish knew them as Delawares, fn)m the
name of their principal river; the French
called them Loups, * wolves,' a term
{)rol)ably applied originally to the Ma-
lican on Hudson r., afterward extended
to the Munsee division and to the whole
group. _To the more remote Algonciuian
JACK HARRY (wAIAWAKWAKUMAU, TRAMPING EVERYWHERE) —
DELAWARE
tribes they, together with all their cog-
nate tribes along the coast far up into
New England, were known as Wapa-
nachki, * easterners,* or * eastern land
people,' a term which ap]>ears also as a
specific tribal designation in the form of
Abnaki. By virtue of admitted j)riority
of political rank and of occupying the
central home territory, from wnich most
of the cognate tribes had diverged, they
were accordeil by all the Algonquian
tribes the respectful title of "gmnd-
father," a recognition accorded by cour-
tesy also by the Huron. The Nanti-
coke, Conoy, Shawnee, and Mahican
claimed close connection with the Dela-
wares and prt»serve<l the tradition of a
common origin.
The Len^pe, or Delawares proper, were
composed of 3 principal tribes, treated by
Bull. 30— ai 1.'5
Morgan as phratries, viz: Munsee, Unami,
and Unalachtigo (q. v.), besides which
some of the New Jersev bands may have
constituted a fourth. ICach of these had
its own territory and dialect, with more
or less separate* identity-, the Munsee par-
ticularly being so far differentiate<l as fre-
(juently to 1h» considered an independent
l)eople.
The early traditional history of the
I^nape is contained in their national
legend, the Walam Olum (cj. v.). When
they made their first treaty with Penn,
in 1682, the Delawares had their council
fire at Shackamaxon, about the present
(iermantown, suburb of Philadelphia,
and under various local names occupied
the whole country along the river. To
this early period l)elongs their great chief,
Tamenen<l, from whom the Tammany
Society takes its name. The different
bands fre<iuently slc.UhI separately but re-
garded themselves as part of one great
body. About the year 1720 the Iroquois
assiimed dominion over them, forbidding
them to make war or sales of lands, a
condition which lastinl until alx)ut the
opening of the French and Indian war.
As the whites, under the sanction of the
Iroquois, crowded them out of their
ancient homes, the Delawares removed
to the Susquehanna, settling at Wyoming
and other points about 1742. They soon
crossed the mountains to the headwaters
of the Allegheny, the first of them hav-
ing setthnl upon that stream in 1724. In
1751, by invitation of the Huron, they
began to form settlements in e. Ohio, anil
in a few years the greater part of the
Delawares were fixe<l upon the Mus-
kingum and other streams in e. Ohio,
together with the Munsee and Mahican,
who had acccmipanied them from the E.,
l)eing driven out by the same pressure
and aftt»rward consolidating with them.
The Delawares, being now within re.ach
of the French and backed by the western
tribes, asserttnl their independence of the
Iroquois, and in the subsequent wars up
to the treaty of (ireenville in 1795 showed
themselves the most determined op-
j)onents of the advamdng whites. The
work of the devoted Moravian mission-
aries in the 17th and 18th centuries forms
an imi)ortant part of the history of thest^
trills (see (hiadenhnettenj 3f*Wt>/jx).
About the year 1770 the Delawares re-
ceived pernliission from the Miami and
Plankishaw to occupy the countrv be-
tween the Ohio and White rs., in Indiana,
where at one time they had 6 villages.
In 1789, by jxjrmission of the Spanish
government, a part of them removed to
Missouri, and afterward to Arkansas, to-
gether with a band of Shawnee. By 1820
the two bands had found their way to
Texas, where the Delawares numbered at
386
DELAWABE
[B. A.
that time probably at least 700. By the
year 1836 most of the tribe had been gath-
ered on a reservation in Kansas, from
which they remove<i, in 1867, to Indian
Ter. and incorporated with the Cherokee
Nation. Another band is affiliated with
the Caddo and Wichita in w. Oklahoma,
besides which there are a few scattered
remnants in the Uniteil States, with sev-
eral hundre<l in Canada, under the va-
rious names of Dela wares, Munsee, and
Moravians.
It is impossible to get a definite idea of
the numbers of the Delawares at any
given period, owing to the fat^t that they
have always been closely connected witn
other tribes, and have hardly formed
one compact body since leaving the At-
lantic coast. All the estimate of the
last century give them and their con-
nected tribes from about 2,400 to 3,OQ0,
while the estimates witliin the present
century are much lower. Their present
IK)pulation, including the Munsee, is
about 1,900, distributeii as follows: In-
corporated witli Cherokee Nation, Ind.T.,
870; Wichita res., Oklahoma, 95; Munsee,
with Stockbridges, in Wisconsin, perhaps
260; Munsee, with Chippewa, in Kansas,
perhap45; "Moravians of the Thames,'*
Ontario, 347; ** Munsees of the Thames, *'
Ontario, 122, with Six Nations on Grand
r., Ontario, 150.
According to Morgan (Anc. Soc, 171,
1877) the Delawares have 3 clans (called
l)y him gentes), or phratries, divided
into 34 subclans, not including 2 sub-
clans now extinct. These clans, which
are tlie same among the Munsee and Ma-
hican, are: (1) Took-seat (* round paw,'
*wolf'). (2) Pokekooungo (* crawling,'
'turtle'). (3) Pullaook ('non-chewing,'
Turkey'). Tht^ clans— Wolf, Turtle,
and Turkey — are commonly given as syn-
onymous with Munsee, Unami, and Una-
lachti^o, the 3 divisions of the Delawares,
exclusive of the New Jersey branch. Ac-
cording to Brinton tney are not clans, but
mere totemic emblems of the 3 geographic
divisions above named. Of these the
Unami held the hereditary chieftainship.
The New Jersey branch probably formed
a fourth division, but those bands broke
up at an early period and became incor-
porated with the others. Many of them
nad originally removed from the w. bank
of Delaware r. to escape the inroads of
the Conestoga. The 3 clans as given by
Morgan are treated under the better
known gt»ographic names.
The Took-seat, or Wolf clan, has the
following 12 subdivisions: (1) Maangreet
( big feet) ; (2) Weesowhetko (yellow tree) ;
(3) Pasakunamon (pulling corn); (4)
Weyamihkato (care enterer, i. e. cave en-
terer?); (5) Toosh war kama (across the
river); (6) Olumane (vermilion); (7)
Punaryou (dog standing by fireside);
(8) Kwineekcha( long body); (9) Moon-
hartarne (digging); (10) Nonharmin
(pulling up stream); (11) Longushhar-
karto (brush log); (12) Mawsootoh
(bringing along).
The Pokekooungo, or Turtle clan, has
the following 10 sulxlivisions, 2 others be-
ing extinct: (1) Okahoki (ruler); (2) Ta-
koongoto (high bank shore); (3) Seehar-
ongoto (drawing down hill); (4) Olehar-
karmekarto (elector); (5) Maharolukti
(brave); (6) Tooshkipakwisi (green
leaves) ; ( 7) Tungulungsi (smallest turtle) ;
(8) Welunun^i (little turtle); (9) Lee-
kwinai (snappmg turtle); (10) Kwisaese-
keesto (deer).
The Pullaook, or Turkey clan, has the
following 12 subdivisions: (1) Moharala
(bigbird); (2)I^lewayou (bird's cry) ;(3)
Mookwungwahoki (eye pain) ; (4) Moo-
harmowikamu (scratt^h the path); (5)
Opinghoki (opossum ground); (6) Muh-
howekaken (old shin); (7) Ton^onaoto
(drift log); (8) Noolamarlanno (hvingin
water ) ; (9 ) Muhkrentharne ( root digger) ;
(10) Muhkarmhukse (red face); (11)
Koowahoke (pine region); (12) Oochuk-
ham (ground scratcher).
The divisions of the Munsee, according
to Ruttenber, were the Minisink, Waor-
anec, Waranawonkong, Mamekoting,
Wawarsink, and Catskill. He names
among the Unami divisions the Navasink,
Raritan, Hackensack, Aquackanonk, Tap-
pin, and Haverstraw, all in n. New Jersey,
but there were others in Pennsylvania.
Among the Unalachtigo divisions in Penn-^
svlvania and Delaware were probably the
Neshamini, Shackamaxon, Passayonk,
Okahoki, Hickory Indians (?), and Nan-
tuxets. The Gachwechnagechga, or Le-
high Indians, were probably of the Unami
division. Among the New Jersey bands
not classified are the Yacomanshaghking,
Kahansuk, Konekotay, Meletecunk, Ma-
tanakons, Eriwonec, Asomoche, Pomp-
ton (probably a Munsee division), Ran-
cocas, Tirana, Siconesses (Chiconessex),
Sewapoo (perhaps in Delaware), Keche-
meche, Mosilian, Axion, Calcefar, Ae-
sunpink, Naraticon, and Manta (perhaps
a Munsee division). The Nyack band, or
village, in Rockland co., N. Y., may have
belonged to the Unami. The Papagonk
band and the Wysox probably belonged
to the Munsee. See also MwMee, Unamif
IJnalachtigo,
The following were Delaware villages:
Achsinnink, Ahasimus (Unami ?), 'Ala-
mingo.Allaquippa, Alleghany, Anderson's
Town, Aquackanonk, Au Glaize, Bald
Eagle's Nest, Beaversville, Beavertown,
Bethlehem (Moravian), Black Hawk,
Black I^eg's Village, Buckstown, Bullets
Town (?), Cashiehtunk (Munsee ?), Cata-
waweshink(?), Chikohoki (Unalachtigo),
BULL. 30 )
DELUGE MYTHS DES CHUTES
387
Chilohocki (?), Chinklacamoose (?), Clis-
towacka, Communipaw (Hackensack),
Conemaugh (?), Coshocton, Croes week-
sung, Custaloga's Town, Etigpiiliik, Eri-
wonec, Frarikstown (?), Friedenshuetten
(Moravian), Friedensstadt (Moravian),
Gekeleinukpechuenk, GnadenhuetU^n
(Moravian), Goshgoshunk, Grapevine
Town (?), Greentown (?), Gweghkongh
(Unami?), Hespatingh (L'nami ?), Hick-
ory town, Hockhocken, Hogstown (?),
Hopocan, Jacob's Cabins (?), Jeromestown
(?), Kalbauvane(?) , Kanestio, Kanhangh-
ton, Katamoonchink (?) , Kickenapawling
(?),Kikthesweniud(?),Killbuck'sTown,
Kishakoquilla, Kiskiminetas, Kiskomini-
toes, Kittaning, Kohhokking, Kuskuski,
Languntennenk (Moravian), Lawunk-
hannek (Moravian), Lichtenau (Mora-
vian), Little Munsee Town, Macharien-
konck (Minisink), Macock, Mahoning,
Manialty, Matawoma, Mechgachkaniic
(Unami ?), Meggeckessou (?), Meniola-
gomeka, Meochkonck (Minisink), Mini-
sink (Minisink), Mohic^k on John's Town
(Mahican ?), Munceytown (Munsee),
Muskingum, Nain (Moravian),
Newcomerstown, 'New Town, Nyack
(Unami ), Ostonwackin, Outaunink (Mun-
see), Owl's Town, Pakadasank (Mun-
see ?), Papagonk (?), Passayonk, Passy-
cotcung (Munsee ?), Peckwes (?), Peixtan
(Nanticoke ?), Pematuning (?), Pequot-
tink (Moravian), Playwickey, Pohkopop-
hunk, Queenashawakee, Rancocas, Rays-
town (?), Remahenonc (Unami?), Roy-
mount, Salen (Moravian), Salt Licfe,
Sawcunk (with Shawnee and Mingo),
Saw kin (?), Schepinaikonck (Munsee),
Schipston (?), Schoenbrunn (Moravian),
Seven Houses, Shackamaxon, Shamokin
(with Seneca and Tutelo), Shannopin,
Shenango (with others), Sheshequin,
Shingiss, Skehandowa (with Mahicans
and Shawnee), Snakestown (?), Soup-
napka (?), Three Legs (?), Tioga (with
Munsee and others), Tom's Town, Tulli-
has, Tuscarawas, Venango (?), Waka-
tomica (with Mingo), Weehquetank
(Moravian), Wekeeponall, Welagamika,
White Eyes, White Woman, WilPs
Town (?), Woapikamikunk, Wyalusing,
Wyoming, Wysox (?). (j. m.)
▲bniJd.— For various forms applied to the Dela-
wares, see under Abnaki. A-ko-tci-U' n2»*.—
Hewitt, Mohawk MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 ('one
who stammers in his speech': Mohawk name
used in derision of the strange tongue. Sec
other forms under Mahican) . A-ko-toft-ki-nhi' .—
Hewitt, Oneida MS. vocab.. B. A. E. (Oneida
name), ▲•koti-ha-ka-nen.— Hewitt, Mohawk MS.
vocab., B. A. E. (Mohawk form). A-ku-tc»-ka"-
nlOl*.— Hewitt, inf n, 1886 (Tuscarora form). Ana-
kwan'U.— Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. £.,508.
1900 (Cherokee name; an attempt at t^je Algon-
quian Wapanaqti, 'easterners'). Auquitsaukon.—
-Stiles (1756) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ists., vii,74,
1801. Delawar. -Lords of Trade (1756) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 120, 1866. Delawaras.— Mt
Johnson Conference (1755), ibid., vi, 977, 1856.
Delaware!.— Lords of Trade (1721), ibid., v, 623,
1855. De Lawam.^Watts (1764) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 4th s., X, 524, 1871. Delaways.— Cowley
(1776) in Arch, of Md., Jour, of Md. Convention,
94, 1892. Delewaret.— Glen (1750) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., VI, 688, 1855. Delewar*.— Campbell
(1761) in Ma.ss. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix, 423, 1871.
Deleways.— CIroghan (1760), ibid., 248. Deluas.—
Soc. Geog. Mex. , 268, 1870. Dillewars.— Lewis and
Clark, Trav., 12. 1806. lenaia.— Boudinot, Star in
the West, 127, 1816. Lenalenape.— Am. Pion . , i, 408,
1842. Lenalinepiet.— Jefferson (1785?), quoted by
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 669. 1855. Lenap.— Raf-
inesque, introd. to Marshall, Ky.. i, 31, 18'24. le-
nape. — Hecke welder in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll . , '2d s. ,
X, 98, 1823. Lenapegi.— Gatschet, Shawnee MS.
vocAb., B. A. E., 1879 (Shawnee name). Lenappe.—
Boyd, Ind. Local Names, 44, 1885. Lenappyt.— Gor-
don (1728)quoted byBrinton.Lenape Leg., 33,1886.
lenawpet.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 65, 1861.
Lenelenape.— Am. Pion., ii, 189, 1843. Lenele-
noppea.— Proud, Penn., ii, '295, 1798. Lenepee. —
Gale, Upper Miss., map, 1867. Leni-Lenape. —
Nuttall, .Tour., 250. 1821. Lenna-lenape.— Drake.
Bk. Iiids., vii. 1848. Lennape.— Ibid., bk. 6,
179. Lennapewi. Squier quoted in Beach,
Ind. Miscel., '28. 1877. Lenni-lappe.— Maximilian,
Tniv., 39, note, 1843. Lcnm-Xenape.— I/)«kiel
(1794) quoted by Barton, New Views, app. 1, 1798.
Lenni-Lennape.— Barton, ibid., x. Lenno Lena-
pee*.— Schoolcraft in N. Y. Hi.«t. Soc. Proc., 80,
1844. Lenno Lenapi.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi.
573, 18.^7. Lenno-Lennape. — Gallatin in Trans. Am.
Antiq. Soc, ii, 44,1836. Lenopi.— Easton treaty
(1757) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 294, 1856. Lenop-
pea.— Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 366, 1816. Leo-
nopi.— Thompson in Jefferson, Notes, 283, 1825.
Leonopy.— Conference of 1759 quoted by Brinton,
Lenape Leg., 34, 1886. Linapit.— Rafinesque, Am.
Nations, i, 121, 1836. Linapiwi.— Squier quoted
in Beach, Ind. Miscel., '28, 1877. Linnelinopier—
Croghan (1759) quoted by Jefferson, Notes, 142,
1825. Linni linapi.— Rafinesque (1833) Quoted by
Brinton, Lenape Leg., 162, 1886. Linnilinopes. —
Boudinot. Star in the West, 127, 1816. Linnope.—
McCoy, Ann. Reg. Ind. Aff., 27, 1836. Lleni-
lenanes.— Nuttall, Jour., 283. 18*21. Loup.—
• Wolf,' the name applied by the French to the
Delawares, Munsee, and Mahican; for forms see
under Mahican. Koohomea. — Yates and Moulton
in Ruttenber, TribesHudson R.,47, 1872 ('Grand-
father': title given to the Delawares by those
Algonquian tribes claiming descent from them) .
Kar-wah-ro.— Marcy, Red River, '273, 1854 (Wichita
name). Renapi. — Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq.
ifsoc., 11,44, 183t> (given as Swedish form, but prop-
erly the form used by the New Jersey branch of
the tribe) . Renni Renape.— Duponceau in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d S..VII, note, 1822 (form used in
New Jersey and Delaware). Bac-a-na'-ga.— Mor-
gan, League Iroq., 338, 1851 (Iroquois name).
Tc4-k»'-n«««.— Smith and Hewitt, Mohawk and
Onondaga MS. vocabs., B. A. E.. 1881 (Mohawk
and Onondaga name). Toi-U'-nhi'.— Smith and
Hewitt, Tuscarora, Cayuga, Seneca, Oneida, and
Onondaga MS. vocabs., B. A. E., 1884 (Cayuga,
Oneida, and Onondaga name). Ttft-U-nlUiN>-
na".— Ibid. (Seneca name), wapanaohki.— For
various forms applied to the Delawares see under
Abnaki.
Deluge myths. See Mythology.
Descent. See Clan and Gen^y Family,
Kinship f Social organization.
Des Chutes. A looBely defined Shahap-
tian group living formerly on and about
Deschutes r., Oreg. The term probably
included remnants of several tribes. The
name has passed out of use, and the In-
dians, if any survive, are probably on the
Warm Springs res., Oreg., under other
names. (l. f. )
De Ohentea.— Meek in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th
Cong., 1st sess., 10, 1848 (misprint). De Chute
river.— Famham, Trav., 112, 1843. ut Chutea.—
888
DESHU DHATADA
[ B. A. E.
Lane in Ind. AfT. Rep., 160, 1850. Des Ohates.—
Wilkes in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 417, 1855. Det Ohute'i
River.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 417, 1855.
Deshoot.— Palmer in Ind. Aff. Rep., 194, 1865.
DediooU.— Palmerin H. R. Ex. Doc. 98,34th Cong.,
l8t Re88..23, 1856. FaU Indians.— Parker, Jour., 1§7,
1K42. FalU Indians.— M'Vickar, Hist. Exped.
Lewis and Clark, ii, 386, note, 1842.
Deshn. A former Chilkat town at the
head of Lynn canal, Alaska.
Dashu.— Emmons in Mom. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.,
Ill, pi. V, 1903. Decu'.— Swanton, field notes, B.
A. E., 1904.
Deshnhittan ( * [H'ople of the house at the
end of the road' ). A Tlingit clan at Kil-
lisnoo, Alaska, l)elonging to the Raven
Shratry. Formerly they lived at Angriin.
ashiton.— Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist..
Ill, pi. xiii, 1903. De'oitan. — Swanton, field notes,
B. A. E., 1904 (contracted form of name).
Decd'hit tan.— Ibid. Desohitan.— Krause, Tlinkit
Ind., 118, 1885.
Desnedekenade (* people of the great
river* ). A tribe of the Chipewyan group
of the Athapascan family living along the
hanks of (treat Slave r., Athabasca, Can-
ada. There were 122 enumerated at Ft
Resolution and 256 at Smith Landing in
1904.
Des-nedhe-kke-nade. — Petitot, Antour du lac des
Esclaves. 363, 1891.
Desnedeyarelottine ( 'people of the great
river below'). An P^tchareottine divi-
sion living on the banks of upper Mac-
kenzie r., Rritish America.
Des-nedhe-yape-rOttine.- Petitot, Autonr du lac
des Esclaves, 363, 1891. Gens du Fort Korman.—
Petitot, Diet. Dt^n^-Dindji^, xx, 1876. Tess-ohotin-
neh.— Ross quoted by Gibbs, MS., B.A. E., 1866.
Tpi-kka-Gottine.— Petitot, Autour, op. cit. ('peo-
ple on the water').
Dest. A former village, probably Tim-
iKjuanan, in Florida, lat. 28° 30^, near
a small lake. — Bartram, Voy., i, map,
1799.
Destcaragnetaga. Named by La Salle
(Margry, Dec, ii, 149, 1877) with the
Mahican, Manhattan, Mini8ink,and oth-
ers as a New England tribe in 1681.
Unidentified.
Destchetinaye ( * tree in a spring of wa-
ter'). A Coyotero band or clan at San
Carlos agency, Ariz., in 1881; consid-
ered by Bourke (Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 112, 1890) to l)e an offshoot of a
former clan of which the Titsessenaye
also formed part.
Destchin ( * red paint ') . An Apache band
or clan at San Carlos agency and Ft
Apache, Ariz., in 1881 (Bourke in Jour.
Am. Folk-lore, iii, 111, 1890); coordinate
with the Chie of the Chiricahua and the
Theshchini of the Navaho.
Des|itohin.-<>atschet, Apache MS., B. A. E., 1883.
Dis-oheine.— White, Apache Names of Ind. Tribes,
MS., B. A. E.
Detsanaynka (Detsdimyuka, 'bad camp-
ers'). A division of the Comanche, for-
merly called Nokoni (* wanderers'), but
on the death of a chiet bearing the latter
name their designation was changed. In
1847 they were said to number 1,750, in
250 lodges, evidently a gross exaggeration ;
in 1869 their number was 312, and in 1872
they were reported at 250. Their present
population is unknown, as no official ac-
count is now taken of the various Coman-
che divisions, (j. M.)
Betsin^yuka.— Mooncy in 14th Rep. B. A. £., 1044,
1896. Oo-aboat band.—Sen. Ex. Doc. 0, 39th Cong.,
iHtsefS., 4, 1866. Kaoanes.- P^nicaut (1712) in Mar-
gr>% D6c., V, 604, 1883. Hacanne.-Jefferys (1768),
Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Naoondmes.— Rivera, Di-
ario, leg. 2.602, 1736. Naonnes.— Bondinot, Star in
the West. 127.1816. Ha-ko-nies.— Neighbors in Ind.
Aff. Rep., 577, 1848. Ko-oo-me.— Leavenworth
(1868) in H. R. Misc. Doc. 139, 4l8t Cong., 2d sees.,
6, 1870. Koconae.- Neighbors in Ind. Aff. Rep.
ia56. 175, 1857. Koconi.— Pimentel. Cuadro Desc.,
n, 347, 1865 (or Yiuhta, con fused with Ute). Noooni
Oomanches.— Leavenworth in Sen. Ex. Doc. 60,
40th Cong., 2d sess., 3, 1869. Ko-ooo-nees.— Butler
in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th Cong., 2d sess.. 6, 1847.
Ko'koni.— Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc.,
XXIII, 300,1886 (trans, •movers'). Ko-ko-nies.—
Neighbors in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 127, 1862.
People in a Circle.- Butler in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th
Cong., 2d sess., 6, 1847. Tist'shinoie'ka.— Hoff-
man in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc., xxiii, 299, 1886
(trans. ' bad movers ' ) . Tistshnoie'ka.— Ibid. , SOO.
Tuxtoh&i67ika.— Gatschet, Comanche MS., B. A.
F., 1893 (trans, 'people removing from place to
place'). Wanderers.— Alvord in H. R. Ex. Doc.
240. 41st Cong., 2d sess., 151, 1870.
Devil. See Religion.
Devil's Medicine-man Band. A Sihasapa
band; not identified. — Culbertson in
Smithson. Rep. 1850, 141, 1851.
Deyodeshot (* there is a spring,' from
the neighboring Avon Springs. — Hewitt).
A modern Seneca settlement that formerly
stood about 2 m. s. e. of the present site
of East Avon, on the site of the ancient
Seneca settlfement of Keinthe. (j. m. )
De-o'-de-sote.— Morgan, League Iroq., 468, 1851.
Di^yodS's'hot.— Hewitt, inf n, 1886 (correct Seneca
form). Dyudoosot.— Shea, note in Charlevoix,
New France, in, 289, 1868. Oandaohioragon.—
Jes. Rel. 1672, 24, 1858. Gandaohiragou.— Jes.
Rel. 1670, 69, 1858. OannondaU. — Denonville
(1687) quoted by Morgan, League Iroq., 316, 1861.
OannoonaU.— Denonville (1687) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist.,ix,367, 1855. Ganoohiaragon.— La Salle (1682)
in Margry, D6c., ii, 217, 1877. Keint-he.— Green-
halgh(1677)in N.Y.Doc. Col. Hist., ni, 251, 1868.
Onnenatu.— Belmont (1687) quoted by Conover,
Kanadesaga and Geneva MS., B. A. E. Oonne-
natu. — Ibid. Saint Jean.— Mission name about
1670. Saint John. — The same. Tanochioragon. —
Writer of 1686 in Margry, D<ic., n, 99, 1877.
Deyohnegano ('at the cold spring').
(1 ) A former Seneca village near CalSlo-
nia, N. Y.; (2) A former Seneca village
on Allegany res., Cattaraugus co., N. Y.,
near Allegheny r.
Allegany 'Collage.— Morgan, League Iroq., 466.
1861. Gananooagan.— La Tour, map, 1779. OoM
Spring Village.— Brown, West. Gaz., 855, 1817.
De6nagano.— -Morgan, League Iroq., 466, 1851.
D<yo-hne-gft'-no.— Hewitt, infn, 1886. Dune-
wangua.— Procter (1791) in Am. State Papers,
Ind. Aff., I, 152, 1832.
Deyonongdadagana ( * two little hills close
together. ' — Hewitt) . An important Sen-
eca village formerly on the w. bank of
Genesee r. near Cuylerville, N. Y. The
tract was sold by the Indians in 1803.
De-o-nun'-da-ga-a.— Morgan, League Iroq., 426,
1851. Dte-yo-non-d»-da-ga»'-».— Hewitt, infn,
1886. Little Beard's Town.— Morris deed (1797) in
Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., i, 627, 1832.
Dhatada. One of the four gentes of the
Hangashenu subdivision of the Omaha.
BULL. 301
DHEGIHA DICTIONARIES
389
The meaning is lost, although Donn^v
translates it 'bin!.'
Ci^adA.— Doreey in '3 i Rep. B. A. K.. 219, 1S8:»:
15th Rep. B. A. E., 226, 1897. Lii'-ta-da.— Morgan,
Anc. Soc., 155, 1877.
Dhegiha ( * on this side. ' — Fletcher ) . A
term employed by J. 0. Dorsey to distin-
guish a group of the Siouan family com-
prising tne Omaha, Ponca, Osage, Kansa,
and Quapaw tribes. Dorsey arranged the
group in two subdi\'i8ion8: the Quapaw
or Lower Dhegiha, consisting of the Qua-
paw only; and the Omaha, or Upper
Dhegiha,' including with the Omaha, the
Osiure, Kansa, and Ponca. See Chiwere.
^•i^.— Doraey in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 211, 1885
(Ponca and Omaha name for thems.lves).
f(ji|alia.— Doroey, Osage Mi^.,B. A. E., 18K3 (name
of Osage for themselves). D^-tu'.— Dorsey,
Kwapa MS. vocab.. B. A. E., 1891 (used bv the Qua-
paw In speaking of themselven). Dhegiha. — Dor-
sey in Am. Antiq., 3(58, 3879. Yegaha.— Dor-
sey, Kansas MS., B. A. E., 1883 (name of Kan.sa
for themselves on their own land).
Dhighida. A Ponca gens, divided into
the subgentes Sindt»agdhe and Wamii-
tazhi, according to Dorsey. The mean-
ing of the name is lost.
fHxida.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 228, 1897
(trans, 'bird' ). De-a-ghe'-ta.— Morgan, Ane. Soc,
155, 1877 (trans, 'many people').
DhiQ. Mentioned by Ofiate (Doc.
In^d., XVI, 114, 1871) as a pueblo of New
Mexico in 1598. Doubtless situated in the
Salinas, in the vicinity of Abo, e. of the
Rio Grande, and in all probability a vil-
lage of the Piros or the Tigua.
Dictionaries. Dictionaries have bi^n
made of at least 63 different North Ameri-
can Indian languages belonging to 19 lin-
guistic families, besides many vocabu-
laries of other languages. Of 122 diction-
aries mentioned below more than half are
still in manuscript.
Beginning with the Eskimauan family,
vocabularies of Greenland Eskimo have
been supplied bv the labors of Egede
(1750), Fabricius (1804), KJeinschmidt
(1871), Rink (1877), and Kjer and Ras-
mussen (1893); of Labrador Eskimo, by
Erdmann (1864); of ChigUt (Kopag-
miut), by Petitot (1876); and there are
collections by Pinartof the Aleutian Fox
(Unalafikan Aleut) dialect (1871, MS.),
and of that of the Kaniagmiut ( 1871-72,
MS.).
In the Athapascan languages there are
the dictionaries of V^reville for the
Chipewyan (1853-90, MS.), the three-
fold dictionary of Petitot for the Mon-
tagnais (Chipewyan), Peau de Lievre
(Kawchodinne), and Loucheux (Kut-
chin) (1876); of Radloff for the Kenai
(Knaiakhotana) (1874); of Garrioch
(1885) for the Beaver (Tsattine); of
Morice for the Tsilkotin (1884, MS.);
of Matthews (1890. MS.) and Weber
(1905, MS.) for the Navaho; and of God-
dard for the Hupa (UKM, MS.):
Of the languages of the Algonquian
family, the (Vee has dictionaries bv Wat-
kins (IH^io), I^combe ( 1874), and Vegr^»-
ville (m. 1800, MS.); the Montagnais, bv
Silvy (ca. 1()78, MS.), Favre (1696, MS.),
Laure (1726, MS.), and I^moine (1901);
the Algonkin, 3 by anonvmous Jesuit
fathers (1661, 1662, 1667, all MS.) and
leach bv Andr^'^ {ca. 1688, MS.), Tha-
venet (ca. 1815, MS.), and Cuoq (1886);
the Micmac, bv Rand (Micmac-English,.
1854, MS., and English-Micmac, 1888);
the Malecite-Passama(iuoddv, bv Demil-
lier {ca, 1840, MS.); the 'Abnaki, bv
Rasles (1691, first printed in 18;^), Au-
berv (1712-15, MS.), Lesueur (ca. 1750,
MS!), Nud^'nans (1760, MS.), Mathevet
(ca. 1780, MS.), andVetromile (1855-75,
MS.); the Natick Massachuset, l>vTnmi-
bull (1903); the Delaware, by Ettwein
(ca. 1788, MS.), Dencke (ca. 1820, MS.),
Henry (1860, MS.), Zeisberger (1887),
and Brinton and Anthony (1888); the
Ojibwa (Chippewa), bv Belcourt {ca.
1840, MS.), Baraga (1853, new ed. 1878-
80), Wilson (1874), and Ferard (1890,
MS.); the Potawatonii, bv Bourassa {ca.
1840, MS.) and Gailland (ca. 1870, MS. );
the Ottawa, bv Jaunay {ca. 1740, MS.);
the Shawnee, *by Gatschet (1894, MS.);
the Peoria Illinois, bv (iravier (ra. 1710,
MS.) and Gatschet ' (1893, MS.); the
Miami Illinois, by Le Boulanger (ca.
1720, MS.); the Menominee, bv Knike
(1882-89, MS.) and Hoffman (1892); the
Blackfoot(Siksika) , bv I^acombe (1882-83,
MS.), Tims (1889), and McLean (1890,
MS.).
In the Iroquoian languages there are
dictionaries of the Huron ( Wvandot), by
Le Caron (161()-25, MS.), Sagard (1632,
repr. 1865), Brebceuf (ca. 1640, MS.),
Chaumonot (ca. 1680, MS.), and Carheil
(1744, MS.); of tlie Iroquois Mohawk,
by Bruyas (1862), Marcoux (1844, MS.),
and Cuoq (1882); of the Iroquois Seneca,
by Jesuit fathers (MS.); the Inniuois
Onondaga, by Jesuit fathers (printed in
1860); of the Iroquois Tuscarora, bv Mrs
E. A. Smith (1880-82, MS.) and Hewitt
(1886, MS.); l)esides extended glossaries
of the (^lerokee, bv Gatschet (1881, MS. )
and Moonev (1885, MS.; and 1900, 19th
Rep. B. A. i:.).
In the Muskhogean languages there are
the dictionaries of the Choctaw by Bying-
ton {ca. 1865, MS.), Wright (1880), and
Rouquette (ca. 1880, MS.); of the Mas-
koki (Creek), bv Robertson (1860-89,
MS.) and Loughridge (1882, MS.).
The Siouan family is provided with
dictionaries of the Santee Dakota bv
Riggs (1852, 1890) and Williamson (1871,
1886); of the Yankton Dakota, by Wil-
liamson (1871); of the Quapaw, the Bi-
loxi, the Winnebago, and the Dhegiha
390
DIEGUESoS — DIGHTON ROCK
[B. A. E.
(Omaha), by Dorsey (1891-95, MS.); of
the Hidatea, by Matthews (1873-74) ; and
of the Kansa. by Bourassa (ca. 1850, MS.) .
Other linguistic families are represent-
ed by dictionaries or extended glossaries
as follows: Natchesan, Natchez lexicon,
by Gatschet (1893, MS.); Chitimachan,
Shetimasha (Chitimacha), by Gatschet
(ca. 18S0, MS.); Caddoan, Pawnee, by
Dunbar (1880, MS.); Tonkawan, Ton-
ka wa, by Gatschet (ca, 1877, MS.); Kio-
wan, Kiowa, by Mooney (1900, MS.);
Shoshonean, Snake (Shoshoni), by Ge-
l>ow (1864, 1868), and Comanche, by
Rejon (1866); Koluschan, Chilkat, by
Everette (ca. 1880, MS.); Chinimesyan,
Tsimshian, by Boas (1898, MS. ) ; Salishan,
Kalispel by Giorda (1877-79), Twana by
Eells (ca. 1880, MS.), and Nisqualli by
Gibbs (1877); Chinookan, Chinook by
Gibbs (1863) and Boas (1900, MS.), and
Chinook jargon by Blanchet (1856),
Gibbs (1863), Demers (1871), Gill (1882),
Pro8ch(1888),Tate(1889),Coones(1891),
Buhner (1891, MS.), StOnge (1892, MS.),
and P:ells(1893, MS.); Kitunahan, Ku-
tenai, by Chamberlain (1891-19a5, MS.);
Shahaptian, Nez Perce by McBeth (1893,
MS.) and (Jatschet (1896, MS.); Lutua-
mian, Klamath bv Gatschet (1890) ; Shas-
tan, Shasta, l)v"Gats<«het (1877, MS.);
Piman, Cora by Ortega (1732, repr.1888),
Opata by Pimentel (1863), and Tarahu-
mare by Steffel (1791) and Lumholtz
(1894, MS.). (w. E.)
piegngnos. A collective name, prob-
ably iii part synonymous with Comeya,
applied by the Spaniards to Indians of
the Yuman stock who formerly lived in
and around San Diego, Cal., whence the
term; it included representatives of many
tribes and has no proper ethnic sig-
nificance; nevertheless it is a firmly es-
tablished name and is here accepted to
include the tribes formerly living about
San Diego and extending s. to about lat.
31° 30^. A few Diegueilos still live in the
[ neighborhood of San Di^o. There are
I about 400 Indians included under this
name as attached to the Mission agency of
California, but they are now oflficially rec-
ognized as part of the ** Mission Indians."
The rancherias formerly occupied by the
Dieguefios, so far as known, are: Abascal,
Awhut, Cajon, Camaial, Caxn^, Capitan
Cirande, Cenyowprctikel(?), Cojuat, Co-
guilt, Corral, Cosoy, Cuyamaca, Ekquall,
Focomae, Gueymura, Hasoomale, Has-
sasei, Hataam* Hawai, Honwee Val-
lecito, Icayme, Inomaasi, Inyaha, Kwal-
whut, ls£ai2.A« ^ Punta, Lorenzo, Mac-
tati, Maramoydos, Mataguay, Matamo,
Matironn, Mattawottis, Melejo, Mesa
Chiquita, Mfisa^-Gxande, Meti, r^ellmole,
Nipaguay, Otai, Otat, Pocol, Prickaway,
San Felipe, San Jos^:^, San Luis, Santa Is-
alH'l, StHjuan, Suahpi, Tacahlay, Tahwie,
Tapanque, Toowed, Valle de las Viejas,
Wahti, Xamacha, Xana, and Yacum.
The Conejos and the Coyotes are men-
tioned as former bands of the Diegueflos.
(h. w. H.)
Daifano.—Palmer in Am. Nat. xi, 736, 1877. Dut-
nno.— Ibid., 743. Bieffaiut.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 861,
1859. I>ieseeaM.~Whipple, Exp'n from San Di-
ego to the Colorado, 2, 1851. DiegvnM.— Sle^h
(1873) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 91, 43d Cong., Ist 8es8.,6,
1874. Die«no.— Burton (1856J in H. R. Ex. Doc.
76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 115, 1857. BiefmoBS.—
Jackson and Kinney, Rep. Miss. Ind., 20, 1883.
DieguinM.— Wozeneraft (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,
32(1 ong., spec, sess., 288, 1853. Diegonot.— Whip-
ple (1849) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 100, 1852.
Difwiet.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 13, 1879. Diogenet.^Ind.
Aff. Rep. 1902, 595. 1903. Disguino.— Burton (1856)
in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 127,
1857. KamU.— A. L. Kroeber, inf 'n, 1905 ( Mohave
name; cf. Comeya). Llece«nM.— Whipple, Exp'n
from San Diego to the Colorado, 2. 1861 (misprint).
Lliruno*.— Whipple (1849) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, li, 100, 1852 (misprint).
Digger. Said by Powell to be the Eng-
lifih translation of Nuanuints, the name of
a small tribe near St George, s. w. Utah.
It was the only Paiute tril)e practising
aj^riculture, hence the original sijjnifica-
tion of the name, " digger." In time the
name was applied to every tribe known
to use roots extensively for food and hence
to l)e ** diggers.*' It thus included very
many of the tribes of California, Oregon,
Idaho, Utah, Neva<la. and Arizona,
tribes speaking widely different languages
and embracing perhaps a dozen distinct
linguistic stocks. As the root-eaters were
supposed to represent a low type of In-
dian, the term speedily became one of
opprobium. (h. w. h.)
Digging sticks. See Agriculture^ Per-
f orated stones.
Dighton Sock. A mass of silicious con-
glomerate lying in the margin of Taunton
r. , Bristol CO. , Mass. , on which is an ancient,
probably prehistoric, inscription. The
length of the face measured at the base is
11 J ft. and the height a little more than
5 ft. The whole face, to within a few
inches of the ground, is covered with the
inscription, which consists of irregular
DIOHTON ROCK, MASS. ( LENGTH ABOUT 12 Ft)
lines and outline figures, a few having a
slight resemblance to runes; others tri-
angular and circular, among which can
be distinguished 3 outline faces. The ear-
liest copy was that of Danforth in 1680.
Cotton Mather copied a part as early as
1690 and sent a rude woodcut of the entire
inscription to the Royal Society of Great
Britain in 1712. Copies were also made
BULL. 30]
DIPPERS AND LADLES DISCOID AL STONES
391
by Isaac (jreenwood in 1730; l)y Stephen
Sewell, of Cambridj^e, in 1768; by Prof.
Winthrop in 1788; by Joseph Gooding in
1790; by Edward A. Kendall in 1807; by
Job Gardner in 1812, and one for the
Rhode Island Historical Society in 1830.
Soon after this the sup^estion was made
that it was a runic inscription of the
Norsemen, and the interest excited by
this cause<l it to be frequently copied and
published. The subjet^t, with accompa-
nying figures, was thoroughly discusseil
by Danish antiquaries, especially by Rafn,
in Antiquitates Americanae (18*37). The
earlier drawings mentioned above are re-
produced by Mallery (10th Rep. B. A. E.,
pi. xi, 1893). The annexed illustration
from a photograph is perhaps the most
nearly correct of any published. The
opinions advanced in regard to the origin
and signification of the inscription vary
widely. The mem})er8 of the Frencfi
Academy, to whom a copy was sent, judged
it to be Punic; lx)rt, in a paper in
ArchsBologia (Ijondon, 1786), expressed
the opinion that it was the work of a i)eo-
ple from Siberia; Gen. Washington, who
saw Winthrop*s drawings at Cambridge
in 1789, pronounced the inscription simi-
lar to those made by the Indians; Davis
and Kendall also ascribed it to the Indians,
the former thinking it represente<l an In-
dian deer hunt. The Danish anti(|iiaries
decided that it was the work of the North-
men; Prof. Finn Magiiusen interpreted
the central portion, assuming it to consist
of runes, as meaning that Thorfinn with
151 men took {possession of the country;
and even Dr De Costa was persuaded that
the central part is runic. Buckingham
Smith, according to Haven (I^oc. Am.
Autiq. Soc, Apr. 29, 1863), was inclined
to believe it to consist of ciphers used by
the Roman Catholic Church. Schoolcraft,
although charged with wavering in his
opinion, decidetl without reservation in
1853 that it was enti rely Indian . The latter
author submitted several drawings of the
inscription to an Algonquian chief, who,
rejecting a few of the figures near the cen-
ter, interpreted the remainder as the me-
morial of a battle between two native
tribes. Although this Indian's explana-
tion is considered doubtful, the general
conclusion of students in later years,
especially after Mallery*s discussion, is
that the inscription is the work of In-
dians and l)elongs to a type found in
Pennsylvania and at points in the W.
Following are the more important
writings on the subject of Dighton Rock :
Antiquitates Americanse, 1837; Archaeolo-
gia, VIII, 1786; T. Ewbank, N. Am. Rock-
writing, 1866; Gravier in Coinpte-rendu
Cong. Intemat. des Americanistes, i, 1875;
Haven in Proc. Am. Antiq. Soc, Apr.
29, 1863, Oct. 21, 1864, Oct., 1867; Ken-
dall, Tniv., 11, 1809; Mallery in lOth
Rep. B. A. P:., 1893; Mem. Am. Aca<i. Arts
and Sci., ii, pt. 2, 1804, iii, pt. 1, 1809;
Philos. Trans. Roy. Soc. I^md., xxviii,
1714; Ran (1) in Am. Antiq., i, 1878; (2)
in Mac. Am. Hist., Feb., 1878, Apr., 1879;
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tril)es, i, 1851, iv, 1854;
Trans. Soc. Anticiuaries, lx)nd., 1732;
Winsor, Hist. Am., i, 1884. (c. t.)
Dippers and Ladles. See RecepUidfs.
Discoidal stones. Prehistoric objects of
unknown use (see Problematical objects)
whose most ty])ical form is that of a
<louble-convex or double-concave lens.
The perimeter is a circle and the sides
range from considerably convex through
plane to deeply concave. The diameter
varies from 1 in. to 8 in., the tliickness
from one-fourth of an inch to 6 in., verv
rarely passing these limits; the two di-
mensions have no definite relation to
each other. Some specimens are convex
on one face and ])lane on the other; but
when one face is concave the other is
also. Of tlie latter fonn many have a
secondary depression at the center; others
have a jxirforation which is sometimes
enlarged until the disk lyecomes a ring.
They are made principally of very hard
rock, as quartz, flint, jas|H»r, novaculite,
quartzite, porphyry, syenite, and the like,
though stone as
soft as marble,
sandstone, barite,
and even steatite
was sometimes
chosen. No type
of relics is more
<liflicult to classify , »
than tlu^e disks. ^- - «— = ^.c...*. (,.)
The name first given them, and by which
they are still comhionly known, is'**chun-
key stones," from the native name of the
game played with analogous disks by
southern Indians. But the description of
the game, considered in conne<'tion with
the gieat variation in size an<l material of
the sjKJcimens, shows that onlv a small
percentage of them could have Invn thus
utilized. Culin believes that a limite<l
number may be definitely rt»garde<l as
chunkey stones. He recognizes three
types: (1) j)erforated ( least common ) ; (2)
symmetrical, unperforated ; (3) asym-
metrical, imperforated. A similar diver-
sity is observed in the stones used in the
analogous Hawaiian game of maika (24th
Rep. B. A. E., 1906). From the sm(M)th,
symmetrical, highly polished chunkey
stone they merge by insensible grada-
tions into mullers, pestles, mortars, pitted
stones, polishingandgrindingstones, ham-
mers, sinkers, club heads, and ornaments,
for all of which purposes except the last
they may have been use<l in some of
their stages, so that no dividing line is
possible. They present various styles
392
DISHES
[b. A.a.
and degrees of finish. Many retain their
natural surface on both sides with the
edge worked off by grinding or pecking,
the latter marks possibly resulting from
use as hammers. The sides may be
ground down while the edge remains un-
touched; or, when made from a thick
pebble, the sides may be pecked and the
edge ground. Some specimens which are
entirely uii worked require very close ex-
amination to distinguish them from oth-
ers whose whole surface has been artifi-
cially produced. It is possible, however,
to arrange a large number of specimens
from one locality in a regular series from
a roughly chipped disk to a finished
product of the highest polish and sym-
metry. The finest specimens, in greatest
numbers, come from the states s. of the
Ohio r., and from Arkansas eastward to
the Atlantic. The territory within a
radius of 100 m. around Chattanooga,
Tenn., and for about the same distance
around Memphis, is especially rich in
them. From s. e. Ohio to central Mis-
souri a considerable number has been
found, though few of them are as well
wrought as those from the S. Rather
rough ones occur along the Delaware r.
Beyond the limits indicated the type
practically disappears. Discoidal stones
corresponding closely with eastern types,
save that the faces are rarely concave,
are found in the Pueblo country and in
the Pacific states. See Chunkey.
Objects of the class here described are
referred to by numerous authors, includ-
ing Fowke (1) Archieol. Hist. Ohio, 1902,
(2) in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Jones,
Antiq. So. Inds., 1873; Moorehead, Pre-
hist. Impls., 1900; Squier and Davis, An-
cient Monuments, 1848; Rau, Archseol.
Coll. Nat. Mus., 1876; Thruston, Antiq.
Tenn., 1897. (o. f.)
Disease. See Health.
Dishes. Vessels for the preparation and
serving of food and other purposes were
manufactured by all Indian tribes. While
their use as receptacles prescribes a con-
cavity of circular, oval, or oblong outline,
there is a great variety of shape, decora-
tion, etc., according to individual taste
or tribal custom, and a wide range of
material, as stone, shell, bone, ivory,
horn, rawhide, bark, wood, gourd, pot-
tery, and basketr}'.
The vessels for' serving food were not
used to hold individual portions, for the
Indians ate in common; but the little
dishes held salt and other condiments,
small quantities of delicate foods, etc.
The larger dishes contained preparations
of corn or other soft vegetables, and the
trays and platters were for game, bread,
etc., or for mixing or preparing food.
In many cases the cooking pot held the
common meal, and portions were taken
out by means of small dishes and ladles,
in which they were cooled ^d eaten.
Some dishes had special uses, as platters,
mats, and trays for drying fruits, roasting
seeds, etc., and as ceremonial bowls, bas-
kets, etc.
From archeological sites have been col-
lected many examples of dishes. Some
made of soapstone were found in several
Eastern and Southern states, and in
Wyoming and California. Vessels formed
of seashells, cut principally from Busy-
con, and also from Casm, JStromhus, and
Fasciolariay were found in Ohio, Indiana,
Illinois, Iowa, Arkansas, Georgia, and
Florida. Dishes of pottery come from
many parts of the United States and some
made of wood from Florida.
The Indians in general lised dishes of
wood, and even where pottery, basketry,
and bark were common, wooden vessels
were made. Each region supplied suit-
able woods. A predilection for burl wood
and knots was general. The majority of
existing wooden vessels were fashioned
with iron tools, but before metal was
introduced they were excavated by means
of fire and stone tools. Eskimo wooden
dishes were sometimes cut from a single
piece, but they usually had a rim of bent
wood fastened to the excavated bottom
and were oval in shape. Those of the
N. W. coast tribes were boxes of rectangu-
lar shape, with scarfed and bent sides
attached to the bottom; but the Indians
also had excavated dishes carved to rep-
resent animal forms in great variety, and
small bowls of horn occur. The Salishan
tribes made dishes of wood and horn
which were elaborately carved. The
northern Athapai^cans as a rule used
dishes, platters, and trays of birch bark
folded and sewed, but among some tribes
the dishes were like those of the Eskimo.
The Chippewa had well-finished wooden
dishes of rectangular, oval, or circular
shape. The Iroquois made excellent
dishes, cups, bowls, etc., of burl wood,
and sometimes furnished them with han-
dles. The Plains Indians also used in
preference burl or knot wood, and while
as a rule their dishes were simple in out-
line and homely, some specimens were
well carved and finished. The Virginia
and other Southern Indians cut dishes,
often of large size, from softwood ; of these
the Cherokee and Choctaw bowls and
platters made of tupelo are noteworthy.
The Ute made rude oval bowls with pro-
jections at the ends, and oblong platters
and knot bowls with handles. The
Paiute used for dishes the carapace of the
box turtle. The Pueblos, while relying
mainly on pottery and basketry, had
dishes wrought from knots and mountain-
sheep horn. The Pima and Paf>ago made
oblong trays and shallow platters from
BULL. 30]
DI8TAN0IA — DJIGUAAHL-LANAS
393
mesquite wood. The Hupa of n. Califor-
nia cut large, flat trays from redwood.
The tribes of the Santa Barbara region,
California, inlaid wooden vessels with
mother-of-i)earl.
Bark disnes were extensively used by
tribes withm the birch area and to some
extent by all the forest Indians. Those
of the S. made great use of gourds.
The Pueblo Indians employed pottery
and to some extent basketry for dishes,
and the same is true in a lesser degree of
some of the Plains and Eastern tribes.
Southwestern and Califomian Indians
made use of basketry almost exclusively.
See Barky Basketryy Botrlny Implements^
PoUerify ReceptacleSy Woodwork.
Consult (loddard in Univ. Cal. Publ.,
Am. ArchRH)l. and Ethnol., i, no. 1, 1903;
Holmes in 20th Rep. B. A. E., 1903;
Moore in Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.,
x-xii, 1894-1903; Murdoch in 9th Rep. B.
A. E., 1892; Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E.,
1899; Niblack in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1888,
1890; Swan ton in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist., v, 1905; Turner in 11th Rep. B. A.
E., 1894. (w. H.)
Distanoia. One of the villages of the
Opata. — Hrdlicka in Am. Anthrop., vi,
72, 1904.
DitsakaJia (Ditsd^kdnay * sewers ' ) . A Co-
"manche division, the name of which was
formerly Widyu ( *awl * ), but on the death
of a chief l)earing the same nan^e it was
changed to Ditaakana. They were also
popularly known as Yamparika^ from
their habit of eating yam pa root. They
were estimated to number 356 in 1869,
and 200 in 1872, but their present popu-
lation is unknown, as the Comanche divi-
sions are not officiallv recognizeil. ( j. m. )
Ditaii'kliia.— M(K)ney in'l4th Rei>. B. A. E., 1044,
1896. EUitii'biwat.— Ibid. (' northernerH ' ) . Oui-
yu«.— Butcher and Lyendecher, MS. Comanche
vocRb., B. A. E., 1867. It-ohit-a-bud-ah.— Neigh-
bors in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tr., ii, 128, 1852. Jupet.—
Bol. Soc. Mex., v, 318, 1857. Lamparaoki.— Bol-
laert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., ii, 2f»5, 1850.
Lemparaok.— Latham in Tran.s. Philol. Soc. Lond.,
1856. Llamparieat.— Escudero, Notieias Nuevo
Mex., 83, 1849. Boot Digger*.— Butler in H. R.
Doc. 76, 29th Cong. , 2d sess. , 6, 1847. Root-Eater«.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 522, 1861. Sampa-
rioka.— Maximilian. Trav., 510, 1843. Tappariet
Oomanohet.— Alvord in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18. 40th
Cong., 3d sess.. 23. 1869 (misprint). Teaohatx-
_ . . enna.— M<
XXIII, 300, 1886 ('the sewing people'). Tup«>.—
Domenech, Deserts, ii, 21, 1860. wl'dyu.— Mooney
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1044, 1896 ('awl'). Wiui-
«.— Ibid., 36. Teokat Kenna.— McKusker in
Sen. Ex. D(K'. 40, 40th Cong., 3d sess., 14, 1869.
Ted-Chath-Kennas.— Ibid. Tedohat-kenna.— I bid.
Tittakanai.— Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc.,
>le'). Tup«>. —
Tdyu.— Mooney
. _. .'awl'). Wiui-
ai'em.— Hoffman in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc.. xxiii,
300, 1886. Taohakeenees.— Penney in Ind. Aff.
Rep. 1869, 101, 1870 (probably the same; Yampa-
rakas also given) . TamharMk.— Ruxton, Life in
Far West, 201. 184i. Tamparaok.— Burnet in
Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, i, ISO, 1851. Yampara-
kaa.— Penney in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 101, 1870.
Tampareoka.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 544,
1878. Yampareekas.— HazenInInd.Aff.Rep.1869.
388, 1870. Yamparica*.— Mayer, Mexico, ii, 123,
1853. Yam'pari'ka.— Hoffman in Proc. Am.
Philos. Soc., xxiii. 299, 1886 ('yam pa eaters').
Yam-pate-eat.— Neighbors in Ind. Aff. Rep., 574,
1^8. Yampateka.~tcn Eatc, Rcizen in N. Am.,
384, 1885. Yampaxicas.— Domenech, Deserts, ii,
21, 1860. Yamperack.— Drake, Bk. Inds., xii, 1848.
Yamperethka.— Battey, Advent., 90, 1875. Yam-
per-nkeu.— Leavenworth in H. R. Misc. Doc. 189,
41st Cong., 2d sess., 6. 1870. Yam-pe-uo-ooet.—
Butler in H. R. Doe. 76, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 6,
1847. Yampirioa.— Sen. Ex. Doc. O, 39th Cong.,
1st se&s., 4, 1866. Yam-pi-rio-coe«.— Butler in H. R.
Doc. 76, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 8, 1847. Yapa.—
M(x>ney in 14th Rep. B. A. £., 1044, 1896. Yapa-
ine.— Pimentel, Cuadro Descr., ii, 347, 1865. Ya-
parehoa.— Ibid. Ya-p»-re«-kA.— Butcher and Ly-
endecher, Comanche MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1867.
Ya'pa-re'xka.— Gatschet, MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1884. Yappariokoet.— McKu.sker in Sen. Ex. Doc.
40, 40th Cong., 3d sess.. 13, 1869. Yappariko.— Al-
vord in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18, 40th Cong., 3d sess., 6, 1868.
Diwd'll. See Bowl.
Djahui-gitinai (DjaaruV gttind^iy 'sea-
ward P^agles*). A division of the I^^le
clan of the Haida. They considered
themselves a part of the (litins of Skide-
gate, being fc»iinj>ly those who live<l far-
thest outward down Skidegate inlet,
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. They
formed the main part of the Eagle popu-
lation at Naikun and C. Ball.— Swanton,
Cont. Haida, 274, 1905.
Dj'aaquig'it 'ena'i.— Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can./26, 1889: ibid., Tith Rep., 25, 1898. TsaarRri'
gjrit'inai'.— Ibid.
Djahai-hlgahet-kegawai ( Djaxui^UjiV'
xet qe^gawa-iy * those lx)m on the seaward
side of Pebble town ') . A subdivision of
the Hlgahet-gitinai, of the Haidaof Queen
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. — Swanton, C<mt.
Haida, 274, 1905.
Djahai-Bkwahladagai (Djaxul^ nqod^hul-
aga-i, 'down-the-inlet8kwahladas'). A
division of the Raven clan of the Haida.
They were probably once a part of the
Skwahla<las who lived on the w. coast of
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., bt^ing
distinguishetl from them by the fact that
they lived st^award {djahtii) down Skide-
gate inlet.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 269,
1905.
Djaaqoi'tk'uatradaga'i. — Boas, 5th Rep. N. W.
Tribes Can., 26. 1SH9. Ttaagwiiguatl^adegai'.—
Ibid., 12th Rep., 25, 1898.
DjoBtyedje ('long lake'). A former
village of the Kansa on Kansas r., near
Lawrence, Kans. — Dorsev, Kansa MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1882.
Djigogiga {DjigofjVga). A legendary
Haida town of the Kasta-kegawai on Cojv
perbay, Moresby id., Quet»nCharlotte ids.,
Brit. Col. — Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279,
1905.
Djigaa (Djl^gua). A legendary Haida
town on the n. shore of Cumshewa inlet.
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., whence
the ancestress of the Djiguaahl-lanas, Kai-
ahl-lanas, Kona-kegawai, and Stawas-hai-
dagai is said to have come. — Swanton,
Cont. Haida, 94, 1905.
Djigaaahl-lanaB ( DjVgua al WnaSy *Dji^-
guatown people ' ) . A ])rominentdi vision
of the Eagle clan of the Haida, so nanunl
from a legendary town on the x. side of
Cumshewa inlet, whence their ancestress,
394
DJIHUAGITS DOHA8AN
[B. A.
who was also the ancestress of the Kai-
ahl-lanas, Kona-kegawai, and Stawas-hai-
dagai, is said to have come. They lived "in
the town of Kloo. — Swan ton, Cont. Haida,
273, 1905.
Taefoatl U'nas.^Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 25, 1898.
Djihaagits (Djhcuagits^ Masset dialect
Chawagiiiy * always low water' ). A Haida
town on a creek just s. of Naikun, e. coast
of Graham id., x. w. Brit. Col. Anciently
it belonged to the Naikun-kegawai, but
afterwanl to the Chawagis-stustae. —
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 280,1905.
Djishtangading. A Hupa village at a
bend in Trinity r. at the extreme s. end
of Hupa valley, Cal., below the mouth of
Tishtangatang cr. (p. e. g. )
DjicUnadm.— Goddard, Life and Culture of the
Hupa, 12, 1903. Pa-tet-oh.— McKee (1851) in Sen.
Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Con^., spec. Ress., 194, 1853. Pat-
iseh-oh.— Meyer, Nach dem Sacramento, 282, 1856.
Peht-aau-an.— Oibbs, MS., B. A. £., 1852. Papht-
■oh.— Gibbsin Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 139,
1853. PetMwan.— Goddard, infn, 1908 (Yurok
name). Tish-tan'-a-tan.— Powers in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., Ill, 73, 1877.
Djas-hade (Djus .nide^y 'people of Dj us
island ' ). A division of the Eagle clan of
the Haida, living on an island of the
same name at the entrance of Tsooskahli,
Queen Charlotte ids., and closely related
to the Widja-gitnnai, Tohlka-gitunai, and
Chets-gitunai. They afterward moved
to the mouth of Masset inlet. A branch
of the Kuna-lanas received the same
name. — Swanton, Cont. Haida, 275, 1905.
Diot haedrai'.— Boa8, r2th Rep. N.W. Tribes Can.,
23, 1898.
Bockniackie. A name of the maple-
leaved arrowwood ( Viburnum acerifo-
lunn). The Indians used this plant for
external application in turners, etc. The
terminal -?> suggests that the word came
from them first to the Dut<!h, and from
these to English-speakers. According to
Miss L. S. Cnaml>erlain (Am. Nat., xxxv,
3, 1901), the Dela wares smoked dogeku-
mak. W. R. Gerard (Gard. and For., ix,
262, 1896) says it is from a Mahican word
meaning *it is cooling,' which would be
related to the Chippewa takaiamagad, * it
is cool.* A Delaware origin is however
more probable. (a. f. c.)
Doestoe (*live where there are large
falls of water * ) . A subdivision of Apache
under chiefs Chiquito and Disalin in 1875.
Doet-to'-«.— White, Apache Names of Ind. Tribes,
MS.,B.A.E.
Dog. A former division of the Foxes.
Dog. See ^fauy Hoi'ses.
Dog Creek. A Shuswap village or band
on upper Eraser r. below the mouth' of
Chilcotin r., Brit. Col. Pop. 14 in 1904.—
Can. Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. 2, 72, 1904.
Dogaohamas. A name for Comus cir-
cinata, cited. by Gerard (Gard. and For.,
IX, 263, 1896), who states that it is a cor-
ruption of damagauatihmtnosij * pipe-
stem bush,' in the Penobscot dialect of
Algonquian. The word is also spelled
dogackerme. (a. p. c.)
Dogekamak. See Dockmackie.
DogL Mentioned by Lederer ( Discov. ,
2, 1672) as a people who inhabited the
piedmont region of Virginia before the
appearance of the historic tribes in that
section. They were extinct at the time
of his journey in 1670. Apparently dis-
tinct from the Doeg (Nanticoke).
Tacci.— Lederer, op. cit.
Do-gitanai ( Do-git Atia^-if *Gitans of
the west coast * ) • A di vision of the Eagle
clan of the Haida. They are said to have
branched off from the Mamun-gitunai,
and, as the name implies, their towns
and camping places were on the w. coast
of Queen Charlotte id., Brit. Col. — Swan-
ton, Cont. Haida, 275, 1905.
Tofyifinai'.— Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
22, 1898.
Dogs. A band or a secret order of the
Hidatsa. — Culbertson in Smithson. Rep.
1850, 148, 1851.
Dogs. See Domestication.
Dog Soldiers. See Military sodeiies,
Dogaenes. A tribe or division of a tribe
met by Cabeza de Vaca about 1527, when
they were living on the mainland near
the coast, probably in the vicinity of San
Antonio bay, Tex. The region was prob-
ably occupied by Karankawan people,
but the data are too meager to determine
the ethnic relations of the Doguenes.
SeeGatschet, Karankawalnds., 46, 1891.
Aguenea.— Cabeza de Vaca ( 1&55) , Bandelier trans.,
120,1905. DeaguanM.— Ibid.,79. Degaenes.— Ibid.,
123. Doguenes.— Cabeza de Vaca, Smith trans.,
137, 1871. Draguanes.— Ibid., 5(>, ed. 1851.
Dohasan (Dohdsdn^ Mittle bluff' ; also
Dohd, DoMtey * bluff * ). The hereditary
name of a line of chiefs of the Kiowa for
nearly a century. It has been borne by
at least four members of the family, viz:
(1) The first of whom there is remem-
brance was originally called Pd-do*g&M
or Pad6'gA, * White-fatted-buffalo-bull,'
and this name was afterward changed
to Dohd or Dohdte. He was a promi-
nent chief. (2) His son was originally
called A^'anofl^'te (a word of doubtful
etymology), and afterward took his
father's name of Dohdte, which was
changed to Doh^siin, * Little Dohate,' or
* Little-bluff,' for distinction. He be-
came a great chief, ruling over the whole
tribe from 1833 until his death on Cimar-
ron r. in 1866, since which time no one
has had unquestioned allegiance in the
tribe. His portrait was painted in 1834
by Catlin, who calls him Teh-toot-sah,
and his name appears in the treaty of
1837 as " To-ho-sa, the Top of the Moun-
tain." (3) His son, whose widow is An-
klma, inherited his father's name, Do-
hdsan. He was also a distinguished
BFLL. 30]
D0KI8 BAND— DOLLS
395
warrior, and died about 1894. His scalp
shirt and war-bonnet case are in the Na-
tional Museum. (4) The nephew of the
great Doh^san II and cousin of the last
mentioned (3) was also called Doh^n,
and always wore a silver cross with the
name ** T^ohasan *' enj^raved upon it. He
was the author of the Scott calendar and
died in 1892. Shortly before his death
he changed his name to Ddnpii^, * shoul-
der-blade,* from ddriy * shoulder' (?),
leaving only Ankfmii's husband (3) to
bear the hereditary name, which is now
extinct. Dohasan II, the greatest chief
in the history of the Kiowa tribe, in 1833
succeeded A'ddte, who had been de-
posed for having allowed his people to
be surprised and massacred by the Osage
in that year. It was chiefly through his
influence that peace was made between
the Kiowa and Osace after the massacre
referred to, which has never been
broken. In 1862, when the Cheyenne,
Arapaho, Comanche, Kiowa, and Kiowa
Apache were assembled on Arkansas r.
to receive annuities, the agent threat-
ened them with punishment if they did
not cease their raids. Dohasan listened
in perfect silence to the end, when he
sprang to his feet, and calling the atten-
tion of the agent to the hundreds of tipis
in the valley below, replied in a charac-
teristic speech: **The white chief is a
fool. He is a coward. His heart is
small — not larger than a i^ebble stone.
His men are not strong — too few to con-
tend against my warriors. They are
women. There are three chiefs — the
white chief, the Spanish chief, and my-
self. The Spanish chief and myself are
men. We do bad toward each other
sometimes — stealing horses and taking
scalps — but we do not get uiad and act
the fool. The white chief is a child, and,
like a child, gets mad quick. When my
young men, to keep their women and
children from starving, take from the
white man passing through our country,
killing and driving away our buffalo, a
cup of sugar or conee, the white chief is
angry and threatens to send his soldiers.
I have looked for them a long time, but
they have not come. He is a coward.
His heart is a woman's. I have spoken.
Tell the great chief what I have said."
In addition to the treaty of 1837 Dohasan
was also a signer of the treaty of Ft
Atkinson, Ind. T., July 27, 1853, and that
of Oct. 18, 1865, on Little Arkansas r.,
Kansas. See Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A.
E., pt. 1, 1898.
DokisBand. A Chippewa band, so named
from their chief, residing on a reserva-
tion of 30,300 acres at the head of French
r., where it leaves L. Nipissing, Ontario.
They have a large admixture of French
blood, are Roman Catholics, and obtain
a livelihood by hunting and fishing and
by working in adjacent lumber camps.
The band numl)ereil 62 in 1884 and 78 in
1904. (j. M.)
Dolls. Dolls were common among all
the American tribes. They were fashioned
from stone, wood, clay, skin, dough,
corncobs, plants, and rags. Those used
merely as playthings were frequently
elaborately dressed by the mother in ac-
cordance with tribal costumes. Human
hair was sometimes fastened to the head
and arranged in the tribal style, the face
was painted, the eyebrows were marked,
and tattoo lines were indicated. Labrets
of bone or shell were put in place among
the tribes which used these objects, and
the doll was further adorned with ear-
rings, braceletiji, and necklaces. The K*»-
kimo father carved the small l)oneor ivory
dolls more or less elaborately, and ma<le
them stand upright, to
the great delight of the
Eastern Eskimo Doll
Western Eskimo Doll
children. Among these people there was
a festival in which small figures or dolls
were used to represent the dead, at which
time the people prepared and partook of
food in their presence in memory of the
time when those represented were living.
The corncob and rag dolls were usually
of the child's own manufacture. Those
made of dough were used in a social cere-
mony among the Iroquois. Dolls were
provided with cradles, clothing, tents, and
vessels and utensils of clay.
In the 8. W. and the extreme N. little
figures were made for ceremonies in which
mythic ancestors or dead relatives were
remembered. Travelers have sometimes
mistaken these fibres for idols. Among
the Hopi these little figures are of soft
Cottonwood, so cut and painted as to indi-
cate in miniature the elaborate head-
dress, decorated face, body, and clothing
396
DOLORES
[B. A. B.'
oi those who represent kachinas, or im-
personations of ancestral " breath Ixxiies"
or spirits of men. These dolls are not
worshipped, but are made by the priesta
in their kivas during the great spring
ceremonies as presents
for the little girls, to
whom they are presented
on the morning of the
last day of the festival by
men personating kachi-
nas (Fewkes). In this
way the young become
familiar with the com-
HOPi Kacmina doll of
WOOD (1-4)
Hopi DOLL OF Clay (1-2)
plicated and symbolic masks, ornaments,
and garments worn during tribal and
religious ceremonies. See AmxisementSj
Child life J Games.
Consult Dorsey and Voth in Field
Columb. Mus. Publ., 55 and 66; Fewkes
in 17th, 19th, and 21st Reps. B. A. E.,
and Internat. Archiv. Ethnog., vii, 1894;
Moonev in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 1898; Nel-
son in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 1899; Turner
in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 1894. (a. c. f.)
Dolores (contracted from Span. Naestra
Senora de Io.h Dolores, * Our Lady of Sor-
rows'). A mission established among
the Pima by Father Kino in 1687, just
above Cucurpe on the headwaters of the
w. branch of the Rio Sonera, in x. w.
Sonora, Mexico. According to Venegas
it had 2 visitas (probably Remedios and
Cocosi>era) in 1721. Pop. 29 in 1780.
Dolores.— Man^e (1699) in Bancroft, Ariz, and N.
Mex., 352, 1889. Los Dolores.— Orozco y Berra,
Geog., 347, 1864. Nuestra Senora de los Dolores.—
Kino (1694) in Doe. Hist. Mex., 4th s., i, 248,1856.
Dolores. A Spanish Franciscan mission
established in California within the site
of the city of San Francisco on Oct. 9,
1776. When (xov. Portola, in searching
for Monterey, came to the bay of San
Francisc!o, that had remained hidden to
all previous explorers. Father Junipero
Serra regarded it as a miraculous discov-
ery, for the visitador-general in naming
the missions to l)e established at the
havens of the coast had said to the mis-
8i(m president, who was disappointed be-
cause the name of the founder of the
order was omitted, that if St Francis de-
sired a mission he must show his port.
The missionaries impatiently brooked the
obstacles that delayed planting a mission
at the port that their patron saint had
revealed. The site was beside the lagoon
of Nuestra SeHora de los Dolores, hence
the mission of San Francisco de Assisi
came to be known as Dolores mission.
There were no natives present when the
mission was opened. The inhabitants,
the Romonan, had been driven from the
peninsula by a hostile tribe who burned
their raucherias and killed all who did not
escape on rafts. When the fugitives re-
turned to find their home occupied by the
Spaniards they were disposed to contend
for its possession. In the first fight the sol-
diers fired in the air, in the next they shot
a native, upon which the savages begged
for peace, but fled when the Spaniards re-
leased after a whipping those that they had
captured, and were not seen again until
spring. The missionaries gradually won
tneir confidence after they returned and in
October baptized 1 7 adults. At the end of
5 years there were 215 converts, and in 1796
they numbered 720. The neophytes when
harshly treated could escape easily by
water, and after 280 had run away and
the soldiers were unable to stay the exodus
the head missionary sent out a party of
15 Christian Indians, of whom 7 were slain
by the Cuchillones. A priest, Father
Fernandez, brought charges a^inst the
missionary fathers, and Gov. Borica de-
manded that they reform their treat-
ment— long tasks, scant rations, and cruel
punishments, evidenced by 200 escapes and
as many deaths within a year. Although
Father Lasuen, the mission president,
promised and endeavored to remedy the
alleged evils, the Indians continued to
run away, and the missionaries, in 1797,
sent out another party of neophytes to
gather in the lost flock, but the former
barely escaped the fate of the preceding
party. The' Saclan harbored the fugitives
and threatened to kill the mission In-
dians if they continued to work and the
soldiers if they interfered. The governor
sent a detachment of troops to punish
them, an<l in the fight 2 soldiers were
wounded and 7 natives killed. The
Cuchian were also attacked and the sol-
diers returned with 88 of the fugitive
Christians. During the decade 1,218 na-
tives were baptized and 1,031 buried, and
at the end of the 18th century the neo-
phyte population was 644. The cattle
had increased to 8,200 head, and the
crop in 1800 was 4,100 bushels, half of it
wheat. The land about the mission was
sterile, and fields 12 m. distant were
planted. The neophytes first dwelt in
nrLL. .SO]
DOMESTICATION
397
rude huts of willow poles au<l tule, but
l)etween 1798 and 1798 adobe houses were
built for every family and the thatched
roofs of the church and mission building:s
were replaced with tiles. On looms made
by the Indians wtmlen cloth was produced
ill quantities sufticient to clothe the con-
verts and blankets were woven for the
presidio. In 179(> the manufacture of
(X)arHe pottery wa^ l)egun. I n 1 820 the neo-
phyte impufation was 622, but the mor-
tality continued to be greater than in any
other mission. In 1830 the population
was 219. The sheep fell off to one-fifth
of the former number and only a third
as much grain was produced as in 1810.
The decline was due to the division of the
mission when San Rafael was foundeil in
a healthier location in 1817 and San
Francisco Solano in 1823. While the
baptisms were exceeded only at San Jose,
there were 2,100 deaths at San Fnincisco
Dolores and San liafael, whither half the
neophytes were removed, in the 10 years
endmg with 1820. Solano, founded with
the intention of transferring the entire
mission, received half the neophytes of
the parent mission, but returned a part
when it was constituteil an indepi^ndent
establishment. The buildings fell into
ruin, except the (thurch, which is still
standing as part of the Dolores mission
church of San Francisco. The number
of neophytes fell to 204 in 1832, and in
1840 there were 89 at San Mateo aii<l
about 50 scattered about the district.
The civilian administrator found little
property in 1834 and soon none was left.
The neophytes received nothing; they
were never organized in a pueblo, but
were apportioned among the settlers and
held in servitude against their will. In
1843 the last renmant, 8 age<i starvelings,
appeale<l to the(Jovernment for help.
The tribes that came first under the in-
fluence of the Dolores mission were the
Ahwaste, Altahmo, Olhon, Romonan,
and Tulomo, all speaking the same lan-
guage, the C'ostanoan, as did some other
trifcfes, not so numerous, that lived on or
near the thickly peopled shores of San
Francisco bay. * They subsisted by hunt-
ing and fishing. Both sexes often wore
their hair short, having the custom of cut-
ting it when afflicted by sorrow or misfor-
tune. Those of the s. allowed their hair
to grow and wore the long carefully
dresse<i braids adorned with Ix^ds and
trinkets wound alx)ut the head like a tur-
Imn. The miHlicine-men, through their
incantations, prt^tended to be able to bring
fish as well as to cure the sick. Of the blub-
ber of stranded whales and of seals they
were extremely fond, and they ate nuts,
berries, and camas bulbs, and made breatl
of seeds and acorns. The people who came
to the mission from the opposite shore of
the l>ay and the estuary were of lighter
hue and more corpulent than the coast
Indians. The men went naked, coating
themselves with mud on cold mornings;
the wt)men wore an apron of sc<lge or
rushes reaching iH'foreand lH*hin<l to the
knees and a (jloak of the same material
over their shoulders. People are said to
have marrie<l and parted without cere-
mony, mothers taking their chiMren with
them, and men often took whole families
of sisters for their wives. These Indians
burned their dead.
The folhnvin^ list of rancherias and
tribes fnmi which the niissi<»n drew its
neophytes is adapted from thosi^ re<*orded
in the parish books (Tavlor in Cal. Far-
mer, Oct. 18, 1861):
Al^moctac, Acnagis, Acyum, Aleta, Al-
tahmo, Alueiichi, Anmtaja, Ananuis, .\n-
amon, Anchin, Aramay, Assunta, Atarpe,
Cachanegtac, Caprup, Caras<'an, ('azo|><>,
Chagunte,Chanigtac,Chapugtac, ('haven,
Chipisclin, C'hipletac, Chiputca, Chuchic-
tac, Chupcan,Churmutce, Chutchin, Chy-
nau, Conop, Klarroy<le, Flunmuda, (Jam-
chines, (ienau, (Juanlen, (luloismistac,
Halchis, Ilorocroc, Huimen, Hunctu,
Itaes, Joipiizara, Jos(iuigard, Junianuic,
Juris, Uimsim, Libantone, J^ivangebra,
Livangelva, Luianeglua, Luidnt^g, Macsi-
num, Malvaitac, Mitline, Muingpe, Naig,
Naique, Napa, Olestura, (hnpivromo, Oto-
acte, Oturl)e, Ousint, Patnetac, Petaluma,
Pro(|ueu, Pructaca, Pruristac, Puichon,
Purutea, Puy(H)ne, (^uet, Sadaues, Sa-
gunte, Sa raise, Saruntac, Satunmo, Sat-
uraumo, Sicca, Sij)anuni, Siplichi(jujn,
Siscastac, Sitintajea, Sitlintaj, Sittintac,
Ssalayme, Ssichitca, Ssipudca, Ssiti,
Ssogen^ate, Ssuj>ichum, Subchiam, Su-
chui, Suncha(]ue, Talcan, Tamalo, Tat-
quinte, Timigtac, Timsin, Titivu, Torose,
Totola, Tubisuste, Tuca, Tui)uic, Tu-
puinte, Tuzsint, Tchium, Trebure, Ts-
sete, Vager])e, Vectaca, Yacnnii, Yaeomui,
Zomiomi, Zucigin. The names of the
tribes which furnishe<l the early converts
were Ahwaste, BollH)ne, Chiguau, Cuchil-
lones, Chuscan, Cotejen, Junatca, Karkin,
Khulpuni, Olemos, Olhon, Olmoloeoc,
()li>en, (^uemelentus, Quirogles, Saclan,
Salzon (Suisiin), Sanehineia, Saucou,
Sichican, Uchium, rquitinac.
See Hittell, Hist. Cal., 1885-97; lian-
croft. Hist. Cal., 1886-90; Palou, Life of
Serra, 102, 1884.
DoxneBtication. The Indian learne(l a
great deal from and was heli)e<l in his
efforts by the actions of animals in their
wild state. The i>eriod of domestication
began when he held them in captivity for
the gratification of his desires or they be-
came attacheil to him for nnitual iM'uefit.
In this process there are gradations:
1. Connnensalisiii begins when fotnl
is left for serviceable animals to devour.
398
DOMESTICATION
[B. A. bT"
80 that these may give notice of danger
or advantage. Tne coyote is said to re-
veal the presence of the mountain lion.
Small annnals are tolerated for their
skins and flesh. Plants would be sown
to attract such creatures as bees, and
tame animals would be regularly fed at
later stages.
2. Confinement is represented by such
activities as keeping fish and other aquatic
animals in jwuds; caging birds and carry-
ing off their young, gallinaceous fowl last;
tying up dogs or muzzling them; cor-
ralling ruminants, and hobbling or teth-
ering wild horses so as to have them near,
keep them away from their enemies, or
fatten them for eating. The aborigines
had hi) diflftculty in breeding some ani-
mals in confinement, but few wild birds
will thus propagate, and the Indians could
obtain those to tame only by robbing?
nests. Lawson says of the Congaree of
North Carolina that "they take storks
and cranes before they can fly and breed
them as tame and familiar as dung-hill
fowls."
3. Keeping animals for their service or
produce, as dogs for retrieving game or
catching fish, hawks for killing birds;
various creatures for their fleece, hides,
feathers, flesh, milk, etc., and taming
them for amusement and for ceremonial
or other purposes, were a later develop-
ment. Roger Williams says the Narra-
ganset Indians of Rhode Island kept tame
hawks about their cabins to frighten small
binls from the flelds.
4. Actually breaking them to work,
training dogs, horses, and cattle for pack-
ing, sledding, hauling travois, and, lat-er,
for riding, constitutes complete domesti-
cation.
In pre-Columbian times the dog was
the most perfectly subdued animal of
the North Americans, as much so as the
llama in w. South America. But other
species of mammals, as well as birds, were
in different degrees rendered tractable.
After the comingof thew^hites the meth-
ods of domesticating animals were per-
fected, and their uses multiplied. More-
over, horses, sheep, cattle, donkeys, hogs,
and poultry were added to the list, and
these profoundly modified the manners
and customs of many Indian tribes.
Domestication of animals increased the
food supply, furnished pets for old and
young, aided in raising the Indian above
the plane of low savagery, helped him to
go aoout, multiplied his wants, furnished
a standard of property and a medium of
exchange, took the load from the back
of w^omen, and provided more abundant
material for economic, artistic, and cere-
monial purposes.
Domestication had a different develop-
ment in each culture area. In the Arctic
region the dog was preeminent; it was
reared with unremitting care, the women
often suckling the puppies; all its life it
was trained to the sled. As the dogs were
never perfectly tamed, it was no easy task
to drive a team of them; yet by the aid
of dogs and sleds, in combination with
umiaks, the whole polar area of America
was exploited by the Eskimo, who found
these an excellent means of rapid transit
from Asia to the Atlantic. In recent years
the successful introduction of the reindeer
among the Alaskan tribes has proved a
blessing. The Mackenzie-Yukon district
is a canoe country, and domestication of
the dog was not vigorously pnsecuted
until the Hudson's Bay Company gave
the stimulus. But southward, among the
Algonquian and Siouan tribes of the ^reat
lakes and the plains, this animal attained
its best as a hunter and a beast of burden
and traction. It was also reared for food
and for ceremonial purposes. Not more
than 60 pounds could be borne by one
dog, but twice that amount could be moved
on a travois. The coming of the horse
( q. V. ) to the great plains was a boon to the
Indian tribes, all of which at once adopted
the new instrument of travel and transpor-
tation. The horse was apotheosizea; it
became a standard of value, and fostered
a greater diversity of occupations. But
the more primitive methods of domesti-
cation were still practised throughout
the middle region. In the n. Pacific area
dogs were trained to hunt; but here and
elsewhere this use of the dog was doubtless
learned from the whites. Morice writes
of the Athapascan tribes of the interior
of British Columbia: ** Owing to the semi-
sedentary state of those Indians and the
character of their country, only the dog
was ever domesticated among them in
the common sense of the word. This
had a sort of wolfish aspect, and was
small, with pointed, erect ears, and uni-
formly gray, circumstances which would
seem to impljr that the domesticating proc-
ess had remained incomplete. The flesh
of those wolf dogs was relished by the em-
ployees of the Northwestern and Hudson's
Bay companies, who did not generally eat
that of those of European descent. In a
broader sense, those aborigines also oc-
casionally domesticated and have con-
tinued to domesticate other animals, such
as black bears, marmots, foxes, etc., which
thev took when young and kept as pets,
tiecf up to the tent post or free. Such
animals*, as long as they remained in a state
of subjection, were considered as members
of the family and r^rded as dogs, though
often called by the endearing names
of *sons,' 'daughters,* * grandsons,* etc.
Birds were never caged, but might be seen
at times hobbling about with the tips of
their wings cut.**
BULL. :iOj
DONACONA DRAGGING-CANOK
399
In the California-Oregon area birds of
gay plumage were caged, plucked, and
then set free. On Santa Catalina id. birds
called large crows by the Spaniards were
kept and worshipped, recalling Boscana's
story of the Shoshonean condor cult on
the adjacent California coast. In the
S. W., the desert area, the whole devel-
opment of domestication is seen. The
coyote was allowed to feed about the
camps. The Querecho ( Vaquero Apache )
of Coronado in 1541 had a great nu!nl)er
of large dogs which they obliged to carry
their baggage when they moved from place
to place ( see Traroia). Sonieof the Pueblo
tribes practised also the caging of eagles,
the rearing of turkeys, and, since the com-
ing of the Spaniards^ the herding of sheep,
goats, burros, and horses. (o. t. m. )
Donacona. A Huron chief found by
Jacques Cartier, in 1585, residing with his
people at the junction of St Croix and St
Lawrence rs. , Canada. Although Cartier
was well received and kindly treated by
this chief, he managed, partly by strata-
gem and partly by force, to convey the
latter aboard his vessel and carry him to
France Where he soon died. (c. t.)
Donally^B Town. A ( Creek? ) settlement
mentioned in 1793 as situated on Flint r.,
Ga. — Melton in Am. State Papers, In J.
Aff., II, 372, 1832.
Dooesedoowe ( ' plover. ' — Hewitt ) . A
clan of the Iroquois.
Amo.— French writer (1666) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., IX, 47, 1855. Doo-ese-doo-we— Morgan,
League Iroq., 46, 1851 (Seneca form). Kioohet.—
French writer (1666), op. cit. T&-wi>-t&-wi>.—
Hewitt, inf'n, 1886 (Tu-scarora name).
Dostlan-lnagai (Do-sLfan-lnagd^-iy 'west-
coast rear-town people*). A local sub-
division of the Stlenga-lanas, one of the
larger Haida divisions on the Raven
side, who lived on the x. w. coast of
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. (>)1. A small
section of them was called Kaiihl-
lanas.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 271, 1905.
Du Hiade.— Harrison in Proo. and Trans. Rov.
Sec. Can.. 2d s., Ii, sec. 2, 124. 1895. TottlEngU-
nafai'.—Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 22,
Dotame. A tribe of which I^wis and
Clark learned from Indian informants.
They were said to speak the Comanche
language and to number 30 warriors, or
120 souls, in 10 lodges. No traders had
been among them; they traflScked usually
with the Arikara, were hostile toward
the Sioux, but friendly with the Mandan,
the Arikara, and with their neighbors.
From the use of the name in connection
with Cataka (Kiowa Apache) and Ne-
Imousin (Comanche), the Dotame are
seemingly identifiable with the Kiowa.
Detune.— Fisher, New Trav., 26, 1812. Do-U ma.—
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 102, 1905. Do-U-
me.-lbid.
Dotohetonne. An unidentified Texan
tribe allied to the Caddo in 1687 ( Joutel
in Margry, Dec, iii, 409, 1878). The
ending suggests dinne^ tlnne^ the Atha-
pascan term for ' people, ' and hence a
possible Apache connection.
Dotle. A Koyukukhotana village on
Kovukuk r., Alaska; pop. 12 in 18^.
Dotlekakat.- Allen. Rep. on Alaska, 140, 1887. •
DotnskaBtl (IhYt/AsklAaL^ 'those who
left the west coast*). A subdivision of
the Sagua-lanas, a division of the P^le
clan of the Haida. The name seems to
imply that they formerly lived on the w.
coa«t of Queen' Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.,
but in historical times they were in the
town of Kung, in Naden harbor, with
the other Sagua-lanas. — Swanton, Cont.
Haida, 275, 1905.
Doughnut stones. See Perforated stones.
Donglas. The 1(K*^1 name for a l>ody of
Lower Lillooet l)etwt»en Lillooet and Har-
rison lakes, Brit. Col.; pop. 7<> in 1904. —
Can. Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. ii, 74, 1905.
Doustioni. A tril)e, formerly living on
Red r. of Louisiana, that from ita proxim-
ity to the Natchitoches and the Yatasi was
pfobablv kindred thereto and belonged
to the Caddo confederacy. The people
are mentioned bv Joutel* in 1687, as al-
lies of the Kadohadacho. P^nicaut, in
1712, met them with a party of Natchi-
toches, and remarks that for the 5 years
previous they had been constantly wan-
dering, ami living by the chase (Margry,
Dec, V, 488). Their warriors at that
time numbered al)out 200. The cuuse of
the abandonment of their village is un-
known, but when in 1714 they accepted
the invitation of St Denys to settle near
the Natchitoches, and 'seed was given
them, they seem to have returner! to
their agricultural and village life. In
1719 La Harpe speaks of them as num-
bering 150 and dwelling on an island in
Red r. not far distant from the French
post among the Natchitoches. If any
survive they are merged with the kindred
Caddo in Oklahoma. (a. c. f.)
Douesdonqua.— Joutel (1687) in MarKry, DtV., ill,
409, 1878. Douetiany.- Pi^nicaut (1712), ibid., v,
498, 1883. Douetionie.— P<^nicaut (1713) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., n. r.. i, 117, 1869.
Dragging-canoe (translation of his In-
dian name, Tsfyu-g^nsfnl; known also as
Cheucunsene and Kunnesee). A promi-
nent leader of those Cherokee who were
hostile to the Americans during the
Revolutionary war. He moved with his
Karty to the site of Chickamauga, where
e contiinied to harass the Tennessee
settlements until 1782, when the Chicka-
mauga towns were broken up. His peo-
ple then moved farther down the river
and established the '*live lower towns,"
but these also were destroy e<i in 1 794. In
accounts of the Creek war Dragging-canoe
is mentioned as one of the prominent
Cherokee chiefs in alliance with Jackson,
and a participant in the last great eacoun-
400 DRAMATIC REPRESENTATION DREAMS AND VISIONS [b.a.b:
ter at Horseshoe Bend. — Mooney in 19th
Rep. B. A. P:., 54, 63, 97, 1900.
Dramatic representation. Among many
tribes ceremonies were dramatic in charac-
ter. Every religious rite had its dramatic
phases or episodes expressive of beliefs,
emotions, or desires, but in certain in-
stances the dramatic element dominated
and l)ecanie differentiated from the cere-
mony. In such cases there were masked
and costumed actors with stage setting,
efhgies, and other properties, and events,
historical or mythic, in the cultural his-
tory or life of the trii)e were represented.
The most elal)orate of these exhibitions
were those of the Pueblo peoples and
the tribes of the N. W. coast. Among
the Hopi a dramatic representation oc-
curs yearly in March either in the open
plaza or in a kiva. The space between
the fire and one end of the room is set
apart as the stage; at the rear a decorated
screen is placed, behind which are men
who sound shell trumpets and manipu-
late the effigies of a plumed serpent, which,
at times, are projected through the screen
and contend with the actors in front.
Marionettes of the Corn-maids are occa-
sionally employed and are skilfully man-
aged; birds walk atx)ut and whistle;
imitation fields of corn are swept over by
ser|)ent effigies, and men representing pri-
mal gods struggle with the efligies in an
effort to overcome them. The stage set-
ting and personnel are changed for every
act, and during the change blankets are
held around the fire to darken the kiva.
In the large wooden dwellings of the
N. W. mythsand legends were dramatized.
The j)erformance took place at one end
of the house, where concealed openings
in the painted wall admitted the actors
who personated gods and heroes, and
there were devices to give realistic effect
to strange and magical scenes. Songs
and dances accomi)anied the dramatic
presentation.
Some of the great tribal ceremonies of
the inland peoples, while religious in ini-
tiative, were social in general character.
They portrayed episodes in the past his-
tory of the tribe for the instruction of the
younger generation. There were societies
a part of whose function waa to preserve
the history of its membership. This was
done by means of song and the dramatic
representation of the acts the song
commemorated.
The Pawnee were remarkable for their
skill in sleight-of-hand performances.
Seeds were sown, plants grew, blossomed,
and yielded fruit; spears were thrust
through the body and many other sur-
prising feats perfonned in the open lodge
with no apparent means of concealment.
During many dramatic representations,
particularly those which took place in
the open air, episodes w^ere introauced in
which a humorous turn was given to some
current event in the tribe. Sometimes
clowns appeared and by their Unties re-
lieved the tensity of the dramatic pres-
entation. Among the Pueblo Indians
these "delight-makers,** as Bandelier
translates the name of the Koshare of the
Queres villagers, constitute a society which
performs comedies in the intervals of the
public dances. See Ceremony^ Dance.
Consult Bandelier, Delight Makers,
1900; Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 1895; Dorsey
and VotYi in Field Columb. Mus. Publ.,
Anthrop. ser. ; Fewkes ( 1 ) in 15th and 19th
Reps. B. A. E., 1897, 1900; (2) Proc. Wash.
Acad. Sci., ii, 1900; (3) various articles
in Am. Anthrop. and Jour. Am. Folk-
lore; Fletcher in Proc. A. A. A. S., xlv,
1896; Matthews in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist., VI, 1902; Powell in 19th Rep. B.
A. E., 1900; Stevenson in 23d Rep. B. A.
P:., 1905. (a. c. p.)
Dreams and^sions. Most revelations
of what was regarded by the Indians as
coming from the supernatural powers
were believed to be received in dreams
or visions. Through them were bestowed
on man magical abilities and the capacity
to foresee future events, to control disease,
and to become able to fill the office of
priest or of leader. It was the common
belief of the Indians that these dreams
or visions must be sought through the
observance of some rite involving more
or less personal privation; an exception
is found in the Mohave who believe that
the dream seeks the individual, coming
to him before birth, or during infancy,
as well aa in mature life. In general the
initiation of a man's personal relations to
the unseen through dreams and visions
took place during the fast which occurred
at puberty, and the thing seen at that
time became the medium of supernatural
help and knowledge, and in some tribes
determined his affiliations. It was his
sacred object. It had no reference to his
kindred, but was strictly personal in its
efficacy, and he painted it on his person
or his belongings as a prayer for assist-
ance— a call for help m directing his
actions. Anv dream of ordinary sleep in
which this object appeared had meaning
for him and its suggestions were heeded.
Men with a natural turn of mind toward
the mysterious frequently became sha-
mans and leaders in rites which dealt
with the occult. Such persons, from the
time of their first fast, cultivated their
ability to dream and to have visions; the
dreams came during natural sleep, the
visions during an ecstasy when the man
was either w'holly or partially uncon-
scious of his surroundings. It was gen-
BULL. 30]
DRESS DRILLS AND DRILLING
401
erally believed that such men had power
to bnng or to avert disaster through direct
communication with the unseen.
Many of the elaborate ceremonies ob-
served/among the tribes were said to
have been received through visions, the
actual performance following faithfully
in detail the prefiguration of the vision.
So, too, many of the shrines and their
contents w^ere believed to have been su-
pematurally bestowed in a vision upon
some one person whose descendants were
to be the hereditary keepers of the sacred
articles. The time for the performance
of rites connected with a shnne, and also
other ceremonies, frequently depended
on an intimation received in a dream.
The dreams of a man filling an impor-
tant position, as the leader of a war party,
were often regarded as significant, espe-
cially if he had carried w ith him some one
of the sacred tribal objects as a medium
of supernatural communication. This
object was supposed to speak to him in
dreams and give him diffctions which
would insure safety and success. Fore-
casting the future was deemed possible
by means of artificially induced visions.
Tne skin of a freshly killeil animal, or
one that had been well soaked for the
purpose, was wound around the neck of
a man until the gentle pressure on the
veins caused insensibility, then in a vision
he saw the place toward which his party
was going and all that was to take plac«
was prefigured. In some tribes a skin
kept for this special purpose was held
sacred and used for divining by means of
an induced vision. Some Indians em-
Eloyed plants, as the peyote, or mescal
utton, f or li ke purposes. That the spirit
left the bodyand traveled independently,
and was able to discern objects distant
both in time and space, was believed by
certain tribes; others thought that the
vision came to the man as a picture or in
the form of a complete dramatic cere-
mony.
Tlie general belief concerning dreams
and visions seems to have been that the
mental images seen with closed eyes were
not fancies but actual glimpses of the un-
seen world where dwelt the generic types
of all things and where all events tnat
were to take pjace in the visible world
were determined and prefigured.
Consult Fletcher in 22d Rep. B. A. E.,
1903; KroeberinAm. Anthrop., iv,no. 2,
1902; Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
1896. (a.c.p.)
Dress. See Adornment^ Clothing.
Drills and Drilling. The first drill was
a development of the primitive awl, a
sharp-pointed instrument of bone, stone,
or copper which was held in one hand,
pressea against the object, and turned
hack and forth until a hole was bored.
Bull. 30—05 26
Single hand Drills
The point was set in a socket of bone or
wood. By setting it in a transverse han-
dle increased pressure and leverage were
obtained, witn increased penetrating
Cower. Artificially perforated objects of
one, fish bones, ivory, pottery, stone, and
wood, common toallperiodsof the world's
history, are found in mounds, caves, shell-
heaps, and burial places of the Indians.
The holes vary from
an eighth to a half
inch in diameter, and
from a fourth of an
inch to 6 in. or more
in depth. Shell, bone,
and stone weredrilled
to make beads. Stone
pipes with bowl and
stem openings of dif-
ferent sizes were com-
mon, and whistles
were made of stone
and bone. Tubes in
stone, several inches
long, with walls
scarcely an eighth of
an inch thick, were accurately drilled.
The columella of the Busycon shell was
bored through for beads. The graceful
butterfly-shaped objects found through-
out E. United States were perforated with
surprising accuracy. It has been said that
in prehistoric times the natives bored
holes through pearls by means of heated
copper spindles. The points of drills were
made of copper rolled into a hollow cylin-
der or of pieces of reed, or of solid metal,
stone, shell, or wood. Boring by means
of hollow drills was usual amon^ all early
races of Europe, Asia, and Africa; it was
common also in Mexico, and instances are
not rare in the mounds of Ohio and else-
where in the United States, but in North
America solid drill jwints were
generally employed. Grass and
bristles were also used as drills,
being worked by twirling between
I ^ >=^^s==^^^ ^^ thumb and
the index fin-
ger. Points of
nard stone or
metal usually
cut by direct
contact, but
where the
points were of
wood, dry or
wet sand proved
more effectual. At times the points were
separate from the shafts and were firmly
attached to the latter by strings of hide or
vegetal fiber. The rapidity with which a
drill cuts depends on the velocity of the
revolution, the weight and size of ita dif-
ferent parto, the hardness of the abrading
material and of the object drilled, the
diameter of the hole, and its depth. The
TuaULAR DRILL Of ShECT-CO^PCR AND
SECTION or BORINO
402
DRILL8 AND DRILLING
[B. A. E.
Drill-point or Stone and Sec-
tion OP BORING
point used is indicated by the form of the
perforation. The frequency with which
objects are found bored from both sides is
proof that the Indian appreciated the ad-
vantage of reducing friction. Progress in
the elaboration of drills consisted mainly
in heightening speed of revolution.
If the drill-point be of wood much
depends on its hard-
ness, for when too
hard the wood
grinds the sand to
powder, while if it
be too soft the grains
catch at the base of
the cavity and cut
away the shaft.
Only wood of proper
texture holds the sand as in a matrix and
enables it to cut to the l>est advantage.
The insides of drill holes show by tlie
character of their stria? whether the cut-
ting was accomplifcshed by direct pressure
or with the aid of sand.
The simplest form of drill was a straight
shaft, varying from a fourth to three-
fourths of an inch in diameter and from
10 in. to 2 ft in length.
This shaft was revolved
in alternating directions
between the hands, or,
when the shaft was hehl
horizontally, it was rolled
up and down the thigh section of bead with
with the right hand, the biconical perforation
point of the drill being presse<l against
the object hehl in the left hand; or at
times the object was held between the
nake<l feet while the drill was revolved
between the
hands. This
drill waw in use
at the time of
Columbus and
is the only one
represented in
the Mexican
codices ( Kings-
borough, An-
tiq. of Mex., i,
pi. 39). With
the exception
of the strap
drill, which
was apparently
used only in the
far N., this is
theonlvfonnof
drill referred to
by early Amer-
ican writers.
The strap drill, used both as a fire drill
and as a perforator, is an improvement on
the shaft drill, both in the number of its
revolutions and in the pressure which
may l>e impartcnl to the shaft. The shaft
is kept in i>osition })y means of the head-
Tme Revolving Shaft Drill Used by a
HUPA
Strap Drill used by Eskimo of Alaska
piece of wood, which is held in the teeth.
A thong that is wound once round the
shaft, one end being held in each hand,
is pulled alternately to the right and to
the left. The thong was sometimes fur-
nished with
hand pieces
of bone or
Ixjar's teeth
to give a
firmer grip
to the strap.
This drill,
apparently
known to the
cave people
of France, as
it certainly
was to the
early |)eople8
of G reece,
Egypt, and
India, has
l)eenusedby
the (Treen-
landersfrom
early times and is employed also by the
Aleut. To a person using the strap drill
the jar to the teeth and head is at first
quite severe, but much of the disagree-
able sensation disappears with
use.
I #1 Closely related to the strap
I I B drill, but a great improve-
\ I f ment over the latter, is the
* '* ■ bow drill, which can be re-
volved with
much greater
sf)eed. The head
piece of the bow
drill is held in
position with the
left hand, while
the strap is at-
tached to the
two ends of
after wrapping
around the shaft, as with the
strap drill, is alternately re-
volved by a backward and forward mo-
tion of the bow.
The pump drill, ntill employed in the
arts, is said to have been known to the
Iroquois and is useil by the Pueblo Indi-
ans. This drill con-
sists of a shaft which
passes through a disk
of stone, pottery, or
wood,andacro88piece
through which the
shaftalsoruns ; toeach
end of the crosspiece
is attached a string or
buckskin thong hav-
ing sufficient play to allow it to cross the
top of the shaft and to permit the cross-
piece to reach close to the disk. This
Eskimo Bow Drill
Showing Parts
bow, and
ow Drill with
Stone Point, a,
Hand-Piece
USE OF BOW Drill
BULL. .30]
DRY -PAINTING
403
disk is turned to wind the string about
the shaft; this raises the crosspiece. By
pressing down the crosspiece after a few
turns have been taken, the shaft is made
to revolve and the disk receives sufficient
impetus to rewind the stringj which by
successive pressure and re-
use or Pump Drill by a Zumi
Pump drill
lease, continues tlie reciproc»al movement
necessary to cutting. The speed attained
b^^ the pump drill is much greater than
with the bow drill or the strap drill, and
the right hand is left free to hold the
object that is being drilled. The pump
drill, although long in com-
mon use among the Pueblo
Indians, is probably of for-
eign origin.
A remarkable and unitjue
drill was recently used by
the Indians of Round valley,
Cal., for drilling small holes
through hard white shelln.
Its shaft is of hard wood, the
disk taking the place of the
crosspiece and the weight of
the shaft giving sufficient
impetus. The thong of this
drill passes over the shaft
and tnrough opposite sides
of the disk, ana is attached
to the shaft near the lx)ttom.
The disk moves freely up
and down the shaft, and the
thong is so wrapped that as.
the string unwinds from the
top of the shaft it winds be-
low, and vice versa. This °'*'* ^^^'^^'^ *^*'^'-
drill revolves little if any
faster than the shaft drill, and ap])ears to
cut chiefly, but not entirely, with the
downward pressure. The use of this
drill is apparently confined to a very re-
stricted area. See Shellu'ork% Stonework.
Consult Hough, Firemaking Appara-
tus, Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1888; Mdiuire, A
Study of the Primitive Metho^ls of Drill-
ing, Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1894. ( j. d. m. )
Bry-paintiiig. An art existing among
the Indians, especially those of the 8. W. ,
the products of which have l)een namc<l
sand altars, sand pictures or paintings, and
sand mosaics by varioas authors. It is
doubtless of aboriginal origin and of great
antiquity, but it has come to the knowl-
edge of white people only within the last
25 years. The art has l)een found among
various Pueblo tribes of New Mexico and
Arizona, among the wilder Navaho and
Apache of the same region, and, in crude
form, among the Cheyenne, Arapaho,
and Siksika. According to Navaho infor-
mation, dry-painting was practised also
by the I'te and the .cliff-dwellers, but
the latter may refer to one or more of
the Hopi clans that occupied Canyon de
Chelly, Arizona, within comparatively
recent time (see Am). There is evidence
of a wide extent of trie art among the In-
dians, Init it is probable that it has been
yet more widely practiseti in the past,
or may even be more widely practised at
the present among tril)e.s who have con-
cealed it from civiliztMl men.
So far as can l)e learne<l dry-painting
has reached its greatest i)erfecti<)n among
the Navahoy whose designs are larger,
more numerous^ and more elalxjrate than
those of any other tribe. These Indians
make their pictures almost exclusively in
connection with religious ceremonies and
draw them of various sizes. Some of
their larger pictures, in their great 9
days' ceremonies, are 10 or 12 ft in di-
ameter, and represent, in conventional
forms, various gods of their mythology,
divine ceremonies, lightning, sunbeams,
rainbows, mountains, animals, and plants,
having a mythic or traditional signifi-
cance. Among this people, in order to
prepare a grouiidworK for a sacred pic-
ture in the lodge, several young men
collect, with ceremonial observances, a
(juantity of dry sand, which is carried
in blankets, thrown on the floor of the
lodge, spread over a surface of sufficient
size and to the <lepth of 2 or 3 in., and
matle smooth and level by means of the
broad oaken battens useil in weaving.
The pigments represent the 5 sacred col-
ors of Navaho mythology — white, blue,
yellow; black, and red. For the greater
part of the work the white, yellow, and
red are made of finely powered sandstone
of these colors; the black of powdered
charcoal mixed with a little sandstone to
give it stability; and the "blue" (really
gray) of black and white mixed. These
powders are prepared before the picture
IS begun and are kept on improvised
trays of juniper bark. Sometimes, for
certain ornamental parts of the work,
more precious pigments than these are
used. To apply the pigments the artist
picks up a small quantity between his
first ana second fingers and his opposed
thumb and allows it to flow slowly as he
inovt»8 his han<l. When he takes up his
pinch of powder, he blows on his fingers
404
DSIHLNAOTHIHLNI DTEDHEZEDfiATAZHT
[b. a. e.
to remove aberrant particles and to keep
them from falling on the picture out of
place. When he makes a mistake he
does not brush away the colored powder,
but obliterates it by pouring sand on it,
then draws the correct design on the new
surface. The drawings are oegun as near
the center as the design will permit, due
regard being paid to the points of the
compiass, which have an estaolished order
of precedence in Navaho ceremony. The
figures in the peripherv of the picture
are made last, in order that the operators
may not have to step over and thus pos-
sibly spoil the finished w ork. The pic-
tures are drawn according to an exact
system, except in certain well-defined
cases where the artist is allowed to in-
dulge his fancy. On the other hand,
some parts are measureil by palms, and
not the slightest deviation can be made
from the established design. Straight
and parallel lines are drawn with the aid
of a tightened cord. The naked bodies
of the gods are firnt drawn and then the
clothing is put on. The shaman who
enacts the part of master of ceremonies
does little more than direct and criticize
the work. A number of men who have
been initiated into the mystery of the
ceremony perform the lalx)r, each work-
ing on a different part, and often spend-
ing many hours on one picture. When
it IS finished, ceremonies are performed
over it, and then with song and cer-
emony it is obliterated. When no sem-
blance of it remains, the sand of which
it was made is gathered in blankets and
thrown away at a distance from the
lodge. In the ceremonies of the Pueblo
Indians a picture is allowed to remain
several days, while the Navaho make
and destroy a picture in a day. No per-
manent copies of the dry-paintings are
preserved by the Navaho; indeed, until
recently they had no means of making
such copies. The paintings are not made
in the summer, hence their designs must
be carried from winter to winter in the
fallible memories of men; yet the sham-
ans declare that the pictures have been
transmitted unaltered for many genera-
tions. Although this declaration may
reasonably be doubted, there is some
evidence in its favor.
During the Sun-dance ceremony of the
Cheyenne a dry-painting is made in a
lodge to represent the morning star. The
field of the painting is of plain sand, and
the design is made m a strictly pi:escribed
manner by the use of black, reii, yellow,
and white dry paint, in order. Dotted
lines representing stars form part of the
painting, in this case those in white being
drawn first because the white stars appear
first in the morning. The unbroken lines
are roads; the white represents the lo<lge-
maker and his wife, the red line the road
of the Cheyenne, the black the trail of
the buffalo, and yellow the path of the
sun. The dry-painting made by the Ara-
paho in their Sun-dance ceremony, while
of symbolic significance, is of a much
simpler character.
The sand pictures of the Hopi differ
considerably from those of the Navaho.
Some of the best are made in midsummer
during the ceremonies of the Aiitelope
society. In making dry-paintings the
Hopi chief of the ceremony commonly
begins at the periphery and follows the
ceremonial circuit of the cardinal points
in the use of pigments — first drawing yel-
low (north), then green or blue (west),
then red (south), and finally white (east).
The field of the picture, wnich is always
made secretly in kivas among the Hopi,
is valley sand sifted on the floor from a
basket.* These Indians never use cords
or other measuring instruments. When
the dry-painting is effaced pinches of the
sand used in making it are deposited in
prescribed places; e. g., a portion of the
sand of an Antelope dry-painting is placed
in a shrine of each cardinal pomt by the
Snake chief (Fewkes).
See Dorsey in Field Columb. Mus. Publ. ,
Anthrop. ser., iv, 1903, and ix, no. 2, 1905;
Voth, ibid., in, nos. 2, 4, 1901, 1903; Dor-
sey and Voth, ibid., in, nos. 1, 3, 1901,
1902; Fewkes in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and
Archseol., iv, 1894, and in various reports
of the B. A. E.; Matthews (1) in 5th
Rep. B. A. E., 1887, (2) in Mem. Am.
Mus. Nat. Hist., vi, 1902, (3) Navaho Leg-
ends, 1897; Stevenson in 8th Rep. B. A. E.,
1891. (w. M.)
Dsihlnaothihlni ( ' encircled mountain' ).
A Navaho clan, so named from Dsilnao-
thilmt, its original home.
DiiUnofi'lni. — Matthews in .lour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 103, 1890 (misprint). Dtilnao^^e.— Ibid., 91.
Dsilnaofflni. — Ibid. DsI7naofl'tei. — Matthews,
Navaho Leg., 30, 1897.
Dsihlthani (* brow of the mountain*).
A Navaho clan.
Bifbii.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
104, 1890 (distinct from Bit&'ni, ' folded arms'; see
Bithani), BV6&i.— Matthews, Navaho Leg., 30,
1897. Dtileani.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
HI, 104, 1890. DsU/ini.— Matthews, Navaho Leg.,
30, 1897.
Dsihltlanl (^base of the mountain').
A Navaho clan.
DrfZtla 411.— Matthews, Navaho Leg.. 30, 1897.
Dsiltla'ni.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iil,
103, 1890.
Dtakhtikianpandhatazhi ( ' does not eat
deer and elk ' ) . Given as a subgens of the
Ponca gens Nikapashna, but seemingly
an error.
XaqtikiAopa" #ataji —Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A.
E., 228, 1897.
Dtedhezedhatazhi ( * does not eat buffalo
tongues ' ). A subgens of the Ponca gens
BULL. 30]
DTEPAITAZHI DUHARHE
405
Washalx?. J. O. Dorsey also gives it aa a
Nikapashna gens, but this is seemingly
an error.
xo#0se|atiUL— Doreey in 15th Rep. B. A. £., 228,
Dtepaitashi ( ' touch no buffalo head ' ).
A subgens of the Dhatada gens of the
Omaha.
Xfi^ it*igL— Doraey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 226.
1897.
Dtepaitaihi ( ' does not touch a buffalo
head or skull M. A subgens of the Wa-
shabe gens of the Ponpa.
jUHiA it^igl.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.. 229,
Dtesanhadtadhishan (pertaining to the
sacred skin of an albino buffalo cow).
Given as a subgens of the Hanga gens of
ttie Omaha, but it is seemingly an error.
(
•B»a-qti.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 227, 1897
real Hanga'). x«-^«««^tiuL— Il>i<): (*<
•do not
eat buffalo tongues'), 'x^^^u^a-^ioa".— Ibid.
Waoabe.-Ibid. ('dark buffalo').
Dtesinde (* buffalo tail'), (liven as a
'Subgens of the Washabe gens of the Ponca.
XH^e ^tigl— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. £., 229,
1897 ('does not eat buffalo tongues'). Te-jinga
^atejL— Ibid, ('does not eat a very young ouffalo
calT). xe-ainde.— Ibid., 228.
Dtesindeitaihi ( * does not touch a buf-
falo tail'). Given as a subgens of the
Ponca gens Nikapashna.
jgHiiade-lt*i^I.— Dorsey In 15th Rep. B. A. E.,*228,
Duahe. Mentioned by Oviedo (Hist.
Gen. Indies, 111,628, 1853) aaoneof the pro-
vinces or villages visited by Avllonin 1520;
prolmbly on the South Carolina coast.
Daaano. A former Kawia village on
or near the Cahuilla res., s. Cal. (Jackson
and Kinney, Rep. Miss. Ind., 18, 1888).
Possibly intended for Durazno (Span,
'peach').
Dabois. Mentioned only by McKenney
and Hall (Ind. Tribes, iii, 79, 1854) in a
list of tril)e8. Possibly intended for Gens
des Bois (Hankutchin, Tschantoga, etc. ) ;
otherwise unidentified.
Daok Lake. A loc^al name for a band of
Okinagan in s. w. British Columbia;
pop. 24 in 1901.— Can. Ind. Aff. for 1901,
pt. II, 166.
Daok tablets. Prehistoric objects of un-
determined use, made of wood,
bone, and metal, and represent-
ing in a conventional manner
the figure of a duck. The most
typical examples are certain
paddle-like oojects of wood
found by Gushing in excava-
tions at Key Marco, Fla., and
connected by him with other
similar forms in stone and sil ver
found also in Florida, as well as
with various other classes of
objects thought to embody the
duck motive, such as the oird-
stone (q.v.), the banner stone (q.v.), and
the calumet (q. v. ). Although these tab-
lets were undoubtedly symbolic, the ex-
act significance and manner of use can not
l>e <letermined, and they are therefore
classed with problematical objects (q. v. ).
See Gushing in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc.,
XXXV, 1897. (w. H. H.)
Dacoigne, Jean Baptiite. A Kaskaskia
chief at the beginning of the 19th cen-
tury, noted mainly for his firm adher-
ence to the United States and friendship
for the whites. Reynolds (Pion. Hist.,
Ill, 22, 1887) describes him as a cunning
half-blood of considerable talent. In his
Memoirs, Gen. W. H. Harrison, who had
dealings with Ducoigne, speaks of him
as **a gentlemanly man, by no means
addicted to drink,' and possessing a very
strong inclination to Jive like a white
man; indeed has done so as far as his
means would allow." Writing to the
Secretary of War, he sa^s: *'Ducoigne*s
long and. well-proved friendship for the
United States has gained him the hatre<l
of all the other chiefs and ought to l)e an
inducement with us to provide as well for
his happiness, as for nis safety." Ac-
cording to Reynolds, Ducoigne asst^rted
that neither he nor his i)eople had sheil
the blood of white men. He was a
signer of the treaties of Vincennes, Aug.
7 and 18, 1803; by the latter the United
States agreeil to build a house and in-
close 100 acres of land for him. He had
two sons, Louis and Jefferson, and a
daughter, Ellen, who married a white
man and in 1850 was living in Indian
Ter. The name of Louis appears on be-
half of the Kaskaskia in the treaty of Ed-
wardsville. 111., Sept. 25, 1818. Ducoigne's
death probably 0(!curred shortly before
Oct., 1832, as it is stated in the treaty
at Castor Hill, of that date, that there
should be reserved "to Ellen Ducoigne,
the daughter of their late chief," a certain
tract of land. The name is perpetuated
in that of the town of DiKjUoin, Perry
CO., III. (c. T.)
Duel. See Nith songs.
Daestnmao. A former Maricopa ra'n-
cheria alnmt 45 leases (120 m. ) alx)ve
the mouth of the Rio CJila in s. w. Ari-
zona; visited by Father Seilelmair in
1744.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex.,:$66,
1889.
Santa Karia del Agua Oaliente.— Ibid., 367 (proba-
bly the same).
Dagh-Bokiun. Given as the name of a
tribe (Mallet in Ind. Aff. Rep., 198, 1877),
but really that of the place where Port
Madison , Wash. , now stands. ( Boulet in
letter. Mar. 22,1886).
Daharhe. A country on the coast of
Florida, seen by Lucas Vazquez de Ay-
llon in 1520, wnose people were light m
color and had abundant hair. The chief
who ruled over this and other provinces
was said to have been nourished on a cer-
tain food that caused him to grow to a
gigantic size. — Barcia, Ensayo, 4, 1728.
406
DUKE8, JOSEPH — DUTCH lOT'LUENCE
[b. a. b.
Dukes, Joseph. An interpreter, the son
of half-blood Choctaw parents, born in
the old Choctaw country, in the present
Mississippi, in 1811. He attended one of
the early mission schools at Mayhew,
where he made such progress that he often
acted as interpreter for Kev. Cyrus Kings-
bury, the pioneer missionary, who never
learned the Choctaw language. After
the Choctaw had ceded to the United
States their lands in the E., he remained
in Mississippi for some years, helping
Rev. Cyrus Byinjjton prepare a Choc-
taw grammar and dictionary. In 1851 or
1852 he preached under the direction of
Rev. Allen Wright at Wheelock, Ind.
Ter., and assist^ Mr Wright in trans-
lating the Old Testament. When Mr
Wright was succeeded by Rev. John Ed-
wards, in 1853, Dukes taught the latter
Gho(!taw and aided him in translation in
addition to his preaching. The first draft
of the whole of the Old Testament from
Genesis to II Kings, as well as of the
Psalms, is attribute<l to him, and he prob-
ably translated also some portions of the
New Testament. He died in 1861. He
was the author of The History of Joseph
and His Brethren (l)tica, 1831, repr.
1836).— Pilling, Bibliog. Muskh. Lang.,
Bull. B. A. E., 1889.
Dnlastnnyi ( DiUastM^yX, * potsherd
place*). A former Cherokee settlement
on Nottely r., Cherokee co., N. C, near
the Georgia line. A half-breed Cherokee
ball captain who formerly lived there,
John Butler, or Tsanugdsita (Sour John),
having been defeated in a ball game,
said, in contempt of his men, that they
were of no more use than broken pots. —
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. p]., 406, 1900.
Balchioni. A tribe, probably Caddoan,
formerly living in villages on Red r. of
Louisiana, 3 leagiies- berow those of the
Natchitoches. They were visited by Bien-
ville and St Denys in 1700, when on their
journey up Red r. to open trade between
the Spanish and French provinces, and
by I^ Harpe in 1719. Further than these
brief reference^ little is known of this
tril)e or of its subsequent fate. (a. c. f. )
DttlohanoU.— La Harpe (1719) in French, Hist.
Coll. La.. Ill, 19, 1851. DulchinoU.— Ibid., 72.
Oulohionit.— La Harpe in Margry, D^c, vi, 277,
1886.
Dnldnlthawaiame (tillage where there
are plenty of humming insects'). A
former village of the Mishikhwutmetunne
on Coquille r., Oreg.
Dttl-dttl' 9A-wai'-i-mi.— DoFRey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, III, 232, 1890.
Dull Knife. A chief of a band of North-
ern Cheyenne who first came into public
notice in 1868 when, as one of the repre-
sentatives of his tribe, he signed the
treaty of Ft Laramie, May 10, made by
the Northern Cheyenne and Northern
Arapaho with the United States, his name
appearing as " Tah-me-la-pash-me, or
Dull Knife." In 1875, or early in 1876,
Dull Knife's band, numbering about 400
warriors, suddenly attacked Washakie's
band of Shoshoni, at that time on Big-
horn r. near the mouth of Gray Bull
r. In 1876 the Northern Cheyenne, in-
cluding Dull Knife's band, joined the
Sioux under Sitting Bull in their general
uprising during this and the following
year. They were present at and were
participants in the Custer massacre on
the Little Bighorn in June, 1876, and ac-
cording to Chief Gall's statement, at the
beginning of the battle the Cheyenne
fought Custer's command while the Sioux
attacked Keno's force, and after the lat-
ter had been driven back, the entire
body of warriors turned on Custer's com-
mand. On Nov. 25, 1876, the cavalry
under Col. Mac^kenzie attacked Dull
Knife's camp at daybreak, destroying 173
lodges and capturing 500 ponies. Al-
though the Inaians escaped, with heavy
loss, they later surrenderetl and were
moved to Oklahoma and placred with the
Southern Cheyenne, (ireatly dissatisfied
with their new home, an attempt was
made by a lar^je party under Dull Knife
to escape to the N. in Sept., 1878. They
were pursued and a part of them cap-
tured and confined at Ft Kobinson, Nebr.,
whence they made a desperate attempt
to escape on the night ot Jan. 9, 1879,
during which most of them, including
Dull Knife, were killed. Consult Dunn,
Massacres, 1886; Ellis, Ind. Wars, 1892;
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1877-79; Mooney in 14th
Rep. B. A. E., 1896. See the article
Cheyenne. (c. t.)
Darango. A former Tepehuane settle-
ment, now the capital of the Mexican
state of the same name. — Orozco y Berra,
Geog., 318, 1864.
Dastayalanyi ( DiUtdyalM^yty * where it
made a noise, as of thunder or shooting,'
apparent 1 y referring to a 1 igh tn i ng stroke ) .
A former Cherokee settlement about the
mouth of Shooting cr., an affluent of lli-
wassee r., near Havesville, Clav co.,
N. C— Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
517, 1900.
Dntoh inflaenoe. The influence of the
Dutch on the Indians n. of Mexico was
confined to the period (1609-64) from
Hudson's visit to the surrender of New
Amsterdam and its dependencies to the
English. The region in which this in-
fluence was exerted lies between the
Susquehanna and Connecticut rs., and
between the Atlantic and L. Ontario.
Ft Orange, now the city of Albany, was a
noted trading post of the Dutch, and there
they came in contact with the Iroauoian
tribes of the N., in addition to the Algon-
quian tribes of the S. The harsh con-
duct of Hudson toward the Indians met
BULL. 30]
DWAMISH DYES AND PIGMENTS
407
by him on Hudson r. was in part re-
sponsible for many 8ub8e<iuent conflicts
between the Dutch and the natives. The
Dutch were agents in furnishing brandy
to the Indians of their territory and to
the surrounding tribes, thereby' undoing
much of the good sought to l)e accom-
plished by the French authorities. The
United Company of the New Netherlands,
which exercised the first controlling in-
fluence in the region of Hudson r., was
succeeded in 1621 by the powerful West
India Company, and' in 16:^2 was founded
the fort on Connecticut r. where is now
the city of Hartford. The trade in furs
with the Pe<juot and other tribes was ex-
tensive. Disputes soon occurre<l that
proved detrimental to trade, and De Forest
(Hist. Inds. of Conn., 73, 1852) considers
that it was the loss of the Dutch trade
which induced the Pequot to invite the
English of Massachusetts bay to settle in
Connecticut, an act that led ultimately to
their own destruction. Quarrels between
the Dutch of New Amsterdam and the
Indians, and the savage conduct of Gov.
Kieft in 1642, led to much slaughter of
natives during the next 2 years, and
stirred up many of the Connecticut tribes
against both the English and the Dutch.
Some of them had engaged in intriguing,
now against one, now against the other
party of the whites. Frie<lerici ( Indianer
und Anglo- Americaner, 16, 1900) takes a
more favorable view of the attitude of the
Dutch toward the Indians in general than
that entertained by many authorities.
The Dutch helped the Iroquois confed-
eracy against the northern Algonquian
honies, and the wars thus initiated were in
progress when the English conquest took
pla(;e. They also aided the Mahican
against the Mohawk (Ruttenber, Ind.
Tribes of Hudson R., 56, 1872) and the
Seneca against the Munsee, to whom the
Swedes had supplied arms. Many trou-
bles arose from the cupidity of the traders
and settlers who sold flreariiis and liquors
to the Indians, regardless of tlie general
|)olicy of the government (Nelson, Inds.
of New Jersey, 1894). An interesting relic
of Dutch influence is the title "Kora'*
given by the modern Iroquois of Canada
to the governor-general, or to the King of
England, a corruption of Corlaer, the
name of one of the Dutch governors of
New Amsterdam. (a. p. c. )
Ihramish. A small body of Salish near
Seattle, Wash., which city was named
from a chief of this and the Suquamish
tribes. Their proper seat, according to
Gibbs, was at the outlet of L. Washing-
ton. In 1856 they were removed to the
E. shore of Bainbridge id., but owing to
the absence of a fishing ground were
shortly afterward taken to Ilolderness
|X)int, on the w. side of Elliot bay, which
was alreaily a favorite place for fishing.
The name, being well known, has been
improperly applied collectively to a num-
ber of dis'tinct bands in this neighbor-
hood. Their population about 1856 is
variously given from 64 to 312. The
renmant is incorporated with the Sno-
homish and others under the Tul^lip
school, N. w. Wash., altogether number-
ing 465 in 1904. ( J. r. s. )
DawamiBh.— Simmons (1856) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37,
34th Cong., 3d sess., 73, 1857. Dewamiah.— Shaw
(1856). ibid., 113. Du-a+bc'.— McCaw.Puyallup,
MS. vocab., B. A. E.,1885(Puyallupnam^). Duch-
dwab«h.— Mallet in Ind. Aff. Rep., 198, 1877.
Dwahmish.— Maynard (1856) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37,
34th Cong. , 3d ses-s. , 86, 1857. Dwa-mith.— Stevens
in Ind. Aflf. Rep., 453. 1854. D'Wamiah.— Gibbs in
Fac. R. R. Rep., 1,436,1855. Lake Indiana.— Page
(1856) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37,34th Cong., 3d sess., fi,
1857. Neamitch.— Farnham, Travels, 111, 1843.
Nee-wam-iah.— Starling in Ind. Aff. Rep., 170, 1852.
Nowamiih.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 432, 1855.
Nuna-miBh.— Starling in Ind. Aff. Rep., 171, 1852.
irWamith.— (Jibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 4.^2, 1855.
Port Orchard.— Wilkes, ibid., 435. Taa-bah-biah.—
Maynard (1856) in H.R. Ex. Doc. 37, 34th Cong.,
3d sess.. 86. 1857. Tsa-bah-boba.- Ibid.. 82. Ttah-
bahbUh.— Ibid.,86. T'BakbahbUh.— Stevens (1856),
ibid., 46.
Dwarfs. See A natomyy Physiology^ Popu-
lar fallacies.
Dyami [D'ya^-mi). The Eagle clans of
the Keresan pueblos of Laguna, Acoma,
Santa Ana, Sia, San Felipe, and Cochiti,
N. Mex. The Eagle clan of Laguna claims
to have come originally from Acoma; that
of Acoma forms a phratry with the Soshka
(Chaparral-cock) clan, while that of Co-
chiti IS extinct. (f. w. n. )
D'yami-hano.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., IX, 350,
1896 (Sin, San Felipe, and Santa Ana forms;
Mmo=* people*). Dyami-hanuoh.— Ibid. (Cochiti
form). Ti-a'-mi.— Stevenson in 11th Rep. B. A. E.,
19, 1894 (Sia form) . Tya-me.— Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, ill, 293, 1890 (applied to the clan
fetish). Tyame hanutah.— Bandelier, Delight
Makers. 181, 1890. Tyaml-hano«h.— Hodge, op. cit.
(Laguna form). T*yami-hanoq«h.— Ibid. (Acoma
form).
Dyani (Dya^-niy The Deer clans of
Sia and San Felipe pueblos, N. Mex.;
the latter clan is extinct.
Dyani-hano.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix. a'iO, 1896
(/i/fwo-^* people'). Ta'ne. — Stevens<m in 11th Rep.
B. A. E., 19, 1894.
Dyapige. A prehistoric Tano pueblo
s. E. of I^my, "some distance in the
mountains," n. central New Mexico.
Dyap-i-ge.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv,
100,1892 (Tewa name).
Dye (D'ye). The Gopher clans of the
Tewa pueblos of San Juan, Santa Clara,
San Ildefonso, and Tesuque, N. Mex.
Dye-tdoa.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351, 1896
(M<5a=' people').
Dyea. A former Chilkat village which
became noted subsetjuently in the time of
the Yukon gold excitement, but is now
practically dead owing to the building of
the Yukon and White Pass railw^ay to
Skagway.
Daiye'.— Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904.
Dyes and Pigments. Most of the Indian
tril)es of North America made permanent
dyes from organic materials. The de-
408
DYES AND PIGMENTS
[B. A. ]
mand for these dyes arose when basketry,
qaillwork, and other textile industries
had reached a considerable degree of
advancement, and there was need of
diversity of color in ornamentation, aH
well as permanency of color, which pig-
ments alone could not supply.
Z)i^e«.— The California tribes and many
others who made baskets were usually
satisfied with natural colors. These are
the red and black of bark, the white of
grass stems, the pale yellow of peeled
rods or rushes, and the brown of root
bark. A few dyes were known, however,
notably a black or dark gray on splints
which had been buried in mud. The
Hupa obtained bright yellow from lichens,
another color from the roots of the Oregon
erape, and a brownish red from alder
bark. Most of the tribes of the S. W.
use only black for desijgns on baskets,
and, rarely, red dyes. The Hopi, how-
ever, have a larger number of native
d^es for basketry splints than any other
tribe, and the Apache, Walapai, and
Havasupai have a number of vegetal dyes
that are not used in basketry. The
Abnaki and other tribes made fugitive
stains from pokeberries and fruits of the
blueberry and elder. Lichens, golden-
seal, bloodroot, and the bark of the but-
ternut and other trees were also used by
the northern and eastern tribes, and in
southern regions the prickly pear. The
Virginia Indians, according to Hariot,
used sumach, a kind of seed, a small root,
and the bark of a tree to dye their hair,
as well as to color their faoes red and to
dye mantles of deerskin and the rushes
for baskets and mats. The tribes of the
N. W. coast employed a number of har-
monious vegetal colors in their baskets.
Most of the native dyes of the Indians
were superseded by others introduced,
especially in late years by aniline colors.
Quillwork, formerly widespread, was
generally superseded by beaawork, and
the native dyes employed in the art have
fallen almost into disuse. Some of the
N. W. coast tribes, the Eskimo, and the
northern Athapascans alone practise
quillworking in its purity, but its former
range was extensive.
Native vegetal blanket dyes are found
in use only among the Chilkat of Alaska,
who still retain them in weaving their
ceremonial shawls. The Nez Per&s and
the Navaho formerly used permanent
vegetal dyes of pleasing colors for wool.
With the latter these dyes have given way
so recently to aniline colors that the de-
tails of their manufacture have not be-
come lost. The use of dyes required a
knowledge of mordants; for this purpose
urine was commonly employed by the
Navaho, Hopi, and Zufii, brides an im-
pure native alum, and an iron salt mixed
with organic acids to produce black. It
has been assumed that, since the weaver's
art seems to be accultural with the Navaho,
the mordant dves may have been derived
from the Pueblos, who, in turn, may have
received them from the Spaniards. Mat-
thews, however, controverts the opinion
that the Navaho learned the art of weav-
ing from the Pueblos; and indeed there
is no reason why the Indians should not
have become acquainted with various
mordants through the practise of the
culinary art or other domestic arts in
which fire is employed.
Pigments, — The inorganic colors used by
the Indians were mostly derived from
iron-bearing minerals, such asochers and
other ores, and stained earths. These
furnished various tints, as brown, red.
green, blue, yellow, orange, and purple.
The search for good colors was assidu-
ously pursued; quarries were opened and
a commerce in their products was carried
on. White was derived from kaolin,
limestone, and gypsum; black from
graphite, powdered coal, charcoal, or
soot; green and blue from copper ores,
phosphate of iron, etc. Pigments were
used for facial decoration, red beins: most
prized, for which reason the vermilion of
the trader was eagerly adopted, but the
intent of face painting was generally to-
temic or religious and not merely orna-
mental. Pigments were rubbed into soft
tanned skins, giving the effect of dye, and
were mixed with various media for paint-
ing the wood and leather of boxes, arrows,
spears, shields, tipis, robes, parfieche
cases, etc. Among the Southwestern
tribes in particular pigments were mixed
with sand for dry-paintings (q. v.),
while pigments of iron earths or kaolin
were employed for decorating pottery.
In connection *with the preparation and
use of pigments are grinding slabs and
mullers, mortars and pestles, brushes and
paint sticks, and a great variety of pouches
and pots for carrying or for preserving
them. The media for applying the pig-
ments varied with the objects to be deco-
rated and with tribal or personal usa^.
In general, face paint was mixed with
grease or saliva, while the medium for
wood or skin was grease or glue. The
N. W. coast Indians put grease on their
faces before applying the paint. Among
some of the Pueblos, at least, an emulsion
of fat seeds was made with the pigment,
and this was applied by spurting from
the mouth. See Adornment j Arty Dry-
painting^ Mines and Qucirries, Ornament^
Painting.
Consult Dorsey in Field Columb. Mus.
Publ., Anthrop. ser.; Fewkes in 17th
Rep. B. A. E., 1898; Goddard, Life and
Culture of the Hupa, 1903; Holmes in
Am. Anthrop., v, no. 3, 1903; Hough
BULL. 80]
DY08 YO W AN — EAGLE
409
(1) in Am. Anthrop., xi, May, 1898; (2)
in Rep. Nat. Mus., 1900 and 1901; Kroe-
berin Bull. AmTMus. Nat. Hist., xviii,
pt 1, 1902; Mason, Al)original American
Basketry, 1902; Matthews in 3d Rep.
B. A. E., 1884; Pepper, Native Navajo
Dyes, in Papoose, Feb., 1902; Stephen in
Intemat. Folk-lore Cong., i, 1898; VViss-
ler in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xviii,
pt 3, 1904. (w. H.)
Dyosyowan (*it is oil-oovered.* — Hew-
itt). An important former Seneca vil-
lage on Buffalo cr., Erieco., N. Y.
Bidtiao.— Kirkland (1788) in Am. State Pap., Ind.
Aif., 1,211, 1832. Dyo'-syo-wan.— Hewitt, inf'n, 1887
(Seneca name). Tehoaeroron.— Treaty of Oct. 22,
1784, in U. S. Ind. Treat., 922, 1873. Teyohegha-
ool6a.~Kirkland,op. elt.
Dymaeskirk. A former P^skimo mis-
sionary station on Eriksfjord, h. Green-
land.—Crantz, Hist. Greenland, i, map,
1767.
Eagle. Among the many birds held in
superstitious and appreciative regard by
the aborigines of North America, the
eagle, by reason of its majestic, solitary,
and mysterious nature, became an espe-
cial object of worship. This is expressed
in the employment of the eagle by the
Indian for religious and esthetic pur-
poses only. The wing-bones were fash-
ioned into whistles to be carried by war-
riors or used in ceremonies, and the
talons fonned powerful amulets or fe-
tishes, having secondary value as orna-
ments; the feathers were, however, of
greatest importance. The capture of
eagles for their feathers was a hazardous
branch of hunting, requiring great skill.
Among some trfi)es eagle-killing was
delegated to certain men. Owing to the
difficulty of getting within bowshot of
the bird, it was often trappe<l or the
eyrie was visited to secure the voung.
Ragles are still kept in captivity by the
Pueblo Indians as in the time of Coro-
nado (14th Rep. B. A. K., 516, 1896).
The striking war- bonnet of the Plains
tribes was made of ea^le feathers and
was highly valued, for it is said that one
pony was the price of a perfect tail of 12
feathers of the '*war eagle," i. e., the
white plumes with black tips. Other
varieties, with bars across the feathers,
are regarded as inferior ( Mooney ) . War-
rioTfi of the Plains tribes usually wore the
feathers of the golden eagle only, and it is
probable that tne customs of many tribes
prescribed like discriminations as to
feathers of different species. Many tribes
wore one or more e&g\e feathers in the
hair, and these feathers were often cut,
colored, or otherwise decorated with some
(*ognizance of the wearer (see Heraldry).
It was the custom of the Pillager Chip-
pewa to allow a warrior who scalped an
enemy to wear on his head two eagle
feathers, and the act of capturing a
wounded prisoner on the battlefield
earned the distinction of wearing five.
Fans made of the primary feathers of the
eagle formed an accessory to the costume
of the Sioux and other tribes. Eagle
feathers were also attached as ornaments
to the buckskin shirts worn by men, and
war costumes and paraphernalia, includ-
ing shields, were ornamented with them.
As one of the prominent totemic animals,
the eagle gave its name to many clans
and religious fraternities. It is probable
that nearly every tribe in the United
States recognizing clan or gentile organi-
zation had an eagle clan or gens at some
period in its history.
The eagle held an important place in
symbolic art. It was depicted by all the
methods of art expression known to the
Indian, appearing on pottery, basketry,
textiles, ])eadwork, quillwork, shields,
crests, totem poles, house and grave jx)sts,
pipes, rattles, and objects pertaining to
cult and ceremony. It was also repre-
sented in the primitive drama connected
with ceremonies. Many tribes possessed
eagle deities, as the Kwahu, the eagle
kachina of the Hopi of Arizona, and the
Eagle god of the irfiwok of California.
Among the Haida, passes made with
eagle fans were thought to be effectual in
conjuring, and this use reappears in many
tribes. The wing-bones were often em-
ployed as sucking tubes, with which
medicine-men pretended to remove dis-
ease. The Tlingit and other North Pa-
cific tril)es used eagle down for ceremo-
nial sprinkling on the hair, masks, and
dance costume; it was also scattered in
the air, being blown through a tube or
sprinkled by hand. The Pawnee and
other Plains tribes as well as the Pueblos
also used the down in ceremonies, and it
was probably a general custom. Among
the Hopi the eagle is generally associated
with the Sky god, and its feathers are
used with disks to represent the Sun god
(Fewkes).
The use of eagle feathers in religion is
nowhere better shown than among the
Pueblos, when downy plumes are attached
to masks, rattles, prayer-sticks (q. v. ), and
other cult objects entering into ceremo-
nies. For this purpose a great quantity of
feathers is yearly recjuired. The Hopi
clans claimed the eagle nests in the locali-
ties where they formerly resided, and
caught in traps or took from the nests
eaglets, whose down was used in cere-
monies. The eaglets, when required for
feathers, have their heads washed; they
are killed by pressure on the thorax, and
buried with appropriate rites in special
cemeteries, in which offerings of small
wooden images and bows and arrows are
yearly deposited. The interior Salish
also are said by Teit to have property in
410
EAGLK HILLS AS8INIB01N — EARTH LODGE
[ B. A. E.
eagles. Near the present Hopi villages
there are shrines in which offerings of
eagle eggs carved from wood are placed
during the winter solstice for the increase
of eagles. A mong the Zuil i , feathers shed
by their captive eagles have special sig-
nificance, though the feathers are also
regularly plucked and form a staple arti-
cle of trade.
The mj^thology of almost every tribe is
replete with eagle beings, and the wide-
spread thunderbird mvth relates in some
cases to the eagle, in Hopi myth the
Man-eagle is a sky-being who laysasidehis
plumage after flights in which he spreads
devastation, and the hero who slays him
is carried to the house in the sky by
eagles of several speides, each one in its
turn bearing him higher. The Man-
eagle myth is widely diffused, most tribes
regarding this being as a manifestation
of either helpful or maleficent power.
See Fewkes, Property Rights in Eagles
among the Hopi, Am. Anthrop., ii, GOO-
TOT, 1900; Hoff-
man in 14th
Rep. B. A. E.,
18%; Mooney
(1) ibid., (2)
in 19th Rep.
B. A. E., 1900.
(W. H.) ,
Eagle Hilli
Asiiniboin. A
band of Assini-
b o i n of 3 5
lodges living in
1808 between
Bear hills and
South Saskatch-
ewan r., Assiniboia, Canada. — Henry-
Thompson Jour., Ckjues ed., ii, 523, 189Y.
Eartii lodge. A dwelling partly under-
ground, circular in form, from 30 to 60 ft
in diameter, with walls about 6 ft hi^h,
on which rested a dome-shaped roof with
an opening in the center to afford light
within and to permit the egress of smoke.
The entrance was a projecting passage-
way from 6 to 14 ft long. The method
of construction was first to draw a circle
on the ground and excavate the earth
within it from 2 to 4 ft deep. AlK)ut IJ
ft within the circle were set crotched
posts some 8 or 10 ft apart, on which
were laid beams. Outside these posts
were set others, one end of them braced
against the bottom of the bank of earth
at the periphery of the circle, and the
other end leaning against the beams,
forminga close stockade, an opening being
left at tne e. side for the entrance. Mid-
way between the center of the excavation
and the stockade were planted 4, 6, or 8
PAWNEE EARTH LODGE
tall crotched posts, fonning an inner dr-
cle. In the crotches were laid heavy
beams to support the roof. The bark
was stripped from all the posts and
beams. The roof was formed of long,
slender, tapering tree trunks, stripped of
bark. The large ends were tied with
strings of the inner bark of the elm to the
Ijeams at the top of the stockade, and the
middle to those resting in the crotches of
the inner circle of posts. The slender
ends were cut so as to form the circular
opening in the center of the roof, 2 or 3
ft in diameter. Outside this framework
branches of willow were placed close to-
gether across the posts of the wall and
the beams of the roof, and bound tightly
to each pole, beginning at the ground and
continuing upward to the central oj)en-
ing. Over the willow branches a heavy
thatch of coarse dried grass was laid, tied
in bundles and arranged so that it would
shed water. Over the thatch was placed
a thick coating of sods, cut so that they
could be lap
ped, and laid
like shingles.
The wall and
roof were after-
ward carefully
tamped with
earth and made
impervious to
rain. The long
entranceway
was built in the
same manner as
the lodge, and
thatched and
sodded at the
same time. The grass of the sod continued
to grow, and wild flowers brightened the
walls and roof of the dwelling. The
blackened circle around the central open-
ing in the roof, produced by the heat and
smoke, was the only suggestion that the
verdant mound was a human abode.
Within, the floor was made hard by a
series of tampings, in which both water
and fire were used. The fireplace was
(;ircular in shape and slightly excavated.
A curtain of skin hung at the opening
from the passageway into the lodge. The
outer door was covered with a skin that
was stiffened by sticks at the tof) and
lK)ttom, which was turned to one side to
give entrance to the passageway. The
couches of the occupants were placed
around the wall, and frequently were in-
closed by reed mats which could be raised
or lowered. More than one family some-
times occupied a lodge, and in such case
the families took different sides. The
back part, opposite the entrance, was re-
BULL. 30]
KAST ABEIKA EAST GREENLANDERS
411
served for the keeping of sacred objects
and the reception of guests. In the winter
curtains of skin were hung from the beams
of the inner circle of posts, making a
smaller room about the fireplace. The
shields and weapons of the men were sus-
pended from these inner posts, giving
color to the interior of the dwelling,
which was always picturesque, whether
seen at night, when the fire leaped up
and glinted on the polished blackened
roof and when at times the lodge was
filled with men and women in their ^la
dress at some social meeting or religious
ceremony, or during the day when the
shaft of sunlight fell through the central
opening over the fireplace, bringing into
relief some bit of aboriginal life and leav-
ing the rest of the lodge in deep shadow.
Few, if any, large and well-built earth
lodges exist at the present day. Even
with care a lodge could be made to last
only a generation or two.
Cieremonies attended the erection of an
earth lodge from tlie marking of the cir-
cle to the putting on of the sods. Both
men and women took part in these rites
and shared m the labor of building. To
cut, haul) and set the heavy posts and
beams was the men's task; the binding,
thatching, andsodding thatof the women.
The earth lodge was used by the Paw-
nee, Ankara, Omaha, Ponca, Osage, and
other tribes. A similar abode was found
in the Aleutian ids., on Kodiak id., and
in s. w. Alaska. There were habitations
among some of the California tribes that
had features in common with the earth
lodge, and there are evidences of relation-
ship between it, the Navaho hogan, and
one form of Pima dwelling.
Among the Pawnee are preserved the
most elaborate ceremonies and traditions
pertaining to the earth lodge. These
tribes are said to have abandoned the
grass house of their kindred at some dis-
tant period and, under the teaching of
aquatic animals, to have learned to con-
struct the earth lodge. According to
their ceremonies and legends, not only
the animals were concerned with its con-
struction— the badger digging the holes,
the beaver sawing the logs, the bears car-
rying them, and all obeying the directions
of the whale — but the stars also exercised
authority. The earlier star cult of the
people is recognized in the significance
attached to the four central posts. Each
stood for a star — the Morning and Even-
ing starS) symbols of the male and female
cosmic forces, and the North and South
stars, the direction of chiefs and the abode
of perpetual life. The posts were painted
in the symbolic colors of these stare — red,
white, black, yellow. During certain
ceremonies com of one of these colore was
offered at the foot of the post of that
color. In the rituals of the Pawnee the
earth lodge is made typical of man's abode
on the earth; the fiooristhe plain, the wall
the distant horizon, the dome the arching
sky, the central opening the zenith,
dwelling place of Tirawa, the invisible
power which gives life to all created
beings.
The history of the distribution of this
kind of dwelling among peoples widely
scattered is a problem not yet fully solved.
See Grass lodge, Habitations, (a. c. f.)
East Abeika. {Aiabeka, 'unhealthful
place *) . A former Choctaw town at the
mouth of Straigl)t cr., an affluent of the
Sukenatcha, in Kemper co. , Miss. Called
P^ast Abeika to distinguish it from another
town of the same name. — Halbert in Miss.
Hist. Soc. Publ., VI, 425, 1902. SeeAhihka,
Abeeka.— Romans, Florida, 313, 1775. Aiab«ka.—
Halbert, op. cit. But Abeoka.— Ibid., :W9. Eut
Abeika.— W est Florida map, ca. 1775.
Eastern Indians. A collective term ap-
plied by the early New England writere
to all the tribes n. e. of Merriraac r. It
is used by Hubbard as early as 1680.
These tribes, including the Pennacook,
Abnaki, Malecite, and Micmac, were gen-
erally in the French interest and hostile
to the English. (j. m. )
Sattem Indians. — Form used by most eariv Eng-
lish writers. Eastward Indians.— Wintlirop (1700)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 612, 1854. Estward
I.— Owaneco (1700), ibid., 614 ("the Nowon-
thewog or the Estward Indians").
Eastern Shawnee. A division of the
Shawnee now living in Indian Ter. They
formerly lived with the Seneca (Mingo)
near Lewistown, Ohio, but sold their
lands in 1831 ami removed with the latter
tribe to Kansas. In 1867 they separated
from the Seneca and removed to Indian
Ter. under the name of Eastern Shawnee.
They are now under the Seneca school
and numbered 95 in 1904. (j. M.)
East Qreenlanders. The Eskimo inhab-
iting the E. coast of Greenland. They
are divided into two groups: The Ang-
magsalingmiut, inhabiting the fjords
about C. Dan; and the southern group, for-
merly scattered along the coast south-
ward. They have long lived in complete
isolation, three-fourths of them in the
Angmagsalik district, others farther s.
about lluilek, C. Bille, and Tingmiarmiut.
(Nansen, First Crossing of Greenland, i,
321-371, 1890). They have developed
some of the peculiar arts of the Eskimo
to their highest perfection, especially the
use of harpoons with shafts tnat become
detached and float in the water, while
the seal swims off with the line and blad-
der, and of flexible-jointed lances also
for killing the struggling animal. The
more easily handled double bladder is
their invention. They employ the
double-bladed paddle alto^ther,* wear
skin-tight garments that fit in the waist
of the kaiak so closely that no water
412
EASTMAN
[b. a. e.
can enter, and when overturned in the
sea they are able to right themselves
singrle handed with the paddle. The
ornamental arts of the East Greenland-
ers are neglected, except among one iso-
lated band in the remote n. e. Their
winter houses, made of stones and sod,
are long and narrow, with family benches
on one side, and can be stretched out
to accommodate more people than the
square houses of Alaska. The large
public buildings of the western tribes
they know only by tradition. The East
Greenlanders numbered 548, comprising
245 males and 303 females, in 1884, not
counting a few scattered families of un-
known numbers living n. of 68° (Rink,
Eskimo Tribes, 1887). The entire south-
ern group of the East Greenlanders, all
the pagan Eskimo of Tingmiarmiut and
the other places s. of Angmagsalik, 114
individuals altogether, emigrated between
1887 and 1900 to Kemertok, near 0. Fare-
well.
The villages and settlements of the East
Greenlanders, past and present, are as fol-
lows: Akernivak, Akorninarmiut, Aluik,
Aluk, Amivik, Anamisok, Angmagsalik,
Anoritok, Aputitek, Atangime, Auarkat,
Estale, Igdiuarsuk, Ikatek, Ikerasak, Ilui-
lek, Imarwivik, Ingmikertok, Inigsalik,
Inugsiut, Ivimiut, Kangarsik, Kangigd-
lek, Kemisak, Kernertok, Kialinek, Ki-
kertarsoak, Kinarbik, Koremiut, Ku-
marmiut, Kutek, Manitsuk, Nanusek,
Narsuk, Norajik, Norsit, Nualik, Nuna-
kitit, Okiosorbik, Orkua, Patuterajuit,
Pikiutdlek, Sangmisok, Sarkarmiut, Ser-
miligak, Sermilik, Sivinganek, Sivingar-
narsik. Tarsia, Ta«iusarsik, Taterat,
Tingmiarmiut, Umanak, Urryvik, Utor-
karmiut. (h. w. h.)
EaBtman, Charles Alexander (Ohiyesa,
*the Winner*). A Santee Dakota phy-
sician and author, born in 1858 near Reil-
wood Falls, Minn. His father was a full-
blood Sioux named Many Lightnings,
and his mother the half-blood daughter
of a well-known army officer. His mother
dying soon after his birth, he was reared
by his paternal grandmother and an
uncle, who after the Minnesota massacre
in 1862 fled with the boy into Canada.
Here he lived the life of a wild Indian
until he was 15 years of age, when his
father, who in the meantime had accepted
Christianity and civilization, sought him
out and brought him home to Flandreau,
S. Dak., where a few Sioux families had
established themselves as farmers and
homesteaders. Ohiyesa was placed in
the mission school at Santee, Nebr., where
he made such progress in 2 years that he
was selected for a more advanced course
and sent to Beloit College, Beloit, Wis.
After 2 years spent there in the prepara-
tory department he went to Knox Col-
lege, Galesburg, 111., thence to Kimball
Academy and Dartmouth College, New
Hampshire. He was graduat^^ from
Dartmouth in 1887, and immediately
entered the Boston University school of
medicine, receiving the degree of M. D. in
1890. Dr Eastman was then appointed
Government physician to the Pine Kidee
agency, S. Dak. , and served there nearly
3 years, through the ghost-dance disturb^
ance and afterward. In 1893 he went to
St Paul, Minn., and entered there on the
practice of medicine, also ser^ing for 3
years as traveling secretary of the Young
Men's Christian Association among the
Indians. Afterward he was attorney for
the Sioux at Washington, and later again
Government physician at Crow Creek,
S. Dak. In 1903 he was appointed by
the Office of Indian Affairs to the special
CHARLES ALEXANDER EASTMAN. ( HARPER A BROS.)
work of revising the allotment rolls and
selecting permanent family names for the
Sioux. His first book, "Indian Boy-
hood," appeared in 1902, and **Red
Hunters and the Animal People'* in
1904. He* is an occasional contributor to
the magazines and lectures frequently on
Indian life and history. In 1891 Dr
Eastman married Miss Elaine Goodale,
of Massachusetts, and they have 6 chil-
dren. (e.g. E.)
Eastman, John ( Mahpiyawakankidan^
* Sacred Cloud Worshipper'). A Santee
Dakota of three-fourths blood, brother
of Charles Alexander Eastman, noted as
being a college-bred Presbyterian clergy-
man; bom in Mar., 1849, at Shakopee,
Minn. His father was Many Lightnings,
a full-blood Sioux, who, on becoming a
Christian in 1864, took the name of Jacob
Eastman. His mother, Mary Nancy
Eastman, was the daughter of Cfapt. Seth
BULL. 30]
EAT THE HAM ECHULIT
413
Eastman, an American army officer, and
maternal granddaughter of Cloud man, a
Sioux chief. He continued with his
father, except for one year at Beloit Col-
lege, Wis., until the latter died in 1876.
The same year he was ordained as a
Presbyterian minister at Flandreau, S.
Dak., and installed as pastor of the In-
dian church of Flandreau township,
which had been organized in 1871 and
Cnded by the ftesbyterian Mission
rd with a building in 1874. Mr East-
man took charee of a Government school
and began teaching the youth of the San-
tee res. in 1878, but resigned this charge
in 1885 in order to accept the position of
overseer of the band then living in Flan-
dreau township. He retired from this
position in 1896 and now devotes much
of his attention to the work of his min-
istry and the cultivation of a small fann
purchased some years ago. His church
now numbers 96 communicants. In 1874
Mr Eastman married Miss Mary J. Fari-
bault, a half-blood Santee. They are
parents of 6 children. Mr Eastman is still
active in tribal affairs, and since about
1880 has annually served in the capacity
of delegate of his people at Washington.
Eat ti^e Ham. A former Sans Arc band
under a medicine-man named Wichasha-
wakan. — Culbertson in Smithson. Rep.
1850, 142, 1851.
Ebahamo. An extinct tribe formerly
dwelling on Matagorda bay, Tex. Ia
Salle constructed his Ft St Louis within
the territory of this tribe and of the
Quelanhubeches, or Karankawa, who
probably were a cognate people. Joutel
(1687) states in his narrative (French,
Hist. Coll. La., i, 134, 1846) that La Salle
recorded a vocabulary of their language,
which is very different from that of the
Cenis (Caddo) and more difficult; that
they were neighbors and allies of the latter
people and understood some' of their
words. "At our fort at St Louis bay,'* he
says, '* we made some stay to cultivate the
friendship of our Bracamos (as the Indian
nation that dwells near our fort is called) ,
in order to leave protectors to the people
whom we would have to leave in the
fort" (A. s. G.)
Apayxjun.— Majssanet MS. (1690) cited by H. £.
Bolton, infn, 1906 (same?). Ba]uunoa.~Early
writer quoted by Gatschet, Karankawa Inds.,
24, 1891. Braoamos.— Cavelier (1685) quoted by
Shea, Early Voy., 21, 1861. S1>ahamo.— Joutel
(1687) in Mamry, D^., in, 276. 1878. Sbahomo.—
Ibid., 300. ifebahamo.— Joutel (1687) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., i, 134, 1846. EebohamM.~Joutel
quoted by Gatschet, op. cit.
Ebiamana. An unidentified village in
N. Florida about 1565.— De Bry, Brev.
Nar., II, map, 1591.
Ebita Poooola Chitto (Ibetap okla chittOy
'fountain-head big people'). A former
Choctaw town, noted oy Romans, be-
lieved to have been situated on the head
of Straight cr., in Kemper co., Miss.,
hence the name. — Halbert in Miss. Hist.
Soc. Publ., VI, 425, 1902.
Ebita-poocolo-ohitto.— West Florida map, ca. 1772.
Ebitap-ooooolo-oho.— Romans, Florida, 310, 1775.
Ib«Up okla ohitto.— Halbert, op. cit.
Ebita Poocola Skatane (Ibetap oklaiskitinif
* fountain-head little people ' ) . A former
Choctaw town on the w. or main prong
of Yazoo cr., a x. affluent of Petickfa or.,
in Kemper co., Miss. — Halbert in Miss.
Hist. Soc. Publ., VI, 423, 1902.
Ebeetap Ooooola.— Romans, Florida, 310, 1775.
IbeUp okla iskitini.— Halbert, op. cit.
Ecatacari. A rancheria of either the
Eudeve or the Nevome of Sonora, Mexico,
in the early nart of the 18th century. It
was probably situated near Matape. —
Writer of 170*2(?) in Doc-. Hist. Mex., 4th
8., v, 126, 1857.
Echantac. A village, presuma])ly Cos-
tanoan, formerly connected with San Juan
Bautista mission, Cal. — Engelhardt, Fran-
ciscans in Cal., 398, 1897.
Echilat. A f(jrnier village of the Rum-
sen division of the Costanoan family sit-
uated 12 m. s. E. of San Carlos mission,
Cal.
Echilat.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860.
San Franoisquita.— Ibid.
Echojoa. A Mayo settlement on the Rio
Mayo, a})<)ve Santa Cruz, s. w. Sonora,
Mexico; pop. 444 in 1900.
Ecbehoa.— Hardy, Trav. in Mex., 438, 18*29. Eeho-
joa. — Orozco y Berra, Geog., 356, 1864. EohonoTa. —
Ibid. (Echojoa. or). Eetsohojoa.— Kino, map(1702)
in Stoekleln, Neue Welt-Bott, 1726.
Echota (corruption of Itsd^tt^ meaning
unknown). The name of several Chero-
kee towns. (1) the most important- -
often distinguished as Great Echota — was
on the s. side of Little Tennessee r., a
short distance below Citico cr., in Monroe
CO., Tenn. It was the ancient capitaland
sacred "peace town " of the nation. At
that place there is a large mound. (2)
Little Echota was on Sautee (It«d''tl) cr.,
a head-stream of the Chattahoochee, w.
of Clarkesville, Ga. (3) New Echota,
the capital of the nation for some years
before the removal, was established at a
spot, originally known as G&nsdgi, at the
junction of Oostanaula and Conasauga rs.,
in (-rordon co., Ga. It was sometimes
called Newtown. (4) The old Macedo-
nian mission on Soco cr., of the North
Carolina res. , is also known to the Cher-
okee as ItsA^'tl, as was also (5) the great
Nacoochee mound. See Mooney in 19th
Rep. B. A. E., 523, 1900.
Choquata.— Mooney, op. cit. (cited as former mis-
print). Cliota.~Doc. of 1799 quoted by Royce in
5th Rep. B. A. E., 144, 1887. Ohote.— Timberlake.
Mem., map, 1765 (on Little Tennessee r.). Ghote
great-Bartram, Trav., 371, 1792 (on Tenn. r.).
Echnlit. A Tolowa village at a lagoon
on the coast about 5 m. n. of Crescent,
Cal. (p. E. G.)
E'-tou-Ht »iin-n<5.— Dorsey, MS. Chetco vocab., B.
A. E., 1884. E-tou'-lIt.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, ni,236,1890(Tututunne named). E-tc*u'-lIt.—
414
ECLAUOU EDUCATION
[B. A.
Ibid. (Naltunnetunne name). To'&i-qan'-me.—
Ibid, (another Naltunnetunne name). .
Eolanon. A villajje of the Utina (Tim-
ucua) confederacy m central Florida in
the 16th century. — Laudonni^re (1564) in
French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 243, 1869.
Ecoohee. A former Cherokee settle-
ment on a head stream of Savannah r., in
N. w. South Carolina or n. e. Geoi]?ia.
It was destroyed during the Revolution-
ary war. (j. M.)
EfftT— A \maJt mk ISiimming lifhrg sf
Oka, Canada, in 1736. Their totem was
the birch. Ghauvignerie calls themL*Eco-
ree, evidently intended for L'Exjorce.
Bark tribe.— Chauvigrnerie (1736) transl. in N. Y.
Doc. Ck)l. Hist.. IX, 1053, 1855. I*Bcoree.— Ghau-
vignerie quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii,
554. 1853.
Eonrenil ( French : * sc^uirrel ' ) . Spoken
of as a tribe formerly living between Ta-
doussac and Hudson bay, Quebec pro-
vince, Canada; destroyed by the Iroquois
in 1661. Probably a Montagnais band
living about the headwaters of Three rs.,
possibly about the lake named Ouapichi-
ouanon in the Jesuit Relations.
Esourieux.— Jes. Rel., 20, 1661. I*Bcureuil.— Mc-
Kenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 79, 1854.
Eoushaw. See Cashaw.
Edelano. An unidentified village on an
island in St Johns r., Fla., in the 16th
century. — Laudonni^re (1564) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 287, 1869.
Edenshaw (or Edensaw, from a Tlingit
word referring to theglacier ) . The Haida
chief best known to the whites. He suc-
ceeded early in the 19th century to the
chieftainship of the strong Stustas kinship
group which centered in the town of
Kioosta on the coast of Graham id. oppo-
site North id., Brit. Col. Shortly after
1860, hi^ people having fallen off in num-
bers, he moved with them to Kung, at
the mouth of Naden harbor, where he
erected a large house, which is still stand-
ing. Through the exercise of his excep-
tional abilities in trade and in various
other w^ays he became one of the wealth-
iest of the Haida chiefs. His relations
with the whites were always cordial, and
it was through his influence that a mis-
sionary was sent to Masset. Among other
good offices to the whites, he protected
the crew of an American vessel when
threatened by other natives. He died
about 1885. A monument mentioning
his kind treatment of the whites stands in
Masset. (j. R. s.)
Edgpiiliik. A Delaware village in w.
New Jersey in 1792.
Etoiiliik.— Brinton, Lenape Leg., 46, 1885. Sdg-
ptilttk.— Keane in Stanford, Ctomp., Cent, and S.
Am., 512, 1878.
Edisto. A small tribe, now extinct,
which appears to have occupied low^er
Edisto r., S. C, which derived its name
from that of the tribe. The Huguenots
of Ribault's colony were kindly wel-
comed by them in 1562, and the Span-
iards for a time had a mission among
them. They were included in the Cusabo
group, and are mentioned in connection
with the Stono, Westo, and Savannah as
still living in the region named in 1670,
when English colonization began. With
the Westo and Stono they were possibly
driven out by the Shawnee in 1680.
Gatschet thinks it probable that they
spoke the Uchean language. See Moon-
ty, ftiftian TnbML ol tha^t, Bull. B. A.
E., 1894.
AduaU.— De Bry, Brev. Nar., ii, map, 1591.
Audu«U.— Laudonni^re (1587) in Hakluyt, Voy.,
379, 1600. Ediatoes.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq.
Soc., II, 83, 1836. Ediato.— Adair, Hist. Inds., ^,
1775. Edistow.— Harris, Voy. and Trav., i, map,
17a'>. OriaU.>-Fontaneda (ca. 1570) in Temaux-
Compans. Voy., xx, 16, 1841. Oristanom.— Brig-
stock (1623) quoted by French, Hist. Ck>ll. La., ii,
186. 1876.
Edjao (U^djao). A Haida town situ-
ated around a hill of the same name,
at the B. end of Masset village, Queen
Charlotte ids. , Brit. Col. It was occupied
by the Aoyaku-lnagai, a branch of the
Yaku-lanas, and, according to the old
men, consisted in later times of about 6
houses, which would have contained
nearlj^ a hundred persons. Later it came
to be included- within the limits of Mas-
set.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 99, 1905.
Hai'ts'aa.~Boas, Twelfth Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
23, 1898. Ha-jii hade.— Krause, Tlinkit-Indianer,
304, 1885 (' people of Edjao'; probably the same).
Edjieretrnkenade ( ^ buffalo i>eople ' ) .
An Athapascan tribe of the Chipewyan
group living along the banks of Bunalo
r., Athabasca, Canada.
Edjiere-tpou-kke-nade.— Petitot, Autour du lac des
Esclaves, 363, 1891 ('buflfalo people').
Ednoation. The aborigines of North
America had their own systems of educa-
tion, through which the young were in-
structed in their coming labors and obli-
gations, embracing not only the whole
round of economic pursuits — hunting,
fishing, handicraft, agriculture, and
household work — but speech, fine art,
customs, etiquette, social obligations, and
tribal lore. By unconscious absorption
and by constant inculcation the boy and
girl became the accomplished man and
woman. Motives of pride or shame, the
stimulus of flattery or disparagement,
wrought constantly upon the child, male
or female, w ho was the charge, not of the
parents and grandparents alone but of
the whole tribe (Hecke welder). Loskiel
(p. 139) says tne Iroquois are particu-
larly attentive to the education of the
young people for the future government
of the state, and for this purpose admit
a boy, generally the nephew of the prin-
cipal chief, to the council and solemn
feast following it.
The Eskimo were most careful in teach-
ing their girls and boys, setting them diflS-
cuTt problems in ciinoeing, sledding, and
hunting, showing them how to solve them,
BULL. 30]
EDUCATION
415
and asking boys how they would meet a
given emergency ( see Child life) . Every-
where there was the closest association, for
education, of parents with children, who
learned the names and uses of things in
nature. At a tender age they played
at serious business, girls attendmg to
household duties, boys following men's
pursuits. Children were furnished with
appropriate toys; they became little
basket makers, weavers, potters, water
carriers, cooks, archers, stone workers,
watchers of crops and tiot^ks, the range
of instruction l)enig limited only by tribal
custom. Personal responsibilities were
laid on them, and they were stimulated bv
the tribal law of personal property, which
was inviolable. Among the Pueblos
cult images and paraphernalia were their
playthings, and they earlv joined the
fraternities, looking forward to social du-
ties and initiation. The Apat^he boy had
for pedagogues his father and grandfather,
who b^<an early to teach him counting,
to run on level ground, then up and down
hill, to break branches from trees, to jump
into (!old water, and to race, the whole
training tending to make him skilful,
strong, and fearless. The gi rl was trained
in part by her mother, but chiefly by the
grandmother, the discipline beginning a.s
soon as the child could control her move-
ments, but never becoming regular or
severe. It consisted in rising early, carry-
ing water, helping al)out the home, cook-
ing, and minding children. At 6 the little
girl took her lirst lessons in basketry
with yucca leaves. Later on decorated
baskets, saddle-bags, beadwork, and dress
were her care.
On the coming of the whites a new era
of secular education, designed and unde-
signed, began. All the natives, young
and old, were pupils, and all the whites
who came in contact with them were in-
structors, whether purposely or through
the influence of their example and pat-
ronage. The undesigned instruction can
not he measured, but its effect was pro-
found. The Indian passed at once mto
the iron age; the stone perioil, except in
ceremony, was moribund. So radical
was the change in the eastern tribes that
it is difficult now to illustrate their true
life in museum collections.
An account of the designed instruction
would embrace all attempts to change
manners, customs, and motives, to teach
reading and writing in the foreign tongue,
to acquaint the Indians with new arts and
industries, and to impress or force upon
them the social organization of their con-
querors. The history of this s>istematic
instruction divides itself into the period
of (1) discovery and exploration, (2)
colonization' and settlement, (3) Colonial
and Revolutionary times, (4) the growth
of the national policy, and (5) the present
system. *.
Parts of the area here considered were
discovered and explored by several Euro-
pean nations at dates wide apart. All of
them aroused the same wonder at first
view, traded their manufactures for In-
dian i)roducts, smoked the pipe of i>eace,
and o|)ened friendly relations. The Nor-
wegians began their acculturation of
(Greenland in the year 1000. The Span-
ish pioneers were Poncede Le<'>n, Narvaez,
Cabeza de Vaca, Marcos de Niza, De Soto,
Coronado, Cabrillo, and manv others.
The French appeared in Canaaa and in
the Mississippi valley, and were followed
by the English in Virginia and in New
England, the Dutch in New York, the
Swedes in New Jersey, the Quakers in
Pennsylvania, and the Russians in Alaska.
Instruction, designed and undesigned,
immediately ensued, teaching the Indians
many foreign industrial processes, the
bettering of their own, and the adoption
of firearms, and metal tools and utensils.
Domestic animals (horses, donkeys, cat-
tle, sheep, goats, poultry) and many
vegetables found congenial envin>n-
ment. It was through these and other
practical lessons that the missionaries
and teachers of the early da^'S, who
came to Christianize voung' Indians and
bestow on them an education, were more
successful instructors than they knew.
By the subtle process of suggestion, the
inevitable action of mind upon mind, the
Indians received inc^alculable training in
all arts and the fashion of living. Fail-
ures to accomplish the most cherished
object of the missionaries grew out of the
great distance which separated the two
races, and of the contrary influences of
many of the whites who were first on the
spot, not from lack of zeal or ability. The
Roman Catholic clergy were at first the
most efficient agents of direct instruction;
besides carrying on their proj)er mission-
ary work they exerted themselves to miti-
gate the harsh treatment visited on the
Indian. In the 16th century the expe-
dition of Narvaez to Florida was accom-
panied by Franciscans under Padre Juan
Juarez, and the appearance of CaV)eza de
Vaca in Mexico prompted Fray Marcos
de Niza's journey to the n. as far as Zufii,
and of the expedition of Coronado, who
left Fray Juan de Padilla and a lay brother
in Quivira, on the Kansas plains, as well
as a friar and a lav brother at Tiguex and
Pecos, respectively, all destin^ to be
killed by the natives. The subsequent
history of the S. W. records a series of
disasters to the immediate undertakings,
but permsment success in practical edu-
cation.
In 1567 the agricultural education of
Indians was tried in Florida bv the Jesuit
416
EDUCATION
[B. A. a.
Fray Rogel, who selected lands, pro-
cured agricultural implements, and built
commodious houses (»hea).
Early in the 17th century Franciscan
missions were established amon^ the
Apalachee and neighboring tribes, after-
ward to be abandoned, but forming the
first link in the chain of causes which has
brought these Indians through their mi-
nority under guardianship to mature self-
dependence. Concentration for practical
instruction was established in California
by the Franciscans (see California, Indiana
of). The results achieved by the mis-
sions in the S. W. were chiefly practical
and social. Domestic animals, with the
art of domestication and industries de-
pending on their products, were perma-
nently acquired. Foreign plants, includ-
ing wheat, peaches, and grapes, were
introduced, gunpowder was adopted in
place of the bow, and new practices
and customs, good and bad, came into
vogue. The early French missions in
North America were among (1) the Ab-
naki in Maine, (2) the Huron in Ontario,
Michigan, and Ohio, (3) the Iroquois in
New York, (4) the Ottawa in Wisconsin
and Michigan, (5) the Illinois in the mid-
dle VV., and (6) the tribes of Louisiana.
Bishop Laval founded a school at Quebec
for French and Indian youth. Father de
Smet planted the first Catholic mission
among the Salish tribes, and Canadian
priests visited the natives on Puget sd.
and along the coast of Washington.
One of the objects in colonizing Vir-
ginia, mentioned in the charter of 1606
and repeated in that of 1621, was to bring
the infidels and savages to human civility
and a settled and quiet government
( Neill ) . Henrico College was founded in
1618. The council of Jamestown in 1619
voted to educate Indian children in re-
ligion, a civil course of life, and in some
useful trade. George Thorpe, superin-
tendent of education at Henrico, gave a
cheering account of his labors in 1621.
Manv youths were taken to England to
be e<iucated. William and Mary College
was founded in 1691, and special provi-
sions were made in the charter of Virginia
for the instruction of Indians ( Hist. Col-
lege of William and Mary, 1874 ) . Brass-
eiton manor was purchased through the
charity of Robert Boyle, the yearly rents
and profits being devoted to a boarding-
school foundation in William and Mary
Collie. In Maryland no schools were
founded, but the settlers and Indians ex-
changed knowledge of a practical kind.
The interesting chapter ot Indian educa-
tion in New England includes, during the
17th centuiy, the offering of their children
for instruction, the translation of the Bible
( 1646-90) into their language by Eliot (see
Eliot Bible) f the founding of Natick, the
appointment of a superintendent of Indi-
ans (Daniel Gookin. 1656-86), and the pro-
vision for Indian youth i n Harvard . The
spirit and methods of instruction in the
18th century are revealed in the adoption
of Indian children by the colonists (Sam-
son Occum, for example), the founding of
Moor*s charity school, Bishop Berke-
ley's gift to Yale, the labors of Eleazer
Wheelock (1729), and the founding of
Dartmouth College in 1754 (see Fletcher,
Ind. Education and Civilization, 1888).
In New York and other northern states
large sums of money were appropriated
for the instruction of Indians, and in
Princeton College special provisions were
made for their education.
The Moravians, models of thrift and
good will, had in their hearts wherever
they went the welfare of the aborigines
as a private and public burden.
Between 1741 and 1761 b^an, under
Vitus Bering and his successors, the se-
ries of lessons given for the acculturation
of the Aleut, Eskimo, and Indians of
Alaska. Schools were formally opened
in Kodiak in 1794, and a little later in
Sitka. This chapter in education includes
the Russian Company! s schools, as well
as military. Government, and church
schools. Pupils were taught the Russian
and English languages, geography, his-
tory, arithmetic, geometry, trigonometry,
and navigation. Industrial training was
compulsory in many cases. Dall ( Alaska,
1870) s{)eaks of the great aptness of the
Aleuts in receiving instruction. In all
areas the voyageur, the trapper, the
trader, the missionary, the settler, the
school-teacher, and Government authori-
ties were partners in education. The
contact, whenever it took place, had its
effect in a generation or two. The mak-
ing of treaties with the Indians afforded
an object lesson in practical affairs. Old
things passed away whose nature and very
existence and structure can be proved now
only by impressions on ancient pottery or
remains in caverns and graves. The two-
fold education embrac^ new dietaries,
utensils, and modes of preparing and eat-
ing food; new materials and fashions in
dress and implements for making clothing;
new or modified habitations and their
appurtenances and furniture; new pro-
ductive industries and new methods of
quarrying and mining, woodcraft, hunt-
ing, trapping, and fishing; the introduc-
tion of gunpowder, domestic animals, and
foreign handicrafts; the adoption of cal-
endars and clocks, and the habit of steady
employment for wages; new social insti-
tutions, manners, customs, and fashions,
not always for the better; foreign words
and jargons for new ideas and activities;
new estnetic ideas; changes in the clan
and tribal life, and accessions to native
BULL. 80]
EDUCATION
417
beliefs and forms of worship borrowed
from the conquerors.
In the Canadian colonies little was done
for secular and industrial education by the
provincial governments prior to confeder-
ation. The Roman Catholic missions in-
herited from the French, Anglican mis-
sions sent from the mother country, the
New England Company's missions among
the Six Nations and Mohawk, and Meth-
odist schools founded by Lord Elgin and
others, as well as those managed by Pres-
byterians, Baptists, and Congregational-
i8ts,all combined common schoolinstnic-
tion and training in the practical arts
with their special work (see Missions),
After the confederation (1867) the sub-
ject was taken up systematically and con-
tract schools were established and put
into the hands of the Christian denom-
inations. In the older provinces agri-
culture and other industries had largely
taken the place of primitive arts. After
the admission of British Columbia, Man-
itoba, and the Northwest Territory into
the Dominion, steps were taken to estab-
lish systematic training in those prov-
inces. In 1904 there were 24 industrial,
46 boarding, and 228 day schools in ope-
ration. t)ay schools among the tribes aim
to secure the cooperation of parents; the
boarding schools especially cultivate in-
dustrial training for various bread-win-
ning trades; normal schools and girls'
homes have been established to teach
self-support under new conditions. Im-
provement in dwellings has developed
a stronger attachment to home, as well
as bettered health and raised tne moral
tone, for when houses are furnished with
stoves, beds, tables, chairs, musical in-
struments, andsewingmachines, the tastes
of the occupants are elevated and other
thouffhts stimulated. Indians become in-
dividual owners of farms and of flocks
and herds and sell the produce; they par-
take of the benefits of commerce and
transportation and acquire thrift. Com-
petition in fairs and exhibitions stimu-
lates proficiency in both the old and the
new activities. The purpose of the Cana-
dian government has been to encourage
the Indians to emerge from a condition
of tutelage and continue voluntarily what
they have learned under close supervi-
sion. The schools discourage premature
marriages and educate the young pro-
spective mothers. Education has made
the aborigines Law-respecting, prosperous,
and contented. Far from being a menace
to or a burden upon the commonwealth,
they contribute m many ways to its wel-
fare. The able-bodied in the mixed
farming districts have become practically
self-supporting (Pedley in Can. Ind. Aff.
for 1904).
Bull. 30-05 27
After the establishment of the United
States government the following Christian
bodies either instituted secular day and
boarding schools amon^ the Indians or
continued those already in existence, and
these schools have borne a lar^e part in
Indian education: Roman Catnolic and
Moravians from colonial times; Friends
(Orthodox), 1795; Baptist, 1807; Amer-
ican Board of Commissioners for Forei^
Missions, 1810; Episcopal, 1815; Methodist
Episcopal, 1816; Presbyterian (North),
1833; Old School Presbyterians, 1837;
Methodist Episcopal (South), 1844; Con-
gregational American Missionary Asso-
ciation, 1846; Reformed Dutch, 1857;
Presbyterian (South), 1857; Friends
(Hicksite), 1869; United Presbyterian,
1869; Unitarian, 1886. Miss Alice C.
Fletcher affirms that the missionary
labors among the Indians have been as
largely educations 1 as religious. Until 1870
all Government aid for this object passed
through the hands of the missionaries.
On July 12, 1775, a committee on In-
dian affairs was appointed in the Con-
tinental Congress, with Gen. Schuyler as
chairman, and in the following year a
standing committee was created. Money
was voted to support Indian students at
Dartmouth and Princeton colleges. After
the War Department was creatS, in 1789,
Indian affairs were left in the hands of
its Secretary until 1849, when the De-
partment of the Interior was established
and the Indian Bureau was transferred
thereto. Gen. Knox, Washington's Sec-
retary of War, urged industrial education,
and the President was of the same mind.
In his message of 1801 President Adams
noted the success of continued efforts to
introduce among the Indians the imple-
ments and practices of husbandry and
the household arts.
The first petition of an Indian for
schools among his tribe was made by
David Folsom, a Choctaw, in 1816. The
Ottawa, in their treaty (1817) and in their
address to President Monroe (1822), stipu-
lated for industrial and literary eilucation.
In 1819 a first appropriation of $10,000 was
made by Congress for Indian education,
the superintendents and agents to be
nominated by the President. In 1823
there were 21 schools receiving Govern-
ment aid, and the number was increased
to 38 in 1825. The first contract school
was established on the Tulalip res. , Wash. ,
in 1869, but it waa not until 1 873 that Gov-
ernment schools proper were provided.
In the beginning there were only day
schools, later boarding schools on the
reservations, and finally boarding schools
remote from them. The training in all
these schools was designed to brin^ the
Indians nearer to civilized life, with a
418
EEH EEKSEN
[ B. A. B.
view to ultimate citizenship by enabling
them to asHimilate the speech, industrial
life, family organization, social manners
and customs, civil government, knowl-
edge, modes of thinking, and ethical
standards of the whites. The change to
agriculture and sedentarv industries had
a profound effect in developing a sense of
continuous responsibility. A school was
established at Carlisle, Pa., in 1879, by
Capt. R. H. Pratt, U. S. A. , for the purposie
of e<lucating Indian boys and girls by
separating them from their tribal life so as
to prepare themtoliveand labor in contact
with white people (see Carlisle School).
To this end they are taught in the school as
far as the high-school grade, and instruc-
tion is given in mechanical trades and
domestic work. In order to facilitate asso-
ciation with the white population the
** outing system" was adopted, by which
pupils are permitted to go out during vaca-
tions to earn money. Boys and girls are
also placed in families where they may
work for their board, and perhaps more,
and attend school. Thus the young In-
dians are trained in home life and associate
with white children. Contract schools
were abandoned June 30, 1900; the reli-
gious societies have since taken care of
their own schools, and the appropriation
for Indian eduation is applied under
the law entirely to Government schools.
About 100 students receive higher instruc-
tion in Hampton Institute. One of the
latest experiments is that of Rev. Sheldon
Jackson in connection with the introduc-
tion of domesticated reindeer into Alaska.
These are allotted to mission and other
schools, and instruction in the care and
use of them is a part of the training.
The present scheme of education
adopted by the Indian Office is to teach
the pupils English, arithmetic, geog-
raphy, and United States history, and
also to train them in farming and the
care of stock and in trades, as well as
gymnastics. This requires the mainte-
nance of day, Iwarding, and training
schools, 253 how in all, with 2,300 em-
ployees, involving an annual expenditure
of nearlv $5,000,000. Some of these In-
dian schools are models (see Chilocro
Indian IndiistricU Sch(X)l). Allotment of
land has been the means of sending Indian
children to district schools with white
children. Indian teachers are l)eing em-
ployed and parents are coming to be
mterested.
While on some reservations there are
still Indian children who never saw a
school, the great mass have ceased to be
indifferent. The results of a century's
efforts are immeasurable. Indians now
take their places beside whites in many
•of the industrial pursuits and in the higher
walks as well. The best evidence that
the Indian is capable of civilization is the
list of those who have succeeded. The
Government has been stimulated, advised,
and aided all along by associations of
benevolent men and women who have
freely given their time and means for the
education and uplifting of the Indians,
with various motives, some seeking the
preservation of tribal life, arts, and cus-
toms, some their extinction. See Carlisle
School f Chilocco Indian Industrial School ^
Dutch influence, English ii>fluence^ French
inftnence, Spajii,sh infttumcey etc., (iovem-
mental policy^ Missions.
In addition to the works citeil, see
Reps. Ind. Aff., especially for 1898 and
subsequent years; Bureau of Education
Reports for 1870, 339-354; 1871, 402-411;
1872, 405-418; 1873, 469-480; 1874, 506-
516; 1875, 519-528; 1878, 281-286; 1879,
278-280; 1880, 372-376; 1886, app. 8 and
657-660; 1888, 999-1004; 1897, 1520-1522;
also circulars 3, 1883, 58-73; 4, 34-43;
Bulletin 1 of the New Orleans Exposi-
tion, 541-544 and 746-754, 1889; Archse-
ologia Americana, 1820-60; Bacon, I^ws
of Md., 1765; Camden Soc. Publica-
tions, i-cix, 1838-72; Canadian Ind. Aff.
Reps.; Catesby, Nat. Hist. Carolina, ii,
XII, 1743; Eastman, Indian Boyhood,
1902; Doc. Hist. N. Y., i-iv, 1849-^51;
Fletcher, Indian Education and Civiliza-
tion, 1888; Hailmann, Education of the
Indian, 1904; Hall, Adolescence, 1904;
Heckewelder, Narr. of the Mission of the
United Brethren, 1820; Jenks, Childhood
of Ji-shib^ 1900; Hist. College of William
and Marv, 1660-1874; La Flesche, The
Middle F'ive, 1900; Loskiel, Hist, of the
Mission of the United Brethren, 1794;
Mai«8. Hist. Soc. Coll., i-x, 1792-1809;
Neill, Hist. Va. Co., 1869; Parkman, Old
Regime in Canada; Pratt, Reps, on Car-
lisle School in An. Rep. Commr. Ind. Aff.,
especiallv 20th and 24th; Rawson et al..
Rep. of Commissioners on Indian Educa-
tion in 1844 (Jour. Leg. Assemb. Prov. of
Can., VF, 1847); Shea, Catholic Missions,
1855; Sraet (1) Oregon Miss., 1845, (2)
New Indian Sketches, 1865, (3) Western
Missions and Missionaries, 1863; Spencer,
P^ducation of the Pueblo Child, 1899;
Spotswood, Off. Letters (1710-22), Va.
Hist. Soc, i-ii, 1882-85; Stevenson,
Religious Life of the Zuili Child, 1887;
Stith, Hist. Va., repr. 1865. (o. t. m.)
Eeh. A band or division of the Ini-
waitsu of Scott valley, Siskiyou co., Cal.;
noted hy Gibbs as living with the Wat-
sahewa m 1851.
E-eh.— Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in,
171, 1853. E-oh.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,
32d Cong., spec, sess., 171, 1853.
Eeksen ( E^ccs^ ) . A Salish tribe about
Oyster bav, e. coast of Vancouver id.,
speaking the Comox dialect. — Boas, MS.,
B. A. E., 1887.
BULL. 30 J
EEL RIVER INDIANS EKALUIN
419
Eel River Indians. A part of the Mi-
ami, fonnerly living in Indiana. Their
village was at Thorntown, Boone co.,
where they had a reservation, which was
sold in 1828, the hand removing to the
Miami res. l)etween the Wabash and
Eel rs., in Miami co. They afterward
shared the general fortunes of the tribe.
(.1. M.)
EelRiverlndiaiu.— Knox (1792) in Am. St. Papers,
I, 236, 1832. Eelrivers.— Brown, West. Guz., 72,
1817. Elk rivpr trib«.— Ibid., 349 (misprint).
Itle-River Indians.^Imlay, West. Ter., 371. 1793
(Eel r., through a corruption of TAnguille into
'Long-isle'). TAnguille.— French name of the
band and .settlement (*The eel'). Lonf-isle.—
Imlay, op. cit. (misrendering of French I'An-
guille). Thornton party.— Gale, Upper Miss., 178,
1867. Thorntown party.— Wyandot Vi 1 . treaty ( pro-
claimed 1828) in U. 8. Ind. Treat., 520, 1873.
Eesteytoch. (liven as a tribe on Cas-
cade inlet, Brit. Col. ; probably a village
group of the Bellacoola.
Ees-tey-tooh.- Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app.,1859.
Efaca. A Timucua clan belonging to
the Acheha phratry.— Pareja (1612-14)
quoted by Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philos.
Soc, XVII, 492, 1878.
Egan. An Algonquian settlement in
Maniwaki township, Ottawa co., Quebec,
containing 225 Indians in 1884.
E^edesminde. A missionary station on
Davis str., w. Greenland. — Crantz, Hist.
Greenland, i, 14, 1767.
Egnianna-cahel ('water-hole of the
mountain'). A rancheria, probably Co-
chimi, connected with Purfsinia (Cade-
gomo) mission, Ix)wer California, in the
18th century. — Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v,
189, 1857.
Egnianna oahel.— Ibid.
Ehartsar. A band of the Craws, one
of the four into which I^wis divided the
tribe.
E-hart'-sar.— Lewi.s, Trav., 175, 1809. Eh-h4-
tii.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., ii, l.x.xxiv, 1823
(Hidatsa name: *leaf people').
Ehatisaht. A Nootka tribe on Esper-
anza inlet, w. coast of Vancouver id.,
Brit. Col.; i)op. 101 in 1902, 95 in 1904.
Their principal village is Oke. From
their waters came the larger part of the
supply of dental ium shells extensively
used on the Pacific coast as media of
exchange.
Ai-tii-«arU.— Jewitt, Nar., 36, 1849. Aitzarts.—
Armstrong, Oregon . 136, 1857. Ayhuttisaht.—
Sproat,Sav. Life, 308, 1868. Eh-aht-tis-aht.— Can.
Ind.Aflf.,52.1876. Ehatowt.- Mayne, Brit. Col.,
261, 1862. EhatiMOit.— Can. Ind. Aflf. 1901, pt. 2,
158. EOiatUath.— Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can. ,
31,1890. Ehatt-i»-aht.— Can. Ind. Aflf. 1897, 357.
Ehonae (*one battered it.'— Hewitt).
A village of the Tionontati existing in
1640.
EhSae.-^es.Rel. 1641, 69, 1858.— Eh wae.— Shea,
note in Charlevoix, New France, ii, 153, 1866.
Sainot Pierre et sainot Paul.— .Jes. Rel. 1640, 95,
1858.
Ehressaronon. The Huron name of a
tribe mentioned ])y Ragueneau in 1640 as
living s. of St Lawrence r. (Jes. Rel. 1640,
36, 1858). It can not now be identified
with any tribe s. of the 8t Lawrence. Per-
haps Iro(iuoian, as are sonie of the tribes
mentioned in the same list.
Ehntewa. A Luiseno village formerly
in the neigh borhooil of San Luis Key
mission, s. Cal. (Tavlor in Cal. Farmer,
May 11, 1860). Possibly the same as
Hatawa.
Eidena (jxirhapsan Eskimo rendering
of * I don't know ' ). A Kinugumiut coast
settlement at C. Prince of Wales.
Ei-dan-noo.— Beech y (1826) quoted by Baker,
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901. Iden-noo.— Ibid. Waleg.—
Post-route map, 1903.
Eider (trans, of Igognnk, 'eider duck').
An Aleut village on Captain bay, Un-
alaska, Alaska, at a point of the same
name. Pop. 39 in 18:^, according to
Veniaminoff.
Igognak.— Kotzebue(1816) quoted by Baker, Geog.
Diet. Alaska, 1901 ('eider duck'). Igonok.— Coxe,
Russ. Discov., 166, 1787. Pay«tfav»koi.— Elliott,
Cond. Aff. Alaska, 225, 1875. Peatriakof. —Baker,
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901 (Rusi^ian: 'eider duck').
Peatriakovo.— Sarichef (1792) quoted by Baker,
ibid. Peatriakowskoje.— Holmberg, Ethnol.Skizz.,
map, 1855. Peatryakovakoe.- Veniaminoff, Za-
piski, 11,202,1840.
Einake (^-?M^-a-Ae, 'catchers,' or 'sol-
diers'). A society of the Ikunuhkatsi, or
All Comrades, in the Piegan tribe; it has
l)een obsolete since about 1860, and per-
haps earlier.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge
Tales, 221, 1892.
Eiwhuelit. A division of the Yuit Es-
kimo on St Lawrence id., Bering sea.
Bogoras says "they are plainly a colony
from the nearest [Sil)erian] shore, prob-
ably from Indian point." The villages
are Chibukak, Chitnak, Kialegak, Kuku-
liak, Puguviliak, and Punuk.
Eiwhue'lit.— Bogoras, Chukchee, 20,1904 (Chuk-
chi name). Kikhtdg'amut.— Dall in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., I, 15, 1877 ('islanders'). Oomoojeka.—
Kelly, Arctic Eskimo in Alaska. 11,1890. 8hi-
wo-k^-mut.— Dall in Proc. A. A. A. S., xxxiv,
377, 1886. Umudjek.— Woolfe in 11th Census.
Ala.ska, 130, 1893.
Ekaentoton. The Huron name of Man-
itoulin id. and of the Indians (Aniikwa)
living on it in 1649. It was the ancient
home of the Ottawa.
Ekaentoton.— Jes. Rel. 1649, H, 6, 1858. I'lsle de
Saincte Marie.— Ibid.
Ekaloaping. A Padlimiut Eskimo set-
tlement in Padli fjord, Baffin land.
Exaloaping.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 441, 1888.
Ekaluakdjain. A summer settlement
of the Saumingmiut subtribe of the Oko-
iniut Eskimo, n. of Cumberland sd.
Exalttaqc^'uin.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 439, 1888.
Ekalnalnin. A summer settlement of
the Akudnirmiut Eskimo on Home bav,
Baffin land.
Exalualuin.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 441, 1888.
Ekalnin. A summer settlement of the
Nugumiut Eskimo of Baffin land at the
head of Frobisher bav.
Exaluin.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E.,map, 188«.
Ekaluin. A summer settlement of
Talirpingmiut Eskimo on the s. shore of
Cumberland sd.
Exoluin.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. K., map, 1888.
420
EKALUKDJUAK ELEPHANT MOUND
[ B. A. E.
Ekalnkdjnak. A HUinmer settleineut of
the Kingua Okomiut Eskimo at the head
of Cumberland sd.
Sxaluq^jttaq.— Boa.s in 6th Rep. B. A. K., map, 188K.
Ekalnktalnk. An P^skimo village in the
Kuskokwim district, Alaska; pop. 24 in
1898.
EkalokUluffomiut.— 11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Ekarenniondi ('there a tree lies ex-
tended.*— Hewitt). ATionontati village
of the Deer clan where the Jesuits had
their mission of St Mathias in 1648.
Ekarenniondi.— Gamier (1648) in Charlevoix, New
Fr., II. 228, note, 1866. Sainot Katthieu.— Jes.
Rel. 1640, 95, 1858. Saint Kathiat.— Jes. Rel. 1648,
61, 1858.
Ekatopistaks ('half-dead meat' — Mor-
^n* ; * the band that have finished pack-
ing'— Hayden). A division of the Pie-
gan tribe of the Siksika (q. v.), probably
extinct.
e-ka-to'-pi-ataka.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol.
Mo. VaL, 264, 1862. E-ko'-to-pi«-taxe.— Morgan,
Anc. Soc., 171. 1878.
Eki^iagan. A village of the Chalone
division of the Costanoan family, for-
merly near Soledad mission, Cal. — Tay-
lor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860.
Ekilik. A Togiagamiut village on To-
giak r., near it« mouth, in Alaska. Pop.
192 in 1880; 60 in 1890.
Skillgamat.— Spurr and Post quoted bv Baker,
Geog. Diet. AlaHka, 1901. Ikalinkamiut.— 11th Cen-
sus, Alaska, 5, 1893. Ikaliwkha.— Petroflf, 10th
Census, Alaska, 17, 1884.
Ekiondatsaan. A Huron village in On-
tario about 1640.
EkhiondaltMan.—Jes. Rel. 1637, 162, 1858. Ekion-
datsaan.^es. Rel.. in, index, 1858. KhiondaaMi-
ban.— Jes. Rel. 1637, 70, 1858.
Ekoolthaht ( ' bushes-on-hill people ' ) .
A Nootka trit)e formerly inhabiting the
shores of Barclay sd., w. coast of V^an-
couver id. ; pop. 48 in 1879. They have
now joined the Seshart.
B-koofth-aht— Can. Ind. Aff., 308, 1879. Ekii'-
lath.— Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 31, 1890.
Eqoalett.— Kelley, Oregon, 68, 1830.
Ekqnall. A iformer rancheria, possibly
of the Diegueilo, under San Miguel de la
Frontera mission, in the mountains of
w. Lower California, about 30 m. s. of
San Diego, Cal. — Tavlor in Cal. Farmer,
May 18, 1860.
Eknhkahshatm. A Shuswap village on
a small branch of Deadman cr., a n.
affluent of Thompson r., Brit. Col. Pop.,
with Skichistan (q. v.), 118 in 1904.
E-kuh-kah'-aha-tin.~Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc.
Can. for 1891, see. ii, 44.
Eknk. A Nushagagmiut village near
the mouth of Nushagak r., Alaska. Pop.
112 in 1880; 65 in 1890.
Ekouk.— Lutke (1828) quoted by Baker, Geog.
Diet. Alaska, 1901. Ekuk.— Petrofi, Rep.on Alaska,
17, 1884. Yekuk.— 11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Eknkfl. A ^uawmish village com-
munity on the right bank of Squawmisht
r., w. Brit. Col.
S'kuiks.— Boas. MS., B. A. E., 1887. fikiika.—
Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900.
Ekupabeka. A Hidatsa band.
Bonnet— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877. E-ku'-pa-
bc-ka.— Ibid.
Elahsa ( ^ village of the great willows* }.
A former Hidatsa village on the n. bank
of Knife r., N. Dak., about 3 m. from
Missouri r.
Biddahatsi-Awatiu.— Maximilian.Voy. dans Tint.
del'Am.,ni.3,1843. Elah-Sa.— Maximilian, Trav.,
178, 1843. Hidatsa.— Matthews, Ethnog. Hidataa,
38, 1877 (see Hidatrnti).
Elaknlsi (E^lAhdVs^ referring to ela,
* earth ' ; or .4 lagvlm ) . A Cherokee settle-
ment in N. Geoivia about 1800-35. ( J. m. )
AiUgultha.— Doc. 011799 quoted by Royce in 6th
Rep. B.A.E., 144, 1887.
Elarroyde. A former villajje, presum-
ably Costanoan, connected with Doloi^
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, 0(;t. 18, 1861.
Eleidlinottine (*pe6ple of the fork').
An Etchareottine tribe at the confluence
of Liard and Mackenzie rs., whose terri-
tory extends to La Martre, Grandin,
and Tach^ Lakes.
^'^idlin-Oottine.— Petitot, Autour du lac des
Esclaves, 363. 1891. &e-idlin-ottine.— Petitot in
Bull. Soc. de Geog. Paris, chart, 1875. Oeas de la
fourohe da Maokensie.- Petitot. Diet. D^n^ Dind-
ji6, XX, 1876.
ElephantMonnd. A noted effigy mound,
4 m. 8. of Wyalusing, Grant co.. Wis.,
first brought to public notice in 1872
through a pencil sketch and brief descrip-
tion by Jared Warner (Smithson. Rep.
1872, 1873). From its massive form and
an apparent prolongation of the nose, sup-
posed to be a part of the original mound,
giving the tumulus a slight resemblance
to an elephant, the name Elephant Moimd
was applied to it. Although frequently
mentioned and illustrated, the figures are
copies of Warner's sketch, no reexamina-
tion having been made until Nov., 1884,
when the Bureau of American Ethnology
surveyed and platted the mound; theresult
of this work appears in its Twelfth Report
(91-93, fig. 44, 1894). The immediate
situation is a long rectangular depression
forming a cid de hoc^ the level of which
is only a few feet above the Mississippi
at high water. Although the tract had
been cultivated for many years, the
mound at the time of the survey dis-
tinctly showed the rounded surface, the
highest point being at the hip of the
effigy, where the height was 4 ft. The
measurements were: length, 140 ft;
width across the body and to the lower
^nd of the hind leg, 72 ft. " At the time
of the survey no indication of an elephant-
like proboscis was found. After an ex-
amination of similar effigies it was deter-
mined that this mound was designed to
represent a bear, and that the supposed
nasal prolongation seen by Warner was
accidental « due probably to washed or
drifted earth. In addition to the refer-
ences cited, see Am. Antiq., vi, 178, 1884;
Strong (1) in Rep. Wis. Geol. Surv. for
BULL. 301
ELETTNAXCIAY— EL PENON
421
ISTSrAy (2) in Smithson. Rep. 1876, 481,
1877; Thomas, Catalogue Prehist. Works,
Bull. B. A. E., 232, 1891. (c. t. )
Eleunaxoiay. A Chumashan villa^je for-
merly near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Ban-
croft, Nat. Races, i, 459, 1874.
Elhlateeie. The principal village of
the Uchncklesit (q. v.) at the head of
Uchucklesit harbor, All)erni canal, Van-
couver id.; pop. 45 in 1902. — Can. Ind.
Aff., 263, 1902.
EUot Bible. The translation of the
Scriptures into the Algonquian language
of the Massachuset. made by John
Eliot(1604-90), the Apostle to the Indians,
was the first Bible printed in Amer-
ica by English-speaking people. The
first edition of the whole Bible was pub-
lished at Cambridge, Mass., in 1663, the
New Testament having appeared two
years l>efore. The books of (Jenesis and
Matthew seem to have l:)een printed in
1655 and a portion of the Psalms in 1(>58,
by which time the translation of the
whole Bible was completed. Eliot was
the author of other works in the lan-
guage of the Massachuset, and of books
about the language and the natives ( Pil-
ling, Bibliog. Algonq. Lang. , Bull. B. A.E.,
1891). Trumbull's Dictionary of the
Eliot Bible, which is not exhaustive,
has been published as the Natick Dic-
tionary (Bull. 25, B. A. K, 1903). The
Eliot Bible is one of the monuments of
missionary endeavor and prescientific
study of the Indian tongues. In his lin-
guistic lalmrs Eliot was assisted by his
two sons and by several Indians. ' See
Bible trannhitioTiHy Cockenoe. (a. f. c.)
Eljman. A former Chumashan village
described as situated near the windmill of
La Patera, near Santa Barbara, Cal.
Ayinum.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 459, 1874. Elji-
man.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863.
S^man. — Ibid. Elmian.— Bancroft, op. cit. San
Karoos.— Taylor, op. cit.
Elks. A mythical people, said by l*id-
geon (Traditions of De-coo-dah, 162,
1858), on information said to have been
obtained from the Dakota, "to have
come from the N., and once held domin-
ion over all this countrv, from the Missis-
sippi r., E. and n., to the great waters.'*
Ellyay (from EldtsS, abbr. of EtHUhfi,
possibly * green [verdant] earth*). The
name of several former Cherokee settle-
ments. One was on the headwaters of
Keowee r., S. C; another was on Ellijay
cr. of Little Tennessee r., near the pres-
ent Franklin, Macon co., N. C; another
about the present Elliiaj; in (jilmer co.,
€ra., and a fourth on Ellejoy cr. of Little
r., near the present Maryvflle, in Blount
CO., Tenn. — Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
517, 1900.
AUagae.— Bartram, Travels, 372, 1792, El^oy.—
Doc. of 1775 quoted bv Royce in 5th Report
B. A. E., 143, 1887. Ellijay. —Doc of 1799, ibid.
El Horro (Span. : * the castle * ). A pre-
historic ruined pueblo, consisting of the
remains of two blocks of dwellings, situ-
ated on the summit of a rock mesa called
VA Morro, or Inscription Rock, about ii5 m.
E. of Zufii, Valencia CO., N. Mex. The
pueblo is reputed to be of Zufii origin,
but there is only legendary testimony of
this. The pefiol is called ¥A Morro on
account of its fancied resemblance to a
castle from a distance, and Inscription
Rock from the occurrence thereon of nu-
merous inscriptions carved by early Span-
ish explorers. The earliest in date is that
of Juan de Ofiate in 1605. For descrip-
tion see Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
IV, 328, 1892; Cones, Garc^H Diary (1775-
76), 1900; Fewkes in Jour. Am. Ethnol.
and Archaeol., i, 1890; Hoopes and
Broomall in Proc. Del. Co. (Pa.) Inst, of
Sci., I, pt. 1,1905; i^ummis. Strange Cor-
ners, 164-182, 1892; Simi)son, Jour., 121,
1850. (f. w. H.)
El Morro.— Vargas (1692) quoted by Bancn>ft,
.\riz. and N. Mex., 200, 1889 (applied to the peilol).
HaahoUya'hlto.— Hodge, inf n. 1895 ('ruins on t«>p
or above': Zui^i name). Eesho-ta Tashtok.—
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 328, 1892
(given as Zuf^i name).
Elochuteka. A former village, probably
Seminole, between Hillslxjro and Big
Withlacoochee rs., Fla.— H. R. Doc. 78,
25th Cong., 2d sess., map, 768-769, 1888.
Elogio. A Papago settlement, probably
in Pima CO., s. Ariz., with 66 inhabitants in
1858.— Bailey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 208, 1858.
Eloqnale. An unidentified village in x.
Florida in 1564. — De Bry, Brev. Nar., ii,
map, 1591.
Eloquence. See Oratory.
Elothet. Given by Kelley (Oregon, 68,
1830) as a Nootka town on Vancouver id.
under chief Wickaninish; possibly in-
tended for Ucluelet.
El PaBo. A mission established among
the Mansos at the present Juarez, Chi-
huahua, opposite El Paso, Tex., by P'ray
Garcia de Zufiiga (or de San Francisco)
in 1659. The settlement contained also
some Piros from Tabira in 1684, and it
became prominent as the seat of the New
Mexican government during the Pueblo
rebellion of 1680-92. (f. w. h.)
Guadalupe del Paso,— Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex.,
168, 1889. Nuestra Senora de Guadalupe de los Kan-
tot del Pato del Korte.— Garcia (1659) quoted by
Bandelier in Arch. In.««t. Papers, ni, 86, 1890.
Nuettra Senora de Guadalupe del Pato del Rio del
Norte.— MS. of 17th century quoted by Bandelier,
ibid., IV, 248. 1892. Nuettra Senora de Guadalupe
del Patto.— Villa-Sefior, Theatro Am., pt. 2, 422,
1748. Pato.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 83, 1855. Pato del
Rio del Norte. —Arch. Santa F6,MS. quoted by Ban
croft, op. cit. Patto del Norte.— Villa-Sef^ or, op.
cit., 424.
El Penon (Span.: 'the large rocky hill
or height' ). A former small settlement,
probably Seminole, on an island 18
leagues n. of Mosquito r. , at the entrance
of Matanzas r., Fla.
El Penon.— Smyth, Tour in V. S., ii, 21, 1784.
422
ELQUIS ENEESHUR
[b. a. b.
Elqnis. A Chumashan village w. of
Pueblo de las Canoas (San Buenaven-
tura), V^entura ro., Cal., in 1542. — Ca-
brillo, Nar. (1542) in Smith, Colec. Doc.
Fla., 181, 1857.
EUkwatawa. See Tenshmtmm.
El Tnrco. See Turk.
Elnaxcn. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Bancroft, Nat.
Kace^?, I, 459, 1874.
Elwha. A Clallam village at the mouth
of the river of the same name in Wash-
ington.
fel'-hwa.— Eells, letter, B. A. E., Feb., 1886 (own
name) . Elkwah.— Gibbs in Pae. R. R. Rep., i, 429,
1855. Elwahi.— Colyer in Ind. Aflf. Rep.. 191, 1871.
Elwha.— Swan in Smithson. Cont., xvi, 50, 1869.
Iraqua Indians.— Lee and Frost, Oregon, 274, 1844.
Emamoneta. An unidentified tribe
placed by Marquette on his map of 1673
\v. of the Mississippi, apparently on the
lower Arkansas.
EmamScta.— Marquette, map (1673) in Shea, Dis-
rov. Miss. Val.. 268. 1862.
Emannelito. See Manuelito.
Ematlochee ( imatla, * leader ' ) . A former
Creek town on Apalachicola r. ; exact lo-
cation unknown.
Emarhe.— Ex. Doc. 425, 24th ConK., Ist ses-s., 299,
1836. Ematlooheestown.— r. S. Ind. Treat. (1833).
578, 1837.
Emet. A small tribe met by De Le<m
and Manzanet near lower Guadalupe r.,
Texas, in 1689. They occupied a village
with the Cava Indians near the crossing
place, apparently about 15 leagues from
the French Fort St Louis on Matagorda
bay. To the northward they encoun-
tered several other Emet "ranchitos."
Within a year these Indians appear to
have moved farther e., for in 1690 De
I>e6n encountered them on that side of the
Rio Colorado, living with the Cava, Too,
and Toaa Indians, their former neighbors.
They were perhaps related to the Karan-
kawa. Possibly the Meghty of Joutel
are identical. (h. e. b.)
Emat.— De Le6n MS. (1690) in Texas Archives.
Emet.— Manzanet (1689) quoted in Te.x. Hist.
Quar., VIII. 214, 19a'>.
Emiiteiigo. Known also as Gurister-
sigo. An Upper Creek chief and noted
warrior who came prominently into no-
tice in the latter part of the 18th century.
The British being in possession of Savan- ^
nah, Ga., in June, 1782, Gen. Wayne
wasdispatched to watch their movements.
On May 21, Col. Brown, of the British
force, marched out of Savannah to meet,
according to appointment, a band of In
dians under Emistesigo, but was intercept-
ed and cut to pieces by Wayne. Mean-
while Emistesigo succeeded in traversing
the entire state of Georgia without discov-
ery, except by two boys, who were cap-
tured ana killed. Wayne, who was not
anticipating an attack, was completely sur-
prisecl by the Indians, who captured 2 of
nis cannon, but succeeded in extricating
his troops from their danger, and, after
severe lighting, in puttinj^ the Creeks to
flight. Emistesigo was pierced by bayo-
nets, and 17 of his warriors fell by his side.
He was at this time only 30 years of age,
and is described as being 6 ft 3 in. in
height and weighing 220 pounds.
(c. T.)
Emitahpahksaiyiki (* dogs naked'). A
division of the Siksika.
Dogs Naked.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales,
208, 1892. E'-mi-tah-pahk-iai-yiks.— Ibid.
Emitaks ( -E^-wn-<aA'«, *dogs'). A society
of the Ikunuhkahtsi, or All Comrades, in
the Piegan tribe; it is composed of old men
who dress like, and dance with and like,
the Issui, though forming a different so-
ciety.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales,
221, 1892.
Empress of the Creek Nation. See
Bosomworthf Mary,
Emniia ( hn M«f r , * affluent, ' * tributary ' ) .
Mentioned as a Lower Creek town for-
merly on lower Chattahooche r., Henry
CO., Ala., 2 m. above Wikaiva, near the
junction of Omussee cr., with 20 inhabit-
ants in 1820. It seems to be etjuall^
probable that the settlement, which is
not mentioned by early writers, was com-
posed of Yamasij from whom it derived
its name.
Emusaa.— Drake, Bk. Inds.. vii, 1818. Emua-
•aa.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 364, 1822.
Encaqaiagnalcaca. Mentioned bv OHate
(Doc. InM., XVI, 115, 1871) as a'pueblo
of the province of Atripuy, in the region
of the lower Rio Grande, N. Mex., in
1598.
Encinal (Span.: *oak grove'). For-
merly a summer village of the Lagunas,
now a i>ermanently occupied pueblo, sit-
uated 6 m. X. w. of Laguna, N. Mex. In
1749 an attempt was made by Father
Menchero U) establish a mi.«8ion there for
the Navaho, but it was abandoned in the
following year. (f. w. h.)
Hapuntika.— Hodge, field notes. B. A. £., 1895
( Laguna name: * place of the oaks' ). Lespaia. —
Ibid. (Acomaname). Pun-ye-kia.—Pradt quoted
by Hodge in Am. Anthrop., iv, 346. 1891 (another
Laguna name: ' house to the west').
Enecappe. A village on middle St Johns
r., Fla. , belonging to the Utina (Tiraucua)
confederacy in the 16th century.
Enaoapen.— Barcia, En.sayo, 48, 1723 (eaciqueVs
name), Enecappe.— Laudonni6re( 1567) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 243, 1869. Eneoaq.— De Bry,
Brev. Nar., ii, map, 1591. Enecaque.— Laudon-
ni^re, op. cit., 305. Eneguape.— Laudonni^re, op.
clt., 287. Enequaque.— Barcia, op. cit., 72. Eelma-
cape.— Laudonnidre, op. cit., 349.
Eneeshnr. Shahaptian bands, aggre-
gating 1,200 population in 41 mat lodges,
found by Lewis and Clark in 1805 on lK)th
sides of Columbia r. near the mouth of the
Deschutes, in Washington. The term
probably refers more speed fically to the
Tapanash. K- f-)
Eioeaturea.— Robertson in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th
Cong., 1st sess., 9, 1848. Eiveateun.— Robertson,
Oregon, 129. 1846. E-ne-ohun.— Clark (1806) in
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, ni. 342, 1905. E-nee-
sher.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii, map, 1814.
BULL. 30]
ENEKELKAWA — ENGLISH INFLUENCE
423
Snether. — Lewis (1806) in Orig. Jour. Lewis and
Clark, III, 164 1905. E-nee-abur.— Clark (1805).
ibid., 164. E-ae^Shur.— Ibid.. 1H3. E-ne-show.—
Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., I, 417, 1855. E-ne-ahur.-
Lewisand Clark, op. cit..i, map. Enethure.— Ibid.
II, 472. -Eneiteuri.— Wilkes, Hist. Oregon, 44. 1845.
Enekelkawa. A former Luineilo village
near the site of San Luis Rev mission,
8. Cal.— Taylor in Cal. Farmt^r, Mav 11,
1860.
Enempa. A Calusa village on the s. w.
coast of Florida, alx)ut 1570. — Fontaneda
Memoir (ca. 1575), Smith trans., 19, 1854.
Enfrenado (Span. : * bridled ' ) . An In-
dian village about 40 leagues from C. Santa
Helena, in ». South Carolina, visited by
JuanPardoin 1565. — Vandera (1567) in
Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., i, 16, 1857.
English influence. The first English
visitors to the coast of Virginia-Carolina
were well ret*eive<l by the Indians, whom
the early chroniclers, an Hariot, for ex-
ample, de8cril)e as |)eaceful and amiable
people. So, too, were in the beginning
the natives of the New England coast,
but in 1605 Capt. Weymouth forcibly
carried off live Indians, and he soon had
many imitators. The good character
ascribed by Pastor Cushman in 1620 tothe
Indians of Plymouth colony was forgot-
ten when theological zeal saw in the abo-
rigines of the New World ** the accursed
seed of Canaan," which itwas the duty of
good Christians to exterminate (see Lout
Ten Tribes). When the political ambi-
tions of the English colonists were aroused
conflicts with the Indians soon occurred,
and the former came to regard the latter
as the natural enemies of the whites in
the cmwanl march of civilization. Tn-
like the French, they paid little attention
to the pride of the Indians, despising the
heathen wavs and institutions more and
more as their power grew and their land
hun^r increase<l. With a few noble ex-
ceptions, like Roger Williams and John
Eliot, the clergy of the P^nglish col-
onies were not nearly so sympathetic to-
ward the natives as were the French mis-
sionaries in Acadia and New France.
Scotchmen, however, in the S., in the
W., in the old provinces of Canada, and
in the territories handed over to the
Hudson's hay Company have played a
conspicuous part as associates and leaders
of the Indians. Even men like Canonicus
were always suspicious of their English
friends, and never really opened their
hearts to them. The introduction of rum
and brandy among the Indians worked
infinite damage. Some of the New P^ng-
land tribes, such as the Pequot, for ex-
ample,'foreseeing perhaps the result of
their advent, were inimical to the English
from the first, and the extermination of
these Indians ensued when the whites
were strong enough to accomplish it.
It appears, however, that the P^ngli^h
colonists paid for most of the land that
thev took from the Indians (Thomas in
18th Rep. B. A. E., 549, 1899). Enelish
influence on tribal government and land
tenure was i)ercei>tible as early as 1641.
The success of deliberately planned edu-
cational institutions for the benefit of
the Indian during the early periods of
American history does not seem to have
been proi)ortionate to the hoi>es and
ideals of their founders. Harvard, Dart-
mouth, and the College of William and
Mary all began, in whole or in part, as
colleges for Indian youth, but their giid-
uates of aboriginal blood have been few
indeed, while they are now all high-class
institutions for white men (see Educa-
tion). The royal charter of Dartmouth
College (1769) specifically states that it is
to be " for the education and instruction
of youths of the Indian tribes in this
land," and '* for civilizing and Christian-
izing the children of pagans." That of
Harvard looked to " the education of the
English and Indian youth in knowledge
and godliness." Harvard had during
the colonial period one Indian graduate,
Caleb Cheeshateaumuck, of whom hardly
more tban his name is known (see James,
English Institutions and the American
Indian, 1894). The aim of the English
has ever been to transform the aborigines
and lift them at once to their own plane.
When commissioners visited theCherokee
they induced these to elect an "em-
peror," with whom treaties could be matle.
The Friends, from the time of William
Penn (1682) down to the present (see
Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 193, 1898),
seem to have furnished many individuals
capable, like the Baptist Roger Williams
(1686), of exercising great personal influ-
ence over the Indians. The Quakers still
continue their work, e. g., among the east-
ern Cherokee (Moonev in 19th Rep. B.
A. E., 176, 1900) and the Tlingit of Alaska.
The New England Company established
for the propagation of the gospel in Amer-
ica (1649), whose operations were trans-
ferred to Canada in 1822, carries on at
the present time work on the Brantford
Iro(iuois reserve and in other parts of
Ontario, at Kuper id., Brit. Col., and
elsewhere. Its Mohawk institute, near
Brantford, has had a powerful influence
among the Iroquois of Ontario. The
pagan members of these Indians have
recently l)een investigated by Boyle (Jour.
Anthrop. Inst. G. B., n. s., iii, 263-273,
1900), who tells us that ''all for which
1 roquois paganism is i ndebted to European
culture" is the possession of some ideas
about God or the Great Spirit and *' a few
suggestions respecting conduct, based on
the Christian code of morals." The con-
stant mingling of the young men with
their white neighbors and the going of
424
ENGLI8HM A N — ENGRAVING
[b. a. b.
the young women out to service are never-
theless weakening more and more the old
ideas which are doomed * ' to disappear as
a system long before the people die out."
That they have survived so long is re-
markable.
English influence made itself felt in
colonial days in .the introduction of im-
proved weapons, tools, etc., which. facili-
tated hunting and fishing and made pos-
sible the manufacture with less labor and
in greater abundance of ornaments, trin-
kets, and other articles of trade. The
supplying of the Indians with domestic
ammals also took place at an early period.
Spinning wheels and looms were intro-
duced among the Cherokee shortly before
the Revolution, and in 1801 the agent re-
ported that at the Cherokee agency the
wheel, the loom, and the plow were in
pretty general use. The intermarriage of
Englishmen and Indians has been greater
all over the country than is commonly be-
lieved, and importance must consequently
be attached to the effects of such inter-
mingling in modifying Indian customs and
institutions. Clothing and certain orna-
ments, and, after these, English beds and
other furniture were adopted by many
Indians in colonial days, as is now being
done by the tribes of the n. Pacific coast.
English influence on the languages of
some of the aborigines has been consider-
able. The word KinjameSf * King James,'
in use among the Canadian Abnaki, testi-
fies to the power of English ideas in the
17th century. The vocabularies of the
eastern Algonquian tribes who have come
in contact with the English contain other
loan-words. Rand's English-Micmac
Dictionary (1888) contains, among oth-
ers, the following: Jak-ass; cheesawa,
'cheese*; koppee^ * coffee*; mvlugech,
*milk'; gubulnolj 'governor.* Brinton
and Anthony's Lenape-English Diction-
ary (1889), representmg the language of
al>out 1825, has amelj * hammer'; apel,
* apple'; mhil, *beer'; mellik, *milk';
skutirif *to keep school,' which may be
partly from English and partly from Ger-
man. A Shawnee vocabulary of 1819
has for * sugar' melassay which seems to
be English 'molasses'; and a Micmac
vocabulary of 1800 has hlaakeet, * blanket.'
The English 'cheese' has passed into the
Nipissing dialect of Algonquian as tchu.
The Chinook jargon (q. v. ) contained 41
words of English origin in 1804, and 67 in
18d3, while in 1894, out of 1,082 words
(the total number is 1,402) whose origin
is known, Eells cites 570 as English. Of
recent years "many words of Indian ori-
gin have been dropped, English words
having taken their places." In colonial
days English doubtless had some influ-
ence on the grammatical form and sen-
tence-construction of Indian lang^uages.
and this influence still continues: the
recent studies by Prince and Speck of the
Pequot-Moh^an (Am. Anthrop., n. s.,
VI, 18-45, 469-476, 1904) contain evidence
of this. English influence hacT made
itself felt also in the languages of the
N. W. Hill-Tout (Rep. Ethnol. Surv.
Can., 18, 1902) observes, concerning cer-
tain Salishan tribes, that "the spread and
use of English among the Indians is very
seriously affecting the purity of the native
speech.*' Even the Athapascan Nahane
of N. British Columbia have, according to
Morice (Trans. Canad. Inst, 629, 1903),
added a lew English words to their vocab-
ularv. See also Friederici, Indianer und
Anglo-Amerikaner, 1900; MacMahon,
The An^lo-Saxon and the North Ameri-
can Indian, 1876; Manyi)enny, Our In-
dian Wards, 1880. (a. p. c.)
Englishman. See Sagaunash.
Engraved tablets. See Notched plates.
Engraving. Although extensively em-
ploy^ in pictographic work and in dec-
oration, the engraver's art did not rise to
a high degree of artistic excellence among
the tribes n. of Mexico. As no definite
line can be drawn between the lower
forms of relief sculpture and engraving,
all ordinary petroglyphs may be classed
as engravings, since the work is executed
in shallow Tines upon smooth rock sur-
faces (see Pictography), Point work is
common on wood, boiie, horn, shell, bark,
metal, clay, and other surfaces. Each
material has its own particular technique,
and the designs run the entire gamut of
style from graphic to purely conventional
representations, and the full range of sig-
nificance from purely symbolic through
esthetic to simply trivial motives.
Perhaps the most artistic and technic-
ally perfect examples of curving are
those of the N. W. coast tnbes of the
present
day, exe-
cuted on
slate uten-
sils and on
ornaments
of metal
(Niblack),
yet the
graphic
productions of the Eskimo on ivor^, bone,
and antler have sometimes a considerable
degree of merit (Boas, Hoffman, Murdoch,
Nelson, Turner). With both of these peo-
ples the processes employed and the style
of representation have probably under-
gone much change in recent times through
contact with wnite people. The st^l
point is superior to the point of stone,
and this alone would have a marked effect
on the execution. The picture writings
on bark of many of the northern trib^
executed with bone or other hard points,
Animal FtGURES Engmavco on 9iLveii
Bracelets; Haioa
BULL. 30]
ENIAS ENO
425
Engravings on Objects of ivory; Eskimo
are good examplea of the native engraver's
art, although these are not designed
either for simply pictorial or for decora-
tive effect. The ancient mound builders
were clever
engravers,
the technical
excellence of
their work be-
ingwellillus-
trated by ex-
amples from
the mounds
and dwelling
sites of Ross
CO. , Ohio
(Putnam and
Willough-
by), and by
others from
the Turner
mounds in
Hamilton CO.,
Ohio. Shell
also was a fa-
vorite material for the graver's point, as
is illustrated by numerous ornaments re-
covered from mounds in the middle Mis-
sissippi vallejr.
In decorating their earthenware the
native tribes often used the stylus with
excellent effect. The yielding clay >af-
forded a tempting surface, and in some
cases considera-
ble skill was
shown, especially
by the ancient
f)otters of the
ower Gulf states,
who executed
elal)orate scroll
designs with
great precision
(Moore, Holmes).
The point was
used for incising,
trailing, and in-
denting,and among ancient Pueblo potters
was sometimes used upon dark-painted
surf^ices to develop delicate figures in the
light color of the underlying paste. Ex-
amples of engraving are given by Boas in
6thKep.B.A.E.,1888;Fewkesinl7thRep.
B. A. E., 1898; Hoffman in Nat. Mus. Rep.
1896, 1897; Holmes (1) in 2d Rep. B. A.
E., 1883, (2) in 20th Rep. B. A. E., 1903;
Hough in Nat. Mus. Rep., 1901; Moore,
various memoirs in Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Phila., x-xii, 1894-1903; Murdoch in 9th
Rep. B. A. E., 1892; Nelson in 18th Rep.
B. A. E., 1899; Niblack in Rep. Nat.
Mus. 1888, 1890; Putnam and Willoughby
in Proc. A. A. A. S., xliv, 1896; Turner
in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 1894. See Art,
Ornament. (w. h. h.)
Enias. A local name for a body of
Upper Lillooet on Seton lake, in 1902 re-
Enqmavino on a Shell Gorget from
mound. (1-4)
(luced to a single individual. — Can. Ind.
Aff., pt. II, 72, 1902.
Enipen. A Yurok village on Klamath
r., Cal., 15 m. above the mouth.
Enitnnne ('people at the base of a
plateau' ). A village of the Tututni near
the mouth of a southern affluent of
Rogue r., Greg.
fcii' tunng'.— Doraey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
236,1890.
Enitunne. A part of the Mishikwut-
metunne in a village on upper Coquille r.,
Greg.
l;-ni' tunni'.— Doraey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii,
232, 1890.
Enmegahbowh ('The one who stands
before his people' ). An Indian preacher.
He was an Ottawa by birth, but was
adopted while young by the Chippewa
and was converted to the Methodist faith
in Canada, educated at the Methodist
mission school at Jacksonville, HI., and
ordained as a preacher with the name of
the Rev. John Johnson. In 1839 he ac-
companied Elder T. B. Kavanaugh to
the upper Mississippi, where he was a
missionary among the Chippewa for 5
years, when the Methodist church with-
drew from that field. In 1852, at John-
son's solicitation, the Episcopal church
sent a minister into this section, and a
mission and school were established at
Gull lake, Minn., in which he served as
assistant and interpreter. In 1858 John-
son was admitted oy Bishop Kemper to
the first order of the Episcopal ministry
at Faribault, and in 1859 was left in
charge of the mission at Gull lake, where
he continued until the Sioux outbreak of
1862, when he alone of the P^piscopal
missionaries remained in the field. In
1869 the Gull lake mission was removed
to the reservation at White Earth, whither
Johnson followed and was given charge,
bringing into the churcli a number of his
tribesmen and erecting a chapel and par-
sonage. Here the Rev. Jo8e{)h A. Gilfil-
lan, who was assigned to White Earth as
an P^piscopal missionary in 1873, with
Johnson's aid established a school for
the training of Indian clergy, and in a
few years 9 Chippewa were ordained to
the ministry. Johnson was living in
1898, at which time he was spoken of as
the **aged Indian pastor and co-worker
of Bishop Whipple."
Enmitahin (* cliff's end'). A Yuit
Eskimo village of the Nabukak or Nooka-
lit division, n. of East cape, n. e. Siberia;
pop. 42 in 8 houses about 1895.
Enmita'hin.— Bogoras, Chukchee, 30, 1904 (Chuk-
chi name).
Eno. A tribe associated with the Ad-
shusheer and Shakori in North Carolina
in the 17th centuiy. Mooney thinks it
doubtful that the Eno and the Shakori
were of Siouan stock, as they seem to have
differed in physique and habits from their
426
ENOQUA — EN8EN0RE
[ B. A. 8.
iieighl)or8, although their allianceH were
all with Siouan tribes. Little is known
of them, as they disappeared from history
as tribal bodies about 1720, having been
incorporated with the Catawba on the s.
or with the Saponi and their confederates
on the N., although they still retained
their distinct dialect in 1743. The Eno
and Shakori are first mentioned by Yard-
ley in 1654, to whom a Tuscarora de-
scribed, among other tribes of the interior,
living next to the Shakori, **a great na-
tion " called Haynoke, by whom the
northerii advance of the Spaniards was
valiantly resisted (Hawks, N. C, ii, 19,
1858). The next mention of these two
tribes is by Letlerer, who heard of them in
1672 as living s. of the Occaneechi about
the headwaters of Tar and Neuse rs. The
general locality is still indicated in the
names of Eno r. and Shocco cr., upper
branches of these streams. In 1701
Lawson found the Eno and Shakori
confederate<l and the Adshusheer united
with them in the same locality. Their
village, which he calls Adshusheer, was
on Eno r., about 14 m. e. of the Occanee-
chi village, which was near the site of the
present Hillsboro. This would place the
former not far n. k. of Durham, N. C.
Eno Will, a Shakori by birth, was at that
time, according to Lawson, chief of the
three combined tribes, and at this period
thef Shakori seem to have l)een the princi-
pal tribe. They had some trade with the
Tuscarora. Later, about 1714, with the
Tutelo, Saponi, Occaneechi, and Keyau-
wee, together numbering only al>out 750
souls, they moved toward the settlements.
Jjawson includes Eno in his list of Tusca-
rora villages at that date, and as the Eno
lived on the Neuse a<ljoiningtheTuscarora,
it was natural that they were sometimes
cla.<^se<i with them. In 1716 Gov. Spots-
wood, of Virginia, proposed to settle the
Eno, Sara, and Keyauwee at Eno town,
on ** the very frontiers** of North Caro-
lina; but the project was defeated by
North Carolina on the ground that all
three tribes were then at war with South
Carolina. From the records it can not be
determined clearly whether this was the
Eno town of Lawson or a more recent
village nearer the Albemarle settlements.
Owing to the objection made to their set-
tlement in the n., the Eno moved south-
ward into South Carolina. They probably
assisted the other tril)es of that region in
the Yamasi war of 1715. At lea.*it a few of
the mixed tribe found theirway into Vir-
ginia with the Saponi, as Byrd s])eak8 of
an old Indian, (^lled Shacco Will, living
near Nottoway r. in 1733, who offered to
guide him to a mine on Eno r. near the
old country of the Tuscarora. The name
of Shockoe cr., at Richmond, Va., may
possibly have l)een derived from that of
the Shakori tribe, while the name of
P^noree r. in South Carolina may have a
connection with that of the Eno tribe.
Lederer speaks of the Eno village as
surrounded by large cultivated fields and
as built around a central plaza where the
men played a game deseri oed as * * slinging
of stones,'* in which **they exercise with
so much labor and violence and in so great
numbers that 1 have seen the ground wet
with the sweat that dropped from their
bodies." This was probably the chunkey
game played with round stones among
the Creeks. Lederer agrees with Yardley
as to the small size of the Eno, but not as to
their bravery, though thev were evidently
industrious. They raised plentiful crops
and ** out of their granary supplied all the
atlja(rent parts." "The character thus
outlined," says Mooney, ** accords more
with that of the peaceful Pueblos than
with that of any of our eastern tribes and
goes far to indicate a different origin."
It should be remembered, however, that
Lederer is not a leading authority, as it is
doubtful if he was ever in North Carolina.
The houses of the Eno are said to have been
different in some respects from those of
their neigh V)ors. Instead of building of
bark, as did most Virginia and Carolina
tribes, they used interwoven branches or
canes and plastered them with mud or
clay, like the Quapaw Indians of e. Arkan-
sas. The form was usually round. Near
every house was a small oven-shaped
structure in which they stored com and
nuts. This was similar to the storehouse
of the Cherokee and some other southern
tribes. Thei r government was democratic
and patriarchal, the decision of the old
men being receiveil with unquestioned
obedience. See Mooney, Siouan Tril)es of
the East, Bull. B. A. E., 1896.
Anoe«.— Strachey (1612), Hist. Va., 48, 1849 (nroba-
bly identical). Eano.— McKenney and Hall, Ind.
Tr.. Ill, 81. 18.54. Eeno.— Adair (1743), Hist. Am.
Inds., 224, 1775. Enoe.— Lawson (1709), N. C, 97,
1860. Haynokei.— Yardley (leW) quoted by
Hawks, N. C, ii, 19, IS.'VS. (Enock,— Lederer, Dis-
cov., 15, 16?2. Oenook.— Ibid.
Enoqna. An« unidentified village or
tribe mentioned to Joutel, in 1687 (Mar-
gry, D^c, III, 410, 1878), while he waa
staying with the Kadohadacho on Red r.
of Louisiana, by the chief of that tribe,
as one of his allies.
Enpishemo (from apXsMmun. — W. J.).
According to Bartlett (Diet. American-
isms, 201, 1877), **a word used w. at the
Rocky mts. to denote the housings of a
saddle, the blanket beneath it, etc. ' ' An-
other form seems to be 'apishamore*.
In the Medicine Lodge treaty made with
the Comanche, Kiowa, and others in 1867,
Fish-e-more appears as the name of one
of the signers. ( a. f. c. )
Ensenore. A chief of Wingandacoa
(Secotan), N. C, previous to 1585, note<l
BULL. 30]
KNTUBUR — KNVIRONMENT
427
as the earliest chief of the e. (;oaHt
between Hudson r. and St Helena sd. of
whom there is any notice.. He was the
father of VVingina and Grangananieo
(q. v.), ai^d a linn friend of the English
colony on Roanoke id. in 1585-86. While
he lived he restrained Wingina from
wreaking vengence on line's company
for killing some of the natives. His
death occurred in 1585 or 1586. (c. t. )
Entnbnr. A fonner rancheria, probably
of the Papago, visited by Kino and Mange
in 1694; situated between Tiibiitama and
Busanic, lat. 31°, n. w. Sonora, Mexico. —
Mange {ca. 1701 ) quoted by Bancroft, No.
Mex. States, i, 258, 1884.
Environment. The natural ])henoniena
that surrounded the aborigines of North
America, stimulating and conditioning
their life and activities, contrasted greatly
with those of the Euro[>ean-Asiatic con-
tinent. The differences in the two envi-
ronments do not lie alone in physical
geography and in plant and animal life,
but are largely meteorologic, the sun ojier-
ating on air, land, and water, producing
variations in temj^erature and water sup-
ply, and as a result entirely new vegetal
and animal forms. The planets and stars
also affected cultural development, since
lore and mythology were based on them.
Within the American continent n. of Mex-
ico there were ethnic environments which
set bounds forthetribesand modified their
industrial, esthetic, social, intellectual,
and religious lives. Omitting the Eskimo,
practically all the peoples dwelt in the
temperate zone. Few impassable barriers
separated the culture areas, as in Asia.
In some respects, indeed, the entire region
formeil one environment, having easy
communications n. and s. and few bar-
riers E. and w. The climate /ones which
Merriam has worked out for the U. S.
Department of Agriculture in regard to
their animal and vegetal life correspond
in a measure wuth the areas of linguis-
tic families as delimited on Powell's
map (see Linguistic families). The en-
vironmental factors that determine cul-
tural development of various kinds and
degi-ees are (1) physical geography; (2)
climate, to which primitive peoples are
especially amenable; (3) predominant
plants, animals, and minerals that supply
the materials of drink, food, medicmes,
clothing, ornaments, houses, fuel, furni-
ture and utensils, and the objects of hunt-
ing, w^ar, the industrial arts, and activi-
ties connected with travel, transportation,
and commerce. Twelve ethnic environ-
ments may be distinguished. There are
cosmopolitan chanu^ters common to sev-
eral, but in each area there is an ensemble
of qualities that impressed themselves on
their inhabitants and differentiated them.
(1) Arctic. — The characteristics of this
environ men tare an intensely cold climate;
about six months day and six months
night; predominance of ice and snow; im-
mense arch ii)elagos, and no accessible ele-
vations; good stone for lamps and tools;
driftwood, but no timber and little fruit;
polar bear, blue fox, aquatic mammals in
profusion, migratory birds, and fish,
supplying food, clothing, fire, light, and
other wants in the exacting climate.
(2) y^ukon- Mackenzie. — This is Merri-
am's transcontinental coniferous belt, sep- .
arated from the arctic environment by the
timber line, but draining into arctic seas.
It has poor material resources, and bar-
ren grounds here and there. Its saving
riches are an abundance of birch, yield-
ing bark utensils, canoes, binding 'mate-
rials, and houses, and of s})ruce, fur-
nishing textile roots and other necessa-
ries; caribou, muskox, bear, red fox, wolf,
white rabbit, and other fur-bearing mam-
mals, and porcupines, migrating birds,
and fish. Snow ne<^essitates snowshoes
of fine mesh, and immense inland waters
make portages easy for bark canoes. I nto
this area came the Athapascan tril>es who
developed through its resources their
special culture.
(8) St lAiicrence and Ixike region. — This
is a transition belt having no distinct lines
of separation from the areas on the n. and
s. It occupies the entire drainage of the
• great lakes and includes Manitoba, e. Can-
ada, and N. New England. It was the
home of the Iroquois, Abnaki, Chippewa,
and their nearest kindred. The climate
is boreal. There are a vast expanse of
lowlands and numerous extensive inland
waters. The natural products are abun-
dant— evergreens, birch, sugar maple,
elm, berries, and wild rice in the w.;
maize, squash, and beans in the s.;
moose, deer, bear, l)eaver, j)orcupines,
land and water birds in immense nocks,
whitefish, and, on the seacoast, marine
products in greatest variety and abun-
dance. Canoe travel; pottery scarce.
(4) Atlantic slope. — This area, occupied
principally by tribes allied to the Dela-
wares, but also by detached Iroquoian
tribes and perhaps some Siouan and
Uchean bands, included the region of
the fertile piedmont, poor foothills, rich
lowlands, bays and rivers abounding in
aquatic life, and vast salt meadows. T^e
low mountains were not ethnic barriers,
but the differences in physical condi-
tions on the two sides were marked
enough to produce separate cultures.
Minerals for tools and weapons were
present in great variety, and ochers,
clays, and some copper were found.
Plant life was varied and abundant.
Forests of hard woo<l, birch, elm, maple.
428
ENVIRONMENT
[ B. A. E.
and evergreens furnished materials for
supplying a great diversity of wants.
From the soft wood were made dugout
canoes. The dense forest growth ren-
dered foot traveling irksome. Nuts, ber-
ries, roots, and maize furnished food; flax
and tough pliant woods and bark gave tex-
tile materials. The life conditions for eco-
nomic animals were as varied as possible.
Beginning with the shallow marshes and
numerous salt-water inlets, furnishing
clams, oysters, crabs, cod, mackerel, her-
ring, halibut, shad, sturgeon, eels, and
terrapin, as shell-heaps attest, it termi-
nated in the trout streams of the moun-
tains. There were birds of the air, like
the eagle and wild pigeon, ground birds,
like the quail and tne turkey, and water
birds innumerable; Mammals of the
water were the muekrat, otter, and beaver;
of the land, moose, elk, deer, bear, rab-
bit, squirrel, raccoon, opossum, and wood-
chuck. The wide range of latitude neces-
sitated different dwellings for different
climates, as the bark tipi, the mat house,
and the arbor house. For clothing, gar-
ments of hide, rabbit skin, and feathers
were used. Stone was abundant for
making tools, for flaking or grinding, but
neither materials nor motives for artistic
work of a high order were present.
(5) Gulf coast. — The Southern states,
from Georgia to Texas, were inhabited by
Muskhogean tribes and several small lin-
guistic mmilies. The characteristics of-
this area are a climate ranging from tem-
perate to subtropical, with abundant rain,
tow mountains, and rich river vallevs and
littoral with varied and profuse mineral,
vegetal, and animal resources. The en-
vironment yielded a diet of meat, fish,
maize, pulse, melons, and fruits. It was
favorable to meager dress and furnished
materials and incentives for featherwork
and bead work, stonework, earth work, and
pottery. Traveling on foot and in dug-
out canoes -wjbls easy.
(6) Mississippi valley. — This area in-
cludes the states of the Middle West
beyond the Great Lake divide, extend-
ing to the loosely defined boundary of
the great plains. Its characteristics in
relation to Indian life were varied climate,
abundant rainfall, numerous waterways,
fertile lands, alternate timber and prairie,
and minerals in great variety ana abun-
dance, including clay for pottery. The
economic plants were soft and hard
woods, and plants yielding nuts, berries,
fruits, and fiber. The fertile land was
favorable to the cultivation of maize and
squashes. Animals of the chase were buf-
falo, deer, small rodents, and wild pigeons
and other land birds; but there was a
poor fish supply, and the pnly shellfish
were river mussels. This environment
developed hunting and agricultural tribes,
chiefiy of Algonquian lineage, including
sedentary tribes that built remarkable
mounds.
(7) Plains. — This environment lies be-
tween the Rocky mts. and the fertile
lands w. of the Mississippi. To the n. it
stretches into Athabasca, and it termi- .
nates at the s. about the Rio Grande. The
tribes were Siouan, Algonquian, Kiowan,
Caddoan, and Shoshonean. The Mis-
souri and Arkansas and many tributaries
drain the area. The plants were bois d*arc
and other hard woocls for bows, cedar for
lodge poles, willows for beds, the pomme
blanche for roots, etc., but there were no
fine textile fibers. I>ependence on the
buffalo and the herbivorous animals asso-
ciated with it compelled a meat diet, skin
clothing and dwellings, a roving life, and
industrial arts depending on the flesh,
bones, hair, sinew, hide, and horns of
those animals. Artistic and symbolic de-
signs were painted on the rawhide, and
the myths and tales related largely to the
buffalo. Travel was on foot, with or with-
out snowshoes, and transportation was
effected by the aid of the dog and travels.
The horse afterward wrought profound
changes. The social order and habit of
semi-nomadic wandering about fixed cen-
ters were the direct result of the surround-
ings and discouraged agriculture or much
pottery. No canoes or other craft than the
Mandan and Hidatsa skin boats.
(8) North Pacific coast.— From Mt St
Elias to the Columbia mouth, lying along
the archipelago and cutoff from the inte-
rior by mountains covered with snow, was
the area inhabited by the Tlingit, Haida,
Tsimshian, Nootka, and coast Salish. It
has a moist, temperate climate, a moun-
tainous coast, with extensive island
groups and landlocked waters favorable
to canoe travel. The shores are bathed
by the warm current of the n. Pacific.
The days in different seasons vary greatly
in length. The material resources are
black slate for carving and good stone for
pecking, Ending, and sawing; immense
forests of cedar, spruce, and other ever-
green trees for houses, canoes, totem-posts,
and basketry; mountain goat ana big-
horn, bear, b^ver, birds, and sea food in
^reat variety and in quantities inexhaust-
ible by savages. This environment in-
duced a diet of fish, mixed with berries,
clothing of bark and hair, large com-
munal dwellings, exquisite twined and
checkered basketry to the discourage-
ment of pottery, carving in wood and
stone, ana unfettered travel in dugout
canoes, which provided opportunity for
the full development of the dispersive clan
system.
(9) Columbia-Fraser regioti. — This in-
cludes the adjoining l^isins of these
streams and contiguous patches, inhab-
BULL. 30 J
ENVIRONMENT
429
ited principally by Salishan, Shahaptian,
and Ghinookan tribes. In the s. is a
coast destitute of islands. At the head-
waters of its rivers it communicates with
the areas lying to the e. across the moun-
tains. Rich lands, a mild climate, good
minerals for industries, textile plants, ex-
cellent forests, and an abundance of edible
roots and fruits, fish, mollusks, and water-
fowl ready at hand characterize this en-
vironment, with skin and wool for cloth-
ing. The manifold resources and varied
physical features fostered a great variety
of activities.
(10) Interior basin, — This is embraced
between the Rocky rats, and the Sierras
of the United States, terminating in a
regular line in the s., and is the home of
the ^reat Shoshonean family. It partly
coincides with the arid Sonoran area of
Merriam, consisting of partial deserts,
with rich wooded patches among the
mountains. Good stone for various crafts
is present. Timber is scarce, but wild
secKls are abundant for food, and excel-
lent woods and roots for basketry. Ani-
mals available were buffalo, rabbit, deer,
antelope, wolf, mountain sheep, and birds,
but fish were scarce. The environment
made necessary the brush shelter and the
cave dwelling. Little pottery was made,
but the sinew-backed bow was developed.
Traveling was necessarily done on foot,
and carrying effected by dogs and women,
as there was no transportation by water.
(11) Ccdifomia-Oregon. — This mcludes
8. Oreq^on and the greater part of Califor-
nia—that embraced in the drainage basins
of the Sacramento, San Joaquin, and
smaller rivers flowing into the Pacific.
The temperature is mild, neither cold in
winter nor hot in summer, and the year
is divided into wet and dry seasons. The
Sierras form a mountain boundary, and
mountain groups of some height are ob-
structions withm the area, but the Coast
ran^ is low and broken and not a barrier.
Obsidian, steatite, and other goo*i stories
for the arts were plentiful. There was
clay, but no pottery. The region was well
but not heavily timbered, consisting of
open plains, wath hillsides and ranges
covert more or less with brush and
scattered oaks, many species furnishing
acorns for food. The open spaces alter-
nating with the wooded lands yielded
grasses and medicinal herbs. Other use-
ful plants were the buckeye, manzanita,
nut pine, redwood, and tule in the s. for
balsas, baskets, matting, and houses, and
edible and textile roots were also found.
The animals entering into Indian econ-
omy were the deer, rabbit, bear, coyote,
squirrel, jaguar, condor, salmon, sturgeon,
eel, trout, smelt, mussel, clam, haliotis,
and other shellfish whose shells furnished
media of exchange. This environment
was the Caucasus of North America, where
25 linguistic families were assembled.
On Merriam's bio-geographic maps, pub-
lished by the Department of Agriculture,
a great variety of life is shown, due to ver-
tical zones of temperature, only the lower
of which were inhabited by Indians. The
more elevateil of these were just as effec-
tual as boundaries as though they were
impassable. Owing to the peculiar nature
of materials, the arts of this environment
were well defined.
(12) Ihieblo coiintrjf. This area in-
cludes s. Utah, 8. w. Colorado, all of New
Mexico and Arizona together with the
Mohave desert, and extends southward
into Mexico. It embraces the draina^
basin of the San Juan in the n., the Rio
CJnmde and the Pecos in the e., and the
Colorado in Ihe w. In physiographic
character it ranges from semiarid to desert.
There are deep canyons, elevated mesas,
narrow fertile valleys, broad stretches of
plains, and isolated mountain masses.
The climate demands little clothing in
the lowlands, but on the plateaus the
nights are cold and the summer tempera-
ture that of Maine. Rain is irregular and
periodic, being plentiful for weeks, fol-
lowed by months of drought; most of the
streams are therefore intermittent. Use-
ful minerals are gypsum, obsidian, vari-
eties of quartz, i>otter's clay, adobe,
ochers, lignite, salt, and turquoise. Plant
life, except after rains, is comparatively
meager, the species giving rise to native
industries being chiefly cactus, yucca,
Cottonwood, greasewood, willow, scrub
oak, conifers, and rushes. Maize, beans,
and cotton were cultivated from a very
early period. Wild animals hunted or
trapped were the rabbit, deer, bear,
turkey, prairie dog, mountain lion, wild-
cat, wood-rat, mountain sheep, coyote,
and wolf. Dogs were trained, and bur-
ros, sheep, goats, and cattle found a con-
genial home in this area after their intro-
duction by the Spaniards. Travel was
formerly done on foot only, and goods
had to \ye carried chiefly on the heads
and backs of men and women, there being
few navigable waters. This peculiar en-
vironment impelled tribes coming into
the region to lead the life of the Pueblo.
The outskirts of the region were even less
favored with resources, hence the Pueblos
were brought into conflict with predatory
tribes like the Ute, and later the Navaho,
the Apache, and the Comanche, who
robbea them and constantly threatened
to consume what they raised. These con-
flicts developed thecliff-dwelline as means
of protection. Southwest of the region
proper are Piman and Yuman tribes and
the Mission Indians, dwelling in oases of
the desert that extends into Mexico.
Here grow mesquite, ironwood, agave.
480
EOTOTO ERIE
[b. a. e.
palo vercle, cacti in the greatest variety,
and, along the water courses, cotton wood
and rushes. The people live a life nartlv
sedentary, housed in shelters of Drush
and grass. The effects of this environ-
ment, where the finding of springs was
the chief desideratum in the struggle for
exigtence, were to influence sotuaT struc-
ture and functions, manners and customs,
esthetic pro<lucts and motives, lore and
symbolism, and, most of all, creed and
cult, which were conditioned by the un-
ending, ever-recurring longing for water.
Consult Morice (1) W. D^n^s, 1894,
(2) N. Inter. Brit. Col., 1904; Merriam
(1) Life Zones, Bull. 20, Biol. Surv. Dept.
Agr., (2) N. A. Fauna, ibid.. Bull. 3 and
16, (3) Bio.-Ueo. maps, 1892 and 1893;
Powell, Linguistic Families, 7th Rep.
B. A. E., 1891; Sargent (ifDistrib. For-
est Trees, 10th Census, (2) Trees of N.
Am., 1905, (3) Silva N. Am.; Chesnut
(1 ) Poisonous Plants, Bull. 20, Div. Bot.
Dept. Agr., (2) Plants used by Inds. Men-
docino Co., Cal., Cont. U. S. Nat. Herb.,
VII, 3, 1902; Elliott, Mammals of N. Am.,
Fewkes in Intemat. Geog. Cong., 1903;
Field Columb. Mus. Publ., Zool., ii, 1901;
McGee, Beginning Agr., Am. Anthrop.,
VIII, no. 4, 1895; Mason, Influence of En-
vironment, Smithson. Rep. 1895, 1896;
Barrows, Ethno- botany of Coahuilla Inds.,
1900; Miller, N. Am. Land Mammals, Bos-
ton Soc. Nat. Hist., xxx, no. 1, 1901;
Farrand, Basis of Am. Hist., 1904; Del-
lenbaugh. North Americans of Yester-
day, 1901. (o. T. M.)
Eototo (name of a supernatural being).
One of the clans of the Kokop (Wood)
phratry of the Hopi.
Eototo wiiiwd.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. £.,
584, 1 900 ( win itru = ' clan ' ) . E-o'-to-to wiin-wu. —
Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 404, 1894.
Epanow. One of the first Indians to be
taken across the Atlantic by the English
from New P^ngland — a member of the party
forcibly taken from Marthas Vineyard,
Mass., by Capt. Harlow in 1611. He was
shown in England as a wonder, and man-
aged to escape from the English on the
return voyage by pretending to pilot them
to a gold mine. In 1619 he was at the
island of Capoge, near C. Cod, and in
that year a b(5iy of Indians under his
guidance attacked Capt. Dormer*s men
while attempting to land on Marthas
Vineyard. Epanow is spoken of as artful
and daring. He mav be the same as
Apannow, asigner of the Plymouth treatv
of 1621. See Drake, Inds. N. Am., 72,
1880.
Epimingnia. A tribe formerly living on
Mississippi r., 20 leagues above Arkansas
r. (Coxe, Carolana, 11, 1741); probably
a division of the Quapaw.
Epinette. A Chippewa band which
formerly live<l on the x. shore of L. Supe-
rior, E. of Michipicoton r., Ontario. —
Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 32, 1744.
Episok. An Eskimo settlement in n. w.
Greenland. — Kane, Arct. Explor., ii, 278,
1856.
Epley's Bain. A large prehistoric
pueblo ruin on the outskirts of Solomons-
ville, on the Gila, s. e. Ariz. So called
from the owner of the ranch on which it
is situated. — Fewkes in 22d Rep. B. A. E.,
171, 1904.
Erie (Huron: y^retth, 'itis long-tailed*,
referring to the eastern puma or panther;
Tuscarora, ^VdAr«, *lion*, a modem use,
Gallicised into Bri and i?t, whence the
lot^atives Eri^Cy Rigu^, and Rique, *at the
place of the panther*, are derived. Com-
pare the forms Erieehronon, Eriechro-
non, and Riq[u^ronon of the Jesuit Rela^
tions, signifying 'people of the panther*.
It is probable that in Iroquois the puma
and the wild-cat originally had generic-
ally the same name and that the defining
term has remained as the name of the
puma or panther) . A populous sedentary
Iroquoian tribe, inhabiting in the 17tn
century the territory extending s. from
L. Erie probably to Ohio r., e. to the lands
of the Conestoga along the e. watershed
of Allegheny r. and to those of the Seneca
along tne line of the w. watershed of Gen-
esee r., and n. to those of the Neutral
Nation, probably on a line running east-
ward from the head of Niagara r. ( tor the
Jesuit Relation for 1640-41 says that the
territory of the Erie and their allies joined
that of the Neutral Nation at the end of
L. Erie), and w. to the w. watershed of
L. Erie and Miami r. to Ohio r. Their
lands probably adjoined those of the Neu-
tral Nation w. of L. Erie. The Jesuit Re-
lation for 1653, speaking of L. Erie, says
that it * ' was at one time inhabited toward
the s. by certain peoples whom we call
the Cat Nation; but they were forced to
proceed farther inland in order to escape
their enemies whom they have toward
thew.'* In this eastward movement of
the Erie is probably found an explanation
of the emigration of the Awenrehronon
( Wenrohronon) to the Huron country in
1639 from the e. border of the lands of the
Neutral Nation, although the reason there
given is that they had for some unknown
reason ruptured their relations with the
Neutral Nation, with whom, it is stated,
they had been allied, and that, conse-
quently, losing the powerful support of
the populous Neutral Nation, the Wenroh-
ronon, were left a prey to their enemies,
the Iroquois. But the earlier Jesuit Re-
lation (for 1640-41), referring undoubt-
edly to this people, says that a certain
strange nation, the Awenrehronon, dwelt
beyond the Cat Nation, thus placing them
at this time e. of the Erie and apparently
separate from the Neutral Nation; so that
BULL. 30 J
erip:
431
at that time the Wenrohronon may have
been either entirely indei)endent or else
confederate<l with the Erie.
Historically little is definitely known of
the Erie and their jKilitical and social or-
ganization, but it may l^e inferred to have
been similar to that of the Ilurons. The
Jesuit Relations give only a few glimpses
of them while describing their last wars
with the Iro<|uois confederation; tradi-
tion, however, records the probable fact
that the Erie had had many previous
wars with these hostile tril)es. > rom the
Relations mentioned it is learned that the
Erie had many sedentary towns and vil-
lages, that they were constituted of sev-
eral divisions, and that they cultivated
the soil and spoke a language resembling
that of the Hurons, although it is not
stated which of the four or five Huron
dialects, usually called "Wendat " (Wy-
andot) by themselves, was meant. From
the same source it is possible to make a
rough estimate of the population of the
Erie at the i>eriod of this final war. At
the taking of the Erie town of Riquc in
1654 it is claimed that the defenders num-
bered between 3,000 and 4,(X)0 combat-
ants, exclusive of women and children;
but as it is not likely that all the war-
riors of the tribe were present, 14,500
would probably l)e a conservative esti-
mate oi the population of the Erie i;t this
period.
The Jesuit Relation for l(i55-56 (chap,
xi) gives the occasion of the final strug-
gle. Thirty ambassadors of the Cat
Nation had been delegattMl, as was cus-
tomary, to Sonontouan, the Seneca capi-
tal, to renew the existing peace. But
through t!ie misfortune of an accident one
of the men of the Cat Nation killed a
Seneca. This act so incensed the Seneca
that they massacred all except 5 of the
ambassadors in their hands. These acts
kindled the final war between the Erie
and the confederated tribes of the Iro-
quois, especially the Seneca, Cayuga, Onei-
da, and Onondaga, called by the French
the * upper four tribes', or *les Iroquis
sup^rieurs*. It is further learned from
the Jesuit Relation for 1654 that on the
political destruction of their country some
Hurons sought asylmn among the Erie,
and that it was they who were actively
fomenting the war tliat was then striking
terror among the Iroquois tribes. The
Erie were reputed brave and warlike,
employing only bows and poisoneci
arrows, although the Jesuit Relation for
1656 declares that they were unable to
defend one of their palisades against the
Iroquois on account of the failure of their
munitions, especially powder, which
would indicate that they used fireanus.
It is also said that thev "fight like
Frenchmen, bravely sustaining the first
charge of the Inx^uois, who are armed
with our muskets, and then falling upon
them with a hailstorm of poisoned
arrows," discharging 8 or 10 before a
musket could l)e reloaded. Following
the rupture of amicable relations be-
tween the Erie and the IrcHjuois tribes in
1()53, the former assaulted and burned a
Seneca town, pursued an Iro<|uois war
party returning from the region of the
great lakes, and cut to pieces its rear
guard of 80 picked men, while the Erie
s(^outs had come to the very gates of one of
the Irocpiois palisaded towns and seized
and carried into captivity Annenraes
( Annencraos), ''one of the greatest cap-
tains." All this roused the Iroquois tribes,
which raised 1,800 men to chastise the Erie
for these losses. A young chief, one of
the two leaders of this levy, was converte<l
by Father Simon Le Moine, who chanced
to be in the country at the time, and was
baptize<l. These two chiefs dressed as
Frenchmen, in order to frighten the Erie
by the novelty of their garments. When
this army of invaders had surrounded one
of the Erie strongholds, the c<mverte<l
chief gently asked the besieged to sur-
render, lest they he destroyed should they
permit an assault, telling them: **The
Master of Life fights for us; you will be
ruine<l if you resist him." " Who is this
Master of our lives?" the Erie defiantly
replied. ** We acknowledge none but our
arms and hatchets." No (quarter was
asked or given on either side in this war.
Aft^r a stubborn resistance the P>ie pal-
isade was carried, and the Onondaga
"entered the fort and there wrought such
carnage among the women and children
that blood was knee-deep in certain
places." This was at the town of Rique,
which was defended by l)etween 3,000 and
4,000 c.)ml)atants, exclusive of women
and children, and was assailed by about
1,800 Iro<j|Uois. This devastating war
lasted until al)out the close of 1656, when
the Erie power was broken and the peo-
ple were destroyed or dispersed or led
into captivity. Six hundred surrendere<l
at one time and were le<l to the Inxpiois
country to l)e adopted as one of the con-
stituent people of the Iro(|Uois tribes.
The victory at Rique was won at a great
loss to the Irocpiois, who were compelled
to remain in the enemy's country two
months to care for the wounded and to
bury the dead.
Only two of the Erie villages are known
by name — Riqii^ and Gentaienton. \
portion of the so-called Seneca now living
in Indian Ter. are probably descendants
of Erie refugees. ( J. n. b. h. )
Cat Indians. —Smith quoted by Proud, Penn., ii.
:^00. 1798. Cat Hation.— Cusic (m. 1824) quoted
bv Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 148,1857. Ehrieh-
ronnons.— Jes. Rel. for 1654. 9, 18.58. Eriana.— Ma-
eaulev, N. Y., ii, 180, 1829. Erieckronoia.— Hen-
432
ERIGOANNA E8COOBA
[B. A. E.
nepin, New Discov., map, 1098. Erieehroaons. —
Je8. Rel. for 1641, 71. 1858. Eriehroiioa.--Je8. Rel.
for 1640, 35, 1858. Enelhonons.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, iv, 207. 1854. Erieronons.— Rafinesque,
introd. Marshall, Ky., i, 36, 1824. Eriet.— Jefferys,
Fr. Doms., I. 103, 1760. Eries.— Esnauts and
Rapillv, map, 1777. Erigat.— Evans (1646?)
quoted by Barton, New Views, Ixv, 1798. Errie-
roBOBs.— Lahontan, New Voy., i, 217, 1703.
Evei.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, iii, 79,
1854 (misprint). Oahkwas.— Ruttenber, Tribes
Hudson R., 52, 1872. Oa-qua'-ga-o-no. — Morgan.
League Iroq., 41, 1851. Heries.— Browne in Beach,
Ind. Misc., 110, 1877. Irrironnoat.— Day,Penn.,309,
1843. Irrirononi.— Harvey quoted by Day, ibid.,
311. Kah-Kwah.— Gale, Upper Miss., 37, 1867. Kah-
qaas.~Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 290, 1853 (Seu-
eca name). Kakwas.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
II, 344, 1852. Nation det Ohata. — Jes. Rel . for 1660,
7. 1858. Hation du Chat,— Jes. Rel. for 1641, 71, 1858.
PuBfelika. — Rafinesque, Am. Nat., i, 138, 1836
i* lynx-like': Delaware name). Khiierrhoaons.—
es. Rel. for 1635, 33, 1858 (probably their Huron
name). Rifneronnons.— Jes. Rel. for 1661, 29, 1858
(misprint). Bifueronnont.— Jes. Rel. for 1666, 3,
1858. RiquehroBBOiu.— Jes. Rel. for 1660, 7, 1858.
Erigoanna. A tribe living near St Loais
(Matagorda) bay, Tex., in 1687, and re-
ferred to as at war with the Ebahamo,
q. V. (Douay quoted bv Shea, Discov.
and Expl. Miss., 209, 1852). Not identi-
fied, unless the same as the Kohani
(q. V.) . Probably a Karankawa band.
Erilite. A mineral, according to Dana
(Text-book of Mineral., 426, 1888), **acic-
ular, wool-like crj^stals of unknown
nature occurring in a cavity in the quartz
from Herkimer co., N. Y.'*: from Erie,
the name of a lake, and -lite from the
Greek Ai6o$, a stone. The Take was
named from one of the peoples of Iro-
quoian stock. (a. f. c.)
Erio(^-rl^-o). A name given by the
Spaniards to the Pomo living at the
mouth of Russian r., Sonoma co., Cal. —
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 194,
1877.
Eriwonec. A former Delaware village
on the E. bank of Delaware r., about Old
Man's cr., in Salem or Gloucester co.,
N. J. The village was next above the
Asomoche and 5 m. below the Ran-
cocas. In 1648 the population num-
bered about 200, but had just been at
war with the Conestoga.
ArmMmeks.— De Laet (ca. 1633) inN. Y. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 2d s., I, 303, 1841. AmMwamen.— Shea, note
in Alsop, Md., 118, 1880. Armewamiu.— Hudde
(1663) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, xii, 430, 1877.
Aroeaemeck.— Beekman (1660), ibid., 300 (settle
ment). BriwoBeck,— Evelin {ca. 1648) in Proud,
Pa., I, 113, 1797. Ermomex.— Van der Donek,
map (1656) cited by Brinton. Lenape Leg., 42,
1885. EMwoaeoks.— Sanlord, U. S., cxlvi, 1819.
Emer. A Yurok village on Klamath
r., at the mouth of Blue cr., in Del Norte
CO., N. w. Cal. (a. l. k.)
Emivwin {Er^nimvifl). An Utkiavin-
miut Eskimo summer camp inland from
Pt Barrow, Alaska.— Murdoch in 9th
Rep. B. A. E., 83, 1892.
Ertlerger. A Yurok village on lower
Klamath r., at the mouth of the Trinity',
opposite Pekwuteu and Weitspus, m
Humboldt co., Cal. (a. l. k.)
Ernsi (E-rus^-si). A name said by
Powers (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 194,
1877) to have been applied to the Pomo
formerly living near Ft Ross, Sonoma co ,
Cal., by the Pomo living n. of them,
The people referred to now live near
Stewart's Point and on the Haupt ranch a
few miles e. of that place. Powers sug-
gests that the name is a relic of the Rus-
sian occupancy, which is probably correct,
as it is not an Indian name. (s. a. b. )
Eryipiames. A tribe of central Texas
in the 18th century. Domingo Ram6n
was met by some of them a few leagues
w. of Trinity r., not far from the country
of the Bidai. They ere mentioned in
unpublished documents as among thtt
tribes which in company with other north-
em tribes petitioned for a mission on San
Javier r., and they are included among
the northern Indians as distinguished
from the coast tribes. If they belonged
to any of the large recognizea divisions
in this neighborhood it was probably
Tonkawan. (h. e. b.)
Enepiahe.— Joutel, Jour. Voy., 90, 1719. Snepia-
hoB. — Shea, note in Charlevoix, New France, rv,
78, 1870. Enepiahoes.— Barcia, Ensavo, 271, 1723.
Enripiames.— Rivera, Diario, leg. 2602, 1736. Ex-
epiahohe.— Joutel in Margry, D6c., ni, 288, 1878.
Hierbipiamet.— Barrios, MS., 1771. Yerbipiame.—
Ram6n, MS., Texas Memorias, xvii, 161. Yor-
bipianot.— Informe de Misiones, ibid., xxviii,179,
1762. Yrbipias.— Bosque (1675) in Nat. Geog.
Mag., XIV, 343, 1903. Yrbipunat.— Ibid., 340.
Esaohkabuk ( ' bad leggings ' ). A Crow
band.
BadLecgiiu.— Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850,
144, 1851. E-aaoh'-ka-buk.— Morgan, Anc. Soc.,
159, 1877.
Esahateaketarpar ('toward the Santee^
from Isanyate * San tee*, ektapa * toward*).
A division of the Brul^ Dakota which had
Tartonggarsarpar (Tat6nka-t8apa, Black
Buffalo Bull) for its principal chief in 1804.
E-sah-a-to-ake-tar-pir.— Lewis and Clark, Discov.,
34,1806.
Esbataottiiie (? 'bighorn people*). A
Nahane tribe living in the mountains
between Liard and Peace rs., Brit. Col.
They are said to be of a very low grade
of culture and to practise cannibalism,
probably under stress of hunger.
Dounie' Etpa-tpa-Ottine. — Petitot, Autour du grand
lac des Esclaves, 301, 1891 (=*goat people').
Esba-ra-ottini.— Petitot, Ethnog. chart in Bull.
Soc. de G6ogr. Paris, July, 1875 (=* dwellers
among the argali '). Et-pi-to-ti-iia.— Dawson in
Rep. Geol. Surv. Can . for 1887. 202b, 1889. Espa-tpa-
Ottini.— Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 862,
1891 (trans. 'bighorn people'). G«iis det BoU.—
Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 32, 1877 (so called
by Hudson bay people). Oeiu des eh^rres. — Peti-
tot, Autour du lac aes Esclaves, 301, 1891. Knife
Indians.— Campbell quoted by Dawson, op. cit
Eseaba. A former tribe, probably Coa-
huiltecan, on the lower Rio Grande.
Escabaoa-Casoattes.— Fernando del Bosque (1675)
in Nat. Geog. Mag., xiv, 340.1903 (combined with
the name of another tribe, the Cascastes, and cor-
rupted). Ssoabas.— Revillagigedo (1793) quoted
by Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 611, 1886.
Esoambiiit. See Assacamhuit.
BncoobtL {Oski holbay * cane-like*, refer-
ring to reed-brakes) . A former Choctaw
BULL. 30]
ESCOUMAINS ESKIMO
433
town, noted by Romans; evidently situ-
ated a few miles e. or n. e. of Ayanabi,
perhaps on or near Petickfa cr., Kemper
CO., Miss. — Halbert in Miss. Hist. Soc.
Publ.,vi, 424, 1902.
Esooumains (probably fronu(,sAA-T7u/H, or
(iskimin, * early berry' . — W. J. ) . A Moii-
tagnais band living on a reserve of 97
acres on the s. w. side of Kscoumains r. ,
on the N. shore of the St Lawrence, in
Saguenay co., Quebec. Thev nuriibered
53 m 1884, 43 in 1904.
Eaooanudns.— Can. Ind. Aff. Kv\k for 1S84, pt. i.
185. 1885.
Esonmawash. A former Chunia.sha!i
village at San Jose, alK)ut (\ ni. from
Santa Barbara mission, Cal. — Timeno
(1856) quoted by Tavlor in C'al. Fanner,
May 4, 1860.
Esekepkabnk. A band of the Crow tribe
adopted from the Sihasapa.
Bad Com.— Oulbertson in Smithson. Kop. 1H50, 144,
1851. BkdHononi.— Morgan, Anc. Sim-.. 159. 1877.
Ese-kep-ka'-buk.— Ibid.
Eshhuliip. The name of "the rancheria
of the mission of San Buenaventura,"
Cal. (Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 4,
1860). The native name usually given to
San Buenaventura was Mishkanakan, or
Mitskanakan (see Miscanaka).
Eshkebngeooshe ( * Flat-mouth', ' Wide-
mouth*). A chief of the Pillager Chip-
pewa; born in 1774, died about 1860. He
belonged to the Awausee gens. In his
youth Eshkebugecoshe engaged in distant
expeditions, lived among the Cree and
Assiniboin, and visitetl in war or peace
the tribes of the upper Missouri, spend-
ing some time among the Hidatsa. His
father. Yellow-hair (Wasonaunequa),
was not a chief by descent, but gainecl
ascendency over the Pillagers through
his knowledge of medicine, and it is said
that whoever incurred his hatred died
mysteriously. The son was different, en-
joying the respect of whites as well as
Indians throughout his long life. He
was much impressed by the proi)hecies of
Tenskwatawa, and through his influence
poisoning ceased among the Pillagers, as
among other Chippewa. In the later
conte^ with the Sioux for the head-
waters of the Mississippi he bore a val-
iant part. Although his band at Leech
lake, Minn., was decimated in the ex-
terminating war, it continued to grow
through accessions of the bravest spirits
of the eastern villages. When a political
agent sought to enlist the Pillagers in the
British interest at the beginning of the
war of 1812, Flat-mouth returned the prof-
fered wampum belts, saying that he
would as soon invite white men to aid
him in his wars as take part in a quar-
rel between the whites. (f. h.)
Sihpea. A Yurok village on the coast
between the mouths of Klamath r. and
Redwood cr., at Gold bluff, Cal. The
Bull. 30—05 28
dialect differed slightly from that of the
Klamath River Yurok. (a. l. k.)
Eskegawaage. One of the 7 districts of
the territory of the Micmac as recognized
by themselves. It includes e. Nova Sco-
tia from Canso to Halifax. — Rand, First
Micmac Reading Book, 81, 1875.
Eskimauan Family. A linguistic stock
of North American aborijrines, compris-
ing two well-marked divisions, the Kski-
mo and the Aleut (q. v. ). See Powell in
7thRep.B. A. E.,71, 1891. (Thefollowing
synonymy of the family is chronologic. )
>E8kimaux'— Gallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am.
Antiq. S<K'.. II. 9, 305. 183(}: CJallatin in Trans. Am.
Kthnol. Soc. II. pt. 1, xcix. 77, 1848; Gallatin in
SchcKilcraft. Ind. Tribes, in, 401, 1853. ^Eskimo.—
Berghana (lS4r>). Phvsik. Atla.s. map 17, 1848: ibid..
ixb'2; I^itliani, Nat. Hist. Man, 288, IS.'iO (general
remarlis on origin and habitat): Buschmann,
Spuren der aztolc. Sprache, ()8«), 1859; Latham,
Klem. Comp. Philol., 38.'i, 1862: Bancroft, Nat.
Races, in. 562, 574. 1882. > Esquimaux.— Frichard,
Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 867-371, 1W7 (follows Gal-
latin): Latham in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i,
182-191, 1848; Latham, Opuscula, 266-274, 1860.
>E8kimo.— Dall in Proc. A. A. A. 8., 266, 1869(treat8
of Alaskan Eskimo and Tuaki oniv); Berghaus,
Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887 (excludes the Aleu-
tian). >Eskimos. — Keane, app. to Stanford's
Compend., Cent, and So. Am., 4H0, 1878 (excludes
.\leutian). >Ounangan.— V'eniaminoff, Zapfski.
II, 1, 1840 (Aleutians onlv). >tTnii^ftii.— Dall in
Com. N. A. Ethnol.. I, 22, 1877 (Aleuts a division
of his Orarian group). ; TJnangan.— Berghaus,
Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887. x Northern.— Scouler
in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc.. xi, 218, 1841 (includes
Tgalentzes of present family). xHaidah.— Scou-
ler. ibid.. 224, 1841 (same as his Northern family).
>Ugaljachinuta.— CJallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind.
tribes, iii, 402, 185:^ (hit. 60°, between Prince
Williams sd. and Mt St Elias, perhaps A thapas-
<'an). >Aleuten. — Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizzen,
1855. >Aleutiani.— Dall in Proc. A. A. A. S.,266,
1869: Dall. Alaska, 374, 1870 (in both places a di-
vision of his Orarian family). >Aleuts.— Keane,
app. to Stanford's Compend., Cent, and So. Am.,
460, 1878 (consist of Unalaskans of mainland and
of Fox and Shumagin ids., with Akkhas of rest
of Aleutian arch.). > Aleut. —Bancroft. Nat.
Races, in, 562, 1882 (two dialects, Unalaska and
Atkha). >Konja^n.— Holmberg. Ethnog. Skiz-
zen, 1855 (Island of Koniag or Kadiak). -Ora-
riant.— Dall in Proc. A. A.A.S., 265, 1869 (group
name: includes Innuit, Aleutians, Taski); Dall,
Alaska, 374, 1870; Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. i,
8. 9, 1877. xTinneh.— Dall in Proc. A. A. A. S.,
269, 1869 (includes 'Tgalens^^"). >Innuit.— Dall
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i. 9, 1877 (** Major group"
of Orarians: treats of Alaska Innuit only): Berg-
haus, Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887 (excludes the
Aleutians).
Eskimo. Agronpof American aborigines,
forming part of the Eskimauan linguistic
stock, which formerly occupied nearly all
the coasts and islands of Arctic America
from E. (xreenland and the n. end of New-
foundland to the westernmost Aleutian
ids. , even extending to the e. coast of Sibe-
ria, a distance of more than 5,000 m. From
remains found in Smith sd. it is evident
that bands formerly winU»red as far n.
as lat. 79° and had summer camps up to
82°. At the present time they have re-
ceded from tnis extreme range and in
the S. have abandoned the n. shore of the
Gulf of St l^awrence, the n. end of New-
foundland, James bay, and the s. shores
of Hudson bay, while in Alaska one Es-
484
ESKIMO
[b. a. e.
kimo tribe, the Ugalakmiut, has prac-
tically become Tlingit through intermar-
riage* The name Eskimo (in the form
8UKUUK, A KINUGUMIUT ESKIMO OF ALASKA. ( NELSON )
Excomminquois) seems to have been first
j?i ven by Biard in 161 1 . It is said to come
from the Abnaki EsquimanUnCy or from
Anhhimeq, the Chippewa equivalent, sig-
nifying * eaters of raw flesh.* They call
themselves Inuit, meaning* people.' The
Eskimo constitute physically a distinct
type. They are of medium stature, but
possess uncommon strength and endur-
ance; their skin is light brownish yel-
low with a ruddy tinton theexposed parts;
their hands and feet are small ana well
formed; their eyes, like those of other
American tribes, have a Mongoloid char-
acter, which circumstance has induced
many ethnographers to class them with
the Asiatic peoples. They are character-
ized by very broad faces and narrow, high
noses; their heads are also exceptionafiy
high. This type is most marked among
the tribes e. of Mackenzie r. Indisposi-
tion the Eskimo may be described as peace-
able, cheerful, truthful, and honest, but
exceptionally loose in sexual morality.
The Eskimo have permanent settle-
ments, conveniently situated for marking
certain hunting and fishing grounds. In
summer they hunt caribou, musk-oxen,
and various birds; in winter they live prin-
cipally on sea mammals, particularly the
seal. Although their houses differ with
the region, they conform in the main to
three types: In summer, when they
travel, they occupy tents of deer or seal
skins stretched on poles. Their winter
dwellings are made either in shallow ex-
cavations covered with turf and earth laid
upon a framework of wood or whale ribs,
or they are built of snow. Their clothing
is of skins, and their personal adorn-
ments are few. Among most tribes, how-
ever, the women tattoo their faces, and
some Alaskan tribes wear studs in open-
ings through their cheeks. Considering
their degree of culture, the Eskimo are
excellent draftsmen and carvers, their de-
signs usually consisting either of simple
linear incisions or of animal forms exe-
cuted with much life and freedom. The
people about Bering strait make some use
of paints.
There has always been extensive inter-
tribal communication. The Eskimo have
an exceptional knowledge of the geogra-
phy of their country. Poetrjr and music
play an important part in their life, espe-
cially in connection with their religious
observances.
The Eskimauan social organization is
exceedingly loose. In general the village
is the largest unit, although persons in-
habiting a certain geographical area have
sometimes taken the name of that area as
a more general designation, and it is often
convenient for the ethnographer to make
KERLUNONER, A KINUGUMIUT ESKIMO WOMAN OF AUSKA.
(nelson)
a more extended use of this native cus-
tom. In matters of government each set-
tlement is entirely independent, and the
BULL. 30]
ESKIMO
435
same might almoet be said for each family,
although there are customs and prece-
dents, especially with regard to hunting
and fishing, which define the relations ex-
isting between them. Although hardly
deserving the name of chief, there is
usually some advisory head in each settle-
ment whose dictum in certain matters,
particularly as to the change of village
sites, has much . weight, but he has no
power to enforce his opinions.
The men engage in hunting and fish-
ing, while all the nousehold duties fall to
the lot of the women — they must cook,
make and mend clothes, and repair the
kaiaks and boat covers, pitch the tents,
and dry the fish and meat and stow them
away for the winter. In some tribes
skin-dressing is done bv the men, in
others by the women. Monogamy, po-
lygamy, and polyandry are all practised,
their occurrence being governed some-
what by the relative proportion of the
sexes; but a second mamage is unusual
where a man's first wife has borne him
children. The execution of law is largely
.left to the individual, and blood-revenge
is universally exacted.
The Eskimo believe in spirits inhabit-
ing animals and inanimate objects. Their
chief deity, however, is an old woman
who resides in the ocean and may cause
storms or withhold seals and other marine
animids if any of her tabus are infringed.
Her power over these animals arises from
the fact that they are sections of her fin-
gers cut off by her father at the time when
she first took up her abode in the sea.
The chief duty of an^koks, or shamans,
is to find who has infringed the tabus and
thus brought down the wrath of the
supernatural beings and to compel the
onender to make atonement by public
confession or confession to the an^kok.
The central Eskimo suppose two spirits to
reside in a man's body, one of which stays
with it when it dies and may temporarily
enter the body of some child, who is then
named after the departed, while the other
goes to one of several lands of the souls.
Some of the lands of souls lie above the
earth's surface, some beneath, and the
latter are generally more desirable.
Although the tneory of Asiatic origin
of the EsEimo was long popular, many of
their ethnic peculiarities are opposed to
such a notion, and recent researches
seem to indicate that their movements
have rather been from E. to W. They are
peculiar as being the only race of American
aborigines who certainly had contact
with white people before the days of CJo-
lumbus, for Greenland was occupied dur-
ing the 10th and 11th centuries by
Norwegians, whose expeditions extended
even as far as the American mainland.
Later Frobisher and other European nav-
igators encountered Eskimo alon^ the
E. coasts, while the Russians discov-
ered and annexed the w. part of their
domain. This occupancy in its earlier
period proved disastrous to the Aleut
(q. v.) in particular, who were harshly
dealt with and whose number was greatly
reduced during the Russian domination
(see Russian influence). The larger por-
tion of the Greenland and Labrador Es-
kimo have been Christianized by Mo-
ravian and Danish missionaries, while
the Alaskan representatives of the family
have had Russian missionaries among
them for more than a century. Those
of the central groups, however, owing
to the remoteness of their situation,
have always been much less affected by
outside influences. The Eskimo have
proved almost indispensable assistants to
Arctic explorers.
The Eskimauan stock embraces two
well-marked divisions, the Eskimo proper
and the inhabitants of the Aleutian ias.,
the Aleut. Other divisions are rather
geographical than political or dialectic,
there being great similarity in language
and customs from one end of the Eskimo
domain to the other. They can be sepa-
rated, however, into the following fairly
well marked ethnological groups (based
on information furnished by Dr Franz
Boas):
I. The Greenland Eskimo, subdivided
into the East Greenlanders, West Green-
landers, and Ita Eskimo, the last transi-
tional between the Greenland Eskimo
proper and the next group.
II. The Eskimo of s. Baffin land and
Labrador, embracing the following divi-
sions: Akudnirmiut, Akuliarmiut, Itivi-
miut, Kaumauangmiut, Kigiktagmiut,
Nugumiut, Okomiut, Padlimiut, Sikosui-
larmiut, Suhinimiut, Tahagmiut.
III. The Eskimo of Melville penin..
North Devon, n. Baffin land, and tncN. w.
shore of Hudson bay, embracing the Ago-
miut, Aivilirmiut, Amitormiut, Iglulir-
miut, Inuissuitmiut, Kinipetu, Koung-
miut, Pilingmiut, Sauniktumiut.
IV. The Sagdlirmiut of Southampton
id., now extinct.
V. The Eskimo of Boothia Felix, King
William land, and the neighboring main-
land. These include the Netchilirmiut,
Sinimiut, Ugulirmiut, Ukusiksalirmiut.
VI. The Eskimo of Victoria land and
Coronation eulf, including the Kangor-
miut and Kidnelik, which may, perhaps,
be one tribe.
VII. The Eskimo between C. Bath-
urstand Herschel id., including the mouth
of Mackenzie r. Provisionally they may
be divided into the KitegareutatC. Bath-
urst and on Anderson r., the Nageuktor-
436
ESKIMO
[ B. A. E.
miut at the mouth of Coppermine r., and
the Kopagmiut of Mackenzie r. This
group approximates the next very closely.
VIII. The Alaskan Eskimo, embrac-
ing all those within the American terri-
tor>'. This group includes the Aglemiut,
Chingigniiut, Chnagmiut, Chugachi^-
miut, Ikogmint, Imaklimiut, Ingukli-
miut, Kaiali^miut, Kangmaligmiut, Kani-
agmiut, Kaviagmiut, Kevalingamiut, Kia-
tagniiut,
K i 11 u g u -
mint, Ko-
wagmiiit,
Kukpau-
rungmiut,
Kunmiut,
Kuskwog-
miut,Mage-
miut,Male-
miut, Nu-
natogmiut,
Nunivag-
miut, Nu-
wukmiut,
Nushagag-
miut, §ela-
w igmiut,
Sidanimiut,
Tikeramiut,
Togiagmiut,
U galak-
iniut, I'lia-
1 i g m i u t ,
Utukamiut,
and Utkia-
vimiut.
IX. The
Yuit of Si-
beria.
H o 1 m
( 1 884-85 )
placed the
, , number of
(Murdoch) ^^astOreeH-
land Eskimo at 550. The w. coast Green-
landers were .given as 10,122 by the
Royal Greenland (^o. in 1888, and thelta
Eskimo numbered 284 in 1897, giving
a total for this group of 10,906.' The
Eskimo of Labrador were estimated at
1,300 in a recent report by the Govern-
ment of Newfoundland, amd Boas in 1888
gave the number of Eskimo in the central
groups as 1 , 100. According to the census
of 1890, there were on the Arctic coast of
Alaska from the British border to Norton
sd., 2,729 Eskimo; on the s. shore of Nor-
ton sd. and in the Yukon valley, 1,439;
in Kuskokwim valley, 5,254; in the val-
ley of Nushamik r., 1,952; on the s. coast,
1,670. The Ugalakmiut of Prince Wil-
liam sd., numbering 154, are reckoned
with the Tlingit, but they were originally
Eskimo, and for our present purposes
are best placed in that categorv. Adding
these, therefore, the total for tliis group,
WESTERN Eskimo Costume.
exclusive of the 968 Aleut, is 13,298.
The Yuit of Siberia are estimated by Bo-
goras at 1 , 200. The Eskimo proper there-
fore number about 27,700, and the stock
about 28,670. (h. w. h. j. k. s.)
ilgttskemaig.— Tanner, Narr., 316, 1830. A'Wa-
y«'lilit,— Bogoras, Chukchee, 11, 1904 (Chukchi:
* those of alien language ' ) . Anda-kpoBn.— Petitot,
Diet. D^nd Dindji^, 169, 1876 (Loucheux name:
trans, 'ennemis-pieds'). Ara-k'e.— Ihid. (Bas-
tard Loucheux name, same meaning). Enna-k'i. —
Ibid. (Peaux de Li^vre name, same meaning).
En-na-k'ie.— Ibid. (Slave name: trans, 'steppes-
ennemis'). EsooumiiiB.— Jes. Rel., in, index, 1858.
Eihkibod.— Baraga, Otchipwe-Eng. Diet., 114, 1880
(Ojibwa: 'those who eat their food raw'). Eikee-
xnoet.— Gordon, Hist. Mem. of N. Am., 117, 1820.
Etkima.— Dobbs, Hudson Bay. 203, 1744. Eski-
mantoik. — Hervaa, Idea dell' Universo, xvn, 87,
1784. Edtima'ntsik.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i,
9, 1877 (Abnaki name). Etkimauk.— Morse, N.
Am., map, 1776. Etkimaux.— Lahontan, New
Voy., I, 208, 1703. Eskimeauz. -Jeffreys, French
Dom. Am., pt.l, map, 1760. Eskuneti.— Hervas,
Idea deir Universo, xvn, 86, 1784. Etkiino.—
Busehmann, Spuren d. Aztek. Spr., 669, 1859.
E«kimot.—Hutchins (1770) quoted by Kichard-
son, Arct. Exped., ii, 38, 1851. Eiquimanteie.—
Prichard, Phys. Hist., v, 367,1847. Esqaimau.—
Petitot, Diet. D^n^ Dindji(^, 169, 1876. Esqui-
maux.—Morse, Hist. Am., 126. 1798. Ssquimeanz
Indians. — McKeevor, Voy. Hudson's Bay, 27, 1819.
Esquimones.— Hennepin, Cont. of New Discov.,
95, 1698. Eusquexnays.— Potts (1754) quoted by
Boyle, Archa?ol. Rep. Ont., 1905. Exoomminqui—
Jes. Rel. 1612-14, Thwaites ed., ii, 67, 1896 (=♦ ex-
communicated ' ) . Exbomminquois.— Biard in Jes.
Rel. 1611, 7. 1858. Huskemaw.— Packard in Am.
Natural., XIX, 555, 1885 (name given byamission-
arv in Labrador). Hfislcy.— Dall in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., I, 9. 1877 (Hud.son bay jargon). Iimoit—
Petitot in Bib. Ling. etEthnoL Am.,iii,pt. 2,29,
1876 (sing. Innok). In-nu.— Lyon, Repulse Bay,
40, 1825. Innuees.— Parry, Sec. Voy., 414, 1824.
In'niiit--Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 9, 1877
(own name). Inuin.— Murdoch In 9th Rep. B. A.
E., 42, 1892. Inuit—BesselsinArchivf.Anthrop.,
VIII, 107, 1875. KaUdlit— Nansen, Eskimo Life,
13, 1893 (name which the Greenland Eskimo give
themselves, said to be a corruption of Danish
Skraeling). Ejtialik.— Richardson, Polar Regions,
300, 1861. Kalalit.— Keane in Stanford's Com-
pend., 517. 1878. Karaler.— Crantz, Greenland, ii,
291, 1820. KaraUt,— Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d «.,
IX, 233, 1822. KeraUte.— Heriot, Travels, 34, 1813.
Ki'imilit.— Bogoras, Chukchee, 21, 1904 (iTom
kVxmi, an inhabitant of C. Prince of Wales: Yuit
name). Hoohwavs.— Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 12, 1744
( Algonkin: ' snaKeJ^,' 'enemies,' applied to people
of alien race regarded as natural enemies) . Hod-
wa3rs.— Dobbs, Hud.son Bay, 12, 1744 ('snakes':
Siksika name). (Enne.— Petitot, Diet. D^nd Dind-
ji6, 169, 1876 (Loucheux name: ♦enemies'). Ora-
rians.— Dall in Proc. A. A. A. S., xviil, 265, 1870.
Ot'el'mia.— Petitot, Diet. D6n6 Dindji^, 169, 1876
(Montagnais name: trans, 'steppes-ennemis').
Pa-erks.— Hooper, Tentsof Tuski, 137, 1853 (Chuk-
chi name for Eskimo of American coast). Paya-
irkets.— Ibid., 103. Ro'6liilit.— Bogoras, Chuk-
chee, 21, 1904 ('opposite shore people': Yuit
name). Seymbs.— Richardson, Arct. Exped., -1,340,
1851 (used by sailors of Hudson's Bay Co.'s
ships: derived from the Eskimo cry of greeting:
Seymo or Teymo). 8kraeIings.—Schultz in Trans.
Roy. Soc. Can., xiii, pt. 2, 114, 1895. Bkrallinfar.—
Richardson, Polar Regions, 298, 1861 (Scandina-
vian name: 'small people'). 8 Knelliags. —
Crantz, Greenland, i, 123, 1820 (applied by the
Norwegians). Skrellinn.— Amer. Hist. Soc., 2d
ser . , I, Portland, 1869. Skroelingnes. —Morse, Hist.
Am., 126, 1778. Suok&nbs.— Richardson, Arct.
Exped., 1, 340, 1851 (same derivation as Seymds).
Ta-Kutdii.— Ibid. (Kutchin name: 'ocean peo-
ple'). Tohiaohroae.— Pyrlseus (ca. 1748) quoted
^n Am. Antiq., rv, 75, 1881 (German form of Seneca
name: 'seal people'). Tciick-riiii**.— Hewitt, •
infn (Seneca name). Ultsehasa.— Richardson,
t
BULL. nOl
KftKlNT ESQITGBAAG
Arct. Exped., I, 408,1851 (Keiiai name: * slaves').
mtMhiia.— Ibid. TJikee-mM.— Ibid., 5o. TJskee'-
mi. — Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol. i, 9. 1877
(Athapascan name). TJike«t.— 0*Reillv, Green-
land, 59, 1818. XTikimay.— Middleton in Dobbs,
Hudson Bay, 189,1744. Uaquexnows. — Coats. Geog.
of Hudson Bay, 15, 1852. Weashkimek.— Bel court
Uaquexnows. — Coats. Geog.
ay, 15, 1852. Weaihkimek.— Belcourt
(before 1853) in Minn. Hist. Coll., i, 226, 1872
(Saulteur name: 'eaters of raw flesh'). Yikirga'-
ulit— Bogoras, Chukchee, 21, 1904 ( Yuit name) .
Eskini. A Maidu village formerly sit-
uated on the site of Durham, Butte cc,
Cal., the people of which are extinct ex-
cept for a few survivors at Chico. The
Maidu creation myth centers about this
sjjot. (r. b. d. )
Ertkins.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 124, 1860. Es'-kin.— Pow-
ers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. in, 282, 1877. Etkini.—
Curtin, MS. vocab., B.A.E., 1885.
EskBinaitnpiks (*worm people'). A
division of the Piegan.
Esk'-un-ai-t&p-Xlu.— Grinnell, Blackfoot L<Klge
Tales, 209, 1892. is-kBi'-na-tup-i.— Ilavden, Eth
nog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 264. 1862. Worm Peo-
ple.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 225, 1892.
Eskusone. A Micmac village formerly
in Cape Breton. — Rand, Fin*t Micmac
Heading Book, 87, 1875.
Eslanagan. A village, supposed to l)e
of the (Uhalone division i)f the Costanoan
family, but possibly Esselenian, formerly
connected with Soledad mission, Monte-
rey CO., Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Apr. 20, 1860.
Esmisohne. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Purfsima mission, Santa Bar-
bara CO., Cal. — Tavlor in (^al. Fanner,
Oct. 18, 1861.
Esnispele. A former Chuina^shan vil-
lage near Purfsima mission, Santa Bar-
bara CO.., Cal.— Tavlor in (^al. Farmer,
Oct. 18, 1861.
Esopns (sip * river,' -i« 'small') . A di-
vision of the Munsee that lived along the
w. bank of Hudson r. in Greene and Ulster
COS., N. Y., above the Minisink, who
formed the main division. Esopus is the
old name of Kingston, which was their
principal rendezvous. Under this name
were included the Catskill, Mamekoting,
Waoranec, Warranawonkong, and \Va-
warsink, sometimes called the five tribes
of the Esopus country. They continued
to reside about Kingston until some
joined the Moravian Munsee and Mahi-
can in Pennsylvania, and others placed
themselves under the protection of the
Iroquois. About the year 1775 the rem-
nant were at Oquanga, with fragments of
other tribes. (.i. m.)
.Ewpua.— Smitt (1660) in N. Y. Doe. Col. Hist.,
xni, 157, 1881. Aetopus.— Doe. of 1658, ibid., 81.
Aropiis.- Writer m. 1742 in Drake, Bk. Inds., bk.
5, 18, 1848. Esopet.— Doe. of 1665 in N. V. Doe.
Col. Hist., xni, 401, 1881. Eaopus.— De Laet (1638)
quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes HudNon R., 72, 1872.
Eaopoz.— Map ca. 1614 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i.
1856. Sapet.— Doc. of 1665, ibid., x in, 399, 1881.
Sepns. -Schuyler (1693), ibid., iv, 66, 1854 (settle-
ment). SoopU.— Stoll (1658), ibid., xiii, 77, 1881
(locality). Soopus.— Ibid., 96. Sopes.— Nicolls
(1665), ibid., 399. Jope«.--Smith (1659), ibid., 114
(place). Sopus.
Ingold.Mby (1691)
Doc. of 1668, ibid., 418. Zopas.—
ibid., ill, 793, 1853 (settlement).
Espachomy . A village on lower U udsou
r., N. Y., near Poughkeepsie, under Eng-
lish protection in 1664. — Albany treaty
( 1664) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, iii, 68, 1853.
Espamichkon. A small Montagnais tribe
N. of the St Lawrence in 1643 ( Jes. Rel.
1643, 38, 1858), probably about the head-
waters of Saguenay or St Maurice r.
Espejos (named from their chief Espe-
jo (Span.: * mirror'). A branch of the
Mescaleros inhabiting the plains of Chi-
huahua, Mexico, about 1859. — Froebel,
Seven Years' Trav., 352, 1859.
Espeminkia. A band, apparently part
of the Illinois, mentioned with the Tam-
aroa and Tapouaro (Peoria?). — La Salle
(1681) in Mar^ry, Dec, ii, 134, 1877.
Esperiez. Given by mistakeas the name
of oneof the Ilopi pueblos in 1598.— Ofiate
(1598) in Doc. Incd., xvi, 137, 1871.
Espiilnima. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Purfsima mission, Santa Bar-
bara CO., Cal. — Tavlor in Cal. Farmer,
Oct. 18, 1861.
Espirita Santo de Zaniga. A mission
established by the Marquis de San Miguel
Aguayo, in March or April, 1722, near and
under the protection of the newly estab-
lished fort of Santa Marfa de I^reto de la
Bahia del Espiritu Santo, commonly
called La Bahfa, which was built on the
site of La Salle's ill-fated Ft St Louis, on
I^vaca r., Matagorda bay, Tex., in the
territory of the Karankawa. The Span-
ish mission, of which Fray Agustin Pat-
ron was the lirst missionary, was aban-
doned before 1726, its priest establishing
a new one among the Tamique and Ju-
ranames (Aranama), who lived 10 leagues
inland, on lower San Antonio r., and in
1749 it was moved upstream opposite the
site of the mo<lern Goliad. The presidio
of La Bahfa was shifted with the mission.
In 1768 its population was 300, and to that
date there had been 623 baptisms; there
were also 1,500 cattle and 100 horses, and
it is said once to have had 15,000 cattle.
The population, which consisted of Ara-
nama, Tamique, Piguican, ManosdePerro,
Kohani, and Karankawa Indians, had
dwindled to 116 in 1785 (in which vear
there were also 3,000 cattle ) , and to only 33
Indians in 1793. See Bancroft, No. Mex.
States, I, 1886; Garrison, Texas, 1903.
Espopolames. A former tribe, probably
Coahuiltecan, in the neighl>orhood of the
lower Rio Grande.
Espopolames.— Fernando del Bosque (1675) in
Nat. Geog. Mag., xiv, 341. 1903. Isipopolames.—
Revillagigedo (1793) quoted by Bancroft, Nat.
Races, i, 611, 1886.
Esqagbaag. Formerly a rancheria,
probably of the Sobaipuri, and a visitaof
the mission of Suamca about 1760-67;
situated on or near the Rio San Pedro,
near the Arizona-Sonora boundarv.
Badz.— Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 563, 18i«.
S. Andres Esqugbaag. — Ibid.
438
ESQUIMALT E8TANCIA
[b. a.
Stquimalt. The local name for a body
of Songish at the s. e. end of Vancouver
id., under the Cowichan t^ency; pop. 15
in 1901, 20 in 1904.— Can. fiid. Aff., pt. 2,
66, 1902; pt. 2, 69, 1904.
Eiquimaxix Point A Montagnais mis-
sion settlement on the n. bank of the St
Lawrence, about 20 m. e. of Mingan,
Quebec.
SaquimAttx Point. — Stearns, Labrador, 271, 1884.
Pointe det Esqaimaax.— Hind, Lab. Penin.. ii, 180,
1863.
Etquipomgole. Defined by Bartlett
(Diet, of Americanisms, 202, 1877) as
** another name for kinnickinnick, or a
mixture of tobacco and cornel bark";
said to be an Indian word, possibly Al-
gonquian. (a. f. c. )
Ettanape (Algonq.: cu^napA * stone per-
son*.— W.J.). A tribe located by Lahon-
tan (New Voy., i, 114, 1703) on his **Long
r. , " identified with Minnesota r. His voy-
age up this stream is probably fictitious,
and so may be the tribe, which was cer-
tainly not the Assiniboin, as has been
suggested, since these under the name
Assimpoual were correctly placed by La-
hontan in the re^on of L. Winnipeg.
The tribe, if not imaginary, may have
been, as Ramsey supposed, the Santee,
known as Isanyati, for the Mdewakanton
band dwelt at that time on Minnesota r.
1706.
apes.— Harris, Coll. Voy. and Trav., ii, map,
Esanopet.— Barcia, Ensayo, 291, 1723. £■•
•aa-a-pis.— Ramsey in Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1849, 78,
1850. EMannapet.— Neill in Minn. Hist. Coll., i, 31,
1872. Essenapet.— Vaugondy, map, 1778.
Ettelen. A tribe of Califomian Indians,
constituting the Esselenian family, most
of the members of which on the founding
of Carmelo mission, near Monterey, in
1770, were brought under civilizing in-
fluences, resulting, as was the case with
the Indians at all tne Californian missions,
in their rapid decrease (see California In-
dians, Mission Indians, Missions), A por-
tion of the tribe seems to have been taken
to the mission at Soledad, for Arroyo de
la Cuesta (MS., B. A. E.) in 1821 says of
an Esselen vocabulary obtained by him-
self, **Huelel langiu^e of Soledad; it is
from the Esselenes, who are already few. ' '
The original territory of the Esselen lay
along the coast s. of Monterey, though
its exact limits are diversely given.
Henshaw (Esselen MS., B. A. E.) states
that they lived on the coast s. of Mon-
terey, in the mountains. The Rumsen
Indians of the present day at Carmel
and Monterey state (Kroeber, MS., Univ.
Cal. ) that the Esselen originally lived at
Agua Caliente (Tassajara springs), which
is near the head of Carmel r., in a line
between Surand Soledad. Powell's map
(7th Rep. B. A. E.) makes the Esselen
territory comprise Sur r., the head of Car-
mel r., and the country about as far s. as
Santa Lucia peak, which is probably ap-
proximately correct. In any case the Es-
selen territory was confined to a limited
area and was bordered only by Salinanand
Costanoan tribes. La Perouse's statement
that it extended more than 20 leagues e. of
Monterey is incorrect. Almost nothing
is known of the mode of life and practices
of the Esselen, but they were certainly
similar to those of the neighboring
tribes. What little is known in regxu^
to the Esselen language shows it to have
been simple and regular and of a type
similar to most of the languages of central
California, but, notwithstanding a few
words in common with Costanoan, of en-
tirely unrelated vocabulary and therefore
a distinct stock.
Taylor gives a list of Esselen villages con-
'nected with San Carlos mission, namely:
Chachat, Coyyo, Fyules, Gilimis, Jappa-
yon, Nennequi, Noptac, Santa Clara, Sap-
ponet, Saccorondo, Tebityilat, Triwta,
Tushguesta, Xumis, Yampas, and Yanos-
tas. He mentions also Xaseum, 10 leagues
from Carmelo, in the sierra, and Pach-
hepes near Xaseum, among the Esselen.
He gives still other names, such as Ex-
cellemaks and Eslanagan; but fione of
the settlements named by him have been
proved to be Esselen and not Costanoan.
Cannelo Eslenet.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20,
1860. Eoolemaohi.— LamanoninLAPerouse, Voy.,
II, 291, 1797. Eolemaohet.— Chamisso quoted by
Kotzebue, Voy., in, 49, 1821. EcielMias.— Taylor
in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. Eflselenet.— ibid.
Ekklemaohet.— Luaewig, Abor. Lang. Am., 68,
1858. Eii»en«i.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20,
1860. Esoelea.— Humboldt, Essai Pol., 821, 1811.
Eaoeleaet.— Mayer, Mexico, ii, 39, 1858. Eaoel-
lens.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860. Bs-
elenes.— Ibid. Eakelen.^Ludewig, Abor. Lang.
Am., 68, 1858. Eslen.— Qaliano, Viaje Sutil y
Mexicana, 167, 1802. Etleaet.— Ibid., 172. Eaae-
iea.— Henshaw in Am. Anthrop., in, 45, 1890.
ExMllemaki.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860.
Ettelenian Family. A small linguistic
stock in w. California, first positively
established by Henshaw (Am. Anthrop.,
III, 45, 1890). At the time of the Spanish
settlement, this family, which has l^icome
extinct, consisted of a single group, the
Esselen, q. v.
=Essel«a.~Dixon and Kroeber in Am. Anthrop.,
n. 8., V, no. 1, map, 1903. =Eueleiiian. — Powell
in 7th Rep. B. A. £., 75, 1891. <8alinas.— Latham
in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 85, 1856 (includes
Gioloco?, Ruslen, Soledad, £9len, Carmel, San
Antonio, and San Miguel, cited as including
Eslen); Latham, Opuscula, 350, 1860.
Ettait. A former Chumashan village
near Purfsima mission, Santa Barbara
CO., Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18,
1861.
Ettale. A former settlement of the
southern group of E. Greenland Eskimo. —
Meddelelser om Gronland, xxv, 26, 1902.
Ettame. A Calusa village on the s. w.
coast of Florida, about 1570. — Fontaneda
Memoir (ca.l575), Smith trans., 19, 1854.
Estancia (a Spanish term with many
meanings, but here probably signifying
* sojourning or staving place'). A Pima
rancheria visited by Anza in 1774; situ-
BULL. 30]
EST ATOEK ETCH AREOTTINE
439
ated 4 leagues s. of the mission of Saric,
which was just s. of the Arizona boundary.
La XstaaoU.— Anza quoted by Bancroft, Ariz, and
N. Mex., 389, 1889.
Estatoee. Two former Cherokee settle-
ments, one on Tugaloo r. below the junc-
tion of Chattooga and Tallulah rs., in
Oconee co., S. C, the other in the n. w.
part of Pickens co. The former wax
generally known as Old Estatoee.
SstaUoe.— Rovce in 18th Rep. B. A. E.. pl.clxi,
1900. BtUtoe.— Royee in 5th Rep.B. A. K.,map,
1887. SsUtoie.— Doc. of 1755 quoted by Rovce,
ibid., 143. Ettotowe.— Bartram, Travels, 372, 1792
(on Tugaloo r.). Ettotowe great.— Ibid, (town on
another river).
Estero. An unidentified tribe men-
tioned by Langsdorff ( Voy., ii, 163, 1814)
as inhabiting the coast of California.
Estoeoloco. A Chumashan village on
one of the northern Santa Barbara ids.,
Cal., in 1542.-<:;abrillo, Narr. (1542) in
Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., 186, 1857.
Oolooo.— Cabrillo, op. cit., 186. Estilocooo.— Tay-
lor in Cal. Parmer, Apr. 17, 1863.
Ettuc. A former Chumashan village
near San Marcos, in the vicinity of Santa
Barbara, Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Apr. 24, 1863.
Estufa. See Kiva.
Etoa. The Turtle clan of the Zufli of
New Mexico. It appears to be extinct.
itU-kw«.— Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A. E.. 3«<i,
1896 ( kwe= ' people' ) .
Etaatthatiume (* people at the cove*).
A village of the Tiitutni of Oregon.
B'-ta-a'-^ ^un'nl.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, HI, 233. 1890 (Tututni name). E'-ta-a-t'^t'
^fiane'.— Ibid. (Naltunnetunne name).
Etagottine ('people in the air'). A
Nahane band or division in the valleys of
the Rocky mts. between the Esbataottine
and thelMkkuthkutchin, lat. 66°, British
America. Their totem is the lynx.
Bibo'-tMia. — Ross quoted by Dawson in Rep.
Qeol. Surv. Can. 1887-8H, 200b, 1889. Daha-dinneh.—
Dunn, Hist. Oregon, 79, 1844. DahadinnM.— Rich-
ardson, Arct. Exped., 1. 180, 1851. Dahi-dtinni.—
Richardson quoted by Petitot, Diet. D^n6-Dindji^,
XX, 1876. Da-ha-dumiet.— Hind, Expl. Exped., ii,
159. 1860. Dahodinni.— Latham in Trans. Philol.
Soc. Lond., 66, 1856. Daho-t«na.— Bancroft, Native
Races, i, 149, 1882. Diho'-tena'.— Dall in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., I, 33, 1877. Dawhoot-dinneh.— Franklin,
Narr., ii, 84, 1824. EhU-Oottiii«.— Petitot, Autour
dulacde8ERclaves,362, 1891. Eta-fottiiie.— Petitot,
Diet. D^n^-Dindji^, xx, 1876 (trans, 'mountain
people* ). ^U-Oottine.— Petitot, Autour du Grand
lac des Eaclaves, 301. 1891. ita-Ottine.— Petitot,
Grand lac des Ours, 66, 1893 (trans. 'Rocky moun-
tain people' ). Oena de la montagne. — Petitot, Diet.
mn^Dindji^. xx, 1876. Oens d* En-haut.— Pet-
itot, Autour du Grand lac des Esclaves, 363, 1891.
Oena det Moatagnet-RooheuMt. — Petitot, Grand lac
des Ours, 66. 1893. Oena ea Pair.—Petitot, Autour,
op. cit., 262. Huntort.— Prichard, Phys. Hist.,
V. 877, 1847. Mountain Indian.— Richardson, Arct.
Exped., I 400. 1851. Naha-*tdinn<.— Ibid. Hoh*ha-
14.— Ibid., II, 7, 1851 (so called by Kutchin).
Bioaneaa.— Dall in Cont N. A. Ethnol.. i, 88, 1877
(sometimes so called by traders). Y^ta-ottin^.—
petitot, Autour du Grand lac des Esclaves, 363.
1891 (trans, 'dwellers in the air').
Etah. An Ita Eskimo village at C. Ohl-
sen, on Smith sd., w. Greenland, lat. 78°
2(K. See Ita.
Ahipa. — Markham in TranM. Ethnol. s<>e. I^ond..
9, 1866. Appah.— Kane. Arct. Explor.. ii. 212.
18.%. Etah.— Kcssels. Am. N<»r«H»ol. Kxpod., map.
1878. IgiU.— Kroeber in Bull. Am. Miis. Nat.
Hist., XII, 269, 1900.
Etakmehn. A division of Salish now on
Port Madison res.. Wash.
Etak-bush.— Mallett in Ind. AfT. Rep.. 198, 1877.
Etakmehu.— Boulet, letter. B. A. E., Mar. 22, 1886.
Etakmurs.— Ind. AfT. Rep.. 176. 1875.
Etanie. A former Seminole town in
Putnam co., Fla., of which Checota Hajo
was chief in 1823. There is now a town
of Etoniah in the w. part of the county,
and also a creek of the same name. See
H. R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th Cong.,
Istsess., 27, 1826.
Etarita. A village of the Wolf clan of
the Tionontati, where the Jesuits estab-
lished the mission of St Jean; destroyecl
by the Iroquois in 1649.
EtariU.— Parkman, Jes., 403, 1883. Etharita.—
Garreau (164S) quoted in Hist. Mag., 1st s., v, 263,
1861. Sainct lean.— Jes. Rel. for 1640, 95. 1858.
Saint lean. —Jes. Rel. for 1648, 61, 185«. St.
John'*.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 192, 1855.
Etatchogottine (*hair people'). A di-
vision of the Kawchodinne dwelling n.
and E. of Great Bear lake and on Great
cape, Mackenzie Ter., Can. Their totem
is a white wolf.
Ehta-tohd-Oottine.— Petitot, Grand lac des Ours,
66, 1893.
Etchaottine. An Etchareottine division
living w. and n. w. of Great Slave lake
between Liard r. and the divide, along
Black, Beaver, and Willow rs., British
America. The Bistchonigottine and
Krayiragottine are two of the divisions.
Dene ^toha-Ottine.— Petitot, Autour du lao den
Esclaves, 301, 1891. Etclavet.— Ibid. ^tcha-Ot-
tine.— Ibid. Oent du lao la Tnxite.— Petitot, Diet.
D^nt^-DindjitS xx, 1876. Slaves proper.— Kenni-
cott, MS. v»K'ab., B. A. E.
Etchareottine (*i>eople dwelling in the
shelter'). An Athapascan tril>e occupy-
ing the country w. of Great Slave lake
and upper Mackenzie r. to the Rocky
mts., including the lower Liard valley,
British America. Their range extends
from Hay r. to Ft Goml Hope, and they
once lived on the shores of L. Athabasca
and in the forests stretching northward to
Great Slave lake. They were a timid,
pacific people, called * the people sheltered
by willows' by the Chipewyan, indicat-
ing a riparian fisher folk. Their Cree
neighbors, who harried and plundered
them an<l carried them off into bondage,
called them Awokanak, * slaves,' an epi-
thet which in its French and English
forms came to be the name under wnich
they are \ye8t known. Early in the 18th
century they were dispossessed of their
home, rich m fish and game, and driven
northward to Great Slave lake whither
they were still followed by the Cree,
known only as Enna, * the enemy,' a name
still mentioned with horror as far as Great
Bear lake. On the islands where they
took refuge a fresh carnage took place.
The Thlingchadinneh ana Kawchodin-
neh, who sj)eak the same dialect with
440
ETCHERIBIEGOTTINE— r-ETHENELDELI
[b. a. e.
theiu and lx»^r a like reputation for timid-
ity, probably comprehended under the
name Awokanak by the Cree, began their
northerly migration at the same time,
probably under the same impulsion (Peti-
tot, La 5ler Glaciale, 292, 1887). Petitot
found among them a variety of physiog-
nomy that he ascrilxnl to a mixture of
races. Many of the males are circumcised
in infancy; those who are not are called
dogs, not opprobriously, but rather affec-
tionately. The bands or divisions are
Eleidlinottine, Etchaottine, Etcheridie-
gottine, Etechesottine, Klodesseottine,
and Desnedeyarelottine (Petitot, Autour
du lac des Esclaves, 863, 1891). In his
monograph on the Dene-Dindjie, Petitot
restricted the term to the Etcheridiegot-
tine, whom he distinguished from the
Slaves proper, making the latter a separate
tribe with divisions at Hay r.. Great Slave
lake, Horn mts., the fork' of the Macken-
zie, and Ft Norman.
A-olui'H>-tui-ne.— MorKran, Ck)n8ang. and Affin..
289, 1871 ( trans. ♦ people of the lowlands ' ) . Acheo-
tenne.— Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 58, 1870. A-che-
to-e-ten-ni. — Ross, MS. notes on Tinne, B. A. E.
Acheto-e-Tinne.— Kennicott, MS. vocab., B. A. E.
Aoheto-toniL— Dall, Alaska, 429, 1870. Aohoto-e-
tenni.— Po{>e, MS. Sicanny vocab., B. A. E., 1865.
A-ttho-to-ti-na.— Dawson in Rep.Geol.Surv.Can.,
1887-^, 200 B, 1889. Awokimak.— Petitot, La Mer
Glaciale, 293, 1887 ('slaves': Cree name). Broth-
wood Indiana.— Fran klin, Journ. to Polar Sea, II, 87,
1824. Gheta-ut-tdinne.— Richardson, Arct. Exped.,
II, 7, 1851. Dane Etclavet.— Petitot. Autour du lac
des Esclaves, 289, 1891. Danites BsolaTet.— Ibid.,
dOh. Edchautawoot.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
II, 27, 1852. Edohawtawhoot dinneh.— Franklin,
Journ. to Polar Sea. 262, 1824. Edohawtawhoot tin-
neh.— Tanner, Narr., 293, 1830. Edehawtawoot—
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 19, 1836.
Edthawtawoots.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 542,
1853. Etdave*.— Petitot, Autour du lac des Es-
claves, 363, 1891. Etohape-ottini.— Petitot, Diet.
Ddn^Dindji<>, xx. 1876. Etth-tawut-dinni.— La-
tham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 69, 1866 (trans,
'thickwood-men'). Slave Indians. — Hooper,
Tents of Tuski, 303. 1853. Slaves.— Petitot. Autour
du lac des Esclaves, 363, 1891 (English form).
Slavey.- Ross, MS. notes on Tinne, B. A. E. (so
called by fur-traders).
Etcheridieffottine (* people of the rap-
ids*). An Etohareottine division which
hunt along Liard r. and neighboring
regions to the border of the Etchaottine
country near old Ft Halkett, British
America. They have intermarried with
the Etchaottine and with the Tsattine in
the 8., and have absorbed their manners
and customs and adopted their dialectal
forms to such a degree that they have
been frequently confounded with the one
tribe or the other.
Bastard Beaver Indians.— Ross in Smithson. Rep.
1866, 308, 1872. Beaver.— Franklin, Joum. to Polar
Sea, 262, 1824. Erettchi-ottia^.— Dawson in
Rep. Geol. Surv. Can., 1887-88,2008, 1889 ('peo-
ple of the rapids': Kawchodinneh name). Et-
toh^ri-di^Oottin^.- Petitot, Autour du lac des
Esclaves. 363, 1891. Liards Indians.— Ross quoted
by Gibbs. MS., B. A. E. Liard Slaves.— Pope, MS.
. Sicanny vocab., B. A. E, 1865. Ndu-toho-ottinni.—
Dawson, op. cit. Soeth-tessesay-tinneh.- Ross
quoted by Gibbs. MS.. B. A. E. ('people of the
mountain river' ) . Slave Indians of Ft. Liard.— Ross.
MS. notes on Tinne, B. A. E. Strong bow.— >Mac-
kenzie in Mass. Hist. Coll. , 2d s. . n. 43, 1814. Tsilla-
ta-ut* tine.- Richardson <iuote<l by Petitot, Diet.
mn^Diiidji^. xx, 1876. TsUla-U-ut*-tinn«.— Rich-
ardson, Arct. Exped., ii, 6, 1851. Tsillawadoot.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 28, 1862. Tsillaw-
awdoot.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii,
19, 1836. Tsillaw-awdut-dinni.— Latham in Trans.
Philol. Soc. Lond., 69, 1856 (trans.: 'bush-wood-
men ' ) . Tsillawdawhoot-dinneh.— Franklin, Joum.
to Polar Sea. 1 1, 87, 1824. TsiUawdawhoot Tinneh.—
Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 145, 1882.
Etechesottine (*horn mountain peo-
ple'). A divinion of the Etchareottine
occupying the country between Great
Slave and La Martre lakes, Mackenzie
Ter., Can. Franklin erroneously con-
sidered them Thlingchadinneh.
Deerhoni mountaineers.— Franklin, Narr., n, 181,
1824. Bte-ches-ottine.— Petitot in Bull. Soc. de
Geog. Paris, chart, 1875. Oens de la montagne la
Come.- Petitot. Diet. D^nd-Dindii6, xx, 1876.
Horn Mountain Indians.— Franklin, Narr.. 260, i:24.
Etheneldeli (' caribou-eaters*). An
Athapascan tribe living e. of L. Caribou
and L. Athabasca, in the barren n'ounds
which extend to Hudson bay petitot,
Diet. Den^-Dindji^, xx, 1876) . Franklin
(Journ. Polar Seas, ii, 241, 1824) placed
them between Athabasca and Great
Slave lakes and Churchill r., whence
they resorted to Ft Chipewyan. Ross
( MS., B. A. E. ) makes them a part of the
ea.stern Tinne, their habitat being to the
\. and E. of the head of L. Athabasca,
extending to the end of Great Slave lake.
Rocky r. separates them from the Tatsa-
nottine. In the k. are the barren
grounds to w^hich they resort every year
to hunt the caribou, which supplies
practically all their needs. They were
a part of the migrating Chipewyan who
descended from the Rocky mts. and
advanced eastward from Peace r. to dis-
pute the Hudson bay region with the
Maskegon and Cree. One of their women
who was held in captivity by the Maske-
gon was astonished at the weapons, uten-
sils, and clothing of European manu^U!-
ture that she saw among her captors, who
told her that they made these articles
themselves. Finding at last that they
got them in barter for furs at Ft Prince
of Wales, she made her escape to the
English and told them of her own people
on Peace r. who held the choicest furs
cheap. The British traders, eager to ex-
tend their trade, sent her with a safe
conduct to her j)eople, whom she per-
suaded to migrate to the barren grounds
near Hudson bay, where caribou were
abundant. They settled around Rein-
deer, Bier, and North Indian lakes, and
were called the Northern Indians by the
English and the Mangeurs de Cariboux
by the Canadian French, while the neigh-
boring tribes called them by the same
name that they had given to the English,
Men of the Stone House. Heame saw
them in 1769 and Petitot found them
there still a centurv later, numbering
900. About 300 traced at Ft Fond di
BULL. 30]
ETHICS AND MORALS
441
Lac at the head of L. Athabasca. Then'
were 248 enumerated at Fond dii Lac in
1902, and 368 in 1904.
Cariboo eaten.— Ross in Smithson. Rep. 1866,
806, 1872. SMtern Folk*.— Richardson. A rot.
Exped., II, 5, 1851. Ethen-eldaU.— Petltot, Diet.
D6n6-Dindji6, xx, 1S76. ithen-elteU.— Petitot,
Aatour du lac des Esclaves, 363, 1891. Bttine-
timiey.— Ross quoted by Gibbs, MS. notes, B. A. E.
( • canbou people ' ) . Gen* du Fort-de-pierrc.— Pet-
itot, Autour du Grand lac des Esclaves, 363, 1891.
Xaagevin de cariboux.— Pctitot, Diet. D^n^-Din-
dji6 XX, 1876. Miohinipiopoets.— Dobbs, Hudson
Bay, 25, 1744 (•people of stone of the great lake':
Cree name), xlorthem Indians.— Ibid, 17. Ris-
ing Snn Folks.— Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii,
5, 1851. Rising Bun men.— Prichard, Phys. Hist.,
V, 876, 1847. la-essau-dinneh.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, II, 27, 1862 (trans, •eastmen'). Sah-se-
iah tinner.— Ross quoted by Gibbs, MS. notes,
B. A. E. (trans, 'eastern people'). 8a-i-sa-
»dtinni.— Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii, .5, 1851
(•people of the rising sun ' ) . Sawaisaw-tinney.—
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 634, 1878. Saw-
oesaw-dinneh.— Franklin quoted by Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, iii, 542, 1863. 8aw-ceMaw-dinnah.—
Schoolcraft, ibid., v, 172, 1855. Saw-eessaw-
dinneh.— Franklin, Joum. Polar Sea, ii, 241.
1824 (trans. 'Indians from the rising sun,' or
'eastern Indians).' Bawessaw tinney.— Keane in
Stanford, Compend., 464, 1878. See-issaw-dinni.—
Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 69, 1866
(trans, 'rising-sun-men'). The-Ottin^— Petitot,
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1865 (' stone people'). Th^ye
Ottine.— Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., 651. 1883.
The-ye-Ottine.- Petitot, Autour du lac des Es-
claves, 863, 1891 ('people of the stone fort').
Ethics and Morals. It Ih difficult for a
person knowing only one code of morals
or manners to appreciate the customs of
another who has been reared in the
knowledge of a different code; hence it
has been common for such a one to con-
clude that the other has no manners or no
morals. Every community has rules
adapted to its mode of life and surround-
ings, and such rules may be found more
rigorously observed and demanding great-
er self-denial among savages than among
civilized men. Notwithstanding the dif-
ferences which necessarily exist between
savage and civilized ethics, the two sys-
tems must evidently have much in com-
mon, for from the days of Columbus to
the present travelers have given testi-
mony of customs and manners of Indians,
who were still in the barbarous or the
savage staj^e, which displayed a regard for
tfie happiness and well-tleing of others.
It is often difficult to tell how much of
Indian manners and morals may have
been derived from white people; but
there are still some tribes which have held
aloof from the intrusive race and have
been little contaminated by it, and we
have the testimony of early writers to
guide us. The latter may be narrow in
their judgment of Indian conduct while
thev are accurate in describing it.
To discuss the rise of ethics among
primitive pneoples would lead too far
afield; but it is clear from all that is
known of the natives of this continent
that there existed among thetn standards
of right conduct and character. Both
from folklore and other sources we learn
of conscience among the Indians and of
their dread of its pangs. The Navaho
desiirnate conscience by a term which
signifies "that standing within me which
speaks to me." Abundant evidence
might l)e adduced to show that Indians
are often actuated by motives of pure
benevolence and do good merely from a
generous delight in the act.
Social ethics obtained among all the
tribes, and public opinion was the power
that compelled the most refractory to obe-
dience. A system of ethics having once
taken shape, the desire for the approval
of one*s associates and the wish to live at
peace furnished sufficient incentive for
compliance with the less onerous rules.
But these motives were not sufficient in
matters of graver import. Some tril^es
had executive bands, which had limited
power to punish offenders in certain cases,
such as violation of the orders of the tribal
council; but among other tribes there was
no established power to punish, nor were
there even the rudiments of a court of
justice. The pagan Indian is destitute
of the faith in heaven and hell, which
affords a strong incentive to moral life
among many of our own people; but lie
has faith in good and bad luck, and fre-
quently attaches different imaginary pun-
ishments to different offenses. Some
reganl various inanimate objects as the
agents of these punishments. ** May the
cold freeze you!" ''May the fire burn
you!" ''May the waters drown yon!"
are their imprecations.
When during the tribal hunt runners
were sent out to seek a herd of buffalo,
they had to give, on their return to camp,
their report in the presence of sacred em-
blems in attestation of the truth of their
statement. Scouts must report accurately
or meet disgrace. The successful warrior
must not claim more than his due; other-
wise he would not be permitted to receive
the badge of honors rightfully won. The
common punishment for lying in many
of the tribes was the burning of the liar's
tent and property by tribal sanction.
Not to keep a promise deliberately given
was equivalent to lying. There are many
instances of Indians keeping their word
even at the risk of death.
Honesty was inculcated in the young
and exacted in the tribe. In some com-
munities the rule was limited in its
operation to those within the tribe itself,
but it was not uncommon to find its
obligations extended to allies and to all
friendly tribes. As war removed all ethi-
cal barriers, pillage was legitimate. The
stealing of horses was a common object of
war parties, but only from a hostile tribe.
When a theft was committed the tribal
authorities demanded restitution; the loss
442
ETIP8IKYA ETIQUETTE
r B. A. E.
of the property taken, Hogging, and a de-
gree of social ostracism constituted the
punishment of the thief. Instances could
be multiplied to show the security of per-
sonal effects in a tribe. The Zuiii, for
example, on leaving home, close and seal
the door with clay, and it remains invio-
late. The Nez Percys and many other
tribes lean a pole across the door to indi-
cate the absence of the family, and no
one molests the dwelling.
Murder within the tribe was always
punished, either by exile, by inexorable
ostracism and the making of gifts to the
kindred of the slain, or by suffering the
murderer to become the lawful victim of
their vengeance.
Truth, honesty, and the safeguarding
of human life were everywhere recognized
as essential to the peace and prosperity
of a tribe, and social customs enforced
their observance; the community could
not otherwise keep together, much less
hold its own against enemies, for except
where tril)es were allies, or bound by
some friendly tie, they were mutual ene-
mies. An unaccredited stranger was al-
wavs presumably an enemy.
Adultery was punished. The manner
of punishment varied among the tribes,
the choice being frequently left to the
aggrieved party. Among the Apache it
was the common custom to disfigure an
erring woman by cutting off her nose.
The care of one's family was regarded
as a social duty and was generally ob-
served. This duty sometimes extended
to one's relations.
While the young were everywhere
taught to show respect to their elders, and
while years and experience were supposed
to bring wisdom, yet there were tribes
among which it was the custom to aban-
don or to put to death the very old.
Where this custom prevailed the condi-
tions of life were generally hard, and the
young and active found it diflBcult to
secure food for themselves and their
children. As the aged could not take
care of themselves, and were an encum-
brance to travel, thev acquiesced in their
fate as a measure of prudence and econ-
omy, dying in order that the younjj might
live and the tribe maintain its existence.
The cruel punishment of witchcraft
everywhere among the tribes had its
ethical side. The witch or wizard was
believed to bring sickness or death to
members of the community; hence for
their security the sorcerer must be put to
death. The custom was due to a lack of
knowledge of the causes of disease and to
mistaken ethit«. (a. c. p. w. m.)
Etiptikya (the name of a shrub). A
traditional village of the Squash people
of the Hopi; situated on the s. side of
Rio Colorado Chiquito, on the brink of a
canyon, not far from the point where the
river is crossed by the Santa F6 Pac. R. R. ,
Arizona. — Stephen and Mindeleff in 8th
Rep. B. A. E., 26, 1891.
Etiquette. The interior of most native
dwellings was without complete parti-
tions, yet each member of the family had
a distinct space, which was as inviolable
as a separate apartment inclosed by walls.
In this space the personal articles of the
occupant were stored in packs and bas-
kets, and here his bed was spread at night.
Children played together in their own
spaces and ran in and out of that belong-
ing to the mother, but they were forbid-
den to intrude elsewhere and were never
allowed to meddle with anyone's posses-
sions. When more than one family
occupied a dwelling, as the earth lodge,
the long bark house, or the laiige woocfen
structure of the N. W., every family had
its well-known limits, within which each
member had a place. A space was gen-
erally set ajmrt for guests, to which, on*
entering, a visitor maSe his way. Among
the Plains tribes this place was at the
back part of the dwelling, facing the en-
trance, and the visitor when entering a
lodge and going to this place must not
pass between his host and the fire.
Among many tribes the place of honor
was at the w. , facing the entrance. If he
was a familiar friend, greetings were at
once exchanged, but if he had come on a
formal mission, he entered in silence,
which was unbroken for some little time
after he was seated. On such occasions
conversation was opened by reference to
trivial matters, the serious purpose of the
visit not being mentioned until consider-
able time had elapsed. When a delega-
tion was received, only the older men of
the party or of the tribe spoke; the
younger members kept silent unless called
on to say something. Among all the tribes
haste was a mark of ill breeding, particu-
larly during official or ceremonial pro-
ceedings. No visitor could leave the
dwelling of his host without some parting
words to show that his visit was at an end.
Among many tribes etiquette required
that when speaking to a person a term of
relationship rather than the personal
name should be used. An elderly mail
or woman was usually addressed as grand-
father or grandmother, and a similar title
was also applied to a man of distinction.
Uncle or aunt might be used for persons
of about the same age as the speaker, but
to a younger man or woman the term of
address would sienify younger brother or
sister. A friendly visitor from outside
the tribe was addressed by a term mean-
ing "friend.?* A member of the tribe,
although of a different clan or gens, was
spoken to by a term of relationship;
among the Iroquois, for example, one of
BULL. 30]
ETISHOKA KTIWAW
443
the opposite phratry was greeted as **uiy
father's clansman/' or "my cousin."
When the bearer of an mvitation en-
tered a lodge, the person invited did not
respond if a relative or friend was pres-
ent, who would accept for him, saying,
"Your uncle (or aunt) has heard. *
Among the Hopi, in entering a kiva, ac-
cording to Dr Fewkes, one must ask,
**Am I welcome?" before his left foot
leaves the lowest rung of the ladder. He
must always approach the altar on the
right and leave it on the left. Among
the Zufii a person, whether friend or
stranger, on appearing at a doorway is in-
vited to enter and sit; if at meal time, and
often at other times, he is offered food.
Among a number of tribes etiquette
required that there should be no direct
speech between a woman and her son-in-
law, and in some instances a similar
restriction was placed on a woman ad-
dressing her father-in-law. In many
tribes also the names of the dead were not
likely to be mentioned, and with some
Indians, for a space of time, a word was
substituted for the name of a deceased
person, especially if the latter were promi-
nent. In some tribes men and women
used different forms of speech, and the
distinction was carefullv observed. A
conventional tone was observed by men
and women on formal occasions which
differed from that employed in everyday
life.
Etiquette between the yexes demanded
that the man should precede the woman
while walking or in entering a lodge '*to
make the way safe for her." Familiar
conversation could take place only be-
tween relatives; reserve characterized the
general behavior of men and women
toward each other.
Respect must be shown to elders in
both speech and behavior. No one could
be interrupted when speaking or forced
to speak when inclined to be silent, nor
could personal questions be asked or pri-
vate matters mentioned. During certain
ceremonies no one may speak above a
whisper. If it was necessary to pass be-
tween a person and the fire permission
must be asked, and if one brushed against
another, or trod upon his foot, an apology
must be made. At meal time, if one
could not eat all that had been put upon
his dish, he must excuse himself to show
that it was through no dislike of the food,
and when he hsS finished he must not
push away his dish but return it to the
woman, speaking a term of relationship,
as mother, aunt, wife, which was equiva-
lent to thanks. Among some tribes, if
a cooking vessel had been borrowed, it
must be returned with a portion of what
had been cooked in it to show the owner
the use that had been made of the utensil,
and also, in court€«y, to share the food.
There was an etiquette in standing and
sitting that was carefully observed by the
women. They stood with the feet straight
and close together, and if the hands were
free, the arms hung down, a little toward
the front, the fingers extended and the
palms lightly pressed against the dress.
Women sat with both feet under them,
turned to one side. Men usually sat
cross-legged.
The training of children in tribal eti-
quette and grammatical speech began at
an early age, and the strict observance
of etiquette and the correct use of lan-
guage indicated the rank and standing of
a man's family. Class distinctions were
everywhere more or less observed. On
the N. Pacific coast the difference be-
tween high caste and low caste was
strongly marked. Certain lines of con-
duct, such as being a too frequent guest,
were denounced as of low caste. So, too,
among the Haida, it was of low caste to
lean backward; one must sit on the for-
ward part of the seat in an alert attitude
to observe good form. Lolling in com-
pany was considered a mark of bad man-
ners auiong the tribes; and among the
Hopi one would not sit with legs extended
during a ceremony. Smoking, whether
social or ceremonial, had its etiquette;
much form was used in exchanging smok-
ing materials and in passing the pipe in
smoking and in returning it. In certain
societies, when a feast was served, par-
ticular parts of the animal belonged by
etiquette to the noted warriors present,
and these were presented by the server
with ceremonial speech and movements.
Among some tribes when a feast was given
a pinch of each kind of food was sacrificed
in the fire before eating. Ceremonial vis-
itors usually made their approach known
according to the local custom. Among
some of the Plains tribes the visitors
dispatched a runner bearing a little bunch
of tobacco to apprise their host of their
intended visit; should their coming prove
to be ill timed, the tobacco could be re-
turned with an acconipanyinjj gift, and
the visit would be postponed without any
hard feeling. There was much and varied
detail in the etiquette of family life, social
gatherings, and tl)e ceremonies of the
various tribes living n. of Mexico. See
Child life, Ethics and Morals, HospHality,
Salutation, (a. c. f. )
Etishoka (E^ith-sho^'ka, 'hill people').
An Hidatsa band. — Morgan, Anc. Soc.,
159, 1877.
Etiwaw (Catawba: *pine tree'). A ^^
small tribe, now extinct, forming part of
the Cusabo group and living about Ash-
ley and Cooper rs., Berkeley co., S. C,
extending e. to the present Monk's Cor-
ner, where their hunting grounds bor-
dered the Sewee country. The Santee
and Congaree were above them. They
444
ETLETTK — ETOWAH MOrND
[ B. A. fi.
were never prominent historically, and in
Jan., 1715, had a single village With 240
inhabitants (Rivers, Early Hist. 8. C, 94,
1874). Nothing is heard of them after
the Yamasi war in 1715, until 1751, when
they are mentioned as one of the small
tribes for which the South Carolina gov-
ernment made peace with the Iroquois.
From this time they seem to have be-
come lost to history. Their name is pre-
served in Eutaw Springs, and in Pine Tree,
another name for Camden, S. C. — Mooney,
Siouan Tribes of the P:ast, Bull. B. A. E.,
1894.
Aihley River Indiani.—Williamson, N. C, i, 201,
1812. Et«wau».— Glen (1751) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist.VI, 721, 1855. Etiwans.— Rivers, Hist. S.C., 37,
1856. lUawans.— Ibid.
Etleuk. A Squawmish village commu-
nity on the right bank of Squawmisht r.,
w. British Columbia.
Ela-*-who.— Brit. Adm. Chart, No. 1917. Itie'uq —
Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900.
Etnataek ( perhaps atanatalieg », * where
the fight, battle, or (•lub])ing took place.' —
VV. J.). Given
as the name of an
old fortification
said to ha ve stood
formerlynearthe
Kickapoo vil-
lage on S«nga-
mon r.. 111. It
is supposed to
have been built
by the Kickapoo
and Foxes, who
were defeated
there by the com-
bined forces of
the Ottawa, Pota-
watomi, and
Chippewa. — Long, Exped., i, 173, 1823.
Etoluk. An Alaskan Eskimo village in
the Kuskokwim district; pop. 25 in 1890.
Etohlugamiut—llth Census, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Stotulga. A former Seminole town,
10 m. E. of the old Mickasuky town, in
Florida.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th
Cong., Istsess., 26, 1826.
Etowah (properly FUiwH^ of unknown
meaning). A Cherokee settlement that
existed, until the removal of 1838, on
Etowah r., about the present Hightower
(a corruption of Ftdw&^)y in Forsyth co.,
Ga. Another settlement of the same
name may have been on Hightower cr.
of Hi wassee r. , in Towns co. , Ga. — Mooney
in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 522, 1900.
Hightower.— Doc. of 1799 quoted by Royce in 5th
Rep. B. A. E., 144, 1887. I'ttwr.— Mooney, op. eit.
(Cnerokee name.)
Etowah mound. A large artificial mound
on the N. bank of Etowah r., 3 m. s. e. of
Cartersville, Bartow co. , Ga. With 4 or 5
smaller mounds it is on a level bottom in a
bend of the stream, the immediate area,
covering about 56 acres, flanked on one
side by an artificial ditch which extends
ETOWAH MOUND, GEORGIA. ( HEIGHT, 61 FT; GREATEST LENGTH OF
BASE, 380 ft)
in a semicircle from a point on the river
above to the river below. The large
mound, which is a quadrilateral truncated
pyramid, 61 ft. hi^h, has a broad roadway
ascending the s. side to within 18 or 20 ft.
of the top, and was formerly provided
with steps made with crossbeams imbed-
defl in the earth, remains of which were
visible as late as 188r>. The diameters of
the base are respectively 880 and 330 ft,
and of the top 170 and 176 ft. The area
of the base is a little less than 3 acres, and
of the top about seven-tenths of an acre.
The solid contents of the mound, including
the roadway, are about 4,300,000 cu. ft.
On the E. side there is a narrow exten-
sion from the summit to the base, which
appears to have been a sort of refuse
slide. The village situated here was pos-
sibly the Guaxule of De Soto's chroni-
clers ( 1540), and the large mound the one
mentioned by Garcilasso de la Vega ( Flor-
ida, lib. Ill, cap. XX, 139, 1723), although
Mooney (19th Rep. B. A. E., 520, 1900)
is of the opin-
ion that (xuaxule
was probably
about at Nacoo-
che mound in
White CO.
The earliest de-
scription of the
Ktowah mound
in modem times
is by Cornelius
(Silliman's Am.
Jour. Sci. and
Art.,l8ts.,i,322,
1818). C. C.
Jones(Antiq. So.
Ind., 136, 1873)
and Whittlesey ( Smithson. Rep. ,624, 1881 )
also describe and illustrate it. A careful
sui 'ey of the larpe mound and group, and a
partial exploration of the smaller mounds,
were made by the Bureau of American Eth-
nology and an account thereof was pub-
lished (5th Rep., 95-105, 1887; 12th Rep.,
292, 1894). Cornelius states that **the
Cherokees in their late war with the
Creeks secured its [the large mound's]
summit by pickets and occupied it as a
place of protection for hundreds of their
women and children." The smallest of
the 3 lai^er mounds, the surrounding
space, and 1 or 2 small tumuli have been
explored. Parts ^of 3 or 4 stone images,
copper plates with stamped figures bear-
ing some resemblance to Mexican designs,
and other copper plates with pieces at-
tached by rivets have been found. Other
articles, such as pipes, earthenware, copper
celts, stone plates, etc., have also been un-
earthed. For further information see the
works above cited; also Squier and Davis,
Ancient Monuments, 1852; Thomas (1)
Burial Mounds of the Northern Section,
512
aUEVU GUNACHONKEN
[B. A. B^
in 1772, 86, and with its vbitas (Calabazas,'
Jamac, Sonoita, and Tumacacori), 337.
It was abandoned before 1784, Tumacacori
becoming head of the mission establish-
ment, (p. w. H.)
Oenevavi.— Kino, map (1701) in Bancroft. Ariz,
and N. Mex., 360, 1889 (misprint). Oumxaves.—
Writer (ca. 1713) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4tli s., v, 175,
1857. Gnebavi.— Kino, map (1701) in Stocklein,
Neue Welt-Bott, 74. 1726. Guevavi.— Mange (1699)
quoted by Bancroft, on. cit., 358. OueTayi-Oiusu-
dao.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 347, 1864. Ousudao.—
Rudo Ensayo (1763), 149,1863 (IMma name: 'great
water* ). Giwutaqui.— Mange quoted by Bancroft,
op. cit., 358. San Felipe de Jetut Ouevavi.— Villa-
Seflor quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i. 531,
1884. Ban Kiruel.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex.,
384, 1889 (Jesuit name). San Kiguel de Guevavi.—
Ibid., 362 (probably not so named until 1732).
Ban Rafael.— Ibid., 384 (Jesuit name). Santos
Angeles.— Ibid. (Franciscan name). S.Luis Chie-
bavi.— Venegas, Hist. Cal., i, map, 1759.
Ouevn. A Calusa village on the s. w.
coast of Florida, about 1570.
Gueva. — Fontaneda quoted in Doc. In6d., v, 539,
1866. Ouevu. —Fontaneda Mem. {ca. 1575), Smith
trans., 19, 1854.
Oueymnra. A trilxj speaking the Die-
gueilo dialect, formerly living al)out Santa
Catalina mission, n. Lower California.
(Duflot de Mofras, Voy., i, 217, 228, 1844).
Cf. Comeydy Guainua, Quilinur.
Oueyniotitesliesgne ('four tribes*). A
phratry of the Caughnawaga Iroquois.
Oueza. An Indian settlement in w.
, South Carolina, proba])ly in the present
Edgefield co., visited by Juan Pardo in
1565. — V^andera in Smith, Colec. Doc.
Fla., I, 17, 1857. ^
Onhlaniyi {(iulanl^iii). A Cherokee
and Natchez settlement formerly at the
junction of Hrasstowncr. with Hiwasseer.,
a short distance above Murphv, Cherokee
CO., N. C— Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
520, 1900.
Oahlga ((riViga). A legendary Haida
town on tlie n. shore of Skidegate inlet,
just a)>ove the present town of Skidegate,
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., where
there are now works for refining dog-fish
oil. No native ])retend8 to say what
family occupied this town. (.i. r. s. )
Gu'iga?— Swan ton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905. QuUh-
oah.— DeanH, Tales from Hidory, 67, 1899.
Onhlkainde ( Gfi^tka-Ynde, * plains peo-
ple * ) . A division of the Mescalero Apache
who claim as their original habitat the
Stake<:l plains region e. of Pecos r., in
New Mexico and Texas. See Gohlkahin.
(j. M.)
Ouelcigen-ne.— Escudero, Not. de Chihuahua, 212,
1834 (probably identical) . GuTka-i'nde.— Mooney,
field notes, B. A. E., 1897. Llanerot.— Orozco y
Berra, Geog., 59, 1864 (Cuelcajen-ne or).
Oiiia. An unidentified ruined jiueblo
on the Rio Grande in the vicinity of
Albuquerque, N. Mex. — Loew in Wheeler
Survey Rep., vii, 338, 1879.
Ouias. A Maricopa rancheria on the
Rio Gila, s. Ariz., in 1744.— Sedelmair
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex.,
366, 1889.
Gnika. A former Tanos pueblo on the
Rio Grande, in the vicinity of Albuquer-
que, N. Mex. — Loew in Wheeler Survey
Rep., VII, 338, 1879.
Oui-k*ati. See Sleeping Wolf.
Ouilitoy. A tribe of the Patwin divi-
sion of the Copehan family, formerly liv-
ing in Napa CO., Cal.; one of the seven
which made peace with Gov. Vallejo in
1836.
OuiUtoy.— Bancroft, Hist. Cal., iv, 71, 1886. OuU-
licaa.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 30, 1860. Oui-
lucos.— Bancroft, op. cit., 72. muoas. — ^Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, June 7, 1861.
Onima. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863.
Ouimen. A division of the Olamentke
branch of the Mo(]uelumnan family of
California, according to Choris and kot-
zebue, who state that the people spoke
the same language as the Tamal and
Sonomi.
Gxumen.— Choris, Voy. Pitt., 6, 1822. Giiymen.—
Chamisso in Kotzebue, Voy., in, 51, 1821.
Ouiomaer. A village said to be 40
leagues from St Helena, probably in or
near the present Barnwell co., S. C.; vis-
ited by Juan Pardo in 1566. — La Vandera
( 1569) in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., i, 16, 1857.
Onipago. See Lone Wolf.
Onismanes. An imaginary province,
located in the great plains, in the region
of Quivira. — Zarate-Salmeron {ca. 1629),
Relacion, in Land of Sunshine, 187, 1900.
OiiiBoles. A tribe of Coahuila or Texas,
probably Coahuiltecan, noted in a manu-
script quoted by Oroz(;o y Berra, Geog.,
306, 1864. It may be identical with the
Gueiquesales, or with the Quitoles of
Cabeza de V^aca.
Gnlhlgildjing ( (iAliglHdjiily probably
* nnissel-chewing town * ) . A Haida town
on the s. shore of AUifonl bay, Moresbv
id.. Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.
Another name for this place (or for one
near it) was Skama. It was occupied by
a low social division of the Djahui-
skwahladagai. — Swantr)n, Cont. Haida,
279, 1905.
Sqa'ma.— Ibid, (probably identical with above:
• woman's needle case') .
Oull Lake Band. A Chippewa band for-
merly on Gull lake, on the upper Missis-
sippi, in Cass co., Minn. They sold their
lands in 1863. (j. m.)
Gulf Lake reservation.—Washington treaty (1867)
in U. S. Ind. Treat., 273, 1873 (misprintj. Oinli
Lake band.— Washington treaty (1863), ibid., 215.
Onloismifltac. A fonner village, pre-
sumably Costanoan, connected with Do-
lores mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Tay-
lor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Oumisachic ( * arroyo * ) . A Tarahumare
rancheria about 20 m. n. e. of Noroga-
chic. Chihuahua, Mexico. — Lumholtz,
infn, 1894.
Ounachonken. Given by Krause as one
of the Tlingit social groups living at Yak-
utat, Alaska, but it is actually only* a
name for the people of Gonaho ( Uo^naxo) ,
q. v., a small town in that neighborhood.
BULL. 30]
GUNAKHE aYAZRXJ
513
Go'iiaxoqoan.—Swanton. field notes, B. A. E., 1904.
Oun&chokon.— Krause, Tlinkitlnd., 116, 1885.
Onnakhe. The principal village of the
Lakweip, situated on a branch of upper
Stikine r., Brit. Col.
Ounaqa'— Boas, 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.. 34,
1895.
Gunasquamekook ( ' long gravel bar join-
ing the island'). A former Passama-
S noddy village on the site of St Andrews,
Tew Brunswick, on Passamaquoddy bay.
The Indians were dispossessed by the
whites and were finally settled at Pleas-
ant Point, Me.— Vetromiie, Abnakis, 55,
1866.
Gunghet-haidagai (' Ninstints people ' ) .
A part of the Haida living about the s.
end of Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.
In the Masset dialect their name is An-
ghethade. The whites formerly called
them Ninstints jjeople, from the name by
which their chief town was generally
known. Their language differs some-
what from that spoken by the Haida far-
ther N. The remnant lives principally
atSkidegate. (j. r. s.)
Aagit Eiade.— Harrison in Proc. Royal Soc. Can.,
see. II, 125, 1895. Oape St. Jamet tribe.— Poole, Queen
Charlotte Ids., 195, 1872. QA'nxet Xi'-idAgai.—
Swanton, Cent. Haida, 272, 1905. Kunqit—Swan-
ton, field notes, 1900-1901. Kunxit.— Dawson.
Queen Charlotte Ids., 169, 1880 (proper name of
the village, Ninstance being the name of the
chief).
Gunghet-kegawai ( GA^nxet-qe^gawa-i,
'those born in the Ninstints country').
A subdivision of the Stasaos-kegawai, a
division of the Raven clan of the Haida,
probably descended from women who
had married in the Ninstints country.
It is to be distinguished from another and
more important division of the same name
at Ninstints which belonged to the Eagle
clan.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 270, 1905.
Gunghet-kegawai. A subdivision of the
Eagle clan of the Haida, belonging, as
the name implies, to one of the Ninstints
or Gunghet group. They were sometimes
called also Gunghet-gitinai. — Swanton,
Cont. Haida, 270, 1905.
Gupa. A former Agua Caliente village
on the headwaters of San Luis Rey r., s.
Cal., better known as Agua Caliente (q. v. ).
Its inhabitants were removed to Pala res.
in 1902.
A«uk OaUente.~Ind. Aff. Rep. 1902, 175, 1903. Aqua
Oaliente.— Jackson and Kinney, Rep. Miss. Ind.,
20, 1883. Gupa.— A. L. Kroeber, infhi, 1905 (own
name). Gupa • nga- git -om.— Ibid, (own name:
*Oupa-at-people')- aa-koo-pin.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, May 11, 1860. Hakupin.— A. L. Kroeber.
inf n, 1905 (Dieguefio name). Ko-pa.— Barrows,
£thno-Bot. Coahuillalnd., 34, 1900 ( Kawia name).
Gttsti ( Gustl^) . A traditional Cherokee
settlement on Tennessee r., near Kings-
ton, Roane co., Tenn. — Mooney in 19th
Rep. B. A. E., 521, 1900.
Gutgunest-nas-hadai {Gutgune^st ncuf:-
hacTa/i * owl-house people'). Given by
Boas (Fifth Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 26,
1889) as the name of a subdivision of the
Bull. 30—05 33
Yaku-lanas, a division of the Raven clan
of the Haida. It is really onlv a house
name belonging to that family. ( j. r. s. )
Ontheni ( (jAt-hVnt, ' salmon creek * ) . A
formerTlingit town situated n. of Dry bav,
Alaska, (j. r. s.)
Gutabar. A Pima rancheria visited by
Father Kino in 1694; definite locality un-
known.—Kino in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s.,
1, 251, 1856.
Onwisguwi, See Cooiveescoowee; Ross
(John).
Onyasuta. See Kiamtha.
Owaesknn ( Gwd-iskdriy * end of island ' ).
Formerly the northernmost Haida town
on Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It
was named from the cape near by and is
said to have been owned by the Stustas,
but it has long been abandoned. — Swan-
ton, Cont. Haida, 281, 1905.
Gwaidalgaegins ( Gwai-dnlga^-igins, 'is-
land that floats along ' ) . A former Haida
fort belonging to the Kadusgo-kegawai
of Kloo. It was near the mountain called
Kinggi, famous in native legend, on Queen
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. (j. r. s.)
Gwalgahi ( Gwufgd'h\ ' frog place ' ) .
A place on Hiwassee r., in the Cherokee
country, just above the junction of Peach-
tree cr., near Murphy, Cherokee co.,
N. C; about 1755 the' site of a village
of refugee Natchez, and later of a Baptist
mission.— Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
521, 1900.
Gwangweh (*one took out a locust.' —
Hewitt). Probably a former Seneca vil-
lage near Niagara r., N. Y.
Carrying Place VUlage.— Morgan, League Iroq.,
466, 1H51. Owa-u-gueh.— Ibid., man. Gwa'-u-
gweh.-Ibid., 466.
Gweghkongh. A village in 1657, proba-
bly belonging to the Unami Delawares
and apparently situated in n. New Jersey,
near Staten id., or in the adjacent part of
New York.
Gweghkongh.— Deed of 1657 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., XIV, 393, 1883. Hweghkongh.— Ibid.
Oweundus {Gu^a^hcIas), A subdi-
vision of low social rank of the Hlgahet-
gitinai, a family of the Eagle clan of the
Haida.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 274, 1905.
Gwinwah. A former Niska village on
Nass r., Brit. Col.
Ou'nwa.— Swanton. field notes, 1900-01 (name ob-
tained from the Haida). Gwinwah.— Doreey in
Am. Antiq., xix, 281, 1897.
Gyagyilakya (Gdg'gilak-a, *alwav8
wanting to kill people *) . A gens of the
Tsawatenok, a Kwakiutl tribe.— Boas in
Rep. Nat. Mus., 331, 1895.
Gyauihk ( %ull') . A gens of the Chip-
pewa (q. v.).
Gi-othk.— Tanner, Narr., 315, 1830. Gyaushk.—
Warren in Minn. HLst. Soc. Coll., v, 44, 1885.
Gyazru. The Parrot clan of the Hopi.
Gyaraobi.— Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 120, 1891.
Gya'-zro —Stephen, ibid., 39. Gyazru winwA.—
Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 584, 1900 ( w;iflw<l=
'clan*), iaro.— Voth, Hopi Proper Names, 81,
1905. Karro.— Doreey and Voth, Mishonfimovi
Ceremonies, 175, 1902.
514
GYEGYOTE GYU8IWA
[B. A. B.
Oyegyote (G'^e^'^o^te, * descendants of
Gyote*) . A subdivision of the Lalauitlela,
a gens of the Tlatlasi koala. — Boas in Rep.
Nat. Mus., 332, 1895.
Oyekolekoa {G'eg^o^lqEoa). A gens of
the Koskimo, a Kwakiutl tribe. — ^Boas in
Rep. Nat. Mus., 329, 1895.
Oyeksem ( * chiefs * ) . The principal gens
in the following Kwakiutl tribes and
septs: Koskimo, Nakomgyilisala, Tla-
tlasikoala, Nakoaktok, Guetela, Walas-
kwakiutl, Matilpe, Tenaktak, Hahuamis,
and Wiwekae.
Oe'xsEm.— Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 329-331, 1895.
Oye'qtEm.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
53-65, 1890.
Oyeksemsanatl (G'e^xsEms^aiiaL^ * high-
est chiefs*). A gens of the Koskimo, a
Kwakiutl tribe.— Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus.,
329, 1895.
Gyigyekemae ( G Vg'EqEmcie, ' chiefs * ) .
A gens of the Tsawatenok, a Kwakiutl
tribe.— Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 331, 1895.
Oyigyilkam ( * those who receive first ' ).
A gens, or ^rentes, having the same name,
in the fol lowing Kwakiutl tribes and
septs: Wikeno, Tlatlasikoala, Goasila,
Komoyue sept of the true Kwakiutl,
Koeksotenok, Tlauitsis, Nimkish, Awai-
tlala, Guauaenok, Hahuamis, Wiwekae
sept of the Lekwiltok.
yaiuB.— Boa« in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 6, 130, 1887
(name of ancestor).
Oyilaktsaokg {Gyilaxt^^okSj * people of
the canoe planks* ) . A Tsirashian mmily
living at Kitzilas, on the n. side of Skeena
r., Brit. Col. — Boas in Ztschr. f. Ethnol.,
232, 1888.
Oyisgahast {Gytng'^ahd^sty 'grass peo-
ple'). A Niska division of the Gyispa-
waduweda clan, living in the town of
Kitwinshilk, on Nass r., and a Kitksan
division living in the town of Kitzegukla,
on Skeena r. , Brit. Col. — Boas in 10th Rep.
N. W. Tribes Can., 49-50, 1895.
Gyigkabenak ( Gyi8k'ah*End^q) . A Niska
division of the I^kskiyek clan, living in
the town of Lakkulzap, on Nass r., Brit.
Col.— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 49, 1895.
Oyispawadaweda ( Gyispawaduw E^da,
*bear*). One of the four Tsimshian
clans.— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 49, 50, 1895.
OyitpotuwE'ila.— Boas in 5th Rep., ibid., 9, 1889.
Oyitgyi^enik {Gyiigyigye'niH). A
Niska division of the Lakyebo clan, now
in the town of Andeguale, on Nass r.,
Brit. Col.— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W.
Tribes Can., 49, 1895.
Ojitkadok {Gytiat'add't), A Niska
division of the Kanhada clan, now living
in the town of Lakkulzap, at the mouth
of Nass r., Brit. Col.— Boas in 10th Rep.
N. W. Tribes Can., 49, 1895.
Oyitktsaktl ( Gyitxtsd^Xtlj * people of the
lake shore * ) . A subdivision of the Kitzi-
las living in a village on the s. side of
Skeena r., Brit. Col. — Boas in Ztschr.
f. Ethnol., 232, 1888.
Oyitsaek {Gyits'd^eK), A Niska di-
vision of the Lakskiyek clan living in the
town of Kitwinshilk, on Nass r., Brit
Col— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 49, 1895.
Gyltwulnakyel {GyUvonlnaky^e^l). A
Niska division of the Lakyebo clan living
in the town of Kitlakdamix, on Nass r.,
Brit. Col.— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W.
Tribes Can., 49, 1895.
Oypsum. A mineral ( hydrous sulphide
of calcium) embracing three principal
varieties — gypsum, satin-spar, and sele-
nite — and occuring in both crystallized
and massive forms in connection with
stratified rocks. The light-colored com-
pact forms are known as alabaster, a
name sometimes* erroneously applied to
certain forms of travertine and stalagmite.
Having no considerable degree of hard-
ness, gypsum was not used for implements
by the aborigines, but the pleasing colors
and translucent effects maae the massive
forms valuable for ornaments and carv-
ing generally. Selenite, which has the
foliate structure, is readily separated into
thin sheets and until recent years was used
for window lights instead of glass by some
of the Pueblo tribes. The same people
crush the gypsum and use it as white-
wash on the walls of their houses, gen-
erally using a piece of sheep skin as a
brush. The Plains Indians, according to
Mooney, roast the blocks of gypsum and
use the resulting i)owder to clean and
whiten dressed skins and to whiten the
gummed tips of feathers in decorative
work. (w. H. H.)
Gynsiwa. Formerly one of the west-
em group of Jemez pueblos, J m. n. of
Jemez hot springs, on a slope descending
to the river from the e., in Sandoval co.,
New Mexico. Judging from the extent
of the ruins of the village, it at one time
contained probably 800 inhabitants. It
was the seat of the Spanish mission of
San Diego de Jemez, and had a chapel,
erected probably previous to 1617, at
which date it was the principal Jemez
village. The pueblo was abandoned in
1622 on account of the persistent aggres-
siveness of the Navaho, who had suc-
ceeded in scattering the Jemez tribe; but
in 1627 Fray Martin de Arvide gathered
the scattered members and resettled them
in Gyusi waand Amushungk wa ( Patocjua?)
pueblos. The latter was deserted prior to
1680, but Gyusiwa was occupied when the
pueblos revolted in that year. It was,
however, finally abandoned shortly after-
ward. The walls of the ruined church,
in some places 8 feet thick, are still stand-
ing. See Bandelier, cited below; Holmes
in Am. Anthrop., vii, no. 2, 1905.
(r. w. H.)
BULL. 30]
GYUUNGSH HABITATIONS
515
Onimgiont.— Orozco y Berra in Anales Minis. Fom.
Mex., 196, 1882 (evidently the same). Oin-se-
ua.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 204, 1892.
Onimxiqae.— Ibid., 205 (misprint of Zarate-Sal-
meron'8 Quiunzique). Ouin-se-ua.— Bandelier in
Compte-rendu Internat. Cong. Am., vii, 452, 1890.
Qioinzigua.— Zarate-Salmeron {ca. 1629) quoted by
Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 600, 1882. Quiol]izi8:ua.—
Vaigas quoted by Orozco y Berra in Anales Minis.
9n(L Mex., 196, 1882. Quinsta.— Bancroft, Ariz.
and N, Mex., 136, 1889 (misquoting Oliate) . Qui-
uma-qiMk— Zarate-Salmeron (ca. 1629) Rel., in
Land of SniMhlne, 183, Feb., 1900. Quiumzique.—
Zarate-Salmerctt ouoted by Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, in, m, 1890. auiunrique.— Ibid., iv,
205, 1892. Quiu«U.-.-0«a!te (1598) in Doc. In6d.,
XVI, 102, 1871 (probably th« same) . San Diefo.—
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, i, 23, 27, 1881.
Ban Diego de James.— Ind. Aflf . R«^ 1867, 213, 1868.
Baa Dieffo de Jemes.— Alencaster (ISOfr) quoted by
Meline, Two Thousand Miles, 212, 1867. Baa Diego
de Jemea.— Alencaster (1805) quoted by Pripce,
New Mex., 37, 1883. San Diego de loc £m«aL~
MS. of 1643 quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst
Papers, iv, 206, 1892. San Diego de lot Hemes.—
Vetancurt, Menolog. Fran., 275, 1871. Ban Diego
de los Temet.— Orozco y Berra in Anales Minis.
Fom. Mex., 2.5^,1882. S. Diego.— D'Anville. map
Am. Sept., 1746.
Oyaungsh. The Oak dan of the former
pueblo of Pecos, N. Mex.
OyuuBth.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351, 1896
(usually with the suffix -ash, * people ' ).
Haaialikyauae {HaaValik'auai, *the
shamans*). A gens of the Hahuamis,
a Kwakiutl tribe.— Boas in Rep. Nat.
Mus., 331, 1895.
Haailakyemae ( ' the shamans * ) . A gens
of the Kwakiutl proper, found among the
Komoyue and Matilpe subdivisions.
Baai'lak'Emae.- Boas in Kep. Nat. Mus., 830, 1895.
HaaHaksremae— Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
64. 1890. Eaialikya'uae.— Boas in Petermanns
Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 1887. Laqse.— Boas in 6th Rep. N.
W. Tribes Can., 54, 1890. Li'xse.— Boas in Rep.
Nat. Mus., 330, 1895 (sig. 'going through').
Haanatlenok ( * the archers * ) . A gens of
the Komoyue, a subdivision of the Kwa-
kiutl.
Ha'ana Lenox.— Boas in Nat. Mus. Rep., 330, 1895.
Ha'anatlenoq.— Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
54, 1890. Ha'na^^ino.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt.,
pt. 5, 131, 1887.
HaaiikaXniah(ifa?iX:/ia aiolaj * wild goose
there cries*). A former Choctaw town
situated on a long fiat-topped ridge be-
tween Petickfa cr. and Black water cr.,
Kemper co., Miss. It received its name
from a i)ond of water about 7 acres in ex-
tent which was much frequented by wild
fowl.— Romans, Florida, 310, 1775; Hal-
bert in Miss. Hist. Soc. Publ., \ i, 420, 1902.
Haaskouan. See Grangula.
Haatse (Queres: *earth*). A prehis-
toric pueblo of the Cochiti near the foot
of the Sierra San Miguel, above Cochiti
pueblo, N. Mex. It is claimed to have
been occupied after the abandonment of
the Potrero de las Vacas.— Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 157, 1892.
Haatse.- Hewett in Am. Anthrop., vi, 638, 1904.
Ha-a-tse.- Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv,
157, 1892. Bat-je Kama Tse-thu-ma.— Ibid., pi. 1,
fig. 13. R*-tya.— Lnmmis in Scribner'a Mag., 98,
1893. Ba-tye Ka-ma T«e-shuma.— Bandelier, op.
cit., 150 (=• the old houses at the rabbit,' in allu-
sion to the rabbit-like outline of the neighboring
crest). San Miguel.— Lummis, op. cit.
Habachaca. A clan of the Chulufichi
phratry of the ancient Timucua of Flor-
ida.—Pareja ( ca. 161 4 ) quoted by Gatschet
in Am.Philos. Soc. Proc.,xvii,492, 1878.
Habamouk. See Hobomok, Hohomoko.
Habitations. The habitations of the In-
dians of northern America may be classed
as community houses (using the term
ANCIENT CUIFF-DWELLING, MESA VERDE, COLORADO
"community" in the sense of comprising
more than one family) and single, or fam-
ilv, dwellings. "The house architecture
of the northern tribes is of little impor-
tance, in itself considered; but as an out-
come of their social condition and for
comparison with that of the southern vil-
lage Indians, is highly important" (Mor-
0WELUNG8, PUEBLO OF HANO, ARIZONA
gai;). The typical community houses,
as those of the Iroquois tribes, were 50 to
100 ft long by 16 to 18 ft wide, with frame
of poles and with sides and triangular
roof covered" with bark, usually of the
elm; the interior was divided into com-
partments and a smoke hole was left in
the roof. A Mahican house, similar in
516
HABITATIONS
[B. A.B.
form, 14 by 60 ft, had the sides and roof
made of rushes and chestnut bark, with
an opening along the top of the roof from
end to end. The Manaan circular com-
munity house was usually about 40 ft in
diameter; it was supported by two series
of posts and cross-beams, and the wide
roof and sloping sides were covereil
with willow or ])nish matting and earth.
The fireplace was in the center. Morgan
thinks that the oblong, round-roof houses
of the Virginia and North Carolina tribes,
seen and de8cril)ed by Capt. John Smith
and drawn by John White, were of the
community order. That some of them
housed a number of families is distinctly
stated. Morgan includes also in the com-
munity class the circular, dome-shaped
earth lodges of Sacramento valley and the
L-form, tent-shaped, thatched lodges of
the higher areas of California; but the
leading exami)les of community houses
are the large, sometimes massive, many-
celled clusters of stone or adobe in New
Mexico and Arizona known as pueblos
(q. v.). These dwellings vary in form,
some of those built in prehistoric times
being semicircular, others oblong, around
or inclosing a coui:t or plaza. These build-
ings were constructed usually in terrace
fonn, the lower having a one-story tier
of apartments, the next two stories, and
so on to the uppermost tier, which some-
times constituted a seventh story. The
masonry consisted usually of small, flat
stones laid in adobe mortar and chinked
with spalls; but sometimes large balls
of adobe were used as building stones, or
a double row of wattling was erected and
filled in with grout, solidly tamped. By
the latter method, known as pisS con-
struction, walls 5 to 7 ft thick were some-
times built (see Adobe, Casa Grande).
The outer walls of the lowest story were
pierced only by small openings, access to
the interior being gained by means of
ladders, which could be drawn up, if nec-
essary, and of a hatchway in the roof. It is
possible that some of the elaborate struc-
tures of Mexico were developed from
such hive-like buildings as those of the
typical pueblos, the cells increasing in size
toward the S., as suggested by Bandelier.
Chimneys appear to have been unknown
in North America until after contact of
the natives with Europeans, the hatch-
way in the roof serving the double pur-
pose of entrance and flue.
Other forms, some community and oth-
ers not, are the following: Among the
Eskimo, the karmak, or winter residence,
for which a pit of the required diameter is
dug 5 or 6 ft deep, with a f^me of wood
or whalebone constructed within 2 or 3
ft above the surface of the ground and
covered with a dome-shaped roof of poles
or whale ribs, turfed and earthed over.
Entrance is gained by an underground pas-
sageway. The temporary huntm^ lodge of
the Laorador Eskimo was sometimes con-
structed entirely of the ribe and vertebree
of the whale. Another form of Eskimo
dwellingis the hemispherical snow house,
or igluy built of blocks of snow laid in spiral
courses. The Kaniagmiut build i&rg^
permanent houses, called barabara by the
Kussians, which accommodates or 4 mmi-
E8KIMO HOUSE, EAST CAPE, SIBERIA. (nELSOn)
lies; these are constructed by digging a
scpiare pit 2 ft deep, the sides of which
are lined with planks that are carried to
the required height above the surface and
roofed with boards, poles, or whale ribe,
thickly covered with grass; in the roof is a
smoke hole, and on the eastern side adoor.
The Tlingit, Haida, and some other tribes
build substantial rectangular houses with
sides and ends formed of planks and with
the fronts elaborately carved and painted
with symbolic
figures. Di-
rectly in front
of the house
a totem pole
1 is placed, and
" near by a me-
morial pole
is erected.
snow house of central eskimo, a, front view; b, ground
plan; c, section, (boas)
These houses are sometimes 40 by 100 ft in
the NootkaandSalish region, and are occu-
pied by a number of families. Formerly
some of the Haida houses are said to
have been built on platforms supported
by posts; some of these seen by such early
navigators as Vancouver were 25 or 30 ft
aboveground, access being had by notched
lo^ serving as ladders. Among the N. W.
inumd tribes, as the Nez Percys, the dwell-
BULL. 30]
HABITATIONS
517
ing was a frame of poles covered with
rush matting or with buffalo or elk skins.
The houses of the California tribes, some
of which are above noted, were rectan-
gular or circular; of the latier, some were
conical, others dome-shaped. There was
HAIOA HOUSE WITH TOTEM POLE. (nIBLACK
also formerly in use in various parts of Cali-
fornia, and to some extent on the interior
plateaus, a semisubterranean earth-cov-
ered lodge known among the Maidu as Hm.
The most primitive abodes were those
of the Paiute and the Cocopa, consist-
ing simply of brush shelters for summer,
mouse of northern caufornia indians; klamath river,
(powers)
and for winter of a framework of poles
bent together at the top and covered
with brush, bark, and earth. Somewhat
similar structures are erected by tlie
Pueblos as farm shelters, and more elab-
orate houses of the same general tyj>e
are built by the Apache of Arizona. As
APACHE HOUSE OF BRUSH AND CANVAS
indicated by archeological researches, the
circular wigwam, wiflf sides of bark or
mats, built over a shallow excavation in
the soil, and with earth thrown against
the base, appears to have been the usual
form of dwelling in the Ohio valley and the
immediate valley of the Mississippi in pre-
historic and early historic times. Another
kind of dwelling, in use in Arkansas l)efore
the discovery, was a rectangular structure
with two rooms in front and one in the
rear; the walls were of upright posts thickly
plastered with clay on a sort of wattle.
HOUSE CONSTRUCTION, MOUND BUILDERS. PLASTERED
WATTLE WORK. (thOMAS)
With the exception of the Pueblo stmc-
tures, buildings of stone or adol)e were
unknown until recent times.
Thedwellingsofsomeof thetril)esof the
plains, as the 8ioux, Arapaho, Comanche,
and Kiowa, were generally portable skin
tents or tipis, but those of the Omaha,
'^'^l^
'^
-"^^^
..-x^-
VILLAGE OF TIPIS ; PLAINS INDIANS
Osago, and some others were more sub-
stantial (see Earth lodr/ey Grans htdge).
The dwellings of the Omaha, according to
Miss Fletcher, "are built by setting care-
fully selected and prepared i)Osts together
in a circle, and binding them firmly with
willows, then backing them with dried
NAVAHO HOOAN ( EARTH LODGE )
grass, and covering the entire structure
with closely packed sods. The roof is
made in the same manner, having an
additional support of an inner circle of
IK)8t8, with crotchets to hold the cross logs
which act as l)eams to the dome-shaj)^
roof. A <*ircular opening in the center
518
HABITATIONS
[b. a. b.
serves as a chimney and also to give light
to the interior of the dwelling; a sort of
council houses, for the chief's dwelling,
or for structures designed for other official
PALMETTO house; LOUISIANA INDIANS
sail is rigged and fastened outside of this
opening to guide the smoke and prevent
it from annoying
the occupants of
the lodge. The
entrance passage-
way, which usu-
ally faces east-
ward, is from 6
to 10 ft long and
is built in the
same manner as
the lodge/* An
important type
is the Wichita
grass hut, circu-
lar, dome-shaped
with conical top.
The frame is
built somewhat
in panels formed hy ribs and crossbars;
these are covered with grass tied on shin-
gle fashion. These grass lodges vary in di-
ameter from 40 to 50 ft. The early Florida
houses, according to Le Moyne's illustra-
tions published by De Bry, were either cir-
cular with dome-like roof, or oblong with
rounded roof like thoseof Secotan in North
Carolina, as sliown in John White's fig-
ures. The frame was of poles; the sides
and roof were covered with bark, or the
latter was sometimes thatched. TheChip-
pewa usually constructed a conical or hem-
ispherical framework of poles, covered
with bark. Formerly caves and rock
shelters were used in some sections as
abodes, and in the Pueblo region houses
were formerly constructed in natural
recesses or shelters in the cliffs, whence
the designation di^-dweUings, Similar
habitations are still in use to some extent
by the Tarahumare of Chihuahua, Mexico.
Cavate houses wit h several rooms werealso
hewn in the sides of soft volcanic cliffs; so
numerous are these in Verde valley, Ari-
zona, and the Jemez plateau, New Mex-
ico, that for miles the cliff face is honey-
combed with them. As a rule the women
were the builders of the houses where
wood was the structural material, but the
men assisted with the heavier work. In
the Southern states it was a common
custom to erect mounds as foundations for
WINNEBAGO BARK HOUSE; MINNESOTA. (oILFILLAn)
The erection of houses, especially those
of a permanent character, was usually
attended with great ceremony, particu-
larly when the time for dedication came.
The construction of the Navaho hogdn,
for example, was done in accordance with
fixed rules, as was the cutting and sewing
of the tipi among the Plains tribes, while
the new houses erected during the year
were usually dedicated with ceremony
and feasting. Although the better types
of houses were symmetrical and well pro-
portioned, their builders had not learned
the use of the
square or the
plumb-line; the
unit of measure
was also appar-
ently unknown,
and even in the
best types of
ancient Pueblo
masonry the
joints of the
stonework were
not ^'broken.**
The Indian
names for some
of their struc-
tures, as tipi,
wigwam, wicki-
up, hogan, and iglu, have come into use to
a greater or less extent by English-speak-
ing people. See Adohe^ Archeologtf, Archi-
tecture, Cliff-dwellingSf Earth lodgCj Forti-
fication and Defense^ Gtom lodge, Hogan,
Kira, Mounds, Puehlo.% 77;)/.
3s
wmm
gEDdTA, A TOWF< Of THE CAROLINA t 0*Mr. I HAfllOT J
BULL. 30]
HACANAC — HAGI
519
Consult Boas in Proc. Nat. Mus., xi,
1889; Hrdiicka in Am. Anthrop., v, 385,
1903; VI, 51, 1904; vii, 480, 1905; viii, 39,
1906; De Bry, BreVis Narratio, 1591 ; Har-
iot, Virginia, repr. 1874. Dixon in Bull.
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist, xvii, pt. 3, 1905;
Catlin, Manners and Customs N. A.
Inds., 1841; Goddard, Life and Culture
of the Hupa, 1903; Bandelier in various
Papers of the Archseol. Inst. America;
Morgan, Houses and House-life of the
American Aborigines, Cont. N. A. Eth-
nol., IV, 1881; Willoughbv in Am. An-
throp., viii, No. 1, 1906;' Holm, Descr.
New Sweden, 1834; Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, i-vi, 1851-57; Dellenbaugh, North
Americans of Yesterday, 1901; Matthews,
Navaho Legends, 1897; also, the various
reports of the B. A. E. : Boas, Murdoch,
Nelson, and Turner for the Eskimo; Dor-
sey for the Omaha; C. and V. Mindeleff
for the Navaho and Pueblos; Fewkes for
the Pueblos; Hoffman for the Menominee
and Chippewa, etc. (c. t.)
Hacanac. Mentioned by the Gentleman
of Elvas in 1557 (Hakluyt Soc. Publ., ix,
132, 1851 ) as a province of which Moscoso
was informed m 1542; apparently on the
N. E. Texan border. Unidentified.
Hachaath. An extinct Nootka tribe
which formerly lived on or n. of Barclay
sd., Vancouver id.
A-7-oluirU.^ewltt, Narr. , 120, 1849. Aytoh-arU.—
Ibid., 37. Haci'ath.— Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 32, 1890. Hatca'ath.— Ibid.. 31.
Hachepiriinu ( * young dogs * ) . A former
Ankara band under chief Chinanitu, The
Brother.
Ha-fie'-pi-ri-i-nu'.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol.
Mo. Val., 357, 1862. Young Does.— Culbertson in
Smithson. Rep. 1850, 143, 1851.
Hachimuk. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Hachos (prob. Span.: a fagot or bundle
of straw orgrasscovered with resin) . Men-
tioned as a wild tribe of New Mexico in
the 18th century.—Villa-Seilor, Theatro
Am.,pt. 2,412,1748.
Hackensack (Ackhinkas-hacky, Hhe
stream that unites with another in low
level ground. '—Heckewelder) . A former
division of the Unami Dela wares, occupy-
ing the territory designated by the In-
dians Ackkinkashacky, embracing the
valleys of Hackensack and Passaic rs. in
N. New Jersey. Their principal village
was Gamoenapa, usually known as Com-
munipaw. They took a prominent part
in the events of 1643-44, but subsequently
appear as mediators through their chief
Ontany (Oratamv, Oratam, etc.), who en-
joyed, to a ripe old age, the confidence of
bis people and the surrounding chieftain-
cies, as well as that of the whites. The
lands of the tribe embraced Jersey City,
Hoboken, a part of Staten island, Wee-
hawken, Newark, Passaic, etc. Their
number waa estimated at 1,000 in 1643, of
which 300 were warriors, probably an ex-
aggeration (Ruttenber). (j. M. C.T.)
Aohkingkesacky.— Doc. of 1663 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., XIII, 276, 1881. Achkinkehacky.— Treaty of
1645, ibid., 18. Achkinket hacky Doc. of 1643,
ibid., 14. Ackinckesaky.— Doc. of 1663, ibid., 280.
Haoansacke.— Doc. of 1662, ibid., xiv, 512, 1883.
Haocinsack.— Doc. ca. 1643, ibid., i, 198, 1856.
Hachinghsack.— Deed of 1657. ibid, xiv, 394, 1883.
Hachkinkethakv.— Doc. of 1655, ibid., xiii, 55.1881.
Hackensack.— Treaty of 1673, ibid., 476. Eack-
inckesaky.— Stuyvesant (1(>63), ibid., 323. Haok-
inghesaky.— Doc. of 1662, ibid., 218. Hack-
inghsaok.— Deed of 1657, ibid., xiv, 393, 1883.
Haokinghsackin.— Doc. of 1660, ibid., 182. Haok-
inghsakli.— Doc. of 1663, ibid., xiii, 305, 1881.
Haokingkesacky.— Doc. of 1663, ibid., 294. Haok-
ingkescaky.— Doc. of 1663, ibid., 289. Hack-
inMack.— Repdrt of 1644. ibid., 1,150,1856. Haok-
inkasacky.— Treaty of 1660, ibid., xiii. 148, 1881.
Hackinkciaokinghs.— Doc. of 1660, ibid., 183.
Hackinkesacky.— Doc. of 1663, ibid., 294. Hack-
inkeaaky.— Ibid. Hackinaack.— Doc. ca. 1643,
ibid., 1, 199, 1856. Hackinsagh.— Doc. of 1673, ibid.,
II, 606, 1858. Hackquinsack.— Doc. of 16.^)0, ibid.,
I, 411, 1856. Hacquinsack.— Ibid.
Haddo. See Huddoh.
Hadley Indians. A small body or band,
possibly Nipinuc, which, at tlie time of
King Philip's war in 1675, occupied a
small fort about a mile above Hatfield,
on the w. side of Connecticut r., in
Hampshire co., Mass. Tliey abandoned
their village to join Philip's forces and
thereafter ceased to be known under the
name above given. (j. m.)
Hadsapoke's Band (from the name of its
chief, "Horse-stopper"). A Paviotso
band formerly at Gold canyon, Carson
r., w. Nev., said to number 110 in 1859.
Had-sa-poke*s band.— Dodge in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859,
Hadtuitazhi ('touches no green com
husks ' ) . A former subgens of the Hanga
gens of the Omaha.
Ha-^u-it«aji.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. K., 227.
1897.
Haena. A former Haida town on the
E. end of Maude id., Skidegate inlet,
Queen Charlotte ids. , Brit. Col. It is said
to have been occupied in very early times
by the Djahui-skwahladagai, and. in re-
cent years it was reoccupied by the west
coast Haida, who desired to be nearer the
traders, but after a comparatively short
occupancy the people moved to Skidegate
about 1880. There are said to have l)een
13 houses, which would indicate a popu-
lation of about 150. ( J. R. 8. )
Khina Eaade.— Harrison in Proc. and Tran.s. Roy.
Soc. Can., sec. ii, 125, 1895 (Khlna = Haena).
New Gold Harbour Village.— Dawson, Queen Char-
lotte Ids., 168b, 1880. Xa'ina.— Swan ton, Cont.
Haida, 279, 1905.
Haeser. A former tribe near the lower
Rio Grande, living with the Gueiquesales,
ManosPrietas, Bocores, Pinanaca, Escaba,
Cacastes, Cocobipta, Cocomaque, Codame,
Contotores, Colorados, Babiamares, and
Taimamares. Probablv Coahuiltecan.
Siaexer.— Fernando del Bosque (1675) in Nat.
Geog. Mag., XIV, 340, 1903. Xae»er.— Ibid., 344.
Ha^i (Xd^gU said to mean ^striped*).
A Haida town on or near the largest of the
520
HAGI-LANAS HAIDA
[b. a. b.
Bolkus ids., Queen Charlotte ids., Brit.
Col. It derived its name from a reef
which, in local mythology, was the first
land to appear above .the waters of the
flood, bearing the ancestress of all the
Raven people upon it. The town was oc-
cupied by a Ninstints division of the same
name. — Swanton, Cont. Ilaida, 277, 1905.
Hagi-lanas {Xdgi'lafnas^ 'people of
striped (?) town ' ). A subdivision of the
Haida, belonging to the Raven clan and
occupying the town of Hagi, on Hagi id..
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. From
the circumstance attending their supposed
origin (see Hagi) the family claimed to
be the oldest on the islands, but it is now
represented by only two or three indi-
viduals. There were two subdivisions,
the Huldanggats and the Keda-lanas. —
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 268, 1905.
Haglli. A Yuman tribe or division
which in 1604-05 occupied 5 rancherias
on the lower Rio Colorado, between the
Cohuanas (Yuma) and the Halligua-
mayas, of which latter (identifiable with
the Quigyuma) they apparently formed
a part.
HaoUi.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 110,
1890. Haglli.— Zarate-Salmeron {ca. 1629), Rel., in
Land of Sunshine, 106, Jan. 1900. Tlaglii.— Ban-
croft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 166, 1889.
Hagonchenda. A former Iroquois town,
probably belonging to the people of
Tequenondahi, and situated in 1535 not
far from the junction of Jacques Car tier
r. with the St Lawrence. The chief of
this town gave a small girl to Cartier on
his second voyage, and placed Cartier on
his guard against the machinations of the
chiefs of the peoples dwelling around
Stadacona and elsewhere on the St Law-
rence. For this reason Cartier, in his
third voyage, in 1540, gave this chief 2
small boys to learn the language, and also
a **cloak'e of Paris red, which cloake was
set with yealow and white buttons of
Tinne, and small belles." See Cartier,
Bref R^cit, 67, 1863. (j. n. b. h.)
Hagwilget (Tsimshian: *well dressed').
The chief village of the Hwotsotenne,
on Bulk ley r., 3 m. s. e. of Hazelton, Brit.
Col.; pop. 500 in 1870, 161 in 1904.
Aohwlget— Horetzky, Canada on Pac, 103, 1874.
Ahwilnite.— Dawson in Rep. Geol. Surv. Can.,
1879-80. 20B, 1881. Haculget.— Scott in Ind. AfT.
Rep. 1869. 563, 1870. H*ridl«et.— Can. Ind. Aff.
1904, pt. 2, 73, 190). Ha-gwn'-k«t.— Henshaw, MS.
note, B. A. E., 1887. Tsohah.— Morice in Trans.
Roy. Soc. Can., map, 1892. Tsitsk.— Can. Ind.
Afif., 212, 1902 (Kitksun form).
Hahamatses ('old mats'). A subdivi-
sion or sept of the Lekwiltok, a Kwakiutl
tribe. They received their name because
they were slaves of the Wiwekae sept.
Recently they have taken the name of
Walitsum, *the great ones.' Pop. 53 in
1901, 43 in 1904.
ChaoluuniUes.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5,
131, 1887. H'ah'amatset.— Boas in Bull. Am.Geqg.
Soc., 230. 1387. Xahk-ah-mah-tsM.— Can. Ind. Aff,
119,1880. KakamatsM.~Brit. Col. map, 1872. Oi'-
qanuLtMt.— Boas, 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 55,
1890. Wi'-lit-sum.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc
Can.,y,8ec.ii,65,1887. • Wau-lit-tah-mosk.— Sproat
in Can. Ind. Aff., 149, 1879. Wawlit-sum.— Can.
Ind. Aff., 189, 1884. Xi'xamatsEt. — Boas in Rep.
Nat. Mus., 331, 1895.
Hahamogna. A former Gabrielefio
rancheria in Los Angeles co., Cal., at a
locality later called &ncho Verdugos. —
Ried (1852) quoted by Taylor in Cal,
Farmer, June 8, 1860.
Hahas. A former Chumashan village
at the principal port of Santa Cruz id.,
Cal., probably at Prisoners' harbor. —
Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 1884.
Hahatonwanna (^ small village at the
falls'). A former Sioux village or divi-
sion at the Falls of St Anthony, Minn. ;
mentioned doubtfully by Dorsey (1880).
Given by Lewis and Clark in 1804 as a
subdivision of the Yankton of the north,
of which Mahpeondotak was chief. The
name may refer to an incorporated Chip-
pewa band.
Hahatouadeba.— Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776.
Hah-har-tonea. — Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, VI,
99, 1905. Har-har-toncs.— Lewis and Clark, Dis-
cov., 34, 1806. Horheton.— De I'lsle (1701), map in
Neill, Hist. Minn., 164, 1858. Horhetton.— Jefferys,
Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Horheton.~La Tour,
Am. Sept., map, 1779 (misprint).
Hahekolatl (Ha/MqolnLj descendants of
Hakolatl ' ) . A subdivision of the Lalau.
itlela, a gens of the Tlatlasikoala (q. v.),
a Kwakiutl tribe. — Boas in Rep. Nat.
Mus., 332, 1895.
Hahaamis. A Kwakiutl tribe living on
Wakeman sd., Brit. Col. ; pop. 63 in 1901,
the last time they were officially reported.
They are divided into three gentes: Gyek-
sem, Gyigyilkam, and Haaialikyauae. —
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 331, 1895.
Ah-knaw-ah-mith.— Can. Ind. Aff., 189, 1884. Ah-
know-ah-mish.— Ibid., 314, 1892. Ah-wha-mish.—
Ibid., 364, 1897. A-kwa'-amish.— Dawson in Trans.
Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, seen, 65. A-qua-mith.—
Kane, Wand. in N. Am., app., 1859. Ohaohua'mis. —
Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 130, 1887. Eoqua-
mish.— Brit. Col. map, 1872. H'ah'uamis.— Boas in
Bull. Am. Geog. Soc, 228, 1887. Haqua'mis.— Boas,
6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 55. 1890. Haxua'mis.—
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 831, 1895.
Haida (AVtda, * people*). The native
and popular name for the Indians of the
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., and the
s. end of Prince of Wales id., Alaska, com-
prising the Skittagetan family (q.v. ). By
the natives themselves the term may be
applied generally to any human being or
specifically to one speaking the Haida
language. Some authors have improperly
restricted the application of the tenn to
the Queen Charlotte islanders, calling the
Alaskan Haida, Kaigani (q. v. ). Several
English variants of this word owe their
origin to the fact that a suffix usually ac-
companies it in the native language, mak-
ing it Ha^de in one dialect and Haida^^i
in the other.
On the ground of physical characteris-
tics the Haida, Tlingit, and Tsimshian
BULL. 30]
HAIDA
521
Cples ' should be grouped together,
iguage and social organization indicate
still closer affinities between the Haida
and Tlingit.
According to their own traditions the
oldest Haida towns stood on the e. shore,
at Naikun and on the broken coast of
HAIDA MAN. (aM. MUS. NAT. HIST. )
Moresby id. Later a portion of the people
moved to the w. coast, and between 150
and 200 years ago a still larger section, the
Kaigani, drove the Tlingit from part of
Prince of Wales id. and settled there.
Although it is not impossible that the
Queen Charlotte ids. were visited by Span-
iards during the 17th century, the first
certain account of their discovery is that
by Ensign Juan Perez, in the corvette
l^ntiagOf in 1 774. He named the N. point
of the islands Cabo de Santa Margarita.
Bodega and Maiirelie visited them the
year after. In 1786 Ij& Perouse coasted
the shores of the islands, and the follow-
ing year Capt. Dixon spent more than a
month around them, and the islands are
named from his vessel, the Queen Char-
lotte. After that time scores of vessels
from England and New England resorted
to the foast, principally to trade for furs,
in which business the earlier voya^rs
reaped golden harvests. The most im-
portant expeditions, as those of which
there is some record, were bv Capt. Doug-
las, Capt. Jos. Ingraham of Boston, Capt.
Etienne Marchand in the French ship
Solide, and Capt. Geo. Vancouver (Daw-
son, Queen Charlotte Ids., 1880). •
The advent of whites was, as usual, dis-
astrous to the natives. They w^ere soon
stripped of their valuable furs, and,
through smallpox and general immorality.
they have been reduced in the last 60
years to one- tenth of their former strength.
A station of the Hudson's Bay Company
was long established at Ma^set, but is now
no longer remunerative. At Skidegate
there are works for the extraction of dog-
fish oil, which furnish employment to the
people during much of the year; but in
summer all tne Indians from this place
and Masset go to the mainland to work in
salmon canneries. The Masset people
also make many canoes of immense cedars
to sell to other coast tribes. The Kaigani
still occupv 3 towns, but the population of
2 of them, ka^aan and Klinkwan, is incon-
siderable. Neighboring salmon canneries
give them work all summer.
Mission stations are maintained by the
Methodists at Skidegate, by the Church
of England at Masset, and by the Presby-
terians at Howkan, Alaska. Nearly all
of the people are nominallv Christians.
The Haiaa, Tlingit, and Tsimshian seem
to show greater adaptability to civilization
and to display less religious conservatism
than many of the tri]>es farther s. They
are generally regarded as superior to them
by the white settlers, and they certainly
showed themselves such in war and in the
arts. Ofall peoples of the N. W. coast the
Haida were the best carvers, painters, and
canoe and house builders, and they still
earn considerable money by selling carved
objects of wood and slate to traders and
HAIDA WOMAN. (aM. MUS. NAT. HIST.)
tourists. Standing in the tribe depended
more on the possession of propertv than
on ability in war, so that considerable in-
terchange of goods took place and the peo-
ple became sharp traders. The morals of
the people were, however, very loose.
522
HAIDA
[b«a.b.
Canoes were to the people of this coast
what the horse became to the Plains
Indians. They were hollowed out of sin-
gle logs of cedar, and were sometimes
very large. Houses were built of huge
cedar beams and planks which were
worked out with adzes and wedges made
anciently of stone, and put together at
^reat feasts called by the whites by the
largon word **potlatch'* (q. v.). Each
house ordinarily had a single carved pole
in the middle of the gable end presented
to the beach (see Architecture). Often the
end posts in front were also carved and
the whole house front painted. The dead
were placed in mortuary houses, in boxes
on carved poles, or sometimes in caves.
Shamans were placed after death in small
houses built on prominent points along
shore. Among tne beliefs of the Haida
reincarnation held a prominent place.
An estimate of the Haida population
made, according to Dawson, by John
Work, between 1836 and 1841, gives a
total of 8, 328, embracing 1 , 735 Kaigani and
6,593 Queen Charlotte islanders. Dawson
estimated the number of people on the
Queen Charlotte id«. in 1880 as between
1,700 and 2,000. An estimate made for
the Canadian Department of Indian Af-
fairs in 1888 (Ann. Rep., 317) gives 2,500,
but the figures were evidently exagger-
ated, for when a census of Masset, Skide-
gate, and Gold Harbor was taken the year
after (Ann. Rep., 272) it gave only 637.
This, however, left out of consideration
the people of New Kloo. In 1894 (Ann.
Rep., 280), when these were first added to
the list, the entire Haida population was
found to be 639. The figures for the year
following were 593, but from that time
showed an increase and stood at 734 in
1902. In 1904, however, they had suffered
a sharp decline to 587. Petroff in 1880-81
reported 788 Kaigani, but this figure may
be somewhat too high, since Dall about
the same time estimated their number at
300. According to the census of 1890
there were 391, and they are now (1905)
estimated at 30O. The entire Haida pop-
ulation would thus seem to be about 900.
The Alaskan Haida are called Kaigani.
By the Queen Charlotte islanders they
are designated Kets-hade {Q!et8 xa/de),
which probably means * people of the
strait.' The people of Masset inlet and
the N. end of Queen Charlotte ids. gener-
ally are called by their southern kinsmen
Gao-haidagai (Gao xa^-ida-ga-i), 'inlet
people,* and those living around the
southern point of the group are called
Gunghet-haidagai {Oa^ fixet-xd^-idAga-i),
from the name of one of the most south-
erly capes in their territory. All of these
latter finally settled in the town after-
ward known to whites as Ninstints, and
hence came to be called Ninstints people.
The entire stock is divided into two
** sides" or clans — Raven (Hoy a) and
Eaffle (Got) — each of which is subdivided
and resubdivided into numerous smaller
local groups, as given below. (The braces
indicate that the families grouped there-
under were related. Theoretically each
clan was descended from one woman. )
Ravex
Aokeawai.
a. Hlingwainaas-hadai.
6. Taolnaas-hadai.
Daiyuahl-lanas (or) Kasta-kegawai.
Djahui-sk wahladagai .
Hlgaiu-lanas.
a. Hlgagilda-kegawai. '
Skwahladas.
a. Nasto-kegawai.
Hagi-lanas.
a. Huldanggats.
6. Keda-lanas.
Hlgahetgu-lanas.
a. Kilstlaidjat-taking-galung.
6. Sels.
Stasaos-kega wai .
a. Gunghet-kegawai.
Kad usgo- kega wai .
Yaku-lanas.
a. Aovaku-lnagai.
6. (Alaskan branch. )
1. Kaadnaas-hadai.
2. Yehlnaas-hadai.
3. Skistlainai-hadai.
4. Nakeduts-hadai.
Naikun-kegawai.
a. Huados.
Kuna-lanas.
a. Hlielungkun-lnagai.
6. Saguikun-lnagai.
c. Teeskun-lnagai.
d. Yagunkun-lnagai.
Stlenga-lanas.
a, Aostlan-lnagai.
6. Dostlan-lnagai.
1. Kaiihl-lanas.
c. Teesstlan-lnagai.
d. Yagunstlan-lnagai.
Kagials-kegawai.
a. Kils-haidagai.
6. Kogahl-lanas.
Tadji-lanas. There were two great di-
visions of this name, the southern
one with a subdivision called—
a. Kaidju-kegawai.
Kas-lanas.
{Kianusili.
Sa^ngusili.
Skidaokao.
Koetas.
a.r Hlkaonedis.
6. Huadjinaas-hadai.
c. Nakalas-hadai.
d. Neden-hadai.
e. Chats-hadai.
BULL. 30]
HAIGLAB
523
Djahui-gitinai.
Gitins of Skidegate.
a. Nayuuns-haidagai.
6. Nasa^-haidagai.
c. Lgalai^uahl-lanas.
d. Gitingidjats.
Hlgahet-gitinai.
a. Djahuihl^het-kegawai.
b. Yaku-gitmai.
c. HIgahet-kegawai.
d. Kanlgui-hlgahet-gitinai.
e. Gweundus.
Sagui-gitunai.
a, Kialdagwnns.
Djiguaahl-lanaei.
a, Tlduldjitamae.
Kaiahl-lanas.
a. Stasaos-lanas.
Kona-kegawai.
((. Dagan^asels.
b. Sus-haidagai.
Stawas-haidagai .
a. Heda-naidagai.
b. Kahligua-haidagai.
c. Sa-haidagai.
Do-gitunai.
Gituiis (of Masset).
a. Mamun-gitunai.
1. Ao-gitunai.
b. Undlskadjins-gitunai.
c. Tees-gitunai.
d. Sadjugahl-lana^s.
Dj US-hade.
Sagua-lana».
a. Dotuskustl.
Chets-gitunai.
Tohlka-gitunai.
VVidja-gitunai.
' Gunghet-kegawai.
Saki-kegawai.
Skidai-lanas.
Stagi-lanas.
Lana-chaadup.
Salendas.
a. HIimulnaas-hadai.
b. Nahawan-hadai.
Stustas.
a. Kawas.
b. Kangguatl-lanas.
c. Hliemng-keawai.
d. Hlielung-stustai.
e. Nekun-stustai.
/. Chawagis-stustae.
g, Yadufi.
1. Ildjunai-hadai.
2. Naalgus-hadai.
3. Nakons-hadai.
4. Otkialnaas-hadai.
5. Otnaas-hadai.
Chaahl-lanas.
a. Lanagukunhlin-hadai.
6. Hotagastlas-hadai.
c. Skahene-hadai.
d, Stulnaas-hadai.
Taahl-lanas (clan uncertain).
The principal towns known to have
been occupied by large bodies of people
in comparatively recent times, although
not always contemporaneously, are the fol-
lowing, the Kaigani towns being marked
with an asterisk: Chaahl(onMore8byid.),
Cumshewa, Dadens, Gahlinskun, Haena,
Hlielung,Howkan,*Kai8un,Kasaan,*Ka-
yung, Kiusta, Klinkwan,* Kloo, Kung,
Kweundlai^,* Masset, Naikun, Ninstints,
Skedans, Skidegate, Sukkwan,* Tigun,
Yaku, and Yan. Of these only Howkan,
Kasaan, Kayung, Klinkwan, >Ias8et, and
Skidegate are now inhabited.
In Edition there was formerly an im-
mense number of small towns hardly dis-
tinguishable from camps, places that had
been occupied as towns at some former
time, and mythic or si^mimvthic towns.
Tlie following is a partial fist of these:
Aiodjus, Atana, Atanus, Chaahl (on North
id. ),Chatchini, Chets, Chuga, Chukeu,
Dadjingits, Dahua, Daiyu, Djigogiga,
Djigua, Djihuagits, Edjao, Gachi^ndae,
Gaao (2 towns), Gaedi, Gaesigusket,
Gaiagunkun, Gaodjaot«, (Jasins, Gat-
gainans, Gitinkalana, Ciuhlga, Gulhlgil-
djiftg, Gwaeskun, Hagi, Heudao, Hlagi,
Hlakeguns, Hlgadun, Hlgaedlin, Hlga-
het, Higai, Hlgaiha, Hlgaiu, Hlgihla-ala,
Hlgadun, Hlkia, Hluln, Hotao, Hotdji-
hoas, Hoya-gundla, Huados, Kadadjans,
Kadusgo, Kae, Kaidju, Kaidjudal, Kai-
gani,* Kasta, Katana, Kesa, Ket, Kil, Koa-
gaogit, Koga, Kogalskun, Kostunhana,
Kundji (2 towns), Kungga, Kungielung,
Kunhalas, Kunkia, Kuulana, Lanada-
gunga, Lanagahlkehoda, Lanahawa (2
towns), Lanahilduns, Lanas-lnagai (3
towns), Lanaungsuls, Nagus, Sahldung-
kun, Sakaedigialas, Sgilgi, Sindaskun,
Sindatahla, Singa, Skae, Skaito, Skaos,
Skena, Skudus, Stlindagwai, Stunhlai,
Sulustins, Ta, Te, Tlgunglmng, Tlhingus,
Tohlka, Widja, Yagun,Yaogus, Yastlmg,
Yatza, Youahnoe(?) (j. r. s. )
Eaida.— Dawson, Queen Charlotte Ids., 103b, 1880.
Haidah.— Sc'ouler in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc, xi,
184, 221. 1841. Hai-dai.— Kane. Wand, in N. Am.,
app., 1859 (after Work, 1836-11). Hydahi.— Tay-
lorin Cal. Fanner, July 19,1862. ayder. — Simmons
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 190, 1860. Tlaidaa.— Morgan,
Anc. So<'., 176, 1877.
Haiglar. The principal chief of the
Catawba about the middle of the 18th
century, commonly known to the Eng-
lish colonists as King Haiglar. It is prob-
able that he became vhiei in 1748, as it is
stated in Gov. Glenn's letter of May 21,
1751, to the Albany Conference (N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist, VI, 722, 1855), that the
Catawba king had died a year and a half
before that time. This must refer to
Haiglar' s predecessor. Haiglar, though
disposed to peace, offered his services to
the governor of South Carolina when
war with the Cherokee broke out in 1759.
He joined Col. Grant's forces and took
an active part in the severe battle of
524
HAIM — HAIR DRESSING
[b. a. b.
Etchoe (Itseyi), assisting materially in
gaining the victory for the whites. He
IS described as a man of sterling character,
just in his dealings and true to his word,
acting the part of a father to his people,
by whom he was greatly beloved. See-
ing that strong drink was injuring them,
he sent a written petition to Chief Jus-
tice Henley, May 26, 1756, requesting
him to put a stop to the sale uf spirituous
liquors to the members of his tribe. In
1762 the Shawnee waylaid, killed, and
scalped him while he w'as returning from
the Waxaw attended by a single servant.
Col. Samuel Scott, who was a chief in
1840, and signed the treaty of Mar. 13
in that year with South Carolina, w^as
Haiglar's grandson. (c. t.)
Haim. A body of Salish of Kamloops
agency, Brit. Col., numbering 26 in 1885.
Hi-im.— Can. Ind. Aff, 1885, 196, 1886.
Haimaaksto {Uai^maaxsto), A subdi-
vision of the Tsentsenkaio, a clan of the
Walaskwakiutl. — Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus.,
332, 1895.
Hainai. A tribe of tlie Caddo confed-
eracy, otherwise known as Inie, or loni.
After tlie Spanish occupancy tiieir village
was situated 3 leagues w. of the mission of
Nacogdoches, in e. Texas; it contained
80 warriors, tlie same number assigned
to the Hainai bv Sibley in 1805, who per-
haps obtained his information from the
same sources. Sibley places their village
20 m. from Natchitoches, La. In manners,
customs, and social organization the Hai-
nai do not appear to nave differed from
the other tribes of the Caddo confederacy
(q. v.), wliose subsequent fate they have
shared. By Sibley and otliers they are
called "Tadiies or Texas" (see Texas),
as if that term applied to them particu-
larly. The ''great nation called Ayano,
or Cannohatinno," according to the nar-
rative of tlie La Salle expedition in 1687,
were not tlie Hainai, as has l)een some-
times supposed, or any tribe at all, prop-
erly speaking. Ayano, or hayano, is
merely the Caddo word for 'people,'
while Kano-hatino (q. v.) is the Caddo
equivalent for *Re<l river,' presumably
the same stream now so called. The In-
dians simply informed the explorer that
many people lived on Red r., a statement
which the French, in their ignorance of
the language, construed to contain the
definite name and synonym of a power-
ful tribe. (j. R. s. j. m.)
state Archives. AinaU.— Carver,Trav., map, 1778.
Anaift.— Soc. Geog. Mex., 504, 1869. Annay.—
Linares (1716) in Margry, D^., vi, 218, 1886.
Ayaiiai«.—Domenech. Deserts N. Am., i, 440,1860.
Ayenai.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., I. 43, 18W.
Ayenia.— Alcedo, Dic.Geog., i, 190, 1786. Ayeania.—
Charlevoix, New France, iv, 80, note, 1870.
AynaU.— Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la Conquista, 884,
1742. Aynays.— Rivera, Diario y Derrotero, leg.
2140, 1736. Aynic*.— Burnet (1847) in Schoolciaft,
I nd. Tri bes, i, 239. 1851. Ayonai. —Talon quoted by
Gatschet, Karankawa Inds., 27, 1891. aainait.—
Whipple, Explor. for R. R. to Pac., in, pt. 3, 76, 1856.
Eini.— Morse, Rep. toSec. War, 373.1822. laay.— La
Harpe (1716) in Maigry, D^., vi, 193. 1886. Ini.—
Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 101, 1856.
Inict.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 504, 1878.
Iniet.— Sibley (1805), Hist. Sketches, 67, 1806.
Inniea.— P^nicaut (1701) in French, Hijst. Coll.
La., I, 73, note, 1869. londea.— Foote, Tex., l, 299,'
1841. loneea.— Ind. Aflf. Rep., 899, 1846. I-on-i.—
Sen. Ex. Confid. Doc. 13,29th Cong., 2d sess., i, 1846.
loniaa.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1871, 191, 1872. lonies.—
Ind. Aff. Rep., 894, 1846. Ironeyes.— Edward, Hist.
Tex., 92, 1836. Ironiea.— Foote. Tex., i, 299, 1841.
Joniea.— Parker, Tex., 213, 1856. Yoiiayt.~La
Harpe (1716) in French, Hist. Coll. La., in. 47, 1851.
Haines Mission. A missionary poet
among the Chilcat at Deshu (q. v.), in
Portage cove, near the head of Lynn canal,
Alaska; pop. (entire) 85 in 1900.
Hair. See Anatomy.
Hair dressing. Many tribes had a dis-
tinctive mode of cutting and dressing the
hair, and the style occasionally suggested
the nickname by
which the people
were called by
other tribes, as,
for instance, in
the case of the
Pawnee, who cut
the hair close to
the head, except
a ridge from tlie
forehead to the
crown, where the
scalp-lock was
parted off in a
circle, stiffened
with fatand paint,
made to stand
erect, and curved
like a horn, hence
the name Pawiiee, i
derived from pa-
riki, 'horn.' The '
same style of
shaving the head
and roaching the ^^^ of bone from a viroinu
hair was common -o"'^°; ^bout f. (fowke)
among eastern and western tribes, who
braided and generall v hung the scalp-lock
with ornaments. The Dakota and other
western tribes parted the hair in the
middle from the forehead to the nape of
the neck, the line, usually painted red.
being broken by the circle that separated
the scalp-lock, which was always finely
plaited, the long hair on each side,
braided and wrapj)ed in strips of beaver
or otter skin, hangingdown in front over
the chest. The Nez Percys of Idaho and
neighboring tribes formerly wore the hair
long and unconfined, falling loosely over
the back and shoulders. In the S. W.
among most of the Pueblo men the hair
was cut short across the forehead, like a
**bang,*' and knotted behind. The Es-
kimo wore the hair loose.
BULL. 30]
HAIR DRESSING
525
There was generally a difference in the
manner of wearing the hair between the
men and women of a tribe, and in some
tribes the women dressed their hair differ-
ently before and after marriage, as with
the Hopi, whose maidens arranged it in
a whorl over each ear, symbolizing the
flower of the squash, but after marriage
wore it in simple braids. Aside from
these ordinary modes of hair dressing
there were styles
that were totemic
and others connect-
ed with religious
observances or with
shamanistic prac-
tices. Among the
Omaha and some
other tribes the
child from 4 to 7
years of age formerly
had its hair cut in a
manner to indicate
the totem of its gens;
for instance, if the
turtle was the totem,
all the hair was cut
off close, except a short fringe encircling
the head, a little tuft being left on the fore-
head, one at the nape of the neck, and two
tufts on each side; the bald crown above
the fringe represented the shell of the tur-
tleand thetuftsits head, tail, and four legs.
Generally speaking, the mode of wearing
the hair was in former times not subject
to passing fancies or fashions, but was rep-
resentative of tribal kinship and beliefs.
'*'
~^
*
WOODEN COMB AND BIRCH-
BARK case; HUDSON BAY
ESKiMa (turner)
J
ZUNI HAIR-DRE88INQ. ( STEVENSON )
The first cuttinj? of the hair was usually
attended with religious rites. Among the
Kiowa and other southern Plains tribes a
lock from the first clipping of the child's
hair was tied to the forelock (Mooney).
Among many tribes the hair was believed
to be closely connected with a person's
life. This was true in a religious sense of
the scalp-lock. In some of the rituals used .
when the hair was first gathered up and
cut from the crown of a boy's head the
HAIR DRFSSING: western ESKIMO
MAN. (Murdoch)
teaching was set forth that this lock rep-
resents the life of the child, now placed
wholly in the control of the mysterious
and supernatural power that alone could
will his death. Tlie braided lock worn
thereafter was a sign of thisdedication and
belief, and represented the man's life. On
it hewore the ornaments that marked his
achievements and honors, and for any-
one to touch lightly this lock was re-
garded as a grave insult. Asa war trophy
the scalp-lock had a double meaning. It
indicated the act of the su[)ernatural
power that had
decreed the death
of the man, and
it served as tan-
gible i)roof of the
warrior's prow-
ess in wresting it
from the enemy.
The seal i^er, how-
ever, was not al-
ways the killer or
the first striker.
The latter had
the chief credit,
and frequently left others to do the killing
and scalping. With the Eastern or timber
tribes, the scalper was usually the killer,
butthiswasnot sooften the case among the
Plains Indians. The scalp was frequently
left on the battle ground as a sacrific^e.
Among tlie DakoUi a bit ot the captured
scalp-lock was i)reserved for a year, during
which period the spirit was supposed to
hnger near; then, when the great death
feast was held, the lock was destroyed
and the spirit was freed thereby from its
earthly ties (see Scalp). There are many
beliefs connected with
the hair, all of which
are interwoven with
the idea that it is mys-
teriously connected
with a person's life and
fortune. One can be
l)ewitched and made
subservient to the will
of a person who be-
comes possessed of a
bit of his hair; conse-
quentlv combings are
usually carefully
burned. According to Hrdlicka the Pima,
after killing an Apache, purified them-
selves with smoke from the burnt hair of
the victim.
Personal joy or grief was manifested
by the style of dressing the hair (see
MourniiKj). Young men often spend
much time over their locks, friends as-
sisting friends in the toilet. The Pueblo
and Plains tribes commonly used a stiff
brush of spear grass for combing and
dressingthe hair, while the Eskimo and the
N. VV. coast tribes used combs. A pointed
head of seminole man.
(maccauley)
526
HAIRWORK HALF KING
[B. A. B.
stick served for parting it and painting
the line. These sticks were often carefully
wrought, ornamented with embroidery
on the handle, and kept in an embroid-
ered case. Perfumes, as well as oils, were
used, and wisps of sweet-grass were con-
cealed in the hair of voung men to add to
their attractions. The Pima and Papago
paint or stain the hair when it becomes
bleached by the sun (Hrdlicka in Am.
Anthrop., viii, no. 1, 1906), and the for-
mer, as well as other tribes of the arid
region, often coated the hair completely
with river mud to destroy vermin.
Earlv French travelers in Texas and
other Southern states mention a custom
of the hostess to hasten to wash the head
of a visitor with warm water, as a sign of
good will and welcome. Among the
Pueblo Indians the washing of the hair
with the pounded root of the yucca plant
prior to a religious rite was attended with
■ much ceremony, and seems to corre-
spond to the purification observances of
tne sweat lodge, which always preceded
sacred rites among the tribes of the
plains. See Adornment. (A. c. f. )
Hairwork. One of the most useful
materials known to the Indians of the
United States was hair, which, as a textile
material, was generally more available
than vegetal fibers. Hair was obtained
from the dog, buffalo, mountain sheep,
mountain goat, moose, deer, reindeer, elk,
antelope, opossum, rabbit, beaver, otter,
lynx, and other animals, and human hair
was also sometimes employed.
In more modern times horsehair was
used to stuff balls, drumsticks, dolls, pads,
pillows, etc., and tufts of it, frequently
dyed, were attached as ornaments to cos-
tumes, pouches, harness, ceremonial ob-
jects, etc. False hair was worn by the
Crows, Assiniboin, Mandan, Mohave, and
Yuma; and ceremonial wigs of black wool
and bangs of natural or dyed hair, es-
pecially horsehair, were made by the
Pueblos. Twisted or sometimes braided
into cord, hair had a most extensive use,
satisfying the multifarious demands for
string or rope of great tensile strength,
and was combined with other fibers in
the warp or weft of textiles and baaketry.
According to Grinnell cowskin pads
stuffed with the hair of elk, antelope,
buffalo, or mountain sheep were com-
monly used instead of saddles by some of
the Plains tribes in running buffalo and
in war. Bourke (9th Rep. B. A. E., 474,
1892) says that mantles made of votive
hair are mentioned as having been in use
among the Lower California or southern
California tribes in the 18th century, and
(juotes Parkman (Jesuits in North Amer-
ica, Ixxxiv, 1867) to the effect that the
Algonquians believed in a female manito
who wore a robe made of the hair of her
victims, for she caused death. See Adom»
meniy Feaihenvorky Hair dressing, QuiU''
work. Consult Holmes in 13th Rep. B.
A. E., 25, 37, 1896. (w. h.)
Haisla (Xa-isld). One of the three
Kwakiutl dialectic divisions, embracing
theKitamat (Haisla proper) and the Kif
lope.— Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 328, 1805.
Haiwal (* acorn' ). A clan of the Ton-
kawa. (a. s. g.)
Hakan. The Fire clans of the Keresan
pueblos of Acoma, Cochiti, Santa Ana,
Sia, and San Felipe, N. Mex. That of
Acoma is now extinct.
EAka-hanoq<'i>.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., IX,
350, 1896 (Acoma form: MnoQcA = ' people').
Eakan-hano.— Ibid. (Santa Ana and Sia fonn).
Ha'-kan-ni.— Stevenson in 11th Rep. B. A. E.,
19, 1894 (Sia form). Eakahyi-hano.— Hodge, op.
cit. (San Felipe form). E^kanyi-hanuoh.—Ibid.
(C!ocnitlform.)
Hakkyaiwal {HHk-kydi^-vM). A Ya-
nuina village on the s. side of Yaquina r.,
Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 229, 1890.
Hakonchirmion (probably misprint for
Hakouchiriniou). Mentioned by Dobbs.
(Hudson Bay, 23, 1744), as a tribe, on or
near Bourbon (Nelson) r., Brit. Am., at
war with the Maskegon. Possibly a di-
vision of the Cree or of the Assiniboin.
Halant. A Shuswap village 3 m. below
Shuswap lake, Brit. Col.; pop. 152 in
1904.
Halant.— Can. Ind. AfT., 244, 1902. Ha-la-ut—
Ibid.. 196, 1885. Kell-aout.— Ibid., 188, 1884.
HatkantUnes.— Ibid.,78, 1878. HeikainUth.— Ibid.,
St. II, 68. 1902. Hiskahnuith.— Ibid., 259, 1882.
itkainlitn.— Ibid., map, 1891. South Thompgon.—
Ibid.
Halchis. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Half Breed Band. Mentioned by Cul-
bertson (Smithson. Rep. 1850, 143, 1861)
as a local band of the Cheyenne (q. v. ) in
1850, probably named from a chief; or
perhaps the Sutaio.
Half-breeds. See MHis, Mixed-bloods.
Half King (Scruniyatfaa, Serunij^attha,
Tanacharieon, Tannghrishon, etc.). A
Seneca chief; bom about 1700; died at the
house of John Harris, at the site of Har-
risbuiy. Pa., Oct. 4, 1754. He appears to
have first come into notice about 1748, at
which time he lived at or in the vicinity
of Logstown, Pa. (q. v.). According to
some statements his residence was in this
village, but according to others it was on
Little Beaver cr., about 15 m. distant. It
was to Half King that most of the official
visitors to the Indians of the Ohio region,
including Weiser, Gist, Croghan, and
Washin^n, applied for information, ad-
vice, and assistance, Logstown being their
stopping place for this purpose. He ac-
companied Washington both on his jour-
ney of 1753 and on his expedition of 1754,
BULL. 30]
HALF KING HALONA
527
Half Kingclaimed that he killed Jumon-
ville, theTrench oflficer, during the skir-
mish at Great Meadows, Pa., May 28,
1754, in revenge of the French, who, he
declared, had killed, boiled, and eaten
his father; and it was he who had advised
Ensign Ward, when summoned by Con-
tracoeur, the French officer, to surrender
Ft Necessity, at the site of Pittsburg, Pa.,
to reply that his rank did not invest him
with power to do so, thus obtaining de-
lay. Half Kin^ was a prominent hgure
on the Indian side in the treaty with the
Vii^ginia commissioners in 1752, and for
this and other services was decorated by
Gov. Dinwiddle and given the honorary
name *' Dinwiddle," which, it is said, he
adopted with pride. On the advice of
Croghan, he with other Indians removed
to Aughquick (Oquaga) cr., Pa., in 1754.
Half King has been confused with the
Huron Half King of Sandusky, Ohio,
known also as Pomoacan, and with his
own successor, who bore the same popu-
lar title. His Delaware name was Mon-
akatuatha. See Drake, Aborig. Races,
531, 1880; Rupp, Hist. West. Pa., 71, 1846;
Dinwiddle Papers, i, 148, 1883; Col.
Records Pa., v, 358, 1851. (c. t.)
Half King (Petawontakas, Dunquad,
Dunquat, Daunghquat; Delaware name,
Pomoacan ) . A Huron chief of Sandusky,
Ohio, who flourished during the latter
part of the Revolutionary war. Under
employment by the British he aided the
Delawares in their resistance to the en-
croachment of the white settlements
beyond the Alleghenjr mts., and it was
through his intervention that the Mora-
vians of Lichtenau were saved from mas-
sacre bv the Indians in 1777. According
to Loskiel (Missions United Brethren,
pt 3, 127, 1794) he was joined by a large
number of warriors, including Hurons,
Ottawa, Chippewa, Shawnee, and others,
besides some French, and his influence
as a disciplinarian was such that he kept
this mixed assemblage in good order, per-
mitting no extravagance on their part.
Sometimes more than 200 warriors lay all
night close to Lichtenau, but they behaved
so quietly that they were hardly per-
ceived. Loskiel also says that Half King
"was particularly attentive to prevent all
drunkenness, knowing that bloodshed
and murder would immediately follow."
He insisted on the removal of the Chris-
tian Indians from the vicinity of San-
dusky, believing it to be unsafe for them
to remain there; he also protected the
Moravians and their converts from mal-
treatment when the missionaries were
sent to Detroit. Under the name Daungh-
ouat he signed the treaty of Ft Mcintosh,
Ohio, J^. 21, 1785. The treaties of
Greenville, Ohio, Aug. 3, 1795; Ft Mc-
intosh, July 4, 1805; Greenville, July
22, 1814, and Spring Wells, Sept. 8, 1815,
were signed by Haroenyou (Harrowen-
you), his son, not by himself; but the
name "Dunquad or Half Kin^'* is ap-
pended to the treaty of Miami Rapides,
Ohio, Sept. 29, 1817. (c. t.)
Halfway Town. A former Cherokee
settlement on Little Tennessee r., about*
halfway between Sitiku and Chilhowee,
about the boundary of the present Mon-
roe and Loudon cos., e. Tenn. — Timber-
lake, Mem., map, 1765.
Halkaiktenok ( Ha^lx^ aix'tendx^ * killer
whale*). A division of the Bellabella. —
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 328, 1895.
Halona (Halona Fthvana, 'middle
place of happy fortune*, 'middle ant-hill
of the world', 'the ant-hill at the navel
of the Earth Mother.' — Cushing). A
former pueblo of the Zuni and one of the
Seven Cities of Cibola of the early Span-
ish chroniclers, said to have been situated
on both sides of Zuni r., on and opposite
the site of the present Zuni pueblo, w.
N. Mex. Only the mound on the s.
side of the stream is now traceable, and
a part of this is occupied by modern build-
ings erected by white people. While
there seems to be no question that Ha-
lona was inhabited by the ZuHi at the
time of Coronado in 1540, it was not men-
tioned hY name until Nov. 9, 1598, when
the Zuni made a vow of obedience and
vassalage to Spain at Hawikuh, Halona
being designated as Halonagu {Halona-
hwiuj * Halona-place' ) . A Franciscan mis-
sion was established there in 1629, but
the murder by the Zufii of their mis-
sionary in 1632 impel led the Indians to flee
for protection to Thunder mtn., a mesa
3 m. away, where they remained for about
3 years. The mission was rehabilitated
some time after 1643, and continued until
the Pueblo outbreak of Aug., 1680, when
the Zufii murdered Fray Juan de Bal,
the Halona missionary, and burned the
church. The Zufii again fled to Thunder
mtn., where they remained until after
the reconquest by Diego de Vargas in
1692. Meanwhile the pueblos in the val-
ley, including Halona, had fallen in
decay, and none of them was rebuilt. The
present vill^e of Zufii was reared on the
N. bank of ziufii r., partly on the site of
Halona, about the close of the 17th cen-
tury. The population of Halona at the
time of the revolt of 1680 was about 1,500,
and Matsaki and Kiakima were visitas of
its mission. See Bancroft, Ariz, and N.
Mex., 1889; Bandelier (1) Doc. Hist.
Zufii Tribe, in Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch.,
Ill, 1892, (2) in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, iv,
1890-92; Cushing, Zuni Creation Myths,
13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Vetancurt in
Teatro Am., repr. 1871. (f. w. h.)
Alauna.— Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map no. 5, 1776.
Alena.^Bowle8, map Am., 1784. Aloma.^Vaigas
528
HALPADALGI HAMMERS
[b. a. b.
(1692) quoted in Davis, Span. Conq. of N. Mex.,
371, 1869. Alomas.— Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la
Conquista (possibly the same; Acomafq. v.), how-
ever, seems more likely). Alona.— Del' Isle, Carte
Mexiqueet Floride, 1703; Vetancurt(1693)inTea-
tro Mex., in, 320, 1871. Alonas.— Rivera, Diario y
Derrotero, leg. 950, 1736 (referring to the inhabi-
tants). Ant Hill.— Gushing, Zufii Folk Tales, 7,
1901 (H&lonawan, or). Ant Hill of the Hiddle.—
Ibid. , 31. Conoepcion de Alona.— Vetancurt ( 1693 ) ,
Menolog. Fran., 275, 1871 (mission name). Ha-
lona.— Gushing in Millstone, ix, 55, Apr. 1884 (Zufii
name^. Halonagu.— Oflate (1598) in Doc. InM.,
XVI, 133, 1871 (corruption of Halonakwin, kwi7i
being the locative). Halona I'tiwana.— Gushing
in Millstune, ix, 55, Apr. 1884. Halona-itiwana.—
Gushing, Zufii Folk Tales, 7, 1901. Halona-kue.—
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 171, 1890
(given as the name of the pueblo; but kue=
'people'). Halona Kuin.— Bandelier, ibid., iv,
337. 1892 (;tuin=locative). Hal-onan.— Ibid., 335.
Haiona-quin.— Bandelier in Jour. Am. Ethnol.
and Archaeol., in, 84, 1892. Hal-on-aua.— Bande-.
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 260, 1890. Ha-Io-
na-wa. — Gushing in Gompte-rendu Internat.Gong.
Am., VII, 156, 1890 (or HA-lo-na). Halonawan.—
Gushing, Zufii Folk Tales, 7, 1901. La Puriflca-
cion de la Yirgen de Alona.— Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, iv, 337, 1892 (mission name). Kiddle
Ant Hill.— Gushing, Zufii Folk Tales, 31, 1901.
Hiddle Ant Hill of the World.— Ibid., 55. Hiddle
Place.— Ibid., 34. Purificacion.— D'Anville, map
Am. Sept., 1746 (intended for mission name).
Halpadalgi {hdlpada 'alligator', algi
'people ' ) . A Creek clan.
Halpadalgi— Gatschet, Greek Migr. Leg., i, 155,
1884. Kal-put'-lu.— Morgan, Anc. Soc, 161, 1877.
Hamalakyanae. An ancestor of a Nim-
kish gens, after whom it was sometimes
called.— Boas in PetermannsMitt., pt. 5,
130, 1887.
Hamanao (Xdmandd). A gens of the
Quatsino tribe of the Kwakiutl, q. v.—
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus., 329, 1895.
Hamechnwa. A former Luiseiio village
in the neighborhood of San Luis Rey
mission, s. Cal. — Tavlor in Cal. Farmer,
May 11, 1860.
Hameyisath {Ha^met/isath). A sept of
the Seshat, a Nootka tribe. — Boas in 6th
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 32, 1890.
Hami. The Tobacco clans of Sia and
San Felipe pueblos, N. Mex.
Haami-hano.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 352,
1896 (Sia form : hdno= ' people' ). Ha-mi. — Steven-
son in 11th Rep. B. A. K, 19, 1894 (Sia form).
H&ni-hano.— Hodge, op. cit. (San Felipe form).
Hamilton Creek. The local name for a
body of Salish of Kamloops-Okanagan
agency, Brit. Col.; pop. 38 in 1901 (Can.
Ind. Aff. for 1901, pt. ii, 166), after which
date the name does not occur.
Hamitinwoliyn. A former Nishinam
village in the valley of Bear r., Cal.
Hameung-Woleyuh.— Powers in Overland Mo. , xi i,
22, 1874. Ha'-mi-ting-Wo'-li-yuh.— Powers in Gont.
N.A.Ethnol., Ill, 816, 1877.
Hammers. Few implements are of so
much importance to primitive men as
the stone hammer and the several closely
allied forms— the sledge, the maul, and
the stone-head club, which may be de-
scribed here rather than under the caption
Clubs. All of these implements are em-
ployed, like the ordinary club, in striking
blows that stun, break, crush, or drive,
the only distinction to be drawn between
DiscoiDAL Chipping Hammers.
a. Ohio; b, California,
(about 1-«)
the hafted hammer and the club being
that the one can*ies the weight chiefly in
the extremity or head, which is usually
of heavier or harder material than the
handle, while the other has the weight
distributed along
the shaft. Although
the several imple-
ments comprised in
this group have
many features in
common, they are
somewhat clearly
differentiated in
shape and' use. All
are made of hard, heavy, tough materials,
including stone, bone, ivory, antler,
shell, and metal. Some are never hafted,
while perhaps nearly all on occasion are
used unhafted, one or both hands being
employed accord-
ing to the weight
of the implement.
Ilaftings vary
with the form and
use of the object as
well as with the re-
gion and the people.
Hammers em- p'tted hammer, (about 1-5)
ployed in shaping stone, especially in the
more advanced stages of the work, are
usually unhafted -and are held tightly in
the hand for delivering heavy blows, or
lightly between the thumb and finger-
tips for flaking or pecking.
They may be natural peb-
bles, bowl"
ders, or
fragments,
but by pro-
longed use
they as-
sume defi-
nite shajpes
or are in-
tentionally
modified to better fit them for their pur-
pose. Globular and discoidal forms pre-
vail, and the variety employed in pecking
and for other light uses often has shallow
depressions centrally placed at opposite
sides to render the fin-
ger hold more secure.
The pecking and flak-
ing work is accom-
plished by strokes with
the periphery, which
is round or slightly
angular in profile to
suit the requirements
of the particular work.
Hammers intended
for breaking, driving, and killing are gen-
erally hafted to increase their effective-
ness. Sledge hammers, used in mining
and quarrying, were usually heavy, often
rudely shaped, and the haft was a pliabie
Heads from the Copper Mines,
Michigan, (about 1-5)
HEAVv hammer; British Co-
lumbia, (length s 9-4
BULL. 30]
HAMM0NAS8ET HAMPTON INSTITUTE
529
HEAVY HAMMeR OP THE PLAINS TRIBCS.
stick or withe bent around the body of
the implement, which was sometimes
groovea for the purpose. The fastening
was made secure by the application ol
thongs or rawhide coverings. In the
flint quarries and copper mines great
numbers of hammers or sledges were re-
quired; indeed, it may be said that in and
about the
ancient
[copper
' mines of
McCar-
^) golscove,
Isle Roy-
ale, Mich., there are to be seen tens of
thousands of wornout and abandonecl
sledge heads. In an ancient paint mine
in Missouri, recently exposed by the open-
ing of an iron mine, upward of 1,200 rude
stone sledges were thrown .out by the
workmen. Heavy grooved and hafted
hammers, resembling somewhat the min-
ing sledges, though much more highly
speciali^d, were in general use among
the tribes of
• the great plains
and served an
important pur-
pose in break-
ing up the
bones of large
game animals,
in pounding
pemmican,
flint, and seeds, in driving tipi pegs, etc.
A lighter hammer, usually referred to
as a war-club, was and is in common use
among the western tribes. It is a glob-
ular or doubly conical stone, careiully
finished and often grooved, the haft being
strengthened by binding with rawhide.
Closely allied to this weapon is a kind of
slung hammer, the roundish stone being
Grooved Stone Hammers.
MEXICO; h, DAKOTA
held in place at the end of the
handle by a covering fif raw-
hide that extendi tin* full
It'Ugtli ui liie liiill. TheiJuare
very effectual implements, and decked
with streamers of horsehair and other
ornaments have been devoted, at least
in recent years, to ceremony and show.
Heavy hammers, often tastefully car ved,
were and are used by the tribes of the
N.W. fordriving wedges in splitting wood,
for driving piles, and for other heavy
work; they are usually called mauls, or
pile-drivers. Many of the larger speci-
mens have handles or finger holes carved
Bull. 30-05 34
in the stone, while others are provided
with handles of wood. The Eskimo also
have hammers for various purposes, made
of stone, bone, and ivory, with haftings
ingeniously attached.
The literature of this topic is volumi-
nous, but much scattered, references to the
various kinds of hammers occurring in
nearly all works dealing with the arche-
ology and ethnology of n. America. For
an extended article on the stone hammer,
see McGuire in Am. Anthropologist, iv,
no. 4, 1891. (w. H. H.)
HammonasBet. A small band, headed
by a chief named Sebeouanash (*the
man who weeps'), formerly living about
Hamnionasset r., near Guilford, Middle-
sex CO., Conn. They were probably a
part of the Quinnipiac. — De Forest, Hist.
Inds. Conn., 52, 1853.
Hamnnlik. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Hampasawan (^tented village,' from
hampone, * tent ' ) . A former Zuf^i pueblo,
the ruins of which are still visible 6 m. w.
of the present Zufii, Valencia co., N. Mex.
Regarded by Cushing as probably one of
the seven cities of Cibola. See Minde-
leff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 83, 1891, and the
authors cited below.
Hauipassawan.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 291,
1&S5 (after Cushing; misprint). Himi
NEW Cushing, Zufii Folk Tales, 6, 1901. Ham-
■pat-ti
TenU
wan.— Cushing in Millstone, ix, 65, 1884. Tented
Pueblo.— (Wishing. Zufli Folk Tales, 6. 1901. Vil-
lage of the White Flowering Eerbi.— Cushing, Zufil
Folk Tales, 104, 1901 (probably the same).
Hampton Normal and Agricultural Initi-
tnte. A school for negroes and Indians,
situated 2 ni. from Fort Monroe and Old
Point Comfort, Va. Established in 1868
by Gen. S. C. Armstrong for the indus-
trial and agricultural education of freed-
men, it was the first school in the United
States of a practical industrial nature.
After 10 years of success in training and
establishing negroesas teachers and farm-
ers, it responded to the call of 14 young
Indians, who had l)een prisoners of war
at St Augustine, Fla., for three years,
and thus opened its doors to the Indian
race. Since then 1,100 Indian ^rls and
boys have had more or less training at
Hampton, and to-day five-sixths of those
now living are industrious and civilized,
working with their own hands for the
support of themselves and their families.
Tne school is not a government insti-
tution, but is controlled by a board of 17
trustees, and is entirely nonsectarian in
character. It is supported by the income
of a partial endowment and by certain
government funds distributed by the state
of Virginia, but its chief support is de-
rived from the donations of its friends.
The academic course covers a period of
4 years, and includes English branches in
both grammar and high school grades.
530
HAMTSIT HANGATANGA
[b. a. r.
Normal courses are given in business,
a^culture, and the trades, as well as in
kindergarten and public school teaching.
Agriculture begins in the primary depart-
ment of the training school, and becomes
so important a branch of the academic
work that at the end of the course the
student is prepared to conduct intelligent
farming. In addition to the model farm,
dairy, orchards, poultry yards, and expe-
riment garden, the school has a dairy and
stock farm of 600 acres a few miles away.
The trades taught the boys are carpentry,
wood turning, bricklaying, plastering,
painting, wheelwrightine:, blacksmithing,
machine work, steam fitting, tailoring,
shoe and harness making, tinsmithing,
upholstering, and printing. A large and
well equipped trade school, with mechan-
ical-drawing room, offers excellent facil-
ities for the practical instruction given.
The domestic-science building and the
school kitchens and laundries ^ve oppor-
tunity for instruction in all kinds of do-
mestic work, and each girl is required to
complete a practical course in every
branch of housekeeping, cooking, dairy-
ing, and gardening.
The school has about 60 buildings for
housing and educating its 900 l)oarding
students. These include a church, li-
brary, dormitories, recitation halls, trade
school, domestic science and agricultural
building, hospital, printing oflSce, green-
houses, barn, worksnops, laundry, offices,
and dwellings for the officers and teachers.
All the young men receive instruction in
military tactics, which has proved of great
value in instilling habits of promptness,
neatness, and obeilience.
The Government pays $167 a year for
each of its 120 Indian pupils; all expenses
in excess of this must be provided by
philanthropic friends. The Indians and
colored students have separate dormitory
buildings, and the pupils of the two races
also occupy separate tables in the dining
rooms, but work together in classes and
shops with mutual good feeling and help-
fulness.
The record of Indians returned to their
homes is carefully kept. For the year
ending in May, 1906, there were 183 doing
an excellent erade of work as teachers in
schoolroom, shop, or on farms; as doctors,
lawyers, or ethnologists; 306 were living
civilized lives, setting examples of indus-
try and temperance; 80 were doing fairly
well under hard conditions; 28 were doing
poorly, and 4 were bad. This gives so
large a proportion of satisfactory results
that Hampton considers her work for
Indians in every way a success.
The school publishes a monthly maga-
zine called The Southern Workman^ de-
voted to the interests of the negro and
.the Indian. The Indians publish a small
paper. Talks and Thoughts, now in its nine-
3.^
T]
teenth year; all its contributors are In-
dians, and many of the articles are valu-
able additions to Indian literature and
ethnology. (c. m. f.)
liB,mXBiX(Hdmts'it, ^having food', named
from an ancestor). A fiellacoola division
at Talio, Brit. Col.— Boas in 7th Rep. N.
W. Tribes Can., 3,1891.
Han. An unidentified tribe living on a
part of the island of Malhado (Galveston
id.?), Texas, ofi which Cabeza de Vaca
suffered shipwreck in 1528. The language
of the Han differed from that of their
neighbors, the Capoque ( probably Coa-
ue), but they had customs in common,
'hey possibly formed the westemmoet
band of the Attacapa. See Cabeza de
Vaca, Narr., Smith trans., 82, 1871; Gat-
schet, Karankawa Inds., 34, 1891.
Han (* night*). AKansagens. Itssub-
gentes areHfinnikashingaand Dakanman-
vin.
ia".— Dorsey in Am. Nat., 671, 1886.
Hana ( * dog * ) . A subph ratry or gens of
the Menominee. — Hoffman in 14th Rep,
B.A. E.,pt.i,42,1896.
Hanahawnnena ( * rock men . ' — Kroe-
l)er). A division of the Northern Arap-
aho, now practically extinct.
Aaiiu'haw&.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.. 956,
1896. Ha'nahawunSiia.— Ibid. aioaiiazawiiuM'-
na».— Kroeber in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.,
XVIII, pt. 1, 6, 1902.
Hanakwa. A former pueblo of the
Jemez in New Mexico, the exact site of
which is not known.
Ham-a-qua.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst Papen, iv,
207, 1892. Ean-a-kwl— Hodge, field notes, B. A. £.,
1895.
Hanaya. A former Chumashan village
in Mission canyon, near Santa Barbara
mission, Cal.
Ha'-na-jr*.— Henshaw, Santa Barbara MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 1884. Janaya.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Apr. 24, 1863.
Hanehewedl ( XanExEwei^ * stone by or
near the trail*). A village of the Nicola
band of theNtlakyapamuk, nearNicolar.,
27 m. above Spences Bridge, Brit. Col. —
Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., ii, 174,
1900.
Hanga ( * leader ' ) . A eens of the Han-
gashenu division of the Omaha.
Foremost— Dorsey in Bull. Philos. Soc. Wash., 129,
1880. Hanga.— Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. £., 233,
1884. Eunga.— Morgan, A nc. Soc., 155. 1877. Him-
ruh.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mtsi, i, 327, 1823. Larsa
Hanga.— Dorsey in Am. Nat., 674. 1885. Hadi-
cine.— Morgan, op. cit.. 155.
Hangashenn ( * young men of the lead-
ers.'— Fletcher). One of the two divi-
sions of the Omaha, composed of the
Wezhinshte, Inkesabe, Hanga, Dhatada,
and Kanze gentes.
Hangaoenu.- Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 219,
1884: 15th Rep. B. A. £., 226, 1897. Hongaahan.—
.Jackson (1877) quoted by Donaldson in Smithson.
Rep., 1885, pt. 2, 74, 1886. Hon-ga-sha-no.- Long,
Exped. Rocky Mts., i. 325, 1823.
Hangatanga ( ^ large Hanga ' ) . A Kansa
Sens,
lack eagle.— Morgan. Anc. Soc., 156. 1877. Da-
•in'-ja-h&-gi.— Ibid. ( ' Deer tail). Ha&ga tMca.—
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. £., 281, 1897. Kaaga
BULL. 30]
HANGING-MAW — HANG
531
atonan4ji.~Ibid. (*Hanga apart from the rest').
Eiuf-jra iii-ka-Bhi]ig-fa.->Stubb6. Kaw MS. vo-
cab., B. A. £., 25, 1K77. Ean-fo-tiB'-ga.— Morgan .
Anc. Soc., 156. 1877. Ta nika-thinff-ga.— Stiibbs.
op. cit. Ta lindje qaga.— Dorsey in 15th Rei».
B. A. E., 231, 1897.
Hanging-maw ( Uskv'(Vti-(pYtiiy 'his stom-
ach hanss down ). A prominent Chero-
kee chiel of the Revolutionary period. —
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. K.,' 548, 1900.
Hanginihkasliina ('night peoi)le'). A
subdivision of the Tsishu division of the
Osage. Its subdivisions in turn are
Haninihkashina and Wasape.
Ha» i'iiiiik'»oi»'a.— Dorwy in 15th Rep. B. A. E..
284, 1P97. EuinihkaoiBa.— Dorscy, O.sage MS. vo-
cab., B. A. E., 1883. T•e'anka^— Dorsey in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 234, 1897. Tm'ou we'hav#«— Ibid.
Hangka ('leader*). One of the three
divisions of the Osage, the la«t to join the
tribe, dividinj^ with the Wazhazhe the
right or war side of the camp circle.
nSuia.— Doraey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 233. 1^97.
Hangkaahntnn ( ' Hangka h a v i n g
wings'). A gens of the Hangka division
of the Osage, in two subgentes, Husadta-
wanun and Husadta.
Eagle people.— Dorsey, Osage MS. V(M*ab.. B. A. E..
1883. H«A'xa a'hii «»'.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A.
E., 234, 1897. Eii'sa^—Ibid. ('limbs stretched
stlflf '). <lii# i'iiiiik*ici"'a.— Ibid. (' white eagle peo-
ple').
Hangkaenikathika ('those who l)ecanie
human beings by means of the ancestral
animal * ) . A Quapaw gens.
Ance«tral fen«.— Dorsey in 1.5th Rep. B. A. E., 229.
1897. Hauia e'nikaoi'iia.— Ibid.
Hangkantadhantsi ('Hangka apart from
the rest * ). A gens on the Hangka side of
the Osage tribal circle.
Haisa uta'tfan^w.— Dorsey in l.Mh Rep. B. A. K.,
234.1897. Q^'qt«ii'niqk'4ci"'a.— Ibid. ( • real eagle
people'), war eagle people.— Dorsey, Osage MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1883.
Haxignikashinga ( ' night {KH)ple ' ) . A
subgens of the Han gens of the Kansa.
Hap iiikaci»ga.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 2:^1.
1897.
Hanilik. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Haninihkashina ( ' night people proper' ).
A subdivision of the Haninihkashina di-
vision of the Osage. — Dorsev in 15th Rep.
B. A. E., 234, 1897.
Hankntchin ( 'river people' )• A Kutchin"
tribe on upper Yukon r. l)elow Klondike
r., Alaska. They make baskets of tama-
rack roots with hair and porcupine quills
tastefully woven into them. When these
are used for cooking, the water is boiled
by putting red-hot stones into them. The
Hankutcnin are noted for their skill in
catching large salmon. Gibbs stated that
60 hunters visited Ft Yukon in 1 854. They
still trade at that post. Subdivisions are
Katshikotin, Takon, and Tsitoklinotin.
Villages are Fetutlin, Johnnys, Nuklako,
Tadush, and Tutchonekutchm.
Ai-yaa.— Schwatka, Rep. on Alaska. 82. 1885, Ai-
ya'-na.— Dawson in Rep. Geo!. Sur\', Can., 200-b.
1887. An-Kutehin.— Whymper, Ala.ska. 223, 186S.
Am Xotehiaa.- Raymond quoted by Colver in Ind.
Aff. Rep. 1869, 593, 1870. Ayans.— Schwatka in
Century Mag., 821, Sept. 1885. Gens de Bois.— Dall
in Proc. A. A. A. S.. xviii, 271. 1870. Oena-de-
flne.— Raymond (|iu>ted by Colver in Ind. Aff.
Rep. 1869, 593. 1M70. Gene de Fou.— Hardi.stv in
8mithson. Rep. inm, 311, 1H?2. Oena de Foux.—
Whymper in Jour. Roy. (ieoj?. Soc, 233, l^]H.
Gene desBois. — Raymond in Sen. Kx. I)<h'. 12. 42d
Cong., 1st sess., 34, 1S71. Oen« des faux.— Pelroff,
Ala.Hka, 160, 1884. Hai-ankutohin.— Dall in Pnie.
A. A. A. S., XXXIV. 376, 1886. Han-kutchi.— Rich-
ardson, Aret. Kxped., i, 3W, 1851. Han kutohin.—
Dall in Proc. A. A. A. S., xviii, 271. 1870. Hin-
Kutchin.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. i, 31. 1K77.
Han-kuttchin.— Petitot, Diet. DonC'-Dindji^^. xx,
1876. Hong-Kutohin.— Jones in Smithson. Rep.
1866, 321, 1872. Hun-koo-chin.— Hardisty, ibid.,
311. Hun-Kutohin.— Raymond in Sen. Ex, Doc.
12, 42d Cong., 1st sesa., 34, 1871. Hfin'kutoh-In.—
Ross. MS. notes on Tinne, B. A. E. (trans.: 'peo-
ple of the river country'). Lower Oena de fou.—
ibid. Wood people.— Dall in Pro<«. A. A. A. S.,
XVIII, 271, 1S70.
Hannakallal. A tril)eor band, probably
Athai)as('an, Huiiil)ering (>00 in 1804, ancl
dwellings, of the 'Luckkarso* (Kosotahe)
on the Pacific coast; pos.MibIy the Khai-
nanaitetiinne or the Ilenagjri.
Hannakalala.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii. 119,
1814. Hannakallah.— Schoolcraft. Ind. TrilK>s. in.
571, lH5;i. Han-na-kal-lal.- Ori^. .lour. Lewis and
Clark, VI, 117, 1905.
Hano (contracrted from Anopi, * eastern
people.' — Fewkes). The easternmost
pueblo of Tusayan, n. k. Ariz., and famil-
iarly spoken of as one of the Hopi vil-
lages; it is, however, occupied by Tewa
people, whose ancestors, early in the 18th
century, migrated from the upper Rio
Grande, in New Mexico, principally from
an ancient pueblo known as Tsawarii,
above the i>resent town of Santa Cruz,
where the hamlet of La Piiebla now
stands (Hodge). The Hano people
have largely intermarried with the Hopi.
In 1782 the population was 110 families;
in 1893 it numbered 163 individuals,
including 23 husbands of Hano women.
In addition, there were 16 Hano i)eople
living in the Hopi pueblos. The clans
represented at Hano are the Ke ( Bear) ,
Kun (Corn), 8a (Tobacco), Tenvo
(Pine), Okuwa (Cloud), Nang (Earth*),
Kachina, and Tang (Sun). Formerly
there were also the Kapulo (Crane), Pe
(Timber), Kopeli (Pink ccmch), Pohulo
(Herb), Kuyanwe (Turquoise ear pend-
ant), Ku (Stone), and Ta (^(irass) clans,
but these have become extinct since the
Hano people settled in Tusayan. Con-
sult Fewkes (1) in 17th Rep. B. A. E.,
636, 1898; (2) in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,612,
1900; (3) in Am. Anthrop., vii, 162, 1894;
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. K, 62, 1891.
Hano. — Gatschet in Wheeler Surv. Rep., vii, 412,
1879. Hanoki.— Ibid: Hanom.— ten Kate, Reizen
in N. A., 259,1885 (Hopi name for the people).
Ha-no-me.— ten Kate, Synonymic, 7, 1884 (Hopi
name for the people). Hanomuh.— Stephen and
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E.,36, 1891. Eamo.—
Ten Broeck in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv. map,
24-25, 87, 18W. Haro.— Keane In Stanford, Com-
pend., 515, 1878. lano.— Tavlor in Cal. Farmer,
June 19, 1863. Jano.— Carets (1776), Diary. 394,
1900. Janoffualpa. — Garc^ quoted by Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex..l37, 395. 1889 (Hanoand Walpi
combined). Koy6fthtu. — Hodge, field notes, B. A.
K.. 1895 (Aeoma name). Na-ca-oi-Un.— Stephen,
MS.,B. A.E., 1887 (Navaho name: • foreign bear
people's house ' ). Nah-shah-shai.— £a ton in
532
H ANOCOU COU A IJ H AR AMES
[B. A. E.
Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, iv, 220, 1854 (Navaho
name). Taao.— Ward quoted by Donaldson, Mo-
qui Pueblo Inds.. 14, 1883. Taaol— Hodge, field
notes, B. A. £., 1895 (Isletaname). Tanoquevi.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1,519. 1853. Tanoauibi.-
Calboun quoted by Donaldson, Moqui Puebl
Inds., 14, 1893. Tanos.— Villa-Seflor, Theatro Am.,
pt. 2. 425, 1748. Tanus.— Escudero, Noticias de
Chihuahua, 231, 1834. Tauoos.— Cortez (1799) in
Whipple, Pac. R. R. Rep., ni, pt. 3, 121, 1866.
T^e-wOn-aJL— Whipple,ibid., 13, 1856(Zufiiname).
Teh-wa.— Stephen in Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo
Inds., 14, 1893. Tewa.— Popular but incorrect
name for the pueblo (see TewaY. Tcwe. — Shipley
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 310, 1891. Towas.— Davis, El
Gringo, 115, 1857.
Huiocoiicona\j . A village on the £. coast of
Florida, N. of C. Cafiaveral, in the 16th cen-
tury.— De Bry, Brev. Nar., ii, map, 1591.
Hantiwi. A Shafitan tril>e or band for-
merly living in Warm Spring valU^y,
Modoc CO., Cal.
Han-te'-wa.— Powers in Conl. N. A. Kthnol., in,
267, 1877.
Hanat Cochiti {hanuty * above', + Co-
chiti, q. v. ). The sixth town successively
occupied by the people of Cochiti ; situatecl
about 12 in. n. w. of Cochiti pueblo,
in the Potrero Viejo, N. Mex.
Ea-nut Gochiti.— Lummis in Scribner's Monthly,
100, 1893.
Hapalnya. A former large village in up-
per Florida, visited by De Soto in 1539. —
Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., II, 133, 1850.
Hapanyi. The Oak clans of the Keresan
pueblos of Laguna, Acoma, Sia, San Felipe,
and Cochiti, N. Mex. The Oak clan of
Lag'ina claims to have come originally
from Rio Grande pueblos, by way of Mt
Taylor, and to form a phratry with the
Mokaich (Mountain Lion) clan; while
that of Acoma claims phratral relationship
with the Showwiti (Parrot) and Tanyi
(Calabash) clans. The Oak clan of Sia is
extinct. (f. w. h.)
Hapai-hano«>>.~Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351,
18?6 (Lamina form; Adnoc* = ' people*). Hapan-
hano.— Ibid . (Sia form ). Ha-pan-ni.-^tevenson in
nth Rep. B. A. E., 19, 1894 (Sia form). H^panvi-
h^o.— Hodge, op. cit. (San Felipe form), tti-
panyi-h^oq«>*.— Ibid, f Acoma form). Hapanyi-
taanuoh.— Ibid. (Cochiti form).
Hapes. A small tribe found by Si)ani8h
explorers on the lower Rio Grande in the
vicinity of Eagle Pass, Tex., although
Uhde (1861) places it near Lampazos, in
Nueva Leon, Mexico, some distance far-
ther w. They numbered 490 in 85 huts in
1688, but an epidemic of smallpox raged
among them soon afterward, and in 1689
the survivors were attacked by coast
Indians and exterminated, with the ex-
ception of some boys who were carried
off. (j. R. 8.)
Apei. ^Fernando del Boeque (1675) in Nat. Gecw.
&Iag.. XIV, 9, 347, 1903. Apis.— Manzanet (1689) in
Tex. Hist. As. Quar., ii, 25, 1898. Hapet.— De Le6n
(1689), ibid., vni, 205, 1905. Iapi6t.~Lin8Choten,
Descr. de TAm^r., map, 1, 1638. Japiea.— De Laet,
Hist. Nouv. Monde, 234, 1640. Jaapea.— Fernando
del Bosque, op. cit. Xapes.— Uhde, Lender, 121,
1861. Xapiea.— Navarette, Memorial y Noticias
Sacra.s, 104, 1646.
Hapkng. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Happy Hunting Ground. See Popular
fallacies.
Haqihana ( * wolves * ). A local band of
the Arapaho, q. v.
Haqni. A Caddoan ( ?) tribe, apparently
in N. E. Texas, mentioned in 1687 as at war
with the **Coenis" or main body of the
Caddo confederacy. Perhaps the Adai.
Aq«i».— Joutel ( 1687) in Margry, D«c., ni, 409, 1878.
Eaketiana.— Hennepin, New Discov., 41, 1698.
Haquia.— Douay (1687) quoted by Shea, Discov.
Miss. Val., 217, 1852.
Harahey. One of the various forms of
the name of a province of which Coro-
nado, while among the New Mexico
pueblos in 1540-41, learned from a native
thereof who said that it lay beyond
Quivira (the Wichita country of e. cen-
tral Kansas), and contained much gold.
This Indian, who was known as The
Turk (q. v.) and who served as a guide to
Coronado's army, became a traitor to the
Spaniards by leading them astray on the
buffalo plains of Texas. After 12 days'
journey from Pecos r. in New Mexico the
Spaniards, then on the Staked plain, were
informed by The Turk that Haxa, or
Haya, was one or two days' journey
toward sunrige. A party was sent for-
ward to find it, and although settlements
of Indians were found, amongst them
Cona, occupied by the Teya (Texas?),
Haxa does not ajppear to have been
reached; it is therefore possible that
Haxa, or Ha^a, is but another form of
Harahey, which was far n. of where the
Spaniarda then were. Arriving at Qui-
vira, Coronado learned more of Harahey,
which was the next province beyond.
. The Spaniards did not visit it, but sent
for their chief, named Tatarrax, who
came with 200 warriors, **all naked, with
bows, and some sort of things on their
heads." From the characteristic head-
dress of The Turk and the other mem-
bers of the tribe, and their proximity and
apparent relationship with the Quivira,
or Wichita, the Harahev people may have
been the Pawnee, and their habitat at
this date (1542) in the vicinity of Kansas
r. in E. Kansas. SeeBrower, Quivira, 1898;
Hodge, Coronado's March, in Brower,
Harahey, 1899; Winship, Coronado Ex-
ped.,14thRep.B.A.E.,1896. (f.w.h.)
Araal.— Barcia, Ensayo. 21, 1723. Arache.— Jara-
millo (after 1542) in 14th Rep. B. A. £., 588, 1896.
Ante.— Rel. del Suceso {ca. 1542), ibid., 677. Ara-
hei.— Jaramillo, op. cit. Arohe.— Castafieda (ca.
1565) in 14th Rep. B. A.E., 503. 1896. Axa.— Go-
mara (1553) quoted by Winship in 14th Rep.
B. A. E.. 492, 1896. Axaa».— Volney, America,
map, 1804. Axat.— Giissefeld, Charte Nord Amer-
ica, 1797. Harae.— Herrera, Historia, VI, 206, 1728.
Harahey.— Jaramillo, op. cit., 590. Harale.— Rel.
del Suceso, op. cit. Haxall.— I>oc. of 1541 in Doc.
In6d., XIV, 826, 1870. Haxa.— Castafieda (ca. 1666)
in 14th Rep B. A. E., 505, 1896. Haya.— Ibid. Hu-
rall.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 51, 1889.
Xaquouira.— Galvano (1563) in Hakluyt Soc. Publ.,
XXX. 227, 1862 (apparently Axa and Quivira con-
fused).
Harames. A former tribe of Coahuila,
N. B. Mexico, gathered into the mission
534
HARRISON RIVER HA8SANAME8IT
[b. a. e.
when 80, either spliceii to the main line
or joined by an ingenious detarher, which
is sometimes prettily carved.
Loose shaft. — A spindle-nhaped j)iece of
ivory socketed to toggle head and fore-
shaft and attached as a hinge to the leader
or the foreshaft. Fts object a
is to catch the strain cantsed !l
by convulsive movements if
in the game and to render
certain the speedy detach-
ment of the toggle head.
One of the most interest-
ing studies in connection
with hari)oonH is environ-
ment in relation tcj cul-
ture— the play between the
needy ana ingenious man
and the resources of game,
materials, and tools. In e.
Greenland is found the
hinged toggle by the side
of old forms; in w. Green-
land a great variety of types
from the very primitive and
coarse to those having feath-
ers of ivory and the hooks
on the shaft. In the latter
areaarealsothrowingsticks
of two kinds. On the w.
side of Davis strait harpoons
are heavy and coarse, show-
ing contact of the natives
with whalers, especially the
Ungava Kskimo examples.
There also are flat types sug-
gestive of N. Asia'. From
the Mackenzie r. country
the harpoons are small and
under the influence of the
white trader. The har-
poons of the Pt Barrow Ks-
kimo are
exhaust-
ively dis-
cussed by
Murdoch,
and those
from Pt
Barrow
south-
wani by Nelson.
From Mount St Elias
southward, within the
timber belt, wherewood
is easily obtainable,
harpoon shafts are
longer, but all the parts
are reduced to their sim-
plest form. For exam-
ple, the Ntlakyapamuk of British Colum-
bia make the toggle heads of their two-
pronged harpoons by neatly lashing the
parts together and to the sennit lead-
ers. The Makah of Washington formerlv
made the blade of the head from shell,
but now use metal; the leader is tied to a
Eskimo Harpoon Mooipieo
BY CONTACT WITH WHITES
laiye, painted float of sealskin, the shaft
being free. The Quinaielt of Washing-
ton have the bifurcated shaft, but no float.
The Naltunne of Oregon have a barbed
harpoon, with prongs on the blade as well
as on the shank, while their cousins, the
Hupa of N. California make the toff^le,
as ao the Vancouver tribes, by attacning
the parts of the head to a strip of rawhide.
See Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 1888;
Goddard in Publ. Univ. Cal., Am.
Archseol. and Ethnol., i, no. 1, 1903;
Holm, Ethnol. Skizz., 1887; Mason in
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1900, 1902; Moriee in
Trans. Can. Inst., iv, 1895; Murdoch in
9th Rep. B. A. E., 1892; Nelson in 18th
Rep. B. A. E., 1899; Niblack in Rep. Nat.
Mus. 1888, 1890; Powers in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., Ill, 1877; Teit in Mem. Am. Mus.
Nat. Hist., II, Anthrop. i, 1900; Turner in
11th Rep. B. A. E., 1894. (o. t. m.)
HarriBon Biver. The local name for a
body of Cowichan near lower Fraser r.,
Brit. Col. (Can. Ind. Aff. for 1878, 78);
evidently the Scowlitz, or the Chehalis,
.or both.
Harsanyknk [H&rsanykuk, *saguaro cac-
tus standing'). A Pima village at Saca-
ton Flats, s. Ariz. — Russell, Pima MS.,
B. A. K, 18, 1902.
Hartwell. An Algonquian settlement,
containing 25 persons in 1884, in Ottawa
CO., Quebec.— Can. Ind. Aff., 1884.
Hamtawaqni (Harofltav)d,^^kof^\ *He
holds the tree.* — Hewitt) . A Tuscarora
village in North Carolina in 1701. — Law-
son (1709), Carolina, 383, 1860.
Hasatch ( * place to the east ' ) . A former
summer village of the Lagunas, now a
permanently occupied pueblo; situated
3 m. E. of Laguna pueblo, N. Mex.
Hasatoh.— Loew in Wheeler Survey Rep., vii, 345,
1879. H»8£tyi.— Hodge, field noten, B. A. E., 1896
(proper native name). Hesita. — Ind. Aflf. Rep.
1904, 256, 19a5 ('little mesa': common Spanish
name). Hesita If efrra.— Hodge (after Pradt) in
Am. Anthrop., iv, 316, 1891 (Span.: • little black
mesa').
Hashkiislitiin (Ha^-vkdc-tdn). A former
Takelma village on the s. side of Rogue r.,
Greg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
235, 1890.
Haslinding. A small Ilupa villatse, re-
cently deserted, on the e. side of Trinity
r. , Cal. , at the mouth of a creek of the same
me, 3 m. s. of Hupa vallev. (p. e. g. ]
«-lintah.— Gibbs in Schoolcra'ft, Ind. Tribes,
name,
Has-lintah.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in,
139. 1&53. Hasa-lin'-tung.— Powers in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., in, 73, 1877. Kaa-lin-ta.— McKee ( 1851) in
Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 82d Cong., spec, sess., 194, 1858.
Xaalindin.— Goddard, Life and Culture of the
Hupa, 12, 1903.
Hasoomale. One of the Diegueilo ran-
cherias represented in the treaty of 1852
at Santa Isabel, s. Cal.— H. R. Ex. Doc.
76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., i:«, 1857.
Hassanamesit ('at the place of sniall
stones. ' — Gookin ) . A village of Christian
Indians established in 1654 at Grafton,
Worcester co., Mass., in Nipmuc territory.
BULL. 30]
HAS8ASEI HATCHETS
535
The*laHt of the Dure Indiani^ die<l about
1825, but in 183U there were still 14 per-
sons there of mixed Indian and ne^ro
blood. It was the third of the praying
towns ** in order, dignity, and antiquity."
Cf. Ilaimmanisco. (.i. m. )
H«MUi*meMt.— Hubbard (1680) in M&ss. Hi»t. S<k'.
Ck>ll., 2d 8, V, 544, 1815. H*MuuunoMt.— <i«M)kin
(1677) in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc.. n, 447, 1836. Hasa-
nemeMtt— Leverett (1677) in N. Y. Dw. Col. Hist.,
xni, 518, 1881. Haasaaamaaaaitt.— Salisbur}' ( 1678) ,
ibid., 526. HaManamatkeU.— Writer of 1()76 in
Drake, Ind. Chron., 17, 1836. HaManameiitt.—
Gookln (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ists., i, 184,
1806. HaMana-miaoo.'Barber, Hist. Coll. Ma.«s.,
let.— Gookln (1677) in Trans.
Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 467, 1836. EassaBemesit.—
Rawson (1675) in Drake, Ind. Chron., 17, 183ti.
HaaMumametit.— Gookin -- - -
AnUq. See., n, 435, 1836.
lit.— Gookin (1677) in Trans. Am.
lUq. see., n, 435, 1836. Eassenemauit.— Harris
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ist s., ix, 198, ISM.
SaaaiaaimniMo.— Drake, Bk. Inds., blc. 2, 51, 1848.
t. — Eliot quoted by Tooker, Al^onr].
Ser., X, 24, 1901. HtMameiit.— Writer of 1675 in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., vi, 205, 1800. Eua-
aaaameait.— Drake, Ind. Chron., 166, 1836.
Hawaiei. A rancheria, probably Die-
^eflo, on the coast of Lower California;
It was under the mission of San Miguel
de la Frontera, which was in lat. 82°.—
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 18, 1860.
Haifimanisco. A former Indian village
in Connecticut, probably near C'onnecti-
cut r. In 1764 there were only 5 Indians
left.— Stiles (1764) in Mass. Hiwt. Soc.
Coll. , 1st s. , X, 105, 1809. Cf . IlammameMt.
Haiiinimga. A tribe of the Manahoac
confedenu»y living about 1610 on the
headwaters of Rappahannock r., Va.
Eaainninfa.— Smith (1629). Virginia, i, 186, repr.
1819. Easaawinga.— Ibia., 74. Eaaainiengaa.—
Boudinot, Star in the West, 126, 1816. Eaaainu-
IM.— Strachey (ca. 1612), Virginia, 101, 1W9.
Eaaaiaungaea.— Smith, op. cit., 74.
Haf tings Saw Mill. A local name for a
body of Squawmish of Fraser River
a^^ncy, Brit. Col.; pop. 91 in 1898, the
last time the name is mentioned.
EalatiBff'a Saw KiUa.— Can. Iiid. Aff. for 1889, 268.
Eastiaga Sawmill.— Ibid., 1898, 413. Eaatinga Saw
■ilia.— Ibid., 1886, 229.
Haitwiana (*he was a Httle man.'—
Hewitt). A former Onondaga settle-
ment on the site of the present village of
Ononda^ Valley, Onondaga co., N. Y.
Ola-twe-an'-na.- M()rKan, League Iroq., 421, Ihol.
E«a-twi*-4'-ni.— Hewitt, infii, 188<) (Onoiidaga
form). Touenho.— Denonville (1(;h8) in N. V. Ixm*.
Col. Hist., IX, 876, 185ft.
Hata. A Tsawatenok village at tin*
head of Bond sd., Brit. Col.
Ei-ti.- Dawson in Can. (Jeol. Surv., map, 1888.
Hataam (* rider*). A Diegueflo ran-
cheria in N. w. Lower California, near
Santo Tomas mission; visited in 1867 by
Wm. Gabb, who obtaine<l a vo<*abulary
published in Ztschr. f. Ethnologie, 1877.
Hatakfaihi('bird'). A Chickasaw clan
of the Koi phratry.
Fnahi.— Gatschet. Creek Migr. Leg., i, 96. 1884.
Ea-tak-ftt-ahi.— Morgan, Anc. Soc, 163, 1877.
Hatawa. A former Luisefio village in
the neighborhood of San Luis Rev mi.M-
sion, s. Cal. (Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, May
11, 1860). Possibly the same a.s Ehutewa.
Hatchcalamocha. A former Seminole
village near Drum swamp, 18 m. w. of
New Mickasuky town; probably in the
E resent Lafayette cc, Fla. — H. R. Kx.
>oc. 74 (1823), 19th (-ong., Int sens., 27,
1826.
Hatchets. These implements, made of
iron or steel, and hafted with wood, were
an im|)ortant factor in the colonization
of northern America, and the value of
the hatc*het, as well as that of the ax,
was soon* recognizee! by the natives,
who obtained these tools through trade.
Large numbers of hatchets and axes of
both Frtmch and English manufacturer are
obtained from aboriginal dwelling sites.
It is not known with certainty just what
aborigi-
nal im-
plements
and weaj)-
ons were
supplant-
ed by the
European
hatchet,
but it
probably .
s u p er-
oaH^H in COMMON Form of matcmct — a Snarpcneo
Seiied, in bowlocr; Virginia
large part,
the grooved ax, the celt, and probably the
tomahawk or war club among tribes' that-
used these iniplement*». So far as can l)e
judged by the forms, the term ** hatchet"
may l)e applied with equal propriety to
both the hafted ax and the hafted celt,
as l)oth were wielded usually with one
hand and were e<iually effectual in war
and in the arts of i>eace. 8o far as colo-
nial literature refers to the uses of these
implements, it would ai)pear that the
tomahawk or club, among the eastern
tribes, was the weapon of war par excel-
lence, while the ax and the celt were em-
ployed more especially in domestic work
and for otherordinarv industrial purposes
( McCullo<'h ) . Both' the hatchet and the
war club doubtless rostr on occasion to the
dignity of ceremonial objects.
It is clear, not only from the practice
of the living, tribes and of primitive i)eo-
ples generally, but from trat-es of handles
remaining on both stone and copper
CELT-HATCHET WITH WOOOEN HANDLE. FROM A MICHIGAN
MOUND. < DODGE COLU )
specimens obtained from the mounds,,
that the celt was hafte<l after the manner
of the hatchet. An interesting group of
implement."^ showing that this was the ar-
536
HATCHEUXHAD HATHAWEKELA
[b. a. b.
chaic method of haftiu^ celt-like objects,
are the monolithic hatchets in which the
blade and the handle are carved of a sin-
gle piece of stone. Several specimens of
this type are on record; one, found by
MONOUTHIC HATCHET OF GREENSTONE, FROM A TENNESSEE
MOUND. LENGTH 13 1-2 IN. ( JONES )
Joseph Jones, in Tennessee, is made of
greenstone, and is 13 J in. in length;
another, from a mound in York district,
S. C, now in the National Museum, is
also of greenstone; the third is from Mis-
sissippi CO., Ark., and is owned by Mr
Moms of that county (Thruston); the
fourth, from a mound in Alabama, and
now in possession of Mr C. B. Moore,
ATQH£r FtiaM A MQUND at tteH/HO-
ViLLE, AL*. Li*4arN n T'Z IX.
of Phila*i(*lphia, is 11}
iu . loiijf , of greenstone,
and a superb example of native lapi-
darian work. Specimens of this class are
much more numerous in the Bahamas
and the West Indies. As all are carefully
finished, some being provided with a
perforated knob or projection at the end
of the handle for the insertion of a thong,
it is probable that they served as maces
or for some other ceremonial use. On the
Pacific coast the stone war club some-
times took the form of a monolithic
hatchet (Niblack).
The combination of the iron hatchet
with the tobacco pipe as a single imple-
ment, often called the tomahawk pipe,
became very general in colonial and later
times, and as no counterpart of this de-
vice is found in aboriginal art, it was
probably devised by the whites as a use-
ful and profitable combination of the sym-
bols of peace and war. To **take up
the hatchet" was to declare war, and **to
bury the hatchet" was to conclude peace.
According to some authors the hatchet
pipe was a formidable weapon in war, but
in the forms known to-day it is too light
and fragile to have taken the place of
the stone ax or the iron hatchet. It has
passed entirely out of the realm of weap-
ons. See AxeSf Calumet^ CeUs^ Pipes^ Tom-
ahawks,
Consult C. C. Jones, Antiq. So. Ifids.,
1873; Jos. Jones, Aboriginal Remains of
Tenn., 1876; McCulloch, Researches,
1829; McGuire in Rep. Nat. Mus., 1897;
Moore, various memoirs in Jour. Acad.
Nat Sci. Phila., 1894-1905; Moiyan,
League of the Iroquois, 1904; Niblack in
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1888, 1890; Thruston,
Antiq. of Tenn., 1897; Wilson in Rep.
Nat. Mus. 1896, 1898. (w. h. h.)
Hatehenxhau. — A former Upper Creek
village near the site of La Grange, Troup
, CO., Ga.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E.,
Ga. map, 1899.
Hatehiohapa (* half-way creek'). A
former branch settlement of the Upper
Creek town Kailaidshi, between Cooea
and Tallapoosa rs., Ala. Hawkins states
that the Creeks hostile to the United
States burned it in 1813, but it was prob-
ably rebuilt as it is mentioned in Parsons'
census list of 1832 as having 62 heads of
families.
Balohaehabb.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1827), 420, 1887.
Half-way Creek.— Oatschet, Creek Migr. !«»., it
131, 18S4. Eatohohi ehubba.— Parsons (18^ in
Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854. Eatohe-
chubba.— Corley (1835) in H. R. Doc. 462. 25th
Ck>ng., 2d sess., 66, 1838. Hat-ohe ohab-ban.—
Hawkins (1799), Sketch. 49, 1848. Eatoheehnb-
iMe.— Creek paper (1836) in H. R. Rep. 37, SUt
Cong., 2d sess., 122, 1851. Hatch ee ohnb ba.—
Abbott (1832) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 580,
1854. Hateheeohubbas.— Simpson (1836) in H. R.
Doc. 80. 27th Cong., 3d sess., 50, 1843. Hatohi
tehapa.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 131, 1884.
Fatohiohapa. A township in the Creek
Nation, Ind. T., near North fork of Cana-
dian r.
Hateh Point. A local name for a body
of Salish of Cowichan agency, Vancouver
id. ; pop. 4 in 1896, the last time reported.
Haitch Point.— Can. Ind. AfT. for 1896, 433. Hatch
Point.— Ibid., 1883, 197.
Hatchuknni ( * wolf ' ) . A Tonkawa clan.
H£tohukuni.— Gatschet, Tonka we MS. vocab., B.
A. E., 1884.
Hathawekela. A principal division of
the Shawnee, the name of which is of
uncertain etymology. They emigrated
from the S. about 1697, together with
other Shawnee bands, and settled with
them, partly on Susquehanna and partly
on Allegheny r., Pa., where they are
mentioned in 1731. Sewickley, Pa.,
probably takes its name from them.
According to W. H. Shawnee, an edu-
cated member of the tribe, the proper
form is Ha-tha-we-ke-lah, and they con-
stitute one of the original 5 principal
divisions of the Shawnee. Together with
the Bicowetha (^Piqua) and Kispokotha
(Kispococoke) divisions they removed
about 1793 to what was then Spanish
territory in e. Missouri, thence into Ar-
kansas, and in 1832 into Texas, where
with other tribes they settled for a time
near Saline r. Being afterward driven
out by the new Texas government they
removed to the present Oklahoma, where
the 3 united bands are now known as
BULL. 30]
HATHLETUKHISH HAVASUPAl
537
Absentee Shawnee, from liaving been
absent from the more recent treaties
made with the rest of the tribe. The
Hathawekela claim to be the ** elder
brothers" among the Shawnee, aa being
the first created of the tribe. The band
formerly under Black Bob (q. v.) are a
portion of this division. See Halbert and
Shawnee in Gulf States Hist. Mag., i, no.
6,413-418,1903. (j. m.)
Awaekalet.— Cartlidge (1731) in Pa. Archives, i,
305, 1852. Auekelaet.— Gordon (1731) quoted by
Brinton, Lenape Legends, 32, 1885. Assiwikalet.—
Brinton, ibid. Auwekales.— Davenport (1731) in
Pa. Archives, i, 299, 1852. Awwikalet.— Gov. Pa.
(1731), ibid., 802. Asswikalut.— Le Tort (1731),
ibid., 800. Elder Brothers.— W. H. Shawnee, op.
clt.. 417. Ha-tha-we-ke-lah.— Ibid., 415. Ha-tha-
we-ki-lah.— Ibid., 417.
Hathletukhish (HaqV-Vii-qic"), A for-
mer Yaquina villaee on the s. side of Ya-
guina r., Oreg.— -Borsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, in, 229, 1890.
Hatsi. The extinct Earth clans of
Laguna and San Felipe pueblos, N. Mex.
The Earth clan of Laguna claimed to have
come originally from Jemez and to have
formed a phratry with the Meyo ( Lizard ) ,
Skurshka (Water-snake), and Shruhwi
(Rattlesnake) clans. (f. w. h.)
Haattii-hmno.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 350,
1896 (San Felipe form: hdno = 'people'). Hat«i-
haaou>.— Ibid. (Laguna form).
Hatsinawan (hawe * leaves*, tsinawe
* marks, ' * paintings * , wan * place of ' :
*town of the (fossil?) leaf-marks.' — Cash-
ing). A ruined pueblo formerly inhab-
it^ by the Zufii, situated n. n. w. of
Hawikuh and s. w. of the present Zufii
Sueblo, N. Mex. — Gushing, inf'n, 1891.
Atschi-na-wha.— Fewkes in Jour. Am. Ethnol.
and Archseol., i, 101, 1891 (probably identical).
Hatteras. An Algonquian tribe living
in 1701 on the sand banks about C. Hat-
teras, N. C, E. of Pamlico sound, and
frequenting Roanoke id. Their single
village, Sandbanks, had then only about
80 inhabitants. They showed traces of
white blood and claimed that some of
their ancestors were white. They may
have been identical with the Croatan
Indians (q. v.), with whom Raleigh's
colonists at Roanoke id. are supposed to
have taken refuge. ( j. m. )
Eatarask.-Lane (1586) in Smith (1629), Virginia,
I, 92, 1819 (place name). Hatorask.— Ibid. Hat-
teras Indians.— Lawson (1714), Carolina, 108, 1860.
Hanenayo. A clan of the Apohola
phratry of the ancient Timucua of Flor-
ida.— Fareja {ca. 1614) quoted by Gat-
schet in Am. Philos. Soc. Proc., xvii,
492, 1878.
Hankoma. A Pomo division or band
on thew. side of Clear lake, Cal., num-
bering 40 in 1851.
How-ku-ma.— Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, in, 109, 1853. How-ru-ma.— McKee (1851)
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 136, 1853.
Hanwiyat {Hau-m-ydt*). A former
Siuslaw village on or near Siuslaw r.,
Oreg. — Dorsev in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 230, 1890.*
Hauzaiirni. A former Costanoan vil-
lage near Santa Cruz mission, Cal. —
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860.
Hava8iipai( 'blueor green waterpeople' ).
A small isolated tribe of the Yuman stock
HAVASUPAl MAN. (aM. MU8. NAT. HIST. )
(the nucleus of which is believed to have
descended from the Walapai) who occupy
Cataract canyon of the Rio Colorado in n.
HAVASUPAl WOMAN. (aM. MU8. NAT. HIST.)
w. Arizona. Whipple (Pac. R. R. Rep.,
Ill, pt. I, 82, 1856) was informed in 1850
that the "Cosninos" roamed from the
538
HAVASUPAI
[B.i
Sierra Mogollon to the San Francisco
mts. and along the valley of the Colo-
rado Chiquito. The tribe is a peculiarly
interesting one, since of all the Yuman
tribes it is the only one which has devel-
oped or borrowed a culture similar to,
thoueh less advanced, than that of the
Pueblo peoples; indeed, according to tra-
dition, the Havasupai (or more probably
a Pueblo clan or tribe that l>ecame incor-
porated with them) formerly built and
occupied villages of a j)ermanent charac-
ter on the Colorado Chiquito e. of the
San Francisco mts., where ruins were
pointed out to' Powell by a Havasupai
chief as the former homes of his people.
As the result of war with tribes farther
E., they abandoned these villages and
took refuge in the San Francisco mts.,
subsequently leaving these for their pres-
ent abode. In this connection it is of
interest to note that the Cosnino caves on
the upper Kio Verde, near the n. edge of
Tonto basin, central Arizona, were named
from this tribe, because of their supposed
early occupancy by them. Their present
village, composed of temporary cabins or
shelters of wattled canes and branches
and earth in summer, and of the natural
caves and crevices in winter, is situ-
ated 115 m. N. of Prescott and 7 m. s.
of the Grand canyon. The Havasupai
are well formed, though of medium
stature. They are skilled in the manu-
facture and use of implements, and
especially in preparing raw material, like
buckskin. The men are expert hunters,
the women adept in the manufacture of
baskets which, when lined with clay,
serve also as cooking utensils. Like tfie
other Yuman tribes, untilaffected by white
influences during recent years, their cloth-
ing consisted chiefly of deerskin and, for
the sake of ornament, both men and women
painted their faces with thick, smooth
coatings of flne red ocher or blue paint
prepared from wild indigo; tattooing and
scarification for ornament were also some-
times practised . I n sum mer they subsist
chiefly on corn, calabashes, sunflower
seeds, melons, peaches, and apricots,
which they cultivate by means of irriga-
tion, and also the wild datila and mescal,
in winter principally upon the flesh of
^me, whicQ they hunt m the surround-
ing uplands and mountains. While a
strictly sedentary people, they are un-
skilled in the manufacture of earthenware
and obtain their more modem implements
and utensils, except basketry, by barter
with the Hopi, with which people they
seem always to have had closer afiilia-
tion than with their Yuman kindred.
Their weapons in war and the chase were
rude clubs and pikes of hard wood, bows
and arrows, and, formerly, slings; but fire-
arms have practically replaced these more
primitive appliances. The gentile system
of descent or organization seems to be ab-
sent among the Havasupai, their society
consanguineally being patriarchal. They
are polygamists, the number of wives a
man shall have being limited apparently
only by his means for supporting them.
Betrothals by purchase are common, and
divorces are granted only on the ground
of unfaithfulness. The Havasupai occupy
a reservation of about 38,400 acres, set
aside by Executive order in 1880 and
1882. Their population was 300 in 1869,
233 in 1902, 174 in 1905. (h. w. h.)
Agua Supais.— Hodge, Arizona, 169, 1877. Ah-
Supai.— Bourke, Moquls of Ariz., 80, 1884. Ak'-ba-
Bu'-pai.— Gilbert, Yumavocab., B. A. E., 64, 1878
( Walapai form ) . Akuetu-pai.— Gatschet in Ztschr.
f. Ethnol., XV, 127, 1885. Ava-Snpiea.— Bancroft.
Anz. and N. Mex., 547, 1889. Av&npai.— Gat-
schet, op. cit., 123. GaainM.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869,
91, 1870. Casnino.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar.
27, 1863. Co-a-ni-nia.— Powell in Scribner'8 Mag.,
213, Dec. 1875. Ooohineana.— Emory, Recou., 96,
1848 (trans, 'dirty fellows'). Goohniolmot.—
Bartlett, Pers. Narr., ii, 178, 1854. Ooconinos.—
Gushing in Atlantic Mo.. 544, Oct. 1882. Ooho-
ninos.— Bourke, Moquis of Ariz., 80, 1884. Ooj-
nino.— Sitgreaves, Expedition, 15, 1853 (name by
which a Hav^stlpai called himself) . Gojonina. —
Scott in Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 62, 1893.
Cominas.— Vargas (1692), cited bv Davis, Span.
Conq. N. Mex., 370, 1869. Gominot.— Browne,
Apache Country, 290, 1869 (mentioned as a branch
of Gila Apache). Ooninas.— Rivera, Diario y Der-
rotero, leg. 950, 1736. Oonninoa.— Pumpelly, Across
America and Asia, map, 1870. Gosninaa.— Garc^s
( 1776) , Diary, 472. 1900. GoMiinoi.— Whipple. Pac.
R. R. Rep., HI, pt.i, 82. 1856. Guaaninaa.— Garcia
(1776), Diary, 445, 1900 (erroneously said to be
Maricopa name for Mohave ) . Goinuer. — Orozco y
Berra, (Jeografia, 59, 1864 (misquoting Garc4s).
Cuisnun.— Garc6s (1776), Diary, 446, 1900. Gulia-
niana.— Ibid., 473 (erroneously said to be applied
to Mohave). Guhanurs.— Ibid, (erroneously said
to be applied to the Mohave) . aabaaopia.— Oibbs.
MS. map of Colorado tribes, B. A. E., no. 282. Ha-
ha-vaau-pai.— James, Inds. Painted Desert, 196, 199,
1903 ('people of the blue water'). Eavasopi. —
Thomas, MS., no. 602, B. A. E., 1868. 'Eavaaua
Pai.— Ewing in Great Divide, 203, Dec. 1892.
Ea-va-tu-pai.— Gushing in Atlantic Mo., l, 874,
' Sept. 1882. Hava-tu-pay.— Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, iv, 366, 1892. Eavetu-pai.— Ewine.
op. cit. 'Havitua Pai.— Ibid. Jabetua.— Garcis
(1776), Diary, 340, 1900. Java SupaU.— Baxter in
Harper's Mag., June 1882. Javensa.— Escudero,
Noticias de Chihuahua, 228, 1834 (misquotii^
Garc^). Koohninakwe.— ten Kate, ReizeninN.
A., 300, 1885 (Zufii name: ♦ Pifion nut people'?).
Koohonino. — Ibid., 259. Ko'-hni'-na.— Gilbert,
Yuma vocab., B. A. E., 64, 1878 (Hopi name).
K5honino.— Voth, Traditions of the Hopi, 19, 1905
( Hopi name) . Kokoninoa.— Gatschet in Zeitscbr.
f. Ethnol., xviil, 97, 1886. K6iuao.— Ibid., XV,
124, 1883 (Hopi name) , Kox-nina' kwe.— ten Kate,
Svnonomie, 7, 1884 (Zufii name, borrowed from
the Hopi). K6xni]iaine.—- Ibid. (Hopi name).
Kuohnikwe.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., 300, 1885
(Zufii name: 'Pifion nut people'?). Kuhni
kwe.— Gushing in Atlantic Mo., L, 362, Sept. 1882
(Zufii name; fcMv?=' people'). Ku'h-nis.— Escu-
dero, Noticias de Chihuahua, 228, 1834 (mis-
quoting Garc6s, 1776). Kuxni-kue.— Gatschet In
Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., xv, 124, 1883 (Zufii name).
Kation of the Willows.— Gushing in Atlantic Mo.,
L, 362, 541, 1882. Kavisu-pai.— Gatschet, op. cit.,
X v,127, 1883 (a Walapai form ) . People of the Wil-
lows.—Powell in 3d Rep. B. A. E., xix, 1884.
Supait.— Gushing in Atlantic Mo., 644, Oct. 1882
(after "Arizona Miner" ). Supiea.— Hinton, Hand-
book to Arizona. 353, 1878. Supia.— Orozco y Berra,
Geografia, 59, 386, 1864 (erroneously given as
part of Faraou Apache ) . Suppai.— Ind. Aff. Rep.,
BOLL. 30]
- HAVERSTRAW — HAWIKUH
539
Ixxxi, 1886. Tonto Cotnino.— Mollhausen, TaKe-
buch, II, 196, 1858. Tabipait Jabetua.— Garc<^s
(1776), Diary. 414, 1900. Yavai Suppai.— Arthur
(1882) in Ind Aff. Rep., 297, 1886. Yavipai Jab-
ema.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, ni,
112, 1890 (after Gare^) . Taripai javesua.— orozco
y Berra, Geoff., 41, 1864 (after Garc<^s). Tuva-
SspaL— Ck)rbU8ier in Am. Antiq., 276, Sept. 1886.
HaTentraw (Dutch: haver stroo, * oat-
straw'). The name applied by the
Dutch to a small tribe or band (according
to Ruttenber, a division) of tlie Unami
Delawares, formerly living on the w. bank
of the lower Hudson, in Rockland co.,
N. Y. The name they applied to them-
selves is lost, but it may have been Re-
weghnorae or Rumachenanck.
HaTantraw.— Van Ck)uwenhoven (1664) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., XIII, 864, 1881. Haverttroo.— De
Laet (1633) quoted by Ruttenber. Tribes Hudnon
R., 71, 1872. RewMhBOBfh.— Treaty of 1664 in N. V.
Doc. Col. Hist., XIII, 37.5, 1881 ('Rewechnongh
or Haverstraw ' ). Rumaohenanek.— Treat v of 1060,
ibid., 147 (apparently given as the tribal name).
Hawai. A former Diegiieilo ran(*hcria
under the Dominican mission of San
Mi^el de la Frontera, w. coast of I^ower
California, about 30 m. s. of San Dieji^o,
Cal. (a. s. «.)
Hawaiian influence. The establishment
of the whale and seal fisheries of the n.
Pacific coast led to the presence in that
region of sailors and att venturers of the
most diverse races and nationalities,
many of whom came into more or less
lasting contact with the natives of the
country. Toward the middle of the 19th
century ^Hale, Oregon Trade Lanjjuage,
19, 1890) the Hawaiian language was
spoken by al)out 100 Sandwich Islanders
employed as laborers about Ft Vancou-
ver, Wash. Doubtless some intermix-
ture of these with the Indians took
place. In 1891 there lived among the
Kutenai an Indian nicknamed Kanaka.
Murdoch (9th Rep. B. A. E., 55, 1892)
notes that several Hawaiian words have
crept into the jareon as used by the west-
em Eskimo and white whalers and traders
who come into contact with them, and
one or two of these words have even
come to be emplayed by tlie Pt Barrow
Eskimo among themselves; but there is
no evidence that tlie Chinook jargon con-
tains a Hawaiian element. Swanton sug-
gests that it is barely possible that the
Haida custom of tattooing may liave come
from some Polynesian island, as its intro-
duction is always said by the natives to
be recent. Whether the idea of a ladder
made of a chain of arrows, which occurs
among the myths of Polynesians and the
people of the "N. W. coast, could have had
a similar origin may be doubted, but it
is nevertheless possible. The theory of
Polynesian-American contact has been
maintained by Ratzel, Schultz, and others,
stress being laid on resemblances in art as
exemplified by clul>s, masks, etc., and in
other ways. (a. f. c. )
Hawikuh (ha ire 'leaves', wikii *gum').
A former pueblo of tlie Zuni and one of
theSevenCitiesof Cibola of early Spanish
times, situated alK)Ut 15 m. s. w. of the
present ZuHi pueblo, N. Mex., near the
summer vi 1 lage of ( )jo Caliente. Hawikuh
was seen in 1539 by Fray Marcos de Niza,
who viewed it from an adjacent height a
few days after the murder, by the ZuiRi of
Hawikuh, of Estevanico, the former negro
companion of Cal>eza de Vaca. Fray
Marcos referred to it by the name of Aba-
cus. In the following year Francisco
Vasquez Coronado visited the pueblo
with his advance guard, and as its inhab-
itants offered resistance, the village was
stormed and captured, most of its people
fleeing for safety to Taaiyalcme, a mesa
E. of the nresent Zufli. Coronado referre<l
to Hawikuh, under the name Granada,
as the chief pueblo of Cibola, containing
al)out 200 houses, and from there wrote
his account of the journey to the viceroy
Mendoza, Aug. 15, 1540. A Franciscan
misi^ion was established at Hawikuh in
1629, at which time the pueblo contained
a]x)ut 110 houses. Owing to Navaho or
Apache depredations in Oct., 1670, when
many of the Zufii as well as the mis-
sionary of Hawikuh were killed, the
pueblo was abandone<l and never after-
ward permanently occupied. It is said
that the roof timbers of the old church
at Zuili, which was erected about 1705,
were thosre used prtniously in the Hawi-
kuh chapel. A portion of the adoln^
walls of the latter building were still
standing until about 1894, when the
adobes were taken by the Indians to Ojo
Caliente and there used in the construc-
tion of new houses. See Mindeleff in 8th
Rep. B. A. E., 80, 1891; Bandelier (1)
Final Rep., pts. i, ii, 1890, 1892; (2)
Doc. Hist. Zufii Tribe, 1892; Cushing in
13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Hodge in Am.
Anthrop., viii, 142, 1895. (f. w. h.)
Abacu.— Heylyn, Coamoff., 968, 1703. Abacus.—
Blaeu, Atlas, xii, first map, 1667. Aguas Galien-
tea.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iii, 133. 1890
( Ha-ui-cn, oi:) . Aguasoobi.— Zarate - S a 1 ni e r o n
(m. ir.29) quoted by Bandelier in Mhr. West. Hist.,
66H, 18S6. Aguioo.— Cushing in Millstone, ix, 20,
Feb. 1S84 (misqnoting Coronado). Aguicobi.—
Ofiate(1598)inDoc.In^.,xvi.l33,1871. Aguscobi.—
Ibid.. 132. Ahaoua.— Niva (1539) in Hakluyt,Vov.,
443, 1600. Apaout.— Davis, Span. Conq. N. Mex.,
128, 1869 (misquoting Marcos de Niza) . Aquioo.—
Espejo (1583) in Doc. In6d., xv, 118. 181, 1871.
Auoioo.— MS. of 1676 quoted by Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, iv, 888, 1892. Aviou.— Cushing in
Compte-rendu Internal. Cong. Am., vii, 156, 1890
(given as an early Spanish form). Gibola.— Ca.s-
tafleda (ca. 1565) in 14th Kep. B. A. £., 488, 1896.
Oranada. — Coronado (1540) in Hakluyt, Voy., iii,
449, 451, 1600. Granade.— Gomara, Hist. Gen., 467b.
1606. Granado.— Purchas, Pil^rimes, 648, 1613;
V. 853, 1626. GraoaU.~Coronado (1540) in Ramn-
Bio, Nav. et Viaggi, 361, 863. 1565. Grenada.— Simp-
son in Smithson. Rep. 1869. 330, 1871. Grenade.—
Sanson, map I'Am^riqne. 28. 1657. Hahauien.—
Peet in Am. Antiq., xvii,352, 1895(mi.«<prlnt). Ha
Huioo.—Za rate-Sal meron ( 1629) cited by Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 154, 1889 (Havico or). Haicu.—
540
HAWMANAO HEALTH AND DISEASK
[B. A. B.
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 326, 1892 (mis-
print). H«-ui-ca.— Bandelier quoted in Arch.
Inst. Rep., V, 43, 1884. Eft-ui-eu.— Bandelier in
Revue d'Btbnog., 202, 1886. Eavioo.— Zarate-Sal-
meron {ca. 1629), Relacion, in Land of Sunshine,
47, Dec. 1899. Ea-Ti-ou.— Bandelier In Mag. West.
Hist., 668, Sept. 1886. Ea-wi-k'hu.— Cushing in
Millstone, x. 4. Jan. 1886. Ha-wi-k'uh.-Ibid., 19,
Feb. 1884. H«-wi-k*uh-ia]it.— Ibid., 20 (=thejpeo-
ple of Hawikuh). Ea-wi-kuht.— Powell, 2d Rep.
B. A. E., xxvii, 1883. Eay-way-ku.— Fewkes in
Jour. Am. Ethnol. and Archseol., i, 100, 1891.
Eay-we-ou.— Ibid., map. Jahuieu.— Escalantc
(1778) quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
IV, 257, 1892. Koikawkuk.— Pcet in Am. Antiq.,
XVII, 852, 1895 (misprint). La Conoepoion de Agui-
CO.— Vetancurt (1693) in Teatro Mex., 320, 1871.
Hueua Granada.— Gal vano (1563) in Hakluvt Soc.
Pabl., XXX, 227, 1862. Kueva Granada.— Bareia,
Ensayo, 21, 1723. Ojo-ealiente.— A 1 c e d o , Die.
Geog., Ill, 870, 1788 (doubtless identical). Roia
Eawiouii. — Villaseflor misquoted by Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 252, 1889 (confused with Abi-
quiu). Santa Rosa de Eauieoi.— Alcedo, Die.
(ieog., II, 355, 1787. SanU Rosa Eaviouii.— Villa-
sefior, Theatro Am., pt. 2, 413, 1748. Tzibola.—
Mota-Padllla (1742), Hist. Nueva Espafia, 111, 1871.
ZiboU.— Perea, Verdadera Rel., 4, 1632.
Hawmanao (Xdmando). A ^ns of the
Quatsino, aKwakiutl tribe. — Boas in Rep.
Nat. Mus. for 1895, 329.
Hayah (Ild-yah). The Snake clan of
the Pecos tribe of New Mexico. — Hewett
in Am. Anthrop., vi, 439, 1904.
Head deformation. See Artificial head
deformation,
Heakdhetanwan {Ifr-a^yi^ ta^waf^^). Ah
ancient Osajje villajje on Spring cr., a
branch of Neosho r., Indian Ter. — Dor-
sey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883.
Health and Disease. There is little evi-
dence to show what diseases prevailed
among the Indians n. of Mexico prior to
the advent of white j)eople. The tra-
ditions of the Indians, the existence
among them of elaborate healing rites of
undoubtedly ancient origin, their plant-
lore, in which curative properties are
attributed to many vegetal substances, and
the presence among them of a numerous
class of professed healers, honored, feared,
and usually well paid, would seem to indi-
cate that diseases were not rare, but actual
knowledge and even tradition as to their
nature are wanting. The condition of the
skeletal remains, the testimony of early
observers, and the present state of some
of the tribes in this regard, warrant the
conclusion that on the whole the Indian
race was a comparatively healthy one. It
was probably spare<l at least some of the
epidemics and diseases of the Old World,
such as smallpox and rachitis, while other
scourges, such as tuberculosis, syphilis
(precolumbian), typhus, cholera, scarlet
fever, cancer, etc. , were rare, if occurring
at all. Taking into consideration the
warlike nature of many of the tril)e8 and
the evidence presentee! by their bones
(especially the skulls), injuries, etc.,
particularly those received by offensive
weapons, must have been common, al-
though fractures are less frequent than
among white people.
At the time of the discovery the In-
dians on the whole were probably slowly
increasing in numbers. Frequent wars,
however, had a marked effect in limiting
this increase. Since their contact with
whites most of the tribes have gradually
diminished in strength, while some of
the smaller tribes have disappeared en-
tirely. Very few tribes have snown an in-
crease or even maintained their former
numbers. The most remarkable exanople
of steady gain is the Navaho tribe. The
causes of decrease were the introduction
of diseases (particularly smallpox), the
spread of alcoholism, syphilis, and especi-
ally tuberculosis, destructive wars with
the whites, and increased mortality due to
changes in the habits of the peo{)le through
the encroachment of civilization. Dur-
ing recent years a slow augmentation in
population has been noticed amon^ a
number of tribes, and as more attention
is paid to the hygienic conditions of the
Indians, an increase comparable to that
in whites mav be expected in many sec-
tions. The least hopeful conditions in
this respect prevail among the Dakota
and other tribes of the colder northern
regions, where pulmonary tuberculosis
and scrofula are very common. (See
Population.)
While preserving much of their robust
constitution, the Indians — ^particularly
those of mixed blood — ^are at present
subject to many disorders and diseases
known to the whites, although the pure
bloods are still free from most of the
serious morbid conditions and tendencies
due to defective inheritance. They suffer
little from insanity, idiocy; and rachitis.
Cretinism is exceedingly rare, and gen-
eral paresis, with a large number of
serious nervous affections, has not yet
been recorded among them. Diseases of
the heart, arteries, and veins, serious
affection of the liver and kidneys,
as well as typhoid and 8(»rlet fever are
infrequent. Congenital malformations
are very rare, although it is commonly
heard among the Indians themselves that
they do sometimes occur, but that the
afflicted infants are not allowed to live.
Fractures, and diseases of the bones in
general, as well as dental caries, are less
frequent than among the whites. There
is considerable doubt whether cancer
occurs in any form. Venereal diseases,
while predominant among the more de-
graded Indians, are more or less effectu-
ally guarded against by others.
The most common disorders of health
now experienced among Indians gener-
ally are those of the gastro-intestinal
tract, which in infancy are due to im-
proper feeding and particularly to the
universal consumption of raw, unripe
fruit and vegetables, and in later life to
the lack of or overindulgence in food,
BULL. 30]
HEASHKOWA HEHLKOAN
541
irr^ular meals, the preference for fat,
crudely prepared food, and, recently, the
misuse of mferior baking powders and
excessive use of coffee. While most of
the disorders thus introduced are of a
minor character, others, particularly in
infants, are frequently fatal. Other more
common diseases are various forms of
malaria, bronchitis, pneumonia, pleurisy,
and measles in the young. Whooping
cough is also met with. Inflammation of
the conjunctivse is common and often leads
to ulceration, opacity, and defect in or
even total loss of vision. Defective hear-
ing is occasionally found in the aged, and
there are rare instances of deaf mutes.
Eczema, favus, and acnae are among the
more ordinary affections of the skin.
Tuberculosis of the lungs, and glandular
tuberculosis, or scrofula, are frequent in
many localities and are especially com-
mon among the reservation Indians in
the colder parts of the United State?*,
particularly m North Dakota, South Da-
kota, and Montana, due to their present
mode of life. They live in small, insan-
itary hovels, which in cold weather are
ill ventilated and often overheated and
crowded, while their dress is heavier than
formerly, their daily life less active, their
food changed, and, what is most impor-
tant, there is complete ignorance of the
contagious nature of consumption. Some
of these conditions, however, are being
gradually bettered.
Goiter is widely distributed, though
seldom prevalent; it is found particularly
among some bands of the Sioux, and it oc-
curs also with some frequency among the
Menominee, Oneida, Crows, and White
Mountain Apache. Albinism occurs
among a number of the tribes; the cases,
however, are quite isolated, except among
the Hopi and to a lesser degree the Zufli.
In 1903 there were 12 cases of albinism in
the former and 4 in the latter tribe, all of
the complete variety. Vitiligo is much
more scattered, but the cases are few.
Diseases and functional disturbances pe-
culiar to women, including those of the
puerperium, are much less common among
Indians than amon^ the white women of
this country. Of diseases peculiar to old
age, senile arthritis, which affects particu-
larly the spine, and occasional dementia,
are found. Senility proceeds slowly in
the pure-blood Indian, and the number
of individuals above 80 years of age, ac-
cording to census returns (which, how-
ever, should be regarded with caution) ,
is relatively greater than among the
whites. See Anatomy^ Physiology.
Consult Bancroft, Native Races (with
bibliographical references), i-v, 1882;
Hrdlicka, Physiological and Medical Ob-
servations Among the Indians ( with bib-
liography), Bull. 33, B. A. E., 1906; Jesuit
Relations, Thwaites ed., i-Lxxiii, 1896-
1901; Josselyn, New-England's Rarities
(1672), repr. 1865; Reports of the Com-
missioner of Indian Affairs; Report on
Indians, Eleventh U. S. Census (1890),
1894; Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes, i-vi,
1851-57. (A. n.)
Heashkowa. A prehistoric pueblo of the
RedCom (Kukinish-yaka) clan of A coma,
situated at the foot of a mesa about 2 m. s. e.
of the present Acoma pueblo, N. Mex.
According to tradition it was built by the
Red Corn clan when the tribe entered its
present valley from the n. and settled at
Tapitsiama. It is said that when the vil-
lage was abandoned some of the inhabi-
tants joined the main body of the tribe
while the remainder migrated southward.
(f. w. h.)
Hebron. A Moravian Eskimo mission,
founded in 1880, on the e. I^brador coast,
lat.58°.— Hind., I^b. Penin., ii, 199, 1863.
Hecatari. A former Nevome pueblo of
Sonora, Mexico, with 127 inhabitants in
1730; situated probably at or near the
junction of the w. branch of the Rio
Yaqui with the main stream, about lat.
28° SO''. Orozco y Berra classes it as a
pueblo of the upper Pima.
Hecatari.— Rivera (1678) quoted by Bancroft, No.
Mex. States, i, 513, 1884. Hecatazi.— Orozco y
Berra, Geog., 347, 1864.
Heda-haidagai ( Xe^da xd^-idA r/a-i, ' peo-
ple living on the low ground'). A sub-
division of the Stawas-naidagai, a Haida
family of the Eagle clan; named from the
character of the ground on which their
houses stood in tlie town of Cumshewa.
The town chief belonged to this subdivi-
sion.— S wanton, Cont. Haida, 273, 1905.
Hediondo ( Span. : * fetid '). A Huichol
rancheria about 2 J m. w. of Raton tita, in
Jalisco, Mexico. — Lumholtz, Unknown
Mex., II, 271, 1902.
Ranoho Hediondo.— Lumholtz, ibid.
Hegan. According to Pike ( N. H . H ist.
Soc. Coll., Ill, 56, 1832) some English
near Kittery, York.co., Me., were at-
tacked in 1706 "by their good friends, the
Hegans. ' * This may mean some relatives
of Hogkins or Hawkins, a chief of the
hostile Pennacook, formerly living in that
vicinity. It can hardly mean the Mohe-
gan, who were not hostile and who did
not live in the neighborhood. ( j. m. )
Hehametawe (He^ha^me^tawe, * descend-
ants of Hametawe*). A subdivision of-
the Laalaksentaio, a Kwakiutl gens. —
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 332.
Hehlkoan ( * people of Foam ' ) . A Tlin-
git division at Wrangell, Alaska, belong-
ing to the Wolf clan. They are named
from a place called Foam (Xei)y close to
Loring, where they lived before joining
the Stikine.
Chrelch-kon.— Krausc, Tlinkit Ind., 120, 1885.
Oetlk-oan.— Boas, 5tti Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 26,
1889. Zet koaa—S wanton, field notes, B. A. £. , 1904.
542
HEILTStJK HEMISPHERES
[B. A.B.
HeUtsnk (He^-iU-suq), A dialect of
Kwakiutl embracing the Bellabella (after
whoso native name it is called), the China
Hat, Soinehulitk, Nohunitk, and Wikeno.
Tlie number of Indians speaking the dia-
lect was about 500 in 1904. (.i. r. s. )
Heitotowa. A Choctaw town in the
Choctaw Nation, Ind. T., situated at the
later Sculleville.
Hei-to-to-wee. — Mollhausen, Journey, i, 32, 1858.
Hekhalanois ( Hexcild^nois ) . The ances-
tor of a Koskimo gens, after whom it
was sometimes called. — Boas in Peter-
manns Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 1887.
Hekpa. The Fir clan of the Honau
(Bear) phratry of the Hopi.
Helt-pa.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 38, 1891.
Helapoonuch. A former Chumashan
village situated about 15 m. from Santa
Barbara mission, Cal. — Father Timeno
(1856) quoted bv Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
May 4, 1860.
Helioopile. A village, nameil after a
chief, on lower St Johns r., Fla., in 1564,
probably belonging to Saturiwa*s con-
federacy.
Helioopile.— Laudonniere (1567) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., n. s., 349, 1869. Hilicopile.— Oourgue
(1568), ibid., 2d s., Il, 280, 1875.
Helikllika. An ancestor of a gens of the
Nakomgilisala tribe of Kwakiutl. — Boas
in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 1887.
Hellelt. A Salish tribe on Chimenes
r., 8. w. Vancouver id., speaking the Co-
wichan dialect; pop. 28 in 1904.
Hal-alt.-Can. Ind. Aff., 308. 1879. Haltait —Ibid.,
79, 1878. Hel-alt.— Ibid.. 1883, pt. I, 190. HeUal.—
Ibid., 1892, 313. Hel-lalt.— Ibid., 1889, 269. Hel-
lelt.—Ibid., 1901, pt. II, 164. OaUatq.- Boas, MS.,
B. A. E., 1887.
lUllo (HH'lo^). A former Chumashan
village on Mooris id., w. of Santa Bar-
bara, Cal. — Henshaw, Buenaventura MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
Helthen (* sandy beach'; lit, * soft to
the foot'). A Squawmish village com-
munity on Burrard inlet, Brit. Col.
Helcen.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. 8., 475, 1900.
Heluta. A former Cholovone village
in San Joaquin co.^ Cal., near San Joa-
quin r. — Pinart, Cholovone MS., B. A. E.,
1880.
Hematite. An iron ore much used by the
native tribes for implements, ornaments,
and small objects of problematical use.
It is found in many parts of the country
and in great abundance in the Iron
Mountain district of Missouri and in the
Marquette region of Michigan. It occurs
as a massive ore, as nodules, and in other
forms, distributed through rocks of vari-
ous classes, and is usually dark in color,
showing various shades of gray, brown,
and red. The specular varieties are gen-
erally rather gray, and have a metallic
luster. The red, earthy varieties, when
compact, are known as red chalk, and
when much disintegrated and pulveru-
lent, as red ocher. They were, and are,
much used as paint b^ the aborigines,
and small quantities, either in lumps or
as powder, are commonly found in ancient
graves, placed there for personal embel-
lishment in the future existence. The
highly siliceous varieties are often very
hard, heavy, and tough, and make excel-
lent implements. They were used espe-
cially in the manufacture of celts, axes.
scrapers, etc., and for the rudely shapjed
hammers and sledges that served in min-
ing work, as in the iron mines at Leslie,
Mo. (Holmes). Many of the celts and
celt-like implements are quite small, and
in some cases probably served as amulets.
Grooved axes of this material are of some-
what rare occurrence, but objects of prob-
le'matical use, such as cones, hemispheres,
and plummets, are common, and on ac-
count of their high finish, richness of
color, and luster, are much prized by col-
lectors. Hematite objects are found in
mounds and on dwelling sites in the
middle Mississippi valley region, in the
Ohio valley, ana extending into e. Ken-
tucky and Tennessee to w. North Caro-
lina, and to a limited extent in the S., in
the Pueblo country, and on the Pacific
coast. A small, well-shaped figure of
this material, representing a bird, and
neatly inlaid with turouoise and white
shell, is among the collections obtained
by Pepper from the Pueblo Bonito ruin,
New Mexico. Hematite is not always
readily distinguishable from limonite
(which is generally yellowish or brownish
in tint), and from some other forms of
iron ore. See Mines and Quarries,
References to hematite objects are
widely distributed throughout the liter-
ature of American archeology. Among
others the following authors may be con-
sulted: Douglass in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat
Hist., VIII, 1896; Fewkes(l) in 17th Rep.
B. A. E., 730, 1898, (2) in 21st Rep.
B. A. E., 77, 1903; Fowke in 13th Rep.
B. A. E., 1896; Holmes in Smithson. Rep.
1903, 1904; Moorehead, Prehist. Impls.,
1900; Pepper in Am. Antbrop., vii, 195,
1905. (w. H. H.)
Hembem. A former Maidu village on
the E. side of North fork of American r.,
about 6 m. s. e. of Colfax, Placer co.,
Cal. — Dixon m Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.,
XVII, pi. xxxviii, 1905.
Hemispheres, Spheres. Small objects,
usually of polished stone, the use of which
has not been fully determined; they are
therefore classed with problematical ob-
jects. The more typical forms, found in
the mounds, are often of hematite and, like
the cones, rarely exceed a few ounces in
weight. Hemispheres are comparatively
numerous, but spheres referable to this
group are rare. Hammerstones and
stones used as club-heads (see Clubs^
Hammers) are often spherical, oat ostially
BULL. 30]
HKMI^TOWN HEPOWWOO
543
Hemisphere op hema-
tite; WEST Virginia.
they are not well finished, and occa-
sionally larae cannonball-like stones are
found which can not be properly classed
with the smaller polished objects. The
base of the hemispheres is flat, rarely
slightly hollowed out, and varies from a
circle to a decided ellipse, while the ver-
tical section departs considerably from a
true semicircle. Typical objects of this
group are most plentiful in the middle
Ohio valley. It is surmised that they
served in playing some game, as talismans
or charms, or for some special shaman-
istic purpose. According to Grinnell
(inf n, 1906) small balls of stone are still
used by some Plains tribes in a game.
Little girls roll them on the ice in wmter,
trying to move a small stick resting on
the ice in front of the op{X)sing party,
perhaps 20 ft distant. If the stick is
touched and moved, the
8i<le which rolls the ball
may roll it again, and a
point is counte<l. If the
stick is not moved, the))all
is rolled by one of the oi>-
posing party who endeav-
ors to move the stick which
rests on the ice in front of her opponent.
A small stone sphere was used by the
Pima of Arizona in a kickeil ball game,
and numerous small spheres, usually of
soft stone, are found in prehistoric ruins
in Salt river valley of the same territory.
Consult Rau in Smithson. Cont., xxii,
1877; Fowke(l) in 13th Rep. B. A. E.,
1896, (2) ArchaH)l. Hist. Ohio, 1902;
Hrdlicka in Am. Anthrop., viii, no. 1,
1906; Moorehead, Prehist. Impls. 1900;
Gushing in Compte-rendu Internat. Cong.
Am., VII, 178, 1890. (w. ii. ii.)
Hemptown (translation of the native
name, Gat(if\diVifi). A fonner Cherokee
settlement on a creek of the same name,
near the present Morgant<^n, Fannin co.,
Ga.— Moonev in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 519,
1900.
Henaggi. An Athapascan tribe or band
residing, according to Powers (Cont. N.
A. Ethnol., 111,65, 1877), on Smith r., Cal.
A treaty was made with them Aug. 17,
1867. It is said they were exceedingly
hostile to the neighboring bands^ whom
they were related, but this hostility was
probably only a temporary feud. They
are seemingly extinct.
BafiiM.— IndT Aflf. Rep. 1856. 219, 1857 (possibly
identical) . Hanafs.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June
8, 1860. Eavnagfi.— Keane in Stanford, Com-
Bmd., 665, 1878. Eaynaxvee.— Gibbs. letter to
azen, B. A. E., 1856. Hay-narg-fer.— A. W. Ham-
ilton, MS. vocab., B. A. E. He-nag-gi.— Powers
in Ck)nt. N. A. Ethnol., in, 65, 1877. He-nar-
g«r.— Hamilton, yocab., op. cit.
Henakralaio (H^nakyalaso), An an-
cestor of a gens of the Kwakiutl tribe
Tlatlasikoala, after whom it was some-
times called. — Boas in Petermanns Mitt.,
pt. 6, 131, 1887.
Hendrick. A Mohawk chief, son of Tht3
Wolf, a Mohegan, and a Mohawk woman;
often called King Hendrick. With many
of his men he participated in the cam-
paign against the French in 1755, and not-
withstandingthe strong tendency of Brad-
dock's defeat in that year to draw the In-
dians to the side of the French, Hendrick,
at the request of (len. Johnson, joined the
Knfflish army, which met 2,000 French
under Gen. Dieskau at Lake (teorge, N. Y.
At the battle which there took place,
Sept. 8, 1755, Hendrick and many of his
followers were killed. He was then less
than 70 years of age.
Henicohio. Mentioned, in connection
with Puaray, apparently as a pueblo of
the Tigua in New Mexico in 1598. — Ofiate
(1598) in Doc. Ined., xvi, 115, 1871.
Heniocane. A former tribe in s. Texas,
encountered by Fernando del Boscjue in
1675 and said to number 178, including
()5 warriors. They were probably related
to the Coahuiltecan tribt^s.
Oeniocane.— Fernando del Bosque (1675), in Nat.
Geog. Mag., xiv, 346, 1903.
Henry, William. See (ieleUmend,
Hens. Seemingly derived from a New
England Indian cognate of Algonkin,
Chippewa, and Cree^»w, *a shell,' especi-
ally a small shell, with which may be
compared the Natick anua {'*<niu») and
the Abnaki <//.«» (l = n). The early Eng-
lish colonists of New England by prefix-
ing h formed hens^ which they applied to
the qitahaiiff, quahork, or poquahork\ *a
little thick shellfish ' ( Vemis mercena-
na)^ from an interior portion of the shell
of which the New England Indians manu-
factured xurkanhockj 'black or purple
l)eads,' commonly called j>uri)le wampum^
t>ee Wampum. (J. n. b. h.)
Hennti. The extinct ('loud clan of the
gueblo of Sia, N. Mex.
«n'-na-ti.— Stevenson in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 19,
1894. He'nuti-hino.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix.
349, 1896 (/»«/*«= 'people').
Henya. A Tlingit tril)e on the w.
coast of Prince of Wales id., Alaska, be-
tween Tlevak narrows and Sumner strait;
pop. 300 in 1869, 500 in 1881, 262 in 1890,
and about the same in 1900. Their chief
town is Klawak; other towns are Shakan
and Tuxican. The social divisions of the
tribe are Ganahadi, Hlkoayedi, Kakos hit
tan, Kuhinedi, Shunkukedi, Takwanedi,
and Tanedi. (j. r. s.)
Anega.— Mahony (1869) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 68. 41»t
Cong., 2d 8688., 19. 1870. Genuvikoe.— Veniami-
noff, Zapiski, ii, pt. 3, 30, 1840. Hanaga.— Kane,
Wand. N. A., app., 1859. Eaneca.— 11th Census,
Alaska, 158, 18w). Hanieas.— Borrows in H. R.
Kx. Doc. 197, 42d Cong., 2d sess., 4. 1872 (probably
identical). Hcwa-kdn.— Krause^Tlinkit Ind.. 111.
1885. Henn«-ga-k5n.— Ibid., 120. Heii]iegaa.~]bid.,
111. Henya qoan.— Swanton, field notes, B. A. E.,
1904.
Hepowwoo. A former Luisefio village
in the neighborhood of San Luis Rey
mission, s. Cal.— Tavlor in Cal. Farmer,
Mav 11, 1860.
544
HERALDRY HE8HOTA AYAHLTONA
[B. A. B.
Heraldry. Among the tribes of the n'eat
plains, ana perhaps of other sections, there
existed a well-defined system of military
and family designation comparable with
the heralaic system of Europe. It found
its chief expression in the painting and
other decoration of the shield and tipi,
with the body paint and adornment of
the warrior himself, and was guarded by
means of religious tabu and other cere-
monial regulations. The heraldic tipis,
which mieht number one-tenth of the
whole body, usually belonged to promi-
nent families by hereditary descent. The
shield belonged to the individual warrior,
but several warriors misht carry shields
of the same origin and pattern at the
same time, while so far as known the her-
aldic tipi had no contemporary duplicate.
Both tipi and shield were claimed as
the inspiration of a vision, and the de-
sign and decoration were held to be
in accordance with the instructions im-
parted to the first maker by the pro-
tecting spirit of his dream. The tipi is
common! V named from the most notable
feature of the painting, as the * buffalo
tipi,' *star tipi,* etc. The shield was
more often known by the name of the
originator and maker of the series, but
certain more noted series were known
as the * buffalo shield,' *bird shield,'
*sun shield,' etc., the 'medicine' or pro-
tecting power being believed to come
from the buffalo, bird, or sun spirits re-
spectively. Shields of the same origin
were usually but not necessarily retained
in the possession of members oi the fam-
ily of the original maker, and handed
down in time to younger members of the
family, unless buried with the owner. A
certain price must be paid and certain
tabus constantly observed by the owner
of either shield or tipi. Thus the heir
to a certain heraldic tipi in the Kiowa
tribe must pay for it a captive taken in
war, while those who carried the bird
shield were forbidden to approach a
dead bird, and were under obligation on
killing their first enemy in battle to
eat a portion of his heart. Those of the
same shield generally used a similar body
paint and headdress, pony decorations,
and war cry, all having direct reference
to the spirit of the original vision, but no
such regulation appears to have existed
in connection with any tipi. The flag
carried on the upper Columbia by the
followers of the prophet Smohalla is an
instance of the adaptation of Indian sym-
bolism to the white man's usage (Mooney
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896).
Among the Haida and some other tribes
of the N. W. coast, according to Swanton
and other authorities, is found the germ
of a similar system. Here, in many cases,
the clan totem, or perhaps the personal
manito of the individual, has evolved into
a crest which persons of the highest rank,
i. e. of greatest wealth, are privileged to
figure by carving or painting upon their
totem poles, houses, or other belongings,
tattooing upon their bodies, or painting
upon their bodies in the dance, on pay-
ment of a sufficient number of * * potlatoh * '
gifts to secure recognition as chiefs or
leading members of the tribe. Theprivi-
lege is not hereditary, the successor of the
owner, usually his sister's son, beins
obliged to make the same ceremoniiu
payment to secure the continuance of the
pnvilege. (j. m.)
Hermho (Herm'-ho^ *once'). A Pima
village on the n. side of Salt r., 3 m.
from Mesa, Maricopa co., s. Ariz. — Rup-
sell, Pima MS., B. A. E., 1902.
i'md ilumiUt.— Russell, ibid.
Hero Myths. See Mythology, Religion,
Herring Pond. A former settlement on
a reserve established for Christian Indians
in 1655 at Herring Pond, Plymouth co.,
Mass. It is i)robably identical with CJo-
massakumkanit, mentioned by Bourne in
1674, and the Indians there seem to have
been considered a distinct tribe. In 1825
there were but 40 left, and these were of
mixed blood. ( j. m. )
Heshokta ( 'ancient town of the cliffs' ).
A ruined pueblo, formerly inhabited by
the Zufii, on a mesa about 5 m. n. w. of
Zufii pueblo, N. Mex. Cf. Shopakia.
Hethohtakwin.-ten Kate. Reizen in N. A., 291,
1885 (Heshoktakwin, or). H^okta.— Gushing,
Zufii Folk Tales, 366, 1901. Heth-o-U-thla-al-lar->
Fewkes in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and Archeeol., i. 111,
1891.
Heshota Ayahltona (* ancient buildings
above'). The ruins of a group of stone
houses pn the summit of Taaiyalana, or
Seed mtn., commonly called Thunder
mtn., about 4 m. s. e. of Zufli pueblo, N.
Mex . This mesa has been a place of refuge
for the Zufii at various periods since they
have been known to history, Coronado
mentioning it as such, although not by
name, in 1540. In 1632, after having
killed their first missionary, the Zufli
fled to the heights, remaining there until
1635. The ruined pueblo now to be seen
on the summit was built probably about
1680, on the site of the ancient fortifica-
tions alluded to by Coronado, as a refuge
against Spanish invasion during the
Pueblo revolt of that year, when the vil-
lages in the valley below — those that re-
mained of the Seven Cities of Cibola —
were abandoned. The tribe doubtless
occupied this stronghold uninterruptedly
for at least 12 years during the Pueblo
revolt, being found there by Vamis in
1692. In 1703 the Zufli ag^n fled to
their mesa village, after having killed 4
Spanish soldiers. This time they re-
mained until 1705, when thev returned
to the valley and began to build the pree-
BULL. 30]
HESHOTA HLUPTSINA HIABU
545
ent Zafii paeblo on a part of the site of
Halona. The ruins of Heshota Ayahl-
tona have been mistakenly regarded by
some writers as the ancient Cibola, hence
are often noted on maps as Old Zuili.
See Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 89,
1891; Bandelier (1) in Arch. Inst. Papers,
III, 134, 1890; iv, 335, 1892, (2) Doc. Hist.
Zuiii, in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and Archseol.,
Ill, 1892; Gushing, Zufli Creation Myths, in
13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Winship, Coro-
nado Exped., in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896.
(f. W. H.)
He-iho-U A'-yathl-to-iia.— Gushing, infn, 1891.
Mma de Oalisteo.— Vai^as (1692) quoted by Ban-
croft, Aiiz. and N. Mex., 200, 1889 (referring to the
mesa) . Old Tuni.— Wallace, Land of Pueblos, 238,
1888 (misprint). Old Zoni.— Common map form.
Tia-tt-yal-a-na-wan.— Gushing, infn, 1891 (lit.
* abiding place above on mountain-of-all-seed').
TAaiy£*hItona *Hl6eUwa.— Gushing in 13th Rep.
B. A. £., 429. 1896 (lit. 'towns-all-above of-the-
seed-air) . Toilleiuy.— Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo
Inds., 127, 1893 (refers to the mesa). To-yo-a-la-
Ba— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, pt. 1,
184, 1890. Zoni yifld%.~Domenech, Deserts, i, 211.
1860.
Heshota Hlnptsina (HSshoia-^hlup-tsina,
'ancient village of tne yellow rocks').
A prehistoric ruined stone pueblo of the
Zufli, situated between the '* gateway''
and the summer village of Pescado, 7 m.
E. of Zufli pueblo, N. Mex. ( f. w. h. )
Bethota Ihlnetiina.— Bandelier in Rev. d'Ethnog.,
200, 1886 (misprint). Beth-o-ta-top-ii-na.— Fewkes
in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and Archseol., i, map, 1891.
Eethota Thlne-tiinaa. — Bandelier in Arch. Inst.
Papers, iv, 838, 1892. Hethotathlulpttina. — ten
Kate. Reizen in N. A., 291, 1885. "VlUage of the
ToUow Rooks.— Gushing, Zufii Folk Tales, 104,
1901.
Heshota Imkoskwin (^ancient town sur-
rounded by mountains' ) . A ruined pueblo
near Tawyakwin, or Nutria, anciently
occupied by the northern clans of the
Zufii.— Gushing, infn, 1891.
Eoiho-U Im'-k*os-kwi-a.— Gushing, infn, 1891
(another form). Heshota Im-quosh-kuin.— Ban-
delier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 340, 1892. Botho-
ta Im-qnoih-quin.— Bandelier in Rev. d' Ethnog.,
202, 1886. He«h-o>ta-inkoi-qua.~Fewkes in Jour.
Am. Ethnol. and Archseol., i, 100, 1891. HethoU
Kimknoih-kaiii. — Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
IV, 340, 1892. Eetho-UHimqnodik-kttin.— Ibid. . 329.
Heshota Uhla (Hishota-ii^hla, * ancient
town of the embrasure 'J. A prehistoric
ruined stone pueblo of tne elliptical type,
supposed to be of Zufii origin; situatea at
the base of a mesa on Zufii r., about 5 m.
w. of the Zufii summervillageof Ojo Pesca-
do, or Heshotateina, N. Mex. So named,
according to Gushing, because it was em-
braced by hills, and by the turn of a
northern trail. (f. w. h.)
Heshota Vthia.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
IT, 22, 1892 (misprint). Hetho-U V-thla.— Ibid.,
829. Eeshotan'thla.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. A.,
291, 1885.
Heshqne. The principal village of the
Hesquiat (q. v.), on Hesquiat harbor,
Vancouver id.— Can. Ind. Aff., 264, 1902.
Hespatixigh. A village in 1657, probably
belonging to the Unami Delawares, and
apparently in n. New Jersey (Deed of
1667 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 393,
BuU. 30—05 35
1883). A clue to the locality is given by
Nelson (Inds. N. J., 124, 1894), who re-
cords Espatingh, or Ispatingh, as the
name of a hill back of Bergen, or about
Union Hill, in 1650.
HeBqniat. A Nootka tribe on Hesquiat
harbor and the coast to the westward,
Vancouver id.; pop. 162 in 1901, 150 in
1904. Their principal village is Heshque.
Esquiatet.— Jewitt, Narr.. 37, 1849. He'ekwUth.—
Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 81, 1890.
Hethque-aht.-Can. Ind. Aff., 188, 1883. Eesqni-
aht— Ibid., 131, 1879. Hesqmat.— Ibid., pt. 2, 158,
1901. Hishqua7aht.-Sproat, Sav. Life, 808, 1868.
Hoth-que-aht.— Can. Ind. Aff., 186, 1884.
Henchi. A Yokuts tribe formerly living
in the plains on or s. of Fresno r., n. cen-
tral Cal., and on Fresno reserve in 1861,
when they numbered 18.
Eawitches.— Barbour etal. (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc.
4, 32d Cong., spec, sess , 61, 1853. Haw-on-ohee.—
Ind. Com'r Jour. (1851), ibid., 61. Heuohi.- A. L.
Kroeber, infn, 1906 (correct form). Hou-«t-
ohut.— Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 82d
Cong., Ist sess.. 22, 1852. How-aoh-ees.— Barbour
(1852) , op. cit. , 252. How-a-ehez.— Lewis in Ind. Aff.
Rep., 899, 1857. Howoheet.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 219, 1861.
How-ech-ee.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782,
1899. How-eoh-et.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc.
4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 74, 1863.
Hendao {Xe-uda^Oy *the village that
fishes toward the south*). A Haida
town of the Kaidju-kegawai on the e. side
of Gull pt., Prevoetid., Queen Charlotte
ids., Brit. Col. — Swanton. Cont. Haida,
277, 1905.
Hevhaitanio {HhhaUa^niOy *hair men*,
*fur men*; sing., Ilhhaitdn), A princi-
pal division of tlie Cheyenne, q. v.
Eairy-Xen't band.— G. A. Dorsey in Field Columb.
Mus. Pub. no. 99, 13, 1905 (also Hairy-Men band).
Hev'» t&n i u.— Grinnell, Social Org. Cheyennes,
136, 1905 ( trans. ' hai ry men • ) . ^er'-hai-U-ni-o.—
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 290. 1862
('hairy people'). HMaiti'nio.— Moonev, infn,
1905 (see p. 254 of this Handbook). HSwi-tii'-
niuw'.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1025, 1896.
Heviq8iiipahis(i/«;^«^-nf*pato, * aortas
closed, by burning*; a\ng.,Hetiq8^-nVpa),
A principal division of the Cheyenne, g. v.
Aorto band— G. A. Dorsey in Field Columb. Mus.
Pub., no. 99, 13, 1905. Kvi'st^unl' paUt.— Mooney
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1025, 1896 (it does not mean
•smoky lodges', as stated in the Clark MS).
Hevlqt-nl'«kpahia.— Mooney, infn, 1905 (see p. 254
of this Handbook ) . I vUtk tsl nlh' pah.— Grinnell.
Social Org. Cheyennes, 136, 1905 (trans, 'small
wind-pipes ' ) . we hee tkeu ( ohien) . —Clark ( 1804)
in Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 190, 1904.
'Hewnt. The village of the Umpqua on
upper Umpoua r., Oreg.
Hay-woot.— Milhau, Umpqua Val. MS. vocab.,
B. A. E. He'-wut.— Milhau, Hewut MS. vocab.,
B. A. E.
Hia ( * band of Cree * ) . A former Ankara
band under chief Cherenakuta, or Yellow
Wolf.
Hi'-a.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol., 357, 1862.
Hiabn. A tribe met by De Leon, in
company with the Hapes, Jumenes (Ju-
mano), and Mescales, near the Rio
Grande, not far from the present Laredo,
Tex. , in 1696. It was probably a Coahuil-
tecan tribe.
Xiabu.— De Leon (1696) in Texas Hist Ass. Quar.,
vni, 205, 1905.
546
HIAMONEE HICKERAU
[B. A. V.
Hiamonee. A former Seminole village 5
m. from the Georgia boundary, on the
B. bank of Okloknee r., probably on the
present L. Lamony, Leon co., Fla.
Eiunonoe.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th CJong.,
1st sess., 27, 1826.
Hianagouy . Mentioned by Joutel ( Mar-
gry, D^c, III, 409, 1878) as a tribe living
probably in e. Texas in 1687, and hostile
to the Kadohadacho.
Hiantatsi. Mentioned by Joutel (Mar-
gry, D^c, III, 409, 1878) as a tribe living
probably in e. Texas in 1687, and hostile
to the Kadohadacho.
Hiaqna. Shell money and ornaments,
composed of strings of dentalia, used by
Indians of the n. Pacific coast. This
word, which has been variously spelled
haiquay hioquay hiquxiy hykwa^ iokway toqutty
etc., and even Iroquois^ is derived from
the name for dentalium in the Chinook
jargon. (a. f. c.)
Hiatam (HV-a-tamy * sea-sand place,'
from Hiakatdk), APima village n. of Mari-
copa station on the S. P. R. R., s. Ariz. —
Russell, Pima MS., B. A. E., 18, 1902.
Hiawatha {Hawt^hwa^^tha\ *he makes
rivers' ). A name and a title of a chief-
tainship hereditary in the Tortoise clan of
the Mohawk tribe; it is the second on the
roll of federal chieftainships of the Iro-
quois confederation. The first known
person to bear the name was a noted re-
former, statesman, legislator, and magi-
cian, justly celebrated as one of the found-
ers of the League of the Iroquois, the Con-
federation of Five Nations. Tradition
makes him a prophet also. He probably
flourished ab«ut 1570, a. d., and was the
disciple and active coadjutor of Dekana-
wida. These two sought to bring about
reforms which had for their object the
ending of all strife, murder, and war, and
the promotion of universal peace and
well- Dei ng. Of these one was the ref-
lation to abolish the wasting evils of in-
tratribal blood-feud by fixing a more or
less arbitrary price — 10 strings of wam-
pum, a cubit in length — as the value of
a human life. It was decreed that the
murderer or his kin or family must offer
to pay the bereaved family not only for
the dead person, but also for the life of
the murderer who bv his sinister act had
forfeited his life to them, and that there-
fore 20 strings of wampum should be
the legal tender to the bereaved family
for the settlement of the homicide of a
CO- tribesman. By birth Hiawatha was
probably a Mohawk, but he began the
work of reform among the Onondaj^,
where he encountered bitter opposition
from one of their most crafty and remorse-
less tyrants, Wathatotarho (Atotarho).
After three fruitless attempts to unfold
his scheme of reform in council, being
thwarted by the craft of his formidable
antagonist ( who for revenge destroyed his
opponent's daughters), Hiawatha left the
Onondaga and, exiling himself, sought
the aid of the Mohawk and other tril^.
But, meeting with little success among the
former, he continued his mission to the
Oneida, who willingly assented to his
plans on condition that the Mohawk
should do the same. The Mohawk, the
Cayug^, and the Oneida finally formed a
tentative union for the purpose of persuad-
ing the Onondaga to adopt the plan of
confederation, and the latter accepted it
on condition that the Seneca should also
be included. A portion of the Seneca
finally joined the confederation, whereon
the Onondaga, through Wathatotarho,
accepted the proposed union. As the
Onondaga chieftain was regarded as a
great sorcerer, it was inferred that in this
matter he had been overcome by superior
magic power exercised by Hiawatha and
Dekanawida, for they had brought Watha-
totarho under the dominion of law and
convention for the common welfare.
Hence in time the character of Hiawatha
became enveloped in mystery, and he was
reputed to have done things which prop-
erly belong to some of the chief gods of
the Iroquois. In this mystified form he
became the central figure of a cycle of in-
terrelated legends. Longfellow has made
the name of Hiawatha everywhere famil-
iar, but not so the character of the great
reformer. Schoolcraft, in his Algic Re-
searches, embodied a large number of leg-
ends relating to Chippewa gods and demi-
gods, and, while compiling his Notes on
the Iroquois, Gen. Clark communicated
to him this cycle of mythic legends misap-
plied to Hiawatha. Charmed with the
poetic setting of these tales, Schoolcraft
contused Hiawatha with Manabozho, a
Chippewa deity, and it is to these two
collections of mythic and legendary lore
that the English language owes the charm-
ing poem of Longfellow, in which there
is not a single fact or fiction relating to the
great Iroquoian reformer and statesman.
For further published information see
Hale (1) Iroquois Book of Rites, (2) A
Lawgiver of the Stone Age; Hewitt in
Am. Anthrop.,Apr.l892. (j.n.b.h.)
Hicaranaon. An ancient Timuquanan
village in N. Florida.— DeBry, Brev.Nar.,
II, map, 1591.
Hicoora, Hiocory. See Hickory,
Hichakhflhepara ('eagle'). A subgens
of the Waninkikikarachada, the Bird gens
of the Winnebago.
Hi-toa-qoe-pa-r&.~Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
240, 1897.
Hiohuoio. A subdivision or settlement
of the Tehueco, probably inhabiting the
lower Rio Fuerte or the Fuerte-Mayo di-
vide, in N. w. Sinaloa, Mex. — Orozco y
Berra, Geog., 58, 1864.
HickeraD. A small Santee village on a
branch ot ttantee r., S. C, in 1701.
BULL. 30]
HICKORY HIDATSA
547
«.— Lawson (1714). Hist. Carolina, 45,
1860 (80 called by traders). Eiokerau.— Ibid.
Hiokory. A walnut tree belonj^ing to
any one of several species of the genus
Hicoria, The word is spelled by early
writers in a great variety of ways: po-
hickery (Farrar, 1653), pekickery (Shrig-
ley, 1669), peckikery, pokickery^ hickories
hiccora, hiccory, hickory (1682), etc.
Capt John Smith (Hist Va., ii, 26,
1624) describes pawcohiccora^ a food of
the Algonquian Indians of Virginia, as a
preparation of pounded walnut kernels
witn water. From the cluster words rmw-
cohiccora, etc., transferred by the whites
from the food to the tree, has been de-
rived hickory. Derivative words and
terms are: Hickory-borer {Cyllenepicta)^
hickory-elm (Ulmu^racemo8a)y hickory-
eucalyptus (Eticah/ptus punctata) y hick-
ory-giroler (Oncideres cmgulatu8)y hick-
ory-head (the ruddy duck), hickory nut
ithe nut of the hickory, specifically of
licoiia ovcUa or H, /acinio«a), hickory-oak
( Qaercus chrysolepis), hickory-pine (Pinus
balfouriana and P. pungens), hickory pole
(a Democratic party emblem), hickory
poplar (Liriodendrontulipifera)y hickory-
shad (the gizzard-shad), hickory shirt (a
coarse cotton shirt). As an adjective the
word hickory took on the sense of fi rm, un-
yielding, 8tubl)om, as applied to religious
sectarians, members of a political i)arty,
etc. Gen. Andrew Jackson was called
** Old Hickory.'^ In Waterloo co., On-
tario, according to W. J. Wintemberg, the
German residents call a Pennsylvania
German a Hickory ^ possibly in reference
to their fellows in Pennsylvania having
voted the Jackson ticket. (a. p. c. )
Hickory Indians. A small band for-
merly occupying a village near Lancaster,
Pa. (Day, Penn., 397, 1843). Probably
a part of the Delawares.
Hickory Log. A former Cherokee set-
tlement on Etowah r., a short distance
above Canton, Cherokee co., Ga. —
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 5-15, 1900.
Waae'-anLn'tliinyi.— Mooney, ibid, ('hickory foot-
log place': native name).
Hiokorytown. A former Munsee and
Delaware village, probably about East
Hickory or West Hickory, Forest co., Pa.
On account of the hostility of the western
tribes the Indians here removed in 1791
to the Seneca and were by them settled
near Cattaraugus, N. Y. ' (j. m.)
Hiekory town.— ]^cter( 1791) in Am. State Papers,
Ind. Aff., 1, 164, 18S2. Munsee settlement.— Ibid.,
158.
Hiotoba. One of the 5 divisions of the
Dakota recorded by Pachot (Margry,
D6c., VI, 618, 1886) about 1722. Uniden-
tified.
Moux da la ohasse.— Ibid.
Hidatsa. A Siouan tribe living, since
first known to the whites, in the vicinity of
the junction of Knife r. with the Missouri,
Noith Dakota, in intimate connection with
the Mandan and Ankara. Their language
is closely akin to that of the Crows, with
whom they claim to have been united un-
til some time before the historic period,
when the two separated in consequence of
a quarrel over the division of some game,
theCrowsthendrawingofffarthertothew.
The name Hidatsa, by which they now
call themselves, has been said, with doubt-
ful authority, to mean * willows,' and is
stated by Matthews to have been origi-
nally the name only of a principal village
of the tribe in their old home on Knife r.
( see Elahsa ) . It probably came to be used
as the tribe name, after the smallpox epi-
demic of 1837, from the cgnsolidation of
the survivors of the other two villages
with those of Hidatsa. By the Mandan
they are known as Minitarf, signifying
* they crossed the water, ' traditionally said
to refer to their having crossed Missouri r.
from the e. The Sioux call them He-
waktokto, said to mean 'dwellers on a
ridge,' but more probably signifying
'spreading tipis,* or Hipis in a row,' the
name by which they are known to the
Cheyenne and Arapaho. The sign gesture
in each case would be nearly the same
(Mooney). The Crows call them Amashi,
* earth lodges,' and they are now officially
548
HIDATSA
[b. a. e.
known as Gros Ventres (q. v.), a name
ai^plied also to the Atsina, a detached
tribe of the Arapaho.
According to their own tradition the
Hidatsa came from the neighborhood of a
lake N. E. of their later home, and identi-
fied by some of their traditionists with
Mini-wakan or Devils lake, N. Dak. They
had here the circular earth-covered log
house, in use also by the Mandan, Ank-
ara, and other tribes living close along
the upper Missouri, in addition to the
skin tipi occupied when on the hunt.
Removmg from there, perhaps in conse-
quence of attacks by the Sioux, they
moved s. w. and allied themselves with
the Mandan, who then lived on the w.
side of the Missouri, about the mouth of
Heart r. The three tribes, Hidatsa, Man-
dan, and Ankara were all living in this
vicinity about 1765. From the Mandan
the Hidatsa learned agriculture. Some
time before 1796 these two tribes moved
up the river to the vicinity of Knife r.,
where they were found by Lewis and
Clark in 1804, the Hidatsa being then in
three villages immediately on Knife r.,
while the Mandan, in two villages, were
a few miles lower down, on the Missouri.
The largest of the three villages of the
tribe was called Hidatsa and was on the
N. bank of Knife r. The other two, Ama-
tiha and Amahami, or Mahaha, were on
the 8. side. The iast named was occupied
by the Amahami ( Ahnahaway of Lewis
and Clark ) , formerly a distinct out closely
related tribe. In consequence of the in-
roads of the Sioux they had been so far
reduced that they had been compelled to
unite with the Hidatsa, and have long
since been completely absorbed. The
three villages together had a popula-
tion of about 600 warriors, equivalent to
about 2, 100 souls. Of these the Amahami
counted about 50 warriors. There was no
change in the location of the villa^ until
after the terrible smallpox epidemic of
1837, which so greatly reauced the Indian
population of the upper Missouri, and in
consequence of which the survivors of the
three villages consolidated into one. In
1845 they, and about the same time the
remnant of the Mandan also, moved up
the river and established themselves in a
new village (see Hidatsati) close to the
trading post of Ft Berthold, on the n. bank
of the Missouri and some distance below
the entrance of the Little Missouri, in
North Dakota. In 1862 the Ankara
moved up to the same location, the three
tribes now occupying a reservation of
884,780 acres on .tne n. e. side of the Mis-
souri, including the site of the village. In
1905 the Hidatsa (Gros Ventres) were oflft-
cially reported to number only 471.
Early writers describe the Hidatsa as
somewhat superior intellectually and
physically to their neighbors, although
according to Matthews this is not so evi-
dent in later days. In home life, reli-
gious beliefs and customs, house building,
agriculture, the use of the skin boat, and
general arts, they closely resembled the
Mandan with whom they were associated.
Their great ceremony was the Sun dance,
called by them Da-hpi-ke, which was ac-
companied with various forms of torture.
Their warriors were organized into vari-
ous military societies, as is the case with
the Plains tribes generally.
Morgan (Anc. Soc, 159, 1877) gives a
list of 7 Hidatsa **gentes,*' which were
probably really original village names, or
possibly society names, viz: Mit-che-ro^-
ka ( * knife * ) , Min-ne-pa-ta ( ' water * ) , Ba-
ho-ha''-ta ( ' lodge' ), Seech-ka-be-ruh-pa'-
ka (* prairie chicken'), E-tish-sho^-ka
(* hill people'), Ah-nah-ha-na^-me-te (an
unknown animal), E-ku^-pa-be-ka ( 'bon-
net'). Thelistof ** bands" given by Cul-
bertson (Smithson. Eep. 1850, 143, 1851 ) is
really a list of military societies, viz: Fox,
Foolish Dog, Old Dog, Bull, and Black-
tailed Deers.
Consult Clark, Ind. Sign Lang., 1885;
Coues, Exped. Lewis and Clark, 1893;
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i-viii, 1904-
05; Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897;
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.,
1867; Matthews, Ethnog. and Philol. Hi-
datsa, 1877; Maximilian, Trav., 1843; Mc-
Gee in 15th Rep. B. A. E. , 1897. ( j. m. )
A-ffatch-«-ninne.— Tanner, Narr. , 58, 1830. A-guteh-
a-ninne-wug.— Ibid, ('the settled people': Chip-
pewa name). A-me-the''.— Hayden, Ethnog. and
Philol., 402, 1862 ('people who live in earth
houses': Crow name). Ar-me-ahay.— Anon. MS.
Crow vocab., B. A. E. Belantie-etea.— U. S. Ind.
Treaties. 854, 1826. BelantM^tea.— Cass (1834) in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, m, 609, 1858. E-nif-nL—
Morgan in N. A. Rev., 47, Jan. 1870 (national
name; cf. Ehartsar). Oi-auoth-in-in-e-wug.— War-
ren in Minn. Hist. Coll., v, 178, 1885 ('men of
the olden time*: Chippewa name). Oi-anoth-
in-ne-wug.— Ibid., 261. urotventres.— For various
forms of this name applied to the Hidatsa, see
Oro8 Ventres. Hedatse.— Hamilton In Trans.
Nebr. Hist. Soc., i, 75. 1885. ie-wa'-kto-kta.—
Ck)0k, Yankton, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 184. 1882.
Hewaktokto.— Matthews, Ethnog. and Philol.,
36, 1877 (Dakota name). He-war-tok-tay.— Cor-
liss, Lacotah MS. vocab., B. A. £., 106, 1874.
EidatMk.— Matthews. Ethnog. and Philol., 8, 1877
(own name). Hidatsa.— Baxter in Harper's Mag.,
Jane, 1882. Hidhatsa.— Dorsey in Am. Nat, «t9,
1882. Kaaetoret.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 75,
1849. Maniataris.— Dn Lac, Voy. dans La., 22S,
1805. Manitariea.— Maximilian, Trav., vii, 1848.
Mannatures.— Cumming in H. R. Ex. Doc. 65, 84th
Cong., Ist sess., 8, 1856. Kenetare.— Lewis and
Clark, Discov., 26, 1806. Ke-ne-ta-rees.--Orig.
Jour. Lewis and Clark (1805), i, 249, 1904. Mene-
tarres.— Lewis and Clark, Discov. , 25, 1806. Xe na
tar res.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1805), 1, 248,
1904 (also Mene tar r^). Metaharta.— Lewis and
Clark, Exped., i, 121, 1814. Xiditadi.~Matthew8,
Ethnog. and Philol., 193, 1887. Mimetari.— Meigs
in Smithson. Rep. 1867, 414, 1808. Xinataree.—
Clark and Caas in H. R. Ex. Doc. 117. 20th Cong.,
2d sess., 98, 1829. XinatarMa.— Bradbury, Trav.,
109. 1817. Kinatarea.— Brown, West. Gaz., 215,
1817. Xinatories.— Dougherty in H. R. Ex. Doc.
276, 25th Cong., 2d sess , 16, 1838. Xinetaire.—
Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Xinetareea.— Lewis
and Clark, Exped., i, 163, 1817. Xiiietarei.--Orig.
Jour. Lewis and Clark (1805), i, 824, 1904. ""*
BULL. 30]
HIDATSATI HILLI8 HADJO
549
tori.— Prichard, Phys. Hist. Man., v. 409, 1847.
HtaetoriM.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii,
125, 1886. Minetorre.—Lewis and Clark, Exped., i,
map, 1814. Minetarries. — Orig. Jour. Lewis and
Clark (1805), i, 283, 1904. Kfaiitore.— Latham in
Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond.. i, 160, 1848. Minitareea.—
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark. (1804), i, 216, 19M.
Widtoret.— Ibid., 10. Miniton.-Brownell, Ind.
Races N. Am., 466, 1853 (Mandan name). Mini-
torrw.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 13, 1904.
MUmetohrMt.— Tanner. Narr., 816,1830. Minne-
tohM.— Ibi^., 325 (misprint). ida-ni-ti-rA.— Long,
Exped. Rocky Mts., ii, Ixx, 1823. Kinnetareea.—
Lewis and Clark, Exped., i. 115, 1814. Xinne-
toreet Metoharto.— Ibid., 131. Xinnetoreet of the
Willow*.— Ibid. Xinnetaret of the Knife R.—
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1805), i,283, 1904.
Ximiotaroes.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., i, 164,
1817. Xiiuetarret.— Warren, Nebr. and Ariz., 50,
1875. Xinaitaroet.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol .
Mo. Yal., 420, 1862. X^initaroes Xetaharto.—
Lewis and Clark, Exped.. i, 131, 1814. Xinaitareet
of the Willows.— Ibid. Xinnitarii.- Am. Nat., 829,
1882. Xiaataree.— Trans. Anthrop. Soc. Wash., in,
65, 1885. XoMinitarris.— Maximilian, Trav., 337,
1843. ftuehatwi.— Brown, West. Gaz., 213, 1817.
Btottoaary Xinetaree.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. An-
tiq. Soc., II, 125, 1836 (as distinguished from
"Minitarees of Fort de Prairie," i.e., the Atsi-
na). Wa-nuk'-e-ye'-na.- Hayden, Ethnog. and
Philol. Mo. Val., 326, 1862 (' lodges planted to-
gether': Arapaho name). Wetitsaan.— Mat-
thews, Ethnog. and Philol. Hidatsa, 36, 1877 ( Arik-
ara name). Wiaetariet.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and
Clark (1804), i, 220. 1904. Wi-teU'-han.— Hayden,
op.cit.,357 ('well-dressed people': Ankara name).
Hidatoati (from Hidatsa and ati: * dwel-
ling of the Hidatsa Indians' ). The Hi-
datea village formerly at Ft Berthold,
N. Dak. In 1872 it contained 71 Arikara
and 104 Hidatsa and Mandan dwellings.
See Elahsa.
Berthold Indian Village.— Royce in 18th Rep. B.
A. E., pi. cxvlii, 181>9. Hi da tsa ti.— Matthews,
Ethnog. and Philol. Hidatsa, 211, 1877.
Hidlis Hadjo. See Jlillis JIadjo.
Highahwixon. One of several tribes
displaced by the whites in 1651 from their
homes in Charles and St Mary cos., Md.,
and given a tract at the head of the Wi-
comoco. They were probably Conoy. —
Bozman, Maryland, ii, 421, 1837.
High Tower Forks. A former Cherokee
settlement mentioned in a document
of 1799 (Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 144,
1887). It was probably one of the places
called Etowah (Ftdtud^), q. v.
mgoi (Indios de los Higos, Span. : ' Fi^
Indians' ). A tribe of s. Texas, so named
by Cabezade Vaca in 1528 (Smith trans.,
84, 1851) from their custom of subsisting
on the prickly pear, or tuna, in its season.
Cabeza de Vaca states that they counted
the seasons by the ripening of the fruits,
the "dying*' or (according to Smith) the
biting of the fish , and by the appearance of
certain constellations. Nothing is known
of their ethnic relations. (a. c. f. )
Higtignk. A former Aleut village on
AgattQ id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Hihagee. An unidentified Lower Creek
town mentioned in a census list of 1833.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854.
HihakanhanhanwiiL ( ' women the skin of
whose teeth dangles*). A band of the
Brul6 Teton Sioux.
Hi-ha kanhaijhaij wiij.— Dowey (after Cleveland)
in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1897. Hi-ha ka-ha-ha"
win.— Ibid.
Hihames. A former tribe of Coahuila,
N. E. Mexico, which was gathered into the
mission of El Santo Nombre de Jesus
Peyotes when it was refounded in 1698.
This tribe probably belonged to the
Coahuiltecan family.
Oyamet.— Morfi (1777) quoted by Bancroft, Nat.
Races, i, 611, 1886. Hiiames.— Revilla«rigedo
(1793), ibid. Zijamet.— Ibid.
Hilakwitiyiis ( mi-d-hvX'a-yiis') . A for-
mer Siuslaw village on or near Siuslaw r.,
Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 230, 1890.
Hilksnk. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Hillabi(pron. hi^ -la-pi). A former Up-
per Creek town near the pnesent Ashland,
Clay CO., Ala., in the ** central district'*
between Coosa and Tallapoosa rs., on
Koufadi cr., a branch of Hillabee cr.
Most of the Hillabi people had settled
before 1799 in the 4 villages called Hlan-
udshiapala, Anatichapko, Istudshilaika,
and Uktahasasi. In the vicinity of Hillabi
town its inhabitants, with other **Red
Sticks," or hostiles, were vanquished by
Jackson's army, Nov. 18, 1813, when 316
of them were killed or captured and their
town devastated. (a. s. g.)
HaUbee.— Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. iv, M, 1848. HaUe-
bao.— Jeflferys, Am. Atla.«», map 5, 1776 (on w. bank
of Loucushatchee [Tallapoosa] r.). Hallibeet.—
Drake, Ind. Chron., 198,1836. Hi'-la-pi.— Gatschet,
Creek. Migr. Leg., i, 131, 1884 (proper pronuncia-
tion). Hillaba.—Bartram. Travels, 462, 1791(on a
branch of Coosa r.). Hillabees,— Swan (1791) in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 262, 1865. Hillaby*.—
Woodward, ReminLscences, 96, 1859. Hill-au-bee.—
Hawkins ( 1799), Sketch, 43, 1848. HiUebe^.— CU)r-
nell (1793) in Am. State Papers, Ind. AfT., i, 385,
1832.
Hillabi. A town of the Creek Nation,
s. w. of Eufaula, between North fork and
Canadian r., Ind. T. — Gatschet, Creek
Migr. Leg., ii, 185. 1888.
Hflabi.— Gatschet, ibid.
Hillis Hadjo. {hilis 'medicine', hadsho
*crazy', an official at the busk, q. v.).
A noted Seminole leader in the early
part of the 19th century, usually known
among the whites as Francis the Prophet,
and whose name is also ret^orded as Hid-
lis Hadjo, Hillishago, Hillishager, etc.
He took an active part in the ISemi-
nole war, and is accused of having been
one of the chief instigators of the sec-
ond uprising. He seems to have come
into public notice as early as 1814, as on
Apr. 18 of that year Gen. Jackson wrote
from his camp at the junction of Coosa
and Tallapoosa rs., Ala., that **Hillisha-
gee, their [the Seminole's] great prophet,
hasabsconded. ' ' Led by some at^doned
English traders to believe that the treaty
ol Ghent in 1814 provided for the restora-
tion of the Seminole country, and in the
hope of obtaining aid for his tribe against
the Americans, he went to England, where
550
HILUYS HITCH APUKSASSI
[B. A. K.
he received much attention. An English
journal thus mentions his arrival: *'The
soundoftrumpetsannouncedtheapproach
of the patriot Francis, who fought so glo-
riously in our cause in America during
the late war. Being dressed in a most
splendid suit of red and gold, and wearing
a tomahawk set with gold, gave him a
highly imposing appearance.'* His mis-
sion led to no practical result. Near the
closeof 1817an American named McKrim-
mon, who had been captured by a Semi-
nole party, was taken to Mikasuki, where
dwelt Hillis Hadjo, who ordered him to be
burned to death, but at the last moment
his life was saved by the entreaties of
Milly (q.v. ), the chiefs daughter, who,
when her father wavered, showed her de-
termination ta perish with him. Francis
shortly thereafter fell into the hands of
the Americans and was hanged. His
wife and several daughters afterward sur-
rendered to the Americans at St Marks,
Fla., where Milly received much attention
from the whites, but refused McKrim-
mon's offer of marriage until assured that
it was not because of his obligation to her
for saving his life. (c. t.)
Hilnys. An unidentified tribe, said to
have lived on Laredo channel, Brit. Col.,
about lat. 52° 30' (Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep.,
316, 1868). This is in the country of the
Kittizoo.
Himatanohis (HimdtanohUy * bowstring
men'). A warrior society of the Chey-
enne, q. v. (j. M. )
Bow-Stnng (Society).— Dorse v in Field Columb.
Mus. Pub., no. 99, 15, 1905. Inverted (Society).—
Ibid.
Himoiyoqis {IlVmniiioqU, a word of
<loubtful meaning). A warrior society
of the Cheyenne (q. v.); also sometimes
known as 06mi-nG''tqiu, 'Coyote warri-
ors.* (j. M.)
Coyote (Society).— Dorsey in Field Columb. Mus.
Pub., no. 99, 15, 1905.
Hinama ( Hi^ndmdj referring to the head
of a variety of fish). A former Maricopa
village whose i^eople now live on the s.
bank of Salt r., e. of the Mormon settle-
ment of Lehi, Maricopa co., s. Ariz. — Rus-
sell, Pima MS., B. A. E., 16, 1902.
Hinanashin (Hinand^skiu, * golden
eagle' ) . A gens of the Kineu widishianun
or Eagle phratry of the Menominee. —
Hoffman in 14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. i, 42,
1896.
Hinauhan's Village. A summer camp
of a Stikine chief on Stikine r., Alaska.
In 1880, 31 people were there.— Petroff
in Tenth Census, Alaska, 32, 1884.
HinhanBhunwapa (^toward the owl
feather'). A band of the Brul^ Teton
Sioux.
Hiohan-oikn-wapa.- Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1897. Hiphag-iiui-wapa.— Ibid.
Hiocaia. A former village, governed by
a female chieftain, situated 12 leagues
N. of Charlefort, the French fort on St
Johns r., Fla., in the 16th century.
Hiocaia.— Laudonni^re (1664) in French, Hist
Coll. La., n. s., 286, 1869. Hiouaoara.— De Bry,
Brev. Narr., n, map, 1591.
Hioqna. See Hiaqua.
Hios. A branch of the Nevome who
lived 8 leagues e. of the pueblo of Tepa-
hue, in Sonora, Mexico (Orozco y Berra,
Geog., 58, 351, 1864). The name doubt-
less properly belongs to their village.
Hipinimtoh (hipi * prairie', nimich
* road, ' * portage ' ) . A former Chi timacha
village on the w. side of Grand lake, at
Fausse Pointe, near Bayou Gosselin, La.
Hipinimtch namu. — Gatschet in Trans. Anthrop.
Soe. Wash., ir, 152, 1883 (mtmM=' village').
Hiqua. See Hiaqua.
Hirrihigua. A province and town, pre-
sumably Timuquanan, on the w. coast of
Florida, on or near Tampa bay, where
De Soto landed in May, 1539. Possibly
the same as Ucita.
Harriga.— Shipp, De Soto and Fla., 257, 1881.
Hihirrifua.— Garcilasso de la Vega, Hist. Fla.. 30,
1723. Hirriga.— Shipp, op. eit.. 683.
Hisada (*legs stretched out stiff*, re-
ferring to a dead quadruped). A Ponca
gens on the Chinzhu side of the camp
circle.
Hitada.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. £., 228, 1897.
Thunder people.— Ibid.
Hishkowits (Htshkowt^ts, * porcupine*,
known to the whites as Harvey White-
shield). A Southern Cheyenne inter-
preter, born in w. Oklahoma in 1867;
eldest son of the chief White-shield (see
Wopovxits), After 5 years* attendance at
the agency schools he er\tered Carlisle
School, Pa., in 1881, afterward attending
other schools at Ft Wayne, Hanover
(Ind.), and I^wrence (Kan.). In 1893
he became assistant teacher in the Men-
nonite mission school among the Chey-
enne at Cantonment, Okla., which posi-
tion he held for 4 years. He still serves
as interpreter for the mission and has
been chief assistant of the Kev. Rudolph
Petter, missionary in charge, in the prep-
aration of a number of translations and a
manuscript dictionary of the Cheyenne
language. (.i. m.)
Hisiometanio (Illsiomeld^nio^ * ridge
men'; sing., HldomeWn), A principal
division of the Cheyenne, g. v.
Hiuometa'nio.— Mooney, inf'n, 1905 (see p. 266 of
this Handbook). Hltsi o me tin i u.— Grinnell, So-
cial Org.Chevennes, 136,1905. I'sium-ita'aiuw'.—
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1025. Ih96.
Histapennmanke. A Mandan band, the
first, according to their mythology, to
come above ground from the subterran-
ean lake.
K-tU-pa'.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 158. 1877 (' those
with the tattooed faces'). Flat-head.— 1 bid. Hi-
tta pc' nu-maa'-ke.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
241, 1897. Hiatoppa.— Maximilian, Trav., 366. 1843.
Hitohapnksassi. A former Seminole
town about 20 m. from the head of
Tampa bay, in what is now Hillsboro
CO., Fla.
BULL. 30]
HITCHITI HIZO
551
_«oh*piuusM.— Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War.
807. 1822. Helch-pttok[«»»y].— H. R. Ex Doc. 74
(1823), 19th Cong.; 1st sess., 23, 1826 (the last two
syllables of this name are joined to the next
town name, -chieU'Chaty.) Hich-a-pae-iuiM.—
Bell, op.cit. HiohipuokMMa.— Taylor, War map,
1839.
Hitchiti (Creek: ahUchitay * to look up-
stream ' ) . A Muskhogean tribe formerly
residing chiefly in a town of the same
name on the e. bank of Chattahoochee
r., 4 m. below Chiaha, and possessing a
narrow strip of good land bordering on
the river, m w. Georgia. When Haw-
kins visited them in 1799 they had spread
out into two branch settlements— one, the
Hitchitudshi, or Little Hitchiti, on both
sides of Flint r. below the junction of
Kinchafoonee cr., which passes through a
country named after it; the other, Tuta-
losi, on a branch of Kinchafoonee cr. , 20 m.
w. of Hitchitudshi. The tribe is not often
mentioned in history, and appears for the
first time in 1733, when two of its del-
egates, with the Lower Creek chiefs, met
Gov. Oglethorpe at Savannah. The lan-
guage appears to have extended beyond
thelimits of the tribe as here defined, as it
was spoken not only in the towns on the
Chattahoochee, as Chiaha, Chiahudshi,
Hitchiti, Oconee, Sawokli, Sawokliudshi,
and Apalachicola, and in those on Fhnt
r., but by the Mikasuki, and, as trace-
able by the local names, over considera-
ble portions of Georgia and Florida. The
Seminole, are also said to have been a
half Creek and half Hitchiti speakmg
people, although their language is now
almost identical with Creek; and it is
supposed that the Yamasi likewise spoke
the Hitchiti language. This language,
like the Creek, has an archaic form
called "woman's talk," or female lan-
guage. The Hitchiti were absorbed into
and became an integral part of the Creek
Nation, though preserving to a large ex-
tent their own language and peculiar
customs. (a.s. G.)
Aohilia.-^eflerys, French Dom. Am., i, 134, map,
1761 (incorrectly located: false prthogmphy).
At-puha-sUiluL-Oatschet, Koasati MS., B.A.E.
(Koasati name: 'mean people'). Eoh«etoe».— .
Carver, Travels, map, 1778. Bcheles.--Jefferys,
Am. Atlas, 7, 1776 (town on Apalachicola r., Ga.)-
Bchsta.-Bartram, Trav., 46^791. Eohetw.-
Drake, Bk. Inds., bk.iv, 29, 1848. Ech«te«.--Lat-
tr4. map, U.S., 1784 (1, on Chattahoochee; 2, on
Altamaha). Bch«tes.^Jefferys, French Dom. Am.,
1. 134. map 1761 (two towns, incorrectly located),
^•ti.— Mandrillon, Spectateur Am4ricaln, map,
1786. Bch«tU.-AlC€do, Die. Geog., u, 60. 17^7
(on Echesii r., Ga.). EcliitU.-rbid. (on Apa-
lachicola r.). Boliito..--Peiii6re In Morae Rep.
to Sec. War, 311, 1822. Etchita».-DoC; of 1747 ...
McCall, Hist. Ga., i, 367. 1811. Etiohita.— Jones,
Hist. Ga. , 1, 134, 1873. EuchiUws.—Gatschet, Creek
UigT. Leg., II, 9,1888. HatchiU.— Robin. Voy., i,
m5),1857. Hiohetas.— Woodward, Reminlscens^,
26.38. 18S9. HUohittees.— Stevens, Hist. Ga., 61,
18^7. Hitoh»teet.-Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, v, 262, 1855. Sitohetews.-U. S. Ind.
Treat. (1779), 69, 1837. Hit-«lie.tee.--Hawkins
(1799). Sketch, 64, 1848. Hitohiw.— Schoolcraft,
Ind. Ttibes, l, 239, 1851. Hitchittees.-Drake, Bk.
Inds., bk. VIII, 1848. Hitch-ity.— Duval (1«94) in
Sen. Ex. Doc. 49, 3l8t Cong., Ist sess., 144. 1850.
lohiti.— Rafinesque. introd. Marshall, Ky., i,^4,
1824 Kitohecta.— Barnard (1792) in Am. State
Papers, Ind. Aff., i, 309, 1832 (misprint).
Hitchiti. A town of the Creek Nation,
Ind. Ter., on Deep fork of Canadian r.,
about midway between Eufaula and Oc-
mtL^UL— P. O. Guide, 367, 1904. Hitchiti.—
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 185, 1888.
Hitchitipusy. A former village, prob-
ably Seminole, a few miles s. e. of Ft
Alabama, and the same distance n. e. of
Ft Brooke, both of which forts were on
Hillsboro r., Fla.— H. R. Doc. 78, 25th
Cong., 2d sess., 768-9, map, 1838.
Hitchitudshi. A branch settlement of
Hitchiti on Flint r., Ga., below its junc-
tion with Kinchafoonee cr.
Hitchatooche.-Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E. Ga.
map. 1900. Hit.che-too.ohe.-Hawkms (1779),
Sketch 65. 1848. Hitchitudshi.— Gatschet Creek
Migr. Leg., i, 77, 131, 1884. Littie Hit-chetee.-
Hawkinsf op. cit. Little Hitohiti.-Gatschet, op.
Hitschowon. A former Chumashan vil-
lage on the harbor of Santa Cruz id., off
the coast of California.
HiU-too'-wdn.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo-
cab.. B. A. E.. 1884. .
Hitshinsuwit. A former Yaquina village
on the s. side of Yaquina r., Oreg.
Hi'-^oin-»u'-wit.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
111,229,1890. , xr u \ A
Hittoya ('westerners.'— Kroeber). A
division of the Miwok on upper Chow-
chillar., Mariposa CO., Cal. ^
Heth-to'-ya.- Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in,
349, 1877. Hittoya.— A. L. Kroeber, inf'n. 1903.
Hiwaitthe. A former Yaquina village
on the s. side of Yaquina r., Greg.
Hi'-wai-i'-t'9«.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 229, 1890.
Hiwassee (Ayuhwa^si, 'savanna,' 'mead-
ow') . The name of several former Chero-
kee settlements. The most important,
commonly distinguished by the Cherokee
as Ayuhwa^st Egw&^ht, or Great Hiwas-
see, was on the n. bank of Hiwassee r.,
at the present Savannah ford, above
Columbus, Polk co. , Tenn. Another was
farther up the same river, at the junction
of Peach tree cr. , above Murphy, Cherokee
CO., N. C— Mooney in 19th Rep.B. A.E.,
512, 1900. ^ ^ ^ ^ ,
Ayuhwa'.i.-Mooney, op. cil. ^^^^r^^^fo
1765 quoted by Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 142,
1887. Highwawee.-Doc. of 1799 quoted by Royce,
ibid , 144. Hiwasae.— Bartram. Travels, 3n, 1792.
Owaisa.— Lanman quoted by Mooney, op. cit.
Hiyaraba ('panther')- A clan of the
Achehaphratry of the ancient Timucua
of Florida.— Pareja (c a. 1614) quoted by
Gatschet in Am. Philos. Soc. Proc., xvii,
492, 1878.
Hiyayulge ('tree trunk'). A former
Maricopa village on Gila r., s. Ariz.
Hiyayulge!— ten Kate, inf n, 1888. Tlikok.— Ibid.
(Pima name). ^ , ^^ , . , . ,
Hizo. A division of the Varohio which
occupied the pueblo of Taraichi in Chi-
nipas valley, w. Chihuahua, Mexico. —
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 58, 324, 1864.
652
fiLAGI — fiLGAGiLDA-KBGAWAl
[b.a.1.
Hlagi {id^ft), A town of the Kaidju-
kegawai family of the Haida, on an is-
Vwd near the e. end of Houston Stew-
wart channel, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit
Col.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 277, 1905.
HUhayik {hd'xayik, 'inside of Hlaha
rta^xa]'). A former Yakutat town on
Vakutat bay, Alaska, back of an island
called Hlaha, whence the name. The
Clach-ft-jek of Krause seems to be inden-
tical with the town of Yakutat.
(j. R. 8.)
Hlahloakalga (^ Ld^lo-akdlaaj 'nsh
ponds'). A Creek town in the Creek
Nation, Ind. T., near Hilabee, between
North fork and Canadian r.
Fiih Poadt.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 185,
1888. •Ulo«k£lga.~Ibid.
Hlahloalgi ( * fish people ' ) . An extinct
Creek clan.
H«'-Uo.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 181, 1877. *La*Io-
alffi.— Gatschet. Creek Migr. Leg., i, 165, 1884.
Hlahlokalka ('Ldno-kdlka: 'Wlo 'fish',
akdlgds 'I am separated from'). A for-
mer Upper Creek settlement established
by the Okchayi on a small river forming
ponds, 4 m. above Oakfuskee, Cleburne
CO., Ala. (a. 8. G.)
FUh pond.— Bartram, Travels, 462, 1791 (traders'
name). Pish ponds.— Hawkins (1799). Sketch, 49,
1848. Piah-Pond Town.— Parsons (1833) in School-
craft. Ind. Tribes, iv. 678. 1854. 'Uao-UOka.-
Gatschet. Creek Migr. Leg., i, 137, 1884. Blaka-
folfaa.— Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, op. cit., v, 262,
1855. TatloolgeM.- Woodward.Reminis.,83,1859.
Thlatlofolgaa.— Schoolcraft, op. cit., iv, 381.
Thlot-lo-fful-ffaa.— Hawkins(1799), Sketch,49, 1848.
HUkegniu {ixiqe^gAns). A town of the
Kuna-lanas on Yagun r., at the head of
Masset inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit.
Col.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 281, 1905.
Hlanndshiapala {^Idni ^mountain', udshi
dim. suffix, apAla 'on the other side':
'on the other side of a little mountain').
A former Upper Creek settlement, one of
the four Hillabi villages, with a town
square, situated on the n. w. branch of
Hillabi cr., Ala., 15 m. from Hillabi
town. (a. s. g.)
•L^ndshi apaU.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 1,137,
1884. Thla-aoo-che au-baa-laa.— Hawkins (1799),
Sketch, 43, 1848.
maphlako {'Ldp-'ldko, *tall cane').
Two former Upper Creek villages on or
near Cupiahatcnee or., in Macon eo.,
Ala., with 81 and 66 heads of families,
respectively, in 1832.
JaoiM Bay.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 276. 24th Cong., Ist
sesB., 131, 1836 (misprint). Jim Boy't.— Campbell
(1836) in H. R. Doc. 274,25th Cong., 2d sess., 20,
1838. *Xip-*Uko.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i,
187. 1884. Thabloo-ko.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, op. cit.
TUobloeoo-towii.^Te8up (1836) in H. R. Doc. 78,
25th Cong,, 2d sess., 48. 1838. TUobthloooo.— H.
R. Doc. 274. op. cit. Thlob Thlocko.— Sen. Ex.
Doc. 426, 24th Cong., 1st sess.. 257. 1836. Thlop-
thloooo.— Woodward, Reminis., 91. 1859.
Hlaphlako. A town of the Creek Nation,
on Alabama cr., n. of the North fork of
Canadian r. , Okla. — Gatschet, Creek Migr.
Leg., II, 185, 1888.
Hlauhla {'HW-u'hla, * surrounded by
arrow-shaft bushes'). The ruins of a
small but traditionally important Zufii
pueblo near a small spring about 10 m.
N. N. E. of Zufli, N. Mex. (p. h. c.)
Olaa-tttih-la.— Fewkes in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and
Archsol., I, 100, 1891. 'Hla'-n'Ua.— Gushing,
inf'n, 1891.
Hlankwima ( ^HUmkun/ma) . The native
name of the South town of Taos pueblo,
N. Mex. (p. w. H.)
Hlaunma (*Hlauu^ma), The native
name of the North town of Taos pueblo,
N. Mex. (p. w. H.)
Hleetakwe ( 'Hle^-e-td-kwe) . The north-
western migration of the Bear, Crane,
Frog, Deer, Yellow-wood, and other clans
of the ancestral pueblo of ZufXi. — Cushing
quoted by Powell, 4th Rep. B. A. E.,
xxxviii, 1886. See Pishla Ateuna,
Hlekatchka (' Le-kdlchka, or 'LiA-
kdtchkQj from 'te or '/i, 'arrow', Mtc^ibo,
* broken ^ 'broken arrow 'J. A former
Lower Creek town on a trail. ford cross-
ing Chattahoochee r., 12 m. below Ka-
sihta, on the w. side of the river, proba-
bly in Russell co., Ala. Accoixlii^ to
Hawkins (Am. State Papers, Ind. An., i,
858, 1832) the settlement was destroyed
in 1814; but it was apparently reestab-
lished, as it was represented in the treaty
of Nov. 15, 1827, and a census of 1832
(Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854)
gives the number of families as 331 in
that year. (a. s. g. )
Brokoa Arrow.— Carey (1792) in Am. State Papers,
Ind. AfF., I. 829. 1832. Broken Arrow Old FieUL—
Robertson (1796). ibid., 600. OhiaagatMa.~Swan
(1791) in Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, v, 262. 185S.
Horae-path-town.^Sen. Ex. Doc. 426, 24th Cong.,
Ist sess., 135, 1836. 'LUuCtehka. -Gatschet, Creek
Migr. Leg.. l. 137. 1884. 'Li-i-kitohka.— Ibid.
Tauthlaootohoau.— Hawkins (1814) in Am. SUte
Papers, op. cit., 858. Theaoatokkah.— Drake, Bk.
Inds., bk. 4, 54, 1848. Thlakatehka.— Census of
1832 in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 678, 1864.
Thleaoatska.— Woodward, Reminis., 86, 1850.
Thltt-katoh-ka.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 425, 24th Cong., Ist
sess., 135, 1886.
mekatska ( *Le kdlska). The settlement
of an offshoot of the Kawita on Arkansas
r., almost opposite Wialaka and near
Coweta (Kawita), in the Creek Nation,
Okla. — Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii,
186, 1888.
* Hlgadnn ( ipodx-'w, 'suffering from over-
work'). A town of the Skidai-lanas
on Moresby id., opposite and facing An-
thony id.. Queen Charlotte jB:ronp, Brit.
Col. It is prominent in Haida mythol-
ogy.—Swanton, Cont. Haida, 277, 1905.
Hlgaed^in (hgd^-iLnj probably 'where
they wash the frames upon which salal
berries are dried ' ) . A Haida town occu-
pied by a branch of the Kona-kegawai
called Sus-haidagai; situated on the s.
side of Tanoo id., s. s. Queen Charlotte
ids., Brit. Col. — Swanton, Cont. Haida,
278, 1905.
Hlgagilda-kegawai (iifagt^lda qe^-
gawa-iy 'those bom at Hlgagilda,' i. e.,
Skidegate ). A subdivision of the Hlgaia-
BULL, do]
HLGAHET — HLIELUNGKUN-LNAGAI
553
lanas family of the Haida. — S wanton,
Cont. Haida, 269, 1905.
Hlgahet {h^'xet^ 'pebble town\) A
former Haida town near Skidegate,
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It was
Surchased from its earlier owners, the
logangas, by a branch of the Yaku-lanas
who were afterward known as the
Hlgahetgu-lanas, from the name of their
town { J R s ^
KU-luat-bidi.-Krause, Tiinkit Indianer. '304.
1865 ( * people of Hlgahet ' ) . Tlci'it. - Boas, 12th
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 24, 1898 (misapplied to
to Old Gold Harbor).
Hlfffthet-gitinai (Lgd^xet gUind^-i, * Git-
ins of Pebble-town * ). A division of the
Eagle clan of the Haida, for which Gitins
was a second name. They moved from
Hlgahet, the old town near Skidesate, to
Chaahl on the w. coast, along with other
families (see Hlgahetgu-lanas). Origi-
nally they and the Gitins of Skidegate
constituted one family. The Djahui-
hlgahet-kegawai, Yaku-gitinai, Hlgahet-
kegawai, and Gweundus were sulnli vi-
sions, (j. R. S.)
£|i'x«ttttiiul'-i.—S wanton, Cont. Haida, 274, lya^.
Tlr&'it ffyit'inai'.— Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 24. 1898.
Hlgahetgn-lanas (£gd^xet-gU'ld^naSf
'people of Pebble-town*). The most
important division of the Raven clan of
the Haida, on the w. coast of Queen Char-
lotte ids., Brit. Col. It received its name
from an old town near Skidegate, where
the people formerly lived. Before this
they were part of the Yaku-lanas and
lived at Lawn hill, but trouble arising,
they were driven away and purchased the
town of Hlgahet from the Kogangas.
Later another war forced them to move
to the w. coast. ( j. r. s. )
£^'x«t-fa-la'naft.— Swan ton. Cont. Haida. 270,
1905. Lth'ait Leiuias.~Harrison in Proc. and
Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. ii, 125, 1895. Tlg-a'itgu
U'aaa.— Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 24.
1896.
Hlgahet-kegawai ( i^^' xd-qef ga wa-i^
* those bom at Pebble-town * ) . A subdi-
vision of the Hlgahet-gitinai, a family of
the Eagle clan of the Haida, or only
another name for that family.— -S wanton,
Cont Haida, 274, 1905.
Hlgai (-^^^i). Said to have been the
name of a town at the head of Skedans
bay, w. coast of the Queen Charlotte ids.,
Bnt. Col. — Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279,
1905.
Hlgaiha (ijw'-ixa, from Ipai * to dig*,
xa *to put inM. A semi-legendary
Haida town n. ot Dead Tree pt, at the
entrance of Skidegate inlet. Queen Char-
lotte ids., Brit. Col. From this place the
great Gitins family of Skidegate is said
to have sprung.— Swanton, Cont. Haida,
99,1905.
Hl^u (is^i-u^f probably * place of
stones '). A town and camping place of
the Djahui-skwahladagai of the Haida,
s. of Dead Tree pt., at the entrance to
Skid^ate inlet. Queen Charlotte ids.,
Brit. Col. One of the names of the town
of Skidegate is said to have been derived
from this. ( j. r. s. )
Xit-hai-iUUs hade.— Krause, Tiinkit Indianer, 304,
1885 (possibly Identical ). faai-u'. —Swanton, Cont.
Haida, 279. 1905. ^
Hlgain-lanas (£^ai'-u^ ^^7ia«, 'Skidegate
town people ') . A division of the Raven
clan of the Haida who originally owned
the town of Skidegate, Brit. Col., and
hence came to be called by the Haida
name of the town. Later they gave the
town to the Gitins in payment for an in-
jury inflicted on one of the latter, and
moved to Gaodjaos, farther up the inlet.
A subdivision was called Hlgagilda-ke-
Eai. (j. R. 8.)
-u' la'nat.— Swanton, Cont. Haida. 269. 1905.
jru Hiade.— Harrison in Proc. and Trans. Roy,
Soc. Can., see. ii, 125, 1895 (erroneously assigned
to Old Gold Harbor). Tlgaio U'nat.— Boas, 12th
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.. 24, 1898. Tlqaiu U'nas.-
Boas, 5tb Rep. of same. 26. 1889.
Hlgan {isgArif 'killer-whale's dorsal
fin'). A Haida town s. of Tigun, on
the w. coast of Graham id.. Queen Char-
lotte group, Brit. Col., occupied by the
Dostlan-lnagai. The Koetas are said
to have lived at this place before they
moved to Alaska, and the town is said to
have been so named on account of a rock
which stands up in front of it like the
dorsal fin of a killer-whale. ( j. r. s. )
i^fAii.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 280, 1905. l«Aii.—
Swanton. inf'n. 1905 (another form).
Hlgihla-ala (£gVtA dUiy probably *town
of the ditches')*. A former Haida town
N. of Cape Ball, e. shore oi Graham id..
Queen Charlotte group, Brit. Col. It was
occupied by the Naikun-kegawai. — Swan-
ton, Cont. Haida, 280, 1905.
Hlielung (hi^eUfi), A former Haida
town of the Kuna-lanas family on the
right bank of a river of the same name
(Hi-ellen on Dawson's chart), which
flows into Dixon entrance at the foot of
Tow hill, N. coast of Queen Charlotte ids.,
Brit. Col. The town was erroneously
thought by Dawson (Queen Charlotte
Ids. , 165b, 1880) to be the Ne-coon of John
Work. (j. R. s.)
Ei«Uer.— Deans, Tales from Hidery, 92. 1899.
U'f Kn.— Boas. 12th Rep. N. W.Tribes Can.. 23. 1898.
£i'elAB.-8wanton, Cont. Haida. 280, 19a').
HUelang-keawai (LVeUfl qe^awa-i,
'those born at the town of Hlielung').
A subdivision of the Stustas, a family of
the Eagle clan of the Haida, occupying
a town at the mouth of Hiellen (Hlie-
lung) r., Graham id.. Queen Charlotte
group, Brit. Col. ( j. r. s. )
rU'lEn k-eowai'.- Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 23. 1898. U'eUn qe'awa-i.— Swanton, Cont.
Haida. '276, 1905. LthyheUua Kiiwe.— Harrison in
Proc. and Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. ii, 126, 1895.
Hlielimgkiiii-lnagai(£t^€/.4fl kun Inagd^-
i, * fn^elAf\ river pK)int town-people ' ). A
town of the Kuna-lanas, belonging to the
Rayen clan of the Haida, situated on a
554
HLIELUNG-STUSTAE HOBOMOK
[b. a. I.
river of the same name (called Hiellen
on Dawson's map). ( j. r. s. )
DriilsnkunSliiAMi'.— Boas, 12th Rep. N.W. Tribes
Can., 23, 1896. si'eUn kna InaciM.— Swanton,
Gont. Haida, 270, 1906.
Hlielang-BtiiBtae (in^eUfl stAsta^-i, 'Stus-
tas of Hlielung'). A subdivision of the
Stustas, an important family^ of the Eagle
clan of the Haida, occupying the town
at the mouth of Hlielung or Hiellen
r.. Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. Pos-
sibly a synonym of Hlielung-keawai. —
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 276, 1905.
HUmalnaas-hadai (UmA^l na^as xa'-
da-iy * hlimul-skin-house people*). A
subdivision of the Salendas, a Flaida fam-
ily of the Eagle clan. They were so
called from one of their houses; hlimul
was a name applied to the skins of cer-
tain mainland animals. — Swanton, Cont
Haida, 276, 1905.
HXingwainaas-hadai {inngwa'-i na^as
xa'da-iy * world-house people*). A sub-
division of the Aokeawai, a family of the
Raven clan of the Haida; probably name<i
from a house. — Swanton, Cont. Haida,
272, 1905.
Hlkaonedis (Tlinmt: iqa^onedis, * peo-
ple of "faqao river'). A subdivision of
the Koetas, a family of the Raven clan of
the Haida, living principally in Alaska.
They may have received their name from
a camping place. — Swanton, Cont. Haida,
272, 1905.
Hlkia (ikfid^, * chicken-hawk town*
or * saw-bill town * ) A former Haida town
on the outer side of Lyell id., Queen
Charlotte ids. , Brit. Col. It was occupied
by the Kona-kegawai. — Swanton, Cont
Haida, 278, 1905.
Hlkoayedi (iq</ayedi). A Tlingit divi-
sion at Klawak, Alaska, said to be part of
the Shunkukedi, q. v. ( J. R. s. )
Hlnkaliadi. A division of the Raven
phratry of the Chilkat, formerly living in
the town of Yendestake, Alaska. Accord-
ing to the Chilkat themselves the name
means * quickpeople * , but according to in-
formants at Wrangell, * people of Hlukak *
(fcuqa^x), a creek near Wrangell.
Ohlakftach-adi.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 116, 1886.
Kadftwot-kedi.— Ibid, (griven as a distinct social
grroup) . inq&'zadt.— Swanton, field notes, B. A. £.,
1904.
'HlJik'ku]ioa3i(i3 Axq/^xO'dUy * town where
people do not sleep much'). A former
Tlingit town in Alaska. ( j. r. s. )
Hlaln (ihdny A former Haida town
in Naden harbor, Graham id.. Queen
Charlotte group, Brit Col. — Swanton,
Cont. Haida, 281, 1905.
Hoabonoma. Evidently the Pima or
Maricopa name of a tribe of which Father
Kino learned while on the lower Rio Gila,
Ariz., in 1700. Unidentified, although
probably Yuman. They have sometimes
been loosely classed as a part of theCocopa.
Heabenomai.— Consag (1746) quoted by Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Dec. 6, 1861. K«lMmii]iiaa.~Venegas,
Hist. Cal., ]i, 171, 1769. Hoabonoma.— Kino (1700)
quoted by Goues, Garc^ Diary, 548, 1900. Hoaho-
Oi&iios.— Mayer, Mexico, ii. 38, 1853. EoboBomaa.—
Venegas, Hist. Cal., i, 301, 1789. Oabopenoma.—
Kino (1700) in Doc. Hist. Mex.,4th s.,!, 349, 1866.
Hoaiels. Mentioned by Bauary des Lo-
zi^res (Voy. Louisianej 242, 1802) in a
list of tribes with no indication of habitat.
Possibly intended for Theloel, a name
given sometimes to part, at others to all
the Natchez.
Hoako. A former Maidu village on the
w. bank of Feather r., below Marysville,
Sutter CO., Cal. (r. b. d.)
Hoak.— Wozencraft (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4. 82d
Cong., spec, sess., 206, 1863. Hoako.— Dixon in
Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvii, pt. 3, map, 124,
1906. Bock.— Powers in Cont. M. A. Ethnol., in,
282, 1877. Books.— Ind. Aff. Rep.. 129. 1860.
Hoka.— Curtin, MS. vocab., B. A. £., 1886. Huk.—
Hale, Ethnol. and Philol.. vi, 631, 1846.
Hobatmeauasi. A clan of the Acheha
phratry of the ancient Timucua of
Florida. — Pareja {ca. 1614) quoted by
Gatschet in Am. Philos. Soc. Free., xvii,
492, 1878.
Hobbamock, Hobbamoco. See Hobomok,
Hohomoko,
Hobeckentopa. A locality, possibly a
town, where a treaty with the Choctaw
was concluded Aug. 31, 1803. It was on
Tombigbee r. , in the e. part of Washington
CO., AlaV, perhaps on or near a bluff ofthe
same name upon which St Stephens now
stands. (h. w. h.)
Kobeokenlopa.— Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff. (1806),
I. 749, 1832. Hoe-BaeUn-too-pa.— U. S. Ind. Treat.
(1803), 103, 1837.
Hobnats. A folk-etymological corrup-
tion of hobbeniSy the name of a tuberous
root ( Orontiumaquaticum) in the Delaware
dialect of Algonq uian. Rev. A. Hesselius
(cited by Nelson, Inds. of N. J., 78, 1894),
writing in the early years of the 18th cen-
tury in New Jersey, mentions "the first
fruits of roots, which grow in swamps,
not unlike nuts, called tachUf or by tne
English fiopnvis.^^ The Delaware hobbe-
nis is a diminutive of hobbiriy which was
afterward applied by these Indians to the
potato. The Swedish colonists called this
root fiopnis. ( a. p. c. )
Hobomok. A chief of the Wampanoag
who was the life-long friend of the Eng-
lish, from the time he met them at Plym-
outh in 1621. He helped to strengthen
the friendship of Massasoit for the colo-
nists, but, unlike Massasoit, he became a
Christian, and died, before 1642, as a
member of the English settlement at
Plymouth. He was of great service to the
English in warning them of Indian con-
spiracies. He was present at some of the
battles in which Standish performed val-
orous deeds, but was not an active partici-
pant. The name is identical with Abba-
mocho, Hobbamoco, Habamouk, Hobba-
mock, Hobomoko, etc. See the follow-
ing, (a. f. c.)
BULL. 80]
HOBOMOKO HOa CREEK
555
Hbbomoko. Whittier, in the notes to
his Poems (464, 1891) cites the saying
conoeming John Bonython:
Here lies Bonython, the Sagamore of Saco,
He lived a rogrue and died a knave, and went
to Hobomoko.
Mentioned by early writers as an evil
deity of the Massachuset and closely re-
lated Algonquian tribes. (a. f. c. )
Hoocaniim. Mentioned as a band for-
merly in East Hartford township, Hart-
ford CO., Conn., where they remained,
according to Stiles, until about 1745.
They were probably identical with or a
part of the Podunk (q. v.). De Forest
locates the Podunk here, but does not
mention the Hoccanum.
Hooeannms.— stiles (1761) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
Ist s., X, 105, 1809. Hookanoanco.— Mason (1659),
ibid,, 4th 8., VII, 423, 1865 (perhaps the name of
the villafire).
Hoehelaga (dialectic form of Hochelaiji,
*at the place of the [beaver] dam'). A
former Iroquoian town, strongly palisad-
ed, situated in 1535 on Montreal id., Can-
ada, about a mile from the mountain first
called "Mont Royal" by Cartier. At
that time it contained about 50 typical
Iroquoian lodges, each 50 or more paces
in length and 12 or 15 in breadth, built
of wood and covered with very broad
strips of bark, neatly and deftly, joined.
Estimating 12 fires and 24 firesides, each
of three persons, to every lodge, the total
population would have been about 3,600.
The upper portion of the lodges was
used for storing com, beans, and dried
fruits. The innabitants pounded com
in wooden mortars with pestles and
made a paste of the meal, which was
molded into cakes that were cooked
on large hot rocks and covered with hot
pebbles. They also made many soups of
com, beans, and peas, of which they had
a sufiSciency. In the lodges were large
veesels in which smoked fish was stored
for winter use. They were not travelers
like those of ** Canada*' and **Saguenay,"
although, according to Cartier, **the said
Canadians are subject to them with 8 or
9 other peoples along the river."
(j. N. B. H.)
Booli6la«a.— Cartier (1545), Bref R^cit, 9, 1863.
Boehelafoues.— De Laet (1638) quoted by Barton,
New Views, xlii, 1798 (Latin name of the inhabi-
tants). OeheUca.— Map {ca. 1543) in Maine Hist.
See. Coll., 1, 854, 1869: Jes. Rel. 1642, 86, 1858.
Hoehelayi ( ' at the place of the [beaver]
dam'). A former Iroquoian town, situ-
ated in 1535 in a flat country not far from
the junction of Jacques Cartier r. with
the St Lawrence, ana probably near the
present Pt Platon, Quebec. ( j. n. b. h. )
AohelaoL-Cartier (1535), Bref R^it, 56a, 1868.
Aeh«lao7.— Ibid. Aohelaiy.— Ibid. Aohelayy.—
Ibid. Hoehelai.— Cartier J1585) quoted by Hak-
luyt, Voy., II, 115, 1889. HodieUy.— Ibid., 129.
OoBMay.— Cartier, Bref Rteit, op. cit.
Hoohonchava ('alligator^). A Chicka-
saw clan of the Ishpanee phratry.
Ho-ohmi-cliab-ba.-'Moigan, Ane. Soc., 168, 1877.
Hotehon tohapa.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 96.
1884.
Hockhooken (*place of gourds.* — Hew-
itt). A former Delaware village on Hock-
ing r., Ohio.
Haokhooken.— La Tour, map, 1779. Hockhooken.—
Ibid.. 1782. Eoekhocken.— Lattr^, map, 1784.
Xockhoeken.— Esnauts and Rapilly, map, 1777
(misprint).
Hoes ^ and Spades. Agricultural imple-
ments in general are referred to under
Agriculture (q. v.) , special mention being
here made of certam numerous, large,
bladelike, chijjped implements of flint
found in the rich alluvial bottom lands
of the middle Mississippi valley, whose
polished surfaces in many cases unmis-
takably indicate long-continued use in
digging operations; and this, in connec-
tion with their suggestive shape, has
caused them to be classified as hoes and
spades. Extensive quarries of the flint
nodules from which implements of this
class were shapeil, have been located in
Union co., III. (see Quarries). Great
numbers of the noes and spades, origi-
nating in these or in similar quarries, are
distributed over an extensive area in
Missouri, Illinois, and the neighboring
states. The most common form has an
oval, or elliptical outline, with ends
either rounds or somewhat pointed; a
modified form has the lower end strongly
curved, with the sides in straight or
slightly concave lines and the same
pointed top. Beginning with the ex-
tremes of this type, it is possible to ar-
range a series which will pass by insen-
sible gradations into small scrapers and
scraper-like celts. Another type, not un-
usual, has a semi-elliptical blade with a
square or flat top, in the sides of which
deep notches are cut for securing the
handle. An allied form is without the
notches but has projecting points at the
top, which answer the same purpose.
The larger implements of this class, often
reaching a foot in length, are generally
denominated spades, and the shorter, or
notched, forms hoes; but as both had the
handles put on either parallel with the
longer axis or at an an^le with it, allow-
ing all alike to be used in the same man-
ner, the distinction is without particular
significance.
Consult Fowke in 13th Rep. B. A. E.,
1896; Moorehead, Prehist. Implements,
1900; Rau, Archaeol. Coll. Nat. Mus., 1876;
Thruston, Antiquities of Tenn., 1807;
Willoughby in Am. Anthrop., viii, 130,
1906. (g. p. w. h. h. )
Hog. See Quahog,
Hogan. A Navaho house; adapted
from qoghdn (Mindeleff in 17th Rep. B.
A. E., 475, 1898), in the Navaho dialect
of the Athapascan stock. See Habitations,
Hog Creek. A former Shawnee settle-
ment on a branch of Ottawa r., in Allen
556
H0G0L0GE8 — HOLEOLAMB
[B. A. B.
CO., Ohio. The Indians sold their reser-
vation there in 1831 and removed w. of
the Mississippi. (j. m.)
Hogologes. A former Creek town on
Apalachicola r., at the junction of Chat-
tahoochee and FUnt rs., in Georeia.
Hagaligit.— Bartram, Voy., i, map, 1799. Ho-
cohegeM.— Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 8}1776. Sogo-
leefM.— Romans, Fla., i, 280, 1775. jEogoleefis.—
Roberts, Fla., 13, 90, 1763. HogolicU.—Alcedo,
Die. Geog., II, 364, 1787. Hogologes.— Jefferys^Am.
Atlas, map 5, 1776. Ogolegeet.— Lattr6, Map 17. S.,
1784.
Hogrstown. Described as an old (Del-
aware) village between Venango and Buf-
falo cr., Pa., in 1791 (Proctor in Am. St
Papers, Ind. Aff., i, 153, 1832) . Perhaps
wrongly located and identical with Kus-
kuski.
Hoh. A band of the Quileute living
at the mouth of Hoh r., about 15 m.
s. of Lapush« the main seat of the tribe
on the w. coast of Washington. They
are under the jurisdiction of the Neah
Bay agency. Pop. 62 in 1905. (l. f.)
Eohs.— McKenney in Ind. AfF. Rep. 1869, 131, 1870.
Holes.— Hill, ibid., 1867, 48, 1868. Hoooh.-Swan,
N. W. Coast, 211, 1867. Hooh.— Ibid. Huoh.—
Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 173, 1877. Kwiik-
sat.— Ibid.
Hohandika ('earth eaters'). A Sho-
shoni division inhabiting the region w.
of Great Salt lake, Utah. They suffered
a severe defeat in 1862 at the hands of
California volunteers.
Diggers.— Oatschet in Geog. Sorv. W. 100 M., 409,
1879. Earth Eaters.— H off fnan in Proe. Am. Philos.
Soc., XXIII, 298, 1886. B6handlka.— Ibid. Bo-
kan-dik'-ah.— Stuart, Montana, 81, 1865. Hokan-
tiOutra.— Gatschet, op. cit. Salt lake Diggers.—
Stuart, op. eit.
Hohe ('Assiniboin'). A band of the
Sihasapa division of the Teton Sioux. —
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1897.
Hohilpo. Said by Lewis and Clark
(Exped., I, map, 1814; ii, 596, 1817) to be
a tnbe of the Tushepaw (q. v. ) residing
on Clarke r., above the Micksucksealton,
in the Rocky mts., and numbering 300 in
25 lodges in 1805.
Ho hill DOS.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 114,
1905. Eo-hU-pos.— Ibid., 120. Xo-pU-po.— Lewis
and Clark misquoted by Gibbs in Pae. K. R. Rep.,
I, 417, 1856.
Hohio. Mentioned by Coxe (Carolana,
12, 1741 ) as a nation living on the Wabash.
Unidentified, and probably imaginary as
a tribe, although the name is the same as
Ohio.
Hohopa (Ho-ho-pa), A Koeksotenok
village on the w. coast of Baker id., Brit.
Col.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can.,
sec. 2, 73, 1887.
Hohota. Mentioned by Ofiate (Doc.
In6d., XVI, 113, 1871) as a pueblo of New
Mexico in 1598; at that time doubtless
situated in the country of the Salinas, in
the vicinity of Abo, e. of the Rio Grande,
and evidently occupied by the Tigua or
thePiros. (p. w. h.)
HoindarhoAon (* island people.'— Hew-
itt). The Huron name of a tribe subor-
dinate to the Ottawa.— Sagard (1632),
Canada, iv, cap. 'Nations,' 1866.
Hoitda. A division of the Maidu living
on Rock cr. , in the n. part of Butte co. , Cal.
Koektem.— Ohever in BuU. Essex Inst., ii,28, 1871.
Hoitda.— Curtin, MS. vocab., B. A.E., 1885.
Hokaratcha ('skunk'). A band or so-
ciety of the Crows.
Ho-ka-rut'-eha.— Morgran, Anc. Soc., 159, 1877.
Pole-oat band.— Culbertson in Smithson. Rep.
1850, 144, 1851.
noke&i(Xdq/e'diy'peop\eotXoQV), A
Tlingit clan at Wrangell, Alaska, belong-
ing to the Wolf phratry . They are namea
from a place (X5ql) opposite Old Wran-
gell.
Xoek-a-t6«.— Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 1859.
Ooko'de.— Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes of Can., 25,
1889. Sohttoh-e'di.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind.. 120.
1885. Zoqle'^— Swanton.field notes. B. A. £.. 1904.
Hoko. A Clallam village on Okeho r..
Wash. Under the name Okeno its in-
habitants participated in the treaty of
Point No Point, Wash., in 1855.
Hoko.— Swan, letter, B. A. £., Feb. 1886. Ooha.—
Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i. 429, 1866. Ooho.—
Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 450, 1854. Okeho.— Ibid.
Okeno.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1855). 800, 1873.
Hoko. The Juniper clan of the Kokop
(Wood) phratry of the Hopi.
H6hu. — Voth, Hopf Proper Names. 78. 1905. Soke
wi£w4.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 584. 1900
hvinvii=' clan'). Ho'-ko wiin-wft.- Fewkes in
Am. Anthrop., vii, 404, 1894.
Hokokwito. A former village of the
Awani division of the Miwok, opposite
Yosemite falls, in Yosemite valley, Mari-
posa CO., Cal. The hotel now occupies
its site.
Hoooowedoo.— Powers in Overland Mo., x, 338,
1874. Hok-ok'-wi-dok.— Powers in Cont N. A.
Ethnol., Ill, 365. 1877. Hokokwito.— A. L. Kroe-
ber. inf n. 1905.
Hokomo. A former Maidu village on
the E. side of Middle fork of Feather r.,
almost due n. of Mooretown, Butte co.,
Cal.— Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat Hist.,
XVII, pi. xxxviii, 1905.
Hokwaits {Ho-kwaiis). A band of Fai-
ute formerly living near Ivanpah, s. s.
Cal. (Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 51,
1874). Cf. Hakwiche^ the* Mohave name
of the Kawia, q. v.
Holatemico, popuiarly known as Billy
Bowlegs. The last Semmole chief of
prominence to leave Florida and remove
with his people to the W. He was born
about 1808, and after the first Seminole
removal became the recognized chief of
the remnant in 1842, and was the leader
of hostilities in 1855 to 1858. Although
but 25 years of age, and not then a chief,
he was one of the signers of the treaty of
Payne's Landing, May 9, 1832, by which
the Seminole agreed to remove to Indian
Ter., but it was not until May, 1858, that
he and his band, numbering 164 persons,
departed. See Bowlegs, (c. t. )
Holedame. One of several tribes for-
merly occupying "the country from
Buena Vista and Carises lakes, and Kern
r. to the Sierra Nevada and Coast range,"
BULL. 30]
HOLE-IN-THE-DAY HOMAYO
557
Oal. (Barbour in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32(1
Cong., spec, sees., 256, 1853). By treaty
of June 10, 1851, these tribes reserved a
tract between Tejon pass and Kern r., and
ceded the remainder of their lands to the
United States. Probably Mariposan ( Yo-
kuts), though possibly Ghumashan. Cf.
HolkomcLy Holmiuk,
Hole-in-the-day (Bagtff&nagijikf *hole,
opening, rift in the sky.* — W. J.). A
dnippewa chief, a member of the warlike
Noka (Bear) clan. He succeeded Curly-
head (q. v. ) as war chief in 1825. He had
already been recognized as a chief by the
Government for his bravery and fidelity
to the Americans in the war of 181 2. His
whole subsequent life was spent in fighting
the Sioux, and he ended the struggle that
bad lasted for centuries over the posses-
sion of the fisheries and hunting grounds
of the L. Superior r^on by definitively
drivuig the hereditary enemy across the
Mississippi. Had not the Government
intervened to compel the warring tribes
to accept a line of demarkation, he threat-
ened to plant his villa^ on Minnesota
r. and pursue the Sioux into the western
plains. At Prairie du Chien he acknow 1-
edged the ancient possession by the Sioux
of the territorv from the Mississippi to
Green Imy and[ the head of L. Superior,
but claimed it for the Chippewa by right
of conquest. The Chippewa had the ad-
vantage of the earlier possession of fire-
arms, out in the later feuds which Hole-
in-the-day carried on the two peoples
were equally armed. Georee Copway,
who valued the friendship of Hole-in-the-
day and once ran 270 miles in 4 days to
apprise him of a Sioux raid, relates how
he almost converted the old chief, who
promised to embrace Christianity and
advise his people to do so ''after one
more battle with the Sioux.** He was
succeeded as head chief of the Chippewa
on his death in 1846 by his son, who bore
his father's name and who carried on in
Minnesota the ancient feud with the Da-
kota tribes. At the time of the Sioux
rising in 1862 he was accused of planning
a similar revolt. The second Hole-in-the-
day was murdered by men of his own
tribe at Crow Wing, Minn., June 27,
1868. (p. H.)
Holholto. A former Maidu village a
few miles s. of Mooretown, Butte co., Cal.
Eelto.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. in, 282,
1877. Holholto.— Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat.
HlBt, xvn, pi. xxxviii, 1906.
Holkoma. A Mono tribe on Sycamore
or. and Big cr. , n. of Kings r. , Cal. There
is some doubt as to its proper name.
Hol-ea-BUL— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. £.,782,1899.
Ho-lcB-mahi.— Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc 61,
82d Cong., 1st sess., 22, 1852. Hol-«n-BM.— Barbour
(1862) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4. 82d Cong., spec, eesa.,
254, 1868. Hol'-ko-mah.— Merriam in Science, x i x ,
916, June 15. 1904. Hol-o'-kommah.— Ibid. To-
wiB-eh«'-ML-Ibid.
Hollow-hom Bear. A Brul^ Sioux chief,
bom in Sheridan co., Nebr., in Mar., 1860.
When but 16 years of age he accompanied
a band led by his father againnt the Paw-
nee, whom they fought on the present
site of Genoa, Nebr. In 1868 he joined a
band of Bruits in an attack on United
States troops in Wyoming, and in another
where now is situated the Crow agency,
Mont.; and in the following year par-
ticipated in a raid on the laborers who
were constructing the Union Pacific R. R.
Subsequently he became captain of po-
lice at Rosebud agency, S. Dak., and ar-
rested his predecessor, Crow Dog, for the
murder of Spotted Tail. Five years later
he resigned and was appointed second
lieutenant under Agent Spencer, but was
a^in compelled to resign on account of
ill health. When Gen. Crook was sent
with a commission to Rosebud, in 1889, to
make an agreement with the Indians there.
Hollow-horn Bear was chosen by the
Sioux as their speaker, being considered
an orator of unusual ability. He took
part in the parade at the inauguration of
President Roosevelt at Washington, Mar.
4, 19a5. (c.T.)
Holmiak. One of the tribes formerly
occupying * * the country from Buena Vista
and Caris(»s lakes, and Kern r. to the
Sierra Nevada and Coast range, ' * Cal . By
treaty of June 10, 1851, these tribes re-
served a tract between Tejon pass and
Kern r. and ceded the remainder of their
land to the United States. Probably of
Mariposan (Yokuts) or Shoshonean stock.
Cf. JToUclamey Holkoma,
Bol-mie-uht.— Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,
32d CJong., spec, seas., 266. 1853. Holmiuk.— Royce
in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 1899.
Holstenborg. A missionary station on
Davis str., w. Greenland.
HoUteinberg.— Crantz, Hist. Greenland, i, 13, 1767.
HoUtensborg.— Meddelelser om Qronland, xxv,
map, 1902. «
Holtroclitac. A Costanoan village for-
merly connected with Santa Cruz mis-
8ion,*Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. b,
1860.
Holakhik (Ho-iriq'-\k), A Yaquina
village on the n. side of Yaquina r.,
Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 229, 1890.
Homalko. A Salish tribe on the b. side
of Bute inlet, Brit. Col., speaking the
Comox dialect; pop. 89 in 1904.
Em-alcom.- Can. Inn. Aff. for 1884, 187. Homalco.—
Ibid., 1891, map. Homalko.— Ibid., 1901. pt. ii, 168.
a(«'qoiiia^o.— Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887.
Homayine (H&ma yifl^-ey * young elk*).
A subgens of the Khotachi, the Elk gens
of the Iowa. — Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A.
P:., 238, 1897.
Homayo. A large ruined pueblo of the
Tewa on the w. bank of Rio Ojo Caliente,
a small w. tributary of the Rio Grande,
in Rio Arriba co. , N. Mex. See Bandolier
558
HOMHOABIT — HONANI
[B. A. B.
in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 37, 1892; Hew-
ett in Bull. 32, B. A. E., 39, 1906.
Homhoabit. Given by Rev. J. Oaballeria
(Hist. San Bernardino Val., 1902) as a
tormer village, probably of the Serranos,
at a place now called Homoa, near San
Bernardino, s. Cal.
Hominy. From the Algonquian dia-
lects of New England or Virginia, applied
to a dish prepared from Indian corn
pounded or cracked and boiled, or the
kernels merely hulled by steeping first
in lye or ashes and afterward boiled, with
or without fish or meat to season it. The
first mention of the name in print occurs
in Capt. John Smith's True Travels, 43,
1630. Some forms of the name given by
early writers are tackhummin^ *to grind
corn (or grain) ,* and pokhommiriy * to beat
or thresh out.* Josselyn (N. E. Rar., 53,
1672) defined hominy as what was left
after the flour had been sifted out of
commeal. Beverley (Virginia, bk. 3,
1722) sa^s that homony is ** Indian corn,
broken in a mortar, husked, and then
boiled in water over a gentle §re for ten
or more hours to the consistency of furm-
ity.'* The name "hominy grits" is
sometimes applied to the cracked variety.
Tooker suggests as the radicals aham^ *he
beats or pounds*; mm, * berry or fruit,'
* grain.' The name may be a reduction
of some of the wonls in which it occurs,
as rockohominy. Dr Wm. Jones (inf n,
1906) says: **lt is plain that the form of
the word hominy is but an abbreviation,
for what is left is the designative suffix
-min, *^rain,' and part of a preceding
modifying stem." For a discussion c3
the etymology see Gerard in Am. An-
throp., VI, 314, 1904; vii, 226, 1905;
Tooker, ibid., vi, 682. See Samp.
(a. f. c. j. n. b. h.)
Homna (Ho-mna^ * smelling like fish').
A division of the 5rul6 Teton Sioux. —
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218, 1897.
Homnipa. Given as a Karok village on
Klamath r., n. w. Cal., inhabited in 1860.
Home-nip-pah.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23,
1860.
Homolobi {Ho-moV-obi, * place of the
breast-like elevation'). A group of ru-
ined pueblos near Winslow, Ariz., which
were occupied by the ancestors of various
Hopi clans. See Fewkes in 22d Rep. B.
A. K, 23, et seq., 1904; Mindeleff in 8th
Rep. B. A. E., 29, 1891.
Homolua. A former Timucua village,
situated, according to Laudonnidre, on
the s. side of St Johns r., Fla., at its
mouth, in 1564. De Gourgues placed a
town of similar namQ about 60 leagues
inland on the same river.
EmoU.— Laudonnidre(1664) in French, Hist. Coll.
La., n. s., 306, 1869. Homoloa.— Ibid., 331. Homo-
loua.~De Bry, Brev. Nar., map, 1590. Molloaa.—
Laudonni^re, op. cit., 242. Koloa. — Fontaneda
(1575), ibid., 2d s., 264, 1875. Molona.— Laudon-
ni^re, op. cit., 245. Xonlooa.— Gourges, ibid., 2d
8., 275, 1875. Omoloa.— Laudonnidre, op. cit., 253.
Homotassa ( ' abundance of pepper ' ) . A
Seminole town in Hernando co., Fla., in
1837. There are now a river and a town
of the same name in that locality.
Homa Sum.— Drake, Ind. Ghion., 216, 1836.
Homaamp. A former Elarok village on
Klamath r., Cal.
Home-war-roop.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 2S,
1860.
Homnlchison. A Sqnawmish ' village
community at Capilano cr., Burrard inlet,
Brit. Col. ; the former headquarters of the
supreme chief of the tribe. Pop. 45 in
1904.
Oapalino.— Can. Ind. Aff., 276, 1894. Gapitano
Ore«k.— Can. Ind. Aff., 808, 1879. HomnateUoa.—
Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. 8., 475. 1900. Kapi-
lano.— Can. Ind. Aff., 857, 1897.
Honabanoa. Coxe (Carolana, 14, 1741)
says that ''fifteen leagues above the Ho-
hio ... to the w. is the river Hona-
banou, upon which dwells a nation of the
same name, and another called Amicoa.''
On the map accompanying his work this
river is representea as in s. e. Missouri,
entering the Mississippi immediately
above or nearly opposite the mouth of
the Ohio. As there is no stream on the
w. side between the mouth of the Ohio
and St Genevieve co. that can be called
a river, and no Indians of the names
mentioned are known to have resided in
that section, both must be rejected as un-
authentic, and indeed mythical so far as
the locality is concerned. This river has
evidently "been laid down from Henne-
pin's map of 1697, relating to the **New
Discovery," which is admitted to be un-
authentic so far as it relates to the r€«ion
s. of the mouth of Illinois r. It is evic^nt,
however, that Coxe has attempted to give
the name Ouabano (q. v. ), which La ^le
applied to some Indians who visited Ft St
Louis, on Matagorda bay, Texas, from a
westerly section. (j. m. c. t.)
Honani. The Badger phratry of the
Hopi, comprising the Honani (Badger),
Muinyan (Forcupine) , Wishoko (Tuftey-
buzzard ) , Buli ( Butterfljj ) , Buliso ( Even-
ing Primrose), and Kacmna (Sacred Dan-
cer) clans. According to Fewkes this
people settled at Kishvuba, a spring
sacred to the Kachinas, before going to
Tusayan. The Honani and Rachina
phratries are intimately associated. The
former settled Walpi when the village
was on the old site, and some of them
wentonto Awatobi, whence they returned
after the fall of that pueblo. The arrival
of the Honani in Tusayan was probably
not earlier than the latter part of the 17tn
century.
Ho-na-m-nyft-mu.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii,
405, 1894 (nytl-m<l=' pliratry').
Honani. The Badger clan of the Hopi.
Hondmi.— Bourke, Snake Dance, 117, 1884. Hoaaai
wifiwd.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E^ 584, 1900
(mfiwilL= * clan ' ) . Ho-na'>iii wim-wu.— Fewkes in
Am. Anthrop.,vu, 405, 1894. Hoii'^wii]i«'wa.<*Ibid.,
404.
BULL. 30]
HONANKI HOOK-STONES
559
Honanki (Hopi : * bear honee ' ). A pre-
historic cliff-village, attributed to the
Hopi, in the valley of Oak cr., in the
** reii-rock " country s. of Flagstaff, Ariz. —
Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 558-569,
1898.
Honda (HiZ-na-u), The Bear phratry
of the Hopi, comprising the Honau
(Bear), Tokochi (Wild-cat) , Chosro (Bird
[blue]), Kokyan (Spider), and Hekpa
(Fir) clans. According to Fewkes these
people are traditionally said to have been
the first to arrive in Tusayan. Although
reputed to be the oldest peojjle in Walpi
they are now almost extinct in that pue-
blo, and are not represented in Sicho-
movi. They exist however at Mishong-
novi.
Honau.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E.. 584,1900.
Ho'-natt-iili.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 404,
1894. H6nin nyuma.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E.,
88,1891 (nywmu= •phratry'). Bon-namu.— Voth,
Traditions of the Hopi, 86, 1905.
Honan. The Bear clan of the Hopi.
Honau.— Bourke, Snake Dance, 117, 1884 (mis-
Srint). Ho'-nau.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E.,
), 1891. Honau wlnwfi.— Fewkes in 19th Rep.
B. A. E., 584, 1900. Honawuu.— Dorsey and Voth,
Mishongnovi Ceremonies. 175, 1902.
HonayawuB. See Farmer* 8 Brother,
HbneoyeC his finger lies.' — Hewitt). A
former Seneca settlement on Honeoye cr.,
near Honeoye lake, N. Y. ; destroyed by
Sullivan in 1779.
Anacangaw.— Livermore (1779) in N. H. Hist. Soc.
Coll.. VI, 827-329, 1850. Aniafeen.— Poiiehot, map
(1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 694, 1858. An-
nafaugaw.— Livermore.op.cit. Anyayea.— Hiibley
(1779) quoted byConover, Kanadegaand Geneva
Ms., B. A. E. Hannayaye.— Sullivan ( 1770) quoted
by Conover, ibid. HMmeym.— Nukerck (1779),
ibid. Haunyauya. — Grant (1779), ibid. Honeyoyo. —
Dearborn (1779), ibid. Honneyayea. — Fellows
(1779), ibid. Onnayayou.— McKendry(1779), ibid.
Onyauyah.— Barton (1779), ibid.
Honest John. See Tedyuskung,
Honetaparteenwai. Given as a division
of the Yankton of the North under chief
Tattunggarweetei^o in 1804, but probably
intend^ for the Hunkpatina.
Hone-ta-par-t6«n-was.— Lewis and Clark, Discov.,
34, 1806: Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 99. 1905.
Honknt. A division of Maidu living
near the mouth of Honcut cr., Yuba co.,
Cal.
Hoaneuts.— Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 420, 1874.
Hoan'-kut— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in,
282, 1877. Honout.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 450,
1874.
Honmoyanshn (Hon-mo-yau^'ca), A
former Chuniashan village at El Barranco,
near San Pedro, Ventura co., Cal. — Hen-
shaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A.
E., 1884.
Honniasontkeronon (Iroquois: 'people of
the place of crook-necked squashes/ or
'people of the place where they wear
crosses'). An unidentified people of
whom Galling was informed by the Iro-
quois as living on Ohio r., above the falls
at Louisville, Ky . On a map of De V Isle,
dated 1722, a small lake called L. Onia-
sont, around which are the words Mes
Oniasontke,' is placed on the s. side, ap-
parently, of the **Ouabache, otherwise
called Ohio or Beautiful river,'* and the
outlet of L. Oniasont is made to flow into
the Ouabache. It may be inferred that
the Iroquois statement as to the location
of this people was substantially correct;
that is, that they lived on a small lake e.
of Wabash r. and having an outlet into
that stream, although Hoflniasontke'rofl-
no° is an Iroquois euphemism for the
land of departed spirits. ( J. n. b. h. )
Honniaaontkeronont.— Gallin^e (1669) in Margry
IX^c, 1, 116. 1875. Oniasontke.— Del'Isle, map, 1772.
Oniasont-Keronons.— Femow, Ohio Valley, 32,1890.
Honosonayo ( * white deer ' ). A clan of
the ancient Timucua of Florida.
Eonoto Kayo.— Pareja (ca. 1613) quoted by Gat-
schet in Am. Philos. Soc. Proc., xvii, 492, 1878.
Honowa ( Hd'non^j * poor people * ; sing. ,
IWndw). A principal division of the
Cheyenne, q. v.
Hof nowa.— Grinnell. Social Org. Cheyennes, 136,
19a5. Ho'nowi.— Mooney,inrn,1905. Poor.— Dor-
sey in Field Columb. Mus. Pub., no. 103, 62, 1905.
Honsading. A former Hu pa village situ-
ated on the right bank of Trinity r.,Cal.,
near the entrance of the canyon through
which the river flows after leaving Ilupa
valley. (p. e. o.)
Aknutl.— Goddard, infn, 1903 (Yurok name).
Hoonselton.— Ind. AIT. Rep.,66, 1872. Hoontolton.—
Ind. Aff. Rep., 82. 1870. Hun'-sa-tung.— Powers in
Cont. N.A.Ethnol.,iii, 73, 1877. Loonsolton.— H. R.
Rep. 98, 42d Cong., .3d sess., 428, 1873. Okahno.—
Meyer, Nach dem Sacramento, 282, 1855. Oka-no.—
McKee in Sen. Ex. D(M'. 4. 32d Cong., spec, sess.,
194, 1853. Oke-noke.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, III, 139, 1^53. Okenope.— Gibb8.M8.,B.A.E.,
1852.
Honwee Valleoito. A Diegueilo ranch-
eria represented in the treaty of 1852 at
Santa l8al)el, s. Cal.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,
34th Cong., M ness., 132, 1857.
Hook. One of the small tribes or bands
formerly living in South Carolina on the
lower Pedee and its affluents, and possibly
of Siouan stock. Law son (Hist. Car., 45,
1860) refers to them as foes of the San tee
and as living in 1701 about the mouth of
Winyaw bay, S. C. Consult Mooney,
Siouan Tribes of the East, Bull. B. A. E.,
1895. See Backhook.
Hooka (Ilo^-o-ka). The Dove clans of
the Keresan pueblos of Santa Ana, San
Felipe, and Sia, New Mexico. That of
the last-mentioned village is extinct.
H6hoka-hano.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix. 350,
1896 (Sia form; hdno = * people'). H6oka-hano.—
Ibid. (Santa Ana form). HCuka-hlno. Ibid. (San
Felipe form).
Hook-stones. A variety of prehistoric
artifacts to which no particular purpose
can be assigned. They are heavy, hook-
like objects, from 1 to 4 or 5 in. in
length and of diversifie<l proportions.
The principal variety standing on the
heavy rounded base resembles somewhat
the letter Z; others are longer and more
slender, with the base less developed, but
with the hook more pronounced. An
example with hook at both ends, prob-
ably not properly included in this group,
560
HOOLATASSA HOPI
[B. A. E.
is ^ven by Yates in Morehead's Prehis-
toric Implements. They are usually made
of soapstone and other soft rock, ana occur
in burials in s. California, on the islands
XBS well as on the mainland,
and no doubt had symbolic u^e
(see Problematical objects) . A
number of these objects, now
in the Peabody Museum, are
described by Putnam, who
prefers to regard them as im-
hook-stone; s . piemen ts, and mentions signs
CALIFORNIA, ^f use. Two examples were
^ palmer; obtained from a grave at the
ancient soapstone quarry of Santa Catalina
id. in 1902 (Holmes), and a deposit of
about 50 specimens was discovered at Re-
dondo beach, Cal., in 1903 (Palmer).
Consult Holmes in Rep. Nat. Mus.
1900, 1902; Moorehead, op. cit.; Palmer
in 2d Bull. S. W. Soc. Archseol. Inst.
Am., 1905; Putnam in Surv. W. 100th
Merid., 7, 1879. (w. h. h.)
Hoolatassa. A former Choctaw town 4
m. from Abihka, probably in the present
Kemper co.. Miss. — Romans, Fla., 310,
1775.
Hoolikan. See Eulachon.
Hoonebooey. One of the Shoshoni tri bes
or bands said to have dwelt e. of the Cas-
cade and 8. of the Blue mts. of Oregon, in
1865. Not identified.
Hoonebooey.— Huntington in Ind. Aff. Rep., 466,
1866. Hoo-ne-boo-ly.— Ibid., 471.
Hooshkal (Hoosh-kal). A former Che-
halis village on the n. shore of Grays
harbor. Wash.— Gibbs, MS., no. 248,
B. A. E.
Hopakka Choctaw. The Choctaw for-
merly residing in Hopahka town in s.
Mississippi, w. of Pearl r., who are spoken
of as the most intelligent and influential
of the tribe. Known also as Cobb Indians,
from their leader. — Claiborne (1843) in
Sen. Doc. 168, 28th Cong., 1st sess., 39, 65,
1844.
Hopedale. A Moravian Eskimo mission
village on the e. coast of Labrador, estab-
lished in 1782 (Hind, Lab. Penin., ii, 199,
1863). Pop. about 155.
Hopehood. A Norridgewock chief,
known among his p>eopre as Wahowa.
or Wohawa, who acquired considerable
notoriety in e. New England in the latter
part of the 17th century. He was the
son of a chief called Robiuhood. Hope-
hood's career is pronounced by Drake
(Ind. Biog., 130, 1832) to have been one
of long and bloody exploits. He first
appears as » participant in King Philip's
war, when he made an attack on a house
filled with women and children at Ne-
wichawanoc, about the site of Berwick,
Me.; all escaped, however, except two
children and the woman who bravely bar-
red and defended the door. In 1676 he
was one of the leaders of the e. New Eng-
land tribes who held consultation with
the English at Taconnet, Me. In 1685 he
joined Kankamagus and other sachems
in a letter to Gov. Cranfield of New
Hampshire, protesting against the en-
deavor of the English to urge the Mo-
hawk to attack them. On Mar. 18, 1690,
he joined the French under Hertel in a
massacre at Salmon falls, and in May
attacked Fox Point, N. H., burning sev-
eral houses, killing 14 persons, and carry-
ing away 6 others. Not long afterward he
penetrated the Iroquois country, where
some Canadian Indians, mistaking him
for an Iroquois, slew him and several of
his companions. Hopehood was at one
time a captive in the hands of the English
and served as a slave for a season in
Boston. (c. T.)
Hopi (contraction of H6pUu, 'peaceful
ones,' or H&pUu-shinumUy 'peaceful all
people': their own name). A body of
Indians, speaking a Shoshonean dialect,
occupying 6 pueblos on a reservation of
2,472,320 acres in n. e. Arizona. The
name **Moqui," or ''Moki," by which
they have been popularly known,
means 'dead' in their own language,
but as a tribal name it is seemingly
of alien origin and of undetermined sig-
nification— perhaps from the Keresan
language (Moslcha in Laguna, Mo-ts in
Acoma, M6ts][ in Sia, Cochiti, and San
Felipe), whence Espejo's "Mohace" and
"Mohoce" (1583) and Oflate's **Moho-
c|ui " ( 1598) . Bandelier and dishing be-
lieved the Hopi country, the later pro-
vince of Tusayan, to be identical with the
Totonteac of Fray Marcos de Niza.
History. — The Hopi first became known
to white men in the summer of 1540,
when Coronado, then at Cibola (ZufXi),
dispatched Pedro de Tobar and Fray Juan
de Padilla to visit 7 villages, constituting
the province of Tusayan, toward the w.
or N. w. The Spaniards were not re-
ceived with friendliness at first, but the
opposition of the natives was soon over-
come and the party remained among the
Hopi several days, learning from them
of the existence of the Grand canyon of
the Colorado, which Cardenas was later
ordered to visit. The names of the
Tusayan towns are not recorded by Cor-
onado's chroniclers, so that with the ex-
ception of Oraibi, Shongopovi, Mishong-
novi, Walpi,and Awatobi, it is not known
with certainty what villages were inhab-
ited when the Hopi first became known
to tho Spaniards. Omitting Awatobi,
which was destroyed in 1700, with the
possible exception of Oraibi none of these
towns now occupies its 16th centurjr site.
Francisco Sanchez Chamuscado visited
Zuili in 1581 and speaks of the Hopi
country as Asay or Osay, but he did not
visit it on account of the snow. Two
years later, however, the province was
visited by Antonio de Espejo, who jour-
BULL. 30]
HOPI
561
neyed 28 leagues from Zufli to the first of
the Hopi pueolos in 4 days. The Mohoce,
or Mohace, of this explorer consisted of
5 lara^e villages, the population of one of
which, Aguato (Ahuato, Zaguato=Awa-
tobi) he estimated at 50,000, a figure
perhaps 25 times too great. The names
of the other towns are not given. The
natives had evidently forgotten the horses
of Tobar and Cardenas of 43 years before,
as they now became frightened at these
strange animals. The Hopi presented
Espejo with quantities of cotton ' * towels, ' '
perhaps kilts, for which they were cele-
Dratea then as now.
The next Spaniard to visit the '' Moho-
qui" was Juan de Ofiate, governor and
colonizer of New Mexico, who took pos-
session of the country and ma<le the In-
dians swear to ol>edience and vassalage on
. Nov. 15, 1598. Their spiritual welfare was
assigned to Fray Juan de Claros, although
no active missions were eHtablished
among the Hopi until nearly a generation
later. The 5 villages at this time, so far
as it is possible to determine them, were
Aguato or Aguatuybtt (Awatobi), Gaspe
(Gualpe=Walpi), Comupavf or Xumu-
pamf (Shongopovi), Majananf (Mishong-
novi), and Olalla or Naybf (Oraibi).
The first actual missionary work under-
taken among the Hopi was in 1629, on
Aug. 20 of which year Francisco de Por-
ras, Andrew's Gutierrez, Cristobal de la
Concepcion, and Francisco de San Buena-
ventura, escorted by 12 soldiers, reached
Awatobi, where the mission of San Ber-
nardino was founded in honor of the day,
followed by the establishment of missions
also at Walpi, Shongojwvi, Mishongnovi,
and Oraibi. Porras was poisoned bv the
natives of Awatobi in 1633. All the
Hopi missions seem to have led a preca-
rious existence until 1680, when in the
general Pueblo revolt of that year four
resident missionaries were killed and the
churches destroyed. Henceforward no
attempt was made to reestablish any of
the missions save that of Awatobi in
1700, which so incensed the other Hopi
that they fell upon it in the night, kill-
ing many of its people and (•omi>elling
its permanent abandonment. Before the
rebellion Mishongnovi and AValpi had
become reduced to visitas of the missions
of Shongopovi and Oraibi respectively.
At the time of the outbreak the popula-
tion of Awatobi was given as 800, Shongo-
povi 500, and Walpi 1,200. Oraibi, it is
said, had 14,000 gentiles before their con-
version, but that they were consumed
by pestilence. This number is doubtless
greatly exaggerated.
The pueblos of Walpi, Mishongnovi,
and Shongopovi, situated in the foothills,
were prolSibly abandoned about the time
of the Pueblo rebellion, and new villages
Bull. 30—05 36
built on the adjacent mesas for the purpose
of defense againstr the Spaniards, whose
vengeance was needlessly feared. The
reconquest of the New Mexican pueblos
led many of their inhabitants to seek
protection among the Hopi toward the
close of the 17th century. Some of these
built the pueblo of Payupki, on the Mid-
dle mesa, but were taken back and set-
tled in Sandia about the middle of the
18th century. About the year 1700 Hano
WIKI, CHIEF OF THE SNAKE SOCIETY; PUEBLO OF WALFI
(VHOMAN, PHOTO. )
was established on the East mesa, near
Walpi, by Tewa from near Abiquiu,
N. Mex., who came on the invitation of
the Walpians. Herethev have lived unin-
terruptedly, and although they have inter-
married extensively with the Hopi, they
retain their native speech and many of
their distinctive tribal rites and cusUmis.
Two other pueblos, Sichomovi on the
First mesa, built by Asa clans (q. v. )
562
HOPI
[B. A. E.
from the Rio Grande, and Shipaulovi,
founded by a colony from Shongopovi on
the Second or Middle mesa, are both of
comparatively modern ori^n, having
been established about the middle of the
18th century, or about the time the Pay-
upki people returned to their old home.
Tnus the pueblos of the ancient province
of Tusayan now consist of the following:
Walpi, Sichomovi, and Hano, on the
First or East mesa; pop. (1900) 205, 119,
and 160, respectively, exclusive of about
20 who have established homes in the
plain; total 504. Mishongnovi, Shongo-
povi, and Shupaulovi, on the Second or
Middle mesa; estimated pop. 244, 225,
and 126; total 595. Oraibi, on the Third
or West mesa; pop. (1890) 905. Total
Hopi population ( 1904) officially given as
1,878.
Social organization. — The Hopi people
are divided into several phratries, con-
sisting of numerous clans, each of which
preserves its distinct legends, ceremonies,
and ceremonial paraphernalia. Out of
HOPt MAN AND WIFE; PUEBLO OF MISHONGNOVI.
Photo. )
(VROMAN,
these clan organizations have sprung
religious fraternities, the head-men of
which are still members of the dominant
clan in each phratry. The relative im-
portance of the clans varies in different
pueblos; many that are extinct in some
villages are powerful in others. The
12 phratries and their dependent clans
as represented in the East Mesa villages
are as follows:
1 . A la-Lengya ( Horn-flute ) phratry: A la
(Horn), Pangwa (Mountain sheep), So-
wiin wa (Deer) , Chubio (Antelope ) , Chaiz-
ra (Elk), Lehu (Seed grass), Shiwanu
(Ant), Anu (Red-ant), Tokoanu (Black-
ant), Wukoanu (Great-ant), Leliotu
(Tiny-ant), Shakwalengya (Blue flute),
Masilengya (Drab or All-colors flute).
K;
2. Paiki (Water-house or Cloud) phra-
try: Patki (Water-house), Kau (Corn),
Omauwu (Rain-cloud), Tanaka (Rain-
bow), Talawipiki (Lightning), Kwan
(Agave), Siwapi (* Rabbit-brush M, Pa-
wikya (aquatic animal [Duck]), Pakwa
(Frog), Pavatiya (Tadpole), Murzibusi
(Bean), Kawaibatunya (Watermelon),
Yoki (Rain).
3. Chua ( Snake ) phratry: Chua ( Snake) ,
Tohouh (Puma) , Huwi(Dove), Ushu (Co-
lumnar cactus). Puna (Cactus fruit),
Yungyu (Opuntia), Nabowu (Opuntia
frutescens), Pivwani (Marmot), Rhcha
(Skunk), Kalashiavu (Raccoon), Tubish
(Sorrow), Patung (Squash), Atoko
(Crane), Kele (Pigeon-hawk), Chinonga
(Thistle). The last 5 are extinct.
4. Pakab (Reed) phratry: Pakab
(Reed), Kwahu (Eagle), Kwayo (Hawk),
Koyonya (Turkey), Tawa (Sun), Paluna
' Twin-brother of Puhukonghoya) , Shohu
Star), Massikwayo (Chicken-hawk),
Cahabi (Willow), Tebi (Greasewood).
5. Kokop (W o o d) phratry: Kokop
(Wood), Ishauu (Cfoyote), Kwewu
(Wolf), Sikyataiyo (Yellow-fox), Le-
taiyo (Gray-fox), Zrohona (small mam-
•aal), Masi(Masauu, dead, skeleton. Ruler
of the Dead), Tuvou (Pifion), Hoko
(Juniper), Awata( Bow), Sikyachi (small
yellow bird), Tuvuchi (small red bird).
6. Tabo (Cottontail rabbit) phratry:
Tabo (Cottontail rabbit), Sowi (Jackrab-
bit).
7. Turm (Sand or Earth) phratry: Ku-
kuch, Bachipkwasi, Nananawi, Momobi
(varieties of lizard), Pisa (White sand),
Tuwa (Red sand), Chukai (Mud), Sihu
(Flower), Nanawu (small striped squir-
rel).
8. Honau (Bear) phratry: Honau
(Bear), Tokochi (Wild-cat), Chosro
(Blue-bird), Kokvan (Spider), Hekpa
(Fir).
9. Ka^hina (Sacred dancer) phratry:
Kachina (Sacred dancer), Gyazru (Paro-
quet), Angwusi (Raven), Sikyachi (Yel-
low bird), Tawamana (Blackbird), Salabi
(Spruce), Suhubi (Cottonwood).
10. Asa (Tansy mustard) phratry: Asa
(Tansy mustard), Chakwaina (Black-
earth Kachina), Kwingyap (Oak), Hos-
boa (Chapparal cock), Posiwu (Magpie),
C h i s r o ( Snow - bunting ) , Fuchkohu
(Boomerang rabbit-stick), Pisha (Field-
mouse).
11. Piba (Tobacco) phratry: Piba (To-
bacco), Chongyo (Pipe).
12. Honani (Badger) phratry: Honani
(Badger), Muinyawu (Porcupine), Wish-
oko (Turkey-buzzard), Buli (Butterfly),
Buliso (Evening Primrose), Kachina
(Safcred dancer).
Most of the above clans occur in the
other Hopi pueblos, but not in Hano.
There are a few clans in the Middle Mesa
BULL. 30]
HOPI
563
villages and in Oraibi that are not now
represented at Walpi. For the Hano
clans see Hano.
The Honau (Bear) clan is represented
on each mesa and is supposed to be the
oldest in Tusayan. It is said to have come
originally from the Rio Grande valley,
but on the East mesa the clan is now so
reduced as to be threatened with extinc-
tion at Walpi within a generation.
The Chua (Snake) people were among
the earliest to settle in Tusayan, joining the
Bears and living with them when Walpi
was in the foot-hills. The legends of this
people declare that they came from pue-
dIos in the N. , near Navaho mt. , on the Rio
Colorado. In their northern home they
were united with the Ala ( Horn ) people,
who separated from them in their south-
erly migration and united with the Flute
people at the now-ruined pueblo of Leng-
vanobi, n. of the East mesa. The com-
bined Snake and Ala people control the
Antelope and Snake fraternities, and
possess the fetishes and other parapher-
nalia of the famous Snake dance. The
palladium of this people is kept at Walpi,
thus leading to the belief that this was
the first Hopi home of the Snake and
kindred people.
The Lengya ( Flute) people, once very
strong, are now almost extinct at the E^st
mesa, but are numerous in some of the
other pueblos. They are said to have
lived formerly at Lengyanobi and to have
come to Tusayan from the S. , or from pue-
blos along Little Colorado r. The chief
of the Flute priesthood controls the Flute
ceremony, which occurs biennially, alter-
nating with the Snake dance. There are
two divisions in the Flute fraternity, one
known as the Drab Flute and the other as
the Blue Flute, the former being extinct
at Walpi. Sichomovi and Hano have
no representatives of this phratry, but
it is represented in all the other Hopi
villages.
There are Ala, or Horn, people in most
of the Hopi pueblos, and clans belonging
to this phratry are named generally after
homed animals. Their ancestors came
to Walpi with the Flute people and were
well received, because they had formerly
lived with the Snake people in the N.
They now join the Snake priest in the
Antelope rites of the Snake dance.
The Patki (Water-house, or Cloud)
phratry includes a number of clans that
came to the Hopi country from the S.,
and the now ruined villages along the
Little Colorado are claimed by this people
to have been their former homes. They
were comparatively late arrivals, ani
brought a ni^h form of sun and serpent
worship that is still prominent in the Win-
ter Solstice ceremony. The Sun priests,
who are well represented in most of the
Hopi pueblos and are especially strong at
Walpi, accompanied this people. Others,
as the Piba or Tobacco clan, came to
Walpi from Awatobi on the destruction
of the latter pueblo in 1700.
The Pakab (Reed) people also came
from Awatobi, settling first at the base
of the Middle mesa, whence they went
to Walpi. They control the Warrior
society called Kalektaka.
The Kokop (Wood) phratry came from
Sikyatki and have a few representatives
in Walpi and in the other villages. The
traditional home of the Kokop and allied
clans was Jemez (a. v.), in New Mexico.
The Honani or Badger phratry origi-
nally lived at Awatobi, ana after the de-
struction of that pueblo went to Oraibi
and Walpi. It is now largely represented
in Sichomovi, which village it joined the
Asa in founding. The Buli, or Butterfly,
clan is closely related to the Honani peo-
ple, and both are probably of Keresan or
of Tewa origin.
HOPt SNAKE CEREMONY
The Kachina phratry is also of New
Mexican origin, and in some of the pue-
blos sharas with the Honani the control
of the masked dance organization called
Kachinas; but it is not strong in Walpi.
The Asa people were Tewa in km,
coming originally from the Rio Grande
valley and settling successively at ZufXi
and in the Canyon de Chelly. This
people, with the Honani, founded Sicho-
movi, and is now one of the strongest
clans on the East mesa«. Only one or
two members now live at Walpi; a few
live in the Middle Mesa villages, out none
at Oraibi.
Archeology. — The erection and final
abandonment of their villa^s by the va-
rious Hopi clans during their migrations
and successive shif tings have left many
ruins, now consisting largely of mounds,
both within their present territory and re-
mote from it. Rums of villages which the
traditions of the Hopi ascribe to their an-
cestors are found as far n. as the Rio Colo.
564
HOPI
[B. A. E.
rado, w. to Flagstaff, Ariz., s. to the Verde
valley, Tonto Dasin, and the Rio Gila,
and E. to the Rio Grande in New Mexico.
Therefore, idthough Shoshonean in lan-
guage, the present Hop! population and
culture are composite, made up of accre-
tions from widely divergent sources and
from people of different linguistic stocks.
Some of the Hopi ruins have been ex-
plored by the Bureau of American Eth-
nology, the National Museum, and the
Field Museum of Natural History. One
of the most celebrated of these is Awatobi
(q. V. ) on Jeditoh or Antelope mesa, the
walls of whose mission church, built prob-
ably in 1629, are still partly standing.
Sikyatki (q.v.), another large and now
well-known ruin, in the foot-hills of the
East mesa, was occupied in prehistoric
times by Kokop clans of Keresan people
from the Rio Grande country. They had
attained a highly artistic development as
exhibited by their pottery, which is prob-
ably the finest ware ever manufactured by
Indians n. of Mexico.
The original clans of Walpi are said to
have occupied three sites after their ar-
rival in the Hopi country, settling first
on the terrace w. of the East mesa, then
higher up and toward the s., where the
foundation walls of a Spanish mission
church can still be traced. From this
point they moved to the present Walpi
on the summit of the mesa, apparently
soon after the Pueblo revolt of 1680. See
Kimkobiy Kuchapturela.
Payupki, a picturesque ruin on the
Middle mesa, was settled by Tanoan
people (apparently Tigua) about the year
1700 and abandoned about 1742, when the
inhabitants were taken back to the Rio
Grande and settled at Sandia.
Chukubi, a prehistoric pueblo midway
'between Payupki and Shupaulovi, also
on the Middle mesa, was built probably
by southern clans whose descendants form
most of the present population of the
Middle mesa villages.
Old ShongopovT lav in the foot-hills at
the base of the Middle mesa, below the
present pueblo of that name. This town
was inhabited at the time of the Spanish
advent, and near it was built a church
the walls of which, up to a few years ago,
served as a sheep corral. Its original in-
habitants came from the Little Colorado
valley.
The ruins of Old Mishongnovi are on
the terrace below the present pueblo.
Its walls are barely traceable. From
its cemetery beautiful pottery, resembling
that of Sikyatki, has been exhumed.
Some of the most important ruins of
the Hopi country are situated on the rim
of Antelope mesa, not far from Awatobi,
and are remains of Keresan pueblos.
Among these are Kawaika and Chakpa-
hu. In the same neighborhood are the
ruins of Kokopki, once occupied by the
Wood clan, originally from Jemez. North
of the present Hopi mesas are ruins at
Kishuba, where the Kachina clan once
lived, and at Lengyanobi, the home of the
Flute people. The ruins along the lower
Little Colorado, near Black falls, known
as Wukoki, and those called Homolobi,
near Winslow, are likewise claimed by
the Hopi as the homes of ancestral clans.
Wukoki may have been inhabited by the
Snake people, while the inhabitants of
Homolobi were related to southern clans
that went to Walpi and Zufii.
Characteristics and customs. — The Hopi
are rather small of stature, but muscular
and agile. Both sexes have reddish-
brown skin, high cheek-bones, straight
broad nose, slanting eyes, and large
mouths with gentle expression. As a
rule the occiput exhibits cradle-board
flattening (see Artificial head deforma-
tion). The proportion of albinos is
large. The hair is usually straight and
black, but in some individuals it is
brownish and in others it is wavy. The
hair of the men is commonly ** banged"
in front or cut in ** terraces"; the long
hair behind is gathered in a sort of short
queue and tied at the neck. The ma-
trons wear their hair in two coils which
hang in front. On reaching puberty the
girls dress their hair in whorls at the sides
of the head, in imitation of the squash
blossom, the symbol of fertility (see illus-
tration ) . The women tend to corpulency
and age rapidly; they are prolific, but
the infant mortality is very great (see
Health and Disease). Boys and girls usu-
ally have fine features, and the latter
mature early, often being married at the
age of 15 or 16 years. Bachelors and
spinsters are rare. A few men dress as
women and perform women's work.
In mental traits the Hopi are the
e(]ual of any Indian tribe. Tney possess
a highly artistic sense, exhibited by
their pottery, basketry, and weaving.
They are industrious, imitative, keen in
bargaining, have some inventive genius,
and are quick of perception. Among
themselves they are often merry, greatly
appreciating jests and practical jokes.
They rarely forget a kindness or an in-
jury, and often act from impulse and in
a childlike way. They are tractable,
docile, hospitable, and frugal, and have
always sought to be peaceable, as their
tribal name indicates. They believe in
witchcraft, and recognize many omens of
good and bad.
The Hopi are monogamists, and as a
rule are faithful in their marital rela-
tions. Murder is unknown, theft is rare,
and lying is universally condemned.
Children are respectful and obedient to
BULL. 30]
HOPI
565
their elders and are never flogged except
when ceremonially initiated as kachinas.
From their earliest years they are taught
industry and the necessity of leading up-
right lives.
The clothing of the Hopi men consists
of a calico shirt and short pantaloons, and
breechcloth, moccasins, and hair bands.
Bracelets, necklaces of shell, turquoise, or
silver, and earrings, are commonly worn.
HOPI MAIDEN. (mOONEY, PhOTO. )
The women wear a dark-blue woolen
blanket of native weave, tied with an em-
broidered belt, and a calico manta or
shawl over one shoulder; their moccasins,
which are worn only occasionally, are
made of ox-hide and buckskin, like those
of the men, to which are attached leg-
gingi^ of the same material, but now often
replaced by sheepskin. The ear-pend-
ants of the women and girls consist of
small wooden disks, ornamented with
turquoise mosaic on one side. Small
children generally run about naked, and
old men while working in the fields or
taking part in ceremonies divest them-
selves of all clothing except the breech-
doth.
The governing body of the Hopi is a
council of herSiitary clan elders and
chiefs of religious fraternities. Among
these officials there is recognized a speaker
chief and a war chief, but there has never
been a supreme chief of all the Hopi.
Following ancient custom, various activi-
ties inhere in certain clans; for instance,
one clan controls the warrior society,
while another observes the sun and deter-
mines the calendar. Each pueblo has
an hereditary village chief, who directs
certain necessary communal work, such
as the cleaning of springs, etc. There
seems to be no punishment for crime ex-
cept sorcery, to which, under Hopi law,
all transgressions may be reduced. No
punishmentof a witch or wizard is known
to have been inflicted at Walpi in recent
years, but there are traditions of impris-
onment and of the significant and myste-
rious disappearance of those accused of
witchcraft in former times.
The Hopi possess a rich mythology and
folklore, mherited from a remote past.
They recognize a large number of super-
natural beings, the identification of which
is sometimes most difficult. Their my-
thology is poetic and highly imaginative,
and their philosophy replete witn incon-
sistency. Their songs and prayers, some of
which are in foreign languages, as the Ker-
esan and Tewa, are sometimes very beauti-
ful. They have peculiar marriage cus-
toms, and elaborate rites in which chil-
dren are dedicatee! to the sun. The bodies
of the (lead are sewed in blankets and de-
posited with food offerings among the
rocks of the mesas. The Hopi believe in a
future life in an underworld, but have no
idea of future punishment. They smoke
straight pipes in ceremonies, but on secu-
lar occasions prefer cigarettes of tobacco
wrapped in corn-husks. They never in-
vented an intoxicating drink, and imtil
within recent years none of them had
any desire for such. Although they
have seasons of ceremonial gaming, they
do not gamble; and they have no oaths,
but many, especially among the elders,
are garrulous and fond of gossip.
Maize being the basis of their subsist-
ence, agriculture is the principal industry
of the Hopi. On the average 2,600 acres
are yearly planted in this cereal, the
yield in 1904 being estimated at 25,000
bushels. Perhaps one-third of the annual
crop is preservea in event of future fail-
ure through drought or other causes.
There are also about 1,000 acres in peach
orchards and 1,500 acres in beans, melons,
squashes, pumpkins, onions, chile, sun-
566
HOPI
[b. a. 1
flowers, etc. Cotton, wheat, and tobacco
are also raised in small quantities, but in
early times native cotton was extensively
grown. In years of stress desert plants,
which have always been utilized to some
extent for food, form an important part
of the diet.
The Hopi have of late become more or
less pastoral. Flocks ( officially estimated
in 1904 at 56,000 sheep and 15,000 goats),
acquired originally from the Spaniards,
supply wool and skins. They own also
about 1,500 head of cattle, and 4,350
horses, burros, and mules. Dogs, chick-
ens, hogs, and turkeys are their onlv
other domesticated animals. All small
desert animals are eaten; formerly ante-
lope, elk, and deer were captured by be-
ing driven into pitfalls or corrals. Com-
munal rabbit hunts are common, the an-
imals being killed with wooden clubs
shaped like boomerangs (see Rabbit
sticks). Prairie dogs are drowned out of
their burrows, coyotes are caught in
pitfalls made of stones, and small birds
are captured in snares.
The Hopi are skilled in weaving, dye-
ing, and embroidering blankets, belts,
and kilts. Their textile work is durable,
and shows a great variety of weaves. The
dark-blue blanket of the Hopi woman is
an important article of commerce among
the Pueblos, and their embroidered cere-
monial blankets, sashes, and kilts made of
cotton have a ready sale among neighbor-
ing tribes. Although the Hopi ceramic
art has somewhat deteriorated in modern
times, fair pottery is still made among the
people of Hano, where one family has
revived the superior art of the earlier vil-
lagers. They weave basketry in a great
variety of ways at the Middle Mesa pue-
blos and in Oraibi; but, with the excep-
tion of the familiar sacred-meal plaques,
which are well made and brightly colored,
the workmanship is crude. The Hopi
are clever in making masks and other re-
ligious paraphernalia from hides, and ex-
cel in carving and painting dolls, repre-
senting kachinas, which are adorned with
bright feathers and cloth . They likewise
manufacture mechanical toys, which are
exhibited in some of their dramatic en-
tertainments. Nowhere among the ab-
origines of North America are the Hopi
excelled in dramaturge exhibitions, in
some of which their imitations of birds
and other animals are marvelously real-
istic.
The Hopi language is classified as Sho-
shonean; but, according to Gatschet, it
''seems to contain many archaic words
and forms not encountered in the other
dialects, and many vocables of its own.**
The published vocabularies are very
limited, and comparatively little is known
of the grammatical structure of the lan-
guage; but it is evident that it contains
many words of Keresan, Tewa, Pima,
Zufii, Ute, Navaho, and Apache derivation.
As among other Southwestern tribes a
number of words are modified Spanish, as
those for horse, sheep, melon, and the
names for other intrusive articles and
objects. Slight dialectic differences are
noticeable in the speech of Oraibi and
Walpi, but the language of the other
pueblos is practically uniform. The
Hopi language is melodious and the
enunciation clear. The speech of the
people of Awatobi is said to have had a
nasal intonation, while the Oraibi s|)eak
drawlingly. Although they accompany
their speech with gestures, few of the
Hopi understand the sign language. The
Keresan people have furnished many
songs, witn tneir words, and Zuili and
Pima songs have also been introduced.
Some of the prayers also have archaic
Tanoan or Keresan words.
The Hopi are preeminently a religious
people, much of their time, especially in
winter, being devoted to ceremonies for
rain and the growth of crops. Their my-
thology is a polytheism largely tinged
with ancestor worship and permeated
with fetishism. They originally had no
conception of a great spirit corresponding
to God, nor were they ever monotheists ;
and, although they have accepted the
teachings of Christian missionaries, these
have not had the effect of altering their
primitive beliefs. Their greatest gods
are deified nature powers, as the Mother
Earth and the Sky god — the former
mother, and the latter father, of the
races of men and of marvelous animals,
which are conceived of as closely allied.
The earth is spoken of as having always
existed. In Hopi mythology the human
race was not created, but generated from
the earth, from which man emerged
through an opening called the sipapu,
now typified by the Grand canyon of
the Colorado. The dead are supposed
to return to the underworld. The Sky
Father and the Earth Mother have many
names and are personated in many ways;
the latter is represented by a spider; the
former by a bird — a hawk or an eagle.
Such names as Fire god. Germ god, and
others are attributal designations of the
great male powers of nature, or its male
germinative principle. All supernatural
beings are supposed to influence the rain
and consequently the growth of crops.
Every clan religion exhibits strong ances-
tral worship, in which a male and a
female ancestral tutelary of the clan,
called by a distinctive clan name, is pre-
eminent The Great Homed or Plumed
Serpent, a form of sky god, derived from
the S., and introduced by the Patki and
other southern clans, is prominent in sun
BULL. 30]
HOPI
567
ceremonies. The number of subordinate
supernatural personages is almost unlim-
ited. These are known as **kachina8,"
a term referring to the magic power inher-
ent in every natural object for good or
for tbad. Many of these kachinas are
I)ersoniations of clan ancestors, others are
simply beings of unknown relationship
but endowed with ma^c powers. Each
kachina possesses individual character-
istics, and is represented in at least six
different symbolic colors. The world-
quarters, or six cardinal points, play an
important role in Hopi m}i;hology and
ritual. Fetishes, amulets, charms, and
mascots are commonly used to insure luck
in daily occupations, and for health and
success in hunting, racing, gaming, and
secular performances. The Hopi cere-
monial calendar consists of a number of
monthly festivals, ordinarily of 9 days'
duration, of which the first 8 are devoted
to secret rites in kivas (q. v. ) or in rooms
set apart for that purpose, the final day be-
ing generally devotea to a spectacular pub-
lic ceremony or * *dance. ' ' Every great fes-
tival is held under the auspices of a special
religious fraternity or fraternities, and is
accompanied with minor events indicating
a former duration of 20 days. Among
the most important religious fraternities
are the Snake, Antelope, Flute, Sun, Lala-
kontu, Owakultu, Mamzrautu, Kachina,
Tataukyamu, Wuwuchimtu, Aaltu, Kwa-
kwautu, and Kalektaka. There are also
other organized priesthoods, as the Yaya
and the Poshwympkia, whose functions
are mainly those of doctors or healers.
Several ancient priesthoods, known by
the names Koyimsi, Paiakyamu, and
Chukuwympkia, function sis clowns or
fun-makers during the sacred dances of
the Kachinas. The ceremonial year is
divided into two parts, every great cere-
mony having a major and a minor per-
formance occurring about 6 months apart;
and every 4 years, when initiations occur,
moetceremonies are celebrated in extenso.
The so-called Snake and Flute dances are
performed biennially at all the pueblos
except Sichomovi and Hano, and alter-
nate with each other. Ceremonies are
also divided into those with masked and
those with unmasked participants, the
former, designated kachinas, extending
from January to July, the latter occurring
in the remaining months of the year.
The chief of each fraternity has a badge
of his office and conducts both the secret
and the open features of the ceremony.
The fetishes and idols used in the sacred
rites are owned hv the priesthood and are
arranged by its chief in temporary altars
(q. v.), in front oi which drjr-paintin^
(q. V.) are made. The Hopi ritual is
extraordinarily complex and time-con-
suming, and the paraphernalia required
is extensive. Although the Hopi cultus
has become highly modified by a semi-
arid environment, it consisted originally
of ancestor worship, embracing worship
of the great powers of nature — sky, sun,
moon, fire, rain, and earth. A confusion
of effect and cause and an elaboration of
the doctrine of signatures pervade all their
rites, which in the main may be regarded
as sympathetic magic.
Consult Dorsey and Voth in the publi-
cations of the Field Columbian Museum ;
Fewkes in Reports of the Bureau of Amer-
ican Ethnology and in various papers in
the American Anthropologist, the Journal
of American Folk-lore, and the Journal
of American Ethnology and Archaeology;
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 1891. See
Pueblosy Shoshoneauy and the pueblos above
named. (j. w. f. )
A-ar-ke.— White, MS. Hist. Apaches, B. A. E.,
1875 (Apache name). Ah-mo-lUa.— Eaton in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tnbea, iv. 221. 1854 (Zufiiname).
Ai-yah-kin-nee.— Ibid., 220 (Navaho name). Alo-
qui.— Escalante (1775-1776) quoted by Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 185, 1889. Amaques.— Short,
N. Am. of Antiq., 332, 1880 ( wrong identification).
Amaqui.— Ibid. A'moekwikwe.— ten Kate, Reizen
in N. Am., 2(>4, 1885 ('smallpox-folk': Zufli
name). A-mo-kiiu.— Bowman in Ind. AfF. Rep.,
136, 1884 (Ziifii name; 'kini'^ttrc, 'people').
A-mo-kwi.— Vandever in Ind. Aff. Rep., 168, 1890
(Zufii name) . A'-mu-kwi-kwe.— ten Kate, Synon-
ymic, 7, 1884 ('smallpox people': Zufii name).
A»ay.— Bustamante and Gallegos (1582) in Doc.
In4d., XV, 86, 1871 (also Osay, p. 93). Bokeai.—
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Sandia Tigua
name). Buhk'herk.— Ibid. (Lsleta Tigua name
for Tusayan). Buldn.— Ibid. (lsleta name for the
people). Ghinouni.— Hoffman in Bull. Soc. d'An-
throp. Paris, 206. 1883 ( = 'Moquis de I'Arizona').
Ci-nyu-miih.— Fewkes in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, V,
33, 1892 ('people': own name; c=8h). Gummoa-
quL— Viceroy Monterey {ra. 1602) in Doc. In6d.,
xvi, 60, 1871. Gummooqui. — Viceroy Monterey
cited by Duro. Don Diego de Pefialosa, 24, 1882.
E-ar'-ke.— White, Apache Names of Ind. Tribes,
MS., B. A. E., 2, n. d. (=' live high up on top
of the mesas': Apache name). Eyakui dine.—
Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Navaho name). Ha-
pe-ka.— Hodge, Arizv)na, 169, 1877 (=Hdpekya-
kwe, 'excrement people': a Zufii name). Hapi-
tu8.— Bowman in Ind. Aflf. Rep., 136, 1884 (given
as their own name). Ho-pees.— Dellenbaugh in
Bull. Buffalo Soc. Nat. Sci., 170, 1877 ('our peo-
ple': own name). Hopi.— Fewkes in Am. An-
throp., V, 9, 1892. Hopii.— Bourke, Moquis of
Ariz., 117, 1884 (own name^. Hop£te.— ten Kate,
Reizen in N. Am., 259, 1886 ('the good ones?':
own name). Hopitfi.— Ibid. Hopituh. — Minde-
leff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 17, 1891 (own name).
H6-pi-tuh-ci'-nu-mfih.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop.,
V, 9, 1892 ('peaceful people': own name; c=«A).
H6-pi-tuh-c£-nyu-mfih.— Fewkes in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, V, 33, 1892. Ho-pi-tuh-lei-nyu-muh.— Donald-
son, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 13, 1893 (misprint).
Hupi.— Lummis quoted by Donaldson, ibid., 71.
Joso.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. £., 612, 1900
(Tewa name). Khoso.— Hodge cited in 17th Rep.
B. A. E., 642, 1898 (Santa Clara name). Koco.—
Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 642, 1898 (Hano
Tewa name; c=8h). Koso.— Ibid. K'o-so-o.-
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (San Ildefonso
Tewa name). Kaastoetiikwe.— ten Kate, Reizen
in N. Am., 260. 1885 ('the land of M&saw6,' god
of the earth; given as the name of their country).
Kaoaeques.— Arricivita, Cronica Ser&fica, ii, 424,
1792 (probably identical). Magui.— Tei* Broeck
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv. 81, 1854 (misprint) .
Makia.^Bowman in Ind. Aff. Rep., 136, 1884.
Maqui.— Venegas. Hist. Cal., ii. 194. 1759. Kas-
tuto'-kwe.— ten Kate, Synonymic, 6, 1884 ('the
568
HOPITSEWAH HOPOOAN
[b. a. e.
country of Mft-sa-wfi': griven as the Hopi name
for their country ) . Hawkeys. — Bartlett in Trans.
Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii. 17, 1848; Squier In Am.
Review, 523, Nov. 1848 (traders' corruption of
'Moqui'). Miqui.— Johnston in Emory, Kecon.,
569, 1848. Mooas.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 561,
1851. Mochi.— Clavijero. Storia della California,
map, 1789. Mochies.— Calhoun (1849) in Cal. Mess,
and Corresp., 221, 1850. KogerU.— Ruxton mis-
quoted by Simpson, Report, 57, 1850. Kogin.—
Wilkins (1859) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 69, 86th Cong.,
Ist sess., 6. 1860 (misprint). Mogul. —Ogrilbv,
America, map, 1671. Mohaoe.— Espejo (1583) in
Doc. In6d.. XV, 119, 1871. Mohoce.— Ibid.
Mohoce.— Ofiate (1598). ibid., xvi, 307. 1871.
Mohoqui. — I bid. , 115. Mohotse. — Hakluy t.
Voyages, 462, 1600. Moke.— Gatschet in Mag.
Am. Hist., 260, 1882. Mokee.— Pattie, Pers.
Narr., 91, 1833. Moki.— Hervas, Idea dell' Uni-
verso, XVII. 76, 1784. Monkey Indians.— Wilkes,
U. S. Expl. Exped., iv, 472, 1846. Monquoi.— Prich-
ard. Physical Hist. Mankind, v. 430, 1847. Moo-
qui. —Zarate-Sal meron ( ra . 1629 ), Relacion, i n Land
of Sunshine. 48, Dec. 1899. Mo-o-taa.— Bandelier
in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and Archseol., in, 67, 1892
(Keresan name). Moq. — Saldivar (1618) quoted
by Prince, N. Mex.. 176. 1883. Moqni.— ten Kate,
Reizen in N. Am.. 260, 1885 (misprint). Moqua.—
Palmer in Am. Nat., xii, 310, 1878. Moques.-
Blaeu, Atlas, xii. 62. 1667. Moqui.— Benavides,
Memorial, 33. 1630. Moquian Pueblos.— Shuf eld t,
Ind. Types of Beauty. 14. 1891. Moquinas.— Vilhi-
Seiior. Theutro Am., pt. 2. 426, 1748. Moquinos.—
Kino (1697) in Doc. Hist Mex., 4th s., i, 285, 1856;
Rivera, Diario, leg. 950, 1736. Moquins. — Poston
in Ind. AfT. Rep. 1863, 3H8. 1864. Moquitch.— Bar-
ber in Am. Nat., ii, 593, 1877 (Ute name). Mo-
quois.- Holmes in 10th Rep. Hayden Surv., 403.
1878. Moquy.— Duro, Don Diego de Pefialosa, 63,
1882. Morqui.— Hoffman in Jour. Anthrop. Inst.,
IX, 465, 1880. Mosi.— Uodge, field notes, B. A. E.,
1895 ( Laguna name for Tusayan ) . Mosicha.— Ibid .
( Laguna name for the Hopi ) . Mosquies. —Calhoun
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 65, I860. Mo-ts.— Hodge, field
notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Acoma name for the Hopi).
Mo'-tsi.— Ibid. (Cochitiname). Mouguis.— Taylor
in Cal. Farmer, May 18, 1860. Moxi.— Palou, Re-
lacion Hist., 251, 1787. Muca.— Garc<Js cited by
Escudero, Noticias Estad. de Chihuahua, 228.
1834. Mu-gua.— Bandelier. Gilded Man, 149, 1893
(misprint). Mu-kl.-Corbusier, Yavapai MS.
vocab., B. A. E.. 27. 1873-75 (Yavapai name).
Munchies.— Sage, Scenes in Rocky Mts., 198, 1846.
Muqui.— Garccs (1775-76) cited bv Bancroft, Ariz,
and N. Mex., 137, 395. 1889. Opii.— Bourke, Mo-
Quis of Ariz., 117,1884 (given as their own name).
Osaij.— Bandelier in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and Arch-
seol., Ill, 62, 1892 (misprint of the following).
Osay.— Bustamante and Gallegos (1582) in Doc.
InM., XV, 93, 1871 (also Asay. p. 86). Pokkenvolk.—
ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am.. 264, 1885 (Dutch:
•smallpox-folk,' trans, of Zufii name; see A'moek-
vu'kwe, above). She-noma. — Gatschet in Wheeler
Surv. Rep., vii, 412. 1879 (trans., ' towns people ').
Shinome.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am.. 259, 18a5
(Shinumo, or). Shi-nu-mos.— Powell in Scrib-
ner's Mag., 202, 212, 1875 (own name: trans., ' we,
the wise'). Shumi. —Bourke. Moquis of Ariz.,
118, 1884 (j:iven as the sacred name for them-
selves). Ta-sa-un.— Vandever in Ind. Aff. Rep.,
168, 1890 ('the place of isolated buttes* : Navaho
name of surrounding country). Tesayan.— Prince,
N. Mex., 125, 1883. Tonteao.— Sanson, L'Am^r-
ique, 30, 1657. Tonteaca.— Mota-Padilla, Hist, de
la Conquista, 111, 1742. Tontonteao.— Wytfliet,
Hist, des Indes, map, 66-67, 1605. Topin-keua.—
Cushing Qited by Bandelier in Archseol. Inst.
'Papers, n', 368, 1892 (or Topin-teua; given as the
Zufli name of which • Totonteac ' is a corruption).
Top-in-te-ua.— Bandelier, ibid., v, 176, 1890; iv, 368,
18<^. Totanteao.— Marcos de Nica (1539) in Hak-
luy t,Voy., 443, 1600 (misprint) . Totonteac.— Ibid.,
440; Coronado (1540), ibid.. 452 (see Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 114; v, 175, 1890). Toton-
teal.— Loew (1875) in Wheeler Surv. Rep., vii, 333,
1879 (misprint). Totontoao.— Alareon (1540) in
Temaux-Compans, Voy., ix, 315, 1838. Tototeac.—
Visscher, Americae Nova Dcscr., first map, 1601.
Tu^an.— Writer of 1542 in Smith, Colee. Doc. Fla.,
1, 149, 1857. Tuoano.— Coronado (1542) in Hakluvt.
Voy., Ill, 453, 1600. TuoaTan.— Castaneda(ra.l565)
in Temaux-Compans, Voy., ix, 181, 1838; Jara-
millo, ibid., 370. Tuckano.— Zaltieri, map (1666)
in WiUFor, Hist. Am., ii, 461, 1886; Wytfliet, Hist
des Indes, map, 114-116, 1605. Tnsan.— Coronado
(1540) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz. andN. Mex., 46,
137, 1889. Tusayan.— Castafieda (ca. 1565) in Ter-
naux-Compans, Voy., ix, 68, 1838. Tusayan
Moqui.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 115,
1890. Tu-se-an.— Bowman in Ind. Aff. Rep., 186,
1884 (said to be the Navaho name for the Rocky
mts.). Tusyan.— Stevenson in 2d Rep. B. A. £.,
328, 1883. Tuzan.— Coronado (1540) in Doe. In^d.,
XIV, 320, 1870. Usaya.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst.
Papers, v, 170, 1890 (or Usayan; "names given
anciently by the Zuflis to the principal pueblos of
Moqui"). usaya-kue.— Ibid., 115 (= 'people of
Usaya,' the Zufii name of "two of the largest
Moqui villages"; hence T-usayan). Usayan. —
Ibid., 170. Welsh Indians.— Prichard, Phys. Hist.
Mankind, v, 431, 1847. White Indians.— Sage,
Scenes in Rocky Mts., 198, 1846. WhiwunaL—
Hodge, field notes, B. A. £., 1895 (SandiaTigua
name).
Hopitsewah. Mentioned as a ** sacred
town'* of the " I^iaguna" Indians, a Pome
band on the w. shore of Clear lake, Men-
docino CO., Cal. — Revere, Tour of Duty,
130, 1849.
Hopkins, Sarah. See W'mnemucca.
Hopnis. Hopnnts. See HobniUs.
Hopnomkoyo. A former Maidu village
on Lights cr., in the n. part of Plumas
CO., Cal. — Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist, XVII, pi. xxxviii, 1905.
Hopocan ('[tobacco] pipe'). A Dela-
ware chief, known to the whites as Cap-
tain Pipe, and after 1763 among his
people as Konieschguanokee ( * Maker of
Daylight' ) . An hereditary sachem of the
Wolf division of the Dela wares, he was
war chief of the tribe. He was also prom-
inent in council, having a reputation for
wisdom and a remarkable gift of oratory.
In the French war he fought against the
English with courage and skill. He was
present at the conference with Geo. Cro-
ghan at Ft Pitt in 1759, and in 1763 or
1764 tried to take the fort by strategem,
but failed, and was captured. After
peace was concluded he settled with his
clan on upper Muskingum r., Ohio, and in
1771 sent a "speech" to Gov. Penn.
He attended the councils of the tril)e at
the Turtle village and at Ft Pitt until the
Revolutionary war broke out, when he ac-
cepted British pay and fought the Amer-
icans and the friendly Indians, but told
the British commander at Detroit that
he would not act savagely toward the
whites, having no interest in the quar-
rel, save to procure subsistence for his
people, and exp)ecting that when the En-
glish made peace with the colonists the
Indians would be punished for any ex-
cesses that they committed. Col. William
Crawford, however, in retaliation for the
massacre of Moravian Indians by a party
of white men, was put to torture when he
fell into Captain Pipe's hands after the
ignominious rout of his regiment of vol-
unteers near the upper Sandusky in Ma5',
BULL. 30]
HOQUIAM HORSES
569
1782. Pipe signed the treaty of Ft Pitt,
Pa., Sept. 17, 1778, the first treaty be-
tween the United States and the In-
dians; he was also a signer of the treaties
of Ft Mcintosh, Ohio, Jan. 21, 1785, and
Ft Harmar, Ohio, Jan. 9, 1787. In 1780
he removed from his home on Walhond-
ing cr., at or near White Woman's town,
to old Upper Sandusk^r, or Cranestown,
Ohio, thence to Captain Pipe's village,
about 10 m. s. e. of Upper Sandusky, on
land that was ceded to the United States
in 1829. He died in 1794. See Drake,
Hist Ind., 534, 1880; Darlington, Jour,
of Col. May, 94, 1873; Pa. Archives, iv,
441, 1833.
Hoquiam. A Chehalis village on a creek
of the same name, n. shore oi Grays har-
bor, Wash.
Ho-ki-iim.— Ro88 inlnd. AfT. Rep. . 18, 1870. Hokwa-
imits.— Gibbs, MS., No. 248, B. A. E. (Chehalis
name). Koguiftin. — Land Office map of Washing-
ton, 1891. Hoquiuin.— Gibbs, op. cit.
Horieon. Marked on a map of 1671 a»
a people living on the headwaterHof Hud-
son r., N. Y., w. of L. Chaniplain, and
placed by others in the same general re-
gion. Kuttenber says they were a part
of the Mahican who ocrcupied the L.
George district, but Shea considers the
word a mere misprint for Hirocoi, Hiero-
coyes, or Iroquois, which is doubtful.
— ^ — Gatschet in Am. Antiq., iii,321. 1881.
Kenekenet.— Fleet (1632) quoted, ibid. Hori
e<mt.—Ruttenber, Tribes Hua8onR.,41,1872. Hor-
UcMW.— Ogilby, America, map, 1671.
Hormigiiero (Span.: *ant hill'). A
village, probably of the Pima, on the
Pima and Maricopa res., Gila r., Ariz.;
pop. 510in 1860, 514 in 1869. Cf. Ormejea.
ScniBfiWB.— Browne. Apache C!ountry, 290, 1869.
"• * -Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 19, 1863.
Homotlimed. A Seminole chief who
came into notice chiefly through a single
incident of the Seminole war of 1817-18.
He resided at the Fowl Town, in n. w.
Florida, at the beginning of hostilities,
bat was forced to nee to Mikasuki. On
Nov. 30, 1817, three vessels arrived at the
mouth of Apalachicola r. with supplies
for the garrison farther up the stream,
but on account of contrary winds were
unable to ascend. Lieut. Scott was sent
to their assistance with a boat and 40 men,
who, on their return from the vessels,
were ambushed by Homotlimed and a
band of warriors, all bein^ killed except 6
soldiers, who jumped overboard and swam
to the opposite snore. Twenty soldiers
who had been left to aid the vessels, and
an equal number of women and sick who
were with them, fell into the hands of
Homotlimed and his warriors and were
slain and scalped. The scalps were car-
ried to Mikasuki and displayed on red
sticks as tokens of the victory. Mikasuki
was soon afterward visited by American
troops and, although most of the Indiane
escaped, Homotlimed was captured and
immediately hanged. Gen. Jackson
called him ''Homattlemico, the old Red-
stick," the latter name being applied
because he was a chief of the Mikasuki
band, known also as Re<l sticks, because
they erected red-painted poles in their
village. (c. t.)
Horocroc. A former village, presum-
ably Costanoan, connei'ted with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Horses. The first horses seen bv the
mainland Indians were those of the Span-
ish invaders of Mexico. A few years
later De Soto brought the horse into Flor-
ida and westward to the Mississippi,
while Coronado, on hiw march to Quivira
in 1541, intrcMluced it to the Indians of
the great plains. When the Aztec saw
the mounted men of Cortes they supposed
horse and man to be one and were greatly
alarmed at the strange animal. The clas-
sical Centaur owed its origin to a like
misconception. A tradition existeii
among the Pawnee that their ancestors
mistook a mule ridden by a man for
a single animal and shot at it from (con-
cealment, capturing the mule when the
man fell.
The horse was a marvel to the Indians
and came to be regarded as sacred. For
a long time it was worshiped by the
Aztec, and by nrost of the tribes was
considered to have a mysterious or sa-
cred character. Its origin was explained
by a number of myths representing horses
to have come out of the earth through
lakes and springs or from the sun.
When Antonio de Esi)ejo visited the Ilopi
of Arizona in 1583, the Indians spread
cotton scarfs or kilts on the ground for
the horses to walk on, l)elieving the
latter to be sacred. This sacred character
is sometimes shown in the names given
to the horse, as the Dakota snnka icdkan,
* mysterious dog. ' Its use in transporta-
tion accounts for the term 'dog' often
applied to it, as the Siksika pmiokAmita^
'elk dog'; Cree mlMatlm, 'big dog';
Shawnee mUhii wVi , ' elk . ' ( See Chaml>er-
lain in Am Tr-Quell, 1894.)
The southern plains proveii verv favor-
able, and horses greatly multiplied.
Strav and escaped horses formed wild
herds, and, as they had few carnivorous
enemies, their increase and spread were
astonishingly rapid. The movement of
the horse was from s. to n., at about an
equal rate on both sides of the mountains.
It moved northward in three ways: (1)
The increase of the wild horses and their
dispersal into new regions was rapid. ( 2 )
For 150 years l)efore the first exploration
of the W. by residents of the United States,
Spaniards from the Mexican provinces
had been making long journeys north-
ward and eastward to trade with the
Indians, even, it is said, as far N. as
570
HORSES
[B. A. B.
the camps of the Kiowa, when these
were living on Tongue r. (3) As soon as
the Indians nearest to the Spanish settle-
ments appreciated the uses of the horse,
they b^an to make raiding expeditions
to capture horses, and as knowledge of
the animal extended, the tribes still far-
ther to the N. began to procure horses
from those next S. of them. So it was
that tribes in the S. had the first horses
and always had the greatest number,
while the tribes farthest N. obtained
them last and always had fewer of them.
Some tribes declare that they possessed
horses for some time before they learned
the uses to which they could be put.
On the N. Atlantic coast horses were
imported early in the 17th century, and
the Iroouois possessed them toward the
end of that centurjr and were regularly
breeding them prior to 1736. For the
northern plains they seem to have been
first obtained from the region w. of the
Rocky mts., the Siksika having obtained
their first horses from the Kutenai, Sho-
shoni, and other tribes across the moun-
tains, about the year 1800. W. T. Hamil-
ton, who met the Nez Percys, Cayuse,
and other tribes of the Columbia region
between 1840 and 1850, tells of the tradi-
tion among them of the time when they
had no horses; but having learned of
their existence in the S., of the purposes
for which they were used, and of their
abundance, they made up a strong war
party, went S., and captured horses. It
IS impossible to fix the dates at which any
tribes procured their horses, and, since
many of the Plains tribes wandered in
small bodies which seldom met, it is
likely that some bands acquired the horse
a long time before other sections of the
same tribe. The Cheyenne relate va-
riously that they procured their first
horses from the Arapaho, from the Kiowa,
and from the Shoshoni, and all these
statements may be true for different
bodies. A very definite statement is
made that they received their first horses
from the Kiowa at the time when the
Kiowa lived on Tongue r. The Cheyenne
did not cross the Missouri until toward
the end of the 17th century. For some
time they resided on thatstream, and their
progress in working westward and south-
westward to the Slack-hills, Powder r.,
and Tongue r. was slow. They probably
did not encounter the Kiowa on Tongue r.
long before the middle of the 18th century,
and it is possible that the Kiowa did not
then poK^ss horses. Black Moccasin,
reputed trustworthy in his knowledge
and his dates, declared that the Cheyenne
obtained horses about 1 780. The Pawnee
are known to have had horses and to have
used them in hunting early in th6 18th
century. Carver makes no mention of
seeing horses among the Sioux that he
met in 1767 in w. Minnesota; but in 1776
the elder Alexander Heniy saw them
among the Assiniboin, while Umfreville
a few years later spoke of horses as com-
mon, some being branded, showing that
they had been taken from Spanish settle-
ments.
The possession of the horse had an
important infiuence on the culture of the
Indians and speedily changed the mode
of life of many tribes. The dog had pre-
viously been the Indian's only domestic
animal, his companion in the hunt, and
to some extent his assistant as a burden
bearer, yet not to a very great degree,
since the power of the dog to carry or to
haul loads was not great. Before they
had horses the Indians were footmen,
making short jooroeys and transporting
their possessions mostly on their backs.
The hunting Indians possessed an insig-
nificant amount of property, since the
quantity that they could carry was small.
Now all this was changed. An animal had
been found which could carry burdens
and drag loads. The Indians soon real-
ized that the possession of such an animal •
would increase their freedom of movement
and enable them to increase their prop-
erty, since one horse could carry the load .
of several men. Besides this, it insured a
food supply and made the moving of camp
easy and swift and long journeys possible.
In addition to the use of the horse as a
burden bearer and as a means of moving
rapidly from place to place, it was used as
a medium of exchange.
The introduction of the horse led to
new intertribal relations; systematic war
parties were sent forth, the purpose of
which was the capture of horses. This
at once became a recognized industry, fol-
lowed by the bravest and most energetic
young men. Many of the tribes, before
they secured horses, obtained guns, which
gave them new boldness, and horse and
gun soon transformed those who, a gen-
eration before, had been timid foot wan-
derers, to danng and ferocious raiders.
On the plains and in the 8. W. horses
were frequently used as food, but not
ordinarily when other flesh could be
obtained, although it is said that theChiri-
cahua Apache preferred mule meat to
any other, it frequently happened that
war parties on horse-stealing expeditions
killed and ate horses. When this was
done the leader of the party was always
careful to warn his men to wash them-
selves thoroughly with sand or mud and
water before they went near the enemy's
camp. Horses greatly dread the smell of
horse flesh or horse fat and will not suffer
the approach of any one smelling of it
The horse had no uniform value, for
obviously no two horses were alike. A
BULL. 301
H08B0A — HOSPITALITY
.571
war pony or a buffalo horse had a hi^h,
an old pack pony a low, value. A nch
old man might send fifteen or twenty
horses to the tipi of the girl he wished
to marry, while a poor young man might
send but one. A doctor might charge a
fee of one horse or hye, according to the
patient's means. People paid as they
could. Among the Sioux and the Chey-
enne the plumage of two eagles used to be
regarded as worth a good horse. Forty
horses have been given for a medicine
pipe.
Indian saddles varied greatly. The old
saddle of Moorish type, having the high
peaked pommel and cantle made of wood
or horn covered with raw buffalo hide,
was common, and was the kind almost
always used by women ; but there was an-
other type, low in front and behind,
often having a horn, the prong of a deer's
antler, for a rope. The I ndians rode with
a short stirrup — the bareback seat. To-
day the young Indians ride the cowboy
saddle, with the cowboy seat — the long
leg. Cow-skin pads stuffed with the hair
of deer, elk, antelope, buffalo, or mountain
sheep were commonly used instead of
saddles by some of the tribes in running
buffalo or in war, but among a number
of tribes the horse was stripped for chas-
ing buffalo and for battle. Some tribes
on their horse-stealing expeditions car-
ried with them small empty pads, to be
stuffed with grass and used as saddles
after the horses had been secured. The
Indians of other tribes scorned such lux-
ury and rode the horse naked, reachmg
home chafed and scarred.
Horse racing, like foot racing, is a
favorite amusement, and much property
is wagered on these races. The Indians
were great jockeys and trained and han-
dled their horses with skill. When visit-
ing another tribe they sometimes took
race horses with them and won or lost
lai^ sums. The Plains tribes were ex-
tremely good horsen^en, in war hiding
themselves behind the bodies of their
mounts so that only a foot and an arm
showed, and on occasion giving exhibi-
tions of wonderful daring and skill. Dur-
ing the campaign of 1^5 on Powder r.,
after Gen. Conner's drawn battle with a
lai^ force of Arapaho and Cheyenne, an
Arapaho rode up and down in front of the
command within a few hundred yards,
and while his horse was galloping was
seen to swing himself down under his
horse's neck, come up on the other side,
and resume his seat, repeating the feat
many times.
The horse was usually killed at the
srave of its owner, just as his arms were
Buried with him, in order that he might
he equipped for the journey that he was
about to take. A number of Plains tribes
practised a horse dance. There were
songs about horses, and prayers were
made in their behalf. On the whole,
however, the horse's place in ceremony
was only incidental. On the occasion of
great gatherings horses were led into the
circle of the dancers and there given
away, the donor counting a coup as he
passed over the gift to the recipient. In
modem times the marriage gift sent by a
suitor to a girl's family consisted in part
of horses. Among some tribes a father
gave away a horse when his son killed
his first big game or on other important
family occasions. In the dances of the
soldier-band societies of most tribes 2, 4,
or 6 chosen men ride horses during the
dance. Their horses are painted, the
tails are tied up as for war, nawk or owl
feathers are tied to the forelock or tail,
and frequently a scalp, or something
representing it, hangs from the lower jaw.
The painting represents wounds received
by the rider's horse, or often there is
painted the print of a hand on either side
of the neck to show that an enemy on foot
has been ridden down. In preparing to
go into a formal battle the horse as well
as his rider received protective treatment.
It was ceremonially painted and adorned,
as described above, and certain herbs and
medicines were rubbed or blown over it
to give it endurance and strength.
Among some of the Plains tribes there
was a guild of horse doctors who devoted
themselves especially to protecting and
healing horses. They doctored horses
before going into battle or to the buffalo
hunt, so that they should not fall, and
doctored those wounded in battle or on
the hunt, as well as the men hurt in the
hunt. In intertribal horse races they
** doctored" in behalf of the horses of
their own tribe and against those of their
rivals. See Commerce, Domesticatioji,
Travel and Transportation. (o. b. g.)
Hosboa. The Road-runner or Pheasant
clan of the Hopi, q. v.
Hoc'-bo-a.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891.
Hoc'-bo-awun-wu.— Fewkes in Am Anthrop., vii,
405, 1894 (trtifl-u*{i.= 'clan'). Hotboa winwu —
Fe wkes in 19th Rep. B. A . E. . 584, 1900. Huapoa.—
Bourke, Snake Dance, 117, 1884.
Hosmite. A former Cholovohe village
on lower San Joaquin r., Cal.
Hoamite.— Plnart, Cholovone MS., B. A. E., 1880.
Koamitaa.— Chamlsso in Kotzebue, Voy., in, 51,
1821. KoMniti.— Chorls. Voy. Pitt.. 5, 1822.
Hospitality. Hospitality, distinguished
from charity, was a cardinal principle
in every Indian tribe. The narratives
of many pioneer explorers and settlers,
from De Soto and Coronado, Amidas
and Barlow, John Smith and the Pil-
grims, down to the most recent period,
are full of instances of wholesale hos-
pitality- toward the white strangers,
sometimes at considerable cost to the
hosts. Gift dances were a feature in
572
HOSTAYUNTWA HOTNA8-HADAI
[b. a. e.
every tribe, and it was no uncommon oc-
currence on the plains during the sum-
mer season for large dancing parties to
make the round of the tribes, return-
ing in the course of a month or two
with hundreds of ponies given in return
for their entertainment. Every ceremo-
nial gathering was made the occasion of
the most lavish hospitality, both in feast-
ing and the giving of presents. In some
languages there was but one wdrd for
both generosity and bravery, and either
one was a sure avenue to distinction. A
notable exemplification of this was the
institution of the potlatch (q. v.) among
the tribes of the N. W. coast, by which
a man saved for half a lifetime in order
to give away his accumulated wealth in
one grand distribution, which would en-
title him and his descendants to rank
thereafter among the chiefs. In tribes
where the clan system prevailed the duty
of hospitality and mutual assistance with-
in the clan was inculcated and sacredly
observed, anyone feeling at liberty to
call on a fellow-clansman for help in an
emergency without thought of refusal.
The same obligation existed in the case
of fonnal comradeship between two men.
Among the Aleut, according to Veni-
aminoff, the stranger received no invita-
tion on arriving, but decided for himself
at which house he chose to be a guest,
and was sure to receive there every at-
tention as long as he might stay, with
food for the journey on his departure.
On the other hand it can not be said
that the Indian was strictly charitable,
in the sense of extending help to those
unable to reciprocate either for them-
selves or for their tribes. The life of the
savage was precarious at best, and those
who had outlived their usefulness were
very apt to be neglected, even by their
own nearest relatives. Pospitality as be-
tween equals was a tribal rule; charitjr
to the helpless depended on the disposi-
tion and ability of the individual. See
Ethics and Morals, Feasts. (j. m.)
Hostayuntwa {Ho-^std-y6n^ttvdf^\ * there
he cast a lean thin^ into the fire.' — Hew-
itt). An Oneida village that stood on the
site of Camden, N. Y.
Ho-'»tt-y6"-twa«>'.— J. N. B. Hewitt, inf n, 1906.
Ho-sta-yun'-twiL— Morgan, League Iroq., 473, 1851.
Hosakhannu ( ' foolish dogs ' ) . Given as
an Ankara band under chief Sithauche
about 1855, but properly a dance society.
Fooliih Dogs.— Culbert8on in Smithson. Rep. 1850.
143, 1851. Ho-sok'-haa-na.— Hayden, Ethnog. and
Philol., 357, 1862.
Hosakhauiiiikarerihii (Mittle foolish
dogs * ) . Given as an Arikara band under
chief Tigaranish about 1855, but prop-
erly a dance society.
Ho-iuk'-hau-nu-ka-re'-ri-hu. — Hayden, Ethnog.
and Ptiilol., 357, 1862. LiUle Foolish Dogs.— Ibid.
Hotachi (*elk*). A Missouri gens, co-
ordinate with the Khotachi gens of the
Iowa.
Ho-ma'.— Doreey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 240, 1897.
Hoo'-ma.— Morgan, Anc. Soc, 156, 1877. Ho-ta'-
tci.— Dorsey, op. eit.
Hotagastlas-hadai ( Xo^tAgaMLos xa/da-i,
* people who run about in* crowds'). A
subdivision of the Chaahl-lanas, a family
of the f^agle clan of the Haida, settled in
Alaska. They are said to have been thus
named because they were so numerous
that when visitors came great crowds ran
to meet them. — Swanton, Cont. Haida,
276, 1905.
Hotalihuyana (Creek : h6tali, MUali,
*wind,' 'gust,* * hurricane' ; /iM.v<iwa, 'pass-
ing'; hence * Hurricane town'). A for-
mer Lower Creek or Seminole town in
Dougherty co. , Ga. , established by Indians
of Chiaha on the e. bank of Flint r., 6 m.
below the junction of Kitchofooni cr.
Settlers from the adjacent Osotchi had
mingled with the 20 families of the village
in Hawkins' time (1799). It had 27 fami-
lies in 1832. (a. s. G.)
Fatehennyaha.— Brinton, Florida Penin., 145, 1859.
Holatlahoanna.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., Ist
Hess. , 300, 1836. Ho tal le ho yar nar.— Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, iv, 578. 1854. O-tel-lo-who-yau-nau.—
Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 64, 1848. Otellewhoyon-
nee.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1814). 163, 1837. Tale-
haiun.— Ibid. (1797), 68. Talehouyana.— Peni^re
in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 311, ISS. Talle-whe-
anas.— Ibid., 364. Telhaanat.— Kinnard (1792) in
Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., I, 313, 1832. Telli-
huana.— Ibid., 383. Telluiana.— Ibid.
HotamimBaw {Hotdm-tmsdw, 'foolish or
crazy dogs'). A warrior society of the
Cheyenne, q. v.
Hot&^ni miasau.— Grlnnell, infn, 1906 (lit. *dog8
crazy ' ) . Hotam-Xmiaw. — Mooney , i n f n , 1905.
Hotamitanio (HotAmitii^nio, * dog men';
sing., Hot&mitiVn). A warrior society of
the Cheyenne (q. v.), commonly known
to the whites as Dog Soldiers. See MUir
t<iry Societies, ( j. m. )
Dog Men*8.— G. A. Dorsey, The Cheyenne, 15, 1905.
Dog Soldier band.— Culbertson in Smlthson. Rep.
1850, 143, 1851. Hotamita'nio.— Mooney, inf n, 1905
(see p. 256 of this Handbook). Ho-tum'-i-ta'-nl-o.—
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 281, 1862
(incorrectly given as the name of a dance, but
properly intended for the dance of this society).
Ml'itavirniit.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A.E., 1026,
1896 (=♦ heavy eyebrows': another name) .
Hotao (AWoo). A legendary Haida
town that is said to have stood on the
s. w. coast of Maude id.. Queen Char-
lotte group, Brit. Col. From this place,
according to one account, came the an-
cestress of the Hlgaiu-lanas. — Swanton,
Cont. Haida, 279, 1905.
Hotdjihoas (Xo^tdjixoa^Sy *hair seals at
low tide'). A former Haida town on
Lyell id., near the n. end of Darwin sd.,
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It was
occupied by the Hagi-lanas. — Swanton,
Cont. Haida, 277, 1905.
Hothlepoya. See Menewa.
Hotnas-hadai (^ot nas xada^-% 'box-
house people'). Given by Boas (FiftB
BULL. 30]
HOT 8PEINGS — HOYALAS
573
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 27, 1889) as the
name of a subdivision of the Yaku-lanas,
a family of the Raven clan of the Haida
in Alaska. It is in reality only a house
name belonging to that family. ( j. r. s. )
Hot Springs. A summer camp of the
Sitka Indians on Baranoff id., Alaska.
There were 26 people there in 1880. — Pe-
troff in Tenth Census, Alaska, 32, 1884.
Hottroohtac. A Costanoan village situ-
ated in 1819 within 10 m. of Santa Cruz
mission, Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Apr. 6, 1860.
Houaneiha. An unidentified village or
tribe mentioned to Joutel (Margrv, D^c,
III, 409, 1878) in 1687, while he was stay-
ing with the Kadohadacho on Red r. of
Louisiana, by the chief of that tribe as
being among his enemies.
Houattoehronon (Huron: Knathoge^-
rdnon, * people of the sunsetting or of
the west*). One of a number of tribes,
mentioned in the Jesuit Relation for
1640, which were reputed to be seden-
tary, populous, and agricultural. Later
the form Quatoghe, or Quadoge, is
found as the name of the s. end of L.
Michigan, being so employed on Mitch-
eirs map of the British Colonies in N. A.,
of 1755, and on Jefferys* and D'Anville's
maps, the one of 1777 and the other of
1775. Meaning simply *i>eople of the
west', it was evidently the name of some
people living in thew., at thes. end of
L. Michigan. Forsome unknown reason
the name Quatoghees or Quatoghies was
applied to the Tionontati by Colden, and
by Gallatin, Schoolcraft, and others who
followed him; but this is an apparent
error, as the Tionontati, or Hurous du
Petun, never lived at the s. end of L.
Michigan. In the famous deed of the
hunting grounds of the Five Nations to
the King of England, in 1701, Quadoge
is given as the western boundary, at a
point w. of the Miami. Father Potier,
who resided at Detroit in 1751, says that
8atoeronnon (Ouatoieronon and Quatoke-
ronon being cognate forms) was the
Huron name for the Sauk. ( j. n. b. h. )
HouAttoehronon.— Jes. Rel., index. 1858. Hvat-
toehnmoB. - Jes. Rel. 1640, 35, 1858. HatMronnon. —
Potier, Rac. Hur. et Gram., MS., 1751.
Hoigets. An unidentified tribe contain-
ing 40 men described as of fine stature,
living on a branch of Red r. of Louisiana,
6 leagues from the main stream, at the
beginning of the 19th century.— Baudry
des Lozidres, Voy. a la Louisiane, 242,
249, 1802.
Houtgna. A former Gabrieleflo ran-
cheria in Los Angeles co. , Cal. , at a locality
later called Ranchitode Lugo. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860.
Howakeeas. Mentioned with the Choc-
taw as forming a small party which was
defeated by the Creeks (Oglethorpe, 1743,
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, vi, 242, 1855).
Possibly a bad misprint for Timucua.
Howiri. A ruined pueblo, formerly oc-
cupied by the Tewa, at the Rito Colo-
rado, about 10 m. w. of the Hot Springs,
near Abiquiu, Rio Arriba co., N. Mex.
See Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in,
61, 1890; IV, 22, 1892; Hewett in Bull. 32,
B. A. E., 40, 1906.
Ho-ui-ri.— Bandelier. op. cit.
Howkan (''o/o/./mn, aTlingit word prob-
ably referring to a stone which stood up
in front of the town, although some
derive it from qdivaka^n, *deer,' deer be-
ing numerous there). A Haida town on
Long id., facing Dall id., Alaska, below
which a ^reat canoe fight took place,
resulting in the occupancy of part of
Prince of Wales id. ])y the Kaigani Haida.
It was the seat of several families, but
the Chaahl-lanas owned it. According
to John Work's estimate (1836-41) there
wen^ 27 houses and 458 inhabitants.
Petroff gave the population as 287 in
1880-81; in 1890 there were 90; in 1900,
145, including whites. (j. r. s. )
Hau kan hade.— Krause, Tlinkit Indianer, 301,
1885. Hou a ruan.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 489,
1855 (after Work, 1836-41). Houkan Haade.—
Harrison in Proc. and Trans. Roy. .Soc. Can., see.
II, 125. 1895. How-a-ruan.— Dawson, Q.Charlotte
Ids., 173b, 1880 (after Work). Howakan.— Petroflf in
10th Census, Alaska, 32, 1884. Howkan.—Eleventh
Census, Alaska, 31, 1890. Uon-a-gan.— Kane,
Wand, in N. A., app., 1859 (misprint from Work).
Howungkut. A Hupa village of the
southern division, nearly due s. of Medild-
ing, from which it is separated by Trinity
r., Cal. At this vill^e the first day's
dancing of the white deer-skin dance of
the Hupa takes place. (p. e. g. )
Wang'-kat.— Powers in Cont. X. A. Ethnol., in,
73, 1877. Xowfinkut.— Goddard, Life and Culture
of the Hupa, 12, 1903.
Hoya. The name of a chief and also of
a former settlement on or near the s. coast
of South Carolina, visited by Jean Ribault
in 1562. Apparently the Ahoya men-
tioned by \ andera in 1567. The people
were friendly with and were possibly
related to the Edisto, (\. v.
Ahoya.— Vandera (1567) in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla.,
16, 1857. Hoya.— Ribault (1562) in Hakluyt,Voy.,
1600, 379, 1800.
Hoya {Xo^ya, * raven' in the Skide-
gate dialect). One of the two great phra-
tries or clans into which the Haida are
divided. (j. r. s.)
K'oa'la.— Boas, Fifth and Twelfth Reps. N. W.
Tribes Canada, passim (improperly applied;
K'oa'la or K.'oa'las means simply 'people of an-
other clan •). Yehl.—S wanton, inf'n, 1900 (name
in Masset dialect).
Hoyagandla {Xo^ya gA^iim^ * raven
creek'). A Haida town* on a stream of
the same name which flows into Hecate
str. a short distance s. of C. Fife, Queen
Charlotte ids. , Brit. Col. It was occupied
by the Djahui-gitinai.— Swan ton, Cont.
Haida, 280, 1905.
Hoyalas (*the troubled ones'). A
Kwakiutl tribe formerly occupying the
574
HOYIMA HUDA
[b. a. b.
upper shores of Qoatsino sd. ; they were
exterminated by the Koskimo.
Ho-ya.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. 8oc. Can. for
1897, sec. II, 70. Xo'yalas.— Boas in Mem. Am.
Mus. Nat. Hist., v. pt 2, 401, 1902. Xoyile*.—
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 332.
Hoyima. A former Yokuts ( Mariposan )
tribe on San Joaquin r., Cal. — A. L. Kroe-
ber, inf n, 1906.
Huachi. A former Coetanoan village
near Santa Cruz mission, Cal. — ^Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860.
Hnaohinera (so called on account of the
tascal wood found there in abundance. —
Rudo Ensayo). An Opata pueblo and
seat of a Spanish mission, founded about
1645, which afterward became a visita of
Baseraca; situated on Tesorobabi cr., a
branch of Rio Bavispe, e. Sonora, Mexico,
near the Chihuahua border. Population
538 in 1678; 285 in 1730, but as it became
the place of refuge of the inhabitants of
Baquigopa and Batesopa on the abandon-
ment of those villages later in the 18th
century, the population was augmented.
Total pop. 337 in 1900. (f. w. h.)
Ouatzinera.— Rudo Ensayo (ca. 1763), Gulteras
trans., 217, 1894. Huaohinera.— Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, in, pt. 1, 59, 1890. San Juan Ouaohi-
rita,— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 343, 1864 (mentioned
as if distinct from Huachinera) . S. Juan de Chia-
ohinela.— Rivera, Diario, leg. 1444, 1736. 8. Juan
Ouaohinera.— Zapata (1678) quoted by Bancroft,
No. Mex. States, l, 246, 1884.
Hnadjinaas-hadai. (Xu^Adjt na^as xof-
da-«, * people of grizzly-bear house*). A
subdivision of the Koetas family of the
Kaigani Haida of British Columbia. —
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 272, 1905.
HnadoB (Xuado^s^ * standing- water peo-
ple,* in allusion to the swampy nature
of the land around their towns). A di-
vision of the Raven clan of the Haida,
formerly occupying the e. shore of Gra-
ham id. , Queen Charlotte group, Brit. Col.
Originally they were settled at Naikun,
but on account of wars they moved to C.
Ball, thence to Skidegate. The Naikun-
kegawai seem to have been a sort of aristo-
cratic branch of this family. { j. r. s. )
dua'doi.— Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada,
24, 1898. ?uado'i.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 270,
1905.
Hnados. A small Haida town, inhabited
by a family bearing the same name, near
the town of Hlgihla-ala, n. of C. Ball,
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. — Swan-
ton, Cont. Haida, 280, 1905.
Hnalga. Given by Bourke (Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, ii, 180, 1889) as the Moon clan
of the Mohave; but according to Kroe-
ber, so far as known the Mohave do not
name their clans, and their name for moon
is halya,
Hnalimea. A former Cochimi rancheria
under San Ignacio mission. Lower Cali-
fornia, about lat. 28° 40^.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Jan. 17, 1862.
Hnalqailme. A former Costanoan vil-
lage near Santa Cruz mission, Cal.—
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860.
Huanes. A former tribe of s. Texas,
mentioned with the Pampoas, Mesquites,
Pastias, Camamas, Cacanas, and Canas, as
a tribe for which mission San Joe6 at San
Antonio had been founded.
Xuanet.— Solis, Diario, 1767-68, cited by H. £. Bol-
ton, inf n, 1906.
Haaqae. Mentioned by Oviedo (Hist
Gen. Indies, in, 628, 1853) as one of the
provinces or villages visited by Ayllon m
1520. Probably on the South Carolina
coast.
Hnascari. A tribe or band, probably
Paiute, living in 1775 in lat. 38° 3^ doubt-
less in s. Utah. — Dominguezand Escalante
m Doc. Hist. Mex., 2d s., i, 537, 1854.
Hnashpatsena ^ huashpa = *■ dance-kilt ' ).
A pueblo occupied after 1605 by the an-
cestors of the inhabitants of Santo Do-
mingo pueblo, near the present site of
the latter, on the e. bank of the Rio
Grande, n. central New Mexico. The
Eueblo was erected after the destruction,
y a freshet, of the second Gipuy (q. v.)
to the eastward. A part of Huashpatzena
was also carried away by flood, compel-
ling the villagers to move farther east,
where they built the pueblo of Kiua —
the present Santo Domingo, q. v.
Huaan-pa Tsen-a.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa-
pers, IV, 187, 1892. Uash-paTxe-na.— Ibid., in, 84,
1890.
Hnasna. A former Chumashan village
near Purfsima mission, Santa Barbara co.,
Cal.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Haatabampo. One of the principal set-
tlements of the Mayo, in Sonora, Mexico;
pop. 1,553 in 1900.— Censo del Estado de
Sonora, 96, 1901.
Haaxicori. A former Tepehuane pueblo
in lat, 23°, long. 105° 30^, Smaloa, Mexico.
Huajicori.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., map, 1864.
Huazioori.— Ibid., 281.
Hachiltohik (Hu^tdlttM, * round clear-
ing ' ) . A Pima village below Santa Ana,
on the N. bank of the Gila, ins. Arizona.
Horltoholetohok.— ten Kate quoted by Gatschet,
MS., B. A. E., XX. 199, 1888 (trans, 'plain '). Hii'-
tcnttclk.— Russell, Pima MS., B. A. E., 1902. Buen
llano.— Bailey in Ind.Aflf. Rep., 208, 1858. Llano.—
Brown, Apache Country, 270, 1869.
Hnolmom. A division of the Yuki of N.
California, speaking a dialect divei]gent
from that of the ^und Valley Indians.
They lived on South Eel r. above its con-
fluence with the middle fork of Eel r., or
in adjacent territories, and on the head-
waters of Russian r. in upper Potter val-
ley. To the N. of them were the Witu-
komnom Yuki, to the e. the Wintun, and
on the other sides were Pomo tribes.
The Pomo call them Tatu, the whites
Redwoods, from Redwood cr.
Huch'-nom.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ni,
126, 1877 (trans, 'outside the valley'). Red-
woods.—Ind. AfF. Rep. , 75, 1870. Tahtoot.— Powers
in Overland Mo., ix, 507, 1872. Ta-tu.— Powers
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., op. cit., 139 (so called by
Pomo of Potter valley).
Hnda ( * wind ' ) . A Yuchi clan.
Huda tahi<-Gatschet. Uchee MS.. B. A. £., 70,
1885.
BULL. 30]
HUDDOH HUICHOL
575
Huddoh. A local name of the hump-
backed salmon (Salmo proteus); also
known as haddo, irom huado, the name
of this fish in Niskwalli (Ren. IT. S.
Comm. Fish., 1872-73, p. 99), of the Sa-
lishan stock. (a. f. c.)
Hudedut (HMeMt^). A former Takil-
man village at the forks of Rogue r. and
Applegate cr.. Oreg.
Howtetaoh.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond.,
76, 1866 (misprint). How-te-ta'-oh.— Gibbs in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, tit, 423. 1853 (possibly the
same, or mistaken for the Kikaktsik). Hii-de-
dilt'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 236, 1890.
Huehuerigita. A former Opata pueblo
at Oasas Grandes, at the w. foot of the
Sierra Madre, Chihuahua, Mexico. It
was already deserted in the 16th century.
Bandelier, Gilded Man, 142, 1893.
Huelemia. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Tavlor in
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863.
Huenejel. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Purfsima mission, Santa Bar-
bara CO., Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Oct. 18, 1861. Mentioned as if distinct
from Huenepel.
Huenemet' A former Chumashan vil-
lage on the coast, a few miles s. of Saticoy
r., Ventura co., Cal.
HvMMBM.— Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, Julv 24, 1863.
W«-iw'-mii.— Henshaw, Buenaventura &fs. vocab.,
B. A. E., 1884.
Huenepel. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Purfsima mission, Santa Bar-
bara CO., Cal.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Oct. 18, 1861. Mentioned as if distinct
from Huenejel.
Huepao. A Teguima Opata pueblo and
the seat of a Spanish mission founded in
1639; situated m Sonora, Mexico, on the
B. bank of Rio Sonora, below lat. 30°.
Pop. 268 in 1678, 71 in 1730. In addition
to its civilized Opata population it con-
tained 10 Yaqui in 1900.
Ovipaea.— Kino, map (1702) in Stocklein, Neue
Welt-Bott, 1726. Hnepao.— Davila. Sonora HLst6r-
ico, 817, 1894. Huepaoa.— Orozco y Berra, Geog.,
344, 1864. Baa Lorenso Ouepaca.— Ibid.. 343. San
Loremo Hnepaoa.— Zapata (1678) quoted by Ban-
croft, No. Mex. States, 514, 1884.
Huertas (Las Huertas; Span.: *the
orchards ' or * kitchen gardens * ) . A clus-
ter of ruined pueblos 4 m. below Socorro,
N. Mex. (Abert in Emory, Recon., 495,
1848) ; probably originally inhabited by
the Piros.
Hueio Parade (Span. : * bone set up ' or
'standing bone*). A former Pima and
Maricopa village on the Pima and Mari-
copa res., Gila r., Ariz.; pop. 263 Pima
and 314 Maricopa in 1858.
XI Jqm Farado.— Bell in Jour Ethnol. Soc. Loud.,
1, 281, 1869 (misquoting Bailey). El Jnes Tarado.—
BaUey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 207, 208, 1858. HueM
Parrado.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer. June 19, 1863.
Haexetitlan. A pueblo in Chihuahua,
Mexico, and the seat of a Spanish mission
with a mixed population of Nevome,
Tepehuane, and Tarahumare, Its in-
habitants are now civilized.
Huejotitan.— Present name. Huexotitlan.— Bail-
croit, No. Mex. States, i, 598, 1884. Ban 6er6nimo
Huexotitlan.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 324, 1864.
Hnhilp (Huh-ilp, *on the edge*). A
village of the Fountain band of Upper
Lillooet, on Fountain cr., an e. affluent
of upper Fraser r., Brit. Col.— Dawson in
Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1891, sec. ii, 44.
Huhli taiga (IWli-taiga, *war ford*).
A lower Creek village on Chattahoochee
r., about the present Georgia- Alabama
boundary, the m habitants of which in or
prior to 1799 removed to Oakfuski, set-
tling on the opposite side of the Talla-
poosa.
Hohtetoga.— Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, v, 262, 1855. Ho-ith-le-ti-gau.— Hawkins
(1799). Sketch, 45, 1848. Hothletoga.--Bartram,
Travels, 46*2, 1791. Hothtetoga.— Swan misquoted
by Gatschet, Crwk Mipr. Leg., i. 131. 1884.
Hu'li-ta^a.— Ibid, (correct ft)rm).
Hnhliwahli (*to api)ortion war'). A
former Upper Creek town on the right
bank of Tallapoosa r., 5 m. l)elow Atasi,
in Macon co., Ala. It obtained its name
from the privilege of declaring war which
was accorded to it, the declaration being
sent from this town to Tukabatchi, thence
to the other villages. (a. s. g.)
Cawalla.— H. R. Ex. Do<\ 276. 24th Cong., Ist seas.,
150,1836. Ohiwalle.— Ibid.,131. ClMwa&ees.— U. 8.
Ind. Treat. (1797), 68, 1837. Oleu wathto.— Par-
sons in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 575, 1854.
Olewalla.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1827), 420, 1837.
Olewauley*.— Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, v. 262, 1855. Clewella.— Devereux in H.
R. Doc. 274, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 8, 1838. Cle-
wuUa.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578, 1854.
Oleyali.— Alcedo, Die. Geog.. i, 589. 1786. Oluale.—
Bartram, Travels, 461, 1791. Cuwallv.— Wood-
ward, Reminiscences, 14, 1859. Elewalles.—
VVeatherfordJ179:i) in Am. State I'ap., Ind. Aflf..
I. 3«5, 1832. Hoithlewalee.— Flint, Ind. Wars, 206,
1833. Ho-ith-le Waule.— Hawkins (1799), Sketch,
32, 1848. Hothleawally.— Woodward, Reminis-
cences, 76, 1858. Hu'li Wa*hli.— Gatschet, Creek
Migr. Leg., i, 131, 1884. Rollins BuUet.— Wood-
ward, op. cit. Sdewaetes.— Weatherford (1793) in
Am. State Pap.. Ind. Aff., i, 38.5, 1832. Teguales.—
Barcia (1693), En.sayo, 313. 1723 (called a Talapoosa
town). Tekeewauleei.— Doyell (1813) in Am. State
Pap.. Ind. Aff., i. 841, 1832. Thlea Walla.— Wood-
ward, Reminiscences, 14, 75, 1858 ("Rolling
Bullet").
Hnhliwahli. A town in the Creek Na-
tion, on North fork of Canadian r., above
Hillabi, Okla.
Hu'li-Wa'li.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 185,
1888. 'Liwa'hU.-lbid.
Hahnnata {Hu-hn/'na'ta). A former
Chumashan village near Santa Inez mis-
sion, Santa Barbara co., Cal. — Henshaw,
Santa Inez MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
Haiaanlch. — A Clallam village, the mod-
ern Jamestown, 5 m. e. of Dungeness,
Puget sd., Wash.
Hui-au-ultc.— Eells, letter, B. A. E., May 21, 1886.
Jameitown. — I bid .
Hnichol. A tribe of the Piman stock,
numbering 3,000 to 4,000, living in the
rugged Sierra Madre of n. w. Jalisco,
Mexico. Their neighbors on the e. are
the Tepecano, on the w. the Cora; in the
N. their territory was formerly tx)unded
by that of the Tei)ehuane, and in the s.
by the Jalisco tribes proper, but these
576
HUICHOL
[B. A. ■.
have largely given way to a Mexican and
mixed population. In many respects the
Huichol are closely related to the Cora;
they are alike physically, spea^ co^ate
dialects, and exhibit many similarities in
culture, thus 'leading some early writers
to confuse the two tribes.
Their country, drained chiefly by the
Rio Chapalagana, is divided into three
principal districts, with the villages of
HUICHOL MAN. (am. Mu8. NAT. HiST. )
Santa Catarina, San Sebastian, and San
Andres Coamiata as their respective cen-
tral seats of government. There is little
political unity in the tribe. Each of the
three districts controls the land within
definite boundaries and annually elects
oflicers of its own, consisting of a gov-
ernor, an alcalde, a captain, a majordomo,
and some minor officials — an acquisition
from the Spaniards. These officials reside
in the central village, which is also a
religious center. The farming season is
spent in isolated lancherias, and here
indeed some of the natives live during the
entire year.
The Huichol are of medium stature,
three-fourths of the men ranging between
160 and 170 cm. ; they are predominantly
brachy cephalic (the cephalic index of 70
percent of the men exceeding 80), with
rather short face and slightly platvrhinic
nose. The body is generally well devel-
oped, deformity being extremely rare.
They are healthy and prolific, and gain
their livelihood by farming, hunting,
fishing, and by ^thering wild fruits.
The wealthier Indians own good cattle.
They maintain their independence with
great jealousy, but they are generally
peaceable and mild tempered, and show
marked fondness for music, dancing,
flowers, and personal finery. The women
are adept in weaving and embroidery.
Their houses are quadrangular, ana are
built of loose stones, or of stone and mud,
with thatched roofs. The dress of the
men, now slightly modified, consisted of
a poncho made of brown, blue, or white
woolen fabric, tightened at the waist with
one to three handsomely embroidered
girdles, and short breeches of poorly
dressed deerskin without hair, at the
lower edges of which were strung a* num-
ber of leathern thongs. To-day these are
supplanted by trousers of white cotton.
The males wear straw hats handsomely
decorated in many ways. Pouches woven
of wool or cotton in ^reat variety of design
form a part of their costume. Several
such bags generally hang from a woven
string around the waist; on ceremonial
occasions as many as a dozen may be thus
worn. The women wear short skirts and
ponchos of cotton cloth, sometimes nicely
embroidered. Both the men and the
women wear over their shoulders, on
gala occasions, a small cotton shawl,
richly embroidered with red or red and
blue thread. Sandals are worn by men.
The men tie the hair in ja sort of queue
HUICHOL WOMAN. Um. MuS. NAT. HIST. )
with a colored hair ribbon, or confine it
at the neck behind. The women usually
wear the hair loose.
The Huichol are polygamists. They
preserve their aboriginal religious beliefe,
which however show some Christian ad-
mixtureowing to theteachingsof thefriars
which begin after the Spanish conquest
of 1722. They have numerous small tem-
ples, shrines, and sacrificial caves. Each
year a party of men makes a pilgrimage to
BDLL. 30]
HUIKUAYAKEN HUMA
577
San Luis Potosi to gather peyote and to
procure holy water, and tneir return is
followed by an elaborate ceremony. Jus-
tice is administered almost entirely by
the Indians themselves. Thieves are
punished by enforced restitution; other
criminals by whipping and confinement
without food; sorcerers are sometimes
killed. The dead are buried in graves or
deposited in caves.
the Huichol villages and rancherias,
past or present, include Bastita, Chona-
cate, Guadalupe y Ocotan, Guayabas, He-
diondo, Kiatate^ Nogal, Ocota, Peder-
nales, Pochotita, Popotita, San Andr<:'»s
Coamiata, San Jos^, San Sebastian, Santa
Gatarina, Santa Gertrudis, Soledad,
Techalotita, and Texompa. (a. h.)
HvidioUa.— Bancroft, Nat. Race;), i. 621, 188*2.
Hmtoole Ibid., in, 719, 1886. Vi-ra-ri-ka.— Liim-
holtz, Huichol Inds., 2, 1898 (griven as their own
name). Viihflika.— Lumholtz, Unknown Mex-
ico, n, 21, 1902.
Hnikuayaken. Given as a gens of the
Squawmish on Howe sd., Brit. Col.
Znikua'yaxSn.— Boas. MS., B. A.E., 1887.
Huilaoatlan (Nahuatl: * place of the
reeds'). A former settlement of the Tepe-
cano, situated in the valley of the Rio de
Bolaiios, a short distance from the town
of Bolaflos, in Jalisco, Mexico. — Hrdlicka
in Am. Anthrop., v, 409, 1903.
Huila.— Hnlllcka. ibid.
Huililoc. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Barbara, Cal.
KH-l-ok.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. v(K>ab.,
B. A. E., 1884. Huililoc.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer.
Apr. 24. 1863.
Huimen. A former CostaHoanrancheria
connected with Dolores mission, San
Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Oct 18, 1861.
Huinikkashina (Hu Vniiik^dd^^a, * fish
people'). A division of the Washashe-
wanun gens of the Osage. — Dorsey in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 234, 1897.
Huinikashika. A Quapaw gens.
Fiah gens.— Dorsev in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,229, 1897.
Htti'Bikaei'^a.— Ibid.
Huinyirren. A former Costanoan village
whose people were connected with San
Juan Bautista mission, Cal.
Huiiixxva.— Arroyo de la Cuesta, IdiomasCalifor-
nias, 1821. MS. trans., B. A. £.
Huirivis. A settlement of the Yaqui
on the N. bank of the lower Rio Yaqui,
8. w. Sonora, Mexico.
HnadfUt.— Miihlenpfordt quoted by Banenift,
Nat. Races, i, 608, 1882. Hoiris.— Orozeo y Berra.
Oeoff.. 832, 1864. Huirivis— Velaseo (1850) quoted
by Bancroft, op cit.
Hnite (Cahita: * archer*). A small
tribe or subdivision of the Cahita group,
formerly living, according to Orozco y
Berra, in the mountains of n. Sinaloa,
Mexico, 7 leagues from the **Sinaloas."
They are described as having been an-
thropophagous, at open war with all
their neighbors, and as barbarous and
naked, but through the efforts of the mis-
sionaries they were gradually reformed
Bull. 30—05 37
and were gathered into a pueblo where
they afterward became confounded with
the **Sinaloas." Whether they spoke a
dialect different from that of the other
subdivisions of the Cahita is uncertain,
although from statement*} by Father Perez
de RitSs, in 1645, itniay Ixi inferred that
they d id . They l)ecame extinct as a tril)e
at an early date, probably through ab-
sorption ])v the Sinaloa.
Huites.— Ribks. Hist. Triumphos, 211, 1W6. San-
tia^ Hulrei.— Orozco y Berra, (Jeog. ;«3, 1864
(mission name of settlement). Vitet.— Ibid.
Hnititnom. The branch of the Yuki of
N. California who held the s. fork of the
middle fork of Eel r. (a. l. k. )
Huizapapa. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Bancroft,
Nat. Races, i, 459, 1874.
Hukanuwu(A'.4A- nmm/). AnoldTlingit
town on the n. side of Cross sd., Alaska,
between the mainland and Chichagof id.
Distinct from Kukanuwu. (j. r. s.)
Hnldanggats ( XAldcVngatSy * slaves * ) .
A division of theHagi-lanas,an important
part of the Raven clan among the Nin-
stints Haidaof Queen Charlotte ids., Brit.
Col. The native story told to account for
their name relates that a chief's wife was
once giving these in^ople food, and since
they never seemed to have enough, she
finally said, "Are yon slaves?" The name
clung to them ever after. (j. r. s.)
Qalda'ngasal.— Boa.^. 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can-
ada, 25, 1K98. XAlda'ngats.— Swanton, Ck)nt.
Haida, 268, 19a5.
Hnllooetell. Reported to Lewis and
Clark as a numerous nation living n. of
Columbia r., on Coweliskee (Cowlitz) r.,
above the Skilloot, and on Chahwahna-
hiooks (I^wis) r., in 1806. It was either
a Chinookan or a Salishan tribe.
Holl-loo-el-lell. — Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi,
117, 1905. HullooeUeU.— Lewis and Clark, Exped..
n.691,1817. Hullooetell.— Ibid., n. 209, 1814. Hul-
loo-et-tell.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, iv, 206,
1905. Hul-lu-et-tell.— Ibid., 214.
Hama ( * re<l ' ) . A Choctaw triln? living
during the earlier i)eriod of the French
colonization of Ix^uisiana, 7 leagues above
Red r. on the e. bank of the Mississippi,
their settlement in 1699 containing 140
cabins and 1^50 families. A red pole (see
Baton Rouge) marked the l)oundary be-
tween them and the Bayogoula on the s.
In 1706 the Tonika fled to them from the
Chickasaw, but later rose against them
and killed more than half, after which the
remainder established themselves near the
site of New Orleans. Later they lived
along Bayou La Fourcheand in the nei^li-
borhoodof the present Houma, La., which
bears their name. They are now sup-
pose<l to be extinct. See Gatschet, Creek
Migr. Leg., i, 113, 1884.
Homas.— Ln Harpe (1719) in Margry, D6c., vi,244,
1886. Houma.— Gatschet, op. cit. Omati.— Letter
of 1682 in Marjory. IX^c, ii, 205, 1877.
Iberville (1699). ibid., iv, 448, 1880. Ouma.— La
Salle, ibid., i, 663, 1875.
578
HUMALIJA — HUNA
[b. a. e.
HumaUja. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863.
Humarisa ( from humashi, * to run * ) . A
rancheriaof 288 Tarahumare, not far from
Norogachic, Chihuahua, Mexico. — Lum-
holtz, inf n, 1894.
Humawhi. A Shastan tribe or subtribe
formerly living on the s. fork of Pit r.,
Modoc CO., Cal. According to Curtin
they were a portion of the Ilmawi, living
a short distance n. of Hot Spring, Modoc
CO.
Hama'wi.— Curtin, Ilmawi vocab., B. A. E., 1889.
Hu-mi'-whi.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii,
267, 1877.
Hnmbo. A New Hampshire word for
maple syrup. Horatio Hale sought to
bring it into relation with ombigamisige in
Chippewa and closely related Algonquian
dialects, a term signifying * he makes the
maple syrup boil,* or * boiled sugar drink,'
the chief element being the ^dical omb,
* to boil.' (a. f. c.)
Humboldt Indians. The Paviotso living
around Humboldt lake, Nev. — Simpson,
Rep. of Explor. Across Utah, 38, 1876.
Hume. A former tribe of s. Texas, prob-
ably Coahuiltecan, the chief of which was
encountered in 1675 by Fernando del
Bosque 7 leagues beyond the Rio Grande.
Jume.— Fernando del Bosque (1675) in Nat. Geog.
Mag., XIV, 344, 1903. Jumees. Revillagigedo, MS.
(1793) quoted by Orozco y Berra. Geog., 306, 1864.
HnmelBom (HumElsom) . *~ A S|quawmish
village community on Burrard inlet, Brit.
Col.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S.,
475, 1900.
Hnmkak (Hum-kak^). An important
Chumashan village formerly near Ft Con-
ception, Santa &rbara co., Cal. — Hen-
shaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1884.
Humor. It has been so commonly the
fashion to describe the American Indian
as **the stoic of the woods without a
tear," that he has generally been denied
as well the possession of a sense of humor.
That he does not lack such, however, will
readily be admitted by any one who haa
come to know the Indian as he is, has
shared his meals and his camp fire, and
had the opportunity of enjoying the real
wit and humor abounding in common
speech and in ancient legend. The pun,
the jest of all kinds, the practical joke,
the double-en tend re, of which he is some-
times past-master, are all known to him.
Particularly does the awkward action or
the inexpert movement of the white man
incite him to laughter. Like the white
man, he has a fund of wit at the exj)ense
of the weaker sex and its peculiarities.
The Eskimo and the Pueblos especially are
merry, laugh ine people, who jest and trifle
through all the grades from quiet sar-
casm to the loudest joke. This app^rs
in their songs and legends, in which
humor and satire are constantly cropping
out. That the Micmac and closely re-
lated Indian tribes of the Algonquian
stock in N. E. North America have a keen
sense of the humorous and ridiculous any
one may convince himself by reading
some of the tales in Leland and Prince's
Kuloskap ( 1902), especially the episode of
the master and the babe, and the story of
the wizard and the Christian priest. The
mythic trickster is, in fact, found in every
tribe, sometimes as a misshapen person-
age, sometimes as a supernatural coyote,
rabbit, or other animal, and the relation
of his adventures provokes the greatest
mirth. Around their camp fires, and
** when the spirit moves them," the Chip-
pewa and related tribes can jest and trine
in real fashion. The episodes in many
of their tales and legends also prove their
possession of wit and humor. The Chero-
kee sense of humor is proved by their
myths and legends (Mooney in 19th Rep.
B. A. E., 1900), and that of the Zufii bjr
the folklore of that tribe (Cushing, Zuiii
Folk Tales, 1901). The Kutenai of Brit-
ish Columbia and Idaho are not without
the virtues of humor and sarcasm (Cham-
berlain, Rep. on N. W. Tribes of Can.,
70, 1892). Puns and mistakes in pronun-
ciation easily set them into fits of laugh-
ter. The Pueblos, Iroquois, Apache, some
of the Plains tribes, and those of the n. w.
Pacific coast had regular clowns or fun-
makers at some of their dances and other
ceremonies. Some Plains tribes had the
custom of marking the spot where
any amusing accident occurred while on
the march in order that later travelers
might inquire and learn the joke. See
Amusements. (a. f. c.)
Hamptnlips fsaid to mean * chilly re-
gion*). A boay of Chehalis on a river
of the same name emptying into Chehalis
r., Wash. They are under the supervi-
sion of the Puyallup school supermten-
dent and numbered 21 in 1904.
Hamtolopi.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 674,
1878. Humptttlip.— Ind. AflF. Rep., pt. I, 702, 1901.*
Hump-tu-lupi.— Ross in Ind. Aflf. Kep., 18, 1870.
Um-too-leaoz.— Ford, ibid., 250, 18&8.
Hnna. A Tlingit tribe on Cross sd.,
Alaska, camping in summer northward
to and beyond Lituya bay. Pop. 1,300
in 1870, 908 in 1880, and 592 in 1890. For
1900 the entire population of Gaudekan,
the chief Huna village, was given as 447.
Other towns in their country are Akvet-
skoe, Hukanuwu, Klughuggue, Kukan-
uwu, and Tlushashakian. T'heir social
divisions are Chukanedi, Koskedi, Tak-
dentan, and Wyshketan.
Ohiuia-kdii.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 118, 1885.
Cross Sound Indians.— Kane, Wand N. A., app.,
1859 (traders' name). C^ass Sound Indians.—
Colyer In Ind. AfT. Rep., 535, 1870. Hoonah
Sow.— Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., ni,
232, 1903. Hoone-ahs.— Scott in Ind. AfiF. Rep.,
314, 1868. Boon«^s.— Halleck in Rep. Sec. War,
pt I, 89, 186S. Rooniatas.— Scidmore, Alaska, 127.
1885. Hoonid.— Colyer in Ind. Aff. Rep., 585.
1870. Hoonyah.— Petrofi in Tentli Census, Alaska,
BULL. 30]
HUNAWURI
-HUNKPAPA
579
HumrM.— Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep.,
Hona.— Pfeiflfer, Second Journ. Around
314,
31. 1884
1868
World, 814, 1856. Hona' oow.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, V, 489, 1866 (after Kane; mLsprint).
Hona-kSn.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 118, 1885. Hun-
luuL— Halleck in Rep. Sec. War, pt. i, 39, 1868
XTecna-eaw.— Kane, Wand in N. A., app., 1859.
Whinega.— Mahony (1869) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 68,
4l8t Cong., 2d8e8S., 19, 1870.
Hnnawnrp {Hu-na-wurp). One of the
Chomashan villages formerly near Santa
Inez mission, Santa Barbara co., Cal. —
Henshaw, Santa Inez MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1884.
Hnnotn. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Hnngopavi (Navaho: * crooked nose').
An important pueblo ruin 2 m. above
Pueblo Bonito, on the n. side of Chaco
canyon, at the base of the canyon wall,
in N. w. New Mexico. It is built around
3 sides of a court, the extremities of the
wines being connected by a semicircular
double wall and the space l^etween these
walls divided into rooms. The length of
the main building is 309 ft; of the 2
winps, 136 ft each. The building was 4
stones high. There is a circular kiva in
the court and another inclosed within the
walls of the main building. The one in-
closed is 23 ft in diameter. The masonry
of Hungopavi is exceptionally good; the
material is fine-graine<l, grayish -yellow
sandstone, compactly laid in thin mud
mortar. The exterior walls of the first
story are 3 ft thick. Walls still stand to
a height of 30 ft, and deterioration has
groceeded very slowly since the ruin was
rst described. See Hardacre in Scrib-
ner*s Mag., Dec. 1878; Jackson in 10th
Rep. Hayden Surv., 438, 1879, and the
writers mentioned below. (e. l. n.)
Hnago Parie.— Domenech, Deserts, i, 200, 1860
(misprint). Hungo Pavia^— ^'^'^^'^ ^^ ^^P- ^^^'
body Mus., Xli. 549, 1880.
Exped. Navaho Country,
Hungo Pavie.— Simpson,
, 79, 1860. Hunyo Pavie.—
Cope in Rep. Wiieeler Surv., app. LL, 173, 1875.
Huning rnin. A large, rectangular, pre-
historic ruin on the ranch of Henry Hun-
ing at Showlow, Navajo co., Ariz., on a
tock table above Showlow cr. The pot-
tery found on the site is of red and gray
ware, not of very fine quality. The ma-
sonry of the walls is goo<l, but the remains
of the pueblo do not indicate very long
occupancy. — Hough in Rep. Nat. Mus.
1901 301 1903.
Hnnkkhwitik ( Hixfi-kqw'/ -tik) . A former
Yaquina village on the n. side of Yaquina
r., Oreg.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
HI, 229, 1890.
Himkpapa (variously interpreted *at the
entrance,* * at the head end of the circle,*
* those who camp by themselves,' and
'wanderers'). A division of the Teton
Sioux. From the meager data relating
to the history of this band it seems prob-
able that it is one of comparatively mod-
em formation. When Hennepin, in 1680,
found what are believed to have been the
Teton as far e. as the banks of the upper
Mississippi, no mention of the Hunkpapa
at that early date or for 100 years there-
after can be found unless it be under some
name yet unidentified. Their name is not
mentioned by Lewis and Clark, though it
is possible that the tribe is included in the
Tetons Saone of those explorers. The
name first appears as Honkpapa, and
it is properly written Hunkpapa in the
treaty of 1825. It is evident that the tribe
was then well known, although its his-
tory previous to this date is undetermined.
The Tetons Saone were located by Lewis
and Clark, in 1804, on both sides of the
Missouri below Beaver cr., N. Dak., and
were estimated at 300 men or 900 souls in
120 tipis. Ramsey ( 1849) gave their loca-
tion as near Cannonball r. Culbertson
(1850) gave their range as on the Chey-
enne, Moreau, Grand, and Cannonball
rs., and estimated them at 320 tipis.
Gen. Warren (1855) said that they lived
on the Missouri near the mouth of the
Moreau and roamed from the Big Chey-
enne up to the Yellowstone, and w. to the
Black-hills. He states that they formerly
intermarried extensively with the Chey-
enne. His estimate of population is 365
tipis, 2,920 souls. He adds that many
of the depredations along the Platte ** are
committed by the Unkpapas and Sihasa-
pas." It is indicative of their character
that they were among the last of the Da-
kota to be brought upon reservations.
The Indian agent, writmg in 1854, says:
**A11 the bands of Sioux have already re-
ceived their presents with great appear-
ance of friendship, excepting the Mmne-
cowzues (Miniconjou), Blackfeet (Siha-
sapa) , and Honepapas ( Hunkpapa) . The
former band are daily expected at the fort,
and will gladly receive their annuities;
but the Blackfeet and Honepapas still
persist in refusing any annuities, and are
constantly violating all the stipulations of
the treaty. They are continually warring
and committing depredations on whites
and neighboring tribes, killing men and
stealing horses. They even defy the
Great Father, the President, and declare
their intention to murder indiscriminately
all that come within their reach. They,
of all Indians, are now the most dreaded
on the Missouri." And when the agent
finally succeeded in reaching them and
holding a council with their chiefs at Ft
Clark, they refused to receive the pres-
ents sent by the Government, stating that
they did not want them, but preferred the
liberty to take scalps and commit whatever
depredations they pleased. They took part
in most of the subsequent conflicts with
the whites, as that at Ft Phil. Kearney and
that with Custer on the Little Bighorn.
The number of the baud in 1891 was 571;
580
HUNKPATINA HUNTING
[B. A. ]
these were (gathered on Standing Rock
res., N. and S. Dak. The population is
no longer given separately. The noted
Sitting Bullwas chief of this tribe, though
in making treaties he signed also for the
Oglala.
Their subdivisions as given by J. O.
Dorseyare: (1) Chankaokhan, (2) Che-
okhba, (3) Tinazipeshicha, (4) Talona-
pin, (5) Kiglashka, (6) Chegnakeokisela,
(7) Shikshichela, (8) Wakan, and (9)
Hunskachantozhuha. Culbertson (Smith-
son. Rep. 1850, 141, 1851) mentions the
following bands: Devil's medicine-man
band (Wakan), Half breechclout people
(Chegnakeokisela), Fresh meat necklace
people fTalonapin), Sleepy Kettle band
(Cheoknba), Sore backs (Chankaokhan),
Bad bows (Tinazipeshicha), and Those
that carry. Fire-Heart*s band (Chanta-
apeta's band) is supposed to be a part of
the Hunkpapa.
▲mpapa.— Smet, Miss.de TOregon, 264, 848. Ampa-
pM.— Smet, Letters, 23, 1848. Aukpapu.— Ind. Aff.
Rep.,2»7,r" ~ • "^
Honepapas.—incl.Atl.Kep., 295,1854. Honkpapa.-
Ex. Doc._66, 18th Cong., Ist sess^, 9, 1824. fio^pa-
\1854. Hankpapet.— Parker, Jour., 44, 1840.
Honepapas.— Ind. AfT.Rep., 295,1854. Honkj
Ex. Doc. 56, 18th Cong., Ist seas., 9, 1824. B
pas.— Ind . Aff. Rep. , 471 . 1838. Hunkappas.— Ram-
sey in Ind. Aff. Rep.
Hui"
185:2
jy in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 86, 1850 (misprint),
iunkpapa.— Riggs. Dakota Gram, and Diet., viii,
152. Hunkpapat.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1825), 346,
1826. Honkpa-te-dani.— Ramsey in Ind. AfT. Rep.
1849, 86, 1850 (mistake). Niopapa.— Hare in Spint
of Missions, 586, 1885 (misprint). Oak-pa-pas.—
Hoffman in H. R. Ex. Doc. 36, 33d Cong., 2d sess.,
8, 1855. Oneapapas.— Corliss, Lacotah MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 107, 1874. Onoh-pa-pah.— Culbertaon in
Smithson. Rep. 1850, 141, 1851. Ono-pah-pa.- Don-
aldson in Smithson. Rep. 1885, pt. 2, 57, 1886. Ono-
papa.-CatIin,'N. Am. Inds., i, 223, 1844. Oae-ea-
papa.— Donaldson in Smithson. Rep., 1885, pt. 2,
57, 1886. Onkpahpah.— U. 8. Ind. Treat. (1886), 899,
1873. Onkpapah.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v. 494.
1855. Ouh-papas.- Vaughan in H. R. Doc. 36, 33a
Cong., 2d sess., 6, 1855. Uncpapa.— Terry in Rep.
Sec. War for 1869, pt. 1, 34. Uno Papas.— Ind. Aff.
Rep. 1856, 7, 1857. Unopappas.— Keane in Stan-
ford, Compend., 541, 1878. Unkpapa Dakotas.—
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.,map. 1862.
XFnkpapas.— Warren, Dacota Country, 16, 1855.
Hunkpatina ( * campers at the end of the
circle*). One of the two primary divi-
sions of the Yanktonai Sioux, commonly
known as Lower Yanktonai, from their
former range on lower James r. of e.
South Dakota. The Hunkpatina are
seemingly referred to for the first time,
in whole or in part, by Lewis and Clark,
in 1804, under the name Honetaparteen,
as a division of the Yankton oi the N.
They were on intimate terms with the
Upper Yanktonai, who ranged about the
upper waters of the James. They are
now chiefly on Crow Creek res., S. Dak.,
where they numbered 1,009 in 1905.
In 1866 they were estimated at 2,100.
Some others appear to be attached to
Standing Rock agency, N. Dak. Their
bands, as given by J. 0. Dorsey (15th
~ ^ . B. A. E., 218, 1897), are: Putetemini
^eat-lips), Shungikcheka (Common
clogs), Takhuhayuta fEat-the-scrapings-
of-hides), Sangona (Snot-at-some- white-
object), Ihasha (Bed-lips), Iteghu
(Burnt-face), Pteyuteshni (Eat-no-buffa-
lo-cows).
A]nkepatines.--Smet, Letters. 23, 1843. Hen-ta-pah-
tus.-Pre8cott in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 169,
note, 1852. Hen-tee-pah-tees.— Ibid. Ho in de bor-
to.—Clark (1804) In Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i,
132, 1904. Eomopatela band. -Sen. Ex. Doc. 94, 34th
Cong., Ist sess., 11, 1856. HonepatelaTanotonnait.—
H.R. Ex. Doc. 130, 34th Cong., 1st sess., 7, 1856. Hone-
ta-par-teen. — Lewi? and Clark, Discov., 84, 1806.
Hunk-pate.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 71, 1858. Hunkpatee.—
Cleveland in Our Church Work, Dec. 4, 1876.
Hunkpatidan.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, I, 248,
1851. Huokpatidans.— Riggs, Dak.Gram.andDict.,
xvi, 1852. Hunkplatdn.- Brown in Ind. Aff. Rep.
1859, 92, 1860. lower YanotonaU.— Ind. Aff. Rep.,
371, 1866. Lower Yanotonnais.— Ibid., 1871, 525,
187*2. Lower Yanktonai.— Robinson, letter to Dor-
sey, 1879. Lower Yanktonnais. - Ind . Aff. Rep., 27,
1878. Unc-pah-te.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867, 281, 1868.
Uncpatina.— Alderson in Ind. Aff. Rep., 266, 1874,
Unkepatines.— Smet, Letters, 37, note, 1848.
Hunkawanioha^'withouta mother'). A
band of the Brule Teton Sioux.
Hugku-wanioa.- Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1897. Httnkn-wanitca.- Ibid.
Hunnint. A Clallam village in n. w.
Washington which participated in the
treaty of Point No Point in 1855.— U. S.
Ind. Treat., 800,1873.
Hanskachantozhnha (Pegging tobacco
pouches'). A band of the Hunkpapa
Teton Sioux.
HuQska-daiitozuha.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
221, 1897. Ha<>8ka-tca»tojuha.— Ibid.
Hunting. The pursuit of game may be
divided into two sets of activities, wnich
correspond to military strategy and tac-
tics, the one including the whole series
of traps, the other hunting weapons and
processes. Beginning with the latter, the
following 9 classes embrace all the hunt-
ing activities of the American Indians:
(1) Taking animals with the hand
without the aid of apparatus. Examples
of this are picking up marine animals on
the beach to eat on the spot, robbing
birds* nests, and seizing birds on their
roosts on dark nights. . Such unskilled
taking developed the utmost cunning,
agility, and stren^h for pursuing, seiz-
ing, climbing, diving, stealing upon, and
deceiving, and the same qualities were»
useful also in the pursuit with weapons.
The climax of this first class was the com-
munal game drive, in which a whole band
or tribe would surround a herd of animals
and coax or force them into a gorge, a
corral, or natural cul-de-sac.
(2) Gathering with devices. To this
class of activities belong substitutes for
the fingers or palms, such as rakes for
drawing or piling up sea food; a sharp
stick for getting worms by forcing them
out of the ground; nets and scoops for
taking animals from the water (see FUth-
ing, Nets); also dulls, reatas, and bolasfor
reaching out and grasping. This class
reached its climax in tne partnership or
communal net, used by the Eskimo and
other tribes for taking seal and also small
fish.
(3) The employment of apparatus for
BULL. 30]
HUNTLATIN — HUPA
581
striking, bruising, or breaking bones, in-
clading stones held in the hands, clubs
with ^ps, and hard objects at the end
of a line or handle, like a slung shot.
The N. Pacific tribes took great pains
with their clubs, carving on them their
symbolism.
(4) Slashing or stabbing with edged
weapons. The Indians had little to do
with metals and were given almost alto-
gether to the use of stone, bone, reeds,
and wood for stabbing and slashing.
Both chipped and ground weapons were
used, either without a handle, with a grip,
or at the end of a shaft. Every Eskimo
had a quiver of daggers for use at close
quarters, and so had the Indian his side
arms. Edged weapons, however, were
not so common as the weapons of the
next class.
(5) Hunting with piercing weapons,
the most common of all Indian methods
of taking animals. The implements in-
clude the pointed stick or stone, the lance,
the spear, the harpoon, and the arrow
(q. V. ). Weapons of this class were held
in the hand, hurleil from the hand, shot
from a bow or a blowgun, or slung from
the throwing stick. Each of the varie-
ties went through a multitude of transfor-
mations, depending on game, materials
at hand, the skill of the maker, etc.
(6) The use of traps, pits, and snares
(see Traps). The Tenankutchin of
Alaska capture deer, moose, and caribou
b); means of a brush fence, extended many
miles, in which at intervals snares are
set; and the same custom was practised
by many other tribes in hunting the
largjer game. The Plains tribes and the
ancient Pueblos captured deer, antelo|>e,
and wolves by means of pitfalls.
(7 J Capturing game by means of dogs
or other hunting animals. Indian tribes,
with few exceptions, had no hunting dogs
regularly trained to pursue game, but the
common dog was very eflScient. Fowls
of the air;' marine animals, and especially
carnivorous animals, such as the coyote,
by their noises and movements gave the
cue which aided the cunning and obser-
vant hunter to identify, locate, and follow
his game. (See Domestication, )
(8) Hunting by means of fire and
smoke. In America, as throughout the
world, as soon as men came into posses-
sion of fire the conquest of the animal
kingdom was practically assured. The
Indians used smoke to drive animals out
of hiding, torches to dazzle the eyes of
deer and to attract fish and birds to their
canoes, and firebrands and prairie fires
for game drives.
(9^ Taking animals by means of drugs.
The nark of walnut root served to asphyxi-
ate fish in fresh-water pools in the South-
ern states; in other sections soap root
and buckeyes Avere used.
In connection with hunting processes
there were accessory activities in which
the Indian had to be versed. There were
foods to eat and foods tabued, clothing
and masks to wear, shelters and hiding
E laces to provide, and not only must the
unter be familiar with calls, imitations,
decoys, whistles, and the like, but ac-
quainted with the appropriate hunting
songs, ceremonies, and fetishes, and with
formulas for every act in the process, the
time for the chase of the various animals,
the. laws for the division of game, and the
clan names connecte<l with hunting. Be-
sides, there were numberless employments
and conveniences associate<l therewith.
In order to use the harpoon it was neces-
sary to have a canoe, and with every
method of hunting were connected other
employments which taxed the ingenuity
of the sava^ mind. There were also
certain activities which were the result of
hunting. Questions presented themselves
regarding transportation, receptacles, the
discrimination of useful species, and the
construction of fences. A slight knowl-
edge of anatomy was necessary in order
to know where to strike and how to cut
up game. All these gave excellent train-
ing in perception, skill, and cooperative
effort. See Buffalo^ Fishing, Food, Fur
trade, Horse, etc., and the various sub-
jects above referred to.
Consult Alien, Rep. on Alaska, 138,
1886; Boas, Central Eskimo, 6th Rep. B.
A. E., 1888; Catlin, N. A. Inds., i-ii, 1844;
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvii,
pt. 3, 1905; Hoffman, Menomini Inds.,
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Mason, various
articles in Rep. Smithson. Inst, and Nat.
Mus.; Maximilian, Travels, 1849; Mur-
doch, Ethnological Results of the Point
Barrow Exped., 9th Rep. B. A. E., 1892;
Nelson, Eskimo about Bering Strait, 18th
Rep. B. A. E., 1899; Schoolcraft, Indian
Tribes, i-vi, 1861-57. (o. t. m.)
Huntlatin. A division of the Tenan-
kutchin on Tanana r., Alaska.
Hautiatin.— Dawson (after Allen) in Rep. Geol.
Surv. Can., 203b, 1887. Huntlatiii.— Allen, Rep.
on Alaska, 137, 1887.
Htinxapa. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Barbara, Cal.
Huizapa.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 459. 1874.
Hnnxapa.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24. 186S.
Hnocom. A former Costanoan villa^
near Santa Cruz mission, Cal. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860. '
Hupa. An Athapascan tribe formerly
occupying the valley of Trinity r., Cal.,
from South fork to its junction with
the Klamath, including Hupa valley.
They were first mentioned by Gibbs m
1852; a military post was established in
their territory in 1855 and maintained
582
HUPA
[b. a. e.
until 1892; and a reservation 12 m. square,
including nearl} all the Hupa habitat, was
set apart in Aug., 1864. The population
in 1888 was given as 650; in 1900, 430;
in 1905, 412. They are at present self-
supporting, depending on agriculture and
^IjPA WOMAn
{oOODARCtl
stock raising. When they lirst came in
contact with the whites, in 1850, the Hupa
were all under the control of a chief
called Ahrookoos by the Yurok (McKee
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Con^., spec, sess.,
161, 1853), whose authority is said to have
extended to other peoples southward
along Trinity r. The position of chief de-
pended on the possession of wealth, which
usually remained in the family, caus-
ing the chieftainship to descend from
father to son. In feasts and dances a
division of the Hupa into two parts is
manifest, but this division Sj^ms to have
no validity outside of religious matters.
The tribe occupied the following perma-
nent villages: Cheindekhotding, Djish-
tangading, Haslinding, Honsadin^, How-
ungkut, Kinchuwhikut, Medilding,
Miskut, Takimilding, Tlelding, Toltsas-
ding, and Tsewenalding. Powers (Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., in, 73, 1877) gave Chail-
kutkaituh, Wissomanchuh, and Misketoi-
itok, which have not been identified with
any of the foregoing; Gibbs (MS. on
Klamath river, B. A. E., 1852), on infor-
mation furnished by the Yurok, gave
Wangullewutlekauii, Wangullewatl,
Sehachpeya, and (Schoolcraft, Ind.Tribes,
III, 139, 1853)Tashuanta,Sokeakeit(Sok-
chit), and Meyemma.
The houses of the Hupa were built of
cedar slabs set on end, the walls being 4 ft
high on the sides and rising to more than
6 ft at the ends to accommSdate the slope
of the roof, inclosing a place about 20 ft
square, the central part of which was ex-
cavated to form the principal chamber,
which was about 12 ft square and 5 ft
deep. The entrance was a hole 18 or 20
in. in diameter and about a foot above
the ground. This Avas the storehouse for
the family goods and the sleeping place
of the women. The men occupied sweat
houses at night. The Hupa depended
for food on the deer and elk of the moun-
tains, the salmon and lamprey of the
HUPA MAN. (gODDARd)
river, and the acorns and other vegetal
foods growing plentifully about them.
They are noted for the beautiful twined
baskets produced by the women and
the fine pipes and implements executed
by the men. The yew bows they used
BULL. 30]
HUPA
583
to make, only about 3 ft long, Htrength-
ened with sinew fastened to the back
with stui^geon glue, were effective up to
75 yds. and could inflict a nerious wound
at 100 yds. Their arrows, made of sy-
rin^ shoots wound with sinew, into
which foreshaftsof juneberry woo<l were
inserted, feathered with three split hawk
feathers and pointed with sharp heads
of obsidian, nint, bone, or iron, some-
times passed entirely through a deer.
'Rie hunter, disguised in the skin of the
deer or elk, the odor of his body removed
by ablution and smoking with green fir
boughs, simulated so perfectly the move-
ments of the animal in order to get with-
in bowshot that a panther sometimes
pounced upon his l>ack, but withdrew
when he felt the sharp pinn that, for the
very purpose of wardmg off such an at-
tack, were thrust through the man's hair
gathered in a bunch at the back of the
neck. The Hupa took deer also with
snares of a strong rope made from the
fiber of the iris, or chased them into the
water with dogs and pursued them in
canoes. Meat was roasted before the fire
or on the coals or incased in the stomach
and buried in the ashes until cooked, or
was boiled in water-tight baskets bv drop-
ping in hot stones. Meat and fish were
preserved bjj smoking. Salmon were
caught in latticed weirs stretched across
the river or in seines or poundnets, or
were speared with barbs that detached
but were made fast to the pole by lines.
Dried acorns wereground into flour, leach-
ed in a pit to extract the bitter taste, and
boiled into a mush.
The men wore ordinarily a breechclout
of deerskin or of skins of small animals
joined together, and leggings of painted
deerskin with the seam m front hidden
by a fringe that hung from the top, which
was turned down at the knee. Moccasins
of deerskin with soles of elk hide were
sometimes worn. The dance robes of
the men were made of two deerskins sewn
together along one side, the necks meet-
ing over the left shoulder and the tails
nearly touching the ground. Panther
skins were sometimes used. The hair
was tied into two clubs, one hanging down
on each side of the head, or into one
which hung behind. Bands of deer-
skin, sometimes ornamented with wood-
peckers' crests, were worn about the head
m dances, and occasionally feathers or
feathered darts were stuck in the hair.
The nose was not pierced, but in the ears
were often worn dentalium shells with
tassels of woodpeckers' feathers. A quiver
of handsome skin filled with arrows was
a part of gala dress, and one of plain
buckskin or a skin pouch or sack oi net-
ting was carried as a pocket for small
articles. Women wore a skirt of deer-
skin reaching to the knees, with a long,
thick fringe hanging below and a short
fringe at the waist. When soile<l it was
washed with the soap plant. At the
opening of the skirt in front an apron
wa»s worn underneath. The skirts worn
in dances were ornamented with strings
of shell beads, pieces of abalone shell,
and flakes of obsidian fastened to the
upper and of shells of pine nuts inserted
at intervals in the lower fringe. The
apron for common wear was made of long
strands of pine-nut shells and braided
leaves attached to a belt. The dance
aprons had strands of shells and pendants
cut from abalone shells. Small dentalium
and olivella shells, pine-nut shells, and
small black fruits were strung for neck-
laces. A robe of deerskin or of wildcat fur
was worn with the hair next to the l)ody
as a protection against the cold and in
rainy weather with the hair side out. The
head covering was a cap of fine basket
work, which protected the forehead from
the carrying strap whereby burdens and
baby baskets were borne. Women, ex-
cept widows, wore their hair long and
tied in queues that hung down in front
of the ears, and were ornamented with
strips of mink skin, sometimes covered
witn woodpeckers' crests, and shell pen-
dants, and sometimes perfumed with
stems of yerba buena. From their ears
hung pendants of abalone shell attacheil
to twine. All adult women were tattooed
with vertical black marks on the chin
and sometimes curved marks were added
at the corners of the mouth.
The imagination of the Hupa has peo-
pled the regions e., w., s., and above with
mortals known as Kihunai. The under-
world is the abode of the dead. Their
creator or culture hero, Yimantuwingyai,
dwells with Kihunai across the ocean to-
ward the N . A sal mon feast is held by the
southern divison in the spring ancl an
acorn feast by the northern division in
the fall. They formerly celebrate<l three
dances each year: the spring dance, the
white-deerskin dance, and the jumping
dance. They have a large and varied
folklore and many very interesting med-
icine formulas. See Goddard, Life and
Culture of the Hupa, Univ. Cal. Pub. , 1903;
Hupa Texts, ibid., 1904. (p. e. g. )
Oha'parahihu.— A. L. Kroeber. infn, 1903 (Shasta
name). Hfch'hu.— Kroeber, infn, 1903 (Chima-
riko name). . Hoopa.— Gat»»chet in Beach, Ind.
Miscel., 440, 1877. Hoo-pah.— Gibbs in Soh<M>UTaft,
Ind. Tribes, in, 139, 1853. Ho-pah.— (iibbs. MS.,
B. A. E., 1852. Hupa.— Powers in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol.,111. 73, 1877. Hupd.— (Jatschet in Beach.
Ind. Mi.scel., 440, 1877. Kiihakevira.— Kroeber,
infn, 1903(Karok name). HabilUe.— Gibbs. Na-
biltse MS. vocab.. B. A. E., 1857 (trans, 'man').
Nabil-Ue.-^iibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ni,
423, 1853. Nabittse.— Latham in J*roc. Philol.
Soc. Lond., VI, 84. 1854. Katano.— Ray in Am.
Nat., 832, 1886. Noh-tin-<Mih.— Azpell. MS., B. A. £.
(own name). Num-ee-muaa.— Ibid. (Ynrok name).
Trinity Indians.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc.
584
HURON
[b. a. b.
4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 161, 1853. Up-pa.~Hazen
quoted by Gibbs, Nabiltse MS. vocab., B. A. E.
Huron (lexically from French hurS,
* bristly,' 'bristled,' from hure^ * rough
hair ' (of the head ) , head of man or beait,
wild boar's head; old French, 'muzzle of
the wolf, lion,* etc., *the scalp,' *a wig';
Norman French, hurSy * rugged ' ; Rou-
manian, hurief * rough earth,' and the
suffix -OHj expressive of depreciation and
employed to form nouns referring to per-
sons). The name Huron^ frequently with
an added epithet, like vilain, * base,' was
in use in France as early as 1358 ( La Curne
deSainte-Palaye in Diet. Hist, de 1* Ancien
Lanugo Fran^oise, 1880) as a name ex-
pressive of contumely, contempt, and in-
sult, signifying approximately an un-
kempt person, knave, ruffian, lout, wretch.
The peasants who rebelled against the
nobility during the captivity of King John
in England in 1358 were called both
JFurmis and Jacques or Jacques hons horn-
mes^ the latter signifying approximately
* simpleton Jacks,' and so the term Jac-
querie was applied to this revolt of the
peasants. But Father Lai ement ( Jes. Rel.
for 1639, 51, 1858), in attempting to give
the origin of the name Huron, says that
about 40 years previous to his time,
i. e., about 1600, when these people first
reached the French trading posts on the
St Lawrence, a French soldier or sailor,
seeing some of these barbarians wearing
their naircropped and roached, gave them
the name Hurons, their heads suggesting
those of wild boars. Lalement declares
that while what he had advanced con-
cerning the origin of the name was the
most authentic, ** others attribute it to
some other though similar origm." But
it certainly does not appear that the re-
bellious French peasants in 1358, men-
tioned above, were called Hurons because
they had a similar or an identical manner
of wearing the hair; for, as has been
stated, the name had, long previous to
the arrival of the French in America, a
well-known derogatory signification m
France. So it is quite prolMible that the
name was applied to the Indians in the
' sense of *an unkempt person,* *a bristly
savage,' *a wretch or lout,' *a ruffian.'
A contederation of 4 highly organized
Iroquoian tribes with several small de-
pendent communities, which, when first
known in 1615, occupied a limited terri-
tory, sometimes called Huronia, around
L. Simcoe and s. and e. of Georgian bay,
Ontario. According to the Jesuit Rela-
tion for 1639 the names of these tribes,
which were independent in local affairs
only, were the Attignaouantan ( Bear peo-
ple), the Attigneenongnahac (Cord peo-
ple), the Arendahronon (Rock people),
and the Tohontaenrat (Atahonta^enrat or
Tohonta*enrat, White-eared or Deer peo-
ple). Two of the dependent peoples were
the Bowl people and the Ataronchronon.
Later, to escape destruction by the Iro-
quois, the Wenrohronon, an Iroquoian
tribe, in 1639, and the Atontrataronnon, an
Algonquian people, inl644,soaghta8ylum
with the Huron confederation. In the
Huron tongue the common and ^n-
eral name of this confederation of tnbes
and dependent peoples was Wendat (Sen-
dat), a designation of doubtful analysis
and si^ification, the most obvious mean-
ing being * the islanders' or * dwellers on
a peninsula. ' According to a definite tra-
dition recorded in the Jesuit Relation for
1639, the era of the formation of this con-
federation was at that period compara-
tively recent, at least in so far as the date
of membership of the last two tribes men-
tioned therein is concerned. According
to the same authority the Rock people
were adopted about 60 years and the
Deer people about 30 years (traditional
time) previous to 1639, thus carrying
back to about 1590 the date of the immi-
gration of the Rock people into the Huron
country. The first two principal tribes
in 1639, re^rding themselves as the orig-
inal inhabitants of the land, claimed that
they knew with certainty the dwelling
places and village sites of their ancestors
in the country for a period exceeding 200
years. Having received and adopted the
other two into their country and state,
they were the more important. . Officially
and in their councils they addressed
each other by the formal political terms
* brother' and * sister'; they were also
the more populous, having incorporated
many persons, families, clans, and peo-
ples, who, preserving the name and mem-
ory of their own founders, lived amonff
the tribes which adopte<l them as small
dependent communities, maintaining the
general name and having the community
of certain local rights, and enjoyed the
powerful protection and shared with it
the community of certain other rights,
interests, and obligations of the great
Wendat commonwealth.
The provenience and the course of mi-
gration of the Rock and Deer tribes to
the Huron country appear to furnish a
reason for the prevalent but erroneous
belief that all the Iroquoian tribes came
into this continent from the valley of the
lower St Lawrence. There is presump-
tive evidence that the Rock and the Deer
tribes came into Huronia from the middle
and upper St Lawrence valley, and they
appear to have been expellea therefrom,
by the Iroquois, hence the expulsion of
the Rock and the Deer people from lower
St Lawrence valley has been mistaken
for the migration oi the entire stock from
that region.
In his voyages to the St Lawrence in
1534-43, Jacques Cartier found on the
BULL. 30]
HUBON
585
present sites of Quebec and Montreal, and
along both banks of this river above the
Saguenay on the n. and above Gasp^
peninsula on the s. bank, tribes speaking
Iroquoian tongues, for there were at
least two dialects, a fact well established
by the vocabularies which Cartier re-
corded. Lexical comparison with known
Iroquoian dialects indicates that those
spoken on the St Lawrence at that early
date were Huron or Wendat. Cartier
further learned that these St Lawrence
tribes were in fierce combat with peoples
dwelling southward from them, and his
hosts complained bitterly of the cruel at-
tacks maae on them by their southern
foes, whom they called Toudamani (Tru-
damans or Trudamani) and Agouionda
{Onkhiion'thA' is an Onondaga form), the
latter signifying Hhose who attack us.'
Althougn he may have recorded the na-
tive names as nearly phonetically as he
was able, yet the former is not a distant
approach to the well-known Tsonnon-
towanen of the early French writers, a
name which Champlain printed Chouon-
touarouon (probably written Chonon-
touarofion), the name of the Seneca,
which was sometimes extended to in-
clude the Cayuga and Onondaga as a geo-
Ohical group. Lescarbot, failing to
in Canada in his time the tongues
recorded by Cartier, concluded that *'the
change of language in Canada'' was due
**to a destruction of people," and in 1603
he declared (Nova Francia, 170, 1609):
"For It is some 8 years since the Iro-
quois did assemble themselves to the
number of 8,000 men, and discomfited
all their enemies, whom they surprised
in their enclosures;'* and (p. 290) *'by
such surprises the Iroquois, being in
number 8,000 men, have heretofore ex-
terminated the Al^umequins, them of
Hochelaga, and others bordering upon
the great river." So it is probable that
the southern foes of the tribes along
the St Lawrence in Cartier's time were
the Iroquois tribes anterior to the for-
mation of their historical league, for he
was also informed that these Agouionda
•*doe continually warre one a^inst an-
other"—-a condition of affairs which'
ceased with the formation of the league.
Between the time of the last voyage of
Cartier to the St Lawrence, in 1543, and
the arrival of Champlain on this river in
1603, nothing definite is known of these
tribes and their wars. Champlain found
the dwelling places of the tnbes discov-
ered by CfiStier on the St Lawrence de-
serted and the region traversed only
rarely by war parties from extralimital
Algonquian tribes which dwelt on the
borders of the former territory of the ex-
pelled Iroquoian tribes. Against the
aforesaid Iroquoian tribes the Iroquois
were still waging relentless warfare,
which Champlain learned in 1622 dad
then lasted more than 50 years.
Such was the origin of the confedera-
tion of tribes strictly called Uurons by
the French and Wendat (Sendat) in their
own tongue. But the name Hurons was
applied m a general way t6 the Tionon-
tati, or Tobacco tribe, under the form
** Huron du P^tun," and also, although
rarely, to the Attiwendaronk in* the form
"Huron de la Nation Neutre." After
the destruction of the Huron or Wendat
confederation and the more or less
thorough dispersal of the several tribes
composing it, the people who, as political
units, were originally called Huron and
Wendat, ceased to exist. The Tionontati,
or Tobacco tribe, with the few Huron
fugitives, receive^l the name " Huron du
P^tun" from the French, but they be-
came known to the English as Wendat,
corrupted to Yendat, Guyandotte, and
finally to Wyandot. The Jesuit Relation
for 1667 says: "The Tionnontateheron-
nons of to-day are the same people who
heretofore were called the Hurons de la
nation du p^tun." These were the so-
called Tobacco nation, and not the Wen-
dat tribes of the Huron confederation.
So the name Huron was employed only
after these Laurentian tniyes became set-
tled in the region around L. Simcoe and
Georgian bay. Champlain and his
French contemporaries, after becoming
acquainted with the Iroquois tribes of
New York, called the Hurons les hons
Iroquois, *the good Iroquois,' to dis-
tinguish them from the hostile Iroquois
tribes. The Algonquian allies of the
French called the Hurons and the Iro-
quois tribes Nadowek, *adders,' and IrVf-
khowek,.^ rea\ serpents,* hence, * bitter ene-
mies.' The singular /n^'itoMn, with the
French suffix -ow, has become the fa-
miliar "Iroquois." The term AWowe in
various forms (e. g., Nottaway) was ap-
plied by the Algonquian tribes generally
to all alien and hostile peoples. Cham-
plain also called the Hurons Ochateguin
and CharioouoiSf from the names of
prominent chiefs. The Delawares called
them Talamatariy while the peoples of thie
"Neutral Nation" and or the Huron
tribes applied to each other the term
Attiwendaronk, literally, 'their speech is
awry,' but freely, *they are stammerers,'
referring facetiously to the dialectic dif-
ference between the tongues of the two
peoples.
In 1615 Champlain found all the tribes
which he later called Hurons, with the
exception of the Wenrohronon and the
Atontrataronon, dwelling in Huronia
and waging war against the Iroquois
tribes in New York. When Cartier ex-
plored the St Lawrence valley, in 1534-43,
586
HURON
[b. a. e.
Iroquoian tribes occupied the n. bank of
the river indefinitely northward and
from Saguenay r. eastward to Georgian
bay, with nointrusivealien bands (despite
the subsequent but doubtful claim of the
Onontchataronon to a former possession
of the island. of Montreal), and also thfe
8. watershed from the Bay of Gasp^ w. to
the contiguous territory of the Iroquois
confederation on the line of the e. water-
shed of L. Cham plain.
The known names of towns of these
J^urentian Iroquois are Araste, Hagon-
chenda, Hochelaga, Hochelay, Satadin,
Stadacona, Starnatan, Tailla, Teguenon-
dahi, and Tutonaguy. But Cartier, in
speaking of the people of Hochelaga,
remarks: ** Notwithstanding, the said
Canadians are subject to them with eight
or nine other peoples who are on the said
river/* All these towns and villages
were abandoned previous to the arrival
of Champlain on the St Lawrence in 1603.
Of the towns of the Hurons, Sagard says:
** There are about 20 or 25 towns and
villages, of which some are not at all
shut, nor closed [palisaded], and others
are fortified with long pieces of timber in
triple ranks, interlacea one with another
to the height of a long pike [16 ft], and
reenforcedoii the inside with broad, coarse
strips of bark, 8 or 9 ft in height; below
there are large trees, with their branches
lopped off, laid' lengthwise on very short
trunks of trees, forked at one end, to
keep them in place; then above these
stakes and bulwarks there are galleries or
platforms, called ondaqaa ( *box ' ), which
are furnished with stones to be hurled
against an enemy in time of war, and
with water to extinguish any fire which
might be kindled against them. Persons
ascend to these by means of ladders quite
poorly made and diflScult, which are
made of long pieces of timber wrought by
many hatchet strokes to hold the foot
firm in ascending.*' Champlain says that
these palisades were 35 ft in height. In
accord with the latter authority, Sagard
says that these towns were in a measure
permanent, and were removed to new
sites only when they became too distant
from fuel and when their fields, for lack
of manuring, became worn out, which
occurred every 10, 20, 30, or 40' years,
more or less, according to the situation of
the country, the richness of the soil, and
the distance of the forest, in the middle
of which they always built their towns
and villages. Champlain says the Hu-
rons planted large Quantities of several
kinds of corn, which grew finely,
squashes, tobacco, many varieties of
beans, and sunflowers, and that from the
seeds of the last they extracted an oil
with which they anointed their heads
and employed for various other purposes.
The government of these tribes was
vested by law in a definite number of
executive officers, called ** chiefs'* (q. v.)
in English, who were chosen by the suf-
frage of the child-bearing women and
organized by law or council decree into
councils for legislative and judicial pur-
poses. There were five units in the
social and political organization of these
tribes, tiamely, the family, clan, phratry,
tribe, and confederation, which severally
expressed their will through councils co-
ordinate with their several jurisdictions
and which made necessary various grades
of chiefs in civil affairs. In these com-
munities the civil affairs of government
were entirely differentiated from the
military, the former being exercised by
civil officers, the latter by military offi-
cers. It sometimes happened that the
same person performed the one or the
other kind of function, but to do so he
must temporarily resign his civil au-
thority should it "be incumbent on him to
engage in military affairs, and when this
emergency was past he would resume his
civil function or authority.
In almost every family one or more
chiefship titles, known by particular
names, were hereditary, and there might
even be two or three different grades of
chiefs therein. But the candidate for the
incumbency of any one of these dignities
was chosen only by the suffrage of the
mothers among the women of his family.
The selection of the candidate thus made
was then submitted for confirmation to
the clan council, then to the tribal coun-
cil, and lastly to the great federal council
composed of the accredited delegates from
the various allied tribes.
The tribes composing the Hurons rec-
ognized and enforced, among others, the
rights of ownership and inheritance of
property and dignities, of liberty and se-
curity of person, in names, of marriage,
in personal adornment, of hunting and
fishing in specified territory, of prece-
dence in migration and encampment and
in the council room, and rights of religion
and of the blood feud. They regarded
, theft, adultery, maiming, sorcery with
evil intent, treason, and the murder of a
kinsman or a co-tribesman as crimes
which consisted solely in the violation of
the rights of a kinsman bv blood or
adoption, for the alien had no rights
which Indian justice and equity recog-
nized, unless by treaty or solemn compact
If an assassination were committed or
a solemnly sworn peace with another
people violated by the caprice of an in-
dividual, it was not the rule to punish
directly the guilty person, for this would
have been to assume over him a juris-
diction which no one would think of
claiming; on the contrary, presents de-
BULL. 30]
HURON
587
signed to ** cover the death ** or to restore
peace were offered to the aggrieved party
by the offender and his kindred. The
greatest punishment that could be in-
flicted on a guiltv person by his kindred
was to refuse to defend him, thus placing
him outside the rights of the blood feud
and allowing those whom he had offend-
ed the liberty to take vengeance on him,
but at their own risk and peril.
The religion of these tribes consisted in
the worship of all material objects, the
elements and bodies of nature, and many
creatures of a teeming fancy, which in
their view directly or remotely affected
or controlled their well-being. These
objects of their faith and worship were
regarded as man-beings or anthropic per-
sons possessed of life, volition, andorenda
(q. V.) or magic power of different kind
and degree peculiar to each. In this reli-
gion ethics or morals as such received
only a secondary, if any, consideration.
The status and interrelations of the per-
sons of their pantheon one to another
were fixed and governed by rules and
customs assumed to be similar to those
of the social and the political organization
of the people, and so there was, therefore,
at least among the principal gods, a kin-
ship system patterned after that of the
people themselves. They expressed their
public religious worship in elaborate cere-
monies performed at stated annual festi-
vals, lasting from a day to fifteen days,
and governed by the cnange of seasons.
Besides the stated gatherings there were
many minor meetings, in all of which
there were dancing and thanksgiving for
the blessings of life. They believed in a
life hereafter, which was but a reflex of
the present life, but their ideas regarding
it were not very definite. The bodies of
the dead were wrapped in furs, neatly
covered with flexible bark, and then
{>laced on a platform resting on four pil-
ars, which was then entirely covered
with bark; or the body, after being pre-
pared for burial, was placed in a grave
and over it were laid small pieces of tim-
ber, covered with strong pieces of bark
and then with earth. Over the grave a
cabin was usually erected. At the great
feast of the dead, which occurred at in-
tervals of 8 or 10 j^ears, the bodies of
those who had died in the interim, from
all the villages participating in the feast,
were brought toother and buried in a
common grave with elaborate and solemn
public ceremonies.
In 1615, when the Hurons were first
visited by the French under Champlain,
he estimated from the statements of the
Indians themselves that they numbered
30,000, distributed in 18 towns and vil-
lages, of which 8 were palisaded; but in
a subsequent edition of his work Cham-
plain reduces this estimate to 20,000. A
little later Sagard estimated their pop-
ulation at 30,000, while Brebeuf gave
their number as 35,000. But these fig-
ures are evidently only guesses and per-
haps much above rather than below the
actual population, which, in 1648, was
probably not far from 20,000.
When the French established trading
posts on the St Lawrence at Three Rivers
and elsewhere, the Hurons and neighbor-
ing tribes made annual trips down Ottawa
r. or down the Trent to these posts for
the purpose of trading both with the
Europeans and with the Montagnais of
the lower St Lawrence who came up to
meet them. The chief place of trade at
this time was, according to Sagard (His-
toire, 1, 170, 1866), in the harbor of Cape
Victory, in L. St Peter of St Lawrence r.,
al)out50 miles below Montreal, just above
the outlet of the lake, where, on Sagard's
arrival, there were ** already lodged a
great number of savages of various na-
tions for the trade of beavers with the
French. The Indians who were not sec-
tarians in religion invited the mission-
aries into their country. In 1615 the
Recollect fathers accepted the invitation,
and Father Le Caron spent the year 1615-
16 in Huronia, and was again there in
1623-24. Father Poulain was among the
Hurons in 1622, Father Viel from 1623
to 1625, and Father De la Roche Daillion
in 1626-28. The labors t)f the Jesuits
began with the advent of Father Bi-ebeuf
in Huronia in 1626, but their missions
ended in 1650 with the destruction of the
Huron commonwealth by the Iroquois.
In all, 4 Recollect and 25 Jesuit fathers
had labored in the Huron mission during
its existence, which at its prime was the
most important in the French dominions
in North America. As the first historian
of the mission, Fr. Sagard, though not a
priest, deserves honorable mention.
From the Jesuit Relation for 1640 it is
learned that the Hurons had had cruel
wars with the Tionontati, but that at the
date given they had recently made peace,
renewed their former friendship, and en-
tered into an alliance against their com-
mon enemies. Sagard is authority for
the statement that the Hurons were in
the habit of sending large war parties to
ravage the country of the Iroquois. The
well-known hostility and intermittent
warfare between the Iroauois and the
Huron tribes date from prehistoric times,
so that the invasion and destruction of
the Huron country and confederation in
1648--50 by the Iroquois were not a sud-
den, unprovoked attack, but the final
blow in a struggle which was already in
progress when the French under Cartier
m 1535 first explored the St Lawrence.
The acquirement of firearms by the Iro-
588
HURON
[b. a. e.
quois from the Dutch was an important
factor in their subsequent successes. By
1643 they had obtained about 400 guns,
while, on the other hand, as late as the
final invasion of their country the Hurons
had but very few guns, a lack that was
the direct cause of their feeble resistance
and the final conquest by the Iroquois
confederation of half of the country e. of
the Mississippi and n. of the Ohio. In
July, 1648, having perfected their plans
for the final struggle for supremacy with
the Hurons, the Iroquois b^n open hos-
tility by sacking two or three frontier
towns and Teanaustaya^ (St Joseph), the
major portion of the invading warriors
wintering in the Huron country unknown
to the Hurons; and in March, 1649, these
Iroquois warriors destroyed Taenhaten-
taron (St Ignace) and St* Louis, and car-
ried into captivity hundreds of Hurons.
These disasters completely demoralized
and disorganized the Huron tribes, for
the greater portion of their people were
kill^ or led into captivity among the
several Iroquoian tribes, or perished
from hunger and exposure in their pre-
cipitate flight in all directions, while of
the remainder some escaped to the Neu-
tral Nation, or "Hurons de la Nation
Neutre," some to the Tobacco or Tionon-
tati tribe, some to the Erie, and others
to the French settlements near Quebec
on the island of Orleans. The Tohonta-
enrat, forming the populous town of
Scanonaenrat, and a portion of the Aren-
dahronon of the town of St-Jean-Bap-
tiste surrendered to the Seneca and were
adopted by them with the privilege of
occupying a village by themselves, which
was named Gandougarae (St Michel).
As soon as the Iroquois learned of the
Huron colony on Orleans id., they at
once sought to persuade these Hurons to
migrate to their country. Of these the
Bear people, together with the Bowl
band and the Rock people, having in an
evil day promised to remove thither,
were finally, in 1656, compelled to choose
between fighting and migrating to the
Iroquois country. They chose the latter
course, the Bear people going to the Mo-
hawk and the Rock people to the Onon-
daga. The Cord people alone had the
courage to remain with the French.
The adopted inhabitants of the new
town of St Michel (Gandougarae) were
mostly Christian Hurons who preserved
their faith under adverse conditions, as
did a large number of other Huron cap-
tives who were adopted into other Iro-
quois tribes. In 1653 Father Le Moine
found more than 1,(XX) Christian Hurons
among the Onondaga. The number of
Hurons then among the Mohawk, Oneida,
and Cayuga is not known.
Among the most unfortunate of the
Huron fugitives were those who sought
asylum among the Erie, where their pres-
ence excited the jealousy and perhaps the
fear of their neighbors, the Iroquois, with
whom the Erie did not fraternize. It is
also claimed that the Huron fugitives
strove to foment war between their pro-
tectors and the Iroquois, with the result
that notwithstanding the reputed 4,(XX)
warriors of the Erie and their skill in the
use of the bow and arrow (permitting
them dextrously to shoot 8 or^ arrows
"while the enemy could fire an arquebus
but once), the Erie and the unfortunate
Huron fugitives were entirely defeated in
1653|-56 and dispersed or earned away into
captivity. But most pathetic and cruel
was the fate of those unfortunate Hurons
who, trusting in the long-standing neu-
trality of the Neutral Nation which the
Iroouois had not theretofore violated, fled
to that tribe, only to be held, with the
other portion of the Huron people still
remaining in their country, into harsh
captivity (Jes. Rel. 1659-60).
A portion of the defeated Hurons es-
caped to the Tionontati or ** Huron du
P^tun," then dwelling directly westward
. from them. But in 1649, when the Iro-
quois had sacked one of the Tionontati
palisaded towns, the remainder of the
tribe, in company with the refugee Hu-
rons, sought an asylum on the Island of
St Joseph, the present Charity or Chris-
tian id. , in Georgian bay. It is this group
of refugees who became the Wyandots
of later history. Finding that this place
did not secure them from the Iroquois,
tho majority fled to Michilimakinac,
Mich., near which place they found fer-
tile lands, good hunting, and abundant
fishing. But even here the Iroquois
would not permit them to rest, so they
retreated farther westward to Manitoulin
id., called Ekaentoton by the Hurons.
Thence they were driven to He Huronne
(Potawatomi id., because formerly occu-
pied by that tribe), at the entrance to
Green bay, Wis., where the Ottawa and
their allies from Saginaw bay and Thun-
der bay, Manitoulin, and Michilimaki-
nac, sought shelter with them. From
this point the fugitive Hurons, with some
of the Ottawa and their allies, moved
farther westward 7 or 8 leagues to the
Potawatomi, while most of the Ottawa
went into what is now Wisconsin and
N. w. Michi^n among the Winnebago and
the Menominee. Here, in 1657, in the
Potawatomi country, the Hurons, num-
bering about 5(X) persons, erected a stout
palisade. The Potawatomi received the
fugitives the more readily since they
themselves spoke a language cognate
with that of the Ottawa and also were
animated by a bitter hatred of the Iro-
quois who had in former times driven
BULL. 80]
HURON
589
them from their native country, the n.
peninsula of Michigan. This first flight
of the Potawatomi must have taken place
anterior to the visit by Nicollet in 1634.
Having murdered a party of Iroquois
scouts through a plot devised by their
chief Anahotaha, and fearing the ven-
geance of the Iroquois, the Hurons re-
mained here only a few months longer.
Some migrated to their compatriots on
Orleans id., near Quelle, and the others,
in 1659-60, fled farther w. to the Illinois
country, on the Mississippi, where they
were well received. Anahotaha was killed
in 1659 in a fight at the Long Sault of Otta-
wa r., above Montreal, in which a partv
of 17 French militia under Sieur Dolard,
6 Al^nkin under Mitameg, and 40 Huron
warriors under Anahotaha (the last being
the flower of the Huron colony then re-
maining on Orleans id.) were surrounded
by 700 Iroquois and all killed with the
exception of 5 Frenchmen and 4 Hurons,
who were captured. It was not long be-
fore the Hurons found new enemies in
the Illinois country. The Sioux brooked
no rivals, much less meddlesome, weak
neighbors; and as the Hurons numbered
fewer than 500, whose native spirit and
energy had been shaken by their many
misfortunes, the^^ could not maintain
their position against these new foes, and
therefore withdrew to the source of Black
r.. Wis., where they were found in 1660.
At last they decided to join the Ottawa,
their companions in their first removals,
who were then settled at Chequamigon
bay, on the s. shore of L. Superior, and
chose a site opposite the Ottawa villase.
In 1665 Father Alloaez, the founder
of the principal western missions, met
them here and established the mission of
La Pointe du Saint PIsprit between tlie
Huron and the Ottawa villages. He la-
bored among them 3 years, but his suc-
cess was not marked, for these Tionon-
tati Hurons, never fully converted, had
relapsed into paganism. The Ottawa
and the Hurons fraternized the more
readily here since the two peoples dwelt
in contiguous areas s. of Georgian bay
before the Iroquois invasion m 1648-
49. Father Marquette succeeded Father
Allouez in 1669 and founded the missions
of the Sault Ste Marie and St Fran^ois-
Xavierde la Baie des Puants. The Sioux,
however, sought every possible pretext
to assail the settlements of the Hurons
and the Ottawa, and their numbers and
known cruelty caused them to be so
feared that the latter tribes during Mar-
quette's r^me withdrew to the French
settlements, since the treaty of peace be-
"tween the French and the Iroquois in
1666 had delivered them from their chief
enemies. The Ottawa, however, returned
to Manitoulin id., where the mission of
St Simon was founded, while the Hurons,
who had not forgotten the advantageous
situation which Michilimakinac had pre-
viously affonied them, removed about
1670 to a |K)int opposite the island, where
they built a palisaded village and where
Marquette established the mission of St
Ignace. Later, some of the Hurons here
settled moved to Sandusky, Ohio, others
to Detroit, and still others to Sandwich,
Ontario. The last probably became what
was latterly known as the Anderdon band
of Wyandots, but which is now entirely
dissipated, with the possible exception of
a very few persons.
In 1745 a considerable party of Hurons
under the leadership of the war chief
Orontony, or Nicholas, removed from
Detroit r. to the marsh lands of San-
dusky bay. Orontony was a wily sav-
age whose enmity was greatly to be
feared, and he commanded men who
formed an alert, unscrupulous, and pow-
erful body. The French having provoked
the bitter hatred of Nicholas, which was
fomenteil bv English agents, he conspired
to destroy the French, not onlv at Detroit
but at the upper posts, and by Aug.,
1747, the '* Iroquois of the West," the
Hurons, Ottawa, Abnaki, Potawatomi,
**0uaba8h,'* Sauteurs, Missisauga, Foxes,
Sioux, Sauk, **Sara8tau," Loupe, Shaw-
nee, and Miami, indeed all the tribes of
the middle W., with the exception of
those of the Illinois country, had entered
into the conspiracy; but through the
treachery of a Huron woman the plot was
revealed to a Jesuit priest, who communi-
cated the information to Lon^euil, the
French commandant at Detroit, who in
turn notified all the other French posts,
and although a desultorv warfare broke
out, resulting in a number of murders,
there was no concerted action. Oron-
tony, finding that he had l>een deserted
by his allies, and seeing the activity and
determination of the French not to suffer
English encroachments on what they
called French territory, finally, in Apr.,
1748, destroyed his villages and palisade
at Sandusky, and removed, with 119 war-
riors and their families, to White r., Ind.
Not long after he withdrew to the Illi-
nois country on Ohio r. , near the Indiana
line, where he died in the autumn of 1748.
The inflexible and determined conduct of
Longueuil toward most of the conspiring
trib^ brought the coalition to an end by
May, 1748.
After this trouble the Hurons seem to
have returned to Detroit and Sandusky,
where they became known as Wyandots
and gradually acquired a paramount in-
fluence in the Ohio valley and the lake
r^on. They laid claim to the greater
part of Ohio, and the settlement of the
Shawnee and Delawares within that area
590
HURON
[b. a. e.
was with their consent; thej exercised
the ri^ht to light the council fire at all
intertribal councils, and although few in
number they joined all the Indian move-
ments in the Ohio valley and the lake
region and supported the British aeainst
the Americans. After the peace of 1815
a large tract in Ohio and Michigan was
confirmed to them, but they sola a large
part of it in 1819, under treaty provisions,
reserving a small jwrtion near Upper
Sandusky, Ohio, and a smaller area on
Huron r., near Detroit, until 1842, when
these tracts also were sold and the tribe
removed to Wyandotte co., Kans. By
the terms of the treaty of 1855 they were
declared to be citizens, but by the treaty
of 1867 their tribal organization was re-
stored and they'were placed on a small
tract, still occupied by them, in the n. e.
corner of Oklahoma.
That portion of the Hurons who with-
drew in 1650 and later to the French
colonj^, were accompanied by their mis-
sionaries. The mission of La Conception,
which was founded by them, although
often changed in name and situation, has
survived to the present time. The Hu-
rons who wintered in Quebec in 1649 did
not return to their country after learning
of its desolation • by the Iroquois, but
were placed on land belonging to the
Jesuits at Beauport, and when the Hu-
ron fugitives came down to Quebec to seek
protection, the others followed these in
May, 1651, to Orleans id., settling on
the lands of Madamoiselle de Grand
Maison that had been bought for them.
Here a mission house was erected near
their stockaded bark lodges. In 1654
they numbered between 500 and 600 per-
sons. But again the Iroquois followed
them, seeking through every misrepre-
sentation to draw the Hurons into their
own country to take the place of those
who had fallen in their various wars. By
this means a large number of the Hurons,
remnants of the Bear, Rock, and Bowl
tribes, were persuaded in 1656 to migrate
to the Iroquois country, a movement that
met with such success that the Iroquois
even ventured to show themselves under
the guns of Quebec. In the same year
they mortally wounded Father Garreau,
near Montreal, and captured and put to
death 71 Hurons on Orleans id. These
misfortunes caused the Hurons to draw
nearer to Quebec, wherein they were
given asylum until peace was concluded
between the French and the Iroquois in
1666. The Hurons then withdrew from
the town about 5 m., where in the fol-
lowing year the mission of Notre Dame
de Foye was founded. In 1693 the Hu-
rons moved 5 m. farther away on account
of the lack of wood and the need of
richer lands; here the missionaries ar-
ranged the lodges around a sauare and
built in the middle of it a church, to
which Father Chaumonot added a chapel,
patterned after the Casa Sancta of Lorette
in Italy, and now known as Old Lorette.
Some years later the mission was trans-
ferred a short distance away, where a new
village. Younger Lorette, or La Jeune
Lorette, was built. About the remains of
this mission still dwell the so-called Hu-
rons of Lorette.
The old estimates of Huron population
have been previously given. After, the
dispersal of the Huron tribes in 1649-50,
the Hurons who fled w. never seem to
have exceeded 500 persons in one body.
Later estimates are 1,000, with 300 more
at Lorette (1736), 500 (1748), 850 (1748),
1,250(1765), 1,500(1794-95), 1,000(1812),
1,250 (1812). Only the first of these esti-
mates is inclusive of the ** Hurons of Lor-
ette,*' Quebec, who were estimated at 300
in 1736, but at 455, officially, in 1904. In
1885 those in Indian Ter. (Oklahoma)
numbered 251, and in 1905, 378, making
a total of 832 in Canada and the United
States.
Nothing definite was known of the clans
of the Hurons until the appearance of
Morgan's Ancient Society in 1877, Pow-
ell's Wyandot Government (Ist Rep. B.
A. E., 1881), and Connolley's The Wyan-
dots (Archseol. Rep. Ontario, 92, J899).
From the last writer, who corrects the
work of the former authorities, the fol-
lowing list of Huron clans is taken: Great
Turtle, Little Water Turtle, Mud Turtle,
Wolf, Bear, Beaver, Deer, Porcupine,
Striped Turtle, Highland Turtle, Snake,
and Hawk. These, according to Powell,
were organized into four phratries or clan
brotherhoods, but Connollev denies that
four phratries ever existed. The evi-
dence appears to indicate, however, that
the four-phratry organization was merged
into one of three, of which the Wolf clan
constituted one and acted as executive
and presiding officer.
The Huron villages were Andiata, An-
goutenc, Anonatea, Arendaonatia, Arente,
Arontaen, Brownstown, CahiagUe, Car-
hagouha, Carmaron, Cranetown (2 vil-
lages), Ekhiondatsaan, Endarahy, laen-
houton, Ihonatiria (St Joseph II), Jeune
Lorette, Junqusindundeh(?), Junundat,
Khioetoa, Karenhassa, Khinonascarant
(3 small villages so called), Lorette,
Ouenrio,0nentisati, Ossossane, Sandusky,
Ste Agnes, Ste Anne, St Antoine, Ste
Barbe, Ste Catherine, Ste C^cile, St
Charles (2 villages), St Denys, St Etienne,
St Francois Xavier, St Genevieve, St
Joachim, St Louis, St Martin, Ste Marie
(2 villages), Ste T^r^se, Scanonaenrat,
Taenhatentaron (St Ignace I, II), Tean-
BULL. 30]
HURRIPARACUSSI HITSHKOVI
591
austayae (St Josei)h I), Teandewiata,
Toanche, Touagaainchain (Ste Made-
leine), and Ton&khra.
For sources of information consult
Bressany, Relation- Abreg^ (1653), 1852;
Connolley in Archseol. Rep. Ontario 1899,
1900; Jesuit Relations, i-iii, 1858, and also
the Thwaites edition, i-lxxiii, 1896-1901;
Journal of Capt. William Trent (1752),
1871; Morgan, Ancient Society, 1878;
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i-xv, 1853-87;
Perrot, M^moire, Tailhan ed. , 1864 ; Powell
in Ist Rep. B. A. E., 1881. ( j. n. b. h. )
Ahouandate.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 522,
1853. Ahwindate.— Featherstonhaugh, Canoe
Voy., 1, 108, 1847. AttiSondaronk.— JesTRel. 1641,72,
1858. Bona Irooois.— Champlain (1608), (Euvres,
n, 47, 1870. Oharioquoii.— Ibid. (1611), III, 244
(probably from the name of a chief). Delamat-
tanoes.— Post (1758) in Proud, Pa., ii, app., 120,
1798 ( Delaware name) . Delamattenoot.— Loskiel ,
Hist. United Breth., pt. 3, 16, 103, 1794. Delemat-
Unoea.— Post (1768} quoted by Rupp, West. Pa.,
app., 118, 1846. Sellamattanoet.— Barton, New
Views, app., 8, 1798. Ekeenteeronnon.— Potier,
Rac. Huron et Gram., MS., 1761 (Huron name of
Hurons of Lorette). Euyroni.— Van der Donck
(1656) in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., i, 209, 1841.
GareouiMenhaga.— Bruyas, Radices, 69, 1863. Ouy-
andot— Parkman, Pioneers, xxiv, 1883. Gyan-
dottet.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii,
103, 1848. HahSendaserha.— Bruyas, Radices, 55,
1863. Haronet.— RasTe (1724) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
C611., 2d 8., II, 246, 1814. HatindiaSointen.— Potier,
Rac. Huron et Gram., MS., 1761 (Huron name of
■Hurons of Lorette). Eiroont.— Gorges (1658) in
Maine Hist. Soc. Ck>ll., ii, 67, 1847. Houandates.—
Sa^rard (1632), Canada (Diet.), iv, 1866. Hounon-
date.— €k>xe, Carolana, 44, 1741. Hourona.— Tonti
1682) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 169, 1846. Huron.—
esuit Relation 1632, 14, 1858. Huronet.— Vail-
lant (1688) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 524, 1853.
Huromiet.— Hildreth, Pioneer Hist., 9, 1848.
Horront.— Writer of 1761 in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
4th 8., IX, 427, 1871. Lamatan.— Raflnesque, Am.
Nations, i, 139, 1836 (Delaware name). Little
Mingoes. — Pownall, map of N. Am., 1776. Men-
ok^.— Duro, Don Diego de Pefialosa, 43, 1882.
Kadowa.— For forms of this name applied to the
Hurons see Nadowa. Oehatteguin.— Champlain
(1609), CEuvres, in, 176, 1870 (from name of chief).
Odiatagin.— Ibid., 219. Oohataignin.— Ibid., 174.
Ookatenn.— Ibid. (1632), v, pt. 1, 177. Ochate-
miB.— Ibid. (1609), ni, 175. Ookatequint.— Ibid.,
196. Ouaonackeoinatouek.— Potier quoted by Park-
man, Pioneers, xxiv, 1883. Ouendat.— Jes. Rel.
1640, 35, 1858. Sendat.— Jes. Rel. 1639, 50, 1858.
Owandats.— Weiser (1748) quoted by Rupp, West.
Pa., app., 16, 1846. Owcndaete.— Peters (1750) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., Vl, 596, 1856. Owendate.—
Groflrhan (1750) quoted by Rupp, West. Pa., app.,
26. 1846. Owendot.— Hamilton (1760) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll . . 4th s. , IX , 279, 1871 . Pemedeniek. —
Vetromile in Hist. Mag., 1st s., iv, 369, 1860 (Ab-
naki name). Quatoget.— Albany conf. (1726) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 791, 1855. auatoghees.—
Ibid . , VI, 391 . note, 1855. aoatoghiet. — Garangula
(1684) in William8,Vermont, I, 504,1809. Quato-
fhiet of Loretto.--Colden, Five Nations, i, 197,
755. Battaghretoy.— Post (1758) in Proud, Pa., ii,
app., 113, 1798. Saatharhetu.— La Potherie, Hist.
Am. Sept.. Ill, 223. 1753 (Iroquois name). Tala-
matan. — Walam Olum (1838) in Brinton, Lenape
Leflr., 200, 1885. Talamatim.— Squier in Beach,
Ind. Miscel., 28, 1877. xelama^eno".— Hewitt after
Joumeycake, a Delaware ("Coming out of a
mountain or cave ' ' : Delaware name ) . Telemati-
noa,— Document of 1759 in Brinton, Lenape Leg.,
231, 1885. xl>^ol^«tcr.— Hewitt. Onondaga MS.,
B. A. E., 1888 (Onondaga name). Viandoto.—
Maximilian, Travels, 882, 184. WanaU.— Barton,
New Views, xlii, 1798. Wandate.— Weiser (1748)
quoted by Rupp, West. Pa., app., 15, 1846. Wan-
doU.— Ibid., 18. WantaU.— Weiser in School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, rv, 605, 1854. Wayandotte.—
ii
Hamilton (1749) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, ,^31,
1855. Wayondots.— Croghan (1759) in Proud, Pa.,
II, 296, 1798. Wayondotts.— Croghan, Jour., 37,
1831. WayundatU.— Doc. of 1749 in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., VI, 533, 1865. Wayundotts.— Ibid.
Weandots.— Buchanan, N. Am. Inds.. 156, 1824.
Wendats.— Shea, Miss. Val., preface, 59, 1852.
Weyandotts.— Croghan (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 4th s., IX, 262. 1871. Weyondotts.— Ibid., 249.
Wiandotts.— Ft Johnson conf. (1756) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 236, 1856. Wiondots.— Ed-
wards (1788) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ists., ix,95,
1804. Wiyandotts.— Morse, Modem Geog., i, 196,
1814. Wyandote.— Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 52,
Jan. 1870. Wyandotte.— Garrard, Wahtoyah, 2,
1850. Wyandotts.— Croghan (1754) quoted by
Rupp, West. Pa., app., 51, 1846. Wyondats".— Cro-
ghan (1765) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii,782, 1856.
7yondotts.— Croghan, Jour., 84, 1831. Yendat.—
Parkman, Pioneers, xxiv, 1883. Yendots. —
Schoolcraft in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Proc, 86, 1844.
Hurriparacussi. A village near which
DeSoto landed from Tampa bay, Fla., in
1539. According to Gatschet the name
is properly the title of the principal
chief, from two Timucua words signifying
*war chief.*
Htirripacuxi.— Biedma in Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla.,
48, 1857. Paracossi.— Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in
French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 128, 1850. Parooossi.—
Gentl. of Elvas in Hakluyt Soc. Pub., ix, 32, 1851.
TImba cuxi.— French, op. cit. , 98, note. "Urribarra-
ouxi.— Garcilasso de la Vega cited in Hakluyt
Soc. Pub., op. cit, 32. Vrribarraouxi. — Garcilasso
de la Vega, Florida, 37, 1723.
Hurst tablet. See Notched plates.
Hnsada ('legs stretched out stiff'). A
subgens of the Khuyagens of the Kansa.
Hiiaada.— Dorsey in 15th Rep.B. A. E., 231, 1897.
Qayunikaci»ga.— Ibid. (* White-eagle people')..
Hnsadta {Hum}a^ 'limbs stretched
stiff' ). A subgens of the Hangkaahutun
gens of the Osage, one of the original
fireplaces of the Hangka division. —Bor-
sey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 234, 1897.
Hasadtawann {Hnfsma WanXin^, * elder
Husadta'). A subgens of the Hangkaa-
hutun gens of the Osage, one of the origi-
nal fireplaces of the Hangka division. —
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 234, 1897.
Husam. A former winter village of the
Hahamatses at the mouth of Salmon r.,
Brit. Col.; now the seat of a salmon
fishery.
H'uaam.— Boas in Bull. Am. Geog. Soc, 230, 1887.
Koo-sam.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for
1887, sec. II, 65.
Hushkoni ( * skunk ' ) . A Chickasaw clan
of the Ishpanee phratry.
Huflhkoni.— Morgan, Anc. Soc, 163, 1877. Hui-
koni.-^atschet. Creek Migr. Leg., i, 96, 1884.
Hushkovi. A traditionary village about
2 m. N. w. of Oraibi, n. e. Ariz. Accord-
ing to Hopi story Hushkovi and Pivan-
honkapi were destroyed by afire that had
been kindled in the San Francisco mts.,
90 m. away, at the instance of the chief of
Pivanhonkapi and with the aid of the
Yayaponchatu people who are said to
have Deen in league with supernatural
forces, because the inhabitants of Pivan-
honkapi had become degenerates through
gambling. Most of the inhabitants were
also destroyed; the survivors moved
away, occupying several temporary vil-
lages during their wanderings, the ruins
592
HU8ISTAI0 — HUWANIKIKARAOHADA
[b. a. b.
of which are still to be seen. See Voth,
Traditions of the Hopi, 241, 1905.
Htt'ckovi.— Voth, op. cit.
Husistaic. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Purfsima mission, Santa Bar-
bara CO., Cal. — ^Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Oct. 18, 1861.
Huskanaw. An Algonquian word ap-
plied to certain initiation ceremonies of
the Virginia Indians, performed on boys at
puberty, which were accompanied by last-
mg ana the use of narcotics. The whites
applied the term to huskanaw (Beverley,
Hist. Va., Ill, 32, 39, 1705) in a figurative
sense. Thus Jefferson ( Corresp. , ii, 342 )
wrote: **He has the air of bemg hxiska-
noyed, i. e., out of his element." The
term is derived from the language of the
Powhatan. Gerard (Am. Anthrop., vii,
242, 1905) etymologizes the word as fol-
lows: "Powhatan vskinaweu, *he has a
new body * , from uaki * new ' , naw * body ' ,
eu *has he', said of a youth who had
reached the age of puberty". But the
word is rather from the Powhatan equiv-
alent of the Massachuset t/;u«Aena>, *he is
young', and does not necessarily contain
the root iaw (not naw) *body'. It has
no connection with tne English word
"husky," as some have supposed. For
an account of the * * solemnity of huskanaw-
ing** see Beverley, op. cit., and cf. Hecke-
welder (1817), Indian Nations, 245, 1876.
See Child life, Ordeals, (a. f. c.)
Husky. According to Julian Ralph ( Sun,
N. Y., July 14, 1895), "the common and
only name of the wolf-like dogs of both
the white and red men of our northern
frontier and of western Canada. ' ' Husky
was originally one of the names by which
the English settlers in Labrador have long
known the Eskimo (q. v.). The word,
which seems to be a corruption of one of
the names of this people, identical with
our * Eskimo ' in the northern Algonquian
dialects, has been transferred from man to
the dog. (a. F. c.)
HuBoron. A former division or pueblo
of the Varohio, probably in the Chinipas
valley, inw. Chihuahua, Mexico. — Orozco
y Berra, Geog., 58, 1864.
Hnspah. A Yamasi band living in
South Carolina under a chief of the same
name about the year 1700. (a. s. g. )
Hussliakatna. A Koyukukhotana vil-
lage, of 14 people in 1885, on the right
bank of Koyukuk r., Alaska, 2 m. above
the 8. end of Dall id.
HuBsleakatna.— Allen, Rep. on Alaska, 122, 1887.
HuMliakatna.— Ibid., 141.
Hutalgalgi (hxUali 'wind', algi 'peo-
ple' ). A principal Creek clan.
Ho-tor'-lee.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 161, 1877. Eotol-
gee.— Pickett, Hist. Ala., i, 96, 1851. Hutalgaln.—
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 1, 155, 1884. Wind
Pamily.— Woodward, Reminiscences, 19, 20, 1859.
Hutatchl (Hwt-tdt-ch'l). A former
Lummi village at the s. B. end of Orcas id.,
of the San Juan group, Wash. — Gibhe,
Clallam and Lummi, 38, 1863.
Hnthutkawedl (X"Ci^tx''()Akawh^ 'holes
by or near the trail' ). A village of the
!Nicola band of the IJtlakyapamuk, near
Nicola r., 23 m. above Spences Bridge,
Brit. Col.
H'hothotko'a*.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv.
Can., 4, 1899. X-fi'tx«iitkaw«i .— Teitin Mem. Am.
Mus. Nat. Hist., n, 174, 1900.
Hutsawap. One of the divisions or sub-
tribes of the Choptank, formerly in Dor-
chester CO., Md. — Bozman, Maryland, i,
115, 1837.
Hutsnuwn ( 'grizzly bear fort' ) . A Tlin-
git tribe on the w. and s. coasts of Admi-
ralty id., Alaska; pop. estimated at 300
in 1840, and ^ven as 666 in 1880 and 420
in 1 890. Their former towns were Angon
and Nahltushkan, but they now live at
Killisnoo. Their social divisions are An-'
kakehittan, Daktlawedi, Beshuhittan,
Tekoedi, and Wushketan. ( j. r. s. )
OhutB-ta-k5n.— Krause, TUnkit Ind., 118, 1885.
Ohntsnou.— Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., map facing
142, 1855. Contsnoot.— Borrows in H. R. £x. Doc
197, 42d Cong., 2d sess., 4, 1872. Eoidznooa.—
Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 313, 1868. Hooohenooi.—
Ball in Sen. Ex. Doc. 105, 46th Cong.. 1st sess., 80,
1880. Hoochinoo.— Wright, Among the Alaskans,
151, 1883. Hoodohenoo.-^reorge in Sen. Ex. Doc
105, 46th Cong.. 1st sess., 29, 1880. Hoodsinoo.—
Colyer, ibid., 1869, 575, 1870. Hoodma.— Hallock
in Rep. Sec. War, pt. i, 89, 1868. Hoods-Kahoos.— '
Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 809, 1868. Hookohenoo.—
Ball in Sen. Ex. Doc. 105, 46th Cong., 1st sess., 80,
1880. Hoonchenoo.— George, ibid., 29. Hootii-
noo. — Kane, Wand. N. A., app., 1859. Hoots-ah-
tar-qwan.— Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist,
III, 232, 1903. Xhootmahoo.— Petroff in Tenth Cen-
sus, Alaska, 32, 1884. Khutsno.— Tikhmenie^
.Russ. Am. Co., ii, 341, 1863. Kfiutsnu.— Ibid.
Koo-tche-noos.— Beardslee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 106^
46th Cong., 1st sess., 29, 1880. B:ootteBooa.~Mar
honey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 576, 1870. Xoota-
novtkie.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 227, 1875
(transliterated from Veniaminoff). Kootna-
hoo.— Niblack, Coast Indians of S. Alaska, chart
1, 1890. Kootsnoos.— Seward, Speeches on Alaska,
5, 1869. Kootmov.— Colyer in Ind. Aff. Rep., 687,
1870. Kouihnout.— Halleck in Rep. Sec. war, I,
38, 1868. Koutxenoos.— Beardslee in Sen. Ex. Doc
105, 46th Cong., Ist sess., 31, 1880. Xoutnoiii.—
Hal leek in Rep. Sec. War, pt. i, 38, 1868. XuttaoY-
■koe.— Veniaminoff, Zapiski, ii, pt. 3, 30, 1840.
¥u'a4ii-nao.— Swan ton, field notes, 1900-01 (ac-
cording to the Haida). ^iitslnuwu'.—lbid., 1904,
B. A. E. (own name).
Hutucgna. A former Gabrieleflo ran-
cheria in Los Angeles eo., Cal., at a place
later called Santa Ana (Yorbas).
HntQcgna.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860.
Hntuk.— Kroeber, inf'n, 1905 (Luisefio name).
Hnvagtiere. A Nevome division, de-
scribed as adjoining the Hio, who were
settled 8 leagues e. of Tepahue, in Sonera,
Mexico (Orozco y Berra, Geog., 58, 1864).
The name doubtless properly belongs to
their village.
Huwaka. The Sky clan of Acoma
pueblo, N. Mex., which, with the Osach
(Sun) clan, forms a phratry.
Huwaka-haiioq«».— Hodge in Am. Anthiop., IX,
352,1896 (AanogcA=' people').
Hnwanikikaraehada ( 'those who call
themselves aftertheelk'). A Winnebago
gens.
Blk.~Moigan,Anc. Soc.,157,1877.
BULL. 30]
HUWI lOHENTA
593
Ibid. Htt-wtf^i-ki'-ka-ra'-tca-da.— Dorsey in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 240, 1897.
Huwi. The Dove clan of the Chua
(Rattlesnake) phratry of the Hopi.
H^wi.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A . E. , 38, 1891 . Hiiwi
winwA.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 582, 1901
(u^fftrtl=»'clan' ). Htt'-wi wun-wii. — Fewkes in
Am. Anthrop., vii, 402, 1894.
Hwades {Xude^s, *cut beach'). The
principal village of the Koekimo and Ko-
Srino atQuatsmo narrows, Vahcouver id.
Mtkt-H'. — Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for
1887. sec. II, 65, 1888. Hwot-et.— Dawson in Can.
Oeol. Sorv., map, 1887. Xude't.— Boas, inf 'n, 1906.
Hwahwatl (Qwa^q wa//) . A Salish tribe
on Englishman r., Vancouver id., speak-
ing the Puntlatsh dialect. — fioas, MS.
B. A. E., 1887.
Hwotat A Hwotsotenne village on the
E. side of Babine lake, near its oatlet,
in British Columbia.
Ewo'-tat.— Morice in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., x, 109,
1893. WbaUtt.— Downie in Mayne, Brit. Col., 453,
1861 (misprint). WhaUtt.— Downie in Jour. Roy.
Geoe. Soc., xxxi, 253, 1861. Wut-at.— Dawson in
Oeol. Surv. Can., 26b, 1881.
Hwotsotenne ( 'people of Spider river' ).
A Takulli tribe, belonging to the Babine
branch, living on Bulkley r. and hunting
as far as Francois lake, Brit. Col. They
are somewhat mixed with their imme-
diate neighbors, the Kitksan (Morice in
Trans. Can. Inst., 27, 1893). Their vil-
lages are Hagwilget, Hwotat, Keverhwot-
ket, Lachalsap,T8echah, and Tselkazkwo.
Akwil«ft.— Morice. Notes on W. D^n<^s, 27, 1893
( * welfdressed ' : Kitksan name) . Hwotso'tenne.—
Morice in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., map, 1892. Out-
Mtin.— British Columbia map, 1872.
Hykehah. A former Chickasaw town,
one of a settlement of five, probably in or
near Pontotoc co.. Miss.
Hikihaw.— Romans, Florida, 68, 1775. Hikkihaw.—
W.Florida map, co. 1775. Hykeiiah.— Adair, Am.
Ind.. 352, 1775.
Hykwa. See Hiakwa.
Hyperboreans (Greek ) . A pplied by Ban-
croft (Nat. Races, i, 37, 1882) to the tribes
of extreme n. w. America, n. of lat. 55°,
including western and southern Eskimo,
Aleut, Tlingit, and Athapascan tribes; by
others the name is employed to designate
all the circumpolar tribes of both the Old
and the New World.
Hynkkeni. A former Choctaw settle-
ment, noted by Romans in 1775, but not
located on his map unless it be an unnum-
bered town on the e. side of Buckatunna
or., N. E. of Yowani, in the present Mis-
sissippi.— Halbert in Miss. H ist. Soc. Pub. ,
VI, 432, 1902.
lahenhonton (*at the caves.'— Hewitt).
A Huron village in Ontario in 1637. — Jes.
Rel. for 1637, 159, 1858.
lalamma. A former Chumashan vil-
lage subordinate to Purfsima mission,
Santa Barbara co., Cal.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
laUunne. A former Chumashan village
subordinate to Santa Inez mission, Santa
Barbara co., Cal. (Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Oct. 18, 1861). Possibly the same as
lalamma.
lalmuk (la^lmuq). A Squawmish vil-
lage community at Jericho, Burrard in-
let, Brit. Col.— Hill-Tout in Rep. B. A.
A. S., 475, 1900.
lalostimot (laWstiinot, * making good
fire*). A Talio division among theBel-
lacoola of British Columbia; named from
a reputed ancestor.
lalo'ttimdt.— Boas in 7th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can-
ada, 3, 1891. T'a't'Entsait— Ibid, ('a cave pro-
- tecting from rain ': secret society name).
lana (la^na). The Com clan of the
Eueblo of Taos, N. Mex.
ma-taiina.— Hodge, field notes, B. A. £., 1895
{taiina = * people ' ).
Ibache (* holds the firebrand to sacred
pipes'). A Kansa gens. Its subgentes
are Khuyeguzhinga and Mikaunika-
shinga.
Han^ jin^.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 231,
1897 ('small Hanga'). Ibatc'«.— Ibid.
Ibin. A former Aleut villaj^e on Agattu
id., Alaska, one of the Near id. group of
the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Ibitoupa. A small tribe of unknown
affinity, but the theory that they were
connected with the Chickasaw has more
arguments in its favor than any other.
In 1699 they formed one of the villages
mentioned by Il)erville (Margry, D^c,
IV, 180, 1880) as situated on Yazoo r.,
Ibitoupa l)eing near the upper end of the
group between the Chaquesauma (Chak-
chiuma) and the Thysia (Tioux) , accord-
ing to the order named, which appears
to ))e substantially correct, although Coxe
(Carolana, 10, 1741) who omits Thysia,
makes the Ibitoupa settlement expressly
the uppermost of the series. The Ibitoupa
and Chakchiuma, together with the Ta-
poucha (Taposa), were united in one
village on the upper Yazoo by 1798.
What eventually became of them is not
known, but it is probable that they were
absorbed by the Chickasaw. See Itomapa.
(a. s. g. )
Bitoupas.— P<}nicaut (1700) in French, Hist. Coll.
La., n. 8 , I, 61, 1869. Epitoupa.— Coxe, Carolana,
10, map, 1741. Ouitoupas.— Penicaut (1700) in
Margry, DcTc., v, 401, 1883. OuUpa.— Iberville
il699), ibid., iv, 180, 1880. OuUypet.— Martin,
Iwt. La.. I, 249, 1827. Witoupo.— Alcedo, Die.
Geog., V. »43, 1789 (misprint). Witowpa.— Esnauts
et Rapilly, map, 1777. Witowpo.— Philippeaux,
map of English Col., 1781. Ybitoopat.-— Romans,
Fla., I, 101, 1775. Tbitoupat.— Baudry des Lo-
zl^res, Voy. ft la Louisiane, 246, 1802.
Icayme. Given as the native name of
the site on which San Luis Rey mission,
8. California, was founded; perhaps also
the name of a neighboring Dlegueflo vil-
lage.—Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Feb. 22,
1860.
Ichenta. A village of the Chalone divi-
sion of the Costanoan family, formerly
near Soledad mission, Cal.
lohenta.— Taylor In Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860.
San JoM.— ibid.
BulL 30-05 38
594
ICHUARUMPATS lETAN
[b. a. b.
Ichnammpati rr'-c/itwir''- rum-pate, 'peo-
ple of cactus plains*). A Paiute tribe
formerly in or near Moapa valley, s. e.
Nev., numbering 35 in 1873. — Powell in
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 50, 1874.
Icosans. Mentioned by Bartram
(Trav., 54, 1792) in connection with the
Ogeeche, San tee, Utina, Wapoo, Yamasi,
etc., as having been attacked by the
Creeks, and "who then surrounded and
cramped the English possessions.*' The
reference is to the early colonial period
of South Carolina and Georgia.
Idakariuke. Mentioned as a Shasta
band of Shasta valley, n. Cal., in 1851,
but it is really only a man's personal
name. (r. b. d.)
Ida-kura-wak-a-ha.— McKee (1851) in Sen. £x.
Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 221, 1853 (seemingly
identical ). Ida-ka-riuke.— Gibbs (1851) in School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 171, 1853. I-do-ka-rai-uke.—
McKee. ibid., 171.
Idelabuti (* mesas of the mountains').
A rancheria, probably Cochimi, con-
nected with Purfsima (Cadegomo) mis-
sion, Lower California, in the 18th cen-
tury.—Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 189,
1857.
Idelibinag^ ('high mountains'). A
rancheria, probably Cochimi, connected
with Purfsima mission, Lower Califor-
nia, in the 18th century. — Doc. Hist.
Mex., 4th 8., V, 189, 1857.
Idiuteling. An Eskimo settlement on
the N. shore of Home bay, Baffin land,
where the Akudnirmiut Eskimo gather
to hunt l>ear in the spring.
IpiutelUng.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 441, 1888
(misprint). Ipnitelling.— Ibid., map (misprint).
Id^oritnaktain (*with grass'). A vil-
lage of the Talirpingmiut division of the
Okomiut Eskimo on the w. shore of
Cumberland sd.; pop. 11 in 1883.
EjiMuajuin.— Kumlien in Bull. Nat. Mus., no. 15,
15, 1879. I4jorituaktuin.~Boas in Deutsche Geog.
Blatt., VIII, 88, 1885. Idjorituaqtuin.— Boas in 6th
Rep. B. A. E., 426, 1888. Idiorituaxtuin.— Boas in
Petermanns Mitt., no. 80, 70. 1885.
Idjuniving. A spring settlement of
Padlimint Eskimo nearthe s. end of Home
bay, Baffin land — Boas in 6th Rep. B. A.
E., map, 1888.
lebatim. The White-corn clan of the
Tigua pueblo of Isleta, N. Mex.
fel»atha-t*ainm.— Lummis quoted by Hodge in
Am. Anthrop., ix. 349, 1896 (<*af?ijn=* people').
lechur. The Yellow-corn clan of the
Tigua pueblo of Isleta, N. Mex.
IvJohur-ralnm.—Lummis quoted by Hodge in Am.
Anthrop., ix, 349, 1896 (rafmn = * people').
lefen. The Red-corn clan of the Tigua
pueblo of Isleta, N. Mex.
lefe'u-t'ainin.— Lummis quoted by Hodge in Am.
Anthrop., IX, 349, 1896 (/'af win =* people').
lekidhe (lekiffj * criers'). A gens of
the Inkesabe aivision of the Omaha. —
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 227, 1897.
leshur. The Blue-corn clan of the
Tigua pueblo of Isleta, N. Mex.
feahttr-t*ainin.—Lummis quoted by Hodge in Am.
Anthrop., ix, 349, 1896 (rafntn=* people').
leskachincha -( ' child of one who speaks
Dakota*). The ordinary name for the
mixed-blood element among the western
Sioux. Given by J. 0. Dorsey as a Brul^
gens composed of half-breeds.
letkadQca.— Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th
Rep. B. A. £.. 219, 1897. Ietka-toi»tca.— Ibid.
leskachincha. A modern Oglala Da-
kota band, composed of half-breeds,
leska 6iD6a.— Cleveland, letter to Dorsey, 1884.
Ieika-toi"toa. — Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 221, 1897.
letan. A term which, with **Tetau*'
and other forms of the name, was applied
by writers of the early part of the 19th
century to several western tribes.
Mooney (17th Rep. B. A. E., 167, 1898)
explains its application as follows: ** The
Ute of the mountain region at the head-
waters of the Platte and the Arkansas,
being a powerful and aggressive tribe,
were well known to all the Indians of
the plains, who usually called them by
some form of their proper name, YutawdtSy
or, in its root form, 1 w/a, whence we get
Eutaw, Utah, and Ute., Among the
Kiowa the name becomes Idtd(-go)f while
the Siouan tribes seem to have nasalized
it so that the early French traders wrote it
as Ayutan, latan, or letan. By prefixing
the French article it became L' latan, and
afterward Aliatan, while by misreading of
the manuscript word we get Jatan, Jetan,
and finally Tetau. Moreover, as the early
traders and explorers knew but little of
the mountain tribes, they frequently con-
founded those of the same generic stock,
so that almost any of these forms may
mean Shoshoni, Ute, or Comanche, ac-
cording to the general context of the
description." By reason of the varied
applications of letan and its equivalents,
the name is here treated separately.
AUata.— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 60, 1806 (so
called by the French). Aliatan.— Drake, Bk.
Inds., vi. 1848. Aliatant, of La Plavet.— Lewis,
Travels, 181, 1809. AliaUnt, of the Weit.— Lewis
and Clark, Discov., 63, 1806. Aliatoni.— Lewis
and Clark, Jour., 139, 1810. Aliatons of the Weat.—
Brown, West. Gaz., 213. 1817. AliUn.— Lewis and
Clark, Discov., 23. 1806. Aliton.— Am. State Pa-
pers, Ind. AflF., I, 710. 1832. Alliatan.— Lewis and
Clark, Exped., ii, 131. 1814. AlUatant of the
weet.— Brown, West. Gaz., 21.5, 1817. Ayutan.—
Braekenridge, Views of Louisiana, 80, 1814 (also
called •Camanches'). Halitanet.— Du Lac, Voy.
Louisianes, 261, 1805. Halitaner— Ibid., 309. Kl-
etanea.— Orozco y Berra, Geog. , 40, 1861. Hietans.—
P^nicaiit (1720) in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 166.
1869. I-&'-kar.— Lewis and Clark, DLscov., 60,
1806. latan.— Gregg, Comm. Prairies, I, 21, 1844.
I-a-tane.- Bonner, Life of Beckwourth, 34, 1856.
IcUni.- Boudinot, Star in West, 126. 1816 (mis-
print), lelan.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 874, 1822
(misprint). letam.— Cass in H. R. Ex. Doc. 117,
20th Cong., 2d sess., 102, 1829. letan.— Pike, Trav-
els, xiv, 1811. letanee.— Orozco y Berra, Geog.,
40, 1864. letani.— Pike, Exped.. 3d map, 1810.
lotan.— Pattie, Pers. Narr., 36, 1833. Itean.—
M'Kennev, Memoirs, ii, *M, 1846 (misprint).
Jetam.— Cass quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
in, 609, 1858 (misprint). Jetane.— P^nicaut (1720)
in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 156. note, 1869 (mis-
print). Jetana.- Mayer, Mexico, il, 39, 1858
(misprint). Jotana.— Pattie, Pers. Narr., 37, 1838
[misprint.) laitanea.— Mallet (1740) in Margry,
D4c., VI, 4.'i7, 1886 (French form). La Kar.—
Fisher, New Trav., 175, 1812. La Litanet.— Ibid.
BULL. 30]
lEWATSE — IHANKTONWAN
595
Lee-ha-taui.— Hunter, Captivity. 68, 1823. Liahtan
Band.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, map, 1822.
L'latan.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1043, 1896
(French form of latan above). Tetaut.— Pike,
Exped., 109, 1810 (misprint). Yetana.— Keane in
Stanford, Compend., 54.'>, 1878 (misprint).
lewatse (Le-wat-se^, * mouth men').
The Crow name for some unidentified
tribe.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val., 402, 1862.
Ift. A Karok village on Klamath r.,
Cal., inhabited in 1860.
If-terram.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23, 1860.
Igagik. An A^lemiut Eskimo settle-
ment at the moutn of Ugaguk r., Alaska;
pop. 120 in 1880, 60 in 1890, 203 in 1900.
Imiik.— Petroff, 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 1884.
ugaguk.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Igak. A former Kaniagmiut Eskimo
village on Afognak id., Alaska, e. of
Afognak, whither it seems to have been
moved.
^ut. — Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., map, 1855,
Kitoh wigmj ut.— I bid .
IgamanBabe (/aoma''«d 6^, 'black paint,'
Kansaname for Big Bluer., Kans. ). One
of the villages occupied by the Kansa,
probably before 1820. — Dorsey, MS. Kan-
sas vocab., B. A. E., 1882.
Igdlorpait. A Danish post and Eskimo
village in s. w. Greenland, lat. 60° 28^
Igdlopait.— Koldewey, German Arct. Exped., 182,
1870. Igdlorpait.- MeddelelseromGronland, xvi,
map, 1896.
Igdlnluarstik. A village of the southern
group of East Greenland Eskimo, on the
coast between lat. 63° and 64°. — Nansen,
First Crossing, 383, 1890.
Igiak. A Magemiut Eskimo village in-
land from Scammon bav, Alaska; pop. 10
in 1880.
Igiagagamute.— Petroff, Ren. on Alaska, 1884.
" * nut.— Nelson in I8th Rep. B. A. E., map,
1899. Igragamiut.— Nelson cited by Baker, Geog.
Diet. Alaska, 212, 1901.
Igiakchak. A village of the Kuskwog-
miut Eskimo in the Kuskokwim district,
Alaska; pop. 81 in 1890.
Ighiakchagnamiut.— 11th Census, Alaska, 6, 1893.
Igiakohak.— Ibid.
Igivaoliok. A Nushagagmiut Eskimo
village in the Nushagak district, Alaska;
pop. 31 in 1890.
IgiTaohochamiut.— nth Census, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Iglakatekhila ( ' refuses to move camp ' ) .
A division of the Oglala Teton Sioux.
Iglaka te&ila.— Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 220, 1897. Iglaka-teqila.— Ibid.
Iglu. A snow house of the Eskimo:
from igdhiy its name in the e. Eskimo
dialects. See Habitations. (a. f. c.)
Igladahoming. An Ita Eskimo settle-
ment on Smith sd., Greenland.
Uloodahominy.— Mrs Peary, My Arct. Jour., 81,
1893. Igludahomiiig.— Heilprin, Peary Relief Ex-
ped., 1^, 1893.
Iglndnastiin (IgluduA^hsairiy * place of
houses'). An Ita Eskimo village in n.
Greenland, lat. 77° 50'.— Stein in Peter-
manns Mitt., no. 9, map, 1902.
I^lulik. A winter settlement of the
Aivilirmiut Eskimo at the head of Lyon
inlet, Hudson bay.
Igdlttlik.— Rink in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., xv, 240,
1886. Igdlumiut.- Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. £., map,
1888 (the inhabitants). IglooUk.— Parry, Sec.Voy.,
404, 1824. Igloolip.— Gilder, Schwatka's Search,
253, 1881.
Iglulik. A town of the Iglulirmiut Es-
kimo, on an island of the same name, near
the E. end of Fury and Hecla straits. —
BoasinZeitschr. Ges. f. Erdk.,226, 1883.
Iglulirmiut ('people of the place with
houses' ). A tribe of central Eskimo liv-
ing on both sides of Fury and Hecla straits.
They kill walrus in winter on Iglulik and
other islands, harpoon seal in the fjords
in early spring, and throughout the sum-
mer hunt deer in Baffin land or Melville
peninsula. Their settlements are Akuli,
Arlagnuk, Iglulik, Kangertluk, Krimerk-
suinalek, Pilig, Pingitkalik, and Uglirn. —
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 444, 1888.
Igluiingmiut.— Boas in Trans. Anthrop. Soc.Wash.,
Ill, 9ti, 1885.
Ignok. An Ikogmiut Eskimo village
on the right bank of the lower Yukon,
Alaska; pop. 175 in 1880.
Ignokhatskomute.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska,
57, 1884. Ingekasagmi.— Raymond (1869), quoted
by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska. 1902.
Ignokhatskamut. A village on lower
Yukon r., adjacent to the Bering coast
Eskimo, the inhabitants of which are
probably of Athapascan and Eskimo mix-
ture.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pi.
ii, 1900.
Igpirto. A fall settlement of Talirping-
miut Eskimo of the Okomiut tribe at the
head of Nettilling fjord, Cumberland sd. —
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888.
Igualali (Ig-va^-la-liy * a hole ' ). A small
rancheria of the Tarahumare, not far from
Norogachic, Chihuahua, Mexico. — Lum-
holtz, inf'n, 1894.
Iguanes. A tribe of whom Father Kino
heard, in 1699, while near the mouth of
the Rio Gila in s. w. Arizona. As thev
are mentione<l in connection with the Al-
chedoma and Yuma, they were probably
a Yuman tribe.
Iguanas.— Venegas, Hist. Cal,. i, 57, 17.=»9.
Iguanes.— Kino (1699) quoted l)y Cones, Gar-
ces Diarv, .M4, 1900. Yuanes.— Orozco y Berra,
Geog., 59. 1H64.
Iguik. An Unaligmiut Eskimo village
on Norton sd., Alaska; pop. 8 in 1880, 51
in 1890.
Agowik.— nth Census, Alaska, 165, 1893. Egor
wik.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, map, 1877.
Igauik.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899.
Igawik.— Potroflf in 10th Census, Alaska, 59, 1884.
Iguik.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 165, 1893.
Igushik. A Nushagagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on Igushik r., Alaska; pop. 74 in
1880.
Igushek.— Petroflf in 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 1884.
Igushik.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901.
Siaisdaye {Iha-iMaye^ * mouth-greas-
ers'). A band of the Yankton Sioux. —
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 1897.
Ihamba (I^ha-mba). An ancient pue-
blo of the Tewa on the s. side of Pojoa-
que r., between Pojoaque and San llde-
fonso pueblos, n. New Mex. — Bandelier
in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 85, 1892.
Ihanktonwan ( ' Yankton ' ). A band of
the Brul^ Teton Sioux, so called because
descended from Yankton women.
596
IHASHA IKOGMIUT
[ B. A. B.
IbftolctoDwai).— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218,
1897. Ihanktonwax.—Ibid.
Ihaalia ('red lips'). A band of the
Hunkpatina or Lower Yanktonai Sioux.
Iha-oA.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218, 1897.
Iha-ta.-Ibi(i.
Ihonatiria. A former Huron village
in Simcoe co., Ontario, built about 1634
and depopulated by pestilence in 1636.
The Jesuits established there the mission
of Immaculate Conception.
Ihonatiria.— Jes. Rel. for 1635, 30, 1858. Ihonat-
tiria.— Jes. Rel. for 1637, 153, 1858. Iminaoulate
Conception.— Shea, Cath. Mis.M., 173, 1855.
^elirtnng. The northernmost summer
settlement of the Akudnirmiut Eskimo of
Baffin land.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E.,
441, 1888.
^irang. A fabulous people of central
Eskimo mythology. — Boas in 6th Rep.
B. A. E., 640, 1888.
Ika. A Cochimi tribe of Lower Cali-
fornia, said by Father Baegert to have
lived about 40 m. inland from Magdalena
bay in the 18th century,
lea.— Miihlenpfordt, Mexico, ii, 2, 443, 1844.
Ika«.— Baegert, Nachrichten, 96, 1773.
Ikak. An Aglemiut Eskimo village
near Naknek lake, Alaska; pop. 162 m
1880.
Ik-khagmute.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 17,
1884. Savonoiki.— Spurr and Post (1898) quoted by
Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. mtak.- Dall,
Ala-ska, map, 1870.
Ikaln. A winter village of the Ita Es-
kimo on Whale sd., n. Greenland.
Idkalloo.— Markham in Trans. Ethnol. Soc. Lend.,
129,1866. Iki'rlo.- SteininPetermanns Mitt., no.
9, map, 1902.
Ikanachaka (ikana 'ground', atchaka
'reserved,' 'set apart,* 'beloved,' 'sa-
cred'). A former Upper Creek town,
located by Meek ( Romantic Passages in
S. W. Hist, 278, 1857) on the s. side of
Alabama r., between Pintlala and Big
Swamp cr., in Lowndes co., Ala. It was
built on "holy ground" and hence was
thought to be exempt from hostile in-
roads. Weatherford and the ' ' prophet ' '
Hillis Hadjo resided there, and the Creek
forces were defeated there Dec. 23, 1813,
at which date it contained 200 houses
and included some Shawnee.
(h. w. h.)
Eokanaohacu.— Clay bourne (1814) in Boudinot, Star
in the West, 254, 1816. Eckanakaka.— Drake, Bk.
Inds., bk. IV, 58, 1848. Econachaca.— Pickett, Hist.
Ala., II, 323, 1851. E-cun-oha-ta.— Royce in 18th
Rep. B. A. E., Ala., map, 1899. Holy Ground.—
Claybourne (1814) in Boudinot, op. eit. Ikanatoh-
aka.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 132, 1884.
Ikanhatki ( ' white ground ' ) . A former
Upper Creek town on the right bank of
lower Tallapoosa r., Mon^omery co.,
Ala., immediately below Kulumi town.
Swan, who passed there in 1791, says it
had been settled by Shawnee, who had
4 villages in the vicinity, and they are
called by him Shawnee refugees, but
Bartram (1775) states that they spoke
Muscogee. Under the name Ekundutske
the village was said to contain 47 families
in 1832. (a. 8. G.)
Oiinhutke.- Bartram, Trav., 461, 1791. Econan«
tckky.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 425, 24th Cong., 1st sess.,
255, 1836. Eoonautske. — Ibid. E-oun-hat-ke.~
Hawkins (1799). Sketch, 34. 1848. EoonhnUee.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv. 380,1854. E kon
duts ke.-€ensu8 of 1832, ibid., 578. Ekunhutke.—
Pickett. Hist. Ala., n. 267, 1851 (inhabited by
Shawanese). Ikan*-hatki.— Gatschet, Creek Migr.
Leg.. I, 132, 1884. Kenhulka.— Swan (1791) in
Schoolcraft, op. cit., v, 262, 1856. White Oroond.—
Finnelson (1792) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff.. i,
289, 1832.
tkarnck. Mentioned ss a Shasta band
of Shasta valley, n. Cal., in 1851, but it is
really a man's personal name. (r. b. d. )
I-ka-nuck.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d
Cong,, spec, sess,, 171. 1853. Ika-ruck. — Gibbs
(1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ni, 171, 1853.
Ikatchiocata. A former Choctaw town
between the headwaters of Chicasawhay
and Tombigbeers., Miss.
Ikaohiooata.— Lattr^, map U. S.. 1784. Ikeohipou-
ta.— Philippeaux, map, 1781.
Ikatek. An Angma^lingmiut Eskimo
village on Sermilik fjord, e. Greenland;
pop. 58 in 1884. — Meddelelser om Gron-
land, X, map, 1888.
Ikatiknnahita (ikd^ti *8wamp', kiLuohVta
*long': Long Swamp town). A Chero-
kee settlement, about the period of the
removal in 1839, situated on Long Swamp
cr. , about the boundary of Forsyth and
Cherokee cos., n. w. Ga. (j. m.)
Long Swamp Village.— Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E..
map, 1887.
Ikatlek. An Ikogmiut Eskimo village
on Yukon r., Alaska, 30 m. below Anvik;
pop. 9 in 1880.
tkaklagmiate.— Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12,
42d Cong., 1st sess., 25, 1871. Ikatlegomut.— Nel-
son in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map. 1899. Ikatlego-
mute.— PetrofF in 10th Census, Alaska, map, 1884.
Ikoklag'mut.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. i, 17,
1877.
Ikerasak. A northern settlement of
the Angmagsalingmiut Eskimo of b.
Greenland, lat. 66°. — Meddelelser om
Gronland, xxvii, 22, 1902.
Ikherkhamut ( I-qer-qa-mut^ ^ 'end of
river people': Kaniagmiut name). A
division of the Ahtena near the mouth
of Copper r., Alaska. — Hoffman, MS.,
B. A. E., 1882.
Ikmnn (referring to an animal of the
cat kind). A band of the Yankton
Sioux.
Ikmun.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 1897.
Ikmu".- Ibid.
Iknetnk. A Kaviagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on Golofnin bay, Alaska; pop. 100
in 1880.
Iffnituk.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899.
Iknetuk.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1901.
Kniktag'emiat.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. 1, 16,
1877.
Ikogmiut. A tribe of Alaskan Eskimo
inhabiting both banks of the Yukon as
far as Makak. They have hairy bodies
and strong beards and exhibit a marked
variation in physique, customs, and dia-
lect from the Eskimo n. and e. of Norton
sd., being more nearly allied to the other
fishing tribes s. of them. Dall estimated
their number at 1,000 in 1870, including
the Chnagmiut. In 1890 there were 172
BULL. 30]
TKOGMIUT ILLINOIS
597
Ikogmiut proper. Holmberg divided
the natives of the delta into the Kwik-
pagmiut and the Kwikhiaemiut, living
respectively on the Kwikpak and Kwik-
luak passes. The villages are Asko,
Bazhiy Ignok, Ikatlek, Ikogmiut, Inga-
hame, Ingrakak, Katagka^, Kenunimik,
Kikhkat, Koko, Kosereiski, Kuyikanuik-
pul, Kvikak, Makak, Narosigak, Nuk-
luak, Nunaikak, Nunaktak, Paimute,
Pogoreshapka, and Uglovaia.
Kk^mut.— Dall In Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 17. 1877.
Ekogmuts. — Dall, Alaska, 407, 1870. Hekinz-
tana.— Doroschin in Radlo£F, Worterbuch d.
Kin»i-8pr., 29, 1874 (Kinai name). Ikogmiut.—
Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., map, 142, 1855. Ikvog-
mutea. — Schwatka, Milit. Recon., Explor. in
Alaska, 353, 1900. Kahviohpaki.— Elliott, Cond.
Aff. in Alaska. 29. 1874. Koikhpagamute.— Petrofif
in Am. Nat. x vi, 570, 1882 (Eskimo: • people of the
Kwikpak, the big river'). Kuwiohpackmiiten.—
Wrangell, Ethnog. Nachr., 122, 1839. Kvikhpag-
mnte.— ZagOHkin quoted by PetrofT in 10th Census.
Alaska, 37. 1884. Kwiohliuagmjuten.— Uolml>erg.
Ethnog. Skizz., 5, 1855. Kwiohpaoker.— Wrangell,
Ethnog. Nachr., 1*22. 1839. Kwichpagmiuten.—
Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz.. 5, 1855. Kwichpak.—
Whymper, Trav. In Alaska, map. 18(i8. Kwikh-
p«g-mut.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. i, 17, 1877.
Ikogmiut. An Ikogmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on the lower Yukon, Alaska, where
the Russians established a mission about
1843. Pop. 148 in 1880, 140 in 1890, 166
in 1900.
loogmute. — Bruce, Alaska, map. 1885. Dcogh-
auont. — Zagoskine in Nouv. Ann. Vov.. 5th s.,
XXI, map, 1850. Ikogmut.— Nelson in "iHth Rep.
B. A. E., pi. ii, 1899. Ikogmute.— Petroff, Rep.
on Alaska, map, 1881. Xkuagmjut.— Holmberg,
Ethnog. Skizz., map. l^s.5.5.
Ikelga. A former Aleut village on Un-
alaska, Aleutian ids., Alaska. — Coxe,
Russian Discov., 164, 1787.
Iktigalik. A Kaiyuhkhotana village
onUnalaklik r., Alaska, having 10 houses
in 1866.
Igtigalik.— Whjrmper in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc,
225, 1868. Ikturalik.— Dall. Alaska. 26, 1870.
Kew THukuk.— Whymper, Trav. in Ala.ska, 175,
1869. Kove Xnukuk.— Ibid. (Russian name).
Iknak. A Chnagmiut village on the
lower Yukon, Alaska, near the head of the
delta; pop. 65 in 1890.
Iko-agiiuut.~llth (k'usus. Alaska. 165, 1893. Iku-
agmiut—Tikhmenief (1861) quoted by Baker.
Oeog. Diet. Alaska. 1901. Ikuak.— Baker, ibid.
Ynkagamnt.— Raymond (1869). quote<l by Baker,
IkwopsTiin. A Squawmish village com-
munity on the left bank of Squawmisht
r., Brit. Col.
Eukwhatsom.— Survey map, U. S. Hydrog. Office.
Ikwo'ptum.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 475,
1900. Yik'oa'psaa.— Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887.
namatecli. A formerXepehuane pueblo
in Durango, Mexico, ana the seat of a
mission.
8. Antonio Ilamateoh. — Orozco y Berra, Geog., 319,
1864.
Il^jnnai-hadai (Fldjuna-i xafda-i^ * val-
uable-house people'). A subdivision of
the Yadus, a familjr of the Eaele clan of
the Haida in w. British CJolumbia. The
name is derived from that of a house. —
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 276, 1905.
He Perc^. A French mission, proba-
bly among the Micmac, on the Gulf of
St Lawrence in the 17th centurv. — Shea,
Miss. Val., 85, 1852.
Ilex cassine. See Black drink.
Iliamna. A Kania^miut Eskimo village
on the s. shore of llianma lake, Alaska;
pop. 49 in 1880, 76 in 1890.
niamna.— nth Census, Alaska, 95, 1893. Ilyam-
na.— Petroff. 10th Census, Alaska. 17, 1884.
^ IliB ( ' spread-legs beach ' ) . A Nimkish
Kwakiutl village on Cormorant id., Alert
bay, Brit. Col., opposite Vancouver id.
Some Kwakiutl proper come here during
the salmon season. — Boas in Bull. Ani.
Geog. Soc, 227, 1887.
I-lii.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. ii, 65,
1887.
Ilisees. Mentioned by Ker (Travels, 98,
1816) as the native name of a tribe, num-
bering a>)<>ut 2,000, which he says he met
on upper Red r. of I Louisiana, apparently
in the n. e. corner of Texas. Their chief
village \Mis said to Ik* Wascoo. Both the
tribe and the village are seemingly imag-
inary.
Iliuliuk (Aleut: 'harmony'). A town
on Unala.*^ka id., Alaska, the headouar-
ters of the commercial interests of the
Aleutians (Schwatka, Mil. Recon., 115,
1885). Po[). 196 in 1831, 406 in 1880, 317 in
1890.
Gavanakoe.— Veniaminoff. Zaprski, ii, 202, 1840
(Russian: *harlH)r'). Gavanskoi.— Elliott, Cond.
Aff. Alaska. 1875. Oawanskoje.— Holmberg, Eth-
nog. Skizz.. maj). 1855. Iljljuljuk.— Ibid. Illoo-
look.— Elliott, Our Arct. Prov.. map. 1880. Oona-
laaka.— Schwatka, Mil. Recon.. 11,5. 1885. TJna-
laaka,— 11th Census. Alaska. 8*<, 1898.
Iliutak. A Kuskwogmiut t^kimo vil-
lage on Kuskokwim bay, Alaska; ])op.
40 in 1880.
niutagamute.— Petroff. Rep. on Ala.ska. 53, 1884.
Ilkatsho ('the big fattening'). A vil-
lage of the Ntshaautin on the lake at the
head of Black water r., Brit. Col. The
{>opulati()n is a mixed one of TakuUi and
Bellacoola descent.
al'katco.— Moriee in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can.. 109,
1892. •T'ka-tco.— Morice, Notes on W. D<>n<^s, 25,
1893. TJhlchako.— (^an. Ind. Aff., 285, 1902. y
Illinois {Ilinhrekj from itinl *man*, hv \^^ ^
* is', f^* plural teniiination,changtHl by the
French to ois). A confederacy of Algon-
quian tribes, formerly occupying s. Wis-
consin, n. Illinois, and sections of Iowa and
Missouri, comprising the Cahokia, Kas-
kaskia, Michigamea, Moingwona, Peoria,
and Tamaroa.
The Jesuit Relation for 1660 represents
them as livings, w. of Green bay. Wis., in
60 villaces, and gives an extravagant esti-
mate of the population, 20,000 men, or
70,000 souls. The statement in the Jes-
uit Relations that they came from the
border of a great sea in the far W. arose,
no doubt (as Tailhan suggests), from a
misunderstanding of the term ** great
water," given by the Indians, which in
fact referred to the Mississippi. Their
exact location when first heard of by the
whites can not be determined with cer-
tainty, as the tribes and bands were more
598
ILLINOIS
[b. a. b.
or less scattered over s. Wisconsin, n.
Illinois, and along the w. bank of the
Mississippi as far s. as Des Moines r.,
Iowa. The whites first came in actual
contact with them (unless it be true that
Nicollet visited them) at La Pointe
(Shaugawaumikonc), where Allouez met
a party in 1667, which was visiting that
point for pur]>ose8 of trade. In 1670 the
same prient found a number of them at
the Mascoutin village on upper Fox r.,
some 9 m. from where Portage City now
stands, but this band then contemplated
joining their brethren on the Mississippi.
The conflicting statements regarding the
number of their villages at this period
and the indefiniteness as to localities ren-
der it diflBcult to reach a satisfactory con-
clusion on these points. It appears that
some villages were situated on the w. side
of the Mississippi, in what is now Iowa,
yet the major portion of the tribes belong-
ing to the confederacy resided at points
in N. Illinois, chiefly on Illinois r. When
Marquette journeyed down the Missis-
sippi in 1673 he found the Peoria and Mo-
ingwena on the w. side, about the mouth
of Des Moines r. On his return, 2
months later, he found them on Illi-
nois r., near the present city of Peoria.
Thence he passed n. tathe village of Kas-
kaskia, then on upper Illinois r., within
the present Lasalle co. At this time the
village consisted of 74 cabins and was occu-
pied by one tribe only. Hennepin esti-
mated them, about 1680, at 400 houses and
1 , 800 warriors, or about 6, 500 souls. A few
years later ( 1 690-94 ) missionaries reported
it to consist of 350 cabins, occupied by 8
tribes or bands. Father Sebastian Rasles,
who visited the village in 1692, placed the
numberofcabin8at300,eachof 4 ** fires,"
with 2 families to a fire, indicating a pop-
ulation of about 9,000— perhaps an ex-
cessive estimate. The evidence, however,
indicates that a large part of the confeder-
acy was gathered at this point for awhile.
The Kaskaskia at this time were in some-
what intimate relation with the Peoria,
since Gravier, who returned to their vil-
lage in 1700, says he found them prepar-
ing to starts., and believed that if he could
have arrived sooner **the Kaskaskians
would not thus have seimrated from the
Peouaroua [Peoria] and other Illinois."
By his persuasion thev were induced to
stop in 8. Illinois at the point to which
their name was given. The Cahokia and
Tamaroa were at this time living at their
historic seats on the Mississippi in s. Illi-
nois. The Illinois were almost constantly
harassed by the Sioux, Foxes, and other
northern tribes; it was probably on this
account that they concentrated, about the
time of La Salle' 8 visit, on Illinois r. About
the same time the Iroquois waged war
against them, which lasted several years,
and greatly reduced their numbers, while
liguor obtained from the French tended
still further to weaken them. About the
year 1750 they were still estimated at
from 1,500 to 2,000 souls. The murder
of the celebrated chief Pontiac, by a
Kaskaskia Indian, about 1769, provoked
the vengeance of the Lake tribes on the
Illinois, and a war of extermination was
begun which, in a few years, reduced
them to a mere handful, who took refuge
with the French settlers at Kaskaskia,
while the Sauk, Foxes, Kickapoo,*and
Potawatomi took possession of their coun-
try. In 1778 the Kaskaskia still num-
bered 210, living in a village 3 m. n. of
Kaskaskia, while the Peoria and Michi-
gamea together numbered 170 on the Mis-
sissippi, a few miles farther up. Both
bands had become demoralized and gen-
erally worthless through the use of liquor.
In 1800 there were only about 150 left.
In 1833 the survivors, represented by the
Kaskaskia and Peoria, sold their lands in
Illinois and removed w. of the Mississippi,
and are now in the n. e. comer of Okla-
homa, consolidated with the Wea and
Piankashaw. In 1885 the consolidated
Peoria, Kaskaskia, Wea, and Piankashaw
numbered but 149, and even these are
much mixed with white blood. In 1905
their number was 195.
Nothing definite is known of their tri-
bal divisions or clans. In 1736, accord-
ing to Chauvignerie (N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., IX, 1056-1855), the totem of the
Kaskaskia was a feather of an arrow,
notche<l, or two arrows fixed like a St
Andrew's cross; while the Illinois as a
whole had the crane, bear, white hind,
fork, and tortoise totems.
In addition to the principal tribes or
divisions above mentioned, the following
are given by early writers as seemingly
belonging to the Illinois: Albivi, Amono-
koa, Chepoussa, Chinko, Coiracoentanon,
EspemiuKia, and Tapouara. In general
their villages bore the names of the tribes
occupying them, and were constantly va-
rying in numl>er and shifting in location.
The Illinois are described by early
writers as tall and robust, with pleasant
visages. The descriptions of their char-
acter given by the early missionaries differ
widely, but altogether they appear to have
been timid, easily driven from their
homes by their enemies, fickle, and
treacherous. They were counted excel-
lent archers, and, besides the bow, used
in war a kind of lance and a wooden club.
Polygamy was common among them, a
man sometimes taking several sisters as
wives. Unfaithfulness of a wife was pun-
ished, as among the Miami, the Sioux, the
Apache, and other tribes, by cutting off
BULL. 30]
ILLUMINATION
590
the nose of the offending woman, and as
the men were very jealous, this punish-
ment was often inflicted on mere suspicion.
It was not the custom of the Illinois, at
the time the whites first became acquaint-
e<l with them, to bury their dead. The
body was wrapped in skins and attached
by the feet and head to trees. There is
reason, however, to believe, from discov-
eries that have been made in mounds
and ancient graves, which appear to be
attributable to some of the Illinois tribes,
that the skeletons, after the flesh had
rotted away, were buried, often in rude
stone sepulchers. Prisoners of war were
usually sold to other tribes.
According to Hennepin, the cabins of
the more northerly tribes were made like
long arbors and covered with double mats
of flat flags or rushes, so well sewed that
they were never penetrated by wind,
. snow, or rain. To each cabin were 4 or
5 fires, and to each fire 2 families, indi-
cating that each dwelling housed some 8
or 10 families. Their towns were not
inclosed.
The villages of the confederacy noted in
history are Cahokia (mission), Immacu-
late Conception (mission), Kaskaskia,
Matchinkoa, Moingwena, Peoria, ami
Pimitoui. (j. m. c. t.)
Abimiouec.— Doo. of 1660 in Margry, Dec, i, 54,
1875 (b=l). AbimiSec— Jes. Kel. I(i60, 12, 1858
ib=l). Alimouek.— Ibid., 1667, 21. Alimouk.—
ibid.. HI, index, 1858. Aliniouek.— Ibid., 1658, 21.
AliniSek.— Ibid., 1660, 12 (correction in errata).
AlinoueokB.— Coxe, Carolana, 19, 1741. Allinou-
eokt.— Ibid., 49. ChicktaghickB.— Golden (1727),
Five Nations, 30, 1747 (Iroquois name). Ohiotag-
hioks.— Smith in Williams, Vermont, i, 501, 1809.
Ohigtaghoiokt. — Golden, op. cit., 31. Ohiktaohiks.—
Homann, map, 1756. Eriniouai.-Jes. Rel. 1640. 35,
1858. Eriniwek.— Ibid., Ill, index, 1858. Oeghdag-
eghroano.— Post (1758) in Prond, Pa., ii.app., 113,
1798. Geghtigeghroones.— Canajoharie conf . ( 1759)
in N. Y. Doc. Gol. Hist., vn. 384. 1856. Hilini.—
Brinton, Lenape Leg., 213, 1885. Hiliniki.— Rafin-
esque, Am. Nations, i, 139, 1836 (Delaware name).
nimouek.— Jes. Rel. 1670, 101, 1858. Iline.— Hervas
(1785) in Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 347, 1816 (It^U-
ian form). Ilinese.— I^ Hontan.New Voy., i, 217,
1703. nineien.—Walch, map, 1805 (German form).
ninioiiek.— Jes. Rel. 1667, 18, 1858. Ilinoii.— Ibid..
1670, 86. ninoiieU.— Ibid., 1670, 92. Ilinonetz.—
Ibid., 101. lUonois.— Proud, Pa., 11,296, 1798. lUe-
noii.— Morse, North Am., map, 1776. Illeno-
neoks.— Ibid., 255. niiooueok.— Goxc, Carolana, 17,
1741. niimouec— Jes. Rel. 1667, 21, 1858. niineM.—
Hennepin, Coiit. of New Diacov., 88, 1698. niine-
•en.—Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 341, 1816 (German
form), n-li-ai.— Hough in Indiana Geol. Rep.,
map, 1883. Illiiiiens.— Hennepin, op. cit. 45b.
niiniwek.— Shea.Cath. Miss., 348, 1855. niinoiai.—
Niles (1761?) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th a., v,
541, 1861. nUaoii.— Prise de Possession (1671) in
• Margry, Ddc., i, 96, 1875. niinoix.— Brackenridge,
La.. 132, 1815. IllinoneckB.— Morse, North Am.,
255, 1798. niinoneekt.— Doc. of 1719 in N. C. Rec,
n, 351,1886. niinouecks.— Coxe, Carolana, 49, 1741.
nionese.— Schermerhom (1812) in Mass. Hl.st. Soc.
Coll., 2d 8., II, 3, 1814. nionoii.— Campbell (1761),
ibid., 4th s., ix, 423, 1871. niuni.— AHouez (1665)
duoted by Ramsey in Ind. Aflf. Rep., 71, 1850.
Iriiiioii8.-Jes. Rel. 1642. 97. 1858. Isle aux Koiz.—
Lapham, Ind's of Wis., 4. 1870 ('Walnut island':
a form used by some author, who probably mis-
took Illinois for a corrupted French word). Irii-
noia.— La Salle (1680) in Margry, D^c, ii, 33, 1877.
Kiohtages.— Maryland treaty (1682) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., Ill, 325, 1853. Kioktaget.— Albany conf.
(1726), ibid., v, 791, 1855. Kighetowkigh Koanu.—
Dobbs, Hudson Bav, 28. 1744 (Iroquois name).
Klghtages.— Livingston (1720) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., V, 567, 1855. Lazars.— Croghan (1759) in
Rupp, West. Pa., 146, 1»4G. Lezar.— Croghan
quoted by Jefferson, Notes, 145, 1825 (probably
the Illinois). Liniouok.— Jes. Rel. 1656, 39,1858.
Linneways.— Brice, Ft Wayne, 121, 1868. Lin-
ways. — Croghan, op. cit. Hinnewayi. — Brice, Ft
Wayne, 121, 1868. Ondataouatouat.— Potier MS.
cited in Charlevoix, New France, ii, 270, note,
1866 (first applied by the Wyandot to the Ottawa,
afterward to the Illinois). Willinii.— Proud, Pa.,
II, 29(5, 1798. Witiihaxtanu.— Gatschet, Wyandot
MS., B. A. E., 1881 (from UshaxtAno, 'Illinois r.,'
Huron name for the Peoria, Kaskaskia, Wea, and
Piankashaw).
Illnminatioii. The employment of arti-
ficial light among the Indians was limited
by their simple habits and needs to the
ciimp-fire and the torch, in which respect
they are found in the same culture grade
as the ^lalay, the Negro, and the majority
of uncivilized peoples. The camp-fire,
built for the purpose of cooking food or
furnishing heat, supplied most of the
needed light. On s|)ecial occasions large
bonfires were made when ceremonies
were held and nocturnal illumination
was required. As a makeshift for the
torch, a brand was taken from the camp-
fire. When a continuous light was de-
sired the fire was fed with slivers of wood
set up in a circle and fed from one end
where a gap was
left in the cir-
cle, as among
the Cherokee; or
when a tempo-
rary light was
wanted among Eskimo lamp. 24 ,n. lo.g.
the Indians of British Columbia a little oil
was thrown on the coals. The torches
were of pine knots, rolls of bark, cane, or
other inflammable material, but bundles
of resinous wood, or masses of resin were
almost never made, the form of the In-
dian torch !)(ing of the most primitive
character. They were ustnl by night for
hunting and fishing; for instance, deer
were *'weequa8hed," or "jacked," by
means of torches, and fish were speared
and birds captured by light from pine
knots, especially among the eastern In-
dians. Lamps, however, have been ])08-
sessed from time immemorial by the
Eskimo, and they are the only aborigines
of the hemisphere who had such utensils.
In 8. Alaska the lamp ha« a narrow wick-
edge and is in the shape of a fiat-iron;
along the tundra n. of St Michael it is
a saucer of clay or stone; northward to
Point Barrow it is gibbous, with wide
wick-edge and made of soapstone. The
length of the wick-edge of the Eskimo
lamp has been observed to vary with the
latitude, that is, the higher the latitude
the longer the night, hence the greater
need for light, which is met by lengthen-
ing the margin of the lamp on which the
moss wick is placed, so that while in s.
600
ILMAWI IMNANGANA
[B.
Alaska the wick edpre is 2 or 3 in. long,
in Smith sd. it is 36 in. in length, and
between these geographical extremes
there is an increase in the size of the
lamp from lower to higher latitudes. In
at least two localities in the United States
the bodies of fish were burned for light —
the candle-fish of the N. W. coast and a
fresh-water fish of Penobscot r. in Maine.
Torches and fires were used for signal-
ing at night; the Apache set fire to the
resinous spines of the saguaro, or giant
cactus, for this purpose. The picturesque
and remarkable Fire-dance of the Navaho
described by Matthews is a good example
of the use of illumination in ceremonies.
Among many tribes fire forms an essential
part of a ceremony; in some cases, where
Indians have been induced to rehearse a
night ceremony by day, they do not omit
the fire, though artificial light is not re-
quired. A law of the Iroquois League
required that a messenger approaching a
camp-fire or village at night should carry
a torch in order to show the absence of
hostile intent. See Fire-making,
Consult Hough (1) Development of
Illumination, Smithson. Rep. 1901, 1902,
(2) The Range of the Eskimo Lamp, Am.
Anthrop., Apr. 1898, (3) The Lamp of the
Eskimo, Rep. Nat. Mus. 1896, 1898; Mat-
thews, Mountain Chant, 5th Rep. B. A. E.,
1887. (w. H.)
Umawi (own name; from ilmaj * river' ).
A tribe of the Achomawi division of the
Shastan family, formerly living on the s.
side of Pit r. ,* opp)Osite Ft Crook, Shasta
CO., Cal.
Ilhnaweei.— Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 412,
1874. n-ma'-wi.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
III, 267, 1877.
Ilrak (Frak). A former village of the
Ntshaautin sept of the Takulli of British
Columbia. — Morice in Trans. Can. Inst.,
IV, 25, 1893.
nsethlthawaiame. A former village of
the Mishikhwutmetunne on Coquille r.,
Greg.
TL'-mS^I ^-wai-i-m«.— Itorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, 111,232,1890.
Ilnilek. An Eskimo village, now de-
serted, on the E. coast of Greenland, lat.
60^20^.
lUnidlek.— Das Ausland . 162, 1886. IluUek. — Med-
delelser om Gronland. xxv, 23, 1902.
Imagnee. A former Aleut village on
Summer bay, Unalaska, e. Aleutian ids. ;
pop. 32 in 1830, 34 in 1884.
Lnagnak.— PetrofF in 10th Census, Alaska, 84, 1884.
Imagnee.— Baker, GeoR. Diet. Alaska. 215, 1902.
Imagniaakoe.— VeniaminofT, Zapiski, ii, 202, 1840.
Sinagnia.— Sarichef (1790) quoted by fiaker, op.
cit.
Imaha. A Quapaw village mentioned
by La Metairie in 1682 and by Iberville
in 1699, and visited by La Harpe in 1719.
It was situated on a s. w. branch of Ar-
kansas r. In the wars and contentions
of the 18th and 19th centuries some of
the Quapaw tribe fled from their more
northerly villages and took refuge among
the Caddo, Anally becoming a recognized ^
division of the confederacy. These were '
called Imaha, but whether the people
composing this division were from the
village Imaha, mentioned by the early
French travelers, is not absolutely known.
The people of the Imaha division of the
Caddo confederacy for some time re-
tained their own language, which was
Siouan. See Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A.
E., 1092, 1896. (A. c. F.)
Im&ham.— La Harpe (1719) in French, Hist. Coll.
La., pt III, 73, 1851 . Imahans.— JefTerys, Am. Atlas,
map 5, 1776. Imahao.— Iberville (1699) in Margry,
D6c., IV, 179, 1880.
Imaklimint. An Eskimo tribe occupy-
ing Big Diomede id., Bering strait. See
Ohioginiut.
Aohjuch-Aliat.— Dall in Smithson. Cont, xxii, 2,
1880. Iinaoh-leet.T— Jackson, Reindeer in Alaska,
map, 145, 1894. Imah-kU-mut.— Dall in Proc. A. A.
A. S., XXXIV. 377, 1886. Imakleet.— Wells and Kel-
ly, Eskimo-English and Eng.-Esk. Vocabs., chart,
1890. Imaklitginut.~ZagoAkin, Desc. Russ. Pees,
in Am., i, 73, 1847. Inalugmiut.— Woolfe in Uth
Census, Alaska, 130. 1893 (given to inhabitants of
both islands; see Inalik). Yikir^'ullt.— Bogo-
raa, Chukchee, 21, 1904 (Chukchi name for in-
habitantH of Diomede ids.).
Imarsivik. An Eskimo village of 21
people on the e. coast of Greenland. —
Nansen, Eskimo Life, 124, 1894.
Imekpnng (Ime^kptifl). An Utkiavin-
miut Eskimo camp near Pt Barrow,
Alaska. — Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. E.,
274, 1892.
Imiak. A Togiagmiut village at the out-
let of Aleknagik lake, Alaska. — Tebenkof
(1849) quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet.
Alaska, 1902.
Imicke. A Califomian tribe cited sev-
eral times and mentioned once as on
Kaweah r., Cal., which location, if cor-
rect, would make it part of the Mariposan
stock. The Wimilchi of Kings r. may
have been meant.
Eemitches.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 363, 1874.
Y-Mitchee.— Henley in Ind. Aff. Rep., 511, 1854 (at
Four rivers, near Tulare r.j. Ymitcnet.— Bancroft,
op. cit., I, 456 (misquoted from Henley).
Imigen ( * fresh water ' ) . One of the two
winter villages of the Kinguamiut, a
branch of the Okomiut Eskimo, on an
island at the head of Cumberland sd.;
pop. 17 in 1883.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A.E.,
map, 1888.
Imik. A former Aleut village on Agattu
id., Alaska, one of the Near id. group of
the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Immacalate Conceptioii. A mission es-
tablished bjr Marquette in 1674 among
the Kaskaskia, near Rockford, 111.
Immaculate Ooneeption.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 406,
1855. ImmAOul^ Conception de Kotre Dame anz
niinoii.— GravierCT) (1694) quoted by Shea, ibid.,
419.
Immakal. A former Chumashan village
in Ventura co., Cal., **not far from Jc«6
Carrillo's rancho*' in 1856.— Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, May 4, 1860.
Imnangana. The southernmost winter
settlement of the Ita Eskimo, situated at
C. York, N. Greenland.
BULL. 30]
IMNARKUAN IMPLEMENTS, TOOLS, UTENSILS
601
Ekadiaiumn.— Stein in Petermanns Mitt., no. 9,
map, 1902 ( =» 'salmon fishery' ) . Ignaaine.— Hell-
Srin, Peary Relief Exped., 102, 1893. Imaagen.—
[arkbam in Tranu. Ethnol. 8oo. Lond., 127, 1866.
Imna^n. — Ibid., 129. Tmnangana.— Kroeber in
Bull. Am. Mas. Nat. IILst., xii, 269, 1899. Imu-
anak.— Hayes, A ret. Boat Joum., 182, 1860.
Imnarknan (* where we make maple
sugar'). A Passamaquoddy village for-
merly on the site of Pembroke, Washing-
ton CO., Me. — Vetromile, Abnakis, 56,
1866.
ImoktegokBlmk. AKaviagmiut Et^kimo
village at C. Nome, Alaska; pop. 30 in
1880.
Imokhtagokhshuk.— PetrofT in 10th Census. Alaska,
11, 1884. Imokhtegokhshuk.— Ibid., map. Imok-
teioltthuk.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Imongalasha {Imoklasha^ 'their people
are there' ) . A former Choctaw settlement,
sometimes called West Imongalasha to
distinguish it from Imongalasha Skatane,
and also popularly known as Mokalusha.
It was situated on the headwaters of Tala-
sha cr., Neshoba co., Miss., and was the
most important Choctaw town in that
r^ion, the name appearing often in early
government records. Tecumseh visited
it in 1811 and held a council there. In
1824 it was almost abandoned owing to
the ravages of smallpox. The houses of
the settlement, with the small fields inter-
vening, covered an area of 3 m. n. and s.,
and IJ m. e. and w. It consisted of a
number of hamlets, the names of which,
from 8. to N., were Yaneka Chukkilissa,
Onaheli, Nanihaba, and Bihikonlo. — Hal-
bertinMiss. Hist. Soc.Publ.,vi, 431, 1902.
Imuklasha.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 138,
•1884.
Imongalasha Skatane ( Imoklasha Inkitui /,
* Little Impngalasha'). A former Choc-
taw town on the e. prong of Yazoo cr.,
now known as Flat cr., a n. affluent of
Petickfa cr., Kemper co.. Miss. — Halbert
in Miss. Hist. Soc. Pub., vi, 423, 1902.
East Koka-Lassa.— Romans, Florida, 310, 1775.
Imongolasha Skatani.— West Fla. map., ra. 1775.
Implements, Tools, Utensils. While a tool
is that with which something is made,
an implement that with which work is
done, and a utensil that in or on which
something is prepared or used up, they
can not always be distinguished among
primitive peoples, who utilize one thing
tor many purposes. Many forms are dis-
cussed under Art^ and InduMries and in
articles devoted to special activities. It
must be borne in mind that all such
devices were helpers of the skilful hand
and a vast deal of excellent work was done
with it alone.
The Indians of North America were in
the stone age and therefore every device
with which the arts of life were carried
on, whether implement, tool, or utensil,
was in harmony with this grade of cul-
ture. The arcneologist finds of such
objects in ancient remains and sites either
their substantial portions, or the perish-
able parts that have been accidentally
preserved, or impressions of them left on
pottery. By comparing these relics with
implements, tools, and utensils found in
actual iij^e among the Indians one is able
to partially reconstruct ancient industry
and read far backward into history. The
moment that the savages saw implements,
tools, and utensils of metal in the hands
of Europeans, they recognized the supe-
riority of these and adopted them. It
is interesting to note the modifications
that were made in hafting and using, in
order to adapt the new devices to old
ha'bits and customs. As of old, manual
parts were still carved, painted, and hung
with symbols, without which they were
thought to be ineffectual.
The instruments of handicraft were of
two classes — general, for common pur-
poses, and special, for particular indus-
tries. The general implements, tools,
and utensils mav he described in detail
(Holmes in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1901, 501,
1903):
Hammers. — Tha<e were made of stone
or other hard substance, with or without
handles. There were sledges, mauls,
and pile-drivers for two or more men.
Knives. — These were made conmionly
of chip|>ed or ground stone. Teeth, bone,
shell, and wood were also useil for the
purpose (Mc(iruire in Am. Anthrop., iv,
1891).
Saws. — These were of serrated stones,
shells, or other materials, and were
worked by rubbing with the edge, often
with the aid of sand with or without
w^ater.
Borers. — Many natural objects were
used for making holes in hard and soft ob-
jects, either by ])ressure, striking, vibrat-
ing, or revolving. They were held directly
in the hand or were hafted; were grasped
by one hand or by both hands; held be-
tween the [)alms or were worked by
means of strap, bow, or pump (McGuire
in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1894, 623, 1896) . (See
Drills and Drilling.)
Axes. — The stone ax, rudely flaked or
highly i)olished, plain or grooved, ranging
in weight from a few ounces to many
pounds in the ceremonial ax, was
universal. It was held in the hand or
attached in various ways to a handle by
means of rawhide, but was never fur-
nished with an eye for a helve. Other
substances were occasionally used, as
shell, iron ore, and copper, but the stone
ax was the main reliance. The blade
could be easily turned at right angles, and
then the implement became an adz. ( See
Adzes, Axes J Celts. )
Scrapers. — The scraper was also a tool
of wide dispersion. In shape it re-
sembled a chisel blade with a beveled
edge. The rudest were sharp spalls of
siliceous stone, held in the hand with or
602
IMPLEMENTS, TOOLS, UTENSILS
[b. a. e.
without padding; others were of smooth
materials set into handles or grips that
snugly fitted the workwoman's hand.
One variety was made for scraping hides,
another for scraping wood.
Nippers. — These include all devices for
holding tightly an object or holding parts
together while being worked. Hinged
varieties were not known, but the Eskimo,
especially, had several inventions to do
the work of clani|)s, pincers, tweezers, or
the vise with the aid of wedges.
The simple mechanical powers, the
wedge, the lever, and the inclined plane,
were universally understood. The screw
was employed but sparingly, if at all.
The N. W. coast tribes used rollers, skids,
and parbuckles to move great house beams
into place, and the Alaskan Eskimo, ac-
cording to Elliott, landed the walrus by
means of a sliding tackle looped over
pegs driven into cracks in the rocks and
run through slits in the hide. The wheel
and axle were entirely unknown, save in
their most primitive form, the spindle.
Power for doing work with the devices
just described was derived from the mus-
cle of the worker. The wind was utilized
here and there, blowing upon a fixed mat
erected for a sail, but nothing was known
of shi fting sails. The Indians made good
use of fire in clearing ground for planting,
in felling trees, excavating canoes, and
making pitch and glue. Bellows were not
used, but the blowtube existed. Water
wheels were unknown, and in the matter
of using nature's forces for work northern
America was inaprimitivestateof culture.
The special implements, tools, and uten-
sils employed in the various aboriginal
industries are enumerated below. They
are also treated more fully in separate
articles.
Agriculture. — Digging sticks, hardened
in fire and sharpened, and often weighted ;
dibbles, hoes, scarecrows, harvesting de-
vices, husking pegs, granaries, and caches
were common. For harvesting both wild
and cultivated produce various tribes had
tongs for picking the cactus fniit, stone
implements for opening hulls or shells,
baskets for gatherinj^, carrying, and stor-
ing, poles for reaching fruit, harvesting
apparatus for grass seed, wild rice, camas,
wokas, coonti, maize, etc. (See Agricul-
ture. Food.)
Bark work. — Peelers, shredders, twist-
ers, sewing tools, pitching tools.
Boat building. — Axes, adzes, saws,
borers, hammers, knives, pitch and paint
brushes, and fire.
Currying. — Packing baskets, hide cases,
walking sticks, special costumes, and a
provision of compact food, as pemmican,
dried fish, and crisp bread. The making
up of burdens into neat loads for han-
dling and for the back was understood
and further completed by means of head-
bands, breast straps, and shoulder straps.
The dog was here and there a pack beast
and harness was devised.
Cooking. — Besides open roasting, gril-
ling frames of wood, and pits for baking
and steaming, there were stone slabs for
parching seeds and for baking bread; pot-
tery and baskets for boiling (the latter by
the help of heated stones), and soapstone
utensils for preparing meat and other
food. (See /bod.)
Curing food. — Drying frames, smoking
devices.
Fishing. — Besides fishing implements
proper, the fisher's outfit included canoes,
paddles, weirs, dams, anchor stones, etc.
Plastic art. — In the technic of this in-
dustr)r belong all tools and implements
used in quarrying clays and preparing
them for the potter, all devices emploved
in building up, smoothing, polishing,
and decorating ware, and the apparatus
for burning. ( See Pottery. )
Quarrying^ mining j and stone working. —
Digging sticks, mauls, hammers, edge
tools for making lamps, and dishes and
other receptacles of soapstone, chipping
and other shaping tools and implements,
carrying apparatus, flakers, chippers,
polishers.
Textile industries. — All implements and
tools needed in gathering roots, stems,
and leaves as materials, and those used
in preparing these for matting, bagging,
basketry, blankets, robes, lacework, net-
work, thread, string, and rope; finally all
inventions employed in manufacturing
these products, (^^ee Basketry, Blankets^
Weaving. )
Whaling. — Suit of water-tight clothing;
kaiak and paddle; harpoon, with line;
skin floats; lance.
Woodcraft. — Ax, knife, saw, adz, chisel,
borers, rasps, polishers, paint brushes,
rollers, moving and setting up devices.
(See Woodwork.)
For serving and consuming food, knives
were necessary; spoons were fashioned
of natural objects, esi>ecially of wood,
horn, and gourd, but there were no. forks
or individual dishes or tables. Much
food was consumed on the spot where it
was found. The Indians had manifold
apparatus for making, preserving, and
using fire; for cooking, lighting, and heat-
ing. Shovels were used for baking bread.
The outfit for harvesting and preparing
acorns included gathering basket, for
which the woman's hat was often used,
carrying hamper, granary, hulling mill,
mortar, hopper basket, meal mat, leach-
ing pit, cooking basket, mush basket, and
eating bowls. Milling implements in
general included natural bowlders and
pebbles; mortars of wood, stone, bone,
or hide; pestles of the same materials;
BULL. 80]
IMTUK IMURIS
603
metates of Varying degrees of texture,
with manos to correspond; baskets to
serve as hoppers and to catch meal, and
brooms. Hunters' implements includod
a vast number of accessory apparatus for
making weapons effectual.
Devices for binding or permanently
holding two part^ together, pegs, lash-
ings, and cement were used (see (V-
meni). In the absence of metal and rat-
tan, rawhide, sinew, roots of evergreen
trees, splits of tough wockI, pitch, and
animal glue performed the necessary
function. In the aboriginal economy no
great stones were mov^, but large logs
were sometimes transported many miles.
Metric devices of the North Americans
were very crude compared with modern
standards, but were exactly adapted to
their neeils. A man fitted his boat and
all its appurtenances to his body, just as
he did his clothing. The hunter, basket
maker, potter, tentmaker, weighed and
measured by means of the same standard.
For securing uniform thickness the N. \V.
coast tribes l)oreil holes through hulls of
dugouts, and ran slender plugs into them
which were used as gauges. Usually the
parts of the body were the only gauges.
(See Measurements. )
Straightenerswere made of wood, stone,
horn, or ivory for bending wood and other
substances to shape. Digging sticks, dib-
bles, and the whole class of implements
jfor making holes in the gn)und were used
also for working in (juarries, for getting
wonns and the like from the bt^ch or
the earth, and for digging roots for food
or for textile and other industrial pur-
poses. Tongs were employed in moving
hot stones, in gathering cactus fruit, and
in capturing snakes.
Dwellings were of such varying types
and forms that their construction in dif-
ferent areas required the services of differ-
ent kinds of work — that of the tentmaker,
the joiner, the mason, or the snow worker,
with their different implements, in(!lud-
ing shovels, axes, trowels, adzes, levers,
parbuckles, etc. (see Architecture, Habi-
tations), The joiner's outfit included
many devices, from those for haftin^ to
those for house building, tent framing,
boat fitting, and the use of roots and
thongs. Puncheons were hewn out, but
there was no mortising. Rafting, the
joining of the working part of a tool to
the manual part, was accomplishe<l vari-
ously by drivmg in, groove, splice, socket,
tongue-'and-groove, or mortising, and the
fastening was done with pegs or lashing.
For the shaping arts, the working of
stone, wood, and other hard substances,
the apparatus varied with the material,
and consisted of knives, hammers, wedges,
saws, files, polishers, borers, adzes, and
chisels, made out of materials best suited
always to their uses. (See Art^ Sculpture,
Stone work y Woodwork.)
The propelling of all sorts of water craft
was done by paddling, by poling, by
<lragging over nmd, and by towing. No
oars or rudders were used. Vessels were
made water-tight with pitch or by the
swelling of the wooil. The roj>e or raw-
hide line for dragging a canoe along shore
is known as a cordelle, the French-
Canadian term. Portage, the moving of
a bark canoe from one body of water to
another, was accomplished by carrying
load and canoe separately, sliding the
empty canoe over mud, or shooting rapids
in it. (See BoatSy Commerce^ Drarel and
Transportation. )
The making of snowshoes was an im-
portant occupation in the N., requiring
great skill and manifold tools and devices.
Ice and snow implements and utensils
useil in the higher latitudes include picks
with ivory or stone blades, shovels with
wooden blade and ivory edge, creepers
for the l)oots, l)oat hooks for warding off
and drawing canoes, sleds, and the indis-
pensable snowshoes. The Eskimo were
mgenious in devising such implements.
They had shovels with edges of walrus
ivory, walking sticks for going over the
snow, snow goggles, snowshoes, and snow
trowels and knives for housebuilding;
also ice picks and crowbars and hooks
and scoops for cutting and moving ice.
See Arts and Industries, and the sub-
jects cited thereunder; also the articles
describing special types of implements,
tools, and utensils, and the materials from
which they are made. (o. t. m.)
Imtnk. A Yuit Eskimo village near
Indian pt, n. e. Siberia; pop. 43 in 9
houses about 1895, 65 in 12 houses in
1901. Most of its people are of the
Aiwan division, but 4 families are from
Cherinak.
I'mtuk.— BogontM, Chukchee, 29, 1904. I'mtun.—
Ibid. (Chukchi name).
Imukfa ( Hitchiti: * shell,' also referring
to a metallic ornament of concuve shape;
applied possibly in allusion to the bend
in the river). A subordinate settlement
of the Up[)er Creek town Oakfuski, on a
creek of the same name, a short distance
w. of Tallapoosa r., Ala. A battle was
fought there Jan. 24, 1814, in the Creek
war, and the celebrated battle of the
Horseshoe Bend, on Mar. 25 of the same
year, took place in the immediate
vicinity. (a. s. g.)
Emucfau.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 371, 1857.
Emuckfau.— Pickett, Hist. Ala., ii, 332-339, 1869.
Emuckfaw.— Drake. Bk. Inds., bk. iv, 50, 1848.
Emukfau.— Ibid., 59. Im-mook-fau.— Hawkins
(1799), Sketch, 46, 1848.
Imuris. Given by early authorities as
a Pima rancheria near the e. bank of
Rio San Ignacio (or Magdalena), lat.
30° 50^ lon^. 110° 50^, in the present
Sonora, Mexico. Orozco y Berra men-
604
INAJALAIHU — INDELCHIDNTI
[b. a. k.
tion8 the Himeris (who are evidently the
inhabitants of this settlement) , with the
Opata. If they belonged to the latter,
Imures was doubtless the last Opata set-
tlement toward the n., and the earlier
writers did not, in this case, distinguish
the Opata from the Pima. Imuris was
visited by Father Kino as early as 1699,
and the Ijell in its church bears the date
1680. It was afterward a visita of San
Ignacio mission (Rudo Ensayo, ca. 1762,
153, 1863), with 80 inhabitants in 1730.
It is now a civilized pueblo. Of its 637
inhabitants in 1900, 74 were Mayo and 32
Yaqui. (f. w. h.)
Himarei.— Kino, map. in Stocklein, Neue Welt-
Bott, 74, 1726. jEimeru. — Orozco y Berra, Qeog.,
58, S44, 1864. Himuri.— Rudo Ensayo (ca. 1762),
153, 1863. Imom.— Box, Adventures, 277, 1869.
Imuret.— Kino (16%) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th
8., I, 267, 1866. Imurw.—Hardy, Travels, 427,
1829. Imuri.— Kino {ca. 1699) in I)oc. Hist. Mex.,
4th 8., I, 348, 1856. Imum.— Font, map (1777) in
Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 393. 1889. Imurli.—
Hardy, Travels, 432, 1S29. S. Jo«e Imuri.— Rivera
(1730) in Bancroft. No. Mex. States, i, 514, 1884.
Uburiqui.— Kino (ca. 1699) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th
8., I, a4H, 1856. Ymurex.— Bandelier, Gilded Man,
179, 1893.
Inajalaihn. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Bancroft,
Nat. Races, i, 459, 1874.
Inalik. An Inguklimiut village on
Little Diomede id., Alaska. The name
of the people was extended by Woolfe
(11th Census, Alaska, 130, 1893} to in-
clude the inhabitants of both islands. —
Nelson, 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899.
Inam. The best known village of the
upper division of the Karok, speaking
the Karakuka dialect. Situated on Kla-
math r. , at or near the mouth of Clear cr. ,
N. w. Cal. It was the scene of the Deer-
skin dance and of an annual "world-
making" ceremony. (a. l. k. )
E-nam.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23, 1860.
Inaqtek (Inafkhtek^ 'raven'). A sub-
phratry or gens of the Menominee. — Hoff-
man in 14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. i, 42, 1896.
Inaflpetsam. One of the tribes included
by the early fur traders under the term
Nez Perc<^^ (Ross, Fur Hunters, i, 185,
1855). They lived on Columbia r., above
the mouth of the Snake, in Washington.
Perhaps they were the Winatahipum or
the Kalispel. (l. f. )
Incense. Incense, from the Latin incen-
dercy 'to burn,' is defined as anything
burned to produce a pleasant sweet smell
during religious rites. It may be regard-
ed as direct sacrifice, as symbolic of as-
cending prayer, or as an aid to spiritual ex-
altation. I ncense has been in almost uni-
versal use from the earliest historic period,
particularly in the more highly organized
ancient religions. In Mexico and adja-
cent parts various resinous gums known
collectively under the Aztec name of
copallit or copal, were used. North of the
Rio Grande the plant substances most
commonly employed forthe same purpose
were tobacco, in various native varieties;
the dried tops of Thuja, and other ce-
dars; spruce and pine needles, particu-
larly those of Abies and Pintts ponder ota;
sweet grass ( «Sava8f ana o<iorato ), Artemisia,
and the root of the balsam-root {Balsam"
orrhiza). Tobacco was used in one way
or another in important ceremonials over
almost the whole area of the United States
and along the N. W. coast, and in the
Canadian interior. Pine needles were
most commonly used among the Pueblos
and other tribes of the S. W. In the
noted Hopi snake dance the smoke of
burning juniper tops was blown through
tubes knownas "cloud-blowers" until the
kiva was filled with the pleasing fra-
grance. Cedar tops, sweet grass, and
wild sage were more common in cere-
monies of the Plains Indians, especially
the Peyote rite, and parcels of the dried
substance were sometimes attache<i to
sacrifice poles or deposited with the
corpse in the grave or on the scaffold.
With some trills the twigs and leaves of
the plant were differentiated as male and
female. The balsam root was burned in
small quantities in every great sweat-
house rite among the Plains tribes and
was held so precious that sometimes a
horse was given for a single root. Among
the Siksika, according to W^issler, every
tipi contains an altar — a small excavation
in the earth — where sweet gum is burned
daily.
There were also a number of vegetal
perfumes used for personal gratification,
either by rubbing the juice of the crushed
plant over the skin or by wearing the
leaves or dried tops in little bags at-
tached to the clothing. The Southern
Ute mother placed sweet-smelling herbs
under the pillow of her baby. One of
the ingredients of the secret medicine
employed by the Buffalo doctors among
the Plains tribes in treating wounds is be-
lieved to have been the strong smelling
musk of the beaver. ( j. m. )
Incha. A n unidentified tribe said to have
lived where there were Spanish settle-
ments and to have been at war with the
Man tons (Mento) of Arkansas r. in 1700.
loca.— Iberville (1702) in Margry, D6c., iv, 661,
1880. Ineha.—Ibid., 599.
Inchi ( Jr^td, * stone lodge *), A village
occupied by the Kansa in their migration
up Kansas r. — J. O. Dorsey, inf n, 1882.
Incomecanetook (Income'Can-Hook).
Given by Ross (Advent., 290, 1847) as an
Okinagan tribe.
Indak. A former Maidu village on the
site of Placerville, Eldorado co., Cal. —
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist,
XVII, pi. xxxviii, 1905.
Indelehidnti ( ' pine') . An Apache clan
or band at San Carlos agency and Pt
Apache, Ariz., in 1881 (Bourke in Jour.
Am. Folk-lore, iii. 111, 1890); identical
BULL. 30]
INDIAN
605
with Indilche-dentiene, * Live in country
with large pine trees' (White/ Apache
Names of Indian Tribes, MS., B. A. E.),
a band formerly under chief Narchubeu-
lecolte.
Indian. The common designation of
the aborigines of America. The name
first occurs in a letter of CJolumbus dated
Feb., 1493, wherein the discoverer speaks
of the Indios he had with him (F. F.
Hilder in Am. Anthrop., n. s., i, 545,
1899). It was the general belief of the
day, shared by Columbus, that in his
voyage across the Atlantic he had reached
India. This term, in spite of its mislead-
ing connotation, has passed into the lan-
guages of the civilized world: ImUo in
Spanish, Portuguese, and Italian; Indien
in French ; Indianer in German, etc. The
term American Indian, for which it has
been proposed to substitute^ Amerind
(q. V. ), is however in common use; less so
the objectionable term redskins, to which
correspond the French Peaux-rouges,
the German Rothhante. Brinton titled
his book on the aborigines of the New
World, "The American Race,'* but this
return to an early use of the word Amer-
ican can hardly be successful. In geo-
graphical nomenclature the Indian is
well remembered. There are Indian
Territory, Indiana, Indianapolis, Indian-
ola, Indio. Besides these, the maps and
gazetteers record Indian arm, bay, bayou,
beach, bottom, branch, brook, camp, cas-
tle, cove, creek, crossing, diggings, draft,
fall, field, fields, ford, ^ap, grove, gulch,
harbor, head, liill, hilts, island, lake,
mills, mound, mountain, neck, orchanl,
pass, point, pond, ridge, river, rock, run,
spring, springs, swamp, town, trace, trail,
valley, village, and wells, in various parts
of the United States and Canada. The
term Red Indian, applied to the Beothuk,
has given Newfoundland a number of
place names.
Many wild plants have been called
** Indian" in order to mark them off from
familiar sorts. Use ])y Indians has l)een
the origin of another class of such terms.
The following plants have been called
after the Indian:
Indian apple, — The May apple, or wild
mandrake ( Podophyllum peltaium ) .
Indian arrow, — The burning bush, or
wahoo ( Euonymus atropurpurens ) .
Indian arrow-wood, — The flowering dog-
wood, or cornelian tree ( 0)mu8 ftorida).
Indian halm, — The erect trilliuin, or ill-
scented wake-robin {Trillium erectum),
Indian bark. — The laurel magnolia, or
sweet bay (Magnolia Hrginiana),
Indian bean. — (1 ) The catalpa, or bean-
tree ( Catalpa catalpa ), ( 2 ) A New Jersey
name of the groundnut (Apios apios),
Indian beard-grass, — The bushy beard-
I {Andropogon glomeratus).
Indian bitters, — A North Carolina name
of the Fraser umbrella or cucumber tree
(Magnolia fraser i ) ,
Indian black drink. — The cassena, yau-
pon, black drink (q. v.), or Carolina tea
(Ilex cassine).
Indian boys andgirU. — A western name
of the Dutchman's breeches (BikukuUa
cunillaria).
Indian bread, — The tuckahoe (Scelero-
tium giganteum),
Indian bread-root, — The prairie turnip,
or pomme blanche (Psoralea esculenta).
Indian cedar. — ^The hop-hornbeam, or
iron wood ( OMrya Hrginiana),
Indian cherry, — (1) The service-berry,
or june-berry (Amelanchier canadensis).
(2) The Carolina buckthorn (Rhamnus
caroliniana).
Indian chickweed. — The carpet- weed
( Mollugo rerticillata) .
Indian chief. — A western name of the
American cowslip or shooting-star (D<t-
decatheon meadia).
Indian cigar tree. — The common catalpa
( Catalpa catalpa) j a name in use in Penn-
sylvania, Maryland, and the District of
Columbia. See Indian bean, above.
Indian corn. — Maize (Zea mays), for
which an early name was Indian wheat.
Indian cnnimber. — Medeola rirginianoj
also known as Indian cucumber-root.
Indian cup. — (1) The common pittrher-
plant (Sarracenia purpurea ). (2) The cui>
plant (Silphiuni perfoliatum).
Indian currant. — Thec^oral-berry (Sym-
phoricarpos ridg(tris).
Indian dye. — The yellow puccoon or
orange-root (IIydrcu<tis canadensis); also
known as yellow-root.
Indian elm. — The slippery-elm ( Vlmns
fnlra).
Indian fig. — (1) The eastern prickly
pear. (Opmitia opnntia). (2) Cereus gi-
ganteuSf or saguaro, the giant cereus of
Arizona, California, Mexico, and New
Mexico.
Indian fog. — The crooked yellow stone-
crop or dwarf houseleek (Sedum reflexum),
Indian gravel-root. — The tall boneset or
joe-pye-weed (E'npatoriiun purjmrenvt).
Indian hemp. — ( 1 ) The army-root ( Apo-
cynum cannabinuni), called also black In-
dian hemp. (2) The swamp milkweed
(Asclepias incamala) and the hairy milk-
weed (A. jmlchra), called also white In-
dian hemp. (3) A West Virginia name
for the yellow toad-flax ( Linaria linaria).
(4) The velvet-leaf [Abntilon abutilon),
called also Indian mallow.
Indian hippo. — The bow man' s-root ( Por-
teranthus trifoliatus), called also Indian
physic.
Indian lemonade. — A California name,
according to Bergen, for the flagrant
sumac (Rhus trilobata).
606
INDIAN
[ B. A. B.
Indian lettuce. — The round-leaved win-
terereen {Pyrola rotundifolia) .
Indian mallow, — (1) The velvet-leaf
{Abvlilon abutilon)j also known as Indian
hemp. (2) The prickly sida (Sida gpi-
nosa).
Indian melon, — A Colorado name of a
species of Echinocactus,
Indian millet, — The silky oryzopsis
{Oryzopsis ctispidata),
Indian moccasin. — The stemless lady's-
slipper or moccasin-flower ( Cypripedium
acaule),
Indian mozemizCj or moose misse. — The
American mountain-ash or dogberry (Sor-
bus americana).
Indianpaint. — (1 ) The strawberry-blite
(Blitum capitatum). (2) The hoary puc-
coon (Lithospermum. canescens). (3) A
Wisconsin name, according to Bergen, for
a species of Tradescantia, (4) Bloodroot
{Sanguinaria canadensis) ^ called red In-
dian paint. (5) The yellow puccoon ( Hy-
drastis canadensis) J called yellow Indian
paint.
Indian paint-brush. — The scarlet-paint-
ed cup ( Castilleja coccinea) .
Indian peach. — Ungrafted peach trees,
according to Bartlett, which are consid-
ered to be more thrifty and said to bear
larger fruit. In the South a specific
variety of clingstone peach.
Indian pear. — The service-berry (Ame-
lanchier canadensis) J called also wild In-
dian pear.
Indian physic. — (1) The bowman' s-
root {Porteranthus trifoliatiLs) ^ called also
Indian hippo. (2) American ipecac ( Por-
teranthus stipulatus). (3) Eraser's mag-
nolia, the long-leaved umbrella-tree
( Magnolia fraseri ) .
Indian pine. — The loblolly, or old-field
pine ( Pin us taeda ) .
Indian ])ink'. — (1) The Carolina pink,
or worm-grass ( Spigelia marylandica ). ( 2 )
The cypress- vine (Quamoclit quamoclit).
( 3 ) The fi re pink ( Silene virginica ). ( 4 )
The cuckoo-flower, or ragged-robin
(Lychnis flos-cuculi). (5) The fringed
milkwort, or polygala (Poly gala pauci-
folia). (6) The scarlet-painted cup ( Cas-
tilleja coccinea) , (7) The wild pink (Si-
lene pennsylvanica) . (8) Silene calif omica,
Indian pipe. — ^The corpse-plant or ghost-
flower (Monotropa uniflora),
Indian pitcher. — The pitcher-plant or
side-saddle flower (Sarracenia purpurea),
Indian plantain, — (1) The great Indian
plantain or wild collard (Mesadenia reni-
formis). (2) The pale Indian plantain
( M. atriplicifolia ) . ( 3 ) The tuberous I n-
dian plantain (M, tuberosa), (4) The
sweet-scented Indian plantain (Synosma
suaveolens) .
Indian poke. — (1) American white hel-
lebore'( Veratrum viride), (2) False hel-
lebore ( V. vmodii).
Indian posey, — (1) Sweet life-everlast-
ing ( Gnaphalium obtusi folium ), ( 2 ) Large-
flowered everlasting (Anaphalis >. argari-
tacea), (3) The butterfly- weed (i4«c/^ia«
tuberosa),
Indian potato, — (1) The groundnut
(Apios apios), (2) A western name for
the squirrel-corn (Bikukulla canadensis).
(3) A California name, according to Ber-
gen, for Brodiaea capitata; but according
to Barrett (infn, 1906) the term is indis-
criminately given to many different species
of bulbs and corms, which formed a con-
siderable item in the food supply of the
Californian Indians.
Indian puccoon. — The hoary puccoon
(Lithospennum canescens).
Indian red-root. — The red-root ( Gyroth-
eca capitata).
Indian rhubarb. — A California name, ac-
cording to Bergen, for Saxifraga peltata,
Indian rice. — Wild rice (Zizania aquai-
ica ) .
Indian root. — The American spikenard
(Aralia racemosa).
Indian sage. — The common thorough-
wort or boneset ( Eupatoriumperfoliatum ) ,
Indian shamrock. — The ill-scented wake-
robin, or erect trilHum ( Trillium erectum),
Indian shoe. — The large yellow lady's-
slipper ( Cypripedium hirsutum),
Indian slipper. — Thepink lady's-slipper,
or moccasin-flower ( Cypripedium acaule).
Indian soap-plant. — ^The soap-berry, or
wild China-tree (Sapindus marginatus),
Indian strawberry, — The strawberry-
blite (Blitum capitatum),
Indiim <€a.— Plants, the leaves, etl^, of
which have been infused by the Indians,
and after them by whites; also the decoc-
tion made therefrom, for example, Lab-
rador tea (Ledum graclandicum)^ which in
Labrador is called Indian tea.
Indian tobacco. — (1) The wild tobacco
( Lobelia infiata ). ( 2 ) Wild tobacco ( Nic-
otiana rustica ). (3 ) The plantain-leaf ever-
lasting (Antennaria plantaginifolia). (4)
A New Jersey name, according to Bart-
lett, of the common mullein ( Verbascum
thapsus).
Indian turmeric. — The yellow puccoon,
or orange-root (Hydrastis canadensis).
Indian turnip, — (1) The jack-in-the-
pulpit (Arisaema triphyllum), also called
three-leaved Indian turnip. (2) The
prairie potato, or pom me blanche (Psor-
alea esculenta),
Indian vervain. — A Newfound land name,
according to Bergen, for the shining club-
moss (Lycopodium lucidulum).
Indian warrior. — A California name for
Pedicularis densiflora,
Indian weed. — An early term for to-
bacco.
Indian wheat. — An early term for maize,
or Indian corn.
Indian whort. — A Labrador and New-
BOLL. 30] INDIAN AFFAIRS — INDIAN INDUSTRIES LEAGUK
607
foundland name for the red bearberry or
kinnikinnik {Arctostaphylos uva-ursi).
Indian ivickup. — The great willow-herb
or fireweed (Epilobium migustifolium) ^
although Algonquian Indians called the
basswood ( Tilia americana) wickup.
There are, besides, the Indian^ s dreamy
the purple-stemmed cliff-brake (Pellaea
atropurpurea)^ and the Indian^ 8 plume,
Oswego tea (Monarda didyma).
Another series of terms in which the
Indian is remembered is the following:
Indian bed. — A simple method of roast-
ing clams, by placing them, hinges up-
permost, on tne ground, and building
over them a fire of brushwood.
Indian bread. — Bread made of maize
meal or of maize and rye meal.
Indian-corn hills. — (1) In Essex co.,
Mass., according to Bartlett, huinmocky
land resembling hills of Indian corn.
(2) Hillocks covering broad fields near
the ancient mounds and earthworks of
Ohio, Wisconsin, etc. (Laphani, Antiqui-
ties of Wisconsin) .
Indian dab, — A Pennsylvania name ft>r
a sort of battercake.
Indian file. — Single file; the order in
which Indians march.
Indian fort. — A name given to aI)orig-
inal earthworks in w. New York, in Ohio,
and elsewhere.
Indian gri/i. ^-Something reclaimed after
having l>een given, in reference to the
allegea custom among Indian^ of ex|)ect-
ing an equivalent for a gift or otherwise
its return.
Indian giver. — A repentant giver.
Indian ladder. — A ladder made by
trimming a small tree, the part of the
branches near the stem bemg left as
steps.
Indian liquor. — A Western term for
whisky or rum adulterated for sale to the
Indians.
Indian meal. — Maize or corn meal. A
mixture of wheat and maize flour was
called in earlier days ** wheat and In-
dian"; one of maize and rye fiour, '*rye
and Indian."
Indian orchard. — According to Bartlett,
a term used in New York and Massachu-
setts to designate an old orchard of un-
grafted apple trees, the time of planting
being unknown.
Indian pipeMone. — A name for catlinite
(q. v.), the stone of which tribes in the
region of the upper Mississippi made
their tobacco pipes.
Indian pudding. — A pudding made of
cohimeal, molasses, etc.
Indian reservation or reserve. — A tract of
land reserved by Government for the In-
dians.
Indian sign. — A Western colloquialism
of the earlier settlement days for a trace
of the recent presence of Indians.
Indian sugar. — One of the earlier names
for maple sugar.
Indian summer. — The short season of
plea«ant weather usually occurring about
the middle of November, corresponding
to tlie European St Marthas summer, or
sunmier of All Saints (Albert Matthews
in Monthly Weather Rev., Jan., 1902).
The name Indian appears sometimes
in children's games (Chamberlain in .
Jour. Am. Folk-lore, xV, 107-116, 1902).
In Canadian French the usual term
applied to the Indian was >*sauvage"
(savage); and hence are met such terms
as "botte sauvage," *'traine sauvage,"
'*tabagane," "the sauvage." The "Si-
wash" of the Pacific coast and in the
Chinook jargon is only a corruption of
the "sauvajie" of French-Canadian trap-
pers and adventurers. (a. f. v.)
Indian Affairs. See Office of Indian Af-
fair i<.
Indian Commissioners. See United States
Board of Indian Commissioners.
"Indian Helper." See Carlisle School.
Indian Industries League. A philan-
thropic organization, originally the In-
dian industries department of the Na-
tional Indian Association, but incor]>or-
ated as an independent body at Boston,
Mass., in 1901. Its object is "to open
individual opportunities of work, or of
education to be used for self-support, to
individual Indians, and to build up self-
supporting industries in Indian commu-
nities. " Asa department of the national
organization the Indian industries gained
its first important impetus in 1892, when
it held at the Mechanics* Fair, in Boston,
an exhibition of Indian bead work and
of class-room work in iron, tin, wood,
leather, and lace. It has l)een instru-
mental in the education of two Indian
girls, who were graduated with credit
From the Boston lligh School, and has
helped individual educated Indians to-
ward self-support, having in view the fact
that the progress of the Indians toward
civilization is in proportion to the number
of their voung people who have seen and
f>racti8e(l the white man's life at its best,
t has also helped to foster a beadwork in-
dustry*, aided in developing the native
moccasin to suit the white man; bought
baskets of native manufacture, paying
therefor a fair price to the Pima and Mis-
sion Indians, the basket-making tribes of
Washington, and others, and has obtained
for these products places for exhibit and
sale. The league also erected an indus-
trial room for the Navaho on San Juan r.,
N Mex., which was disposed of when.the
plant became a mission station. In 1905
the president of the league officially visited
the Mission Indians of California and
others, his report on the former resulting
in the amelioration of their extreme pov-
608
INDIAN POINT INDIAN RIGHTS ASSOCIATION
[b. a. k.
erty by bringing to them governmental
and private aid. The league strives to
aid tne Indians in any way that offers
even temporary self-support, like that
derived from their aborigmal industries.
It believes in the assimilation of the In-
dians into the national life, in the abol-
ishment of reservations, and in the free-
dom of the Indians to live and work
where they please. (f. c. s. )
Indian Point. A village on the site of
Lisbon, N. Y., occupied after the Revo-
lution by Catholic Iroquois removed
thither by the English Government until
they were dispersed in 1806, when they
retired to Onondaga and St Regis. — Shea,
Cath. Miss., 342, 1855.
Indian Bights Association. A nonpolit-
ical, nonsectarian body organized in Phil-
adelphia, Dec. 15, 1882, by gentlemen
who met in response to an invitation of
Mr John Welsn to consider the best
method of producing such public feeling
and Congressional action as should secure
civil rights and education to the Indians,
and in time bring about their civilization
and admission to" citizenship. When the
association began its w^ork much of the
country over which the Indians roamed
was sparsely settled ; outbreaks had been
frequent; comparatively little attention
was paid to the Indians* rights and
wrongs, and ignorance concerning Indian
affairs was widespread. When the tide
of emigration swept westward, and set-
tlers, good and bad, began crowding the
Indians more and more, it was evident
that measures should be adopted whereby
the Indian could be adapted to his new
artificial environment. The work con-
fronting the association was one of mag-
nitude. It was necessary to procure
accurate knowledge of actual conditions,
which could be done only by frequent
visits to the Indian country. The infor-
mation thus obtained had to be brought
to the attention of the public in order
that suflBcient pressure might be exerted
on Congress and the Executive. This
was done by dissemination of information
in pamphlets and leaflets, by public ad-
dresses, and ])y announcements through
the public press. The association gradu-
ally won the respect and confidence of
the public. The accuracy of its state-
ments is rarely questioned now, and an
appeal to the press on any matter requir-
ing attention from Congress or the public
usually meets with ready response. In
the beginning the association was re-
garded by a few as maintaining visionary
theories, and was viewed by some Gov-
ernment officials as a meddlesome and
irresponsible body; but the Office of In-
dian Affairs came to regard it as a friendly
critic and welcomed its aid. The asso-
ciation has a representative in Washing-
ton to cooperate with the Office of Indian
Affairs, to bring to the attention of the
Commissioner matters requiring adjust-
ment, to scrutinize legislation relating to
Indian affairs, and to inform members of
Congress regarding the merits or demer-
its of pending bills. Vicious legislation,
when it can not be defeated in committee,
is vigorously fought in Congress through
personal presentation and by letters and
pamphlets, with frequent appeals to the
Executive.
Many of the laws enacted by Congress
with a view of improving the condition
of the Indian have been prompted by the
association. Among those of a general
nature is the statute of Feb. 8, 1887,
known as the "general severalty act,"
which authorizes allotments. Under this
law the title to Indian lands is held by
the Government in most cases for 25
years, but in the meantime the allot-
tee is subject to the laws in common with
other citizens. More recent is the enact-
ment of a statute, drafted bv the associa-
tion, designed to defeat the monopoly
that has so largely controlled Indian
trade, the law now providing that any
jierson of good moral character shall be
granted a license on application.
The courts have frequently been ap-
pealed to by the association in the en-
deavor to secure justice. The Warner
Ranch (Mission Indian) case, appealed
from the local courts of California to th^
Supreme Court of the United States, was
in its inception espoused by the associa-
tion and prosecuted by it to the final de-
cree of the highest tribunal, the necessary
funds for the prosecution of the case
being advanced by the a.ssociation. The
celebrated **Lone Wolf" cAse was ap-
pealed by the association to the United
States Supreme Court in the hope that
the policy of recognizing the validity and
sacredness of the Government's treaty
obligations with the Indian tribes, fol-
lowed since the adoption of the Constitu-
tion, would l)e upheld. The adverse
decision in this case marked the begin-
ning of a new era in the management of
the Indians. The appeal made to the
association by friends of Spotted Hawk and
Little Whirlwind, of the Northern Chey-
enne rn Montana, under sentence of death
and life imprisonment, respectively, for
the alleged murder of a sheep herder,
was responded to by the association,
which employed counsel to present the
case on appeal to the supreme court of
Montana. The effort resulted in securing
the liberty of both young men, and a
subsequent confession by the person
guilty of the crime charged to them fully
exonerated them and showed the need
of watchfulness to prevent great wrongs
against Indians by reason of local preju-
BULL. 30]
INDIAN RIVER INIAHICO
609
dice. The exposure by the association
of the anomalous conditions in Indian
Territory resulted in directing the atten-
tion of the people and of Congress to the
need of better safeguarding the rights of
the Five Civilized Tribes.
Considerable attention has been given
by the association to exposing the
wrongdoing of Government officials
where such unfortunately existed, usu-
ally by the class of employees who ob-
tained their positions through political
influence. The association has also
strenuously urged that the appointment
of Indian agents be made solely on the
ground of emciencj;, and it was through
its efforts that the civil-service rules were
extended to the Indian service.
At the time of the organization of the
Indian Riehts Association, Congress,
owing largely to misunderstanding of the
Indians' needs, failed to make adequate
appropriations for schools, but by inform-
ing the public of the nature and possi-
biuties of this work, a vigorous sentiment
was created in its favor (see Education).
The fact that an organization exists solely
to guard the rights of the Indians acts as
a powerful deterrent to persons seeking
the exploitation of the Indians* estate.
The association has printed and dis-
tributed al)out 600,000 copies of various
publications. Among those that have
attracted much attention are: The Indian
Before the Law, by Henry S. l*ancoa8t;
The Indian Question Past and Present,
by Herbert Welsh; Indian Wprdship, by
Charles E. Pancoast; Civilization Among
the Sioux, by Herbert Welsh; The Mis-
sion Indians, by C. C. Painter; Latest
Studies on Indian Reservations, by J. B.
Harrison; and A New Indian Policy, by
S. M. Broeius. (m. k. s. s. m. b.)
Indian Biver. A summer camp of the
Sitka Indians of Alaska, containing 43
persons in 1880.— Petroff in Tenth Cen-
sus, Alaska, 32, 1884.
" Indian's Friend.'* See Xaiional Indian
Association,
Indian Village. A former Micmac vil-
lage near L. Badger, Fogo co., Newfound-
land.— Vetromile, Abnakis, 56, 1866.
Indnstries. See Arts and Industries^ and
the various industries thereunder men-
tioned.
Inewakhnbeadhin {I'**i'7vaqnbe-a^%
'keepersof the mysterious stones*). A
sub^ns of the Mandhinkagaghe gens of
theOmaha.— Dorsey inl5th Rep. B. A. E.,
228, 1897.
ugahame. An Ikogmiut Eskimo village
on lower Yukonr., Alaska; pop. 63 in 1880.
50in 1890.
Ingaham^.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska. 12, 1884.
iBgaliaineh.— Ibid, map. Ingahamiut.— 11th Cen-
sus, Alaska, 165, 1893.
Ingalik ( * having louse's e^egs' ) . An Es-
kimo term for Indian, applied first to the
Bull. 30—06 39
Kaiyukhotana of Yukon r., and extended
by the Russians to all Kaiyukhotana,
sometimes to Athapascan tribes in gen-
eral. Pop. 635 in 1890: 312 males and 323
females. The villages are Anvik, Chag-
va^ehat, Chinik, Kagokakat, Kaiakak,
Kaltag, Khatnotoutze, Khogoltlinde,
Khulikakat, Klamasqualtin, Koserefski,
Kunkhogliak, Kutul, Lofka, Nunakhtag-
amut, Tanakot, Tutago, Taguta, and
Wolasatux.
Ingaleek.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 29, 1874.
Ingaleet.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 1, 26, 1877.
Inrndete.— Whymper, Alawka, 153, 1868. Ing'-
aliki.— Dall, op. cit.,25 (Russian form). Ingalit—
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 6, 1884. Imrakas-
agmi. — Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12. 42d Cong.,
1st .sess., 25, 1871. Inreletei.— Ibid., 31. In'-kal-
ik.— Dall, op. cit,, 25. inkalite.— Latham in Jour.
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., l, 183, 1848. Inkaliten.— Glasu-
noflf in Baer and Ilelmersen, Beitriige, i, 120, 1839.
Inkilik.— Schott in Erman, Arehiv, vii. 480, 1849.
Inkiliken.— Holm berg, Ethnog. Skizz., 7,1855.
Ingamatsha. A Chugachigmiut village
on Chenega id.. Prince William sd., Alas-
ka; pop. 80 in 1880, 73 in 1890, 140 in 1900.
Chenega.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 29, 1884.
Ingamatsha.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 67, 1893.
Ingdhezhide ( 'red dung') . An Omaha
gens on the Inshtasanda side of the tribal
circle.
Ing^e-jide.— Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. E.. 219, 1885.
Ingdhe-zhide.— Dorsey in Bull. Philos. Soe. Wa.sh.,
130, 1880. Ing-gera-je-da.— Umg, Exped. Roeky
Uts., I, 327, 182:^. In-gra'-she-da.— Morgan, Anc.
Soe., 155, 1877 (trans, 'reil').
Inger. A Nunivagmint Eskimo village
on Nunivak id., Alaska; pop. 35 in 18iK).
Ingeramut.— Nelson in ISth Rep. B. A. E., map,
18»9.
Ingichuk. A Chnagmiut village in the
deltaof the Yukon, Alaska; pop. 8 in 1880.
Ingechuk.— Elliott, Our Arct. Prov., map, 1886.
Ingichuk.— Nelson (1878) quoted by Baker, Geog.
Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Ingkdhunkashinka ( ' small cat * ) . A sub-
gens of the Wasapetun gens of the
Hangka division of the Osage.
Inii^n'ka oin'i[a.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
234, 1897.
Inglntaligemint ( IngluiaVigem fit ) . A
subdivision of Malemiut Eskimo dwell-
ing on Inglutalik r., Alaska. — Dall in
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 16, 1877.
Ingmikertok. An East Greenland Eski-
mo village on a small island in Angmagsa-
lik fjord. — Meddelelser om Gronland, ix,
379, 1889.
Ingrakak. An Ikogmiut Eskimo vil-
villj^e on lower Yukon r., Alaska.
Ingnuutghamittt.— Coast Surv. officers. 1898. In-
grakak.—Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Ingnklimiut. An Eskimo tribe occupy-
ing Little Diomede id., Bering strait.
Their village is Inalik. See Ohiogmiut.
Aohjuoh-Aliat.— Dall in Smithson. Cont., xxii, 2,
1878 (Chukchi name). Inalugmiut.— Woolfe in
11th Census, Alaska, 130, 1893 (given to inhab-
itants Qt both islands). Ing-iih-kU-mnt.— Dall in
Trans. A. A. A. S., xxxiv, 377, 1885. Inugleet.—
Jackson in Rep. Bur. Education, 145, map. 1894.
Yikir^a'ulit.- Bogoras, Chukchee, 21. 1904 (Chuk-
chi name: 'large-mouthed,' referring to their
labrets).
Iniahico. A principal Apalachee village
in 1539, near the site of Tallahassee, Fla.
610
INIGSALIK INSHTA8ANDA
1b
Anaiea Apalaohe.— Gentleman of Elvas in Hak-
luyt Soc. Pub., IX, 43, 1851. Anhayoa.— Gallatin
in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 102, 1836. Aniaca
Apalaohe.— Shipp, De Soto and Florida, 684, 1881
(misprint). Iniahioo.— Biedma (1544) in Ternaux-
Compans, Voy., xx, 57, 1841.
Inigsalik. A southern settlement of the
Angmaesalinjjmiut Eskimo of e. Green-
lana, where they find soft stone of which
they fashion pots and lamps. — Meddelel-
ser om Gronland, x, 368, 1888.
Inigsuarsak. An Eskimo village in
lat. 72° W, w. Greenland. — Science, xi,
map, 259, 1888.
Inisiguanin. Mentioned as one of the
towns or provinces apparently on or in
the vicinity of the South Carolina coast,
visited by Ayllon in 1520.
Inisiguanin.— oViedo, Hist. Gen. Indias, ni, 628,
1853. Yncignavin.— Bareia, Ensayc*. 5, 1723.
Initkilly. A Tikeramiut t^skimo village
near the coal veins e. of C. Lisburne,
Alaska. — Coast Surv. map, 1890.
Inkalich. The E.skimo name of a divi-
sion of the Kaiyuhkhotanaon Innoko r.,
Alaska. Paltchikatno and Tigshelde were
probably two of the villages.
Inchulukhlaites.— Latham, Essiiys, 271, 1860. InkiJi-
lichljuaten.— Holmberg (i»iotcd by Dall in Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., i, 25, 1877. Inkiiluohluaten.— Wran-
gell quoted by Baer and Helmeraen, Beitnige, i,
118, 1839. Inkulukhlaitcs.— Latham, op. cit., 267.
Inkuluklaitiei.— Ibid., 272.
Inkesabe ( *black shoulder* ). An Omaha
gens of the Hangashenu division, the
custodian of the tribal pipes. The sub-
gen tes are lekidhe, Nonhdeitazhi, Wad-
higizhe, and Watanzizhidedhatazhi.
Black.— Morgan. Anc. Soc., 155, 1877. Enk-ka-sa-
ba.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mis., i, 326, 1823. Ink-
ka'-sa-ba.— Morgan, Anc. Soc, 155, 1877. Inke-
Bab«.— Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1885.
Inkillis Tamaha ( ' English town * ) . One
of the former so-called Choctaw Sixtowns
in the n. w. part of Jasper co.. Miss. It
gave its name to a considerable tract in
that part of the county and extending
into Newton co. It is said to have re-
ceived this name from the fact that the
English made a distribution of property
there in early times. — Halbert in Ala.
Hist. Soc, Misc. Coll., i, 382, 1901.
KilliB-tamaha.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., 1, 109,
1884.
Inkpa. A band of the Wahpeton Sioux,
living in 1886 at Big Stone lake, Minn.,
and probably at Cormorant pt., Mille
Lacs, in 1862.
Bie Stone Lake band.— Ind. AfT. Rep., 102, 1859.
Inkpatonwan.— Ashley, letter to Doi^ey, Jan. 1886.
Inpaton.~Ibid.
Innoka. A Kaiyuhkhotana village on
Tlegon r., Alaska.— Petroff, Rep. on
Alaska, 87, 1884.
Inojey. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863.
Inomassi. A former Diegueflo rancheria
belonging to San Miguel de la Frontera
mission, w. coast of Lower California,
about lat. 32** 10^.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
May 18, 1860.
Inoschuochn ( * bear berry ' ) . An Apache
clan or band at San Carlos agency and. Ft
Apache, Ariz., in 1881.
Inoichu)6ohen. — Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
HI, 112, 1890.
Inotnks. Given as a Karok village on
Klamath r., Cal.; inhabited in 1860.
E-no-tucks.— Taylor in Gal. Farmer, Mar. 23, 1860.
Insanity. See Health and Diaeijise.
Inscribed tablets. Objects, generally of
soft stone, usually shale or sandstone, con-
taining various lines and formal characters
incised or in relief. Some of them are
undoubtedly prehistoric and susceptible
of interpretation in the light of aboriginal
ornamentation and symbolism ; others are
forgeries. While it would perhaps be too
much to say that there exists n. of Mex-.
ico no tablet or other ancient article that
contains other than a pictorial or picto-
granhic record, it is safe to assert that no
authentic specimen has yet been brought
to public notice. Any object claimed to
be of pre-Columbian a^e
and showing hieroglyphic
or other characters that
denote a degree of culture
higher than that of the
known tribes, is to be
viewed with suspicion and
all the circumstances con-
its discovery subjected to
The same remarks apply
In the latter
Grave creek tablet
length 1 »-4 in.
nected with
rigid scrutiny.
to engraved copper plates.
material, the uneven surface produced by
natural corrosion is often mistaken for
attempts at inscriptions. See Grave Creek
mouna, Pictography.
Consult Farquharson in Proc. Daven-
port Acad. Sci., ii, 1877-80; Fowke,
Archieol. Hist. Ohio, 1902; McLean,
Mound Builders, 1879; Mallorv in 10th
Rep. B. A. E.,1893; Mercer, The I^nape
Stone, 1885; Moorehead, Prehist. Impls.,
1900; Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i-iv, 1851-
57; Squier and Davis, Ancient Monu-
ments, 1848; Thomas in 12th Rep. B. A. E.,
632,1894. ((i. F.)
Inscription Sock. See El Morro.
Inselnostlinde: A Kaiyuhkhotana vil-
lage of the Jugelnute division on Shage-
luk r., Alaska. — Zagoskin, Descr. Russ.
Poss. Am., map, 1842.
Inshtasanda {inslita, *eye' or *eyes*;
sanda, an archaic and untranslatable
term. — Fletcher). One of the 2 divisions
of the Omaha, containing the Mandhin-
kagaghe, Tesinde, Tapa, Ingdhezhide,
and Inshtasanda gentes.
Grey Eyes.— Jackson (1877) quoted by Donaldson
in Smithson. Rep. 1885, pt. 2. 74, 1886. lotasanda.—
Dorseyin3dRep.B.A.E.,219,1885. Inshtasanda.—
A. C. Fletcher, inf'n, 1906. Ish-ta-sun'-da.— Long,
Ex ped. Rocky M ts. , i, 325, 1823. Istasunda.— Jack-
son (1877), op. cit., 74.
Inshtasanda. An Omaha gens, belong-
ing to the Inshtasanda division. The sub-
divisions are Ninibatan, Real Inshtasan-
da, Washetan, and Real Thunder people,
lotasanda.— Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. E.. 220. 1885.
Inshtasanda.— A. C. Fletcher, inf'n, 1906. Ish-
BULL. 30]
INSIACHAK INVENTION
611
dit'-raa-d&.— Morgran, Anc. Soc., 155, 1877 (trans.
'thunder'). Thunder.— Ibid. Wash-a-tung.— Long,
Exped. ilocky Mt8., i, 327, 1823 (mistaking a Han-
gashenu gens for the Inshtasanda division).
Insiachak. A Nusbagagmiut Eskimo
village in the Nushagak district, Alaska;
pop. 42 in 1890.
tattMhamiut. —Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Intanto. A former Nishinam village in
the valley of Bear r., Cal. — Powers in
Oont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 316, 1877.
Intapnpslie {I»tahpupc^^ , 'curved
stone ^). An ancient Osage village on
upper Osage r., above the mouth of 8ac
r., Mo. — ^Dorsey, Osage MS. vocal).,
B. A. E., 1883.
Intatohkalgi (* people of the beaver
dams.' — Gatschet). A former Yuchi
town on Opihlako cr., 28 m. above its
junction with Flint r., probably in Dooly
CO., Ga. It contained 14 families in 1799.
InUtohkilgi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i. 132,
1884. In-tuch-cul-gau.— Hawkins (1799), Sketch,
62, 1848.
Intenleiden. A Kaiyuhkhotana village
of the Jugelnute division on the e. bank
of Shageluk r., Alaska,
ntenleiden.— Zagoskin quoted by Petroff in 10th
Census, Alaska, 37, 1884. Ixntelleiden.— Zagoskin
in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 1850. In-
tenleiden.—Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. Poss. Am.,
map, 1842.
Interpreters. See Agency s;/stem.
Intietook {Inti-etook), Given by Ross
(Advent , 290, 1847) as an Okinagan tril)e.
Intimbioh. A Mono band in Mill Creek
valley, some miles s. of its junction with
Kings r.. Cal.
Bm-tim'-bitoh.— Merriam in Science, xix, 916,
June 15, 1904. Entimbioh.— A. L. Kroeber, inf'n,
1906 (correct form). Eu-tem-pe-ohe's.— Wessells
(1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 84th Cong., 8d sess.,
82, 1857. In-tem-peach-ce.— Johnston (1851) in
Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d Cong., 1st sess., 22, 1852. In-
tim-peaoh.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 1899.
In-thn-peohes.— Barbour (1862) in Sen. Ex. Doc.
4, 32d Cong. , spec. se««?. , 254. 1853. Ytimpabiohes. —
Dominguez and Escnlante (1776) in Doc. Ili.st.
Mex., 2d 8., I, 537, 1854.
Innamdligang. A race of dwarfs who
figure in the mythology of the Central
Eskimo. Thev are supposed to inhabit
cliffs that overhang the sea. — Boas in 6th
Rep. B. A. E., 640, 1888.
^ngsint. An Eskimo settlement in e.
Greenland, about lat. 61° 50^ ; pop. 32 in
1884.— Das Ausland, 163, 1886.
Inngsnlik. A summer settlement of the
Aivilirmiut Eskimo on the n. coast of
Repulse bay, n. of Hudson bay.
Enook-sha-liff.— Ross. Second Voy., 430, 1835.
Inugsulik.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888.
InnhksoyiBtamiks ( In -uhjy-so-yl- stam-
iksy Mong tail lodge poles'). A band of
the Kainah division of theSiksika.— Grin-
nell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 209, 1892.
Innissnitmiat. An Eskimo tribe that
occupied Depot id. and the ad jacent coast
of Hudson bay before 1800. The last
descendant died some years ago. — Boas
m Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xv, 6, 1901.
Innksikahkopwaiks (I-nuk-si^-kah-ko-
pwa->ik8f * small brittle fat'). A division
of the Piegan Siksika. — Grinnell, Black-
foot Lodge Tales, 209, 225, 1892.
Innksiks (' small robes'). A former
division of the Piegan Siksika.
A-miks'-eks.— Hayden, Ethnog. and PhiloL Mo.
Val.. 2W, 1S62. I-nuk»'-ikB.— Grinnell, Blackfoot
Lodge Tales, 209. 1892. Little Robea.— Culbertson
in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 144, 1851. Small Robes.—
Grinnell, op. cit., 225.
Invention. In the language of the Pat-
ent Office "an invention is something
new and useful." The word applies to
the apparatus of human activities and to
the processes involved. The life of cul-
ture from the lowest savagery to the
highest civilization is an increase in the
artificialities of life. There were no tribes
in America without culture, and the low-
est of them had inventions. For instance,
the Fuegians had learned to convert the
fish-spear into a barbed harpoon by fas-
tening the detachable head, which was
set loosely in tlie socket, to the end of a
shaft by means of a short piece of raw-
hide. They had also invented a canoe of
l)ark made in three pieces. When they
wished to move to a new bay or inlet
between which and the last there was a
dangerous headland, they could take the
canoe apart, carry it over the intervening
mountain, and unite the parts by lasliing,
covering the joints with pitch. The most
ingenious savages on the continent, how-
ever, were the Eskimo, all of whose ap-
paratus used in their various activities
show innumerable additions and changes,
which are inventions. They lived sur-
rounded l)y the largest animals in the
world, which they were able to capture
by their ingenuity. Their snow domes,
waterproof clothing, skin canoes, sinew-
backed bows, snowshoes, traps and snares
in myriad varieties, some of which
they shared with neighboring Indian
tribes, amaze those who study them.
Among other ingenious devices which
would pass under the name of inventions
are: the use of skids by the N. W. coast
natives for rolling logs into place in build-
ing their immense communal dwellings;
the employment of the parbuckle to assist
in the work of moving logs; the use of a
separate fly of rawhide at the top of the
tipi, which could be moved bv means of
a pole with one end resting on the ground,
so that the wind would not drive the
smoke back into the tipi; driving a peg
of known length into the side of a canoe
as a gauge for the adzman in chipping out
the inside; the boiling of food in baskets
or utensils of wooil, gourd, or rawhide, by
nieans of hot stones; the attachment of
inflated sealskins to the end of a harpoon
line to impede the progress of game
through the water after it was struck; the
sinew-backed bow, which eil5Rbled the
Eskimo hunter to employ brittle wood
for the rigid portion and sinew string for
propulsion; the continuous motion spin-
dle; the reciprocating drill; thesandsaw
for hard stone, and all sorts of signaling
and sign language. See Arts and Indus-
612
INYAHA — IOWA
[b. a. b.
tries and TmplemeniSf and the separate
articles cited thereunder.
Consult Mason (1) Aboriginal Ameri-
can Mechanics, Mem. Intemat. Cong.
Anthrop., Chicago, 1894; (2) Origins of
Invention, 1895; McGuire, A Study of
the Primitive Methods of Drilling, Kep.
U. 8. Nat. Mus. 1894, 1896; Holmes, De-
velopment of the Shaping Arts, Smith-
son. Rep. 1902. See also the various
Reports of the Bureau of American Eth-
nology, (o. T. M.)
Inyaha. A Diegueilo village in w. San
Diego CO., Cal. Its inhabitants, who
numbered 53 in 1883, 32 in 1891, and 42
in 1902, occupy a reservation comprising
280 acres of poor land, which has been
Patented to them,
naha.— Jackson and Kinney, Rep. Miss. Ind., 24,
1883. Anahuac.— Ind.Aff.RepMlTS.lWi. Ineja.—
Ibid., II, 72, 1891. Injaya.— Ibid., 146, 1903. In-
yaha.—Ibid., 176, 1902.
Inyanclieyaka-atonwan (^village at the
dam or rapids'). A Wahpeton Sioux
band or division residing in 1859 at Little
Rapids, Sand Prairie, and Minnesota r.,
not far from Beileplaine, Minn. Mazo-
mani was their chief in 1862.
Inya°-toeyi^a-atonwa°. — Doreey (after Ashley) in
16th Rep. B. A. E., 216, 1897. Little FaUs Band.
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 102, 1860. Littie Kapida.-
Parker, Minn. Handbk., 140, 1867. Lower Wahpe-
ton.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1359, 102, 1860. Lower Wakpa-
tona.— Minn. Hist. Coll., in, 260,1880.
Inyangmani. A Wahpeton Sioux band,
named after its chief, living on Yellow
Medicine cr., Minn., in 1862.
Inyimgmani.— Ashley, letter to J. O. Dorsey,
1886. Yellow Medicine's band.— McKusick in Ind.
Aff. Rep. 1863. 315, 1864.
Inyanhaoin ( * musselshell earring ' ) . A
band of the Miniconjou Teton Sioux.
I-na-ha'-o-win.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val., 376, 1862 (trans, 'stone earring band').
Inyan-ha-oi".- Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 220,
1897. Iijyaii-h-oir). — Ibid. Shell earring band. —
Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. 1860, 142, 1851.
lokwa. See Hiaqua.
lonata. Apparently two former Chu-
mashan villages connected with Santa
Inez mission, Santa Barbara co., Cal.
lonata.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861, Jo-
natai.— Gatschet in Chief Eng. Rep., pt. in, 553,
1876.
loqua. See Hiaqua.
Iowa ( *sleepy ones' ) . One of the south-
western Siouan tribes included by J. O.
Dorsey with the Oto and Missouri in his
Chiwere group. Traditional and linguis-
tic evidence proves that the Iowa sprang
from the Winnebago stem, which appears
to have been the mother stock oi some
other of the southwestern Siouan tribes;
but the closest affinity of the Iowa is with
the Oto and Missouri, the difference in
language being merely dialectic. Iowa
chiefs informed Dorsey in 1883 that their
people and the Oto, Missouri, Omaha,
and Ponca "once formed part of the
Winnebago nation." According to the
traditions of these tribes, at an early pe-
riod they came with the Winnebago from
their priscan home n. of the great lakes,
but that the Winnebago stopped on the
shore of a great lake (L. Michigan), at-
tracted by the abundant fish, wnile the
others continued south westward to the
Mississippi. Here another band, the
Iowa, separated from the main group,
**and received the name of Pahoja, or
Gray Snow, which they still retain, but
are known to the white people by the
name of loways, or Aiaouez. The first
stopping place of the Iowa, after parting
from the Winnebago, as noted in the
tradition, appears to have been on Rock
r., 111., near its junction with the Missis-
sippi. Another tradition places them
farther n. In 1848 a map was drawn by
a member of the tribe showing their
movements from the mouth of Rock r. to
the place where thej^ were then living.
According to this their first move was to
the banks of Des Moines r., some distance
above its mouth ; the second was to the
vicinity of the pipestone quarry in s. w.
Minnesota, although on the map it was
placed erroneously hich up on the Mis-
souri; thence they descended to the
mouth of Platte r., and later moved suc-
cessively to the headwaters of Little
Platte r., Mo. ; to the w. bank of the Mis-
sissippi, slightly above the mouth of Des
Moines r., a short distance farther up on
the same side of the Mississippi; again
south westwardly, stopping on Salt r.,
thence going to its extreme headwaters;
to the upper part of Chariton r.; tb
Grand r.; thence to Missouri r., opposite
Ft Leavenworth, where they lived at the
time the map was drawn. These succes-
sive movements, which are of compara-
tively recent date, are generally accepted
as euDstantially correct. The Sioux have
a tradition (Williamson in Minn. Hist.
Coll., I, 296) that when their ancestors
first came to the falls of St Anthony, the
Iowa occupied the country about the
mouth of Minnesota r., while the Chey-
enne dwelt higher up on the same stream.
The Iowa appear to have been in the
vicinity of the mouth of Blue Earth r.,
Minn., just before the arrival there of Le
Sueur in 1701 for the purpose of erecting
his fort. His messengers, sent to invite
them to settle in the vicinity of the fort
because they were good farmers, found
that they had recently removed toward
Missouri r., near the Maha (Omaha), who
dwelt in that region. The Sioux informed
Le Sueur that Blue Earth r. belonged to
the Scioux of the West ( I^kota) , the Aya-
vois (lowas), and Otoctatas (Oto), who
lived a little farther off. Father Marest
(La Harpe, Jour., 39, 1851) says that the
Iowa were about this date associated with
the. Sioux in their war a^inet the Sauk.
This does not accord with the general
tradition that the Dakota were iJways -
BULL. 30]
IOWA
613
enemies of the Iowa, nevertheless the
name Nadoessi Mascouteins seems to have
been applied to the Iowa by the early
missionaries because of their relations for
a time with the Sioux. P^re Andre thus
designated them in 1676, when they were
living 200 leagues w. of Green Bav, Wis.
Perrot (M^m., 63, 1864) apparently locat-
ed them in the vicinity of the Pawnee,
on the plains, in 1685. Father Zenobius
(1680) placed the Anthoutantas (Oto)
and Nadouessious Maskoutens (Iowa)
about 130 leagues from the Illinois, in 3
great villages built near a river which
empties into the river Colbert (Missis-
sippi) on the w. side, above the Illinois,
almost opposite the mouth of the Wis-
consin. He appears to locate a part of the
Ainoves (perhaps intended for Aioiies),
on the w. side of Milwaukee r., in Wis-
consin. On Marquette's map (1674-79)
the Pahoutet( Iowa), the Otontanta(Oto),
and Maha (Omaha) are placed on Mis-
sonri r., evidently by mere guess. La
Salle knew of the Oto and the Iowa, and
in his letter in regard to Hennepin, Aug.
22, 1682, mentions them under the names
Otoutanta and Aiounouea, but his state-
ment that Accault, one of his company,
knew the languages of these tribes is
doubtful. It IS probable that in 1700,
when Le Sueur furnished them with their
first firearms, the Iowa resided on the
extreme headwaters of Des Moines r.,
but it appears from this explorer's jour-
nal that they and the Oto removed and
**established themselves toward the Mis-
souri river, near the Maha." Jefferys
(Fr. Dom. in Am., 1761) placed them on
the E. side of the Missouri, w. of the
sources of Des Moines r., above the Oto,
who were on the w. side of the Missouri
and below the Omaha; but in the text
of his work they are located on the Mis-
sissippi in lat. 43° 30^. In 1804, accord-
ing to Lewis and Clark (Orig. Jour., vi,
91-92, 1905), they occupied a single vil-
lage of 200 warriors or 800 souls, 18
leagues up Platte r., on the s. e. side,
although they formerly lived on the Mis-
souri above the Platte. They conducted
trafiic with traders from St Louis at their
posts on Platte and Grand Nemaha r., as
well as at the Iowa village, the chief trade
being skins of beaver, otter, raccoon, deer,
and Dear. They also cultivated com,
beans, etc. In 1829 (Rep. Sec. War) they
were on Platte r., Iowa., 15 m. from the
Missouri state line. Schoolcraft (1853)
placed them on Nemaha r., Nebr., a mile
above its mouth. By 1880 they were
brought under the agendes.
The visiting and marriage customs of
the Iowa did not differ from those of
cognate tribes, nor was their management
of children unlike that of the Dakota,
the Omaha, and others. They appear
to have been cultivators of the soil at an
early date, as Le Sueur tried to persuade
them to fix their village near Ft
L'Huillier because they were ''indus-
trious and accustomed to cultivate the
earth." Pike says that they cultivated
corn, but proportionately not so much afl
the Sauk and Foxes. He also aflirms
that the Iowa were less civilized than the
latter. Father Andr^ (Jes. Rel., 1676,
Thwaites ed., lx, 203, 1900) says that al-
though their village was very large, they
were poor, their greatest wealth consist-
ing oi** ox-hides and red calumets," in-
dicating that the Iowa early manufactured
and traded catlinite pipes. Some small
mounds in Minnesota and Iowa have
been ascribed to them by two distinct
traditions.
Ki*A, I0*V10 TOhEe)
In 1824 they ceded all their lands in
Missouri, and in 1836 were assigned a
reservation in n. e. Kansas, from which a
part of the tribe moved later to another
tract in central Oklahoma, which by
agreement in 1890 was allotted to them
in severalty, the surplus acreage being
opened to settlement by whites.
Various estimates of the population of
the Iowa al; different dates are as follows:
In 1760, 1,100 souls; by Lewis and Clark
in 1804, 800, smallpox having carried off
100 men besides women and children in
1803; the Secretarv of War gives the num-
ber in 1829 as 1,*000; Catlin in 1832 at
about 1,400, but in 1836 at 992; the In-
dian Affairs Report of 1843 gives their
number as 470; the number at the Pota-
watomi and Great Nemaha agency in
614
IPEO — IPEE8UA
[B. A.B.
Z
- ^CV Kansas was 143 in 1884, 138 in 1885, 143
^^ in 1886, and 225 in 1905. At the latter
date they were under the jurisdiction of
the Kickapoo School. At the Sauk and
Fox agency, Okla., in 1885 they numbered
88; in 1901, 88; in 1905, 89.
The Iowa camp circle was divided into
half circles, occupied by two phratries of
four gentes each. These were:
First phratry. (1) Tunanpin, Black
Bear; (2) Michirache, Wolf; (3) Che-
fhita, Eagle and Thunder-being; (4)
:hotachi, Elk.
Second phratry. (5) Pakhtha, Beaver;
6) Ruche, Pigeon; (7) Arukhwa, Buf-
alo; (8) Wakan, Snake; (9) Mankoke,
Owl. The last-named ^ens is extinct.
There was an Iowa village called Wolf
village.
See Catlin, Iowa Inds., 1844; Dorsey ( 1 )
in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 1894, and 15th Rep.
B. A. E., 1897, (2) Trans. Anthrop. Soc.
Wash., II, 1883; Hamilton and Irvin,
loway Gram., 1848; Havden, Ethnog. and
Philol. Mo. Val., 1862;"Lewis and Clark,
Orig. Jour., i-viii, 1904-05; Long, Exped.
Rocky Mts., 1, 1823; Minn. Hist. Soc. Ck)ll.,
I, 1872; Sen. Doc. 452, 57th Cong., 1st
sess., II, 1903. (.1. o. d. c. t. )
Agones.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 125, 1816.
Agouais.— De Ligney (1726) in Wis. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
I, 22, 1854. Agoual.— Chauvignerie (1736) quoted
by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ni, 557, 1853. Agoues.—
Hutchins (1764). ibid. Ah-e-o-war.— Orig. Jour.
Lewis and Clark, vi, 91, 1905. Aiaoua.— Perrot
(1689), M6m., 196, 1864. Aiaouaw— IW^.. index.
Aiaouez.— Jefferys, French Dom. in Am., i, 139,
1761. AUttway.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark
(1804), I, 61, 19iM. Aiawi*.— Le Sueur quoted by
Ramsey in Minn. Hist. Coll., l, 45, 1872. Aieways.—
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1804), i, 45, 1904.
A^oues.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 522, 1853.
Ainones.— Membrc (1680) quoted by Hayden, Eth-
nog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 445, 1862. Ainovet.—
Hennepin, New Dl.scov., 132, 1698. Aioaez.—
Coues, Lewis and Clark Exped.. i, 19, note, 43,
1893. Aiouex.— Charievoix (1723) in Margry, D<^c.,
VI, 526, 1886. Aiounouea.— Hennepin (1680-82) in
Margry, D6c., Ii, 258, 1877. Aiowais.— Pike. Trav.,
134, 1811. Aiinoas.— McKenney and Hall., Ind.
Tribes, III, 80, 1854. Ajaouex.— Jefferys, Fr'. Dom.
Am., pt 1, map 1, 1761. Ajouas.— Smet, Miss, de
rOregon, 108, 1848. Ajoue*.— Bowles, map Am.,
ca. 1750. Ajouc«.— Perrot, Mt'm., index, 1864.
Anjoues. — Buchanan, N. Am. Inds., 155, 1824.
Aoaia.— N. Y. Doc.Col.Hist., x, 630, 1858. Aonay*.—
Smet, Letters, 38, note, 1843 (misprint). Aouas.—
Cabe^a de Vaca misquoted by Schoolcraft^ Ind.
Tribes, II, 37, 1852 (error). Avauwai*.— Lewis and
Clark, Trav., 14, 1807. Avoy.— Neill, Hist. Minn.,
200, 1858. Avoys.— Wis. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1, 32, 1854.
Ayahwa. — Coues, Lewis and Clark Exped., i, 20,
note, 1893. Ayauais.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848.
Ayauvai.— Coues, Lewis and Clark Exped., i, 19,
note; 1893. Ayauwaia.— Lewis and Clark, Discov.,
17,1806. Ayauwas. — Lapham, Blossom, and Dous-
man, Inds. Wis., 3, 1870. Ayauwau*.— Orig. Jour.
Lewis and Clark, i, 91, 1904. Ayauway.— Ibid.. 45.
Ayavoi*.— La Harpeand LeSueur(1699)quotedby
Long, Exped. St Peter's R., ii, 320, 1824. Ayawai.—
Coues, Lewis and Clark Exped., i, 19, note, 1893.
Ayaways.— Lewis and Clark, Trav., il, 442, 1814.
Ayeoufoi.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 197, 1858. AycSaia—
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 608, 1858. Ayoa.— Martin,
Hist. La., 301, 1882. Ayoei.— Perrot (1689) in
Minn. Hist. Coll., ii, pt 2, 24, 1864. Ayooia.— Bien-
ville (1722) in Margry, D6c., vi, 407, 1886.
Ayoouais. — Bcauharnois and Hocquart (1731) in
Margry, D^c, vi, 570. 1886. Ayoou^i.—Iberville
(1702) quoted by Neill, Hi.st. Minn., 172, 1858.
Ayo«oii.-N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.. IX, 1065, 1855.
Ayoua.— Adelung, Mithridates, in, 271, 1816.
Ayouaht.— Domenech, Deserts N. Am., ii, 84, 1860.
Ayoues.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 173, 1858. Ayooei.—
Lamothe Cadillac (1695) in Maigry, D^., v, 124,
18S3. Ayouwa.- Pike, Trav., map, 1811. Ayou-
wait.— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 49, 1806. Ayou-
ways.—lbid., 29. Ayovai.— Coues, Lewis and
Clark Exped., i, 20, note, 1893. Ayovoia.— Bien-
ville (1722) in Margry, D6c., VI, 396, 1886.
Ayowa.— Gatschet, KawMS.vocab., B. A. E.,27,1878
(Kansa name). Ayowas.— Maximilian, Travels,
607, 1843. Ayoway^— Lewis and Clark, Exped.,
1,487, 1817. Ayu&ba.— Riggs, Dak. Gram, and Diet.,
278, 1852. Ayohuwahak.— (Gatschet, Fox MS., B. A.
E. (Fox name). Ayukba.— Williamson in Minn.
Hist. Coll., 1, 299, 1872. Ayuwas.— Brackenridge,
Views of La., 83, 1815. DuityKoie.— Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, in, 262, 1853. jEo-wah.— Ramsey in
Ind. Aff. Rep.1^9, 74, 1850 (Mdewakanton name},
lawai.— Coues, Lewis and Clark Exped., i, 20,
note, 1893. lawas.— La Harpe and Le Sueur
(1C99) quoted by Long, Exped. S. Peter's R., ii,
320, 1824. laways.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark,
VI , 91 , 1905. Ihoway.— Sen . Doc. 21, 18th Cong., 2d
sess., 6, 1825. Ioewaig,~Tanner, Narr., 316, 1830
(Ottawa name). lowa.—Pike, Trav., 134, 181L
loway.— Pike, Exped., 112, 1810. lyakhba.— Wil-
liamson in Minn. Geol. Rep. for 1884, 106 (Santee
Dakota name). lyakhwa.— Ibid. (Teton name),
lyufiba.— Riggs, Dak. Gram, and Diet., 278, 1852
(trans. * sleepy ones' ). Jowai.— Ann de la Propag.
de la Foi, iii, 569, 1828. Jowa«.— Pike, Trav., m,
1811. Jowaya.— Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass.
Hist. Coll., 2d s. II, 39, 1814. Maqude.— Dorsey,
fSegiha MS. Dict.,B. A. E. 1878 (Omaha and Ponca
name) . Minowas.— Rafinesque in Marshall, Hist.
Ky., 1, 28, 1824 (confounding Iowa with Missouri).
Kadoesai Mascouteins.— Jes. Rel. 1676-77. Thwaites
ed., LX, 203. 1900. Hadoueui-Maakoutena.— Per-
rot, M<!'m., index, 1864. Kadoueuioox des prai-
ries. — Ibid., 237. Kadoueuioox Xaftkoutena.—
Minn. Hist. Coll., ii. pt. 2, 30, note, 1864
(•Sioux of the prairies':. Algonkin name).
Ke pena.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 91,
1905 (i.e., Nez Percys; given as traders' nick-
name) . Ovas.— Barcia, Ensayo, 238, 1723. Oyoa.—
Du Lac, Voy. dans les Louislanes, 232, 1806. Fa-
ho-oha.— Hamilton in Trans. Nebr. Hist. Soc., I,
47, 1885 (trans, 'dusty men'). Pa-ho-^je.— Maxi-
milian, Trav., 507, 1843 (trans, 'dust-noses').
Paho-ja.— Long. Exped. Rocky Mts., i, 839, 1828
( trans. ' gray snow ' ) . PahStet.— Marquette (1673)
in Shea, Discov., 268, map, 1852. Pahuo».— Ham-
ilton and Irwin, loway Gram., 17, 1848. Fa-hu-
cha.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 262, 1868.
Pa-kuh'-tha.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166, 1877.
Paote.— La Salle (1682) in Margry, D^., ll, 215,
1877. Paoutees.— La Harpe, from Le Sueur's Jour.
(1700) in Shea. Eariy Voy., 93, 1861. PaoutM.—
Le Sueur (1700) in Margry, D^c, Vl, 70, 1886.
Paotttei.— Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Paq-
octe.— Dorse V in Trans. Anthrop. Soc. Wash., ii,
10, 1883. "Pa'-qo-tcc— Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 1882 (Kansa name). Pa'-qu-t<.— Dorsey.
K wapa MS. vocab., B. A. E.. 1881 (Quapaw name}.
PaqQ)«j$.— Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 18^
(Osage name). Pasn6han.— Gatschet. Pawnee
MS.. B. A. E. (Pawnee name). PaMinonan.— Doc.
1720 quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pap., v,
208. 1890. Pauhooohees.— McKenney and Hall,
Ind. Tribes, ii, 209, 1854. Paxodthe.— Gatschet,
Kaw MS. vocab., B. A. E., 27, 1878 (Kansa naxne).
Pierced Kotes.— Long, Exped. Rocxy Mts. , I, 839,
1823. Wa-qoto'.— Dorsey, Winnebago MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 1886 (Winnebago name). Tahowa.—
Beltrami, Pilgrimage, ii, 151, 1828. Towayt.— De
risle, map of La., in Neill, Hist. Minn., 164,1868.
Yuahe*.— Iberville (1700) in Margry, D6c., iv, 440,
1880 (identical?). Zaivovois.—Haldimand, accord-
ing to Catlin, quoted by D(malds<m in Smithson.
Rep. for 1885, pt. 2, 145, 1886.
Ipec. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Barbara mission, Cal. — Taylor
in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863. .
Ipersna. A summer village of the Ut-
kiavimiut Eskimo in n. Alaska. — Mur-
doch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 83, 1892.
BULL. 301
IPIK IROQUOIAN FAMILY
615
Ipik. An Eskimo village in s. w. Green-
land, lat. 60° 31''.— Meddelelser om Gron-
land, XVI, map, 1896.
Ipisogi. A subordinate settlement of
the Upper Creek town Oakfuski, on a
creek of the same name which enters
the Tallapoosa from the e., opposite
Oakfuski, Ala. According to Hawkins it
had 40 settlers in 1799.
E-pe-Mu-cee. -Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 47, 1848.
IpSigL— Gatachet. Cret'k Migr. Leg., 1. 133. 18&4.
Ipnot A Nunatogmiut Eskimo village
at C. Thomson, Alaska; pop. 40 in 1880.
Ip-Hot.— Petroff in 10th Cen«UH, Alaska, 59, 1884.
Ipoksimaiki {F-pok-si'maiks, * fat roast-
ers*). A division of the Piegan.
S-pofi'-si-mOu.— Hayden, Rthnog. and Philol. Mo.
V^., 264, 1862 (- 'the band that fries fat'). Fat
aoaitert.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 225.
1892. Ih-po'-te-mft.— Morgan, Anc, Soo., 171, 1877
(« • webfat' ). r-pok-si-m»lk».— Grinnell, op. <'it.,
Ippo (Ip--po\ 'mesa'). A Tarahumare
rancheria in Chihuahua, Mexico. — Lum-
holtz, inf n, 1894.
Iptugik. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Iratae. A village, presumably Costa-
noan, formerly connected with San Juan
Bautista mission, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Nov. 23, 1860.
Irihibano (* war councilors'). The pro-
genitors of the Fish clan of the ancient
Timucua of Florida.— Pareja [ca. 1613)
quoted by Gatschet in Am. Philos. Soc.
Proc., XVII, 492, 1878.
Iron. The use of iron by the Anierican
aborigines and especially by the tribes n.
of Mexico was very limited as compared
with their use of copper. The compact
ores were sometimes used, and were flaked,
pecked, or ground into shape, as were
the harder varieties of stone. Imple-
ments, ornaments, and pyinlK)lic objects
of hematite ore are found in great num-
bers in mounds and in burial places and
on dwelling sites over a large part of the
country. Since smelting was unknown to
the natives, the only form of metallic iron
available to them and sufficiently malle-
able to be shape<l by hammering is of
meteoric origin, and numerous examples
of implements shaped from it have been
recovere<l from the moundn. A series of
celts of ordinary form, along with partly
shaped pieces and natural masses of the
metal, w^ere found by Moorehead in a
mound of the Hopewell group near Chilli-
cothe, Ohio, and these are now in the Field
Museum of Natural H istory , Chiciigo. The
Turner mounds, in Hamilton co., Ohio,
have perhaps yielded the most interest-
ing relics of this class. Putnam des(;ribes
these, in enumerating the various objects
found on one of the earthen altars, as
follows: **But by far the most important
things found on this altar were the sev-
eral masses of meteoric iron and the orna-
ments made from this metal. One of
them is half of a spool-shaped ear orna-
ment, like those made of copper with
which it was associated. Another ear
ornament of copper is covered with a thin
plating of iron, in the same manner aa
others were covered with silver. Three
of the masses of iron have been more or
less hammered into bars, as if for the pur-
pose of making some ornament or imple-
ment, and another is apparently in the
natural shape in which it was found"
(16th Rep. Peabody Museum, iii, 171,
1884; see also Putnam in Proc. Am. Antiq.
Soc. ,11, 349, 1883 ) . Ross records the fact
that the Eskimo of Smith sd. used mete-
oric iron. Small bits of this metal beaten
out and set in a row in an ivory handle
made effective knives. See Hematite,
Metal v'ork.
Consult Kroeber in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist., AH, 285, 1899; Ross, Voyage of
Discovery, 1819; Thomas in 12th Rep.
B. A. P:., 319, 336, 1894. (w. h. h.)
Iroquoian Family. A linguistic stock
consisting of the following tribes and
tribal groups: the Hurons compose<l of
the Attignaouantan (liear i)eople), the
Attigneenongnahac (Cord people), the
Arendahronon (Rock |)eople),tneTohon-
taenrat ( Atahontaenrat or Tohontaenrat.
White-eared or Deer people), the Wen-
rohronon, the Ataronchronon, and the
Atonthrataronon (Otter people, an Al-
gonquian tril>e); the Tionontati or To-
bacco peoi)le or nation; the confe<iera-
tion of the Attiwendaronk or Neutrals,
composeii of the Neutrals proper, the
Aondironon, the Ongniarahronon, and
the Atin^nratka (Atiraguenrek) ; the
Conkhandeenrhonon; the Iroquois con-
fe(leration comj)Osed of the Mohawk,
the Oneida, the Onondaga, the Cayuga,
and the Seneca, with the Tuscarora after
1726; and in later times the incorporated
remnants of a numl)er of alien tribes,
such as the Tutelo, the Sa|X)ni, the Nanti-
coke, the Conoy, and the Muskwaki or
Foxes; the Conestoga or Suscjuehanna of
at least three trilws, of which one was
the Akhrakouaehronon or Atrakouaeh-
ronon; the Erie or Cat nation of at least
two allied peoples; the Tuscarora con-
federation, composed of st»veral league<l
tribes, the names of which are now un-
known; the Nottaway; the Meherrin;
and the Cherokee composed of at least
three divisions, the Elati, the Middle
Cherokee, and the A tali; and the Onnon-
tioga consisting of the Iroquois-Catholic
seceders on the St Ijawrence.
Each tribe was an independent political
unit, except those which formed leagues
in which tne constituent tribes, while en-
joying local self-government, acted jointly
in common affairs. For this reason there
was no general name for themselves com-
mon to all the tribes.
Jacques Cartier, in 1534, met on the
616
IROQUOIAN FAMILY
[B. A.1B.
shore of Gasp^ basin people of the Iro-
quoian stock, whom in the following year
he a^in encountered in their home on
the site of the city of Quebec, Canada.
He found both banks of the St Lawrence
above Quebec, as far as the site of Mon-
treal, occupied by people of this family.
He visitea the villages Hagonchenda,
Hochelaga, Hochelayi, Stadacona, and
Tutonagny. This was the first known
habitat of an Iroquoian people. Cham-
plain found these territories entirely de-
serted 70 years later, and Lescarbot found
people roving over this area speaking an
entirely different language from that re-
corded by Cartier. He believed that this
change of languages was due to **a de-
struction of people," because, he writes,
**8ome years ago the Iroquois assembled
themselves to the number of 8,000 men
and destroyed all their enemies, whom
they surprised in their enclosures." The
new language which he recorded was Al-
gonquian, spoken by bands that passeii
over this region on warlike forays.
The early occupants of the St Lawrence
were probably the Arendahronon and To-
hontaenrat, tribes of the Hurons. Their
lands bordered on those of the Iroquois,
whose territory extended westward to
that of the Neutrals, neighbors of the
Tionontati and western Huron tribes
to the N. and the Erie to the s. and w.
The Conestoga occupied the middle and
lower basin of the Susquehanna, s. of the
Iroquois. The n. Iroquoian area, which
Algonquian tribes surrounded on nearly
every side, therefore embraced nearly the
entire valley of the St Lawrence, the
basins of L. Ontario and L. Erie, the s. e.
shores of L. Huron and Georgian bay,
all of the present New York state except
the lower Hudson valley, all of central
Pennsylvania, and the shores of Chesa-
peake bay in Maryland as far as Choptank
and Patuxent rs. In the S. the Cherokee
area, surrounded by Algonquian tribes on
the N., Siouan on the e., and Muskhogean
and Uchean tribes on the s. and w., em-
braced the valleys of the Tennessee and
upper Savannah rs. and the mountainous
parts of Virginia, the Carolinas, and Ala-
bama. Separated from the Cherokee by
the territory of the eastern Siouan tribes
was the area occupied bv the Tuscarora
in B. North Carolina and by the Meherrin
and Nottoway n. of them in s. e. Virginia.
The northern Iroquoian tribes, espe-
cially the Five Nations so called, were sec-
ond to no other Indian people n. of Mex-
ico in political organization, statecraft,
and military prowess. Their leaders were
astute diplomats, as the wily French
and English statesmen with whom they
treated soon discovered. In war the^
practised ferocious cruelty toward their
prisoners, burning even their unadopted
women and infant prisoners; but, far from
being a race of rude and savage warriors,
they were a kindly and affectionate peo-
ple, full of keen sympathy for kin and
friends in distress, kind and deferential
to their women, exceedingly fond of their
children, anxiously striving for peace and
good will among men, and profoundly
imbued with a jiist reverence for the con-
stitution of their commonwealth and for
its founders. Their wars were waged
primarily to secure and perpetuate their
political life and independence. The
fundamental principles of their confed-
eration, persistently maintained for cen-
turies by force of arms and by compacts
with other peoples, were based primarily
on blood relationship, and they shaped
and directed their foreign and internal
polity in consonance with these principles.
The underlying motive for the institution
of the Iroquois league was to secure uni-
versal peace and welfare {ne*^ 8ki^r/no»*)
among men by the recognition and en-
forcement of the forms of civil govern-
ment (ne*^ gd^i*huiio) through the direc-
tion and regulation of personal and public
conduct and thought m accordance with
beneficent customs and council degrees;
by the stopping of bloodshed in the
blood feud through the tender of the pre-
scribed price for the killing of a cotribes-
man; by abstaining from eating human
flesh; and, lastly, through the mainte-
nance and necessary exercise of power
(n€*^ giV shdsdof^^^sa ) y not only military
but also magic power believed to be em-
bodied in the forms of their ceremonial
activities. The tender by the homicide
and his family for the murder or killing
by accident of a cotribesman was twenty
strings of wampum — ten for the d^id per-
son, and ten for the forfeited life of the
homicide.
The religious activities of these tribes
expressed themselves in the worship of
all environing elements and bodies and
many creatures of a teeming fancy, which,
directly or remotely affecting their wel-
fare, were regarded as man-bein^ or an-
thropic personages endowed with life,
volition, and peculiar individual ormdUiy
or magic power. In the practice of this
religion, ethics or morals, as such, far
from having a primary had onl v a second-
ary, if any, consideration. I'he status
and personal relations of the personages
of their pantheon were fixed and r^u-
lated by rules and customs similar to those
in vogue in the social and political organ-
ization of the people, and there was,
therefore, among at least the principal
gods, a kinship system pattemea on that
of the people themselves.
The mental superiority of the Hurons
(q. V.) over their Algonquian neighbors
is frequently mentioned by the early
BULL. SO]
IROQUOIS
617
French missionaries. A remainder of the
Tioncmtati, with a few refugee Hurons
among them, having fled to the r^ion of
the upper lakes, along with certain Ottawa
tribes, to escape the Iroquois invasion in
1649, maintained among their fellow ref-
ugees a predominating influence. This
was largely because, like other Iroquoian
tribes, thev had been highly organized
socially ana politically, and were there-
fore trained in definite parliamentary cus-
toms and procedure. The fact that, al-
though but a small tribe, the Hurons
claimed and exercised the right of light-
ing the council fire at all general gather-
ings, shows the esteem m which they
were held by their neighbors. TheChero-
kee were the first tribe to adopt a consti-
tutional form of government, embodied
in a code of laws written in their own
language in an alphabet based on the
Roman characters adapted by one of them
(see Sequoya), though in weighing tiie^e
facts their large infusion of white blood
must be considered.
The social organization of the Iroquoian
tribes was in some respects similar to that
of some other Indians, but it was much
more complex and cohesive, and there
was a notaole difference in regard to the
important position accorded the women.
Among the Cherokee, the Irocjuois, the
Hurons, and probably among the other
tribes, the women performed important
and essential functions in their govern-
ment. Every chief was chosen and re-
tained his position, and every important
measure was enacted by the consent and
cooperation of the child-bearing women,
and the candidate for a chiefship was
nominated by the suffrages of the matrons
of this group. His selection by them
from among their sons had to be con-
firmed by the tribal and the federal coun-
cils respectively, and finally he was in-
stalled into office by federal officers.
Lands and houses belonged solely to the
women.
All the Iroquoian tribes were sedentary
and agricultural, depending on the chase
for only a small part of their subsistence.
The northern tribes were especially noted
for their skill in fortification and house-
building. Their so-called castles were
solid log structures, with platforms run-
ning around the top on the inside, from
which stones and other missiles could be
hurled down upon besiegers.
For the population of the tribes com-
posing the Iroquoian family see Iroquois,
and the descriptions of the various Iro-
quoian tribes. (j. n. b. h.)
^Ohelekee».---Keane in Stanford, Compend.,
Wi6, 1836 (kept apart from Iroquois, though prob-
able affinity asserted); Bancroft. Hist. U. S., iii,
246, 1840: Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v, 401,
1847; Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, pt.
1, xcix, 77, 1848; Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc.
Loud., 58, 1856 (a separate group, perhaps to be
classed with Iroquois and Sioux); Gallatin in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 401, 1853; Latham,
Opuscula,327,1860; Keane in Stanford, Compend.,
Cent, and So. Am., app., 460, 472, 1878 (same as
Chelekees or Tsalagi— "apparently entirely dis-
tinct from all other American tongues").
>Oheroki.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 24,
1884; Gatschet in Science, 413, Apr. 29, 1887.
=Huron-Oherokee.— Hale in Am. Antiq., 20, Jan.,
1883 (proposed as a family name instead of Huron-
Iroquois; relationship to Iroquois aflarmed).
<Huroii-Iroquois.— Bancroft, Hist. U. S., in, 243,
1840. >Irokc«eii.— Berghaus ( 1845), Physik. Atlas,
map 17, 1848; ibid., 1852. xlroketen.— Berghaus.
Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887 (includes Kataba and
said to be derived from Dakota). =Iroquoian.—
Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 77, 189L >Iroquoii.—
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 21, 23,
305, 1836 (excludes Cherokee); Prichard, Phys.
HK Mankind, v, 381, 1847 (follows Gallatin);
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, pt. 1,
xcix, 77, 1848 (as in 1836); Gallatin in School-
craft. Ind. Tribes, in, 401, 1853 Latham in Trans.
Philol. Soc. I^nd., 58, 1856; Latham, Opuseula,
327, 1860; Latham, Elements Comp. Philol., 403.
18G2. >T8chirokie».— Berghaus (1845), Physik.
Atlas,map 17, 1848. >Wyandot-Iroquoi«.— Keane
in Stanford, Compend., Cent, and So. Am., app.,
460, 468, 1878.
Iroquois (Algonkin: In"akhoiw, *real
adders*, with the French suffix -ois).
The confederation of Iroquoian tribes
known in history, among other names,
by that of the Five Nations, comprising
the Cayuga, Mohawk, Oneida, Onondaga,
and Seneca. Their name for themselves
as a political body was Ongwano'*8ionni\
' we are of the extended lodge.* Amone
the Iroquoian tribes kinship is traced
through the bipod of the woman only;
kinship means membership in a family,
and this in turn constitutes citizenship
in the tribe, conferring certain social,
political, and religious privileges, duties,
and rights which are denied to persons
of alien blood; but, by a legal fiction
emlx>died in the right of adoption, the
blood of the alien may be figuratively
changed into one of the strains of the
Iroquoian blood, and thus citizenship may
be conferred on a person of ahen lineage.
In an Iroquoian tribe the legislative,
judicial, and executive functions are
usually exercised by one and the same
clajjs of persons, commonly called chiefs
in English, who are organized into coun-
cils. There are three grades of cliiefs.
The chiefship is hereditary in certain of
the simplest political units in the gov-
ernment of the tribe; a chief is nomi-
nated by the suffrages of the matrons of
this unit, and the nomination is con-
firmed by the tribal and the federal cotm-
cils. The functions of the three grades
of chiefs are defined in the rules of pro-
cedure. When the five Iroquoian tnbes
were organized into a confederation, its
government was only a development of
that of the separate' tribes, just as the
government of each of the constituent
tribes was a development of that of the
several clans of which it was composed.
The government of the clan was a de.
618
IROQUOIS
[B. A. B.
velopment of that of the several brood
families of which it was composed, and
thfe browl family, strictly speaking, was
composed of the progeny of a woman
and her female descendants, counting
through the female line only; hence the
clan may be described as a permanent
body of kindred, socially and politically
organized, who trace actual and theoret-
ical descent through the female line only.
The simpler units surrendered part of
their autonomy to the next higher units
in such wise that the whole was closely
interdependent and cohesive. The estab-
lishment of the higher unit created new
rights, privileges, and duties. This was
the principle of organization of the con-
federation of the five Iroquoian tribes.
The date of the formation of this confed-
eration (probably not the first, but the
last of a series of attempts to unite the
several tril)es in a federal union) was not
earlier than about the year 1570, which
is some lii) years anterior to that of the
Huron trihen.
The Delawares gave them the name
Mingwe. The northern and western
Algonquians called them Nadowa, 'ad-
ders'. The Powhatan called them Mas-
sawomekes. The English knew them as
the Confederation of the Five Nations,
and after the admission of the Tuscarora
in 1722, as the Six Nations. Moreover,
the names Maqua, Mohawk, Seneca, and
Tsonnontowan, by which their leading
tribes were called, were also applied to
them collectively. The League of the
Iroquois, when first known to Europeans,
was ccun posed of the five tribes, and oc-
cupied tlie territory extending from the
E. watershed of L. Champlain to the w.
watersheil of Genesee r., and from the
Adirondacks southward to the territory of
the Conestoga. The date of the formation
of the league is not certain, but there is
evidence that it took place about 1570, oc-
casioned by wars with Algonquian and
Huron tribes. The con federated Iroquois
immediately began to make their united
power felt. After the coming of the
Dutch, from whom they procured- fire-
arms, they were able to extend their con-
quests over all the neighboring tribes
until their dominion was acknowledged
from Ottawa r. to the Tennessee and from
the Kennebec to Illinois r. and L. Michi-
gan. Their westward advance was
checked by the Chippewa; the Cherokee
and the Catawba proved an effectual bar-
rier in the S., while in the N. they were
hampered by the operations of the
French in Canada. Champlain on one of
his early expeditions joined a party of
Canmlian Indians against the Iroquois.
This made them bitter enemies of the
French, whom they afterward opposed at
every step to the close of the French
r^me in Canada in 1763, while they
were firm allies of the English. The
French made several attempts through
their missionaries to win over the Iro-
quois, and were so far successful that a
considerable number of individuals from
the different tribes, most of them Mo-
hawk and Onondaga, withdrew from the
several tribes and formed Catholic set-
tlements at Caughnawaga, St Regis, and
Oka, on the St Lawrence. The tribes of
the league repeatedly tried, but without
success, to induce them to return, and
finally, in 1684, declared them to be
traitors. In later wars the Catholic Iro-
quois took part with the French against
tneir former brethren. On the breaking
out of the American Revolution the
League of the Iroquois decided not to
take part in the conflict, but to allow
each tribe to decide for itself what action
to take. All the tribes, with the excep-
tion of the Oneida and about half of the
Tuscarora, joined the English. After the
revolution the Mohawk and Cayuga, with
other Iroquoian tribes that were in the
P^nglish interest, after several temporary
assignments, were finally settled by the
Canadian government on a reservation
on Grand r., Ontario, where they still
reside, although a few individuals emi-
grated to Gibson, Bay of Quinte, Caugh-
nawaga, and St Thomas, Ontario. All
the Iroquois in the Unite<l States are on
reservations in New York with the ex-
ception of the Oneida, who are settled
near Green Bay, Wis. The so-called
Seneca of Oklahoma are composed of the
remnants of many tribes, among which
may be mentioned the Conestoga and
Hurons, and of emigrants from all the
tribes of the Iroouoian confederation. It
is very probable that the nucleus of
these Seneca was the renmant of the
ancient Erie. The Catholic Iroquois of
Caughnawaga, St Regis, and Oka, al-
though having no coiuiection with the
conf^eration, supplied many recruits to
the fur trade, and a large number of
them have become permanently resident
among the northwestern tril)es of the
United States and Canada.
The number of the Iroquois villages
varied greatly at different periods and
from decade to decade. In 1657 there
were about 24, but after the conquest of
the Erie the entire country from the
Genesee to the w. watershed of L. Erie
csime into possession of the Iroquoian
tribes, which afterward settled colonies
on the upper waters of the Allegheny
and Susquehanna and on the n. shore of
L. Ontario, so that by 1750 their villages
may have numbered about 50. The
population of the Iroquois also varied
much at different periods. Their con-
stant wars greatly weakened them. In
BULL. 301
IROQUOIS
619
1689 it was estimated that thev had 2,250
warriors, who were reducecl hy war,
disease, and defections to Canada, to
1,230 in 1698. Their losses were largely
made up by their system of wholesale
adoption, which was carried on to such
an extent that at one time their adopted
aliens w^ere reported to equal or exceed
the number of native Iroquois. Disre-
garding the extraordinary estimates of
some early writei*s, it is evident that the
modern Iroquois, instead of decreasing
in population, have increased, and num-
ber more at present than at any former
period. On account of the defection of
the Catholic Iroquois and the omission
of the Tuscarora from the estimates it
was impossible to get a statement of the
full strength of the Iroquois until within
recent times. About tne middle of the
17th century the Five Nations were sup-
posed to have reached their highest
point, and in 1677 and 1685 thev were
estimated at about 16,000. In 1689 they
were estimated at about 12,850, but in
the next 9 years they lost more than half
by war and by desertions to Canada. The
most accurate estimates for the 18th cen-
tury gave to the Six Nations and their
colonies about 10,000 or 12,000 souls. In
1774 they were estimated at 10,000 to
12,500. In 1904 they numbere<l about
16,100, including more than 3,000 mixed-
bloods, as follows:
In Ontario: Iroquois and Algonkin at
Watha (Gibson), 139 (about one-half
Iro(iuois) ; Mohawk of the Bav of Quinte,
1,271; Oneida of the Thames, 770; Six
Nations on Grand r., 4,195 (including
about 150 Dela wares). In Quebec: Iro-
quois of Caughnawaga, 2,074; of St Re-
gis, 1,426; of l^ke of Two Mountains,
393. Total in Canada, about 10,418.
The Iroquois of New York in 1904
were distributed »s follows: Onondaga
and Seneca on Allegany res., 1,041;
Cayuga, Onondaga, and Seneca on Catta-
raugus res., 1,456; Oneida on Oneida res.,
150; Oneida and Onondaga on Onondaga
res., 513; St Regis res., 1,208; Cayuga and
Seneca on Tonawanda res., 512; Onon-
daga and Tuscarora on Tuscarora res.,
410. Total, 5,290.
In 1905 there were also 366 Indians
classed as Seneca under the Seneca
School, Okla.
The Al^onquian and other Indians in-
• eluded with the Iroquois are probably
outnumbered by the Caughnawaga and
others in the Canadian N. W. who are
not separately enumerated.
The following villages were Iroquois,
but the particular tribes to which they
belonged are either unknown or are col-
lective: Adjouquay, Allaquippa, Anpua-
qun, Aquatsagana, Aratumouat, Awegen,
Blackleg's Village, Buckaloon, Cahun-
ghage, Canowdowsa, Caughnawaga, Char-
tierstown, Chemegaide, Chenango, Chin-
klacamoose, Chugnut, Churamuk, C6do-
coraren, Cokanuck, Conaquanosshan,
Conejoholo, Conemaugh, Conihunta, Con-
nosomothdian, Conoytown (mixed Conoy
and Iroquois), Coreorgonel (mixed),
Cowawago, Cussewago, Ganadoga, Gana-
garahhare, Ganasarage, Ganeraske, Gan-
neious, Gannentaha, Glasswanoge, Gosh-
goshunk (mixed). Grand River Indians,
Hickory town (mixed), Janundat, Jed-
akne, Johnstown, Jonondes, Juniata,
Juraken (2), Kahendohon, Kanaghsaws,
Kannawalohalla, Kanesadageh, Kara-
ken, Karhationni, Karhawenradon,
Kayehkwarageh, Kaygen, Kent^, Kick-
enapawling, Kiskiminetas, Kittaning,
Kuskuski (mixed), Lawunkhannek,
Logstown, Loyalhannon (?), Mahusque-
chikoken, Mahican, Mahoning, Manck-
atawangum, Matchasaung, Middletown,
Mingo Town, Mohanet, Nescopeck,
Newtown (4 settlements), Newtychan-
ing, Octageron, Ohrekionni, Onaweron,
Onkwe lyede, Opolopong, Oquaga, Ose-
wingo, Oskawaserenhon, Ostonwackin,
Oswegatchie, Otiahanague, Otsiningo,
Otskwirakeron, Ousagwentera, Owego,
Paille Coupee, Pluggy's Town, Pnnx-
atawney, Runonvea, Saint Regis, Saw-
cunk, Schoharie, Schohorage, Sconassi,
Scoutash's Town, Seneca Town, Seveg^,
Sewickly's Old Town, Shamokin, Shan-
nopin, Shenango, Sheshequin, Sheo-
quage, Sittawingo, Skannayutenate, Ske-
handowa, Solocka, Swahadowri, Taiaia-
gon, Tewanondadon, TingR, Tohoguses
Cabins, Tonihata, Tullihas. Tuscarora,
Tuskokogie, Tutelo, Unadilla, Venango,
Wakatomica, Wakerhon, Wauteghe,
Yoghroonwago, Youcham. Catholic mis-
sions among the Iroquois were: Caughna-
waga, Indian Point, La Montague, La
Prairie, Oka, Oswegatchie, St Regis, and
Sault au Recollet. For the othei; Irotjuois
settlements, see under the several tribal
names. (j. n. b. n.)
Acquinoshionee. — Sclioolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 517f
18.^3. Acquinushionee.— Schoolcraft in Proc. N. Y.
Hist. Soc. 80, 1H44. Aganusohioni.— Macauley, N.
Y., II, 185, 1829. Agoneateah.— Ibid. -Acoimoii-
sionni.— Charlevoix (1744) quoted by Drake, Bk.
Inds.. bk. V, 3. 1848. Agonnotttioni. — McKenney
and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 79, 1854. Agonn-
Bionni.— Clark, Onondaga, i, 19, 1849. Akonon-
Bionni.— Brinton, Lenape Leg., 255, 1885. Akwi-
nothioni.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi. 138. 1867.
AquaDotohioni.— Barton, New Views, app.,f, 1798.
AquanuMhioni.~Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. v, 4, 1848.
AquanuMhionig.— Vater, Mith.. pt. 3, sec. 3, 309,
1816. AqoinoAmoni.^SchooIcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi,
188, 1857. Aquinuthionee.— Ibid., ill, 532, 1853.
Oaenocstoery.— Schuyler (1699) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., IV, 563. 1854. Oaaaghkonie.— Dellius(1697),
ibid., 280. Oanaghkouse.— Ibia. Oannauoone.—
Doc. of 1695, ibid., 122. OannitMone.— Ibid.,
120. CannoMoene.— Gov. of Can. (1695), ibid.,
122. note. OanoMoene.— Doc. of 1695, ibid., 120.
Canossoone.— Ibid. Oanton Indiana. — Fletcher
(1693), ibid.. 33. Oocno«»oeny.— Ibid.. 563. note.
Confederate Indian*.— Johnson (1760), ibid., VII,
432. Oonfederate Nations. — Mt Johnson conf.
620
IROQUOISE CHIPPEWAY8 — IRRIGATION
[B. A. B. ^
(1755) , ibid . , vi, 983, 1855. Confederates.— Johnson
(1763), ibid., vii, 582, 1856. Erocoite.— Morton (ca.
1660) in Me. Hist. Sotr. Coll., in, 84, 1853. Five
Canton Nations.— Jamison (1696) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., IV, 235,1854. Five Indian Cantons.— Hunter
(171 1 ), ibid., V, 252, 1855. Five Mohawk Nations.—
Carver, Trav., 173, i778. Five Nations.— And ros
(1690)inR.I. Col. Rec., 111,284,1858. Ghprhunnugh-
shonee.— Macau ley, N. Y., ii, 185, 1829. Haugh-
goffhnuohshionee.— Ibid. ,185. jSiroooi.— Shea,Cath.
Mrss.,215,1855. Hiroquais.— I bid., 205 (first applied
by French to both Hurons and Iroquois),
tfiroquois.— Jes. Rel. for 1632, 14, 1858. Ho-de'-
no-sau-nee.- Morgan, League Iroq., 51, 1851.
Ho-di-non'syon'ni'.- Hewitt, infn, 1886 (*they are
of the house ' : own name, Seneca form ). Honon-
tonchionni.— Millet (1693) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
IV, 78, 1854. Hotinnonohiendi.— Jes. Rel. for 1654,
11, 1858. Hotinnonsionni.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 205,
1855. Hotinonsionni.— Bruyas (eo.l700) quoted in
Charlevoix, New France, ii, 189, note, 1866 (Mo-
hawk form). Hvroquoise.— Sagard (1636) in note
to Champlain, (Euv., in, 220, 1870. Hyroquoyse.—
Ibid. Inquoi.— Boyd, Ind. Local Names, 1885 (mis-
print). Ireooies.— Lovelace (1670) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., in, 190,1853. IrequoU.— Brickell, N. C,
283, 1737. Iriquoi.— Boyd, Ind. Local Names, 30,
1885. Iriquois.— Thornton in Me. Hist. Soc.Coll.,
v, 175, 1857. Irocois.— Champlain (1603), (Euv., Ii,
9. 1870. Irocquois.— Doc. of 1666 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., ni, 134, 1853. Irognaii.— Ras1e(1724) in Ma.ss.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s„ vni, 246, 1819. Irokesen.—
Vater, Mith., pt. 3. sec. 3, 303, 1816 (German form).
Ironois.— Hennepin. Cont. of New Discov., map,
1698. Iroquaes.— Bayard (1698) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., IV, 353, 1854. iroque.— Smith (1799) quoted
by Drake, Trag. Wild., 251, 1841. Iroquese.— Hen-
nepin (1683) quoted by Harris, Voy. and Trav., ii,
906, 1705. Iroquese.- Harris, ibid., i, 811, 1705.
Iroqniese.— Hennepin, New Discov., 19, 1698.
Iroquoi.— Baraga, Eng.-Otch. Diet.. 147, 1878.
Iroquois.— Jes. Rel. for 1645, 2, 1858. Iroquos.—
Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. v, 41,1848. Irriquois.— Pike,
Trav., 130.1811. Irroquois.— Talon (1671) in Mar-
gry, Dec, i, 100, 1875. Irroquoys.— La Montague
Tl658) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xill, 89, 1881.
Ke-nunctioni.— Macauley, N. Y., n, 174. 1829. Kon-
oshioni.— Gale, I'pper Miss.. 159, 18<>7. Konos-
sioni.— Dellius (1694) in N. Y. Doc, Col. Hist., iv,
78, 1854. Konungzi Oniga.— Vater, Mith., pt3, sec.3,
309, 1816. Let-e-nugh-shonee.— Macauley, N. Y., ii,
185, 1829. Mahongwis.— Rafinesque, Am. Nations,
I, 157, 1836. Masawomekes.— Smith (1629), Va., I,
120, 1819. Massawamacs.— Keane in Stanford,
Compend., 521, 1878. Massawomaos.- Jefferson,
Notes, 279, 1825. Massawomecks. — Straehey {ca.
1612), Va., 40, 1849. Massawomees.- Ratinesque,
introd. to Marshall, Ky., I, 33, 1824. Massawo-
mekes.— Smith (1629), Va., l. 74, 1819. Massawo-
nacks.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 130, 1857.
Kassawonaes.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 127,
1816. Massowomeks.— Smith (1629), Va., 1, 119, 1819.
Mat-che-naw-to-waig.— Tanner, Narr., 316, 1830
('bad snakes' : Ottawa name for the Iroonois,
in contradistinction to the Hurons, called the
•good snakes'). Matohinadoaek. — La Hon tan
(1703) quoted by Vater, Mith., pt 3, sec. 3, 264, 1816
(*baa people': Algonquian name). Mengua. —
Heckewelaer (1819) quoted by Thompson, Long
Id., I, 767, 1843. Mengues.— Bozman, Md., II, 481,
1837. Menguy.— Rafinesque, introd. to Marshall,
Ky., 1, 31, 1824. Mengwe.— Heckewelder (1819) in
Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 216, 1859. Mengwee.— Ma-
cauley, N. Y., II, 185, 1829. Mengwi.— Rafinesque,
Am. Nations, i, 157, 1836. Messawomes.— Am. Pion.,
II, 189, IMS. Minckquas.— Smitt ( 1660) in N. Y. Doe-
Col. Hist., XIII, 164. 1881. Minoquaas.— Doc.of 1660,
ibid., 184. Mingaes.— Doc. of 1659, ibid., 106. Min-
goe.—Conestoga council (1721) quoted by Proud,
Penn., ii, 132,1797. Mingos. — Homann Heirs map,
1756. Mingwee.— Macauley, N. Y., ii, 185, 1829.
Minquaas.— Doc. of 1660 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
xni, 181, 1881 (also applied to the Mingo on Ohio
r., on map in Mandrillon, Spectateur Am^ricain,
1785). Kinauaes.— Doc. of 1658, ibid. 95. Kin-
quas.— Van der Donck (1656) quoted by Ruttenber,
Tribes Hudson R., 51. 1872. Mungwas.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, v, 147, 1855 (Chippewa mame,
and may mean the Mundua). Ha-do-wage'.—
Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 52, 1870. Nadowaig.^
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 39, 1865. Nadowaa.—
Schoolcraft, Pers. Mem., 446, 1851. N&dow^.—
Baraga, Enel.-Otch. Diet., 147, 1878 (Chippewa
name). Nah-dah-waig.— Schoolcraft, Ind Tribes,
V, 193, 1855. Nahdooways.— Jones, Qjebway Inds.,
32. 1861. Nahdoways.— Ibid., 111. Nataagi.— Gat-
schet. Creek Migr. Leg., i, 61, 1884 (Creek name).
Naud-o-waig.- warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc.
Coll . , V, 83, 1885. Naudoways.— Tanner, Narr. , 88,
1830. Nautowaig.— Ibid., 316 (Ottawa name).
Nautowas.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 904, 1858.
Nautoway.— Tanner, Narr., 310, 1830. Nod-o-
waig.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 90, 1850. Nodoways.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, li, 149, 1852. Nodswslg.—
Ind, Aff. Rep., 83, 1850. Notinnonehioni.— Millet
(1693) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 79, 1864. Notte-
wagees.— Glen (1750), ibid., vi, 588, 1865. Notte-
wegas.— Mitchel in Hist. Mag., 1st s., iv,358, 1860.
Notteweges.— McCall, Hist. Ga., I, 243, 1811.
On-gwi-noB'svoo'ni'.— Hewitt, infn, 1886 (Seneca
form}. Rodinunchsiouni.— Colden (1727) quoted
in Charlevoix, New France, ii, 189, note, 1866.
Sechs Nationen.— Giissefeld, map, 1784 (German:
'Six Nations'). SizAlUedNations.— Sharpe(17&4)
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., v, 16, im. Six
Nations.— Albany conf. (1724) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist. V, 713, 1855. Trokesen.— Heckewelder (1819)
quoted by Thompson, Long Id., i, 76, 1843 (Dutch
form; misprint). Troquois.— Gorges (1658) in Me.
Hist. Soc. Coll.. II, 66, 1847 (misprint). Tuda-
manes.— Barcia, Ensayo, 16, 1723. waasawcBMfii.^
Rafinesque, introd. to Marshall, Ky., i, 83, 1824.
Ya'<kw&-na'>-*syan-ni'.— Hewitt, infn, 1886 (Tus-
carora f orm ) . Yrocois. — Champlain ( 1632) , (Euv.,
V, pt, 2, 46, 1870. Yrokoise.— Vaudreuil (1760) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 1092, 1858. TroquoU.^
Champlain (1632), (Euv., v, pt 2. 47, 1870.
Iroquoise Chippeways. The Catholic
Iroquois and Nipissing settled at Oka,
Quebec. — Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Ck)ll., 2d s., ii, 11, 1814.
Iroquois Sup^rieurs ( French : * upper Iro-
quois*). A geographical group of Iro-
quois, embracing the Oneida, Onondaga,
Cayuga, and Seneca, occupying, in the
17th century, an inland country farther
from St Lawrence r. than the Mohawk,
who were called Iroquois Inf^rieurs. —
Jes. Rel. for 1656, 7, 1858.
Irrigation. It was once assumed that
irrigation was not practised by thelndians
of the arid region, excepttoa very limited
extent, until after they came under the
influence of Spanish missionaries; but
recent systematic study of the archeologic
remains in theS. W. has removed all doubt
that agriculture was conducted in prehis-
toric times with the aid of extensive irri-
gation canals, reservoirs, and dams. The
most important of these works are in the
valleys of the Gila and its tributaries, in
s. Arizona, wherescores of milesof ditches
are still traceable, in instances extending
more than 10 m. from the stream from
which the water was diverted; according
to some observers there are individual
canals that traverse a total distance of 25
m. In the Salt River valley alone it is
estimated that from 2(X),000 to 250,000
acres were made available for cultivation
by means of irrigation before the arrival
o{ white men. Some of the ancient canals
were about 7 ft deep and 4 ft wide at
the bottom, but the sides sloped grad-
ually, rising in steps, giving the acequia
BULL. 30]
IRRUPIENS — IRUWAITSU
621
a width of about 30 ft at the surface.
Both the bed and the sides were care-
fully tamped and plastered with clay to
prevent waste through seepage. Re-
mains of what are believed to have been
wooden head gates have been exposed
by excavation. Where canal depressions
have disappeared, owing to cultivation
or to sand drift, the canals are still trace-
able by the innumerable bowlders and
water-worn concretions that line the
banks; these, according to Gushing, hav-
ing been placed there by the natives
as " water-tamers" to direct the streams
to the thirsty fields. The irrigation
works in the valleys mentioned probably
indicate greater engineering skill than
any aboriginal remains that have been
discovered N. of Mexico. Several of the
old canal beds have been utilized for
miles by modern ditch builders; in one
instance a saving of $20,000 to $25,000
was effected at the Mormon settlement of
Mesa, Maricopa co., Ariz., by employing
an ancient acequia that traversed a vol-
canic knoll for 3 m. and which at one
point was excavated to a depth of 20 to
25 ft in the rock for several hundred feet.
The remains of ditches the building of
which necessitated overcoming similar
though less serious obstacles exist in the
valley of the Rio Verde; and on the Has-
sayampa, n. w. of Phoenix, a canal from
that stream traverses a lava mesa for sev-
eral miles and falls abruptly into a valley
40 or 50 ft. below, the water in its descent
having cut away the rocky mesa walls for
several feet.
Even where the water supply of a
pueblo settlement situated several miles
from a stream was obtained by means
of canals, each house cluster was pro-
vided with a reservoir; and in many
instances through the S. W., reservoirs,
sometimes covering an area measuring 1
m. by i m., designed for the storage of
rain water, were the sole means of water
suppl}; both for domestic purposes and
for irrigation. In the valleys of the Rio
Grande and its tributaries, in New Mex-
ico, small reservoirs were the chief means
of supplying water to the ancient villages;
and even to-day only the rudest methods
of irrigation are employed by the Pueblo
tribes. The ancient occupants of Pefias-
co Blanco, one of the Chaco canyon
group of ancient ruins in the Navaho
desert in n. w. New Mexico, diverted
water from the Chaco by means of a
ditch which supplied a reservoir built in
sand, and partially prevented seepage by
lining its bed with slabs of stones and clay.
The neighboring pueblos of Una Vida,
Pueblo Bonito, Kinklazhin, Kinbineola,
and Kinyaah, also were artificially pro-
vided with water for irrigation. Kinbi-
neola, however, exhibits the best example
of irrigation works of any of the Chaco
group ot villages, water having Ijeen
diverted from the sandy wash to a large
natural depression and thence conducted
, to the fields, 2 m. away, by a ditch dug
around a mesa and along a series of sand
hills on a fairly uniform grade. This
ditch was mainly earthwork, but where
necessary the lower border was reenforced
with retaining walls of stone. Kinyaah
is said to have been provided with two
large reservoirs and a canal 25 to 30 ft
wide and in places 3 to 4 ft deep.
Hand irrigation is still practised by the
Pueblo Indians. The Zuiii women, in
order to raise their small crops of onions;
chile, etc., are obliged to carry water in
jars on their heads, sometimes for several
hundred yards; it is then poured on the
individual plants with a gourd ladle. At
the Middle Mesa villages of the Honi,
garden patches are watered in much tne
same wav, except that here the gardens
are withm easier reach of the springs and
are irrigated by means of a gourd vessel
fastened to the end of a long pole. Both
the Hopi of to-day and the ancient inhab-
itants of the vicinity of the present Solo-
mon vi He, on the CJila, constructed rener-
voirs on the mesa sides from which ter-
raced gardens below were readily irrigated,
the reservoirs being supplied by impound-
ing storm water. Throughout the S. W.
where pueblos occupied the summits of
mesas, reservoirs were provided, and
according to tradition some of these were
■filled in winter by rolling into them im-
mense snowballs. For hundred of years
the pueblo of A coma (q. v. ) has derived
its entire water supply for domestic pur-
poses from a natural depression in the
rock which receives the rainfall from the
mesa summit.
Consult Cushing (1), Zufii Breadstuff,
1884-85, (2) in Compte-rendu Internat.
Cong. Amor., vii, 163, 1890; Fewkes in
22d Rep. B. A. E., 1904; He wett in Records
of the Past, iv, no. 9, 1905; Hodge in Am.
Anthrop., vi, 323, 1893; Mindeleff in 13th
Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Wilson in 13th Rep.
U. S. Geol. Surv., 133, 1893. (f. w. h.)
Irrupiens. A village on a river of the
same name, an affluent of Trinity r., Tex.,
at which St Denis and his party stopped
in 1717. Herds of buffalo were encoun-
tered there. The region was in the main
occupied by tribds of the Caddoan family,
but bordered the country occupied by
intrusive tribes of other stocks. Con-
sult Derbanne in Margry, D^c, vi, 204,
1886; La Harpe in French, Hist. Coll.
La., Ill, 48, 1851. Cf. Ervipiames.
(a. c. F.)
Irnwaitsn ( IniaVtsu, * Scott valley peo-
ple ' ) . One of the 4 divisions of the main
body of Shasta, living in Scott valley, Sis-
kiyou CO. , Cal. In 1851 the entire Indian
622
ISAI/WAKTEN I8LETA
[B. A. B.
population of Scott valley occupied 7 vil-
lages and was estimated by Gibbs ( School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 171, 1853) to num-
ber 420. One of these settlements was
apparently Watsaghika.
Imai'tsu.— R. B. Dixon, inf n, 1903 (correct name).
I'puwai.— Curtin, MS. voeab.,B. A. E., 1885. Scott^s
Valley Indians.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,
32d Cong., spec, sess,, 170, 1853. Soott Valley In-
diana.—Steele in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 120, 1865.
Isalwakten. A body of Salish of Fraser
superintendencv, Brit. Col.
Isalwakten.— Can. Ind. A£F., 79, 1878. Isalwalken.—
Ibid., 138, 1879.
Isamis. A body of Salish of Fraser
superintendency, Brit. Col. — Can. Ind.
Aff., 78, 1878.
Isamuck. A body of Salish of Fraser
superintendency, Brit. Col.
Isammuok.— Can. Ind. AfT., 138, 1879. Isamuok.—
Ibid., 78, 1878.
Isanthcogna. A former GabrieleSo
rancheria in Los Anj^les co., Cal., at a
locality later called Mission Vieja. — Ried
(1852) quoted by Hoffman in Bull. Essex
Inst., XVII, 2, 1885.
leanyati (*Santee'). A Brul^ Sioux
band, probably originally Santee.
Jsanyati.— Cleveland quoted by Dorsey in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 219, 1897. Isanvati.— Ibid.
Isfanalgi. An extinct clan of the Creeks,
said by Gatschet to be seemingly analo-
gou.s to the Ishpani phratry and clan of
the Chickasaw.
Is-fa-nai'-ke.— Morgan. Anc. Soc., 161, 1877. Ish-
fanalffi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 156, 1884.
Isha. A former populous Chumashan
village near San Pedro, Ventura co., Cal.
I-ca'.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab.,
B. A. K., 1884.
Ishann. The Coyote clan of the Hopi.
I'-sau-uh wiin-wii. — Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii,
403, 1894 (M?M«-itru= 'clan'). Isauu winwu. —
Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E.. 584, 1900. Ish.—
Voth, Oraibi Summer Snake Ceremony, 282, 1903.
I-sha-hue.— Bourke, Snake Dance, 171. 1884. Ish-
awu.— Dorsev and Voth. Oraibi Soyal, 12, 1901.
I'shawutt.— Voth, Hopi Proper Names, 81, 1905.
Shahuc.— Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inda., 65, 1893
(misquoting Bourke).
Ishgua. A former Chumashan village
located by Taylor near the mouth of
Saticoy r., Ventura co., Cal. Perhaps
the same as Isha.
Ishgua.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, July 24, 1863.
Ishguaget.— Ibid.
Ishipishi. A Karok village on the w.
bank of Klamath r., n. w. Cal., a mile
above the mouth of the Salmon, opposite
Katimin, and, like it, burned by the
whites in 1852.
Ish-e-pish-e.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23,
1860. Ishipishi.— A. L. KroebM", inf 'n, 1904 (Karok
name). Isshe-pishe-rah.— Gibbs, MS. Misc., B. A.
E., 1852. Kepar.— Kroeber, infn, 1904 (Yurok
name).
Ishpani (* Spanish'). A Chickasaw
phratry and clan.
Ish-pan-ee.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 163, 1877. Ish-
pani.-^-Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 96, 1884.
fspani.-Ibid., 156.
Ishtakhechidiiba {Ida^qe tci dtx6a, 'four
white men's houses' ). One of the later
villages occupied by the Kansa in their
migration up Kansas r. — Dorsey, Kansa
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883.
Ishtowa. The extinct Arrow clans of
Sia and San Felipe pueblos, N. Mex.
Xsh'to-h£no.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix. 348,
1896 ( San Felipe form ; hdno = • people ' ) . l8ht6wa-
hano.— Ibid. (Sia form).
Ishtna Tone (Keresan: ishloaj * arrow').
A place above Santo Domineo, N. Mex.,
whence fled the Cochiti iimabitantfl of
Kuapa when pursued in prehistoric times
bjr tlie mythical Pinini (q. v.), or pyg-
mies, according to San Felipe tradition.
The place is so called on account of nu-
merous arrowpoints found there. — Bande-
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 166, 1892.
Isht-ua Ten-e. — Bandelier, op. cit.
Ishtunga ( * right side ' ) . The name ap-
plied to those divisions of the Kansa
that camped on the right side of the
tribal circle,
lotfinga.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 230, 1897.
Ishwidip. A Karok village on Klamath
r., Cal., mhabited in 1860.
B-swhedip.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23, 1860.
Ishwidip.— A. L. Kroeber, infn, 1905.
Isi (a red and white flower). A clan
of San Felipe pueblo, N. Mex., of which
there was but a single survivor in 1895.
I'si-hano.- Hodge in Am. Anthrop., i.x, 350, 1896
(hdno = 'people').
iBisokasixniks ( /-8/s^-o-A««-rm-//r«, *hair
shirts' ). A division of the Kainah.
Hair Shirts.— Grinnell. Blackfoot Lodge Tales,
209, 1892. I-sis'-o-kas-imnks.- Ibid. The Robes
wiui Hair on the outside.— Culbert8on in Smithson.
Rep. 1850, 144, 1851.
Isitnohi. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Iskulani ( * small ' [people] ) . A Choc-
taw clan of the Watakihulata phratry. —
Morgan, Anc. Soc, 162, 1878.
Isle aux Tourtes (French: * turtle-dove
island'). A French Sulpitian mission
station, probably on Ottawa r. , Quebec,
begun for the Algonkin and Nipissins
about 1720, but shortly afterward removed
to Oka, q. v.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 333, 1855.
Isle of St John's. A village or resort of
a band of Micmac, probably in Nova
Scotia, in 1760.— Frye (1760) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., Ists., X, 115, 1809.
Isleta (Span: * islet ', so named from the
location of the old village on a delta or
island between the bed of a mountain
torrent and the Rio Grande. The native
name of the pueblo is Shiewhibak, * knife
laid on the ground to play w/ii6,' whib be-
ing a native foot race. The name was
perhaps suggested by the knife-like shai)e
of the lava nd^e on which the pueblo is
built. — Lummis ) . A Tigua pueblo on the
w. bank of the Rio Grande, about 12 m.
8. of Albuquerque, N. Mex. According
to Lummis it stands on the site it occu-
pied at the time of the Spanish discovery
m 1540, when it formed one of the vil-
lages of the province of Tiguex of Coro-
n£io' s chromclers. It was the seat of the
Franciscan mission of San Antonio de
Isleta from prior to 1629, and about 1675
BULL. 301
I8LETA
623
received accessions from the Tigua pue-
blos of Qiiarai, Tajique, and others, e. of
the Rio Grande, when those pueblos were
abandoned in consequence of Apache
depredations. In 1680 the population of
Isleta was about 2,000. As the Spanish
settlers along the lower Rio Grancie took
refuge in this pueblo when the uprising
occurred in the year named, and thus in-
I8LETA WOMAN. (VROMAN, PHOTO.)
terrupted communication between its in-
habitants and the seat of war at the
northern villages, they did not participate
in the massacre of the colonists and
missionaries in the vicinity. When Gov.
Otermin retreated from Santa F6, how-
ever, he found Isleta abandoned, the in-
habitants having joined the rebels. The
year following (1681) Otermin surprised
and captured the pueblo, and on his re-
turn from the N. took with him 519 cap-
tives, of whom 115 afterward escaped.
The remainder were settled on the n. e.
bank of the Rio Grande, a few miles be-
low El Pa»«o, Tex., the name Isleta del
Sur ( * Isleta of the South * ) being applied
to their pueblo. The date of the refound-
ing of the northern Isleta is somewhat
in doubt. According to Bancroft the
present nueblo was bmlt in 1709 by some
scattered families of Tigua gathered by
missionary Juan de la Pefla, while Bande-
lier asserts that the pueblo "remained
vacant and in ruins until 1718, when it
was repeopled with Tiguas who had re-
turned from the Moquis [Hopi], to whom
the majority of the tribe had fled during
VICENTE JIRON. FORMER GOVERNOR OF ISLETA
the 12 years of Pueblo * independence,' '*
1680-92. The name of the mission (San
Antonio de la Isleta) seems also to have
been transferred to the new pueblo in
the s., and on the reestablishment of the
northern Isleta, the latter became the mis-
sion of San Agustin. The Genizaros
pueblos of Belen and Tom^ were visitas
of this mission in 1788. It has l)een
learned by Lummis that a generation ago
about 150 Queres from Acoma and La-
guna were forced to leave their homes on
account of drought and to settle at Isleta,
where they still form a permanent part
of that village and are recognized by
representation in its civil and religious
government. Pop. 1,110. (Consult Ban-
delier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 233, et
seq., 1892.)
624
ISLETA DEL SUR ISTUDSHILAIKA
[b. a. e.
According to Lummis Tinf n, 1896) the
Isleta people have the following clans:
Kim (Mountain lion), Pashir (Water
pebble), Num (Earth), T'hur (Sun),
Shiu (Eagle), Tam (Antelope), Pirn
(Deer), Churehu (Mole),Shumuyu (Tur-
2uoise), Kurni (Goose), Tuim (Wolf),
ebathu (White corn), lefeu (Red com),
leshur (Blue corn), lechur (Yellow
corn ) , and Parrot. According to Gatschet
the tribe is divided into the Churan and
Shif unin fraternities or parties — the * Red
Eyes ' and the * Black Eyes ' — but these
may be merely phratral designations.
See Pueblos, Tigua. ( f. w. h. )
Alameda la Isleta.— Jeff erys, Am. Atlas, map 5,
1776. Gleta.— Calhoun |(1849) in Cal. Mess, and
Corresp., 211, 1850 (misprint). Haiiiohiii£—
Hodge, field notes, B.A. E., 1895 ('eastern river':
Laguna name). Hot. — D'Anville, map N. A.,
1752. lieU.— Segura in Ind. Aff. Rep., 172, 1890
i misprint). Islella.— Morse, Hist. Am., map, 1798
misprint). lalcta.— De I'lsle, carte Mexique et
nonde, 1703. I»letabuh.— Ward (1864) in Don-
aldson, Mogul Pueblo Inds., 81, 1893. Isletans.—
Lummis, N. Mex. David, 98, 1891. Isletenos.—
Lummis. Man Who Married the Moon, 133, 1894.
Iflletta. — Kitchin, map N. Am., 1787. Isoletta. —
Emory, Recon., 41, 1848. Jsleta.— Humboldt, At-
las Nouv.-Espagne, carte 1, 1811. Lleta.— Senex,
map, 1710 (misprint). San Agustin del Isleta.—
Alencaster (1805) quoted by Prince, N. Mex., 37,
1883. San Antonio de la Isleta.— Benavides, Me-
morial, 20, 1630. San Augustln de la Isleta.— Villa-
Sefior, Theatro Am., pt. 2, 418, 422, 1748. San
Augustln del Isleta.- Alencaster (1805) in Meline,
Two Thousand Miles, 212, 1867. Shee-ah-whib-
bahk.— Lummis in St Nicholas, xviii, 834, Sept.
1891 (native name). Shee-ah-whib-bak. -Ibid., 829.
Shee-e-huib-bac. — Lummis in Scribner's Mag., 478,
Apr. 1893. Shee-eh-whib-bak.- Lummis, Man Who
Married the Moon, 4, 1894. Shiewhibak.— Hodge,
field notes, B. A. E., 1895. Shye-ui-beg.— Century
Cyclop, of Names, art. "Isleta," 1894. Siwhipa. —
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Acoma form).
Tayude.— Gatschet, Isleta MS. vocab., 1882 (' one of
the people': proper name of an Isleta Indian; pi.
TAy un or T&iun ) , Tohi-ha-hui-pah. — Jouvenceau
in Cath. Pion. , i, no. 9, 13, 1906. Tshi-a-uip-a.— Ban-
delier in Arch. Inst'. Papers, iv, 220, 1892. Tshya-
ui-pa.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 37, 1884.
Tii-ei.— Gatschet, Isleta MS. vocab., 1882 ('town':
given as their own name for the pueblo). Yo-
letta.— Columbus Memorial Vol., 156, 1893 (mis
print). Ysleta.— Rivera, Diario, leg. 756, 1736.
Yslete.— Buschmann, N. Mex., 277, 1858. Ystete.—
Lane (1854) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 689, 1855.
Isleta del Snr (Span.: * Isleta of the
south * ) . A Tigua pueblo on the n. e. bank
of the Rio Grande, a few miles below El
Paso, Tex. It was established in 1681 by
some 400 Indian captives from Isleta, N.
Mex., taken thence by Gov. Otermin on
his return from the attempted reconquest
of the Pueblos after their revolt in Aug.,
1680. It was the seat of a Franciscan
mission from 1682, containing a church
dedicated to San Antonio de Padua. The
mission name San Antonio applied to
Isleta del Sur belonged to the northern
Isleta until its abandonment in conse-
quence of the revolt, and when the latter
was resettled in 1709 or 1718, the minion
was named San Agustin de la Isleta. The
few inhabitants of Isleta del Sur are now
almost completely Mexicanized. See au-
thors cited below; also Fewkes in Am.
Anthrop., iv, no. 1, 1902. (f.w. h.)
Corpus Christi de Isleta.— Otermin (1682) quoted
by Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex. , 191, 1889. Ilesta.—
De risle. Atlas Nouveau, map, 59, 1733. Iselle.—
Vaugondy, map Am6r., 1778. Isla.— Escudero,
Noticias Nuevo-liI4x., 14, 1849. IsleU del Paso.—
Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 259, Apr. 1882.
Isleta-del-Paso.— ten Kate, Synonymic, 8, 1884.
Isleta del Sur.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
III , 86, 1890. Isleta of the South.— Davis, El Gringo,
115, 1857. Islctta.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 128, \m.
Islettas.— Calhoun (1849) in Cal. Mess, and Cor-
resp., 211, 1850. San Antonio de la IsleU.— Bell in
Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., l, 224, 1869. Ysleta.—
Rivera, Diario, leg. 684, 1736.
Islets de Jeremie. An Indian mission,
probably Montagnais, on the lower St
Lawrence, Quebec, in 1863. — Hind, Lab.
Penin.,ii, 179, 1863.
Islyamen. A village w. of the Tlaamen
and N. of Texada id., on the mainland of
British Columbia. — Brit. Col. map, Ind.
Aff., Victoria, 1872.
Ismiquilpas. A tribe or band of w.
Texas, allied with, the Jumano in 1699. —
Iberville (1702) in Margry, D^c, iv, 316,
1880.
Ismuraoanes. One of the tribes formerly
connected with San Carlos mission, near
Monterey, Cal. — Galiano, Relacion, 164,
1802.
Isognichic. A Tarahumare settlement
in Chihuahua, Mexico (Orozco y Berra,
Geog., 323, 1864); possibly the same as"
Sisoquichi, located on some maps near the
headwaters of Rio Conches, lat. 27° 48'.
Ispipewhumaugh. One of the tribes in-
cluded by the early fur traders under the
term Nez Percys (Ross, Fur Hunters, i,
185, 1855). They lived on Columbia r.,
above the mouth of Snake r., Wash.
They were possibljr of Shahaptian stock,
but are not otherwise identifiable.
Isquepah. A Sumass village on the n.
bank of Fraser r., Brit. Col. , opposite the
lake. — Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff., Vic-
toria, 1872.
Issi ( * deer * ) . A clan of the Koi phratry
of the Chickasaw. — Morgan, Anc. Soc.,
163, 1877.
Issni (Is^-mif * tails that .can be seen
from the front,' in allusion to a buffalo-
tail worn on the hip. — Wissler). A so-
ciety of the Ikunuhkahtsi, or All Com-
rades, among the Piegan Siksika. It is
composed of old men who dress like and
dance with and like the Emitaks, though"
forming a different society. — Grinneil,
Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 221, 1892.
Iitapoga (isti * people*, apdkvta *to re-
side'). An Upper Creek settlement, not
recorded in the earlier documents; but
probably in the neighborhood of the
present Eastaboga, Talladega co., Ala. —
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 133, 1884.
Istsikainah ( Is-tsV-kai-nah, * w o o d s
Bloods * ) . A division of the Kainah.
Is-tsi'-kai-nah.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales,
209,1892. Woods Bloods.— Ibid.
IstncLshilaika (Fstitdshi-laVka, 'where
a young thing was found.'— Hawkins).
One of the 4 Hillabi villages formerly on
BULL. 30]
I8UTKWA ITICHA
625
the left side of Hillabi cr., 4 m. below
Hillabi, Ala.
E-ohoM-is-U-gau.— Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 43,
1848. iitadihi-laika.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg. ,
1, 183, 1884.
Isntkwa {IsHthwa), An ancient Nu-
wukmiut village on the site of the U. S.
Signal station at Pt Barrow, Alaska. —
Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., pi. ii, 1892.
Ita. A tribe of Eskimo between lat.
76° and 78° 18', w. Greenland. Their
principal village ( Etah), from which they
take their name, is at Foulke fjord; their
chief hunting grounds are Whale and
Wolstenholme sds. When first visited
by Ross in 1818 they possessed neither
canoes nor arrows. The art of building
kaiaks, lon^ forgotten, was introduced
after 1873 oy immigrants from BaflBn
land, who came by way of Ellesmere land.
They hunt seal, their principal food, on
the noes of the bays and walrus at the
floe edges, and in summer they kill cari-
bou in the mountains. They live in
almost complete isolation, without salt,
with scarcely any substance of vegetal
origin, in the northernmostclimate inhab-
ited by human beings, having no food
besides meat, blood, and blubber; no
clothing except the skins of birds and
animals. Pop. in 1854, according to Kane,
140; in 1884, according to Nourse, 80;
Peary enumerated 253 in 1895, reduced
by disease to 234 in 1897. Their villages
and camping places at various times are:
Akpan, Anoatok, Etah, Igludahoming,
Igluduasuin, Ikalu, Imnangana, Iteriesoa,
Itibling, Kana, Kangerdluksoa, Kangidli,
Karmenak, Karsuit, Kiatang, Kingatok,
Koinsun, Kukan, Navialik, Netlek, Nu-
tun, Pikirlu, Pituarvik, Sarfalik, Udluh-
sen, Umana, and Uwarosuk. See Kroe-
ber, cited below.
Aretie Highlanders.— Ross, Voy. of Discov., 183,
1819. Btah.— Hayes, Arct. Boat. Jour., 197. 1860.
Ita-BskimM.— Boas in Trans. Anthrop. Soc. Wash.,
Ill, 102, 1885. Xt&'mi.— Stein in Petcrmanns Mitt.,
198, 1902. Itaner.— Bessells, Amer. Nordpol.
Exi>ed., 851, 1879. Itanese.— Bessells in Am. Nat.,
XVIII, 863, 1884. Smith Sound Eskimo.— Kroeber
in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xii, 266, 1899.
Itaanyadi {Ita a"yadiy 'deer people').
A Biloxi clan. — Dorsey in 15th Rep. B.
A. K, 243, 1897.
Itaes. — A former Chumashan rancheria
connected with Dolores mission, San
B^rancisco, Cal. — ^Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Oct. 18, 1861.
Itafi. A district of Florida where one
of theTimuquanan dialects was spoken. —
Pku^eja (ca. 1614), Arte Leng. Timuq., xxi,
1886.
Itahasiwaki (*old log*). A former
Lower Creek town on lower Chattahoo-
chee r., 3 m. above Ft Gaines, Ga., with
100 inhabitants in 1820.
Bto-husse-wakket.— Morse, Rep. to See. War, 364,
1822.
Itamalgi. A Creek clan.
Itamalgi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155, 1884.
Tlunalgi. —Ibid. Ta-mul'-kee.— Morgan, Anc. Soc. ,
1M71877.
Bull. 30—05 40
Itaxnameou. A Montagnais mission in
1854, E. of NatashqQan, on the n. bank of
the St Lawrence, Quebec province.
Itamameou.— Arnaud (1854) in Hind, Lab. Penin.,
II, 178, 1863. Itamamiou.— Hind, ibid., 180.
Itara. A former village in n. Florida,
visited bv De Soto^s troops in 1539.
Ytara.— Gentl. of Elvas (1567) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., II, 130, 18ft0.
Itaywiy. A former Luiseiio village
in the neighborhood of San Luis Rey
mission, s. Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
May 11, 1860.
Itazipcho (* without bows'). A band
of the Sans Arcs Sioux, the same as Min-
ishala, though the two were originally
distinct.
Itazipio-fiia,— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B.A.E., 219,
1897. Itaziptoo-qtoa.— Ibid. Me-ne-shame.— Lewis
and Clark, Diseov., 34, 1806 (given as a Brulfi
division). Mini-oala.— Dorsey, op. cit. Kini-
•ala.— Ibid. Min-i-sha'.— Hayden, Ethnog. and
Philol. Mo. Val., 375. 1862. Red water band.— Cul-
bertson in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 142, 1851.
Itchadak. A former Aleut village on
one of the e. Aleutian ids., Alaska. —
Coxe, Russ. Diseov., 165, 1787.
Itckhasualgi (itchhasua ^ beaver ^ algi
* people'). A Creek clan. — Gatschet,
Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155, 1884.
Itchualgi {itrhu *deer', algi * people').
A Creek clan.
E'-oho.— Morgan, Anc. Soc, 161, 1877. Itchualgi.—
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155, 1884.
Iteghu ( * burnt faces ' ) . A band of the
Hunkpatina or Lower Yanktonai Sioux.
Ite ^.—Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 218, 1897.
Ite-xu. — Ibid.
Iteriesoa (Iterl^hsoa^ *bay'). An Ita
Eskimo settlement on Granville bay, lat.
76° 50^ N. Greenland.— Stein in Peter-
manns Mitt., no. 9, map, 1902.
Iteshicha (*bad face*). A band of the
Oglala Sioux.
Bad Faces.— Brackctt in Smithson. Rep. 1876, 467,
1877. E-taoh-e-oha.— Ibid. Ite-citca.— Dorsey in
15th Rep. B. A. E., 220, 1897. Ite-si6a.— Ibid.
Oglala-qtoa.— Ibid, ('real Oglala').
Iteshichaetanhan ( ' from bad face ' ) . A
band of the Oglala Sioux.
Ite-oitoa-eta"han. - Dorsev (after Cleveland ) in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 220, 1897. Ite-si6a-eUf)hai).— Ibid.
Ithkyemamits. A tribe or band of
doubtful linguistic affinity, either Chi-
nookan or Shahaptian, living in 1812 on
Columbia r. in Klickitat co.. Wash., nearly
opposite The Dalles. Their number was
estimated at 600.
ntte-Kai-Mamits. — Stuart in Nouv. Ann. Voy., xii,
26, 1821. IthkyemamiU.— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War,
368, 1822.
Itibleng (* portage'). An Ita Eskimo
village at the entrance of Inglefield gulf,
N. w. Greenland.
I'tibleng.— stein in Petermanns Mitt., 198, 1902.
Ittibloo.— Peary in Geog. Jour., ii, 224, 1898. Itti-
blu.— Peary, My Arct. Jour., 80, 1893. Ittiblu-
Ketlik.— Sharp, Arct. Highlanders, ii, 244, .
Iticha. A Yokuts ( Mariposan ) tribe on
Kings r., Cal., below the Choinimni and
above the Wichikik.
Aiticha.— A. L. Kroeber, infn, 1906 (correct form).
I-tabh-ee.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A.E., 782, 1899.
Itachea.— Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d
Cong. , Ist sess. , 22, 1852. I-te-ohe.— Wessells (1853)
in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34tli Cong., 8d seas., 31, 1857.
626
ITIJABELLING IVIKAT
[B. A. B.
I-teohee«.— McKeeetal. (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4.
82d Cong., spec, sess., 75, 1853. It-i'-oha.— Powers
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 870, 1877. I-to-ohei.—
Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc.4,32d Cong., spec,
sess., 252, 1852. ItuohM.— Lewis in Ind. Aff. Rep.,
899, 1858 (a band of the Wattokes high up on
Kings r.).
Ityarelling. A summer settlement of
Padlimiut Eskimo on Exeter sd., Baffin
land. — Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map,
1888.
Itivimiiit (* people of the farther side,'
so called by the Eskimo of Labrador
proper). A tribe of Labrador Eskimo
mhabiting the e. coast of Hudson bay,
from lat. 53° t^) 58° ; pop. estimated at 5(X).
These people hunt in the interior half-
way across the peninsula, continually
scouring the coast for seal and the plains
and hills for caribou to obtain necessary
food and clothing.
Itivimiut. —Turner in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., ii, 99,
1888. Thiviment— Boas in Am. Antiq., 40, 1888
(misprint).
lUvliarsnk. An Eskimo village in w,
Greenland, lat. 73° 30^. — Science, xi, map,
259, 1888.
Itiwa Ateana ( ' those of the midmost
air). A Zuili phratry embracing the
Pichi or Mula (Parrot or Macaw), Taa
(Seed or Corn), and Yatokya (Sun)
clans. — Gushing, inf n, 1891.
Itliok. A Squawraish village commu-
nity on the left bank of Squawmisht r.,
Brit. Gol.
Itii'dq.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900.
"Ktte'q.— Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887.
Itokakhtiiia ('dwellers at the south').
A band of the Sisseton Sioux; an off-
shoot of the Basdecheshni.
Itokafi-tina.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217,
1897. Itokaq-tina.— Ibid.
Itomapa. Mentioned by Martin (Hist.
La., I, 252, 1820) as a tribe, on the w. side
of the lower Mississippi, which sent a
deputation to the village of the Acolapissa
in 1717 to meet Bienville. Gf. Ihitoupa.
Itrahani. The Gottonwood clan of Co-
chiti pueblo, N. Mex.
HiiU Eanyi.— Bandelier, Delight Makers, 256,
1890 (same?). I'trahani hanuoh.— Hod^e in Am.
Anthrop., ix, 350, 1896 (Aanuc/i=' people').
Itsaatiaga ( It-sa^ -a-ti-a-ga ) . A Paviotso
band formerly living about Unionville,
w. Nev.— Powell, Paviotso MS., B. A. E.,
1881.
Itscheabine. A division of the Assini-
boin, numbering 850, including 250 war-
riors, in 100 tipis, when seen by Lewis
and Clark in 1804, at which time they
roved on the headwaters of Mouse (Sou-
ris), Qu'Appelle, and Assiniboine rs., in
the United States and Ganada. In 1808,
according to Henry (Goues, New Light,
II, 522, 1897), they were at enmity with
the Dakota, Shoshoni, and with some of
the Arikara and other tribes, but were
friendly with the Gree. They lived by
hunting, conducting trade with the Hud-
son's Bay, Northwest, and X. Y. fur
companies, whose posts were 150 m. n. of
Ft Mandan. They are said to have paid
little attention to their engagements and
were great drunkards. In 1853 they
numbered 10 lodges under chief Les
Yeux Oris. (p. w. h.)
Gens de Feuilles.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., i, 217.
1893. Gens de la Feuille. -Badin (1830) in Ann. de
la Prop, de la Foi, iv,536, 1843 (same?). Gens det
fees or Girls.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi,
104. 1905 (given as traders' nickname). Gcois
des filles.— Maximilian, Trav., 194, 1843. Gens det
Tee.— Grig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, op. eit. Girls*
band.— Hayden quoted by Dorsey in 15th Rep.
B. A. E., 222, 1897. Itooheabin^.— Maximilian, op.
eit. Little Girl Assiniboines.— Coues, Henry and
Thompson Jour. (1808), ii, 522, 1897. Na-co'-tah
O-see-gah.— OriK. Jour. Lewis and Clark, op. eit.
Osgeegah. -Ibid. We-che-ap-pe-nah. — D e n ig
(1853)quoted by Dorsey, op. eit. Wi-io'-ap-i-naE.—
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 387, 1862.
Witci»ya»pina.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 223,
Itseyi (ItsSyt, *new green place,* or
* place of f resn green * ; often falsely ren-
dered *Bras§town,' from the confusion of
ItsSyl and UfUsaiiflf, the latter term sig-
nifying * brass*). The name of several
former Cherokee settlements. One was
on Brasstown cr. of Tugaloo r., in Oconee
CO., S. C. ; another was on Little Tennessee
r., near the present Franklin, Macon co.,
N. C, and probably about the junction of
Cartoogaja cr.; a third, known to the
whites as Brasstown, was on upper Brass-
town cr. of Hiwassee r., Towns co., Ga. —
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 523, 1900.
Eohay. — Mouzon map quoted by Royee in 5th Rep.
B. A. E., 143, 1887. Echia.— Mooney, op. eft.
Eohoe.— Bartram, Travels, 371, 1792. Eohoee.—
Doc. of 1765 quoted by Royce, op. eit. Etchoe.—
Scaife, Hist. Catawba, 7, 1896. Etchowee.—
Mooney, op. eit.
Ittatso. The principal village of the
Ucluelet (q v.) on IJcluelet arm of Bar-
clay sd., w. coast of Vancouver id. — Can.
Ind. Aff., 263, 1902.
Itnc. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Barbara, Gal.— Taylor in CS.
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863.
Itnkemiik. A former Luiseflo village
in the neighborhood of San Luis Rey
mission, s. Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
May 11, 1860.
Ivan. A Kaiyuhkhotana village on
the divide between Unalaklik and Yukon
rs., Alaska. Allen (Rep. Alaska, 131,
1877) gave the population as 69.
Ivan's barr£bora.— ball, Alaska, 531, 1870.
Ivigtite. A variety of paragonite. Ac-
cording to Dana (Text-book of Mineral.,
354, 1888) it occurs in yellow scales, also
granular, with cryolite from Greenland.
It was named from Ivigtuk, Greenland,
where it was discovert, a place-name
derived from the Eskimo language. The
'ite is an English suffix. (a. f. c.)
Ivigtnt. A settlement of Europeans
and Eskimo in s. w. Greenland, lat. 61®
15'.— Nansen, First Crossing, ii, 182, 1890.
Ivikat. A missionary station 16 m. N.
of Julianehaab, s. Greenland. — Kol-
dewey, German Arct. Exped., 203, 1874.
BULL. 30]
IVIMIUT JACONA
627
lyimint. An Eskimo settlement near
Lindenov fjord, e. Greenland, with 12
inhabitants in 1829. — Graah, Exped., 114,
1837.
lyitachuco. A former principal town
of the Apalachee, possibly near the pres-
ent Wacahotee, Fla.
Attaohooka.— Archdale (1707) in Carroll, Hist.
Coll. 8. C, II, 362, 1836. Ibitachka.— Ibid., 675.
Ivitachma.— Bancroft, Hist. XI. S., ii. 194, 18H4.
Ivitaohua.— Jefferys, Fr. Dom. Am., West Indies
map, 1761. Ivi-ta-chuco. — Biedma (1544) in
French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 99, 1850. Ivitanoa.—
Jefferys, Fr. Dom. Am., 136. map, 1761. Vita-
ehuoo.— Gentl. of Elvas (1567) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., II, 134, 1860. Yvitachua. — Bartram,
Trav., I, map, 1799.
Ivory. See Bonework.
Ivy Log. A Cherokee settlement, al)out
the period of the removal of the tribe to
Indian Ter. in 1839, on Ivy Log cr.,
Union co., n. Ga. (j. m.)
Iwai. A former Yaquina village on the
N. side of Yaquina r., Greg.
I-wai'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 229,
1890.
Iwaynsota ('uses up by begging for';
'uses up with the mouth'). A band of
the Oglala Sioux. — Dorsey (after Cleve-
land) in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 220, 1897.
Iwi. The Eagle gens of the Kadoha-
dacho. — ^Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
1093, 1896.
Ixtaoan. A pueblo of the Cora and the
seat of a mission; situated on the s. bank
of the Rio San Pedro, about lat. 22*^,
Tepic, Mexico.
Siakatan.— Hrdlicka, infn, 1906. 8. Pedro de
Iztaoan.— Oroz(;o y Berra, Geog., 280, 1864.
lyaaye (lya-dye, *sunfiower'). An
Apache clan or oand at San Carlos
agency and Ft Apache in 1881. — Bourke
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 111, 1890.
See Yachin.
lyakosa (*wart on a horse's leg'). A
band of the Brul6 Teton Sioux.
A-i-ko-sa.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val., 876, 1862. Big Ankle band.— Ibid. Big-legged
horaei.— Culbertfion in Smithson. Ren. 1860, 141,
1851. lya^osa.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,218,
1897. lyak'oaa.— Ibid.
lyama Atouna (* those of the upi)er-
most'). A phratry embracing the
Kyakyali (Eagle) and Ana (Tobacco)
clans of the Zufli. — Cushing, infn, 1891.
lyis. A Karok village on Klamath r.,
Cal., inhabited in 1860.
I-yiaa.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar. 23, 1860.
Isa. A settlement of which Coronado
was informed by the Indian known as
The Turk, w^hile on the Rio Grande in
New Mexico in 154CM1, as a place, 6
or 7 days* ioumejr distant, at which the
army could obtain provisions on its way
to **Co*pala" and Quivira. It was possi-
bly imaginary; if not, it may have been
a settlement of the Eyish, a Caddoan
tribe of Texas. See Mota-Padilla ( 1742),
Nueva Galicia, 164, 1870. (f. w. h.)
Istacani. A name adopted by Rati-
nesque (introd. to Marshall, Ky., i, 26,
1824) for an imaginary prehistoric race of
the United States.
Jack. See Kintpnash.
Jackash. A name of the American
mink {Putorius inson) in use in the fur
country ( Coues, X. Am. Must., 172, 1877).
From atchdkns, the name of this animal
in the Cree dialect of Algonquian. This
word I^conibe (Diet., 316, 1874) explains
as a diminutive of wittakayy signifying
'genitals,' in reference to the glands of the
creature. (a. f. c. )
Jack Indians. An unidentified tribe
mentioned by Dobbs (Hudson Bay, 13,
1744), who states that in 1731 they came
to trade at the mouth of Albany r.,
N. W. Ter., Canada. Named as distinct
from Moose River Indians (Monsoni),
Sturgeon Indians (Nameuilini), and
French In<lians.
Jackqnyome {Jack-quy-ome) . A body of
Salish of Kamloops agency, Brit. Col.;
pop. 257 in 1884, when their name ap-
pears for the last time. — Can. Ind. An.
for 1884, 188.
Jacobs Cabins. A settlement on You^h-
ioghenv r. in 1753 (Gist in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 3d s., V. 102, 1836). It may
have been near Jacobs cr., Fayette co.,
Pa., and was perhaps named from Cap-
tain Jacobs. (j. M. )
Jacobs, Captain. A Delaware chief who
participated in the ambush of Gen. Brad-
dock's army, and a leader in conjunction
with Shingis in the raids and massacres
on the frontiers of the settlements of
Pennsylvania that followed the British
diijaster. A i)rice was set on both their
heads. They had a rendezvous at Kit-
tanning, Pa., whither they took their
spoils and captives. Col. John Armstrong
marched against this place and assailed
it at daybreak on Sept. 8, 1756. The
Pennsylvanians surrounded the village
and the Indians defended themselves
bravely but hopelessly from their burn-
ing wigwams. Jacobs was killed with all
his family.— Drake, Bk. Inds., 534, 1880.
Jacona (Span, form of Tewa SAkona),
A former small Tewa pueblo situated
with Cuyaniunque a short distance w. of
Nambe, on the s. side of Pojoaque r.,
Santa Y6 co., N. Mex. At the time of the
Pueblo rebellion of 1680 it was a visita
of Nambe mission. It was abandoned in
1696, its inhabitants settling among the
other Tewa pueblos, and in 1702 the grant
of land that had been made to it by
Spain became the property of Ignacio de
Roybal. See Bandelier in Arch. Inst.
Papers, iv, 85, 1892. (f. w. h. )
laoona.— Busehmann, Neu-Mex., 230, 1858. Jaoo-
ma.— Davis. El Gringo, 88, 1857. Jaoona.— Vetan-
eurt (1693) Teatro Mex., ni. 817, 1871. Saoona.—
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, nr, 85, 1892 (Ja-
cona, or). Sa'kona.— Hodge, field notes. B. A.
E., 1885 (Tewa pronunciation). 8. Domingo de
Xaoomo.— Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. 8.
Domingo de Xaooms. — Wnlch, Charte America,
1805. S. Domingo de Xacona.— I)' An ville, map Am.
Sept., 1746. Xaoona.— De I 'Isle, carte Mexiqae et
Floride. 1703. Xaoono.— De I'lsle, Atlas Nouveau,
map 60, 1733.
628
JACUENCACAHEL JATONABINE
[b. a.
Jacnencaoahel. A former rancheria un-
der the mission of San Francisco Xavier
de Biaundo, in Lower California. — Writer
of 1728 in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., v, 187,
1857.
Jade. See Nephrite.
Jagavans. The name of a small tribe
formerly on the Texas coast; mentioned
by Harris (Coll. Vov., i, 802, 1705) as
one of those visited about 1530 by Cabeza
de Vaca, as not far from the Chorruco,
and as neighbors of the Mariames. Pos-
sibly the Yguases of Cabeza de Vaca*s
Relation (Smith trans., 92, 1871).
Jagaya. A former village in a well-
watered country 50 leagues from Santa
Helena and 20 leagues from the sea, in
N. w. South Carol ma; visited by Juan
Pardo in 1565.— Vandera (1567) in Smith,
Colec. Doc. Fla., i, 16, 1857.
Jakobflhavn. A Danish missionary sta-
tion and trading post on Disko bay, w.
Greenland, established in 1741. Pop. 300
in 1867.
Jaoobs-haven.— Crantz, Hist, of Greenland, I, 15,
1767.
Jamac. A former rancheria, probably
of the Sobaipuri of s. Arizona, and a vi-
sita of the mission of Guevavi in 1732. —
Alegre quoted by Bancroft, No. Mex.
States, I, 524, 1884.
Jamaica. A former pueblo of theOpata
in N. E. Sonora, Mexico, under the juris-
diction of the municipality of Cumpus,
in the district of Moctezuma (Orozco y
Berra, Geoj?., 343, 1864). It contained 9
civilized inhabitants in 1900.
Jameco. The supposed name of * ' a small
tribe or family of Indians subject to some
other," thought to have dwelt formerly
on Long Island, N. Y., near Jamaica,
which derives its name from the band.
Jameco. — Thompson, Long Id., 382, 1839. Jemaco. —
Flint, Early Long Id., 198, 1896.
Janemo. See Ninigret.
JanoB. An extinct tribe which, with
the Jocomes, inhabited the region of Chi-
huahua, Mexico, between Casas Grandes,
Chihuahua, and Fronteras. Bandelier
(Nation, July 2, 1885) classes them as
the most southerly band of the Apache,
called after presidio Janos in n. w.
Chihuahua. He believes that the tribe
slowly arose after 1684 and was composed
of Lipan, Mescal ero, and other Apache
stragglers, together with renegade Suma,
Tobcio, Taranumare, and Opata Indians,
and Spanish captives. Missions were
established among them at an early date
at Janos and Carretas, but were aban-
doned on account of the incursions of the
Apache proper, with whom the Janos
were subsequently merged. Frequent
mention is made of the Janos by Jesuit
missionaries during the first half of the
18th century, but of their language and
customs almost nothing is known.
H&nes.— Linschoten, Descr. ae TAm., map 1, 1638.
Han<Mi.~Beaaylde8, Memorial, 7, 1630. iamw.—
Dure, Peiialosa, 63, 1882. JanerM.~Bandelier in
N. Y. Nation, July 2, 1885. Janoi.— Kino (1690)
in Doc. Hist, Mex., 4th s., i, 230, 1856, Yanos.—
Miihlenpfordt, Mejico, ii, 521, 1844.
- JantamaiB. Mentioned by Domenech
(Deserts of N. Am., i, 441, 1860) in a list
of tribes without further notice. Possibly
the Yanktonai; otherwise unknown.
JapazawB. A Powhatan Indian, chief
of Potomac and a friend of the English.
In 1611 he inveigled Pocahontas on board
an English ship to be detained as a hos-
tage for the good behavior of Powhatan,
her father.— Drake, Bk. Inds., 357, 1880.
Jappayon. A former village connected
with San Carlos mission, Cal., and said
to have been Esselen. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860.
Japul. Given b>[ the Yavapai to Fray
Francisco Garces in 1776 (Diary, 405,
1900) as the name, seemingly, of a Yuman
tribe; locality not recorded, but possibly
in the vicinity of the Rio Colorado.
Japiel. — Orozco y Berra, Geog., 349, 1864 (misprint-
ingGare^s)^ Japui.— Garcds,op.cit.,444. Tapiel.—
Cortez (1799) in Whipple, Pac. R, R. Rep., ni, pt. 3,
126, 1856 (misprint).
JarB. See Dishes^ Pottery, Receptacles.
Jasniga. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with San Juan
Bautista mission, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Nov. 25, 1860.
JaBper. An impure, opaque form of
chalcedony displaying various shades of
color, the yellow, red, and brown hues
predominating. VVhen grayish or green-
ish and mottled with red the name blood-
stone is sometimes applied. It was much
used by the native tribes for flaked im-
plements of several varieties, and more
rarely for hammers, celts, axes, and orna-
ments. It occurs in irregular masses, or
pockets, in connection with other forma-
tions in many sections of the United
States, and was often obtained by the
Indians in the form of fugitive jiebbles
and bowlders; but in Pennsylvania, and
perhaps in other states, it was quarried
from the original beds. The best known
quarries are in Bucks, Lehigh, and Berks
COS., E. Pa. Jasper was extensively worked
by the ancient inhabitants of Converse
and neighboring counties of Wvoming,
who found this material as well as the
translucent varieties of chalcedony in con-
nection with the quartzite of the r^on.
See Chalcedony,
Consult Dorsey in Field Columb. Mus.
Pub., Anthrop. ser., ii, no. 4, 1900;
Holmes in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897; Mer-
cer in Am. Anthrop., vii, 80, 1894.
(w. H. H.)
Jatonabine ( * people of the rocks* ) . An
Assiniboin band living in 1808 in n. w.
Manitoba, and having 40 tipis.
E-an-to-ah.— Denig quoted by Dorsey in 15th Rep.
B. A. E., 222, 1897 ( ' Stone Indians*: '• the original
appellation for the whole nation"). Easoab.^
Franklin, Narr., 104, 1823. Gent de Koohe.— Ibid.,
306. Oens des Koohes.— Hayden, Ethnog. and
Philol. Mo. Val. , 387, 1862. Gena dea roaches.— Ind.
BULL. 30]
JAUMALTURGO JEMEZ
629
Aff. Rep., 289, 1854. I'-ag-to'-an.— Hayden, Eth-
nog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 387, 1862. le-aka-pi.—
Am. Natur., 829, 1882. I-ya^tonwa".— Doreey in
16th Rep. B. A. E., 223, 1897 ( = 'stone village').
Jatonabiai.— Maximilian,Trav..l94,1843. Ro<^.—
Larpenteur (1829), Narr., i, 109, 1898. Stone In-
dians.—Maximilian, Trav., 194, 843 (so called bv
the English).
Jaumalturgo. A rancheria of the Pima
or the Sobaipuri in 1697, s. of the ruin of
Casa Grande, in the present Arizona.
San Oregorit Jaumalturgo. — Mange quoted by
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 801, 1853 (Gregoris =
Qregorio).
Jeaffa. A village at the s. extremity of
Florida, about 1570.
Gaga.— Fontaneda {ca. 1675) in Teraaux-Compans,
Voy., XX, 32, 1841. Fcaga.— Shlpp, Hist. Fla., 687,
1881. Jaega.— Fontaneda, Narr., Smith trans., 21,
1854. Teaga.— Fontaneda in Tenjanx-Compans,
op. cit., 23. Teago.— Ibid., 32.
Jeboaltae. A former village, presum-
ably Costanoan, near San Juan Bautista
mission, Cal.
Jeboaltae.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Nov. 28, 1860.
Teboaltao.— Engelhard t, Franciscans in Cal., 398,
1897.
Jedakne. A village, Iroquois or Dela-
ware, that existed in the 18th century on
the w. branch of Susquehanna r., prob-
ably on the site of Dewart, Northumber-
land co.. Pa. (j. N. B. H. )
Jedaene.— Lattrd, map, 1784. Jedakne.— Homann
Heirs' map, 1756.
Jedandago. A former Seneca hamlet,
E. of Irondequoit bay, L. Ontario, N. Y. —
Doc. of 1687 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
Ill, 434, 1853.
,^^iemez (from IW-mishy or Hae^-misfty
the Keresan name of the pueblo. — Bande-
lier). A village on the N. bankof Jemezr.,
about 20 m. n. w. of Bernalillo, N. Mex.
According to tradition the Jemez had
their origin in the n., at a lagoon called
Uabunatota (apparently identical with
the Shipapulima and Cibobe of other
Pueblo tribes), whence they slowly drift-
ed into the valleys of the upper tribu-
taries of the Rio Jemez — the Guadalupe
and San Diego — where they resided in a
number of villages, and finally into the
sandy valley of the Jemez proper, which
they now occupy, their habitat being
bounded on the s. by the range of the
w. division of the Rio Grande Keresan
tribes — the Sia and Santa Ana. Casta-
fieda, the chronicler of Coronado's expe-
dition of 1541, speaks of 7 pueblos of the
Jemez tribe in addition to 3 others in
the province of Aguas Calientes, identified
by Simpson with the Jemez Hot Springs
region. Espejo in 1583 also mentions that
7 village were occupied by the Jemez,
while in 1598 Ofiate neard of 11 but saw
only 8. In the opinion of Bandelier it is
Erobable that 10 pueblos were inhabited
y the tribe in the early part of the 16th
century.
Following is a list of the pueblos for-
merly occupied by the Jemez people so
far as known. The names include those
given by Ofiate, which may be identical
with some of the others: Amushungkwa,
Anyukwinu, Astialakwa, Bulitzequa,
Catroo, Ceca, Guatitruti, Guayoguia,
Gyusiwa, Hanakwa, Kiashita, Kiatsukwa,
Mecastria, Nokyuntseleta, Nonyishagi,
Ostyalakwa, Patoqua, Pebulikwa, Pek-
wiligii, Potre, Seshiuqua, Setoqua, To-
wakwa, Trea, Tyajuindena, Tyasoliwa,
Uahatzaa, Wabakwa, Yjar, Zolatungze-
zhii.
Doubtless the reason for the division of
the tribe into so many lesser village com-
munities instead of aggregating in a single
pueblo for defense against the persistent
aggressiveness of the Navaho, according
to Bandelier, was the fact that cultivable
areas in the sandy valley of the Jemez
and its lower tributaries are small and
at somewhat considerable distances from
one another; but another and perhaps
even more significant reason was that the
Navaho were apparently not troublesome
to the Pueblos at the time of the Spanish
conquest. On the establishment of Span-
ish missions in this section and the intro-
duction of improved methods of utilizing
the water for irrigation, however, the
JEMEZ MAN AND WIFE, (vroman, PHOTO. )
Jemez were induced to abandon their
pueblos one by one, until about the year
1622 they became consolidated into the
two settlements of Gyusiwa and probably
Astialakwa, mainly through the efforts of
Fray Martin de Arvide. These pueblos
are supposed to have been the seats of
the missions of San Diego and San Joseph,
respectively, and both contained chapels
probably from 161 8. Astialakwa was per-
manently abandoned prior to the Pueblo
revolt of 1680, but in the meantime an-
other pueblo (probably Patoqua) seems
to have been established, which became
the mission of San Juan de los Jemez.
About the middle of the 17th century the
Jemez conspired with the Navaho against
the Spaniards, but the outbreak plotted
was repressed by the hanging of 29 of the
Jemez. A few years later the Jemez were
again confederated with the Navaho and
some Tigua against the Spaniards, but the
contemplated rebellion was again quelled,
630
«r£M£Z
[b. A.a.
the Navaho soon resuming their hostil-
ity toward the village dwellers. In the
revolt of the Pueblos in Aug., 1680, the
Jemez took a prominent part. They mur-
dered the missionary at Gyusiwa (San
Diego de Jemez), but the missionary at
San Juan de los Jemez, with the alcalde
mayor and three soldiers, succeeded in
escaping. In 1681, when Gov. Otermin
attempted to regain possession of New
Mexico, the Jemez retreated to the mesas,
but returned to their village on the evac-
uation of the region by the Spaniards.
Here they probably remained until 1688,
when Ouzate appeared, causing them to
flee a^ain to the neights. When Vargas
came m 1692 the Jemez were found on the
mesa in a large pueblo, but they were in-
duced to descena and to promise the Span-
iards their support. The Jemez, how-
ever, failed to keep their word, but waged
war during 1693 and 1694 against their
Keresan neighbors on account of their
fidelity to the Spaniards. Vargas returned
to the Jemez in 1693, when they reiterated
their false promises. In July, 1694, he
again went to Jemez with 120 Spaniards
and some allies from Santa Ana and Sia.
The mesa was stormed, and after a des-
perate engagement, in which 84 natives
were killed, the pueblo was captured.
In the month following, Vargas (after
diestroying this village, another on a
mesa some distance below, and one built
by their Santo Domingo allies 3 leajgues
N. ) returned to Santa ft with 361 prison-
ers and a large quantity of stores. From
this time the only then existing pueblo
of the Jemez reoccupied was San Diego,
or Gyusiwa, which was inhabited until
1696, when the second revolt occurred,
the Indians killing their missionary and
again fleeing to the mesas, where they
constructed temporary shelters. Here
they were joined by some Navaho, Zufii,
and Acoma allies, and made hostile dem-
onotrations toward the Sia, Santa Ana,
and San Felipe people, but in June of the
yekr mentioned they were repulsed by a
small detachment of Spaniards from Ber-
nalillo and Sia with a loss of 30 men, 8 of
whom were Acoma. The defeated Jemez
this time fled to the Navaho country,
where they remained several years, finally
returning to their former home and con-
structing the present village, called by
them Walatoa, ** Village of the Bear."
In 1728, 108 of the inhabitants died of pes-
tilence. In 1782 Jemez was made a visita
of the mission of Sia.
The Jemez clans are: Waha (Cloud),
Seh ( Eagle) , Son ( Badger), Daahl ( F^rth),
Kyiahl (Crow), Pe(Sun), Kyunu (Com),
Sungki (Turquoise), Weha (Calabash),
Yang (Coyote), Kio (Pine).
The population of the tribe in 1890 was
428; in 1904, 498, including a score of
descendants of the remnant of the Pecos
(q. v.), who left their old home on th©
upper Rio Pecos in 1838 to join their kin-
dred.
Consult Bancroft, Arizona and N. Mex.,
1889; Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
IV, 200-217, 1892; Hewett in Bull. 32,
B. A. E., 1906; Holmes in Am. An-
throp., VII, no. 2, 1905. See also PecoSj
Pueblos f Tanoan. (f. w. h.)
Amayes.— Duro, Don Diego de Pefialosa, 128, 1882.
Ameges.— Siguenza quoted by Buschmann, Neu-
Mex., 228, 264. 1868. Ameias. Espejo (1588)
quoted by Mendoza (1586) in Hakluyt Soc. Pub.,
XV, 245, 1854. Ameiei.— Mendoza in Hakluyt,
Voy., Ill, 469, 1600. Amejet.— Ibid., 462. AmeriM.—
Squier in Am. Review, 523, Nov. 1848. Amies. —
Davis, Span. Conq.N. Mex. ,252, 1869. Amies.— Ibid.,
map. Amires.— Ogilby,Amer.,294,1671. Sjemes. —
Gallatin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxvii, 280,
1851. Emeaes.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
IV, 206, 1892. Emeges.— Espeio (1583) in Doc.
In6d.. XV, 179, 1871. Emenes.— Bancroft, Ariz, and
N. Mex., 132, 1889. Ernes.— Ctordova £1619) InTer-
naux-Compans, Voy., x, 444, 1838. Em^.— Villa-
gran, Hist. Nueva Mex., 155, 1610. Emexes. — ^Es-
pejo (1583) in Doe. InM., xv, 116, 1871. Emmes.—
Ofiate (1598), ibid., xvi. 102, 260, 1871. Euimes.—
Columbus Memorial Vol., 155, 1893. Ghemes.—
Villa-Seflor, Theatro Am., pt. 2, 421, 1748. Oemex.—
Zdrate-Salmeron {ca. 1629) quoted by Bancroft,
Nat. Races, i, 600, 1882. Gemez.— Humboldt, Atlas
Nouv. Espagne, carte 1, 1811. Gtomez. — Arrow-
smith, map N. A., 1795, ed. 1814. Eae-mish.—
Bandelier m Revue d'Ethnog., 203, 1886 (Queres
name). Ha-mish.— Bandelier in N. Y. Staats-
zeitung, June 28, 1885 (Queres name). Ea-waw-
wah-laJi-too-waw.— Simpson in Rep. Sec. War,
143, 1850 (proper name of pueblo). He'-mai.—
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Isleta name).
Hemeos. — Z&ratc-Salmeron (1629) quoted by Ban-
delier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 205, 1892. Hemes.—
Castafieda {ca. 1565) in Temaux-Compans, Voy.,
IX, 138,1838. Hem^.—Benavides( 1630) quoted by
Gallatin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th 8., xxvii, 305,
1851. Hemeshitse.— Hodge, field notes, B. A. E.,
1895 (Laguna and San Felipe name). He'-me-
shu-tsa. —Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Sia
form ). Hemez.— Squier in Am. Review, 522, Nov.
1848 (misquoting Castafieda). Ee'mi.— Hodge,
field notes, B. A. E., 1895 ((Santa Ana name).
He-mi-ma\— Ibid. (Picuris name). Hemishits.—
Ibid. (Acoma name). Henex.— Zftrate-Salmeron
{ca. 1629) quoted by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa-
pers,iv,205, 1892. Hermes.- Curtis, Children of the
Sun, 121, 1883 (misquoting Coronado). Hemes.—
Kern in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 32, 39, 1854.
He"-wa'.— Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Pecos
nameofpueblo). Hiem-ai.— Gatschet, Isleta MS.
vocab., B. A.E., 1885 (Isleta nameofpueblo}. Hi^
mide.— Ibid. (pi. Hiemnin; Isleta name for the peo-
ple). James.— Marcy in Rep. Sec. War, 196, 1850.
Jamez.— Gallegas (1844) in Emory, Recon., 478, 1848.
Jemas.— Wislizenus, Memoir, 24, 1848. Jemes.—
Mendoza (1742) in Meline, Two Thousand Miles,
213, 1867. Jemex.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June
12, 1863. Jemez.— Simpson in Rep. Sec. War, 59,
1850. Jemmes.— Peet in Am. Antiq., XVII, 354,
1895. Jemos.— Loew (1875) in Wheeler Surv. Rep.,
vii. 345, 1879. Jenies.— Calhoun in Schoolcrait,
Ind. Tribes, iii, 633, 1853. Jermz.— Kern, ibid., IV,
39, 1854. Jeures.— Ward in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867,
210, 1868. Jimenez.— Escudero, Not. Estad. Chi-
huahua, 180. 1834. Jumez.— Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 87,
1884. Mai-d8c-kH-iie.— ten Kate, Synonymic, 6, 1884
<'Wolf neck': Navaho name). Tames.— Brack-
enridge, Early Spanish Discov., 19, 1857.
Temes. — Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 259, Apr.
1882. Temez.— Alegre. Hist. Comp. Jesus, l, 336,
1841. Tuhoa.— Bandelier in Ausland, 813, 1882
(=' houses': proper name of the pueblo). Tu'-
wa.— Hodge, flela notes, B. A. E., 1895 (own name
of pueblo). TJala-to-hua.— Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, iii, 260, 1890 ('village of the bear* :
own name of pueblo). TJal-to-hua.— Ibid., iv, 208,
1892. Vallatoa.— Loew in Wheeler Surv. Rep., Vii,
BULL. 30]
JENNE8EDAGA ^JIOARILLA
631
844, 1879. Wa-U-nah.— Jonvenceau in Cath. Pion. ,
I, no. 9, 13, 1906. Walatoa.— Gatschet in Mag. Am.
Hist., 269, Apr. 1882 . Wa'-U-tu-wa.— Hodge, field
notes, B. A. E., 1895. Wong'-ge'.— Ibid. (•Navaho
place': Santa Clara and San Ildefonso name).
XemM.— Rivera, Diario, leg. 950, 1736. xemM-— teii
Kate, Synonymle, 6, 1884. Xemez.— Ruxton, Ad-
ventures, 194, 1848. Temez.— Latham, Var. of
Man, 896, 1850. Zemas.— Simpson in Jour. Am.
Geog. Soc., V, 195, 1874.
Jennesedaga. — A former Seneca village
on the right bank of Allegheny r., 17 m.
above Warren, Pa., whicn in 1816 was
the residence of the celebrated Corn-
planter; it then consisted of 12 houses. —
Day, Hist. Coll. Pa., (556, 1853.
Jensenaqne. A former Natchez village.
Dumont(M^moire, ii, 97, 1753) mentions
it in addition to Great, Flour, Apple, and
Gray villages, in the early part of the
18th century. The filth village, men-
tioned by most authors of his period, is
Terre Blanche, and Jenzenaque may be
its Natchez name.
Jerome Big Eagle. See Wamdetanka,
Jeromestown. A former Delaware vil-
lage near the present Jeromes ville, Ash-
land CO., Ohio, on a section of land set
aside for the use of the Delawares by act
of Mar. 3, 1807, but ceded to the United
States by treaty of Sept. 29, 1817. It re-
ceived its name from Jean Baptiste Je-
rome, an early French trader. See Brown,
West. Gaz., 314, 1817; Howe, Hist. Coll.
Ohio, I, 255, 1898; Royce in 18th Rep.
B. A. E., Ohio map, 1899.
JesuB Maria. A pueblo of the Cora on
the E. bank of Rio San Pedro, here known
as the Rio Jesus Marfa, in the n. part of
the Territory of Tepic, about lat. 22? 40^
Mexico. It was the seat of a mission, of
which San Francisco was a visita. See
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 380, 1864; Lum-
holtz. Unknown Mexico, i, 487; ii, 16,
map, 1902.
JenuB Marfa y 1ob4. A Franciscan mis-
sion founded by Fathers Casafias and Bor-
doy, in 1690, in the vicinity of and as an
adjunct to the mission of San Francisco
de los Tejas (q. v. ) in Texas, and aban-
doned in 1693. Its history is the same as
that of the parent mission. See Bancroft,
No. Mex. States, i, 417-418, 666, 1886;
Garrison, Texas, 1:903.
Santa Maria. — Bancroft, op. cit. Santuimo Norn-
bre de Maria.— Ibid.
Jet, Lignite, Anthracite, Cannel coal. Car-
bonaceous materials used to some extent
by Indians. Jet of ekcellent quality oc-
curs in Colorado, and the Indians of the
arid region employ it for jewelry and
various carvings. Good examples of lig-
nite ornaments were obtained by Fewkps
from the ancient ruins of Arizona, and of
jet by Pepper from the ruins of Chaco
canyon, N. Mex. Among the latter is a
well-sculptured frog decorated with inlaid
designs in turquoise and shell. Cannel-
coal objects are found in the Ohio valley
mounds, but few specimens carved from
anthracite are known. A small, well-
carved human head of jet-like stone was
obtained by Smith from a shell heap on
lower Frazer r., Brit. Col., and Niblack
says that the N. W. coast tribes pulverize
lignite and mix it with oil for paint.
Consult Fewkes in 22d Rep. B. A. E.,
1903; Niblack in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1888,
1890; Pepper in Am. Anthrop., vii, 1905;
Smith in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., iv,
1903. (w. H. H.)
Jetti. A former Cochimi rancheria 3
leagues n. of Loreto mission. Lower Cali-
fornia.—Picolo (1702) in Lettres Edifi-
antes, ii, 63, 1841.
Jews and Indians. See Lost Ten Tribes,
Popular fallacies,
Jiaspi. A former rancheria of the So-
baipuri, visited by Father Kino about
1697 and by him named Rosario. It was
situated on thew. bank of Rio San Pedro,
probably in the vicinity of the present vil-
lage of Prospect, 8. Arizona. (f. w. h. )
Jiaspi.— Kino (1G97) in Do(». Hist. Mex., 4th s., I,
279, 1856. Rowurio.— Bemal (1G97) quoted by Ban-
croft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 356, 1887, (Jia.spi, or).
Jicamorachic. A former Tarahumare
settlement in Chihuahua, Mexico. —
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 323, 1864.
Jicara. (Mex. Span.: 'small gourd
vessel or basket * ) . A former Tepehuane
pueblo in Durango, Mexico, and the seat
of a Spanish inist^iou.
8. Pedro Jicara.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 319, 1864.
Jicarilla (Mex. Span.: 'little basket'). ^ ^
An Athapascan tribe, first so called by Tf- ^
Spaniards becaufie of their expertness in
making vessels of basketry. They ap-
parently formed a part of the Vaqueros
of early Spanish chronicles, although, ac-
cording to their creation legend, they have
occui^ied from the earliest period the
mountainous region of s. e. Colorado and
N. New Mexico, their range at various
periods extending eastward to w. Kansas
and Oklahoma, and into n. w. Texas.
The Arkansas, Rio Grande, and Canadian
rs. figure in their genesis mvth (Mooney
in Am. Anthrop., xi, 200, 1898), but their
traditions seem to center about Taos and
the heads of Arkansas r. They regard the
kindred ^Mescaleros and also the Navaho as
enemies, and, according to Mooney, their
alliances and blood mixture have been
with the Ute and Taos. In language they
are more closely related to the Mescaleros
than to the Navaho or the Arizona
Apache. The Jicarillas w^ere first men-
tioned by this name early in the 18th cen-
tury. Later, their different bands were
designated Carlanes, Calchufines, Quar-
telejos, etc., after their habitat or chief-
tains. The Spaniards established a mis-
sion among them within a few leagues of
Taos, N. Mex., in 1733, which prospered
for only a short time. They were regarded
as a worthless people by both the Spanish
settlers of New Mexico and their Ameri-
632
JITI80BI0HI — JO0OME8
[b. a. 1
can successors, in raids for plunder the
worst of the Apache tribes, more treacher-
ous and cruel and less brave and energetic
warriors than the Ute, but equally fond
of intoxicants. While they sometimes
planted on a small scale, they regarded
theft as a natural means of support. The
governor of New Mexico in 1853 induced
250 of the tribe to settle on Rio Puerco, but
failure to ratify the treaty caused them to
go on the warpath, maintaining hostility
until their defeat by United States trooi)s
in 1854. Henceforward they were nomi-
nally at peace, although committing many
petty thefts. In 1 870 they resided on the
Maxwell grant in n. k. New Mexico, the
sale of which necessitated their removal.
In 1872 and again in 1878 an attempt was
made to move them s. to Ft Stanton, but
JICARILLA. (aQUSTIN VIJIl)
most of them were p>ermitted to go to the
Tierra Amarilla, on the n. confines of the
territory, on a reservation of 900 sq. m.
set fDside in 1874. Their annuities being
suspended in 1878 on account of their re-
fusal to move southward in accordance
with an act of Congress of that year, they
resorted to thieving. In 1880 the act of
1878 was rei>ealed, and a new reservation
was set aside on the Rio Navajo, to which
they were removed. Here they remained
until 1883, when they were transferred to
Ft Stanton, but in 1887 were again re-
turned to the reservation set aside for them
in the Tierra Amarilla region by Execu-
tive order of Feb. 11 of that year, where
they have since resided. Of this reser-
vation 129,313.35 acres have been allotted
to the Indians, and 280.44 acres reserved
for mission, school, and agency purposes;
the remainder, comprising 286,400 acres,
is unallotted. Their population in 1905
was 795. The present divisions of the
Jicarilla, as recorded by Mooney (MS.,
B. A. E., 1897), are: Apatsiltlizhihi.
Dachizhozhin, Golkahin, Ketsilind, and
Saitinde. (f. w. h.)
ApaohesXioarillM— Cortez (1799) in Pac. R.R.Rep.,
Ill, 119, 1866. B«'-xai.— ten Kate, Synonymie,
6, 1884 f Navaho name). Oicarillms.— MS. of 1784
quoted Dy Bandeller in Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 184,
1890. Hickory.— Coues, Garc4s Diary, 222, 1900.
loarilla Apaohes.— Amy in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867, 204,
1868. looarillaApaohes.— Ibid., 217, 1861. loharilla
Apaohes.— Ibid., 1864, 495, 1865. lioarrillafl.— Bent
(1846) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 80th Cong., 1st seas.,
11, 1848. JaoarilU Apaohes.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 328,
1875. Jaoarrilla Apaohes.— Bell, New Tracks in
N. Am., 1, 184, 1869. Jeoorilla.— Latham in Proc.
Ethnol. 8oc. Lond., vi, 74, 1854. Jioaras.— Gibbs,
Letter to Higgins, B. A. £.,1866. Jiearello
^^ Apaohes.— Meriwether in Sen. Ex. Doc. 69, 84th
Cong., 1st sess., 15, 1856. Jioarila Apaohe.— Tay-
lor in Cal. Farmer, June 12, 1863. Jioarilla.— Ri-
vera, Diario y Derrotero, leg. 950, 1736. Jioarilla
Apaohes.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 434, 1853. Jioarilleros.—
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 464, 1878. Jieari-
llos.— Morgan in N.Am. Rev., 58, 1870. Jiocarilla
Apaohe.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 55, 35th Cong., 1st sess., 11,
1858. Jiooarrilla Apaohes.— Bell in Jour. Ethnol.
Soc. Lond., I, 240, 1869. Jiokorie.— Higgins, MS.
noteson A^che, B. A. E., 1866. Jioorilla.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, 1,243,1851. Jioorilla Apadies.—
Simpson, MS. vocab.. B. A. £. Kinya-Iade.—
Mooney, field notes, B. A. E., 1897 (Mescalero
name). X'op-tagdi.-Ibid. (* mountain Apache':
Kiowaname). jiorthem Apaohes.— Ind. Aff. Rep.,
142, 1850. Pe + x'-g*-— ten Kate, Synonymie, 6, 18
(Navaho name). Pi'-ke-e-wai-'i-ne. — Hodge, field
en.— Yarrow in Wheeler Surv. Rep., vii, 470, 1879
(•men of the woodland'). • Tasnl'nS.— Mooney,
field notes, B. A. E. , 1897 ( Mescalero name, possibly
from tashi, • above, ' • beyond' ) . Tioorillas.- Simp-
son in Rep. Sec. War, 57, 1850 (misprint). Tutdt—
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (own name).
Tu-sa-be'.— ten Kate, Synonymie, 8, 1884 (Tesuque
name) . Zioarillas.— MS. of 1724 quoted by Bande-
lierin Arch. Inst. Papers, v, 192, 1890.
Jitisorichi. A former pueblo, apparent-
ly of the Tegnima Opata, on the upper
Rio Sonora between Bacuachi and Anzpe,
in Sonora, Mexico. It was doubtless
abandoned prior to the 17th century.
Jitisoriohi.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, rv,
489, 1892. Ti-ji-8^ri-chi.— Bandelier, Gilded Man,
182, 1893 (misprint).
jlaaos. A former Ohumashan village
near Purfsima mission, Santa Barbara
CO., Cal.
Jlaaos.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Jlaous.— Ibid.
Joasseh ( ' heron ' ). An Iroquois clan.
Jo-as'-seh.— Morgan, League Iroq., 80, 1851 (Sene-
ca form). Otinanohah^. — French writer (1666)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.ix, 47, 1856.
Jooomes. A warlike nomadictribe of the
17th and 18th centuries which, with the
Janos, ranged to the n. of theOasasGrandes
in Chihuahua, Mexico, and westward
to Fronteras, Sonora, later becoming ab-
sorbed by the Apache (Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, iii, 91, 1890). Orozco y
Berra (Gl«og., 59, 1864) classes them as a
part of the Faraon Apache and as distinct
from the Jacomis, who, however, were
doubtless the same. ( f. w. h. )
BULL. 30]
JOCONOSTLA JONES, PETER
633
HcjoBMs.— De risle, Carte Mcx. ot Floride, 1703.
Jaoome.— Humboldt, Atlas, 1st map, 1811. Jaco-
mia. — Orozeo y Berra, Geog., 69, 1864. Jocomeos. —
Doc. ca. 1702 in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s.. v, 129,
1857. Jocomes.— Kino (1690). ibid. i. 230. 1856.
Jooomii.— Rudo Ensayo {ca. 1763), 154, 1863.
Xdoomes.— Rivera, Diario. leg. 591, 1736.
JoconoBtla. A former Tepehuane i)ue-
blo in Durango, Mexico, and the seat of a
Spanish mission.
S. Jm^ de JoconoBtla.— Orozco y Berra, (Jeos., 318,
1864.
^ John P^y. A Shahaptian tribe, speak-
ing the Tepino language, formerly living
on John Day r., Greg., having their prin-
cipal village 4 m. alSve the mouth. By
treaty of 1855 they were place<l on Warm
Springs res., Oreg., where there are about
50 survivors. ( l. f. )
Soek-ipos.— U.S.Stat., Xli, 963. 1863. John Days.—
Thompson in Ind. Aff. Rep., 285, 1854. John Day's
river.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i. 417, 1855. Tuk-
•pfi'sh.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.. 743, 1896
(Tenino name for John Day r.). Tiikspu'sh-
'lima.— Ibid. (sig. : • people of John Day r. ' ) .
John Hicks' Town. A former Seminole
settlement w. of Payne's savanna, in n.
Florida, occuined by Mikasuki Indians. —
Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, bU7, 1 822.
Johnnys. A Hankutchin village situa-
ted on Yukon r., Ala.^ka, where the min-
ing camp of P^gle now is. It was the vil-
lage of the Katshikotin, whose chief was
known as John. — Schwatka. Recon. in
Alaska, 87, 1885.
Johnson, John. See Enmegnhbowh.
Johnstown. A former Cherokee settle-
ment on the upper waters of Chattahoo-
chee r., probably in the n. part of Hall
CO., Georgia.
John's Town.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. K., map,
1887.
Johnstown. A new settlement ** where
the Iroquois were thereafter to speak,"
instead of at Orange or New Albany,
N. Y.— Doc. of 18th cent, in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist, X, 98, 1858,
Jolee. A former Seminole town in Flor-
ida, on the w. bank of Apalachicola r., (>0
m. above its mouth, apparently at or near
the present lola in Calhoun co. — H. R.
Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th Cong., 1st sess.,
27, 1826.
Jolly, John. A Cherokee chief, note<l
as the adopted father of (len. Samuel
Houston, and later chief of the Arkansas
band of Cherokee. His native name was
Ahillud^gl, *He throws away the drum.*
His early life was spent in Tennessee, near
the mouth of the Hiwassee, where an
island still preserves his name, and it was
here that Houston came to live with him,
remaining 3 years and acquiring a life-
long friendship for his adopted people.
In 1818 Jolly removed to the other side
of the Mississippi and joined the Arkansas
band, whose chief he became a few years
later on the death of Tollunteeskee. —
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 507, 1900.
Jonatas. A former Chumashan village,
tributary to Santa Inez mission, Santa
Barbara co., Cal. — Gatschet in Chief
Engrs. Rep., pt. in, 553, 1876.
Joneadih {J(/-ne-ii-dih, 'beyond the
point.' — Hewitt). A former Seneca vil-
lage on Allegheny r., nearly opposite Sal-
amanca, N. Y. — Morgan, League Irocj.,
466, 1851.
Jones, Peter ( Kahkewaquonaby, Kahke-
wagwonnabyj. A mixed-blood Missis-
auga chief, missionarv, and author; born
Jan. 1, 1802, died June29, 1856. Hisfather
was a white man of Welsh descent named
Augustus Jones, who maintained the
closest friendship with Brant during the
latter's life. Peter's mother was Tuh-
l)enahneeguay, daughter of Wahbanosay,
a chief of the Missisauga on Credit r., at
the extreme w. end of L. Ontario, where,
on a tract of land known as Burlington
heights, Peter and his brother John were
born. He remained with his trilK?, fol-
lowing their customs and accompanying
them on their excursions, until his i6th
year, when his father, who was then a
government surveyor, had him baptized
by Rev. Ralph Leeming, an English Epis-
copal minister, at the Mohawk church
on (irand r., near Brantford, Ont. Hav-
ing professed religion at a campmeet-
ing held near Ancastt^ Out., and taken
an active part in the religious exercises of
the Wesleyan Methodist Church, Peter
was sent oh a missionary tour, in 1827, to
L. Simcoe, St Clair, Muncey, and other
points in w. Ontario, although not yet
ordained. He had by this time entered
upon his literary work, as in this year was
published a hymn book translated by
him into Chippewa. He was constituted
a deacon of the Wesleyan Methodist
conference in 1830, and as minister by
Rev. George Marsden at the Torontl)
conference in 1833. The remainder of
his life was devoted chiefly to missionary
work among the Missisauga and Chip-
pewa, and to some extent among the
Iroquois. His position as a Christian
pastor and ruling chief of his tribe gave
him great influence, not only among his
own people, but among all the Chippewa
tribes. He visited England and New
York, and made repeated journeys to
Toronto in the prosecution of his work
and in behalf of his jieople. It was
largely through his efforts that the titles
of the Credit Indians to their lands were
perfected. Although inured to out-door
life and of a somewhat robust frame, his
constitution began to yield to excessive
exposures, resulting in his death, near
Brantford, in 1856. A monument was
erected to his memory, in 1857, with the
inscription: **Erectea by the Ojibeway
and other Indian tril)es to their revered
and beloved chief, Kahkewaquonaby (the
634
JONES' RIVER JOSEPH
[b. a. b.
Rev. Peter Jones).'' A memorial tablet
was placed by his family in the Indian
church at the New Credit settlement.
Ryerson (Ojebway Indians, 18, 1861)
describes Jones as **a man of athletic
frame, as well as of masculine intellect; a
man of clear perception, good judgment,
great decision of^ character; a sound
preacher, fervent and powerful in his
appeals; very well informed on general
Hubjects, extensively acquainted with
men and things." His wife was an Eng-
lish woman, who with 4 sons survived
him. His seventh son, Peter E. Jones,
who bore his father's name (Kah-ke-wa-
quo-na-by), was editor of a periodical,
The Indian^ published at Hagersville,
Out, in 1885-86.
In addition to the volume of hymns,
first printed in 1829, republished in 1836,
and m various enlarged editions in later
years, Jones translated also into Chip-
pewa a volume of Additional Hymns
(1861 ), an Ojibway SiielHng Book (1828),
Part of the New Testament (1829), The
First Book of ]Moses (1835), and Part of
the Discipline of the Wesleyan Methodist
Church in Canada ( 1835). He also wrote
the Life and Journals of Kah-ke-wa-quo-
na-by (Rev. Peter Jones), 1860, and a
History of the Ojebway Indians, with
Especial Reference to their Conversion to
Christianity, 1861. Consult Pilling, Bib-
liog. Algonq. Lang., Bull. B. A. E., 1891.
Jones' Biver. A village of Christian In-
dians in Kingston township, Plymouth
CO., Mass., in 1703.— Cotton (1703) in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., ii, 244, 1830.
Jonondes {Diionon^dese\ *at the high
mountain*). A former Iroquois village
belonging to the Bear clan; location un-
known, (j. N. B. H.)
Jonondese.— Hale, Iroquois Book of Rites, 120,
1833. Jonondeseh. —I bid . , 121 .
Joqnizara. A former village, presum-
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. Cf. Joaquig'ard.
Jore (probably from Ayd^li^yi^ * little
place,' i. e., 'little town'; abbreviated
Ayd^li), A former Cherokee settlement
on lola cr., an upper branch of Little
Tennessee r., N. C. (.i. m.)
loU.— Present map form. Jore.— Bartram, Trav-
els, 371, 372, 1792. Joree.— Doc. of 1755 cited by
Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 142, 1887.
Joseph. The leader of the Nez Percys in
the hostilities of 1877. His mother was a
Nez Perc6, his father a Cay use, who re-
ceived the name Joseph from his teacher,
the missionary Spalding, who was with
Dr Whitman and who went to the Idaho
country in the late thirties of the 19th
century. Chief Joseph's native name was
H inmaton-yalatki t (mnmaton, 'thunder* ;
ycdatkity ' coming from the water up over
the land.'— Miss McBeth), but both he
and his brother OUicot were often called
Joseph , as if it were a family name. Joseph
was a man of fine presence and impressive
features, and was one of the most remark-
able Indians within the borders of the
Union. The treaty of 1863, by which the
whitesobtained arightto the Wallowa val-
ley, the ancient home of Joseph's band in
N. E. Oregon, was not recognized by Jo-
seph and the Indians sympathizing with
him, who continued to dwell there in
spite of collisions between the Indians
and the whites, which became more and
more frequent. The matter of removing
these Indians to the Lapwai res. in Idaho,
after the failure of a commission the pre-
vious year, was proceeding to a peaceful
settlement when outrageous acts on the
part of the white settlers caused the Nez
rerc^s to break loose and attack the set-
CHIEF JOSEPH
tlements. War was declared. After sev-
eral engagements, in which the whites
lost severely, Joseph displayed remarka-
able generalship in a retreat worthy to be
remembered with that of Xenophon's ten
thousand (Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
714, 1896). In spite of the fact that in
front of him was Col. Miles, behind Gen.
Howard, on his flank Col. Sturgis and his
Indian scouts, Joseph brought his little
band, incommoded with women and chil-
dren, to within 50 miles of the Canadian
border, their objective point, when they
were cut off by fresh troops in front and
forced to surrender conditionally on
Oct. 5, 1877. Not only the conduct
of the Nez Percys during this retreat of
more than 1,000 miles, but also the
military and tactical skill displayed by
DULL. 30]
J09QUIGARD JULIANEHAAB
635
their leader, won unstinted praise from
their conquerors. The promises made to
Joseph and his people were ignored, and
the Indian8,numbering431 , were removed
to Ft Leavenworth, Kans., and afterward
to Indian Ter., where they remained for
several years, always yearning for the
mountains and val leys of Idaho. In 1 883
a party of 83 women and children were
allowed to go back to their old home,
and were followed the next year by 118
others. Joseph and the remaining mem-
bers of his band, however, numbering
150, were not permitted to return to Idaho,
but were sent to the Colville res., Wash.
He lived to visit President Roosevelt and
Gen. Miles at Washington in Mar., 1903,
butdiedatNespelim, on the Colville res..
Wash., Sept. 21, 1904. According to the
Indian agent he had become reconciled to
civilization in his last years, lending his
aid in the education of the children of
his tribe, and discouraging gambling and
drunkenness.
Josqulgard. A former village, presum-
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. Cf. Jomdzara.
Jotars. A n unidentified tribe oi Texas,
mentioned in the Mezitires MS. of 1779,
together with the Kichai and Nasoni,
from whom an epidemic had spread to
the Tawakoni, Caddo, and other tribes.
The Jotars lived in a locality remote
from Nacogdoches, probably toward the
N. W. (h. E. B.)
Jova. A formerOpata division inhabit-
ing principally the valley of the stream on
which Sahuaripa (lat. 29°, Ion. 109°) is
situated, in Sonora, Mexico, and extend-
ing E. into Chihuahua, to and including
the village of Dolores on a s. tributary
of Rio Aros. Its members are now
completely Mexicanized. The language
spoken differed dialectically from the
Opata proper and the Eudeve. The Jova
settlements were Arivechi, Chamada,
Natora, Ponida, Sahuaripa (in part), San
Mateo, Malzura, Santa Marfa de los Do-
lores, Santo Tomas, Satechi (?), Servas,
Setasura, and Teopari. (f. w. h.)
JaU.— Davila, Sonora Hist., 316, 1894. Joba.—
Ibid.. 317. Jobal.— Orozco y Berra, Geopr.. 3-15. 1864.
JoUles.— Ibid. Jova.— Ibid. Ov»g.— Ibid. Sahua-
ripas.— Ibid.
Joytudachi. Ajjparently a former vil-
lage of the Opata in the Sierra de Baserac,
one of the n. w. spurs of the Sierra Mad re,
in N. K. Sonora, Mexico. — Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Papers, iii, 58, 1890.
Joyvan. Mentioned by La Harpe ( Mar-
gry, D^c, VI, 277, 1886}, together with the
Quidehais, Naouydicnes, Huanchan^s,
and others, as a wandering tribe, appar-
ently w. of southern Arkansas in 1719.
Unidentified.
Jaigona. A former rancheria, probably
Papago, near San Xavier del Bac in s.
Arizona; visited by. Kino and Mange
in 1699. — Mange quoted by Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 358, 1889.
Juan Bantista. A Kawia village of the
Cabezon division, in San Bernardino co.,
Cal.— Burton in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th
Cong., 3d sess., 117, 1857.
Juanenos. A Shoshonean division on
the California coast, named from San Juan
Capistrano mission (q. v. ), at which they
were principally gathered, extending n.
to Alisos cr. and s. to a point between
San Onofre and Las Flores crs. Their
language forms one group with those of
the Luiseilos, Kawia, and Aguas Calien-
tes (q. v.). According to Ames (Rep.
Mission Inds., 5, 1873) there were only 40
individuals in the neighborhood in 1873;
of these most are now dead and the re-
mainder scattered.
Gaitchim.— Gutsc'het in Rep. Chief of Engrs., pt. 3,
555. 1876. Juanenos.— Kroeber. iiif'ii, 1905 (so
called by the Indians and Spaniards). Netela.—
Hale, Kthnog. and Philol., 222, 1846 (sig. 'my
language').
Jadac. The largest of three large Pima
rancherias on Gila r., s. Ariz., in tne 18th
century, now probably known by some
other name. — Villa-Seilor, Theatre Am.,
pt. 2, 404, 1748.
Jadosa. A village or community e. of
the mouth of Trinity r., Tex., in a region
generally controlled by tribes of the At-
tacapan family in the 17th centurv.
Jaodoas.— Uhde. liinder. 159, 1861. JucTosa.— De
I'Isle, map (1700) in Winsor, Hist. Am., ii. 294,
1886.
Jagelnate. A Kaiyuhkhotana division
on Shageluk and Innoko rs. , Alaska; pop.
150 in 1880. It included the villages of
Anilukhtakpak, Inselnostlinde, Intenlei-
den, Khuligichakat, Kuingsihtetakten,
Kvigimpainagmute, and Vagitchitchate.
Chageluk settlements.— Petroff in 10th Census,
Alaska, 12, 1884. Inkalit-Ingelnut.— Schott in
Erman, Archiv. vii, 480, 1849 (misprint). Jugel-
nuten. — Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 7, 1855.
Jugelnuts.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 517,
1878. Ounagountchaguelioug'iout. — Zagaskin in
Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 18.'i0. Shage-
look— Whymper, Alaska, map, 1869. Shageluk.—
Schwatka, Rep. on Alkska, 101, 1885. Shaglook.—
Whvmper. Alaska. 265. 1869. Takai'-yakho-
tan'a.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 26, 1877
(Athapascan name). Yugelnut.— Zagoskin (1842)
quoted by Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 37, 1884.
Jnichnn. A Costanoan division or vil-
lage in California, speaking a dialect very
nimilar to that of the Mut^un. — Arroyo
de la Cuesta, Idiomas ('alifornias, MS.
trans., B. A. E.
JnkiiiBme. The Moquelumnan Indians
on whose land the San Rafael mission,
Cal. , was built. Their language was iden-
tical with the Chokuyem, and their name
may be a distorted fonn of the same
word.
Jottkiousme.— Duflot de Mofras, Expl., ii, 391, 1844.
Jooskiottsm^.— Shea, Catholic Miss., 109, 1855.
SanRafaellndians.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
Ill, 195, 1877. Yonkiousme.— Latham in Trans.
Philol. Soc. Lond., 82,1856 (misquoted).
Julianehaab. A Danish colony and Es-
kimo settlement on a sniall island, lat.
60° 43^ 8. Greenland.
636
JULIMESoS JUNALU8KA
[b. a. b.
Julianehaab.— Oraah, Exped. Greenland, map,
1837. Kakortok.— Meddelelser om Gronland, xvi,
map, 1896.
jnlimenoB. A former tribe in n. k.
Mexico, probably of the Coahuiltecan
linguistic family, which was gathered into
the mission of San Francisco Vizarron de
los Pausanes, in Coahuila, in 1737. —
Orozco y Berra, Geo^., 308, 1864.
^ Jnmano. A tribe of unknown affinity,
** ^ first seen, although not mentioned by
JL-^ name, about the beginning of 1536 by
V ^y Cabeza de Vaca and his companions in
.^A^ the vicinity of the junction of the Con-
^^ chos with the Rio Grande, or northward
to about the s. boundary of New Mexico.
They were next visited in 1582 by An-
tonio de P^pejo, who called them Juma-
nos and Patarabueyes, stating that they
numbered 10,000 in five villages along the
Rio Grande from the Conchos junction
northward for 1 2 days' journey. Most of
their houses were built of sod or earth and
grass, with fiat roofs; they cultivated
maize, l)eiins, calabashes, etc. When
visited in 1598 by Juan de Oilate, who
(Allied them Rayaclos on account of their
striated faces, a j)art at least of the Juma-
no resided in several villages near the
Salinas, e. of the Rio Grande, in New
Mexico, the four principal ones being
called Atripuy, Genobey, Quelotetrey,
and Pataotrey. From aoout 1622 these
were ministereil to by the Franciscan
Fray Juan de Salas, inissionary at the
Tigua pueblo of Isleta, N. Mex* In re-
sponse to the request of 50 Jumano, who
visited Isletii in July, 1629, an independ-
ent mission, under the name San Isidore,
was established among them in the Sa-
linas, but the main body of the tribe at
this time seems to have resided 300 m. e.
of Santa Fe, probably on the Arkansas,
within the present Kansas, where they
were said to oe also in 1632. Forty years
later there were Jumano 15 leagues e. of
the Piros and Tigua villages of the Sa-
linas, not far from Pecos r., who were
ministered to by the priest at Quarai.
About this time the Salmas pueblos were
abandoned on account of Apache depre-
dations. The Jumano did not participate
in the Pueblo rebellion of 1680-92, but
before it was quelled, i. e., in Oct., 1683,
200 of the tribe visited the Spaniards
at El Paso, to request missionaries, but
owing to the unsettled condition of affairs
by reason of the revolt in the n., the re-
quest was not granted. In the following
year friars visited the Jumano in s. Texas,
and within this decade they became
known to the French under the name
Choumans. Various references to them
are made during the 18th century, in-
cluding the perhaps significant statement
by Cabello (Informe, 1784, MS. cited by
H. E. Bolton, inf n, 1906) that **the
Taguayazes (Wichita) are known in New
Mexico by the name of Jumanes also."
As late as the middle of the 19th cen-
tury they are mentioned in connection
with the Kiowa, and again as living near
Lampazas, Nuevo Leon, Mexico. The
tribal name was once applied to the
Wichita mts. in Oklahoma, and it is still
preserved in the * * Mesa Jumanes * ' of New
Mexico. See Bandelier in Arch. Inst.
Papers, iv, 268, 1892; Benavides, Memo-
rial (1630), in Land of Sunshine, xiv, 46,
51, 1901; Vetancurt( 1693), Teatro Ameri-
cana, III, 304, repr. 1871. (f. w. h.)
Aumaneg.— Uhde, Lander, 121, 1861 (near Lampa-
zos, N. Leon). Borrados.— Doc. of 1'7% quoted by
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 382, 1864 * striped ^ same?).
Chaumenes.— Charlevoix, New France, Shea ed.,
IV, 78, 1870. Chomanes.— Barcia, Ensayo, 264, 1723.
Choinana.~Doc. of 1699 in Margry. D6c., IV, 316,
1880. Chomenes.— Barcia, op. cit., 271. Choumaa. —
Joutel (1687) in Margry, Ddc., ni, 299, 1878.
Chouxnanes. — Barcia, op. cit., 283. Ohonmaiis. —
Douay {ca. 1687) quoted by Shea, Disco v., 205,
1852. Choumay.— Joutel (1687) in Margir, D^.,
HI, 410, 1878. Ohoumenes.— Joutel (1687) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., i. 137, 1846. I>egu]iiaiia«.--Duro,
Don Diego de Pefialosa, 63, 1882. Eumanat.—
I'erea, Verdadera Rel.. 2, 1632. Homanaa de
Tompireg.— Brion de la Tour, Map N. Am., 1779
i confounded with Tompiros). Homanaa de
!ompiroB.— Jeflferys, Am. Atla.s, map 5, 1776.
Huxnanos.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii. 28, 1852.
Httmas.— Orozco y Berra. Geog., 70, 1864 (believed
bv Bandelier to be identical; see Xumas below).
Humunas de Tompires.— Morse, Atlas, map 52,1812.
Ipataragiiites.— Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la Con-
quista, 169, 1742 (probably identical). Idmanaa. —
Buschmann, Neu-Mexieo, 228,264,1858 (after Sig-
uenza, 1691-93). lomanea.— Sanson, L'Amdrique,
map, 27, 1657. lumanoa.— Mendo^a (1586) in Hak-
luyt, Voy., 459, 466, 1600. Jumanaa.— E^ejo (1582)
in Doc.In(ka.,xv, 186, 1871. Jumaaea.— Whipple.
I'ac. R. R. Rep., HI, pt. 3, 113, 1856 (misquoUng
Hakluyt). Jumanoes.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
II, 29, 1852. Juxnanoa.— Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 163,
1744. Juxnaa.— Orozco y Berra (1864) quoted in
Arch. Inst. Bui., i, 31, 1883. Luxnanos.— Davis,
Span. Conq. N. Mex., 242, 1869. Parabuyeia.^De
risle. Atlas Nouveau. map 59, 1733. Patarabue-
cea.— Bell in Jour. Ethnol.Soc. Loud., 1,263,1869.
Patarabueyefl.— Espejo (1582) in Doc. In6d., xv,
168. 1871. Patarabuyea.— Mendoca (1686) in Hak-
luyt, Voy., 459. 1600. Patarabyes.— Heylen, Co»-
mog., 1072. 1703. Rayadoa.— Oftate(1598) in Doc.
In4d., XVI, 266,1871. Krayadoa.—Ibid. Buxnanaa.—
Duro, Don Diego de Pefialosa, 56, 1882. Tarra-
lumanea. — Linscnoten,De8criptionderAm^rique,
map 1 , 1638 (confused with Tarahumare?) . Tata-
rabaeyea.— Rodriguez, Relacion. in Doc. In6d., xv,
97, 1871 . TJxnanos.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1, 619,
1851 (misidentified with Yumas). Xouxnaaea. —
Doc. of 1699 in Margry, D^c, iv, 316, 1880.
Xuxnanaa.— Ofiate (1598) in Doc. In6d., xvi, 114,
1871. Xumanes.— Del'lsle, Map Am. Sej>tentrion-
ale,1700. Xuxxiariaa.— Espejo (1582) in Doc.In^d.,
XV, 168, 1871. Xumaa.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst.
Bui., I, 31, 1883 (said to be a 16th century name).
Xttxnaaea.— Ofiate (1598) in Doc. In4d., XYl, 266,
1871. Yumanoa.— Bent (1846) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, I, 242, 1851. Zumaxiaa.— Vetancurt (1693),
Teatro Mex., in, 308, 1871.
JnnaliiBka (corruption of Tsun&UihijLflsHj
*he tries repeatedly, but fails'). A
former noted chief of the East Cherokee
in North Carolina. In the Creek war of
1813-14 he led a detachment of warriors
to the support of Gen. Jackson, and did
good service at the bloody battle of the
Horseshoe Bend. Having boasted on
setting out that he would exterminate the
Creeks, he was obliged to confess on his
return that some of. that tribe were still
BULL. 30]
JUNATCA KABAYE
637
alive, whence the name lokinely bestowed
upon him by his friends. He went west
with his people in the removal of 1838,
but returned to North Carolina, and as a
special recognition of his past services was
Sven citizenship rights and a tract of
nd at Cheowa, near the present Rob-
binsville, Graham co., N. C., where he
died in 1868. See ^looney in 19th Rep.
B.A.i:.,97, 164-5, 1900.
Jnnatea. A former tribe or village, pre-
sumably Costanoan, from which Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal., drew some
of its neophytes.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Oct. 18, 1861.
Jnnetre. A ruined pueblo of the Tewa
in Rio Arriba co., N. Mex. — Bandelier in
Ritch, N. M^x., 201, 1885. See Tajimte.
Juniamiic. A former village, presumaoly
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
— Juniata (from 7)/w*r?a«//a'^, * projecting
rock,' in the Seneca and other Iroquois
dialects, a name said to refer to a stand-
ing stone to which the Indians paid rev-
erence.— Hewitt). An unidentified tribe
that lived at and about the mouth of
Juniata r.. Pa. Their village, known by
the same name, was situated on Duncan
I id., in the Susquehanna. About 1648
they were the forced auxiliaries of the
Conestc^. (j. m. )
Zhon-a-DoM.— Writer (m. 1648) quoted by Proud,
Penn., 1, 114, 1797. lottecaa.— Map (ca. 1614) in N.
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 1, 1866. John-a-does.— San ford.
U. 8., cxiviii, 1819. Juneauta.— Brainerd ( 1745)
quoted by Day. Penn., 275, 1843 (the village).
JnnoBtaea. A former rancheria, prol)-
ably Papago, visited by Kino and Mange
in 1699; situated near San Xavier del
Bac, in the present s. Arizona. — Mange
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex.,
358, 1889.
Junqiieindiiiideh ( ' it has a rock. ' — 1 lew-
itt). A village, probably of the Hurons,
situated in 1766 on Sanduskv r., Ohio,
24 m. above its mouth. — Smith, Bouquet
Exped., 67, 1766.
Jnniindat ( * one hill.* — Hewitt) . A Hu-
ron villajge in 1756 on a small creek that
empties into a little lake below the mouth
of Sandusky r., Seneca co., Ohio.
Ayonontottiia.— La Jonquidre (1751) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., X, 240, 1858. Ayonontout. — Ibid., VI, 733,
1865. Oaiiuiidageh.-Guy Park conf. (1775), it)id..
VIII, 556, 1857. Chanonda.— Crogban (1759) quoted
by Rupp. West. Penn., 146, 1846. Chanondea.—
Croghan (1759) quoted by Proud, Penn., ii, 2%, 1798.
Ohinondada.— Croghan (1760) in Ma«8. Hiflt. Soc.
Coll.,4th8., IX, 261, 1871. Juiiuiidat.-Petcr8 (1760),
ibid., 268. Sunyeadeand.— SraithJ1799) quoted by
Drake, Trag. Wild., 201. 1841. Wyandot Town.—
Hutchins, map in Smith, Bouquet Exped., 1766.
Juraken. Two former villages under
Iroquois rule, one situated on the right
bank of Susquehanna r., just below the
fork, at the site of Sunbury, Pa., the
other on the left bank of the e. branch of
the Su8(]|uehanna. — Popple, Nouv. Carte
Particuli^re de VAm^rique [n. d.].
(j. N. B. H.)
Juris. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, JSan Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Jurlanoca. A former village on the In-
dian trail of N. Florida, 8 ni. e. of Alachua.
Jefferys (Topog. N. Am., chart, 67, 1762)
has here a river joining the St Johns from
the ». w.
Jurnmpa. Given by Rev. J. Cabrflleria
(Hist. San Bernardino Val., 1902) as a
former village, probably Serrano, at River-
side, s. California. The Spanish Rancho
Jurupa shows the same name.
Jutun. A Calusa village on the s. w.
coast of Florida, about 1570.
Futun.— Fonluneda as quoted by Shipp, De Soto
and Fla., 586, 18S1 (misprint). Jutun.— Fontaneda
Memoir (ra. ir)75). Smith trans., 19, ISTvl.
Juyubit. A former rancheria connected
with San Gabriel mission, Los Angi'les
CO., Cal. The locative ending, hit^ shows
the name to l>e Serrano rather than
Gabrielefio.
Jujubit.— I^tham in Proc. Philol. Soc. Lond., vi,
76, 1854. Juyubit.— Duflot de Mofras, Explor., i,
394, 1844.
Kaadnaas-hadai ( QUVad na^as XachV-iy
* dogfish house i)eople ' ). A subdivision
of the Yaku-lanas, a family of the Raven
clan of the Haida, living in s. w. Alaska.
The name is probably derived from that
of a particular house. (j. r. s. )
K'at naa :had'a'i.— Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribt»s
Canada, 2o. 1898. Q!a'ad na'aa Xada'-i.— Swanton,
Cent. Haida, 271, 19a5.
Kaake {QiVwj?). A Salish tribe which
formerly occupied thes. e. coast of Valdez
id. Brit. Col., and spoke the Comox
dialect. It is now extinct. — Boas, MS.,
B. A. P:., 1887.
Kaana. The Corncob clan of the pue-
blo of Taos, N. Mex.
Kiina-tauna.- Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1S99
(<afmo= 'people').
Kaayahnnik. A Squawmish village on
the w. bank of Squawmisht r., Brit. Col. —
Brit. Adm. chart, no. 1917.
Kaaya {Kaa-yu). A pueblo built, oc-
cupied, and abandoned by the Namlnj
tribe prior to the Spanish advent in the
16th century. Situated with Agawano
in the vicinity of the " Santuario," in the
mountains al)out 7 m. e. of the Rio
Grande, on Rio Santa Cruz, Santa Fe co.,
N. Mex. — Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa-
pers, IV, 84, 1892.
Kabahseh ('sturgeon'). A gens of the
Abnaki.
Ka-baA'-seh. — Morgan. Anr. S<k"., 174. ix??. K»-
basa.— J. Dynelev Prince, inf'n, 1905 (modern st
Francis Abnaki form).
Kabaye. A tribe or village formerly in
the country lying l)etween Matagorda bay
and Maligne (Colorado) r., Tex. Joutel
in 1687 obtained the name from the
Ebahamo Indians, who were probably
closely affiliated to Karankawan tribes
living in this region. They are probably
identical with the Cabia of Manzanet.
See Joutel in French, Hist. Coll. La., i,
638
KACHEGABET KADOHADACHO
[B.J
137, 152, 1846, and in Margry, D^c, in,
288, 1878; Gatschet, Karankawa Indians,
23, 25, 1891 . Ct Kiabaha, ( a. c. f, )
CalNuet.~Barcia, Ensayo, 271, 1723. OftUA.— Mas-
sanet (1690), MS., cited by Bolton, infn, 1906.
Kabayes.— Joutel, Jour. Voy., 90, 1719.
Kachegaret A Kaviagmiut village at
Port Clarence, Alaska. — 11th Census,
Alaska, 162, 1893.
Kachgiya ( ' the raven ' ) . A Knaiakho-
tana division residing on Cook inlet,
Alaska. — Richardson, Arctic Exped., i,
406, 1851.
Kachina. A term applied by the Hopi
to ** supernatural beings impersonated by
men wearing masks or by statuettes in
imitation of the same " ; also to the dances
in which these masks figure. See Masks.
Consult Fewkes (1 ) in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
25, 1897; (2) 21st Rep. B. A. E., 3, 1903;
Voth in various pubs. Field Columbian
Museum.
Kachina. The Sacred Dancer phratry
of the Hopi, comprising the Kachina,
Gyazru (Paroquet) Angwusi (Raven),
Sikyachi (Yellow bird), Tawamana
(Black bird), Salabi (Spruce), and Su-
hubi (Cottonwood) clans. They claim
to have come from the Rio Grande, but
lived for some time near the now ruined
Sueblo of Sikyatki.
A-tci'-na.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891
«c = cA). K*-tci'-na nyii-mfi.— Fewkes in Am.
Anthrop., VII, 404, 1894 (nyH-ma = 'phratry').
Kachina. The name of two distinct
Sacred Dancer clans of the Hopi, one be-
longing to the Kachina, the other to the
Honani (Badger) phratry. The Tewa
pueblo of Hano has a similar clan.
Kachina-towa.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix. 351,
1896 (Tewa name: tdwa = • people ' ). Ka-tci-na.—
Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891. Katcina
winwa.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 584, 1900
(wiflvni = *c\&n'). Ea-toi'-na wiin-wu.— Fewkes
in Am. Anthrop., vii, 404, 1894.
Kachinba ('sacred -dancer spring'). A
small ruin at a spring 6 m. from Sikyatki
and about e. of Walpi pueblo, n. e. Ari-
zona. It was one of the stopping places
of the Kachina clan of the Hopi, whence
the name. — Fewkes in 17th Kep. B. A.
E., 589, 1898.
Kachianpal. A former Chumashan vil-
lage connected with Purisima mission,
Santa Barbara co., Cal.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Kachnawaacharege. A former fishing
station of the Onondaga, situated w. of
Oneida lake. At this place Col. Schuyler
held a conference with the Onondaga
chiefs, Apr. 25, 1700. (j. n. b. h.)
Kachnawaaoharege.— Doc. of 1700 in N. Y. Doe.
Col. Hist, IV, 657, 1854. Kachnawarage.— Ibid.,
799. Kagnewagrage.— Ibid., 805.
Kachyayakncli (Katc-ya-yd^-kutc) . A
former Chumashan village at Alazumita,
near San Buenaventura, Ventura co.,
Cal. — Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo-
cab., B. A. E., 1884.
Kadadjans ( Qfadadja^nSy said to be ap-
plied to a person who gets angry with
another and talks of him behind his
back; a backbiter). A town of the Hagi-
lanas of the Haida, on the n. w. end of
Anthony id.. Queen Charlotte ids., Brit.
Col., on which also stood the town of Nin-
stints. — Swanton, Cont. Haida, 277, 1905.
Kadakaman. A Laimon tribe or band
that lived between the old missions of San
Fernando and Santa Rosalia Mul^e,
Lower California. — Taylor in Browne,
Res. Pac. Slope, app., 54, 1869. See Skin
Ignacio de Kadakaman.
Kadishan's Village. A summer settle-
ment of a Stikine chief named Katishan,
on Stikine r. , Alaska; 27 people were there
in 1880.— Petroff in Tenth Census, Alas-
ka, 32, 1884.
Kadohadacho {Ka^dohada/cho, 'real
Caddo, ' * Caddo proper ' ) . A tribe of the
Caddo confederacy, sometimes confused
with the confederacy itself. Their dialect
is closely allied to that of the Hainai and
Anadarko, and is one of the two dialects
dominant to-day among the remnant of
the confederacy.
The Kadohadacho seem to have devel-
oped, as a tribe, on Red r. of Louisiana
and in its immediate vicinity, and not to
have migrated with their kindred to any
distance either n. or s. Their first knowl-
edge 0*1 the white race was in 1541, when
De Soto and his followers stayed with
some of the subtribes on Washita r. and
near the Mississippi. The Spaniards nev-
er penetrated during the 16th and 17th
centuries to their villages in the lake re-
gion of N. w. Louisiana, but the people
came in contact with Spanish soldiers and
settlers from the w. by joining the war
parties of other tribes. Various articles
of European manufacture were brought
home as trophies of war." The tribe was
not unfamiliar with horses, but had not
come into possession of firearms when the
survivors of La Salle's party visited them
on their way n. in 1687. For nearly two
years La Salle had previous direct rela-
tions with tribes of the Caddo confedera-
cy who were living in what is now Texas,
so that when the approach of the French
was reported the visitors were regarded
as friends rather than as strangers. The
chief of the Kadohadacho, with his war-
riors, taking the calumet, went a league
to meet the travelers, and escorted them
with marks of honor to the village on Red
r. On arrival, **the women,*' says Dou-
ay, **as is their wont, washed our heads
and feet in warm water and then placed
us on a platform covered with very neat
white mats. Then followed banquets, the
calumet dance, and other rejoicing day
and night." The friendly relations then
begun with the French were never aban-
doned. A trading post was established
and a flour mill built at their village by
the French early in the 18th century, but
BULL. 30]
KADU8G0 KAE
639
both were given up in a few years owing
to the unsettled state of affaire between the
Spaniards and the French. These dis-
turbances, added to the enmity of tribes
who were being pushed from their homes
by the increasing number of white settlers,
together with the introduction of new dis-
eases, particularly smallpox and measles,
brought about much distress and a great
reduction in the population. During the
last quarter of the 18th centurj^ the Ka-
dohadacho abondoned their villages in
the vicinity of the lakes inx.w. Louisiana,
descended the river, and settled not far
from their kindred, the Nachitoches. By
the beginning of the 19th century their
importance as a distinct tribe was at an
ena; the people became merged with the
other tribes of the confederacy and shared
their misfortune. In customs and cere-
monies they resembled the other Caddo
tribes.
The tribes of the Caddo confederacy, in-
cluding the Kadohadacho, have 10 clans,
accordm^ to Mooney, viz.: Suko (Sun),
Kagahanm (Thunder), I wi (Eagle), Kishi
(Panther) , Oat (Raccoon), Tao ( Beaver),
Kagaih (Crow), Nawotsi (Bear), Tasha
(Wolf), Tanaha (Buffalo). The Buffalo
clan was sometimes called Koho (Alliga-
tor), *' because both animals bellow in
the same way." The members of a group
did not kill the animal from which the
group took its name, except the eagle,
whose feathers were necessary for regalia
and in sacred ceremonies; but the bird
was killed only by certain men initiated
to perform this ceremonial act. The rit-
uals and songs attending the rite of prep-
aration for the killing of eagles have passed
away with their last keeper, and the peo-
ple have now to depend on other tribes for
the needed feathers (see Mooney in 14th
Rep. B. A. E., 1093, 1896). (a. c. f.)
At'-U-wite.— ten Kate, Synonymie, 10, 1SS4 (Co-
manche name). Cadadoquis.— Tonti (1690) in
French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 73, 1846. Cadaquis.— Jou-
tel (1687) in Margry, Ddc, in, 409, 1878. Cadauda-
chot.— Barreiro, Ojeada. 7, 1882. Cadaux.— Sibley,
Hist. Sketches, 136, 1806 (so called by the French).
Gaddo-daoho.— Espinosa (1746) quoted by Busch-
mann, Spuren, d. aztec. Spr., 417, 1854. Oaddoe.—
Nuttall, Jour., 288, 1821. Caddokies.-^^allatin in
Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., il, 116, 1836. Caddoni.—
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 504, 1878. Cad-
doaues.— Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 66, 1806. Cad-
doquiet.— Ibid., 105. Caddoquis.— Brackenridge,
Views of La., 80, 1815. Oaddoi.— Sibley, Hist.
Sketches, 66, 1806. Caddow.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 21, 18th
Cong., 2d sess., table, 5, 1825. Cadeaux.— Sibley,
Hist. Sketches, 162. 1806. Cadloes.— Keane in Stan-
ford, Compend., 504. 1878. Cado.— Long. Exped.
Rocky Mts., II, 310, 1823. Cadodaooho.— Hennepin,
New Discov., pt. 2, 41, 1698. Cadodaohe.— Drake,
Bk. Inds., yi, 1848. Cadodaohos.— De Tlsle, map,
1700. Cadoda[gui<Mi.— Carver, Trav., map, 1778.
Cadodaki8.-Gussefeld, Charte U. S., 1784. Cadoda-
quinons.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 604,
1878. Cadodaquio.-^outel (1687) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., 1, 168, 1846. Cadodaquiou.— Joutel (1687)
In Margry, D<?c., in, 408, 1878. Cadodaquioux.—
P^nicaut (1701) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s.,
1, 78, 1869. Cadodaquis.— Joutel (1687) in Margry,
D^c, III, 409, 1878. Cadoes.— Ker, Trav., 83, 1816.
Oadoi^hM.~Morfi, Mem. de Texas, 1792. Ca-do-
ha-da-cho.— P^nicaut (1701) in French, Hist. Coll.
La., n. s., I, 73, note, 1869. Cadojodacho.— Linares
(1716) in Margry, D^c. vi, 217, 1886. Cadoux.—
Lewis and Clark, Jour., 193. 1H40. Cadrong.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 34. 1857. Oandada-
cho. — Altamira (1714) quoted by Yoakum, Hist.
Texas, I, 386, 1855. Caodaoho.— Tex. State Arch.,
Nov. 17, 1763. Catcho.— Joutel (1687) in Margry,
D6c., Ill, 409, 1878. ChadadoquiB.— Sibley. Hi.st.
Sketches, 134, 1806. Coddoque.— Brackenridge,
View.s of La., 87, 1815. Codogdachos.— Morti quoted
by Shea in Charlevoix. New France, iv, 80, note,
1870. Da'sha-i.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
1092, 1896 (Wichita name). Datcho.— Joutel (1687)
in Margry, T)6c., in, 409, 1878. D«'sa.— Mooney, op.
cit. (another form of Da'sha-i). l^wika.-— Gat-
schet, MS., B. A. E. (Pawnee name, sing.). ]^-
wika.— Ibid. Kaado.— Mollhaasen. Joum. to Pac.,
95. 1858. Ka'-di.— Gatschet, Caddo and Yatassi
MS., B. A. E. ('chief : original name). Kado.—
Bruy^re (1742) in Margry, D4c., vi. 483, 1886. Ka-
dode^o.— Gravler (1701) quoted by Shea, Early
Voy., 149, 1861. KadodakiouB.— Bruydre (1742) in
Margry. D6c., vi, 474, 1886. Eadodaquious.— Ibid.,
483. Ka'doh&da'oho.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A.E.,
1092. 1896 (own name). Ka-ldx-la'-tce.— ten Kate,
Synonymie, 11, 1884 (Choctaw form). Kalu-vnad-
Bhu.— Gatschet, Tonkawa MS., B. A. E. (Ton-
kawa form). Karo-xn<^Bhu.— Ibid. Easseya. —
Ibid. (Tonkawa name). Kaaseye'-i.— Ibid. (Ton-
kawa name). Kul-hiil-atsX. — Gravson. MS. vcK'ab.,
B. A. E.. 1885 (Creek name), lia'sc'p.— Mooney
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1092, 1896 ('pierced nose':
Kiowa name). M68i.— ten Kate, Reizen in N.
Am., 375, 1885 (Kiowa name). Ni'ris-h&ri's-
ki'riki.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1092, 1896
(another Wichita name). 6ta'8-ita'xiiuw'.— Ibid,
(•pierced-nose people': Cheyenne name), ftua-
dodaqueeg.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 128, 1816.
Quadodaquious.— Le Page du Pratz, Hist. La., map,
1758. duodadiquio.— Barcia, Ensayo, 288, 1723.
Soudaye.— La Harpe (1722) in Margry, D4c., vi,
363, 1886 (Fr. form of Quapaw name). 8u'-d^.—
Dorsey, Kwapa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1891 (Quapaw
name). Tarn 'banfa.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B.
A. E., 1092, 1896 (' pierced-nose people': Arapaho
name). Tani'banjdiina.— Ibid. Tani'batha.— Ibid.
Taahaah.— Gatschet, Wichita MS., B. A. E. (Wich-
ita name). Tawitskash.— Ibid. (Wichita name
fora Caddo). U-tai-si'-ta.— ten Kate, Synonymie,
9, 1884 ('pierced noses': Cheyenne name). TJta-
sSta.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Cheyenne name).
Witune.— Gatschet; Comanche MS.vocab.,B.A.E.,
9, 1884 (Comanche name).
Kadnsgp {Qfd^dAsgo). A Haida town
or camp on Louise id., Queen Charlotte
group, Brit. Col., at the mouth of a
creek bearing the same name, which flows
into Cumshewa inlet from the s. The
family which occupied it came to be called
Kadusgo-kegawai (* those born at Kadus-
go').— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 278, 1905.
Kadnsgo-kegawai ( Qfd^dAsgo qe^gawa-i,
* those born at Kadusgo creek ' ) . A fam-
ily belonging to the Raven clan of the
Haida, residing in the town of Kloo,
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. The
name was derived from that of an old
camping place on the n. side of Louise id. ,
and the people claimed descent from the
Hl^ahetgu-lanas of Old Gold Harbor; but
until recent years they occupied a low posi-
tion socially. At present they form one
of the most numerous of the surviving
family groups of the tribe. (.i. r. s. )
K''ada«ke'e'owai.— Boas, r2th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Canada, 25, 1898. Q!a'dA8go qe'gawa-i. — Swanton,
Cont. Haida, 269. 1905. ' ^
Kae ( Qd4y ' sea-lion town ' ) . A former
Haida town on Skotsgai bay, above Skide-
6i0
KAEKIBI KAHLCHANEDI
[b. a.
gate, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It
wa8 occupied by the Kaiahl-lanas, who
took their name from the place before
they moved to Kaisun. (j. r. s.)
Kaekibi. A traditionary pueblo of the
Asa people of the Hopi, who were of Tewa
origin; situated on the Rio Chama, N.
Mex. , near the present Abiquiu. — Stephen
in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 30, 1891.
Kaersok. An Eskimo village and trad-
ing post in w. Greenland, lat. 72° 39''. —
Meddelelser om Gronland, viii, map, 1 889.
Kaffetalaya ( Kaji-talaia, ' sa^ saf ras
thicket*). A former Choctaw town on
Owl cr., Neshoba co.. Miss. The name
was extended to cover a large district in
that territory. — Halbert in Miss. Hist.
Soc. Pub., VI, 427, 1902.
Cofetalaya.— Gatuchet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 108,
1884. Coffadeliah.— West Florida map, ca. 1776.
Kaffetalaya.— Romans, Florida, map, 1775.
Kagahanin (Ka^gdhdnln). The Thun-
der clan of the Caddo. — Moonev in 14th
Rep. B. A. E., 1093, 1896.
Kagaih {Ka^gaih). The Crow clan of
the Caddo.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A.E.,
1093, 1896.
Kagakwisawag (Kagiikwisuwag^^ 'they
go by the name of pigeon-hawk'). A
Thunder gens of the Sauk and Foxes.
Kami'kwi8uwafr».—Wm. Jones, infn, 1906. Ki-k4-
kwis'-so-uk.— Alorgan, Anc. Soc, 170, 1877.
Kaganhittan (*sun-house people').
Given by Boas as a social group of the
Tlingit at Wrangell, Alaska, but it is
actually only the name of the people of
a house belonging to the Kiksadi, q. v.
GAgi'nhit tan.— Swan ton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904.
E'agan hit tan.— Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes of
Can., 25, 1889.
Kagials-kegawai (Qd^gials qe^gawa-%
* those born at Kagials ' ) . An important
family of the Raven clan of the Haida,
which derives its name from a reef near
Lawn hill, at the mouth of Skidegate in-
let. Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.,
where some of the people formerly lived.
A second name was l3qe'nol-la''nas, * peo-
ple of [the town of] Cumshewa', whence
one portion of the Kagials-kegawai is
said to have moved. Their own town
was Skedans, and their chief \yas one
of the most influential on the islands.
Subdivisions of the family were the
Kila-haidagai and Kogaahl-lanas, the
latter being of low social rank. The
Kagials-kegawai claim to have sprung
from a woman who floated ashore at Hot
Springs id. in a cockleshell. They were
cfcsely connected with the Tadji-lanas,
who appear to have originated in the same
locality. (j. R. s.)
Kagyalsk-e'owai.— Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 24, 1898. i^e'nol la'nas.— Swan ton, Cont.
Haida, 269, 1905. Oa'gialaqe'gawa-i.— Ibid. Tlki-
notl la'nas.— Boas, op. eit.
Kagokakat A village of the Ingalik
division of the Kaiyuhkhotana, at the
mouth of Medicine cr., n. bank of Yukon
r., Alaska; pop. 9 in 1843, 115 in 1880.
Kagokhakat.— Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th
8., XX, map, 1850. Kakagokhakat.— Zagoskin
quoted by Petrofif in 10th Census, Alaska, 37, 1884.
Khatnototttze.— Petroflf, ibid., 12.
Kagoaghsage ( Seneca : Kakoft^sd^-gey * at
false-face place' ). The Iroquois name of
a Shawnee village, known also as Akon-
wamge (Akonwara'-ge, the Mohawk
equivalent), in 1774, apparently in Ohio
or w. Pa. ( J. N. B. H. )
Agon waraffe.— Johnson Hall conf. (1774) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., VIII, 426,- '*'"
Kagoughsage.— Ibid.
, V II 1, 42f), 1857. Akonwarage.— Ibid.
KagBorsaak. An Eskimo village and
trading post in w. Greenland, lat. 73° b\
Kagensauk.— Science, XI, 259,1888. Kagsersuak.—
Meddelelser- om Gronland, viii, map, 1889. Ka-
sarsoak.— Kane, Arct. Explor., ii, 293, 1863.
Kagayak. A Kaniagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on the s. w. coast of Kodiak id.,
Alaska; pop. 109 in 1880, 112 in 1890.
Alsentia. — Coast Surv. map, 1898. Kaguiak. —
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 29, 1884. Xagu-
yak.~Coast Surv. map, 11th Census, Alaska, 1893.
Kaaia^-mittt. — Russ.-Am. Co. map, 1849. Ka-
niagmjut. — Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 142, map;
1855. Eawigagngut.— Ibid.
Kagniyak. A Kaniagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on Shelikof strait, Alaska; pop. 85 in
1890.
Douglas.— 11th Census, Alaska, map, 1893. Kaia-
iak.— Tebenkof (1849) quoted by Baker, Geog.
Diet. Alaska, 1902. Zaiayakak.— Lutke (1835),
quoted , ibid . Kayayak.— (;oast Surv. charts prior
to 1884, quoted, ibid.
Kagwantan (* burnt [house] people* ) . A
large and important Tlingit division at
Sitka, Chilkat, Huna, and Yakutat, Alas-
ka, being especially strong at the two first-
mentioned places. It belongs to the Wolf
phratry.
Kagontaa.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 116, 118, 1885.
Ea'gwantan.— Swan ton, field notes, 1904, B. A, £.
Kar-gwan-ton. — Emmons in Mem. Am. Mus.Nat.
Hist., Ill, pi. vi, 1903. Xokvontan.— Lutke, Voy.
Autour du Monde, l, 195, 1835. XoukhontanB.—
Ibid.
Kahabi (Ka-ha'-hi), The Willow clan
of the Pakab (Reed) phratry of the
Hopi.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E.,
39, 1891.
Kahansak. Marked as a Delaware
tribe on the e. bank of lower Delaware
r., about Low cr., Cumberland co., N. J.,
on Herrman's map ( 1670) in Maps to Ac-
company the Report of the Commission-
ers on the Boundary line between Vir-
ginia and Maryland, 1873.
Kahendohon (Kd,'h^7ldo''hon'). A for-
mer Iroquois village belonging to the
Two-clans of the Turtle. The locality is
not known. (j. n. b. h. )
Xahhendohhon.— Hale, Iroquois Book of Rites,
118, 1883.— Kah ken dob hon.— Ibid., 119.
Kakesarahera ('a rotten log lying on
the top of it. ' — Hewitt) . A Seneca village
in New York in 1691 ; location unknown. —
Markham (1691) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., Ill, 805, 1853.
Kak-ge-ga-gah-bowk. See Copway.
Kakl. The Forehead clan of the Hopi,
represented in their pueblo of Mishong-
novi.
Kahl.— Dorsey and Voth, Mishongnovi Cere-
monies, 176. 1902. Kal-namu.— Voth, Trad, of the
Hopi, 68, 1905.
Kahlchanedi {Q! AtlcAne^ diy 'people of
Kahlchan r.'). An extinct Thngit divi-
BULL. 30]
KAHLCHATLAN — KAIBAB
641
gion formerly living at Kake, Alaska. It
was of the Raven phratry. ( j. r. s. )
Kahlehatlan ( Qa^ttcaLfan). A town oc-
cupied by the Stikine before moving to
the present site of Wraneell. Al&'tka, and
oonseqaently called Old Wrangell by the
whites. (j. R. 8. )
Kahlgnihlgahet-gitiiiai ( QaiguV-fqa'xet
gtttna^-if *the Pebble-town GitKns living
on the side of the town up the inlet').
A small branch of a Haida family called
Higahet-ffitinai living on the w. coast of
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. — Swan-
ton, Cont. Haida, 284, 1905.
Kahligua-haidagai ( Qafiignaxa^-idAga-i^
'people linng at the end of the town up
the inlet * ) . A subdivision of the Stawas-
haidagai, a family of the Ka^le clan of
the Haida in^Brit. Col., so named from
the position of their houses in the town. —
Swanton, Cont Haida, 273, 1905.
Kahmetahwungagmna (Make of tlie
sandy waters. * — Warren ) . The Chippewa
name of Sandy lake, on the upper Missis-
sippi r. , in Cass co. , Minn. The Chippewa
built a village on this lake about 1730,
which was their first settlement on the
headwaters of the Mississippi. The band
residing here was commonly known as
the Sandy I^ke band. Some of them
removed about 1807 to Pembina r. at the
persuasion of the Northwest Fur Com-
pany, (j. M.)
Ohippewayt of Sand Lake. —Lewis and Clark. Trav-
els, *i&, 1806. Kah-me-tah-wunc-a-guma. — Warren
(WW) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll.. v, 177. 1885.
iDuni tiw^ngagamag.— Wm. Jones, inf'n, 19()6 (cor-
rect form). Sandy Lake Indians.— Morse, Rep. to
Sec. War, 33, 1K22.
Kahmitoiks (* buffalo dung'). A di-
vision of the Piegan tribe of the Siksika.
Buffalo Dunc.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Talcs,
225. 1892. Kah'-mi-taiks.— Ibid., 209.
Kahmint. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo
village in the Kuskokwim district, Alaska;
pop. 40in 18m— nth Census, Alaska, 164,
1893.
Kahra (*wild rice*). One of the two
modem divisions of the Sisseton Sioux.
They had no permanent residence, but
frequently visited L. Traverse, Minn.,
their hunting grounds being on Red r.
of the North. Long (Exped. St Peters
R., I, 378, 1824) said that they dwelt in
fine skin tipis, the skins being well pre-
pared and handsomely painted.
Oane.— Drake. Book Inds.. vi. 1848 (identical?).
Oarels.— Domenech, Deserts of N.Am., 1,440,1860
(identical?). Carrees.— Pike, Trav., 127, 1811.
OawTM.— Mcintosh, Origin of N. Am. Inds., 202,
1868. Oaw-rse.— Lewis and Clark, DIhcov., 84, 1806.
LaeTravwrsebaufL— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859.102,1860.
Vorth SoMaetoB.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 497. 1839. Sussi-
tonga of Koohe Blanohe.— Pike. Trav., 127. 1811.
ir«p«r Baoartoans.— Sibley (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc.
laT, pt 2, 82d Cong., 2d sess.. 9. 1858.
Xahtai A former Clallam village at
Port Townsend, Wash., in territory for-
merly occnpied by the Chemakmh.
Kahti— Oibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i. 429, 1855.
Xi-tai.— Gibbs, Clallam and Lummi, 20, 1863.
BuU. 30—05 il
Kai ( * willows '). A Navaho clan. Cf.
Kiiihat'm.
KiU-ffine —Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
103, 1890 (^'people of the willows' ). Kaidlne'.—
Matthews, Navaho Lt^gt'nd.s, 30, 1897.
Kaiachim. A former Porno village in
Russian r. valley, Sonoma co., Cal.
Kajatsohim.— Wrangell. Ethnog. Nachr., 80, 1839.
Kaiahl-lanas (Qa^ -mi W iias^ * people of
sea-lion town*). A family of the Kagle
clan of the Haida, m called from the town
which they formerly occupied on Skots-
gai bay, near Skidegate, Queen Charlotte
id.s., Brit. Col. After ditliculties with
their neighbors they moved t^> the w.
coast, where they built the town of Kai-
sun. The rennianl is now at Skidegate.
They claimed commimity of origin with
the Kona-kejrawai, Djigiiaahl-lanas, and
Stawas-haida^i. (j. r. h. )
Kai'^tl la'naa.— Boas in 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can.. 24. isy8. (U'-ial la'naa.— Swanton, Cont.
IlHida. ^71. 1905. QaMta la'naa.— lbi<l.
Kaiak, kayak. The men's boat of the
Eskimo of n.e. North America, from qnjaq
(y=(Tennan eh), the name in the eastern
dialects of the Eskimo language. See
Boah. (\, V. c.)
Kaiakak. A village of the Ingalik divi-
sion of the Kaiyuhkhotana, with 184 na-
tives in 1880, on the w. bank of Yukon
r., Alaska. — Petroff in lOth Census,
Alaska, 12, 1884.
Kaiaksekawik ('plai-e for making kai-
aks '). A Utukaniiut village on the n. side
of Icy cai)0, Alaska.
Kaiakaekawik.— Eleventh CensiLs, Alaska, 162,
1S98. Kayakshigvikg.— Zagoi«kin, Descr. Russ.
Vo^. in Am., pt. 1. 74, 1H47.
Kaialigmint. An Eskimo trilx* x. of the
Kuskwogmiut, extending on the main-
land from Kuguktik r. to C. Romanzof,
Alaska. In the lakes and streams of the
tundra they obtain an abundant supply
of fresh fish at the season when the coast
nati ves often hunger. They art) therefore
a more vij':orou8 people, living still in j)rim-
itive simplicity. Their villages are Aei-
ukchuk, Askinuk, Chininak, Kaialik, Ka-
llukluk, Kashi^alak, Kushunuk, Kvigat-
luk, Nuloktolok, Nunvogulukhluguk,
Sfa^anuk, Ukak, I'^kuk, and Unakagak.
Kaialigamut— Nelson in ISth Rep.B. A. E., map,
1899. Kai-a-lig-mut.— Dall in Proc. Am. A. A. S.,
XXXIV, 18, 1886.
Kaialik. A Kaialigmint Eskimo village
in the Yukon delta near Azun r., Alaska;
pop. 100 in 1880, 157 in 1890.
kauOiffumiut.- Nelson (1868) quoted by Baker,
Ueog. Diet. Alaska. 1902. Kailwigamiut—Eleventh
Census. Alaska, 164, 1893. Kialigamint.- Ibid., 110.
Kaibab (prob. *on the mountain,' from
kaih or knUta, * mountain,* and the locative
ending ah or Ihi. — Kroeber). A division
of the Paiute, numbering 171 in 1873,
when thev were in the vicinity of Kanab,
s. w. Utah. Powell gave their name to
the Kaibab plateau, n. w. Ariz. In 1903
their numlx^r was given as 140, of which
30 were at Cedar City, Utah, and 110
642
KAIDATOIABIE KAIME
[ B. A. E.
under a special agent. In 1905 there were
109 reported, not under an agent.
Kai-bab-bit— Ind. Aff. Rep. 251, 1877. Kaibabita.—
Ingalls in H. R. Ex. Doer. 66, 42d C!ong., 3d seas., 2,
1873. Kaivavwit— Powell in Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1873,
50, 1874. Kai-vwav-uai Nu-ints.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 42,
43d Cong., l8t sess., 15, 1874.
Kaidatoiabie (Ka i- da-toi-ab-ie ) . A Pavi-
otso tribe of 6 bands formerly livine in
N. E. Nevada; ix)p. 425 in 1873. — Powell in
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 52, 1874.
Kaidjn (Qai^diu, *songg-of-victory
town'). A Haida town on a point op-
posite Danger rocks, Moresby id.. Queen
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col., occupied by
the Tadji-lanas. The Kaidju-kegawai,
a subdivision of the Tadji-lanas, took its
name from this town. — Swanton, Cont.
Haida, 277, 1905.
Kaidjn. A Haida town in Hewlett bay,
on the E. coa.st of Moresby id., Qneen
Charlotte ids. Brit. Col. It was occu-
pied by the Kas-lanas. — Swanton, Cont.
Haida, 277, 1905.
Kaidjndal (Qai^djndal). A former
Haida town on ^loresby id., opposite
Hot Spring id., Quet»n Charlotte group,
Brit. Col. It was occupied by the Hul-
danggats. — Swanton, Cont. Haida, 278,
1905.
Kaidj n-kegawai ( QaVdju qe^gama-i^
* those born at Songs-of-victory town M .
A subdivision of the Tadji-lanas, a family
belonging to the Gunghet-haidagai (Nin-
stints people) of the Haida of British
Columbia. — Swanton, Cont. Haida, 269,
1905.
Kaigani ( K.'aigd^ni) . A division of the
Haida, living in Alaska. Their name is
derived from that of a camping place or
summer settlement where they were ac-
customed to assemble to meet incoming
vesels and to trade with the whites. The
Kaigani emigrated from the n. w. end of
Queen Charlotte ids. between 150 and 200
years ago, drove the Tlingit (Koluschan)
from the s. end of Prince of Wales id.,
and took possession of their towns. The
most important of these settlements
were Sukwan, Klinkwan, Howkan, and
Kasaan, which bear their old Tlingit
names. The last three are still inhab-
ited. Like many Tlingit tribes, but un-
like other Haida, the Kaigani subdivi-
sions often took their names from the
name given to some individual house.
About 1840 the population was estimated
at 1,735. According to Petroff's report
(10th Census, Alaska) they numbered
788 in 1880; in 1890 the population waa
given as 391 . Their present number prob-
ably does not exceed 300. ( j. r. s. )
Kaiaganies.— Hall eckj 1869) in Morris, Resources
of Alaska, 67, 1879. Kaigan.— Terry in Rep. Sec.
War, 1, 40, 186^-69. Kaijani.—Dawson, Queen Char-
lotte Ids., 104b, 1880. Kegarnie.— Dunn, Hist. Ore-
gon, 281, 1844. Kiganis.— Duflot de Mofras, Ore-
gon, 1, 335, 336, 1844. Kigarnee.— Ludewig, Aborig.
Lang. America. 157, 1860. Eigenes.— Am. Pioneer,
II. 189. 1843. Kygani.— Dall in Proc. A. A. A. S.,
269, 1869. Kyganie*.— Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc.
ly.— Gibbs after Anderson
Kjrgargey. — Schoolcraft,
(after Work, 1836-41).
Lond.,1,219,1841. Ky
in Hist. Mag., 74, 18(
Ind. Tribes, v, 489, 1855 , . ,
Kvgamey.— Kane, Wand. N. A., app., 1860 (after
Kaigani. An important Haida summer
town or camping place at the s. e. end
of Dall id., 8. w. Alaska. Most of the
families which moved from the Queen
Charlotte ids. formerly gathered here to
meet trading vessels, for which reason
they came to be known to the whites as
Kaigani. The dominant family in this
town is said to have been the Yaku-
lanas. (.i. r. s.)
Kaig^wn (Kiowa pro]ier). The oldest |
tribal division of the Kiowa, from which (
the tribe derives its name. To it be- ]
longs the keeping of the medicine tipi,
in which is the grand medicine of the
tribe. — Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
1079, 1896.
Kaihatin ('willow*). A clan or Imnd"
of the Coyotero and also of the Pinaleilo
Apache at San Carlos and Ft Apache
agencies, Ariz.; coordinate with the Kai
clan of the Navaho.
Kayjatin.— Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ni,ir2,
1890. Kay-tzen-Iin.— Ibid.
Kaiihl-ltinM (Qai-H Wnas). A subdi-
vision of the Dostlan-lnagai, a family
group of the Haida, named from a camp-
ing place on the w. coast of Queen Char-
lotte ids., Brit. Col. (j. r. 8. )
Kailaidshi. A former Upper Creek town
in the central district, on a creek of the
same name, which joins Oakjoy cr., a w.
tributary of Tallapoosa r. probably in the
N. w. part of the present Elmore co., Ala.
Atchinahatchi and Hatch ichapa were
dependent villages of this town, the name
of which probably has reference to a war-
rior's head-dress. (a. s. g.)
Caileedjee.— Robin, Vov., ii, map, 1807. Cielurees. —
Woodward, Reminiscences, 83, 1859. Ka-iliudshi.—
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 133, 1884. Kealee-
gee*.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1779), 69, 1837. Keil«ah.—
H. R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong.. 1st ses8.,318, 1836.
Kialajaha.— Simpson (1836) in H. R. Doc. 80,27th
Cong., 3d sess.. 50, 1843. Eialeohies.— H. R. E>%.
Doc. 276, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 124, 1836. Kialee-
geea.— U. S. Ind. Treaties (1779). 69, 1837. Kialega.—
Crawford (1836) in H. R. Doc. 274,25th C^ng., 2d
sess., 24, 1838. Kialgie.-Shorter (1835) in H. R.
Doc. 452, 25th Cong.. 2d sess., 65, 1838. KiaU-
agea.— Ore (1792) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aflf., I,
274, 1832. KUliga'a.— Campbell (1836) in H. R.
Doc. 274. 25th Cong.. 2d sess., 20, 1838. Kialige.—
Creek paper (1836) in H. R. Rep. 87, 81st Cong.,
2d sess.. 122, 1851. KiaUgee.— H. R. Doc. 274, 25th
Cong., 2d sess., 149, 1838. Ki-a-li-jee.— Hawkins
(1799), Sketch, 48, 1848. KioUohee.— Sen. Ex. Doc.
425, 24th Cong., 1st sess., 181, 1836. Kiliga.— Gat-
schet. Creek Migr. Leg., i, 133, 1884 (an early
form). Killeegko.— Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, v, 262, 1855. Kiolege.— Bartram ( 1778),
Travels. 462, 1791. Kuyalegee*.— U. S. Ind. Treat.
Kailaidshi. A town of the Creek Nation
on Canadian r., e. of Hilabi, Okla.
Ka-ila'idahi.-Oatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., n, 185,
1888.
Kaime (Kai-me^ ) . A Pomo tribe occupy-
ing Russian r. valley, Cal., from Clover-
BULL. 301
KAINAH — KAIYUHKHOTANA
643
dale to Greyeerville. — Powers in Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., iii, 183, 1877.
Kainah (Ah-kai-iiahy *many chiefs*,
nrom a-kai-im * ma,ny\ ni^-7Kih * chiefs').
A division of the Siksika (q. v. ), or Black-
feet, now living on a reservation under
the Blood asiency in Alberta, Canada,
between Belly and St ^lary rs. The
'sabtribes or bands are Ahkaiksuiniks,
Ahkaipokaks, Ahkotashiks, Ahkwonist-
sists, Anepo, Apikaiyiks, Aputosikainah,
Inuhksoyistamiks, Isisokasimiks, Istei-
kainah, Maineoya, Nitikskiks, Saksinah-
mahyiks, Siksahpuniks, and Siksinokaks.
According to the Report of the Commis-
sioner of Indian Affairs for 1858, there
were then 300 tipis and 2,400 jwrsons.
In 1904 there were 1,196 i>er8ons on the
reservation, of whom 95S were claa^ed as
pagans.
Bloodies.~Hin<1, Red R. Exped.. 157, 1^^ (so
called by hal f-brce<ls) . Blood Indiana.— Writer of
1786 in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., in, 21, 1794.
Blood People. — Morgan, Con.sang. and Aftln., 289.
1871. Bint Indianer.— Walch, map, IHa'S ((ier-
man fonn). Ede-but-«ay.— Anon. Crow MS.
vocab.. B. A. E. (Crow name). Gens duSanc.—
Duflot de Mofras, Expl.. Ii, 342, 1844. Indiena
du Sane.— Ibid., 339. Kaenna.— Maximilian,
Travels, 245, 1843. Kahna.— Ibid. Kai'-e-na.—
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 256, 1862.
Kauak— Browne in Beach, Ind. Miscel.. 81, 1877.
Kai'-na.— Clark Wi.ssler, inf n, 1905 (Piegan dia-
lectic form). Kai'nau.— TinLs, Blackfoot Gram,
and Diet., 113, 1889 (Siksika name). Kainos'-
koon.— Franklin, Joum. Polar Sea, i, 170. 1824
(own name). Kam'-ne.— Hayden, op. cit., 402
(Crow name). Ke'na.— Hale, Ethnol. and Philol.,
219, 1846 (sing., Keneku'n). Ki-na.— Morgan,
Consang. and Affin., 289, 1871 (trans.: 'high
minded people V). Kine-ne-ai-koon.— Henrj-, M8.
vocab., 1808. Ki'-no.— Morgan, An<'. 8(K'., 171,
1877. Keethoo-thinyoowuo.—Franklin, Joum. Po-
larSea, i, 170. 1824. we'-wi-ca-»a.— Cook, Yankton
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (Yankton name).
Kaiflun ((^i^ttttn), A former Ilaida
town on the n. w. coast of Moresby id.,
Queen Charlotte grout), Brit. Col. It
belonged to the Kaiahl-lanas, who set-
tled there after moving from Skidegate
inlet, but l)efore that time the Kas-lanas
are said to have occupied it. By the
whites Kaisun was sometimes called Gold
Harbor, or, to distinguish it from the town
afterward built on Maude id. by the
west-coast people, Old Gold Harbor; but
this term is properly applicable to Skai-
to, acamponGold Harbor, itself occupied
by Haida from all parts of the Queen
Charlotte ids. during the time of the
gold excitement. Kaisun is the Kish-a-
win of John Work's list, which was ac-
credited by him with 18 houses and 329
people in 183(M1. Since the old people
can still remember 17 houses, Work's
figures would appear to be trustworthy.
The few survivors of Kaisun now live at
Skidegate. (j. r. s.)
Kaidran.— DawHon, Q. Charlotte Ids., 168, 1880.
X'aiVun.— Boas, Twelfth Report N. W. Tribes
Canada, 24, 1880. KaUwun Haade.— Harrison in
Ppoc. and Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., see. ii, 126,
1896. Barii-a-win.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v,
489, 1855 (after Work, 18Ji6-41). Qai'sun.— Swan-
ton, Cont. Haida. 287. 1905.
Kaiyannngayidnkw ( Kai-va-imng-ai'^'i'
(lukw. ) A oand of the Paviotso, popu-
larly called Paiute, formerly living in
Surprise vallev, n. e. Cal. — Powell, Pav-
iotso MS., B. A. K., 1881.
Kaiyan ('head')- A name applied by
all the Porno al)out Clear lake to those
living al)Out the n. end of the lake, in
Upper Ijake and Bachelor valleys, Lake
CO., Cal. (s. A. B.)
Kaiynhkhotana. The westernmost Ath-
apascan tribe of Alaska, living on the
banks of Yukon r. l)etwet»n Anvik and
Koyukuk rs. They have been 8Ui)plant-
ed in the w. part of their old habitat by
Kskimo. Since hostilities l)etween them
and the Eskimo have ceased they have
l)ecome assiinilattnl with the latter, a<lopt-
ing a fish diet and differing from all tWir
congeners in acijuiring a liking for oil.
The tribe is distinguished from its neigh-
bors also by its language, they l)eing un-
able to converse with the Kutchin. Tlie
southernmost settlements subsist princi-
pally by fishing and trading. They dry
fish and are very expert in making woo<l-
en ware and strong birch canoes. Those
of upper Yukon, Shageluk, and Kusko-
kwim rs. combine hunting with these pur-
suits. The Kaiynhkhotana build jwrma-
nent villages which they sometimes leave
during the summer. The pointed hunt-
ing shirts formerly worn have been largely
replaced by the clothing of the whites.
They do not appear to have adoptini a to-
temic system, and follow the Eskimo cus-
tom of giving elaborate feasts. Zagoskin
in 1844 estimated their population at 923.
Petroff (lOth Census, Alaska, 1884) gave
their numl)er as 805 on the Yukon and 148
on the Kuskokwim. Allen (Report on
Alaska, 1 887 ) gave the population as alK>ut
1,300. The 1 1th Census (158, 1893) gives
the population of the Yukon district as
753 ana of the Kuskokwim as 386; total,
1, 139. The following are Kaiynhkhotana
villages, exclusive of those of the Jiw:el-
nute division: Anvik, Chagvagchat, Chi-
nik, Iktigalik, Innoka, Ivan, Kagokakat,
Kaiakak, Kaltag, Khaigamute, Kho-
foltlinde, Khulikakat, Khunanilinde,
llamaskwaltin, Koserefski, Kunkhogli-
ak, Kutul, Ix)fka, Nulato, Nunakhtaga-
mut, Paltchikatno, Taguta, Tanakot, Te-
rentief, Tigshelde,Tutago, T^lukakhotana,
and Wolasatux. The local divisions were
Ingalik, Inkalich, Jupelnute, Kaiynhkho-
tana, Nulato, Takaiak, Tlegonkhotana,
Taivanyanokhotana, and Ulukakhotana.
Danl.— Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 361,
1891. IngalilB.— Dall in Proc. Am. A. A. S., xvni,
270, 1870. Kaeyah-Khatana.~Bancrof t, Nat. Races.
I, 133, 1874. Kaiyuihkatana.— Ibid., 148, 1882.
Kaiyali^o.tana.— Dall, Alaska. 431^870. Kidyu-
khotana.~AlIen, Rep.. 143, 1887. Kkpayon-Kont-
tinoB.—Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 361,
644
KAIYUHKHOTANA KAKINONBA
[B. a. £.
1891 ('people of the willows'). Lowlmndert.—
Dall in Proc. Am. A. A. S., xviii, 2^0, 1870.
KaijniliUiotana. A division of the Kai-
yuhkhotana, living on Kaiyuh r. Their
village was Kutul.
KainUhotana.— PetrofF in 10th CeriHUs, AIa.ska, 161,
1884 (misprint). Kaiy&k'a-kho-tan'a.— Dall in
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, '26, 1K77.
Kaiynwantsnnitthai ( * rocky land * ) . A
former Kuitsh village on lower Umpqua
r., Oreg.
Eai'-yfi-wun-ts'n'-nXt t*9ai\ — Dorscy in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore. III. '231, 1890.
Kajeohadi. (Kd-jech-adi), Given by
Krause (Tlinkit-Ind., 116, 1885) as a
Tlingit division living in the town of
Chilkoot, Alaska. Unidentified.
Kiyienatroene (* eagle people.' — Hew-
itt). Oneof the6 '^rastles" of theOttawa
near JVIi^l^iimackinftc, Mich., in 1723. —
Albany eonf. (1723yin"N, Y. Doc. Col.
Hist;, v, 693, 1855.
Kaka (* crows'). A band or society of
the Arikara.
Crows.— Oulbertwm in Bniithson. Rep. 1H50, 143,
1851. Ka-ka'.— Hayden, KthnoK. and Philol., a57,
1«02.
Kakagshe {Ka-kw/-Hhe^ *crow'). A
gens of the Potawat^)mi. — Morgan, Anc.
Soc., 167, 1877.
Kakake ( KakAke, ' crow' ) . A subphratry
or gens of the Menominee. — Hoffman in
14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. i, 42, 1896.
Kakake. Given as the Pigeon-hawk
gens of the Chipi)ewa, but really the
Kaven (Kagigi) gens of that tribe. '
Kagagi.— Wm. Jones, inf'n, 1906. Ka-kaik.— Tan-
ner, Narr., 314, 1830 (*hen hawk'). Ka-kake'.—
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166, 1H77 ('pigeon hawk').
Kakanatzatia. A former village of the
Sia (q. V. ), opposite the present 8ia pueblo,
on Jemez r., n. central N. Mex. Accord-
ing to Sia tradition, war broke out be-
tween the inhabitants of this village and
those of Kohasaya, the former being
driven southward by an attempt of the
latter to burn their pueblo, the Kohasaya
afterward moving to the site of Sia. It
is not improbable that one of the two
pueblos mentioned was oc(;upied at the
time of Espejo's visit in 1583, and thus
formed one of the villages of his province
of I^mames.
Ka-kan A-tsa Tia.— Bandelier 'hi Arch. Inst. Pa-
pers, IV, 198, 1892.
Kakapoya ( * inside fat. ' — Moipm) .
Given as a division of the Piegan tribe of
the Siksika. Perhaps the same as Inuk-
sikahkopwaiks, q. v.
Inside Pat— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 171. 1877. Ka-ka'-
po-ya. — Ibid.
Kakawatilikya {(/d^^qnvmtilik'a). A
gensoftheT8awatenok,aKwakiutl tribe. —
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 331, 1897.
Kake. A Tlingit tribe on Kupreanof
id., Alaska. The designation is often
extended to include the people of Kuiu
and Sumdum (q. v.). Their winter vil-
lage is Kcke, near Hamilton harbor.
jKuin people,
are
Pop., including probably the Kuinpeo]
234 in 1890. Their social divisions
Kahlchanedi (extinct), Katchadi, Xesadi,
Sakutenedi, Shunkukedi, Tsaguedi,
Tanedi, and Was-hinedi. (j. r. s.)
Oaket.— Seward, Speeches on Alaska, 5, 1869. Ka-
acka.— Crosbie in H. R. Ex. Doc. 77, »»th. Cong.,
Ist sess., 8. 1860. Kake.— Kane, Wand, in N. A.,
app., 1869. Xakus.— Halleck in Rep. Sec. War, pt.
1. 38, m\H. Kates.— Colyer (Louthan) in Ind. Aff.
Rep., 573. 1870. Kaykovtkie— Elliott, (Jond. Aff.
Ala.ska, 227, ^875 (transliterated from Veniam-
inoff). Kehk.—Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 32,
18»l. Kohons.— 8cott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 313, 1868
(name on Russian charts). Kek.— Tikhroenieff,
Russ. Am. Co., n, 341, 1863. Kekch-kdn.— Krause,
Tlinkit Ind., 120, 1885. Kekuvskoe.— Veniaminoff.
Zapiski, ii, pt. 3, 30^840. Keq!— Swanton, field
notes, B. A. E.,1904. taiekhu.— H()lmberg,Ethnog.
Skizz., map, 1855. Kyacka.— Scott in Ind. Aff.Rep.,
314, 1868. Rat tribe.— Mahony (1869) in Sen. Ex.
Do<'. 68, 41st Cong., 2d si^ss., 20, 1870.
Kake. The modern name of the village
of the Kake Indians on the n. w. coast of
Kupreanof id., Alaska; pop. 234 in 1890.
Keq!.— Swanton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904. Kluk-
wan.— Petroff in Tenth Census, Alaska, 32, 1884.
8 IxkABAxsa'ni.— Swanton. op. cit. (said to be
proper name of the town, perhaps meaning * from
a black bear town').
Kake^ha ('making a grating noise').
A division of the Brule Teton Sioux.
Kake^.— Dorsey (after Cleveland) in 15th Rep.
B. A. E., 219, 1H97. Kak'exa.- Ibid.
Kakekt (Xdx^eqi). An extinct SaUsh
tril)e which formerly lived at C. I^zo, e.
coai<t of Vancouver id., and spoke the
Comox dialect. — Boas, MS., 6. A. E.,
1887.
Kakhan. The Wolf clan of the Keresan
pueblo of I.Aguna, N. Mex. It claims to
have come originally from Sandia.
Ka-kan.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 298,
1890 (given as name of the wolf fetish). Ktthan-
hano«t>.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 352, 1896
{hanoch = ♦ people ' ) .
Kakhmiatonwan ( ' village at the bend ' ).
A division of the Sisseton Sioux.
Ka&mi-atonwaij.— Dorsey in loth Rep. B. A. E.,
217, 1897. Kaqmi-ato"wa<>.— Ibid.
Kakhtshanwaish. A former Alsea vil-
lage on the N. side of Alsea r., Oreg.
K4q-tca»-waic'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
ni, 230. 1890.
Kakiok. According to Coxe a tribe for-
merly on an island of the same name in
Tennessee r., above the Chickasaw; pos-
sibly Creek. See Cocliali,
Kakick.— Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. Kakigue.—
Ibid., 14.
Kakinonba. A tribe mentioned by sev-
eral early French writers about the close
of the 18th century as living apparently
on Tennessee or Cumberland r., although
the exact locality and the relationship of
the trilKj can not be determined. Mar-
quette's map places them e. of the Mis-
sissippi, about the region of Kentucky,
in 1674. Th^ Senex map of 1710 locates
them along the middle of Tennessee r.
St Cosme speaks of them as in s. Illinois
in 1699. Tennessee r. was called Casquin-
ambeaux, Casquinampo, and Kaskinenpo
by early French explorers.
Oakinonpai.— SauYole (1701) in French, Hist. Coll.
La., Ill, 238, 1851. Caskinampo.— Senex, map of
N. Am., 1710. Kakinonba,— Marquette's map (co.
1674) in Shea, Discov. Miss. , 1852. Karkimmpola.^
BULL. 301
KAKLIAKLIA. — KALAPOOIAN FAMILY
645
St Coeme (1699) in Shea, Early Voy., 60, 1861.
Kaaqninampo.— Tonti (ca. 1690) in French, HLst.
Coll. La.. I. 82, 1846.
Kakliaklia. A Koyukukbotana village
of 26 people on the Koyukuk, at the mouth
of Sakloseanti r., Alaska.
Xakhlyakhlyakakat—Zagoskin, Desc. Russ. Poss.
Am., map, 1848. Xakliakhliakat.— ZagOflkin
quoted by Petrolf in 10th Censas, Alaska, 37, 1884.
yakliaklia.~Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Kakliakliakat.— Tikhmenief (1861) quoted by
Baker, ibid. KikliakUakakate.— Zagoskin in
Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 1850.
Kakonak. • A Kiatagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on the s. shore of Iliamna lake, Alas-
ka; pop. 28 in 1890.
Kakhonak.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Kakonkarnk {kakoiif a species of hawk;
jba, locative; ruky * house.' — Kroeber).
A village of the Rumsen, a division of the
Costanoan family, formerly at gur, on the
coast, 20 m. 8. of Monterev, Cal.
Oaka]iaruk.~Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860.
KakontanJc—A. L. Kroeber, inf'n, 1906.
Kako8-hit-tan (Qaqfo^s hit Uin, *i)eople
of man's-feet house*). A suMi vision of
the Shunkukecli (q. v. ), a Tlingit division
at Klawak, Alaska. (j. r. s.)
Kakonchaki (from /raAoit, * porcupine').
A small Montagnais tribe formerly living
on St John lake, Quebec. They frequently
visited Tadoussac with other northern
trib^ and were occasionally visited in
their country by the missionaries.
Kaoouohakhi.-Can. Ind. Aff., 40. 1879. KakSa-
sakhi.— Jes. Rel. for 1641, 57, 1858. Eakouohac.—
Ibid., 1672. 44. Kakouohakhi.— Ibid., 1643, 2^,
KakottchiJd. — ("hamplain, (Euvres, ii, 21, note,
1870. Nation det Foro epiot.— Jes. Rel. for 1638, 24,
IR.'W y^t^ftii ^t fhft PftmiipinA — WJTmnr, Cartier to
Frontenac, 171, 1894. Porcupine Tribe.— ('harle-
voix, Hist. N. France, ii. 118. 186<J.
Kaksine (Qak'ninP). A Siiuawmish vil-
lage community on Mamukum cr., left
bank of Squawniislit r., Brit. Col. — Ilill-
Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900.
Kakn (Kd'k'u). A former Yaciuina
village on the 8. side of Yaquina r., Oreg. —
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 229,
1890.
Kaknak. A Nushagagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage 60 m. up Nushagak r., Alaska; |>op.
104 in 1880, 45 in 1890.
Kakuak.— Petfoff, Rep. on Alaska. 47, 1881. Kak-
wok.—CoaHt Surv. map. 11th Census, Alaska, 189:^.
Kakn^nk. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Kakniak. A Kuskwogmiut P^skimo vil-
lage on Kuskokwim r., Alaska; pop. 8 in
1880.
Kakkuiyagamute.— PetrofT in 10th ("ensiia, Alaska,
17, 1884.
Kalannnyi ( Kd^lani'iil^in, * raven place ' ) .
One of the five districts or ** towns** which
Col. Wilham H. Thomas, in his capacity of
agent for the Eastern Cherokee, laid off
on the E. Cherokee res., in Swain and
Jackson cos., N. C, after the removal of
the rest of the tribe to Indian Ter. in 1838.
The name is still retained. (j. m. )
Him Cove.— Mooney in 19th Rep., B. A. E.. 161, 524,
1900. Kilanun'yi— Ibid. (Cherokee name: 'Ra-
ven place ' ) . KaventowiL^lbid.
Kalapooian Family. A group of tribes for- 'k "^
merly occupying the vallev of Willamette
r., N. w. Greg., and speaking a distinct
stock language (see Powell in 7th Rep. B.
A. E., 81, 1891). Little is known of their
history, but they seem to have confined
themselves to the territory mentioned,
except in the case of one tribe, the Yon-
kalla, which pushed southward to the val-
ley of the Umpqua. The earliest accounts
describe a numerous population in Willa-
mette valley, which is one of the most
fertile in the N. W. ; but the Kalapooian
tribes appear to have suffered severe losses
by epidemic disease about 1824, and since
that time they have l)een numerically
weak. They are also described as Xmng
indolent and sluggish in character, yet
they seem to have been able to hold their
territory against the attempts of surround-
ing tril)es to disposst^ns them. They were
at constant war with the coast peoples
and also suffered nuich at the han(l8 of
the white pioneers. Game, in which the
country alK)unded, and roots of various
kinds constituted their chief food supply.
Unlike most of the Indians of that region
they did not dei)en(l on salmon, which
are unable to ascend the Willamette al)ove
the falls, and at which point the Kala-
pooian territory ended. Of the general
customs of the group there is little infor-
mation. Slavery existed in a niodifie<l
form, marriage was by purchase and was
accompanied by certain curious ceremo-
nials ((latschet in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
XII, 212, 1899), and flattening of the head
by fronto-occipital i)ressure was practised.
Tlie language is sonorous, the verb ex-
cessively complex, few prefixes being
used, and the. words are distinguished by
consonantal endings.
By treaty of Calapooia cr., Oreg., Nov.
29, i854, the Umixjua and Kalapooian
tril)es of Tmpqua valley ceded their lands
to the United States, the tract, however,
to constitute a reserve for these and other
tribes, unless the President should decide
to locate them elsewhere. This removal
was effected, and the entire tract was re-
garded as ceded. By treaty at Dayton,
Ore^r., Jan. 22, 1855, the Calapooya and
confe<lerated bands of Willamette valley
ceded the entire drainage area of Willa-
mette r., the (irande Ronde res. being
set aside for them and other bands by
Executive order of June 80, 1857. By
agreement June 27, 1901, confirmed Apr.^
21, 1904, the Indians of (Jrande Ronde
res. ceded all the unallotted lands of said
reservation. The Kalapooian bands at
(irande Ronde numl)ered 851 in 1880,
164 in 1890, 130 in 1905. There are also
a few representatives of the stock under
the Sfletz agency.
It is probable that in early times the
tribes and divisions of this family were
646
KALA8HIAUU KALI8PEL
[b. a. b.
more numerous, but the following are the
chief ones of which there is definite in-
formation: Ahantchuyuk or Pudding
River, Atfalati or Tualati, Calapooya,
Chelamela,Chepenafa, Lakmiut, Santiam,
Yamel, and Yonkalla.
The following are presumed to be Ka-
lapooian tribes or bands, but have not
been fully identified: Chemapho, Che-
meketaa, Chill yehandize, Laptambif,
Leeshtelosh, Peeyou, Shehees, Shookany,
and Winnefelly. See Calapooya. ( l. f.)
>Calapooya.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, iii, 565, 629,
1882. xChinooks.— Keane in Stanford, Compend.,
Cent, and So. Am., app., 474, 1878 (includes Cala-
pooyas and Yamkally). =Kalapooiah;— Scouler
in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 225, 1841 (in-
cludes Kalapooiah and Yamkallie; thinks the
Umpqua and Cathlascon Ianfi:uages are related);
Buschmann, Spuren deraztek. Sprache, 599, 617,
1859 (follows Scouler). ^KaUpooian.— Powell in
7th Rep. B. A. E., 81, 1891. =^apuya.— Hale in
U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 217, 5&4, 1846 (of Willamet
valley above falls); Gallatin in Trans. Am.
Ethnol. Soc., II, pt. 1, c, 17, 77, 1848; Beighaus
(1851), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1852; Gallatin in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 402, 1853; Latham in
Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 73, 1856; Buschmann,
Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 617, 1859; Latham,
Opuscula, 340,1860; Gutschet in Mag. Am. Hist.,
167, 1877; Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 442,
1877. > Yamkally. —Bancroft, Nat. Races, in, 565,
630, 1882 (bears a certain relationship to Cala-
pooya).
Kalashiauu (A'a-Za^-ci-aa-M). The Rac-
coon clan of the Chua (Snake) phratry
of the Hopi. — Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A.
E., 38, 1891.
Kalawashnk {Ka-la-wa^-ci'ik). One of
the Chuinashan villages connected with
the former Santa Inez mission, Santa
Barbara CO., Cal. — Henshaw, Santa Inez
MS.vocab.,B.A.E.,1884.
Kalawatset. A geographical group of
tribes of different families in w. Oregon,
embracing particularly the Coos, Kuitsh,
and Siuslaw.
Kala-Walset.— Mannypenny in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37,
34th Cong., 3d sess. , 9, 1857. Kalawatset.— Mil hau,
MS. vocab. Coast Inds., B. A. £. Kalawatabet.—
Gibbs, MS., B.A.E. Kiliwatsal.— Framboise, quot-
ed by Gairdner (1835) in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi,
255, 1841. KiUwatshat.— Hale, Ethnol. and Philol.,
221. 1846. Killawat.— Drake, Bk. Inds.. viii, 1848.
Killewattta.— Armstrong, Oreg., 116, 1857. KilU-
washat.— Latham (1853) mProc. Philol.Soc. Lond.,
VI, 82, 1854. Killiwatahat.— Hamilton quoted by
Gibbs, MS., B.A.E. K'qlo-qwec'»(biii8.— Dorsey,
MS. Chasta Costa vocab., B.A.E., 1884 (Chasta-
costa name). Ral-la-wat-seta.— Drew in H. R.
Ex. Doc. 93, 34th Cong., 1st sess., 127, 1856.
Kalbanyane. A former Delaware (?)
village on the headwaters of the w.
branch of Sus^iuehanna r.. Pa. — Pouchot
map (1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, x,
694, 1858.
Kalbnsht (* where the water rolls*).
A former Als<»a village on the s. side of
Alsea r., Oreg.
xW'-bfict'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ili,
230, 1890.
Kalekhta. A former Aleut village on
Unalaska, Aleutian ids., Alaska, contain-
ing 14 persons about 1825.
KaAleohtenakoi.— Elliott, Cond. AfT. Alaska. 225,
1875. Kalaktak.— Coxe, Russian Discov., 167,
1787. Kalechtiiiskoje.— Holmberg, £thn(^. Skizz.,
map, 1885. Kalekhtintkoe.— Veniaminon, Zapis-
ki, n, 202, 1840.
Kalelk {Ka^-lelk), A former Modoc
settlement on the n. shore of Tule or
Rhett lake, s. w. Oregon. — Gatschet in
Cent. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. 1, xxxii, 1890.
Kali (* fishermen'). A Ejiaiakhotana
clan living on Cook mlet, Alaska. — Rich-
ardson, Arct. Exped., i, 407, 1851.
Kaligpnak. A Nusha^gmiut village on
a tributary of Nushagak r., -Alaska; pop.
91 in 1880.— Petroff, Kep. on Alaska, 47,
1880.
Kaliko. A Yuit Eskimo village on the
Siberian coast e. of Iskagan bay. — Krause
in Deutsche Geog. Blatt.,v, 80, nftap, 1882.
Kalindarnk {buUin 'ocean', ta 'at', ruk
* houses.' — Kroeber ). A village near the
mouth of Salinas r., Cal. The name has
been used, whether or not with justifica-
tion, to designate the group of Indians
inhabiting the villages on lower Pajaro r.,
and between it and the Salinas, near the
coast. Indians from this area were taken
both to San Carlos and to San Juan Bau-
tista missions. Among the villages at-
tributed to this region are Alcoz, Animpa-
yamo, Kapanai, Kulul, Lukaiasta, Mus-
tak, Nutnur, Paisin, Poitokwis, Tiubta,
and Ymunakam.
Calendaruo.— Engelhardt, Franciscans in Cal., 398,
1897. KaUndaruk.— A. L. Kroeber, inf n, 1906
(proper form). Kathlendarao.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Nov. 25, 1860. KaUendarukas.— Ibid.,
Apr. 20, 1860. AAC S-H-lS
Kalispel (popularly known as
g'Qreilleg^ 'ear drops'). A Salish
around the lake and along the river of
the same name in the extreme n. part
of Idaho and n. e. Washington. Gibbs
divided them into the Kalispelms or
Pend d'Oreilles of the Lower Lake and
the Slka-tkml-schi or Pend d'Oreilles of
the Upper l^ke, and according to Dr
Dart the former numbered 520 in 1851,
the latter 480 (Pac. R. R. Rep. 1,415,
1855). McVickar (Hist Exped. Lewis
and Clark, ii, 386, note, 1842) made
three divisions: Upper Pend d'Oreilles,
Lower Pend d'Oreilles, and Micksuck-
sealton. Lewis and Clark estimated
their number at 1,600 in 30 lodges in
1805. In 1905 there were 640 Upper
Pend d'Oreilles and 197 Kalispel under
the Flathead agency^ Mont., and 98 Kal-
ispel under the Colville agency, Wash.
The subdivisions, being seldom re-
ferred to, are disregarded in the syn-
onymy.
Ach-min-de-oou-may. — Anon. Crow MS. vocab.,
B. A. E. (Crow name). Ak-miu'-e-shu'-me.— Hay-
den, Ethnog. and Philol., 402, 1862 (• the tribe that
uses canoes': Crow name). CaUpelins.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 686, 1857. Caletpelin.— Lane
(1849) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 62, Slst Cong., 1st sess.,
170, 1850. CaleapeU.— Johnson and Winter, Rocky
Mts., 34, 1846. Oalespin. — Lane (1849) in Sen.
Ex. Doc. 52, op. cit., 170. Cali«p«lU.— Keane in
Stanford, Compend., 504, 1878. Ck>lMpelin.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 701, 1857. Colespells.—
H. R. Ex. Doc. 102, 48d Cong., 1st sess., 1, 1874
Ooopspellar.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vil, 1848. Coop
pellar.— Lewis and Clark Exped., II, 475, 1814.
Goot-pel-lar's Kation.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark,
VI, 119, 1905. Ear Rings.— De Smet, Letters, 62,
1843. Flathead Kootanie.— Tolmie and Dawson,
BULL. ftOl
KALIUKLUK — KALULAADLEK
647
Gomp. Vocabs., 124b, ISW (erroneously so called).
mlu!&nm B«n.-Irving, Rocky Mts.. i. 127, 183^
Kah?li7pelm.— Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 461,1854.
Xalespei.— Ibid. , 418. Kalespilam.— Gatechet^ MS. ,
B. A. E. (Okinagan name). Kaliipel.— Ina. Aff.
Rep. 1901, 692, 1902 (own name). AOiapehnea.—
Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 418. 1854. K^pelms.—
Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 415, 1856. KaliBpelB.—
Smet, Letters, 170, 1843. K»ai8p«luin.— Stevens in
Ind. Aff. Rep.. 419, 1854. KalMpelu8«e«.--Ibid , 418.
Ki'noqtli'tlim.— Chamberlain in 8th Rep. N. W.
Tribes Can.. 8. 1892 (Kutenai name: 'compress
side of head'). KeUespem.— Duflot de Mofras.
Expl., II, 101, 335. 1844. Klanoh-klatklam.— Tol-
mie and l)aw8on. Comp. Vocabs., 124b. 1884 (Kute-
nai name). Kullas Palus.— Warre and Vavaaseur
in Martin. Hudson Bay Ter. . 82. 1849. Kulleapelm.—
Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 205, 1846. Kullea-
pen.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc. ii, 27.
1848. Ku»hp«lu.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
731. 1896 (a Yakima or Paloos form). Kuttel-
■peim.— Latham, Comp. Philol., 399. 1862. Lower
Pwidd'OreiUes.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 415,
1855. Ki-he-U-te-tup'i-o.— Hayden, Ethnog. and
Philol. . 264, 1862 ( Siksika name ) . Papshpiin *l«ma.—
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 731, 1896 (Yakima
name: 'people of the great fir trees'). Peaux
d'OreillM;— Audouard. Le Far West. 204, 1869.
Pend d'OreillM of the Lower Lake.— Gibbs in Pac.
R. R. Rep., 1, 415, 1855. Pend d'Oreilles of the Upper
Lake.— Ibid. Pends-d'oreilleB.— Smet, Letters, viii,
1843. Peads Oreille*.— Irving, Rocky Mts., i,
121, 1837. Pond d'Oreilles.— Price in Sen. Ex.
Doc. 44, 47th Cong., 2d sess.. 2, 1883. Pondecas.—
McVickar, Hist. Exped. Lewis and Clark, ii,
886. note, 1842. Pondera.- Parker, Jour.. 293, 1840.
Pondera*.— Robertson (1846) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,
30th Cong., 1st sess., 8, 1848. Ponderays.- Hale in
U. 8. Expl. Exped.. Vl, 569, 1846. Pond Orrillee.—
Dart in Ind. Aff. Rep., 216, 1851. Ponduraa.- Lane
(1849) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 81st Cong., 1st sess.,
170, 1850. Pondera*.- lAue in Ind. Aff. Rep., 159,
1850. 8ar-Ut-hu.— Suckley in Pac. R. R. Rep.,
I, 300, 1865. Slka-tkml-sehi;— Gib»)s. ibid., 415,
Upper Pend d'Oreille*.— Com'r. Ind. Aff. in Sen.
Misc. Doc. 136, 41st Cong.. 2d sess., 11. 1S70.
Kalinklnk. A Kaialijrniint Eskimo vil-
lage 8. of C. Vamrouver, Nelson id., Alaska;
pop. 30 in 1880.
KaHokhlogamute.- Nelscm quoted by Baker, Geog.
Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kaliookhlogamute.— Petroff
in 10th Census, Ala.ska, 54, 1884. KaUukluk.—
Baker, op. cit.
Kalkalya. A former Maidu village on
the site of Mooretown, Hntte co., Cal.—
Dixon in Bull. Am. Miis. Nat. Hist., xvii,
* pi. xxxviii, 1905.
Kalokto. The Crane clan of the Zuni
of New Mexico.
Ki'lokti-kwe.— Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 3<W,
1896 (kire= • people ' ) . »Ko-dh-16k-ta-que. — Ste-
venson in 5th Rep. B. A. K., Ml, 1887.
Kslokwis (Qd^ log u'iSf *crooked l>each*).
A village of the Tlauitsis on Turner id.,
Brit. Col. It was the legendary home of
the Kwakiutl tril)e at which all the trans-
fonnations of animals took place.
Ka-loo-kwis.- Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for
1887, sec. II, 72. Kar-luk-wee».— Boa.s in Bull. Am.
Geog. Soc., 229, 1887. Oalo^rwiB.— Boas, inf'n,
1906 ( =• crooked beach ') . ftalukwis.— Boas in
Bull. Am. Geog. Sck'.., op. cit.
Kalopaling (i)l. KalopaUt), A merman
of P^skimo mythology; also called Miti-
ling ('with eider ducks'). He wears a
ja(!ket of eider-duck skins 8potte<l with
their blac^k heads, and into the enormous
hoo<i he puts drowned hunters when
kaiaks capsize. His feet are as big as
sealskin float**. The Central Kskimo l)e-
lieve that once there were many Kalopa-
lit, while now only few are left, but they
imagine that they still see one occasion-
ally swimming far out at sea and splash-
ing the water with his legs and arms, or
basking on a rock, or sitting in winter on
the edge of a floe. They are suppose<i to
delight in overturning kaiaks, and hun-
ters tell stories of stealing up to Kalopalit
while they He asleep on the water and
killing them with walrus hari)oons, but
one must shut his eyes as he makes the
cast, else the Kalopaling will overset the
kaiak and drown all on board. The flesh
of the Kalopalit is said to be poisonous,
but it can be fed to dogs.— Boas in 6th
Rep. B. A. P:., 620, 1888.
Kaltag. A Kaiyuhkhotana village on
the left bank of the Yukon, Alaska; i)op.
45 in 1880.
Ooltog.— Whymper, Alaska, 190, 1869. Kahltog.—
Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 4'2d Cong., 1st sess.,
25,1871. Kaltag.— Dall, Alaska. 41,1870. K-kal-
tat.— Zagoskin quoted by Petroff in 10th Census,
Alaska, 37, 1884. Kkhaltel.— Tikhmenief (1861)
quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Kaltat. A Koyukukhotana village on
an island in Yukon r., not far from its
junction with Koyukuk r., Alaska; i>op.
9 in 1842.
Khaltat'8 village.— Allen, Rep. on Alaska, 110, 1887.
K-khaltat.— Zagwkin quoted by Petroff in 10th
Census, Alaska, 37, 18{W.
Kaltsergheatnnne ( * people on a point of
land extending far into the ocean'). A
division of the Tututni, formerly residing
at Port Orford, on the coast of Oregon.
Kkl-ts'c'-rxe-a^unn8'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, III, 233, 1890 (own name). "P^rt nrforH Tn.
.iiftjis.— Palmer in Ind. Aff. Rep. 18.56, 214, 1857.
Port OrfordB.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 470, 1865. ftwiio-tou'-
nii9l-tun ^iinn'8.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 233, 1890 (Naltunnetunne name). Tsa-re-ar-
to-ny.— Abbott, MS. Coquille census, B. A. E.,
18.')5. Ts'e-rxi'-k ^unn8.— Dorsey, Cotiuille MS.
vocab.. B. A. E.. 18H4. Tsc-xi'-a t«ne'.— Everette,
Tutu MS. V(H'ab., B. A. E., 1S8:} (.= 'i)e<)ple by
C. Foul weather').
Kaltshak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on the right bank of Kuskokwim
r., about Ion. 1(U°; pop. 106 in 1880, 29
in 1890.
Kakhilgagh-miut.— Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy.,
5th s., XXI, map, 1860. Kalkhagamnte.— Hallock
in Nat. Geog. Mag., ix, 90, 1898. Kalthagamute.—
Petroff in 10th Cen.sus, Alaska, map, 1884. Kalt-
kagamiut.— Eleventh CensiLM, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Kiatkhagamute.— Petroff, op. cit., 53. Kaltaha-
gamut.— Spurr and Post quoted by Baker, (ieog.
I)ict. Alaska, 1902. KalUhak.— Baker, ibid.
Kohaljkagmjut.— Holm berg, Ethnog. Skizz., map,
IH,^.
Kalniak. A Kaniagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage and lishing station on Chignik bav,
Ala.ska; pop. 30 in 1880, 193 in 1890.
Chignik Bay.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 163, 1893.
Kaluiak.— Petroff in 10th Census. Alaska, 28, 1884.
Kalnktnk. An Eskimo village in the
Kuskokwim district, Alaska; pop. 29 in
1893.
Kahlukhtughamiut.— Eleventh Census, Ala.Mka, 164,
1893.
Kalnlaadlek(A'W/f//ar/''//?A', * small house
of owl '). A village of the Ntlakyapamuk
on the E. side of Eraser r., al)out 24 m.
above Yale, Brit. Col.— Teit in Mem. Am.
Mus. Nat. Hist., ii, 169, HM)0.
648
KALULEK KAMIAKEN
[b. a. e.
Kalxdek. A Kavia^n^iut Eskimo vil-
lage at Port Clarence, Alaska.
Xiaulegeet.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 162, 1893.
Kalnplo ( Ka^-lu-plo, ) A former Nishi-
nam village in the valley of Bear r. , Cal. —
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 316,
1877.
Kamaiakan (Kamai^dkan). The prin-
cipal chief of the Yakima and confederate
tribes of k. Washington linder the treatv
of 1855, and leader in the war which
began a few months later and continued
for 3 years. He appears to have been
himself a Yakima. In consequence of
the heavy immigration to Oregon and
the discovery of gold in the Colville and
Coeur d'Al^ne country of n. e. Washing-
ton and adjacent Idaho, in the spring of
1855, Gov. Stevens, of Washington, was in-
structed to negotiate treaties for cession
of territory with the various tribes of the
region, with the purpose of limiting them
to reservations. Led by Kamaiakan the
Indians offered strong opposition to any
arrangement which wouul deprive them
of any portion of the lands or allow right
of way to the whites. After considera-
ble difficulty treaties were made with a
number of the tribes, largely through the
assistance of a majority of the Nez Percys,
but it soon became evident that practi-
cally the entire body of the Cayuse, Ya-
kima, Wallawalla, Paloos, Spokan, and
others were bitterly opposed to removal
from their homes or confinement to res-
ervations. In the meantime, although
the treaties were not yet ratified and no
time had been designated for the removal,
settlers and miners began to overrun the
Indian lands and collisions became fre-
quent. In Sept., 1855, the war began
with the killing of special agent Sohon
while on his way to arrange a conference
with Kamaiakan, who now publicly de-
clared his intention to keep all whites out
of the upper country by force an<l to
make war also on any tribe refusing to
join him. The first regular engagement
occurred, Oct. 4 and 5, on the southern
edge of Simcoe valley, between a de-
tachment of 84 regulars under Maj. Hal-
ler and a large force of Indians led by
Kamaiakan himself. The troops were
finally obliged to retire, although the
Indian loss was thought to be the greater.
By this time it was believed that 1,500
hostiles were in the field, and the rising
now spread to the tribes in w. Washing-
ton as well as among those of s. Oregon,
and even including some of the coast In-
dians of 8. Alaska. The principal leader
in w. Washington was Leschi (q. v. ). In
Sept., 1856, another conference was held
near W^allawalla with some of the chiefs,
but to no purpose, Kamaiakan refusing to
attend ana those present refusing all terms
except the evacuation of the territory by
the whites. The war went on, with nu-
merous raids, murders, and small engage-
ments by regulars and volunteers. In the
next year, 1857, the rising was brought
under control w. of the Cascade mts., sev-
eral of the leaders being hanged. An in-
cident of the war in this quarter was a
determined attack on Seattle, Jan. 25,
1856, which was repulsed by a naval force
stationed in the harbor at the time.
On May 17, 1858, a strong force of dra-
goons under Col. Steptoe was defeated a
few miles from the present site of Colfax,
N. w. Washington, by a combined force of
Paloos, Spokan, aiid Skitswish (Coeur
iiVAl^nes), but a few months later the war
was brought to a close by two decisive
defeats inflicted by Col. George Wright,
with more than 700 cavalry, infantry,
and artillerv, on the main body of the
hostiles led by Kamaiakan himself. The
engagements took place Sept. 1 and 5
near Four Lakes, on a s. tributary of Spo-
kane r. Besides their killed and wound-
ed, the Indians lost 800 horses, having
already lost large quantities of winter sup-
plies, and burned their own village to save
it from capture. Kamaiakan w^as among
the wounded. On the 17th Wright dic-
tated terms to the hostiles at a conference
nearCceurd'AK'ne mission. The defeated
Indians, being no longer capable of resis-
tance, were treated with great severity, 24
of the leading chiefs of the various tribes
being either hanged or shot. Kamaiakan
refused to sue for peace, but crossed the
border into Brttish Columbia, where he
finally ended his days. Consult Bancroft,
Hist. Wash., Idaho, and Montana, 1890,
and authorities cited; Stevens, Life of
I. I. Stevens, 1900. (j. m.)
Kamass. See Camas.
Kamatnkwncha {Kd^matfik nii^tcdy * be-
low the Rstrella mts. ' ). A Pima village
at Gila crossing, s. Ariz. — Russell, Pima
MS., B. A. E., 18, 1902.
Kamegli. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on the right bank of Kuskokwim r.,
above Bethel, Alaska.
Kameglimut.— Kilbuck (1898) quoted by Baker,
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Kamenakshtchat. A former important
Chitimacha town at Bayou du Plomb,
near Bayou Chene, 18 m. n. of Charen-
ton. La.
Kame naksh tchat namu. — Gatschet in Trans. An-
throp. Soe. Wash., ii, 152, 1883 {tchdt, 'bayou';
mbnu, 'village').
Kamiah. A Nez Perc^ band formerly
living at the site of the present town of
Kamiah, Idaho. It is mentioned by Lewis
and Clark in 1805 as a band of the Cho-
punnish and numbering 800 people who
lived in large lodges.
Kamia.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E., 1878. Kamiah.—
Howard, Nez Perc6 Joseph, 19, 1885. Kimmooe-
nim.— Morse, Rep. to. Sec. War, 369, 1822. Kimoe-
nims.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vii, 1848. Kimooenim. —
Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii, 471, 1814. Ki-moo-e-
nim.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 115, 1905.
Kamiaken. See Kamaiakan.
BULL. 30]
KAMIT — KANAGARO
649
Kainit(^(J''»n«/back'). AformerPima
village in s. Arizona. — Russell, IMma MS.,
B. A. E., 16, 1902.
Kamloops (* point l)etween the rivers*).
A villa^ at tne junction of Thompson and
North Thompson rs., Brit. Col., oocupie<l
by Shuswap Salish; pop. 244 in 1904. It
gave its name to Kamlo4^)p6 Indian agency,
now united with that of Okanagan as
Kamloop-Okanagan .
a-loor-pa.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. ('an.
" • '. Kuner
iss., 100. 1M7. 1
II, 87, IKM. a
A. E. (Okina»
S&lst, * people').
for 1891, sec. II, 7 (native name}^ Kameloupt.—
,— (\)X,
Gatschet. MS., B. A. £. (Okinagan name, from
Smct, Oregon Miss., 100. 1847. Kamloop*.
Ck)lumbia River, ii, 87, 18!^. Salst Kamlups.—
{Kajnmdt*wa). One of the
four divisions of the main body of the
Shasta, occupying Klamath valley from
Scott r. to Seiad valley, n. w. Cal. Accord-
ing to Steele the native name of these
Bftmhnrg Indiana, so-called, is T-ka, but
this is apparently a misprint of I-ka,
groperly Aika, their name for Hamburg
ar. (r. b. d.)
HiiBhiuKJbdiMtf.— Steele in Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1864,
120,1866. T-ka.— Ibid, (misprint).
Kammnok. A fonner bod^ of Salish of
Fraser sui)erintendencv, Bnt. Col.
Kammaok.— Can. Ind. AfT.' for 1879, 138. Kam-
nwiok.— Ibid., 1878. 79.
Kamnksasik. A former Aleut village
on Agattu id., one of the Near id. group
of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Kamnlas. A former Chuma.'^han village
situated at or near the present Camulos,
near the mouth of the Piru, in Ventura
CO., Cal.
I.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, July 24. 1863.
Ka-mtt'-liU.— HenKhaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab.,
B. A. £., 1881.
Kana. An Ita Eskimo settlement on
Murchison sd., n. Greenland.
Kl'na.— stein in Petermanns Mitt., no. 9. map,
1902. Karnah.— Mrs Peary, My Arct. Jour., 190,
1893.
Kanadasero. One of the two Seneca
villages, locality unknown, which in 1763
were still in the English interest. — John-
son (1768) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, vii,
582, 1856.
Kanugak. An Eskimo village in the
Kuskokwim district, Alaska; pop. 85 in
1890.
Kanagain1ut.~Eleventh ('ensus, Ala.ska, KA, 1893.
Kfuiagaro ( Kaimkar()\ 'a pole in the wa-
ter*). A Mohawk town situated in 1677
on the X. side of Mohawk r., in Mont-
gomery or Herkimer co., N. Y. In the
year named it had a single stockade,
with four ports, and containeii 16 houses.
Megapolensis mentions it as early as
1644, out no refercncte is made to it after
1693. ( J. N. B. H. )
Andagaroa.— Parkman, Jesuits, 222, note, 1883.
Andanuitte.— Parkman, Old Ri^g. . 197, 1883. Bana-
giro.— Megapolensis (1644) in >f.Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
Ill, 250. 18ft3. Kanagaro.— Conf. of 1674. ibid., ii,
712, 1868. Kasagiro.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hi.st., iii,
280. 1858. Kanttaro'.— Hewitt, inf n (Mohawk
and Cayuga form).
Kanagaro. A former Seneca town on
Boughton hill, directly s. of Victor, N. Y.
For a long period it was the capital of the
Seneca tribe. Greenhalgh states that in
1677 it contained 150 houses, 50 to 60 ft
in length, with 13 or 14 fires to the house.
Here Crreenhalgh saw 9 prisoners (4 men,
4 women, and a boy) burned, the torture
la.sting about seven hours. This shows
that the Inniuois as well as the Neuters
burned their unadopted women prisoners,
but the Jesuit Relation for 1641 says the
Huron do not burn their women captives.
On the approach of Denonville, in 1687,
this town was l)urned by its inhabitants,
who, like those of the neighboring Kana-
garo, the foreign colony, removed about
20 m. s. E. to Kanadasega, where the for-
eign element In^c^me known by the name
Seneca. In the early part of the 19th
century the Seneca formed. a village ap-
Sroximately on the site of the burned
[anagaro, which they called (Jaonsageon
('basswood bark lying around*), refer-
ring, it is said, to gutters of this material
employed to convey water from a neigh-
boring spring. Another settlement ex-
isted in 1 740 in the vicinity of the old site,
which was called Chinosftahgeh.
(j. N. B. H.)
Cahacarague.— L}tttr(>,map, 1784. Cahaquonaghe. —
Esnauts and Iljipilly, map, 1777. Canagaroh. —
Greenhalgh (1677) in N. Y. Doc.Col. Hi.Mt., iii, 251,
18f>3. Oanagora.— Ibid.. 250. Oangaro.— Ibid.
Gaensera.— Belmont (1687) quoted by Conover,
Kanadega and Geneva MS.. B. A. E. Oanagaro.—
La Sal\Q (1682) in Margrv, I)6c., lI. 217, 1877.
Gandagaa.— J es. Rel . for 1 657, 45, 1858. Oandagaro.—
Jes. Rel. for 1670, 23. 18.58. Oannagaro.— Denon-
ville (1687) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 367, 1865.
Kanftao*.— Hewitt, infn (Seneca and Onondaga
form). Kehoieraghe.— Cortland (1687) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., in, 434, 1«53. Onnutague.— Bel-
mont (1687) quoted by Conover, op. cit. Saint
Jaoque». ^es. Rel. for 1671, 20, 1858. Saint Jame».—
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX,367, 1S55.
Kanagaro. A former t( > wn belonging to
the Seneca, situated at different times at
different sites from 1 J to 4 m. s. of Kana-
garo, the Seneca capital, and s. k. from
Victor, on the e. side of Mud cr., N. Y.
Acconling to Gret^nhalgh it contained
about 30 houses in 1 677. The inhabitants
of this town, according to the Jesuit Re-
lation for 1()7C, were chiefly incorporate*!
captives and their descendants of three
tribes, the Onnontit)ga, the Neuters, and
the Hurons. Its situati(m thus placed its
inhabitants directly under the eyt^s of the
federal chiefs dwelling in the c^ipital town
of Kanagaro. Here in 1656 the Jesuits
establishwl the mission of the Tohonta-
enratat Scanonenrat, which surrenderee!
in a l)ody to the Seneca in U>49. On ac-
count of these associations the missiona-
ries gave it their special attention, with
such success that it became known as the
Christian town of the Seneca. Like all
the principal Seneca towns it was de-
stroved by Denonville in 1()87. The in-
habitants of the western towns, Totiak-
ton and Gandachiragon, removeil s. and
then w. to (ienesee r., where their settle-
ments were desf roved by Sullivan in 1779;
those of the eastern towns, Gandagaro
S^Hcc
650
KANAGH8AW8 KANA8TUNYI
Tb. a. a.
(Kanagaro) and Gandouearae, removed
to the E., where their settlements at Can-
andaigua and near Geneva, N. Y., were
also destroyed by Sullivan's army.
(j. N. B. H.)
Oanoenada,— Greenhaigh (1677) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hiflt., Ill, 250, 1883. Oanda^arae.— Jes. Rel. for
1670. 77, 1858. OandougaraeT— Denonville (1687)
quoted by Conover, MS., B. A. E. Oannogarae.—
Denonville (1687) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 366,
1856. Oaxmoiifirarae.— Doc. 1687, ibid., 334. 0«n-
nougarae. —Denonville quoted by Conover, MS.,
B. A. E. Saint Kiohaers.— Shea, Cath. Miss.. 291,
1855. Saint Michel.— Jes. Rel. for 1670, 77, 1858.
KanaghsawB. An Iroquois town of 18
houses, situated in 1779 about 1 m. n. w.
of Conesus Center, N. Y. Grant, one of
Sullivan's officers, says: "Captain Sun-
fish, a negro, resided here, a very bold,
enterprising fellow, who commanded the
town.'* Chief Bi^tree (Karontowanen)
is said to have resided here also. — Jour.
Mil. Exped. of Gen. Sullivan (1779), 131,
1887. (j. N. B. H.)
Kaxugormint. An £^kimo village in
8. w. Greenland. — Meddelelser om Gron-
land, XVI, map, 1896.
Kanak. An Alaskan Eskimo village in
the Kuskokwim district, Alaska; pop. 41
in 1893.
Xanagmiut.— 11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Kanakanak. A Nushagagmiut village
on Nushagak bay, near which are t\yo
salmon canneries; pop. 53 in 1890, 145 in
1900.
Kanakanak.— 11th Census, Alaska, 93, 1893. Kna-
kanak.— 12th Census Rep., i, 426, 1901.
Kanaknk. A Kickapoo prophet. When
the Kickapoo in 1819 ceaed their lands.
KANAKUK, THE KICKAPOO PROPHET. (afteH Catlih)
covering nearly half the state of Illinois,
they could not go to the reservation as-
signed to them in Missouri because it
was still .occupied by the hostile Osage.
Half the tribe emigrated instead to Span-
ish territory in Texas, and the rest were
ready to follow when the Government
agents intervened, endeavoring to induce
them to remove to Missouri. Kanakuk.
inspired with the ideas that had moved
Tenskwatawa, exhorted them to remain
where they were, promising that if they
lived worthily, abandoning their native
superstitions, avoiding quarrels among
themselves and infractions of the white
man's law, and resisting the seduction of
alcohol, they would at last inherit a land
of plenty clear of enemies. He was
accepted as the chief of the renmant who
remained in Illinois, and many of the
Potawatomi of Michigan became his dis-
ciples. He displayed a chart of the path,
leading through fire and water, which
the virtuous must pursue to reach the
* * happy hunting grounds, ' ' and furnished
his followers with prayer-sticks graven
with religious symbols. When in the
end the Kickapoo were removed to Kan-
sas he accompanied them and remained
their chief, still keeping drink away from
them, until he died of smallpox in 1852.
See Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 692-
700, 1896.
Kanani (Aa^rwJm, * living arrows'). A
Navaho clan. — Matthews in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, iii, 104, 1890.
Kanapixna (^one who is talked oV),
An Ottawa chief, bom about 40 m. s. of
Mackinaw, Micl)., July 12, 1813, and
christenedasAugustinHammelinJr. He
was sent with his younger brother. Ma-
coda Binnasee (The Blackbird), in 1829 to
be educated in the Catholic seminary at
Cincinnati, where the two boys remained
for 3 years without making marked prog-
ress in their studies. In 1832 both were
sent to Rome to continue their educa-
tion in the college of the I^opaganda
Fide, with the view of entering the
priesthood. This object in Kanapima's
case was defeated from the usual causes.
After his brother died at the end of two
years he ceased his studies, returned to
America, became chief of his branch of
the tribe, and resumed the costume and
habits of his people, except when he went
among white people, as in 1835, to make a
treaty for the Ottawa with the Govern-
ment at Washington, but he does not
appear to have been a signer of any Ottawa
treaty. On such occasions he exhibited
the ease and polish of a man of the
world.
Kanastnnyi {KdnastHfl^yl). A tradi-
tionary Cherokee settlement on the head-
waters of French Broad r., near the pres-
ent Brevard, in Transylvania co., N. C.
A settlement called Cannostee or Cannas-
tion is mentioned as existing on Hiawas-
seer. in 1776. (j. m.)
Ck>naat6e.«Doc. of 1756 quoted by Royce in 6th
Rep. B. A. E., 142, 1887. Kfaa'sta.— Mooney in
BULL. 30]
KANATAK KANGHIYUHA
651
19th Rep. B. A. E., 480, 524, 1900 (abbreviated
form). KftBAstda'yi.— Ibid.
Xanatak. A Kaniagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on Shelikof strait, Alaska; pop. 26 in
1890 (llth Census, Alaska, 163, 1893).
Kanatakowa ( * great village.' — Hewitt).
The village of the Onondaga situated at
the place still called Onondaga Castle,
N. Y. It was the principal village of the
tribe as early as 1654. (.i. m.)
Ka-nii-ti-fo'-wii.— Morgan, League Iroq.. 471, 1861.
KI-Bi-tt'-ko'-wr.— Hewitt, infn, 1886 (Onondaga
form). Onondaga.— Greenlialgh (1677) quoted by
Morgan, League Iroq., 316, 1851. Onondaga Cas-
tle.—Ibid., 471 (common English name). Onon-
dagliara.— Macaulcy, N. V., ii, 177, 1829. Onon-
dafharie.— Ibid.
Kanatioclitiage ( ' place of wild ri(*e '). A
former Iroquois settlement or village on
the N. shore of L. Ontario, inhabited
chiefly by **D(>^flganhaeH/* and reputed
to be "near the Sennekes [Seneca] coun-
try." It was situated near Tchojachiage,
or approximately on the site of Darling-
ton or Port Hopi», in the New Castle dis-
trict, Ontario. Three nations, composing
16 ** castles", came to settle there by Iro-
guois permission. (.i. x. n. ii. )
Qanadatriagon. — Frontenae (1673) in N. V. Doc.
Col. Hist., IX, 112. 1855. Oanatcheakia^on.— Ibid.,
note. Ganatoheakiagon. — Ibid. KanaUoohtiage. —
Doc. of 1700, ibid., iv, 6W, ISM.
Kanchati (*red ground,' 'red earth').
A name applied to several places, one of
the best known l)eing the principal village
of the Alibamu, formerly on the k. }>ank
of Alabama r., below Koasati and a little
.w. of Montgomery, Ala. Hawkins de-
scribed it in 1799 as a small village on the
left bank of Alabama r., with its fields on
the right side in a cane swamj), and its
people i)oor and indolent. A census of
1832 (Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 578,
1854) gave the numlH»r of families a.^ 55.
The name has been appKe<l also to a
township in the Creek Naticm, Okla.,
and to a village a few miles n. w. of Tal-
ladega, Ala. (.\. s. (J. )
Oon chante ti.— Census of 1832 in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, iv, 57H, 18V4. Con-ohant-ti.— (latschet.
Creek Migr. Leg., i, 133, 1884. Gonohart ee.— H.
R. Ex. Doc. 276, 24th Cong., Ist st>ss., 312, 1836.
Soaaehatty.— Woodward, Reminiscences, 12, 1H59.
Ecomchate.— Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribi's. i v, 380, 1854.
E-eun-cha-ta.— Royce in 18th Rep. R. A. K.. Ala.
map, 1899. E-oun-ohate.~Hawklns (1799). sketch,
86, 1848. Ikan-tehati.— Gatschet, Creek Migr.
Leg., I, 88. 1884. KaMh£de.— Ibid.. i:«. O-cun-
eia-U.— Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 307, 1822.
Eed Grounds.— Ibid., 364.
Kandonoho. A former village of the
Neutrals in Ontario, near the Huron
country.
Xaadoueho.— Jes. Rel. for 1641, 75, 18.58. Tons les
Saints.— Ibid, (mission name).
Kaneenda. A fonner fi.shing station of
the Onondaga, situated at the fork of
Seneca and Onondaga rs., N. Y., 8 m.
from their palisade<l village. It was also
their landing place when they returned
from hunting cm the n. si<le of 1.. Ontario.
(.1. N. B. H.)
Kanienda.~Doc. of 1700 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
IV, 649, 1854.
Kanesadageh {Kane^siitW^ge^), A for-
mer Iroquois village belonging to the
Two-clans of the Turtle; location un-
known, (j. N. B. n. )
Kaneghsadakeh.— Hale, Iroquois Book of Rites,
118. 1883. Kanesadakeh.— Ibid, 119.
Kanestio. A village occupied by Dela-
wares and others, subject to the Iroquois,
formerly on the upper Susquehanna,
near Kanestiocr., in Steul)en co., N. Y. It
was burne<l by the Iroquois in 1764, on
account of hostilities committed by the
inhabitant^ against the whites. It tben
contained about 60 houses.
Ganestio.— Vandreuil (1757) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hi.«»t., x,588. 1858 (naraeof the creek). Kanestio.—
Pouchot, map (1758), ibid., G94.
Kang. The ^lountain Lion clans of the
Tewa pueblos of San Juan, San lldefonso,
and Nambe, N. Mex.
Chang Doa.—Bandelier, Delight Makers, 4&1. 1890.
Ka"-td6a.— H<Kige in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351, 1896
(San Juan and San lldefonso form; td6a = 'peo-
ple'), dcn-tdoa.— Ibid. (Nambe form; q = (ier-
man ch).
Kangarsik. A village of the Angmag-
salingmiut on a large island at the mouUi
of Angmagsalik fjord, Greenland, lat. 65°
8.y; pop. 34 in 1884. — Me<ldelelser om
(irimland, ix, 879, 1889.
Kangek. An Eskimo settlement 10 m.
s. of (iodthaab, w. Greenland, lat. 64°
10^— Nansen, Eskimo Life, 166, 1894.
Kangerdlnksoa ( * the ^reat fjord * ) . An
Ita Eskimo settlement in Ingletield gulf,
N. Greenland.
Xangerdlooksoah.— WychofT in i^cribner's Mag.,
XXVIII, 447, 1900. Kangerdlik'hBoa.— Stein in Peter-
manns Mitt., ix, map, 1902.
Kangertloaping ( * remarkable fjord ' ).
A summer settlement of Okomiut Eskimo
of Saumia, at the head of an inlet empty-
ing into ('uml)erland sd., Baffin land.—
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888.
Kangertlnk ('fjord ' ). A spring and fall
settlement of Iglulirmiut J^^kimo on x.
Melville ix'nin. near the Fox Ba.sin coast. —
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888.
Kangertlnkdjuaq (* great fjord'). A
summer settlement of Okomiut P^skimo
of Saumia, at the head of an inlet empty-
ing into Cuml)erland sd., Baffin land.—
Boas in 6tli Rep. B. A. PI, map, 1888.
Kangertlnng ('fjord ' ). A summer set-
tlement of Taliri)ia Okomiut P^kimo on
the s. w. coast of Cuml)erlan<l sd. — Boas
in 6th Rt^i>. B. A. E., map, 1888.
Kanggnatl-lanas (QiYugunL UVnas). An
extinct subdivision of the Stustas, a fam-
ily of the P^le clan of the Hai<la of
British Columbia. (j. r. s. )
Kanguati la'nai.— Boas, 12tli Rep. N. W. TJril)es
Can.. 22, 1898. Qa'nguaL la'naa.— Swanton, C<mt.
Haida, 276, 1905.
Kanghishanpegpnaka ('those who wear
crow feathers in their hair* ). A divisi<m
of the Sibasapa or Blackfoot Sioux.
Kai)gi-suij-pegnaka.— Dorsey in 1.5th Rep. B. A. E.,
219, 1S97. Ka"zi-cu"-pegnaka.~Ibid.
Kanghiynha ('crow keepers*). A
division of the Brule Teton Sioux.
Kaij-gi_yu-ha.— Tatankawakan, letter to Dorsey,
1880. Kimgi-yuha.— Dorsey in 15tli Rep. B. A. IC.,
218.1897. Ea"zi-yuha.— Ibid. Thosethateatorows.—
Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. IS.'iO. 141, 1851.
652
KANGIABT80AK KANNEHOUAN
[B. A.B.
Kangiartsoa^. An Eskimo village and
Danish settlement in w. (xreenland, lat.
72° 47^— Kane, Arctic Exped., 472, 1854.
Kangidli. An Ita Eskimo village at C.
York, N. Greenland. — Stein in Peter-
manns Mitt., ix, map, 1902.
Kangigdlek. An Angmagsalingmiut
Eskimo village on Angmagsalik fjord, e.
Greenland, lat. 05° 40^. — Meddelelser om
Gri'mland, xvi, map, 1896.
Kangikhlnkhmnt (Kang-iQ'XlU'(fmid,
*head-of-t he- rapid-river people*: Kani-
agmiiit name). A division of the Ah-
tena at the head of Copper r., Alaska. —
Hoffman, MS. vocab. B. A. E., 1882.
Kangisnnka. See Crow Dog,
Kangiyamint (* people at the head*).
A subtribe of the Sukinimiut Eskimo,
living in the region of George r., n. Lab-
rador.
Xangivamint—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map,
1888. K&n'g^^na'lukaoagmyut.— Turner in 11th
Rep. B. A. E., 176, 1894( = *peopleof thegreatbay').
Xaniiktlualukaoannyut— Turner in Trans. Roy.
8<K'. Can., V, 99, 1888.
Kangmaligmint (* distant ones*). An
Arctic Eskimo tribe between Manning pt
and Herschel id. The name has been
attached to different local groups all the
way from Pt Hope to Mackenzie r.
Kn^jakiani.— Rink in Jour. Anthrop.Inst., xv,240,
1886. Kakwalikg.— Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. Posa.
Am., pt. I, 74. 1S47. KaiuriuaicQit.— Rink, op. cit.,
240. Kangmali-enyiiin.— Richardson, Polar Re-
gions, 300, 1861. Kangmaligmeut.— Murdoch in
Ninth Rep. B. A. E.. 46, 1892. K&npauLU'gmiit.—
Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 10, 1877. Kangmali-
innuin. — Simpson quoted by Dall, ibid. Kangma-
lik.— Woolfe in 11th Census, Alaska, 130, 1893.
Kuignialis.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 517,
1878. Kanmali-enyuin.— Murdoch in 9th Rep. B.
A. E., 46, 1892. Kfimnii'd'lln.— Ibid., 43,46. Weatem
Kaokenzie Innuit— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
I, 12, 1877 (collective term including Kopagmiut
and Kangmaligmint).
Kangormint ( ' goose people * ) . A tribe
of Central Eskimo living in Victoria land.
Kanc-orr-Koeoot. — Franklin, Journ. to Polar Sea,
Ii743, 1824. Kanq-or-mi-ut.— Richardson, Arct.
Exi»ed., I, 362, 1851. Kafip-meut— Petitot in Bib.
Ling, et Ethnol. Am., iii, 11, 1876 (Chiglit name).
White-Ooose Eikiinbs.—Franklin, op. cit, 42.
Kanhada (G'anhAda^ meaning obscure).
One of the 4 clans or phratries into which
all Indians of the Chimmesyan stock are
divided. It is also applied specifically
to various locid subdivisions of the clan.
One such is found in the Niska town of
Lakkulzap and one in each of the Kitk-
san txjwns— Kitwingach, Kitzegukla, and
Kishpiveoux. — Boas in 10th Rep. N. W.
Tribes Can., 49-50, 1895.
Kanhanghton. A former Delaware vil-
lage about the mouth of Chenmng r., in
the N. part of Bradford co., Pa. It was
destroyed by the Iroquois in 1764 on
account of tlie hostility of its inhabitants
to the whites.— Johnson (1764) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 625, 1856.
Kaniagmint ( ' i^eople of Kmliak ' ) . The
largest and most powerful Eskimo tribe
on the Alaskan coast, inhabiting Kodiak
id. and the mainland from Iliamna lake
to Ugashik r., the s. coast to Ion. 159® w.
The tribe numbered 1,154 in 1890. Their
villages are Afognak, Aiaktalik, Akhiok,
Aleksashkina, Alexandrovsk, Ashivak,
Chiniak, Fugitive, Igak, Iliamna, Kagu-
yak, Kaluiak, Kanatak, Karluk, Katmai,
kattak, Kiliuda, Kodiak, Kuiukuk,
Kukak, Liesnoi, Mitrofania, Nauklak,
Nunamiut, Nuniliak, Orlova, Ostrovki,
Seldovia, Sutkum, Three.Saints, Uganik,
Uhaiak, Uhaskek, Ukshivikak, Uyak,
Uzinki, Yalik, and Yelovoi.
Aohkugmjuten. — Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 4, 1855
(applied to Aglemiut and Kaniagmiut by the
people of Norton Rd.;=' inhabitants of the warm
country'). Kadiagmuta.— Am. Nat., XV, 156, 1881.
Ka4jaoken.— Wrangell, Ethnol. Nach., 117, 1839.
Kanagist— Coxe, Russ. Disc, 135, 1787. Kiniif'-
mut.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 20, 1877.
Kaniagmnt. — Rink, Eskimo Tribes, 32, 1887.
Kinaghi.— Morae, Syst. of Mod. Geog., I, 74, 1814.
Kon aliens. — Drake, Bk. of Inds., viil, 1848.
Konagu.— Latham in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lend.,
I, 183. 1848. Xonaagi.— Prichard, Phys. Hist.,
Man, 371, 1847. Xoniagi.— Humboldt. New Spain,
II, 392, 1811. Koniligmutea.— Dall in Proc. Am. A.
A. S., XVIII, 267, 1870. Xo^jagen.— Holmberg,
Ethnog. Skizz., 4, 1855. Southern Eakimoc—Form
used by variouH English writers.
Kanig. A former Chnagmiut village on
the N. bank of Yukon r., Alaska, near its
mouth.
Kanig-miout.— Zago.<<kin in Nouv. Ann. Voy.,
5th s., XXI, map, 1S50. Kanygmjut.— Holmberg,
Ethnog. Skizz., map. l&'VS.
Kanikaligamut ( Ka^ni-qa-H-ga-mut^
* people close to the river*: Chugachig-
miut name). An unidentified division of
the Knaiakhotana living on Cook inlet,
Alaska.— Hoffman, MS., B. A. ¥.,, 1882»
Kaniklnk. A Chugachi^miut village on
the N. shore of Prince William sd., Alaska;
pop. 54 in 1880, 73 in 1890.
Kanikhluk.— PetrofT in loth Census. Alaska, 29,
1884. Kanikluk.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 229,
1902.
Kanlax (iVlrr7/«//!:n, 'the point*). An
Upper Lillooet town at the junction of
Bridge and Fraser rs., interior of British
Columbia; pop. 104 in 1904.
Bridge river.— Can. Iiid. AflF. Rep. 1904, pt. 2. 72,
1905. Kan -lax'.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can.
for 1891, sec. ii, 44. Nxo'istEn.- Boas, inf n, 1906.
Kanna ( * eel* ) . A clan of the Tuscarora.
According to Morgan (I^eague Iroq., 70,
1877) an Eel clan is found among the Tus-
carora, the Onondaga, and the Cayuga.
Eel.— Morgan, op. cit. Ka'"'-iiJL— Hewitt, intn,
1886 (Tuscarora lorm).
Kannawalohalla ( 'a head fastened to the
end of an object. *— Hewitt) . An Iroquois
village on the site of Elmira, N. Y.,
which was destroyed by Sullivan in Aug.,
1779.— Jour. Mil. Exped. Gen. Sullivan
(1779), 232, 1887.
Kannehonan. An unidentified tribe, pos-
sibly of Caddoan affinity, heard of by La
Salle*s party in 1687 as living to the w.
or N. w. of Maligne (Coloratlo) r., Tex.
Cf. Cahinnio^ Kanohatino.
CaniouU— Alcedo, Die. GeoK., i, 341, 1786 (poesibly
identical). Oaimaha.— Joutel(1687)inMarfirry,D6c.,
Ill, 409, 1878. Cannahios.— Ibid. Oannehovanea.—
Barcia, Ensayo, 271, 1723. Kannehonaa.— Joutel
(1687), Jour. Voy., 90, 1719. Kannehonaa.— Joutel
BULL. 30]
KANOHATINO KAN8A
658
(1687) in Margry, D^., nit 288, 1878. Kaouanoiui.—
i7tbcent. Doc.ln Margry, ibid.,602. Ouanahinan.—
De risle, map (1708) in Winsor, Hist. Am., ii,
294, 1886 (possibly identical; misprint 0 for C).
daasrneoa.— JefFerys. Am. Atlas, map ft, 1776. Ta-
hiannihoim.— Joutel (1687) in Margry, D4c.,iii, 409,
1878.
Kanobatino (*re<l river*). The Caddo
name for the Red r. of Louisiana, and,
according to Gatschet, for the Colorado r.
of Texas. It was puppoped by the com-
panions of La Salle to be the name of a
tribe encountered ])y them in the neigh-
borhood of the Colorado or the Brazos.
From the alternative name given, **Ay-
ano," or "Ayona,** it has been errone-
ously assumed that this tril)e was the
Hainai. * * Ayano, ' ' however, is evidentl v
the general Caddo word for ** man.'* Al-
though a Caddo tribe may have been liv-
ing or camping in the region indicated
when I.a Salle passed, the fact that they
were not mentioned when Le6n advanced
to the Caddo country a few years later
would seem to discredit the theory. The
only alternative supposition is that the
Wichita or one of their branches, the
Tawakoni or the Waco, were camping
considerablv to the s. of their customary
habitat at that time. This would explain
the warfare that was found to exist be-
tween the Caddo and the Kanohatino in
which some of La Salle's former compan-
ions took part, (j. R. s. )
Aiano.— Barcia, Ensayo, 271, 1723. Ayano.— Joutel
(1687) in Margry, D<>c., in, 299, 1878. Ayona.—
Joutel in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 138. 1846. Can-
atino.— Anville. map N. Am., 1752. Caxmohatiii-
no Joutel (1687) in Margry, Dt^c, lii. 299, 1878.
nannofaatiiio.— Barcia, Ensayo, 271. 1723. Canno-
kantimo.— Joutel (1687) in French. Hist. Coll. La.,
1, 148, 1846. Oanoatiimo.— Joutel ( 1687) in Margry,
mc, 111,409,1878. Canoatinoi.— Iberville (1700),
ibid., IV, 374, 1880. Canohatinno.— Shea, Early
Voy., 36, note, 1861. Canohatiiio.— Joutel, Jour.
Voy., 90, 1719. Oanouhanans.— Baudry desLozi^res,
Voy. a la Le., 212, 1802. Oonoatino*.— Bienville
(1700) in Margry, D^c, iv. 442, 1880. Kanaatino,—
Brion de la Tour, Carte Gen. des Col. Angl., 1781.
Kanoatina*.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816.
KasoatinnM.— Hennepin, New Discov., pt. 2, 32,
1698. Kanoatiao.~I^ Page du Pratz (1757), Hist.
La., map, 1774. Kano Hatino.— Mooney, inf n
(Caddo: Ted river'). Kanoatinoa.— Cavelier
(1688) in Shea, Early Voy., 36. 186) . Konatines.—
Coxe, Carolana, map, 1741. KonoatinnoB. — Ibid.,
88. duapoatinno.— Douay (ca. 1688) in Shea, Dis-
cov., 211, 1852. duanoatinos.—McKenney and
Hall, Ind, Tribes, in, 81, ia54. QuanoouaUnos.—
Tonti (1690) in French. Hist. Coll. La., I, 76, 1816.
duanouatins. — Ibid., 74. Quoanantino. — Bareia,
Ensayo, 302, 1723.' Quonantino.^McKenney and
Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 87, 1854. Quonoatianos.—
Coxe, Carolana, 38, 1741.
Kansa. A southwestern Siouan tribe;
one of the five, according to Dorsey^s
arrangement, of the Dhegiha group.
Their linguistic relations are closest with
the Osage, and are close with the Quapaw.
In the traditional migration of the group,
after the Quapaw had first separated
therefrom, the main body divided at the
mouth of Osage r., the Osage moving up
that stream and the Omaha and Ponca
crossing Missouri r. and proceeding
northward, while the Kansa ascended
the Missouri on the s. side to the mouth
of Kansas r. Here a brief halt was made,
after which they ascended the Missouri
on thes. side until they reached the pres-
ent N. boundary of Kansas, where they
were attacketi by the Cheyenne and com-
pelled to retrace their steps. They set-
tled again at the mouth of Kansias r.,
where the Big Knives, as they calUnl the
whites, came with gifts and inductni them
to go farther w. The native narrators of
this tradition give an account of about
20 villages occupied successively along
Kansas r. Ixjfore the settlement atCouncil
KANSA. (kAKEBASHa)
Grove, Kans., whence they were finally
removed to their reservation in Indian
Ter. Marquette' s autograph map, drawn
probably as early as 1674, places the
Kansa a considerable distance directly
w. of the Osage and some distance s. of
the Omaha, indicating that they were
then on Kansas r. The earliest recorded
notice of the Kansa is by Juan de Ofiate,
who went from San Gabriel, N. Mex., in
1601, till he met the " Escansaciues," who
lived 100 leagues to the n. e., near the
"Panana,** or Pawnee. It is known that
the Kansa moved up Kansas r. in historic
654
KANSA
Tb. a. e.
times as far as Big Blue r., and thence
went to Council Grove in 1847. The
move to the Bi^ Blue must have taken
place after 1723, for at that date Bourg-
mont speaks of the large village of the
Quans (Kansa) as on a small river flow-
ing from the n. 30 leagues above Kansas
r. and near the Missouri. The village of
the Missouri tribe was then 30 leagues
below Kansas r. and 60 leagues from the
Quans village. Iberville estimated them
at 1,500 families in 1702. A treaty of
peace and friendship was made with
them by the United States, Oct. 28, 1815.
They were then on Kansas r. at the
mouth of Saline r., having been forced
back from the Missouri by the Dakota.
They occupied 130 earth lodges, and their
number was estimated at 1,500. Accord-
ing to Lewis and Clark, they resided in
1804 on Kansas r., in two villages, one
about 20 and the other 40 leagues from its
mouth, with a population of 300 men.
These explorers say that they formerly
lived on the s. bank of Missouri r. about
24 leagues above the mouth of the Kan-
sas, and were more numerous, but were
reduced by the attacks of the Sauk and
the Iowa. O' Fallon estimated their num-
ber in 1822 at 1,850. By the treaty of St
Louis, June 3, 1825, they ceded to the
United States their lands in n. Kansas
and s. E. Nebraska, and relinquished all
claims they might have to lands in Mis-
souri, but ^eser^^ing for their use a tract
on Kansas r. Here they were subject to
attacks by the Pawnee, and on their hunts
by other tribes, whereby their number
was considerably reduced. Porter esti-
mated their number in 1829 at 1,200; ac-
cording to the Report of the Indian Oflfice
for 1843 the population was 1,588. By
treaty at Methodist Mission, Kans., Jan.
14, 1846, they ceded to the United States
2,000,000 acres of the e. portion of their
reservation, and a new reservation was
assigned them at Council Grove, on Neo-
sho r., Morris co., Kans., where they
remained until 1873. As this tract was
overrun by settlers, it was sold, and with
the funds another reservation was bought
for them in Indian Ter. next to the
Osage; with the exception of 160 acres,
reserved for school purposes, all their
lands have now been allotted in severalty.
The population diminished from about
1,700 in 1850 to 209 in 1905, of whom
only about 90 were full-bloods. Much of
this decrease has been due to epidemics.
In the winter of 1852-53 smallpox alone
carried off more than 400 of the tribe at
Council Grove.
The Kansa figured but slightly in the
history of the country until after the
beginning of the 19th century, and
they never played an important part in
frontier affairs. During the 26 years
which the Kansa spent at Council Grove,
efforts were made to civilize them, but
with little success. Mission schools were
conducted by the Methodists in 1850-54,
and by the Quakers in 1869-73, but
the conservatism of the tribesmen pre-
vented the attendance of the children,
believing it to be degrading and ruinous
to Indian character to adopt the white
man's ways. According to T. S. Huff-
aker, who lived among them, chiefly as
teacher, from 1850 to 1873, only one In-
dian of the tribe was converted to Chris-
tianity during that period, while the
influence of frontier settlers and traders,
with the introduction of liquor, stood in
the way of the good that the schools
might otherwise have accomplished.
While at Council Grove they subsisted
largely by hunting the buffalo, until the
extinction of the herds, when they took
up desultory farming under the instruc-
tion of Government teachers, because
driven to it by necessity; but the houses
erected by the Government for their use
they refused to occupy, regarding their
own lodges as more healthful and com-
fortable (G. P. Morehouse, inf n, 1906).
Say's account, perhaps the most accu-
rate of the earlier notices (Long, Exped.
Rocky Mts., 1823), describes the ordi-
nary dress of the men as consisting of a
breech-clout of blue or red cloth secured
in its place by a girdle, leg^ngs and
moccasins without ornamentation, and a
blanket thrown over the shoulders. The
hair of the chiefs and warriors, except a
small lock at the back, was scrupulously
removed. The dress of the females con-
sisted of a piece of cloth secured at the
waist by a girdle, the sides meeting on
the outside of the right thigh, the wnole
extending downward to the knee. In
cold weather or for full dress a similar
piece of cloth was thrown over the left
shoulder, and leggings of cloth, with a
broad protecting border on the outside,
and moccasins were worn. They were
cultivators of the soil. Tattooing was
formerly practised to a limited extent.
The chastity of the females was guard-
ed to a greater extent than was usual
among the western tribes.. The mode of
constructing their principal permanent
dwellings is described by Say as follows:
**The roof is supported by two series of
pillars, or rough vertical posts, forked at
top for the reception of the transverse
connecting pieces of each series; 12 of
these posts form the outer series, placed
in a circle; and 8 longer ones, the inner
series, also describing a circle; the outer
wall, of rude frame- work, placed a proper
distance from the exterior series of pil-
lars, is 5 or 6 ft high. Poles as thick
as the leg at base rest with their butts
upon the wall, extending on the cross-
BULL. 30]
KANSA
655
pieces, which are upheld by the pillars
of the two series, and are of sufficient
length to reach nearly to the summit.
These poles are very numerous, and,
agreeably to the position which we have
indicatea, they are placed all round in
a radiating manner, and support the roof
like rafters. Across these are laid long
and slender sticks or twigs, attached par-
allel to each other by means of liark conl;
these are covered by mats made of long
grass, or reeds, or with the bark of trees;
the whole is then covered completely
over with earth, which, near the groun(l,
is banked up to the eaves. A hole is
permitted to remain in the middle of the
roof to give exit to the smoke [see Earth
lodgel . Around the walls of the interior a
continuous series of mats are suspended;
these are of neat workmanship, composed
of asoft reed united bv bark cord in straight
or undulated lines, W*tween which lines
of black paint sometimes occur. The
bedsteads are elevat^'d to the height of a
common seat from the ground, and are
al>out 6 ft wide; they extend in an un-
interrupteil line around three-fourths of
the circumference of the apartment, and
are formed in the simplest manner of
numerous sticks or slender pieces of
wood, resting at their ends on cross-
pieces, which are supported by short
notched or forked posts driven into the
ground; bison skins supply them with a
comfortable l)edding." Restriction of
marriage according to gentes has always
been strictly observed by the Kansa.
When the eldest daughter of a family
married, she controlled the lodge, her
mother, and all her sisters, the latter be-
ing always the wives of the same man.
On the death of the husband the widow
became the wife of his eldest brother with-
out c^ejemony ; if there was no brother the
widow was left free to select her next hus-
band.
The Kansa gentes as given bv Dorsey
(15th Rep. B. A. E., 230, 1897) are: 1,
Manyinka (earth lodge); 2, Ta (deer); 3,
Panka ( Ponca) ; 4, Kanze (Kansa) ; 5, Wa-
sabe (black bear); 6, Wanaghe (ghost);
7, Kekin (carries a turtle on his back ) ; 8,
Minkin (carries the sun on his back); 9,
Upan (elk); 10, Khuva (white eagle);
11, Han (night); 12, Ibache (holds the
firebrand to sacred pipes); 13, Hanga-
tanga ( lai*ge Han&ra) ; 14, Chedunga ( buf-
falo bull); 15, Chizhuwashtage (Chizhu
peacemaker) ; 16, Lunikashinga( thunder-
being people). These gentes constitute
7 phratries.
The following were some of the Kansa
villages, their names having been gained
chiefly through the investigations of Rev.
J. O. Dorsey. but in only a few cases are
their locations known: Bahekhube, Che-
ghulin (2), Djestyedje, Gakhulin, Gakhu-
linulinbe, Igamansabe, Inchi, Ishtakhe-
chiduba, Manhazitanman, Manhazulin,
Manhazulintanman, Manyinkatuhuudje,
Neblazhetama, Niudje, Padjegadjin, Pa-
sulin, Tanmangile, Waheheyingetseyal)e,
VVazhazhepa, Yuzhemakancheubukhna-
ye, Zandjezhinga, Zandjulin, and Zha-
nichi.
Alaho. — Mooney, inf'n (Kiowa name). Ansaus.—
Tnimbull, Ind. Wars, 185, 1851 (misprint). Oan-
ceze. — Cones, I/ewis and Clark ExiK'd., i, xxv,
note, 1893. CanocM.— Lewis (1806) in Orig. Jonr.
Lewis and Clark, vil, 336, 1905. Canches.— Lc
Page Du Pratz, Hist. I^., ii, 251, 1758. Canip*.—
Lewis, Trav., 3, 1809. Cans.— Maximilian, Trav.,
119, 1843 (so called by the French). OaMa.— Har-
ris, Vov. and Trav., i, map, 685, 1705. CanMs.—
Smith, Bouquet Exped.. 70, 1766. Cana^.— Iber-
ville (1702) in Margry, D^v., iv, 601, 1880. Oan-
•ez.— Charlevoix, Voy. N. Am., ii, 168, 1766.
Canzas.— Le Page Du Pratz, Hist. I^., 301. 1774.
Canzas.— Bienville (1722) in Margry. Dec, vi,:«7,
1886. Canzez.— Le Page Du Pratz, Hist. La., i, :«4,
1758. Caueh.— Whitehou.»{e (1804) in Orig. Jour.
I^wis and Clark, vii. 40, 190.5. Gauzes.— Trum-
Imll, Ind. Wars. 185. IKM. Caw.— Farnham. Trav.
We-st. Prairies, 14, 1843. Ercansaques.- .Salmeron
quoted by Dunbar in Mag. Am. Hi.st., iv, 280. 1880.
EsoanjaqucB.— Vetancurt (1693), Teatro Mex., Ill,
303, repr. 1871. Escanaaques.— Zarate-Salmeron
(ca. 1629), Relacion. in Land of Sun.shine. 45. Dec.
1899 (the original form of this name; possibly the
Kansa). Esoanxaques.— Shea (1662), Penalosa,29,
1882 (supposed by Shea to be Comanche). Es-
quansaques.— IJidd, Story of N. Mex.. 109, 1891.
Estanxaques. — Shea, Penalosti, 83, 1882. Excan-
iaquc— Zarate-Salmeron qiioted by Bancroft,
Nat. Races. I, 599, 1882. Excausaquex.— Colum-
bus Memor., 157. 1893 (misprint). Hatanga.—
Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (own
name). Ka Aiyou.— Bowen. Am. Discov. by the
Welsh, 92. 1876. Ka Anzou.— Ibid, (called Chick-
asaw name; trans, 'first men'). Kah.— Orig.
Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi. 81, 1905 (given a.s
French traders' name). Kah.— Lewis and Clark,
Discov., 13. 1806. Kamse.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
IX, 1057, 18.55. Kancas.— I>a Potherie, Hist. Am.,
II, 271, 1753. Kances.- Du Lac, Voy. dans lea
Louisianes, vi, 1805. Kana.- Pike, Exped., 123,
1810. Kansa.— Ex. Doc. 56, 18th C<mg., 1st sess, 9,
1824. Kanaa.— Coxe, Carolana. 11, 1741. Kan-
gaa.—Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1804). 1, 60, 1904.
Kanse.— La Harpe (1722) in Margry, Di^c., vi. 36.5,
1886. Ka«>s8.— Dorsey, (Xsage MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1883 (Osage and Quapaw name). Kanses.— Iber-
ville( 1702) in Margry. D<?c., iv, 599. 1880. Kansez.—
Anviile, map N.Am.. 1752. Kanaies. — Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, in, 557, 1853. Kantha.— Hamilton in
Trans. Nebr. Hist. Soc., i, 73, 1885 (Iowa name).
Kanta.— Smet. Or(»gon Miss., 161, 1847. Kanzas.—
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1804), I, 67, 1904.
Kanzeis.- Whitehouse (1805), ibid., vil, 189. 1905.
Kanzes.— Lewis and ('lark, ibid., vi, 84. Kar'-sa.—
Lewis and Clark, Discov., 13. 1806. Karaea.— Orig.
Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 84. 1905 (given as their
own name). Kasaa.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii,
37, 1853. Kathdigi.— Gatschet. MS.. B. A. E. (Shaw-
nee name). Kauias.— DorseylnAm.Antiq.,1,186,
1879 (misprint). Kauzau. — M'Coy, Ann. Reg., no.
2, 4, 1836. Kaws.— Gregg, Commerce of Prairies,
I, 41, 1844. Kaw'-«a.— Hutfaker (1873) , inf'n com-
municated by (f. P. Morehouse. 1906 (own name).
Kaw'-zi.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 1.56, 1877. Konaz— .
Latham, Philol. and Ethnol. E.ssays. 296, 1860
imisprint). Konaa.— Gat.«chet, Kaw vocab.. 27,
i. A. E., 1878. Kon-ses.— Hunter, Captiv. among
Inds., 18. 1823. Konza.— Maximilian Trav., 119,
1843. Konzas.- Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., i. 111,
1823. Les pancake.— Shea, Pefialosa. 21 , note. 1882
( = Les kanvak<:?=E.scanxaques). Kohtawas.— ten
Kate, Reizen in N. Am.. 383, 1885 (Comanche
name). Kohtawas.— ten Kate. Synonvmie, 9, 1884
(Comanche name: ' without a lo<'k of hair on the
forehead' ). Okames— Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 46,
1870. Okama.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 1057, 1855.
Okania.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ui, 557, 1853.
656
KANSAKI ^KAPOZHA
[b. a. b.
auani.— Bourgmont (1728) in Mai^gry, D^c, vi,
393, 1886. tJkaM.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E.*(Fox
name). Ukaaak.^Ibid.
Kansaki (Gdnsd^gl, Gdnsd^^yl), The
name of several distinct Cherokee settle^
ments: (1) on Tuckasegee r., a short dis-
tance above the present* Webster, in
Jackson co., N. C; (2) on the lower part
of Canasauga cr., in McMinn co., Tenn.;
(3) at the junction of Conasauga and
Coosa watee rs., where afterward was situ-
ated the Cherokee capital, New Echota,
in Gordon co., Ga.; (4) mentioned in the
De Soto narratives as Canasojja or Cana-
sagua, in 1540, on Chattahoochee r., pos-
sibly in the neighborhood of Kenesaw
mtn., Ga. (j. m. )
Oanatagua.— Gentl. of Elvas (1557) in HakluytSoc.
Pub., IX, 61, 1851. Canasauga.— Kovce in 5th Rep.
B. A. E., map. 1887. Glnsa'gi.— Mooney in 19th
Rep. B. A. E. . 518, 1900. G4n»4giyl.— Ibid.
Kanse ('Kansa'). The 14th Hangka
Osage gens and 7tli on the right side of
the tribal circle. See Kanze.
A'k'a iniiiak'&oin'a.— Dorsoy in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
234. 1797 ('south wind people'). TdaU'*.— Ibid,
('holds a lirebrand to the sacred pipes to light
them'). Kansa.— Ibid. Kan'se.— Ibid. Pe'^se
i'niqk'&cio'a.— Ibid, ('tire people'). Ta^se' i'n-
iqk'aoin'a.— Ibid, ('wind people').
Kantioo, Kantiooy. See Cantico.
Kanulik. A Nushagagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on the left bank of Nushagak r., near
its month, in Alaska; pop. 142 in 1880, 54
in 1890.
Kanoolik.— Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 47, 1880. Ka-
nulik.— PetroflF in 10th Census, Alaska, 17. 1884.
Karulik.— Elliott, Our Arct. Prov., map, 1886.
Kanatalahi (Kanu^tdWhi^ * dogwood
place*). A Cherokee settlement in n.
Georgia about the period of the removal
of the tribe in 1889. (j. m.)
Kanati. A Koyukukhotana village on
Koyukuk r., Alaska, lat. 66? 18^ with 13
inhabitants in 1885.
Kanuti.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Ko-
nootena.— Allen, Rep. Alaska, 97, 1887.
Kanwaiakaku ( Kan-wa l^-a-ka-kn ) . A
former Chumashan village near the mis-
sion of San Buenaventura, Cal . — Hensha w,
Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
Kanwasowana ( Kanwdso wci n ^, * long
tail' ). The panther gens of the Miami.
Ka-no-sa'-wa. — Morgan, Anc. Soc., 168, 1877.
Kanwasowau*. — Wm. Jones, inf n, 1906.
Kanyuksa Istiohati {i-kan-a 'ground',
i-yuk'Sa * point ' or 'tip', i. e., point of
ground, or peninsula, is-ti-tca-ti 'red men ' ) .
The native name of that branch of the
Seminole, numbering 136 in 1881, residing
8. of Caloosahatchee r., at Miami and Big
Cypress Swamp settlements, Fla. — Mac-
Cauley in 5th Rep. B. A. E., 509, 1887.
Kanze (archaic and untranslatable; ren-
dered by Dorsey * wind people ' ) . The 5th
gens on the Hangashenuside of the Omaha
tribal circle. See Kanse.
Sa»ae.— Dorsey in 3d Rep. B. A. E., 220, 1885.
on-Mu— Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., i, 327, 1823.
Kun'-za.— Morgan, Anc. Soc, 155, 1877.
Kanze ( Kansa) . Given by J. 0. Dorsey
as the 4th Kansa gens, consisting of the
Tdjeunikashinga and Tadjezhinga sub-
gentes.
Io'-ha->h«.— Morgan, Anc. See., 156, 1877 (trans.
~ ~ 1th Rep. B. A. E., 231.
Lod^-in-the-rear. -^
• tent ' ) . Ka"s«.^Dor8ey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
1897. last-lodge.— Ibid ' ' * *
Ibid. Toi haoi».— Ibid.
Kapachichin ( ' sandv shore ' ) . A Ntla-
kyapamuk town on the w. side of Eraser
r., about 28 m. above Yale, Brit. Col.:
►p. 52 in 1901.
.patci'tcin.— Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist,
Ki
11, 169, leOO. KapatsiUan.— Can. Ind. Aff. for
1901, pt. II, 164. Klapatci'tcin.— Hill-Tout in Rep.
Ethnol. Surv. Can., 5, 1899. Kopaohiohin.— Bnt.
Col. map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872. North Bend.—
Teit, op. cit. (name given by whites).
Kapaits. The conservative i)arty among
the Lagunas of New Mexico (Loew in
Wheeler Surv. Rep., vii, 339, 1879). Ac-
cording to Bandelier this party constitutes
a phratry. See Kayomasho.
KA^^AkA (Ka^-pa-ka). A former Nishi-
nam village in the valley of Bear r., n.
Cal. — Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii,
316, 1877.
Kapanai. A former village of the same
Costanoan group as Kalindaruk, and con-
nected with San Carlos mission, Cal.
Capanay.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860.
Kapanai.— A. L. Kroeber, inf'n, 1905.
Kaparoktolik. A summer settlement of
Tununirusirmiut Eskimo near the en-
trance to Ponds inlet, Baffin land. —
McClintock, Voy. of Fox, 162, 1859.
Kapaslok {K'opasldfjj 'sand roof). A
village of Ntlakyapamuk on Eraser r.,
above Suk, Brit. Col. It was formerly a
large settlement. — Ilill-Tout in Rep.
Ethnol. Surv. Can., 5, 1899.
Kapawnich. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy on the n. bank of the Rappa-
hannock, about Corotoman r., Lancaster
CO., Va., in 1608.— Smith (1629), Va., i,
map, repr. 1819.
Kapiminakonetiik. Mentioned in the
Jenuit Relations (26, 1646) as a tribe liv-
ing at some distance n. of Three Rivers,
Can. Doubtlef^s Montagnais, and possibly
the Papinachois, q. v.
Kapisilik. An Eskimo village not far
from Godthaab, n. Greenland. — Nansen,
First Crossing of Greenland, ii, 219, 1890.
Kapkapetlp (Qapqopetlpy 'place of
cedar' [?]). A Squawmisn village com-
munity at Point Grev, Burrard inlet,
Brit. Col.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A.
S., 475, 1900.
Kapozha ( * not encumbered with much
baggage ' ) . AM de wakanton Sioux band.
In 181 1 they lived between Cannon r. and
Minnesota r., and their village, known as
Kaposia, was on the e. bank of the Mis-
sissippi 15 m. below the mouth of the
Minnesota. At that time the chief was
Little Crow (Chetanwakanmani), q. v.
In 1830 their village w^as said to be 3
leagues below the mouth of Minnesota
r. Another Little Crow, who was chief
in 1862, was killed at the close of the
Sioux outbreak.
Ca-po-oia liand.— Smitbson. Misc. Coll., xnr, arte,
1878. Hii-8oarl«t-people.— Neill, Hist. Minn.. 144.
note, 1858. Kah-po-sia.— Prescott in Schoolcraft,
Ind.Tribea,pt.2,171,1852. Kahp<»hah..-8nelling,
BULL. 30]
KAFOZHA KARANKAWA
657
Tales of N. W., 197. 1880. Kahpoihay.-McKen-
ney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, i, 303, 1854. Kapoea.—
Neill in Minn. Hist. Coll., i, 263, 1872. Kapola.—
Long, Exped. 8t Peters R., i, 383, 1824. Kapo'ja.—
Dorsey in 15th Rep.B. A. E.,215. 1897. Ka-po-tias.—
Ramsay in Ind. AfT. Rep., 81, 1850. KapoU.^
Aiisland,462, 1887. Ka-po'-za.— Riggs, Dak. Gram.
and Diet.. 118, 1852. ^Kapoiha.— Williamson in
Minn. Geol. Rep.. 107, 1884. LitUs Crow's band.—
Ind. Afl. Rep., 118, 1850. Petit Oorbeau's band.—
Long, Exped. St Peters R., 380. 1824. Tahohyahtay-
dootah.— Neill, Hixt. Minn., 589, 1858 (' his scarlet
people': real name of Little Crow). Ta-o-ya-te-
dtt-te.— Ibid., 144, note.
Kaposha. A band of the Sisseton Sioux.
Kap'oja.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 1897.
Kaposa.— Riggs quoted by Dorsey, ibid.
Kapulo. The now extinct Crane clan
of theTewa of Hano pueblo, n. l. Arizona.
Ka-puMo.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 166,
1894. Kapolo-t^wa.— Hodge, ibid., ix, 350. 1896
(towa=' people').
Kaquaith. A former Clallam village at
Port Discovery, Wash.
K<-kaitl.— Qibbs, Clallam and Lumml, 20, 1863.
Xa-qnaith.— Stevens in Ind. AfT. Rep., 457, 1854.
Ka-quaitl.— Gibbs in Pae. R. R. Rep., i, 436, 1855.
Bkwi-kwel.— Gibbs, Clallam and Lumml, 20,
186S. Sqaah-qoaihtl.— U. S. Ind. Treat., 800, 1873.
8qua-4ue-hl.— Gibbs in Puc. R. R. Rep., i, 429, 1855.
Karaken (A'ard^Ag", 'it is white'). A
traditionary Iroquois town belonging to
the Bear clan and designated as one of
recent formation. (j. n. b. n.)
Xarakaiih.— Hale, IroquoiH Book of Rites, 120,
1888. Karaken.— Ibid., 121.
Xarakuka. The name given by the
main body of the Karok (q. v.) to the
divergent dialect spoken on Clear cr. and
at Happy Camp, Cal.— A. L. Kroober,
inf n, 1905.
Karankawa. A term that seems to have
been given originally to a small tril)e near
Matagorda bay, Texas, but its application
has been extended to include a num-
ber of related tribes between Galveston
bay and Padre id. The signification of
the name has not been ascertained.
Although the linguistic material obtained
is not sufficient to show positive relation
to any other language, there are very
strong indications of affinity with the dia-
lects of the Pakawa group — Pakawa,
Comecrudo, and Cotonam — still recog-
nized as a part of the Coahuiltecan family.
On the other side they were probably con-
nected with the Tonkawa. If any of the
coast tribes mentioned by Cal)eza (le Vaca
was identical with the Karankawa, which
is not unlikely, it is impossible to deter-
mine the fact. The first positive notice
of them is found in the accounts of La
Salle's ill-fated visit to that section. It
was on Matagorda bay, in the country
of the tribe at that time, that this French
explorer built his Ft St Louis. Joutel
(1687) mentions them under the name
Koienkah^ (Margry, D^c, in, 288, 1878),
probably a misprint for Korenkake,
which 18 also given. They are repre-
sented as living at that time chiefly be-
tween St Louis Day (a part of Matagorda
bay) and Maligne (Colorado) r., but are
the Indians, though mentioned under the
name Clamcoets, who massacred all ex-
cept 5 of the people left by La Salle at his
fort in 1687. If the Ebahamo, Hebobia-
mos, Bahamos, or Bracamos were identi-
cal with the Karankawa or with a por-
tion of the tril)e, which is probaole,
they were living on St l^ouis or St Ber-
nard bay in 1707 (De I'lsle's map in Win-
sor. Hist. Am., ii, 294, 1886), and are
noticed as living at the same place in
1719-21. Their abode is spoken of as an
island or peninsula in St Bernard bay
(French, Hist. Coll., ii, 11, note, 1875).
It appears from documents in the Texas
archives that in 1793 a part of the
Karankawa had l)ecome christianized
and were then living at the mission of
Nuestra Senora del Refugio (q. v. ), estab-
lished in 1791 at the mouth of Mission r.
emptying into Aransas 'bav. The papm
portion of the tribe lived at that time
contiguous to the Lipan. Later a num-
ber of the tribe were living at the mission
of Espfritu Santo de Ziiiiiga. According
to Orozco y Berra ((Jeog., 382, 1864) the
territory of the Lipan near the lower Rio
Grande bordered that occupied by the
Karankawa in 1796. An incident in the
history of the tribe was a tierce battle with
Lafitte's band of j)i rates in consequence
of the abduction of one of their women
by one of the former; the Indians, how-
ever, were forced to retreat before the
heavy fire of the buccaneers. With the
settlement made by Stephen Austin on
the Brazos in 1823 began the decline of
the tribe. Conflicts })etween the settlers
and the Indians were frequent, and finally
a battle was fought in which a])out half
the tribe were slain, the other portion
fleeing for refuge to La Bahia presidio on
San Antonio r. They took sides with the
Americans in the Texan war of indepen-
dence, in which their chief, Josi'* Maria,
was killed, as were most of his w^arriors,
amounting, however, to only about 20.
Mention is made of 10 or 12 families liv-
ing between 1839 and 1851 on Aransas
bay and Nueces r. According to Bonnell
(Topog. Descrip. Texas, 137, 1840) the
Karankawa in 1840 had become reduced
to 100, living on Lavaca bay. In 1844,
having murdered one of the whites on
Guadalupe r., they fled toward the mouth
of the Rio Grande, one part stopping on
Padre id. and the other passing into Mex-
ico. But few references are made to
them after this date, and these are con-
flicting. A report (juoted ])y Gatschet
says the history of these Indians termi-
nates with an attack made on them in
1858 by Juan Nepomuceno Cortina with
other Vancheros, when they were sur-
prised at their hiding place in Texas and
exterminatcHl.
The men are described as very tall and
well formed, the women as shorter and
Bull. 30—05-
-42
658
KARANKAWAN FAMILY KARIGOUI8TE8
[b. i
fleshier. Their hair was unusually coarse,
and worn so long by many of the men
that it reached to the waist. Agriculture
was not practised by these Indians, their
food supply being obtained from the wa-
ters, the chase, and wild plants, and, to
a limited extent, human flesh; for, like
most of the tribes of the Texas coast, they
were cannibals. Travel among them was
almost wholly by the canoe, or dugout,
for they seldom left the coast. Head-
flattening and tattooing were practii^ed to
a considerable extent. Little is known
in regard to their tribal government, fur-
ther than that they had civil and war
chiefs, the former being hereditary in the
male line. (See Gatschet, Karankawa
Inds., 1891.)
The following tribes or villages were
probably Karankawan: Coaque, Ebaha-
mo, Emet, Kouyam, Meracouman, Quara,
Quinet, and Toyal. The following were
in the country of the Karankawa, but
whether linguistically connected with
them is not certain: Ahehouen, Ahouer-
hopiheim, Arhau, Chorruco, Doguenes,
Kabaye, Kiabaha, Kopano, Las Mulas,
Mariames, Mendica; Mora, Ointemarhen,
Omenaosse, Pataquilla, Quevenes, San
Francisco, and Spichehat.
(a. c. f. j. r. s.)
Caraxnwieg.— MeziOrcs (1778) quoted by Bancroft,
No. Mex. States, i, 661, 18«6 (distinct from the Xar-
amanea = Aramanes). Oar&ncaguaoas. — Doc. of
1796 quoted by Orozco y Berra, Geog., 382, 1864.
Oaranoasuazet.— Rivera, Diario, leg. 2602, 1736.
CarancSuas.— Mail lard. Hist. Tex., 238, 251, 1842.
Caranoahuases.— Do<>. of 1828 in Soc. (teog. Mex.,
504, 1869. Carancahuazeg.— Doc. of 1793 quoted by
Gatschet, Karankawa Inds., 28, 1891. Caranca-
nay.— Robin, Voy. Louisiane, in, 1.% 1807. Caran-
oouas. — Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 101,
1856. Caranhouas. — Lewis and Clark, Jour., 155,
1840. Carankahuas.— Latham in Trans. Philol.
Soc. Lond., 103, 1856. Carankawaeg.— French,
Hist. Coll. La., li, 11, note, 1875. Carankonag.—
Domenech, Deserts N. A., I, 440, 1860. Caran-
kouas.— Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 72, 1806. Caran-
kowayg.— Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, v, 571, 1855.
Oazancanay.— Robin, Voy. Louisiane, in, 14, 1807.
Charankoua.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 544,
1853. Clamcoetg.— Joutel, Jour, du Dernier Voy.
de La Salle, 74, 1713. Coiencaheg.— Barcia, Ensayo,
271, 1723. Coran-canas.— Schermerhom (1812) in
Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d s., ii, 25, 1814. Corankoua.—
Brackenridge, Views La., 81, 1814. Coronkawa. —
Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 374, 1822. Coronkg.— A
popular abbreviation in Texas for Karankawa.
Curancahuageg.— Escudero, Not. de Chihuahua,
231, 1834. Karankawayg.— Ind. AfT. Rep., 30, 1850.
Karankoag.— Sanford, Hist. U. S.. clxvii, 1819.
Karankoo-ag.— Brackenridge, Views La., 87, 1814.
Keleg.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. ('wrestlers': Ton-
ka wa name). Kikanonag. — Barcia, Ensayo, 263,
1723. Kironnonag.— French, Hist. Coll. La., ii,
11, note, 1875. Kironomeg. — Charlevoix, New
France, Shea ed., iv, 88, 1870. Kirononag.— Coxe,
Carolana, :«, 1741. Koienkahe.— Joutel (1687) in
Margry, D<Jc., iii, 288, 1878. Korenkake.— Joutel
(1687) in French, Hist. Coll. La., 1, 137, 1846. Ko-
ronkg.—Bollaert (1849) quoted by Gatschet, Karan-
kawa Inda.. 3.5, 1891. Hda kun-dadehe.— Gatschet,
Li pan MS., B. A. E., 1884 (Li pan name: mid 'peo-
ple', kun 'water', dadlhe 'going walking': 'peo-
ple walking in the water'). <luelamoueonM.— De
I'lsle map (^«. 1707) in WiiLSor, Hist. Am., ii, 294,
1886. auglancouchig.— Iberville (1699) in Margry,
D^c, IV, 316, 1880. auelanhubecheg.— Barcia, En-
sayo, 294, 1723 (probably identical). Quinereg.—
Ibid., 2.59 (identical?), auinetg.— Douay in Shea,
Discov. , 207, 210, 1852 ( identical?) . TampaouaMt.—
Reports of the Mex. Border Commission, 406, 1878.
Taranoahuageg.— Doc. of 1828 quoted by Gatschet,
Karankawa Inds., 34, 1891. Yakokon U[pai.~
Gatschet, Tonkawa MS., B. A. E„ 145 (• without
moccasins': Tonkawa name, including also the
Coahuiltecan coa.st tribes).
Karankawan Family. A family estab-
lished by Powell (7th Rep. B. A. E., 82,
1891) on the lan^age of the Karankawa
tribe as determined by Gatschet. Al-
though this and the related tribes are
extinct, investigation has led to the con-
clusion that the Coaque, Ebahamo, and
other tribes or settlements of the Texas
coast mentioned under Karankawa (q. v. )
should be included in the family.
Karezi. An unidentified trine men-
tioned as living w. of L. Superior and dis-
tinct from the Cree.— Jes. Rel. 1667, 23,
1858.
Karhadage (*in the forest.'— Hewitt).
An unidentified tribe, band, or village,
probably in Canada, with which the Iro-
quois affirmed they had made peace in
1701. Mentioned with the Chippewa,
Missisauga, Nipissing, and others (Living-
ston in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 899, 1854).
Cf. Karhagaghroonetjj KarigouisteSy Karri-
haet. (j. M.)
Karhagaghrooney {Karhagaronon, * peo-
ple of the woods'). According to Sir
Wm. Johnson a name applied bv the Iro-
quois to wandering Indians n. of Quebec;
but as he suggests Carillon -on Ottawa r.
as the best point for a post of trade with
them, they were probably more to the
westward. Dobbs located them n. of L. ,
Huron. The term is a collective one, re-
ferring to wandering bands of different
tribes, possibly to the Tetes de Boule, and
to those called O'pimittish Ininiwac by
Henry.
Karhasaghrooneyt.— Johnson (1764) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist, VII, 658, 1856. Kirhawguagh Roanu.—
Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 28, 1744.
Karhationni {Kdrhiitiofl^nt\ 'a forest
lying extended lengthwise'). A tradi-
tionary Iroquois village belonging to the
Wolf clan; location unknown.
(.T. N. B. H.)
Karhat£oimi. — Hale, Iixxiuois Book of Rites, 118,
1883. Karhetyoimi.— Ibid., 119.
Karhawenradonh ( Karhawt'^ ^hrd^do"* ) .
A traditionary Iroquois town belonging
to the Bear clan and to those towns
designated as cf recent formation; loca-
tion unknown. ( j. n. b. h. )
Karhawenghradongh.— Hale, IroquoLs Book of
Rites, 120, 1883. Ka rho wengh ra don.— Ibid., 121.
Kariak. An Eskimo settlement close to
Amaralik fjord, w. Greenland. — Crantz,
Hist. Greenland, i, S, 1767.
Kariak. A summer settlement of Aivi-
lirmiut Eskimo on Lyon inlet, n. end of
Hudson bay. — Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E.,
450, 1888.
Karigonistes. The name given by the
Iroquois to the Catholic Indians of Can-
ada, probably more especially to the
BULL. 30]
KARKIN KARRIHAKT
659
Caughiiawa^i^a. The name Beenis to have
reference to a long drew», possibly the
gowns worn by the priest**, (j. n. b. h. )
0»nifiii»t«.— Colden (1727}, Five Nations, 1(3, 1747.
Karigoiiistei.— Bacqueville de la Potherie. iii, 200.
1758. KariftotM.— Dellins ( 1694) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., IV, 05, 1854.
Karkin. A division of the Costanoan
Indians inhabiting the country s. of
Carquinez strait**, San Francisco bay,Cal.,
the name of the straits lx»ing derived from
that of the Indians. According to Kotze-
bue they extended e. as far as the mouth
of San «foaquin r.
Oarqnin.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18. 1H61.
Jarquin. — Ibia. Karkin.— Arroyo de la (UicNta,
Idiomas Californias, MS. trann., B. A. K. Kar-
qoiiiat.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. Kore-
kins.— Kotzebue, New Voy. (1823-2t>), ii. 111, 1H30.
Karlok. A Kaniagmiut village on the
N. coast of Kmliak id., Alaska, where
there are large salmon canneries; pop.
302 in 1880, 1,123 in 1890, 1,864 in 1900.
Oarlook.— Lisianski i^lSOTt), (juoted by Baker. (Wog.
Diet. Alaska, 1902. Karloooh.— Ibid. Karluta.—
Coxe. after Shelikof, quoted by Baker, ibid.
Vuaakaehwak. — Holmberg, P^thno^. Skizz., map,
1855.
Karmakdjuin {QunnaqdjuiUy 'large
huts'). A. summer settlement of the
Akudnirmiut Eskimo on Home bay,
Baffin land.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E.,
441, 1888.
Karmakdjiiin. A village of Padlimiut
Eskimo on the coast just x. of Exeter wl.,
Baffin land.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E.,
map, 1888.
Karmang (QarnKimj, 'hut'). A sum-
mer settlement of Talirpinjrmiut Okomiut
Eskimo at the n. w. end of Nettilling lake,
w. of Cuml)erland sd. — Boas in 6th Rep.
B.A.E., map, 1H88.
Karmenak. An Ita I'^kimo settlement
in N. Gret»nland.— Kane, A ret. Explor.,
II, 127, 1856.
Karmentamka. A former village of the
Rumsen, connecteil with San Carlos mis-
sion, Cal.
Oanneataruka.— Taylor in (?«1. Farmer, Apr. 20,
1860.
Karok (k(iruk\ 'upstream'; they have
no name for themselves other than that
for *men* or * people', amr, whence
Arra-array Ara-ara, etc.). The name by
which the Indians of th<» Quoratean
family have, as a triln?, lH»en jjenerally
called. They lived on Klamath r. froiii
Redcap cr. to Indian cr., n. w. Cal.
Below them on the river were the
Yurok, a])ove them the Shasta, to their
B. were other Shastan tribes, while on
the w. they were separattnl by a spur
of the Siskiyou mts. from the Yurok and
the Athapascan Tolowa. Salmon r., a
tributary of the Klamath, was not Karok
territory except for about 5 m. fn^n its
mouth,'but was held mainly by Shastan
tribes. While the Karok laiVuajje is fun-
damentally different from tht^ lan^ages
of the adja(»ent Hupa and Yurok, the
Karok people closely resemble these two
tribes in mo<le of life and culture, and any
description given of the latter will apply
to the Karok. They differ from the
Yurok j)rin<'ipally in two points: One,
that owin^ to the absence of redwood they
do not make canoes but buy them from
the Yurok; the other, that they celebrate
a series of aimual ceremonies called "mak-
ing? the world," which are held at Pan-
amenik, Katimin, ami Inam, with a sim-
ilar observance at Amaikiara, while the
Yurok |>o8sess no strictly analogous pi»r-
formances. The Karot had no divi-
sions other than villages, and while these
extendeil along the entire extent of their
territory, three important clusters are
re(!ogniza])le, in each of which there was
one village at which certain ceremonies
were held that were ol)served nowhere
else. Panamenik, on the site of Orleans
Bar, and several other st^ttlements formed
the first group; the second was about the
mouth of Salmon r. and comprised Amai-
kiara, Ashipak, Ishipishi, Katimin, Shan-
amkarak, and others; in the third and
northernmost group the most important
villages were Inam, at the mouth of Clear
cr., and Asisufuunuk at Happy Camp.
In the first two groups a single dialect was
si)oken; in the last, the farthest upstream,
a divergent dialect called Karakuka was
employed.
Following is a list of the Karok villages:
Amaikiara, Aperger, Apyu, A rani -
mokw, Ashipak, Asisufuunuk, Chainiki,
Chawak(mi, Chinits, Couth, Homnipa,
Homuarup, 1ft, Inam, Inotuks, Ishipishi,
Ishwidip, lyis, Katimin, Katipiara, Ko-
kaman, Kworatem, Ohetur, Olegel, Oler,
Opegoi, Panamenik, Pasara, Sawuara,
Shanamkarak, Shegoashkwu, Sumaun,
Sunum, Supjisip, Tishrawa, Tsano, Ts<»fk-
ara, Tui, Uchaim, Unharik, Wetsitsiko,
Wopum, and Yutovara.
Ara.— Gatsehet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. 1,
xlvi, 1890 (sig. 'man'). Ara-ara.— Ibid. Arra-
Arra.— C'rook, ibid., in, 447, 1S77. Cahrocs.— Pow-
ers in Overland Mo., ix, ir>7. 1M72. Oahroet.—
Kcane in Stanford. Comiwnd., r)04, 1878. Cit-
quiouwg.— Meek in H. R. Ex. I)<h'. 76, 30th Ck)nj:..
l8t sess., 10, 1818 (may include also Yun)k ana
Sha.»<ta). Ivap'i.— A. L. KnK-lK'r, inf'n, 1903
(vShasta nanuM. Kahnik.— (fibl)s(l8nl) in School-
craft. Ind. Tribes, ni. 151, mw.' Karok.— rowers
in Conl. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 19, 1877. Orleans
Indiana. — KnK^bcr. inf'n. 1903 ("KometimeH lo-
cally used, especially downstream from the
Kan)k territory). Patesick.— McKee (18.51) in
Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec. ses.M., 194, 1853.
Patih-riki.— Meyer, Nach dem Sacramento, 282,
18.'>.'>. Peh-Uik.— (f ibbs ( 18.51 ) in SclKH)lcraft, Ind.
Tribes, in, V^x, 18,'>3 (Yun)k name; sig. ' ui>-
stream'— KnH»lK'r). Petit-sick.— McKee, op. cit.,
Ifil. Petsikla.—Knx'ber. inf'n, 190;i( Yurok name).
Upper Klamath.— McKee, op. cit., 194.
Karrihaet. (tiven as the nameof atriln',
proba])ly in Canada, with whom the
I rocjuois made pt^ace in 1 701 . Mentioned
with the Chipj)t»wa, Missisaupa, Nipis-
sinj;, and others.— Li vinjrst<m (1701) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 899, 1854. Cf.
Karigouistegj Karhadage,
660
KARSOK KASHTU
[b. a. e.
Kartok. An Eskimo village in w. Green-
land, lat. 72° 4(y.
Karsok.— Science, xi, 259, 1888. Karsuk.— Kane,
Arct. Explor., i, 458, 1856.
Karsnit. A village of Ita Eskimo on
Inglefield gulf, n. Greenland.
Kar«ioot.— Kane, Arct. Explor., Ii, 212, 1856.
Kanooit.— Hayes, Arct. Boat. Joum., 307, 1860.
Karsnkan. A spring settlement of Oko-
miut Eskimo of Saumia, on the coast of
Baffin land, n. of Cumberland sd. — Boas
in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888.
Kamsuit (* the caves*). A village of
the Talirpingmiut Okomiut Eskimo on
Nettilling fjord, w. shore of Cumberland
sd. ; pop. 29 in 1883.
Kaiossuit.— Boas in Deutsche Geog. Blatt., vni,
32, 1885. K'aruMuit.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt.,
no. 80, 70, 18S5. Kemaiuit.— Kumlien in Bull.
Nat. Mus., no. 15, 15, 1879. Kemetuit.— Ibid.
Simmooksowiok.— Wareham in Jour. Roy. Geog.
Soc, XII, 24, 1842. QaruMuit.— Boas in 6th Rep.
B. A. E., 426, 1888.
Karnsnk. An Eskimo settlement near
Ameralik fjord, lat. 64° 20^ w. Green-
land.—Nansen, First Crossing of Green-
land, II, 416, 1890.
Kasaan (pronounced ])y Haida GAsa^rij
])ut said to ])e from Tlingit Kd^st-an,
' pretty town ' ) . One of the three towns
in Alaska still occupied by the Haida;
situated on Skowl arm of Kasaan bay,
E. coast of Prince of Wales id. Chat-
c*hee-nie, the name of a Kaigani town
in John Work's list of 1836-41, was
either a camjnng place of the people of
Kasaan or a town occupied by them
l)efore moving to the latter place. In
W^ork's time it liad 18 houses and 249
people. Pctroff gives the population of
Kasaan (and ^'Skowl") in 1880 as 178,
and the Census of 1890 as 46; the present
number is insignificant. The family that
settled here was theTadjilanas. (.i. r. s. )
GAsa'n.—S wanton, Cont. Haida, 282, 1905. Ka-
saan.—U. S. Coast Surv. map of Alaska, south-
east sec. , Apr. 1898. Kawan.— PetroflF in 10th Cen-
sus, Alaska, 32, 1884. Kawan Haadt.— Harrison
in Proc. and Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., sec. ii, 125,
1895.
Kasaktikat (A'a-«a/:-f/^-/:aO. A former
Chumashan village at a place called Ba-
jada de la Canada, in Yentnra (-o., Cal. —
Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B.
A. E., 1884.
Kasenos {Ka^-se-7ios). A village, prob-
ably of the Cathlacumup, formerly sit-
uated where Scappoose cr. empties into
Willamette slough, Greg.— Gibbs, MS.
248, B. A. E.
Kashahara. The Karok name of the
Wintun of Trinity r., n. Cal. (Kroeber,
infn, 1903). The Trinity r. Wintun
consisted of the Normuk, Tientien, and
Waikenmuk.
Kashaiak. A Togiagamiut Eskimo vil-
lage on Togiak r. , near its jimction with
the Kashaiak, Alaska; pop. 181 in 1880.
Kashaiak.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kaah-
ftiyak.— Spurr and Post quoted by Baker, ibid.
Kissaiakh.— Petroff in 10th Census, Ala.ska, 17, 1884.
KiMiak.—Petroff.Rep. on Alaska, 49, 1880. Ki '
akh.— Nelson in 18th Rep B. A. E., map, 1900.
Kashiga. An Aleut village on Unalaska
id., Alaska. Pop. 41 in 1833 (at which
date it was the headquarters of the fore-
man of the Russian-American Co. for the
w. half of Unalaska), according to Veni-
aminoff ; 74 in 1874, according to Shieene-
kov; 73 in 1880; 46 in 1890.
Kashega.— Sarichef(1792) quoted by Baker, Geog.
Diet. Ala.Mka, 1902. Kashiga,— 11th Census, Alaska,
89,1893. Kashigin.— Ibid. Kotohiginakoje.— Holm-
berg, Ethnog. Skizz., map, 142, 1855. Xothegen-
skoi.— Elliott. Cond. Aff. Alaska, 226, 1875. Koah-
igiii.— PetroflF, Rep. on Ala.ska, 20, 1880. Xoshi-
^nskoe.— VeniaminolT, Zapiski, ii, 202, 1840.
Kashigalak. A Kaialigmiut Eskimo vil-
lage in the middle of Nelson id., Alaska;
pop. 10 in 1880.
Kaahigalagamute.— Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 54,
1881. Kashigalogamut.— Nelson (1878) quoted by
Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska,1902. Kashigalogumut.—
Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E.. map, 1900. Kariii-
galuk.— Baker, op.cit.
Kashiwe (Kas-hV-we), AformerChuma-
shan village near New hall. Yentiira no.,
Cal., at a place now called Cuesta Santa
Susdna.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS.
vocab., B. A. PI, 1884.
Kashkachuti {Kash-kach^-u-ti). A pueblo
of the Acoma which, according to tradi-
tion, was inhabited in prehistoric times
during the migration of the tribe from the
mythic Shipapu in the indefinite n.—
Hodge in Century Mag., lvi, 15, May,1898.
Kashkekoan ( * people of [the r. ] Kftshk* ) .
A Tlingit division at Yakutat, Alaska, that
is said to hAve migrated from the Atha-
pascan country on the upper part of Cop-
per r. It belongs to the Raven phratry.
K&ok!e qoan.— Swanton, field notes, B. A. E.,1904.
K&schke-kon.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 116, 1885.
Kashong. A former Seneca settlement
on Kashong cr., at its entrance into Sen-
eca lake. It is first mentioned in 1765,
and contained 14 houses when destroyed
by Sullivan in Sept., 1779. (j. m.)
Cashaem.— MS. Jour, of 1787 quoted by Ctonover,
Kanadasega and Geneva M S. , B. A. E. Oashong.—
Ibid. Gaghasieanhgwe. — Ibid. Gaffhsiongua.—
Ibid. Gaghaonghgwa. — Ibid. Gaghsonthwa. —
Kirkland Tl766) quoted by Conover, ibid. Gag-
•onghwa.— Ibid. Gahasieaiihgwe.— Ibid. Garhaw-
quash.— Morgan, League Iroq., map, 1861. Gath-
•iungua.— Jour, of 1687 quoted by CJonover, MS.,
B.A.E. Gothewjunqueon.— Ibid. Gothsenquean.--
Ibid. Gothteunquean.— Ibid. Gothsinquea.— Ibid.
Kariianquash.— Ibid. Kariionff.— Ibid. Kashon-
Saash.— Ibid. Kershong.— Ibid. Kuihang.— Ibid,
henawaga.— Ibid .
Kash's Village. A summer camp of a
Stikine chief on Etolin id., Alaska; 40
people were there in 1880.— Petroff in
10th Census, Alaska, 32, 1884.
Kashtata (K'aC'ta^-td,). A former Ta-
kelma village on the s. side of Rogue r.,
above Leaf cr. and Galice cr., Greg. — Dor-
sey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 235, 1890.
Kashtok (Kac-to^k). A former Chuma-
shan village in the interior of Ventura co.,
Cal.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo-
cab., B. A. E., 1884.
Kashtn ( Kac-tti ) . A former Chumashan
village on the Eioi, a tributary of Santa
Clara r., Ventnra. co,, Cal.— Henshaw,
Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
BULL. 30]
KA9HUNTTK KASKASKTA
661
Kashuniik. A Magemiut Eskimo village
on the Kashanuk outlet of Yukon r.,
Alaska; pop. 125 in 1880, 232 in 1890, 208
in 1900.
Kashunahmiut.— 11th Census, Alaska, 111, 1893.
Kathunok.— PetrofT in 10th Census, Alaska, 54, 1884.
Kaahunuk.— Nelson (1878) quoted by Baker, Geog.
Diet. Alaska, 1902. Keguna.— 12th (Xmsus Rep.
Kashutuk. — A Chnagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on an island of the Yukon delta,
A&ska; pop. 18 in 1880.
Kathtttok.— Petrof! in 10th Census, Alaska, map,
1884. Xathutuk.— Nelson (1878} quoted by Baker,
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kushutuk.— Nelson in
18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899.
Kasigianguit ( * little f resh water seals. ' —
Boas). An Eskimo village near Ameralik
fjord, w. Greenland, lat. 64° 10^. — Nansen,
First Crossing of Greenland, ii, 376, 1890.
Kasihta. A former Lower Creek town
on the E. bank of Chattahoochee r., in
Chattahoochee co., Ga., 2i m. below
Kawita, its branch settlements extending
along the w. side of the river. It was
visited by De Soto in 1540, and is re-
ferred to under the name Casiste by the
Gentleman of Elvas as a great town.
In 1799 it was considered the largest of
the Lower Creek towns, containing, with
its dependencies, 180 warriors and in
1832 it had 620 families and 10 chiefs.
Hawkins (SkeU'h, 58, 1843), in 1799,
described a large conical mound, with
the *'old Cussetah town " near it, which
afterward was settle<l by the Chickasaw.
Apatai, now spelled Upatoie, was a branch
village. The Kasihla j)eople believed
they were descended from the sun, and a
curious migration legend, preserved by
Von Reck, existed among them (see
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 133-34,
1884), from which it appears that the
Kawita were originally the same people
as those of Ka*<ihta, and that they sepa-
rated in very ancient times. Cusseta, a
variant of Kasihta, is now the name of a
town in Chaml)ers co., Ala., and another
is in Chattahoochee co., Ga. A district
in the Creek Nation, Okla., was once
called Cuseta. • (a. s. <i. )
Cawtwda.— Crawford (1830) in H. R. Doc. 274. 25th
Cong., 2d BOSS., 24, 1838. Oaseitas.— Boudinot, Star
in the West, 126, 1816. Caaica.— Ban^ia (1693),
Ensavo, 287, l?23. CasisU.— Ibid.,333. Cautte.—
Gentleman of Elvas (1557) in French, Hist. Coll.
La., II, 155, 1850. Oassetash.— White (1787) in Am.
State Pap., Ind. Aflf., i, 21, 1832. Ca««iU.— Swan
(1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 2M, 1855.
OuiaU.— Ind. Aflf. Rep., 865, 1854. Cugetah*.— U. S.
Ind. Treat. ( 1779) , 69, 1837. Ousetat.— Lattr6, Carte
des Etats-Unis, 1784. Ouihetaet. — Coxe, Carolana,
23, 1741. Ousitat.— Alcedo, Die. Geog., i, 738, 178<).
Ourita»h.—White(1787)in Am. State Pap.Jnd. Aflf.,
I, 20, 1832. 0uMeta.>-Gat8chet, Creek Migr. Leg.,
II, 180, 1888. Ouatetaht — McGlllivray (1787) In
Am. State Pap., Ind. Aflf., i, 18, 1832. Ouuetas.—
Pickett, Hist. Ala., passim, 1851. OusseUu.— U. S.
Ind. Treat. (1814), 162, 1837. Cuwetaw.— Census of
1832 in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 678, 1854. Cus-
M-toh.— Hawkin8(1799), Sketch,25,57,l&18. Ousai-
tahi.— Swan (1791) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v,
262, 1856. 0u»8ito\— Romans, Florida, i, 280, 1775.
OuMutat.— Boudinot. Star in the West, 126, 1816.
Kadstaa.— MUfort, M^moire, 118, 1802. Old Cum-
taw.— Woodward, Reminis., 14, 1859. XlMeU.—
Bartram, Travels, 457, 1791.
Kasilof. A Knaiakhotana village on
the E. coast of Cook inlet, at the mouth
of Kasilof r., Alaska. A settlement was
planted there by the Russians in 1786,
called .St George. Pop. 81 in 1880; 117,
in 7 houses, in 1890.
Georgiefikaia.— Russian map cited by Baker, Geog.
Diet. Alaska, 232. 1902. Kaswlo.— Petroff in 10th
Census, Alaska, 29, 1«84. Ka««ilof.— Ibid., map.
Kussilof.— Post route map, 1903.
Kasispa (hiisVs 'a ])oint', pa locative:
* at the point ' ) . A Paloos villajje at Ains-
worth, at the junction Of Snake and
Columbia rs.. Wash.
Cosispa.— Ross, P^ur Hunters, i, 185, 1855. Ka-
■rgpa.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,-73r>, 1896.
Kaska. Given by Dawson (Rep. Geol.
Surv. Can., 199b, 1889) as a division of the
Nahant^ comprising the Achetotena
(Etchareottine) and Dahotena (Etagot-
tine) tribes. They are described as un-
dersized and of poor physique, have the
reputation of being timid, and are lazy
and untrustworthy, but are comparatively
prosperous, as their country yields gooil
furs in abundance. Ac(*ording to Morice
(Trans. Can. Inst., vii, 519, 1892-93),
however, *' Kaska is the name of no tril)e
or subtril)e, but McDane cr. is called by
the Nahane Kasha . . . and this is the
real word which, corrupte<l into Cassiar
by the whites, has since a score of years
or more served to designate the whole
mining region from the Coast range to
the Rocky mts., along and particularly
to the N. of the Stickeen r." The name
Kaska is not recognized l)y the Indians
themselves, who form the third division
of Morice's classification of the Nahane.
They number about 200. (a. f. c.)
Kaskakoedi ('people of Kaskek'). A
division of the Raven phratry of the
Tlingit, living at Wrangell, Alaska.
They are said to have come from among
the Masset Haida and to have received
their name from a i)lace (Kasq!e''k")
wlu»re they canxped during the migration.
Kaas-ka-qua-tee.— Kane, Wand, in N. A., app.,
1869. Kasq'ague'de.— Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes
of Can., 25. 1K89. Kasqlakue'di.—S wanton, field
notes, B. A. E.. 1904. Kasara-kiiedi.— Krau.se, Tlin-
kit Ind., 120, 1885.
Kaskanak. A Kiatagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on Kvichak r., where it flows from
L. Iliamna, Alaska; ])o]). 119 in 1880, (>6
in 1890.
Kaakanakh.— Post route map, 1903. Kaakanek.—
PetrofT. Rep. on Alaska, map, 1880. Kaakinakh.—
Ibid.. 45.
Kaskaskia (perhaps akin to kdskaska- V^ ^
hamv^y *hescrapesitoffbymeansofatool.'
The Foxes have always held the Peoria
in low esteem, and in their traditions
claim to have destroyed most of them on
a rocky island in a river. — Wm. Jones).
Once the leading tribe of the Illinois con-
federacy, and perhaps rightly to be con-
sidered as the elder brother of the group.
Although the first knowledge of this con-
federacy obtained by the whites related,
in all probability, to the Peoria while
662
KASKASEIA
[B.
they yet resided on the Mississippi, it is
probable that the references to them in
the Jesuit Relations of 1670 and 1671,
from the reports of Father Allouez, apply
to the Kaskaskia on upper Illinois r.
and possibly to some minor tribes or
bands connected therewith whose names
have not been pre8€»rve<l. Although it
hai* been asserted that earlier visits than
that of Marquette in 1673 were made to
this people by the whites, there is no sat-
isfactory evidence to justify this conclu-
sion. Their chief village, which had the
same name as that of the tribe, is sup-
posed to have been situated about the
present site of Ctica, La Salle co., 111.
Marquette states that at the time of his
first visit the village was compose<l of 74
crabins. He returne<l again in the spring
of 1674 and established the mission of
Immaculate Conception among them. It
appears that by this time the village had
increaseil to somewhat more than a hun-
dreil cabins. Allouez, who followed as
the next missionary, states that when he
came to the place in 1677 the village con-
tained 351 cabins, and that while the vil-
lage formerly consisted of but one nation
( tribe ) , at the time of his visit it was com-
pof<ed of 8 tri])es or i)eoples, the addi-
tional ones having come up from the
neighborhood of the Mississippi. Al-
though the known Peoria village was
some distance away, it may be that at
this time this tribe and the Moingwena
resided at the Kaskaskia village. This is
implied in an expression by Gravier, who
speaks of the Mugulasha "forming a vil-
lage with the Baiougoula [Bayogoula] as
the l^oiiaroiia [Peoria] do with the Kas-
kaskia." This, however, would lead to
the supposition, if the statement by Al-
louez be accepted as correct, that there
were other bands or tril)es collected here
at the time of his mission whose names
have not survived. Possibly they may
have been bands of the Mascoutin or the
Miami. Kaskaskia was the village of the
Illinois which La Salle reached about the
close of Dec., 1679, on his first visit south-
ward from the lakes. He found it unoc-
cupied, however, the inhabitants being
on a hunting expedition. The French
mission was maintained at this place un-
der Fathers Rasles, Gravier, Binneteau,
Pinet, and Marest, until about the close
of 1700. At that time the Kaskaskia, in-
fluenced by a desire to join the French in
Louisiana, resolved to separate from their
brethren and migrate to the lower Missis-
sippi. Gravier was much opposed to this
movement, and although he arrived on
the ground too late to prevent their depar-
ture, he was successful in checking the
blow which the indignant Peoria and
Moingwena were about to inflict on them.
It was also through his influence that
they were induced to halt at the mouth
of Kaskaskia r., where they made their
home, on or near the site of the present
town of Kaskaskia, Randolph co., 111.,
until their removal w. of the Mississippi
under the treaty of Oct. 27, 1832. Ac-
cording to Hutchins, in 1764 the Kaskaskia
numbered 600, but he gives the number in
1778 as 210 individuate, including 60 war-
riors. They were then in a village about
3 m. N. of the present town of Kaskaskia,
greatly degenerate<i and debauched.
The tribe participated in the treaties of
Greenville, Ohio, Aug. 3, 1795, and Ft
Wayne, Ind., June 7, 1803, made by the
tribes of the n. w. with Anthony Wayne
and William H. Harrison. In the treaty
of Aug. 13, 1803, at Vincennes, Ind., it is
stated that the tn\ye constitutes **the re-
mains of and rightfully represents all the
tribes of the Illinois Indians, ori^nally
called the Kaskaskia, Mitchigamia, Ca-
hokia, and Tamaroi.'* By this treaty
they were taken under the immediate care
and patronage of the United States and
promised protection against the other In-
dians. By treaty msSe at Castor Hill.
Mo., Oct. 27, 1832, they ceded to the United
States all their lands e. of the Mississippi
except a single tract reserve<l to Ellen
Ducoigne, the daughter of their late chief.
Previous to this, however, the remnants
of the various tril)e8 of the Illinois con-
federacy had consolidated wuth the Kas-
kaskia and Peoria. By the treaty of
Washington, May 30, 1854, the consoli-
dated tribes ceded to the United States
part of the tracts held by them under the
treatv of 1832, above mentioned, and un-
der tlie treaty with the Piankashaw and
Wea, Oct. 29, 1832, reserving 160 acres for
each member of the tribe and 10 sections
as a tribal reserve. By the treaty of
Washington, Feb. 23, 1867, land was as-
signed them in the n. e. corner of Indian
Ter.
The consolidated bands, including also
the remnant of the Wea and Piank^haw
and now known officially as Peoria, num-
bered altogether in 1905 only 195, hardly
one of whom was of pure Indian blood.
Their totem or crest was an arrow
notched at the feather, or two arrows
supporting each other like a St Andrew's
cross. (j. M. c. T. )
OaoAohias.— La Salle (1682) in Margry, Ddc, n,96,
1877. Oarcarilioa.— Hennepin, New Discov., 810,
1698 (?an Illinois division about 1680). Om.— Mai^
ain (1753) in Margry. D6c., vi, 654, 1886. Oaaea-
chias.— Memoir of 1718 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
IX, 891. 1855. OasoaoU.— La Salle (1682) in Maigry.
D^., I, 508, 1875. Oatoakias.— La Harpe (1719),
ibid., VI, 310, 1886. Oaaoaquias.— Oassefeld, map,
1784. Oaw^asohia.— La Salle (1681) in Manrry,D4c.,
II, 134. 1877. Oasoaskias.— Perkins and Peck, An-
nals of the West. 55,1850. Oaseaiqoia.— Joutel(1687)
in Margry, D^c, in. 476, 1878. Oaakacniaa.— De
risle map (ca. 1710) in Neill, Minn., 18^ Oaska-
quiat.— Doc. of 1748 in N. Y. Doc. Ctol. Hist., x, 142,
1858. Casquasquia.— Joutel (1687) in Maigry, D4c.,
111,481,1878. Oasquiart.— Writer in Smith, Boa-
BULL, aoi
KAS-LANAS KATCHADI
663
quet Expcd., 66, 1766. Casquias.— Smith, ibid.
Huakhntkeys.— Croghan (1765) in Monthly Am.
Jour. Qeol., 272, 1831. Kaoaskias.— La Harpc
(1719) in Margr>', D6c., vi, 309, 1886. Kachkach-
kia.-Allouez (1677) in Shea. Mias. Val.. 74, 1852.
Kaohkaaka.— Marquette map {ca. 1678) in Shea,
ibi<l. Kakaakfgi.— Gatoehet, Shawnee MS., B. A.
E., 1879 (Shawnee name, sing., Kakaskl). Ka-
kaaky.— Imlay, West. Ter., 364, 1797. Karhaski.—
LoKkiel (1794) quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes Hud-
son r.. 336, 1872. Karkadia.— Perkins and Peek,
Annals of the West, 61, 1S50. Kasfcresquios.— Bu-
chanan, N. Am. Inds., 15.'>, 1824. Kaskaisas.—
Doc. of 1717 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 876, 1855.
Xaakaiakas.— JefTerys, French Doms., pt. 1, map,
1761. Kaakakiaa.— Ohauvignerie (17:^6) in N. Y.
Doc. Ck)l. Hist., IX, 1056, 1855. Kaakakies.— Vau-
dreuil (1760), ibid., x, 1092, 1858. Kaakawia.— La
Salle (1680) in Margry, D6c.., ii, 121, 1877. Kaa-
kaaia.— Burton, City of the Saints, 117, 1861. Kaa-
kaakia.— La Salle (1682) in Margry, Dee., ii, 201,
1877. Kaakadriani.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1795), 184,
1873. Xatkaakies.— (ireenville treaty (1795) in
Harris, Tour, 241, 1805. Kaakasquia.— Charlevoix
(1724) in Schoolcraft, Tnivels, 136, 1821. Kaak-
kaaiea.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816.
Kaaqui. — Coxe, Carolana, 13, 1741 (identical?).
Kaaquias.— Vatcr, Mith.. pt. 3, see. 3, 351, 1816.
Kaaquoasquias.— Smyth. Tour in r.S.,i, 347, 1784.
Ketkeakias.— Doc.of 1764 in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
VII, 641, 1856. Kitkuskias.— Smyth, Tour in U. S.,
II, 247, 1784 (place name), iuilka.— Hennepin,
New Diseov. (1698), li, 667, 1903. Kuskeiskees.—
Johnson (1767) in N. Y. Doe. Col. Hist., vii, 966,
1856. Kuakuake.— Adair, Am. Inds., 371, 1775.
ftuaaqueoa.— Iberville(ra.l701) in Margry, D»^c.,iv,
544. 1880. Eoinsac— Memoir of 1718 in N. Y. Doe.
Col. Hist., IX, «91, 1855 (village). Rouinsao.—
Ibid., 886 (said in note to be Kaskaskia village).
Tokatohakigouaa.— I^ Salle (1679-81) in Margry,
D^., 1, 481, 1877.
Kas-lanas {Q!ds hVnaSy *pitc*li-town
people ' ) . A family of the Raven clan of
the Haida. They inhabited the w. coast
of Moresby id., Queen Charlotte group,
Brit. Col., had no crests like the other
Haida divisions, and were regarded as
barbarous by the latter. Their principal
town was in Tasoo harbor. — S wanton,
Cont. Haida, 270, 1905.
Kaslnkug. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Kasnatohin. A Knuiakhotana village
at Anchor pt., Kenai penin., Alaska; i)op.
29 in 1880.
Xaanatohin.— Baker. Geog. Diet. Alaska, 75, 1902.
laida.— Petroff in lOtli Census, Alaska, 37, 1884.
Laidennoj.— Baker, op. cit. ( Russian name: ' icy' ).
Kaso {KiVso). A former Chumashan
village at Cafiada del Diablo, Ventura
CO., Cal. — Henshaw, Huenaventura MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
Kasoongkta. A tribe or band conquered
by the Iroquois and settled among the
Onondaga. — Clark. Onondaga, i, 805,
1849.
Kassiank. A Togiagamiut village on
Togiak r., Alaska, having two dance
houses; pop. 615 in 1880, 50 in 1890.
Kaaaiaohamiut.— Eleventh Cen.sus, Alaska, 164,
1893. KaMianmute.— retroff in 10th Census, Alas-
ka, 17, 1884.
^Kassigiakdjnak (Qa88igiaqdina<i). A
winter settlement of Nugumiut Eskimo
on Frobisher bav, s. e. Baffin land. —
Boas in 6th Rep. *B. A. E., map, 1888.
Kassovo (from GashoivUj pi. of Gashim-
sha. — Kroeber). A Yokuts tribe for-
merly living on Dry cr., Fresno co., Cal.
Several famili(»s of survivors now live in
Winchell gulch, near Pollasky.
Car-8008.— .Johnston (1851) in Sen. E*x. Doc. 61, 32d
Cong., 1st sess., 23, 1852. Caa-sans.— Barlx)ur (1852)
in Sen. Ex. Doe. 4, 32(1 Ccmjr.. spec, sess., 252, 18.5.S.
Cas-Boes.— McKee et al. in Ind. Aflf. Kep., 223, 1851.
CasBon.— Rovee in IHth r.v'p. B. A. E., 782, 1899.
CasaooB.— .lohnston (IS.51) in Sen. Ex. Doe. 61, 32(1
("onjf., 1st sess., 22, 1852. Cosos.— Taylor in ('al.
Farmer, May 18, 1863 (same?). Costrowers.— Hen-
lev in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 512, 1854. Coswaa.— Ix'wis in
liid. AIT. Rep., 1857, 399. 18.58. Gaahowu.— A. L.
Kroeber, inf'n. 1906(eorreet form; plJianhwiutha),
Gogh'-aho-o.— Merriam in Seienee, xix, 915. .Jnne
15,1904. Kash-i-wooah-ah.— Ibid., 916 (Wiksaehi
name). Kas-ao'-vo.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Eth-
nol., in, 370, 1877. Koah-aho'-o.— Merriam, op. eit.
Kasta (Q/a^sta). A legendary Haida
town on Copper bay, Moresby id., C^ueen
Charlotte grouj>, Brit. Col. It was named
for the creek (Skidegate cr. ), whi('h ran
near it, and was occupied by the Daiyuahl-
lanas. — Swanton, C(mt. Haida, 279, liK)r>.
Kastitohewanak. A Cree band on Al-
bany r. of Hudson bay in 1770. — Hutch-
iiiH (1770) in Richardson, Arctic Exi)ed.,
II, 87, 1851.
Kata (A''(i/*a, * biters,' referring to the
Arikara). A tribal divisionof the Kiowa;
so called, not because of Arikara origin,
but Ix^cause they were more intimate with
that tribe in trade and otherwise when the
Kiowa lived in the N.— Mooney in 14th
Rep. K. A. E., 1079, 189(5.
Katagemane (Ka-ta^-(je-m(X-i\c, *atiirv-
ing' ). (Jivcn by Morgan ( Anc. Soc, 171,
1877) as a division of the Piegan triini of
the Siksika, i\. v.
Katagkak. An Ikoginiut Eskimo vil-
lage on Innoko r., above its junction with
the Yukon, Alaska.
Ighelkoatlende. — Zaposkin in Nonv. \\\n. Voy..
5th s., XXI, map, 1H50. Katagkag-mxoute.— Ibid!
Katagwadi (KAiagwA^il!). A Tlingit
division formerly resident at Sitka, Alas-
ka, but now almost extinct. (.i. r. s. )
Katahuac. A former Chumashan village
connected withi5iuil:^JLuez.JiuasiaiiJSaJitft.
BacbimLca, Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
0(rt. 18, 18(il.
Katamoonchink ( * hazelnut grove. ' —
I^wis). The Indian name of the site of
Whiteland, Chester co., Pa., and [)erhapH
also of a Delaware (?) village formerly
near West Whiteland. Mentioned bv
Unvis (1824) in Day, Penii., 222, 1843. *
Katana {KfiVtayui). A former Haida
town on l^mise id.. Queen Charlotte
group, Brit. Col., in possession of the
Kagials-kegawai. -—Swanton, Cont. Haida,
279, 1905.
Katchadi (people of Katch, a creek on
Admiralty id.). A Tlingit division at
Kake and Wrangell, Alaska. Some of
them intermarried with the Atha])ascans
on the upper Stikine.
Kaadg ett ee.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 489,
18.55 (after Kane; misprint). Kaady-«tt-«e.— Kane,
Wand, in N. A., app.. 18.')9. K^ato'a'de.— Boas,
Fifth Rep. X. W.TribesCan.. 25, 1889. Katachadi.—
Krau.se, Tlinkit Ind., 120, 1885. Qa'toadi.— Swan-
ton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904.
664
KATCHANA AK K ATMAI
[b. a. b.
Katchanaak (QdtcxA^na'dk/, *Hip
lake' ). The native name for the Tlingit
town now known as Wrangell, the winter
town of the Stikine Indians of Alaska.
It was so named because the mountain
behind it resembles a human hip and the
inner harl)or is so shut in as to appear like
a lake. Indian ix)p. 228 in 1890; total
population (white and Indian) 868 in
1900. (j. R.s.)
Katearas. One of the principal villages
of the Tuscarora in 1669, * * a place of great
Indian trade aiicl commerce ' ' ; situated on
a s. branch of Roanoke r. , N. C.
KateAras.— Lederer (1672), Discov., '22, 1902. Ka-
teras. — Ibid., map.
Katerqnna (perhaps jifrgon 'Kater
land*) . A Talirpingmiut Eskimo village
of the Okomiut tribe on Cumberland sd.,
Baffin land. — Howgate, Cruise of Flor-
ence, 84, 1879.
Kathio. A large village of the eastern
Dakota, the Mdewakanton, Wahpekute,
Sisseton, and Wahpeton, who were gath-
ered about Mille Lac in the 17th and 18th
centuries. Brower (Kathio, 33, 1901) lo-
cates the village at the outlet of Mille Lac,
Minn., and thinks it wat* a Mdewakanton
settlement. It was visited in 1659 by
Radisson; in 1679 by Du Luth, who speaks
of it as a great village; and by Hennepin
in 1680. According to Warren (Hist. O jib-
ways, 160, 1885) it was destroyed by the
Chippewa about 1750. See Du Luth in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 795, 1855.
Kathlaram. A body of Salish formerly
under Fraser superin tendency, British
Columbia; now no longer officially re-
ported.
Kathlaram.— Canadian Ind. Aff., 79, 1878. Zath-
larem.— Ibid.. 138, 1879.
Katimin. A Karok village in x. w. Cal. ,
on the E. bank of Klamath r., a mile
above the mouth of the Salmon, opposite
Ishipishi. It was believed by the Karok
to be the center of the world, contained
a sacred house and sweat-house, and was
the scene of the deer-skin dance and of
an annual ceremony called ** making the
world.'* The village was burned by the
whites in 1852.
Sehe-woh. — Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, lll, 151, 1853. 8e-wah.— McKee (1851) In
Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec. sess.. 164, 1853.
Shefwutt.— A. L. Kroeber, infn, 1903 (Yurok
name). 8i-waha. — McKee, op. cit., 211.
Katipiara. A Karok village of two houses
on the 8. bank of Klamath r., Cal., nearly
opposite Orleans Bar; described by Gibbs
in 1852. See Tsana.
Kah-toe-pM-rah.— Gibbs, MS. Miscel., B. A. £.,
1852. Katipiara.— A. L. Kroeber, infn, 1904.
Katim {Ka-ti'-ru). One of the 4 divi-
sions of the main body of the Shasta, liv-
ing in Klamath valley, from Seiad valley
to Happy Camp, n. Cal. (r. b. d.)
Katkaayi (Msland people', from an
island at the mouth of Alsek r.). A
Tlingit division at Sitka belonging to the
Raven phratry.
Ghr^tka-ari. — Krause, Tlinket Ind.. 118, 1885.
aU'tkaaTi— Swanton, field notes, B. A. £.. 1904.
Katkwaahltu ('town on the point of a
hill'). A Tlingit town about 6m. above
the mouth of Chilkat r., Alaska; pop.
125 in 1880.
Katkwaltd.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 100, 1885. Xut-
kwutlu.— Pctroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 81, 1884.
Qatq!wa'aha'.— S wanton, field notes, B. A. E.,1904.
Katlagnlak (Klo,^ gulag), AChinookan
tribe formerly living on the s. bank of
Columbia r., in Columbia co., Oreg., 2
m. below Rainier. — Boas, Kathlamet
Texts, 6, 1901.
Katlaminimin. A Chinookan tribe for-
merly occupying the s. end of Sauvies id.,
Multnomah co., Oreg. Their principal
village w^as on the s. w. side of the island,
in Willamette r. In 1806 Lewis and Clark
estimated their number at 280 in 12
houses. In 1850 thev were said by Lane
to be associated witK the Cathlacumup
and Namoit.
Cathlaminimims.— Stuart in Nouv. Ann. Voy., x,
23, 1821. Oathlanamenamena.— Morse, Rep. to Sec.
War, 368, 1822. Oathlanamiaim.— Franchdre,Narr.,
135,1854. Oathlanaminimins.— Stuart, op. Cit., 116.
Olam-nah-min-na-mun.— Lewis and Clark Exped.,
Ck)ues ed. , 913, note, 1893. Olanaminamums.— Lewis
and Clark Exped., II, 212, 1814. Olanaminanums.—
Ibid., II.2G8, 1817. Clannahminamun.— Ibid., ii,22fi,
1814. Clan-nar-min-a-mon's.— Clark (1806) in Orig.
Jour. Lewis and Clark, iv, 220, 1905. Olanaarmim-
muna.— Drake. Bk. Inds., vii. 1848. Clan-nar-miA-
na-mon.— Clark (1806) in Orig. Jour. Lewis and
Clark, IV, 216, 1905. Clannarminnamwns.— Lewis
and Clark Exped., ii,473, 1814. Kathlaminimim.—
FramboiNe quoted by Gairdner in Jour. Qeog. Soc.
Lond., XI, 255, 1841. Namanamin.— Lane in Sen.
Ex. Doc. 52, 31st Cong., 1st sess., 172, 1860. Naaiaa-
anim.— Lane in Ind. AfT. Rep., 161, 1850. Towahna-
hiook.— Lewis and Clark Exped., Coues ed., in,
913, 1893 (error).
Katlamoik. Said by Boas (Kathlamet
Texts, 6, 1901) to be a Chinookan tribe
formerly living at the site of the present
town of Rainier, Columbia co., Oreg.,
but later (infn, 1904) given as the Chi-
nook name of the locality of the modern
Rainier, and of Rainier itself.
Gaiia'moix. — Boas, infn, 1904. KLa'moix.—
Boas, Kathlamet Texts, 6, 1901.
Katlany's Village. A summer camp of
one of the Taku chiefs of the Tlinj?it
named Qaia^ni; 106 people were there in
1880.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 32,
1884.
Katlian. The principal chief at Sitka,
Alaska, at the time it was settled by the
Russians under Baranoff. Also called
Kotlian. The first fort established by
Baranoff in 1799 was destroyed by the
natives under Katlian^s leadership, and
they afterward entrenched themselves so
strongly in a palisaded fort reinforced by
stone that the Russians, returning 5 years
later, had great difficulty in dislodging
them. The name is that usually borne
by the chief of the Kiksadi clan of the
Tlingit. (j. R. s.)
KatlQchtna (* lovers of glass beads').
A Knaiakhotanaclan. — Richardson, Arct.
Exped., I, 407, 1851.
Katmai. A Kaniagmute Eskimo vil-
BOLL. 301
KATO — KAULDAW
665
lage on the s. e. coast of Alaska penin. ;
pop. 218 in 1880, 132 in 1890.— Petroff in
10th Cens^us, Alaska, 28, 1884.
Kato. A Kuneste tribe or band for-
merly living in Cahto and Lon^ valleys,
Mendocino oo., Cal. These were prob-
ably the people mentioned by McKee a*<
occupying the second large valley of Eel
r., numbering about 500 in 1851, and dif-
fering in language from the Ponio, a fact
which has long been lost sight of.
Powers divides them into Kai Porno,
Kastel Porno, and Kato Porno, and gives
/ a Kulanapan vocabulary. They have
\ recently been found to belong to the
(Athapascan stoik, and closely related to
the Wailaki, although they resemble the
Pomo in culture. (p. e. g.)
Batemdaik&i.^ I^tham in Trans. Philol. S(h>.
Lond., 77,1856. Batem-da-kai-cc.— Gibbsin School-
craft, Ind. Tribi^a, iil, 434, 1853. Ba-tem-da-kaii.—
Powell in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 491, 1877.
Batiii-da-kia.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 240, 1851. Cabadi-
lapo.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Dor. 4. 32d Cong.,
spec, sess., 148, 1853. Cahto Pomo.— Powers in Over-
land Mo., IX, 600, 1872. Kai Po-mo.— Powers in
Ctont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 148, 1877. Ka-to-Po-mo.—
Ibid., 150. Ki-Pomas.— Ind. AflF. Rep. 18f>i. 119,
1865. Lalaahiknom.— A. L. Kroeber, inf'n, 1903
iYukl name). Tlokeang.— Kroeber, Coast Yuki
IS., Univ. Cal. (own name).
Katomemetnnne ('i)eople bv the dve\y
water*). A former village of the Mish-
ikhwutmetunne on Coquille r., Greg.
KaMo-mJ('-me ^fin'n«.— Dorseyin Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, III, 232, 1890.
KAta9lgi,(kdts(t 'panther', algi 'peo-
gle*). A Creek clan,
at'-ohii.— Morgan, Anc. Soc. lt)l,lH77 ('Tiger' ».
Kitaalgi.— (latsehet. Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155,
1884.
Katsey. A Cowichan tribe occupying
the villages of Selb»a8 and Shuwalethet,
on Pitt lake and river emptying into the
lower Fraser, Hrit. Col.; pop. 79 in 1904.
Kaitie.— Brit. Adm. Chart, no. 1917. Katezie.—
Can. Ind. AfT. for 1878, 79. KaUey.— Can. Ind.
Rep. 1901, pt. 2, 158. Ke'eUe.— Boas in Rep.
64th Meeting Brit. A. A. S., 454, 1K94. Ke'Ui.—
Hill-Tout in Ethnol. Snrv. Can., &I, 1902.
Katshikotin. A part of the 1 1 an kutchi n
living on Yukon r., a short (listance b(*-
low Fortymile cr. , near the Yukon- Alaska
boundary.
Ka-t>hik-otin.— Dawson in Rep. Geol. Surv. Can.
for 1888, 202B, 1889. Klat-ol-klin.— Schwatka.
Rep. on Alaska, 86, 1885 (name given by Russian
half-breeds).
Katstayot (Kat-sta^-tfot). A former
Chumashan village between Pt Concep-
tion'and Santa Barbara. Cal., at a locality
now called Santa Anita. — Henshaw, Bue-
naventura MS. vocab., B. A. K., 1884.
Kattak. A former Kaniagmiut village
on Afognak id., e. of Afognak, Alaska.
Katak.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska. 1902. Kattaf-
miut.— Russ.-Am. map (1849) quoted by Baker,
ibid. Kattagi^jut.— Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz.,
map, 1855.
Katiik. Two Indian settlements on the
8. bank of lower Fraser r., below Sumass
lake, Brit. Col. (Brit. Col. map, Ind.
Aff., Victoria, 1872). Perhaps the name
refers to the Katsey tribe.
Katsimo {Ka-td^-vio). The Keresan
name of a precipitous mesa rising 430 ft
above the basin of Acoma, and about 3
m. N. E. of the latter pueblo, in Valencia
CO., N. Mex. Accordmg to tradition its
summit was the site of one of several pre-
historic villages which the Acoma iHM>ple
successively occupied during their south-
westerly movement from the mythic Shi-
papu in the indetinite N. The tradition
relates that during a storm a part of the
rock fell and some of the inhabitants,
cut off from the valley Inmeath, perished.
The site was henceforth abandoned, the
survivors moving to another mesa on the
summit of which they erecte<l the pres-
ent Acoma pueblo ( q. v. ) . Katzimo mesa
is inaccessible by ordinary means, but it
was 8(*aled in 1897 by a party representing
the Bureau of American Ethnology and
evidences of its former occupancy ol)-
served, thus verifying the native "tradi-
tion. See Handelier in Century Cyclop,
of Names, 1894; Hodge (1) in Century
Mag., Lvi, 15, May, 1898, (2) in Am. An-
throp., Sei)t. 1897, and the references
noted l)elow. (f. w. h.)
Enchanted Mesa.— Lunimis, New Mexico David,
39, 1891. Katzim-a.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst.
Pap., IV. 314. 1X92. Mesa Encantada.— iniUen in
Harper's Weekly. 594, Ang. 2. 1890. Rook of Kat-
zimo.—Lum mis, op. cit.. 40.
Kau. The Corn clan c)f the Patki
(Water House) phratry of the Ilopi.
Ka-ah.— Bonrke, Snake Dance, 117, 1K84. Ka'i-e.—
St(«phcn in 8th Kcp. H. A. K., 39. 1891. Kaii win-
wu.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. K., 5.s:{, 1901 { itifl-
wji = 'clan*"). Ka'-ii wun-wii.— Fewkes in Am.
Anthrop,, vn, 402, 1894.
Kaudjukdjuak (Qandjundjuaq). A win-
ter settlement of the Akudnirmiut Es-
kimo between Frobisher bay and Cum-
l>erland sd., Battin land. — Boas in <)th
Rep. B. A. R, map, 1888.
Kanghii. A former Chumashan village
at LiiCafiadadel Corral, alx>ut 22 m. from
SantaJJarbaoii, Cal.
Ka-h '6'.— Henshaw, Buenaventnra MS. v(H'ab.,
B. A. K.. 1HM4. Kaughii.— Father Timeno (I85(i)
quoted by Taylor in Cal. Farmer. May 4, 1860.
Kaulmk ('high place'). A former
Alsea village on the s. side of Alsea r.,
Oreg. ; noted bv Ix'wis and Clark as con-
taining 400 inhabitants in 180H, an<l as
existing on the coast.
Kahuncle.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., n, 473, 1814.
Kahunkle.— Ibid., ii. 188, 1814. Ka-hun-kle*8.—
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi. 117, 190f>. Kau'-
hiik.— Dorsey in Jonr. Am. Folk-lore, ni, 230, 1890.
Kankhwan. A former Alsea villag(^ on
the N. side of Alsea r., Oreg., at Beaver cr.
Kau'-qwan.— Dorscy in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, hi,
23P, 1890.
Kanldaw. The Kitksan division and
town lying fartlu»st inland towanl the
headwaters of Skeena r., under the Ba-
bine and Skeena River agencv, Brit. Col. ;
pop. 37 in 1904.
Ouldoah.— Horetzky, Canada on Pac.. 212, 1874.
Oal-doe.— Can. Ind. Aflf. Rep., 431, 1896. OalDoe.—
Ibid., 252, 1891. 6ol-doe.— Ibid., 280, 1894. Kai-
doe.— Ibid., 415, 1898. Eaul-daw.— Dorsey in Am.
Antiq., XIX, 278. 1897. Kuldo.— Brit. Col. map,
1872. Kuldoe.— Can. Ind. Aflf., pt. n, 160, 1901.
Kuldos.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col.,
114B, 1884.
666
KAUMAUANGMIUT ^KAWAIKA
[b. a. b.
Kanmanangmint ( from the lake of the
same name, around which they chiefly
dwell) . An Eskimo tribe in s. e. Baffin
land, probably closely related to the
Nugumiut.
Karmowong.— Hall, Arctic Researches, 294, 1866.
Kaumanang.— Boas in Deutsche Geog. Blatt., viil,
32, 1885 (misprint). K'aumauangmiut.— Boas in
Petermanns Mitt., no. 80, 70, 1885. Quaumauang-
miut— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 421, 1888.
Kannanmeek. A former Stockbridge vil-
lage in Rensselaer CO. (?), N.Y., about half-
way between Albany and Stockbridge,
MaiKS., to which latter place the inhabit-
ants removed in 1744. — Brainerd (ca.
1745) quoted bv Ruttenber, Tribes Hud-
son R., 198, 1872.
Kantas. A Koyukukhotana village on
Koyukuk r., Alaska, with 10 inhabitants
in 1885.
Oawtaricakat.— Allen, Rep. on Alaska, 141, 1887.
KsLXLten (Kau^teu). A Squawmish vil-
lage community on the right bank of
Squawmisht r., Brit. Col. — Hill-Tout in
Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900.
Kauweh. An unidentified village on
Klamath r., Cal., below^ its junction with
the Trinity, and therefore m Yurok ter-
ritory.— McKee (1851) in Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, in, 138, 1853.
Kaveazrnk. A Xaviagmiut village at
Port Clarence, Alaska. — Eleventh Census,
Alaska, 162, 1893.
Kaviagmint. An Eskimo tribe occupy-
ing the 8. part of Kaviak .penii\. , Alaska,
from Norton bay w. Many winter on the
E. shore of Norton sd. Dall includes the
Kinugumiut, whose lawless life and enter-
prise have been copied bv the Kaviagmiut
remaining in their old home. This was
once a populous country, but the extermi-
nation of the arctic hare and the marmot,
the disappearance of the reindeer, and the
raids of the Kinugumiut have depopu-
lated the peninsula and caused the inhab-
itants to migrate to other parts of arctic
Alaska and become merged in other
tribes. Local subdivisions of the exist-
ing Kaviagmiut, who numbered 427 in
1890, areas follows: Aziagmiut, of Sledge
id.; Kaviazagmiut, at the hea!d of Port
Clarence; Kniktagemiut, of Golofnin
bay, and Ukivogmiut, of King id. Their
villages are Aiacheruk, Akpaliut, Anelo,
Anlik, Atnuk, Ayak, Aziak, Chaik, Chain-
ruk, Chinik, Chiukak, Iknetuk, Imokte-
gokshuk, Kachegaret, Kalulek, Kaveaz-
ruk, Kaviak, Kogluk, Kovogzruk,
Metukatoak, Netsekawik, Niktak, Okino-
yoktokawik, Opiktulik, Perebluk, Seni-
kave, Shinnapago, Siningmon, Sinuk,
Sitnazuak, Sunvalluk, Takchuk, Tubuk-
tulik, Uinuk, Ukivak, Ukodliut, and
Ukviktulik.
Anligmuts.—Holmbcrg quoted by Dall, Alaska,408,
1 870. Anljrgmiiten.— VVrangell, Ethnog. Nach. , 122,
1839. Kavea. — Kelly, Arct. Eskimo, 9, 1890.
Kaveaks.— Whymper. Trav. in Alaska. 143, 1868.
KaverongKutet.— Kelly, Arct. Eskimo, chart, 1890.
Fa^iMka.— Raymond in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 691,
1870. Kaviacmut.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B.A.E.,
map. 1899. Kaviagmuts.— Dall, Alaska, 408, 1870.
Kaviagmyut.— Turner in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 178,
1894. Kaviaka.— Dall in Proc. CaL Acad. Sci., iv,
35, 1869.
Kaviak. A Kaviagmiut village s. e. of
Port Clarence, Alaska; pop. 200 m 1880.—
Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Kaviazagmint. A subdivision of the
Kaviagmiut, q. v.
Kaviagamute.— Petroff , 10th Census, Alaska, map,
1884. jCaTiasaffamute.— Ibid., 11. Kaviasa'gemut.—
Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, map, 1887.
Kavinish. A former Kawia village in
Coahuila valley, Riverside co., Cal.
Ka-vi-nigh.— Barrows, Ethno.-Bot. Coahiiillalnd.,
34, 1900. Indian Wells.— Ibid.
Kawa ( Kdwoy *eel spring ' ) . A Modoc
campat Yaneks, on Spraguer., s. Oreg.
Kaua.— Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., n, pt. 1,
31; pt. 2, 122, 1890. Kiwa.— Ibid.
Kawaibatnnya ( Ka-wAi-ha-iuTi-a ) . Given
as the Watermelon clan of the Patki
(Cloud) phratryjof the Hopi. — Stephen
in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891.
Kawaiisn. The most westerly subdivi-
sion of the Ute-Chemehuevi linguistic di-
vision of the Shoshonean family. They
occupy an isolated area on both sides of
the Tehachapi mts., Cal., but particularly
the w. side around Paiute mts., and the
valleys of Walker basin and Caliente and
Kelso crs. as far s. as Tehachapi.
Cobajaii.— Garcda (1776), Diary, 489, 1900. Oobaji.—
Ibid., 301. 445. Oovaii.— Keane in Stanford,
Compend., 510, 1878. Kah-wia'-sah.— Merriamin
Science, xix, 916. June 15, 1904. Kawaiisu.— Kroe-
ber, inf n, 1905 (Yokuts name). Ka-wi'-a-suh.—
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 393, 1877 (Yo-
kuts name). Eawishm. — Kroeber, inf'n, 1905 (Tu-
batulabal name) . Kow-a'-sah.— Merriam, op. cit.
Kubakhye.— Kroeber, inf'n. 1905 (Mohave name).
Newoo'-ah. — Merriam , op. cit. ( = ♦ people ' ). VodiM
Colteohea.— Garc^s, op. cit., 295, 304 (so called by
Mariposa people). Ta-hi-oha-pa-han-na. — Powers
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 393, 1877 (division
around mtns. of same name). Ta-hiehp'. — Ibid.
(so called by Kern r. people).
Kawaika. A ruined pueblo, attributed
by the Hopi to the Kawaika people, a
name also applied by them to the pueblo
of Laguna, N. Mex., and by the Lagunas
themselves to designate their village;
situated a short distance w. of the Keam's
Canyon road, on the top of a mesa be-
tween two gorges tributary to Jeditoh
valley, in the Hopi country, n. e. Ari-
zona. The ruin was surveyed and first
described by V. Mindeleff in 1885, under
the name Mishiptonga, apparently
through confusion with Nesheptaiiga,
another ruin near by. The ruin has b^n
largely rifled of its art remains by Navaho
diggers and the results mostly lost to
science, but systematic excavation was
conducted in the undisturbed portion by
the National Museum in 1901. See Min-
deleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 52, pi. 9,
1891; Mooney in Am. Anthrop., July,
1893; Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 590,
622, 1898; Hough in Rep. Nat. Mns.
1901, 339, 1903.
Kawiuka.— Mooney, op. cit. Kawaiokoh.— Hough
op. cit. Miahiptonga.— Mindeleff, op. cit.
BCLL. 30]
KAWATKI KAWOHODINNE
667
Kawaiki (Hitchiti: oki * water', awaikt
'hauling', 'carrying' [plaxn*]: 'water-
carrying place ' ) . A former Lower Oeek
town at the junction of the present Cowi-
keecr. and Chattahoochee r., in the n. e.
comer of Barbour co., Ala. It had 45
heads of familii'H in 183.'). (a. s. (;.)
Oow ye ka.— GcnKUH of 1833 in Seh(K)lcraft, Ind.
Tribes, IV, 678, 1854. Kawafld.— <:Jat«chet, Crt'ek
Migr. Leg., 1. 134, 1884.
Kawannnyi (KdioanHnyiy from kdwdnil
*duck*, yi locative: Muck place'). A
former Cherokee nettleinent about the
present Ducktown, Polk co., h. e. Tennes-
see. (.1. M.)
Oowaaneh.— Royoe in 5th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1«87.
Duek-town.— D<H>. of 1799 quoted by Royee, ibid.,
144.
Kawarakiak (Ka-HHi-ra^-kiifh). One of
the two divisions of the Pitahauerat, or
Tapaje Pawnee, the other being the Pita-
hauerat proper. — Grinnell, Pawnee Hero
Stories, 241, 1889.
Kawas ( Kfd^uHiSy * fish eggs ' ) . A suIkH-
vision of theStustas, an iini)ortant family
of the Eagle clan of the Haida. One
of their chiefs is said to have l)een
blown across to the Stikine country,
where he becanie a chief among the
Stikine. (.f. r. s.)
Ci'waa.— Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada,
22, 1898. X!&'wat.— Swanton, (k)nt., Haida, 275,
1905. Kooas.— Harrison in l*Tix\ and Trans. Roy.
Soc. Can., sec. ii, 125. 1895.
Kawchodixme ( ka * hare ' , cho ' great ' , din-
ne * people * : * i>eople of the great hares ' ) .
An Athapascan tril)e dwelling x. of
Great Bear lake, Mackenzie Ter., Canada,
on Mackenzie r. , the lakes e. of it, and An-
derson r. Mai'kenzie ( Voy., i, 206, 1802)
said they were a small tnl)e residing on
Peace r., who spoke the language of the
Chipewj^an an(l derivinl their name from
the Arctic hare, their chief means of sup-
port. At another time (Mass. Hist. Coll.,
II, 43, 1814) he pla(;eil them on Porcupine
r., Alaska. Franklin ( Journ. to Polar Sea,
261, 1824) placed them immediately x.
of the Thhngchadinne on the n. sside of
the outlet of Bear lake. Back (Journal,
497, 1833-85) located them on Mackenzie
r. as far n. as 68°. Richardsiion (Arct.
Exped., II, 3, 1851) gave their habitat as
the banks of Mackenzie r. from Slave lake
downward. Hind (I^b. Penin., ii, 261,
1863) said they resorted to Ft Norman ami
Ft Good Hope on the Mackenzie, and also
to Ft Yukon, Alaska. Ross(MS.,B. A.E.)
said they resided in 1859 in the country
snrrounaing Ft Good Hope on Mackenzie
r., extending l)eyond the Arctic circle,
where they came in contact with the
Kutchin, with whom by intermarriage
they have formed the tribe of Bastanl
Loucheux ( Nellagottine) . Petitot ( Diet.
D6n^Dindji<^, xx, 1876) said the Kawcho-
dinne lived on the lower Mackenzie from
Ft Norman to the Arctic ocean. They
are described as a thickset people, who
subsist partly on fish and reindeer, but
obtain their clothing and most oi their
foo<l from the hares tliat abound in their
country. Their language differs little
from that of the Ktchareottine, while
their style of drt^s and their customs art*
the same, although through long inter-
course with the traders, for whom they
have great n»spect, most of the old (cus-
toms and Ix^liefs of the tribe have iKH^mie
extinct. They are on friendly tt»nns
with the P^kimo. The Kawchodinne
have a legend of the formation of the earth
by the nmskratandthe lx*aver. The dead
are dei)osite<l in a rude cage built aUive
ground, the body l)eing wrapped in a
blanket or a moose skin; thejjroperty of
relatives is destroytnl, and their hair is cut
as a sign of mourning. When the supply
of hares becomes exhausted, a« it fre-
(]uently does, they iK'lieve these mount
to the sky by means of the trees and rv-
turn in the' same way when they reaj)-
j)ear. Polygamy is now rare. They are
a pt»aceable trilx*, contrasting with their
Kutchin neighl)ors. In personal con)])at
they grasp each other by their hair, which
they twist round and round until one of
the conU»stanta falls to the ground. They
are not so numerous as formerly, a great
many having died from starvation in 1841,
at which time numerous a<'tsof cannibal-
ism are said to have occurred. In 1858
Ross ( MS., B. A. Vj. ) gave the ])opulati(m
as 467; 291 males, 176 females. Of these
103 resorted to Ft Norman and 364 to Ft
(iood Hoi)e. Petitot ( Diet. Dcne-Dindjie,
XX, 1876) arranged them in five sul)divi-
sions: Nigottine, Katagottine, Katcho^ot-
tine, Sat<'hotugottine, and Nellagottme.
In another list (Bull. Soc. Geog. Paris,
1875) instead of Nigottine he has Ktat-
chogottine and Chintagottine. In a later
grouping ( Autour du lac des Esclaves, 362,
1891) Petitot identifies Katagottine with
Chintagottine, suppresses 8atchotugot-
tine, ami adds Kfwetragottine.
Dene.— Petitot, Hare MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1869.
Dene Peaux-de-Lievre.— Petitot, Autour du lac des
Esrlaves, 289, 1891. Harefoot Indians.— Chappell,
Hudson Bay, 166. 1817. Hare Indians.— Ma(*-
kenzie, Vt)y., i, '206, 1802. Hareekina.— Petitot iu
Jour. Roy. Gcog. Soc., 650, 1883. Ka-eho-'dtinne.—
Richanlwm, Arct. Exped., il, 3, 1851. Kah-eho
tinne.— Ro«8 quoted by (Jibba, MS., B. A. K.
f* Arctic hare people'). Kancho.— GallaUn in
trans. Am. Antiq. Soc, n, 19, 18.36. Kaf a-got-
tine.— Petitot, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1867. K'a-t'a-
gottine.— Petitot, Diet. Dt>nd-I)indjie, xx, 1876
('people among the hares'). Kawehodinneh. —
Franklin, Jouni. to Polar Sea, 261, 1824. Kha-t'a-
ottine.— Petftot in Bull. Soc. G<H)g. Paris, chart,
1875. Khatpa-Oottine.— Petitot, Autour du \&c. des
R«claves, 362, 1891 ('people among the rabbit***).
Kkpayttduure ottin^.— Petitot, Hare MS. vo<'ab.,
B. A. E., 1869 (Chipewvan name). Nouga.— Mac-
farlane (1857) in Hind, Lab. Penin., n, 2.58, 1863
('spittle': Eskimo name). PeaudeLievre.— Peti-
tot in Bull. So<'. (JCog. Paris, chart, 1875. Peauz-
de-Lievree.— Petitot, Autour du lac de^ Esclaves,
3<)2, 1891. BabbiUkins.— McLean. Hudson Bay, n,
243. 1H49. Slave.— Richardson, Arct. Exped., i.
242, 1851. Ta-na-tin-ne.— Morgan, Consang. and
Affin., 289, 1871.
668
KAWOHOGOTTINE KAWTA
tB. A. K.
Jt
^
Kawchogottine ('dwellers among the
large hares*). A division of the Kaw-
chodinne. Petitot, in 1867 (MS., B. A.
E.), located them on the border of the
wooded region n. e. of Ft Good Hoi>e,
and in 1875 (Bull. Soc. de G^og. Paris,
chart, 1875) on the headwaters of An-
derson r., N. of Great Bear lake. The
same authority (Autour du lac des Es-
claves, 362, 1891 ) says their habitat is on
the large lakes of the interior e. of Mac-
kenzie r.
ra-toho-gottine.— Petitot, Diet. D^nd-Dindji<5, xx,
1876. Katcho-Ottint.— Petitot in Can. Rec. Sci., i,
49, 1884. Khs-tch6-gottiiie.— Petitot in Bui. Soc.
de G4og. Paris, chart, 1875. Nati^tpa-Gottiiie.—
Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 362, 1891
(=' people among the little reindeer').
Kawia. The name, of uncertain deri-
vation, of a Shoshonean division in s. Cal-
ifornia, affiliated linguistically with the
Aguas Calientes, Juanefios, and Luisefios.
They inhabit the n. tongue of the Colo-
rado desert from Banning s. e. at least as
far as Sal ton, as also the headwaters of
Santa Margarita r., where the Kawia res.
is situated. Formerly they are said to
have extended into San Bernardino val-
ley, but it seems more likely that this
KAWIA MAN
was occupie<l, as at present, by the Se-
rranos. They are not to be confounded
with a Yokuts tribe bearine the same
name. They were first visited in 1776 by
Fray Francisco Garc^s, who referred to
them under their Mohave name, ** Jecu-
ich," obtained from his guide. At this
time they lived about the n. slopes of the
San Jacinto nits, and to the northward,
and roamed e. to the Colorado, but their
principal seat was about San Grorgonio
pass. Burton (H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th
Cong.,3dse8s., 115, 1857) gave 3, 500 as the
number of men alone in 1856, evidently
an exaggeration. There were 793 Indians
assembled under the name "Coahuila"
at all the Mission reservations in 1885,
while the Indians on Cahuilla res. under
the Mission Tule r. agency in 1894 num-.
bered 151, and in 1902, 159. This reser-
KAWIA WOMAN
vation consists of 18,240 acres of un-
patented land. Villages: Duasno, Juan
Bautista, Kavinish, Kawia, Kwaleki,
Lawilvan, Malki, Pachawal, Palseta, Pal-
tewat, Panachsa, San Sebastian, Sechi,
Sokut Menyil, Temalwahish, Torres,
Tova, and Wewutnowhu.
Oaguilias.— Duflot de Mofras. i. ^49, 1844. Oagal-
las.— Duflot de Mofras misquoted by Latham in
Proc. Philol. Soc. Lond., vi, 76, 1854. Oahnilla.—
Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 128, 1884.
Oahnillo.— Ibid., 129. Oahuilla.— liid. AfT. Rep.,
175, 1902 (applied to res.). Cahuiilot.— Ludwig,
Abor. Lang., 26, 1816. Cah-wee-ot.— Whipple,
Exped. from San Diego, 17, 1851. Oah-willaa.-
Heintzelman (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th
Cong.. 3d sess., 44, 1857. OarvUlas.— Burton, ibid.,
114. Cavioi.— Gatsehet in Rep. Chief Engre., pt. 3,
553.1876. Oaweos.— Ibid. Ooahuilas.— Stanley in
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 194, 1870. Oogoifa.— Garc^s
(177&-76), Diary, 289, 1900 (identical?). Oohuillaa.—
Stanley in Ind. Aff. Rep., 119, 1865. Oohuillea.—
Greene in Ind. Aff. Rep., 93, 1870. Oowela.— Hen-
ley in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856,243, 1857. Oowillas.— Beale
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 378, 1853.
Danoen.— Coues, Garcds Diary, 42, 1900. Dansa-
rinea.— Ibid., 204, 423. Geouichea.— Ibid., 423. Hak-
wieh«.— Kroeber, infn, 1905 (Mohave name).
Jeouehaa.— Coues, Garcds Diary, index, 1900. Je-
oufehe.— Garc^s (1776), Diary, 444, 1900. Jecui-
ohet.— Ibid., 451. Jequiohaa.— Ibid. Kahuilla.—
Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 189, 1883. Kah-
weaks.— Sen. Misc. Doc. 53, 45th Cong., 3d sess.,
70, 1879. Kah-we-as.— Wozencraft in Ex. Doc.
4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 289,1853. Kahweyaha.—
BULL. 30]
KAWIA KAYEPU
669
^humachcr in Rep. Peabody Mus., xii, 621, 1880.
SauyuyM.— Loew in Rep. Chief Engrs., pt. 3, 642,
1876. Kau-y»i'-«hit».— Powell in Ind. AIT. Rep.
1873, 61, 1874. Kavayot.— Gatschet in Rep. Chief
Engrs., pt. 3, 663, 1876. Kavwarn-maup.— Ingalls
(1872) In H. R. Ex. Doc. 66, 42d Cong., 3d hcsh.. 2,
1873. KoahuaUa,— Ind. AIT. Rep. 1877, 246, 1H78.
Teouiehe.— Cortez (1799) in Pac. R. R. Rep., in,
pt. 3, 126, 1866 (misquoting Gare^s).
- Kawia. A Yokuts tribe formerly living
on the edge of the plains on the n. side of
Kaweah r., Cal., but now extinct. They
were hostile to the Ameri(*an settlers.
By agreement of May 13, 1851 (which was
not confirmed), a reserve was set aside
for this and other tribes between Kaweah
and Chowchilla rs., Cal., which at the
same time ceded their mireserved lands.
This tril)e is to \ye distinguished from the
Kawia (Coahuila, Cahuillo, et(\), a Sho-
shonean tribe in Riverside co., Cal.
Oah-was.— JohnHton (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61,
82d Cong., Ist. flewi., 23, 1852. Cahwia.— Barbour
in Ind. AflF. Rep.. 232, 1851. Cah-wi-ah.— Wessells
(1863) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 73, 34th Cong., 3d sess.,
82, 1867. Cowhuillas.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
June 8, 1860. Cowiah*.— Henley in Ind. Aflf. Rep.,
611, 1864. Oow-illers.^Lewis, ibid., 400, 1858.
JtoorillML— Dole, ibid., 219, 1861. GawU.-A. L.
Kroeber. iufn, 1906 (the more strictly correct
form). Kahwsaht.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 456,
1874. Kauia.— Powers in C^nt. N. A. Ethnol.. in,
870, 1877. Kawia.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1903, 508, 1904.
Keawahi.-Maltby in Ind. Aff. Rep., 381, 1S72.
K«weah.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 284, 1881.
Kawia. A Kawia village on Cahuilla
res., near the heailwaters of 8anta Marga-
n tA r H C ^sl I
Cahuilia.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1902, 175. 1903.
Kawlrasanaohi ( ' wh ite h i 1 1' ) • A Tara-
humare rancheria in Chihuahua, Mexi-
co.— Lumholtz, inf n, 1894.
Kawita. The name of two former
.Tj^I^ower Creek towns on Chattahoochee
r., in Russell co., Ala. They were situ-
ated 2J m. apart and were commonly
distinguished as Upper Kawita and Ka-
wita Talahasi ( *Kawitaold town' ), in vari-
ous forms of spelling. The former was
situated on thew. bank of the river, 3 m.
below its falls, the latter J m. from the
stream. Kawita Talahasi, or Old Kawita,
was the ** public establishment" of the
Lower Creeks and the headquarters of
the agent. In 1799 it could muster 66
warriors, and about the year 18:^ the
town containe<l 289 families. It was an
offshoot from Kasihta, and in turn gave
origin to Wetumpka, on Big Uchee cr.
From the fact that Kawita was regarded
as the assembly place and treaty capital
of the Lower Creeks, the name was fre-
quently used synonymously with Lower
Creeks; as Kusa, the name of the capital
of the Upper Creeks, was sometimes used
to designate th^t portion of the tribe. In
1775 Bartram (Trav., 387, 1792) spoke of
Kawita Talahasi as "the bloody town,
where the micos, chiefs, and warriors
assemble when a general war is proposed;
and here captives and state malefactors
are put to death." (a. s. «.)
• Akowetako.— Squier in Beach. Ind. Miscel., 34,
1877 (traditional name, flde the Walam-Olum).
Ani'-Kawi'ti.--Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,508,
1900 (Cherokee name of Lower Creeks, from their
former principal town on Chattahoochee r.).
Cabeta*.— Barcia, Enpayo. 313. 1723. Cabuitta.—
Jefferys, Am. Atlas, 5, 1776. Cacouitas.— Baudry
des Lozi^rcs, Voy. A la Le.. 242, 1S02. Oahouita.—
Penidre in Morse, Rep. to Sw. War, 311, 1S22.
Cahouitas.— La Harpe (1703) in Fren<-h, Hist. Coll.
La., in. 29, 1851. Cahuita.— Jeffervs, Fr. Dom.,
134, map, 1761. Canita*.— vSmith(1785) inSehcx)!-
craft, Ind. Tribe.s, ni, 557, 1853. Caoitas.— Charle-
voix, New France, Shea's ed.. VI, 147,1866. Oao-
netas.— Boiidinot, Star in the West, 126, 1816. Cao-
nitea.— Ibid. Caoulkat.— Smith, Bouquet's Bxped.,
70, 1766. Caouita*.— Du Pratz, La., Il, 208, 1758.
Caveta.— Barcia, Ensavo, i:s7, 1723. Cawidas.— N.
Y. Dm-. Col. Hist. (1753), VI, 797, 18.^5. Cawitta*.—
Romans, Florida, 90, 1775. Cawittawt.— Carroll,
Hist. Coll. S. C, I, 190, 1836. Cohuntat.— Martin,
Hist. I^., 1, 161, 1827. ConeU.— Morse, N. Am.,
218, 1776 (misprint). Conetta. — Jefferys, Am.
Atlas, 5, 1776 (town on headwaters of ()cmtilj?eo
r.). Conetuht.— Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 19. 1848.
Oouetta. — Jefferys, Am. Atlas, 5, 1776. Couitias. —
Brinton, Florida Pen.. 144, 1859. Couueta.— Alcedo,
Die. Geog., i. 676, 1S76. CoweeU.— Drake, Bk.
Inds., bk. IV, 29, 1H48. Coweita*.— (Jiissefeld, map
U.S.. 1784. CoweU.— Bartram, Travels, 387, 1792.
Cowetah.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc.,
II, 95, \K^. Cow-e-tah TallahaMce.— Royce in 18th
Rep. B. A. E., Ga. map, 1899. Coweta*.— Lincoln
(1789) in Am. State Pap.. Ind. Aff., I, 78. 1832.
CoweUu.— r. S. Ind. Treat. (1814), 162. 1837. Oo-
wetow.— Drake, Bk. Inds.. bk. i v. 51, 1848. Cowet-
tat.— Romans, Florida. I, 280. 1 775. Cow-e-tugh.—
Hawkins (1799), Sketch, 52, 1H48. Cow-e-tuh.—
Ibid., '25, 55. Cow-e-tuh Tal-lau-has-see.— Ibid., 55.
Grand Coweta.— Robin, Voy., I, map, 1807. Kaiou-
tais. — Lozit^res, Vov. A la U'. , 242, 1 802. Kaouitas.—
Gayarr^, Hist. La., ii. 40, 1852. Kaoutyas.—
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 79, 18.54.
Kawita TalalUtBti.—Gatschet, (^reek MiRr. L(>g., i,
135, 1884. KawuyUB.— Bos.sn (1769) , Travels, i, 229,
1771. Kawyta*.- lbid..271. Kow-he'-tah.— Adair,
Am. Ind., 257, 1775. Lahouita.— Morse. Rep. to
Sec. War, 149. 1822. Powebaa.— Lattr^, Carte des
Etat.s-rnis, 1784. Pt. Coweto.— Robin, Voy.. i,
map, 1 807. Tipper Cowetas town. — Seagrove ( 1793)
in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., i, 427, 18:i2.
Kawita. A town of the Creek Nation
on the N. side of Arkansas r., Okla.
Coweto.— r. S. P. O. Guide, 367, 1904. Kawito.—
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 185, 1888.
KawoltQkwuoha [Kawnltuk* vmtca, Miill
below ' ). A Pima village w. of the Mari-
copa and Phcpnix R. R., in Maricopa co.,
Ariz.— Russell, Pima MS., B. A. K, 18,
1902.
Kawerkewdtche.— ten Kate quoted ])y Gatschet,
MS., B. A. E., XX, 199, 1888.
Kayak. See Kakth
Kayashkidetan ('people of the hoiine
with a high foundation * ). A Tlingit di-
vision at Wrangell, Ala.ska, l)elonging to
the Wolf phratry and closely connected
with the Nanyaayi and Hokedi.
Hara'c hit tan.— Boas. 5th Rep. X. \V. Tribes Can.,
25, 1889. Ka-rawh-kidetan.— Kranse, Tlinkit Ind.,
120, 1885. Kaya'okiddtan.— Swan ton, field nuten,
B. A. E., 1904.'
Kayehkwarageh {^Kdie^hrHra^ge^). A
traditionary Iroquois village belonging to
the Two-clans of the Turtle; locality un-
known. (.1. N. B. n.)
Kah he kwa ke.— Hale. Iro<i. B(H>k of RiteH, 119,
1883. Kayyhekwarakeh.— Ibid. lis.
Kayepu. A prehistoric ruineil pueblo
of the compact, communal type, situated
about 5 m. s. of (Jaiisteo, Santa Fd co.,
N. Mex. The Tanos now living with the
Queres of Santo Domingo claim that it
was a village of their tribe.
670
KAYGEN KEGI
tB. ▲. B.
KA-y« Pa.~Bandelier tn Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 106,
1892 (native name). Pa«ble Blanoo.— Bandelier
in Ritch, N. Mex., 201. 1885 (misprint). Pa«Uo
Blanoo.— Ibid. (Span.: 'white house').
Kaygen. A Seneca village on the 8.
bank of Chemung r., below Kanestio r.,
N. Y.— Pouchot, map (1758) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., X, 694, 1858.
Kaynaguntl ( * people at the month of the
canyon'). An Apache clan or band at
San Carlos agency and Ft Apache, Ariz.,
in 1881. — Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 111, 1890.
Kayomasho. The progressive party in
Laguna pueblo, N. Mex. (I^oew in Wheeler
Survey Kep., vii, 339, 1879). According
to Bandelier this party constitutes a
phratry. See Kapaits.
Kayung (Qfayd^il). A Haida town on
Masset inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit.
Col., just above Masset. It was occu-
pied by the Kuna-lanas, who owned
the placre, and the Sagui-gitunai. John
Work does not give separate figures for
the population of this town in 183&-41,
but the old people estimate the number
of houses at 14, which would indicate
about 175 |>eople. The place was at one
time entirely abandoned, but two or three
families have recently returned to it.
(j. R. 8.)
K'*aya'iig.— Boas. 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 23,
1898. Kayunf.— Daw8on, Queen Charlotte Ids.,
163b, 1880. a!aya'n laftsi'-i.— Swanton, Cont.
Haida, 281, 1905 (the people).
Kcheeagonggo ( K^chi-gd-gong^-go,
*pigeon-nawk'). A gens of the Abnaki
(q. v.). —Morgan, Anc. Soc.,174, 1877.
Kdhun ('thunder being'). The 7th
Tsichu gens of the Osage tribe.
Xrf»».— Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883.
ga».— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 234, 1897.
mk'xe.— Ibid, ('upper-world people'). Kiqlcs
wi^Ean'^ai^— Ibid, ('mysterious male being').
Thunder People— Dorsey in Am. Nat., 114, 1884.
Tii^iaci".— Dorsey in 15th Rep., op cit. ('camp
last').
Ke. The Bear clan of the Tewa pueblo
of Nambe, N. Mex., and of Hano, Ariz.
Oao.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A . E. , 39, 1891 ( Navaho
name). Eo'-nau.— Ibid. (Hopi name). Ke.— Ibid.
(Tewa name). Ke-tdoa.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop.,
IX, 349, 1896 (Nambe form: W<5a=' people^).
Ke'-to-wa.— Fewkesin Am. Anthrop., vii,166, 1894.
Kechayi. A division of the Yokuts, for-
merly living on San Joan uin r., Cal.
Keehayi.— A. L. Kroeber, inrn, 1906. Kech-eel.—
Ind. AIT. Rep., 223, 1851 (same?).
Kechemeohes. A division of the New
Jersey Delawares mentioned by Evelin
(Proud, Pa., i, 113, 1797; Smith, Hist.
N. J., 29, 17()5, rep. 1890) as living in
1648 in the 8. part of the state, at the
mouth of Delaware r., and numbering 50
men. Some old authorities locate here
the Naraticon.
Kechemndlok. A Kevalingamiut vil-
lage at C Seppings on the Arctic coast of
Alaska; pop. 50 in 1880.
Cape Seppuig.— PetrofT, Rep. on Alaska, 59, 1900.
Gape Seppings.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map,
1899. JLeehemudlok.- Hydrog. chart cited by
Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 115, 1902. Kivalinge.—
Eleventh Census, Alaska, 162, 1893.
Xeohepakwaiwah. A former Chippewa
village on a lake of the same name, noar
Chippewa r., Wis.— Warren (1852) in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 314, 1886.
Kechipauan (*town of the spre«ul-oat
grit' ; evidently referring to the sandstone
mesa). A former pueblo of the ZufSi on
a mesa e. of Ojo Cahente, or Kyapkwaina-
kwin, 15 m. s. w. of Zufii pueblo, N. Mex.
According to Cushing it was called also
Kyanawe, which Bandelier identifies with
the Cana])i of Oftate in 1598, and therefore
rg^ards it as one of the Seven Cities of
Cibola of Marcos de Niza and Coronado in
1539-42. Spanish Franciscans evidently
began the establishment of a mission at
this pueblo, probably in 1629, when the
first missionaries resiaed among the Zufii,
but judging from the character of the
church building, the walls of which are
still standing, it was never finished. See
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 81, 1891,
and authorities cited below, (p. w. h. )
Odmabe.— Gushing in Compte-renau Intemat.
Ck>ng. Am., VII, 156, 1890 (misprint of early Span-
ish form). Caaabi.— Oiiate (1598) in Doc. In4d.,
XVI, 133, 1871. Chan-a-hue.— Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, iii, 133, 1890. Chyanahue.— Ibid., v,
171, 1891; IV, 338, 1892. Chyanaue.— Ibid., in, 138,
note, 1890. Chek-e-pa-wha.— Fewkes in Jour. Am.
Eth. and Arch., i, 101, 1891. Ke-tchi-na.— Cushing
in Millstone, ix, 55, Apr. 1884. Ketohip-a-hoan.—
Bandelier in 10th Rep. Arch. Inst. Am., 107, 1889.
Ketohip-a-uan. — Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
III, 133, 1890; IV. 329, 1892; V, 171, 1891 (recorded as
distinct from Kyanawe). KU'anaaii.- ten Kate,
Reizen in N. A., 291, 1885. Kii-na-wa.— Cushing
in Millstone, ix, 55, Apr. 1884. K'yi-na-we.—
Cushing in Compte-renau Intemat. Cong. Am.,
vii. 156, 1890. imiage of Odd Waters.— Cushing,
Zufii Folk-tales, 104, 1901 (possibly identical).
Keconghtan. A small tribe of the Pow-
hatan confederacy residing in 1607 at the
mouth of James r., in what is now Eliz-
abeth City CO., Va. According to Capt.
John Smith their fighting men did not
exceed 20.— Smith (1629), Hist. Va., i,
116, map, repr. 1819.
Keda-lanas {Q/e^da WnaSy * strait peo-
ple*). A subdivision of the Hagi-lana£>,
a family of Ninstints belonging to the
Raven clan of the Haida. They re-
ceived their name from a narrow strait in
front of the town. — Swanton, Cont. Haida,
268, 1905.
Kedlamik (Qe^^iamijc^ *broa<l patch of
bushes*). An Okinagan village near Ni-
cola lake, Brit. Col.
Lkaiamix.— Telt in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., li,
174, 1900. (W'-iamix.— Ibid.
Keeches. Mentioned by Barbour (Sen.
Ex. Doc. 4, 82<1 Cong., spec, sess., 61, 1853)
as a hostile tribe living n. and e. of San
Joaquin r., among the foot-hills of the
Sierra Nevada, on the headwaters of the
Tuolunme, Meryed, and Mariposa rs.,
Cal. , in 1851. It was probably of Moque-
lumnan stock.
Kegi. The House clan of the Tewa of
Hano pueblo, n. e. Ariz.
Ke'gi.— Stejphen in 8th Rep. B. A. £.. 39, 1891.
Ki-a'-ni.— Ibid. (Navaho name). Zi'-hu.— Ibid.
(Hopi name).
BULL, .to 1
KEOlKTOWRKiEMHIT KKLE
671
S^
Keriktowrigemiut ( Keaiktoivrif/emut) .
A sabdivision of the Unaligmiut Eskimo
whose chief village is Kiktc^k. — Dall in
Cent. N. A. Ethnol., i, 17, 1877.
Kegnayo. A pueblo built, occupied,
and abandoned by the Naml)e tnXye prior
to the Spanish ail vent in the 16th cen-
tury. Situated in the vicinity of the
Chupaderos, a cluster of s{)rinp4 in a
mountain gorge, alK)ut 4 m. e. of Nambe
pueblo, N. N. Mex. — Bandclier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, iv, 84, 1892.
Kehsidatsoos (Keh-aid-ats-oos). A for-
mersummer village of theMakah of Wanh-
ington.— (iibbs, SlS. 248, B. A. K
Kein (* turtle Ciirriers,* lx»cause they
have the certMuonies connected with the
turtle. — Fletcher). A subgens of the
Dhatada eens of the Omaha.
Xaetoge.— Silbi, Atlas Kthnog.. 5(), 1826. Ka-e-
ta-ie.— Lonff. Exped. Rwky Mts., i, S27, 182:$
(*tno0e who do not touch turtles' ). Ka'-ih.— Mor-
n, Anc. Soe., 156, 1877. ve*i».— Dorsi'v in 15th
^p. B. A. E., 226, 1897.
Kemouche ( Klndzhd", * pickerel* ) . ( )ne
of the divisions or chief bands of the
. Ottawa, q. v. The Jesuit Reflation of 1(>40
locates them at that time, under the name
Kinounchepirini, s. of the Inle of the
Al^nquins (Allumette id. ) in Ottawa r.
This would place them, if taken literally,
some distance e. of L. Huron; but as the
knowledge then possessed by the French
was very imperfect, it is pVolmble that
the Relation of 1043, which i)lace8 them
on L. Huron, is more nearly correct. In
1658 they appear to have lived along the n.
shore of the lake. Between 1660-70 they,
with the Kiskakon and Sinago, were
attached to the mission at Shaugawaumi-
kong (now Bayfield), on the s. shore of
L, Superior. It is probable, however, that
at the time of Father Menanl's visit, in
1660, they were at KewiH*naw bay^ Mit^h.
In 1670-71 they returne<l to Mackinaw,
some passing on to Manitoulin id.; but it
is proDable that the latter, or a part of
them, were inclu<le<l in the Sable band,
q. V. (j. M. c. T.)
Keiaoaehe.— Jes. Rel. 1670. 87, 1858. Kinonche-
niirinik.— Ibid., 1658, 22, 1858. Kinonchepirinik.—
Ibid.. 1648, 61, 1858. Kinouoh^— Marquette (1670)
quoted by Shea, Mian. Val., xlix, 1852. Kinouche-
biirfaiiouek.^J(>8. Rel. 1646, 34, 1858. Kinounohe-
piriai.— Ibid., 1640, 84, 1858. auenongebin.— Cham-
plain (1613). CEuvreH, in, 298, 1870.
Kekayeken ( K'ek '<Vyek 'Eii ) . A Songish
division residing between Esquimalt and
Beecher bay, h. end of Vancouver id. —
Boas in 6th Rep. X. W. Tribes Can., 17,
1890.
Kekelnn (K't/kElnn). A S4|uawmiHh
village communitv on the w. side of Howe
sd., Brit. Col.— (lill-Tout in Rep. Brit.
A. A. S., 474, 1900.
Xekertakdjuin ( Qeqertaqdjuiiiy ' big
island'). A spring settlement of Padli-
miut Eskimo at the end of Ilowe bav,
Baffin land.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. K.,
map, 1888.
Kekertarsuarak. An P^skinio village on
an islet off the s. w. coast of (iret^nland,
lat. 60° 50''. — Meddelelser om (iri'mland,
XVI, map, 1896.
Kekertaujang (Qeijertaujamjj Mike an
island'). A winter village of the Sau-
mingmiut, a subtriln^ of the Okomiut
Eskimo, on CumbcTland i)enin., Baffin
land. — Boa.s in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map,
1888.
Kekerten ('islands'). The winter vil-
lage of the Kingnaitmiut Eskimo on the
E. side of Cumberland id., Baffin land;
pop. 82 in 1883.
K'everten.— Boas in I*eU>rma|ii)H Mitt., no. 80, 70,
18«5. Zikkerton.— Kumlien in Bull. V. S. Nat.
Mus., no. 15. 15, 1S79. Qeqerten.— Boas in 6th Rep.
B. A. E.. 425. 1SS8.
Kekertnlgaak ((^((jertuqdjiutq, *big
island'). A spring settlement of Nugu-
miut P^kimo on an island in Frobisher
bav, s. E. Baffin land. — Boas in 6th Rep.
B. A. E., map, 1888.
Kekin (AVA*'///, 'turtle carriers'). A
division of the Washa^hewanun gens of
the Osage. — Dorsev in 15th Rep. B. A.
E., 284, 1897.
Kekin. A Kansa gens.
Do-Hi-ker-yi.— Morgan. Anc. S<m'.. 156.1877 (tranB.
•turtle'). Ke.— Dorsev in Am. Nut., 671, 1«S5
('turtle'). Ke-k'i».— Dorsey in 15th Hep. B. A. K.,
231, 1897 (trans, 'carries a turtle on his hack').
Ke nika-shing-ga.— Stuhhs, Kaw MS. vo<?ah., B.
A. K., 25, 1877.
Kekionga. The princioal village of the
Miami, formerly sitiiattMi on the K. bank
of St Jopt»ph r., in Allen co., Ind., oppo-
site Ft Wayne. It was often designated
as *'Miami town" and "(Jreat Miami vil-
lage." Several other settlements were in
the vicinity. It was burned in 17i;0, and
the tract on which it stood, an area 6 m.
stjuare, was.ce<led to the United States
by the treaty of (.Jreenville, Aug. 8, 1795.
S(H» Maumee Towns. (j. m.)
Great Miami ▼illage.— Drake, Bk. Inds., hk. 5,
189,18^18. Kegaiogue.— Harmon (1790) in Rum>,
West. Pa., Hpp., 228, 1846. Kegniogue.— Ihid. Ke-
ke-on-gay.— Hough, map in Indiana Geol. Rep.,
1883. Ke-ki-on-ga.— Royce in 1st Rep. B. A. E.,
map. 1881. Ke-ki-on-go.— Ro.v<>e in 18th Rep. B.
A. E., Ind. map. 1899. Kiami town.— Gamelin
(1790) in Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff.. i, 93, 1832.
Kekios. A Scjuawmish village com-
munity on the right bank of Sjuaw-
misht'r., w. Brit. Col.
Oaqid's.— Boas. MS.. B. A. E.. 1887. Oe'qids.— Hill-
Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 174. liHX).
Kekwaiakin ( (^Ek • nut i^nkin ) . A S<iua w-
niish village communitv on the left bank
of Squawmisht r., Brit. Col.— Hill-Tout
in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, HKK).
Kek wail ( Ke-k wa V- '/ ) . A v i 1 lage occu-
pied in ancient times ])y the Namlni
jH^ople of New Mexico; situated near
Agawana (q. v.). Distinct from Kt»gua-
yo. (f. w. II.)
Kelatl ( QeUVU) . The uppermost ( 'owi-
chan subtri])e on Fraser r., Brit. Col.
Their town wtis Asilao, alM)ve Yale. —
Boas in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 454, 1894.
Kele. The extinct Pigeon-hawk clan of
672
KELEMANTURUK KENNEBEC
[B. A. jg.
the Chua (Snake) phratry of the Hopi.
Distinct from the Hawk (Kwayo) and
Chicken-hawk (Massikwayo) clans.
Ke-le'-nyu-mdh.— Fewkesin Am. Anthrop., v. 223.
1892 {nyu-m6h=* people*; usually employed by
this author to denote phratrj'^). Kele winwA.—
Fewkesih 19th Rep. B. A. E., 583, 1901 {win-wii^
•clan'). Ke'-le wun-wii.— Fewkes in Am. An-
throp., VII, 403, 1894.
Kelemanturak. An Utukamiut Eskimo
village near Icy cape, Alaska. — Eleventh
Census, Alaska, 162, 1893.
Keles (Q^'^lEs). A Chilliwack town on
upper Chilliwack r., Brit. Col. — Boas in
64th Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 454, 1894.
Keliopoma. The name, in their own
language, of the northernmost branch of
the Porno, bordering on the coast Yuki
and the Athapascan Kato, and inhabit-
ing the country from Sherwood to the
coast near Cleone, Cal., to which place
they gave its name. They were also
called Shibalna Pomo.
Ohiabel-zxa-poma.— Tot)in in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857,
404, 1858. Ku-la Kai P6-mo Powers in CJont. N. A.
Ethnol., Ill, 155, 1877. She-bal-ne Pomaa.— Wiley
in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 119, 1865. Shi-bal'-ni Po'-
mo.— Powers, op. cit. (Kaito Pomo name: 'neigh-
bor people').
Kelketos {QF/lkEtds, 'painted'). A
Squawmish village community on the e.
coast of Howe sd., Brit. Col.— Hill-Tout
in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900.
Kelsemaht ( * rh ubarb people * ) . A Noot-
ka tribe on Clayoquot h<1., Vancouver id. ;
pop. 76 in 1904. Their principal village
18 I ahksis.
Xel-seem-aht.— Can. Ind. Aff., 186, 1884. Kel-sem-
aht.— Ibid., 357, 1897. K-eltsma'ath.— Boas in 6th
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 31, 1890. KillMnaht.—
Sproat, Savage Life, 308, 1868. Kilaimat.— Mayne,
Brit. Col., 251, 1861.
Keltakkaua ( KE^ltdnk 'aua ) . A division
of the Nuhalk, a Bellacoola tribe of the
coast of British Columbia. — Boas in 7th
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 3, 1891.
Kemanks. A bodv of Salish of Fraser
superintendency, 6rit. Col. (Can. Ind.
Aff., 138, 1879), no longer oflBcially re-
ported.
Kemisak. An Eskimo village on the £.
coast of (Greenland, about lat. 63° 40'';
pop. 90 in 1829. — Graah, Exped. Green-
land, map, 1837.
Kenabig (Kindbtkj * snake ' ) . A gens of
the Chippewa.
Ohe-«he-gwa.— Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc.
Coll., V, 45, 1885 ('rattlesnake'). Ke-na'-bif.—
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166, 1877 ('snake'). Kina-
bik.— Wm. Jones, infn, 1906. She-»he-gwah.—
Tanner, Narrative, 175, 1830. Bhe-she-gwim.—
Ibid. , 315 ( ' rattlesnake ' ) .
Kenachananak. A Kuskwogmiut Eski-
mo village on the seashore opposite Nuni-
vak id., Alaska; pop. 181, in 8 dwellings,
in 1890.
Kenachananak.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 236,
1902. Eennaohananaghamiut.— Eleventh Census.
Alaska, 109, 1893.
Kenai. A Knaiakhotana settlement
and trading post of 44 people on the e.
side of Cook inlet, Alaska, at the mouth
of Kaknu r. The population in 1890 was
263 in 30 houses. The Russians erected
here the redoubt of St Nicholas in 1791,
and a Russian orthodox mission was es-
tablished about 1900, the Knaiakhotana
here being devoted members of the Rus-
sian church. A large salmon cannery has
been in operation for many years.
Fort Kenai.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 286, 1902.
Kenai redoute.—Petrofl in 10th Census. Alaska, 29,
1884. Pavlovtkaia.— Russian map (1802) cited by
Baker, op. cit. St. Nioholat.— Ibid. StVioolaa.—
Ibid. St. Nikolas.— Ibid.
Kenapacomaqua. The principal village
of the Wea, formerly on the w. bank of
Eel r., near its mouth, 6 m. above Logans-
port, Cass CO. , 1 nd. From its situation on
Eel r. (Anguille in French) it was called
L'Anguille by the French. It was de-
stroyed by Gen. Wilkinson in 1791.
(j. M.)
Kenapaoomaqua.— Wilkinson (1791) in Am. State
Papers, Ind. Aflf., I, 134, 1832. Ke-i
qua.— Hough in Indiana Geol. Rep., map, 1861.
rAnguille.— Rupp, West. Pa.. 264, 1846.
Kendaia (*it is an orchard.' — Hewitt).
A former Seneca settlement situated at
about the site of Kendaia, Seneca co.,
N. Y. Before its destruction by Gen.
Sullivan in Sept., 1779, it contained about
20 houses. (j. m.)
Appletown.— Livermore (1779) in N. H. Hist. Soc.
Coll., VI, 326, 1850. Canadia.— Hubley (1779) quoted
by Conover, Kanadega and Geneva MS., B. A. E.
Candaia.— Norris quoted by Conover, ibid. Can-
dia.— Machin, map, ibid. Conday.— Livermore,
op. cit. Kahonta'yon.— Hewitt, infn, 1890 (Seneca
form ) . Kandaia.— Nukerck (1779) quoted by Con-
over, Kanadega and Geneva MS., B. A. E.
Kendaea.— Pouchot, map (1758) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., X, 694, 1858. KindaU.— Pemberton (1792) in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., n, 176, 1810. Saint
Ooy.— McKendry (1779) quoted by Conover, Kana-
dega and Geneva MS., B. A. £.
Kendawa ( Ken-da-wd^ * eagle * ) . A gens
of the Miami (q. v.) . — Morgan, Anc. &dc.,
168, 1877.
Kenek. A Yurok village on lower
Klamath r., 5 or 6 m. below the mouth
of Trinity r. , Cal. It plays a prominent
part in Yurok myths, but does not appear
to have been important in historic times.
Kenek.— A. L. Kroeber, infn, 1904 (Yurok name).
Shwufum.- Ibid. (Karok name.)
Kenikashika ( * those who became humaa
beings by the aid of a turtle' ). A Qua-
Saw gens.
e-ni'kaci'M.- Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 229,
1897. TurUe gens.- Ibid.
Kenlm Lake. A Shuswap village or band
on Kenim lake, which flows into North
Thompson r., interior of British Colum-
bia; pop. 87 in 1902, 67 in 1904.
Kanim Lake.— Can. Ind. AIT., 274, 1902. Kaninim
Lake.— Ibid., 271, 1889. Kaninie' Tribe.— Ibid., 190.
1884. Kenim Lake.— Ibid., pt. il, 72, 1902.
Ke;iip8im. A Cowichan tribe in Cow-
itchin valley, near the s. e. end of Van-
couver id. ; pop. 53 in 1904.
Ka-nip-eum.— Can. Ind. Aff., 308, 1879. Kee-nip-
saim.— Ibid., 302, 1893. Kee-nip-sim.— Ibid., 231,
1886. Ke-nip-sim.— Ibid., 190, 1883. Khenipeim.—
Ibid., pt. II, 164, 1901. Khenipsin.— Ibid., pt. II,
69, 1904. ae'nipBen.— Boas, MS., B. A. £., 1887.
Kennebec (*at the long water'). A
former village, probably of the Norridge-
wock division of the Abnaki, on Kennebec
r. between Augusta and Winslow, Me.
BULL. 30]
KENNEBUNKER KEOKUK
673
Mentioned by Capt. John Smith in 1616
and visited by Druillettea in 1646.
X6iiA>M.— Maurault, Hist. Abenakis, 120. 1866.
XtnelMcka.— Smith (1629). Hist. Va., ii. 177. 1819.
K«Beb«ke.— Ibid., 183. Kinibeki.— Jes.Rel. (1647 1.
Thwaites ed., xxxi, 189, 1898.
Kennebunker. A word local in the Maine
lumbering regions, defined ( Dialect Noten,
390, 1895) as a ** valise in which clothes
are put by lumbermen when they go into
camp for a * winter operation.*** This
term, of quite recent origin, has been
formed, with the English suffix -er, from
Kennebunky a river and port in Maine; de-
rived from the Passaraaquoddy or a close-
ly related dialect of Algonquian, probably
signifying ' at the long water. ' ( a . f. c. )
Kenoihe (Khiozhd"y * pickerel'). A
gens of the Chippewa. Cf. Keinouche.
Ke-aooahaT.— Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc.
Coll., v, 44,1885 (trans, 'pike'). Ke-no-iha.— Tan-
ner, Narrative, 314, 1830 (• pickerel'). Ke-no'-
she.— Morean, Anc. Soc., 166, 1877 ('pike').
Kinojan.— Wm. Jones, infn, 1906.
Kenta (probably from khifa\ * field',
'meadow.^ — Hewitt). A Tuscarora vil-
lage in North Carolina in 1701. — Lawson
(1714), Carolina, 383, 1860.
Kentanuska. A Tuscarora village in
North Carolina in 1701. — Lawson (1714),
Carolina, 383, 1860.
gftnta (khit\i\ Afield', * meadow'). A
Cayuga village existing about 1670 on
Quin^ bay of L. Ontario, Ontario.
Kant*.— Bruyas (1673) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix,
792, 1866. Kent^.— Frontenae (1673), ibid., 96.
Ktnttia.— Homann Heirs' map, 1756. Eentsio.—
Lotter, map, ca. 1770. duent^.— La Honton, New
Voy., I, 82, 1703. duintay.— Frontenac (1672), op.
cit., 93. ftuint^.— Doc. of 1698 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., IX, 681, 1855.
Kennnimik. An Ikogmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on the right bank of the lower Yukon,
A&ska (Coast Surv. chart, 1898), 15 m.
above Andreafski. Perhaps the same as
Ankachak.
Keokak (Kiyokagft, *one who moves
about alert* ). A Sauk leader, a member
of the Fox clan, born on Rock r., 111.,
about 1780. He was not a chief by birth,
but rose to the command of his people
through marked ability, force of charac-
ter, and oratorical power. His mother is
said to have been half French. At an
early age he was a member of the 8auk
council, which he graced, but at first
played only a subordinate role therein.
He stepped into prominence later on
when he was made tribal guest-keeper.
While holding this oflSce he was supplied
at tribal expense with all the means of
rendering hospitality, and played the part
of a genial host witli such pleasing enect
that his lodge became a center for all
things social and political. Quick to see
the possibilities of this oflSce he made use
of the opportunity to further his own
ambitions.
Keokuk was well aware of the fact that
the rigid social organization of his peo-
ple offered a barrier to the realization of
Bull. 30—05 i3
his cherished desire, which was to be-
come the foremost man of his tribe. Con-
trary to the manner of men of his train-
ing, environment, and tradition, he had
no scruples against doing away with a
practice if thereby he might reap profit
for himself; and he worked his will against
custom, not in an open, aggressive way,
but by veiled, diplomatic methods. He
was continually involved in intrigue;
standing always in the background, he
secretly playeS one faction against an-
other. In time he became the leading
councilor in the Sauk assembly, and en-
joyed great i)opularity among his people.
But the situation assumed a different as-
|)ect when the trouble<l period of the so-
called Black Hawk war arrived. The
immediate cause of this conflict grew out
of an agreement iirst entered into between
the Government and a small band of Sauk
who, under their leader Kwaskwamia,
were in winter camp near the trading post
of St Louis. By tliis compact the Sauk
were to give up the liock River country.
As soon as the agreement became noised
abroad amon^if all the Sauk there was
strong opposition, i>articularly to the form
in which it had been made. Throughout
the affair Keokuk assumed so passive an
attitude that he lost at once both social
and political prestige. Those of the Sauk
who favoreil an appeal to arms then
turned to a man of the Thunder clan,
ftlack-big-chest, known to the whites un-
der the name of Black Hawk (q. v. ), who
became their leader. Just at this critical
^-
%v»
674
KEOTUC KEBEMEN
[b. a. b.
period the feeble bond of political union
between the Sauk and the Foxes waa bro-
ken, this result being due largely to in-
ternal dissensions brought on by the in-
trigues of Keokuk, who, with a following
of unpatriotic Sauk, sought and obtained
protection from the Foxes under their
chief, Paweshik. The fighting began be-
fore Black Hawk was ready, and he
was forced to take the field with but a
small number of those on whose support
he had depended. With his depleted
forces he could not successfully contend
against the Illinois militia and their Ind-
ian allies.
Keokuk loomed up again during the
final negotiations growing out of the war,
and played so deftly into the hands of
the Government oflScials that he was made
chief of the Sauk. It is said that the an-
nouncement of his elevation to supreme
power was made in open council, and that
it so aroused the anger and contempt of
Black Hawk that ne whipped off his
clout and slapped Keokuk across the face
with it. The act of creating Keokuk chief
of the Sauk has always been regarded
with ridicule by both the Sauk and the
Foxes, for the reason that he was not of
the ruling clan. But the one great occa-
sion for which both the Sauk and the
Foxes honor Keokuk was when, in the
■city, of Washington, in debate with the
representatives of the Sioux and other
tribes before Government officials, he es-
tablished the claim of the Sauk and Foxes
to the territory comprised in what is now
the state of Iowa. He based this claim
primarily on conquest.
On his death , in 1848, in Kansas, whither
he had moved three years before, the
chieftainship, with its unsavory associa-
tions, went to his son, Moses Keokuk
(Wunagisa', *he leaps up quickly from
his lair*), who displaved many of the
mental characteristics of the father. Those
who knew them both maintain that the
son was even the superior intellectually,
and of higher ethics. He was fond of
debate, Iwing always cool, deliberate, and
clear-headed! In argument he was more
than a match for any Government officer
with whom he ever came in contact at
the agency. He bore an intense hatred
for the Foxes, which was returned with
more than full measure. Moses Keokuk
was acknowledged the purest speaker of
the Sauk dialect. The Sauk were never
tired of his eloquence; it was always
simple, clear, and pleasing. Late in life
he embraced Christianity and was bap-
tized a Baptist; but he never ceased to
cherish a smcere regard for the old-time
life and its fond associations. He suc-
ceeded in turning aside much of the
odium that had early surrounded his
office, and though he met with more po-
litical opposition during his whole life,
yet when he died, at Sauk and Fox
agency, Okla., in Aug. 1903, his death was
regarded by the Sauk as a tribal calamity.
In 1883 the remains of the elder Keo-
kuk were removed from Kansas to Keo-
kuk, Iowa, where they were reinterred
in the city park and a monument erected
over his grave by the citizens of the town.
A bronze bust of Keokuk stands in the
Capitol at Washington. (w. j.)
Keotuc (prob. for KhimiXig^ *he whose
voice is heard roaming about' — W. J.).
A Potawatomi band, probably taking its
name from the chief, living in Kansas in
1857.— Baldwin in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857,
163, 1858.
Keowee (according to Wafford, Kuwd-
hiyX or, in abbreviated form, Kuwdhi,
'mulberry grove place*). The name of
two or more former Cherokee settlements.
One, sometimes distinguished as Old Keo-
wee, the principal of the Lower Cherokee
towns, was on the river of the same name,
near the present Port George, in Oconee
CO. , S. C. Another, distinguished as New
Keowee, was on the headwaters of
Twelve-mile cr., in Pickens co., S. C. —
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 525, 1900.
Keowe.— Bartram, Travels, 372, 1792. Hew
Keoweo.— Mouzon's map quoted by Royce in 6th
Rep. B. A. E., 143, 1887.
Kepatawangachik. Given as the name
of a tribe formerly living near L. St
John, Quebec, but driven off by the Iro-
quois (Jes. Rel. 1660, 12, 1858). Named
in connection with Abittibi and Oua-
kouiechidek (Chisedec). Possibly the
Papinachois.
Kepel. A Yurok village on lower Kla-
math r., about 12 m. below the mouth of
the Trinitv, in n. California. It waa
the only place in Yurok territory, besides
Loolego, at which a fish dam was erected
across the river.
Akharatipikam.— A. L. Kroeber. infn, 1904 (Karok
name). Capel. — Gibbsin Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
111,138, 1853. Cap-pel.— McKee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,
32d Cong., spec.sess., 161,1853. Kai-petl.— Gibbs,
op. cit.
Kerahocak. A former village of the
Powhatan confederacy on the n. bank of
the Rappahannock, in King George co.,
Ya.— Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map,
repr. 1819.
Kerechun (ke-re-tciJi'^ probably 'hawk*).
A subgens of the Waninkikikarachada,
the Bird gens of the Winnebago. — Dorsey
in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 240, 1897.
Keremen. A village or tribe formerly
in the country between Mat^orda bay
and Maligne (Colorado) r., Tex. The
name seems to have been given Joutel
in 1687 by the Ebahamo, who were prob-
ably affiliated to the neighboring Karan-
kawa. They are probably the Aranama
(q. V.) of the Spanish chroniclers. See
Gatschet, Karankawa Inds., 23, 35, 46,
1891. (a. c.p.)
BULL. 30]
KEBEMEUS ^KESHKUNUWU
675
K0rem«&.~Joutel (1687) in French, Hist. Coll. La.,
1,137,1846. Korimen.— Joutel (1687) in Margry,
D4C., Ill, 288, 1878 (mentioned as distinct from
Keremen, but probably a duplication).
Keremens. A Similkameen band of the
Okinagan; pop. 55 in 1897, when last
separately enumerated.
"" B-eeot.— Can. Ind. Aff. for 1883, 191. Kere-
I.— Ibid.. 1892, 313. Eeremeut.— Ibid., 1897.
364. Kfiremya'us.— Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist., II, 174. 1900.
^ Keresan Family (adapted from K*ereSf
the aboriginal name). A linguistic fam-
ily of Fueblo Indians including the in-
habitants of several villages on the Rio
Grande, in n. central New Mexico, be-
tween the Rito de los Frijoles (where,
before being confined to reservations,
they joined the Tewa on the n. ) and
the Rio Jemez, as well as on the latter
stream from the pueblo of Sia to its mouth.
The w. division, comprising Acoma and
Laguna pueblos, are situated westward
from the Rio Grande, the latter on the
Rio San Jos^. Like the other Pueblo
tribes of New Mexico, the Keresan In-
dians maintain that they had their origin
at the mythical Shipapu and that they
slowly drifted soutnward to the Rio
Grande, taking up their abode in the Rito
de los Frijoles, or Tyuonyi, and con-
structing there the clift-dwellingH found
to-day excavated in the friable volcanic
tufa. Long l)efore the coming of the
Spaniards they had abandoned the Rito,
and, moving farther southward, sepa-
rated into a number of autonomous vil-
lage communities. According to Coro-
nado, who visited the "Quirix " province
in 1540, these Indians occupieil 7 pueblos;
40 years later Espejo found 5; while in
1630 Benavides aescril)ed the stock as
numbering 4,000 people, in 7 towns ex-
tending 10 leagues along the Rio Grande.
See Bandelier (1) in Arch. Ini?t. Papers,*
1, 114, 1883, (2) ibid., iv, ISOetseq., 1892,
(3) Delight Makers, 1890.
According to Loew this i^tock consti-
tutes two aialectic groups, the first or
Queres group comprising the inhabit-
ants of Santo Dommgo, Santa Ana, Sia,
San Felipe, and Cochiti; the other, the
Sitsime or Kawaiko group, comprehend-
ing Laguna and Acoma with their outly-
ing villages.
The Keresan settlements are as follows,
those marked with an asterisk being ex-
tinct: Acoma, Acomita, Casa Blanca,
Cieneguilla*, Cochiti, Cubero*, Cueva
Pintada*, Encinal, Gipuy*, Haatze*, Ha-
satch, Heashkowa*, Huashpatzena*, Ka-
kanatzatia^, Kashkachuti*, Katzimo*, Ko-
hasaya*, Kowina*, Kuapa*, Kuchtva*,
Laguna, Moquino*, Paguate, Pueblito,
Puerto (?)*, Punyish^i, Rito*, San Felipe,
Santa Ana, Santo Don)in^o, Seemunah,
Shumasitscha*, Sia, Tapitsiama*, Tipoti*
Tsiama, Wapuchuseamma, Washpashu-
ka*, Yapashi*. The following pueblos.
now extinct, were perhaps also Keresan:
Alipoti, A yqui, Cebolleta, Pelchiu, Pueblo
del Encierro, San Mateo, Tashkatze,
Tojagua. (f. w. h. )
Bierni'n.— Hodge, field notes. B. A.E., 1895 (Sandia
name). OhereoboB.— Ofiate (1598) in Doc. In6d.,
XVIM02.1871. Cheres.— Ibid., XVI, 114. Ohu-oha-
ca«.— Lane (1854) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
v, 689, 1855 (applied to the language). Chu-cha-
chas.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 479, 1878
(after Lane, misprint) . Cueres.— Humboldt, Atlas
Nonv. Kspagne, carte 1, 1811. Cueres.— Simpson
in Smithson. Rep. 1869. 834, 1871. Drinkers of the
Dew. — Gushing in Johnson's Cyclop., iv, 891, 1896
(given as Zufli traditional name). Oueres.—
Ogilby, America, 295, 1671. Hores.— Ofiate (1598)
in Doc. InM., xvi, 266, 1871 (probably identical),
ing-we-pi'-ran-di-vi-he-ma".— Hodge, field notes, B.
A. E., 1895 (San Ildefonso Tewa name). Jeres.—
Loew (1875) in Wheeler Survey Rep., vii, 388,
1879 (probably identical). Eera.— Hervas, Idea
deir Universo. xvii, 76, 1784. Keran.— Powell in
Am. Nat., xiv, 604, Aug. 1880. Kerat.— Malte-
Brun, Geog., v, 318, 1826. Keres.— Pike, Expedi-
tions, 220, 1810. Kes-whaw-hay.— Lane (1864) in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 689, 1855 (applied to
language). Kweres.— Petitot, Diet. D^nd-Dindjid,
xvii. 1876. Pabiemi'n.— Hodge, field notes, B. A.
E., 1895 (Isleta name). (Iq'u^res.— Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Papers, i, 114; 1883. duera.— Hervas
(1784) quoted by Prichard, Phys. Hist. Mankind,
V, 341, 1847. ftuera.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pa-
pers, 1, 114. 1883. dueres.— Benavides, Memorial,
20. 1630. ftueres.— Villagran. Hist. Neuva Mex.,
155. 1610. aueres.— Benavides (1630) quoted by
Gallatin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 6th s., xxvii, 30d,
1851. ftuereses.— Sosa (1591) in Doc. InM., xv, 248,
1871. ftuerez.— Rivera, Diario y Derrot., leg. 784,
1736. (iueris.— Bandelier in Revue d'Ethnog.,
203, 1886. dueroB.— Walch, Charte America, 1805.
auingas.— Graves (18.54) in H. R. Misc. Doc. 38, 33d
Cong., 1st sess., 7, 1854. Quires.— Espejo (1583) in
Doc. ln<ki., xv, 122, 1871. ftuirex.— Simpson in
Smithson. Rep. 1869, map. 1871. duiria.— <iallatin
in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc, ii, Ixxl, 1848. Quirix.—
Ca.staiiedu {ra. 1565) in Ternaux-Compans, Voy.,
IX, 110, 1H38. ftuiros.— Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 163,
1744. ftuivix.— Castafieda (ca. 1666) in Ternaux-
Compans, Voy., IX, 182, 1838. Xeres.— Rivera, Di-
ario y Derrot.. leg. 9.50, 1736. Zores.— Vetancurt
(1693), Cr6nica, 315. 1S71.
Kemertok. A settlement of Ysst Green-
land Eskimo near Frederiksdal. — Med-
delelser om Gronland, xxv, 246, 1902.
Kern Biver ShoshoneaiiB. A small Sho-
shonean group in s. California which dif-
fers so much linguistically from all other
peoples of this family as to form a major
division, although numerically insignif-
icant. It includes the Tubatulabal, who
occupy the valley of Kern r. above the falls,
and the Bankalachi of upper Deer cr.
Keroff. Mentioned among a number of
Upper Creek towns in 11. R. Kx. Doc. 276,
24th Cong., 1st sess., 162, 1886. It prob-
ably is a badly mutilated abbreviation of
the name of a known Creek town, but is
not identifiable in this form. The settle-
ment appears to have been on the upper
course of Coosa r., Ala.
Kershaw. See Cashaw.
Kesa ( Qe^sa ). A Haida town on the w.
coast of Graham id., Queen Charlotte
group, Brit. Col. It was occupied by the
Tadji-lanas before moving to Alaska. —
S wanton, Cont. Haida, 281, 1905.
Keshkunuwu ((^feckinmwu^j * blue jay
fort'). A former Tlingit village in the
Sitka country, Alaska. (j. r. s. )
676
KESHLAKCHUIS KEWAUGHTOHENEMACH
[B. A. E.
KetBhUikchJiiBiKe^sh-ldktchuish). A for-
mer Modoc settlement on the s. e. side of
Tule (Rhett) lake, Modoc co., n e. Cal. —
Gatschet in Cont. N. A. EthnoL, ii, pt. 1,
xxxii, 1890.
Keskaechqaerem. Mentioned as if a
former Canarsee village near Maspeth, on
the w. end of Long id., N. Y., in deed of
1638.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, xiv, 14, 1888.
Keskistkonk. A fonner Nochpeem vil-
lage which seems to have been on Hudson
r. , 8. of the H ighlands, in Putnam co. , N. Y.
Ketkistkonok.— van der Donck (1656) quoted by
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 80, 1872. Ki« Kight-
konok.— Doc. of 1663 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiii,
303, 1881 (used for the Nochpeem tribe).
Kesmali {KH-vfid-li). A former village
of the San Luis Obispo Indians of the
Cbumashan family, at Pt Sal, San Luis
Obispo CO., Cal. — Schumacher in Smith-
son. Rep. 1874, 340, 1875.
Kespoo^wit ( ' land' s end ' ) . One of the
two divisions of the territory of the Mic-
mac as recognized bv themselves. Ac-
(!ording to Rand it includes the districts of
Eskegawaage, Shubenacadie, and Annap-
olis (q. v.), embracing all of s. and e.
Nova Scotia. In Frye's list of 1760,
Kashpugowitk and Keshpugowitk are
mentioned as two of 14 Micmac bands or
villages. These are evidently duplicates,
as the same chief was over both, and were
intended for the Kespoogwit division.
The inhabitants are called Kespoog-
witunak. See 3/tcmap. (j. m.)
Kashpugowitk.— Frje (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., Ist 8., X, 115-116, 1809. Keshpu^witk.—
Ibid, (mentioned separately, but evidently the
Kame) . Keapoogwlt.— Rand, First Micmac Read-
ing Book. 81, 1875. Kespoogwitun&'k.— Ibid, (the
people of Kespoogwit).
Kestaabnlnck. A former Sintsink vil-
lage in Westchester co., N. Y., between
Singsing cr. and Croton r. ; mentioned by
Van der Donck in 1656.— Ruttenber,
Tribes Hudson R., 72, 79, 1872.
Ket (Q!etf 'narrow strait'). A Haida
town on Burnaby str. , Moresby id. , Queen
Charlotte group, Brit. Col. It was occu-
pied by a branch of the Hagi-lanas, who
irom their town were called Keda-lanas. —
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 277, 1905.
Ketangheanycke. A village, probably of
the Abnaki, near the mouth of Kennebec
r.. Me., in 1602-09.— Purchas (1625)
quoted in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 156, 1857.
Ketchewaandaagenink ( ^ large lick at.' —
I Hewitt). A former Chippewa village on
1 Shiawassee r., on the trail between Detroit
\ and Saginaw bay, in lower Michigan, on a
reservation sold in 1837. (j. m. )
Bif Lick.— Detroit treaty (1837) in U. S. Ind.
Treat., 245, 1873. Bif salt Uck.— Williams (1872) in
Mich. Pion Coll., ii. 476, 1880. Ohe-won-der-sron-
ing.— Ibid., 477. Ke-che-wan-dor-^ning.— Ibid.,
476. Kech-e-waun-dau-gu-mink.— Rovce in 18th
Rep. B. A. E., Mich, map, 7iB6, 1899. Ketchewaun-
daugenink.— .Saginaw treaty (proclaimed 1820) in
U. S. Ind. Treat., 142, 1873. Eetchewaundaug-
umink.— Detroit treaty, op. cit. Eetchiwawiyan-
diganiny.— Wm. Jones, infn, 1906. Keth-e-wan-
don-gon-ing. — Williams, op. cit, 481. Saline.—
Ibid., 476 (French name), wan-dor-gon-iiig.—
Ibid., 477. •
Ketohignxniwisxiwugi {Kelcigq,mitm8U'
wqg^y *they go by the name of the sea*).
A Sauk gens.
Ki-ohe-kone-a-we'-so-uk.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 170,
1877 (trans, 'sea'). Ke'tdg^wisuw«g<.— Wm.
Jones, inf n, 1906.
Ketgohittan (^people of small-shark
house'). Given as a subdivision of the
Tlingit clan Nanyaayi, but in reality
simply the name of those inhabiting a
certain house.
K-'e'tgo hit tan.— Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 25, 1889. ftlA'tgu hit tan.— Swanton, field
notes, B. A. E,, 1904.
Ketlalsm (Ke^tlah^m, 'nipping grass*,
so called because deer come here in spring
to eat the fresh grass). A Squawmish
village community on the e. side of
Howe sd., Brit. Col.— Hill-Tout in Rep.
Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900.
Ketlaynnp. A body of Salish of Van-
couver id. , speaking the Cowichan dialect;
pop. 24 in 1882.— Can. Ind. Aff. for 1882,
258.
Ketnas-liadai (K''' etnas .-had'a^i, * sea-
lion house people' [?]). Given by Boas
( Fifth Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 27,1889)
as the name of a subdivision of the Yaku-
lanas, a family of the Raven clan of the
Haida of s. w. Alaska; but it is in reality
only a house name belonging to that
family. There seems to be an error in
the designation, the word for * sea-lion*
being f/a-i. (.i. r. s. )
Ketsilind [Ki^tsWnd, 'people of the Rio
Chiquito ruin ' ). A division of the Jica-
rilla who claim that their former home
was 8. of Taos pueblo, N. Mex. They are
possibly of mixed Picuris descent.
(j. M.)
Kenchislikeni {Ke-utchUhxe^nij * where
the wolf rock stands ' ) . A former Modoc
camping place on Hot cr., near Little
Klamath lake, n. Cal. — Gatschet in Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. 1, xxxii, 1890.
Kevalingamiat A tribe of Eskimo
whose country extended from C. Sep-
pings and C. Krusenstern, Alaska, inland
to Nunatak r. They were an offshoot of
the Nunatogmiut, reenforced by outlaws
from the Kinugumiut and Kaviagmiut.
The main body of the tribe is now found
about Pt Hope and farther n., having
emigrated on account of disease and lack
of f<x)d, and expelled the Tigaramiut from
their northern hunting grounds. Their
villages are Kechemudluk, Kivualinak,
and Ulezara.
Eevalinye Kutes.- Kelly, Arct. Rskimos, chart,
1890. Kevalinyes. — Ibid.. 13. Kivalinag-mint
(Tikhmenief (1861) quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet.
Alaska, 115, 1902.
Kevilkivashalah. A body of Salish of
Victoria superintendency, Vancouver id.
Pop. 31 in 1882, when' last separately
enumerated.
Kevil-kiva-»ha-lah.— Can. Ind. Aflf. for 1882, 258.
Kewatsana (KewAtsdnay *no ribs*). An
extinct division of the Comanche. —
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1045, 1896.
^ Xewauglitolieuemacli. Given as a divi-
BULL. 301
KEWIG08HKEEM — KHABEKAPO
677
sion of the Okinagan that lived 30 in.
above Priests rapids, on Columbia r.,
Wash.
Xe>wattfht>ohen-unanghs.— RoH8, Adventures, 290,
1849. Ke-wangh-tohen-emaohs.— Ibid.. 137.
Kewigoslikeem. A former Chippewa or
Ottawa village, named after a chief who
flourished in the latter part of the 18th
century; situateil on Grand r., at or near
the present (ir^nd Rapidw, Mi(^h., on
land ceded to the United States* by the
treaty of Chicago, Aug. 29, 1821,' pro-
claimed Mar. 25, 1832. Under this treaty
half a section of land near the village was
granted to Charles and Medart Beaubien,
sons of Mannabenaqua.
Ke-wi-ffo-thkeem.— Treaty (proclaimed 1832) in
U. 8. Ind. Treat., IM, 1873. Ke-wi-go^sh-kum.—
Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., Mich, map, 1899.
Kowigushkum.— Bennett (1779) in Mich. Pion.
Coll., IX, 393, 1886 (the chief).
Keya. The Badger clan of the Tewa
gueblos of San Juan, Santa Clara, and
an Ildefonso, N. Mex. — Hodge in Am.
Anthrop., ix, 349, 1896.
Keyatiwankwi (K^eyatiwankwiy 'place
of upturning or elevation' ). The first of
the mythic settling places of the Zufii
after their emergence from the under-
world.—Cushing in 13th Rep. B. A. K,
388, 1896.
Keyauwee. A small tribe formerly liv-
ing in North Carolina, affiliated with the
Tutelo, Saponi, and Occaneechi. Nothing
remains of their language, but they \^t-
haps belonged to the Siouan family, from
the fact of their intimate association with
well known Siouan tribes of the E. In
1701 Lawson (Carolina, 1714, 87-89, repr.
1860) found them in a palisaded village
about 30 m. N. E. of Yadkin r., near the
present High point, Guilford co., N. C.
Around the village were large fields of
com. At that time they were about
equal in number to the Saponi and had,
as chief, Keyauwee Jack, who was by birth
a Congaree, but had obtained the' chief-
taincy oy marriage with their ** queen.*'
Lawson says most of the men wore mus-
taches or 'whiskers, an unusual custom
for Indians. At the time of this travel-
er's visit the Keyauwee were on the
point of joining the Tutelo and Saponi for
better protection against their enemies.
Shortly afterward they, together with
the Tutelo, Saponi, Occaneechi, and Sha-
kori, moved down toward the settlements
about Albemarle sd., the five tribes
with one or two others not named num-
bering then only about 750 souls. In
1716 Gov. Spotswood of Virginia pro-
posed to settle the Keyauwee with the
Eno and Sara at Enotown on the frontier
of North Carolina, but was prevented
by the opposition of that colony. They
moved southward with the Sara, and per-
haps also the Eno, to Pedee r., S. C, some
time in 1733. On Jefferys' map of 1761
their village is marked on the Pedee
above that of the Sara, about the boun-
dary between the two Carolinas. With
this notice they disappear from history,
having probably been absorbed by the
Cataw-ba. ( j. m. )
Keawe.— Jeflferys, Fr. Dom. Am.. 1,134, map, 1761.
Keawec.— Bowen, map of the Brit. Am. Planta-
tions, 1760, Keeawawes.— Doc. of 1716 in N. ('.
Rec., 242, 1886. Keeowaws.— Ibid.,243. Keeowee.--
Vaugondy, map Partie de I'Am^r. Sept., 1756.
Keiauwees.— Lawson (1701), Carolina, 884, 1860.
Eeomee.— Moll, map of Car., 1720 (misprint).
Kewawees.— Byrd (1733), Hist. Div. Line, n, 22,
1866. Keyauwee.— Ltiwson (1701), Carolina, 87,
repr. 1860. Keyawees.— Brickell, Nat. Hist. N.
Car., 343, 1737.
Keyerhwotket Cold village'). A vil-
lage of the Hwotsotenne on Bulkley r.,
Brit. Col., lat. 55°.
Keyar-hwotqat.— Morice, Notes on W. D^n^s. 27,
1902. 'x^yajhwotqat.— Morice in Trans. Roy. Soc.
Can., X, map, 1892. Kyahuntgate.— Tolmie and
Daw-^on, Vocabs. B. C, map, 1884. Kyahwilgate.—
Dawson in Rep, (ieol.Surv. Can., 20b, 1881.
Keyukee. A former Cherokee town;
locality undetermined. — Doc. of 1799
quoteii by Koyce in 5th Rep. B. A. E.,
144, 1887.
Kezche. A Tatshiautin village on Tache
r., Brit. Col., under the Babine and
l'p{)er Skeena River agency; ix)p. 24 in
1904.
Grand Rapid*.— Can. Ind. Aff., pt. 2, 70, 1902.
'Kertce.— 5lorice, Notes on W. I)«?nC's, 26, 1902.
KuB-che-o-tin.— Dawson in Rep. Can. (ieol. Sur\'.,
30b, 1881. Kustahcotin.— Tolmie and Dawson,
Vocabs. B. C.. 123b, 1HK4.
Keze ( ' barbed like a liehhook,' a deris-
ive name, alluding to their cross disposi-
tion) . A band of the Sisseton Sioux, an
offshoot of the Kakliniiatonwan. — Dor-
sey in 15th Rep. B. A. K., 217, 1897.
Kezonlathut. A Takulli village on Mc-
leod lake, Brit. Col.; pop. 96 in 1904.
Mcleod's Lake.— Can. Ind. Aff., 1904, pt. ii, 74, 1905.
Qezonlathut.— Morice in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can., x,
109, 1892.
Kfwetragottine ( ' mountain people ' ) .
A division of the Kawchodinne living s.
of Ft Good Hope, along Mackenzie r.,
Mackenzie Ter., Can.
Kfwe-tpa-Gottine.— Petitot, Antonr dn lac des Ks-
claves, 362, 1891.
Khaamotene. (iiven, seemingly in error,
as a subdivision of the Tolowa formerly
dwelling at the mouth of Smith r., Cal.,
in the village of Khoonkhwuttunne, and
at the forks in a village cal led Khosatunne.
Qa'-a-mo' te'-ne.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 236. 1890. Smith River Indians.— Ibid.
Khaap. A body of Ntlakyapamuk un-
der the Kamloops-Okanagan agency, Brit.
Col.; pop. 23 in 1901, the last time the
name appears.
Khaap.— Can. Ind. Aff. 1901, pt. 2, 166. Skaap.—
Ibid., 1885, 196.
Khabemadolil. A Porno village on up-
per Clear lake, Cal. — Kroeber, MS., Univ.
Cal., 1903.
Khabenapo ( 'stone village', or 'stone peo-
ple'). A Ponio division or band on Kel-
sey cr., in Big valley, on the w. side of
Clear lake, Cal. They numbered 195 in
1851.
Ca-ba-na-po.— McKee (ia'>l) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,
32d Cong., spec. sess.. 136. 18.53. Habe-napo.—
(iibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 109,
678
KHACHTAI8 — KHEMNICHAN
[B. A. B.
1853. Ha-M-na-pa.— McKee, op. cit. X*-bi-na-
pek.— Powersin CJont.N. A. Ethnol., ili, 204, 1877.
KhachtaiB. A former Siuslaw village on
Siuslaw r., Oreg.
Kqito-^aU'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii,
280, 1890.
Khahitan {Gha-hitd^n, pi. Gha-hitd^neoy
'ermine people*, from gha-l 'ermine*,
/li^^ /If 0* people'). TheChevennenameof
an unidentined Pueblo tribe of the Rio
Grande, known to the Cheyenne through
visits and trade intercourse. They for-
merly accompanied Mexican traders in
their journeys to the camps of the Plains
tribes, and used Spanish as well as their
own language. They formerly cut their
hair across below the ears, with a short
side plait wrapped with strings of white
ermine skin, but have now adopted the
ordinary hairdress style of the Plains
tribes. From information of Cheyenne
who met some of them on a recent visit
to Taos, N. Mex., it is known that they
are distinct from Ute, Navaho, Jicarilla,
or Taos Indians, and live farther s. than
any of these. They may possiblv be the
Picuris. ( J. M. )
Gha-hi-taneo.— Mooney, MS. Cheyenne notes, B.
A. E., 1906. Ka-he'-te-ni-o.— Hayden, Ethnog.
and Philol. Mo. Val., 290, 1862.
Khaik. A Chnagmiut Eskimo village
on the Yukon, Alaska.
Khaigamut.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map,
1899. Ehaigamute.— PetrofT in 10th Census,
Alaska, map, 1884.
Khaikuckain. A former Siuslaw village
on Siuslaw r., Oreg.
K'qai'-kii-tc'fim'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
111. 230, 1890.
Khainanaitetimne. A former village of
the Tututni, the inhabitants of which were
exterminated, except two boys, one of
whom was an old man at Siletz agency,
Oreg., in 1884.
da'-i-na'-na-i-tS' ^unng.— Dorsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, lii, 236, 1890.
Khaislixik. A former Yaquina village on
the N. side of Yaquina r., Oreg.
Kqai'-ciik.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 229,
1890.
Khaiynkkhai. A former Yaquina vil-
lage on the 8. side of Yaquina r., Oreg.
Kqai-yiik'-kqai.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 229, 1890.
Khaiynmitn. A former Siuslaw village
on Siuslaw r., Oreg.
K'qai-yu'-xni-^fi. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 230, 1890.
Khakaianwa. Said to be a collective
name for the Pomo villages on upper
Clear lake, Cal.— Kroeber, MS., Univ.
Cal., 1903. Cf. Khana.
Khakhaick. A former Siuslaw village
on Siuslaw r., Oreg.
Kqa-kqaitc'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii,
230,1890.
Khalakw. A former Siuslaw village on
Siuslaw r., Oreg.
da-Uk'w'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
230 1890
khaltso ( * yellow bodies '). A Navaho
clan, the descendants of two daughters of
an Apache father.
HaltM.—Matthews, Navaho Legends, 90, 1897.
//altsocflne*.— Ibid. (Uato.— Matthews in Jour.
Am. Folk-lore, in, 103, 1890. aalt«)^e.— Ibid.
Khana (Pomo: *on the water*, or *on
[Clear] lake'). A term which seems to
have been descriptively applied to the
Pomo of Clear lake, Cal. Bartlett (1854)
gives a H'hana vocabulary, which is
Pomo, as coming from the upper Sacra-
mento, but obtained it from a stray Pomo
at San Diego.
H*hana.— Bartlett in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 492,
1877. Khana.— S. A. Barrett, inf n, 1906.
Kharatanumanke. Given as a Mandan
g^ns, but evidently merely a band,
o-ra-ta'-mii-make.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 158, 1877.
da-ra-ta' nu-man'-ke.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
241, 1897 (given with a query). Wolf.— Morgan,
op. cit.
Khaskklizhni (^mud'). A Navaho
clan.
/fa«U'2<nne'.— Matthews, Navaho Legends, 80,
1897. ffaairzni.— Ibid. Oaol^.— Matthews in Jour.
Am. Folk-lore, in, 103, 1890. Oaol^jni.— Ibid.
Khaskankhatso ( * much yucca ' ) . A Nav-
aho clan.
/faakanAatso.— Matthews, Navaho Legends, 30,
1897. HaskanAatiocflne'.— Ibid. Oaokii-qatsb.—
Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 103, 1890.
Qaoki^Bqatabifauie.— Ibid .
Khauweshetawes (* spread-out irriga-
tion ditch*). A Maricopa rancheriaon
the Rio Gila, s. Ariz.— ten Kate, inf n,
1888.
Khawina ( ' on the water ' ) . The name,
in the Upper Clear Lake dialect, of the
Lower Clear Lake Pomo village at Sul-
phur Bank, Lake co., Cal.— Kroeber,
MS., Univ. Cal., 1903.
Khdhasiakdhin ('dwelling place among
the yellow flowers'; i. e., 'sunflower
place' [?]). An ancient Osage village on
Neosho r., Kans.
Q,iin ttn^i".— Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A.E.,
1883. Qdhasi ukdhin.— Ibid.
Kheerghia. A former Tututni village
on the coast of Oregon, about 25 m. s. of
the mouth of Pistol r.
Kun-kqS'-tim.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
236, 1890. Qe-e-rxi'-a.— Ibid.
Khemnickan (' mountain- water wood,'
from a hill covered with timber that ap-
pears to rise out of the water) . A band of
the MdewaksatoTLSifiliX*. According to
Pike they were living in 1811 in a village
near the head of L. Pepin, Minn., on the
site of the present Red Wing, under chief
Tatankamani ('Walking Buffalo'); in
1820 they lived on L. Pepin, under chief
Red Wing. Long, in 1824, *ound them in
two smdl villages, one on Mississippi r.,
the other on Cannon r., aggregating 150
people in 20 lodges. Shakea waa then
their chief, subordinate to Wabeshaw of
the Kiyuksa. They were under Wakute
( ' Shooter ' ) at the time of the Sioux out-
break in 1862.
EamboMndato.— Neill in Minn. Hist. Coll., I, 263.
1858 ( trans. • mountain beside the water ' ) . Ean-
botaii4ata.-Long. Exped. St Peter's R., l, 880,
1824. Hamine-ohan.— Prescott in ocnoolcraf t, Ind.
Tribes, n, 171 , 1852. Ae-mini-iaij .—Dorsey In 16th
Rep. B. A. E., J215, 1897. iemnioa,— Ibid. He-
BULL. 30]
KHEYATAOTONWE KHOSMININ
679
mni'-oAi).— Ri«^, Dak. Gram, and Diet., 73, 1852.
Ki-mni-oan.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 81, 1850
(trans. ' those who live about the tree on the
mountain near the water'). (le-ini]ii-tca».— Dor-
sey, op. cit. <leiniiitoa.— Ibid. Raynmeeoha.—
Neill, Hist. Minn., xliv, 589. 1858 (so designated
because their village was near a hill, ha; * water,'
min; and *wood,' chan). Red Wing's.— Long,
Bxped. St Peters R., i, 380, 1824. ReminioaBand.—
Smithson. Misc. Coll., xiv, art. 5, 8. 1878. Rem-
niea.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 84. 1858. Renmichah.—
Ibid., 327. Shooter.— Ibid., 144, note (trans, of
Wakute, name of the chief). Talangamanae.—
Shea, Discov., Ill, 1852. WaheooU band.— Ind.
Aflf. Rep., 282. 1854. Wah-koo-tay.— Neill, Hist.
Minn., 589, 1868 (chiefs name) . Wahkuti band.—
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1855, 64, 1856. Wahuteband.— Mc-
Knsick in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1863. 314. 1864. WakooUy's
band.— Pike (1806) quoted by Neill, Hist. Minn.,
289, 1858 (cf. Cflliea, Pike's Exped., i, 62, 69, 88,
1895). Wakute band.— Gale, Upper Miss. , 252, 1867.
Wa-itu-te.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 144. note, laSS.
Wakute's band.— McKusick in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1863,
316, 1864. Waukoute band.— Warren in Minn.
Hist. Coll., v, 156, 1886. Weakaote.— Long, Exped.
St Peter's R., 380, 1824.
Kheyataotonwe (* village back from the
river*). A Mdewakanton Sioux band
formerly occupying the country near Har-
riet and Calhoun lakes, Minn., driven,
according to Neill (Hist. Minn., 590,
1858), from L. Calhoun by the Chipi>ewa
and settled in 1858 near Oak Grove, Minn,
ieyate-otogwe.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. >:., 215,
1897. deyate tpnwan.- Rigg.s, letter to Dorsey.
Mar.28, 1884. Lake Calhoun band.— Parker, Minn.
Handbook, 140. 1857. Ma-rpi-wi-oa-xte. —Neill.
Hist. Minn., 144, note, 1858 (name of the chief).
deyate-oto^we. — Hakewashte quoted by Dorsey.
op. cit. Qeyate-to^wan;- Rigga quoted by Dorsey.
op.cit. Reyateotonwe.— Neill in Minn. Hist. Coll.,
1, 263, 1872 ( 'island people ' ) . Ri-ga-te-a-te-wa. —
Smithson. Misc. Coll., xiv, art. 6, 8, 1878. Sky-
Kan.— Neill, Hist. Minn.. 144, note. 1858.
Kheyatawichasha ('people back from
the river' ). The Brulo Teton Sioui^ who
formerly inhabited the sand hills and high
country on the Nebraska-Dakota border,
subsequently placed under the Rosebud
aeency, under the name Upper Bftiles.
The Indian Report for 1885 gives their
number (including the Loafer or Wag-
lughe and the Wazhazha) as 6,918.
fteyate witesa.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. H. A. £..218.
1897. Highland Brul^— Robinson, letter to Dorsey.
1879. Highland Sioangu.- Ibid. Northern Brule. —
Ind. Aflf. Rep., 178, 1875. Qeyate-witcaca.— Dorsey,
op.cit. Bieangu.— Cleveland, letter to Dorsey, 1884
(erroneously refers only to the Upper Brul6s. the
Lower Bruits being called Kutawicasa). Upper
Brules.— Ibid. Upper Platte Indians.— Ind. AtT.
Rep., 209, 1866 (includes most, probably all, the
Upper Brul^) .
Khidhenikashika {Qidti e^nikacV^a^ 'ea-
gle people'). A gens of the Quapaw. —
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 229, 1897.
Khiltat. A Tenankutchin village on
Tanana r. at the mouth of Nabesna r.,
lat. 63° 4(K, Alaska.
Xhilukh. A former Yaquina village on
the N. side of Yaquina r., Oreg.
K'qil'-iiq.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 229,
1890.
Khinonascarant ('at the base of the
mountain.' — Hewitt). A*Huron village
in Ontario in 1637.— Jes. Rel. for 1637,
126, 1868.
Oinukhtnime ( ^ people among the small
undergrowth ' ). A former village of the
Mishikhwutmetunne on Coquille r. , Oreg.
K'qi-nuq' tjunnS'.— Dorsev in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 232, 1890.
Khioetoa. A former village of the Neu-
trals, apparently situated a short distance
E. of the present Sandwich, Ontario, Can-
ada, (j. N. B. H.)
Khioetoa.— Jes. Rel. for 1641, 80, 1858. Kioetoa.—
Jes. Rel., in, index. 1858. St. Michel.— Jes. Rel. for
1041, 80, 1858 (mission name).
Khitalaitthe. A former Yaquina village
on the s. side of Yaquina r., Oreg.
Kqi'-vi-lai'-t'98.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 229, 1890.
Khitanumanke ( ' eagle ' ) . Mentioned as
a Mandan gens, but evidently only a band.
Ki-ta'-ne-make.— Morgan, Anc. Soc, 158j 1877.
Qi-ta' nu-man'-ke.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
241, 1897 (given with a query).
Khlimkwaisli ( ' man goes along with the
current' ). A former Alsea \'illage on the
s. side of Alsea r., Oreg.
Kqlim-kwaio'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ill,
2:^0. 1890.
Khlokhwaiyutslu ('deep lake'). A
former Alsea village on the n. side of
Alsea r., Oreg.
Kqlo'-qwai yu-tslu. — Dorsoy in Joiir. Am. Folk-
lore, 111, 230, 1890.
Khloshlekhwaclie. A former village of
the Chastacosta on Rogue r., Oreg.
Kqloc'-le-qwiit'-tcS.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, 111, 234, 1890.
Khoalek. A Ponio village on upper
Clear lake, ('al. — Kroeber, MS., Tniv.
Cal., 1908.
Khoghanhlani ('many huts'). A Nav-
aho clan.
i/or/an/ani. — Matthews, Navaho Legends, 31, 1897.
Qo-'ganlani.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ill,
104, 1890.
Khogoltlinde. A Kaiyuhkhotana vil-
lage on Yukon r., Alaska; pop. 60 in
1844.
Khogoltlinde.— Zagosk in quoted bv Petroff in 10th
Census, Alaska, 37, 1844. Khogotlinde.— Zagoskin,
Desc. Ru.ss. Poss. Am., map. 1844.
Kholkh. A former Yaquina village on
the s. sider)f Yaquina r., Oreg.
K* qolq.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 229.
1H90.
Khomtinin ('southerners'). A generic
term applied by all Yokuts tribes to those
s. of them, especially if of their own
linguistic family. Cf. Khosminin.
Khonagani ('place of walking'). A
Navaho clan.
//bnaga'ni.— Matthews Navaho legends, 30. 1897.
Qonaga'ni.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
104. 1890.
Khoonkliwuttanne. A former village of
the Tolowa at the mouth of Smith r.,
Cal.; incorrectly given by Dorsey as a
Khaamotene village.
Qe-on'-qwAt-^un'n«.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, III, 236, 1890 (Tututni name). Qil-wun'-
kqwiit.— Ibid. (Naltunne name).
Khosatanne. A former village of the
Tolowa on the forks of Smith r., Cal., '
near the Oregon line.
Q'o'-aa ^fln'n«.-3)orsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii,
236, 1890 ( Tututni name). aw«p'-««a-a'-tan.— Ibid.
(Naltunne name).
Khosminin ( * northerners ' ) . A generic
term applied bvall Yokuts tribes to those
N. of them, wnether of their own or of
alien stock. Cf. Khomtinin,
680
KHOTACHI KHWAKHAMAIU
[b. a. e.
Josinmin. — Arroyo de la Cuestajidiomas Califor-
nias, 1821, MS. trans., B. A. £. Khosminin.— A. L.
Kroeber, inf n, 1905.
Khotachi (*elk'). An extinct Iowa
gens, coordinate with the Hotachi gens of
the Missouri. Its subgentes were Unpe-
ghakhanye, Unpeghayine, Unpeghathre-
cheyine, and Homayine.
Ho'-da«h.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. Ho'-
tatci.— Dorsey, Tciwere MS. vocab., B. A. E.,1879.
Qo'-ta-tci.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,238, 1897.
Khotana. A name applied to several
Athapascan tribes of lower Yukon r.,
Cook's inlet, and Koyukuk r., Alaska, as
the Kaiyuhkhotana, Knaiakhotana, Una-
khotana, andKoyukukhotana; and some-
times to these tribes collectively. The
name contains the term for 'people' in
their dialects. ( j. r. s. )
Khotltacheche. A former village of the
Chastacosta on Rogue r., Oreg.
<l6tl'-ta-tce'-tc8.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
111,234,1890.
Khoaghitcliate. A village, probably of
an Athapascan tribe, above the n. mouth
of Innoko r., w. Alaska. — Zagoskin in
Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 1850.
Khra ('eagle'). A subgens of the
Cheghita gens of the Missouri.
Kha'-i.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877 (Eagle).
Khu-a nika-shing-ea.— Stubbs, Kaw MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 25. 187/. Ora.— Dorsey in 15th Rep.
B. A. E., 246, 1897.
Khrahune {Qra^ hUfl'-e, 'ancestral or
gray eagle'). A subgens of the Che-
ghita. gens of the Iowa. — Dorsev in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 238, 1897.
Khrakreye ( Qra^.)re^-ye, 'spotted eagle ' ) .
A subgens of the Cheghita gens of the
Iowa.— Dorsev in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 238,
1897.
Khrapathan ( Qra^ pa (;a"j ' bald eagle ' ).
A subgens of the Cheghita gens of the
Iowa.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 238,
1897.
Khtalutlitunne. A former village of the
Chastacosta on Rogue r., Oreg.
dta'-lilt-li' ^iinng.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
ni, 234, 1890.
Khnbe ( Qube, * mysterious ' ) . A subgens
of the Mandhinkagaghe gens of the
Omaha. — Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. P].,
228, 1897.
Khndhapasan ('bald eagle'). A sub-
gens of the Tsishuwashtake gens of the
Osage.
f)a»»a»Viuqk*iciii'a.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
&4, 1897 (Sycamore people). Qn^' pa »«»'.— Ibid.
Khalhanshtank. A former Yaquina vil-
lage on Yaquina r., at the site of Elk City,
Benton co., Oreg.
KqiU-hano't-auk.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
in, 229, 1890.
Khaligichakat. A Jugelnute village on
Shazeluk r., Alaska.
Khuligiohagat.— Zagoskin, Descr. Russ. Poss. Am.,
map, 1844. Khuligiohakat.— Zagoskin quoted by
Petroffin, 10th Census, Alaska, 37, 1884.
Khnlikakat. A Kaiyuhkhotana village
on Yukon r., Alaska; pop. 11 in 1844. —
Zagoskin quoted by Petron in 10th Census,
Alaska, 37, 1884.
Khulpuni. A former Cholovone village
on lower San Joaquin r., Cal.
Chulpun. — Chamisso in Kotzebue, Voy., in, 51,
1821. Guylponei.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18,
1861. Holvunet.— Kotzebue, New Voy., 14S, 1830.
Khoulpouni.— Choris, Voy. Pitt., 5, 1822.
Khunanilinde. A Kaiyuhkhotana vil-
lage near the headwaters of Kuskokwim
r., w. Alaska; pop. 9 in 1880.
Khounanilinde.— Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5*
H., XXI, map, 1850. Khunanilinde.— Zagoskin as
quoted by Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 37, 1884.
Khundjalan (Qfmdj-alaf\ *wear red ce-
dar on their heads ' ) . A subgens of the
Ponkagens of the Kansa. — Dorsey in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 231, 1897.
Khundtse {Qtimse\ 'red cedar'). A
subgens of the Panhka wash take gens of
the Osage.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
234, 1897.
Khnnechata. A former Tututni village
on the N. side of Rogue r., Oreg.
Qfln-e'-tcu-^a'.— Dorsey m Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 233, 1890.
Khuniliikhwut. A former Chetco vil-
lage on the s. side of Chetco cr., Oreg.
Q'u'-ni-li-i'-kqwfit.— Dorsey in .lour. Am. Folk-
lore, III, 236, 1890.
Khawaihus. A former Kuitsh village on
lower Umpqua r., Oreg.
mti'-ai-am'-U^kqu-wai'-hu.— Dorsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, in, 231, 1890. Kqu-wai^-hus.— Ibid.
Khuya ( * white eagle ' ) . The 10th Kansa
gens. Its subgentes are Husada and
Wabinizhupye.
Eagle.— Dorsey in Am. Nat., 671, 1885. Hu-e'-yft.—
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. (liiya.— Dorsey, op.
cit. White Eagle.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
231, 1897.
Khuyei^azhixiga ( 'hawk that has a tail
like a king eagle ). A subgens of the
Ibache gens of the Kansa.
Chicken-hawk.— Dorsey in Am. Nat., 674, July 1885.
Qiiyegu jinga.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. £., 231,
1897.
KlM^aishtaxmetnone ('people of the
gravel*). A former Tututni village near
the mouth of a small stream locally
called Wishtenatin, after the name of the
settlement, that enters the Pacific in s. w.
Oregon about 10 m. s. of Pistol r., at a
place later known as Hustenate, also from
the aboriginal village name. The inhab-
itants, who numbered 66 in 1854, claimed
the country as far as a small trading post
known as the Whale's Head, about 27
rn. s. of the mouth of Rogue r. If there
are any survivors they reside on Siletz
res., Oreg.
Khtt»t-e-net.— Schumacher in Bull. 6. and G. Surv.,
Ill, 31, 1877. Khu»t-e-nete.— Ibid., 33. Qwai'-
otdn-ne' ^unnS'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 236, 1890 ('people among the gravel': own
name) . Qwin'-ctun-ne'-tun.— Ibid. (Naltunne
name.) Whash-to-na-ton.— Abbott, Ms. OoqulUe
census, B. A. E., 1858. Whieh-ten-eh-ten.— Gibbs,
MS. on coast tribes, B. A . E. Whistanatin.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 702, 1857. WiiUi-to-nah-tin.—
Kautz, MS. Toutouten census, B. A. E., 1855.
Withtanatan.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 18,
1860. Wish-te-na-tin.— Parrish in Ind. Aflf. Rep.,
495, 1854. Wia'-tfim-a-ti' t«ne'.— E verette, Tututfine
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (trans: 'people by the
springs').
Khwakhamaia. The Pomo who lived
about Ft Ross, the early Russian settle-
BULL. 30]
KHWE8HTUKNE KIASKU8IS
681
ment on the coast in Sonoma cc, Cal.
The origin of the name is not known.
(S. A. B.)
OkwMhamigtt.— Wraneell, EthnoI.Nach., 80, 1839.
OhwMhmi^a. — Ludewig, Aborie. Laiif?., 170, 1858.
Khwakhamaitt.— S. A. Barrett, inf n, 1905. Korth-
emen.— Ibid. Sevemovskia.— Ibid. Bevemovze.—
Ibid. Bevemovzcr.— Ibid. Severnovzi.— Ibid.
Khweshtmine. A former Mishikhwut-
metunne village on Coquille r., Oreg., next
above Coquille city.
Qweo' ^finnS.— Dorsev in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii,
232, 1890.
Khwunrghnnme. Seemingly the Tolowa
name of a Yurok village on the coast of
California, jupt s. of the month of Kla-
math r.
Kal'-i-qQ-ni-me'-ne tibi'-n^. — Doreey, Chetco MS.
vocab.. lb. A. E.. 183, 1884 (Chett'o name). Kal-
hw^'-tln-me'-JS-m te'-ne.— Dorsey , Smith River MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1884. QwiUi-rxun'-me.— Dorsey in
Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 237, 1890 (Naltunne
name).
Kiabaha. A village or tribe, now ex-
tinct, said to have existed between Mata-
gorda bav and Maligne [Colorado] r.,
Tex. The name seems to have l)een
fiven to Joutel in 1687 by the Ebaliamo
ndians, probably closely affiliated to the
Karankawa, whose domain was in this
region. A rancheria called Cabras (ap-
parently the same name as Kiabaha),
with 26 inhabitants, was mentioned in
1785 as beinjj near the presidio of Bahia
and the mission of Espfritu Santo de Zii-
fiiga (q. v. ) on the lower Rio San Antonio
(Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 659, 1886).
See Gatschet, Karankawa Ind., 2.S, 35,
1891. Ci. Kahaye. (a. c. f.)
Cabrat. — Bancroft, op. cit. Kiabaha.— Joutel
(1687) in Margry, D6c.. ni, 288, 1878. Kiaboha.—
Shea, note in Charlevoix, New France, iv, 78. 1870.
Kiahoba.— Joutel (1687) in French. Hist. Coll. Lft..
I, 137, 1846. Kiobobas.— Barcia, Ensayo, 271, 1723.
Kiabaha. Joutel (1687) in French, op. cit., 152.
Kiaken {K'ldke^n, 'palisade' or 'fenced
village*). Two Squawmish village com-
munities in British Columbia; one on the
left bank of Squawmisht r., the other on
Burrard inlet— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit.
A. A. S., 474, 475, 1900.
Kiakima (K^ylVhima, 'home of the
eagles*). A former Zufii pueblo at the
8. w. base of Thunder mtn., 4 m. s. e. of
Zufii pueblo, w. N. Mex. It was occu-
pied in the 16th and 17th centuries as
one of the "Seven Cities of Cibola," and,
according to Zufii tradition, was the scene
of the death of the negro Estevanico, who
had been a companion of Cabeza de Vaca,
and had accompanied Fray Marcos de Niza
on his journey from Mexico in 1539; but
historical evidence places that event at Ha-
wikuh. It was a visita of the mission of
Halona, probably from 1629,and contained
about 8(X) inhabitants, but on the in-
surrection of the Pueblos against Spanish
authority in 1680, Kiakima was perma-
nently abandoned, the inhabitants fleeing
to Thunder mtn. for safety. See Bande-
lier, cited below; Mindeleff in 8th Rep.
B. A. E., 85, 1891; Lowery, Span. Settle-
ments in U. S., 1901. (F. w. H.)
Caquima.— Vetancurt (1693) in Teatro Mex., in,
320, 1871 . Caquimay.— Doc. of 1635 quoted by Ban-
delier in Arch. Inst. I^apers, v, 165, 1890. Caqui-
neco.— Ladd, Story of N. Mex., 34, 1891. Ooaque-
ria.— Oriate (1598) in Doc. Int'd., xvi, 133, 1871.
Coquimaa.— Pike, Exped., 3d map, 1810. Coquimo.—
Bandelier quoted in The Millstone, ix, 55, Apr.
1884. HeshotaO'aquima.— Bandelier, Gilded Man,
159.1893 (misprint ). Ke'ia-H-we.— Powell, 2d liep.
B. A. E., XXVI, 1883. K'ia-ki-ma.— Gushing in The
Millstone, ix, 65, Apr. 1884. K'ia' ki me.— Ibid.,
225, Dec. 1884. K'iakime.— Cushinsr, ZuiSi Folk
Tales. 66, 1901. Kyakima.— Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, iii. 133, 1890. K'ya'-ki-me.— Gushing
in Gompte-rendu Internat. Cong. Am., vii, 156,
1890. O'aquima.— Bandelier, Gilded Man, 158,
1893 (misprint), fta-quima.— Bandelier in Revue
d'Ethnog., 201, 1886. Quaguina.—Senex, map, 1710.
Quaquima.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 41,
1884. auaquina.— De I'Isle, Garte Mex. et Flo-
ride, 1703. Quiaquima.— Bandelier in Jour. Am.
Ethnol. and ArchseoL.Tii, 16, 1892. Qiiia-Quima.—
Ibid., 29. Quiquimo.— Gvissefeld, Charte Nord Am.,
1797.
Kialdagwnns (KHa^ldagvAHH, 'Sand-
pipers'). A subdivision of the Sajjui-
gitunai, a family belonging to the P'^agle
clan of the Haida.
Klia'ldagwAns.— Swanton, Gont. Haida, 274, 190.5.
Kyia'ltkoangaa.— Boas, 12th liep. N. W. Tribes of
Ganada, 23. 1898.
Kialegak. A Yuit Eskimo village near
Southeast cape, St Lawrence id., Bering
sea.
Kahgallegak.— Elliott. Our Arct. Prov., man, 1886.
Kgallegak.— Tebenkof (1849) quoted bv Baker,
Geog.Dict. Alaska. 1902. Kialegak.— Russ. chart,
quoted bv Baker, ibid. Kiallegak.— Nelson in
18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899.
Kialinek. A former village of the Ang-
magsalingmiut on the e. coast of (Green-
land, lat. 66° 50^ where they hunted the
narwhal and the bear throughout the
vear. Some of its people are said to
have emigrated northward. — Meddelelser
om Gronland, ix, 382, 1889.
Kiamisha. A former Caddo village at
the junction of Kiamichi and Red rs.,
in the present Choctaw nation, Okla. It
contained 20 families in 1818.
Cayameeohee.— Bell in Morse, Ren. to Sec. War,
25.5, 1822 (the river). Kamiaai—Thevenot quoted
by Shea, Discov., 268. ia52 (identical?). Kiam-
iaha.— Trimble (1818) in Morse, op. cit.. 259 (the
river) . Kio Michie.— Rublo ( 1840) m H. R. Doc. 25.
27th Cong., 2d sess..l4,1841.
Kianusili {KHynustn, *cod people')-
A familv belonging to the Raven clan of
the Haida. Kiihi is the name for the
common cod. This family group formerly
lived on the w. coast of Queen Charlotte
ids. , near H ippa id ., Brit. Col . ( j. r. s. )
Kianosili.— Harrison in Proc. and Trans. Roy. Soc.
Canada, n, 123, 1895. Kia'nu«ili.—S wanton, Cont.
Haida, 271, 1905. Kya'nuala.— Boas, 12th Rep.
N. W. Tribes Ganada, 22, 1898.
Kiashita. A former pueblo of the Jemez
in Guadalupe canyon, n. of Jemez pueblo,
N. Mex.
Kiashite.— Hodge, field notes. B. A. E., 1895.
Quia-shi-dshi.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv,
207, 1892.
Kiaskusis ( * small gulls ' ) . A small Cr 3e
band residing in 1856 around the fourth
lake from Lac Qu'Apelle, N. W. Ter.,
682
KIASUTHA KIOHAI
[B. A. E.
Canada. They were formerly nameroue,
but had become reduced to 30 or 40 fam-
ilies owingto persistent Blackfeet raids. —
flayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.,
2.37, 1862.
Kiasutha (alias Guyasuta, ' it sets up a
cross. * — Hewitt ) . A chief of some promi-
nence as an orator in the Ohio region
about 1760-1790. Although called a Sen-
eca, he probably belonged to the mixed
band of detached Iroquois in Ohio com-
monly known as Mingo, who sided with
the French while their kinsmen of the
New York confederacy acted as allies of
the English. As a young warrior he ac-
• companied Washington and Gist on their
visit to the French forts on the Allegheny
in 1 753. A f ter Braddock' s defeat in 1 755
he visited Montreal in company with a
French interpreter and in 1759 was pres-
ent at Croghan's conference with the In-
dians at Ft Pitt (now Pittsburg). He is
mentioned also at the Lancaster confer-
ence in 1762, and in 1768 was a leading
advocate of peace with the English both
at the treaty of Ft Pitt in May and at
Bouquet's conference tliere six months
later. Washington visited him while on
a hunting tour in Ohio in 1770. He is
noted as at other conferences up to the
time of the Revolution, and in 1782 is
mentioned as leading an Indian raid on
one of the frontier settlements. His name
occurs last in 1790, when he sent a written
message to some friends in Philadelphia.
See Darlington, Christopher Gist's Jour-
nal, 1893.
Kiatagmiut. A di vision of the Aglemiut
Eskimo of Alaska, inhabiting the banks
of Kvichivak r. and Iliamna lake. They
numbered 21 4 in 1 890. Their villages are
Chikak, Kakonak, Kaskanak, Kichik,
Kogiung, Kvichak, and Nogeling.
Kiatacmiut. — Schaiiz in 11th Census, Alaska, 95,
1893. KUtaarmute.— PetrofT in 10th Census, Alaska,
135. 1884. Kiatenes.— Lutke, Voyage, I, 181, 1835.
Kijata^mjuten.— Holmberg, Ethnug. Skizz., 5,
1S55. Kgataigmiiten.— Wrangell, Ethnog. Nachr.,
121,1839. Kijaten.— Ibid. Kijrataigmeuten.— Rich-
ardson, Arct. Exped., i, 370, 1861. Kiyaten.— Ibid.
Kwioh«gmut.~DalI in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 19,
1877.
Kiatan|^ ( * shoulder * ) . A village of the
Ita Eskimo on Northumberland id.,
Whale sd., n. Greenland.
Keate. -Peary, Northward, 113, 1898. Keati.— Mrs
Peary, My Arct. Jour., 84, 1893. Kie'teng.— Stein in
Petermanns Mitt., 198, 1902. Kigate.— Ibid.
Kiatate. A group of ruins in the Sierra
de los Huicholes, about 10 m. n. w. of
San Andres Coamiata, in the territory of
the Huichol, Jalisco, Mexico. — Lumholtz,
Unknown Mex., ii, 16, map, 1902.
Kiatsukwa. A former pueblo of the
Jemez in New Mexico, the exact site of
the ruins of which is not known.
Kiatiukwa.— Hodge, field notes, B. A. £., 1895.
doia-tzo-qua. — Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv,
207,1892.
Kiawaw. A small tribe, of unknown
affinity, formerly on Kiawahid., Charles-
ton CO., S. C, but long extinct. They
were r^rded as one of the tribes of the
Cusabo group.
Cayawah.— Moll, map, 1715. Cayawaah.— Moll, map
in Humphrey, Aect. , 1730. Xeawaw.— Mills. Stat.
S. C, 459, 1826. KUwaw.— Rivers, Hist. S. C. 88.
1856. Kyewaw.— Deed of 1675 quoted by Mills, op.
cit., app., 1, 1826.
Kiawetnau. The Yokuts name of the
territory about Porterville, Cal. Given
by Powers (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 370,
1877) as the name of a tribe ( Ki-a-w6t-ni,
which lacks the locative suffix -au) .
Kichai (from KUsdshj their own name).
A Caddoan tribe whose language is more
closely allied to the Pawnee than to the
other Caddoan groups. In 1701 they
were met by the French on the upper
waters of the Red r. of Louisiana and
had spread southward to upper Trinity
r. in Texas. In 1712 a portion of them
were at war with the Hainai, who dwelt
lower down the Trinity. They M^ere
already in possession of horses, as all the
Kichai warriors were mounted. They
seem to have been allies of the northern
and western tribes of the Caddoan con-
federacy and to have intermarried with
the Kadohadacho. In 1719 La Harpe
met some of the Kichai on Canadian r.,
in company with other Caddoan tribes,
on their way toward New Mexico to wage
war against the Apache. At that time
they pledged friendship to the French,
to whom they seem to have remained
faithful. In common with all the other
tribes they suffered from the introduction
of new diseases and from the conflicts in-
cident to the contention of the Spania^rds,
French, and English for control of the
KICHAM KICHYE
683
country, and became greatly reduced in
numbers. In 1772 the main Kichai vil-
lage was E. of Trinity r., not far from Pal-
estine, perhaps a little n. e. At that time
it was composed of 30 houses, occupied by
80 warriors, **for the most part young."
In 1778 there was another village, "sepa-
rated from the main body of the tribe,"
farther s. and in nearly a direct line
from San Pedro to the Tawakoni villages,
probably on the site of the present Salt
City. I'he junta de guerra held in the
same year estimated the strength of the
Kichai at 100 fighting men (Bolton, inf n,
1906). With several other small Texas
tribes they were assigned by the United
States Government to a reservation on
Brazos r. in 1855, but on the dispersal of
the Indians by the Texans three years
later they fledV. and joined the Wichita,
with whom they have since been associ-
ated, and whom they resemble in their
agriculture, house-building, and general
customs. About 50 souls still keep the
tribal name and language.
See P^nicautin French, Hist. Coll. La.,
n. s., 73, 120, 1869; I^ Harpe in Margrv,
D^c, VI, 277-8, 1886; Kep. Com. Ind. Aff.,
1846,1849,1851,1872,1901. (a. c. f.)
Oachies.— Arbuckle in H. R. Dot*. 434. 25th CJoiig.,
2d sess. , 5, 1838. Cassia. — Joulel ( 1687 ) in Margry,
D4c., in, 409, 1878. Oits'ajl.— Dorsey, Kanaa MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (Kansa name). Guiohais.—
Tex. State Arch., 1792. Guitzeit.— Morfi, MS. His-
toria, bk. 2. cited by Bolton, infn, 1906. Hitchi.—
Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc\ Lond., IW, 1856 (mis-
print). Hitchies.— Burnet (1847) in Schoolcraft.
Ind. Tribes, i, 239. 1851. KijL— McCoy, Annual
Register, no. 4, 27, 1838. Kecchies.— Alvord in Sen.
Ex. Doc. 18, 40th Cong., 3d sess., 6, 1869. Kechies.—
Marcy , Explor. Red r. , 93, 1854. Kechis. —Latham ,
Es-says, 399, 1860. Kecchers.— Ind. Aflf. Rep., 144,
1850. Keechi.— Whiting in Rep. Sec. War, 242, 1850.
Keechies.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 894, 1846. Kcechy.— Sen.
Ex. Conf. Doc. 13, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 1, 1846.
Keetsas.— Arbuckle (1845) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 14. 32d
Cong., 2d sess., 134, 1853. Kekies.— Ind. Aff. Rep.
1871, 191, 1872. Kerchi.— Ibid., 263. 1851. Ketch-
eyes.— Edward. Hi.st. Texas. 92. 1836. Ketchies.—
BoUaert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., ii, 265, 1860.
Keyediies.— Lewis and Clark, Journal. 142, 1840.
Keyche.— Drake, Bk. Inds.,viii,l&48. Keychies.—
P^nicaut (1701) in French, Hist. Coll. La..n.s..i.
73, 1869. Keyes.— Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 70,
1806. Keyeshees.— Brackenridge, Views of La.,
87, 1816. Keys.— Lewis and Clark, Journal, 146,
1840. Kichae.— Bol. Soc. Geogr. Mex., 267, 1870.
Kichai*.— Whipple in Pac. R. R. Rep., iii. pt. 3. 76,
1856. Kiche.— Wallace (1*40) in H. R. Doc. 25, 27th
^
iiechee. -Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 36. 1850. Kietsash.—
Gatachet, Wichita MS., B. A. E. (Wichita name).
Kishais.— H. R. Rep. 299, 44th Cong., Ist sess., 1,
1876. Kitaesches. — P<5nicaut (1714) in Margrv,
D6c., V, 502, 1883. Kitaesechis.— P6nicaut ( 1714 ) in
French, Hist. Coll. La.,n. 8., 1, 120, 1869. Ki'tchas.—
Gatschet, Tonkawa MS., B. A. E. (Tonkawa
name). Ki'-tphesh.— Gatschet, Caddo and Ya-
tassi MS., 65, B. A. E. (Caddo name). Kitchies.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 237. 1861. Kitsaoi.—
Dorsey, Osage MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (Osage
name). Kitsaiohes.— Bruy^re (1742) in Margry,
D6c., VI, 492, 1886. Ki't sash. —Mooney in 14th Rep.
B. A. E., 1096, 1896 (own name). Kitsasi.— Grayson.
Creek MS. vocab.,B.A.E.,1886(Creek name). Kite
de Singes.— Robin, Voyages, in, 5, 1807. Kitsoss.—
Arbuckle in H. R. Doc. 434, 25th Cong., 2d sess.,
5,1838. Ki'teu.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Pawnee
and Wichita name) . Koeohiet. ^Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, i, 518,18.51. Kyis.— Brackenridge, Viewsof
La.. 81, 1815. Queyches.— Jefferys,Am.Atlas,map5,
1776. Quichaais.— Censusofl790inTex.StuteArch.
duichais.— Ybarbo (1778), letter cited by Bolton,
infn, 1906. auicheigno.— RipperdA (1774), ibid,
duiches.— Anvillo, Carte des Isles de rAm(^rique,
1731. auidaho.— La Harpe (1719) in French. Hist.
Coll. La., III. 72. 18.51. ftuidehaio.— Ibid. Quide-
hais.— La Harpe (1719) in Margry, D<}c., vi. 277,
1886 (probably identical). Quitoeis.— Mezi^res
(1778) auoted by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i. 661,
1886. ftuitres.— Mezi^res (1779), letter cited by
Bolton, infn. 1906. Quitrcys.— Ibid. Quiteeigus.—
RipperdA (1776), letter, ibid. Quiteeings.— Rip-
perdd ( 1777). letter, ibid. Quiteeis.- Doc. of 1771-2
quoted by B<)lU)n in Tex. Hist. Quar., ix, 91, 1906.
ftuituchiis.— Villa-Sefior,TheatroAm.. li, 413, 1748.
ftuitxix.— Fran, 'de Jesus Maria (1691), Relacion
cited by Bolton, infn. 1906. Quiteaene.— Pimentel,
Cuadro Descr.. ii, 347, 1865 (given as a Comanche
divisio!!). Quizi.— Fran, de Jesus Maria (1691)
cited by Bolton, infn, 1906.
Kicham {K'UaVm). A Squawmish vil-
lage community on Burrard inlet, Brit.
Col.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S.,
475, 1900.
Kichesipirini ('men of the great river,'
from kiche 'great', sipi 'river', iriniouek
'men.' By the Huron they were called
Ehonkeronon; from the place of their
residence they were often designated Al-
gonquins of the Island, and Savages of
the Island). Once an important trihe
living on Allumette id., in Ottawa r., Que-
hec province. They were considered as
the typical Algonkin, and in order to
distinguish them from the other tribes
included under the term in this restricted
sense were called "Algon(iuins of the Is-
land," a name first appHed by Chami)lain
( see A Igonkin ) . As Ottawa r. was the li ue
of travel between the upper-lake coun-
try and the French settlement**, the posi-
tion of the tribe made it at times trouble-
some to traders and voyageurs, although
as a rule they appear to have Ix'en peace-
able. In 1645 they, together with the
Hurons, made a treaty of peace with the
Iroquois; but it was of short duration,
for 5 years later both the Hurons and
the Kichesipirini fled for spfety to more
distant regions. What became of them
is not known. It is probable that they
were consolidated with the Ottawa or
with some other northwestern Algon-
2uian tribe. (.i. m. j. n. b. h. )
Igomxnequin dcrislc— Champlain (1632).CEu vres,
V, pt. 2. 193, 1870 (see Algonkin for various forms
of the word). Ehonkeronon*. —Jes. Rel. 1639, 88,
1858. Hehonqueronon.— Sagard (1632), Hist. Can.,
IV, cap. * Nations,' 1866. Honqueronons.— Sagard
(1636), ibid., in, 620. Honquerons.— Ibid., I, 247.
Kicheupiiriniouek.— Jes. Rel. 1658, 22. 1858. Ki-
chesipirini.—Ibid., 1640, 34, 1858. Kiohesipirini-
wek.— Ibid., 1646. 34, 1858. Nation de I' I«le.—
Ibid., 1633. »4, 1858. Bauvages de 1' Isle.- Ibid.,
1646, 34, 1858.
Kichik. A Kiatagmiut village on a lake
of the same name e. of Iliamna lake,
Alaska; pop. 91 in 1880.— Tenth Census,
Alaska, map, 1884.
Kichye ( * where there is much ki-ke, *
a lily root used for glue). A small ran-
cheria of the Tarahumare in the Sierra
Madre, w. Chihuahua, Mexico. — Lum-
holtz, infn, 1894.
684
KICKAPOO
[B. A.B.
Kickapoo (from Kiwigapaw^^ * he stands
about,' or * he moves about, standing now
here, now there ' ) . A tribe of the central
Algonquian group, forming a division
with the Sauk and Foxes, with whom
they have close ethnic and linguistic con-
nection. The relation of this division is
rather with the Miami, Shawnee, Menom-
inee, and Peoria than with the Chippewa,
Potawatomi, and Ottawa.
History. — The people of this tribe, un-
less they are hidden under a name not
yet known to be synonynious, first ap-
pear in history about 1667-70. At this
KICKAPOO MAN
time they were found by Allouez near the
portage between Fox and Wisconsin rs.
Verwyst (Missionar}r Labors, 1886) sug-
gests Alloa, Columbia co.. Wis., as the
probable locality, about 12 m. s. of the
mixed village of the Mascouten, Miami,
and Wea. No tradition of their former
home or previous wanderings has been
recorded; but if the name Outitchakouk
mentioned by Druillettes ( Jes. Rel. 1658,
21, 1858) refers to the Kickapoo, which
seems probable, the first mention of them
is earned back a few years, but they were
then in the same locality. Le Sueur
(1699) mentions, in his voyage up the
Mississippi, the river of the Quincapous
(Kickapoo), above the mouth of the Wis-
consin, which he says was **so called from
the name of a nation which formerly
dwelt on its banks.'* This probably re-
fers to Kickapoo r., Crawford co., Wis.,
though it empties into the Wisconsin,
and not into the Mississippi. Rock r.,
111., was for a time denominated the
"River of the Kickapoos," but this is
much too far s. to agree with the stream
mentioned by Le Sueur. A few years
later a part at least of the tribe appears
to have moved s. and settled somewhere
about Milwaukee r. They entered into
the plot of the Foxes in 1712 to burn the
fort at Detroit. On the destruction of
the Illinois confederacy, about 1765, by
the combined forces of the tribes n. of
them, the conquered country was parti-
tioned among the victors, the Sauk and
Foxes moving down to the Rock r. coun-
try, while the Kickapoo went farther s.,
fixing their headquarters for a time at
Peoria. They appear to have gradually
extended their range, a portion centering
about Sangamon r., while another part
pressed toward the e., establishing them-
selves on the waters of the Wabash, de-
spite the opposition of the Miami and
Piankashaw. The western band became
known as the Prairie band, while the
others were denominated the Vermilion
band, from their residence on Vermilion
r. , a branch of the Wabash. They played
a prominent part in the history of this
region up to the close of the War of 1812,
aiding Tecumseh in his efforts against the
United States, while many Kickapoo
fought with Black Hawk m 1832. In
18.S7 Kickapoo warriors to the number
of 100 were engaged by the United States
to go, in connection with other western
Indians, to fight the Seminole of Florida.
In 1809 they ceded to the United States
their lands on Wabash and Vermilion
r.s., and in 1819 all their claims to the
central portion of Illinois. Of this land,
as stated in the treaty, they ** claim a
large portion by descent from their an-
cestors, and the balance by conquest from
the Illinois nation, and uninterrupted
possession for more than half a century.*'
They afterward removed to Missouri and
thence to Kansas. About the year 1852 a
large party left the main body, together
with some Potawatomi, and went to Texas
and thence to Mexico, where they became
known as "Mexican Kickapoo." In
1863 they were joined by another dissat-
isfied party from the tribe. The Mexican
band proved a constant source of annoy-
ance to the border settlements, and efforts
were made to induce them to return,
which were so far successful that in 1873
a number were brought back and settled
BULL. 30]
KICKAPOO
685
in Indian Ter. Others have come in
since, but the remainder, constituting at
present nearly half the tribe, are now set-
tled on a reservation, granted them by
the Mexican government, in the Santa
Rosa mts. of e. Chihuahua.
Customs and Beliefs. — The Kickapoo
lived in fixed villages, occupying bark
houses in the summer and flag-reed
oval lodges during the winter. They
raised corn, beans, and squashes, anci
while dwelling on the e. side of the Mis-
sissippi they often wandered out on the
plains to hunt buffalo. On these hunt-
mg trips they came to know the horse,
and previous to the Civil war they had
gone as far as Texas for the sole purpose
of stealing horses and mules from the
Comanche. No other Alg. nquians of
the central ^roup were more familiar
with the Indians of the plains than the
Kickapoo; and yet, with all this contact,
their culture has remained essentially the
same as that of the Sauk and the Foxes.
Like the Sauk and Foxes they believe
in a cosmic substance prevailing through-
out all nature, and the objects endowed
with the mystic property are given special
reverence. Far in the past they claim to
have practised the Midewitvin; but to-day
their most sacred ceremony is the Kigd-
nowin^f the feast dance of tiie clans. The
dog is held in special veneration and is
made an object of sacrifice and offering
to the manitos. The mythology is rich,
and is characterized by a mass of beast
fable. The great cosmic myth centers
about the death of the younger brother
of the culture-hero, whose name is
Wisa ka*. To him they attribute all the
good things of this world and the hope
of life in tne spirit world, over which the
younger brother presides. The brothers
are idealized as youths.
The gentile system prevailed, and mar-
riage was outside of the gens. The name
had an intimate connection with the
gens, and children followed the gens of
the father. Thegentes to-day are Water,
Tree, Berry, Thunder, Man, Bear, Elk,
Turkey, Bald-eagle, Wolf, and Fox.
Population. — In 1759 the population of
the Kickapoo was estimated at about
3,000; in 1817 at 2,000, and in 1825 at
2,200. Since the last-mentioned date they
have great Iv decreased. In 1875 those in
Kansas and Indian Ter. together, in-
cluding all of those recently brought from
Mexico, were officially reported to num-
ber 706, while 100 more were supposed
to be in Mexico, making a total tor the
tribe of about 800. In 1885 those in
the United States numbered about 500,
of whom 235 were in Kansas, while the
Mexican band in Indian Ter. (including
some Potaw^atomi ) numbered about 325.
It is supposed that there were at the same
time about 200 living in Mexico. Those
in the United States in 1905 were offi-
cially reported at 432, of whom 247 were
in Oklahoma and 185 in Kansas. There
are supposed to be about 400 or more in
Mexico. Within the last two years there
has been considerable effort by private
parties to procure the removal of the
Oklahoma band also to Mexico.
The following are known as Kickai)oo
villages : P^tnataek ( with Sauk and Foxes ) ,
Kickapougowi, and Neconga.
(j. M. w. J. )
A'-uyax-— Ciatschet, Tonkavve MS.. B.A.E., 1884
('deer eaters,' from a'-u deer, ya'xa * to eat':
Toiikawa name). Gigabu.— Gatschet, Fox, MS.,
B.A. E., 1882 (Fox name; plural GIgabuhak).
Oikapu.— Gatschet, Ibid. (Fox name). Ookapa-
tagans.— Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist, de
r Am«:»r, IV, 224. 1753(perhap8 Identical). H%abu.—
Dorsey. (pegiha MS. vocab.,B. A. E., 1878 (Omaha
and Ponca name). Hiifa'pu. — Dorsey, Tciwere
MS. vocab., B.A.E., 1879 (Iowa, Oto, and
Missouri name). T-ka-du'.— Dorsey. MS. Osage
vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (Osage name). Kaokapoes.—
Dalton (1783} in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., X,
1'23, 1809. Kecapos.— Croghan (1759) in Rupp,
West. Pa., upp.. 132. 184(>. Kecopes. — f'roghaii,
(1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.. 4th s.. ix, 250, 1871.
Ke-ga-bo«e.— Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 288,
1871. KehabouB.— McKenney and Hall, Ind.
Tribes, iii. 79, 1854 (misprint). Kekapos.— Crog-
han (1759) in Rupp. West. Pa., app., 134, 1846.
Kekapou.— Doc. of 1695 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hi.st.,
IX, 619, 1855. Kekaupoag.— Tanner. Narrative. 315,
1830 (Ottawa name). Kioapoos. — Croghan (1765)
in Craig. Olden Time. 409, 1846. Kicapous.— John-
s(m (1772) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., viii, 292, 1857.
Kicapoux.— Doc. of 1748, ibid., x, 150, 1858.
Kicapus.— Katinesque, introd. Marshall, Ky., i.
38, 1824. KiocapooB.— Croghan (1765) in Monthlv
Am. J(mr.Geol., 263, 1831. Kichapacs.— Writer of
1786 in Ma.ss. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s.. iii. 26, 1794.
KickapooB.— Croghan (1765) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., VII, 780, 1856. Kickapos.— (ierman Flatsconf.
(1770), ibid., viii. 244, 18,57. Kickapous.— Chau-
vignerie (1736). ibid., ix. 1055, 1855. Kickipoo.—
Gale, Upper Miss., map, 1867. Kicoagoves.—
Barcia, Ensayo, 238, 17'23 (mentioned with Miami
and Mascoutin). Kiooapous.— Tonti, Rel. de la
Louisiane, 82, 1720. Kicqpoux.— Chauvignerie
(1736) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 5r>4, 1853.
Kikab«uz.~Marquette, Discov., 3'22, 1698. Kika-
bons.— Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist, de
I'Am^r.. II, 49, 1753. Kikabou.— Jes. Rel. 1670, 100,
1858 KiKaboua.— Jes. Rel. 1672, LViii, 40, 1899.
Kikabu.— Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E.,1882
(Kansa name). Kikapaua.— Hennepin, (^ont. of
New Discov., map, 1698. Kikapoes. — Vincennes
treaty i 1803) in V. S. Ind. Treat., 383, 1873. Kika-
poos.— Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 351, 1816. Kika-
pous.— Hennepin. New Discov.. 132. 1698. Kika-
p8«.— Vaudreuil (1719) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix,
893, 1855. Kikapoux.— Frontenac (1682), ibid., 182.
Kik^pouz.— Coxe, Carolana, 18, 1741. Kikapu.—
Gatschet, Potawatonii MS., B. A. E., 1878 ( Potawa-
tomi name; plural Kikapug). Kikapus.— Loskiel,
Hist. Miss. United Breth., pt. 1. 2, 1794. Kik-
kapoos.— Barton, New Views, xxxiii, 1798. Kik-
poux.— Coxe, Carolana, 60, 1741. Kispapoua.—
Longueuil (1752) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 246,
1858 (misprint). Qnieapoas — Tonti. Rel. de la Lou-
Lsiane, 99, 1720 (misprint). Quicapauae.— Lattr<^,
map, 1784. Quieapona.— Esnauts and Rapilly.
map, 1777 (misprint), duioapous.— De Bourain
(1700) in Margry, IX^c, vi. 73, 1886. ftuinaquois.—
McKennev and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 80, 1854.
ftuincapoui.— Iberville (1700) in Neill. Minn., 154,
1858. Kicapous.— Con f. of 1766 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., vii. 860, 1856 (misprint). Bickapoos.— Cro-
ghan (17r>5), ibid, (mispnnt). 8hack-a-po.— H. R.
Rep. 299, 44th Cong., 1st sess.. 1. 1876 ("known
to us as Kickapoos"). 8hake-/:a/*-quah.— Marcy,
Explor. Red R., 273. 1854 (Wichita name).
Shigapo.— Gatschet, Apache MS., B. A. E., 1884 (so
686
KICK APOOS — KIK AIT
[b. a. b.
called by Apaclje and other southern tribes).
Shikapn.— Ibid. (Apache name). Sik'-a-pu.— ten
Kate, Synonymic, 10, 1884 (Comanche name).
Tekapu.— Gatschet, Wyandot MS., B. A. E., 1881
(Huron name). Yu"»tara'ye-ru'nu.— Ibid, ('tribe
living around the lakes': another Huron name).
Kickapoos. According to Norton (Polit.
Americanisms, 60, 1890), a secret Repub-
lican political organization in Oklahoma
(1888); from the name of an Algonquian
tribe. (a. f. c. )
Kickapougowi. A former Kickapoo
village on the Wabash, in Crawford co.,
111., about opposite the mouth of Tur-
man cr.
Kiok-a-poa>go-wi Town.— Hough, map in Ind.
Geol. Rep., 1883. Eikapouguoi.-Gamelin (1790)
in Am. State Papers. Ind. Aff., i, 93, 1832.
Kickenapawling. A former village of
mixed Delawares (?) and Iroquois, taking
its name from the chief; situated at the
junction of Stony cr. with Conemaugh r.»
approximately on the site of Johnstown,
Pa. It waa abandoned before 1758.
Keokkeknepolin.— Post (1758) in Rupp, West. Pa.,
app., 103, 1846. Kickenapawling.— Day. Penn.,
182,1813. Kickenapawlingt Old Town.— Day. Pa.
Hist. Coll., 182, 1843. Kickenapawlingt Village.—
Roycein 18th Rep. B. A. E., Pa. map, 1899.
Kicking Bear. A Sioux medicine-man
of Cheyenne River agency, S. Dak., who
acquired considerable notoriety as leader
of a hostile band and priest of the Ghost-
dance craze among the Sioux in 1890.
He organized and led the first dance at*
Sitting Bull's camp on Standing Rock res.,
and was prominent in the later hostilities,
for which he was afterward held for some
time as a military prisoner. See Mooney
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896.
Kicking Bird ( Ten^»-angp6te ) . A Kiowa
chief. He was the grandson of a* Crow
captive who was adopted into the tribe,
and early distinguished himself by his
mental gifts. In tribal traditions and
ceremonial rites he was a thorough adept,
and as a warrior he won a name, but
had the sagacity to see the hopelessness
of the struggle with the whites and used
all his influence to induce the tribe to
submit to inevitable conditions. He
signed the first agreement to accept a res-
ervation on Aug. 15, 1865, at Wichita, and
the treatv concluded at Medicine Lodge
on Oct. 21, 1867, definitively fixing the
Kiowa-Comanche-Apache res. in the pres-
ent Oklahoma. In the resistance to re-
moval to the reservation in 1868 and in the
subs^juent raids into Texas he took no
part. When the Federal authorities in
1873 failed to carry out their agreement
to release the Kiowa chiefs impnsoned in
Texas, he lost faith in the Government
and was tempted to join the expeditions
against the Tonkawa tribe and the white
buffalo-hunters of Texas in 1874; but when
Lone Wolf decided to join thehostileswho
were defying United States troops. Kick-
ing Bird induced two-thirds of the tribe
to return with him to the agency at Ft
Sill, and was treated thenceforth as the
head chief of the Kiowa, Lone Wolfs
offer to surrender and join the friendlies
being refused. He invited and assisted
in the establishment of the first school
among the Kiowa in 1873. At one time
when his constant advocacy of peace
brought him into disrepute and the
charges that he was a woman and a
coward caused his counsels to be treated
with contempt, he gathered a band for
a Texas rai(l and fought a detachment
of troops victoriously, regaining his old
repute for courage and success in war.
He died suddenly, by poison if the suspi-
cions of his friends were just, on May 5,
1875, and at the request of his family was
buried with Christian rites. — Mooney in
17th Rep., B. A. K, ii, 190, 216, 252, 1898.
Kick in the Belly. Mentioned by Cul-
bertson (Smithson. Rep. 1850, 144, 1861)
as a Crow band.
Kiddeknbbnt. A Makah summer village
3 m. from Neah, n. w. Wash.
Kiddekubbnt.— Swan in Smithson. Cont., xvi, 6,
1870. Tehdakomit.— Gibbs, MS. 248, B. A. E.
Kidnelik. A tribe of Central Eskimo
living on Coronation bay, Canada.
Copper Etkimo.— Schwatka in Science, 543,1884.
Kidelik.— Rink, Eskimo Tribes, 33, 1887. Kidne-
lik.—Schwatka in Science, 543, 1884. Oidneliq.—
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 470, 1888.
KientpooB. See Kintpiiash.
Kiequotank. A former village of the
Powhatan confederacy on the e. shore of
Accomac co., Va., n.' of Metomkin. It
was nearly depopulated in 1722. (j. m. )
Kiequotank.— Beverley, Virginia, 199. 1722. Kiko-
tan.— Herrman, map (1670), in Maps to Accom-
pany the Rep. of the Comrs. on the Bndry. Line
bet. Va. and Md., 1873.
Kigicapigiak ( * the great establishment/
or * great harbor'). A former Micmac
village on Cascapediac r., Bonaventure
CO., Quebec. — Vetromile, Abnakis, 59,
1866.
Kigiktagmiut ( * island people' ) . A tribe
of Eskimo inhabiting the islands of Hud-
son bav off the Labrador coast, between
lat. 56° and 61°. They wear the skins of
seals and dogs instead of reindeer skins,
use the bow and arrow and the spear in-
stead of firearms, and often suffer for want
of food.
Ki'gflctag'myut.— Turner in 11th Rep. B. A. E.,
180, 1894. Kigukhtagmyut.— Turner in Trans. Roy.
Soc. Can., 1887, sec. ii, 99.
Kiglashka (*they who tie their own').
A division of the Hunkpapa Teton Sioux.
Kiglacka.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 221, 1897.
Kiglatica.— Ibid.
Kigsitatok. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one pf the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Kihegashugah. See Mohongo.
Kik. The House clan of the Ala (Horn)
phratry of the Hopi.
Kik-wun-wii.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 401,
18W {tmiil-vni = * clan ' ) .
Kikait (Kikait). A Kwantlen village
at Brownsville, opposite New Westmin-
ster, on lower Fraser r., Brit. Col.; pop.,
BULL. 30]
KIKATSIK KILCHIK
687
together with the New Westminster vil-
lage, 65 in 1902.— Hill-Tout in Ethnol.
Surv. Can., 54, 1902.
Kikatsik (KV-kat-sik). One of the 4
divisions of the main lx)dy of Shasta, oc-
cupying Shasta valley and Klamath val-
ley from Hot Springs to Scott r., n. Cal.
They were early mentioned, under various
forms of "Autire" and "Edhowe" (from
Ahdtid^'^, the Shasta name of Shasta val-
ley), as occupying 19 to 24 villages of
about 60 inhabitants each, one of which
was apparently Wiyahawir. There are
now only a few survivors. (r. b. d. )
Atttir^.— Curtin. MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1885. jfe'd"
ohwe.— Ibid. Ho-te-day.— Steele in Ind. Aff. Rep-
1864,120,1865(firiven as their own name). Id-do-a.—
Ibid, (misapplied to the Iniwaitsu). 0-de-
eilah.— Gibbs (1851) in Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes,
III. 171, 1853. 0-de-i-Uh.— McKee (1851) in
Sen. ^x. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 221, IS.'VS.
Yeka.— Steele in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 120, 1865
(given as Moper name of Yreka = ' Shasta butte; '
properly Wall 'ka). Yrekas. — Taylor in Cal.
Fanner, June 22, 1860.
Kikoliik. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Kikertarsoak ( ^ great island ' ) . An Es-
kimo village in Greenland, about lat. 63°
30^; pop. 75 in 1829. Its harbor was
formerly used by the Dutch in trading
with the natives.
Kikkertarsoak.— (^iraah, Expi>d. E. Coast Green-
land, map, 1837.
Kikhkat. A former Ikogmiut Eskimo
village on the n. bank of Yukon r., near
Ikogmiut, Alaska. — Zagoskin in Nouv.
Ann. Voy.,5th s., xxi, map, 1850.
Kikialln. A Skagit subtribe formerly
living on the n. end of Whidbey id. and at
the mouth of Skagit r.. Wash., but now
on Swinomish res. They participated in
the treaty of Pt Elliott, Wash., Jan. 22,
1855.
Ke-ka-alns.— Fav in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 238, 18.%.
KickuaUit.— Starling, ibid., 171, 1852. Kike-
I.— Simmons, ibid., 194, 1860. KikiaUit.—
Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., 1,436,1825. Kikiallu.—
Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 180, 1878. Kik-i-
aUus.— U. 8. Ind. Treat. (1850), 378, 1873. Ki-kia-
loot.— Mallet in Ind. AfT. Rep., 198, 1877. Xikial-
tU.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 432, 1855.
Kikiktak. A Kowagmiut Eskimo sum-
mer village at the mouth of Hotham inlet,
Kotzebuesd., Alaska; pop. 200 in 1880.
Kee-kik-tag;ameats. — Hooper, Cruise of Corwin,
26, 1880. Kikikhtagyut.— Zagoskin, Descr. Rusa.
Pofls. in Am., pt. I, 74, 1847. Kikiktagamute.—
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 4, 1884. Kikiktag-
mnt— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. £., map, 1899.
Kikiktak.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kot-
sebue.— Post-route map, 1908.
Kikimi. A Pima village on the Gila
River res., s. Ariz. — Dudlev in Ind. Aff.
Rep. 1871,58,1872.
SUksadi ( * people of Klks ' ) . One of the
most important divisions of the Tlingit,
belonging to the Raven phratrv. Thev
lived principally at Sitka and AVrangell,
Alaska, but there were also some at Sanya.
Kakaatit.— Beardslee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 105. 46th
Cong., 2d sess., 31, 1880. Kiok-sa-tee.— Kane,
Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. Kik»-adi.— Krause.
Tlinkit Ind., 118, 1885. Kflu^'di.—S wanton, field
notes, B. A. E., 1904. Kyikt'ade.— Boas, 5th Rep.
N. W. Tribes Canada, 25, 1889. *
Kiktagnk. An Unaligmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on the 8. coast of Norton sd., Alaska;
pop. 20 in 1800, 23 in 1890.
Ikekik.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, mapjl62. 1893.
Ikikiktoik.— c:oast Surv. chart, 1898. Kegiokto-
wruk.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i,map,1877.
Kegictowik.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, map,
1884. Kegiktow'ruk.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
I, 17. 1877. Kegokhtowik.— Petroff in 10th Census,
Alaska, 11, 1881. Kiektaguk.— Tebenkof (1849)
quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 239, 1902.
&igh-Mioute.— Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann.Voy., 5ths.,
XXI, map, 1850. Kigikhtawik.— Petroff, Rep. on
Alaska, 54, 1881. Kigiktauik.— Nelson in 18th Rep.
B. A. E., map, 1899. Kikohtaguk.— Holmberg.
Ethnog.Skizz., map, 1855. Kikhtaghouk.— Zagos-
kin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map, 1850.
Kikhtangouk.— Ibid., 218. Kikiktowrik.— Eleventh
Census, Alaska, 165, 1893. Kikiktowruk.— Kelly,
Arct. Eskimos, 16, 1890. Eiktaguk.— Baker, Geog.
Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Kiktak (*big island'). A Kuskwog-
miut Eskimo village on an island in Kus-
kokwim r., Alaska, 25 m. above Bethel;
pop. 232 in 1880, 119 in 1890.
Kikikhtagamiut.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164*
1893. KDckhlagamute.— Ilallock in Nat. Geog-
Mag., IX, 90, 1898. Kikkhtagamute.— Petroff,
Rep. on Alaska, 53, 1880. Kiktak.— Baker, Geog.
Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Kiktheswemud. A former Delaware (?)
village near Anderson, Madison co., Ind.
Marked as Kik-the-swe-niud on Hough's
map (Ind. (ieol. Rep., 1883). Perhaps
identical with Buckstown, or with Little
Munsee Town.
Kiknikak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo
village at the mouth of Kuskokwim r.,
Alaska; pop. 9 in 1880.
Kik-khuigagamute .—Petroff in 10th Census,
Alaska, 17, 1884.
Kiknn. A former Aleut villasje on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Kikwistck. A Nakoaktok village on
Seymour inlet, Brit. Col.
Ke-quc«-ta.— Boas in Bull. Am. Geog. Soc, 226,
1887. Kikwittoq.- Ibid. Te'-kwok-«tai-e.— Daw-
son in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, sec. ii. 65.
Kll ( K/Uy ' sand-spit-point [ town] ' ) . A
small Haida town formerly on Shingle
Imy, Skidegate inlet, C^ueen Charlotte ids.,
Brit. Col. It was occupied by the Lana-
chaadus, who owned it, and the Gitingid-
jats, two family groups of very low social
rank. — Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905.
Kilatlka. A Miami division living with
the Wea, IMankashaw, and others near
Ft St Ix)uis, on the upper Illinois, in 1(>84.
Kalatekoe.— Membr6 (1682) in Marer>', D4c., Ii, 216,
1877. Kilatak*.— Bacqueville de la Potherie, ii,
261, 1753. Kilatica.— Franquelin map (1684) in
Parkman, La Salle, 1883. Kilatlka.— La Salle
(1683) in Margry, D^c, ii,320. 1877. Kolatioa.— La
Salle (1682), ibid., 201.
Kilaaatuksli. A former Yaquina village
on the s. side of Yaquina r., Oreg.
Ki-lau'-u-tukc'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
229, 1890.
Kilchik (from the native name of L.
Clark). A Knaiakhotana village on L.
Clark, Alaska; pop. 91 in 1880. It seems
to have been consolidated with Nikhkak,
9 m. below, by 1904.
688
KILHERHURSH KIMESTUNNE
[B. A. E.
Keechik.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 46, 1884.
Kichik.— Ibid., map. Kilohikh.— Eleventh Cen-
sus, Alaska, 94, 1893.
Kilherhnrsh. A Tillamook village,
named after a chief, at the entrance of
Tillamook bay, Oreg., in 1805.
Kil-har-hunt*« Town.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and
Clark, VI, 71, 1905. Kilherhunh.— Lewis and Clark,
Exped., II, 117, 1814.
Kilherner. A Tillamook village in 1 805,
named after a chief, on Tillamook bay,
Oreg., at the mouth of a creek, 2 m. from
Kilherhursh.
Kil-har-nar's town. — Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark,
VI, 71, 1905. Kilherner.— Lewis and Clark, Exped.,
II, 117, 1814.
Kiliknnom. A division of the Witii-
komnom branch of the Yuki of n. Cali-
fornia, (a. l. k.)
Kilimantayie ( from Ke-Vtv^'a-tow-tin^
'sling.' — Murdoch). A Kunmiut Eskimo,
village on the Arctic coast av. of Wain-
wright inlet, Alaska; pop. 45 in 1880.
Kelamantowruk.— U. 8. Hydrog. chart 68 quoted
by Baker. Geog. Dist. Alaska, 239, 1902. Ke-l«'v-
a-tow-tin.— Murdoch quoted by Baker, ibid. Ki-
lameta^a^-mittt.— Tikhmenlef (1861) quoted by
Baker, ibid. Kflauwitawin.— Murdoch in 9th Rep.
B. A. E., 44, 1892. Kilimantavic.— Hydrog. charts,
op. cit. Eilyamietagvik. — Zagoskin, Descr. Russ.
Poss. Am., pt. I, 74, 1847. Kolumakturook.— PetrofT
in lOthCensus, Alaska,map,1884. Kolumatourok.—
PetrofT, Rep. on Alaska, 59, 1880. Kolumaturok.—
Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899.
Kilinigmint ('people of the serrated
country* ). A subtribe of the Suhinimiut
Eskimo inhabiting the region alx>ut C.
Chidley, n. Labrador. Pop. fewer than 40.
Kilin'ig myut.— Turner in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 176,
1894.
Kilistinons of the Nipislriniens. Men-
tioned by the Jesuit Rel. of 1658 (Thwaites
ed., XLiv, 249, 1899) as one of the 4 divi-
sions of the Cree, so called because they
traded with the Nipissing. They lived
between L. Nipigon and Moose r., Can-
ada, though they were not very station-
ary. Their population at the date given
was estimated at 2,500.
Kiliuda (perhaps Aleut, from kiliak
'morning', uda 'bay'). A Kaniagmiut
Eskimo village on the e. coast of Kodiak
id., Alaska; pop. 36 in 1880, 22 in 1890.
Kiliuda.- Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kil-
iuda.—PetrolT in 10th Census, Alaska, 29, 1884.
Kiliwi. A Yuman band of a dozen
people who furnished Gabb a vocabulary
when he visited them, in Apr. 1867, near
Santo Tomas mission, 150 m. n. w. of Santa
Borja, Lower California. The vocabu-
lary is published in Zeitschr. f. Ethnolo-
gies 1877. The Kiliwi were reported as
still existing in 1906.
Killaxthokle. A Chinookan tribe or vil-
lage, apparently named after its chief, on
Shoal water bay, Wash., in 1805. Men-
tioned twice by Lewis and Clark, from
Indian information, who estimated the
population at 100 in 8 houses and at 200
in 10 houses.
Ca-la»t-ho-cle.— Grig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1805) ,
VI, 118, 1905. OaLa'qttzoqL. — Boas, inf'n, 1905.
Killaxthocle*.— Coues. Lewis and Clark Exped.,
1252, 1892. Kil-laxt-ho-kle'« T.— Orig. Jour., op.
cit. Killaythodefl.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ni,
571, 1853.
Killbnck. See Gelelemmd.
Killbnck's Town. A former Delaware
town on the e. side of Killbuck or., about
10 m. 8. of Wooster, Wayne co., Ohio;
occupied as early as 1764 by a chief named
Killbuck, from whom it received the
name. (j. m.)
Killhag. A sort of trap, defined by
Bartlett (Diet. Americanisms, 332, 1877)
as "a wooden trap used by the hunters
in Maine"; from kUhigan in the Malecite
dialect of Algonquian, signifying *trap',
from the radical kilh, *to catch or keep
caught', and the suffix radical igan^ *in-.
strument.' (a. f. c.)
Killlkinnick. See KlnnikinnicL
Killisnoo. A modem settlement of the
Hutsnuwu on Killisnoo id., near Admi-
ralty id. , Alaska. They have been drawn
there through the establishment of oil
works by the whites.
Kin&s-nn.— Krause. Tlinkit Ind., 105, 1885. Ken-
asnow. — Ibid, (quoted).
Kilpanlus. A Cowichan tribe in Cow-
itchin valley, Vancouver id., consisting
of only 4 people in 1904.
Kil.pan-hu«.— Can. Ind. Aflf. for 1883, 190. KU-
panlus.- Ibid., 1901, pt. 2, 164, 1902. Tilpa'let.—
Boas, MS., B. A. E.. 1887. Tlip-pah-li«.— Can. Ind.
Aff. for 1880. 316. TUp-pat-U«.— Ibid., 1879, 308.
Kil8-haidagai(A7^/.«t xa/-idAga-i, * penin-
sula people* ). A branch of the Kagials-
kegawai, a family group belonging to the
Raven clan of the Haida. They took
their name from a point at the outer end
of the tongue of land on which Skedans
formerly stood, and w^here were most of
their houses. — Swanton, Cont. Haida,
269, 1905.
Kilstlai-djat-takinggalung {KVltfLa-i djat
HaklVngalAfi, ' chief tainess ' children').
A suMivisicm of the Hlgahetgu-lanas, a
family of the Raven clan of the Haida. —
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 270, 1905.
Kilutsai (Gyilots'dW, 'people of the
river's arm'). A Tsimshian family and
town near Metlakahtla, on the n. w. coast
of British Columbia.
Gyilota'a'r — Boas in Zeitschr. fur Ethnol., 232, 188.
Kel-ut-sah. — Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 1859.
Kill, on, chan.— Howard, Notes on Northern Tribes,
1854, MS., B. A. E. Killoosa.- Horetzky, Canada
on Pacific, 212, 1874. Killowitsa.— Brit. Col. map,
1872. Killutsar.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 318, 1885.
Kilootsa.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit.
Col. , 114b, 1884. Kil-uteai.— Dorsey in Am. Antiq.,
XIX, 281, 1897.
Kim. The Mountain Lion clan of the
Tigua pueblo of Isleta, N. Mex.
Kim-fauun.— Hodge (after Lummis) in Am.
Anthrop., ix, 351, 1896 {t'ahmi = 'people').
Kimaksnk. A Kinguamiut Eskimo vil-
lage on Cumberland sd., lat. 65°, Baffin
land. — McDonald, Discovery of Hogarth's
Sd., 86, 1841.
Kimestnnne ( ' people opposite a cove of
deep water*). A former village of the
Mishikhwutmetunne on Coquille r., Oreg.
Ki-m^' tunnS^ — Dorse v in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
in, 232, 1890. Ku-mas' :»iiim£'.— Ibid.
BULL. 30]
KIMI88ING KINEGNAK
689
Kimisiing (^Qimissing), A fall settle-
ment of Talirpingmiut Eskimo, of the
Okomiut tribe, on the s. side of Cumber-
land sd., Baffin land. — Boas in 6th Rep.
B. A. E., map, 1888.
Kimituk. A fonner Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Kimiqnit (probably from KVm-kuUxy
applied to the Bellacoola of Deans chan-
nel by the Heiltsuk ) . Given as t he name
of part of the "Tallion nation" or Bella-
coola.
_iep.. . ,
Ind. Aff., pt. II, 162, 1901 (perhapn identical). Kin-
laquitt— Ibid., 272, 1889. Kui-muoh-qui-toch.—
Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 1859.
Ximm ( * brow ' or * eiige ' ) . A village of
the Ntlakyapamuk on the e. side of Fra-
ser r., between Yale and Siska, Brit. Col.
Pop. in 1901 (the last time the name ap-
pears) , together with Suk, 74.
Kamut.— (:;an. Ind. AfT. for 1K86, 2:^. Kimu't.—
Teit in Mem. Am. Man. Nat. Hist., ii, 169, 1900.
Bk'mfio.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sci., 5,
1899. 8ook-k*miu.— Can. Ind. AfT. for 1901, pt. 2,
164 (name combined with that of Suk, q. v.).
Bttuk-kamui.— Ibid., 418, 1898.
Kinaani (* high-standing house'). A
Navaho clan, tne descendants of several
women given that tribe by the Asa phra-
try of the Hopi prior to 1680, when, on
account of drought, the Asa people (q. v. )
abandoned Hano pueblo and maile their
home in Canyon de Chell y, n. e. Arizona,
afterward returning to Tusayan.
Hiffh-HottM people.— Vandlver in Ind. AfT. Rep.,
169, 1890. m^.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E.,
80, 1891. Ki«a£'ni.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, III, IW, 1890 ('high-standing house').
KlniUt'iii.— Matthews, Navaho Legends, 30, 1897.
Kinagingeeg (GyinaxnngyVek, 'people
of the mosquito place'). A Tsimshian
town and local ^roup near Metlakahtla,
N. w. coast of British Columbia.
Oyinaxangyi'ek.— Boas in Zeitschr. fiir Ethnol.,
2S2, 1888. Kfluohenkief.— Kane, Wand, in N. A.,
app., 1859. Kfnagingeeg.— Doreey in Am. Antiq.,
XIX,281,1897. Kinahwngik.— Tolmie and Dawson,
Vocabs. Brit Col., 114b, 1884. Kinkhankuk.—
Howard, Notes on Northern Tribes, 1854, MS.,
B. A. £. Kin-naoh-hanffik.— Krause, Tlinkitlnd.,
818, 1885. Kinnakangeck.— Brit. Col. map, 1872.
Kinak (*face'). A Kuskwogmiut Es-
kimo village on the n. bank of lower Kus-
kokwim r., Alaska; pop. 60 in 1880, 257
in 1890, 209 in 1900.
Kenaghamiut.— 11th Census, Alaska, 108, 1893.
Kinagamate.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 54,
1884.
Kinalik. An Eskimo village in s. w.
Greenland, lat 60** 34^— Meddelelser om
Grdnland, xvi, map, 1896.
Kiiiapiike(^m-a^u^-A'6). AformerChu-
mashan village on San Buenaventura r.,
Ventura co., Cal., near its mouth. — Hen-
shaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1884.
Kinarbik. An Eskimo village in s. e.
Greenland, about lat. 62® 50''; pop. 14 in
1829. — Graah, Exped. Greenland, map,
1837.
Bull. 30—05 i4
Kinbaskets. A body of Shuswap who
forced themselves into the Kutenai coun-
try near Windermere, Brit. Col., from n.
Thompson r., about 50 years ago and
maintained themselves there with the
help of the Assiniboin until the whites
appeared and wars came to an end. Pop.
41 in 1891, 56 in 1904.
Kinbaskets.— Can. Ind. Aff. 1902, 253, 1903. Shus-
wap Band.— Ibid.
Kinbiniyol ( Navaho: kin * pueblo house',
bi *its*, niyol * whirlwind': * Whirlwind
pueblo.' — ^latthews). One of the best
preserved of the pueblo ruins of the Chaco
canyon group in n. av. New Mexico. It is
not in the canyon proper, but in the ])a8in
of an arroyo tributary to it. The ruin
lies 500 yds. e. of the wash, at the base of
a low mesa, about 10 ni. av. and 5 ni. s. of
Pueblo Bonito. It is rectangular in form,
having 3 wings extending to the s., one
at the center and one at each extremity
of the main building. The exterior di-
mensions of the parallelogram occupied
by the building are approximately 320 by
270 ft. The 2 courts formed by the wings
are 91 by 125 and 76 by 83 ft resi>ectivelv,
the former being inchJsed by a low wall,
the latter open. Ten circular kivas are
built within the walls of the structure,
the largest being 26 ft in diamettT and
the smallest 15 ft. The largest rectangu-
lar room is 1(>J bv 17 ft, the smallest 7 by
11 ft. The walls* of the ruin st^md 30 tt
alM)ve the plain. Of the n. exterior wall
120 ft are still standing to above the
second story. Parts of a fourth story wall
are still in place. Probably half the orig-
inal walls are still standing. The doors
average 22 by 34 in. in size, the windows
8 by 12 in. Walls and corners are true
to the plummet and try-square, an excep-
tional occurrence in al)original structures.
The remains of extensive irrigation works
exist in close proximity, the most elal)or-
ate that have l)een observed in the San
Juan drainage. (e. l. n.)
Kinchuwhikat ('on its nose'). A for-
mer large Hupa village, the name refer-
ring to its situation on a point of land on
the E. bank of Trinity r., Cal., near the
N. end of the valley. It is prominent in
II upa folk-lore*. (p. e. «. )
Kintout/'huikttt. — Goddard, Life and Culture of
the Hupa, 13, 1903.
Kincolitb ( * place of scalp ' ) . A mission
village on Nass inlet, Brit. Col., founded
in 1867 and settled bv the Niska. Pop.
267 in 1902, 251 in 1904.
Kinegnagak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo
village in \\\ Alaska; pop. 92 in 1890.
Kinegnagamiut.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164,
1893.
Kinegnak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo
village on C. Newenham, Alaska; pop. 76
in 1890. This is also the Eskimo name
for Razboinski, q. v.
Kinegnagmiut.— Eleventh Censas, Alaska, 99. 1893.
Kniegnagamute.— Ibid., map.
690
KINEUWIDISHIANUN — KING PHILIP
[B. A.1
Kinenwidiihianun (Kin^u^ wi'dUhi^a-
nun ) . The Ea^le phratry of the Menomi-
nee, consisting of the Bald-eagle, Crow,
Raven, Red-tail Hawk, Golden-eagle,
and Fish-hawk gentes. — Hoffman in 14th
Rep. B. A. E., pt. I, 42, 1896.
Kingaseareang (QingcLseareang). A
spring settlement of Kinguamiut Eskimo
on an island near the entrance to Nettil-
ling fjord, Cumberland sd., Baffin land. —
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888.
Kingatok. An Ita Eskimo village on
Smith sd., n. Greenland. — Kane, Arct.
Explor., I, 32, 1856.
Kingegan. The chief village of the Ki-
nugumiut Eskimo, situated inland from
C. Prince of Wales, Alaska. The dialect
here spoken is the same as that used on
the Diomede ids. Pop. 400 in 1880, 488
in 1900.
Xilii.— Bogoras. Chukchee, 21, 1904 (Yuit name).
King-ft-ghe.— Beechey (1827) quotea by Baker,
Geogr. Diet. Alaska, 241, 1902. Kiancl^M.— Elev-
enth Census, Alaska, 165, 1893. Eing-a-khi.—
Baker, ibid, (quoted). Kingigamute.— PetrofF in
10th Census, Alaska, map, 1884. Kinqeqan. — Dall,
Alaska, map, 1875 (changed to Kingegan in et
rata, 628).
Kingep {Kitiep, *big shields'). The
largest and most important tribal division
of the Kiowa. — Mooney in 14th Rep. B.
A. E., 1079, 1896.
XliLgiak. An Aglemiut village on the
N. side of the mouth of Naknek r., Bristol
bay, Alaska; pop. 51 in 1890.
Ft. Suwarof.— Post-route map, 1903. Kenigayat.—
Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 45, 1880. Kinghiak.— Pe-
troff in 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 1884. Kiniaak.-
Post-route map, 1903. Kinuyak.— Eleventh Cen-
sus, Alaska, 164, 1893. Suworof.— Baker, Geog.
Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Kingiktok. An Eskimo village in \v.
Greenland, lat. 72° 57^
Kinggigtok.— Meddelelser om Gronland, vni,
map, 1889.
Kingmiktnk (Qingmiktwi) . The winter
settlement of the Ugjulirmiut in King
William land.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E.,
map, 1888.
Kingnaitmint. One of the 4 branches
of the Okomiut Eskimo of Baffin land,
formerly settled at Pagnirtu and Kignait
fiords, but now having their permanent
village at Kekerten; pop. 86 in 1883.
Their summer villages are Kitingujang,
Kordlubing, Niutang, and Nirdlirn. —
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 437, 1888.
Kingnelling. A spring settlement of
Padlimiut Eskimo at the s. end of Home
bav, Baffin land. — Boas in 6th Rep.
B/A. E., map, 1888.
King Philip. Metacom, second son of
Maasasoit, sachem of the Wampanoag,
who attained that office himself through
the death of his father and elder brother
in 1661-62, and to the English was better
known as Philip of Pokanoket, or King
Philip. He was the most remarkable ot all
the Indians of New England. For 9 years
after his elevation to the chieftaincy, al-
though accused o^ slotting against the
colonists, he seems to have devoted his
energies to observation and preparation
rather than to overt actions of a warlike
nature. He even acknowledged himself
the king' s subject. But war with the Eng-
lish was inevitiEible, and the struggle call^
King Philip's war (1675-76) broke out,
resultin j5 in the practical extermination of
the Indians after they had inflicted great
losses upon the whites. The ability of
King Philip is seen in the plans he made
before the war b^:an, the confederacy he
formed, and the havoc he wrought among
the white settlements. Of 90 towns, 62
were attacked and 12 were completely de-
stroyed. The bravery of the Indians was
in many cases remarkable. Only treach-
ery among the natives in all probability
1
1
B '
.
^^ i
^^1
1^^'
i^
^Mlji
^
^1m
. V-v
.c^P^^^
KJNG PHILIP, (after Church, from an Old Engraving)
saved the colonists from extinction. In
the decisive battle, a night attack, at a
swamp fortress in Rhode Island, Aug. 12,
1676, the last force of the Indians was
defeated with great slaughter. King Philip
himself being among the slain. His body
was subjected to the indignities usual at
that time, and his head is said to have
been exposed at Plymouth for 20 years.
His wife and little son were sold as slaves
in the West Indies. Widely divei^gent
estimates of King Philip's character and
achievements have been entertained by
different authorities, but he can not but
be considered a man of marked abilities.
Weeden (Ind. Money, 12, 1884) says:
"History has made him * King Philip, '^ to
BULL. 30]
KINGS RIVER INDIANS KINNAZINDE
691
commemorate the heroism of his life and
death. He almost made himself a king
by his marvelous energy and statecraft
put forth amon^ the New England tribes.
Had the opposing power been a little
weaker, he might have founded a tem-
porary kingdom on the ashes of the colo-
niQS.*'^ King Philip has been the subject
of several poems, tales, and histories.
The literature includes: Church, History
of King Philip's War, 1836; Apes, Eulogy
on King Philip, 1836; Freeman, Civiliza-
tion and Barbarism, 1878; Markham,
Narrative History of King Philip's War,
1883. (a. F.c.)
Kings Biver Indians. A collective term
for Indians on Tule River res., Cal., in
1885, embracing the tribes formerly on
and about Kings r., some at least of
whom were the Choininmi, Wachahet,
Iticha, Chukaimina, Michahai, Holkoma,
Tuhukmache, Pohoniche, and Wimilche,
according to Wessells (Sen. Ex. Doc. 76,
34th Cong., 3d sess., 31, 1853). The num-
ber gathered under this name, together
with the Wikchamni and Kawia, was 135
in 1884.
King's Biyer Indiant.—McKce (1851) in Sou. "Ex.
Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 80, 1853.
Kingna (* its head'). A Kinguamiut
Okomiut summer village at the head of
Cumberland sd., s. e. Baffin land.
Kiiumwa.— Boas in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xv.
pt 1, 126, 1901. Kingoua.— McDonald, Discov. of
Hogarth's Sd. , 86, lS4h CUngua.— Boas in 6th Rep.
B. A. £., map, 1888.
Kingnamiat ( ' inhabitants of its head ' ) .
A subtribe of the Okomiut Eskimo living
in the villages of Anarnitung, Imigen, and
Kingaseareanc:, at the head of Cumber-
land sd., and numbering 60 in 1883.
Kimaksuk seems to have been a former
village.
Kimiuamiut.— Boas in Geog. Blatt., viii, 33. 1885.
BTinfnaimttt.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt., no. 80,
69, 1885. ftinguamiut.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E..
426, 1888.
KinhUtahi (*red house' [of stone]).
A Navaho clan.
Xinlitd.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
103,1890. KinUtoiiii.— Ibid. Kliifftfi.— Matthews,
Navaho Legends. 30, 1897. Kln/It«£dlne '.—Ibid.
Kixihli«hin(Navaho,* black house'). An
important pueblo ruin of theChaco canyon
rDup of N. w. New Mexico, 6J m. w. and
m. s. of Pueblo Bonito. It is not in
the canyon, but stands, facing e., on a
sand hill 200 yds. w. of a dry wash which
enters the Chaco about 4 m. below. Its
length was 145 ft, greatest width 50 ft.
A semicircular wall, 450 ft long, connects
the N. E. and s. e. comers, inclosing an ir-
regular court. In the wall at a point 285
ft from the s. e. corner of the building
was a circular tower, 4 or 5 ft in diame-
ter, which must have been from 20 to 30
ft high. On the w. side 50 ft of exterior
wall still stands, 26 ft above the debris
and 38 ft above ground. The wall is
36 in. thick at the base, diminishing in
thickness a few inches at the base of each
additional story. Portions of a fourth-
story wall still stand; the original height
was 5 stories. The masonry, which is of
dark-brown sandstone, consists of alter-
nating courses of large and small stones.
There are 3 small windows, 6 bjr 8 in.
Four circular kivas, 10 by 16 ft in di-
ameter, are built within the walls, and
one, 35 ft in diameter, partly within the
front wall and partly within the court. •
The smaller kivas are built within rec-
tangular rooms, and the space between
the room and the kiva walls is filled in
with masonry. An ancient system of ir-
rigation works, consisting of stone dam,
wasteway reservoir, and ditches, is plainly
traceable. (e. l. h.)
Kiniklik. A Chugachigmiut Eskimo
village on the n. shore of Prince William
sd., Alaska.
Kinicklick.— Schrader (1900) quoted by Baker,
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kiniklik.— Baker, ibid.
Kinipetn (*wet country'). A central
Eskimo tribe on the w. coast of Hudson
bay, extending s. from Chesterfield inlet
250 m. They hunt deer and muskoxen,
using the skins for clothing and kaiak
covers, coming to the coast only in win-
ter when seals are easily taken.
Agutit.— Petitot in Bib. Ling, et Ethnog. Am., iii,
X, 187(>. Kiaknukmiut.— Boas in Bui. Am. Mus.
Nat. Hist., XV, 6, 1901 (own name). Kixnnepatoo.—
Schwatka in Centurv Mag., xxii, 76, 1881. Kini-
petu.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 450, 1888. Kin-
nepatu.— Boas in Trans. Anthrop. Soc. Wash., in,
96, 1885. Kinnipetu.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt.,
no. 80, 72. 1885.
Kinkash. A Potawatomi band, so named
in treaties of 1832 and 1836. Their village
or reservation, which was sold to the
United States in 1836, was on Tippecanoe
r., Kosciusko co., Ind.
Kin-Kash.— Tippecanoe treaty (1832) in U. S.Ind.
Treaties, 701, 1873. Kin-krash.— Chippewaynaung
treaty (1836), ibid.. 713.
Kinkletsoi (Navaho: * yellow house').
A small pueblo ruin about | m. n. w.
of Pueblo Bonito, on the N. side of the
arroyo, at the base of the canyon wall, in
Chaco canyon, n. w. X. Mex. Its ground-
plan is a perfect parallelogram, with no
mner court. Its dimensions are 135 by
100 ft, and originally it probably contained
4 stories; fragments of the third story walls
are still standing from 20 to 25 ft above
the ground. The masbnry consists of
blocks of yellow sandstone, averaging 8
by 5 by 3 in., fairly well shaped and laid
in adobe mortar. The pueblo walls are
from 18 to 24 in. thick. The remaining
doorways, all interior, average 27 by 42 in.
Three circular kivas, 18 to 22 ft in diam-
eter, are built within the walls. It is Ruin
No. 8 oi Jackson (10th Rep. Hay den
Surv., 1878). (e. l. h.)
Kixmazinde (probably Kinazhi, or Kini-
azhi, * little pueblo'). The Navaho name
of a small, ancient, circular pueblo near
Kintyel (q. v.), Ariz.; believed to have
692
KINNIKINNICK KINfiHlP
[b. a. e.
been occupied by the people of the latter
Slace as a summer settlement. See Min-
eleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., pi. lxvi, 91,
1891; Fewkes in 22d Rep. B. A. E., 134,
1904.
k-sinde.— MindelefF, op. cit. Zinni jui'n e.—
Cushingr quoted by Powell in 4th Rep. B. A. E.,
xxxvlii, 18H6 (confused with Kintyel).
Kinnikinnick. An Indian nreparation
of tobacco, sumac leaves, and tne inner
bark of a species of dogwood, used for
smoking l)y the Indians and the old set-
tlers and hunters in the W. The prep-
aration varied in different localities and
with different tril)es. Bartlett quotes
Trumbull assaying: "I have smoked
half a dozen varieties of kinnikinnick
in the N. W., all genuine." The word,
which has as variants, kinnik-kinnik,
k'nickk'neck, kinnikinik, killikinnick,
etc., is derived from one of the Cree or
Chippewa dialects of Algonquian. The
literal signification is, *what is mixed.'
In (yhippewa, kinihinige means * he mixes,'
from the radical kUiika, 'mixed.' The
name was also applied by the white hunt-
ers, traders, and settlers to various shrubs,
etc., the bark or leaves of which are em-
ployed in the mixture: Red osier (Cor-
nus stolonifera) J hesLrherry { ArctostnphyloH
uva-ursi), silky cornel (Cornus sericea)^
ground dogwood (C canadensis). Mat-
thews (Am. Anthrop., v, 170, 1903) main-
tains that the ordinary source of kinni-
kinnick was not the red willow, as has
often been said, but the silky cornel, a
species of dogwood, bearing, especially in
winter, a marked resemblance to the red-
bark willow. See Smohing, Tobacco,
(A. F. C.)
Kinship. The foundation of social or-
ganization, and hence of government, the
tangible form of social organization, was
originally the bond of real and legal blood
kinship. ' The recognition and perpetua-
tion of the ties of blood kinship were the
first important steps in the permanent
social organization of society.
Amon^ the North American Indians
kinship is primarily the relation subsist-
ing between two or more persons whose
blood is derived from common ancestors
through lawful marriage. Persons be-
tween whom kinship subsists are called
kin or kindred. Kinship may be lineal
or collateral. By birth through the nat-
ural order of descent kindred are divided
into generations or categories, which rep-
resent lineally and col&terally relation-
ships or degrees of kinship, which in
turn are sometimes modified by the age
and the sex of the persons so affected.
In noting the degrees of kinship in the
direct line all systems appear to agree in
assigning one degree to a generation. Thus
is developed a complex system of rela-
tionships. The extent and the complex-
ity of tne system in any case vary with
the social organization of the people.
These degrees of kinship may be called
relationships, and they define more or
less clearly the station, rights, and obli-
gations of the several individuals of the
kinship group specified. The distinction
between relationship and kinship must
not be confuseil, for there are persons
who are related but who do not belong
to the same kin.
In speaking of the entire l)ody of a group
of kindred it is necessary that reference
\ye made to some person, the propositus,
as the starting point. In general every
person belongs naturally to two distin(i
families (see Family) or kinship groups,
namely, that of the father and that of the
mother. These two groups of kindred,
which before his birth were entirely dis-
tinct for the purposes of marriage and the
inheritance of property and certain other
rights, privileges, and obligations,' unite
in his {)erson and thereafter* form only
subdivisions of his general group of kin-
dred, and l)oth these groups share with
him the rights, privileges, and obligations
(»f kindred.
There are two radically different meth-
ods of naming these relationships; the
one is called the classificatory, the other
the descriptive method. In the descrip-
tive phrase the actual relationship be-
comes a matter of implication — that is, the
relationship is made specific either by the
primary terms of relationship or by a
combination of them. Under the first,
kindred are never described, but are clas-
sified into categories and the same term
of relationship is applied to every person
belonging to the same category. In the
descriptive system of naming kinship de-
grees there is usually found a number of
classificatory terms.
There has been prevalent hitherto
among many ethnologists the opinion that
the tracing of descent through the pater-
nal line is in most cases a development
from the system of tracing descent exclu-
sively through females, and that, ther^
fore, the latter system is antecedent and
more primitive than the former. But it
is not at all clear that there has been ad-
duced in support of this contention any
conclusive evidence that it is a fact or
that either system has been transformed
from the other; but it is evident that such
an improbable procedure would have
caused the disregard and rupture of a vast
body of tabus — of tabus among the most
sacred known, namely, the tabus of incest.
The kinship system in vogue among
the Klamath Indians of California and
Oregon is apparently typical of those
tribis in which, like the Kiowa, both
the clan and the gentile systems of kin-
ship are wanting. This lack of either sys-
tem, so far as known, is characteristic of
BULL, rto]
KINSHIP
693
nearly all the tribes of the plains, the Pa-
atic slope, and th e N. W . coast. The K la-
cnath system reco^izes only two degrees
in ascending above and only two in de-
scending below the propositiin in the
iirect line, and four collateral degrees of
the paternal line, that of father's brothers,
that of father's uncles, and then that of
father's sisters and that of father's aunts;
and four (^oHateral degrees of the maternal
line, that of mother's sisters, that of
mother's aunts, that of mother's brothers,
and that of mother's uncles, or eight col-
lateral degrees in.all. Hence in reckon-
ing descent below himself in the direct
line the offspring of propositus recog-
nizes one degree of kinship l)elow the
lowerof the two admitted by his father;
but in the ascending direct line, the off-
spring of propositus does not recognize as
a relation the higher of the two admittt»d
by his father. So that in this svstem the
circle of relationships shifts with the per-
son selected as the starting point of the
reckoning. The father recognizes rela- .
tions which his child does not admit, and
the child recognizes relations which the
father does not admit.
Where the blood ties apijear to l>e so
limited and so disregarded in the social
oi^nizatitm, the cohesion of the tribe is
accomplished more or less satisfactorily
through military, religious, or other so-
cieties.
In North America those tribes among
whom the clan system prevaile<l, with the
tracing of descent through the female
line, Ixjc^me the most imi)ortant peoples
of modem times. The Five Civilizeii
Tribes of Oklahoma and the Irocjuois
peoples are examples of this.
Among the Omaha a man nmst not
marry in his own gens. A law of mem-
bership requires that a child belong to its
father^s gens. This is descent in the
male line, but children of white or black
persons (negroes) belong to the gens of
the mother, into which they are forbid-
den to marrj'. Moreover, a stranger can
not belong to any gens of the tril)e be-
cause there is no ceremony of adoption
into a gens. A man is prohibitetl from
marrying a woman of the gens of his fa-
ther, as the women of this gens are his
grandmothers, aunts, sisters, nieces,
daughters, or granddaughters. For the
same reason he can not marry a woman
of the gens of his father's mother, but he
can marry a woman belonging to any
othef gens of his paternal grandmother's
phratry, as she would not be of his kin-
dred.
Consanguineous or blood kinship em-
braces not only the gens of the father,
but also that of the mother and grand-
mothers, and these kindrwl with refer-
ence to a man fall into fourteen groups,
and with reference to a woman into fif-
teen groups.
Among the Omaha, within the phratry
in which gentes exist, those who occupy
the one side of the fire are not regarded
as full kindred by those occupying the
other side of the fire, and they are pro-
hibited from intermarrying. But were
it not for the institution of these gentes
or quasi-kindred groups within the phra-
tries, a man would be c()mi)elled to
marry outside of his trilx*, for the reason
that all the women of the tribe would
otherwise Ihj his kindred through the
previous intermarriages among the ten
original ** gentes" or phratries.
The Omaha kinship system may be
taken as typical of the gentile organiza-
tion, tracing descent through the male
line. In this system the relationships are
highly com])lex and the terms, or rather
their approximate English e<iuivalents,
denotive of these relationships are em-
ployed with considerable latitude and in
quite a different manner from their use in
English. For example: If the propositus
l)e a male or a female, he or she would
call all men his or her 'fathers' whom his
or her father would call 'brothers*, or
whom his or her mother would call her
potential * husbands.' lie or she would
call all women his or her 'mothers'
whom his or her mother would call * sis-
ters', 'aunts', or 'nieces', or whom his
or her father would call his potential
'wives.' Moreover, he or she Avould call
all men ^brothers' who are the sons of
such fathers or mothers, and their sisters
would be his or her 'sisters.' He or she
would c^ll all men his or her 'grandfath-
ers' who are the fathers or grandfathers
of his or her fathers or mothers, or whom
his or her fathers or mothers would call
their mothers' * brothers.' He or she
would also call all women his or her
'grandmothers' who are the real or po-
tential wives of his or her grandfathers,
or who are the mothers or grandmothers
of his or her fathers or motliers, or whom
his or her fathers would call their fathers'
'sisters.'
If the propositus be a male he would
call all males his 'sons' who are the sons
of his brothers or of his potential wives,
and the sisters of these sons are his
'daughters.' If the propositus be a
female person she would call afl children
of her sisters her 'chiMren', l)ecaiise their
father is or their fathers are her potential
or actual husband or husbands; and she
would call those males her 'nephews'
who are the sons of her brothers, and the
daughters of her brothers would l)e her
'nieces.'
If the propositus be a male, he would
call his sister's son his 'nephew' and her
daughter his 'niece'; but whether male
694
KINSHIP
[B.A.B.
or female, the propositus would call all
male and female persons who are the
children of his sons, daughters, nephews,
or nieces, 'grandchildren*; and, m like
manner, he or she would call all men
* uncles ' whom his or her mothers would
call their 'brothers', and would call all
female persons 'aunts' who are his or her
father's sisters as well as those who are
the wives of his or her uncles. But the
father's sisters' husbands of a male person
are his brothers-in-law, because they are
the actual or potential husbands of his
sisters; and when the propositus is a
female person they are her actual or
potential husbands.
Any female person whom a man's own
wife calls 'elder sister' or 'younger sis-
ter', her father^ s sister, or her brother's
daughter is his potential wife.
Any male person whom a man's wife
would call 'elder brother* or 'younger
brother' is his brother-in-law; also any
other male person who is the brother of
his wife's niece or of his brother's wife.
But his wife's father's brother is his grand-
father, not his brother-in-law, although
his sister is his potential wife. When
his brother-in-law is the husband of his
father's sister or of his own sister, his sis-
ter is his grandchild, and not his poten-
tial wife. A male person is the brother-
in-law of a man if he be the husband of
the sister of the other's father, since that
man could marry his (the other's own)
sister, but his aunt's husband is not his
brother-in-law when he is his own uncle
or his mother's brother. Any male per-
son is the brother-in-law of the man whose
sister is his wife. But since his sister's
niece's husband is his sister's potential
or actual husband, he is his son-in-law,
because he is his daughter's husband.
A male or female person would call any
male person his or her 'son-in-law' who is
the husband of his or her daujjhter, niece,
or grandchild, and his father is his or her
son-in-law. When a male person or a
female person would call the lather of his
or her aaughter-in-law his or her * grand-
father,' her brother is his or her grandson.
A male or female person would call an^
other female person who is the wife of his
or her son, nephew, or grandson, his or
her 'daughter-m-law'; and the mother
of his or her son-in-law is so called by
him or her.
The father, mother's brother, or grand-
father of a man's wife, of his potential
wife, or of his daughter-in-law (the last
being the wife of his son, nephew, or
grandson) is the grandfather (or father-
m-law) of that man. Any female person
who is the mother, mother's sister, or
grandmother of a man's wife, of his po-
tential wife, or of his daughter-in-law (a
wife of his son, nephew« or of his grand-
son) is the grandmother (or mother-in-
law ) of that man.
By the institution of either the clan
(q. V.) or the gens system of determining
and fixing degrees of relationship, kin-
ship through males or through females
acquired increased importance, because
under either form of organization it signi-
fied 'clan kin' or 'gentile kin' in contra-
distinction to non-gentile kin. The
members of either were an organized
body of consanguinel bearing a common
clan or gentile name, and were bound
together by ties of blood and by the fur-
ther bond of mutual rights, privileges,
and obligations characteristic of the dan
or the gens. In either case, ' clan kin * or
'gentile kin ' became superior to other kin,
because it invested its members with the
rights, privileges, and obligations of the
clan or gens.
Where a man calls his mother's sister
'mother', and she in turn calls him her
'son', although she did not in fact give
him birth, the relationship must in strict-
ness be defined as a marriage relation-
ship and not as a blood relationship.
Under the clan or the gentile system of
relationships kinship was traced equally
through males and through females, but
a broad distinction was made between
the paternal and the maternal kindred,
and the rights, privileges, and obliga-
tions of the members of the line through
which descent was traced were far more
real and extensive than were those of the
other line. Among North American In-
dians kinship through males was recog-
nized just as constantly as kinship throu^
females. There were brothers and sis-
ters, grandfathers and grandmothers,
grandsons and granddaughters, traced
through males as well as through females.
While the mother of a child was readily
ascertainable, the father was not, but be-
cause of this uncertainty, kinship through
males was not therefore rejected, and
probable fathers, probable brothers, and
probable sons were placed in the category
of real fathers, real brothers, and real
sons.
In every Iroquois community the de-
gree of security and of distinction which
every member of the community en-
joyed, depended chiefly on the number,
the wealth, and the power of his kin-
dred, hence the tie uniting the members
of the kinship group was not lightly or
arbitrarily broken.
It appears that where the clan organi-
zation IS in vogue the adoption (q. v. ) of
alien persons was customary.
With descent in the female line a male
person had in his clan grandfathers and
grandmothers, mothers, brothers and
sisters, uncles, rarely nephews and nieces,
and grandsons and granddaughters, some
lULL. 30]
KINSHIP
695
lineal and some collateral; at the same
time, with the exception of uncles, he had
the same relationships outside of his clan,
uid fathers, aunts, sons and daughters,
ind cousins, in addition. A woman had
the same relationships in the clan as a
man, and in addition sons and daugh-
ters; and at the same time she had the
»me relationships outside of her clan as
had the man.
In certain communities there are terms
in use applied to polyandrous and polygy-
Qous marriage relations. For instance, in
Klamath the term p^tceke^p denotes ( 1 ) the
relationship of the two or more wives of a
man, and (2) the relationship of two or
more men (who may be brothers) who
marry sisters or a single woman among
them'. A nd i n the Cree the term v ' tWyim ,
employed by both men and women, signi-
fies * my (sexual) jjartner* ; for example,
a wife will apply this term to the cowife of
the husbana or husbands; and the term
nikmdk is applie?! by one man to another
with whom he shares a wife or wives, or
to whom he hain loanetl his own wife.
This term is employed also an a ti^rm of
friendship among men.
The distinction between one's own
father and mother and the other persons
so called was sometimes marked by the
use of an explanatory adjective, *real,'
*true,' or the like; sometimes by calling
all the others *little fathers' or * little
mothers.'
The following chart, which applies es-
pecially to the Plaida, may be taken as
typical of a two-clan svstem with female
oescent, self being male:
Clan of Self
Mother ITncles
I (husbands
of aunts,
Youn^or SiHters ^'*l?,^,^
"""•'- ! fatSln-
law of self
Nephews and of
nieces brothers)
In paternal succession analogous w^rit^s
of terms of relationshij) develop.
The persons belonging to one's own
clan being accounted blood relations,
marriage with any of them was not per-
mitted, and where there were many clans
this prohibition usually extended to the
Cither's clan also. After marriage, terms
of affinity corresponding to 'father-in-
law,' * mother-in-law,' * brother-in-law,'
and *sisterrin-law,' were applied not
only to persons who could be so desig-
nated in English, but to all members
of the same clans of corresponding age
and sex as well. Where there were but
two clans the terms of affinity might be
applied to those who had previously been
Elder Self
brothers
known as uncles, aunts, uncles' chil-
dren, nephews, and nieces, as indicated
in the above table.
Where clans did not exist blood rela-
tionship was recognized on lK>th sides as
far as the connection (;ould be remem-
l)ered, and marriage with any person
within this circle was, generally speaking,
less usual than with one entirely outside,
though such mamagCH were not every-
where prohibited, and in some cases
were actually preferrtni. There was the
same custom, however, of extending the
terms of rt»lationship to groups of indi-
viduals, such as the brothers of one's
father, and the sisters of one's mother.
Among the Salish tribes of British Co-
lumbia, who appear to have had a special
fondness for re(;ording genealogit»s, the
numl)er of terms of relationship is very
greatly increased. Thus four or even five
generations back of that of the parents
and l>elow that of the children are marked
by distinct terms, and there are distin-
guishing terms for the first, second, third,
and young(»8t child, and for the uncle,
aunt, etc., according as one's father,
mother, or other relative through whom
the relationship exists is living or dead,
and different terms for a living and a
dead wife. There are thus 25 terms of
relationship among the Lillooet, 28 among
the Shuswap, and 31 among the Squaw-
mish. By way of illustration, the kin-
ship system of the last-mentioned tribe
is subjoined (see Boas in Rt»p. on N. W.
Tribes of Can., 136, 1890):
1. Direct relati<mship. TTuukurf/uky
great-great-great grandparent or great-
Opposite ( 'Inn or Clans
Aunts
(mother-in-law)
I
Aunts or uncles'
children
(from whom eome
wife, brothers' wives)
sons and dauKhters
Fathers (of self,
brothers, sisters)
I
Male cousins
(from whom come
sisters' husbands)
great-great grand(!hild; tsopeyuk^ great-
great-grandparent or great-great-grand-
child; stsliamiky great-grandparent or
great-grandchild; seel, grandfather, grand-
mother, grt»at-imcle, or great-aunt; ematSy
grandchild, grandnephew, or grandniece;
maUy father; chisJuif mother; wjm, child;
seenllf eldest child ; anontatsh, second child ;
inenchechity third child; saut, youngest
child; kiipkiiopitSy brothers, sisters, and
cousins together; kuopitSj elder brother
or sister, or father's or mother's elder
brother's or sister's child; «ifeaib, younger
brother or sister, or father's or mother's
younger brother' 8 or sister's child ;«ic/ioi7/,
cousin.
2. Indirect relationship, (a) When
696
KINTEOAW — KINTPUASH
[B. A. ■.
the intermediate relative is alive: «m,
father's or mother's brother or sister;
staeaU, brother' s or sister' s child ; chemashj
wife's or husband's cousin, brother, or
sister; or cousin's brother's or sister's wife
or husband; saaky son-in-law, daughter-
in-law, father-in-law, or mother-in-law;
8ku€V)a8j any relative of a husband or wife.
(b) When the intermediate relative is
dead: uotsaeqoUl, father's or mother's
brother or sister; suinemaitl, brother's
or sister's child; chaiae, wife's or hus-
band's cousin, brother, or sister, or
cousin's brother's or sister's wife or hus-
band; slikoaUlf son-in-law, daughter-in-
law, father-in-law, or mother-in-law.
3. Indirectaffinity. Skseel^yfiie'sgrnnd-
father or grandmother, or stepfather's or
stepmother's father or mother; skamauy
aunt's husband or stepfather; skechuha,
uncle's wife or stepmother; skemen, step-
child; skemats, grandson's or granddaugn-
ter's wife or husband; skesaak^ wife's or
husband's stepfather or stepmother, or
stepchild's husband or wife.
It will be noted that many of these are
reciprocal terms, and such were very
common in Indian kinship systems, used
between persons of different generations,
as above, or sometimes between persons
of opposite sex of the same generation,
such as husband and wife. Out of 14
terms in Klamath and Modoc 11 are
reciprocal. On the other hand, per-
sons of different sexes will often indicate
the same relative, such as a father or a
mother, by entirely different terms, and
different terms are applied to those of a
person's own phratry and to members of
the opposite one, while the Iroquois use
the equivalent for 'brother' for persons
inside and outside the tribe indiscrim-
inately. In all tribes, no matter how
organized, a distinction is made between
the elder and the younger members of
the generation of self, at least between
older and younger members of the same
sex.
The termp corresponding to * grand-
father' and'grandmother,' except among
a few peoples, like the Salish, were ex-
tended to all those of a generation older
than that of the parents and sometimes
even to persons of that generation, while
the term for * grandchild' was applied
to very young people by old ones quite
indiscriminately. There were also terms
to indicate the potential relationship of
husband and wife, applied by a man to
his wife's sisters, his aunt, or his niece,
not because she was or had been, but be-
cause she might become, his wife, as usu-
ally happens to the wife's sister after the
wife's death.
Besides the natural import of terms of
kinship, they were employed metaphor-
ically m a great number of ways, as to
indicate respect, to avoid the use of a
man's personal name, to indicate the clan
or phratry to which a person belonged,
or to indicate the possession of special
privileges. Naturally enough, they often
took the place of clan or even trilml des-
ignations, a fact which undoubtedly has
led to serious errors in attempts to trace
the history of Indian tribes. Again, they
were applied to animals or supernatural
beings, and with the Haida this use was
intended to mark the fact that the being
in question belonged to such and such a
phratry or that a representation of it was
used as a crest in that phratry. As this
classification of animals by phratries or
clans is often traced back to the inter-
marriage of a human being and an animal,
we have an extension of the idea of kin-
ship quite beyond any civilized concep-
tions. See Clan and GenSy Family y Social
Organization. (j. n. b. h. j. r. s.)
Kintecaw, Kintecoy, Kinte Kaye, Kin-
ticka. See Cantico.
Kintpnash (* having the water-brash' —
Gatschet; also spelled Keintpoos, but
commonly known as Captain Jack). A
subchief of the Modoc on the Oregon-
California border, and leader of the hos-
tile element in the Modoc war of 1872-73.
The Modoc, a warlike and aggressive
offshoot from the Klamath tribe of s. e.
Oregon, occupied the territory immedi-
ately to the s. of the latter, extending
across the California border and includ-
ing the Lost r. country and the famous
Lava-bed region. They had been par-
ticularly hostile to the whites up to 1864,
when, under the head chief Sconchin,
they made a treaty agreeing to go upon a
reservation established on Upper Kla-
math lake jointly for them and the Kla-
math tribe. The treaty remained unrati-
fied for several years, and in the mean-
time Jack, with a dissatisfied band num-
bering nearly half the tribe and including
about 70 fighting men, continued to rove
about the Lost r. country, committing
frequent depredations and terrorizing the
settlers. He claimed as his authority for
remaining, in spite of the treaty, a per-
mission given by an Indian agent on the
California side. With some diflaculty he
was finally induced in the spring of 1870
to go with his band upon the reservation,
where the rest of the tribe was already
established under Sconchin. He re-
mained but a short time, however, and
soon left after killing an Indian doctor,
who, he said, was responsible for two
deaths in his own family. He returned
to Lost r. demanding that a reservation
be assigned to him there on the ground
that it was his home country and that it
was impossible to live on fnendly terms
with the Klamath. One or two confer-
ences were arranged both by the military
BULL. 30]
KINTPUASH
697
and civil authorities, but without shak-
ing his purpose, and it became evident
that he was planning for a treacherous
outbreak at tne first opportunity. At a
final conference, Nov. 27, 1872, he abso-
lutely refused to go on the reservation or
to discuss the matter longer, and the atti-
tude of the Indians was so threatening
that an order was sent the military at Ft
Klamath to put him and his head men
under arrest. The attempt was made by
Capt. Jackson with 86 cavalrymen at
Jack's camp on Lost r., Oreg., Nov. 29,
but the Indians resisted, killing or wound-
ing 8 soldiers with a loss to themselves of
15. The Modoc, led by Jack, fled into
the impenetrable Lava-l)eds on the s.
shore of Rhett (Modoc or Tule) lake,
just across the California l>order, killing
a number of settlers on the way. Those
under Sconchin remained quietly on tlie
reservation.
KINTPUASH (after MEACHAm)
The war was now l)egun, and volunteer
companies were organized to assist the
small body of troops available. A num-
ber of friendly Modoc, Klamath, and
other Indians also enlisted. The Modoc
position was so strong with rocks and
caves and hidden passages that it was
practically impossible for the trooj)8 to
enter with any prospect of success. On
Dec. 22, 1872, the Indians attacked a
waeon train with ammunition supplies
and a skirmish ensued in which one or
two were killed on each side. On Jan.
17, 1873, an attempt was made by Col.
Greer to storm the Modoc stronghold by
the entire force of regulars and volunteers,
numbering nearly 400 men, assisted by a
howitzer battery, but after fighting all
day among the rocks against a concealed
foe the troops were obliged to retire with
the loss of 9 killed and 30 wounded.
Soon afterward civil indictments for mur-
der were procured by the settlers against
8 Modocs concerned in the killing of set-
tlers. Another conference was appointed
under a regular peace commission, con-
sisting of (ien. E. R. S. Canby, Indian
fiupermtendent A. B. Meacham, Rev. E.
Thomas, and Indian agent L. S. Dyar.
By agreement with Jack, the commission-
ers, together with Frank F. Riddle and
his Indian wife, Toby (Winema), as inter-
preters, met Jack and several of his men
near the Modoc camp, Apr. 11, 1873, to
debate terms of settlement. Hardlv had
the talk begun when, by premeditated
treachery, Jack gave a signal, and draw-
ing a revolver from his breast shot Gen-
eral Canbv dead, while his companions
attacked the other commissioners, killing
Mr Thomas and putting 5 bullets into
Meacham, who fell unconscious. The
others escaped, pursued by the Indians
until the latter were driven off by a de-
tachment of troops who came up just in
time, one of the officers having already
been killed in the same treacherous
fashion by another party of the same
band.
Active measures were now put into oper-
ation and a company of Warmspring In-
dian scouts from n. Oregon, under Donald
McKay, was secured to assist the trooi)s
in penetrating the maze of the Lava-beus.
With these and the aid of the field guns
the Modoc were soon compelled to vacate
their stronghold and take refuge in the
rocks farther along the lake shore. On
Apr. 26 a search detachment of about 85
men, under Lieuts. Thomas and Wright,
was suddenly attacked by the Indians
from cover, with the loss of 26 killed, in-
chiding both ofticers, besides 16 wounded.
In consequence of this defeat Col. Jeffer-
son C. Davis, in command of the Dej>art-
ment of the Columbia, restored control
of operations to Col. Wheaton, who had
l)een temporarily superseded by another
officer. Other minor encounters took
place, in one of which Jac!k in person led
the attack, clad in the uniform which he
had stripped from (tcii. Canby. By this
time the Indians were tired of fighting,
and nian^ of Jack's warriors had desert^
him, while he, with the rest, had vacated
the I^va-beds entirely and taken up a
new iwsition about 20 m. farther s. The
pursuit was kept up, and on May 22, 1873,
a party of 65 hostiles surrendered, in-
cluding several of the most prominent
leaders. Others came in later, and on
June 1 Jack himself, with his whole re-
maining party, surrendered to Capt. Perry
at a camp some miles e. of Clear lake,
N. Av. Cal. The whole military force then
opposed to him numl>ered 985 regulars
and 71 Indians, while he himself had
never had more than about 80 warriors,
698
KINTYEL — KIOHEBO
[B. A. S.
who were now reduced to 50, besides
about 120 women and children. The
whites had lost 65 killed, soldiers and
civilians, including two Indian scouts,
with 63 wounded, several mortally. The
Modoc prisoners were removed to Ft Kla-
math, where, in July, 6 of the leaders
were tried by court-martial for the mur-
der of Gen. Canby, Mr Thomas, and the
settlers, and 4 of them condemned,
namely, Ja(!k, young Sconchin, Black Jim,
and Boston Charley, who were handed
together Oct. 3, 1873, thus closing what
Bancroft calls ** their brave and stubborn
fight for their native land and liberty — a
war in some respects the most remark-
able that ever occurred in the history of
aboriginal extermination." The remain-
der of the band were not permitted to
rejoin their |)eople on Klamath res., but
were deported to the s. e. comer of Okla-
homa, where a part of them still remain.
See Modov. Consult Bancroft, Hist. Ore-
gon, II, 1888; Commissioner of Ind. Affs.
Iteports for 1872-73; Dunn, Massacres of
the MtH., 1880; Gatschet in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol.,ii, 1890. (j. m.)
Kintyel (Navaho: Ktntyel, or Kintye^li,
from Mn * pueblo house', iyel * broad':
* broad house.' — Matthews). An unusu-
ally large, ancient, circular pueblo ruin
on Leroux wash, about 23 m. n. of Navajo
station, on the S. F. Pac. R. R., Ariz.
According to Zufli tradition the village
was built bv the Hleetakwe, during the
migration of the Bear, Crane, Frog, Deer,
Yellow-wood, and other Zufii clans. The
Zufii origin of the pueblo has been borne
out by archeological study of the ruins.
SeeCushingin 4th Rep. B. A. E., xxxviii,
1886; Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 91-
94, 1891; Fewkes in 22d Rep. B. A. E.,
124, 1904.
H*-iho-ta-pathl-t&ie.— Gushing quoted by Powell
in 4th Rep. B. A. E., xxxviii, 1886 (Zufii name).
K'in'i BTel.— Ibid. Kin-Tiel.— Mindeleff quoted
in 6th Rep. B. A. E., xxiv, 1887. Pueblo Grande.—
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 91, 1891.
Kintyel. A ruined pueblo in Chaco
canyon, n. w. N. Mex. It figures in Nav-
aho legend as in course of erection during
one of their early migratory movements,
and later as a ruin. Its builders are not
known.
Kintail.— Bickford in Century Mag., xl, 903. Oct.
1890. Kintyel.— MatthewH in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
in, 224, 1890. Btotye'U.— Ibid.
Kina^nmiat. An Eskimo tribe of Alaska,
inhabitmg tlie region of C. Prince of
Wales on Kaviak penin. About 1860 they
overran the country as far as Selawik r.*,
oppressing other tribes and collecting an-
nual tribute from the Kaviagmiut. They
now visit the shores of Kotzebue sd. to
barter with the inland tribes, and are the
keenest traders among the Eskimo and
the most vicious, perhaps from longer in
tercourse with whalemen. Their dialect
is more guttural than that of the Kaviag-
miut and other tribes of Alaska, resem-
bling that of the Yuit. They numbered
400 in 1880, 652 in 1890. Their villages
are: Eidenu, Kingegan, Mitletukeruk,
Nuk, Pikta, Shishmaref, Sinauk, and
Takchuk. For illustrations of types see
Ef^Hmo,
Kinegana.— Kelly, Aret. Eskimo in Alaska, 9, 1890.
Kinfee'ffa-mnt.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i.
16, 1877. Kinngmttt— Rep. U. 8. Bur. Ed., Circ. of
Infn No. 2, chart, 1901. Kinugumut.— Nelson in
18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. Kinik Kute.— Rep.
U. 8. Bur. Ed., op. cit. Ki'zmi.— Bogoras, ChuK-
chee, 21, 1904 (Yuit name: 'the inhabitant of
Kihi,' i. e., of Prince of Wales id.).
Kinnhtoiah (Gyidna<Weks, * people of
the rapids'). A fonner Tsimsnian divi-
sion and town near Metlakatla, Brit. Col.
Oyidnad&'eks.— Boas in Zeitsch. fQr Ethnol., 282,
1888. Keen-ath-toix.— Kane, Wand, in N. Am.,
app., 1859. Kenath tui ex.— Howard, Notes on
Northern Tribes visited in 1854, MS., B. A. E. Kin-
nato-ika.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 318, 1885. Xinna-
tonoks.— Brit. Col. map, 1872. Kinuhtoiah.— Tol-
mie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884.
Kinyaah (Navaho: Ki^aa^^, *high
house.* — Matthews). A small ruined
pueblo about 30 m. s. and 5 m. w. of Pueblo
Bonito, on the Thoreau road, n. w. New
Mexico. It is in the Chaco drainage, but
on an open plain. The ruin is rectangular,
165 by 90 ft, and without an inclosed court;
the foundations are true to the cardinal
points and a perfect parallelogram. Some
circular depressions indicate the former
presence of kivas. A small wing 30 ft
square is at the s. e. comer of the build-
ing. A portion of the w. wall stands 30 ft
high and partly incloses a large kiva which
still stands 3 stories high. The material is
dark-brown laminated sandstone, which
must have been brought from the moun-
tains 3 m. away. The stones used were
the largest employed in the (construction
of any of the Cnaco canyon group of
buildings, to which group Kinyaiui is
evidently related by all cultural affinities
that have been discovered. Some small
pueblo ruins existnear by, and a large irri-
gation ditch and two reservoirs are dis-
cernible, (e. l. h.)
Kio. The Pine clan of the pueblo of
Jemez, N. Mex. A corresponding cian
existed also at the former related pueblo
oi Pecos.
Kiotsaa.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop^ ix, 351, 1896
ittad, or tmash,^ 'people'). JL'6tsaa'.— Ibid.
(Pecos form).
Kioch's Tribe. A body of Salish of Wil-
liams Lake agency, Brit. Col., numbering
45 in 1886, the last time the name ap-
pears.—Can. Ind. Aff. for 1886, 232.
Kiohero ( ' where reeds float.' — Hewitt).
A former Cayuga settlement on the e.
side of the n. end of Cayuga lake, N. Y.
It was occupied by descendants of incor-
porated Hurons and other prisoners. In
1670 tbe French had there the mission
of St Etienne. (j. m. )
Kiohero.— Jes. Rel . for 1670, 68, 1858. Sannio.— Zeis-
berger (1760) quoted bv Conover, Kanadeea and
Geneva, MS., B. A. £. SaiatEatieiiiie.—Jes. Rel. for
BULL. 80]
KI-ON-TWOG-KY KIOWA
699
1670, 63, 1858. Saint Stephen.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist. ,
ni, 251, 1853. Thihero.— Conover, op. cit. Tich-
•ro.— Ibid. Tiohero.— Jes. Rel. for 1669, 14, 1858.
Ki-on-twog-ky. See Complanter.
Kiota. Mentioned in connection with
the Shasta and several small Athapascan
tribes of 8. Oregon as being hostile to
white settlers in 1854. They numbered
only 8 and their name was possibly that
of their leader. — Ambrose in H. R. Ex.
Doc. 93, 34th Cong., Ist sess., 90, 1856.
Kiowa (from Gd^-i-givii, or Kd^-i-gwuy
'principal people,' their own name). A
tribe at one time residing about the upper
Yellowstone and Missouri, but better
APIATAN ', WOODEN LANCE) — KIOWA
known as centering about the upper Ar-
kansas and Canadian in Colorado and Ok-
lahoma, and constituting, so far as present
knowledge goes, adistinctlinguisticstock.
They are noticed in Spanish records as
early, at least, as 1732. Their oldest tra-
dition, which agrees with the concurrent
testimony of the Shoshoni and Arapaho,
locates them about the junction of Jeffer-
son, Madison, and Gallatin forks, at the
extreme head of Missouri r., in the neigh-
borhood of the present Virginia City,
Mont. They afterward moved down from
the mountaiJos and formed an alliance with
the Crows, with whom they have since
continued on friendly terms. From here
they drifted southward along the base of
the mountains, driven by the Cheyenne
and Arapaho, with whom they finally
made peace about 1840, after which they
commonly acted in concert with the latter
tribes. The Sioux claim to have driven
them out of the Black hills, and in 1805
they were reported by Lewis and Clark as
living on the North Platte. According to
the Kiowa account, when they first
reached Arkansas r. they found their pas-
sage opposed by the Comanche, who
claimed all the country to the s. A war
followed, but peace was finally concluded,
when the Kiowa cro^^ed over to thes. side
of the Arkansas and formed a confedera-
tion with the Comanche, which continues
to the present day. In connection with
the Comanche they carried on a constant
war upon the frontier settlements of Mex-
ico and Texas, extending their incursions
as far s. , at least, as Durango. Among all
the prairie tribes they were noted as the
most predatory and bloodthirsty, and
have probably killed more white men in
proportion to their numbers than any of
the others. They made their first treaty
with the Government in 1837, and were
put on their present reservation jointly
with the Comanche and Kiowa Apache in
1868. Their last outbreak was in 1874-75
in connection with the Comanche, Kiowa
Apache, and Cheyenne. While probably
ikb.
KIOWA WOMAN.
(sou,
..)
never very numerous, they have been
greatly reduced by war and disease.
Their last terrible blow came in the
spring of 1892, when measles and fever
destroyed more than 300 of the three
confederated tribes.
The Kiowa do not have the gentile sys-
tem, and there is no restriction as to inter-
marriage among the divisions, of which
they have six, including the Kiowa
Apache associated with them, who form
a component part of the Kiowa camp
circle. A seventh division, the Kuato, ia
700
KIOWA
[b. a. b.
now extinct. The tribal divijions in the
order of the camp circle, from the en-
trance at the E. southward, are Kata,
Kogui, Kaigwu, Kingep, Semat (i. e.,
Apache), and Kongtalyui.
Although brave and warlike, the Kiowa
are considered inferior in most respects
to the Comanche. In person they are
dark and heavily built, forming a marked
6LEEPINQ WOLF AND WIFE — KIOWA
contrast to the more slender and brighter
complexioned prairie tribes farther x.
Their language is full of nasal and chok-
ing sounds and is not well adapted to
rhythmic composition. Their present
fhief is Gui-piigo, * Ijone Wolf,' but
his title is disputed byiipiatan. They
occupied the same reservation with the
CJomanche and Kiowa Apache, between
Washita and Red rs., in s. w. Oklahoma;
but in 1901 their lands were allotted in
severalty and the remainder opened toset-
tlement. Pop. 1,165 in 1905. Consult.
Moonev, Ghost-dance Religion, 14th
Rep. B. A. E., pt. I, 1896, and Calendar
History of the Kiowa, 17th Rep. B. A. E.,
gt. I, 1898. (j. M.)
B'shntohi.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B.A.E.,1078,
1896 (Kiowa Apache name). Caniaguas.— Escu-
dero, NoticiasNuevo Mexico, 87, 1849. Oahifuas. —
Ibid., 83. Cai-a-was.— U.K. Rep. 299,44th Ck)ng.,lst
8688., 1, 1876. Oaigua.— Spanish doc. of 1735 cited
in Rep. Columb. Hist. Expos. Madrid, 328, 1895.
Oaigoarat.— Fimentel, Cuadro Descr., ii, 347, 1865
(given as Comanche division ) . Oaihuai.— Doc. of
1828 in Bol. Soc. Geog. Mex., 265. 1870. Oaiwas.—
Amer. Pioneer, i, 257, 1842. Oargoa.— Spanish
doc. of 1732 cited in Rep. Columb. Hist. Expos.
Madrid, 323, 1895 (for Caigua) . Oayanwa.— Lewis,
Travels, 15, 1809 (for Cayauwa). Oay-au-wa.—
Orig. Jour. Ivcwis and Clark, vi, 100, 1905. Cay-
au-wah.— Ibid. Oaycuai.— Barreiro, Ojeada sobre
Nuevo Mex.. app., 10, 1832. Oayguas.— Villa
Sefior, Teatro Amer., pt. 2. 413, 1748 (common
Spanish form, written also Cay giias). Oasrohuas.—
Bandelier in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and Archseol.,
HI, 43, 1892. Gayugai.— Sen. Rep. 18, 3l8t Cong.,
Ist sess., 186, 1850 (lor Cayguas). Giawit.— H. R.
Rep. 299, 44th Cong., Istsess.. 1,1876. Dat&mpa'U.-^
Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 148, 1898 (Hi-
datsa name, nerhaps a form of Witap&h&tu or
Witapatu ). Gahe'wa.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A.
E., 10!78, 1896 (Wichita and Kichai name). OiM-
rwil.— Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 148, 1898.
&ai'wa.— La Flesche cited in 17th Rep. B. A. E.,
148, 1898 (Omaha and Ponca name). Chiaias.—
Texas State archives, Nov. 15, 1785 (probably mis-
print of Caiguas). Kaiawas.— Gallatin in Trans.
Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, 20, 1848. Ka'igwii.— Mooney
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1078, 1896 ('principal people*^:
proper tribal name). Kaiowan. — Hodge, MS. Pue-
blo notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Sandia name). Kai-6-
wa«.— Whipple in Pac. R. R.Rep.,lii, pt. 1, 31, 1856.
Kaiowe.— Gatschet cited in 6th Rep. B. A. E.,
xxxiv, 1888. Kai-wa.— Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A.
E.,148, 1898 (Comanche name; also Kai-w&, 14th
Rep. B. A. E., 1078, 1896) . Kai-wane'.— Hodge, MS.
Pueblo notes, B. A. E., 1895 (^Picuris name).
Eawa.— La Flesche, inf'n. (Omaha name). Ka-
wa«.— Sen. Doc. 72, 20th Cong., 2d sess., 104, 1829.
Kayaguaa.— Bent (1846) in H. R. Doc. 76, 30th
Cong.. 1st sess., 11, 1848. Kayawayt.— Pike,
Exped., app., in, 73, 1810. Kayowa.--Gat8chet,
Kaw MS., B. A. E., 1878 (Kansa and Tonkawa
name). K£yowe'. — Gatsehet in Am. Antiquarian,
IV, 281, 1881. Kayowfl.— Grayson, Creek MS., B. A.
E.,1885 (Creek name) . Xayugaas.— Bent (1846) in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tnbes. i, 244, 1851. Ka'yuwa.—
Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1882 (Kansa
name). Keawat.— Porter (1829) in Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, in, 596, 1853. Eeaways.— Famham,
Travels, 29, 1843. Ki'-a-w&.— Lewis and Clark,
Discoveries, 37, 1806. Kiawas.— P^nicaut (1719)
in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s,, i, 153, 1869.
Kiawayt.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., n.
cvii, 1848. Ki-e-wah.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and
Clark, 1, 190, 1904. Kinawas.— Gallatin in Trans.
Am. Antiq. Soc., Ii, 133, 1836 (misprint). Kini-
wa«.— Wilkes, U. S. Expl. Exped., iv, 473, 1846
(misprint). Kiohicant.— Philippeaux, Map of
Engl. Col., 1781 (possibly the same; this ana the
3 forms following are evidently from the early
French form Quiouaha, etc. ) . Kiohuan.— Anville,
Map of N. A., 1752. Kiohuhahans.— Jefferys, Am.
Atlas, map 5, 1776. Kiouahaa.— Gravier (1700)
(luoted by Shea. Early Voy., 149, 1861 (possibly
identical). Kiovas.— Mollhausen, Jour, to the
KIOWA MOTHER AND CHILD. ( RUSSELL, PHOTO.)
Pacific, 1, 158, 1858 (misprint) . Kiowahs.— Davis,
El Gringo, 17, 1857. Kioway.— Ind. AfT. Rep., 240,
1834 (official geographic form; pron. Kai'-o-wa).
Kiowayt. — Brackenridge, Views of La., 80, 1814.
Kiwaa.— Kendall, Santa F6 Exped., i, 198, 1844
(given as pronunciation of Caygua). Ko'mpabi'-
anta.— Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 149, 1898
(' large tipi flaps': name sometimes used by the
Kiowa). Kompa'go.— Ibid, (abbreviated form of
Ko'mpabi'ftnta). Knyawas. — Sage, Scenes in
Rocky Mts., 167. 1846. Kwft'da.— Mooney in 14th
Rep. B. A. £., 1078, 1896 ( < going out' : old name for
themselves). Kyawayi.— Pike (1807), Exped.,
app. II, 16, 1810. kanrhoat.'La Salle (ca. 1680) in
BULL. 30]
KIOWA APACHE
701
Margry, D6c., ii, 201, 1877 (mentioned with Gat-
tacka, or Kiowa Apache; believed bv Mooney to
be perhaps the Kiowa) . Manrhout.— La Salle ( ca.
1680), ibid., 168. Mayoahc— Coxe, Carolana,
map, 1741. Ka'la'ni.— Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E.,
149, 1898 ('many aliens': collective Navaho
name for southern plains tribes, particularly the
C!omanche and Kiowa). Ne-ci'-ne-ncn-a.— Hav-
den,Ethnog. and Philol.Mo. Val.,326, 1862. Hi'-
chihinS'na.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1078,
1896 ('river men': Arapaho name). Nitohihi.—
Gatschetin Am. Antiq..iv, 281, 1881. Oways.— Hil-
dreth, Dragoon Campaigns, 162, 1836 (probable
. misprint of Kio ways). Quichuan.— LaHarpe(1719)
in Margry, D6c., vi, 278, 1886 (probably identical:
c=o). Qttiohohouans.— Baudry des Lozi<^res, Voy.
k la Le., 244, 1802. auiouaha.— Joutel (1687) in
Margry. D<^c., in, 409, 1878. Quiouahan.— Iber-
ville, ibid. , IV, 464, 1880. Riana.— Kenned v, Texas,
I, 189, 1841 (misprint). Ryawas.— Morse, Rep. to
Sec. War, app., 367, 1822 (misprint). Ryuwas.—
Brackenridge, Views of La., 85, 1814 (misprint).
Shish-i-nu'-wut-tsit'-a-ni-o. — Hayden, Ethnog.
andPhilol.Mo.Val.,290, 1862 (improperly given
as the Cheyenne name and rendered ' rattlesnake
people': Shrshln6atsltii'neo, 'snake people,'
KIOWA MAN AND WIFE ( SANTA FE Railway
is the Cheyenne name for the Comanche).
Te'pdl'.— Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 149, 1898
(* coming out': ancient name used to designate
themselves; may have been substituted for Kwu'-
*da). Tepk'i'najpo.— Ibid, ('people coming out': an-
other form of Te'pdft). Tideing Indians.— Orig.
Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 190, 1904. Vi'tapatu'i.—
Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 149, 1898 ( name used
by the Sutaya Cheyenne). Watahpahata.— Mal-
lery in 4th Rep. B. A. E., 109, 1886. Wate-pana-
toes.— Brackenridge, Views of La., 85, 1814 (mis-
print). Watepaneto.— Drake, Bk. of Inds., xii,
1848 (misprint). WeU-hato.— Lewis, Travels, 15,
1809 (misprint). Wetapahato.— Lewis and Clark,
Exped., 1. 34, map, 1814. We-te-pi-hi'-to.— Lewis
and Clark, Travels, 36, 1806. Wetopahato.— Mallery
in 4th Rep. B. A. E., 109, 1886. Wettephato.—
Morse, Rep. to Sec. War., app., 366, 1822. Wi'-
ta-pa-ba.— Riggs-Dorsey, Dakota-Eng. Diet., 679,
1890. WiUpa'hat.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A.
E.. 1078. 1^ (Cheyenne form of Witapah&'tu).
Wi'tapaia'ttt.— Ibid, ('island butte people': Da-
kota name^ . Witapa'tu.— Ibid . (Cheyenne form ) .
Wittp'ata.- Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E. , 160, 1898.
Wi-tup-a'-tu.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val., 290, 1862 (Cheyenne name for Kiowa; incor-
rectly given as their name for the Comanche).
Kiowa Apache. A small Athapascan
tribe, associated with the Kiowa from
the earliest traditional period and form-
ing a component part of the Kiowa tribal
circle, although preserving its distinct
language. They call themselves Na-i-
shan-dina, 'our people'. In the earliest
French records of the 17th century, in
I^wis and Clark's narrative, and in their
first treaty in 1837, tliey are called by va-
rious forms of * Gattacka ^ the name by
whicli they are known to the Pawnee;
and they are possibly the Kaskaia, *Bad
Hearts', of Long in 1820. The Kiowa call
them by the contemptuous title Semat,
' Thieves', a recent substitute for the older
generic term Tagiii, applied also to other
Athapascan tribes. They are commonly
known as Kiowa Apache, imder the mis-
taken impression, arising from the fact of
their Athapascan affinity, that they are a
detached band of the Apache of Arizona.
On the contrary, they have never had any
political connection with the Apache
proper, and were probably unaware of
their existence until about a century ago.
A few Mescalero Apache from New Mex-
ico are now living with them, and indi-
viduals of the two tribes frequently ex-
change visib*, but this friendly intimacy
is of only 60 or 80 years' standing. The
Kiowa Apache did not emigrate from
the 8. W. into the plains country, but
came with the Kiowa from theN. w.
plains region, where they lay the scene
of their oldest traditions. It is probable
that the Kiowa Apache, like the cognate
Sarsi, have come down along the e. base
of the Rocky mts. from the great Atha-
pascan body of the Mackenzie r. basin
mstead of along the chain of the sierras,
and that, finding themselves too weak to
stand alone, they took refuge witli the
Kiowa, as the Sarsi have done with the
Blackfeet. As they are practically a part
of the Kiowa in everything but language,
they need no extended separate notice.
Their authentic history begins nearly 70
years earlier than that of the Kiowa, they
being first mentioned under the name
Gattacka by La Salle in 1681 or 1682, writ-
ing from a post in what is now Illinois.
He says that the Pana ( Pawnee) live more
than 200 leagues to the w. on one of the
tributaries of the Mississippi, and are
"neighbors and alHes of the Gattacka
and Manrhoat, who are s. of their vil-
lage and who sell to them horses which
they probably steal from the Spaniards
in New Mexico." It is therefore plain
that the Kiowa Apache (and formerly
also the Kiowa) ranged even at this early
period in the same general region where
they were known more than a century
later, namely, between the Platte and the
frontier of New Mexico, and that they al-
ready had horses taken from the Spanish
702
KIOWA APACHE
[B.A.B.
settlements. It appears also that they were
then in friendship with the Pawnee, un-
less, as seems more probable, by Pana
is meant the Ankara, an offshoot of the
Pawnee proper and old trading friends of
the Kiowa and the Kiowa Apache. From
the fact that they traded horses to other
tri})es, and that La Salle proposed to sup-
ply himself from them or their neighbors,
it is not impossible that they sometimes
visited the French post on Peoria lake.
In 1719 La Harpe speaks of them, under
the name of Quataciuois, as living in con-
ne(»tion with the Tawakoni and other
affiliated tribes in a Ullage on the Cimar-
ron near its junction with the Arkansas,
in the present Creek Nation, Okla. In
1805 Lewis and Clark described the
Kiowa Apache as living between the
PAtER ("r-tSij ■!, A KkOWA *fACHf CMlEF
heads of the two forks of Cheyenne r. in
the Black-hills region of n. e. Wyoming,
and numbering 300 in 25 tipis. The
Kiowa then lived on the North Platte,
and both tribes had the same alliances
and general customs. They were rich in
horses, which they sold to the Arikara
and Mandan. In 1837, in connection
with the Kiowa and Tawakoni, the Kiowa
Apache (under the name Kataka) made
their first treaty with the Government.
Their subsequent history is that of the
Kiowa. In 1853 they are mentioned as
a warlike band ranging the waters of
Canadian r. in the same great plains oc-
cupied by the Comanche, with whom
they often joined in raiding expeditions.
By the treaty of Little Arkansas in 1865
they were detached at their own request
from the Kiowa and attached to the Chey-
enne and Arapaho on account of the un-
friendly attitude of the Kiowa toward the
whites; but the arrangement had no prac-
tical force, and in the treaty of Medicine
Lodge, in 1867, they were formally re-
unitied with the Kiowa, although a part of
them continued to live with the Chey-
enne and Arapaho until after the read-
justment at the close of the outbreak of
1874-75. In keeping with the general
conduct of the tribe they remained peace-
able and friendly throughout these
troubles. In 1891 their population was
325; together with the Kiowa they suf-
fered terribly in 1892 from an epidemic
of measles and fever, losing more than
one-fourth of their number. In 1905
they numbered only 155. (j. m.)
Apaches.— Fitzpat rick in Ind. Aff. Rep., 52, 1860.
Apaches of Arkansas Biver.— Whitfield in Ind. Aff.
Rep. , 2&5. 1855. Apaches of the Plains.— Pope ( 1854)
in Pac. R. R. Surv., ii, 17. 1855. Bad-hearts.— Lonff,
Kxped., II, 103, 1823. Cahata.— Lewis and Clark,
Jour., 28, 1840 (misprint). Oanoey.— This name in
its various forms is the Caddo designation for
the Apache of the plains, including the Kiowa
Apache; it was usually applied, however, to the
Lipan (q. v.). Oantajes.— Mota-Padilla, Hist, de
la Conquista, 382, 1742. Gataha.— Lewis, Trav., 15,
1809. Ga'tak&.— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 38, 1806.
Oattako.— Ibid., 23. Guttako.— Am. State Papers,
Ind. Aff., 1,710, 1832. E^wiU.— Mooney in 17th
Rep. B. A. E.. 245. 1898. Essaqueto.— Ind. Aff.
Rep., 175,1875. Essequeta.— Mooney in 17th Rep.
B. A. E., 245, 1898 (sometimes but improperly ap-
Slied). Gantsi.— Gatschet, Caddo MS., B. A. £.,
>, 1884 ('liars' : Caddo name). Oataea.— La Salle
(1682) in Margry, D6c., li, 168, 1877. Oataka.— Har-
ris, Coll. Voy. , I, map, 685, 1705. O^ta'ka.- Mooney
in 17th Rep. B. A. £., 245, 1898 (Pawnee name).
Oattacka.— La Salle (1682) in Margry, Dte., ii, 201,
1877. CHna's.— Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 246l
1898 (Wichita name). Gfl'ta'k,—LaFleMche quoted
by Mooney, ibid. (Omaha and Ponca name).
Haka.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 101, 1905
(given, with a query, as a Canadian French nick-
name). K^ntsi.— Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E.,
245, 1898 ('liars': Caddo name for all Apache of
the plains). Ka-natop.— Ibid, (•knife-whetters':
Kiowa name). Kareses.- McKenney and Hall,
Ind. Tribes, in, 81. 1854 (misprint). Kaskaiaa.—
Long, Exped^ii.lOl, 1823 ('bad hearts', possibly
identical). Kaskaya. — Amer. Pioneer, ii, 189,
1843. Kaskia.— Drake, Bk. of Inds., yiii, 1848.
Ka-U-kas.- Ind. Aff. Rep., 527, 1837. Katoxka.—
Gatschet, inf n (Pawnee name). Kattekas.— P4-
nicaut (1719) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., 1, 163,
note, 1869. Kiowa Apaches.— Clark, Ind. Sign
Lang., 33, 1885. msfnihls.- Mooney in 17th Rep.
B. A. E., 245, 1898 (Kichai name). Mataget.-
Bancroft, N. Mex. States, i, 640, 1886 (misprint).
MfltsfiUOi-tanfa.— Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E.,
245, 1898 ('whetstone people': Cheyenne name).
Kadeioha.— Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c., iii, 409,
1878 (possibly identical) . Kadlisha-d6ia.— Mooney
in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 245, 1898 ( ' our people ' : own
name). Aa-i-shan-dina. — Moonev, infn, 1904.
Ka-ishi Apache.— Gatschet quoted by Powell in
6th Rep. B. A. E., XXXV, 1888. Kardiohia.— Joutel
(1687) in Margry, D4c., in, 409, 1878 (possibly
identical). Hatafe.— Carets (1775) quoted by
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 850, 1864. Katagees.— Mota-
Padilla, Hist, de la ConquLsta.516, 1742. Natages.-
Sanchez (1757) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., i 93, 1856.
Katajefis.— Rivera, Diario y Derrotero, leg. 950,
1736. Nat«es.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, in, 595,
1882. Natale.— 18th century doc. quoted by
Bancroft, ibid., 594. Facer band of Apaohes.—
H. R. Ex. Doc. 43, 42d Cong., Sd sess., 8,
1872. Prairie Apaches.— Whitfield in Ind. Aff.
Rep., 298, 1854. auataquois.- La Harpe (1719) in
Margry, ©6c., vi, 289, 1886. atataquon.— Beau-
BULL. 30]
KIOWAN FAMILY K18HKAKON
703
rain, ibid., note. R£d«l«6mte-k'fiigo.— Mooncy in
17th Rep. B. A. E., 245, 1898 ('weasel people':
Kiowa name). Semiit.— Ibid, ('thieves': Kiowa
name). T&'rng^la.— Hodge, Pueblo MS. notes,
1895 (Jemez name for Ai>ache tribes, includinK
Kiowa Apache). Tagdi.— Mooney in 17th Rep.
B. A. E., 245. 1898 (an old Kiowa name). Tign-
ksriih.— Hodge quoted by Mooney, ibid. (Pecos
name for all Apache). Tashia.— Mooney, ibid.
(Ck)manche name for all Apache). Tha'kit-
hinX'na.— Mooney, ibid., 245 ('saw-fiddle men':
Arapaho name). Tha'kiitan. — Ibid. (Arapaho
variant) . Yabipais Natage.— Garc^^s ( 1776) , Diary,
452, 1900. Tavipais-KatiJ^— Gare^ (1776) quoted
by Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, pt. 1, 114,
Kiowan Family. A linguistic group fi ret
identified as a distinct stock Y)y Albert
Gallatin in 1853^ but formally placed in
the list of families by Powell (7th Rep.
B. A. E., 84, 1891). The name is from
Kiowa (q. v. ), that of the only tribe in-
cluded in the family.
=Kiaway».— Gallatin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
III, 402, 1853. =Kioway.— Turner in Pao. R. R.
Rep., III. pt. 3, 55, 80, 1856 (l>a8ed on the Kioway, or
Calgua.tribe only ) ; Bus(>hmann, Spuren der aztck.
Sprache, 432, 433, 1859; Latham, Elem. Comp.
Pnilol., 444, 1862 ("more Paduca than aught
else"). ^Kiyowe.— Gatschet in Am. Antiq , 2«0,
Oct. 1882.
Kipana. A fonner pueblo of the Tanos,
H. of the hamlet of Tejon, lat. :^° 20^ San-
doval CO., N. Mex. It was inhabited in
1598 when visited by Oilate, and prob-
ably as late as 1700.
Ouipaaa.— Columbas Memorial Vol.. livS, 1893
(misprint). Ki-pa-na.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst.
Papers, iii, 125, 1890. Ki-pan-na.— Bandelier. ibid..
IV, 109, 1892. Quipana.— Dilate (1698) in Dm*.
In6d., XVI, 114, 1871.
Kipaya towns ( also called ' * Red towns, ' '
"War towns**). A group of former
Creek towns, governed by warriors only,
and so called in contradistinction to the
Tdiua-mikagi^ or jxjace towns. The fol-
lowing were said to l)elong to this division :
Kawita, Tukalmtchi, Hlaphlako, Atasi,
Kailaidshi, Chiaha, Osotchi, Ilotalihu-
yana, Alibamu, Kufaula, Hillabi, and
Kitchopataki. \k. h. «.)
Ke-pau-yau.— Hawkins (1799). Sketch, 52, 1848.
Xipksra towns. —Gatschet, Creek Mi^r. Ix>g., i,
121, 18»1. Red (towns).— Ibid.
Kipniak. A Magemiut Eskimo village
at the mouth of the s. arm of Yukon r.,
Alaska.
Kip-na£-ftk.— Dall quoted by Baker, Gcog. Diet.
Alaska, 1902. Kipniaguk.— Petroff in 10th Census,
Alaska, map, 18JU. Kipniak.— Baker, (feog. Diet.
Alaska, 1902. Kipniak.— Dall in Cont. N. A.
Bthnol., I, map, 1877. Kramalit.— Rink, Eskimo
Tribes, 33, 1887. Kripniyukamiut.— Coast Surv.
chart cited by Baker, op. cit.
Kiriilikitsn. A Wichita subtribe.—
J. O. Dorsey, infn, 1881.
Kirokokhoche {KV-ro-ko^-oo-tcej * red-
dish black bear cub * ) . A su ogens of the
Tunanpin gens of the Iowa. — Dorsey in
15th Rep. B. A. E., 238, 1897.
Xisakobi (Hopi: Madder- town place').
A former pueblo of the Hopi people of
Walpi, at the n. w. base of the East mesa
of Tusayan, n. e. Ariz. It was ap-
parently occupied during the mission pe-
riod ( 1629-1680) , then abandoned and the
present pueblo of Walpi built. The ruins
of the Franciscan mission here are called
Nushaki by the Hopi, probably from the
Spanish ytiiWy *mass,' and the Hopi hi,
* house.* 8ee Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A.
E., 580, 1901, and articles cite<l below.
Kisakobi.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 21, 1891.
Ki»akovi.— Fewkesin Am. Anthrop., vii, 395, 1894.
Kiicaki.— IbM. Niishaki.— Fewkes in 17th Rep.
B. A. E., 678, 585, 1898. Old Walpi.— Ibid., 586.
Kishakoqnilla Two Delaware villages,
taking their name from a chief, formerly
existing in Pennsylvania. The first was
about the present Kishacoquillas, Mifflin
CO. ; the other, which seems to have l)een
the chief's later residence, was on French
cr., about 7 m. IhjIow Meadville, Craw-
ford CO.
Kithakoquilla.— Alden (1834) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 3d s., VI, 152. 1837 (in Crawford co. ). Kiihe-
quechkela.— Lattr^.Map. 1784(in Huntingdon co.).
Kishgagass ( * place of ancestor Ga-
gass' ). A Kitksan division and town on
Babine r., an e trilmtarv of the »Skeena,
Brit. Col.; pop. 241 in 1904.
Kis-ge-gas.— Can. Ind. AfT., 415, 1898. Kisgegos.-
Can. Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. 2, 78, 1905. Ki«-go-ga«.—
Ibid., 431, 189t). Kith-ga-gass.— Dorsey in Am.
Antiq., xix, 278. 1897. Kishgahgahs.- Brit. Col.
map, 1872. Kithke-gas.— Can. Ind. AIT., 272, 1889.
Kiskagahs.— Tolmie and Dawson. VcK'abs. Brit.
Col.. 114b. 1S81. Kitagarrase.— Horetzky, Canada
on Pacific, 212. 1874. Kiss-ge-gaas.— ('an. Ind.
Aff., 2.52, 1891 . Kit-ka-gas.- Dawson in Geol. Surv.
C^n., 20b, 1879-80. Kitsagas.— Scott in Ind. Aff.
Rep. 1869, 5t>3. 1870. Kits-ge-goos.— Can. Ind. Aff.,
358, 1895. Kits-go-gase.- Ibid., 280, 1894.
Kiahi. The Panther clan of the Caddo. —
:Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. K., 1098, 1896.
Kishkakon ( Chippie wa: kishkij 'cut'
(past participle); ano, from ««ow«, *tail
to have,' especially a bushy tail; hence,
'those who have cut tails,' referring to
the naturallv short tail of the bear. —
Hewitt). The Bear gens or band of the
Ottawa, usually found associated with
two other bands, the Sinago or Black
S<iuirrel, and the Keinouche or Pike. In
1658 the Kishkakon were allied witli
al>out 500 Christian Tionontati Hurons,
who occupied contiguous territory, and
they were neighbors of the Potawatomi,
who at this time occupied the islands at
the outlet of (ireen bay and the mainland
to the southward along the w. shores of
L. Michigan. Father Allouez found these
three bands occupying a single village at
I^ Pointe du Saint Pi«prit, near the pres-
ent Bayfield, Wis., in 1668. For three
years the Kishkakon refuse<l to receive
the gospel announced to them by Father
Allouez; but in the autumn of 1688 they
resolved in council to accept the teaching
of the Christian doctrine. The Kishka-
kon, having been invited to winter near
the chapel at La Pointe du Saint Esprit,
left the other bands to draw near the mis-
sion house. Marquette found them di-
vided into five ''bourgades." In 1677
they were with the Hurons at Macki-
naw, Mich., where in 1736 they had 180
warriors and about 200 in the vicinity of
Detroit. They appear to have been more
704
KI8HKALLEN KITAHON
[B. A. B.
closely affiliated with the Sinago and the
Keinouche than with the other Ottawa
bands. For their history and customs,
see Ottawa, (j. n. b. h.)
Cul»-coup6i.— Doc. of 1698 in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist..
IX, 683, 1^55. Keaoaoons.— York (1700), ibid., iv.
749, 1864. Kichaoneialc^Jes. Rel. 1672-3, LVn.
210, 1899. Kiohaoueiak.— Shea, Cath. Miss.,
358, 1865. Kichkagroneiak.^Jes. Rel. 1648, 62, 1868.
Kiohkankoueiak.— Ibid. . 1668, 22, 1868. Kiokakons.—
Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist.de rAm6r.,ii,
64, 1753 (misprint). Kisoacones.— De Bougain-
ville (1767) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 608,
1868. Kiscacons.— Vaudreuil conf. (1703), ibid.,
IX, 754, 1865. Kisoakons.— Du Chesneau (1681),
ibid., 161. Kisoakous.— McKenney and Hall,
Ind. Tribes, in, 82, 1858. Kishkako.— Kelton,
Ft Mackinac, 15, 1884. Kiskaooueiak.— Jes. Rel.
1658. 21, 1868. Kiskakonk.— Ibid., 1670, 87, 1858.
Ki«kakon«.— Du Chesneau (1681), op. cit, ix, 164,
1855. Kiskakoumao.^Jes. Rel. 1667, 17. 1858.
Kiskakoiins.— Cadillac (1702) in Margry, D6c.,v,
276, 1883. Ki8kokaii8.~Chauvignerie (1736) in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 654, 1853. Queoues
coupes.— J es. Rel. 1669, 19, ia')8. Queues ooup^.—
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 161, note, 1855 (^ench
name).
Kishkallen. A former Chehalis village
on the N. shore of Grays harbor, Wash.—
Gibbs, MS., B. A. K, No. 248.
Kishkat. A Wichita subtribe. — J. 0.
Dorsey, inf n, 1881.
Kishkawbawee (Kishkabawdj probably
* broken by water.' — W. Jones). A
former Chippewa village on Flint r., in
lower Michigan (Saginaw treaty, 1820, in
U. S. Ind. Treat, 141, 1873). The reser-
vation was sold in 1837.
Kishpachlaots {Gyi^exWots, * people of
the place of the fruit of the cornus* ). A
Tsimshian division and town formerly
at Metlakatla, Brit. Col. The people
have now removed to Port Simpson.
Gpaughette*.— Howard, Notes on Northern Tribes
visited in 1854, MS. , B. A. E. Gyispaqli'ots.— Boas
in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 35, 1889.
ajriftptxl^^'oto.— Boas in Zeitschr. fur Ethnol., 232,
1888. Ki8oh-p&ch-l&-6u.— Krause. Tlinl^it Ind..
317, 1885. Kithpochaloto.— Brit. Ck)l. map, 1872.
Kithpokalants.— -Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 281,
1897. Kis-pa-oha-laidy.— Kane, Wand, in N. Am.,
app., 1859. Kispaohlohts.— Gibbs in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., 1, 143, 1877. KiUpukaloats.— Tolmie and
Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. Kyspyoz.—
Horetzky, Canada on the Pacific, 212, 1874.
Kishpiyeonx (* place of ancestor Pi-
yeoux*). A Kitksan division and town
at the junction of Kishpiyeux and Skeena
rs., Brit. Col. According to Boas there
were two clans there, I&ven and Bear.
Pop. 216 in 1904.
Oyiipayo'ko.— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can-
ada, 50, 1896. Kish-pi-yeoux.— Dorsey in Am.
Antiq., XIX, 278, 1897. Kispaioohs.— Tolmie and
Dawson. Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. Kispiaz.—
Can. Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. 2, 73, 1905. Ki«h-pi-youx.—
Jackson, Alaska, 300, 1880. Kispyaths.— Downie
in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc., xxxi, 253, 1861. Ki«-
pyox.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocalxs. Brit. Col.,
map, 1884. Kitspayuohs.— Scott in Ind. AfT. Rep.
1869, 563. 1870. Kito-piouae.— Can. Ind. Aflf.. 358,
1895. Kits-piooz.— Ibid., 369, 1897. KiU-piox.—
Ibid.. 416, 1898. Kits-psronks.— Ibid., 304, 1^3.
Kishqra. The extinct Reindeer (?) clan
of Cochiti pueblo, N. Mex.
Kishqra-hanuoh.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 351,
1896 {h&nueh = ' people ').
Kiskatoxnas. See Kiskiiomas.
Kiski. A small division of the Maidu
formerly residing on lower Sacramento
r., Cal., probably within the limits of
Sacramento co.
Kishey.— Bancroft. Nat. Races, i, 451,1874. Kiski.—
Latham in Proc. Philol. Soc. Lond., vi, 79,1862-53.
Kis Kies.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860.
Kisky.— Hale, Ethnol. and Philol., vi, 631, 1846.
Kiskiminetas ('plenty of walnuts.* —
Hewitt). A former Delaware village on
thes. side of lower Kiskiminetas cr., near
its mouth, in Westmoreland co., Pa. Cf.
Kiskominitoes.
Oiesohgumanito.— Heckewelder in Trans. Am.
Philos. Soc n. s., iv, 371,1834 (given as meaning
* make day light*, ' cause it to become day light * ).
Kishkemanetas.— Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 20, 1776.
KishkiminitaH. — Koyce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., Pa.
map, 1899. Kiskaminetas.—Hecke welder, op. cit.
Eiskemamtas.— Ibid. Kiskemeneco.— Post (1758)
in Rupp, West Pa., app., 104, 1846.
Kiskitomas. A name for the walnut or
hickory nut, formerly common in New
Jersey and Long Island. The word has
been variously spelled kisky thomas, kis-
katomas, kiskylom^ ciiscatomiitf etc. The Ca-
nadian French name is noj/er tendre ( 'soft-
nut' ), referring to the shell of the nut; and
J. H. Trumbull suggests connecting the
word with the Aonaki koitskadanien,
* crack with the teeth * (given by Rasle),
cognate with the Chippewa kishkibidon^
* tear with the,teeth,* the Cree kiskisikateWy
*it is cut or gnawed.' The terras kh*<ky
thomas and kUky thomnnt are folk-ety-
mological corruptions of this Algonquian
word. (a. f. c. )
Kiskominitoes ('plenty of walnuts.' —
Hewitt). A fonner Delaware village on
the N. bank of Ohio r., in Ohio, between
Hocking and Scioto rs. The word seems
to be identical with Kiskemeneco and
Kiskiminetas (q. v.) in Pennsylvania.
On Lattr^'s map "Kiskowanitas" is lo-
cated on thes. E. side of Maumee r., Ohio.
KiskominltoeB.— Esnauts and Rapilly. map, 1777.
KiBkonmitos. — La Tour, map, 1782. Kiskowani-
tas.— Lattr6, map, 1784.
Kisky thomas, Kisky thomnnt, Kiskytom.
See Kiskitomas.
Kispokotha. One of the 5 divisions ex-
isting among the Shawnee, without ref-
erence to their gentes. See Big Jim.
Big Jim^B Band.— Common oflBcial name. Ke-spi-
co-tha.— W. H. Shawnee in Gulf States Hist.
Mag., I, 417, 1903. Kickapoo.— McKenney and
Hall, Ind. Tribes, in. Ill, 1854 (not the Kickapoo).
KiBcapocoke.— Johnston (1819) in Bri n ton, Lena pe
Leg., 30, 1885. Kiscopokes.— Drake, Tecumseh. 69,
1856. KiBkapocoke— Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, app.,
97, 1822. Kispogogi.— Gatschet, Shawnee MS.,
B. A. E., 1879. Ki-Bpo-ko-tha.— W. H. Shawnee,
op. cit., 416.
Kisthemnwelgit. An old Niska town
on the N. side of Nass r., Brit. Col., near
its mouth, and numbering about 50 in-
habitants. There is some question about
the correctness of the name. See Kitan-
gata.
iCis-themu-welgit.— Dorsey in Am. Antiq., Xix, 279,
1897.
Kitahon. A former Niska village on
Nass r., Brit. Col., a few miles from tide-
water.
Kit-a-hon.— Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859.
Kitawn.— Horetzky, Canada on the Pacific, 182,
1874.
BULL. 30]
KITAIX KITCHIG AMI
705
Xitaix. A Niska village near the mouth
of Nass r., Brit. Col. ; pop. 28 in 1903, the
last time it was separately enumerated.
In 1904 the combmed strength of the
Kitaix and Andeguale people was 80.
Oitlelu. Swanton. field notes. 1900-01. Kit-aix.—
Doney in Am. Antioy xix. 279, 1897. Kitex.— Can.
Ind.Aff., 416, 1896. KitUx.— Ibid., 2S0. 1894. Kit-
tak.— Ibid., 251, 1891. Kit-tek.— Ibid., 360, 1897.
Xitten.~Ibid., 1903, pt 2, 72, 1904. Xit-tex.— Ibid.,
482,1896.
Kitak. A former Aleut village on
Agatta id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Xitamat A northern Kwakiutl tribe
living on Douglas channel, Brit. Col., and
speaking the Heiltsuk dialect. They
are divided into the Beaver, Eagle, Wolf,
Salmon, Raven, and Killer-whale clans.
Pop. 279 in 1904.
GyiVam&'t.— Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 9.
1888 (Chimmesyan name). Hai-shi-la.— Dawson
in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can.; sec. ii, 65, 1887. Hai-
shilla.— Tolmfe and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col.,
117b, 1884. Hyihalla.— Scouler (1846) in Jour.
Etbnol. Soc. Lond., 233, 1848. Set a Mats.— Colyer
in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 534, 1870. Kitamah.— Can.
Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. 2. 70, 1905. Kitamaht.— Brit.
Col. map, 1872. jUtamat— Tolmie and Dawson,
op. ciU Bitanatt— Can. Ind. AfF., 244, 1890.
Stimat— Ibid., pt 2, 162, 1901. Kit to maat.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 487, 1855. Kitto-
narks.— Downie in Mayne, Brit. Col., app., 452,
1862. Kit-to-mnat.— Kane. Wand, in N. Am.,
app., 1859 (erroneously included under theChim-
mesyan Sabaasa) . Kittimat.— Fleming, Can. Pac.
E. R. Rep. Prog., 188, 1877. Kittumarks.— Horetzky,
Can. on Paciflc, 212, 1874. QaiaU'.— Boas, 6th Rep.
N. W. Tribes Can., 62, 1890. Xa-isla'.— Boas in
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 328, 1897 (own name).
Kitami ( KUa/mi, * porcupine ' ) . A sub-
phratry or gens or the Menominee. —
Hoffman in 14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. i, 42,
1896.
Xitangata. A Niska town on Nass r.
or inlet, Brit Col.; pop. 30 in 1903, the
last time the name appears. Probably
identical with either Lakungida or Kis-
themuwelgit.
Kitaagato.— Can. Ind. Aff., pt. ii, 68, 1902. Kitan-
gataa— Ibid., 416, 1898.
Kitanmaikih. An old town and d i vision
of the Kitksan just above the junction of
Skeena and Bulklev rs., Brit. Col. The
new town is now called Hazelton and has
become a place of some importance, as it
stands at the head of navigation on the
Skeena. Pop. 241 in 1904.
Oetpaa-max.-Can. Ind. Aff., 415, 1898. Oit-an-
max.— Ibld.,252,1891. Oit-au-max.— Ibid.. 304. 1893.
Oyit'amn&'lrrB.— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 60, 1895. Kit-an-maiksh.— Dorsey in Am.
Antiq., XIX, 278, 1897. Kitiaahs.— Tolmie and
Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884.
Kitehawank (perhaps akin to Chippewa
KichMiivflnky * at the great mountain.' —
W. Jones). Apparently a band or small
tribe, or, as Ruttenber designates it, a
"chieftaincy" of the W&ppinger con-
federacy, formerly residing on the e.
bank of the Hudson in what is now
Westchester co., N. Y. Their territory
is believed to have extended from Croton
r. to Anthony's Nose. Their principal
village, Kitehawank, in 1650, appears
to have been about the mouth of the Cro-
Bull. 30-05 id
ton, though one authority (N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist, XIII, 14, 1881) locates it at Sleepy
Hollow. They also had a village at
Peekskill which thev called Sackhoes.
Their fort, or ** castle,'^* which stood at the
mouth of Croton r., lias been represented
as one of the mast formidable and ancient
of the Indian fortresses s. of the High-
lands. Its exact situation, according to
Ruttenl)er, was at the neck of Teller's,
called Senafsqua. The Kitehawank were
a party to the treaty of peace made with
the Dutch, Aug. 30, 1645. ( J. m. c. t. )
KechUwangh.— Stiiyvesant (1663) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., xiir, 300, 1881. Kichtowan.— Doc. of
1664, ibid., 364. Kiohtowanc— Treaty of 1643,
ibid., 14. KichUwanghs.— Treaty of 1645, Ibid.,
18. KichUwoM.— Treaty of 1643 In Winfield,
Hudson Co. , 45, 1 874. Kichtewangh.— Doc. of 1664
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiil, 371, 1881. Kichto-
wanghs.— Stuvvesant (1663). ibid., 300. Kiok-
tawanc— Treaty of 1643 in Ruttenber, Tribes Hud-
son R., 78, 1872. Kictewanc— Records (lt>43) in
Winfield, Hudson Co., 42. 1874. Kiahtewangh. —
Treaty of 1664 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Ifist., xiii. 375,
1881. Kightowaii.r-Records of 1690 in Ruttenber,
Tribes Hudson R.. 178, 1872. Kitchawanc— Treaty
of 1643, ibid., 110. Kitohawonok.— Ruttenber,
ibid., 79. KitchUwanghi.— Treaty of 1645, ibid.,
118.
Kitohigami (* great water,' from kitchi
'great,* garni * water,* the Chippewa name
for L. Superior). A tribe living in 1669-
70, about central or s. w. Wisconsin, with
the Kickapoo and Mascoutens, with which
tribes they were ethnically and linguis-
tically related. Little has been recorded
in relation to the Kitohigami, and after a
few brief notices of them, chiefly by
Fathers Allouez and Marquette, they
drop from history, having probably been
absorbed by the Slascoutens or the Kicka-
poo. The first mention of them is in a
letter written by Marquette, probably in
the spring of 1670 ( Jes. Rel. 1670, 90,1858),
in which he says: ** The Illinois are thirty
days* journey' by land from La Pointe,
the way being very difficult. They are
southwestward from La Point du Saint
Esprit. One passes by the nation of the
Kitchigamis, who compose more than 20
large lodges, and live in the interior.
After that the traveler passes through the
country of the Miamiouek [Miamij, and
traversing great deserts (prairies) he ar-
rives at tne country of the Illinois." It
appears from his statement that the^ were
at this time at war with the Illinois. In
the same Relation (p. 100) it is stated that
along Wisconsin r. are numerous other
nations; that 4 leagues from there "are
the Kickapoos and the Kitchigamis, who
speak the same language as the Mas-
coutens.** Tailhan, who is inclined to
associate them with the Illinois, says the
above statement is confirmed by the
inedited relation of P. Beschefer. As
neither Marquette nor Allouez speaks of
them when they reach the section in-
dicated, but mention the Kickapoo, Mas-
couten, and Illinois, and as it appears that
they had been at war with the Illinois, it
706
KITOHIGUMIWININIWUG — ^KITKADUSSHADE
[B. A. B.
is probable that the Kitchigami formed
a part of the Kickapoo or the Mascoutens
tribe. They are not noted on Marquette's
true map, but are located on Thevenot*8
so-called Marc^uette map, under the name
Kithigami, as immediately w. of the Mis-
sissippi, opposite the mouth of Wiscon-
sin r. The lact that they drop so suddenly
and entirely from history would indicate
that they l)ecame known under some
other name. (c t.)
Eetoh^amins.— Perrot (1718-20), M^moire, 221,
1864. tetohigamin«.— Jes. Rel.. index. 1858. Kete-
higamins.— Ibid., 1670, 90, 1858. Kisohigamins.—
Jes. Rel. 1683, Thwaite's ed., lxii, 193, 1900.
Kitohigamich.^Tes. Rcl. 1670, 100, 1858. Kitchi-
Emiok.— Shea in Wis. Hist. Coll., in, 131. 1857.
thigami.— Thevenot quoted by Shea, Discov.
Miss., 268, 18V2.
Kitohigamiwininiwiig ( * men of the great
lake'). A collective term for those
Chippewa formerly living on and near
the snores of I^ke Superior, in Michigan,
Wisconsin, and Minnesota. Bvthe treaty
of Lapointe in 1854 the ban^s officially
recognized as '*Chippewas of Lake Supe-
rior'* were declared to be those living at
Fond du J>ac (Minnesota), La Pointe, Lac
du Flambeau, Lac Court Oreilles (Wis-
consin), Desert lake, L'Anse, Ontonj^on,
Grand Portage, and Bois Forte (Michi-
gan). Their history, except as regards
treaty relations with the United States, is
the same as that of the southern Chippewa
(see Chippewa) . By the treaty of Fond
du Lac, Minn., Aug. 2, 1847, they joined
the Chippewa of the Mississippi m re-
linquishmg their claim to a trai!t of land
al)out the mouth of Crow Wing r., Minn.
By treaty of Lapointe, Wis., Sept. 3,
1854, they ceded all their lands in upper
Michigan and n. Wisconsin, the United
States agreeing to reserve for the use of
each of said bandsaspecifiecl tract within
the ceded area. By act of June 5, 1872,
the Secretary of the Interior was au-
thorized to remove, with their consent,
the bands from Lac du Flambeau, Lac
Court d* Oreilles, and Fond du Lac res. to
Bad River res., but this removal was not
carried into effect, the Indians refusing
permission. By Executive Order oi
Mar. 1, 1873, the reservation in Wiscon-
sin selected for the Lac Court Oreilles
band was approved. By order of Dec.
20, 1881, a reservation at Vermillion
Lake, Minn., was set aside for the Bois
Forte band. The Executive order of
June 30, 1883, set apart the Deer Creek
res., Minn., for the same band. By
agreements of Oct. 24, Nov. 12, and Nov.
21, 1889, the Grand Portage, Bois Forte,
and Fond du Lac bands ceded such of
their lands at Red Lake, Fond du Lac,
Bois Forte, and Deer Creek, as were not
needed for allotment In 1867 they were
officiallv reported to number about 5,560;
in 1880,* 2,813; in 1905, 4,703.
(j. M. C. T.)
Ohippewaa of Lake Superior .—Lapointe treaty
(18M) in U. S. Ind. Treat., 223, 1873. Keohe-
gomme-winine-wug. — Ramsey in Ind. A£E. Rep., 84,
IS.'iO. K^^kim^ Wlniniwlk.— Long. Exped. St.
Peter's R., ii, 153, 1824. KitehiganSwiiiimwak.—
Gatschet, Ojibwa MS.. B. A. E.. 1882. Kiteig^-
wininiwag.— Wm. Jones, inf n, 1906.
KitohisibiwiiLiiiiwiig ( ' men of the great
river,' from kiichi * great*, sibiw * river',
ininhmig *men'). A collective term for
theClrippewa living on the upper Missis-
sippi, in N. E. Minnesota, s. e. of Leech
lake. Their principal l)ands were Misi-
sagakaniwininiwak at Sandy lake, Kah-
metahwungaguma at Mille lac, the Rabbit
I^ke band at Rabbit lake, and the Gull
Lake band at Gull lake. (j. m.)
Ke-che-ee-be-win-in-e-wug. — Warren (1852) in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 39, 1885. Ke-che-ie>be-
win-o-wing.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 86. 1850.
Kitohiubi-wininiwak.— Gatschet.OjibwaMS..B.A.
E., 1882. Kitoiubiwininiwag. — Wm. Jones, inf n,
1906. Mississippi bands. — Lapointe treaty (pro-
Kitohopataki (kilchu * a block of wood to
pound grain', pcUAki 'spreading out' ). A
former Upper Creek town, n. e. of Hillabi
town, on a small affluent of upper Talla-
poosa r., Randolph co., Ala. It had 48
families in 1882.
Hitch 0 par tar ga.— Census of 1832 in Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, iv, 578. lS.->4. Kitcho-pataki.— Gat-
schet. Creek Migr. Leg., i, 135, l«84.
Kitchopataki. A town of the Creek
Nation on the point at the junction of
Deep and Nortn forks of Canadian r.,
Okla. — Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii,
185, 1888.
Kitchupatiki.— Gatschet, ibid.
Kitegarent (* dwellers on reindeer
mountains*). A tril)e of P^kimo E. of
Mackenzie r. on Anderson r. and at C.
Bathurst, Can. They are the most east-
erly tribe wearing labrets. Their country
is known as a source of stone utenpils.
Anderson's River Esquimaux. — Hind, Labrador, IIj
259. 1863. Kitiga'ru.— Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A.
E.. 46, 1892. Kitte-rii-re-ut— Richardson, Arct.
Exped..i, 362, 1851. Kitte-garroB-oot.— Richardson
in Franklin, Second Exped., 174, 1828. Et-te-
ga'-ru. — Simpson quoted by Murdoch in 9th Rep.
B. A. E.. 48. 1892. Kpagmalit.— Petltot ouoted by
Murdoch, ibid. K/iagmaliveit— Ibid. s^tLgmur
iv&t— Petitot in Bib. Ling, et Ethnog. Am., xi,
11. 1876 ( ='the real Kragmalif). ^amaUt)—
Rink, Eskimo Tribes. dH, 1887. Kpavanaptat.—
Petitot in Bib. Ling, et Ethnog. Am., xi, 11, 1876
( = ' easterners' ). Kpoteyop^ut— Ibid.
Kithateen. A Chimmesyan division on
Nass r., Brit. Col. — Kane, Wand, in N. A.,
app., 1850.
Kithathratts. Given by Downie (Jour.
Roy. Geog. Soc, xxxi, 253, 1861) as a
Chimmesyan village on the headwaters of
Skeena r., Brit. Col., in the territory of
the Kitksan; not identifiable with any
present Kitksan town.
Kitingnjang. A summer settlement of
the Kingnaitmiut Eskimo at the head
of Kingnait fjord, Cumberland sd. — Boas
in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888.
Kitkadnsshade. According to Krause
(Tlinkitlndianer, 304, 1885), the name of
a branch of the Haida. Unidentified.
BULL. 30]
KITKAHTA KITLOPE
707
Xitkahta ('people of the poles'; so
called from their salmon weirs). A
Tsimshian di\'ision and town on Doug-
las channel, n. w. coast of British Colum-
bia. Although formerly a large town, its
inhabitants are said by Boas to have l)een
subject to the chief of the Kitwilgioks, to
whom they paid tribute. Pop. 79 in 1904.
Oyite&'ata.— Boa.Min 5th Rep. N. W.Tribes Canada,
9,1889. Hartley Bay.— Can. Ind. Aff. 1904, pt. 2,
70, 1906. Kil-cah-U.— Kane, Wand, in N. A., app.,
1889. Bitha-ato.— Can. Ind. AIT., 271, 1889. Kitka-
ata.~Ibid., 432, 1896. Kitkada.— Tolmie and Daw-
son, Vocabfl. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. KitkKt.—
Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 318, 1885. Kitkaht.— Brit.
Col. map. Victoria, 1872. Kit-kahte.— Dorsey in
Am. Antiq., :cix, 280. 1897. Kit-kata.— Scott in
Ind. Aff. Rep., 316, 1868.
Kitkatla ( * people of the sea * ) . ^ A lead-
ing Tsimshian division and towii on Por-
cher id., n. w. coast of British Columbia;
pop. 225 in 1902, 208 in 1904.
Oyitqa'tla.— Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada,
9,1889. Keek heat la.— Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes,
V, 487. 1855. Keet-heat-la.— Kane. Wand, in N. A.,
app., 1859. Keethratlah.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 279,
im, KiUtela.— Scott in Ind. Aff. Rep., 312, 18(W.
Xitoathla.—MohuninCan. Ind. AfT., 153,1881. Kit-
ohatUh.— Scouler(1846)inJour.Ethnol.8oc.Lond.,
1,283,1848. KithatU.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vo-
cabe. Brit. Col., 114B, 18W. Kithkatia.— Can. Ind.
Aflr., 251, 1891. Kitkathla.— Brit. Col. map, Victo-
ria, 1872. KitkaUa.— Can. Ind. AfT.. 432, 1896. Kit-
khall-ah.— Howard, Notes on Northern Tribes
visited in 1854, MS., B. A. £. Kit-khatia.— Dor-
sey in Am. Antiq.. Xix, 280, 1897. Kitoonitza.—
Tolmie and Dawson^ocabs. Brit. Col., 115b. 1884
(Kwakiutl name). KittriUohli.— Krause. Tlinkit
Ind., 818, 1885. Sibapa.— Howanl, Notes on North-
em Tribes visited in 1854. MS.. B. A. E. (probably
the name of the chief, Djebaaa).
Kitkehahki (*on a hill.'— Grinnell).
One of the triln^s of the Pawnee confed-
eracy (q. V. ), HonietimeH called Republican
Pawnee, as their villajjes were at one time
on Republican r. Their villages were
always w. of those of the Chaui, or up
stream, and were spoken of as the up-
per villages. The tribe lived with its
kindred on Ix)up r., Nel)r., where their
reservation was t^stablished in 1857. In
1875 they were removed to Oklahoma,
where they now dwell. In 1892 they
took their lands in severalty and l)ecame
citizens of the United States. In tribal
oi]^anization, customs, and l)eliefs the
Kitkehahki did not differ from their
congeners. Grinnell (Pawnee Hero Sto-
ries, 241, 1889) mentions three divisions,
the Great Kitkehahki, Little Kitke-
hahki, and Blackhead Kitkehahki.
(a. c. f.)
Kattahawkeet.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 213, 1A61. Eet^ka-
kMh.— Long. Exped. Rocky Mta., ii. Ixxxv, 1823.
Kit'-kfi.— Monran, Syst. Ck)n8an. and Affin.. 286,
1S71. Kitkaha'ki.-<3atschet.MS.,B.A.E. Sitka-
hoets.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 618, 1878.
Bit'-ke-hak-L— Dunbarin Maar. Am. Hist., iv, 246,
1880. Mltah^wiye.— Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab..
B. A. E., 1882 (Kansa name). Panea Republioaas^-—
Lewis. Travels. 18, 1809. Pania R«publican.— Sib-
ley, Hist. Sketches, 62, 1806. Panias r^ublicaiiis.—
Gass, Voj., 417, 1810. Panias R«pubhoan.— Lewis
and Clark, Discov., 17, 1806. Paais R«publlcan.—
Lewis and Clark, Travels, 14. 1807. Paunee R«pub-
liot.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 117, 19th Cong., Ist sess., 7,
1826. Pawnee repnbUe.— Pike, Travels, 190, 1811.
Pawnee Rep«UieaB.^Irvlng, Indian Sketches, ii,
13, 1835. Pawnees republic— Pike, Exped., 143.
1810. Republic— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 18. 1806.
Republican Pawnees.— Lewis and Clark, Exped.,
I, 33, 1814. Republicans.— Ind. Aff. Rep.. 95. 1840.
Rejgublick. — Ong. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 87,
190.> (name given by traders). R^ubliques.— Dii
Lac, Voy. dans les Louisianes, 22.5. 1806. Ze-ka-
ka.— Long. Exped. Rocky Mts., ii, Ixxxv, 1828.
Zika hakisi".— Dorsi'y, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1882 ( Kansa name). Zizika £ki^8i«>'.— La Flesche
quoted by Dorsey in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., vi, 397.
1892 (Omaha name). Ziz£ka-£kis£.— Sanssouci
quoted, ibid. (Omaha name).
Kitksan (*pi»ople of Skeena [Ksian]
river'). One of the three dialectic divi-
sions of the Chimniesyan stock, affiliate<l
more closely with the Niska than with the
Tsimshian proi)er. The people speakinj?
the dialect live along the upi>er waters of
Skeena r., Brit. Col. Dorsey enumerates
the following towns: Kauldaw, Kishga-
gans, Kishpiyeoux, Kitanmaiksh, Kitwin-
gach, Kitwinskole, and Kitzegnkla. To
these must 1h^ added the modern mis-
sion town of Meamskinisht. A division
is known as the Glen-Vowell Band. Pop.
1,120 in 1904.
Oyikshan.— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
50, 1895. Oyitksa'n.— Boas i ii 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can.. 8, 1889. Oyitkshan.— Boas in 10th Rep. ibid.,
50. 1895. Kikaan.— J.O. Dorsey in Am. Antiq., XIX,
277. 1897. Kit-ih-shian.— Tolmie and Dawson,
Vocabs. Brit. Col.. 114b. 1884. Kitksa'n.— Dorsey
in Am. Antiq., xix, 277. 1897. Kit-ksum.— Can.
Ind. Aflf.. 369, 1897. Kit-ksun.— Tan. Ind. Aff.. 358.
1895.
Kitlakaon8( 'people on the sandy point' ).
A former Niska vilfege on Na.s8* r., Brit.
Col., near its mouth. It was entirely
abandone<i in 1885. — Dorsey in Am.
Antiq., xix, 279, 1897.
Kitlakdamix. A division and town of
the Niska cm Nass r., Brit. Col., al)OUt 25
m. from tidewater; pop. 169 in 1898, 126
in 1904.
Gyit'laqda'mikc— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 49, 1895. Kilawalaks.- Tolmie and Dawson.
V(M'abs. Brit. Col., map, 1884. Kin-a-roa-lax.—
Kane. Wand, in N. A., app.. 18,59. Kin-a-wa-laz.-
Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes v. 487, 1855. Kinne-
woolun.— Brit. Col. map, 1872. Kitlacdamaz.—
Can. Ind. Aff. 1904. pt. 2, 69, 1905. KiUaoh-damak.—
Can. Ind. Aff.. 271. 1889. Kitlaoh-damaz.— Ibid..
416, 1898. Kit-lak-damix.— Dorsey in Am. Anti<i.,
XIX, 280, 1897. Kitlatamox.— Horetzky. Canada
on Pacific, 128. 1874.
Kitlani {GyitUVn, * people who paddle
8tc»Tn first ' ) . A former Tsnnshian division
and town near Metlakatla, n. w. coast of
British Columbia; now at Port Simpson.
Gyitli'n.— Boas in ZiMt.»«t'hr. fur Ethnol., 232, 1888.
Kletlane.— Kane. Wand, in N. A., app.. 1869. Kit-
Ian.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b,
1884. Kitiani.— Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 281,
1897. Xitlan Kilwilpeyot.- Brit. Col. map of Ind.
Tribes, Victoria, 1872. Kittl«an.— Krause, Tlinkit
Ind., 318, 1885.
Kitlope (Tsimshian: 'people of the
roeks*). A Kwakiutl tribe living on
Gardiner channel, Brit. Col.; pop. 84 in
1901, 71 in 1904.
(H'manoitx. — Boas In Rep. Nat. Mas. 1895, 328,
1897. Gyimanoitq.— Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 9, 1889. Oyitlo'p. — Ibid. Keimanoeitoh.—
Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 117b,
1884. KiUoop.— Brit. Col. map, 1872. Kitlop.—
Tolmie and Dawson, op. cit. Kit-lope.— Kane,
Wand, in N. A., app.. 1859 (wrongly classed as
Sabassa). Zittiope.-<?an. Ind. Aff., 315, 1892.
708
KITRAUAIIKS KITTTNAHAN
[ B. A. B.
Xanilu'iftlA.^Boafl in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 328,
1897 (own name).
Kitranaiiks (KUraijL-^i-iks), Given by
Krause (Tlinkit Ind., 318, 1885) aa a divi-
sion of the Tsimshian on Skeena r., Brit.
Col., and southward; they are not now
identifiable.'
Kitsalthlal ( Gijidzaxtla% ' people of the
salmon-berries ' ) . A Tsimshian division
and town on the coast of British Co-
lumbia, between Nass and Skeena rs.,
probably near Metlakatla.
Gyidz*xtl»'tl.— Boas in Zeitschr. fiir Ethnol., 23l>,
1888. Kitch-a-clalth.— Kane, Wand, in N. A. , app. ,
1859. Kitohe kla la.— Howard, Notes on Northern
Tribes visited in 1854, MS.. B. A. E. Kito-ach-li-
al'ch. — Krause, Tlinkit Ind.. 317. 1885. KitM«t-
tala.— Downie in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soc, xxxi, 263,
1861. Kitsalthlal.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs.
Brit. Col., 114B, 1884.
Kitsanaka. Given by Dawson (Queen
Charlotte Ids., 134, 1880) as the name of
one of four Haida clans, the word being
supposed to signify *'crow/* As there
are only two Haida clans, the Raven
(Hoya) and the Eagle (Got), and the
word for crow is kfdldjiday it is evident
that Dawson misunderstood his inform-
ant, (j. R. 8.)
Kittamaquindi (properly KiUamaqaeink,
*place of the old great beaver.' — Hewitt).
The principal village of the Conoy (Pis-
cataway) in Maryland in 1639. In that
year the Jesuits established there a mis-
sion, which was removed in 1642 to Po-
topaco on account of the inroads of the
Conestoga and their allies. According
to Brinton the villacie was at the junction
of Tinkers cr. with the Piscataway, a
few miles above the Potomac, in Prince
George co. (j. m. )
Kittamaque-ink.— Brinton, Lenape Leg., 27, 1885
(proper form) . Kittamaquindi.— Writer of 1639 in
White, Relatio Itineris, 63, 1874. Xittamaqundi.—
White, ibid., 127, note.
Kittaxming ( *on the great stream', from
Icitj * large, superior'; hanne, * stream';
ing, the locative). An important village
of mixed Iroquois, Delaware, and Caugh-
nawaga, formerly about the site of the
present Kittanning, on Allegheny r., in
Armstrong co.. Pa. It was destroyed by
the Pennsylvanians in 1756 after a des-
perate fight. It seems to have consisted
of two or tliree settlements. The most
important, called Upper Kittanning, was
on the E. side of the river. Middle Kit-
tanning was on the w. bank. ( j. m. )
Adigie.— Guy Park eonf. (1776) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., VIII, 657, 1857. Adigo.— Johnson Hall eonf.
(1766), ibid., VII, 728, 1866 (perhaps the Iroquois
name). Atiga.— Bellin, map, 1775. Attign^.—
C;<iloron (1749) in Margry, D6c., vi, 685. 1886.
Attigua. — Bellin, map, 1755 (marl^ed as if distinct
from Atiga). Attique.— C^loron, op. cit. Gantan-
yaiu.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 126, 1816 (used
for the inhabitants}. Oattanyan.— Smith (1799)
in Drake, Trag. Wild., 263. 1841. Kattaning.— Har-
ris, Tour, map, 1805. Kitaxming.— Pa. Gazette
(1756) quoted in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., iv,
298, 1834. Kithaxmink.— Heckewelder in Trans.
Am. Philos. Soc.. n. s., nr, 368, 1834. Kittaniog.—
Johnson Hall eonf ., op. cit. Kittanniiig.— Croghan
(?), ca. 1756, in Rupp, West. Pa., 116, l546. Kittao-
nei.— Lattr6, map, 1784.
Kitteanmut. A village of Christian In-
dians in the s. part of Plymouth co.,
Mass., near Monument Ponds, in 1674,
perhaps under the dominion of the Wam-
panoag. See Cotton ( 1674 ) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 1st 8., 1,199,1806.
Kittisoo. The southernmost division
and town of the Tnimshian, on the s. side
of Swindle id., n. w. of Millbanksd., Brit.
Col. The town is now almost deserted.
Gyideadro'.— Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
9. 1889. Ketyagoos.— Colver in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869,
634,1870. Kitestues.— Brit. Col. map, Victoria, 1872.
Kitistzoo.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col.,
114b, 1884. Kit-tiat-zu.— Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Eth-
nol., 1. 143.1877. Kit-tizoo.— Dorsey in Am. Antiq.,
XIX, 280, 1897. Kityagoos.— vScottin Ind. Aff. Rep.,
316, 1868. Whiaklaleitoh.— Tolmie and Dawson,
Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884 ('people across the
sea': Heiltsuk name).
Kittsawat. A Ntlakyapanuik village
near Lytton, Brit. Col., with 4 inhabitants
in 1897 (Can. Ind. Aff. Rep. ), the last time
the name appears.
Kituhwa (Kituhwd). A former impor-
tant Cherokee settlement on Tuckasegee
r., and extending from alcove the junc-
tion of the Oconaluftee nearly to the
present Bryson City, Swain co., X. C.
The name, which appears also as Ket-
tooah, Kittoa, Kittowa, etc., has lost its
meaning. The people of this and the
subordinate settlements on the waters of
the Tuckasegee were known as Anf-KIt-
lihwagl, and the name was frequently ex-
tended to include the whole tribe. For
this reason it was adopted in later times
as the name of the Cherokee secret or-
ganization, commonly known to the
whites as the Ketoowah society, pledged
to the defence of Cherokee autonomy. —
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 525, 1*900.
Kautika.— Doc. of 1799 quoted by Royce in 5th
Rep. B. A. E.. 144, 1887. Kettooah.— Mooney, op.
cit. Kittoa.— Ibid. Kittowa.— Doc. of 1755 quoted
by Royce, op. cit.. 143.
Kitnitsach-hade. A name given by
Krause (Tlinkit Indianer, 304, 1885) to a
supposed branch of the Haida on Queen
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. Unidentified.
Kitnnahan Family. A linguistic family
established by Powell (7th Rep. B. A. E.,
85, 1891) to include the single Kutenai
tribe (q. v. ). The name is adopted from
Hale's term, Kitunaha, applied to the
tribe. This familv has since been found
to consist of two tribes with slightly differ-
ing dialects, viz., the Upper Kutenai and
the Lower Kutenai, theformer beingprop-
erly the Kitonii^qa, the latter the Aqkoqtr-
atlqo. Certain other minor differences
exist between these two sections. The
following family synonyms are chrono-
logic, (a. F. c.)
=Kitunaha.— Hale in U. 8. Expl. Exped., vi, 204,
5S5, 1846 (between the forks of the Columbia);
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc.. n, pt. 1, c. 10,
77, 1848 (Flatbow); Berghaus (1851), Physik. Atlas,
map 17, 1852: Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc.
Lond., 70, 1856; Latham. Opuscula, 338. 1860;
Latham, Elem. Comp. Philol., 395, 1862 (between
lat. 52° and 48°, w. of main ridge of Rocky mts.);
BULL. 30]
KITUNTO KITZILA8
709
Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist. 170, 1877 (on Kootenay
r.).=Ooutanie».— HaleinU.S.Expl.Exped.,vi,204,
1846 (=Kitunaha). =Kutani«.— lAtham, Nat. Hist.
Man, 816, 1860 ( Kitunaha) . =Kitaanaha. —Gallatin
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii,402, 1853(Coutaria
or Flatbows, N. of lat. 49°). =Kootaniei.— Busch-
mann, Spuren der aztek. Sprache, 661, 1859.
=Ktttaiii.— Latham, Elem.CX)nip. Philol.,395, 1862
(or Kitunaha). =Cootaiiie.— Latham, ibid. (synon-
ymous with Kitunaha). = Kootenai. —(latschet in
Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 18/7 (defines area occupied);
Gatschet in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 446, 1877; Ban-
croft, Nat. Races, in, 665, 1882. =Kooteiiuha.— Tol-
mie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs. Brit. Col., 79-87,
1884 (vocabulary of Upper Kootenuha). =Flat-
bow.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 204, 1846
(-=Kltunaha): Gallatin in Trans. Am.Ethnol.Soc.,
II, pt. 1 , 10,77, 1848 ( after Hale ) ; Buschmann , Spuren
der aztek. Sprache, 661, 1859; Latham, Elem.
Ck)mp. Philol., 395, 1862 (or Kitunaha); Gatschet
in Mag. Am. Hist., 170, 1877. =Flaohbogen.— Berg-
haus (1861), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 18,>2. xShush-
waps.— Keane in Stanford Ctompend. (Cent, and
So. Am.), app., 460, 474, 1878 (includes Kootenais
Flatbows or Skalzi). =Kituxiahan.— Powell in 7th
Rep. B. A. E., 85, 1891.
Kitnnto (GyiVeiiM, * people of the stock-
aded town')*. A Tsinishian division and
town formerly near the mouth of Skeena
r., Brit. Col. The jxiople were related to
the Kishpai^hlaots.
Gyit'Endi.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can-
ada, 36, 1889. Ket-an-dou.— Kane, Wand, in N. A.,
app., 18B9. Kitadah.— Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix,
281, 1897. Kit, an, doh.— Howard, Notes on North-
ern Tribes visited in 1854, MS., B. A. K. Kitt-
aado.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 318, 1885. Kitunto.—
Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884.
Kitwilgioks (Gyitu-ulgyd^ts, 'people of
the camping i)laee*). A Tsinishian di-
vision in the neighborhoo<l of the mouth
of Skeena r., Brit. Col. Their chief out-
ranked all other Tsimshian chiefs.
Oyitwulgyi'to.— Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Canada, 86, 1889. KitwUgioka.— Tolmie and Daw-
son, Vocabs. Brit. Cof, 114b, 1S84. Kit-wiU-
coits.— Kane, Wand in N. A., app., 1859. KitwiU
?iuoit».— Howard, Notes on Northern Tribes\isited
n 1854, MS., B. A. E. Kit-wulg-jats.— Krause,
Tlinkit Ind., 317, 1885.
Kitwilksheba ( GyitivtUki^ba^) . A Tsim-
shian division in the neighborhood of
Metlakatla and the mouth of Skeena r.,
Brit. Col. In 1884 it was almost extinct.
Oyitwulkteba'.— Boas in Zeitschr. f iir Ethnol., 232,
1888. Ket-wilk-ci-pa.— Kane, Wand, in N. A., app.,
1869. Kitwilksheba.— Tolmie and Dawson. Vocabs.
Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. Kit. wiU,«u, pat.— Howard,
Notes on Northern Tribes visited in 18M, MS.,
B. A. E. Kit-wulkie-be.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 318,
1885.
Kitwingach ( * people of place of plenty
of rabi)it8 ') . A division and town of the
Kitksan on the n. bank of Skeena r.,
Brit. Col., just above the rapids; pop. 154
in 1904.
Oyitwung-i'.— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. TribesCan-
ada, 60, 1896. Kilgonwah.— Brit. Col. map, Vic-
toria, 1872. KitcooMa.— Downie in Jour. Roy.
Geog.Soi'., XXXI, 253, 1861. KitswinmOit.— Scott in
Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1869, 663, 1870. Kit-wang-agh.—
Can. Ind. Aff., 415, 1898. Kitwanear.— Horetzky,
Canada on the Pacific, 212, 1874. Kit-win-gach.—
Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix, 279, 1897. Kitwunga.-
Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884.
Kitwiiuhilk (* people of the place of
lizards'). A Niska town on the middle
course of Nass r., n. w. British Columbia.
According to Boas there were four divi-
sions: Laktiaktl, Lakloukst, Gyitsaek,
and Gyisgahast. The first of these be-
longed to the Wolf clan, the second and
third to the Eagle clan, and the fourth to
the Bear clan. Pop. 77 in 1898, 62 in
1904
Gyitwimkse'tlk.— Boas in lOth Rep. N. W. Tribes
Canada, 49, 1895. Ke toon ok tholk.— Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, v, 487, 1855. Kitwanshelt.— Horetzky,
Canada on the Pacific, 129, 1874. Kit-win-«hUk.—
Dorse V in Am. Antiq., xix. 280, 1897. Kitwint-
•hieth*— Can. Ind. Aff., 271, 18H9. Kitwintshilth.—
Ibid., 416, 1898.
Kitwinskole ( ' people where the narrows
pass ' ) . A Kitksan division and town on
a w. branch of upper Skeena r., Brit. Col.;
pop. 67 in 19()4.
Gyitwuntlkoa.— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Canada, 49. 1895. KitswiMcoldi.— Scott in Ind.
Aff. Rep. 1869. 563, 1870. Kitwancole.— Horetzky,
Canada on the Pacific, 116, 1H74. Kit-wan-cool.—
Can. Ind. Aff.. 415, 1898. Kit-wan Cool.— Ibid., 252,
1891. Kit-win-«kole.— Dorsey in Am. Antiq., xix,
279, 1H97. Kit-wun-kool.— Dawson in Geol. Surv.
of Can., 20b, 1879-80.
Kitzeesh (dyidzVuy 'people of the
salmon weir'). A Tsimshian division
and town formerly near Metlakatla, Brit.
Col. According to the Haida, this family
was descended from a woman of their tribe.
Gittoi'8.— Swan ton. field notes, 1900-01. Oyid-
zi'B.— Boas in Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., 232, 1888.
Kee-ches.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 487, 1855.
Kee-chis.- Kane. Wand, in N. A., app., 18.59.
Keshase.— Howard, Notes on Northern Tribes
visited in 1854, MS.. B. A. E. Kitseosh.- Brit. Col.
map, Victoria, 1872. Kito-a»oh.— Kranse. Tlinkit
Ind., 318, 1885. Kittis.- Tolmie and Dawson,
Vocabs. Brit. Col., 114b, 1884. Kitzeesh.— Dorsey
in Am. Antiq.. xix, 281, 1897.
Kitzegukla ('i)eopleof Zekukla moun-
tain'). A Kitksan division and town on
upper Skeena r., a short distance l)el(>w
llazelton, Brit. ('ol. There is an old and
also a new town of this name. Accord-
ing to Boas there were two clans here,
Raven and Bear, the people of the latter
being called si)ecifically (JyisgiVhast.
Pop. of l)oth, 91 in 1904.
GyitaieyuOctla.— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Canada. 50, 1895. KitMguecla.— Dawson in (ieol.
Surv. Canada, 20b, 1879-80. Kitoe-gukla.— Can.
Ind. Aff., 262, 1891. Kitsenelah.— Brit. Col. map,
Victoria. 1872. Kit-se-quahla.— Can. Ind. Aff.,
416, 1898. Kit-M-quak-la.— Ibid., 358, 1896. Kit-
sigeuhle.— Horetzky, Canada on Pacific, 11«, 1874.
Kitsiguchs.— Scott in Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1869. 563. 1870.
Kitsiguhli. — Tolmie and Dawson. Vocabs. Brit.
Col., 114b. 1884. Kito-«e-quec-la.— Can. Ind AIT.,
304,1893. Kitze-gukla.— Dorsey in Am.Antiq.,xix,
278, 1897.
Kitzilas ('people of the canyon', i. e.,
of Skeena r.). A Tsimshian division.
The two towns successively occupied by
them bore their name. The first, just
above the canyon of Skeena r., Brit. Col.,
has been abandoned, the people having
moved, mainly in 1893, to New Kitzilas,
just below the canvon. Pop. of the latter
town, 144 in 1902; *in 1904, together with
Port Essington and Kitzimgaylum, 191 .
Gyitg'ala'ser.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Canada, 9, 1889. Kisalas.— C^n. Ind. AflT., 416,
1898. Kltala«ka.— Downie in Jour. Roy. Geog.
Soc, XXXI, 252. 1861. Kitchu law.- Howard, Notes
on Northern Tribes visited in 18M. MS., B. A. E.
Kitsalas.— Scott in Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1869, 563. 1870.
Kit«ala««.— Can. Ind. Aff.. 262, 1891. Kitwilla«.—
Brit. Col. map, Victoria, 1872. Kit-se-lai-BO.—
Kane, Wand, in N. A., app.. 1859. KitMlaMir.—
Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 318, 1885. KitaellaM.— Hor-
710
KITZIMGAYLUM KIVA
[B. A. E.
etzky, Canada on Pacific, 212, 1874. Kit nlas.—
I>oraey in Am. Antiq. , xix , 279, 1897. Xit-iilau.—
Ibid., map.
Kitsimgayliim ('people on the upper
part of the river.* — Boas). A Tsimshian
division and town on the n. side of Skeena
r., Brit. Col., below the canyon. These
people were originally Tongas, of the
koliischan stock, who fled from Alaska
on account of continual wars, and settled
at this point. Jn course of time they
came to speak the Tsimshian language.
Pop. 69 in 1902; in 1904, together with
Port Essington and Kitzilas, 191.
Oyits'umralon.— Boas in 5th Rop. N. W. Tribes
Canada, 9, 35, 1889. Kee-chum-a-kai-lo.— Kane,
Wand, in N. A., app., 1859. Eee-ohum akarlo.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 487, 1855. Kitchem-
kalem.— Can. Ind. Afl., 271, 1889. Kitchimkale.—
Howard, Notes on Northern Tribes visited in
1854, MS., B. A. E. Kitsumkalem.— Can. Ind. Aff.,
416, 1898. Kitsumkalom.— Horetzky, Canada on
Pacific, 212, 1874. Kit-nm-gay-lum.— Dorsey in
Am. Antiq., XIX, 279, 1897.
Kinsta (KHu^sIa, 'where the trail
comes out* [?]). A former Haida town
on the N. w. coast of Moresby id., opposite
North id., Quetm Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.
It was owned by the Stustas. Possibly
the town given in John Work's list as
*' Lu-lan-na," with 20 houses and 296 in-
habitants in 183t)-40, included this place
and the neighboring town of Yaku. The
old people reineml)er 9 houses as having
stood here and 8 at Yaku. After the
|X)pulation of Kiusta had decreased con-
siderably, the remainder went to Kung, in
Naden harbor. (j. r. s.)
Kioo-sta.— Dawson, Queen Charlotte Ids., 162, 1880.
Kusta Haade.— Harrison in I*ro<!. and Trans. Roy.
Soc. Can., sec. ii, 125, 1895. Ky'iu'sf a.— Boas, 12th
Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 22, 1898.
Kiva. The Ilopi name of the sacred
ceremonial, af<st»mbly, and loungingcham-
ber, characteristic of ancient and modern
Pueblo settle-
ments of Ari-
zona and New
Mexico ami
the prehis-
toric pueblos
of Colorado
and Utah.
They were
first described
by the early
Spanish ex-
plorers of the
S. \y., who
designated
them esiufcui,
meaning *hot
rooms,* evi-
dently mistaking their chief use as that
of sweat-houses. One of the kivas at the
pueblo of Taos in 1540 is described by
Castafieda (14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896) as
containing *'12 pillars, 4 of which, in the
center, were as large as 2 men could reach
arouml," while **some that were seen
were large enough for a game of ball."
The kivas of the Rio (xrande villages
were described as " undei^ground, square
or round, with fine pillars," which is
largely true to-day. The early S^niards
also state that **the ^oung men lived in
the estufas," that *^if a man repudiated
his woman he has to go to the estufo,"
and that **it is forbidaen for women to
sleep in the estufas, or to enter these for
any purpose, except to give their hus-
bands or sons something to eat," which
is still the case save in the few instances
in which kivas are used by women's re-
ligious societies or where women are wit-
nesses of the ceremonies. "The kivas,"
says Castaileda, "iK^ong to the men,
NAMBE KIVA- Uroman. PHCro;
;i^>5*r
HOPI KIVA, 8HONGOPOVI. (v. MiNOELCFf)
while the houses In'long to the women."
Elsewhere he an^rts that the kivas be-
long to the whole village, meaning that
the^' are not the property of a single in-
<lividual or household.
The oldest fonn of kiva seems to have
been circular, and some of these are still
used in Rio (jrande pueblos, as Santo
Domingo, Santa Clara, and Nambe, al-
though in this st»ction, where Spanish in-
fluence was strongest, the i)ersistence of
this type might be least expected. At
Zuili and in the Hopi villages, on the
other hand, the kivas are rectangular, in
the latter wholly or i)artly underground
and usually
isolated,inthe
former partly
subterranean
and forming
part of the vil-
lage cluster.
Originally the
Zuili kivas
were in the
courtyards of
the villages,
but, probfubly
by reason of
Spanish re-
strictions,
their situation
was later
hidden among the dwellings, w^here they
are today. The number of kivas in a
pueblo varied with its size and the number
of the religious organizations using them.
Oraibi alone has 13 kivas, while some of
the smaller pueblos contain but one.
Those of the Hopi, which number 33, are
rectangular, ana are generally so built
that they are approximately on a n. and
BULL. 301
KIVEZAKU KLAHOSAHT
711
8. line, the exceptions probably l)eing duo
to the exigencies of the sites. ' This latter •
circumstance, however, is not permitted
to interfere with the subterranean or semi-
subterranean character of the kivas, for
so persistently is this feature preserved
that convenience of use is sacrificred for
sites that admit of ])artial excavation in
the rock or the sinking of the chamber
below the surface of the mesa summit.
Kivas contain few wall openings, and
these are very small. The chaml)erH are
invariably entered by means of a ladder
to the roof and another through a hatch-
way. The roof is supported by l)eams
covered with osiers or Wards and adol)e
mortar well tampiHl; the floors consist
usually of smooth sandstone slabs; the
walls, which are sometimes decorated
with symbolic paintings of directional
animals in directional colors, are wholly
or partly surrounde<l by a solid stone-
cappe<l adobe l)ench, and at one end, be-
hind the ladder, is a low platform or
dais. A shallow fire-pit occupies the cen-
ter of the floor, the hatchway being the
only means for the passage of the smoke.
At the end of some kivas, facing the lad-
der, is a small round hole in a stone or slab
of cotton woo<l — the sipapii or shijxijmlima
(the name varying wnth the language of
the tribes)— symlx)li zing the place of
origin and the tinal place of <leparturt^ of
the Pueblo j)eoj)les and the mcMlium of
communication with the Ijeings of the
underworld. When not in iL^e the .vjxtjm
is kept plugged. Behind this orilice an
altar, varying with the society and the
ceremony, is usually erected, and before
it a dry-i>ainting is sometimes made, and
numerous symTK)liir paraphernalia are
assembled in i)rescril)ed order. See .1 /^/r,
Ceremoiufj Pnehhs, Shrines.
Consult Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
III, IV, 1890-92; Cushing in 18th Rep.
B. A. E., 1890; Dorsey and Voth in Fieltl
Columbian Museum Pub., Anthrop. ser.,
Ill, VI, 1901-03; varioiLS papers by Fewkes
in the rei)ort**of the B. A. E., and in Am.
Anthrop. and Jour. Am. Folk-lore;
Hewett in Bull. 32, B. A. E., 190(); Min-
deleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 1891 ; Nordens-
kiold, Cliff-dwellers of the Mesa Verde,
1893; Mrs Stevenson in lltli and 23d Reps.
B. A. E., 1894 and 1905; Winship in 14th
Rep. B. A. E., 1896. (f. w. h. )
Kivezakn. A band, apparently of Yuman
stock, formerly inhabiting the lower Rio
Colorado valley in the present Arizona or
California, and who were "conquered,
absorbed, or driven out" by the Mohave,
according to the tradition of the latter.
Xive-sa-ku. — Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ii.
186, 1889.
Kivitnng. Asettlementof Akudnirmiut
Eskimo on Padli fjord, Baffin land.
aivitung.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., 441, 1888.
Kivnallnak. A Kevalingamiut village
near Pt Hope, Alaska.
Kivualinagmut.— ZuKOskin, Dese. Russ. Poss. Am.,
pt. I, 74. 1847.
Kiyahani. An Apache clan or band at
San Carlos and Ft Apache, Ariz., in 1881.
Ki-ya-hanni.— Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
118, 1890. Ki-ya-jani.— Ibid., Ill (trans, 'alkali').
Kiyis ( Ki^yii^y * dried meat * ) . A division
of thePiegali tribe of the Siksika. — Grin-
nell, Blackfoot l^xlge Tales, 209, 225, 1892.
Kiyuksa ('breakers,* so called l)ecause
the members broke tlie marriage law by
taking wives within prohibited degrees of
kinship). A band of the Mdewakan-
ton Sioux which lived in 1811, according
to Pike, in a village on upper Jowa r.,
under chief Wabasha (Minn. Hist. Coll.,
II, 17, 18()0) ; in 1820 they were on Missis-
sippi r., above Prairie du Chien (Drake,
Bk. Inds., bk. viii, 1848). I^mg, in 1824,
placed them in two villages, oneon lowar.
neartheMississippi,theotheron L.Pepin.
Their chief village was iVinoiia, on the site
of Winona, Minn., in 1858, and the other
was where Wabasha is now.
Bounding-Wind.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 144.note,185S
i English for Tatepsin, the name of the chief),
leoxa.— I>onK, Exped. St. Peter's R., I, 383, 1824.
Ki-gu-k«a.— vSmithson. Mise. Col., xiv, 7. 1878. Ki-
yu-iba.— Ramsey in In(l.Aff.Rep.,81,1850. Kiyuk-
•an.— Williamson in Minn. Geof. Rep. for 1884, 112.
La Feuille's band.— I^mg in Minn. Hist. Coll.. ii, 24,
1860. Ta-te.p»in.— Neill, Hist. Minn.,144. note, 1858.
Wabasha's band.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 90, 22d Cong., Ist
sess., 64, 18:^2. Wabashaw band.— Ind. Aff. Rep.,
282, 1854. Wabashaw's sub-band of Mede-wakan-
t'wans.— Ramsev in Ind. Aff. Rep., 81, 1850.
Wabushaw.—Preseott in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
H, 169, 1S.'>2. Wa-ha-shaw's trib«.— C. S. Ind.
Treaties (1«3()), 875, 1873. Wapasha's band.—
Riggs, Dak. Gram, and Diet., 131, 1852. Wapa-
shaw.— Neill. Hist. Minn., xliv, IS.** (chief's
name). Wapashaw's village. — Throcmorton
(1832) quoted by Drake, Bk. Inds..bk. v, 155, 1848.
Wa-pa-shee.— Smithson. Misc. Coll., xiv, art. 6, 8,
1878. Wapatha.— Warren in Minn. Hist. (k)ll., v..
156, 1885. Wind people.— Dorsey in Am. Natur.,
115, 18W.
Kiynksa. A division of the Upper
Yanktonai Sioux.
Kee-ark-sar.— Corliss, Ijicotah MS. vooab., B. A. E.,
106, 1K74. Kee-uke-sah.— Lewis and Clark. l)i.«»-
cov., :i4. 1S06; Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 99,
1905. Ku-ux-aws.— Prescott in Sch<M)lcraft, Ind.
Tribes, ii, 169, 1852.
Kiyuksa. A division of the Brule Teton
Sioux. — Dorsev (after Cleveland) in loth
Rep. B. A. K.;219, 1S97.
Kiynksa. A division of the OglalaTeton
Sioux.
Breakers of the custom.— Robinscm, letter to Dor-
sey, 1879. Cut Offs.— Brackett in Smithsim. Rep.
1876, 467, 1877. Ke-ax-as.— Ibid. Kiocsies.— Ind.
Aflf. Rep., 250, 1875. Kiyuksa.— Robinson (1880)
quoted by Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 220, 1897.
Zuzeca.kiyaksa.— Cleveland (1M84), ibid, (--bit
the snake in two'). Zuzetoa-kiyaksa.— Ibid.
Klahosaht. A Nootka tribe formerly
living N. of Nootka sd., Vancouver id.
(Sproat, Sav. Life, 308, 18(31)). Boas waH
unable to learn anything about them,
but the name seems to occur in Jewitt's
Narnitive as the designation of a small
tribe that had lK>en *'con(|uere<l and in-
corporated into that of Nootka.""
712
KLAHUM KLAMATUK
[B. A. P.
KlAhan.-Jewitt, Narr., 74, 1849. KlahoMht.—
Sproat. Sav. Life, 808, 1869. TlahoMth.— Boas, 6th
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 31, 1890.
Klahnxn. An Okinagan village where
Aster's old fort stood, at the mouth of
Okinakane r., Wash. — Gibbs in Pac. R. R.
Rep., I, 413, 1855.
Klakaamu (KPa-ka-a^-mu). A former
Chumashan village on Santa Cruz id., off
the coast of California, e. of Punta del Di-
ablo.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo-
cab.,B. A.E.,1884.
Klalakamish ( Kla-W -ka-mish ) . An ex-
tinct band of Lummi that resided on the
E. side of San Juan id., n. w. Wash. —
Gibbs, Clallam and Lummi, 39, 1863.
Klaxnaskwaltin. A Kaiyuhkhotana vil-
lage on the N. bank of Yukon r., Alaska,
near the mouth of Kaiyuh r.
Klamatkwaltin.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Klamasqualttin.— Coast Survey cited by Baker,
ibid.
____XlaiaaflL. (possibly from m&klaks, the
Lutuami term for * Indians,' 'people,'
KLAMATH MEOICINE-MAN
'community'; lit. 'the encamped'). A
Lutuamian tribe in s. w. Oregon. They
call themselves Eukshikni or Auksni,
'people of the lake,' referring to the fact
that their principal seats were on Upper
Klamath lake. There were also im-
portant settlements on Williamson and
Spracue rs. The Klamath are a hardy
people and, unlike the other branch of
the family, the Modoc, have always lived
at peace with the whites. In 1864 they
joined the Modoc in ceding the greater
part of their territory to the United States
and settled on Klamath res., where they
numbered 755 in 1905, including, how-
ever, many former slaves and members
of other tribes who have become more or
less assimilated with the Klamath since
the establishment of the reservation.
Slavery was a notable institution among
the Klamath, and previous to the treaty
of 1864 they accompanied the Modoc
every year on a raid against the Acho-
mawi of Pit r., Cal., for the capture of
women and children whom they retained
as slaves or bartered with the Chinook at
The Dalles. The Klamath took no part
in the Modoc war of 1872-73, and it is
said that their contemptuous treatment
of the Modoc was a main cause of the
dissatisfaction of the latter with their
homes on the reservation which led to
their return to Lost r. and thus to the
war. The following are the Klamath
settlements and divisions so far as known:
Awalokaksaksi, Kohashti, Kulshtgeush,
Kuyamskaiks, Nilakshi, Shuyakeksh,
Yaaga, and Yulalona. . See also Kumba-
tuash. Consult Gatschet, Klamath Inds.,
Cont. N. A. EthnoL, ii, 1890. (l. f.)
iiig^paluma.— Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., Jl,
pt. I, xxxiii, 1890 ('people of the chipmunks':
Sahaptin name for all Indians on Klamath res.
and vicinity; abbreviated to Aigspalo, Aikspalu).
Alammimakt ish.— Ibid., xxxiv (said to be the
Achomawi name) . Athlameth.— Ibid. (Calapooya
name). Auksiwash.— Ibid, (so called in Yreka
dialect of Shasta). Auksni.— Ibid. (abbr. of
^-ukshikni). A'-ushkni.— Ibid., pt. ii, 31. Clam-
»th». — Lee and Frost, Oregon, 177, 1844. Olamets. —
Hale in U. S. £xpl. Exped., vi, 218,1846. 01am-
ouths.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. 8oc.,ii,map,
1836. caamuth.—Johnsonand Winter, Rocky Mts.,
47, 1846. Clamuto.— White. Ten Years in Oregon.
259, 1850. Olimath.— Spaulding in H. R. Rep. 880,
27th Cong., 2d ness., 59, 1842. ^-ukshikni.— Gat-
schet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. i, xxxiv, 1890
(abbr. of the following). ]^-akahik-ni nUUrUki.—
Ibid, (own name: 'people at the lake'), ^-oks-
kni.— Ibid. (abbr. of £-ukRhikni). ig-oshkni.—
Ibid., pt. 11,31. Ilamatt.— H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 80th
Cong., 1st sess., 7. 1848 (misprint of Hale'sTlamatl).
Kalmathi.— Dyar (1873) in H. R. Rep. 183, 44th
Cong., 1st sess., 4, 1876 (misprint). Klamaos.— Du-
flot de Mofras, Explor. dans I'Oregon, ii, 835,1844.
Klamaks.— Ibid., 357. Klamat.— Palmer, Rocky
Mts., 103, 1852. Klamath Lake Indians.— Steele in
Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1864, 121. 1865. Klamaths.— Taylor
in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860. Klamatk.— Gatschet
misquoted in Congr^s Intemat. des Am^r.. iv,
284, 1881. Klameth.— Stanley in Smithson. Misc.
Coll., II, 59, 1852. Kiamets.- Famham. Trav., 112,
1843. Klawmuts.— Meek in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 80th
Cong., 1st sess., 10, 1848. Makaitserk.— Gatschet,
op. cit., II, pt. I. xxxiv, 1890 (so called by western
Shasta), muck-aluos.— Powers quoted by Ban-
croft, Nat. Races, 1, 351 , 1882. Muk*-a-luk.— Powers
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 2.'>4, 1877. Okshee.—
Steele in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864, 121, 1866. Ouk-
skenah.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 22, 1860.
Plaikni.— Gatschet, op. cit., ii, pt. i, xxxv, 1890
(collective name for Klamath , Modoc, and Snakes
on Sprague r. ). Bayl.— Ibid., xxiv (Snake name).
Tapaidii.— Curtin, Ilmawl MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1889 (Ilmawl name). Thlamalh.— Tolmie and
Dawson. Comp. Vocab., 11b, 1884. Tlamath.— Rux-
ton, Adventures, 244. 1848. Tlamatl.--Hale in U.
S. Expl. Exped.. vi, 218, 1846. Tlameth.— Thomp-
son in Ind. Af!. Rep., 490, 1854.
Klamatnk. An old village, probably
belonging to the Comox, on the e. coast
of Vancouver id., opposite the s. end of
Valdes id.
BULL. 30]
KLASKINO KLIKITAT
718
XU-nuftook.— Dawson, Geol. Surv. Can., map,
1888.
Klatkino (* people of the ocean*). A
Kwakiutl tril)e on Klaskino inlet, n. w.
coast of Vancouver id. ; pop. 13 in 1888,
when last separately enumerated.
XUrkiBM.— Can. Ind.A^., 145, 1879. KULs'-kaino.—
Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, sec.
II, 65. KUM-ki-no.— 6an. Ind. AIT., 189, 1884.
L*raq'iB8z.— Boa.q in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895. 829,
1897. L!a'aq!enox«.— Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist., V, pt. 2, aM, 1902. Tla'tk'enoq.— Boas in 6th
Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 63. 1890. Tlata'e'noq.—
Boa8inPetermannsMitt..pt.5.131,1887(misprint).
Xlatanart. A band of Cowichan on
Fraser r., Brit. Col. Pop. 36 in 1886, when
last enumerated separately.
KUtanan.— Can. Ind. AIT. f()r*18t<6, 229. Klata-
wan.— Ibid, for 1879, 309.
Klatlawas. An ancient Clallam village
on Paget sd., Wash. Its inhabitants par-
ticipated in the treaty of Point no Point,
Jan. 26, 1855.
Klatlawas.— Gibbs, Clallam and Lummi. 20, 1863.
KUt-la-wash.— U.S. Ind. Treat. (1865), WX). 1873.
Klatwoat. A village on the w. bank of
Harrison r., near its junction with Fraj»er
r., Brit. Col.— Brit. Col. map, lud. Aff.,
Victoria, 1872.
Klawak. The principal town of the
Henya Tlingit on the w. coast of Prince
of Wales id., Alaska. It is now inhabited
lai^ly by Haida. Pop. 261 in 1890, 131
in 1900.
Ghla-wik-kSn.— Krausc, Tlinkit Ind.. Ill, 1885
(Jfc^=people). Klawak.— Eleventh CensuH, Alas-
Ka,8,1893. iAwaOc.— Swan ton, field notes, B. A. E.,
1904. ThlewlUJkh.— HolmberK. EthnoR. Skizz. . map,
1855.
Xlohakuk. A Kuskwogniiut Eskimo
village on the e. side of the entrance to
Kuskokwim bay, Alaska; pop. 18 in 1880,
49 in 1890.
KUhaagamut.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. £., map,
1899. Xlohakuk.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
n-ohangamute.— Petrof!, Rep. on Alai«ka, 53, 1881.
Kleaukt ( Kleau^kty * rocky bar ' ) . A v il-
lage of the Ntlakvapainut on Fraser r.,
below North Bend, Brit. Col.— Hill-Tout
in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can., 5, 1899.
Xlegnchek. A Kuskwoginiut Eskimo
village in Alaska, at the mouth of Kusko-
kwim r. on the right bank.
Xleguohek.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
KlepUhegamut.— Kilbuck (1898) quoted by Baker,
Klemiaksac.— A Chinookan village on
Columbia r., Oreg., 25 m. below The
Dalles.
Xle-miak-iac.— Lee and Frost, Oregon, 176, 1844.
gjikitat ( Chinookan : * beyond,' with ref-
erence to the Cascade mts. ) . AShahaptian
tnbe whose former seat was at the head-
waters of the Cowlitz, Lewis, White Sal-
mon, and Klickitat rs., n. of Columbia r.,
m Klickitat and Skamania cos., Wash.
Their eastern neighbors were the Yakima,
who speak a closely related language,
and on the w. they were met by various
Salishan and Chinookan tril)es. In 1805
Lewis and Clark reported them as win-
tering on Yakima and Klickitat rs., and
estimated their number at about 700.
Between 1820 and 1830 the tribes of Wil-
lamette valley were visited by an epi-
demic of fever and greatly reiiuced in
numbers. Taking advantage of their
weakness, the Klikitat crossed the Colum-
bia and forced their wav as far s. as the
valley of the Umpqua. ^heir occupancy
of tliis territory was temporary, how-
ever, and they were speeiiily compelled
to retire to their old seat n. of the Colum-
bia. The Klikitat were always active
and enterprising traders, and from their
favorable position beciime widely known
as intermediaries between the coast tribes
and those living e. of the Cascade range.
They joined in the Yakima treaty at Camp
Stevens, W^ash., June 9, 1855, by which
t hey ceded their lan<ls to t he United States.
They are now almost wholly on Yakima
res.," Wash., where they have l)econie so
KLIKITAT WOMAN. (shaCKCLFORD COLL.)
merged with related tribes that an accu-
rate estimate of their numlH»r is imiM>s-
sible. Of the groui)8 ntill recognized on
that reservation the Topinish are prob-
ablv their nearest relatives (Moonev in
14th Rep. B. A. E., 738, 189()) and inay
be regarded as a branch of tlie Klikitat,
and the Taitinapani, si)eakiiig the same
tongue, as another minor branch. One
of the settlements of the Klikitat was
WMltkun. (l. F.)
Awi-adshi.— Gatschot, Molalla MS., B. A. E., 27,
1877 ( M Ola la name ) . Chiok-atat.— Lee and Frost,
Oregon, 176, 1H44. Chioki tats.— Lane in Sen. Ex.
Doc. 62, 31st Cong.. 1st sess., 171, 1860. Chit-ah-
hut— Noble in H. R. Ex. Doc, 37, 34th Cong., 3d
sess., 109, 1857. Chit-at-hut.— Ibid., HI. CUck-a-
hut.— Robie in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 351,1858. CUoka-
Ut.— Lee and Frost, Oregon, 99, 1844. CUckeUU.—
Armstrong, Oregon, 106, 1857. Clickitats. -Lane in
714
KLIK8IWI KLONDIKE
[B. A.B.~
Ind. Aff. Rep., 160, 1850. Cli]uttat8.->Stevens in
Sen. Ex. Doc. 66, 34th Cong., Ist sess., 43, 1856.
Halthwypum.— Coues, Henry and Thompson Jour.,
827, 1897. KanaUt.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i,
418, 1855. Klachatah.— Nicolay, Oregon, 143, 1846.
Kladuitaoka.— Wilkes, U. S. Expl. Exped., iv, 325,
1845. KUokatuoks.— Slocum (1835) in H. R. Rep.
101, 25th Cong., 3d sess., 41, 1839. Klakataoks.—
Farnham, Trav., 112, IMZ. KlekeUt.— Scouler
(1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i, 231, 1848.
Klioatot.— Parker, Jour., 238, 1840. XUckataaU.-
Kane, Wand, in N. Am., 173, 1859. EUck-a-taoks.—
Catlin, N. Am. Ind., ii, 113, 1866. EUokaUtes.—
De Smet, Letters, 231, 1&43. KUckaUto.— Swan,
Northwest Coast, 324, 1857. KlickiUts.— Lyman in
OreKon Hist. Soc. Quar., i, 170, 1900. Klikalato.—
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., Ii, 14, 1848.
KlikaUt.— Townsend, Narr., 174, 1839. Kliketan.—
Scouler (1&46) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i,237,
1848. Kliketat.— Scouler in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond.,
V225, 1841. KUkitato.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1866, 17, 1857.
KUquital.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 18n, 131, 1872. KlfiOti-
tat.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 738, 1896.
Kliik-ha'-tat.— Dorsey, Alsea MS. vocab., B.A. E.,
1884 ( A Isea name ) . Lewis River Band.— Mil roy in
Ind. Aff. Rep., 164, 1881. Liik'-a-U+t.— McCaw,
Puyallup MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1885 (Puyallup
name). Mahane.— Gatschet, Umpqua MS. vo-
cab., B. A. E., 1887 (Umpqua name). Ml-^lauq'-
tcu-wun'-ti.— Dorsey, Alsea MS. vocab., B. A. E..
1884 ('scalpers': Alsea name). Mdn-an'-nS-qu'
^Cbni.— Dorsey, Naltunnetunne MS. vocab., B.A.
E.,1884 ( 'inland people ' : Naltunnetunne name).
Korth Dale Indians.— Meek in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,
30th Cong., 1st sess. , 10, 1^8. awulh-hwai-pfim.—
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 738, 1896 ('prairie
people': own name). Rea Batacks.— Slocum in
Sen. Doc. 24, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 15,1838. RoU-roU-
pam.— Pandosy in Shea, Lib. Am. Ling., vi,7, 1862.
ShlakaUto.— Belcher, Voy., i, 307, 1843. Tlakai'-
Ut.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E., 1877 (Okinagan
name). TlakaUt.— Halein U. S. Expl. Exped., vi,
569, 1846. Tliokitacks.— Stanley in Smithson. Misc.
Coll., II, 63, 1852. T'likatet.— Gibbs in Cont. N.
A. Ethnol., I, '241, 1877. Trile Kalets.— Warre and
Vava.sour(lK45) in Martin, Hudson's Bay Ter., 80,
1849. TsS 'la'kayat amim.— Gatschet, La'kmiut
MS., B. A. E., 105 (Kalapuya name). T:uwa'-
nxa-ikc— Boas, Kathlamet Texts, 236, 1901 (Clatsop
name). Vanoouvers.— Dart in Ind. Aff. Rep.,
•215, 1851. WJUmookt.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E.
(Cowlitz name). White River Indians. — Shaw in
H. R. Ex. Doc. 37, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 112, IJ-*?.
Whulwhaipum.— Tolraie and Dawson, Comp. Vo-
cabs. Brit. Col.. 78, 1884. Whulwhjrpum.— Lord,
Naturalist in Brit. Col., 246, 1866.
Kliksiwi {LtvsVwe^y * clover root at
mouth of river.' — Boas). A former Kwa-
kiutl villapre at the mouth of Kliksiwi r.,
on the E. side of Vancouver id. All traces
of it have disappeared.
Klik-M-wi.— Daw.son in Trans. Rov. Soc. Can. for
1887, sec. II, 72. LixM'weR.— Boas, inf n, 1905.
Klimmixn. A former Chehalis village
on the N. shore of Grays harbor, Wash,
yiinmifm.— Gibbs, MS., no. 248, B. A. E. Weh-U-
mioh.— Ibid.
Kiinkwan (Tlingit: innqod^n, * shellfish
town'; or *town where they split yellow
cedar bark into long strings [few]'). A
Haida town, occupied by the Yaku-lanas,
on Cordova Imv, Prince of Wales id.,
Alaska. In Jolin Work's list (1836-41)
26 houses and 417 inhabitants are as-
signed to a town called Click-ass. This
is a camping place near Kiinkwan, and
the Kiinkwan people are evidently in-
tended. Petroff gives the population in
1880-81 as 125, and the census of 1890
as 19. (j. R. s.)
Ohlen-k5-an hade.— Krause, Tlinkit Indianer, 304,
1885. Kliarakans.— Halleck quoted by Morris,
Res. of Alaska, 67, 1879. KUavakans.— Halleck
quoted by Colyer in Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1869, 562. 1870.
Kiinkwan.— U. S. Coast Survey, map of Alaska,
s. E. section. KUnquan.—EleventhCensus, Alaska,
31, 1893. Xliuauan.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska,
32,1884. TlinkwanHaade.— Harrison in Proc. and
Trans. Royal Soc. Can., sec. ii, 125, 1895.
Klinqnit. One of the bands or tribes
taking part in the Yakima treaty of 1856
(U. S. Stat, XII, 951, 1863). They are
not otherwise identifiable, and should not
be confounded with the Tlingit.
Klkohti {Kl-k6hHl), The Chehalis
name for an ancient village on the s.
side of Grays harl)or. Wash.— Gibbs, MS.
no. 248, B. A. E.
Klochwatone. Mentioned as a Tlingit
family under the leadership of Anna-
hootz, residing in and near Sitka, Alaska,
and consisting of 200 people in about 40
families. The name is said to mean * war-
riors,* but in all probability it is a corrup-
tion oiiju^koa-hti'tdn, * people of the house
on the point.* A house of this name
stood on the point at Sitka, where Bara-
noff*s fort was afterward built. It be-
longed to the Kiksadi and not to Anna-
hootz's people, therefore possibly the
word is corrupted from Goch-hit-tdn ( *wolf
house people'), to whom Annahootz be-
longed. ( J. r; s. )
Klocnwatone.— Beardslee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 105,
46th Cona;., Ist seas.. 31, 1880. Klttokwaton.— Ibid.,
32. Kluokwatone— Ibid.
Klodesseottine ( * hay river people * ) . A
divisiou of the Etchareottine on Hayr.,
Mackenzie Ter., Canada. In 1904 there
were 247 enumerated on the upper and
115 on the lower river.
Gens de la riviere au Foin.— Petitot, Diet. D^n^-
Dindii4, xx, 1876. Slaves of Lower Hay River.—
Can. Ind. AfT. 1904, pt. 2, 82, 1905. Slaves of Upper
Hay River.— Ibid.
Klogi. A Navaho clan, named from an
old pueblo.
Klbgi.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
103, 1890. Klbgi^e. — Ibid (^//{€=' people').
Kl^cfbie'. — Matthews, Navaho Legends, 30,
1897. Klogni.— Bourke, Moquls o! Ariz., 279, 1884.
Klokadakaydn (* arrow reed*). An
Apache clan or band at San Carlos agency
and Ft Apache, Ariz., in 1875-81.
Olo-kar-da-Ki-ein.— White, Apache Names for Ind.
Tribes, MS., B. A. E., 1875. Klokadakaydn.— Bourke
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, HI, 1890. Elugadu-
cayn.— Ibid., 112.
Klokegottine ( * prairie people ' ) . A Na-
hane division living between Mackenzie
r. and lakes La Martre, Grandin, and
Tach^, Mackenzie Ter., Canada.
E16-kke-0ottine.— Petitot, Autour du lac des Es-
claves, 362, 1891. Kld-kke-ottini.— Petitot, MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1865. Kl'o-ke-ottine. — Ibid.
Thlo-oo-chassies.— Campbell quoted by Dawson
in Rep. Geol. Surv. Can., 200b, 1889. Tibtoene.—
Morice, MS. letter, 1890 (Takulli name). Tih-
to"-na.— Ibid, (trans, 'grass people').
Klondike (el dorado, a rich strike, a
fortune). This word, which entered the
English langniage of America during the
Alaskan gold fever of 1898-1900, is the
name of a tributary of the Yukon in ex-
treme N. w. Canada. Klondike is a cor-
ruption of the name of this stream in one
of the Athapascan dialects prevailing in
that region. In the literature of the
BULL. 30]
KLOO — KNAIAKHOTANA
715
day, *Klondiker,' and even Ho Klon-
dike/ also occur. Of the name Baker
(Geog. Diet. Alaska, 244, 1902) says:
"This [Klondike] river was named
Deer river hy the Western Union Tele-
graph Expedition, in 1867, and so ap-
peared on various maps. Later it was
called Raindeer and afterwards Reindeer.
Ogilvie, writing September 6, 1896, from
Cudahy, savs: *The river known here
as the Klondike'; and in a footnote says:
The correct name is Thron Duick.'
It has also been called Clondyke and
Chandik, or Deer.'* (a. p. c.)
Kloo (Xe-Uy * southeast,* the name of a
town chief). A former Haida town at
the E. end of Tanoo id., Queen Char-
lotte ids., Brit. Col. It was one of the
lareest towns in the Haida country
ana was occupied by three families,
the Kona-kegawai, Djiguaahl-lanas, and
idusgo-kegawai, to the first of which
the town chief belonged. John Work
(1836-41) assigned 40 houses and 545 in-
habitants to this town; old people still
rememl)er 26 houses. Although aban-
doned, the houst^s and poU»s here are in
better condition than in most uninhab-
ited Haida villages. ( j. r. s. )
Olew.— Can. Ind. AIT. 1894, 280. 1895. Cloo.—
Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, v, 489, 1855 (after Work.
1836-41). Kloo.— Common geographic form.
Kue.— Poole, Queen Charlotte Ids., pa.<)8im,
1872. Slue's Village.— Dawson, Queen Char-
lotte Ids., 169, 1880 (so called from chief}.
Lay>akik.— Ibid, (('himmi^syan name; Laxsk-
<ydc =• those of the Eagle elan'). T'ano.— Boas in
r2th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 25, 1898. Tanoo.—
Dawson, op. cit. (own name; the name of a
kind of sea gra.s8). Tanu Hiade.— Hnrri.son in
Proe. and Trans. Roy. Soe. Can., 125, 1895. Tlu.—
Ibid.
Kloo. A temporary settlement on the x.
side of Cumshewa inlet, occupied by
Haida from the older town of Kloo for a
few years before* they pa««s€Ml on to Skide-
gate." * (.1. R. H.)
Xlothohetaime {KHo<:'tcP'-)fnnie). A
Chastacosta village on or in the vicinity
of Rogue r., Ore«f. — Dorsev in Jour. Ani.
Folk-lore, iii, 234, 1890.
Kltlasen (QW^VsEn). A Songish band
at McNeill bav, s. end of Vancouver id. —
Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes ('an., 17,
1890.
Klnokhaitkwn. A band of Okinagan
formerlv living at the falls of Okinakane
r., Wash.
Kluck-hait-kwee.— Stevens in Ind. Aflf. Rep., 44o.
1854. Kluekhaitkwu.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i,
412, 1856.
Kln^hnggne. Given as a Huna village
on Chichi^f id., but probably identical
with the Chlitl-chdgu of Krause, which
he places on the mainland opposite. It
is perhaps also identical withTlushashaki-
an (q. v. ). Pop. 108 in 1880.
Ohl1U-olU«u.— Krause. Tlinkit Ind., 104, 188.=S.
Klofhugfae.— Petrof^in 10th Census, Alaska, 31,
Klnklnnk (from Lowtifq, * slides,' ap-
plied to places where gravel, small stones,
or sand slides or falls down). A village
of the Si)enceH Bridge bandof theNtlakya-
pamuk, on Nicola r., 8 m. from Spences
Bridge, Brit. Col.
Kliiklu'uk.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can.,
4. 1899. LoLowii'q.— Telt in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hi.st., II, 173, 1900.
Klnkwan ( *old and celebrated place').
The principal Chilkat village on Chil-
kat r. , 20 m. from its mouth. Indian i>op.
in 1890, 320.
Clokwon.— Willard, Life in Alaska, 78, 1884. Klak-
wan.— Kleventh Census, Alaska, 3, 1893. Klok-
wan.— Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 100. 1885. Kluckquan.
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 31, 1884. iik«'-an.—
Swanton, tield notes, B. A. E, 1904.
Klnmaitnmsh. (liven by (libbs (MS.,
B. A. E., ca. 1858) as the Chehalis name
for an ancient village on the s. side of
Grays har])or. Wash., but according to
Boas it is an island near the entrance to
( J rays harbor. Lewis and Clark, in 1805,
spoke of it as a tril)e of al)out 260 people
in 12 houses.
Olamochtomioha.— Lewis and (Uark, Kxped., ii,119,
1814. Clamootomichs.— Ibid. ,474. Ciamoctomicks. —
Domeneeh, Deserts, I, 441, 1860. Cla-moo-to-
mick's.- Grig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi. 118,
1905. Cla-moi-to-mioks.— Ibid.. 70. Clamoiton-
nith.— lA»wis and Clark, Reize, ii, 350, 1817.
M-3na'itEmc.— Boas, infn, 1905.
Klntak. An Eskimo village in the
Kuskokwini district, Alaska; pop. 21 in
1890.
Klutagmiut.— Kleventh Census. Alaska, 164,1893.
Knacto. A former Iroquois, probably
Seneca, village on the n. bank of Che-
num^ r., N. Y. — Pouchot, map (1758) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 694, 1858.
Knaiakhotana. An Athapascan tril)e
inhabiting Kenai penin., Alaska, the
})asins of Knik and Sushitna rs., and the
shores of lliamna and Cook lakes. It is
the only northern Athapascan tribe occu-
pying any large i)ortion of the seacoast.
They caine in contact with the Russians
at an early date and were subjugated
only after "much fighting; a permanent
trading settlement was established in 1792
by Zaikoff and I^astochkin, and in 1798
missionaries settled on Cook inlet. In
the latter year Baranoff ])rought 80 con-
victs to teach agriculture to the iKJople of
Kenai penin.; the natives attacked him
(luring his explorations, but were re-
pulsed, the Ruasians losing 11 men.
Father Juvenati in 1796 attenipte<l to
suppress j)olygamy among the natives,
but was killed while preaching near lli-
amna lake. Hostilities were resumed
against Baranoff in 1801. An attempt to
explore the region n. of Cook inlet was
made in 1816 by the Russian- American
Co., and in 1819 tney had 4 settlements on
Cook inlet. In 1838 an epidemic of small-
pox carried off nearlv half the native
population. In 1861 kenai penin. was
designated one of the 7 missionary dis-
tricts of the Russian church. The Knaia-
khotana are taller and darker than
their Eskimo neighbors, but their cus-
toms differ little from those of the neigh-
boring tribes. Hunting and fishing are
- >
716
KNAIAKHOTANA
[b. a. b.
the chief occupations, birch-bark canoes
being used for river journeys in the in-
terior, while for coast voya^ bidarkas
are purchased from the Eskimo.
The Knaiakhotanaarethemostcivilized
of all the northern Athapascan tribes.
They use dogs mainljr for hunting, not
harnesMiing them to their sleds even m the
long journeys they perform in winter
from one trapping ground to another.
Occasionally in summer dogs are em-
nloyed as pack animals. Their log
iioiises are more solidly and warmly built
than those of the moving Kutchin tribes;
they are divided into an outer room
for cooking and rough labor, and an
inner sleeping apartment, floored and
ceiled, lighted through a pane of glass or
fut, and impenetrable to the outer air.
n some villages the bedroom is used as a
bathroom, being then heated with red-hot
stones; but most villages have a bath hut
or two. In the more primitive vdlages
on the Sushitna and Knik rs. is found the
old comnmnal log house, occupied by
several families, each having its separate
sleeping apartment connecU^d with the
central structure by a hole in the wall.
IVovisions are kept out of the reach of
(logs in a storehouse built of logs and ele-
vated on posts (llth Census, Alaska,
167, 1893).
They bury their dead in wooden boxes,
in which they put also the property of the
deceased, and pile stones upon the grave.
They express grief by smearing their
fares with black paint, singeing their
hair, and lacerating their bodies. Most
of their clothing is made of the skin of
the mountiiin goat, which they kill in
large numl)ers. Their language is ex-
tremely guttural, compared with that of
the Eskimo (Dall, Alaska, 430, 1870).
Richardson (Arct. Exped., i, 406,
1851 ) stated that the Knaiakhotana have
two phratria**, one containing 6 and
the other 5 clans. The clans, according
to their mythology, are descended from
two women made by the raven, and are
as follows: 1, Kachgiya (The Raven);
2, Tlachtana (Weavers of Grass Nets);
3, Montochtana (A Corner in the Back
Part of the Hut); 4, Tschichgi (Color);
5, Nuchschi (Descended from Heaven);
6, Kali (Fisher men ) . 1 , Tul tschina ( Bath-
ers in Cold Water); 2, Katluchtna (Lov-
ers of Glass Beads); 3, Schischlachtana
( Deceivers Like the Raven) ; 4, Nuts-
chichgi; 5, Zaltana (Mountain). Hoff-
man ( Aijalua:amut MS., B. A. E., 1882)
gives the following Chugachigmiut names
for divisions of the Knaiakhotana: 1, Kan-
ikaligamut (People Close to the River);
2, Maltshokanmt (Valley People); 3,
Nanualikmut (People Around the Lake).
The same authority (Kadiak MS., B. A.
E., 1882) gives the Kaniagmiut names
for 5 divisions: 1, Nanualuk ( = Nanualik-
mut); 2, Kuinruk (Sea-hunting People);
3, Tuiunuk ( =Tyonok, Marsh People) ; 4,
Knikamut (=Knik, Fire-signal People);
5, Tinkpuk (People Living at the Base
of a volcano).
The Knaiakhotana villages are Chinila,
Chuitna, Kasilof, Kasnatchin, Kenai,
Kilchik, Knakatnuk, Knik, Kultuk,
Kustatan, Nikhkak, Nikishka, Ninilchik,
Nitak, Skilak, Skittok, Sushitna, Titu-
kilsk, Tyonek, Tyonok, and Zdluiat.
The natives of Cook inlet in 1818 num-
bered 1,471, of whom 723 were males and
748 females. Baron Wrangell, in 1825,
gave their population as 1,299, the fe-
males being slightlv in excess. In 1839
Veniaminofmade the number 1,628, and
in 1860 the Holy Synod gave 937, declaring
that the natives had l^ome Christians.
At the acquisition of Alaska by the United
State49 in 1868, Gen. Halleck and Rev
Vincent Colyer erroneously estimated
the Knaiakhotana at 25,000 (Petroff, Rep.
on Alaska, 40, 1884). The population m
1880 consisted of 614 natives, and in 1890
they numbereil 724 (llth Census, Alaska,
158, 1893).
nyamna people.— PetrofT in 10th CeDSOS, Alaska,
164, 1884. Kaitana.— Dc Meulcn, Kenay MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1870. Kaneskies.— Colyer in Ind.
Aff. Rep. 1869, &53, 1870. Kanisky.— Ibid., 575.
Kanktini.— Staffeief and PetrofT, MS. vocab., B. A.
E.,1885. KankiinaU kSfftana.— Ibid. Kenai.— Gal-
latin in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 401, 1853.
Kenaiani.— Terry in Rep. Sec. War, pt. i. 41. 1869.
Kenaies.— Scouler In Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., i,
218, 1841. Kenai-tenl— Dall, Alaska, 480, 1870.
Kenai'tMB.— Pinart in Rev. de Philol. et d'Ethno?..
no. 2, 1, 1875. Kenutse. — Ludwi^ quoted by Dall
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, a5, 1877. Kenaiyer.—
Richardson, Arct. Exped.. i, 401, 1851. Kenai-
yut.— Ibid. ( Kaniagrmiut name adopted by Rus-
sians). Kenaize. — Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 116,
1874. Kenaiaen.— Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., 855, 1826.
Kenajer.— Erman, Archiv, vii, 128, 1849. Kenas.—
Domenech, Deserts N. Am., i, 442, 1860. Kenay.—
Latham in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i, 160, 1841.
Kenayern.— Wrangell in Baer and Helmersen,
Beitrage, 1. 103, 1839. Kenayri.— Humboldt, Essai
Polit.. I, 347. 1811. KUtenses.— Liitke, Voyage. I,
181, 1835 (probably identical). Kin»tai.— Prich-
ard, Phys. Hist., v, 441, 1847. Kinai.— Vater, Mith-
ridates, iii, 230, 1816. Kinaitsa.— Balbi, Atlas
Ethnog., 1826. Kinaitse.— Vater, op. cit., 229.
Kiaaitsi.— BaIbi, op. cit. Sonaizi.— Vater, op. cit.,
228. Kini^'ut.— Wrangell in Baer and Helmersen,
Beitrage, i, 103, 1839 (Kaniagmiut name). Kia-
natt.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 25, 1884.
Kiimatt-Khotana.— Ibid.. 162. Kiimats-kokhta-
na.— Ibid., 164. K*nai'-a-kho-ta'na.— Dall in Ck)nt
N. A. Ethnol., i, 35, 1877. Kaaina.— Wrangell
in Baer and Helmersen, Beitr&ge, i, 103, 1889.
Knaiokhotana.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 158, 1893.
Koht-ana.— Liziansky, MS. vocab., B. A. £. On-
ffiliak]naa•Kinaia.— Balbi, Atlas Ethnog., 1826.
i nei.— Doroschin in Radloff, Worterbuch, 29,
1874 (Tenankutchin name). Taine.— Pinart in
Rev. de Philol. et d'Ethnog., no. 2. 6, 1875 (Tenan-
kutchin name). Tehanin-Kutohin. — Dall, Alaska,
430. 1870 (Kaiyuhkhotana name). Tenahaa.—
Holmbeig ( 1855)quoted by Dall in Proc. A. A. A. 8.,
1869, 270, 1870. Tenaina.— Radloff . WOrterbuch, 29,
1874 (own name). Thnaina.— Holmberg, Ethnog.
Skizz., 6, 1855. Tinaina.— Hoffman, Kadiak MS.,
B. A. E., 1882. Tinina.— Hoffman, AljaluyamOt
MS. , B. A. E. , 1882. TinnaU^Petroff in 10th Cen-
sus, Alaska, 25. 1884. Tinaats-Khotaaa.— Ibid.,
162. Tiaaati-Kokhtana.— Ibid., 164 (own name).
Taao.— Keane in Stanford, (k)mpend., 539, 1878.
»ULL. 80]
KNAKATNUK KNIVES
717
hud.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. i, S5, 1877.
hudna.— Wrangell in Baer and Helmersen, Bei-
rfige, I, 108, 1839 (derived from tnai, 'man').
Piudiia ttirnai.— Bancroft. Nat. Races. 1. 116, 1874.
Prue Thnalna.— Holmberpr quoted by Dall, Alaska,
ISO, 1870.
Xnakatnnk. A Knaiakhotana village
md trading post of 35 natives in 1880 on
the w. side of Knik bay, at the head of
Cook inlet, Alaska.
Knakatnuk.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 29,
1884. Knik BUtion.— Poet route map, 1903.
Kaatsomita (Kndts-o-mi^'ta, *all craz^
dogs'). A society of the Ikunuhkahtei,
or All Comrades, in the Piegan tribe; it
is composed of men about 40 years of
age.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales,
221, 1892.
K'niok K'neok. See Kinnikinnick.
Knik (Eskimo: *fire,* a name given by
the Eskimo of Kodiak because, having
no seaworthy boats of their own, they
signaled for other tribes across the bay to
send aid) . A Knaiakhotana settlement of
several villages on Knik r., at the head
of Ck)ok inlet, Alaska. The thief village
had 46 people in 1880 (Petroff, 10th Cen-
sus, Alaska, 29, 1884); in 1900 the pop-
ulation was 160 in 31 houses. This branch
of the tribe numbers altogether between
200 and 300, who obtain their subsistence
by hunting and trapping and by barter-
ing with the Ahtena, who bring fur skins
over the divide between Knik and Copper
rs. every winter and stay weeks or months
with the Knik, who through this trade
obtain the clothing, utensils, and even
luxuries of the whites. Their houses are
built above ground of logs tightly calked
with moss and covered with bark (11th
Census, Alaska, 70, 1893). They use the
birch-bark canoe on the inland rivers,
but purchase skin bidarkas of the Kenai
or Nikishka people to fish and travel
along the coast.
Kinik.— Petroff in 10th Census. Alaska, map, 1884.
Kinniok.— Petroff, ibid., 39. K'niq'-a-mut.— Hoff-
man, Kadiak MS., B. A. E.. 1882.
Knives. Cutting tools are indispensable
to primitive men, and the greatest in-
genuity was exercised by the northern
tribes in their manufacture. Every ma-
WOMAN'S SLATE KNIFE (uLu); ESKIMO (1-4). ( MURDOCH)
terial capable of taking and retaining an
edge was utilized — wood, reed, bone, ant-
ler, shell, stone, and metal. Teeth are
nature's '^utting tools, and the teeth of
animals (shark, beaver, etc.) were much
employed by primitive men, as also were
sharp bits of stone and splinters of wood
and bone, the natural edges of which
were artificially sharpened, and natural
forms were modified to make them more
effectual. The uses of the knife are in-
numerable; it served in war and was in-
OSSlOlAN CEREMONIAL
Blape, 21 IN. long;
California, (holmes)
Obsidian Knife with Handle of
Otter Skin, t 1-4 in. long;
California, (mason)
dispensable in every branch of the arts
of life, in acquiring raw materials, in pre-
paring them for use, and in shaping
whatever was made. Knives served also
Flint Blade with bev-
eled Edge (1-2); Okla-
homa, (holmes)
Flint Knife with Beveled
Edge (1-2); Tennessee
in symbolism and ceremony, and one of
the most cherished symbols of rank and
authority was the great stone knife
chipped with consummate skill from ob-
718
KNOTS
[b. a. b.
sidian or flint According to Colin the
stone knife is nsed among the Pueblos as
a symbol of divinity, especially of the
war gods, and is widely used in a healing
ceremony called the *^knife ceremony.**
Differentiation of
use combined
with differences
in material to give
variety to the
blade and its haft-
ing; the so-called
tiluy or woman's
knife of the Eski-
mo, employed in
various culinary
arts, differs from
WOMAN'S Slate Knife (1-4); Eskimo.
(Murdoch)
the man's knife, which is used in carving
wood and for various other purposes
(Mason); and the bone snow knife of the
Arctic regions is a species by itself (Nel-
son). The copper knife is distinct from
the stone
knife, and
the latter
takesa mul-
titude of
forms, pass-
i n g from
the normal
types in one
direction into the club or mace, in
another into the scraper, and in another
into the dagger; and it blends with the
arrowhead and the spearhead so fully
that no definite line can be drawn be-
tween them save when the complete
f
Iron knife with wooden handle (i-«^;
Makah
1 ■• <■ ■
m
S
rl^flsHB
v^^H|
'
'^m
m
I:
1
/ ™
'*.t
KNIFE OF NEPHRITE (l-«) ;
F.6K1M0. (nelson)
KNIFE WITH BONE Han-
dle; CALIFORNIA.
(smith)
haft is in evidence. The flaked knife
blade of flint is straight like a spearhead
or is curved like a hook or sickle, and it
is frequently beveled on one or both
edges. The ceremonial knife is often
of large size and great beauty. Certain
Tennessee flint blades, believed to be of
this class, though very slender, measure
upward of 2 ft in length, while the
beautiful red and black obsidian blades
of California are hardly less noteworthy.
Speaking of the latter, Powers says: |*I
have seen several which were 15 in.
CEREMONIAL KNIFE, LENGTH 24 1-2 IN. ; KWAKIUTU (bOAs)
or more in length and about 2J in. wide
in the widest part. Pieces as large as
these are carried lifted in the hands in
the dance, wrapped with skin or cloth to
prevent the rough edges from lacerating
the hands, but the smaller ones are
mounted in wooden handles and glued
fast. The large ones can not be pur-
chased at any price." See Implements.
' Two or three tnhea of In-
dians, various clans, and some
towns received
their names from
the knife, as
Conshac (*reed
knife'), a name
for the Creeks;
the town of Kusa
among the Choc-
t a w, a n d the
Ntlakyapamuk of
Thompson r.,
Brit. Col.
Slate knife with
COPPER Knife or
Consult Iioas^^°Y")"Er.'
Dagger; HAiDA. (1) in 6th Rcp. kimo (mu»-
(niblack) 3^ j^ y:., 1888, ooch)
(2) in Nat. Mus. Rep. 1895, 1897; Fowke
in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Goddard in
Pub. Univ. of Cal., Anthrop. ser., i, 1903;
Holmes in Nat. Mus. Rep. 1901, 1903;
Mason (1) in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1890, 1891;
(2) ibid., 1897, 1901; (3) ibid., 1886,
1889; Mborehead, Prehist. Impls., 1900;
Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 1892;
Nelson in 18th
Rep.B. A.E.,
1899; Niblack
in Rep. Nat.
Mus. ,1888,
1890; Powers
in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., Ill,
1877; Rau in
^ * * IRON CARVING KNIVES; ESKIMO. (MASOn)
Cont, XXII,
1876; Rust and Kroeber in Am. Anthrop.,
VII, 688, 1905; Thruston, Antiq. of Tenn.,
1897; Wilson in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1897,
1899. (w. H. H.)
Knots. The Indians, and esi)ecially
the Eskimo, whose difficulties with un-
fastening lines in a frozen area made them
ingenious, tied for various purposes many
BULL. 30]
KNOU KOASATI
719
Knots of the Central Eskimo,
(boas)
kindH of knots and splices in Imrk, steins,
roots, sinew thongs, strings, and ropes.
There were knots and turk's heads in
the ends of lines for Inittons and toggles
and for fastening work, 1(X)[>8 and run-
ninj? nooses for l)owstring8 and tt»nt fas-
tenings, knots for attac»hing one lino to
another or to some object, the knots in
netting for fish nets and the webbing in
snowshoes and rackets, knots for attach-
ing burdens and for packing and cinch-
ing, decorative knots in the dress of both
sexes, and memorial knots used in (cal-
endars and for registering accounts and in
religion. The bight,
seen on Yunian car-
rying baskets, was
universal, and the
single, square, and
gnmny knot** and
the half hitch were
also quite common.
In 1()80 the Pueblo
Indians communi-
cat(»d the numbi»r of
<lay8 before their
great uprising
against the Span-
iards bv means of a
knotted string, and
some of their de-
scendants still keep ])ersonal calendars
])y the same means, but in North America
tlie qutjm was nowhere so highly devel-
oped as it was in Peru. Boas (Bull. Am.
Mus. Nat. Hist., xv, MK)1) illustraU^s the
many splices, hitches, loops, and knots of
the Eskimo; Murdoch (9th Rep. B. A. K.,
1892) has treat (h1 the knots, nseil in nets,
8now8hoes,and sinew-backed l)ows; Dixon
(Bull. Am. Mus. Nat Hist, xvii, 1905)
shows the knots of the northern Maidu
of California; an<i Mason (Smithson. Rep.
for 1893) gives details of those generally
used on bows and arrows. (o. t. m.)
Knou (K'nou^, * eagle* ). A gens of the
Potawatomi, q. v. — Morgan, Anc. Soc,
167, 1877.
Knowilamowan. A former C'hinookan
village 25 m. from The Dalles, on Colum-
bia r., Oreg.
Kaow-il-a-mow-an.— I^e and Frost, Ort'gon, 17r>,
1844.
Koagaogit (Koa/ja^ogity * wide and rush-
ing waters'). A former Haida town on
the N. shore of Bearskin bay, Skid^pte
inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit Col.,
in possession of the Djahui-gitinai. —
8 wanton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905.
Koakotsalgi (hUi-kotchi 'wildcat,* nlgi
*_people*). A clan of the Creeks.
KoAwtMOfi.— Gat8chet Creek Migr. Leg., i, 155,
1884. Kft-wa'-ku-ohe.~Morgan, Anc. Soc., 161,
1877.
Koalcha (Qod7/ca). A Squawmish vil-
lage community at Linn cr., Burrard
inlet, Brit Col.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit
A. A. S., 475, 1900.
Koalekt {Kod^lKqt). A Chehalis village
at the headwaters of a w. tributary of
Harrison r., in s. w. British Columbia. —
Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1891.
Koanalalis ( KomnVhtlis ) . The ancestor
of a Nimkish gens after whom the gens
was sometimes named. — Boas in Peter-
manns Mitt., i)t. 5, i:^0, 1887.
Koapk ((/oa^pj-). One of the Talio
towns of tlie Bellacoola at the head of
South Bentin(!k arm, coast of British Co-
lumbia.
K.'oa'pg.— Boas in 7th Rep. N. W. TrilxftCnn.. .3,
1891. \l'oa'px.— Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.,
II, 49, 1«9X.
Koas. Mentioned as a tril)e n»siding
with theHutsnuwu, C-hilkat, and others,
in Sitka, Alaska (Beardslee in Sen. Kx.
Doc. 105, 4«th Conjr., Ist sess., 31, 1880).
It possibly refers to the Kuiii, otherwist^
the name is unidentifiable.
Koasati. An Upi>er Creek triln' siK»ak- ;^
ing a dialect almost identical with Ali-
bamu and evidently nothing more than
a large division of that peoi)le. The
name appears .to contain the word for
*cane' or 'reed,* and Gatschet has sug-
gested that it may signify * white cane.'
During the middle and latter iwirt of the
18th century the Koasati lived, appa-
rently in one principal village, on the
right* bank of Alabama r., 3 m. below the
confluence of the Coosa and Tallai)oosa,
where the modern town of Coosada» Ala.,
ptTpjL'tuates their name; but soon after w.
Florida was ceded to Great Britain, in 1763,
**two villages of Koasati" niove<l over to
the TombiglHje and settled l>t»low the
mouth of Sukenatcha cr. Romans and
other writers always mention two settle-
ments here, Sukta-loosa and C)cchoy or
Hychoy, the latter IxMng evidently either
Koasati or Alibamu. The Witumka Ali-
bamu moved with them and established
themselves lower down. loiter the Koa-
sati descended the river to a noint a few-
miles al)ove the junction of tne Tombig-
l>eeand the Alabama, but, together with
their Alil)amu associates, they soon re-
turned to theirancient seats on the upper
A labama. A * * Coosa wda' * vi llage existed
on Tennessw r. , near the site of I^ngston,
Jackson co.» Ala., in the early part of the
19th century, but it is uncertain whether
its occupants were tnie Koasati. In 1799
Hawkins stated that part of the Koasati
had n»cently crossed the Mississippi, and
Sibley in 1805 informs us that these
first settled on Bayou Chicot but 4 years
later movcHl over to the e. bank of Sabine
r., 80 m. s. of Natchitoches, I^. Thence
they spread over much of e. Texas as far
as Trinity r., while a portion, or pnerhaps
some of those who had remaine<l in Ala-
bama, obtained i)ermi8sion f romthe Caddo
to Seattle on Red r. Schermerhom (Mass.
Hist Soc. Coll.,- 2d s., ii, 26, 1814) states
720
KOASATI K0EK80TEN0K
[b. a. e.
that in 1812 the Koasati on Sabine r.
numbered 600, and in 1820 Morse gave 350
on Red r., 50 on the Neehes, 40 m. above
its month, and 240 on the Trinity, 40 to
50 m. above its mouth. Bollaert (I860)
e8timate<i the number of warriors belong-
ing to the Koasati on the lower Trinity
as 500, in 2 villages, Colete and Batista.
In 1870 50 were in Polk co., Tex., and
100 near Opelousas, La. They were
honest, industrious, and peaceful, and
still dressed in the Indian manner.
I Powell (7th Rep. B. A. E., 1891) says
that in 1886 there were 4 families of
Koasati, of about 25 individuals, near the
town of Shepherd, San Jacinto co., Tex.
As part of the true Alibamu were in this
same region it is not improbable that
some of them have been included in the
above enumerations. Those of the Koa-
sati who stayed in their original seats
and 8ul)sequently moved to Indian Ter-
ritory also remained near the Alibamu
for the greater part, although they are
found in several places in the Creek
Nation, Ok la. Two towns in the Creek
Nation are named after them. ( j. r. s. )
Aqua8-»aw-tee.— Schr>olcraft, Ind. Tnbes, I, 268,
lasi. CoashaUy.— Long, Exped. to Rocky Mts.. n,
310, 1823. Coashatta.— Pike, Travels, map of La.,
1811. Coa«»atti».— Trumbull in Johnson's Cyclo-
paedia, II, 1156, 1877. GochattieB.— Le Branche
(1839) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 14, 32d Cong., 2d seas., 27,
1853. Colchattas.— Keane in Stanford, Compend.,
509, 1878. Gonohaques.— Iberville (1702) in Margry,
D6c., IV, 594, 1880. Oonohatas.— Brackenridge,
Views of IjSl., 82, 1815. Oonchatez.— De I'Isle, map
(m. 1710) in Winsor, Hist. Am., ii, 294-295, 1886.
Oonchati.— d'Anville's map in Hamilton, Colonial
Mobile, 158, 1897. Conohattaa.— Sibley, Hist.
Sketches, 81, 1S06. Conohttat.— Lewis and Clark,
Journal, 154, 1840. Conahaoa.— Romans, Fla., 90,
1775. Oonshaes.— Romans misquoted by Hawkins
(1799), Sketch, 15, 1848. Conahattas.— Brown, West.
Gaz. . 152, 1817. Cooaadaa.— Romans, Fla., i,.S32, 1775.
Oooaadia.— Ibid. , 90. Gooaauda. — Bartram, Travels,
461, 1791 (town of Tallapoosa; speak the Stincard
language). Coo-aau-dee.—Hawkins(1779), Sketch,
35, 1848. Cooaawda.— Pickett, Hist. Ala., ii, 104,
1851. Cooaawda'a.— Campbell (1836) in H. R. Ex.
Doc. 274, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 20, 1838. Cooaaw-
der.— Sen. Ex. Doc. 425, 24th Cong., Istsess., 253,
1836. Oooahatea.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 33, 1850.
Cooihattiea.— Whiteside in Ind. Aff. Rep., 327, 1870.
Gooaidaa.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 115, 1855.
Coowaraartdaa.— Woodward, Remin., 13, 1859.
Oooweraortda.— Ibid., 36. Coahattaa.— Morse. Rep.
to Sec. War, 257, 1822. Coahattcea.— Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, iii. 585, 1853. Gouohatea.— Berquin
Duvallon, Travels, 97, 1806. Gouaatee.^Jefferys,
Am. Atlas, 5, 1776 (town on w. bank of Alabama
r.). Couaoudee.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1814), 163, 1837.
Oouaaao.— Hutchlnfe, Hist. Narr., 83, 1784 (probably
identical). Couaaati.--Alcedo. Die. Geog., i, 676,
1786. Oouaaehate.— MilfoFt, M^moire, 265, 1802.
Ounhatea.— Martin, Hist. La., ii, 206, 1827. Ouaha-
teea.— Maillard, Hist. Texas, 252, 1842. Guah-eh-
tah.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 309, 1851. Guaaa-
die«._Weatherford (1793) in Am. State Pap., Ind.
AfT., 1, 385, 1832. Ouaahetaea.— Coxe, Carolana, 23,
1741. Cutohatea.— Doc. of 1828 in Soc. Geog. Mex.,
267, 1870 (live on E. bank of Trinidad I Trinity] r.) .
Giuuidana.— Rafinesque, introd. Marsnall, Ky., i,
24, 1824. Koo a aah te.— Adair, Am. Ind., 169, 1775.
Ko-aa-telian-ya.— Dorsey, Biloxi MS. Diet.. B.A.E.,
1892 (Biloxi name), auaaaada.— U. 8. Ind. Treat.
(1827), 420, 1837. aua-aaw-daa.— Ind. Aff. Rep.,
279, 1846 (on Canadian r., Ind. Ter). dueaadaa.—
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 97, 1836.
Queaeda.— Scheamerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hist.
Ck>ll., 2d 8., II, 18, 1814. duesedana.— Rafinesque,
introd., Marshall, Ky., i, 24. 1824. ShitL— Popu-
lar abbreviation of Koasati in Texas.
Koasati. Two towns of the Creek Na-
tion, both in the s. part of their territory
near Canadian r., one a few miles w. of
Eufaula, the other w. of Hilabi, Okla.
Koaaaati.-Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., ii, 186, 1888.
Koatlna (Q'od^Lna). A Bellacoola vil-
lage on a bay of the same name at the s.
entrance of Bentinck arm, coast of British
Columbia.
Koa'tlna.— Boas in 7th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 3,
1891. Q'oa'Lna.— Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist., II, 48, 1898.
Kocheyali. A former Yokuts tribe that
perhaps live<l on Kings r., Cal. — A. L.
Kroeber, inf'n, 1906. See Maripoaan
Family.
Kochinisli-yaka. The Yellow-corn clan
of the Keresan pueblos of A coma and
Laguna, N. Mex. See Yaka.
K6ohi]iiah-yaka-hano«i>.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop.,
IX, 349, 1896 (Laguna form: j/d*a=!*com'; hanoeh=x
'people'). K6ohmiah7aka-hanoq«i>.— Ibid. (Acoma
form) .
Kochkok. A Chnagmiut Eskimo village
on the right bank of Yukon r., Alaska,
near the Kuskokwim portage.
Kochkogamute.— Raymond (1869) quoted by Ba-
ker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kokok.— Baker,
ibid.
Kodiak. A town on St Paul's harbor,
at the E. end of Ko<liak id., Alaska, es-
tablished among the Eskimo by the Rus-
sians in 1789 as a center of the fur trade.
Pop. 288 in 1880, 495 in 1890, 341 in 1900.
Ka^ak.— Bruce, Alaska, map, 1885. Pavlovsky
gavan.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 75, 1893 (Rus-
sian: 'Paul's harbor'; natives still callit Oavan,
•the harbor*). Saint Paul.— Petroflf, Rep. on
Alaska, 28, 1884.
Kodlimam ( Qodlimam ) . A summer set-
tlement of the Eskimo of the plateau of
Nugumiut, on the e. entrance to Frobisher
bay, BaflSn land. — Boas in 6th Rep. B. A.
E., map, 1888.
Koeats. Given as a Ute band or tribe in
N. central Nevada, but evidently Paviot-
so.— Powell in H. R. Ex. Doc. 86, 43d
Cong., Ist sess., 1, 1874.
Koeentwakah. See Complanter.
Koekoaainok ( Qoe^goaaindx^ * people
from the river Koais^). A gens of the
Tenaktak, a Kwakiutl tribe. — Boas in
Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 331, 1897.
Koekoi ( K'de^koi ) . A Squawmish village
community on the w. side of Howe sd.,
Brit. Ck)l.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A.
S., 474, 1900.
Koeksotenok ( *peopleof theother side' ).
A Kwakiutl tribe on Gilford id., Brit.
Col. The gentes are Naknahula, Memog-
gyins,Gyigyilkam,andNenelpae. Inl8&
they lived with the Mamalelekala in a
town called Memkumlis. Kwak wakes
was probably a former village. Pop. 60
in 1885, the last time the name appears.
K'we'k'sot'enoq.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 54, 1890. Kwick-so-te-no.— Can. Ind. Aff.,
189, 1884. Kwiksot*enoq.— Boas in Bui 1 . Am. Geog.
Soc.. 227. 1887. Kwik'-so-tino.— Dawson in Trans,
Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, sec. ii, 74. Qoe'zsot'Sndx.—
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 330, 1897. aviek-
BULL. 30]
KOETAS KOIAFM
721
■al-i-nnt.— Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859.
Qwi'q* •otIe'iua«.--Boa8 in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist., v.pt. 1.156,1902.
Koetas (Qloe^tas, * earth-eaters'). A
tooily of the Raven clan belonging to the
Kaigani or Alaskan branch of Ilaida.
According to the southern Haida they
derived their name from the fact that
in a legendary Haida town whence all
the Ravens came (see Tadji-laiKts) thtyy
used to live near the trails. The Kai-
gani themselves, however, say that when
they first settled at Hlgan, on the w.
coast of Graham id., they were called,
from the town, Hlun-staa-lanas (i^An
sta^a WtiaSf * holding-up-the-fin-town-
people * ) . A f terwani t ney 1 )egan to cook
and eat a plant called hlkunit (U/u^nit)
which grows under the salmon-berry
bushes. Some of them then joked at
this, saying, ** We are even eating earth,"
hence the name Koetas. On the Alaska
mainland their town was Sukkwan.
There were 5 subdivisions: Chats- hadai,
Huadjinaas-hadai, Nakalas-hadai, Hlka-
onedis, and Naden-hadai. (j. r. s.)
i:«*o«'t»«.—Boa.s 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes (^an..22,
1898. ftioe'tai.— Swanton, Ccmt. Haida, 272, 1905.
Koetenok ( Q' oe^ten6x, * raven * ) . A clan
of the Bellabella, a Kwakiutl trilye. —
Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 328, 1897.
Koga (Qo^ga). A small Haida town
formerly on McKay harbor, Cumshewa
inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.,
which was oocupieil by a family of the
same name, of low social rank, who after-
ward moved to Skedans. — Swanton, Cont.
Haida, 279, 1905.
Kogahl-lanas ( Qo^gaf Wnas^ * people of
the town of Koga* ).* A small division of
the Kagials-kegawai family group of the
Haida. They were of low social rank.
Their town, called Koga, once stood in
McKay harbor, and they are said to have
been won in a gambling contest by the
Kagials-kegawai. — Swanton,Cont. Haida,
269, 1905.
Kogals-kan {Kloga'h hm, * sand-spit
point * ) . A former Haida town on Masset
inlet, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.,
occupied by the Aostlan-lnagai. — Swan-
ton, Cont. Haida, 281, 1905.
Kogangas {Oogd^flaSf 'sea-otters'). An
extinct family group belonging to the
Raven clan of the Haida. Their towns
stood near the modem town of Skidegate,
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. (j. r. s.)
X'Sri'BfM.— Boas, 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can-
ada, 24, 1898. Qogi'nat.— Swanton, Ck>nt. Haida,
269,1905.
Xoginng. A Kiatagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage at the mouth of Kvichak r., Bristol
bay, Alaska; pop. 29 in 1880, 133 in 1890,
533 in 1900.
Sdcgiiuf.— Petroff in 10th CenRUR, Alaska, 17,
1884. Kogiung.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Kogluk. A Kaviagmiut village at C.
Nome, Alaska. — Eleventh Census, Alaska,
162, 1893.
Koguethagechton. See mdie-eifes.
Kogui {Kf7piiiy 'elks'). A tribal divi-
sion of the Kiowa. — Mooney in 14th Rep.
B. A. E., 1079, 1896.
Kohamutkikatska (Creek: koha 'cane',
7n ("i tk i * cut off ' , kdtf<k<t ' bn^ken ' ) . A for-
mer upper Creek town with 123 families
in 1832. Location unknown.
Koho-mats-ka-oatch-ka.— Campbell (183<)) in H. R.
Doc. 271. 2.Mh Cong., 2(1 ses.s.. 20, 1838. Ko ho mut-
kigartskar. — SchoolcTaft, Iiid. Tribes, iv, 678,
1854. Ko-ho-muU-ka-catch-ka.— Crawford (1836)
in H. R. Kx. Doc. 274, op. cit., 24. Ko-ho-muU-ki-
gar.— H.R. Ex.Doc.276, 2Uh Cong., Ist sess., 162,
18.%. Kohomutskigartokar.— Sen. Kx. Doc. 425,
24th Cong.. 1st sess., 299, 18:^6.
Kohani. A subtribe or band of the
Karankawa. They are mentioned as late
as 1824 in connection with the Coaques,
from whii'h it seems probable that they
were one of the ])an<ls living ni*ar Colo-
rado r., Texas. They may be identical
with the (iuevenes ofCabeza de Vaca.
Gobanes. — Joiitel cjuoted bv Barciu, Ensavo, 271,
1723. Cohannies.— Texas Hist. Ass. Qiiar., VI, 250,
1903. Coxanes.— Soils (1768) cittni l)v U. E. Bolton,
inf'n, 1906. Ciyanes, Ripperdft (1777), ibid. Cu-
janos.— Bollaert in Jour. Kthnol. Soc. Lond., ii,
276, 18.50. Cuyanes.— Bollaert <iuoted by (iatsehet,
Karankawa Inds., ;y>, 1S91. Kouans.— .loutel.
Jour. Voy.. 90, 1719. ftuevenes.— Caboza de Vara
(1555), Smitb trans., 137,1871 (possibly identieal).
(lujanes.— RipperdA (1777) eited 1)V II. E.Bolton,
inrn, 1906. Huoan.— Joutel (1(>87) in Margry,
D6c., in, 288, 1878. ^
Kohasaya (Ko-ha-sdif-a). A former
pueblo of the Sia, x. of the i)resent Sia
fueblo, N. Mex. — Bandelier in Arch,
nst. Papers, iv, 196, 1892. See Kakan-
ntzatin.
Kohashti (* starting? place of canoes*).
A Klamath settlement, of 5 or 6 houses in
1890, at the x. e. end of Upper Klamath
lake, Oreg., 3 m. n. of Yaaga; once the
site of the Klamath Indian agency.
Kohaahti.— Gatsch<»t in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., n,
pt. I, XXX, 1890. Ko-was-ta. — Applegate in Ind.
AfT. Rep., 89, 1866. Kuhuishti.— Gatsehet, op. cit.
Skohuashki.— Ibid.
Kohatsoath. A sept of the Toquart, a
Xootka tril)e. — Boas in (>th R(»p. N. W.
Tribes Canada, 32, 1890.
Kohhokking ('at the land of pines.* —
Hewitt) . A Delaware village in 1 758 near
** Painted Post,'* in SteulH*n co., N. Y., or
Ehnira, formerlv called Painted Post, in
Chemung co., X. Y. See Alden (1834)
in Mass. Hist. Soc. (^)ll., 3(1 s., vi, 147,
1837.
Kohltiene*8 Village. The summer camp
of a Stikine chief immed KaltT^'n on Sti-
kine r., Alaska; 28 people were there in
1880.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 32,
1884.
Koi. A former Pomo village on Lower
Lake id., Lake co., Cal. The island was
kno>\'n to the Indians by the same name.
See Makhelchel. (s. a. b.)
Koi ( 'panther' ) . A Chickasaw phratr>'.
K6a.— (Jibbs quoted by Gatschet, Creek Migr.
I^g.. I. 96, 1884. Xoi.— Topeland quoted by Mor-
gan, Anc. Soc., 163, 1877.
Koiauxn ('to pick berries*). A village
Bull. 30—05-
-46
722
KOIKAHTENOK KOKOP
[1
of the Ntlakyapamuk on the b. side of
Eraser r., 25 m. above Yale, Brit. Col.
Bolton Bar.— Name given by whites. Koia'om.—
Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., ii, 169, 1900.
auiyone.— Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872
(probably identical).
Koikahtenok ( QoVh'tixiendXy 'whale i>eo-
ple') . A clan of the Wikeno, a Kwakiutl
tril)e. — Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895,
328, 1897.
Koikoi {Xo?.\r(Hi, a supernatural being,
sometimes described as living in ponds:
used as a mask by the Lillooet» many
coastSalish, and thesouthern Kwakiutl. —
Boas ) . A Siiuawmish village comnmnity
on Burrard inlet, Brit. Col.
ftoiyoi.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900.
Xoe'zoe.— Boas, inf n, 1905.
Koinchusli ('wild cat'). A Chickasaw
clan of the Koi phratry.
Ko-in-chnth.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 163, 1877. Ko-in-
tchush.— Gat«cliet. (^reek Migr. Leg., i, 96, 1884.
Koinisun ( A'om^^M/i). An Ita Eskimo
settlement on Inglefield gulf, n. (Ireen-
land. — Stein in Petermanns Mitt., no. 9,
map, 1902.
Koiskana (from Av><"v<, or ktrd^t's, a bush
the bark of which is used for making
twine; some say it is a Stuwigh or Atha-
pascan name, but this seems doubtful).
A village of the Nicola band of Ntlakya-
pamuk near Nicola r., 29 m. above Spences
Bridge, Brit. Col.; pop. 52 in 1901, the
last time the name appears.
Koaikaiut'.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv.
Can., 4, 1899. Koiskana'.— Teit in Mem. Am. Mus.
Nat. Hist., II, 174, 1900. Kuinskanaht.— Can. Ind.
Aflf. for 1892, 313. Kwoi»-kun-a'.— Dawson in Trans.
Rov. Soc. Can. for 1891, sec. ii, 44. Pitit Creek.—
Teft, op. cit. (name given by whites). Qais-
kana'.— Teit. op. cit. ftuinskanaht. — Can. Ind.
Aflf. for 1898. 419. auinikanht.— Ibi«l. for 1901, 166.
auis-kan-aht.- Ibid, for 1886. 232. auu-kan-aht-
Ibid, for 1K83. 191.
Koiyo (K6i-yo). A former Chumashan
village at Canada del Coyote, Ventura
CO., Cal. — Henshaw, Buenaventura MS.
vocab., B. A. K, 1884.
Kojejewininewng ( Kuchlchi uhitrit itiig;
from kuchichhi\ referring to the straits and
bends of the rivers and lakes on which
thev resided; viinhrug^ 'people')- A
division of the Chippewa formerly living
on Rainv lake and nver on the n. bound-
ary of Minnesota and in the adjacent part
of British America.
Alg^nquins of Bainy Lake. — Lewis and Clark.
Travels, 55, 1806. K^h^hi Wenenewak.— Long,
Exped. St Peter's R., ii, 153, 1824. Ko-je-je-win-
in-e-wug.— Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
V, 84, 1885. Kotchitohi-wininiwak.— Gatschet,
Oiibwa MS., B. A. E., 1882. Kutcitciwininiwag.—
Wm. Jones, infn, 1906. Lao la Pluie Indians.—
Hind, Red River Exped., i, 82, 1860. Eainy-lake
Indiana.- Schoolcraft (1838) in H. R. Doc. 107, 25th
Cong., 3d WS.S., 9, 1839.
KolLaitL {Qo-QaVd^ *maggot-fly,' because
there are many found there in summer).
An abandoned Chilliwack village on
Chilli wack r., s. Brit. Col.— Hill-Tout in
Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can., 4, 1902.
Kokaitk. A division of the Bellabella,
living on x. Millbank sd.
K'o'kaitq.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can..
52, 1890. Kok-wai-y-toch.— Kane, Wand, in N.
Am., app., 1859. Kook-wai-wai-toh.— Tolmie and
Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 117b, 1884. Koqueifh-
tnk.— Brit. Col. map, 1872. d'o'ca-itz.- Boas in
Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 828. ISffl.
Kokaman. Mentioned by writers be-
tween 1851 and 1855 as a Karok villa^
on Klamath r., Humboldt co., Cal. In
1851 the chiefs name was said to be Pa-
namonee, but this is probably an error,
as Panamenik is the Karok village at
Orleans.
Coo-oo-man.— McKec (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,32d
Cong., spec, sess., 161, 1853 (upper Klamath tribe).
Ckwk-o-mans.— Ibid., 215 (given as Hupa band).
Ckw-ko-nan.— Ibid., 194 (a Patesick band). Gok-ka-
mans. — Meyer, Nach dem Sacramento, 282, 1856.
Kokhittan (* box-house people'). A
Tlingit social group, forming a subdivi-
sion of the Kagwantan, q. v.
Kok hit tan.— Swanton, field notes, B. A. £., 1904.
Kukettan.- Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 113, 1885. Kn-
kittan.— Ibid.
XolaiM-}iA^u{K^dk^-na8:had^d^ij 'snow-
owl house people * ) . Given by Boafi ( 5th
Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 27, 1889) as a
subdivision of the Yaku-lanas, a ^unily of
the Raven clan of the Alaskan Haida, out
in reality it is only a house name belong-
ing to that family group. ( j. k. s. )
Koko. An Ikogmiut Eskimo village on
the N. bank of the Yukon, Alaska, telow
Ikogmiut.
KoonJcomut.— Post route map, 1903. Koko. —Baker,
Geog. Diet. Ala.ska, 1902.
Kokoaenk {Kokoae^nk') . A village of the
Matsqui tribe of Cowichan at the s. w.
point of Sumass lake, near Fraser r. , Brit.
Col.— Boas in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 454,
1894.
Kokob. The Burrowing-owl clan of the
Hopi of Oraibi, Arizona.
Kokob.— Voth in Field Columb. Mus. Pub., no. 65,
13, 1901. Kokop.— Stephen quoted by Mindeleff
in 8th Rep.B. A.E.,l(fe,l891 (cf. Kokop, the Fire-
wood clan).
Kokoheba {Ko-ko-he^-bd,). The name of
a village which has come to be applied to
an almost extinct Mono tribe in Burr val-
ley, with one village over the divide, look-
ing into the valley of Sycamore cr., n. of
Kmgs r., Cal. — Merriam in Science, xix,
916,. June 17, 1904.
Kokoiap (K'okoiap\ * place of strawber-
ries ' ) . A village of the Ntlakyapamuk on
Fraser r., above Siska, Brit. Col. — Hill-
Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can., 5, 1899.
Kokolik. A Kukpaurungmiut Eskimo
village at Pt Lay, Arctic coast, Alaska,
with 30 inhabitants in 1880.
Kokomo ('young grandmother'). A
Miami village, named after a chief, that
stood on the site of the present Kokomo,
Ind.
Ko-ko-mah village.— Hough, map in Ind. Geol.
Rep.. 1883.
Kokop. The Firewood phratry of the
Hopi, comprising the Kokop ( Firewood),
Ishauu (Coyote), Kwewu (Wolf), Sik-
yataiyo (Yellow Fox), Letaiyo (Gray
Fox ) , Zrohona ( smal 1 mammal, sp. incog » ) ,
Masi (Masauuh, a supernatural being),
Tuvou (Pifion), Hoko (Juniper), Awata
(Bow), Sikyachi (small yellow bird), and
TuN-uchi (small red bird) clans. Accord-
BULL. 30]
KOKOI
-KOMAOHO
723
ing to tradition they came from the Rio
Grande, building the pueblo of Sikyatki,
which they occupied until its (iestruction
in late prenistoric times.
Ko'-kop nyii-md. — FewkcM in Am. Anthn)p., vii,
40», 1894 {nyH-mii = * phratry ' ) .
Kokop. The Firewood dan of the Hopi,
the ancestors of wlioni came from Jeinez
pueblo, New Mexico.
Kokop winwii.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. K.. 5M,
1900 ( win ird = • clan * ) . Ko-kop-wim-wu.— Fe w kcs
in Am. Anthrop., vii, 403, 1894. Ku-ga.— Bourkc,
Snake Danoe,117, 1884 (grivon doubtfully).
Kokopki (Hopi: * house of the Firewoo<l
I)eople* ). A large, ancient, ruine<l pueblo,
attnbutcKl by the Hopi to the Fircwooil
clan, originally a Jemez people; situated
on a low mesa near Maupin's store, at
Mormon John's npring, in Jeditoh valley,
2 J m. E. of Ream's Cany<m school, Tu-
sayan, n. k. Arizona. See Mindeleff in
8tli Rep. B. A. E., 590, 1898; Hough in
Rep. Nat. Mus. 11H)1, 8.S3 et. seii., 1908.
Cottonwood ruin.— HouKh, op. cit. (name given
locally by whitos). Delouiacat.— Ibid, ('wild
gourd • : Navahoname). HornHouie.— MindelefT,
op. ('it. Kokopki.— Fewko.s inf'n, 1906 {ki^-.
* nouse'). Kokopnyama.— Hough, op. cit. (^" name
refers to the clans which lived here and is prol)-
ably not the ancient designation of the village").
Kokoskeeg. An unidentified trilA'
which, according to Tanner (Narrative,
316, 1830), was known to the Ottawa and
was so called by them.
Koksilah. A Cowichan tril)e in Cowi-
Uilnn vallev, k. coast of Vancouver id.,
opi>osite Admiral id.; i)op. 12 in 1904.
Ck»kMilah.— ('an. Ind. AfT., Ixi. 1877. Kokeuti-
lah.— Brit. ('ol. map, ln<l. AIT., Vi<toria. 1872.
Kokulah.— €an. In<l. AfT.. pt. n. 164. 1901. Kulku-
itfla.— Boas, MS.. B. A. K., 1887.
Koksoagmint (*mM)ple of Big river'}.
A subtribe of the Sukinimiut »kimo liv-
ing on Koksoak (Big) r., n. I^brador.
They numbered fewer than 30 individuals
in 1893.
Koakramint.— Boa.s in Am. Antiq., 40, 1888 (mi.s-
print) . Koksoamnyut.— Turner in 1 1th Rep. B. A .
£., 176, 1894. KokMak Innuit.— Il)id., 179. Kok-
soak river people. — Ibid. Kouksoarmiut. — Boas in
6th Rep. B. A. K., 4(53. 470. 1888.
Kol^an. The Spider clan of the Hopi.
X6h&ang.— Voth, Oniibi Summer Snake Cere-
mony. 282. 1908. Kohkaunamu.— Dorst»y and Voth.
Oraibi Soval, 9, 1901. Ko'-kvan-a.— Stephen in 8th
Rep. B. A. E., 38, 1891. Kokyan winwii.— Fewkt^s
in 19th Rep. B. A. K., fi84, 1900. Ko'-kyun-iih wiin-
^rii._Fewke8 in Am. Anthrop., vn, 404, 1894.
Kolelakom ( Qole^laodm ) . A S( i uawminh
village community on Bowen i<l., Howe
Bd., Brit. Col.— Hill-Tout in Kep. Brit. A.
A. S., 474, 1900.
Kolmakof. A Moravian mission founded
in 1885 among the Kuskwogmiut Eskimo
on Kuskokwim r., Alaska, ^[)0 m. from its
mouth. It is on the site of a Russian
redoubt and trading post, first established
in 1832 by Ivan Simonson Lukeen, after
whom it was nanunl for a time. In 1841
it was partially destroyeil by the Indians
with fire, whereupcm'it was rebuilt by
Alexander Kolmafeof and took his nam(\
The people are inixe<i Eskimo and Ath-
apascan. See Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska,
1902.
Kolmakof Redoubt.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E.,
map. 1899. Kolmakovsky.— Halloek in Nat. Geog.
Mag., IX, 86, 1898,
Kolok. A former Chumashan village
at the old mill in C'arpinteria, e. of Santa
Barbara, Cal.
K'-a'-lak.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. voeab.,
B. A. K., 1884.
Koloma. A divisicm of the Nishinam,
at Coloma, l)etween American r. and the
s. fork of Yuba r., in Eldorado co., (/ai.
Colomas.— Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 21,1874.
Ko-lo'-ma.— l*owers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in,
315, 1877.
Koltsiowotl {K'oltsVou'otl). A tlivision
of the Xanaimo on the e. coast of Van-
couver id. — Boas in oth Ri»p. N. W. TrilH»s
Can., 32, 1889.
Kolnschan Family. A linguistic family
embracing the Tlingit (ij. v. ). The name
is said by i)all to Ixi derivtHl from Russian
k'<tlui<hkaj * a little trough,* but by others
from the Aleut word hihuja, signifying
*a dish,' the allusion l)eing to the concave
dish-shape<l labrets worn by the Tlingit
women.
xHaidah.— Seoiiler in Jour. Roy. (ieoR. Soe., XI,
219, 1841 (same as his Northern) . :^^Kalothians.—
Dall in Proc. Am. A. A. S., 375, 1885 (gives tribes
and iMmulation) . =. Klen-e-kate. — Kane, Wander-
iiijfs of an Artist, app., 18.59 (a census of N. W.
coast tribes classitiiHl by language). =Klen-ee-
kate.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 489, 1855. <Ko-
looch. — I^atham in Trans. Pbilol. S<k*. ]x)nd., ii,
31-50, 1846 (tends to merge Koloo(>h into Ks<iui-
maux): Latham in Jour. Ethnol. IkK*. Lond., i,
163, 1848 (compariMl with E-skimo language);
L4itham, OpiLscula, 259, 276, 1860. :^^KoloMhen.—
Berghaus (^1845), Physik. Atla.s, map 17, 1848; ibid.,
1852; Bu.s<"nmann 8 j>u render aztefc. Sprache 680,
1869; Berghaus. Physik. Atlas, map 72, 1887.
<Koluch.— Lilt ham, Nat. Hi.st. Man, 294, 1850
(more likely forms a subdivision of Eskimo than
a sepanite class; includes Kenay of Cook inlet,
Atna of Copper r.. Kolt^hani. Ugalents, Sitkans,
Tungaas. lukhuluklait, Magimut, Inkalit; Di-
gothi and Nehanni are classed as a "doubtful
Kolilches"). «^Koluschan.— Powell in 7th Kep.
B. A. K.. 85, 1891. =Kolusohen.— Gallatin in Trans,
and (\)11. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 14. 1836 (Lslands
and adjacent coast from (J0° to 55° N. lat.). = Ko-
luMhiana.— Prichanl, Phys. Hist. Mankind, v. 433,
1847 (follows Gallatin); Scouler (1846) in Jour.
Ethnol. S<K'. Lond., I. 231, 1*48. =Koluih.—
I^tham, Elem. Comp. Philol., 401, 1862 (mere men-
tion of family with short vocabulary). bKouU-
•ohen. — (lallatin in Trans, and Coll. Am. Antiq.
S<H'., II, 306, 1836; (;allatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol.
S<M'., 1 1, pt . 1 , e. 77, 1848 ( Koulischen and Sitka lan-
guiiges); (iallatin in Sch<H)lcraft, Ind. Tribes, in,
402,1853(Sitka,lwt.52Oand59°lat.). xHorthem.—
ScoulerinJour. Roy. (ieog. Soc. Lond., XI, 218, 1841
(includes Kol(Kshe's and Tun Gha.s«e). =TliliB-
keet.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., Cent, and
So. Am., api>., 460, 462. 1878 (from Mt St Ellas to
Na.s8 r.; includes Tgalenzes, Yakutats, Chilkats,
Hoodnid.M, Hoodslnoos, Takoos, Auks, Kakas,
Stikines, Eeliknfts, Tungass, Sitkas); Bancroft,
Nat. Races, ii i, 562. 579, 1882. =Thlinketa.— Dall in
Proc. Am. A. A. 8., xviii, 268, 269, 1869 (divided
into Sitka-kwan, Stahkin-kwan, ♦•Yakutats").
=Thlinkit.— Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs.,
14, 18^ ( vocab. of Skutkwan sept; also mapshow-
ing distribution of family); Berghaus, Physik.
Atlas, map 72, 1887. ^Thluikithen.— Holmbergin
Finland Soe.. 284, 1856, fldeBuschmann. 676, 1859.
^=T'linkeU.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 1, 86,
1877 (divided into Yflk'fitflts, Chilkftht'kwftn,
Sitka-kwan, StAkhin'-kwan, KygAh'ni). =Tlin-
kit.— Dall in Proc. Am. A. A. S., 375. 1885 (enu-
merates tribt's and gives iK)pulation).
Komacho (Ko-iimf-cho), A name ai)-
l)lied by Powers (Gont. N. A. Ethnol.,
ill, 172, 1877) to the Pomo living in
1^- V
724
KOMAROF KONGTALYUI
[B. A.B.
Rancheria and Anderson valleys, Mendo-
cino CO., Cal., and said by him to have
been derived from the name of their cap-
tain. The people living in these two val-
leys belonged to two different dialectic
groups and in aboriginal times had no par-
ticular common interests. The connec-
tion of the two is probably entirely sub-
sequent to white settlement, (s. a. b. )
Komarof. A Chnagmiut village at the
N. mouth of Yukon r., Alaska; pop. 13
in 1880.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska,
map, 1884.
Komarof.— Nelson in 18th Kep. B. A. E., map, 1899.
KomarovOdinotchka.— Petroff, Rep. on Ala.Mka, 67,
18H0 (= • KomarofTs trading post^).
Komenok (* wealthy people'). An ex-
tinct sept of the Lekwiltok, a Kwakiutl
tribe.
K''o'm*enoq.— Boa.s in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
65. 1890. (i'o'm'enox.— Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for
1896, 332, 1897.
Komertkewotche (derived in part from
Komertj the Pima name of the Sierra Es-
trella). A Pima settlement on the Rio
Gila., 8. Ariz. — t^^n Kate quoted bv Gat-
schet, MS., B. A. E., xx, 199, 1888!
Komkonatko ('head water*, or *head
lake*). An Okinagan village 21 m.
from the town of Kwilchana on Nicola
lake, Brit. Col.
Fish Lake.— Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., ii,
174, 1900 (name given by whites). Komko-
na'tko.— Ibid.
KomkntiB {Q^d^m(jiiUi8). A Bellacoola
village on the s. side of Bellacoola r.,
Brit. Col., near its mouth. It was one of
the eight villages called Nuhalk.
K-omotEs.— Boas in 7th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 3.
1898. KougotiB.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 147, 1862.
d'o'mqutis.— Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.,
II, 49, 1898.
KomkyntiB ( * the rich side * ) . A sept of
the Kwakiutl proper, living at Ft Rupert,
Brit. Col., and said to count 70 warriors in
1 866. Boas in 1890 called them a gens of
the Walaskwakiutl; in 1895 a sept of the
tribe.
Oum-que-kis.— Kane, Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859.
Komiu'tiB.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt., 131. 1887.
K'o'mkyutiB.— Boas in 6th Rep. N.W.TribesCan.,
54, 1890. Kum-cutcB.— liOrd, Natur. in Brit. Col.. I,
165. 1866. KumkewtiB.— Brit. Col. map, 1872. Lo'-
kuili'la.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 1887.
a'o'mk'utiB.— Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 330,
1897.
KomkyntiB. A gens of the Goasila, q. v.
Komoyne ('the rich ones'). A division
of the true Kwakiutl living at Ft Rupert,
near the n. end of Vancouver id. They
are more often known by the war name
Kueha ( * slayers ' ) . Thegentes are Gyig-
yilkam, Haailakyemae, Haanatlenok, Ku-
kwakum, and Yaaihakemae. Pop. 42 in
1901, 25 in 1904.
KuehV— Boas in Bull. Am. Geog. Soc., 227. 1887
(•murderers*). Kue'qa.— Boas In 6th Rep. N. W.
Tribes Can., 55, 1890. Kue'xa.— Boas in Rep. Nat.
Mus. for 1895, 330, 1897 (war name: 'the murder-
ers'). Kuicha.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5,
131,1887. Kwe-ah-kah.— Can* Ind. Aflf., 189, 1884.
Kwi-ah-kah.— Ibid.. 364. 1897. a'o'moyue.— Boas
in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895, 330, 1897. aua-kan.—
Lord, Natur. in Brit. Col., i, 165, 1866. (lueackar.—
Can. Ind. Aff.. 143, 1879. Quee ha Ona colt.—
Work quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 488,
1855. anee-ha-qua-coU.— Work (183(M1) in Kane,
Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859 ( = Kueha + Kwa-
kiutl).
Komoyne. A gens of the K ueha division
of the lekwiltok. They live with the
Wi weakam at the village of Tatapowis, on
Hoskyn inlet, Brit. Col. Pop. 32 in 1887,
the last time they were separately enu-
merated.
Ah-mah-oo.— Can. Ind. Aff. 1887. 309, 1888. K«*6-
moyue.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 56,
1890. Q'o'moyne.— Boas m Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895,
331, 1897.
Kemps {Komps). ASquawmish village
communitv on the right hank of Squaw-
misht r., iBrit. Col.— Hill-Tout in Rep.
Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900.
Kona ( Qond ) . A former Tlingit town in
tlie Sitka country, Alaska. ( J. r. s. )
Kona-kegawai ( Q.'o'na qe^gawa-iy * those
born at Skedans * ). One of the most im-
e>rtant families of the Eagle clan of the
aida, part of whom livS at Skedans,
while the remainder resided at Kloo,
which was owned by their chief. The
Kona-kegawai, Djiguaahl-lanas, Stawas-
haidagai, and Kaiahl-lanas claimed de-
scent from one woman. (j. r. s. )
K'unake'owai.— Boas in 12th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 25, 1898. Qlo'na qe'gawa-i.—S wanton, Cont.
Haida, 272, 1905. ^
Kondiaronk. See Adario.
Konekonep. An Okinagan band for-
merly living on a creek known to the In-
dians by the same name, in Washington.
Kone-Konep.— Stevens in Ind. Aff. Rep., 445, 1864.
Konekonl'p.— Gibbs in Pae. R. R. Rep., i, 412,1865.
Konekotay . A d i vision of the Delawares,
formerly in New^ Jersey. — De Laet (ca,
1633) in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., i,
303, 1841.
Kongiganak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo
village near the entrance to Kuskokwim
bay, Alaska; pop. 175 in 1880.
Koiigijnuuuramute.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska,
16, 18^. Sonigunogumut.— Nelson in 18th Rep.
B. A. E., map, 1899.
Kongik. A Malemiut Eskimo village on
Buckland or Konguk r., Seward penin.,
Alaska; pop. 90 in 1880, 54 in 1890.
Kangoot.— Keilv, Arct. Eskimos, 15, 1890. Kencog-
miut. — Eleventh Census, Alaska, lt>5, 1893. &oa-
ngamute.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 4, 1884.
Kongik.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Konglo {Kong^'lo), The Com clan of
the Tewa of Hano pueblo, n. e. Ariz.
They numbered 23 individuals in 1893.
See KiLYi.
K*'-ai.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 89, 1891
(Hopiname). Ko'«»-lo.— Ibid. (Tewa name). Ku-
lon-to-wa.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop.,vii,166, 1894.
Kata'n. — Stephen, op. cit. (Navaho name).
Kongtalyni (iiro/T/«%wi, * black boys';
sometimes also called SindU/uiy * Sindi's
children'). A tribal division of the
Kiowa, now practically extinct, whose
members were said to be of darker color
than the rest of the tribe, which, if true,
might indicate foreign origin. Sindi is
the great mythic hero of the Kiowa. —
Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1079, 1896.
BULL. 30]
KONI KOPAGMirT
725
Koni. A divieion of the Miwok s. of
Cosumnes r., in Amatior aiid Eldorado
COS., Cal.
Oawneet.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, -156, 1H7-I.
Kt'-nL— Powera in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. iii. :M9.
1877. Koni.—A. L. Kkh-Iht. inf'ii, 190»k
Konkapot A Mahican sairhoni who, in
1724, joined in the nale of the territory
comprising the "uprerand lower IIoupu-
tonic townships V; his captain's con imis-
sion was given him bv (iov. Belcher in
1734, and he succeedwl to the chieftaincy
about 1744. Heem})ractHl Christianity ancl
invited the Moravian niis8i(mariestolal)or
among his peoi)le, the Westenhuck, who
became known as Sto<*kl)ridge Indians
after they wereChristianiztHi and reniove<l
to the mission, exa*pt such as went to join
the Christian Indians in Pennsylvania.
The chief, who nKx^ived the Christian
name John, and was n^cognized by the
authorities at Albany and Boston as the
head of the Mahican, they having had
their council firi»at Westenhuck, was long
the patriarch of the Indian eomnuinity at
Stoclcbridge (RuttenlnT, THIk'S Hudson
R., 88, 1872). The name 8urvive<l an a
I family designation among the Stock-
bridges at least as late as ISeU, a Ix>vi
Konkapot serving in the civil war (Nel-
son, Inds. N. J., 147, 1S94).
Konkau (KiV nmmf h'lui, *valley earth *) .
A formerly jwpulous division of the
Maidu, living in Butte Co., Cal., in the
valley of C-oncow cr., a trii)utary of the
w. branch of Feather r. They are now
on Round Valley res., Men<l<)cino co.,
and numl)ered 171 in 1905.
OaaoMU. — Keane in Stanfonl. (?ompcn(l.,.')05,1878.
Oaaoow.— Ind. AfT. Rep., 31 », 1874. Caw-Caw.—
Ibid.. 1867, 111. 18«'.8. Con-Con's.— Ibid.. 75, 1870.
Ooa-CouB.— Ibid., 18H7, 121, 1868. Con-Cow.— Ibid.,
1863, 98, 1864. Cou-oows.-Ibid., 18(>4, 119, 18(>5.
Oow-Oow.— Ibid.. 180,1 WW. In'ihin.— A.L.Kroebor,
Infn, 1908 (modern Yuki name). Kftnkau.— (Mir-
tin, MS. vwab., B. A. E.. 18»S. Onocows.— In<l.
Aff. Rep., 12, 1865 (misprint). Oonoows.— Ibid., 112.
Konomihn. A sul)sidiary tril)e of the
Shasta, living at the forks of Salmon r..
Siskiyou co., Cal., 'extending 7 m. up the
8. fork and 5 m. up the n. fork. Their
langua^ is very divergent from that of
the main Inxly of Shtu^ta. ( r. b. d. )
Konope. A Clatsop village < >n Columl)ia
r., near its nnrnth, in Clatf*op <•<>., Greg.
Koaapee. — Lyman, Hist. On^gon. i. 171, 190:t.
Koao^pe.— Boas, Chinook Texts, 274. 1894.
Kontareahronon. The Huron name of a
people mentioned in the 17th centur\' as
living H. of St Lawrence r., on the author-
ity of Ragueneau*s map. The name evi-
dently defdgnate<l the mhahitants of the
Huron village of Contarea (q. v.). Stn*
Jes. Rel. 1640, 35, 1858. (.i. x. b. n.)
Koo (AV-o, *huffalo*). A elan of the
Tewa pueblo of San IMefonso, N. Mex.
i:6o-td^.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop.. rx. 349, WM\
{idda---^ 'IKjople').
Kooji ('wolf'). Given l>v Dawson
(Queen Charlotte Ids., 134, 1880) as the
name of one of the 4 Ilaida clans. There
were only 2 clans, however, and the Wolf
was not one of them. (.i. r. s.) .
Kookotlane {KmuidtUYm). A Bella-
coi^la <livisi<m at the town of Niiskelst,
Bellacoolar., Brit. Col.— Boa«in7th Rep.
N. W. TrilK^sCan., 3, 1891.
Kooknpvansik {K<'>-okup IV/rwU*, 'medi-
cine paraphernalia*). A fonner IMma
village in s. Arizona. — Ru»»ell, Pima MS.,
B. A. P:., 16, 1902.
Koonahmich. A body of Salish under
the Victoria superinteiidency, Brit. Col.
Pop. 15 in 1882, when last separately
enumerated.
Koo-nah-mich.— 4'an. Iiid. AfT.. '2r>8, 1881!.
Koontie. See Coinitl.
Kooskoo ( KooH'hu/^ *erane * ) . .\ gens of
the Abnaki (<i. v. ). — Morgan, Ane. S(K!.,
174, 1877.
Koossawin ('hunters'). A term com-
pounded from the Chipi)ewa verb kii/nm-
»/'77j, 'hunting,' lit. *the a<*t of walking
alH)Ut' (Jones), and used bv Sehorderaft
(Ind. Tril)e.s vi, 582, 1857) to denote the
hunting tribes.
Koot. The largest viUag(» of the Nuni-
vagmiut, near C. Ktolin, Nunivak id.,
Alaska; pop. 117 in 1890.— Eleventh Cen-
sus, Alaska, 115, 1893.
Kootep ( K(/'()-tep ) . A Yun )k village* on
lower Klamath r., Cal., near Klamath
bluffs.— A. L. KroeU^ infn, UH)5.
Kootpahl. A former village of the At-
falati at Forest (i rove, Washington eo.,
Greg. — Lvman in Greg. Hist. Soe. (^uar.
I, 323, 19(H).
Koowahoke (Koo-uii-hZ-h'^ 'pine re-
gi(m'). A sulKlivisiim of the Delawares
((l-v.). — Morgan, Anc. Soc, 172, 1877.
Kooyah. A r(K)t ( I rt//Tm/<a^(/M/t,v),also
known as "tobacco root," from which a
bread is made by some of the Indians of
the Gregon region. The word is from
one of the Shahaptian or Shoshonean
dialects. (a. f. r. )
Kopaalk. A lx)dy of Salish under Fra-
s<»rsu|K»rinten<lencv, Brit. Col. — (^an. In<l.
Aff., 78, 1878.
Kopagmint ( ' jHK>pleof the great river' ).
An Kskiiuo trilK* at the mouth of ^lae-
kenzie r., Canada. According to Dall
they formerly extended up this river 200
m., but are now confined to ii^lands at
the mouth an<l the Arctic e<»ast w. of Her-
sehel id.
Anenepit. — Pctitot in Hib. Ling, ct Kthnol., in, 11,
1876 ( - 'Eskimo of the ea.sf : so called by Hudson
Bay, I^abrador, and (Trecnland Kskimo). Chig-
lit.'— Ibid., 10. Kopi«-mut.— Dall in Cont. N. A.
Kthnol..!, 10, 1877. &op&nff'-mefin.— Richardson,
Polar Regions, 1861. Kukhpaffmiut.— Eleventh
Census. Alaska, VM), 1893. Kup&nmiun.— Murdoch
in 9th Ren. B. A. E.. 45, 18.>1. Kurvik.— Petitot in
Bui. S<M\ de (Jeog.. 6th 8.. x. 18*2, 1875. Maokeazio
River Eskimo.— Richardson. Aret. Search. Exptnl.,
354, 1851. Tareormeut.— Petitot, Monogr., map.
726
KOPANO KOROVIN8KI
[b. a. ]
1876. Tapeopmeut.— Ibid., 11 (^ 'those who live
by the sea '). Tarr^r-meut. — I>all in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol.,1, 10, 1877. TohigUt.— Petitot, Monogr., 11
(applied to Mackenzie and Anderson r. tribes).
ToigUt.— Ibid.
KOPAGMIUT GIRL. (am. Mu8. NAT. Hi8T.)
Kopano. A small tril)e formerly living
on or near Copano Bay, 8. Texas. There
is no doubt that it belonged to the
Karankawan linguistic stock, but it is sel-
dom mentioned.
Coopanes.— Solis (1768) cited by H. E. Bolton,
infn, 1906. Copanes.— Rivera, Diario, leg. 2602,
1737.
Kopeli. The extinct Pink Conch clan
of the Tewa of Hano pueblo, k. e. Ariz.
Ko'-pe-li.— Fewkesin Am. Anthrop., vii, 166, 1894.
Kopeli-towa.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 352,
1896 {t6wa = 'people').
Kopiwari (Ko-pi-wa^-ri). An ancient
village once occupied by the Nambe peo-
Sle, situated about 5 m. n. of the present
iambe pueblo, N. Mex. (f. w. h.)
Koprino. A Kwakiutl tribe speaking
the Koskimo subdialect. They lived
formerly at the entrance of Quatsino sd.,
and were divided into the Koprino and
Kotlenok clans, but they are now amal-
gamated with the Koskimo proper. Pop.
14 in 1884, the last time they were sepa-
rately enumerated.
0'&'p!enoz«>.— Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.,
V, pt. 2, 393, 1902. 0'*d'p'en6z.— Boasin Rep. Nat.
Mus. 1895, 329, 1897. Keope-«-no.— Can. Ind. Aff . . 190.
18S3. Xeroopinoofh.— Bnt. Col. map. 1872. Kiaw-
pino.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887,
sec. II. 65. Kopnnot.~Can. Ind. Aff., 145, 1879.
KyoVenoq.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
58, 1890.
Koprino. A gens of the Koprino, q. y.
Koquapilt. A Chill iwack town in
lower Chi Hi wack vallev, Brit. Col.; pop.
16 in 1904.
Oo-qua-piet.— Can. Ind. Aff., pt. I, 268, 1889. Oo-
qnopiet.— Ibid.. 809. 1879. OoquopUt.->Ibid., 74,
1878. KoquahpUt.— Ibtd.,78. Koquapilt.— Brit. Col.
map,Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872. Kwaw-kwaw-apiet—
Can. Ind. Aff., 413, 1898. Kwawkwawapilt.— Can.
Ind. Aff., pt. 11, 158, 1901.
Kordlabing. A sunmier settlement of
the Kingnaitmint Eskimo near the head
of an inlet emptving into Cumberland
sd. from the x. sicle.
Qordlubing.— Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. £., map, 1888.
Koremiut. An Eskimo settlement at
Narket fjord, lat. 61° IT'', k. Greenland. —
Nansen, First Crossing, i, 306, 1890.
Kornok. An Eskimo village in w. Green-
land, lat. 64° 30^— Nansen, First Cross-
ing, II, 829, 1890.
Korea. A small tribe, perhaps related
to the Tonika, whose home was on the w.
bank of the Mississippi below the
Natchez, on the Yazoo, and in the
country inter^•ening westward from the
Mississippi. They were visited early in
1682 by La Salle, who described their
cabins as dome-shaped, about 15 ft high,
formed chiefly of large canes, and with-
out windows (Margry, D^c, i, 558,
1876). They were considered warlike,
and were cruel and treacherous. In 1705
a party of them, hired by the French
priest Foucault to convey him by water to
the Yazoo, murdered him and two other
Frenchmen. I^Salle observed that their
language differed from that of the Taensa
and Natchez, but their customs were the
same. All afterward moved to and set-
tled on Yazoo r., Miss., where in 1742
they lived in the same village as the Ya-
zoo. They were then allies of the Chick-
asaw, but were later merged with the
Choctaw and their identity as a separate 1
organization was lost. Allen Wright, '
whose grandfather was of this tribe, in-
formed Gatschet (Creek Migr. I^., i, 48,
1884) that the term Koroa, or (^oroa, was
neither Choctaw nor Chickasaw, and that
the Koroa spoke a language differing en-
tirely from the Choctaw.
Akoroa.— Marquette, map (1673) in Shea, Discov.
Miss., 1852. Ooirai.— Richebourg {ca. 1716) in
French, Hist. Coll. La., ni, 246, \9h\. Goloa.—
Iberville (1699) in Margry, D(k;., iv, 179, 1880.
Goroa.— Barcia, Enaayo, 246, 1723. Ooroha.— Tonti
(1684) in Margry. D<k:., i, 608, 1876. OoroU.—
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, iii, 81, 1864.
Corroaa.— Coxe, Carolana, 9, 1741. Oorroia.— Char-
levoix (1729), New France, vi, 85. 102. 1872. Oor-
roya.— Le Petit qnoted by Kip, Jesuit Missions, 289,
1866. Oouroaa.— Jeflferys, French Dom., i, 144,
1761. Gouroia.— La Harpe (1699) in French. Hist.
Coll. La., Ill, 19, 28, 1851. Ouroia.— Ibid., 82.
Ikouera.— La Salle (1681) in Margry, D^Jc, ii, 189,
198, 1877. Kolwa.— Gatschet. Creek Migr. Leg., i,
48, 1884 (Choctaw name). Koroaa.— La M^tfJrie
(1682) quoted by French, Hist. Coll. La., il, 22,
1875. Kouera.— Proces verbal (1682) in French,
Hist. Coll. La., i, 47, 1846. Kourouaa.— Coze, Car-
olana, 10, 1741. Kourovaa.— Alcedo, Die. Geog.,
V. 394, 1789. Kowronaa— Morse, N. Am., 264, me
(perhaps quoting Coxe). Kdlua.— Gatschet,
Creek Migr. Leg., i, 48, 1884 (Choctaw name).
Korovinski. A former Aleut village on
Atkaid. at Korovin bay, which the natives
deserted for Nazan across the island. The
Russians built a church there in 1826 and
BULL. 30]
KOROVINSKI KOSKIMO
727
made Atka the headquarters of the west-
em district of the Aleutians. — Petroff in
10th Census, Alaska, 21, 1884.
Koroviniki. An Aleut village on Koro-
vin id. , Alaska; pop. 44 in 1880, 41 in 1890.
Xoroviniky.— Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 25, 1881.
__Kfflaut A tribe of the Patwin division
of the CJopehan familv, formerly living at
Colusa, Colusa co. , Cal. It was once com-
paratively populous, as Gen. Bidwell
states that in 1849 the village of the Korusi
contained at least 1,000 inhabitants ( Pow-
ers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 219, 1877).
They are spoken of as clannish, and fond
of nursing family feuds. When a Korusi
woman died, leaving a very young infant,
her friends shook it to death in a skin or
blanket. Powers (p. 226) says the Ko-
rusi hold that in the beginning of all
things there was nothing but the Old
Turtle swimming about in a limitless
ocean, but that he dived down and
brought up earth, with which he created
the world.
OolovM.— Powers in Ck)nt. N. A. Ethncl.. iii, 518.
1877. OoluMu— Ibid., 219. Ooluai.— Taylor In Cal.
Farmer, Mar. 23, 1860. Coru«ie».— Powers in Over-
land Mo., XIII, 543, 1874. Ko-ru-si.— Powers in
Cent. N. A. Ethnol., in, 219, 1877.
Koierefteki^ A former Kaiyuhkhotana
village, now an Ikogmiut settlement, on
the left bank of the Yukon, near the
mouth of Shageluk slough. It is the seat
of the mission of the Holy Cross.
l^Mrefaki.— Bruce. Alaska, map, 1885. Kozer-
•rdty.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 165, 1893. Kosy-
rof.-Map form cited by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alas-
ka, 1902. Ko«yrof.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E..
map, 1899. Leather Village.— Dall, Alaska, 220.
1870.
KoMtah. Mentioned by Gibbs (School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 171, 1853) as a
Shasta band of Shasta valley, x. Cal., in
1851, but it is really a man's personal
name. ' (r. b. d.)
Koihkogemnt. A subdivision of the
Ohnagmiut Eskimo of Alaska. — Dall in
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 17, 1877.
Kosipatnwiwagaiyti (Ko-si^-pa tu-wi^-wa-
gai-yu, * muddy water place'). A Pavi-
otso tribe formerly dwelling about Carson
sink, w. Nev.
Ko^'-pa tu-wi'-wa-mu:yu.— Powell, Paviotso MS.,
B. A. eT, 1881. Ku'ti-ptt.— Powers. Inds. W. Nev..
MS., B. A. E., 1876.
Koikedi. A Tlingit division at Gaude-
kan and Yakutat, belonging to the Raven
phratry.
Kodc!8'dL— Swanton, field notes. B. A. £., 1904.
KaMh-k»-ti.-Krause, Tlinkit Ind., 118, 1885.
Kiuk-«di.-Ibid.
Koikimo. An important K wakiutl t ribe
inhabiting the shores of Quatsino sd. , Xnw-
couver id. The gentes are Gyekolekoa,
Gyeksem, Gyeksemsanatl, Hekhala-
nois(?), Kwakukemalenok, Naenshya,
Tsetsaa, and Wohuamis. Their winter
village is H wades; their summer village,
Maate. Pop. 82 in 1904.
Xoa«kinio.~Tolinie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit.
Ool.. 1188,1884. Kotimo.— Can. Ind. Aff., 1904, pt.
2, 71, 1905. KM-keemoe.— Ibid., 1884. 189, 1^.
Kotkeemos.— Grant in Jour. Roy. Geog. Soe., 293,
1857. K'otk'e'moq.— Boas. 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 53. 1890. Koskiemo.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 251,
1862. K6»'-ki-mo.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soe.
Can. for 1887, sec. ir. 69. Ko«kimo8.— Can. Ind.
KOSKIMO MAN. Um. MuS. NaT. HIST.)
\fi., 145,1879. Ko8-ki-mu.— Ibid.. 1894. 279. 1895.
Koskumos.— Ibid., 113, 1879. Kus-ke-mu.— Kane,
Wand, in N. Am., app., 1859. Qo'sqemox.— Boas
in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 329. 1897. Qosqimo.— Boas
in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 1887. Roskeemo.—
Powell in Can. Ind. Aff., 130, 1879 (misprint).
KOSKIMO WOMAN. (am. Mu8. Nat. Hist.)
Koskimo. A K wakiutl subdialect spoken
by the Koprino, Klaskino, Koskimo, and
Quatsino.
728
KOSOTSHE — K0U8E
[B. A.B.
Kosotshe. A former village of the Tu-
tutni, identified by Dorsey with the
Luckkarso nation of I^wis and Clark, who
placed them on the Oregon coast s. of the
Kusan territory, in 1805, and estimated
their population at 1 ,200. Fifty years later
Kautz said their village was on Flores cr.,
Oreg., about hit. 42° 50^; Dorsey fixed
their ha])itat n. of Rogue r., between Port
Orford and Sixes cr.
Xasoatcha.— Kautz. letter toGibb^.B. A. £.,ca.l855.
Ko-so-a-cha.— (.tibbs, MS. on Coast tribes, B. A. E.
3|d8-o-tc6'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 233,
1890 (Tututni name). Ku-so-oha-to-ny.— Abbott,
MS. Co<iuille census, B. A. E., 1858. Ku'-su-me'
iflnng'.— Dorsey. op. fit. (Xaltunne-tunne'name).
Lttckasos.— Lewis and Clark, Expe<l., ii, 119, 1814.
Luckkarso.— Ibid., 474. Lukkarso.— Drake, Bk. of
Inds., ix, 1848. Port Qrforj.— Abbott. MS. Coquille
census, B. A. E., 1858.
Koituets {Kd^8 Tue^U^ 'where pine trees
stand * ) . A Shoshonean encampment 10
m. above Yaneks, or Yainax, on Sprague
r., Klamath ref., Greg. — Gatschet in
Cont. N. A. Kthnol., ii, pt. 2, 143, 1890.
KoBtun-hana [QIo'stAu x(Vna; q/d^stAii
means 'crab'). A former Haida town,
in possesion of the Kojjangas family
group, a short distance e. of Skidegate,
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. There
does not ai)pi'ar to l>e spa<^'e at this point
for more than two or three houses. —
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 279, 1905.
KoBunats. A Ute division formerly liv-
ing on Uinta res., x. e. Ttah, where
Powell found 76 of them in 1873. They
now form part of what are known as the
ITintA Vijpi.
Kotasi. A fonner Maidu village in the
N. part of Plumas co., Cal., al)out 3 m. e.
of Gn^nville.— Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus.
Nat. Hist., XVII, pi. xxxviii, 1905.
Kotil. A Koyukukhotana village at the
junction of Kateol r. with Koyukuk r.,
Alaska; pop. 65 in 1844.
Khotilkakat.—Za^oskin quoted by PetrofT in 10th
Census, A laska, 37. 1K84. Khotilkakate.— Zagoskin
In Nouv. Ann. Voy., 6th s., xxi, map, 1850.
Khotylnakat. — Zagoskin, De8(.*. Kura. Poss. Am.,
map, 1844.
Kotlenok {Q*d^Len6.v). A gens of the
Koprino, a Kwakiutl tril)e. — Boas in Rep.
Nat. Mus. 1895, 329, 1897.
Kotlian. See Katllan.
Kotlik ( * breeches,* hence * river fork *) .
A village of the Chnagmiut Eskimo on
Kotlik r., Alaska; pop. 8in 1880, 31inl890.
Coatlik.— vSchwatka, Mil. Recon. in Alaska. 20,
1885. Kotlik. —Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map.
1899. KutUk.— Post route map, 1903.
Kotlflkaim (Qothkaim^ * serpent pond').
A Squawmish village community on Bur-
rard inlet, Brit. Col.— Hill-Tout in Rep.
Brit. A. A. S., 475, 1900.
Kotsai (Kots/ii). An extinct division
of the Comanche. — Mooney in 14th Rep.
B. A. E., 1045, 1896.
Kotsava ( from kozahi, an insect used for
food). A Mono band formerly living
about Mono lake and Owens r. and lake,
E. Cal., numbering 300 in 1870.
Omo.— Maltby in Ind. Aff. Rep., 94, 186G. Oasaby
J
Pah-Utet.— Campbell, ibid., U3. 1870. Xoti-a'-
▼a.— Powell, Paviotso M8., B. A. E., 1881. Ko-sa'-
W-ti-kut-teh.— Powers, Ind. West Nev., MS.. B. A.
E. , 1876 ( ' worm-eaters ' ) . Owen's Biver Indiaiit. —
Maltby in Ind. Aff. Rep., 94, 1866.
Kotsoteka ( K6t8o-t^ka, * buffalo-eaters ' ) .
One of the principal divisions of the
Comanche.
Buffalo Eater band.— Comanche and Kiowa treaty,
Sen. Ex. Doc. O, 39th Cong., Ist sess., 4, 1866.
Buffalo Eaters.— Butler in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th
Cong., 2d 8e8.s., 6, 1847. Buffalo Indians.— Bell in ■
Jour. Ethnol. So<\ Lond., i, 268, 1869. Cask-
chevatebka.— Smith in H. R. Ex. Doc. 240, 4l8t
Cong., 2d sess., 20, 1870. Oashcholcelka Ooman-
ohes. — Ibid., 21. Gastcheteghka-Ooraanohes. — Al-
vord in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18, 40th Cong., 8d sess., 86,
1869. Co-ohe-U-cah.— Butler in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th
Cong., 2d sess., 6, 1847. Ckwhetakers.- McKusker
in Sen. Ex. Dw. 40, 40th Cong., 3d sess., 14, 1869.
Co-che-te-ka.— Comanche and Kiowa treaty. Sen.
Ex. Doc. O, 39th Cong., 1st sess., 4, 1866. Ooooh-
chotelUca.— Sec. War in Sen. Ex. Doc. 7, 42d Cong.,
3d sess., 1, 1872. Ooooh-cho-teth-ca.— Sanders in
H. R. Ex. Doc. 7, 42d Cong., Ist sess., 4, 1871.
Coocheetakas.— Penney in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 101,
1870. Oools-on-tick-ara.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
1, 250, 1853. OoschotghU.— Alyord in Sen. Ex. Doc,
18, 40th Cong. , 3d sess. , 6, 1869. Gos-tohe-tegh-kas.—
Ibid., 7. Costoheteghta Oomanohes.— Alvord in H.
R. Ex. Doc. 240, 4lHt Cong., 2d sess., 151, 1870.
Guohanticas.— Cortez (1799) in Pac. R. R. Rep., Ill,
pt. 3, 121, 1856. Gueohuntioas.— Pino, Not. Hist.
Nuevo-Mex., SA, 1849. Ouhtzuteoa.— Pimentel,
Cuiidro Descr., ir, 347, 1865. Curtose-to-gah Oo-
manches.— Hazen in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18, 40th Cong.,
3d sess., 31, 1869. Curtz-e-Ticker. Gomanchet.—
Ibid., 24, E^huntioas.— Orozco y Berra.Geog., 59,
1864 (given as Apache). Gu-shd-dbj-ka.— Butcher
and Lyendecher, Comanche MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1867. Koo-chee-ta-kee.— Neighbors In Ind. Aff.
Rep. , 579, 1848. Koo-che-U-ker».— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, ii, 128, 1852. Koo-ohi-to-ker.— Neighbors,
op.cit., 578. Koolsatioara. — Schoolcraft, op. eit., vi.
687, 1857. Koolsatik-ara.— Ibid., I, 522, 1851,
Ko+s'-too-te'-ka.— ten Kate, SjTionymie, 9. 1884.
Ko'stahote'ka.— Hoffman in Proc. Am. Phllos. Soc.,
XXIII, 299, 1886. Ko't»o-t«'ka.— Mooney in 14th
Rep. B. A. E., 1045, 1896. Ku'htche-texka.— Gat-
schet, Comanche MS. vocab., B. A. E.
Kotta ( * mescal ' or * tobacco ' ) . Given
by Bourke (Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ii, 181,
1889) as a clan of the Mohave, q. v.
Konchnas-hadai (Qo^vtc nas :had^a^i,
* [grizzly-] bear house people*). Given
by Boaa (Fifth Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
27, 1889) as a subdivision of the Yaku-
lanas, a family of the Raven clan of the
Haida. It is in reality only a house
name belonging to the family.
Koukdjnaq ('Dig river'). A Talirping-
miut Eskimo village of the Okomiut tribe
formerly on L. Nettilling, Baffin land. —
Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1888.
Koanaoaons. A tribe or band, probably
in Canada near the Maine frontier, men-
tioned as allies of the French in 1724.
KBnaSona.— Ra.slc(17'24) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d
8.,vni,246,1819.
Koungmiat ( * river people ' ) . An Eski-
mo tribe on tlie w. coast of Hudson bay,
8. of the Kinipetu, in the region of Ft
Churchill. — Boas in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist., XV, 6, 1901.
Konse. A plant {Peucedanum ambigu-
nm) used by tne Indians of the Columbia-
Oregon region for making bread. Lewis
and Clark in 1804-06 usS the form cou8,
Thornton (Oreg. and Cal., i, 365, 1849)
BULL. 30]
KOUYAM KOYUKUKHOTANA
729
epeaks of "the cowish or biscuit root."
The word is derived from komishy the
name of this root in the Nez Perce and
closely relate<l dialects of the Shahaptian
stock. See Roots. ( a. p. c. )
Kouyam. A village or tribe mentioned
by Joutel in 1687 as being n. of Maligne
(Colorado) r., Tex. It is probably the
tribe called Caba bv Manzanet, which
may have been Coahuiltecan or Karan-
kawan. See (iafc;»chet, Karankawa Inds. ,
1891.
Oavaianes.— Barcin. Eiisayo, 271, 17*2:}. Kavagan.—
Joutel (1687), Jour. Voy.. 90, 1719. Kouayan.—
8hea, note in Charlevoix, New France, iv, 78,
1870. Kouayon.— Joutel (1687) in French, Hist.
Coll. Ia., 1, 1.V2, 18^16. Kouyam.— Joutel in Margr>%
D6c., Ill, 288, 1878.
Kovogzmk. A Kaviagmiut village at
Port Clarence, Alaska. — Eleventh Census,
Alaska, 162, 1898.
Kowagxnint (* big-river people'). A
tribe of western Ei*kimo of Alai^ka, num-
bering 81 in 1890, dwelling on Kowak r. e.
of Kotzebiie sd. Their chief f<)o<l besides
fish and ptannigan consists of marmots,
but the number of these is rapidly de-
creasing. Their villages are Kikiktak,
Kowak, Umokalukta, Unatak, and the
summer settlement of Sheshalik. By
some these ti»kimo have l)ei^n included
in the Nunatogmiut; by others, together
with the Selawigmiut, in the Malemint.
Kooagamutes. — Petroft in lUth (\'nsu8, Alaska, 60,
map, 1884. Koo-oj-ameuts.— C'ooper, Cruise of Cor-
wln, 26, 1880. Kowag'-mut.— Dall in Cont. N. A.
Bthnol., I, 12, 1877. Kowan'g-meiin. — Simpson
quoted by Dall. ibid. Kii-ig'mut.— Dall in Proc.
A. A. A. 8., XXXIV, 377, 1886. Kuangnuut.— Woolfe
in 11th Census, Alaska, 130. 1894. Kuwu'nmiun.—
Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 44, 1892.
Kowailchew. A coast Salish tribe said
by Gibbs (Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 43:^, 1855) to
live N. of the Semiamo, principally if not
altogether in Canada. Unless intended
for the Cowichan they are not mentioned
efaewhere.
Kowak (? 'great river' ). A Kowagmiut
village at the mouth of Kowak r., Alaska.
KoovSc,— Kelly, Aret. t^kimtx*;, 15, 1890. Kubok.—
Zagoskin, Dese. Rua.M. Poss. in Amer., pt. 1, 73, 18^17.
Kowanga. A former Gabrielefio ran-
cheria near iSan Fernando mission, Los
Angeles co. , Cal. Probably identical with
Okowvinjha, or with Cahiienga, q. v.
Kowanga.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mav 11, 1860.
Owongos.— Lawson in Ind. Aff. Rep., 13, 1879.
Kowasayee. A small Shahaptian tribe,
speaking the Tenino language and for-
merly living im the n. side of Columbia r.,
in Klickitat co., Wa.<!h., nearly opposite
the mouth of the IJnuitilla. They were
included in the Yakima treaty of 1855,
and the survivors are on Yakima res.,
but their numlx»r is unknown.
Kk£rilwi.— Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 739, 1896.
~ ayee.— Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1866. 266. 1867. Kow-
wanayee.— U. S. Stat., xii, 9r)l, 1863. Kowwat-
layet.— Keane in Stanford, Conipend., 518, 1878.
Kowasikka. A village* formerly occupied
by the Eel River Miami until they re-
moved, under the treaty of Feb. 11, 1828,
to a reserve near the mouth of Eel r. It
was on Sugar cr., near the present Thorn-
town, Boone CO., Ind., and was commonly
known as Thorntown. (j. m.)
Kow-a-sik-ka.— Hough in Ind. Geol. Rep., map,
1883. Thorntown.— Common name. Thorntown
Miamies.— Drake, Ind. Chron., 205, 1836.
Kowina. A prehistoric circular pueblo
on a low mesa opposite the spring at the
head of Cel)ollita valley, about 15 m. w.
of Acoma and I^ m. s. e. of Grant station
on the Santa Fe Pac. R. R., Valencia co.,
N. Mex. The pueblo is attributed to the
Calabash (Tanyi) clan of Acoma and is
noted for the high class of masonry of its
remaining walls. (f. w. h.)
Ka-uin-a.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 324,
1892 (Acoma name). K6-w£-na.— -Hodge, field
notes, B. A. E., 1895.
Kowsis. A tribe mentioned as roaming
in the Tule r. country — territory occupied
bv Yokuts tribes — in s. central California
in 18G9 (IMrcell in Ind. Aff. Rej). 1869,
198, 1870), but not further identifiable.
Koyeti. A Yokuts trilx^ formerly living
in 8. central California, in the vicinitv of
Tule r. and southward. Mentioned in
1852 as a friendly tribe on Paint (White)
cr., antl described as possessing unusual
courage and intelligence. They an>_cii-
tkelX-iixtinft.
Co-ye-te.— Wessells (18.^3) in H.R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th
Cong.. 3d sess., 32, 1857. Co-ye-tie.— Barbour (1852)
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 256,
1853. Ko-ya-ta.— Johnston (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc.
61, 32d (\)ng., 1st sess., 23, 18.52. Ko-ya-te.— Bar-
bour (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong., spec.
sess., 122, 1853. Ko-ya-tes.— Barbour in Ind. Aff.
Rep.. 232, 1851. Koyeti.— A. L. Kroeber, inf n. 1906
i usual name among neighboring Yokuts tribes),
[o-ye-to.— Barbour in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4. 32d Cong.,
spec, sess., 255, 18.53.
Koyonya. The Turkey clan of the Hopi.
Koyona winwu.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
584, 1900 (jW/7ic«=* clan*). Ko-yo'-no wiin-wii. —
Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vn, 403, 1894.
Koyugmiut ( KoiftK/mut ) . A di vision of
the Malemiut .Eskimo on Kovuk r.,
Alaska.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i,
10, 1877.
Koyuhow {Ko'tfU'hoir^), A Paviotso
])and fomierlv living al)out McDennit, x.
Nev.— Powell, Paviotso MS., B. A. E.,
1881.
Koynktolik. A Malemiut Eskimo vil-
lage on Kovuk r., Alaska.
Ooouchtioulik-mioute.— Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann.
Voy.. 5th s., XXI, map. 18.50. Kujruktolik.—
Eleventh Census, Alaska, 1G2, 1893.
Koyakuk. A Koyukukhotana village,
of 150 i>eople in 1880, near the junction
of Kovukuk and Yukon rs., Alaska. —
Petroif in 10th Census, Alaska, 12, 1884.
Koyukukhotana ('people of Koyukuk
river'). A divisicm of the Unakhotana
inhabiting the basin of Koyukuk r.,
Alaska. Zagoskin in 1843 attempted to
explore the Koyukuk country, but failed
on account of the hostility of the natives.
Lieut. Barnard in 1851 was killed by the
Koyukukhotana, and Nulato destroyed
because he sent for their chief. Maj.
Kennicott also visited their territory,
730
KRAYIRAGOTTINE KUAUBNANG
[B.A.B.
dying at Nulato, May 13, 1866. In the
following year Dall explored the Koyu-
kuk. Petroff visited the Koyukukhotana
in 1880, and Allen made aii exploration
of their country in 1885. The Koyukuk-
hotana were sedentary, but fierce and
warlike, and liostile toward the Kai-
yuhkhotana, although the manners,
customs, and language of the two tribes
are now similar. Their chief occupation
is hunting deer and mountain sheep;
they also act as middlemen in trade be-
tween the'Malemiutandthe Kaiyuhkho-
tana. Thev seem to have no system of
totems (Dall in Omt. N. A. Kthnol.,
I, 27, 1877). Zagoskin found 289 living
in j)ermanent villages in 1848. In 1890
the population was given as 502: 242
males and 260 females, while the number
in pennanent villages was 174 in 32 houses.
The villages are Batza, Bolshoigor,
Dotle, Ila^liakatna, Kakliaklia, Kaltat,
Kanuti, Kautas, Kotil, Koyukuk, Mento-
kakat, Nohulchinta, Nok, Notaloten,
Oonilgachtkhokh, iSoonkakat, Tashosh-
gon, Tlialil, Tok, Zakatlatan, Zogliakten,
and Zonagogliakten.
Coyoukons.— Whynipor quoted by Dall in Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., I. 27, 1877. Co-Yxxkon.— Whyniper,
Alaska, 182, W)S ( = Kovukukh<)tana and Unak-
hotana). InUi-Din^itcii.— Petitot, Diet. D^n^-
Dindji<^, xx, 1876 (^*men of iron'). Junnika-
ohotina.— Holmberg quoted bv Dall in Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., i, 27, 1877. KWoxxkon.— Elliott,
Cond. AfT. Ala.Mka, 29, 1K74. Koyoukouk-kouttane.—
Petitot; Autour du lac des Esclavcs, 361, 1891.
Kojru'-kiikh-ota'na.— Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
I, 27, 1H77 ( =' people of Koyukuk r.'). Koyukiins.—
Ibid, (traders' name). Koyuk&nskoi. — Ibid. (use<l
by Russian traders). Kukunsld.— Raymond in
Bull. Am. Geog. Soc., in, 175, 1873. Kuyakinohi.—
Raymond in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 598, 1870.
Kuyukantsi.— Worman (luotea by Dall in Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., i, 27, 1877. Kuyukuki.— Raymond in
Sen. Ex. Doe. 12, 42d Cong., 1st sess., 31, 1871.
Kuyukunski.— Ibid., 32. Yiinnakakhotana.— Zay-
oskin quoted bv PetroflfinlOth Census, Alaska, 37,
1884.
Krayiragottine ('willow people'). A
division ofEtchaot tine on Willow r., Mac-
kenzie Ter., Can,
Kkpayipa-Oottine.— Petitot, Autour du lac des Es-
claves, 319, 1891.
Kraylongottine ('people at the end of
the willows' ). A Nahane division living
between Mackenzie r. and Willow lake,
Mackenzie Ter., Canada. Their totem
is the otter.
Dra-lon-Oottiiie.— PetiU)t, (irand lac des Ours, 66,
1893 ( * people at the end of the willows ' ) . Kkpay-
lon-G«ttin^. — Petitot, Autour du lac des Ksclaves,
362,1891.
KrentpooB. Sec Kintpuash.
Kretan ('hawk'). A 8ul)gen8 of the
Cheghita gens of the Missouri tribe.
FV-to".— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 240, 1897.
ul-pa-ki'-a-ko.—ten Kate, Synonymic, 10, 1884
(Kiowa name: 'pearls people').
Krimerksnmalek. An Iglulirmiut Es-
kimo village on the w. coast of Hudson
bav. — McCUntock, Vovage of Fox, 165,
1881.
Ksalokul ( Qsd^lotjul) . A division of the
Nanaimo on the e. coast of Vancouver
id.— Boa« in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
32, 1889.
Ksapsem (Qsa^pssm). A Songish divi-
sion residing at Esquimalt, s. end of Van-
couver id.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 17, 1890.
JLBhiwukBhiwu (ICcivruk^citvu), A for-
mer Chumashan village on Santa Rogft
id., Cal. — Henshaw, Buenaventura MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
Kthae {IC^d'-'?). A former Kuitsh vil-
lage on lower Umpqua r., Greg. — Dorsey
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 321, 1890.
Kthelntlitnxme ( K^-ltU-W ?flnw^, 'peo-
ple at the forks'). A former village of
the Chastat^osta at the junction of IU)gue
r., Orejj., and a southern tributary. —
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 234,
1890.
Kthotaime {K^o-^aV-me). A former
Takelma village on the s. side of Rogue r.,
Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii,
235, 1890.
Kthnkhwestnxme {ICqu-qwIis^ ^turmify
'good-grass people'). A former village
of the Mishikhwutmetunne on Coquille
r., Oreg. — Dorsev in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 232, 1890.
Kthukhwnttuxme (IC(;u-Qw(d^ idnn)^^
* people where goo<l grass is ) . A former
village of the Tututni on the coast of
Oregon, n. of Rogue r. — Dorsey in Jour.
Am. Folk-lore, in, 233, 1890.
Kthanataachuntaxme (K^ ^u-na^ -ta-a
tcdn^ itmnP^j * people by a small grassy
mountain'). A former village of the
Mishikhwutmetunne on Coquille r.,
Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
232, 1890.
Kthntetmetseetnttnii. A former village
of the Tututni on the Pacific coast just n.
of the mouth of Rogue r. , Oreg.
iCou-tSt-me Ue'-«-tat'-tto.— -Dorsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, iii, 233, 1890. ywi'-«4t-qwfit.— Ibid.
Nu'-tou-ma'-tdn )un'n8.— IbioT ('people in a land
full of timber').
Ktlaeshatlkik ('people of Lga^ecaLx').
A Cathlamet tribe named from a townona
creek of the same name, at the site of the
present town of Cathlamet, Wahkiakum •
CO., Wash.
Ouithlia-ishalxi.— Gatschet, field notes, B. A. £.
KLi'eeaLxix-.— Boas, Kathlamet Texts, 6, 1901.
lia'ioaLze.— Boas, inf n, 1905.
Kn. The Stone clan of the Tewa pue-
blos of San Ildefonso, N. Mex., and Hano,
Ariz. That of the latter is extinct. Cf.
Xatig.
K'u-td6a.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop.. ix, 362, 1896
(San Ildefonso form ; t<l6a = * people * ) . Ku-towa. —
Ibid. (Hano form).
Kna. The Bear clan of the pueblo of
Taos, N. Mex.
Kfia-taiiiia.~Hodge, field notes, B. A. £., 1899
{taHna= * people ' ) .
Kuaiath. A division of the Seshat, a
Nootka tribe.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W.
Tribes Can., 32, 1890.
Kaaiimang. A winter residence of the
Akuliarmiut on North bay, Baffin land*
BULL. 80]
KUAKAA — KUEHA
731
K'ludinuulf .— Boas in Petcrmauns Mitt., no. »0, 67.
1886. OoiifinuuDg.—Boas in 6th Rep. B. A. K.. 421.
1888.
Kuakaa. A prehistoric mined pueblo
of the Tanos on the h. l)ank of Arroyo
Hondo, 5 m. h. of Santa Fo, N. Mex. It
housed al)Out 800 people. Not to be con-
founded with San Maroon, to which the
same name was applied.
CNI&-0&.— Bandelier, Gilded Man. 221, 1893. Oua-
Kaa.~Ibid., 283. Kua-kaa.— Bandelier in An>h.
Inst. Papers, iv. 90. 1892. Kua-kay.— Ibid.
I Kxi9kumtiiien(KHd^kumt('en). Given as
a division of the Squawmish, on Howe
sd., coast of British Columbia. — Boas,
MS., B. A. K, 1887.
Xuapa. A ruined pueblo in the CaAada
de Cochiti, 12 m. n. w. of Cochiti pueblo,
N. Mex., by whose inhabitants it was
fonnerly o(!cupied and to whom are at-
tributed the execution of the panther
statues on the neighlx)ring Potrero (U^ los
Idolos. It was the thinl place of settle-
ment of the (?o<*hiti after their abandon-
ment of the Potrero de las Vacas, and
from which they movin^l to their prest^nt
pueblo.
Otta-pa.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Bui., i, 15, 1883.
Ooi-pa.— LummiH in Scribner'H Monthly, 98, 1893.
Kua-pa.— Bandelier in Arch. Inat. Pajwrs. iv. 162,
1892.
Xuapooge ('plac>e of the shell l)eads
near the water,' or * mussel pearl ])lace
on the water*). A prehistoric Tewa
pueblo which, with Analco, occupied the
site of the present Santa Fc, N. Mex.
Kuapooge was situatt»d where old Ft
Marcy was erected on th(» heights at the
northern outskirts of the town by I'nited
States troops in 1847.
Apofa.— Ritch, New Mexico, 196, 1885. Apoge.—
Ibid., 151. OuaFHo^.-Bandelier, Delight Mak-
ers, 453. 1890 (San Jnan name). Cua-P'ho-o-|re.—
Bandelier, Gilded Man, 284 1893. Oua-po-ose.—
Ibid., 221. Oua-Po-o-qu6.— Ladd. Story of N. Mex.,
92, 1891. Kua-p'o-o-ge.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst.
Papers, iv, 90, 1892. Oga FHoge.— Bandelier,
Delight Makers, 453, 1890 (Santa (Mara name).
Og-a-p'o-ge.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv,
90, 1^. Poga.— Ritch, New Mexico, 1%, 1885.
Poge.—Ibid., 151. Po-o-ge.— Bandelier in Ritch,
ibid., 201. ,
Xnaste. An unidentified village or tril)e
mentioned by Joutel in 1()87 as situated n.
or N. w. of Maligne (Colorado) r., Tex.
This region was controlkMl mainly by
Coahuiltecan tril>eH, but Karankawan and
Tonka wan Indians also roamed there.
The name seems to have been given to
Joutel by Ebahamo Indians, who were
mx>bably of Karankawan affinity. The
Kuassemay possibly \ye identical with the
Acafesand the Cacafes of Spanish writers
and the Akasquy of Cavelier's narrative.
KiailiMa.— Joutel (1687) in French, Hist. Ck>ll. La.,
I, 188, 1816 (of. p. 152). Kiaaaes.— Shea, note in
Charlevoix, New France, iv, 78, 1870. Kiasses-
chanorM.—Barcia, Ensayo, 271, 1723 (combined
with Chancres; see Lipan). KuaMa.— Joutel in
Margry, D4c., ni, 289, 1878.
Xnato {JCnatOy *])ulling up from the
ground, or a hole*). An extinct tribal
division of the Kiowa, speaking a slightly
different dialect, who were exterminated
by the Sioux in battle about the year 178().
On this ocaision, according to tradition,
the Kiowa were attacked by an over-
whelming force of Sioux and prepared to
retreat, but the chief of the Kuato ex-
horted his jK^ople not to run, "because,
if they did, their relatives in the other
world would not receive them. ' ' So they
stood their ground and were killed, while
the others of the tribe escapetl. Their
place in the tribal camp circle is not
known. — Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. K,
1080, 1896.
Knaua. A former Tigua pueblo, the
ruins of which lie n. of tne bridge across
the Rio Grande alx)ve Bernalillo, N. Mex.
Acconling to Bandelier the main build-
ing, which is of adol)e, is one of the larg-
est ])ueblo houses in New Mexico, but
whether or not the pueblo is historic is
indeterminable. It is also known bv the
Spanish name Torreon, but should not
Ui c<mfoundiHl with the Torreon k. of the
Rio Grande, in lat. 34° 45^
Kua-ua.— Bandelier in An*h. Inst. PaiH*rs, iv, 22ri,
1892. Torreon.— Ibid.
Kuant. A Shuswap village at the head
of Little Shuswap lake, interior of Brit-
ish Columbia; pop. 83 in 1904.
Knaut— Can. Ind. Aff. , supp., 60. 1902. Kroaout.—
Can. Ind. Aff. for 18H3, 1«9. Kualt— Ibid.. lS9r>,
361. Kuant.— Ibid., 1898. 419. Ku-a-ut.— Ibid.,
1885, 196. Kwout.— Dawson in Trans. Rov. S<k'.
Can. for 1891. see. li. 44. 1H92. Little Shutwap —
Can. Ind. Aff. for 1878, 74. Little Shuswap Lake.—
Ibid., 1882, 259. Little Suswap Lake.— Ibid., 1H79.
309. Siuhwap.— Ibid., 1878, 78.
Kuchaptnvela (* ash-hill terrace'). A
Ilopi village, now in ruins, on the tt»rra(!e
of the East mesa of Tusayan, n. e. Arizona,
below the present Walpi pueblo. It was
occupied by the ancestors of the Hopi
of Walpi evidentlv at the time of the ar-
rival of the Spaniards in 1540. The ocv
cupants abandoned it in 1629, or shortly
afterward, and move<l to li^isakobi, far-
ther up the mesa.
Kuchaptiivela.— Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E.. 578,
585, 1898. Kwetcap tutwi.— Stephen in 8th Rep.
B. A. E., 18. 1891. Old Walpi.— Ibid.
Knchichi (* the small ones*). A small
rancheria of the Tarahuman*, not far from
Norogachic, w. Chihuahua, Mexico. —
Lmnholtz, inf'n, 1894.
Kachtya. A prehistoric Acoma pueblo
which, acconling to tradition, was the
third village built and occuj)ied during
the early migration of the tribe. — Ho<lge
in Century Mag., lvi, 15, May 1898.
Kueohio' ( * small mountain ' ) . A Tara-
humarerancherianearGumisachic, which
is 20 m. N. E. of Norogachic, Chihuahua,
Mexico. — Lumholtz, inf n, 1894.
Kneha (*the murderers*). A division
of the I^kwiltok living between Bute and
Loughborough inlets, Brit. Col. They are
divined into three gentes: Wiweakam,
Komoyue, and Kueha. Pop. 25 in 1889.
The Komoyue sept of the true Kwakiutl
have this name for their war name.
732
KUG ALUK — KUI W AN VA
[B. A. 1.
KoS'qa.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
606. 1891. Kwe-ah-kah-Saioh-kioie-taohi.— Can. Ind.
Ail. 1889, 227, 1890 (=Kueha Lekwiltok). Kwi-
ha.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocaba. Brit. Col., 119b,
1884. Queeakahs.— Brit. Col. map, 1872. Quee-ha-
ni-cul-te.— Work (1836-41) quoted by Kane, Wand.
inN. A., app., 1859 (=Kueha Lekwiltok). auie-
ha He cub ta.— Work as quoted by Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, v, 488, 1855.
Kngalnk. A Malemiut Eskimo village
on Spafarief bay, s. shore of Kotzebue so.,
Alaska; pop. 12 in 1880.
Keewalik.— Post-route map, 1903. Kualiug-miut. —
Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 263, 1902 (Russian deno-
tation in 1852). Kualyugmut— Zagoskin, Desc.
Russ. Poss. in Am., pt. 1, 73, 1847. Kugaluk.— Ba-
ker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kugalukmut.—
Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. Kugaluk-
mute.— Petroflf in 10th Census, Alaska, 4, 1884.
Kagaramiat. A subdivision of the Male-
miut Eskimo on the ^ shore of Kotzebue
sd., Alaska. — Woolfe in 11th Census,
Alaska, 130, 1893.
Kuhaia. The Bear clans of the Keresan
pueblos of Laguna, San Felipe, Acoma,
Sia, and Cochiti, N. Mex. The Bear clan
of Laguna claims to have come originally
from Acoma.
Ko-hai.— Stevenson in 11th Rep. B. A. E., 19, 1894
(Sia form). Kohaia-hancKb.— Hodge in Am. An-
throp., IX, 349, 1896 (Laguna form). K6hai-ha-
no.— Ibid. (San Felipe form; Mno= 'people';
Kohal-hflno is the Sia form). Kohaio.— Bande-
lier. Delight Makers, 253, 1890. Ko-ha-yo.— Bande-
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iii, 293, 1890. Kuhaia-
hinoch.— Hodge, op. cit.( Cochiti form). Kiiwhaia-
hanoq°>>. — Ibid. (Acoma form).
Knhinedi ( * martin people ' ) . A Tlingit
division at Klawak, Alaska, l>t'lono:ing to
the Raven phratry.
Klu'xinedi.— Swan ton, field notes, B. A. E., 1904.
U60h-e-ne«ti.— Krause. Tlinkit Ind., 120. 1885.
' Knhlahi {Ktilahl, * beech place,* from
M^la * l)eech-tree * ) . A former Cherokee
settlement in upper Georgia. (.i. m. )
Kuhlanapo (from kuhlay * yellow water-
lily* [Nijmphica polysepala], napo, 'vil-
lage * ) . The name of one of the groups of
people who formerly occupied Big valley
on the s. shore of Clear lake. Lake co.,
Cal. Theirs was the w. part of the val-
ley, extending from Adobe cr. on the e.
into the foothills on the w., and their
territory was definitely separated from
that of the Khabenapo to the eastward.
From this name Powell ( 7th Rep. B. A.
E., 87, 1891) formed the stock name
Kulanapan, which he applied to all of
the Inaians now usually known by the
name of Porno, and living chiefly in So-
noma, Mendocino, and Lake cos., with a
small detached area in Colusa and Glenn
COS. 8. A. B
Ohola'-napo.— A. L. Kroeber, inf n, 1906. Hula-
napo.— Oibbs (1861) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
m, 109, 1853. Hute-napo.— Ibid., 110 (misprint).
Knhlanapo.— S. A. Barrett, infn, 1906 (lit. 'yellow
water-lifyyillage' ) . Kulanopo. — Lathamin Trans.
Philol. Soc. Lond., 77, 1856.
Knhpattikutteh ( Kuh^-pat-ii-kut^'teh,
'squirrel-eaters'). A Paviotso band for-
merly living on Quinn r., w. Nev. — Pow-
ers, Inds. W. Nev., MS., B. A. E., 1876.
Kuilitsh ( Ku^'i-htc^ ) . A former Kuitsh
village on lower Umpqua r., Oreg. — Dor-
sey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 231, 1890.
Knilkluk. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo
village on the left bank of Kuskokwim
r.; Alaska; pop. 75 in 1880. Perhaps
identical with Quieclohchamiut (pop.
83), or with Quiechochlogamiut (pop. 6o)
in 11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Kuilkhlogamute.— PetrofiF in 10th Census, Alaska,
map, 1884. KniUduk.— Baker, Qeog. Diet. Alaska,
253,1902. Kulj-khlngamnte.— Ibid.,17.
Kuingthtetakten. A Jugelnute Eskimo
village on Shageluk r., Alaska; pop. 37 in
1842.
Ehuingetakhten.—Zagoskin, Desc. Russ. Pees. Am.,
map, 1844. Ehuingitatekhten.— Zagoskin quoted
by Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 37, 1884. Kuiog-
•htetakten.— Tikhmenief (1861) quoted by Baker,
Geog. Diet. Ala.«»ka, 365, 1900.
Kumrnk {Kuin-rUky * sea-hunter peo-
ple': KodiaK name). An unidentified
division of the Knaiakhotana of Cook
inlet, Alaska.— Hoffman, Kadiak MS., B.
A. E., 1882.
Kuishkoshyaka. The extinct Blue-corn
clan of Acoma pueblo, N. Mex. See
Yaka.
KCi'iahkoshyaka-hanoqei'.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop. ,
IX, 349, 1896 {ydka = 'com', hdnoqch = 'people^).
Kuishtitiyaka. The extinct Brown-com
clan of Acoma pueblo, N. Mex. See
Yaka.
Ka'i»ht»tiyaka-hanoq<'»>.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop.,
ix,349,189<) {ydka --= 'com', Mnoqch = •people').
Kuitsh. A small Yakonan tribe for- f
merly living on lower Umpqua r., w.
Oreg! A few survivors are on the Siletz
res. According to Dorsey the former vil-
lages of the Kuitsh were Tsaliia, Misun, r
Takhaiya, Chukhuiyathl, Chukukh, Thu-
khita, Tsunakthiamittha, Ntsiyamis,
Khuwaihus, Skakhaus, Chupichnush-
kuch, Kaiyuwuntsunitthai, Tsiakhaus,
Paiuiyunitthai, Tsetthim, Wuituthlaa,
Chitlatamus, Kuilitsh, Tkimeye, Miku-
litsh, and Kthae.
Ci-sta'-qwvlt-me' ^ihmg'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, iii, 231, 1890 (=• peopled welling on the
stream called Shista': Mishikwutmetunnename).
Ku-itc'.— Ibid., 230 (own name). Lower TTmpQtta. —
Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1857, 321. 1868. T5lcwn-iiia>-k«i.-.
Dorsey, Alsea MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Alsea
name).. Umpkwa.— Bissell, MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1881. TJmpqua.— Ibid.
Kuin. A Tlingit tribe and town on an
island, also called Kuiu, on the Alaskan
coast. The town is in Port Beauclerc,
and according to Petroff, who erroneously
places it on Prince of Wales id. (unless
mdeed they were then living at Shakan),
it contained 60 inhabitants in 1880.
There has been no separate census of them
since that time. Thev are said to have in-
termarried consideraoly with the Haida.
Their social divisions are Kuyedi and
Nastedi. (j. r. s.)
Kouyou.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 32, 1884.
Kojru. — Ibid., map. Kuiu.— Common spelling.
Kuyut-koe.— VeniaminofT. Zapiski, n, pt. 3, 80,
1840.
Kninknk. A Kaniagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on the s. e. coast of Alaska penin.,
Alaska; pop. 18 in 1880, 62 in 1890.
Kuyukak.~Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska,28, 1884,
Wrangell 1>ay.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 163, 1898.
Koiwanya (Kui'VHxn^^. A tradition-
BULL. 30]
KUIYAMU KULCHANA
788
ary settlement of the Bear clan of the
Hopi, about 1 m. n. w. of Oraibi. — Voth,
Traditions of the Hopi, 28, 1905.
Xuiyama. (Ku-V-ya^-mu). One of the
two fonner populous C^humashan vil-
lagetii, popularly known as Dos Pueblos,
W. nf Snntii I Wham, (^ft| (n. W. II.)
Knkak. A Kaniagmiut P>kinio village
onKukakliay, s. e. coast of Alaska penin.,
Alaska; pop. 37 in 1880.
Kukak.— Petioff in 10th Censun. Al&Mka. '2H, 18S4.
Toiflnjak.— Langsdorff, Voy., ii, 23ft, 1814.
Xakamnkamees. A Kyuquot village on
Mission id., Kvuquot s<l., w. coast of
Vancouver id.— Can. Ind. Aff.,264, 1902.
Xakan ( * finger-nai 1* ) . A n 1 ta Eskimo
settlement near McCJormick bay, n.( Green-
land.— Heilprin, Pearv Relief Exi)ed.,
128, 1893.
Knkanawn {KAtj/auiunV). An old
Tlingit town in the Huna country on the
N. side of Cross sd., Alaskan coast. Dis-
tinct from Hukanuwu. (j. r. s.)
Kakiniflliyaka. The Red-<-oni clan of
Acoma and I^aguna pueblos, N. >Iex.
See Yaka.
Kft'kAiiit'hy«ka-hanoqc>>.— H(Hlge in Am. Anthn)p. .
IX, 349, 1896 (Acoma form; wIAyi ^ 'com '. hduoq^h
= 'people'). Kft1diuihyfl»-h£no''»'._lbicl. (La-
guna form).
Knkkuikt (Khk-kuiW, *pigtH)ns'). A
»K'iety of the Ikunuhkahtsi, or All Com-
rades,'in the Piegan tribe; it is made up
of men who have bt»en to war several
times. — CTrinnell, Blai^kfoot Ixnige Tales,
221, 1892.
Knklnktuk. A Kuskwogmiut P^kimo
village on the left Imnk of Kuskokwim
r., 30 in. l)elow Kolmakof, Alaska; iK)p.
51 in 1880, 20 in 1890.
Koohlogtogpafamiut.— Eleventh CenHiLs, Alaska,
164, im Xokhlokhtokhpagamute.— PetrolTinlOth
CensuH, Alaska, 16, 18W. Kukluktuk.— Baker.
Geog. Diet. Alaska. 254. 1902.
Knkoak ( Quqwi^q). A Songish division
at McNeill bav, s. end of Vancouver id. —
Boas in 6th ftep. N. W. Tribes Can., 17.
1890.
Knkpaumngmint. An P^kimo trilv that
formerly occupied the country Ix^tween
Pt Belcher and C. Beaufort, Alaska, now
much dwindUni, having a village called
Kokolik at Pt Lay with 30 inhabitants in
1880. In 1900 the tribe numbt»red 52.
KookpoToros.~Kelly. Arctic Eskimos. 13. lH9i).
Koopowro MatM. — Wells and Kelly in Rep. Bur.
Ed. 1897. 1242, 1898. KiUcpauranfmiut.— 11th Cen-
san, Alaska, 168, 1893.
Xakaeh. The Lizanl (*lan of the Hopi.
KAmb.— Voth, Oraibi Summer 8nake Ceremony.
288, 1908. Kn'-kii-toi.— Stephen in 8th Rep. fi. A.
E., 39, 1891. Kiakiito winwfi.— Fewkes in 19th Rop.
B. A. E., 588, 1901 (»rt;l»rM--clan*). KuknU —
Dorsey and Voth, Oraibi Soyal. 13, 1901. Kuku
tri.— Voth, Hopi Proper Names, 89, 1906.
Xukuohomo (* footprint mound*). A
pueblo ruin, consisting of two conical
mounds, on the Kast mesa of Tusayan, n. e.
Arizona. It was built and occupied in
prehistoric time by Hopi clans closely
related to those of Sikyatki, with whom
they are supposed to have removed to
Awatobi.— Fewkes in 17th Rep. B. A. E.,
587-588, 1898.
Knknlek ((J^up(^lEk). A Songish divi-
sion residing at Cadboro bay. s. end of
Vancouver i<l.— Boas in Hth Rep. N. W.
Tribes Can., 17, 1890.
Knknliak. A Yuit Kskinio village on
the N. shore of St Lawrence id., ifering
sea.— Tebenkof (1849) quoted bv Baker,
Geog. Diet. Ala.'-ka, 1902.
Kakatwom. {K'ukutwd^m, * waterfall*).
A S<juawmish village community on the
E. side of Howe sd., Brit. Col. — Hill-
Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900.
Knkwaknm ('the real Kwakiutl'). A
gens of the Kwakiutl proi)er, consisting of
two se]>ts, the (.iuetelaand tlie Komoyue.
K'kwa'kum.— Boas in i\t\\ Rep. N. W. Tribes C^n.,
M. 189(). Kukwa'kum.— Boas in Rop. Xat. Mus.
1H95, ;«0. 1H97. Kwakoom.— Tolniir and Dawson,
Vocabs. Brit. Col.. IISB, 1«W.
Knlahiyi {KtVlahi^ifl, or in the lower
(Cherokee dialect, k'urdhl^i/ljrom kfiid^hl^
a plant used as salad by the Cherokee).
.\ fonner Cherokee town in n. e. Georgia,
from which Currahee mtn. takes its
name. (j. m. )
Kalaiapto. A former Maidu Ullage be-
tween Mooretown and the village of
Tsuka, Butte c< >., Cal. — Dixon in Bull. Am.
Mus. Nat. Hist., xvii, pi. xxxviii, 1905.
Knlaken {K'n^la^^Eji). A Squawmish
village comnmnitv on Burrard inlet,
Brit. Col.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A.
S., 475, 1900. y
Knlanapan Family. Adopted bv Powell ^ ^
(7th Rep. I^- A. K., 87, 1891 ) as the name
of a linguistic family in Sonoma, I^ke,
and Mendocino COS., Cal., com])rising the
group of tribes generally known as Pomo,
<|. V. See also Knidanapo.
xEula-napo. — Gibbs in S<*h<K)lcraft, Ind. Tribes,
111, 421, 1853 (the name of one of the Clear Lake
band.s) . >Mendocino (?).— Latham in Trans. Philol.
Soc. Lond.. 77, 1856 (name siiKKested for Chowe-
shak, Batemdaikai, Kulanapo, \ ukai,and Khwak-
Ijimavn langnaj?es) : I>atham. Opnsonla, 343, 1860;
Latham, Elem. Comp. Philol.. 410, 1862 (as above).
>Pomo.— Powers in Overland Monthly, ix, 498.
Dec. 1S72 (general de.»*eription of habitat and ol
family); Powers in (\mt. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 146,
1877; Powell, ibid., 491 (vocabularie.s of Gal-li-no-
m<^-ro, Yo-kai'-a, Ba-tem-da-kail, Chau-i-shek,
Vu-kai, Kn-la-na-po. H'hana, Vcnaambakaiia,
Ka'-bi-na-p<'k, Chwachamalu); Gatschetin Mag.
Am. Hist.. 16, 1877 (gives habitat and ennmerates
tribes of family); (iat.»*chetin Beach, Ind. Miscel.,
43«>, 1877; Keane, in Stan ford, Com pond.. Cent, and
So. Am., app., 476, 1878 (inclndes Castel I»omoe,
Ki. Cahto, Choam, Chadela, Matomey Ki, Usal or
Calamet, Shebalne Pomos, Gallinomeros, Sanels,
ScK^oas. Lamas, Comachos). < Pomo. —Bancroft,
Nat. Races, iii, 566, 1882 (includes Ukiah, Galli-
nomero, Masallamagoon, Gualala, Matole. Kula-
napo, San61. Yonio.M, Choweshak, Batemdakaie,
Chocuyem,oiamentke,Kainamare.andChwacha-
maju; of these. Chocuyem and Olamentke are
Moquclnmnan). ^^Kulanapan.— Powell in 7th
Rep. B. A. E., 87. 1891.
kalatsen ( Ku^latsEn) . A Squawmish vil-
lage communitv on the e. side of Howe
sd., Brit. Col.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A.
A. S., 474, 19()0.
Kalchana (* strangers': Ahtena name),
A nomadic Athapascan tribe in Alaska.
734
KULKUMISH KUMAINI
[C. A. S. .
living about the headwaters of Kusko-
kwim r., holding little intercourse with
neighboring peoples. They are now a
remnant, numbering about 300 (11th
Census, Alaska, 156, 1893), but were once
formidable enemies of the Russians.
Khunanilinde and Tochotno were two of
their villages known to Zagoekin in 1843.
Caloharniet.— Allen, Rep., 132, 1««7. Colcharney.—
Ibid., note. Colohixiff. — Mahoney in Ind. Aff. Rep.
1869, 574, 1870. Coltthanie.— Latham in Jour.
Ethnol. Soe. Lond., 1,183,1848. Oalcani.— Dawy-
dow in Radloflf, Worterb. d. Kinai-Spr., 29, 1874.
Galtzanen.— Richardson. Arct. Exped., i, 402, 1851.
Oalzanen.— Tlolmberg, Ethnog.Skizz., 7, 1855. Gal-
rani.— Seouler (1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lend., i,
232, 1848. Ghuil-chan.— Petroflf in 10th Census,
Alaska. 164, 1884 (trans, 'tundra people'). Golt-
zane. — Zagoskin quoted by Petroff, ibid., 37. Gol-
zan.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 68, 1856.
Golzanen.— Radloff, op. cit. Kal-chaina.— Dall In
Proc. Am. A. A. S., 378, 1885. KoiU tana.— Daw vdow
in Radloflf, Worterb. d. Kinai-Spr., 29. 1874. ihuil-
chan.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, lb2, 1884.
Khuilohana.— Ibid., map. Kolchane. — Ibid., 162.
Kolohant.— Scouler in Jour.^Geog. Soc. Lond., xi,
218, 1841. Kolchina.— Dall irfProc. A. A. A. S., 1869,
270, 1870 (Russian name). Kolahani. — Latham
(1845) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 187, 1848.
Koltohanes.— Petroflf, Rep. on Alaska, 62, 1881.
Koltsohane.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 134, 1874.
Koltschanen.— Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 7, 1855.
Koltschaner.— Erman, Archiv, vii, 128, 1849. Kolt-
•han.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond. , 68, 1856.
Koltshanen.— Richardson, Arct. Exped., 1,402, 1851.
Koltshanes.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 116, 1874.
Koltshani.~Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond.,
68, 1856. Koltehany.— Latham (1845) in Jour.
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i, 190,1848. Ktzialtana.— Pet-
roff in 10th Census, Alaska, 162. 1884. Kuakokwim.—
Latham, Essays, 269, 1860. Kuakoquimen.— Ibid.,
270. XnUchna.— Wrangell quoted by Baer and
Uelmenson. Beitrage, i, 110, 1839. XJltK-ohna.—
Petroflf in 10th Census, Alaska, 164, 1884 (trans,
.'slaves').
Knlkumisli (KnlkuHiic). A former
Maidu village near Colfax, Placer co.,
Cal. — Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist., XVII, pi. xxxviii, 1905.
Knllahan ( Kxd-Whan^ * stockade ' ) . The
site of an old village of the Semiahmoo. —
Gibbs, Clallam and Luinmi, 37, 1863.
Knlleets. A Cowichan tribe on Chi-
menes bay, Vancouver id.; pop. 68 in
1904.
Ku-le«».— Can. Ind. Aff. for 1879, 308. Ku-leeU.-^
Ibid., 1880, 316. KulleeU.— Ibid., 1901, pt. ll, 164.
Q'ale'U.— Boas, MS., B. A. E., 1887.
Kulommn {Ku-W-mum). A division of
Maidu living formerly at Susan vi lie, Las-
sen CO., Cal. — Powers in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., Ill, 282, 1877.
Knloskap. See Xanabozo.
Kulsetsiyi {KMsetaiyl^ * honey - locust
place'; but as kMsttsly the word for
honey-locust, is also used for sugar, the
local name has commonly been rendered
Sugartown by traders). The name of
several former settlement places in the old
Cherokee country. One was on Keowee
r., near the present Fall cr., in Oconee
CO., S. C; another was on Sugartown or
Cullasagee (Kuls^tsi) cr., near the present
Franklin, in Macon co., N. C; a third
was on Sugartown cr. near the present
Morganton, in Fannin co., Ga. — Moonev
in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 525, 1900.
Oolaagee.— Common map form. Kultage.— Bar-
tram, Travels, 372, 1792.
Knlshtgeash (* badger standing in the
water ' ) . A Klamath settlement on Will-
iamson r.. Lake co., s. w. Oreg.
Knlaam-Tge-iu.— Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
II, pt. I, xxix, 1890. KfiU-Tg^uih.-Ibid.
Knlswa {Kul-swd^j *sun'). A gens of
the Miami (q. v.). — Morgan, Anc. Soc.,
168, 1877.
Kultuk. A Knaiakhotana villiu^e, of 17
natives in 1880, on the e. side of Cook in-
let, Alaska. — Petroff in 10th Census,
Alaska, 29, 1884.
Kulnkak. A Togiagmiut village on
Kulukak bay, Alaska; pop. 65 in 1880.
Kulluk.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 17, 1884*
Knlnl. A former village of the Kalen-
daruk division of the Costanoan family,
connecteil with San Carlos mission, Cal.
Culul.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860.
Knlumi. A former small upper Creek
town on the right bank of lower Talla-
poosa r., in N. Montgomerv co., Ala., w.
of and contiguous to Fusihatchi. Haw-
kins, in 1 799, saw there a conical mound 30
ft in diameter opposite the town square.
A part of the inhabitants had settled on
Likasa cr. Remains of "Old Coolome
town** were on the opposite side of Talla-
poosa r. at the time ot Bartram*s visit in
1791. After the war of 1813-14 the in-
habitants of Kulumi joined the Seminole
in a body. (a. s. g.)
Oaloumas. — Bartram, Voy., i, map, 1799 (errone-
ously on the Chattahoochee). Oolemm^. — Cor-
nell (1793) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., i, 384, 1882.
CoUamee. — Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Co-
lomffa.— Lattr6, Carte des £tats-Unis, 1784. Oolo-
mieik.— Robin, Voy., ii, map, 1807. Ooolamiet.—
Swan (1791 ) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 262, 1855.
Coolome.— Bartram, Travels, 394, 395,448,461, 1791.
Coolooma.— Hawkins (1813) in Am. State Pap.,
Ind. Aff., 1, 864, 1832. Coo-loo-me.— HawlLlna (1799),
Sketch, 25, 33, 52, 1848. Culloumas.— Alcedo, Die.
Geog., I, 719, 1786. Cullowes.— Giissefeld, Map of
U. S., 1784 (wrongly placed on Chattahoochee).
Kulumi.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 136, 1884.
Knlusliat (Kti-lu'-shutj * thieving peo-
ple': Kan iagmiut name). A division of
the Ahtena on Copp€»r r., Alaska, next
to the Ikherkhamiut. — Hoffman, MS.,
B. A. E., 1882.
Knlvagavik. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo
village on the w. shore of Kuskokwim
bay, Alaska; pop. 10 in 1880.
Koolvagavigamute. — Petroff in 10th Census,
Alaska, map, 1884. Kulvagavik.- Baker, Geo«.
Dist. Alaska, 1902. Kulwogttwigamut.~Nel8on in
18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899.
Kumachisi. A former Yokuts (Mari-
posan) tribe that lived on Tule or Kern
r., Cal., or on one of the intervening
streams. — A. L. Kroeber, inf'n, 1906.
Knmadha {Kum-ad-ha). Given by
Bourke (Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ii, 181,
1889) as a clan of the Mohave, q. v.
Knmaini. A village of the Awani for-
merly at the lower end of the Great
Meadow, about a quarter of a mile from
Yosemite falls, Mariposa co., Cal.
Coomine.— Powers in Overland Monthly, x, 333,
1874. Ku-mai'-ni.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
III, 365, 1877.
BULL. 30]
KUMABMIUT — KUNGTSOA
735
Xumarmiat An Angma^^lingmiut
Eskimo village on an island at the mouth
of Angmagsalik fjord, (Treenland, lat. 65°
45'; pop. 28 in 1884.— Meddelelser oni
Gronland, ix, 379, 1902.
Kambataash. The native name of tlu'
4nhabitantH of Kumlmt, a rocky tract of
land 8. w. of Tule or Rhett lake, Cal., ex-
tending from the lake shore to tlie Lava-
beds. These i>eoi)le an^ a mixture of
Klamath Lake ana Mo<loe Indians, and
are said to have separated from theseafter
1830.
Oom-lMi-twM.— Meachain, WijfWHin aiKl Warpath,
577, 1875. GomlMitkiii.— (;at8chot in (^ont. N. A.
Kthnol., II, pt. II, 160 1890. Kum1>atkni.— Ibid.
Kvmbfttaath. — Ibid. Ktimbfttaaahkni.— Ibid. Kom-
batwMh.— Ibid., pt. i. xxxiv, 1890. Rock Indians.—
Meacham, op. cit.. 610.
Xamiyns {KUi^-ini-yus^). A former
Siuslaw village on Siuslaw r., Oreg. —
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 230,
18^0.
Knmkwn (K^iim-hrd^). A former Sius-
law village on Siuslaw r., Oreg.-rDorsev
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 230, 1890.
Xamsakwnm ( A"' um^'ifi'i'k''irum ) . A
former Yaijuina village on the s. side of
Yaquina r., Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, iii, 229, 1890.
Xan. The Corn clans of the Tewa
Sueblos of San Juan and Santa Clara, N.
lex. ^>ee KongUu
Xh^^-td^.— HwlKe i» Am. Anthn>p.. ix.»49. 1H%
J Santa Clara form ; tdi'ta - * jH'ople' ) . Kun-tdoa.—
bid. (San Juan form).
Xnna-lanas ( Ku^na hVuas, * town ])eople
of the point '). An imiwrtant familv of
the Raveii elan of the Haida. According
to one story it was so named l)ecause its
people livfcd on a point in the legendary
townof Skena (see Tadji-latuiH) ; but more
proliably it refers to the point at Naikun
where these people were at one time
settled. The Teeskun-lnajjai, Hlielung-
kun-lnagai, fe'aguikun-lnagai, and Yagun-
kun-lnagai were sulKlivL<»ions. (.i. r. s.)
Ku'na liaaa.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 270, 19or).
Kun Ut'naa.~Bo6x. 12th Rep. N. W. Tril>es CanadH.
23,1898. Kwnn Lennas.— Harri.son in Proc. aiul
Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, wh-. i i. 125, 1895.
Xandji ( AVrv/ji). A legendary' Haida
town on the f^: shore of Copi)er bay,
Moresby id., Queen Charlotte group,
Brit. Col. The .'amily living there is said
to have l)een the Daiyuahl-lanas. An-
other town of this name formerly stood on
the w. side of Prevost id., in the Ninstints
country. — Swan ton, Cont. Haida, 279,
19a5.
Kjmtehiii(Qinie^tcin). A Seechelt sept
which formerly lived at the head of
Queen's reach, Jervis inlet, Brit. Col.
The founder of this division is said to
have come from J't Ruj;)ert. — Hill-Tout in
Jour. Anthr. Inst., 23, 1904.
Xanette (Wailaki: 'Indian'). The
southernmost Athapascan group on the
Pacific coast, consisting of several trilxjs
loosely or not at all connected politically,
but speaking closely related dialects ami
|)0s.«H>wjing nearly t\w same culture. They
occupied the greater part of Kel r. basin,
incluiling the \vhoU» of Van Duzen fork,
the main Eel to within a few miles of
Roun<l valley, the s. fork and its trilmta-
ries to Ix^ng and (^ahto valleys, and the
coast from liear River range s. to l.'sal.
Their neighlK)rs were the Wishosk on the
N.,the Wintun on the w., and on the s.
the Yuki, whose territory they bisect at
Cahto, where they iHjnetrate to the Porno
country. The Kuneste suIkIi visions are
I.4issik, Wailaki, Sinkine, Kato, an<l Mat-
tole. (I*. K. <;.)
Ken'-es-ti. — Powers in Cont. N. A. Kthiiol., in,
114. 1M77 (own name I. Kool.— .\. L. Krorhcr.
iiif'n, 1903 (Yuki iianie). Kuneste. — I*. K. (Uh\-
dard, infn, 19()4 (Wailaki nanu'K
Knng (QaH). A former Haida town,
owned by the Sakiia-lanas, at the mouth
of Naden harbor, (Traham id., (2ueen
Charlotte group, Brit. Col. Possibly this
is the place referre<l to by John Work as
Nigh-tasis (q. v.), where there were said
to be 15 houses an<l 280 inhabitants* in
183()-41. Ohl j)eople rememl>er 12houst»H
there. The inhabitants have all moveil
to Masset. (j. k. s. )
Kang.— Boas. Twelfth Rei.. N. W. TrilH»s Can.,
2:^, 1H«S. Nigh-ta«i«.— Wcirk (IK^Ml) in Dawson,
Q. Charlotte Ids., 17:iB. Isso. Qah.— Swanton.
(^ont. Haida, 281. lyoT..
Kungaii. The Sweet-corn clan of San
lldefonso ]mebIo, N. >Icx.
Ku"aii-td6a.— Hixlgf in Am. Anthrop., i\. S49,
18%(MmJ -■• people).
Knngfetdi. The Black-corn clan of
San lldefonso imel>lo, X. Mex.
Kunfetdi-tdoa.— Hodjfe in Am. Anthrop.. ix. 34l»,
18% (/</»'»« 'people).
Knngga (Q'yrit/dj 'helpre<'eiviMl unex-
j>et»tedly '). A former Haida town, oc-
cupied by the Kona-kejrawai, on the s.
shore of Dog i<l., Queen Charlotte group,
F^rit. Col. The inhabitants moved to
Kloo.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 278, 1905.
Xangielang [Kfn^nfjielAfl). A former
Haida town on the w. side of the en-
trance to Ma**set inlet, QuetMi Charlotte
ids., Brit. Col. — Swanton, Cont. llai<la,
281, 1905.
Knngpi. The HtHl-corn <'lan *>( San
Udefonso pueblo, N. Mex.
Kunpi-tdoa.— Hodf?" in Am. Anthn>p.. ix. H4«»,18%
(/d<Mi— 'people').
Knngtsa. The White-corn clan of San
lldefonso pueblo, X. Mex.
Ku"t«a-td6*.— H<m1j?c in Am. Antlirop., ix, :uy.
1896 (/d<Sa=' people).
Xnngtsei. The Yellow-corn clan of
San lldefonso pueblo, X. Mex.
Ku''tBci-td6a.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 'M9,
18% (Moa=* people').
Knngtsoa. The Blue-corn clan of San
lldefonso pueblo, N. Mex.
KunUoa-tdoa.— n<Mljfe in Am. Anthrop.. ix. 319,
18% (t(l6a-'iHH)ple').
736
KUNGUGEMIUT KUSA
[b. a. a.
Kangagemiat A division of the Male-
miut Eskimo on Buckland r., Alaska.
Kangoot Kates.—- Kelly, Arctic Eskimo, chart,
1890. Kanikgmut.— Zagoskin, Desc. Russ. Poss.
in Am., pt. i, 73, 1847. Kongigamut.— Nelson in
18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. Kongigamute.—
PetrofiF. in 10th Census, Alaska, 4, 1884. Kotso-
khotana.— Zagoskin, Desc. Russ. Poss. in Am., pt. i,
73, 1847 (Tinneh name). Kungeeg-ameuts.— Hoo-
per, Cruise of Corwin, 26, 1880. Ktuig&gemut.—
ball in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 16, 1877.
Knngya. The Turquoise clans of the
Tewa pueblos of San Juan, Santa Clara,
San Ildefonso, and Tesuque, N. Mex. See
Kuyanwe,
Ko»ya-td6a.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 352, 1896
(Tesuque form; /cfda=* people'). Knnya-td^a. —
Ibid. (San Juan and Santa Clara form). Kuoye-
tdoa.— Ibid. (San Ildefonso form).
Kungyi. The Ant clan of Nam be pueblo,
N. Mex.
Ktt"7i-td6a.~Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix; 348, 1896
(<d(5o=* people').
Knnhalas ( Kii/nxcdas ) . A former Haida
town or camp just inside of Cumshewa pt. ,
Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It be-
longed to the Kona-kegawai. — Swanton,
Cont. Haida, 278, 1905.
Kunhittan (Kun-hittany * people of
flicker house ' ) . Given by Krause ( Tlin-
kit Ind., 120, 1885) as a Tlingit division,
but in reality it is merely a name for the
inhabitants of a house at Kuiu belonging
to the Nastedi, q. v.
Knnipalgi ( ^•^^mo, ^'^ono, * skunk*; algi^
^people ' ) . A Creek clan.
K!u'-mu.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 161, 1877. Kuni-
p£lgi.— Gatschet, Creek Mlgr. Leg., i, 155, 1884.
Kni^eskie. A Tlingit settlement in
Alaska; location not given; pop. 150 in
1835, according to Veniaminoff.
Koo^eskie.— Elliott, Cond. Aflf. Alaska, 227, 1875
(transl. from Veniaminoff).
Knnkhogliak. A Kaiyuhkhotana vil-
lage on Yukon r., Alaska, containing 11
people in 1844. — Zagoskin quoted by
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 37, 1884.
Knnkia (Q/A^nkia), A former Haida
town on the n. coast of North id.. Queen
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. — Swanton, Cont.
Haida, 281, 1905.
Kanmint ( * river people ' ) . An Eskimo
tribe living on Kok r. above Wainwfight
inlet, Alaska. They have been displaced
by Nunatogmiut immigrants, and in 1890
had only 3 settlements left, each contain-
ing from 1 to 4 families. One of these
was Kilimantavie.
Kflaawitawi'nminn.— Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. £.,
44, 1892. KooagomutM.— Elliott, Our Arct. Prov.,
map, 1886. Koogmute.— Kelly, Arct. Eskimos, 14,
1890. Kooq Kntet.— Ibid., chart. Kugmiut.—
Eleventh Census, Alaska, 162, 1893. Ku'nmiim.—
Murdoch in 9th Rep. B. A. E., 44, 1892.
Kuniuui-hadai ( Kun nas :had* of * , * w hale-
house people'). Given by Boas (Fifth
Report N. W. Tribes Canada, 27, 1889)
as the name of a subdivision of the Yaku-
lanas. a family of the Raven clan of the
Haida, but in reality it is only a house
name belonging to that group. ( j. r. s. )
Kunnesee. &e Ihragging-canoe.
Kunniwuimeme ( KUn-nV-vrdn-ne^-me ) .
An Oregon tribe e. of the Tillamook (Dor-
sey, Nalttlnnettinne MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1884), identified as in Athapascan terri-
tory, but otherwise unknown.
Knxmnpiyn (ICiin'nu^-pi'yu^). A for-
mer Yaquina village on the n. side of
Yaquina r., Oreg.— Dorsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, iii, 229, 1890.
Kanstamish {Kun-sta-mish). A village
of the Guauaenok Kwakiutl on the e. ride
of Clay don bay. Wells passage, Brit. Col. —
Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887,
sec. II, 73.
Kaosagm ( Kuosm^yrn, ) . A summer vil-
lage of the Utkiavinmiut Eskimo, on a
dry place inland from Pt Barrow, Alas-
ka.—Murdoch in 9th Rep. B.A. E., 83,
1892.
Ktipimithlta(^w-c]fi^-m?^-<d'). A former
Siuslaw village on Siuslaw r., Oreg. —
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 230,
1890.
Knping. The Coral clans of the Tewa
pueblos of San Juan, Santa Clara, San H-
defonso, and Tesuque, N. Mex. That of
Tesuque is extinct.
Kopin-tdoa.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 849, 1896
( San J uan f orm ; tdda = * people ' ) . Kupi»-td6a.—
Ibid. (San Ildefonso form). KupiB-tdoa.— Ibid.
(Tesuque form). Kupi-toda.— Ibid. (Santa Clara
form; <(5da misprinted for fcWa).
Knpkipcock. A vil lage of the Powhatan
confederacy on Pamunkey r., King Wil-
liam CO., Va., in 1608.
Kaposeoocke.— Strachey (ca. 1612), Virginia, 62,
1949. Kupkipoook.— Smith (1629) .Virginia, i, map,
repr. 1819.
Knptagok. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Kumi. The (Joose clan of the Tigua
gueblo of Isleta, N. Mex.
umi-t'Mnin.— Lummis quoted by Hodge in Am.
Anthrop., ix, 350, 1896 (rafmn= 'people').
Kurts. The Antelope clans of the Kere-
san pueblos of Lacuna, Acoma, Sia, Qan
Felipe, and Cochiti, N. Mex. The Ante-
lope clan of Laguna claims to have come
originally from Zuili and to form a phra-
try with theTsits ( Water) clan, while that
of Acoma forms a phratrv with the Water
clan of that pueblo. The Antelope clan
of Cochiti is extinct. ( f. w. h. )
Kilr't«-hanoq«»>.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 848,
1896 ( Acoma form ; hdnoqch = • people ' ). Kfir'tei-
hano«»»— Ibid. ( Laguna form) . Kurtz.— Stevenson
in 11th Rep. B. A. £., 19, 1894 (Sia name). Ktt'to-
hano.— Hodge, op. cit. (Sia form). Kfi'ts-hinuoh.—
Ibid. (Cochiti form). K^uU-hano.— Ibid. (San Fe-
lipe form).
Kusa (Gatschet suggests kdsa, the name
of a small forest bird resembling a spar-
row, or d^sQy osdf * pokeweed, * as the origin
of the word; but if the people of Kosa
are identical with the Conshac of the
French, the name would mean *cane,'
*reed,' or * reed brake.' See Conshac).
A former town of the Upper Creeks,
on the high e. bank of Coosa r.,
between Columbiana and Talladega, in
Talladega co., Ala., between the points
where Talladega and Tallahatchie ers.
join the Coosa, and on the site of the
SULL. 30]
K08AN FAMILY KUSKUSKI
737
^resent Coosa station. The town was
)nce regarded as an important center, a
lort of capital. The De Soto expedition
)f 1540-41 saw it in its flourishing condi-
ion, but when Bartram passtnl it, about
1775, it was mostly in rums and half de-
lerted, a j>art of its inhabitants endently
laving joined the Abikudshi, while the
)thers went to the nearby Nat<'hez town.
Up to 1775, according to Adair, Kn?a. was
I place of refuge for "those who kill un-
iesignedly.'* The Upper Cn^eks were
frequently, called "Coosas," from the
lame of the town.
3ooa.— Gentleman of Elvas (1567) in French, Hist.
Ck>ll.La.,il,141.1850. Coooa.— French, ibid., 2d s.,
n, 247, 1876. Oooia.— Romans, Fla., 90, 1775. Coo-
Mtu.— Hawkins (1799). Sketch. 41,1848. Cooaaw.—
Martin, N. C, i, 194, 1829. Coo»e«.— Royce in 18th
Rep. B. A. E., Ala. map, 1899. Oooiit.— U. S. Ind.
rreat. (1797). 68, 1887. Oorwu.— Hawkins (1799),
Sketch, 15, 1848. Com — Jefferys, French Dom.
Am., map, 134, 1761. OoMa.— Vandcra (15()7) in
Smith, Ck>lec. Doc. Fla., i, 18, 1867. Cousaa.—
Mitchell, map (1756), cited in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist..
K, 219, 1868. OouMa.— Ooxe. Carolana. map, 1741.
Oosai.— Ibid.,25. Oaraa.~Raflnesqne. introd. Mar-
shall. Ky., i, 85, 1824. Ouiaiu.— Ibid.,24. Koosah.—
Adair, Am. Ind., 159, 1775.
Xaian Family. A small linguistic stock
formerly occupying villages on Coos r.
and bav, and on lower Coquille r., Oreg.
(see Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 89,
1891). The name is from that of the
tribe, CJoos {<i. v.) or Kusa, which is said
to be taken from one of the Rogue River
dialects in which it means Make,' Ma-
roon,' or * inland bay.' Within historic
times there have l)een 4 villages in this
region in which the Kusan language was
spoken. It is probable that at an earlier
period the family extended much farther
mland along the' tributaries of Coos bay,
but had been gradually f<m'eil into the
contracted area on the coast by the prt»s-
Bure of the Athapascan trilH»s' on the s.
and E. and the Yakonan on the n. The
stock is now practically extinct; the few
survivors, for the greater part of mixed
blood, are on the Siletz res. in Oreg.,
whither they went after ceding their
lands by (unconfirmed) treaty of 1855.
Practicallv nothing is known of the cus-
toms of this people, but there is no rea-
son to suppose tnat they differed mark-
edly fronri their neighbors on the n. The
social unit was apparently the villajre, and
there is no tmve of a clan or gentile sys-
tem other than the relationships natu-
rally arising in a locally restricted group.
It is interesting to note also that the prac-
tice of deformmg the head was not cur-
rent among the Kusan, although preva-
lent among the Yakonan, their northern
neighbors. The Kusan villages known to
have existed are: Melukitz, n. side of
Coos bay; Anasitch, s. side of Coos bay;
Mulluk (speaking a different dialect), n.
side of Coquille r.; Nasumi, s. side of
Coquille r. (l. p.)
Knseshyaka. The (^xtinct White-corn
clan of Acoma pueblo, N. Mex, See
Yaka,
KatMhyaka-hanoq<'h.— IIodKC in Am. Anthrop.,
IX, 349, 1«96 {ffaka --•corn ', A»t/*fK/<-A .-= 'iK'ople * ).
Kushapokla (* divided jK^ople'). One
of the two Choctaw ])hratrieH, consisting
of 4 (*lans: Kushiksa, Lawokla, Lulak-
iksa, and Linoklusha.
Kashapaokla. -ten Knte, Reizcn in N. A., 402,
1885. Ka«hap-ukla.— Gatsc'het, Creek Migr. Leg.,
1. 104. 1884. Ku-»hap'. Ok'-la.— Morgan. Ane. Soc.,
162. 1S77.
Kashetunne. A former village of the
Tutntni on the n. side of Rogue r., Oreg.
Cosatomv.— Palmvr in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 219,
1857. Ka«-«o-teh-nie.— (TihbvS, MS. on coast tilbes,
B. A. E. x^c-c«' ^uim8'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, in, 233. 1890. Kwfla-ie'-^ibi.— Doraey,
NaltQnne ^Onn(i MS. vocab.. B. A. E.. 1884 (Nal-
tunnetunne name) .
Kashiksa ( Kush-ijy-m ) . The Reed clan
of the Choctaw, belonging to the Kush-
apokla or Divided people phratry. — Mor-
gan, Anc. Soc, 162, 1S77.
Knahletata (KTi(/'1e-ta^'ta). A former
Chastacosta village on Rogue r., Oreg. —
Dorsev in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 234,
1890. *
Knshnh ( * cotton wood tree * ) . A former
Chitiniacha village on L. Mingaluak,
near Bayou Cheque, I^.
Kuthu'h namu.— Gatschet in Trans. Anthrop. Soc.
Wash.. II. 152, 1883 {ndmu-' village').
KuBilvak. A Chnagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage and Roman Catholic mission on
Kusilvak id., at the mouth of Yukon r.,
Alaska.
Kusilvak.— Petroff in 10th Censu.s. Alaska, map.
1884. KusUvuk.— Bruce. Alaska, 188.5.
Kaskok. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on Kuskokwim r., Alaska, near its
mouth; pop. 24 in 1880, 115 in 1890.
Kuakogamute.— Petroflf in 10th Onsus. Alaska,
map, 1884. Euskohkagamiut.— Eleventh Census,
Alaska. 164. 1893. Kuikok.— Baker, Geog. Diet.
Ala.Mka. 1902. Kuakokvaflramute.— PetrolT in 10th
Census, Alaska, 17, 1884. Kuakokvacmute.— Petroff,
Rep. on Alaska. 74, 1881. Kuakokwair«mute.—
Halloi'k in Nat. Geog. Mag., ix, 88, 1898.
Knakokvak. A (former?) Kuskwog-
miut Eskimo village on the w. bank of
Kuskokwim r., Alaska, near its mouth.
Kuakokvakh. — Petn)fT in 10th Census, A lafika. map,
1884. Kuikovak. —Baker. GiK)g. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Kuakovakh.— Nelson (1879) cited by Baker, ibid.
KuBkunnk. A Kaialigtimut Eskimo vil-
lage on Hooper bay, Alaska. — Nelson in
18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 18W.
Knsknski (seemingly from kfishkHsh-
khig, * hog place ' ) . An important village
of mixed Dela wares and Iroquois, in 1753-
1770, on Beaver cr.. Pa., near Newcastle,
in I^wrence CO. AnoteinN. Y. Doc.Col.
Hist. X, 949, says it was at the forks of
Beaver cr., in Beaver co. Another au-
thority (Darlington, Gist's Jour., 101,
1898) says it was on the w. bank of Ma-
honing r., 6 m. above the forks of Beaver
cr. and just s. of the present Edinburg,
Lawrence co. An older village of the
same name had formerly stooil on the
Shenango, at the site of the present New-
Bull. 30—05-
-47
738
KU8KU88U KUTAUWA
[B. A. ■.
castle. In 1758 Knskuski was composed
of 4 distinct settlements, having a total
population of about 1 , 000 souls, (j . m. )
Oachecacheki.— Vaudreuil (1759) in N. Y.Doc.Col.
Hist., X, 949. 1858. Cachekaoheki.— Ibid. Cas,-
0Afh,uk,gey.— Clinton (1750), ibid., vi, 549, 1855.
CoMOtky.— Weiser (1748) in Rupp, West. Pa.,
app., 14, 1846. Cosohouihke.— Heckewelder in
Trans. Am. Philos. Soc, n. s., i v, 395, 1834. Ousoiu-
kie.— Croghan (1750} in Rupp, West. Pa., app.,
27, 1846. CuBkcaikking Pa. Archives, in, 525,
1853. Cutkutkus.— Rupp., op. cit., 138 (pi. form
ii.sed for the inhabitants) . Cususkey.— Day, Pa., 62,
1843. Kaschkaschkung.— Leroy and Leininger
(1755) in Pa. Mag. Hist, and Biog., xxix, 412,
1905. Kaakaskunk.— Loskiel. Miss. United Breth.,
St. 3, 55, 1794. Kaskutkies.— Gist (1753) in Mass.
[ist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., v, 103, 1836. Kishkuske.—
Hutchin'smap (1764) in Smith. Bouquet's Exped.,
1766. K»hku»hkiiig.— Post (1758) in Rupp, West.
Pa., app.. 116, 1846 (u omitted). Kuthcushkeo.—
Post (1758) in Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 6, 39, 1W8.
Kuahkuihkee.— Post (1758) in Rupp, West. Pa.,
app., 80, 1846. Kuahkushking.— Post (1758) in
Rupp, West. Pa., app., laS, 1846. Kushkuskies.—
Smith, Bouquet's Exped., 67, 1766. Kuskuaohki.—
Heckewelder in Trans. Am. Philos. Soc., n. s., iv,
366, 1834. Kutkuakaa.— Washington (1753) in
Rupp. West. Pa., app., 39, 1846. Kuakoakeea.—
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 949, note, 1858. Kuakus-
kiea.— Lotter, map. en. 1770. Kuakuakin.— Alden
il834) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., vi, 144. 1837.
[uakuako Town.— Washington (1753) in Rupp,
West. Pa.. app., 41, 1846. Kutkuaky— Peters (1760)
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix, 258, 1871. Mur-
dering town.— Washington (1753) in Rupp, West.
Pa., app., 48, 1846. Murthering Town.— Gist ( 1753)
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., v, 103, 1836.
Kaskassa (Kfiif^'kus-sCi^). A former Si-
uslaw village on Siuslaw r. , Oreg. — Dorsev
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 280, 1890.
Kuskwogmint. An Eskimo tribe in-
habiting the shores of Kuskokwini bay
and the banks of Kuskokwim r. and its
tributaries as far as Kolniakof, Alaska.
They are the most numerous of the tribes
and the least modified through contact
with whites. They live in underground
huts, with frames of driftwood covered
with sods. They hunt the walrus, the
beluga, and the hair seal. Sea birds
provide them with meat and eggs, and
the feathere<l skins with clothing. The
streams and lakes of the interior abound
in trout, and herds of reindeer feed on the
tundra. Their fuel is driftwoo<l. They
drink the foul water of the lagoons, yet
are healthy and strong. Every male has
a kaiak. Above tide water they use
birch-bark canoes. They catch salmon
and whitefish in wicker weirs, and trap
foxes and otters. There is little that the
natives can obtain to sell, qnd therefore
they remain in their aboriginal condition.
They are skillful carvers of ivory and
wood. The dwellers on the tundra,
where wild fowl and berries are plenty,
repair with their kaiaks in the summer
to trap and dry their winter supply of
salmon. Villages on the upper reaches
are built of wood, and each has its large
ceremonial house in which masked dances
take place in winter. Besides the sum-
mer houses roofed with sod there are the
usual underground winter habitations
reached by a tunnel.
The tribe numbered 3,287 in 1899.
The Kuskwogmiut villages are as fol-
1< ) ws : Agomekelenanak, Agulakpak, Asa-
liak, Agumak, Akiachak, Akiak, Ak-
lut, Akmiut, Anagok, Apahiachak, Apo-
kak, Atchaluk, Bethel, Chimiak, Chuar-
litilik, Ekaluktaluk, fltoluk, Igiakchak,
Iliutak, Kahmiut, Kakuiak, Kakuikak,
Kaltshak, Kaluktuk, Kam^li, Kanagak,
Kanak, Kenachananak, Kiktak, Kinak,
Kinegnagak, Kinegnak, Klchakuk, Kle-
guchek, Klutak, Kolmakof, Kon^ganak,
Kuilkluk, Kukluktuk, Kulvagavik, Kus-
kok, Kuskokvak, Kweleluk, Kwik, Kwi-
kak, Kwilokuk, Kwinak, Lomavik,
Mumtrak, Mumtrelek, Nak, Nakolkavik,
Napai, Napaiskak, Napakiak, Nochak,
Novoktolak, Okaganak, Oknagak, Oyak,
Papka, Shevenak, Shimiak, Shokfak,
Takiketak, Togiaratsorik, Tuklak, Tular-
ka, Tuluksak, Tunagak, TJgovik, Ukna-
vik. Ulokak, Vinasale, and Yakchilak.
Agftlmut.— Holmberg quoted by Dall in Cent.
N. A. Ethnol., I, 18, 1877. InkaUten.— Wrangell
quoted by Dall, ibid. Koakoqnima.— £lliott, Cond.
AfT. in Alaska, 29, 1875. Kouakokhantaea.— Lutke,
Voyage, i, 181, 1835 (^seemingly identical). Knaeh-
kttkohwak-muten.— Wrangell, £thnog. Nachr., 127,
1839. Kuahokwagmut.- Nelson in 18th Rep.B. A. E.,
map, 1899. Kuiko kilax tana.— Doroschin in Rad-
loff. Worterb. d. Kinai-Spr., 29, 1874 (Kinai name).
Kuakokwannut.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E., pi.
ii, 1899. Kuakokwignnuten.- Holmberg, Ethnog.
Skizz., 5, 1855. Kuakokwim.- Nelson in Soc. Roy,
Beige de Geog., 318, 1901. Koakokwimar.- Wran-
gell, Ethnog. Nachr., 121, 1839. Kuakokwimjuta.—
Turner quoted bv Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i,
18, 1877. Kuakokwima.— Latham (1845) in Jour.
Ethnol. Soc. Lond.. i, 185, 1848. Kaakokwimtai.—
Worman quoted by Dall in CJont. N. A. Ethnol.,
I. 18, 1877. Kuakutohewak.— Richardson, Arct.
Kxped., I, 364. 1851. Kuskutahawak.— Latham,
Klem. Comp. Philol., 386, 1862. Kuakw6gmata.—
Dall in Proc. A. A. A. S., 267, 1869.
Knstahekdaan ( KAstaxe^xda-dn ) . A for-
mer Tlingit town in the Sitka country,
Alaska. ( j. r. s. )
KuBtatan. A Knaiakhotana village, of
45 natives in 1890, on the w. side of Cook
inlet, Alaska. — 11th Census, Alaska, 163,
1893.
Knta. Said to be a clan of the pueblo
of Santo Domingo, N. Mex. The name
refers to either the sagebrush or the sun-
flower.— Bourke, Moquis of Arizona, 13,
1884.
Shipi.- Bourke, ibid. (Kuta or).
Kntaiimiks ( Knt^-ai-im-iks, * they do not
laugh'). A division of the Piegan tribe
of the Siksika, q. v.
Don't Laugh.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodgre Tales,
225, 1892. Ka-ti'-ya-ye-mix.— Moivan, Anc. Soc.,
171, 1877 (=a* never laugh'). Ko-te'-yi-mika.—
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.. 264, 1862
( = ' the band that do not laugh' ) . Kat'-ai-Im-ika. —
Orinnell, op. cit., 209. The People that doB*t
laugh.— Culbert8on in Smithson. Rep. 1850, 144,
im.
Kataisotsiman ('no parfleche' ). A divi-
sion of the Piegan tribe of the Siksika.
Kut-ai-aot'-al-man. — Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge
Tales, 209, 1892. No Parfleohe.— Ibid.. 225.
Kntanwa. A former Alsea village on
the N. side of Alsea r., Or^., at its mouth.
Ktt-tau'-wi.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ni,
229, 1890. Necketo.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii,
BULL. .30 J
KUTAWIOHASHA — KUTCHIN
739
IIK. 1814. Neeketoot.— Ibid., ii, 592. 1817. Neekee-
to<M.~Mor8e. Rep. to Sec. War, 371, 1822. Heeke-
t0Qft.~Lewis and Clark. Exped.. II.473. 1814.
Xntawiohasha ('lowland people ' ) . One
of the two chief local divipions of the
Brul6 Teton Sioux, formerly inhabiting
the bottom lands along MiHi«ouri r.
Ooutah-wee-oha-oha.— Corliss, Lacotah MS. vocab.,
B. A. £., 106. 1874. Kud-witcaoa.— Doney in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 218, 1897. Ka»U-witcaca. — Ibid.
KuBwiea'uk. — lapi Oaye, xii, 12, 1884. Kate-
witeaoa. — Dorscv, op. cit. Lower Brule. — U. S.
Stat, XIV, 699, 1868. Lower Bruile.— U. S. Ind.
Treat., 892, 1873. Lowland Brule.— Dorsey, op. cit.
Tonoaa.— CorlisH, Lacotah M.S. vocab., B. A. E., 106,
1874.
^ntni^itkiitiyhiTi (* giant people*). A
Kutchin tribe in Alaska, inhabiting both
banks of the Yukon from Birch cr. to
Porcupine r., including the Ft Yukon dis-
trict. In 1847 McMurray descended Por-
cupine r. to the Yukon and built Ft
6AVIAH, CHIEF OF THE KUTCHAKUTCHtN. (from Richard-
son, ARCTIC SCARCHING EXPEO.. 1851 )
Yukon at the confluence. I n 1 860 Robert
Kennicott wintered at Ft Yukon, and in
1866 Ketch um explored the country about
the fort. In May, 1867, Dall and Whvm-
per (Dall, Alaska, 277, 1870) visited Ft
Yukon, being the first to reach that point
by way of the river. The Kutchakutchin
are somewhat nomadic, living principally
by hunting and trapping the fox, marten,
wolf, wolverene, aeer, lynx, rabbit,
marmot, and moose. They are traders,
making little for themselves, but buying
from the tribes which use Ft Yukon as a
common trailing post. Nakieikj their
standard of value, consists of strings of
beads, each string 7 ft long. A string is
worth one or more beaver skins accord-
ing to the kind of beads, and the whole
ncikieik is valued at 24 pelts. Their
dwellings, shaped like inverted teacups
are of sewed deerskins fastened over
curved poles. The women are said to per-
form most of the drudgery, but the men
cook. lacking pottery, their utensils are
of wood, matting, sheep horns, or birch
bark; their dishes are wooden troughs;
and their spoons of wood or honi hold a
pint. Kettles of woven tamarack roots
are obtained from the Hankutchin.
Jones says they are divided into three
castes or clans: Tchitcheah (Chitsa),
Tengeratsey (Tangesatsa), and Natsahi
(Natesa). Formerly a man must marry
into another clan, but this custom has
fallen into disuse. Polygamy and slavery
are practised among them' They for-
merly burned their dead, but now use a
coffin placed upon a raised platform, a
feast accompanying the funeral ceremony.
Richardson (Arct. P:xihm1., i, 386, 1851)
f>lace<l the numl)er of men at 90. They
lave a village at Ft Yukon. Senati, on
the middle Yukon, was settled by them.
The Tat«akutchin and Tennuth kutchin,
offshoots of the main tribe, are extinct.
Eert-kai-lee.— Parrv quoted by Murdoch in 9tii
Rep. B. A. E., 61, 1892. Fort Indianf.— Row, MS.
iioteaonTlnne, B. A. E. Ik-kiMiii.— Gilder quoted
by Murdoch In 9th Rep. B. A. E., 61, 1892. Itch-
aU.— nth Census. Alaska, 164, 1898. It-kagh-lie.—
Lvon quoted bv Murdoch, op. cit. It-ka-lva-
ruin.— Dall in Cout. N. A. Ethnol., i, 30, 1877
(Nuwukmiut Eskimo name). I't-ka-lyi.— Simj)-
son quoted bv Murdoch, op. cit. Itkpe'lit.— Peti-
tot, Vocab. Fran^ais F>(iulmau. 42. 1876. likpi-
leit— Ibid., xxiv. Itku'dlln.— Munioch, op. cit.
Koo-oha-koo-ohin.— Hardi.sty in Smithson. Rep.,
311 , 1866. Kot-a-Kutchin.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i,
147,1874. Kotch-a-Kutchin«.— Whymper, Alaska,
247. 1869. Koushea Kouttchin.— Petitot, Autour du
lacdesEsclaves,361. 1891. KutchaaKuttchin.— Peti-
tot, MS. vocab., B. A. E.. ims. Kutcha-kutchi.—
Richardson, Arct. Expe<i., i. 386, 1861. Kutch a
Kutchin.— Kirkby 0862) in Hind, Lab. Penin.,ii,
264, 1863. Kutchia-Kuttchin.— Petitot, Diet. D^n^
Dindji^, xx, 1«76 (* giant people'). Kutsha-Ku-
Uhi.— Latham, Nat. Races, 293, 1854. Low-land-
ers.—Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 42d Cong., Ist
sess., 34,1871. Lowland people.— Whymper, Alaska,
254, 1869. Na-Kotohp6-tsohig-Eottttohin.— Petitot,
Autour du lac des Rsclaves, 361, 1891 ('people of
the river with gieantic banks') . O-til'-tin.— Daw-
son in Rep. Geol. Surv. Can., 202b. 1887. Toukon
Louohiouz Indians.— Ross, MS. notes on Tinne,
B. A. E.
Katchin (*i)eople*). A group of Atha-
pascan tribes m Alaska and British
North America, inhabiting the region
on the Yukon and its tributaries above
Nuklukayet, the Peel r. basin, and the
lower Mackenzie valley. They have
decreased to half their former numbers
owing to wars between the tribes and the
killing of female children. Chiefs and
medicme-men and those who possess rank
acquired by property have two or more
wives. They usualiv live in large parties,
each headed by a chief and having one
or more medicine-men, the latter acquir-
ing an authority to which even the chiefs
are subject. Their dances and chants are
rhythmical and their games art> more
manly and rational than those of their
congeners. They have wrestling bouts
^ y:
740
KUTCHLOK KUTENAI
[b. i
which are begun by little boys, those
next in strength coining on in turn until
the strongest or freshest man in the band
remains the final victor, after which the
KUTCHIN WOMAN. (am. Mu8. NaT. HIST.)
women go through the same progressive
contest. They are exceedingly hospita-
ble, keeping guests for months, and each
head of a family takes his turn in feasting
KUTCHIN MAN.
AM. Mus. Nat. Hist. J
the whole band, on which occasion eti-
quette requires him to fast until the guests
have departed (Ilardistv in Smithson.
Rep. for 1866, 313). The Kutchin tribes
are Tenankutchin, Natsitkutchin, Ku-
tchakutchin, Hankutchin, Trotsikku-
tchin, Tutchonekutchin, Vuntakutchin,
Tukkuthkutchin, Tatlitkutchin, Nako-
tchokutchin, and Kwitchakutchin.
Dehkewi.— Petitot, Kutchin MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1869 (Kawchodinneh name). Sen^jye.— Petitot,
MS. vocab., B. A. E.. 1865. Si-ffO-thi-tdinn).—
Richardson, Arct. Exped., i, 378, 1851 (Kaw-
chodinneh name). Dinchi^.— Petitot in Bui.
Soc. de G6og. Pari.s, chart, 1876. Sin^il—
Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclaves, 861, 1891.
Dindjie Louoheux.— Ibid.,289. £rldl«Lt.~Ibld.,168
i Greenland Eskimo name). Irkpeleit. — Ibid.
Coochin.— Anderson ( 1868) in Hind, Lab. Penin.
1 1 , 260, 1863. Koo-tohin'.— Morgan in N. Am. Rev.,
58, 1870. Kaohin.— Ibid. Kutchin.— Richardson,
Arct. Exped., 214, 1851. Ku-t'qin.—Morice, Notes
on W. D6n68, 15, 1893. Kutdii.— Latham, Nat
Races. 293, 1854. Kutohhi.— Ibid.,292. Loo-ohooa.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 27, 1852. Loaohauz.—
Franklin, Journ. Polar Sea, ii, 83,1824 (Canadian
French, • squint-fey es'). Louehioux.— Koss, MS.
notes on Tinne, B. A. E. Louohooz.— Ibid. Quar-
relers.—Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, n, 27, 1852.
•Sharp-eyed Indians.— Richardson in Franklin,
Second Exped. Polar Sea, 165, 1828. SqiiiBt
Eyes.— Franklin, Journ. Polar Seas, ii, 88, 1824.
Zanker-Indianer.— Buschmann, Spuren der aztek.
Sprache, 713, 1859.
Kntchlok. A former Aleut village on
Unalaska, Aleutian ids., Alaska.
Ikutchlok.— Coxe, Russ. Discov.. 160, 1787. Kutoh-
lok. -Ibid., 158.
Kntek. A settlement of East Greenland
Eskimo on the s. e. coast of Greenland,
lat. 60° 45^— Meddelelser om Gronland,
X, 24, 1888.
Kntenai (corrupted form, possibly by
way of the language of the Siksika, of
Kutondqot one of their names for them-
selves). A people forming a distinct
linguistic stock, the Kitunahan family
of Powell, who inhabit parts of s. s. British
Columbiaand N.Montanaand Idaho, from
the lakes near the source of Columbia r.
to Pend d* Oreille lake. Their legendsand
'traditions indicate that they originally
dwelt E. of the Rooky jnts., probably in
Montana, whence they were a riven west-
ward by the Siksika* their hereditary
enemies. The two tribes now live on
amicable terms, and some intermarrii^
has taken place. Before the buffalo dis-
appeared from the plains they often had
joint hunting expeditions. Kecollection
of the treatment of the Kutenai by the
Siksika remains, however, in the name
they give the latter, Sahantla (*bad
people*). They entertained also a bad
opinion of the Assiniboin (Tlutlamaeka,
* cut- throats*), and the Cree (Gutskiawe,
Miars*).
The Kutenai language is spoken in two
slightly differing dialects, Upper and
Lower Kutenai. A few uncertain pointsof
similarity in grammatical structure with
the Shoshonean tongues seem to exist.
The language is incorporative both with
respect to the pronoun and the noun ob-
ject. Prefixes and suffixes abound, the
prefix aq(k)' in nouns occurring with
remarkable frequency. As in the Algon-
BULL. 30]
KITTENAI
741
qaian tonnes, the fomi of a word uscnI
in compofiition differs from that which it
has independently. RiHluphcation is
very rare, occurring only in a few noiinn,
some of which are possibly of foreign
origin. There are a few loan-words from
Salishan dialects.
The Upijer Kutenai include the follow-
ing subdivisions: Akiskenukinik, Akani-
nik, Akanekunik, and Akiyenik.
The Lower Kutenai are more primitive
and nomadic, less under the innuencc of
the Catholic church, and more jjiven to
Smbling. They have long been river and
se Indians, and possess peculiar Imrk
canoes that resemble some of those used in
the Amur region in Asia (Mason in Kep.
Nat. Mus., 1899). Of late years many of
them have taken to horst*s and are skillful
in their management. The I^i)i)er Kute-
nai keep nearer the settlements, often
obtaining a living by serving the st^ttlers
and miners in various ways. Many of
them have practically ceasell to \ye cah(H»-
men and travel by horse. Both the Ui)-
per and the Ix)wer Kutenai hunt and fish,
the latter depending more on fish for
food. Physically, the Kutenai are. well
developed and rank among the taller
tribes of British Columbia. I ndications of
race mixture stn^m to Iw shown in the form
of the head. Their general character
from the time of I)e Smet has been re-
ported good. Their morality, kindness,
and hospitality art^ nott*worthy, and more
than any other Indians of the country
they have avoideil drunkenness an<l lewd
intercourse with the whites. Their men-
tal abilitv is comparatively high, and the
efforts of the missionaries have l)een re-
war<le<l with success. They art* not ex-
cesdively given to emotional instability,
do not lack a sense of interest, and can
concentrate attention when necessary.
Their soc'ial system is simple, and no evi-
dence of the existence of totems or secret
societies has been found. The chieftain-
ship, now more or k>ss elective, wa*^
prooably hereditary, with limitations;
slavery of war prisoners was formerly
in vogue; and relatives were responsible
for the debts of a deceased i)erson. Mar-
riage was originally polygamous; divorced
women were allowed to marry again, and
adultery was not severely punished.
Adoption by marriage or by residence of
more than a year was common. Women
could hold certain kinds of property, such
as tents and utensils. A wergild was cus-
tomary. Religion was a sort of sun wor-
ship, and the belief in the ensoul ment of
all things and in reincarnation prevailed.
The land of the dead was in the sun, from
which at some time all the departed
would descend to L. Pent! d*Oreille to
meet the Kutenai then living. In the
old days the medicine-men were very
powerful, their influence surviving most
with the Ivower Kutenai, who still paint
their faeces on dance (X'casions; but tatt<K)-
ing is rare. Kxcept a sort of reed pipe, a
bone flute, and the drum, musical instru-
ments were unknown to them; but they
had gambling, dancing, and medicine
songs. The Ix)wer Kutenai are still ex-
cwdinglv addicted to gambling, their
favorite l)eing a noisy variety of the wide-
spread guess-stick game. The Kutenai
were in former days great buffalo hunters.
Firearms have driven out the l)ow and
arrow, save as children's toys <)r for kill-
ing birds. Spearing, the Iwisket trap, and
wicker weirs were much in use by the
I^wer Kutenai. Besiiles the bark canoe,
they had dugouts; both skin and rush
lodges were built; the sweat house was
universiil. Stone hanmiers were still in
use in parts of their country in the last
vears of the 19th century. The b^wer
kutenai are still note<l for their water-
tight baskets of split roots. In dress they
originally resembled the Plains Indians
rather than those of the coast; but con-
tact with the whites has greatly mo<lified
their co.<tume. While fond of the white
man's tobacco, they have a sort of their
own made of willow bark. A large \\&r\
of their foo<l sup[)ly is now obtaine<l from
the wiiites. For food, medicine, and
economical ])urpose8 the Kutenai use a
large numl)er of the ]>lant prcwlucts of
their environment (Chamberlain in Verb,
d. Berl. Ges. f. Anthr., 55I-«, 1895).
They were gifted also with esthetic appre-
ciation of several plants and flowers.
The diseases from which the Kutenai
suffer most are consumption and ophthal-
mic troubles; venereal diseast»s are nire.
Interesting maturity ceremonic»s still sur-
vive in part. The' mythology and folk-
lore of the Kutenai consist chiefly of
cosmic and ethnic myths, animal tales,
etc. In the animal tales the coyote, as
an adventurer and dect^iver, is tfie most
prominent figure, and with him an* often
associated the chicken-hawk, the grizzlv
bear, the fox, the cricket, and the wolf.
Other creatures which api>ear in these
stories are the In'aver, buffalo, <*aril)0!i,
chipmunk, deer, dog, moose, mountain
lion, rabbit, squirrel, skunk, duck, eagle,
grouse, goose, magpie, owl, snowbird,
tomtit, trout, whale, butterfly, mosquito,
frog, toad, and turtle. Most of the cos-
mogonic legends seem to lH»l<mg to the
N. w. Pacific cycle; many of the coyote
tales belong to* the cycle of the Rocky
mt. region, others have a Siouan or
Algonquian asp<»ct in some particulars.
Their deluge myth is peculiar in several
respects. A numlx^r of tales of giants
occur, two of the legends, '*Seven Heads"
742
KUTENAI
[B. A. B.
and **Lame Knee," suggesting Old World
analogies. The story of the man in the
moon is probably borrowed from French
sources.
While few evidences of their artistic
ability in the way of pictographs, birch-
bark drawin^H, etc., have been reported,
the Kutenai are no mean draitsmen.
Some of them possess an idea of map
making and have a good sense of the
physical features of the country. Some
of their drawings of the horse and the
buffalo are characteristically lifelike and
quite accurate. The ornamentation of
tneir moccasins and other articles, the
work of the women, is often elaborate,
one of the motives of their decorative
art being the Oregon grape. They do
not seem to have made pottery, nor to
have indulged in wood carving to a large
extent. The direct contact of the Kute-
nai with the whites is comparatively re-
cent. Their word for white man, Suy-
iipi, is identical with the Nez Perc^
Sueapo (Parker. Jour., 381, 1840), and
is probably borrowed. Otherwise the
white man is called Nutlu^'qene, * stran-
ger.' They have had few serious troub-
les with the whites, and are not now a
warlike people. As yet the Canadian
Kutenai are not reservation Indians. The
United States seems to have made no di-
rect treaty with the tribe for the exting-
uishment of their territorial rights (Royce
in 18th Rep. B. A. p:., 856).
Within the Kutenai area, on the Co-
lumbia lakes, live a colony of Shushwap
(Salishan) known as Kinbaskets, num-
bering 56 in 1904. In that year the Ku-
tenai m British territory were reported to
number 558, as follows: Lower Columbia
I^ke, 80; Ix)wer Kutenai (Flatbow), 172;
St Mary's (Ft Steele), 216; Tobacco Plains,
61; Arrow Lake (West Kutenai), 24.
These returns indicate a decrease of about
150 in 13 years. The United States cen-
sus of 1890 gave the number of Kutenai
in Idaho and Montana as 400 to 500; in
1905 those under the Flathead agency,
Mont., were rejiorted to number 554.
The Kutenai have given their name to
Kootenai r., the districts of East, West,
and North Kootenay, Brit. Col., Kootenai
lake, Brit. Col., Kootanie pass in the
Rocky mt«., Kootenai co. and the town
of Kootenai, Idaho, and to other places
on lx)th sides of the international boun-
dary (Am. Anthrop., iv, 348-350, 1902).
Consult Boas, First Gen. Rep. on the
Inds. of Brit. Col. inRep. B. A. A. S., 1889;
Chamberlain, Rep. on tne Kootenay Inds.
in Rep. B. A. A. S., 1892, also various
articles by the same author since 1892
in Am. Anthrop., Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
and Am. Antiq. ; Hale in U. S. Expl. Ex-
ped., VI, 1846; Maclean, Canadian Sav-
age Folk, 1896; Smet ( 1 ) Oregon Missions,
1847, (2) New Indian Sketches, 1863; Tol-
mie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs. Brit.
Col., 1884. (A. F. c.)
Catanoneaux.— Schcrmerhom (1812) in Mass. Hist
8oc. Coll., 2d s., II, 42, 1814 (wrongly applied tc
Piegan; corruptlndian with French termination).
OaUwahairs.— Moore in Ind. Aff. Kep., 292, 1846,
imisprintj. Cat-tan-a-hawi.— Lewis and Clark,
>iHcov., 57, 1806 (said to be their own name).
Cattanahawi.— Ibid, (so called by the French).
Cattanahowei. — Mackenzie, Voy.. map, 1801.
Oautonee.— Harmon, Jour., map, 1K20. CautoniM.^
Ibid.. 313. Contamis.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i,
457, 1851 ( probably a misprint ) . Oontenay. — Lane in
Ind. Aff. Rep., 158. 1850. Contonnes.— Catlin, N.
Am. Ind., passim, 1844 (said to be French name).
Cootanais.— Ross, Advent., 213, 1849. Cootaniet.—
Parker, Jour., 307, 1840. Oootneys.— Milroy in H.
R. Mi.sc. Doc. 122, 43d Cong., 1st sess., 5, 1876.
Oootomies.— Wilkes, Hist. Oregon, 44, 1845. Coo-
tonaikoon.— Henry, MS. vocab., 1808 (so called by
the Blackfeet). Oootonais.— Cox, Advent., il, 75,
1831. Oootonay.— Ibid., 154. Oootooniea.— Rob-
ertson, Oregon, 129, 1846. Ootones.— Hind, Red
River Exped., ii, 152, 1860. Oottonois.— Irving,
Rocky Mts., I, 187, 1837. Oounarrha.— Vocabu-
laire des Kootenays Counarrha on Skalza, 1883,
cited by Pilling, Proof Sheets, 1885. Ooutaa-
ies.— Hale in IT. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 204, 1M6.
Coataria.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 402, 1858.
Oontenay.— Lane (1849) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 31st
Cong. , 1st se.ss. , 169, 1850. Coutneet.— Bonner, Life
of Beckwourth,226, 18.^)6. Oontonait.— Maximilian,
Trav., 509. 1843. Coutonois.— Pendleton in H. R.
Rep. 830, 27th (:k)ng., 2d sess., 21, 1842. Oontonns.—
Morse, Rep. to Sec;. War, 34, 1822. Flatbowi.—
See Lfuver Kutenai. Kattanahawi. — Keane in
Stanford, Compend., 470, 1878 (applies to Up-
per Kutenai only). Ki'tona'Qa.— Chamberlain,
8th Rep. N. W. Tribes, 6, 1892. Kit-too-nuh'-a.—
Tolmle and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs., 124b, 1884
(applied to Upper Kutenai). Kituanaba. — School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 402, 1853. Eitunaha.— Hale
in U. S. Expl. Exped., vi,204,535, 1846. Kiti
Stevens, Rep. on N. Pac. R. R., 440, 1854.
Kitnnaxa.— Ibid., 535. Kodeneea.— Meek in H. R.
Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., Ist sess., 10, 1848. KoMte-
nayt.— De Smet, Letters, 170, 1843. Koetenaia.—
Ibid., 183. Koetenay.— Ibid., 203. Koetinayi.— De
Smet quoted in H. R. Ex. Doc. 65. 36th Cong.,
1st se.H.s., 141, 1860. Koo-tames.— (iibbs in Pac.
R. R. Rep., I, 417, IS.^. Kootanaiie. — Mayne,
Brit. Col.. 298, 1862. Kootanay.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Feb. 27,1863. Kootamies.— Stevens in Ind.
Aff. Rep., 460, 1&54. Kootanie.— Nicolet, Oregon,
143, 1846. Kootenai.— Brown in Beach, Ind. Misc.,
77, 1877. Kootenaiei.— (Jibbs in Rep. N. Pac. R. R.,
437,1854. Kootenays.— De Smet, Letters, 37, 1843.
Kootenia.— Emerson, Indian Myths, 404, 1884.
Kootenuha.— Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vocabs.,
124R, 1884. Koote-nuha.— Ibid., 5b. Kootoaes.—
Henrv (1811) quoted by Maclean, Canad. Sav.
Folk, 138, 189(). Kootoonais.— Stevens in Ind.
Aff. Rep.. 461, 1854. Koutaines.— Ibid., 462. Kon-
tanis.— Duflot de Mofra.s, Explor., ii, 173, 1844.
Koutonais.— H. R. Rep. 98, 42d Cong., 3d sess., 429,
1873. Kuap«lu.— Gatschet, MS., B. A. E. (Nez
Perc<^ name: 'water people'). Kutana'.— Maxi-
milian, Reise.li, 511, 1841. Kutanas.— Maximilian,
Trav., 242, 1843. Kutani.— Latham, Elem. Comp.
Philol., 395, 1862. Kutanis.— Latham. Nat. Hist.
Man, 316, 1850. Kutenae.— Maclean, Canad. Sav.
Folk, 137, 1896 (Siksika name; sing., Kutenaek-
wan). Kutenai.— MaNon in Rep. Nat. Mus.1899, 529,
1901. Kutenay.— Brinton, Amer. Race, 108, 1891.
Kutneha'.— Maxmilian, ReLse, ii, 511, 1841. Kut-
nehas.— Maximilian. Trav., 242, 1843. Kutona.—
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 256, 1862.
Kutonacha.— Maximilian, Trav., .500, 1843. Knto-
na'qa.— Boas, 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes, 10, 1889.
Kutonaa.— MaximUian.Trav.. 245, 1&13. Skaisi.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, map, 200, 1853.
SkaUa.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 416, 1856.
Skalsi.- DeSmet Letters, 224, 184.S. Skalsy.—
Ibid.. 203. 8keUa-ulk.— Gatsohet. MS., B. A. E.
(SalLsh name: 'water people'). Skolsa.— Qibbs
in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 416, 1855.
BULL. 30]
KUTSHAMAKIN KWAHARI
743
Kntihamakin. One of the Massaclmset
sachems who 8igne<l the treaties of 1643
and 1645. He was properly the sachem
of the country a]x)nt Dorchester, Muss.,
part of which he sold to the P^nglish. It
was his people to whom John Kliot lirst
preached. Though at firHt opposed to
the English, Kutshamakin afterward b(»-
came Christianized and served them in
many ways, particularly as interi)reter.
To his killing and scalping a Poquot In-
dian in 1636 has heen attributed ( Drake,
Inds. of N. A., 116, 1880) the outbreak of
a horrible war. (a. f. c. )
Xntiliittan ('bear house peo!)le*).
Given as a sulnlivision of the TlinjHfit
group Nanyaayi (q. v.), but in reality
it is merely the name of the (nrupants of
a certain house.
Qnti hit tan.— Boa« in 5th Kep. X. W. Tribi's Can-
ada, 25, 1889. XuU! hit tan.— 8 wanton. Held notes.
B.A.E., 1904.
KntilLimdika ( ' buffal< > eaters '). A 1 )an< 1
of the Bannock.
Buffido-Eaten.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i. .52*2,
1858. Kutsh'undika.- Hoffman inPn>c.Am. Philos.
Soc., zxxiii, 299, 1886.
Ktttihnwitthe {Ku^'f.ni-u''/'t\P). A for-
mer Yaquina village on the s. side of
Yaquina r., Oreg. — Dorse v in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, iii, 229, 1890.
Kntuemhaath ( Kn^MEmhaath ) . A d ivi-
sion of the Seshart, a Xootka tribc\ —
Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada,
32, 1890.
Kntnl. A Kaiyuhkhotana village on
Yukon r., Alaska, 50 m. alwve Anvik;
pop. 16 in 1844.
Hultalkaknt.— Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 42d
Cong.,l8t8e88., 25, 1871. Khtttolkakat.— Zagoskin
auoted by Petroff in loth CensuH, Alaslca, 37, 1884.
[utnl.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Xanan^ala. A former pueblo of the
Pecos tribe, more commonly known as
Las Rueilas (Span.: *the wheels'), situ-
ated a few miles s.e. of Pe<*os, near Arroyo
Amarillo, at the present site of the village
of Rowe, N. Mex. In the ()pinion of
Bandelier it is not unlikely that this
pueblo, together with Seyupaella, was
occupied at the time of P^spejo's visit in
1583.
Ku-oiUiff-aal-a.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers.
IV,12MS92. Kuuang Ua-la.— Ibid., iii, 128, 1890.
Puahlo de las Ruedas. — Ibid.
Knn-lana ( K!v/u Wna ) . A I laida town
oct^upied bv the Koetas, in Naden harlK)r,
Graham id., Queen Charlotte ids., Brit.
Col.— Swanton, Cont. Haida, 281, 1905.
Knyama. A former Chumashan village
near 8n,ptA Tnpz miRHinnj Santa Barbara
CO., Cal.
Ouyama.- Ta}'lor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 18()1.
Kuyam.— Ibid.
Knyamskaiks (Kw/dm-Skd-ikSf * craw-
fish trail'). A braiich of the Klamath
settlement of Yaaga, on Williamson r..
Lake co., Oreg.— Gatschet in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., II, pt. I, xxix, 1890.
Xnyanwe. The extinct Turquoise Ear-
pendant clan of the Tewa pueblo of Hano,
N. E. Ariz. See Kungya.
Ku-yan-we.— Fewke-s in Am. Anthrop., VU, 166,
1894. Kuyanwe-to-wa.- Hodge, ibid., ix. :^2, 1896
(to-wa = 'people'),
Kuyedi ('people of Kuiu*). A Tlingit
division on the Ahiskan island which })ears
their name.
KujeMi.— Krausc, Tlinkil Ind., 120, 1«85.
Kayikannikpnl. An Ikogmiut Eskimo
village on the right bank of Yukon r., l)e-
low Koserefski, Alaska. — Raymond
(1869) (luoted bv Baker, Geog. Diet.
Alaska, 1902.
Knyuidika ('sucker-eaters'). A Pavi-
otso band formerly living near the site of
Wadsworth, on Tnickee r., w. Nev.
Coo-er-ee.— Campbell in Ind. AIT. Rep., 119, 186«;.
Cooyuweeweit.— Powers in Smithson. Rep., 460,
187(>. Ku-jru-i'-di-ka.— Powell, Paviot«o MS. vo-
eab., B. A. E., 1881. Wun-a-muo-a's (the Seoond)
band.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 374, 1S60.
Kvichak. An Aglemiut Eskimo village
on the river of the same name in Alaska;
pop. 37 in 1890.
Kivichakh.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Kvichak.— Baker, iieog. Diet. Ala.ska, 1902.
Kvigatlak. A Kaialigmiut P^skimo vil-
lage in the lake district n. w. of Kusko-
kwini r., Alaska; pop. 30 in 1880.
Evigathlogamute.— Petroff in 10th ('eiisus, Alaska,
map, 1884. Kvi«itluk.— Baker, (ieog. Diet. Alaska,
190*2. Kwifathloeamute.— Petroff, Rei>. on Alaska.
.'>4, 1S81. Kwigathlogumut.— Nelson in 18th Rep.
B. A. E.. map. 1899.
Kvigimpainag. A Jugelnute Pj^kimo
village, of 71 i>er.'Jons in 1844, on the e.
l)ank of the Yukon, 20 m. from Kvikak,
Alaska.
Kvigimpaina^mute.- Zagoskin (jiioted by Petroff
in 10th Census, Alaska, 37,1884 (the^ people).
Kvignk. A Malemiut Eskimo village
at the mouth of Kviguk r., n. short* of
Norton bay, Alaska.
Kvieg-miut— Tikhmenief (1861) quoted bv Baker,*
Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kviegiik-miut.— Ibid.
Kvigruk. -Baker, ibid. Evigukmut. — Zagoskin,
Dese. Russ. INkss. Am., pt. i, 72, 1847.
Kvikak. An Ikogmiut Eskimo village
on Yukon r., 30 ni. above Anvik, Alaska;
formerlv a Kaiyukhotana village.
Kvikak.— Baker, (ii'op. Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kvik-
hagamut.— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. K., map, 1900.
Kvinkak. A Malemiut I'^^kimo village
on a river of the same name at the upper
end of Norton s<l., Alaska; pop. 20 in
1880.
Kvinghak-mioute.— Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy.,
XXI, map, 1850. Kvinkhakmut.— Zagoskin. Descr.
Russ. Poss. Am., pt. 1, 72, 1H47. Ogowinagak.—
Nel.son in 18th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1899. Ogowin-
anagak.— Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 59,1881.
Kwachelanokumae. The name of an
ancestor of a gens of the Mamalelekala,
a Kwakiutl tril)e; also appliwl to the
gens itself. — Boas in Petermanns Mitt.,
pt. 5, 130, 1887.
Kwae (Kn'(V'e). A summer village of
the Tsawatenok at the head of Kingcome
inlet, Brit. Col. — Dawson in Trans. Roy.
Soc. Can. for 1887, sec. ii, 73.
Kwahari (* antelopes'). Animiwrtant
division of the Comanche, whose mem-
bers frequented the prairie country and
Staked plains of Texas, hence the name.
They were the last to come in after the
surrender in 1874. (.i. .m.)
744
KWAHLAONAN KWAKIUTL
[b. a. e.
Antelope-«aten.— Robiuson, letter to J. O. Dorsev,
10, 1879. Antelope Skmnen.— Leavenworth in
H. R. Misc. Doc. 139, 41st Cong., 2d sess., 6, 1870.
Ktta'hadi.— Hofbnan in Proc. Am. Philos. Sue.,
XXIII, 300. 1886. Kwa'hidi.— Mooney in 14th Rep.
B. A. E., 1045. 1896. Kwahare tetehaxane.— Gat-
Bchet. Comanche MS. vocab., B. A. £., 1884 ( 'ante-
lope skinners'). Kwa'hiri.— Mooney, op. cit.
Llaneroe.— Mayer, Mexico ji, 123, 1853. Noonah.—
Butler and Lewi8(1846}inH. R.Doc.76. 29th Cons:.,
2d sess. , 6, 1847 (probably identical ) . People of the
Deeert.— Ibid. Quaahda.— Sec. War in Sen. Ex.
Doc. 7, 42d Cong. . 3d sess., 1, 1872. Qoahada Coman-
ches.— Battey, Advent, 83, 1876. ftuahadas.— Ind.
Aff. Rep. 1869, 101, 1870. Quahade-Oomanohet.—
Alvord m Sen. Ex. Doc. 18,40th ConK., 3d sess., 35,
1869. Qoaha-dede-ohatK-Kexma.— Ibid. , 9 (a careless
combination of Kwahari, or Kwahadi. and Ditsa-
kana). Qua-ha-de-AeohutK-Kenna.— Ibid.,6. Qua-
hades.—Ibid., 10. Qua-ho-dahs.— Hazen, ibid., 38.
Quarrydeohooos.— Walkley. ibid., 19. Quor-ra-da-
chor-koes.— Leavenworth in H. R. Misc. Doc. 189,
41st Cong. , 2d sess. , 6, 1870. Staked Plain Indians.—
Ibid. Staked Plains Omaions.— Hazen in Sen. Ex.
Doc. 18. 40th Cong., 3d sess., 38, 1869. Staked
Plains Onawas.— Hazen (1868) in H. R. Ex. Doc.
240, 41st Cong., 2d sess., 160. 1870.
KwaMaonan ( Ktua- 'hldonan ) . Adivision
of one of the clans of the pueblo of Taos,
N. Mex. (f. w. h.)
Kwahn. The Eagle clan of the Pakab
(Reed) phratry of the Hopi.
Xuiia.— Bourke, Snake Dance, 117, 1884. Kwa.—
Voth, Oraibi Summer Snake Ceremony, 283, 1903.
Kwa'-hii.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891.
Kwahu winwfi.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,584,
1900. Kwa'-hii wiin-wA.— Fewkesin Am. Anthrop.,
VII, 403, 1894.
Xwaiailk. A body of Salish on the up-
per course of Chehalis r., above the Sat-
gop and on the Cowlitz, Wash. In 1855,
according to Gibbs, they numbered 216,
but were becoming amalgamated with
the Cowlitz.
Kwai-allk.— Eells in letter, B. A. E., Feb. 1886 (own
name). Kwn-teh-ni.— GibbsinCont.N.A.Ethnol.,
. I, 172, 1877 (Kwalhioqua name). Nu-so-lupsh.—
'ibid, (so called by Sound Indians, referring
to the rapids of their stream). Stak-ta-miah.—
Ibid, r * forest people' ) . Staktomish.— Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, v, 701, 1855. Upper Ohihalis. -Gibbs
in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 435, 1855. Upper Tsihalis.—
Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 172, 18T7.
Kwaiantikwokets ( ^ on the other side of
the river'). An isolated Paiute band,
formerly living in n. w. Arizona, e. of
Colorado r. Pop. 62 in 1873. They affili-
ated largely with the Navaho.
Kuraintu-kwakati.— Ingalis in H. R. Ex. Doc. 66,
42d Cong., 3d sess., 2, 1873 (misprint). Kwai-an'-
ti-twok-eU.— Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 50, 1874.
Kwaitshi ( Ktua-aV-tc* I). A former Ya-
ouina village on the s. side of Yaquina r.,
Or^. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 229, 1890.
Kwaitnki. The ruins of a former village
of the Hopi, on the w. side of Oraibi
arroyo, 14 m. above Oraibi, n. e. Ariz. —
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 57, 1891.
Kwakina ( *town of the entrance place' ) .
A ruined pueblo of the Zufii, 7 m. s. w.
of Zufli pueblo, w. N. Mex. It formed
one of the Seven Cities of Cibola, and
was possibly the Aquinsaof Ofiate, in 1598.
The town is mentioned in Zdrate-Sal-
meron*s relation, ca. 1629, hence must
have been abandoned subsequently to that
date and prior to 1680, when but 4 of the
cities of Cibola remained. Cf. Pinawan.
Agoinsa.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 136« 1889
(misquoting Ofiate). Aapinaa,— Ofiate (1596) in
Doc. InM. xvi, 133, 1871. Ouakyina.— Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Pap^ iil, 133, 1890. iCua-kyi-na.— Ibid.,
v, 171, 1890. Kw£-ki-na.— Cubing in Compte-
rendu Intemat. Cong. Am^r., vii, 156, 1890. Ky»-
kuina.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Pap., iv, 339. 1^.
Quakyina.— Ibid., iii, 133, 1890. Qoat-ehiaa.—
Fewkes in Jour. Am. Eth.and Arch., 1,101,1891.
Kwakinawan (*town of the entrance
place* ). A former Zufii pueblo s. s. e. of
Thunder mt, which lies about 4 m. e. of
Zufii ijueblo, N. Mex. It is distinct from
Kwakina, although not unlikely it was
built and for a time inhabited by the peo-
ple formerly occupying the latter village
after one of the descents of the Zufii from
their stronghold on Thunder mt. and the
abandonment of the Seven Cities of
Cibola. (p. H. c.)
KWAKIUTL MAN. (am. MU8. NAT. HI8T.)
Kwakintl (according to their own folk-
etymology the name signifies * smoke of
the world', but with more probability
it means * beach at the north side of the
river'). In its original and most re-
stricted sense this term is applied to a
group of closely related tribes or septs liv-
ing in the neighborhood of Ft Rupert, Brit
Col. These septs are the Guetela, Kom-
kutis, Komoyue, and Walaskwakiutl, and
their principal village Tsahis, surround-
ing Ft Rupert. Other former towns were
Kalokwis, Kliksiwi, Noohtamuh, Tsaite,
and Whulk, of which the last two were
summer villages shared with the Nimkish
during the salmon season. Those who
encamped at Tsaite belonged to the Ko-
BULL. 30]
KWAKOKUTL — KWALHIOQUA
745
moyue sept. In comparatively recent
times a portion of the Kwakiutl sepa-
rated from the rest and are known as
Matilpe. Thesis and the Konioyue are
enmnerated separately by the Canadian
Departmentof Indian Affairs, thus limit-
ing the term Kwakiutl to the Guetela,
KomkutiH, and Walaskwakiutl. In one
?lace it is applied to the Guetela alone.
'he population of the Kwakiutl proper
in 1904 was 163.
KWAKIUTL CHIEFTAINESS IN CEREMONIAL COSTUME. (Boas)
In more extended senses the term Kwa-
kiutl is applied to one of the two great
division of the Wakashan linguistic stock
(the other being the Nootka), and to a
dialect and a subdialect under this. The
following is a complete classification of
the Kwakuitl divisions and subdivisions,
based on the investigations of Boas:
Haisla dialect — Kitamat and Kitlope.
Hbiltsuk dialect — Bellabella, China Hat,
Nohuntsitk, Somehulitk, and Wikeno.
Kwakiutl dialect — Koshhno subdialect —
Klaskino, Koprino, Koskimo, and Quat-
sino. Nawiti subdialect — Nakomgilisala
and Tlatlasikoala. KwahiuU subdialect —
Awaitlala, (loasila, Guauaenok, Hahua-
mis, Koeksotenok, Kwakiutl (including
Matilpe), Lekwiltok, Mamalelekala,
Nakoaktok, Nimkish, Tenaktak, Tlauit-
sis, and Tsawatenok. The Hoyalas were
an extinct Kwakiutl division the minor
affinities of which are unknown.
The total population of the Kwakiutl
branch of the Wakashan stock in 1904
was 2,173, and it appears to be steadily
decrea.<»ing.
Consult Boas, Kwakiutl Inds., Rep.
Xat. Miis. 1895, 1897. For further illus-
trations, see Koskimo. (j. r. s.)
Coquilths.— Dunn, Hist. Oregon, 239. 1844. Fort
Rupert Indians.— Scott in H. R. £x. Doc. 65, S6th
Cong., 1st sess., 116, 1860. Kwi'f ui.— Boaa in
Mem. Am. Mua. Nat. Hist., v,pt. 2, 271, 1902. Kwa-
miti.— Kighty-first Rep. Brit, and For. Bib. See.,
380. 1885. Kwahkewlth.— Powell in Can. Ind. AfiF.,
119, 1880. KwakiooL— Tolmie and Dawson, Vo-
cuba. Brit. Col., 118b, 1884. Kwa'-kiutl'.— Oibbsin
Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. i, 144, 1877. Kwi-kuhl.— Tol-
mie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. C^l., 118b, 1884.
Kwat-kewlth.— Sproat In Can. Ind. AIT., 147. 1879.
Kwaw-kewlth.— Can. Ind. AfT., 270, 1889. Kwaw-
kweloh.— Ibid., 189, 1884. Oigiati.-Hall.gt.Johnin
Qa-gutl, Lond., 1884. Oaaokeweth.— Can. Ind.Aff.,
316, 1880. auaokewlth.— Can. Ind. Aff., 92, 1876.
QuackoUi.— Grant in Jour. Rov. Geog. Soc., 293,
1857. Qua-colth.— Kane, Wana. in N. Am., app.,
1859. Quac6t.—Galiano, Relacion, 103, 1802. Qnar-
heuil.— Scouler in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond., 1,288,
1K4H. auahkeulth.-Can. Ind. Aff.. 52, 1875. Qual-
ouilth*.— Lord, Natur. in Brit. Col., i, 165, 1866.
Quaquiolts.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer. July 19, 1862.
QuawruulU.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 251, 1861. Quo-
quoulth.— Sproat, Savage Ufe, 311, 1868.
Kwakokatl ( Kwd^kok 'ul ) . A gens of the
Nakoaktok, a Kwakiutl tribe. — Boas in
Kep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 330, 1897.
Kwakowenok ( Kud^koivendx ) . A gens of
Uie Guauaenok, a Kwakiutl tribe. — Boas
in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 331, 1897.
Kwaknkemlaenok ( KwdkuqEmdVenAx) .
A gens of the Koskimo, a Kwakiutl
tril)e.— Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 329,
1897.
Kwakwakas (Kwa-kwa-kas), A former
village on the w. coast of Gilford id., Brit"!
("ol., probably belonging to the Koeksot-
enok.— Dawson in Can. Geol. Sur\\,
map, 1887.
Kwaleki ( Kmi-le-ki ) . A former Kawia
village in the San Jacinto mts., s. Cal. —
Barrows, Coahuilla Ind., 27, 1900.
Kwalewia {Qivale^un,a; named from a
large bowlder in the stream close by).
A former village or camp of the Pilalt, a
Cowichan tribe of lower Chilli wack r.,
Brit. Col.— Hill-Tout in Ethnol. Surv.
Can., 48, 1902.
Kwalhioqna (from Tkulxiyo-god^tkc
.'ktilxiy *at a lonely place in the woods',
their Chinook name. — Boas). An Atha-
pascan tribe which formerly lived on the
upper course of Willopah r., w. Wash.
Gibbs extends their habitat e. into the
upper Chehalis, but Boas does not be-
lieve they extended b. of the Coast range.
They have been confounded by Globs
746
KWALWHUT KWATANAKYANAAN
[b. a. b. ^
and others with a Chinookan tribe on the
lower course of the river called Willopah
(q. V.)- The place where they generally
lived was calleil NqliihVwas. The Kwaf-
hioqua and Willopah have ce<ied their
land to the United States (Rovce in 18th
Rep. B. A. K., pt. 2, 832, 1899). In 1850
two males and several females survived.
Hale (Ethnog. and Philol., 204, 1846),
who estimated them at alK)ut 100, said
that they built no permanent habitations,
but wandered in the woods, subsisting on
game, berries, and roots, and were bolder,
hardier, and more savage than the river
and coaLst tribes.
GhiLa'q!ttlawa8.— Boas, letter. 1904 (from name of
the place where they generally lived, Nq!u-
Ift'was). Kivalhioqua.— Buschmann in Konig.
Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin, in, 646-86, 1860. Kwifi-
hiokwas.— Morice in Trans. C^n. Inst., iv,13, 1893.
Kwalhioqua.— Hale, Ethnog. and Philol., 204, 1846.
Kwaliokwa.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond.,
70,1866. OuillequegawB.— Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes,
III, map, %,1H53. Owhillapsh.— Gibbsin Cont. N. A.
Ethnol.,i, 164, 1877 (applied erroneously; see Wil-
lopah). dwilapth.— Gatschet, KalapuyaMS., 280,
B. A.E. ( erroneously given as Kalapnya name; see
WUlopah ) . Qualhioqua. — Keane in Stan ford , Com -
pend., 532. 1878. aualioguas.— Hale. Ethnog. and
Philol.. 198, 184(>. Qualquioqua.— Kingsley, Stand.
Nat. Hist., pt. G, 142. 1885. auilleoueoquas.—
Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, iii, map, 200, 1853. ftuil-
lequaquas.— Ind. AfT. Kep., 214, 1851. <lttiUeque<^-
nas.— Pres. Mess, in Ex. Doc. 39, 32d Cong., 1st
ses.s.. 5. 1852. ftuillequeoqua.— Dart in Ex. Doc. 53,
32d Cong.. 1st ses-s., 2, 18.52. Tilhalumma.— Scouler
(1846) in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lond.. I, 235, 1848
(probably this tribe). TkulHiyofoa'iko.— Boas in
10th Kep. N. W. Tribts Can., 67, 1895 (Chinook
name). Tkulxiyogoa'iko.— Boas, inf'n, 1904.
Kwalwhnt. A rancheria in n. Lower
California, whose occu|)ants speak the
Hataam diale<*t of Diegueflo. — Henshaw,
MS. vocal)., B. A. K., 1884.
Kwamk {Ktriimk^). A former Alsea
village on the s. side of Alsea r., Oreg. —
Dorsev in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 230,
1890. *
Kwan. The Agave clan of the Patki
(Water-house) phratrv of the Hopi.
Kwan winwii.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E.. .583,
1901 (»/•/»?*'<} ^' clan'). Kwan wiin-wii.— Fewkes
in Am. Anthrop., vii, 402, 1891.
Kwanaken ( AVawa^/.*^, 'hollowinmoun-
tain' ). A S(|uawmish village community
on Stjuawinisht r., Brit. Col. — Hill-Tout
in Kep. lirit. A. A. S., 474, 1900.
Kwane ( Kwd-rie) . A former village at
C. Scott, N. end of Vancouver id., proba-
))ly occupied by the Nakomgilisala. —
Dawson in Can. Geol. Surv., map, 1887.
Kwantlen. An imp(3rtant Cowichan
tribe l)etween Stave r. and the mouth of
the H. arm of Fraserr., Brit. Col. Pop.
125 in 1904. Villages: Kikait, Kwantlen,
Skaiametl, Skaiets, and Wharnock. Ki-
kait and Skaiametl were the original
Kwantlen towns before the advent of the
Hudson's Bay Company. (.r! r. s.)
Kaitlen.— Dftll. after Gibbs. in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
1, 241 , 1H77. Koa'antEl.— Boas in Rep. 64th Meeting
B. A. A. 8.. 454. 1894. Ku6dlt-e.— Wilson in Jour.
Ethnol. Soe. Lond., 329, 1866. Kwahnt-len.— Gibbs,
MS. vocab.. B. A. E., no. 281. Kwaitlena.— De
Smet. Oregon Miss., 58. 1847. Kwa'ntlEn.— Hill-
Tout in Ethnol. Surv. Can., 53, 1902. Kwantlin.—
Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 120b, 1884.
Kwantlum.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 243, 1861. Kwaat-
Ittn.— Ibid. , 295. auaitlin.— Scouler (1846) in Jour.
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i, 234, 1848. auaat-lnma.—
Fitzhugh in Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1857, 329, 1 858. aui'tl.—
Wilson in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Lend., 278, 1866.
Kwantlen. The main Kwantlen vil-
lage, situated at Ft Langlev, on lower
Fraser r., Brit. Col.; pop. 39* in 1904.
Kwa'ntlEn.— Hill-Tout in Ethnol. Surv. Can., 54,
1902. Langley.— Can. Ind. Aflf., pt. n. 72. 1902.
Kwapa^bag. Mentioned in a letter sent
by the Abnaki to the governor of New
England, in 1721, as one of the divisions of
their tril)e.
KSapahag.— Abnaki letter (1721) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 2d 8., vni, 262, 1819.
Kwashkinawan (Ms-there-no- water
town'). A ruined Zufli pueblo not far
from the Manuelito road, 15 m. n. w. of
Zvitii pueblo, near the Arizona and New
Mexico boundary. ( p. h. c. )
Kwatami (*on the gulf). A subdivi-
sion of the Tututni, formerly living on or
near Sixes r., Oreg., but now on Siletz
res. Parker (Jour., 257, 1840) regarded
them as a part of the Umpqua. Par-
rish (Ind. Aff. Rep. 1854, 496, 1855)
placed them in 3 villages on the Pacific
coast s. of Coquille r., near the mouth of
Flores cr., at Sixes r., and at Port Orford.
In 1854 they were governed by a princi-
pal chief, Hahhultalah, living at Sixes
r., and a subchief, Tayonecia, residing
at Port Orford. This band claimed all the
country between the coast and the sum-
mit of the Coast range, from the s. boun-
dary of the Nasumi to Humbug mt. , 12 m.
s. of Port Orford. In 1854 (Ind. Aff.
Rep., 495, 1855) the Kwatami consisted of ,
53 men, 45 women, 22 boys, and 23 girls;
total, 143. In 1877 (Ind. Aff. Rep., 300,
1877) they numbered 72.
Oodamyon.— Framboise (1835) quoted by Gairdner
in Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 266, 1841. Xlaii-
Ualas.— Ind. AflF. Rep. 1856, 219, 1857 (possibly iden-
tical ) . Kwa'-^'-me »ibiii8'.— Dorsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, ni, 233, 1890 (people on the gulf).
Kwa-ia'-mi.— Ibid. K'wat&nati'-tfae'.— Everett,
Tututene MS. vocab., B. A. E., 183, 1882 ( = * peo-
ple by the little creek'). Port Orford Indiaiui
proper.— Kautz, MS. Censu<4, B. A. E., 1855. Qnah-
tah-mah.— Ibid. Qttah-to-mah.— Parrish in Ind.
AflF. Rep. 1854, 495, 1855. aoakoumwahs.— Do-
menech. Deserts N. Am., i, map, 1869. doakou-
wahs.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in. 96, map,
1 853. auatomah.— Hubbard (1856) in Cal . Farmer,
June 8, 1860. aua-tou-wah.— Dart (1851) in Ex.
Doc. 57, 32d Cong., Ist seas., 59, 1862. Quattamya.—
Parker, Jour., 257, 1840. Saquaaoha.— Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, vi, 702, 1857. Sequalchin.— Dorsey in
Aff. Rep. 1854, 482, 1855. Bik'ses-tfae'.— Everett,
Tututene MS. vocab., 183, 1882 ( ' people by the far
north country ' ). Siquitohib.— Gairdner (1836) in
Jour. Geog. Soc. Lond., xi, 256. 1841. Six.— Ind.
Aff. Rep. 300, 1877. Sixes.— Abbott, MS. Census,
B.A.E.,1858. Suc-qua-cha-to-ny.— Ibid. Suk-kwe'-
tc«.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ni, 233. 1890
(Naltunne name). T4-%tk' ^tUmJ. —Dorsey, Cnetco
MS. vocab., B. A.E., 1884 ( = • northern language ':
Chetco name).
Kwatanakyanaan (Kwd-td-na K^ya-na-
auy * town of the cave-enclosed spring * ).
A ruined pueblo of the Zufli, about 40 m.
s. w. of Zuili pueblo, N. Mex. (f. h. c. )
BULL. 30]
KWATCHAMPEDAIT KWIKAK
747
Kwatohampedau ('i>etota [a plant] ly-
ing on the grouna'). A Maricopa vil-
laffe on the Rio (iila, Ariz. — ten Kato,
inf n, 1888.
Kwatsei. The Shell-l)ead clan of San
Ildefonso pueblo, N. Mex.
Kw«tMi-td5a.— H<MlKe in Am. Anthn>i>., ix.Ii'S-J.
1896 (W<5a=* people').
Kwatsi. A Kwakiutl village at Pt Mac-
donald, Knight inlet, Brit. Col., inhal)ite<l
by the Tenaktak and Awaitlala; pop. 171
in 1885.
Kwi-tsi.— DawHon in Trans. Roy. Soo. Can. for
1887, sec. 11.65. doatse.— Borh iii Bui. Am.<Yeog.
See., 229, 1887.
Kwaustnins ((JwiV^yasdKmHey 'feasting
place.* — Boas). A winter village of the
Koeksotenok on Gilford id., Brit. Col.;
pop. 263 in 1885.
wwa'*yaadEinM. — Boas in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist., V, pt. 1. 156. 1902. Kwi-ui-tumi.— Dawson
in Trans. Roy. Soe. Can. for 1887. wm*. ii, T^.
iloaiastems.— Boas in Bui. Am. (ieog. .S4K>., 22.S,
1887. aua-ya-stums.— Ibid.
Kwayo. The Hawk clan of the Pakab
phratry of the Hopi.
Kwft'-yo.^-Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E.. 39, 1891.
Kwayo wiiiwCi.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B A. K.,5^,
1900 {vdHwA = 'clan ' ). Kwa'-yo wiin-wii.— Fewkes
in Am. Anthrop., vn, 403. 1894.
Kwaiackmash. Mentioned as one of
the tribes that participated in the treat v
of Pt Elliott, Wash., in 1855. Perhaps
the Suquamish. They numbered 42 in
1870.
gwa-wtokmaah.— Ross in Ind. Aflf. Rep., 17, 1870.
Kweakpak. A Mageniiut P^kinio village
in the tundra s. of the Yukon delta, Alas-
ka; pop. 75 in 1890.
dueaupafhamiut.— Eleventh CensiLs Alaska, 110.
1893.
Kwehtlmamish. A Salish division on
upper branches of Snohomish r., Wash.,
now officially included under the Sno-
homish on Tulalip res. Pop. 66 in 1870.
Kwehtl-mamish.— Giobs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i,
179, 1877. Kwent-le-ah-miflh.— Winans in Ind. Aff«
Rep. , 17, 1870. K'Qaentl-ma-mish.— U. 8. Ind. Treat. ,
378, 1873. irauentlmaymiah.— Taylor in Sen. Ex.
Doc. 4, 40th Congr., spec, sess., 3, 1867. K'quutl-ma-
miriL— Stevens in Ind. AflT. Rep.. 458. 1854. Hugh-
Kwetle-babish.— Mallet, ibid., 198. 1877. aunkma-
miah.— Gibbs in Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 43(>, 18.55.
Kwekweakwet ( * blue * ) . A Shuswap vil-
lage near upper Eraser r., 11 m. above
Kelley cr., Brit. Col. Probably the town
of the High Bar band, which *numl)ered
54 in 1904.
Hi^h Bar.— Can. Ind. AfT., 274. 1902. Kwe-kwe-a-
kwet'.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soe. Can., sec. ii,
44, 1891.
Kwelelnk. A Kuskwogmiut Kskimo
village on a small river in the tundra n.
of Kuskokwim bay, Alaska; pop. 112 in
1890.
Kwelelok.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902. due-
leloehamiut.— Eleventh Census. Alaska, 109. 1893.
Kwengyaalnge (Tewa: 'blue turquoise
house * ) . A large pueblo ruin, attritmtecl
to the Tewa, situated on a conical hill,
about 150 ft high, overlooking Chama r.
at a point known a** La Puenta, about 'A
m. below Abi(juiu, Rio Arriba co., N.
Mex.— llewett in Bull. 32, B. A. K., 26,
1906.
Kwesh. One of the divisions of the
Tonkawa. (a. s. (j.)
Kwenndlas {(^/ur ^^mia^y 'muddy
stream'). A former Haida town on the
w. coast of Long id., Ala.^ka. It appears
in John Work's list (18.S6-41) as Qui-
a-han-less, with 8 houses and 148 people.
Petroff gives the number of inhabitants
in 1880-81 as 62, but the town site is now
ustd only for potato patches. It was oc-
cupied liy the Yehlnaas-hadai, a branch
of the Yaku-lanas. (j. r. s.)
Ou-ai-hendlas-hade.— Krause, Tlinkit Indianer,
304 , 1885. Koianglas.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alas-
ka. 82, 1884. KwaihanUas Haade.— Harrison in
I'roc. and Trans. Roy. Soe. Can., see. n, 126, 1895.
Qxd a ban less.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 489,
1855 (after Work, 1836-11). ftlwe «A'nLa«.— Swan-
ton, Cont. Haida, 2K2, 1905.
Kwewn. The Wolf clan of the Hopi.
Kwe'-wu-uh wiin-wii. — Fewkes in Am. Anthrop.,
VII, 403, 1894 winwu--'v\&n'). Kwewu wnwd.—
Fewkes in 19th Rt'p. B. A. E., 584. 1900 (mis^)rint).
Kwiahok. A Chnagmiut Eskimo village
at the s. mouth of the Kwikluak pass of
the Yukon, ATi[u*ka.
Kwee-ahogemut.— Dall, Alaska, 201, 1870.
Kwichtenem (Km^MeuEm). A Squaw-
mish village community on the w. side of
Howe sd., Brit. (;ol.— Hill-Tout in Rep.
Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900.
Kwiengomats ( Kin-en^ -go-mats ) . A Pai-
ute band, numbering 18 in 1873, at which
time thev dweltat Indian spring, s. Nev. —
Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 50, 1874.
Kwignnts. A Paiute band in s. Utah. —
Ingalls in H. R. E.\. Doc. (>6, 42d Ccmg.,
M sess., 2, 1873.
Kwik ('river'). A Kuskwogmiut Es-
kimo village on the right bank of Kus-
kokwim r., Alaska, 10 m. alK)ve Bethel;
pop. 215 in 1880.
Kooigamute.— Petroff in 10th Censa«», Alaska, 17,
1884. Kwegamut.— Kilbuck cited by Baker. Geog.
Diet. Alaska, 1902. Kwigamute.— Petroff, op. cit.,
map. Kwik.— Baker, (i wg. Diet. Alaska. 1902.
Kwik. A Malemiut Eskimo village on
a stream near the head of Norton sd.,
Alaska; i)op. 30 in 1880.
Kooimunute. — Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 53, 1881.
Kuikli.— Map cited by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska,
259, 1902. Kvigmut.— Zagoskin, Desi\ Russ. Poss. in
Am., pt. 1.72, 1847. Kvikh.— Petroff in 10th Cen.sns.
Alaska.' map, 1884. Kviougmiottte.— Zagoskin in
Nouv. Ann. Voy.. 5th s., xxi, map. 1850. Kwik.—
Baker, op. cit. Kwikh.— Petroff in 10th Census,
Alaska, map. 1884.
Kwik. A Malemiut village cm the w.
side of Bald Head, NorUm bay, Alaska.
Iiaacs.— Map cited by Baker, (4eog.*Dict. Alaska,
1902. Kwik.— Ibid.
Kwik. A Nunivagmiut Eskimo village
onthe 8. shore of Nunivak id., Alaska;
pop. 43 in 1890.
Kweegamute.— Eleventh Census, Alaska,map, 1893.
Kwiapamiut.— Ibid., HI. Kwik.— Baker, Geog. Diet.
Alaska. 1902.
Kwikak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on upper Kuskokwim r., Alaska;
poj). 314 in 1880.
Kwigalogamut— Nelson in 18th Rep. B. A. E.,
map, 1899. Kwigalogamute.— Petroff in 10th Cen-
sus, Ala.ska, 17, 1884. Kwikajramut.— <ieol. Surv.
quoted by Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Kwikak.— Baker, ibid. Quedcagamut— Kilbuck
quoted by Baker, ibid.
748
KWIKAK — KWULCHICHICHE8HK
[B. A.B.
Kwikak. A Chnagmiat Eskimo village
on the coast of the Yakon delta, s. of
Black r., Alaska.
Kwikacamiat.— Coast Surv. (1898) quoted by Ba-
ker, Geog. Diet. Alaska. 1902. Xwikak.— Baker,
ibid.
Kwiklaagmiat. One of the two divi-
sions into which Holmbeni^ divided the
Ikogmiut of the Yukon delta; so named
because they inhabit Kwikluak slough or
pass.
Kwiklilaagemut.— Dall, Alaska, 407. 1870. Kwith-
Ini^emut.— Holmberg quoted by Hall in Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., i, 17, 1877.
Kwikoaenok ( Kvn^koaendx^ ' those at the
lower end of the villa^ * ) . A gens of the
Guauaenok, a Kwakmtl tribe. — Boas in
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 331, 1897.
Kwikooi. A Shuswap village at the
outlet of Adams lake, at the head of
Thompson r., interior of British Columbia;
Sop., with Skhaltkam (q. v. ), 190 in 1904.
dams Lake.— Can. Ind. Afr.,259, 1882. Kwikooi'.—
Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1891, sec. ii,
44. ^
Kwikpagmlat. One of the two divisions
into whicii Holmberg divided the Ikog-
miut of the Yukon delta, Alaska; so
named because they inhabit Kwikpak
slouch or pass. The name has also b^n
applied to the Ikogmiut generally.
Kwikhpaf'emut.— Holmberg quoted by Dall in
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 17, 1877. Kwikhp^igmut.—
Dall, Alaska, 407, 1870.
Kwilaishaak ( KwH-aic^-auk ) . A former
Yaquina village on the s. side of Yaquina
r., Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 229, 1890.
Kwilohana (QiirUica^na, sig. doubtful).
A village of the Nicola band of the Ntla-
kyapamuk, on Nicola lake, Brit. Col.;
pop. Ill in 1901, the last time the name
appears.
SlaMuitin.— Can. Ind. AfF., 302, 1893. Koiltca'na.—
Hill-Tout in Rep. Ethnol. Surv. Can., 4, 1899. Kui-
Muitin.— Can. Ind. AfF., 313, 1892. ftninihaatin —
Ibid., pt. II. 166. 1901. awntca'na.— Teit in Mera.
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., ii, 174, 1900.
Kwilokak. An £skimo village in the
Kuskokwim district, Alaska; pop. 12 in
1890.
Qailoehnffamiut.— Eleventh Census, Alaska, ir>4.
1893.
Kwilsieton. A division of the Chasta
on Rogue r., Oreg., in 1854, which J. O.
Dorsey (MS., B. A. E.) thought may be
identical with the Kushetunne of the
Tututni.
aml-ii-eton.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1854), 23, 1873.
Kwinak. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil-
lage and Moravian mission in Alaska, on
the E. side of Kuskokwim r., at its mouth ;
pop. 83 in 1880, 109 in 1890.
Kiniiak.— Sarichef (1826) quoted by Baker, Geog.
Dist Alaska, 1902. KwygyMhpainagmjut.— Holm-
berg. Ethnog. Skizz., 6, 1855. Quinohaha.— PoAt-
route map, 1903. duinehaha.— Bruce, Alaska,
map. 1885. duinehahamute.— Petroff, Rep. on
Alaska, 53, 1881. aainkacbamiut.— Eleventh Cen-
sus, Alaska, 100, 1893.
Kwineekcha ( Kmrtrcek^-chay * long
body*). A subclan of the Delawares
(q. v.).— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877.
Kwingyap. The Oak clan of the Asa
Shratry of the Hopi.
wi'BolKL— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39. 1891.
Kwia-yap wiia-wd.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., Yll,
405, 1894 {wil^-wii= ' clan ' ) . Q u i a f o i .— Bourke,
Snake Dance. 117, 1884.
Kwiiaeiekeeito {Kwis-^iese-heeg^'io^
*deer*). A subclan of the Delawares
(q.v.).— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877.
Kwitohakatohin (* people of the
steppes'). A Kutchin trioe inhabiting
the country between Mackenzie and An-
derson rs., lat. 68°, British America.
Kodhell-v6i-Koattohin.— Petitot, Autourdu lacdes
Esclaves, 361, 1891 ( =* people of the margin of the
sterile Eskimo lands ' ) . Katoh'-a kutohlk.— Roes.
MS. notes on Tinne, B.A.E. (=* people in a country
without mountains'). Kwiteha-Kattohia.— Pe-
titot, Diet. Ddn^Dindji^, xx, 1876. Xwitohla-
Kutchin.— Petitot, in Bui. Soc. de O^. Paris,
(^hart, 1875.
Kwinmpui (*bear river people'). A
Paiute tribe formerly living in the vicinity
of Beaver, s. w. Utah; pop. 29 in 1873. —
Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 60, 1874.
Cf. Ciimumhah.
Kwohitsaak. See Wovoka.
Kwolan (Kwo^lmi^ *ear*). A Squaw-
mish village community on the rieht bank
of Squawmisht r., Brit. Col.— Hill-Tout
in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900.
Kwoneatshatka. An unidentified divi-
sion of the Nootka near the n. end of
Vancouver id. — Hale in U. S. Expl.
Exped., VI, 569, 1846.
Kworatem. A locality and a camp or
village at the confluence of Klamath and
Salmon rs., n. w. Cal., on the e. bank of
the former and the s. bank of the latter.
The name is not Karok, in whose terri-
tory the place is situated, but from the
Yurok language spoken farther down
Klamath r. According to the Yurok cus-
tom, Kworatem, being the name of the
place nearest the moutli of Salmon r., was
used for the river itself, though always
with the addition of a term like umemeri^
* stream.* The name Quoratein was er-
roneously used by Gibbs for the Karok
Indians, and was adopted by Powell in
the adjectival form Quoratean (q. v.) as
the name of the linguistic family consti-
tuted by the Karok. (a. l. k. )
Oor-a-tem.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 82d
Ck)ng., spec, sess., 163, 1868. (Inoratem.— Gibbs
(1861) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ni, 151, 1868.
Quoratenu —Ibid.
Kwotoa. A division of the Maida at
Placerville, Eldorado co., Cal.
Kwo-to'-a.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 316.
1877. Quotoat.— Powers in Overland Mo., xn, 22,
1874.
Kwiiohicha {Kw9i^''^ci'^cu^). A former
Siuslaw village s. of Eugene City, Oreg.—
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 230,
1890.
Kwnlaishanik {KuM-ai^ -cau-lk), A
former Yaquina village on the n. side of
Yaquina r., Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, in, 229, 1890.
Kwnlohioliioheslik (KvM-td^'td'tdtck),
A former Yaquina village on the s. side
BULL. 30]
KWULHAUUNNICH KYUQUOT
749
of Yaquiiia r., below Elk City, Oreg. —
Doreey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 229,
1890.
Kwnlhaniiimioh ( KiiHl - han^- ti n - nU& ) .
A former Siuslaw village on Siuslaw r.,
Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 230, 1890.
Kwnliiit ( Kwti'W'8\t ) . A former Alsea
village on the s. side of Alsea r., Oreg. —
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 230,
1890.
Kwnllaish ( KwtU- lm(/ ) . A former Ya-
Quina village on the r. side of Ya(]uina r.,
Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 922, 1890.
Kwnllakhtauik {KiM'-UKi'Vaunk). A
former Yaquina village on the s. side of
Yaquina r., Oreg. — D()rsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, in, 229, 1890.
Kwnltsaiya( A'wrt/-;»ai^-?/d). A former
Siuslaw village on Siuslaw r., Oreg. — Dor-
sey in Jour. Am* Folk-lore, iii, 230, 1890.
Kwnnnumif ( Kwh n^-nti-mW ) . A former
Siuslaw village on Siuslaw r., Oreg. —
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 230,
1890.
Kwnsathlkhnntuime (* people who eat
mussels*). A former village of the Tu-
tutni. Kautz, in 1855, placed it at the
mouth of Mussel cr., 5 m. s. of Mt Hum-
biw, Oreg. In 1854 (Ind. Aff. Rep., 495,
18Si) it numbered 27 persons. If any
survive they live on Siletz res., Oreg.
Oo-Mott-hen-tra.— Kautz, MS. Toutouteu C'eiiBUH,
B. A. E.. 1855. CoMtool.— Palmer in Ind. Aff.
Rep., 217. 1856. CorolhenUn.— Sch<x)lcraft, Ind.
Tribes, ti, 702, 1H57. Ootulhenten.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, June 8, 1860. Gotntheuten.— Parrish in
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1854, 496, 1855. Oo-tutt-beu-ton.—
Ibid., 495. Ko-fol-te-me.— Oibbs. M8. on coast
tribes, B. A. £. Kwds-a^' qdn ^dnni'.— Dorsey in
Jonr. Am. Folk-lore, in, 238, 1890.
Kwnikwemns (A'*t(;ft«^-il*'tw-mft«^). A
former Siuslaw village on Siuslaw r.,
Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 230, 1890.
Kwntiohimtthe (Kw(d''ti'Umn''Vqr'). A
former Yaquina village on the s. side of
Yaquina r., Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, in, 229, 1890.
Kyakyali. The Eagle clan of the Zuni
of New^ Mexico.
K*yii'k'7iai-kwe.— Gushing in 13th Rep. B. A. E..
868, 1896 (kwe=-- * people ' ) .
Kyalifhi-ateima ( K*ydli»hi-d teuna^
* those of the westernmost* ). A phratry
emhracing the Suski (Coyote) an<l Poye
(Chaparral-cock) clans of the Zufii of
New Mexico. (f. h. c. )
Kyamaisa {Kya-maV-m). A former
Alsea village at the mouth of Alsea r.,
Oreg., on the n. side. — Dorsey in Jour.
Am. Folk-lore, in, 229, 1890.
Kyamakyakwe ( * snail-shell houses ' ) .
A massive ruined pueblo, built of lava
blocks, situated 47 m. s. s. w. of Zufii, N.
Mex. According to Zufli tradition this
settlement, togetner with Pikyaiawan and
Kyatsutuma, was the northernmost homo
of the Snail people, whose dance is an-
nually performtMl by members of the
Black-corn clan of the Zufli, who claim
descent from the Kyamakyakwe people.
The towns inentioneil formed the north-
ern outpostM of the "Kingdom of Mar-
ata" (see Matyaia), and were conquered
by the Zuili prior to Coronado*s visit in
1540, the "Com captives" being spared
on account of their ceremonies and their
advancement in agriculture, (p. h. c. )
Oha-ma-kia.— Fewkes in Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch.,
1, 100. 1891. Kyamakyakwe.— Ouflhing, infn, 1892.
Kyana. The extinct Water clan of Zufii
pueblo, N. Mex.
K'yana-kwe.— Cnishing in 13th Rep. B. A. E., 368,
1896 (itMr=' people').
Kyatiikya {K^yatukUju, 'water drops
come out*). A ruined pueblo at the
mouth of the canyon opposite the e. end
of Thunder nit., near ZuHi, N. Mex.; so
nameil because the water on which its
inhabitants depended oozed from the can-
yon walls. (f. h. c.)
Ohat-e-oha.— FewioH in Jour. Am. Etn. and Arch.,
I, 100, 1S91. K'yatiik'ya.— (Pushing, inf'n, 1892.
Kyatsntuma {K^yli-tsu-tu-ma^ *town of
the dewdrops' ). A former town which,
with Kyamakyakwe and Pikyaiawan,
was the northernmost home of the Snail
peonle and one of the outposts or strong-
nolas of Matvata (q. v. ), which were con-
quered by tlie Zufii in late preliistoric
times. ( P. H. c. )
Kyaakaha ( Kya u^-hi-h u). A former Ya-
miina villajje on the x. side of Ya(]uina r.,
Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 229, 1890.
Kyawana-tehnatsana (K^yn wana-t/'hun-
tsano^ * little gateway of Zufii river*). A
prehistoric Zufii village, now in ruins,
about 7 m. e. of Zufii pueblo, on a mesa
above the "gateway,'* whence its name.
Gha-wana.— Fcwkos in'Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch.,
I, 100, 1891. Ky-a-wa-na Tehua-tsana.— Ibid., 96.
K*yawana Tehua-tsana.— (^ushinfr, Zufii FolkTalen,
297, 1901.
Kyekykyenok (K'ek'k'^?n6.r). A gens
of the Awaitlala, a Kwakiutl trilie. — Boas
in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, a'U, 1897.
Kyiahl. The Crow clan of Jemez
pueblo, N. Mex. A corresponding clan
existe<l at the former related pueblo of
Pecos.
Kyia'hH-.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, iW, 1896
iPecaM namv; -^ =«*/». or tsantth, 'people'),
lyialish.— Ibid. (Jemez name).
Kyunggang. The Hawk clan of San
Ildefonso pueblo, N. Mex.
KyuogaB-tdoa.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 851,
1896 (W<5a=* people').
Kynnn. The Com clan of Jemez
pueblo, N. Mex. A corresponding clan
existed at the former related pueblo of
Pecos.
Kyuiiu' + .— Hodge in Am. Anthrop.. ix, 349, 1896
(Pecos form: *-—a»h, or tsadsh, 'people'). Kyn-
nutsa-ash.— Ibid. (Jemez form).
Kynqaot. A Nootka tribe on Kyuquot
sd., w. coast of Vancouver id.; pop. 305
in 1902, 281 in 1904. Its principal vil-
lages are Aktese and Kukamukamees.
750
KYUWATKAL LABRET8
[B. A. B.
Cayoquitt.'Armstrohg, Oregon, 136, 1857. Gayu-
quete.— Jewltt, Narr., 77. 1849. KayS'kath.— Boas
in 6lh Rep. N. W. Tribes Can^ 31, 1890. Kayo-
kuaht.— Brit. Col. map, 1872. Kye&-«at.— Mayne,
Brit. Col., 2.11, 1861. Ky-u-kaht.— Can. Ind. AfT.,
276,1894. Ky-uk-ahto.— Ibid., 52, 1875. Kyuquot.—
Swan, MS., B. A. E. Ky-wk-aht.— Can. Ind. AfT.,
188, 1883. Ky-yoh-quaht.— Sproat, Sav. Life, 308,
1868.
Kyawatkal (Kyn^'Wdt-kdl). A former
Yaquina village on the x. side of Yaquina
r., Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 229, 1890.
Laalaksentaio. A gens of the true Kwa-
kiutl, embracing the subdivisions Laal-
aksentaio, Alkunwea, and Hehametawe.
LaaaaqsRntaio.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., M, 1890. La'alaxaEnt'aio.— Boas in Rep.
Nat. Mus. 1895, 330, 1897. Lalaobsenfaio.— Boas
in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 1887.^
Labor, Divisioxi of. The common im-
pression that the Indian woman was a
mere slave and drudge for her husband
is an error due to ignorance of the Indian
division of labor in accordance with the
necessities of savage life. Briefly stated,
it was the man's business to provide meat
and skins from the forest and plain and
to protect the home from enemies, while
the woman attended to the household
duties of preparing the food, arranging
the house interior, and caring for the
children. The preparation of the food
implied also the principal work of culti-
vation among the agricultural tribes, with
the brinj2:ing of the wfX)d and water,
while household work included the mak-
ing of pottery, basketry, and mats. The
men themselves frequently made their
own buckskin dress, and almost always
their ceremonial costume. Among the
Pueblos the greater part of the buckskin
clothing, including leggings and mocca-
sins, for both sexes„ was made by the
men. The heavier part of the Pueblo
weaving also was the work of the men,
the women confining themselves for the
greater part to the production of belts
and other small pieces. Among the
Navaho, on the other hand, the weaving
work was about evenly divided. The
men fashioned their weapons, and the
articles of more laborious construction,
as stone hatchets, canoes, fish weirs, etc.
As tribes were constantly at war one with
another and the pursuit of game carried
the hunter into disputed territory, the
first business of every man was to be a
warrior, forever on the alert for dan-
ger. This condition left him very little
leisure for other pursuits excepting dur-
ing the season when his enemies also
were unable to travel. His wife, recog-
nizing this fact, took up her share of
the burden cheerfully, and would have
scorned as effeminate the husband who
took any other view of the situation.
Among the more sedentary and agricul-
tural tril>es, where the procuring of food
did not necessitate hostile collision w^ith
other tribes, the men usually did their
fair share of the home work, laboring in
the fields together with the women. In
general, it may be said that the man as-
sumed the dangerous duty, the woman
Ihe safer routine work. The frequent
sacrifice ordeals, intended to win the
favor of the gods of the tribe, were borne
almost entirely by the men, the part of
the women l)eing "chiefly that of applaud-
ing spectators. The woman remained
mistress of the home, and in spite of the
variety of her duties, the number of
women's games furnish testimony that
she enjoyed her leisure in her own way.
f^ee J*opnlar fftilaciesj Women, (j. m. )
Labrets. Ornaments worn in holes that
are pierced through the lips. Cabeza de
Vaca notes of Indians of the Texas coast:
"They likewise have the nether lip bored,
and within the same they carry a piece of
thin cane about half a finger thick.** It
isciuiU^ certain that this custom prevailed
for some distance inland along the Colo-
rado r. of Texas and in neighboring re-
gions, while large labrets were also found
by Gushing among the remains on the
w. coast of Florida. Outside of this re-
gion they were almost restricted to an
area in the N. W., the habitat of the
Aleut, Haida, Heiltsuk, Tlingit, Tsim-
shian, and Eskimo tribes, extending
from Dean inlet to Anderson r. on the
Arctic coast. They were also adopted
by some of the western- Athapascans.
Here the lower lip alone was pierced.
While the southern tril)es made a single
aperture in the middle of the lip, and
conseciuently used but one labret, the
Aleut and Eskimo usually punctured
a hole below each corner of tne mouth
and inserted two. ^loreover, amon^jf the
southern tribes the ornament was worn
(mly by women, while Aleut men used
it occasionally and Eskimo men more
and more generally, as one proceeded
northwanl, until beyoml the Yukon the
use of labrets was confined to males.
Among the Haida, Heiltsuk, Tlingit, and
Tsimsbian the labret was a mark of high
birth, superseding in this respect thehe«3-
flattening of the tribes liWng farther s.
The piercing was consequently done dur-
ing potlatches, a small aperture being
bored first, which was enlarged from year
to year until it sometimes l^ecame so great
that the lip proper was reduced to a nar-
row ribbon, which was liable to break,
and sometimes did. The labrets were
made of wood, stone, bone, or abalone
shell, often inlaid, ^nd present two gen-
eral tv|)eH, namely, a long piece inserted
into the lip at one end, or a round or
oval stud hollowed on each side and
protruding but slightly from the face,
(ieorge Dixon noted one of this latter
tyi)e that was 3 J in. long by 2f in. broad,
ifhe last labrets used were small plugs of
silver, and the custom has now Been
BDLL. 80]
LACAME ^LA FLESCHE, FRANCIS
751
entirely abandoned. On account of the
use of these ornaments the Tlingit were
called Kolosch bj; their northern neigh-
bors and the Russians, whence the name
Koluschan, adopted for the linguistic
stock.
Among the Eskimo and Aleut bone
labrets predominated, though some very
precious specimens were of jade. They
were shaped like buttons or studs, or, in
the case of some worn by women, like
sickles. The lips of men were" pierced
only at puberty, and the holes were en-
larged successively by means of plugs,
LABRET8, WE8TERN ESKIMO. (nELSOn)
which were often strung together after-
ward and preserved. For further illustra-
tion of the use of labretf, see Adornnieiit
Ck)n8ult Dall (1) in :^l Rep. B. A. p].,
1884, (2) in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 1877;
Dawson, Rep. on Queen Charlotte Ids.,
Geol. Surv. Canada, 1880; Murdoch in
9th Rep. B. A. E., 1892; Nelson in 18th
Rep. B. A. E., 1899. (j. r. s. )
Lacame. A province visited by Moscoso,
of De Soto's expedition, toward the close
of the year 1542; probably in s. w. Ar-
kansas
l4UMune.l-Biedma (1544) in French. Hist. Coll.
La. , n, 106, 1850. LMane.-^Jentl. of El vas in Hak-
luytSoc. Pub., IX, 135, 1851.
Lacayama. Two former Chumashan
villages, one on Santa Cruz id., the other
in Ventura co., Cal.
LMMtyama.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer. Apr. 24, July
24, 1863. Lueuyumtt.— Bancroft, Native Races, i,
459,1874.
Lac CoTirt Oreilles. A Chippewa hand,
named from the lake on which they
lived, at the headwaters of Chippewa r.,
in Sawyer co. , Wis. In 1 852 they forme<l
a part of the Betonukeengainubejig divi-
sion of the Chippewa, and in 1854 were
assigned a reservation. In 1905 they
were officially reported to number 1,214,
to whom lands had been allotted in sev-
eralty.
Lao Court d'Oreille band.— Ind. A(T. Rep., 254,1877.
Lac (Jourt OreUle band.— U. S. Stat. L., X, 223, 1854.
Lao Court OrieUes.— La Pointe treaty (1854) in
U. S. Ind, Treat., 224, 1H73. Lao Court, drvilie.—
Fitch in Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1857, 28, 1858. Lao Couter-
eille.— Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll.,v,
191, 1885. Ottawa lake men.— Ibid., 39.
Lachalsap. A village of the Hwotso-
tenne on Bulklev r., Brit. Col.; pop. 157
in 1904.
LachaUap.— Can. Ind. Aflf., pt. 2. 70. 1902. Lack-
' I.— Ibid., 1903. pt. 2. 73. 1904. Morioetown.—
Ibi(
3?; 70,
1902.
Lackawanna. A variety of coal. From
I/ickawanmiy the name of a tributary of
the Susciuehanna and a county in Penn-
sylvania, which represents /fr//aM?/Yi???i<' in
thel^nape (Delaware) dialect, signifying
' the stream forks ' ; from lechan, * fork ' ,
and -/<f/mie, 'stream,' 'river', (a. f. r.)
Lackawazen (Lechnnnrksnik^ 'the forks
of the road'). Mentioned by Alcedo
(Die. Geog., II, 565, 1787) as a former In-
dian (Delaware?) settlement on the e.
branch of Delaware r. , Pa. The e. branch
of the Delaware is in New York, and the
settlement, if ever existing, was probably
on Lackawaxen cr., a tributary of the
Delaware in n. e. Pennsvlvania. Hecke-
welder (Trans. Am. Philos. Soc., iv, :^59,
1834) mentions this as the Delaware name
for two places, one in Wayne co. and the
other in Northampton co., Pa.
Leohavaksein.— Alcedo, op. cit. Leohawaxen.—
Hecke welder, op. cit.
Lacrosse. See Ball plan.
Ladles. — See DisheH, (lOtirds, Reo'ptaelen.
Lady Bebecca. See P(tcahoutas.
Laenakhnma ( Ijo^nnx^'ma). (liven by
Boas (Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 1887)
as the ancestor of a gens of the Quat-
sino; also applied to the gens itwlf.
La Flesche, Francis. Son of Kstatnaza,
or Joseph I^ Flesche, former head chief
of the Omaha, l)orn in Thurston co.,
Nebr., Dec. 25, 1857. He attended the
Presbyterian mission school on the Omaha
res., where he laid the foundation of his
later education. In 1878-79 he accom-
panied the Ponca chief Standing Bear on
his eastern tour and interpreted his nre-
sentation of the wrongs his people nad
suffered in the removal from their home
in South Dakota. During an investiga-
tion of the Ponca removal by a committee
of the U. S. Senate he served again as in-
terpreter and attracted the attention of
the chairman by the iin|>artial manner
in which he performed his work. In
752
LA FLE8CHE, 8U8ETTE LAG UNA
[b. a. b.
1881, when Hon. S. J. Kirk wood, the
chairman of that committee, became
Secretary of the Interior, he called Mr
La Flesche to Washington and eave
him a position in the Office of Indian
Affairs, where he remains. In 1893 he
was graduated from the National Uni-
versity Law School. The memory of the
tribal life of his childhood stimulated him
to study his people, for which his father's
position gave him unusual advantage,
liis mastery of English has enabled him
accurately to set forth the results of his
ethnological investigations, in which he
is still actively engs^ged. His published
writings have appeared in the Journal of
American Folk-Ioreand other scientific pe-
riodicals, in the "Study of Omaha Indian
Music," by Alice C. Fletcher (Peabody
Museum Pub. ) , and in popular magazines.
He is the author also of **The Middle
Five, * * a book giving the story of his school
dsLys, Mr La Flesche has made ethno-
logical collections for the University of
Berlin, the University of California, the
Peabody Museum of American Archae-
ology and Ethnologv, and other institu-
tions of learning, fie is a fellow of the
American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science, and a member of the
American Anthropological Association
and of the Anthropological Society of
Washington. In 1906 Mr La Flesche
married Miss Rosa Bourassa, of Chip-
pewa descent. (a. c. p.)
La Flesche, Susette. See Briaht Eyes,
Lagoay. A former Chumashan village
near.SaataL^arbarajOaK,
Laoo.— Taylor fn Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863.
Lagoay.— Ibid.
Lagrimas de San Pedro (Span. : * tears of
St Peter * ) . A former group of Alchedoma
rancherias, on or near the Rio Colorado,
in California, more than 50 m. below the
mouth of Bill Williams fork. They were
visited and so named by Fray Francisco
Carets in 1776.— Garc^s, Diary, 427, 1900.
Laguna ( Span. : * lagoon * , on account of
a large pond west of the pueblo; aborig-
inal name Ka-waik^, an old Keresan
word of unknown signification). A Ke-
resan tribe whose principal pueblo, which
bears the same popular name, is situated
on the s. bank of San Jos^ r., Valencia
CO., N. Mex., about 45 m. w. of Albu-
quer(jue. It was formerly the seat of a
Spanish mission, dating from its estab-
lishment as a pueblo in July, 1699, and
having Acoma as a visita after 1 782. The
lands of the Lagunas consist of a Spanish
{frant of 125,2lS acres, mostly of desert
and. The Laguna people are composed of
19 clans, as follows, those marked with an
asterisk being extinct: Kohaia (Bear),
Ohshahch ( Sun ) , Chopi ( Badger) , Tyami
(Eagle), Skurshka (Water-snake), Sqowi
(Rattlesnake), Tsushki (Coyote), Yaka
(Corn; divided into Kochimsh-yaka, or
Yellow-corn, and Kukinish-yaka, or Red-
com),Sit8(Water),Tsina(Turkey), Kak-
han (Wolf), Hatsi (Earth)*, Mokaigch
(Mountain lion)*, Shawiti (Parrot), Snu-
wimi (Turquoise), Shiaska (Chaparral-
cock), Kurtsi (Antelope), Meyo (Lizard),
Hapai (Oak). Most of the clans consti-
tute phratral groups, as follows: (1) Bear,
Badger, Coyote, and Wolf; (2) Mountain-
lion and Oak; (3) Water-snake, Rattle-
snake, Lizard, and Earth; (4) Antelope
and Water. According to I^guna traai-
tion, the Bear, Eagle, Water, Turkey, and
Corn clans, together with some members
of the Coyote clan, came originally from
Acoma; the Badger, Parrot, Chaparral-
cock, and Antelope clans, and some mem-
bers of the Coyote clan, came from ZufXi;
the Sun people originated probably in
San Felipe; the Water-snake in Sia; the
JOS^ PAISANO^LAGUNA
Rattlesnake probably in Oraibi; the Wolf
and Turquoise in Sandia; the Earth clan
in Jemez; the Mountain-lion and Oak
people claim to have come from Mt Tay-
lor; the Lizard clan is of unknown origin.
Laguna therefore is not only the most
recent of the New Mexican pueblos, but
its inhabitants are of mixed origin, being
composed of at least four linguistic stocks —
Keresan, Tanoan, Shoshonean, and Zu-
ilian. It is said that formerly the people
were divided into two social groups, or
phratries, known as Kapaits and Kayo-
masho, but these are now practically po-
litical parties, one progressive, the other
conservative. Until 1871 the tribe occu-
pied, except during the summer season,
the single pueblo of Laguna, but this vil-
lage is gradually becoming depopulated.
BULL. 30]
LAGUNA LA JOYA
758
the inhabitants establishing permanent
residences in the former summer villages
of Casa Blanca, Cubero, Hasatch, Pagiiate,
Encinal, Santa Ana, Paraje, Tsiama, and
Puertecito. Of these, Pagiiate is the old-
est and most iwpulous, containing 850 to
400 inhabitants in 1891. Former villages
were Shinats and Shiinaiki. The I^guna
people numlwrod 1,384 in 1905. St»e
Keresan Fnmihj^ Mofju'mo^ Puehlox, Rito^
Shuma^iti^cha, and the villages above
named. (f. w. h.)
Bi^rai.— Oatschct, Isleta MS. vocab., 1885 (IhIpUi
name of pueblo). Bi&ride.~Ibid. (pi. BU^rnin;
Isleta name of people). Ka-hua-i-ko.— Joiiven-
ceau in Oath. Pion., i, no. 9, 13, 1906. Kairai-
kome.— KlnRsley. Stand. Nat. IIlKt., vi, 183, 1885.
Kaiwaika.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. E.. 30. 1891
(Hop! name of pueblo). Kan-Ayko. - Loew in
Wheeler Surv. Rep., app. LL. 178. 1875 (I^inina
name of pueblo, n-- u). &a-uay-ko.— Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 260, 1890 (Laguna name of
pueblo). Kawihykaka.— Voth. Traditions of the
Hopi, 11, 1895 (Ilopi name). Kawaihkaa.— Ibid.,
143. Kawaik'.— Ilodge, field notes. B. A. E., 1895
(Laguna name of pueblo). Ka- walk'.— ten Kate,
Synonymie, 7, 1hs4 (Laguna name of pueblo).
Ka-waik&\— Ibid. Kawaikama.— Hodge, field
notes, B. A. £., 1895 (Santa Ana name of tribe).
Kawaikftme.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. A., '230. 1885
i Laguna name of tribe). Kawaik'-kame.— ten
[ate, Synon>Tnie,7, 1884 (Laginia name of tribe).
Kan^ukome.— Powell in Am. Nat., xiv, 604. Aug.
1880 (mentioned <iistinetly fnim Laguna). K6-
iki.— Lummis, Man who Marru'd the Moon. '202,
1894 (native name of Laguna) . Xo-stete.— I^ew in
Wheeler Surv. Rep., vii,339. 1879 (given as proper
name of pueblo). K&hkweai.— Hodge, field
notes. B. A. E.. 1895 (Isleta and Sandia name: .see
Bierai^ above). K'ya-nathlana-kwe.— ('ushing.
inl'n, 1891 (Zuni name: ' people of the great pool
or pond'). Lagana.— Gatschet in Wheeler Surv.
Rep., VI 1, 4a'>, 1879 (misprint). Lagouna.— (Jallatin
in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., x.xvii. 297, 1851.
I«fuiia.~MS. of 1702 quoted by Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, v, 189. 1890: Villa-Seflor, Theatro
Am., pi. 2, 421, 1748. Lagune.— Gatschet in Mag.
Am. Hist., 263, Apr. 1882. Lagunes.— Simpsim in
Rep. Sec. War, 150. 18.50. Lagunians.— ten Broeok
(1862)inSeh(K>leraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 81, 88. 1854.
La haguna.— Doineneeh, Deserts N. Am., i, 443,
1860. Xayma.— ten Broeck in Schoolcraft. Ind.
Tribes, IV. 77, 1854 (misprint). gaguna.-Klett in
Pop. Sci. Monthly, v, 584, 1874 (^misprint). Ban
Joaj de la Laguna.— Ward in Ind. AIT. Rep. 1867,
213, 1868 (mission name). San Josef de La Laguna.—
Alencaster (1805) in Prince, N. Mex., 37, 1883.
B«fana.— Pike, Exped., 3d map, 1810 (misprint).
BiUime.— (latschet in Mag. Am. Hist.. 263. Apr.
1882 (Laguna name for them.selves). Taguna.—
Wallace, Land of the Pueblos, 45, 1888 (misprint),
ro-lia'-ne'.— ten Kate, Synonymie, 6. 1884 ('much
water': Navaho name). Toqanne.— ten Kate,
Reizen in N. A., 231, 1885 (Navaho name). Tozh-
Ubi.— Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Navaho
name of people).
Laguna. A Ponio band on the w.
shore of Clear lake, Cal.— Revere, Tour
of Duty, 120, 1849. See Clear Lake Indians.
Laguna. A DiegueAo village in \v. S^n
Diego CO.. Cal. (Jackson and Kinnev,
Rep. Miss. Ind., 24, 188:^). The name 'is
now applied tooneof theso-calle*! Campo
reservations, comprising 320 acres, mostly
of desert land, and containing only 5 in-
habitants in UK)6 (Kelsey, Rep., 25, 190H).
Lahanna. A nanieapplie<l hy Lewis and
CJark in 1805toa Ixxly of Inilians, said to
number2,000 ill 120 houses, on l)oth sides of
Columbia r. about Clarke's fork. This is
in the country of the Pend d*Oreillesand
Senijextee, but I^hanna corresponds to
no known division.
Lahama.— Bancroft. Nat. Races, i. 314. 1882 (mis-
(luoting Morse). Lahanna.— fx> wis and Clark,
Kxped., II, 475, 1814. La-hanna.— Orig. Jour. Lewis
and Clark, vi. 119. 1905.
Lahani (lAV(/nnl). A village of the
Nicomen trilx? of Cowichan at the mouth
of Wilson cr., on the s. side of Fraser r.,
Brit. Col.— l^a.s in Rep. Brit." A. A. S.,
454, 1894.
Lahoocat. Mentioned bv Lewis and
Clark as an old Arikara village, occupied
in 1797, abandoned about 1800. It was
situate<l on an island in Missouri r., l)elow
the present Cheyenne River agency, S.
Dak., and when Wupied consisted of 17
lodges arrange<l in a circle and walled.
Lahoocat— Lew fs and Clark. Exped.. i, 97. 1814.
La hoo catt.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, i, 179,
1904.
Laidnkatawiwait ( Lai^'du-ka-tn-wi-
wait). A Paviotso band formerly living
about the sink of the Huinl)oldt, in w.
Nevada.— Powell, Paviotso MS., B. A. E.,
1881.
Laimon. Venegas (Hist. Cal., i, 55,
1759) states that the Indians of Loreto-
Concho mission have s[)ecific names for
the tribes of Lower California according
to the n^ions occupied by them, as the
PMu, Eduu, or Kdiies in the s.; that
they call themselves Moncjuis, and those
N. of Loreto are called Laymones; the
latter are in fact Cochimi, the Mues vir-
tually Pericui, though both, the Edues
and the I^ymones, contain some tril)es of
theMon(iuiH. Cagnaguetand Kadakaman
are given as laimon divisions.
Lamoines.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 18. 1860.
Lajramon.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond.,
88.iav>. Laymon.— Prichard. Nat. Hist. Man., ii,
553. 1855. Laymona.— Baegort in Smilhson. Rep.
1864, 393, 18<')5. Laymones.— Venegas, Hi.st. Cal., i,
55. 1759. Limoniea.- Tavlor in Browne. Res. Pac.
Slope, app., 54. 1869.
Lajas (Span.: * stone slabs,* translation
of the native name). A Tepehuane
pueblo, of 900 inhabitants, in the ex-
treme N. part of the territorv of Tepic,
Mexico, al)out lat. 23°, Ion. 'l05°. The
children of the town, who prior to about
1890 had never seen a white T)erson, are
now instructed in Si)anish an<l the rudi-
ments of civilization an<l Christianity.
Eityam.—Lumholtz, Unknown Mexico, 1.457, 1902
(native name). Li^as.— Orozco y Berra. Geog.,
319, 1864. San Franoiioo Lajas.- Ibid, (full Span-
ish name).
La JoYa ( ^pan • • * the jewel * ) . A Luiseflo
village N. of San Luis Rev, in San Diego
CO., Cal., from which 180 Indians are said
to have l)een present at the Teniecula
meeting in 1865 (Lovett in Rep. Ind.
Aff., 124, 1865). The settlement is now
on Totrero res., 75 m. from Mission Tule
River agencv.
La Jolla.— Jackson and Kinnt'y. Rep. Mission
'lnds..25; 1883. La Joya.— Ha ves (18.50) quoted by
Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 460, 1882.
Bull. 30—05-
-48
754
LAJUOHU — LAM8IM
[b. a. e.
Ligaoha. A former Chumashan village
near Purfsima mission, Santa Barbara co. .
Cal.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Lake IndiaxLs. A term used by English
writers of the 18th century to designate
the Indians living on the great lakes, en-
pecially the Chippewa and the Ottawa.
Lakisnmne. A village of California
whose language, according to Pinart,
showed differences from that of the Cholo-
vone (M^iposan stock), but was under-
stood by them. If not related to the
Cholovone, this village was probably
Moquelumnan.
Laoquesumne. — Hnart, Cholovone MS., B. A. E.,
1880. Lakuumne.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 450,
1H74. Sakisimme.— Ibid.
Lakkalzap (Sm the town'). A mod-
ern Chimmesyan town, founded in 1872
by a Mr (ireen from Niska, the inhabit-
ants having l)een drawn from the villages
of Kitaix and Kitkahta. Pop. 183 in
1902, 145 in 1904.
Ore«nville. — Can. Ind. Aff. for 1889, 272 (name
Kiven by whites). Kaoh-al«-ap.— Dorsey in Am.
Antiq., XIX, 281, 1897 (misquoted from Can.
Ind. AflT.). LaohaUap.— Can. Ind. AfT., 416, 189S.
Lack-al-sap.— Ibid., 272, 1889. Lak-kul-xap.— Dor-
«ey in Am. Antiq., xix, 281, 1897.
Laklonkst (Ixiqld^tikst). A Niska divi-
sion of the I^kskivek clan, living in the
town of Kitwinhilk, on Nass r., Brit.
Col. -Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes
(^an., 49, 1895.
Lakmiat. A Kalapooian tribe formerly
residing on a river of the same name, a
western tril)utary of the Willamette, in
Oregon. They are now on Grande Ronde
res., where they were otficially stated to
number 28 in 1905. They are steadily
<lecreasing. The following were Lakmiut
bands as ascertaine<l by Gatschet in 1877:
Ampalamuyu, Chantkaip, Chepenafa,
Mohawk, Tsalakmiut, Tsampiak, Tsan-
tatawa, and Tsantuisha.
Alakfaia'yuk.— GatMchet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E.
( .\tfalati name) . Ghelukamanohea.— Ind. AflT. Rep.
1864, 503, 1866. OhelukiniaakM.— Ind. Aff. Rep.,
221. 1861. L^kmiuk. — Gatschet in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore. xii. 213, 1899. Lakmiut.— Gatschet,
Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 1877 (own name). Luck-
a-mi-ute.— Pres. Mess., Sen. Ex. Doc. 39, 32d Cong.,
1st sess. , 2. 1852. Luokamuke.— Palmer in Ind. A ff .
Rep. 1856, 196, 1857. Luokamutet.— Keane in
Stanford, Compend. , 519, 1878. Luokiamut.— Smith
in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 56, 1875. Luokiamute.— Victor in
Overland Monthly, vii, 346, 1871. Laokimiute.—
MeClane in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 184, 1887. Luokimute.—
Huntington in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867, 62. 1868.
lukeneayuk.— (iatschet, Atfalati MS., B. A. E., 1877
(Atfalati name). Sackanoir.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, vi, 701, 1857 (after Lane). Suohamier.—
Ibid.. 689. 8uok-a-mier.— Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep.,
161. 1850.
Lakseel ( Ijoqse^el, * on the ocean ' ) . A
Niska division belonging to the Kanhada
clan, living in the townsof Andeguale and
Kitlakdamix on Nass r., Brit. Col. — Boas
in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 49, 1895.
Lakskiyek (LcufskVyeky *on the eagle').
One of the 4 Chimmesyan clans. Local
subdivisions bearing the same name are
found in the Niska towns of Lakkulzap
and Kitlakdamix, and in the Kitksan town
of Kitwingach.— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W.
Tribes Can., 49, 50, 1895.
Laktiaktl ( IxigV id'k'U) . A Niska divi-
sion of the Lakyebo ( Wolf ) clan, settled in
the town of Kitwinshilk, on Nass r., Brit.
Col.— Boasin lOthRep. N. W. TribesCan.,
49, 1895.
Laktsemelik {^iMqWEtiu/ltn^ *on the
l)eaver*). A Niska division of the Lak-
skiyek clan, living in the town of Kitlak-
damix, on Na.ss r. , Brit. Col. — Boas in lOth
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 49, 1895.
Lakungida (perhaps a Ilaida name). A
Niska town near the mouth of Nass r.,
Brit. Col. In 1870 its inhabitants ex-
cee<ied 400, but in 1897 it containe<l not
more tlian 50. — Dorsey in Am. Antiq.,
XIX, 279, 1897.
Lakweip (Niska: lAi(/nyi^py *on tht^
prairie.* — Boas). An isolated Athapas-
can tribe, n»lated to the Tahltan, formerly
living on Portland canal, Alaska, but hav-
ing ouarreled with the Niska are now on
the headwaters of Stikine r., Brit Col'.
Their chief village is Gunakhe.
Laokweipt.— Seott in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 563, 1870.
Laq'u^a'p.— Boas in 10th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
34, 1895. Kaqkyina.— Ibid. (Tset8aut name: 'on
the otlier side').
Lakyebo ( lAiqkyehf), * on the wol f * ) . One
of the 4 clans info which all the Chimme-
syan are divided. The name is applied
specifically to various local suIkH visions
as well, there Ixung one such in the Niska
town of Lakkulzap and another in the
Kitksan town of Kishpiyeoux. — Boas in
10th Rep. N. W. TribesCan., 49, 50, 1895.
Lalanitlela ( IxVlduiLidaf 'always cross-
ing the sea ' ) . A gens of the Tlatlasikoala,
subdivided into the Gvegvote and Hahe-
kolatl.— Boas in Rep. Nat Mus. 1895, 329,
1897.
Lamaiconson. One of several tribes or
bands displat^ed from their homes in St
Mary and Charles cos., Md., in 1651, and
settled on a reservation at the head of
Wicomico r. (Bozman, Maryland, ii, 421,
1837). Perhaps a small branch of the
Conoy.
Lamoohattee. See IVeatlierfordf WlMiam,
La Montagne ( Fr. : ' the mountain *), A
mission village established in 1677 for
Caughnawaga and other Catholic Iro-
quois on a hill on Montreal id., Quebec.
They were afterward joined by others,
many of whom were not Christians. The
village was temporarily deserted in 1689 on
account of the Iroquois. In 1696 apart of
the converts established a new mission vil-
lage at Sault au Recollet, and were joined
by the others until in 1704 La Montagne
was finally abandoned. (j. m. 1
The ][ottntam.--Shea, Cath. Miss. . 309, 1855.
Lamps. See Illumination,
Lamsim. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
BULL. 30]
LAMTAMA LANrp:s
755
Lamtama. A Nez Perc^ band living on
White Bird cr., a tributary of Salmon r.,
Idaho, so called from the native name of
the stream.— Gatschet, MS.,1878, B. A. K.
BaiBklo Indiviu.— Owen in Ind. AfT. Rep. 1859,
424, 1860. Lamtama.— OatMohet. MS..187K. B. A. E.
White Bird Kn Pero^.—Ibid. (so called from the
name of their chief).
Lana-chaadni ( Laf tui taVadAS ) . A fam-
ily of low social rank belonging to the
Eagle clan of the Haida. Before becom-
inff extinct they occupied, with the Gitin-
najats, a town on Shingle bay, Queen
Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. Some are said
to have lived with the Kaiiahl-lanas. —
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 274, 1905.
Lanadagnnga (TA^mi dd^gAflnj ' bad
[or common] village * ) . A former Haida
town, owned by the Saki-kegawai, on
the coast of Moresby i<l., s. of Tangle
cove, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col. It
was so called by the jieople of Hagi, op-
pocdte, because the Lanadagunga people
used to talk against them.— Swanton,
Cont. Haida, 277, 1905.
Lanaffahlkehoda [Ldim^ga- fqe^xoda,
* town that the sun does not shine on * ).
A Haida town on a small island opposite
Kaisun, w. coast of Moresby id.. Queen
Charlotte ids. , Brit. Col. It was so named
because it faces x. This is a semi-mvth-
ical town, said to have been occupitHi by
the Kas-lanas. — Swanton, Cont: Haida,
280,1905.
Lanagnkimhlixi-hadai (TA^na gu qA^n-
idn xa/aa-iy ^resting-the-breast-ou-a-town
people'). A subdivision of the Chaahl-
lanas, a family of the P^agle clan of the
Haida. Lanl^^ukunhlin was the name
of a chief. — Swanton, Cont. Haida, 276,
1905.
Lanahawa (lA^na xd^wa, *swampv vil-
lage*). A former Haida town on the w.
coast of Graham id., opposite Hippa id.,
Queen Charlotte group, Brit. Col. It was
also called Lanahe^ns (Ld^-na xe^-gAns^
* town where there is a noise [of drums] ' )
and Lanahltungua (lA'-na ftA^tigua^
*town where there are plenty <^f feath-
ers'). It was occupied by the Skwahla-
das and Nasto-kegawai before they moved
to Rennell sd., and afterward by the
Kiannsili. — Swanton, Cont. Haida* 280,
1905.
Lanahawa. A former Haida town on the
w. coast of Bumaby id.. Queen Charlotte
ids., Brit. Col., s. of the Ninstints town
of Ket — Swanton, Cont. Haida, 278,
1905.
LanahildnxLB (Ld^na hVldAiis, ^moving
village'; also called Chahlolnagai, from
the name of the inlet on which it was
situated). A former Haida town on the
8. w. side of Rennell sd., Graham id.,
Queen Charlotte group, Brit. Col. ; occu-
gied by the Nasto-kegawai or the Skwa-
ladas fomily group, ^wanton, Cont.
Haida, 280, 1905.
Lanaslnagai (Ld^nas Inagd^-ij * peoples*
town ' ). The name of three distinct Haida
towns on Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.
One stood on the e. coast of (iraham id.,
s. of (\ Hall, and was owned by the
Naikun-kejTiiwai ; another ])elonged to
the Knna-lanas and was on the w. side of
Ma<*set inlet where it broadens out; the
third, which In^longed to the Yagunstlan-
Inagai, was on Yagun r. — Swanton, Cont.
Haida, 280, 281, IWo.
Lananngsnls ( DVtm ^a^iIsaIs^ * town
[that] hides itself). A Ilaida town on
ilasset inlet, (^neen Charlotte ids., Brit.
Col., beloiijjing to the Aovaku-lnagai. —
Swanton, (\)nt. Haida, 281*, 1905.
Lances. As an implement of the chase
or of war the lance had a wide distribu-
tion among the ancient and the modern
tribes of the United States. Though none
of the objects of chipped stone called
lance-heads that have been found in num-
l)ers on widely separated archeological
sites are attached to shafts, there is reason
to l)elieve that many of the leaf-shaped
l)ladeH were lance-heads. The only sur-
vivals of the use of the an-
cient lance are fecund among
the Hiipa of California and
the western Eskimo, but
earlier writers have men-
tioned their existence among
various tribes. Lances for
the chase were used occa-
sionally in war by the Eski-
mo, but the Plains Indians,
whenever possible, used two
distinct varieties for war
and for hunting, the hunting la^cc hcao; wtrr-
lance blade l^ing shorter ern Eskimo.
and heavier. The lance <«""ooc">
appears to have originated through the
need of striking animals from some dis-
tance in order to escape personal danger
and to produce surer results than were
|)OSsil)le with a sttme knife or other im-
plement used at close quarters. The
efficiency and range of the lance when
thrown from the hand was increased by
the throwing stick (q. v.) ,*and the original
lance or spear developed into a numl)er
of varieties un<ler the influences of envi-
ronment, the habits of animals, accultu-
ration, etc. The greatest number of
forms sprang up among the Eskimo,
whose environment was characterized by
a great variety and alternation of animal
Hfe, while in inost other regions a simple
lance was perpetuated.
The Plains tribes, an a rule, living in a
region conducive to warfare and aggression
through its lack of phvsical boundaries,
made more use of the lance in war than
did coast, woodland, desert, or mountain
tribes. Since the general occui)ancy of
the plains appears to have been coincident
with the introduction of the horse, the
756
LAND TENURE
[B. A. B.
use of the war lance has heen associated
with that animal/ hut it is evident that the
tribes that occupied the plains were ac-
quainteil with the lance with a stone head
as a hunting implement before they en-
tered this vast region. A Kiowa lance in
the National Museum is headed with a
part of a sword blade and is reputed t(^
nave killed 16 persons.
In accord with the tendency of object*^
designed for especially important usage to
take on a religious significance, the lance
has become an accessory of ceremonies
among the Plains Indians. Elaborately
decorated sheaths were made for lances,
varying according to the society or oflSce
of the owner. At home the lance was
leaned against the shield tripod, tied hor-
izontally above the tipi door, or fastened
lengthwise to an upright pole behind the
tipi. In both earlier and recent times
offerings of lance-heads were made to
springs, exquisitely formed specimens
having been taken irom a sulphur spring
at Afton, Okla.
Consult Holmes (1) in 15th Rep. B. A.
E., 1897, (2) in Am. Anthrop., iv, 108-
129, 1902; Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
988-990, 1896. See Arrowheads, HmUlng,
Spearsy War and ]] ar duicipline. ( w . n . )
Land tenare. The Indian conceived of
the earth as mother, and as mother she
provided food for her children. The
words in the various languages which
refer to the land as ** mother " were used
only in a sacred or religious sense. In
this primitive and religious sense land
was not regarded as property; it was like
the air, it was something necessary to the
life of the race, and therefore not to be
appropriated by any individual or group
of individuals to the permanent exclusion
of all others. Other words referring to the
earth as **8oir* to be used and cultivated
by man, mark a change in the manner of
living and the growth of the idea of a sec-
ular relation to the earth. Instead of de-
pending on the spontaneous products of
the land the Indian began to sow seeds
and to care for the plants. In order to
do this he had to remain on the soil he
cultivated. Thus occupancy gradually
established a claim or right to possess the
tract from which a tribe or an individual
derived food. This occupancy was the
only land tenure recognized by the Indian ;
he never of himself reached the concep-
tion of land as merchantable, this view
having been forced on his acceptance
through his relations with the white race.
Tecumseh claimed that the Northwest
Territory, occupied by allied tribes, be-
longed to the tribes in common, hence a
sale of land to the whites by one tribe did
not convey title unless confirmed- by
other tribes. Furthermore, among most
of the Algonquian tribes, at least, accord-
ing to Dr William Jones, if land were
ceded to the whites, the cession could not
be regarded as absolute, i. e., the whites
could hold only to a certain depth in the
earth such as was needful for sustenance.
Each tribe had its village sites and con-
tiguous hunting or fishing grounds; as
long as the ]>eople lived on these sites
and regularly went to their hunting
gn^unds, they could claim them against
all intruders. This claim often had to be
maintained by battling with tribes less
favorabl V situated. The struggle over the
right to hunting grounds was the cause of
most Indian wars. In some tribes garden
spots were claimed by clans, each lam ily
working on its own particular patch. In
other tribes the favorable localities were
■preempted by individuals regardless of
clan relations. As long as a person plant-
ed a certain tract the claim was not dis-
jmted, but if its cultivation were n^-
lected anyone who chose might take it.
Among the Zufli, according to Gushing,
if a man, either before or alter marriage,
takes up a field of unappropriated land, it
belongs strictly to him, but is spoken of
as the property of his clan, or on his
death it may be cultivated by any mem-
l)er of that clan, though preferably by
near relatives, but not by his wife or chil-
dren, who must be of another clan. More-
over, a man cultivating land at one Zufii
farming settlement of the tribe can not
give even of his own fields to a tribesman
belonging to another farming villase un-
less that person should be a member of
his clan; nor can a man living at one vil-
lage take up land at another without the
consent of the lx>dy politic of the latter
settlement; and no one, whatever his
rank, can grant land to any member of
another tribe without consent of the Com
and certain other clans.
During the early settlement of the
country absolute title was vested in the
Crown by virtue of discovery or conquest,
yet the English acknowledged the In-
dian's right of occupancy, as is shown by
the purchase of these rights both by Lora
Baltimore in 1635 and by William Penn
in 1682, although colonizing under royal
grants. The I^ritans, however, cominff
without royal authority, were necessitated
to bargain with the Indians. Absolute
right to the Indian lands was fully stated
in a proclamation by George III in 1763.
In 1783 the Colonial Congress forbade
private purchase or acceptance of lands
from Indians. On the adoption of the
Constitution the right of eminent domain
became vesteil in 9ie United States, Mid
Congress alone had the power to extin-
guish the Indian's right of occupancy.
The ordinance of 1787, relative to all ter-
ritory N. w. of the Ohio, made the consent
of the Indians requisite to the cession of
BULL. 30]
LANGUAGES
757
their lands. Until the passage of the act
of Mar. 3, 1871, all cession was by treaty,
the United States negotiating with the
tribes as with foreign nations; since then
agreements have been less formal, and a
recent decision of the U. 8. Supreme
Court makes even the agreement or con-
sent of the Indians unnecessary. The
tribes living in Arizona, California, Ne-
vada, New Mexico, and Utah came under
the provisions of the treaty of Guadalui>e
Hidalgo, most of the Pueblos holding their
lands under Spanish grants. All Indian
reservations have been established either
by treaty or by order of the President, })ut
in both cases the Indian's tenure is that of
occupancy only. "They may not cut
growing timlx»r, open mines, quarry stone,
etc., to obtain lumber, coal, buildnig ma-
terial, etc., solely for the i)urj>o8e of sale or
speculation. Inshort, whatatenantforlife
may do upon the lands of a remainder-man
the Indians may do upon their reserva-
tions, but no more. ' * In a few cases reser-
vations have been paten te<l to tril)es, as
those of the Five Civilized Trilx^, and a
liniiteil numl>er of tril)es have ha<l their
lands apportioned and received patients
for individual holdings, yet no general
changt^ in the Imlian land tenure took
place until the passage of the severalty act
m 1887. This act provide<l for the allot-
ment to each man, woman, and child of
a certain portion of the tribal land and
the issuance of a patent by which the
United States holds theallotnient in trust,
free of taxation an<l encumbrance, for 25
years, when the allottee is entitled to a
patent in fee simple. On the approval
of their allotments oy the Secretary of the
Interior the Indians l>ecome citizens of
the Unite<l States and subject to its laws.
Seven ty-thr(»e tribes already hold their
lands under this tenure. See (rovern-
mental policy^ Legal staiiis, Reservations,
JVeaties^ Social organization.
Consult Adair, Hist. Am. Indians, 282,
1775; Bandelier in Archfeol. Inst. Pai)ers,
III, 201, 272, 1890; Cushing in Millstone,
IX, 55, 1884; Dawson, Queen Charlotte
Islands, 117, 1878; Fletcher, Indian Mu-
cationand Civilization, 1888; Grinnell in
Am. Anthrop., ix, no. 1, 1907; Jenks in
19th Rep. B. A. E., 1900; Powell in 7th
Rep. B. A. E., 39-41, 1891; Royce, Indian
Land Cessions, 18th Rep. B. A. E., 1889;
Willoughby in Am. Anthrop., viii, no. 1,
1906. (a.c.f.)
Languages. The American langua^
show considerable variety in phonetu^s
and structure. While some are vo<'alic
and appear melodious to our ear, others
contain many consonant sounds to which
we are unac(!Ustomed and which seem to
S* ve them a harsh character. Particularly
equent are sounds protiuced by contact
between the base of the tongue and the
soft palate, similar to the Scotch ch in
hchf and a numl)er of explosive Ts, which
are produced by prcssmg the toneue
against the ]>alateand suddenly expelhng
the air between the teeth. Harshness
produced by clustering consonants is pe-
culiar to the N. W. coast of America.
Sonorous vocalic languages are found in
a large part of the Mississippi basin and
in California. Peculiar to many Ameri-
can languages is a slurring of terminal
syllables, >\niich makes the recording of
grammatical forms difficult.
Contrary to the prevalent notion, the
vocabularies are ricli and their grammat-
ical structure is systematic and intricate.
Owing to the wealth of derivatives it is
difficult to estimate the numl)er of words
in any Americ*an language; but it is cer-
tain that in every one there are a couple
of thousand of 'stem words and many
thousand words, as that term is defined
in English dictionaries.
A considerable variety of grammatical
structure exists, but there are a few com-
mon traits that seem to l>e characteristic
of most American languages. The com-
plexity of granmiar is often great because
many ideas expressed l)y separate words
in the languages of other continents are
expressed by grammatical processes in the
languages of the Indians. The classifica-
tion of words differs somewhat from the
familiar grouping in Indo-European lan-
guages. The demarcation between noun
and verl) is often indistinct, many ex-
pressions iH'ing l)oth denominative and
predicative. Often the intransitive verb
and the noun are identical in form, while
the transitive verb only is truly verbal in
character. In other languages the tran-
sitive verb is nominal, while the intran-
sitive only is truly verbal. These phe-
nomena are generally accompanied by
the use of possessive pronouns with the
nominal and of personal pronouns with
the verbal class of words. In other cases
the verbal forms are differentiated from
the noun, but the close relationship be-
tween the two classes is indicated by the
similaritv of the pronominal forms. The
intransitive verb generally includes the
ideas which Indo-p]uropean languages
express by means of adjectives. Inde-
pendent pronouns are often compounds,
and the pronoun appears in most cases
subordinated to the verb.
In the singular are distinguished self
(or s|)eaker), person addressetl, and per-
son spoken of; in the plural, correspond-
ing to our first person, are often aistin-
guished the combination of speaker and
persons addressed, and speaker and per-
sons spoken of, the so-called inclusive
and exclusive forms.
The demonstrative pronouns are analo-
gous to the personal pronoun in that they
758
LANGUAGES
[B. A. S.
are generally developed in three forms,
indicating respectively the thing near me,
near thee, near him. ' Their development
is sometimes even more exuberant, visi-
bility and invisibility', present and past,
or location to the right, left, front and
back of, and above and below the speaker,
being distinguished.
The subordination of the pronoun to
the verb is often carried to extremes. In
many languages the pronominal subject,
the object, and the indirect object are in-
corporated in the verb, for which reason
American languages have often been
called * * incorporating languages. ' ' There
are, however, numerous languages in
which this pronominal subordination
does not occur. In some the process of
incorporation does not cease with, the
pronoun; but the noun, particularly the
nominal object, is treated in the same
manner. Where such incorporation is
found the development of nominal cases
is slight, since the incorjKjration renders
this unnecessary.
The occurrence of other cla^jses of words
depends largely on the development of
another feature of American languages,
which is probably common to them all,
namely, the expression of a great number
of special ideas by means of either affixes
or stem modification. ( )n account of the
exuberance of such elements American
languages have been called **polysyn-
thetic." The character of the sul>ordi-
nate<l elements shows great variations.
In some languages most of the ideas that
are subordinate are instrumental ( with
the hand, the foot, or the like; with the
point or the edge of something, etc. ); in
others they include all kinds of qualify-
ing ideas, such as are generally expressed
by auxiliary verbs, verbal compounds,
and adverbs. The Eskimo, for instance,
by composition of other elements with
the stem "to see," may express **he
only orders him to go and see"; a Chim-
mesyan composition with the verb to go
is, **he went with him upward in the
dark and came against an obstacle. * * The
existence of numerous subordinate ele-
ments of this kind has a strong effect in
determining the series of stem words in
a langua^. Whenever this method of
composition is highly developed many
special ideas are expressed by stems of
very general significance, combined with
(jualifying elements. Their occurrence
is also the cause of the obviousness of In-
dian etymologies. These elements also
occur sometimes independently, so that
the process is rather one of coordinate
composition than of subordination. The
forms of words that enter composition of
this kind sometimes undergo considerable
Ehonetic modification by losing affixes or
y other processes. In such cases com-
position apparently is brought about by
apocope, or decapitation of words; but
most of these seem to be reducible to reeu-
lar processes. In many languases poly-
synthesis is so highly developed that it
almost entirely suppresses adverbs, prepo-
sitions, and conjunctions.
The categories of Indo-European lan-
guages do not correspond strictly to those
of Indian languages. This is true par-
ticularly of the ideas of gender and plu-
rality. Grammatical gender based on
sex distinction is very rare in America.
It is based on other qualities, as animate
and inanimate, or noble and ignoble, and
often relates only to shape, as round,
long, or fiat. Complete absence of such
classification is frequent. Plurality is
seldom clearly developed; it is often
absent even in the pronoun; its place is
taken by the ideas oi collectivity and dis-
tribution, which are expressed more often
than plurality. Tense is also weakly de-
veloped in many languages, although
others have a complex system of tenses.
Like other adverbial ideas tense is often '
expressed by affixes. Moods and voice of
the verb are also sometimes undeveloped
and are expresse<l by adverbial elements.
In the use of grammatical processes
there is great diversity. Suffixes occur
almost everywhere; prefixes are not quite
so frequent. Infixes seem to be confined
to the Siouan languages, although infixa-
tion by metathesis occurs in other lan-
guages also. Reduplication is frequent,
sometimes extending to triplication; but
in some groups of languages it does not
occur at all. Other forms of modification
of stem also occur.
Indian languages tend to express ideas
with much graphic detail in regard to
localization and form, although other
determining elements which Indo-Euro-
pean languages require may be absent.
Those languages are, therefore, not so
well adapted to generalized statements as
to lively description. The power to form
abstract ideas is nevertheless not lacking,
and the development of abstract thought
would find in every one of the languages
a ready means of expression. Yet, since
the Indian is not given to purely abstract
speculation, his abstract terms always
appear in close connection with concrete
thought; for instance, qualities are often
expressed by nominal terms, but are
never used without possessive pronouns.
According to the types of culture served
by the languages we find holophrastic .
terms, expressing complex groups of ideas.
These, however, are not due to a lack of
j)ower to classify, but are rather expres-
sions of form of culture, single terms
being intended for those ideas that are of
prime importance to the people.
The differentiation of stocks into dia-
lects shows great variation, some stocks
comprising only one dialect, while others
ItULL. 30]
LANGUNTENNENK LANSING MAN
759
embrace iiianv that, are imitually unin-
telligible. While the P^kinio have re-
tained their language in all its minor
features for centuries, that of the Salish,
who are confined to a small area in
the N. Pacific region, is split up into
innumerable dialei'ts. The fate of each
stock is probably due as much to the
morphological traits of the language itself
as to the effects of its contact with other
languages. Wherever abundant redupli-
cation, phonetic changes in the stem, and
strong phonetic mo<iifications in compo-
sition occur, changes seem to be more
rapid than where grammatical processes
are based on simple laws of composition.
Contact with other languages has had a
far-reaching effect through aa^imilation
of syntactic structure and, to a certain
extent, of phonetic type. There is, how-
ever, no historical proof of the change of
any Indian language since the time of the
discovery comparable with that of the
language of England between the 10th
and 13th centuries.
A few peculiarities of language are wort h
mentioning. As various j)arts of the ])op-
ulation speaking modern English differ
somewhat in their forms of expression,
so similar variations are found in Ameri-
can languages. One of the f recjuent types
of difference is that In'tween the language
of men and that of women. This differ-
ence may be one of pronunciation, as
among some Eskimo tribes, or may con-
sist in the use of different sets of impera-
tive and declarative particles, as among
the Sioux, or in otherdifferences of vocab-
ulary; or it may Ik^ more fumlamental,
due to the foreign origin of the women
of the tril^e. In incantations and in the
formal speeches of priests and shamans a
peculiar vocabulary is sometimes used,
containing many archaic and syml)olic
terms. See Chinook jargon^ Linguistic
families^ Sign language. (f* b- )
Langnntexmenk. A village of Moravian
Delawares founde<i in 1770 on Beaver r.,
probably near the present Darlington,
in Beaver co., Pa., oy Indians who re-
moved from Eawunkhannek. In 1773
they abandoned the village and joine<l
the other Moravians cm the Muskingum,
in Ohio. The missionaries called itFried-
ensstadt, a. v. (j. m.)
Langundowi-Oteey.—Loskiel (1794) cited by Rupp,
West. Pa., 47, 1846. Languntenneiilc.— Crantz cited,
ibid., 47. Languntoueniink.— Zeisbeivcr (1791),
Diary, n, 234, 1885. Languntotttenaenk.— Crantz,
Hist, of the Brethren, 594, 1780.
LaxLsing Man. The name given to a par-
tially dismembereil human skeleton found
in 1902 under 20 ft of undisturbed silt,
70 ft from the face of the Missouri r.
bluff, near Lansing, Kans. The remains
lay partly under a large limestone slab
imbedded in a mass of talus at the foot of
a shale and limestone cliff, against which
the silt was deposited. The position of
the bones denoted an intentional burial,
and not the accidental lodgment of a body
at this point. In the walls of the exca-
vations made in the formatitm there was
no indication of slipping, sliding, caving,
or prolonged surface wash from a higher
level; no indication of direct wind or
wave action, except a narrow thin layer
of dark clay at one part; no distinct
lamination, stratification, or assortment
of material; no indication that vegetation
had ever taken hold; in short, no evi-
dence that the mass of silt was due to any
other process than a slow, steady accumu-
lation, mainly or
wholly in quiet
water. There
were small
l)atches of gravel
at irregular in-
tervals, many
snail shells, an-
gular fragments
of limestone up
to3or4in. thick,
small scraps of
shale, a few peb-
bles of glacial
drift origin, and
a number of
pieces of char-
coal, some with ^*^»"^° «'<"'-'■' frontal view
fractures and angles not in the least worn.
These facts point to an upbuilding partly
by wash, partly by winds, partly by creep
from the adjacent hills, and partly by
sediment from the Missouri. It appears
that this deposit could have accumuiate<l
within a comparatively short i)eriod.
Even allowing the utmost limit of time
that can be reasonably claimed, namely,
that the river has cut its way from tfie
top of the silt deposit to its present grade,
the time necessary for accomplishing this
will fall very far within the period that
must have elapsed since the existing to-
^3^ f^'
^^! .-^^ ^-^~: _i.-LL.^^. -_ I, . . , ,
t- — " ' • ■ • . -HI
SECTION OF BLUFF SHOWING LOCATION OF SKELETON
(«< Entrance to Tunnel; b. Position of Remains)
pography was created, in part at least by
streams that could not begin their work
until after glacial floods bad ceased to
act. The bones themselves do not favor
the theory of great antiquity for the
remains. According to Hrdlicka (Am.
Anthrop., v, 328, 1903) the skull and
bones are not i)erceptibly fossilized, and
are practically identical in their physical
characters with the crania and bones of
some of the historic Indians of the general
region. The cranium has been placed
for safe-keeping in the U. S. National
760
LAPAPU LAS FL0RE8
[B. A. E.
Museam by its owner, Mr M. C. Long, of
Kansas City, Mo.
As the geologists who examined the site
when the deep trenches cut by the Bureau
of American Ethnology were open hold
widely divergent opinions with respect to
the age of the formation inclosing the re-
mains, some of them considering it true
loess, further investigation is necessary ere
the question of antiquity can be finally
settled.
Of the geologists referred to, those fa-
voring great antiquity are Upham (Am.
Antig., xxiv, 413, 1902, and Am. Geolo-
gist, Sept. 1902, 135); Winchell (Am. Ge-
ologist, Sept. 1902); Williston (Science,
•Aug. 1, 1902), and Erasmus Haworth,
Professor of Geology, University of Kan-
sas. Those favoring a comparatively re-
cent date are Chamberlin (Jour, of Ge-
ology, X, 745, 1903); Holmes (Smithson.
Rep., 455, 1902); R. D. Salisbury, Pro-
fessor of Geology, University of Chicago;
Samuel Calvin, State Geologist of Iowa,
and Gerard Fowke, who conducted the
excavations on the site for the Bureau
of American Ethnology. See AnHquity^
Archeology. (g. f.)
Lapapn. A former Mi wok village on
Tuolumne r., Tuolumne co., Cal.
La-pap-poot.— Johnson in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
iv. 407, ia'>4. Lapapptt.— Latham in Trans. Philol.
Soc.Lond., 81, 1856.
La Piche. A small rancheria, probably
Luisefio, on Potrero res., 75 m. from Mis-
sion Tule River agency, s. Cal. With La
Joya the population was officially given
as 225 in 1903. Cf. Apeche.
La Posta (Span.; probably here mean-
ing *post station*). A reservation of
238. 88 acres of unpatented desert land oc-
cupied by 19 so-called Mission Indians,
situated 170 m. from Mission Tule River
agency, s. Cal.
Lappawinze (^getting provisions'). A
Delaware chief — one of those who were
induced to sign at Philadelphia the treaty
of 1737, known as the ** walking pur-
chase ,** confirming a reputed treaty of 1686,
which granted to the whites land extend-
ing from Neshaminy cr. as far as a man
could go in a day and a half. When the
survey was mme under this stipulation
the governor of Pennsylvania had a road
built inland and employed a trained run-
ner, a proceeding that the Delawares de-
nounced as a fraud. See Pa. Archives,
1st per., I, 541, 1852; Thomson, Enquiry
into Alienation of Delaware and Shaw-
anese Inds., 69, 1759.
La Prairie. The first mission village of
the Catholic Iroquois, established in 1668
on the 8. bank of the St Lawrence, at La
Prairie, La Prairie co., Quebec. The first
occupants were chiefly Oneida with other
Iroouois, but it soon contained members
of all the neighboring Iroquoian and Al-
gonquian tribes. The Mohawk, from
Cau^hnawaj^, N. Y., finally gained the
leading position and their language came
into vo^e in the settlement. In 1676
the Indians removed to Portage r., a few
miles distant, and built the present Caugh-
nawaga, q. v.
Lapraine.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 262, 1855. La Prairia
de la Kadelaine.— Frontenac (1674) in N.Y. Doc.
Col. Hist. , IX, 116, 1855. Lapraine de la Madelaine. -
Letter of 1756, ibid., x, 480, 1858. La Prairie de
la Macdelaine.— La Barre (1683), ibid., ix, 202, 1865.
Saint-fran^is-Xavier-dee-Pres.— Jes. Rel., in, in-
dex, 1858. St Francis Xavier dee Prk.— Shea,
Cath. Miss. , 268, 1855 ( mission name) . St Fraa^oia
Xavier k Lapraine de la Madeleine.— Jes. Rel.
(1675) quoted by Shea, Cath. Miss., 304, 1865. 8.
Xavier dea Frau.— Jes. Rel. 1671, 12, 1858. 8.
Xavier dee Pres.— Ibid., 1672, 16, 1858.
Laptambif. Probably a band of the
Calapooya proper. In 1877 the name was
borne by ** Old Ben," at Grande Ronde
res., Greg., who came from Mohawk r..
Lane co.
LAPPAWINZE.
Laptambif.— Gatschet, Atfalati MS.. B. A. £.. 368,
1877. Long-ton^e-buff.— Ross, Adventures, 286,
1849.
La Ponta (Span. : * the point * ). A for-
mer Diegueno rancheria near San Diego,
s. Cal. — Ortega ( 1775) quoted by Bancroft,
Hist. Cal., I, 253, 1884.
Lapwai. A Nez Perc^ band formerly
living near the mouth of Lapwai cr., Ida-
ho, now under the lapwai school super-
intendent.
Laa Flores (Span.: 'the flowers'). A
former Luisefio village in n. San Diego co.,
Cal. (Hayes, 1850, quoted by Bancroft,
Nat. Races, i, 460, 1882). Arguello (H.
R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 117,
1857) mentions a Las Flores as a Die^efio
pueblo in San Diego co., established after
the secularization act of 1834, which may
be the same.
BULL. 30]
LAS MTTLA8 LEDYANOPROLIV8K<)E
761
Las Mulat (Spaii.: *tlu> niult\s'). A
rancheria near the presidio of ]^ Bahia
and the mission of »i)fritu Santo de 7a\-
fligaon the lower Rio San Antonio, Tex.,
in 1785, at which datt^ it had only 5 in-
habitants (Baneroft, No. Mex. States, i,
659, 1886), who were probably of Kar-
ankawan affinity.
Lassik (iM^-sik, the name of their la:?t
chief). A i>eople of the Athapascan
family formerly occupying a portion of
main Eel r., Cal., and its e. tributaries.
Van Duzen, I>arral)ee, and Dobbin crs.,
together with the headwaters of Mad r.
They had for neighbors toward the n. the
Athapascan inhabitants of the valley of
Mad r. and Reilwood cr. ; toward the e.
the Wintun of Southfork of Trinity r. ;
toward the s. the Wailaki, from whom
they were separate<l by Kekawaka cr.;
toward the w. the Sinkine on Southfork
of Eel r. They occupied their regular
village sites along the streams only in
winter. Their houses were conical in
form, made of the bark of Douglas spruc^e.
They had neither sweat lodges nor dance
houses. The basketry was twined, but
differed considerably from that of the
Hupa in its decoration. Beside the meth-
ods employiHi elsi^where for securing dtM?r
and elk, the I.a«sik uwhI to follow a fresh
track until the animal, unable to feed or
rest, was overtaken. They intermarried
with the Wintun, to whom they were
assimilated in mourning customs, etc.
Powers (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 121,
1877) gives the imi)ression that the I^Assik
belong with the Wintun in language, but
this is a mistake. Their dialect resem-
bles the Hupa in its moq)hology and the
Wailaki in its phonology. The majority
of them perished during the first few
years of the occupancy of their country
by white people, a iKnmty l)eing placed
on their heads and the traffic in children
for slaves being profitable and unre-
straineil. A few families of them are still
living in the neigh Imrhood of their former
homes. (p. e. g.)
Lateha Hoa. Noted on the West Florida
map (m. 1775) as a Chickasaw settlement
on Lateha Hoa run, an affluent of Ahoola
Ihalchubba, a w. tributary of Tombigbee
r., N. e. Miss.
Late-Comedu. An unidentifieil Dakota
division, mentioned by Gale, Upper Miss. ,
252, 1867.
Laihakreila. A Nataotin village on the
N. side of Babine lake, Brit. Col.
LathakmU.— Morice in Trans. Rov. Soc. Can.
1892, 109, 1893. Ka-tal-kiu.— Dawson in Geol. Sun\
Can., 26b, 1881. Ki-to-ats.— Ibid.. 27b.
Laulewaiikaw. See Tenshrataira.
Law. See Government.
Lawilvan. A Kawia village in Cahuilla
valley, s. Cal.; perhaps identical with
Alamo Bonito, u. v.
Eth
o.— Barrows, Ethno.-Bot. Coahuilla Ind., 34.
1900. La-wil-van.— Ibid. Si-vel.— Ibid.
Lawokla. A Choctaw clan of the
Kushapokhi phratrv. — Morgan, Anc.
Soc, 162, 1877.
Lawnnkhannek. A village of Moravian
Delawares establinhed in 1769 on Alle-
flieny r., al)ove Franklin, Venango co.,
*a. In 1770 the inhabitants removed
tt) I^nguntennenk. It seems probable
that the village ccmtained also some
Seneca. (j. m.)
Lauanakanuck.— Day, Penn., 172,1843. Lawanaka-
nuck.— Loskiel (17»4) quoted by Day, Penn., 644.
1843. Lawenakanuck.— Il)id., 10*2-3. Lawunah-
hannek.— lA)8kiel (1794) quoted by Rupp West.
Pa., app., 353, 1846. Lawunakhannek.— Crantz,
Hist, of the Brethren, 594, 1780. Lawunkhannek.—
Loskiel (1794) (luoted by Rupp, op. cit., 46.
Laycayamn. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Santa Barbara, Cal. — Tavlor in
Cal. Fanner, Apr. 24, 1868.
League. See Lonfederation, Ooverumeiit.
Lean Bear. An unidentified Dakota
band formerlv living below L. Traverse,
Minn. (Ind. Aff. Rep. 1^59, 102, 1860);
apparently named after the chief.
Leatherlips (native name SluVteiaW^^-
hiiVf * Two clouds of equal size.' — Hew-
itt). A Huron (Wyandot) chief of the
Sandusky tribe of Ohio who, in Aug.,
1795, signed the treaty of (Jreenville in
behalf of his j)eoi)le. His hononU)le
character and frieinlship for the whitt»s
inflaiiUHl the jealousy of Tecumseh, who
ruthlessly ordered him to be kille<l on
the plea that he was a wizard, Tecumst»ir.«<
fanaticism being so overmastering that he
assigned the execution of Shateiaronhia
to another Huron chief named Round-
head. He was apprised of his condemna-
tion by his broth(»r, who was sent to him
with a piece of bark <m which a toma-
hawk was drawn as a token of his death.
The execution took place near his camp
on the Scioto, about 14 m. n. of Colum-
bus, in the summer of 1810, there being
present a number of white men, includ-
mg u justice of the peace, who made an
effort to save the life of the accused, but
without success. He was tomahawked
by a fellow tril)esman while kneeling
beside his grave, after having chanted
a death song. The Wyandot CluJ) of
Columbus, Ohio, in 1888, erected a
granite monument to Shateiaronhia in
a park surrounded by a stone wall,
including the spot where he died. See
Curry m Ohio Archa^ol. and Hist.
Quar., XII, no. 1, 1906; Drake, Life of
Tecumseh, 1852; Heckewelder, Hist. Ind.
Nat., 1876; Howe, Hist. Coll. Ohio, i, 611,
1898.
Leaiherwood ( I.«atherwood's Town) .
A former Cherokee settlement at or near
the present Leatherwood village in the
X. i>art of Franklin co., n. e. (ia. The
name was probably that of a prominent
chief or mixed-blood. (j. m.)
Ledyanoprolivskoe. Perhaps a town of
the Tlingit, localitv not given, numl^er-
ing 200 in 1835.
762
LEEK WIN AI LEGAL STATUS
[ B, A. B
Laydanoprodevskie.— Elliott, Cond. A£F. Alaj»ka.
227, 1875 (transliterated from VeniaminofT). led-
irtaoproliTtkoe.— VeniaminofiF, Zapiski, ii, pt. Ill,
Leekwinai ( Lee-kuin-d-V ^ * snapping tur-
tle'). A subclan of the Dela wares
(q. v.). — Morgan, Anc. Soc, 172, 1877.
Leelahs. Supposed to be a division of
the Kalapooian family; not identified. —
Slocuni in II. R. Rep. 101, 25th Cong., 3d
8ess.,42,1839.
Leeshtelosh {Leesh-te-losh), Probably a
Kalapooian baud, said to have lived near
the headwaters of Willamette r., Greg. —
Hunter, Captivitv, 73, 1823.
Legal status, the act of July 22, 1790,
contains the earliest provision relating to
intercourse with Indians. By it any
offense against the person or property of
a {>eaceable and friendly Indian was made
punishable in the same manner as if the
act were committed against a white in-
habitant ( U. S. Stat., 1, 138). The act of
May 19, 1796, empowered the President
to arrest within the limits of any state or
district an Indian guilty of theft, outrage,
or murder (ibid., 472). During the next
20 years the idea that the Indian tribes
were distinct nations, having their own
form of government and power to con-
duct their social polity, took form and
was distinctly stated in treaties. The
Indians' right to punish intruding white
settlers was stipulated in treaties made
with the Cherokee, Chickasaw, Chip-
SBwa, Choctaw, Creeks, Delawares,
ttawa, Potawatomi, Shawnee, Ilurons,
and other tribes. The act of Mar. 3,
1817, provided that the power given to
the President under the act of May 19,
1796, "should not l)e ho construed as to
affect any treaty in force l)etween the
United States and any Indian nation or
to extend to any offense conmiitted by
one Indian against another within any
Indian lx)undary." The courts decided
that for the l'nfte<l States to assume ** to
exercise a general jurisdiction over Indian
countries within a state is unconstitu-
tional and of no effect." The crime of
murder charged against a white man for
killihg another white man in theCherokee
country, within the state of Tennessee,
it was decided, could not l)e punished in
the courts of the United States (U. S.
r. Bailey, Mclean's C. Cls. Rep., i, 2:i4).
In the case of the Cherokee Nation v.
the State of (Jeorgia (5 Peters, 1) the
court states: **It may well l)e doubted
whether thost^ tribes which reside within
the acknowledged boundaries of the
United States can with strict accuracy
be denominated foreign nations. The^
may more correctly, perhaps, be denomi-
nated domestic dependent nations. They
occupy a territory to which we assert title
independent of their will, which must
take effect in point of possession when
their right of possession ceases; mean-
while they are in a state of pupilage.
Thei» relation to the United States re-
sembles that of a ward to his guardian."
This confused relation — neither depend-
ence nor independence — led to many dif-
ficulties. From time to time appeals were
made by the Indian Commissioner for the
extension of the laws of the land over In-
dian reservations. On Mar. 3, 1885, an
act was passed extending the law over
Indians to a limited extent (U. S. Stat.
L., XXIII, 385): ''The right of the In-
dians to the reservation ordinarily oc-
cupied by them is that of occupancy
alone. They have the right to apply to
their own use and benefit the entire prod-
ucts of the reservation, whether the re-
sult of their own labor or of natural
growth, so they do not commit waste. If
the lands in a state of nature are not in a
condition for profitable use they may be
made so; if desired for the purpose of
agriculture, they may be cleared of their
timber to such an extent as may be rea-
sonable under the circumstances, and the
surplus timber taken off by the Indians
. may be sold by them. The
Indians may also cut dead and fallen tim-
ber and sell the surplus not needed for
their own use; they may cut growing
timber for fuel and for use upon the res-
ervation ; they may open mines and quarry
stone for the purpK)8e of obtaining fuel
and building material; they may cut hav
for the use of the live stock, and may sell
any surplus . . They may not,
however, outgrowing timber, open mines,
(juarry stone, etc., to obtain luml)er, coal,
building material, etc., solely for the pur-
pose of sale or si)eculation. In short,
what a tenant for life may do upon lands
of a remainder-man the Indians may do on
their reservations (Instructions, sec. 262,
1880; U. S. r. Cook, 19 Wallace, 591;'
acts of Mar. 22 and 31, 1882; Rep. Sec.
Interior, May 19, 1882, 9636; lU^. Ind.
Dept., sec. 525, 526, 527).
By their treaty of July 31, 1855, the
Chippewa of Michigan were permitted to
receive the title to lands taken up under
the act of Aug. 4, 1854 (U. S. Stat., x, 574)
without * * actual occupancy or residence, ' '
in order to dispose of them (ibid., xi,627).
An act promulgated in Mar., J875, jjer-
mitted Indians to homestead land (ibid.,
xviii, 240). Those Indians who had
availed themselves of this act were by the
act of July 4, 1884, to receive from the
Government a trust patent, to the effect
that the United States would hold the
land for 25 years, and at the expiration
of that period convey it in fee to the In-
dian who had made entry or to his heirs
"free of all charge or incumbrance what-
ever" (ibid., XX III, 961). '* Indians can
not preempt public lands and can not re-
tULL. 80]
LEGENDS LELIKIAN
763
^ove disability by declaring their inten-
ion to become citizens . . . Citizen-
ihip is not requisite for the ordinary pur-
chase of public lands. ... It m&y be
lone by a foreign alien and a fortiori by
i mere denizen or domestic alien, such as
5ie Indians'* (Opinions Atty. (ien., vii,
[ The severalty act of Feb. 8, 1887, made
he allotted Indian subject to all the laws,
ivil and criminal, of the state in which
le resides, and also conferred upon him
'tizenship. The courts have decided that
lose who come under the provision of
this act are no longer wards or subjetit to
the restrictive control of the Conimis-
Edoner of Indian Affairs or his agents.
Members of the following tribes can
become citizens by treaty stipulation:
Delaware, Kaskaskia, Kickapoo, Miami,
Munsee, Ottawa, Peoria, Piankashaw,
Sioux, Stockbridge, Wea, Winnebago liv-
ing in Minnesota, and the Pueblo Indians
and other sedentary tribes that coin e under
the treaty of Guadalupe Hidalgo and the
Gadsden Purchase. The status of mixed
bloods, the court has decidetl, is deter-
mined by that of tlie father (Ex parte
Reynold: 5 Dillon, 394).
The courts of Kansas and Washington
have held that "an Indian sustaining
tribal relations is as capable of entering
into binding contracts as any other alien, ' '
except that said contract shall not touch
his lands, annuities, or statute benefits.
** The right to contract necessarily draws
after it the liability to be sued; therefore
upon contracts of the aforesaid character
Indians can sue and be sued " (Washing-
ton Rep., I, 325). The state court has
jurisdiction of the person and property
of Indians, except while such Indians or
property are actually situated on a reserve
excluded from the jurisdiction of the state
(Kansas Rep., XII, 28). See Agerwy system,
CivUizationf Education, Govenimental pol-
icy, Land tenure, Office of Indian Affairs,
Reservations, Treaties, (a.c. f.)
Legends. See Mythology.
Leggings. See Clothing.
Le Have (named from Cap de la H6ve,
France). A Micmac village in 1760
near the mouth of Mersey r., about I^u-
nenburg, in Lunenburg co.. Nova Scotia.
OhMbivp^.— Jes. Rel. (1610-13), i, 153, 1896. La
Have.— Frye (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soe. Coll.,
Irt 8., X, 115-116. 1809. La Heve.— Doc. of 1746 in
N. Y.Doc. Col. Hist., X, 70, 1858. Le Have.— Present
name of adjacent island. Portde la Hive. — Les-
carbot (1609) quoted by Thwaites, Jes. Rel., i,
168, note, 1896.
Lehigh. A variety of coal. From Le-
high, me name of a tributary of the Del-
aware and a county in Pennsylvania,
which represents lechau in the Lenape
(Delaware) dialect, signifying *fork of
a river.' (a. f. c.)
Lehn. The Seed-erass clan of the Ala
(Horn) phratry of the Hopi.
Le'-hiiwun-wii.— Fewkesin Am. Anthrop., vil,401,
1894 (ifu«-wu='clan').
Leimin. A Yuit Eskimo village on the
Siberian coast between East cai)e and St
I^wrence bay.— Krause in Deutsche
Geog. Blatt., v, 80, map, 1882.
Leitii ( ' the junction ' ) . The village of
the Tanotenne situated at the confluence
of Stuart and Eraser rs., Brit. Col.
Fort George.— Moriee, Notes on W. DC'n^^s, 26, 1893.
2eitli.— Ibid, •reit'ii.— Moriee in Trans. Roy. So<'.
an. 1892, 109, 1893.
Lejagadatcah. An unidentified band
of the Miniconjou Teton Sioux.
Lcja-ga-dat-cah.— Culbertson in Smithson. Kep.
1850,142,1851. .^ ,.
Lekwiltok. A large Kwakiutl tribe liv-
ing ])etween Knight and Bute inlets, Brit.
Col. They wore divided into five septs:
Wiwekae,' Hahamatses or Walitsum,
Kueha, Tlaalnis, and Komenok. The
last is now extinct. The towns are Hu-
sam, Tsakwalooin, Tsaiiveuk, and Tatapo-
wis. Total pop. 218 in 1904.
Aoolta.— Poole, Queen Cliarlotte Ids.. 289, 1872.
Enclataws.— Can. Ind. Aflf., 142. 1879. EuclaUw.—
Ibid., 92, 1876. Euclitus.— Downie in Mayne. Brit.
Col., 448, 18(51. Laek-que-libla. — Kane, Wand,
in N. A., app., 1859. Laich-kwil-taoke. — Can.
Ind AIT., 142, 1879. Lcequeeltoch.— Scouler in
Jour.Kthnol.Soc. Ix)nd., 1,233, 1848. LekwildaV--
Boasin Mem. Am. Mns. Nat. Hist.,v,pt. 2.318,
1902. Lc'kwiltok-.— Boa.s in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 55. 1890 (Salish name). Le'kwiltoq.— Boas
in Petermanns Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 1887. laenkwil-
tak.— (^an. Ind. AIT. for 1901, pt. 2, 166. Liew-kwil-
tah.— Can. Ind. AIT. 1895,362, 1896. la-kwil-tah.—
Tolmic and Dawson, Voeabs. Brit. Col., 118b, 1884.
Likwiltoh.— Ibid. Neaquiltough.— Brit. Col. map,
1872. Ne-cul-ta.— Kane, Wand, in N. A., app., 1859.
Saich-kioie-taohs.— Can. Ind. Aff. 1883, 190, 1884.
Saioh-kwil-tach.— Sproat, ibid., 145, 1879. Tah-oul-
tu8.— Lord, Natur. m Brit Col., i, 155. 1866. Toung-
letate.— Smet, Oregon Mis.^., 5*), 1847. TJcaltai.—
Anderson quoted by Gibbsin Hist. Mag., 74, 1863.
TJohulta.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer. Julv 19, 1862.
TJ-cle-ta.— Mavne, Brit. Col., 74, 1862. tJcle-tah.—
Ibid., 243. TJcietes.— KeaneinStanford.Compend.,
541. 1878. TJctetahs.— St .John, Sea of Mts., ii, 16,
1877. TTculta.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can.
for 1887, sec. ii, 74. TJcultai.— UMinard and Bar-
rett, Brit. Col., 3<>, 18(i2. Yookilta.— Tolmieand
Dawson, Vocabs. Brit. Col., 118b, 1884. Yukletai.—
Grant in Jour. Roy. (ieog. Soe., 293, 1857. Yu'-
kwilta.— Boas in Petermanns Mitt., pt.5,131,lP>i7.
Lelaka (JA'^acha). An ancestor of a
Nakomgilisala pens who also jrave his
name to the gens. — Boas in Peternianns
Mitt., pt. 5, 131, 18S7.
Lelek (LeIe^Ic). ASongish ])and resid-
ing at Codboro bav, s. end of Vancouver
id.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
17 1890.
Lelengtn. The Flutt> clan of the I^ngya
(Flute) phratrvof the Hopi.
Lelentu winwii.— Ji'ewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. K..
583, 1901 («'i»ljrM='elan'). Lenbaki.— Stephen in
8th Rep. B. A. K., 18, 1891.
Lelewag^ila (Ijt^lEwagila 'the heaven
makers': mythical name of the raven).
A gens of the Tsawatenok, a Kwakiutl
tribe.— Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1895, 831,
1897.
Lelewayon (Le-le-wa^-you, 'birds' cry*).
A subclan of the Delawares (q. v. ). — Mor-
gan, Anc. Soc, 172, 1877.
Lelikian. A former Nishinam village in
the valley of Bear r., n. Cal.
764
LELIOTU — LE9 NOIEE INDIANS
[b. a. e
Laylekeeftiu— Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 22, 1874.
le'-li-ld-an.— Powers in (V)nt. N. A. Ethnol., in,
316, 1877.
Leliotn. The Tiny Ant {sp. incog. ) clan
of the Ala (Horn) phratry of the Hopi.
Le-U-o-ttt wuB-wii.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii,
401 1894 ( wti n-wu=' clan * ) .
Lema. One of the more important of
the old villages of the Pomo; situated in
Knight's valley, about 4 m. n. w. of Hop-
land, Mendocino co., Cal. (s. a. b.)
La-ma.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 172,
1777. Lema.— S. A. Barrett, inf n, 1906.
Lemaltcha (Le-mal-tcha). A former
Lummi village on Waldron id., Wash.
(Gibbs, Clallam and Lummi, 39, 1863).
The name is the same as Lilmalche, q. v.
Lemitas. Mentioned by Villa-Sefior
(Theatro Am., pt. 2, 412, 1748) as a wild
tribe hostile to the people of New Mexico.
Possibly the local name of an Apache
band or of its chief.
Lenahnon. One of the tribes formerly
occupying "the country from Buena
Vista and Carises lakes and Kern r. to the
Sierra Nevada and Coast range," Cal.
(Barbour (1852) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d
Cong., spec, sess., 256, 1853). By treaty
of June 10, S851, these tribes reserved a
tract between Tejon pass and Kern r.,
and celled the remainder of their lands
to the United States. Kroeber suggests
that the name is perhaps intended for
Sanahuon, Spanish orthography of San-
akhwin, a Yokuts and perhaps other
Indian corruption of San Joaqiiin or a
similar Spanish geographical term.
Lenahuon.— Barlx)nr, op. eit. Senahuow.— Royce
in 18th Rep. B. A. E.. 782, 1899.
Lenape stone. A perforated tablet of
shale, of the form usually classed as gor-
gets, found by Bernard Hansel! while
plowing on his father's farm half a mile
E. of Doylestown, Bucks co., Pa. A large
fragment of the stone was found on the
surface of the ground in the spring of
1872; and a second, the smaller piece,
was picked up in 1881. The length is
nearly 4i in., and the width varies from-
li to IJ in The surface on both sides
has been smoothed, and on one side are
carved in outline the figure of an ele-
phant or mammoth, two rude human
forms, the sun, and a number of uniden-
tified objects. On the other are outline
figures of a turtle, fishes, a bird, a pipe,
etc. There are two round perforations in
the tablet, about a third of its length from
the ends. The specimen mav possibly
be genuine Indian workmanship, but the
carving is apparently modern and exe-
cute<l after the stone had been broken.
For further notice consult Mercer, The
Lenape Stone, or the Indian and the
Mammoth, 1885. See Gorgets, Perforated
Tablets. (c. t. )
Lengya. The Flute phratry of the Hopi,
consisting of the Flute (I^lengtu), Blue-
flute (Shakwalengya), Drab-flute (Masi-
lengya), and Mountain-sheep (Pangwa
clans, and probably others. They clain
to have come from a region in s. Arizoni
called Palatkwabi and from Little Col
orado r., and after their arrival in Tusa
van joined the Ala (Horn) phratry, form-
ing the Ala- Lengya group. — Fewkes ir
I9th Kep. B. A. K, 583, 587, 1901.
Lenya.— Fewkes, ibid.
Lengyanobi ( ' high place of the Flute
clans'). The legendary home of the
Lengya (Flute) clans of the Hopi, now £
large ruin on a mesa about 30 m. n. e. oi
Walpi, N. E. Ariz. The village is said tc
have been abandoned just before the ar-
rival of the Spaniards (1540), its inhabit-
ants becoming amalgamated with the
Hopi. The people of Lengyanobi at thai
time belongea to two consolidated phra-
tries, the Ala (Horn) and the Lengya
(Flute), of which the latter built the vil
lage. (j. w. F.)
Lentes. Said to have been a former
pueblo of the Tigua, but more likely a
village established for the beneflt of Geni-
zaros (q. V. ), on the w. bank of the Rio
Grande near Los Lunas, N. Mex. By
1850 the natives had become completely
*'Mexicanized.*'
Lentes. — Simpson in Rep. Sec. War, 1-13, 1850.
Lentu.— Calhoun in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in,
633, 1853. Leunis.— Schoolcraft, ibid., i, 519, 1851.
Leutis.— Ibid. Lot Lentes.— Lane (18.W), ibid., v,
689; 1855.
Lesamaiti. A former village of the
Awani about one-flfth of a mile from
Notomidula, in Yosemite valley, Mari-
posa co., Cal.
taytamite.— Powers in Overland Mo., x,333, 1874.
Le-Mun'-ai-ti.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in,
365,1877.
Leschi. A Nisqualli chief, prominent
in the war which involved all the tribes
of Washington and adjacent regions in
1855-58, and commonly known as the
Yakima war. While Kamaiakan (q. v.)
headed the Yakima and their confeder-
ates E. of the mountains, Leschi took
command w. of the Cascades, particular-
ly about Puget sd. His most notable
exploit was an attack on the new town
of Seattle, Jan. 29, 1856, at the head of
about 1,000 warriors of several tribes.
The assailants were driven off by means
of a naval battery upon a vessel in the
harbor. On the collapse of the outbreak
Leschi fled to the Yakima, who, having
already submitted, refused him shelter
except as a slave. A reward was offered
for his capture, and being thus outlawed,
he was at last treacherously seized by
two of his own men in Nov., 1856, and
delivered to the civil authorities, by
whom, after a long legal contest, he was
condemned and hanged, Feb. 19, 1867.
See Bancroft, Hist. Wash. , 1890. ( j. m. )
Les Noire Indians. Mentioned by Say
(Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., ii, Ixxxiv,
1823) as a people known to the Hidatsa,
MJLL. 30]
LETAIYO LILLOOET
765
who applied to them the name At-te-
ihu-pe-8ha-loh-pan-ga, which Matthews
states is probably an attempt to give the
Flidatsa word for Black-lodge people.
Letaiyo. The Gray-fox clan of the
ECokop (Firewood) phratry of the Hopi.
LetaiTO winwii.— Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. K.,
S84, 1900 (mAti7a = 'clan'). Le-tai-yo wiin-wiH.—
Pewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 408, 1894.
Leash ( Ijef-ush) . A former Modot^ ma-
tlement on the n. side of Tule (Rhett)
lake, 8. w. Oreg. — (latschet in Cont. N.
A. Ethnol., II, pt. I, xxxii, 1890.
Lewiftown. A village of Shawnee and
Seneca, taking its name from the Shaw-
nee chief Captain Lewis, formerly near the
site of the present Lewistown, Logan co.,
Ohio, on lands granted to them by treaty
of Sept. 29, 1817, but sold under the pro-
visions of the Lewistown treaty of July
20, 1831. See Howe, Hist. Coll. Ohio, ii,
102, 1896; Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E.,
686, 732, 1899. (j. m.)
Lejva. Located on various early majxs
apparently as a settlement of New Mex-
ico, but in reality designed to indic'ate a
point supposed to have l)een reac!heil by
Francisco Levva Bonilla on an unauthor-
ized expedition, about 1594-96, to the
Quivira region, by whose inhabitants he
and his party were killed. See Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 108, 1889; D\4nville,
map Am. Sept., 1746; Squier in Am. Re-
view, II, 520, 1848.
Lma:~6ii88efeld, Charte America, 1797 (niiH-
prtnt).
Lgalaigalil-laxLas (Ugaln^-ujid Id^nas).
A wrmer subdivision * of the Gitins of
Skid^te, Queen Charlotte ids. , Brit. Col. ,
a family of the Eagle clan of the Haida.
It has long been extinct. The name may
mean 'people of the town of Lgalai.'—
Swanton, Cont. Haida, 274, 1905.
Liam. A former Chumashan village in
Ventura CO., Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
July 24, 1863.
liajrwai. An unidentified tribe which
participated in the Yakima treaty of
1855, and was placed on Yakima res.,
Wash. It may have been a diWsion of
the Yakima. (l. f.)
Li-ay-was.— U. 8. Ind. Treat. (1865), n, 524,1903.
Siaywai.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 110, 1874.
Libantone. A former village, presuma-
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Liehtenan (Ger.: * pastures of light').
A village of Moravian Delawares on the
B. side of the Muskingum, 3 m. below
Coshocton, Coshocton co., Ohio, estal)-
lished in 1776. Some time afterward it
was abandoned by the Moravians on ac-
count of the hostilities of the Hurons and
other warlike tribes, and reoccupied, un-
der the name of Indaochaie, by hostile
Indians, until destroyed by the Americans
in 1781. See Missions, ' (j. m.)
Indaochaie.— Butterfleld.Washington-lrvineCorr.,
52. 1882. Liohtenau.— Loskit'l. Hist. Miss. rnit«»d
Breth.. pt. 3, 110. 1794: Heekewclder in Trans. Am.
Philos. Soc., n. s.. i v. 390, 1834.
LichtenfelB (Ger.: * rocks of light').
A Moravian mission stati<m in w. (m^en-
laiid. — Crantz, Hist. (Greenland, i, map,
1767.
Lick Town. A Shawnee (?) villajje, in
1776-82, on upp<»r Scioto r., Ohio, proba-
bly near Circleville. The true name was
probably Pi(|ua or Chillicothe. (.i. m.)
lick Town. — Hutchins. map in Smith. Bouquet's
Exi)ed..l7(i6. Salt Lick Town.— Smith, ibid., 67
(not Salt Lick Town on Mahoning cr.).
Lidlipa. A former Nishinam village in
the valley of Bear r., n. Cal.
Lidlepa.— Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 22. 1«74.
Lid'-H-pa.— Powers in Tout. X. A. Ethuol., Ill, 316,
1877.
Liebigstag. An Ahtena villa^^ on the
left bank of Copper r., Alaska, lat. 61°
57^, Ion. 145° W; named from its chief.
Liebigstag's village.— Allen, Rep. on Alaska, 12(),
1887.
Liesnoi (Russian: * woody '). A Kani-
agmiut village on W()o<l i<l.^ near Ko<liak,
Alaska.; pop. 157 in 1880, 120 in 1890.
Latnoi. — ETleventh Census, Ala.ska. 75, 1S93.
Lctnova.— Petroflf in 10th Census. Alaska, map,
1884. Tanignagmjut.— Holmberg, Kthno^. Skizz.,
map, 1855.
Liggig^. A village connected with ( 'on-
cho, or Loreto, 2 leajrues n. of that mission,
which was situated opj)osite the island of
Carmen, lat. 26°, Lower California (Picolo
in St<*H'klein, Neue Welt-liott, no. 72,
35, 1726). Not to be confounded with
Liguf, about 14 leagues farther s.
Lightning stick. Si»e Bnll-roarer.
Lignite. See Jet.
Likatnit. A di vision of the Olamen tke,
oi'cupying a part of Marin co., Cal. Their
la.st great chief was Marin ((j. v. ), acc^ord-
ing to Powers, and they were among the
Indians under San Rafael mission.
Lecatoit.— Bancroft. Nat. Raoes, i, 453, 1874. Li-
kat'-uUt.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 195,
1877.
Lilibeqne. A Chuma.«han village on one
of the Santa Barbara ids., Cal., probably
Santa Rosa, in 1542.
Lilibique.— Cabrillo, Narr. (1542), in Smith, Colee.
Doc. Fla., 186. 1867. LilUbiquc— Ta>'lor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 17, 1863.
LlUooet ('wild onion'). One of the 4
principal Salish tribes in the interior of
British Columbia, .situated on Fraser r.
around the mouths of Cayoosh cr. and
Bridge r., on Seton and Anderson lakes,
and southward from them to Harrison
lake. Pop. 978 in 1904. Bands: Anderson
Lake, Bndge River, Cayoosh Creek (2),
Douglas, Enias, Fountain, .Kanlax, Lil-
looet (2), Mission, Niciat, PemlK»rton
Meadows, and Schloss. It is sometimes
divided into the lx)wer Lillooet, including
the Douglas and Peml)erton Meadows
bands, and the Tapper Lilloo<»t, including
all the rest. Consult Teit, Lillooet In-
dians, in Mem. Am. Mas. Nat. Hist., iii,
pt. 5, 1906. (j. R. s.)
766
LILLOOET LINGUISTIC FAMILIES
[B. A.]
Ohin Kfttion.-<SchooIcrait, Ind. Tribes, v, 178, 1855.
LiUooet.— Can, Ind. Aff. Rep. 1889. 115. 1890.
lilowat— Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 1, 268, 1877.*
LoquUt Indians.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 299, 1862.
Sclaythamuk.— Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff., Victoria,
1872. 8ta'-tlum-ooh.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc.
Can., sec. ii, 5, 1891. Btetlum.— Survey map, Hydr.
Office, U. S. N., 1882. Btlat-Umuh.— Mackay quoted
by Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1891, sec.
II, 5. Stia'tUumH.— Boas in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 10. 1889 (own name). Stla'tliumQ.— Boas in
6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 80, 1890. Stia'UumQ.—
Boas as quoted by Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc.
Can. for 1891, sec. il, 5.
LiUooet A band and town of Uppei
Liliooeton Fraser r., where it is joined
by Cayoosh cr. The Canadian Keporte
on Indian Affairs give two divisions of the
LiUooet band, of which one numbered 57
and the other 6 in 1904.
miooet.— Can. Ind. Aff. Rep., pt. n, 72. 1902.
SEtL.-*Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist, ii, 172.
1900 (natlye name of the village of LiUooet).
Lilmalcho ( L^a/tlca) . One of the two
Cowichan tribes on Thetis id., off the s. b,
coast of Vancouver id. ; pop. 19 in 1904.
Given as a band of the Penelakut (q. v.)
by the Canadian Indian Office.
Lema'^toa.— Boas, MS., B. A. £., 1887. Lilmaltkn.—
Can. Ind. Aff. for 1901, pt. ii, 164. U-maehe.— Ibid.,
1897,362,1898. U-mal-che.— Ibid., 1898, 417. Lhnal-
ohes.— Ibid., 1883, 190.
Lilshiknom. A branch of the Yuki who
lived on the w. bank of Eel r., a short
distance below the junction of Middle fork
and South Eel r., n. Cal. (a. l. k.)
Lincoln Island. An island in Penobscot
r. , Me. , near Lincoln, 37 m. aboveOldtown,
occupied by about 30 Penobscot Indians.
Linoom.— So called by the whites. Madnfak.^
Gatschet, Penobecot MS., B. A. E., 1887 (Penob-
scot name).
Lingnistic families. The linguistic di-
versity of the Indians is perhaps themoflt
remarkable feature of American ethnolo-
gy. While certain general features, such,
for example, as incorporation, use of verb
and pronoun, employment of generic par-
ticles, use of nongrammaticai genders,
etc., usually occur, most of the languages
of the New World exhibit analogies jus-
tifying their classification, on psjchio
grounds at least, as a single family of
speech; nevertheless, the comparison of
tneir vocabularies leads to the recognition
of the existence of a large number of lin-
guistic families or stocks having lexically
no resemblance to or connection with each
other. Boas (Science, xxiii, 644, 1906^ is
of the opinion, however, that, considering
the enormous differences in the psycho-
logical bases of morphology in American
Indian languages, such psychic unity in
one family of speech can hardl3r be predi-
cated with confidence. Also, it may be
that the Paleo- Asiatic languages of Siberia
may perhaps belong with the American
tongues. This linguistic diversity was per-
ceived and commented on by some of the
early Spanish historians and other writers
on American subjects, such as Hervas,
Barton, and Adelung; but the ** founder
of systematic philology relating to the
North American Indians ** (in the woids
of Powell) was Albert Gallatin, whose
Synopsis of the Indian Tribes within the
United States East of the Rocky Moun-
tains and in the British and Russian Pos-
sessions in North America was published
in 1836 in the Transactions and Collections
of the American Antiquarian Society ( Ar-
chseologia Americana, ii), of Worcester,
Mass. The progress of research and of
linguistic cartography since Gallatin's
BULL. 30]
LINGUISTIC FAMILIES
767
time is skeU^hed in Powell's epoch-mark-
ing article, ** Indian linjniistic families"
(7th Rep. B. A. E., 1-142, 1891), with ac-
companying map, embodving the au-
thors own researches and those of the
experts of the Bureau. Taking vocabu-
lary and dictionary a*« the factors of dis-
crimination, Powell recognize<l, x. of the
Mexican l)oundary, the following 58
"distinct linguistic families" or stocks:
Adaizan (since determined to be a part
of the Caddoan), Algonouian, Athapas-
can, Attacapan, Beothukan, Caddoan,
Chimakuan, Chimarikan, Chimmesvan,
Chinookan, Chitimachan, Chumashan,
Coahuiltecan, Copehan, Costanoan, Eski-
mauan, Esselenian, IrcHjuoian, Kala])oo-
ian, Karankawan, Keresan, Kiowan, Kit-
unahan, Koluschan, Kulanapap, Kusan,
Lutuamian, Mariposan, McK^uelunman,
Muskhogean, Xatchesan, Palaihnihan
(since consolidated with Shastan), Piman,
Pujunan, Quoratean, Salinan, Salishan,
Sastean (Shastan), Shahaptian, Shosho-
nean, Siouan, Skittagetan, Takilman,
Tanoan, Timuijuanan, Tonikan, Tonka-
wan, Uchean, Waiilatpuan, Wakashan,
Washoan, Weitspekan, VVishoskan, Yako-
nan, Yanan, Yukian, Y''uman, Zufiian.
This is the working list for students of
American languages, and, with minor
variations, will remain the authoritative
document on the classification of Ameri-
can linguistic stocks. (See Kroel)er in
Am. Anthrop, vii, 570-98, 1905, where
modifiations are proposed.) A revised
edition of the map, containing the results
of the latest investigations, appears in
this Handbook.
A marked feature of the ilistribution
of Indian linguistic families x. of Mex-
ico is the presence or former exist-
ence in what are now the states of Cali-
fornia and Oregon of more than one-third
of the total number, while some other
stocks (Algonquian, Athapascan, Siouan,
Shoshonean, Eskimauan) have a very
wide distribution. The Pacific coast con-
trasts with the Atlantic by reason of the
multiplicityof its linguistic families as com-
pared wuth the few on the eastern littoral.
The distribution of the Eskimauan family
along the whole Arctic coast from New-
foundland to Bering sea, and l)eyond it
in a portion of Asia, is remarkable. The
Uchean and the extinct Beothuk of New-
foundland are really the only small fam-
ilies of the Atlantic' slope. The Catawba
and related tribes in the Carolinas prove
the earlier possession of that country by
the primitive Siouan, whose migrations
were generall^^ westward. The Tuscarora
and related tribes of Vii^inia and south-
ward show the wanderings of the Iro-
auois, as do the Navaho and Apache
[lose of the Athapascans.
In 1896 Mc(4ee (The Smithson. Inst.,
1846-98, 877, 1897) estimated the num-
ber of tri]>cs belonging to the various
linguistic families as follows: Algonquian
86, Athapascan 58, Attacapan 2, Beothu-
kan 1, Caddoan 9, Chimakuan 2, Chi-
marikan 2, Chimmesyan (Tsimshian) 8,
Chinookan 11, Chitimachan 1, Chuma-
shan 6, Coahuiltecan 22, Copehan 22,
Costanoan 5, Eskimauan 70, r^sselenian
1, Irocjuoian 18, Kalapooian 8, Karanka-
wan 1, Keresan 17, Kiowan 1, Kitunahan
4, Koluschan 12, Kulanapan 80, Kusan 4,
Lutuamian 4, Mariposan 24, Moquelum-
nan 85, Muskhogean 9, Nahuatlan ?, Na-
tchesan 2, Palaihnihan 8, Piman 7, Puju-
nan 26, (Quoratean 8, Salinan 2, Salishan
64, Sastean 1, Serian 8, Shahaptian 7,
Shoshonean 12, Siouan 68, Skitttagetan
(Haida) 17, Takilman 1, Tanoan 14,Timu-
<|uanan 60, Tonikan 8, Tonka wan 1,
Tchean 1, AVaiilatpuan 2, Wakashan
(Kwakiutl-Nootka) 87, Washoan 1, W^eit-
spekan 6, Wishoskan 8, Yakonan 4, Ya-
nan 1, Yukian 5, Yuman 9, Zuilian 1.
Of this large numl>er of th!)es, some are
of little importance, while others may be
local divisions and not tril)es in the proper
sense of the term. This is true, for exam-
ple, of two at least of the divisions of the
Kitunahan family, and of not a few of the
Algonquian "tribes." Some families, it
will be seen, consist of but a single tribe:
Beothukan, Chitimachan, Esselenian,
Karankawan, Kiowan, Takilman, Tonka-
wan, Uchean, Washoan, Yanan, Zufiian;
but of these a few ( such as Zufiian and Kio-
wan) are very important. The amount
of linguistic variation serving as an index
of tribal division varies considerably, and
in many cases, especially with the older
writers, the- delimitations are very imper-
fect. Researches now in progress will
<loubtless elucidate some of these points.
Besides the classification noted above,
l)a.**ed on vocabulary, certain othera are
possible which take into consideration
grammatical ])eculiarities, etc., common
to several linguistic families. Thus,
groups may be distinguished within the
56 families of speech, embracing two or
more of tht*m which seem to \ye gram-
matically or syntactically related, or m
lx)th these respects, while in nowise re-
sembling each other in lexical content.
From considerations of this sort Boas finds
resemblances between several of the n. w.
Pacific coast families. Grammatically,
the Koluschan (Tlingit) and Skittagetan
( Haida) and the Athapascan seem to be
distantly related, and some lexical coin-
cidences have been noted. The occurrence
ot pronominal gender in the Salishan and
Chimakuan stocks is thought by Boas to
be of great importance as suggesting rela-
tionship between these two families. The
768
LINOKLUSHA LIPAN
[B. A.B.
Wakashan (Kwakiutl-Nootka), Salishan,
and Chimakuan stocks all possess suffix-
nouns and inflected adverbs, similarities
pointing, perhaps, to a common source
(Mem. Internat. Cong. A nthrop., 339-346,
1894). The languages of California have
recently been carefully studied by Dixon
and Kroeber ( Am. Anthrop., v, 1-26, 1903;
VII, 213-17, 1905; viii, no. 4, 1906), and the
former has determined, as Gatschet had
suspected, that the Sastean and Palaihni-
han (Achomawi) constitute one stock, to
which the Bureau of American Ethnology
applies the name Shastan. A similar coal-
escence of the Costanoan and Moquelum-
nan stocks is also suggested . Taking other
than lexical elements into consideration,
the languages of California (exclusive of
the Yuman and Yanan) may be arranged
in three groups: Southwentern, or Cnu-
mash type; northwestern, or Yurok type;
central, or Maidu type — the last being oy
far the most numerous. This pystemati-
zation for California rents on pronominal
incorporation, syntactical cases, etc.
Morphological peculiarities, possessed in
common, accordmg to some authorities,
indicate a relationship between Piman,
Nahuatlan (Mexican), and Shoshonean.
The Kitunahan of n. Idaho and s. e.
British Columbia has some structural
characteristics resembling those of the
Shoshonean, particularly the method of
object-noun incorporation, (iatschet, in
1891 (Karank. Inds., 1891), suggested the
probability of some relationship between
the Karankawan, Pakawa (Coahuilte-
can), and Tonka wan. It is nearly certain
also, as supposed by Brinton, that Natchez
is a Muskhoeean dialect. The now ex-
tinct Beothukan of Newfoundland has
been suspected of having been a mixed and
much distorted dialect of one or other of
the great linguistic families of the region
adjacent. Brinton ( Amer. Race, 68, 1891 )
was of opinion that "the general mor-
phology seems somewhat more akin to
Eskimo than to Algonkin examples.''
The amount of material extant in the
languages of the various stocks, as well
as the literature about them, is in nowise
uniform. Some, like the Beothukan,
Esselenian, and Karankawan, are utterly
extinct, and but small vocabularies of
them have been preserved. Of others,
who still survive in limited or de-
creasing numbers, like the Chimakuan,
Chimarikan, Chitimachan, Chumashan,
Coahuiltecan, Costanoan, Kalapooian,
Mariposan, Moquelumnan, Natchesan,
Pujunan, Salinan, Shastan, Takilman,
Washoan, Weitspekan, Yakonan, and
Yukian, the vo(»abularies and texts col-
lected are not very extensive or conclu-
sive. The Algonquian, Athapascan, Es-
kimauan, Iroquoian, Muskhogean, Salish-
an, Skittagetan, Koluschan, and Siouan
families are represented by many gram-
mars, dictionaries, and native texts, both
published and in manuscript. The ex-
tent and value of these materials may
be seen from the bibliographies of the
late J. C. Pilling, of the Algonquian,
Athapascan, Chinookan, Eskimauan, Iro-
quoian, Muskhogean, Salishan, Siouan,
and Wakashan stocks, published as bul-
letins by the Bureau of American Eth-
nology, (a. f. c.)
Linoklusha ( lAn'Ok-W'Shay * crayfish ') .
A clan of the Kushapokla phratry of the
Choctaw.— Morgan, Anc. Soc, 162, 1877.
Lintchanre (*nat sides of dogs'). A
clan or division of the Thlingchadinne
living N. and e. of the n. arm of Great
Slave lake, in Mackenzie Ter., Canada.
KUn-tohanpe.— Petitot, Autour du lac des Esclavefi,
363,1891. Klin-tohonp^.— Ibid., 303. Lin-tohanre.—
Petitot in Bui. Soc. de G6og. Paris, chart, 1875.
•Lin-tchanpi.— Petitot, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1866.
L'in-tohanpe.— Petitot, Diet. Ddn^Dindji4, zx,
1876. Plato-odt^-de-^en du fort Baa. —Ibid.
Lin^a. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Barbara, Cal.
Lintia.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863.
Luijta.— Bancroft. Nat. Races, i, 469, 1874 (mis-
quoted from Taylor).
Lions Creek. The local name for a for-
mer band of Salirth under Fraser super-
intendency, Brit. Col.
Leon's Creek.— Can. Ind. AfT. for 1878, 78. Lion's
Creek.— Ibid., 1879. i:«.
Lipajenne. A subdivision of the Lipan.
LlM^en-ne.— Orozeo y Berra. Geog., 59, 1864. Lip-
anien-ne.— Escudero, Not. Estad. de Chihuahua,
212,1834.
Lipan (adapted from Ipa-rCde, appar-
ently a personal name; n*cte=* people').
An Apache tribe, designating themselves
Nilizhan ('ours,' *our kind*), which at
various periods of the 18th and 19th cen-
turies roamed from the lower Rio Grande
in New Mexico and Mexico eastward
through Texas to the Gulf coast, gaining
a livelihood by depredations against other
tribes and especially against the white
settlements of Texas and Mexico. The
name has probably been employed to
include other Apache groups of the south-
em plains, such as the Mescaleros and
the Kiowa Apache. The Franciscan mis-
sion of San Sabd (q. v.) was established
among the Lipan in Texas in 1757, but it
was soon destroyed by their enemies, the
Comanche and Wichita. In 1761-62 the
missions of San Lorenzo and Candelaria
were also founded, but these meta like fate
in 1 767. In 1805 the Lipan were reported
to be divided into 3 bands, numbering
300, 350, and 100 men*, respectively; this
apparently gave rise to their subdivision
by Orozco y Berra in 1864 into the Lipa-
jenne, Lipanes de Arriba, and Lipanes
de Abajo. In 1839, under chief Castro,
they sided with the Texans against the
Comanche (Schoolcraft, Thirty Years,
642, 1851 ) ; they were always friends with
their congeners, the Mescaleros, and with
BULL. .10 J
LIPAXKS I)K ABAJO LITTLK ('ROW
769
the Tonkawa after 1855, but were ene-
mies of the JicarillaH and the Ute. Be-
tween 1845 and 1856 they suffered se-
verely in the Texan wars, the desijjjn of
which was the externiination of the
Imiians within the Texas l)order. Most
of them were driven into Coahuila,
Mexico, when* they resided in the Santa
Rosa nits, with Kickapoo and other
refugee Indians from the United States,
until the 19 survivors were taken to n. w.
Chihuahua, in Oct., 1908, whence they
were l)rouj?ht to the United States about
the beginninjj of 1905 and ])laced on the
Mescaiero res., N. Mex., where they now
(1905) nund)er alwmt 25 and are making
more rapid progress toward civiHzation
than their Indian neighbors. In addition
there are one or two Lipan numl)ered
with the 54 Tonkawa under the Ponca,
Pawiu»e, and Oto agency, Oakland res.,
Okla., an<l a few with the Kiowa Apache
in tlie same territory, making the total
population about 35. The Lipan resem-
ble the other Apache in all important
chara(!teristics. They were often known
under the designation Uancy, Chanze,
etc., the French form of the Caddo col-
lective name (KfVntin) for the eastern
Apache tril)e8. (f. w. n.)
Apaohei Lipanes.— MS., 1791-92. in Tex. State ar-
chives. A-tagui.— M(>(>ney, field nf>tes, B. A. E.,
1897 ('timber Apaehe': Kiowa name, used also
for Mescaleros). Oanoeret.— Escndero, Not. Nu-
evo M<^x., 84, 1849. Cancers.— lA»\vis. Trav., 195,
1809. Canoe*.— Sibley (1805), Hist. Sketches, 74.
1806 (Caddo name: ' deceivers '). Cancey.— Fr.
Doc. of 1719 quoted b\' Bandelier in Arch. Inst.
Papers, ni. 178, 1«90. Cfanohy.— Bienville (1700) in
Man?ry, Deo., iv. 442, 18S0. Canoy.— La Harpe
(1719), ibid., vi, 277, 285. 1886. Canecit.— Jeflferys,
Am. Atlas, map 8, 177(). Caneeoi. — Anville, map
N. Am., 1752. Canees.— Sch(H)lcraft, Ind. Tribes,
V, 571, 1855. Canessy.— 1 berville ( 1700) in Margry,
D6c.., IV, 374, 1H80. Cannecis.— Baudry dea Lo-
zidres, Voy. La., 242, 1802. Canneey.— La Harpe
(1719) in »fargry, D<k»., vi, 262, 1880. Cannenais.—
French, Hist. Coll. I^., n. 11, 1875. Canne«ti.—
Carte des Poss. Angloisi's, 1777. Cantey.— Joutel
(1687) in Margry, Dt^c. in, 409, 1878. Chanwe.—
Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6c., iii. 288. 1878.
Chaniet.— Joutel (1687) in French, Hist. Coll. La..
I. 138, W6. Concee.— Sibley, Hist. Sketches, 110.
1806. Oipanes.— Hamilton, Mex. Han<lbk., 48,
1883. Hu-ta'-ci.— ten Kate, Synonymic, 9. 1884
('forest Apache': Comanche name), auyul.—
Gatschet, Tonkawe MS.. B. A. E. (Tonkawa
name). Ipa-nde.— Arricivita (1792) quoted by
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 181, 1890.
Ipandi.— Ibid., 180. K*4n'-dzi.— ten Kate. Syno-
nymic, 10. 1884 (Ca<ldo name). Kantti'.— Gat-
schet, Caddo and Yutassi MS., B. A. E., 66.
Kareses.- McKennev and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in,
79, 1868 (probably identical). Lanecy.— Walche,
Charte von Am., 1805 (misprint). Lapan.—
Niles' Reeistcr, lxxi, 119, 1816. Lapanas.— Bol-
laert in Jour. Ethnol. Soc. Ix)nd.. ii, 276, 1860.
Lapane.— Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Lapanne.—
Ibid., viii. Lee PanU.— Pike, Trav., 337, 1811.
Lee Pawnees.— Pike. Exped., app., pt. 3, 29, 1810.
Lepan.— Sen. Ex. Conf. Doc. 13, 29th Cong., 2d
Bess., 1, 1846. Le Panie.— Pike, £xpe<l., app.,
5>t. 3, 9, 1810. Lipaines.— Alegre. Hist. Comp.
68US, I, 336. 1841. Linane.— MS. in Tex. State
arch., no. 155, 1792. £ipanes Llanerot.— Doc. of
1828 in Bol. Stw. Geog. Mex., 264, 1870. Lipanis.—
Drake, Bk. Inds., ix, 1848. Lipanos.— £.scudero.
Not. Estad. de Chihuahua. 244. 1H.S4. Lipau.— Ind.
Aff. Rep., 176,1875 (misprint). Lipaw.— Hoffman
in Bui. Soc. d'Anthrop. de Paris, 3d s., vi, 206,
1883 (misprint). Lippans.— Butler and Lewis
(1846) in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th Cong., 2d seas.. 4, 1847
Ha'-izhi'n.— M(Kmey, field notes, B. A. E., 1897
(own name: 'ours', 'our kind' t- rfjwa. 'people :
cf. Kiowa Apache). Hav6ne.— Gats(»het, Coman-
che MS., B. A. E., 1884 (Comanche name) Kip£n.—
Ibid, (('omanche pron. of Lipan ) Ocanes.— uhde,
Lander, 121, 18<)1 (probably identical) . Pawnee.—
Schermerhom (1812) in Mass. Hist. Coll., 2d 8.,ii. '2%
1814 (mistake). Seepans.— Lane (1851) In School-
craft. Ind. Tribes, v. 689, 1856. Bhilni.- Mooney.
field notes, B. A. E., 1897 ('summer people* (?):
former Mescaiero name). Siapanes.- Uhde, Lan-
der, 121, 1861. Binapans.- Iberville (1699) in Mar.
gry. IX^c. IV. 316, 1880. Sipan.— Latham in Trans
Philol. Soc. Loud., 102, 1856. Sypanet.— Robin Voy.
Loulsiane, III, 15, 1807. Tu-tsan-nde.— Mooney,
field notes, B. A. E., 1897 ('great water people':
Mescaiero name), ttxul— <^»at.«»chet, Tonkawe
MS.. B. A. E. (Tonkawa name for a spiral shell;
applied to the Lipan on account of their coiled
hair) . Yabipais Lipan.— Garc<^s (1776), Diary. 404.
1900. Yavipai-Lipanes.— Garc<>s (1776) cited by
Bandelier in Arcn. Inst. Papers, iii. 114, 1890.
Lipanes de Abigo (Span.: Mower Li-
pans*)- A former branch of the Lipan.
tiipanes de Abojo. — On)Zco v Berra. (ieog., 59. 1864.
Lipanes del Bur.— Doc. of 1828 in Bol. Soc. Geog.
Mex., 504, 1869.
Lipanes de Arriba (Span.: 'up{)er Li-
Eans'). A former branch of the Lipan.
ipanee de Arriba.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59. 1864.
Lipanes del Horte.— Doc. of 1828 in Bol. Soc. Geog.
Mex., 504, 1869.
Lipillanes. Mentioned an a division of
the Llaneros. See (rohlkahin, (iuhlkainde^
Kuahari.
Lijpallanes.-EMcudero. Not. de Chihuahua, 226.
1834. Lipillanes.— <)n)Zco y Berra. Geog.. 59. 1864.
Lipiyanes.— Escudero, Not. de Sonora v Sinaloa,
68,1849.
Lipook. \ former Chumashan village
near PuriHima mission, Santa Bar})ara
CO., (^al. — Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, May 4,
18(50.
Lisahnato. A former ChumaHhan vil-
lage near l*uri8ima mij^sion, Santa Bar-
bara CO., Cal. — Tavlor in Cal. Fanner,
Oct. 18, 18«1.
Lisichi. A fonner Chumashan village
in Ventura co., Cal. — Tavlor in (-al.
Farmer, July 24, 1868.
Lisnchn. A former Chumanhan village
near Santa Barbara Cal. (Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863). Perhaps iden-
tical with the preceding.
Lithenca. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with San Juan
Bautista minsion, Cal. — Tavlor in Cal.
Farmer, Nov. 25, 1860.
Littefntchi. A former Up^wr Creek
town at the head of Canoe cr., in St Clair
CO., Ala. It was burned bv Col. Dver,
Oct. 29, 1813.
Littafatchee.— Rovce in 18th Kcp. B. A. E., Ala.
map, 1899. Littafatchee.— Flint, Ind. Wars, 17.'>,
1833. Littefutchee.— Pickett, Hist. Ala., ii, 294,
1851. OUtifar.— Juan de la Vandera (1679) in
Smith, Ctolec. Doc. Fla.. 1.18.1857.
Little Abraham. See Al/raham.
Little Carpenter. See AttakuUacuUu.
Little Crow ( Chetafl vakaii mafliy * the
sacre<l pigeon-hawk which comes walk-
ing'). A ("hief of the Kaposia division
of the Mdewakanton Sioux, which, under
his father Little Crow, as under his grand-
Bull. 30—05-
-49
770
LITTLE FORKS — LITTtK RAVEN
[ B. A, E.
father Little Thunder, had its headquar-
ters at Kaposia (Kapozha), a village on
the w. bank of the Mississippi, 10 or 12 m.
below the mouth of Minnesota r. In
184H, while intoxicated, he was shot and
wounded by his brother; this caused him
to try to discourage drinking among his
followers, and probably induced him the
same year to ask of the Indian agent at
Ft Snelling a missionary to reside at his
village, as a result of which Rev. Thomas
S. Williamson was sent. Although Little
Crow was a signer (under the name of
Ta-oya-te-duta, *His {)eople are red') of
the treaty of Mendota, Minn., Aug. 5,
1851, by which the Dakota ceded most of
their Minnesota lands to the United
States, he used the treaty as a means of
creating dissatisfaction and ultimately in
bringing on the disastrous outbreak of
1862. In this outbreak, during which
more than a thousand settlers were killed.
Little Grow was the recognized leader.
Subsequent to the cession of 1851 several
bands, including the Kaposia, were re-
moved to a large rejeervation on the upper
Minnesota, where they dwelt |>eacefully,
professing genuine friendship for the
white settlers, until they rose suddenly
on Aug. 18, 1862, and spreading them-
selves along the frontier for more than
200 m., killed white men, women, and
children without mercy. Little Crow led
the fierce though unsuccessful attack on
Ft Ridgely, Minn., Aug. 20-22, 1862, in
LITTLE CROW THE ELDER. (mcKennev and HAcl)
which he was slightly wounded. After
the defeat of the hostiles at Wood lake,
Sept. 23, 1862, by Gen. Sibley, Little Crow
with 200 or 300 followers fled to the pro-
tection of his kindred on the plains far-
t her vv . He wa,^ k i 1 lei 1 by a wettl er 1 1 a 1 1 1 1 ^i i
Ijamjifson, July H, iSliiS, at a place N, nf
li u t<; h i 1 i?i<:i r i , i I c ■ 1 ^ei xl t;o. , M i n n * He was
probably iitntrl)^ HO years of agii at the
tiiDe o£ his deatli. Little Crtm^ had had
LITTLE CROW THE VOWNflEfl
(i wives and 22 diiklren. Consult Minn,
Hipt,Soc. ColL, III, ISSOj jv. 1^7<i; Bryant
imd Mun'h, llijjtory of the tireat MttWacrp
hy the Sioux Indmns m 1862; Indiim Af-
(ilint Hei^irt for imA] Will, Hist Minn.,
1858. ;t\TO
Little Forks . A L' I li p pe w a res . iVi n i j erl y
on Tittilmwassei* r., m l^wer Mirliijjan,
sold iji is:-!?.
Little Munse^ Town. A former Mun!<iee
villaitiea k^w milerf k. of ArifK rnm, Madi-
son CO., Jnd.^ oil land ^nld in 1S18 i llovre
in Ij^t Hi'p. R. A. i: ap, 1881 ). It inay
hi* identical with Kikthe*?wenuid.
Little Osage Village. A ffirmer Oaage
village un ( >^a^e res.^ Ukla,, on the w.
liank of Neuf^hu r.— .^kCuy ( 18.'i7) in Sen,
Doe. 120, 25th Cong,, 2il Bess,, map, 952,
ih:?8.
Little Kaven i //r/wf, • Voiiii^ Trow*),
An Araf>aho eliieL He was tirst signfT,
for theSontherri Araimho, o£ the ireatv
of Fort Wi^^ Colo., Feb. 18, 1&6L At a
lat*T period he took part with the allied
Arapaho and Cheyenne in the war along
the Katisaa Ijord'er, but Joined in ihe
treaty of Medicine L<xlge, Kans., m 1867,
hy which these tribes agreed to go on a
re,^4*rvation, after which treaty all his
effort wiMi consistently directeu t<fwar<l
keeping his peo|»Ie at peace uith the
Uovernment and leatling them to eivili-
BULL. 30]
LITTLE ROOK BAND LIWAITO
771
zation. Through his influence the body
of the Arapaho remained at peace with
the whites when theirallies, the Cheyenne
and Kiowa, went on the warpath in
1874-75. Little Raven died at Canton-
ment, Okla., in the winter of 1889, after
having maintained for 20 years a reputa-
tion as the leader of the progressive ele-
ment. He was succeeded bv Nawat,
'Left-hand \ ' (j. m.)
Little Book Band. Mentioned by Parker
fMinn. Handbk., 141, 1857) as a Sisseton
ai vision. Not identified.
Little Book Village. A Potawatomi vil-
lage in N. E. Illinois in 1832 (Camp Tip-
pecanoe treaty (1832) in U. S. Ind. Treat.,
698, 1873); situated on the n. bank of
Kankakee r., about the boundary of
Kankakee and Will cos.
Little Thunder. A Brul^ Sioux chief
during the middle of the 19th century.
He was present at the Grattan massacre
near Ft Laramie in 1854, and assumed
command when chief Singing Bear was
killed; he also took part in the battle of
Ash Hollow, Nebr., with Gen. Harney, in
1855, and continued chief until his death
some years later. Physically Little Thun-
der was a giant, fully six feet six inches
tall and large in proportion, and is spoken
of as of superior intelli^nce.
Little Turtle (Michikinihca). A chief
of the Miami trioe, bom at his village on
Eel r., Ind., in 1752. His father was
a Miami chief and his mother a Mahican;
hence, according to the Indian rule, he
was a Mahican and received no advan-
tage from his father's rank— tliat is, he
was not chief by descent. However, his
talents having attracted the notice of his
countrymen, he was made chief of the
Miami while a comparatively young man.
Little Turtle was the principal leader of
the Indian forces that defeated Gen.
Harmaron Miami r. in Oct. 1790, and Gen.
St Clair, at St. Marys, Nov. 4, 1791, and
he and Bluejacket were among the fore-
most leaders of the Indians in their con-
flict with Gen. Wayne's army in 1795, al-
though he had urged the Indians to make
peace with this * * chief who never sleeps. ' '
After their defeat by the whites he jomed
in the treaty at Greenville, Ohio, Aue. 3,
1795, remarking, as he signed it, *'! am
the last to sign it, and I will be the last to
break iV* Faithful to this promise he
remamed passive and counseled peace on
the part of his people until his death at
Ft Wayne, July 14, 1812. Early in 1797,
accompanied by Capt. Wells, his brother-
in-law, he visited President Washington
at Philadelphia, where he met Count Vol-
ney and Gen. Kosciusko, the latter pre-
senting him with his own pair of elegantlv
mounted pistols. Although Tecumseh
endeavored to draw him away from his
peaceful relations with the whites, his
efforts were in vain. Llitte Turtle's In-
dian name as signed to different treaties
varies as follows: Greenville, Aug. 3, 1795,
Meshekunnoghquoh; Ft Wayne, June 7,
1803, Meseekunnoghcjuoh; Vincennes,
Aug. 21, 1805, Mashekakahquoh; Ft
Wayne, Sept. 30, 1809, Meshekenoghqua.
Consult Drake, Inds. N. Am., 1880; Brice,
Hist. Fort Wayne, 1868; Appleton's.
Cyclop. Am. Biog., in, 1894. (c. t.)
Little Turtle's Village. A former Miami
village on Eel r., Ind., about 20 m. n. w.
of Ft Wayne; named afteV the celebrated
chief. Little Turtle, who was bom there
in 1752 and made it his home. It was
in existence as late an 1812, the vear of
Little Turtle's death.
UTTLE TURTLE. (FROM A PAiNTiNG BY STUART IN 1797, 8INCC
OCSTROYEo)
Litaya. A name given by Ni black to a
Tlingit division living about Lituya bay,
s. E. Alaska. They are properly a part
of the Huna, q. v.
Lituya. — Niblack, Coast Ind. of Alaska, chart i,
1889. Ltuiskoe.— Veniaminoff, Zapiski, il. pt. in,
' . op.), dhlttya.— Ho'
berg. Ethnog. Skizz., map, 1855.
29, 1840 (a town with 200 pop.), dhltt^a.— Holm-
Livangebra. A former rancheria, pre-
sumably Costanoan, connected with Do-
lores mission, San Francisco, Cal.
Livangebra.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. IS,
1861. LivangeWa. — Ibid, (mentioned as distinct,
though seemingly identical). Luianegloa.— Ibid,
(also mentioned as distinct).
Liwaito ( Wintun : = Uwai, ' waving * ) .
A former village of the Patwin subfamily
of the Wintun, on the site of the present
town of Winters, Yolo co., Cal. The
Wintun applied the name also to Putah
cr. (s. A. B.)
Lcwytos.— Powers in Overland Mo., xni, 542,
1874. Liguaytoy.— Bancroft, Hist. Cal., IV, 71, 1886.
772
LIYAM LOGAN
[B. A, ■.
Li-wai'-to.— Powers in Coiit. N. A. Ethiiol., in, 218,
1877.
Iiiyam (Li^-ydm). A former Chuma-
shan village on Santa Cruz id., Cal. —
Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vfx«b., B.
A. E., 1884.
Llagat (Span.: * wounds'). A former
grou[)of Coeopa rancherias on the w. side
of the Rio CJolorado, just below tidewater,
about lat. 32°, in n. e. lx)wer California.
Visited and so named by Fray Francisco
Garc^s, Sept. 17, 1771, which is given as
the day of the wounds or sores of St Fran-
cis Assisi.— Carets (1775), Diarv, 188,
1900.
Llaneros ( Span. : ' plainsmen ' ) . A term
indefinitelv applied to the former wild
tribes of the Staked plains of w. Texas
and E. New Mexico, including the Kwa-
hari Comanche (q. v.) and parts of the
Jicarillas and the Mescaleros. See Gohl-
kahiuy Guhlkainde.
Llano. A Papago village in k. Arizona;
pop. 70 in 1858.
Del Llano.— Bailey in Iml. Aff. Rep.. 20«, 1858.
Loehchiocha. A former Seminole town
60 m. E. of Apalachicola, and near Ok-
loknee, Fla. ; Okoskaamathla was chief in
1823.— H.R. Ex. Doc. 74 (1823), 19th
Cong., 1st sess., 26, 1826.
Locobo. A Costanoan village situated in
1819 within 10 m. of Santa Cruz mission,
Cal.— Taylor in (^al. Farmer, Apr. 5, 1860.
Locust Necktown. A village in Mary-
land, occupied in 1792 by that band of the
Nanticoke known as Wiwash, q. v.
Looust Neok.— Mt Johnwn coiif. (H.^f)) in X. Y.
Doc. Col. HlHt., VI, 983, 1865. Locust Hecktown.—
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. 8ik'., h, 63, 1836.
Lodges. See Earth lodges Grass locU/e,
Habitaiioiis.
Lodges withont horses. A former Crow
band.— Culbertson in Smithson. Rep.
1850, 144, 1851.
Lofka. A former Kaivuhkhotana set-
tlement on the w. bank of Yukon r.,
Alaska. The place probably consisted of
only a single hut occupied by an Indian
named Lofka, at which the earliest
American travelers on the Yukon used to
spend the night
Lofka's barrabora.— Dall, Alaska. 211, 1870.
Logan. A synonym of pokelokeii^ in
use in Maine, and probably a corruption
of that word. ' (a. p. c\ )
Logan, John (?) (native name Tah-gah-
jtUe^ lit. * his eyelashes stick out or above,'
as if looking through or over something,
and so could well mean * spying.' — Hew-
itt). A noted Indian chief, bom at
Shamokin, Pa., about 1725. His father,
called by the English Shikellamy and by
the Moravians Shikellemus, according to
Crantz (Hist, of the Brethren, 269, 1780),
was a white man, taken prisoner in Can-
ada and reared among the Indians, and
was later made chief of all or a part of
the Indians residing at Shamokin. He is
usually spoken of as a Cayuga chief, while
others call him a Mingo, the common
term in the colonial period for those
Iroquois living beyond their proper
boundaries. Bartram savs that he was
a Frenchman bom in Montreal, but as
a prisoner was adopted by the Oneida.
The same authority further states that
his son (presmnably Tah-gah-iute)took
the name Logan from his friend James
Logan, who was secretarv and for a
time acting governor of Pennsylvania:
He lived a numlx?r of years near Keeds-
ville. Pa., supporting himself and family
by hunting and the sale of dressed skins.
lAter, about 1770, he removed to the Ohio
and was living at the mouth of Beaver
cr. when visited by Heckewelder in
1772; and in 1774, about the time of the
Dunmore war, he resided at Old Chilli-
cethe, now Westfall, on the w. bank of
Sciotar., Pickaway CO., Ohio. In 1774 a
number of Indians, including some of
Logan's relatives, were brutally massacred
at the mouth of Y'ellow cr. by settlers on
the Ohio, in retaliation, it was claimed,
for the murder of white emigrants, and
for a time Michael Cresap was sup-
posed to l>e the leader in this massacre.
There has been nmch controversy as to
the facts in this case. A careful study of
the evidence given by Jefferson in the
appendix to his Notes (»n Virginia, by J.
J. Jacob in his Biographical Sketch of
the Life of Michael Cresap, and by Brantz
Mayer in his Tah-gah-jute, leads to the
conclusion that the massacre of the In-
dians was by Greathouse and a party of
white settlers, and that Cresap was not
present; that Logan's sister, and possibly
some other relative, were killed; that his
wife was not murdered, and that he had
no children. It seems evident, however,
that Logan was brought in some way to
l)elieve that Cresap led the attack. For
several months Logan made war on the
border settlements, perpetrating fearful
liarbarities upon men, women, and chil-
dren. 1 li the celebrated speech attributed
to him he boasts of these murders. This
supposed si)eech was probably only a
memorandum written down from his
statement and afterward read before the
treaty meeting at Chillicothe, at which
Logan was not present. His intemperate
habits, l)egun al)out the time of his removal
to the Ohio, grew upon him, and after the
return of peace compelled him to forbear
the use of the tomahawk he became an
abandoned sot. On his return from a
trip to Detroit in 1780 he was killed by
his nephew, apparently in a quarrel.
His wife, who was a Shawnee woman, sur-
vived him, but no children resulted from
their union. A monument to Logan
stands in Fort Hill cemeterv. Auburn,
N. Y. (c. T.)
BULL. 30]
LOOSTOWN LONE WOLF
773
Consult DtKldridgt*, SettleniiMit aii<l In-
dian Wars, 1821; Howe, Hist. (\)11. Ohio,
II, 402, \Sm\ Jacol), Sketch of Cresap,
1866; Jefferson, NoUns on Va., 1S02, 1H()4;
Ken^heval, Hint, of the Valley of Va.,
1833; London, Narrativen, ii, 1811; May-
er, Tah-jijah-jute or I^ogan, 18(>7; Steven-
son in W. Va. Hint. Ma>r., iii, 144, 19():^.
Legstown. An important village for-
merly on the right bank of Ohio r., al)ont
14 m. below Pittsburg, in Allegheny oo..
Pa. It was originally sett letl by Shawnee
and Dela wares i)rior to 1748, and in the
following year was rei)orted by Celoron
to contain 40 cabins occui)ie<! by Iroquois,
Shawnee, **Louj)s'* (Delaware, Munst^e,
and Mahican), as well as Iroquois from
Sault St Louis and I^ke of Two Moun-
tains, with some Nipissing, Abnaki, and
Ottawa. Father Bonnecamps, of the
same expe<iition, estimated the number
of cabins at 80, and savs ".we called it
Chiningu^, from its vicinitv to a river of
that name" (Mag. Am. Hist., ii, 142,
1878) ; but it should not be oonfoundtMl
witli the Shenango some distance n., on
Beaver cr. Croghan in 1765 (Thwaites,
Early West. Trav., i, 127, HKM) speaks of
Lo^stown as an old settlement of the
Shawnee. It was abandoned about 1 750
and reoct!Uj)ieil by a mixed i)oj)ulation of
Mingo (chiefly Seneca), Mahican, Otta-
wa, and others in the Knglish interest.
About this time a new village was built
with the aid of the French on a hill over-
looking the old site. Ix)gstown was an
iinportent trading rendezvous, one of
Croghan's trading houses Ix'ing estab-
lished there; it was also the home of
Half-King (SiTunivatha or Monakatua-
tha) in 175I^'>4(altliough it is state<l that
his dwelling was situate<i a few miles
away), and was a customary stopping
place of colonial officers and emissa-
ries, as Weiser, Gist, Croghan, (X'loron,
and Washington, the latter remaining
here five da^-s while on his way to Ve-
nango and Le Boeuf in 1753, and again
making it a resting place while on his
way to Kanawha r. m 1770. Logstown
was also the scene of the treaty between
the Virginia commissioners and the In-
dians of this section in 1752. According
to the author of Western Navigation ( 76,
1814^, and Cuming (Western Tour, 80,
1810), there was also a settlement known
as Lc^town on the opposite side of the
Ohio. It was abandoned by the Indians
in 1758, immediately after the capture of
Ft Du Quesne. In addition to the au-
thorities lated, see Darlington, Christo-
pher Gist's Journals, 1893; Pa. Col. Rec.,
V, 348et seq., 1851. (c t.)
Ohiniiifa^—C^loron (1749) in Mag. Am. Hist., ii,
148, 1^78. OhiBBign^.— Thwaites, £arly West.
Trav., 1, 24, note, 1904. LookstowiL—Narr. of Ma-
rie Le Roy and Barbara Leininsrer (1759) transl. in
Pa. Mag. Hist, and Biog., xxix.no. 116,412. 190f>.
Lofgt Town.— Din Aiiddie Papers (1751), i. 0. 188:^.
Loff's-Town.— Hamilton (1749) in N Y. Do<*.Cx)l.
Hist.. VI, .'V31. 1855. Logp-town.— Bouquet (1764).
KxiH.Mi.. 45, 1868. Logs Town.— ('n)ghan (1748) in
N. V. Doe. Col. Hist., vii. 2«7.1856. Log's Town.-
French officer ( 1749^, ibid., iv, 533, 1855.
go. — Thwaites, op. eit.
Lehastahni {Lo-hdn-UVi'-m). A former
C'humashan village in Ventura co., Cal.
— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab.,
H. A. E., 1884.
Lohim. A Hinall Shoshonean l)and liv-
ing on AVillow cr., a s. affluent of the
C<)luni])ia, in s. Oregon, and probably
Iwlonging to the Mono-Pavioteo group.
They have never made a treaty with the
(iovcrnment and are generally Hp)ken of
aw renegades l)elonging to tlie 17 matHla
rcH. (M(M)ncy). In 1870 their numlx^r
was reported an 114, but the name has
not appeare<l in rect^nt official report**.
Ross mistook them for Nez Perces.
Lo-hlm.— M(K)nev in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 743, 189i).
Low-him.— Ross. Fur Hunters, 1. 186, 1855. WiUow
Creek Indians.— Mooney, op eit.
Lojos. A former Chumashan village in
Ventura CO., Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
July 24, 1S63.
Loka ( * reeds ' [ phrwjm It fa] ) . A Navaho
(dan.
Ibka.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 104.
1890. Lbka^e.— Ihid. «iri<'= 'people'). L6ka-
</Ine'.— Matthews, Navaho I^'gends. 31, 1897(rfin^-=
•people').
Loko. A tribe, probably Paviotso, for-
inerlv livingonornearCarsonr., w. Xev. —
Holeman in Ind. Aff. Rep., 152, 1852.
Loksachnmpa. A former Seminole town
at the head of St Johns r., Fla. Lokpoka
Takoosa Hajo was chief in 1823.— H. K.
Kx. Doc. 74 (1828), 19th Cong., Ist sees.,
27, 1826.
Lolanko (the Sinkine name of Bull cr. ).
A part (»f the Sinkine dwelling on Bull
and Salmon crs., tributaries of the s. fork
of lle\ r., Humboldt co., Cal.
Flonk'-o.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 113,
1877 (so called by whites) . Lolonoooks.— Bancroft,
Nat. Races, i, 447, 1874. Lo-lon'-kuk.— Powers, op.
eit. l«)l«iico.— A.L. Kroeber, inf 'n, 1908(Bull cr.).
Lolsel ( lot * tobacco' , sel * people * ) . The
name aj^plied to the Wintun living in and
about Long valley, e. of Clear lake, Lake
CO., Cal. Their territory extended w. to
the summit of the mountain range just e.
of Clear lake and was there contiguous
to Pomo territory. (s. a. b. )
Lold'-la.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 219,
1877. Loldlas.— Powers in Overland Mo., xni. 542,
1874. Lol'-tel.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ni,
219. 1877.
Lemavik. A Kuskwogmiut Eskimo vil-
Ifu^re on the left bank of Kuskokwim r.,
Alaska; pop. 81 in 1880, 53 in 1900.
Lomavinmute.— Nelson (1879) quoted by Baker,
(ieoff. Diet. Alaska. 269, 1902. LomaYik.— Baker,
ibin. Lomawigamate.— PetrofiF, Rep. on Alaska,
5:^,1881.
Lompoc. A former Chumashan village
near Purfsima mission, Santa Barbara
(•o., Cal.— Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18,
1861.
Lone Wolf ( Gtiipd^go) . A Kiowa chief,
one of the 9 signers of the treaty of Medi-
<*ine Lo<lge, Kans., in 1867, by which the
774
LONGE LOBETTE
[B. A. ■.
Kiowa first agreed to be placed on a res-
ervation. In 1872 he heaaed a detection
to Washington. The killing of his son
by the Texans in 1873 embittered him
against the whites, and in the outbreak
oi the following year he was the recog-
nized leader of the hostile part of the
tribe. On the surrender in the spring of
1875 he, wjth a number of others, was
sent to military confinement at Ft Ma-
rion, Fla., where they remained 3 years.
He died in 1879, shortly after his return,
and was succeeded by his adopted son, of
the same name, who still retains author-
ity in the tribe. (.i. m. )
]-
Ml
i H^l
\\
1 jH
m
LONE WOLF
Longe. An abbreviation in common
use among English-speaking people of
the region of the great lakes, particu-
larly the N. shore of L. Ontario, for mas-
kalonge^ a variant of maskinonge (q. v^).
The form lunge represents another vari-
ant, muskelunge. The name is applied
also to the Great Lake trout (Scdvelinus
namaycush ) . See Mackinaw, ( a. f. c. )
Long Island (Amdye'li-gijindhVtaf from
dmdye^U * island*, gUndhVta *long*). A
former Cherokee town at the I^ng id.
in Tennessee r. , on the Tennessee-Georgia
line. It was settled in 1782 by Chero-
kee who es^used the British cause in
the Revolutionary war, and was known
as one of the Cnickamauga towns. It
was destroyed in the fall of 1794. See
Royce in 5th Rep. B. A. E., map, 1887;
Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E., 508, 526,
1900. (j.M.)
long Lake. A former Chippewa village
on Long lake, in Bayfield co., n. Wis.—
Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist.Soc. Coll.,
V, 191, 1885.
Long Lake. A Chippewa band on
Long lake, n. of L. Superior, between
Nipegon lake and Pic r., Ontario; pop.
311 in 1884, 341 in 1904.
Long Sionx. The chief of one of the
Dakota bands not brought into Ft Peck
agency, Mont, in 1872 (H. R. Ex. Doc.
96, 42d Cong., 3d sess., 5, 1873). It had
28 tipis. Not identified.
Long Tail. In 1854 a Shawnee chief of
this name ruled a band at " Long TaiPs
settlement" in Johnson co., Kans. —
Washington treaty (1854) in U. S. Ind.
Treat, 795, 1873.
Longnshharkarto (Lona-ush-har-kar^ -iOy
'brush log*). A sub-clan of the Dela-
wares (q. v.). — Morgan, Anc. Soc, 172,
1877.
Lookont Honntain Town (adapted from
the Cherokee A^IAU da^ndaka^nih&y *moun-
tains looking at each other*) . A former
Cherokee town at or near the present
Trenton, Dade co., n. w. Ga. It was
settled in 1782 by Cherokee who espoused
the British cause in the Revolutionary
war, and was known as one of the Chicka-
mauga towns. It was destroyed in the
fall of 1794. (j. M.)
A'ttli da'ndaka'nihi.— Mooney, inf'n, 1906 (full
Cherokee name). Danda' g&nii'. —Mooney in 19th
Rep. B. A. E., 514, 1900 ('Two looking at each
other': Cherokee name). Lookout Mountain.—
Doc. of 1799 quoted by Royce in 6th Rep. B. A.
E., 144, 1887. Lookout Mt. Town.— Royce in 5th
Rep. B. A. E., map, 1887. Ottilletaraoonohah.—
Ballew (1789) in Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., i,
56,1832.
Loolbgo {Lo-o-le-go). A Yurok village
on lower Klamath r., Cal., 2 m. above the
fork with the Trinity. A fish dam was
regularly built here. — A. L. Kroeber,
infn, 1904.
Lopotatimni. A division of the Miwok
formerly living in Eldorado or Sacramento
CO., Cal.
Lapototot— Bancroft. Nat. Races, i J50, 1874. Lopo-
talunnea.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii,
123. 1848. Lopotatinmes.— Hale in U.S.Expl.Ex-
ped., VI, 630, 1846. Lepstatimnes.— BancroTt, op.
cit. (misquoted from Hale). Sapototot.— Ibid.
Loquaflqiiscit. A former Wampanoa^
"plantation" near Pawtucket r.. Provi-
dence CO. (?), R. I. It was sold in 1646.
Loquasqutoit.— Deed of 1646 in R. I. Col. Rec, i,33,
1856. Loquiqusoit.- Ibid.,32. Loquiquaitt— Ibid.
Lorenzo. A former Dieguefio village
N. E. of San Diego, Cal.— Hayes (1850)
quoted by Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 458,
1882.
Lore to. A village, probably of the Tu-
bare, on the n. bank of the s. fork of Rio
del Fuerte, lat. 26° 45^ Ion, 107° 30^ s. w.
Chihuahua, Mexico.
Loreto. A Varohio village and the seat
of a Spanish mission, situated n. of Chini-
pas valley, lat. 27° 48^ Ion. 108° 30^ n.
Sinaloa, Mexico.
Kuestra Senora de Loreto de Voragios. — Orozco y
Berra, Geog., 324, 1864. Sinoyeoa.-Ibid. (native
name) .
Lorette. A Huron village situated 8 m.
N. w. of Quebec, Canada. The present
village, properly distinguished as Jeune
BULL. 30]
LOS ANC4ELES LOTTOHEUX
775
Lorette, in some miloH <listiuit from Aii-
cienne Lort»tto, the old village, w. of ami
nearer to Quel)ec, whioli wiui abandoned
for the present l(M»ation after 1721. The
inhabitants an' a remnant of the Ilurons
(q. V. ) who fled from their country on ac-
count of the Iro<juoiH alK)ut 16o0.* After
stopping on Orleans id. they removed in
1693 to Ancienne r^)n'tte. 'in 1SS4 thev
numbered 289; in IJKM, 455. See //?/ro/l,
MistfioTM, (.1. M.)
Lwrett.— German FlatH conf. (1770) in N. Y. IKk-.
Ck)l. Hist., vni, •J'29, 1857. Loretta.— Jeflforys, Fr.
Dom., pt. 1, map, 1761. Lorette.— Clinton (1745)
In N. Y. I)<H'. Col. Hist., vi. 276, 18.55. Loretto.--
I>t)e. of 1693, ibid., ix. 557. 1856. Pematnawiak.—
Gatschet. Penol)s<M»t M.^.. B. A. E., 1887 ( Penobwot
name) .
Los Angeles. A former raneheria, in-
habiteii apparently by both Pima Altaand
Seri, on the w. Imnk of Kio Horea.sitas,
central Sonora, Mexico. It <latt»H from
early Spanish times, but is probably not
now known by this name.
Aiifelet.— Kino, *raap ( 1702) in Stiickloin, Xeiio
Welt-Bott, 74, 1726. Lot Angeles.— I)(m'. of 17;J0
quoted by Bancroft, Xo. Mox. 8tatt»s, i, 5i;{, 1884.
Los LnceroB (S{>an.: 'the morning
stars*). A small .*<ettlement situated at
the site of the ancient pueblo of IMoge,
on the E. bank of the Kio (Jranjle, near
Plaza del Alcalde, Rio Arriba co., N.Mex.
Mentione<lby(iatsohetin 1879 as a pueblo
of the Tewa Indians, whereas it is a Mex-
ican village, although it may have con-
taineii at that time a few Tewa from San
Juan pueblo, about ^^ m. s.
Los Leuoeupos.- Yarn)w in Ann. Kcp. WhcoltT
Sun-., app. LL. 143, 1><75. Los Luceros.— (Jatschct
in WhoolerSurv. Rep.. Archieol., vii. 417. 1879.
Lost Ten Tribes of Israel. The l)elief,
for which no positive authority seems to
exist, has long lx?en current, that in 721
B. c, Sargon, king of Assyria, the succes-
sor of Shalmanwer, carried off into cap-
tivity ten of the twelve tribes of Israel.
Other deportations are attribute<l to Tig-
lath-Pileser and Shalmaneser. Not all
the people were deiMirtwl; nor were those
who were, actually lost. Still, the a.s-
sumption that they were lost has given
rise to absurd theories, according to which
these miwiing tribes have l)een di.»*covered
in every quarter of the glolx*. The most
popular theories art* one which identifies
them witli the Anglo-Saxons and another
which sees their descendants in the
American Indians. Father Duran in 1585
was one of the first to state explicitly that
"these natives art* of the ten triln^s of
Israel that Shalmaneser, king of the As-
syrians, ina<le prisoners and carrie<l to
Assyria.'* The latest variants of the
theory may l)e met with in the present-
day newsi>aper8. Antoniode Montezinos,
a Marano (secret Jew), while journeying
in South America in 1641 claimed that he
met savages who followed Jewish prac-
tices. This story he re|)eate<l in IIollan<l,
in 1644, to ^Iana.^.seh ben Israel, who
printed it in his work, Hojk* of Israel.
From it Thomas Thorowgood, in 1652,
published Digitus Dei, in which besought
to prove that the Indians were the Jews
"lost in the world for the space of near
2,(X)0 years. ' ' From this work many sub-
seijuent writers obtained their chief argu-
ments. This theory, however, found
opi)onents even in the 17th century.
Among these were William Wood, author
of the curious New KnglancPs l*ro8i)ect
( 1634 ) ; L* Estrange in Americans no Jews
( 1652 ) ; Hubbard in Historv of New Eng-
land (r«. 1680). The identification of the
American aborigines with the "lost ten
tribes" was basted on allegt^l identities
in religions, practices, customs and habits,
traditions, and languages. Adair's His-
tory of the American Indians, published
in 1775, was bastnl on this theory. An
enthusiastic successor of Adair was Dr
Kliiw Boudinot, whose work, A Star in
the West; or, a Humble Attempt to Dis-
cover the Long Lost Ten Tribes of Israel,
Preparatorv to Their Return to Their
Belove<l (Ity, Jerusalem, was i)ublishe<l
at Trenton, N. J., in 1S16. Ix)rd Kings-
lK)rough's magnificent Antiquitit»s of
Mexico (9 vols., 1880-48) rei)re8ents a
fortune s^>ent in efforts to sustain this
theory. To-day the idea crojw out
occasionally in pseudo-scientific works,
missionary literature, etc., while the
friendly interest which the Mormon
church has always taken in the Indians
is said to be due to this l)elief. Certain
i<lentities and rt*semblances in customs,
ideas, institutions, etc., of the American
Indians and the ancient Jews art* pointe<!
out by Mallery in his Israelite and In-
dian: A Parallel in Planes of Culture
(Proc. A. A. A. S., xxxviii, 287-381, 1889),
though the address contains many mis-
conceptions. It may be remarked that
the Jews and the Indians have no physical
characteristics in common, the two races
belonging to entirely distinct tyi)es. See
Popular fallacies.
In a<l(lition to the al)ove works consult
Neubauer in Jewish Quarterly Review, i,
1889; Ja{x>bs in Jewish Encvcl<»i)edia,
XII, 249-53, 1906. (*A. F. c.)
Lotlemaga {^j/iEinaga^ 'ghost-face wo-
man.'— Boas) . The anct*stor of a gens of
the Nakomgilisala, also applie<l to the
gens itself.
Lo'tlemaq.— Boas in Petfnnanns Mitt., pt. 5, 131,
1887.
Lonchenz (Fr.: 'scjuinters'). The Ku-
tchin si>eaking the dialect of the Tukkuth-
kutchin. Thislanguage, which resembles
more nearly the Chipewyan than the
intervening'Etatchogottine and Kawcho-
gottine diak*ct*«, is si)oken by the Tatlit-
kuU'hin, Vuntakutchin, Kutchakutchin,
Nat«itkutchin, and Trotsikkutchin (Har-
disty in Smithson. Rep. 1866, 311, 1872).
The' term was extended by the Hud-
son's Bav Co. men to incliKle all the
776
LOVE SONGS LOWER KUTENAT
[ B. A. B.
Kutohin, though the Tukkuthkutchiii, or
they and the Tatlitkutchin together, con-
stituted the Loucheux proper.
The Loucheux of Alaska are reported
by Hardinty to have been divided into
three castes, ChiU^h, Tangeesatsah, and
Natsingh, names which seem to signify
*fair/ 'partly swarthy,' and 'swarthy**
respectively. Those of the first caste
lived principally on fish, and those of the
last mentioned by hunting. They occu-
pied differ^ nt districts, and marriage be-
tween two individuals of the same caste
was almost prohibited. Petitot gives the
names of these bands as Etchian-K/oet,
* men of the left/ Natts^in-K/3^t, *men of
the right,* and Tsendjidhaettset-K/u^t,
* men of the middle.' As the children
belonged to the mother's clan, but liveii
usually with that of the father, these peo-
ple are said to have exchanged countries
slowly in successive generations. The
three clans or castes are now repre8ente<l
by the Chitsa, Tangesatsa, ana Natesa.
According to Strat^han Jones (Smithson.
Rep., op. cit., 326), this system of castes
of successive rank prevailed generally
among the Kutchin. For the synonymy,
see Kuichin.
Love longi. See Musiv and M^mcal in-
fftrumeiitft.
Lowako ( 'northern ( ? ) people' ) . A peo-
ple mentione<l in the Walam Glum record
of the Dela wares (Brinton, Lenape Leg.,
206, 1885 ) . Rafines(}ue says the name re-
fers to the Eskimo, but Brinton says it may
mean anv northern people.
Lowako. — \Valnm Oliini (1833) in Brinton, Lenape
I^eff.. 206,1885. Lowaaiwi.— Ibid.,182. Lowanuski.—
Ibid..l^. Lowushkit.— Rafine8que (1833) qnottHl
!>y Brinton, ibid., 232.
Lower Chehalis. A collective term for
the Salish tribes on lower Chehalis r. and
affluents, as well as those about Grays
harbor and the n. end of Shoalwater
bay, Wash. It included the Satsop, We-
natc>hi, Whiskah, Humptulip, and other
small tribes. According to Ford (Ind.
Aff. Rep. 1857, 341, 1858) the term is proj)-
erly restricted to the (Jrays Harl)or In-
dians, and Gibb^ confines it to those
alx>ut the n. end of Shoalwater bay. See
AtamitL
4rtsmilsh.~Swan quoted by Mooney in 14th Rep.
B. A. E., i>l. Ixxxviii, 1896. Salt-water band.—
Simmonn in Ind. Aff. Rep., 233, 1858.
Lower Chinook. Cninookan tribes of the
lower Columbia r , strictly the Chinook
K roper and the Clatsop, who speak one
mguage, while all the other tribes (Up-
|)er Chinook) present marked dialectic
differences. Most writers include all the
tribes from the mouth of the Columbia to
Willamette r. under the term.
Ahei'pudin.— Gat£chet, Kalapuya MS., B. A. £.
(Atfalati name). Bas-Tchinouks.— Duflot de Mo-
iras, Explor. de I'Oregon, li. 335, 1844. Lower
Chinook.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped.. vi, 215,
1846. Txaix-wa'tx>h.~Gat8Chet, MS., B. A. E.
(Clackama name).
Lower Creeks. The name formerly ap-
plied to that part of the Creek (confed-
eracy centerinj^ on the lower (-hatta-
hoochee and its tributaries, in South
Carolina and Alaliama, as distinguished
from the Upper Creeks on the Coosa and
Tallai>oo6a. They included Muscogee,
Hitchiti, and Yuchi. In the 18th century
the terms Coweta (Kawita) and Apala-
chucla ( Apalachicola) were often used to
designate the Ix)wer Creeks. Bartram
and other authors use the term Seminole
as an equivalent, but the Seminole were
an offshoot of the Ix)wer Creeks and
owed no allegiance to the confederacy.
According to Rivers the Lower Creeks
had 10 villages with 2,4(K> people in 1715,
but by 17:i3 they had lost 2 of their 10
towns, according to the statement of a
Kawita chief to Oglethorpe at the Savan-
nah council. The chief did not give the
names of the 2 lost towns, but the 8 re-
maining ones were Apalachicola, Chiaha,
Hitchiti, Kasihta, Kawita, Oconee, Oso-
tchi, and Eufaula. In 1764 (Smith, Bou-
quet's Expe<l., 1766) the Lower Creeks
numbered 1,1 8() men, representing a total
population of al>out 4,100. In 1813, ac-
cording to Hawkins (Am. St. Papers, Ind.
Aff., 1, 842, 1832), they had 14 towns on
Flint and Chattahoochee rs., but in the
same year (ibid,, 851) these had in-
creased to 16. The Ix)wer Creeks were
frequently called Ucheesee, or Ochesee
rOchisi), from the town of that name.
According to liarton they called the
Upper Creeks " uncles,'* and by them
were called * * cousins. * * For a list of their
towns, s<»e (Veek)*. (a. s. g.)
Baaset Rivieres.— (}at8oliet, infn (French name
for Lower" Creeks). Lower Creeks.—Sinith, Bou-
quet's Exped. 71. 176(*>. Maakold Hatohita.—
Gatschet, Creek Mijrr. LeK., i. 237, 1H84 (Cr«ek
name). Ocheaeee.-.-Rivers, Hist. 8. C, 94, 1874.
Uoheaeet.— GusKefeld, Charte der 13 Ver. Staaten,
1784.
Lower Delaware Town. A former Dela-
ware village on the extreme headwaters
of Mohican r., 5 or (> m. directly n. of the
site of the city of Ashland, in Ashland
CO., Ohio.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A.E.,
Ohio map, 1899.
Lower Kntenai. A division of the Ku-
tenai living on Kootenai lake and r.,and
in the neighboring plains of Idaho and
British Columbia. From the time of
their earliest contact with the whites
they have been called Flatbows, for what
reason is not known, but they are now
generally called Ix)wer Kootenay. They
numbered 172 in British Columbia in 1904,
and 79 from Idaho were connected ^ith
the Flathead agencv, Montana.
Akoklako. — Tolmie an(f Dawson, Comp. Vocabs.,
124b, 1884 (corruption of AukdqtWOqo). Aku-
ehlklaetas.— Wilson in Trans. Ettinol. Soc. Lond.,
304, 1866 (corruption of ^9i:d(7f2d'//od). ▲qkoqtli'-
tlqo.— Chamberlain in 8th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can.,
6. 1892. Aquqeaulcqo.— Boas in 5th Kep. N. W.
Tribes Can., 10, 1889. Aquqtla'tiqo.— Boas, ibid.
kULL. 30]
LOWER QUARTER INDIANS — LCTISeSo
777
Lre Fl«ttet.»Mayne. Brit. (X)l., IKW, 1H62. Arct-
rpUto.— De Smet, Oreg. Miw., U2. 1847. Aroi-
latt.— Duflot de Mof ra.s, Expl . , 1 1 , 335, 1844. Aros-
l»tte«.— AnderHOii quoted byciiblwin Hist. Mag.,
0» 1863. TUohbogen.— Bergliaiut, I>hv.sik. Atla.*'.
nap 17. 1852. Flat Bow.— <*aii. Ind. Aff. for 1902.
►t.2,74. nat-bow».— Halcin U.S. Ex^l, p:xi)t'd., vi.
04, 1846 (said to be a translation of AqkfMitlatl, the
Cutenai name of Kootenai r., but this is doubt-
ul) . Indiaiu of the Lower Kootenay.— Chamber-
ain, op. cit.. 6. Kertani.—Kingsley. Stand. Nat.
list., vr, 140,1883. Lake Indiaiui.— Henr>' (1811)
luoted by Maclean, Canad. 8av. Folk, 138, 1896.
•ower Kootanau.— Mayne, Brit. Col., 298, 1862.
•ower Kootanie.—Tolmic and Dawson, Omp. Vo-
Aba., 124b, 1884. Lower Kootenay.— Boas, op.
(it., 10. Lower Kootenays.— Chamberlain, op.
!lt,6.
^ Lower Qnarter Indiaxu. A tril)e or divi-
don in 1700, living 10 ni. from Neuwe r.
ind 40 m. from Adshusheer town, prol)-
ibly about the rite of Raleigh, N. C—
Lawpon (1714), Hist. Car., 98, 1860.
Lower Sanratown. A Cheraw village in
1760, 8ituate<l on the s. bank of Dan r.,
ST. Car., near the Vir^nia border. —
VIooney, Sioiian Tribes of the Plast, Bui.
B. A. E., 59, 1894.
Lower Thompion Indians. The popular
lame for the Ntlakyapamuk living on
Fraser r., lx»tween Siska and Yale, Brit.
>)1.
Jaaon Lodiant.— Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist.,
I, 168, 1900. Lower Thompton Indians.— Ibid.
Ciower ThompMnt.— Ibid. Uta'mqt.— Boa.s, infn,
.906 (own name). Uta'mqtamux.— Teit, op. cit.
'people below' : own name).
Lowertown. ' A name applitnl at differ-
ent perioils to two diwtinct 9hawnt»e
k'illages in Ohio. The one commonly so
called was originallv on the Ohio, ^ust
i)elow the moiith of the Scioto, until it
A'as carried off l)y a flood, wlien it was
rebuilt on the op^nysite side of the Scioto,
il)out the site of Portsmouth, Scioto co.
[t was here in 1750-54, hut l)efore 17()6
ihe inhabitants removed upstream to
Jhillicothe, in Ross co., which was fre-
quently known as Lowertown, or Lower
Shawnee Town, to distinguish it from
Lick Town, 25 m. above. See Chillicothe,
Scioto, (j. M.)
Lower Shawnee Town.-^^ommon name» used by
early writers. Lowertown.— <'ommon name ufle<l
by early writers. Shawnoah Baue Ville.— £.*<naiits
and Rapilly, map, 1777.
Lowrey, George. A cousin of Sequoya
and second chief of the l^astern Cherokee
under John Ross, commonly known as
Major Lown^v. II is native name was
Agill (*IIe is rising*), iK)ssi])ly a con-
traction of an old perstmal name, Agin^-
agi*lt (* Rising-fawn*). He joined Ross
in steadily opi)08ing all attemptfl to force
his people to move from their eastern
lands, and later, after this had been
accomplished, he was chief of council of
the Eastern C'lierokee at the nu^eting held
in 1839 to fuse the eastern and western
divisions into the present Cherokee Na-
tion. See Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
115, 135, 1900.
Lowrey, John. A Cherokee chief, com-
monly known as Colonel l^^wrey. He
commandetl the friendly Cherokee wdio
helped (len. Andrew Jackson in the war
against the Creeks in 1813-14, and witli
Col. (iideon Morgan and 400 Cherokee
surrounded and capture<l the town of
Hillabi, Ala., Nov. 18, 1813. The tw(»
were conspicuous also in the battle of
Horseshoe Bend, Mar. 27, 1814, for which
thev were commended. Lowrey was one
of the signers of the treaties made at Wash-
ingt(m, June 7, 1806, and Mar. 22, 1816.
See Moonev in 19th Rep. K A. E., 90,
1900.
Lowwalta. A former Seminole vil-
lage, probably e. of Appalachee bay, Fla.,
as the map of Bartram (Travels, i, 1799)
notes a !Noowalta r. emptving into the
l)ay. It was settled by Creeks from Coosa
r., who followed their prophets McQueen
ami Francis after the war of 181:^14.—
Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 306,
1822.
Loyola. See Etsowlsh Semmegec-itsliin.
Ln (*mud,' S'lay*). A fomier Atta-
capa village on L. Prien (Cyprien), in
("alcasieu parish, I.a.
lo.— Gatschet, Attacapa MS., B. A. K., 45, ISHT).
Lu.— Ibid.
Lnchasmi. A Costanoan vi 1 lage situated
in 1819 within 10 m. of Santa Cruz mis-
sion, Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Fanner, Apr.
5, 1860.
Lnckton. A tribe, (»oniprising 200 i)eo-
ple, residing in 1806 on the Oregon coast
s. of the Tillamook.
Luok-tont.— Grig. Jour. I^wia and Clark, vi. 117,
1905. Lukton.— Amer. Pioneer; 189, 1H48.
Lngnps. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Barbara, Cal. (Taylor in (^al.
Farmer, Apr. 24, 1863); i)erhai>s the stime
as Luupch, q. v.
Lnidneg. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolores mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal. — Tavlor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Lniseno. The southernmost Shoshone-
an division in California, which n^ceived
its name from San Luis Ri»y, the most im-
portant Spanish mission in the territory
of these people. They fonn one linguistic
group with the Aguas Calient es,.Tuanen<>s,
and Kawia. They extende<l along the
coast from between San Onofre and Las
Animas crs., far enoughs, to inchKlc Aguas
Heilionda, San Marcos, Kscondido, and
Valley Centt*r. Inland they extendtni n.
l)eyorid San Jacinto r., and intoTemescal
cr.; but they were cut off fnmi the San
Jacinto divide by the Dieguefios, Aguas
Calientes, Kawia, and Serran(»s. The
former inhabitants of San Cleniente id.
also are said to have l)een Luisefios, and
the same was possiblv the case with those
of San Nicolas id. "f heir population was
given in 1856 (Ind. Aff. Rep., 243) as be-
tween 2,500 and 2,800; in 1870, as 1,299;
in 1885, as 1,142. Most of them were sub-
sequently placed on small resersations
778
LUKAIASTA LUTUAMIAN FAMILY
[B. A. m
included under the Mission Tule River
agency, and no separate tribal count has
been made. Their villages, past and pres-
ent, are Ahuanga, Apeche, Bruno's Vil-
lage, La Joya, Las Flores, Pala, Pauma,
Pedro's Village (?), Potrero, Rincon, Sa-
boba, San Luis Rey (mipsion), Santa
Margarita (?), Temecula, and Wahoma.
Taylor (Cal. Fanner, May 11, 1860) gives
the following list of villages in the neigh-
borhoo<l of San Luis Rey mission, some of
which may be identical with those here
recorded: Cenyowpreskel, Ehutewa, Kne-
kelkawa, Hamechuwa, Hatawa, Hepow-
woo, Itaywiy, Itukemuk, Milkwanen,
Mokaskel, an<l Mootaevuhew.
Ohecham.— A. L. Kroeber, inf'n, 1905 (fromGhech,
native name of San Luis Rey mis8ion, and some-
times appears to be applied to themselves).
Kechi.— Gatschet in Wheeler Surv. Rep., viijJlS,
1879. Keohit.— Shea. Cath. Miss.. 108, 1855. Kh9-
oham.— Kroeber, inf'n, 1906 (alternative for Ghe-
cham ). San Lonit Indians.— Winder in H. R. Ex.
Doc. 76, 84th Cong., 8d sess., 124. 1857. San Luit-
eniant.— Ck)uts quoted by Henley in Ind. Aflf.
Rep. 1856. 240, 1857. San LuiMnot.— Bancroft, Nat.
Races, 1, 460, 1882. San Luisienot. — Ibid. San Luit
Sey [tribe].— Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1871, 682, 1872.
Lnkaiaita. A foriner village of the Ka-
lindaruk division of the Costanoan fam-
ily, connected with San Carlos mission,
Cal.
LuoayasU.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860.
Lnkfa ( * clay,' * loam * ). A former vil-
lage of the Opatukla or *' Eastern party"
of the Choctaw, on the headwaters of a
branch of Sukinatcha cr., in Kemper co.,
Miss.
Lookfa.— \V. Florida map ca. 1775. Lukfa.— Hal-
bert in Pub. Miss. Hist. Soc.. vi, 424. 1902.
Lnlakikia. A Choctaw clan of the
Ku8haiM>kla phratry.
lulak.— Morgan. Anc* Soc.. 102, 1877. Lu-lak
Ik'-aa.-lbid.
Lulanna. A Haida town referred to
by Work in 1886-41. It is perhaps in-
tended for Yaku, opix)site Graham id.,
Queen Charlotte ids., Alai^ka, or it mav
have been that town and Kiusta consid-
ered as one. Its population was estimated
by Work at 2% in 20 houses.
Lu Ian na. — Work in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v,
489, 1855. Su-lan-na.— Kane, Wand. N. A., ai)p.,
1869 (misprint from Work).
Lnliilongtnrkwi( Hopi : * plumed-serpent
mound.* — Fewkes) . A ruined pueblo, of
medium size, situated across the Jeditoh
valley from Kokopki, in the Hopi coun-
trv, N. E. Arizona. It was possibly one
or a group of pueblos built and occupied
by the Kawaika people. See Hough in
Rep. Nat. Mus. 1901, 336, pi. 82, 1903.
Lttlttlonfftuqui.— Hough, ibid., pi. 82. Lululongtur-
qni.— Ibid., 336.
Lmnmi. A Salish tril)e on and inland
from Bellingham bay, N. w. Wash. They
are said to have Hve<i formerly on part
of a group of islands e. of Vancouver id.,
to which they still occasionally resorted
in 1863. According to Gibbs their lan-
guage is almost unintelligible to the Nook-
sak, their northern neighbors. Boas
classes it with the Songish dialect. Th<
Lummi are now under the jurisdiction oi
the Tulalip school superintendent, Wash*
ington, and numbered 412 in 1905. Theii
former villages were Hutatchl, Lemal-
tcha, Statshum, and Tomwhiksen. The
Klalakamish, of Orcas id., were a formei
band.
H£-lum-mi.— GibbR, Clallam and Lummi, vi, 1869
iname given them by some other (Salish?) tribes),
[ookluhmio.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1, 621, 1861.
Lummas.— FiUhugh (1856) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37,
34th Cong., 3d sess., 75, 1857. Lummi.— Gibba in
Pac. R. R. Rep., i, 433, 1855. Lummie.— Stevens
(1856) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37, Mth Cong., 3d seas., 46,
1857. Lummi-neuk-saok.— Shaw in Ind. Aff. Rep.
1859, 398, 1860 ( two tribal names connected through
error). Hooh-lum-mi.— Tolmie (1844) in Pac. K.
R. Rep., I, 434, 1855. Nooklnlumio.— Lane (1848)
in Sen. Ex. Doc. 52, 3l8t (X>ng.,'lst sess., 178, 1860.
Hooklttlumo.— Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 162, 1860.
Kooklommie.— Bauer in Am. Quar. Keg., III. 889,
1849. Nookluolamic— Thornton (1819) in Scnool-
craft,Ind.Tril)eK, VI, 701, 1857. Noot-hnm.— Starling
in Ind. Aff. Rep., 170, 1852. Koot-hum-mie.— Ibid.,
171. Hufh-lemmy.— Mallet in Ind. Aff. Rep., 196,
1877. Huh-lum-mi.— Gibbs in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,
I, 180, 1877 (proposed as a collective name for
Samish, Lummi, and Nuksak). NokhlMh.— Gibbs,
Clallam and Lummi, vi, 1863 (socalled by Skagit).
Hukh'-lum-mi. —I bid (own name ) . Qtlumi.— Boaa
in 5th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 10, 1889.
Lnnge. See Longe^ Maskinonge.
LunikaslLinga ('thunder-being people')
A Kansa gens.
Ledan unika^nga.— Dorscy in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 232,
1897 ('gray hawk people*). Lo-ne'-ka-she-giL—
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. Loo nika-thing-ga.—
Stubbs. Kaw MS. vocab., B. A. E., 25, 1877. Lu.—
Dorseyin Am. Natur., 671, 1885 Cthunder'). Lv
nikaci»ga. — Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 232, 1897";
Thunder.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877.
Lupies. Mentioned in connection with
•some mythical as well as existent tribes
of the plains in the 17th century (Vetan-
curt, 169.3, Teatro Am., iir, 303, repr.
1871). Possibly the Pawnee Loups.
Lmhapa. A former Choctaw town, evi-
dently in Neshoba c<>., Miss., and possibly
on Lussalaka cr., a small tributaiy of
Kentarky cr. — llalbert in Pub. Miss. Hist
Soc, VI, 430, IWZ.
Luahapa.— Romans, Florida, map, 1775. Lnsth-
hapa.— West Florida map, ca. 1775.
Lutchapoga (Creek: lutcha * terrapin*,
p6ka * gathering place ' : * terrapin pen * ) .
A former Upper Creek town, of which |
Atchinaalgi was a branch or colony, prob-
ably on or near Tallapoosa r., Ala.
Lookoportay.— Ex. Doc. 425, 24th Ong., 1st 8C8S.»
279, 1836. Loo-chau po-gau.— HawJuns (1799),
Sketch, 47, 1848. Luohepoga.— Tanner, map, 1827.
Lu ohi paga.— Parsons in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
IV. 578, 1854. Luohipoga.~Campbell (1836) in H. R.
Doc. 274, 25th Cong., 2d sess., 20, 1838. luohipo-
gatown.— Garrett (1837) in H. R. Doc. 452, 25th
Cong., 2d seas., 58, 1838. Lute" ' - - . .
Creek Migr. Leg., i, 138, 1884.
, 2d seas., 58, 1838. Lutohap6ga.— Gatschet,
Lntchopoga. A township in the Creek
Nation, on middle Arkansas r. , Okla.
Lntnamian Family. A linguistic familv
consisting of two branches, the Klamath
and the Modoc (q. v.), residing in s. w.
Oregon e. of the Cascade range and along
the California border. Their former
boundary extended from the Cascades to
the headwaters of Pit and McCloud rs..
BDLL. 30]
LUUPCH McGILLIVKAY, ALEXANDER
779
fchenoe b. to Gooee lake, thence n. to
lat 44^y and thence w. to the Cascades.
The more permanent settlements of the
family were on the shores of Klamath
lakes, Tule lake, and Lost r., the remain-
der of the territory which they claimed
being huntine ground. In 1864 both
divisions of the family entered into a
treaty with the Unitecl States whereby
they ceded the greater part of their lands
to the Government and were plac^ed on
Klamath res. in Oregon. It was an at-
tempt on the part of the Modoc to return
to their former seat on the California
frontier that brought about the Modoc
war of 1872-73 (see Kintpuash) . The cli-
mate and productions of their country
were most favorable, edible roots an<l
berries were plentiful, and the region
abounded in game and fish. As a conse-
quence the tribes were fairly sedentary and
seem to have made no extensive nii^ra-
tions. They were not particularly warhke,
though the Modoc had frequent struggles
with the tribes to the s., and after the
coming of the whites resisted the aggres-
sions of the latter with persistence and
fierceness.
Slavery seems to have been an insti-
tution of long standing, and the Modoc,
assisted by tne Klamath, made annual
raids on the Indians of Pit r. for the
capture of slaves, whom they either re-
tained for themselves or l>artered with
the Chinook of Columbia r. The habita-
tions were formerly of logs, covered with
mud and circular in shape, a tyixt of
building which is still occasionally seen
on the reservation. The women wert^
noted as expert basket weavers. No trace
of a clan or gentile system has been dis-
covered among them. The family organ-
ization is a loose one and inheritance is in
the male line. The language spoken by
the two divisions of the Lutuamian family
is ordinarily called Klamath, and while
there are dialectic differences l)etween the
speech of the Klamath proper and the
Modoc, they are so slight that they may
be disregarded. The Lutuamian lan-
guage is apparently entirely independent,
ttiough further study may disclose rela-
tionship with the Shahaptian. (l. f. )
COuiitte.— Hale in U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 218, 569,
1S46 (alteniative of Lutuami). KUmath.— Gat-
Bchetln Maff. Am. Hist., 164, 1877 (used for family) .
Lataami.— Irving, Astoria, map, 1849. Lutuami.—
Hale, op. cit., 199, 201. Lutnania.— Domcnech.
Deserts of N. A. , i, 442, 1860. LatomaBi.— Latham.
Oposcula, 841, 1860 (misprint) . Luturim.— Gallatin
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 402, 1853 (misprint).
K£ttaks.-<}atschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. i.
xzxiii, 1890 (collective name for Klamath and Mo-
doc). Stttnami.— Medill in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th
Oong., 1st sess., 7, 1848 (miHquotcd from Hale).
Tlamatl.— Hale, op. cit., 218, 569 (alternative of
Lutuami).
Laapeh. A former Chumashan village
in Ventura co., Cal. — Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, July 24, 1863. Cf. Lugups.
Luuptc.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab.,
B.A.E.. 18rt4.
Lynx. See Pe»hkewah,
Lytton band. One of 4 subdivisions of
the Upper Thomj)«on Indians, in the
interior of British Columbia. In 1904
they numbered \^^, under the Kamloops-
Okanagan agency.
iJcamtoi^Exnux.— Teit in Mem. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist. , 11,170.1900 Cpeopleof Lkamtci'n [Lytton]').
Lytton band.— Ibia. NLaka'pamux.— Ibid, (gen-
erally used for all the Ntlakyapamuk). NiAk-apa-
mux'o'e.— Ibid, (the Nlak-a'pamux proiier). .
Maak ( * loon ' ) . A gens of the Pota-
watonii ((j. v.). — Morgan, Anc. Soc, 167,
1877. Cf. Mong.
Maakoath {Maa^kmth). A nept of the
Toquart, a Nootka tribe.— Boas in 6th
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 82, 181K).
Maam ( Ma^-a m ) . Apparently a gen ti le
organization among the Pima, belonging
to the Suwuki-ohinial, or Red Ants,
phratral grou]). — Russell, Pinia MS.,
k A. K., 318, hm.
Maamtagyila. A gens of the Kwakiutl,
found in two septs, the (iuetela and the
MatiliHj.
Maa'mtagila.— BuaH in Kep. Nut. Mus. 18%. 330,
1H97. Mataki'la.— Boas in Petennanns Mitt., pt. 5,
131,1887.
li&BJlgTeet{^fd-an^ -greets 'big feet'). A
sulK'lan of the Delawares (i\. v.).— Mor-
gan, Anc. Soc, 172, 1877.
Maate (.Wz-a/i"). A sunniier village of
the Koskinio on the «. side of Qu^tsino
sd., Vancouver id. — Dawson in Trans.
Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, sec. ii, 69.
Maawi. The extinct Antelope clan of
the Zufii of New Mexico.
Maawi-kwe.— (Wishing in 13th Kep. B. A. E.. 368,
1896 (itirf -*pe<>i>le').
Macamo. A former Chumashan village
on San Lucaw i<l., Cal.; so naine<l bv Ca-
brillo in 1542.— Cabrillo (1542) in Smith,
Colec. Doc.. Fla., 181, 1857.
Macaque. St»e }foenck.
Macariz. A former Yamasi (?) town a
mile N. of St Augustine, Fla., existing in
1680 and with others destroyed by Col.
Palmer in 1727.
Kaoaritqui.— Fairbanks, Hist. Fla., 189, 18.')8. Kaa-
carati.— Barcia, Kiisayo, 240, 1723.
Maccarib. Tbe old and original form
from a cognate of which has l)een derived
the Alg(mquian word caribou. Josselyn
(N. Eng. Ran, 1672, 55, repr. 1865) wrote
of "the Maccarib, Caribo, or Pohano, a
kind of Deer, as big as a Stag. * ' Maccarib
corresponds to the Passama(]uody mega'
lip. See Caribou. (a. f. c. j
Maccoa. The name of a chief and of a
small tribe living on the s. coast of South
Carolina, in the vicinity of St Helena id.,
where they were visitwi by Ribault in
1562. They jwssibly iK^longed to the
Cusabo group, long since extinct.
Maccoa.— La udonnit^re ( 1562) in French, Hist. Coll.
La..n.s..205, 1869. Maooou.— Ibid.,209.
McOillivray, Alexander. A mixed-blood
Creek chief who aajuired considerable
note during the latter half of the 18th ceu-
7H0
MrGILLIVRAY, ALEXANDER
[B. A.S.
tiiry by his ability aiul the affwtion in
which he was hv\<\ ])y his mother's \h'0-
i)le. Capt. Mardmnd, in connnand of tlie
^Veneh Ft Tonlouse, Ala., in 1722, mar-
rieil a Oeek woman of the stnmg Hutali
or Wind clan, fn»m which it was custom-
ary to select the chief. One of the chil-
dren of this marriage was Sehoy, cele-
bratt^l for her beauty. In 1735 llachlan
McCjillivray, a Scotch youth of wealthy
family, lam'led in Carolina, ma<le his way
to the Creek country, marri(*<l Sehov, and
established his residence at Little "[talasi,
on the E. bank of Coosii r., above We-
tumpka, Elmore co., Ala. After actjuir-
ing a fortune and rearing a family he
abandontnl the latter, and in 1782 re-
turned to his native country. One of his
children was Alexander, born about 1739;
he was educated at Charleston under care
of Farquhar McGillivray, a relative. At
the age of 17 he was placed in a count-
ting house in Savannah, but after a short
time returned to his home, where his
suT)erior talents lH»gan to manifi»st them-
selves, and he was soon at the head of
the C-reek triln'. Later his authoritv ex-
tended also over the Seminole and the
Chickamauga groups, enabling him, it is
said, to muster 1(),()()0 warriors. Mc(fil-
livray is first heard of in his new role as
*' presiding at a grand national council at
the t^)wn of Coweta, upon the Chatta-
hoochie, where the adventurous Leclerc
Milfort was introiUiced to him" (Pickett,
Elist. Ala., Mo, 1896). Through the ad-
van(?(»8 made by the British authorities,
the influence of Col. Tait, who was sta-
tioned on the Coosa, and the conferring
on him of the title and pay of colonel,
Mc(fillivray heartily and actively es-
poused the British cause <luring the Rev-
olution. His father had left him prop-
erty on the Savannah and in other parts
of (Jeorgia, which, in retaliation for his
abandonment of the cause of the colonists,
was confiscated by the (Georgia authori-
tit»8. This ac^tion greatly embittert»d him
against the Americans and U»d to a long
war against the western settlers, his at-
tacks being directed for a time against
the people of e. Tennessee and Cumber-
lana valley, whencre he was successively
Ijeaten back by (len. James Robertson.
The treaty of peace in 1783 left McGilli-
vray without cause or party. Proposals
froni the Spanish authorities of Florida
through his business partner, Wm. Pan-
ton, anothtT Scotch ad venturer and trader,
inducwi him to visit Pensacola in 1784,
where, as their "emwror," he entered
into an agreement with Spain in the name
of the Creeks and the Seminoles. The
Cnitetl States made rei^eated overtures to
McCiillivray for peace, but he persist-
ently refused to listen to them until in-
vited to New York in 1790 for a personal
conference with Washington. His jour-
ney from Little Talasi, through (iruilford,
Richmond, Fredericksburg, and Phila-
delphia, was like a triumphal march, and
the prospective occasion tor such display
was a strong inducement for the shrewd
chief to accept the invitation. According
to IMckett (p. 406) there was, in addition
to the public treaty, a secret treaty be-
tween McGillivray and Washington
which provided *^that after two years
from date the commerce of the Creek
nation should be carried on throuj?h the
I)orts of the United States, and, in the
meantime, through the present channels;
that the chiefs of the Okfuskees, Tooka-
l>atchaa Tallases, Cowetas, Cussetas, and
the Seminole nation should be paid an-
nually by the United States $100 each,
and be furnished with handsome medals;
that Alexander McCJillivray should be
constituted agent of the L'nited States
with the rank of brigadier-general and
the pay of $1,200 per annum; that the
United States should feed, clothe, and
educate Creek youth at the North, not
exceeding four at one time.** The pub-
lic treaty was signed Aug. 7, 1790, and a
week later McGillivray took the oath of
allegiance to the United States. Never-
theless he was not diverted from his in-
trigue with Spain, for shortly after taking
the oath he was appointed by that power
superintendent-general of the Creek na-
tion with a salary of $2,000 a year, which
was increased in 1792 to $3,500.
The versatile character of Mc^jillivray
was perhaps due in part to the fact that
there flowed in his veins the blood of
four different nationalities. It has l)een
said that he possessed **the polished
urbanity of the Frenchman, the duplicity
of the Spaniard, the cool sagacity of the
Scotchman, and the subtlety and inveter-
ate hate of the Indian.'' Gen. James
Roberteon, who knew him well and
despised the Spaniards, designated the lat-
ter * * deWls ' * and pronounc^ McGillivrav
as the biggest devil among them — "half
Spaniard, half Frenchman, half Scotch-
man, and altogether Creek scoundrel."
That Alexander McCjillivray was a man
of remarkable abilitjr is evident from the
consummate skill with which he main-
tained his control and influence over the
Creeks, and from his success in keeping
both the United States and Spain paying
for his influence at the same time. In 1792
he was at once the superintendent-general
of the Creek nation on behalf of Spain, the
agent of the Unite<l States, the mercantile
partner of Panton, and "emperor" of
the Creek and Seminole nations. As
opulence was ^estimated in his day and
territprv, he was a wealthy man, having
received $100,000 for the property con-
fiscated by the Georgia authorities, while
BULL. 30 J
MACHAPUNdA — MACINTOSH, (HILLY
7S1
the annual iuiportatiouH 1)y him and Pan-
ton were estimated in vahie at £40,000
(Am. St. jPapere, Ind. Aff., i, 458, 1832).
Beflides two or thret* plantations, he
owned, at the time of hia death, 60 ne-
groes, I^ head of cattle, and a larjre stoirk
of • horses. In p<»rsonal ai)|H*arance
McGillivray is descrilKjd as havmj? Injen
six feet in height, sparelv built, and rt»-
markably erect; his forehead was bold
and lofty; his fingers long and tai)ering,
and he "wielded a pen with the greatest
rapidity; his face was handsome and
indicative of thought and sagacity; un-
less interested in conversation he was
inclined to be taciturn, but was polite
and respectful. While a British col-
onel he dresse<l in the uniform of his
rank; when in the Spanish service he
wore the military gar!) of that country;
and after Washington app>inte<l him
brigadier-general he sometimes donned
the unifonn of the American army, but
never when Spaniards were present* I i is
usual costume was a mixture of Indian
and American garments. McGillivray
always traveltKi with two servants, one a
half-blood, the other a negro. Although
ambitious, fcmd of display and j)ower,
crafty, unsc*rupulous in accomplishing his
purpose, an<l treacherous in affairs of
state, the char^ that he was bloodthirsty
and fiendish m disposition is not sus-
tained. He had at least tw<» wives, one
of whom was a <laughter of Joseph C'ur-
nell. Another wife, the mother of his
son Alexander and two daughters, dit»<l
shortly befort* or soon after her husl)and's
death, Feb. 17, 1793, at Pensacola, Fla.
He was burie<l with Masonic honors in
the garden of William Panton, his
]>artner. (c. t.)
Xadiapnnga (* bad dust'; from nuttchi
*l>a<i', pnitfjo Must* (lleckeweMer), or
perha])S * mm-h dust,' from ynaMa * jrreat ',
m allusion to the sandy s(»il of the dis-
trict). An Algon<iuian t'rilie formerly liv-
ing in Hyde co., n. e. N. (-. In 1701 they
numbere<l cmly alnnit Si) warriors, or pt»f-
haps 100 souls, and lived in a single vil-
la^pB calleil Mattamuskeet. They took
part in the Tust»arora war of 1711-12 and
at its conclusion the remnant, together
with the Coree, were settled on a tract on
Mattamuskeet lake, where the two tril)e8
occupied one village. (j. m.)
Kaduwunffa.— LawHon (1714), Hist. Car., 383, repr.
1860. Matehapauffot.— Martin, N. C, i, 263. 1829.
KatehajBoiicoa.— iDld., 260. Katehapunfos.— Ibid..
244. Kttobepunco.— Letter of 1713 in N. C. Col.
Rce., II, 29, 1886.
Maohapnnga. A vil lage of the Powhatan
(»nfederat*y in Northampton co.,Va. It
was nearly extinct in 1722.
Katehapuako.— Hermann, map (1670), in Kep.on
Line between Va.and Ma..lM73.
Madiapnnga. A village on Potomait r.
about 1612.
Matohoponfo.— Stracliey utt.1612), Vh.,iw, 1849.
Macharienkonck. A Minisink village
formerly in the IkmkI of Delaware r., in
Pike CO*, Pa., opi)Osite Port Jervis. — Van
<ler Donck (1()5<)) (jiioted bv HuttenlnT,
TrilH^s Hudson R., tM>, 1S72. *
Machawa. A former Timucua town in
N.w. Flori<la, 24 m. e. (►f .\yavallaf(»rt, now
lola, on a river called Wicas^a.
Machaba.— JefTorys, French Dimi. Ani.,niHp, 1761.
Kaohaha.— Ibi<l., map, ISA. Kaohalla.— R<)tH>rts.
Fla., 15, 1763. Maohua.— Fniuli, Hist. Coll. I^.,2d
8.,26r>,note,1875.
Machemni. A division of the Mi wok
who lived l)et ween Oosumiu's and Moke-
lumne rs.. in Kldonnh) and Amador (•(►s.,
Cal.
Katohemnes.— Halo, Kthno^'. and Philol., 6\M),
1H46. Omatchanme.— Bancroft, Nat. Kaces, i. 4.tO.
1874. Omoohumniet.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, .hine
8, 1860. Omutohamne.— Bancroft, Nat. Ilaces, lA^iO,
1874. Omutohumnet.— Hale. op. <*it.
Machemoodm (properly Mntrh -ma-
«lfn<(\ 'there is a i)a<l noise.' — Trumbull).
\ tract on the k. bank of Ccmnecticut r.,
now inclinle<l in P^**t Iladdam tp., Mid-
<ih»sex CO., Conn., formerly tin* resilience
of a *' numerous trilK\" who were inde-
i>endent and famous for conjuring. The
ndians sold the tract in 16()2. F<»r an
account of the **Mo<hIus noises" see
TnimbuU, Hist. Ccmn., ii, 91, 92, 1818;
Barber, Hist. C(»ll., 525, 18.S9. (j. .m.)
Machamidoset.— I)(K\ of 1674 citi^ by Truml)ull,
Ind. Nameg(-onn., 18. Is8l. Xaohamoodus.— I)o<-.
of 1691, ibid. Kache Koodus.— Kend>ill. Travel.<4.
1. 100, 1809. Machmadoutet.— 1)(M>. of 1671 cited by
Trumbull, op. (*it. Katche Koodus.— Kendall, op.
dt. Matohi Koodua.— Ibid. Matchit Moodus.—
Doc. cited by Trumbull, op. cit.
Maoheno. An ancient villag(>, ]>robal>ly
Timuquanan, in w. central Florida, lat.
29° 8(y.— Bartram, Voy., i,map, 1799.
Machete. A former villageof the Awani
at the foot of Indian canyon, Yosemiti*
vallev, Mariposa CO., Cal. '
Kachayto.— Powers in Overland Mo., x. :«:{, lsl\.
Ma-che'-to.— Powers in Cont. N. \. Kthnol.. m,
366,. 1877.
Machiai ( * ba<l little place,* refcrrin^r to
the curn»nt in Machias r.; from mnU-he
M)ad *, sis the diminutive). \ villa^re t>f
the Passamaquoddv (m Machias r., Me.
Mechia*.— Treaty rep. ('1726) in Me. nist..<o<'.('oll.,
111,390,1853.
Machpnee. An Ottawa villajre, com-
monly called '* MaclnmtKi's village," from
the name of the resident chief, formerlv
near the month of Au Vaseau r., whicli i
flows into L. StClaij*, in lo\^r Michigan, ^
<m lan<l ce<Ie<I to tlie Unite<l States bv
treaty of May 9, 18:{(J. The chief, whow>
name is also*spelle<l Machonce, Maconce,
and MakoiuHJ, was drowned, while intoxi-
cated, al>out the year 1825 (Mich. I*ion.
Coll., V, 4W, 1884). (.1. .M.)
Maohonoe't yillage.— Detroit treaty (1807) in \\ S.
Ind. Treat., 194, 1873 ( misprint?). Machonee't vil-
lage.—Detroit treaty aH07) in Am. State Papers.
Ind. Aff., 1,747.1832.
Maclntoih, Chilly. A ( -reek <»hief. After
his brother William was slain by Menewa
forhavinglK'trayed theCreeks by ^'selling
the graves of their anwstors,** he Ix'came
782
MACINTOSH, WILLIAM- — ^MACKINAW
[B. A. ■.
the head of the minority party that ac-
?uie8ced in the proposed emigration to
ndian Ter. As such he frequently
visited Washington to treat with officials
re^rding the transfer of lands and ac-
quitted himself as a capable man of busi-
ness.— Stanley, Portraits Am. Inds., 13,
1852.
Macintosh, William. A mixed-blood
Creek, son of a Scotch trader and an
Indian woman. The United States, in
consideration of the relinquishment by
Georgia of the Mississippi territories, en-
gaged in 1802 to extinguish the Indian
titles to lands within the borders of the
state as early as could be peaceably done
on reasonable terms. A cession was pro-
cured in 1805 by which millions of acres
of Creek lands were transferred to Georgia.
The people of the state constantly clam-
WILUAM MACINTOSH. (mcKENNCY AND Hall)
ored for the fulfilment by the Govern-
ment of its compact, and the Creeks,
alarmed at the prospective wholesale
alienation of their ancient domain, on
the motion of Macintosh made a law
in .general council in 1811 forbidding the
sale of any of the remaining land under
penalty of death. Macintosh, who by
nls talents and address had risen to he
chief of the Lower Creeks, led the Creek
allies of the Americans in the war of 1812
with the rank of major and took the chief
part in the massacre of 200 of the hostile
Creeks, who were surprised at Atasi on
Nov. 29, 1813. He was prominent also
in the final battle with the hostiles, Mar.
27, 1814, when, at Horseshoe Bend, Ala.,
nearly a thousand warriors were exter-
minated. A large part of the territory of
the conquered tribe was confiscated and
opened to wh ite settlement. In 1818 more
lands were acquired by treaty, and in 1821
the fifth treaty was negotiated by Geor^[ian
citizens acting on benalf of the United
States, With Macintosh, who was in the
pay of the whites, and a dozen other
chiefs controlled by him, while 36 chiefs
present refused to sign and made clear to
the commissioners the irregularity of a
cession arranged with a party represent-
ing only a tenth of the nation, which to
be legal must have the consent of the
entire nation assembled in council. After
an attempt made by Macintosh to con-
vey more land in 1823 the law punishing
with death any Creek who offered to
cede more land was reenacted in 1824,
when 15,000,000 acres had already been
transferred and 10,000,000 acres remained
in possession of the Creeks, who had so
advanced in education and agriculture
that they valued their lands far more
highly than before. In the beginning of
1825 Georgian commissioners, working
upon the avarice of Macintosh, induceS
him and his followers to set their names
to a treaty ceding what remained of the
Creek domain. Although Secretary John
C. Calhoun had declared that he would
not recognize a treaty in which the chiefe
of the Creek nation did not acquiesce.
President Monroe laid it before the Senate,
and after the accession of President
Adams it was approved. The Creeks did
not rise in rebellion, as was expected, but,
in accordance with the tribal law already
mentioned, formal sentence of death was
passed on Macintosh, and was executed
on May 1, 1825, by a party of warriors
sent for that purpose, who surrounded
his house and shot him and a companion
as they tried to escape. Macintosh was a
signer of the treaties of Washington, Nov.
4, 1805; Ft Jackson, Ala., Aug. 9, 1814;
Creek Agency, Ga., Jan. 22, 1818; In-
dian Springs, Ga., Jan. 8, 1821, and Feb.
12,1825. (j. M.)
Mackinaw. (1) A sort of bateau or large
flatboat formerly much used by traders
and others; also called Mackinaw boat.
(2) A heavy blanket, also known as
Mackinaw blanket, formerly an im-
portant item of western trade. (3) A
coarse straw hat. (4) A species ot lake
trout (Salvelinus namaycusn). also termed
Mackinac trout. The word which has
assumed all these meanings is the place
name Mackinac, applied to the famous
trading post between L. Huron and
L. Michi^m. Mackinaw, representing
the Canadian French Mackinac, is iden-
tical with mahindk, the word for 'turtle'
in Chippewa and closely related dialects
of Algonquian; said also to be a reduction
of Michilimackinac (q. v.), a corruption
of an earlier mitchi maHnoib, sigoiiying
1ULL. 30]
M ACOCA NICO M A GIC
783
I big turtle' in Chippewa. According to
Or William Jones the Chippewa of Min-
lesota claim the word to be a shortened
jorm of inishiritmdkinunky 'place of the
big wounded or big lame i)er8on.* This,
however, may be an instance of folk ety-
mology, (a. f. c.)'
XaoocaniDo ('great house'). A village
on the w. bank of Patuxent r., in St
Marys co., Md., in 1608.
■MocanMO.— Bozman, Mar>'land, i, 141, 18:^7.
■mo oomMO.— Tooker, Algonq. Series, viii, 49,
1901 (misquoting Smith). Mooooanieo.— Smith
(ie29), VirBTinia, i, map, repr. 1819.
Kaeook gourd. See Maijcock.
Xacocks (perhaps from mahcawq,
* pumpkin . * -^Brin ton . See May cock ) . A
viUa^ located on Smith's map of 1608
(Smith, Va., i, repr. 1819) some distance
N. of Chikohoki, which, according to
Brinton, was near the present Wilming-
ton, Del. This would make Macocks a
Delaware village in s. e. Pennsylvania,
and Brinton thinks it may have been
the village of the Okahoki (q. v. ), a band
of the Delawares, formerly in Delaware
CO., Pa. (j. M.)
Macocqwer. See Maycock,
Macombo. A Papago village, prol>ably
in Pima co., Ariz., with 57 people in
1865.— Ind. Aff.^Rep., 135, 1865.
Xaooaiin. A Potawatomi village,
named after the resident chief, on the w.
bank of St Joseph r., Bemen CQ., ». w.
Mkb., in 1828.
Maeoufliii'i Village.— Royce in IKth Rep. B. A. K.,
Mich, map, 1H99. Maooutin Village.— U. S. Ind.
Treat (18&), 676, 1873.
Xaooyahni. A settlement in Sonora,
Mexico, formerly one of the i)rinci|)al
villages of the ilayo. In 1900 it con-
tain^ 182 Mayo in a total population of
972.
McQneen'i Village. A former Seminole
village on the e. side of Tampa bav, w.
Fla.— Bell in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War,
306, 1822.
Macsinum. A former village, presuma-
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal.— Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Maotati. A former Diegueilo rancheria
near San Diego, s. Cal.
Xaetati.— Ortega (1775) quoted by Bancroft, Hist.
Cal., I, 2!>4, 1884. Kagtate.— Ibid. San Miguel.—
Ibid.
Madawehioot {Ma-da^-weh'Siios, * porcu-
pine'). A gens of the Abnaki (q. v.). —
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 174, 1877.
Kadokawando. A Penobscot chief, born
in Maine about 161^, and adopted as a
son by Assaminastjua, a Kennebec chief.
His tribe was at peace with the English
colonists until made their enemy by dep-
redations upon his lands, when hostilities
began, and, uniting with the French, war
was waged against the English settle-
ments. In 1691 he attacked York, Me.,
killed 77 of the inhabitants, and laid the
place in ashes. This was but one of his
many raids, in which he was generally
aide<l by the French. His death occurred
in 1698. It is stated that, although a de-
termined foe, Madokawando's treatment
of prisoners >^a8 humane. The wife, or
pernaps more correctly the principal
wife, of the notorious BaVbn Castine, was
a daughter of Madokawando. ( c. t. )
Magaehnak. An ' ^ Indian com held ' ' or
settlement in 1678, 6 m. from Sudbury,
Middlesex co., Mass., probablv l)elong-
ing to the Praying Indians of the Massa-
chuset confeiieracv. Mentioned by Salis-
bury (1678) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
XIII, 520, 1881.
Magayateshni ( 'eats no geese ' ) . A I )and
of the M<lewakanton Sioux.
Grey-Iron.— Neil 1, Hi.st. Minn., 144, note, 1858
(trans, of Mazarota, the chief's namt*). Ha-ga-
yu-te«h-ni. Neill in Minn. Hist. Coll.. i, 2«3. 1H72.
kaia-yute-ini.— Dorse V in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 215,
1897. Maxa-yuto-oni.— Ibid. Ma-za-ro-U.— Neill,
Hist. Minn., 144, note, 1858.
Magdalena. A former Spanish mission
amons: the Indians of Lower California;
consolidated with the mission of San
Ignacio Kadakaman and abandoned prior
to 1740. Distinct from Santa Marfa 3lag-
dalena in the x. — Alcedo, Die. (Jeog., in,
19, 1783; Tavlor in Browne's Res, Pac.
Slope, app., 50,1869.
Magemint ^ * mink people ' ) . An Eskimo
tribe in habiting the lake country of Alaska
from C. Romanof almost to the Yukon.
Thev differ fro in the Kuskwogmiut chieHy
in dialect. They are vigorous and strong,
finding in the waters of the tundra plenty
of blackfish to nourish them at all sea-
sons. In winter they kill many hair seal
<m the floes, on which they venture with
their sleds, carrying canoes on which the
sleds are transf)orte<i in turn when it is
necessary to take to the water. They
build good houses of driftwood and the
bones of whales killed by the whaling
fleet, and the carcasses floating ashore
have long supplied them with food. The
tribe numl^ered 2,147 in 1890. The fol-
lowing are Magemiut villages: Anovok,
Chalit, Chifukluk, Gilak, Igiak, Kashu-
nuk, Kipniak, Kweakpak, Nanvogalok-
lak, Nunochok, Tefaknak, and Tiengak.
Ikvapnutet.— Raymond in Sen. Kx. Doc. 12, 42d
Cong., Ist sess., 28, 1871. Inkaliten.— Wrannrell
quoted by Dall in Cont. N. A. Kthnol.. i, 18, 1877.
lower Kviohpaks. — I^aymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12,
42d Cong., 1st RC8.S., 28, 1871. KangmjateB.—
Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., 5. 1885. Kantmutet.—
Colyer in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1869, 593. 1870. lUge-
mutet.— Dall in Proo. A. A. A. S., 267, 1869.
Kagimut.— Wmngell quoted by Dall in Cont. N.
A. Ethnol., I, 18, 1877. Kanmiiten.— Wrangell,
Ethnog. Nachr., 122. 1839. Mamniiit.— Worman
quoted by Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., 1. 18. 1877.
■annjateii.— Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz.. 5. 1855.
Magmutea.— Elliott. Cond. Aff. Alaska. 291, 1874.
Maimutit.— Latham in Jour, fit hnol. Soc. Lond.,
183. 1848. Kayimeuten.— Richardson. Aret. Ex-
ped., 370. 1851 (from Wrangell). Hunivak peo-
fle.— Worman q noted by Dall in Cont. N. A.
:thnol., I, 18, 1877.
Magic. There are authentic accounts
from various observers in many parts of
784
MAGIC
[B. A. K.
the New World, from the earUest histor-
ical period to the present time, that the
Indians practised so-called magic arts, or
sorcery. The earlier writers marveled
at these arts, and evidently wished their
readers to marvel. They often attributed
the power of the Indians to Satan. Father
Acosta, in the 16th centur>', spoke in awe
of the Mexican magicians nymg through
the air, assuming any form they pleased
and having telepathic knowledge of
events occurring at distant places, and
the same may be said in a general way
of the Eskimo. The Rev. Peter Jones
wrote in the first decade of the 19th cen-
tury: "I have sometimes ])een inclined
NAVAHO ARROW-8WALL0WER. (mattheWs)
to think tliat, if witchci:aft still exists in
the world, it is to be found among the
abori^nes of America.'* His ijersonal
experience was among the Chippewa.
The Nipissing were cafled Jongleurs by
the French on account of the expert-
ness in magic of their medicine men.
Some writers of the present day marvel
as much as did their predecessors; but
instead of attributing the phenomena to
Satan, seek the cause in spirits or some-
thing equally occult. The feats of Indian
magicians, as a rule, may be easily ex-
plained as sleight-of-hand tricks, and their
prophecy and telepathy as the results of
collusion. Their tricks are deceptions,
very ingenious when it is considered how
rude their tools and appliances are, but
not to be compared with the acts of civ-
ilized conjurers who make claim to no
superhuman aid.
bistinct f rom such tricks of illusion and
deceit, there is evidence that the Indians
were and still are versed in hypnotism,
or, better, ** suggestion." Carver (1776-
78) speaks of it among the Sioux, and
J. E. Fletcher observed it among the
Menominee about the middle of the last
century. Mooney describes and pictures
the condition among modern Indians
(see Ghost dance).
Sleight-of-hand was not only much em
ployed in the treatment of disease, but was
used on many other occasions. A very
common trick among Indian charlatans
was to pretend to suck foreign bodies, such
as stones, out of the persons of their pa-
tients. Records of this are found among
many tribes, from the lowest in culture to
the highest, even among the Aztecs. Of
course such trickery was not without some
therapeutic eflScacy, for it, like many
other proceedings of th^» shamans, was
designed to cure disease by influence on
the imagination. A Hidatsa residing in
Dakota in 1865 was known by the name
Cherry-in-the-mouth bt^caiise he had a
trick of producing from his month, atany
season, what seemed to be fresh wild cher-
ries. He had found some way of preserv-
ing cherries, perhaps in whisky, and it was
easy for him to hide them in his mouth
before intending to play the trick; but
many of the Indians considered it won-
derful magic.
The most astonishing tricks of the In-
dians were displayed in their fire cere-
monies and in handling hot substances,
accounts of which performances pertain
to various tribes. It is said that Chip-
pewa sorcerers could handle with impu-
nity red-hot stones and burning brands,
and could bathe the hands in boilmg water
or syrup; such magicians were called ** fire-
dealers" and ** fire-handlers." There
are authentic accounts from various parts
of the world of fire-dancers and fire-walks
among barbarous races, and extraordinary
fire acts are performed also among widely
separated Indian tribes. Among the Ari-
kara of what is now North Dakota, in the
autumn of 1865, when a large fire in the
center of the medicine lodge had died
down until it became a bed of glowing
embers, and the light in the lodge was dim,
the performers ran with apparently bare
feet among the hot coals and threw these
around in the lodge with their bare hands,
causing the spectators to flee. Among
the Navaho performers, nake<l except for
breechcloth and moccasins, and having
BDLL. 30]
MAGNUS MAGUIAQUr
785
their bodies daubed with a white infu-
sorial cla^, run at high speed around a
fire, holding in their hands great fagot*^ of
flaming ce<lar bark which they apply to
the bare backs of those in front of them
and to their own i^ersons. Their wild
race around the fire is continue<l until the
fagots are nearly all eonsume<i, but they
are never injureil by the flame. Thin
immunity may be accounted for by sup-
posing t)hat the cedar bark does not make
a verj' hot fire, and that the clay coating
protects the Ixidy. Menominei* shamans
are said to handle fire, as also are tlie
female son^erers of Honduras.
Indians know well how to han<lle ven-
omous ser]>ents with impunity. If thoy
can not avoid being bitten, as they usu-
ally can, they seem to 1h» able to* avert
the fatal consequences of the bite. The
wonderful acts performed in the Snake
dance (q. v. ) of the Hopi have often l)een
describeil.
A trick of Navaho danci»rs, in the cere-
mony of the Mountain chant, is to pre-
tend to thrust an arrow far down the
throat In this feat an arrow with a tele-
scopic shaft is used; the i)oint is held l)e-
tween the teeth; the hollow part of the
handle, covered with plumes, is forcinl
down towanl the lips, and thus the arrow
appears to be 8wallowe<l. There is an
account of an arrow of similar construc-
tion use<l early in the 18th century by
Indians of Canada who pretended a 'man
was wounded by it and liealed instantly.
The Navaho also pretend to swallow
sticks, which their neighlxjrs of the
pueblo of Zufii actually do in sacrwi rites,
occasionally rupturing the esophagus in
the ordeal of forcing a stick into the stom-
ach . Sptvial societies w h ich pract ise mag-
ic, havingfortheirchief object rainmaking
and the cure of diseases exist among the
southwestern tribes. Swallowing sticks,
arrows, etc., eating ami walking on fire,
and trampling on cactus are performed
by members of the same fraternity.
Magicians are usually men; ])ut among
the aborigines of the Mosquito coast in
Central America they are often women,
who are called mkias^'siml are said to ex-
ercise ^reat power. Acconling to Hewitt
Iroquois women are rt»j)orted tradition-
ally to have been magicians.
A trick of the juggler among many
tribes of the n. was to cause himself to
be bound hand and foot and then, with-
out visible assistance or effort on his part,
to release himself from the bonds. Civ-
iliased conjurers who perfonn a similar
trick are hidden in a calnnet and claim
supernatural aid; but some Indian jug-
glers performed this feat under observa-
Bon. It was common for Indian magi-
cians to pretend they could bring rain,
but the trick consisted simply of keeping
Bull. 30—05 50
up ceremonies until rain fell, the last cere-
mony l)eing the one credited with suc-
cess, (^atliii describes this among the
Man<lan in 18;52, an<l the practice is still
couiinon among the Pueblo tril)es of the
arid ri»gion. The rain maker was a s|>e-
cial functionary among the Menominee.
To cause a large plant to grow to ma-
turity in a few moments and out of si»ason
is another Indian trick. The Navaho
plant the root stalk of a yucca in the
ground in the middle of winter and appar-
ently cause it to grow, bloss<»m, and l)ear
fruit in a few moments. This is done by
the use of artificial flowers and fniit caf-
ric^'l under the blankets of the perform-
ers; the dimness of the firelight and the
motion of the surrounding dancers hide
from the s|H*ctators the operations of the
shaman when he exchanges one artificial
object for another. In this way the Hopi
grow 1)eans, and the Zuni corn* the latter
using a large cooking pot to cover the
growing plant. See Ih-amatic represeyita-
tionf Mcfficitir nmf Medir'nie'inen^Orendn.
Consult the works of H. II. Bancroft,
Carver, Catlin, Fewkes, Fletcher, Hoff-
man, Peter Jones, Lummis, Matthews,
Mo<mey, M. ( ■. Stevenson, and others, in
the Bibliography. (w. m.)
Magnm. A woman chief of the Nar-
ragsuiset, sister of Ninigret, one of the six
sachems of their countrv in 1675 (Drake,
Abor. Races, 248, 1880).' She was killed
by the English after her capture in a
swamj) fight near Warwick, R. I., in 1(576.
She was also known as Matantuck, of
which Magnus is probably a corruption,
andas(iuaia|Km,( )1<1 (^uet^n, etc. Her hus-
band was a son of ( 'anonicus. ( a. f. c. )
Magtok. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Maguaga. A Huron village on Ma-
guagacr., Midi., H »»• »• w. of Detroit, on
a tract n^erve<i for the use of the Indians
by act of Feb. 28, 180t), and ceded to the
Tniteil States ])v treatv of St Marvs, O.,
Sept. 20, 1818.
Hagaugo.— I)nik(>, Bk. Inds.. v, 125, 1848. Ka-
guaga.— Bntwn. W. (laz.. 161, 1H17. Xaguago. —
Dmke, Ind.Clmm.. 196. 1836. Maguagua.— Royce
in 18th Rep' B.A.K., Mich. map. \m. Haguawgo.—
Doc. of 1809 in Am. St. Pap.. Ind. AIT.. 1.796.1832.
Kaugaugon.— Miami Ra[>ids treaty (1819) in V. S.
Ind. TreaUfs. 201, 1873. Kenquagen.— Wyandot
petition (1812) in Am. State PaiMTs. op. cit.,795.
Honguagon. — Ilowe, Hist. Coll. ,262, 1851.
Magnhleloo ( ' carilx m ' ) . A gens of the
Abnaki, q. v.
Magalibo.— J. I). Prince, inf'n. 1905 (m(»deni St
Francis Abnaki form). Xa-guU-le-loo'.— Morgan,
Anc. Sec., 174, 1877.
Magniaqui. A division of the Varohio,
in 8. Sononi, Mexico, on the w. l>ank of
Rio Mayo, n. of Alamos, lat. 27° 25', Ion.
109° 20^ They occupied a village of the
same name, and some of them live<l with
the Chinipas at San Andn^'s Chinipas. —
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 58,324, 1864.
&.€b
f*^
786
MAGUINA ^MAHICAN
[B. A.a.
Maguina. A pueblo in w. Chihuahua,
Mexico, i)ro]>ably Ijetween lat. 28® and
29°. As it is on the border land of the
Nevome and Tarahuraare and not far from
the main habitat of the Tepehuane, it
doubtless contains or contained a mixed
population. The village has therefore
DtM^n assigned by various writers to one or
another of those tribes. Orozco y Berra's
map includes the village in Nevome
country.
San Joan B[autUta1. Kaguina. — Orozeo y Berra,
GeoK., 324,1864.
Magunkaqnog (originally Magwonkko-
mukf * place of the gift,' or * granted place'
(Eliot), possiblv afterward changed by
the Indians t<> the present form, meaning
* place of great trees.' — Trumbull). A vil-
lage of Christian Indians in Nipmuc terri-
tory, at Hopkinton, Middlesex co., Mass.,
in 1674. On the name, seeTnmibull and
Tooker, cited below. Cf . Mangunckahick.
Magoncog.— LivinKHton (1678) in X. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., XIII, 52H, 1881. Maga>onlckomuk.— Eliot (1669)
quottil by Tooker, Algonq. Ser., x, 26, 1901. Ma-
funcof.— Rawson(1678) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
XIII, 521. 1881. Kagonkahquog.— Tnimbull, Ind.
NamcH Conn., 18, 1881. Maraikakook— Tooker,
Algon(i. Ser., x, 27, 1901. Kagankaqaog.— Cloo-
kin (1674) in Mass. Hist. See. Coll., 1st s., i, 188,
1806. Magunkoag.— Gookin (1677) in Trans. Am.
Antiq. Soc., Ii, 443, 1836. Xagunkog.— Ibid., 470.
Majunkaquog.— Eliot quoted by Tooker, Algon(|.
Ser., X, 2.5, 1901. Makunkokoag.— Gookin (1677) in
Trans. Am. Antiq. So<>., Ii. 435, 1836. Mogkun-
kakauke.— Tooker, op. cit, 27. Koogankawg.—
Stone (1767) in Mass. Hist. Soe. Coll., 1st s., x, 82,
1809.
Magwa (Ma-guu^j Moon'). A gens of
the Shawnee {q. v.). — Morgan, Anc. Soc.,
168, 1877.
Maha ( 'caterpillar ' ) . C? iven by Bourkc
(Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ii, 181, 1889) as a
clan of the Mohave, (|. v.
Mahackemo. The princii)al chief of a
small band on Norwalk r., s. w. Conn.,
which sold lands in 1640 and 1641. See
Norwalk,
Kahaokemo.— De Forest, Inds. of 0)nn., 177, 1851.
Kakaokeno.— De Forest as quoted by Ruttenber,
Tribes Hudson R., 82, 1872.
Xahahal. A former Chumashan vil-
lage on San Cayetano ranch, Yjentura co.,
Cal. — Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo-
cab.,B.A.E.,1884.
Kahala mats. A California name of
Ceanothus prostratus, also known as
squaw's carpet. Mahahi, more often mo-
haky is often used as synonymous with
**s(iuaw" in California by the whites.
If not from Spanish mujer, * woman,' it
is from Yokuts muk^da, having the same
meaning. (a. p. c. a. l. k.)
Maharolnkti ( Ma-har-o-luk^ -ti, * brave ' ).
Asulwlanof theDelawares (q. v.). — Mor-
gan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877.
Mahaikahod. A hunting village of the
Manahoac in 1608, <»n Rappahannock r.,
Va., at the limit of the Powhatan con-
federacy, probably near Fredericksburg.
Xahaakahod.— Smith (1629),>Va. I, map, repr.
1819. Kohaakahod.— Sinions in Smith, ibid., 186.
Kahcoah. The principal village of the
Toquart(q. V. ) on Village passage, Barclay
sd., w. coast of Vancouver id.— Can. Ind.
Aff., 263, 1902.
Mahewala. A village fonuerly on the
lower Mississippi, destroyed about the
close of 1681 or early in 1682; perhaps
a settlement of the Ta'ngibao, q. v.
lIahehonalaima.~La Salle (1682) in Margry, Dte.,
11,198.1877. Kaheouala.— Ibid.. 190. Xaheoola.—
La M^tairie (1682) quoted by French, Hist Coll.
La., II, 23, 1876.
Mahican ^ * wolf ' ) . An Algonquian tribe
that occupied botli banks of upper Hud-
son r., in New Yorkj extending n. almost
to L. Cham^lain. To the Dutch they were
known as River Indiann, while the French
groui)ed them j^nd the closely connei!ted
Munsee and Delawares un<ler the name
of Loups (* wolves'). The same tribes
were called Akochakancfi ( * stammerers' )
bjr the Iroquois. On the w. bank they
joined the Munsee at Catskill cr., and on
the E. bank they joine<l the Wappinger
near Poughkeeiwie. They extended s.
into Massachusetts and held the upper
part of Ilousatonic valley. Their council
tire was at Schodac, on an island near
Albany, an<l it is i)robable that they had
40 villages within their territory. The
name, in a variety of fonns, has been ap-
plied to all the Indians from Hudson r. to
Narrapmsett bay, but in practical use has
l)een limited to two bodies, one on lower
Connecticut r.. Conn., known dialectically
as Mohegan (q. v.), the other, on Hud-
son r., known as Mahican. They were
engaged in a war with the Mohawk, their
nearest neighbors on the w., when the
Dutch appeared on the scene, which
lasted until 1673. In 1664 the inroads of
the Mohawk comi>elled them to remove
their council fire from Schodac to West-
enhuck, the modern Stockbridge, Mass.
As the settlements crowded upon them
the Mahican sold their territory piece-
meal, and about 1730 a large bo&y of
them emigrated to Susciuehanna r. and
settled near Wyoming, Pa., in the vicin-
ity of the Delawares and Munsee, with
whom they afterward removed to the
Ohio region, finally losing their identity.
A previous emigration had formed the
mam body of tlie mixed tribe of the
Scaticook.' As early as 1721 a band of
Mahican found their way to Indiana,
where they had a village on Kankakee r.
In 1736 those living in Housatonic val-
ley were gathered into a mission at Stock-
bridge, Mass., where they maintained a
separate existence under the name of
Stockbridge Indians. These are the only
Mahican who have preserved their iden-
tity. In 1756 a large body of Mahican
anil Wapjnnger removed from the Hud-
son to the E. branch of the Susquehanna,
settling, with the Nanticoke and others,
under Iroquois protection at Chenango,
Chugnnt, and Owego, in Broome and Ti-
BULL. 30]
MAHIOAN
787
oga cc»8., N. Y. They prolwibly laterfoiui<l
their wav to their kindre<l in the W. A
few Mah lean reinaine<la}K)ut their aiu'ient
honien on the Hu<iw)n for nonie years af-
ter the Revolution, but linally <lisap-
peare<l unnoticed. If any remain they
are indu(ie<i anionjr the Stock) )ri(lge.
Aceordinjr to Kuttenl)er the Mahican
wmfeileracy coniprised at leant 5 divisions
or 8u!)trilHv — the Mahican pro|K»r, Wie-
kaejoc, Mechkentowoon, Wawyaditonoc,
ana Westenhuck (Stockhriilvrt^s). It is
impoHi!«il)le to ivtiniate their i>opulation,
as the different ban* Is were always con-
founde<l or includeil with nei^rilM)rin^
tribiv, of whom they afterward iK'came
an inte^rral imrt.
An'onlinj; to Ruttt»nlK»r's account the
j^overnment of the Mahican was a demor-
racy, hut his statement that the otlice <»f
chief sadiem was hereditary by the linc-
a>rt» of the wife <»f the siichem, which ap-
l>ears to Ih» (M>rnH*t, does not in<li{"ate a
real denuM'racy. His statement in repird
to the dutit* (►*f the siicheniand other ofli-
(vrs is as follows: "The sachem was as-
Histe«l by counselors, and also by one hero,
one owl, and one runner; the rest of the
nation were calUsl younj^ men or war-
riors. The sachem, or more i)roi)erly
king, HMnaintHi at all times with his triln*
ami consulted their welfan*; he had
char)ri» of the mtiotij or ba^r of i)eace,
which containc<i the lH*lts ami strings
uee<l to ivtablish iH»ace and friendshii)
with different nations, and concludtHl all
treaties <mi In^half of his i>eople. The
iX)unst»l<»rs were electe<l, and wen» calliMl
chiefs. Their business was to <'onsult
witli their Siichem in promoting? the jK^ace
and happines** of their ]H»ople. The title
of hero was jrotten only by couni^re and
prudence in war. When a war-alliance
wai* askiMl, or cauw for war existtMi with
another triln*, the sachem an<l the coun-
selors consulted, and if they conclude<l to
take up the hatchet, the niatter was ])ut
in the hands of the heroes for execution.
When |H.»ace was proiKtstnl, the heroes put
the negotiations m the hands of the sa-
chem and coun8el<»rgi. The ollice of owl
was also one of merit. He nuist have a
strong memorv. ami must Ik* a ^(kmI
speaker. His laisiness wa** to sit Inside
his sachem, and proclaim his orders to
tlie i)eople with a loud voici^* and also to
get up every morning as w>on as day-
light an<l aV(»usi» the jH»ople, and order
them to their daily duties. The business
of nuiner was to* carry messages, and to
convene councils.**
The Mahican weri» generally well built.
As fighting men they wert* iKTtidious, ac-
complishing their designs by treachery,
using stratag(>m to<leceive their enemies,
and making their most hazardous attacks
under cover of darkness. The women
ornamented themselves more than the
men. **A11 wear around the waist a
girdle made of the fin of the whale or of
sewant.'* The men originally wore a
breechcloth made of skins, but after the
Dutch came those who could obtain it
wore "l)etween their legs a lap of duffels
(*loth half an ell broad and nine ({uarters
long,'* which they ginle<l around their
waists and drew up in a fold **witha
flap of each end hanging down in fnmt
and n^ar." In a<ldition to this they had
mantles of feathers, and at a later peri(Hl
decke<l themselves with ** plaid duffels
cloth'* in the form of a sash, whirh wbm
worn over the right shoulder, drawn in
a "knot arouml tlie lunly, with the ends
extending <i()wn l)eh»w the kniM's. When
the young men wislunl to look esi)ecially
attractive th<'y wore *'a band alnuit their
heads, yianufacture<l and braided, of
scarlet dt»er hair, interwoven with soft
shining rc<l hair." Acconling to Van der
Donck, the women wore a cloth around
their lxHiii»s fastentMl by a girdle which
ext4»ndi»il below the knees, but next to
the IxKly, under this ct)at, they ustnl a
dresse<l (leerskin coat, girt around the
waist. The lower Inxly (►f this skirt they
ornamented with strips tastefully deco-
rattnl with wampum whitrh was fre-
t|uently worth from 1(X) to 'MIO guilders
($40 to $120). They bound their hair
iH'hind in a club, about a hand long, in
the form of a lu^aver's tail, over which
they <lrew a s<|uare wampum-ornamenttMl
cap; ami when they <lesired to \>e tine
they drew around the fondiead a band
also ornamented with wampum, which
was fastened l)ehin<l in a knot. Around
their necks they hung various ornaments;
they also w( )re brace lets, curiously wrought
and interwoven with wampum. Polyg-
amy was practist»d to some extent, though
mostly by chiefs. Maidens were alloweil
to signify their desin* to enter matrimo-
nial life, upon which a marriage would l)e
formally arranged ; widows and widowers
were left to their own inclinations. In
addition to the u.**ual manifestations of
grief at the dejith of a relative or friend,
they cut off their hair and burned it on the
grave. Their <lea<l, acconling to Huttt'U-
l)er, were usually interriMl in a sitting
I>osture. It was usual to ])la<'e by the
side of the bo<ly a pot, kettle, platter,
siw>on, antl i)rovisions; W(M)<1 wa** then
])laccHl around the body, and the wliole
wa** covertMl with earth and stom»s, out-
side of which ])ickets were erected, so
that the tomb resembled a little house.
Their houst^s were of the c<»nnuunal sort
and diffennl usually only in Jength; they
, were fonniMlby long, slender, hickory .sap-
lings set in the ground in a straight line
in two rows. The |K)les were then lH»nt
toward each other in the form of an arch
788
MAHICAN
[B. A.B.
and secured together, giving the appear-
ance of a garden arbor; the sides and roof
wore then lathe<l with split poles, and
over this bark was lapped and fastened
by withes to the lathing. A smoke-hole
was left in the roof, and a single door-
way was provided. These houses rarely
exceeded 20 ft in width, but they were
sometimes 180 ft long. Their so-called
castles were strong, lirm structures, and
were situated usually on a steep, high,
flat-topi>ed hill, near a stream. The top
of the hill was inclosed with a strong
Ftockade, having large logs for a founda-
tion, on both sides of which oak posts,
forming a palisade, were set in the
ground, the upj>er ends being crossed
and joined together. Inside the walls of
such inclosures they not infre<iuently had
20 or :^0 houses. 'Besides their strong-
holds they had villages and towns which
wen* inclosed or stockaded and which
usually had wocniland on one side and
corn land on the other. Their religious
1 reliefs were substantiallv the same as
those of the New England Indians.
Barton gives, the Mahican 3 clans:
Much(iuauh (bear), Mechchaooh (wolf),
Toonpaooh (turtle). According to Mor-
gan tiiey had originally the same clans
as the Delawares and Alunsee— the Wolf,
Turtle, and Turkey; but these ultimately
develoi)ed intophratriei<, subdivided into
clans as follows: The Tooksetuk (wolf)
phratry into the Nehjao (wolf), Makwa
(Ix^ar)^ Ndeyao (dog), and Wapakwe
(opossum) clans; the Tonebao (turtle)
phratry into the (Jakpomute (little tur-
tle), — (mud turtle), Tonebao (great
turtle), and Wesawmaun (yellow eel)
clans: , the Turkey phratry into
the Naahmao (turkey), Gahko (crane),
ami (chicken) clans.
The villages of the Mahican, so far as
their names have been recorded, were
Aepjin, Kaunaumeek (Stockbridge), Ma-
ringoman's Castle, Monemius, Potic,
f>cati(!ook (3 villages in Dutchess and
Rensselaer cos., N. Y., and Litchfield co..
Conn.), Schodac, Wiatiac, Wiltmeet,
Winooskeek, and Wyantenuc.
(.1. M. (.'. T.)
Agotsaganet.— (Uark quoted bv Brinton, Lcnape
Leg.. 255. 1885 (; ' '
stutterers.' 'those who speak a
^_ „_.„ : Mohawk name). Agotsagen-
ent.— Jogues (m. 1640) quoted by Shea, Miss.
Val.. 165. 1852. AgoxhagauU.— Ettwein (1848)
quoted bv Brinton, op. cit. 14. Akoohakanen'.—
Hewitt, Inf'n. 1906 (Iroouois name). Aquatsa-
gan^.— RMnautsand Rapilly. map, 1777. Aquatza-
gane.— Sirhoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 532, 1853.
Atsayongky.— De I^et (1633) in N. Y. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 2d 8.. 1.315,1841. Canoe Indiana —Gale, Upper
Miss. . 169. 1867 (so called by whites). Hikanagi.—
(}aUH»het. Shawnee MS., B. A. E. (Shawnee name) .
Loo's.— Coffen (1754) in N Y. Doc. Col. Hist. vi,836,
18.55. Loups.- Fl-ench doc. of 1665. ibid., ix, 38,
1855. Machicant.— Hendricksen (1616), ibid., i,
14, 18.5(>. Machingans.— Jefferys, French Doms ,
pt. 1, 136, 1761. Mahakanders.- Markham (1691)
in N. Y. Doc. Col Hist., in, 809, 1853. Maha
kan«.— Hazard, Coll. Am. State Papers, i,520, 1792.
Kahokanders.— Dongan (1687) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., HI, 439,1853 (mi.sprint). Kahegan.— Vaillant
(1688), ibid., 521. Kaheingans.— Iberville (1699) in
Margry, Ddc. , i v, 342, 1880. Xahekanden.— Living-
ston (1687) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ni, 481. 1858.
Mahhekaneew.— Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 268, 1816.
Kahicanders.- Doc. of 1646 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist,
1,184, 18,56. Mahicanni.— Barton,New Views, xxxl,
1797. Mahicant.— Map m. I(il4 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., 1,1856. Mahiocanni.—Heckewelder quoted
bv Thompson. L<mg. Id., i,76, 184:^. Kahioeaaa.—
Barton, New Views, xxxix, 1797., Mahiooon.—
Thomson (m. 1785) quoted by Barton, ibid.,
xxxii. MahiQon.— Barton, ibid., xi, 1798. Mahi-
gan.— Vaillant (1688) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ni,
522, 18.53. Mahiganathiooit.— Champlain (1619).
Vov., 11, 142, 1880. Hahiganatiooit.— Champlain
(16i27), (Euvres, v, pt. 2, 135, 1870. KaUgaa-
AUooit.— Ibid., 209. Mahigane.— La Salle (1681) in
Margrv, Ddc. n, 148, 1877. Mahiggint.— Clobery
(16:«) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i, 78, 1866. Wk-
hik'.— Hewitt, infn, 1886 (Tu.scarora name).
Kahikan.— D<K>. of 1644 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., I,
151. 1856. Mahikanders.— Doc. of 1661, ibid., 642.
Kahikkanders.- Romcr (1700), ibid., iv, 799, 1854.
Mahillendras.— Dongan (1688), ibid., in, .533, 1863
(mi.«<print?). Mahinganak.— Jes. Rel. for 1646. 8,
1858. Mahinganioi8.—Jes. Rel. for 1652, 26. 1868. Ka-
hingant.— Jes. Rel. for 1646, 3, 1868. Kahiagana.—
Richardson, Arct. Exped.. ii, 39, 1861 (misprint).
Mahycander.— Doc. of 1660 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., xni. 165. 1881. Maicandert.— Doc. (ra. 1643),
ibid.. 1, 196, 1866. Kaikans.— Waasenaar {ca.
1626) quoted by Ruttenber, Trilnjs Hudson R., 68,
1872. Maikens.- \Va.ssenaar (1632) quoted by Rut-
tenber, ibid. Makioander.— Nicolls (1678) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., xni, 516. 1881. Makihander.—
Boudinot. Star in the West, 99, 1816. MaU-
manes.- Mapof 1616 in N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., 1,1856.
Makingans.— .leflFerys, French Doms.. pt. i, 11,
1761. Malukander.— Glen (1699) in X. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., IV, 558, 1854 (misprint). Manhikani.—
De I^et (1633) (juoted by Vater, Mith., pt. 3,
sec. 3, 390, 1816. Manhikans.— Vater, ibid. Kan-
Wngant.— Ruttenbt^r, Tribi»s Hudson R., 67, 1872.
Manikans.- De Laet (ca. 1633) quoted by Jones.
Ind. Bull., 6, 1867. Mankikani.— De Laet quoted
bv Barton, New Views, xxxi, 1797. Kaundgana.—
Bacqueville de la Potherie, in, 126, 1763. Kauray-
gans.— Writer of 1691 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX,
513, 1855. Mayekanders.- De Vries ( 1655) quoted by
Ruttenber,TribesHudsonR.,105, 1872. Maygana-
thiooise.— Champlain {ca. 1619) in Shea, Miss.
Va 1 . , 1 r)5, 1 8.52. Maykanders.- Doc. of 1 650 i n N . Y.
Doc. Col. Hist.. I, 412. 18.^6. Kehihammers. — New
York conf. (17.53) , ibid., vi. 782, 18.5.5. Mhikana.—
(fats<'het, Snawnee MS.. B. A. E., 1880 (Shawnee
form ). Miheconders.— Canajoharie conf. (1769) in
N. Y. D(H'. Col. Hist.. VII, 393, 185(i. Kihicand^n.—
FtJohnsonconf.(1756),ibid.,50. Koheakanneewa—
Morse, Mod. Geog., i. 54. 1814. Koheakenonks.—
(^lark, Onondaga, i, 18. 1849. Koheakounuok.—
Doc. of 1774 quoted by Ruttenber. Tribes Hudson
R., 269. 1872. Moheakunnuks.- Morse, Rep. to
Sec. War., 76, 1822. Kohecan.- Dawson in Drake.
Bk. Inds., V, 77, 1848. Moheckont.— Peters (1761) in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix, 440, 1871. Kohe-
connock.— Doc. of 1791 quoted by Si^hoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, v, 668, 18.%. Mo-heegan.— Stiles (1756)
(juoted by Brinton, I^nape I>eg., 35, 1885. Mohe-
kin.— Letter of 1771 (juoted by Ruttenber, Tribes
Hudson R.. 194, 1872. Mo-he-kun-e-uk.-M organ,
Anc. Soc, 113, 1877. Mo-he'-kun-ne-uk — Mo^an,
Consang. and A ffi n . , 289, 1870. Mohekunnukt.— Mor-
gan, League Iroq., 45.18.51. Mohekunoh.— Belknap
and Morse ni Ma.ss.llist. Soc.CoU., lsts.,v, 12,1816.
Mohicander.— Johnson {ca. 1756) quoted by Rut-
tenber, Tribes Hudson R. , 231 , 1872. Mohioanda.—
Lovelace (1669) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiii, 489,
1881. Mohican" —Doc. of 1676, ibid., xiv, 718, 1883.
Mohicans— Michaellus (1628), ibid., ii, 769, 1858.
Mohicoons — Hutchins (1768) quoted by Jefferson,
Notes. 142, 1826. Mohiokan.— Doc. of 1755 quoted
bv Rupp, Northampton Co., 88, 1846. Mohiokan-
ders.— Johnson (1756) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii,
136, 18.56 Mohioken — (^roghan (1760) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll.. 4ths . IX, 378. 1871. Mohickoni.- Weiser
(1748) quoted by Rupp. West. Penn., app., 16,
1846. Mohigon.— Yong (1634) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
BULL. 30]
MAHKTOSIS MAIOOBA
789
Coll., Ith s., IX, 1*29, 1871. Kohikan.— Bouquet
(1761), ibid., 431. Kohikander.— Ft Johuson
conf. (1756) In N. Y. I)»k'. Col. Hist., vii, 152,
185(>. Kohikonden.— Johnson (1756). ibid.. 118.
Kohikont.— Hut<>hin8 map in Smith, BouiiuotN
Exped.,1766. Kohingant.— McKenney and llall,
Ind. TribeH. iii, 79,1854. Mohincaus.— Ibid. Mo-
hocandera.— Salisbury (1678) in N.Y. Doe.Col. Hist..
Xlir,520, 1881. Mohosans.— Owaneco'sKep.l 1700),
Ibid., IV, 614, 1854. Mohokanders.— Deed qu(>ted !)y
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R.. 88, 1872. Mohuo-
eona.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816. Ko-
hnoooriea.— I bid. Morahioandera.— lx>u\vrensen
(1668)in N.Y. Doo.Col. Hi8t..xin.9l),1881. Morai-
gane.— La Salle (168nin Margrv, IKV., u,148, 1877.
Horaiguna.— I)<K>. of 17.VJ in N. Y. 1)«k'. ('<»]. Hist., x,
982,1858. Moraingans.— Vaudreuil (1757), ibid.,
579. Morargana.— Vaudreuil (17tK)). ibid.. 1091.
Kourigan.— Bond i not. Star in the West. 1)9. 1816.
Muokhekaniea.— Ibid., 127. Kuhekannew.— Vater,
Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3.391, 1816. Muhheakunneuw.—
Holmes (1804) in Ma.sH. Hist. Soc. Coll.. 1st s., ix.
100,1804. Kuhheakunnuk.— Ibid. Kuhheoonnuok.—
Pickering (1791) in Am. State I'ap., Ind. Aff.. i, 169,
1832. Muhheeokanew.— Kuttenbt>r. Tribes Hudson
R., 41, 1872. Kuh-hee-kun-eew.—St(K>k bridge let-
ter, H. R. Mis»c. Doo. 69.;^2d Cimg.. l.st seas.. 1. 18.52.
Kuhhekaneew.— Edwanlsi 1788) in Mass. Hist.S<H».
Coll., 2d s., X, 84. 1823. Muhhekaneok.— Ibid. (pi.
of Muhhekaneew). Kuhhekanew.— K d \v a r d s
il801) quoted by Kendall, Trav., ii, 305, 180'».
[uhhekaniew. — Schoolcraft quote<1 by Kutten-
ber. Tribes Hudson K., 51 , 1872. Kuhhekanneuk.—
Boyd, Ind. Uxal Names. 27. 1885. Muhhckanok.—
Hopkins quote<l bv Ruttenber. Tribes Hudson
R.. 320, 1872. Kuhhekenow.— Clinton quoted bv
Schoolcraft, Trav., 29, 1821. Muhhekunneau.—
Daggett (1821) in Mass. Hist. S<m-. (^)ll.. 2d
R., IX, xli, 1822. Kuhhekunneyuk.— Holmes
(1804). ibid.. Ists.. ix. 100, isoi (plural). Kuhke-
kaneew.— Drake, Bk. Inds.. ii, 87, 1848. Mukick
ana.— Weiser (1748) (quoted by Sch<K)lcraft, Ind.
Tribes, iv. 6a5, 1854. Mukkekaneaw.— Boudinot.
Star in the West, 99, 1816. Nhikana.— <iatschet,
Shawnee MS.. B. A. E., 1880 (Shawnee name).
Ornngea. — ('hauvignerie (1736) quoted bv Sch<K)l-.
craft, Ind. Tribes, iii. 554, 18;)3. Ouiagies.— McKen-
ney and Hall. Ind.Triln's. in, 79. 1854. Ourages.—
Macauley. N. Y.. ii, 162. 1829. Ouragies.— Coldeii
(1727), Five Nations, 95. 1747. Poh-he-gan.— Stiles
in Mass. Hist. S<»c. Coll.. 1st s., ix, 76. 1804.
River Indians.— Early Dutch name. Tumewand.—
Rafinesque, Am. Nations, i.i:^, 18:)6. Uragees.—
Colden (17*27) . Five Nations. 102. 1747.
Mahktoiii. Ttio principal villagt' of the
Ahonsaht (q. v.), on Matilda cr., Clayo-
?iiot sd., w. (»oa'^t of Vanconver id.— Can.
nd. Aff., 2()4. 1902.
Mahoa. Probably the same a.<? Maxua,
the chief of the Maainta^yila, a Kwakiiitl
geiiH, but applied !>y (ialiano (Relacion,
103, 18()2), in the S])anish form Majoa,
to his village or to the gens itself.
Xahohivai {Mdhthlrax, *red shield').
A warrior society of the Cheyenne (<|. v. ) ;
also aometinu'H known a.s Ilotoa-nutcpu,
*BuffaIo-bnll warriors.' (.i. m.)
Red Shield.— Dorsey in Field Coluinb. Mus. Tub.,
no. 99. 15, 19a5.
Mahoning ('at the lick.*— Heckewel-
der). A Delaware village in 17B4 on the
w. bank of Mahoning r., perhai)8 between
Warren and Yonngstown, Trumbull co.,
Ohio. (j. .M.)
Makoning.— Hutchins* map (1764) in Smith. Bou-
quet's Ex[>ed , 1766. Mahonink.— Heckewelder in
Trans. Am. Philos. S<k\. n. s., iv. 365, 1834 (eorreet
form). MahonyTown.— Ibid.. 390.
Mahow. A Chumashan village placed by
I Taylor at Joj^t'' Carrillo's rancho, Ventura
I CO., Gal. Perhap.s the site was the l-iis
Posa^ rancho, as state<l by Ventura Indi-
ans in 1884.
Ma-hau.— Henshaw. Buenaventura MS. vocab.,
B. A. E., 1884 (name from Indian in 1884). Ka-
how.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer. Mav 4. i860 (name
from 1856).
Mahoyum ( Ma-ho-ifum^ ' red tipi ' ) . The
name of a special heraldic tipi iK^Ionging
to the Cheyenne, erroneously given by
Clark (Cheyenne MS.) as the name of a
band. (.i. m. )
Kiayttma. — (Mark quoted !)v Moonev in 14th Rep.
B. A. E., 1026, 189(5.
Mahsolamo. (liven as the name of a
lx)dy of Salish on the s. side of Chemanis
lake, near the e. coast of Vancouver id. —
Brit. Col. mai), Ind. Aff., Victoria, 1872.
Mahtoiowa ('the l>ear that whirls,
'Whirling Bear' ). A Brule Teton Sioux
chief. While the Brulcs, Oglala, and Min-
iconjou Sioux were cami)ed near Ft Lara-
mie, Wyo.,in 1854, having come to receive
the annual ])resent8from thelirovernment,
an ox l)elonging to some Mormon emi-
grants was killed by the Indians. Accord-
ing to the most reliable information, ob-
taine<l by(irinnell from Wm. Rowland,
who was at Ft Laramie during the trouble,
the commandant demanded the surrender
of the offender, and Mahtoiowa, in re-
sponse, pointwl out the tipi of the guilty
Indian, informing Lieut, (irattiin that he
might arrest him; but Grattan insiste<l
that Mahtoiowa should bring the man out
and deliver him. When tlie chief de-
clined to do so, (irattan onlered his men
to tirea howitzer at thelo<lgein the mi<l-
dle of the village. A shellkilled an In-
dian, and 17 of the 18 soldiers were at
once shot <lown with arrows, the single
survivor es(»aping by the aid of an Indian
friend. The Sioux besieged Ft l^ramie
until it was relieved. Mahtoiowa was
killed in an action before the fort, and the
war, which was the l)eginning of Sioux
hostilities, was carricnl on by Little
Thunder.
Mahnsqaechikoken. A former village,
un<U»r Iroquois rule, situattnl on Alle-
gheny r.. Pa., about 20 m. al>ove Venan-
go, and inhabited chii^Hy by S<»neca an<i
Munsee Delawares; it was destroytnl bv
Brodhead in 1779. This village*, together
with Buckaloon an<l Connewango, formed
a settlement 8 m. in length along Alle-
gheny r., the 8 villages together contain-
ing about 35 large houses (Brodhea<l
(1779) in Jour. Mil. Exj)ed. of Maj. (ren.
Sullivan, S()8, 1887). (.i. x. b. u.)
Maicoba. A settlement of the Nevome
and the seat of a mission established in
1676; situattKi on or near the upper Rio
Yacjui, in e. Sonora, Mexico. In 1678
the population numbered 153. The town
now consists of a mixtnl population of
whites, Pima, Yacpii, and a few Mayo,
numl)ering in all 199 in 1900.
790
MAIDU MAIZE
[B. A.B.
Maiooba.— Orozoo y Berra, Geofir., 351, 1864. S.
Praneiioo Bona Maicoba.— Zapata (1678) in Dck;.
Hist. Mex., 4th s., iii, 345, 1857.
MaidTi(*man*, * Indian*). A tribe for-
merly dwelling in Sacramento valley and
the adjacent Sierra Nevada in California.
This single tril)e constitutes the entire
Pujunau linguiHtic family of Powell, all
the divisions of which called themselves
Maidu, and distinguished themselves one
from another by their local names only.
The Maidu proper, comprising the di\'i-
sions X. of Bear r. valley, were formerly
considere<l a different stock from the
Nishinam, who are now recognized as the
southern branch of the family. The names
of the Maidu villages and of the inhab-
itants were usually local place names. It
OLD MAIDU MAN. ( UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA)
may ]ye doubte<l if, in the following list of
the divisional an<l village names, the for-
mer have a greater value than the latter
or were in fact anything more than the
larger villages with perhaps outlying set-
tlements ot a more or less temporary
character. Divisions: Cohes, Cushna,
Hoitda, Honkut, Kiski, Konkau, Kulo-
mum, Molnia, Nimsewi, Pakamali, Tsak-
tomo, Tsamak, Tsulumsewi, Tumiiieli,
Ustonia, Willi, Yumagatok, and Yunu.
Villages: Bamom, Bauka, Bayu, Ben-
komkomi, Botoko, Eskini, Hembem,
Hoako, Hoholto, Hokomo, Hopnomkoyo,
Indak, Kalkalya, Kotasi, Kulaiapto,
Kulkumish, Michopdo, Mimal, Molma,
Nakankoyo, Oidoingkoyo, Okpam, Ola,
Ololopa, 'Onchoma, Opok, Otaki, Paki,
Panpakan, Pitsokut, Pulakatu, Sekumne,
Sisu, Silongkovo, Siwim Pakan, Sunusi,
Tadoiko, Taikus, Taisida, Tasikoyo,
Tchikimisi, Tishum, Tomcha, Totoma,
Tsam Bahenom, Tsekankan, Tsuka,
Wokodot, Yalisumni, Yamako, Yauko,
Yiikulme, Yodok, Yotammoto, Yumam,
and Yupu. Consult Dixon in Bui. Am.
Mus. Nat. Hist, xvii, pt. 3, 1905. See
Pujunan Family.
Mai'-deh.— Powersin Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 282,
1877. Kai'-du.— Ibid. Meidoot. —Powers in Over-
land Mo., xii,21,1874. Midu.— Merriam in Science,
n, 8., XIX, 914, June 15, 1904 (pron. Mi-d<x)). Wa-
wah.— Powers, Inds. West Nevada, 14, 1876 ( 'stran-
gers': Palute name for all Sacramento r. tribes).
Mailam-atenna ( * those of the lower-
most*). A Zuili phratrv consisting of
the Takya (Toad) and Ohitola (Rattle-
snake) clans, (f. ir. c. )
Maitheshkizh (* Coyote pass,' referring
to the pueblo of Jemez). A Navaho
clan, descended from a captive Jemez girl
and now attiliated with the Tscnlzhinkini.
KaifteokQ.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ni,
104, 1890. Mai^kQni.— Ibid. Mai</S«kl'r.— Mat-
thews, Navaho Legends, 80, 1897. Maic/i«]d'nu.—
Ibid.
Maitho (* Coyote spring*). A Navaho
clan.
Mai^b'.— Matthews in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 108,
1890. Mai^'^ine.— Ibid. Kai/6'.— Matthews, Na-
vaho Ix»gends, 30, 1897. Mai/o^One.— Ibid.
Maize (from the Arawak mariscy
changed to mayn and mahiz in the An-
tilles). This giant cereal, known in the
United States and Onada as * Indian
wrn,* or simply 'corn,* and to l)otanists
as Zeit mtiys jLinn., was the great food
plant of those American Inclians who
sought the aid of cultivation in obtaining
food. It is now generally suppostni to
have been derived from native grasses —
the KarhUvna inexicuua of s. Mexico
and E. hwurians of Ciuatemala, the latter
approximating most ne^irly thecuiltivatetl
corn. These are the only known species
of North American endogens from which
the nulnerous varieties now in use could
have been developed. Harsh berger says
linguistic evidence shows that maize was
introduced into the United States from
the tribes of Mexico and from the Carib
of the West Indies, but the time of this
introduction can only be conjectured.
That it was long before the appearance
of Europeans, however, is eviclent, not
only from its early and widesprt^ad culti-
vation by triln^s of the area now embraced
in the I'^nittKl States, but from the fact
that indications of its cultivati<m are
found in mounds ami in the ancient
pueblo ruins and cliff dwellings, while
corroborative evidence is found in the
fact that several varieties of maize had
already been developed at the time of
discovery, four being mentioned as in use
among the Indians of Virginia ( Beverley,
Hist. Virginia, 125-128, 1722). Jacques
Cartier, the first European to enter the St
BULL. dO]
MAJALAYGHUA — MAKAH
791
lAwrence, observed large lieldH of grow-
ing maize at Hochelaga (now Montreal )
in 1534, and Champlain in 1604 found it in
cultivation at almost every point visiteil
from Nova Scotia to upiK»r Ottawa r.
The supplies of maize obtained from the
Indians by the New England and Vir-
ginia colonists are well known. Henne-
pin, Man}uette, Joliet, I^ Salle, and other
early French explorers of the Misnisaippi
valley found all the triln^s they vi8ite<l,
from the Minni'sota r. to the (tuH, ami
even into Texas, cultivating maize; and
the same was true of the tribes l)etwet»n
N. -w. Mexico and the plains of Kansas
when visite<l by Coronado in 1540-42.
Even the Mandan and Arikara on the
upper Missouri had their maize paU^hes
wnen first seen by the whites. How far
northward on the Pacritic slope the culti-
vation of maize had extended at the time
of the discoverv is not known. EvideiK'c
that it or anything else was cultivated in
California w. of the Rio Colorado valley
is still lacking. Brinton ( Am. Race, 50,
1891) expresses the opinion that maize
**was cultivated Ixjth north and south to
the geographical extent of its pnMluctivc
culture.'* Such at least appears to have
been tnie in regard to its extent north-
ward on the Atlantic sIojh*, exct»pt in the
region of the upper Mississippi and the
Red r. of the North.
The ease with which maize can be cul-
tivated and conserve<l, an<l its l)ountiful
yield, caused its rapi<l extension among
the Indians after it tirst came into use.
With the exception of lx»tter tillage the
■ method of cultivation is much the same
to-day among civilize<l men as among the
natives. Thomas Hariot, who visited
Viilginia in 1586, says the Indians put
four grains in a hill *** with t^are that they
touch not one another.'* The extent to
which the cereal was cultivatetl in pre-
historic times by the Indians may be
inferred from these facts and from the
observations of early explorers. It seems
evident from the history of the exjieili-
tions of De Soto and Coronado ( 1540-42 )
that the Indians of the Gulf states and of
the Pueblo region relit^l chiefly on maize
for food. It is also prol )able that a m< )iety
of the food supply of the Indians of Vir-
ginia and the Carolinas, and of the Iro-
quois and Huron tribes, was from the
cultivation of com. I)u Pratz says the
Indians **from the sea [Gulf] as far as
the Illinois" make maize their principal
subsistence. The amount of corn of the
IroQuois destroyed by Denonville in 1687
has Deen estimated at more than a million
bushels (Charlevoix, Hist. Nouv. France,
II, 355, 1744) , but this estimate is probably
excessive. According to Tonti (French,
Hist. Coll. I-a., I, 70, 1846), who took jmrt
in the expedition, the army was engs^nl
seven days in cutting up the corn of four
villages. Thaumer de la Source (Shea,
Early Voy. Miss., 81, 1861) says, "the
Tounicas [Tonika] live entirely on In-
dian com." (len. Wavne, writing in
1794 of the Indian settlements, asserts
that **the margins of these Wautiful riv-
ers, the Miamis of the Lake and the Au
(Tlaize, apiH»ar like one continue<l village
for a numl)er of miles, l)Oth alx)ve and
below this place. Grand Glaize, nor have
I ever before In'heM such immense fields
of corn in any part of America from
('anada to Florida" (Manypenny, Ind.
Wards, 84, 1880) . From the Indians are
derivt*d ash-i«ke, hoe-cake, succotash,
samj), hominy, the hominy mortar, etc.,
and even the cribs elevattnl on posts are
imtterned after those of the Indians of
the Southern statt^s. Corn wa^ use<l in
various ways by the natives in their cere-
monies, and among some tril)es the time
of planting, ripening, and harvesting was
made the <K'casion for festivities. See
Agriculture, Food.
Consult Carr, Mounds of the Mississippi
Historically Considered, 188:^; Cushing,
Zufii Breadstuffs; Har8hl)erger, Maize: a
Botanical and »onomic Study, 1893;
Payne, Hist. New World, i, 1892; Stick-
nev in Parkman Club Pub., no. 13, 1S97;
Thomas in 12th Rep. B. A. E., 614-622,
1894. (c.T.)
Majalayghaa. A former C'humashan vil-
lage near I>o8 Prietos, adja(»ent to Santa
Barbara, Caj.
Inwalayehua.— Bancroft. Nat. Ilacea. i. 4.'>9. 1874
(miMiuoted fn>m Tavlor). Ki^alayghua.— Taylor
in Cal. Farmer. Apr. 24, 1863.
Makache ( * ow r ) • A n ( )to gens.
Ma-ka'-toe.— Dorsey in 15th Kv.\k B. A. E.,240,lMy7.
Ka'-kotoh.— Morgan, Ane.SiK'., Ifxi, 1877.
Makah (*caj>ep£K)ple'). The southern- rt
most trilK* ot the Wakashan stock, the
only one within the Unitinl Stat4»s.
They belong to the Nootka branch.
Acconling to Swan the Makah clainunl
the territory between Flattt^ry rocks, 15
m. 8., ami Hokor., 15 m. e. of C. Flat-
tery, Wash., also Tatoosh id., near the
cape. Their winter towns were Baada,
Neah, Oz^ette, Tzues, and Waatch; their
summer villages, Ahchawat, Kiddekub-
but, and Tatooche. ( Jibbs ( MS. , B. A. E. )
mentions another, called Kehsidatsoos.
They now have two reservations, Makah
and Ozette, Wash., on which, in 1905,
there wen* respectivelv Ji99 and 36, a
total of 4:i5 for the tril)e. In 1806 they
were estimated by Lewis and C'lark to
number 2,000. By treaty of Neah bay.
Wash., Jan. 81, 1855, the Makah ceded
all their lands at the mouth of the Strait
of Juan de Fu(^ exccj)t the immediate
area including C. Flattery. This reser-
vation was enlargetl by Executive order
of Oct. 26, 1872, superseded by Executive
order of Jan. 2, 1878, and in turn revokt*<l
792
MAKAK MAKOUA
[B. A* a.
by Executive order of Oct. 12 of the
same year, by which the Makah res. was
definitely defined. The Ozette res. was
established by order of Apr. 12, 1893.
Ba-qa-d.— McCaw, Puyallup MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1885 (Puyallup name). Cfape Flattery.— Lane in
Ind. Aff. Rep., 162.1850. Olaaset.— Famham.Trav.,
II, 310, 1843 (Nootka name: 'outsiders'). Clat-
Mt.— Dunn, Hi8t. Oregon, 231, 1844. Olouets.—
Starling in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 171, 1862. Flattery.—
Ibid., 170. Klaizarts.— Armstrong, Oregon, 136,
1&57. Kla-iz-zarU.— Jewitt, Narr., 75, 1849. Klas-
•et.— Swan in Sraithson. Cont., xvi, 1, 1870. Kwe-
net-ohe-chat. — Ibid, (ovm name: *cai)e people').
Kwe-net-sat'h.— Ibid. (Salish name). Kaoau.—
Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 162, 1850. Ka-oaw.— Star-
ling in Ind. Aff. Rep. , 170, 1852. Maocawa.— Hanna
in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 337, 1858. Kaokahs. -Taylor
in Cal. Farmer, Aug. 1, 1862. Kakahs.—Gibbs. Clal-
lam and Lummi, v, 1863. Makans.— Stevens in
Ind. Aff. Rep., 448, 1^54. Kakas.— Simmons in
Ind. Aff. Rep., 335, 1857. Makaw.— Lane in Sen.
Ex. Doc. 52, 3l8t Cong., 1st sess. , 173, 1850. Makha.—
U. S. Ind. Treat. (1855), 461, 1873. Kak-kah.— Swan
in Smithson. Cont., xvi, 1. 1870. Mi-caws.- Jones
(1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 7,
1867. auenait cheehat.— Swan, inf n, Feb. 1886.
Que-nait'-Bath.— Swan.N.W. Coast, 211, 1857. auine-
ohart.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1806), vi, 70,
1905. duin-na-ohart.— Ibid.. IV, 169, 1905. doinne-
ohant.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., ii, 120, 1814.
Quinnechart.— Ibid . , 474. Tatouche.— Nieolet, Ore-
gon, 143, 1846. TU'asath.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W.
Tribes Can., 31, 1890 (' outside people': Nootka
name). Yacaws.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi,
689, 1857.
Makak. An Ikogmiut Eskimo village
on the right bank of the Yukon below
Anvik, Alaska; pop. 121 in 1880, 50 in
1890.
Akka.'— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 226, 1902. Ka-
kagamute.— Raymond in Sen. Ex. Doc. 12, 42d
Cong., Ist sess., 25, 1871. Makaff'mut— Dall in
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 17, 1877. Makeymut.— Nel-
son in 18th Rep. B. A. E.. map, 1899. Kakey-
mute.— Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 57, 1881. Makki.—
Zagoskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 6th s., xxi, map,
1850. Hanki.— Raymond, op. cit., 31 (so called
by whites).
Makak. See Mocuck.
Makan (* medicine*). A Ponca gens,
in two subgentes: Real Ponka and (xray
Ponka.
Majia".— Dftrsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 228, 1897.
KoH'-ga..— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 155, 1877. jfi-tSniit-
it'ajL— Dorsey, op. cit. ('does not touch buffalo
tails').
Makataimeshekiakia. See Black Hawk.
Makatananamaki. See Black Thunder.
Makatapi ( * black men. '— Hewitt) . A
name given in the Walam Olum of the
Delawarea as that of a tribe encountere<l
by them during their migrations. — Brin-
ton, Lenape Leg., 190, 1885.
Makawichia (Ma-ka-xn-<:h\a\ * place of
many doves ' ) . A Tarahumare rancheria
near Palanquo, Chihuahua, Mexico. —
Lumholtz, infn, 1894.
Makay. An unidentified village for-
merly on Pamlico r., N. C, marked on
the map of the Homann heirs, 1756.
Makhelchel. A name applied by Pow-
ers to the people of the vicinity of Lower
lake, one of the southern arms of Clear
lake. Lake co., Cal. The name was used
particularly to designate the people of
Lower Lake id., who were supposed by
Powers (Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 214,
1877) to belong to the Copehan ( Wintun)
linguistic stock, but who nave been found
to belong to the Kulanapan (Pomo)
stock. The people inhabiting this island
called the island and the village itself
Koi. (s. A. B. )
Hetlev.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. in, 214-
1877 (from kbach'-la, 'island', in the Makhelchel
dialect; applied by the whites both to the island
and its original inhabitants). Heaaler.— Ibid.
Kelsey.-Ibid. Kessler.— Ibid. Xakh'-^l-ehel.—
Ibid.
Makkenikashika ( Maqe-nikaci^^Gf * up-
per world people*). A Quapaw gens;
probably identical with the Wakantaeni-
kashika. — Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.,
230, 1897.
Makhplya-ltita. See Bed CUmd.
Makhpiy amasa ( * i ron cloud ' ) . A band
of the Matantonwan division of the
Mdewakanton Sioux, named from its
chief. It numbered 153 in 1836 and 123
in 1859, at which latter date they resided
on the w. bank of the Mississippi, above
the mouth of St Croix, at the site of the
g resent Hastings, Minn.
•on-Cloud.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 144, note, 1858.
I on Cloud's Village.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E.,
Minn, map, 1899. Karopeeah Hahzah.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 612, 1853. Ka-rpi-ya-ma-ia.—
Neill, op. cit.
Makhpiyawichashta ( * cloud man ') . A
village of the Mdewakanton Sioux in
Minnesota in 1836, numbering 157; named
from the chief.
Cloud ICan** band.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859, 100, 186a
Karo pee wee Chastah.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
III, 612, 1853. Sky-lCan.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 144,
note, 1868.
Maklykaat. An Eskimo missionary
station on Disko bay, w. Greenland.
Maklykout.— Crantz, Hist. Greenland, i, map, 1767.
MakokoB. See Maycock.
Makoma. A name used, evidently ow-
ing to some confusion on the part of early
writers, for the Indians who formerly
lived in the vicinity of Clear lake and the
mountains of Napa and Mendocino cos.,
Cal., but they are said by Wrangell (Eth-
nog. Nachr., 80, 1839) to have dwelt
northward of Ft Ross in Russian r. val-
ley. The term undoubtedly comes from
Mai}rdkma, the name of a prominent
Yukian Wappo village near Calistoga,
Napa CO. " (s. a. b.)
Maiyakma.— S. A. Barrett, infn, 1906 (correct
name \ . Mayacmaa.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i. 451,
1874. Kayacomat.— Ibid.. 363. Mipaemas.— Ibid.,
362. Kyaemaa.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 22,
1860. ityaoomaps.— Ibid., June 7, 1861.
Makomitek. An Algonquian tribe or
band mentioned in 1671 as residing in the
vicinity of Green bay, Wis. Tailhan
identifies them with the Makoukuwe,
which is doubtful.
][akamitek.-^ieur de St Lusson (1671) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., IX. 803, 1855. Hakomiteks.— Prise
de Possession (1671) in Tailhan, Perrot M6m.,298,
1864.
Makoaa ('bear'). A tribe or band living
near the village of St Michel, in central
Wisconsin, in 1673; probably a division or
gens of the Foxes.
^ULL. 80]
MAKOUKUWE MALECITE
793
1.— Lapham, Inds. of Wis., 4, 1870. KaKoua.—
Jes. Rel. (16t2), LViii, 40, 1899.
lUkonkuwe. A band or gens, probably
of the Foxes, found living near Green
bay, Wis., in 1673.
HaKooooul-Jes. Rel. (1673), lviii. 40. Ift99. Ka-
koMone.— Je8. Rel. quoted by Shea in Wis. Hist.
Soe. Coll., III. 181, ISffJ. Makoukou J.-MS. Jes. Rel.
of 1673 quoted bv Tailhan, Perrot M<^in., 293. 1864.
Xakoukoaaks.— Ibid.
MaktiadAtli{Md^ka'aiath), A sept of the
Seshart, a Nootka tribe. — Boas in 6th
Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 32, 1890.
Xakiuihiii. An Aleut village on Makii-
shin bay, Unalaska id., Alaska. Pop. 35
in 1834, according to Veniaminoff ; 49 in
1874, according to Shiesnekov; 62 in 18H0;
51 in 1890.
Wakooihwiilroi.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska, 225,
1876. Hakoodiin.— Elliott, Our Arct. Pn)v.,
map, 1886. MaktuehiBskoje.— Holmberg, Ethnog.
Skizz., map, 142, 1856. Maknahia.— PetrofT in 10th
Oensus. Alaska, 23. 1884. Kakushinsk.— i 'oxe,
Ruas. Discov., 163, 1787. Kakushinakoe.— Veni-
aminoff, Zapiski, ii. 202, 1840. Kakuiki.— (^)xe,
Ruas. Discov., 158. 1787.
][akwa(*bear'). Acconling to Morgan,
one of the 11 clans of the Mahican.
According to Barton it is one of the 3
divisions of the Mahican. corresi)<)nding
to Morgan's phratries. Morgan gi ve« the
wolf, turtle, and turkey; Barton gives the
wolf, turtle, and bear, and puts the bear
first. (.1. M.)
Ki'-kwa.— Morgran, Auo. Soo., 174, 1K77. Kuch-
?aaiih.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 523. 1M78
misprint). Maeh-qoaah.— Barton. New Views.
xxxix,1798. Muk-wah.— Warren in Minn. Hist.
8oc. Coll., V, 44, 1886.
Makwa (*bear' ). A gens of the Chij>-
pewa, q. v.
Ma-kwa'.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 166, 1877. Kuk-
kwaw.— Tanner, Narrative, 314, 1830. Muk-wah.—
Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep., 91, 1860.
Xakwiiaehigi (*they who go bv the
name of the bear'). The **royar'' (rul-
i^^gj gc^M of the Foxes. (w. j. )
Ma-kidi-io-jik.— Morgan, Anc. Soc.. 170. 1877.
Ma'kwisatdfi.—Wm. Jones, inf n, 1906.
Malahae. A former Chumashan village
in Ventuia co.^ CaL, at the Kancho <le
Maligo.
Ka-ma-li-wtt.— Henshaw. Buenaventura MS. vo-
cab.,B.A.K,1884. Halahu.— Taylor in Cal. Far-
mer, July 24, 1863.
Malaka. A tribe of the Patwin division
of the Copehan familv tliat formerly lived
in Lagoon valley, Solano co., Cal.
Kalaaoaa—Powers in Overland Mo., xiii, 542. 1874.
Ka-lak'-ka.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in.
218,1877.
Malakat ( Maflexah), A Salish tribe on
Saanich inlet, s. b. end of Vancouver id.,
speaking the Cowichan dialect; pop. 14
in 1901, 10 in 1904.
■al-a-hut.— Can. Ind. Aff. 1889, 270. 1890. MaU-
knt— Ibid., 1901, pt, ii, 164. Kaleqa//.— Boas,
MS., B. A. B., 1887.
Xalaihagiuiay. A name of the sheeps-
head or fresh- water drum {Haphdhiotus
grunniens). Through Canadian French
maUuhigcmi or malcahigane^ from mana-
shigan in the Chippewa-Nipissin^ dialects
of the Algonquian stock, signifying 'ugly
ashigan.' The ashiaan is the black bass
of American English. (a. f. c. )
Male (yfa'le). A villa^ of the Mus-
queam, a Cowichan tribe, situated x. of Sea
id., in the delta of Frasi»r r., Brit. Col.
According to Hill-Tout it was claimed by
the Squawinish.
lUae.— Hill-Tout in Rep. Brit. A. A. S., 54, 1894.
Ka'-U.— Ibid., 473, 1900.
Maleeite. Various explanations of tliis .X-- ^
name have been given. According to
Chamberlain ifc- is from their Micmac
name Malisity * broken talkers*; Tanner
gives the form as MafniexhedSf mean-
ing *slow tongues'; Baraga derives it
through the Cree from luaifisit or maiisit,
'the disfigured or ugly foot'; Lacoml)e
(Diet. Cris, 707) agrt»es with Baraga and
gives the etymology as mai/i or ?/<«/, * de-
formed,' and ^*7, 'foot.' Maurault's ex-
planation is radically different from all,
as he says it is from Maroud it or MaiouUiit,
* those who are of Saint Malo. * Vetromile
say« it "comes from matih% which in old
Abnakian<1 also in Delaware means witch-
craft," but adds, '* hence the French
name Micmat^ is a substitute for M<ire-
Hchitey'^ as he writes the name. Accord-
ing to Chamberlain the name thev apply
tothemselvt*s is Widai<iuk'inuk, 'dwellers
on the lK»autiful river,' or, as given by
Maurault, (Juarante(jotnaks, ' tho.*'e of the
river who.se \kh\ (*ontains s])arkling o\y-
jects.'
The MaleiMte lx?long to the Abnaki
group of the Algon<]uian stock. Maurault
makes a distinction lx»tween the Male-
cite and the Etchimin, but adds that
"the remnantsof this trilKJ an<l the Etchi-
mins are called at the present day Male-
cites." Their closest linguistic "affinity
is with the Passamaquoddy, the language
of the two l)eing almost identical, and is
closely allied to the New England dia-
lects, but more distant from that of the
Micmac.
Although the New Brunswick coast was
visittnl by or soon after the middle of the
16th century, and St John r. located on
maps as early as 1558, making it (luite
prooable that the i>eople of this tril)e had
come in contact with tin* whites at that
early date, the earliejdt retM)r(U»ii notice of
them is in Champlain's narrative of hie
voyage of 1604. He found the country
along the banks of the. St John in the
{)06session of Indians named "Les Etche-
mons," by whom his party was received
with hospitality and rejoicing, and says
they were the "first Christians" who
hail been seen by these savages, which
may have l)een true of the particular
party he met, but doubtful in the broader
sense. That these were Maleeite there
is no reasonable doubt. * * When we were
seated," says Champlain, "they began to
smoke, as was their custom, before making
any discourse. They made us presents of
game and venison. All.that day and the
night following they continued to sing,
794
MALEMIUT MALHOKSHE
[b. a. ]
<lanre, an<l feast until day reappeared.
They were cl<>the<l in beaver skins."
Early in the 17th century Ft La Tour
was built on St John r., which became
the rallying jKiint of the tribe, who there
learned the use of firearms, and first ob-
tained cooking vessels of metal and the
tools and instruments of civilized life.
The few French settlers on this river in-
termarried with the Indians, thusforming
a close alliance, which caused them to
become enemies of the New England set-
tlers, between whom and the French
there was almost constant warfare. After
the English came into possession of the
country there were repeated disputes be-
tween them and the Malecite in regard
to lands until 1776. Afterward lands
were assigned them. In 1856, according
to Schoolcraft, "theTobique river, and
the small tract at Madawaska, Meductic
Point, an<l Kingsclear, with their small
rocky islands near St John, containing 15
acres," constituted all the lands held or
claimed by them in the country which
was formerly their own. In 1884 they
numbered 767, of whom 584 were in New
Brunswick and the others in Quebec
province. According to the report of
Canadian Indian Affairs for 1904 their
number was 805, of whom 103 were in
Quebec? province and 702 in New Bruns-
wick f I M C* T )
Amalecites.— Chauvignerie (1736) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., IX, 1052. 1855. Amalicites.— Clinton
(1749), ibid., vi, MO, 1855. Amalingans.— Shea,
Cath. Miss.. 144, 1855. Amalistes.— Am. Pioneer, i,
257. 1842. Amcle«te».— Buchanan, N. Am. Ind«..
156. 1824. Amelicks.— Smith (1785) in Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes. iii,553. 1853. Amelingas.— Vetromiie.
Abnakis. 50, 1866. Amelittes.— Hutchins (1764) in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 553, 1853. Amelistis.—
Imlav, We.vt Terr., 293, 1797. Amenecis.— Writer
of 1757 in Lett res Edifiantes, i, 698, 1838. Amili-
citer— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 522, 1878.
Oanoemen.— (Jallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc,
II, 31, 1836. Eoheminr— Am. Pioneer, i, 408,1842.
Esteohemains.— Champlain (1603), (Euvres, ii, 49,
1870. Estechemines.— Barton Cprobably from De
Laet, 11633), New Views, xxxvii, 1797. Esteche-
minr— Champlain, (Euvres, ii, 8, 1870. Etohe-
mins.— La Galissoni^re (1750) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., X, 227, 1858. Etchemonr— Champlain {ca.
1604) inSch(K)lcraft, Ind. Tribes, v,674. 1855. Etoh-
imin*.— Ibid., 22 (said to be derived from tchinem,
'men'). Etchmins.— McKenney and Hall, Ind.
Tribes, in, 79, 18M. Etechemies.— Bob6 (1723) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 913, 1855. Etechemm.— Jes.
Rel. 1611,5,1858. Eteohemines.— Vater,Mith.,pt.3.
sec. 3, 389, 1816. . Etecheminii.— Du Creux map
(1660). /?(/e Vetromile, Abnakis. 21, 1866. Eteohe-
neus.— McKennev and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 79,
ia54. Etem&nkiaks.— Maurault, Histoire des Abe-
nakis. 5, 1866 ( * those of the country of theskins for
rackets'). Eteminquois.— Jes. Rel. 1611. 8, 1858.
Etiohimenei.— Lords of Trade (1721) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., V, 592, 1855. EtMhimins.— Vetromile. Ab-
nakis, 130, 1866. Kiukuswtekitohimi-fik— Cham-
beriain, Malesit MS., B. A. E., 1882 ( = ' muskrat
Indians'; one of the names applied to them by
the Micmacon account of their hunting the musk-
rat). Hahnetheet— James in Tanner. Narrative,
333, 1830. Malacite.— French trans, in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist.. VI, 561, 1855. Maleeetes.— Dawson.
Inds. of Canada, 2. 1877. Malachitei.— Baraga.
Eng.-Otch. Diet.. 299. 1878. Kalecites.— Vaudreuil
(1722) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 912. 1855. Mfle-
»it.— Chamberiain. Malesit MS., B. A. E., 1882.
Malioetei.— McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, iii.
79. 1854. Malicites.— Begon (1715) in N. Y. Doc
Col. Hist., IX. 932, 1855. Malisit.— Chamberlain
Malesit MS.. B. A. E., 1882 (Micmac name: pi.
Malisitchik). ICaneus.— Chauvignerie (1736) ii
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 1062, 1855. Maraohite.-
Drake, Bk. Inds., vi, 1848. Karashites.— Woo<
(1769) quoted by Hawkins, Missions, 361, 1845.
Marechitei.— Macauley. N. Y., ii. 162, 1829. Mare-
tehites.— Vetromile. Abnakis, 23. 1866 (old Frencl
name). Mamizit.— Cadillac (1692) inN.Y'.Doc
Col. Hist., IX, 548. 1855. Keleoites.— Schoolcraft
Ind. Tribes, v, 38, 1855. Kelloite.— Chamberlain
Malesit MS.. B. A. E., 1882. Melisoeet.— Brinton
I^nape Legends, 11, 1885. Milioetes.— Keane ii
Stanford, Compend.. 622. 1878. Milicite.— School
craft. Ind. Tribes, v. 674. 1855. Moiukouasoaka.-
Rouillard, Noms G^ographiques. 11, 1906 ('water
rats': Abnaki name). 8arasteg8iaks.— Mau
rault, Histoire des Akenakis, 6, 1866 (includi
Norridgewock in part). St. John's (tribe).-
PenhaUow (1726) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., I,
123, 1824. St. John's river [Indians] .—Gyles ( 1726)
in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., in, 357, 1853. Ula»t«kwi.-
Gatschet. Penobscot MS., B. A. E., 1887 (Penob-
scot name: pi. Ulastekwiak). Wu^lastuk'-wiuk.—
Chamberlain, Malesit MS., B. A. E.. 1882 (=*dwell-
ers on the beautiful river': name used by them
selves. Boyd (Ind. Local Names, 1885) gives the
Indian name of the river as Looshtook, 'long
river').
Malemiat. An Eskimo tribe occupying
the coast of Norton sd., n. of Shaktolik
and the neck of Kaviak penin., Alaska.
They have established permanent or sum
mer settlements at points on Kotzebue
sd., where they have become mixed with
tribes of Kaviak penin. and the islands
that visit their villages for barter and so-
cial enjoyment. Those of pure blood pre-
sent the squat type of the Arctic Eskimo,
with scant hair, broad flat noses, and high
cheek bones with a 'thick covering of
flesh. The tribe numbered 630 in 1900.
Once more numerous and powerful, its
villages now lie scattered among those of
the Unaligmiut and Kavigmiut. Subdi-
visions are the Attenmiut, Inglutalige-
miut, Koyugmiut, Kugaramiut, Kungu-
gemiut, Shaktoligmiut, and Tapkach-
mint. Their villages are Akchadak, At-
ten, Chamisso, Kongik, Koyuktolik, Ku-
galuk, Kviguk, Kvinkak, Kwik (2), Na-
paklulik, Nub\dakchugaluk, Nuklit, Shak-
tolik, Taapkuk, Ulukuk, and Ungalik.
Mahlemoot.— Elliott, Our Arctic Prov., 444, 1886.
Kahlemutes.— Dall in Proc. Am. A. A. S., 266,
1869 (between Kotzebue sd. and Norton bav).
MahlemuU.— Dall in Proc.Cal. Acad.Sci.,iv,35,1873.
Malegnnuti.— Erman quoted by Dall in Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., 17, 1877. Maleigmjuten.— Holm-
berg, Ethnog. Skizz., 6, 1855. Hafeimioute.— Za-
goskin in Nouv. Ann. Voy., 5th s., xxi, map,
1850. Malemttkes.— Whymper in Jour. Roy. Geog.
Soc.. 220. 1868. Kalemut.— Nelson in 18th Rep.
B. A. E., passim, 1899. Kalemutes.— Whymper,
Trav. in Alaska, 143. 318. 1868. Kaliegmut—
Holmberg quoted by Dall in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., 1, 16, 1877. Malimiut.— Wrangell quoted
by Dall, ibid. Kalimuten.— Wrangell, Ethnog.
Nachr., 122, 1839. Malimyut.— Turner in 11th
Rep. B. A. E.. 178. 1894. Malmiut.— Tikhmenief
quoted by Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 16, 1877.
Mamelute.— Whymper in Trans. Ethnol. Soc.
Lond.,vii, 167, 1869. Tichuagmuti.— Erman quoted
by Dall in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., i, 16, 1877.
Malhokshe ( Mal-hok-ce ) . A former Chu-
mashan village in the interior of Ventura.
CO., Cal., at a place called Cuesta de la
Mojdnera. — Henshaw, Buenaventura MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
'bull. 301
MALIAOONES^— MAMORAOHIC
795
Maliaeonei. An iinMontified tril>e men-
tioned by Cal^eza de Vaca an livinj? near
the Avavares, in Texas, in 1528-,S4, and
speaking a diffen^nt t4>n^e. i*<)K<ibly
they are identical with the Meracoumah
of Joutel and the Manioo of Manzanet.
■alUooaei.— Cabeza de Vaca, Rel., Smith trans..
125, 187, 1871. Malioans.— Harris, Voy. tind Trav.,
II, 276, nOh. Xaliconat.— Ili'rrera, Hist. (Jon., v,
96,1726. Malioones.— Cabcza de Vaea (IM'i) quo-
ted by Barcia, Ensayo. 13. 172:^ Maticonea.—
Harris, Voy. and Trav., tm, 1705.
ICaliea. A villas n. of the mouth of
St Johns r., Fla., in 15(U. De Hry's map
locates it inland, h. of the mouth.*
Maliea.~Laudonni6re in French. Hist. C-oII. La.,
N. 8., 831, 1869. MaUioa.— Martin. N. C, i, K7, 1S29.
ICalieo. A former Chumashan village
near Somo hills, Ventura co., C'al. — Tay-
lor in Cal. Farmer, July 24, 18<)3.
Kalika (3/a-/<-X-a). Given bv Bourke
(Jour. Am. Folk-lore*, ii, 181, 1*889) a*^ a
clan of the Mohave, q. v.
Malito (Ma-U'^io). A former Chuma-
shan villase in Ventura co^, Cal., in a lo-
cality called Punta del Pozito.— Hen-
shaw, Buenaventura MS. vo(»ab., H. A. E.,
1884.
Malki. A Kawia village on the Potrero
res., in Cahuilla vallev, e. of Banning, s.
Cal.
■al-ki.— Barrows, Ethno.-Kot. Coahuilla Ind., :«i.
1900. Potrero.— Ibid.
Mallin. A Costanoan village 8ituate<l
in 1819 within 10 m. of Santa Cniz mis-
sion, Cal. — Tavlor in Cal. Farmer, Apr.
6, 1860.
Mallopeme. One of the triU's of w.
Texas, some at least of whow* |>eople
were neophytes of the mission of San
Jos<(!» y San Miguel de Aguayo. — MS. in
Texas State archives, Xov., 1*790.
Malockefe. Mentioneil by Blue Jacket
as a tribe or l)an<l at a conference held at
Greenville, Ohio, in 1807. Possibly the
Mequachake division of the Shawnee, al-
though apparently distinct.— Dnike, Te-
cmnseh, 94, 1852. (j. m.)
MaUsmn (*wolf*). A gens of the Ab-
naki, q. v.
HaU'-rtm.~Morgan. Ane. Soc.. 174. 1K77. Mdl-
■em— J. D. Prince, inrn, 190r> (modem St Frau-
ds Abnakl form).
Maltshokamat ( Mal'tHho'-qfi-m ui, * valley
people' : Chugachigmiut name) . An un-
identifie<l divisicm of the Knaiakhotana
of Cook inlet, Alaska. — Hoffman., MS.,
B. A. E., 1882.
Malakiilak ( Malnhnlaq), A settlement
of the Aivilirmiut Eskimo on Lyons inlet,
Hudson bay, Cana<la.— Boas in 6th Rep.
B. A. E., 476, 1886.
Malnlowoni ( Mal-u-lo-wo^'U i), A former
Chumashan village in the interior of Vei>
tUOUl^Q., Cal., at a place calletl (-uesta
Santa Rosa. — Henshaw, Buenaventura
MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
Malvaitac. A former village, presuma-
bly Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Tavlor in
(^al. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Mamaknme [MiY'mnk'ume). A village
of the Mats<|ui triU* of Cowichan on the
s. side of Fraser r., Brit. Col., op|)osite
Matstjui restTve. — Boas in 64th Kep. Brit.
A. A. S., 454, 1894.
Mamalelekala. A Kwakiutl tril>e on
Village id., Brit. Col. According to B(>as
they wen» divided into four gen tes: Tem-
tltemtlels, Wewamaskem, Walas, and
Mamalelekam. Their only town is
Memkumlis, which they occupy jointly
with the Koeksotenok. * The population
was estimated at alM>ut 2,(KK) in 18:^6-41;
in 1904 it numlK^red 111.
Mah-ma-lil-Ie-kulla.— Spnmt in Can. Ind. AflT., 145,
1K79. Mah-ma-Ul-le-kuUah.— (*an. Ind. AfT. 1884,
189. 188.'>. KahmatiUeoulaaU.— Hrit. (V)l. niai». 1872.
Mamaleilakitish.— Tolmie and Dawson. \<K*abs.
Brit. (\)1., 118B. 1884. Mamaleilakulla.— Ibid.
Ka'malelek-ala.— Boas in Otli Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., .54. 1890. Ka'maleleqala.— Boas in Peter-
manns Mitt., pt. h, YM\ 1887. Kama-lil-a-cula.—
Mayne. Brit. (N>I., 249. 1862. Ka-ma-lil-li-kuila.—
Can. Ind. AIT. 1891, 279. 189:>. Ma'-me-U-li-a-ka.—
Dawson in Trans. Roy. So*'. Can. for 1H87, .sec. ii. 6;').
Mam-il-i-li-a-ka.— Tolmie and l)aw.*H)n. V<M'al>s.
Brit. C^>1., n8B. 1881. Kar-ma-li-la-cal-la.— Kane,
Wand, in N. Am., app., ISjVJ.
Mamalelekam. A gens of the Mamale-
lekala.
Ma'leleqala.— Boas in Petermanns Milt.. pt.T). 130.
1887. Ma'malelekam.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W.
TrilK>K Can.. r>t. 1890. Ka'maleleqala.— Boas in
Rep. Nat. Mils, for 1895. :i:U). 1S97.
Mamalty. Mentione<l in the narrative
of Marie U» Roy an<l Barbara lx»ininger
(Pa. Mag. Hist, and Biog., xxi.x, 412,
1905) as a (Delaware?) village in w. Penn-
sylvania or E. Ohio in 1759.
* Mamanahant. A village of the Powha-
tan confe<lenicv in l<i08, on Chickahominv
r., Charles V\i\ co., Va.— Smith (H>29),
Virginia, i, map. reor. 1819.
Mamanassy. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy in 1608, at the junction of Pa-
munkey and Mattapony rs., in King and
Queen CO., Va. — Smith* (1629), Virginia,
I, map, repr. 1819.
Mamekoting. A chieftaincy of the Mun-
se<% formerly living in Maniakating val-
k\v, w. of the Shawangunk mts. in Ulster
CO*. (?), N. Y. It was one of the 5 F^sopus
tril)es. — Ruttenlwr, Tril)es Hudson R., 95,
1872.
Mameoya (* tish-eatcrs ' ) . .\ ( f< inner? )
division of the Kainah trilie of the
Siksika, q. v.
Fish Eaters.— Culbertson in Smithson. Rep. for
1850, 144. 1851. Ka-me-o'-ya.— Morgan. Anc. Soe..
171, 1877. Mom-i'-o-yiks.— Hayden. Kthnog- and
IMiilol. Mo. Val.. 264, 18<K>.
Mamikininiwag ( * lowland {K'ople ' ) . A
subdivision of the Paskwawininiwug, or
Plains Cree.
MamikiwiiiiniwM:.— \Vm Jone.<t. inf'n. 1906. Ma-
mikiyiiiiwok — I.4icomt>e. Die. Languc CrLs. x, 1874.
Mamorachie. A Tarahumare settlement
in Chihuahua, Mexico; definite lo(»ality
unknown.— Orozco y Berra, (ieog., 322,
1864.
796
MAMTUM MANDAN
[B. A. H.
Mamtom. Given as the name of a body
of Indians on Cowit(;hin lake, s. end of
Vancouver id. (Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff.,
Victoria, 1 872 ) . Perhaps the Quamichan
or the Comiakin of Cowitchin valley.
Mamnn-gitnxiai {Ma/m'^n gil'^nd^-i, '(ti'-
tuns of Mauiun r.'). The most im-
portant division of the (Jituns, a family
of the Eagle clan of the llaida, living at
Masset, Queen Charlotte ids., Brit. Col.
They derived their name from that of a
small stream which falls into Ma«set inlet
near its head, where they used to camp.
A sulnlivision in the town of Yaku
was caHe<l Ao-gitunai. — Swanton, Cont.
Haida, 275, 1905.
Manabnsh, Manabozo. See Xanahozo.
^' Manahoac (Algcmquian: 'thev are very
merry.* — Tooker). A confederacy oV
group of small tribes or bands, possibly
Biouan, in n. Virginia, in 1608, occupying
the country from thefallHof the rivers to
the mountains and from the Potomac to
North A nna r. They were at war with the
Powhatan and Ir(K|Uois, and in alliance
with the Monacan, but spoke a language
different from any of their neighbors.
Among their tribes Smith mentions the
Manahoac, Tanxnitania, Shackaconia,
Ontponea, Tegninateo, Whonkenti, Steg-
araki, and Ilassinunga, and says there
were others. Jefferson confoundetl them
with the Tuscarora. Mahaskahod is the
only one of their villages of which the
name has l)een presc^rvcnl. Others may
have borne the names of the tribes of the
confe<leracy. The Mahocks mentioned
by I^e<lerer in 1609 seem to l)e identical
with them. See Moonev, Siouan Tribes
of the East, 18, 1894.
^ Manahoac. A tribe or band of the
Manahoac group. According to Jefferson
thev lived on Rappahannock r. in Stafford
ancf Spottsylvania cos., Va.
Mahoo.— Lederer, Discov.,2, 1672 (poSsibly identi-
cal, although given as dit^tinet). Mahooki.—
Leaerer (1669) as quoted by Hawks, N. C, n, 44,
1858. Managoff.— Ledcrer, Discov., 2, 1672 (idIh-
i^int). Manaboaeka. — Loudon, Selec. Int. Nar.ji,
235,1808. Xanahoaos.— JefTerson. Notes on Va.,
134, 1794. Xanahoaks.— Am. Pioneer, ii, 189. 184:^.
Manahooks.— Simons in Smith. Va . i. 188, 1819.
Manahokei.— Smith, Va , l, 74, 1819. Xannahan-
noeka.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 151. 1883.
Kannahoacks.— Strachey, Va., 37, 1849. Kanna-
boaga.— Domenccb, Deserts N. Am., i, 442, 1860.
Xannahoaka.— Strachev, Va.. 104, 1849. Kanna-
hoeka.— Ibid..41. Xannahokes.— Smith. Va.. 1. 120,
1819. Xonahoaea. — JeflFerson quoted bv Bozman.
Md., I, 113, 1837.
Manam. A tribe that formerly lived
on the road from Coahuila to the Texas
country; possibly the people elsewhere
referreii to as Mazames, aim probably be-
longing to the Coahuiltecan linguistic
stock.— Manzanet, MS. (1690), cited bv
H. E. Bolton, inf'n, 1906.
Manamoyik. A former Nauset village
near Chatham, Barnstable co., Mass.
In 1685 it contained 115 Indians over 12
vears of age. In 1 762 the population had
be<rome reduced to fewer than 30 under
the chief Quasson and were known as the
Quasson tribe. (j. h^
Xanamoiak.— Bradford {ca. 1650) in Mass. Hist,
Soe. Coll., 4th 8., Ill, 97, 1856. Xanamoiok.— DrakeJ
Bk. Inds.. bk. 2, 15, 1»I8. Xanamoyok.— Wins-*
low (1622) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., vni, 249,
1802. Xanamoyet.— Hinckley (1685), ibid., 4th s.,
V, 133, 1861. Kanamoyik.— Bourne (1674). ibid.,
1st s., I, 197. 1806. Xannamoyk.— Gookin (1674),
ibid.. 148. Xaramoick.— Moun (1622). ibid., 2d 8.,
IX. 53, 1822. Xonamoy.— Treat (1687), ibid., 4th s.,
V, 186. 1861. Xonamoyik.— Drake, Bk. Inds., bk, 2,
1 18. 1848. Xonimoy.— Rawson and Danforth (1696)
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.. 1st s., x. 133, 1809. Koao- 1
moy.— Freeman (1685), ibid.. 4th s., V. 132, 1861.1
Xonymoyk.— Stiles ( 1762?), ibid., l.st s., x, 114, 1809.
Quaasen.— Stiles (1762), ibid. I
Mananosay. See Mnninofte,
Manato ( Ma-na-to^ * snake ' ) . A gens of
the Shawnee (q. v.). — Morgan, Anc. Soc.,
168, 1877.
Manchaag* (Tooker suggests deriva-
tion from menuhkhikookj *ye shall be
strengthened * ). A villageof Christian In-
dians, in 1674, in Nipinuc territory, near
the present Oxford, Worcester co., Mass.
Xanchage.— <Jookin (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
1st M. I, 189. 1HU6. Xanchau^.— G<x>kin (1677) in
Trans. Am. Antiq. Soi\.ii.467. 1K36. Xaaohage.—
Gookin in Ma.ss. Hist. S<x>. Coll.. 3d s.. 11.59,1830
(misprint). Xauohaur.— Barber. Hist. Coll.. 503,
1839 (misprint?). Xonuhohofok.— Eliot quoted
by Trumbull, Ind. Names Ccmn., 21. 1881.
Xanckatawangnm. A former Iroouois
town near the site of Barton, Bradforti co..
Pa., about 10 m. below Tiojm.
Fitieerald't Parm.— Lieutenant Beatty's Journal
(1779) in Jour. Mil. Exped. Maj. Gen. Sullivan,
25, 1887. Kaokatowando. — Camplleld ( 1779) , ibid . ,
55. Xaoktowanuck.— Major Norris' Journal ( 1779),
ibid., 230. Xanckatawancnm.— Note to Beatty's
Journal, ibid., 25 (misprint). Xaaekatawaacran.—
Lieutenant Jenkin's Journal (1779), ibid., 171,
Xohontowonga.— Map cited, ibid., 25.
Mandan. A Siouan tril)e of the north-
west. The name, according to Maxi-
milian, originally given by the Sioux is
believed by Matthews to l)e a corruption
of the Dakota MmvaUini. Previous to
1830 they called themselves simply
Numakiki, 'people* (Matthews). Max-
imilian says **if thev wish to particu-
larize their descent they add the name
of the village whence they came origi-
nally." Hay den gives Mian^tanes, * peo-
ple on the Itank,' as the name they apply
to themselves, and draws from tnis the
inference that "they must have resided
on the banks of the Missouri at a very
remote period." According to Moi^n
(Syst. Consang. and Afiin., 285), the na-
tive name of the tribe is Metootahiik,
* South villagers.' Their relations, so far as
known historically and traditionally, have
been most intimate with the Hidatsa; jret,
judged by the linguistic test, their position
must be nearer the Winnebago. Mat-
thews appears to consider the Hidatsa and
Mandan descendants from the same im-
mediate stem. Their traditions regarding
their early history are scant and almost
BULL. 30]
MANDAN
797
entirely mythological. All that can be
gathered from them is the indication that
at some time they lived in a more easterly
locality in the vicinity of a lake. This
tradition, often repeat^Ki by subsequent
(authors, is mven by Lewis and Clark, as
follows: ** The whole nation resided in one
large village underground near a subterra-
neous lake; a grapevine extendeil its roots
down to their habitation and gave them a
view of the light; some of the most adven-
turous climlxHl up the vine and were de-
lighted with the sight of the earth, which
they foun<l covered with buffalo and rich
with every kin<l of fruits; returning with
the grapes they had gathered, their coun-
trymen were so please<l with the taste of
them that the whole nation resolved to
leave their dull residence for the charms
of the upper region; men, women, and
children ascended by means of the vine;
but when about half the nation had
reached the surface of the earth, a cor-
pulent woman who was clamlx»ring up
the vine broke it with her weight, and
closed upon herself and the rest of the
nation the light of the sun. Those who
were left on earth made a village below.
where we saw the nine villages; and
when the Mandan die they expect to
return to the original seats of their fore-
fathers, the gor>d reaching the ancient
village l>y means of the lake, which the
burden of the sins ot the wicked will not
ena!>le them to cross." Maximilian says:
**They atHrm that they dest^ended origi-
nally from the more eastern nations, near
the seat 'oast." Their linj^uistic relation
to the Winnebago an<l the fact that their
movements in their historic era have been
westward up the Missouri correspond
with their tnidition of a more t»asterly
origin, and would seeminj^ly locate them
in the vicinity of the *up^>er lakes.
It is i)ossible that the tradition which
has long prevaile<l in the ri'gion of
N. w. Wisconsin reganling the so-called
** ground-house Indians" whcxmce live<l
in that st^ction an<l dwelt in circular earth
loilges, parti v underground, applies to
the tHH>[>le of this triln?, although other
tril)esof this general regicm formerly live<i
in houst»s of this character. Assuming
that the Mandan formerly resided in the
vicinity of the upper Mississippi, it is prob-
able that they moved down this stream for
some <liHtance before passing to the Mis-
souri. The fact that when first encount-
erwl by the whites they relied to some ex-
t(»nt on agriculture as a means of subsist-
ence would s<»ein to justify the conclusion
that they w^ere at some time in the past
in a section where agriculture was prac-
tise<l. It is })ossible, as Morgan con-
tends, that they learned agricultun^ from
the Ilidatsa, but the reverse has more
often l)een maintained. Catlin's theorv
that they formerly lived in Ohio and built
mounds* and move<l thence to the N.W\
is without any basis. The traditions re-
gardingtheir migrations, asgiven by Maxi-
milian, commence with their arrival at the
Missouri. The [>oint where this stream
was first reache<l was at the mouth of
White r., S. Dak. From this point they
inovtHl up the Missouri to Moreaii r.,
wherethevcame in contact with theChey-
enne, ainf where also the fonnation of
"bands or unicms" l>egim. Thencethey
continmHlu[) the Missouri to Heart r., N.
Dak., where they were residing at the
time of the first known visit of the whites,
Init it is probable that trappers and trad-
ers visited them earlier.
The tirst reconle<l visit to the ^landan
was that by the Sieur de la Verendrye in
1 7:^. About 1 750 they were settled near
the mouth of Heart r. in 9 villages, 2 on the
E. and 7 on the w. side. Remains of these
villages were found by I-.ewis and Clark
in 1804. Having suffered severely from
smallpoxandtheattacksof theAs8inil)oin
and Dakota, the inhabitants of the two
eastern villages consolidated and moved
up the Missouri to a \K>int oj)posite the
798
MANDAN
[B.i
Arikara. The same causes soon reduced
the other villf^^ to 5, whose inhabitants
subsequently joined those in the Arikara
country, forming 2 villages, which in 1776
were ifkewise meTge<l. Thus the whole
tril)e was rechiccd to 2 villages, Metuta-
hanke and Rui>tari, situated alnjut 4'>m.
l)el<>w the mouth of Knife r., on opposite
si<leH of the Missouri. These two villages
wore visited by I^ewis and Clark in 1804.
In 1S87 they were almost dentroyecl by
smallpox, only 'M souls out of 1,600, ac-
cording to one account, l)eing left, al-
though other and probably more reliable
accounts make the number of survivors
from 125 to 145. Aftt»r that time they oc-
cupi(Kl a single village. In 1845, when
the Hidatsa removed from Knife r., some
of the Mandan went with them, and others
f ol U »wed at inttTvals. Accordinj^ to Mat-
thews, some moved up to the village at
Ft Berthold as late as 1858. By treaty at
the Mandan village, July IW, 1825, they
entered into peaceable relations with the
Tnited Statt*?*. They i>articipated in the
Ft I^ramie (Wyo.) treaty of Sept. 17,
1851, by which' the boundaries of the
trilH\s of the N.W. were define<l, and in
the unratified treaty of Ft Berthold, Dak.,
July 27, 1866. By Executive order of
Apr. 12, 1870, a large reservation was set
apart for the Mandan, Hidatsa, and Ari-
kara IiKlians in North Dakota and Mon-
tana, along Missouri and Little Missouri
rs., which included the Mandan village,
then situated on the left bank of the
Missouri in lat. 47*^ 34^ Ion. 101 *> 48^
By agreement at Ft Berthold agency, Dec.
14, 1866, the Mandan, Arikara, and Hi-
datsa ceded that portion of their reserva-
tion N. of lat. 48°, and e. of a n. and s.
line 6 m. w. of the most westerly point of
the bijj bend of ^lissouri r., s. of lat. 48°.
Provision was also made for allotment in
severalty of the remaining portion.
Accoriling to Maximilian the Mandan
were vigorous, well made, rather above
medium statun*, many of them being ro-
bust, broa<l-shouldere<l, and muscular.
Their noses, not so long and arched as
those of the Sioux, were sometimes aqui-
line or slightly curve<l, sometimes quite
straight, never broad; nor had they such
high cheek bones as the Sioux. Some of
the women were robust and rather tall,
though usually they were short an<l broad-
shouMered. The nien paid the greatest
attention to their head<lress. They some-
times wore at the l)ack of the hea<l a long,
stiff ornament made of small sticks en-
twined with wire, fastened to the hair and
reaching <lown to the shoulders, which
was <'overe<l with porcupine quills dyed
of various colors in neat patterns. At the
ui)iH»r end of thisornament an eagle feather
was fastened horizontally, the quill end
of which was covered with red cloth and
the tip ornamented with a bunch of horse-
hair dyed yellow. These ornaments varied
and were symbolic. Tattooing was prac-
tised to a limited extent, mostly on the
left breast and arm, with black parallel
stripes and a few other figures.
Tne Mandan villages were assemblages
of circular clay-covered log huts placed
close together without regard to order.
Anciently these wert^ surrounded with
palisades of strong posts. The huts were
slightly vaulted and were provided with
a sort of portico. In the center of the
roof was a s<iuare oi)ening for the exit
of the smoke, over which was a circular
siTeen made of twigs. The interior was
spacious. Four strong pillars near the
middle, with several crossl)eams, snp-
porteil the roof. The dwelling was cov-
ered outside with matting made of osiers,
over which was laid hay or grass, and
then a covering of earth. '*The beds
stand against the wall of the hut; they
consist of a large s(]uare case made of
parchment or skins, with a square en-
trance, and are large enough to hold sev-
eral i)ersons, who lie very conveniently
and warm on skins and blankets.** They
cultivated maize, l)eans, gourds, and the
sunflower, and manufactured earthen-
ware, the clay being tem!)ered with flint
or granite reduced to powder by the action
of fire. Polygamy was comnion among
them. Their beliefs and ceremonies were
similar to those of the Plains tribes gen-
erally. The Mandan have always Seen
friendly to the United States, and since
18(U) a number of the men have been en-
listed as scouts.
In Lewis and Clark's time the Mandan
were estimated to number 1,250, and in
1837 1,600 souls, but about the latter date
they were reduce<l by smallpox to be-
tween 125 and 150. In 1850 the number
given was 150; in 1852 it had apparently
increased to 385; in 1871, to 450; in 1877
the number given was 420; it was 410
in 1885, and 249 in 1905.
There were, according to Morgan ( Anc.
So<*., 158, 1877), the following divisions,
which seem to have corresponded with
their villages before consolidation: (\)
Horatamumake (Kharatanumanke), (2)
Matonumake (Matonumanke), (3) See-
pooshka (Sipushkanumanke), (4) Tana-
tsuka (Tanetsukanumanke), (5) Kitane-
make (Khitanumanke), (6) Estapa
(Histanenumanke), and (7) Meteahke.
In audition to the works citeil, seeCatlin
(1) North American Indians, 1841, (2)
0-kee-pa, 1867; Coues, Lewis and Clark
Exped., 1893; Orig. Jour. Ix?wisand Clark,
1904-05; Dorsey (1) A Study of Siouan
Cults, 11th Rei). B. A. K., 1894,(2) Siouan
S<K'iology, 15th Rep. B. A. E.,1897; Hay-
den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 1862;
McGeein 15th Rep. B. A. E., 1897; Mat-
lirLL. 30]
MANDHINKAGAGHK MANGAS OOLORADAS
799
pewH, Hidatea Inds., 1877; Will and Spin-
lien, The Mandans, 1906. ( j. o. d. c. t. )
|L-rleh-bi-«&. — Long, Exped. Rocky MU^., n,
Izxxiv, 1823 ( Hidatsa name). Aa-a-ka-shi.— Hay-
Sen. Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.,402. 1862 (Crow
name). How-mox-toz-sow-«s. — Henry, Blackfo<jt
US. vocab., 1806 ( HidatRanamc) . Kuataais.— Ra-
Bnesquein Manhall, HiHt. Ky.,l,28,1824. Kanit'.—
aayden, Ethnog. and f'hilol. Mo. Val.. 357. 1862
[Arikaraname). Kwowahtewug.— Tanner, Narr.,
116, 1880 (Ottawa name). Let HaadaU.— Maximil-
ian, Trav., 334, 1843 (80 called by the French Ca-
oaaiana). Madaa.^Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark
(1804), I, 202. 1904. XiSuia-Karra.— Maximilian.
Tiav., 885, 1848 ( 'the sulky' : so called because they
left the rest of their nation and went higher up
lliasourir.). Mandama.— U.S. Stat., xiv, 493, 1868.
Haaiaa.— Lewis and Clark, Diseov., 6, 1806. ICan-
aaae.— Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1805), i, 256,
1904. Haadaaat.— Du Lac, Voy. dans Ics Louisi-
Anes, 262, 1805. Maadaai.—Capellini, Trav.. 226.
1867. Kaadaaae.— Gass, Voy.. 80. 1810. Maadan-
— Du La<*, Voy. dans le« LouisiancH. 225, 18a=>.
■ i*s.— Brackenridge, Views of La., 70, 1814.
—Sen. Misc. Doc. 53, 45th Cong., 3d sesj*..
86, 1879 (misprint). Haadeat.— Orig. Jour. Lewis
and Clark (1804), i, 188, 1904. MaadUat.— Janson,
Stranger in Am., 233, 1807. Haadint.— Grig. Jour.
Lewis and Clark (1804), i, 201. 1904. Xandoa.—
Mass. Hist. Coll., 1st s., ill, 24, 1794. Maad'.—
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark (1804). i, 208, 1904.
Maataaat.— Verendrye (1738) in Margry, EKH;.. vi,
590. 1886. MaatoB.— Neill. Hist. Minn., 173, 185S.
■an-wa'-ta-ain. — Cook. Yankton MS. To<»ib..
B. A. E., 184, 1882 (Yankton name). Kaudaua.—
Mitchell (1854) in Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, v, 686,
1855 (misprint). Kawade^a.— Dorsey, ipegiha
MS., B. A.,E., 1880 (Omaha and Ponca name).
Ka-wa'-ta-daD.— Riggs, Dak. Gram, and Diet., 137.
1852 (Santee name), mawataai.— lapi Oaye, xiii,
no. 9, 33, Sept. 1KK4 ( Yan k ton name ) . Ka-wa'-Un-
aa.— Riggs, Dak. Gram. and Diet., 137, 1852 (Yank-
ton name). Kaw-d&a.— Sibley (^1804) in Am. St.
Pap., Ind. Aff., i, 710, 1832. Meandaaa.— Gale,
Upper Miss., 182, 1867. Me-too'-Uhak.— Morgan,
Consang. and Amn., 285. 1871 (own name: sig.
*south villagers'). Matatahankw. — Matthews.
Ethnoe. Hidatsa. 14. 1H77 (own name since 1837,
after tneirold village). Ki-aA'-ta-nea.— Hayden,
Ethnog. and PhiloL Mo. Val., 426, 1862 ('people
on the bank'). Ko-ao'-ai-o.— Ibid., 290 (Chey-
enne name). Nohar-taaey.— Corliss, Lacotah MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 106, 1874 (Teton name). Kama-
kaU.— Matthews, Ethnog. Hidatsa, 14. 1877 ('men',
* people ' : own name prior to 1837 ) . Knmalcahi. —
Maximilian, Trav., 864, 1843. Kumanakake.—
Ibid., 835. KttweU.— Matthews, Ethnog. Hidatsa.
14, 1877 ('ourselves' : used sometimes in speaking
of themselves and the Hidatsa together). XJ-ka'-
aha.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.. 402,
1862 ('earth houses': Crow name). XJa-auo-ear-
ahay.— Crow MS. vocab., B. A. E. (Crow name).
WaAtaai.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 520,
1878 (see Matoatani, above).
Muidhinkagaghe ( * earth makers ' ) . An
Omaha gens on the Inshtasanda side of the
campcircle. The sabgentes given are Ine-
waknubeadhin, Khube, Minghasanweta-
zhi, Mikasi, and Ninibatan.
Barth-lodga.— Dorsey in Bui. Philos. Soc. Wash.
130, 1880. Hadhiaka-cache.— Dorsey, Omaha MS.,
B. A. E., 1878. Xa-'^iaka-ff^.— Dorsey in 3d Rep.
B. A. E., 219, 1885. Kikaai-nBikaoioga.— Dorsey,
Omaha MS., op. cit ('prairie-wolf people'). Xon-
aka-foh-ha.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., i, 327, 1828.
0-Boa-«'-ka-ga-Kft'.~Morgan, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877
( * many seasons ' ) . Prairia-Wolf paople. -^Doraoy,
Omaha MS., B. A. E.. 1878.- Wolf People.— Dorsey
In Bui. Philos. Soc. Wash., 130, 1880.
Kan ex it (perhaps from nianuune^
'meekness,' * gentleness*: Manunne-es-itf
'place of meekness.' — Tooker. Cf.
Trumbull, below). A village of Christian
Indians in 1674, in Nipmuc territory, near
the present Thompson, Windham co.,
Conn. It was about (> ni. x. of (^uan-
tisset. (.1. M. )
Maaaezit.— (i(K)kin (1074) in Mas.«4. Hist. Soc. Coll..
Lsts., I, 190, H<m. Mananezit.— Tninibiill. Ind.
Names ('(»nn.. 28, 1881. Manexit.— Mas.s. Hist. Soc.
Coll., lsts.,vi.205. IHOO. Mayaneexit.— Trumbull,
op.cit. Mayanexit.— Ibid. Myanexit.— Ibid. Wa-
nezit.— Drake, Bk. Inds.,bk.3,8K, 184«.
Mangaehqna {Manfj-^tch-ijun). A Pota-
watonii village on Poblo (?) r., inji, Michi-
gan, on a tract sold in 1827. — Potawatomi
treaty (1827) in V. S. Iml. Treat., 675,
18Z;i
Mangas Goloradas ( Span : ' re<l sk^e ves ' ) .
A MimbreHo Anache chief. He pU^lj^ed
frien<lship to tfie Americans when (ien.
S. W. Kearny took possession of New
Mexico in 1846. The chief stronjrhohl of
tlic MimbreHos at tliat time was at the
Santa Rita copper mines, s. w. N. Mex.,
where they hiut kille<l tlie miners in 1837
to avenge a ma.«sacr(U'ommittt^l l)y wliite
trapi^rs who invite<l a mnnlKT of.Mim-
breflos to a feast and murdered tliem to
obtain the bounty of $100 offert^l by the
state of Chihuahua for every Ai)ache
scalp. When the l)oun<lary commi.^sion
made its hea<l«iuarti»rs at Santa Rita
trouble arose over the taking from the
Mimbreilo Apache of some Mexican cap-
tives and over the murder of an Indian
by a Mexican whom the Americans re-
fused to hanjr on the soot. The Mini-
brenos retaliated by stealing some liorst^s
and mules In'longing to the commission,
and when the commi.«sioners went on to
survey an< )ther sect ion of the! )ou ndary the
Indians conceivnl that they had driven
them away. In consequence of 'in-
dignities received at the hamls of miners
at the Pinos Altos gold mines, by wh(»ni
he was iKmnd an<l wlnpiKnl, "Mangas
Coloradas col lected a large l)and of A [)ache
and became the scourge of the white set-
tlements for years. lie forme<l an alliance
with Cochise to resist the Californian vol-
unteers whoreoccupied the country when
it was abandoned by troojvs at the In^gin-
ning of the Civil war, an<l wa** wounded in
an engagement at Apache pass, s. e.
Ariz., that grew out of a misunderstand-
ing ri»gardinga theft of cattle. His men
took him to Janos, in Chihuahua, and
left him in the c^ire of a surgeon with a
warning that tlietown would be destroye<l
in case he were notcurt»d. According to
one account, soon after his recovery he
was taken prisoner in Jan., 1863, by the
Californians and was killed while at-
temi)ting to escapts goade<l, iti8sai<l, with
a red-hot bayonet (Dunn, Massacn^s of
Mts., 365, 374, :^2, 1886), while Bell ( New
Tracks, ii, 24, 1869) states that in 1862 he
was inductnl to enter FtMcI^ne, N. Mex.,
on the plea of making a treaty and receiv-
ing presents. The soldiers imprisone<l
him in a hut, an<l at night a st^ntry sh<>t
him under the pretext that he feare<l the
Indian would escajK*. Consult also Ban-
800
MANGE — ^MANITO
[B. A. B.
croft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 1889; Bartlett.
Pers. Narr., i-ii, 1854.
Mange. A Pima rancheria on the Rio
Gila, 8. Ariz., visited and named by Kino
(after Juan Mateo Mange) about 1697. —
Bernal quoted by Bancroft, Ariz, and N.
Mex., :^56, 1889.
Mangoraca. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy in 1608, on the n. bank of the
Rappahannock, in Richmond co., Va. —
Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr. 1819.
Mangnnckaknek ( ' place of great trees.' —
Trumbull) . A village in 1638, occupied
by conquered Pequot subject to the Mo-
hegan. It seems to have been on Thames
r. below Mohegan, New London co..
Conn.— Williams (1638) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 4th 8., VI, 251, 1863. Cf.
Magunkcupiog.
Mankasset ( *an island sheltered by other
inlands' (Jones, I nd. Bull., 14, 1867), re-
ferring to Shelter id. ). A small tribe or
band, belonging to the Montauk group,
formerly livmg on Shelter id., at the e.
end of Long Island, N. Y. Their chief,
according to some authorities, lived at
Sachem's Neck on Shelter id.,- but ac-
cording to Tooker either at Cockles Har-
lK>r or Menantic cr. For the application
of the name to Shelter id., see Tooker,
Algonq. Ser., vii, 1901. (j. m.)
Manhaniet.— Wood in Macaulev, N. Y., ii, 262,
1829. lUnhsMet.— N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ii, 146,
188S. lUnhaMett.-Deed (1648) in Thompson.
Long Id., 181, 1839. Moluuitick.— Writer ca. 1650
in Drake, Bk. Inds., bk.2, 74, 1848 (probably the
"— " " ' " k). Konfa
Manhasset, or perhaps the Montau
•et— Trumbull, Conn., i, 146, 1818.
Manhattan ( * the hill island,' or * the is-
land of hills,' from marmh 'island', -atin
* hill.'— Tooker). A tribe of the Wap-
pinger ccmfederac'y that occupied Man-
hattan id. and the e. bank of Hudson r.
and shore of Long Island sd., in Wet^t-
chesterco., N. Y. Early Dutch writers
applied the name also to people of neigh-
boring Wappinger tribes. The Man-
hattan had their principal village, Nap-
peckamack, where Yonkers now stands,
and their territory stretched to Bronx r.
From their fort, Nipinichsen, on the n.
bank of Spuyten Duyvil cr., they sallied
out in two canoes to attack Hendrik
Hudson when he returned down the river
in 1609. Manhattan id. contained sev-
eral villages which they used only for
hunting and fishing. One was Saponani-
kan. The island was bought from them
by Peter Minuit on May 6, 1626, for 60
guilders' worth of trinkets (Martha J.
Lamb, Hist. City of N. Y., i, 53, 1877).
Their other lands were disposed of by
later sales. See Ruttenber, Ind. Tribes
Hudson R., 77, 1872. (j. m.)
Mahatons.— Bbudinot. Star in the "West, 127, 1816.
Maaathanea.— De Lael, Nov. Orbis, 72, 1633.— Ma-
nathe.— La Ronton. New Voy., i,47, 1703. Xana-
thcM.— LaSallt»(1681) in Margry, D^c.,ii, 148,1877.
Manliate*.— Dutch map (1616) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., 1. 1856. ManhatoMn.— De Rasidres (1628) In
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 77, 1872. Manhat-
tae.~De Laet, Nov. Orbis, 72, 1688. jh
ete.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 23, 1862. Xaahat-
te«.— Map ca. 1614 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i, 1866.
Manhattonft.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816
Monatona. —Ruttenber. Tribes Hudson R. , 862. 1872!
lIonatun».--Schoolcraft in N. Y. Hist Soc. Proc..
96, 1844. Rechgawawaac— Treaty of 1648 in N. Y.
DocCol.HistMXin, 14, 1881 (so called after their
f?^**^Joo,***S*:?;i^-N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist, xm.
147, 1881. SeoUcawyck. —Treaty of 1660, ibid.
Rc«dcawandtt.-Rutt€nber, Tribes Hudson R., 106.
1872. Reckawawano.— Treaty (1643) quoted by
Ruttenber, ibid., no. RMkewacket.-Breeden
Raedt (ca. 1636). ibid.. 78. RectouTawaaS-Sw
of 1643 quoted by Winfield, Hudson Co.. 42, 1874.
Reweghnoncks.— Doc. of 1663 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist, XIII, 303, 1881. w.. v^i.
Hanhasitanmaxi (Man'hazi^ianman, *vil-
lace on a yellow cliff ') . A former Kansa
village on Kansas r., near Lawrence,
Kans.— Dorsey, Kansas MS. vocab..
B. A. E., 1882. '
MaxiliaEiilin (Man^haziilin, * village at the
.yellow bank'). A former Kansa village
on Kansas r., one of those occupied before
the removal to Council Grove, Kans., in
1846.— Dorsey, Kansas MS. vocab..
B. A. E., 1882.
Manliaziilintanman ( * village where they
dwelt at a yellow cliff' ). One of the last
villages of the Kansa, on Kansas r., Kans.
Ma-'haxttli" U«'ma».— Dorsey, Kansas M8. Tocab.,
I'A^-.W' .?*^>^«->"' t.»e.-.lbid. (=• where
Minkhudjeindied').
Manhakdhintanwan ( Manriu^^n^'tanwan^
* dwelling place at a cliff village'). An
ancient Osage village on a branch of
Neosho r., Kans.— Dorsey, Osage MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1883.
Manieo. A tribe mentioned by Manzanet
(MS., 1690, cited bv H. E. Bolton, inf n,
1906) as living on the road from Coahuila
to the Texas country. Perhaps identical
with the Maliacones of Cabeza de Vaca
and the Meracouman of Joutel.
Maninose. A name used in Maryland
for the soft-shell clam {Mya arenaria),
called mananosay in more northerly
parts of the Atlantic coast. Dr L. M.
Yale, of New York (inf n, 1903), states
that the local name at Lewes, Del., is
mullinose. The word appears also as man-
nynose. The word is derived from one of
the southern Algonquian dialects, Virgin-
ian or Delaware; probably the latter.
The derivation seems to be from the radi-
cal mail', *to gather.' (a. f. c.)
Manistee. Mentioned as if an Ottawa .
village in Michigan in 1836, of which 1
Keway Gooshcum ( Kewigushkum ) was ^
then chief ( U. S. Ind. TreaUes, 656, 1837).
Kewigushkum is earlier mentioned as an
Ottawa chief of L'Arbre Croche (Waga-
nakisi), in which vicinity, on Little Trav-
erse bay, Manistee may have been.
Maniti.(3fa7«'-<i, * those who camp away
from the village'). A Sisseton band; an
offshoot of the Kakhmiaton wan. —Dorsey
in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 217, 1897.
Manito. The mysterious and unknown
potencies and powers ol lift and of the
universe. As taken over from Algon-
BULL. 30]
M ANITSUK M ANSO
801
qnian into the vocabulary of the white
man, it has signified spirit, good, bac',
or indifferent; Indian god or devil, de-
mon, guardian spirit, genius loci, fetish,
etc. The spelling manitou indicates
iVench influence, the earlier writera in
English using manitto, manetto, nianitoa,
etc. Cuoq says that the Nipissing manito
was formerly pronounced manitou. Some
writers use manito, or good manito, for
Good or Great Spirit, and evil manito
for the devil, it is declared by some
that the signification of such terms as
Kitchi manito. Great Spirit, has \yeen
modified by missionary mfluence. The
form manito of English literature comes
from one of the e. Algonquian dialects,
the Massachuset manitto, he is a god, the
Narraganset (Williams, 1643) mdnit, god,
or the Delaware manitto. The form
manitou comes with French intennedia-
tion from the central dialects, the Chip-
pewa, and Nipissing or Cree manito
[Trumbull in Old and New, i, 337, 1870) .
The term has given rise to many place
names in Canada and the United States.
For a discussion of manito from the Indian
point of view, consult Jones in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, xviii, 183-190, 1905. See J/y-
thology, Oreada, Religion. (a. f. c.)
MfUditsuk. An Eskimo village on the
s. E. coast of Greenland, about lat. 62°
30^; pop. 8 in 1829.
Maneeuuk.— Graah, Exped. Greenland, map, 1837.
Mankato (properly Ma-ka'-to, 'blue
earth*). A former band and village of
the Mdewakanton Sioux, probably at or
near the site of the present Mankato, at
the mouth of Blue Earth r., Faribault co.,
Minn., named from a chief known as Old
Mankato. A later Mdewakanton chief
who bore the name Mankato, the son of
Good Road, was a member of the delega-
tion who signed the Washington treaty of
June 18, 1858, in which his name appears
as "Makawto (Blue Earth),*' and he is
referred to also in the Indian Affairs
Report for 1860, in connection with his
Imnd, as under the Lower Sioux Agency,
Minn. He took an active part in the
Sioux outl^reak of 1862, and was one of
the leaders in the second attack, in Aug.
1862. on Ft Ridgely, Minn., in which, it
is said, about 800 Sioux and Winnebago
were engaged. He participated also m
the fight at Birch Coolie, Mmn., on Sept.
3 6i the same year, and was killed by a
cannon ball at the battle of Wood (or
Battle) lake, Sept. 23. (c. t.)
Bine Earth lMuid.~Qale. Upper Miss., 261, 1867.
lUkato'tbMid.— Ind. Aff. Rep.. 68, 1860.
Mankoke ( * owl * ). An Iowa gens, now
extinct.
Mii'-kotch.— Mongran. Anc. Soc . 156, 1877. lUn'-
ko-ke.— Doreey in 16th Rep. B. A. E., '239, 1897.
Mannynose. See Maninose.
Xanomet A village of Christian I ndians
in 1674 near the present Monument, Sand-
wich township, Barnstable co., Mass. It
Bull. 30—05 51
may have belonged to the Nauset or to
the Wampanoag. In 1685 it contained
110 Indians over 12 years of age.
Manamet.— Doc. in Smith (1622), Vs., ii, 235, repr.
1819. Manamete.— Bradford (rn. 1650) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th 8.. Ill, 234, 1856. Mananiet.—
Bourne (1674), ibid., 1st 8.. i, 198, 1806. Manna-
mett.— Hinckley (1685), ibid., 4th s., v, 133, 1861.
Kannamit.— Bourne (1674), ibid., Ist s., I, 198,
1806. Manomet.— Winslow (1623), ibid., vni, 252,
1802. Manumit.— Freeman (1792), ibid., I, 231,
1806. Monomete.— Doc. in Smith (1622), Va.,ii, 233,
repr. 1819. Monument.— Freeman (1792) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., Ists., 1,231, 1806. Monumet —Davis,
ibid., viii, 122, 1802.
Manosaht ( ' houses-on-spit people ' ) . A
Nootka tribe formerly dwelling at Hes-
quiat [>t., betwet^n Nootka an<lClayo<iuot
sds., w. coast of Vancouver id. In 1883,
the last time tlieir name appears, they
nunil)ered 18.
Manni-w6u»ut.— Mavne, Brit, ('ol., 251, 1862. Man-
oh-ah-sahts.— Can.Ind.Aff.,52, 1875. Ma'nooMth.—
Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes ('an., 31, 1890. Mano-
saht.—Sproat, Sav. Life, 'SOS, 1868. Manoait.— Swan,
MS., B. A. E. Mau-os-aht.— Can. Ind. AIT. 1883, 188,
1884.
Manos de Perro (Span.: 'dog-feet,* lit.
' dog hands ' ) . One of the tribes formerly
living near the lower RioCtrande in Texas;
mentioned byGarcia (Manual, title, 1760)
among those speaking the Coahuilteoan
language, for wliich his Manual was pre-
pared.
Manos Prietas (Span.: Mark hands*).
A former tribe of n. e. Mexico or s.
Texas, probably Coahuiltecan, although
farther inland than the best determined
Coahuiltecan tribes. They were found
in tlie neighborhood of the Rio Grande
and in 1677 were gathered into the mis-
sion of Santa Rosa de Nadadores.
Manos Pnetas.— Fernando del Bosque (1675) in
Nat. Geog. Mag., xiv, 340, 1903. Manosprietas.—
Orozeo y Berra, Geog., 302, 1864.
ManshkaoBikashika ( * crawfish t>eople * ) .
A Quapaw gens.
Han'na tanna.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 230,
1897 ('large Ilaft'ka' ). Ma^oka' e'nikaci'na.— Ibid.
Manso ( Span . : * mild * ) . A former semi-
sedentary tribe on the Mexican frontier,
near Kl Paso, Tex., who, before the com-
ing of the Spaniards, liad changed their
former solid mode of building for habita-
tions constructed of reeds and wood.
Their mode of government and system of
kinship were found to l)e the same as those
of the Pueblos proper — the Tigua, Piros,
and Tewa — from whom their rites and
traditions clearly prove them to have
come. They are divided into at least
four clans— Blue, White, Yellow, and
Red corn — and tliere are also traces of
two Water clans. This system of clan-
ship, however, is doubtful, since it bears
close resemblance to that of the Tigua,
with whom the Mansos have extensively
intermarried.
According to Bandelier it is certain that
the Mansos formerly lived on the lower
RioCtrande in New Mexico, about Mesilla
valley, in the vicinity of tlie present I.as
Cruces, and were settled at El Paso in 1659
802
MANTA — MANUELITO
[B. ▲.■.
Is^-^
by Fray Garcia de San Francisco, who
founded among them the mission of Nues-
tra Seflora de Guadalu|>e de los Mansos,
the church edifice being dedicated in
1668. At this date the mission is reported
by Vetancurt (Teatro Mex., in, 309, 1871 )
to have contained upwanl of 1,000 parish-
ioners. About their idiom nothing is
known. They have the same olSicers as
the Pueblos, and, although reduced to a
dozen families, maintain their organiza-
tion and some of their rites and dances,
which are verv similar to those of the
northern Puel^lo peoples, whom the
Mansos recognize as their relatives. They
are now associated with the Tigua and
Piros in the same town.
The term "manso" has also been ap-
plied by the Spaniards in a general sense
to designate any subjugated Indians.
(See Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Rep., v, 50,
1884; Arch. Inst. Papers, in, 86, 165-68,
248, 1890; iv, 348-49, 1892. )
Oorretas.— Zarate-Salmeron (ra. 1629) in Laud of
Sunshine, 183, Feb. 1900 (Span.: 'little caps'):
Benavides, Memorial, 9, 1630. Oorritet.— Lin-seho-
ten, Descr. de I'AnK^rique, map 1, 1638. Lanos.—
Perea (1629) quoted by Vetancurt, Teatro Mex.,
111,300,308,1871 (orMansoR). Kaitet.— Linschoten,
Descr. de rAm<^rique, map 1, 1638. Kansa.—
Benavides, Memorial, 9, 1630. Manse*.— Sanson,
L'Am^rique, 27, map, 1657. Mansos.— Benavides,
Memorial, 9, 1630. Manzo.— Ofiate (1598) in Doc.
In^d, XVI, 243, 1871 ("sus primeraspalabrasfueron
manxOf manxoy micas, micos, por decir mansos y
amigos " ) . Xptianos Manssos. —Doc. of 1684 quoted
hy Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iii, 89, 1890
(i. e.. 'Christian Mansos').
Manta ( Brinton believed this to \ye acor-
ruption of Montheo, the dialec^tic form of
Munsee among the Mahican and Indians
of E. New Jersey). Formerly an impor-
tant division of the New Jersey Dela-
wares, livinjf on the e. liank of Delaware
r. about Salem cr. According to Brinton
thev extended uj) the river to the vicinity
of Burlington, as well as some distance
inland, but early writers locate other
l)ands in that region. Under the name
of Mantt»ses they were estimated in 1648
at 100 warriors. A>)out the beginning of
the 18th century they incorporated them-
selves with the Unami and Unalachtigo
Delawares. They have freouently been
conf()unde<l with the latter aivision, and
Chikohoki (<i. v. ) has also been used as
synonymous with Manta, but Brinton
thinks they were a southern branch of
the Munsee. (j. m. )
Troff Indians.— Proud, Pa., ii, 2W, 1798. Mandcs.—
Ibia., 295. Mantaas. — Herrman, map (1670) in
Maps to Accompany the Rep. of the Comrs. on
the Bndry. Line bet. Va. ana Md., 1873 (refers to
the river). Mantass.— Hudde (1662) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., XII, 370, 1877 ("Mantaeshoeck"). Man-
tassy.— De Laet (1633) In N. Y. Hist. Soc. Ck)ll., 2d s.,
1. 315,1841. Manias.- Doc. of 1656 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., I, 598. 1866. ManUws.— Macauley, N. Y., Ii,
293. 1829. Mantes.— Boudinot, Star in the West,
127, 1816. Manteses.— Evelin (m. 1648) in Proud,
Pa., 1, 113, 1797. Mantos.— Brinton. Lenape Leg.,
44, 1885. Maritises.— Sanford, U. 8., cxM, 1819
(misprint). Salem Indiaiu.— Proud, Pa., ii, 295,
1798.
Mantoaek. A tribe, possibly the Mde-
wakanton Sioux or its Matantonwan divi-
sion, known to the French missionaries;
placed by the Jesuit Relation of 1640 n. of
a small lake w. of Sault Ste Marie, and by
the Relation of 1658 with the Nadoue-
chiouek ( Nadowessioux, Dakota) , the two
having 40 towns 10 days* travel x. w. of
the mission St ^lichael of the Potawatomi.
Mantoughquemec. A village of the
Powhatan confederacy, in 1608, on Nan-
semond r., Nansemond co., Va. — Smith
(1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819.
Mantaenikashika ( * those who made or
adopted the grizzly l)ear as their mark or
means of identification as a people.* — La
Flesche). A Quapaw gens.
Ghrinly-bear (I) gens.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. £.,
229, 1897. Ma"ttt' e'nikaoi'i[a.— Ibid.
Manuelito. A Navaho chief. When
(tov. Merriwether conferred with the
Navaho in 1855 a>)out putting an end to
murders and robberies committed by
members of this tril)e, the head chief
avowed that he could not command the
obedience of his people, and resigned.
The chiefs present at the council tnere-
upon elected Manuelito to fill the place.
The lawless element did not cease their
depre<iations, and the obligation to sur-
render evil doers was no greater than it
had been l^ecause the Senate neglected to
confirm the treaty signed at the con-
BULL. 30 J
MANUFACTURES — MAPLE SUGAR
803
ference. When Col. D. (i. Miles started
out to punish the Navaho in 1859 he di»-
Btroyed the houwH and shot the horses
and cattle belonging to Manuelito's band.
When the Navaho finally ai^plie<l them-
selves thoroughly to peat'eful and pro-
ductive pursuits, their ol<l war chief was
chosen to take command of the native
g>lice force that was organized in 1872.
e died in 1893. Set*. Dunn, Massa(Te8 of
Mts., 1886; Matthews, Navaho lA»g., 11,
1897.
MannfEictiireB. See Artn and Industries:
Implements^ Toohy and Utensils; Invention^
and the articles thereunder cite<l.
Mannmaig {MydTumuikj 'catfish'). A
gens of the Chippewa, i\. v.
at Fith.— Morgan. Anc. 8<>c.. Hi6, 1877. Kan-um-
•ig.— WarriMi in Minn. HiMt. ikn-. Coll.. v. 14,1885.
Myiuuuiiiik.— \Vm. Jones, infn. 19(V».
Many Horses. A Piegan Siksika chief,
sometimes mentiontHl as * Dog ' and also
as *Sit8 in the Middle'; lx)rn al)out the
close of the ISth century. He was note<l
not only for his warlike characti»r but
for the large numl)er of horsi»8 he ac-
quireil; hence his name. According to
the account given bv the Indians toCTrin-
nell (Story of the Indian, 2:56, 1895), he
commence<l to gatherand to breed horses
imme<iiately after the Piegan first came
into possession of them from the Kutenai
(1804-06), and also made war on the
Shoshoni for the purpose of taking horses
from them. His herd In^came so exten-
sive that thev numlK'nMl more than all
the others Ix^longing to the tribe and re-
quired a large numlK»r of herders to take
care of them. Many Horses was a signer
of the first treaty of his tril)e with the
whites, on the upix'r Missouri, Oct. 17,
1855, which he signed as "Little Dog."
He was killed in 1867 at the battle of
Cypress Hill lK»twet»n the Piegan and the
allied Crows ami Hidatsa, at which time
he was an old man. (c. t. )
Xanyikakhthi ( Ma-nn'/'kn-qr,i\ * coy-
ote*). A pul)gens of the Michirat'he or
Wolf gens of the Iowa. — l>orsc»v in 15th
Rep. B. A. P:., 238, 1897.
Manyinka (* earth lodge'). A Kansa
gens, the 1st on the Ishtunga side of the
tribal circle. Its 8ubgt»ntes are Manyinka-
tangaand Manyinkazhinga.
Barft.— Mongran, Anc. Soc., 156, 1877. lla»yiiika.—
Doreey in 15th Rep. B. A. E.. 230, 1897. Maoyinka-
caze.— DoFHey in Am. Natur.. 671, 1«H5 Cearth-
lodgc makers ' ) . Mo-e'-ka-ne-ka'-the-ga. — Morgan,
Anc. Soc.. 156, 1K77. Moi-ka iiika-shiiigjca.—
StubbH, Kanna MS. voeab., 'JiS. 1877. TIjaBge
wakixe.— Dowey. Kanaa MS., B. A. E., 1882 (Toad
makers').
Manyinkainihkashina [Ma^'yin^ht i^nhi-
k*&ci**^aj * earth people*). A social divi-
sion of the Osage.— Dorsey in 15th Rep.
B. A. E., 235, 1897.
Kanyiiikatanga (Maf^yinhi tanga, Marge
earth*). Asul)gensof theManvmkagens
of the Kansa.— Dorsey in 15th ilep. B. A.
E., 230, 1897.
Manyinkatnliaadje {Ma'^yhVka ty^hu
i'fdje^f 'lower part of the blue earth*).
A former Kansa village at the mouth of
Big Blue r., Kans. — I)ors(»v, Kansa MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1882.
Manyinkazhinga ( Ma'njinknjiruja^ * small
earth*). A subgens of the Manyinka
gens of the Kansa. — Dorse v in 15th Rep.
B. A. E., 230, 1897.
Manzanita (Span.: Mittle apple', but
referring here to Ardostaphyln manza-
nita). A reservation of 640 acres of un-
patented desert land occupied by 59 so-
called Mission Indians, situated 170 m.
from ^Mission Tule River agencv, s. Cal. —
Ind. Aff. Rep., 175, 1902; Kelsev, Rep.,
25, 1906.
Manzano (Span. : 'ap])le tree') . A small
New Mexican village 6 m. n. w. of the
ruins of Quarai ami alnuit 25 m. k. of the
Rio (irande, at which is an old apple
orchanl that probably <lates from the
mission period prior to 1676. Whether
the orchard pt^rtained to the neighlK>ring
missicm of Quarai, or whether the former
Tigua settlement adjacent to Manzano had
an indepemlent mi8si<m, is not known.
A remnant of the Tigua now living near
El Paso claim to have come from this and
neighlx)ring jmeblos of the Salinas coun-
try. The alwriginal name of the ])ueblo
near Manzano is unknown. The j)resent
white village dates from 1829. Consult
Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 259
etseq., 1892. See 7^j/('Wo«, Tanoan^ Tima.
Mansano.— Al>ert ({iiotod in Trans. Am. Ktnnol.
Soc.. II, xciv, \M9>. Manzana.— Pac. R. R. Rep., ill.
pt.4, 98, 18.T6. Maiusana*.— Parke, map N. Mox.,
1851. Kanxano.— Edwards. Campaign, map. 1847.
Maon. An unidentifieii tril)e <m upper
Cuml>erlan(l r., at the l)eginning of the
18th century; perhaps the Cherokeis or
jX)8siblv the Shawne(\ — Tonti (ca. 1700)
in FrtMich, Hist. C^oll. Ui., i, 82, 1846.
Maple sugar. In some of the Eastern
states and ]>art>< of Cana<la the pnHluctitm
of maple sugar ami sirup is one of the
thriving industries of the country. The
census statistiirs of 1900 show that during
the year 1899 there were made in the
Unite<l States 11,928,770 ^Muindsof maple
sugar and 2,056,611 gallons of sirup.
The total values of the sugar an<l simp
for 1899 were resiHJctively $1,074,260 and
$1,562,451. The prmluction of maple
sirup seems to have increased somewhat,
while that of maple sugar appears to have
declined. This industry is undoubtedly
of American Indian ori^n. The earliest
extended notice of maple sugar is **An
Account of a sort of Sugar ma<le of the Juice
of the Maple in Canada," published in the
Philosophical Transactions of the Royal
Society for 1684-85, where it is stated that
** the savages have practiced this art
longer than any now living among them
can rememlx^r.'* In the Philosophical
Transactions for 1720-21 is printed an ac-
804
MAQKUANANI MARAMEG
[B. A.B
count of sugar-making in New England
by a Mr Dudley. The Indian origin of
maple sugar is indicated also by notices in
Joutel; Lafiteau, who states directly that
**the French make it better than the
Indian women, from whom they have
learned how to make it*'; Bossu, who
gives similar <letail8 about French sugar-
making in the Illinois country; and other
early writers. In various parts of the
country the term "Indian sugar"
(Canad. Settlers' (Juide, 66, 1860) has
been in use, affording further proof of the
origin of the art of making maple sugar
among the aborigines. Some of the In-
dian names of the trees from which the
sap is obtained afford additional evidence,
while maple sap and sugar appear in the
myths and legends of the Menominee,
Chippewa, and other tribes. The tech-
ni(iue of maj)le-sugar making also reveals
its Indian origin, not merely in the uten-
sils employed, but also in such devices as
straining through hemlock boughs, cool-
ing on the snow, etc. For maple sugar
cooled on the snow the Uanadian-
French diaknit has a special term, iirfy
besides a large numl)er of snecial words,
like mcreriey * maple-sugar bush^ toquey
* sugar snowball'; trempette^ 'maple-sugar
sop', etc. The English vocabulary of
maple-sugar terms is not so numerous.
IhimlK) (q. V. ), a New Hampshire term for
* maple sirup,' is said to be of Indian
origin. The details of the evidence of the
Indian origin of this valuable food product
will be found in H. W. Henshaw, '* Indian
Origin of Maple Sugar," Am. Anthrop.,
Ill, 341-:^!, 1890, and Chamberlain, **The
Maple amongst the Algonkian Tribes,"
ibid., IV, 39-43, 1891, and **Maple Sugar
and the Indians," ibid., 381-383. See
also Loskiel, Hist. Miss. United Breth.,
179, 1794. (a.f.c.)
Maqknanani { Ma^qkuima^nij 'red- tail
hawk'). A subphratry or gens of the
Menominee.— Hoffman in 14th Rep.
B. A. E., pt. I, 42, 1896.
Maqnanago. A former village, probably
of the Potawatomi, near Waukesha, s. k.
Wis., on lands ceded to the United States
in 1833.-Rovce in 18th Rep. B. A. E.,
Wis. map, 1899.
Maquanteqnat. A tribe or band at war
with Maryland in 1639 (Bozman, Md., ii,
164, 1837). The commission to Nicholas
Hervey, from which Bozman obtained his
information, does not give the locality of
these Indians, but indicates that they re-
sided in the territory of the colony. In
the Archives (Proc. Council, 1636-67,
36:^, 1885), ''Indiansof Maquamticough "
are mentione<l; these are undoubtedly
the same, but the locality has not been
identified further than that it was on the
Eastern shore. It is possible they were
not Algonquian.
Xancantequuts. — Md. Archives. Proc. Council
1636-67,87,1885. Kaquamtioough.— Ibid.,36. Xa-
quantequat— Bozman, Md., Ii, 164, 1837.
Maquinanoa. A Chmnashan village be-
tween Goleta and Pt Conception, Cal.,
in 1542.
Maquinanoa.— Cabrillo (1M2) in Smith, Colec.
Doc. Fla., 183. 1857. Maquin, Haaoa.— Taylor in
Cal, Farmer, Apr. 17, 1863 (mistaken for two vil-
lages).
Maqninna. A chief of the Mooachaht,
a Nootka tribe, who attained notoriety as
the chief who captured the brig BostoUf
in Mar., 1803, and massacred all of her
crew except the blacksmith, John
Jewitt, and a sailmaker named Thomp-
son. After l)eing held in captivity until
July, 1805, they were liln^rated by Capt.
Hill of the brig Lydki, also of Boston.
The story of the captivity of these two
men was afterward extracted from Jewitt
by Roland Alsop of Middletown, Conn.,
and published m America and Europe.
A point near the entrance of Nootka sd.
is now called Macjuinna pt. See Narra-
tive of the Adventures and Sufferings of
John R. Jewitt, in various editions from
1815 to 1869. (j. R. s.)
Maracock. See May pop,
Marameg (from Man-xim-aigy Chippewa
for 'catfish.'— Verwyst). Evidently a
band or divisitm of the Chippewa, which
seems to have been, at the dawn of the
history of the upper lake region, in the
process of disintegration. The first notice
of them is that given by Dablon in the Jes-
uit Relation of 1670, at which time they
resided on L. Superior, apparently along
the E. half of the n. shore. They were
then in close union with the Sauteurs, or
Chippewa of Sault Ste Marie. Dablon,
si>eaking of the Chippewa of the Sault,
says: **Thes<» are united with three other
nations, who are more than 550 persons,
to whom they granted like rights of their
native country. . . . These are the
Noquets who are spread along the s. side
of L. Superior, where they are the orig-
inals; and the Outchibous with the Mara-
meg of the N. side of the same lake, which
they regard as their proj)er country.**
Here the Chippewa of the n. side of the
lake are distinguished from those of Sault
Ste Marie to the same extent as are the
Marameg and Noquet. The Chippewa
settlement at the Sault, where the fishing
was excellent, seems to have drawn
thither the other divisions, as this gave
them strength and control of the lood
supply. The early notices of the Mara-
meg and Noquet appear to indicate that
these two tribes became absorbed by the
Chippewa and their tribal or subtribal
distinction lost, but there are reasons
(see Noquet and Menominee) for believing
that these two peoples were identical.
Tailhan, in his notes on Perrot*s M^moire,
assumes without question that the two
tribes were incorporated with the Chip-
BULL. 30]
MARAMOYDOS — MARICOPA
805
pewa of the Sault, who weredistinguishe<l
Dv the name Pahouiti^oiichirini. The
Marameg are mentioned under the liame
Maiamechs in the Proces-verbal of the
Prise de Possession in 1671 as j)re8ent at
the conference on that occasion. Accord-
ing to Sheathey are mentioned in the MS.
Jesuit Relation of 1672-73 as beinj? near
the Mascoutin, who were then on Fox
r., Wis. If, as supi)osed, the people of
this tribe are those referred to l)y La
Chesnaye (Margry, vi, 6) under the name
*'Malanas ou gens de la Barbue," they
must have resided in 1697, in part at least,
at Shaugawaumikong (the present Bay-
field, \\is.), on the s. shore of L. Su-
perior. The attempt to identify them
with the **Miamis of Maramek" men-
tioned in a <locument of 1695 (N. Y. Doc.
CJol. Hist., IX, 619) as residing on Mara-
mec (Kalamazoo) r., in Michigan, is cer-
tainly erroneous, (j. M. c. T.)
Gent de la Barbue.— La Chesnaye (1697) in Mar-
gry, D6c., VI. 6, 1886. Malamecht.— I'rise de Pos-
session (1671), ibid., I, 97. 1875. Malanas. — La
Chesnaye, op. cit. marameg.— Jes. Rel. 1669-70,
Thwaites ed., liv, 133, 1899.
Maramoydos. A former Diegueno ran-
cheria near Saii_£i£gQ, s. Cal. — Ortega
(1775) quoted by Bancroft, Hist. Cal., i,
254, 1884.
Karaton. A Chowanoc village in 1585
on the E. bank of Chowan r., in Chowan
CO., N. C.
Maraton.— Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr. 1819.
Havaton.— Martin, N. C.,l, 13,1829. Waratan.—
Dutch map (1621 ) in N. Y. Doo. Col. Hist., i. 185<J.
Karble. The various forms of the car-
bonates of lime and magnesia, classed as
marbles, were used to some extent l>y
the Indian tribes for carvings, utensils,
and ornaments. They include many va-
rieties of ordinary marbles such as are
used for building, as well as the cave
forms known as stalactite, deposited as
pendent masses by dripping water, and
stalagmite, which is deposited by the
same agency upon the floor. Travertine
formed by rivers and springs is of nearly
identical character. These deposits fre-
quently present handsome translucent and
banded effects. The purer, less highly
colored varieties are sometimes calle<l
alabaster (see Gifpmvi)y and the compact,
beautifully marked forms are known as
onyx. St»e Mines and Quarries.
(w. n. H.)
Maria. A Micmac settlement in Maria
township, Bonaventure co., Quebec, con-
taining 80 Indians in 1884, 93 in 1904.
Xariames. A tril)e mentioned by Ca-
beza de Vaca as living, in 1528-34, "be-
hind" the Quevenes, probably in the
vicinity of Matagonla bay, Texas. The
people subsisted mainly on roots and
seem never to have enjoyed plenty ex-
cept in the season of the prickly pears.
They ground the bones of lish, mixed
the dust with watiT, and used the j)aste
as food. They are said to have kille<l
their female infants to prevent their fall-
ing into the hands of their enemies, and
also, bet^ause of their continued warfare,
to avoid the temptation of marrving
within their tril)e. The region where
the Mariames live<l was within the later
domain of the Karankawan tribes, which
are now extinct (see Gatscrhet, Karan-
kawa Inds., 46, 1891 ). Manzanet ( 1670)
mentions a tribe called the Muruam,
probably identical with this, and Orozco
V Berra'(Geog., 303, 1864) mentions the
Mahuames as a former tribe of n. e. Mexico
ors. Texas, which was gathered into the
mission of San Juan Bautista, Coahuila,
in 1699. These also mav be identical.
(A. C. F.)
Mahuames.— Orozco y Berra, op. cit. (identical?).
Mariames.— Cabeza ae Vaca (1542). Bandelier
t rans. , 82. 1905. Marianes.- Caboza do Vaca. Narr. .
Smith trans., 58, 18.')1. Marians.— Harris, Voy. and
Trav., I, 802, 17a5. Mariarves.— Cabeza de Vaca,
Narr.. Sinitli trans., 93,1871. Muruam.— Manzanet
(1690), MS., cited by H. E. Bolton, inf'n, 190t>(iden-
tical?).
Marian. The Christian Hurons, so
called by their pagan brethren on account
of their frequent repetition of the name
of Mary.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 183, 1855.
Maricopa. An important Yuman tribe
which since early in the 19th century has
lived with and l)elow the Pima and
from about lat. 35° to the mouth of Rio
MARICOPA MAN. (am. Mus. Nat. Hist.)
Gila, s. Ariz. In 1775, according to (Jar-
ces, their rancherias extended about 40
m. along the (iila from about the mouth
of the Hassayampa to the Aguas Cali-
entes, although (larc^s adds that *'some
of them are found farther downriver."
They call themselves IHpatsje, 'people,'
806
MABIOOPA
[B.
Maricopa being their Pima name.
* Emory states that they have moved grad-
ually from the Gulf of California to their
present location in juxtaposition with the
rima, Carson having found them, as late
as 1826, at the mouth of the Gila. They
joined the Pima, whose language they do
not understand, for mutual protection
MARICOPA WOMAN. (am. Mu8. NaT. HisT.)
against their kindred, but enemies, tne
Yuma, and the two have ever since lived
peaceably together. In 1775 the Mari-
copa and the Yuma were at war, and as
late as 1857 the latter, with some Mohave
and Yavapai, attacked the Maricopa near
Maricopa Wells, s. Ariz., but with the
aid of the l*ima the Maricopa routed the
Yuma and their allies, 90 of the 93 Yuma
warriors being killed. After this disaster
the Yuma never ventured so far up the
Gila. Heintzelman states, probably cor-
rectly, that the Maricopa are a branch of
the Cuchan (Yuma proper), from whom
they separated on the occasion of an elec-
tion of chiefs (H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th
Cong., 1857). Like the Pima, the Mari-
copa are agriculturists, and in habits and
customs are generally similar to them.
Venegas ( Hist. Cal., ii, 182, 185, 192, 1759)
states that about 6,000 Pima and Coco-
maricopa lived on Gila r. in 1742, and that
they extended also to the Salado and the
Verde; they are also said to have had
some rancherias on the w. side of Colo-
rado r., in a valley 36 leagues long.
Garc^s estimated the population at 3,000
in 1775. There were only 350 under the
Pima school superintendent, Arizona, in
1905.
By act of Feb. 28, 1859, a reservation
was set apart for the Maricopa and the
Pima on Gila r., Ariz. ; this was enlarged
by Executive order of Aug. 31, 1876; re-
voked and other lands set apart by Execu-
tive order of June 14, 1879; enlarged by
Executive orders of May 5, 1882, and
Nov. 15, 1883. No treaty was ever made
with them. '
The following rancherias and other set-
tlements at different periods are judged,
from their situation, to have belonged to
the Maricopa tribe: Aicatum, Amoc]^ue,
Aopomue, Aqui, Aquimundurech, Antu-
toc, Atiahigui, Aycate, Baguiburisac, Ca-
borh, Caborica, Cant, Choutikwuchik,
Coat, Cocoigui, Cohate, Comarchdut, Cua-
buridurch, Cudurimuitac, Dueztumac,
Gohate, Guias, Hinama, Hiyayulge,
Hueso Parado (in part), Khauwesheta-
wes, Kwatchampedau, Norchean, Nosca-
ric, Oitac, Ojiataibues, Pipiaca, Pitaya,
Rinconada, Sacaton, San Bernardino, San
Geronimo, San Martin, San Rafael, San-*
tiago, Sasabac, Shobotarcham, Sibagoida,
Sibrepue, Sicoroidag, Soenadut, Stucabi-
tic, Sudac, Sudacsasaba, Tadeo Yaqui,
BULL. 30]
MARIN MARIPOSAN FAMILY
807
Tahapit, Toa, Toaedut, Tota, Tuburch,
Tuburh, Tubutavia, Tucavi, Tucsani, Tuc-
sasic, Tuesapit, Tumac, Tuquisan, Tuto-
maffoidag, Uparch, Upasoitac, Uitornim,
Urcnaoztac, and Yavahave. (f. w. h. )
Atehihwa'.— Gat8chet, VumaSpr.. ii, 123, 1877
(Yavapai name). A'wp-pa-pa.— Grossman, Pima
and Papago vocab., B. A. E., 1871 (Pima name).
Oooamarioopa.— Kino (ca. 1699) in Doc. Hist. Mex.,
4th 8., 1, 849, 1856. Coeomareoopper.— Pattie, Pers.
Narr., 92, 1833. Oocomari.— Carver, Travels, map,
1778. Coeomarioopas.— D'Anville, map Am. Sept.,
1746. OooomariMpaa.— Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la
Conquista, 361, 1742. Cocomiraoopai.— Hughes,
Doniphan'8 Exped., 22Q-1, 1848. Ookomarioopat.—
lyAnville, map N. A. (Bolton's ed.), 1752. Co-
BUttiopa.— Villa-Sefior, Theatre Am., pt. 2, 405,
1748. Oomarioopaa.— Kudo Ensayo {ca. 1763), 24,
108t 1863. Ooro Karikopa. —Eastman, map ( 1853) in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 24-25, 1854. Xapioo-
MM.— Keane in Stanford, Comi>end., 520, 1878.
Xaraoopa.— C<K)ke in Emory, Recon., 561, 1848.
Xareoopas.— Simpson in Rep. Sec. War, 57, 1850.
Karioopa.— Emory, Recon., 89, 1K48. Kiraoopaa.—
Hughes, Doniphan\s Expi^d., 221, 1848. KinMo-
pas.— Ibid. OiApap.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. A..
160. 1885 (Odp&p or; Pima name for ) . Oopap. —Ibid .
Oopaa.— Kudo Ensayo {ca. 1763), 24, 1863. Opas.—
Venegaa, Hist. Cal., i, 297, 801, 1759. Ozaras.—
Zarate-Salmeron {ca. 1629), Rel.. in Land of Sun-
shine, 106, Jan. 1900 (probably identical). Ozar-
rar.— Bandelier (after 8almeron)^in Arch. In.st.
Papers, in, 110. 1890. P£-pat.— A. Hrdlicka. infn.
1905 (own name). Pipatqe.— ten Kate, Reizen in
N. A., 160, 1885 ( • people ' : own name) . Si-kt-na.-
White, MS. Hist. Apaches, 1875. B. A.E. (Apache
name for Pima, Papago, and Maricopa: 'living
in sand hou8t»s,* from Apache 8ai 'sand,' ki 'house' ;
pronounced Sai'kine). Ta'hba.— Gatschet,
Yuma-Spr., 86. 1886 (Yavapai name). Tohihoga-
sat.— Ibid. (Havasupai name). Widshi itikapa.—
Ibid., 871, 1886 (Tonto name; also applied to Pima
and Papago).
Marin. A chief of the Licatiut, appar-
ently a band or village of the Cirallinoniero,
about the present San Rafael, Marin co.,
Cal., in the early part of the 19th century.
The Spanish accounts rt»lating to him are
conflicting. Acconling to the most defi-
nite authority he was defeated and cap-
tured in battle with Spanish troops in 1815
or 1816 and carried to San Francisco, but
escaped and resununi hostilities from his
refuge plaice on the Marin ids. He was
retaken in 1824, and accepting his fate,
retired to San Rafael mission, where he
died in 1834, or, • according to other ac-
counts, as late as 1848. The county takes
its name from him. See Bancroft, Hist.
Cal., II, VII, 1886-1890.
Xaringoman's Cattle. A palisaded vil-
lage, so named after a Waoranec chief
who occupied it in 1635, formerly on Mur-
derer's cr., at Bloominggrove, Ulster co.,
N. Y.— Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 94,
1872.
^ Maripotan Family, (adapted from Span.
maripoMf 'butterfly,' the name of a coun-
ty in California). The name applied by
Powell to a linguistic stock of Indians,
generally known asY^kut^in San Joa-
quin valley, Cal. Their territory ex-
tended from the lower Sierra Nevada to
the Coast range, and from mounts Pinos
and Tehachapi to Fresno and Chowchilla
rs. A separate body dwelt in the n., in
a narrow strip of territory along the San
Joaquin, between Tuolumne and Cala-
veras rs., about the site of Stockton.
The^ were the Cholovone. The Coco-
noon, said to have been Mariposan, occu-
f)ied an area within the limits of Mocjiie-
uninan territory.
Physically the southern meml)ers of
this family, from Kaweah and Tule rs.
and from Tejon, are very similar to the
Yunian tribes of s. Califoniia. They are
fairly tall (169 cm.) and rather short-
headed (cephalic index 82 to 83). Their
sui)erticial appearance is rather similar to
that of the tribes of central California,
They are not infreiiuentlv fat (Boas in
l^roc. A. A. A. S., xuv, 261-9, 1896) .
Their houst»s, esi)ecially those in the
plains, were generally made of tules, an<l
were often erected in rows, a village of
the tril)es about Tulare lake consist iiiir of
a row of such houses united into one.
These long (*omnninal houses ha<l an en-
trance and a fireplace for each family.
Earth-covere<l sweat-houses were also
built. Their implements and utensils
were generally nide; the workingof woo<l
seems to have l)een confined to a few
objects, such as l)ows and pim»s, tnie
woo<l car\'ing not Inking practised. Their
bows were of two types, one used for war
and one for the hunt. Some of the tribes
made a very crude an<i un(lecorate<l pot-
tery similar to that of their Shoshonean
neighbors of the mountains, which is the
only (Recurrence of i>ottery in central Cali-
fornia, and the art is probably a recent
acquisition. The women were proficient
basket makers, their product lx»ing pre-
dominantly of the coiled tyi)e. Shapes
with a flat top and restricteil oi)ening are
characteristic! of this region and of the
Shoshoneans immediately to the k.
The social organization of the tril)es
was very simple, with no trac^e of totem-
ism or of any gentile system. Prohibi-
tion of marriage extendtni only to actually
known blood relationships, entirely irre-
spective of groups. Chieftainship fende<l
to l)e hereditary in the male line. The
groups, or trilJes, had more solidarity
than elsewhere in California, as is shown
by the occurrence of well-recognized
names for the tribes. Hostilities were
occasionally carried on between groups or
with Shoshonean tribes, but in ^neral
the tribes were peaceful and fnendly,
even with their neighbors speaking alien
languages. An initiation ceremony for
young men consisted of a period of prepa-
ration followed by an intoxication pro-
duced by a decoction of jimson weed. A
puberty ceremony for girls was not pnuv
tised. The tabus and restrictions applied
chiefly to childbirth and death. Death
was followed by singing, dancing, and
wailing. The body was buried or bnnuNl,
808
MARMA8E0E — MARRIAGE
[B.A.B.
the practice varying with the different
tribes; the property of the deceased was
destroyed, liis house burned, and his
name tabued. There was an elaborate
annua^ mourning ceremony for the dead
of the year, which took place about a
large fire in which much property was
consumed. This ceremony, which has
been described as the Dance of the Dead,
was followed by dancing of a festive char-
acter.
The Mariposan Indians were encoun-
tered by the Spaniards soon after their set-
tlement in California, and with the other
tribes of San Joacjuin valley were gener-
ally known as Tulareilos, et(;., from the
name of the lakes and of San Joaquin r.,
which during the Mission period bore the
name Rio de los Tulares. No very con-
siderable portion of the group seems to
have come under the control of the Fran-
ciscan missionaries, but there was some
intercourse and trade between the con-
verteil Indians of the coast regions and
the Mariposan tribes of the interior. The
Cholovone, (/hukchansi, Tachi, Telanmi,
and other tril)es were, however, at least
in part, settled at San Antonio, San Juan
Bautista, and other missions.
On the sudden overrunning of their
country by the whitt^ after the discov-
ery of gold in California, the Indians of
this family were either friendly or unable
to make an effectual resistance. The
Kaweah river tril)es seem to have been
the most hostile to the Americans, but
no general Indian war took place in their
territory, and treaties were made with
all the tribes in IHol, by which they
ceded the greater part of their territory
(Royce in 18th Rep. B. A. E., 782, 1900).
Many of the northern tribes were soon
gathere<l on the Fresno River res., near
Madera, and the southern tribes at Tejon ;
but the former was abandoned in 1 859 an<l
the latter in 18(>4. The Indians at Tejon
were removed to Tule r., where, after an-
other removal, the present Tule River
res. was set apart for them in 1873 and
occupied in 1876. The Indians of this
reservation, mostly from Tejon and from
Tule and Kaweah rs., numbered 154
in 1905. North of Tule r. the remaining
Indians of this stock now live in and near
their old homes; their numbers have
greatly decreased and are not accurately
known, while the Cholovone seem to be
extinct.
About 40 tribes, each of about the nu-
merical size of a village community, but
possessing a distinct dialect, constituted
the Yokuts or Mariposan family. About
half of these are now extinct. These
tribes, according to information furnished
by Dr A. L. Kroel)er, were the Cholovone,
or, more correctl y , Chulam ni , alwut Stock-
ton; theChaushila, Chukchansi, Talinchi
(properly Dalinchi), Heuchi, ToltichL
Pitkachi, Hoyima, Tumna (Dumna), ana
Kechayi, on San Joaquin r. and n. to
Chowchilla r.; the Kassovo (Gashowu),
on Dry cr.; the Choinimni, Michahai,
Chukaimina, Iticha (Aiticha), Toikhichi,
Wechikhit, Nutunutu, Wimilchi, Apiachi,
and perhaps the Kochiyali, on Kings r. ;
the Tachi, Chunut, and Wowol, on Tulare
lake, and the Tulamni and a tribe remem-
bered only as Khomtinin ( * southerners' )
on the smaller lakes to the s. ; the Kawia
(Gawia), Yokol or Yokod, Wikchamni,
Wowolasi, Telamni, and Choinok, on
Kaweah r. ; and the Yaudanchi, Bokni-
nuwad, Kumachisi, Koyeti, Paleuyami,
Truhohavi, and Yauelmani, on the
streams from Tule r. to Kem r.
Names given as if of Yokuts tribes,
but which may be place names or may
refer to Shoshonean or other groups,
are Carise, Caruana, Chebontes, Chetic-
newash, Holei^lame, Holmiuk, Lena-
huon, Nonous, Sohonut, and Tatagua;
also, entirely unidentifiable, Amonoe^
Kowsis, Nopthrinthres, Oponoche, and
Ptolme.
Karipota.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond.,
84, 1H56. r ~ -.-.---_
" ' tez (1
Rep., Ill, pt. 3, 120, 1856. Hoche.— Garc^ (1776),
Kanpotan.— Powell in 7th Rep. B. A. E.,
90, 1891. Noaohes.--Cortez J1799) in Pac. R. R.
Diary, 279 et seq., 1900. Nochi.— Font (1777), map,
in (Jarc^s. ibid. Yocut— Bancroft, Native Races,
I, 457, 1874. Yo'kut*.— Powers in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., 111,369. 1877.
Marmasece. Reported by some old
Lummi as an extinct trifce on Puget
sd.. Wash., in about the habitat of their
own i>eople, by whom they may have
bt^n exterminated. They are also said
to have killed three white men before
the occupancy of the country by the
Hudson's Bay Co. or the arrival of the
first ships.
Kar-ma-teoe.— Fitzhugh in Ind.AfT. Rep. 1857, 327,
1858.
Marraoon. A town and tribe, probably
Timuquanan, situateil, in 1564, 40 leagues
s. of the mouth of the St Johns r., Fla. —
l^udonni^re (1564) in French, Hist. Coll.
La., n. 8., 279, 1869.
Marriage. Except that marital unions
depend everywhere on economic con-
siderations, there is such diversity in the
marriage customs of the natives of North
America that no general description will
apply beyond a single great cultural
group.
The Eskimo, except those tribes of
Alaska that have been led to imitate the
institutions of neighboring tribes of alien
stocks, have no clan organization. Ac-
cordingly the choice of a mate is barred
only by specified degrees of kinship. In-
terest and convenience govern the selec-
tion. The youth looks for a competent
housewife, the girl for a skilled hunter.
There is no wedding ceremony. The mail
obtains the parents' consent, presents his
BULL. 80]
MARRIAGE
809
wife with gannente, and the marriage is
completed. Frequently there are diild
betrothals, but these are not considered
binding. Monogamy is i)revalent, as the
support of several wives is possible only
for the expert hunter. Divorce is as in-
formal as marriage; either party may
leave the other on the slightest pretext,
and may remarr>\ The husband may
discard a shrewish or miserly wife, and
the wife may abandon her husband if he
maltreats her or fails to provide enough
food. In such cases the children generally
remain with the mother.
On the N. W. coast marriage between
members of the same clan is strictly for-
bidden. The negotiations are usually
carried on by the parents. The Kwakiutl
purchases with his wife the rank and
privileges of her family, to be surrendered
kter by her father to the children with
interest, depending on the number of off-
spring, when the debt is paid the father
has redeemed his daughter, and the
marriage is annulled unless the husband
renews his payment. Among tiie other
tribes of the group an actual sale of the
girl is rare. The Tlingit, Tsimshian,
coast Salish, and Bellacoola send gifts to
the girPs parents; but presents of nearly
eoual or even superior value are returned.
Monogamy predominates. In case of sep-
aration Salish parents divide their chil-
dren according to special agreement.
Among the Thngit, Haida, THimshian,
and Heiltsuk the children always belong
to the mother. If a husband expels his
wife from caprice he must return her
dowry; if she has been unfaithful he
keepe the dowry and may demand his
weading gifts.
On the lower Pacific coast the clan
svstem disappears. The regulations of
the Indians of California varv consider-
ably. Some tribes have real purchase
of women; others ratify the marriage
merelv.byan exchange of gifts. Polyg-
amy is rare. Divorce is easily accom-
plished at the husband's wish, and where
wives are bought the purchase money is
refunded. Among the Hupa the husband
can claim onlv half of his payment if he
keepe the children. Wintun men seldom
expel their wives, but slink away from
home, leaving their families behind.
The Pueblos, representing a much
higher stage of culture, show very differ-
ent marriage conditions. The clan organ-
ization is developed, there is no purchase,
and the marriage is arranged by the par-
ents or independently by the young cou-
ple. The iutii lover, after bringing ac-
ceptable gifts, is adopted as a son bv the
father of liis betrothed, and married life
begins in her home. She is thus mistress
of the situation; the children are hers, and
she can order the husband from the house
should occasion arise.
Of the Plains Indians some had the
gentile system, while others lacked itcom-
pletely. They seem to have practised
polygamy more commonly, the younger
sisters of a first wife being j)otential wives
of the husband. Among the Pawnee and
the Siksika the essential feature of the
marriage ceremony was the presentation
of gifts to the girl's parents. In case of
elopement the sul)sequent presentation
of gifts legitimized the marriage and re-
moved the disgrace which would other-
wise attach to the girl and her family
(Grinnell) . The men had absolute power
over their wives, and separation and
divorce were common. The Hidatsa,
Kiowa, and Omaha had no imrchase. The
women had a higher social iM)sition, and
the wishes of the girls were ccmsulted.
Wives couM leave cruel husbands. Each
consort could remarry and the children
were left in the custodv of their mother
or their paternal grandmother. Separa-
tion was never accompanied by any
ceremonv.
KsiSit 01 the Mississippi the clan and gen-
tile systems were most highly developed.
The rules against marriage within the clan
or gens were strict! y enforced . Descent of
name and pro|)erty was in the female line
among the Irocjuoian, Muskhogean, and
s. E. Algonquian tribes, but in the male
line among the Algon(iuians of the n.
and w. Among some tribes, such as the
Creeks, female des{»ent did not prevent
the subjection of women. As a rule,
however, women had clearly define<l
rights. ( Jifts took the plac^e of purchase.
Courtship was practically alike in all the
Atlantic triln^s of the Algonquian stock;
though the young men sometimes man-
aged the matter themselves, the parents
generally arranged the mattrh. A Dela-
ware mother would bring some game
killed by her son to the girl's relatives
and rec^eive an approi)riate gift in return.
If the marriage was agreed u{>on, presents
of this kind were (continued for a long
time. A Delaware husband could put
away his wife at pleasure, especially if she
had no children, and a woman could leave
her husband. The Hurons and the Iro-
quois had a perfect matriarchate, which
limited freedom of choice. Proposals
made to the girl's mother were submitted
by her to the women's council, whose
decision was final among the Hurons.
Iroquois unions were arranged by the
mothers without the consent orknowledg:e
of the couple. Polygamy was permissi-
ble for a Huron, but forbidden to the
Iroquois. Divorce was discreditable, but
could easily be effected. The children
went with the mother.
Monogamy is thus found to be the
prevalent form of marriage throughout
the continent. The economic factor is
everywhere potent, but an actual pur-
810
MARRISKINTOM MA80ODTEN8
[B. A.!.
^
^^
cliase is not common. The marriage bond
is loose, and may, with few exceptions,
be dissolved by the wife as well as by the
husband. The children generally stay
with their mother, and always do in tribes
having maternal clans. See Adoption^
Captive.% Child Ufe^ Clan and GenSy Gov-
emmenty Kiush'ipy Women.
Consult Crantz, Historv of Greenland,
1767; Boas, (Vntral Eskimo, 1888; Nel-
son, Eskimo about Bering Strait, 1899;
Krause, Tlinkit-Indianer, 1885; Boas,
Reps, on N. W. Tribes of Can. to Brit.
A. A. S., 1889-98; Powers, Tribes of Cali-
fornia, 1877; J. (). Dorsey, (1) Omaha
Sociology, 1884; (2) Siouan Sociology,
1897; Farrand, Basis of American His-
tory, 1904; Goddard in Univ. Cal. Pub.,
Am'. Archivol. and Ethnol., i, no. 1,
190S; Mooney, Calendar Hist. Kiowa,
1900; Grinnell, ( 1 ) Blackfwt Lo<lge Tales,
1892, (2) Pawnee Hero Stories, 1889;
Cushing, Adventures in Zuni, Century
]\lag., 188.S; Powell, Wyandot Govern-
ment, 1881; Morgan, League of the Iro-
quois, 1851; Heckewelder, Hist. Man-
ners an<l Customs Indian Nations, 1876;
Voth in Am. Anthrop., ii, no. 2, 1900;
Owen, Musijuakie Folk-lore, 1904; Dixon
in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist, xvii, pt. 3,
1905; Kroeln^r in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat..
Hist., XVIII, pt. 1, 1902; Holm, Descr.
New Sweden, 1884. (r. h. l. l. f.)
Marriskintom. A village marked on
Esnauts and Uapilly's map of 1777 on the
K. side of lower Scioto r. in Ohio. It
may have In^longed to the Shawnee or to
the'Delawares, and is distinct from Mus-
kingum. (.1. M. )
Martha's Yineyard Indians. Martha's
Vineyard id., off the s. coast of Massachu-
sett*?, was called by the Indians Nope,
or Capawac. These may have l)een the
names of tril)es on the island and the
smaller islands adjacent. The Indians
thereon were subjtH't to the Wampanoag
and were very numerous at the period of
the first settlement, but their dialect dif-
fered from those on the mainland. They
seem not to have suffered by the great
pestilence of 1617. In 1642 they were
estimated at 1,500. The Mayhews car-
ried on active missionary work among
them and succeeded in bringing nearly
all of them under church regulations and
secured their friendship in King Philip's
war. In 1698 they were reduced to
about 1,000, in 7 villages: Nashanekam-
muck, Ohkonkemme, Seconchqut, Gay
Hpftd, Sanchecantacket or Edgartown,
Nunnepoag, and Chaubaqueduck. In
1764 there were only 813 remaining, and
al)out this time they began to inter-
marry with negroes, and the mixed race
increa.<e<l so that in 1807 there were about
360, of whom onlv about 40 were of pure
blood. At that time they lived in 5 vil-
lages on or near the main island, the
majority being at Gay Head. Soon
thereafter they ceased to have any sepa-
rate enumeration as Indians. (j. mA
Vineyard Indians.— Alden (1797) in Mass. Hist.
8oc. Coll., Ist 8., v, 56, 1816.
MartineK. A small village on Torres
res., under the Mission agency, s. Cal. —
Ind. Aff. Rep., 170, 1904.
Martonghqnaank. A village of the Pow-
hatan confederacy, in 1608, on Matta-
pony r., in Caroline co., Va. — Smith
(1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819.
Marychkenwikingh (from Men'achkha-
7dk-inkj * at his fenced or fortified house/
referring, no doubt, to its being the resi-
dence of the sachems. — ^Tooker) . A vil-
lage formerly on the site of Red Hook,
in what is now the twelfth ward of Brook-
lyn, Long Island, N. Y., in Canarsee
territory.
Marechhawieok.— Treaty of 1645 in N. Y. Doc. Ool.
Hi8t.,xni, 18, 1881. llareohkawiok.— Doc. of 1648
quoted by Tooker, Algonq. 8er., ii, 10, 1901.
■areohkawieck.— Doc. of 1644 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., XIV, 56, 1883. Marychkenwikinf h.— Deed of
1637, ibid.. 5. Mereohkawiok.— Doc. of 1645 cited
by Tookep, op. cit. Merrakwiok.— Doe. of 1648
Cited by Tooker, ibid.
Marygiche. A small Opata settlement
in 8onora, Mexico. — Ilrdlicka in Am.
Anthrop., vi, 72, 1904.
Masacanvi. A small Opata settlement
in Sonora, Mexico. — Ilrdlicka in Am.
Anthrop., vi, 72, 1904. • •
Masac's Village. A former Potawatomi
village on the w. bank of Tippecanoe r.,
in the n. e. part of Fulton co., Ind., on a
reservation sold in 1836. The name is
also written Mosack. (j. m.)
MaBamaensh. A name of Hood's
salmon (Salmo hoodn)^ found in the
fresh-water lakes of the Atlantic slope of
Canada (Rep. U. S. Com. Fish., 1872-73,
p. 159) : from moMimegos or mammekuB^
a name of the salmon-trout in the Chip-
pewa and Cree dialects of Algonquian.
The word signifies, Mike a trout,* from
namekttSy * trout,* and the prefix mas-f
which has somewhat the force of the
English suffix -ish. (a. p. c.)
Mascalonge. See Mashmonge.
Maschal. A Chumashan vil lage given in
Cabrillo*s Narrative as on San Lucas id.,
Cal., in 1542; located on S^jitftjClriiz-ii
by Taylor in 1863 and by San Buenaven-
tura Indians in 1884.
Maschal.— Taylor in Cal. Fanner, Apr. 24, 1868.
Xas-toal.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab.,
B.A.E.,1884. Maxul.— Cabrillo, Narr. (1542), in
Smith, Colec. Doc. Fla., 181. 1867.
Matcoming. A Weapomeioc village, in
1585, on the north shore of Albemarle sd.,
in Chowan co., N. C, adjoining the ter-
ritory of the Chowanoc. ( j. m. )
Masooming.— Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, repr.
1819. Kuscamunge.— Lane (1586), ibid., I, 87.
Mascontens ( * little prairie people,* from
muskuta (Fox) or mashcodi (Chippewa),
* prairie * ; enSj diminutive ending. By the
Hurons they were called Assistaeronon,
BULL. .%1
MASCOUTENS
81L
*Fire jieople,* and by the French 'Nation
du Feu/ Tht»tie last names Ht»eni to liave
arisen from a mistranslation of the Algon-
quian term. In the Chii>j>ewa diaUvt
*fire' ia ishkotey and might easily ])e siibsti-
tute<i for maModty * prairie'). A term
used by some early writers in a collectivo
and indefinite st»nse to designate the A Igon-
quian trilR« living on the prairies of Wis-
consin and Illinois; l^aSalle even includes
some bands of Sioux umlerthe name. The
name {Munhkotem) is at prt^sent applied
by the PoJaSEatomi to that imrt of the
tril)e officially known as the ** Trairie.
! band" and formerly residing on the
prairies of n. Illinois. The mcKlcrn
Foxes use the term MiL^kutiivva to
designate themselves, the Wea, Pianka-
shaw, Peoria, and Kaskaskia, on account
of their former residence on the prairies
of Illinois and Indiana, (iallatin w;isnot
inclined to consider them a distinct trihe,
and Schoolcraft was of the opinion that
they, t<)gether with the KickapiM), weri»
S»arte of (me tribe. It is ass*»rtcd by the
esuit Allouez that the Kickai>oo' and
Kitchigami si>oke the sanit* Algoiupiian
dialect as the Mascoutens. (Iallatin says
the Sauk, Foxes, and KickaiMX) "s|wak
precisely the same language. ' * Their clost*
association with the Kickaixio would indi-
cate an ethnic relation. According to an
Ottawa tradition recorded by Schoolcraft
there was at an early day a tri])e known
as Asst»gun (<]. v.), or li<)ne Imlians, rc-
si<ling in the vicinity of Michilimackinac.
These, after a severt* contest, were driven
by the Ottawa into the southern peninsula
of Michigan as far as (t rand r. During this
war on the eastern shore of L. Micrhigan
the Ottawa and ChipiKJwa, who had con-
fe<lerate<l with them, l)ecame involviMl in
a quarrel with a people known as Mush-
kodainsug (or Ma'^coutens) . From this
period, according to the tradition, the
Afisegun and Mascoutens were confeder-
ates, and were driven still farther south-
ward in the peninsula, after which th'ev
are lost to the tradition, except that it
attributes to them the well known **trar-
den beds'^ of south western Michigan.
Although this tradition stan<ls to a large
extent alone, it is {>ossibly not wholly im-
8ui)|x)rted. The chief items which seem
to accord with it are the close relations
between theMasc»outensand theSauk, who
are known to have resi<le<i at an early
period in the lower Michigan peninsula,
whencethey passed into Wisconsin, where
the two tribes were found closely asso-
ciated; and the statement by Denonville
(N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 878) thatCham-
plain, in 1612, found (heard of) the peo-
ple of this tribe residing at ^akinan, or
SSSPHav IxEO'* ^^ the same locality have
the Sauk been trace<l. Although the evi-
dence is not entirely satisfactor^^ it is
prolmble that this tril)e entere<l Wisconsin
from southern Michigan, ])assing around
the southern end of L. Michigan.
The first mention of the Mascoutens is
by Champlain, in 161(), under the name
Asistagueroiion ((Euvres, iv, 58, 1870);
on his maj) (v, WIM) he locates them,
under the name Assistagueronons, beyond
and s. of L. Huron, L. Michigan being
unknown to him. lie says the Ottawa
were then at war with them. Saganl
(1(586) ]>laces them nine or ten days
journey w. of the s. end of (ieorgian bay
(Hist. *du Canada, 194, 186<)). Acconling
to the Jesuit Relation for 1640 they were
then at war with the Neuters, who wen*
allies of the Ottawa. The first actual con-
tact of the French with the Mascoutens of
which there is any record was the visit
of Perrot to their vilhige near Fox r. W^is.,
previous to 1669. Winsor (Cartier to
Frontcnac, 152) says Nicolet visited their
village in 1684. Tliat he pass<»<l up Fox r.,
probably to thttportagc, is doubtless true,
but that he visiteil the Mjiscoutens is not
|M)sitiyely known, as it is stated in tht^
Jesuit Relaticm for 1646 that up to that
time they had seen no Kuro|)ean, an<l
that the name of (hmI had not n^acheii
them. They were visitwl in 1670 by
Allouez and in 1678 by Maniuette, l)otli
finding them in their village near the ]M>rt-
agel>etvveen Fox and Wis<*onsin rs., living
in cl«)se relati(m with the Miami and the
KickajMX). After the visit by Mar<|Uctte
they are mentioneil by Hennepin, who
places them in 1680 on L. WMnnebago;
though ^Iem]>rc at the siime date locates
at least a part of the tribe and some of
the Foxes on Milwauket* r. Marest,
writing in 1712, says that a short time
])reyious then'to they ha<l forme<l a set-
tlement on the Ohio at the mouth of the
Wabash, or more likely at Old Fort
Massac, whose occupant^ had 8uffere<i
greatly from contagious disorders. In
the same year the up]>er Mascoutens and
the Kickapoo joine<i the Foxes against
the French. In the same year the Pot-
awatcmii and other northern tribes made
a combined attack on the Mascoutens
and Foxes at the siege of Detroit, killing
and taking prisoners together nearly a
thousand of both sexes. In 1 718 the >f as-
coutensand Kickapoo were living together
in a single village on Rock r.. 111., and
were estimated together at 200 men. In
1786 the Mascoutens are mentioned as
numbering 60 warriors, living with the
KickajKK) on Fox r.. Wis., and having the
wolf and deer totems. These are among
the existing gentes of the Sauk and Foxes.
They are last mentioned as living in Wis-
consin in the list of tril)es furnished to
James Buchanan (Sketches N. A. Inds., i,
189) by Heckewelder, which relates to
the i^eriod between 1770 and 1780. The
812
MA8EWUK — MA8HPEE
[b. a. 1.
last definite notice of them is in Dodge's
list of 1779, which refers to those on the
Wabash in connection with the Pianka-
shaw and Vermilions ( Kickapoo). After
this the Masroutens disappear from his-
tory, the northern group having probably
been absorbed by the Sauk and Fox con-
federacy, and the southern group by the
Kickapoo.
Notwithstanding some commendatory
expressions by one or two of the early mis-
sionaries, the Mascoutens, like the Kicka-
poo, bore a reputation for treachery and
deceit, but, like the Foxes, appear to have
been warlike and restless. According to
the missionaries, they worshiped the sun
and thunder, but were not much given to
religious rites and ceremonies, and did
nothonor as large a variety of minor deities
as many other tribes; but such early state-
ments regarding any tribe must be taken
with allowance. Their petitions to their
deities were usually accompanied by a
gift of powdered tobacco.
The mis.«ions established among the
Mascoutens were St Francis Xavier and
St James. (.i m. c. t.)
Awitagueronon. —Champlain (1616), (Envres, v. 1st
pt.. 275. 1870. AuitaflTueroiion.— Ibid. ( 1616), iv, 58,
1870. AMeiUguerononi.— Schoolcraft, Ind.TribeH,
IV, 206, 1854. Auista Eotaeronnoni. —J e.s. Rel . 1670,
99, 1858. AstistMrononi.— Jcs. Rel. 1670-1 quoted by
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 244. 1854. Asautague-
nmoii.— Sagard (1636), Hist. Can., I, 194, 1864;
Champlain (1632), (Euv res. v, map, 1870. Astis-
taanerononi. — Champlain (m. 1630) as quoted by
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 244, 1854. AthiitaiT-
ronnoB. — Jes. Kel. 1646. 77, 1858. Atsiita«kronons.—
Je8. Rel. 1641, 72. 1858. AUiitafkerroimons.~Jefi.
Rel. 1658, 22. 1858. Atsiitaheroron.— Champlain.
CEuvre.s, i v, 58, note, 1870. Atsistarhonon. — Sagard
il682), <^an., iv, Huron Diet., 1866 (Huron name).
Lttiita*.— Sch<K)lcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv. 244, 1854
(quoted from Ragueneau*s map in Jes. Rel., 1639-
40). Attistaehronon.— Jes. Rel. 1640. 35, 18.')8.
AttUtaeronons.— Jes. Rel. 1640 quoted by School-
craft, Ind. Tril)es, iv, 244, 1854. Fire Indiani.—
Drake, Bk. Inds., ix.l848. Fire Kation.— School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 206, 1854. Oens de Feu.—
Champlain (1616), CEuvres.iv.58.1870. Little Prai-
rie In&ani.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1,307,1851.
Maohkoutenoh.— Jes. Rel. 1670, 99. 1858. Kaehkou-
tenok.— Ibid., 97. Kaohkouteng.— Ibid., 100. Ka-
ooutens.— Vaugondy, Map of Am., 1778. Maeou-
tint.— Doc. of 1668 in French, Hist. Coll. La., n.
12.'>, 1875. Makoiiten.— Hervas {ca. 1785) in Vater,
Mith.. pt. 3. sec. 3. 347. 1816. Makoutenaak.— Jes.
Rel. 1658, 21. 1868. Kakakoutenf.— Ibid., 1670, 94,
1858. Xaacaiitina.— Chauvignene (1736) in SchcH>l-
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 554, 1853. Kaaooatiea.—
• Boudinot, Star in the West, 99, 1816. Maaoontana.—
Morse, N. Am., 256, 1776. Maaoonteneo.— Browne
in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 115, 1877. Kaaoontena.—
Coxe, Carolana, 17, 1741. Kaaoontina.— Le Sueur
(1692-3) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll. , v, 419, 1885.
][aaoontirea.—McKenneyand Hall, Ind. Tribes, III,
115, 1854. Maaoordina.— Buchanan. N. Am. Inds.. i.
139, 1824. Kaaootena.— Gale. Upper Miss., 43, 1867.
Maaootiiia.— Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, i, 307. 1851.
Maaooneteoha.— Perrot (ca. 1721), M<^moire, 127,
1864. Kaaooutena.— La Salle (1679) in Margry, D^.,
1, 463, 1875. Maaooutina. —Prise de Possession ( 1671 )
in N. Y.Doc. Col. Hi.st., ix, 803,1865. Maaooutona.—
Boudinot. Star in the West, 127. 1816. Haahkou-
tena.— Baraga, Eng.-Otch. Diet., 299, 1878. Kaa-
kouteoha.— Bacquevillede la Potherie. Hist. Am.,
II, 49, 1753. Maakouteoka.— Ibid., 98. Maakou-
teina.— Frontenac (1672) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
IX, 92, 1855. Maakoutenek.— La Famine Council
(1684), ibid.. 238. Kaakoutena.— La Salle (1682) in
Margry, D^c, II, 215. 249. 258. 1877. KaakBtena.—
Marquette map (ca. 1678) in Shea, Miss. Val.,
1852. Maakoutma.— Du Chesneau (1681) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 161. 1865. MaakntidB.—
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 79, 1854.
Kathkoutenoh.— Jes. Rel. 1671, 25, 1858. Xavaoou-
tena.— Iberville (^1702) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
I. 341, 1872. Keadow Indiana.— Howe, Hist. Coll.,
118. 1851. Kecontina.— Le Sueur (ca. 1690) in Shea,
I<:arly Voy., 92. 1861. Keooutina.— Neiil, Hiat i
Minn., 154, 1858. Keaacothina.— Boudinot, Star
in the West, 127, 1816. Miaoothina.— Hutching
(1778) in Jefferson, Notes, 144, 1825. Miaootina.—
Croghan (1765) in Monthly Am. Jour. Geol., 272,
1831. Koahkoa.— Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R.,
336, 1872 (same?). Koaquitana.— Hourh, map in
Ind. Geol. Rep., 1883. Koaqnitoa.— Domenech,
Deserts, i, 442, 1860. Kotarotina.— St Cosme
(1699) in Shea, Eariy Voy., 60, 1861. Kuaeotan.—
<^ale, Upper Miss., map, 1867. Kuacoutana.— Hil-
dreth. Pioneer Hist., 129, 1848. Kuahkodaina.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 307, 1861. Kuah-ko-
daina-ug.— Ibid. (Ottawa name). Mnakantiwa.—
Tanner, Narrative, 315, 1830 (French name).
Kuaketoona.— Writer of 1778 in Schoolcraft, Ina.
Tribes, III, 561, 1853 (collective term for Wea,
Piankashaw, etc.). Kuakoghe.— Maximilian,
Travels, 81, 1843 (incorrectly so called). Kuako-
taiye.— Tanner, Narrative, 315, 1830 (Ottawa
name). Kuakoutinga.— Rasle (ca. 1723) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., viii. 251, 1819. Kuakolthe.—
Dalton (1783), ibid., 1st s.. x, 123, 1809. Xiu-
kutawa.— Gatschet, Fox MS., B. A. £., 1882.
U--' prairie people': Fox name, used collectively
lor themselves and the Wea, Piankashaw, Pe-
oria, and Kaskaskia ) . Koaquetena.— Conf . of 1766
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 860, 1866. Koaqvi-
tana.— Writer of 1812 in Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes,
III, 5W, 1853. Kuaquitoea.— Knox (1792) in Am.
State Papers, Ind. Aff., 1,319,1832. Xuaquitona.—
HuU'hins (1778) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi,
714, 1857. Kation du Feu.— Jes. Rel. 1641, ?2, 1868.
Nation of Fire.— Jeff erys, French Doms., pt. 1, 48,
1761. Odiataatagheka.— Boudinot, Star in the West,
99, 1816.
Masewnk. A former Chumashan vil-
lage near Santa Barbara,. Cal. — Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, May 4, 1860.
Mashawank {Meahdimg^j 'elks', for
Meshiml8ttch1gfy 'they who go by the
name of the elk.' — W. J. ). A genn of the
Sauk and Foxes. See Situk.
M4-ahi-wfc-uk'.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 170, 1877.
Meahawiautoig<.— Wm. Jones, infn, 1906.
Mathekakahqnob. See JAttle Turtle.
Mathematak (M(i-8he^'7nd'tdk% *big
tree ' ) . A gens of the Sank and Foxes. —
Morgan, Anc. Soc, 170, 1877. HeeSauk.
Masherosqaeck. A village on or near
the coast of Maine in 1616, probably be-
longing to the Abnaki. — Smith (1616) in
Mass. Hist. S<K'. Coll., Sds., vi, 107, 1837.
Mathik. An Aleut village at Port Mol-
ler, Alaska penin., Alaska; pop. 40 in 1880,
76 in 1890.
Maahik.— I'etroff, Rep. on Alaska. 46, 1881. Ke-
ahik.— 11th Census, Alaska, 164, 1893.
Mashpee (from massa-pee or mtssi-pif
'great pool. ' — Kendall ). A former settle-
ment on a reservation on the coast of
Marsh pee tp., Barnstable co., Mass. The
reservation was established in 1660 for
the Christian Indians of the vicinity,
known as South Sea Indians, but it was
afterward recruited from all s. e. Massa-
chusetts, and even from I^ng Island. In
1698 they numbered about 285, and their
population generally varied from 300 to
400 up to the 19th century. They inter-
married with negroes and afterward with
lULL. 30]
MA8I MA8KEGON
813
iiessians; in 1792 the mixed-bloods formed
wo-thirds of the whole body, and the
legro element was then increasing, while
he Indians were decreasing. In 1832 the
nixed race numbered. 315. (j. m.)
larahpang.— €k>tton (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soo.
:k>ll.,l8t8., 1,204, 1806. ]Canhpe6.-Coffin(1761)in
tfaine Hist. Soc. Ck>ll.. iv, 271, 1856. Hashpah.—
lawson and Danforth (1698) in Mass. Hist. Socr.
)oll., Ist s., X, 133, 1809. Hashpee.— Bourne
1674), ibid., 1, 197, 1806. XaahpMe.— Eliot (1673),
bid.. X, 124, 1809. Xashpey Hinckley (1686),
ibid., 4th s., V, 133, 1861. Kuphii.— Alcedo. Die.
[}eog., Ill, 458, 1788. KasMpee.— Hawley (1762) in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Ck)ll., Ist 8., x, 113-14, 1809. Old
Dolony Indiana.— Eliot quoted by Davis (1819),
Ibid., 2d 8., IX, XXV, 1822. Southern Indians.—
[bid. South Sea Indiana.— Freeman (1802), ibid.,
1st 8., VIII, 127, 1802.
Masi. The Masauu (Death-god) dan
dI the Hopi of Arizona.
Kasanwun.— Voth, Hopi Proper Names, 93, 1905
(trans. * skeleton ') . Kiui winwd.— Fewkes in 19th
Rep. B. A. E., 584, 1900 {wiflvni ==*c]Sin'). Xa-si
min-wfi.— Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 404, 1894.
■atsauwu.— Dorsey and Voth, Oraibi Soyal, 13,
1901 (trans, 'skeleton').
Masiaca. A settlement of the Mayo,
apparently on the Rio Mayo, under the
municipality of Promontorios, in the dis-
trict of Alamos, s. w. Sonora, Mexico.
The total population was 364 in 1900. See
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 608, 1864; Censo
del Estado de Sonora, 1901.
Masikota (3/a«T^^•oW, sing. Masl'^koi, ap-
parently from a rootdenoting *8hrivele(I,'
*drawn up' ). A principal divosion of the
Cheyenne, q. v. (j. m.)
ChraMhoppen.— Dorsey in Field Columb. Miis.
Pub. no. 103, 62, 1905. Mah rihk' ku ta.— Grinnell,
Social Org. Cheyennes, 143, 1905. Xa Oh kuh ta.—
Ibid.. 136. Katri'ahkota.— Clark quoted by Mooney
in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 1026. 1896.
Masilengya. The Drab Flute clan of
the Hopi of Arizona.
Kaoilenya winwfl.- Fewkes in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
583, 1901 ( !ri/lt£>fi='clan' ) . Xa-si'-len-ya wfln-wii.-
Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vii, 401, 1894.
Matipa (*coyote'). Given by Bourke
(Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ii, 181, 1889) as a
gens of the Mohave who are said to
have been originally a band of the Mari-
copa.
Maskatinik. A division of the Ottawa,
mentioned in the Jesuit Relation for
1657-68 with the Nikikouek, the Miche-
saking ( Missisauga ) , and others, as nations
long Known to the French in Canada.
There is no other known reference to
them. They may possibly be the same
as the Achihgouan. (j. n. b. h.)
Maskeg. See Muskeg,
Maikegon {M&akigdk, *they of the
marshes or swamps. ' — W . J . ) . An A Igon-
quian tribe so closely related to the Cree
mat they have appropriately been called
a subtribe. According to Warren the
Maskegon, with the Cree and theMonsoni,
form the northern division of the Chip-
pewa group, from which they separated
about eight generations before 1850. The
traders knew them as Swampy Crees.
From the time the Maskegon became
known as a distinct tribe until they were
placed on reserves by the Canadian gov
eminent they were .scattered over the
swampy region stretching from L. Win-
nipeg and L. of the Woods to Hudson
}>ay, including the basins of Nelson, Hays,
and Severn rs., and extending s. to the
watershed of L. Superior. They do not
appear to be mentioned in the Jesuit
Relations or to have been known to the
early missionaries as a distinct people,
though the name "Masquikoukiaks" in
the Proces-verlxal of the Prise de Posses-
sion of 1671 (Perrot, Mem., 298, 1864)
mav refer to the Maskegon. Tailhan,
in his notes to Perrot, ffives as doul)tful
equivalents '*Mikikoueks ou Nikikou-
eks," the Otter Nation (see Amikwa)^
SL conclusion with which Verwyst (Mis-
sionary Labors) agrees. Nevertheless
their association with the "Christinos"
(Cree), ** Assinii)oual8" ( Assiniboin),and
**all of those inhabiting the countries of
the north and near the sea" (Hudson
bay), would seem to justify identifying
them with the Maskegon. If so, this is
their first appearance in history.
Their gentes probably differ' but little
from those of the Chippewa. Tanner
says that the Pezhew (Besheu) or Wild-
cat gens is common among themft No
reliable estimate can be fornuHl of their
numbers, as they have generally had no
distinct official recognition. In 1889
there were 1,254 Maskegon living with
Chippewa on reservations in Manitoba at
Birch, Black, Fisher, Berens, and Poplar
rs., Norway House, and Cross lake. The
Cumberland, Shoal lake. Moose lake,
Chemewawin, and Grand Rapids bantls
of Saskatchewan, numbering 605 in 1903,
consisted of Maskegon, and they formed
the majority of the Pas band, numbering
118, and part of the John Smith, James
Smith, and Cumberland bands of Duck
Lake agency, numbering 356. Tliere were
also some under the Manitowpah agency
and many among the 1,075 Indians of St
Peter's res. in Manitoba. (j. m.)
Big-Heads.— Donnelly in Can. Ind. Aff. for 1HH3, pt.
1, 10, 1884 (but sec Tt^U8 de Boule). Coast Crees.—
Back, Arct. Land Exped., app., 194, 1836. Cree of
the lowlands.— Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 287,
1871. Mashkegonhyrinis.— Bacqueville de la Po-
therie, Hist. Am., i, 168, 1753. Kashkegons.— Bel-
court (ca. 18.T0) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 227,
1872. Mashkegous.— Petitot in Can. Re<». S<'i., i,
48, 1884. Kas-ka-gau.— Kane, Wanderings of an
Artist, 105, 1859. Kaskego.— Writer of 1786 in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., iii, 24, 1794. Mas-
kegonehirinis.— Baouueyille de la Potherie, Hist.
Am., I, 177, 1753. Maskegons.— Henry, Trav., 26,
1809. Maskegous.— Petitot in Jour. Roy. Geog.
Soc., 649, 1883. Maskegowuk.— Hutcjiins (1770)
qiioted by Richardson, Arct. Exped., ii, 37, 1851.
Maskigoes.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ii, 36, 1852.
Kaskigonehirinis.— Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 25. 1744.
Kasqiukoukiaks.— Prise de Possession (1671) in Per-
rot, M6moire, 293, 1864. Xasqiukoukioeks.— Prise
de Possession (1671) in Margry, D6c., i, 97, 1875.
Keskigouk.— Long, Expod. St Peter's R., ii, 151,
1824. Kis-Keegoes.— Ross. Fur Hunters, ii, 220,
1855. Kiskogonhirinis.— Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 23,
1744. Kuscagoes.— Harmon, Jour., 84, 1820. Kus-
814
MA8KIN0NGE MASKS
[B. A. E.
oonogeet.— Schermerhom (1812) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 2d s., II, 11. 1814. KowMmonfet.— Pike.
Exped., app. tojpt. 1, 64, 1810. Knihkeagt.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, VI, 38, 1857. Kuakagoet.—
Hirmon (1801) quoted by Jones, Ojebway Inds.,
166, 1861. Kus-ka-go<>wuk.— Morgan, Consang.
and Affin., 287, 1871. Kuskeegoo.— Jones, Ojebway
IndH., 178, 1861. Kuakeg.— Hind, Red R. Exped.,
I, 112, 1860. Kuskeggouok.— West, Jour., 19, 1824.
Kuskegoag.— Tanner, Narr., 315, 1830 (Ottawa
name). Muskegoe.— Ibid., 45. Kuskegons. — Gal-
latin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 24, 1836. Kui-
kego Oiibwayi.— Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc.
Coll., V, 378, 1885. Muskegoo.— Can. Ind. Aflf.
(common form). Kuskigoi.— Maximilian, Trav..
II, 28, 1841. Musk-keeg-oes. —Warren (1862) in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 45, 1885. Kustegans.—
Hind, Labrador Penin.. ii, 16, 1863. Omaahke-
kok.— Belcourt(ca. 1850)inMinn.Hist.Soc.Coll..i,
227-8, 1872. Omush-ke-goag.— Warren (1852), ibid.,
V, 33, 1H85. Omushke-goei.— Ibid., 85. People of
the Lowlands.— Morgan, Consang. and Afiin., 287,
1871. Savannas. — Chan vignerie ( 1736) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., ix,ia>4, 1855. Savanois.— Charlevoix,
Nouv. Fr., I, 277, 1744. Swampee.— Reid in Jour.
Anthrop. Inst, of G. Br., vii, 107, 1874. Swampies.—
M'Lcan, Hudson Bay, ii, 19, 1849. Swamp In-
dians.—West, Jour., 19, 1824. Swampy Creek
Indians.- Hind, Labrador Penin., i, 8, 1863 (for
Swampy Cree Indians). Swampy Crees.— Frank-
lin, Joum. to Polar Sea, 38. 1824. Swampy Krees.-
Keane in Stanford, Compend., 586^ 1878.
Swampys.— Hind, Labrador Penin., i, 323, 1863.
Waub-ose.— Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc.
Coll., V, 86, 1885 ('rabbit': Chippewa name, refer-
ring to their p^ceful character; applied also to
the Tugwaundugahwininewug).
Maskinonge. A species of pike {Esox
ei<tor)^(}un(\ in the great lakes and the
waters of the adjacent regions. The word
is variously spelled maskinonge, mas-
calonge, muskelunge, muskellunge, etc.,
and abbreviated into lunge or longe. As
one of the earlier fonns ofthis word, nias-
quinongy, and the Canadian French mas-
quinong^ and uiaskinong^^, indicate, the
tenninal e was once sounded. The origin
of the word is seen in mashkinonge or
maskinonge, which in the Chippewa and
Nipissing dialects of Algonquian is applied
to this fish; although, as the etymology
suggests, it might also be used of other
species. According to Cuot] (Lex.
Algonq., 194, 1886), mashkinonje is de-
rived from mash, 'big,* and kinonje, 'fish.*
This is perhaps better than the etymology
of I^combe and Baraga, which makes the
first component to be mdshk or mdsk^
'ugly.' The folk-etymological masque
allmae of Canadian French has been eXy-
surdly perpetuated in the pseudo-Latin
mascalongus of ichthyologists. ( a. f. c. )
Masks. Throughout North America
masks were worn in ceremonies, usually
religious or quasi-religious, but sometimes
purely social in character. Sometimes
the priests alone were masked, some-
times only those who took part, and
again the entire company. In all cases
the mask served to intensify the idea of
the actual presence of the mythic animal
or supernatural person. The simplest
form of mask was one prepared from the
head of an animal, as the buffalo, deer,
or elk. These realistic masks did not
stand for the actual buffalo, deer, or elk.
but for the genericr type, and the man
within it was for the time endowed with
or possessed of its essence or distinctive
quality where the belief obtained that
the ma.sk enabled the wearer to identify
himself for the time being with the super-
natural iKjing represented. A ceremony
of purification took place when the mask
was removed (Culin). Among the
Eskimo the belief prevailed "that in
early days all
animated beings
had a dual exist-
ence, becoming
at will either like
man or the ani-
mal form they
now wear; if an
animal wished to
assume its hu-
man form the
forearm, wing,
or other limb
was raised and
pushed up the
muzzle or l)eak as if it were a mask, and
the creature became manlike in form and
features. This idea is still held, and it is
believed that many animals now possess
this power. The manlike form thus ap-
pearing is called the inaa, and is suj) posed
to represent the thinking part of the
creature, and at death becomes its shade.*'
Many of the masks of the N. and the
Pacific coast are made with double faces
WESTERN Eskimo Mask. (Murdoch)
L'-M^UUl-iU MASr..
to illustrate this l>elief. "This is done by
having the muzzle of the animal fitted
over and concealing the face of the inua
below, the outer mask l)eing held in place
by pegs so arranged that it can \y% re-
moved quickly at a certain time in the
ceremony, thus symbolizing the trans-
formation.*' Sometimes the head of a
bird or animal towere<l above the face
mask; for instance, one of the sand-hill
crane was 30 inches long, the head and
■ULL. 30]
MASON 8 RUINS
815
beak, with teeth projected at right angles,
about 24 inches; the head was hollowed
out to admit a small lamp which shone
through the holes representing the eyes;
below the slender neck, on tne brc^ast,
was a human face. The shaman who
fashioned this mask stated that once when
he was alone on the tundra he saw a sand-
hill crane standing and looking at him.
As he approached, the feathers on the
breast of the bird parted, revealing the
face of the bird's inua. In certain cere-
monies women wore masks upon the fin-
ger of one hand. "The mask festival
was held as a thanksgiving to the shaden
and powers of earth, air, and water for
giving the hunters success.'* (Nelson in
18th Rep. B.A.E., 1899.)
In the N., on the Pacific coast, in the
8. W., among some of the tribes of tlie
plains, and among probably all the east-
em tribes, including the ancient pile
dwellers of Florida, masks made of woo<l,
basketry, pottery, or hide were («rved,
painted, and orna-
mented with shell,
bark fiber, hair, or
feathers. They might
be either male or fe-
male. The colors
used and the designs
carved or painted
were always sym-
bolic, and varied with
the mythology of the
tribe. Frequently the
mask was provided
with an interiorde vic»e
by which the eves or
the mouth could be
opened or closed, and
sometimes the differ-
ent parts of the mask
were so hinged as to give the wearer power
to change itt* aspei!t to represent the move-
ment of the myth that was being cere-
moniallv exemplified. With the sacre^l
masks there were prescribed methods for
consecration, handling, etc.; for instance,
among the Honi they were put on or off
only with the left hand. This tribe, ac-
conling to Fewkes, also observed rites of
bo<lily purification l)efore painting the
masks. Some of the latter were a simple
foce covering, sometimes conc*ealing only
the forehead; to others was attached a
helmet, symbolically painted. The Hopi
made their masks of leather, cloth, or
basketry, and adorned them with ap-
pendages of wood, bark, hair, woven
mbrics, feathers, herbs, and bits of gourd
which were taken off at the close of the
ceremony and deposited in some sacred
place or'shrine. The mask was not al-
ways worn; in one instance it was car-
ried on a pole by a hidden man. Altars
were formed by masks set in a row, and
Tlinoit compound Maak.
(nibu^ck)
sacred meal was HprinkltHl upon them.
The mask of the ])lunie<l ser[)ent was
spoken of as "cjuiet"; it could never l)e
used for any piirpot?!^ other than to repre-
sent this mythical creature; nor could it
tn^ repainted or adapted to any other pur-
post*, aw wa.s soiuetinios done with other
niask^. Masks were sometimes spoken
of as kdchhiftSj as many of them Repre-
sented these ancestral and mythi(»al Inn-
ings, and the youth who put on such a
mask waa temjK)rarily transformed into
the kachina represented. Paint ruhbtHl
from a sa('re<l mask was regarded as efii-
cacious in prayer, and men sometimes
invoke<l their masks, thanking them for
services rendertnl. Some of the Hopi
masks are very ol<l; others are made new
yearly. Certain masks l)elong to certain
clans and are in their keeping:. No child
not initiated is allowed to look u|M)n a
kachina with its mask removed, and cer-
tain masks must never Iw touche<l by
pregnant women. Among the Hopi also
a mask was placeil over the face of the
dead; in some instances it was a mere
covering without form, in others it was
made more nearly to lit the face. "A thin
wad of cotton, in which is puntrhed holes
for the eyes, is lai<l upon the face . . .
and is called a rain-cloud, or ])rayer to
the dead to bring the rain." ( Fewkes in
15th Rep. B.A. E., 18<)7.)
Young people sometimes in< hilled in
festivities and ma<le (|neer masks with
which to disguise themselves; for ex-
ample, masks of bladder or rawhide
representing the head of the Thunder-
bird were made by the Iwns of the iK)orer
classes amon^ some of the Siouan triln's
when the thunder was lirst heard in the
spring. Covering their hea<ls and faces
with the masks, the ]>oys proceeded to
their uncles' stents and, imitating the
sound of thunder, struck the doorflaps
with sticks. Then with much merriment
at the expense of the boys the uncles in-
vited them in and gave them ])res<Mits of
leggings, moccasins, or blankets. On the
N. \V. coast masks were occasionally ma<le
as toys for the amusement of chihlren.
But generally tin* mask was a serious rep-
restMitation of tribal iH'liefs, and all over
the countrjr the fundamental idea em-
bodieil in it seems to have Injen that
herein des<^rilH»<l.
In ad<lition to the authorities cittnl,
consult Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus. for 1895;
Dall in Hd Rt^p. B. A. K., 1884; Dorsey
and Voth in Field Columb. Mus. Pub.
nos. 55, 66, liK)l, ltK)2; Matthews in Mem.
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., vi, ltK)2; Nelson in
18th Rep. B. A., K, 1899. (a. v. f. )
Mason's Bams. A ^mall mined house
group, so named by Lumholtz ( rnknown
Mex., I, 48, 1902) from a Mexican mem-
ber of his expedition; situated on the end
816
MASPFPH — MA88ACHU8ET
[B. A.B.
of a ridge near Rio Bavispe, n. w. Chi-
huahua, Mex. The walls, which stand
3 to 5 ft high, consist of felsite blocks
averaging 6 by 12 in., laid in gypeifer-
ous clay mortar and coated with white
plaster. The structure is ascribed to the
Opata.
Matpeth. A small 'Algonquian tribe
or band, a branch of the Kockaway,
formerly living in a village about the
site of the present Maapeth, between
Brooklyn and Flushing, Long Island,
N. Y. The name occurs as early as 1638.
Ruttenber speaks of Mespath as a con-
siderable Canarsee village, attacked by
the Dutch in 1644. (j. m.)
Xaspoth.— Thompson, Long Id., 410, 1839 (tribe).
Meipaoht.— Tlenhoven (1650) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
HM., 1, 426, 1856. Mespadt.— Ruyven (1666) , ibid..
II, 473, 1858. MespaetohM.~Doc. of 1638 quoted by
Flint, Early Long Id., 162, 1896 ("Mespaetches
Swamp"). Kespat.— Council of war (1673) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ii, 591, 1858. Kewpath.—
Ruttenber. Tribes Hudson R., 114, 1872 (village).
Kespath*! Kill. -Council of 1673 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., II, 661, 1858. Mespat Kil.— Ibid., 586. Mei-
pati-kil.— Stuyvesant (1663) , ibid., 448. Metwpe.—
Flint, op. cit., 162 (given as Indian form).
Masqne allong^, Masquinong^, Masqni-
nongy. See Maskinonge.
V, )^ Masgachnget (Massa-adchu'es-et, *at or
-^ about the ^reat hill * ; from masaa * great ' ,
wadchu *hill or mountain', es * small', et
the locative. — Trumbull. In composition
wadchu becomes adchu and adds ash for
the plural. The name refers to the Blue
Hills of Milton. Williams substitutes
euk for et in forming the tribal designa-
tion, and uses the other as the local
form. Cotton in 1708 translated the
word *a hill in the form of an arrow-
head'). An imiK)rtant Algonquian tribe
that occupied the country about Massa-
chusetts bay in e. Massachusetts, the
territory claimed extending along the
coast from Plymouth northward to Salem
and possibly to the Merrimac, including
the entire ba««in of Neponset and Charles
rs. The group should perhaps be de-
scribed as a confederacy rather than as a
tribe, as it appears to have included sev-
eral minor bodies. Johnson described
the group as formerlv having ** three
kingdoms or sagamoreships having under
them seven dukedoms or petty saga-
mores. ' ' They seem to have neld an im-
Ejrtant place among the tribes of s. New
ngland prior to the coming of the whites,
their strength being estimated as high as
3,(X)0 warriors, although it is more likely
that the total population did not exceed
that numl)er. Capt. John Smith (1614)
mentions 11 of their villages on the coast
and says they had more than 20. In
consequence of war with the Tarratine
and the pestilence of 1617 in which they
suffered more than any other tribe, the
English colonists who arrived a few years
later found them reduced to a mere rem-
nant and most of the \'illages mentioned
by Smith depopulated. In 1631 they
numbered only about 500, and 2 years
later were still further reducea by
smallpox, which carried off their chief,
Chickatabot. Soon thereafter they were
gathered, with other converts, into the
villages of the "Praying Indians, "chiefly
at Natick, Nonantum, and Ponkapog, and
ceased to have a separate tribal existence.
As they played no important r61e in the
struggles between the settlers and natives,
the chief interest that attaches to them is
the fact that they own^ and occupied the
site of Boston and its suburbs and the im-
mediately surrounding territory when the
whites first settled there. In 1621, when
Standish and his crew from Plymouth
visited this region, they found the Indians
but few, unsettled, and fearful, moving
from place to place to avoid the attados
of their enemies the Tarratine.
Although the Algonc^uian Indians of
Massachusetts, Connecticut, and Rhode
Island, taken as a whole, formed a some-
what homogeneous group, yet there were
linguistic differences which seem to justify
De Forest (Indians Conn., 1853) in doubt-
ing Gookin's statement that the languaflee
were so much alike that the people of the
different tribes could easily unde^tand
oneanother. The Massachuset were more
closely allied to the Narraganset than to
any other of the surrounding tribes whose
languages are known, the people of the
two bemg able to understand each other
without difficulty. For their customs,
beliefs, etc., see Algonguian Family.
Following are the villages of the Massa-
chuset Indians so far as Known, some of
them being more or less conjectural:
Conohasset, Cowate, Magaehnak, Massa-
chuset, Mishawum, MysS?. (Middlesex
CO.), Nahapassumkeck, Nasnocomacack,
Natick, Naumkeag ( Essex co. ) , Neponset,
Nonantum, ^tiixet, Pequimmit, Poca-
pawmet, Puakapog, Sl^^uas, Saugus,
Seccasaw, Titicut, Topeent, Tot ant,
Totheet, Wessagusset, Winnisimmet,
and Wonasquam. (j. m. c. t.)
KacaohuMtU.— Writer ca. 1690 in Mass. Hist. Soc
Coll., 3d H.. I, 212, 1825. JUoetuohets.— Underbill
(1640), ibid., 4th s., vii, 180, 1865. MMetuaetas.—
Underbill (1639), ibid., 178. KaatMhiiMli.—
Writer ca. 1648 in Proud, Pa., i, 116, 1797. Xaa*-
thnlets.— Higgeson (1680) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Ck)ll.. iKt 8., 1, 123, 1806. Kasetosati.— UnderbUI,
(1647), ibid., 4tb s., vn, 181, 1865. Haaiehew-
■etU.— Hooke (1637), ibid., 195. Haaaaehewaat—
Smitb (1616), ibid., 3d s.. vi, 119,1837. Maasaahi-
•ana.— Gorges (1658) in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., ll, 62,
1847. Masaaohoaelta.— Dee in Smitb (1629), Vir-
ginia, II, 263, repr. 1819 (misprint). Haaaaehu-
■ets.— Smith (1616) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., Sds.,
VI, 119, 1837. Xaasaohuseuks.— Mourt (1622),
ibid., 1st s., VIII, 241, 1802. Maiiachniiack, — Joase-
lyn (1675), ibid., 3d s., in, 343. 1833. Kaaaadiaa-
■eti.— Dermer (1620), ibid., 4tb s., iii, 97, 1866.
Xaaaaehoaaka.— Morton, New Eng. Memorial, 805,
1855. Kaisadaosek.— Jesuit Rel., in, index, 1868.
Maa8afoset8.~Maurault,Abenakis. Ill, 1866. Xaa-
lathuaeta.— Allyn (1666) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
3d , X, 63, 1849. Xassataeheta.— Doc. of 1686,
ibid.. Ill, 129, 1833. Kaasatuaitta.— Records (1662)
BULL. 30]
MA88ACHUSET MA88ET
817
in K. I. Col. Rcc., I, 473, 1856. XMMchuMt—
Brewster (16S5) in Mass. Hist. Soc.(k>Il., 4th s.,iii,
888, 1856. Xauettttets.— Cleeve (1646), ibid.,
VII, 371. 1865. XaMtaohntit— Dermer (1619) In
Drake, Bk. In<lH., bk. 2, 20, 1848. Kataohuses.—
Tinker (1639) in Mass Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s..
VII, 220, 1865. Xataohuaeti.— Doc. of 1665 in R. I.
Col. Kec., II. 128, 1857. KatothnsetU.— Weare
(1690) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll.. i. 188, 1824. Xatha-
tuseto.— Clark (1652) in Mass. Hi.st. Soc. Coll., 4th
R., II. 22, 1854. XathatusitU.— Records (1662) in
R. I. Col. Rec., I, 468, 1856. MathesuMtei.— God-
frey (1647) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s..
VII, 378, 1865. Mattaohuoetto.— Robinson (1632).
ibid., 94, note. Xattaohuaetts.— Downing (1630),
ibid.. VI. 37, 1863. XattaohuMetto.— Pelham
(1648), ibid., vi), 140, 1865. XattacuMts.—
Whitfield (1651), ibid., 3d s.. iv. 118, 1834.
MatUthuMtU.— Weare (1690) in N. H. Hist. S(h-.
Coll., I, 138, 1824. KatUttttetto.— Nowell (1645)
in K. I. Col. Rec, l, 133, 1856. KeMachutetts.—
Maverick (1666) in Mass. Hist. Skx*. C^>11.. 4th s..
VII, 312, 1865. XeHaohuiiaok.— (iorges patent (m.
1623), ibid., 3<1 s., vi, 75, 1837. MestathuMtt—
Shurt (1638), ibid., 4th s., vi. 571-2. 1863. Meu-
thuiett. — Ibid. Passonagcsit. —Morton (ca. 1625)
in Drake, Bk. Inds.. bk.2, 43, iai8 (monti'med as
the village over which Chickatabot was sachem).
Massachaset. One of the villages of the
tril)e of the same name in 1614, acconling
to (^apt. John Smith; prol>al)ly the chief
settlement of the tribe, which then held
their territory alx)ut ^Nlassachusetts bay,
Mass. In 1()17 that portion of the coast
extending northward into Maine was rav-
aged by a pestilence, so that the tribe was
almost extinct before the arrival of the
Puritans in 1620.
MaiMMhuMt.— Smith (1629), Hist. Va., ii. 1K3, repr.
1819.
Mas8ape<|na (* great pond,' from Twa-w;,
^ great,' and peag or pequa, 'pond.'
It occurs frequently in dialecti(; forms
in New England an<l on Long Island).
An Algonquian tri})e fonnerly on the
8. coast of Long Island, N. Y., about
Seaford and Babylon, extending from
Ft Neck E. to Islip. Their chief village,
which was prol)al)ly of the samcname as
the tribe, appears to have been at Ft
Neck. ** Under constant fear of attack
from their more warlike neigh lM)r8, the
Indians at each end of the island liad
built at Ft Neck and at Ft Pond, or
Konkhongauk, a place of refuge capable
of holding 500 men" (Flint, P^rlyLong
Island, 1896). The stronghold of the
. Massapequa was destroyed in 1663 by
vCapt. Underbill in the only great In-
idian battle fought on Ix)ng Island. The
(women and children took refuge on
/8<]uaw id. during the battle. Until
I lately the remains of a quadrangular
[ structure, its sides 90 feet in length,
marked the place where the fort stood.
Tackapousha, the Massapequa sachem,
was a thorn in the flesh of the settlers in
his vicinity, it being impossible to satisfy
his demands. The records show that
both the English and the Dutch were
obliged to pay tribute to him time and
i^in. He was one of the most turbulent
characters known to the alx)riginal his-
tory of Long Island. (.i. m. c. t. )
Karoapiao.— Doc. of 1644 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
xiv, 56. 1883. MaroMepinok.— Deed of 1639, ibid.,
15. Manapeag.— Doc. of 1669, ibid., 621. Kana-
peague.— Wood in Macauley, N. Y., ii, 252, 1829.
lUrsapege.— Doc. of 1657 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
XIV. 416, 1X83. Manapequas.— Ruttenber, Tribes
Hudson R., 73, 1872. MwrMpain.— Doc. of 1655 in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiii, 58, 1881. Manepeaek.—
Stuyvesant (1660), ibid., xiv, 460, 1883. Karte-
peagues.— Note, ibid.. XI 11,341, 1881. Kanepeake.—
Doc. of 1675, ibid., xiv, 7a5, 1883. KarMpeqas.—
Ruttenber, Tribes Hud.Mon R., 165, 1872 (misprint?).
Marsepin.— Stuyvesant (1660) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist.. XIV. 474, 1883. Maraepinck.— Doc. of 1666,
ibid., 369. Maraepingh.— Treaty of 1660, ibid., xili,
147,1881. Karsepyn.— Doc. of 1660, ibid., 184. Kar-
•ey.— Addam (1653) in Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 2, 79,
1848 (same?). Xasapequa.— Thompson, Long Is-
land. 68, 1839. KaMpeage.— Deed of 1643 in N. Y.
Doc. Ct)l. Hist.. XIV. 530, 1883. Kashapeag.— Doc.
of 1683, ibid., 774. Kaaha-Peage.— Andn)s (1675),
ibid., 706. KathpeaM.— Do<-. of 1675, ibid., 696.
Kasaapean.— Macauley. N. Y.. ii. 164, 1829. Xas-
•apege.— I)ee<i (1667) in RiUtenbcr, Tribes Hudson
R., 344. 1S72. Kassapequa.— Thompson. I^mR
Island, 67, 1839. Mawepeake.— Doc. of 1675 in N.
Y. 1)(K-. (\»1. Hist.. XIV, 705, 1883. Kertapeage.—
I)(H\ of KW, ibid.. 416. Kertap«ge.— Treaty of
1(*»56 in Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 125, 1872.
Maggassanga. A western s|>ecies of rat-
tlesnake {Sistrurus catenatns). This rep-
tile is more proptTly termed Mississauga
an<l derives its appellation from the place
and ethnic name Missisauga (Chamber-
lain, I^ng. of Mississagas, 59, 1892), from
theChippewam<>/, 'great,' and ttdg or sank,
'river mouth.' (a. f. v.)
Maggaggoit ('great chief; proper name,
Woosame<iuin [Wasamegin, Osamekin,
etc.], 'Yellow Feather'). A principal
chief of the Wampanoag of the region
about Bristol, R. I., who was introduced
by Samoset to the Puritans at Plymouth
in 1621 . He was preeminently the friend
of the English. Drake (AlK^rig. Races,
81, 1880) says of him: "He was a chief
renowned more in peace than war, and
was, as long as he lived, a friend to the
English, notwithstanding they commit-
ted rei>eateii usurpations upon his lands
and liberties." He had met other Eng-
lish voyagers before the advent of the
Puritan's. While ill in 1623 he was well
treated by the English. In 1632 he had
a brief dispute with the Naroaganset un-
der Canonicus, and in 1649 he sold the site
of Duxbury to the English. His death
took place in 1662. Of his .«ons, one,
Metac^omet, IxH'ame famous as King
Philip ((J. V. ), the leading spirit in a long
struggle against the English, (a. f. c. )
Maggawoteck. A village of the Pow-
hatan confederat'v, in 1608, on the x. bank
of Rappahannock r., King George co.,
Va. ( J. M. )
Kassawoteck.— Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map,
repr. 1819. Ka»»awteck.— Simons, ibid., i, 185.
Matget. A Haida town on the e. side
of Masset inlet, near its mouth. Queen
Charlotte ids. , Brit. Col. Its name in the
Masset dialect is Ataiwas (*at*e''waa,
'white slope', which in the Skidegate
dialect appears a.s Qateai''xi was ) . Accord-
ing to the inhabitants the sea formerly
Bull. 30—05-
-52
818
MA88I — ^MATAN AXONS
[B. A.iL
came in over the ground now occupieil
by houses, but the latter were then eitu-
ate<l on higher ground just back of the
present site. At that time, too, there was
an independent town around a hill called
Edjao rlMjao), which stands at the east-
ern end. Until lately the band holding
possession was the Skidaokao. Accord-
mg to John Work's estimate, made be-
tween 1836 and 1841, there were 160
houses and 2,473 people at Masset, but
ttiia enumeration must have included all
the neighboring towns, and probably num-
bered the smokehouses. The number of
houses, enumerated by old people, in the
two towns, Masset proper and E<ljao (27
and 6 respectively) would indicate a total
population of alxnit 528, 432 in the former
and 96 in the latter. Adding to these
figun»8 the estimatecl numbers in the two
neighboring towns of Yan and Kayung,
the grand total would he 1,056, or less
than half of Work's figure. It is prob-
able, however, that the population had
decreased l)etween Work's tune and that
which the old men now recall. Accord-
ing to the Canadian Report of Indian
Affairs for 1904 there were J^56 people at
Massi^t; these include the remnant of all
the families that live<l once l)etween
Chawagis r. an<l Ilippa id. A few people
have move<l to the neighboring town
of Kavung. A mission of the Anglican
Church is maintained at Masset, the oldest
on the (^ueen Charlotte ids., and all the
Indians are nominal Christians.
(j. R. s.)
sAte'wM.— Swanton, Cont. Haida. 281, loa^ (na-
tive name). G*»t'aiw»'«.— Boas, Twelfth Report
N. W. Tribes Canada, 23, 1898. Qatp^iwaa.— Ibid.
(Skidegate dialect). Kaaaeti.— Scouler (1846) in
Jour. Kthnol. Soc. Lond., i, 233. 1848. Katsoets.—
Sc'ouler in Jonr. Roy. (ieog. Soc, xi, 219. 1841.
Masoota.— Dunn, Hist. Oregon. 281, 1844. Xaa-
•ett— Can. Ind. Aflf.l904,pt.2,69,1906. Xaaaetto.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 489, 18.'>6 (after
Work, 1836-41). Mawettea.— Scoulerin Jour. Roy.
Geog. Soc., XI, 219, 1841. Maaa hade.— Krause,
Tlinkit Indianer, 304, 1885. Moaaette.— Kane,
Wand, in N. Am., app., 1869 (after Work, 1836-41).
Xrt-te-waa,— Dawson, Q. Charlotte Ids., 183, 1880.
Ma88i. A former town on the e. bank
of Tallapoosa r., Ala. (Bartrani, Voy, i,
map, 1 799 ) . Not identifie<l, but probabl v
Creek.
Massikwayo. The Chicken-hawk clan
of thePakab (Reed) phratry of the Hopi.
Kaa-Bi' kwa'-yo.— Stephen ih 8th Rep. B. A. E., 39,
1891.
Massinaoac. A tribe of the Monacan
conftnieracy, formerly living in Cumber-
land and Buckingham cos. , Va. Strachey
speaks of their village as the farthest
town of the Monacan.
Maaainaeaok.— Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, repr.
1819. MaMinacaoa.— Jefferson, Notes, 179. 1801.
Kaaainnacaoks.— Strachey (1612), Va., 102, l»i9.
Matsomnck. An Indian location in
1700, mentioned as if near the Waba-
quasset country, in s. Massachusetts
(Doc. of 1700 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv,
615, 1854 ) . Probably identical '>vith Ma-
shamoquet (Massamugget, Mashamugget,
Mashamugket, Machi-mucket, Moshamo-
(uiett), given by Trumbull (Ind. Names
Conn., z5, 1881) as the name of a tract
and a small tributary of Quinebaug r. at
Pomfret, n. e. Conn., and renderwi by
him *at the great fishing place.'
Mastohpatakiks ( Jfa-4<>//-;>a-^i-A*iii:«, *ra-
ven bearers') . A society of the Ikunuh-
kahtsi, or All Comrades, in the Pi^an
tril)e of the Siksika. — Grinnell, Blacktoot
Lodge Tales, 221, 1892.
Masnt. A f onner northern Pomo village
on Forsythe cr., one of the headwaters of
Russian r., about 3 m. x. w. of the present
(^alpella, Mendocino co. , Cal. (s. a. b. )
Maau-ta-kaya.— GibbH (1851) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, in, 112, 1853. Ka-iu-ta-k^.— Ibid.
Mata. A former rancheria, i>robably of
the Soba, n. of Caborca, which is on the
Kio de la Asuncion, l)etween Quitobao
and Aribaiba, n. w. Sonora, Mexico. The
place was visited by Anza and Font in
1776.
Santa Kaito.— Hardy, Traveln, 422. 1829 (same?).
8. Juan de Xata.— Anza and Font (1776) quoted by
Bancn>ft, Ariz, and X. M., 39:^, 1889.
Matachic. A Tarahumare settlement
on the hea<iwat<»rs of the Rio Yaqui, lat.
28° 45^ Ion. 107° .S()^ w. Chihuahua,
Mexico. — Orozco v Berra, Geog., 323,
1864.
Matagnay. A former Diegueilo ran-
cheria on upi>er San Luis Rev r., 8an
Eiego CO., Cal.; later on Agua Caliente
No. 1 res., occupied by Wamer*s ranch.
By decision of tne U. 8. Supreme Court
the Indians were dispossessed of their
lands, and by act of May 27, 1902, an addi-
tional tra(;t was purcliased at Pala, and
the Mataguay people, who numbered 11
in ld03, were removed thereto in that
year.
Mataguay.— Jackson and Kinney, Rep. Miss. Ind.,
24, 1883. Matahuay.— Hayes (1850) cited bv Ban-
croft, Nat. Rac, i, 4^8, 1882. Matiyuiai.— H. R. Ex.
Doe. 76, 34Cong., 3dses.s., 133, 1867. Kootaeyuhew.—
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, May 11, 1860.
Mataitaikeok (}fa-idi-tai-ke-6ky 'many
eagles*). A former Cree band, named
from their chief, who was known to the
French as Le Sonnant. In 1856 they
roanie<l and hunted in the country along
the ''Montagues des Bois,'* and traded
with the fur companies on Red r. of the
North and on the Missouri near the
mouth of the Yellowstone. They num-
bered alK)ut • 300 lodges. — Havden,
Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 237,*1862.
Matamo. A DiegueHo rancheria near
San Diego, s. Cal. ; probably the same as
Matmork la Puerta, represented in the
treatv of 1852 at Santa lsal)el.
Katamo.— Ortega (1775) cited by Bancroft, Hist.
Cal. I, 253, 1884. Xatmork la PuerU.— H. R. Ex.
Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d seas., 132, 1857.
Matanakons. Mentioned bv De Laet
about 1633 (N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s.,
I, 303, 1841 ) as a Delaware tribe formerly
in New Jersey . The name may have some
BULL. 30]
MATANTONWAN — MATCHEBENASH8HEWI8H
819
connection with Manta (q. v. ) or with
Matiniconk, the Indian name of an island
in Delaware r. CL Mativecoc. (j. m.)
Matantonwan (said to mean * village of
the great lake which emx)tie8 into a small
one, and therefore probably from mdo-te,
* the outlet of a lake ' ). One of the two
early primary divinions of the Mdewakan-
ton Sioux (Neill, Hist. Minn., 144, 1858).
They seem to have \yeen a distinct tribe
when visited by Perrot in 1689. They an*
mentioned as residing at the mouth of
Minnesota r. in 1685. To this diviHion
belonged in 1858 the Khemnichan, Ka-
pozha, Maghayuteshni, Makhpiyamaza,
Khevataotonwe, and Tintaotonwe l)ands.
All these are now on Santee res., Nebr.
Kah-tah-tOB.— LewiH and Clark, DiM^ov., 34, 1806.
Kaataataat.— Perrot {16S&). quoted by Neill, Hif^t.
Minn., 144, 1868. Kantantoni.— La Harpe quote<1
by Neill. Hist. Minn.. 170, 1858. Mantanton
Seioox.— Le Sueur (1700) quoted by Neill, it>id..
166. Kaataatoot.— I^rise de PosscHsion (1689) in
Margrry, D^., V, 34, 1888. Kantautoua.— Perrot,
M6m., a04, 1864 (misprint). Xatabantowaher.—
Balbi, Atlas Ethnc^., 55, 1826. Kentontom.—
Wnioaut (1700) in Minn. Hist. 8oe. Coll., n, pt. 2,
6, 1864. Kentonton.— Pdnicaut (1700) in Mar^ry,
D6c., V, 414, 1883..
lUtantnok. See Magnus.
Matania ( Span. : * massacre ' ) . A name
frequently appearing on early Spanish
maps, an(1 on maps derived therefrom,
apparently as settlements, but in n^ality
to mark tlie locality or supposed locality
where a massacre had taken place. A
Matanza appears on maps of the Quivira
region, in which Francisco l^vva Bonilla
and his companions were killed by the
natives about 1594-96; an<l another on
theE. coast of Florida, below St Augustine,
where the Huguenot colonists were mas-
sacred by the Spaniards in 1565.
Matapan (pronably from the Nahuatl
maUaUif atl^ and pan, which suggests 'in
the blue water. * — Buelna ) . A subdi vision
of the Tehueco that inhabited a village of
the same name on the lower Rio Fuerte,
in N. w. Sinaloa, Mex. — Orozco v Berra,
Geog., 58, 1864.
Matape. A Eudeve settlement, which
evidently con taine<l also some Coguinachi
Opata, inlat. 29°, Ion. 110°, central Sonora,
Mexico. Identified by Bandelier with
the Vacapa or Vacupa of Marcos de Ni^a
(1539). The mission of San Jos^'' de Ma-
tape was established there in 1629; it
had 482 inhabitants in 1678 and but 35 in
1730. According to Davila (Sonora His-
t6rico, 317, 1894) it was a Coguinachi
pueblo. Not to be confounded with Ba-
capa, a Papago settlement.
Baoapa.— Coues. Garc^ Diary, ii, 481, 1900. Mato-
K— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. I^apers, v, 128. 1890.
tape. — Sonora Materialen (1730) quoted by
Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 613, 1884. San Joie de
Xatape.— Zapata (1678) in D<m-. Hist. Mex., 4th s.,
in, 3&, 1857. 8. Joee Katope.— Bancroft. No. Mex.
States, I, 246. 1884. Vacapa.— Marcos de Nica
(1689) in Temaux-Compans. Voy., ix. '2ft9, 1838.
▼aeupa.— Nica (1539) in Hakluyt, Voy., iii, 439,
1600.
Matapeake. Mentioned as a tribe that
once occupied Kent id., Queen Anne co.,
Md. (Davis, Daystar of American Free-
dom, 45, 1855). They lived at one time
near Indian Spring, and at another on
Matapax Neck.
Matarango. A tribe living w. of Dar-
win, 8. E. Cal.; probably an offshoot of
the Panamint, as they speak a similar
language. (n. w. h.)
Matatoba. A tril)e or band of the Da-
kota, probably the Mantanton wan di\n-
sioii of the Maewakanton.
MaUtoba.— Pachot (1722) in Margry, D<^c.,vi.618,
1886. Sioux of the Frairies.^Ibid. (distinct from
the Teton).
Matanghqaamend. A village on the n.
bank of the Potomac, in 1608, in Charles
CO., M<1., probably near Mat ta woman cr. —
Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819.
Matawachkarini (* people of the shal-
lows.*— Hewitt). A small tribe or band
living in 1()40 on middle Ottawa r., but
found in 1672 in the vicinity of the s. end
of Hudson bay, near the Monsoni. They
wen» doul)tk»«< one of the bands, known
to the French as Algonkin, which were
broken and dispersed by the Iroquois
invasion about 1660. See\Vatta?raw.
Kadaouaakairini.— Champlain, (Euvreii, ni, 802,
1870. Kataouachkariniens Jes. Rel. 1643,61, 1858.
Ka^oiUkirinouek.— Ibid., 1072. 54, 1858. Kat-
aouohkairini.— Ibid, iii, index, 1858. Mataoneh-
kairinik.— Ibid., 1658, 22, 185K. Kataeuohkairiai-
onek. — Ibid. . 1646. 34, 1858. Kataeuohkairiniwek.—
Ibid., 1646. 14o, 185K. Kataouohkarini.— Ibid.. 1640,
34. 1858. Katowachkairini.— Ibid., in, index, 1868.
Matawaohwarini. — Ibid. Katoa-oaescariai. —
Champlain (1613), (Euvres, in, 302, 1870.
Matawoma. A former village, probably
of the Dela wares, on Juniata r., Mifflin
CO., Pa., near the present McVevtown. —
Roycein 18th Rep. B.A.E., Pa. map, 1899.
Matchasanng. A fonner Iroquois village
on the left bank oi the e. branch of Sus-
quehanna r., al)out 13 in. above Wyoming,
Pa.— Doc. Hist. N.Y., ii, 715, 1851.
Matchcoat. During the era of trade
with the ln<lians almost throughout the
Algonquian seaboard certain garments
supplie<l in traffic were called b^- -the
English "matchcoats," a comintion of
a name belonging to one of the cloaks or
mantles of the natives. The Algonquian
word from which it was derive<l is repre-
sented by ChipiK»wa inatshigotfy Delaware
uxichgotnjf * petticoat . ' ( a . f. c. ) *
Matcheonchtin. A Nanticoke village in
1707, prol)ablv in Penns>'lvania. — Evans
(1707) in Day, Penn., 391, 1843.
Matcheattochonsie. A Nanticoke vil-
lage in 1707, probably in Pennsvlvania. —
Evans (1707) in Day, Penn., 391, 1843.
Matchebenashshewiih ( 'ill-looking bird,'
or * ill-natured bird.'— Hewitt). A Pota-
watonii village, calle<l after a chief of this
name, formerly on Kalamazoo r., prolwtbly
in Jackson v6^ Mich^ The reser\'ation
was sold in 1827. The name is also written
Matchebenarhshewish. (j. m.)
820
MATCHEDASH MATLATEN
[B.A.B.
Matehedaih. A name formerly used to
designate those Missisauga living at
Matehedash bay, Ontario.
MatehedMh.— Chauvignerie (1736) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hifit., IX. 1056, 1855. MatehedMh.— Henry.
TravelR.35.179.1809. Matohitathk.— Ibid. Xate-
ehitaohe.— Memoir of 1718 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
IX, 889, 1856.
Matchinkoa. A village containing 600
families of Illinoin, Miami, and otners,
situated IV) leagues from Ft Crevei'ojur,
near Peoria, 111., in 1682 (La Salle in
Margry, D<^c., ii, 201, 1877). The word
may be connecte<l with Chinko (q. v.).
Matchopick ('bad bay or inlet.* — Hew-
itt). A village of the Powhatan confed-
eracy, in 1608, on the n. bank of the
Rappahannoi'k, in Richmond co., Va.
Cf. Matrhotic.
Hashopeake.— IHirchHH, Pilgrimes, iv, 1716, 1625-26.
Katehop«ak. -Simons in Smith (1629), Virginia,
1, 185, repr. 1819. Xatohopick.— Smith, ibid., map.
Matchotic (*bad inlet.'— Hewitt). A
group of tril)es of the Powhatan confed-
eracy occupying the country between
Potomac and* liappahannock rs. down to
about the middle of Richmond co., Va.,
comprising the Tauxenent, Potomac,'
Cuttatawomen, Pissanec, and Onawman-
ient. They numl)ered i)erhaps 400 war-
riors in 1608, but 60 years later, accord-
ing to Jefferson, had become re<luce<l to
60 warriors. See Appoinattoc. (j. M. )
Appamatox.~JefTerson, Notes, table, 138, 1801.
Appamatriox.— Herrman, map (1670) in Rep. on
Line between Va. and Md. , 1873. Matohoatiokea.—
Archives Md., Pmc. Council, 1036-67, 281, 1885.
Katohotios.— JefFerNon. op. cit.^ Xatoz.— Ibid.
Matehotic. A former village on the s.
bank of Potomac r. in Northumberland
CO., Va., a short distance below Nominy
inlet.
Kattsohotiok.— Herrman. map (1670) in Rep. on
Line between Va. and Md.
Matchotic. A former village on Macho-
do(^ cr.. King Geoiye co., Va.
XTpper Matchodic— Jefferson. Notes, 138. 1801.
XTpper Mattaohotiok.— Herrman, map (1670) in Rep.
on Line between Va. and Md.
Matchnt. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, in 1608, on Pamunkey r.,
New Kent co. , Va.
Xatohot.— Smith (1629), Virginia, ii, 15, repr. 1819.
Matehut.— Ibid., i, map.
Mategarele (mategd * juniper', rel£
* below ' : * below the junipers * ) . A Tara-
humare rancheria near Palanquo, Chi-
huahua, Mexico. — Lumholtz, inf'n, 1894.
Mathews, Mary. 8ee Bosom worthy Mary.
Mathiaca. A Timuquanan tribe and
vills^e on the w. side of upper St Johns
r., Fla., in the 16th century.
Mathiaca.— De Br>% Brev. Nar.*, ii, map, 1521.
Kathiaqua.— Laudonnidre (1565) quoted by Shipp,
De Soto and Fla., 525. 1881. Katthiaqua.— Fair-
banks, Hist. Fla., m*). 1871.
Mathomank. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, in 1608, on the w. bank of
James r., in Isle cf Wight co., Va. —
Smith (1629) Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819.
Mathne. A tribe that traded in 1652
with Indians on Patuxent r., Md. There
is no means of determining its location
(Bozman, Maryland, ii, 467, 1837). Pos-
sibly the Mantua, Monthees, or Munsees,
or perhaps the Manta division of the
Delawares. fj. m.)
Mathwa ( M^-ath-vxij * owl * ) . A gens of
the Shawnee (q. v.). — Morgan, Anc. Soc.,
168, 1877.
MatHiha. A large Chumashan village,
said by Indians to have been on Buena-
ventura r., Ventura co., Cal. A village
of this name is mentioned in mission
archives as having been situated near
^iaiita Inez missioB-
Ma'-ti'la-ha.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vo-
cab., B. A. £.. 1884. Xatiliha.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861. MatiUja.— Ibid., July 24,
1863.
Matilpe('head of the Maamtagyila').
A Kwakiutl sept which has recently
branched off from the rest of the true
Kwakiutl. The gentes are Maamtagyila,
(lyeksem, and Haailakyemae. The prin-
cipal winter village is Etsekin. Pop. 55
in 1904.
Mah-tee-oetp.— Can. Ind.AfT.. 189, 1884. Mahtilvi.—
Ibid., pt. 2, 166, 1901. Mahtolth-pe.— Sproat in Oblh.
Ind. Aff., 145, 1879. Kar-tU-par.— Kane, Wand, in
N. Am., app., 1859. Matelpa.— Tolmie and Daw-
.son , Comp. Vocabs. Bri t. Col . . 1 18b, 1884. Xatelth-
Miht.— Brit. Col. map, Victoria, 1872. Ka-tilh]^—
Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can. for 1887, sec.
II, 65. Ma'tUpe.— Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes
Can., 54, 1890. Ka'tilpii.— Boas in Petermanns
Mitt., pt. 5, 130, 1887. Ka^nl-pai.— Tolmie and
Dawstm, Comp. Vocabs. Brit. Col., 118b, 1884.
Kur Ul par.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 488, 1866.
Matinecoo. An Algonquian tribe which J
formerly inhabited the N. w. coast of Long
Island, N. Y., from Newtown, Queens co.,
to Smithtown, Suffolk co. They had vil-
lages at Flushing, Glen Cove, Cold Spring,
Huntington, and Cow Harbor, but even
l)efore the intrusion of the whites they
had become greatly reiluced, probably
through wars with the Iroquois, to whom
they paid tribute. In 1650 Secretary Van
Tienhoven reported but 50 families left of
this once important tribe. Ruttenber in-
cludes them in his Montauk group, which
isiabout equivalent to Metoac (q. v. ); but
the interrelationship of the tribes in the
western part of Long Island has not been
definitely determinSl. (j. m. c. t.)
KantinacookB.— Macauley, N. Y., ii, 164-65, 1829.
Mantinecocks.— Clark, Onond^a, i, 18. 1849.
Mantinicocks.— Macauley, N. Y., ii, 292, 1829.
Kartinne houok.— Van Tienhoven (1650) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist , I, 366, 1856. Matineooo.— Wood in
Macauley, Long Id., ii, 253, 1829. Matineeoeke.—
Terry (1670) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 639, 1883.
Katineoogh.— Doc. of 1656. ibid., 369. Mati&e-
oongh. —Ibid. Katinioeck. —Doc. of 1666, ibid. , 689.
JUtinioonck.— Nicoll8(1669), ibid., 621. Matinne-
konek.— Doc. of 1644, ibid., 56. Xatinnioook.—
Nicolls (1666), ibid., 587. Katninioongh.— NicollH
(1664), ibid., 557. Mattinaoook.— Houldsworth
(1663), ibid., 530. Mattinnekonck.— Van Tien-
hoven (1655), ibid., 314.
Matiroim. One of the Diegueilo ran-
cherias represented in the treatv of 1852
at Santa Isabel, s. Cal.— H. R. Ex. Doc.
76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 13:^, 1857.
Matlaten (Mal-la-ten). A summer vil-
lage of the Wiweakam between Bute and
Loughborough inlets, Brit. Col. ; pop. 125
BULL. 30]
MATOAKS — MATTAKESET
821
in 1885. — Boas in Bull. Am. Geog. Soo.,
230, 1887.
Matoaks. See Pocahontas.
Matomkiii. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, still existing in 1722, about
Metomkin inlet in Accomack co., Va.
Not long before this time it had much de-
creased in population owing to an epi-
demic of smallpox.
Matampken.— Herrman map (1670) in Maps to
Accompany the Rep. of the Comr's on the
B'nd'ry Bet. Va. and Md., 1873 (Great and Little
Matampken marked ) . Matomkiii.— Beverley, Vi r-
ginia, 199, 1722.
Matonnmanke ('bear'). A Mandan
bond.
Bear.— Moi«:an, Anc. Soc., 158, 1877. Mato-Kihte.—
Maximilian, Trav., 335, 1843. Ma-to'-no-make.—
Morgan, op. cit. Kato-Komangkake.— Maximil-
ian, op. cit. Ma-to' nu-maa'-ke.— Dorsey in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 241, 1897.
Matora. An unidentified tribe place<l
by Marquette (Shea, Discov. Miss. Val.,
268, 1852), on his map of 1673, w. of the
Mississippi, about the w. border of Ar-
kansas.
Matsaki (*salt city,' l)ecause the Zufii
Groddess ot Salt is said to have made a
white lake there). A ruineil pueblo of
the Zufii near the n. w. base of Thunder
mt., 3 m. E. of Zufii pueblo, Valencia co.,
N. Mex. It was the Ma<,»aque of Casta-
fleda's narrative of Ck)ronado's expedition
in 1540-42, hence formed one of the Seven
Cities of Cil)ola. It was oc^cupied until
the beginning of the Pueblo revolt of Aug.,
1680, when it was permanently aban-
doned, the inhabitants fleeing with the
other Zufii to the summit of the adjacent
Thunder mtn. , there remaining for several
years. During the mission period Matsaki
was a visita of Halona. See Mindeleff in
8th Rep. B. A. E., 86, 1891, and the writers
cited below. ( f. w. h. )
Kaoaque.— Castafieda (1596) in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
517, 1896. Ka^aqui.- Bandelier in ^Iag. West.
Hist., 669, Sept. 1886. Maoaqui.— Ofiate (1698) in
Doc. InM., XVI, 133, 1871. Kaoaquia.— Bande-
lier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv, 337, 1892 (mls-
quotine Oil ate, op. cit.). Xasaguia.— De I'lNle,
Atlas Nouveau, map 60, 1733. Kasaquia.— De
I'Isle, Carte Mexique et Floride, 1703. Masiki.—
Peet in Am. Antiq., xvii, 852, 1895. Ka-tsa-ki.—
Gushing in Century Mag., 38, 1883 (Zufii name).
lUt-Mi-li— Cushing in Millstone, ix, 55, Apr. 1884
(Zufii name). KatstDd.— ten Kate, Reizen in
N. A., 290, 1885 (ini8quotin|r early Spanish form).
_ _a-ki.— Bandelier in Mag. West. HLst., 669,
Sept. 1886. Ka-tsa Ki.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst.
Papers, hi, 133, 1890. MA-tsa-qui.— Bandelier in
Revue d'£thnographie, 201, 1886. Matsaqui.—
Ibid., 208. Magaqnia. — Vetancurt (1693), Teatro
Mex., in, 320, 1871. Masqula.— Bancroft, Ariz,
and N. Mex., 173, 1889 (misquoting Vetancurt).
Karaqui.— Bandelier quoted by Gushing in Mill-
stone, IX, 55, Apr. 1884. Kosaqoi.— Gushing in
Gompte-rendu Intemat. Cong. Am., vii, 156, 1890.
Kunque.— Gastafieda (1596) in Temaux-Gom-
pans, Voy., ix, 163, 1838. Muzaqui.— Gushing in
Gompte-rendu Intemat. Gong. Am., vii, 156, 1890
(misquoting Gastafieda). Bait City.— Gushing,
Zufii Folk Tales. I, 82, 1901.
Matsniktk ( mts-nlkY), A former vil-
lage of the Siuslaw on Siuslaw r., Oreg. —
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 230,
1890.
Matsqni {Md^gqui), A Cowichan tribe
on Fraser r. and Sumass lake, Brit. Col.
Their villages are Mamakume and Koko-
aeuk. Pop. 44 in 1904.
Ma'9Qui.— Boas in 64th Rep. Brit. A. A. 8., 454,
1894. Maisqui.— Brit. Col. map, Ind. Aff., Victoria.
187*2. Mamskey. — Custer quoted by Gatschet,
notes, B. A. E. Matsqui.— Can. Ind. Aff. for 1901,
pt. II, 158.
Mattabesec (from massa-sepues-etj 'at a ^
[relatively] great rivulet or brook.' —
Trumbull). An important Algonquian
tribe of Connecticut, formerly occupying
both banks of Connecticut r.from Weth-
ersfield to Middletown or to the coai^t and
extending westward indefinitely. The
Wongunk, Pycjuaug, and Montowese In- ^^•^^**'*!
dians were a part of this tribe. According •
to Ruttenber they were a part of the Wap-
pinger, and perhaps occupied the original *
territory from which colonies went out to
overrun the country as far as Hudson r.
The same author says their jurisdiction
extended over all s. w. Connecticut, in-
cluding the Mahackeno, llncowa, Pau-
gusset, Wepawaug, Quinnipiac, Monto-
wese, Sukiang, ami Tunxis. (.i. m.)
Matabeseo.— Kendall, Trav., i. 92, 1809. Katabe-
zeke.— Doc. of 1646 cited by Trumbull, Ind. Names
Conn., 26, 1881. Matebcseck.— Writer {ca. 1642) in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., in. 161, 1833. Xato-
wepesaok— Uncas deed (1665) cited by Trumbull,
Ind. Names Conn., 26. 1881. MatUbeeset.— Stiles
il761) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 105, 1809.
latUbeseck.— Record (1646) quoted by Trumbull,
Conn.. I, 510, 1818. Mattabeiett— Ind. deed (1673)
cited by Trumbull, Ind. Names Conn., 26, 1881.
MatUbesicke.— Haynes (1643) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll.,4ths., VI, 355,1863. Kattapeaset— Doc.of 1657
cited by Trumbull, Ind. Names Conn., 26, 1881.
Mattebeseck.— Hoyt, Antiq. Res., 54, 1824. Se-
queen.— Doc. of 1633 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ii,
140, 1858 (title of chief). Bcquint.— De Laet (1640)
in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ms., i, 296, 1841. Se-
qvins.— Dutch map (1616) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hi.st.,
1,1856.
Mattabesec. The principal village of the
Mattabesec, the residence of Bowheag,
their head chief. It occupied the site of
Middletown, Conn.
MatUbesett.— Field, Middlesex Co., 34. 1819.
Mattaoock. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, in 1608, on the n. bank of
York r., in (iloucester co., Va. — Smith
(1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819.
Mattacnnt. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, in 1608, on the s. side of
Potomac r., in King George co., Va. —
Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, repr. 1819.
Mattakeset. A villag:e in e. Massachu-
setts, about the site of Yarmouth, Barn-
stable CO. It is said to have been subject
to the Wampanoag, but was in Nauset
territory. It is mentioned in 1621, and
in 1685 was still in existence, with a popu-
lation of 70 Indians excee<lingl2 years of
^e. (j. M.)
Kktakees.— Gookin (1674) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
1st s., 1, 148, 1806. Katakeeset.— Arnold and Mor-
ton (1683). ibid., 4th s., v, 86. 1861. Matakeetit.—
Barber, Hist. Coll., 517, 1839. Kattache«M.— Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st 8., Ill, 15, 1794. Kattaohe«Mt—
Ibid. Mattaoheest.— Ibid. Kattaohiest— Mourt
(1622) quoted by Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 2, 16, 1848.
Mattaohitt.— Dee in Smith (1629), Virginia, ii. 233,
822
MATTAKE8ET — ^MATTOLE
[B. A.fl.
repr. 1819. lUtUkeeM.— Hinckley (1685) in Mass.
Htet. Soc. Coll., 4th s., v, 183. 1861. lUtUkeetet—
Humphreys (1815), ibid., 2d s., iv, 92, 1816. Mat-
takftdt— Rawson and Dan forth (1698), Ibid.. 1st
8.,x,129-CM809.
Mattakeset. A former village situated
about the site of Duxbury, Plymouth co.,
Mass. It was probably subject to the
Wampanoa^. In 1685 it had 40 inhabit-
ants exceeding 12 years of age. ( J. m. )
Kamatakeeset.— Hinckley (1685) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 4th s., V, 133, 1861.
Mattamiiskeet. . A village of the Macha-
punga, the only one belonging to the tribe
in 1700-01, and. containing then, accord-
ing to Law son, 30 warriors. Probably
situated on the lake of the same name in
Hydeco., N. C.
■arimtakeet—Lawson (1714), Hist. Car.,383,repr.
1860. Maaanunaakete.— Col. Rec. N. C. (1713), ll.
82.1886. Matamaakite.— Ibid.. 29. Katamoakeet—
Ibid., 31. Kattamuakeeta.— Ibid., 45. Xatte^om-
aka.— Col. Rec. N. C. (1713), ii, 2, 1886. Matte-
mnaket.— Ibid., 168.
Mattanock. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, in 1608, on the w. side of
Nansemond r., near its mouth, in Nanse-
mond CO., Va. — Smith (1629), Virginia,
I, map, repr. 1819.
Mattapanient (probably of the same
~ meaning as Mattapony, '({. v.). An Al-
eonouian tribe or band that formerly
livea on Patuxent r., Md , probably in
St Marys co. Their principal village,
of the same name, may have been at
Mattapony cr. A Catholit; mission was
established there in 1636. In 1651 they,
with others, were removed to a tract on
Wicomico r. They were possiblv but a
band or division of the Conoy (q. v.),
and are to l>e distinguished from the
Mattapony' of Virginia, sometimes written
Mattapanient. (j. m.)
Xatapaman.—Map, ca. 164U or 1650, in Maps to
Accompany the Rept. of the Comr's on the
Bnd'y bet. Va. and Md., 1873. Katpaaient—
Bozman. Md., i. 141, 1837. Mattapament— Stra-
chey (ca. 1612). Virgrinia. 39, 1849. Xattapaaiaaa.—
Bozman, Md., ii, 421, 1837. Mattapanient— Smith
(1629), Virginia, 1. 118, repr., 1819. Mattapany.—
Herrman, Map (1670), in Maps to Accompany
the Rept. of the Comr's on the Bnd'y bet. Va.
and Md., 1873. Mattpament— Smith (1629), Vir-
?inia, i, map, repr. 1819. Ketapawnien. — White
1639), Relatio Itineris, 63. 1874.
Mattapoiset (a form of MattabeseCj q. v. ).
A village, in 1622, near the present Matta-
poisett, Plymouth co., Mass.
Xatopoiaatt— Deed of 1664 in Drake, Bk. Inds.,
bk., i, 14, 1848. Xattopoiaet.— Watts (1734) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., x, 31, 1823. Kattapuiat.—
Harris, Voy. and Trav., i, 856, 1705. Kattapuyat—
Mourt (1622) in Ma88.Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., viii,
258, im
Jgattapony. The proper form of this
name, Dotn in Virginia and Maryland,
appears to be Mattapanfent. although
both that and Mattapament occur on
Capt. John Smith's map and in his text,
the latter being probably a misprint.
Heckewelder's attempted interpretation
of * bad bread ', or * no bread at all', based
on the theory that it contains the word
pcma, *pone*, * bread', is evidently with-
out value. The Mattapony is a small tribe
of the Powhatan confederacy (q. v. ) living
in 1608, according to Smith, on Mattapony
r., Va., and having 30 men, or a total of
perhaps a little more than 100. On
Smith's map the town ''Mattapanient"
appears to be located in the upper part
of the present James City co., near the
mouth of Chickahominy r.* In 1781, ac-
cording to Jefferson (Notes on Va., 1825),
they still numbered 15 or 20, lai|;ely of
negro blood, on a small reservation on
the river of their name. These figures,
however, are probablv too low, as the
name is still preserved by about 45 per-
sons of mixed blooil on a small state
reservation on the s. side of Mattapony
r., in King William co. These survivors
are closely related to the Pamunkey,
whose reservation is only 10 m. distant
See Mattapanient, ( j. m. )
Mattapament— Smith, Hist. Va. (1624), Arber ed.,
S47, 1884. Mattapuiieat— Ibid., map. Mat^o-
mens.— Boudinot,Star in the West, 127, 1816. Xat-
topomento.— Macauley, N, Y., ii, 168, 1829. Xatta-
ponie«.^leffereon(1781 ), Notes, 130, 1825.
Mattawamkeag ( 'a bar of gravel divides
the river in two. ' — Vetromile ) . A princi-
pal Penobscot village formerly on Penob-
scot r., about Mattawamkeag point,
Penobs(*ot co. , Me.
■adawamkee. — Gylea (1736) in Drake, Trag.
Wild., 78, lail. XatUwamkeaf.— Godfrey in Me.
Hist. Soc. Coll.. VII, 4, 1876. Mattawaakeag.— Ve-
tromile, Abnakis, 52^^, 1866. KettaBakik.— Mau-
rault, Al>enakis, v, 1866. Kontawanekaac.— Oonf.
(1786) in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., vii, 10, 1876.
Mattawan (* river of shallows.' — Hew-
itt). A popular name for the Algonquian
Indians living on Mattawan r., a branch
of upper Ottewa r., Ontario. They are
protmbly a part of the Nipissing or of the
Temiscaming, q. v. Cf. MatavHichkarini.
(J. M.)
Mataoiiiriott.— Jes. Rel. 1672, 46, 1858. Mataovaa.—
La Hon tan (1703). New Voy., map, 1735. Kata-
w^.— Wm. Jones, inf n, 1906 (correct form).
Matawin— McLean, Hudson Bay, i, 87, 1849.
Mattawottis. A former Diegueflo ran-
cheria under the mission of San Miguel de
la Frontera, n. Lower California. —Taylor
in Cal. Farmer, May 18, 1860.
Mattinacook. A band of the Penobscot
who, in 1876, occupied Mattinacook id.
in Penobscot r., near Lincoln, Penobscot
CO., Me.
Mattanaweook. — Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., vn, 108,
note, 1876.
Mattitnck {Matuh^tugk, 'place without
yixxA ' , or * badly wooded. —Trumbull ) .
A Corchaug village, about 1640, on the
site of the present Mattituck, Suftolk co.,
Long Island, N. Y. ( j. m. )
Kattatook.— Trumbull, Ind. NamesConn.,27,1881
(early form). Mattatuok.— Records (1649) in
Thompson, Long Id., i, 878, 1843. Mattetuek.—
Thompson, ibid., 892.
Mattole ( Wishosk name ) . An Athapas-
can tribe whose principal settlements
were along Bear and Mattole rs., Cal.
They resisted the ^hite race more vigor-
ously than the natives of this region
generally did and suffered practiod exter-
BULL. 30]
MATTOWACCA MAYAJUACA
823
niiiiatioii in return. They were jjathered
on a reservation near C. 3Iendo('ino for
a time, and some of tlieni were aftcTward
I taken to Hupa Valley res. A few still
jlive in their old territory. They differ
^somewhat from their Athapascan neigh-
bors in language and culture; they bum
the dead; the men tattoo a distinctive
mark on the forehead, but in other respects
they are similar to the II upa. (p. e.g.)
Katole.— Bancroft, Nat. Ra(;cs, in, G48, 1874. Kat-
tiiO.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.. iii, 107. 1877.
Mattole.— Ind. Aff. Ren. 1864, 119, ises. Tun>u«li.—
Powers, op. cit., 124 ( ' loreigner*' : Wailuki name) .
Mattowaoca. A name of the hickory
shad ( Clupea mediocris) , found from New-
foundland to Florida; probably from one
of the southeastern dialects of the Al-
gonquian stock. (a. f. c.)
Matyata (or MAk'yana, contracted from
Mdk'yanawiny *countrvof the salt lake.' —
Gushing). l>escril)e(f by Fray ^Marcos de
Niza in 1539, under the name Marata, as
a province s. k. of Cibola ( Hakluyt, Voy.,
Ill, 440), although Coronado, in the fol-
lowing year, asserted that '*the kingdom
of Marata is not to Ixj found, neither have
the Indians any knowledge thereof."
Bandelier and Cushing i<lentify Marata
with Matyata, or Makyata, "the name
given by the Zuili to a cluster of now
ruined pueblos which they declare to
have been occupied by a branch of their
own j)eople. Aftt»r long dis4H»nsi(Hi8 and
even warfare with the inhabitants of the
Zufii basin, those of !Matyatii were com-
pelle<l to submit, and to join the former
in their settlements. The group of ruins
called Matyata or Makyata lies s. e. of
Zufii on the trail lea<ling to Acoma; and
the condition of the ruins (descrilKHi by
Alvarado in 1540) shows that their aban-
donment is more recent than that of other
ancient pueblos in that n»gion." Accord-
ing to Gushing descendants of the former
inhabitants of Matyata aiv to-day rt»si-
dents of Zuni. Consult Bandelier in
Arch. Inst. Pai)ers, in, 120, IStK); v, 174,
1890; and for Alvarado's <lescription of
these supposed niins see Winship in
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896. See Kifawn-
kyakvjef Kyat-sutnnm. Pikif(wimt)i,
iU-che-o-tek-o-pa.— Fewkesin'Jour. Am. Eth. and
Arch., 1, 100, 1891. Ma'-k'ya-na.— Cu.shin«:, infn,
1891 (or Ma' k'ya-na-win: 'country of the Halt
lake'). Ka-kya-ta. — CnshinK quoted hy Bandelier
in Arch. Inst. Papers, iii,120, 1890 (Matyata, or).
Karata.— Marcos de Niza (lft:») in Hakluyt, Voy..
ni, 440, 1600. Karta.— Mota-Padilla, Hist, de la
Conquista, 169, 1742 (Marata, or). Ma-tya-ta.—
Cuahing quoted by Bandelier, op. cit. (or Ma-
kya-ta). Ma-Mta.— Bandelier in Revue d'Eth-
nographie, 206, 1886.
Mangna. A former Gabriele florancheria
in Los Angeles CO., Cal., at a locality later
called Rancho Felis.— Rie<i (1852) quoted
by Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 8, 1860.
Mankekose (probably for Makoyii<, *l)ear
cub,' or * little r)ear. '—W. J. ) . A former
Potawatomi village, commonlv known as
Mau-ke-ko»e'H village, from the name of
\\a chief, near the head of Wolf cr. , in Mar-
shall CO., In<l., on a reservation sold under
theprovisionsof the treaty of Dec. 10, 1834.
The name is also written Muckkose and
Muck-Rose. (j. m. )
Mauls. See Hammers,
Manmee Towns. A common name for a
group of villages formerly at the head of
Slaumee r., near Ft Wayne, Allen co., Ind.
When destroyeil by the whites in 1790
there were 7 villages, all within a few
miles of each other, on the Maumee or its
branches. Two of these were Miami,
three Delaware, and two Shawnee. Omee
was the principal one, and together they
contained about 225 houses. S^ Kehionga,
Katunee towni.— So called from their situation on
Maumee r. Ome« towns.— Harmar (1790) in Rupp,
West. Pa., app., 226, 1846 (commonly so called;
Omee is the French Au Mi, contracted from Au
Miami; Omee is given by Harmar as the name of
the principal village, on the site of Kekionga,
while he puts "Kegaiogue" on the opposite bank
of St Joseph r.).
Maushantuzet ( 'at or in the little place
f)f much wood,' or 'smaller w*of)ded tract
of land,' in contradistinction to Mashan-
tucket, or Mashantackuck, the name of a
tract on the w. side of Thames r., in Mont-
ville. — Trumbull). A Peipiot settlement
in 1 7(>2, at the site of the present I^edyanl,
New lx)n(lon co.. Conn.
Mashantucket.— Early records quoted by Trum-
bull, Ind. Names Conn., 26, 1H81 (an (M'ca.Mional
form ) . Maushantuxet.— Stiles ( 1761 ) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. (^oil.. 1st 8.. x, 102. 1S09. XuMhuntuoksett —
Stiles quoted by Tnmibull. op. cit.
Manshapogae (probably 'great pond,'
from rnaHMty 'great', y>o^ or y>mf/, 'pond';
or ittassd-pe-auk't 'great-water land'; cf.
Mashpee and }f(is8ape(pi(i). A village,
probably l)elonging to the Narraganset,
in Providence CO., R. I., in 1637.
ishapauge.— Williams (1(*>61) in K. I. Col. Rec,
I. 18. 1856. Kashapawog.— Doc. of 1640. ibid.. 28.
XauBhapogue.— DeiMl of U\S1, ibid.. 18.
Manthspi ('dirty river.' — Hewitt). A
Mimtagnais tril)e in 18<>3 on the reserva-
tion at Manicouagan, on St I^wrence r.,
Quel)e<\— Hind, l^b. Penin., ii, 124,
1863.
Mawakhota ( ' skin smeareil with whitish
earth'). A band of the Two-kettle
Sioux.
Ma-wa&ota.— Dorsey in ir>th Rep. B. A. E., 220, 1897.
Xa-waqota. —Ibid.
Mawsootoh (Mav-HOo-t oh\ 'bringing
along'). A 8ul)clan of the Delawares
(q. v.). — Morgan, Anc. Soc, 172, 1877.
Mayaca. A Timuquanan district and
village, about 1565, on the e. coast of n.
Florida. De Bry locates it e. of upper
St Johns r. ; Bartram, e. of L. (ieorge.
Kaeoiya.— Fairbanks, Hist. Fla., 139. 1871. Xa-
ooya.— Barcia, Ensayo, 129, 1723. Xaqaarqua. —
Shipp, De 8oto and Fla., 517, 1881. XaMrquam.—
Barcia, Ensayo, 51, 1723. Masraoa.— Fontaneda
(1576). Memoir, Smith trans., 21, 1854. Mavaiw.—
"^ " Mayaroa.— l5e Brj
Bartram, Voy., i, map, 1799.
Brev. Nar.. ii, map," 1591. Kaytrqaa.— Laudon-
nit^re (1564). L'Hist. Notable, 108, 1858,
Mayajaaca. A former Timuquanan vil-
la^ on the E. coast of Florida, n. of the
Ais country.
824
MAYARA^MAYEYE
[b. a.
Xayaguaei.— Fontaneda (1675) in Doc. In^d., v,
514, 1866. Majriguaoa.— Fontaneda in Ternaux-
Compans, Voy ., xx, 26, 1841. Kajriguaoa.— Ibid.. 35.
Mayara. A Timucuan chief, said to
have been **rich in jrold and silver," and
also the name of his town on lower St
Johns r., Fla., in the 16th centur>'.
Xaiera.— De Brv, Brev.Nar., ii, map, 1591. Mav-
ara.— Laudonnl^re (1564) in French, Hist. Coll.
La., 212, 1869. ][a7rra.~Laudonni^re, Hist. No-
table, 88, 1853.
May cock. A sort of squash or pumpkin.
According to Scheie de Vere (American-
isms, 60, 1871 ) it is still found in Virginia.
Trumbull (Sci. Pap. Asa Gray, i, 336, 1889)
cites as early forms macocks (Smith,
1606-08), macock gourd (Strachey, 1610),
macokos (Strachey), and viacocqiver
(L'Ecluse, 1591-1605). Beverley (Hist.
Va., 124, 1705) identifies the may cock
with the squanh of New England. Smith
(Arbered., 359, 1884) describes macocks
as '*a fruit like unto a muske mellon,
butt lesse and worse." The word is de-
rived from a form of mahawk, * gourd*,
in the Vii]ginian dialect of Algonquian,
cognate with the Delaware machgachk,
'pumpkin.* See Macocks, (a. f. c.)
Mayes, Joel Bryan. A prominent
mixed-blood of the Cherokee tribe and
twice principal chief of the nation. He
was bom Oct. 2, 1833, in the old Chero-
kee Nation, near the present Cartersville,
Ga. His father, Samuel Mayes, was a
white man from Tennessee, while his
mother, Nancy Adair, was of mixed
blood, the daughter of Walter Adair, a
leadine tribal officer, and granddaughter
of John, one of the Adair brothers,
traders among the Cherokee l)efore the
Revolution. The boy removed with the
rest of his tribe in 1838 to Indian Ter.,
where he afterward was graduated from
the male seminary at Tahlequah. and
after a short experience at teaching
school, engaged in stockraising until the
outbreak of the Civil war in 1861, when
he enlisted as a private in the First Con-
federate Indian Brigade, coming out at
the close of the war as quartermaster.
He returned to his home on Grand r.
and resumed his former o<»cupation, but
was soon after made successively clerk
of the district court, circuit judge (for
two terms of 10 years in all), asso-
ciate justice, and chief justice of the
Cherokee supreme court. In 1887 he
was elected principal chief of the Cher-
okee Nation, succeeding D. W. Bushy-
head, and was reelected in 1891, but
died in oflSce at Tahlequah, Dec. 34 of
that year, being succeeded by Col. C. J.
Harris. Chief Mayes was of fine phy-
sique, kindly disposition, and engaging
personality. * He was three times mar-
ried, his last wife having been Miss Mary
Vann, of a family distinguished in Chero-
kee history, (j. M.)
Mayeye. A former Tonkawan tribe
which, in the ^rst half of the 18th cen-
tury, lived near San Xavier r., Tex., ap-
parently either modern San Gabriel or
tittle r. Joutel in 1687 (Margry, D^.,
Ill, 288, 1878) heard of the M^hey N. of
Colorado r., somewhere near where the
Spaniards later actually found the May-
eye. Rivera (Diario, leg. 2062, 1736) in
1727 met them at springs called Puente-
zitas, 15 leagues w. of the junction of the
two arms of the Brazos and I^ leagues
from the Colorado. In 1738 they were
mentioned with the Deadoses (q. v. ) of
the same locaHty (Orobio y Basterra, let-
ter of Apr. 26, Archivo General, MS.).
About 1744 Fray Mariano Francisco de
los Dolores visited a rancheria of May-
eyes, Yojuanes, Deadoses, Bidais, and
others near San Xavier r. (Arricivita,
Chronica, pt. 2, 322, 1792). In 1740 it had
been planned to take this and the Sana
( Zana) tribes to San A ntonio ( De8cripci6n,
1740, Mem. Nueva Espafta, xxviii, 203,
MS. ), where a few of the Sanas and Er-
vipiamcs had already been gathered. As
a result of the efforts of Father Dolores, 4
chiefs of the "Yojuanes, Deadoses, Mai-
eyes, and Rancheria (irande** went to
San Antonio to ask for a mission (Des-
patch of the Vicerov, Mar. 26, 1751, Lamar
Papers, MS.), and about 1747 the San
Xavier group of missions w^aa founded for
them. When the site was abandoned,
"notwithstanding the tenacity with
which the Maye3res especially had always
clung to the district of San Xavier,*' some
of them were moved to 'the (Tuadalupe,
where an abortive attempt was made to
reestablish them (Arricivita, op. dt.,
337 ) . Some of the Mayeye who had been
baptized at San Xavier entered San An-
tonio de Vialero mission at San Antonio,
and were living there as late as 1769 (MS.
Burial records). The Mayeye and their
relations were bitter enemies of the
Apache, and in the middle of the 18th
dentury, when the Comanche force<l the
Apache southward, the Mayeye and other
Tonkawans were apparently pushed to
the 8. K. , where they mingled with the Ka-
rankawan tribes. In 1772 Mezi^res (In-
forme, July4, 1772, MS.) said the Mayeye
wandered with the Tonkawaand Yojuane
between the Trinity and the Brazos; and
in the same year Bonilla, quoting Me-
zieres, associated them with the same
tril)es, all of whom, though in alliance
with the Wichita and their congeners,
were despised by the latter as vagaoonds.
Such has been the usual attitude of other
tribes toward the Tonkawa ever since.
While Bucareli existed on the Trinity,
from 1774 to 1779, the Mayeye visited it
In 1778 Mezi^ree (Carta, Mar. 18, MS.)
reported 20 families of Coco and Mayeye
apostat^es opposite Culebra id., in the
BULL. 30]
MAYI — MAYO
825
Karankawa country. In 1 779 the Spanish
Kovemment feared an alliance of May eye,
Ooco» Karankawa, and Arkoki^a (Croix
to Cabello, Dec. 4, MS.). The May eye
were included in the census of 1790, and
were in the jurisdiction of Nacogdoches.
Bibley, in 1805, says the ** Mayes*' were
then living on San Gabriel cr., near the
mouth of the Guadalupe, on St Bernard
bay, Tex. , and numbered about 200 men:
they were hostile to the Spaniards, but
proteased friendship for the French;
they were eurroumted bv tribes speak-
ing languages different from their own
and were adept in the sign language.
The last trace of the tribe was found by
Gatschet m 1884 (Karankawa Inds., 36,
1891), when he met an old Indian who
had Known this people in his early days
on the Texas coast, and who stated that
they spoke a dialect of the Tonkawa.
(a. c. p. h. e. b.)
HMheyM* — Mezi^res (1772) quoted bv Bonilla in
I'ex. Hist. Ass'n Quar., viii, 66, Ida*). Kagh&i.—
outel (1687) in French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 137, 1846.
' * »».— Mezi6re8(1772),op.cit. lIaieoe».— Oro-
do y Basterra (1738), op. cit. Xaieyes.— Span.
c, Mar. 6, 1768, in Bexar archives. Malleyes.—
ELtvera, Diario, leg. 2602, 1736. Kayeees.— Barrios,
[nforme, MS., 1771. lUyee*.— Bracken ridge,
^iew8La.,87,1814. Mayes.— Uibley. Hist.Sketches,
"2, 1806. Mayeyes.— Census of 1790 quoted by
latschet, Karan-
awa Inds., 35, 1891.
Kef hay.— Joutel
iited by Shea, note
Charlevoix, New
nee, IV, 78, 1870.
hey. — J outel
1687) in Margry.
, ni, 288, 1878.
eshty. — Joutel
1687) in French.
It. Coll. La., 1, 152,
846. Keihitei.-
trcla, Ensayo, 271,
.723. X^.— Oat-
ichet,op. cit., 36,1891
-Tonkawa name).
kiyi<-Ibid. Xule-
rea.- Morfl, Mem.
list. Tex., ca. 1782.
Mayi. An im-
jortaiitPomovil-
age on upper
Clear lake, Cal.—
A.. L. Kroeber,
Univ. Cal. MS.,
1903.
Mayndeshkish (* Coyote pass'). An
/Lpaehe clan or band at San Carlos agency
Etnd Ft Apache, Ariz., in 1881 ( Bourke in
Four. Am. Folk-lore, in, 112, 1890). The
corresponding clan of the Navaho isMai-
theshkizh.
Mayne Island. The local name for a
body of Sanetch on the s. e. coast of Van-
couver id.; pop. 28 in 1904.— Can. Ind.
Aff. for 1902 and 1904.
• Mayo ('terminus', because the Mayo
p. was the dividing line between them
md their enemies. — Ribas). One of the
principal tribes of the Cahita group of
he Piman stock, residing on the Rio
Mayo, Sinaloa, Mexico. Their language
differs only dialectieally from thatof the
Yaqni and the Tehueco. The first notice
of tlie tribe is probably that in the **Se-
(ISO
;/
gunda Relacion Anonima" of the jour-
ney of Nuno de (iuzman, about 1580 (in
Icazbalceta, Coleocion de Docunientos,
II, 800, 1866), where it is stated that
after passing over
the Rio de Tam-
achola ( Fuerte)
and traveling 80
leagues (north-
ward) they came
to a river called
Mayo on which
lived a j)eople of
the same name.
Ribas(|). 237) de-
clares tnat in his
day it was the
most populous of
all the tribes of
Sinaloa, estimat-
ing their numl)er
at 80,000, some
8,000 or 10, 000 of
whom were war-
riors. Hedidnot
consider them so
warlike as the surrounding tribes, but
in their customs, dwellings, and other
respects the Mavo resembled them.
Hardy (Travels in Mexico, 424, 1829)
states that at the time of his visit there
were 10 towns on the Rio Mayo, with an
estimated population of 10,000. Accord-
ing to Davila (Sonora, 315, 1894) their
industries were reduced to the cultivation
of the soil, the raising of sheep and do-
mestic binls, and the manufacture of
woolen shawls. He says the Mayo
pueblos are larger than those of the Yaqui,
but the number of people of the latter is
now greater than that of the former. The
826
MAYPOP MDEWAKANTON
(B.A.fl.
Mayo settlements, ho far as known, are
Baca, Batacosa, Camoa, Conicari, Cui-
rimpo, Ec'hojoa, Huatabanipo, Ma(^o-
yahui, jNIaniaca, Navojoa, San Pedro,
Santa Cruz de Mayo, Teimhue, Tesia,
and Toro. See Cahita. (f. w. h. )
Xafo.— ten Kate in Bull. Soc. d'Anthrop. de
Paris. 375, 188;^ (misprint). Maya.— Riba«, Hist.
Triumphos, 237, 1645. Mayo.— Rel. Anonima
(1630). op. cit.
Maypop. The fruit of the passion-flower
( Pas»i flora incaniata ) . Capt. John Smith
(Va.,* 123, repr. 1819) and Strachey
(Trav. Va., 72) speak of this fruit aS??iara-
cock an<l state that the Indians cultivated
it before the coming of the whites.
Trumbull (Sci. Pap. Asa (Jray, 342, 1889)
considers that maracock is the Brazilian
Tupi inbunwuiay related to the Carib
merecoya (Breton, 1665), the fruit of a
vine, the name and the thing having both
come from South America. Maypon
would thus ultimately represent, throuffn
maracock, this Tupi loan-word. (a. p. c. )
Maysonec. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, in 1608, on the n. bank of the
Chickahominy, in New Kent co., Va. —
Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr. 1819.
Masakntemani (^shoots the gun [iron]
as he walks'). A chief of the Sisseton
Sioux, born at I^c-cjui- Parle, Minn., in
1806; died near Sisseton, S. Dak., in
1887. In his early manhood he followed
strictly the customs of his tribe; in 1850
he was a meml)er of the Sisseton and
Wahpeton delegation to Washington, and
a signer of the Traverse des Sioux treaty
of July 23, 1851. Al)out 1855 he became
a convert to Christianity and thencefor-
ward was an ardent supporter of the
missionary work of Rev. Stephen R.
Riggs. .It was in the spring of 1857,
when the massacre at Spirit I^ke, Iowa,
bv Inkpaduta's band occurred, that
Mazakutemani j>articulariy manifeste<l
his friendship for the whites by fol-
lowing the murderous band and rescu-
ing Miss (lanlner, the only surviving
white captive. Again, in 1862, on re-
mving word of the Sioux outbreak, he
employed every effort to stay the mas-
sacre and to rescue the white captives,
going boldly into the hostile camps and
using his oratorical powers to accomplish
his purpose. The final escape of the
captives from death on this occasion was
due largely to Mazakutemani's efforts
and his cooperation with Gen. Sibley.
He was the cnief speaker for the Sisseton
in their tribal deliberations as well as in
their treaty negotiations with the United
States commissioners. In addition to the
treaty of Traverse des Sioux he signed
the treaties of Washington, June 19, 1858;
Sisseton agency, Dak., Sept. 20, 1872, and
Lac Traverse agency, Dak., May 2, 1873.
Hia death occurred probably before 1880.
Consult S. R. Riggs (1) in Minn. Hist
Soc. Coll., Ill, 82, 90, 1880; (2) Maryand
I, 141, 1880; Heard, Hist Sioux War,
156, 1863. (c. T.)
Maiapes. A former tribe of n. b. Mex-
ico or 8. Texas, probably Coahuiltecan,
drawn from Nuevo Leon and gathered
into the mission of San Antonio Galindo
Moctezuma, in Coahuila. Cf. Mahuames,
][asames.~Archiyo Qeneral, xxxi, fol. 206,
quoted by Orozco y Berra, Geog., 306. 1864 (prob-
ably identical). Masapes.— Orozco y Berra, ibid.,
302.
Maiapeta ( ^ iron fire ' ) . A chief of a vil-
l^e of 627 Yankton and Sisseton Sioux on
Big Stone lake, Minn., in 1836. He was
probably ckief of the Yankton in the vil-
lage, while The Grail was chief of the
Sisseton.
Kahzahpatah.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, ill, 612,
1853.
Mazpegnaka (Apiece of metal in the
hair'). A bana of the Sans Arcs
Sioux. — Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. K.,
219, 1897.
Mdeiyedan (French: ^Lac qhi parte,*
*Speaking lake'). A band of the Wah-
peton Sioux whose habitat was around
Lac qui Parle, Minn. In 1836 (School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, iii, 612, 1853) the band
numbered 530 under Little Chief.
La« qui Parle band.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 18&9, lOfi^
1860. LaoQuiparla Indians. -Sibley (1862) in Sen.
Ex. Doc. 29, pt. 2, 82d Cong., 2d sess., 9. 1858.
Upper Wahpaton.— Sibley (1873) in Minn. Hist
Soc. Coll., in, 250, 1880.
Mdewakanton ('mystery la'ke village.'
from mde * lake ' , wakan * sacred mystery * ,
otonire 'village'). One of the subtribes
composing the Santee division of the Da-
kota, the other 3 being the Sisseton, Wah-
peton, and Wahpekute. A. L. Kiggs con-
tends that the Mdewakanton are the only
Dakota entitled to the namelsanyati ( 'San-
tee'), given them from their old home on
Mille Lac, Minn., called by them Isan-
tamde, * knife lake. ' In every respect this
tribe appears to be most intimately re-
lated to the Wahpeton. Wahpekute, and
Sisseton. It is possible that the Mdewa-
kanton foniied the original stem from
which the other 3 subtribes were devel-
oped. It is probable that the Nadowes-
sioux mentioned by early missionaries and
explorers were in most cases the people of
this tribe and the tribes associated with
them then living in the region of Mille
Lac and the headwaters of the MississippL
Dr Williamson, who spent years among
these Indians, fixes the home of this tribe
(who bv tradition had once lived on Lake
of the Woods and n. of the great lakes and
had migrated toward the s. w. ) at MiUeLac,
the source of Rum r., which is apparently
the ancient locationof the Issati of Henne-
pin. This identifies the Issati with the
Mdewakanton and sustains the conclusion
of Riggs. After the Mdewakanton came
to the Mississippi they appear to have
scattered themselves along that river in
I7LL. 301
MDEWAKANTON
827
^veral villages extending from Sauk Rap-
Is to the mouth of Wisconsin r. and up
le Minnesota 35 m. According to Neill
Minn. Hist. Coll., i, 262, 1872) this split-
nff into bands was due to the influence
I French traders. This author asserts
lat the people of this division were still
»ddin^ at Mille lac at the time Le Sueur
ailt his post near the mouth of Blue
Surth r. in 1700, and that their change of
Mathm to the region of lower Min-
eeota r. was due to the establishment of
lading poets in that section. This would
idicate a later removal to that locality
lan Williamson supposed. Rev. G. H.
ond, as quoted by Neill, says: "When
> this we add me fact tAat traders
ioght them to plant corn, which actu-
lly took the place of wild rice, nothing
ras wanting to bring the Mdewakantons
)Uth to the Minnesota r. Accordingly
edition tells us that this division of the
lakotas no sooner became acquainted
rith tiuders, and the advantage of the
rade, than they erected their teepees
round the log hut of the white man and
nnted in the direction of the Minnesota
,, returning in the * rice-gathering moon *
September) to the rice swamps nearest
lieir friends." In Le Sueur's list of the
BStem Dakota tribes the name Issati is
ropped and that of Mdewakanton, un-
er tne form Mendeouacantons, is used,
vidently for the first time. The whites
ome into more intimate relation with
[lis tribe than with any other of the
^kota group, but the history — which is
ot of general interest except in so far as
i relates to the outbreak of 1862, in
rhich some of them took an active part —
I chieflv that of the different bands and
ot of the tribe as a whole. After their
efeat by the United States, they and
he Winnebago were removed to Crow
hreek res., ]>Eikota Ter. Subsequently
be Mdewakanton and Wahpekute wen)
ramsferred to the Santee res. in Nebraska,
ntimately lands were assigned them in
Bveralty, the reservation was abolished,
nd the Indians became citizens of the
Tnited States. In general customs and
leliefe they resemble the other divisions
I the eastern Sioux. (See Dakota. )
The tribe joined in the following treaties
nth the United States: Prairie duChien,
Vis., July 15, 1830, by which they and
ther eastern Sioux tribes ceded a strip
0 m. wide from the Mississippi to Des
foines r.» la. Ck>nvention at St Peters,
dinn., Nov. 30, 1836, with the upper
ddewakanton, agreeing on certain stipu-
ations regarding the treaty of July 15,
830. Treaty of Washington, Sept 29.
887, by which they ceded to the United
(tates all their interest in lands e. of the
Mississippi. Treaty of Mendota, Minn.,
Lug. 5, 1851, by which they ceded all
their lands in Iowa and Minnesota, re-
taining as a reservation a tract 10 m. wide
on each side of Minnesota r. Treatv of
Washington, June 19, 1858, by which
they sold that part of their reservation n.
of Minnesota r., retaining the portion
s. of the river, which they agreed tatake
in severalty. By act of Mar. 3, 1863, the
President was authorized to set apart for
them a reserve beyond the limits of any
state and remove them thereto, their re-
serve in Minnesota to be sold for their
benefit. The new reserve was established
by Executive order, July 1, 1863, on
(>ow cr., S. Dak. See Reservations,
Lewis and Clark (1804) estimated them
at 300 fighting men or 1,200 souls; Long
in 1822 (Expeil. St Peter's R., 380, 1824)
estimated the various bands as follows:
MDEWAKANTON
Keoxa (Kivuksa), 400; Eanbosandata
(Khemnichan), 100; Kapozha, 300; Oa-
noska (Ohanhanska), 200; Tetankatane
(Tintaotonwe), 150; Taoapa, 300; Wea-
Kaote (Khemnichan), 50. According to
the Census of 1890 there were 869 Mde-
wakanton and Wahpekute on Santee
reservation, Nebr., and 292 at Flandreau,
S. Dak. The report for 1905 mentions
as not under an agent 150 at Birch
Codiey and 779 elsewhere in Minne-
sota. The recognized divisions are as
follows: (1) Kiyuksa, (2) Ohanhanska,
(3) Tacanhpisapa, (4) Anoginajin, (5)
Tintaotonwe, and (6) Oyateshicha, be-
longing to the Wakpaatonwedan divi-
sion, which seems to nave constituted the
whole tribe in early times, and (7) Khem-
nichan, (8) Kapozha, (9) Magayuteshni,
(10) Maapiyamaza, (11) Mahpiyawich-
828
MEAMSKINISHT MEASUREMENTS
[B. A.
asta, (12) Kheyataotonwe, and (13)
Taoapa, constituting the Matantonwan
division, which early French writers
spoke of as a powerful tribe associated
with but not a part of the Mdewakan-
ton. The following subdivisions have
not been identified: Town band Indians,
Mankato, Nasiampaa, and Upper Meda-
wakanton.
See Dorsey, Siouan Sociology, 15th
Kej). B. A. E., 1897; Long, Exped. St
Peter's R., 1824; Ind. Aff. Rep., 1847;
liainsey in Minn. Hist. Coll., i, 1872;
Neill, Hist. Minn., 1858. (j. o. d. c.t.)
Gens de Lac.— Pike, Kxpcd., 93, 1810. Oens De
Lai.— Schermerhorn (1812) in Mass. Hisl. Soc.Coll.,
2(1 s., n, 40, 1814 (misprint). Gens du Lac— Long,
Exped. St. Peter's R., i, 380, 1824. Mad-a-wakan-
toan.— Sweetser (1853) in Sen. Ex. Doe. 61, 33d
Cong., Ist «efe.M., 2, 1854. Madawakanton.— Many-
penny in H. R. Rep. 138, 33d Cong., Istsess., 10,
1854. lUnchokatou*.— Prise de Possession (1689)
in Margrv, Dec, v,34, 1883. ICandawakantons.—
Ind. Aff. Rep., 853, 1847. Mandawakanton Sioux.—
Ibid. Mandeouacantons.— Le Sueur (1700) in Mar-
gry, D6c., vi, 81, 1880. Mawtawbauntowaha.—
Carver, Trav., 60, 1778. lldawakontons.— Minn.
Hist. Soc. Coll., Ill, 86, 1880. Mdawakontonwaiu.—
Ibid., 84. M'day-wah-kaun-twaiiDakotas.— Ram-
sey, ibid., I, 45, 1872. ll'day-wah-kauntwauii
Sioux. —Si blev, ibid., 47. X'dajrwakantoni.— Ibid.,
Ill, 250,1880. ii'dasrwawkawntwawni.— Neill,Hist.
Minn., 144, note, 1858. Mdeiyedan.— Ashley, let-
ter to Dorsey, Jan. 1886. mde-wahantonwan.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes. i,248, 1851. ITdewakan-
ton.— Nicollet, Rep. on Upper Miss. R., map, 1843.
Mde-wa-kan-ton-wan.— Neill, Hist. Minn., 144,
note, 1858. KdewakaqtoQwan.— Riggs, Dakota
Gram, and Diet., vii, 1852. M'de-wakan-towwaiiB.
Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 78, 1850. M'de-
wakant* wan.— Ibid. Md-Wakans.— Peet in Am.
Anti(i., VIII. 304, 1886. Mdwakantonwana.— Riggs
in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., in, 126, 1880. Medagua-
kantoan.— Ramsey (1853) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 33d
Cong., 1st sess.,- 324. 1854. Medawah-Kanton.—
Maximilian, Trav.. 507, 1843. Med-a-wakan-toan.—
Sweetser in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 33d Cong., Ist sess.,
2. 1854. MedawakantoM.— Ind.Aff. Rep., 494, 1839.
Med-a-wa-kanton Sioux.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 495, 1838.
Kedawakantwan.— Parker, Minn. Handbk., 140,
1857. Me-da-we-con tong.— U. S. Ind. Treat., 368,
1826. MedaykantoaiiB.— Ramsey in Sen. Ex. Doc.
61, 33d Cong., 1st sess., 337, 1854. Med-ay-wah-
kawn-t'waron.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849,
78, 1850. Medaywakanstoan.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 18,
1851. Med-ay-wa-kan-toan.— U. S. Stat., x, 66,
18.53. Mcdaywokant'wani.— Pike quoted by Neill,
Hist. Minn., 288, 1858. Me-dc-wah-kan-toan.—
Sweetser in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 33d Cong., 1st sess.,
321, 1H51. Medewakantoans.— Sweetser in Sen.
Ex. Doc. -29. 32d Cong., 2d sess., 14, 1863. Medewa-
kanton».— Neill in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll.. i, 260,
1872. Mede-wakanf wans.— Ramsey in Ind. Aff.
Rep. 1849, 72,1850. Mediwankton8.—Keane in Stan-
ford. Compend., 621, 1878. Medwakantonwan.—
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., in, 190, 1880. Menchoka-
tonx,— Perrot (1689) quoted by Neill, Hist. Minn.,
144, 1858. Kenchokatouches. — Perrot (1689) in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., ii, pt. 2, 31, note, 1864.
Mencouacantons.— Relation of P^nicaut (1700) in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll.. in, 6, 1880. Mendawahkan-
ton.— Prescott (1847) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
II, 168, 1852. Men-da- wa-kan-ton.— Prescott, ibid.,
170. Mendeouacanton.— Le Sueur (1700) in Margry.
IK'C, VI, 86, 1886. KendeouaoantouB.— La Harpe
( 1700) in Shea, Early Voy., 104, 1861. Mendewacan-
tongs.— Schoolcraft, Trav., 307, 1821. Mende
WaSikan toan.— Long, E;xped. St Peter's R.. i, 878,
1824. Kende-Wakan-Toann.— Maximilian, Trav..
149, 1843 Mendouca-ton.— La Harpe (1700) in
French, Hist. Coll. La., in, 27, 186L Mendu-
wakanton.— Huebsehmann in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, vi, 707, 1867. MenowaKautong.— Boudinot,
Star in the Wast, 127, 1816. Kenowa Kontong.—
Famham, Trav., 32, 1843. MidewakantoBwaiia.-
Domenech, Deserts N. Am., ii, 26, 1860. Mia'-d
w&r'-car-ton.- Lewis and Clark, Discov., SO, 180
Kinokantongi.— Schoolcraft, Trav., 306, 182
Minowakanton.— Lewis and Clark^Exped., 1, 14
1814. Xinowa Kantong.— Brown, West. Oaz., 20
1817. Minoway-Kantong.— Schermerhom(1812)J
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., ii, 40, 1814. Xiaowi
Kautong.— Ibid, (misprint). Xinow Kantong.-
Schoolcraft, Trav., 286, 1821. Kundaywahkantoo.-
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, I, 303, 186
Kunday wawkantons.— Snelllng. Tales of N. W
231, 1830. O-man-eo.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1
141, 1862. 0-maum-«e.— Warren in Minn. Hist. So
Coll., V, 162, 1886. People of the Lake.— Lewis an
Clark, Exped., 146, 1814. Siou Kendeooaoanton.-
Le Sueur (1700) in Margry, D6c., vi, 80, 1886. Bioi
Xindawarcarton.— Lewis and Clark, Discov., 2
1806. Sioux of the River.— Seymour, Sketches
Minn., 133, 860. Siouxi of the Lakes.- U. 8. In
Treaties (1816) , 869, 1873. Win-de-wer-rean-toon."
Arrowsmith, map. N. Am. (1795), 1814.
Meamskinisht ( *porcupine-foot grove*]
A Tsimshian mission village founde
in 1889 and settled by the Kitksan. I
1897 the population was about 50 —Do
sey in Am. Antiq., xix, 280, 1897
Measurements. Among civilized peopU
previous to the introduction of the metr
system, linear measurements were di
rived mostly, if not exclusively, from th
human body, and although in later cei
uries these measurements became stan(
ardized, it is not long since they were a
determined directly from the huma
frame. It is still common, even for whit
men, in the absence of a graduated ruU
to compute the inch by the transvera
dimension of the terminal joint of th
thumb, and for women to estimate a yar
by stretching cloth from the nose to th
tips of the hngers— the arm being ei
tended and thrown strongly backward-
or to estimate an eighth of a yard by th
length of the middle finger. The use (
the span as a standard of lineal measui
is also still quite common. Within th
last 30 years it has been a custom fc
traders to sell cloth to Indians b
the natural yard or by the brace, an
although this measure on a trader of sma
stature might be much less than 3 feei
the Indians preferred it to the yardstici
Below is given a list of what may be calle
natural measures which are known t
have been employed by Indians. Som
of the larger measures have been i
general use among many tribes, whil
some of the smaller ones nave been use
by the Navaho and Pueblo shamans i
making sacrificial and other sacred objed
and in executing their dry-paintingi
Some are also employed by Pueblo wome
in making and decorating their pottery
Linearmeasures.—l, One finger widtB
the greatest width of the terminal joir
of the little finger in the palmar aspec
2. Two finger widths: the greatest widt
of the terminal joints of the first and sec
ond fingers held closely together, take]
in the palmar aspect. 3. Three finge
widths: the greatest width of the termina
ILL. 30]
MKCADAOUT MEDALS
829
ints of the first, second, and third tin-
irs, taken as alx)ve. 4. Four finger
idths: the width of the terminal jointH
' all foar fingers of one hand, taken un-
^r the sanie conditions. 5. The joint:
\e length of a single digital phalanx,
laally the middle phalanx of the little
[iger. 6. The palm: the width of the
)en palm, incluaingtheadducted thumb.
The finger stretch: from the tip of the
rat to the tip of the fourth finger, both
sgers being extended. 8. The span:
le same as our span, i. e., from the tip
the thumb to the tip of the index fin-
)r, both stretched as far apart as pos-
bie. 9. The great span: from the tip of
le thumb to the tip of the little finger,
1 the digits l)eing extended, while
le thumb and little finger are strongly
Iducted. 10. The cubit: from the point
the elbow to the tip of the extended
iddle finger, the arm being l)ent. 1 h
be short cubit: from the point of the
bow to the tip of the extended little
iser. 12. The natural yard: from the
iddle of the chest to the en<l of the
iddle finger, the arm being outstretched
terally at right angles with the body;
lis on a tall Indian equals 3 feet or more;
Qong some tribes the measure is taken
om the mouth to the tip of the middle
iger. 13. The natural fathom, or brace:
easured laterally on the outstretche<l
ma, across the cKest, from the tip of one
iddle finger to the tip of the other; this
twice the natural yard, or about 6 feet.
lie stature of white men usually equals
' exceeds this measure, while among
idians the contrary is the rule — the arm
the Indian being usually proportion-
ly longer than the arm of the white,
tiis standard was commonly adopted by
idian traders of the N. in former days.
[ley called it *' brace," a word taken
am the old French. There seems to l)e
) evidence that the foot was ever em-
oyed by the Indians as a standard of
lear measure, as it was among the
Dropean races; but the pace was em-
oved in determining distances on the
inace of the earth.
Circular measures. — 1. The grasp: an
^proximate circle formed by the thumb
id index finger of one hand. 2. The
Iger circle: tne fingers of t)oth hands
Hd so as to inclose a nearly circular
ace, the tips of the index fingers and
e tips ot the thumbs just touching. 3.
le contracted finger circle: like the
Iger circle but diminished by making
e first and second joints of one index
Iger overlap those of the other. 4. The
m circle: the arms held in front as if
dbracing the trunk of a tree, the tips of
e middle fingers just meeting.
Scales and weights were not known on
e western continent previous to the dis-
covery. There is no reconl of standards
of dry or liquid measure, but it is pn*!)-
able that vessels of uniform size may have
been ased as such. See Krchaufj*', and
the references thereunder. (\v. m.)
Mecadacat. An Indian village on the
coast of Maine, l)etweeu Penobscot and
Kennebec rs., in Abnaki territory, in
1616.
■acadacut— Smith (1629), VirKinia, li. 183. rt>pr.
1819. Keoadaout— Smith (161()) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 3d 8., 111,22, 1833. Mccaddacut— s?mith (1629),
Virginia, ii, 192, repr. 1819.
Meoastria. ^leutioned by Onate (Do<*.
Ined., XVI, 114, 1871) as a pueblo of the
Jemez in New Mexico in 1598. It can
not be identified with the pn^sent native
name of any of the ruined settlements in
the vicinitv of Jeniez. In another list by
Ofiate (ibid., 102), (.iuiainera and Ffa
are mentione<l. A comparison of the lists
shows the names to l)e greatly confused,
the mera (of (^uiamera) and /fa making a
contorte<l form of "Mecastrfa."
Meohemeton. A division of the Sisseton
Sioux, i>erhai>s the ^liakechakesa.
Machcmeton.— ("arte dea Poss. An^'l.. 1777. Keehe-
meton.— Del* Isle, map (170:^) in Nelll, Hist. Minn.,
1('>4, lUi^S. Keohemiton. — Anville, map of N. Am.,
1752.
Meohgachkamic. A former village, per-
haps l)elonging to the Unanii Dela wares,
probably near Ilackensack, N. J".
Mechgachkamic—DiM*. of 1649 in N. Y. D<k'. Col.
Hist., xni.25,lH81. Mochgeychkonk.— Doe. of 165ft,
ibid., 48 (identieal?).
Mechkentowoon. A tribe of the Mahi-
can confe<lenicy formerly living, accord-
ing to Ruttenber, on the w. bank of Hud-
son r. above (^atskill cr.*, X. Y. De I>aet
and early maps place them lower down
the stream. (j. m. )
Kachkentiwomi. — De Laet, Nov. Orb., 72, 1633.
Kechkentiwooin.— Map ai. 1614 in N. Y. Doe. Col.
Hist., I, la'ie. Kechkentowoon.— Wassenaar (ra.
1630) in RnttenlHjr. Tribes Hudwm R., 71, 1872.
Wecnkentowoons.— Knttenber, ibid., 86 (misprint).
Meoopen. An Algoncjuian village, in
1585, s. of All)einarle sd., near the month
of Roanoke r., N. C.
Keoopen.— Smith (1629). Virginia, i, map, repr.
1819. Moquopen.— Duteh map (1621) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., I, 1856.
Medals. From time immemorial loyalty
has l)een rewarded by the conf(»rring of
land and titles of nolnlity, by the per-
sonal thanks of the sovereign, the pre-
sentation of medals, and the bestowal of
knightly orders the insignia of which
were hung on the breast ot' the recipient.
With the Indian chief it was the same.
At first he was supplied with copies of his
own weapons, and then with the white
man's implements of war when he had lx»-
come accustomecl to their use. Brass
tomahawks especially were prt^st^nted to
the Indians. Tecumseh carried such a
tomahawk in his l)elt when he was killed
at the battle of the Thames, in Canada,
and his chief warrior, John Xaudee,
830
MEDALS
[B. A. ]
removed it and the silver belt buckle from
the body. There were also presented to
the Indian chiefs silver hat-bands, chased
and engraved with the royal arms; silver
gor^ts to be worn suspended from the
neck and having the royal arms and em-
blems of peace engraved upon them; and
silver belt buckles, many of which ex-
ceeded 3 in. in diameter. The potency
of the medal was soon appreciated as a
means of retaining the Indian's allegi-
ance, in which it played a most important
part. While gratifying the vanity of the
recipient, it ap|)ealed to him as an em-
blem of fealty or of chieftainship, and
in time had a place in the legends of the
tribe.
The earlier medals issued for presenta-
tion to the Indians of North America
have bei^ome extremely rare from various
causes, chief among which was the change
of government under which the Indian
may have been living, as each govern-
ment was extremely zealous in searching
out all medals conferred by a previous
one and substituting medals of'^its own.
Another cause has b^n that within recent
years Indians took their medals to the
nearest silversmith to have them con-
verted into gorgets and anmlets. After
the Revolution tbe United States replaced
the English medals with its own, which
led to the establishment of a regular series
of Indian peace medals. Many of the
medals presented to the North American
Indians were not dated, and in many
instances were struck for other purposes.
Spanish Medals. — t^rly Spanish mis-
sionaries also presented meclals to the
Indians; these are often found in graves
CATHOUO MEDAL FROM A MOUND IN ALEXANDER Ca, ILL.
in those i)ortions of the United States
once occupied by the Spanish. Several of
these medals were found at the old Cay-
uga mission in New York, established
in 1657 for the Huron refugees among
the Iroquois and discontinued 30 years
later. *'The medals are of a religious
character, and are supposed to have been
given, in recognition of religious zeal or
other service, by the early Catholic mJi
sionaries'* (Betts, p. 32). One of thee
medals is as follows:
1682. Obverse, the Virgin Marv, standing on
crescent and clouds, surrounded bv a rayed glon
in field 16St: legend, Nueatra.Sehora de Gkadk
lupe Ora Pro Nobis, Mexico. Reverse, bust of 8a
Francisco de Assisi in dress of a monk, a hal
above; legend, Francisco Ora Pro Nobis. Biai
and silver; size, l(g by li in.
In 1864 there was found at Prairie d
Chien, Wis., in an Indian grave, a silve
medal, now in possession of the WisooB
sin Historical Society, "supposed to hav
been given to Huisconsin, a Sauk and Fo:
chief" (Betts, p. 239). This was one c
the regular "service medals" awarded b;
Spain to members of her army.
Obverse, bust of king to left; legend, Ooarah
III Rey de Espafla edelas Indias, Reverse, withl
a cactus wreath, Par Merito. Silver; size, 2| in
with loop.
French Canadian Medals. — Theearli
est record of peace medals in connectio]
with the Canadian Indians is found ij
Canada Correspondence General, vol. i^
in which mention is made of **a Cao^
nawaga chief, November 27, 1670, wh
holds preciously a medal presented to hii
by the king." Leroux (p. 14) includes
medal caused to be struck by Cardini
Richelieu in 1631 for presentation toCani
dian I ndians. A large medal was issued !
France in commemoration of the reigi
ing family; this example proved so a
ceptable to the Indians that a series <
six, varying slightly in design and in si;
from 1 1^ to 3 1^ m. , was issued for present
tion to them. Very few of the origina
are now known to exist, but man^ p
strikes have been made from the dies i
the Mus^e Monetaire at Paris.
1693. Obverse, head of the king to right, la
reated; legend, Ludovicus Magnus Sex ChrUHa
issimns. Reverse, four busts in field; legen
Fdicitas Domus Augusta. Seren Dolph, Lwi, ,
Burg. Phid D. Card. D. BUur. M.D.OX. C.JJJ.
After the death of the Dolphin, in 171
the reverse type was changed, two fi]^
replacing the four busts of Louis, tl
Dauphin, and his two sons. Of this m<
only restrikes are now known.
171 -. Obverse, bust of king to right; h
Ludovicus XII 1 1, D. O. FR. NAV. REX.
verse, two Roman warriors; legend, HONOR
VIRTUS. Silver; bronze, size, 2\ in. i
In the succeeding rei^n a smaller med
of similar design was issued, bearing <
the obverse the head of the king to tl
right, draped and laureated; legen
Louis XV Hex Christianissirnus, A cO]
of this medal has been found with t
legend erased and George ///stamped]
its place (McLachlan, p. 9). Silv^
bronze; size, 2 in. ,
The General De Levi medal of 16?
and that of the first Intendant-General
Canada, Jean Varin, of 1683, though i
eluded by Leroux (p. 15) among t
lULL. 30]
MEDALS
831
jeace medals, are excluded by Betts and
)ther writers. Leroux (p. 17) figures
iie French Oswego medal of 1758 as be-
onffing to the peace medal series. "As
nedals were freely distributed about
;his time, some of them may have been
>]aced in Indian hands'' (Beauchamp,
>. 64).
1758. Obverse, head of king to left, nude and
lair flowing; legend, Ludovicus XV Orbis Im-
teralor; In exemie, 1758» Reverse, In field four
6rt»; l^end, Wesel, Ostoeao, Port Mohan: in ex-
iiKue, &pung. Sti, Davidis Arce et Solo Equaia.
Hlver; brass; size, \\ in.
British Medai^.— The earliest medals
>re8ented to American Indians by the
English colonists are those known as the
?amunkey series. By Act 38, T^ws of
k^imnia, in the 14th year of King Charles
I, March, 1661 (see Hening's Statutes,
I, 186), there were cause<l to be made,
)ossibly in the wlony, "silver and plate^l
>laques to be worn by the Indians when
r'isiting the English settlements. ' ' They
vere plain on the reverse, in order to
)ermit the engraving of the names of the
jhiefs of the Indian towns.
1670. Obverse, bust of king to right; legend in
>uter circle, Charles II, King qf England, i^cotland,
F)rance, Ireland and Virginia; the center of the
liield a slightly convex disk bearing the legend,
he royal arms, and in one corner a tobacco plant.
Sncircled by ribbon of the Garter, below the disk
n an oval surface, is the inscnption: The Queen
/ Pamaunkee: above the disk a crown. Reverse,
>lain, with 5 rings attached for suspension. Sil-
rer; copper; oval; size, 4 by 6 in.
1670. Obverse, same as last: legend. Ye King of
— . Reverse, a tobacco plant; legend, Piomock.
Hlver; copper; oval; size, 4 by 6 in.
In a proposal made by Robert Hunter,
»ptain-general, etc., to" the chief of the
Hve Nations^ at Albany, Aug. 16, 1710,
luring the reign of Queen Anne, it is re-
iordea: '* Your brothers who have been
n England and have seen the great Queen
ind her court, have no doubt informed
l^ouiiow vain and groundless the French
coasting has been all along. Her Majesty
las sent you as pledges o1 her protection
i medal for each nation, with ner royal
effigies on one side and the last gained
Mttle on the other. She has sent you
ler picture, in silver, twenty to each
lation, to be given to the chief warriors,
o be worn about their necks, as a token
hat they should always be in readiness
o fight under her banner against the
iommon enemy. '' This was probably the
ilver medal struck in 1709 in commemo-
■ation of the battle and capture of Tour-
lay by the British.
1710. Obverse, bust of Queen Anne to left, hair
K>und in pearls, lovelock on the right shoulder;
Q gown, and mantle on the nght shoulder, leg-
nd, ANNA D. Q. MAQ. BR I. ET HIB. REG;
»elow, J. C. rjohn Crocker j Reverse, Pallas
eated, to nght, resting her left hand upon a
}orgian shield and holding in her right hand
spear, mtually crowned, near her a pile of
arms and flags, a town in the distance: legend,
Tumace Erpurgato; in exergue, M.D.C.C.IX.
Gold; silver; size, 1^, in.
A series of six medals was issued dur-
ing the reigns of George I and George II,
of similar design, in l)rass and copper;
sizes, li to IJ in. " The medals were not
dated, and it is known that the later
Georges used the same design'* (Beau-
champ, p. 27).
1714. Obverse, bust of king to right, laureated,
with flowing hair, in armor, draped; legend,
George King of Great Britain. Reverse, an In-
dian at right drawing his bow on a deer, stand-
ing at left on a hill, sun above, to right above
tree one star, to left above Indian three stars.
Brass; size, 1| in., with loon for suspension.
17f>3. Obverse, bust of king to left, laureated;
legend. Georgius II, I). G. MAG. BR I. FRA.
ET HIB. REX, F. I). Reverse, the royal arms,
within the (Jarter, surmounted hv h crovn and a
lion; upon ribbon, below, DIEUETMON DROIT.
Silver, cast and chased; size, II in., with loop and
ring.
The last was one of 80 medals brought
from England in 1758 by Sir Dan vers
Osborne, governor of NewYork, for pre-
sentation to friendly Indians of the Six
Nations. The medals were provided with
broad scarlet ribbons (Hist. Mag., Sept.
1865, p. 85; Betts, p. 177).
In July, 1721, the governor of Penn-
sylvania presente<l to the Seneca chief,
Ghosont, a gold coronation medal of
George I, charging him "to deliver this
piece into the hands of the first man or
greatest chief of the Five Nations, whom
vou call Kannygoodt, to be laid up and
kept as a token of friendship between
them'* (Hawkins, ir, 426).^
1721. Obverse, bust of king to rieht. laureated.
hair long, and in scale armor, lion's head on
breast and mantle; legend, Georgius. D. O. MAO.
BR I. FR. ETHIB. REX.; on truncation, E. Han-
nibal, Reverse, the king seated, to right, be-
neath a canopy of state, is being crowned by
Britannia, who rests her hand upon a shield; in
exergue. INAVGVRATU, Oct.yfDCCXlIII.
The following medal seems to have
been a trader's token or store card, possi-
bly given to the Indians to gain their
good will:
1757. Obverse, a trader buving skins from an
Indian; legend, The Red Sfan Came to Elton
Daily. Reverse, a deer lying beneath a tree; leg-
end, Skins bought at Eltonn; in exergue, 1757
(Am. Jour. Numismat., vii. 90). Copper, size,
If in.
The first In<lian peace medal manufac-
tured in America is thought to have been
the following. It was presented by The
Friendly Association for the Regaining
and Preserving Peace With the Indians
by Pacific Means, a society composed
largely of Quakers. The dies were en-
graved by Edward Duftield, a watch and
clock maker of Philadelphia, and the
medals were struck by Joseph Richard-
son, a member of the society. Many
restrikes have been issued.
1757. Obverse, bust of the king to right, hair long
and laureated; legend, Georgius II Dei Gratia.
832
MEDALS
[B. A. E.
Reverse, Indian and white man seated, a council
fire between them; white man offers calumet and
Indian extends hand for it; above Indian a rayed
8un, back of white man a tree; legend, IMits Ixmh
to the MostnUih who Blessed our Fntherswith Peace:
in exergue, 1757. Silver; copper; pewter, size,
11 in.
INDIAN PEACE MEDAL OF 1757
On the cai)ture «»f Moiitn'al by Sir Jef-
frey AinherHt, Sept. <S, 17H0, an interesting
series of medals, known as the conquest
medals, was issued. McLa(;hlan says they
**were evidently made in America, and
presented to thelroquoisandOnondagas,
and other chiefs who assisted in the cam-
paign." To each of the 23 chiefs, though
thevdid but little fighting, was presented
a medal by Sir William Johnson, who, in
his diary, under date of July 21, 1761,
says: ''I then delivered the medals sent
me l)v the Cieneral for those who went
with us to Canada last year, being twenty-
three in nu"ml)er." Beauchamp (p. 61)
says: "In 1761 Johnson had similar
medals for theOneidas, but none of them
have been found."
1760. Obverst' view of a town, with bastions, on
a river front, ti4b church spires, island in river; in
foreground, to left, a bastion with flag of St George;
in exergue, in an incused oval, 1). C. F.; this side
is cast and chased. Reverse, in field engraved,
Montreal, remainder plain for insertion of n^me
and tribe of the recipient. Silver; size, l\l in.
Pewter; size, IJi"-
Beauchamp (p. 66) says: "Two medals,
relating to the capture of Montreal and
conquest of Canada, seem more likely to
have been given by Johnson to the In-
(iians in 1761. As the two meilals have
Indian syml)ols, and one Amherst* s name,
and that of ^lontreal, they seem to suit
every way Johnson's lavish distribution
of medals at Otsego, when sent by his
leader."
17()1. Obverse, a laureated nude figure, typify-
ing the St Lawrence, to right, reclining, right
arm resting on the prow of a galley, paddle In
left hand, a beaver climbing up his left leg;
in background a standard inscribed Amherst
within a wreath of laurel, surmounted by a lion.
In exergue, a shield with fleur-de-lis; above, a
tomahawk, bow, and quiver; legend, Conqueat of
Canudo. Reverse, a female figure, to right, seated
beneath a pine tree; an eagle with extended
wings standing on a rock; before the female a
shield of France, with club and tomahawk;
legend, Montreal Taken, MDCCLX: in exergue,
Soe. Promotinq Arts and Commerce. Silver; size,
U i". ' . ^.
1701. Obverse, head of Kine George, to right,
nude, with flowing hair, laureated; legend,
(teoroe If. Kinq. Reverse, female figure seated
beneath a pine tree, to left, weeping, typical of
Canada; behind her a beaver climbing up a bank;
legend, Canada Subdued; in exergue, MuCCLX.;
below, S. P. A. C. Silver; bronze; size, 1| in.
To commemorate the marriage ol
(ieorge III and Queen Charlotte a small
special medal was struck, in 1761, for
general distribution to insure the alle-
giance of the savages in the newly ac-
quired i)rovince (McLachlan, p. 13).
1761. Obverse, bust of king and queen facing
each other; above, a curtain with cords and tas-
sels falling midway between the heads. Reverse,
the royal arms, with ribbon of the Garter, and
motto on ribbon below, Dieu et Mon Droit. 811
ver; size, li in., pierced for suspension.
The following series of medals is sup-
posed to have l)een struck for presenta-
tion to Indian chiefs in Canada at the
close of the French and Indian wars.
There were live in the series, differing in
size and varying slightly in design; they
were fcjrmed of two shells joined together;
one of lead and others of i>ewter, with
tracings of gilding, have been found.
1762. Obverse, youthful bust of king, to right,
in armor, wetiring ribbtm of the Garter, hair in
double curl over ear; legend, Dei Gratia. Re
verse, the royal arms encircled by the ribbon ol
the Garter, surmounted by a crown, supported bj
the lion and the unicorn ; legend, Hont Soit qu\
Mai V Pense: on a ribbon below the motto, Dfeti
et Mon Droit. Silver; size, U by S\ in.
In 17()3 Pontiac rebelled against British
rule, and the Government entered intc
treaty with the remaining friendly chiefs.
A council was held at Niagara m 1764,
at which time the series of three medaU
known as the ** Pontiac conspiracy
medals" was presented to the chiefe anc
and principal warriors.
1764. Obverse, bust of king, to left, in armoi
and in very high relief, long hair tied with rib-
bon, laureated; legend, Georgius III. D.A.M,
BRI. FRA. KT HIB. REX. F. D. Reverse, an
officer and an Indian seated on a rustic bench in
foreground; on the banks of a river, to right
three houses on a rocky point; at junction o
river with ocean, two ships under full sail. Th<
Indian holds in his left hand a calumet, with hi
right grasps the hand of the officer; at left o
Indian, in the background, a tree, at right a
mountain range; legend, Happy While United; in
exergue, 176U. In field, stamped in two small in
cused (tircles, D. C. F. and N York. Silver; size
3,»g by 3| in,; loop, a calumet and an eagle'
wing.
In 1765 a treaty was made with th<
British and Pontiac, and his chiefs were
presented by Sir William Johnson, a1
Oswego, with the medals known as **thc
lion and wolf medals." A large numbei
of these were distributed, and two reverse
dies have been found. The design repre"
sent«« the expulsion of France from Can<
ada (see Park man, Pontiac CJonspiracyj
chap.xxxi; Betts,p. 238; Leroux, p. 156
McLachlan, p. 13).
1765. Obverse, bust of king to right, in armor
wearing the ribbon of the Garter; legend. Geor
gius III Dei Gratia. Reverse, to left, the Britial
lion reposing under a tree; to right, a snarlini
wolf; behind lion, a church and two houses*^ be
hind wolf, trees and bushes. Silver; size, 2| in.
BULL. 30 J
MEDALS
833
A large bod^^ of Indians assembled in
general council at Montreal, Aug. 17,
1778, representing the Sioux, Sauk,
Foxes, Menominee, Winnebago, Ottawa,
Potawatoini, an<l ChipiHJwa. It is gen-
erally supposed that at tliis time the
presentation of the medals took place, in
consideration of the assistance Tendered
the British in the campaigns of Kentucky
and Illinois and during the War of the
Revolution. (Jen. Ilaldimand, com-
mander in chief of the British forces in
Canada, al^^o gave a certificate with each
medal (see Hoffman in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
1896; Betts, p. 284-286).
1778. Obverse, bust of king to right, wearing
ribbon of the Garter. Reverse, the royal armK,
surrounded by ribkwn of the Garter and motto,
8urniounte<l by a crown, supiwrted by the lion
and the unicorn; at bottom ribbon, with motto,
Dieu et Mon Droit; Hhield of pretenne crowne<l.
Silver: size, 2i in., with loop for suspension.
The following medalH were presented,
until al)out tlie time of the war of 1812,
to Indian chiefs for meritorious servict*,
and continued in use possibly until re-
place<l by those of 1814 (Leroux, p. 157):
1775. Obverse, bust of the king, to left, with
hair curled, wearing ribbon of the (.Jarter; legend,
Gforgiws III Dei <iratia. Reverse, the royal arms
with supporters;, surmounted by crown and rib-
bon of the (iarter; below, ribbon with motto,
Dieu et Mon Droit. Silver; slze,2j in., with loop
for suspension.
17M. Obverse, bust of king to ri^ht. in armor,
wearing ribbon of the Garter, hair long, cloak
over shoulders; two laurel branches from bottom
of medal to height of shoulders of bust; legend,
Qeorgias III Dei (traiia: in exergue, 179U. Re-
verse, on plain field, the royal arms with sup-
porters, surmounted by helmet and crest, encir-
cled by ribbon of the Garter, and below ribbon
and motto. Silver; size, li in.
At the close of the war of 1812, the
Government, desirous of marking its ap-
freciation of the services render^ by its
ndian allies, besides making other pres-
ents and grants of land, caused the fol-
lowing medal, in three sizes, to l)e struck
in silver for presentation to the chiefs and
principal warriors (Leroux, p. 158) :
1814. Obverse, bust with older head of king to
right, laurcated, draped in an ermine mantle,
secured in front with a large bow of ribbon,
wearing the collar nnd jewel of St George; legend,
Oeorpius III Dei O rutin Britanniarum Bex F. D.;
under bust, T. Wuon, Jun. S. Reverse, the royal
arms of Great Britain with shield of pretense of
Hanover, surmounted by a crown and crested
helmet, all cncirclc<l by ribbon of the Garter and
fnipporters, below a ribbon with motto, Dien et
Mon Droit; above ribbon, a rose, thistle, and
shamrock; behind helmet (m both sides, a display
of acanthus leaves; in exergue, 18U. Silver;
size, 2| to 4H in.
The following medal, in three sizes,
was struck in 1840 for participants in the
early treaties of the Queen's reign. It is
possible that it may have been presented
also to the Indians of Lower Canada who
took no part in the abortive uprising of
1837 (McLachlan, p. :^; leroux, p. 161):
1840. Obverse, bust of Queen, to right, crowned;
legend, Victoria Dei (i rat in Britanniarum Bcffina
F. D.; under neck W. Wyon, R. A. Reverse,
arms of Great Britain, surmounted by crown and
crested helmet, encircled by ribbon of the Garter,
supported by the lion and the unicorn; below,
ribbon with motto, Dieu et Mon Droit, the rose
and thistle; in exergue. l%0. Silver; sizes, '2| to
4Ain.
The medal known as the Ashlnirton
treaty medal was given through Lord
Ashburton, in 1842, tc the Micmac and
other eastern Indians for services as guards
and hunters, and assistance in laying out
the boundary l)etween the United States
and Canada.
1842. Obverse, bust of queen in an inner den-
tilated circle, garland of roses around psyche
knot; under bust, /?. Wyon; no legend. Reverse,
arms of Great Britain in an inner circle, sur-
mounted by a crowned and creste<l helmet, encir-
cled by the ribbon of the Garter; legend. Vidoria
Dei Gratia Britanniarum Regina Fid, Dei. Rib-
Ixm in lower field ba(>ke<1 by the rose and thistle
(Betts, p. ir>9). Silver; size, 2,"g in.
In 1848 the Peninsular War medal was
issued, to be given to any officer, non-
commissioned officer, or soldier who had
participated in any battle or siege fnmi
1793 to 1814. In general orders, dated
Horse Guards, June 1, 1847, were inclu<leil
the battles of Chateaugay, Oct. 26, 1818,
and of Clirystlers Farm, Nov. 11, 1818,
covering the invasion of Canada by the
American army in 1818. **The me<lal
was also conferred upon the Indians, the
name of the l)attles engraved on clasps,
and the name of the recipient on the
e<lge of the medal, with title of warrior*'
(Leroux, p. 177).
1S48. Obverse, bust of the queen to right, crown-
ed; legend, Victoria Regina; below bust, l%8, and
\V. Wyon, R. A. Reverse, figure of the queen in
n>yal robes, standing on a dais, cntwning with a
wreath of laurel the Duke of Wellington, who is
kneeling before her ; by side of dais a crouching
lion; in exergue, 1703-18U. Silver; size, 2i in.,
with loop for suspension.
The Prince of Wales on his visit to
Canada in 1860 was n^c^eivwi by Indians
in full ceremonial dress. Eaitli chief was
presented with a large silver medal, while
the warriors received smaller me<lals.
This me<ial is known as tlie Prince of
Wales meilal.
I860. Obverse, head of queen to right, undrajH
ed and crowned; legend, \ tctorin D. (J. Regina F. D.
In lower right-hand field, the three feathers and
motto; lower left-hand fleUl, lUfiO. Reverse, the
royal arms surmounted >>y a helmet, crown, and
lion, with ribbon of the (Jarter, and cm the ribbon
below, Dieu et Mon Droit; at back, roses, sham-
rock, and thistle; in exergue, IHfiO, Silver: size,
2 in., with loop for suspension.
In 1860, when the(iovernment ha<l ac-
quired the lands of the Jludson*s Bay
Company's territory and after the extinc-
tion of the Indian land titles, the follow-
ing medal wa« i)resented to the Indians
under Treaty No. 1. In the Rei>ort of
the Commissioners it is stated; "In ad-
dition each Indian received a <lress, a flag,
and a medal as marks of distinction."
These medals at first were not struck for
this occasion.
Bull. 80—05-
834
MEDALS
( n. A. E.
1860. Obverse, head of the queen to right,
crowned; legend. Victoria Regina; under bust, J.
S. and B. Wyon, S C. Reverse, two branches of
oak, center field plain for the engraving of name
and tribe of recipient. Silver; size, 3A in.
The very large Ck)nfederation medal of
1867, with an extra rim soldered on it,
was used in 1872 for Treaty No. 2. It
was presented to the Indians'subsequent
to the acquisition of the Hudson's Bay
Company's territory, at which time the In
dian titles were extmguished. ** Twenty-
five were prepared, but found so cum-
bersome no more were iL«ed" (Leroux,
p. 219).
1872. Obverse, bust of queen to right, within
an inner circle having milled edge ground, with
veil and necklace: legend. Dominion of Canada;
below, Chi^s Medal 1872; below bust, S. Wijon.
Reverse, in inner circle Britannia seated with
lion and four female figures, representing the
four original provinces of the Canadian confed-
eration: legend, Jni^enatus et Patrius Vigor Canada
Jnatnurata, 1867; in outer circle, Indians of the
North West Territories. Silver; bronze; size, 3| in.
The following
medal was
struckespecially
to replace the
large and inar-
tistic medal last
described, and
was in tended for
presentation at
future treaties:
1873. Obverse,
head of queen to
right, crowned with
veil and necklace,
draped;legend, Vic-
toria D. G. Briit.
REG. F. D.; below
bust, J. S. Wyon.
Reverse, a general
officer in full uni-
form, to right.
THE RED JACKET" MEDAL, DATED 1793
grasping the hand of an Indian chief who wears
a feather headdress and leggings; pipe of peace
at feet of figures: in background, at back of In-
dian, severw wigwams; back of officer, a half sun
above horizon; legend, Indian Treaty No. , on
lower edge, 187-. Silver; size, 3 In., with loop for
suspension.
A series of three medals was struck by
the Hudson's Bay Company for presenta-
tion to the Indians of the great North-
west for faithful services. These were
engraved by G. H. Kuchler of the Bir-
mingham mint, 1790 to 1805.
1793. Obverse, bimt of king to left, long hair and
draped; legend, Qeorgius III D. G. Bruanniari(m
Rex Fidei. Def.; under bust, G. H. K. Reverse,
arms of the Hudson's Bay Company: argent, a
cross gules, four beavers proper, to the left, sur-
mounted by a helmet and crest, a fox supported
by two stags; motto on ribbon. Pro Pelie Cutem
(Leroux, p. 59). Silver; sizes, ijg by 3 in.
Medals of the United States. — The
earliest known Indian medal struck
within the United States is that of 1780,
as follows:
1780. Obverse, arms of Virginia; legend, Rd)el-
lion to Tyrants is Obedience to God. Reverse, an
officer and an Indian seated under a tree, the In-
dian holding a calumet in his hand; in the back-
ground, a sea on which are three ships, in the
middle-ground. a rocky point and a house; legend,
Happy niiile United. Silver; ])ewter; size, 2 J in.;
loop, a calumet and an eagle's wing.
The pewter medal presented by the
Government to the Indians rei)resented
at the Ft Hannar treaty in Ohio, in 1789,
bears on the obverse the bust of Wash-
ington with full face, and on tbe reverse
the clasped hands and crossed calumet
and tomahawk, with the date 1789, and
legend, Frinidshiity the Pipe of Peace. The
tribes present at the treaty were the Ot-
tawa, Delawares, Hurons, 8auk, Pota-
watomi, and Chippewa.
Of the early United States medals pos-
sibly the most interesting is that known
as the Red Jacket medal, presented to
this celebrated Seneca ))y Washington at
Philadelphia in 179?. This was one of
several similar medals, one of which is
dated 1793. Of it I^ubat says: "The
medals were
made at the
UnittHl iStates
Mint when Dr
Rittenhousewas
director, 1792-
1795." Seei?6d
Jnrket.
1792. Obverse,
Washington in uni-
form, ImreheHded,
facing to the right,
presenting a pipe to
an Indian chief,
who i.s .smoking it;
the Indian is stand-
ing, and has a
large medal sus-
pended from his
neck. On the left
is a pine tree, at
its foot a toma-
hawk: in the background, a farmer ])low-
ing: in exergue, George Wnahimjton Presi-
dent 1792— aW engraved. Reverse, nrms and
cre.st of the United States on the breast of
the eagle, in the right talon of which is
an olive branch, in the left a sheaf of arrows,
in its beak a ribl)on with the motto E IHu-
ribus Vnnm; above, a glory breaking through
the clouds and surrounded by 13 stars. Size,
6 J by 4 1 in.
In the (Ireenville treaty of 1795, l>e-
tween the United States and representa-
tives of the Hurons, Delawares, Ottawa,
Chippewa, Potawatomi, Sauk, and other
tribes, a part of the function, as usual,
involved the presentation of peace medals.
The medal in this case was a fa^'simile of
the oval Red Jacket medal, in silver, en-
graved and chased, with a change in the
date to 1795. Size, 4 by « in. As there
were many signers, a considerable num-
ber of these medals must have been dis-
tributed.
During the second administration of
Washin^n, in 1796, there waa issued a
series of four medals, in silver and bronze,
called *' the Season medals," which Snow-
BULL. 301
MEDALS
835
den fp. 95) states were Indian peace
medals. These are as follows:
1796. No. 1. Obverse, a shepherd with staff in left
hand, and a cow, two sheep, and a lamb in fore-
eround; in background, a hill, tree, and farm-
nouse with open door, in which two persons are
seen; on base, C. H. Kuchler, F.; in exergue, V. S. A.
Reverse, legend in five parallel line<9, Second
Presidency of George Washington MDCCXCVI,
within a wreath of olive branches; in bow, the
letter if. Size, 1 J in.
No. 2. Obverse, interior of a room; in back-
ground, a woman; in foreground, a woman spin-
ning, at left a child guarding a cradle, on nght
an open fireplace; on base, C. II. K. F.; in ex-
eigue, U.S. A. Reverse, same as No. 1.
wo. 3. Obverse, in foreground, farmer sowing;
in background, a farmhouse and a man plowing;
on base, Kuchler; in exergue, U. S. A. Reverse,
same as No. 1.
No. 4. Obverse, bust of Washington in uniform,
to left, in a wreath of laurel; legend. In War
Enemies. Reverse, bust of Franklin, to left, in
wreath of laurel; legend. In Peace Friends. Tin;
size, I in.
"Of the medals taken along and of
which use was made by the explorers
[Lewis and Clark] there were three sizes,
or grades, one, the largest and preferred
one, * a medal with the likeness of the
President of the
United States';
the second, *a
medal represent-
ing some domes-
tic animals'; the
third, * medals
with the impres-
sion of a farmer
sowing grain'. I
have round in
*The Northwest
Coast,' by James
G. Swan, a cut of a medal of the third
class, but I have seen no representa-
tion of the second class. The third class
medal was made of pewter. These med-
als were given to chiefs only" (Wheeler,
Trail of Lewis and Clark, L39-140).
The following were struck espei'ially for
presentation to Indian chiefs, and had
their inception, Apr. 20, 1786, when Rep-
resei^tative McKean moved "that the
Board of the Treasury ascertain the num-
ber and value of the medals received by
the Commission appointed to treat with
4he Indians, from tne said Indians, and
have an equal number with the arms of
the United States, made in silver and re-
turned to the chiefs, from whom they
were received. ' ' The result was the final
adoption of a series of medals, each bear-
ing on the obverse the bust of a Presi-
dent, and on the reverse a symbol of
peace. This series began with the ad-
ministration of President Jefferson. The
John Adams medal was made many years
after his administration, and thougb not
so considered at first, it is now re^rded
as included in the series. At the time of
the first issue, however, a die was made
for the obverse of the Adams medal.
The reverse used was that of the smaller
Jefferson medal ; a few were struck in soft
metal, which are now exceedingly rare.
Obverse, bust of president to right, clothed, hair
in curls and cue; legend, JoAn Adanis, Prcs. V. S.
A.: on tnmcation, I^onard. Reverse, two hands
clasi)ed, on cuff of one three stripes and as many
buttons with displayed eagle; the other wrist has
a bracelet with spread-eaffle; legend. Peace and
Friendship, and crossed calumet and tomahawk.
The medal of Adania.no w used is prac-
tically the same, except the arrangement
of the face, and the l^end, John Adams,
President of the Vnited States; in exergue,
A. I). 1707; in truncation, Phrst. Re-
verse, the name as last. Bronze ; size, 2 in.
The Jefferson medal is as follows:
Obverse, bust of president to right; legend, Th.
Jefferstm, President of the V. S. A. D. 1801. Re-
verse, same as last. Silver and bronze; sizes, 4
in., 2f in., 2 in.
The medals that followed were the same
in design, metal, and size, with the names
of the respective Presidents, until the ad-,
ministration of Millard Fillmore, in 1850,
when the reverse* was entirely changed,
as follows:
An Indian in war
dress and a pioneer
in foreground, the
latter leaning on a
plow; to right a hill,
incenterbackground
a river and a sailing
boat; tolefttwocows
beyond a farmhouse;
American flag back
f t he figures; legend,
Labor, Virtue, Honor;
in exergue, J. Wilson^
F. Silver and bronze;
size, 3 in.
During the next two administrations
this type was retained, but in 1862, dur-
ing the administration of Abraham Lin-
coln, another change in the reverse was
made:
In field, an Indian plowing, children plajring at
ball, a hill and a log cabin and a churcn: a river
with boats and ships in background; in an outer
circle, following curve of medal, an Indian scalp-
ing another; below, an Indian woman weeping,
a quiver of arrows with bow and calumet. Silver
and bronze: size, 2? in.
The reverse wa.s again change<l during
the administrati<m of Andrew Johnson,
as follows:
Figure of America clasping the hand of an
Indian in war dress, before a monument sur-
mounted by a bust of George Washington; at feet
of Indian are the attributes of savage life; at feet
of America those of civilization. Silver and
bronze; size, 2f in.
The medal issued during the adminis-
tration of President Grant was entirely
different:
Obverse, bast of president within a wreath of
laurel; legend, Unitrd States of America, Liberty,
Justice and Equality: below, Jjct us hare peace, a
calumet and a branch of laurel. Reverse, a globe
resting on implements of industry with the Bible
above and rays behind it; legend. On earth peace,
good will toward men.
THE JEFFERSON MEOAL OF 1801
836
MEDFIELD MEDICINE AND MEDICINE-MEN
I B. A. E.
In 1877, during the administration of
President Hayes, change was made to an
oval medal:
Obverse, t)u«t of president to right, nude; leg-
end, Rutherford B. Hayes, President of the United
States, 1877. Reverse, ngure of a pioneer with ax
in left hand and pointing with right to a cabin
in right background, before which a woman is
seated with a child in her lap; in middle back-
ground, a man plowing, a mountain beyond, fig-
ure of an Indian in full wardress facing pioneer,
to right a tree, above Jn ravs Pecux; in exergue,
crossed calumet and tomanawk within wreath.
Silver; bronze; size, 2| by ^ in.
No change was made in size or type
until the administration of Benjamm
Harrison, when the old rrund form of
medal was resumed:
Obverse, bust of president to right, draped;
legend, Benjamin Harrison, President of the United
States, 1889. Reverse, two hands clasped, crossed
calumet and tomahawk: legend, Peace and
Friendship. Sizes, 3 in., 2^ in., 2 in.
This medal was continued to the ad-
ministration of President Roosevelt.
The issuance of peace medals was not
confined to the governments, as the vari-
ous fur companies also presented to In-
dian chiefs medals of various kinds and
in various metals, as, for example, the
medals of the Hudson's Bay Company
from 1790 to 1805, above described. The
Chouteau Fur Company, of St Louis,
caused to be given by its agents in the
N. \V. the following:
Obverse, bust of Pierre Chouteau, to left,
clothed; legend, Pierre Chouteau, Jr., <fr Co., Up-
per Missouri Outfit. Reverse, in field, crossed
tomahawk and calumet, and claspea hands;
l^end, Peace and Friendship, 18US. Silver; size,
3|in.
Consult Beauchamp, Metallic Orna-
ments of the New York Indians, 1903;
Betts, American Colonial History Illus-
trated by Contemporaneous Medals, 1894;
Carr, Dress and Ornaments of Certain
American Indians, 1897; Carter, Medals of
the British Army, 1861; Catalogue du
Mus^e Monetaire, 1833; Clark, Onondaga,
1849; Fisher, Americ^anMedalsof the Rev-
olution, in Mass. Hist. Soc.Coll., 3d s., vi;
Halsey, Old New York Frontier, 1901;
Hawkins, Medallic Illustrations of British
History; Hayden, Silver and Copper
Medals, in Proc. Wyo. Hist, and Geol.
Soc, II, pt. 2, 1886; Irwin, War Medals,
1899; Leroux, Medaillier du Canada,
1888; McLachlan in Canadian Antiq.
and Numismat. Jour., 3d s., ii, 1899;
Wheeler, Trail of Lewis and Clark, 1900;
Miner, History of Wyoming Valley, 1845;
0*Callaghan, Documentary History of the
State of New York, 1856-87; Penhallow,
Historv of the W^ars of New England,
1824; 'Pinkerton, Medallic Histoi^ of
England, 1790; Snowden, Medalsof Wash-
inj^n in the U. S. Mint, 1861.
(p. E. B.)
Xedfield. In 1677 there was a settle-
ment of Christian Indians (perhaps
Nipmuc) at this place, in Norfolk co.,
Mass. — Gookin ( 1677) in Brake, Bk.Inds.,
bk. 2, 115, 1848.
Medicine and Medicine-men. Med-
icine is an agent or influence employed
to prevent, alleviate. Or cure some patho-
logical condition or its symptoms. The
scope of such agents among the Indians
was extensive, ranging, as among other
primitive peoples, from magic, prayer,
torce of suggestion, and a multitude of
symbolic and empirical means, to actual
and more rationally used remedies.
Where the Indians are in contact with
whites the old methods of combating
physical ills are slowly giving way to the
(jurative agencies of civilization. The
white man in turn has adopted from
the Indians a number of valuaole medic-
inal plants, such as cinchona, jalapa, hy-
drastis, etc.
In general the tribes show many sim-
ilarities in regard to medicine, but the
actual agents employed differ with the
tribes and localities, as well as with in-
dividual healers. Ma^c, prayers, songs,
exhortation, suggestion, ceremonies,
fetishes, and certain specifics and me-
chanical processes are employed only by
the medicine-men or medicine- women;
other specific remedies or procedures are
proprietary, generally among a few old
women in the tribe; while nian^^ vegetal
remedies and simple manipulations are
of common knowledge ina^iven locality.
The employment of ma^c consists m
opposing a supposed malign influence,
such as that of a sorcerer, spirits of the
dead, mythic animals, etc., by the super-
natural power of the healer's fetishes and
other means. Prayers are addressed to
l)enevolent deities and spirits, invoking
their aid. Healing songs, consisting m
prayers or exhortations, are sunp. Ha-
rangues are directed to evil spirits sup-
posed to cause the sickness, and often are
accentuated by noises to frighten such
spirits away. Suggestion is exercised in
many ways directly and indirectly. Cur-
ative ceremonies usually combine all or
most of the agencies mentioned. Some of
them, such as Matthews describes among
the Navaho, are very elaborate, prolong-
ed, and costly. The fetishes usea are pe-
culiarly shaped stones or wooden objects,
lightning-riven wood, feathers, claws,
hair, figurines of mythic animals, repre-
sentations of the sun, of lightning, etc.,
and are supposed to embody a mysteri-
ous power capable of preventing disease
or of counteracting its effects. Mechan-
ical means of curing consist of rubbing,
pressure with the hands or feet, or wim
a sash or cord (as in labor or in painful
affections of the chest) , bonesetting, cut-
ting, cauterizing, scarifying, cupping (by .
BULL. 30]
MEDICINE AND MEDICINE-MP:N
837
sacking), blood-letting, poulticing, clyu-
mata, sweat bath, 8U(*king of snake poison
or abscesses, c^ounter irritation, tootii pull-
ing, bandaging, etc. Dieting and total
amtinence from food were forms of treat-
ment in vo^ue in various localities. Veg-
etal medicines were, and in some tribes
still are, numerous. Some of these are
employed by reason of a real or fancied
resemblance to the part affected, or as
fetishes, because of a supposed mythical
antagonism to the cause of the sickness.
Thus, a plant with a worm-like stem may
be given as a vermifuge; one that has
many hair-like processes is used among
the Hopi to cure baldness. Among the
Apache the sacred tule pollen known as
ha-dn-tin is given or applied because of its
supposed supernatural beneficial effect.
Other plants are employed as remedies
simply for traditional reasons, without
any formulated opinion as to their modes
of action. Finally, all the tril)es are
familiar with and employ cathartics and
emetics; in some cases also diaphoretics,
diuretics, cough medicines, etc. Every
tribe has also knowledge of some of the
poisonous plants in its neighborhood and
their antidotes.
The parts of plants used as meilicines
are most often roots, occasionally twigs,
leaves, or bark, but rarely flowers or
seeds. They are used either frt^sh or dry,
and most commonly in the form of a de-
coction. Of this a considerable quantity,
as much as a cupful, is administered at a
time, usually in the morning. Only ex-
ceptionally IS the dose repeated. (Tener-
ally only a single plant is use<l, but
among some Indians as many as four
plants are combined inasinglenunlicine;
some of the Opata mix indiscriminately a
large number of substances. The pro-
prietary medicines are sold at a high
price. Some of these plants, so far as
they are known, possess real medicinal
value, but many are quite useless for the
purpose for which they are pre8cril>ed.
There is a prevalent belief that the Indians
are acquainted with valuable specifics for
venereal diseases, snake bites, etc., but
how far this belief may l)e true has not yet
been shown.
Animal and mineral substances are also
occasionally used as remedies. Among
Southwestern tribes the bite of a snake
is often treated by appl3ring to the wound
a portion of the ventnd surface of the
body of the same snake. Th e Papago use
cricKets as medicine; the Tarahumare,
lizards; the Apache, spiders' eggs.
Among the Navaho and otners red ocher
combined with fat is used externally to
prevent sunburn. The red, barren* clay
from beneath a camptire is used by White
Mountain Apache women to induce ste-
rility; the Hopi blow charcoal, ashes, or
other products of lire on an inflamed sur-
face to counteract the 8np|K>sed flre which
causes the ailment. Antiseptics are un-
known, ])ut some of the cleansing agents
or healing powders employed probably
serve as «uch, though undesignedly on
the part of the Indians.
The exact manner of therapeutic at^tion
is as absolutely unknown to tne Indian as
it is to the ignorant white man. Among
some trilK^s the term for medicine signi-
fies ** mystery," but among others a dis-
tinction* is made between thaumaturgic
practices and actual medicines. Oc(»a-
sionally the term '*medicine'* isextended
to a higher class of greatly prized fetishes
that are 8up|)osed to be imbued with
mysterious ])rotective ]X)wer over an indi-
vidual or even overatril>e (see Oremfa).
Such objects form the principal contents
of the so-called medicine-bags.
In many lo<*alities there was prepare<l
on special occasions a tribal *' medicine."
The Iroquois used such a renuHly for heal-
ing wounds, and the Hopi still prejmre
one on theocc»si<m of their Snake dance.
Among the tribes who prepare tisuiny or
tesvino, particularly the Apache, parts of
a number of bitter, aromatic, and even
poisonous plants, especially a species of
datura, are added to the liquid to make
it ** stronger"; these are termed me<li-
cines.
The causation and the nature of diseast*
l)eing to the Indian in large part myste-
ries, he assigned them to supernatural
agencies. In general, every illness that
could not plainly l)e (connected with a
visible iimuence was regarded as the
effect of an introduction into the Ixxly,
by malevolent or offende<l su[)ematural
beings or through sorcery practised by
an enemy, of noxious objects (^pable of
producing and continuing pain or other
symptoms, or of absorbing the patient's
vitality. These beliefs, and the more
rational ones conceniing many minor in-
dispositions and injuries, led to the de-
velopment of separate forms of treatment,
and varieties of healers.
In every Indian tribe there were, and
in some tribes still are, a number of men,
and perhaps also a numl)er of women,
who were regarded as the possessors of
supernatural powers that enabled them
to recognize, antagonize, or cure disease;
and there were others who were better
acquainted with actual remedies than the
average. These two classes were the
* * physicians. ' ' They were oftentimes dis-
tinguished in designation and differed in
influence over the i)eople as well as in
responsibilities. Among the Dakota one
was called wakan mtshashay 'mystery
man * , the ( )ther jtejihiita wiUhasha^ ' grass-
838
MEDICINE AND MEDICINE-MEN
[B. A. E.
root man ' ; among the Navaho one is
khathnlif * singer', * chanter', the other
iziel'mi, ' maker of medicines '; among the
Apache one is taii/iuj * wonderful/ the
otlier simply izty * medicine.*
The mystery man, or thaiimaturgist,
was believed to have obtained from the
deities, usually through dreams, but
sometimes before birth, i>ower8 of rec-
ognizing and removing the mysterious
causes of disease. He was ^* given"
appropriate songH or prayers, and be-
came possessecl of one or 'more power-
ful fetishes. He announced or exhibited
these attributes, and after convincing his
tribesmen that he possessed the proper
requirements, wan accepted as a healer.
In some tribes he was called to treat all
diseases, in others his functions were
specialized, and his treatment was re-
garded as efficacious in only a certain line
of affections. He wa** feared as well an
respected. Jn numerous instances the
medicine-man combined the functions of
a shaman or priest with those of a healer,
and thus exercised a great influence
among his |)eople. All priests were be-
lieved to possess some healing iK)wers.
Among most of the ()opulous triWs the
meiUcine-men of this class were a*<so-
ciate<l in guilds or societies, and on 8j)e-
cial occasions {lerfornied great healing or
"life (vitality) giving'* ceremonies,
which abounded in s<mgs, prayers, ritual,
and drama, and extended over a j)eriod
of a few hours to nine days.
The ordinary proiredure of the me<li-
cine-mari wai? alxnit as follows: He in-
quired into the symptoms, dreams, and
transgressions of tabus of the patient,
whom he examineil, and then pro-
nounced his opinion as to the nature
(generally mythical) of the ailment. He
then prayed, exhorted, or sang, the last,
perhaps, to the accompaniment of a rat-
tle; made parses with his hand, some-
times moistened with saliva, over the
part affected; and finally placed his
mouth over the most painful spot and
sucked hard to extract the immediate prin-
ciple of the illness. This result he appar-
ently accomplished, often by means of
sleight-of-hand, producing the offending
cause in the shape of a thorn, pebble, hair,
or other object, which was tnen thrown
away ordestroyeil ; finally he administered
a mysterious powder or other tangible
**meaicine," and perhaps left also a pro-
tective fetish. There were many varia-
tions of this method, according to the re-
quirements of the case, and the medicine-
man never failed to exercise as much
mental influence aa possible over his pa-
tient. For these services the healer waa
usually well compensated. If the case
would not yield to the simpler treatment,
a healing ceremony might be resorted to.
If all means failed, particularly in the
(*ase of internal diseases or of adolescents
or younger adults, the medicine-man
often suggested a witch or wizard as the
cause, and the designation of some one
as the culprit frequently placed his life
in jeopardy. If the meuicine-nuui lost
several patients in succession, he himself
might be suspected either of having
been deprived of his supernatural power
or of having become a sorcerer, the pen-
alty for which was usually death.
These shaman healers as a rule were
shrewd and experienced men; some were
sincere, noble chanuiters, worthy of re-
spect; others were charlatans to a greater
or less degree. They are still to be found
among the le«s civilized tribes, but are
diminishing in number and losing their
influence. Medicine- women of this class
were found among the Apache and some
other tribes.
The most accomplished of the medi-
cine-men pra(!tised also a primitive sur-
gery, and aided, by external manipula-
tion and otherwise, in difficult labor.
The highest surgical achievement, un-
doubtedly practised in part at least as
a curative method, was trephining. This
operation was of (X)mm()n occurrence and
is still practised in Peru, where it reached
its highest development among American
tribes. Trephining was also known in
( juite recent times among the Tarahamare
of Chihuahua, but has never been found
north of Mexico.
The other class of medicine men and
women corresponds closely to the herb-
alists and the old-fashioned rural mid-
wives among white people. The women
predominated. They formed no socie-
ties, were not so highly respected or so
much feared as those of the other class,
were not so well compensated, and had
less responsibility. In general they used
much more common sense in their prac-
tice, were acquainted with the beneficial
effects of sweating, poulticing, moxa
scarification, various manipulations, ana
numerous vegetal remedies, such as pur-
gatives, emetics, etc. Some of these
medicine-women were frequently sum-
moned in cases of childbirtii, ana some-
times were of material assistance.
Besides these two chief classes of head-
ers there existed among some tribes laiee
medicine societies, composed principalTy
of patients cured of serious ailments.
This was particularly the (SSlbq among the
Pueblos. At Zufli there still exist sev-
eral such societies, whose members in-
clude the greater part of the tribe and
whose oi^eanization and functions arecom-
plex. The ordinary members are not
actual healers, but are believed to be more
BULL. 301 MP^DILDING MEKADEWAGAMITIGWEYAWININIWAK 839
competent to assist in tlie iwirticular line
of diseases which are the Bi)ecialty of
their society and therefore may he called
by the actual nunlicine-men for a.-?Mst-
anire. They particii>ato also in the cere-
monies of their own WKjiety. See Anat-
omy, Artificial Head Deformatioii, Health
and Disease, PhyRinlogti.
For writings on the subject consult
Hrdlicka, Physiological and Medical Ob-
servations, Bull. :i4, W. A. K., 1908 (in
press). (a. ii.)
Medilding ( * place of boats ' ) • A Hupa
village, the most important of the soutn-
em division of this people, on the e. side
of Trinity r., Cal., 2 m. from thes. end of
Hupa valley. (p. e. o. )
Ipupukhmam.— (imldard, inrn.l903( Karok name).
Kahtetl.— <iibbs, MS., B. A. K., 1852 ( Yurok name).
Ka-U-tih.— Meyer. Nuch dein Sucraniento, 282.
1855. Ea-tah-te.— McKw (is.'il) in Sen. Kx. IXk*.
4, 32d Con^., st>ec. si'ss., 194, 1853. Matilden.—
SpaldiDK in Ind. A(T. Kep., 82. 1870. Matilton.—
Goddard, Life and (Milture of the Ilutm, 12, IVHKi.
Medildin.— Ibid. Mi-til'-ti.— Powers in Cont. N.
A. Ethnol., HI, 73, 1877. OUeppauh'l-kah-teht'l.—
Gibbs in SeIiot)leraft, Ind.Trilws, m, l:W, 18.t3.
Medoctec. A former ^lalecite village
on St John r., New Hnmswick, aliout
10 m. bt»low the present WocKlstock. In
1721 the name ocirurs as that of an Abna-
^ tribe. (j. m.)
Madooteg.— St Maurice (17fi0) in N. Y. Doc. (^ol.
Hist. X. 1004. 18.')8. Kedooktack.— GyleH (173(i) in
Drake. TraK. Wild., 7k. 1841. Medooteo.— Writerof
\rj& in Me. Hist. S«k*. Coll., vn, 5. 187(5. Me-
dootwjk.— Memoirofl724inN.V.I)<K*.(?ol.HL*?t.,ix,
940, 1855. Medoctek.— Vaudreuil (1721). ibid..
904. Medootet.— Beauhaniois (1745), ibid., x, 13.
1868. K^oothek.— Iberville (1701). ibid., ix.73;^
1855 (the river). Kedoktek.— Shea, Catli. Miss.,
143, 1855. Medosteo.— Ix»tter, map, ca. 1770.
ifedyednaia (Russ. : Mn^arish^ from
medvedy Mn'ar'). A Yukonikhotana
settlement on the s. side of Yukon r.,
Alaska; iK)p. 15 in 18S0.— Petroff in 10th
Census, Alaska, 12, 1884.
Meecombe. An Abiiaki village on lower
Penobs(!ot r.. Me., in 1602-(H).— Punthas
(1625) in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 156, 1857.
Meeshawn. A former Nauset village
near Truro, Barnstable co., Mass. In
1698 it (U)ntained al)out 50 inhabitants.
Meeahawn.— Bourne (1«74) in Mass. Hist. See.
Coll., 1st H.. I, l».»fi. 1806. Methawn.— Freeman,
ibid.,l8ts..vni. 160,1802.
Meetkeni. A fonner Tolowa village on
the 8. fork of Smith r., Cal.
ltt'-«t-ke'-ni.— l>orst'y. Smith RiverM.^. v.Mab.. H.
A. E., 1884 I K haaniot(>ne name). M£'-rx8t-ke. —
Dorsey, Chetco MH. voeab.,B. A. E.,1884 (Cheteo
name).
MeggeokesBOu. Menti< >ned as if a Dela-
ware village in 1659. The e<litor of the
New York Colonial Documents lot^tes
it at Trenton Falls, N. J., on Delaware r.
Meoheckeaiouw.— Ilndde (1662) in N. Y. Do<'. Col.
Hist., XII. 870. 1877. Meggecke^ouw.— Beeckman
(1663).ibid.,446. Meggeckessou.— Bee(>kiiian(1659),
Ibid., 255.
Mehashunga ( 3/(p-/<//-«/< n iZ-tjii , * duck * ) .
A Kansa gens. — Morgan, Anc. Soc, 156,
1877.
Xeherrin. An Inniuoian tril)e formerly 4^
residing on the river of the same name on
the Virginia-Xorth Carolina l>order. Jef-
ferson confounded them with the Tiitelo^
According to ofiicial (!olonial documents
they were a reumant of the Conestoga or
Susquehanna of upper Maryland, dis-
persed bj; the Iroquois alwut 1675, but
this also is incorre<'t, an they are found
noted under the name "Men hey ricks"
in the census of Virginia Indiansin U)(y9y
at which time they num]>ered 50 bow-
men, or approximately 180 souls (Neill,
Virginia, (-arolorum, 826, 1886). It is
possible that the influx of refugee Cones-
toga a few years later may have so over-
whelmed the remnant of tlie original tril)e
as to give rise to the impression that they
were all of Conestoga blood. They were
commonly rc»garde<l as under the juris-
diction of Virginia, although their terri-
tory was (>laimed also by Carolina. They
were closely cognati^ with the Nottoway,
u. v. (j. M.)*
Maharim.— Ncwnam (1722) in Hnmpbrevs, A<*ct.,
110,1730. Maherin.— DiK'.of 1705inN.(\('(»l.Reo..
I. 615, 188i». Kaherine.— I)<K'. of 1703, ibi(i., 570.
Mahering.— Bonndar>' Com'rs (1728), ibi<l.. ii. 74s.
Kaherrin.— (\mneil of 172ii, ibid.. 640. Maher-
ring.— Lawson (1710) . Hist. Car., 383. 1860. Maher-
ron.— Conncil of 1726 in N. C. Col. Ree., ii.WO,
18S6. Meherine.— Council of 1724, ibid., 525.
Keherint.— Doe. of 1712, ibid., i, 891. Keheron.—
Doe. of 1721, ibid., ii, 426. Meherriet.— School-
eraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 36. ls55. Meherrin.— <'ouneiI
of 1726 in N. ('.Col. Ree., II. 643,1886. Meherring.—
Doc. of 1715, ibid., 204. Meherriiu.— Pollcwk
(1712). ibid., i. 884. Meherron.— Hyde (1711),
ibid., 751. Kenohserixik.— Ix'derer ((Ternian, 1670)
in Hawks. N. C, ii, 52, 1858. Menderink.— O^ilby
map (1671), ibi<l. (niLsprint after lA>derer's
map). Mendoerink. — Ix^lerer, map (1670), ibid.
(German form misprinted). Mendwrink.— l^>d-
erer (1670) Diseov.. map, repr. lOiri. Menher-
ring.— DcM'.of 1722 in N. C. Col. Rr., Ii, 47r». 18%.
Kenheyrioki.— (*ensns of ir»69 quoted bv Neill.
Va. Carolorum, 326. 188«;. Meterri'»«.— Keane in
Stanford, (^ompend.. 522, 187S (misprint).
Xehkoa ('squirrt^l'). A gens of the
Abnaki, (j. v.
MeH-ko-i'.— Morgan, Ane. So<'., 174. 1877.
Mi'kowa.-^!. D. Prince, infn, 1905 (modem St
Francis Abnaki form). •
Xeipontsky. A former trilx* of pitnl-
mont Virginia, probably of Siouan stock,
incorporated about 1700 with the (/hris-
tanna Indians. See Mooney, Siouan
Tril)es of the Vjaat, Bull. B. A. K., 1894.
Meipontsky.— Albany c<mf. (1722) in N. Y. Dim*.
Col. Hi.'it., v, 6?3. 18.'>5. Meipoutdcy.— Byrd, Hist.
Div. Line, li, 257, 1866.
Mejia. A hacienda 5 leagues l)elow
Isleta, N. Mex., on the Rio. (Jnmde, in
1692. At this date it ])robably contained
a few l*iro8, or perhaps some'Tigua from
Isleta. — Vargas (1H92) (juote^l bv Davis,
Span. Conq. N. Mex., :i51, 18()9; Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 200, 1889.
Mekadewagamitig^ey awininiwak ( Ma k-
addtragam-Ctlgu'eya'irhtlnlwiifjy *j)eople of
the black water fiver.*— W. J. ). A Chii)- 1
pewa band formerly living on Black r., I
s^E. Mich.
840
MEKEWE MENENQUEN
[ B. A. E.
BUok-River band.^Waahington treaty (1836) in
U. S. Ind .Treat. . 227, 1873. Mii'kadiiwiMuni^ticweyi-
wininiw^.— Wm. Jones, inf n, 1906. l[«kadewani-
mitifweya-wuiiniwak.— Gatschet, Ojibwa MS..
B. A. £., 1882. Wakasoo.—Smith in Ind. A«F. Rep.,
53, 1851.
Mekewe. A former Chumashan village
near Santa Inez, Santa Barbara co. . Cal. —
TayloruTCal." Farmer, May 4, i860.
Mekichuntnn {Ml^'-H-tcCtn^-tiin), A
former village of the Qhastacosta on
Rogue r., Oreg.— Dorsey in Jour. Am.
FolK-lore, iii, 234, 1890 (given as a gens).
Xekumtk ( Me^-kiimtky * long tree moss * ) .
A former Alsea village, the highest on the
N. side of Alsea r., Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour.
Am. Folk-lore, in, 230, 1890.
Melejo. A DiegueHo rancheria near .San
Diego, 8. Cal.; probably identical with
**Mileotonac, San Felipe,'* which was
represented in the treaty of Santa Isabel
in 1852.
Ilelq6.— Ortega (1776) quoted by Bancroft, Nat.
Races, l, 253. 1884. Xielo-to-nao, San FeUpe.— H. R.
Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d seas. 132, 1857.
Meletecunk. Given as the name of a
Delaware tribe formerly on the coast of
New Jersey. Proud in 1798 applies this
name to Metedeconk r. in Ocean co.
Meletecunk.— Ma cauley. N.Y.,li,293,1829. Moeroah-
kongy.— De Laet {ca. 1633) in N.Y. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
2d 8., I, 315, 1841.
Xelona. A Timucuaii village on the s.
bank of lower St Johns r. , Fla. , in the 16th
century. — De Bry, Brev. Nar., ii, map,
1591.
Xelosikakat. A Yukonikhotana village
of 30 inhabitants, on Melozikakat r., a
N. affluent of the Yukon, Alaska. —
Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 12, 1884.
Xelukitz. A Kusan village or tribe on
the N. side of Coos bay, coast of Oregon.
Probably the village most often referre<l
to bv writers. — Milhau, Coos bay MS.
vocab., B. A. E. ; also MS. letter to Gibbs,
B. A. E.
Melungeon. See Oroaian Indians.
Xemkamlis ( * islands in front ' ) . A vil-
lage of the Mamalelekala and Koeksote-
nok, onVill^eids. ,at the mouth of Knight
inlet. Brit. GjL; pop. 215 in 1885.
Xem-koom-liah.— Dawson in Trans. Roy. Soc. Can.
for 1887, sec. ii, 65. Memkomlis.—Boas in Bull.
Am. Geog. Soc., 227, 1887.
Memoggyins {Me^mogg'inSy 'having sal-
mon traps' ) . A gens of the Koeksotenok,
aKwakiutl tribe. — Boas in Rep. Nat. Mus.
for 1895, 330.
Memramcook (same sjr amlamkook, 'va-
riegated'). Mentioned by Rand (First
Raiding Book in Micmac, 81, 1875) as one
of the 7 districts of the Micmac country.
Kemnmoook.— Alcedo, Die. Geog., ru, 147, 1788.
Xenacapimt. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, in 1608, on Pamunkey r.,
King William co., Va.— Smith (1629),
Virginia, i, map, rejpr. 1819.
Xenasknnt A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, in 1608, on the n. bank of
Rappahaimock r., Richmond co., Va. —
Smith (1629), Virginia, i, map, repr.
1819.
Xenatonon. A chief, in 1585-86, of the
Chowanoc (q. v.), an Algonquian tribe
formerly living in n. e. North Carolina,
but now extinct. He was prominent
during the time that Ralph I^y ne was in
charge of the party sent out by Sir Walter
Raleigh to establish a colony, and was
one of the chiefs from whom l^yne ob-
tained most of his information regarding
the country visited, Menatonon being
made a prisoner a few days for the pur-
pose. This knowledge of the new coun-
try is included in the report sent to
Raleigh. According to Layne (Hakluyt,
Voy., Ill, 312, 1810), Menatonon was
lame, but for a savage was very grave
and wise, and well acquainted not only
with his own territory but with the sur-
rounding regions and their productions.
It is probable that he dieil soon after
Layne's visit, as John White, who was
in the country two years later, mentions
his wife and child as belonging to Croatan,
but says nothing of him. (c. t. )
Xenawzhetannanng. An Ottawa village,
about 1818, on an island in the I^ke of
the Woods, on the s. boundary of Mani-
toba, Canada. ' (j. m.)
Me-nau-zhe-tau-naung.— Tanner, Narr., 202, 1830.
Ke-nau-zhe-taw-naun.— Ibid. , 1 98. Me-naw-zhe-tau-
naung.— Ibid., 236.
Menckti. Apparently a former Cochimi
rancheria in Lower California, not far
from Concho bay, on the gulf coa*»t. — Doc.
Hist. Mex. 4th s., v, 66, 1857.
Xendica. A tribe, met by Cabeza de
Vaca during the earlier part of his stay
in Texas (1527-34), that lived ''in the
n»ar," i. e., inland. Nothing further is
known of it. The country mentioned was
probably occupied by Karankawan tribes,
which are now extinct. See Cabeza de
Vaca, Smith trans., 84, 1851; Gatschet,
Karankawa Inds., 46, 1891. (a. c. f.)
Xenemesseg. A rendezvous of Nipmuc,
Narraganset, and other hostile Indians
in 1676, during King Philip's war, near
New Braintree, Worcester co., Mass.
XeminimisMt.— Fiske (1775) in Ma.ss. Hist. Soc.
Coll., \9t s., 1, 258, 1806. MenemesMg.— Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., Ists., VI, 206, 1800. Menumesse.— Gookin
(1677)inTran8.Am.Antiq.Soc.. ii, 487, 1836. Xixn-
inimiMet.— Hutchinson in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
1st 8., I, 259, 1806. Mominimiiiiet.-- Whitney in
Barber, Hist. Coll., 569, 1839.
Xenenquen. An unidentified tribe or
band represented at the mission of San
Antonio de Valero, Texas, between 1740
and 1750. They allied in their gentile
state with the Caguas (Cavas?) and Si-
james, who were related to the Emets
and Sanas. There is some i ndication that
they were from the middle or lower Guad-
alupe country. Some words of their
language are preserved (Manzanet, 1690,
in Texas Hist. Ass'n Quar., ii, 309, 1899;
BULL. 301
MENEflOUHATOBA MENTTE(K)W
841
MS. Baptismal records of Mission Valero,
partidas 564, 57 1 , 869 ) . See Miraam man .
JH. E. B.)
_ . , particla869.
XMumquen. — l6id., 571. Menaquen. — Ibid.. f*'l.
Mnmuii.— Ibid.. 448 (identical?). Merhu&n.—
Ibid., 456 (identical?).
Menesouhatoba. A Dakota tribe or
division, probably the Mdewakanton.
■neMokatoW— Pachot (1722) in Margry, D^.,
VI, 618, 1886. Boioux des Lacs.— Ibid.
Kenewa ( *great warrior' ) . A half-breed
Creek, second chief of the Lower Crt^k
towns on Tallapoosa r., Ala.; born about
1765. He was nottnl for trickery and dar-
inein early life, when he was known as I lo-
thlepoya (* crazy war hunter*) and annu-
ally crossed the Cumberland to rob the
white settlers in Tennessc^e of their horses.
A murder committed in his neijrhborhood
was changed to his band, and the i)eople
of Georgia burned one of their towns
in revenge. It was suspected that Mac-
intosh had instigattnl the murder for
the very purpose of stirring un trouble
between the whites and his rival. When
Tecumseh c^me to form a league against
the white iHH)j)le, Menewa, foreseeing that
Macintosh with American aid and support
would attack him in any event, readily
joined in the conspira<\v. He lx»gan the
Creek war and was the war chief of his
people, the head chief of the tribe l)eing a
meiiicine-man. Relying on a prophecy
of the latter, Menewa made a wrong dis-
IK)8]tion of his men at the battle of the
iorseshoe Bend, Gen. Jackson f|ui(kly
discerning the vulnerable point in the In-
dian defenses. Menewa slew the false
prophet with his own hand bt*fore dashing
at the head of his warriors from the breast-
works, aln^ady breached by the Ameri<'an
cannon, into' the midst of the Tennes-
seans, who were advancing to the as
sault. Of 900 warriors 8:^ were killed,
and all the survivors, sUve one, were
wounded. Menewa, left for dead on
the field, revive<l in the night and,
with other survivors, reache<l the hidden
camp in the swamjys when* the women
and children were waiting. The men on
their recovery made their submission in-
dividually. Menewa*s village was de-
8troye<l and his wealth in horses and
esLttle, peltry, and trade goods had dis-
appeared. After his wounds were healed
he reassumed authority over the rem-
nant of his band and was in later years
the leader of the party in the Creek
Nation which opposed further cession of
land to the whites and made resistance to
their encroachments. Macintosh coun-
seled acquiescence in the proi>osal to de-
port the whole trilx^ beyond the Mississip-
pi, and when for this he was condemne<i
as a traitor, Menewa was reluctantly p(»r-
suaded to execute the death sentence.
In 1826 he went with a delegaticm to
Washington to j)rotest against th(» treaty
by which Macintosh and his confederates,
rei)resenting about one-tenth of the na-
tion, had at Indian Spring, Jan. 8, 18LM,
i)resume<l to cede to the United States the
fertile Creek country. He propositi, in
ceding the (Veek country to the Govern-
ment for white settlement, to reserve
some of the land to ]wi allottcHi in sever-
alty to such of the nation as chose
to remain on their native soil rather
than to emigrate to a strange region.
Through his advocacy the (lovernment
was induced to parcel some of the land
among the (-reeks who were desirous and
capable of subsisting by agriculture, to be
held in fee simple after a prol)ationary
term of live years. An arbitrary method
of allotment deprived Menewa of his own
farm and, as the one that he drew was un-
desirable, he sold it and lM)ught other land
in Alabama. When some of the Creeks
Ix'came involved in the Seminole war of
1836, he 1(m1 his]>raves against the hostiles.
In consideration of his services he ol>-
tained |K»rmissi(m to remain in his native
land, l)ut nevertheless was trans^)orte<l
with his people beyond the Mississippi.
(F. H.)
Men^akonkia. A division of the Miami,
living m 1682 in central Illinois with the
Pianka.shaw and others.
Mangakekias.— Shrain Win. Hist. Soo.Coll.', iii, 134,
18r)7. Mangakekii.— Baciinevillo de la l*othorie,
II. 261. 17r>3. MangakokiV— Ibid.. '^\V^. Manira-
KonKia.— Jes. Rel. 1«;74. LVin. 40. 1M99. Megan-
oockia.— I^ Salle (1(W2) in Margrv. Dt'c, ii, 201,
1877.
Menhaden. A fish of the herring fam-
ily (Alosd mcnhmleii ), known also as JHmy-
.6sh, mossbvmker, hardhead, ])auhagen,
et<-., found in the Atlantic coast waters
from Maine to Maryland. The name is
derived from the Narraganset dialect of
Algon(|uian. Roger Williams (1643) calls
munuiurhittedUij a "fish like a herring,"
the word being really plural and signify-
ing, according to Trumbull (NatickDicf.,
69, 190.3), 'they manure.' The references
is to the Indian custom of using these fish
as manure for cornfields, which pnictice
the aborigines of New England transmit-
te<ltothi» Kuropean colonists. Meiihmleii
is thus a corruption of the Xarnigansi»t
term fortius fish, viuinuurhat^ *the ferti-
lizer.* See Pogy. (a. f. c. )
Meniolagomeka. A fonner Delaware
or Munsee village cm Aquanshicola cr..
Carbon co.. Pa. In 1754 the inhabi-
tants, or part of them, joiiunl the Moravian
converts at New (inadenhuetten in the
same county. (.i. m. )
MenioUfamika.— lfe<'kewelder in Tran.s. Am.
PhiloH. Soc., n. s.. iv, :{59. 18:^. Keniola^mekah.—
Uwkiel, Hist. Mis.s. Tnited Breth., pt. 2,26,1794.
Menitegow (prob. for Mln1 tlguuky *on
the island in the river.' — W. J.). A
842
MENOMINEE
[B. A.I
*-
^
former Chippewa village on the £. bank
of Saginaw r., in lower Michigan. — Sagi-
naw treaty (1820) in U. S. Ind. Treat.,
142, 1873.
Xenominee (mmo, by change from mino^
'good', 'beneficent*; mm, a 'grain*, 'seed*,
the Chippewa name of the wild ritre. —
Hewitt. Full name Menominiwok inini-
ivokj the latter term signifying ' they are
men'). An Algonquian tribe, the mem-
bers of which, according to Dr William
Jones, claim to understand Sauk, Fox,
and Kickapoo far more easily than thev
do Chippewa, Ottawa, and Potawatomi,
hence it is possible that their linguistic
relation is near to the former group of
Algonquians. Grignon (Wis. Hist. Soc.
AMISKQUEW— MENOMINEE MAN. (mcKENNEY AND Hall)
Coll., Ill, 265, 1857) speaks of the
Noquet as a part of the Menominee,
and states that "the earliest locality
of the Menominee, at the first visits of
the whites, was at Bay de Noque and Me-
nominee r. , and those at Bay de Noque
were called by the early French Des
Noques or Des Noquia.'* (See Noquet.)
The Jesuit Relation for 1671 includes the
Menominee among the tribes driven from
their country — that is, "the lands of the
south next to Michilimackinac," which
is the locality where the Noquet lived
when thev first became known to the
French. It is ^nerally believed that the
Noquet, who disappeared from history at
a comparatively early date, were closely
related to the Chippewa and were incor-
porated into their tribes; nevertheless,
the name Menominee must have been
adopted after the latter reached their his
toric seat; it is possible they were pre-
viously known as Noquet. Charlevob
(Jour. Voy., ii, 61, 1761) says: "I have
been assured that they had the same
original and nearly the same languagee
with the Noquet and the Indians atUie
Falls."
The people of this tribe, so far as known,
were first encountered by the whites when
Nicolet visited them, probably in 1634, at
the mouth of Menommee r., Wis. -Mich.
In 1671, and henceforward until about
1852, their home was on or in the vicinity
of Menominee r., not far from where they
were found by Nicolet, their settlements
extending at times to Fox r. They have
generally been at peace with the whites.
A succinct account of them, as well as a
full description of their manners, customs,
arts, and oeliefs, by Dr W. J. Hoffman,
appears in the 14th Rep. Bureau of Eth-
nology, 1896. In their treaty with the
United States, Feb. 8, 1831, they claimed
as their possession the land from the
mouth of Green bay to the mouth of Mil-
waukee r., and on the west side of the
bay from the height of land between
it and L. Superior to the headwaters of
Menominee and Fox rs. , which claim was
granted. They now reside on a reserva-
tion near the head of Wolf r.. Wis.
Major Pike described the men of the
tribe as "straight and well made, about
the middle size; their complexions gen-
erally fair for savages, their teeth good,
their eyes large and rather languishing;
they have a mild but independent ex-
pression of countenance that charms at
first sight. * ' Although comparatively in-
dolent, they are described as generally
honest, theft being less common than
among many other tribes. Drunkenness
was their most serious fault, but even this
did not prevail to the same extent as
among some other Indians. Their beliefs
and rituals are substantially the same,
as those of the Chippewa. They have
usually been peaceful in character, sel-
dom coming in contact with the Sioux,
but bitter enemies of the neighboring
Algonquian tribes. They formerly dis-
posed of their dead by inclosing the
bodies in long pieces of birchbaA, or
in slats of wood, and burying them in
shallow graves. In order to prot^t the
body from wild beasts, three logs were
placed over the grave, two directly on
the grave, and the third on these, all
being secured by stakes driven on each
side. Tree burial w^as occasionally prac-
tised.
The Menominee — ^as their name indi-
cates— subsisted in part on wild rice
(Zizania aquatica) ; in fact it is spoken of
by early writers as their chief v^etal
food. Although making such constant
%
BULL. 30]
MENOMINEE
843
use of it from the earliest notices we have
of them, and aware that it could be
readily grown by sowing in proper ground,
Jenks (19th Rep. B. A. E., 1021, 1901),
who gives a full account of the Meno-
minee method of gathering, preserving,
and using the wild rice, states that they
abcMolutely refuse to sow it — evidently
owing to their common unwillingness to
** wound their mother, the earth."*
Chauvienerie gives their principal to-
tems as the Laive-tailed Bear, the Stag,
and the Kilou (a sort of eagle). Neill
(Hist Minn., 1858) classes the Menom-
inee, evidently on French authority,
as Folles Avomes of the Chat and Orig-
nal or Wild Moose and Elk. Hoffman
gives the modem totems as follows:
I. The Owa^sse wiMishi^anun, or Bear
phratrj', consisting of the following to-
tems and subphratries: Owa^sse (Bear),
Miqka'^no (Mud-turtle), Kitii^mi (Porcu-
pine), with the Nama^nu (Beaver) and
O^sass (Muskrat) and subphratries.
II. TheKinfi^u* wiMishi'anun, or F^ajjle
phratry, consisting of the following to-
tems: Pinash^iu (Bald Eagle), Kaka'^k
(Crow), Ina^qtfik (Raven), Ma^qkuana^'ni
(Red-tail Hawk), Hinana^shiu'' (Golden
Eagle), Pe^niki^konau (Fish-hawk).
III. The Ota^tshia wiMishi^anun, or
Crane phratry, consisting of the following
totems: Ota^tshia (Crane), Shakshak^eu
(Great Heron), Os^se (**01d Squaw*'
Duck), CKkawa^siku (Coot).
IV. The Moqwai-'o wiMishi^anun, or
Wolf phratry, consisting of the follow-
ing totems: Moqwai^o (Wolf), **Hana*'
[ana'^m] (Dog), Apaq^ssos (Deer).
V. The Mons wi^dishi^'anun, or Moose
phratry, with the following totems: M6°8
(Moose), Oma^skos (Elk), WabjVshiu
(Marten), Wu^tshik (Fisher).
The earlier statements of Menominee
population are unreliable. Most of the
estimates in the nineteenth century vary
from 1,300 to 2,500, but those probably
most conservative range from 1,600 to
1,900. Their present population is about
1,600, of whom 1,370 are under the Green
Bay school sui)erintendency , Wis. Thei r
vilu^es (missions) were St Francis and
St Mfichael.
The Menominee have entered into the
following treaties with the United States:
(1) Treaty of peace at St Louis, Mo.,
Mar. 30jl817; (2) Treaty of Prairie du
Chien, Wis., Aug. 19, 1825, with the
Menominee and other Indians, fixing
boundary lines between the several
tribes; (3) Treaty of Butte des Morts,
Wis., Aug. 11, 1827, defining boundary
lines between the Menominee, Chippewa,
and Winnebago; (4) Treaty of Washing-
ton, Feb. 8, 1831. defining boundary
lines and ceding lands to the United
States, a portion of the latter to be for the
use of certain New York Indians; (5)
Treaty of Washington, Feb. 17, 1831,
modifying the treaty of Feb. 8, 1831, in
regaril to the lands ceded for the use of the
New York Indians; ((>) Treaty of Wash-
ington, Oct. 27, 1832, in which certain
modifications are made in regard to the
lands ce<led for the use of the New York
Indians ( Stockbridges and Munsee), and
to certain boundary lines; ( 7 ) Articles of
agreement made at Ce<lar Point, Wis.,
Sept. 3, 1836, ceding certain lands to the
United States; (8) Treaty of Lake Pow-
aw-hay-kon-nay, Oct. 18, 1848, ceding all
their lands in Wisconsin, the l.^nited
States to give them certain lands which
had beeiL^eeded bv the Chipi)ewa; (9)
Treaty at the Falls of Wolf r., May 12,
1854, by which they ceded the reserve
set apart by treaty of Oct. 18, 1848, and
were assign chI a reserve on Wolf r., Wis.;
(10) Treaty of Keshena, Wis., Feb. 11,
1856, ctMling two townships of their re-
serve for the use of the Stockbridges and
the Munsee. (j. m. c. t. )
Addle-Eeads.— JefTerys, French I)<>ni.,pt. 1,48,1761
(uriven as the meaning of Folles Avoines),
FaliaviM.— D(x;. of 1764 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
VII. 641, 1856. Felles avoins.— Ix)rdM of Trade
( 1721 ). ibid., v, 622. laV). FoUeavoine.— Vaudreuil
(1720) in Margry. Wv., vi. 511, 1886. FoUe Avoi-
nes.— Memoir of 1718 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.. IX,
889, 1855. FoUet Avoines.— Cadillac (1095) in
Margry. Dt^c, v. 121. 1883. Fols Avoin.— Pike. Ex-
piKlition, 13, 1810. FoU Avoines.— Brown, Went.
Gaz., 265, 1817. Foliavoins.— Johnson (^1763) in N.
Y. Doc. Col. Hist.. VII, 683, imi. FoU-avoise.—
Schermerhorn(1812)in Mass. Hist. 8oc.Coll.,2d8.,
II, 10, 1814. FoUovoini.— Harrison (1814) in Drake,
Tecumseh, 102, 1852. Fulawin.— Dalton (1783) In
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x. 123, 1809. FuUo-
winet.— Edwards. Hist. 111.. 39, 1870. Les FoUet.—
Featherstonhaugh, Canoe Vovage, i, 174, 1847. Let
FoU.— Ann. de la Prop, de la Foi, iv. 637, 1830.
Kacomil^.— LaChesna\'e(1097) in Margrj'.D^c.vi,
6, 1886 (misprint?) . Kahnomoneeg.— Tanner. Nar-
rative, 315, 1830 (Ottawa name). Mahnomonie.—
James in Tanner, ibid.. 326. Malhoming.— Bac-
queville de la Potherie. Hi.st. Am., ii, W, 1758.
Malhominit.— Ibid. Xalhomins.— Ibid., IV, 206,
1768. Malhominy.— Cadillac (1695) in Margr>',
D4c.,v,121. 1883. Malhommet.— Jeflrer>'8, French
Dom., i)t. 1,48,1761. MalhommU.— Perrot (ra.l720).
Memoirs, 127, 1864. Malomenit.— Fnmtenac ( 1682)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix. 182, 1855. Malomi-
mii.— Lahontan, New Voy., i, 231, 1703. Kalomi-
net.- Bellin, map, 1755. Kalominete.— Blue Jacket
(1807) in Drake. Tecumseh. 94, 1852. Kalominia.—
LAhontan, New Voy., i, 104,1703. Kalouin.— Sa-
gard (1686). Hist. Can., Ii, 424, 1864. Kalouminek.—
Jes. Rel. 16.S8, 21, 1858. Malouminet.— Warren
ri852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v. 33, 1886 (French
form). Kanomanee.— Kane, Wanderings of an
Artist, 29, 1859. Manominet.- Henry, Travels. 107,
1809. Kanominik.— Gatschet, Ojibwa MS., B. A.
E.. 1882 (Chippewa name). Maroumine. — Jes. Rel.
1640, 85, 1858. Kathomenis.- Bac(iueville de la
Potherie, Hist. Am., ii. 71, 1763. Mathominit.—
Ibid., 81. Kelhominyt.— Croghan (1759) in Proud,
Pa.. II, 296, 1798. Melomelinoia.— La Salle (1680)
inMargry, D<Jc., ii,201, 1877 (in central Illhiois;
apparently identical ) . Kelomineet.— Perkins and
Peck, Annals of the West, 713, 1850. Memo-
nomier.— Vater. Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 406, 1816.
Menameniet.— Rupp, West. Pa., 346, 1846. Men-
Qominies.— Goldthwait (1766) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 1st s.. X, 121, 1809. Kenomenet.— Pike
il806) in Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, iii, 662, 1863.
[e-no-me-ne-uk'.— Morgan. Consang. an<l Affin.,
288. 1871. Kenomeniet.- Brown, West. Uaz., 265,
1817. Kenomineet.—Treaty of 1825 in V. S. Ind.
844
MENOMINEE MEPAYAYA
(B. A.S
Treaties. 376, 1837. Menominiet.— Treaty of 1826,
ibid., 155. Menominny.— Fcathcrstoiihaiigh, Ca-
noe Voyage, 1 1 , 25, 1 847. Menomoee. —Gale, Upper
Miss., map, 1867. Menomoneet.— Edwards (1788)
in Mass. Hist. Soc. C^oll.. 2d s., x, 86, 1823. Menom-
onei.— McKenney in hid. Aff. Rep., 90, 1825. Me-
nomonet.— Ix)ng, Exped. St Peters R., i, 171, 1824.
Kenomoniet.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 100,
1816. Menomonyt.— Lapham, Inds. of Wis., map,
1870. Menonomees.— La Pointe treaty (1842) in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v. 494, 1885. Menonomiet.—
Howe, Hist. Coll., 436, 1851. Kevnomenyt.— John-
son (1763) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.. \ii, 683, 1856.
Meynomineys.— Johnson (1764), ibid., 648. Minea-
miei.— Trader (1778) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in,
560, 1853. Xiniamis.— Keane in Stanford, Com-
pend., 522. 1878. Xinomineet.— Jones, Ojebway
Inds., 39, 1861. Minominies.— Warren (1852) in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 3:). 1885. KinomonMB.—
Edwards (1788) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s.,
IX, 92. 1804. Xinonionet.— Boudinot, Star in the
West, 107, 1816. Kinoomenee.— Jones, Ojebway
Inds., 178, 1861. Monii.— Perrin du Lac, Voy.
Deux Louisdanes, 232, 1805 (probably identical;
mentioned with Puans [Winnebago! and Oyoa
flowa] ). Monomeni.— Gatschet.FoxMS., B. A. E.,
1882 (Fox name: pi. Moiiomenihak). Mono-
mini.— Henrv. Travels, 107, 1809. Monomoneet.—
Soh(K)lcmft. Ind. Tribes, v, 145, 1855. Monomu-
niei.— Lindsay (1749) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi,
5:W, 1855. Moon-calves.— Jefferys, French Dom..
pt. I, 48, 18(51 (given as the meaning of Folles
Avoiiu's). Mynomamies.— Imlav, West. Ter., 292,
1797. Mynomaniei.- Hutchins (1778) in School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 714, 1857. Mynonamies. —
Croghan (llGTy) in Monthly Am. Jour. Geol., 272,
mn. Nation de la foUe avoine.^Jes. Rel. 1671, 25,
1858. Nation of the Wild-0at».— Marquette {ca.
1673),Di8cov., 319. 1698. Omanomineu.— Kelton, Ft
Mackinac, 149, 1884 (own name, pronounced
0-man-o-me-na-oo). Omanomini. — Ibid. (Chippe-
wa name). 0-mun-o-min-eeg.— Warren (1852) in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll.. v. 33, 1885. Oumalominir—
Prise <ie Posse.ssi(m (1671) in Margrv, D<:'c., i. 97,
1876. Oumalouminek.— Jes. Rel. 1670. 94, 1868.
Oumalouminet.— Jes. Rel. 1671, 25, 1858. Oiuna-
louminetz.— Jes. Rel. 1670, 100, 1858. Oumaomin-
ieci.- Du Chesneau (1681) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
IX, ir>l, I8."v>. Ounabonims.— Pri.se de Possession
(1671). ibid.. K03 (misprint). Rice Indiani.—
Franchere. Narr., 145, 1854. Walhominiet.— Mc-
Kenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, iii, 79, 1854 (mis-
print). White Indians.— Ijong, Exped. St Peters
R., I, 175, 1824. Wild Rice.— Document of 1701
in N. Y. D(M-. (?()1. Hist., ix, 722, 1855. WUd Rioe
Eaters.— Lapham, Inds. Wis., 15. 1870 (given as
the meaning of Meuimiinee). Wild Rioe Men. —
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribe.s v, 145, 1855.
Menominee. A Potawatomi village,
taking its name from the resident chief,
formerly situated on the N. side of Twin
lakes, near the site of Plymouth, Marshall
CO., Ind., on a reservation sold in 1886.
The name is alno written Menomonee.
(j. M.)
Menoqnet (possibly for Mindkwat, 'gootl
ice,' or Mtiuikwht^ * banked cloud,' or
Menakivalw f, *fair weather.' — W. J. ). A
Potawatomi village, commonly called
**Menoq net's village" from the name of
a chief, formerly situated near the present
Monocjuet, Kosciusko co., Ind., on a res-
ervation sold in 1836. The name is
spelled also Menoe<iuet, Meno^ (In-
diana Geol. Rep., map, 1883), Mmoquet,
and Monoquet
Menoqnet' 8 Village. A Chippewa vil-
/ lage, so called after its chief, formerly on
j Cass r., lower Michigan, on a reservation
sold in 1837.
Menostamenton. An unidentified divi-
sion of the Sioux.
Manoetamenton.— JeflTerys, Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776.
Menostamenton.— De I'lsle, map of La., iu Nelll,
Hist Minn.. 164, 1858.
Mento. A name used by French writers
of the 17th and 18th centuries to desig-
nate a people in the vicinity of Arkan-
sas r. and the southern plains. Marquette
heard of them during his descent of the
Mississippi in 1673, and located them on
his map as w. of that river; Douay J 1687)
placed them near Red r. of Louisiana;
Tonti (1690) states that they were in the
vicinity of the Quapaw, and De 1' Isle's
map (1703) puts them on middle Arkansas
r. La Harpe (1719) says they were 7
days' journey s. w. of the Osage. Beau-
rain about that time visited the i>eople
and gives the names of the 9 "nations"
which, he says, formed one continuous
village lying m a beautiful situation, the
houses joining one another from e. to
w. on the border of a s. w. branch of Ar-
kansas r. The ** nations" mentioned in-
clude the Tonkawa, Wichita, Comanche,
Adai, Caddo, Waco, etc. The Mento
were enemies of the Spaniards and the
Apache tribes. (a. c. f.)
Manton.—Iberrille (1702) in Margiy, D^., iv, 699,
1886. Ma«'-»u-we.— Dorsey, Kansa MS., B. A. E.,
1882 (Kansa name). Matora.— Marquette, map
(1673) in Shea, Discov., 268, 1852. Matona.— Shea,
ibid. Mauton.— Tonti (ca. 1690) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., I, 83, 1846. Mento.— La Harpe (1719) in
Margry, D6c.. vi, 315, 1886. Mentona.— JefFerys,
Am. Atlas, map 5, 1776. Mentons.— Hennepin, New
Discov., pt. H, 43, 1698. Minton.— Coxe, Carolans,
11, map, 1741.
Mentokakat. A Koyukukhotana vil-
lage on the left bank of the Yukon, Alaska,
20 m. above the mouth of Melozi r. ; pop.
46 in 1844; 20 in 1880.
Mentokakat.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 12,
1884. Minkhotliatno.— Zagoskin quoted by Petroff.
ibid., 87. Montekakat.— U. S. Land Off. map of
Alaska, 1898.
Menankatno (prob. from munonquUeau,
* that which fertilizes or manures land/
hence 'menhaden country.* — ^Trumbull).
A village, under a sachem squaw, form-
erly at Guilfoni, New Haven co., Conn.,
on a tract sold in 1639. (j. m.)
Manoneatuok.— Doc. of 1641 cited Iw Trumbull,
Ind. NamesConn.. 29, 1881. Menunodtuk.—Drake,
Ind. Chron., 157, 1836. Menimkataek.— Rugjrles in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ist s., iv, 182, 1795. Moaiu-
ketuek. —Trumbull, op. cit. ]Ienuaqnataeko.~Ibid.
Monimkataok.— Ibid. ]Iannaokettteke.^Ibid. Mn-
nunketuoke. —Ibid.
Meochkonck. A former Minisink vil-
lage probably situated about upper Dela-
ware r. ins. E. New York. — VanderDonek
( 1656) quoted by Ruttenber, Tribes Hud-
son R., 96, 1872.
Mepayaya. A tribe mentioned in the
manuscript relation of Francisco de Jesus
Marfa, in 1691, in his list of the Texias
(i. e., the group of customary allies, in-
cluding the Hasinai), as s. w. of the
Nabedache country of Texas. This may
BULL. .'tO]
mequachakp: — mescal
845
be the Payaya tribe, who were in the
vicinity of San Antonio. (h. e. b.)
Keqnachake (*red earth/ — Hewitt).
One of the 5 general divisions of the
Shawnee, whose villages on the head-
waters of Mad r., Logan co., Ohio, were
destroyed by United States troops in
1791. (J. M.)
Kaehaohac.— Drake. Tecumseh, 60, 1852. Kaohi-
BliM.— Ibid., 71. Maokaoheck.— Howe. Hist. Coll.,
L60, 1851. Maokaoheek.— Royce in 18th Rep. B. A.
B.. Ohio map, 1899. Xacueck.—Alcedo, Die. Geog.,
ni, 22,1788 (probably identical). Kakottrake.—
IklcKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, iii. 111, 1854.
Kaquioheet.— Stone, Life of Brant, ir. 43, 1861. Me-
nekut'thafi.— Oatschet. Shawnee MS.. 1879. Ke-
anaehake.— Johnston (1819) in Brinton, Lenape
Leg.. 29, 1885.
Meraooaman. A tril)e or village men-
tioned by Joutel as being on or near the
route taken when going with I^ Salle in
1687 from Ft St Louis on Matagorda bay
to Maligne (Colorado) r., Tex. If the
list of so-called tribes given by the Eba-
hamo Indians and recorded by Joutel
followed the geographic order of his line
of march, the Meracouman must have
dwelt near the Colorado r. of Texas.
Joutel remarks that when the Indians
approached or bathed in the current of
the river, the horses always fled. Gat-
schet states that the custom of the Karan-
kawa Indians of anointing their skin with
shark's oil caused horses and cattle to run
from the disagreeable odor to the distance
of two or three miles. As Karankawan
tribes are said to have dwelt in the
vicinity of Colorado r., it is possible that
the Meracouman may have belonged to
that stock (see (latschet, Karankawa
Inds., 1891). Perhaps they are the Ma-
liacones of Cabeza de Vaca or the Manico
of Manzanet. In 1739 there were neo-
phytes of the Merguan, or Merhuan, tril)e
at San Antonio de Valero mission (Bap-
tismal records, partidas 448, 455, MS.,
cited by H. E. Bolton, inf'n, 1906).
They were with others who appear to
have come from near Guadalupe r., and
they may be identical with the Merai*ou-
man, as well as with the Menenquen
(q. v.). (a. c. f. h. e. b.)
Meraeoumaa. -Joutel (1687) in French. Hist. Coll.
La., I. 137, 1846. Meraquaman.— Joutel (1687J in
Margry. D^.. hi, 288, 1878. Muraoomanet.— Bar-
cia, Bnsayo, 271, 1723.
Kereed (Span.: * grace', * mercy' ). A
^up of Cajuenche rancherias, situated,
m 1775, in n. e. Lower California, w. of
the Rio Colorado, and 4 leagues s. w. of
Santa Olalla, a Yuma rancheria. These
settlements contained about 300 natives
when visited by Father Garc^s in 1775
and were provided with abundant com,
melons, calabashes, and beans, but with
little wheat. See Garc^, Diary (1775),
172-173, 1900.
Merced. A Pima rancheria, visited by
Father Kino in 1700, and placed on maps
of Kino (1701) and Venegas (1759) x. e.
of San Rafael, in what i» now s. Arizona.
La Merced.— Venegas. Hist. Cal.. i. 300. ma^>. 1759.
Merced.— Kino map (1701) in Bancroft, Ariz, and
N. Max.. 3r.O. 1HS9.
Merced. Mentioned as a triln* apj)ar-
ently inhabiting the Pierced r. region,
California. Probably Moquelunman.
Merceder- Barlxnir et al. (ISol) in Sen. Ex. Dcx*.
4, 32d Cong., spec, scss., (K), IKTkS.
Mer, Gens de la ( French : * i)eople of tlu»
sea,' or Gens de la Mer du Nord, *}>eople
of the sea of the north'). \ collective
term applied by the early Jesuit** to the
Algoncjuian tril)es about Hudson bay,
Canada. (.i. m. ) *
Gem de la Mer du Nord.— .Tes. Rd. 1H70, 79, 1S5H.
Gent de Mer.— Ibid., 1643, 3. W^.
Merip. A Yurok village on Klamath r.,
Cal., a])out 10 ni. ])elow the mouth of the
Trinity. (.\. l. k.)
Merkitsok. An Kskinio winter habita-
tion near HuU' bay, s. w. Greenland. —
Crantz, Hist. Greenland, i, 8, 17(h.
Merric. A small Algonquian tribe or
division formerly inhabiting the s. coast
of Qneens co., I^)ng Island, N. Y., from
Rockaway to South Oyster ]>ay. Their
name survives in the handet of Merricks,
which is on the site of their principal
village. (J. M.)
Marricoke. — Doc. of l<>7ft in N. V. I>oc. Col.Hi.vt.,
XIV, 70), 1SS3. Meracock.— Treaty of KhW in Rut-
tenber, Triln'S of Hudson River. 125, 1M72. Meri-
cock.— Doc. of lfir>7 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Ilist.. xiv,
416, 1883. Mericoke.- Thompson, Long Id., 344,
1839. Merikoke.— Wood in Macaulcv, N. Y.. ii,
2.V2, 1829. Meroke.— Thompson. Lonj? Id.. (M, IKVJ.
Merriack.- Deed of 1643 in N. Y. Doc. (^ol. Hi.st..
XIV, 530, 1S«3. Merric— Thompson. Umg Id.. 67,
1839. Merricocke.— Doc. of 1675 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist.. XIV, 7a'>, 188:j.
Mershom. A former ('huma^han vil-
lage at Caiiada de los Sauces, w. of San
Buenaventura, Ventura co.^ CaL
Mer-cbm.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. v(H'ah.,
B. A. ?:., 1884 {r=sh).
Mesa Chiqnita (Span.: 'small nie.^a' or
ta])le-land). A Diegueno village in w,
San Diego CO., Cal. — Jackson and Kinnev,
Rep. Miss. Inds., 24, 1883.
Mesa del Nayarit. A pueblo of the
Cora in the Sierra de Nayarit, on the
upper waters of the Rio de Jesus Maria,
in the n. part of the Territorv of Tepic,
lat. 28° 25^ Mexico.— Lumfioltz, Un-
known Mex., I, 500, 1902.
Mesa Grande (Span.: Marpe mesa' or
table-land). A small Diej^uefio villajre
in3s:*_S.an Diego ca, Cal., with 108 in-
habitants in 1880. The name is now aj)-
plied to a reservation of 120 acres of
patented, largely desert land, 75 m. from
klission Tule River Jigency. See Jackson
and Kinnev, Rep. Mia<«ion Inds., 24, 1888;
Ind. Aff. Rep., 175, 1902.
Mescal (Aztec: inexcalli, ^metl [ma-
guey] li(|Uor'). The fleshy leaf bases
and trunk of various sptH'ies of agave,
it was roasted in ])it ovens and became
a sweet and nutritious food among the
846
ME8CALEBOS ME8CALE8
[B. A. B."
Indians of the states on both sides of the
Mexican boundary. Mescal pits are usu-
ally circular depressions in the ground, 6
to 20 ft in circumference, sloping evenly to
the center, a foot to 3 ft in depth, and
lined with coarse gravel. A fire was built
in the pit, raked out after the stones had
become hot, and the mescal plants put in
and covered with grass. After two days'
steaming the pile was opened and the
mescal was ready for consumption.
The product must not be confoimded
with the distilled spirit known in Mexico
under the same name, nor with the peyote
cactus. Mescal is a valuable food re-
source among the Apache (a division of
whom, the Mescaleros, is named from
their custom of eating mescal), as well
as among the Mohave, Yuma, Ute,
JPaiute, and practically every tribe of the
region producing the agave. An exten-
sive commerce in this sweet was carried
on with outlying tribes, as the Hopi and
other Pueblos. So far as known mescal
was not fermented by the Indians to
produce an intoxicating drink l)efore the
coming of the Spaniards. The food value
of mescal is regarded as of such import-
ance that the entire population of Pre-
sidio del Norte (El Paso), on the failure
of their crops half a century ago, sub-
sisted for six months on roasted agave
(Bartlett, Pers. Narr., ii, 291, 1854).
See Peyote. (w. h.)
-Jf XescaleroB (Span.: * mescal people,'
from their custom of eating mescal ) . An
Apache tribe which formed a part of the
Faraones and Vaqueros of different pe-
riods of the Spanish history of the S. W.
Their principal range was between the
Rio Grande and the Pecos in New Mex-
ico, but it extended also into the Staked
plains and southward into Coahuila,
Mexico. They were never regarded as
so warlike as the Apache of Arizona,
otherwise they were generally similar.
Mooney (field notes, B. A. E., 1897) re-
cords the following divisions: Nataina,
Tuetinini, Tsihlinainde, Guhlkainde, and
Tahuunde. These bands intermarry, and
each had its chief and subchief. The
Guhlkainde are apparently identical with
the * * Cuelcajenne ' ' of Orozco y Berra and
others, who classed them as a diWsion of
the Llaneros; the "Nata^es" are prob-
ably the same as the Nataina rather than
the Lipan or the Kiowa Apache, while
the Tsihlinainde seem to be identifiable
with the **Chilj)aines." In addition
Orozco y Berra gives the Lipillanes as a
Llanero division.
The Mescaleros are now on a reserva-
tion of 474,240 acres in s. New Mexico,
set apart for them in 1873. Population
460 in 1905, including about a score of
Lipan, q. v. (f. w. h. )
Ahuatoluk.— Gatschet, Yoma-Spr.. i, 413, 1883 (Mo-
have name) . Apaehei dei 7 BnriMM.— Baudry des
Lozidres, voy. Louisiane, map, 1802 (named
from Seven rivers in s. e. N. Hex.). ApaelMt
Llanerot.— Bonnycastle, Span. Am., 68, 1819.
Apaohei Meaoalerot.—Ibid. Apaehei of 8ev«B
Rivere.— Jeflerys, Am. Atlas, map 6 (1768), 1776.
Apaehoe Ketealeroe.— Morse, Am. Univ. Geog., I,
685, 1819. Ohi-«he'.— Hodare, field notes, B. A. E.,
. 1896 (Keresan name). £bikuita.—Gat8cnet, Creek
Migr. Leg., i, 28, 1884 (here given as a syno-
nym of Cherokee). Esoequatas.— Neighbors. in
H. R. Doc. 100, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 5, 1847. Bd-
kwlta.— Mooney in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 245, 1898
(Kiowa name). Es-ree-que-teet. — Butler and
Lewis in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 6,
1847. £s-e«-kwit'-ta. —ten Kate, Synonymie,9, 1884
(Comanche name: trans., 'gray buttocks*, but
really signifying • gray dung ' ) . EiMkwftta.~ten
Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 376, 1885. Btse-qiia-tiee.—
Butler and Lewis in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th Cong.,
2d sess., 7, 1847. Euquatops.— Schoolcraft (after
Neighbors), Ind. Tribes, i, 518, 1851 (probably mis-
Srint of £sequatops=Esikwita). Ho-tau&i.—
[ooncy, field notes, B. A. E., 1897 (Comanche
name: apparently a corrupted Mescalero word).
tnatahTn.— Ibid . ( ' mescal people ' : Lipan name) .
Mamakans Apechet.— Warden, Account U. 8. A.,
Ill, 562, 1819 (probably identical). XaMaleroa.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 207, 1855. KaMeleroa.—
Ibid. Meaealeret.— Robin, Voy. & la Louisiane,
III. 15, 1807. Meaealero Apaohea.— Bell in Jour.
Ethnol. Soc. Lond., i, 240, 1869. Meaealeroa.—
Tex. State Arch., doc. 503, 1791. Mesealers.— Ind.
Aff. Rep., 218, 1861. Kesoallarot.— Haines, Am.
Indian, 134, 1888. Meaealos.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 17, 1863. Mesealoro Apaehee.— Meri-
wether in Sen. Ex. Doc. 69, 34th Cong., 1st sess.,
15, 1856. Kescalurot.— Box, Advent., 320. 1869.
Meacateras.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 439, 1853 (misprint).
Kesoolrro.—Ind. Aff. Rep. 1857, 288, 1858. Met-
oaleros.— Gregg, Comm. Prairies, i, 290, 1844.
Misealeros.— Morgan in N. Am. Rev., 68, 1870.
MosoaUra.— Parker, Unexplored Texas, 221, 1866.
Ktt-ea-Ia-moet.— Butler and Lewis in H. R. Doc.
76, 29th Cong., 2d se8S^7, 1847. Mauaeroa.~Ind.
Aff. Rep., 257, 1853. Kaa-ea-larH>es.— Butler and
Lewis in H. R. Doc. 76, 29th Cong., 2d sess., 6, 1847.
Mosoaleros.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 208, 1865.
MiuoallaroB.— Pattie, Pers. Narr., 117, 1838. Mna-
ka-le-ras.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i, 518, 1851.
Mut-ka-leros.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1849, 28, 1850. Mna-
keleras.— Neighbors in H. R. Doc. 100, 29th Cong.,
2d sess., 5, 1847. Mtukeleros.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 674,
1848. NashkaUdinne.— Gatschet, notes. 1886 (Nav-
aho name). NatahS'.— Mooney, field notes, B.
A. E., 1897 ('mescal people': Lipan name).
Natahi'n.— Ibid. (JicarOla name). Ha-to'-nil.—
Hodge, field notes, B. A. E., 1895 (Picuris name).
Hdi[tah»'.— Mooney, field notes, B. A. E.. im
(Lipan name). Pa-ha-ia-be'.—ten Kate, Synon-
ymie, 8, 1884 (Tesuque name). Saeramaateaot^—
Hamilton, Mex. Handbk., 48, 1883. Baerameato
Apaohea.— Parke, Map New Mex., 1851 (doubtless
identical although located as distinct). Saline
Apaohet.— Vargas (1692) quoted by Davis, Span.
Conq. N. Mex., 864, 1869. Sejen-n^.— Encudero,
Not. Estad. de Chihuahua, 212. 1834 (native
name). Tashi.— ten Kate, Reizen in N. Am., 876,
1885. Tixitiwa huponun.— Gatschet, notes, 1886
(Isleta name). Tu'-ie'.— Hodge, field notes, B.
A. E., 1895 (San Ildefonso Tewa name, cf. Chuthg^^
above).
Xescales. A former tribe or tribes in
N. E. Mexico and s. Texas. The one
oftenest referred to lived not far from the
junction of the Salado with the Rio
Grande, and Mescales are mentioned at
the neighboring mission of San Joan
Bautista, founded in 1699. These spoke
a Coahuiltecan dialect. De Leon, in 1689,
mentions them in connection with the
Hapes, Jomenes, and Xiabu. (h. b. b.)
Meaoale.— De Leon (1689) in Tex. Hist. Ass'n
Quar., Yin, 206, 1905. Meieate.—Manzanet, ibid.
riiL*. 301
ME8EEKUNN0GHQU0H — METAL- WORK
847
Keteekunnoghqiioli. See Little Turtle.
Keiheka ( yfe-she'-Jcd, ' mud turtle ' ) . A
ens of the Chippewa, q. v. — Morgan,
inc. Soc., 166, 1877.
Meshekenoghqua. See Little Turtle,
Mesheketeno. A Potawatomi village
f'hich took its name from the resident
hief, situated on Kankakee r., a short
iistan(*e above the present Kankakee, n.
I. Illinois, in 1833. — Camp Tippec»anoe
reaty (18:M) in U. S. Ind. Treaties, 698,
873.
Meshekiinnoghqaoh. See LUile Turtle,
Meshingomesia. A former Miami village,
x>mmonly called after a chief of this
lame, situated on a reservation on the
1, E. side of Mississinewa r., in Liberty
ip., Wabash co., Ind. The reserve was
)riginaU y established for Meshingomesia* s
ather, Metosinia, or Matosinia, in 1838,
md its inhabitants were known as Mesh-
ngom(»sia*H band. In 1872 the land was j
iivided among the surviving occupants'
md patentcHl to them, being the last land \
leld as an Indian reservation in Indiana. .'
(J. M.) '
Ma-shiaf-fo-me-tU. — Royce in Ist Rep. B. A. K..
!62, 1881. 1le-shi]if-ffo-me-iU.~Treaty of 1H40 in
:t. 8. Ind. Treat.. 510, 1873. Me-thin-gi-meyia.—
Houffh. map in Indiana (leol. Rep., 1883. Btalagle-
masy.— Common local form.
Meshkemau. An Ottawa village, com-
monly called **Meshkemau*s village,"
from the name of its chief, formerly ex-
isting on Maumee bay, Lucas co., Ohio,
on land sold in 18^^3. ' The name is also
written Meskemau and Mishkemau.
Meshtshe (M^c^-tc^^ * village at the mouth
of asmall creek * ) . A former Mishikh wut-
metunne village on upper Coquille r.,
Oreg. — Dorsev in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 232, 1890.'
Mesitat fSpan.: * little mesas' or table-
lands). An ancient settlement of the
Tepecano, the ruins of which are situated
B. of the Rio de Bolaflos, al)out 3 m. s. e.
of Mezquitic, in Jalisco, Mexico. — lird-
licka in Am. Anthrop., v, 389, 409, 1903.
Metkwadare (for ^^^8klmdds^J 'small
water-turtle.* — W. J.). A gens of the
Chippewa, q. v.
Me-ucwii-da'-re.— Morgan, An«. Sw., 166, 1877.
KUkwidjuii.~Wm. Jones, infn, 1906.
Metquawbuek (*red rock place.' — Hew-
itt). A former Potawatomi village, com-
monly known as '^Mesquawbuck's vil-
lage," from a chief of this name, near the
present Oswego, Kosciusko co., Ind., on
a reservation sold in 1836. The name is
spelled also Mesquabuck and Musqua-
buck. (j. M.)
Mesqnite (adapted from Aztec for
Progopis juliflora). A village of the cen-
tral Fkpago, probably in Pima co. , s. Ariz. ;
said to have 500 inhabitants in 1863 and
70 families in 1865.
■eaqoit.— Po8ton in Ind. AfT. Rep. 1863. 385, 1864.
Maaquita.— Browne, Apache Country, 291, 1869.
Hiaqiiito.^BaUe7 in Ind. Aff. Rep., 20S, 1858. Mus-
quito.— Ibid.. IZFt, 1865. Rais del Mbsquite.— Orozco
y Berra, Geog., 348, 1864 (sig. 'Mesquite root'
probably identical).
Mesquites. A trilw represented in the
18th century at the San Antonio missions,
Texas, They are mentioned as early as
1716, by Espinona, who met one Inaian
of this tribe w. of Arroyo Hondo (Diario,
1716, MS.); he also met others near the
Brazos with the Tonkawan Indians of
Rancherfa ( i rande. I n 1 727 Ki vera men-
tions them at San Antonio with the
Payayas and Agu&^tavas (Diario, leg.
1994, 1736). Then^ are proofs that in
their gentile state thev intermarried with
the Ervipiames and ^luruanuMS (Baptis-
mal Rei\ of Valero, partidas 194, 418),
and also with the Payayas (ibid., partida
90). The fin^t baptism of one of this
tril)e reconU»d at San Antonio de Valen)
is dated Nov. 8, 1720T In 1734 one per-
son at a residencia in San Ant^mio a(!te<l
as interpreter for Xarame, l*ayava, Sia-
guan, Aguastaya, and Mewjuite witnesses
(Residencia de Bustillos y Zevallos,
liexar archives, 17:^0-;i6); but too much
must not l)e inferred from this circum-
stance. In 1768 Sol is reiM)rt<Ml Mes<iuites
at San Jose mission, with Pamiiopas,
Aguastallas, Pastias, and Xarames ( I)ia-
rio, Mem. Nueva l^pafia, x.wii. 270),
and in 1793 Revillagigedo implied that
this tril)e constituted a part of the few
neophytes still at this mission (Carta,
Die, 2*7, 1793). A tril)e called Mesquites
lived in 1757 across the Rio (J rande at
Villa de Santander. Thes<» were divided
into 4 bands, consisting of 150 families
(Tiendo de Cuervo, Revista, Archivo
(leneral, MS. ). ( h. e. b.)
Mesquita.— Baptismal re<'(>nlKcitt>d alnne. i)artida
310. Mesquites.— SoIiH (1767) quotcil by H. E. Bol-
ton, infn, 1906. Mesquittes.— Re.Midencia, cited
above, 1734. Mesquites.— Rivera, Diario, le^. 1994,
1736.
Messiah legends. See (rhoM danre.
Mestethltnn {MH-tivl^-tun) . A former
village of the Tolowa, on the coast near
Crescent, Cal. — Dorsey in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, in, 236, 18iK).
Mestizo. See 3/<V/«, Mljed-hloods.
Meta. A Yurok village on Klamath r.,
Cal., 4 or 5 m. above Klamath bluffs.
Me'h-teh.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, ni,
13«, 1853. Meta.— A. L. Krocber, infn, 1905.
K£-ta.— Powers in C«>nt. N. A. Kthm»l.. in. 44, 1«77.
Metacom, Metacomet. See King Philip.
Metal-work. Before the arrival of the
whites, the tribes n. of Mexico had made
considerable progress in the arts of metal-
lurgy, dealing almost exclusively with
copper (q. V. ). The other metals utilized
were gold, silver, iron, and galena (lead
ore). Galena was known only in the
form of ore, and the same is tnie of iron
(hematite, pyrites, etc.), except where
chance bits of meteoric iron came into
the hands of the native artisan. Copper
alone was mined (see Mines and Quarries) .
848
METAL-WOBK
[b. a. e.
The four metals, copper, gold,. silver, and
iron (meteoric), were shaped mainly by
cold-hammering and grinding, but heat
no doubt was employed to facilitate the
hammering processes and in annealing.
It is believed that copper was sometimes
8 wedged, or in sheet form pressed into
molds. But the remarkable rei)0usse fig-
ures representing elaborately costumed
and winged personages in sheet metal,
found in mounds in (ieorgia (Thomas),
and other more highly conventionalized
figures from Florida mounds (Moore),
give evidence of a degree of skill seem-
ingly out of keeping with what is known of
the general accomplishments of the north-
ern tribes. Gushing, however, hasdemon-
strate<l that repou^ work of like char-
COPPER EAR ORNAMENT, WITH COPY BY WILLOUGHBY,
USING ONLY STONE TOOLS; 1-2. (willOOOMBy)
acter can be accomplished by simple
methods — the employment of pressure
with a bone or an antler point, the sheet
being placed upon a yielding surface, as
of buckskin; but some of this work, es-
pecially the Georgia specimens, shows a
degree of precision in execution appar-
ently beyond the reach of the methods
thus suggested.
Examples of overlaying or plating with
thin sheets of copp'^r, found by Moore in
the mounds of Florida and Alabama, smd
by Putnam, Moorehead, Mills, and others
in the mounds of Ohio, are hardly less re-
markable; but that these are well within
the range of workmen of intelligence em-
ploying only stone tools has been amply
proved by Willoughby. The thin sheets
of copi)er are readily produced by ham-
mering with stone tools with the aid of
annealing processes and the skilful use
of rivets (Moore). It ciin hardly be
doul)te(l tliat copper, gold, and silver
were sometimes melted by aboriginal
metal-workers n. of Mexico, and that
METHOD OF INDENTING AND CUTTING COPPER PLATES.
(gushing)
bits of native copper were freeil from the
matrix of rock bjr this means. There
seems to be no satisfactory record, how-
ever, of cai^ting the forms of objects even
in the rough, and there is no proof that
ores of any kind were reduced by means
of heat. It is a remarkable fact that
up to the present time no prehistoric
crucible, mold, pattern, or metal-
working tool of any kind whatsoever
has been identified. No metal-worker's
>»hop or furnace has l)een located, al-
though caches of implements and of the
blank forms of implements more or less
worked have been found in various placee,
BULL. 80]
METAMAPO METATE
849
8U|i;ge8ting manufacture in numbers by
specialists in the art. The use of artitioial
alloys was unknown, the specimens vl
gold-silver and gold-copper alloys ob-
tained in Florida oeing of exotic origin.
Stories of the hardenmg of copper by
these or other American tribes, other-
wise than by mere hammering, are all
without a shadow of foundation. A
few of the tril)e8, notably the Navaho
and some of the Pueblos of Arizona and
New Mexico, and the Haida, Tlingit, and
others in the far Northwest, are skilful
metal-workers, although the art a8 prac-
tised by the Navaho and described by
Matthews, while primitive in characU'f,
was adopted from the Spaniards. The
Haida, Tlingit, and other tribes of Brit-
ish Columbia and Alaska have prolmbly
retained the aboriginal methods in part
at least. Niblack (Rep. Nat. Mus. 1H88,
p. 320) speaks of tnis work as follows:
** The tools with which the Indian arti-
san works out the surprisingly well-
finished metal ornaments and implements
of this region are few in number. For
bracelet making the silversmith has a
hammer, several cold chisels, and an
etching tool which is merely a sharjHjned
steel point or e<lge. Improvised iron
anvils replace the stone implements of
this kind doubtlessly used in former days.
Copper is beaten into the required sha|K»8.
Steel tools now used are very deftly tem-
pered and sharj^entKi by the native artisan,
who retains the primitive form of his im-
plement or tool, and merely substitutes
the steel for the former stone blade or
head. The ingenuity which the Indians
show in adapting iron and steel to their
own uses is but one of the many evidences
of their cleverness and intelligence.'*
See Coppery Goldy Irony Silver.
The working of metals by primitive
methods are treated more or less fully
in the following works: Cushing in Am.
Anthrop.,vii,1894; Faster, Prehist. Kaces,
1878; Fowke, Archjeol. Hist. Ohio, 1902;
Holmes in Am. Anthrop., iii, 1901;
Hoy in Trans. Wis. Acad. Sci., iv, 1878;
McGuire in Am. Anthrop., v, no. 1,
1903; Matthews in 2d Rep. B. A. E.,
1883; Moore ( 1) in Am. Anthrop., v, no.
1,1903, (2) in Jour. Aca<l. Nat. Sci. Phila.,
1894-1903; Moorehead in Am. Anthrop.,
V, no. 1, 1903; Niblack in Rep. Nat. Mus.
1888, 1890; Packard in Smithson. Rep.
1892, 1893; Putnam in Ann. Reps. Pea-
body Mus.; Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, i-vi,
1851-57; Squier and Davis, Ancient Mon-
uments, 1848; Thomas in 12th Rep. B. A.
E., 1894; Willoughby in Am. Anthrop.,
y, no. 1, 1903. (w. n. h.)
Metamapo. A Cahisa village on the
B. w. coast of Florida, al)out 1570. —
Fontaneda Memoir {ca, 1575), Smith
trans., 19, 1854.
Bull. 30—05 54
Xetate (Aztec: metlcUl). The name com-
monly given to the somewhat flat stones
on which maize, acorns, seeds, chile, and
other foods are ground by crushing and
rubbing with a hand-stone called a mul-
ler, or mano (Spanish 'hand'). With
tribes depending largely on such mate-
rials for food, mealing stones of one kind
or another are an nnix)rtant factor in
their domestic economy. The metates
of middle America are often elal)orate in
shape, many of them l)eiiig curved to
represent animal forms, the upi)er sur-
face, or back, ser\ing for the grinding
plate. In New Mexico and Arizona the
slabs, although carefully shai)ed, are
usually with-
out legs or
other projec-
ti(ms; often
the}' are
trough-
shaped, and
METATE USED BY UlNTA UTES
(l-)
OBLONG MuLLER; new MEXICO
the muller used is an oblong flattish stone
of subrectangular outline. The modern
Pueblo Indians combine two or more of
the mealing plates in a
group iK'dded side by
side in clay and sepa-
rati^l and surrounded
by stone slal)s, adobe,
or boards to retain
the meal. The surfaces of the metates,
as well as of the mullers, are of
different textures, grading from coarse
lava to fine sandstone, and corn crushe<l
on the coarser stone is i)assed to the
others in succession for further refine-
ment until the ])ro<luct is almost as
fine as wheat fiour. The processes for
pulverizing and for ])ulping are practi-
cally the same, the grain or other sub-
stance l)einjr treated dry in one case and
moist in the other. The Mexican type
of metate does not extend northward
much beyond the limits of the Pueblo
region, although similar flattish stones .
were and are used for grinding in many
parts of the country. The typical grin(l-
ing plate grades through inany inter-
mediate forms into the typical mortar,
and the mano or muller similarly passes
from the typical flattish form into the
850
METATE RUIN METLAKATLA
(B. A.B.
discoidal and cylindrical pestle. Many of
these hand-stones serve equally well for
nibbing, rolling, and pounding. See Mor-
tars^ Mailers^ Notched plates, Pestles.
Discoidal Muller; Cali-
fornia (1-3)
Pestle-Muller :
L1NOI8 (1-4)
Consult Gushing in Millstone, ix, x,
1884-1885; Fewkes (1) in 17th Rep. B.
A. E., 1898, (2) 22d Rep. B. A. E., 1903;
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 1891;
James Stevenson in 2d Rep. B. A. E.,
1883; M. C. Stevenson in 23d Rep. B. A. E.,
1904. (W.H. H.)
Metate rnin. A prehistoric pueblo ruin
in the Petrified Forest, acrcjss the wash
from the "petrified bridge," near the
Navaho- Apache co. boundary, Arizona;
locally so called on account of the numer-
ous stone milling troughs, or metates, set
on edge in circular or linear form and
scattered over the surface. The builders
of the pueblo are unknown. The pottery,
gray-brown and black in color, is coarse
in texture and decorated with rude in-
cision and by indented coiling. — Hough
in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1901, 318, 1903.
Metates. A former Opata pueblo at the
E. base of the Sierra de Teras, about 12 m.
w. of Basoraca, e. Sonora, Mexico. Pos-
. sibly identical with Teras, Guepacomatzi,
or Toapara, which pueblos are mentioned
in early documents as being in that vi-
cinity.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
IV, 524 etseq., 1892.
Metea (prob. for Metawdy * he sulks.' —
W. J.). A Potawatomi chief, distin-
guished in his tribe as a warrior and an
orator. When the Potawatomi were sub-
sidized by the British at the beginning of
the War of 1812 he was one of the leaders
of the party that massacred the families
of the garrison and citizens of Chicago as
they were retreating to BetroiJ. He led
the band that harassed the troops who
marched in the fall of 1812 to the relief of
Ft Wayne and was shot in the arm by Gen.
W. H.^Hiirrison. At a council held atChi-
cago in 1821 he impressed the whites by
his eloquence and reasoning powers, and
also when the treaty of the Wabash was
concluded in 1826. He advocated the
education of Indian youth and sent several
from his tribe to the Choctaw academy in
Kentucky. He died in a drunken de-
bauch at Ft Wayne, in 1827, after having
conducted difiicult negotiations with dig-
nity and skill in a conference with com-
missioners of the Government. — Mc-
Kenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, 59-64,
1858. See Muskwawasepeotan,
Meteahke. A Mandan band.
High Village.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 158, 1877.
Me-te-ah'-ke.— Ibid.
*Meteweme8ick ( * place of black earth ' ).
A former Nipmuc (?) settlement on Quine-
baug r., near Sturbridge, Mass. — Roger
Williams (1643) quoted by Tooker, Al-
gonquian Series, viii, 33, 1901.
llLe%\iow(MeV'how), A Salishan tribe of
E. Washington, formerly living about
Methow r. and Chelan lake, now chiefly
gathered on the Colville res. Their num-
ber is not officially reported.
Battle-le-mule-emauoh.— R0S8, Adventures, 290,
1847. Lahtohi.— Van Valkenburgh in Ind. Aff.
Rep., 235, 1865 (perhaps a misprint for Methows).
Keat-who.— Ross, op. cit. Meshons.— Mooney in
14th Rep. B. A. E., 734. 1896. Met-oow-we.— Orig.
Jour. Lewis and Clark, iv, 321, 1905. Metoowwee.—
Lewis and Clark, Exped., 11, 252, 1814. Meteow-
wee.— Ibid., 11, 318, 1817. Methau.— Ind. Aflf. Rep.,
263, 1877. Methewi.— H. R. Doc. 102, 43d Cong., fst
sess., 1, 1874. Methomg.— Shanks, et al. (1873),
ibid., 4. Methow.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 302, 1877. Ki-
taui, — Mooney in 14th Rep. B. A. E., pi. Ixxxviii,
1896. Mithouiei.— Winans in Ind. Aff. Rep., 28,
1870.
Methy . The burbot ( iMta mamlosa ) , the
loche of the Canadian French, a fish
common in the waters of n. w. Canada.
The word is taken from the name of this
fish in the Wood Cree dialect of Algon-
quian, the Cree proper term being mihyey,
according to Lacombe. L. Methy in Atha-
basca is named from this fish; also a lake
in Labrador. (a. f. c.)
Meti. A former rancheria of gentile
({>robably Diegueilo) Indians near San
Diego, s. Cal. — Ortega (1775) quoted by
Bancroft, Hist. Cal., i, 253, 1884.
•M^tis ('mixed,' from French inetis, a
derivative of Latin miscere, *to mix^,
or metif. A term used by the French-
speaking population of the N. W. to
designate persons of mixed white and
Indian blood. Among the Spanish-
speaking population of the S. W. the
word mestizo, of the same derivation, is
used, but is applied more especially to
those of half-white and half-Indian blood.
The term mustee, a corruption of mestizo,,
was formerly in use in the Gulf states.
In the W. the term ' 'half-breed' ' is loosely
applied to all persons of mixed white
and Indian blood, without regard to the
proportion of each. See Mixed-hloods,
(j. M.)
MaitifFi.—Brevel;?dc Sibley (1806) in Am. State Pa-
pers, Ind. Aff , 1, 730. 1832. ieitigos.— Williams, Vt.,
1, 494, 1809 ( misprint) . Mestizo.— Correct Spanish
form; feminine mentiza. Metis. — Correct French
form. Muatees.— Report of 1741 in Carroll, Hist.
Coll. S. C. , II, 353, 1836. Musteses.— Bermuda Royal
Gazette, July 13, 1875,/rfc Jour. Anthrop. Inst., v,
491, 1876 (used in Bermuda for descendants of In-
dian slaves brought from the U. S.). Wissftkod^
winini.— Baraga, Otchipwe-Eng. Diet., 421, 1880
' lf-bumt\ '
. eferring 1
light and dark complexion: pi. Wissdhodhmnini-
(Chippewa name: 'half-burnt wood man'; from
wi88dkod£, 'burnt trees', referring to their mixed
wog. He gives aiaJbitdivisid as the literal word
for 'half-breed').
Metlakatla. A Tsimshian town 15 m. s.
of Port Simpson, Brit. Col. Anciently
BULL. 30]
METOAC — METUTAHANKE
851
' there were many towns in this neighbor-
hood, and while the mission station of the
Church of England (established in 1857
at a Tsimshian village of the same
name) was conducted by Rev. Wm. Dun-
can, Metlakatla was a nourishing place.
Trouble arising over the conduct of his
work, Duncan moved in 1887 to Port Ches-
ter, or New Metlakatla, on Annette id.,
Alaska, and most of the Indians followed
him. The old town, which contained 198
inhabitants in 1906, is now the site of an
Indian school of the Church of England.
New Metlakatla, including whites and In-
dians, numbered 823 in 1890 and 465 in
1900. See i/wMon*. (j. r. s.)
Ketlah Oatlah.— Horetzky, Canada on Pac, 148,
1874. Metlahoatlah.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vo-
cabs. Brit. Gol., map, 1884. Metlahkatlah.— Heming
in Can. Pacific R. R. Rep. Prog., iii, 1877. Met-
lakahtta.— Whymper. AlaHka, 59, 1869. Metlakat-
U.— Can. Ind. Aff., pt. li, 68, 1902. Metta-katU.—
DawRon, Queen Charlotte Ids., 123b, 1880.
-^ Metoae (contraction of Meld-anmo-acky
* land of the ear-shell or periwinkle.* —
Tooker). A collective term embracing
the Indians of Long Island, N. Y., who
seem to have l)een divideil into the follow-
ing tribes, subtril)e8, or bands: Canarsee,
Corchaug, Manhassi't, Massapequa, Ma-
tinecoi', ^ferric, Montauk, Nesaquake,
Patchoa^, Rockaway, Secatoag, Setauket,
and Shinnecock. There were l)esides
these some minor bands or villages which
have receive<l special designations. They
were closely connec*ted linguistically and
politically, and were probably derived
from the same immediate ethnic stem.
Ruttenlxjr classes them as branches of the
Mahic^n. The Montauk, who formed the
leading trilw in the eastern part of the
island, are often confoundea with the
Metoae, and in some instances the Can-
arsee of the western part have also been
confounded with them. The eastern
tribes were at one time subject to the
Pequot and afterward to the Narraganset,
while the Iroquois claimed dominion over
the western tril)es. They were numerous
at the first settlement of the island, but
rapidly wasted away from epidemics and
wars with other Indians and with the
Dutch, disposing of their lands piece by
I piece to the whites. About 1788 a large
part of the survivors joined the Brother-
ton Indians in Oneida co., N. Y. The
rest, represented chiefly by the Montauk
and shinnecock, have dwindled to
perhaps a dozen individuals of mixed
blood. The Indians of Long Island were
a seafaring people, mild in temperament,
diligent in the pursuits determined by
their en\ironment, skilled in the manage-
ment of the canoe, seine, and spear, and
dexterous in the making of sea wan or
wampum ( Flint ) . The chieftaincies were
hereaitary by lineal descent, including
females when there was no male repre-
sentative.
The Metoae villages were Canarsfi^,
Cotsjewaminck, Cutchogue (Corchaug)^
Jameco, Keskaechquerem (?), Marych-
kenwikingh, Maspeth (Canarsee), Matti-
tuck (Corchaug), Merric, Mirrachtau-
hacky,Mochgonnekonck, Montauk^ Nach-
aquatuck, Nesaquake, Ouheywichkingh,
Patchoag. Rechquaakie, Setauket, Sichtey-
hacky, Wawepex ( Matinecock ) . (j.m.)
La Porcelaine.—Vaudreuil (1724) in N. Y. Doc. C6l.
Hist. , IX, 937, 1855. Long Island Indians.— Common
early English name. Malowwaoki.— Hall, N. W.
States, 34, 1849 (misprint form and wrongly
located ) . Katauwakes. — Thompson , Ix)ng Id . , 53,
1839. Katowaclu.— Patent of 1664 in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., II, 296, l&^C'Matowacks or Long Island").
Mattouwaoky.— De Laet {ca. 1633) in N. Y. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 2d 8., I, 296, 1841. Mattowaz.— Shea.
Cath. Miss., 16, 1855. Matuwacks.— Yates and
Moulton in Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 75,
1872. Mertowaoks.— Boudinot, Star in the West,
127, 1816. Metoacs.— Sch(K)lcraft in N. Y. Hist.
Soc. Proc., II, 85, 1844. Metouwacks.— Winfield,
Hudson Co., 9, 1874. Metowacks.— Brodhend in
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 75, 1872. Milo-
wacka.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816 (mis-
print). Sewan-akies.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
VI, 147, 1867 ('Shell land bands,' from sewan, ' the
wampum shell,' anfl aukie, 'land ').
Metooanm. A village, probably of the
Chowanoc, situated on Chowan r., in the
£ resent Bertie co., N. C, in 1585.
ietackwem.— Lane (1586) in Hakluyt, Voy., iii,
312, 1810. Metocaum.-^mith (1629), Va., i, map,
repr. 1819. Metocunent.— Dutch map (1621) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., I, 1856.
Hetonsceprinionek (prob.for Metumne-
nhctigi, lit. *nien wlio walk with bare
[feet] * ; it i^not the idiom for that phrase,
however, but a term referring to people
in general . — W . J. ) . A term apparentl y
applied by Bacqueville de la Potherie
(Hist. Am., II, 108, 1758) tothe Foxes, Illi-
nois, Kickapoo, Miami, etc., collectively.
Metsmetskop (Mow, miserable, stink-
ing*). A name applied by Natchez of
the upper class to those of the lowest
socnal grade. This was composed princi-
pally of people of the same blood but also
included some small alien tril)es. Cf.
Stinkards. (j. r. s.)
Kiohe-lCiohe-auipy.— Du Pratz, Hist. I>a., ii, 393,
1758. Kiche Hiohequipi.— Bossu (1751). Travels
La., 65, 1771 (sig. 'stinking fellow'). Puants.—
Ibid., 394 (applied also to the Winnebago) . Stin-
oards.— Latham, Essays, 408, 1860. Stinkard!.—
P6nicaut (1704) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s.,
94, 1869.
Hetstoasath {MEtsto^asath), A sept of
the Toquart, a Nootka tribe. —Boas in ()th
Rep. N. W. Tribes of Canada, 81, 1890.
Hetnkatoak. A Kaviagmiut village at
Port Clarence, Alaska. — Eleventh Cen-
sus, Alaska, 162, 1898.
Metntahanke (Mower village*). One of
two Mandan villages in 1804; situated on
Missouri r., al)out 4 m. below Knife r.,
N. Dak. It was almost exterminated by
smallpox in 1887.
Matoolonha.— Thwaites, Grig. Jour. Lewis and
Clark, VII, index, 19a5. Matootonha.— Lewis and
Clark, Exped., i, 120, 1814. Ma-too-ton'-ka.— Lewis
and Clark, Discov., 24, 1806. Metutahanke.— Mat-
thews, Ethnog. and Philol. Hidatsa, 14, 1877.
Kih-tutta-hang-kuBoh.— Maximilian as quoted bv
Matthews, op. cit. Mih-Tutta-Eang-Xuah. — Maxi-
852
MEXAM — MIAMI
[B. ▲.!.
milian. Trav., 335, 1843. MitnUhankith.— Mat-
thews, Ethnog. and Philol. Hidatoa, 14, 1877.
Hitatahaiikao.— Dorsey in Am. Natur., 829, Oct.
1882.
Mexam. See Mrikaah.
Meyascosic. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, in 1608, on the n. side of
James r., iii Charles City co., Va. — Smith
(1629), Va., I, map, repr. 1819.
Meyemma. Mentioned by Gibbs
(Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 139, 1863)
as a Uupa village in Hupa valley, Cal., in
1851. ^ot identified. The name is per-
haps of Yurok origin.
Meyo. The Lizard clan of the pueblo
of Laguna, N. Mex. Although La^na
was not founded until 1699, the origin of
the clan is unknown to the natives. It
forms a phratry with the Skurshka
(Water-snake), Sqowi ( Rattlesnake) , and
Hatsi (F^arth) clans, whi<5h came from
Sia, Oraibi (probably), and Jemez, re-
spectively, (p. w. H.)
M^o-h^o^.— Hodge in Am. Antbrop., ix, 351,
1896 {hdru)ch = • people ' ) . ^
Mezqnital ( Span : * mesquite grove * ) . A
former pueblo of the Tepehuane on the
upper waters of Rio de San Pedro, s.
Durango, Mexico, and the seat of a Span-
ish mission. It is now a Mexican town.
8. Franoiioo del Mezquital. — Orozeo y Berra, Geog.,
318, 1«64.
Mgesewa (for Me^gezi, *bald eagle*).
A gens of the Potawatomi, q. v.
Meffesi.— Wm. Jones, infn, 1906. M*-ge-ze'-wa.—
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 167. 1877.
Miacomit. A village formerly on Nan-
tucket id., off the s coast of Massachu-
setts.—Writer of 1807 in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 2d 8., Ill, 26, 1846.
Miahwahpitsiks ( Mi-ahtrah^-plt-slks,
'seldom lonesome*)- A division of the
Fiegan tril)e of the Siksika.
Hi-i&-wah'-pit-aiks.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Ixxlgc
Tales, 209, 1892. Seldom Lonesome.— Ibid., 225.
MiakechakeBa. One of the two divi-
sions of the Sisseton Sioux. Their
habitat in 1824 was the region of Blue
Earth and Cottonwood rs., Minn., ex-
tending westward to the Coteau des
Prairies. Unlike the Kahra, they had no
fixed villages, no mud or bark cabins.
They hunted on Blue Earth r. in winter,
and during the summer pursued the buf-
falo as far as Missouri r. Thev numbered
about 1,000.
Lower Siasetons.— Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., iir, 250,
1880. Kiah-keegack-sah.— Lewis and Clark, Dis-
cov., 34, 1806. mia Keohakesa.^Long, Exped. St
Peter'8 R., l, 378. 1824. South Sussetons.— Ind.
Aff. Rep., 495. 1839.
Miami (? Chippewa: Omaumeg, * people
who live on the peninsula* ). An Algon-
quian trilKj, usually designated by early
English writers as Twigh twees {tivaf'h
twaf*hj the cry of a crane. — Hewitt), from
their own name, the earliest recorded
notice of which is from information fur-
nished in 1658 by Gabriel Druillettes
(Jes. Rel. 1658, 21, 1858), who called them
the Oumamik, then living 60 leagues from
St Michel, the first village of the Pota-
watomi mentioned by him; it wjua there-
fore at or about the mouth of Green
bay. Wis. Tailhan (Perrot, M^moire)
says that they withdrew into the Missis-
sippi valley, 60 leagues from the bay,
ana were established there from 1657 to
1676, although Bacqueville de la Pothe-
rie asserts that, with the Mascoutens, the
Kickapoo, and part of the Illinois, they
came to settle at that place about 1667.
The first time the French came into
actual contact with the Miami was when
Perrot visited them about 1668. His
second visit was in 1670, when they were
living at the headwaters of Fox r., Wis.
In 1671 a part at least of the tribe were
living with the Mascoutens in a palisaded
LUM-KI-KUM- MIAMI
village in this locality (Jes. Rel. 1671, 45,
1858). Soon after this the Miami parted
from the Mascoutens and formed new set-
tlements at the s. end of L. Michigan and
on }Ca\fLn\AToo r^ Mich. The settlements
at the 8. end of the lake were at Chicago
and on St Joseph r., where missions
were established late in the 17th century,
although the former is mentioned as a
Wea village at the time of Marquette's
visit, and Wea were found there in
1701 by De Courtemarche. It is likely
that these Wea were the Miami men-
tione<l hy Allouez and others as being
united with the Mascoutens in Wisconsin.
The chief village of the Miami on St
Joseph r. w^as, according to Zenobius
(I^ Clercq, ii, 133), about 15 leagues
inland, in lat. 41 °. The extent of territory
occupied by this tribe a few years later
compels the conclusion that the Miami
BULL. 30]
MIAMI
853
in Wisconsin, when the whites first heard
of them, formed but a part of the tribe,
and that other bodies were alreaciy in
N. E. Illinois and n. Indiana. As tlie
Miami and their allies were found later
on the Wabash in Indiana and in n. w.
Ohio, in which latter territory tbey gave
their name to three rivers, it would st»em
that they had moved s. e. from the local-
ities where firnt known within historic
times. Little Turtle, their famous chief,
' said: ** My fathers kindled the first fire at
I Detroit: thence they extended their lines
' to the headwaters of the Scioto; thence
to its mouth; thence down the Ohio to
the mouth of the Wabash, and thence to
Chicago over L. Michigan.'* When Vin-
cennes was nent by Gov. Vaudreville in
1705 on a mission to the Miami they were
found occupying princii)ally the territory
N. w. of the upi)er Waltash. There wa^'a
Miami village at Detroit iii 1 7Q3, but their
chief settlement was still (mist Jose.])!! r.
In 1711 the Miami and the Wea had three
villages on the St Jaseph, Maumee, and
WalSsh. Kekionga, at the head of the
Maumee, lx?came the chief seat of the
Miami proper, while Ouiatenon, on the
Wabash, was the headquarters of the Wea
branch. By the encroachments of the
Potawatonn, Kickapoo, and other north-
em tribes the Miami were driven from St
Joseph r. and the country n. w. of the
Wabash. They sent out colonies to the k.
and formed settlements on Miami r. in
Ohio, and i)erhap8 as far e. as the Scioto.
This country they held until the peace of
1761^, when they retired to Indiana, and
the abandoniHi (M)untry was occupied by
the Shawnee. They took a i)rominent
part in all the Indian wars in Ohio. valley
until the close of the war of 1812. Soon
afterward they l)egan to sell their lands,
and by 1827 ha<l disi>oHe<l of most of their
holdings in Indiana and had agreed to re-
move to Kansas, whence they went later
to Indian Ter., where the remnant still
resides. In all treatv nt^gotiations they
were considereil as original owners of the
Wal)ash country and all of w. Ohio,
while the other trilx^s in that n»gion were
regarded as tenants or intruders on their
lands. A considerable part of the tribe,
commonly known as Meshingomesia's
band, continued to reside on a reserva-
tion in AVabash co., Ind., until 1872, when
the land was divided among the 8ur\iv-
ors, then numbering about 300.
The Miami men were described in 1718
as ''of medium height, well built, heads
rather round than oblone, countenances
agreeable rather than sedate or morose,
swift on foot, and excessively fond of
racing.*' The women were generally
well clad in deerskins, while the men
used scarcely any covering and were tat-
tooed all over the body. They were hard-
working, and raised a species of maize
unlike that of the Indians of Detroit,
described as "white, of the same size
as the other, the skin much finer, and
the meal much whiter.'* According to
the early French explorers the Miami
were distinguished for polite manners,
mild, affable, and sedate <'haracter, and
their respect for and perfect obedience to
their chiefs, who had greater authority
than those of other Algoiuiuian ani
N. w. tribes. They usually spoke slowly.
They were land travelers rather than
canoemen. According to Hennepin,
when they saw a herd of buffalo tney
gathered in great nunilwrs and set fire to
the grass about the animals, leaving open
a passage where they posteil themselves
with their bows and arrows; the buffalo,
sei^king toescajH* the fire, were compelled
to pass the Indians, who kilted large num-
bers of them. The women spun thread
of buffalo hair, with which they made
bags to carry the meat, to&sted or some-
times dried in the sun. Their cabins
were covered with rush mats. Acconi-
ing to Perrot, the village which he vis-
ited was situated on a hill and sur-
rounded by a palisa<le. On the other
hand, Zenobius says that I^ Salle, who
visited the villages on St Jos(»ph r.,
taught them how to defend themselves
with palisades, and even made them
erect a kind of fort with intrenchments.
Infidelity of the wife, as among many
other Indians, was punished by clipping
the nose. According to early explorers,
they worshiped the sun and thunder,
but did not honor a host of minor
deities, like the Huron and the Ottawa.
Three forms of burial appear to have
been practised by the (ti vision of the
tril)e living alM)ut Ft Wayne: (1) The
ordinary ground burial in a shallow grave
prepared to receive the bcxly in a recum-
Wnt jMJsition. (2) Surface burial in a
hollow log; these have lK»en fouml in
heavy forests; sometimes a tret* was split
and the halvi^s hollowed out to receive
the IxkIv, when it was either closed with
withes or fastene<l to the ground with
crossed stakes; sometimes a hollow tree
was used, the ends l)eing closed. (8) Sur-
face burial wherein the body was cover-
ed with a small })en of logs, laid as in a
log cabin, the courses meeting at the top
in a single log.
The French authors commonly divided
the Miami into six bands: Piankashaw,
Wea, Atchatchakangouen, Kilatika, Men-
gakonkia, and Pepicokia. Of tlu^se the
first two have come to l)e recognized as
distinct tribes; the other names are no
longer known. The Pepicokia, men-
tioned in 1796 with the Wea and Pianka-
shaw, may have been absorbed by the
latter. Several treaties were made with
t>
854
MIAMI
[B.i
a band known as Eel Rivers, formerly liv-
ing near Thorn town, Boone cc, Ind., but
they afterward joined the main body on
the Wabash.
According to Morgan (Anc. Soc, 168,
1877) the Miami have 10 gentes: (l)Mow-
hawa ( wolf ) , ( 2 ) Mongwa ( loon) , ( 3 ) Ken-
da wa (eagle), (4) Ahpakosea (buzzard),
(5) Kanozawa (Kanwasowau, panther),
(6) Pilawa (turkey), (7) Ahseponna (rac-
coon), (8) Monnato (snow), (9) Kulswa
(sun), ( 10) Water. Chauvignerie, in 1737,
said that the Miami had two principal to-
tems— the elk and crane — wnile some of
them had the bear. The French writers
call the Atchatchakangouen (Crane) the
leading division. At a great conference
on the Maumee in Ohio in 1793 the
Miami signed with the turtle totem. None
of these totems occurs in Morgan's list.
It is impossible to give a satisfactorjr
estimate of the numbers of the Miami
at any one time, on account of confusion
with the Wea and Piankashaw, who
probably never exceeded 1,500. An esti-
mate in 1764 gives them 1,750; another
in the following year places their num-
ber at 1,250. In 1825 the population of
the Miami, Eel Rivers, and Wea was
given as 1,400, of whom 327 were Wea.
Since their removal to the W. they have
rapidlv decreased. Only 57 Miami were
officially known in Indian Ter. in 1886,
while the Wea and Piankashaw were
confederated with the remnant of the
Illinois under the name of Peoria, the
whole body numbering but 149; these in-
creased to 191 in 1903. The total number
of Miami in 1905 in Indian Ter. was 124;
in Indiana, in 1900, there were 243; the
latter, however, are greatly mixed with
white blood. Including individuals scat-
tere<l among other tribes, the whole num-
ber is probably 400.
The Miami joined in or made treaties
with the United States as follows: (1)
Greenville, O., with Gen. Anthony
Wayne, Aug. 3, 1795, defining the boun-
dary between the United States and tribes
w. of Ohio r. and ceding certain tracts of
land; (2) Ft Wayne, Ind., June 7, 1803.
with various tribes, defining boundaries
and ceding certain lands; (3) Grouseland,
Ind., Aug., 21, 1805, ceding certain lands
in Indiana and defining boundaries; (4)
Ft Wa^ne^ Ind., Sept. 30, 1809, in which
the Miami, Eel River tribes, and Dela-
wares ceded certain lands in Indiana, and
the relations between the Delawares and
Miami regarding certain territory are de-
fined; (5) Treaty of peace at Greenville,
0., July 22, 1814, between the United
States, the Wyandot, Delawares, Shaw-
nee, Seneca, and the Miami, including the
Eel River and Wea tribes; (6) Peace
treaty of Spring Wells, Mich., Sept. 8,
1815, by the Miami and other tribes; (7)
St Mary's, O., Oct. 6, 1818, by which the
Miami ceded certain lands in Indiana;
(8) Treaty of the Wabash, Ind., Oct. 23,
1826, by which the Miami ceded all their
lands in Indiana, n. and w. of Wabash
and Miami rs. ; (9) Wyandot village, Ind.,
Feb. 11, 1828, by which the Eel River
Miami ceded all claim to the reservation
at their village on Sugar Tree cr., Ind.;
(10) Forksof Wabash, Ind., Oct. 23, 1834,
by which the Miami ceded several tracts
in Indiana; (11) Forks of the Wabash,
Ind., Nov. 6, 1838, by which the Miami
ceded most of their remaining lands in
Indiana, and the United States agreed to
furnish them a reservation w. of the Mis-
sissippi; (12) Forksof the Wabash, Ind.,
Nov. 28, 1840, by which the Miami ceded
their remaining lands in Indiana and
agreed to remove to the country assigned
them w. of the Mississippi; (13) Wash-
ington, June 5, 1854, by wnich they ceded
a tract assigned by amended treaty of Nov.
28, 1840, excepting 70,000 a. retained as a
reserve; (14) Washington, Feb. 23,1867,
with Seneca and others, in which it is
stipulated that the Miami may become
confederated with the Peoria and others
if they so desire.
Among the Miami villages were Chi:
cago, Chippekawkay, Choppatee*s village,
Kekionga, Kenapacoma(]ua, Knkomoj
Kowasikka, Little Turtle's village, Me-
shingomesia, Missinquimeschan (Pianka-
shaw), Mississinewa, Osage, Papakeecha,
Piankashaw (Piankashaw), rickawil-
lanee, White Raccoon's village, Seek's
village, St Francis Xavier (mission, with
others), Thorntown (Eel River Miami).
(j. M. c. T.)
Allianie's.— Beckwith in Indiana Geol. Rep., 43,
1883 (misprint). Maiama.— Janson, Stranger in
Am., 192, 1807. M'amiwis.— Katinesque, Am. Na-
tions, I, 157, 1836. Maumee.— Washington (1790)
in Am. St. Papers, Ind. Aff., i, 143, 1832. Maomet.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 89. 1855. Kaumiet.—
Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 33,1885.
Mawmee.— Im lay. West Ter. , 364, 1797. Me-a-me-a-
ga.— Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 287, 1871. Mea-
me».— La Barre (1683) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix,
202, 1855. Meamis.— Ibid. Memiloanioue.— Jes.
Rel. 1672, LViii, 40, 1K99. Memia.— Le Barre
(1683), op. Cit., 208. Menoamit.— Boudinot, Star in
the West, 1*27, 1816 (misprint L Metonaoeprin-
ioueki.— Bacqueyille ae la Potnerie, Hist. Am.,
II, 103, 1753 ('Walkers', 'well on their feef;
so called because they traveled much on foot,
and not in canoes). Kiamee.— Jones, Ojeb-
way Inds., 178, 1861. Kiames. — Lewis and Clark.
Travels, 12, 1806. Kiami.— Oatschet, Potawatoml
MS., B. A. £., 1878 (Potawatomi name; plural,
Miamik). Miamiha.— Coxe, Carolana, 49, 1741.
Miamioiiek.— Jes. Kel. 1670, 90, 1858. Kiamit.— Du
Chesneau (1681) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 158,
1855. Hineamies.— Trader of 1778 in Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, iii, 561, 1853. Miramia.— De Bougain-
ville (1757) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., X, 608, 1868
(misprint). Miyamit.— JelTerys, French Doms.,
pt. 1, map, 1761. Myamioks.— Lamberville
il686) in N. Y. Doc. cfol. Hist, iii, 489, 1858.
[yamis.— Membra (ca. 1680) in Shea, Miss. Val.,
152, 1852. Naked Indiana.— Doc. of 1728 in Min. of
Prov. Conn, of Pa.. Ill, 312, 1840. Nation . . . dela
Orue.— Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am., iv,
55,1753. Omameeg.— Warren (1852) in Schoolcraft,
a
BDLL. 30]
MIAMI RIVER MICA
855
[nd. Tribes, v,39,1855(Chippewa name) . O-maum-
••g.— Warren (1862) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v,
33, 1885 (Chippewa name). Omianioks.— Lamber-
ville (1686) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 489, 1853.
Omie.— Writer of 1786 in MasH. Hist. Soc. (^)ll., Ist
8., Ill, 26, 1794. Ouimiamies.— N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., Ill, 489, note, 1853. Oumamens.— Neill in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 413, 1885. Oumami.— Jes.
Rel. 1670, 94, 1858. Oumamik.— Ibid., 1658, 21,
1858. Oumaniei.— Lahontan, New Voy., i. map,
1736. Onmeami.— La Famine council (1684) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i.x, 238, 1865. Oumiamiwi.—
Bechefer (1682), ibid.. 170. Pkiwi-l^ni.— (iut-
schet, Shawnee MS., B. A. E., 1879 (Shawnee
name; plural, Pkiwi-K'uigi, 'dust or a.sheH
people' ). ftuitway*.— Doc. of 1747 in N. Y. Do<'.
Col. Hist., VI, 391, 1855 ( -Twightwees? They do
not appear to have been the Quatoghees or Hur-
ons, as thought by the editor). Qwikties. — Col-
den (1727), Hist. Five Nations, 69, 1747 (misprint
for Twiktwies). 8a*>«hkiA-a-runu. — Gatschet,
Wyandot MS., B. A. E., 1881 (Huron name,
meaning * people dre.ssing finely, fanta.stically ',
i. e., 'dandy people'). Tawatawas. — Brinton,
Lenapc Legends, 146, 1885 (fnjm the Algoncjuian
/au'a, 'naked'; henceTwightwees). Tawatawee. —
Doc. of 1759, ibid., 2:12. TawixUwes.— < Joldman in
West. Reserve Hist. Sck*., Tract no. 6. I.July 1871.
Tawixti.— (iiis.sefeld, map, 1797 (used for I*icka-
willanee village. <j. v. According to Harris, Tour,
137, 1805, the name occurs cm Hutchins' map,
CO. 1764. It is another form of Twightwee).
Tawiztwi.— La Tour, map, 1784 (used for I'icka-
willanee village, q. v.). Tewicktowe*.— Harrison
(1814) in Drake. Tecumseh, 159, 1852. Titwa.—
Doc. {ca. 1700) in Min. of Prov. Conn, of I*a., i.
411, 1838. Tooweehtooweet.— Edwards (1751) in
Ma.ss. Hist. So<'. (k>ll., 1st s., x, 147, 1809. Tuih-
tuihronoons.— Colden (1727), Five Nations, 61, 1747
(Iroquois name). Twechtweya.— Doc. of 17*28 in
Min. of Prov. (\mn. of Pa., in, 312, 1840. Tweegh-
tweet.— Albany conf. (1754) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., VI, 873, 1855. Twghtwee*.— Domenech, Des-
erts, I, 444, 1860. Twichtweer— I»skiel (1794) in
iluttenlH'r, Tribes Hudson R., '336. 1872. Twich-
twiohs.— Dtmgaii (1687) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hi.st.,
Ill, 439, 185:i. Twichtwioki.— Livingstcm (1687),
ibid., 111,443, 18'>3. Twichtwighs.— Schuyler (1702),
ibid., IV, 979, 1854. Twichwichea.— Bleeker (1701 ),
ibid., 918. Twioktwiok*.— Albany cimf. (1726),
ibid., V, 791, 1855. Twioktwigs.— Doc. of ir>88. ibid.,
III, 565, 1853. Twictweei.— C^repy, map, ra. 1755.
Twiotwiots.— Bellomont (1701) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., IV, 834, 1854. Twight.— Lattre, map, 1784
(error for Twightwees; the 'Miamis' are also
given as distinct). Twightees.— Hamilton (1750)
in N. Y . D<K\ ( 'ol . H ist . , v 1 . 593, 18J>5. Twighteeya.—
Johnson (1753), ibid., 779. Twighties.— Johnson
( 1763) , ibid. , V 1 1 . 572, 18,56. Twightwees.— Weiser
(1748) in Rupp. West. I'a..app., 14, 1846. Twight-
wickt.— Jamison (1697) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
IV, 294, 18.M. Twightwies.— Lahontan (1703) in
Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 5, 6, 1848. Twightwighs.—
Doc. of 1687 in N. Y. Dtn-. Col. Hi.st., in, 431 185;i.
Twightwis Roanu.— Dobbs. Hudson Bay, 27, 1744.
Twigtees.— Martin, N. C, ii, 62, 1829. Twigth-
tweet.— Dwight and Partri<jge in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 1st s., V, 121. 18ir). Twig-Twee.— Li ndesav
(1751) in N. Y. Doc. Col. H&t., VI, 706, 1855.
Twigtwees.- Weiser (1748) in Rupp, West. Pa.,
app., 16, 1846. Twigtwioks.— Cornbury (1708) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 65, 1855. Twigtwie*.—
Lindesay (1749), ibid., vi, 538, 1865. Twigtwig.—
Cortland (1687). ibid., in, 434, 1853. Twiswioki,^
Dongan (1687), ibid., 476. Twitchweet.— Hamilton
(1749), ibid., vi, 531, 1855. Twithuay*.— Conf. of
1793 in Am. State Pap., Ind. AfT., I, 477, 1832.
Twitwlheno"'.— Hewitt, Onondaga MS., B. A. E.,
1888 (Onondaga name ). Utands.— Barcia, Ensayo,
289, 1723 (misprint frc>m Lahontan). Wa-ya-ti-
no'-ke.— Morgan, Consang. and Afhn.. 287. 1871.
Womiamik.— Squier in Beach, Ind. Miscel., 34,
1877 ( = * Beaver children ' ) .
Miami Biver. A Seminole settlement,
with 63 inhabitants in 1880, al)Oiit 10 m.
N. of the site of Ft Dallas, not far from
Biscayne bay, on l^ittle Miami r., Dade
CO., Fla.— MacCauley in 5th Rep. B. A. E.,
478, 1887.
Miantonomo. A noted chief of the Nar-
ra^anset, nephew of Canonicus. In 1()82
he visited lioston and was received
by the governor. He was more than
once suspectetl of disloyalty to the Kng-
lish, but managed to clear himself when
summoned to Boston in 1()36. He helped
the English against the Pequot the next
year and warned against the Mohegan. In
1638 he signed the tripartite agreement
lietween the English of Connecticut, the
Narraganset, and the Mohegan. He is said
to have been impressed by the preaching
of Roger Williams in 1643. During
the years 1640-42 he was suspected of
treachery to the English, but again made
satisfactory explanations. In 1643 war
broke out between the Mohegan and the
Narraganset, and in a battle in which
the latter were defeated ^liantonomo was
taken pri.^^oner. lie was delivered to the
English at Hartford, was tried at Bostcm
in Septeml>er, 1643, by the Court of
Commissioners of the United Colonies
of New England, who, after referring the
mattt^r to the convocation of the clergy,
whicli condemntMl him, sentenced him
tt) death at the hands of Unca«. This
sentence was barbarouslv executed by
\Vawe<iua, the brother of Cncas, in the
presence of the latter. For this disgrace-
ful proceeding the English authorities
were to blame, as otherwise Cncas would
never have taken his prisoner's life.
De Forest (Hist. Incls. of Conn.,
198, 1852) takes a rather high view of
the character of Miantonomo, whom he
characterizes as "respected and loveil bv
everyone who was not fearful of his
power.*' Theological bias against Roger
Williams and his In<lian friends played
some part in the matter of his treatment
by the commis.**ioners. He was burie<I
where he fell, and the spot, on which a
monument was erecte<l in 1841, has
since l)een known as Sachem's Plains.
Miantonomo is praistnl in Durft^'s poem,
**What cheer." Nanantenoo was a son
of Miantonomo. (a. f. c. )
Miawkinaiyiks ( * big topknots ' ) . A di-
vision of the Piegan tribe of the Siksika.
Big Topknots. — Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales,
209, 18?2. Mi-aw'-kin-ai-yiks.— Ibid.. 225.
Mica. This durable and showy min-
eral was in very general use by the In-
dian tribes e. of the great plains, the
translucent variety known as muscovite
being most highly prized. It was mined
at many points in the Appalachian high-
land, fnjin (Jeorgia to St Lawrence r.
(see Mines (tud Quairieit). It occurs also
in South Dakota, but it is not probable
that the mound-building tribes obtained
it from this source. P>om the Eastern
highland it passeil, by trade or Dtlier-
>
856
MICACUOPSIBA MICHIGAMEA
[B. A. R.
wise, to remote parts: to Florida in the
s. and to the upper Mississippi valley in
the N. w. The crystals were often of
large size, measuring 2 ft or more in
diameter. The sheets into which they
were readily divided were much prized
for mirrors, and were alpo cut into a
great variety of shapes for personal orna-
ments, and possibly also for ceremonial
use. Sheets of mica were used also for
burial with the dead and as sacrificial
offerings. Squier and Davis give an
account of the discovery of 14 human
skeletons that were carefully covered
with mica plates, estimated at 15 or 20
bushels, some of the plates being from
8 to 10 in. long and from 4 to 5 in. wide,
and all from i to 1 in. in thickness. At-
water describes the discovery of many
thick sheets, one of which measured 36
in. long by 18 in. wide. With a skeleton
in the Grave Creek mound, near Wheel-
inij, W. Va., 150 disks of sheet mica, meas-
uring from 1 j to 2 in. in diameter and hav-
ing each 1 or 2 perforations, were found.
From the Turner mounds in Hamilton
CO., Ohio, several ornamental figures of
sheet mica were obtained; one of them is
a grotesque human figure, others are
animal forms, including a serpent (Put-
nam). Mica occurs on many sacrificial
altars of the mound-builders, who no
doubt regarded it as of si)ecial signifi-
cance.
Consult Atwater, Antiq. of Ohio, 1820;
Putnam in Peabody Mus. Reps.; Rau in
Smithson. Rep. 1872, 1873; Squier and
Davis in Smithson. Cont., i, 1848; Moore-
head in The Antiquarian, i, 1897.
(w. H. H.)
Micacnopsiba. An unidentified Dakota
division formerly roaming on the upper
St Peter's (Minnesota) r., Minn., in 1804.
Out bank.— Orig. Jour. I^wis and Clark, i, 133,
1904. Mioaouopaiba.— Ibid.
Miohacondibi (mitcha Marge ^ iiidibe or
gindihe *head*: *big head* (Baraga),
possibly referring to the T^tes de Boule).
An Algonquian (?) tribe or band, probably
a part of the Cree or of the Maskegon,
formerly on a river of the same name
(Albany r.?) entering the s. end of Hud-
son bay from the s. w. Lahontan placed
them about the headwaters of Ottawa r.
Maohakandibi.— Lahontan. New Voy., i, 231, 1703.
Kachandibi.— Lahontan (1703), New Voy., map,
1735. Kachantiby.— La Chesnave (1697) in Margry,
D^c, VI, 6, 1886. Miobaoondibu.-— Bacquevllle de
laPotherie, Hist. Am., ii, 49, 1753.
Michahai. A Yokuts (Mariposan) tribe
near Squaw vallev, in the Kings r. drain-
age, s. central Cal.
Michaha.— Weasells (18ft3) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76,
34th Cong., 3d sess., 31, 1857. Miehahai.— A. L.
Kroeber, inf n, 1906.
Michibonsa. Mentioned by Tonti
(French, Hist. Coll. La., i, 82, 1846) in
connection with and apparently as one of
the tribes of the Illinois confederacy in
1681. The name is perhaps an erroneous
designation for some well-known tribe or
band. .
Michigamea ( Algonquian : 'great water, '
from rnic/fi * great,' * much,* guma 'water*.
Baraga gives the correct form of * Mipt^ j-
gan* as Mishignmawy * the big lake', while
Dr Wm. Jones says that the Chippewa
of the N. shore of L. Superior refer to L.
Michigan by the name Mishatifig&ma,
*big, wide, or expansive waste,' on ac-
count of the few or no islands). A
tribe of the Illinois confederacy, first vis-
ited by Mar(^uette when he descended
the Mississippi in 1673. Their village was
situated at that time on the w. side of the
Mississippi and near a lake bearing the
same nameas the tribe, probably Bi^lake,
between the St Francis and Mississippi
rs.. Ark. This tribe was the most south-
erly of the confederacv, and its extreme
southern situation has ted some authors to
the conclusion that the people were not
Algonquian, but this is an evident error.
It must have been shortly previous to the
time that the first knowledge of the tribes
of this general region was obtained that a
group or division of the Illinois confeder-
acy, including the Cahokia, Tamaroa, and
possibly the M ichigamea, pushed south-
ward to escape the attacks of the Sioux and
the Foxes. It is therefore probable that at
this period the Michigamea moved on into
8. Illinois, and thence passed over into s. e.
Missouri. The intimate relation of the an-
cient remains of these two sections would
seem to confirm this opinion. About the
end of the 17th centurv they were driven
out by the Quapaw or Ohickasaw, crossing
over into Illinois and joining the Kaskas-
kia. According to Chauvignerie their
totem was the crane. He attributed to
them 250 warriors, which is evidentlv an
exaggeration, as he estimated the whole
Illinois confederacy at only 508 warriors.
It is probable that* the Michigamea were
only a remnant at the time they joined
the Kaskaskia. They were never promi-
nent in Indian affairs. In 1803 Gen.
W. H. Harrison suppose<i that there was
but one man of the tribe left alive, but as
Tate as 1818 the names of 3 Michigamea
appear as signers of a treaty with the
Ilhnois. (j. M. c. T.)
Kachegamea.— Joutel (1687) in Margry, D^., in,
465. 1878. Kaohicama.— French. Htet Ck)Il. La.,
1,82. 1846. Maolugamea.— Joutel (1687), op. cit,
460. Matchagamia.— Ck)xe. Carolana, 11, 174L
Katiigamea.— Hennepin. New Diseov., 169, 1698.
Medsifamea.— Iberville (1702) in Maigry, D6c.,
IV, 601, 1880. Meosigamia.— Neill, Minn., 173, 18S8.
Meaigameaa.— Proces Verbal (1682) in French,
Hist. Ck>ll. La., ii, 25. 1875. Metchagamis.— Latti^,
map. 1784. Metohigamea.— Marquette, map (1678)
in Shea, Miss. Val., 268, 1852. Metchia.— Writer in
Smith, Bouquet's Exped.. 65, 1766. Metehiga-
mia.— La Tour. map. 1782 (misprint). MiUai-
riaa.— Le Sueur (ca. 1700) in Shea. Early Voy.,
1861. Metaigameaa.— Proces Verbal (1682) in
French, Hist. Coll. La., n, 21,1875. Michiagamiat.—
BULL. 30]
MTOHIKINIKWA — MICHILIMACKINAO
857
Bhea, Rel. M. Miss., 86, 1861. Kiohinmea.— Mar-
quette {ca. 1673), Diflcov., 344, 1698. Kohigiuniat.—
Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816. Kiohi-
gamii.— KiDgsley, Stand. Nat Hist., pt. 6, 151, 1883.
fciehigania.— Nourse (1820) in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, ii, 588, 1852. Michiganiana.— Harrison
(1814) in Drake, Tecumseh, 160, 1852. Kiohigana.—
Sanford, U. S., clii, 1819. Kichigourras.— Martin,
La., I. 262, 1827. Mitohigamaa.— Hutcbins (1778)
In Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, vi, 714, 1857. Mitchi-
gamea.— Marquette (ca. 1673), Discov., 346, 1698.
Mitohigamias.— Jefferys, Fr. Doms., pt. 1, 165, 1761.
Miehikinikwa. 8ee Little Turtle,
— KitMlimAckinAC {^^t8hXni7na' kinungf
'place of the big wounded person/ or
*place of the big lame person.* — W.
J). A name applied at various times to
Mackinac id. in Mackinac co., Mich.;
to the village on this island; to the village
and fort at Pt St Ignace on the opposite
mainland, and at an early period to a con-
siderable extent of territory in the upper
part of the lower peninsula of Michigan.
It is derived from the name of a supposed
extinct Algonquian tribe, the Mishini-
maki or Mishinimakinagog.
According to Indian tradition and the
Jesuit Relations, the Mishininiaki for-
merly had their headquarters at Mackinac
id. and occupied all the adjacent territory
in Michigan. They are said to have been
. at one time numerous and to have had 30
villages, but in retaliation for an invasion
of the Mohawk country they were de-
stroyed by the Iroquois. This must have
occurred previous to the occupancy of the
country by the Chippewa on their first
appearance in this region. A few were
still there in 1671, but in Charlevoix*s
time (1744) none of them remained.
When the Chippewa appeared in this
section they made Michiiimackinac id.
one of their chief centers, and it retained
its importance for a long period. In 1 761
their village was said to contain 1(X) war-
riors. In 1827 the Catholic part of the
inhabitants, to the number of 150, sepa-
rated from the others an<l formed a new
village near the old one. When the
Hurons were driven w. by the IroquoLs
they settled on Mackinac id., where they
built a village some time after 1650. Soon
thereafter they removed to the Noquet
ids. in Green bay, but returned about
1670 and settled in a new village on the
adjacent mainland, where the Jesuits had
just established the mission of St Ignace.
After this the Hurons settled near the
mission; the fugitive Ottawa also settled
in a village on the island where Nouvel
established the mission of St Francis Bor-
gia among them in 1677, and when the
Hurons removed to Pfttrnit, about 1702,
the Ottawa and Chippewa continued to
live at Michiiimackinac. (j. m. c. t.)
Kaohilimaohinaok.— Watts (1763) in Mass. Hist.Soc.
Coll., 4th 8.. IX, 483, 1871. KaohiUimakina.— Bou-
quet (1760), ibid., 345. Maokanaw.-Drake. Bk.
inds., bk. 5, 134, '1848. Maokelimakanac.—Camp-
bell (1760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix, 358.
1871. Mackilemaokinac.—Ibid., 383. Mackinac-
Jefferson (1808). inAm. St. Pap., Ind. Aff.,i,74r),1832.
Mackinaw.— Hall, N. W. States, 131, 1849. Macki-
nang.— Baraga, Eng.-Otch. Diet., 165, 1878 (Chip-
pewa form, abbreviated). Massillimacinao.—
Map of 1755 in Howe, Hist. Coll., 35, 1851. Mesh
e ne mah ke noong.— Jones, Ojebway Inds., 45, 1861
(Chippewa name). Mesilimakinac.— Hennepin,
New Discov.. map, 1698. Michelimakina.— Writer of
1756 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 48*2, 1858. Mioh-
ellimakinac.— Campbell (1761) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 4th 8., IX. 417, 1871. Michihimaquinac.— Ho-
mann Heirs Map U. S., 1784 (misprint). Kiohi-
lemaokinah.— Campbell (1761) in Ma.s8. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 4th s., IX, 426, 1871. Kichilimackinao.—
Johnson (1763) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 633,
1856. Michilimacquina.— Doc. of 1691, ibid., IX,
511, 1855. Miohilimakenac.— Albany conf. (1726),
ibid.. V. 791, 1855. Kichilimakina.— Vaudreuil
(1710). ibid., IX, 843, 1855. Kiohilimakinao.—
Du Chesneau (1681), ibid., 153. Kiohilimaki-
nais.— Jefferys. French Doms., pt. 1, 19-20, 1761
(tribe). Miohilimakinong.— Marquette (ca. 1673)
in Kelton, AnnaJs Ft Mackinac, 121, 1884. Mich-
ilimaquina.— Denonville (1686) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., Ill, 461, 1853. Michilimicanack.— Bradstreet
(ca. 1765), ibid., vii, 690. 1856. Michilimickinac.—
Peters (1760} in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s.. ix,319,
1871. Michillemackinack.— Amherst (1760), ibid.,
348. Michillemakinack.— Malartic (1758) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist.. X, 853, 1858. Michillinuujinac.—
Johnstown conf. (1774), ibid., viii. 50(), IS.^1.
Kichillimackinacki.— Lords of Trade (1721), ibid.,
V, 622, 1855 (used as synonymous with Ottawas).
mchillimakenac.— Bouquet (1761) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 4th 8., IX, 392. 1871. Michillimakinak.—
Cadillac lllOS) in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 407,
1885. Michillimaquina.— Denonville (1687) in N.
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 336, 1855. Michillmiacki-
nock.— Domenech, Deserts, li. 452, 1860. Kichi
Mackina.— Brown, West. Gaz.. 161, 1817 (Indian
form). ]Ciohimmakina.—M' Lean, Hudson Bay, i,
51, 1849. Michinimackinao.— Henry, Travels, 107,
1809 (Chippewa form). Kichlimakinak.— Montreal
conf. (1700) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 709, 1865.
mcilimaquinay.— Joutel (ca. 1690) in Kelton,
Annals Vt Mackinac, 121, 1884. Micinima'ki-
nunk.— Wm. Jones, inf'n., 1905 (proper form).
Mikinac.— La Chesnaye (1697) in Margry, IX^c, vi,
6, 1886 (same?: mentioned with Ojibwa.s, Ottawa
Sinagos, etc.jas then at Shaugawaumikoug on L.
Superior). Misoelemaokena.— Croghan (1764) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 603, 1856. Kisclimaki-
nack.— Colden (1727), ibid., in, 489. noU*. 1S53.
Kishinimaki.— Kelton, Annals Ft Mackinac, 9, 10,
1884 (tribe). KUhinimakina.— Ibid.. 151 (correct
Indian name). Kishinimakinago.— Baraga, Otchip-
we-Eng. Diet., 248, 1880 (ChipjK^wa name of the
mythic(?} tribe, whence comes Michiiimackinac;
the plural takesflr). Mishini-makinak.—Kelt<m, An-
nals FtMa(;kinac, 1^5, 18H4. Mishinimakinang.— Ba-
raga, Eng.-Otch. Diet., 16.'>, 1878 (Chippewa form).
Miahinimakinank.— Gatschet, Ojibwa MS., B.A.E.
1882. MittlinuOcenak.— Burnet (1723) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., V, 684, 1855. Mi»illiniakinac.—
Vaudreuil conf. (1703), ibid., ix. 751. 1855. Mis-
limakinac.— Memoir of 1687, ibid., 319. Kissele-
machinack.— Croghan (1760) in Mass. Hist.Soc.
Coll., 4th s., IX, 377, 1871. Misselemakinach.—
Ibid. Kisselemaknach.— Ibid., 372. KiMilikinac.—
Hennepin, New Discov., 308, 1698. Missllimaohi-
nao.— Hennepin (1683) in Harris, Voy. and Trav.,
II, 918, 1705. Kiuilimaokinak.— De la Barre ( 1687)
in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 418, 1885. MiaaiUmak-
enak.— Colden (ca. 1?23) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
V, 687, 1855. Miuilimakinao.— Jes. Rel. 1671, 37,
1858. Kiuilimakinak.— Cadillac (1694) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 587, 1855. HiMilimaqaina.—
Denonville (1687), ibid., iii, 466, 1853. ICssilina-
okinak.— Hennepin, New Discov., 316, 1698. Kit-
silinianac.— Mt Johnson conf. (1755) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., VI, 975, 1855. MiMiilimackinao.— John-
son (1763). ibid., vii, 573. 1856. Miaaillimakina.—
Denonville (1686). ibid., ix. 287. 1855. MiMiUnak-
ina.— Denonville (1687), ibid., 325. Mitchinimack-
enucka.— Lindsev (1749), ibid., vi. 538, 1855 (here
intended for the Ottawa). Monaiemakenack.—
Albany conf. (1723), ibid., v, 693, 1855. 8t. Franeia
858
MICHIPICOTEN ^MICMAO
[b. a. b.
* -*
Borgia.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 370, 1865 (Ottawa mis-
sion on Mackinaw id. in 1677). Teijaondorashi.—
Albany conf. (1726) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v,
791, 1855 (Iroquois name).
Michipicoten ( Mishlbtgwadunk, * place
of bold promontories,* or * region of big
places.' — W. J.). The designation of
the Algonquian Indians living on Michi-
picoten r., Ontario, n. of L. Superior,
and extending into Ruperts Land. In
Canada they are officially classed as
*' Michipicoten and Big Heads," consist-
ing of two bands beTongTng to different
tribes. The smaller band consists of Chip.-
pe\\'a and are settled on a reservation
known asGros Cap, on the w. side of the
river, near its mouth ; the other band be-
longs to the Magkegpn^and resides mainly
near the Hudson's Bay Co.'s post on
Brunswick lake, on the n. side of the
dividing ridge. The two bands together
numbered 283 in 1884, and 358 in 1906.
See Ti'tes de Boule. (j. m. )
Miohirache. An Iowa phratry. Its
gentes are Shuntanthka, Shuntanthewe,
Shuntankhoche, and Manyikakhthi.
Me-je'-ra-ja.— Morgan, Anc. Soc, 156, 1877. Mi»tci-
ratoe.— Dorsey, Tciwere MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1879.
Mi-tci'-ra-tce.— qorsey in 16th Rep. B.A.E., 238,
1897. Wolf.— Morgan, op. eit.
Hichiyn (Mdc-hl-yu). A former Chu-
mashan village between Pt Conception
and Santa Barbara, Cal., at the place now
called San Onofre. — Henshaw, Buenaven-
tura MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
Hichopdo. A former Maidu village near
Chico, at the edge of the foothills, about
5 m. 8. of the junction of Little and Big
Butte crs., in Butte co.,Cal.; pop. 90 in
1850. (r. B. D.)
Ma-ohuck-nas.— Johnston (1850) in Sen. Ex. Doc.
4, 32d Cong., spec, sess., 45, 1863. Ma-ohuc-na. —
Day (1850), ibid., 39. Michoapdos.— Powers in
Overland Mo., xii,420, 1874. Mich-6p'-do.— Powers
in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in. 282, 1877. Miohopdo.—
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvii, pi.
xxxviii. 1905. Mitshopda.— Curtin, MS. vorab.,
B. A. E., 1885. Wachuknas.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, vi, 710, 1857.
Hickkesawbee. A former Potawatomi
village at the site of the present Cold-
water, Mich., on a reservation sold in 1827.
Miokesawbe.— Treaty of 1827 in IJ. S. Ind. Treat.,
675, 1873. Miok-ke-saw-be.— Chicago treaty (1821 ) ,
ibid., 162.
Micksncksealton. Said by Lewis and
Clark to be a tribe of the Tushepaw (q. v. )
living on Clarke r. above the falls, and
numbering 300, in 25 lodges, in 1805.
Mickticksealtom.— Clark and Voorhis (1805^ in
Orig. Jour. Lewis and Clark, vi, 114, 1905. Mick-
suek-ieal-tom.— Lewis and Clark, Exped., i, map,
1814. Kickiuckiealton.— Ibid., n, 475, 1814. Mik-
sukaealton.— Drake, Bk. Inds., ix, 1848.
Micmac ( Migmah, * allies * ; Nigmakf * our
allies.'— Hewitt). The French called
them Sonrifpiois, An important Algon-
quian tribe that occupied Nova Scotia,
Cape Breton and Prince Edward ids., the
N. part of New Brunswick, and probably
points in s. and w. Newfoundland.
While their neighbors the Abnaki have
close linguistic relations with the Algon-
quian tribes of the great lakes, the Micmac
seem to have almost as distant a relation
to the group as the Algonquians of the
plains (W. Jones). If Sihoolcraffs sup-
position be correct, the Micmac must
have been among the first Indians of the
N. E. coast encountered by Europeans, as
he thinks they were visited by Sebastian
Cabot in 1497, and that the 3 natives he
took to England were of this tribe.
Kohl believes that those captured by
Cortereal in 1501 and taken to Europe
were Micmac. Most of the early voy-
agers to this region speak of the great
numbers of Indians on the n. coast of
Nova Scotia and New Brunswick, and
of their tierce and warlike character.
They early became friends of the French,
a friendship which was lasting and which
the English— after the treaty of Utrecht
in 1713, by which Acadia was ceded to
them — found impossible to have trans-
ferred to themselves for nearly half a
century. Their hostilitjr to the English
prevented for a long time any serious
attempts at establishing British settle-
ments on the N. coasts of Nova Scotia and
New Brunswick, for although a treaty of
peace was concluded with them in 1760, ^
it was not until 1779 that disputes and "
difficulties with the Mi(;mac ceased. In
the early wars on the New England fron-
tier the Cape Sable Micmac were especially
noted.
The missionary Biard, who, in his Rela-
tion of 1616, gives a somewhat full account
of the habite and characteristics of the
Micmac and adjacent tribes, speaks in
perhaps rather too favorable terms of
them. He says: "You could not dis-
tinguish the young men from the girls,
except in their way of wearing their belts.
For the women are girdled both above-
and below the stomach and are less nude
than the men. . . . Their clothes are
trimmed with leather lace, which the
women curry on the side that is not hairy.
They often curry both sides of elk skin,
like our buff skin, then variegate it very
prettily with paint put on in a lace pattern,
and make gowns of it; from the same
leather they make their shoes and strings.
The men do not wear trousers . . .
they wear only a cloth to cover their naked-
ness." Their dwellings were usually the
ordinary conical wigwams covered with
bark, skins, or matting. Biard says that
*'in summer the shape of their houses is
changed; for they are broad and long
that they may have more air." There
is an evident attempt to show these
summer bowers in the map of Jacomo di
Gastaldi, made about 1550, given in
vol. Ill of some of the editions of Ramusio.
Their government was similar to that of
the New England Indians; polygamy was
not common, though practised to some
BULL. 30]
MICOMA — ^MIGICHIHILINIO^
859
extent by the chiefis; they were expert
canoemen, and drew much of their sub-
sistence from the waters. Cultivation of
the soil was very limited, if practised at
all by them, when first encountered bv
the whites. Biard says they did not till
the soil in his day.
According to Rand (Micmac First Read-
ing Book, 1875), they divided their coun-
try, which they called Meguniage, into 7
districts, the head-chief living in the
Cape Breton district. The other six were
Pictou, Memramcook, Restigouche, Es-
kegawaage, Shubenacadie, and Annapo-
lis. The first three of these formea a
group known as Sigunikt; the other three
formed another group known as Kes-
poogwit. In 1760the Micmac bands or vil-
lages were given as Le Have, Miramichi,
l^bogimkik, Pohomooeh, Gediak (She-
diac), Pictou, Kashpugowitk (Kespoog-
wit), Chignecto, Isle of St Johns,
Nalkitgoniash, Cape Breton, Minas, Chi-
gabennakadik (Shubenacadie), Keshpu-
gowitk (Kespoogwit, duplicated), and
Rishebouctou (Richibucto). The Gag-
\ pesians are a band of Micmac differing
( somewhat in dialect from the rest of the
* tribe.
In 1611 Biard estimated the Micmac at
3,000 to 3,500. In 1760 they were re-
ported at nearly 3,000, but had been lately
much wasted by sickness. In 1766 they
were again estimated at 3,500; in 1880
they were officially reported at 3,892, and
in 1884 at 4,037. Of these, 2,197 were in
Nova Scotia, 933 in New Brunswick, 615
in Quebec, and 292 on Prince Edward id.
In 1904, according to the Report of Cana-
dian Indian Affairs, they numbered 3,861,
of whom 579 were in Quebec province, 992
in New Brunswick, 1,998 in Nova Scotia,
I and 292 on Prince Edward id. The num-
\ ber in Newfoundland is not known.
The Micmac villages are as follows:
Antigonishe (?J, Beaubassin (mission).
Boat Harbor, Cnignecto, Eskusone, Indian
Village, Isle of St Johns, Kespoogwit,
Kigicapigiak, I^ Have, Maria, Minas,
Miramichi, Nalkitgoniash, Nipigi^uitj
Pictou, Pohomoosh, Restigouche, Richi-
bucto, Ro<^ky Point, Shediac, Shubenac-
adie, and Tabogimkik. (j. m. c. t. )
Aeadoan.— Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 59,
1856 (misprint). Acadian Indians. — J efferys,
Frencn Doms., pt. 1, 66, 1761 (Dawson in Hind,
Lab. Penin., ii, 44, 1863, says Acadia is a Micmac
word used in composition to denote the local
abundance of objects referred to). Bark Indiana.—
Buchanan, N. Am. Inds., 156, 1824. Kinoke-
moeks.— Rasle (1724) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
2d 8., viii, 248, 1819 (misreading of MS. or mis-
Krint) . Katu-J$s'-wi aldtohi-na-uk. —Chamberlain,
[aleslt MS., B. A. E., 1882 (Malecite name, mean-
ing 'porcupine Indians'; so called on account of
their using porcupine quills in ornamentation).
Keohimaeka.- Boudinot, Star in the West, 127.1816.
Hegnm.— Rand, Micmac First Reading Book, 81,
1875 (a Micmac socalls himself). Megfimawaaeh. —
Rand, Eng.-Micmac Diet., 169, 1888. Miohmaos.—
Trader in Smith, Bouquet's Exped., 69, 1766.
Miokemao.— Lahontan (1703) quoted by Richard-
son, Arctic Exped., ll, 38, 1851. Kiokmaoks.—
Longueuil (1726) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 956,
1855. Kiokmakt.— Quotation in Drake, Bk. Inds.,
bk. 3, 137,1848. Kicmaoks.— Longueuil (1726) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IX, 956, 1855. Micmaki.—
Begon (1725) , ibid., 943. Kio Macs.- Potter in Me.
Hist. Soc. Coll., IV, 192, 1856. Kiomaos.— Doc.of
1696 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 613, 1855. Miggaa-
maoki.— Rouillard, Noms G6ographiques,63, 1906.
Mikemak.— Lahontan, New Voy.,i, 223,1703 (given
also by Gatschet, Penobscot MS., 1887, as their
Penobscot name, 'Mikemak'; singular, Mik(^ma).
Mikmaos.- Vaudreuil (1757) in N. Y. Doc.Col. Hist.,
X, 658, 1858. Hikmak.— Cocquard (1757), ibid., 529.
Mukmackt.— Buchanan, N.Am. Inds., i, 139, 1824.
Bhannok.— Gatschet in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc.. 409,
1885. Shanung. —Gatschet, q noting Latham , ibid .
Shawnuk.— Gatschet, ibid. Shdn&ok.— Lloyd,
quoting Payton, in Jour. Anthrop. Inst., iv, 29,
1875 ('bad Indians': Beothuk name). Soriooi.—
DuCreux map of Canada (1660) cited by Vetro-
mile, Abnakis. 21, 1866 (Latin form). Sorriquois.—
Vetromile in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 210, 1859.
Sonricoia.— Champlain (1603), CEuvres, ii, 58, 1870.
Sourikois.— Jes. Rel. 1652, 26, 1858. Sourikwosi-
onun. — De Laet (1633) quoted by Tanner, Narr.,
329,1830. Soariquois.— Jes.ReI.1611,8,1858. Souri-
quosii.— De Laet (1633) quoted by Barton, New
Views, XXXV, 1798. Bourriquois.— Vetromile in
Me. Hist. Soc.ColL.vi, 208, 1859. Suriquois.— Lords
of Trade (1721) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v. 592, 1865.
Micoma. A Chumashan village between
Goleta and Pt Conception, Cal., in 1542.—
Cabrillo, Narr. (1542) in Smith, Colec.
Doc. Fla., 183, 1857.
Miconope. See Mikanopy.
Middle Creeks. A term used by some
English writers to designate the Creeks
on Tower Tallapoosa r., Ala., Spanish and
French writers sometimes using the name
Talipuce, or Talepuse. (a. s. g. )
Middle -settlement Indians. The Chero-
kee formerly living in upj^er Georgia and
w. North Carolina, as distinguished from'
those in South Carolina and Tennessee. —
Imlay, W. Ter., 363, 1797.
Middle Town. A former Seneca village,
3 m. above the site of Chemung, N. Y.,
destroyed by Sullivan in 1779. — Jones
(1780) in N. Y. Do<'. (>)1. Hist., viii, 785.
1857.
Midnnski. An Ahtena village on the e.
bank of Copper r., Alaska, below the
mouth of Tonsina cr.
Miemissonks. Given as the name of a
tribe somewhere between Bellingham bav
and Fraser r., in Washington or British
Columbia. Probably Salishan, otherwise
unidentifiable.
Mie-mis-BOttks.— starling in Ind. Afif. Rep., 170,
1852. Hisonk.— Ibid.. 171.
Mienikashika ( * those who became hu-
man beings by means of the sun'). A
Quapaw gens.
Mi e'nikad^a.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 229,
1897. Sun gena.— Ibid.
Migichihilinion {Migiz^wlni'nXwi'tgj * peo-
ple of the Eagle clan*; or perhaps Mtglsh
w1,ninhviigj 'people with wampum*, or
'people with the cowrie shells.'— \V.
J.). Given by Dobbs as the name of a
band of (Algonquian?) Indians residing
on the "Lake of Eagles," between I^.
Winnipeg and Lake of the Woods — prob-
ably Eagle lake, some distance n. e. of
Lake of the Woods. He thinks they were
860
MIGUIHUI MIKA8UKI
[B. A.B.
related to the Assiniboin, *' because of the
great affinity of their language. * * As this
statement is in contradiction to his sub-
sequent assertion, known from other evi-
dence to be correct, that the Assiniboin
dwelt w. of L. Winnipeg, it may be in-
ferred that these ** Eagle-men*' lielongto
tlie Chippewa, who nave among their
gentes one named Omegeeze, "Bald
Eagle." (j. M. c. T.)
Eagle ey'd IndUni.— Dobbs, Huason Bay, 24, 1744.
Eagle Eyed Indians.— Ibid., map. Kigiohihilini-
otu.— Ibid., 21.
Mignihni. A Chumashan village, one
of the two popularly known as Dos Pue-
blos, in Santa Barbara co., Cal.; also a
village in Ventura co.
Xigia.— Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B.
A. E., 1884. Kigoigm.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
July 24, 1863 (Ventura co). Miguihui.— Ibid., Apr.
24, 1863.
Mihtnkmechakick. A name, signifying
*tree eaters,' which, according to Roger
Williams' Key (Mass. Hist. 8oc. Coll.,
1st s.. Ill, 209, 1794), referred to **a peo-
ple so called (living between three or
four hundred m. w. into the land) from
their eating mih-tuck-quashj * trees. ' They
are men-eaten^; they set no com, but live
on the bark of chestnut and walnut and
other fine trees. They dry and eat this
bark with the fat of beasts and sometimes
of men. This people are the terrour of
the neighboring natives." The name Ad-
irondack (q. v.), applied by the Iroquois
to certain Algonquian tril)e8 of Canada,
signifies ' they eat trees ' . ( .i. m. c. t. )
Miitsr. The Humming-bird clan of
San Felipe pueblo, N. Mex., of which there
were only one or two survivors in 1895.
Miitsr-hano.— H(Klge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 361, 1896
(M»JO^' people').
Hikakhenikashika ( ' those who made or
adonted the stars as their mark or means
of identity as a people.'— La Flesche). A
Quapaw gens.
l^ka^q'e niicaci'^a.— Dorsey in 15th Hop. B.A. E.,
229,1897. Star gens.— Ibid.
Mikanopy ( * head chief ' ) . A Seminole
chief. On Ma^ 9, 1832, a treaty was
signed purporting to cede the country of
the Seminole to the United States in ex-
change for lands w. of the Mississippi.
The Seminole had already relinquished
their desirable lands near the coast and
retired to the pine barrens and swamps
of the interior. Mikanopy, the heredi-
tary t!hief, who possessed large herds of
cattle and horses and a hundred negro
slaves, stood by young Osceola and the
majority of the tribe in the determination
to remain. Neither of them siened the
agreement to emigrate given on behalf of
the tribe by certain pretended chiefs on
Apr. 23, 18:^5. In tne summer of that
year the Indians made preparations to
resist if the Government attempted to
remove them. When the agent notified
them on Dec. 1 to deliver their horses
^,
and cattle and assemble for the long^
journey they sent their women and
children into the interior, while the
warriors were seen going about in armed
parties. The white people had con-
temned the Seminole as a degenerate
tribe, enervated through long contact
with the whites. Although Mikanopy,
who was advanced in years, was the
direct successor of King Payne, the chief
who united the tribe, the a^nt said he
would no longer recognize him as a chief
when he al^ented himself from the
council where the treaty was signed.
When the whites saw that the Seminole
intendetl to fight, they abandoned their
plantations on the border, which the
Indians sat^ked and burned. Troops were
r
then ordered to the Seminole comitry,
and a seven-vears' war began. In the
massacre of l>ade*s command, Dec. 28,
1836, it is said that Mikanopy shot the
commander with his own hand. He took
no further active part in the hostilities.
He was short and gross in person, indo-
lent, and self-indulgent in his habits,
having none of the qualities of a leader. —
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, ii, 271,
.1858.
Mikasi ( * coyote and wolf people *). A
subgens of the Mandhinkagaghe gens of
the Omaha.
Mi^att.— Dorsey in 16th Rep. B. A. E., 228,1897.
Mikasuki. A former Seminole town in
Leon CO., Fla., on the w. shore of Micco-
sukee lake, on or near the site of the
present Miccosukee. The name has been
BULL. 30]
MIKAUNIKASHINQA MILITARY SOCIETIES
861
applied also to the inhabitants an a divi-
sion of the Seminole. They spoke the
Hitchiti <lialect, and, as appears from the
title of B. Smith's vocabulary of their
language, were partly or wholly emigrants
from the Sawokli towns on lower Chatta-
hoochee r., Ala. The former town ap-
pears to have been one of the *red* or
* bloody* towns, for at the l)e^inning of
the Seminole troubles of 1817 its inhab-
itants stood at the head of the hostile
element and figured conspicuously as
"Red Sticks," or *' Batons Rouges^" hav-
ing painted high poles, the color (lenoting
war and blood. At this time they had
300 houses, which were burned by Gen.
Jackson. There were then several vil-
lages near the lake, known also a** Mika-
suki towns, which were o<*cupied almost
wholly by negroes. In the Seminole war
I of 1836-42 the people of this town Innuime
noteii for their courage, dash, and au-
^dacity. (a. s. o. ex.)
B&ton Eouge.— Drake, Abor. Racen of N. Am., bk.
4, 404, 18K0. Kaokaaookos.— U. S. Ind. Treat. (1797),
69, 1837. Keoosukee.— HiU'hcock (1836) in Drake,
Bk. Inds., bk. 4, 93, 1848. Mekaaoualnr.— P<^niere
in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 31 1 , 1822. Kicasukee.^
Knox (1791) in Am. State Pai)er8, Ind. Aflf.. i, 127,
1832. mioasnkeyt.— MorHe, Rop. to S<»o. War, 364,
1822. Mieasiikiei.-^esnp (18:^) in II. R. hoc. 78,
25th Cong., 2d bcss., 81, 183K. Micasukyt.— (ialt
(1837) in H. R. Doc. 78, 2r>th Cong, 2d wsa.. 104,
1838. Kiccasooky.— Hawkins (1813) in Am. State
l*apers, Ind. AfT., i, 852, 18:^2. Micoosaukie.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. TrilH\s, ii. 3:«>, 18.'i'2. Kio-oo
■000-6.— IlawkinH (1799), Sketch, 25, 1848. Kicka-
•anky.— Drake, Bk. Ind8, bk. 4. 125, 1848. Kioka
Sukeea.— Duval (1849) in Senate Ex. Doc. 49, 31st
Cong., iRt pew., 144, IKTK). Mickasukiana.— Belton
(1836) in Drake, Bk. Ind., bk. 4, 77, 1848. Kikauiu-
kiei.— Ibid., ix. Mikaauki.— (iatnchct. (Yeok Migr.
Leg., 1, 76, 1884. Mikaauky.— Drake, Ind. Chron.,
200, 1836. lIikkeao«ke.— ten Kate, Roizen in N. A.,
462, 1885 (Mika.Haukies, or). Eed-stiok.— I»<Jnit^re
in Morse, Rep. to Sec. War, 311, 1822.
Mikaanikashiiiga ( * racc*oon m'oplc ' ) . A
subgens of the Il)acne gens of tlie Kansa.
Coon.— Stubbs, Kaw MS. vocab., B. A.E.. 25, 1877.
Me-ka'.~Morgan, A no. S4m\, 156. 1877. Mika nika-
ahing-ga. — Stubbs, op. cit. Mika qla jinga.—
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 231. 1897 (• smalTlean
raccoon'). Kika anikaci'>ga.— Ibid. Raccoon. —
Morgan, op. cit.
Mikechuse. A former hostile tribe liv-
ing n. and E. of San Joaquin r.,Cal., among
the foothills of the Sierra Nevada on the
headwaters of Tuolunme, Merced, and
Mariposa rs. Probably Mo(iue1umnan.
See Barl)our, et al. (1851) in Sen. Kx. Doc.
4, 32d Cong., sptn*. sess., 61, 1853.
Mikinakwadshiwiniiiiwak {Mfmakh
t^wadsKiuftnMwiigf *peo])le of the Turtle
mtn.' — W. J. ). A C'hippewa band living
lathe Turtle mtn. region, North Dakota,
adjoining the Canadian line. In 1905
they were under the jurisdiction of the
Fort Totten School, and numbered 211
full-bloods and 1,996 mixed-bloo<ls.
Hi'kina'kiwadoiwiiiiiiiwMr.— Wm. Jones inf'n, 1906
(correct form) . Kikinakwadshi-wininiwak. — Gat-
Ischet, Ojibwa MS.. B. A. E., 1882. Montarneae.-
De Smet, Miasions, 109, 1844. Turtle mountain
Ohippewa.~Common name.
Mikissiona {Mi^gMwUtm^j *he goes by
the name of the bald eagle.* — \V. J.) . A
gens of both the Sauk and the F<)xe^*, (j. v.
Cf. Pamissoiik,
Megcaiwiaow*.— Wm. Jones, inf'n, 1906 (correct
form). KiKiaaioua.— Jes. Rel. 1672-73, LViii, 40,
1899. Mikiaaoua.— Lapham. Inds. Wis., 15, 1870.
Mike. See Mingo.
Mikonoh {Mfklnak'^ 'snapping turtle').
A gens of the Chippewa, q. v.
Mi'kina'k.— Wm. Jones, inf n, 1906. Mik-o-noh'.—
Morgan, Auc. Soc., 166, 1877.
Mikonotnnne ( * people among the white-
clover roots*). A former Tututni village
on the N. side of Rogue r., Oreg., 14 m.
from its mouth. Parrish ( Ind. Aff. Rep.
1854, 496, 1855) stated that the village
was about 7 m. al)ove the Tututni and
that the inhabitants clainuHl alK)ut 12 m.
of Rogue r., extending as far as the terri-
tory of the Chastacosta. In 18.'>4they
were connected with Pt Orford agency
and numbered 124; in 1884 J. (). Dorsey
found the survivors on Siletz r<>H.^ Oreg.',
numbering 41 i)er8(ms.
Kaoanoota— Ind. AtT. Rep. 1864, .505, 186.*). Kaca-
nootna.— Newcomb, ibid., 162, 1861. Macanooto-
onya.— Taylor in Ciil. Farmer, Jnne 8, 1860.
Macanotena.— Palmer in Ind AfT. Rep. 1856, 219,
1857. Mao-en-noot-e-ways.— Ind. AfT. Rep., 470,
1865. Mac-cn-oot-en-aya.— Victor in Overland
Monthly, vii, 347, 1H71. Kac-eno-tin.— Kiiut/.,
MS. Toutoiiten cenHns, B. A. K., 1855. Kackan-
ootenay'a Town.— Harper's Majf., xm, .')25, 1856.
Mackanotin.— Parrish m In<i. AfT. Rep. 1854, 496,
1855. Maok-en-oot-en-ay.— Ilnntington in In(i. AfT.
Rep. 1867, 62, 1868. fatnfit:n»,^I)<>rst»y, Siletz
Agency MS. census roll, 1881. Mac-o-no-tin.—
Kautz, MS. Toutoutcn census, B. A. K., 185.'>.
Kak-in-o-ten.— Gibba, MS., B. A. K. Maknooten-
nay.— Everette, Tutu MS. vocab.. B. A. E., 188;^.
■ak-nu'- tine'.— Ibid. ( = * jH'ople by t he land along
the river'). Maquelnoteer.— Tayl(»rin Cal. Farm-
er, June 8, 1860. Maquelnoten.— Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, vi, 702, 1857. Mec-a-no-to-ny.— Abbott,
MS. Coiiuille census, B. A. E., 18.58. Me-ka-ne-
ten. — Schumacher in Bull. U. S. (Jeog. and Geol.
Surv., Ill, 31, 1877. Mi'-ko-no' ^unni'.— Dorsev in
Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii,2:i3,1890 (Tututni name).
Ki'-kwun-nn' )iinni'.— Ibid. ( Naltunetunne name ) .
MiknUtah (Ml-ku-ntr'). A former vil-
lage of the Kuittfh at the mouth of Win-
chester bav, Oreg. — Dorsev in Jour. Am.
Folk-lore, *iii, 281, 18<K).
Milakitekwa. Clas.'HMl by (iibbs as a
band of Okinagan, though mon* nearly
connected with the Colville, formerly re-
siding on the \v. fork of Okinakane r..
Wash.
Mil-a-ket-kun.— Stevens in Ind. AfT. Rep.. 415, 1854.
MUakitekwa.— Gibbs in Piic. R. R. Rep., i, 412,
1865.
Milijaes. A fonner tril)e of n. e. Mexico
or s. Texas, probably Coahuiltecan, gath-
ered into the mission of San Bernardo de
la Candela. — Orozco y Berra, (Jeog., ;^)2,
1864.
Military Societies. Although the vari-
ous tril)es were in a state of clironic war-
fare one with another, little is known of
their system of military organization,
wuth the exception, perhaps, of those of
the Plains and the Pueblo regions. There
is abundant evidence, however, that the
military code was as carefully develoi>ed
— >
862
MILITARY SOCIETIES
[B.A.a.
as the social system among most of the
tribes n. of Mexico. The exceptions
were the Eskimo and the thinly scattered
bauds of the extreme n., the California
tribes, and the various bands w. of the
Rocky mts. commonly ^ouped as Paiute.
East of the Mississippi, where the clan
system was dominant, the chief mili-
tary functions of leadership, declaration,
and perhaps conclusion of war, seem to
have been hereditary in certain clans, as
the Bear clan of the Mohawk and Chip-
pewa, and the Wolf or Munsee division
of the Delawares. It is probable that if
their history were known it would be
found that most of the distinguished
Indian leaders in the colonial and other
early Indian wars were actually the
chiefs of the war clans or military socie-
ties Of their respective tribes. If we can
trust the Huguenot narratives, the ancient
tribes of n. Florida and the adjacent re-
gion had a military system and marching
order almost as exact as that of a modem
civilized nation, the various grades of
rank being distinguished by specific titles.
Something similar seems to have pre-
vailed among the Creeks, where, besides
war and peace clans, there were war and
peace towns, the war or "red" towns
being the assembly points for all war
ceremonies, includmg the war dance,
scalp dance, and torture of prisoners.
The ''Red Stick" band of the Seminole,
noted in the Florida wars as the most
hostile portion of the tribe, seem to have
constituted in themselves a war society.
Among the confederated Sauk and Foxes,
according to McKenney and Hall, nearly
all the men of the two tribes were organ-
ized into two war societies which con-
tested against each other in all races or
friendly athletic games and were distin-
guished by different cut of hair, costume,
and dances. With the more peaceful
and sedentary Pueblo tribes, as the Zufii
and Hopi, military matters were regu-
lated by a priesthood, as the '* Priesthood
of the Bow" of the Zufli, which formed
a close corporation with initiation rites
and secret ceremonies.
Throughout the plains from n. to s.
there existed a military organization so
similar among the vanous tribes as to
suggest a common origin, although with
patriotic pride each tribe claimed it as its
own. Maximilian was inclined to ascribe
its origin to the Crows, perhaps on the
ground of their well-known ceremonial
temperament, but it is probably much
older than their traditional separation
from the Hidatsa. In each tribe the
organization consisted of from 4 to 12
societies of varying rank and prominence,
ranging from boys or untried warriors up
to old men who had earned retirement
by long years of service on the warpath
and thenceforth confined themselves to
the supervision of the tribal ceremonies.
The name of each society had reference
to some mystic animal protector or to
some costume, duty, or peculiarity con-
nected with the membership. Thus,
amon^ the Kiowa there were 6 warrior
societies, known respectively as Rabbits,
Young Mountain Sheep, Horse Caps,
Black Legs, Skunkberry People (alias
Crazy Horses), and Chief Dogs. The
Rabbit society consisted of boys of about
10 to 12 years of age, who were trained in
their future duties by certain old men, and
who had a dance in which the step was
intended to imitate the jumping motion
of a rabbit. The next four societies
named were all of about equal rank,
varying only according to the merit, or
reputation of the oflScers at any particu-
lar time; but the K'oitsefiko or * Chief
Dogs* were limited to 10 picked and
tried warriors of surpassing courage, each
of whom, at his investiture with the
sacred sash of the order, took a solemn
obligation never, while wearing it, to
turn his face from the enemy in battle
except at the urgent appeal of the whole
war party. It was the duty of the leader,
who wore a black sash passing around
his neck and hanging down to the ground,
to dismount and anchor himself in the
front of the charge by driving his lance
through the end of the sash into the
earth, there to exhort the warriors with-
out moving from his station imless,
should the battle be lost, they released
him by pulling out the lance. Should
they forget or be prevented in the hurry
of flight, he must die at his post. In
consequence of the great danger thus
involved, the K*oitsen scarf was worn
only when it was the deliberate intention
to hght a pitched and decisive battle.
Each society had its own dance, songs,
ceremonial costume, and insignia, besides
special tabus and obligations. The cere-
monial dance of one society in each tribe
was usually characterized oy some species
of clown play, most frequently taking the
form of speech and action the reverse of
what the spectators were expecting. The
organization among the Arapaho, Chey-
enne, Sioux, and other tribes was essen-
tially the same as among the Kiowa. At
all tribal assemblies, ceremonial hunts,
and on great war expeditions, the various
societies took charge of the routine details
and acted both as performers and as
police. Among the Cheyenne the Ho-
tdmitaneo, or Dog Men society (**Dog
Soldiers"), acquired such prominence in
the frontier wars by virtue of superior
number and the bravery of their leader-
ship that the name has frequently been
used by writers to designate the whole
organization.
BULL. 30]
MILKWANEN MIMBRENOS
863
Consult Clark, Ind. Sign Lan^., article
** Soldier'* and tribal articles, 1885; Cash-
ing in 2d Rep. B. A. K, 1883; De Bry,
Brev. Narr., 1591; G. A. Dorsey in Field
Columb. Mus. Pub., Anthrop. ser., ix,
no. 1, 1905; J. O. Dorsey in Am. Nat.,
XIX, no. 7, 1885; Gatschet, Creek Migr.
Leg., I, II, 1884-88; Grinnell, Blackfoot
Lodge Tales, 1892; Maximilian, Travels,
1843; Moonev (1) in 14th Rep. B. A. E.,
1896; (2) in 17th Rep. B. A. E., 1898.
(j. M.)
Milkwanen. A Luisefio village formerly
in the neighborhood of San Luis Rey
mission, s. Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
May 11, 1860.
Milky Wash ruin. A prehistoric pueblo
ruin extending J of a mile along the edge
of Milky hollow, about 9 m. e. of th#
Petrified Forest, Apache co. , Ariz. Much
of the ruin has disappeared over the bluff.
The houses were small and rudely con-
structed; the pottery is coarse and undec-
orated, and red, gray, and black in color;
stone implements show excellent work-
manship. A feature of the ruin is its
stove-like fire altars. See Hough in Rep.
Nat. Mus. 1901, 319-20, 1903.
Milky Hollow Ruin.— Hough, ibid., pi. 58.
Millnch. The Chehalis name of a vil-
lage on the s. side of Grays harbor.
Wash.— Gibbs, MS. no. 248, B. A. E.
Milly. The handsome young daughter
of Hillis Hadjo (q. v.), a Seminole chief.
When, in Dec. 1817, a party of Seminole
captured an American named McKrim-
mon and carried him to Mikasuki, Hillis
Hadjo, who resided in that town, ordered
him to be burnt to death. The stake was
set, McKrimmon with his head shaved
was bound to it, and wood was piled about
him. When the Indians finished their
dance and were about to kindle the fire,
Milly rushed to her father and upon her
knees begged that he would spare the
prisoner* s life; but it was not until she
evinced a determination to perish with
him that her plea was granted. McKrim-
mon was subsequently sold to the Span-
iards and thus obtained his liberty. After
Hillis Hadjo' s death, Milly, who with her
father's family was captured by American
troops, received an offer of marriage from
McKrimmon, but refused to accept it un-
til she was satisfied that the oner was
prompted by motives other than his obli-
gation to her for saving his life. See
McKennev and Hall, Ind. Tribes, iii, 193,
1838; Drake, Inds., 403, 1880.
Mil^ais. A Papago village with 250
inhabitants in 1869 (Browne, Apache
Country, 291, 1869). Probably intended
for McUpais (Span.: *bad land', locally
referring specifically to spread-out lava),
or for Milpas ( 'cultivated patches' ).
Hilpillas. Two Tepehuane pueblos, one
known as Milpillas Grandes (Span. * great
little-cultivated-patches'), the other as
Milpillas Chiquitas, both situated in s. w.
Duran^o, Mexico. The inhabitants of
both villages are now much mixed with
whites and Aztecs.
Milpillas. — Orozco y Berra, Geog. , 281 , 1864. SanU
Maria Milpillas.— Ibid., 319.
Milwaukee ('fine land', from 7nilo or
mino *good', aki 'land.'— Baraga. Cf.
Kelton, cited below). A former village
with a mixed population of Mascoutens,
Foxes, and Potawatomi, situated on Mil-
waukee r.. Wis., at or near the site of
the present Milwaukee, in 1699. See St
Cosme, cited below, and Warren, Hist.
Ojibways, 32, 18^5. Cf. Miskouakimina.
Meliwarik.— StCk)sme (1699) in Shea. Early Voy.,
50, 1861. MeUeki.~Old man {ca. 1699), followed
in map in Lapham, Inds. Wis., 1870. Melleoki.—
Shea, Early Voy., 50, 1861 (early map form).
Melloki.— Ibid. Melwarok.— St Cosme (1699)
quoted by Latham, op. cit., 5. Melwarik.— Ibid.
Milwaukie.— Dick (1827) in H. R. Doc. 66, 33
Cong., 2d sess., 15, 1855 (refers to tribe). Mine-
wagi.— Kelton, Annals Ft Mackinac, 175, 1895
(given as correct aboriginal form, meaning • there
is a good point,' or 'there is a point where
huckleberries grow ').
Mimal. A former Maidu village on the
w. bank of Feather r., just below Yuba
city, Sutter CO., Cal. (r. b. d. )
"' .—Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvii.
SI. xxxviii, 1905 (misprint). Mimal.— Bancroft,
at. Races, i, 450, 1882. Wi-ma.— Powers in Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., in, 282, 1877.
Mimbrenos (Span.: 'people of the wil- •
lows'). A branch of the Apache who
took their popular name from the Mim-
bres mts., s. w. N. Mex., but who roamed
over the country from the e. side of the
Rio Grande in N. Mex. to San Francisco
r. in Arizona, a favorite haunt being near
Lake Guzman, w. of El Paso, in Chihua-
hua. Between 1854 and 1869 their num-
ber was estimated at 4(X) to 750, under
Mangas Coloradas ( q. v. ) . In habits they
were similar to the other Apache, gaining
a livelihood by raiding settlements in
New Mexico, Arizona, and Mexico. They
made i)eace with the Mexicans from time
to time and before 1870 were supplied
with rations by the military post at Janos,
Chi huahua. They were sometimes called
Coppermine Apache on account of their
occupancy of the territory in which the
Santa Rita mines in s. w. N. Mex. are situ-
ated. In 1875 a part of them joined the
Mescaleros and a part were under the Hot
Springs (Chiricanua) agency, N. Mex.
They are now divided between the Mes-
calero res., N. Mex., and Ft Apache
agency, Ariz., but their number is not
separately reported. (f. w. h. )
Apaches Mimbrenog.— Humboldt, Atlas Nouv.
Esp., carte 1, 1811. Coppermine Apaches.— Bartlctt,
Pers. Narr., i. 323, 1854. Iccujen-ne.— Orozco y
Berra, Geoff., 59, 1864. Mangus Colorado's band.—
Ind. Afif. Rep., 206, 1858 (=Mangas Coloradas'
band). Membrenos.— Mill, Hist. Mex., 185, 1824.
Miembre Apaches.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 175, 1875. Miem-
brenos.— Ind. AflF. Rep., 380, 1854. Miembres.-
Davis, Span. Conq. N. Mex., 52, 1869. Mienbre.—
Ind. Aff. Rep., 246, 1877. l|imbrenas.— Browne,
Apache Country, 290, 1869. Mimbreno.^Bonny-
864
MINA MINES AND QUARRIES
[b. a. e.
castle. Spanish Am., 68, 1819. XixnbrereBoi.—
Barreiro, Ojeada sobre Nuevo-M6xico, app., 3,
1832. lliinbret.— Anza (1769) in Doc. Hist Mex.,
4th 8., II, 114, 1856 Kimbres Apaohes.— Cremony,
Life among Apaches, 33, 1868. MiniYre.— Ind. An.
Rep. 1859, 336, 1860. Yeciyen-ne.— Escudero, Not.
Estad. de Chihuahua, 212, 1834 (own name).
Mina. The extinct Sal t clans of Sia and
San Felipe pueblos, N. Mex.
Hua-hano.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix, 352,1896
(Mno=' people').
Hinas. A ilicmac village or band in
Nova Scotia in 1760.— Frye (1760) in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., x, 115, 1809.
Hinatti. A village, probably Seminole,
formerly at the source of Peace cr., w.
central Florida, probably in the present
Polk CO. (H. R. Doc. 78, 25th Cong., 2d
sess., map, 768-9, 1838). The name evi-
dently bears no relation to the present
Manatee in Manatee co.
Minemanng. A Potawatomi village,
called after a chief of this name, near tne
f resent Grantpark, Kankakee co., n. e.
llinois, on land ceded in 1832. — Camp
Tippecanoe treatv (1832) in U. S. Ind.
Treaties, 698, 1873.
Mines and dnarries. The term minine
is usually applied to operations connected
with the procuring of metals from the
earth, while the term quarrying is ap-
plied to the procuring of stone. The
fonner term sometimes refers also to the
obtaining of minerals occurring in minute
quantities, as turquoise, or of substances,
a« clav, salt, and ocher, not usualljr re-
moved in solid or bulky bodies, especially
where deep excavations or tunneling are
required, (iold, silver, and copper were
used by manv of the more progressive
American trilx^s ])efore the discovery;
but copi)er was the only metal extensively
used N. of Mexico. The smelting of ores
was probably imperfectly understood,
even by the most advanced tribes, and
iron, except in meteoric form or in the
ore, was unknown. Their most impor-
tant mines of copper (q. v.) with which
we are acquainted were in n. Michigan
penin. and on Isle Royale in L. Superior.
Here the native metal occurs in masses
and bits distributed in more or less
compact lx>dies of eruptive rock. The
mining oj)eration8 consisted in removing
the superficial earth and dc^bris and in
breaking up the rock with stone sledges
and by the application of heat, thus
freeing the masses of metal, some of
which were of large size. One specimen,
partially removed from its becl by the
aborigines and then abandoned, weighed
nearly 3 tons. *'It was 16 J feet bSlow
the surface, and under it were poles, as
if it had been entirely detached, but it
had not been much displaced" (Win-
chell in Pop. Sci. Monthly, Sept. 1881).
Another very large mass encountered in
the shaft of the Minnesota mine on Onto-
nagon r., Mich., which had been partially
removed by the native miners, is referred
to by MacLean: *'The excavation [an-
cient] reached a depth of 26 ft., which
was filled up with clay and a matted mass
of molded ng vegetable matter. At a
depth of 18 ft., among a mass of leaves,
sticks, and water, Mr Knapp discovered
a detached mass of copper weighing 6
tons. This mass had been rais^ alx>ut
5 ft. along the foot of the lode on timbers
by means of wedges and was left upon a
cobwork of logs. These logs were from
6 to 8 in. in diameter, the ends of which
plainly showed the marks of a cutting
tool. The upper surfacre and edges of the
mass of copper were beaten and pounded
smooth, showing that the irregular pro-
truding pieces had been broken off. Near
% were found other masses. On the walls
of the shaft were marks of fire. Besides
charcoal there was found a stone sledge
weighing 36 pounds and a copper maul
weighing 25 pounds. Stone inau Is, ashes,
and charcoal have been found in all these
mines" (Maclean, Mound Builders, 76-
77, 1904). The excavations were gener-
ally not deep, bein^ merely pits, but
tunneling was occasionally resorted to
(Gill man). In McCargoie's cove, on
Isle Royale, nearly a square mile of the
surface has been worked over, the pits
connecting with one another over a Jarge
part of the area. Countless broken and
unbroken stone sleiiges, mostly roundish
bowlders of hard stone brought from the
lake shore many miles away, are scattered
over the surface and mixed with the
d^»bris. As indicated by the presence of
rough grooves and notches, these imple-
ments were generally hafted for use. A
remnant of a withe handle was preserved
in one instance, and a wooden shovel, a
wooden basin, a wooden ladder, and a
piece of knotted rawhide string are among
the relics obtained from the ancient pite
by modern miners.
In glacial times extensive surfaces of
the copper-bearing rocks were swept by
the under surfaces of the great ice sheets,
and thus many masses and bits of the
metal, more or* less scarred and battered,
were carried southward over Michigan,
Wisconsin, and Minnesota, and even
farther s. These masses, deposited with
the rocky debris of moraines, were col-
lected and utilized by the natives. The
masses of copper, when obtained, were
probably in the main carried away to
distant settlements to be worked into
implements, utensils, and ornaments.
The distribution of the product was very
wide, extending over the entire country
E. of the great plains. Cinnabar, ocher,
salt, alum, and clay were mined in many
sections of the country, Indians some-
times going long distances in quest of
these materials. Coal was and is ob-
BULL. 30]
MINES AND QUARRIES
865
tained from exposures in the bluffs, by the
Hopi Indians, and there is historical tes-
timony that it was thus procured for
pottery-burning in former times. Iron
oxides were extensively mined by some
tribes, as is illustrated in an iron mine re-
cently opened in Franklin co. , Mo. , where
deep, ^inuous galleries had been exca-
vated in the ore body for the purpose of
obtaining the red and yellow oxides for
paint (Holmes).
SECTION OP PAINT Mine in a bed of iron ORE; MISSOURI. DEPTH
OP EXCAVATIONS ABOUT 80 FT. (hoLMEs)
The quarrying of stone for the manu-
facture of implements, utensils, and orna-
ments was one of the great industries of
the native tribes. Ancient excavations,
surrounded by the debris of implement-
making, are of common occurrence in the
United States. Flint (q. v.) and other
varieties of stone sufficiently brittle to
be shaped by the fracture processes were
especially sought, but soapstone, mica,
and turquoise were also quarried. The
flinty rocks include chert (usually called
flint), novaculite, quartz, quartzite, jas-
per, argillite, rhyolite, and obsidian
(q. v.). The best known flint quarries
are those on Flint Ridge, Licking co.,
Ohio; at Mill Creek, Union co.. 111., and
in the vicinity of Hot Springs, Ark.
Many others have l)een located, and
doubtless still others remain undiscov-
ered in the forests and mountains.
At Flint Ridge extensive beds of richly
colored flint of excellent quality occur,
forming the summit of the flattish ridge.
The ancient pittings cover hundreds of
acres, and in numerous cases are still
open to a depth of from 10 to "20 ft.
About the pits are ridges and heaps of
•debris and many shop sites where the
implement forms were roughed out, and
masses of fractured flint and flakage, as
well as countless hammerstones used in
the shaping operations (see Stone-work).
The flint body was first uncovered, prob-
ably with the aid of stone, antler, and
wooden tools, and then broken up with
heavy stone hammers, aided by tne ap-
plication of heat. Similar quarries occur
in Coshocton co., as well as in other parts
Bull. 30-05 55
of Ohio, and in West Virginia, Indiana,
Kentucky, and Tennessee. The quarries
in Arkansas are perhaps even more ex-
tensive than those in Ohio, the stone in
the best known examples being a fine-
grained variety of chert known as novacu-
lite (q. v. ), which occurs in beds of great
thick ness and undetermined extent. The
phenomena of the quarries correspond
closely with those of Flint Ridge
( Holmes). ' Similar quarries of chert are
found at many points in Missouri and
Indian Territory (Holmes). The great
group of quarries found in the vicinity
of Mill Creek, III., presents superfi-
cial indications corresponding closely
with those of the Ohio and Arkansils
quarries, but the stone obtained was a
gray flint, which occurs in the form of
nodular and lenticular masses, mostly of
irregular outline. These concretions
were well suited to the manufacture of
the large flaked implements — spades,
hoes, knives, and spearheads — found dis-
tributed over a vast area in the middle
Mississippi valley. The original pittings,
excavated in the compact deposits of
calcareous clay and sand in which the
nodules are embedded, often reached a
depth of 25 ft or more. A rude stone
pick was used in excavating, and stone
as well as antler hammers were employed
in the flaking work ( Phillips). See Flint
Quarries of quartzite (q. v.) occur in
Wyoming (Dorsey); of argillite (q. v.)
in Bucks co.. Pa. (Mercer); of iasper
(q. v. ) in the same county (Mercer); and
of rhyolite ((]. v. )in Adanisco. (Holmes).
Differing in type from the preceding are
the extensive quarries on Piney branch
of Rock cr., in the suburbs of Washing-
ton, D. C. Here quartzite bowlders were
quarried from the Cretaceous bluffs for
the manufacture of flaked implements
(Holmes). See Quartzite.
SECTION OF FilLEO-UP BOWi-OER QUARRY ; D. C. HEIGHT OF
QUARRY FACE ABOUT 10 FT. (hOLMEs)
Steatite (q. v.), called also soapstone,
was quarried at many points along the
Atlantic slope of the Appalachian nigh-
land from Georgia to New York, also in
866
MINES AND QUARRIES
[b. a. e.
the New England states, and in the far
West, especially in California. This stone
was easily carved, and, because it is not
j^^W
1^
Mb!
^
^mf':
i - J
^^1
4
Wi^
N
^p
iri
W-
MiJtr ■•''^■■"~'
-^"^
i
P^l
W.
WB
f
**!;
\,^t
\ ^. _..,- .
'ij^-t..
. ^: ■■■"■'-_■■>
'^
1
^.^ • '[ c: .
WALL OF 80AP8T0NE QUARRY SHOWING STUMPS LEFT IN REMOVING
Lumps of the Rock; California, (holmes)
readily fractured by heat, was much
used by the Indians for cooking vessels
and for tobacco pipes. The masses of
this rock were
uncovered, and
1 u in p s large
enough to be
shaped into pots
were cut out
with the aid of
well - sharpi»ned
picks and chis-
els of stone
(Holmes, Mc-
G u i r e , Schu-
macher, Rey-
nolds, Angell).
Mica (q. v.)
was quarried in
many places in
Virginia and
North Carolina,
the pittings be-
i n g numerous
and large. The
sheets of this
material were
used by the
natives for mir-
rors and for the
manufacture of ornaments. Buildin^stone
was required in great quantities m the
building of pueblos and cliff-dwellings in
the arid region, but surface rock was so
readily available that deep quarrying was
not necessary. Catlinite (q. v.), a red-
(!lay stone, was extensively quarried for
the manufacture of tobacco pipes and or-
naments. The quarries are situated in
Pipestone co., Minn., and are still worked
to some extent by the neighboring Siouan
tribes. The industry is not regarded as
a very ancient one, although the manu-
OF PIPE8Y0NE APPEARS NEAR BASE OF WALL. ( BENNETT )
factured articles are widely distributed ({,
(Catlin, Holmes).
Turquoise (q. v.) is found in several of
the Western states, but so far as known
was mined extensively at only two points,
Los Cerrillos, near Santa F^, N. Mex.
(Blake, Silliman) , and at Turquoise mtn.,
Cochise co. , Ariz. These mines wjere op-
erated by the natives before the arrival of
the Spanish, as is indicated by the pit-
tings and rude stone mining tools found
associated with them. The mines were
operated also by the Spaniards, and in
more recent years in a desultory way by
the present inhabitants of the r^on.
The mines at Los Cerrillos seem to have
been extensively worke<l by the abo-
rigines. Blake, who examined the site
about 1855, says: **0n reaching the lo-
cality I was struck with astonishment at
the extent of the excavation. It is an
immense pit with precipitous sides of an-
gular rock, projecting in crags, which
sustain a growth of pines and shrubs in
the fissures. On one side the rocks tower
into a precipice and overhang so as to
form a cave;
at another place
the side is low
and forme<i of
thebroken rocks
which were re-
moved. From
the top of the
cliff the excava-
tion appears to
be 200 ft in
depth and 300 or
more in width.
The bottom is
funnel-shaped
and formed by
the s 1 o p i n g
banks of tne de-
brisof fragments
of the sides. On
this debris, at
the bottom of
the pit, pine
trees over a
hundred years
old are now
growing, and the
bank of refuse rock is similarly cov-
ered with trees. This great excavation
is made in the solid rocks, and tens
of thousands of tons of rock have been
broken out. This is not the only open-
ing; there are several pits in the vicinity
more limited in extent, some of them
being apparently much more recent"
(Blake in Am. Jour. Sci., 2d s., xxv, 227,
1858). Silliman (Eng. and Min. Jour.,
XXXII, 169, 1881) speaks of finding in
these mines ** numerous stone hammers,
some to be held in the hand and others
BULL. 30]
MINESETPERI MINGO
867
swung as sledges, fashioned with wedge-
shaped edges and a groove for a handle.
A hammer weighing over 20 pounds was
found while I was at the Cerrillos, to
which the withe was still attache<l, with
its oak handle; the same scrulvoak which
is found growing abundantly on the hill-
sides, now quite well preserved after at
least two centuries of entombment in this
perfectly dry rock. The stone used for
these hammers is the hard and tough
hornblende andesite, or propylite, which
forms the Cerro de Oro and other Cerrillos
hills. With these rude tools, and without
iron and steel, using fire in place of explo-
sives, these patient old workers managed
to breakdown and remove the incredible
masses of these tufat^eous rocks which
form the mounds already des<*ril)ed."
Among the various works which may
be consulted on the native copper mines
are: Foster and Whitney in H. R. Ex. Doc.
69,3l8tCong., Istsess., 1850; Gillmaniu
Smithson. Rep. 1878, 1874; Holmes in
Am. Anthrop., n. s., in, 1901; McLean,
Mound Builuers, 1879; Packard in Am.
Antiq., xv, no. 2, 1898; Whittlesey in
Smithson. Cont., xiii, 1862; Winchell in
Pop. Sci. Mo., Sept. 1881. Quarries of
brittle varieties of stone are describe<l by
Dorsey in Pub. 51, Field Columbian Mus.,
1900; Smith (Fowke) in Nat. Mus. Rep.
-1884,1885; Holmes ( 1 )in Bull. 21, B. A. K,
1894, (2)inl5thRep. B. A. K, 1897; Mercer
(1) in Am. Anthrop., vii, 1894, (2) in Proc.
A. A. A. S., XLii, 1894, (3) in Proc. Am.
Philos. Soc., XXXIV, 8%, 1895; Philliiw
• in Am. Anthrop., n. s., ii, 87, 19(X). Soap
I stone quarries are descril)ed by Angel 1 in
Am. Nat., xii, 1878; Holmes in 15th
Rep. B. A. K., 1897; McChiire in Trans.
Anthrop. Soc. Wash., ii, 1888; Si'hu-
macher in 11th Rep. Pealxnlv Mus., 1878.
Pipestone quarries by Catlin, N. Am.
Inds., 1, 1866; Holmesin Proc. A. A. A. S.,
xu, 1892. Turquoise by Blake ( 1 ) in Am.
Jour. Sci., 2d s., xxv, 1858, (2) in Am.
Antiq., xxi, 1899; Kunz, Gems and Pre-
cioud Stones, 1890; Silliman in Eng. and
Min. Jour., xxxii, 1881. (w. n. n. )
Kinesetperi ( * those who defecate under
the bank.* — H. L. Scott). A division of
the Crows, more commonly known as
River Crows, who separate<l from the
Mountain Crows about 1859 and settled
on Missouri r.
■iiw-Mt-peri.— ( -ulbertflon in Smithson. Rep. 1850,
144. 1851. KInSsapJPrik.-Col. H. L. Scott, inf'n.
1906 (proper form, with meaning above given).
Mlimeii-iap-iMiy-deh.— Anon. MS. Crow vocab., 6.
A. E. River Grows.— Pease in Ind. AfT. Rep. 1871,
420, 1872. Sap-tuokers.-— OulbertKon, op. eit.
Mingan {MaHnfjtin, *wolf'). A Mon-
tagnais (Al^onqman) village near the
mouth of Mingan r., on the n. shore of
the Gulf of St I^wrence, Quebec. It is
the general rendezvous for all the Indians
for several hundred miles around. The
name occurs in the grant of the seigniory
in 1661, and a mission was probablv estab-
lishe<l there soon after ( Hind, Lab. l*enin. ,
I, 43-44, 1863). The village numbered
178 inhabitants in 1884, and 241 in 1906.
(j. M.)
Malngan.— Wm. Jones, inf'n, 1906.
Minghasanwetazlii ( }fi "xa -m^'Wet ^0/7,
* touches not swans*). A sul)gens of the
Mandinkagaghe gens of the Omaha. —
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 228, 1897.
Minghaska ( M i « xa^ska , *8 wan' ) . A gen-
tile subdivision of the Osage. — Dorsey in
15th Rep. B. A. E., 234, 1897.
Minghaskainilikashina ( Mi"x(i' ska i^nii{'
kUicif'^Gy * swan people*). A subgens of
the Minkin gens of the Osage. — Dorsey
in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 233, 1897.
Mingko. The 'Royal' clan of the Ish-
panee phratry of the Chicka.saw, so called
lxH*au8e it was the chief or ruling clan.
Ming-kch— Morgan, Anc. Soc, IChii, 1877. Mingo. —
Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., l, 96, 1884.
Mingo. The Choctaw and Chickasaw
equivalent of the Muskogee mikOf * chief ',
l)oth words being of freouent use by
historians and travelers in tne Gulf stat^
during the colonial |)eriod. (a. f. c. )
Mingo (Algonquian: Mmgm\ * stealth jr, k
treacherous*). A name applied in vari-
ous forms by the Deli^wares and affiliated
tribes to the Iro<|U(>is and cognate tribes,
and more particularly used during the
late colonial period by the Americans to
designate a detached l)and of Iroquois
who had left the villagi^s of the main
body l^efore 1750 and formed new settle-
ments in Pennsylvania, on upper Ohio r..
in the neigh lK)rhood of the Shawnee,
Dela wares, and neighl)oring tribes. From
that period their relations were more in-
timate with the western tribes than with
the Iroquois, and they were frequently
hostile to the whites* while the parent
body was at peace. They gradually
moved down the Ohio, and just previous
to the Revolution were living in the
vicinity of Steubenville, Ohio. In 1766
their settlement, known as Mingo town,
contained 60 families, and was the only
Indian st»ttlement on the Ohio from Pitts-
burg to Louisville (Ilutchins, Descrip.,
1778). From the Ohio they crosseii over
to the headwaters of Scioto and Sandusky
rs., where they l)egan to be known as the
Senecas of San<lusky, either because the
majority were Seneca or because all the
western Iroquois were supposed to 1)6
Seneca. They were called Seneca in
their first relations with the Government,
and that name thus became their official
designation, generally with a descriptive
addition to indicate their habitat. About
1800 they were joine<l by a part of the
Cayuga, who had sold their lands in New
York. In Ohio one part formed a con-
868
MINICONJOU
[B. A.B.
nection with the Shawnee at Lewistown,
while the rest had their village on San-
dusky r. The mixed band at Lewistown
became known as the Mixed Senecas and
Shawnees, to distinguish them from the
others, who were still called Senecas of
Sandusky. In 1831 both bands sold their
lands in Ohio and removed to a tract in
Kansas, on Neo.sho r., whence they re-
moved in 1867 to Indian Territory, where
they now are, the two bands bein^ united
ana having no connection with the
Shawnee. In 1831 the Sandusky band
numbered 251, but by 1885 the entire
body had become reduced to 239. In 1905
they niunbered 366.
On Herman's map of 1670 is a notice of
a tribe called the Black Mincquas living
beyond the mountains on the large Black
Mincqua r., probably the Ohio r. For-
merly, by means of a branch of this river
which approached a branch of the Sus-
quehanna above the Conestoga fort (prob-
ably the Juniata r. ), * 'those Black Minc-
quas came over and as far as Delaware to
trade, but the Sassquahana and Sinnicus
\ Indians [Conestoga and Seneca] went
Cx^^ ' , over and destroyed that very great Na-
\ tion.'* This statement and the location
I make it probable that the Black Mincquas
^ were the Erie, q. v. (j. m. )
Five Nations of the Soiota Plains.— Bouquet (1764),
quoted by Rupp, W. Penn., app., 144, 1846. Mine-
oet.— Cowley j; 1775) in Arch, of Md., 94, 1892
(misprint). Xingo.— See Iroquois. Neosho-Sene-
oaa.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 691, 1854. San-
dusky Senecas.— I^ng and Taylor, Rep., 26, 1843.
Senecas of Ohio.— Ft Stanwix treaty (1768) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., VIII, 111, 1857. Senecas of San-
dusky.—Seneca Agency treaty (1832) in U. 8. Ind.
Treaties, 559, 1837. Senecas of Sandusky and Stony
creek.— Greenville treaty (1814) in Am. St. Papers,
Ind. Aff., 1, 826, 1832. Senecas of the Glaize.— Mau-
mee council (1793), ibid., 357. Six Nations living
at Sandusky.— Greenville treaty (1795) quoted by
Harris, Tour, 260, 1805.
y Miniconjou (* those who plant beside
the stream*). A division of the Teton
Sioux. Their closest affinity is with the
Oglala, Brule, and Hunkpapa Teton. As
the whites did not come into actual con-
tact with the Teton tribes until recent
times, there is no evidence as to their an-
tiquity as distinct organizations. The
first mention of the Miniconjou, unless
under some unidentified name, is by Lewis
and Clark (1804). These authors (Ex-
pedition, I, 61, 1814) speak of them as
" Tetons Minnakenozzo, a nation inhab-
iting both sides of the Missouri above the
Cheyenne r., and containing about 250
men." This indicates a population of
perhaps 800, probably mucn below their
actual number. Their history since they
became known to the whites consists,
like that of the other Sioux, of little else
than war with and raids upon other
tribes and depredations on the whites.
They are frequently alluded to in official
and other reports as among the most
unruly and troublesome of the Teton
tribes. Haydensays: "This band, though
peaceable when ruled by gciod chiefe, luu9
always been very wild and independent,
seldom visiting the trading posts, either
on the Platte or on the Missouri, and
having no intercourse with white men
except with a few traders during the
winter season. * ' They were estimated in
1850 by Culbertson (Smithson. Rep. for
1850, 142) at 270 lodges, or between 2,100
and 2,200 people. At this time, and
until brought upon reservations, they
roamed over the Black hills and head-
waters of Cheyenne r., being usually
found from Cherry cr. on the Cheyenne
to Grand r. Gen. Warren (1856) esti-
mated them at 200 lodges and 1,600 souls.
The Ind. Aff. Rep. for 1863 gives 1,280 as
the population. They are now located
with other Sioux bands on Cheyenne
River res., S. Dak., but are not separately
enumerated.
The divisions given by Lewis and Clark |
are as follows: (1) Minnakineazzo( Mini-
conjou), (2) Wanneewackataonelar, (3)
Tarcoehparh. Culbertson (Smithson.
Rep. 1850, 142, 1851), mentions four: (1)
River that Flies, (2) Those that Eat no
Dogs, (3) Shell-earring band, (4) Leja^a-
datcah. Swift (1884), from information
received from Indian sources, gives the
following divisions (15th Rep. B. A. E.,
220, 1897): (1) Unkcheyuta, (2) Glag-
lahecha, (3) Sunkayutesnni (Those that
Eat no Dogs), (4) Nighetanka, (5) Wak-
pokinyan, (6) Inyanhaoin (Shell-earring
band), (7) Shikshichela, (8) Wa«le-
zaoin, (9) AVannawegha (probably the
Wanneewackataonelar ) .
The Miniconjou were participants in
the peace treaty of Ft Sully, S. Dak., Oct.
10, 1865, and in the treaty of Ft Laramie,
Wyo., Apr. 29, 1868, by which they and
other Sioux tribes were pledged to cease
hostilities and the United States agreed
to set apart for them a reservation.
(j. o. D. c. T.)
Mee-ne-oow-«-gee.— Catlin.N. Am. Inds.,i,211, 1844.
Memaoai^o. — Clark quoted by Coues, Lewis and
ClarkExped.,i,101,note, 1893 (trans, 'makefence
on the river' ). Men-i-oou-zha.— Hoffman in H. R.
Doc. 36, 33d Cong., 2d sess., 8, 1866. Hineoogoe.—
Ind. Aff. Rep., 285, 1854. Hineoosias.— Sage, Scenes
in Rocky M ts. , 58, 1846. Hineooufan.— Vaughan in
H.R.Doc. 36,33dCong.,2dses8.,6,1855. Hi-ne-kan'-
4ui.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 874,
1862. mini-oon-gsha. — Culbertson in Smithson.
Rep. 1850, 142, 1851. Mini-Oonjou.— Smithson. Misc.
Coll.. XIV, art. 5, 6, 1878. Miniooughas.— Hoffman
in H. R. Doc. 36, 83d Cong., 2d sess., 4, 1856.
MinicoujoM.— Winship in H. R. Rep. 63, 33d Cong.,
2d sess., 5, 1855. Mmi-kan-jous.- Warren (1856),
Neb. and Ariz., 48, 1875. Mimkan oju.- Cleveland,
letter to J. O. Dorsey,1884. Minikanyes.- Warren,
Dacota Country, 16, 1855. Kinikanye woiupi.—
Riggs, Dakota Gram, and Diet., xvi, 1852 (trans,
•those who plant by the water* ) . Min-i-kag'-iu. —
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 376, 1862.
Minikiniad-sa.— Brackenridge, Views of La., 78,
1814. KinikomiooB.— Smet, Letters, 37, note, 1843.
Minikonga.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 5, 494, 1856.
BULL. 30]
MININIHKA8HINA MINNEHAHA
869
ias.~KeaneinStanford, Compcnd., 622,
1878. Knikoctju.— Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. £.,
220, 1897 (own name). Kinnake-nono.— Coyner,
Lost Trappers, 70, 1847. Kin na-kine-as-xo.— Lewis
and Clark, Discov., S4, 1806. Kinneoarguis.— Ind.
Afl. Rep. 1856, 68. 1857. Kinnecauihat.— Ind. AIT.
Rep., 801, 1854. Minaeoogouz.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1859,
120, 1860. Hinneoojous.—Oorlij^, Lacotah MS.
vocab., B. A. £., 107, 1874. Kinneoonfew.— Boiler,
Among Inds. in Far W., 29, 1868. Kumeoongou.—
Gale, Upper Miss., 226, 1K67. Minneoonjon.— U. S.
Ind. Treat. (1866), 890, 1873. Kinneconjos.—
Sen. Ex. Doc. 91, 34th Cong., 1st ses.s., ll, 1856.
Himieooi^ouz.— Stanley in Poole, Among the
Sioux, app., 232, 1881. Kinneooigot.— Haniey in
Sen.Ex.Doc.94,34th(3ong.,l8tseNs.,l, 1856. Kinne-
ooqjoa.— Brackctt in Smithson. Rep. for 1876, 466.
Himie Goigoux Sioux.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1K55, 79, 1856.
Himie-Gousha.— Bordeau in H. R. Rep. 63, 33d
Cong. , 2d sess. , 13. 1855. Kinneeowzues.— Ind. Aff.
Rep., 295, 1854. Kin-ne-kan'-su.— Hayden, £thnog.
and Philol. Mo. Val.. 371, 1862. Minnekonjo.— Ind.
Afl. Rep., 247, 1877. Minaieoiigew. — Parkman, Ore-
gon Trail, 126, 1883. Minnikan-joua. —Warren
(1856), Neb. and Ariz., 48, 1875. Minnikanye Wos-
himi.— Burton, City of Sts., 119, 1861 (trans. • thoHC
wno plant by the water'). Moneooshe Sioux.—
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864,228,1865. Teton-Menna-Kanoso.—
Lewis and Clark, Exped., i, map, 1814. To-ton-
min-nmrkino-as'-io. —Lewis and Clark, Disoov., 30,
1806. Tetona Mennakenozzo.— L(mg, Exped. St
Peter's R., i, 381, 1824. Tetons KJmakenoKzo.—
LewisandClark,Exped.,I,61,1814. Tetons Mimia-
kineano.— Lewis, Trav., 171, 1809. Tetons Mimie-
kineano.- Farnham, Trav., 32, 1843. Winaaken-
0110.— Ramseyinlnd. Aff. Rep.,87, 1850(misprint).
Mininilikasliina {Mi'*'/twi A'V7ri''a, 'sun
people * ). A subgeiiH of the Minkin gens
of the Osage. — Doraey in 15th Rep. B. A.
E. 233 1897
Minisha *(**re<l water*). An Oglala
band under Eagle-that-8ails, in 1862. Cf.
Itazipcho.
Min-i-dia'.— Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol . Mo. Val.,
876, 1862. Bed water band.— Culbort.^n in Smith-
son. Rep. 18W), 142, 1851.
Vinishinakato. A l)an(i of the Assini-
boin.
Gent du Lae. — Havden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo.
Val., 887, 1862. Mn'-i-ihi-nak'-a-to.— Ibid.
:^ IffiTiiiiink (*the place of the Minsi.* —
Heckewelder). The leadingLdivdaioiL-of
the MuDflfifi ((i- V. ), with whom they are
often confounded. They lived on' the
headwaters of Delaware r., in the s. w.
part of Ulster and Orange cos., N. Y., and
the adjacent parts of New Jersey and
Pennsylvania. Their principal village,
which bore the same name, was the coun-
cil place of the Munsee, and seems to
have been in Sussex co., N. J., near the
point where the state line crosses Dela-
ware r. They are said to have had three
villages in 1663. The Munsee who
moved w. with the Delawares were
mainly of this division. ( j. m. )
KaaoMiBfi.— Kregier (1663) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., xui, 339, 1881. MaaiMing.— Ibid.. 3'25.
Wanaitaiag.- Ibid. Menetiknt.— Croghan (1759)
in Pioud , Pa. , ii, 297, 1798. Meaeaaiaglis.- Doc. of
1668 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiii, 276, 1881.
Mwiirink.— Doc, of 1755 in Rupp, Northampton,
etc., Cos., 88, 1845. MeiuMiack.— Doe. of 1668 in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, XIII, 289, 1881. Menissing.—
Beeckman (1660), ibid., xii, 315. 1877. Menii-
riMfoa.— Conference of 1660. ibid., xiii, 167, 1881.
Moaiadat.— Beeckman (1663), ibid., xii, 438, 1877.
M«aniiink.~Doc. (1756) in Rupp, Northampton,
etc., Cos., 106, 1845. Kenaiiiinok.^Schuyler
(1694) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 99, 1854. Kini-
lincka.— Swartwout (1662), ibid., xiii, 229, 1881.
Minising.— Mandrillon, Spectateur Am^rieain,
map, 1785. Minisinka.- Boudinot, Star in the
West, 127, 1816. MinitMni.- La Salle (1681) m
Margry, D6c.. ii, 148, 1877 (probably intended for
Munsee). Minisiungh.— Beeckman (1660) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., XII, 306, 1877. Miniwonka.- Beeck-
man (1663), ibid.. 438. Minituk.- McKenney and
Hall, Ind. Tribi>s,lii, 80, 1858. Minnetainok.- Van
derDonck (16.'>6) in Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R.,
96, 1872. Minnisink.— Canajoharie conf. (1759) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 882. 1866 (location).
MinniMincks.— Schuyler (1694), ibid.. IV, 99, 1854.
Minnissinke.— New York coni. (1681), ibid., xiii,
551, 1881. Minuting.- Proud, Pa., II, 320, 1798.
Monnesick.— Addam (1653) in Drake, Bk. Inds.,
bk. 2, 79, 1848.
Miniskayakichun (-wears salt'). A
hand of the BruK> Teton Sioux.
Miniskuya ki^un.- Dorsey (after Cleveland) in
15th Rep. B. A. E., 219. 1897. Minitkuya-kitc'u".-
Ibid.
Minkekhanye ( Mi"'(ip/ qn"^'it('^ * big rac-
coon'). A subgens of the Ruche, the
Pigeon gens of the Iowa. — Dorsey in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 2:W, 18i)7.
Minkeyine (Mi'>ke^ !nfy-€y 'young rac-
coon'). A subgens of the Ruche, tlie
Pigeon gens of the Iowa. — Dorsev in 15th
Rep. B. A. K, 239, 1897.
Minkin (J//" A*'/", * sun-carrier'). The
3d gens on the Tsishu side of the Osage
tribal circle; also the 8th Kansa gens. —
Dorsev in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 231, 233,
1897. '
Minnehaha. The heroine in Henry
Wads worth Longfellow's tSong of Hiam'i'
tha. Her father, home, and nationality
are given in the lines —
At the doorway of his wigwam
Sat the Ancient Arrow-maker,
In the land of the Dacotahs,
Making arrow heads of ja.sper,
Arrow heads of chalcedony.
At his .»!ide, in all her beauty.
Sat the lovely Minnehaha,
Sat his daughter. Laughing Water.
Minnehaha of the song is the poet's
own creation . Some of the elements of her
creation, such as nationality and name,
were suggested from a book called Life
and Ijetjends of the Sioux , by Mrs Mary
Eastman (N. Y., 1849). The book con-
tains some observations on life of the
Sioux, together with a miscellaneous
a.<»sortment of sentiment and romance.
The scene of the events related in the
narratives is on the Mississipi»i with the
center in and around Ft Snelling. This
lay on the borderland l)etween the Sioux
and the Chippewa, who at the time were
constantly at war with each other. So
when the Algonkin hero is told by his
grandmother that the time has come for
him to marry, and he replies and makes
known his selection in the words that —
In the land of the Dacotahs
Lives the Arrow-maker's daughter,
we have the following dialogue which
may be taken as an embodiment of the
870
MINNEPATA — MI8HIKHWUTMETUNNE
[B. A. B.
underljdng motive in the poet's mind in
the creation of his Minnehlaha:
Bring not to my lodge a stranger
From the land of the Dacotahs!
Very fierce are the Dacotahs,
Often is there war between us,
There are feuds yet unforgotten,
Wounds that ache and still may openi
For that reason, if no other.
Would I wed the fair Dacotah,
That our tribes might be united,
That old feuds might be foigotten.
And old wounds be healed forever!
The name Minnehaha is first met with
in Mrs Eastman's book. In the intro-
duction of that work she makes the state-
ment that between Ft Snelling and the
Falls of St Anthony **are the Little Falls
40 ft. in height on a stream that empties
into the Mississippi. The Indians call
them Minnehaha, or * Laughing Waters. ' ' '
This is plainly the source of the heroine's
name. The word Minnehaha is taken
from the Teton dialect of the Dakota
language. It is a compound, the first
part of which is mini and means water.
Mini occupies initial place in composition,
as, minito blue water, minimpa black water,
miniyaya water-cask. The rendering of
Minnehaha as * Laughing Water' is ex-
plained as follows:' The verb to laugh is
i^'(h= German ch); to laugh at, i^a/ia;
and the noun laughter is h^a. Hence,
Minnehaha is literallv * water laughter/
The more reasonable definition of Minne-
haha is to be sought from such 'a source
as that given in tne Dakota- English Dic-
tionary of Stephen Return Riggs, accord-
ing to whom naha as a noun in compounds
denotes 'cascade,* * cataract'; hence w/m-
haha would signif v * waterf al 1. ' ( w. j. )
Minnepata J* falling water'). A divi-
sion of the Hidatsa.
Hinip&ti.— Matthews, inf'n, 1886. Kin-ne-pa'-ta.—
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 169, 1877. Water.— Ibid.
MinnetareeB of Knife River. An uni-
dentified Hidatea division, mentioned by
Lewis and Clark (Exped., i, 330, 1814).
Possibly theAmahami.
Mipshuntik {MV-p'oiin-ttk), A former
Yaquina village on the n. side of Yaquina
r., on the site of Toledo, Benton co.,
Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore,
III, 229, 1890.
Kiqkano (* mud-turtle ') . A subphratry
or gens of the Menominee. — Hoffman in
14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. i, 42, 1896.
Miramiolii. A former Micmac village
on the right bank of Miramichi r., New
Brunswick, where it flows into the
Gulf of St Lawrence. The French had
a mission there in the 17th century, and
in 1760 there was a Micmac village or
band of that name. ( j. m.)
Merimiohi.— Frye a760) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
let 8., X. 116. 1809. Merrimiohi,— Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 1st s.. ni, 100, 1794. Miramiohi.— Beauhar-
nois (1746) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x, 5. 1868.
Mirimiohy.— Stiles (1761) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
1st 8., X, 116, 1809. Kizamiohis.— Shea, Miss. Val.,
86, 1862 (misprint).
Miscanaka. The site of San Buenaven-
tura mission, Cal. (Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Julv 24, 1863). Said by Indians in 1884
to be the name of a former Chumahsan
village at the site of the present school-
house in that town. (ii. w. h.)
Miseanaka.— I'aylor, op. cit. Mito-ka'-na-kau.—
Henshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
18Si (tc=ch).
Miseekwigweelis. A division of the
Skagit tril^, now on Swinomish res.,
Wash. They participated with other
tribes in the treaty of Pt Elliott, Wash.,
Jan. 22, 1855, by which they ceded lands
to the United States and agreed to settle
on a reservation.
Be»-he-kwe-guelU.— Mallet in Ind. Aff. Rep., 198,
1877. Mee-see-qua-guUch.— U. S. Ind. Treat. ( 1855) ,
378, 1873. Miseek^ngweeUs.— Gibbs in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., 1, 180, 1877. Mis-kai-whu.— Gibbs in Pac.
R. R. Rep., I, 436, 1855.
Mlsesopano. A Chumashau village w.
of Pueblo de las Canoas (San Buenaven-
tura), Ventura co. , Cal. , in 1542; placed by
Taylor on the Rafael (jonzales farm.
Mitetopano.— Cabrillo (1542) in Smith. Colec. Doc.
Fla., 181, 1857. Missiuipone.— Taylor in Cal.
Farmer, Apr. 17, 1863. Pona.-Ibid.
Mishawiun (probably from mishatovr
miUy *a great spring' — S. 1). in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 2(1 s., X, 174, 1823;
Jones (Ind. BuL, 1867) translates it 'large
peninsula'). A Massachuset village for-
merly at Cnarlestown, near Boston, Mass.
It was commonly known as Sagamore
John's town, froiil the name of a resident
chief. The English settled there in
1628. (j. M.)
Kisham.— Drake, Ind. Chron., 155, 1836. Kisha-
wum.— Pemberton in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll. 1st 8.,
in. 241, 1794. Sagamore John's Town.— Early Eng-
lish writers.
Mishcup. One of the New England
names of the lM:)rgy {Sparus argyropn).
Roger Williams (H)4.3) gives mislicup-
paiiogy the plural form, as the word for
bream in theNarraganset dialect of Algon-
quian. Mishcup j the singular, is derived
from mulie^ 'great*, and kuppi, * close
together,* referring to the scales of the
fish. From mischcuima^iofj have l>een
derived smppaug ana sciip; also porgy
or pan gee. (a. f. c.)
Mishikhwatmetnnne ( * people who dwell (
on the stream called Mishi * ). An Atha- ^
pascan tribe formerly occupying villages
on upper Coquille r., Oreg. In 1861 they
numl)ered 55 men, 75 women, and 95
children (Ind. Aff. Rep., 162, 1861). In
1884 the survivors were on Siletz res.
Dorsey (Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 232,
1890) in that year obtained the following
list of their villages'( which he calls gentes)
as they formerly existed on Cocjuille
r. from the Kusan country to the head of
the stream, although not necessarily at
one period: Chockrelatan, Chunt^hataa-
BULL. 30]
MI8HIKINAKWA MISHUMASH
871
tanne, Duldulthawaiame, Enitunne, II-
sethlthawaiame, Katomemetimne, Khi-
nakbtunne, Khweshtunne, Kimestunne,
Kthukhwestunne, Kthunataachimtunne,
Meshtshe, Nakhituntunne, Nakhocha-
tunne, Natarghiliitimne, Natsushltatiinne,
Nilestunne, Kghoyinestunne, Sathlrekh-
tim, Sekhushtuntunne, Sunsunnestunne,
Sushltakhotthatunne, Thlkwantiya-
tanne, Thltsharghiliitunne, Thltsusme-
tunne, Thlulchikhwutmetunne, Ti-
methltunne, Tkhlunkhaatunne, Tsa-
targhekhetunne, Tthinatlitunne, Tiilwut-
metunne, Tuskhlustunne, and Tustatunk-
huushi.
CtequeU.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 268, 1884. OoquiU.—
Newcomb in Ind. Aff. Rep., 162, 1861. Ooquilla.—
Ibid., 221. Ooquille.— Abbott, MS. Coquille vocab.,
B. A. E., 1858. De^'i t&i6.— Everette, Tutu MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (=' people by the northern
water'). Ithal^ t«ni.— Gatsohet, Umpqua MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1877 (Umpqua name). Ki-
fuel.— Robertson, Oregon, 129, 1846. Knkwil'.—
Dorsey, Alsea MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1883 (Alsea
name). Ku-kwil' ){bm8.— Dorsey, Chetoo MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1884 (Chetco name) . Kn-kwn'-tun
)fi]inj(.— Dorsey, NaltClnne-tftnni^ MS. vocab., B.
A. E., 1884 (Naltunne name). Mi-ci'-kqwfit-me'
t(bin8.— Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 232,1890.
Mi-oi-qwiit.— Dorsey, Chastacosta MS. vocab.. B.
A. E., 1884. Upper Ooquille.— Dorsey in Am.
Antiq., VII, 41, 1885.
MiBhikinakwa. See LiUle Turtle.
Mishong^ovi {Mi-ahong^-no-vi^ from mish-
6n'mi}}tuoviy * at the place of the other wliich
remains erect, ' referring \o two irregular
sandstone pillars, one of which has fallen.
A. M. Stephen) . A pueblo of the Hopi
in N. E. Arizona, on the Middle mesa
of Tusayan. The original pueblo, which
stood w. of the present Mishongnovi and
formed one of the villages of the an-
cient province of Tusavan, was aban-
doned about 1680 and the present town
built. Mishongnovi was a visita of the
mission of Shongopovi during the mis-
sion period (1629-80) and bore the name
of San Buenaventura. Pop. 221 in 1870;
241 in 1877; 289 in 1882; 242 in 1891. See
Mindeleff in 8th Rep. B. A. E., 2(S, 66-70,
1891; Fewkes in 17tli Rep. B. A. E., 582,
1898; Dorsey and Voth in Field Columb.
Mus. Pub. no. 66, 1902. (f. w. ii.)
Buenaventura.— Vargas (1692) quoted by Davis,
Span. Conq. N. Mex.,368, 1869. Haoanabi.— Senex,
map, 1710. Xaoonabi.— De I'IsIe, Carte Mex. et Flo-
ride, 1703. Maiananf.— Oi^ate (1598) in Doc. In^.,
XVI, 207, 1871. Mangana.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
1, 619, 1851. Masagnebe.— Garc6s (1776), Diary, 394,
1900 ( Yavapai form) . Masagneve. —Oarers ( 1775-6)
quoted by Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 137, 1889.
Xasanaia.— Arrowsmith, map N. A., 1795, ed. 1814.
Kaaaoueve.— Garc^s (1775-6) quoted by Bancroft,
Ariz, and N. Mex., 895, 1889 (Yavapai form).
Ka-shong'-ni-vi.— PoweI1.4th Rep. B. A.£.,xl,1886.
Maah^niniptuovi.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. £.,
26, 1891. mai-sang-na-vay.— Irvine in Ind. Aff.
Rep., 160, 1877. KauaancL—Calhoun quoted by
Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 14, 1898. Mee-
thom-o-neer.— French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 175, note,
1876. Me-«hong-a-na-we.— Crothers in Ind. Aff.
Me-ahi
310, 1891
mng-ne-vi.— Shipley in Ind. Aff. Rep..
1891. Miohonguave.— Moffet in Overland
Monthly, 243, Sept. 1889. Micongnivi.— Ind Aff.
Rep., Ixxx, 1^<86. Mi-con'-in-o-vi.— Fewkes in Am.
Anthrop., v, 225, 1892. Mi-con-o-vi.— Ibid, 13. Mi-
shan-qu-na-vi. — Ward (1861) quoted by Donaldson,
Moqni Pueblolnds.,14,1893. Mi-thon^-i-niv.— Pow-
ell, ibid, (misquoted). Ki-shong'-i-ni-vi. — Pow-
ell in Scribner's Mag., 196, 202, Dec. 1875. Mi-
ghong-in-ovi.— Stephen quoted by Donaldson,
Moqui Pueblo Inds., 14, 1893. Mishongnavi.—
Donaldson, ibid.. 4. Kiahongop-avi. — Bandelier
in Arch. Inst. Papers, ni, 135, 1890. Mi-ghon-
na-vi. — Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., pi. p. 62,
1893. Monsonabi.— Vargas (1692) quoted by Davis,
Span. Conq. N. Mex., 367, 1869. Monsonavi.—
Davis, El Gringo, 115, 1857. Mooshahneh.^Ives,
Colorado R., 124, 1861. Mooshanave.— Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 10, 1863. Moo-gha-neh.— Ives,
Colorado R. , map , 1861 . Mooshongae nay vee.— East-
man, map in Schoolcraft, Ind. TrilH»s, iv, 24-25,
1854. Mooghongeenayvee.— Eastman misquoted by
Donaldson, Moqui Pueblo Inds., 14, 1893. Moo-
•ong'-na-ve.— Jackson quoted by Barber in Am.
Nat., 730, Dec. 1877. Mosanais.— Humboldt, Atlas
Nouv.-Espagne, carte 1, 1811. Mosanis.— I*ike.
Expeditions, 3d map, 1810. Motasnabi.— Morn
(1782) quoted by Banaelier in Arch. Inst. Papers,
III, 135, 1890. MoBaanlive.— E^cudero, Not. do
(Chihuahua, 231, 1834. Moshanganabi.— Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, June 19, 18<)3. Moshongnave.— ten
Kate, Reizen in N. A., 245, 1885. MosMnganabi.—
Dominguez and Escalante (1776) in Doc. Hist.
Mex., 2d s., 1, 548, 1854. Moszasnavi.— Cortcz (1799)
rted in Pac. R. R. Rep., pt. 3, 121, 1856. Mow-
-i-nk.— Domenech, Deserts N. A.. I, 185,. 1860.
Moxainabe.—Vetancurt (1693), TeatroMex.. 111.321,
1871. Moxainabi. — Vetancurt mis(iuoted by Ban-
croft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 173, 1889. Moxainavi.—
Bancroft, ibid., 349. Moxionavi.— Vargas (1692)
quoted, ibid., 201. Moxonaui.— Alcedo, Die.
Geog.,iii. 260.1788. Moxonavi.— Villa-Sefior.Thea-
tro Am. , pt. 2, 425, 1748. Mu-shai-e-nbw-a.— Pac. R. R.
Rep., Ill, pt. 3, 13, 1856 (Zufli^name). Mu-shiu i-
nk.— Ibid, (own name). MuBhanganevi.— Gatschet
in Mag. Am. Hist., 206, 1882. Mushangene-vi.—
Loew in Pop. Sci. Monthly, v, 352, 1874. Mu-shang-
newy.— Bourke, Moquis of Ariz., 90, 1884. Mueh-
anguewy.— Bourke misquoted by Donaldson,
Moqui Pueblo Inds., 14, 1893. Musha-ni.— Barber
in Am. Nat., 730, 1877. Mushaugnevy.— Bourke in
Proc. Am. Antiq. Soc, i, 244. 1881. B. Buen.deMot-
saquavi.— Vargas (1692) quoted by Bancroft, Ariz,
and N. Mex., 201, 1889. Tse-itso-kit'.— Stephen,
MS., B. A. E., 1887 (Navaho name: 'Great rocky
dune'). Tset-so-kit.— Eaton in Schoolcraft. Ind.
Tribes, iv, 220, 18.'>4 (Navaho name).
Mishpapsna {Mic-pdf/-.vu1), A former
Chunia.*»han villajje at tlie arroyo near
Carpi nteria, Santa Bar])ara co., Cal. —
Ilennliaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab.,
B.A.E.,1884.
Mishtapalwa (Mlc-ta-paV-wa ) . A former
Chuinashan village at Ijsl Matanza, near
San Buenaventura, Ventura CO., CaL —
Ilenshaw, Buenaventura MS. vocab.,
B.A.E.,1984.
Mishtapawa ( Mir-ia-pa'tVii) . One of the
former Chumashan villages near Santa
Inez mission, Santa .Barbara. CQ., Cal.—
Henshaw, Santa Inez MS. vocab., B. A. E.,
1884.
MiBhtawayawininiwak. The Chippewa
name for that part of the tribe living in
Canada.
Miotawayang.— Wm. Jones, inf'n, 1905 (r =«/<).
Mishtawaya-wininiwak.— A. S. Gatschet, Ojibwa
MS., B. A.E., 1882 (jnntwjtrat=' people').
Mishumash (Mlc-hii^-maCf native name
of S2tnta_C.ruz.id. and the islanders). A
village of the Santa Cruz islanders of Cali-
fornia, who belonged to the Chumashan
872
MI8INAGUA — MISSION
[B. A.I.
family. — Henshaw, Buenaventura MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
Misinagna. A Chumashan village w.
of Pueblo de las Canoas (San Buenaven-
tura), Ventura CO., Cal., in 1542. Placed
by Taylor near San Marcos^
lli»in««ui.— Cabrillo (1542) in Smith, Colec. Doc.
Fla., 181, 1857. — • • -..---
a.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Apr. 17, 1863.
Misisagaikaniwininiwak {Mishisagdi'
oanXv/intniwug, * people of the big lake. * —
W. J.). A Chippewa band, taking its
popular name from its residence on Mille
i^^jjljj^V>^ Lac, E. Minn. They were included
^^^^^ among the * * Chippewa of the Mississippi ' *
in the treaty of Washington, Feb. 22,
1855, by which a reserve was assigned to
them in Crow Wing co., Minn. There
are now ( 1905) 1,249 Mille Lac Chippewa
under the White Earth agency in the
same state.
XiUe Lae band.— Treaty of 1863 in U. S. Ind. Treat.,
215, 1873. MishiMigMvaniwininiww.— Wm. Jones,
inf'n, 1906. KisiMffaikani-wininiwak.— Gatschet,
OjibwaMS.,B.A.E.,1882.
Misketoiitok (Mis-ke-toi^-Uok), A for-
mer Hupa village on or near Trinity r.,
Cal. — Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in,
73, 1877.
Miskouaha. One of the 4 divisions of
the Nipissing at the Lake of the Two
Mountains, Quebec, in 1736. Their to-
tem was blood, for which reason they
were also called Gens du Sang.
Gens du Sang.— Chauvi^nierie (1736) in N. Y.Doc.
Col. Hist., IX, 1053, 1855. Mikouaohakhi.— Jes.
Rel. 1643, 38, 1858 (same?}. Mukouaha.— Chau-
vif^erie, op. cit. mitkuaket.— Chauvignerie as
quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 654, 1863.
Miskouakimina (prob. for Meskuudkiwi-
ndw^, *red-earthtown,' i.e.,* Fox town.* —
W. J.). Marked on La Tour's map of
1784 as if a Fox village near the site of
Milwaukee, Wis., on the w. shore of L.
Michigan. The Sauk are marked on the
same map as in the adjacent region.
Miflkut A former Hupa village on the
E. bank of Trinity r., Cal., about J m. be-
low Takimilding. (p. e. g. )
Agaraita.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iii,
139, 1853. A-gar-it-it.— McKee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,
S2d Cong., spec, sess., 194, 1853. Sh-nertah.—
Gibbs, MS., B. A. E., 1852. Ser^rits.~Ooddard,
infn, 1903 (Yurok name). Kiaoolts.— Keane in
Stanford, Ck>mpend., 522, 1878. Kiaoott.— Ind. Aff.
Rep., 82, 1870. MU'-kut.— Powers in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., III. 73, 1877. Miakfit.— Goddard, Life and
Culture of the Hupa, 13. 1908. O-gahrit-tia.— Meyer.
Nach dem Sacramento, 282, 18^.
MiskwagamiwiBagaigan ('red • water
lake', from miskwa *red*, garni 'fluid,
weit/er \ saga-igan *\ake*). A Chippewa
y^ band living about Red lake and Red
\e^ Lake r., n. Minn., and numbering 1,353
under the Leech Lake agency in 1905.
By treaty at the Old crossing of Red Lake
r., Minn., Apr. 12, 1864, this band and
the Pembina ceded all their lands in
Minnesota.
Chippewa of Red Lake.— Ind. ACT. Ren. 1905, 516,
1906 (official name). Ohippewajra of Red Lake.—
Lewifl. Travels, 178, 1809. miiku-Oami-Safa-igan-
f.— Gatschet, op. cit. (*Red fluid lake
y^
Indians ' ) . Kiakwa-gamiwi-Mca-icaii.— Gatschet,
Ojibwa MS., 6. A. £., 1882. Miaki^camiwiaiffai-w
gan.— Wm. Jones, infn, 1905. MiskWl-ki X^wi
siglgia W^nin^wik.— Long, Ezped. St Peter's R.,
II, 153, 1824.
Mismatuk (Mis-ma^ -tuk), A former
Chumashan village in the mountains near
Saiita. Barbftraj CaL, in a locality now
called Arroyo Burro. — Henshaw, Santa
Barbara MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
Mispu (Mis^-pu). A former Chumashan
village near the light-house at Santa
3arbaia^ £!al., in a locality now called*
El Castillo Viejo. — Henshaw, Buena-
ventura MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
KiBBhawa ( Misliawdy ^ el k ' ) . A gens of
the Potawatomi, q. v.
Mioawa.— Wm. Jones, infn, 1905 (c=>«A). Mia-
thi'-wft.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 167, 1*77.
Missiassik (on the etymology of the
name, see McAleer, Study in the Ety-
mology of Missisquoi, 1906). An Algon-
quian tribe or body of Indians belonging
to the Abnaki group, formerly living on
Missisquoi r. in n. Vermont. Whether
they formed, a distinct tribe or a de-
tached portion of some known Aknaki
tribe is uncertain. If the latter, which
seems probable, as the name "Wander-
ers" was sometimes applied to them, it is
possible they were related to the Sokoki
or to the Pequawket. They had a large
village at the mouth of Missisquoi r.,
in Franklin co., on L. Champlain, but
abandoned it about 1730 on account of
the rav^es of an epidemic, and removed
to St Francis, Quebec. They subse-
quently sold their claims in Vermont to
tne * * Seven Nations of Canada. * * Chau-
vignerie in 1736 gives 180 as the number
of their warriors, indicating a popula-
tion of 800. They seem to have been on
peaceable terms \nth the Iroquois.
( J. M. C. T. )
Maaiaatuok.- Douglass, Summary, i, 185, 1755.
Maasauuk.— La Tour, map, 1784. Meaaiaaiea.—
Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816 (pomibly
the Missisauga). Kiohiakoui. — Chauvignerie
(1736) in Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, ni, 553, 1853.
Miuskoui.— Beauhamois (1744) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., IX, 1110, 1855 (village). Miaaiaaaik.— Vater,
Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 390, 1816. Kiaaiaooui.— De
Bougainville (1757) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., x,
607, 1858. Miaaiakouy.— Doc. of 1746, ibid., 32.
Wanderera.— Chauvignerie, op. cit. (given as syn-
onjrmous with Michiskoui).
Missinquimeschan. A former Pianka-
shaw (?) village near the site of Wash-
ington, Daviess co., Ind. — Hough, map
in Ind. Geol* Rep., 1883. Cf. Meshin-
gomesia.
Mission. One of the three bodies of
Seaton Lake Lillooet on the w. side of
Seaton lake, under the Williams Lake
agencv, Brit. Col. ; i)op. 73 in 1906. — Can.
Ind. Aff., pt. II, 77, 1906.
Mission fBurrard Inlet). The name
given by tne Canadian Dept. of Indian
Affairs to one of six divisions of Squaw-
mish under the Fraser River agency,
Brit. Col.; pop. 213 in 1906.
BULL. 30]
MISSION INDIANS OF CALIFORNIA
873
I Mission Indians of California. The first
settlements in California were not made
until more than a century after the ear-
1*. ' '" 'iihii^iili^ of
'■% < LUISENOf, E.JliLJfOHNH
Lower California. The mission of San
Di^o, founde<l in 17(>9, was the first per-
manent white settlement witli in the limits
of the present state; it was followed by
20 other Franciscan missions, founded at
intervals until the year 1823 in the re-
gion between San Diego and San Fran-
cisco bay and just n. of the latter. With
very few exceptions the Indians of this
territory were brought under the influ-
ence of the missionaries with compara-
tively little difficulty, and more by per-
suasion than by the use of force. There
is scarcely a record of any resistance or
rebellion on the part of the natives re-
sulting in the loss of life of even a single
Spaniard at any of the missions except at
San Diego, where there occurred an insig-
nificant outbreak a few years after the
foundation.
The influence of the missions was proba-
bly greater temporally than spiritually.
The Indians were taught and compelled
to work at agricultural pursuits and to
some extent even at trades. Discipline,
while not severe, was rigid; refusal to
work was met by deprivation of food,
and absence from church or tardiness
there, by corporal punishments and con-
finement. Consequently the Indians,
while often displaying much personal af-
fection for the missionaries themselves,
were always inclined to be recalcitrant
toward the system, which amounted to
little else than beneficent servitude.
There were many attempts at escape from
the mia«jions. Generally these were fruit-
less, both on account of the presence of a
few soldiers at each mission and through
the aid given these by other Indians
more under the fathers' infiuence. The
Indians at each mission lived at and
about it, often in houses of native type
and construction, but were dependent for
most of their food directly on the authori-
ties. They consiste<l of the tribes of the
region in which the mission was founded
and of more distant tribes, generally from
the interior. In some cases these were
easily induced to settle at the mission and
to subject themselves to its discipline and
routine, the neophytes afterward acting
as agents to bring in their wilder brethren.
The number of Indians at each mission
varied from a few hundred to two or three
thousand. There were thus in many cases
settlements of considerable size; they pos-
sessed large herds of cattle and sheep
and controlled many square miles of land.
Theoretically this wealth was all the i)rop-
erty of the Indians, held in tri^st for them
by the Franciscan fathers. In 1834 the
Aiexican government, against the protests
of the missionaries, secularized tlie mis-
sions. By this step the proi)erty of the
missions was divided among the Indians,
and they were freed from the restraint and
authority of their former masters. In a
very few years, as might have been ex-
pected and as was predicted by the fath-
ers, the Indians had been either deprived
874
MISSION VALLEY MISSIONS
[b. a. e.
of their lands and property or had squan-
dered them, and were living in a hope-
less condition. Their numbers decreased
rapidly, so that to-day in the region be-
tween San Francisco and Santa Barbara
there are probably fewer than 50 Indians.
In s. California the decrease has been
less rapid, and there are still about 3,000
of what are known as Mission Indians;
these are, however, all of Shoshonean
or Yuman stock. The decrease of popu-
lation began even during the mission
period, and it is probable that the
deaths exceeded the births at the missions
from the first, though during the earlier
years the population was maintained or
even increa8e<l by accessions from uncon-
verted tribes. At the time of seculariza-
tion, in 1834, the population of many
missions was less than a decade earlier.
The total number of baptisms during the
65 years of mission activity was about
90,000, and the population m the terri-
tory subject to mission influence may be
'estimated as having been at any one time
from 35,000 to 45,000. At this propor-
tion the population of the entire state,
before settlement by the whites, would
have been at least 100,000, and w^as prob-
ably much greater. See California^ In-
dians of, with accompanying map, also
Missions; Population. (a. l. k. )
Mission Valley. The local name of a
band of iSalish of Fraser superintendency,
Brit. Col.— Can. Ind. Aff. 1878, 79, 1879.
Missions. From the very discovery of
America the spiritual welfare of the na-
tive tribes was a subject of concern to the
various colonizing nations, particularly
Spain and France, with whom the ('hris-
tianization and civilization of the Indians
were made a regular part of the govern-
mental scheme, and the missionary was
frequently the pioneer explorer and dip-
lomatic ambassador. In the English
colonization, on the other hand, the work
was usually left to the zeal of the indi-
vidual philanthropist or of voluntary
orginizations.
First in chronologic order, historic im-
portam^e, number of establishments, and
population come the Catholic missions,
conducted in the earlier period chiefly by
Jesuits among the French and by Fran-
ciscans among the Spanish colonies. The
earliest mission establishments within the
present United States were those begun
by the Spanish Franciscan Fathers, Pa-
dilla, Juan de la Cruz, and Descalona of
the Coronado expedition, among the
Quivira (Wichita), Pecos, and Tigua in
1542. Three years later the woft was
begun among the Texas tribes by Father
Olmos. A century thereafter the first
Protestant missions ( Congregational ) were
founded by May hew and Eliot in Massa-
'chusetts. From that period the work
was carried on both N. and S. until almost
every denomination was represented, in-
cluding Orthodox Russian in Alaska and
the Mormons in Utah. '
The Southern States. — All of this re-
gion, and even as far n. as Virginia, was
loosely designated as Florida in the earlier
period, and was entirely within the sphere
of Spanish influence until about the end
of the seventeenth century. The be^in-
nin^^ of definite mission work in the Golf
territory was made in 1544 when the
Catholic Franciscan Father Andres de
Olmos, a veteran in the Mexican field,
struck northward into the Texas wilder-
ness, and after getting about him a consid-
erable body of converts led them back into
Tamaulipas, where, under the name of
Olives, tney were organized into a regular
mission town. In 1549 the Dominican
Father Luis Cancer with several compan-
ions attempted a beginning on the w. coast
of Florida, but was murdered by the In-
dians almost as soon as his feet touched
the land. In 1565 St Augustine (San
Agustin) was founded and the work of
Christianizing the natives was actively
taken up, first by the Jesuits, but later,
prol)ably in 1573, by the Franciscans,
who continued with it to the end. Within
twenty years they had established a chain
of flourishing missions along the coast
from St Augustine to St Helena, in South
Carolina, besides several others on the
w. Florida coast. In 1597 a portion of
the Guale tribe (possibly the Yamasi) on
the lower Georgia coast, under the leader-
ship of a rival claimant for the chieftain-
ship, attacked the neighboring missions
ana killed several of the missionaries
before the friendly Indians could gather
to the rescue. In consequence of this
blow the work languished for several
years, when it was taken up with greater
zeal than before and the neld extended
to the interior tribes. By the year 1615
there were 20 missions, with about 40
Franciscan workers, established in Horida
and the dependent coast region. The
most noted of these missionaries is Father
Francisco Pareja, author of a grammar
• and several devotional works in the Ti-
mucua language, the first books ever
printed in any Indian language of the
united States and the basis for the estab-
lishment of the Timucuan linguistic
family. In the year 1655 the Christian
Indian population of n. Florida and the
Georgia coast was estimated at 26,000.
The most successful result was obtained
among the Timucua in the neighborhood
of St Augustine and the Apalachee around
the bay of that name. In 1687 the Ya-
masi attacked and destroyed the mission
of Santa Catalina on the Georgia coast,
and to escape pursuit fled to the English
colony of Carolina. The traveler Dick-
V
BULL. 30]
MISSIONS
875
enson has left a pleasant picture of the
prosperous condition of the mission towns
and their Indian pK)pulation as he found
them in 1699, which contrasts strongly
with the barbarous condition of the
heathen tril)es farther s., among whom
he had been a prisoner.
The English colony of Carolina had
been founded in 16&^, with a charter
which was soon after extende<l southward
to lat. 29°, thus including almost the
whole area of Spanish occupancy and
mission labor. The steadil y-gro wing hos-
tility between the two nations culmi-
nated in the winter of 1703-4, when Gov.
Moore, of Carolina, with a small force of
white men and a thousand or more well-
armed warriors of Creek, Catawba, and
other savage allies invaded the Apalachee
country, destroyed one mission town af-
ter another, with their churches, fields,
and orange groven, killed hundreds of
their people, and carried away 1,400
prisoners to be sold as slaves. Antici-
pating the danger, the Apalachee had
applied to the governor at St Augustine
for guns with which to defend themselves,
but had been refused, in accordance with
the Spanish rule which forbade the is-
suing of firearms to Indians. The result
was the destruction of the tril)e and the
reversion of the country to a wilderness
condition, as Bartram found it 70 vears
later. In 1706 a second exj^edition visited
a similar fate upon the Tinnicua, and the
ruin of the Flonda missiims was complete.
Some effort was made a few years latcT
by an Apalachee chief to gather the rem-
nant of his people into a new mission
settlement near Pensacola, but with only
temporary result.
In the meantime the Fren(»h had ef-
fected lodgment at Biloxi, Miss. (1699),
Mobile, New Orleans, and along the Mis-
sissippi, and the work of evangelizing the
wild tribes was taken up at once by secu-
lar priests from the Seminary of Foreign
Missions in Quebec. Stations were es-
tablished among the Tunica, Natchez,
and Choctaw of Mississippi, the Taensa,
Huma, and Ceni (Caddo) of Louisiana,
but with slight result. Among the
Natchez particularly, whose elaborately
organized native ritual included human
sacrifice, not a single convert rewarded
several years of labor. In 1725 several
Jesuits arrived at New Orleans and took
up their work in what was already an
abandoned field, extending their effort
to the Alibamu, in the present state of
Alabama. On Sunday, Nov. 28, 1729, the
Natchez war be^n with the massacre of
the French garrison while at prayer, the
first victim being the Jesuit Du Foisson,
the priest at the altar. The '* Louisiana
Mission,*' as it was called, had never
flourished, and the events and after con-
sequences of this war demoralized it until
it came to an end with the expulsion of
the Jesuits by royal decree in 1764.
The advance of the French along the
Mississippi and the Gulf coast aroused
the Spanish authorities to the importance
of Texas, and shortly after the failure of
La Salle's expedition 8 Spanish presidio
missions were estabHshecl in that terri-
tory. F^h station was in charge of two
or three Franciscan missionaries, with
several families of civilized Indians from
Mexico, a full equipment of stock and im-
plements for farmers, and a small guard
of soldiers. Plans were drawn for the
colonization of the Indians around the
missions, their instruction in religion,
farming, and simple trades and home
life, and in theSi>anish language. Through
a variety of misfortunes the first attempt
proved a failure and the work was aban-
doned until 1717 (or earlier, according to
1^ Harpe), when it was n»sumed— still
under the Franciscans— among the various
subtril^es of the Caddo, Tonka wa, Carri-
zos, and others. The most imi)ortant cen-
ter was at v^n Antonio, where there was a
group of 4 missions, includingSan Antonio
de Padua, the famous Alamo. The mission
of San Sabd was establishe<l among the Li-
pan in 1757, but was destroyeil soon aftt»r
by the hostile Comanche. A more success-
ful foundation was l)egun in 1791 among
the now extinct Karankawa. At their
highest estate, probably about the year
1760, the Imlian ])opulatioii attached to
the various Texas missions nunibere<l
about 15,000. In this vear Father Bar-
tolome Garcia publishtnl a religious man-
ual for the use of the converts at San
Antonio mission, which remains almost
the only linguistic m(mument of the (V>-
ahuiltecan stock. The missions contin-
ued to flourish until 1812, when they wen*
suppressed by the Spanish Government
and the Indians scattered, some rejoining
the wild tribes, while others were al)-
sorbed into the Mexican jwjpulation.
In 1735 the Moraviam under Spangen-
berg started a school among the Yama-
craw Creeks a few miles alK)ve Savannah,
(ia., which continued until 1739, when,
on refusal of the Moravians to take up
arms against the Spaniards, they were
forced to leave the colony. This seems
to be the only attempt at mission work
in either Georgia or South Carolina from
the withdrawal of the Spaniards until the
Moravian establishment at Spring Place,
Ga., m 1801.
The great Cherokee tribe held the moun-
tain region of both Carol inas, Georgia,
Alabama, and Tennessee, and for our
purpose their territory may Ihj treated as
a whole. Dismissing as (loubtful Bris-
tock's account, quoted by Shea, of a
Cherokee mission in 1643, the earliest
876
MISSIONS
[b. a. bT
missionary work among them appears to
have been that of the mysterious Chris-
tian Priber, supposed, though not proven,
to have been a French Jemit, who estab-
lished his headquarters among them at
Tellico, E. Tenn., in 17^16, and proceeded
to organize them into a regular ci\ilized
form of government. After 5 years of
8Ucc(*8sfuT progress he was seize<l by the
South Carolina authorities, who regarded
him as a French political emissary, and
died while in prison. In 1801 the Mora-
vians Steiner and Byhan began the Cher-
okee mission of Spring Place, N. w. Ga.,
and in 1821 the same denomination es-
tablished another at Oothcaloga, in the
same vicinity. Both of these existed
until the missions were broken up by the
State of Cieorgia in 1843. In 1804 Rev.
Gideon Blackburn, for the Presbyterians ,
established a Cherokee mission school in
E. Tennessee, which did good work for
several years until compelled to suspend
for lack of funds. In 1817 the American
Board of Commissioners for Foreign Mis-
sions, under joint Congregational and
PreHhiiterian management, established its
first station in the trilK? at Brainerd, not
far from the present Chattanooga, Tenn.,
followed within a few years by several
others, all of which were in flourishing
condition when broken up in the Re-
moval controversy in 18IM. Among the
most noted of these missionaries was
Rev. S. A. Worcester, one of the princi-
pals in the founding of the * Cherokee
Phcpnix* in 1828, the author of a large
numl)er of religious and other transla-
tions into Cherokee and the steadfast
friend of the Indians in the controversy
with the State of Georgia. He ministered
to the tribe from his ordination in 1825
until his death in 1859, first in the old
nation and afterward at Dwight, Ark.,
and Park Hill, near Tahlequah, Ind.
T. Of an earlier period was Rev. Dan-
iel S. Buttrick, 1817-47, who, however,
never mastered the language sufficiently
to preach without an interpreter. A na-
tive convert of the same period, David
Brown, completed a manuscript transla-
tion of the New Testament into the new
Cherokee syllabary in 1825.
In 1820 the American Board, through
Rev. Mr Chapman, established Dwight
mission for the Arkansas Cherokee, on
Illinois cr., about 5 m. above its junction
with the Arkansas, near the present Dar-
danelle. Ark. Under Rev. Cephas Wash-
burn it grew to be i)erhaps the most im-
portant mission station in the S. W. until
the removal of the tribe to Indian Ter.,
about 1 839. From this station some atten-
tion also was given to the Osage. Of these
missions of the American Board, Morse
says officially in 1822: "They have been
models, according to which other societies
have since made their establishments."
As was then customary, they were largely
aided by Government appropriation. On
the consolidation of the whole Cherokee
nation in Indian Ter. the missionaries
followed, and new stations were estab-
lished which, with some interruptions,
remained in o{)eration until the outbreak
of the Civil war.
In 1820 a Baptid mission was established
at Valleytown, near the present Murphy,
w. N. Car., in charge of Kev. Thomas Po-
sey, and in 1821 another of the same de-
nomination at Coosa watee,Ga. A few years
later the Valleytown mission was placed
in charge of Rev. Evan Jones, who con-
tinued with it until the removal of the
tribe to the W. He edited for some time
a journal called the * Cherokee Messen-
ger,' in the native language and syllabary,
and also made a translation of the New
Testament. The mission work was re-
sumetl in the new country and continued
with a large measure of success down to
the modern period. Among the promi-
nent native workers may be named Rev.
Jesse Bushyhead.
After many years of neglect the Musk-
hogeaii tribes again came in for attention.
In 1818 the Congregational- Presbyterian
American Board, through Rev. Cyrus
Kingsbury, established the first station
among the Choctaw at Eliot, on Yala-
busha r. in n. Miss. Three years later
it was placed in charge of Rev. Cyrus
Byington, the noted Choctaw philolo-
gist, who continued in the work there
and in the Indian Ter., for nearly half a
century, until his death in 1868. The
Eliot mission in its time was one of the
most important in the southern country.
In 1820 a second Choctaw mission, called
May hew, was begun, and became the
residence of Rev. Alfred Wright, also
known for his linguistic work. On the
removal of the tril^to Indian Ter., about
1830, it became necessary to abandon
these stations and establish others in the
new country beyond the Mississippi.
Among the most noted was Whee-
lock, organized by Rev. Alfred Wright
in 1832. Others were Stock bridge, Ben-
nington, Mt Pleasant, and Spencer Acad-
emy. TheAmerican Board also extended
its effort to the immigrant Creeks, estab-
lishing in their nation, under the super-
vision of Rev. R. M. Loughridge, Kowetah
(Kawita) mission in 1843, and Talla-
hassee shortly after, with Oak Ridge,
among the removed Seminole, a few
years later. Most of these continued
until the outbreak of the Civil war, and
were reorganized after the war was over.
The school at Cornwall, Conn., was also
conducted as an auxiliary to the mission
work of the earlier period (see New Eng-
land ) . Among the Presbyterian workers
BULL. 80]
MISSIONS
877
who have rendered distinguished sen^ice
to Muskhogean philology in the way of
religious, ^ucational, and dictionary
translation may be noted the names of
Byineton, AVilliams, Alfred and Allen
Wright, for the Choctaw, with Fleming,
Loughridge, Ramsay, VVinslett, Mrs Rob-
ertson, and the Perry mans (Indian) for
the Creeks.
The Baptists began work in the Indian
Ten about 1832, and three years later
had 4 missionaries at as manv stations
among the Choctaw, all salaried as
teachers by the United States, ** so that
these stations were all sustained without
cost to the funds which benevolence pro-
vided for many purposes ' * ( McCoy) . I n
1839 they were m cnarge of Revs. Smed-
ley. Potts, Hatch, and Dr Allen, respect-
ively. Missions were established about
the same time among the Creeks, the
most noted laborers in the latter field
being Rev. H. F. Buckner, from 1849
until his death in 1882, compiler of a
Muskogee grammar and other works in
the language, with Rev. John Davis and
Rev. James Perry man, native ministers
who had received their education at the
Union (Presbyterian) mission among the
Oeaf^ (Bee Interior l^tes). As auxiliary
to the work of this denomination, for the
special purpose of training native work-
ers, the American Baptist Board in 1819
established at Great Crossings, in Ken-
tucky, a higher school, known as the
Choctaw Academy, sometimes as John-
son's Academy. Although intended for
promising youth of every tribe, its pupils
came chiefly from the Choctaw and the
Creeks until its discontinuance about
1843, in consequen(;e of the Indian prefer-
ence for home schools.
Work was begun by the Methodists
among the Creeks in Indian Ter. about
1835, l)ut was shortly afterward discon-
tinued in consequence of difficulties with
the tribe, and was not resumed until some
years later.
M I DOLE Atlantic States. The earliest
mission establishmentwithin this territory
was that founded by a company of 8 Span-
ish Jesuits and lay brothers with a num-
ber of educated Indian boys, under Father
Juan Bautista Segura, at "Axacan,*' in
Virginia, in 1570. The exact location is
uncertain, but it seems to have been on or
near the lower James or Pamunkey r. It
was of brief existence. Hardly had the
bark chapel been erected whenthe party
was attacked by the Indians, led by a
treacherous native interpreter, and the
entire company massacred, with the ex-
ception of a single bov. The massacre
was avenged by Menenaez two years later,
but the mission effort was not renewed.
The next undertaking was that of the
English Jesuits who accompanied the
Maryland colony in 1633. The work was
chiefl V among the Conoy and Patuxent of
Maryland, with incidental attention to the
Virginia tribes. Several stations were es-
tablished and their work, with the excep-
tion of a short period of warfare in 1639,
was very successful, the principal chiefs
being numbered among the converts, until
the proscription of the Catholic religion by
the Cromwell party in 1649. The leader
of the Maryland mission was Father An-
drew White, author of the oft-<j noted
*' Relatio*' and of a grammar and diction-
ary of the Piscataway (?) language.
The New York mission began in 1642,
among the Mohawk, with the ministra-
tion oi the heroic Jesuit captive, Father
Isaac Jogiies, who met a cruel death at
the hands of the same savages 4 years
later. During a temporary jx^ace l)etween
the French and the Inxjuois in 1653 a
regular post and mission church were
built at Onondaga, the capital of the con-
federacy, by permission of the lea^e.
The Oneida, Cayuga, ami Seneca invited
and received missionaries. Much of their
welcome was undoubtedly due to the
presence in the Iroquois villages of
large numbers of incorporated Chris-
tian captives from the destroyed Huron
nation. The truce lasted but ashort time,
however, and before the summer of 1658
the missionaries had withdrawn and the
war was acain on. In 1666 peace was re-
newed and within a short time missions
were again founded among all the tribes.
In 1669 a few ('hristian Irocjuois, sojourn-
ing at the Huron mission of I^orette,
near (Quebec, Canada, withdrew and
formed a new mission settlement near
Montreal, at a place on the St I-awrt^nce
known as La Prairie, or under its mis-
sion name, St Franyois Xavier des Pres,
the precursor* of the later St Francois
Xavier du Sault and the mo<lern Caugh-
nawaga. The new town soon l)ecame the
rallying point for all the Christian Iro-
quois, who removed to it in large num-
bers from all the tribes of the (confed-
eracy, particularly from the Mohawk
towns. There also gathered the Huron
and other Christian captives from among
the Iroquois, as also many converts from
all the various eastern Algonquian tribes
in the French alliance. To this period
belongs the noted Jesuit scholar, Etienne
de Carheil, who, arriving in 1666, de-
voted the remaining 60 years of his life
to work among the Cayuga, Ilurons, and
Ottawa, mastering all three languages,
and leaving behind him a manuscript
dictionary of Huron radices in Latin and
French.
In 1668 also a considerable body of
Christian Cayuga and other Iroquois, to-
gether with some adopteil Hurons, crossed
Lake Ontario from New York and set-
878
MISSIONS
[b. a. b.
tied on the n. shore in the neighborhood
of Quints bay. At their request Sulpician
priests were sent to minister to them, but
within a few years theimmiCTant Indians
had either returned to their original
country or scattered among the other
Canadian missions. In 1676 the Catholic
Iro<iuoiH mission town of Th*^ MnnntA^n
was founded by the Sulpician fathers
on the island of Montreal, with a w^ell-
organized industrial school in charge
of the Congregation sisters. In conse-
quence of these removals from the Iro-
quois country and the breaking out of a
new war with the Five Tribes in 1687,
the Jesuit missions in New York were
brought to a close. In the seven years*
war that followed, Christian Iroquois of
the missions and heathen Iroquois of the
Five Nations fought against each other as
allies of French or English, respectively.
The Mountain was abandoned in 1704,
and the mission transferred to a new site
at the Sault au Recollet, n. of Montreal.
In 1720 this was again removed to the
Lake of Two Mountains (Oka, or Canasa-
daga) on the same island of Montreal,
where the Iroquois were joined by the
^ipififlingand Algonkin^ of the former Sul-
pician mission town of Isle aux Tourtes.
Among the noted workers identified with
it, all of the scholarly Sulpician order,
mav be named Revs. IX»per^t, Giien,
Mathevet, 1746-81; De Terlaye, 1754-77;
Guichart, Dufresne, and Jean Andre Cuoq,
1841^90. Several of these gave attention
also to the Algonkin connected with the
same mission, and to the Iroouois of St
Regis and other stations. All of them
were fluent masters of the Irmjuois lan-
guage, and have left important contribu-
tions to , philologj;, particularly Cuoq,
whose* ** Etudes philologiques" and Iro-
(juois dictionary remain our standard au-
thorities.
All effort among the villages of the
confederacy was finally abandoned, in
consequence of the mutual hostility of
France and England. In 1748 the Sul-
pician Father Francois Picquet founded
the new mtesion settlement of Presenta-
tion on the St Lawrence at Oswegatchie,
the present Ogdensburg, N. Y., which
withm three years had a prosperous pop-
ulation of nearly 400 families, drawn
chiefly from the Onondaga and Cayuga
tril)es. About 1756 the still existing mis-
sion town of St Francis Regis 1( St R^s),
on the s. side of the St Lawrence where
the Canada-New York boundary inter-
sects it, was founded under Jesuit aus-
pices by Iroquois emigrants from Caugh-
nawaga mission. The Oswegatchie set-
tlement decline<l after the Revolution un-
til its abandonment in 1807. Caughna-
waga, St Rfigis, and Lake of Two Moun-
tains still exist as Catholic Iroquois mis-
sion towns, the two first named bein^ the
largest Indian settlements n. of Mexico.
About the year 1755 the first misBion in
w. Pennsylvania was established among
the Delawares at Sawcunk, on Beaver
r., by the Jemit Virot, but was soon
discontinued, probably on account of the
breaking out of the French and Indian
war.
Philology owes much to the labor of
these missionaries, particularly to the
earlier Jesuit, Jaccjues Bruyas, and the
later set^ular priest. Father Joseph Mar-
coux (St Regis and Caughnawaga, 1813,
until his death in 1855), whose mona-
mental Iroquois grammar and dictionary
is the fruit of forty years' residence with
the tril)e. Of Father Bruyas, connected
with the Sault Ste Louis (Caughnawaga)
and other Iroquois missions from 1667 un-
til his death in 1712, duringa part of which
period he was superior of all the Canadian
missions, it was said that he was a master
of the Mohawk language, speakinj^ it as
fluently as his native French, his diction-
ary of Mohawk root words being still a
standard. Father Antoine Rinfret, 1796-
1814, has left a body of more than 2,000
quarto pages of manuscript sermons in the
Mohawk language; while Rev. Ni(X)las
Burtin, of Caughnawaga (1855- ), is an
even more voluminous author.
The Lutheran minister, John Campa-
nius Holm (commonly known as Campa-
nius), chaplain of the Swedish colony in
Delaware in 1643-48, gave much attention
to missionar}' work among the neighbor-
ing Indians and translated a catechism
into the Delaware language. This seems
to have been the only missionary work
in the Atlantic states by that denomina-
tion.
Under the encouragement of the Eng-
lish colonial government the Episcopa-
lians, constituting the established Church
of England, undertook work among the
Iro(juoi8 tribes of New York as early as the
beginning of the 18th century. In 1700 a
Dutch Calvinist minister at Schenectady,
Rev. Bernardus Freeman, who had alr^Eidy
given suflScient attention to the Mohawk
to acquire the language, was employed to
prepare some (iospel and ritual transla-
tions, which fonned the basis of the first
booklet in the language, published in Bos-
ton in 1707. In 1712 the English Society
for the Proi)agati(>n of the Gospel sent out
Rev. William Andrews, who, with the as-
sistance of a Dutch interpreter, I^wrence
Claesse, and of Rev. Bernardus Freeman,
translated and published a great part of
the liturgy and some parts of the Bible
3 years later. The work grew and ex-
tended to other tribes of the Iroquois con-
federacy, being especially fostered at a
later period by Sir William Johnson, su-
])erintendent for Indian affairs, who had
BULL. 30]
MISSIONS
879
^ published at his own expense, in 1769, a
new edition of the Episcopalian liturgy in
the Mohawk language, the joint work of
several missionaries, principal of whom
was Rev. Henry Barclay. From this time
until 1777 the principal worker in the
tribe was Rev. John Stuart, who trans-
lated the New Testament into Iroquois.
On the removal of the Mohawk and
others of the Iroquois to Canada, in con-
sequence of the Revolutionary war, a new
edition was prepared by Daniel Glaus,
official interpreter, and published under
the auspices of the Canadian provincial
government. In 1787 a new translation
of the Book of Common Prayer, prepared
by the noted chief, Joseph Brant (see
Theyandanega), who had l)een a pupil of
Wheelock's school, in Connecticut, was
published at the expense of the English
Government. In 1816 another edition
appeared, prepared by the Rev. Eleazer
Williams, a mixed-blood Caughnawaga,
sometimes claimed as the '^I^ost Dau-
phin.** Mr Williams labored chiefly
among the Oneida in New York. He was
succeeded, about 1821, by Solomon Davis,
who followed the tribe in the emigration to
Wisconsin. The latter was the author of
several reli^ous books in the Oneida dia-
lect, including another edition of the Book
of Common Prayer, publisheii in 1837.
In 1822 the Society for the Propagation
of the GosjK»l, already noted, definitely
transferred its operations to the Iroquois
res., on Grand r., Ontario, where it still
continues, its principal establishment be-
ing the Mohawk Institute, near Brant-
ford. For this later i)eriod the most dis-
tinguished name is that of Rev. Abraham
Nelles, chief missionary to the Six Nations
of Canada for more than 50 years, almost
up to his death in 1884. He was also the
author of a translation of the Common
Prayer, in which he was aided by an
educated native, Aaron Hill. (See also
Canada y East. )
. Of less historic importance was the
Munsee mission of Crossweeksung, near
the present Freehold, N. J., conducted
by Rev. David Brainerd for the Society
for the Propagation of the Gospel, iii
1746-47.
In Virginia a school for the education
of Indians was established in connection
with William and Mary College, Wil-
liamsburg, about 1697, chiefly through
the effort of Mr Robert Boyle, and some
Indians were still under instruction there
as late as 1760. Some earlier plans to the
same end had been frustrated by the out-
break of the Indian war of 1622 (Stith).
Under Gov. Spotswood a school was es-
tablished among the Saponi about 1712,
but had only a brief existence. Both of
these may be considered as under Epis-
copalian auspices.
In 1766, the Congregational minister
Rev. Samuel Kirkland began among the
Oneida of New York the work which he
conducted with success for a period of
nearly 40 years. The Stockbndge and
Brotherton missions in New York and
Wisconsin by the same denomination are
properly a continuation of New England
history," and are so treated in this article.
To a later period belongs the Congrega-
tional mission among the Seneca of New
York, maintained by Rev. Asher Wright
from his first ai)pointment in 1831 until
his death in 1875. A fluent master of
Seneca, he was the author of a number
of religious and educational works in the
language, besides for some years publish-
ing a journal of miscellany in the same
dialect.
The Frieu(L% or Quakers^ in Pennsylva-
nia and New Jersey, from their first com-
ing among the liulians, had uniformly
cultivated kindly relations with them,
and had taken every opportunity to en-
force the teachings of Christianity by
word and example, but seem not to have
engaged in any regular mission work or
established any mission schools in either
of these colonies.
As early as 1791 the noted Seneca
chief, (•ornplanter, inipresscnl by the ef-
forts of the Quakers to bring about a
friendly feeling Ix'twc^en the two races,
requested the Philadelphia yearly meet-
ing to take charge of three l)oys of his
tribe for education, one of them being
his own son. In 1796 the meeting be-
gan regular work among the Iroquois
in New York by estal)lishing tnree
workers among the Oneida and the
Tuscarora. These teachers gave first at-
tention to the building of a mill and a
blacksmith shoj), the introduction of farm
tools, and the instruction of the Indians
in their use. The women were instnicted
in household duties, including spinning
and weaving. A school was also com-
mence<l, and the work progressed until
1799, when, in conse^iuence of the sus-
picions of the Indians as to the ultimate
purpose, the Quakers withdrew, leaving
all their working plant l)ehind. In 1798,
on invitation of the v^neca, they estab-
lished a similar working mission on the
Allegany res. , and later at Cattaraugusand
Tunesassah, with the good result that in
a few years most of the bark cabins had
given place to log houses, and drunken-
ness was almost unknown. They re-
mained undisturbed through the war of
1812, at one time forestalling a smallpox
epidemic by the vaccination of about 1 ,000
Indians, but were soon afterward called
on to champion the cause of their wards
against the efforts at removal to the W.
In the meantime the New York meeting,
about 1807, had started schools among the
880
MISSIONS
[b. a. e.
Stockbridge and Brotberton tribes from
New England, then living in the Oneida
country. Owing to the drinking habits
of the Indians, but little result was accom-
plished. The removal of the Oneida and
Stockbridges, about 1822, and the subse-
quent disturbed condition of the tribes
brought about, first, the curtailment of
the work, and afterward its abandonment,
about 1843.
In 1740 the Moratian missionary. Chris-
tian Ranch, began a mission among the
Mahican at Shecomeco, near the present
Pine Plains, Dutchess co., N. Y., which
attained a considerable measure of success
until the hostility of the colonial govern-
ment, instigated by the jealousy of those
who had traded on the vices of the In-
dians, compelled its abandonment about
5 years later. During its continuance
the work had been extended, in 1742, to
the vScaticook, a mixed band of Mahican
and remnant tribes settled just across the
line, about the present Kent, Conn. Here
a flourishing church was soon built up,
with every prospect of a prosperous fu-
ture, when the blow came. Some of the
converts followed their teachers to the
W. ; the rest, left without help, relapsed
into barbarism. The Shecomeco colony
removed to Pennsylvania, where, after a
a brief stay at Bethlehem, the Moravian
central station, a new mission, including
both Mahican and Delawares, was estab-
lished in 1746 at Gnadenhuetten, on Ma-
honing r., near its junction with the Le-
high. A chief agent in the arrangements
was the noted philanthropist. Count Zin-
zendorf. Gnadenhuetten grew rapidly,
soon having a Christian Indian congrega-
tion of 500. Missions were founded at
Shamokin and other villages in e. Penn-
sylvania, which were attended also by
Shawnee and Nanticoke, besides one in
charge of Rev. David Zeisberger among
the Onondaga, in New York. The mis-
sionaries, as a rule, if not always, served
without salary and supported themselves
by their own labors. All went well until
the beginning of the French and Indian
war, when, on Nov. 24, 1755, Gnaden-
huetten was attacked by the hostile sav-
ages, the missionaries and their families
massacred, and the mission destroyed.
The con verts were scattered, butaftersome
period of wandering were again gathered
into a new mission at Nain, near Bethle-
hem, Pa. On the breaking outofPontiac*s
war in 1763 an order was issued by the
Pennsylvania government for the convey-
ance of the converts to Philadelphia.
This was accordingly done, and they
were detained there under guard, but
attended by their missionary, Bernhard
Grube, until the close of the war, suffer-
ing every hardship and in constant dan-
ger of massacre by the excited borderers.
On the conclusion of peace they estab-
lished themselves on the Susquehanna at
a new town, which was named Friedens-
huetten, near the Delaware village of
Wyalusing. In 1770 they again removed
to Friedensstadt, on Beaver cr., in w.
Pennsylvania, under charge of Zeis-
berger, and two years later made another
removal to the Muskingmn r., in Ohio,
by permission of the western Delawares.
By the labor of the missionaries, David
Zeisberger, Bishop John Ettwein, Johan-
nes Roth, and the noted John Hecke-
welder, who accompanied them to the
W., the villages of Schoenbrunn and
Gnadenhuetten were established in the
midst of the wild tribes within the pres-
ent limits of Tuscarawas co., the first-
named being occupied chiefly by Delar
wariM, the other by Mahican. The
Freidensstadt settlement was now alMUi-
doned. In 1776 a third village, Lichte-
nau (afterward Salem), was founded,
and the Moravian work reached its high-
est point of prosperity, the whole convert i
population including about 500 souls. (
Then came the Revolution, by which the
missions were utterly demoralized until
the culminating tragedy of Gnadenhuet-
ten, Mar. 8, 1782, when nearly 100 Chris-
tian Indians, after having been bound
together in pairs, were barbarously mas-
sacred by a party of Virginia borderers.
Once more the missionaries, Zeisberger
and Heckewelder, gathered their scat-
tered flock, and aiter another period of
wandering, settled in 1787 at New Salem,
at the mouth of Huron r., L. Erie, N.
Ohio. A part of them settled, by in-
vitation of the British Government, at
Fairfield, or Moraviantown. on Thamfy}
f,, Ontiirinj in I7<j0, under the leadership
of Rev. Christian Dencke, while the rest
were reestablished in 1798 on lands
granted by the United States at their
former towns on the Muskingum. Here
Zeisberger died in 1808, after more than
60 years of faithful ministry without sal-
ary. He is known to philologists as the
author of a grammar and dictionary of
the Onondaga, besides several smaller
works in the Delaware language.
The mission, bv this time known as
Goshen, was much disturbed by the War
of 1812, and the subsequent settlement of
the country by the whites so far demor-
alized it that in 1823 those then in chaive
brought it to a close, a small part of the
Indians removing to the W., constituting
the present Munaee (Thnat.iii.na in Kanafli?^
while the remainder joined their brethren
in Ontario, Canada. The latter, whose
own settlement also had been broken up
by the events of the same war, had been
gathered a few years before into a new
town called New Fairfield, by Rev. Mr
Dencke, already mentioned, who had also
BULL. 30]
MISSIONS
881
ione work among the Chippewa. Dencke
died in retirement in 1839, after more than
10 years of missionary service, leaving as
his monument a manuscript dictionary of
the Delaware language and minor printed
works, including one in Chippewa. The
Moravian mission at New Fairfield was
kept up for a number of years after his
death, out was at last discontinued, and
both the ** Moravians" and the **Mun-
sees'* of the Thames are now credited
officially either to the Methodist or to the
Episcopal (Anglican) church (see Omaday
The Munsee who had removed with the
Delawares to Kansas were followed a few
years later by Moravian workers from
Canada, who, before 1840, had a success-
ful mission among them, which continued
until the diminishing band ceased to l)e
of importance. Among the workers of
this later period may be named Rev.
Abraham Luckenbach, "the last of the
Moravian I-.enapists," who ministered to
his flock during a 3 years* sojourn in
Indiana, and later in Canada, from 1800
to his death in 1854, and was the author
of several religious works in the language.
Dencke, founder of the Thames r. colony,
was also the author of a considerable
manuscri])t religious work in the language
and probably also of a grammar and dic-
tionary.
Another Moravian missionary, Rev.
John C. Pyrljeus, labored among the Mo-
hawk from 1744 to 1751, and has left sev-
eral manuscript grammatic and devotional
works in that and the cognate dialects, as
G^so in Mahican and Delaware. For sev-
eral years he acted as instructor in lan-
goa^ to the candidates for the mission
service. Rev. Johannes Roth, who ac-
companied the removal to Ohio in 1772,
before that time had devoted a number
of years to the work in Pennsylvania,
Emd is the author of a unique and impor-
tant religious treatise in tne Unami dia-
lect of the Delaware.
A remarkable testimony to the value of
the simple life consistently followed by
the Moravians is afforded m the a^ at-
tained by many of their missionaries in
spite of all the privations of the wilder-
ness, and almost without impairment of
tlieir mental faculties, viz: Pyrlieus, 72
years; Heckewelder, 80; Ettwein, 82;
l2eisbei^r, 87, and Grube, 92.
New England. — The earliest New Eng-
land mission was attempted by the French
Jesuit Father Peter Biard among the
Abnaki on Mt Desert id., Maine, in 1613,
in connection with a Fi^nch poet, but
both were destroyed by an English fleet
almost before the buildings were com-
pleted. In the next 70 years other
Jesuits, chief among whom was Father
Gabriel Druillettes (1646-57), spent much
Bull. 30—05 56
time in the Abnaki villages and drew off
so many converts to the Algonkin mis-
sion of Sillery (see Canada^ East) as to
make it prat!tically an Abnaki mission.
In 1683 the mission of St Francis de Sales
(a. v. ) was founded at the Falls of the
Chauditire, Quebec, and two years later
Sillery was finally abandoned for the
new site. Among those gathered at St
Francis were many refugees from the
southern New England tribes, driven out
by King Philip's war, the Pennacook and
southern Abnaki l)eing especially numer-
ous. In 1700 the mission was removed
to ita present location, and during the
colonial period continued to l)e recruited
by refugees from the New England tribes.
Al)out 1685 missions were established
among the Penobscot and the Paasama-
quoddy, and in 1695 the celebrated Jesuit
Father Sebastian Rale (Rasle, Rasles)
began at the Abnaki mission at Norridge-
wock on the Kennel)ec (the present In-
dian Old Point, Me. ) the work which is
so inseparably connected with his name.
He was not, however, the founder of the
mission, as the church was already built
and nearly the whole tribe Christian. In
1705 the church and village were burned
by the New Englanders, but rebuilt by the
In<iians. In 1713 a small band removed
to the St Lawrence an<l settled at IV'can-
cour, Quebec, where their descendants
still remain. In 1722 the mission was
again attacked and pillaged by a force of
more than 200 men, but the alann was
given in time and tlie village was found
deserted. As a part of the plunder the
raiders carried off the manuscript Abnaki
dictionary to which RAle had devoted
nearly 30 years of study, and which ranks
as one of the great monuments of our
aboriginal languages. On Aug. 23, 1724,
a third attack was made by the New
England men, with a i>arty of Mohawk
allies, and the congregation scattered after
a defense in which seven chiefs fell, the
missionary was killed, scalped, and hacked
to pieces, and the church plundered and
Inimed. Rdle was then 66 years of age.
His dictionary, preserved at Harvard
University, was published in 183i^, and
in the same year a monument was erected
on the spot where he met his death.
The mission site remained desolate, a
large part of the Indians joining their
kindred at St Francis. The minor sta-
tions on the Penobscot and St John con-
tinued for a time, but steadily declined
under the constant colonial warfare. In
1759 the Canadian Abnaki mission of St
Francis, then a large and flourishing vil-
lage, was attacked by a New England
force under Col. Rogers and destroyed,
200 Indians being killed. It was after-
ward rebuilt, the present site being best
known as Pierrevule, Quebec. The Ab-
882
MISSIONS
[B. A. E.
naki missions in Maine were restored
after the Revolution and are still con-
tinued by Jesuit priests among the Penob-
scot and the Passamaquodd^.
Among other names distinguished in
the Abnaki mission the first place must
l)e given to the Jesuits AuW^ry and
Lepueur. Father Aubery, after 10 years'
work among the Indians of Nova Scotia,
went in 1701) to St Francis, where he re-
mained until his death in 1755. He ac-
quireil a fluent use of the language, in
which he wrote much. Most of his
manuscripts were destroye<l in the burn-
ing of the mission in 1759, but many are
still preservcKl in the mission archives,
including an Abnaki dictionarv of nearly
600 pages. Father Ixjsueur larx)red first
at Sillery and then at liecancour from
1715, with a few interruptions, until
1758, leaving as his monument a manu-
script * Dictionnaire de Racines' (Abnaki )
of 900 pages, now also preserved in the
mission archives. To the later perio<l
belong Rev. Ciquard, who ministered
from 1792 to 1815 on the Penobscot, the
St John, and at St Francis; Father Ro-
magne, with the Penobscot and the Pas-
samaouoddy from 1804 to 1825; Rev.
Demilier, a'Franciscan, who labored with
marktnl success to the same tribes from
1833 to 1843, an<i the Jesuit Father Eu-
gene Vetromile in the same field from
about 1855 to about 1880. Each one of
these has made some contribution to the
literature of the language, the last-named
being also the author of a history of the
Abnaki and of two volumes of travels
in Euroi)e and the Orient.
The iKJginningof I'rotestant work among
the Indians of s. New England may fairly
be crwlited to Roger Williams, who, on
being <l riven from his home and min-
istry in Massachusetts for his advocacy
of religious tolerati(m in 1635, took refuge
among the Wampanoagand Narraganset,
among whom he speedily accjuired
such influence that ne was able to
hold them from alliance with the hostiles
in the Pe<iuot war. In 1643 Thomas
Mayhew, jr iConfjregational)^ son of
the grantee ot Marthas Vineyard, Mass.,
having learned the language of the tril)e
on the island, began among them the
work which was continued in the same
family for four generations, with such suc-
cess that throughout the terror of King
Philip's war in 1675-76 the Christian In-
dians on the island remained quiet and
friendly, although outnuml)ering the
whites by 10 to 1. Thomas Mayhew, the
younger, was lost at sea in 1657, while on
a missionary voyage to England. The
work was then taken up by his father, of
the same name, and the native convert
Hiacoomes. It was continued from about
1673 by John Mayhew, son of the first-
named, until his death in 1689, and then
by Experience Mayhew, grandson of
Thomas the elder, nearly to the time of
his death in 1758. Each one of these
learned and worked in the Indian lan-
guage, in which Thomas, jr, and Expe-
rience prepared some small devotional
works. The last of the name was assisted
also for years by Rev. Josiah Torrey, in
charge of a white congregation on the
island. In 1720 the Indians of Marthas
Vineyard numl)ered about 800 of an esti-
mated 1,500 on the first settlement in
1642. They had several churches and
schools, so that most of those old enough
could read in either their own or the Eng-
lish language. The last native preacher
to use the Indian langua^ was S^hariah
Howwoswe (or Hossweit), who died in
1821.
As far back as 1651 a building had been
authorized at Harvard Colle^ for the ac-
commodation of Indian pupils, but onl^
one Indian (Caleb Cheeshateaumuck) is
on record as having finished the course,
and he died soon afterward of consump-
tion.
The most noteil mission work of this
section, however, was that begun by the
noted Rev. John Eliot (Congregational)
among a remnant of tne Massachuset
tril)e at Nonantum, now Newton, near
Boston, Mass., in the fall of 1646. He
was then about 42 years of age and had
prepared himself for the task by three
years of study of the language. The work
was extended to other villages, and the
reports of his and Mayhew *s success led
to the formation in 1649 of the English
**Cori)oration for the Propagation of the
Gospel among the Indians m New Eng-
land" for the furtherance of the mission.
As early as 1644 the Massachusetts gov-
ernment had made provision looking to
the instruction of the neighboring; tnbes
in Christianity, Eliot Jiimself being the
pioneer. In 1650 a community of Chris-
tian Indians, under a regular form of gov-
ernment, was established at Natick, 18
m. s. w. of Boston, and became the head-
(luarters of the mission work. In 1674
the ** Praying Indians," directly under
the care of Eliot and his coadjutor, Sam-
uel Danforth, in the Massachusetts Bay
jurisdiction, numbered 14 principal vil-
lages with a total population exceeding
1,000, among the Massachuset, Pawtuck-
et, Nipmuc, and other tribes of e. Mas-
sachusetts, each village being organized
on a religious and industrial basis. The
Christian Indians of Plymouth colony,
in s. B. Massachusetts, including also
Nantucket, Marthas Vineyard, etc., un-
der Revs. John Cotton and Richard
Bourne, were estimated at nearly 2,500
more.- Most of the converts however
were drawn from broken and subject
BULL. 30]
MISSIONS
888
tribes. The powerful Wampanoag, Nar-
raganset, ana Mohegan rejected all mii^-
sionary advances, and King Philip scorn-
fully told Eliot that he cared no more for
his gospel than for a button upon his coat.
Most of Eliot* s work fell to the ground
with the breaking out of King Philip's
war in the following year. The colonists
refused to believe in the friendship of the
converts, and made such threats against
them that manv of the Indians joined the
hoetiles and afterward fled with them to
Canada and New York. The "praying
towns" were broken up, and the Indians
who remained were gathered up and held
as prisoners on an island in Boston har-
bor until the return of peact», suffering
much hardship in the meantime', so that
the close of the war found the two races
80 embittered against each other that for
some time it was impossible to accom-
plish successful results. Of the 14 pray-
ing towns in 1674 there were left only 4
in 1684. Eliot remained at his ytost until
his death in 1690, in his 86th year, leav-
ing behind him as his most permanent
monument his great translation of the
Bible into the Natick (Massachuset) lan-
guage, besides a grammar and several
minor works in the language (see Hihk
trandationa, Eliot Bible) . Daniel Gookin,
whose father had been official Indian
superintendent, was Eliot*s coadjutor in
the later mission i)erio<l. Eight years af-
ter Eliot's death the Indian cliurch at
Natick had but 10 memln^rs, and in 1716
it became extinct, as did the language
itself a generation later.
Among Eliot's co-workers or successsors
in the same region the best known were
Samuel Danforth, sr, from 1650 until his
death in 1674; Rev. John CJotton, who
preached to the Indians of lx)th Natick
and Plymouth from 1669 to 1697, l)eing
"eminently skilled in the Indian lan-
guage"; his son, Josiah Cotton, who con-
tinued his father's work in the Plymouth
jurisdiction for nearly 40 years; Samuel
Treat, who worked among the Nauset
Indians of the Cape Cod region from 1675
until his death in 1717, and translateil the
Confession of Faith into the language;
Grindal Rawson, about 1687 to his death
in 1715, the translator of * Spiritual Milk ' ;
and Samuel Danforth the younger, who
labored in e. Massachusetts from 1698 to
his death in 1727, and was the author of
several religious tracts in the native lan-
guage. These and others were commis-
sioned and salaried by the society organ-
ized in 1649.
About 1651 Rev. Abraham Pierson,
under the auspices of the same society,
began preaching to the Quinnipiac Indians
about Branford, w. Connecticut, and con-
tinued until his removal about 1669, when
the work was undertaken by a successor,
but with little result to either, the Indians
showing "a perverse contempt," not-
withstanding presents made to encourage
their attendance at the services. A few
years later Rev. James Fitch was com-
missioned to work among the Mohegan,
and succeeded in gathering a small con-
gregation, but found his efforts strongly
opjKDsed by l^ncas and the other chiefs.
Tne mission probably came to an end
with King Philip's war. Efforts were
continued at intervals among the tribal
remnants of s. New England during the
next century, partly through the society
founded in 1649 and partly by colonial
appropriation, but with little encouraging
result, in consequence of the rapid de-
crease and demoralization of the Indians,
the only notable convert being Samson
Occom ( q. V. ) . The English soidety with-
drt»wsupi)ortal)out 1760. Alastattempt
was made among the Mohegan by Miss
Sarah L. Huntington in 1827, and con-
tinued for severalyears, chiefly bv aid of
governmental appropriation (De f^orest).
In 1734aCongregationali8t mission was
begun among the Mahicran in western
Massachusetts by Rev. John Sergeant,
under the auspices of the Society for the
Propagation of the (xospc^l in Foreign
Parts. By hard study and constant asso-
ciation he was soon able to preach to
them in their own language, into which
he translated several simple devotional
worki3. In 17;^6 the converts were gath-
ered into a regular mission town, which
was named Stockbridge, from which cen-
tral point the work was extended into
Connecticut an<l New York, and even as
far as the Delaware r. In 1743 Rev.
David Brainenl, who had bt»en working
also among the Mahii'an at the village of
Kaunaumeek, across the New York line,
brought his congregation to (ronsolidate
with that of Stockbridge. Mr Sergeant
die<l in 1749, and after a succession of
briefer pastorates the work was taken up,
in 1775, by his son, Rev. John Sergeant,
jr, who continued with it until the end
of his life. The westward advance of
white settlement and the demoralizing
influence of two wars accomplished the
same result here as elsewhere, and in
1785 the diminishing Stockbridge tril)e
removed to New Stockbridge, N. Y.,
on lands given by the Oneida. Their
leader in this removal was the edu-
cattnl Indian minister Samson Occom.
Mr Sergeant himself followed in the next
year. The mission was at that time suj)-
ported by the joint effort of American
and Scotch societies, including the cor-
poration of Ilarvanl College. In 1795
the settlement consisted of al)Out 60 fam-
ilies, mostly improvident, unac(iuainted
with the English langua^re, and **in their
dress and manners uncivilizeKl" (Abo-
884
MISSIONS
[b. a. b.
rigines Com., 1844). Besides preaching
to them in their own language, Mr Ser-
geant prepared for their use several small
religious works in the native tongue. In
1821, with their chief, Solomon Aupau-
mut, they removed again (their mis-
sionary being unable to accompany them
on account of old age), this time to the
neighborhood of Green Bay, Wis., where
about 520 '*8tockbridge and Munsee," of
mixed blood, still keep the name. Among
the later missionaries the most distin-
guished is Rev. Jeremiah Slingerland, an
educated member of the mbe, who
served, from 1849, for more than 30 years.
Merged with them are all who remain of
the Brotherton band of New York, made
up from tribal remnants of Connecticut,
Rnode Island, and Long Island — Mobe-
gan, PfiOUQt, Narraganset. and Montauk —
gathered into a settlement also in the
Oneida (^ountry by the same Occoiu in
1786. These in 1795 were reported as
numbering about 39 families, all Chris-
tian, and fairly civilized. Among the
names connected with the Stock bridge
mission is that of Rev. Jonathan Edwards,
jr, author of a short treatise on the
Mahican ("Muhhekaneew'*) language
(1788), and of John Quinney and Capt.
Hendrick Aupaunmt, native assistants
and translators under the elder Sergeant.
For the Scaticook mission eeeMoramans —
New York.
In addition to the regular mission
establishments some educational work for
the Indiana was carried on in acc^ord
with a declared purpose at Harvard Col-
lege Cambridge, Mass., as already noted;
at Moore's charity school for Indians,
founded by Rev. Eleazer Wheelock at
Lebanon, Conn., in 1754, and transferred
in 1769 to Hanover, N. H., under the
name of Dartmouth College, and the For-
eign Mission School at Cornwall, Conn.,
by the American Board of Commissioners
for Foreign Missions, beginning in 1817.
The net result was small. (See Educa-
tion. )
The Interior States. — The whole inte-
rior region of the United States, stretching
from the English seaboard colonies to the
main divide of the Rocky mts., was in-
cluded under the French rule in the two
provinces of Canada and Louisiana, and
with one or two exceptions the mission
work was in charge of French Jesuits from
the first occupancy up into the American
period. The very first mission worker,
however, within this great region w^as the
heroic Spanish Franciscan, Father Juan
de Padilla, who gave up his life for souls
on the Kansas prairies, as narrated else-
where, nearly as early as 1542 (see New
MexicOf Arizona f and California). The
first mission west of the Huron country was
established in 1660, probably on Kewee-
naw bay, Mich., by the veteran Huron
missionary, the Jesuit Ren6 Menard, in
response to repeated requests of visiting
Chippewa and Ottawa. In the next year,
while attempting to reach a colony of
fugitive Hurons who had called him from
Green Bay, he was lost in the forest and is
believed to have been nmrdered by the In-
dians. In 1665 Father Claude AUouez
established the mission of Sainct Esprit
on the s. shore of L. Superior, at La Points
Chegoim^on (Shaugwaumikong), now
Bayfield, Wis. Besides working . here
among the Ottawa and Huron refugees
from the older missions destroyed by the
Iroquois, he visited all the other tritfes of
the upper lake region from the Miami and
the Illmois to the Sioux. Within the next
few years other missions were established
at Sault Ste Marie (Sainte Marie), Mack-
inaw (St Ignace), Green Bay (St Fran-
cois Xavier), and among the Foxes (St
Marc) and Mascoutens (St Jacques), the
two last named being about the southern
Wisconsin line. Among other workers of
this period were Dablon, Druillettes, and
the noted discoverer, Marquette. The
mission of St Joseph on the river of that
name, near the present South Bend, Ind.,
was established by AUouez among the
Potawatomi in 1688. It continued, with
interruptions, until the removal of the
tribe to the W. in 1839-41, when the mis-
sionaries accompanied the Indians and re-
established the work in the new field. To
this later period, in Indiana, belong the
names of Fathers R^z^, Badin, Desseille,
and Petit. The mission at Lapointe was
abandoned in 1671 on account of thehos-
tilit}^ of the Sioux, but most of the others
continued, with some interruptions, down
to the temporary expulsion of the Jesuits
in 1764. A mission begun among the
Sioux in 1728 was brought to a close soon
after in- consequence of the war with the
Foxes.
The first regular mission among the
Illinois (Immaculate Conception) was
founded by Marquette in 1674 near the
present Rockfort, 111., w^here at that time
8 confederate tribes were camped in a
great village of 350 com m unal houses. It
was known later as the Kaskaskia mission.
Other missions were established also
among the Peoria, on Peoria lake and at
Cahokia, opposite St Louis, with such
result that by 1725 the entire Illinois
nation was civilized and Christian.
Besides Marquette, the most prominent
of the Illinois missionaries were RAle,
noted elsewhere in connection with the
Abnaki mission, and Father James
Gravier, who arrived in 1693 and died 12
years later of wounds received from
hostile Indians, leaving as his monument
the great manuscript Peoria dictionary of
22,000 words, Pespite apparent success,
BtlLL. 30]
MISSIONS
885
the final result in Illinois was the same as
elsewhere. The Natchez and Chickasaw
wars interrupted the mission work for
some years, and gave opjM>rtunity for
invasion by hostile northern tribes. The
dissipations consequent upon the prox-
imity of garrison posts completed the
demoralization, and by 1750 the former
powerful Illinois nation was reduced to
some 1,000 souls, with apparently but one
mission. The Indiana missions at St
Joseph (Potawatomi and Miami), Vin-
cennes (? Piankashaw), and on the
Wabash (Miami) continued to flourish
until the decree of expulsion, when the
mission property was confiscated by the
French government, although the Jesuits
generally chose to remain as secular
priests until their death. Their successors
continued to minister to Indians as well
as to whites until the disruption and
removal of the trik^s to the W., l)etween
1820 and 1840, when the work was taken
up in their new homes by missionaries
already on the ground. The majority of
the Indians of Michigan and Wisconsin
remained in their old homes at missions
in those states, kept in existence either
as regular establishments or as visiting
stations served bv secular priests. The
most distinguished of these later mission-
aries was the noted author and philolo-
jfist, Bishop Fre<lerick Baraga, of the
imi^erial house of Hapsburg, who, after
having voluntarily forfeite<l his estatc»s to
devote his life to the Indians, c^me to
America in 1830, and for 8(> years there-
after until his death lalK)red with success,
first among the Ottawa at Arbre Croche
in lower Michigan, and afterward at St
Joseph, Green Bay, Lapointe, and other
stations along the upper lakes, more par-
ticularly at the Chippewa village of
L^Anse, on Keweenaw bay, which he
converted into a prosperous Christian
settlement. Even when past 60 years of
age, this scion of Austrian nobility slept
upon the ground and sometimes walked
40 m. a day on snowshoes to minister to
his Indians. Besides numerous devo-
tional works in Ottawa and Chippewa, as
well as other volumes in (ferinan and
Slavonic, he is the author of the great
Grammar and Dictionary of the Chip-
pewa language, which after half a cen-
turjr still remains the standard authority,
having passed through three editions.
In 1818 was bt^un, near Pembina, on
Red r., just insioe the U. S. boundary,
the Chippewa mission, afterward known
as Assumption, which became the cen-
tral station for work among the Chippewa
of Minnesota and the Mandan and others
of the upper Missouri. The most noted
name in this connection is that of Rev.
G. A. Belcourt, author of a dictionary of
the Chippewa language, second in im-
portance only to that of Baraga. In 1 837
Father Augustin Ravoux established a
mission among the San tee Sioux at Fari-
bault's trading post in e. Minnesota, learn-
ing the language and ministering to the
eastern bands for a number of years. In
1843 (or 1844) he published a devotional
work in that dialect, which has jjassed
through two editions. The first regular
mission station among the Menominee of
Wisconsin was established in 1844, and
among the Winnebago, then at Ix)ng
Prairie, Minn., in 1850. For 20 years
earlier missionary work had been done
among them, notably by Father Samuel
Mazzuchelli, whose Winnebago Prayer
Book, published in 1833, is mentioned by
Pilling as *'the first pul)lication, so far as
I know, of a text in anv of the dialects in
the Siouan family." In the farther W.
work was carried on among all of the im-
migrant, and the j)rincipal of the native,
tribes, the chief lal)orers again being the
Jesuits, whose order had been restored to
full privilege in 1814. As the whole coun-
try was now explored and organized on a
fermanent governmental basis, and the
ndian <lay was rapidly waning, thesis
later missions have not the same historic
interest that attaches to those of the co-
lonial period, and may l)e passwl over
with briefer notice. Chief among them
were the Potawatomi missions of St Stan-
islaus and St Mary, in Kansas, founded
in 1836 by the Belgian Jesuits Von Quick-
en borne, Hoecken, Peter J. de Smet, and
others, working together, and the Osage
mission of St Francis Hieronymo, founded
about 1847 by Fathers Shoenmaker and
Bax. The girls of these two mission
schools were in charge respectively of the
Sisters of the Sacred Heart and the Sisters
of Loretto. Temi)orary missions were
also established in 1836 and 1847 respec-
tively among the Kickajwo and the
Miami.
The remote Flat heads in the moun-
tains at the head of Missouri r. had heard
of Christianity and had been taught the
rudimentary doctrines by some adopted
Caughnawaga Indians, and in 1831 they
sent a delegation all the long and danger-
ous way to St Louis to ask of Indian
Superintendent Clark that missionaries
be sent among them. To do this was not
possible at the time, but with persevering
desire other delegations were sent on the
same errand, some of the envoys dying
on the road and others being nmrdered
by the Sioux, until the recjuest met re-
sponse. In 18:^ the Methodist missionary,
Jason Lee, with several assistants, accom-
panied a trading expedition across the
mountains, but, changing his original pur-
pose, passed by without visiting the Flat-
heads and established himself in the
vicinity of the trading post of Ft Van-
886
MISSIONS
[B.A.a.
couver, nearly opposite the mouth of the
Willamette, in Washington. Another
embassy from the Flatheads, in 1839, was
successful, and in the next year the noted
Beleian Jesuit, Peter John de Smet, priest,
explorer, and author, was on the ground,
1,600 Indians of the confederated tribes
being gathered to await his coming. In
1841 he founded the mission of St Mary
on Bitter-root r., w. Mont., making it a
starting point for other missions farther to
the w., to be noted elsewhere. On ac-
count of the hostility of the Blackfeet the
mission was abandoned in 1850, to be suc-
ceeded by that of St Ignatius on Flathead
lake, within the present Flathead reserva-
tion, which still exists in successful opera-
tion, practically all of the confederated
tribes of the reservation having been
Christian for*half a century. The principal
co-workers in the Flathead mission were
the Jesuits Canestrelli, Giorda, Mengarini,
Point, and Ravalli. The first three of
these have made important contributions
to philology, chief among which are the
Sahsh Grarnmar of Mengarini, 1861, and
the Kalisi>el Dictionary, 1877, of Giorda,
of whom it is said that he preached in
six Indian languages.
Next in chronologic order in the cen-
tral region, after the Catholics, come the
Moravians. Their work among the Dela-
wares and associated tribes in Ohio, and
later in Ontario and Kansas, was a con-
tinuation of that beeun among the same
people in New York and Pennsylvania
as early as 1-740, and has been already
noted.
After them came the Friends j or, as
more commonly known, the Quakers.
In all their missionary effort they seem
to have given first place to the practical
things of civilization, holding the doc-
trinal teaching somewhat in reserve until
the Indians had learned from experience
to value the ad\ice of the teacher. In
accord also with the Quaker principle,
their method was essentially democratic,
strict regard being given to the wishes of
the Indians as expressed through their
chiefs, their opinions being frequently in-
vited, with a view to educating them to
a point of self-government. In 1804 the
Maryland yearly meeting, after long
councils with the Indians, established an
industrial farm on upper Wabash r. in
Indiana, where several families from the
neighboring Miami, Shawnee, and others
soon gathered for instruction in farming.
For several years it flourished with in-
creasing usefulness, until forced to discon-
tinue by an opposition led by the Shawnee
prophet (see Tenskivatawa). The work
was transferred to the main Shawnee set-
tlement at Wapakoneta, Ohio, where, in
1812, a saw mill and grist mill were built,
tools distributed, and a farm colony was
successfully inaogorated. The war com-
pelled a suspension until 1815, when work
was resumed. In 1822 a boarding school
was opened, and both farm and school
continued, w4th some interruptions, until
the final removal of the tribe to the W. in
1832-33. The teachers followed, and by
1837 the Shawnee mission was reestal>-
lished on the reservation in Kansas,
about 9 m. w. from the present Kansas
City. It was representea as fiourishing
in 1843, being then perhaps the most
important among the immigrant tribes,
but suffered the inevitable result on the
later removal of the Shawnee to the
present Oklahoma. The work was con-
ducted under the joint auspices of the
Indiana, Ohio, and Maryland yearly
meetings, aided in the earlier years by
liberal contributions from members of
the society in England and Ireland. The
most noted of the teachers were Isaac
Harvey and his son, Henry Harvey,
whose work covers the period from 1819
to 1 842. During the period of the " peace
policy'' administration of Indian anairs,
for a term of about a dozen years begin-
ning in 1870, considerable work was done
by laborers of the same denomination
among the Caddo, Kiowa, Cheyenne,
and other tribes of Oklahoma, but with-
out any regular mission or school estab-
Ushment. The best known of these
workers was Thomas C. Battey, author
of *A Quaker among the Indians,' who
conducted a camp school among the
Kiowa in 1873.
The Presbyterians, who now stand second
in the number of their mission establish-
ments in the United States, began their
labors in the Central states about the
same time as the Friends, with a mission
farm among the Wyandot on Sandusky r.
in Ohio, in charge of Rev. Joseph Badger.
It continued until 1810, when it was aban-
doned in consequence of the opposition
of the traders and the conservative party
led by the Shawnee prophet. Morse's
report on the condition of the tribes in
1822 makes no mention of any Presby-
terian mission work at that time excep-
ting among the Cherokee (see Southern
States) . A few years later the Rev. Isaac
Van Tassel, under authority from the
American Board, was in charge of a mis-
sion among the Ottawa, at Maumee, Ohio.
He compiled an elementary reading t>ook,
printed in 1829, the first publication in
the Ottawa language.
In 1827, under the auspices of the
American Board of Commissioners for
Foreign MissionajS, Omaregational mission
was begun among the Chippewa on Macki-
naw id., upper Michigan, by Rev. J. D.
Stevens and wife, who with others after-
ward extended their labors into n. Wis-
consin, and later were transferred to the
BULL. 80]
MISSIONS
887
Sioux mission. In 1829 Rev. Frederick
Ayer joined the Mackinaw station, and,
aner two years* study of the lan^^uage,
opened amon|^ the Chippewa at Sandy
liake, Minn., in 1831, what is said to have
been the first school in Minnesota. He
is the author of a small text-book in the
language. Other stations were estab-
lished soon after among the same tribe,
at Lapointe, Wis., Pokegama lake, and
Leech lake, Minn., but seem to have been
discontinued about 1845. The Mackinaw
mission had already been abandoned.
Rev. Peter Dougherty, under the direct
auspices of the Presbyterian mission
board, labored among the Chippewa and
the Ottawa at Grand Traverse nay, lower
Michigan, in 1843-47-t- and is the author
of several text-books and small religious
works in the language of the former tribe.
In 1834 two volunteer workers, Mr
Samuel W. Pond and his brother Gid-
eon, took up their residence in a village
of the Santee Sioux on L. Calhoun,
near the present St Paul, Minn. They
afterward bet^me rt»gularly oniained
missionaries under the American Board,
continuing in the work for 18 years. In
the same year Rev. Thomas s! William-
son, **the father of the Dakota mission,*'
made a reconnoissance of the field for
the same Board, and on his favorable
report two mission stations were estab-
lisne<l in 18:^6— one at L. Harriet, near
St Paul, under Rev. J. D. Stt»velis, for-
merly of the Mackinaw mission, the
other under Williamson himself at Lac-
qui-parle, high up on Minnesota r. With
Mr Williamson then or later were his
wife, his daughter, and his two sons, all
of whom became efficient partners in the
work. In 1837 Rev. Stephen R. Riggs,
with his wife, Mary, and his son, Alfred
L. — all known in mission annals — joine<l
the station at I.ac-qui-j>arle. In the next
10 or 12 years, as the good will of the
Indians was gradually won and the work-
ing force increastMl, other stations were
established, all among the Santet* Sirmx
in Minnesota. Among tlu»se was the one
atarteil by Rev. John F. Aiton, in 1S48,
at Redwing, where Revs. Francis Denton
and Daniel Gavan, for the Evangelical
Missionary So<»iety of Lucerne, had estab-
li8he<l the "Swiss mission" in 18:^7, these
two missionaries now combining forcres
with the American workers. In 1852, in
consequence of a cession of Indian land,
the eastern station, then at Kaposia, was
removed by Williams(m to Yellow Medi-
cine on the upper Minnesota, and two
years later, in consequence of the burn-
ing of the Lac-qui-parle station, that mis-
sion also was removed to Hazel wood, in
the same neigh l)or hood.
The work continued with varying suc-
0668 until interrupted by the Sioux out-
break in the summer of 1862, when the
missions were abandoned and the mis-
sionaries sought safety within the older
settlement**. Throughout the troubles
the Christian Sioux generally remaineil
friendly and did go(Kl service in behalf
of the endangered settlers. As a result
of the outbreak the Santee Sioux were
removed to Niobrara, n. e. Nebr., where
they now reside. The missionaries fol-
lowed, and in 18()(J the "Niobrara
mission*' was organized, the work being
extendeil to other neijrhboring bands of
Sioux, an<l the primupal workers being
Rt»vs. John P. Williamson and Alfred L.
Riggs, sons of the earlier missionaries.
Nearly all the earlier Presbytt»rian work
among the Sioux, as among the Chero-
kc»e, was conducted through the Ameri-
can Board of Coimnissioners for Foreign
Missions.
To the Congregational missionaries we
owe most of our knowledge of the Sioux
language, their work being almost en-
tirely in the Santee or eastern dialet^t.
Stevens, the Pond brothers, all of the
Williams(ms, and Stephen and Alfreil
Riggs have all made important contribu-
tions, ranging fn)m school text-books and
small devotional works up to dicti(m-
aries, lx\Mi(le8 adapting the Roman alpha-
l)et to the pi»cuharities of the language
with such succt»ss that the Sioux have
become a literary ix'ople, the majority of
the men l)eing able to read and write in
their own language. It is impossible to
estimate the effect this acquisition has
had in stimulating the self-respect and
ambition of the tribe. Among the nuwt
important of these philologicpnxluctions
are Riggs* Grammar and I)icti()nary of
the Dakota I>anguage, publislunl by the
Smithscmian Institution in 1852, with a
later revision by Dorsey, and Riggs and
Williamson's Dakota Bible, published in
1880, IxMUg then, in Pilling's opinion,
with two excepti<ms, the only complete
Bible tninslati<»n in any Indian language
since Eliot's Hil)le in ItUiS. In much of
the earlier linguistic work the mission-
aries ha<l the efficient cooiHjration of
Joseph Renville, an educated half-bl(KHi.
As ail adjunct to the educational work, a
monthly journal wa.s conducte<l for al)out
2 years by Rev. (t. II. Pond, chieHy
in the native language, under the title of
•The Dakota Friend,' while its mo<lern
successor, *Iapi Oaye' (*The Word
Carrier'), has been conducted under
the auspices of the Niobrara mission
since 1871.
In 1821 two Presbyterian missions were
estabhshed among the Osage by the
United Foreign Missionary Scxiiety. One
of tht»sc», Harmony, was near the junction
of the Marais des*Cygnt»s with the Osage
r., not' far from the present Rich Hill,
888
MISSIONS
[B. A. B.
Mo.; the other, Union, waa on the w.
bi^nk of Neosho r., about midway between
the present Muskogee and Ft Gibson,
Okla. Both were established upon an
extensive scale, with boarding schools
and a full corps of workers; but in conse-
quence of differences with the agent and
an opposition instigated by the traders,
the Osage field was abandoned after about
15 years of discouraging effort (McCoy).
One of these workers, Rev. William B.
Montgomery, compiled an Osage reading
book, published in 1834. Among others
connected with the mission were the
Revs. Chapman, Pixley, Newton, Sprague,
Palmer, Vaill, Belcher, and Requa. The
missions conducted by the same denomi-
nation among the removed Southern tribes
in Oklahoma are noted in connection
with the Southern states.
In 1834 two Presbyterian workers, Revs.
John Dunliar and Samuel Allis, began
work among the Pawnee of Nebraska
under the auspices of the American Board,
and later were joined by Dr Satterlee.
After some time spent in getting ac-
quainted with the people and the lan-
guage, a permanent station was selected
on Plum cr., a small tributary of Loup r.,
in 1838, by consent of the Pawnee, who
in the meantime had also acknowledged
the authority of the Government. Cir-
cumstances delayed the work until 1844,
when a considerable mission and a Gov-
ernment station were begun, and a num-
ber of families from the different bands
took up their residence adjacent thereto.
In consequence, however, of the repeated
destructive inroads of the Sioux, the
ancient enemies of the Pawnee, the mis-
sion effort was abandoned in 1847 and
the tril)e returned to its former wild life.
About the year 1835 work was begun
by the Presbyterian Board of Foreign
Missions amon^ the Iowa and Sauk, then
residmg on Missouri r. in e. Nebraska.
Attention was given also to some others
of the removed tribes, and alx)ut 10 years
later a mission was established among the
Omaha and the Oto at Bellevue, near the
S resent Omaha, Nebr., where, in 1850,
lev. Edward McKenney compiled a small
Omaha primer, the first puohcation in
that language. Both missions continued
down to the modern period, despite the
shifting fortunes of the tribes. Other
f prominent workers were- Rev. Samuel
rvin, who gave 30 years of his life, t)e-
ginning in 1837, to the first tribes named;
and Rev. William Hamilton, who, begin-
ning also in 1837, with the same trit)e8,
was transferred to the Bellevue mission
in 1853, rounding out a long life with a
reconl of half a century spent fn the serv-
ice. Working in collaboration these two
produced several religious and linguistic
works in the Iowa language, published
by the Mission press from 1843 to 1850, >
besides a collection of Omaha hymns and 7
some manuscript translations by Mr Ham-
ilton alone at a later period.
The pioneer Methodist mission work in
the central region appears to have been
inaugurated by a volunteer negro minis- j
ter. Rev. Mr Stewart, who in 1816 began
preaching amon^ the Wyandot, at^ut
Sandusky, in Ohio, and continued with
such success that 3 years later a regular
mission was established under Rev. James
B. Finley. This is the only work by that
denomination noted in Morse's Report of
1822. In 1835, with liberal aid from the
Government, as was then customary, the
Southern branch established a mission
about 12 m. from the present Kansas City,
in Kansas, among the immigrant Shaw-
nee. In 1839 it was in charge of Rev.
Thomas Johnson, and 3 years later was
reported in flourishing condition, with
boarding school and industrial farm. In
1855 l)otn this mission and another, estab-
lished by the Northern branch, were in
operation. Smaller missions were estab-
lished between 1835 and 1840 among the
Kickapoo (Rev. Berrvman in chaige in
1839) , Kansa ( Rev. W. Johnson in charge
in 1839), Delawares, Potawatomi, and
united Peoria and Kaskaskia, all but
the last-named being in Kansas. A small
volume in the Shawnee language and an-
other in the Kansa were prepared and
printed for their use by Mr Lykins, of
the Shawnee Baptist mission. The work
just outlined, with some work among the
immigrant Southern tribes (see Southern
States) J seems to be the sum of Methodist
mission labors outside of the Chippewa
territory until a recent period. In 1837
a mission was started by Rev. Alfred
Brunson among the Santee Sioux at
Kaposia, or Little Crow's village, a few
miles below the present St Paul, Minn.,
which existed until 1841, when, on the
demand of the Indians, it was discon-
tinued.
In 1823 the Wesleyan Methodist Society
of England began work among the Chip-
pewa and related bands in Ontario (see
Ckinadtty East), and some 20 years later
the American Methodists began work in
the same tribe along the s. shore of L.
Superior in upper Michigan. In 1843
Rev. J. H. Pitezel took charge of the
work, with headquarters at Sault Ste
Marie as the principal station. Another
station was established at Keweenaw pt.
about the same time by Rev. John Clark.
Others were established later at Sandy
lake and Mille Lac, Minn., also among
the Chippewa, and all of these were in
successful operation in 1852.
The earliest Baptist worker in the cen-
tral region was Kev. Isaac McCoy, after-
ward for nearly 30 years thegeneral agent
BULL. 30]
MISSIONS
889
in the Indian mission work of that de-
nomination. In 1818 he began preaching
amon^ the Wea in Indiana, and in 1820
organized at Ft Wayne, Ind.j a small
school for the children of the neighboring
tribes, then in the lowest state of demor-
alization from wars, removals, dninken-
ness, and the increasing pressure of a hos-
tile white population. His earliest asso-
ciate was Mr Johnston Lykins, then a
boy of 19, but later distinguished as a
voluminous translator and author of a
system of Indian orthography. Two
years later this school was discontinued,
and by treaty arrangement A'ith the Gov-
ernment, which assumed a large part of
the expense, two regular missions were
established, viz: Carey (1822) for the
Potawatomi, on St Joseph r. near the
present South Ben<l, Iiul., and Thomas
(1823) among the Ottawa, on (J rand r.,
Mich. Mr Lykins took charge among
the Ottawa, to whom he was soon able to
preach in their own language, Awhile Mr
McCoy continueil with tlie Potawatomi.
In consequence of the inauguration of
the Government plan for the removal of
the Indians to the W., both missions
were abolished in 1830, the work being
resumed among the Indians m their new
homes in Kansas. A small mission estab-
lished among the Chippewa at Sauit Ste
Marie, Mich., under Rev. A. Bingham
about 1824, contmued a successful exiHt-
ence in charge ol its founder for about 25
years.
In 1831, while the removal of the In-
dians was still in progress, the Shawnee
Mission was established under Mr
Lykins about 10 m. s. w. from the pres-
ent Kansa.s Citv, among the Shawnee.
In the fall of 1833 Rev. Jotham Meeker,
one of the former assistanta in the E.,
arrived with a printing press and types,
v/ith which it was proposed to print for
distribution among the various neighbor-
ing tribes educational and devotional
works in their own languages according
to a new phonetic system devised by Mr
Meeker. The work of translating and
printing was actively taken up, the first
issue hSeing a Delaware primer in 1834,
believed to be the first book printed
in Kansas. Within the next few years
small volumes by various missionary
workers were printed in the Shawnee,
Delaware, Potawatomi, Ottawa, Wea,
Kansa, Osage, Iowa, Oto, Creek, and Choc-
taw languages, besides a small journal in
the Shawnee language. Not alone the
Baptists, but also Methodists and Presby-
tenans working in the same field, availed
themselves of the services of the Shaw-
nee mission press. In the meantime other
missions were established among the
Delawares (Mr Ira D. Blanchard, 1833),
Oto (Rev. Moees Merrill, 1833), Iowa
(1834?), Ottawa (Rev. Jotham Meeker,
1837), and Potawatomi (Mr Robert
Simerwell, 1837), besides stations among
the removed southern tribes of Indian
Ter. ( See Southern States, ) A 11 of these
first-named were within what is now
Kansas excepting the Oto mission known
as Bellevue, which was at the mouth of
Platte r., near the present Omaha, Nebr.
. At this station Mr Merrill, who had pre-
viously worked among the Chippewa,
made such study of the language that
within 3 years he was able to preach to
the Indians without an interpreter, be-
sides compiling a book of hymns and one
or two other small works in Oto. He
died in 1840. The various missions re-
mained in successful operation until about
1855, when, in consequence of the dis-
turbed condition of affairs in Kansas, they
were discontinued. All of the tribes
have since been removed to Indian Ter.
The Episcopalians appear to have done
no work in tne interior until about 1830,
when they had a station in the vicinity
of Sault Ste Marie, Mich., among the
Chippewa. In 1852 a mission was estab-
lished among the Chippewa of Gull lake,
Minn., by Rev. J. L. Breck, and in 1856
at Leech lake by the same worker. In
1860, through the efforts of Bishop H. B.
Whipple, a mission was established
among the Santee Sioux at the lower
Sioux agency. Redwood, Minn., in charge
of Rev. Samuel D. Hinman. The work
was interrupted by the outbreak of 1862,
but on the final transfer of the Indians to
Niobrara, Nebr., in 1866, was resumed by
Mr Hinman, who had kept in close touch
with them during the period of disturb-
ance. A large mission house, known as
St Mary's, v;as erecte<i, which later be-
came the central station for the work of
this denomination among the Sioux and
neighboring tribes. In 1870 St Paul's mis-
sion was established at the Yankton Sioux
agency, S. Dak., by Rev. Joseph W. Cook,
and in 1872 work was begun at the Lower
BruM Sioux agency, S. Dak., by Rev. W.
J. Cleveland, and extended later to th^
Upper Brul6 and Oglala Sioux of Rose-
bud and Pine Ridge agencies, S. Dak.
In the meantime Rev. J. Owen Dorsey
had begun to labor among the Ponca,
also in South Dakota, in 1871. The work
is still being actively carried on in the
same field. All of the. Sioux mission-
aries named have rendered valuable serv-
ice to philology in the preparation of
hymnals, prayer books, etc. , in the native
language, together with a small mission
journal *Anpao' (*The Daybreak'), is-
sued for a number of years in the Yankton
Sioux dialect. The ethnologic researches
of Mr Dorsey place him in tne front rank
of investigators, chief among his manv
contributions being his great monograph
BULL. 30]
MISSIONS
891
of the work, which had already coet a
quarter of a million dollars. The Dalles
station was bought by the Presbyterians,
who now entered the same field (see Ban-
croft, Hist. Oreg., i, 1886).
In the fall of 1836 the PresbyterianSj
under the leadership of Rev. Marcus
Whitman, established their first mission
in the Columbia region at Waiilatpu, now
Whitman, on Wallawalla r., s. e. Wash.,
in territory claimed by the Cay use tribe.
The site had been selected by an advance
agent. Rev. Sanmel Parker, a few months
earlier. Rev. H. H. Spalding, of the same
party, about the same time, established a
mission among the Nez Perci's at Lapwai,
on Clearwater r., a few miles above the
present Lewiston, Idaho. Early in 1839
a second station was begun among the
Nez Perc^»s at Kamiah, higher up the
Clearwater, but was discontinued in 1841.
Revs. E. Walker and C. C. Eells estab-
lished themselvi'S at Chemakane, n. e.
Wash., on a lower branch of Spokane r.,
among the Spokan.
The Spokane, whose chief had been ed-
ucated among the whites, proved friendly,
but from the very beginning the Cay use
and a considerable portion of the Nez
Percys maintained an insulting and hos-
tile attitude, the Cayuse particularly
claiming that the missionaries were in-
truders upon their lands and were in
league with the immigrants to dispossess
the Indians entirely. In conseijuence the
Kamiah station was soon abandoned. At
Waiilatpu, the main station, Whitman
was more than once in danger of personal
assault, the irritation of the Indians con-
stantly growing as the flood of immigrants
increased. In consetjuence of the contin-
ued opposition of the Cayuse and the Nez
Percys, the mission board in 1842 ordered
the abandonment of all the stations but
Chemakane. Whitman then crossed the
mountains to New York to intercede for
his mission, with some degree of success,
returning the next year to find his wife a
refugee at one of the lower settlements, in
consecjuence of the burning of a part of
the mission property by the Cayuse, who
were restraintnl from o|K»n war only by
the attitude of the Government agent
and the Hudson's Bay Co.*s officers.
In the summer of 1847 the Cayuse and
neighboring tribes were wasted by an
epidemic of measles and fever communi-
cated by passing immigrant trains, all of
which made Waiilatpu a stopping point.
Two hundred of the Cayuse died within
a few weeks, while of the Nez Percys the
principal chief and 60 of his men fell vic-
tims. A rumor spread among the Cayuse
that Whitman had brought back the dis-
ease poison from the E. and unloosed it for
their destniction. The danger became so
immment that, actuated partly also by
the opposition of the mission board, he
decided to almndon Waiilatpu and remove
to the former Methodist ntation at The
Dalles, which he had already b<)nght for
his own denomination. At the same time
he began negotiations with the Catholics
for their purchase of Waiilatpu. Before
the removal could l)e made, however, the
blow fell. On Nov. 29, 1849, the Cayuse
attacked Waiilatpu mission, killed Dr and
Mrs Whitman and 7 others and plundered
the mission property. Within a few
days thereafter, l)efore the Indians dis-
persed to their camp, 4 others of the mis-
sion force were killed, making 13 mur-
dered, besides 2 children who died of
neglect, or 15 persons in all. The rest,
chiefly women, were carried off as pris-
oners and subjecttMl to abusi^ until rescued
by the effort of the Hudson's Bay Co.,
a' month later. The Catholic Father
Brouillet, who was on his way from Inf-
low to confer with Whitman about the
sale of the mission proi:)erty, was one of
the first to learn of the massacre, and
hastening forward was allowed to bury
the dead and then found opportunity to
send warning to the Lapwai mission in
time for Spalding and his party to make
their escape, some of them l)eing shel-
tered by friendlv Nez Perces, although
the mission buildings were plun<lenKl by
the hostiles. The Spokan chief, (larry,
remained faithful and gave the iK»ople at
Chemakane mission a bodygnanl for their
protection until the danger was past. As
a result of the Indian war which followed
the Presbyterian missions in the Colum-
bia region were abandontnl. During the
brief period that the station at Kamiah
had continued, the missionary Rev. Asa
Smith had "reduced the Nez Pen*^'' dia-
lect to grammatical rules. " In 18i^9 the
Lapwai mission receive<l a small printing
outfit with which Spalding and his assist-
ants printed small primers, hymns, and
portions of scripture in the language of
the tribe by the aid of native interpreters.
A Spokane primer of 1842, the joint work
of Walker and Eells, is sai<l to have been
the third book printed in the Columbia
r. rejarion.
As we have seen, the first Christian
teaching among the tribes of the Colum-
bia region had come from the Catholic
employees of the Hudson's Bay Co.,
through whose efforts many of the Nez
Percys, Flatheads, and others had volun-
tarily adopted the Christian forms as early
as 1820, and some years later sent dele-
gates to St Louis to make reouesta for
missionaries, to which the Methodists
were first to respond. In 1838 Father
Francis Blanchet and Modeste Demers
arrived at Ft Vancouver, Wash., on the
Columbia, from Montreal, to minister par-
ticularly to the French employees of the
892
MISSIONS
[B.A.a
Hudson's Bay Co. , having visited the vari-
ous tribes farther up along the river en
route. In the next year St Francis
Xavier mission was established by Blan-
chet on the Cowlitz, in w. Washington,
and St Paul mission at the French settle-
ment on the lower Willamet, at Cham-
poeg, Oreg., while Father J. B. Bolduc,
afterward the pioneer missionary on
Vancouver id., began preaching to the
tribes on Puget sd. In 1841 the Jesuit
de Smet had founded the mission of St
Mary among the Flatheads in w. Montana
(see Interior States) y while a companion
Jesuit, Father Nicholas Point, established
the Sacred Heart mission among the Coeur
d'Alenes in Idaho.
In 1844 de Smet brought out from
Euroi)e a numl)er of Jesuits and several
sisters of the order of Notre Dame. Regu-
lar schools were started and the tribes on
both sides of the river as far up as the
present Canadian boundary were mcluded
within the scope of the work. In the
meantime Blanchet had l)een made arch-
bishop of the Columbia territory and had
brought out from (Juebec 21 additional
recruits — Jesuiti?, secular priests, and sis-
ters— with whii'h reinforcements 6 other
missions were founded in rapid succes-
sion, viz: St Ignatius, St Francis Borgia,
and St Francis Regis, in Washington,
among the Upper Peiid d'Oreilles, L^wer
Pend d'Oreilies, and Col vi lies, respec-
tively, with 3 others across the line in
British Columl)ia. Of these tlie first-
named was the principal station, in charge
of the Jesuit Fathers De Vos and Accolti.
In the summer of 1847 Father N. C.
Pandosy and 3 others, the first Oblate
fathers in this region, established a mis-
sion at Ahtanam among the Yakinpa in
E. Washington; Father Pascal Ricard,
Oblate, founded St Joseph on the Sound
near the present Olympia; and in October
of the same year, after some negotiation
for the purchase of the Presbyterian
establishment under Whitman at Waii-
latpu. Father John Brouillet arrived to
start a mission among the Cayuse.
Hardly had he reached the nearest
camp, however, when the news came
of the terrible Whitman massacre, and
Brouillet was just in time to bury the
dead and send warning to the outlying
stations, as already detailed. The project
of a mission among the Cayuse was in
consequence abandoned. In the next
year the secular Fathers Rousseau and
Alespl^e founded a station among the
Wasco, at The Dalles of Columbia r.,
Oreg. Work was attempted among the
degenerate Chinook in 1851, but with
little result. Father E. C. Chirouse, best
known for his later sm^cessful work at
Tulalip school, began his labors among
the tribes of Puget sd. and the lower
Columbia about tfie same period. With
the exception of the Wasco and Chinook,
these missions, or their successors, are
still in existence, numbering among their
adherents the majority of the Christian
Indians of Washmgton and s. Idaho.
At the Tulalip school *The Youth's Com-
panion,' a small journal in the Indian
language, set up and printed by the In-
dian boys, was begun in 1881 and con-
ducted for some years. Father Louis
Saintonge, for some years with the Yaki-
ma and Tulalip missions, is the author of
several important linguistic contributions
to the Chinook jargon and the Yakima
language. Father Pandosy also is the
author of a brief * Grammar and Diction-
ary ' of the Yakima.
New Mexico and Arizona. — As all of
this region was colonized from Spain, the
entire mission work until a very recent
period was conducted by the Catholics
and through priests of the Franciscan
order. The earliest exploration of the
territory w. of the Rio Grande was made
by the Franciscan friar, Marcos de Niza,
in 1539, and it was through his repre-
sentations that the famous exploration of
Coronado was undertaken a year later.
Five Franciscans accompanied the army,
and on the return of the expedition in
1542 three of these volunteered to remain
behind for the conversion of the savages.
Fray Luis de Escalona, or Descalona,
chose Cicuye (Pecos) for his labors.
Fray Juan de Padilla, with a few com-
panions and a herd of sheep and mules,
pushed on to distant Quivira, some-
where on the plains of Kansas. Fray
Juan de la Cruz stayed at Tiguex, Coro-
nado's winter quarters, properly Puaray
on the Rio Grande, near the present Ber-
nalillo, N. Mex. On arriving at Pecos
Fray Luis sent back the message that
while the tribe was friendly the medicine-
men were hostile and would probably
cause his death. So it apparently proved,
for nothing more was ever heara of his
fate or of that of Fray Juan de la Cruz at
Tiguex. Of Fray Juan de Padilla it was
learned years afterward that he had been
killed by the Quivira people for attempt-
ing to carry his ministrations to another
tribe with which they were at war.
In 1580 three other Franciscans, Rod-
riguez, Santa Marfa, and Ix>pez, crossed
the Rio Grande with a small escort and
attempted to establish a mission at the
same town of Tiguex, by that time known
as Puaray, but were killed by the Indians
within a few months of their arrival.
In 1598 Juan deOilate with a stronjr party
of 100 men, besides women and children,
and 7,000 cattle, entered the country from
Mexico and within a few months had
received the submission of all the Pueblo
tribes as far as the remote Uopi of Ari-
BULL. 30]
MISSIONS
893
zona, organizing a r^lar colonization
and povernmental administration and
dividing the region into 7 mission dis-
tricts in charge of a force of Franciscan
friars. In 1617 the Pueblo missions
counted 11 churches, with 14,000 "con-
verts.*' In 1621 there were more than
16,000 convertf, served by 27 nriests in
chargeof Father A lonso Benavides, whose
Memorial is our principal source of infor-
mation for this perion. Another distin-
guished name of this epoch is that of
Father Geronimo de Zarate iSalmeron,
missionarv, philologist, and historian.
In 1630 there were some 50 priests serv-
ing more than 60,000 Christianized In-
dians in 90 pueblos, with 25 principal
mission centers and churches. To this
period belong the mission ruins at Al)6
and Tabira, or '*Gran Quivira'* (one of
which may be the San Isidro of the lost
Jumano tnl)e), which were abandoned in
consequence ol Apache mvasions about
1675. The entire Pueblo |X)pnIation to-
day numbers barely 10,000 souls in 25
villages.
About this time we begin to observe
the first signs of revolt, due partly to the
exactions of the Spanish military author-
ities, but more, apparently, to the at-
tachment of the Indians, particularly the
medicine-men, to their own native cere-
monies and religion. About the year
1650 the wild tribes, known collectively
as Apache, l)egan the series of destruc-
tive raids which continued down almost
to the present centurv. Increasing fric-
tion between the missionaries and the
military administration prevented any
united effort to meet the emergency.
Missionaries were killed in outlying dis-
tricts and several pueblos were w'lped out
by the wild tril)e8, until in 1675, after the
murder of several missionaries and civil-
ians and the execution or other punish-
ment of the princii)als concerne<l, the
Pueblo chiefs, Ie<l by Pope (q. v. ) of San
Juan, sent to the governor a message de-
claring that they would kill all the Span-
iards and flee to the mountains before
they would pennit their medicine-men to
be harmed. C^onditions rapidly grew
worse, until it was evident that a general
conspiracy was on foot and an appeal was
sent to Mexico by the governor for re-
inforcements. Before help could arrive,
however, the storm broke, on August 10,
1680, the historic Pueblo revolt, organ-
ized and led bv Pop<^.
Says Bancroft ( Hist. Ariz, and N. Mex.,
1889 ) : • * 1 1 was the plan of the New Mexi-
cans to utterly exterminate the Spaniards;
and in the massacre none were spared —
neither soldier, priest, or settler, personal
friend or fot», young or old, man or
woman — except ' that a few beautiful
women and girls were kept as captives.'*
Those in the S. were warned in time to
escape, but those in the N., E., and W. i)er-
ished to the numl)er of over 400 persons,
including 21 missionaries (see list, ibid.,
p. 179). Santa Fc itself, with a Spanish
population of 1,000, after a battle lasting
all (lay, was besieged nearly a week by
3,000 Indians, who were finally driven
off by Gov. Otermin in a desi)erate sortie
in w'hich the Indians lost 350 killed.
The result was the entire evacuation of
New Mexico by the Spaniards until its
reoonc^uest by Varga.s in 1692-94, when
most of the missions were reestablished.
The Pueblo spirit was not crushed, how-
ever, and in the suiinner of 16% there
was another outbreak by five tril)es, re-
sulting in the death of five missionaries,
l)esides other Spaniards. The rising was
soon subdued, except among the Hopi,
who deferred submission until 1700, but
only one of their seven or eight towns,
Awatobi, would consent to receive mis-
sionaries again. For the favor thus
shown to ('hristians the other Ilopi com-
bined forces and utterly <lestroyed Awa-
tobi and killed many of its people Ix^fore
the close of the year. The Hopi did not
again become a mission tribt*, l)ut in 1742
more than 440 Tigua, who had fled to the
Hopi at the time of the great revolt, were
brought back and distributed among the
missions of the Kio Grande until they
could be resettled in a new town of their
own. (See Sandia. )
In 1733 Father Mirabal established a
mission among the wild Jicarilla, on
Trampas r., a few leagues from Taos, N.
Mex. In 1746 and 1749 attempts were
made to gather a part of the Navaho into 2
new missions established in the neigh l)or-
hood of l^Aguna, but the undertaking was
a failure. In the latter year the numl)er
of Christian Indians in New Mexico, in-
cluding the vicinity of Kl Paso, was re-
ported to be al)out 1.3,000. By this time
the territory ha<l l)een organized as a
bishopric, and with the increase of the
Spanish i>opulation the relative impor-
tance of the uussion work decline<l. In
1780-81 an epidemic of smallpox carried
off so many of the Christian Indians that
by order of the governor tlie survivors
were the next year concentrated into 20
missions, the other stations l)eing discon-
tinued. As the Indians assimilated with
the Spanish population the missions
gradually took on the character of ordi-
nary church establishments, the F'rancis-
cans being superseded by secular priests.
The majority of the Pueblo Indians of
to-day, excepting those of Hopi and Zuili,
are at least nominal Christians.
In the more recent historic period work
has also l)een conducted at several pue-
blos by various Protestant denominations.
In 1854 a Baptist minister. Rev. Samuel
894
MISSIONS
[b. a. b.^
Gorman, began a mission at Laguna, N.
Mex., which was kept up for several
years. In 1894 Rev. 0. P. Coe, of the
same denomination, began a similar work
for the Hopi of A rizona. The Mennoniies,
represented by Rev. H. R. Voth, had be-
gun a year earlier at Oraibi a successful
work among the llopi, which is still car-
ried on, being now in charge of Revs.
Jacob Epp and John B. Frey.
About the year 1876 the I^reabyteriam,
through Rev. John Menaul, established a
mission at Laguna, the undertaking being
afterward extended to Jemez and Zufii,
N. Mex., besides an industrial school
oiKjned at Albuquerque in 1881. By
means of a printing press operated at La-
gima, with the aid of Indian pupils, sev-
eral small devotional and reading books
have l)een published by Menaul and Ber-
covitz, connected with the mission, which
still continues.
With the exception of those among the
Hopi, l)ef()re the great revolt, the only
missions in Arizona before the transfer of
the territory to the United States were
two in number, viz. : San Xavier del Bac
and San Miguel de Guevavi, established
under Jesuit auspices on the upper waters
of Santa Cruz r., among a subtrilnj of the
Pima, about 1782.
The Pima missions were a northern ex-
tension of the Jesuit mission foundation
of northern Sonora, Mexico. The noted
German Jesuit exi)lorer. Father Eusebio
Kino (proiHjrly Kiilme), made several
missionary expeditions into s. Arizona be-
tween 1692 and his death in 1710, but so
far as known no regular stations were es-
tablished until long after his de^th, the
first priests in charge in 1732 being two
other Germans, Father Felipe Segesser,
at Bac, and Father Juan GrashoSer, at
Guevavi. Besides the main establish-
ment, several other Indian villajjes were
designated as 'visitas,' or visiting sta-
tions. The Pima mission never flour-
ished. In 1750 the tril^es revolted and
the mist^ions were plundered, most of the
missionaries escaping, and by the time
peace was restored the contest had begun
against the Jesuits, which resulted in the
expulsion of the order from Spanish ter-
ritory in 1767. Their place was at once
fille(i by the Franciscans, but the work
languished and steadilv declined under
the attacks from the wild tribes. About
the year 1780 Guevavi was abandoned in
consequence of Ai)ache raids, and Tuma-
cracori, in the same general r^ion, was
made mission headouarters. The work
came to an end by decree of the revolu-
tionary government in 1828, shortly after
the transfer of authority from Spain to
Mexico.
California. — As in other parts of Span-
ish America, the Catholics were the sole
mission workers in California until within
a very recent period. The most noted of
all the Spanish missions were the Fran-
ciscan missions of California, whose story
is so closely interwoven with the history
and romance of the Pacific coast, and
whose ruins still stand as the most pic-
turesque landmarks of the region. Their
story has been told so often tiiat we need
not here so into details. The first one
was established in 1769 at San Diego,
near the s. boundary,by Father J unfpero
Serra (to whose memory a monument
was erected at Monterey in 1891 ), who ad-
vanced slowly along the coast and passed
the work on to his successors, until in 1828
there was a chain of 21 prosperous mis-
sions extending northward to beyond
San Francisco Imy. The full list, in the
order of their establishment, with the
names of the founders or superiors in
charge of the California mission district
at the time, is as follows: 1, San Diego de
Alcala (Serra, 1769); 2, San Carlos Bor-
romeo de Monterey, alias Carmel f Serra,
1770); 3, San Antonio de Pddua (Serra,
1771, July); 4, San Gabriel Arcangel
(Serra, 1771, Sept.); 5, San Luis Obispo
de Tolosa (Serra, 1772) ; 6, San Francisco
de Asis, alias Dolores (Serra, 1776, Oct.);
7, San Juan Capistrano (Serra, 1776,
Nov.); 8, Santa Clara (Serra, 1777); 9,
San Buenaventura (Serra, 1782) ; 10, Siuita
Barbara (Palou, 1786); 11, La Purfsima
Concepcion (Palou, 1787); 12, Santa
Cruz (Palou, 1791, Sept.); 13, Nuestra
Seiiora de la Soledad (Palou, 1791, Oct.);
14, San Jos^ (Lasuen, 1797, June 11);
15, San Juan Bautista (Lasuen, 1797, June
24); 16, San Miguel (Lasuen, 1797, July);
17, San Fernando Rey (Lasuen, 1797,
Sept. ) ; 18, San Luis Rey de Francia (Peyri,
1798); 19, Santa Inez (Tapis, 1804); 20,
San Rafael (Payeras, 1817); 21, San Fran-
cisco Solano, alias San Solano or Sonoma
(Sonoma, 1823); 22, La Purfsima Concep-
cion, on lower Colorado r. (Garces,
17^); 23, San Pedro y San Pablo de
Bicufler, on lower Colorado r., possibly in
Lower California (Garaf»s, 1780).
Among the many devoted workers
connected with the California missions
during the 65 years of their existence the
most prominent, after Serra, are Father^
Crespi, Palou, and Peyri, the las^-named
being the founder, and for a number of
years the superior, of San Luis Rey,
which shared with San Diego the honor
of being the largest and most important
of the series. In 1810 the neophyte
population of San Diego was 1,611, while
that of San Luis Rey was 1,519.
The mission buildings, constructed en-
tirely by Indian labor under supervision
of the fathers, were imposing structures
of brick and stone, some of which even in
their roofless condition have defied the
BULL. 30]
MISSIONS
895
decay of 70 years. Around each mission,
except in the extreme n., were groves of
pahns, hananas, oranges, ohves, and figs,
together with extensive vineyards, while
more than 400,000 cattle ranged the \ysLSi-
tures. \Vork8hoi)6, schoglroonis, store-
rooms, chapt^ls, dormitories, and hospitals
were all provicied for, and in addition U)
religious instructitm and onlinary school
studies, weaving, i)ottery-niaking, carpen-
try, and every other most useful trade
and oitcupation were taught to the neo-
phytes, iH^sides the violin and other in-
struments to those who displayed apti-
tude in niUHic. There were fixed hours
for prayers and work, with three hours
of rest at noon, and dancing and other
amusement«afttT supper and the angelus,
which was one hour t)ef<)re sunwt. The
diet consisteil of an abundance of fresh
beef, mutton, wheat an<l corn bread, and
beans, from their own herds and planta-
tions. From the sale of the surplus were
bought clothing, tobacco, an<l trinkets
for the Indians, and the necessary church
supplies. At seasonable intervals thiTo
were outing excursions to allow the neo-
phytt»s to visit their wilder relatives in
the hills. The missionaries taught by
practical example at the plow, the brick-
kiln, and in the vineyanl. Duflot de Mo-
fras, who made an official tour of the mis-
sions on iKjhalf of the French govern-
ment shortly before their utter ruin, says:
** Necessity makes the missionaries indus-
trious. One is struck with astonishment
at 8tH»ing that with such small resources,
generally without any Euroix'an work-
men, and with the aid of savage popula-
tions whose intelligence was of the lowest
order and who were often hostile, l>esi(les
the vast agricultural culture, they have
lK»en able to executi^ such extensive
works of arehitecture and mechanical
structures, such as mills, machinery, and
workshoi)s, lx»si<les bridges, roads, and
canals for irrigation. The construction
of almost all these missions required that
timU»r, often cut upon stei^p mountains,
should l)e brought 25 to 80 miles, and
that the Indians should l)e taught how to
make lime, cut stone, and mould bricks.
This fact can not l)e mistaken — it was
not merely by proselytism that the old
missionaries succeeded in attracting the
Indians. In the work of their conver-
sion, if religion was the end, material
comifort was the means. The mission-
aries had re-solved the great problem of
making labor attractive."
The Indians themselves, of many tribes
and dialects, were for the most part un-
warlike and tractable, but without native
energy, and probablv, in their ongmal
condition, lower m tlie scale of civiliza-
tion and morality than any others within
the limits of the United States. Infanti-
cide prevailed to such a degree that even
the most earnest efforts of the mission-
aries were unable to stamp it out, the fact
showing how little the new teaching
really affected the deei)er instinct of the
savage. Although there were fre«]uent
raids by the wild tri})es, there was little
serious opposition to mission discipline,
which was sui)ported when necessary by
military assistance from the nearest gar-
rison. Despite regular life, abundance (»f
food, and proper clothing according to the
season, the ln<lian withered away under
the restrictions of civilization 'sui)ple-
menttnl bv epidemic dis(»ases intr<Mlu(»ed
by the niihtary garrisons or the seal hunt-
ers along the coast. The death rate was
so enormous in spite of aj)parent material
advancement that it is probable that the
former factor alone would have brought
al)out the extinction of the missions with-
in a few generations.
But all this nrosi^erity at last excittni
the cupidity of the recentlv establisheil
revoluti(mary government of Mexico, and
in 1888-84 decrees were passed to "secu-
larize" the missi<ms and to ex|K*l the
missionaries, who, as Si)aniards, were
hated by therevolutionists. The inis.^ion
funds an<l vast herds were confiscated,
the hin<ls were distributed to eager polit-
ical adventurers, ami minor van<lalsc<»m-
pleted the work of destruction by taking
even the tiles from tiu^ roofs and digging
up the vines and fruit trees in the gar-
dens. Some alM)rtive provision was made
for the Indians, of which in their help-
lessness they were unable to avail them-
selves, and in a few years, left without
their protectors, they liad again scattered
to the mountains and swamits or sunk
into the lowest degra<lation in the new
mining towns. In IS34, when the blow
came, the (California missions had 80,(>50
hniians, with 424,0(K) cattle, ()2,5(X)
horses and mules; 821,900 shtiep, goats,
and hogs; an<l produced 122,500 l>ushels
of wheat and corn. In 1842 there re-
maine<l <mly 4,450 Indians, 28,220 cattle,
and the rest in profHirtion. To-day, ac-
cording to official rei>ort, there remain of
the old Mission Indians only 2,855, whose
condition is a su})ject of constant seri-
ous concern to philanthropists.
Two other (California missions have a
briefer history. In 1780 the military
commander of the Sonora district deter-
mined to estai)lish among the warlike
Yuma two garrison posts with colony and
mission attachments, despite the i)rotests
of the missionaries concerncHi, who fore-
saw that the combination would l>e dis-
astrous to their own part of the work.
Two sites were selectecf, however, in the
tall ot the year on the w. bank of tlie Col-
orado— the one, I^ PurfsimaConceiK'ion,
occupying the site of old Ft Yuma, the
896
MISSIONS
[B. A.B.
other, San Pedro V Pablo de Bicufier, being
8 or 10 m. lower down, possibly just across
the present Mexican border. Purfsima
mission was placed in charge of Father
Francisco Garc^s, the explorer, with
Father Juan Barreneche as his assistant,
while the other was given over to Fathers
Diaz and Moreno. The event was as pre-
dicted. Within a year the Yuma were
roused to hostility by the methods and
broken promises of the military com-
mander. In July, 1781, both settlements
were attacked almost simultaneously, the
buildings plundered and burned, the
commander and every man of the small
garrison killed after a desperate resistance,
the four missionaries and nearly all the
men of the colonies also butchered, and
the women and several others carried off
as captives. A subsequent expedition
rescued the captives and buried the dead,
but the Yuma remained unsulxlued and
the colony undertaking was not renewed.
(See California f Indians of; Mission In-
dians of Calif omin,)
Alaska. — Alaska wasdiscovered by the
Russians in 1741 and remained a possession
of Russia until transferred to the United
States in 1867. In 1 794 regular missionary
work was begun among the Aleut on Ko-
diak id. by monks of the Greek Catholic
(Russian orthodox) church, under the
Archimandrite Joassaf, with marked suc-
cess among the islanders, but with smaller
result among the more warlike tribes of
the mainland. Within a few years the
savage Aleut were transformed to civilized
Christians, many of whom were able to
read, write, and' speak the Russian lan-
guage. Among the pioneer workers were
Fathers Juvenal, murdered in 1796 by the
Eskimo for his opposition to polygamy,
and the distinguished John Veniaminof,
1823 to about 1840, the historian and phi-
lologist of the Alaskan tril)es, and author
of a number of religious and educational
works in the Aleut and Tlingit languages,
including an Aleut grammar and a brief
dictionary. Fathers Jacob Netzvietoff
and Elias Tishnoff also have nuule several
translations into the Aleut language.
About the time of the transfer Xo the
United States the Christian natives num-
bered 12,000, ser\^ed by 27 priesta and
deacons, with several schools, including
a seminary at Sitka. Chapels had been
established in every important settlement
from Prince William id. to the outermost
of the A leutian ids. , a distance of 1 , 800 m . ,
besides other stations on the Yukon, Kus-
kokwim, and Nusha^jak rs., and regular
churches at Sitka, Killisnoo, and Juneau.
In 1902 the Greek church had 18 minis-
ters at work in Alaska. (See Russian in-
fluence, )
The first Protestant missions after the
transfer to the United States were begun by
the PresbyterianH in 1877, under the super-
vision of Kev. Sheldon Jackson and Mrs
A. R. McFarland, with headauartersatFt
W^rangell, where a school nad already
been organized by some Christian Indians
from the Methoaist station at Ft Simp-
son, Brit. Col. WMthin the next 18 ^ears
some 15 stations had been established
among the Imlians of the h. coast and
islands, besides two among the Eskimo,
at Pt Barrow and on St Lawrence id.
Among the earliest workers, besides those
alrea^ly named, were Rev. J. G. Brady,
Rev. E. S. Willard, and Mr Walter Stiles.
The principal schools were at Sitka ( 1878)
and Juneau (1886). At Pt Barrow a herd
of importe<i reindeer added to the means
of subsistence. The majority of these
missions are still in successful operation.
The next upon the ground were the
( btholicsy who made their first establish-
ment at Wrangell in 1878, following with
others at Sitka, Juneau, and Skagway. In
1886-87 they entered the Yukon region,
with missions at Nulato on the Yukon,
St Ignatius on the Kuskokwim, St Mary's
(Akularak), St Michael, Nome, Kusilvak
id., Nelson id., Holy Cross (Koserefsky),
and others, the largest schools being those
at Koserefsky and Nulato. With the ex-
ception of Nulato all were in P^kimo ter-
ritory. In 1903 the work was in charge
of 12 Jesuits and lay brothers, assisted by
11 sisters of St Anne. The Innuit gram-
mar and dictionary of Father Francis
Bamum (1901) ranks as one of the most
important contributions to Eskimo phil-
ology.
In 1884 the Moravians^ pioneer workers
among the eastern Eskimo, sent a com-
mission to look over the ground in Alaska,
and as a result a mission was established
at Kevinak among the Eskimo of Kus-
kokwim r. in the next year by Revs. W. H.
Weinland and J. H. Kilbuck, with their
wives. In the same year other stations
were established at Kolmakof, on the
upper Kuskokwim, for Eskimo and In-
dians together, and farther s., at Carmel,
on Nushagak r. In 1903 there were 5
mission stations in Eskimo territory, in
charge of 13 white workers, having 21
native assistants, with Rev. Adolf Stecker
as superintendent. The reindeer herd
numbered nearly 400.
In 1886 the Episcopaliam began work
with a school at St Michael, on the coast
(Eskimo), which was removed next year
to Anvik, on the Yukon, in charge of
Rev. and Mrs Octa^^us Parker and Rev.
J. H. Chapman. In 1890 a mission
school was started at Pt Hope (Eskimo),
under Dr J. B. Driggs, and about the
same time another among the Tanana
Indians in the middle Yukon valley, by
Rev. and Mrs T. H. Canham. In 1903
the Episcopalians in Alaska, white and
BULL. 30]
MISSIONS
897
native, counted 13 churches, a boarding
school, and 7 day schools, with a total
working force of 31.
The Baptists also began work in 1886
on Kodiak id., under Mr W. E. Roscoe.
In 1893 a large orphanage was erected
on Wood id., opposite Kodiak, by the
Woman's Home Mission Society, its
sphere of influence now including a great
part of the Alaska peninsula westward
from Mt St Elias.
The Methodists, beginning also in 1886,
have now several stations in s. e. AlasJ^a,
together with the flourishing Jesse Lee
Industrial Home, under the auspices of
the Methodist Woman's Home Mission
Society, on Unalaska id.
In 1887 the Sivedish Evangelical Union
of Sweden, through Revs. Axel Karlson
and Adolf Lydell, respectively, estab-
lished stations at Unalaklik on Bering
sea (Eskimo) and at Yakutat, on the s.
coast among the Tlingit. In 1900, in
consequence of an epidemic, an orphanage
was founded on Golofnin bay. The civ-
ilizing and Christianizing influence of
the Swedish mission is manifest over a
large area.
In 1887 the Kansas Yearly Meeting of
Friends began work on Douglas id., near
Juneau, through Messrs E. W. Weesner
and W. H. Bangham, chiefly for the
white population. In 1892 a school was
opened among the Kake Indians of Kuiu
and Kupreanof ids., under the ausjMces
of the Oregon meeting, and in 1897
another mission, under the auspices of
the California meeting, was established
among the Eskimo in Kotzebue sd. Here
also is now a large reindeer herd.
In 1890 the Congregatiormlists, under
auspices of the American Missionary As-
sociation, established the Eskimo mission
school of Wales, at C. Prince of Wales, on
Bering str., under Messrs W. T. Lopp
and H. R. Thornton, the latter of whom
was afterward assassinated by some re-
bellious pupils. In 1902 the school was
in prosperous condition, with more than
a hundred pupils and a herd of about
1,200 reindeer.
In 1900 the Lviherans, under the aus-
pices of the Norwegian Evangelical
Church, established an orphanage at the
Teller reindeer station, Fort Clarence,
Bering str., under Rev. T. L. Brevig, as-
sisted oy Mr A. Ilovick, the missionaries
having charge also of the Government
reindeer hems at the place. It was at
Teller station that Rev. Sheldon Jackson,
in 1892, inaugurated the experiment of
introducing Siberian reindeer to supple-
ment the rapidly diminishing food supply
of the natives, as the whale had been
practicallv exterminated from the Alaska
coast. The experiment has proved a
complete success, the original imported
Bull. 30—05 57
herd of 53 animals having increased to
more than 15,000, with promise of solv-
ing the problem of subsistence for the
Eskimo as effectually as was done by the
sheep introduced by the old Franciscans
among the Pueblos and through them the
Navaho.
For Metlakatla, see Canada, West.
Present Conditions. — It may be said
that at present practically every tril)e
officially recognized within the United
States is under the missionary influence
of some religious denomination, workers
of several denominations frequently la-
boring in the same tribe. The complete
withdrawal of Government aid to denom-
inational schools some years ago for a
time seriously crippled the work and
obliged some of the smaller boiiies to
abandon the mission field entirelv. The
larger religious bodies have met tlie diffi-
culty by sj)ecial provision, notably in the
case of the Catholics, by means of aid
afforded by the Preservation Society, the
Mar(|uette League, and by the liberality
of Mother Katharine Drexel, founder
of the Order of the Blessed Sacrament,
for Indian and Negro mission w^ork. The
Catholic work is organized under super-
vision of the Bureau of Catholic Indian
Missions, established in 1874, with head-
quarters at Washington. The report for
1904 shows a total or 178 Indian churches
and chai)els served by 152 priests; 71
boarding and 26 day schools, with 109
teaching priests, 384 sisters, and V^ other
religious or secular teachers and school
assistants. The principal orders engaged
are the Jesuits, Franciscans, and Bene-
dictines, and the sisters of the orders of
St Francis, St Anne, St Benedict, St Jo-
seph, Mercv, and Blessed Sacrament.
Of the other leading denominations en-
gaged in Indian mission work within the
United States proper, according to the
official Report of the Board of Indian
Commissioners for 1903, the Presbfjterians
come first, with 101 churches, 69 ordained
missionaries and a proportionate force
of other workers, and 32 schools. Next
the Methodists, with 40 ordained mission-
aries, but with only one school; Episco-
palians, 14 missions, 28 ordained mis-
sionaries, and 17 schools; Baptists, 14
missions, 15 ordained missionaries, and 4
schools — exclusive of the Southern Bap-
tists, not reported; Congregatioimlints
(American Missionary Association), 10
missions, 12. ordained missionaries, and 5
schools; i^neucfo, 10 missions, 15 ordained
missionaries, and 1 school; Mennonites, 5
missions, 6 ordained missionaries, but no
school; Moravians, 3 missions, 3 ordained
missionaries, and no school. Statistics
for any other denominations, including
the Mormons, are not given. The mis-
sionary work of each denomination re-
898
MISSIONS
[B. A.!.
pjorted is in charge of a central organiza-
tion.
Canada, East; Newfoundland, etc. —
Canada, being originally a French posses-
sion, the mission work for a century and
a half was almost entirely with the Cath-
olics. Port Royal, now Annapolis, Nova
Scotia, was founded in 1605, and the res-
ident priest. Father Fleche, divided his
attention between the French settlers and
the neighboring Micmac. In 1611 the
Jesuits, Fathers Peter Biard and Ene-
mond Masse, arrived from France, but
finding work among the Micmac made
diflBcult by the opposition of the govern-
or, they went to the Abnaki, among
whom they established a mission on Mt
Desert id., Maine, in 1613. The mission
was destroyed in its very beginning by
the English Captain Argall (see Xew
England). In 1619 work was resumed
among the Micmac and the Malecite of
Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, and lower
Quebec under the R^coUet Franciscans
and continued for at least half a century.
The most distinguished of these R^col-
lets was Father Chrestien Le Clercq, who,
while stationed at the Micmac mission of
Gasp^, at the mouth of the St I^wrence,
from 1655 to about 1665, mastered the
language and devised for it a system of
hieroglyphic writing which is still in use
in the tribe. Another of the same order
is said to have been the first to compile a
dictionary of a Canadian language, but
the work is now lost. The eastern mis-
sions continued, under varying auspices
and fortunes, until the taking of Louis-
burg, Nova Scotia, by the English in 1745,
when all the missionaries in Nova Scotia
and New Brunswick were either deported
or compelled to seek other refuge. In
their absence the Abb^ Maillard,of Nova
Scotia, ministered for some years to the
Micmac and the Malecite, at first in secret
and then openly after the peace of 1760.
To him we owe a Micmac grammar and
a treatise on the customs of the Indians.
It was not until within the last centu-
ry, when international and sectarian jeal-
ousies had largely passed away, that the
work was resumed, continuing without
interruption to the present time.
Work was begun in 1615 by the R^-
coUets among the roving Montagnais
and Algonkin of the Saguenay, Ottawa,
and lower St Lawrence region. The
pioneers were Fathers Dolbeau, Jamet,
and Du Plessis, together with Father Le
Caron in the Huron field. In 1636 Dol-
beau had extended his ministrations to
the outlying bands of the remote Eskimo
of Labrador. The principal missions were '
established at Tadousac (Montagnais),
the great trading resort at the mouth of
the Saguenav; Gasp^ (Montagnais and
Micmac j ana Three Rivers (Montagnais
and Algonkin), all in Quebec province;
Miscou, N. B., for the Micmac, and on
Georgian bay for the Hurons. In 1625
the Kecollets called the Jesuits to their
aid, and a few years later withdrew en-
tirelv, leaving the work to be continued
by the latter order. In 1637 the Jesuit
mission of St Joseph was founded by Le
Jeune at Sillery, near Quebec, and soon
became the most important colony of the
christianized Montajgnais and Algonkin.
In 1646, at the request of the Abnaki,
Father Gabriel Druillettes was sent to
that tribe. In consequence of the later
New England wars, large numbers of the
Abnaki and other more southerly tribes
took refuge in the Canadian missions (see
New England).
In 1641 Fathers Charles Raymbaultand
Isaac Jogues, among the Oltawa bcuids
on the headwaters of the river of that
name, accompanied a party to the far W.
and discovered the great L. Superior,
planting a cross and preaching in the
camps about the present Sault Ste Marie,
Mich. In the next year a regular mis-
sion was established among the Nipissing,
on the N. shore of the lake of the same
name. Other missions followed, con-
tinuing until the dispersion of the Algon-
kin tribes by the Iroquois in 1650. Most
of the fugitives fled westward, roving
along the shores of L. Superior without
missionary attention until visited by
the Jesuit Allouez in 1667. Other names
connected with this early Algonkin mis-
sion were those of Pijart, Garreau, and
the pioneer explorer Ren^ Menard. In
1657 the first Sulpicians arrived at Quebec
from France, and soon afterward besan
work among the neighboring tribes, but
with principal attention to the Iroquois
colonies on both shores of L. Ontario, at
Quints and Oswegatchie (see New York),
To this period belongs the wonderful ca-
noe voyage of discovery by the two Sul-
picians, Galin<^e and Dollier de Casson,
in 1669-70, from Montreal up through the
great lakes to Mackinaw, where they were
welcomed by the Jesuits Dablon and
Marquette, and then home, by way of
French r. , Nipissing, and the Ottawa. No
less important was the discovery of an
overland route from the St Lawrence to
Hudson bay in 1671-72 by the Sieur St
Simon, accompanied by the Jesuit Charles
Albanel. Ascending the Saguenay from
Tadousac they crossed the divide, and
after 10 months of toilsome travel finally
reached the bay near the mouth of Ru-
pert r. , where Albanel, the first missionary
to penetrate this remote region, spent
some time preaching and baptizing among
the wandering Maskegon along the shore.
In 1720 a number of the christianized
Iroquois, with fragments of the Algonkin
bands, after years of shifting about, were
BULL. 30]
MISSIONS
899
gathered into a new mission settlement
at Oka, or Lake of the Two Mountains
(Lac des Deux Montagues), also known
under its Iroquois name of Canasadaga,
on the N. bank of the St Lawrence, above
the island of Montreal. It still exists as
one of the principal Indian settlements.
Among the earlier missionaries in this
r^ion who have made imj)ortant con-
tributions to Algonquian philology may
be noted: Father Louis Andr6, Jesuit,
who spent more than 40 vears witli the
Montagnais and the Algonkin, from 1069,
leaving l)ehind him a manuscript diction-
ary 01 the Algonkin, besides a great
body of other material; Father Antonio
Silvy, Jesuit, of the same i)eriod, author
of a manuscript Montagnais dictionary;
Father Pierre I-aure, Jesuit, with the
Montagnah^, 1720-38, author of a manu-
script Montagnais grammar and diction-
ary, and other works; Father Jean Mathe-
vet, Sulpician, at Oka, 1746 to 1781, the
author of an Abnaki dictionary ; Father
Vincent Guichart, ministering to Algon-
kin and Iroquois at Oka from 1754 until
his death in 1793, master of both lan-
guages and author of a manuscript Algon-
kin grammar; the Abb^ Thavenet, Sul-
pician, at Oka, from about 1793 to 1815,
author of an Algonkin grammar and
dictionary and other miscellany, still
in manusi^ript; Father J. B. I^ Brosse,
Jesuit, with the IMontagnais and Malecite,
1754 to his death in 1782, author of a
numl)er of religious and teaching works
in the Montagnais language. Among the
most distinguished laborers within the
last century in the Montagnais, Algonkin,
and Maskegon territories, stretching from
the St Lawrence to Hudson bay, may be
named FathersDurocher( 1829-73), (larin
(1845-57), I^verloch^re (1845-51 ), Lebret
(1861-69), Gu^^guen (1864-88-^), and
Provost (1873-88--), all of the Oblate
order, and each the author of some im-
portant contribution to American philol-
ogy. Rev. Char4es Guay has given atten-
tion to the language among the Micmac
of New Brunswick. In recent years the
most prominent name is that of Father
J. A. Cuoq, Sulpician, already noted,
missionary at Oka for more than half a
century, beginning in 1847, master of tlie
Mohawk and Algonkin languages, and
author of a dictionary of each, besides
numerous other important linguistic
works.
According to the official Canadian In-
dian Report for 1906 the Catholic Indians
of the nve eastern provinces numbered
18,064, including all those of Prince
Edward id.. Nova Scotia, and New Bmns-
wick, nearly all those of Quebec, and
two-fifths of the Christian Indians of
Ontario. Every settlement of impor-
tance had a church, school, or visiting
priest, the standard for industry being
fair, for temperance good, and for honesty
and general morality exceptionally high.
The noted Huron missions hold a place
by themselves. The l)eginning was made
by the Recollet, Joseph le Caron, who
accompanied Champlain on his visit to
the Huron country in 1615. The tribe
at that time occupied the shores of (Jeor-
gian bay, Ontario, and with other incor-
porated bands may have numbered 10,000
souls or more (some estimates are much
higher), in from 15 to 30 towns or villages,
several of which were strongly palisaded.
They were probably then of strength
equal to that of their here<litary enemies
and final destroyers, the Irocjuois of New
York. In more or less close alliance with
the Hurons were the cognate Tionontati
and Neutrals, farther to the s. and s. w.,
in the iH^ninsula l)etween L. Erie and L.
Huron. Le Caron s[)ent the winter with
the Ilunms and Tionontati, established
the mission of St Gabriel, made a brief
di(!tionary of the language, and returned
to the French settlements in the spring.
The work was continued for some years
by other Recollets, (iabriel Sagard*, au-
thor of a Huron dictionary and a history
of the Recollet missions, and Nicholas
Viel, who was murdered l)y an Indian
alxmt 1624. In 1625 the Jesuits arrived
in Canada to assist the Recollets, and the
next year the heroic Jean de Brel)euf and
another Jesuit, with Father Joseph Dal-
lion, Recollet, reached St (iabriel. The
Neutrals also were now visited, but with-
out successful result. The work was
brought to a temporary close by the
English occupancy of Canada in 1629.
In 1634, after the restoration of French
control, the work was resumed, this time
by the Jesuits alone, with Brt»beuf as
superior, assisted then or later by Fathers
Daniel, (Jarnier, Jogues, and others of
less note. The mission church of Im-
maculate Conception was built in 1637 at
Ossossani, one of the principal towns;
St Josepli was established at Teanan-
stayae, the capital, in the next year; the
principal war chief of the tribe was bap-
tizeil, and (/hristianity began to take root,
in spite of the suspicions engendered by
two wasting epidemic visitations, ior
which the missionaries were held respon-
sible and solemnly condenmed to death,
until the current of opposition was turned
by Br^beuf's courageous bearing. In
1639 there were 4 established missions
with 13 priests working in the Huron
country and visiting in the neighboring
tribes. St Marys, on Wye r., had been
made the general headquarters. A visi-
tation of smallpox agam spread terror
through the tribe and for a time rendered
the position of the missionaries unsafe.
In consequence of these successive epi-
900
MISSIONS
[B. A. a.
demies within a few years several towns
had been depopulated and the tribe so
much weakene<l as to leave it an easy
prey for the invading Iroquois, whose
inroads now became more constant and
serious than l)efore.
In 1641 the Iroquois invaded the Huron
country in force, kille<l many, and car-
ried on many others to captivity. In
1648, after a temporary truce, they re-
sumed the war of extermination, with
perhaps 2,000 warriors well armed with
Sms obtained from the Dutch, while the
urons had only bows. On July 4 Tea-
nanstayae, or St Joseph, on the site of
the present Barrie, was attacked and de-
stroyed, the missionary, Father Anthony
Daniel, killed with several hundred of his
flock, and about 700 others were carried
off as captives. The whole country was
ravaged throughout the fall and winter,
and one town after another destroyed or
abandone<l. On Mar. 16, 1649, a thou-
sand warriors attacked St Ignatius town
and massacred practically the whole
population, after which they proceeded
at once to the neighboring town of St
Louis, where the burning and massacre
were rt»j>eated, and two missionaries,
Br<''l>euf and Father Gabriel Lalemant,
killed after hours of the most horrible
tortures. An attack on St Marys, where
Father Ragueneau was stationed, was re-
pulsed, after which the Iroquois retired.
This was the deathblow to the Huron
nation. Fifteen towns were abandoned
and the i>eople scattered in every direc-
ticm. Two whole town populations sub-
mittcni to the conquerors and removed in
a body to the Seneca country. Others
fled to the Tionontati, who were now in
turn invaded by the Iroquois and com-
pelled, by burning and massacre, with
the killing of Fathers (iamier and Cha-
banel, to abandon their country and flee
with the rest. Others took refuse on the
islands of L. Huron. Some jomed the
Neutrals, who soon after met the same
fate.
For the next 50 years the history of
the confederated Huron and Tionontati
remnants is a mere re<»ord of flight from
pursuing enemies — the Iroquois m the E.
and the Sioux in the W. A considerable
body which sought the protection of the
French, after several removals was finally
settled by Father M. J. Chaumonot in
1693 at (New) Ix)rette, near Quebec,
where their descendants still reside (see
Ilurom; IjoreUe ) . To Chaumonot we owe
a standard grammar and dictionary of
the Huron language, only the first of
which is yet published. In the mean-
time, in 1656-57, two-thirds of this band
had bodily remove<i to the Iroquois coun-
try to escape destruction.
The other fimtives, composed largely or
principally of Tionontati, tied successively
to Manitoulin id. in L. Huron; Macki-
naw; the Noquet ids. in Green bay, Wis.;
westward to the Mississippi; back to
Green bay, where they were visited by
the Jesuit Menard in 1660; to Ch^oi-
megon, near the present Bayfield, Wis.,
on the shore of L. Superior, where the
Jesuit AUouez ministered to them for
several years; back, in 1670, to Macki-
naw, whence another party joined the
Inxmois, and finally (town to Detroit,
Mich., when that post was founded in
1702. In 1751 a part of these, under
Father de la Richard, settled at San-
dusky, Ohio. From this period the
Wyandot, as they now l)egan to be called,
took their place as the leading tribe of the
Ohio region and the privileged lighters
of the confederate council fire. Their
last Jesuit missionary, Father Peter
Potier, died in 1781, after which they
were starved by occasional visiting priests
and later by the Presbyterians and the
Methodists, until about the i)eriod ot
their removal to Kansas in 1842 (see In-
terior iSUiiea) .
The work of the EuiscopaUam (Angli-
can Church) among tlie Irocjuois of New
York, beginning alx)ut 1700 and continu-
ing in Canada after the removal of a large
part of the confecleracy from the United
States, has already been noted ( see Mid-
dle Atlantic— New York). In 1763 Rev.
Thomas Wood of Nova Scotia, having
bei^ome acquainted with the Abbe Mail-
lard and obtained the use of his Micmac
manuscript, applied himself to the study
of the langu^e, dividing his ministra-
tions thenceforth l)etween the Indians
and the whites until his death in 1778. He
E reached in the native tongue, in which
e produced several religious translations.
This seems to have been the only work
recorded for this denomination in this
part of the Dominion, and in the official
Canadian Indian Report for 1906 no In-
dians are enumerated under this heading
in the provinces of Nova Scotia, New
Brunswick, or Prince PMward id. In
Quel>ec province the same report gives
this denomination 119 Indians, including
60 Abnaki at St Francis and 48 Montagn-
ais at I^ake St John.
In Ontario province, besides the work
already noted among the Iroquois, active
and successful missionary effort has been
carried on by the Episcoi)alians among
the various Chip|)ewa bands and others
since about 1830. One of the principal
stations is that at (harden River, opposite
Sault Ste Marie, begun in 1835 by Rev.
Mr McMurray, who was succeeded a few
years later by Rev. F. A. O'Meara, after-
ward stationed on Manitoulin id., and
BULL. 30]
MISSIONS
901
later at Port Hope on L. Ontario. Be-
sides building up a nourishing prhool,
Mr O'Meara found time to translate into
the native laniiruage the Book of Common
Prayer, considerable portions of both the
Old and the New Testament, and a vol-
ume of hynms, the last in cooj)eration
with the Rev. Peter Jacobs. He died
about 1870. Of tlie more rc»cent ])eriod
the most noted worker is Rev. E. F. Wil-
son, who began his labors under the
auspices of the (Church Mission Society
in 1868. To his efforts the Indians owe
the Shingwauk and Wawanosh homes at
Sault Ste Marie, Ontario, where some 60
or 80 children are cart»d for, educated,
and taught the rudiments of trades and
simple industries. A sch(X)l journal,
set up and printed by the Indian boys,
has also been conducte<l at intervals,
under various titles, for nearly 30 years.
Mr Wilson is the autlior of a number of
Indian writings, of which the most im-
S^rtant is probably a * Manual of the
jibway Language,** for the usi^ of niis-
sion workers.
In 1835 a mission was establishe<l also
on Thames r., among the Munsee, a rem-
nant of those Delaware refuget»s from the
United States who for so many years of
the colonial period had l)een the object of
Moravian care ( see Middle Atlantic SUites ) .
One of the pioneer workers, Rev. Mr
Flood, translateii the chureli liturgy into
the language of the trilK*.
Of 17,498 Christian Indians officially
reportetl in 1906 in Ontario province,
5,253, or not (juite one-third, are crediteil
to the Episcopal or Anglican church, in-
cluding— Iroquois in various bands, 3,073;
• "Chippewasof the Thames," 593; "Ojib-
bewas of L. Supt»rior," 554; ^'Chippewas
and Saulteaux of Treaty No. 3" (Alani-
toba border), 709; "Munsees of the
Thames" (originally Moravian converts
from the United States; s(h? Middle Atlantic
States)^ 154; **Oiib])ewas and Ottawas of
Manitoulin and Cock burn ids.," 169;
Potawatomi of Walpole id., 79; and one
or two smaller groups.
The work among the I^^skimo of the
Labrador coast — officially a part of New-
foundland— is conducted by the Mora-
vians, In 1752 a reconnoitering mission-
ary party landed near the present Hope-
dale, but was attacked by the natives,
who killed Brother J. C. Ehrhardt and 5
sailors, whereupon the survivors returned
home and the attempt for a time was
abandoned. One or two other exploring
trips were made for the same puri)ose,
and in 1769 permission to establish mis-
sions on the I^brador W)ast was formally
asked bjr the Moravians and granted by
the British government. In 1771 the
first mission was begun at Nain, appar-
ently by Brother Jens Haven. It is now
the chief settlement on the Labnuior
coast. In 1776 Okak was established by
Brother Paul I^ayritz, followed by Hoi)e-
dale in 1782, and Hebron in 1830. To these
have more recently been added Zoar and
Ramah. The efforts of the missionaries
have been most successful, the wander-
ing Eskimo having ]>een gathered into
permanent settlements, in each of which
are a church, store, mission residence, and
workshops, with dwelling houses on the
model of the native iglu. B<»sides receiv-
ing religious instruction, tlie natives are
taught the shnple mechanical arts, but to
guard against their innate improvidence,
the missionaries have found it necessary
to introduce the communal system, by tak-
ing charge of all food supplies to distribute
at their own disc*retion. All the missions
are still in flourishing operation, having
now under their influence alK)ut 1,200 of
the estimated 1,500 Eskimo along a coast
of alK)Ut 500 m. in length. The total
number of mission workers is alx)ut 30
(see Hind, l^abrador Peninsula.)
To these Moravian workers we owe a
voluminous body of Eskimo literature —
grammars, dictionaries, scriptural trans-
lations, hymns, and miscellaneous pub-
lications. Among the prominent names
are those of Bourquin, about 1880, author
of a grammar and a Bible history; Burg-
hard t, gospel translations, 1813; Erd-
mann, missionary from 1834 to 1872, a
dictionary and other works; Freitag, a
manuscript grannnar, 1839; and Kohl-
meister, St John's (iospel, ISIO. The
majority of these Moravian pu])lications
were issued anonymously.
In 1820 the Wixietfan Methodists^ through
Rev. Alvin Torry, l)egan work among the
immigrant Irotpiois of the Ontario reser-
vations, which was carried on with not-
able success for a long term of vears by
Rev. William Case. In 1823 Mr'( -ase ex-
tended his lalx)rstothe Missisauga, a band
of the ChipjKJwa n. of I^. Ontario. The
most important immediate result was the
conversion of Peter Jones (Kahkewakuo-
naby), a half-bree<l, who was afterward
ordaint^l, and became the principal mis-
sionary among his people and the more
remote Chippewa bands until his death
in 1856. He is known as the author of a
collection of hymns in his native language
and also a small * History of the Ojeb-
way Indians.* Another noted mission-
ary convert of this period was Shawun-
dais, or John Sunday. Another native
worker of a somewhat later period was
Rev. Henry Steinhauer, Chipj)ewa, after-
ward known as a missionary to the C-ree.
Still another pioneer laborer in the same
region was Rev. James pA'ans, afterward
also missionary to the Cree and inventor
902
MISSIONS
[B. ▲. S.
of a Cree syllabary. Contemporary with
the transfer of Evans and Stein hauer to
the Cree in 1840, Rev. George Barnley was
sent to establish a mission at Moose Fac-
tory, James bay, which, however, was
soon after abandoned. Beginning in 1851
Rev. G. M. McDougall established Meth-
odist mission stations among the Chip-
pewa along the n. shore of L. Superior,
at Garden Kiver and elsewhere, but after-
ward transferred his operations also to
Cree territory. In 1861-62 Rev. Thomas
Hurlburt, already a veteran worker, and
considered the most competent Chippewa
linguist in the Methodist mission, con-
ducted a monthly journal, ' Petaubun,' in
the language, at the Sami^ station.
According to the oflScial Canadian In-
dian Report for 1906, the Methodist In-
dians of E. Canada numbered 4,557 in On-
tario and 505 in Quebec, a total of 5,062,
none being reported for the other eastern
provinces. Those in Ontario included
nearly all of the "Chippewas of the
Thames," *' Mississaguas," and ** Iro-
quois and Algonquins of Watha,** all of
the 348 "Moravians of the Thames,** and
a considerable percentage of the "Six
Nations** on Grand r. Those in Quebec
province are chiefly Iroquois of the Oka,
St Regis, and Caughnawaga settlements. ,
Of other denominations, the same offi-
cial report enumerates 1,020 Baptists in
Ontario, almost entirely among the Six
Nations on Grand r., with 99 Congrega-
tionalists, 17 Presbyterians, and a total of
370 of all other denominations not pre-
viously noted. In the other eastern prov-
inces— Quebec, New Bmnswick, Nova
Scotia, and Prince Edward id.— there is
no representation.
The work of Rev. Silas T. Rand among
the Micmac of Nova Scotia stands in a
class by it«elf. Educated in a Baptist
seminary, he became a minister, but
afterward left that denomination to be-
come an independent worker. His at-
tention having been drawn to the neg-
lected condition of the Indians, he began
the study of the Micmac language, and
in 1849 succeeded in organizmg a mis-
sionary society for their special instruc-
tion. Under its auspices until it« disso-
lution in 1865, and from that time until
his death in 1889, he gave his whole
effort to the teaching of the Micmac and
to the study of their language and tradi-
tions. He IS the author of a Micmac dic-
tionarj' and of a collection of tribal myths
as well as of numerous minor works, re-
ligious and miscellaneous.
Canada, Central (Manitoba, Assini-
boia, Saskatchewan, Alberta, s. Kee-
watin).— In the great plains region
stretching from Hudson bay southwest-
ward to me Rocky mts., the former bat-
tle ground of Cree, Assiniboin, and Black-
feet, the Catholics were again the pio-
neers, antedating all others oy a full cen-
tury. According toBryoe, "the first
heralds of the cross** within this area
were the French Jesuits accompanying
Verendrye, who in the years 1731-1742
explored the whole territory from Mack-
inaw to the upper Missouri and the Sas-
katcrhewan, establishing trading posts
and making alliances with the Indian
tribes for the French government.
Among these missionaries the principal
were Fathers Nicholas (ionnor, who had
labored among the Sioux as early as 1727;
Charles Mesaiger, and Jean Aulneau,
killed by the same tribe in 1736. No at-
tempt was made during this period to
form permanent mission settlements.
Then follows a long hiatus until after
the establishment of the Red River col-
ony in the early part of the 19th century
by Lord Selkirk, who in 1818 brought
out from eastern Canada Fathers Severe
Dumoulin and Joseph Provencher, to
minister both to the colonists and to the
Indian and mixed-blood population of
the Winnipeg country. In 1822 Father
Provencher was made bishop, with ju-
risdiction over all of Ruperts land and
the Northwest territories, and carried on
the work of systematic mission organiza-
tion throughout the whole vast region
until his death in 1853, when the noted
Oblate missionary. Father Alexandre
Tach^, who had come out in 1845, suc-
ceeded to the dignity, in which he con-
tinued for many years.
The Catholic work in this central re-
gion has been carried on chiefly by the
Oblates, assisted by the Gray Nuns. The
first permanent mission was St Boniface,
established at the site of the present Win-
nipeg by Provencher and Dumoulin in
1816. St Paul mission on the Assiniboin
later l)ecame the headquarters of the noted
Father George Belcourt, who gave most
of his attention to the Sanlteux (Chip-
pewa of Saskatchewan region), and who
from 1831 to 1849 covered in his work a
territory stretching over a thousand miles
from E. to w. Fur his services in pre-
venting a serious uprising in 1833 he was
pensioned both by the Government and
by the Hudson's Bay Co. He is the au-
tnor of a grammatic treatise and of a
manuscript dictionary of the Saulteur
(Chippewa) language, as well as of some
minor Indian writings.
In the Cree field the most distinguished
names are those of Fathers Albert La-
combe (1848-90), Alexandre Tach^
(1845-90), Jean B. Thibault {ca. 1855-
70), Valentin y6^6vi\\e (1852-90), and
femile Petitot (1862-82), all of the Ob-
late order, and each, besides his religious
BULL. 80]
MISSIONS
903
work, the author of important contribu-
tionsito philology. To Father l^coinlw,
who founded two missions among the
Cree of the upper North Saskatchewan
and spent also much time with the
Blackfeet, we owe, besides several rt»li-
gious and text-book translations, a manu-
script Blackfoot dictionary and a monu-
mental grammar and dictionary of the
Cree language. Father \Y»j?r^ville la-
bored among Cree, Assiniboin, and the
remote northern Chipewyan, founded five
missions, and composed a manuscTipt
grammar, dictionary, and monojrraph of
the Cree language. Father Petitot's
earlier work among the Cree has been
overshadowed by his later great work
among the remote Athapascans and Es-
kimo, which will he noted hereafter.
Among the Blackfeet the most ])romi-
nent name is that of Father femile Ix^gal,
Oblate (1881-90), author of several lin-
guistic and ethnologic studies of the tril)e,
all in manuscript.
Episcopalian work in the central region
may properly be said to have begim with
the arrival of Rev. John Went, who was
sent out by the Church Missionary So-
ciety of England in 1820 as chaplain to
the Hudson's Bay Co*8 establishment
of Ft Garry (Winnipeg), on Red r. In
the three years of his ministrations, be-
sides giving attention to the white resi-
dents, he made missionary journeys
among the Cree and others for a distance
of 500 m. to the w. He was followed bv
Rev. David Jones in 1823, by Rev. Wni.
Cochrane in 1825, Rev. A. Cowley in
1841, and Rev. R. James in 1846, by
whom, tojrether, the tribes farther to the
N. were visited and brought within mis-
sion influence. In 1840 a Cree mission
at The Pas, on the lower Saskatchewan,
was organized by Henrv Budd, a native
convert, and in i84<) otf)er stations were
established among the same tril>e at I^c
la Ronge and I^c la Crosse, by James
Settee and James Bt»anly resjiectively,
also native converts. lii 1838 a large
bequest for Indian missions within Ru-
pert's Land, as the territory was then
known, had l)een made by Mr James
Leith, an officer of the Hudson's Bay Co.,
and generously increa8e<l soon after by
the company itself. With the assist-
ance ana the active effort of four mis-
sionary societies of the (*hurch, the work
grew so that in 1849 the territory was
erected into a bishopric, and oh the
transfer of jurisdiction from the Hudson's
Bay Co., to the Canadian government
in 1870 there were 15 Episcopal mis-
sionaries laboring at the various stations
in the regions stretching from Hudson
bay to the upper Saskatchewan, the most
important Ixemg those at York Factory
(Keewatin), Cuml)erland, and Carlton
(Saskatchewan).
Among the most noted of those in the
Cree country may be mentioned in chron-
ologic order, Rev. Archdeacon James
Hunter and his wife (1844-55), joint or
sei)arate authors of a numl>er of transla-
tions, including the Book of Common
Prayer, hymns, gospel extracts, etc., and a
valuable treatise on the Cree language;
Bishop Jolin Horden (1851-90), of Moose
Factory, York Factory, and Ft Churchill
stations, self-taught printer and binder,
master of the language, and author of a
numbi^r of gospt^ls, praver, and hymn
translations; Bishop William Bompas
(1865-90), best known for his work among
the more northern Athapascan tril)es;
Rev. W. W. Kirkbv (1852-79), author of
a Cr(»e 'Manual of I'rayer and Praise,'
but also iH'st known for his Athapascan
work; Rev. John Mackay, author of sev-
eral religious translations and of a manu-
script grammar; and Rev. E, A. Watkins,
author of a standard dictionary. Among
the Blatkft^t, Rev. J. W. Tims, who be-
gan his work in 1883, is a recognized
authority on the language, of which he
has published a grammar and dictionary
and a gospel translation.
MetlioiUHt ( Wesleyan) effort in the Cree
and adjacent territories l)epm in 1840.
In that year Rev. James Evans and his
Indian assistant, Rev. Henry Steinhauer,
l)oth already note<l in connection with
previous work in ( )ntario, were selecte<l for
the western mission, and set out together
for Norway House, a Hudson's Bay Co's
post at the n. end of L. Winnipeg.
Evans went on without stop to his des-
tination, but Steinhauer halted at I^ac
la Pluie (now Rainv I^ke) to act as inter-
preter to Rev. William Mason, who had
just reac^hed tliat spot, having been sent
out under the same ausj)ices, the Wes-
leyan Missionary Society of Jingland, by
arrangement with the Canadian bo<ly.
The joint control continucnl until 1855,
when the Canadian Methoilists assumed
full charge. Mr Evans had l)een ap-
pointed superintendent of Methodist work
tor the whole region, and after establish-
injrRossville mission, near Norway House,
as his central station, spent the next six
years until his health failed, in travers-
ing the long distances, foimding several
missicms, mastering the Cree language,
and devising for it a syllabary, which has
ever since l)een in suc'cessful use for all
literary purix)ses in the tril)e. His first
printing in the 8yllal)ary was done upon
a press of his own making, with types
cast from the sheet-lead lining of tea
boxes and cut into final shape with a
jackknife. In this primitive fashion he
printed many copies of the syllabary for
904
MISSIONS
[B. A. ■.
distribution among the wandering bands,
besides hymn collections and scripture
translations. ''By means of this sylla-
bary a clever Indian can memorize in an
hour or two all the characters, and in two
or thrt^ days read the Bible or any other
book in his own language" (MacLean).
In later years, the credit for this invention
was unsuccessfully claimed by some for
Rev. William Mason. Rossville for years
continued to be the principal and most
prosperous of all the Methodist missions
m the central region.
Rev. William Mason remained at Rainy
I^ke until that station was temporarily
discontinued in 1844; he was then sent to
Rossville (Norway House), where he was
stationed until 1854, when the mission
was abandoned by the W^esleyans. He
then attached himself to the Episcopal
church, with which he had formerly been
connected, and was ordained in the same
year, laboring thereafter at York Factory
on Hudson bay until his final return to
England in 1870, with the exception of 4
years spent in that country supervising
the publication of his great Bible trans-
lation in the Cree language, printed in
1861. This, with several other Scripture
and hymn translations, excepting a Gos-
pel of St John, was issued under the
auspices of the Episcopal Church Mis-
sionary Society. In his earlier linguistic
(Methodist) work he was aided by Rev.
Mr Sttnnhauer and John Sinclair, a half-
breed, but in all his later work, espe-
cially in the Bible translation, he had the
constant assistance of his wife, the edu-
cated half-breed daughter of a Hudson's
Bay Co. officer. Rev. Mr Steinhauer,
after some years with Mr Mason, joineil
Mr Evans at Norway House as teacher
and interpreter. He afterward tilled
stations at Oxford House (Jackson bay),
York Factory, Lac la Biche, White
Fish Lake, Victoria, and other remote
points, for a term of more than 40 years,
making a record as **one of the most de-
voted and successful of our native Indian
missionaries" (Young). Among later
Methodist workers with the Cree may be
mentioned Rev. John McDougall, one of
the founders of Victoria station. Alberta,
in 1862, and Rev. Ervin Glass, about 1880,
author oi several primary instruction
books and charts in the syllabary.
At the same time (1840) that Evans
and Mason were sent to the Cree, Rev.
Robert T. Rundle was sent, by the same
authority, to make acquaintance with
the more remote Blackfeet and Assiniboin
(**Stonies") of the upper Saskatchewan
region. Visiting stations were selected
where frequent services were conducted
by Rundle, by Rev. Thomas Woolsey,
who came out in 1855, and bv others, but
no regular mission was established until
begun by Rev. George M. McDougali at
Edmonton, Alberta, m 1871. In 1873 he
founded another mission on Bow r., Al-
berta, among theStonies (western Assini-
boin), and continued to aivide attention
between the two tribes until his accidental
death 2 years later. Other stations were
establishe<l later at Ft MacLeod and Mor-
ley, in the same territory. The most distin-
guished worker of this denomination
among the Blackfeet is Rev. John Mac-
Lean (1880-89), author of a manuscript
grammar and dictionary of the language,
several minor linguistic papers, *The
Indians: Their Manners and Customs'
(1889), and * Canadian Savage Folk'
(1896).
Presbyterian mission work was inaugu-
rated in 1865 by the Rev. James NisMt,
among the Cree, at Prince Albert mission
on the Saskatchewan. No data are at
hand as to the work of the denomination
in this region, but it is credited in the
official report with nearly a thousand
Indian communicants, chiefly among the
Sioux and the Assinil)oin, many of the
latter l)eing immigrants from the United
States.
According to the Canadian Indian Re-
port for 1956, the Indians of Manitoba,
Saskatchewan, Alberta, and the North-
west Territories, classified under treaties
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7, designated as Chip-
S3wa, Cree, Saulteaux, Sioux, Assiniboin,
lackfeet. Bloods, Piegan, Sarcee, Stonies,
and Chipewyan, are credited as follows:
Catholic, 5,633; Anglican (Episcopal),
4,789; Methodist, 3,199; Presbyterian,
1,073; Baptist, 83; all other denomina-
tions, 80; pagan, 5,324. Some 3,308 re-
mote northern Cree, under Treaty No. 8,
and 165 non-treaty Indians are not in-
clude<l in the estimate.
Canada, British Columbia (including
Vancouver id. and Metlakatla).— The
earliest missionary entrance into British
Columbia was made bv the Catholics in
1839. In 1838 the secular priests Demers
and Blanchet (afterward archbishop)
had arrived at Fort Vancouver, Washing-
ton, as already noted (see Columlna Re-
fion) , to minister to the employees of the
ludson's Bay Co. In the next year an
Indian mission was organized at Cowlitz,
with visiting stations along the shores of
Puget sd. , and Father Demers made a tour
of the upper Columbia as far as the Okin-
agan in British Columbia, preaching, bap-
tizing, and givinginstruction by means of a
pictograph device of Father Blanchet* s in-
vention, known as the ** Catholic ladder."
Copies of this * 'ladder" were carried by
visiting Indians to the more remote tribes
and prepared the way for later effort. A
second journey over the same route was
made by Father Demers in the next year,
and in 1841 he preached for the first time
BULL. 30]
MISSIONS
905
to a great gathering of the tribes on lower
Eraser r. In the following year, 1842, by
arrangement with the local Hudson's Bay
Co. officers, he accompanied the annual
supply caravan on its return from Ft
Vancouver, on the Columbia, to the re-
mote northern posts. On this trip, as-
cending the Columbia and passing over
to the Fraser, he visited successively the
Okinagan, Kamloops, Shuswap, and
Takulli or Carriers, before arriving at
their destination at Ft St James on Stuart
lake. Return was made in the following
spring, and on descending the Fraser he
found that the Shuswap had already
erected a chapel.
In the meantime de Smet and the Jes-
uits had arrived (see Columbia Region and
Interior Slates— Flatheads) in the Colum-
bia r^ion, and between 1841 and 1844
had established a chain of missions
throughout the territory, including three
in British Columbia, among the Kute-
nai, Shuswap, and Okinagan. De Smet
himself extendeil his visitations to the
headwaters of the Athabasca, while in
1846-47 Father John Nobili, laboring
among the upper tribes, penetrated to the
Babines on the lake of that name. The
most remote point visited was among the
Carriers, at Stuart Lake. In 1843 the first
Hudson Bay post had been established on
Vancouver la. at Camosun, now Victoria,
and the beginning of missionary work
among the Songish and the Cowichan was
made by the secular priest. Father John
Bolduc, already well known among the
Sound tribes, who had for this reason
been brought over by the officers in
charge to assist in winning the good will
of their Indian neighbors.
Owing to difficulty of communication
and pressing need in other fields, it was
found necessary to abandon the British Co-
lumbia missions, excei)t for an occasional
visiting priest, until the work was regu-
larly taken up by the Oblates about 1860.
Before 1865 thev had regular establish-
ments at New Westminster, St Marys,
and Okinagan, besides others on Vancou-
ver id. , and in that year founded St Joseph
mission near Williams lake, on the ui)per
Fraser, under Rev. J. M. McGuckin, first
missionary to the Tsilkotin tribe. Within
the next few years he extended his minis-
trations to the remoter Sekani and Skeena.
In 1873 the Stuart Lake mission was estab-
lished by Fathers Lejacq and Blanchet,
and in 1885 was placed in chai^ of Father
A. G. Morice, Oblate, the distinguished
ethnologist and author, who had already
mastered the Tsilkotin language in three
years* labor in the tribe. Aside from his
missionary labor proper, which still con-
tinues, he is perhaps best known as the
inventor of the Den^ syllabary, by means
of which nearly all the Canadian Indians
of the great Athapascan stock are now
able to read and write in their own lan-
guage. His other works include a Tsil-
kotin dictionary, a Carrier grammar, nu-
merous religious and miscellaneous trans-
lations, an Indian journal, scientific
papers, * Notes on the W^estern D^n^»s'
(1893), and a 'History of the Northern
Interior of British Columbia' (1904).
Father J. M. Le Jeune, of the same order,
stationed among the Thompson River
and Shuswap Indians since 1880, is also
noted as the inventor of a successful
shorthand system, by means of which
those and other cognate tribes are now
able to read in their own languages. He
is also the author of a number of religious
and text books in the same languages and
editor of a weekly Indian journal, tlie
'Kamloops Wawa,' all of which are
printed on a copying press in his own
stenographic characters. Another dis-
tinguished veteran of the same order is
Bishop Paul Durieu, since 1854 until his
recent death, laboring successively among
the tribes of Washington, Vancouver id.
(Ft Rupert, in Kwakiutl territory), and
Fraser r.
Episcopal work Ix^gan in 1857 with the
remarkable and successful missionary
enterprise undertaken by Mr William
Duncan among the Tsimshian at Metla-
katla, first in British Columbia and later
in Alaska. The Tsimshian at that time
were among the fiercest and most de-
graded savages ot the N. W. coast,
slaverjr, human sacrifice, and cannibal-
ism being features of their tribal system,
to which they were rapidly adding all
the vices introduced by the most de-
praved white men from the coasting ves-
sels. Moved by reports of their miser-
able condition Mr Duncan voluntarily
resigned a remunerative position in Eng-
land to offer himself as a worker in their
behalf under the auspices of the London
Church Missionary Society. He arrived
at Ft Simpson, n. coast of British Colum-
bia, in Oct. 1857, and after some months
si)ent in learning the language and mak-
ing acquaintance with the tribe, then
numl)ering 2,300, openeil his first school
in June, 1858. By courage and devotion
through danger and difficulty he built
up a civilized Christian body, which in
1860 he colonizeii to the number of about
340 in a regular town established at Met-
lakatla, an abandone<l village site 16 m.
s. of Ft Simpson. By systematic im-
provement of every industrial oppor-
tunity for years the town had grown to a
prosperous, self-supporting community of
1,000 persons, when, by reason of dif-
ficulties with the local bishop, upheld
by the colonial government; Mr Duncan
and his Indians were compelled, in 1887,
to abandon their town and improvements
906
MISSIONS
[B. A. K.
and seek asylum under United States
protection in Alaska, where they formed
a new settlement, known as New Metla-
katla, on Annette id., 60 m. n. of their
former home. The island, which is
about 40 m. long by 3 m. wide, has been
reserved by Congress for their use, and
the work of improvement and education
is now progressing as before the removal,
the present ])opulation being about 500.
The first Episcopal bishop for British
Columbia and Vancouver id. was ap-
pointed in 1859. In 1861 theRev. John B.
Good, sent out also by the London
society, arriveil at Esquimalt, near Vic-
toria, Vancouver id., to preach alike to
whites and Indians. At a later period
his work was transferred to the Indians
of Thompson and lower Fraser rs., with
headquarters at St Paul* s mission, Ly tton.
He has translated a large part of the
liturgy into the Thompson River (Ntlak-
yapamuk) language, besides being the
author of a grammatic sketch and other
papers. In 1865 Kincolith mission was
established among the Niska branch of
the Tsimshian, on Nass r., by Rev. R. A.
Doolan, and some years later another one
higher up on the same stream. Kitwin-
gach station, on Skeena r., was estab-
lished about the same time. In 1871
Rev. Charles M. Tate took up his resi-
dence with the Nanaimo on Vancouver
id., laboring afterward with the Tsim-
shian, Bellabella, and Fraser r. tribes.
In 1876 Rev. W. H. Collison began work
among the Ilaida at Masset, on the n.
end of the Queen Charlotte ids., and in
1878 Rev. A. J. Ilall arrived among the
Kwakiutl at Ft Rupert, Vancouver id.
Other stations in the meantime had been
established throughout the s. partTof the
province, chiefly under the auspices of
the Lcmdon Church Missionary Society.
The first ^ft'lhodist (Wesleyan) work
for the Indians of British Columbia was
begun in 1863 at Nanaimo, Vancouver
id., by Rev. Thomas Crosby, who at once
applied himself to the study of the lan-
guage with such success that he was soon
able to preach in it. In 1874 he trans-
ferred his labor to the Tsimshian at Port
Simpson, on the border of Alaska, who
had already l)een predisix>sed to Chris-
tianity by the work at Metlakatla and by
visiting Indians from the S. Other sta-
tions were established on Nass r. (1877)
and at Kitjimat in the Bellabella tribe.
Statistics show that the Methodist work
hasl)een i)articularly successful along the
N. W. coast and in portions of Vancouver.
There is no record of Presbyterian mis-
sion work, but some 400 Indians are oflS-
cially (^edited to that denomination along
the w. coast of Vancouver id.
According to the Canadian Indian Re-
port for 1906 the Christian Indians of
British Columbia are classified as follows:
Catholic, 11,270; Episcopal (Anglican),
4,364; Methodist, 3,286; Presbyterian,
427; all other, 147.
Canada, Northwest (Athabasca, Mac-
kenzie, Yukon, North Keewatin, Frank-
lin).— The earliest missionaries of the great
Canadian Northwest, of which Mackenzie
r. is the central artery, were the Catholic
priests of the Oblate order. The pioneer
may have been a Father Grollier, men-
tioned as the ** first martyr of apostle-
ship*' in the Mackenzie district and bur-
ied at Ft Good Hope, almost under the
Arctic circle. In 1846 Father Alexandre
Tach^, afterward the distinguished arch-
bishop of Red River^ arrived at Lac He Jl
la Crosse, a Cree station, at the head of
Churchill r., Athabasca, and a few
months later crossed over the divide to
the Chipewyan tribe on Athabasca r.
Here he established St Raphael mission,
and for the next 7 years, with the excep-
tion of a visit to Europe, divided his time
between the two tribes. In 1847 or 1848
Father Henry Faraud, afterward vicar of
the Mackenzie district, arrived among the
Chipewyan of Great Slave lake, with
wh6m and their congeners he continued
for 18 years. To him we owe a Bible
abridgment in the Chipewyan language.
In 1852 arrived Father Valentin V^r6-
ville, for more than 40 years missionary
to Cree, Assiniboin, and Chipewyan, all
of which languages he spoke fluently;
founder of the Chipewyan mission of St
Peter, on Caribou lake, Athabasca,
besides several others farther s.; and
author of a manuscript grammar and
dictionary of the Cree language, another
of the Chipewyan language, and other
ethnologic and religious papers in manu-
script. In 1867 Father I^urent Legofif ar-
rived at Caribou Lake mission, where he
was still stationed in 1892. He is best
known as the author of a grammar of the
Montagnais, or Chipewyan language,
published in 1889.
By far the most noted of all the Oblate
missionaries of the great Northwest is
Father Emile Petitot, acknowledged by
competent Canadian authority as **our
greatest scientific writer on the Indians
and Eskimos ' ' ( MacLean ) . In 20 years of
labor, beginning in 1862, he covered the
whole territory from Winnipeg to the Arc-
tic ocean, frequently making journeys of
six weeks' len^h on snowshoes. He was
the first missionary to visit Great Bear
lake ( 1866 ) , and the first missionary to the
Eskimo of the N. W., having visited them
in 1865 at the mouth of the Anderson, in
1868 at the mouth of the Mackenzie, and
twice later at the mouth of Peel r. In
1870 he crossed over into Alaska, and in
1878, compelled by illness, he returned
to the S., making the journey of some
BULL. 30]
MISSIONS
907
1,200 m. to Athabasca lake on foot, and
thence by canoe and portages to Winni-
peg. Besides writingsome paj)er8 relating
to the Cree, he is the author of numerous
ethnological and philosophical works,
dealing with the Chipew> an, Slav^, Hare,
Dog-rib, Kutchin, and fikimo tribes and
territory, chief among which are his
D^n^Dindji^ dictionary (1876) and his
'Traditions Indiennes' (1886).
Throughout the Mackenzie region the
Catholics have now. established regular
missions or visiting stations at every prin-
cipal gathering point, among the most
important being a mission at Ft Provi-
dence, beyond Great Slave lake, and a
school, orphanage, and hospital conducted
since 1875 by the Sisters of Charity at
Ft Chipewyan on Athabasca lake.
Episcopal effort in the Canadian North-
west dates from 1858, in which year Arch-
deacon James Hunter, already mentioned
in connection with the Cree mission,
made a reconnoitering visit to Mackenzie
r., as aresultof w^hichRev. W. W. Kirkby,
then on parish duty on Red r., was next
year appointed to that field and at once
took up his headquarters at the rt^mote
East ot Ft Simpson, at the junction of
iard and Mackenzie rs., 62° x., where,
with the assistance of the Hudson's Bay
Go's officers, he built a church and school.
In 1862, after several years* study of the
language, he descended the Mackenzie
nearly to its mouth and crossed over the
divide to the Yukon, just within the
limits of Alaska, preaching to the Kutchin
and making some study of the language,
after which he returned to Ft Simpson.
In 1869 he was appointed to the station
at York Factory, on Hudson bay, where
he remained until his retirement in 1878,
after 26 years of efficient service in Mani-
toba and the Northwest. He is the au-
thor of a number of religious translations
in the Chipewyan and Slav^ languages.
The work iSegun on the Yukon by
Kirkby was given over to Rev. (Arch-
deacon) Robert McDonald, who estab-
lished his headquarters at JSt Matthew's
mission on Peel r., Mackenzie district,
"one mile within the Arctic circle."
Here he devote<l himself with remarkable
industry and success to a study of the lan-
guage of the Takudh Kutchin, into which
he has translated, besides several minor
works, the Book of Common Prayer
(1885), asmallcollection of Hymns (1889),
and the complete Bible in 1898, all ac-
cording to a syllabic system of his own
device, by means of which the Indians
were enaoled to read in a few weeks. In
1865 Rev. Wm. C. Bom pas, afterward
bishop of Athabasca and later of Mac-
kenzie r., arrived from England. In the
next 25 years he labored among the (Chip-
ewyan, Dog-ribs, Beavers, Slave, and Ta-
kudh tribes of the remote Northwest, and
Kave some attention also to the distant
Eskimo. He is the author of a primer in
each of these languages, as well as in Oee
and Eskimo, together with a number of
gospel and other religious translations.
Another notable name is that of Rev. Al-
fred Garrioch, who began work in the
Beaver tribe on Peace r., Athabasca, in
1876, after a year's preliminary study at
Ft Simpson. He is tne founderof Unjaga
mission at Ft Vennilion, and author of
several devotional works and of a consid-
erable vocabulary in the Beaver language.
To a somewhat later period belong Rev.
W. D. Reeve and Rev. Spendlove, in the
Slave lake region. Among the j)rincii>al
stations are Ft Chipewyan on Athabasca
lake. Ft Simpson on the middle Macken-
zie, and Fts Macpherson and Lapierre in
the neighborhood of the Mackenzie's
mouth. Work has also been done among
the Eskimo of Hudson hay, chiefly by
Rev. Edmund Peck, who lias devised a
syllabarv for the language, in which he
has published several devotional transla-
tions, beginning in 1878. The greater
portion of the Episconal work in the (Cana-
dian Northwest has l)een under the aus-
pices of the Church Missionary Society of
London.
Greenland. — Greenland was first colo-
nized from Iceland in 985 by Scandinav-
ians, who became Christian about a. d.
1 (XX). The aboriginal i n h abitan ts were t he
Eskimo, with whom in thesucceeding cen-
turies the colonists had fretjuent hostile
encounters, but there is no record of any
attempt at missionary work. Some time
shortly before the year 15()0 the colony
became extinct, there being considerable
evidence that it was Anally overwhelme<i
by the Eskimo savages. In 1 721 the Norqe
Lutheran minister. Rev. Hans Egede, un-
der the auspices of the government of
Denmark, landed with his family and a
few other companions uiK)n the s. end of
the island, in the belief that some de-
scendants of the lost colony might vet be
in existence. Plnding no white inliabit-
ants, he turned his attention to the evan-
celization of the native Eskimo, and thus
became the founder l)oth of the (Jreen-
land mission and of the modern Green-
land settlement. A mission station which
was named (Jodthaab was established on
Baal r. on the w. coast, al)out 64° n., and
became the center of oi)erations, while
Egede was made bishop and superintend-
ent of missions. After some years of
hardship and discouragement the home
government was al)out to withdraw its
support, and it seemed as if the mission
would have to be abandoned, when, in
1733, the Morat*im)s volunteered their aid.
In the spring of that year three Moravian
missionaries. Christian David, and Mat-
908
MISSIONS
[B. A. ■.
thew and Christian Stach, arrived from
Denmark to cooperate with Egede, with
such good result that the principal work
finally passed over to that denomination,
by which it has since been continued.
Efgede in 1736 returned to Denmark to
establish at Copenhagen a special train-
ing seminary for the work. He died in
1758, leaving the succession in office to
his son, Rev. Paul Egede. The elder
Egede was the author of a * Description
of Greenland,' which has been translated
into several languages, besides several
scriptural works in Eskimo. His son,
Paul, accompanied his father on the first
trip in 1721, learned the language, and in
1734 l)egan the missionary work which he
continued to his death in 1789, having
been made bishop 10 years earlier. He
is the author of a standard Danish-Latin-
Eskimo grammar and dictionary, besides
a number of religious works in the lan-
guage and a journal of the Greenland mis-
sions from 1721 to within a year of his
death. Still another of the same family.
Rev. Peter Egede, nephew of the first mis-
sionary, was the author of a translation
of Psalms.
With the settlement of the country
from Denmark and the organization of
r^ular parishes the Lutheran missions
took on new life, special attention being
g'ven to the more northern regions,
odthaab remained the principal station,
and several others were established, of
which the most imi)ortant to-day are
Nugsoak on Disko bay, w. coast, and
Angmagsalik, al>out 66° n., on the e.
coast, the northernmost inhabited spot in
that direction. The friendly cooperation
between the two denominations seems
never to have l)een interrupted, the min-
isters in many cases sharing their labors
and results in common.
The Moravian work prospered. New
Hermhut, the first and most northerly
mission, was established in 1733; Licht-
enfels was founded 80 m. farther s. in
1758; 300 m. farther s. Lichtenau was
founded in 1774; then came Frederiksdal
in 1824, Umanak in 1861, and Igdlorpait
in 1864. In 1881 the missioYi force num-
bered 19 and the native membership
1,545. Since 1801 the whole Eskimo
population properly resident within the
Moravian mission area has been Chris-
tian, but others have since moved in from
the outlying territory. The work of civ-
ilization is nearly as complete for the
whole E. coast.
As the result of the literary labors of
nearly two centuries of missionary stu-
dents, together with a few educated na-
tives, the Eskimo literature of Greenland
is exceptionally voluminous, covering the
whole range of linguistics, Bible trans-
lations, hymn books, and other religious
works, school text-books, stories, and
miscellanies, besides a journal published
at the Godthaab station from 1861 to
1885. With so much material it is pos-
sible only to mention the names of the
principal workers in this field. For de-
tails the reader is referred to Pilling's
* Biblic^raphy of the Eskimo Language.'
In the Lutheran mission the most promi-
nent names are Egede, father and son,
Fabricius (1768-73); Janssen (period of
1850); Kjer (period of 1820); the Klein-
schmidts, father and son (1793-1840);
Kragh (1818-28); Steenholdt (period of
1850) ; Sternberg ( 1840-53) ; Thorhallesen
(1776-89); Wandall (1834-40), and Wolf
( 1 803-1 1 ) . In the Moravian list are found
Beck (died 1777); Beyer (period of 1750);
Brodersen (period of 1790); Konigseer
(period of 1780); Muller (period of 1840);
together with Cranz, author of the * His-
tory of Greenland and the Moravian
Mission,* first published in 1765.
In the four centuries of American his-
tory there is no more inspiring chapter of
heroism, self-sacrifice, and devotion to
high ideals than that afforded by the In-
dian missions. Some of the missionaries
were of noble blood and had renounced
titles and estates to engage in the work;
most of them were of finished scholar-
ship and refined habit, and nearly all
were of such exceptional ability as to
have commanded attention in any com-
munity and to have possessed themselves
of wealth and reputation, had they so
chosen; yet they deliberately faced pov-
erty and sufferings, exile and oblivion,
ingratitude, torture, and death itself in
the hop)e that some portion of a darkened
world might be made better through
their effort. To the student who knows
what infinite forms of cruelty, brutish-
ness, and filthiness belonged to savagery,
from Florida to Alaska, it is beyond ques-
tion that, in spite of sectarian limitations
and the shortcomings of individuals, the
missionaries have fought a good fight.
Where they have failed to accomplish
large results the reason lies in the irre-
pressible selfishness of the white man or
in the innate incompetence and unworthi-
ness of the people for whom they labored.
Consult: Aborigines Committee, Con-
duct of Friends, 1844; Bancroft, Histories,
Alaska, British Columbia, California, Ore-
gon, Washington, etc., 18ii86-^90; Bamum,
Innuit Language, 1901; Bressani, Rela-
tion, 1653, repr. 1852; Brinton, Lenape,
1885; California, Missions of, U. S. Sup.
Ct., 1859; Bryce, Hudson's Bay Co., 1900;
Catholic Bureau of Indian Missions, Re-
ports; Clark, Indian Sign Language, 1885;
Coues, On the Trail of a Spanish Pioneer,
1900; Cranz, History of the Brethren,
1780; DeForest, Indians of Connecticut,
BULL. 30]
MISSIONS MISSISA UG A
909
1851; Duflot de Mofraa, Expl. de POre-
gon, 1844; Dunbar, Pawnee Indians, 1880;
Eells, Ten Years, 1886; Engelhardt, Fran-
ciscans, 1897; Fletcher, Indian Education
and Civilization, 1888; Gookin, Christian
Indians, Archeeologia Americana, 1836;
Harris, Early Missions, 1893; Harvey,
Shawnee Indians, 1855; Hecke welder,
United Brethren, 1820; Hind, Labrador,
1863; Howe, Hist. Coll. Ohio, ii, 1896;
Jackson (1) Alaska, 1880, (2) Facts About
Alaska, 1903; Jesuit Relations, Thwaites
ed., 1896-1901; Jones, Ojebway Inds.,
1861; Krehbiel, Mennonites, 1898; Los-
kiel. United Brethren, 1794; Lossing, Mo-
ravian Missions, American Hist. Reconl,
1872; MacLean, Canadian Savage Folk,
1896; McCoy, Baptist Indian Missions,
1840; McDougall, George Millard McDou-
gall the Pioneer, 1888; Minnesota Hist.
Soc. Coll., I, 1872; Mooney, Myths of
Cherokee, 1900; Morice, Northern British
Columbia, 1904; Morse, Report, 1822;
Palfrey, New England, i, 1866; Parkman,
(1) Jesuits, 1867, (2) Pioneers, 1883; Pill-
ing, Indian Bibliographies (Bulletins of
Bur. Am. Eth.), 1887-91; Pitezel, Lights
and Shades, 1857; Riggs, Tah-koo Wah-
kan, 1869; Rink, Tales and Traditions
of Eskimo, 1875; Ronan, Flathead Indians,
1890; Ryerson, Hudson's Bay, 1855,
Shea, Catholic Missions, 1855; de Smet,
Oregon Missions, 1847; Stefdnsson in Am.
Antnrop., viii, 1906; Sutherland, Summer
in Prairie Land, 1881; Thompson, Mora-
vian Missions, 1890; Tucker, Rainl)ow in
the North, 1851; Wellcome, Metlakahtla,
1887; Whipple, Lights and Shadows, 1899.
(J. M.)
Missiianga (Chippewa: mhiy Marge,'
gdg or muk% *outlet (of a river or bay)' =
'large outlet,* referring to the mouth of
Missisau^ r. — Hewitt). Although this
Algonquian tril)e is a division or subtribe
of the Chippewa, having originally forme<l
an integral part of tlie latter, it has long
been generally treated as distinct. When
first encountered by the French, in
1634, the Missisauga lived about the
mouth of the river of the same name,
along the N..shore of L. Huron, and on
the adjacent Manitoulin id. Although so
closely allied to the Chippewa, they do
not appear to have been disposed to fol-
low that tribe in its progress westward,
as there is no evidence that they were
ever found in early times so far w. as
Sault Ste Marie, but appear to have clung
to their old haunts about L. Huron
and Georgian bay. Early m the 18th
century, influenced by a desire to trade
with the whites, they began to drift to-
ward the 8. E. into the region formerly
occupied by the Hurons, between L. Hu-
ron and L. Erie. Although they had de-
stroyed a village of the Iroquois near Ft
Frontenac about 1705, they tried in 1708 to
gain a passage through the country of the
latter, to trade their peltries with the
English. At this time a part or band was
settled on L. St Clair. About 1720 the
French established a station at the w.
end of L. Ontario for the purpose of
stimulating trade with the Missisauga.
Near the close of the first half of the
century ( 1746-50), having joined the Iro-
quois in the war against the French, the
Missisauga were compelled by the latter,
who were aided by the Ottawa, to
abandon their country, a portion at
least settling near the Seneca e. of L.
Erie. Others, however, appear to have
remained in tlie vicinity of their early
home, as a delegate from a Missisauga
town "on the north side of L. Ontario"
came to the conference at Mt Johnson,
N. Y., in June, 1755. As it is also stated
that they *M>el(mg to the Chippewyse
confe<lera('y, which chiefly dwell about
the L. Missilianac," it is probable that
** north side of L. Ontario" refers to
the shores of L. Huron. Being friendly
with the Iroquois at this time, they were
allowed to o<rupy a numlier of places in
the country from which the Hurons had
been driven. This is inferred in part
from Chauvignerie's report of 17Ii6, which
locates parts of the tribe at different points
on Missisauga r., Maniskoulin (Manitou-
lin?) id., L. St Clair, Rente, Toronto r.,
Matchitaen, and the w. cud of L. On-
tario. The land on which the Iro<|Uois
are now settled at Grand r., Ontario, was
bought from them. For tlie jmrpose of
sealing their alliance with the Iroquois
they were admitted as the seventh tril)e
of the Iroquois league in 1746, at which
date they were described as living in five
villages near Detroit. It is therefore
probable that those who went to live with
the Seneca first came to the vicinity of
Detroit and moved thence to w. New
York. The alliance with the Iroquois
lasted only until the outbreak of the
French and Indian war a few years later.
According to Jones (Hist. Ojebways),
as soon as a Missisauga ilied he was laid out
on the ground, arrayed in his l)est clothes,
and wrapped in skins or blankets. A grave
about 3 ft deep was dug and the corpse
interred with the head toward the w.
By his side were placed his hunting and
war implements. Thegrave was then cov-
ered, and above it poles or sticks were
placed lengthwise to the height of about
2 ft, over which birch-bark or mats were
thrown to keep out the rain. Immedi-
ately after the decease of an Indian, the
near relatives went into mourning by
blackening their faces with charcoal and
putting on the most ragged and filthy
clothing they possessed. A year was the
usual time of mourning for a husband,
wife, father or mother.
910
MI8SI88AUGA MI88I8SINEWA
.[B. A. 1
As the Missisauga are so frequently
confounded with the Chippewa and other
neighboring tribes who are closely con-
nected, it is difficult to make a separate
estimate of their numbers. In 1736 they
were reported to number 1,300, about 250
being on Manitoulin id. and Missisauga r.,
and the rest in the peninsula of Ontario;
in 1778 they were estimated at 1,250, liv-
ing chiefly on the n. side of L. Erie, and
in 1884 the number was given as 744. The
population was officially reported in 1906
as 810, of whom 185 were at Mud Lake, 87
at Rice Lake, 35 at Scugog, 240 at Alnwick,
and 263 at New Credit, Ontario. The
New Credit settlement forms a township
by itself and the Indian inhabitants have
often won prizes against white compet-
itors at the agricultural fairs. The New
Credit Indians (who left the Old Credit
settlement in 1847 ) are the most advanced
of the Missisauga and represent one of the
most successful attempts of any American
Indian group to assimilate the culture of
the whites. The Alnwick res. dates from
1830, Mud Lake from 1829, Scugog from
1842. Beldom, Chibaouinani, and Grape
Island were former settlements. See
Credit Indians, Maichedash.
Consult Chamberlain ( 1 ) Language of
the Mississagas of Skugog, 1892, and bib-
liography therein; (2) Kotes on the His-
tory, Customs and Beliefs of the Missis-
sagua Indians, Jour. Am. Folk-lore, i,
150,1888. (j. M. c.T.)
Aohsisaghecks.— Colden (1727) note in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hint., IV, 737, 1854. AchtUMgheos.— €olden in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 517, 1853. Aghsieta-
gichrone.— Doc. of 1723 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., V,
696, 1855. Aoeohisacronon.— Je8. Rel. 1649, 27, 1858
(Huron name). Assisagh.— Livingston (1701) in
N. Y. Doc.Col. Hist., iv, 899. 1854. Asaisagigroone.-
Livingston ( 1700) , ibid . , 737. Awechiaaehronon.—
Jes. Rel., Ill, index, 1858. Cheveux levM.^Sagard
( 1636) , Can. , i , 192, 1866. Oheveux releves.— Cham-
plain (1615) .CEuvres, iv,24, 1870. lahiaagekRoanu.-
Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 27, 1744 (Iroquois name) . Ma-
••-•aa-gee.— Jones, Ojebway Inds., 164, 1861 (proper
form). Massaaagues.— Macauley, N. Y., 11,249,1829;
Kaaaaaaugaa.— Morgan, League Iroq., 91, 1851.
Maaaasoiga.— Chapin (1792) in Am. State Papers,
Ind. Afif., I, 242, 1832. Maaaesagues.— Niles (ca. 1761)
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., v, 541, 1861. Kaaai-
nagues.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 127, 1816.
Mesaaagah.— Lindesay (1751) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hi8t.,vi, 706, 1855. Mesaagnea.— Drake, Ind. Chron.,
180, 1836. Meaaaguca.— Shirley (1755) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., VI, 1027, 1855. Kesaaaagaa.— Ft John-
son conf. (1757), ibid., vii, 259, 1856. MeauMa-
gie«.— Perkins and Peck, Annals of the West, 423,
1850. Kessaaagoes.— Procter (1791 ) in Am. State Pa-
pers, Ind. Aff., 1, 158, 1832. Mesaaaagaes.— Writer
of 1756 in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., Ists., vii, 123, 1801.
KeaaaaauguM.— Lincoln (1793), ibid., 3ds., v, 156,
1836. MeaMaaagaa.— Albany conf. (1746) in N. Y.
Doc.Col. Hist.,vi,322, 1855. Meaaaaaagnea.— Drake,
Bk. Inds., ix, 1848. Meaaaaaagnea.— Homann
Heirs map, 1756. Meaaeaagaa.— Lindesay (1751) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.. VI, 729, 1855. Meaaeaagnea
Drake. Bk.Inds.,bk. 5. 4,1848. Meaaeaago.— Procter
il791) in Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., l, 163, 1832.
[eaaeaaguea.— Colden (1727), Five Nations, app.,
175, 1747. Meaaeaaaguea.— Carver, Travels, map,
1778. Keaaeaaaquea.— Goldthwait (1766) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., X, 122, 1809. Keaainaguea.—
Boudinot, Star in the West, 107, 1816. Meaaiaa-
gaa.— Ibid., 100. Meaaiaagea.— Albany conf. (1746)
inN. Y. Doc.Col.Hist.,VI, 321, 1855. Meaaiaagaea.—
Vater, Mith. , pt. 3, sec. 3, 406, 1816. Meaaiaaugaa.—
Edwards (1788) in Ma88..Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., ix,
92, 180i. Meaaiaaugera.— Barton, New Views,
xxxlii, 1798. Keaaiaaagaa.— Albany conf. (1746)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vi, 322, 1855. Menaaaau-
ga.— Petition of 1837 in Jones, Ojebway Inds., 265,
1861. Kesaiaaaoger.— Adelung and Vater, Mithri-
dates, III, pt. 3, 343, 1816. Kioheaaking.— Jes. Rel.
1658, 22, 1858. Kiohiaagaek.— Ibid., 1648, 62. 1868.
Miaiaaga'a. —Johnson (1763) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., VII, 526, 1856. Miaiaagey.— Claus (1777),
ibid.,vin, 719, 1857. Kiaitaguea.— Lahontan, New
Voy.,i,map,1735. Miaaada.—Dobbs, Hudson Bay,
31, 1744. Miaaagea.— German Flats conf. (1770) in
N. Y. Doc.Col. Hist., viii, 229, 1857. Miaaaaagaa.—
Lindesay (1749), ibid., vi, 538, 1855. Kiaaaaago.—
Harris, Tour, 205, 1805. Miaaaaagu^.— Durant (1721)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 589, 1855. Kiaaaaaago.—
Rupp, West Pa. , 280, 1846. Kiaaaaaugaa. —Johnson
(1764) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 661, 1856. Mia-
aangeea.— Trader(1778) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
lllTseO, 1853. Miaaequeka.— Clinton (1745) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 281, 1855. Miaaeaagaa.- Ft John-
son conf. (1757), ibid.,vii, 259, 1856. Miaaeaagoea.—
Procter (1791) in Am. State Papers, Ind. Aff., i, 168,
1832. Miaaeaaguea.- Doc. of 1747 in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., VI, 391, 1855. Kiaaeaaquea.— Clinton
(1749), ibid., 484. Kiaaiagoa.— Johnson (1760),
ibid., VII, 434, 1856. Kiaainaaaguea.— Boudinot,
Star in the West, 127, 1816. Kiaaioaagaea.—
Quotation in Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson B.,
29, 1872. Miaaiqueoka.— Clinton (1745) in N.
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 276, 1855. Hiaaiaa-
gaea.— Mt Johnson conf. (1755). ibid., 975. Miaai-
aagea.— Coxe. Carolana, map, 1741. Miaaiaagia.—
Doc. of 1764 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., Vil, 641, 1856.
Kiaaiaagoa.— Canajoharie conf. (1759), ibid., 384.
Kiaaiaagttea.- Lahontan, New Yoy., i, 230, 1703.
Kiaaiaaguex.- Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist.
Am., IV, 224,1753. Miaaiaaguya.— Charlevoix,Voy.,
II, 40, 1761. Kiaaiaak.— Jes. Rel. 1672, 33, 1858.
Miaaiaakia.— Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist.
Am., II. 48, 1753. KisaiMuiue.— Clinton (1749) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v^, 484, 1855. Miaaiaa-
queea.— Colden (1751), ibid., 742. Miaaiaaugaa.—
Jones, Ojebway Inds., 208, 1861. Miaaiaangea.—
Carver, Travels, 171, 1778. Miaaiaaaga.— Mt John-
son conf. (1765) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., Vi, 976,
1855. Kiauaaageta.— Aigremont (1708), ibid., IX.
819, 1855. Kiaaiaaageyea.— Mt Johnson conf. (1755) ,
ibid., yi, 983^1855. Kiaaiaaagex.— Bacqueville de
la Potherie, Hist. Am., iv, 245, 1753. Miaaiaaagiea.—
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 143, 1855. Hiaaiaaa-
guaa.— Official form in Can. Ind. Aff. Miaaiaaa-
gue.— Jes. Rel. 1670, 79, 1858. Hiaaiaaaguraa.—
Beauchamp in Am. Antiq., iv, 329, 1882. Mia-
aiaaakia.— Du Chesneau (1681) in Margry, D^c,
II. 267, 1877. Kiaaiaaaquea.— Clinton (1749) in N.
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 486. 1865. Kiaaiaaaugera.—
Macauley, N. Y., ii, 250, 1829. Hiaaiaaaufea.—
Carver, Travels, 19, 1778. Wiaaiaaaugiea.— Keane
in Stanford, Compend. , 522, 1878. Miaaiaaangaea.—
Chauvignerie (1736} in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
III, 555, 1853. Miaaiaaguaa.— Macdonald in Can.
Ind. Aff. 1883, xiii, 1884 (misprint). Miaaito-
guea.— Lahontan. New Voy., I, 215, 1703. Moa-
aiaakiea.— McKenney and Hall, - Ind. Tribes, iii,
79, 1854. Kation de Boia.— Sagard (1636), Can., i.
190, 1866. Kaywaunaakaa-raunuh.— Macauley. N.
Y., II, 180, 1829 (the name here seems to refer to
the Missisauga). Kualca'hn. — Gatschet. Tusca-
rora MS., 1885 (Tu.scarora name). Oumiaagai.—
Jes. Rel. 1640, 34, 1858. Poila leu^.— Sagard (1686),
Can., I, 192, 1866. Siaaghroana.— Post (1758) in
Proud, Pa., ii, app., 113, 1798 (same?). Siaaiaa-
fiiex.— Jefferys, French Dom., pt. I, 17, 1761.
iaageduroann.— Weiser (1748) in Rupp, West Pa.,
app., 16, 1846. Twakanhahora.— Macauley, N. Y.,
II. 250, 1829. Wiaagechroanu.— Weiser (1748) in
Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 605, 1854. Ziaageeh- ^
roaan.- Weiser (1748) in Rupp, West Pa., app., 22,
1846. Ziaageohrohne.— Zeisberger MS. (German,
1750) in Conover, Kan. and Geneva MS., B. A. E.
Mississanga. See Massassauga.
HissisBinewa. A former important Mi-
ami village on the e side of the river of the
same name, at its jmiction with the
BULL. 30]
MISSISSIPPI TABLET MISSOURI
911
Wabash, in Miami co., Ind. It was
burned by the Americans in 1812, but
was rebuilt. The reservation was sold in
1834. (JM.)
naway.— Stickney (1812) in Am. State Pa-
(1. A^., I, 810, 1832. MlMiuinaway.— Har-
rison (1814) in Drake, Tecumseh, 159, 1856.
■iniBewa.— MiKHiKsinewa treaty (1826) in V. S.
Ind. Treat. , 496, 1873. KiMissuiewa Town. — Royce
in 18th Rep. B. A. E., Indiana map, 1899.
MiMlisippi tablet See Notched plates.
MiMogkonnog. Probably a former vil-
lage or band of the Nipiimc in central
Massachusetts. In 1671 tlie colony of Ply-
mouth raised a force awiinst the * * Missog-
konnog Indians.'' — Eliot (1671) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., VI, 201, 1800.
Miuonri ('great muddy,' referring to
Missouri r. ). A tribe of the Chi were group
of the Siouan family. Their name for
themselves is Niiitachi. According to
Gale the early form of the word Missouri
isAlgonquian, of thellHnoisdialect. The
most closely allie<l tribes are the Iowa and
the Oto. According to tradition, after hav-
ing parted from the Winnebago at Green
bay, the Iowa, Missouri, and Oto moved
westward to Iowa r., where the Iowa
stopped. The rest continued westward,
reaching the Missouri at the mouth of
Grand r. Here, on account of some dis-
pute, the Oto withdrew and moved farther
up Missouri r. Marquette's autograph
map of 1673, which is perhaps the earliest
authentic notice of the tribe, locates the
SemessSrit on Missouri r., apparentlv as
far N. as the Platte. Joutel (1687) ap-
pears to have been the first writer to use
the name Missouri in this form. It is
stated that Tonti met the tribe a day and
half's journey from the village of the
Tamaroa, which was on the Mississippi,
6 leagues below Illinois r. About the
beginning of the 18th century the French
found them on the left bank of the
Missouri, near the mouth of Grand r.,
and built a fort on an island near them.
They continued to dwell in this locality
until about 1800. Acconling to Bourg-
mont (Margry, IX^c, vi, 393, 1886) their
village in 1723 was 30 leagues below Kan-
sas r. and 60 leagues below the ])rin-
cipal Kansa village. About 1798 they
were conquered and dispersed by the
Sauk and Fox tribes and their allies.
Five or six lodges joined the Osage, two
or three took refuge with the Kansa, and
some amalgamated with the Oto, but they
soon recovered, as in 1805 Lewis and
Clark found them in villages s. of Platte
r., having abandoned their settlements on
Grand r. some time previously on ac-
count of smallpox. They were visited
again by an epidemic in 1823. Although
their number was estimated in 1702 at
200 families and in 1805 by I^wis and
Clark at 300 souls, in 1829, when they
were found with the Oto, they numbered
only 80. Having been unfortunate in a
war with the Osage, part of them joined
the Iowa, and the others went to the Oto
previous to the migration of the latter to
Big Platte r. In 1842 their village stood on
thes. bank of Platte r., Nebr. They accom-
panied the Oto when that tril)e removed
in 1882 to Indian Territory. There were
only 40 individuals of the tril)e remain-
ing in 1885. They are now ofhcially
classed with the Oto, together number-
ing 368 in 1905 underthe Oto school super-
intendent in Oklahoma. The gentes, as
given by Dors^^y ( 15th Rt^p. B. A. E., 240,
OEOROE BATES— MISSOURI
1897), were Tunanpin (Black l)ear), Ho-
tachi (Elk), and Cheghita (Eagle) or
Wakanta (Thunder-bird).
The Missouri joined in the following
treaties with t he Unite<i States : ( 1 ) Peace
treaty of June 24, 1817; (2) Ft Atkinson,
la., Sept. 26, 1825, regulating trade ami
relations with the United States; (3)
Prairie du Chien, Wis., July 15, 1830,
ceding lands in Iowa and Missouri; (4)
Oto village, Nebr., Sept. 21, 1833, ceding
certain lands; (5) Bellevue, upper Mis-
souri r., Oct. 15, 1836, ceding certain
lands; (6) Washington, Mar. 15, 1854,
ceding lands, with certain reservation;
(7) Nebraska City, Nebr., Dec. 9, 1854,
changing boundary of reservation.
Morgan (Beach, Ind. Miscel., 220, 1877)
used the term Missouri Indians to in-
912
MISTASSIN MITROFANIA
[B. A. B.
elude the Ponca, Omaha, Kansa, Qua-
paw, Iowa, Oto, and Missouri. These are
the Southern tribes of Hale (Am. Antiq.,
V, 112, 1883),andtheDhegihaandChiwere
groups of J. O. Dorsey . ( J. o. d. c. t. )
SmisMorite.— Tonti (1684) in Margrv, D^c, i, 695,
1876. Massoritet.— Ck)xe,Carolana,16,1741. Mas-
■orittM.— Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am., ii,
map, 1753. MaJMOuritM.— Hennepin^ew Discov.,
map, 1698. Messorites.— Ibid., 150. Xessourites.—
Coxe, Carolana, 19, 1741. Kisouris.— Imlay, W. Ter.
N. Am., 294, 1797. Xissiouris.— Harris, Voy. and .
Trav., II, map, 1705. Xissoori.— JefFerys, Am.
Atlas, map, 1776. Xissounta.— French. Hist, Ck)l.
La., 1, 82, 1846. Hissouria.— Irving, Ind. Sk., 1, 96,
1835. Xissouriana.— Jefferys, Fr. Dom. Am., pt.
I, 139, 1761. Missouriens.— Gass, Voy., 27, 1810.
Xissouries.— Lewis, Trav., 13, 1809. Xissouris.—
Joutel (1687) in Margry, D6e.,iii, 432, 1878. Kis-
■ourita.— Margry, D4c., i, 611, 1876. Xissourite.—
Jeflferys, Fr. Dom. Am., pt. 1, 137. 1761. Kissoury.—
La Harpe (1720) in Margry, D6c., Vl, 293, 1886.
Mistouryt.— Jefferys, Am. Atlas, map, 5, 1776.
Histuri.— D'Anville, Am4r. Septen. map, 1756.
Kissvrier.— Ottssefcld, Charte von Nord America,
1797. Missuris.— Jefferys, Fr. Dom. Am., pt. i,
map, 134, 1761. Xissurys.— Croghan (1759) quoted
by Rupp, W. Pa., 146, note, 1846. Misuris.—
Barcia, Fnsayo, 298, 1723. Musscovi.— Morse,
N. Am., map, 1776 (misprint). Ke-o-ge-he.—
Long Exped. RocltyMts., i,339, 1823. Heqiehe.—
Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., li, 127, 1836.
Ke-o-ta-oha.— Long, Exped. Rocky Mts., i, 339,
1823. He-u-cha-te.— Hamilton in Trans. Neb. Hist.
Soc., I, 48, 1885. He-tt-tach.— Ibid., 47. Heu-te-
che.— Maximilian, Trav., 507, 1843 (trans., 'those
that arrive at the mouth'). Kew'-dar-cha. —
Lewis and Clark, Discov., 15. 1806. Ke-yu-ta-ea.—
Hamilton in Trans. Neb. Hist. Soc., i, 47, 1885.
Nioticye.— Dorsey, Kansa MS. vocab., B. A.E., 1882
(Kansa name). Hi-u'-t'a-tci.— Dorsey in 15th
Rep. B. A. E., 240, 1897 (own name, <c=cA). Ni-ut'-
ati'.— Dorsey, Cegiha MS. Diet., B. A. E., 1878
(Omaha and Ponca name). Ouemettourit. —
Gale, Upper Miss., 209. 1867 (transliterated from
Marquette). SemeMSrit.— Marquette, map (1673)
in Shea, Discov., 268, 1852. Ou-missouri.— Theve-
not quoted by Shea, Discov., 268, 1852. Wa^aq^a.—
Dorsey, inf'n, 1883 (Osage name.) Wa-ju'-qd^i.—
Dorsey, Kwapa MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1891 (Qua-
paw name). WemeMouret.— Marquette translit-
erated by Shea, Discov., 268,1852.
Mistassin (from mistn-assinif *a great
ptone,' referring to a huge isolated rock in
L. Mistassini, which the Indians regarded
with veneration). An Algonquian tribe
that lived on L. Mistassini, Quebec. They
were divided by earlv writers into the
Great and the Little Mistassin, the
former living near the lake, the latter
farther s. i& the mountains. They first
became known to the French about 1640,
but were not visited by missionaries until
some years later. They were attacked by
the Iroquois in 1665, and in 1672 their
country was formally taken possession of
by the French with their consent. Al-
though spoken of by Hind in 1863 as rov-
ing in bands with Montagnais and Nas-
capee over the interior of Labrador, it
appears that in 1858 a portion of the tribe
was on the lower St Lawrence.
Very little has been recorded in r^ard
to their habits or characteristics. It is
recorded that when attacked by the Iro-
quois in 1665 they had a wooden fort,
which they defended successfully and
with great bravery. Their only myth
mentioned is that in regard to the great
rock in the lake, which they believed to
be a manito. (j. m. c. t.)
MatasMM.— Charlevoix (1721), Journal, i, letter
xi, 276, 1761. MattaMina.— Barton, New Views,
app. , 12, 1798. Xiiiasunt (PetiU).— La Tour, map,
1779 (misprint: the Grands Mistassins are cor-
recti V named). ][i88taa8ins.~Report of 1868 in
Hind, Lab. Penin. , i,12. 1863. Mittepnis.— McKen-
ney and Hall. Ind. Tribes, iii, 81, 1854. Kiitatia-
iouek— Jes. Rel. 1643, 38, 1858. Mittaiirenois.—
Memoirof 1706 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 791. 1856.
Histasirinins.— Jes. Rel. 1672, 55, 1858. Miatas-
sini.— Hind, Lab. Penin., i, 8. 1863. Mittaniiiai.—
Ibid., 272. Mistassins.— Bellin, map, 1755 (Grands
and Petits Mistassins). Kistassirinins.— Jes. Rel.
1672, 44, 1858. Mistissinnys.— Walch, map, 1806.
Kitchitamou.— Jes. Rel. 1640, 84, 1858. Xiistas-
sins.-Jes. Rel. 1676-7, LX, 244. 1900.
Mistanghchewangh. A former Chuma-
shan village at SajiJlarcos, 25 m. from
S^aia — Barbara, Cal.— Father Timeno
(1856) quoted by Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
May 4, 1860.
Miauii ( ^fV-»{ln ) . A former Kuitsh vil-
lage on lower Umpqua r., Oreg. — Dorsey
in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, iii, 231, 1890.
Mitaldejama. A former village, pre-
sumably Costanoan, connected with Sa%
Juan Bautista mission Cal. — Engelhardt,
Franciscans in Cal., 398, 1897.
Mitcheroka ( * knife ' ) . A division of the
Hidatsa.
Xa-etsi-daka.— Matthews, inf'n, 1885 (='8mall
knives'). Kit-ohe-ro'-ka. — Morgan, Anc. Soc., 159,
1877.
Mithlansmintthai ( Mt-gW'Us-m1.n-V gaV ) .
A former Siuslaw village on Siuslaw r.,
Oreg. — Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore.
Ill, 230, 1890.
Mitiling. See Kalopcding.
Mitline. A former village, presumably
Costanoan, connected with Dolored mis-
sion, San Francisco, Cal.
Matalans.— Humboldt, Kingdom of New Spain,
II, 345, 1811. Mitline.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Oct. 18, 1861.
Mitlmetlelch ( mnimelle^ltc) . A Squaw-
mish village community on Passage id.,
Howe sd., Brit. Col.— Hill-Tout in Rep.
Brit. A. A. S., 474, 1900.
Mitomkai Fomo. A name, usually ren-
dered Mtom^'-kai (from mato *big*, kai
* valley'), applied to the inhabitants of
Willits or Little Lake valley, Mendocino
CO., Cal. In the form Tomki it has been
used by the whites to designate a creek e.
of the range of mountains bordering Little
Lake valley on the e. Most of the Mi-
tomkai Pomo, locally known as Little
J,^kpa^ are now on Round Valley res.,
numbering, with the ** Redwoods," 114
in 1905. (s. A. B.)
Betumki.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4. S2d
€k)ng., spec, sess., 146, 1853. Bitomkhai.— A. L.
Kroeber, Univ. Cal. MS., 1903 (Upper Clear Lake
form of name). Little lakes.— Official form in
Indian Affairs Reports. Hi-toam' BaI P^mo. —
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 156, 1877.
Mitrofania. A Kaniagmiut Eskimo vil-
lage on Mitrofania id., s. of Chignik bay,
Alaska; pop. 22 in 1880, 49 in 1890.—
Petroff m 10th Census, Alaska, 28, 1884.
BULL. 30]
MITSUKWIC MIXED-BLOODS
913
Mitmkwie. A former Nisqualli village
''at the salmon trap on Squalli [Nisqualli]
r.," Washington.— Gibbs, MS. No. 248,
B.A.E.
Mittaabsent. A village of about 20
houses in 1676, situated on Pawtuxet r.,
7 or 8 m. above its mouth, in Provi-
dence or Kent co., R. I. It probably be-
longed to the Narraganset, but its chief
disputed theirclaim. — Williams (1676) in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., i, 71, 1825.
Mitttnlttik (MU'ts'td^-sak), A former
Yaquina village on the n. side of Yaquina
r., Or^, at the site of the present New-
port.—-Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in,
229, 1890.
Mitatia. A village of the Cholovone,
a division of the Yokutn, situated e. of
lower San Joaquin r., Cal. — Pinart, Chol-
ovone MS., B.A.E., 1880.
Miwok (*man'). One of the two di-
visions of the Moquelumnan family in
central California, the other being the
Olamentke. With a small exception in
Ibe w., the Miwok occupied territory
bdunded on the n. by Cosumnes r., on
the E. by the ridge of the Sierra Nevada,
on the s. by Fresno cr., and on the w. by
San Joaqum r. The exception on the
w. is a narrow strip of land on the e.
bank of the San Joaquin, occupied by
Yokuts Indians, beginning at the Tuol-
umne and extending northward to a
point not far from the place where the
San Joaquin bends to the w. The Miwok
are said by Powers to be the largest *' na-
tion** in California, and a man of any of
their tribes or settlements may travel from
the Cosumnes to the Fresno and make
himself understood without difficulty, so
uniform is their language. See Moquel-
\mnan. (j. c.)
Heewa.— Powers in Overland Monthly, x, 823, 1873-
Meewie.~Ibid. Heewoe.— Ibid. Hewaht.— Ind-
Aff. Rep. 1856. 244. 1857. Kiook.— Kingsley, Stand-
ard Nat. Hist., VI, 175, 1886. Mi'-wa,— Powers In
CJont. N. A. Ethnol., ill. 347, 1877. W-wi.— Ibid.
HP-wok.— Ibid. Muwa.— Merriam in Science,
N. 8., XIX, 914, June 17, 1904.
Mixam, Mizanno. See Mriksah.
Xized-bloods. To eauge accurately the
amount of Indian blood in the veins of
the w'hite (population of the American
continent and to determine to what ex-
tent the surviving aborigines have in
them the blood of their conquerors and
supplanters is impossible in the absence
of scientific data. But there is reason to
believe that intermixture has been much
more common than is generally assumed.
The Eskimo of Greenland and the Danish
traders and colonists have intermarried
from the first, so that in the territory im-
mediately under European supervision
hardly any pure natives remain. The
marriages (of Danish fathers and Eskimo
mothers) have been very fertile and the
Bull. 30—05 58
children are in man)r respects an im-
provement on the aboriginal stock, in the
matter of personal beauty in particular.
Accordingto Packard( Beach, Ind.Miscel.,
69, 1877) the last full-blood Eskimo on
Belle Isle str., I^brador, was in 1859 the
wife of an Englishman at Salmon bay.
The Labrador intermixture has been
largely with fishermen from Newfound-
land of English descent.
Some of the Algomjuian tribes of Can-
ada mingled considerably with the Euro-
peans during the French period, both in
the. E. and toward the interior. In
recent years certain French-Canadian
writers have unsuccessfully sought to
minimize this intermixture. In the Illi-
nois-Mit-isouri n^gion these alliances were
favored by the missionaries from the
b(»ginning of the 18th century. As early
as 1693 a member of the I^ Salle expedi-
ti(m niarrie<i the daughter of the chief of
the Kaskaakia. Few French families in
that part of the country are free from
Indian blood. The establishment of
trading posts at Detroit, Mackinaw, Du-
luth, etc., aided the fusion of races. The
spread of the activities of the Hudson's
Bay Conii>any gave rise in the Canadian
Northwest to a population of mixed-
bloods of considerable historic inijwr-
tance, the offspring of Indian mothers and
Scotch, French, and English fatliers.
Manitoba, at the time of its admission
intothedominion, had soiiielO,000 mixed-
bloods, one of whom, John Norquay,
afterward became premier of the Provin-
cial government. Some of the employees
of the fur companies who had taken
Indian wives saw their descendants flour-
ish in Montreal and other urban centers.
The tribes that have furnished the most
mixed- bloods are the Creeand Chippewa,
and next the Sioux, of n. w. Canada; the
Chippewa, Ottawa, and related tribes of
the great lakes; and about Green bay,
the Menominee. Toward the Mississippi
and beyond it were a few Dakota and
Blackfoot mixed-bloods. Harvard (Rep.
Smithson. Inst., 1879) estimated the total
number in 1879 at 40,000. Of these about
22,000 were in United States territory and
18,000 in Canada. Of 15,000 persons of I
Canadian-French descent in Michigan few J
were probably free from Indian blood.
Some of the French mixed-bloods wan-
dered as far as the Pacific, establishing
settlements of their own kind beyond the
Rocky mts. The first wife of the noted eth-
nologist Schoolcraft was the daughter of
an Irish gentleman by a Chippewa moth-
er, another of whose daughters married
an Episcopal clergvman, and a third a
French-Canadian lumberer. Although
some of the English colonies endeavored
to promote the intermarriage of the two
914 MIXED BLOODS MIXED SENEGAS AND SHAWNEES Ib.a.b.
races, the only notable case in Virginia
is that of Pocahontas (q. v.) and John
Rolfe. The Athapascan and other tribes
of the extreme N. W. have intermixed
but little with the whites, though there
are Russian mixed-bloods in Alaska. In
British Colum])iaand the adjoining parts
of the United States are to be found some
mixeci-bloods, the result of intermarriage
of French traders and employees with
native women. Some intermixture of
captive white blood exists among the
Apache, Comanche, Kiowa, and other
raiding tribes along the Mexican and
Texas border, the children seeming to
inherit superior industry. The Pueblos,
with the notable exception of the Lagunas,
have not at all favored intermarriage
with Europeans. The modern Siouan
tribes have intermarried to some extent
with white Americans, as some of them
did in early days with the French of
Canada. The h ive Civilized Tribes of
Oklahoma — Cherokee, Choctaw, Chicka-
saw, Creeks, and Seminole — have a large
element of white blood, some through
so-called 8(|uaw-men, some dating back
to British and French traders before the
Revolution. In the Cherokee Nation
especially nearly all the leading men for
a century have been more of white than
of Indian blood, the noted John Ross
himself being only one-eighth Indian.
Mooney (I9th Rep. B. A. E., 83, 1900)
considers that much of the advance in
civilization made by the Cherokee has
been "due to the intermarriage among
them of white men, chiefly traders of
the ante- Revolutionary period, with a
few Americans from the back settle-
ments.'* Most of this white blood was of
good Irish, Scotch, American, and Ger-
man stock. Under the former lawsof the
Cherokee Nation anyone who could prove
the smallest proportion of Cherokee blood
was rated as Cherokee, including many
of one-sixteenth, one-thirty-second, or less
of Indian blood. In 1905 the Cherokee
Nation numbered 36,782 citizens. Of
these, about 7,000 were adopted whites,
negroes, and Indians of other tribes, while
of the rest probably not one-fourth are
of even approximately pure Indian blood.
Some of the smaller tribes removed from
the E., as the Wyandot (Hurons) and
Kaskaskia, have not now a single full-
blood, and in some tribes, notaoly the
Cherokee and Osage, the jealousies from
this cause have led to the formation of
rival full- blood and mixed-blood fac-
tions. During the Spanish domination
in the s. e. Atlantic region intermix-
ture perhaps took place, but not much ; in
Texas, however, intermarriage of whites
and Indians was common. The peoples
of Iroquoian stock have a large admix-
ture of white blood, French and English,
both from captives taken during the wars
of the 17th and 18th centuries and by the
process of adoption, much favored by
them. Such intermixture contains more
of the combination of white mother and
Indian father than is generally the case.
Some English-Iroquois intermixture is
still in process in Ontario. The Iroquois
of St Regis, Caughnawaga, and other
agencies can hardly l)oast an Indian of
pure blood. According to the Almanach
Iroquois for 1900, the blood of Eunice
Williams, captured at Deerfield, Mass., in
1704, and adopted and married within
the tribe, flows in the veins of 125 de-
scendants at Caughnawaga; Silas Rice,
captured at Marlboro, Mass., in 1703, has
1,350 descendants; Jacob Hill and John
Stacey, captured near Albany in 1755,
have, respectively, 1,100 and 400 descen-
dants. Similar cases are found among
the New York Iroquois. Dr Boas (Pop.
Sci. Mo., xLv, 1894) has made an
anthropometric study of the mixed-
bloods, covering a large amount of dataf
especially concerning the Sioux and the
eastern Chippewa. The total numbers
investigated were 647 men and 408
women. As compared with the Indian,
the mixed-blood, so far as investigations
have shown, is taller, men exhibiting
greater divergence than women.
A large prof)ortion of negro blood ex-
ists in many tribes, particularly in those
formerly residing in the Gulf states, and
among tlie remnants scattered along the
Atlantic coast from Massachusetts south-
ward. The Five Civilized Tribes of Okla-
homa, having \yeen slaveholders and sur-
rounded by Southern influences, generally
sided with the South in the Civil war. On
being again received into friendly rela-
tions with the Government they were
compelled by treaty to free their slaves
and admit them to equal Indian citi-
zenship. In 1905 there were 20,619
of these adopted negro citizens in these
five tribes, besides all degrees of admix-
ture in such proportions that the census
takers are frequently unable to discrimi-
nate. The Cherokee as a body have re-
fused to intermarry with their negro citi-
zens, but among the Creeks and the Semi-
nole intermarriage has been very great.
The Pamunkey, Chickahominy, Marsh-
pee, Narraganset, and Gay Head rem-
nants have much negro blood, and con-
versely there is no doubt that many of
the broken coast tribes have been com-
pletely absorbed into the negro race.
See Croatan Indians^ Metis, Popular fal-
lacies, (a. p. c. j. m. )
Mixed Senecas and Shawnees. The for-
mer official designation of the mixed
band of Mingo (Seneca) and Shawnee
who removed from Lewistown, Ohio, to
the W. about 1833 (see Mingo). By treaty
BULL. 30]
MIXED SHOSHONES MOA PARI ATS
915
of 1867 the union was dissolved, the Sen-
eca joining the band known as * ' Seneca of
Sandusky.** and the Shawnee becoming a
distinct body under the name of **E§it-
ern Sha^'^nee." Both tribes were as-
signed reservations in the present Okla-
homa, where they still reside, numbering
101 and 366 respectively in 1905. ( j. m. )
Mixed Shoshones. Mixed bands of Ban-
nock and Tukuarika.— U. S. Stat, xviii,
158, 1875.
M'ketashshekakah ( }fa katawlnMnka-
'kdo, *big black chest,' referring to the
pig^nhawk. — VV. J.) The Thunder gens
of the Potawatomi, Sauk, and Foxes, q. v.
Ha'katewinethikaka*.— Wm. Jones, inf'n. 1906.
M'-ke-tash'-she-ki-kah'.— Morgan, Anc. Soc.. 167.
1877.
ITko {Ma^kwu, ' bear' ). A gons of the
Potawatomi, q. v.
Ma"kwa.— Wm. Jones, infn. 1«K)6. M'ko'.— Mor-
gan, Anc. Soc., 167, 1877.
ITkwa (Ma^'kira, M)ear'). A gens of
the Shawnee, n. v.
Ha'kwa.~Wm. Jones, infn, 1906. M' kwa.—
Morgan, Anc. Soc . 16«. 1H77.
^ Moacke. A division of the Tte, for-
merly roaming over s. Colorado and n.
New Mexico. In 1871 they were re-
ported to number 645; in 1903 the com-
bined Capote, Moache, and Wiminuche
on Southern IJte res. numbered 955.
The name **Taos Utes" was formerly ap-
plied to those Ute wlio temporarily en-
camped in considerable numlKjrs about
Taos pueblo, N. Mex. As these were
doubtless largely Moache, their synonyms
are included here, although the Capote,
Tabe^uache, and Wiminuche were evi-
dently also a part of them. See Ue,
The Moache joineil with other Ute
bands in the treaty of Washington, Mar.
2, 1868, affirming the treaty of Oct. 7,
1863, with the Tabeguache and defining
the boundaries of their reservation.
Maquaohe Utes.— Taylor in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4. 40th
Cong., spec. seas.. 10. 1867. Haquahache.— Dole in
Ind. Aff. Rep. 1864. 18, 1865. Maquoche UUhs.—
Davis, ibid , 135, 186d. Menaches.— Graves, ibid.,
886. 1854. Hofoachit— Villa-Sefior, Theatro Am.,
pt. 2, 413. 1748. Mohuaohe —Merri wether in Ind.
Aff. Rep. 1855, 186. 1856. Mohuache UUhs— Men -
wether in Sen. Ex. Doc. 69. 34th Cong., 1st sess ,
15. 1856 Hobuaobe Utes.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N.
Mex.. 665. 1889. Mohubaohet.— Bell. New Tracks
in N. Am., i, 108, 1869. Moquaches.— Archuleta
in ind. AfF Rep., 142, 1866. Mouuaohe Utes.—
Colyer. ibid . 1871. 191. 1872. Moache.— Ute treaty
(1868) in U. S. Ind. Treaties, Kappler ed.. ii. 990.
1904. Hoahuaobes.— Carson in ind. Aff. Rep. 1859,
342. 1860. Muares.— Orozco y Berra, Geog.. 59, 1864
(probably identical, although given as part of
Fbraon Apache). Taos.— Wilson (1849) in Cal.
Mess, and Corresp.. 185. 1850. Taos Indians.—
Cummings in Ind. Aff. Rep.. 160. 1866 (identified
with Moache). Taos Tutas.- Earn ham, Trav.
Californias, 371, 1844. Tao Tutas. -Earn ham
misquoted by Bancroft. Nat. Races, i, 465.
1882^ Taah-YuU— Burton, City of Saints, 578.
1861.
Moah (MdhuHiway *woir). A gens of
the Potawatomi, q. v.
H£hwaw*.— \Vm. Jones, Infn, 1906. Mo-&h'.—
Morgan, Anc. Soc., 167, 1877.
Moanahonga ('great walker'). An
Iowa warrior, known to the whites as Big
Neck, and called also hy his people
Winaugusconey ( ' Man not afraid to
travel'), l)ecau8e he was wont to take
long trips alone, relying on his own
prowess and prodigious strength. While
he was of lowly birth he was exceedingly
ambitious and contended for the honors
and dignity for which his courage and
address fitted him, but which his fellow
tribesmen were loth to accord, wherefore
he built a lodge apart from the rest and
collected about him a band of admirers
over whom he exercised the authority of
chief. Gen. Clark induced him and Ma-
haskah to go to Washington in 1824 and
there sign a treaty that purported to con-
vey to the United States for an annual
payment of $500 for 10 years the title of
all the lands of the Iowa lying within the
borders of Missouri. lie did not under-
stand the treaty, and after white settlers
had taken possession of a considerable
part of the Indian lands he set out in
1829 to visit St Louis for the purpose of
making complaint to Gen. Clark. A
party of whites encountered his company
of 60 men, made them all intoxicated, and
decamped with their horses, blankets,
and provisions. When they recovered
from their stupor one of them shot a hog
to satisfy their hunger. This provoked
the anger of the settlers, (>0 of wnom rode
up and commanded the Indians to leave
the country. Moanalu^nga then with-
drew his camp about 15 m. l)eyond the
state boundaj-y, as he supposed. When
the white party followe<l hnn he went out
to meet them with his pipe in his mouth
in sign of peace. As he extended his
hand in greeting the Iwrderers fired,
killing his brother at his side, and an
infant. The Indians flew to their arms
and, inspirtnl anew by the call for ven-
geance of Moanahonga's sister, who was
shot in the second volley, they drove the
whites from the field, although these ex-
ceeded their fighting men two to one.
The man who shot his sister Moanahonga
burned at the stake. The U. S. troops
were ordered out, and obtaining hostages
from.the Iowa returned to their barracks.
Moanahonga and several others of his
band were arrested and tried on a charge
of murder, but were acquitted. He culti-
vated friendly relations with the whites af-
ter this, but always went with blackened
face in sign of mourning, because, as he
said, he had sold the bones of his ances-
tors. About 6 years afterward he fell in
combat with a Sioux chief. See McKen-
ney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, i, 177-183,
1858.
Moapariats (Mo-a-pa-ri^-atSj * mosquito
creek people*). A oand of Paitlte for-
merly living in or near Moapa valley.
916
MOBILE — MOCCASIN
[B. A. B.
8. E. Nev., and numbering 64 in 1873. —
Powell in Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 50, 1874.
^ Mobile (meaning doubtful). A Musk-
hogean tnbe whose early home was prob-
ably Mauvila, or Mavilla, supposed to
have been at or near Choctaw Bluff on
Alabama r., Clark co., Ala., where De
Soto, in 1540, met with fierce opposition
on the part of the natives and engaged in
the most obstinate contest of the expedi-
tion. The town was then under the con-
trol of Tascalusa (q. v. ) probably an Ali-
Immu chief. If, as ip probable, theMobil-
ian tribe took part in this contest, they
must later have moved farther s., as they
were found on Mobile bay when the
French began to plant a colon v at that
point about the year 1700. Wishing pro-
tection from their enemies, they obtamed
permission from the French, about 1708,
to settle near Ft Louis, where space was
allotted them and the Tohome for this
purpose. Little 4s known of the history
of the tribe. In 1708 a large body of
Alibamu, Cherokee, Abihka, and Ca-
tawba warriors descended Mobile r. for
the purpose of attacking the French and
their Indian allies, but for some unknown
reason contented themselves with de-
stroying a few huts of the Mobilians.
The latter, who were always friendly to
the French, appear to have been chris-
tianized soon after the French settled
there. In 1741 Coxe wrote that the chief
city of the once great province of Tasca-
luza, **Mouvilla, which the English call
Maubela, and the French Mobile, is yet
in being, tho* far short of its former
grandeur." At this date the Mobilians
and Tohome together numbered 350 fam-
ilies. Mention is made in the Mobile
church registers of individual members
of the tribe as late as 1761, after which
they are lost to history as a tribe. For
subsistence they relied almost wholly on
agriculture. Clay images of men and
women and also of animals, supposed to
be obi^ts of worship by this people, were
found by the French.
The so-called Mobilian trade language
waa a corrupted Choctaw jargon used for
the purposes of intertribal communica-
tion among all the tribes from Florida
to Louisiana, extending northward on the
Mississippi to about the junction of the
Ohio. It was also known as the Chicka-
saw trade language. (a. s. g. c. t.)
Mabile.— Ranjel quoted byHalbert in Trans. Ala.
Hist. Soc., 111,68, 1899. KanilU.— Harris, Voy. and
Trav., I, 808, 1705 (misprint). MaouiU.— La Salle
(ca. 1682) in Margry, Die, ii, 197, 1877. Maubela.—
Coxe, Carolana, 26, 1741 . Maubila.— French, Hist.
Coll. La., II. 247, 1875. MaubUe.— Ibid., ni. 192,
1851. MaubUeans.— Ibid.. 170. Maabiliaiu.— Char-
levoix, Nouv. France, ii. 273, 1761. Mauvila.— Gar-
cilasso de la Vega (1540), Fla., 146, 1728. Mauvil-
iant.— French, Hist CoU.La., in, 192,1852. Mauvil-
iena.- Charlevoix, Nouv. France, ii, 308, 1761.
Mavila.- Biedma (1544) in French, Hist. Coll. La.,
II, 102, 1850. Maviliaiu.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
11, 34, 1852. Mavilla.-Gentleman of Elvas (1557)
in French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 156, 1850. Mobelunt.—
Boudlnot, Star in the West, 127, 1816 (or Mouville) .
Mobilas.— Barcia, Ensayo, 813, 1728. MobUe.— P6-
nicaut (1699) in French, Hist. Coll. La., n. s., i,
43, 1869. Mobileans.— La Harpe, ibid., in, 20, 84,
1851. Mobilians.— Jefferys, French Dom. Am., i,
165, 1761. Mobiliens.— P^nicaut (1702) in Margry.
D4c.. V, 425, 1883. Mouvill.— Le Page du Pratz.
Hist. La., Eng. ed., 309, 1774. Mouvilla.— Coxe,
Carolana, 24. 1741. Mouville.— Boudinot, Star in the
West, 127, 1816 (or Mobeluns). Movila.— Barcia,
Enaayo, 335, 1723. Movill.— Barton, New Views,
Ixix,* 1798. Mowill.— Jefiferys, French Dom. Am.,
I, 162, 1761.
Hocama (*on the coast'). A former
Timucua district and dialect, probably
about the present St Augustine, Fla.
Mocama.— Pareja {ca. 1614) quoted .by Gatschet in
Am. Philos. Soc. Proc., xvi, 627, 1877. Moscama.— >
Brinton, Floridian Penin., 135, 1859.
Moccasin. The soft skin shoe of the
North American Indians and its imita-
tions on the part of the whites. The word,
spelled formerly also moccason^ is derived
from one of the eastern Algonquian dia-
lects: Powhatan (Strachey, 1612), mock-
asin^ mawhcamn; Massach uset ( Eliot, ante
1660), mohkisson, mohhissin; JSarr^nset
(Williams, 1643), mocussin; Micmac,
m^cumn; Chippewa, maArmn. It came into
English through Powhatan in all proba-
bility, as well as through Massachuset.
'The latter dialect has also mokus or mokis,
of which the longer word seems to be a
derivative. Hewitt suggests that it is
cognate with makak^ * small case or box '
(see ifocwc^'). After the moccasin have
been named moccasin-fish (Maryland
sunfish), moccasin-flower or moccasin-
plant (lady's-slipper, known also as In-
dian's shoe), moccasin-snake or water-
moccasin (Ancwtrodon pi8civorus)f the up-
land moccasin (A. atrofuscus). In some
parts of the South the term *moccasined*
IS in colloquial use in the sense of intoxi-
cated, (a. f. c.)
With the exception of the sandal-
wearing Indians living in the states along
the Mexican boundary, moccasins were
almost universally worn. The tribes of
s. E. Texas were known to the southern
Plains Indians as ** Barefoot Indians,**
because they generally went without foot-
covering, only occasionally wearing san-
dals. The Pacific coast Indians also as
a rule went barefoot, and among most
tribes women did not customarily wear
moccasins. There are two general types
of moccasins— those with a rawhide sole
sewed to a leather upper, and those with
sole and upper consisting of one piece of
soft leather with a seam at the instep and
heel. The former belongs to the Eastern
or timber tribes, the latter to the Western
or plains Indians. The Eskimo have soled
footwear. The chief causes influencing
this distribution are the presence or ab-
sence of animals furnishing thick rawhide,
thecharacterof trails and travel, and tribal
The boot or legging moccasin,
BULL. 30]
MOOaOONNEKONCK MOCTOBI
917
worn from Alaska to Arizona and New
Mexico, is still commonly a part of the
woman's costume, and among most of the
Pueblos the legging jjortion is a white-
tanned deerskin to which the moccasin is
attached, the skin being wrapped neatly
and methodically around the calf of the
leg and secured by means of a cord. Dif-
ferences in cut, color, decoration, toe-
piece, inset-tongue, vamp, heel-fringe,
ankle-flaps, etc., show tribal and envi-
ronmental characters and afford means of
identification. Among the Plains tribes
the decoration of moccasins presents a
wide range of symbolism, and since this
part of the costume has b^n less modified
by contact with whites than other gar-
ments, it affords valuable material for the
study of symbolic art.
The materials used in making mocca-
sins are tanned skins of the larger mam-
mals, rawhide for soles, and sinew for
sewing. Dyes, pigments, quills, beads,
cloth„ buttons, and fur are applied to the
moccasin as decoration. Many tribes
make moccasins to be specially worn in
ceremonies, and a numh^r of tribes also
employ their footwear in a guessing game
known as the '* moccasin game.**
Great ingenuity was often displave<l in
cutting moccasins from a single piece of
dress^ hide, the most complicated pat-
tern being found among the Klamath.
The northern Athapascan pattern has a
T-shaped seam at the toe and heel, while
in the Nez Perce ty|)e the seam is along
one side of the foot' from the great toe to
the heel. In the moccasin of the Plains
Indians the upper is in one piece and is
sewed to a rawhide sole.
Consult Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist, xvii, pt. 3, 1905; Gerard in Am. An-
throp., IX, no. 1, 1907; Goddard in Univ.
of Cal. Pub., Am. Archaeol. and Ethnol.,
I, 1903; Kroeber in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat.
Hist., xviii, pt. 1, 1904; Mason (1) in
Smithson. Rep. 1886, pt. 1,205-238, 1889,
(2) in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1894, 239-593,
1896; Morgan, League Iroquois, ii, 1904;
Shufeldt in Proc. Nat. Mus. 1888, 59-66,
1889; Stephen in Proc. Nat. Mus. 1888,
131-136, 1889; Willoughby in Am. An-
throp., IX, no. 1, 1907; Wisslerin Trans.
13th Internat. Cong. Am., 1905. (w.h.)
Hochgonnekonck. A village on Long
Island, N. Y., in 1643, probably near the
present Manhasset— Doc. of 1643 in N.
Y. Doc. Col. Hist, XIV, 60, 1883.
Hochicani {mochic 'tortoise', cahui
•hill*: * hill of the tortoise,* in allusion to
theshapeof a hill in the vicinity of the set-
tlement. — Buelna ) . The pri nci pal settle-
ment of the Zuaque, who speak or spoke
the Tehueco and Vacoregue dialects of
Cahita; situated on the e. bank of Rio
Fuerte, about lat. 26° 10^, n. w. Sinaloa,
Mexico. The settlement is now civilized.
Mochieahuy.— Orozco y Berra, Geog., 332, 1864.
Moohioaui.— Riba8(1645) in Bancroft, Nat. Races, i.
608, 1882. Mochicohuy.— Ibid., map. Motsohica-
huz.— Kino, map (1702) in StocJilein, Neue Welt-
Bott, 1726.
Mochilagna. An Opata pueblo visited
by Coronado in 1540; situated in the val-
ley of the Rio Sonora, n. w. Mexico, doubt-
less in the vicinity of Arizpe. Possibly
identical with one of the villages later
known by another name.
Mochila.— Castafieda {ca. 1565) in Ternaux-Com-
pans, Voy., ix, 158, 1838 (misprint). MoobUagua.—
Castafieda in 14th Rep. B. A. E., 515, 1896.
Mocho (El Mocho, Span. : * thecropi)ed,
shorn, mutilated*, so called because he
had lost an ear in a fight). An Apache,
celebrated in manuscript narratives per-
taining to Texas in the 18th century. He
wascaptured by theTonkawa, but because
of his eloquence and prowess was elevated
to the chiefship of that tribe on the death
of its leader during an epidemic in 1777
or 1778. With the Spaniards El Mocho
had a bad reputation. When he became
chief the governor connived to get rid of
him, to effect which Mezieres bribed his
rivals to allure him to the highway lead-
ing to Natchitoches, under the promise
of presents when he should arrive there,
and nmrder him, but this plot failed, and
Mezieres and the governor were obliged
to conciliate him. Finally, in 1784, at the
instigation of the government, he was
killed. (n. E. B. )
Mochopa. An Opata pueblo of Sonora,
Mexico, and the seat of a S|)ani8h mission
founded l)etween 1678and 1730, at which
latter date the population had become
reduce<l to 24. It was abandoned be-
tween 1764 and 1800, owing to Apache
depredations.
Machopo.— Davila, Sonora HiRt6rico, 317, 1894.
Mochop.— Hamilton, Mexican Handbook, 47. 18H3.
Mochopa.— Orozco y Berra. Geog.. 343. 1864. 8. Ig-
nacio Mochopa.— Sonora matenales (1730) quoted
by Bancroft, No. Mex. States, i, 514, 1884.
Mocock. See MocucL
Moctobi. A small tril)e formerly resid- r^
ing in s. Mississippi. They are men-
tioned by Iberville, in 1699, as living at
that time on Pascagoula r., near the Gulf
coast, associated with the Biloxi and
Paskagula, each tribe having its own vil-
lage (Margry, mc.,iv, 195, 1880). Sau-
vole, who was at Ft Biloxi in 1699-1700,
speaks of the ** villages of the Pascobou-
las, Biloxi, and Moctobi, which together
contain not more than 20 cabins. ' * Noth-
ing is known respecting their language,
nor has anything more been ascertained
in regard to their history, but from their
intimate relations with the Biloxi it is
probable they l)elonged to the same
(Siouan) linguistic stock. The name
Moctobi appears to have disappeare<l
trora Indian memory and tradition, as
repeated inquiry among the Choctaw
and Caddo has failed to elicit any knowl-
edge of such a tribe. What seems to be a
918
MOCUCK — MODOC
[B. A. E.
justifiable supposition, in the absence of
further knowledge, is that the three or four
small bands were the remnants of a larger
tribe or of tribes which, while making their
way southward, had been reduced bv war,
pestilence, or other calamity, and had
been compelled to consolidate and take
refuge under the Choctaw. Consult
Mooney, Siouan Tribes of the East, Bull.
B. A. E., 1894. See Capinans.
Mootobi.— Sauvole (1700) in MaiKn', D6c., iv, 451,
1880. Moctoby.— Iberville (1699), ibid., 195. Moelo-
bitei.— Gayarr^, La., 66, 1851. Mouloubis.— Iber-
vUle (1699) in French, Hist. Coll. La., ii, 99, 1875.
Hocnck. Defined by Bartlett (Diet,
of Americanisms, 399, 1877) as "a term
applied to the box of birch bark in
which sugar is kept by the Chippewa
. Indians.** In the forms makak, mocock,
mocucky mowkov'kf mukuk, the word is
known to the literature of the settlement
of Canada and the W. in the early years
of the 19th century, and is now in use
among the English-speaking people of
the maple-sugar region about the great
lakes, and among the Canadian French
as macaque. A trader in Minnesota in
1820 (cited by Jenks in 19th Rep. B. A. E.,
1103, 1900) speaks of **a mocock of sugar,
weighing about 40 pounds." The word
is derived from md*kaky which in the
Chippewa and closely related Algonquian
dialects signifies a bag, box, or other like
receptacle of birch-bark. (a. f. c.)
>^ Modoc (from Mdatokniy * southerners*).
A Lutuamian tribe, forming the southern
division of that stock, in s. w. Oregon. The
Modoc language is practically the same
as the Klamath, the dialectic differences
being extremely slight. This linguistic
identity would indicate that the local
separation of the two tribes must have
been comparatively recent and has never
been complete. The former habitat of
the Modoc included Little Klamath lake,
Modoc lake, Tule lake. Lost River valley,
and Clear lake, and extended at times as
far E. as Goose lake. The most impor-
tant bands of the tribe were at Little Kla-
math lake, Tule lake, and in the valley
of Lost r. Frequent conflicts with white
immigrants, in which both sides were
guilty of many atrocities, have given the
tribe an unfortunate reputation. In 1864
the Modoc joined the Klamath in ceding
their territory to the United States and re-
moved to Klamath res. They seem never
to have been contented, however, and
made persistent efforts to return and
occupy their former lands on Lost r.
and its vicinity. In 1870 a prominent
chief named Kintpuash (q. v.), commonly
known to history as Captain Jack, led
the more turbulent portion of the tribe
back to the California border and ob-
stinately refused to return to the res-
ervation. The first attempt to bring
back the runaways by force brought on
the Modoc war of 18f2-73. After some
struggles Kintpuash and his band re-
treated to the lava-beds on the California
frontier, and from Jan. to Apr., .1873,
CHIKCHIKAM LUPATKUELATKO (" SCAR-FACED CHARLEY")—
MODOC
successfully resisted the attempts of the
troops to dislodge them. The progress
of the war had been slow until April of
WINEMA (toby riddle) — MODOC
that year, when two of the peace commis-
sioners, who had been sent to treat with
the renegades, were treacherously assas-
sinated. In this act Kintpuash played
BULL. 30]
MOENKAPI MOHAVE
919
the chief part. The campaign was then
poshed with vigor, the Modoc were finally
dispersed and captured, and Kintpuash
ana 6 other leaders were hanged at Ft
Klamath in Oct., 1873. The tribe was
then divided, a part being sent to Indian
Ter. and placed on the Quapaw res. , where
they had diminished to 56 by 1905. The
remainder are on Klamath res., where
they are apparently thriving, and num-
bered 223 in 1905.
The following were the Modoc settle-
ments so far as known: Agawesh, Chaka-
wech, Kalelk, Kawa, Keshlakchuish,
Keuchishkeni, Kumbatuash, I^ush, Na-
koshkeni, Nushaltkagakni, Pashka,
Plaikni, Shapashkeni, Sputuishkeni, Stu-
ikishkeni, Waisha, Wachamshwash, Wel-
washkeni, Wukakeni, Yaneks, and Yula-
lona. (l. f.)
AigspalomA.— Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii,
St. i.xxxiii, 1890 (Sahaptin name for all Indians on
[lamath res.and vicinity), la-la-cas.— Meacham,
Wigwam and War-path, 291, 1876 (original name).
Lntm^wi.— Gatschet, op. eit., xxxiv (name given
byapftrt of the Pit River Indians). Lutuam.—
Qatschetln Mag. Am. Hist., i, 165, 1877. Lutuami.—
Curtln, IlmawiMS. vocab., B. A. E., 1889 (Ilmawi
name). Hadoe.—Ind.AfF. Rep. 1867. 71, 1868. Ka»'-
U.— Dor8ey,KwapaMS.vocaD., B. A. E., 1891 (Qua-
ptkwname). Hoadoe.— Ind. AfT. Rep. 1864, 11, 1865.
Moahtockna.— Taylorin Cal. Farmer, June 22, 1860. ■
KJataldsli.— Gatschet in Ck)nt. N. A. Ethnol., ii,
pt II, 216. 1890 (variation of Mu'dokish) . Moatok-
gisli.— Ibid. Moatokni.— Ibid, (own name). Mo-
dankt.— Wright (1853) in H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 34th
Cong., 3d sess., 28, 1857. Modoc.— Palmer in Ind.
Afr. Rep., 471, 1854. Mo-docka.— Ibid.. 470. Mo-
do6«.— Tajior in Cal. Farmer, June 22, 1860 (mi.s-
print). Modok.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol..
111,262.1877. Mo'dokish.— Gatschet in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., II. pt. II, 216, 1890. Mo'dokni.— Ibid. ]own
name). Modook.— Ind. AfT. Rep., 221, 1861. Mowa-
tak.— Gatschet in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., li, pt. i,
xxxiv, 1890 (Sahaptin name). Mfi'atokni.— Ibid.,
pt. 2, 216. Pla&ni.— Ibid., pt. 1. xxxv (collective
lor Modoc, Klamath, and Snakes on Sprague r.).
Pv&iai.— Ibid. (Yreka Shasta name). Saidoka.—
Ibid. (Shoshoni name).
Hoenkapi (* place of the running
water'). A small settlement about 40
m. N. w. of Oraibi, N. e. Ariz., occupied
during the farming season by the Hopi.
The present village, which consists of two
irregular rows of one-story houses, was
built over the remains of an older settle-
ment— apparently the Rancheria de los
Grandules seen by Ofiate in 1604. Moen-
kapi is said to have been founded within
the memory of some of the Mormon pio-
eers at the neighboring town of Tuba
City, named after an old Oraibi chief.
It was the headquarters of a Targe milling
enterprise of the Mormons a number of
years ago. (f. w. n.)
Ooneaba.— Garc^ (1775-76) quoted by Bancroft,
Ariz. and N. Mex., 137,395.18^. Moencapi.— Coues.
Qarc^ Diary, 393, 1900. MoM-kopi.— Mlndelefl in
8th Rep. B. A. E., 14, 1891. Moqui oonoave.— Ibid.
Moyenoo^.— BourlEe, Moquis of Arizona. 229, 1884.
Mnabe.— Ibid. Mvienkapi.— Voth. Trad, of the
Hopi, 22, 1905 (correct Hopi form). Munqui-con-
cabe.— Garcte (1776) , Diary, 393. 1900. Muqui oon-
eaba.— Ibid., 394-395 (Yavapai form). Bancheria
de losOaadules.— Ofiate (1604) in Doc. In^., xvi.
276, 1871 (apparently identical).
Mogg. An Abnaki chief. He had long
been sachem of the Norridgewock and had
been converted to Christianity bv Pt^re
RAle when the English settlers in Elaine,
in order to make good their title to terri-
tory which the Abnaki declared they had
not parted with, began a series of attacks
in 1722. (^ol. Westbrook in the first ex-
pedition found the village deserted and
l)urned it. In 1724 the English surprised
the Indians. The killing of R^le and
many of the Indians, the desecration of
the church, etc., left a blot on the honor
of the colonists (Drake, Bk. Inds., 312,
1880). In the fight fell Mogg and other (
noted warriors. Whittier's poem * * M(x?g )
Megqne" recounts the story. iSee 3iii- \
sions.' ( A. F. c. )
MogoUon ( from the mesa and mountains
of the same name in New Mexico and
Arizona, which in turn were named in
honor of Juan Ignacio Flores Mogollon,
governor of New Mexico in 1712-15). A
subdivision of the Apache that formerly
ranged over the Mogollon mesa and mts.
in w. New Mexico and e. Arizona (Ind.
Aff. Rep., 380, 1854). They were asso-
ciated with theMimbrefiosatthe Southern
Apache agency, N. Mex., in 1868, and at
Hot Springs agencv in 1875, and are now
under the Ft Apache and San Carlos res.,
Ariz. They are no longer otticially recog-
nized as Mogollones, and their number is
not separately reporte<l. (f. w. ii.)
Be-ga'-k61-kixin.— ten Kate, Svnonymie, .'i, 18W.
Mogall.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1867. 12, 1868. Mogal-
lones.— Browne. Apache Country, 290, 1869. Mo-
goffones.— Ind. Aff. Rep.. 380. 1854. MoeoU.— Ibid.,
1867, 193, 18(». Mogollon.— Ibid., 1857. 289, 1858.
MogoUone.— Ibid., 1858, 206. Mogoyonet.— Ibid..
1856, 181, 1857.
Mohanet. An Indian settlement of the
colon)' of Pennnylvania, on the e. branch
of the Su.^quehanna, prolmbly Iroquois. —
Alcedo, Die. Geog., in, 225, 1788.
Moharala ( Mo-har-iV-ld, * big bird' ) . A
subdivision or clan of the Delawares. —
Morgan, Anc. Soc, 172, 1877.
Mohave ( from hamok * th ree ' , avi 'moun-
tain'). The mo.**t j)Oi)ulous and war-,
like of the Yunian tril)es. Since known
to history they appear to have lived
on l)oth sides of the Rio Colorado,
though chiefly on the e. side, l>etween
the Needles (whence their name is de-
rived) and the entrance to Black canyon.
Ives, in 1857, found only a few scattered
families in Cottonwood valley, the bulk
of their number being below Hardy ville.
In recent times a body of Chemehuevi
have held the river between them and
their kinsmen the Yuma. The Mohave
are strong, athletic, and well developed,
their women attractive; in fact, Ives
characterized them as fine a people phy-
sically as any he had ever seen. They
are famed for the artistic painting of their
bodies. Tattooing was universal, but
920
MOHAVE
[B. A. E.
confined to small areas on the skin.
According to Kroeber (Am. Anthrop., iv,
284, 1902) their art in recent times con-
sists chiefly of crude painted decorations
MOHAVE MAN. (am. MuS. NAT. HIST.)
on their pottery. Though a river tribe,
the Mohave made no canoes, but when
necessary had recourse to rafts, or balsas,
made of bundles of reeds. They had no
large settlements, their dwellings being
scattered. These were four-sided and
low, with four supporting posts at the
center. The walls, which were only 2
or 3 ft high, and the almost flat roof were
formed of brush covered with sand.
Their granaries were upright cylindrical
structures with flat roofs. The Mo-
have hunted but little, their chief reli-
ance for food being on the cultivated
products of the soil, as com, pumpkins,
melons, beans, and a small amount of
wheat, 'to which they added mesquite
beans, mescrew, piiion nuts, and fish to
a limited extent. They did not practise
irrigation, but relied on the inundation
of the bottom lands to supply the needed
moisture, hence when there was no over-
flow their crops failed. Articles of skin
and bone were very little used, materials
such as the inner bark of the willow,
vegetable fiber, etc., taking their place.
Pottery was manufactured. Baskets were
in common use, but were obtained from
other tribes.
According to Kroeber, ' * there is no full
gentile system, but something closely akin
to it, which may be called either an in-
cipient or a decadent clan system. Cer-
tain men, and all their ancestors and
descendants in the male line, have only
one name for all their female relatives.
Thus, if the female name hereditary in
my famil)r be Maha, my father's sister,
my own sisters, my daughters (no matter
how great their number), and my son's
daughters, will all be called Maha. There
are about twenty such women's names,
or virtual gentes, among the Mohave.
None of these names seems to have any
signification. But according to the my tlis
of the tribe, certain numbers of men
originally had, or were given, such names
as Sun, Moon, Tobacco, Fire, Cloud, Coy-
ote, Deer, Wind, Beaver, Owl, and others,
which correspond exactly to totemic clan
names; then these men were instracted
by Mastamho, the chief mythological
being, to call all their daughters and
female descendants in the male line by
certain names, corresponding to these
clan names. Thus the male ancestors of
all the women who at present bear the
name Hipa, are believed to have been
originally named Coyote. It is also said
that all those with one name formerly
lived in one area, and were all considered
related. This, however, is not the case
now, nor does it seem to have been so
within recent historic times." Bourke
(Jour. Am. Folk-lore, ii, 181, 1889) has
recorded some of these names, called by
him gentes, and the totemic name to
which each corresponds, as follows : Hual-
ga (Moon), 0-cha (Rain-cloud), Ma-ha
(Caterpillar), Nol-cha(Sun), Hipa (Coy-
MOHAVE woman. (am. MUS. NAT. HIST.)
ote), Va-had-ha (Tobacco), Shul-ya
(Beaver), Kot-ta (Mescal or Tobacco),
Ti-hil-ya (Mescal), Vi-ma-ga (a green
plant, not identified), Ku-mEul-ha (Oca-
BULL. 30]
MOHAVE — MOHAWK
921
tilla or Iron Cactus) , Ma-li-ka ( unknown ) ,
Mus (Mesquite), Ma-si-pa (Coyote).
The tribal or^nization was loose,
though, as a whole, the Mohave remained
quite distinct from other tribes. The
chieftainship was hereditary in the male
line. Their dead were cremated. The
population of the tribe in 1775-76 was con-
servatively estimated by Garc^s (Diary,
443, 1900) at 3,000, and by Leroux, about
1834 ( Whipple, Pac. R. R. Rep., in, 1856),
to be 4,000; but the latter is probably
an overestimate. Their number in 1905
was oflficially given as 1,589, of whom 508
were under the Colorado River school
superintendent, 856 under the Ft Mohave
MOHAVE FAMILY GROUP
school superintendent, 50 under the San
Carlos acency, and about 175 at Camp
McDowell, on the Rio Verde. Those
at the latter two points, however, are
apparently Yavapai, commonly known
as Apache Mohave.
No treaty was made with the Mohave
respecting their original territory, the
United States assuming title thereto. By
act of Mar. 3, 1865, supplemented by Ex-
ecutive orders of Nov. 22, 1873, Nov. 16,
1874, and May 15, 1876, the present Col-
orado River res., Ariz., occupied by Mo-
have, Chemehuevi, and Kawia, was
established.
Pasion, San Pedro, and Santa Isabel
have been mentioned as rancherias of the
Mohave. (h. w. h. f. w. h.)
Amaoabos.— Zarate-Salmeron {ca. 1629), RelaoioD,
in Land of Sunshine, 105, Jan. 1900. Amaoava.-^
Ibid., 48, Dec. 1899. A-mac-ha-ves.— Whipple in
Pac. R. R. Rei)., in, pt. 3, 16, map, 1856. Ama-
juaguas.— Dunot de Mofras, Voyages, i, 338,
1844. Amahuayas.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Mar.
21, 1862. Amajabas.— Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex.,
545, 1889. Amapavas.— Bancroft, Hist. Cal., ii, 332,
1885. A-moo-ha-ve.— Whipple in Pac. R. R. Rep.,
Ill, pt. 3, 102, 1856 (own name). Amohah.— Zeit-
schrift f. Ethnologie, 378, 1877 (after 18th cen-
tury source). Amojaves.— Cremony, Life Among
the Apaches, 148, 1868. Amoyami.— Hoffman in
Bull. Essex Inst., xvii,83, 1885. Ainoxawi.— Ibid.
Amu-ohaba.— Smith (1827) in Zeitschr. f. Ethnol-
ogie, 378, 1877. Dil-x^iay'.— White, Apache Names
of Ind. Tribes, MS., B. A. E., 1, n. d. ('Red soil
with red ants': Apache name). Hamoekhavet. —
Ind AfT. Rep. 1857, 302, 1858. Hamo«khavf — ten
Kate, Reizen in N. A., 130, 1885. Hamok£ba.—
Ctorbusier, MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1885. Eamokavi.—
Thomas, Yuma MS. vocab., B.A. E.,1868. Ham-
oke-avi. — Ibid . Hamukahava. — Ibid . i/ar-dil-
ihay. — White, Apache Names of Ind. Tribes.
MS., B. A. E., 1, n. d. ('Red soil with red ants':
Apache name). Hatilshe.— White in Zeiuschr. f.
Ethnologie, 370,1877 (Apache name for Mohave,
Yuma, and Tonto). Hokwats.— Ibid, ('weav-
ers': Ute and Paiute name). I-at— Simpson,
Exped. Great Basin. 474. 1859 ('elegant fellows':
Paiute name). Jamajabas.— Font, MS. Diary, 56,
Dec. 7, 1775 (or Soyopas). Jamajabt.— Garc^s
(1775-76), Diary, passim, 1900. Jamajaa.— Kern
in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iv, 38, 1854. Jamalaa.—
Hinton. Handbook to Arizona, 28, 1878. Hac-hi-
vca.— Whipple in Pac. R. R. Rep., in, pt. 3. 16, map,
1856. Kao-ba-via.— Ibid., pt. 1, 110. Haqave.—
Froebel. Seven Years' Travels. 511, 1859. Ma ha
08.— Whipple, Exped. from San Diego, 17. 1851.
Majaboa.— Soc. Geogr. Mex., 504. 1869. Hajave.—
Tolmie and Dawson, Comp. Vooabs., 128, 1884.
Hohahve.— Brenchley, Journ. to Great Salt Lake,
II, 441, 1841. Mohave.— Ibid. Mohavi.— Bartlett,
Pers. Narr., ii, 178, 1^54. Mohawa.— Pattie, Pers.
Narr.. 93, 1833. Mohawe.— Mollhausen, Journ. to
Pacific. I. 46, 1858. Mojaoea.— Bourke, Moquis of
Ariz., 118, 18W. Mojaria.— Ind. Afif. Rep., 109, 1866.
Mojaur.— Ibid., 94. Mojave.— Brenchlev, Journ.
to Great Salt Lake, ii, 441, 1841. Mokhabaa.— Cor-
busier in Am. Antiq., viii. 276, 1886 (Mohaves,
or). Molxavea.— Burton (1856) in II. R. Ex. Doc.
76, 34th Cong., 3d seas.. 116. 1857. Moyave.-
Haines. Am. Indian, 153. 1888. Kaka'-it— ten
Kate, Synonymic, 4, 1884 (Hma and Papago
name). Sojropaa.— Font, MS. Diary, 56, Dec. 7,
1775 (Jamajaoas, or). Tamigaba.— Sctioolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, in, 298, 1853 (misprint of Garc^^s'
' Jamajabs' ). Tamaaabea.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
May 11, 1860 (misprint from Carets). Tamaaaba.—
Forbes, Hist. Cal., 162, 1839. Td-na-ma-a.— Bourke
in Jour. Am. Folk-Lore, ii, 185, 1889 (own name
"before they came to the Colorado river"). Wah
muk a-hah'-ve.— Ewing in Great Divide, 204, Dec.
1892 (tran.s.' dwelling near the water'). Wamak-
a'va.— Cushing, inf'n (Hava.supai name). Wibu'-
kapa.— Gatachet, infn (Yavapai name). Will
idabapa,— White in Zeitschr. f. Ethnol., 371, 1877
(Tulkepaya name). Tamagaa.— Mayer. Mexico,
II, 38, 1853. Yamajab.— Garc4s (1776) misquoted by
Bancroft, Ariz, and N. Mex., 395, 1889. Tamaya.—
Pike, Expeditions, 3d map, 1810.
Hohawk (cognate with the Narraganset
Mohowaiiuck^ *they eat (animate) things/
hence * man-eaters'). The most easterly
tribe of the Iroquois confederation. They
called themselves Kaniengeliaga, '{Hjople
of the place of the flint.*
In the federal council and in other
intertribal assemblies the Mohawk sit
with the tribal phratry, which is form-
ally called the **Three Elder Brothers"
and of which the other members are the
Seneca and the Onondaga. Like the
Oneida, the Mohawk have only 3 clans,
**
922
MOHAWK
[B. A. E.
namely, the Bear, the Wolf, and the
Turtle. The tribe is represented in the
federal council by 9 chiefs of the rank of
roianer (see Chiefs), being 3 from every
clan. These chief ships were known bv
specific names, which were conferred witn
the office. These official titles are Tek-
arihoken, Haienhwatha, and Satekarih-
wate, of the first group; Orenrehkowa,
Deionhehkon, and Sharenhowanen, of
the second group; and Dehennakarine,
Rastawenserontha, and Shoskoharowa-
nen, of the third group. The first two
groups or clans formed an intratribal
phratry, while the last, or Bear clan
group, was the other phratry. The people
at all times assembled by phratries, and
each phratrj^ occupied a side of the coun-
cil fire opposite that occupied by the other
phratry. The second title in the forego-
mg list has been Anglicized into Hiawatha
(q. v.).
From the Jesuit Relation for 1660 it is
learned that theMohawk, during a period
of 60 years, had been many times both at
the top an<l the bottom of the ladder
of success; that, being insolent and war-
like, they had attacked the Abnaki and
their congeners at the e., the Conestoga
at the 8., the Hurons at the w. and n.,
and the Algonquian tribes at the n. ; that
at the close of the 16th century the Al-
gonkin had so reduced them that there
apjjeared to be none left, but that the re-
mainder increased so rapidly that in a
few years they in turn had overthrown
the Algonkin. This success did not last
long. The Conestoga waged war against
• them so vigorously for 10 years that for
the second time the Mohawk were over-
thrown so completely that they appeared
to be extinct. About this time (?1614)
the Dutch arrived in their country, and,
being attracted by their beaver skins,
they furnished the Mohawk and their
congeners with firearms, in order that .
the pelts might be obtained in greater
abundance. The purpose of the Dutch
was admirably served, but the possession
of firearms by the Mohawk and their con-
federates rendered it easy for them to
conquer their adversaries, whom they
routed and filled with terror not alone
by the deadly effect but even by the
mere sound of these weapons, which
hitherto had been unknown. Thence-
forth the Mohawk and their confederates
became formidable adversaries and were
victorious most everywhere, so that by
1660 the conquests of the Iroquois con-
federates, although they were not numer-
ous, extended over nearly 500 leagues of
territory. The Mohawk at that time num-
bered hot more than 500 warriors and
dwelt in 4 or 5 wretched vilk^es.
The accounts of Mohawk migrations
previous to the historical period are
largely conjectural. Some writers do not
clearly differentiate between the Mohawk
and the Huron tribes at the n. and w.
and from their own confederates as a
whole. Besides fragmentary and un-
trustworthy traditions little that is defi-
nite is known re«irding the migratory
movements of the Mohawk.
In 1603, Champlain, while at Tadousac,
heard of the Mohawk and their country.
On July 30, 1609, he encountered on the
lake to which he gave his own name a
party of nearly 2O0 Iroquois warriors,
under 3 chiefs. In a skirmish in which
he shot two of the chiefs dead and
wounded the third, he defeated this
party, which was most probably largely
Mohawk. Dismayed by the firearms of
the Frenchman, whom they now met for
the first time, the Indians fled. The
Iroquois of this party wore arrow-proof
armor and had both stone and iron
hatchets, the latter having been obtained
in trade. The fact that in Capt. Hen-
dricksen's report to the States General,
Aug. 18, 1616, he says that he had
** bought from the inhabitants, the Min-
quaes [Conestoga], 3 persons, being peo-
ple belonging to this company,*' who
were ** employed in the service of the
Mohawks and Machicans," giving, he
says, for them, in exchange, ** kettles,
beads, and merchandise,** shows how
extensively the inland trade was carried
on between the Dutch and the Mohawk.
The latter were at war with the Mohe-
gan and other New England tribes with
only intermittent pericSs of peace. In
1623 a Mohegan fort stood opposite Cas-
tle id. in the Hudson and was ** built
against their enemies, the Maquaes, a
powerful people.'* In 1626 the Dutch
commander of Ft Orange (Albany), and
6 of his men, joined the Mohegan in an
expedition to invade the Mohawk coun-
try. They were met a league from the
fort by a party of Mohawk armed onlv
with bows and arrows, and were defeated,
the Dutch commander and 3 of his men
being killed, and of whom one, probably
the commander, was cooked and eaten
by the Mohawk. This intermittent war-
fare continued until the Mohegan were
finally forced to withdraw from the upper
waters of the Hudson. They did not
however relinquish their territorial rights
to their native adversaries, and so in 1630
they began to sell their lands to the
Dutch. The deed to the Manor of Rens-
salaerwyck, which extended w. of the
river two days* journey, and was mainly
on the E. side of the river, was dated in
the year named. In 1637 Kilian Van
Renssalaer bought more land on the e.
side. Subsequently the Mohegan became
the friends and allies of the Mohawk,
their former adversaries.
BULL. 30]
MOHAWK
923
In 1641 Ahatsietari, a noted Huron
chief, with only 50 companions, attacked
and defeated 300 Iroquois, largely Mo-
hawk, taking some prisoners. In t he pre-
ceding summer he had attacked on L.
Ontano a number of large canoes manned
by Iroquois, probably chiefly Mohawk,
and defeated them, after sinking several
canoes and killinganumberof their crews.
In 1642, 11 Huron canoes were attacked
•on Ottawa r. by Mohawk and Oneida
warriors about 100 m. above Montreal.
In the same year the Mohawk captured
Father Isaac Jogues, two French com-
panions, and some Huron allies. They
took the Frenchmen to their villages,
where they caused them to undergo the
most cruel tortures. Jogues, by the aid of
the Dutch, escaped in the following year;
but in 1646 he went to the Mohawk to
attempt to convert them and to confirm
the peace which had been made with them.
On May 16, 1646, Father Jogues went to
the Mohawk as an envoy and returned to
Three Rivers in July in good health. In
September he again started for the Mo-
hawk country to establish a mission there;
but, owing to the prevalence of an epidem-
ic among the Monawk, and to the failure
of their crops, they accused Father Jogues
of ** having concealed certain charms in
a small cofler, which he had left with his
host as a pledge of his return,'* which
caused them thus to be afflicted. So
upon his arrival in their village for the
third time, he and his companion, a
young Frenchman, were seized, stripped,
and threatened with death. Father
Jogues had been adopted by the Wolf
clui of the Mohawk, hence this clan,
with that of the Turtle, which with the
Wolf formed a phratry or brotherhood,
tried to save the lives of the Frenchmen.
But the Bear clan, which formed a phra-
try by itself, and l)einjj only cousins to
the others, of one of which Father Jogues
was a member, had determined on his
death as a sorcerer. On Oct. 17, 1646,
the unfortunates were told that they
would be killed, but not burned, the
next day. On the evening of the 18th
Father Jogues was invited to a supper in
a Bear lo(ige. Having accepted the in-
vitation, he went there, and while enter-
ing the lodge a man concealed behind
the door struck him down with ah ax.
He was beheaded, his head elevated on the
pAlisade, and his body thrown into the
river. The next morning Jogues' com-
panion suffered a similar fate. Father
Jogues left an account of a Mohawk
sacrifice to the god Aireskoi (i. e., Are-
g^8f gwd* , * the Master or God of War' ) .
While speaking of the cruelties exercised
by the Mohawk toward their prisoners,
and specifically toward 3 women, he said:
"One of them (a thing not hitherto done)
was burned all over her body, and after-
wards thrown into a huge pyre.'* And
that **at every burn which they caused,
by applying lighted torches to her body,
an old man, in a loud voice, exclaimeci,
*l>aimon, Aireskoi, we offer thee this
victim, whom we bum for thee, that thou
mayest l)e filled with her flesh ana ren-
der us ever anew victorious over our ene-
mies.' Her body was cut up, sent to the
various villages, and devoured." Mega-
polensis ( 1644), a contemporary of Father
Jogues, says that when the Mohawk were
unfortunate in war they would kill, cut
up, and roast a bear, and then make an
offering of it to this war god with the ac-
companying prayer: **0h, great and
mighty Aireskuoni, we know that we have
offended against thee, inasmuch as we
have not killed and eaten our captive
enemies — forgive us this. We promise
that we will kill and eat all the captives
we shall hereafter take as certainly as we
have killed and now eat this bear." He
adds: "Finally, they roast their prison-
ers dead before a slow fire for some days
and then eat them up. The common
people eat the arms, buttocks, and trunk,
i)ut the chiefs eat the head and the
heart."
The Jesuit Relation for 1646 says that,
properly speaking, the French had at
that time peace with only the Mohawk,
who were their near neighbors and who
gave them the most trouble, and that
the Mohegan (Mahingans or Mahinpa-
nak), who had had firm alliances with
the Algonkin allies of the French, were
then already conquered by the Mohawk,
with whom they formed a defensive
and offensive alliance; that during this
year some Sokoki ( AssokSekik) murdered
some Algonkin, whereupon the latter de-
termined, under a misapprehension, to
massacre some Mohawk, who were then
among them and the French. But, for-
tunately, it was discovered from the tes-
timony of two wounde<l persons, who
had escapeil, that the murderers spoke a
language quite different from that of the
Iroquois tongues, and suspicion was at
once removed from the Mohawk, who
then hunted freely in the immediate vi-
cinity of the Algonkin n. of the St Law-
rence, where these hitherto implacable
enemies frequently met on the l)est of
terms. At this time the Mohawk refused
Sokoki ambassadors a new compact to
wage war on the Algonkin.
The introduction of firearms by the
Dutch among the Mohawk, who were
among the first of their region to procure
them, marked an important era m their
history, for it enabled them and the cog-
nate Iroquois tril)es to subjugate the Del-
awares and Munsee, and thus to begin a
career of conquest that carried their war
924
MOHAWK
[B. A. a.
parties to the Mississippi and to the shores
of Hudson bay. The Mohawk villages
were in the valley of Mohawk r., N. Y.,
from the vicinity of Schenectady nearly to
Utica, and their territory extended n. to
the St LawTence and s. to the watershed
of Schoharie cr. and the e. branch of the
Susqilehanna. On the e. their territories
adjoined those of the Mahican, who held
Hudson r. From their position on the k.
frontier of the Iroquois confederation the
Mohawk were among the most prominent
of the Irofjuoian tribes in the early Indian
wars and m official negotiations with the
colonies, so that their name was fre-
quently used bv the tribes of New England
and by the whites as a synonym for the
confederation. Owing to their position
they also suffered much more than their
confe<lerates in some of the Indian and
French wars. Their 7 villages of 1644
were reduced to 5 in 1677. At the begin-
ning of the Revolution the Mohawk took
the side of the British, and at its conclu-
sion the larger portion of them, under
Brant and Johnson, removed to Canada,
where they have since resided on lands
granted to them by the British govern-
ment. In 1777 the Oneida expelled the
remainder of the tribe and burned their
villages.
In 1650 the Mohawk had an estimated
population of 5,000, which was probably
more than their actual number; for 10
years later they were estimated at only
2,500. Thenceforward they underwent
a rapid decline, caused by their wars
with the Mahican, Conestoga, and other
tribes, and with the French, and also by
the removal of a large jiart of the tribe to
Caughnawaga and other mission villages.
The later estimates of their population
have been: 1,500 in 1677 (an alleced de-
crease of 8,500 in 27 years), 400 m 1736
(an alleged decrease of 1,100 in 36 years),
500 in 1741, 800 in 1765, 500 in 1778, 1,500
in 1783, and about 1,200 in 1851. These"
estimates are evidently little better than
vague guesses. In 1884 they were on
three reservations in Ontario: 965 at the
Bay of (Juint^ near the e. end of L. On-
tario, the settlement at Gibson, and the
reserve of the Six Nations on Grand r.
Besides these there are a few individuals
scattered among the different Iroquois
tribes in the United States. In 1906 the
Bay of Quints settlement contained 1,320;
there were 140 (including ** Algonouins'*)
atWatha, the former Gibson band which
was removed earlier from Oka; and the
Six Nations included an indeterminate
number.
The Mohawk participated in the follow-
ing treaties with the United States: Ft
Stanwix, N. Y., Oct. 22, 1784, being a
treaty of peace between the Unitied States
and the Six Nations and defining their
boundaries; supplemented by treaty of
Ft Harmar, O., Jan. 9, 1789. Konon-
daigua (Canandaigua), N. Y., Nov. 11,
1794, establishing peace relations with the
Six Nations and agreeing to certain reser-
vations and boundaries. Albany, N. Y.,
Mar. 29, 1797, by which the United States
sanctioned the cession by the Mohawk to
the state of New York of all their lands
therein.
The names of the following Mohawk
villages have been preserved: Canajoha-
rie, Canastigaone, Canienga, Caughna-
waga, Chuchtononeda, Kanagaro, Kowo-
goconnughariegugharie, Nowadaga, Ono-
alagona, Osquake, Saratoga, Schaunac-
tada (Schenectady), Schoharie, and Tea-
tontaloga. (j. N. b. h.)
Agneohronont.-Je8. Rel. for 1652, 35, 1858. Ag-
nae.— Jes. Rel. for 1642, 83, 1858. Agneehronon.—
Jes. Rel. for 1640, 35. 1858. Afneronons.— >Je8.
Rel. for 1643, 63, 1858. Agnic— HomanA Heiis'
map, 1756 (misprint). Agaiehronnons.— Jes.
Rel. for 1664, ai, 1858. Araiehroroa.— Jes. Rel.
for 1637, 119, 1858. Agaierhoaoa.— Jes. Rel. for
1639. 70, 1858. Agaieroaaoat.— Jes. Rel. for 1666,
2, 1858. Agaieroaoat.— Dollier and Qallin^
(1669) in Marery, D4c., l. 141, 1875. Agaierrho-
aoat.— Jes. Rel. for 1635. 34, 1858. Agaiert.— Hen-
nepin, New Di8cov.,101, 1698. Agaiex.— Frontenac
(1673) in Margry, D^c, I. 213, 1875. Agaisn.—
'Vaillant (1688) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iii, 627.
1853. Agaierhoaoa.— Sagard (1632), Hist. Can..
IV, 1866 (Huron name). Am6hak.— Qatschet,
Penobscot MS., B. A. E., 1887 (Penobscot name).
A'mabak.— Gatschet, Caughnawaga MS., B. A. E.,
1882 (Caughnawaga name). Aaaguas.— Le Bean.
Avantures, ii, 2, 1738. Aaiaka-h^ka.— Gatschet,
Caughnawaga MS.. B. A. E., 1882 (Caughnawaga
name). Aaie.— Bacquevtlle de la Potherie, Hist,
de TAm. Sept., in. 27, 1753. Anies.— Del' Isle, map
(1718), quoted In N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v. 577. 1865.
Aaaiegue.— Jes. Rel. for 1665, 21, 1858. Aaaiehroa-
aoas.— Jes. Rel. for 1653, 5, 1858. Aaaieagehroa-
Boas.— Jes. Rel. for 1657, 58, 1858. Aaaieabron-
aoBS.— Ibid., 36. Aaaieroaaoas.— Ibid., 15. Aaaie-
roaoas.— Jes. Rel. for 1656, 11. 1858. Aaaierroa-
aoas.— Jes. Rel. for 1646, 3, 1858. Aaaiet.— Tracy
(1667) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iii, 152, 1853. Aa-
aiex.— Frontenac (1673)in Margry, D4c., i, 203, 1875.
Aquieeroaoas.—Jes. Rel. for 1641, 37, 1858. Aqoi-
ers.— Charlevoix, Jour., i, 270, 1761 (misprint).
Aaaiers.--Chauvignerie (1736), quoted by School-
craft, Ind. Tribes, in, 655, 1853. Auaies.— McKen-
ney and Hall. Ind. Tribes, in, 80, 1854. Oaaaoa-
euska.— Montreal conf. (1756) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist, X. 600. 1858. Caaieagas.— Hale quoted in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 42. 1885. OaaaiaagMs.--
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 262, note, 1855. Gaaaa-
gas.— Mallery In Proc. A. A. A. S., xxvi, 862,1877.
Cauaeeyeakees.— Edwards (1751) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., 1st s., X, 143, 1809. Cayiagahangaa.—
Macauiey, N. Y., n, 174, 1829. Oraaiaggaluuigli-
gaagh.— Ibid.. 185 Da-ga-e-o-ga.— Morgan, League
Iroq.,97, 1851 (name used in the Iroquois coun-
cils). Oagaieguex.— Hennepin, New Discov., 02,
1698. Oaaeagaoahoh.— Mallery in Proc. A. A. A.
S., XXVI, 852, 1877. Ga-ae-a'-ga-o-ao'. — Morgan,
League Iroo., 523, 1851 (Seneca name). Qk-ne-
ga-h&'-ga.— Ibid., 523 ( Mohawk form ). Oaaieguero-
noat.— Courcelles (1670) in Margry, D6c., I,
178, 1875. Oaai-iage-h^— Pyrlseus (ca. 1750)
quoted by Gatschet In Am. Antiq., iv. 76,
1882. Oaaiagehage.— Barclay (1769) quoted by
Shea, Cath. Miss. , 208, 1855. OaaaiagSari.— Bruyas
§uoted in Hist. Mag.. II, 153, 1858. Oaaaiagwari.—
hea, note in Charlevoix, New Fr., ii, 145, 1872.
Oaaaiegdiaga.— Bruyas quoted by Shea, Cath.
Miss., 208, 1855. Oaaai^roaoa.— Ibid. Oaaaie-
ges.— Hennepin, NewDiscov., 28,1698. Oaaaiegu^:—
Shea, Cath. Miss., 258, 1855. OaBaiekes.~Hennepln
(1683) quoted by Le Beau, Avantures, ii, 2, 1788.
Oanaiagebage.— Barclay (1769) quoted in Hist.
BULL. 30]
MOHAWK
925
Maf ., II, 1&8, 1858. OoAffMiiffroiiiioiii.—Doc. of 1706
in N.Y.Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 786. 1855. HAtinir^e-
nmii.— Oatschet, Tuscarora MS., B. A. E., 1883
(Tuscarora name). Ignerhonons.— Champlain,
CEuv., UI. 220, 1870. Ignierhonons.— Saf ard (1636),
Can., I, 170, 1866. IroquoU d'enbas.— Jes. Rel. for
1666, 7, 1858 ( French name). Iroquois inferieurs. —
Jes. Rel. for 1656, 2, 1858. Xajinnthaga.— Megapo-
lensis (1644) quoted in Hist. Mag., ii, 153, 1858.
Kaaiwa.— Gatschet. Shawnee MS., B. A. E., 1879
(Shawnee name, from Kanaw^i ) . Kanfeke-haka.
.Oatschet, Tuscarora MS., B. A. E. ('flint tribe':
Tuscarora name) . Kani^ige-onon.— Gatschet, Sen-
eca MS., B. A. E. (Seneca name). Kayingehaga.—
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 35, 1872. Kw«-
d«oh'.— Rand, Micmac Diet., 172,1888, (Miemac
name). Maagnai.— Jogues (1643) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist.Zili, 577, 1881. Kaokwaet.— De Laet
(1625) in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., i, 299.
1841. MackwaaU.— De Laet, Nov. Orb., 73, 1633.
Haekwes.— De Laet (1633) quoted in Jones.
Ind. Bull.. 6, 1867. Maoqs.— Maryland treaty
(1682) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 323, 1853.
Macqaaas.— Doc. of 1660. ibid., Xlll, 183, 1881. Mae-
qoaans.— Pen hallow (1726) inN. H. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
I, 41, 1824. Maoquas.— Rawson (1678) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., xin. 521. 1881. Macquaus.— Pen-
hallow (1726) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll., i, 41.
1824. Maoques.— Rawson (1678) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist., Xlil,522, 1881. MaequeM.— Maryland treaty
(1682). ibid., in, 826. 1853. Hacquis.— Ibid., 325.
■aoquiss.— Ibid., 321. Maeokibaeys.— Michael ius
(1628), Ibid., II, 769, 1858. Mahacka. —Schuyler
(1699), ibid.. IV, 563, 18&4. Kahaoqs.— Meadows
(1698). Ibid., 895. Mahakas.— Megapolensis
(1644) in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., in. pt. 1,
153, 1857. Kahakea.— Andros (1680) in Me. Hist.
Soc. Coll.. V, 42, 1857. Mahakin baas.— Hazard in
Am. State Pap., i, 520. 1792. JUhakiobas.— Mega-
polensis (1644) in N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d a., in,
pt. 1, 153, 1857. Hahakobaas.— Ibid. Mahaks.—
Wharton (1673) quoted in Hist. Mag.. 2d s.. i, 300.
1867. Mahakuaas.— Hist. Mag . 1st s., n, 153, 1858.
Kahakuase.— Megapolenais (1644) quoted inN. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., I, 496, 1856. Hahakuasse. — Mega-
rlensis (1644) quoted by Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec.
830,1816. Msliakwa.— Shea. Cath. Miss., 208,
1855 Mahaukcs.- Doc. of 1666 in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., in, 118. ia'>3. Kahoas.— Church (1716)
quoted by Drake. Ind. Wars. 1 15, 1825. Makquas.—
Denonville (1687) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in.
518, 1853. Makwaes.- Wassenaar (1632) quoted
by Ruttenber. Tribes Hudson R, 68,1872. Ma-
qaise.— Sleeker (1701) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
IV, 919. 1854. Kaqas.— Doc. of 1676, ibid., xin,
500. 1881. Haquaas.— Map of 1614. ibid., i, 1856.
■aqoaes.— Doc. of 1651, ibid., xin, 28, 1881. Ma-
qoasM.— Bellomont (1698). ibid., iv. 347. 1854.
JkaquaU.— Nicolls (1616). ibid., in. 117, 1853.
Kaquaise.— Bleeker (1701). ibid., iv, 920, 1854.
Kaquas.- De Laet (1625) quoted by Ruttenber,
Tribes Hudson R., 34, 1872 Kaquasas.— Doc. of
1655 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xii. 98, 1877. Ma-
quase.— Doc. of 1678. ibid., xili, 528. 1881. Ha-
qnasM.- Lovelace (1669), ibid., xin. 439. 1881.
Xaquash.— Romer (1700), ibid., iv, 800. 1854. Ma-
qoass.- Talcott (1678). ibid., xin, 517, 1881. Ma-
qnasM.— Doc. of 1687, ibid., ill, 432, 1853. Ma-
quoes.— Bradstreet (1680) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
Ms., vni, 334, 1843. Maques.— Clobery (1633) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., i, 78, 1856. Maquese.— Liv-
ingston (1710), ibid., V, 227. 1855. Maqueses.—
Gardner (1662), ibid., xin. 227, 1881. Kaquess.—
Harmetsen( 1687), ibid., in. 487, 1853. Kaquesyes.—
Lovelace (1669), ibid., xiii, 439, 1881. Maquex.—
Graham (1698), ibid.,iv, 430, 1854. Kaquis.— Davis
(GOi. 1691) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., 1. 108, 1825.
Maquoas.— Doc. of 1697 In N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v,
75, 1855. KaquoU.— Jes. Rcl. for 1647, 31, 1858
(Dutch form). Maiigttawofs.-rMallery in Proc.
A. A. A. 8., XXVI, 852, 1877. Manhaoks.— Doc. of
1666 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist, ni. 118. 1853. Kauk-
quoffges.— Warner (1644) in R. I. Col. Rec., i, 140.
1856. Mauquaoys.— Eliot (1680) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., Ists., in, 180, 1794. Mauquas.— Salis-
bury (1678) In N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xin, 619,
1881. Hauquavogs.— Williams (ea. 1638) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s.,yi. 238, 1863. Kauquaw.-
WUliams (1648), ibid., 3d s., ix, 272, 1846. Mau-
quawogs.— Williams (1637), ibid., 4th s., vi, 201,
1863. Mauquawos.— Williams(1650),ibid.,284. Mau-
qttes.—Andros(1675)inN.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xii,520,
1877. Mawhakes.— Rec. of 1644 quoted by Drake,
Bk. Inds., bk. 2, 90, 1848. Hawhauogs.-Williams
il637) in Ma.s8. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., vi, 207, 1863.
[awhawkes.— Haynes (1648) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 4th s.. VI, 358. 1863. Mawques.- Hubbard
(1680), ibid., 2d s.,vi.629. 1815. Meguak.— Oatschet,
Penobscot MS., 1887 (Penobscot name). Megual.—
Ibid. Megue. — Ibid. Megwe. — Ibid. Meqiut. — Ve-
tromile in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll., vi, 215, 1859 (Ab-
naki name). Moacks.— Vaillant (1688) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist:, in. 528, 1853. Moak.— Doc. of 1746,
ibid., x, W, 1858. Moawk— Doc. of 1758, ibid., 679.
Mockways.— Wadsworth(1694) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll.. 4th s.. I. 102. 1852. Mocquages.— Sanford,
(1657). ibid.. 2ds.. vn,81, 1818. Ifooquayes.— San-
ford (1657) in R. I. Col. Rec, l, 362, 1856. Ho-
haakr.-Clarkson (1694) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
IV, 93, 1854. Mohaoks.— Colve (1673), ibid., Xlll,
478,1881. Mohacqs.— Meadows (1698), ibid., IV,
393, 1854. Mohacques.— Doc. of 1698, ibid., 337.
Mohaos -Miller (1696). ibid.. 183. Hohaes.— Pou-
chot, map (17r>8). ibid., x. 694, 1858. Mohaggs.—
Livingston (1691). ibid., in. 781. 1853. Mohags.—
Livingstone (1702), ibid., iv. 988, la-^. Mohils.—
Wessells (1692), ibid., in, 817, 18r>3. Mohaq*.—
Dw. of 1696, ibid., iv. 120, 185^1. Mohaqs.— Wes-
sells (1693), ibid, 69. Mohaques,— Winthrop
(1666). ibid., in, 137, 1854. Hohaucks.— Mason
(1684) in N. II. Hist. Soc. Coll., II, 200, 1827. Ho-
haugs.— Qnanapaug (1675) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll, 1st s.. VI. 206. 1800. Mohaukes.— Doc. of 1666
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ni, 118. 1863. Mohauks.—
Gardener (1660) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s.. in,
154, 1833. Mohawcks.— Owaneco's rep. ( 1700) in N.
Y. Doc. Col. Hist., IV. 614. 1854. Mohawkes.— Doc.
ca. 1642 in Ma.ss. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., in, 162, 1838.
Mohawks.— Hendricksen (1616) in N. Y. Doc. Col,
Hi.st., I, 14, 1866. Mohawques.— Schuyler (1691),
ibid.. Ill, 801, 1853. Mohaws.— Conf. of 1774 in
Rupp, W. Penn.. app., 223, 1846. Mohegs.— Don-
San (1688) in N. \ . Doc. Col. Hist., in, 621, 1853.
[ohoakk.— vSchnectady treaty (1672), ibid., xni,
464, 1881. Mohoakx.— Ibid.. 465. Hobocks.— Vin-
cent (1638) in Ma.8s. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., vi, 29,
1837. Mobocs.- Boudinot, Star in the West. 127,
1816. Mohoges.— Schuyler (1694) in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist.. IV, 82, 1854. Mohoggs.— Livingston
(1711). ibid.. v,272. 1855. Mobogs.— Hogkins(1686)
in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll.. i. 221. 1824. Xohokes.—
Gardner (1662) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xin, 226,
1881. Mohoks.— Ibid., 225. Moboukes.— Harmet-
sen (1687), ibid., in. 436. 1853. Mobowaugsuck.—
Williams (1643) in Maas. Hist. Soc. Coll.. Ists., HI,
209. 1794. Mohowawogs.— Williams (ca. 1638) , ibid.,
4th 8 . VI, 239, 1863. Mohowks.— Burnet (1720) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.. V, 578, 1855. Mohox.—
Vaillant (1688). ibid., in. 627. 185:^. Mobucks.—
Doc.of 1676 quoted by Drake, Ind. Chron.. 88, iaS6.
Mokaus.- Alcedo, Die. Geog.. iv. 604, 1788. Mo-
kawkcs.— Doc.co. 1684 in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll.. 1. 220,
1824. Moobags.— Church (1716) quoted by Drake,
Ind. Wars, 50, 1825. Moquaes.— Wessells (1698) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., iv, 372. 1854. Moquakues.—
Gardener (1660) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s.,
in, 154, 1833. Moquas.— Andros (1678) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., Ill, 271. 18.53. Moquase.— Talcott
(1678), ibid., xin, 517, 1881. Moquauks.- Win-
throp (1646) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., vi,
460, 1815. Moquawes.— Hubbard (1680), ibid., v,
33. Moqui.— Doc. of 1690, ibid., 3d s., I, 210, 1826.
Mosquaugsett.— Baily (1669) in R. I. Col. Rec, Ii,
274, 1857. Mouhaks.— Gardiner (1652) in Mass. Hist
Soc. Coll.. 4th 8., VII, 62. 1866. Mowacks.— Treaty
of 1644. ibid., in, 430, 1856. Mowakes.— Winthrop
(1637), ibid., 358. Mowaks.- Bradford {ca. 1650),
ibid., 431. Mowhakes.-Ibid., 861. Mowhaks.—
Bradford (1640), ibid., vi, 159, 1863. Howhakues.—
Gardener (1660), ibid., 3d s., in, 152, 1833. How-
haugs.— Williams (1637), ibid., ix, 301, 1846.
Mowhauks.— Mason (1643), ibid., 4th s., vii, 411,
1866. l[owhaaogs.-WilIiams (1637), ibid., 8d s.,
IX, 300, 1846. Kowhawkes.— Haynes (1643), ibid..
I. 230, 1825. Mowhawks.— Clinton 0743) in N. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist.. VI, 250. 1855. Mowhoako.— Pat-
rick (1637) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., vii,
323, 1865. Mowhoks.— Gardner (1662) in N. Y.
926
MOHAWK MOHEGAN
[b. a. e.
Doc. Col. Hist., xm, 225, 1881. Howqnakes.—
Gardener (1660) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 8d »..
III. 152, 1833. Oywiders.— Shea, Cath. Miss., 214,
1855 (probably a Dutch fonn of Agniera). Saak-
hioam.— Heckewelder quoted by Gallatin in
Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc., li, 46, 1886 (Delaware
name: 'flint users'). Teakawreahoreh.— Mac-
auley. N. Y., ii, 174, 1829. Tehawrehojeh.— Ibid.,
185. Tehur-lehogugh.— Ibid. Tekau-terigtego-nes.
—Ibid., 174. Tganhdge.— Pyrlaeus MS. {ca. 1750)
quoted in Am. Antiq., iv, 75, 1882. Yanieye-
rono.— Gatschet, Wyandot MS., B. A. E., 1881
( Huron name: * bear people ' ) .
Mohawk. One of the Lakmiut bands
of the Kalapooian stock, on Mohawk r.,
an E. tributary of the Willamette, just n.
of Eugene City, Oreg.— U. S. Ind. Treat.
(1855), 19, 1873; Sanders in Ind. Aff. Rep.
1863, 88, 1864.
:J^ >f- M" Mohegan (from mdingan, 'wolf.' —
'^ Trumbull). An Algonquian tribe whose
chief seat appears originally to have been
on Thames r.. Conn., in the n. part of
New London co. They claimed as their
E roper country all the territory watered
y the Thames and its branches n. to
within 8 or 10 m. of the Massachusetts
line, and by conquest a considerable
area extending n. and e. into Massachu-
setts and Rhode Island, occupied bv the
Wabaquasset and Nipmuc. On the w.
* their dominion extended along the coast
to East r., near Guilford, Conn. After
the destruction of the Pequot in 1637
the Mohegan laid claim to their country
and that of the western Nehantic in the
8. part of New London co. The tribes
w. of them on Connecticut r., whom they
sometimes claimed as subjects, were gen-
erally hostile to them, as were also the
Narraganset on their e. lx)rder.
The Mohegan seem to have been the
eastern branch of that group of closelv
connected tribes that spread from the vi-
cinity of Narragansett bay to the farther
side of the Hudson (see Mahican), but
since known to the whites the eastern and
western bodies have had no political con-
nection. At the first settlement of New
England the Mohegan and Pequot formed
but one tribe, under the rule of Sassacus,
afterward known as the Pequot chief.
Uncas, a subordinate chief connected by
marriage with the family of Sassacus, re-
belled against him and assumed a distinct
authority as the leader of a small band on
the Thames, near Norwich, who were
afterward known in history as Mohegan.
On the fall of Sassacus in 1637 the greater
part of the survivors of his tribe fell
under the dominion of the Mohegan
chief, who thus obtained control of the
territory of the two tribes with all their
tributary bands. As the English favored
his pretensions he also set up a claim
to extensive adjoining territories in the
possession of rival chiefs. He strength-
ened his position by an alliance with the
English against all other tribes, and after
the destruction of the Indian power in s.
New England, by the death of King
Philip in 1676, the Moh^an were the
only important tribe remaining s. of the
Abnaki. As the white settlements ex-
tended the Mohegan sold most of their
lands and confined themselves to a res-
ervation on Thames r., in New London
CO., Conn. Their village, also called Mo-
hegan, was on the site of the present
town of that name on the w. bank of the
river. Their ancient village seems to
have been farther up, about the mouth
of the Yantic. Besides the village at
Mohegan, the villages of Groton and
Stonington, occupied mainly by the rem-
nant of the Pequot, were considered to
belong to the Mohegan. They rapidly
dwindled away when surrounded by the
whites. Many joined the Scaticook, but
in 1788 a still larger number, under the
leadership of Occom, joined the Brother-
ton Indians in New York, where they
formed the majority of the new settle-
ment. The rest of the tribe continue to
reside in the vicinity of Mohegan or Nor-
wich, Conn., but are now reduced to
about 1(X) individuals of mixed blood,
only one of whom, an old woman, re-
tained the language in 1904. They still
keep up a September festival, which ap-
pears to be a survival of the Green Com
dance of the Eastern tribes. For inter-
esting notes on this remnant, see Prince
and Speck in Am. Anthrop., 1903 and
1904. ^
In 1643 the Mohegan were estimated to
number from 2,000 to 2,500, but this in-
cluded the Pequot living with them, and
probably other subordinate tribes. In
1705 they numbered 750, and in 1774
were reported at 206. Soon after they
lost a considerable number by removal
to New York, and in 1804 only 84 were
left, who were reduced to 69 five years
later. They were reported to number
300 in 1825, and about 350 in 1832, but
the increased numbers are probably due
to the enumeration of negroes and mixed-
Moods living with them, together with
recruits from the Narraganset and others
in the vicinity. The Mohegan villages
were Groton, Mohegan, Showtucket, and
Wabaquasset. For further information
and synonyms, see Mahican, (j. m.)
Manheken.— Bre^yster (1661) in Mass. Hist. Soc
Coll., 4th s. ,vii, 71, 1866. Manlugan-«uok.— Tooker,
Algonq. ser., v, 23. 1901 (English form of tribal
name). Mawcbiggin.— Johnson (1664) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll.. 2d s.. vii, 47, 1818. Hawhiek-
on.— Easton treaty (1767) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
VII, 294. 1856. Mawhiffgins.— Johnson (1654) in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 2d s., iv, 28. 1816. Mocekui.—
Hopkins (1646), ibid., 4th s., vi, 834, 1868. Kogiaa-
euoks.— Williams (1637), ibid., 210. Mohactn.—
Adams (1738), ibid.,i,35,1852(ConnecticutvllIage).
Moheag.— Mather {ca. 1640) in Drake, Bk. Inds.,
bk. 2,86,1848. Moheagan.— Horsmanden (1744) in
N.Y. Doc. Col. Hist., VI, 256, 1856. Moheagandert.—
Trumbull, Conn., I286O, 1818. Moheages.— Mason
{ca. 1670) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.. 2d8., vni, 146,
1819. Hoheagaes.— Petei8(ca. 1644) in Drake, Bk.
BULL. 30]
MOHKMENCHO MOHONGO
927
Inds., bk. 2, 69. 1848. Koheegiiit.—Patrick (1637)
in Mass. Hist Soc. Ck)11.. 4th s., vii. 325, 1865. Mo-
iMogs.— Wainwright(1785) in Me. Hist. Soc. Coll..
IV, 123. 1856. Moheek.— Fitch (1674) in Mass. Hist.
Soc. Coll., Ists., 1, 206, 1806 (village in Connecti-
cut). Mohefanicks.— Pynchon (1645), ibid,, 4th s..
VI. 874. 1863. Mohecans.— Haynes (1643). ibid., 357
(used by Hubbard In 16«0 for the New York tribe),
■ohegen.— Coddington ( 1640) , ibid.. 318 (Connec-
ticut village). MohMet.— Stiles {ca. 1770), ibid..
Ists.. X, 101, 1809. itohefin.— Leele (1659), ibid.,
4th s., VII. 543. 1865. Xohen.— Hyde (1760) in
Drake. Bk. Inds.. bk. 2. 66, 1848. Xoheken.— Brew-
ster (1666) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.. 4th s., vii, 76,
1865. Xohiffan.— Mass. Records (1642) in Drake,
Bk. Inds.. bk. 2. 63. 1848. Xohiganeucks.— Williams
il637) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., i, 163, 1825.
lohiganie.— WHliams (1637), ibid., 4th s., vi, 207,
1863. Xohigent.— Vincent (1638), ibid., 3d s., vi,
35, 1837 (used by Harris In 1805 for the New York
tribe). Mohiggans.— N. Y. Hist. Soc. Coll.. 2d s.,
1.72,1841. Xohiggen.— Cushman (1622) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll.. 4th 8., Ill, 122,1856 (Connecticut,
or; may mean Monhegan id.). Xohiggenen.—
Underbill (1638), ibid., 3d s.,vi, 15, 1837. Mohig-
hens.— Vincent (1638), ibid., 39. Mohigin.— Steph-
ens (1675).ibid.,x, 117, 1849 (Connecticut village).
Xohigoners.— Higginson (1637), ibid., 4th s., vii,
3967l865. Xohogin.— Writer of 1676 quoted by
Drake, Ind. Chron.. 116, 1836. Monahegan.— Win-
throp(1638) quoted by Drake. Bk. Inds., bk.2,87,
1848. Xonahiganeuckt.— Williams (1637) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., vi, 215. 1863. Xonahiga-
niok.— Ibid., 215 (Connecticut villagej. Mona-
hiMan. -Williams (1638) quoted by Trumbull.
Ind. Names Conn., 31, 1881 (Connecticut village).
Konahiggaaie.— Williams (1638) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll.. 4th s.. VI, 231. 1863. Monahiggannick.— Wil-
liams (1639). ibid., 260. Moaahiggent.— Williams
(1638). ibid.. 3d s., i. 167, 1825. Monahiggon.—
WillUms (1637), ibid.. 4th s., vi. 215, 1863. Mona-
higon.— Williams (1638). ibid., 224. Monhagin.—
Adams (1738), ibid., i, 35. 1852. Monheagan.—
Mason (1648), ibid., vii, 416, 1865. Monheags.—
Ibid.. 413. Xonhmns.— Williams (1670), ibid.,
Monh
Ists., 1,277,1806.
tonhere.— Mason (1643), ibid.,
4th s., VII, 411, 1865. Xonhegen.— Treaty (1645).
ibid., Ill, 437,1856. Monhiggin.— Williams (1637).
ibid.. VI, 220. 1863. Konhiggont.— Williams (1675).
ibid.. 302. Monhiggt.— Bradford {ca. 1650). ibid.,
Ill, 361, 1856. litonohegens.— Eliot (1650), ibid..
8d s., IV, 139, 1834. Morahtkani.— Opdyek (1640)
in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ii, 141, 1858. Morhicans.—
Map of 1616, ibid., I. 1856. Xowheganneak.— Ma-
son (1648) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., vii.413,
1865. Xuhhekaneuk.— Trumbull. Ind. Names
Conn., 31, 1881 (English form of tribal name).
Xunhagaa.— Pynchon (1643) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 4th s.. VI, 373, 1863. Xunhioke.— Brewster
S636), ibid., vii. 67. 1865 (Connecticut village),
anhegant.— Sanford (1657) in R. I. Col. Rec., i,
362. 1856. River Heads.— Am. Pioneer, ii. 191. 1843
(misprint, probably for ••River Inds "). River
ladiaiis.— See under this title. Sea-tide People.—
Morgan, Consang. and Affin., 289, 1871. tTnkas
Indians.— Salisbury (1678) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
ZIII. 626, 1881. Upland Indiana.— Church (1716) in
Drake Ind. Wars, 67, 1825. Vpland Indianet.—
Brewster (1656) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s.,
VII. 75, 1866.
Mohemenoho. A tribe of the Mon^can
confederacy, fonneri y living on the upper
waters of James r., Va. Jenerson locates
them in Powhatan co., on the a. side of
the river, a few miles above Richmond,
but Strachey seems to place them higher
np, in the mountains. (j. m.)
Hohmnenehoet.— Jefferson, Notes, 179, 1801. Mohe-
Bwaehoas.— Macauley, N. Y., ii. 178, 1829 r mis-
print). Kohemonsoet.— Boudinot. Star ni the West,
127. 1816. Mowhemcho.— Smith, Va., i, map, 1819.
Kowhemenchouch— Pots, ibid., 196. Mowhemen-
ehngM.— Strachey {ca. 1612), Va., 102, 1849. Mo-
whomeaehaghes.---Smith, op. cit., 134. Mowhem-
iaAke.-dtracbey (ca. 1612). Va., 181, 1849.
Moheton. An unclassified tribe living
in 1671 in the mountains of s. w. Virginia,
or the adjacent part of West Virginia, on
the upper waters of a river flowing n. w. —
perhaps New r. They had removed a
short time previously from the head-
waters of the Roanoke, in the mountains
farther to the e. They were friends and
neighbors of the Tutefo, and were possi-
bly a cognate tribe, or they may have
l)een Shawnee. ( j. m. )
Mohetan.— Batts (1671) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist..
Ill, 197. lim (of. Bushnell in Am. Anthrop.. ix,
no. 1, 1907). Mohetont.- Ibid., 196.
Mohickon John's Town. A village, prob- \
ably occupied by a band of Mahican under (
a chief known as Mohickon John, for-
merly on the upper waters of Mohican r.,
probably on Jerome fork, in the present
Ashland co., Ohio, It is prol)ably the
Mohicken Village mentioned by Croghan
in 1760. (J. M.)
Mohican Johnstown.— Howe, HLst.ColI.Ohio, ii,832,
1896. Mohicken Village.— (Croghan (1760) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s., ix, 378, 1871. Mohickon
John's Town.— Hutchins map in Smith, Bouquet's
ExptHi., 1766. Ville de Jean.— I^ Tour, map, 1784
(" Slohickon on Ville de Jean").
Mohock. From the reputation of the
Mohawk, an Iroquoian people of central
New York and parts of Canada, their
name was used by the colonists in the
sense of 'fierce fellow,' then 'ruflSan,' or
* tough' in modern parlance. The word
was specially applied to one of the many
bands of rnffiana who infested the streets
of London at the beginning of the 18th
century. As it appears in English litera-
ture it is spelled Mohock. Gav, the poet
and dramatist (1688-1782), asks—
Who ha.s not heard the Scourer's midnight fame?
Who has not trembled at the Mohock's name?
(A. F. c.)
Mohominge. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy near the falls of James r., at
Richmond, Va., about 1610 (Strachey,
ca. 1612, Va., 25, 1849). It is not marked
on Capt. John Smith's map.
Mohongo (or Myhangah ). The wife of
Kihegashugah, an Osage chief. These
two, with four other meml)ers of thetribe,
sailed from New Orleans in 1827, and on
July 27 arrived at Havre, France, under
the care of David Delaunay, a Frenchman
who had lived 25 years in St Louis, and
who is said to have l)een a colonel in the
service of the United States. The Indians
later went to Paris, and, as at Havre, were
the objects of marke<l attention, being
showered with gifts, entertained by peo-
ple of prominence, and received at court
by Charles X. The desire of Kihega-
shugah to visit France was inspired by a
journey to that country by his grand-
father in the time ot Louis XIV. Kihe-
gashugah and two others of the party
died of smallpox on shipboard while re-
turning to America. It is said that the
expense of their return was borne by La-
928
MOHONK INDIAN CONFERENCES
[b. a. e.
fayette. Landing at Norfolk, Va. , the sur-
vivors of the party proceeded to Wash-
ington, where the accompanying portrait
of Mohongo, from Kenney and Hall, was
painted. See Six Indiens rouges de la
tribu Osages (with portraits), 1827; His-
toire de la tribu Osages, par P. V., 1827;
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, i, 29,
1858; Fletcher in Am. Anthrop., ii, 395,
1900.
MOHONGO (mcKENNEV AND HALl)
Mohonk Indian Conferences. A series of
annual meetings of friends of the Indians
intended to facilitate intelligent discus-
sion and conscientious agitation for desir-
able reforms; In these conferences a
novel and effective way of forming and
disseminating sound public opinion has
been devised and for a score of years suc-
cessfully employed, and through their in-
strumentality public speakers and those
who write for the press have been kept
in touch with the experts who know the
facts. The Mohonk conferences, in their
inception and their maintenance, are the
idea and the work of Albert K. Smiley,
member of the U. S. Board of Indian
Commissioners, formerly professor of nat-
ural science at Haverford College, later
in charge of the Friends* Boarding School
at Providence, R. I. Having purchased
the picturesque hotel overlooking beau-
tiful L. Mohonk, in the Catskill range,
w. of lower Hudson r., N. Y., Mr Smiley
made it a resort for people of education,
high principle, and philanthropic inter-
ests. Led by the wish to promote reform
in the management of Indian affairs, he
conceived the idea of inviting each year,
as his personal guests for the greater part
of a week in October, the people who
knew most about Indian life, education,
and mission work, and the relations of
the Government to the Indians. Besides
these experts in Indian affairs, were in-
vited from 100 to 250 other people, lead-
ers in shaping public opinion, such as ed-
itors of the secular and religious press,
writers for reviews, clergymen of all de-
nominations, presidents of universities
and colleges, leading men and women
teaching in public schools, lawyers and
judges. Senators and Representatives in
Congress, members of the Cabinet and
heads of Departments, expert ethnolo-
gists, and, preeminently, such workers
rrom the field as Indian agents of charac-
ter and intelligence, teacners of Indian
schools, armv ofl^cers with a personal
knowledge of Indians, and philanthropic
people w-ho had studied the Indians on
the reservations. These meetings Mr
Smiley, as a member of the Board of
Indian Commissioners, called ** Confer-
ences with the Board," and until 1902 a
member of the Board presided — Gen.
Clinton B. Fisk, from 1883 until his death
in 1890; Dr Merrill E.Gates, former pres-
ident of Amherst College, chairman (now
secretary) of the Board, from 1890 to
1902; in 1903, Hon. John D. Long, ex-
Secretary of the Navy, and in 1904, Hon.
Charles J. Bonaparte, present Secretary
of the Navy. The proceedings of the
conference for the first 20 years were
printed as an appendix in the Annual
Reports of the Board of Indian Commis-
sioners.
During the four days of the meeting, in
the mornings a three or four hours' ses-
sion and in the evenings two to three
hours have been civen to addresses, pa-
pers, reports, and the freest discussion, in
which the widest differences of opinion
have been welcomed and carefully con-
sidered and discussed. Sympathetic at-
tention to views the most divergent has
resulted in such conservatively sound ut-
terances in the annual Mohonk platform
as have generally commanded the support
of the great body of the best friends of the
Indians. In the afternoon, in drives and
walks about the lake and through the
forest, congenial groups of interested
friends often continued the discussions of
the morning sessions, shaped resolutions,
and devised plans for aiding reform.
At its first meeting, in 1883 the con-
ference reported in favor of larger appro-
priations for Indian education and more
school buildings; the extension of laws
relating to crime, marriage, and inheri-
tance so as to cover Indians on reserva-
tions then ** lawless"; more of religious
education for Indians; the gradual with-
drawal of rations from the able-bodied
BULL. 30]
MOHOTLATH MOKASKEL
929
Indians because rations i>auperized them;
the inexpediency of leasing Indian graz-
ing lands, and the need of greater care
in selecting men of character as Indian
agents. Still more progressive policies
have been advocated in subsequent years.
The confei^nce early declared for land in
severalty, with inalienable homesteads
for Indian families; for educating Indians
industrially as well as intellectually for
citizenship, to be conferred as rapidly as
practicable; and for uniform insistance
njpon monogamy, the sacredness of mar-
riage, and the preser\'ation at each
agency of family records of marriages
and relationships. The alwlition of the
system of appointing Indian agents as a
rewani for' partisan service with little
regard to fitness, was urgently advocate<l.
The advantages of the "outing system,"
by which Indian children of scliool age
were placed in carefully chosen homes of
white people, to attend school with white
children, and learn to work on white
men's farms, were discussed and demon-
strated. The breaking up of the tribal
sjnstem in Indian Territory was advocated
several years before the Commission to
the Five Civilized Tribes (g. v.) was ap-
pointed ; and the conference nas advocated
the division of the great tribal trust funds
into individual holdings, each Indian t<)
have control of his own share of that
money as soon as he shows himself able
to begin to use it wisely. The develop-
ment of native Indian industries, wher-
ever practicable, has l^een intelligently
favored. Sympathetic appreciation of all
that is fine, artistically suggestive, and
worthy of development in the nature, in-
stitutions, and arts of the Indian, has
been marked and constant, (m. e. g.)
Mohotlath (Mo-hotVaih). A sept of the
Opitchesaht, a Nootka tribe. — Boas in
6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Canada, 32, 1890.
Moioaqni. A former rancheria,- proba-
bly of the Nevome, in Sonora, Mexico,
visited by Father Kino in 1694.— Doc.
Hist. Mex., 4th s., i, 253, 1856.
y' Moingwena. The name (the etymology
of which is doubtful) of a small tribe of
the Illinois confederacy, closely affiliated
with the Peoria. The name was applied
also to the village in which they resided.
The firstrecordSi notice of the tribe is by
Marquette in the account of his descent
of the Mississippi with Joliet in 1673,
when he found them residing in the vi-
cinity of the Peoria village on the w. side
of the Mississippi near the mouth of a
river supposed to have been the Des
Moines. Franquelin's map of 1688 gives
the name of the river as **Moingana/'
and marks the Indian village of "Moin-
goana * * on it. When Marquette returned
from the S. in 1674, he passed up Illinois
r. and found the Peoria in the vicinity of
Bull. 30-05 59
L. Peoria, the tribe having removed hither
after his descent the previous year. He
does not mention the Moingwena in this
connection, but from the fact thatGravier
found them with the Peoria in this local-
ity in 1700, it is presumed that they
migrated thither with the latter tribe.
As no mention is made of them after this
time they probably were incorporated
with the Peoria, thus losing their tribal
distinction. (j. m. c.t.)
MoengSena.— Joliet, maps in Ck>ues, Pike's Exped.,
I. 13, 1895. Moingoana.— La Salle (1681) in Mar-
gn-, D6c., II, 134, 1877. Moingona.— P6nicaut (1700) .
ibid., y, 411, 1883. Moingwenat.— Shea, Cath. Miss.,
404, 1855. MoiM.— Nuttall, Journal, 251, 1821.
Kouingouena.— Gravier (1701) in Jes. Rel., Lxv,
101. 1900.
Moiseyn (MdlseyUy a word of uncertain
origin, sometimes rendered as aCheyenne
name meaning *many flies* or *flint peo-
ple*, but probabl^^ of foreign derivation).
An Algonciuian tril)e which, according to
tlie tradition of the Cheyenne, adjoined
them on the n. e. in their old home in
Minnesota, and started with them on
their westward migration al)out the year
1700, but turned back before reaching the
Missouri r. It is said that some of their
descendants are still with the Cheyenne.
They are possibly identical with the Mon-
soni. (j. M. )
Arrow Men.— Dorsey in Field Coliimb. Mus. Pub.
103, pi. xix, 19a=>. Mo wtt ti yii.— Grinnell, Social
Org. Cheyennes, 136. 19a=>.
Moisie. A summer village of Monta^n-
ais and Nascapee at the mouth of Moisie
r., on the n. shore of the Gulf of St
Lawrence, Quel>ec (Hind, I^b. Penin., i,
290, 1863). In 1906 the Montagnais and
Nascapee at Moisie and Seven Islands
numbered 376.
Moiya. Given by Gibbs (Schoolcraft,
Ind. Tribes, in, 112, 1853) aa the name
of a Porno village in the vicinity of Hop-
land, Mendocino co., Cal.
Mojaalana. A former Taos village in
the mountains above the present Taos
eueblo, N. Mex.
:ojual-ua.— Bnndelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv,
32, 1892. Mojua-lu-na.— Ibid.
Mokaich. The Mountain Lion clan of
the Keresan pueblos of Laguna, Sia, San
Felipe, and Cochiti, N. Mex. The Moun-
tain Lion clan of Laguna went to that vil-
lage from the Rio Grande, dwelling first
at Mt Taylor, or Mt San Mateo. With the
Hapai (Oak ) clan it formed a phratry, but
it is probably now extinct. The clans
of this name at Sia and San Felipe are
auite extinct. (f, w. n. )
iohkach-hanuoh.— Hodge in Am. Anthrop., ix,
351, 1896 (Cochiti name; hdntwh = 'people').
Mokaich-hano.— Ibid. (Sia and San Felipe form).
Mdkaiqch-hanooi*.— Ibid. (Laguna form). Ko'-
kaitc.— Stevenson in Uth Rep. B. A. E., 19, 1894
(Sia form; tc=rh). Mo-katth.— BandelierinAreh.
Inst. Papers, ni, 293, 1890. Mokatsh hanutth.^
Bandelier, Delight Makers, 464, 1890 {hantttsh =■-
'people').
Mokaskel. A former Luisefio village
in the neighborhood of San Luis Key
930
MOKELUMNE MONACAN
[B. A, E.
mission, s. Cal. — Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
May 11, 1860.
Mokelamne. A division of the Miwok
in the country between Cosumne and
Mokelumne rs., in Eldorado, Amador,
and Sacramento cos., Cal. See Moquel-
umnan Family.
Locklomnee.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, l. 450, 1874.
Mokelemaet.— Duflot dc Mofras, Expl., ii, 383.
1S44. Mo-kel-om-ne.— Fremont, Geog. Memoir, 16,
1848. Moquelumnet.— Bancroft, Hist. Cal., iv, 73,
1886. Mttkeemnet.— Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 450,
1874. Mukelemnet.— Ibid. Muthelemaet.— Hale
in U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 630, 1846. Sooklumnes.—
Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 450, 1874 (identical?).
Mokete. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, in 1608, on Warrasqueoc cr..
Isle of Wight CO., Va.— Smith (1629),
Va., I, map, repr. 1819.
Mokohoko ( Mokohoko(i, 'he who floats vis-
ible near the surface of the water'). A
chief of the band ofSauk that took the lead
in supporting Black Hawk (q. v.) in the
Black Hawk war. He was of the Sturgeon
clan, the ruling clan of the Sauk, and was
a bitter enemy of Keokuk (q. v.). The
band still retains its identity. It refused
to leave Kansas when the rest of the tribe
went to Indian Ter., and had to be re-
moved thither by the military. It is now
known as the Black, Hawk band, and its
members are the most conservative of all
the Sauk. (w. .i.)
MokamikB ( * red round robes* ) . A band
of the Piegan division of the Siksika.
Mo-kihn'-iks.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales,
210. 1892. Red Round Robes.— Ibid., 225.
Molala. A Waiilatpuan tribe forming
the we.stern division of that family. Lit-
tle is known of their history. When first
met with they resided in the Cascade
range between Mts Hood and Scott and
on the w. slope, in Washington and Ore-
gon. The Cayuse have a tradition that
the Molala formerly dwelt with them
s. of Columbia r. and became separated
and driven westward in their wars with
hostile tribes. Their dialect, while re-
lated, is quite distinct from that of the
Cayuse, and the separation probably took
place in remote times. The name Molala
IS derived from that of a creek in Willa-
mette valley, Oreg., s. of Oregon City.
A band of these Indians drove out the
original inhabitants and occupied their
land. Subsequently the name was ex-
tended to all the bands. The present
status of the tribe is not certain. In 1849
it was estimated to number 100; in 1877
Gatschet found several families living on
the Grande Ronde res., Oreg., and in 1881
there were said to be about 20 individuals
living in the mountains w. of Klamath
lake. Those on the Grande Ronde res. are
not oflScially enumerated, butare regarded
as absorbed by the other tril)e8 with whom
they live. With regard to the rest noth-
ing is known. It is probable, however,
that there are a few scattered survivors.
The Molala joined with other bands of
Willamette valley in the treaty of Day-
ton, Oreg., Jan. 22, 1865, and by treaty
at the same place, Dec. 21, 1855, they
ceded their lands and agreed to remove
to a reservation. Chakankni, Chimbuiha,
and Mukanti are said to have been Molala
bands or settlements. (l. p. )
Amole'lish.— Gatschet, Calapooya MS., B. A. E., 81,
1877 (Calapooya name). Kukm.— <Tat8chet in
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. 2, 157, 1890 (Klamath
name). Lati-u.— <}at»chet, Molala MS., B. A. E.
(own name). La'tiwS.— Ibid. MalaU.— Sen. Ex.
Doc. 48, 34th Cong., 3d sess.. 10, 1867. Molala.—
Treaty of 1854 in U. S. Stat., x. 675, 1854. Molalal-
las.— Treaty of Dayton (1855) in U. 8. Stat.,
XII, 981, 1863. Molale.— Gatfichet, Umpqua MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1877. Molalla.— Hedges in H. R.
Ex. Doc. 37, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 130, 1857. Mo-
lallah.— White, Ten Years in Oregon, 266. 1850.
MolallaUs.— Ind. Aff. Rep. 1856, 267, 1857. Molal-
lalet.— Hedges in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37, 34th Cong.,
3d sess., 130, 1857. Molalle.— Armstrong, Oregon,
114, 1857. MolaUie.-McClane in Ind. Aff. Rep.,
269, 1889. Ko-Uy-leu.— Lyman in Oregon Hist.
Soc. Quar., i, 323, 1900. Moleaale7t.--Meek in
H. R. Ex. Doc. 76, 30th Cong., 1st sess., 10,
1848. Molealleg.—Lane in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, in, 632, 1853. Mole Alley.— Lane in Sen.
Ex. Doc. 52, 3l8t Cong., 1st sess., 171, 1850. Mole-
aUiee.— Browne (1857) in H. R. Ex. Doc; 38, 85th
Cong., 1st sess., 7, 1858. Molel.— Treaty of Dayton
(1855) in U. S. Stat., xii,981, 1863. Molele.— Hale
in U. S. Expl. Exped., vi, 214, 1846. Molelie.—
McClane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 203, 1888. Molell.—
Hedges in H. R. Ex. Doc. 37, 34th Cong., 3d sess.,
130, 1857. MoU&llas.— White in Ind. Aff. Rep.,
203, 1844. Moolal-ie.— Ex. Doc. 39, 32d Cong., Ist
sess., 2, 1852. Moolallee.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes,
III, 200, map, 1853. Mooleilis.— Tolmieand Dawson,
Com "
Aff.
Comp. Vocabs., 11, 1884. Morlal-les.— Lea in Ind.
" 1. Rep., 8, ~
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ii, pt. 2, 157, 1890 (name for
1851. Straight M6Ule.— Gatschet in
those on Grande Ronde res.) Wrole Alley. —
Lane in Ind. Aff. Rep., 160, 1850. TaMde'sta.—
Gatschet, UmpquaMS. vocab., B. A.E., 1877 (Ump-
qua name).
Molma. A Maidu village near Auburn,
Placer eo. , Cal. — Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus.
Nat. Hist., XVII, pi. xxxviii, 1905.
Momi ( Mo^miy *a people whoeat nosmall
birds which have been killed by larger
ones * ). A subgens of the Missouri gens
Cheghita, formerly a distinct people.—
Dorsey in 15th Rep. B. A. E., 240, 1897.
Momobi ( Mo^-mo-hi, a species of lizard).
A clan of the Lizard (Earth or Sand)
phratry of the Hopi.— Stephen in 8th
Rep. B. A. E., 39, 1891.
Monacan (possibly from an Algonquian ^
word signifying a digging stick orsjmde) .
A tribe and confederacy of Virginia in th«
17th century. The confederacy occupie<i'
the upper waters of James r. above the
falls at Richmond. Their chief village \
was Rasawek. They were allies of the ^
Manahoac and enemies of the Powhatan,
and spoke a language different from
that of either. They were finally incor-
porated with other remnants under the
names of Saponi and Tutelo (q. v. ). The
confederacy was composed of the Monacan
proper, Massinacac, Mohemencho, Mona-
hassano, Monasiccapano, and some other
tribes.
The Monacan proper had a chief settle-
ment, known to the whites as Monacan-
town, on James r. about 20 m. above the
BULL. 30]
MONACK MONGWA
931
falls at Richmond. In 1669 they still had
30 bowmen, or perhaps about 100 souls.
Thirty years later, the Indian population
having died out or emigrated, a Hugue-
not colony took possession of the site.
Consult Mooney, Siouan Tribes of the
East, Bull. B. A. E., 1894. ( j. m. )
WanaMim. —Smith, Va., i, 186, 1819. Kanaoheet.—
Neill, Va. Carolorum, 325, 1886. Manakan.— Doc.
of 1701 in Va. Hist. Coll., n. 8.. v, 42, 1886. Mana-
klna.— Stith (1747) quoted by Burk, Va., i, 128,
1804. Maaikiji.— Doc. of 1700 in Va. Hist. Coll.,
op. cit., 48. Kannaoaiu.— Strachey (m. 1612) , Va.,
41, 1849. Mamiaohin.— Doc, of 1701 In Va. Hist.
Coll., op. cit., 45. Mannakin.— Lawson (1714),
Hist Carolina, 187, 1860. Mantkin.— Herrman,
map (1670) in Rep. Bound. Com.. 1873 (erroneously
located on Pamunkey r.). Manyoan.— Doc. of
1700 in Va. Hist. Coll., op. cit., 51. Moaaeans.—
Smith, Va. , i, 116. 1819. Konaohant.— Yong ( 1634 )
in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th s.. ix, 112. 1871.
Monakini.— Lederer, Discov., 9, 1672. Monanaoah
Kahowaoah.— Archer (1607) in Smith, Works,
Arber ed., xlvi, 1884. Monanacant.— Ibid., 1.
Monooans.— Strachey, op. cit., 27.
Monaok. See Moonack.
ih MonahasBano (a name of uncertain ety-
mology, but most probably connected
with Yesdnf the name which the Tutelo
applied to themselves). A tribe of the
Monacan confederacy, formerly living on
the 8. side of James r., near the moun-
tains, in Bedford and Buckingham cos.,
Va. Lederer describes them as tall and
warlike, and says their totem was three
arrows. In 1671 they were 25 m. from the
Saponi, on Staunton r. They seem to
have been next in importance to the
Monacan in the confederacy. See Tutelo.
Consult Mooney, Siouan Tribes of the
East. Bull. B. A. E., 1894. (j. m.)
TlanMMkiM.— Batta (1671) quoted by Fernow,
Ohio Val., 221, 1890 (misprint). Eanahaskiet.—
Batts (1671) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., in, 197, 1853.
EanohaskiM.— Batts, ibid., 194. Monahaaanugh.—
Smith {ca. 1629), Va., i, map, 1819. Koaahaasan-
oot.— Jefferson,- Notes, 134, 1794. Monahaasan-
ngliea.— Strachey (ca. 1612) , Va., 102. 1849. Hahys-
■aas.— Lederer, I)iscov. , 9, 1672. Kobissan.— Ibid. .
map (misprint). Teaah.— Hale in Proc. Am.
Phflofi. 8oc., XXI, 11, 188a4 (own name: see 7\*-
telo). Yea^".— Hale,MS.,B.A.E.,1877. Yeaang.—
Hale in Proc. Am. Philos. Soc, op. cit.
Monakatuatha. See Half King.
Monanank. A village, possibly Ck)noy,
on the Potomac in 1608, about Breton
bay, or Clements branch, St Marvs co.,
Md.
Monashaokotoog. A tribe which, with
the VVunnashowatuckoog, lived w. of
Boston, Mass., in 1687. They were
friends of the Pequot and enemies of the
Narraganset. — Williams (1687) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Coll., 4th 8., VI, 194, 1863.
Monaiiooapano. A tribe of the Monacan
confederacy, formerly living in Louisa
and Fluvanna cos., Va., between the
James and the headwaters of the Pamun-
key. The derivation of the name is un-
known, but it may have some connection
wiUi Saponi. See Mooney, Siouan Tribes
of the East, Bull. B. A. E., 1894. (j. m.)
MaMioapanoea.— Macauley. N. Y., n, 178, 1829. Mo-
naaioeapanoea.— Jefferson, Notes, 134, 1794. Mo-
I.— Boudinot, Star in the West, 127,
1816. Konaaiokapanougha.— Smith {ca. 1629), Va.,
I, 134, 1819. Konaaukapanough. — Ibid., map.
Monax. See Moonack.
Moncachtape ('killer of pain and fa-
tigue'). A Yazoo Indian, noted chiefly
on account of his real or supposed trav-
els and his knowledge of various Indian
languages. Le Pa^e du Pratz, during his
residence in i^uisiana about the middle
of the 18th century, met Moncachtape
and obtained from liim an account of his
wanderings, according to which (DuPratz,
Hist. La., Ill, 89-128, 1758), after the loss •
of his wife and children, he had devoted
much of his time to traveling. One of
his journeys was to the N. E., in which
he passe<l up the Ohio, visited the Shaw-
nee and Iroquois, and wintered among
the Abnaki; thence he went up the St
Lawrence and returned to his home by
way of the Mississippi. His second
trip was to the N. W. coast by the
route subsequently traveled by Lewis
and Clark. He mentions the Tamaroa,
Kansa, and Amikwa, and although he
alludes to numerous tribes seen during his
passage down Columbia r., he mentions
no tribal names. He finally reached the
Pacific coast, where, in addition to In-
dians, he met with bearded white men,
who " came from sun-setting, in search of
a yellow stinking wood which dyes a
fine yellow color." With other Indians
he ambushed and killed 11 of these
strangers, 2 of whom bore firearms. These
whites are descrilied as small, but having
large heads and long hair in the middle
of the crown and wrapped in a great
many folds of stuff, while their clothes
were soft and of several colors. This
story, so far as it relates to the western
trip, is very doubtful on its face, and the
names of tribes which it gives extend
only as far as DuPratz' own knowl-
edge of them; yet Quatrefages (Human
Species, 205, 1895) accepts the story as
credible, and that Moncachtape under-
stood a number of languages is clearly
proven. See also Clarke, Pion. Davs in
Oreg., 1905. (c. t.)
Monemins. A village of the Mahican
tribe, known as Monemius' Castle from
the name of the resident chief, situated in
the 17th century on Haver id., in Hudson
r., near Cohoes* falls, Albany co., N. Y.
(.1. M.)
Koeneminea Caatle.— Deed of 1630 in N. Y. Doc.
Col. Hist., XIV, 1, 1883. Moenemixmea Caatle.— Pat-
ent of 1630, ibid., i, 44, 1856. Konemiu'a oaatle.—
Ruttenber, Tribes Hudson R., 85, 1872.
Mong (ManQj Moon'). A gens of the
Chippewa (q. v^. Cf. Maak.
Mahng.— Tanner, Narrative, 814, 1830. Mang.—
Wm. Jones, inf'n, 1906. Mank.— Gatschet, Oiibwa
MS., B. A. E., 1882. Mong.— Warren (1862) in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 44, 1885.
Mon^a ( Mon-gwd^ * loon * ) . A gens of
the Miami (q. v.). — Morgan, Anc. Soc,
168, 1877.
932
MONK 8 MOUND — MONSONI
[b. a. e.
Monk's Mound. See Cahokia Mound,
Monnato {Mon-nH^-to, *8now'). A gens
of the Miami (q.v.). — Morgan, Anc. S)c.,
168, 1877.
Mono. A general tenn applied to the
Shoshonean tribes of s. e. California by
their neighbors on the w. The origin
and meaning of the name are obscure, its
identity with the Spanish wiowo, 'monkey,'
and its similarity, at least in certain dia-
lects, to the Yokuts word for * fly ' {monaiy
etc.), are probably only coincidences.
For subdivisions, see Mono-Paviotso.
Honaoheet. — Bunnell quoted by Powers in Ck)nt.
N. A. Ethnol., iii, 350, 1877. Kanaehe.— Purcell in
Ind. Aff. Rep., 87, 1870. Koan'-au-si.— Powers in
Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 320, 1877 (Nishinam
name). Monache. — Belknap in Ind. Aflf. Rep., 17,
1876 ( "the usual form of the name as heard among
the southern Yokuts; cf. the Maidu (Nishinam)
name, preceding"— A. L. K.). Mona'-ohi.— Pow-
ers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., ni, 350, 1877. Monaa.—
Johnston in Sen. Ex. Doc. 61, 32d Cong., 1st sess.,
22, 1852. Monoet. Johnston in Ind. Aff. Rep.,
251, 1851. Mono Pi-TJtet.— Campbell in Ind. Aff.
Rep., 119, 1866. Monot.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
May 8, 1863. Koo-tah-ah.— Wessels (1853) in H. R.
Ex. Doc. 76, 34th Cong., 3d sess., 31, 1857. Kutaa.—
A. L. Kroeber, inf n, 1905 (Chukchansi name; de-
notes that they are e. or upstream). Kut'-ha.—
Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 396, 1877.
# Mono-Paviotso. One of the three great di-
alecticgroups into which theShoshoneans
of the great plateau are distinguished.
It includes the Mono of s. e. California,
the Paviotso, or "Paiute," of w. Nevada,
and the ** Snakes" and Saidyuka of e.
Oregon. Part of the Bannock may be
relate^l to these, but the eastern Bannock
have affinities with the Ute.
The bands which seem to have formed
the social unit of these people were each
under one chief, and several of these are
said to have been united into confedera-
cies, such as the "Paviotso confederacy,"
but it is doubtful whether the relations
existing between the constituent parts
should properly be so termed.
The bandsordivisions mentioned within
the area occupied by this group are the
following: Agaivanuna, Genega's band,
Hadsapoke*8 band, Holkoma, Hoone-
booey, Intimbich, Itsaatiaga, Kaidatoia-
bie, Kaivanungavidukw, Koeats, Koko-
heba, Kosipatuwiwagaiyu, Kotsava, Ko-
yuhow, Kuhpattikutteh, Kuyuidi'ka,
Laidukatuwiwait, Ix)him, Loko, Naha-
ego, Nim, Nogaie, Odukeo's band, Olan-
che, Oualuck's band, Pagan tso, Pagwiho,
Pamitoy, Pavuwiwuyuai, Petenegowat,
Petodseka, Piattuiabbfe, Poatsituhtikuteh,
Poskesa, San Joaquins* band, Sawaga-
tiva, Shobarboobeer, Sunananahogwa,
Temoksee, Togwingani, Tohaktivi, Toi-
wait, Tonawit^wa, Tonoyiet*s band, To-
quimas. To Repe's band, Tosarke's band,
Tsapakah, Tubianwapu, Tupustikutteb,
Tuziyammos, Wahi*s. band, Wahtatkin,
Walpapi, Warartika, Watsequeorda*8
band, Winnemucca's band, Woksachi,
Yahuskin, and Yammostuwiwagaiya.
Numaltachi, given as a village on
Tuolomne r., Cal., may in reality be
another band.
From figures given in the report of the
Indian office for 1903 it would appear
that the total number in this division is
in the neighborhood of 5,400.
Monongahela. A variety of whisky.
Says Bartlett (Diet, of Americanisms, 401,
1877) : "A river of Pennsylvania, so called,
gave its name to the rye whisky of which
lai^e quantities were produced in its
neighborhood, and indeed to American
whisky in general, as distinguished from
Usquebaugh and Inishowen, the Scotch
and Irish sorts." The name is of Algon-
quian origin, but its etymology is un-
certain, (a. f. c. )
MonBoni (Mmigsoaeythinyuwok, * moose e^
people.' — Franklin). An Algonquian
tribe in British America, often classed as
a part of the Cree, to whom they are
closely related, although they seem to be
almost as closely related to flie northern
Chippew^a. The first notice of them is in
the Jesuit Relation for 1671. In that of
1672 they are located on the shore of
James bay, about the mouth of Moose r.,
which, according to Richardson, received
its name from them. They are referred
to under the name Aumonssoniks in the
Proces verbal of the Prise de possession
(1671), but were not represented at the
ceremony, though Charlevoix asserts the
contrary . Although Dobbs ( 1 744 ) speaks
of them as the Moose River Indians, he
locates a village or band on the w. bank
of Rainy r., near Rainy lake, and others
on the N. shore of this lake. Some con-
fusion has arisen in regard to the habitat
and linguistic connection of the tribe from
the fact that the geographic designation
**Mosonee" is frequently used to include
all that portion of Keewatin and adjacent
territory stretching along Hudson bay
from Moose r. northward to Nelson r., a
region occupied chiefly by the Maskegon.
The usual and most permanent home of
the Monsoni, however, has been the re-
gion of Moose r. According to Chauvign-
erie their totem was the moose. There
is no separate enumeration of them in
the recent Canadian official reports. See
Mousonee. (j. m. c. t.)
Aiunonuoniki.— Prise de possession (1671) in Par-
rot, M^m., 293, 1864. Aumossomiks.^Verwyst,
Missionary Labors, 232,.1886. Aamouuonnitet.—
Prise de possession (1671 ) in Margry , D4c. , i,97, 1875.
Oreetof moose Factory.— Franklin, Joum. to Polar
Sea, 1, 96, 1824. Chens de marais. — Bacqueville de la
Potherie, Hist. Am. Sept., i, 174, 1753. Mongsoa
Eithynyook.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Antiq. Soc.,
II, 24, 1836. Mongsoa-eythinyoowuc. — Franklin,
Joum. to Polar Sea, l, 96, 1824. Monsaunis.—
Bacqueville de la Potherie, Hist. Am. Sept., i, 174,
1753. Monsonics.— Keane in Stanford, Compend.,
523, 1878. Monsonies.— Franklin, Joum. to Polar
Sea, 56, 1824. Monsonis.— Chauvignerie (1736) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., ix, 1054, 1855. Monsonnic.—
Jes.Rel. 1671, 30, 1858. Monzoni.— Lahontan, New
Voy., I, 231, 1703. Koose-deer Indians.— Franklin,
BULL. .10 J
MONSWIDISHIANUN MONTAQNAI8
933
Joum. to Polar Sea, l, 96, 1824. Moose Indians.—
Horden.'Bk. of Ck>mmon Prayer in Language of
Moose Indians, title-page, 1859. Moose Biver In-
dians.—Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 13, 1744. Morisons.-
Chauvignerie (17S6) quoted by Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, III, 65fi, 1863 (misprint). Mousonis.— Mc-
Kenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 80, 1858. Na-
tion of the Marshes.— Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 24, 1744.
Ott-Monssonis.— Tailhan, noteto Perrot. M4m., 293.
1864. Wamussonewug.— Tanner, Narr., 816, 1830
(Ottawa name) .
Monswidishianan ( Md^^s imfdishVanum ) .
The Moose phratry of the Menominee,
also a subphratry or gens thereof. — Hoff-
man in 14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. 1, 42, 189(i.
^ MontagnaiB (French ^mountaineers',
from the mountainous character of their
country). A group of closely related Al-
gonquian tribes in Canada, extending
from about St Maurice r. almost to the
Atlantic, and from the St I^wrence to the
watershed of Hudson bay. The tribes of
the group speak several well-marked dia-
lects. They are the Astouregami^oukh,
Attikiriniouetch, Bersiamite, Chisedec,
Escoumains, Espamichkon, Kakouchaki,
Mauthsepi, Miskouaha, Mouchaoua-
ouastiirinioek, Nascapee, Nekoubaniste,
Otaguottouemin, Oukesestigouek, Ou-
mamiwek, Papinachois, Tadousac, and
Weperigweia. Their linguistic relation
appears to be closer with the Cree of
Athabasca lake, or Ayabaskawininiwug,
than with any other branch of the Algon-
quian family. Champlain met them at
the mouth of the Saguenay in 1603,
where they and other Indians were cele-
brating with bloody rites the capture of
Iroquois prisoners. Six years later he
united witn them the Hurons and Algon-
kin in an expedition against the Iroquois.
In the first Jesuit Relation, written by
Biard (1611-16), they are spoken of as
friends of the French. From that time
their name has a place in Canadian his-
tory, though they exerteil no decided in-
fluence on the settlement and growth of
the colony. The first missionary work
among them was begun in 1615, and mis-
sions were subsequently established on
the upper Saguenay ancl at L. St John.
These were continued, though with occa-
sional and long interruptions, until 1776.
The Montagnais fought the Micmac, and
often the Eskimo, but their chief and
inveterate foes were the Iroquois, who
drove them for a time from the banks of
the St Lawrence and from their strong-
holds about the upper Saguenay, com-
pelling them to seek safety at more
distant points. After peace was estab-
lished between the French and the Iro-
quois they returned to their usual haunt**.
L^ck of proper food, epidemics, and con-
tact with civilization are reducing their
numbers. Turner (11th Rep. B. A. E.,
1894) says they roam over the areas s. of
Hamilton inlet as far as the Gulf of St
Lawrence. Their western limits are im-
perfectly known. They trade at all the
stations along the accessible coast, many of
them at RigoTet and North west r. Sagard,
in 1632, described them as Indians of the
lowest type in Canada. Though they
have occasionally fought with"! bravery,
they are comparatively timid. They have
always l)een more less nomadic and,
although accepting the teachings of the
missionaries, seem incapable of resigning
the freedom of the forest for life in vil-
lages, nor t*an they be induceil to cultivate
the soil as a means of support Mr
Chisholm describes them as nonest, hos-
pitable, and benevolent, but very super-
stitious. Those who were inducea to set-
tle on the lower St I^wrence ai)pear to
be subject to sickness, which is thinning
their numbers. All who have not been
brought directly under religious influence
are licentious. Conjuring was nmch prac-
tised by their medicine-men. Some of
the early missionaries speak highly of
their religious susceptibility. They oury
their dead in the earth, digging a hole 3
ft deep and occasionally lining it with
wood. The corpse is usually laid on its
side, though it is sometimes placed in a
sitting position. Above the grave is built
a little birch-bark hut and through a win-
dow the relatives thrust bits of tobacco,
venison, and other morsels. No reliable
estimate can be given of their former num-
bers, but it is known that they have
greatly decreased from sitrkness and star-
vation consequent on the destruction of
game. In 1812 they were supposed to
number about 1,500; in 1857 they were
estimated at 1,100, and in 1884 they were
officially reported at 1,395, living at
Betsiamits, (Bersimis), Escoumains,
Godbout, (Jrand Romaine, Lake St John,
and Mingan, in Quebec. In 1906 they,
together wit 1 1 the Nascapee, numbered,
according to the Canadian official report,
2,183, distributed as follows: Bersimis,
499; Escoumains, 43; Natashquan, 76;
Go<lbout, 40; (irand Romaine, 176; I^ke
St John, 551; Mingan, 241; St Augustine,
181; Seven Islands and Moisie, 376.
Consult Chamberlain in Ann. Archaiol.
Rep. Ontario 1905, 122, 1906.
The bands and villages of the Mon-
tagnais are: Appeelatat, Assuapmushan,
Attikamegue, Bonne Esp^rance, Chicou-
timi, F^quimaux Point, (iodbout, He
Percee (mission), Itanuimeou (mission).
Islets de Jeremie (mission), Kapimin'a-
kouetiik, Mautha^jn, Mingan, Moisie,
Mushkoniatawee, Musquarro, Nabisippi,
Natashquan, Pashasheebo, Romaine, and
St Augustine. (j. m. c. t. )
Algonkin Inferieures.— Hind, Lao. Penin., ii, 10,
1863. Algonquins Inferieurs.— Jes. Rel.. ni, index,
1858. Bergbewohner.— Waleh, map of Am., 1805
(German: 'Mountaineers'). Ohauhagueronon.—
Sagard (1632), Hist. Can., iv, 1866 (Huron name).
Ohauoironon.— Ibid. Kebiks.— Schoolcraft, Ind.
934
MONTAGN AIS MOKT ATTK
[B. I. W
Tribes, V, 40, 1855 (on account of their warning
cry of " Kebikl " when approaching in canoes
the rapids of the St Lawrence near Quebec).
Lower Algonkiiis.— Jefferys, Fr. Doms., pt. 1, 46,
1761. MontagiiaU.->)e8. Rel. 1611, 8, im. Hon-
tagiuutt.-Jes. Rel. 1633, 3. 1858. Montagnards.—
Jes. Rel. 1632, 5, 1858. Montagnart.— Ohamplain
(1609), (Euvres, iii, 194, 1870. Montagnft.—
Champlain (1603), ibid., ii, 9, 1870. Montagnets.—
Jes. Rel. 1611, 15, 1858. Montagnez.— Ohamplain
(1603), (Euvres, ii, 8, 1870. Montagnoit.— Lahon-
tan. New Voy., i, 207, 1703. Montagrets.— Me. Hist.
Soc. Coll., I, 288, 1865 (misprint). Montagnet.—
McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, iii, 81, 1854
(misprint). Montaignairs.— Champlain (1615),
CEuvres, iv, 22, 1870. Montaignert.— Champlain
(1618), ibid., 113. Montaignet.— Champlain (1603),
ibid., II, 49, 1870. Montaignets.— Ibid. (1609}, v, pt.
I, 144. Montainien.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tnbes, v,
40, 1855. Montanaxo.— Hervas ( ca. 1785) q uoted by
Vater. Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 347, 1816. iontaniak.—
Gatscnet, Penobscot MS., 1887 (Penobscot name).
Mountaineers.— Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., VI, 16,
1800. Mountain In dians.—Kingsley, Stand. Nat.
Hist., pt. 6, 149, 1885. Mountaneen.— Lahontan,
New Voy., i,230, 1703. Mountaneei.— Vater, Mith.,
pt. 3, sec. 3, 344, 1816. Neoonbayistet.— Lattr^,
map, 1784 (misprint). Ke-e-no-il-no. — Hind, Lab.
Penin., ii, 10, 1863 ('perfect people', one of the
names used by themselves) . Nehiroirini.— Kings-
ley, Stand. Nat. Hist., pt. 6, 149, 1885. Kekouban-
iates.— Belli n , map, 1755. Keloubaniates.— Esnauts
and Rapilly, map, 1777 (misprint). Sheshata-
poosh.— Gallatin in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii,
ciii, 1848. Shethatapooshshoith.— Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 1st 8., VI, 16, 1800. Shoudimank.— Peyton
? uoted by Lloydin Jour. Anthrop. Inst., i v, 29,1875
'good Indians': Beothuk name). Skataputho-
ieh.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 536, 1878.
SkeUputhoiah.— Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., vi, 16,
1800. Tshe-tfti-uetin-euemo.— Hind, Lab. Penin.,
II, 101, 863 ( 'people of the north-northeast' : name
used by themselves). TJikwawgomeet. — Tanner,
Narr., 316, 1830.
jatschet, Penob-
UsMgine'wi.-
scot MS., 1887 ('people of the outlet' [Hewitt] :
Penobscot name). Ussaghenick.— vetromile,
Abnakis, 50, 1866 (Etchimin uame).
Montap^naiB. An Athapascan group,
comprisinc: the Chipewyan, Athabasca,
Etheneldeii, and Tatsanottine tribes,
which, though now living on the plains
and in the valleys of British North Amer-
ica, migrated from the Rocky mts. —
Petitot, Diet. D6n6-Dindji^, xx, 1876.
For synonymy, see Chipewyan,
Montagnard. An ethnic and geographic
Athapascan group comprising the Tsat-
tine, Sarsi, Sekani, and Nahane tribes liv-
ing in the Rocky mts. of British North
America. The name was also formerly
applied to the eastern Al^onquian people
now known as Montagnais.
Montagnardes.— Kingsley, Stand. Nat. Hist.,pt. 6,
143, 1885. Montagnards. — Petitot, Diet. D^n^
Dindii6, xx, 1876. Mountaineers.— Morgan in N.
Am. Rev., 58, 1870.
Montank ( meaning uncertain ) . A term
that has been used in different senses,
sometimes limited to the particular band
or tribe known by this name, but in a
broader sense including most of the
tribes of Long Island, excepting those
about the w. end. It is occasionally used
incorrectly as equivalent to Metoac, q. v.
The Indians of Long Island were closely
related to the Indians of Massachusetts
and Connecticut. Tooker (Cockenoe-de-
Long Island, 1896) says that the dialect of
the Montauk was more nearly related to
the Natiek of Maesachujetta than was the
Narraganset
The Montauk, in the limited sense,
formerly oct*upied Easthampton tp., Suf-
folk CO.", at the E. end of Long Island^
and controlled all the other tribes of the
isiatid, except those near the w. end.
That thei?e ^>-catle<l trihe^^ wen* but parte
of one group or triVrt', or the loosely
("onnect^l elements of what had been
an organized body^ seems apparent,
Ruttenber, epeaking of the Montauk
in the Ii nil tea senae, save: **Thisi diief-
tainey \\as acki^owk^dgetl both by the
Indians and the Euroj>eans as the ruling
family of the island. They were indeed
the Kead of thcs tribe of ilontauk, the
other divisions named l>eing simply clans
DAVID PHARAOH, "LAST KINO OF THE MONTAUK"
or groups, as in the c^se of other tribes.
. . . Wyandance, their sachem, waa
also the grand sachem of Paumanacke,
or Sewanhackey, as the island was called.
Nearly all the deeds for lands were con-
firmed by him. His younger brothers,
Nowedonah and Poygratasuck [Po^ata-
cut], were respectively sachems of the
Shinecock and the Manhasset." The
Rockaway and Cannarsee at the w. end
were probably not included. It is doubt-
ful whether he is correct in including
the west-end Indians in the confederacy.
The principal Montauk village, which
probably bore the name of the tribe,
was about Ft Pond, near Montauk pt.
The Pequot made them and their sub-
ordinated tributary, and on the destruc-
tion of that tribe in 1637, the Narra-
eanset began a series of attacks which
nnally, about 1659, forced the Montauk,
BOLL. 30] MONTEBEY INDIANS — MONTEZTTMA CASTLE
935
who had lost the greater part of their num-
ber by pestilence, to retire for protection
to the whites at Easthampton. Since 1 641
they had been tributary to New England.
When first known they were numerous,
and even after the pestilence of 1658-69,
were estimated at about 500. Then began
a rapid decline, and a century later only
162 remained, most of whom joined the
Brotherton Indians of New York, about
1788, so that in 1829 only about 30 were
left on Long Island, and 40 years later
these had dwindled to half a dozen indi-
viduals, who, with a few Shinnecock,
were the last representatives of the Long
Island tribes. They preserved a form of
tribal or^nization into the 19th century
and retained their hereditary chiefs until
the death of their last **king," David
Pharaoh, about 1875. A few mixed-
bloods are still ofl&cially recognized by
the state of New York as constituting a
tribe under Wyandanch Pharaoh, son of
David. (j. M.)
ManUout— Gardener (1660) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 3d 8., in, 154, 1833. Kantaoke.— Deed of 1657
in Thompson, Long Id., 344, 1839. KanUuket.—
Gardener (1660) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 3d s., iii,
166,1833. Keantaettt.— Ibid., 153. MeanUukett.—
Doc. of 1671 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 648,
1888. Meantiout— Gardener (1660) as quoted by
Drake, Bk. Inds., bk. 2, 68, 1848. Melotouket.—
Boudinot, Star in the West, 127. 1816 (misprint).
HanaUukett.— Lovelace (1671) in N. Y. Doc. Col.
Hist, XIV, 652, 1883. Mentakett— Deed (1661) in
Thompson, Long Id., i, 299, 1843 (place). Men-
toake.— Deed of 1657. ibid., S44, 1839. Meontas-
kett— Baily (1669) in R. I. Col. Rec, ii, 276, 1857.
Xeontawket— Clarke (1669), ibid., 285. Meun-
tacut.— Indian deed of 1648 cited by W. W. Tooker,
inf'n, 1906. Mirrachtauhadcy.— Doc. of 1645 in
N. Y. Doc. Ccl. Hist., xiv, 60, 1883 (said by Tooker,
Algong. Ser.^i, 15, 1901, to be a Dutch form of
Montauk). Montaout.— James {ca. 1654) in Mass.
Hiat. Soc. Coll., 4th s., vii, 482. 1865. Montake,—
Doc. of 1657 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 416, 1883.
Montaka.— Vater, Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 839. 1816.
Mantank.— Smithson. Miscel. Coll., xiv, art. 6, 25,
1878(mlq>rint). Montauokett.—Doc.of 1675inN. Y.
Doc. Col. Hist., XIV, 700. 1883. Montaug.— Latham
in Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond.,59, 1856. KonUuk.—
Deed of 1666 in Thompson, Long Id., i, 312, 1843.
Montaukett— Deed {ca. 1655). ibid., 183, 1839.
Montaukttt.— Doc. of 1675 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
XIV. 699. 1883. MonUuque.— Doc. of 1669. ibid.,
618. Montoake. — Doc. of 1657, ibid., 416. Mon-
tooka.— Tryon (1774). ibid., vill, 451, 1857. Mon-
tok,— Johnson (1777). ibid., 714. Montuokt.—
Devotion {ca. 1761) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
iBt 8., X, 106, 1809. Mountaoutt.— Deed of 1648 in
Thompson, Long Id., i, 294, 1843. Muntake. —Doc.
of 1677 in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., xiv, 729, 1883.
MunUuokett.— Doc. of 1675, ibid., 696. KunUu-
kett.— Doc. of 1668. ibid., 606.
Monterey Indiani. The Costanoan In-
dians of Monterey co., Cal., numbering
more than 1(X) in 1856. A vocabulary
taken by Taylor (Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20,
1860) at that time is Rumsen. There are
prolMibly also remnants of the Esselen
and other divisions of the Mutsun in the
region of Monterey.
Monteinma, Carlos. An educated full-
blood Apache, known among his people
in childhood as. Wasajah ( * Beckoning* ),
bom about 1866 in the neighborhood of
the Four Peaks of the Mazatzal mts. , pres-
ent 8. E. Arizona. In Oct., 1871, he was
taken captive, with 16 or 18 other chil-
dren including his two sisters, in a mid-
night raid by the Pima on his band,
during the absence of the men on a mis-
sion of peace, while encamped in the
Superstition mts., 40 or 50 m. w. of Globe.
In this raid 30 or more of the Apache
were killed. The captives were taken
by the I*inm to their rancherias on the
Gila, whence, after a week's detention,
Wasajah was taken to Adamsville, below
Florence, and sold to Mr C. Gentile, a
native of Italy, who w^as then prospecting
in Arizona. Some months after the raid
Wasajah' s mother, who had escaped, was
informed by an Indian runner that her
boy had been seen at Camp Date Creek.
Determined to recover her child, she ap-
plied to the agent for permission to leave
the reservation, and being refused de-
parted without leave. Her body was
found later in a rugged pass in the moun-
tains, where she^ad been shot by a
native scout. Wasajah was taken by Mr.
Gentile to Chicago and was called by him
Carlos Montezuma — (^arlos, from his own
name, Montezuma, from the so-called
Casa Montezuma (q. v.), near the Pima
villages. He entered the public schools
of Chicago in 1872, remaining until 1875,
from which time until 1884 his education
was continued in the public schools of
Galesburg, 111., Brooklyn, N. Y., and
IJrbana, 111., and in the University of
Illinois at the last-named place. In 1884
he entered the Chicago Medical School,
from which he was graduated in 1889,
receiving in the same year an apjwint-
nient as physician in the U. S. Indian
School at Stevenson, N. Dak'. From 1890
until 1896 Dr Montezuma has served as
physician successively at the Western
Shoshone agency in Nevada, the Colville
agency in Washington, and at the Car-
lisle Indian School. In the latter year
he resigned from the service of the Indian
department and settled in Chicago, where
he is now engaged in the practice of his
profession, in teaching in the College of
Physicians and Surgeons and in the Post-
graduate Medical School, and in arous-
ing interest in his people through his
writings.
Montezuma Castle. A prehistoric cliff-
dwelling on the right bank of Beaver cr.,
a tributary of Rio Verde, 3 m. from old
Camp Verde, central Arizona; popularly
so-called because supposed to have been
once occupied by the Aztecs, whereas
there is no ground whatever for the belief
that any Southwestern pueblo or cliff-
village is of Mexican origin. The build-
ing is constructed in a natural recess
in the side of a limestone cliff, the base
of which is 348 ft from the edge of the
stream and about 40 ft above it. The
936
MONTEZUMA WELL MONTOUR
[b. a. b.
building, which is accessible only by
means of ladders, consists of 5 stories, and
in the same cliff are several cave-dwell-
ings. The foundation of Montezuma
Castle rests on cedar timbers laid longi-
tudinally on flat stones on the ledge.
The front wall is about 2 ft thick at the
bottom and 13 in. at the top, and leans
slightly toward the cliff. The first story
consists of two small living rooms and a
storeroom. The second floor, access to
which is ^ned through a small opening
in the ceiling of the first story, is more
extensive, consisting of 4 apartments,
bounded behind by the most massive
wall of masonry in the entire structure,
and resting on a
ledge even with
the floor of the
second story. It
is 28 ft in height,
rising to the fifth
story, around the
iront of which it
forms a battle-
ment 4J ft high.
It leans slightly
toward the cliff,
and is strongly
but not symmet-
rically curved
inward. The
chord of the arc
described by the
top of the wall
measures 43 ft,
and the greatest
distance from
chord to circum-
ference 8 ft.
The third floor
comprises the
most extensive
tier of rooms in
the structure,
extending across
the entire alcove
in the cliff in
which the house
is built. There
are 8 of these
rooms, in addition to 2 porches. The
fourth floor consists of 3 rooms, neatly
constructed, through the ceiling of one
of which access is gained to the fifth
or uppermost floor, which consists of a
long porch or gallery having a battle-
ment m front and an elevated backward
extension on the right, with 2 rooms
filling the corresponding space on the
left. These 2 rooms are roofed by the
rocky arch of the cliff, and are loftier
than the lower chambers. Montezuma
Castle, or Casa Montezuma, shows evi-
dence of long occupancy in prehistoric
times. Some of the rooms are smoothly
plastered and smoke-blackened; the plas-
tering bears fingerrmarks and impressions
of the thumb and hand. The rooms are
ceiled with willows laid horizontally
across rafters of ash and black alder;
upon this is a thick layer of reeds placed
transversely, and the whole plastered on
top with mortar, forming a floor to the
chamber above. The ends of the rafters
exhibit hacking with stone implements.
The building, which threatened to col-
lapse, was repaired by the Arizona An-
tiquarian Association about 1895, and in
1906 it was declared a national monu-
ment hy proclamation of the President of
the United States. Its origin is unknown.
See Mearns in Pop. Sci. Month., Oct. 1890
(from whose de-
scription the
above details
are extracted);
Hewett in Am.
Anthrop., vi,
637, 1904; Land
of Sunshine, Los
Angeles, x, 44,
Montezuma
Well. A laive
depression in the
form of a "tank'*
or well in the
summit of a low
mesa on Beaver
cr., about 9 m.
N. of old Camp
Verde, Ariz., in
which are the
well-preserved
remains of sev-
eral cliff-dwell-
ings.
M 0 n 1 0 chtana
('a comer in the
back part of the
hut'). AKnai-
akhotana clan
of Cook inlet,
Alaska. — Rich-
ardson, A r c t .
Exped., I, 407,
1851.
Montour. About 1665 a French noble-
man named Montour settled in Can-
by an Indian woman,
Huron, he became the
son and two daughters.
Montour grew up among
those Indiana, who were at that time
in alliance with the French. In 1685,
while in the French service, he was
wounded in a fight with two Mohawk
warriors on L. Champlain. Subsequently
he deserted the French cause to live with
the **uppernations" of Indians. Through
him, in 1708, Lord Cornbury succeeded
in persuading 12 of these western tribes,
including the Miami and the Hurons, to
ada, where,
probably a
father of a
This son of
BULL. 30]
MONTOUR
937
trade at Albany. For this work , in al ien-
ating the upper nations from the French
trade and cause, he was killed in 1709 by
order of the Marquis de Vaudreuil, gov-
ernor of Canada, who boasted that, had
Montour been taken alive, he would have
had him hanged. One of the two daugh-
ters of the French nobleman, while
living on the Susquehanna and the Ohio,
became a noted interpreter and friend of
the English, and was known as Madam
Montour. Her sister appears to have
married a Miami Indian.
Authorities regarding the Montours are
not always consistent and are sometimes
not reconcilable as to statements of ma-
terial facts. Mjadam Montour appears to
have been bom in Canada previous to the
year 1684. When about 10 years of age
she was captured by some Iroquois war-
riors and adopted, probably by the Seneca,
for at maturity she married a Seneca
named Roland Montour, by whom she
had 4, if not 5, children, namely, Andrew,
Henry, Robert, Lewis, and Margaret, the
last becoming the wife of Katarioniecha,
who lived in the neighborhood of Sha-
mokin, Pa. Roland had a brother called
"Stuttering John*' and a sister variously
known as Catherine, Kate, Catrina, and
Catreen. After the death of Roland,
Madam Montour married the notecl
Oneida chief named Carondowanen, or
**Big Tree," who later took the name
Robert Hunter in honor of the royal gov-
ernor of the province of New York.
About 1729 her husband, Robert, was
killed in battle with the Catawba, against
whom he was waging war. Madam Mon-
tour first appeared as an official interpre-
ter at a conference at Albany in August,
1711, between the delegates of the Five
Nations and Gov. Hunter of New York.
This waa probably the occasion on
which her husband adopted the name
Robert Hunter. The wanton murder of
her brother Andrew bv Vaudreuil was
bitterly resented by Madam Montour,
and she emploved her great influence
among the Indians with such telling
effect against the interests of the French
that the French governor sought to per-
suade her to remove to Canada by the
offer of great compensation and valuable
emoluments. His efforts were unsuc-
cessful. Finally, in 1719, he sent her
sister to attempt to prevail on her to for-
sake the people of her adoption and the
English cause, whereupon the Commis-
sioners of Indian Affairs, learning of the
overtures of the French governor, appre-
ciating the value of her services to the
province, and fearing the effect of her
Cjible disaffection, invited her to Al-
y. It was then discovered that for a
year she had not received her stipulated
pay, so it was agreed by the commission-
ers that she should thereafter receive a
"man's pay," and she was satisfied.
Madam Montour acted also as interpreter
in 1727 in Philadelphia at a conference
between Lieut. Gov. Gordon and his
council on the one hand and the several
chiefs and delegates of the Six Nations,
the * ' Conestogas, Gangawese, and the
Susquehanna Indians," on the other.
It is claimed that Madam Montour was a
lady in manner and education, was very
attractive in mind .and body, and that at
times she was entertained' by ladies of
the best society of Philadelphia; but as
her sister was married to a Miami war-
rior, and she herself was twice married
to Indians of the Five Nations, it is prob-
able that her refinement and education
were not so marked as claimed, and that
the ladies of Philadelphia treated her
only with considerate kindness, and noth-
ing more. Nevertheless, from the testi-
mony of those who saw and knew her,
but contrary to the statement of Lord
Cornburv, who knew her brother, it
seems almost certain that she was a
French-Canadian without any admixture
of Indian blood in her veins, and that for
some unaccountable reason she preferred
the life and dress of her adopted people.
Whatever Roland's attitude was toward
the proprietary government, that of his
wife was always unifonnly friendly, and
after her second marriage it was even
more cordial. Such was the loyalty of
the family of Madam Montour that at
least two of her sons, Henry and Andrew,
received large grants of ' ' donation lands ' '
from the government; that of the former
lay on the Chillisquaque, and that of the
latter on the Loyalsock, where Mon-
toursville, Pa., is now situated.
AVitham Marshe refers to Madam Mon-
tour as the "celebrated Mrs Montour, a
French lady," who, having "lived so
long among the Six Nations, is become
almost an Indian." Referring to her
visits to Philadelphia, he says, " being a
white woman," she was there "very much
caressed by the gentlewomen of that
city, with whom she used to stay for some
time." Marshe, who visited her house,
saw two of her daughters, who were the
wives of war chiefs, and a lad 5 years old,
the son of one of the daughters, who was
"one of the finest featured and limbed
children mine eyes ever saw, ... his
cheeks were ruddy, mixed with a deli-
cate white, had eyes and hair of an hazel
colour." In 1734 Madam Montour re-
sided at the village of Ostonwackin, on
the Susquehanna, at the mouth of Loyal-
sock cr., on the site of the present
Montoursville, Lycoming co., Pa. It
was sometimes called Frenchtown. In
1737 Conrad Weiser, while on his way
to Onondaga, lodged here with Madam
938
MONTOUR
[B. A.B.
Montour, who, he states, was "a French
woman by birth, of a good family, but
now in mode of life a complete Indian/'
In 1744, at the great treaty of Lancaster
between the Six Nations and the prov-
inces of Virginia, Maryland, and renn-
sylvania, Madam Montour was present
with two of her daughters, on which oc-
casion she related to Marshe the story of
her life. He represented her as genteel,
of polished address, and as having been
attractive in her prime; he also learned
that her two sons-in-law and her only
son were then absent, at war with the
Catawba. In 1745 Madam Montour was
living on an island in the Susquehanna,
at Shamokin, having left Ostonwackin
permanently. Prior to 1754 she became
blind, but she was still vigorous enough
to make a horseback trip from Logstown,
on the Ohio, to Venango, a distance of
60 m., in two days, her son Andrew, on
foot, leading the norse all the way.
When Count Zinzendorf visited Sha-
mokin in 1742 he was welcomed by
Madam Montour and her son Andrew.
Seeing the Count and hearing that he
came to preach the gospel, the truths of
which she had almost forgotten, she
burst into tears. It was learned that she
believed that Bethlehem, the birthplace
of Christ, was situated in France, and
that it was Englishmen who crucified
him — a silly perversion of the truth that
originated with French religious teachers.
In view of the fact that there is no
record of a governor of Canada named
Montour, the belief that she was the
daughter of such a personage seems
groundless, notwithstanding her own
statement to this effect to Marshe.
Equally doubtful is the assertion that she
was alive during the American Revolu-
tion, a statement possibly arising from
the fact that she was confounded w^ith
her reputed granddaughter, Catherine of
Catherine's Town, situated near the head
of Seneca lake and destroyed by Sulli-
van's army in 1779. Being more than
60 years of age in 1744, it is not probable
that she could have been an active par-
ticipant in the Wyoming massacre, 34
years later, And there is no authentic
evidence connecting Madam Montour
with the shedding of blood, white or
Indian.
Esther Montour, justly infamous as
the "fiend of Wyoming,'* a daughter of
French Margaret, hence a granddaughter
of Madam Montour and a sister of
French Catherine and Mary, and the
wife of Eghohowin, a ruling chief of the
Munsee, was living in 1772atSheshequin,
6 m. below Tioga Point; but in this
year she removed 6 m. above, to a
place where she founded a new settle-
ment, later known as Queen Esther's
Town, which was destroyed by Col.
Hartley in 1778. Thence she removed,
probably to Chemung. It is known that
there were Montours at the battle of
Wyoming, for ** Stuttering John*' and
Roland admitted it some years afterward.
John and Catrina were always relentless
enemies of the English colonies. That
John, Roland, Esther, and Catherine and
Mary were half-breeds is quite probable.
But Esther's bloody work at Wyoming,
July 3, 1778, has made her name execra-
ted wherever known. Toward the end of
June of the year named the Tory Colonel,
John Butler, with about 400 British and
Tories and about 700 Indians, chiefly
Seneca, under Sagaiengwaraton, de-
scended the Susquehanna on his way to
attack the settlements in Wyoming val-
ley. Pa. To defend the valley against
this force there were 40 or 50 men under
Capt. Detrick Hewitt, and the militia —
about 400 men and boys, the residue of
the three companies that had been en-
listed in the Continental army. Col.
Zebulon Butler, happening to be in the
vallev, took command of the little army,
Siided by Maj. Garret, Col. Dennison, and
Lieut. Col. Dorrance.
The 400 undisciplined militia were soon
outflanked and broken in the ensuing
battle. After the enemy had gained the
rear, an oflScer said to Hewitt: ** See! the
enemy has gained the rear in force.
Shall we retreat?" "I'll be d d if I
do," was Hewitt's reply, and, like the
other officers killed in action, he felt^at
the head of his men. The battle was
lost. Then followed a most dreadful
slaughter of the brave but overpowered
soldiers of Wyoming. Without mercy
and with the most fearful tortures, they
were ruthlessly butchered, chiefly in the
flight, and after having surrendered them-
selves prisoners of war. Placed around
a huge rock and held by stout Indians,
16 men were killed one by one by the
knife or tomahawk in the hands of
"Queen Esther." In a similar circle 9
others were killed in the same brutal
manner. From these two circles alone
only one, a strong man named Hammond,
escaped by almost superhuman effort.
This slaughter, which made 150 widows
and 600 orphans in the valley, gave Esther
her bloody title.
Catherine Montour, a noted character
in the colonial history of Pennsylvania,
and who gave the name of Catherine's
Town to Sheoquaga, was another daugh-
ter of French Margaret, hence a grand-
daughter of Madam Montour. She be-
came the wife of Telelemut, a noted
Seneca chief, named Thomas Hudson by
the English, by whom she had a son
named Amochol ('Canoe'), or Andrew,
and two daughters. The statement that
BULL. 301
MONTOWESE
939
Catherine was an educated and refined
woman and was admitted into good
society in Philadelphia is, under the cir-
cumstances, most improbable. On Sept.
3, 1779, Sullivan's army destroyed
Catherine's Town. Catherine, with sev-
eral friends, lived in 1791 **over the lake
not far from Niagara. * ' Her son Amochol
loined the Moravian church and was
living at New Salem, or Petquotting, in
1788. John and Roland Montour were
her "brothers, the latter beinj? the son-in-
law of Sagaiengwaraton, a leading Seneca
chief. S)th Roland and John were
famous war chiefs in the border warfare
against the English colonies.
Mary Montour, a sister of Catherine,
Esther, and Andrew, was the wife of
John Cook, another noted Seneca chief
named Kanaghragait, sometimes also
called ** White Mingo," who lived on the
Allegheny and the Ohio, and died in 1790
at Ft Wayne. From Zeisberger's Diary
(ii, 149, 1885) the curious information is
obtained that Mary was a '* Mohawk In-
dian woman," and that Mohawk was
** her mother tongue." It is also stated
that when a child Mary was baptized in
Philadelphia by a Catholic priest. In
1791, on the removal of the Moravian
mission from New Salem to Canada,
among the new converts who accompxa-
nied the congregation was Mary, ** a sis-
ter of the former Andrew Montour," and
**a living polyglot of the tongues of the
West, speaking the English, French,
Mohawk, Wyandot [Huron], Ottawa,
Chippewa, Shawnese, and Delaware
languages."
Andrew Montour, whose Indian name
was Sdttelihu, the son of Madam Montour
by her first husband, was for many years
in the employ of the proprietary govern-
ment of Pennsylvania as an assistant
interpreter. In 1745 he accompanied
Weiser and Shikellimy, the viceroy of
the Six Nations on the Susquehanna,
on a mission to Onondaga, the federal
capital of the confederation. In 1748
Andrew was presented to the council of
the proprietary government by Weiser as
a person especially qualified to act as an
interpreter or messenger. At this time
he was prominent among the Delawares.
Hitherto Weiser and Andrew were held
asunder by jealousy, because of Andrew's
efforts to secure the position of interpre-
ter for Virginia in her negotiations with
the Six Nations. But Weiser now needed
Andrew to secure to the proprietary gov-
ernment the alliance of the Ohio Indians,
and so sunk all personal differences. In
introducing him to the council Weiser
stated that he had employed Andrew fre-
quently on matters of great moment and
imptortance, and that he had found him
''faithful, knowing, and prudent" At
this time Andrew was fully remunerated
for what he had already done for Weiser.
Deputies from the Miami were expected
at Philadelphia, but instead they went to
Lancaster. Andrew Montour was the
interpreter for the western Indians and
Weiser for the Six Nations. Scaroyady,
a noted Oneida chief, living on the Ohio,
and exercising for the Six Nations juris-
diction over the western tribes similar to
that exercised by Shikellimy over those
in Pennsylvania, was to have been the
speaker on this occasion, but he was in-
capacitated by a fall, and so Andrew was
chosen speaker for the western Indians.
He enjoyed remarkable influence and
power over the Ohio tribes, and by his
work at the various conferences of the
colonies with them came into enviable
prominence in the province. His grow-
ing power and influence, about 17S), at-
tained such weight that the management
of Indian affairs by Pennsylvania was
seriously embarrassed. In 1752 Gov.
Hamilton commissioned him to go and
reside on Cumberland cr., over the Blue
hills, on unpurchased lands, to prevent
others from settling or trading there. In
the following year the French authorities
set a price of |500 on his head. In 1755
he was still on his grant, living 10 m.
X. w. of Carlisle, Pa., and was captain,
later major, of a company of Indians in
the English service. In 1762 he was
the King's interpreter to the united
nations. Andrew served as an inter-
preter for the Delawares at Shamokin,
where Conrad Weiser held a conference
with the several tribes in that region for
the purpose of bringing about peace be-
tween the southern confederation of In-
dians and the Six Nations and their allies.
He also served as interpreter to the gover-
nor of Virginia at several important trea-
ties. After receiving his grants from the
government he was rejrarded as a man of
great wealth, but in his public acts he
found other means of swelling his fortune.
Consult Bliss, ZiMsberger's Diary, i-ii,
1885; Darlington, Gist's Journals, 1893;
Freeze in Pa. Mag., iii, 1879; Marshe in
Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll., 1st s., vii, 1801;
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., v, 65, 1855; Walton,
Conrad Weiser, 1900. (j. n. b. h.)
Montowese ('little god,' diminutive
from manitOy 'spirit.' — Trumbull). Ap-
plied by Ruttenber (Tribes Hudson R. , 82,
1872), to Indians on Connecticut r. s. w. of
Middletown, Middlesex CO., Conn., though
De Forest (Hist. Inds. Conn., 55, 1853),
his authority, does not give the name
as that of a tribe, but says: "Southwest
of the principal seat of the Wangunks
[MiddletownJ a large extent of country
was held by a son of Sowheag [chief of
the Mattabesec, q. v.] named Monto-
wese." This area probably lay partly in
940
MONTS PELE8 MOQTAVHAITANIU
[B. A.B.
Middlesex, but chiefly in New Haven co.
This chief, in 1638, sold a tract n. of the
site of New Haven comprising a large
portion of that county. As his father was
chief of theMattabesec, his band probably
belonged to that tribe. (j. m. c. t. )
Mantoweeze.— Davenport (1660) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 4lh 8., VII, 518. l^*).
Monts Pel^s. A tribe, called from the
nature of their country the Nation des
Monts Pel^s ( ' nation of the bare moun-
tains' ), living in the n. e. j)art of Quebec
province in 1661. Hind (Lab. Penin., ii,
1863) thinks they may have been a part
of the Nascapee.
Mont-PelM.— Keane in Stanford, Compend., 523,
1878. Nation des Monts p«Iez.— Jes. Rel. 1661, 29,
1858.
Mooaohaht ( ' deer people ' ) . A tribe on
the N. side of Nootka sd., Vancouver id.
This is the tribe to which the term Nootka
was applied by the discoverers of Van-
couver id. Pop. 153 in 1906. Their prin-
cipal village is Yucuatl. The noted Ma-
quinna (q. v.) was chief of this tribe in
1803.
Bo-wat-ohat.— Swan in Smithson. Cont., xvi. 56,
1870. Bowatshat.— Swan, MS., B. A. E. Koa-
ohet— Mayne, Brit. Col., 251, 1862. Md'atcath.—
Boas in 6th Rep. N. W. Tribes Can., 31, 1890.
Mooaohaht.— Can. Ind. Aff., 188, 1883. Mooaoht-
aht— Ibid.. 357. 1897. Moo-cha-ahts.— Ibid., 52, 1875.
Moouohaht.— Sproat, Sav. Life, 308. 1868. Mou-
ohatha.— Swan, MS., B. A. E. Mowaehes.— Arm-
strong, Oregon, 136, 1857. Mo-watch-its.— Jewitt,
Narr., 36, 1849. Mowatshat.— Swan, MS., B. A. E.
Mowitohat.— Swan in Smithson. Cont., xvi, 56,
1870. Nootka.— Schedule of Reserves, Can. Ind.
Aflf., Suppl. to Ann. Rep., 82, 1902.
Moodyville Saw Mills. The local name
for a body of Salish of Fraser River
agency, Brit. Col.; pop. 86 in 1889.
Moodyville Saw Mills.— Can. Ind. At!. Rep. 1889,
268, 1890. MoonyviUe Saw Mills.— Can. Ind. AIT.
Rep. 1886, 229, 1887.
Mooharmowikanm ( Moo - har -mo- vi -
kar^'im). A subdivision of the Dela-
wares (q. v.). — Morgan, Anc. Soc, 172,
1877.
Mookwangwahoki ( ^foo - hvmng -ira- h o^-
ki). A subdivision of the Delawares (q.
v.).— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877.
Moonack. A Maryland- Virginia name
of the ground-hog (Arctomt/Hmonajc); also,
by transference, the name of a mythic ani-
mal feared by many Southern negro€tf«.
The word occurs very early. Glover, in
his account of Virginia (Philos. Trans.
Roy. Soc, XI, 630, 1676) , apeaksoi monacks.
John Burroughs (Winter Sunshine, 25,
1876), says: "In Virginia they call wood-
chucks 'moonacks.^'* Lewis and Clark
(Grig. Jour., ii, iv, 1905) use the forms
moonax and moonox. It is probable that
thewo«a.rinthe scientific name of this ani-
mal is a Linnean latinization of its aborig-
inal appellation. The Virginian moonack^
or monack, is cognate with the Delaware
monachgeu (German form), the Passa-
maq noddy monimquess^ the Micmac mun-
umkwechj etc. The word si^ifies *the
<ijgger,* Ivom the Algonquian radical
miina^ or mona, *to dig*; seen also in
the Chippewa monaike, 'he scratches
up' ; in Cree, monahikew. The Sauk, Fox,
and Ki(;kapoo language has monanaL<^,
* little digger*, for woodchack, according
to Dr William Jones. (a. p. c.)
Moonhartame (Moon-har-tar-ne, * dig-
ging'). A subdivision of the Delawares
(q.v.).— Morgan, Anc Soc, 172, 1877.
Moors. See Oroatan Indians.
Moose. The common name of a species
of large deer (Cervus alces) found in
Maine and parts of Canada and formerly
over most of n. e. North America. An
identical term for this animal occurs in
many Algonquian dialects: Virginian,
moos; Narraganset and Massacihuset,
7tioo8; Delaware, ynos; Passamaquoddy,
mus; Abnaki, monz; Chippewa, mO'^s;
Cree, monsua. All these words signify
*he strips or eats off,' in reference to the
animal's habit of eating the young bark
and twigs of trees. The wonl came into
English from one of the New England
dialects. Derivative words and expres-
sions are: Moose bird (Canada jay ) ; moose
call, moose horn, or moose trumpet (a
bark trumpet used to imitate notes of
this animal); moose elm (slippery elm);
moose fly (a large brown flv common in
Maine) ; moose wood (applied variously to
the striped maple, Acer pennsylvanica);
the leatnerwood (Dirca pcdustris)f and
the hobblebush (Viburnum lantanoides) ;
moose yard (the home and browsing-
place of the moose in winter), (a. f. c. )
Moosehead Lake Indians. The common
name of a band of Penobscot living on
Moosehead lake, Me. — Vetromile, Abna-
kis, 22, 1866.
Moosemise. A name current in parts of
New England, Vermont in particular, for
the false wintergreen {Pyrola americana).
The name seems to have been transferred
from another plant, since in Chippewa
and Nipissing mo"somishy signifying
'moose shrub,* designates the nobble-
bush ( Viburnum lantanoides), called in
Canadian French bois d'orignal. The
word, which is written moosemize also,
is derived from some Algonquian dialect
of the Chippewa group or a closely related
one of the E. (a. p. c. )
Mooshkaooze ( ' heron ' ) . A gens of the
Chippewa, q. v.
Mooui-ka-oo-xe'.—Morf?an, Anc. Soc., 166, 1877.
Mo«hka*u*tig.— Wm. Jones, inf'n, 1906.
Mooskwasah ('muskrat'). A gens of
the Abnaki, q. v.
Koot-kwi-tuk'.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 174, 1877.
Motkwas.— J. D. Prince, infn, 1905 (modern St
Francis Abnaki form).
Mootaeynhew. A Luisefio village for-
merly in the neighborhood of San Luis
Bey mission, s. Cal.— Taylor in Cal. Far-
mer, May 11, 1860.
Moqtavhaitania (Moqta^vhitd^niUj 'black
men,' i. e. Ute; sing. Moqta^vhaitd^n),
BULL. 30]
MOQUAT8 MOQUELUMNAN FAMILY
941
A band of the Cheyenne, possibly of
mixed Ute descent. ( j. m. )
Khktahw^taniB. — Grinnell, Social Org. Chey-
ennes, 136, 1906 (misprint in lor tu). TTte.— Dorsey
in Field Ck>lumb. Mus. Pub. no. 103, 62, 1905.
Moqaats ( Mo^-quats). A Iwind of Paiute
formerly living near Kingston mt., s. e.
Cal.— Powell m Ind. Aff. Rep. 1873, 51,
1874.
^ Moqaelamnan Family (adapted from
Moquelumne, a corruption of the Miwok
WcLkalumUoh, the name of a river in
Calaveras co. , Cal. ) . A linguistic family,
established by Powell (7th Sep. B. A. E.,
92, 1891 ), consisting of three divisions, the
Miwok, the so-c|illefl Olamentke, and the
Northern or Lake County Moquelumnan.
The territory originally oi^cupied was in
three sections, ' one lying between
Cosumnes and Fresno rs.; another in
Marin, Sonoma, and Napa cos., the terri-
tory extending along the coast from the
Golden Gate to Salmon cr., n. of Bodega
bay and e. as far as the vicinity of Sonoma;
and the third a comparatively small area
in the s. end of Lake co., extending from
Mt St Helena northward to the e. ex-
tremity of Clear lake (see Kroeber in
Am. Anthrop., viii, no. 4, 1906). The
Miwok division, which constituted the
great body of the family, was described as
late as 1876 a.s the largest Indian group of
California, lx)th in population and in ex-
tent of territory.
Their houses were very rude, those of
the Miwok having l)eeri simply frame-
worksof poles and brush, which in winter
were covered with cartli. In t lie moun-
tains cone-shaped summer lodges of
puncheons were made. Acorns, which
formed their principal food, were gathered
in large quantities when the harvest was
abundant and stored for winter use in
eranaries raised above the ground. It
has been asserted that the Miwok ate
every variety of livingcreature indigenous
* to their territory except the skunk. They
were especially fond of jackrabbits, the
skins of which were rudely woven into
robes. From lack of cedar they pur-
chased bows and sometimes arrows from
the mountain Indians, the medium of bar-
ter being shell money.
With the Miwok, chiefship was hered-
itary when the successor was of command-
ing influence, but this was seldom the
case. As wnth most of the tribes of Cali-
fornia, marriage among the Miwok tribes
was practically by purchase, but in return
for the presents given by the groom the
father of the bride gave the new couple
various substantial articles, and gifts of
food were often continued by the parents
for years after the marriage. The father,
in old age, was ill treate<l, however, being
little else than a slave to his daughter and
her husband. When twins were bom one
of the children was killed. Shamanistic
rites were performed by both men and
women, and scarification and suction were
the principal remedial agents. California
balm of gilead (Picea grand is), and plas-
ters of hot ashes and moist earth were also
use<l in certain cases. Payment for treat-
ment was made by the patient, and in
case of non-recovery the life of the practi-
tioner was ilemanded. The acorn dance,
as well as a number of other ceremonies,
principally for feasting or amusement,
were formerly celebrated by the Miwok.
Thev had no puberty dance, nor did they
hold a dance for the dead, but an annual
mourning and sometimes asj>eiMal mourn-
ing were observed. All the possewions
of the dead were burned with them, their
names were never afterward mentioned,
and those who l)ore the same name
changed it for others. Formerly widows
generally covered their faces with pitch
and the younger women singed their hair
short as signs of widowhood. Cremation
generally prevailed among the Miwok
tribes, but was never universal.
Comparatively few of the natives of the
Miwok division of this stock survive, and
these are scattered in the mountains, so
that no accurate census has been taken.
Six individuals of the so-called Olamentke
division lived on Tomales bay in 1888.
The Mo<|uelumiian tribes or rancherias
that have been recognized an» as follows:
MLm>k, — Awani, Chowchilla, Chumi-
dok, Chumtiya, Chumuch, Chumwit,
Hittoya, Howeches, Koni, l^potatimni,
Machemni, Mokelumne, Newichumni,
Nuchu, Olowitok, Pohonichi, Sakaia-
kumne, Servushamne, Talatui, Tamoleka,
Tumidok, Tumun, Walakumni, and Yu-
loni.
Okimentkf, — Bolinas, Chokuyem, Gui-
nien, Jukiusme, Likatuit, Nicassias,
Numpali, Olumpali, Sonomi, Tamal, Tu-
lart^s, Tumalehnia.M, Utchium.
Tribes or rancherias not classified ac-
cording to the chief divisions are Ap-
angasi, Aplache, Chupumni, Cosumni,
Cotoplanemis, Hokokwito, Keeches, Ku-
maini, l^ipapu, I^saniaiti, Macheto,
Merced, Mikechuses, Nelcelchumnee, No-
tomidula, Numaltachi(?), Okechumne,
Pahkanu, Petahinia, Potawackati, Poto-
yanti, Sakaya, Seantre, Siyante, Succaah,
Suscols, Tlirese, Ti posies, Wahaka, and
Wiskala. (ii. w. h. a. l. k.)
=Meewoc.— Powers in Overland Month., 322,
Apr. 1873 (general account of family with allu-
sions to language); GaLschet in Mag. Am. Hist.,
159, 1877 (gives habitiit and bands of family);
GaU^chet in Beach. Ind. Miscel.. 433, 1877.
= Mi- wok.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol.,lil, 346,
1877 (nearly as above) . =Koquelumnaii.— Powell
in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 92, 1891. > Moquelumne.—
Latham in Trans. Philol. Soc. I>ond., 81, 18.'S6
(includes Hale's Talatui, Tuolumne from School-
craft. Munialtachi, Mullateco, Apangasi, La-
pappu. Siyante or Tyi>oxi, Ilawhaw's band of
Aplaches, San Rafael v<x*abular>', Tshokoyem
vocabulary. Cocouyem and Yonlciousme Pater-
nosters, Olamentke of Kostromitonov, Pater-
942
MOQUINO — MORAVIANS
[H. A.1L
nosters for Mission de Santa Clara and the Vallee
de lo6 Tulares of Mofras, Paternoster of the
Langue Guiloco de la Mission de San Francisco):
Latham, Opuscula, 347, 1860; Latham, £lem.Ck>mp.
Philol., 414, 1862 (same as above). >Muttun.—
Powell in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 535, 1877
(vocabs. of Mi'-wok, Tuolumne, Costano, Tcho-
ko-yem, Mutsun, Santa Clara, Santa Cruz, Chum-
t«'-ya, Kaw^ya, San Raphael Mission, Talatui,
Olamentke); Gatschet in Mag. Am. Hist., 157,
1877 (gives habitat and members of family);
Gatschet in Beach. Ind. Miscel.. 430, 1877.
X Eimtiens.— Keane in Stanford,Compend., Cent.
and So. Am., app., 476, 1878 (includes Olhones,
" Cru "
[ipacmacs. Kulanapos.
lucnes, Chowclas, waches, Talches, Poowells).
Eslenes, Santa Cruz, San Miguel, Lopillamillos,
Mipacmacs. Kulanapos^ Yolos, Suisunes, Tal-
<Toho-ko-yem.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, iii, 421, 1853 (mentioned as a band and
dialect).
Moquino (said to have been named from
a Mexican lamily that occupied the site).
Formerly a small pueblo inhabitcKl dur-
ing the summer season by the Lacuna
Indians, but now entirely Mexicanized.
Situated on Paguate r., \alencia co., N.
Mex., about 9 m. n. of Laguna.
Mogino.— Powell in Am. Nat., xiv, 604, Aug. 1880.
Moguino.— Loew (1875) in Wheeler Survey Rep.,
VII, 345, 1879. Moquino.— Emory, Recon., 133, 1848.
MoqnoBo. A former tribe and village
in w. Florida. The map of De Bry ( 1591 )
places it w. of the headwaters of St
Johns r.; according to the Gentleman of
Elvas it lay 2 leagues from the gulf and 2
days' journey from Bahia de Espfritu
Santo, which is thought to be Tampa bay.
M0C090.— Barcia, Ensayo, 48, 1723. Hooota.—
Mercator map (1569) cited in Maine Hist. Soc.
Coll., 2d 8., 1, 392, 1869. Moooso.— Drake, Tragedies,
15, 1841 . Hooosion.— De Bry, Brev. Narr., 11, map,
1591. Mogoso.— Fontaneda (1575) in Temaux-
Compans, Voy., xx.24. 1841. Mogoso.— Ibid., 21.
Moquoso.— Laudonni^re (1564) in French, Hist.
Coll. La., n. s., 243, 1869. MU0090.— Garcilasso de
la Vega, Fla., 28, 1723.
Moqwaio ( * wolf ' ) . A phratry and also
a subphratry or gens of the Menominee.
Ma'hwaw*.— Wm. Jones, inf'n, 1906. Moqwaio.—
Hoffman in 14th Rep. B. A. E., pt. 1, 42, 1896.
Mora. A rancheria near the presidio
of La Bah fa and the mission of Espfritu
Santo de Ziifliga on the lower Rio San
Antonio, Tex., in 1785, at which date it
had 26 inhabitants (Bancroft, No. Mex-
ican States, I, 659, 1886). The i>eople
were probably of Karaukawan affinity.
Moratiggon. The village where Samo-
set lived in 1621. It was distant **one
day from Plymouth by water with great
wind, and five days by land. ' * Probably
in s. Maine, in Abnaki or Pennacook
territory.
Horatiggon.— Harris, Voy. and Trav., i. 853, 1705.
Korattiggon.— Mourt (1621) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., Ist s., VIII, 226. I8O2:
Moratoc. A tribe described in 1586 as
living 160 m. up Roanoke r., perhaps
near the s. Virginia line. A map of that
period places their village on the n. side
of the river, which then bore their name.
They are said to have been an important
tribe which refused to hold intercourse
with the English.
Koratioo.— Simons in Smith (1629), Va., i, 176,
repr. 1819. Moratocks.— Lane (1586), ibid.. 87.
Koratoks.— Ibid. Koratuck.— Smith (1629), ibid.,
map.
Moraughtaonnd. A tribe of the Pow-
hatan confederacy, formerly living on
the N. bank of the Rappahannock, in
Lancaster and Richmond cos., Va. In
1608 they numbered about 300. Their
principal village, of the same name, was
near the toouth of Moratico r. in Rich-
mond CO. (j. M.)
Moranghtaoima.— Smith (1629), Va., i, map,
repr. 1819 (the village; evidently a misprint
for Moraughtacund). Morattioo.— Purchas, Pil-
grimes, iv, 1713. 1626. Moraughtaoud.— Ibid.,
1715. Moraughtaounds.— Strachey {ca. 1612), Va.,
37, 1849.
MorayianB. Mahican, Munsee, and Del- I
awares who followed the teachings of j
the Moravian brethren- and were by
them gathered into villages apart from
their tribes. The majority were Munsee.
In 1740 the Moravian missionaries began
their work at the Mahican village of
Shekomeko in New York. Meeting with
many obstacles there, they removed with
their converts in 1746 to Pennsylvania,
where they built the new mission village
of Friedenshuetten on the Susquehanna.
Here they were more successful and were
largely recruited from the Munsee and
Delawares, almost all of the former tribe
not absorbed by the Delawares finally
joining them. The^ made another set-
tlement at Wvalusing, but on the ad-
vance of the white population removed to
Beaver r. in w. Pennsylvania, where they
built the village of Friedensstadt. They
remained here about a year, and in 1773
removed to Muskingum r. in Ohio, in
the neighborhood of the others of their
tribes, and occupied the three villages of
Gnadenhuetten, Salem, and Schoenbrunn.
In 1781, during the border troubles of the
Revolution, the Hurons removed them
to the region of the Sandusky and Scioto,
in N. Ohio, either to prevent their giving
information to the colonists or to protect
them from the hostility of the frontiers-
men. The next spring a party of about •
140 were allowed to return to their
abandoned villages to gather their corn,
when they were treacherously attacked
by a party of border ruffians and the
greater part massacred in the most cold-
blooded manner, after which their vil-
lages were burned. The remaining Mo-
ravians moved to Canada in 1791, under
the leadership of Zeisberger, and built
the village of Fairfield on Retrenche r.
Here a number were massacred by the
whites in 1812. They finally settled on
the Thames in Orford tp., Kent co., Onta-
rio. The number in 1884 was 275, but
had increased in 1906, according to the
Canadian official report, to 348. There
were until recently a few in Franklin co.,
Kans. See Missions. (.1. m. c. t.)
Big Beavera.— Rupp, W. Pa., 47, 1846 ("Christian
Indians or Big Beavers," because of their resi-
dence about 1770 on (Big) Beaver cr. in w.Pa.),
Ohriitian Indiana.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v,
495, 1855 (frequently used as synonymous with
BULL. 30]
MORBAH — MORTARS
943
Mansee, but properly refers only to those of the
tribe under Moravian teachers ) . Koravint. —Can .
Ind. Aff., pt. 2, 65, 1906 (misprint).
Morbah (Mor-bdh), The Parrot clan of
the Pecos people of N. Mex. — Hewett in
Am. Anthrop., vi.,439, 1904.
Morbanas. A former tribe, probably
Coahuiltecan, met in 1693 on the road
from Coahuila to mission San Francisco,
Texas. — Salinas (1693) in Dictamen Fis-
cal, Nov. 30, 1716, MS. cited by H. E. Bol-
ton, inf'n, 1906.
Morongo. A reservation of 38,600 acres
of fair land, unpatented, in Riverside co.,
8. Cal., occupied by 286 Mission Indians
under Mission Tule River agency.— Ind.
Aff. Rep., 175, 1902; ibid., 192, 1905; Kel-
sey, Rep., 32, 1906.
Mortars. Utensils emploved by Indian
tribes for the trituration of food and other
substances. The Southwestern or Mexi-
can type of grinding stone is known as a
metate, and its operation consists in plac-
ing the substance to be treated, dry or
moist, on the sloping upper surface of
the slab and crushing and rubbing it with
a flattish hand-stone until it is reduced to
the required consistency or degree of
fineness ( see Metates^ Mullers ) . Th is form
of the utensil passes with many variations
in size and shape into the typical mortar,
a more or less deep receptacle in which
the substance is
Sulverized if
ry, or reduced
to pulp if moist,
by crushing
with a pestle,
which may be
cylindrical, dis-
coidal, globular,
or bell-shaped.
Mortars are
made of stone,
wood, bone
(whale verte-
brae) , or impro-
vised of rawhide
or other sub-
stances depend-
ing on the region
and the materi-
als nearest at
hand. The more primitive stone forms
are bowlders or other suitable pieces hoi-
ished, the stone in some cases, as in s.
California, being obtaine<l by quarrying
from the rock in place. Califc^rnia fur-
alaskan mortar with Sculptured
ornament; 1-12.
GRrNpi'iG tlFCCi.
SIMPLE FORMS OF STONE MORTARS. a CALIFORNIA (i-«);
b, Rhode Island (i-«)
lowed out on the upper surface suffi-
ciently to hold the material to be reduced,
while the more highly specialized forms
are tastefully shaped and carefully fin-
GLOBULAR STONE MORTARS FROM AURIFEROUS GRAVELS,
CALIFORNIA. ( HOLMES )
nishes the greatest variety of these uten-
sils. In one district globular concretions
were used: a seg-
ment of the shell
was broken away
and the softer in-
terior removed,
thus affording a
deep symmetrical
receptacle. In
other localities cy-
lindrical forms
were worked out of
lava or sandstone. In others still, the
under surface was conical, so as to be
conveniently set
in the ground.
Ordinary mor-
tars when in use
are usually set
in the ground
to give them
greater stabil-
ity. The re-
markable and
handsome sand-
stone vessels
and soapstone
pots of 8. (Cali-
fornia are not
here classed as
mortars. Occa-
sionally the
smaller mortars
were embel-
lished with
engraved lines or sculptured to rep-
resent animal forms. Alaskan mortars,
especially those of the Haida, are superior
in this respect. An artistic mortar of
this class, illustrated by Niblack, was
used for pulverizing tobacco, and this is a
type in very general use among the North-
western tribes at the present time.
Perhaps the most remarkable mortars
are those occurring frequently in the
acorn-producing districts of the Pacific
slope, where exposures of massive rock in
place have worked in them groups of
mortars, the conical receptacles number-
ing, in several observed cases, nearly a
944
MORTARS
tB.i
hundred. Some of the Weotem tribes set
a conical basket, after removing its bottom,
withiri the rim of the mortar bowl to
serve as a hopper for retaining the meal.
OROUP OF MORTARS IN GRANITE SURFACE, CAUFORNIA
(holmes)
Primitive forms of this utensil are the
rawhide mortars used by the Plains tribes
for pounding pemmican, the piece of
rawhide being
forced into a de-
pression in the
ground, forming a
basin. Again, the
hide was placed be-
neath the stone or
wooden mortar to
catch the particles
that fell over. The
rough bask^ - like
receptacle of sticks
set in the ground by the Yuman tribes
of lower Colorado r. is probably the
rudest known form of this utensil. In
STONC MofiTAfi WITH Basket
Hoppeh; Califohnia
HUPA MORTAR WITH BASKET HOPPERS.
size stone mortars vary from that of^he
tiny paint cup found among the toilet
articles of the warrior to the substan-
tial basin holding several
gallons. The larger ones,
especially those exca-
vated in rock masses,
were probably often
used for ** stone-boiling."
(See Food. )
The substances pulverized in mortars
were the various minerals used for paint,
potsherds and shells for tempering clay,
etc., medicinal and ceremonial substances
Small Paint Mortar,
hupa; 1-7 (mason)
of many kinds, including tobacco, and a
wide range of food products, as maize,
seeds, nuts, berries, roots, bark, dried
meats, fish, grasshop-
pers, etc. A note-
worthy group of paint
mortars or plates, the
use of which has here-
tofore been regarded
as problematical, are
described under the
heading Notched plcUes.
The wooden mortar
was usually made of a
short section of a log,
hollowed out at one
end and in some leases
sharpened at the other
for setting in the
ground; but the recep-
tacles were sometimes
made in the side of a
log or were cutout as in-
dividual utensils in basin or trough shape.
The wooden mortar was in much more gen-
eral use in districts where suitable stone
was notavailable, as in Florida, in portions
of the Mississippi valley, and on lower
Colorado r. Among the remarkable
WOODEN MORTAR. COCOPA
WOODEN MORTAR, CHIPPEWA; 1-16. (norrMAN)
archeologic finds made by Cushing at Key
Marco, Fla., are a number of small cup-
like mortars with mallet-shaped pestles,
handsomely formed and carefully fin-
ished.
Ancient wooden Mor-
tar, Florida; i-4.
(cushing)
WOODEN mortar, IROQUOIS
(lafitau)
Speaking of the Indians of Carolina,
Lawson says: **The savage men never
beat their com to make bread, but that is
the women's work, especiallv the girls, of
whom you shall see four beating with
long great pestles in a narrow wooden
mortar; and everyone keeps her stroke so
exactly that 'tis worthy of admiration."
BULL. 30]
MORTUARY CUSTOMS
945
Mortars are referred to by numerous
T^riters, including Abbott (1) in Surveys
West of 100th Merid., vii, 1879, (2) Prim.
Indus., 1881; Gushing in Proc. Am.
Philos. Soc., XXXV, 153, 1890; Fowke,
Archseol. Hist. Ohio, 1902; Hoffman in
14th Rep. B. A. E., 1896; Hohnes in Nat.
Mus. Rep. 1902, 1903; Jones, Antiq. So.
Inds., 1873; Lawson (1701), Hist. Car.,
repr. 1860; MacCauley in5th Rep. B. A. K.,
1887; Meredith in Moorehead's Prehist.
Impls., 1900; Morgan, League of Iroquois,
1904; Niblack in Rep. Nat. Mus. 1888,
1890; Nordenskiold, CHff Dwellers of
the Mesa Verde, 1893; Powers in Cont.
N. A. Ethnol., in, 1877; Rau in Smith-
son. Cont., XXII, 1876; Schoolcraft, Ind.
Tribes, i, 1851; Thruston, Antiq. of Tenn.,
1897; Yates in Moorehead's Prehist.
Impls., 190e. (w. H. n.)
Mortuary cuBtoms. Yarrow (1st Rep.
B. A. E., 1881) classifies Indian modes
of burial as follows:
(1) Inhumation, (2) Embalmment, (3)
Deposition in urns, (4) Surface burial,
(5) Cremation, (6) Aerial sepulture, (7)
Aquatic burial. As the second relates to
the preparation of the body, and the
third, fourth, sixth, and seventh refer
chiefly to the receptacles or the plaice of
deposit, the disposal of the dead by the
Indians may be classeil under the heads
Burial and Cremation.
The usual mode of burial among North
American Indians has been by inhuma-
tion, or interment in pita, graves, or holes
in the ground, in stone cists, in mounds,
beneath or in cabins, wigwams, houses,
or lodges, or in caves. As illustrations it
may l^ stated that the Mohawk formerly
made a large round hole in which the
body was placed in a squatting posture,
after which it was covered w ith timl>er
and earth. Some of the Carolina tribes
first placed the corpse in a cane hurdle
and deposited it in an outhouse for a day;
then it was taken out and wrapped m
rush or cane matting, placeci in a reed cof-
fin, and deposited in a grave. Remains
of this kind of wrappinghave been found
in some of the southern mounds, and in
one case in a rock shelter. ^ The bottom of
the grave was sometimes covered with
bark, on which the body was laid, and
logs or slabs placed over it to prevent the
eiurth from falling on the remains. An
ancient form of burial in Tennessee, s. Illi-
nois, at points on Delaware r. , and among
ancient pueblo dwellers in n. New Mexico,
wasin box-shape cists of rough stone slabs.
Sepulchers of this kind have been found
in mounds and cemeteries. In some in-
stances they were placed in the same
general direction, but in excavations made
y the Bureau of American Ethnology it
was found that these cists, as well as the
uninclosed bodies in mounds, were gen-
Bull. 30—05 60
erally placed without regard to uniform-
ity of direction. When uniformity did
occur, it was generally an indication of
STONE GRAVE, SHOWINO ORDINARY CONSTRUCTION
a comparatively nioiiern interment. The
Creeks and the Seminole of Florida gener-
ally buried in a circular pit about 4 ft
deep; the corpse,
with a blanket or
cloth wrapj>ed about
it, being placed in a
sitting posture, the
legs bent under and
tied together. The
sitting position in
ancient burials has
often been errone-
ously inferred from
the bones occurring
in a heap. It ap-
pears to have been a
custom in the N. \V.,
as well as in the
E. and S.E., to re-
move the flesh by
previous burial or
then to bundle the
t ■- - '
^F ^
%
1 ;,I|M1
H'
1 BUI
^=' 4
Hi
STONE GRAVE WITH OFFSET ARCH
IOWA. (tmOMAs)
stone grave, top view; illinois.
(Thomas)
otherwise, and
bones and bury
them, sometimes in communal pits. It
was usual in
grave burials to
place the lK)dy
in a horizontal
position on its
back, although
the custom of
placing on the
side, often with
the knees drawn
up, was also
practised; burial
face downward,
however, was rare. In addition to those
mentioned, modes of burials in mounds va-
ried. Sometimes a single body and some-
times several were
placed in a wooden
vault of upright
timbers or of logs
laid horizontally to
form a pen. Dome-
shaped stone vaults
occur over a single
sitting skeleton.
Not infrequently the body was laid
on the ground, slightly covered with
earth, and over this a layer of plastic clay
Arched Stone grave; Ohio.
( Thomas)
>'r
Burial under Heap of Stones;
Hudson Bay Eskimc. (turner)
946
MORTUARY CfRTOMS
[H. A. EL
was spread on which was built a fire,
forming an earthen shield over the corpse
before additional earth was added. Cav-
erns, fissures in rocks, rock shelters, etc. ,
were frequently used as depositories for
the dead. According to Yarrow, a cave
near the House mts., Utah, in which the
Gosiute Indians were in the habit of de-
positing their dead, was quite filled with
numan remains in 1872.
Embalmment and mummification were
practised to a limited extent; the former
chiefly in Virginia, the Carolinas, and
MUMMY FROM AS AmSMN CAV£. IOill)
Florida, and the latter in Alaska. Of the
modes of disposing of the dead, included
by Yarrow under **aerial sepulture, *' the
following are examples: Burial in lodges,
observed among the
Sioux; these appear to
have been exceptional
and were merely an
abandonment of the
(lead during an epi-
demic; a few cases of
burial in lodges, how-
ever, have been ob-
served in Alabama.
Burial beneath the
floor of the house and then at once
burning the house were practised to some
extent in e. Arkansas. Scaffold and
tree burial was practised in Wiscon-
sin, Minnesota, the Dakotas, Montana,
Urn Burial Alabama Moundi
1-22. ( Moore)
■'^*iM :.,,,._ ,'V'- :
DAKOTA SCAFFOLD BURIAL. ( Yarrow)
etc., by the Chippewa, Sioux, Siksika,
Mandan, G ros ventres, Arapaho, and other
Indians. The burial mounds of Wiscon-
sin indicate this mode of disposing of the
dead in former times, as the skeletons
were buried after the removal of the
flesh, and the bones frequentlv indicate
long exposure to the air. The Eskimo of
the v,\ coast of Alaska eometimes placed
tlie dead on a platform 2 or 3 ft above
jx round and built over it a double rooitij?,
or tentt of driftwoocL It was alm:i the
i.-u^tum auiuiig the Indians of the Lake
DAKOTTA. mtt Bum^AU (if^tBOw)
region to have at t'ertain perliKlfi what
niuy Tie termini commmial buriiils, m
which the Irrxlies or skeletons of a dis-
trict were removed from their tern jjorary
DAKOTA SCAFFOLD BURIAL^ (vjmno^l
burial places and deposite<l with much
cereinnuv in ii swingle larjie pit (see Bre- .
beuf in Jes. Rel. tor 1636, 128-139, 1868).
On the N. W. coast, n. of Columbia r., the
dead were usually placed in little cabin-
BULL. 30]
MORZHOVOT MOSAIC
947
shaped ^mortuary houses, or box-shaped
woodeiTreceptacles raised on posts, on the
ground, or occasionally in trees, and some-
times in caves, though cremation, except of
BURIAL HOUSES, NORTHWEST COAST TRIBES, (yarrow)
theshamans, was formerly common in this
section. The bodies of shamans were
placed in small rectangular houses built
up of poles; the bones of children were
sometimes suspended in baskets. Another
method of disposing of the dead is that
known as canoe burial, the bodies being
deposited in canoes which were placed
on posts or in the forks of trees. This
CANOE BURIAL, CHINOOK. (swan)
method was practised by the Clallam,
Twana, and other tribes of the N.W.
coast. Cremation was formerly practised
by a number of tribes of the Pacific slope.
The ancient inhabitants of s. Arizona
Practised cremation in addition to house
urial, the ashes of the cremated dead be-
ing placed in urns; but among the modern
Pueblos, especialljr those most affected by
Spanish missionaries, burials are made in
cemeteries in the villages.
The ceremonies attending and following
burial were various. The use of fire was
common, and it was also a very general
custom to place food, articles especially
prized by or of interest to the dead,
and sometimes articles having a symbolic
signification, in or near the grave. Scari-
fymg the body, cutting the hair, and
blackening the face by the mourners were
common customs, as, in some tribes, were
feasts and dancing at a death or funeral.
As a rule the bereaved relatives observed
some kind of mourning for a certain
period, as cutting the hair, discarding or-
naments and n^lecting the personal ap-
pearance, carrying a bundle representing
the husband (among the Chippewa, etc. ),
or the bones of the aead husband (among
some northern Athapascan tribes), and
wailing night and morning in solitary
places. It was a custom among some
tribes to change the name of the family
of the deceased, and to drop the name of
the dead in whatever connection.
Consult Bancroft, Native Baces, 1874;
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvii,
Et. Ill, 1905; Farrand, Basis of Am.
List., 1904; Holm, Descr. New Sweden,
1834; Jesuit Relations, Thwaites ed.,
i-Lxxii, 1896-1901; Kroeber in Bull. Am.
Mus. Nat. Hist, xviii, pt. i, 1902; Owen,
Musquakie Folk-lore, 1904; and the vari-
ous reports of the B. A. E., especially
the 1st Report, containing Yarrow's Mor-
tuary Costoms of the N. A. Indians, and
authorities therein cited. See Mowningy
Religion, Urn Burial, (t'-T.)
Morzhovoi (Russian: * walrus'). An
Aleut village at the end of Alaska penin.,
Alaska, formerly at the head of Morzho-
voi bay, now on the n. shore, on Traders
cove, which opens into Isanotski bay.
Pop. 45 in 1833 (according to Veniaminof),
68 in 1890.
MonheToi.— PetrofT in 10th Census, Alaska,19, 1884.
Honhewskoje.— Holmberg, Ethnog. Skizz., map,
142, 1855. Korzaivskoi.— Elliott, Cond. Aff. Alaska,
225, 1875. KorzhevakM.— Veniaminof, Zapiski.ii,
203, 1840. Korzovoi.->Po6t route map, 1903. Hew
Morzhovoi.— Baker, Geog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Old Morzhovoi.— Ibid. Protasso.— Petroff in 10th
Census, Alaska, map, 1884 (strictly the name of the
Greek church here). Protassof.— Ibid., 23. Pro-
tai»ov.— Petroflf, Rep. on Alaska, 25, 1881.
Mosaic. An art carried to high perfec-
tion among the more cultured aborigines
of Mexico, where superb work was done,
several examples of which enrich Euro-
pean museums. The art was but little
m vogue N. of Mexico. Ilopi women of
to-day wear pendants made of small
square or oblong wooden tablets upon
which rude turquoise mosaics are set in
black pifion gum. These are very inferior,
however, to specimens recovered from
ancient ruins in the Gila and Little Colo-
rado valleys in Arizona, and in Chaco
canyon, N. Mex., which consist of gor-
gets, ear pendants, and other objects,
some of wliich are well preserved while
others are represented onlv by the foun-
dation form surrounded ny clusters of
settings looesened by decay of the matrix.
Turquoise was the favorite material, but
bits of shell and various bright-colored
stones were also employed. The foun-
dation form was of shell, wood, bone, and
jet and other stone, and the matrix of gum
or asphaltum. Although the work is
neatly executed, the forms are simple and
the designs not elaborate. One of the best
examples, from the Little Colorado drain-
age in Arizona, is a pendant rudely repre-
senting a frog, the foundation of which is
a bivalve shell, the matrix of pitch, and
the settings of turquoise are arranged in
lines conforming neatly to the shape of
the creature, a bit of red jasper being set
in the center of the back ( Fewkes). Un-
fortunately the head of tne frog has dis-
948
MOSH AICH — MOTAHTOSIKS
[b. a. e.
Ancient mosaic Frog, Arizona;
1-2, (fewkcs)
integrated. Among the specimens of in-
laying obtained by the Hyde Expedition
of the American Museum of Natural
History, from Pu-
eblo Bonito ruin,
N. Mex., area jet
or lignite frog
with turquoise
eyes and neck-
band, a scraper-
like implement of
deer bone with
encircling orna-
mental bands in
turquoise and jet,
and a small bird
of hematite taste-
fully set with tur-
quoise and shell
(Pepper).
The ancient graves of s. California have
yielded a number of specimens of rude
mosaic work in which bits of abalone
shell are set in
asphaltum as
incrustations
for handles of
knives and for
other objects
(Abbott). In-
laying in other
sections of the
country con-
sists chiefly of
the insertion of
bits of shell,
bone, or stone
separately in
rows or in
simple figures
in the margins of utensils, implements,
masks, etc. (Niblack, Rust).
Consult Abbott in Surv. West of 100th
Merid., vii, 1879; Fewkes (1) in Am.
Anthrop.,ix, no. 11,1896, (2)inSmithson.
Rep. 1896, 1898, (3) in 22d Rep. B. A. E.,
1903; Nelson in 18th Rep. B* A. E., 1899;
Niblack in Rep. U. S. Nat. Mus. 1888,
1890; Pepper in Am. Anthrop., n, s., vii,
no. 2, 1905; Rust in Am. Anthrop., n. s.,
VIII, no. 4, 1906. (w. h. h. )
Moflhaich. The native name of the ex-
tinct Buffalo clans of Acoma and Sia pue-
blos, N. Mex.
K*sluuoh-hanoq«)>.— Hodgre in Am. Anthrop., ix,
349, 1896 ( Acoma form ; hdnoqch = • people ' ) . Mu-
thii'oh-hano.— Ibid. (Sia form).
Moflhoquen. A village or band appar-
ently on or near the s. coast of Maine in
1616, and probably connected with the
Abnaki confederacy. Mentioned by
Smith (1616) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Coll.,
3ds., VI, 107, 1837. (j. m.)
Moshulitubbee. See Mushalatubbee.
Mosilian. A division of the New Jersey
Dela wares formerly on the e. bank of
INCRUSTEO OBJECTS FROM PUEBLO
BONITO, NEW Mexico; 1-4. (pepper)
Delaware r. about the present Trenton.
In 1648 they were estimated at 200,
MaMelant.— Sanford.U. S., cxlvi, 1819. Mosilian.—
Evelin (1648) in Proud, Pa., i, 113, 1797.
MoBookees. Mentioned only by Mc-
Kenney and Hall (Ind. Tribes, iii, 82,
1854) in a list of tribes; unidentified, but
possibly the Muskwaki (Foxes), or the
Maskoki or Muskogee (Creeks).
MoBopelea. A problematic tribe, first
noted on Marquette's map, where ** Mon-
soupelea," or "Monsouperea," is marked
as an Indian village on the e. bank of
the Mississippi some distance below the
mouth of the Ohio. In 1682 La Salle
found a Mosopelea chief with 5 cabins of
his people living with the Taensa, by
whom they had been adopted after the
destruction of their former village by
some unknown enemy.
Mansoleas.— Barcia, Ensayo, 2r>l, 1723. Kansope-
la.— Douay in Shea, Discovery, 222, 224 (note),
268, 1852. Kansopelea.— Hennepin, Ck>nt. of New
Disco v., 48a, 1698. Kauaalea.— McKenney and
Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 81, 1858 (possibly identical).
Medohipouria.— Iberville (1702) in Margry, D6c.,
iv,601,1880(same?). Konaopela.— Coxe, Carolana,
map, 1741. MonsSpelea.— Marquette's map In
Shea, Discov.. 1852. Konaoupelea.— Thevenot,
ibid., 268. Kotopelea.~Allouez (1680) in Maigry,
D6c., II, 95, 1877. MosopeUeaa.— Tonti (1683) , ibid.,
1, 610, 1876. Kosopoloa.— Hennepin, Cont. of New
Discov., 310, 1698. Kosopolea.— LaSalle (1682) in
Margry, D6c., ii,237, 1877.
Mosquito Indians. A tribe named from
its habitat on Mosquito lagoon, e. coast
of Florida, n. of C. Canaveral and behind
the sand bar that forms the coast line.
During the Seminole war of 1835-42 they
became notorious for their ferocity. The
Timucua remnant settled in this region
in 1706, and the Mosquito Indians may
have been their descendants or a mixture
of them and Seminole. See Bartram,
Travels, 142, note, 1791; Roberts, Florida,
23, 1763; J. F. D. Smyth,Tour, ii, 21, 1784.
Moss-bag. Some of the Athapascan
and Cree Indians of extreme n. w. Can-
ada never use cradles for their infants,
but employ instead a ** moss-bag," made
of leather or skin, lined in winter with
hare skins. A layer of moss is put in,
and upon this is placed the babe, naked
and properly secured. * * This machine,"
says Bernard Ross (Smithson. Rep. 1866,
304 ) , * * is an excellent adjunct to the rear-
ing of children up to a certain age, and
has become almost, if not universally,
adopted in the families of the Hudson's
Bay Company's employees." Consult
also Milton and Cheadle, N. W. Passage,
3ded., 85, 1865. (a. f. c.)
Motahtosiks ( Mo-tah^-tos-iks, * many med-
icines'). A band of the Siksika. — Grin-
nell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 208, 1892.
Motahtosiks. A Imnd of the Piegan.
Ooxyuren.— Morgan. Anc. Soc., 171, 1877. Many
Medicines.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 225,
1892. Ko-tah'-toi-iks.— Ibid., 209. Ho-t&'-to-tii.—
Morgan, Anc. Soc. 171, 1878. Mo-ta'-tot«.— Hay-
den, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val., 264, 1862.
BOLL. 30] MOTA 8 VILLAGE — MOUNDS AND MOUND-BUILDERS
949
Mota's Village. A former Potawatonii
villaj^, 80 called from the chief, just n.
of Tippecanoe r., near Atwood, Kosciusko
CO., Ind. The reservation was sold in
1834.
Motepori. A village of the Opata in
1726, on the Rio Sonora, lat. 30°, n. cen-
tral Sonora, Mexico (Bandelier in Arch.
Inst. Papers, in, 71, 1890). The place
is now civilized.
Motiai (possibly from pix-motsan^ *a loop
in a stream*). A Comanche division,
nearly exterminated in a battle with the
Mexicans about 1845.
Hooohaa.— Hazen in Sen. Ex. Doc. 18, 40th Cong.,
Sd sess., 17, 1869. Motaai'.— Mooney in 14th Rep.
B. A. £., 1045, 1896. Hut-ihi.— Butcher and Lyen-
decher, Comanche MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1867
(trans., 'big noses').
Motwainaiks ( ' all chiefs ' ) . A band of
the Piegan division of the Siksika.
All Chiefs.— Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales, 225,
1892. Ko-twai'-naiks.— Ibid., 209.
Mouanast. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy in 1608, situated on the n.
bank of Rapi)ahannock r., in King George
co.,Va. — Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr.
1819.
Mouohaouaouastiiriiiioek. A Montagn-
ais tribe of Canada in the 17th century. —
Jes. Rel. 1643, 38, 1858.
Xonisa. An unidentified tribe or vil-
lage which according to Douay was found
bjr Tonti in 1682 on or near the lower
Mississippi. Cf. Mosopelea.
Monisa.— Le Clereq, First Estab. of the Faith, n,
277, 1882: Shea, Discov. Miss., 226, 1852. Housat.—
Barcia, Ensayo, 261, 1723.
Mounds and Mound-builders. The term
mounds has been used in America in two
different senses as regards the scoi)e in-
tended. By a number of writers it has
beenappliedin a broad sense to include not
only tne tumuli proper but also various
other kinds of ancient inonumenta. In
the more limited sense it refers only to
the tumuli, or true mounds, whether of
earth or stone. Following the usual
custom the term is here used in the
broader sense, and hence includes the true
mounds, inclosures, walls, embankments,
refuse heaps, and other fixed structures.
Although the tumuli are of various
forms they may be classed, with few ex-
ceptions, as conical tumuli, elongate or
wall-like mounds, pyramidal, and effigy
or imitative mounds. The conical tumuli
are artificial hillocks, not mere accumu-
lations of debris. The form, except
where worn down by the plow, is usually
that of a low, broad, round-topped cone
varying in size from a scarcely percepti-
ble swell in the ground to elevations of 80
or even 100 ft, and from 6 to 300 ft in diam-
eter. Most of the burial mounds are of
this type. The elongate or wall-like
mounds are earthworks having the ap-
pearance of walls, usually from 150 to
300 ft in length, though some are only 50
ft, while others extend to 9(X) ft. They
seem to be confined exclusively to the
efl[i^y-moun(l region.
The typical form of the pyramidal
mounds is . a truncated quadrangular
some,
)yramid;
nowever, are circu-
I
lar and a few are
irregularly iwntag-
onal, but are distin-
guished by the flat
top. Some have ter-
races extending
outward from one
or two sides, and
others a ramp or
roadway leading up to the level surface.
The sharp outlines showing the tnie form
have been more or less obliterated in
most instances.
The so-called effigy mounds are those
representing animal forms, and witha few
notable exceptions are confined to Wis-
consin and the immediately adjoining
PUITFORM MOUND, MiMOURi; 160
FT. LONQ, SS FT. HIOH. ( THOMAS )
states. The exceptions are two in Ohio,
including the noted Serpent mound, and
two bird mounds in Georgia. They vary
in length from 50 to 500 ft, and in height
from a few inches to 4 or 5 ft.
The conical mounds are sometimes com-
posed of earth and stones intermingled,
and in a few cases are wholly of stones;
CO'ilLAL MOu'i'LiS, M|S5iil5-^«PRi: HEIGMT ^D fl, (IhOwaq}
they are also, as a rule, depositories of
the dead, but burials also occur in the
pyramidal mounds, although the flat-
topped structures were usually the sites
for Duildings, as temples, council houses,
and chiefs* dwellings. Burials were
rarely made in the wall-like or the effigy
mounds. As a rule no special order pre-
950
MOUNDS AND MOUND-BUILDERS
[B.
vailed in the arrangement of mounds in
groups, but some exceptions occur, as, in
the eflSgy-mound region, the small conical
mounds are sometimes arranged in regu-
lar lines, somewhat evenly, spaced and
occasionally connected by low embank-
ments; and in Calhoun co., 111., and n. e.
Minnesota they were frequently built
in rows. Although a few mounds have
been observed on the Pacific slope, n.
of Mexico, they are limited chiefly to
the Mississippi basin and the Gulf states,
the areas of greatest abundance being
along the banks of the Mississippi from
La CSposse, Wis. , to Natchez, Miss. , the cer*
tral and s. sections of Ohio and the adjoin-
ing portion of Indiana, and s. Wisconsin.
The E. side of Florida is well dotted with
shell-heaps.
Inclosures include some of the most
important and interesting monuments
of the United States. In form they are
circular, square, ob-
long, octagonal, or
irregular. Those
which approach
regularity in figure jjS^ ^ ^^B\ j^
are either circular, |^ ^B^* ^ ^''
square, or octag-
onal, and with few
exceptions are
found in Ohio and "^o"""* ""th moat and ehcikc-
the adjoining por-
tions of Indiana,
Kentucky, and West Virginia. These
works vary in size from an area of
less than an acre to that of more
LINO WALL, WEST VIRGINIA;
oiAM. 100 FT. ( Thomas)
oblong inclosure with moat; west virginia; length 287 ft.
( Thomas)
than 100 acres. Some are exceedingly
interesting because of the near approach
they make to true geometrical figures.
The diameters of the circle in one or two
instances vary less than 10 ft in 1,000 ft,
and the corners of the square in one or
two other examples vary less than one
degree from 90°.
In s. E. Missouri and in one or two
other sections the inclosures have scat-
tered through them small earthen circles
marking the sites of circular dwellings.
There are indications that some at least
of the Ohio inclosures contained similar
circles which were obliterated by cultiva-
tion.
Another important class of ancient
monuments are the refuse or shell heaps
found along tidewater and at a few
points on the banks of inland streams
and lakes, and the mound-like heaps
which cover the ruined pueblo dwell-
ings of the S. W. Many hundreds of the
mounds and many of the refuse heaps
have been opened and their contents ex-
amined. Although one or two artifacts,
especially certain copper plates with
stamped figures, have been discovered
which are diflScult to account for, the
contents otherwise present nothing incon-
sistent with the conclusion that they are
the works of the Indians who inhabited
these regions prior to the advent of the
whites. It has been contended that many
of the artifacts found in the mounds indi-
cate a higher degree of culture than that
reached by the later Indians of the mound
area. After excluding those derived from
the whites or otherwise introduced, this
is found to be a mistake, as it appears
from the evidence that the historic In-
dians could and did make articles similar
in type and equal in finish to those of the
mounds. Some of the articles found show
contact with Europeans, and hence indi-
cate that the mounds in which they were
discovered are comparatively modem.
Notwithstanding these facts and many
others tending to the same conclusion, it
was maintained by the majority of writ-
ers on American archeology, until very
recently, that the builders of the mounds
of the Mississippi basin and the Gulf states
were a specific people of higher culture
than the Indians found inhabiting this re-
gion ; that they were overrun by incoming
Indian hordes and finally became extinct,
leaving the monuments as the only evi-
dence of their former existence. Other
writers suppose that they were Mexicans
(Aztec) wno were driven s. into Mexico,
while others concluded that they were
driven into the Gulf states and were the
ancestors of the tribes inhabiting that
section. The more careful exploration
of the mounds in recent years, and the
more thorough study of the data bearing
on the subject, have shown these opinions
to be erroneous. The articles found in the
mounds and the character of the various
monuments indicate a culture stage much
BULL. 30]
MOUNTAIN CROWS — MOURNING
951
the same as that of the more advanced
tribes found inhabiting this region at the
advent of the whites. Moreover, Euro-
pean articles found in mounds, and the
statements by early chroniclers, as those of
De Soto's expedition, prove beyond ques-
tion that some of these structures were
erected by the Indians in post-Columbian
times. The conclusion, reacheil chiefly
through the investigations of the Bureau
of American Ethnology, and now gener-
ally accepted, is that the mound builders
were the ancestors of the Indians found
inhabiting the same region by the first
European explorers. The dearth of
mounds east of the Allegheny mts., n. of
Tennessee and North Carolina, seems to
mark the mountainrangealongthisstretch
as a prehistoric boundary line. This
would seem to indicate that the mound
builders did not enter their territory from
the Atlantic coast n. of North Carolina.
The few ancnent structures in New York
are now con-
ceded to be Iro-
quoian, but the
particular tribes
or groups to
which the other
mounds are at-
tributable can
not always be
stated with cer-
tainty. It is
known that some
of the tribes in-
habiting the
Gulf states when
De Soto passed
through their
territory in
1540-41, as the
Yuchi, Creeks, Chickasaw, and Natchez,
were still using and probably construct-
ing mounds, and that the Quapaw of
Arkansas were also using them. There
is likewise documentary evidence that the
** Texas" tribe still used mounds at the
end of the 17th century, when a chief's
house is descril)ed as l)eing built on one
(Bolton, inf n, 1906) . There is also suffi-
cient evidence to justify the conclusion
that the Cherokee and Shawnee were
mound builders. No definite conclusion
as to what Indians built the Ohio works
has yet l)een reached, though it is be-
lieved that they were in part due to the
Cherokee who once inhabited eastern
Ohio. According to Miss Fletcher, the
Winnebago build miniature mounds
in the lodge during certain ceremo-
nies.
The period during which mound build-
ing N. of Mexico lasted can not be de-
termined with certainty. That many
of the mounds were built a century or
two before the appearance of the whites
BIR08EYE VIEW OF CAHOKIA MOUND, ILLINOIS. GREATEST Length, ABOUT
is known from the fact that when first
observed they were covered with a heavy
forest growth. Nothing, however, has
l)een found in them to indicate great an-
tiquity, and the present tendency among
archeologists is to assign them to the
period subsecjuent to the beginning of the
Christian era.
For the literature of the mounds con-
sult the bibliography under Archeologif ;
see also Thomas, (1) Catalogue Prehist.
Works E. of Rocky Mts., Bull. B. A. E.,
1891, (2) in 12th Rep. B. A. E., 1894, and
authorities therein cited. See also An-
tiauUi/y Archeology y Cahok'ui 3found, Ele-
phant Mound y Etowah Mound ^ Fort Ancient ^
Fortitication.% Grave Creek Mound^ Newark
Works, Popular fallacies^ Serpent Mound,
Shell-heaps. * (c. t.)
Mountain Crows. A name applied to the
Crows who hunted and roamed in the
mountains away from upj)er Missouri r.
They separated from the River Crows
al)out 1859.
Etsapookoon. — Hen-
ry, MS. vocab.. B.
A. E., 1808 (Siha-
8ti}>a name ) . Moun-
tain Grows. — Peaxe
in Ind. Aff. Rep.
1871, 420, 1872.
Skoii'ohint.—
G i o r (1 a . Kalis-
pi»lni Diet., pt. 2,
81, 1879 (Kalispelm
name).
Mountain Lake.
Officially men-
tioned as a body
of 800 Indians
under the East-
ern Oregon
(Dalles) agency
in 1861. The
name dropped
out of use after 1 862, and they have not been
identified. See Ind. Aff. Rep., 220, 1861;
Taylor in Cal. Farmer, June 12, 186:1
Mountain Snakes. A name' used by
Ross ( Fur Hunters, i, 250, 1855) for some
of the northern Shoshoni; otherwise un-
identified.
Mount Pleasant. A former Yuchi town
in 8. E. Georgia, on Savannah r., probably
in Screven co. , near the mouth of Brier cr.
Mourning. Mourning customs vary in
different tribes, but there are certain
modes of expressing sorrow that are com-
mon to all parts of the country, and in-
deed to all parts of the world, as wailing,
discarding personal ornaments, wearing
disordered garments, putting clay on the
head and sometimes on the joints of the
arms and legs, and the sacrifice of prop-
erty. Other practices are widespread, as
shedding one's blood by gashing the arms
or legs, cutting off joints of the fingers,
unbraiding the hair, cutting off locks
and throwing them on the dead or into
the grave, and blackening the face or
952
MOURNING
[B. A.B.
body. These signs of mourning are gen-
erally made immediately at the death, and
are renewed at the burial and again when
the mourning feast takes place.
In some tribes it is customary when
anyone dies for a priest or other respected
person to stand outside the dwelling in
which the deceased lies and, with hand
uplifted, proclaim in a loud voice to the
spirits of the kindred that their kinsman
has started on his way to join them;
meanwhile swift runners speed through
the tribe, spreading the news of the death
among the living.
More or less ceremony usually attends
the preparation of the body for burial.
Among the Hopi wailing takes place dur-
ing the washing of the body. In some
tribes the characteristic tribal moccasin
must be put on the feet of the dead by a
member of a certain clan, in order that
the kindred may be safely reached. In
others the face must be ceremonially
painted for the journey and the best
clothing put on, so that the dead may go
forth properly attired and honored. Per-
sonal belongings are placed with the
corpse. On the N. W. coast, after the
body has been arrayed it is propped up
at the rear of the house and surrounded
by the property, and the relatives and
mourners pass by the remains in token of
respect. The conventional sign of mourn-
ing among the Salish, according to Hill-
Tout, is the severing of the hair of the
surviving relatives, who dispose of it in
various ways according to the tribe — by
burning it to prevent its falling into the
hands of a sorcerer; by burying it where
vegetation is dense, tlius insuring long
life and strength ; by putting it away for
final burial at their own death ; by cast-
ing it into running water, and by fastening
it to the branches on the eastern side of a
red -fir tree. Among the Hopi wailing is
confined to the day of the death and to
anniversaries of that event. When a
number die from an epidemic a date is
oflScially fixed for the mourning anniver-
sary, and this is kept even when it inter-
cepts a festival or other rite. Professional
mourners are employed among the Zuili,
Hopi, Mohave, and neighboring tribes.
The observance of the anniversary of a
death is common. Among some tribes it
is observed with great ceremony; in all
cases the guests are served with food, and
gifts are made to them in honor of the
dead. There are differences observed in
mourning for a man or a woman and for
an adult or a child. Among the Dakota
the widow passed around the circle of the
tribe, each circuit standing for a promise
to remain single during a year. The gen-
eral sign of widowhoSi is loosening the
hair and cutting it short in a line with the
ears. It was the wife's duty to light a
fire for four nights on her husband's
grave and watch that it did not die out
before dawn. She had to wail at sunrise
and sunset, eat Httle, and remain more or
less secluded. The length of her seclusion
varied in different tribes from a few weeks
or months to two years. At the expira-
tion of the period relatives of her former
husband brought her gifts and bade her
return to her former j5Teasui*es. She was
then free to marry again. In some tribes
wives, slaves, or horses and dogs were
formerlv slain at the death of a man, for
it was the general belief that relations of
all kinds which were maintained on earth
would continue in the dwelling place of
spirits.
It was usual for the tribe to abstain
from festivities when a death occurred in
the community. The various societies
omitted their meetings, and general si-
lence was observed. In some tribes all
the people wailed at sunrise and sunset.
Where these general observances of sor-
row were the custom, the mourners were
visited by the leading men a few days af-
ter death, when the pipe was offered, and
after smoking, the family of the deceased
gave a feast, a signal for the tribe to re-
sume its wonted pleasures.
The black paint that was put upon
men, women, and children of some tribes
as a sign of mourning might not be washed
off, but must be worn until it disappeared
by some other means. The announcement
of the mourning feast was generally made
in a formal way at the close of the burial
ceremony. Among most of the Plains
tribes black paint was a sign of victory
and mourners refrained entirely from
paint or other adornment.
The customs of mourning seem to have
a twofold aspect— one relating to the spirit
of the deceased, the other to the surviv-
ing relatives and friends. This dual
character is clearly revealed in a custom
that obtained among the Omaha and cog-
nate tribes: On the death of a man or a
woman who was respected in the com-
munity, the young men, friends of the
deceased, met at a short distance from
the lodge of the dead and made two inci-
sions in their left arms so as to leave a
loop of skin. Through this loop was
f)assed a small willow twig, with leaves
eft on one end; then, with their blood
dripping upon the willow leaves, holding
a willow stem in each hand, they walked
in single file to the lodge, and, standing
abreast in a long line, they sang there the
tribal song to the dead, beating the wil-
low stems together to the rhythm of the
song. At the sound of the music, a near
relative came forth from the lodge and,
beginning at one end of the line, pulled
out the blood-stained twigs from the left
arm of each singer, and laid a hand on
BULL. 30]
MOU8 MRIKSAH
953
his head m token of thanks for the sym-
pathy shown. The song continued until
the last twig was thrown to the ground.
The music of the song was in strange con-
trast to the bloody spectacle. It was a
blithe major melody with no words, but
only breathing vocables to float the voice.
According to the Indian explanation the
song was addressed to the spirit, bid-
ding it go gladly on its way; the blood
shed was the tribute of sorrow — grief for
the loss of a friend and sympathy for the
mourners. The same idea underlies the
Omaha custom of ceasing the loud wail at
the close of the burial ceremonies lest the
sound make it harder for the spirit who
must go to leave behind its earthly kin-
dred. See Mortuary customs, (a. c. f.)
MouB (Mo^Sy * moose*). A gens of the
Chippewa, q. v. .
Moat.— Oatschet, Chippewa MS., B. A. £., 1882.
Mo^— Wm. Jones, inf n, 1906. Moona.— Tanner.
Narrative, 314. 1830. Mou«.— Warren (1852) in
Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll., v, 46, 1885.
MouBonee ( Mof^sone, * moose ' ) . A phra-
try of the Chippewa (q. v.): The Mous
(Moose) gens is one of its leading gentes,
as is also the Waubishashe (Marten).
Warren calls the phratry the Waubishashe
group. (j. M. )
Oent de Orinud.— Dobbs, Hudson Bay, 33. 1744
(same ?). Monsoae. — Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc.
Coll., V, 44, 18»5 (misprint?). Mo-sonS.— Wm.
Jones, inf n, 1906. Montoni.— Dobbs, Hudson Bay,
33, 1744 (same?). Mosonique.— Ibid, (same?)
Moua-o-naeg. — Warren in Minn. Hist. Soc. Coll..
y, 50. 1885..
Movas. A former Nevome pueblo and
the seat of the mission of Santa Marfa,
founded in 1622; situated on one of the
8. tributaries of the Rio Yaqui, lat. 28°
1(K, Ion. 109° 1(K, Sonora, Mexico;
pop. 308 in 1678, and 90 in 1730. Its
mhabitants, known as Mova, or Moba,
from the name of their settlement, prob-
ably spoke a dialect differing slightly
from Nevome proper. (f. w. h. )
Ooaoepcioii Kobat.~Sonora Materiales (1730)
quoted by Bancroft. No. Mex. States, i, 514, 1884.
■obat.— Zapata (1678) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s.,
in, 861, 1857. Kovas.— Rudo Ensavo {ca. 1762).
124, 1863. Santa Karia Kobas.— Zapata, op. cit.,
860.
Xovwiats ( Mo-rui^'Ots ) . A Paiute band
formerly living in s. e. Nevada; pop. 57
in 1873.
Mo-vwi'-ato.— Powell in Ind. Aflf. Rep. 1873, 50.
1874.— Mowi'ato.— Gatschet in Wheeler Surv. Rep.,
VII, 410, 1879.
Mowhawa (Mahwaw^, *wolf.*) A gens
of the Miami, q. v.
Ma'^hwaw.— Wm. Jones, inf'n, 1906. Mo-
wha'-w&.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 168, 1877.
MowhawiMouk (Mahwau^owixg^ 'they
go by the name of the wolf.* — W. J.).
A gens of the Sauk and Foxes. See Sauk,
Ma*hwawia5w«ff.— Wm. Jones, inf'n, 1906. Ho-
wh&-wia'-M»iik.— Morgran, Anc. Soc., 170, 1877.
Mowkowk. See Mocuck.
MoxuB. A chief of the Abnaki, called
also Agamagus, the first signer of the
treaty of 1699, and seemingly the successor
of Madokawando (Drake, Inds. of N. Am. ,
294, 1880). He signed also the treaty
with Gov. Dudley in 1702, but a year
afterward unsuccessfully besieged the
English fort at Oasco, Me. He treated,
with the English in 1713, and again in
1717. It was he who in 1689 captured
Pemaquid from the P^nglish. (a. f. c. )
Moyawance. A tribe living in 1608 on
the N. bank of the Potomac, about Prince
George co., Md. Their principal village,
of the same name, w^as about Broad cr.
They numbered about 400, but their
name drops from history at an early date.
They were probably a division of the
later Conoy.
Hoyaonoa.— Smith (1629). Va., ii. 86, repr. 1819.
Moyaoneei.~Bozman, Md., i, 119. 1837. Hoya-
ones.— Simons in Smith (1629), Va., i. 177, repr.
1819. Koyaona.— Ibid., map. Moyawance.— Ibid.,
118. Koyoones.— Strachey (ca. 1612), Va., 38, 1849.
Koyowahoot.— Maeauley, N. Y., n, 168, 1829.
Moyowanoe.— Bozman, Md.. i. 139. 1837.
Moytoy. A Cherokee chief of Tellico,
Tenn., who became the so-called ** em-
peror" of the seven chief Cherokee
towns. Sir Alexander Cuming, desirous
of enlisting the Cherokee in the British
interest, decided to place in control a
chief of his own selection. Moytoy was
chosen, the Indians were induced to ac-
cept him, giving him the title of em-
peror; and, to carry out the program, all
the Indians, including their new sover-
eign, pledged themselves on bendeil knees
to be the faithful subjects of King George.
On the next day, April 4, 1730, **the
crown was brought from Cireat Tennessee,
which, with five eagle- tails and four scalps
of their enemies, Moytoy presented to Sir
Alexander, empowering him to lay the
same at His Majesty's feet.'* Neverthe-
less, Moytoy afterward became a bitter
enemy of the whites, several of whom he
killed without provocation at Sitico,
Tenn. See Mooney in 19th Rep. B. A. E. ,
pt. 1, 1900.
Mozeemlek. A problematic people who,
according to Lahontan, dwelt somewhere
in the region of w. Dakota or Wyoming,
in 1700. They wore beards, were
clothed like the whites, had copper axes,
and lived on a river which emptied into
a large salt lake.
Moseem-lek.— Vaugondy, map. 1778. Moxam-
leeks.— Feather8tonhaugb,Canoe Voy., i. 280, 1847.
Mweemleck.— Lahontan, New Voy., i, 126, 1703.
Konemlek.— Ibid.. 119. Moseenleic.— Barcia, En-
sayo, 297, 1723. Kozemleks.— Harris, Voy. and
Trav.. II, 920, 17a5.
Mriksah. The eldest son of Canonicus,
the celebrated Narraganset chief; known
also as Mexam, Mixam, Mixanno, and
Meika. After the death of his father in
1647 he was made chief sachem of the
tribe. He married a sister of Ninigret,
who was the noted Quaiapen, called also
Old Queen, Sunk Squaw, and Magnus
(q. V. ). Mriksah was one of the sachems
to whom the English commissioners at
Boston sent interrogations regarding their
954
M8EPA8E — MUGWUMP
[B. A. B.
connection with the Dutch of New York.
He was in close relations with Ninigret
in his movements. (c. t. )
Msepase {M^shtp^shty *big lynx/ —
W. J. ). A gens of the Shawnee, q. v.
Meshipefthi.— Wm. Jones, infn, 1906. M'-se'-pa-
•e.— Morgan, Anc. Soc., 168, 1877. Panther.— Ibid.
Mnanbissek. Mentioned in a letter sent
by the Abnaki to the governor of New
England in 1721 as one of the divisions of
their tribe. Not identified.
Mnayn. The Yaudanchi name of a
village site on Tule r., Cal.; also known
as Chesheshim. It is not the name of a
tribe, as stated by Powers.
Ohesheshim.— A. L. Kroeber, infn, 1903. lUi-
ai'-u.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., in, 370,
1877. Muayu.— A. L. Kroeber, infn. 1906.
Muchalat. A Nootka tribe on Mucha-
lat arm of Nootka sd., w. coast of Van-
couver id.; pop. 62 in 1906. Their prin-
cipal village is Cheshish.
Matoh-oUto.--Mayne. Brit. Col., 251, 1862. Xatoh-
iU-aht.— Can. Ind. Aff. 1884, 186, 1885. MiehaUts.—
Armstrong, Oregon, 136, 1857. Mioh-la-itt.— Jew-
itt, Narr., 36, 1849. Mb'tclath.— Boas in 6th Rep.
N. W. Tribes Can., 31, 1890. Muohalaht.— Brit.
Col. map, 1872. Muohlaht.— Sproat, Sav. Life, 308,
1868.
Mnckawis. A name of the whippoor-
will. Wordsworth has the *' melancholy
muckavns^^ in his poem The Excursion.
Carver (Travels, 468, 1778) writes, '*the
whipperwill, or, as it is termed by the
Indians, the viiuikawiss.^* This onoma-
topceic word is probably of Algonquian
origin. It o<!Cur8 as muckkowheesce in
Stiles' Pequot vocabulary of 1762 (Trum-
bull, Natick Diet., Bull. 25, B. A. E.,
1908). (A. F. c.)
Mnertos (Span. : El Pueblo delos Muer-
tos, *the village of the dead'). A group
of prehistoric ruined pueblos 9 m. s. e. of
Tempe, in the Salt River valley, Ariz. —
Gushing in Compte-rendu Intemat. Cong.
Am., VII, 162, 1892.
Lot Muertant.— Cashing, ibid., 168 (referring to
the former inhabitants).
Mngg. An Arosaguntacook chief in
the latter half of the 17th century, con-
spicuous in the war beginning in 1675,
into which he was drawn by the ill-treat-
ment he received from the English. With
about 100 warriors he made an assault,
Oct. 12, 1676, on Black Point, now Scar-
boro. Me., where the settlers had gathered
for protection. While the officer in charge
of the garrison was parleying with Mugg,
the whites managed to escape, only a few
of the officers' servants falling into the
hands of the Indians when the fort was
captured; these were kindly treated.
Mugg became embittered toward the Eng-
lish when on coming in behalf of his own
and other Indians to treat for peace he
was seized and taken a prisoner to Boston,
although soon releasea. He was killed
at Black Point, May, 16, 1677, the place
he capture<l the preceding year. (c. t. )
Xagu. A former populous Chumashan
village, stated by Indians to have been
on the seacoast near Pt Mugu, Ventura
CO., Cal., and placed by Taylor on Guad-
alasca ranch, near the point.
Kugu.— Cabrillo, Narr. (1M2) in Smith. Colec.
Doc. Fla., 181, 1867; Taylor in Cal. Farmer, July
24, 1863. Ku-wvL—Henshaw, Buenaventura MS.
vocab., B. A. E., 1884.
Mngnlasha. A former tribe, related to
the Choctaw, living on the w. bank of
the Mississippi, 64 leagues from the sea,
in a village with the Bayogoula, whose
language they spoke. They are said vari-
ously to have been the tribe called Quini-
pissa by La Salle and Tonti, and encoun-
tered by them some distance lower down
the river, or to have received the rem-
nants of that tribe reduced by disease.
At all events their chief was chief over
the Quinipissa when La Salle and Tonti
encountered them. In January or Feb-
ruary, 1700, the Bayogoula attacked the
Mugulasha and killed nearly all of them.
The name has a generic signification,
* opposite people * — Imuklasha in Choc-
taw— and was applied to other tribes, as
Muklassa among the Creeks and West
Imongolasha on Chickasawhay r., and it
is sometimes difficult to distinguish the
various bodies one from another. Among
the Choctaw it usually refers to people
of the opposite phratry from that to which
the speaker belongs. See Imongolasha ^
Muklassa. (a. s. g. j. r. s.)
Kogliuhah town.— H. R. Doc. 15, 27th Cong., 2d
sess., 5, 1841. Kogoluthat.— Ind. Aff. Rep., 877,
1847. Kofoolaehai.— Sauvole (1699) in Margry,
D^c., IV, 453, 455, 1880. MoiiffOBtatofaat.-McKen-
ney and Hall, Ind. Tribes, in, 81, 1858. Konfou-
laeha.— La Harpe (1723) in French, Hist. Coll. La.,
III, 17, 1851. Honcoulatohet.— Drake, Bk. Inds.,
ix, 1848. KotigoIaohes.~Coxe, Carolana, 7, 1741.
Kougoolaohas.— Iberville (1699) in Maigry, D^.,
IV, 113, 119, 124, 1880.
Mugwump. Norton (Political Ameri-
canisms, 74, 1890) defines this word as
*'an Independent Republican; one who
sets himself up to be oetter than his fel-
lows; a Pharisee." Since then the term
has come to mean an Independent, who,
feeling he can no longer support the policy
of his party, leaves it temporarily or joins
the opposite party as a protest. The
term was applied to the Independent Re-
publicans who bolted the nomination of
Blaine in 1884, and it at once gained popu-
lar favor. The earlier history of the term
is doubtful, though it seems to have been
for some time previous in local use in
parts of New England to designate a per-
son who makes great pretensions but
whose character, ability, or resources are
not equal to them. The word is derived
from the Massachuset dialect of Algon-
quian, being, as Trumbull pointed out,
the word mukquompy by which £liot
in his translation of the Bible (Gen.,
xxxvi, 40-43; Matt, vi, 21, etc.) renders
such terms as duke, lord, chief, captain,
leader, great man. The components of
the word are moqki * great \ -omp 'man.'
In newspaper and political writings mug-
BULL. 30]
MUHHOWEKAKEN — MDLSHINTIK
955
wump has given rise to mugwumpery,
magwumpian, mugwumpism. (a. f. c. )
MnUiowekakexi ( Muh-luywe-kaf'ken^ * old
shin'). A subdivision of the Delawares
(q. V.).— Morgan, Anc. Soc, 172, 1877.
MnlikarmhiikBe {Muhrkarm-hul'-set 'red
face'). A subdivision of the Delawares
(q. v.). —Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877.
Miilikreiithanie(3/it/i-^Ten/-/iar''-n6, *root
digger* ) . A subdivision of the Delawares
(q. v.). — Morgan, Anc. Soc., 172, 1877.
Xningpe. A former village, presum-
ably Costanoan, connected with Dolores
mission, San Francisco, Cal. — Taylor in
Oal. Farmer, Oct. 18, 1861.
Xoinyawu. The Porcupine clan of the
Hopi, q. v.
Ka-i-Byftn wiii
VII, 406. 1894. Kuiyawu winwa.— Fewkes in 19th
wim-wii.— Fewkcs in Am. Anthrop.,
Rep. B. A. £., 584, 1900. Kon-ya'a-wu.— Stephen
in 8th Rep. B. A. £., 39, 1891.
Muiva. A Sobaipuri rancheria in 1697,
about which date it was visited by Father
Kino. Situated on the Rio San Pedro,
probably near the mouth of Arivaipa cr.,
8. Ariz.
Knihibay.— De Tlsle. map Am., 1703. Hoiva.—
Kino (im) in Doc. Hist. Mex., 4th s., i, 280, 1856.
Xnk {Amikf * beaver*). A gens of the
Potawatomi, q. v.
Ami'k.— Wm. Jones, infn, 1906. Muk.— Morgran,
Anc. Soc., 167, 1877.
Mukanti. A band or village of the
Molala formerly on the w. slope of the
Cascade mis., Oreg. It is not definitely
located.' (a s. g.)
Mukohiath. A sept of the Toquart, a
Nootka tribe. — Boas in 6th Rep. N. W.
Tribes Canada, 32, 1890.
Muklasalgi (Muxldmlgij * people of
Muklassa town*). An extinct Creek
clan. — Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg., i, 156,
1884.
Muklassa. Formerlv a small Upper
Creek town, a mile below Sawanogi and
on the same side of Tallapoosa r., in
Montgomery co., Ala. Its inhabitants
were of the Alibamu tribe or division.
Cf. MugiUasha.
Amooklaiah Town.— Adair, Am. Ind., 277, 1775.
XackaUssy.— Robin, Voy., ii, map, 1807. Koa-
daaaa.— Bartram, Trav., i, map, 1799. Hoealata.—
Alcedo, Die. Geog., ni, 220, 1788. Mooklauaa.—
Pickett, Hist. Ala., Ii. 267. 1851. Mooklautan.—
Hawkins (1813) in Am. State Pap., Ind. Aff., i,
854. 1882 (misprint). Kook-Uu-sao.— Hawkins
(1799), Sketch, 35, 1848. Kooolaase.— Bartram,
Travels, 446, 1791. MudnleMS.— Swan (1791) in
Schoolcraft. Ind. Tribes, v, 262, 1855.
Mukn^uk. A former Aleut village on
Agattu id., Alaska, one of the Near id.
group of the Aleutians, now uninhabited.
Muknk. See Mocuck.
Xulamohapa (4ong ^nd by the trees').
A former Nishinam village in the valley
of Bear r., n. of Sacramento, Cal.
Moolamchapa. —Powers in Overland Mo., xii, 22,
1874.— Ku-Um'-cha-pa.— Powers in Cont. N. A.
Ethnol., in, 316, 1877.
Mnlatos. One of the tribes of w. Texas,
some of whose people were baptized at
the mission of San Jos^ y San Miguel de
Aguayo in 1784-85, together with people of
other tribes called Gincape, Salaphueme,
and Tanaicapeme ( MS. Baptismal records,
1784-85, partidos 901-926). (n. e. b.)
Mulatto Oirls' Town. A former Semi-
nole town s. of Cuscowilla lake, probably
in Alachua co., n. Fla. — Bell in Morse,
Rep. to Sec. War, 307, 1822.
Mnlchatna. A settlement of 180 Eskimo
on Mulchatna r., a branch of Nushagak r.,
Alaska.
Kalohatna. — Petroff, Rep. on Alaska, 48, 1881.
Molohatna.— Petroff in 10th Census, Alaska, 17,
1884. Mulchatna.— Baker, Qeog. Diet. Alaska, 1902.
Mailers. Flattish stones employed by
the native tribes for crushing and pulver-
izing food substances on a metate (o. v. ) or
other flat surface; sometimes called mano,
theSpanish for *hand.' They were in very
general use, especially among the agn-
cultural tribes, and in both form and use
grade imperceptibly into the pestle. They
may be merely natural bowlders of shape
suited to the purpose, or they may have
been modifiea bv use into artificial form
or designedly shaped by pecking and
grinding according to the fancy of the
owner. In the Pueblo country mullere
are usually oblong slabs of lava or other
suitable stone, flat on the undersurface
and slightly convex in outline and supe-
rior surface, and of a size to be conven-
iently held in the hand. In some sections,
as in the Pacific states and in the Missis-
sippi valley, they are frequently flattish
or cheese-shaped cylinders or disks,
smooth on the underside and somewhat
roughened above. They are sometimes
pitted on one or both surfaces, indicating
a secondary use, perhaps for cracking nuts.
Others show battering, as if subjected to
rough usage as hammers. The term
muller is properly applied only to grind-
ers having a flat undersurface and shaped
to be held under the hand; the p^le
has a flat or rounded undersurface and
is shaped to be held in the hand in an
upright position. See Metates, Mortars,
Pestles, and consult the authorities there-
under cited. (w. H. H.)
Mullinose. See Maninose.
Mnlluk. A former Kusan village or
tribe on the n. side of the mouth of Co-
quille r., on the coast of Oregon. It was
on the site of the present town of Ran-
dolph. (L. F.)
Ooquille.— Abbott, MS. Coquille Census, B. A. E.,
1858. Delmath.— Huntington in Ind. Aff. Rep.
1867, 62, 1868. Delwashet.— Ind. Aflf. Rep., 470,1865.
Lower Ooquille.— Dorsey, MdllCkk MS. vocab., B.
A. E., 1884. MiUa&k.— Ibid, (native name). Ntdl-
mae'-ci.— Dorsey, Tutu MS. vocab., B. A. E., 1884
(so called by Tututni, etc.). Tal-hush-to-ny.—
Abbott, MS. Coquille Census, B. A. E., 1858.
Mulshintik (Mvl'-din-dk). A former
Yaquina village on the s. side of Yaquina
r., Oreg. — Dorse v in Jour. Am. Folk-
lore, III, 229, 1890.
958
MUOC MUSIC AND MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS
[B. A. B.
Doc. Col. Hist., VII, 178, 1866. Monii.— Vater,
Mith., pt. 8, sec. 3, 867, 1816. Konaiet.— German
Flats Conference (1770) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist.,
viii, 243, 1857. Konsyt.— Loekiel, Hist. Mission
United Breth., pt. 3, 119, 1794. Hontheet.— Aupa-
umut (1791) in Brinton, Lenape Leg., 45, 1885.
Kontheys.— Brinton, Lenape Leg., 36, 1885. Kun-
oeyi.— Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, v, 495, 1855. Mun-
oie«.— Writer of 1782 in Butterfield, Washington-
Irvine Corr., 377, 1882. Munoy.— Rupp, West. Pa.,
178, 1846. Munwtyi.— Hutchins (1778) in School-
craft. Ind. Tribes, vi, 714, 1857. Muiuees.— Trader
il778) in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, iil, 561, 1853.
Eun-Me-wuk.— Morgan, Consang. and AfBn.,289,
1871. Munses.— Croghan (1765) in Rupp, West
Pa., app., 173, 1846. Munsay.— Easton Con-
ference (1757) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 286,
1856. Munseyis.— Vater., Mith., pt. 3, sec. 3, 367,
1816. Munti.— Barton, New Views, x, 1798. Mun-
•ies.— Croghan (1768) in Rupp, West. Pa.,
app., 181, 1846. Munsy.— Smith, Boquet Exped.,
89, 1766. Hunseys.— Delaware treaty (1765) in
N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vii, 741, 1856 (misprint).
Ptakait.— Brinton, Lenape Leg., 39, 1886 ('Round
foot', referring to the Wolf; the totemic designa-
tion of the Munsee). Took'-seat.— Morgan, Anc.
Soc., 172. 1878 CWoir, one of the three Dela-
ware gentes; according to Brinton these divi-
sions are not gen tes ) . Wemintheew. — Aupaumu t
(1791) in Brinton. Lenape Leg., 20, 1885 (Mahican
name). Wolf tribe of the Delawaret.— The Mun-
see have frequently been so called.
Mnoc. A Chumashan village on one of
the Santa Barbara ids., Cal., probably
Santa Rosa, in 1542.
Mttoc.— Cabrillo, Narr. (1542) in Smith, Colec. Doc.
Fla., 186, 1857. Muoe.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer,
Apr. 17, 1868.
Mapn. A populous Chumashan village
stated by Indians to have been at Santa
Paula, Ventura co., Cal. Mupu arroyo
drains into the Saticoy. See Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, July 24, 1863. ( h. w. h. )
Mnrek. A Yurok village on Klamath r. ,
Cal., 12 or 13 m. below the mouth of the
Trinity.
Koor-i-oht.— McKee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d Cong.,
spec, sess., 194, 1853. Koo-rit.— Ibid., 162. Korai-
un.— Gibbs in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, in, 138,
1853. Morias.— McKee in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4, 32d
Cong., spec, sess., 193, 1853. Mo-ri-ohs.— Ibid., 161.
Krh.— Powers in Overland Monthly, vni, 530, 1872.
Murek.— A. L. Kroeber, infn, 1905. Mur-iohi.-
Meyer, Nach dem Sacramento, 282, 1855.
Murnam. A former Texas tribe, numer-
ous members of which were baptized dur-
ing the first half of the 18th century at the
San Antonio missions. One individual by
this name was baptized in 1707 at Mission
San Francisco Solano, on the Rio Grande.
At San Antonio their baptism was first
recorded under ** Baptisms of the Hyer-
bipiamos " (Ervipiames)with those of* the
Ervipiames destined for Mission San
Xavier de Ndxera, called the **Hyerbipi-
amo suburb" (1721-26). The records
show that in their gentile state the Mu-
ruam intermarried with these Ervipiames,
who were Tonka wan, and who came from
Rancherfa Grande (q. v. ) . This points to
the conclusion that the Muruam were
Tonkawan. A difficulty is raised, how-
ever, by the fact that at the Ervipiame
suburb were also numerous Ticmamares,
some of which tribe had been baptized at
Smi Francisco Solano mission and were
apparently natives of that region ( Records
of Mission San Antonio de Valero, MS.).
After 1726 the Muruam neophytes were
incorporated underMissionValero(ibid.) .
Their name is most frequently found in
the baptismal books of this mission be-
fore the year 1730, but members of the
tribe were still living there as late as 1775.
Compare Marxame», who may have been
identical. (h. e. b.)
Moroame.— Baptismal Records, op. cit. Moni-
ames. — Ibid. Mnmaiii. — Ibid. Mumami. — ^Ibid.
Xurnbusi. The Bean clan of the Yoki
(Rain) phratry of the Hopi. See Patki.
Mu'r-zi-bn-ii.— Stephen in 8th Rep. B. A. £., 39,
1891.
Hub (*mesquite*). Given by Bourke
(Jour. Am. Folk-lore, u, 181, 1889) as a
clan (properly gens) of the Mohave, q. v.
MuBalakun. A name, originally that of
a captain or chief of one of the villages in
the vicinity of Cloverdale, Cal., applied
to all the romo living along Russian r.
from Preston southward to the vicinity of
Geyserville. (s. a. b.)
■ai-tu-ta-ki-as.— McKee (1851) in Sen. Ex. Doc. 4,
32a Cong. , spec. sess. ,144, 1853. Maifclla Kafoont.—
Bancroft, Nat. Races, i, 449. 1874. Mi-ialMa Ma-
gun'.— Powers in Cont. N. A. Ethnol., iii, 183,
1877. Hn-tal-la-kun'.— Ibid.
MuBcongas. A village on the coast of
Maine in 1616, probably belonging to the
Abnaki. It seems to have been near
Muscongus id., in Lincoln co.
MuskoBcuB.— Smith (1624) in Me. Hist. Soc. Ck)ll..
V, 155, 1857. NasooncuB.— Smith (1616) in Mass.
Hist. Soc. Ck>ll., 3d s., vi. 107, 1837. Nuscouens.—
Smith (1829) .Va.. ii, 183,repr. 1819. Nuskonout.—
Ibid., 173. Kuskonoua.— Ibid., 192.
Mascapiabit (*pillon place'). Men-
tioned by Rev. J. Cavalleria (Hist. San
Bernardino Val, 39, 1902) as a village
(probably Serrano) at a place now called
Muscupiabe, near San Bernardino, s. Cal.
Musgrove, Mary. See Bosomworth.
MuBhalatubbee. A Choctaw chief, bom
in the last half of the 18th century. He
was present at Washington, D. C, in
Dec., 1824, as one of the Choctaw dele-
gation, where he met and became ac-
quainted with Lafayette on his last visit
to the United States. He led his war-
riors against the Creeks in connection
with Jackson in 1812. He signed as lead-
ing chief the treaty of Choctaw Trading
House, Miss., Oct. 24, 1816; of Treaty
Ground, Miss., Oct. 18, 1820; of Wash-
ington, D. C, Jan. 20, 1825; and of Danc-
ing Rabbit Creek, Miss., Sept. 27, 1830.
He died of smallpox at the agency in
Arkansas, Sept. 30, 1838. His name was
later applied to a district in Indian Ter.
Mnshkoniatawee. A Montagnais vil-
lage on the s. coast of Labrador. — Steams,
Labrador, 271, 1884.
Music and Musical inBtruments. Indian
music is coextensive with tribal life, for
every public ceremony, as well as each
important act in the career of an indi-
vidual, has its accompaniment of song.
The music of each ceremony has its pe-
BULL. 30]
MUSIC AND MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS
959
cnliar rhjrthm, so also have the classes of
songs which pertain to individual acts:
fasting and prayer, setting of traps, hunt-
ing, courtship, playing of ^mes, facing
and defying death. An Indian can deter-
mine at once the class of a strange song
by the rhythm of the music, but not by
that of the drumbeat, for the latter is not
infrequently played in time differing from
that of the song. In structure the Indian
song follows the outline of the form which
obtains in our own music — a short, me-
lodic phrase built on related tones which
we denominate chord lines, repeated with
more or less variation, grouped into
clauses, and correlated into periods. The
compass of songs varies from 1 to 3
octaves.
Some songs have no words, but the ab-
sence of the latter does not impair the
definite meaning; vocables are used, and
when once set to a melody they are never
changed. Occasionally both words and
vocables are employed in the same song.
Plural singing is generally in unison on
the plains and elsewhere, the women
using a high, reedy, falsetto tone an octave
above the male singers. Among the Cher-
okee and other Southern tribes, however,
"round** singing was common. Men
and women having clear resonant voices
and good musical mtonation compose the
choirs which lead the singing m cere-
monies, and are paid for their services.
Frequently two or three hundred per-
sons join in a choral, and the carrying of
the melody in octaves by soprano, tenor,
and bass voices, produces harmonic
effects.
Songs are the propertv of clans, socie-
ties, and individuals. Clans and societies
have special officers to insure the exact
transmission and rendition of their songs,
which members alone have the right to
sing, and a penalty is exacted from the
member who makes a mistake in sing-
ing. The privilege to sing individual
songs must sometimes be purchased from
the owner. Women composed and sang
the lullaby and the spinning and grinding
songs. Among th^ Pueblos men joined in
singing the latter and beat time on the
floor as the women worked at the metates.
Other songs composed by women were
those sung to encourage the warrior as he
went forth from the camp, and those sung
to send to him, by the will of the singers,
strength and power to endure the hard-
ships of the battle.
On the N. Pacific coast, and among other
tribes as well, musical contests were held,
when singers from one tribe or band
would contend with those from another
tribe or band as to which could remem-
ber the greatest number or accurately
repeat a new song after hearing it given
for the first time. Among all the tribes
accurate singing was considered a desir-
able accomplishment.
Among the Baffinland p]skimo
gnidges are settled by the opponents
meeting by appointment and singing
sarca.«tic songs at each other. The one
who creates the most laughter is regarded
as the victor. The Danish writers call
these controversial songs **nith songs.'*
In ceremonial songs, which are formal
appeals to the supernatural, accuracy in
rendering is essential, as otherwise "the
path would not be straight"; the appeals
could not reach their i)roper destina-
tion and evil conseijuences would follow.
Consequently, when an error in singing
occurs, the singers stop at once, and either
the song or the whole ceremony is begun
again; or, as in some tribes, a rite of con-
trition is performed, after which the cere-
mony may procee<l. Official prompters
keep strict watch during a ceremony in
order to forestall such accidents.
MUSICIANS, PEYOTE CEREMONY; KIOWA
The steps of ceremonial dancers follow
the rhythm of the drum, which frequently
differs from t he rhythm of the song. The
drum may be beaten in 2/4 time and the
song be in 3/4 time, or the beat be in 5/8
time against a melody in 3/4, or the song
may l>e sung to a rapid tremolo beating of
the drum. The l>eat governs the bodily
mov^ementa; the song voices the emotion
of the appeal. The native Ix'lief which
regards breath as the symbol of life is in
part extended to song; the invisible voice
IS supposed to be able to reach the invis-
ible power that permeates nature and
animates all natural forms. The Indian
sings with all his force, being intent on
expressing the fervor of his emotion and
having no conception of an objective pre-
sentation of music. The straining of the
voice injures its tone quality, stress shar-
pens a note, sentiment flattens it, and
continued portenienfo blurs the outline of
the melody, which is often further con-
fused by voice pulsations, making a
960
MUSIC AND MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS
[B. A. a.
rhythm withm a rhythm, another com-
plication being added when the dnim is
beaten to a measure different from that
(jENKs)
of the song; so that one may hear three
rhythms, two of them contesting, some-
times with syncopation, yet resulting in a
well-built whole.
It has always been
diflScult for a lis-
tener of another
race to catch an In-
dian song, ae the
melody is often
"hidden by over-
powering noise.'*
When, however,
this difficulty has
been overcome,
these untrammeled
expressions of emo-
tions present a rich
field m which to
observe the growth
of musical form and the beginning of
musical thinking. They form an impor-
tant chapter in the development of music.
Apart from this historic value, these songs
KWAKIUTL RATTLES; 1
(boas)
Turtle-shell Rattle;
Iroquois d-a)
HUPA Rattle; i-«
(mason)
offer to the composer a wealth of melodic
and rhythmic movements, and that pecu-
liar inspiration which heretofore has been
obtained solely from the folk songs of
Europe.
Musical Instruments^ — Drums vary in
size and structure, and certain ceremonies
have their peculiar type. On the N. W.
coast a plank or box
serves as a drum. Whis-
tles of bone, wood, or
pottery, some producing
two or more tones, are
employed in some cere-
monies; they symbolize
the cry of birds or ani-
mals, or the voices of
spirits. Pandean pipes,
which occur in South
America, were unknown
in the northern conti-
nent until recent times. In the S. W.,
notched sticks are rasped together or on
gourds, bones, or baskets, to accentuate
GouRo Rattle; Hopi;
1-6. ( Stevenson)
NOTCHED Stick
AND Deer
Scapula used
for rattle ;
HO pi; 1-12.
( Stevenson)
rhythm. The flageolet is widely distrib-
uted and is played by young men dur-
ing courtship; it also accompanies the
songs of certain Pueblo
ceremonies. Rattles (q.
V. ) were universal. The
intoning of rituals, incan-
tations, and speeches can
hardly be regarded as of
musical character. The
musical bow is used by
the Maidu of California
and by the Tepehuane,
Cora, and Huichol tribes
of the Piman stock in
Mexico. Among the
Maidu this bow plays an ___ ,
important part in reli- bone whwtles; hupa;
gion and much sorcery is '-»• (mawn)
connected with it.
For further information consult Baker,
Ueber die Musik des Nordamerikani-
schen Wilden, 1882; Boas (1) in 6th
Rep. B. A. E., 1888, (2) in Rep. Nat.
BULL. 30 J
MUSKEG MUSKHOGEAN FAMILY
961
Mus. 1895; Brown in Am. Anthrop., viii,
no. 4, 1906; Cringan, Iroquois Folknaongs,
Archseol. Rep. Provin. Mus., Toronto,
1902; Curtis, Songs of Ancient America,
1905; Gushing in Millstone, x, Jan. 1885;
Dixon in Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist, xvii,
gt. 3, 1905; Farrand, Basis of American
[istory, 1904; Fillmore in Am. Anthrop.,
n. s., 1, 1899; Fletcher (1 ) in Pub. Peabocly
Mas., I, no. V, (2) Indian Story and Song,
1900; Hoffman in 7th Rep. B. A. E., 1891;
Hough in Am. Anthrop., xi, no. 5, 1897;
Hrdlicka, ibid., n. s., vii, no. 3, 1905, and
VIII, no. 1, 1906; Lumholtz, Unknown
Mexico, 1, 475, 1902; Matthews, ( 1 ) Navaho
Legends, 1897, (2) Night Chant, Memoirs
Am. Mus. Nat. Hist, Anthrop. ser., v,
1902; Mooney inl4th Rep. B. A. E., 1896;
Sammelbiinde der Internationalen Musik-
gesellschaft; Stumpf in Vierteljahrsschrift
lurMusikwissenscnaft; Voth in Field Co-
lumb. Mus. Pub., Anthrop. ser., in, vi,
1901, 1903; Wallaschek, Primitive Music,
1893; Willoughby in Am. Anthrop., n. s.,
IX, no. 1, 1907. (a. c. f.)
MuBkeg (Chippewa, miiskig^ Kickapoo,
maskydgi, * grassy bog.' — W. J.). Low,
wet laiid; a quagmire, marsh, swamp,
the equivalent of savane in Canadian
French. A word much used in parts of
Ontario, the Canadian Northwest, and
the adjoining regions of the United States;
spelled also masieg. In the N. W. muskeg
is the usual form. (a. f. c.)
MuBkelnnge. See Maskinonge.
MuBkhogean Family. An important
linguistic stock, comprising the Creekn,
Choctaw, Chickasaw, Seminole, and
other tribes. The name is an adjectival
form of Muskogee f properly Mdskdki (pi.
Maskokalgi or Muscogulgee ) . Its deri va-
tion has been attributed to an Algonquian
term signifying 'swamp* or 'open marshy
land' (see Mu^£g)j but this is almost cer-
tainly incorrect. The Muskhogean tril>es
were confined chiefly to the Gulf states e.
of the Mississippi, occupying almost all
of Mississippi and Alabama, and parts
of Tennessee, Geoi^a, Florida, and South
Carolina. According to a tradition held
in common by most of their tribes, they
had reached their historic seats from some
starting point w. of the Mississippi, usually
placed, when localized at all, somewhere
on the upper Red r. The greater part of
the tribes of the stock are now on reserva-
tions in Oklahoma.
Through one or another of its tribes
the stock early came into notice. Panfilo
de Narvaez met the Apalachee of w. Flor-
ida in 1528, and in 1540-41 De Soto
passed e. and w. through the whole ex-
tent of the Muskhogean territory. Mis-
sion effort was begun among them by the
Spanish Franciscans at a very early
period, with such success that before the
year 1700, brides several missions in
lower Georgia, the whole Apalachee tribe,
an important single body, was civilized
and Christianized, and settled in 7 large
and well-built towns (see Missions. ) The
establishment of the French at Mobile,
Biloxi, and other points about 1699-1705
brought them into contact with the Choc-
taw and other western branches of the
stock. The powerful Creek confederacy
had its most intimate contact with the
English of Carolina and Georgia, although
a French fort was long established in the
territory of the Alibamu. The Chickasaw
also were allies of the English, while the
Choctaw were uncertain friends of the
French. The devotion of the Apalachee
to the Spaniards resulted in the destruc-
tion of the former as a people at the
hands of the English and their Indian
allies in the first years of the 18th cen-
tury. The tide of white settlement, both
English and French, gradually pressed
the Muskhogean tril^es back from the
shores of the Atlantic and the Gulf, some
bands recrossing to the w. of the Missis-
sippi as early as 17t>5. The terrible Creek
war in 1813-14 and the long drawn-out
Seminole war 20 years later closed the
struggle to maintain themselves in their
old territories, and before the year 1840
the last of the Muskhogean tribes had
been removed to their present location in
Oklahoma, with the exception of a few
hundred Seminole in Florida, a larger
number of Choctaw in Mississippi, Ala-
bama, and Ix)uisiana, and a small forgot-
ten Creek remnant in e. Texas. (See the
several tribal articles.)
Thereexistedbetweenthetribes marked
dissimilarities as to both physical and
cultural characteristics. For instance,
the Choctaw were rather thickset and
heavy, while those farther e., as the
Creeks, were taller but well-knit. All
the tril)e8 were agricultural and sed-
entary, occupying villages of substan-
tially built houses. The towns near the
tribal frontiers were usually palisaded,
while those more remote from invasion
were left unprotected. All were brave,
but the Choctaw claimed to fight only in
self-defense, while the Creeks, and more
particularly the Chickasaw, were ag-
gressive. The Creeks were properly a
confederacy, with the Muskogee as the
dominant partner, and includmg also in
later years the alien Yuchi, the Natehez,
and a part of the Shawnee. The Choctaw
also formed a loose confederacy, including
among others several broken tribes of
alien stock.
In their government the Muskhogean
tribes appear to have made progress cor-
responding to their somewhat advanced
culture in other respects. In the Creek
government, which is l)etter known than
that of the other tribes of the family, the
Bull. 30— 05-
-61
962
MU8KH0GEATT FAMILY
[B.A.B.
unit of the political as well as of the
social structure was the clan, as in many
Indian tribes, marriage t)eing forbidden
within the clan, and the children be-
longed to the clan of the mother. Each
town had its independent government,
its council l)eing a miniature of that of
the confederacy; the town and its out-
lying settlements, if it had any, thus rep-
re8i»nte<l an autonomy such as is usually
implied by the term *' tribe.*' Every
considerable town was provided with a
** public square," forme(l of 4 buildings of
equal size facing the cardinal points, and
each divide<l into 3 apartments. The
structure on the e. side was allotted to
the chief councilors, probably of the
administrative side of the government;
that on the s. side belonged to the war-
rior chiefs; that on the n. to the inferior
chiefs, while that on the w. was used for
the paraphernalia l)elonging to the cere-
mony of the black drink, war i)hysic, etc.
The general i>olicy of the confederacy
was guided by a council, comi)Osed of
repres^^ntatives' from each town, who met
annually, or as occasion required, at a
time and place fixed by the chief, or head
miro. The confederacy itst4f was a iK)lit-
ical organization founded on blood rela-
tionship, real or fictitious ; its chief object
was nmtual defense, and the power wield-
ed by its council was purely advisory.
The liberty within the bond that held the
organization together was shown by the
fact that i)artsof the confederacy, and even
separate towns, might and at^tually did
engage in war without rt»ference to the
wishes of the confcnleracy. The towns,
e8i)ecially those of the Creeks, were di-
vided into two classes, the White or Peace
towns, whose function pertained to the
civil government, and the Red or War
towns, whose oflScers assume<l manage-
ment of military affairs.
The s<|uare in the center of the town
was devoted to the transaction of all pul)-
lic business and to public ceremonies.
In it was situattnl the sweat house, the
uses of which were more religious than
medicinal in character; and here was the
chunkey yard, devoted to the game from
which it takes its i)opular name, and to the
hu8k(q. V. ), or so-called ( Jreen-corn dance.
Such games, though not strictly of reli-
^ous significance, were affairs of public
interest, and were atten<led by rites and
ceremonies of a religious nature. In
these s<|uares strangers who had no rela-
tives in the town— i. e., who possessed no
clan rights — were permitted to encamp
as the guests of the town.
The settlement of disputes and the
punishment of crimes were left pri-
marily to the members of the clans con-
cerned; secondly, to the council of the
town or tribe involved. The busk was
an important institution among the
Muskhogean people, and had its analogue
among most, if not all, other American
tribes; it was chiefly in the nature of an
offering of first fruits, and its celebration,
which occupied several days, was an oc-
casion for (lancing and ceremony; new
fire was kindled by a priest, and from
it were made all the lires in the town;
all offenses, save that of munier, were
forgiven at this festival, and a new year
began. Artificial deformation of the h^l
seems to have been practised to some ex-
tent by all the tribes, but prevailed as a
general custom among the Choctaw,
who for this reason were sometimes
calle<l **Flatheads.»*
The Muskhogean population at the
time of first (*ontact with Europeans has
l)een estimate<l at 50,000. By the census
of 1890 the number of pure-bloods be-
longing to the family in Indian Ter. was
as follows: Choctaw, 9,996; Chickasaw,
8^464; Creek, 9,291; Seminole, 2,539; be-
sides i)erhaps 1,000 more in Florida, Mis-
sissippi, Ix)uisiana, and Texas. In 1905
their numl)ers were: Choctaw by blood,
17,160; by intermarriage, 1,467; freedmen,
5,254 ; in Mississippi, 1 ,235. Chickasaw by
blood, 5,474; by intermarriage, 598; freed-
men, 4,695. Creeks by blood, 10,185;
freedmen, 5,738. Seminole by blood,
2,099; freedmen, 950; in Florida (1900),
358.
The recognized languages of the stock,
so far as known, each with dialectic vari-
ants, are as follows:
1. Muskogee (including almost half of
the Creek confederacy, and its offshoot,
the Seminole).
2. Hitchiti (including a large part of.
the Lower Creeks, the Mikasuki band of'
the St^minole, and perhajw the ancient
Apalachee tribe).
3. Koasati (including the Alibamu,
Wetumpka, and Koasati towns of the
Creek confederacy).
4. Choctaw (inclu<ling the Choctaw,
Chickasaw, and the following small
tril)e8: Acolapissa, Bayogoula, Chakchi-
uma, Chatot, Chula, ' Huina, Ibitoupa,
Mobile, Mugalasha, Naniba, Ofogoula,
Tangipahoa, Taiwsa, and Tohome).
To tlie above the Natchez (q. v. ) should
probably be added as a fifth division,
though it differs more from the other dia-
lects than any of these differ from one
another. The ancient Yamasi of the
Georgia-South Carolina coast may have
constituted a separate jjrouj), or may have
been a dialect of the Hitchiti. The Yama-
craw were renegades from the Lower Creek
towns and in the main were probably
Hitchiti. ( H. w. h. j. m. )
>OhahUhf.— Prichard. Phys. Hist. Mankind, v,
403, 1847 (or, Choktahs or Flatheads). «Ghahtar
Miukoki.— Trumbull in Johnson's Cyclopsedia,
II, 1166, 1877. >Chahtu. —Gallatin in Trans. Am.
BULL. 30]
MUSKINGUM MUSWASIPI
963
Antiq. Soc., li, 100, 306, 1836. =Chata-Muikoki.—
Hale in Am. Antiq., 108, Apr. 1883. >Chootah.—
Latham. Nat. Hist. Man. 337, 1850 (includes
Choctahs, Muscogulges, Muskohges); Latham in
Trans. Philol. Soc. Lond., 103, 1856; Latham,
Opuflcula, 366, 1860. >0hoota-][a8khog.— Gallatin
in Trans. Am. Ethnol. Soc., ii, pt. 1, xcix, 77,
1848. >Ohootaw Kaskhogee.— Gallatin in Trans.
Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 119, 1836. >CoshatUs.—
Latham, Nat. Hist. Man, 349, 1850 (not classi-
fied). >nat-he»d«.— Prichard, Phys. Hist. Man-
kind, V, 403, 1847. >Eumas.— Latham, Nat.
Hist. Man, 341, 1850 (E. of Mississippi above New
Orleans). aMaskold.— Gatschet, Creek Migr. Leg.,
I, 50, 1884. >Mobiliaii.-Bancroft. Hist. U. S., 249,
1840. >Mu»oogee.—Keane in Stanford, Compend.,
app., 460, 1878. >][uakhogee.— Gallatin in Trans.
Am. Antiq. Soc., ii, 94, 1836. Moskhogiet.— Berg-
haus (1846), Physik. Atlas, map 17, 1848. >Tschah-
tai.— Ibid.; ibid., 1852.
MuBkingum (* moose eye or face.* —
Hewitt). A Delaware (?) village marked
on old maps as on the w. bank of Mus-
kineum r. , Ohio.
Moskincom.— La Tour, map, 1779. Koskingum.—
Gflssefeld, map, 1784. Muskingun.— Aleedo, Die.
Geog., Ill, 274, 1788. Miukinkum.— Esnauts and
Rapilly, map, 1777.
MuBkwawaBepeotan (*the town of the
old redwood creek*). A Potawatomi
village formerly nearCedarville, Allen co. ,
N. E. ind., on land sold in 1828, and com-
monly known as Metea's Village from
the name of its chief. (j. m.)
Metea't Yillage.— Mississinewa treaty (1826) in
U. S. Ind. Treat. , 670. 1873. MuakwawaMpeotan.—
Long cited by McKenney and Hall, Ind. Tribes,
II, 61, 1849.
Mnskwoikakeniit ( Mus-kwoi-kd-ke-nnt^
* He shoots bears with arrows'). A Cree
band, so called after its chief, livinj? in
1866 in the vicinity of Ft de Prairie,
Northwest Ter., Canada. — Hayden, p]th-
nog. and Philol. Mo. Vai., 237, 1862.
MuBkwoikauepawit ( Mus-hvoi-kdu-e-pd-
wity 'Standing bear*). A Cree band, so
called after its chief, living in 1856 alx)ut
Ft de Prairie, Northwest Ter., Canada.—
Hayden, Ethnog. and Philol. Mo. Val.,
237, 1862.
MuBme {ARis-me^). A former village of
the Chastacosta on Rogue r., Oreg. —
Dorsey in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, in, 234,
1890.
MuBpa. A Calusa village on the s. w.
coast of Florida alK)ut 1570 (Fontaneda),
probably about the mouth of Caloosa-
hatchee r. The people of Muspa were
among the last of the Calue^a to retain
their name and territory. C. Romano is
marked on old English maps as Punta de
Muspaandthecoaststripextendingthence
northward to the entrance of Caloosaha-
tchee r. is marked on some Spanish maps
as La Muspa (B. Smith). The Muspa
Indians, according to Brinton (Flor.
Penin., 114, 1859), occupied the shore
and islands of Boca Grande, the main
entrance of Charlotte harbor, until
toward the close of the 18th century,
when they were driven to the keys by
the Seminole; but according to Douglas
(Am. Antiq., vii, 281, 1885) they were
still in the vicinity of Pine id., in Char-
lotte harbor, as late as 1835. There is
even reason to believe that they took
part in some of the raiding in the Semi-
nole war as late as 1840. ( J. m. )
Muspa.— Fontaneda {ca. 1576), Memoir, Smith
trans., 19, 1854.
Mnsquarro. A former Montagnais ren-
dezvous and mission station on the n.
shore of the Gulf of St Lawrence, opposite
Anticosti id. The Indians desertea it in
recent years for Romaine.
Maihquaro.— McLean, Hudson Bay, ii, 63, 1849.
Maskouaro.— Hind, I^b. Penin., ii. 180, 1863. Ma«-
Quarro.— Ibid., 26. Kusquahanos.— Can. Ind. Aff.
1880, 313, 1881 (applied U^ the band there; mis-
print?). Muiquarro.— Hind, Lab. Penin., ii, 133,
1863.
Musquash. A name for the musk rat
{Filter zibethicus) y used in Canada and n.
and w. parts of the United States. In
early writings on Virginia the forms
mttssascus and mnsquassus (Capt. John
Smith, 1616), muscamis (Hskluyt, 1609),
and others, occur. Cognate words in
other Algonquiaii dialects are the Abnaki
muskwesfniy and the Chippewa mishoasiy
signifying *it is red,* which was therefore
the original signification of the Virginian
name whereof Smith's word is a corrup-
tion, and referred to the reddish color of
the animal. See Afooskivamh. ( a. f. c. )
Musqueam. A Cowichan tribe occup^*-
ing the n. part of the Fraser delta, Brit.
Col.; pop. 98 in 1906. Male is their vil-
lage.
Miskwiam.— Tolmie and Dawson, Vocabs., Brit.
Col.. 119b, 1884. Mitqueam.— Can. Ind. Aff. for
1880, 316, 1881. Mu»queam.— Ibid., 1901. pt. II, 158.
Musqueeam.— Ibid., 1877, LI. Musqueom.— Ibid.,
1902. 72. QmE' ^oyixn.— Boa.s in 64th Rep. Brit.
A. A. 8., 454, 1894. Omuski'Ein.— Hill-Tout in
p:thnol. Surv. Can., 54. 1902.
Mussauco. A fonner village, probably
near Hartford, Conn. Its chief, Arrha-
mamet, was conquered by Uncas, the
Mohegan chief, al)out 1654. — Trumbull,
Conn., I, 129, 1818.
Mussundummo ('water snake.* — Tan-
ner, Narr., 314, 1880). Given as one
of the totems among the Ottawa and
Chippewa. It may be an Ottawa totem,
as it is not mentioned by Morgan or
Warren.
Mustak. A former village of the Kalin-
daruk division of the Costanoan family,
connected with San Carlos mission, Cal.
MusUc— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20, 1860.
Hustoo. A name given by Dawsoil to a
supposed town on Hippa id., Queen Char-
lotte ids., Brit. Col., but in reality the
word is a corruption of Nasto, the Haida
name for Hippa id., on which there were
several towns. See AtanuSy Gafga-inatiSy
Suln-stins. (j. r. s. )
Huswasipi (cognate with Chippewa
Moswa-sibly 'moose river.' — W. J.). The
name of one of the divisions of the
Upeshipow, an Algonquian tribe of I^b-
rador, living in 1770 on Moose r., Ruperts
Land, Brit. Am. — Richardson, Arctic
Exped., II, 38, 1851.
964
MUTCHUT — MYTHOLOGY
[B. A. E.
Hntchut. A village of the Powhatan
confederacy, situated in 1608 on the n.
bank of Mattapony r., in King and Queen
CO., Va.— Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr.
1819.
Mutistul. An important Yukian Wappo
village in Knight's valley, Sonoma co.,
Cal. (s. A. B.)
Mutistals.— Stearns in Am. Naturalist, xvi. 208,
1882. Mu-tisttU. - Gibbs in Schoolcraft. Ind.
Tribes, in. 110, 1853.
Mutsiks ( Mid^-stks^ * braves ' ) • A society
of the Ikunuhkahtsi, or All Comrades, in
the Piegan tribe; it consists of tried war-
riors.—Grinnell, Blackfoot Lodge Tales,
221, 1892.
Matsun. A Costanoan village near San
Juan Bautista mission, San Benito co.,
Cal. The name was used for a ^oup and
dialect of the Costanoan family. The
Mutsun dialect being better known than
others allied to it, owing to a grammar
and a phrasebook written by Arroyo de la
Cuesta in 1815 (Shea, Lib. Am. Ling., i, ii,
1861 ), the name came to be used for the
linguistic family of which it formed part
and which was held to extend northward
beyond the Golden Gate and southward
beyond Monterey, and from the sea to
the crest of the sierras. Gatschet and
Powell used it in this sense in 1877. Sub-
sequently Powell divided the Mutsun
family, establishing the Moquelumnan
family (q. v. ) e. of San Joaquin r. and the
Costanoan family (q. v.) w. thereof.
Hotssum.— Engelhardt, Franciscans In Cal., 398,
1897. Mutseen.— Taylor in Cal. Farmer, Nov 23,
1860. Hutsunes.— Ibid., Feb. 22. Kutzun.— Simeon,
Diet. Nahuatl, xviii, 1885. Mutzunes.— Taylor in
Cal. Farmer, Apr. 20. I860. Nuthesum.— Ibid.
Mnttamnssinsack. A village of the Pow-
hatan confederacy in 1608, on the n. bank
of the Rappahannock, in Caroline co.,
Va.— Smith ( 1629), Va., i, map, repr. 1819.
Hutnticachi. A former pueblo, appar-
ently of the Teguima division of the
Opata, on the upper Rio Sonora, Sonora,
Mexico. It is said to have been aban-
doned on the establishment of the mission
of Suamca in 1730. According to the
RudoEnsayo (ca. 1762) it was a Pima set-
tlement, but this is doubtless an error.
The present hamlet of Mututicachi con-
tained 27 persons in 1900.
Motuticatzi.— Rudo Ensayo (ca. 1762), 160, 1863.
Mututicachi.— Bandelier in Arch. Inst. Papers, iv,
483, 1892.
Muutzizti (from Cora muutiy *head').
A subdivision of the Cora proper, inhab-
iting the central part of the Nayarit mts.,
Jalisco, Mexico.
Kuutzicat.— Ortega, Vocab.en Lengua Castellana
y Cora, 1732, 7, 1888 (sing. form). Muutzizti.—
Orozco y Berra, Geog., 59, 1864.
Mnvinabore. Mentioned by Pimentel
(Lenguas, ii, 347, 1865) as a division of
the Comanche, but no such division is
recognized in the tribe.
Muyi (Mu^i/i). The Mole clan of the
Hopi of Arizona. — Voth, Traditions of
the Hopi, 37, 40, 1906.
Mwawa (Ma^hwdwa, 'wolf^). A gens
of the Shawnee, q. v.
Ma'*hwaw».— Wm. Jones, inf n, 1906. M'-wa-wa.—
Morgan, Anc Soc, 168, 1877.
Myeengun ( Afa'i ngiin, * wolf * ) . A gens
of the Chippewa, q. v.
Mah-een-gun.— Warren (1852) in Minn. Hist. Soc.
Coll.. v. 44, 1885. Ma'-ingan— Gatschet, Ojibwa
MS., B. A. E., 1882. Ma rngan.— Wm. Jones, inf'n,
1906. My-een'-gun.— Morgan, Anc. Soc.. 166, 1877.
Myghtuckpassn. A village of the Pow-
hatan confederacy in 1608, on the s. bank
of Mattapony r., king William co., Va. —
Smith (1629), Va., i, map, repr. 1819.
Myhangah. See Mohongo.
Mystic (from missi-tuk^ * great tidal
river.' — Trumbull). The name of at
least two former villages in New Eng-
land, one on the river of the same name
at Medford, Middlesex co., Mass., which
was occupied in 1649 and was in the Mas-
sachuset country. The other was a Pe-
quot village on the w. side of Mystic r.,
not far from the present Mystic, New
Ix>ndon co.. Conn. It was burned by the
English in 1637. (j. m.)
Mestecke.— Brewster (1657) in Mass. Hist. Soc.
Coll., 4th 8., VII, 82, 1865. Mestick.— Eliot (1649),
ibid., 3d s., iv. 88, 1834. Mistick.— Dudley (ca.
1630), ibid., 1st s.. viii, 39, 1802. Mystick.— Pike
(1698) in N. H. Hist. Soc. Coll.. in 49. 1870.
Mythology. The mythology of the
North American Indians embraces the
vast and complex body of their opinions
regarding the genesis, the functions, the
history, and the destiny not only of
themselves but also of every subjective
and of every objective phenomenon,
principle, or thing of their past or present
environment which in any marked man-
ner had affected their welfare.
Among savage tribal men a myth is
primarily and essentially an account of the
genesis, the functions, the history, and
the destiny of a humanized fictitious male
or female personage or being who is a
personification of some body, principle,
or phenomenon of nature, or of a faculty
or function of the mind, and who per-
forms his or her functions by imputed
inherent arenda (g. v. ), or magic power,
and by whose being and activities the
inchoate reasoning of such men sought to
explain the existence and the operations
of the bodies and the principles of nature.
Such a being or personage might and did
personify a rock, a tree, a river, a plant,
the earth, the night, the storm, the sum-
mer, the winter, a star, a dream, a
thought, an action or a series of actions,
or the ancient or prototype of an animal
or a bird. Later, such a being, always
humanized in form and mind, may, by
his assumed absolute and mysterious con-
trol of the thing or phenomenon person-
ified, become a hero or a god to men,
through his relations with them — rela-
tions which are in fact the action and
interaction of men with the things of
their environments. A mythology is
BULL. 30]
MYTHOLOGY
965
composed of a body of such myths and
fragments thereof. But of course no
myth that has come down to the present
time is simple. Myths and parts of
myths have necessarily been employed to
define and explain other myths or other
and new phenomena, and the way from
the first to the last is long and often
broken. Vestigial myths, myths whose
meaning or symbolism has from any
cause whatsoever become obscured or
entirely lost, constitute a great part of
folklore, and such myths are alHO called
folktales.
A study of the lexic derivation of the
terms "myth" and *' mythology** will not
lead to a satisfactory definition and inter-
pretation of what IS denoted by either
term, for the genesis of the things so
named was not understood when they re-
ceived these appellations. In its broadest
sense, mythos m Greek denoted whatever
was uttered by the mouth of man — a say-
ing, a legend, a story of something as un-
derstood by the narrator, a word. But in
Attic Greek it denoted also any prehis-
toric story of the Greeks, and these were
chiefly stories of gods and heroes, which
were, though this fact was unknown to the
Greeks themselves, phenomena of nature.
And when the term received this specific
meaning it fell into discredit, because the
origin and true character of myths not be-
ing understoo<i, these prehistoric stories
by the advance in knowledge came into
disrepute among the Greeks themselves,
and after thoriseof Christianity they were
condemned as the wicked fables of a false
religion. Hence, in popular usage, and
quite apart from the study of mythology,
tne term ** myth ** denotes what is in fact
nonexistent — a nothing with a name, a
story without a basis of £ct— ** a nonentity
of which an entity is affirmed, a nothing
which is said to be something. ' * Besides
mythos in Greek, logoSy signifying * word,*
was employed originally with approxi-
mately the same meaning in ordinary
speech at the time of Homer, who some-
times used them interchangeably. But,
strictly speaking, there was a difference
from the beginning which, by the need for
Srecision in diction, finally led to a wide
ivergence in the signification of the two
terms. LogoSy derived from legeiUf *to
gather,* was seldom used by Homer to de-
note 'a saying, a speaking, or a significa-
tion,* but to denote usually *a gathering,*
or, strictly, * a telling, casting up or count-
ing.* In time this term came to mean
not only the inward constitution but the
outward form of thought, and finally to
denote exact thinking or reason — not only
the reason in man, but the reason in the
universe — the Divine Logos, the Volition
of God, the Son of God, God Himself. It
is so employed in the opening lines of the
first chapter of the (Tospel of St John.
Such is a brief outline of the uses of the
two terms which in their primal signiticA-
tion formetl the term "njythology," from
which but little can be gathennl as to
what constitutes a myth.
Up to a certain point there is substan-
tial agreement among students in the use
of the term myth. But this means but
little. To the question. What is tlie
nature and origin of a myth? wholly dif-
ferent replies, perplexing in numl)er, are
given, and for this reason the study of
mythology, of a definite body of myths,
has not yet l)ecome a science. By careful
study of adequate materials a clue to the
meaning and significance of myths may
be found in the apprehension — vague in
the beginning, increasingly definite as the
study progresses — that all these things,
these tales, these gods, although so di-
verse, arise from one simple though com-
mon basis or motive.
Every body, element, or phenomenon
of nature, whether subjective or objective,
has its myth or story to account for its
origin, history, and manner of action.
Portions of these myths, especially those
concerning the most striking objects of
an environment, are woven together by
some master mind into a cycle of myths,
and a myth of the beginnings, a genesis,
or creation, story is thus developed. The
horns and the cloven feet of the deer, the
stripes of the chipmunk*s back, the tail
of the beaver, the flat nose of the otter,
the rattles of the snake, the tides of rivers,
the earthquake, the meteor, the aurora
borealis; m short, every phenomenon
that fixed the attention required and re-
ceived an explanation which, l)eing con-
ventional, satisfied the commonsense of
the community, and which later,owingto
its imputation of ai)parently impossible
attributes to fictitious personages to ac-
count for the operations of nature, l)e-
came, by the growing knowledge of man,
a myth.
A myth is of interest from three view-
points, namely, ( 1 ) as a literary product
embodying a wondrous story of things
and personages; (2) for the character of
the matter it contains as exi)ressive of
human thought and the interpretation of
human experience, and (3) for the jmr-
pose of comparison with the myths of
alien or of cognate peoples and for the
data it contains relating to the customs,
arts, and archeology of the people among
whom it exists.
With the available data, it is as yet
impossible to define with satisfactory
clearness all the objective realities of the
personal agencies or men-beings of the
American Indian myths. In Indian
thought these personages are constantly
associated in function, and sometimes
966
MYTHOLOGY
[b. A.a.
they exercise derivative powers or are
joined in mysterious kinship groups, al-
ways combining the symbolism of per-
sonified objective phenomena with im-
puted life, mind, and volition, and with
the exercise of attributed orenda^ or magic
power, of diverse function and potency.
Moreover, the size and the muscular power
of the objective reality personified have
little, if any, relation to the strength of
the orenda exercised by the man-being.
To explain in part the multiform
phenomena of different and successive
environments, the philosophic ancestors
of the Indians of to-day subconsciously
imputed mind and immortal life to every
object and phenomenon in nature, and
to nearly every faculty and affection of
the human mmd and body. Concomi-
tantly with this endowment of lifeless
things with life and mind was the addi-
tional endowment with orenda^ which
differed in strength and function with
the individual. These dogmas underlie
the mythology and religion of all the
Indians, as they supplied to the latter's
inchoate reasoning satisfactory explana-
tions of the phenomena of nature — life
and death, dreams and disease, floral and
faunal growth and reproduction, light
and darkness, cold and heat, winter and
summer, rain and snow, frost and ice,
wind and storm. The term **animism''
has been applied by some to this doctrine
of the possession of immortal life and mind
by lifeless and mindless things, but with
an insufficient definition of the objective
for which it stands. The uses and defini-
tions of this term are now so numerous
and contradictory that the critical student
can not afford to employ it without an
exact objective definition. Primarily,
animism, or the imputation of life to life-
less things, was sele(!ted to express what
was considered the sole essential charac-
teristic basis of the complex institutions
called mythology and religion. But if
the ascription of life to lifeless things is
animism, then it becomes of fundamental
importance to know exactly what kind
of life is thus ascribed. If there is one
difference between things which should
be carefully distinguish^, it is that be-
tween the alleged ghosts of dead human
beings and those other alleged spiritual
beings which never have been real hu-
man beings — the animal and the primal
spirits. Does animism denote the ascrip-
tion of only one or of all these three classes
of spirits? Definite explanation is here
lacking. So, as a key to the satisfactory
interpretation of what constitutes mythol-
ogy and religion, animism as heretofore
defined has failed to meet the criticism of
such scholars as Spencer, Max Miiller,
and Brinton, and so has fallen into that
long category of equivocal words of which
fetishism, shamanism, solarism, ancestor-
worship, personification, and totemism
are other members. Every one of these
terms, as commonly employed, denotes
some important phase or element in re-
ligion or mythology which, variously de-
fined by different students, does not, now-
ever, form the characteristic basis of
mythology and religion.
The great apostle of ancestor-worship,
Lippert, makes animism a mere sub-
division of the worship of ancestral spirits,
or ghosts. But Gruppe, adding to the
confusion of ideas, makes animism synony-
mous with fetishism, and describes a fetish
as the tenement of a diseml)odied human
spirit or ghost, and erroneously holds
that fetishism is the result of a widely
prevalent belief in the power of the human
ghost to take possession of any object
whatsoever, to leave its ordinary dwell-
ing, the remains of the human body, to
enter some other object, such as the sky,
the sun, the moon, the earth, a star, or
what not. Even the chief gods of Greece,
Rome, and India are by some regarded
as fetishes developed through the exalta-
tion of ancestral ghosts to this state.
Their cult is regarded as a development
of fetishism, which is an outgrowth of
animism, which is, in turn, a development
of ancestor- worship. To add to this array
of conflicting definitions. Max Miiller de-
clares that fetishism is really the ** very last
stage in the downward course of religion."
Gruppe further holds that when a sky
fetish or a star fetish becomes a totem,
then the idea of ''sons of heaven," or
** children of the sun," is developed in
the human mind, and so, accordmg to
this doctrine, every religion, ancient and
modern, may be explained by animism,
fetishism, and totemism. Moved by this
arrav of conflicting definitions, Max Miil-
ler declares that, to secure clear thinking
and sober reasoning, these three terms
should be entirely discarded, or, if used,
then let animism be defined as a belief in
and worship of ancestral spirits, whence
arises in the mind the simplest and most
primitive ideas of immortality; let fetish-
ism be defined as a worship of chance
objects having miraculous powers; and,
finally, let totemism be defined as the
custom of choosing some emblem as the
family or tribal mark to which worship
is paid and which is regarded as the
human or superhuman ancestor. Miiller
has failed to grasp the facts clearly, for
no one of these excludes the others.
Stahl (1737), adopting and developing
into modern scientific form the classiciu
theory of the identity of life and soul,
employed the term ** animism" to desig-
nate this doctine.
Tylor (1871), adopting the term
"animism" from Stahl, defines it as **the
BULL. 30]
MYTHOLOGY
967
belief in spiritual beings," and as 'Hhe
deep-lying doctrine of spiritual beings,
which embodies the very essence of
spiritualistic as opposed to materialistic
pnilosophy**; and, finally, he says,
''animism is, in fact, the groundwork of
the philosophy of religion, from that of
savages up to that of civilized men.*'
He further makes the belief in spiritual
bein^ "the minimum definition of
religion." Hence, with Tylor, animism
is broadly synonymous with religion.
But, strict definition shows that a belief
in spiritual beings, as such, did not, does
not, and can not form the sole material
out of which primitive thought has
developed its gods and deities. To this
extent, therefore, animism does not fur-
nish the key to an accurate and valid
explanation of mythology and religion.
Brinton (1896) denies that there is any
special religious activity taking the form
of what Tylor calls ** animism," and
declares that the belief that inanimate
objects possess souls or spirits is common
to all religions and many philosophies,
and that it is not a trait cnaracteristic of
primitive faiths, but merely a secondary
phenomenon of the religious sentiment.
Further, he insists that ' ' the acceptance
of the doctrine of * animism ' as a sufficient
explanation of early cults has led to the
neglect, in English-speaking lands, of
their profounder analysis."
So far as is definitely known, no sup-
port is found in the mythologies of North
America for the doctrine of ancestor-
worship. This doctrine seeks to show
that savage men had evolved real gods
from the shades of their own dead chiefs
and great men. It is more than doubt-
ful that such a thin^ has ever been done
by man. Competent data and trained
experience with the Indians of North
America show that the dominant ideas
of early savage thought precluded such a
thing. One of the most fundamental and
characteristic beliefs of savage thought is
the utter helplessness of man unaided by
the magic power of some favoring being
against the bodies and elements of his
environment. The deities, the masters
and controllers— the gods of later times-
differed greatly in strength of body and
in the potency of the magic power exer-
cised by them, in knowledge and in
astuteness of mind; but each in his own
sphere and jurisdiction was generally
supreme and incomprehensible. H uman
shades, or ghosts, did not or could not
attain to these godlike gifts. To change,
transform, create by metamorphosis, or
to govern, some body or element in
nature, is at once the prerogative and
the function of a master — a controller —
humanly speaking, a god.
The attribution of power to do things
magically, that is, to perform a func-
tion in a mysterious and incomprehen-
sible manner, was the fundamental pos-
tulate of savage mind to account for the
ability of the gods, the fictitious person-
ages of its mythology, to perform the
acts which are in fact the operations of
the forces of nature. To define one such
man-being or personage, the explanation,
to be satisfactory, must be more than the
mere statement of the imputation of life,
mind, and the human form and attri-
butes to an objective thing. There must
also be stated the fact of the concomitant
possession along with these of orenda^
or magic power, differing from individual
to individual in efficacy, function, and
scope of action.
While linguistics may greatly aid in
comprehending myths, it is nevertheless
not always safe for determining the sub-
stance or the thought, the concept; and
the student must eschew the habit of giv-
ing only an etymology rather than a defi-
nition of the*things having the names of
the mythic persons, which may l>e
the sutiject of investigation. Etymology
may aid, but without corroborative testi-
mony it may mislead.
Many are the causes which bring about
the decline and disintegration of a myth
or a cycle of myths of a definite people.
The migration or violent disruption of the
people, the attrition or the superposition
of diverse alien cultures, or the change or
reformation of the religion of the people
based on a recasting of opinions and like
causes, all tend to the decline and dis-
memberment and the final loss of a myth
or a mythology.
All tribes of common blood and speech
are bound together by a common my-
thology and by a religion founded on
the teachings of that mythology. These
doctrines deal with a vast body of all
kinds of knowledge, arts, institutions,
and customs. It is the creed of such a
people that all their knowledge and wis-
dom, all their rites and ceremonies, and
all that they possess and all that they
are socially ana politically, have come to
them through direct revelation from their
gods, through the beneficence of the rul-
ers of the bodies and elements of their
environment.
The social and political bonds of every
known tribe are founded essentially on
real or fictitious blood kinship, and the
religious bonds that hold a people to its
gods are founded on faith in the truth of
the teachings of their myths. No stronger
bonds than these are known to savage
men. The disruption of these, by what-
ever cause, results in the destruction of
the people.
968
MYTHOLOGY
[B. A. B.
The constant struggle of man with his
physical environment to secure welfare
was a warfare against elements ever defi-
nitely and vividly personified and hu-
manized by him, thus unconsciouslv
making his surroundings quite unreal,
though felt to be real ; and his struggle
with his environment was a ceaseless
strife with animals and plants and trees
in like manner ever mythically personi-
fied and humanized by him ; and, finally,
his tireless struggle with other men for
supremacy and welfare was therefore
typical, not only fundamentally and prac-
tically, but also mythically and ideally ;
and so this never-ceasing struggle was an
abiding, all-pervading, all-transforming
theme of his thoughts, and an ever-im-
pending, ever-absorbing business of his
life, suffered and impelled by his cease-
less yearning for welfare.
An environment would have been re-
garded by savage men very differently
from what it would be by the cultured
mind of to-day. To the former the
bodies and elements composing it were
regarded as beings, indeed as man-beings,
and the operations of nature were ascril^
to the action of the diverse magic powers,
or orendasy exercised by these beings
rather than to the forces of nature; so
that the action and interaction of the
bodies and elemental principles of nature
were regarded as the result of the working
of numberless beings through their oren-
das. Among most known tribes in North
America the earth is regarded as a
humanized being in person and form,
every particle of whose body is living
substance and potent with the quick-
ening power of life, which is bestowed
on all who feed upon her. They that
feed upon her are the plants and the
trees, who are indeed beings living and
having a being because they receive life
substance from the earth, hence they are
like the primal beings endowed with mind
and volition, to whom prayer (q. v.) may
be offered, since they rule and dispose in
their several jurisdictions unless they are
overcome by some more powerful orenda.
Now, a prayer is psychologically the ex-
pression of the fact that the petitioner in
need is unable to secure what is required
for the welfare, or in distress to prevent
what will result in the ill-fare, of nimself
or his kind. The substance of the prayer
merely tells in what direction or in what
respect this inability exists. In turn, the
animals and men live on the products of
the trees and plants, by which means they
renew life and gain the Quickening power
of life, indirectly from the earth-mother,
and thus by a metaphor they are said to
have come up out of the earth. As the
g[iver of life, the earth is regarded affec-
tionately and is called Mother, but as the
taker of life and thedevourer of their dead
bodies, she is regarded as wicked and a
cannibal.
In the science of opinions mythology
is found to be a fruitful field in which to
gather data regarding the origin and
growth of human concepts relating to
man and the world around him. A study
of the birth and evolution of the concepts
of the human mind indicates clearly that
the beginnings of conventional forms and
ideas and their variations along the lines
of their development are almost never
quite so simple, or rather quite so direct,
as they may seem — are seldom, even in
the b^inning, the direct product of the
environmental resource and exigency act-
ing together so immediately and so ex-
clusively of mental agency as students are
apt to assume. As a rule they are rather
the product of these things — these factors
and conditions of environment acting
very indirectly and sometimes very
subtly and complexly — through the con-
dition of mind wrought by long-continued
life and experience therein, or, again, act-
ing through the state of mind borne
over from one environment to another.
- It is the part of wisdom to be more cau-
tious in deriving ideas and concepts, arts,
or even technic forms of a people too in-
stantly, too directly, from the environ-
ing natural objects or elements they may
simulate or resemble. The motive, if
not for the choice, at least for the persist-
ency, of a given mode of a concept in re-
lation to any objective factor is always a
psychic reason, not a mere first-hand in-
fluence of environment or of accident in
the popular sense of this term. This dis-
position of the '*mere accident" or
"chance" hypothesis of origins dispels
many perplexities in the formation of ex-
act judgment concerning comparative
data, in the identifications of cognate
forms and concepts among widely sepa-
rated peoples; for instance, m the drawing
of sound inferences particularly regard-
ing their common or generic, specific or
exceptional, origin and growth, as shown
by the data in question.
As it is evident that independent proc-
esses and diverse factors combined can
not be alike in every particular in widely
separated parts of the world,' there is
found a means for determining, through
minute differences in similarity, rather
than through general similarities alone,
howsoever striking they may appear,
whether such forms are related, whether
or not they have a common genesis whence
they have inherited aught in common.
Hence caution makes it incumbent on
students to beware of the alluring fallacy
lurking in the frequently repeated epigram
that "human nature is evervwhere the
same. ' * The nature of men diners widely
BULL. 30]
MYTHOLOGY
969
from differences of ori^n, from differ-
ences of history, from differences of edu-
cation, and from differences of environ-
ment. Hence, to produce the same human
nature everywhere, these factors must
everywhere be the same. The environ-
ments of no two peoples are ever p^recisely
the same, and so the two differ in their
character, in their activities, and in their
beliefs.
To the primitive inchoate thought of
the North American Indian all the bodies
and elements of his subjective and object-
ive environment were humanized be-
ings— man-beings, or beings that were
persons, that were man in form and at-
tributes and endowed with immortal life
(not souls in the modern acceptation of
this term), with omniscience, and with
potent magic power in their several juris-
dictions. These beings were formed in
the image of man, because man was the
highest type of being known to himself
and because of his subjective method of
thought, which imputed to outside things,
objective realities, his own form and at-
tributes. He could conceive of nature in
no other way. They sometimes, however,
had the power of instant change or trans-
migration into any desired object through
the exercise of peculiar magic power.
The world of the savage was indeed
of small extent, being confineil by his
boundless ignorance to the countries bor-
dering on his own, a little, if any, beyond
his horizon. Beyond this, he knew noth-
ing of the world, nothing of its extent or
structure. This fact is important and
easily verified, and this knowledge aids
in full^ appreciating the teachings of
the philosophy of savage men. Around
and through this limited region traveled
the sun, the moon, the stars, the winds,
the meteors and the fire dragons of the
night, and the fitful auroral cherubim of
the north. All these were to him man-
beings. All trees and plants — the sturdy
oak, the tall pine, and the wild ])arsnip —
were such bemgs rooted to the earth by
the mighty spell of some potent wizard,
and 80, unlike the deer, they do not ordi-
narily travel from place to place. In like
manner, hills ana mountains and the
waters of the earth may sometimes be
thus spellbound by the potency of some
enchantment. Eiuthquakes are some-
times caused bv mountains which, held in
pitiless thi-alldom by the orenda of some
mighty sorcerer, struggle in agony to be
freed. And even the least of these are
reputed to be potent in the exercise of
magic power. But rivers run and rills
and brooks leap and bound over the land,
yet even these in the ripeness of time
may be gripped to silence by the mighty
magic power of the god of winter.
Among all peoples in all times and in
all planes of culture there were persons
whose opinions were orthodox, and there
were also persons whose opinions were
heterodox, and were therefore a constant
protest against the common opinions, the
commonsense of the community; these
were the agnostics of theages, the prophets
of change and reformation.
p]very ethnic body of myths of the
North American Indians forms a circum-
stantial narration of the origin of the
world of the myth-makers and of all
things and creatures therein. From these
narratives it is learned that a world,
earlier than the present, situated usually
above the visible sky, existed from the
beginning of time, in which dwelt the
first or prototypal personages who, hav-
ing the form and the attributes of man,
are herein called man-beings. Each of
these man-beings possessed a magic pow-
er peculiar to himself or herself, by which
he or she was later enabled to perform his
or her functions after the metamorphosis
of all things. The life and manner of liv-
ing of the Indians to-day is patterned after
that of these man-beings in their first
estate. They were the prototypes of the
things which are now on this earth.
This elder world is introduced in a
state of peace and harmony. In the ripe-
ness of time, unrest and discord arose
among these first beings, because the
minds of all, except a very small numl)er,
becoming abnormal, were changed, and
the former state of tranquillity was soon
succeeded by a complete metamorphosis
of all things and beings, or was followed
by commotion, collision, and strife. The
transformed things, the prototypes, were
banished from the sky-land to this world,
whereupon it acquired its present appear-
ance and became peopled by all that is
upon it — man, animals, trees, and plants,
who formerly were man-beings. In some
cosmologies man is brought upon the
scene later and in a peculiar manner.
Each man-being became transformed into
whathisor her attributes required, what
his primal and unchangeable nature de-
manded, and then he or she became in
body what he had been, in a disguised
body, before the transformation. But
those man-beings whose minds did not
change by becoming abnormal, remained
there in the skyland — separate, peculiar,
and immortal. Indeed they are but
shadowy figures passing into the shoreless
sea of oolivion.
Among the tribes of North American
Indians there is a striking similarity in
their cycles of genesis myths, in that
they treat of several regions or worlds.
Sometimes around and above the mid-
world, the habitat of the myth, are placed
970
MYTHOLOGY
[B.A.1L
a group of worlds — one at the east, one
at the south, one at the west, one at the
north, one above, and one below — which,
with the midworld, number seven in all.
Even each of the principal colors is as-
signed to its appropriate world (see Color
symbolism). Hence, to the primitive mind,
the cosmos (if the term be allowed here)
was a universe of man-bein|:s whose activ-
ities constituted the operations of nature.
To it nothing was what it is to scientific
thought. Indeed, it was a world wholly
artificial and fanciful. It was the product
of the fancy of savage and inchoate
thinking, of the commonsense of savage
thought.
So far as is definitely known, the vari-
ous systems of mythology in North Amer-
ica differ much in detail one from an-
other, sui)erficially giving them the as-
pect of fundamental difference of origin
and growth ; but a careful study of them
discloses the fact that they accord with
all great bodies of mythology in a prin-
ciple which underlies alJ, namely, the
principle of change, transmigration, or
metamorphosis of things, through the
exercise of orenda^ or magic power, from
one state, condition, or form, to another.
By this means things have become what
they now are. Strictly, then, creation of
something from nothing has no place in
them. In these mythologies, purporting to
be philosophies, of course, no knowledge
of the real changes which have affected
the environing world is to be sought; but
it is equally true that in them are em-
bedded, like rare fossils and precious
^ems, many most important facts regard-
ing the history of the human mind.
For a definite people in a definite plane
of culture, the myths and the concomi-
tant beliefs resting on them, of their
neighbors, are not usually true, since the
personages and the events narrated in
them have an aspect and an expression
quite different from their own, although
they may in the last analysis express
fundamentally identical thin^ — may in
fact spring from identical motives.
Amon^ the Iroquois and the eastern
Algonquian tribes, the Thunder people,
human in form and mind and usually
four in number, are most important and
staunch friends of man. But in the Lake
region, the N. W. coast to Alaska, and in
the northern drainage of the Mississippi
and Missouri valleys, this conception is
replaced by that of the Thunderbird.
Among the Algonquian and the Iro-
quoian tribes the myths regarding the
so-called fire-dragon are at once striking
and important. Now, the fire-dragon is
in fact the personification of the meteor.
Flying through the air among the stars,
the larger meteors appear against some
midnight sky like fiery reptiles sheathed
in lam Dent fiames. It is believed of them
that they fly from one lake or deep river
to another, in the bottom of which they
are bound by enchantment to dwell, for
should they be permitted to remain on •
the land they would set the world on fire.
The Iroquois applied their name for the
fire-dragon, Might-thrower,* to the lion
when first seen, thus indicating their con-
ception of the fierceness of the nre-dragon.
The Ottawa and Chippewa mimhiziy or
inissibizhuy literally * great lynx,' is their
name for this mythic being. The horned
serpent does not belong here, but the
misnamed tigers of the Peoria and other
Algonquian tribes do. Among the Iro-
ouois it was the deeds of the nre-dragon
that hastened the occasion for the meta-
morphosis of the primal beings.
As early as 1868 Brinton called atten-
tion to the curious circumstance that in
the mythology of those Eskimo who had
had no cont^t with European travelers,
there were no changes or transformations
of the world affecting the aspect and
character of the earth. In this state-
ment he is followed by Boas (1904), who
also claims that the animal myth proper
did not belong originally to Eskimo my-
thology, although there are now in this
mythology some animal myths and weird
tales and accounts regarding monsters and
vampire ghosts and the thaumaturgic
deeds of shamans and wizards. This is
in strong contrast with the content of the
mythologies of the Indian tribes that have
been studied.
In its general aspects the mythology of
the North American Indians has been in-
structively and profitably discussed by
several American anthropologists, who
have greatly advanced tne study and
knowledge of the subject. Among these
are Powell, Brinton, Boas, Curtin,
Fletcher, Matthews, Gushing, Fewkes,
and Dixon.
Powell treated the subject from the
philosophic and evolutional point of view,
and sought to establish successive stages
in the development of the mythologic
thought or concept, making them imputa-
tion, personification, and reification; and
the product he divided into four stages
from the character of the dominant gods
in each, namely, (l) hecastoiheigm, wherein
everything has life, personality, volition,
and design, and the wondrous attributes
of man; (2) zooiheism^ wherein life is not
attributed indiscriminately to lifeless
things, the attributes of man are imputed
to the animals and no line of demarca-
tion is drawn between man and beast,
and all facts and phenomena of nature
are explained in the mythic history of
these zoomorphic gods; (3) phygUheism,
BULL. 80]
MYTHOLOGT
971
wherdn a wide difference is reGogsized
between num and the animals, the powers
and pbenomena of natore are peraonifled,
and the gods are anthropoiporphic; and
(4) jmpchothewm, wherein mental attri-
bntes and moral and soda] characteristics
with which are associated the powers of
natore are personified and deified, and
there arise gods of war, of love, ol rev-
elry, plenty, and fortune. This last stage,
by processes of mental integration, passes
into monothdsm on the one hand and
into pantheism on the oUier. It is fonnd
that Ibeaefoor stages are not thns sncces-
site, bot that they may and do oyerlap,
and that it is best perhaps to call them
pltases rather than stages of growth, in
that they may exist side by side.
Brinton leurnedly calls attention to the
distinctively native American character
of the iBXffe body of myths and tales
r^earsed among the American aboriff-
ines. His staoies include also mncn
etymological analysis of mythic and
l^^ndary names, which is unfortunately
hnely inaccnrate, analysis being appar-
ectiy made to accord with a preconceived
idsa of what it should disclose. This
vUates a large part of hb otherwise
escellent identifications of the obiective
realities (A the agents foond in the my-
tiiologT. He also treats in his instracti ve
iijrle toe various calts of the demiurge,
or the cnltnre-hero or hero-god; but it
H!ust be borne in mind that here the
SHsdled hero-god is not solely or even
cbiefly such in character. In discussing
tke hero-myths of the n. w. Pacific coast
tribes, Boas points out the fact that the
cclture-hero of that area was not always
piompted by altruistic motives in "giv-
iiD the world its present shape and man
l& arts." The hero is credited with
fJiluree as well as with successes; and
it character is an *' egotist pure and
ehiple.'' On the other band, Boas finds
it (be life and chamcter of the Akon-
otian Kanabosho (q. v. ) altruistic monves
atminant. This tendency to displace the
e^oli«lic motives of the mmitive trans-
icrmer with preeminently altruistic ones
iastnHigly marked in tlie character of the
liocnioian Tharonhiawagon (q. v, ), a par-
alel if not a cognate conception with that
ot the Alonqulan 5anabozho. As show-
iag a transitional stase on the war to al-
tmiam, Boos states that the transformer
anong the Kwakiutl brings about the
eumpts lor the benefit ol a friend and not
for himself . While there are some Algon-
q ilan m vths in which Nanabozho appears
as a trickster and teller of falsehoods,
Mongthe Iroquois the trickster and buf-
foon Has been developed alongside that
0^ the demiurge, and is sometlmesreputed
t* be the brother of Death. The mink,
the wolverene, ine blnejay, the raven-
and the coyote are represented as trick,
sters in the myths of many ol the tribes
of the Pacific slope and the N. W. coast.
Matthews, in **Tbe Nicht Chant, a
Ceremony of the Navaho'^ (Mem. Am.
Mus. Nat. Hist., v, 1902), introducea an
interesting account ol the striking sym-
bolism and mythic philosophy of this
remarkable people.
Miss Fletcher, in her many excellent
and instructive writings on the customs
and symbolism of the Indians whom she
has studied, has placed the study ol my-
thology on a scientific basis. In her
**Hako: A Pbwnee Ceremony" (22d
Kep. B. A. £., 1908), Miss Fletcher treats
in masterful manner this interesting
series of rites, which, with marked sym-
pathy and the skill of ripe experience,
she analyzes and interprets in such wise
that the delicately veiled symbolism and
mythic conceptions are clearly brought to
view.
In the Zufii record ol the genesis of the
worlds, as recorded by Cashing (13th
Rep. B. A. £., 1896), Awonawilona, the
Maker and Container of all, alone and un-
perplexed awaiting late, existed before the
Dinning ol time in the darkness which
knew no beginning. Then he conceived
within himself, and projecting his think-
ing into the void of night, around him
evolved fossof increase— mists potent with
growth. Then, in like manner, the All-
container took upon himself the form and
person of the Son, the Father of men, who
thus came to be, and by whose light and
brightening the cloud mists became thick-
ened into water, and thus was made the
world-holding sea. Then from ** hie sub-
stance ol fiesh outdmwn from the surface
of hie person," he made the seetl of two
worlds, fecundating therewith the sea.
By the heat ol his rays there was fomtecl
thereon green scums, which increasing
apace became **The Four-fold Containing
Mother-earth" and the "All-covering
Father-sky." Then from the consorting
together of these twain on the great
world'^aters, terrestrial life wilm gener-
ated, and therefrom J9prang all beings of
earth— men and the creatures, from the
* * Four-fold womb of the World. * * Then
the Earth-mother repulsed the Sky-
father, and growing heavy sank into the
embrace of the waters of the sea, and
thus she separated from the Sky-father,
leaving him in the embrace of the waters
above. Moreover, the Earth -mother
and the Sky-father, like all surpassing
beings, were changeable, metamorphic,
even like smoke in the wind, were
**transmutable at thought, manifesting
themselves in any form at will, as
dancers may by mask-making." Then
972
MYTHOLOGY
[B. A. E.
from the nethennost of the four caves
(wombs) of the world, the seed of men
and the creatures took form and grew;
even as within egcs in warm places worms
quickly form ana appear, and, growing,
soon burst their shells and emerge, as may
hapi^n, birds, tadpoles, or serpents; «o
m|}n and all creatures grew manifoldly
and nniltiplied in many kinds. Thus did
the lowermost world cave become over-
filled with living things, full of unfinished
creatures, crawling like reptiles one over
another in black darkness, thickly crowd-
ing toother and treading one on another,
onespittingon another and doing other in-
decency, in such manner that the murmur-
ings and the lamentations became loud,
and many amidst the growing confusion
sought to escape, growmg wiser and more
manlike. Then Poshaiyankj'a, the fore-
most and wisest of men, arismg from the
nethermost sea, came among men and the
living things, and, pitying them, obtained
egress from that first world cave through
such a dark and narrow path that some
seeing somewhat, crowdmg after, could
not follow him, so eager mightily did they
strive one with another. Alone then did
Poshaiyankya come from one cave to
another into this world, then, island-like,
lying amidst the world waters, vast, wet,
and unstable. He sought and found the
Sun-father and besought him to deliver
the men and the creatures from that neth-
ermost world.
Speaking of the Maidu myths, Dixon
(Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., xvii, pt. 3,
1905) says that from present knowledge
of them, the facts of most interest are the
large measure of system and sequence
found in the mythology of the stock;
the prominence given to the ** creation
episode" and to the events connected
with it ; the strongly crontrasted charac-
ters of the ** Creator*' and the Coyote;
the apparent absence of a myth of migra-
tion, and the diversity shown within the
stock ; that ** beginning with the cre-
ation, a rather systematic chain of events
leads up to the appearance of the ances-
tors of the present Indians, with whose
coming the mythic cycle came to a close.
This mythic era seems to fall into a
number* of |)eriods, with each of which
a group or set of myths has to deal."
During the first era occurs the coming of
Kodoyanp^ (Earth-namer) and Coyote,
the **'di8covery" of this world by tnem,
and the preparation of it for the ''first
people"; next, the "creation" of th«
first people and the makiDg and plant-
ing of the germs of human beings, tb0
Indians (in the form of small woodel
figures), who were to follow; third, the
long i>eriod in which the first people wei^
engaged in violence and conflict, and wer^
finally transformed into the various ani-
mals m the present world. During thifi
period Eartn- maker (or Earth-namer)
sought to destroy Coyote, whoee evil
ways and desires antagonized hi« own.
In this struggle Earth-namer was assiflted
by the Conqueror, who destroyed many
nionsters and evil beines who later
would have endangered the life of laen
who should come on the scene. In the
final period comes the last struggle,
wherem Earth-maker strives in vain ¥iitn
Coyote, his defeat and flight to the Bsgt
synchronously with the coming of the
human race, the Indians, who vprangnp
from the places where the original ptirs
had long before Ijeen bttriedaa snail
wooden figures. Dixon further s^ye:
"Nor is the creation here merely an fpi-
sode— a re-creation after a deluge bronj^t
on by one cause or another— as it is in
gome mythologies. Here the creatior is
a real beginnmg; beyond it, behind it,
there is nothing. In the beginning ras
only the great sea, calm and nnlimitM)^
to which, down from the clear sky, file
Creator came, or on which he and Coyole
were floating in a canoe. Of the ongb
or previous place of abode of either Cmr
tor or Coyot€, the Maidu knew nothing.^
But Dixon adds that the Achomai^i,
northern neighbors of the Maidu, p«ilh
this history much farther back, saying
that at first there were but the shorelaHS
sea and the clear sky; that a tiny cloud
appeared in the sky, which, grodtially
increasing in size, finally attained laige
proportions, then condensed until it be-
came the Silver-Gray Fox, the Creator;
that immediately there arose a fw^wbioh
in turn condensed until it became Coyotu.
See Calumet, Fetuhy Orenda^ Meligion,
The bibliography of the mythology of
the Indians n. of Mexico is very exten-
sive. For an excellent summary of the
literature of the subject, conauit Oban*
berlain in Jour. Am. Folk-lore, xviii, 11,
1905, and the continuous Record of Ameri-
can Folk-lore published in the «arae
magazine. (j. w. b. b,)'
o
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11